JP2023033389A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of improving amusement of games.

SOLUTION: Due to operation means configured to be operable by a player being operated, an identification symbol presentation is performed in which a mode of identification symbols being displayed corresponding to information stored in storage means can be varied. On the basis of a prescribed change condition having been established during a period in which the identification symbol presentation is being performed, a presentation mode of the identification symbol presentation being performed can be varied. In this way, an effect is provided that can improve amusement of games.

SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

COPYRIGHT: (C)2023,JPO&INPIT

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine represented by a pachinko machine.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is a game machine such as a pachinko machine that variably displays symbols based on the winning of a game ball into a starting winning slot, and informs a player of the result of a lottery after the variative display is completed. Further, the lottery executed based on the winning of the game ball into the start prize winning slot can be held and stored a plurality of times, the held patterns corresponding to the number of reserved memories are displayed, and the displayed reserved patterns are displayed. It has been proposed that a holding notice effect capable of notifying information about the corresponding lottery in advance can be executed.

JP 2009-297071 A

However, there is a problem that the interest in the game is reduced.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to solve the above-described problems and the like, and to provide a game that enhances the enjoyment of the game.

In order to achieve this object, the game machine according to claim 1 comprises acquisition means capable of acquiring information, storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, and information stored in the storage means. determining means capable of performing determination based on; display means for displaying identification information for indicating determination results by the determining means; and dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means; an identification pattern display means for displaying an identification pattern corresponding to the information stored in the storage means on the display means, an operation means operable by a player, and the operation means being operated. A period during which the identification symbol effect is executed by the identification symbol effect execution means capable of executing the identification symbol effect that can change the mode of the identification symbol being displayed, and the identification symbol effect execution means. and an effect mode variable means for varying the effect mode of the identification symbol effect being executed based on the establishment of a predetermined change condition.

In the gaming machine according to claim 2, in the gaming machine according to claim 1, the change condition is determined based on the fact that the new information is stored in the storage means during the period in which the identification symbol effect is being executed. is established.

The game machine according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 2, further comprising pre-determination means capable of executing the determination before the information stored in the storage means is determined by the determination means. The identification symbol effect executing means varies the mode of the identification symbol based on the result of determination by the preliminary determination means.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 1, there is an acquisition means capable of acquiring information, a storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, and a determination based on the information stored in the storage means. Executable determination means, display means for displaying identification information for indicating determination results by the determination means, dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means, and storage in the storage means identification pattern display means for causing the display means to display an identification pattern corresponding to the information that is being displayed, the operation means that can be operated by the player, and the operation means that is displayed by operating the operation means. A predetermined change is made during the period in which the identification pattern effect is being executed by the identification pattern effect execution means capable of executing the identification pattern effect that allows the mode of the identification pattern to be varied, and the identification pattern effect execution means. and an effect mode varying means for varying the effect mode of the identification symbol effect being executed based on the establishment of the condition.

Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

According to the gaming machine of claim 2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine of claim 1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the change condition is established based on the fact that the new information is stored in the storage means during the period in which the identification symbol effect is being executed.

Therefore, since new information is stored, the mode of presentation is changed, so that there is an effect that it is possible to raise expectations for the storage of new information.

According to the gaming machine of claim 3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine of claim 2, the following effects are achieved. That is, it has a preliminary determination means capable of executing the determination before the information stored in the storage means is determined by the determination means, and the identification symbol effect executing means is the preliminary determination means. The mode of the identification pattern is varied based on the result of discrimination by the .

Therefore, it is possible to recognize the result of determination in advance by the aspect of the identification pattern that is changed, and there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment; FIG. 1 is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a front perspective view of an operation device. (a) is a partial front view of the pachinko machine, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine taken along line VIb-VIb of FIG. 6(a). (a) is a partial front view of the pachinko machine, and (b) is a partial sectional view of the pachinko machine taken along line VIIb-VIIb of FIG. 7(a). FIG. 7 is a front perspective view of the operation device as viewed in the direction of arrow VIII in FIG. 6; FIG. 8 is a front perspective view of the operation device as viewed in the direction of arrow IX in FIG. 7; It is a front perspective view of an operation device. It is a back perspective view of an operation device. It is a front exploded perspective view of an operation device. It is a back exploded perspective view of an operation device. (a) is a front view of the tilting device, (b) is a side view of the tilting device viewed in the direction of arrow XIVb in FIG. FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view of the tilting device on line XIVc; It is a front exploded perspective view of a tilting device. Fig. 10 is a rear exploded perspective view of the lid of the tilting device; (a) is a front view of the driving device, and (b) is a side view of the driving device viewed in the direction of arrow XVIIb in FIG. 17(a). It is a front exploded perspective view of a drive. It is a front exploded perspective view of a transmission shaft. 18. (a) is a side view of the left disc cam as viewed in the direction of arrow XXa in FIG. 18, and (b) is a side view of the left disc cam as viewed in the direction of arrow XXb in FIG. (a) and (b) are front views of a release member and a rotary pawl member. FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); FIG. 39 is a partial cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXXIX-XXXIX of FIG. 38; FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); (a) is a side view of a slide claw member in a second embodiment, (b) is a side view of a rotary plate member, and (c) is a side view of a releasing member. (a) and (b) are side views of a release member, a rotary plate member, and a slide claw member. FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line corresponding to line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line corresponding to line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line corresponding to line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); It is a side view of the tilting device in 3rd Embodiment. (a) and (b) are side views of the operation device. (a) and (b) are side views of the operation device. It is a side view of the tilting device in 4th Embodiment. (a) and (b) are side views of the operation device. (a) and (b) are side views of the operation device. FIG. 11 is an exploded front perspective view of an operation device according to a fifth embodiment; It is an exploded rear perspective view of the operation device. It is an exploded front perspective view of a lower frame member and a vibration device. (a) is a side view of the lower frame member, (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the lower frame member taken along line LIXb-LIXb in FIG. 59(a), and (c) is FIG. 59(a). is a partial top view of the lower frame member as viewed in the direction of the arrow LIXc. 59(a) and 59(b) are sectional views of the vibrating device taken along line LXa-LXa of FIG. 59(a). 59(a) and 59(b) are cross-sectional views of the transmission device 5410 and the housing member 5430 taken along line LIXb-LIXb in FIG. 59(a). It is an exploded front perspective view of a drive. (a) is a front perspective view of a right disc cam, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the right disc cam. It is a front exploded perspective view of a transmission shaft. (a) is a front view of the right disc cam viewed in the direction of arrow LXVa in FIG. 62, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the right disc cam taken along line LXVb-LXVb in FIG. c) is a cross-sectional view of the right disc cam taken along line LXVc-LXVc of FIG. 65(a). 66(a) is a front view of the right disc cam viewed in the direction of arrow LXVa in FIG. 62, and (b) is a sectional view of the right disc cam taken along line LXVIb-LXVIb in FIG. 66(a). 67(a) is a cross-sectional view of the operation device taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a), and (b) is a partial rear view of the operation device as viewed in the direction of arrow LXVIIb in FIG. 67(a); is. 68(a) is a cross-sectional view of the operation device taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a), and (b) is a partial rear view of the operation device viewed in the direction of arrow LXVIIIb in FIG. 68(a); is. It is an exploded front perspective view of a drive device in a sixth embodiment. FIG. 4 is a front exploded perspective view of a disk member, a ring member and a second transmission member of the left disk cam; FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line corresponding to line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line corresponding to line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line corresponding to line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); (a) is a front view of a right disc cam in a seventh embodiment, and (b) is a rear view of the right disc cam. 74(a) is a cross-sectional view of the right disc cam taken along line LXXVa-LXXVa in FIG. 74(a), and (b) is a partial side view of the right disc cam viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVb in FIG. 74(a). is. (a) is a front view of the ring member, (b) is a rear view of the ring member, and (c) is a side view of the ring member viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVIc in FIG. 76(a). (a) is a front view of an engaging member, and (b) is a side view of the engaging member as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVIIb in FIG. 77(a). (a) is a front view of the right disc cam, (b) is a side view of the right disc cam viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVIIIb in FIG. 78 (a), and (c) is a right disc cam. 78(d) is a side view of the right disc cam as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVIIId in FIG. 78(c); (e) is a front view of the right disc cam; (f) [ Fig. 78 ] is a side view of the right disk cam as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVIIIf in Fig. 78(e) ; 7(a) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operation device taken along the line corresponding to line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6. FIG. 7(a) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operation device taken along the line corresponding to line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6. FIG. FIG. 7 is a partial cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line corresponding to line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6; 7(a) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operation device taken along the line corresponding to line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6. FIG. 7(a) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operation device taken along the line corresponding to line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6. FIG. FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device on a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6; FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device on a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6; It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 8th Embodiment. 1 is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine showing a state in which an inner frame is opened (deployed) with respect to an outer frame; FIG. 1 is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine showing a state in which an inner frame is opened from an outer frame and a back pack is opened from the inner frame (deployed); FIG. 1 is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine showing a state in which an inner frame is closed with respect to an outer frame and a front frame is opened (deployed); FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine with a front frame removed; FIG. FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame, in which constituent members arranged below the window portion of the front frame are shown exploded; FIG. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame in which constituent members arranged below the window portion of the front frame are shown exploded; (a) is an exploded rear perspective view of a front frame, and (b) is a front perspective view of a movable binding member in which a released state and a fixed state of the movable binding member are shown side by side. (a) is a partial rear view of the front frame showing the lower left corner of the front frame, and (b) is a partial sectional view of the front frame taken along the line XCIVb-XCIVb of FIG. 94(a). (a) is a partial rear view of the front frame showing the lower left corner of the front frame, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the front frame taken along line XCVb-XCVb of FIG. 95(a). (a) is a rear schematic view schematically illustrating the movable binding member and the harness, (b) is a schematic top view of FIG. 96(a), and (c) is the movable binding member and the harness. 96(d) is a schematic top view of FIG. 96(c). FIG. (a) And (b) is a front frame which illustrates a binding movable member and a harness typically, an inner frame, a binding movable member, and the upper surface schematic diagram of a harness. It is a front view of a passage formation unit. It is an enlarged front view of a first bending region. It is a front exploded perspective view of a front frame. It is a rear exploded perspective view of a front frame. It is an exploded front perspective view of a front frame. It is an exploded back perspective view of a front frame. It is an exploded front perspective view of a front frame. FIG. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the right panel unit; It is an exploded rear perspective view of the right panel unit. It is a front view of a support plate part. It is an exploded front perspective view of the heavy plate unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the heavy plate unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the heavy plate unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the heavy plate unit. 112(a) is a side view of the right panel unit, and (b) is a partially enlarged sectional view of the right panel unit taken along line CXIIb-CXIIb of FIG. 112(a). 113(a) is a side view of the right panel unit, and (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the right panel unit taken along line CXIIIb-CXIIIb of FIG. 113(a). (a) is a side view of the right panel unit, (b) is a rear view of the right panel unit, and (c) is a side view of the right panel unit. 115(a) is a schematic side view of the light guide member, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the light guide member taken along line CXVb-CXVb of FIG. 115(a). It is a partial rear view of the right panel unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the upper panel unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the upper panel unit. FIG. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of an upper frame member; It is an exploded rear perspective view of an upper frame member. 1 is an exploded front perspective view of a speaker assembly; FIG. Fig. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the speaker assembly; (a) is a rear view of the front assembly, and (b) is a front view of the rear assembly. (a) is a rear view of the speaker assembly, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the speaker assembly taken along line CXXIVb-CXXIVb of FIG. 124(a), and (c) is a view of FIG. FIG. 124D is a top view of the speaker assembly viewed in the direction of arrow CXXIVc, and FIG. 124D is a partial bottom view of the speaker assembly viewed in the direction of arrow CXXIVd in FIG. 124(a) is a partial cross-sectional view of the front side assembly, the rear side assembly, the upper frame member, the body frame and the upper side plate member taken along the line CXXVa-CXXVa of FIG. 124(a); is a partial cross-sectional view of the front side assembly, the rear side assembly, the upper frame member, the body frame and the upper side plate member taken along line CXXVb-CXXVb of FIG. It is an exploded front perspective view of a game board and an inner frame. (a) is a back view of the game board, and (b) is a front view of the inner frame. 127(a) and 127(b) are cross-sectional views of the inner frame taken along line CXXVIIIa-CXXVIIIa in FIG. 127(b). (a) and (b) are side views of the board support device and the game board, schematically showing the board support device and the game board. (a) is a front perspective view of a board support device, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the board support device. (a) is a front perspective view of a board support device, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the board support device. It is an exploded front perspective view of a board support device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the board support device. (a) and (b) are side views of the board support device. (a) and (b) are side views of the board support device. 87 is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine taken along line CXXXVI-CXXXVI of FIG. 86; FIG. 87 is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine taken along line CXXXVI-CXXXVI of FIG. 86; FIG. 87 is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine taken along line CXXXVI-CXXXVI of FIG. 86; FIG. 87 is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine taken along line CXXXVI-CXXXVI of FIG. 86; FIG. It is an exploded front perspective view of an outer frame and an inner frame. It is an exploded rear perspective view of an outer frame and an inner frame. (a) is a front perspective view of the ball shooting unit, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the ball shooting unit. (a) and (b) are exploded front perspective views of the ball launching unit. (a) to (c) are front views of the ball launching unit showing in chronological order how the ball is delivered by the ball delivery device. 1 is a front perspective view of a metal member for cutting; FIG. 146(a) is a front view of the ball shooting unit, and (b) is a partial top view of the ball shooting unit viewed in the direction of arrow CXLVIb in FIG. 146(a). 147(a) is a front view of the ball shooting unit, and (b) is a front perspective view of the cutting metal member showing the relationship between the thread and the cutting metal member in the state of FIG. 147(a). FIG. 10 is a partial front view of the ball launching unit, inner rail and outer rail after launching the ball; It is a front view of a game board. It is an exploded front perspective view of the production operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the production operation unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the production operation unit. It is a front view of a petal motion device. FIG. 154 is a cross-sectional view of the petal motion device taken along line CLIV-CLIV of FIG. 153; Fig. 2 is an exploded front perspective view of the petal motion device; It is an exploded rear perspective view of the petal motion device. (a) is an exploded front perspective view of a petal, a flat plate member and a slide member, and (b) is an exploded rear perspective view of the petal, the flat plate member and the slide member. It is a front view of a slit member. It is a front perspective view of a slit member. Fig. 2 is a front perspective view of a slide member and a drive motor; (a) and (b) are rear perspective views of a slide member and a drive motor. FIG. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the central shaft rotating device and loose fitting device; FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of the central shaft rotating device and loose fitting device; It is a back perspective view of a petal motion device, a drive-side arm member, and a driven-side arm member. Fig. 3 is a front perspective view of the back plate; It is an exploded front perspective view of a back plate, a side base material, and a 2nd production|presentation member. It is an exploded front perspective view of a drive-side arm member, a slide plate, and a second effect member. It is a front view of a petal motion device, an advancing/retreating motion unit, and a back plate. It is a rear view of a petal motion device and an advancing/retreating motion unit. It is a front view of a petal motion device, an advancing/retreating motion unit, and a back plate. It is a rear view of a petal motion device and an advancing/retreating motion unit. It is a front view of a petal motion device, an advancing/retreating motion unit, and a back plate. It is a rear view of a petal motion device and an advancing/retreating motion unit. (a) is a front perspective view of the petal motion device, (b) is a front view of the petal motion device, and (c) is a transparent front view of the petal motion device with the central shaft rotating device omitted. It is a figure and (d) is a front view of a slit member and a rotating plate. (a) is a front view of a rotating plate, (b) is a rear view of a petal motion device, (c) is a rear view of a petal and a flat plate member, and (d) is a petal motion device. is a rear perspective view of the. (a) is a front perspective view of the petal motion device, (b) is a front view of the petal motion device, and (c) is a transparent front view of the petal motion device with the central shaft rotating device omitted. It is a figure and (d) is a front view of a slit member and a rotating plate. (a) is a front view of a rotating plate, (b) is a rear view of a petal motion device, (c) is a rear view of a petal and a flat plate member, and (d) is a petal motion device. is a rear perspective view of the. (a) is a front perspective view of the petal motion device, (b) is a front view of the petal motion device, and (c) is a transparent front view of the petal motion device with the central shaft rotating device omitted. It is a figure and (d) is a front view of a slit member and a rotating plate. (a) is a front view of a rotating plate, (b) is a rear view of a petal motion device, (c) is a rear view of a petal and a flat plate member, and (d) is a petal motion device. is a rear perspective view of the. FIG. 20 is a front perspective view of a passage forming unit in a ninth embodiment; It is a back perspective view of a passage formation unit. Fig. 2 is a front view of the ball launching unit; Fig. 2 is a front view of the ball launching unit; FIG. 20 is a front perspective view of a passage forming unit according to a tenth embodiment; It is a front perspective view of a passage forming unit. It is a front perspective view of a passage forming unit. It is a front view of an inner frame and a dish passage formation member in an 11th embodiment. Fig. 3 is a partially enlarged front perspective view of an outer rail; Fig. 3 is a partially enlarged front perspective view of an outer rail; (a) and (b) are partial front enlarged views of a foul ball passage. It is a partial front enlarged view of a foul ball passage. FIG. 32 is a rear perspective view of a loose fitting device according to a twelfth embodiment; (a) and (b) are front views of the petal motion device. (a) and (b) are partially enlarged front views of a slit member and a slide member. It is a front view of a petal motion device. (a) and (b) are front views of the petal motion device. It is a front view of a petal motion device. FIG. 21 is a partially enlarged front view of a slit member and a slide member in another example of the twelfth embodiment; 4 is a partially enlarged front view of a slit member and a slide member; FIG. FIG. 32 is a front perspective view of an operation device according to a thirteenth embodiment; It is a front perspective view of an operation device. (a) and (b) are front perspective views of the operation device. (a) is a front view of the operation device, (b) is a side view of the operation device as viewed in the direction of arrow CCIIIb in FIG. 203(a), and (c) is a bottom view of the operation device, 203(d) is a partial cross-sectional view of the operation device along line CCIIId-CCIIId in FIG. 203(a), and FIG. 203(e) is a cross-sectional view of the operation device along line CCIIIe-CCIIIe in FIG. 203(a). 87(a) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the inner frame in the fourteenth embodiment taken along line CXXXVI-CXXXVI in FIG. 86. FIG. (a) is a partial rear view of the front frame in the fifteenth embodiment, and (b) and (c) are rear views of the fraud detection device. 206(a) is a partial rear view of the right panel unit according to the sixteenth embodiment, and (b) schematically represents an upward recess recessed in the light guide member in region CCVIb of FIG. 206(a). FIG. 206(c) is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member, and FIG. 206(c) is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member schematically showing a downward concave portion recessed in the light guide member in the region CCVIc of FIG. 206(a); 206(d) is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member schematically showing a downward concave portion provided in the light guide member in the region CCVId of FIG. 206(a), and (e) is FIG. FIG. 11 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member schematically showing an upward concave portion provided in the light guide member in the area CCVIe of (a); It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 17th Embodiment. 1 is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine; FIG. 1 is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine; FIG. 1 is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is an exploded back perspective view of a front frame. It is an exploded front perspective view of a front frame. It is an exploded front perspective view of a front frame. It is an exploded front view of a front frame. 208(a) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operation device taken along line CCXVa-CCXVa in FIG. 207. FIG. 208(a) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operation device taken along line CCXVa-CCXVa in FIG. 207. FIG. It is a front perspective view of an operation device. It is a back perspective view of an operation device. It is an exploded front perspective view of the operation device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the operation device. It is an exploded front perspective view of the operation device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the operation device. (a) is a front perspective view of a left front cover and a right front cover, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the left front cover and the right front cover. It is an exploded front perspective view of a lower tray unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the lower tray unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a lower tray unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the lower tray unit. (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of a right reinforcing rib, and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of a left reinforcing rib. (a) is a top view of a lower tray unit, and (b) is a front view of the lower tray unit. (a) is a bottom view of the lower tray unit, and (b) is a rear view of the lower tray unit. (a) is a right view of the lower tray unit viewed in the direction of arrow L, and (b) is a left view of the lower tray unit viewed in the direction of arrow R. FIG. It is a rear view of a lower tray unit. (a) is a cross-sectional view of the lower tray unit along line CCXXXIIIa-CCXXXIIIa in FIG. 229(a), and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the lower tray unit along line CCXXXIIIb-CCXXXIIIb in FIG. 229(a); 229(c) is a cross-sectional view of the lower tray unit along line CCXXXIIIc-CCXXXIIIc in FIG. 229(a). FIG. 229(a) is a cross-sectional view of the lower tray unit taken along line CCXXXIV-CCXXXIV of FIG. 229(a); It is an exploded front perspective view of a front frame. It is an exploded back perspective view of a front frame. It is an exploded front perspective view of the presentation effect device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the presentation device. It is an exploded front perspective view of the presentation effect device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the presentation device. (a) is a front view of a rear unit, and (b) is a front view of an electrical board. It is an exploded front perspective view of the rear unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the rear unit. 241 (a) is a partial cross-sectional view of the partitioning member, the electrical board, the back support member, and the acoustic device along line CCXLIVa-CCXLIVa in FIG. 241; It is a partial sectional view of a decoration board, a back support member, and an acoustic device. (a) is a partial cross-sectional view of the partitioning member, the decorative substrate, the back support member, and the acoustic device along line CCXLVa-CCXLVa in FIG. 241; It is a partial sectional view of a decoration board, a back support member, and an acoustic device. 241 (a) is a partial cross-sectional view of the partitioning member, the electrical board, the back support member, and the acoustic device along line CCXLVIa-CCXLVIa in FIG. 241; It is a partial sectional view of a decoration board, a back support member, and an acoustic device. It is a side view schematic diagram of a performance effect device. FIG. 241 is a cross-sectional view of the rear unit taken along line CCXLVIII-CCXLVIII of FIG. 241(a); It is an exploded front perspective view of a front side unit. It is an exploded back perspective view of a front side unit. (a) is a front view of the partitioning unit and the guided unit, and (b) is a rear view of the partitioning unit and the guided unit. (a) is a front view of the partition unit, and (b) is a rear view of the partition unit. (a) is a front view of the plate guiding unit, and (b) is a rear view of the plate guiding unit. (a) is a sectional view of the partitioning unit and the guided unit along the line CCLIVa-CCLIVa in FIG. 251(b), and (b) is a partitioning unit and the guided unit along the line CCLIVb-CCLIVb in FIG. 251(b). 251(c) is a cross-sectional view of the partitioning unit and the guided unit taken along line CCLIVc-CCLIVc in FIG. 251(b). FIG. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the partitioning unit and the guided unit; FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of the partitioning unit and the guided unit; (a) is a front view of the optical transmission unit and the outer frame member, and (b) is a rear view of the optical transmission unit and the outer frame member. (a) is an exploded front perspective view of the optical transmission unit and the outer frame member, and (b) is an exploded rear perspective view of the optical transmission unit and the outer frame member. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the optical transmission unit; FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of the optical transmission unit; FIG. (a) is a front view of a transparent tubular member, (b) is a top view of the transparent tubular member, (c) is a bottom view of the transparent tubular member, and (d) is a It is a right view of the transparent tubular member as viewed in the direction of arrow L, and (e) is a rear view of the transparent tubular member. (a) is a front view of an optical transmission unit, (b) is a top view of the optical transmission unit, (c) is a bottom view of the optical transmission unit, and (d) is an optical transmission unit. 1 is a right side view as viewed in the direction of arrow L, and (e) is a rear view of the optical transmission unit. FIG. 242 is a partial cross-sectional view of the rear unit, acoustic device, and optical transmission unit taken along line CCLXIII-CCLXIII in FIG. 241; (a) is a schematic front view schematically illustrating the arrangement of a first lighting unit, and (b) is a schematic front view schematically illustrating the arrangement of light visually recognized through the optical transmission unit. . It is an exploded front perspective view of a front frame. It is an exploded front perspective view of a horizontal effect device. It is an exploded front perspective view of a horizontal effect device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the horizontal effect device. (a) is a front view of a base member and an electrical board, (b) is a left side view of the base member, (c) is a right side view of the base member, and (d) is a 269(e) is a bottom view of the base member, and (f) is a cross-sectional view of the base member and the illumination board taken along line CCLXIXf-CCLXIXf in FIG. 269(a). FIG. FIG. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the covering unit; FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of the covering unit; (a) is a front perspective view of a light receiving member, (b) is a front view of the light receiving member, and (c) is a front perspective view of the light receiving member. 272(a) is a partially enlarged view of the light receiving member in range CCLXXIIIa of FIG. 272(a), and (b) is a partially enlarged view of the light receiving member in range CCLXXIIIb of FIG. 272(b). (a) is a back perspective view of the light receiving member, (b) is a back view of the light receiving member, and (c) is a back perspective view of the light receiving member. 274(a) is a cross-sectional view of the lateral effect device taken along line CCLXXVa-CCLXXVa in FIG. 274(b), and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the light receiving member taken along line CCLXXVb-CCLXXVb in FIG. 274(b). 4 is an exploded front perspective view of a flat plate member, a curved plate member and a cover member; FIG. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of a flat plate member, a curved plate member and a cover member; FIG. FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of a flat plate member, a curved plate member, and a cover member; FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of a flat plate member, a curved plate member, and a cover member; (a) is a cross-sectional view of the base member, the illumination board, and the light-receiving member taken along line CCLXXXa-CCLXXXa of FIG. 272(b); (b) is a base member taken along line CCLXXXb-CCLXXXb of FIG. 272(c) is a cross-sectional view of the base member, the decorative substrate and the light receiving member taken along the line CCLXXXc-CCLXXXc in FIG. 272(b). FIG. 280(a) is a schematic diagram of a base member, an electrical board, and a light-receiving member, schematically showing the cross section of FIG. 280(a). FIG. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 18th Embodiment. 1 is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine; FIG. 284(a) is a cross-sectional view of the rendering device taken along line CCLXXXIVa-CCLXXXIVa in FIG. 282, and (b) is a schematic diagram of the illumination board of the rendering device viewed in the direction of arrow CCLXXXIVb in FIG. 284(a). FIG. 30 is a side view of the cover in the nineteenth embodiment; FIG. 230 is a cross-sectional view of the lower tray unit in the twentieth embodiment taken along line CCXXXIIIb-CCXXXIIIb of FIG. 229; FIG. 22 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame, operation device, and lower tray unit in the twenty-first embodiment; It is an exploded front perspective view of a lower tray unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the lower tray unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a vibration device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the vibration device. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of a vibration motor and a covering member; FIG. FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of a vibration motor and a covering member; It is a front perspective view of a covering member. 4 is a front view of the covering cover member; FIG. 296(a) is a top view of the lower tray unit, and (b) is a sectional view of the lower tray unit along line CCXCVIb-CCXCVIb in FIG. 296(a). FIG. It is a rear view of a lower tray unit. FIG. 296(a) is a cross-sectional view of the lower tray unit taken along line CCXCVIII-CCXCVIII of FIG. 296(a); 299(a) is a schematic partial top view of the lower tray unit schematically illustrating the lower tray unit, and (b) is a partial schematic side view of the lower tray unit viewed in the direction of arrow CCXCIXb in FIG. 299(a). be. 300(a) is a schematic partial top view of the lower tray unit schematically illustrating the lower tray unit, and (b) is a partial schematic side view of the lower tray unit viewed in the direction of arrow CCCb in FIG. 300(a). be. It is a partial upper surface schematic diagram of the lower tray unit which illustrates a lower tray unit typically. FIG. 22 is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine in a twenty-second embodiment; It is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine showing a state in which the front frame is opened (deployed) with respect to the inner frame. 1 is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine with a front frame removed; FIG. It is an exploded front perspective view of a game board, a center frame, a lottery unit and an operation unit. It is an exploded back perspective view of the game board, the center frame, the lottery unit and the operation unit. (a) is an enlarged front view of the game board in area A5a of FIG. 302, and FIG. 307(b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the game board taken along line CCCVIIb-CCCVIIb of FIG. 307(a). It is an exploded front perspective view of a game board, an outer edge member, and a metal plate-shaped member. It is an exploded back perspective view of a game board, an outer edge member, and a metal plate-shaped member. It is an exploded front perspective view of a lottery unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the lottery unit. (a) is a side view of the engaging member viewed from the rotation axis direction, (b) is a front view of the engaging member as viewed in the direction of arrow CCCXIIb in FIG. c) is a cross-sectional view of the engaging member taken along line CCCXIIc-CCCXIIc in FIG. 312(b); Fig. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the body member, engagement member and drive unit; (a) and (b) are side views of an electric accessory, an engaging member, and an electromagnetic solenoid. 312(a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the lottery unit along the line corresponding to the CCCXIIc-CCCXIIc line in FIG. 312(b). (a) is a top view of the operation unit, and (b) is a side view of the operation unit viewed in the direction of arrow L in FIG. 302. FIG. It is a rear view of a game board and an operation unit. FIG. 303 is a partial cross-sectional view of the game board and the operation unit taken along line CCCXVIII-CCCXVIII of FIG. 302; FIG. 4 is a front view of the operating unit; FIG. 4 is a front view of the operating unit; FIG. 4 is a front view of the operating unit; FIG. 4 is a front view of the operating unit; FIG. 4 is a front view of the operating unit; 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the operating unit; FIG. Fig. 3 is a front perspective view of the first operating unit; Fig. 10 is a rear perspective view of the first operating unit; 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the first motion unit; FIG. FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of the first operation unit; Fig. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the front cover; Fig. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front cover; 331(a) is a front view of an electrical board and a board fixing plate, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the electrical board and the board fixing board taken along line CCCXXXXIb-CCCXXXXIb of FIG. 331(a). 332(a) is a front view of the decorative substrate and the substrate fixing plate, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the decorative substrate and the substrate fixing plate taken along the line CCCXXXIIb-CCCXXXIIb of FIG. 332(a). It is an exploded front perspective view of a front side unit and a rear side unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a front side unit and a rear side unit. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of a front unit and a rear unit of the first operation unit; FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of a front unit and a rear unit of the first operation unit; FIG. FIG. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of a first displacement member; FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of a first displacement member; 319(a) is a front view of the front unit, (b) is a rear view of the front unit, and (c) is a partial cross-sectional view of the first operation unit taken along line CCCXXXIXc-CCCXXXIXc in FIG. 319(a) is a front view of the front unit, (b) is a rear view of the front unit, and (c) is a partial cross-sectional view of the first operation unit taken along line CCCXXXIXc-CCCXXXIXc in FIG. 319(a) is a front view of the front unit, (b) is a rear view of the front unit, and (c) is a partial cross-sectional view of the first operation unit taken along line CCCXXXIXc-CCCXXXIXc in FIG. 319(a) is a front view of the front unit, (b) is a rear view of the front unit, and (c) is a partial cross-sectional view of the first operation unit taken along line CCCXXXIXc-CCCXXXIXc in FIG. 319(a) is a front view of the front unit, (b) is a rear view of the front unit, and (c) is a partial cross-sectional view of the first operation unit taken along line CCCXXXIXc-CCCXXXIXc in FIG. 319(a) is a front view of the front unit, (b) is a rear view of the front unit, and (c) is a partial cross-sectional view of the first operation unit taken along line CCCXXXIXc-CCCXXXIXc in FIG. It is a rear view of a front side unit. 344(a) is a cross-sectional view of the first operation unit taken along line CCCXLVIa-CCCXLVIa of FIG. 339(a), and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the first operation unit taken along line CCCXLVIb-CCCXLVIb of FIG. 344(a); be. (a) and (b) are front views of the first operation unit. FIG. 4 is a front view of the first operating unit; (a) and (b) are front views of the first operation unit. (a) and (b) are front views of the first operation unit. (a) and (b) are front views of the first operation unit. (a) and (b) are front views of the first operation unit. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the pin-equipped gear and the same phase member, (b) is a front perspective view of the pin-equipped gear and the same phase member on the left, and the pin-equipped gear and the same phase member on the right. It is a rear perspective view. FIG. 11 is an exploded front perspective view of a second displacement member; FIG. 11 is an exploded rear perspective view of the second displacement member; (a) and (b) are rear views of the rear unit. (a) and (b) are rear views of the rear unit. It is a rear view of a rear side unit. FIG. 356(a) is a cross-sectional view of the rear unit taken along line CCCLIX-CCCLIX of FIG. 356(a); FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram showing the rotation angles of the pinned gear and the in-phase member with reference to the initial angle; FIG. 4 is a front exploded perspective view of a second operation unit and a rear case; FIG. 11 is a front exploded perspective view of the second operation unit; FIG. 11 is a rear exploded perspective view of the second operation unit; It is a front exploded perspective view of a production unit. It is a back exploded perspective view of a production|presentation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the rotating body of the production unit. It is an exploded back perspective view of the rotating body of the production unit. It is a rear view of a 1st rotating member. (a) is a front exploded perspective view of a support portion, and (b) is a front exploded perspective view of a second support portion. (a) is a rear exploded perspective view of a support portion, and (b) is a rear exploded perspective view of a second support portion. It is a front exploded perspective view of an upper cover part and a box-shaped part. It is a front exploded perspective view of an upper cover part and a box-shaped part. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the box-shaped portion, upper layer transmission mechanism, and lower layer transmission mechanism; FIG. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the box-shaped portion, upper layer transmission mechanism, and lower layer transmission mechanism; FIG. (a) is a top view of an upper lid, a box-shaped portion, an upper layer transmission mechanism, and a lower layer transmission mechanism, and (b) is a front view of the upper lid, the box-shaped portion, an upper layer transmission mechanism, and a lower layer transmission mechanism. (a) is a front view of the first rotating member, (b) is a top view of the first rotating member as viewed in the direction of arrow D in (a) of FIG. 376, and (c) is the first rotating member. 376(d) is a top view of the first rotating member as viewed in the direction of arrow D in FIG. 376(c). (a) is a front view of the first rotating member, (b) is a top view of the first rotating member as viewed in the direction of arrow D in (a) of FIG. 377, and (c) is the first rotating member. 377(d) is a top view of the first rotating member as viewed in the direction of arrow D in FIG. 377(c). (a) is a front view of the first rotating member, (b) is a top view of the first rotating member as viewed in the direction of arrow D in (a) of FIG. 378, and (c) is the first rotating member. 378(d) is a top view of the first rotating member as viewed in the direction of arrow D in FIG. 378(c). (a) is a front view of the first rotating member, (b) is a top view of the first rotating member as viewed in the direction of arrow D in (a) of FIG. 379, and (c) is the first rotating member. 379(d) is a top view of the first rotating member as viewed in the direction of arrow D in FIG. 379(c). (a) is a front view of the effect unit, (b) is a top view of the effect unit viewed in the direction of arrow D in FIG. 380(a), and (c) is a front view of the effect unit, (d) is a top view of the production unit as viewed in the direction of arrow D in FIG. 380(c). (a) is a front view of the effect unit, (b) is a top view of the effect unit viewed in the direction of arrow D in FIG. 381(a), and (c) is a front view of the effect unit, (d) is a top view of the production unit viewed in the direction of arrow D in FIG. 381(c). It is a front view of an annular front cover and a rotating body. FIG. 21 is a top schematic view schematically showing a first rotating member in the twenty-third embodiment; FIG. 32 is a rear view of the front unit in the twenty-fourth embodiment; 344(a) is a cross-sectional view of the first operation unit in the twenty-fifth embodiment taken along line CCCXLVIa-CCCXLVIa in FIG. 339(a), and (b) is a cross-sectional view along line CCCXLVIb-CCCXLVIb in FIG. 1 is a cross-sectional view of the first operating unit on the line corresponding to FIG. (a) and (b) are front views of a displacement device in a twenty-sixth embodiment. (a) and (b) are rear views of the rear unit in the twenty-seventh embodiment. It is a rear view of a rear side unit. (a) is a diagram schematically showing a display area of a third symbol display device in the first control example, and (b) is a display mode displayed by the third symbol display device in the first control example. It is a schematic diagram showing an example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of a back mode with a low expectation of a variable probability state among the back modes displayed by the third symbol display device in the first control example; It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of the back mode with high expectation of probability variation state among the back modes displayed with the 3rd design display apparatus in the 1st control example. Of the back modes displayed by the third symbol display device in the first control example, an example of the display mode of the back mode in which at least the continuation of the variable probability state is confirmed until all the held balls at the start of fluctuation are digested is shown. It is a diagram. It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode at the time of the start of the variable probability continuation suggestion production|presentation displayed with the 3rd design display apparatus in a 1st control example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of a low-expectation attack pattern in the variable probability continuation suggestion effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the first control example; In the variable probability continuation suggestion effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the control example, it is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of a high-expectation attack pattern. (a) and (b) are diagrams schematically showing the transition of the state after the end of the probability variable jackpot in the first control example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode during execution of a press stop effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the first control example, and (b) is a third symbol in the first control example. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when the player performs the first operation (pressing) on the PUSH button during execution of the press stop effect displayed on the display device; (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode during execution of a chance charge fan effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the first control example, and (b) is a diagram showing the third In the symbol display device, it is a diagram showing an example of a display mode during execution of the chance charge effect which is executed after the stop of the chance charge symbol. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode at the end of the chance charge effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the first control example, and (b) is a third symbol in the first control example. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when a spirit gauge is consumed, which is displayed on the display device; (a) to (c) are diagrams schematically showing changes over time in the effect mode during the execution of the variable display effect in which the pressing stop effect is set in the first control example. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode during execution of an interruption continuous hit effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the first control example. (a) is a diagram schematically showing an output mode of sound while the PUSH button is repeatedly hit during the execution of the interruption repeated hit effect in the first control example; (b) is the first control; FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between execution timings of repeated hitting operations and monster subtraction numbers during execution of repeated interrupt effects in the example. (a) to (c) are diagrams schematically showing changes over time in the presentation mode of the variable display presentation in which the continuous interrupt presentation is set in the first control example. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode of a pending collective change effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the first control example. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of the display mode when the player presses the PUSH button during execution of the pending collective change effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the first control example. be. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine in the first control example. FIG. 4 is a diagram schematically showing configurations of various counters in the first control example; (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main controller in the first control example, (b) is the block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the main controller in the first control example. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the special symbol jackpot random number table in the first control example, and (b) schematically shows the specified contents of the normal winning random number table in the first control example. FIG. 11C is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the falling lottery table in the first control example; (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a jackpot type selection table set in the ROM of the main controller in the first control example, and (b) is a special figure 1 jackpot table in the first control example. It is a diagram schematically showing the stipulated content, (c) is a diagram schematically showing the stipulated content of the special figure 2 jackpot table in the first control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the main controller in the first control example, (b) constitutes the variation pattern selection table in the first control example It is the figure which showed typically the content of specification of the table for normal. It is the figure which showed typically the defined content of the table for probability variation / time reduction which comprises the variation pattern selection table in a 1st control example. FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing a state transition method in the first control example; (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio ramp control device in the first control example; (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio ramp control device in the first control example; be. FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the back mode lottery table in the first control example; (a) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the hold change lottery table in the first control example, and (b) schematically shows the specified contents of the change point calculation table in the first control example. It is a diagram. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the batch change lottery table in the first control example, and (b) schematically shows the defined contents of the chance charge lottery table in the first control example. It is a diagram. FIG. 11 is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of a continuation-suggestion effect selection table in the first control example; FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the interrupt repeated hitting lottery table in the first control example; 3 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a display control device in a first control example; FIG. (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining a power-on image in the first control example. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a rear surface A in the first control example, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining rear surfaces BD in the first control example. FIG. 7 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a display data table in the first control example; FIG. 11 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table in the first control example; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a drawing list in the first control example; FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the audio output device in the first control example; FIG. 8 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit in the first control example; It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation start process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a starting winning process executed by an MPU in the main control device in the first control example; FIG. 8 is a flow chart showing prefetching processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first control example; It is a flow chart showing normal symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. 4 is a flow chart showing through gate passage processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first control example; 4 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit in the first control example; 4 is a flow chart showing startup processing executed by an MPU in a main controller in a first control example; 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by an MPU in a main controller in a first control example; It is a flow chart which shows the jackpot control processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. It is a flow chart showing a jackpot operation setting process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. It is a flow chart which shows the jackpot end processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing a winning process executed by an MPU in the main control device in the first control example; FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing abnormality processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first control example; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing startup processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the first control example; FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the first control example; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing effect update processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a press stop rendering process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing interrupt repeated hit effect processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the first control example; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing collective change effect processing executed by the MPU in the sound ramp control device in the first control example; FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing charge consumption processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the first control example; 9 is a flowchart showing press detection processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example; 9 is a flowchart showing stop operation detection processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing repeated hitting operation detection processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the first control example; FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing change operation detection processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example; 8 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing winning information command processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a pending notice lottery process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the first control example; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing win-related command processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the first control example; FIG. 9 is a flow chart showing a variable display setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example; It is a flow chart which shows the fluctuation effect setting process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the first control example. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a continuation suggestion effect setting process executed by an MPU in the sound lamp control device in the first control example; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing rear mode lottery processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the first control example; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing effect mode selection processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the first control example; FIG. 8 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; 8 is a flowchart showing boot processing executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example; (a) is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, (b) is a flow chart executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; 4 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing; 9 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; (a) is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example 8 is a flowchart showing stop type command processing; 9 is a flow chart showing suspension command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; (a) is a flowchart showing opening command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; (b) is a flow chart executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; 10 is a flow chart showing number command processing. 9 is a flowchart showing ending command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; (a) is a flowchart showing rear image change command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, (b) is a flow chart executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example 4 is a flow chart showing error command processing. 8 is a flowchart showing display setting processing executed by an MPU in the display device in the first control example; (a) is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; (b) is a flowchart executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; It is the flowchart which showed the pointer update process which carries out. (a) is a flowchart showing a transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; 10 is a flowchart showing resident image transfer setting processing; 10 is a flowchart showing normal image transfer setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; 8 is a flowchart showing drawing processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; (a) is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the audio output device in the first control example, (b) is a command executed by the MPU in the audio output device in the first control example; 4 is a flowchart showing interrupt processing; 8 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the audio output device in the first control example; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing repeated hitting sound command processing executed by the MPU in the audio output device in the first control example; FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing interruption command processing executed by the MPU in the audio output device in the first control example; 8 is a flowchart showing audio setting processing executed by the MPU in the audio output device in the first control example; (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode in the temple search mode displayed on the third symbol display device in the second control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device in the second control example. It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode at the time of small hit A winning during the temple search displayed. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode at the time of winning the probability variable medium jackpot displayed on the third symbol display device in the second control example, and (b) is a third symbol display in the second control example. It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode at the time of probability variable middle and small hit A winning displayed by the apparatus. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode in the lost child mode predetermined timing (99th rotation after the jackpot) effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the second control example, and (b) is the second control example. It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode in the fall winning pattern in the lost child mode displayed with the 3rd pattern display apparatus in a control example. (a), (b) is the figure which showed an example of the display mode in the dialogue mode displayed with the 3rd design display device in the 2nd example of control. (a), (b) is the figure which showed an example of the display mode in the dialogue mode displayed with the 3rd design display device in the 2nd example of control. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the press-down effect among the variable operation effects displayed on the third symbol display device in the second control example; It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of the pushing-up production|presentation among the variable operation production|presentations displayed by 3 design display devices. It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of the touch effect among the variable operation effects displayed by the 3rd pattern display apparatus in the 2nd control example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode in the pending change standby effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the second control example, (b) is a third symbol display in the second control example It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode in the production|presentation after suspension change standby|waiting displayed with a device. (a) to (c) are diagrams schematically showing changes over time in the effect mode of the variable effect (special figure winning pattern during the first period) in the second control example. (a) to (c) are diagrams schematically showing changes over time of the effect mode of the variable effect (special figure winning pattern during the second period) in the second control example. FIG. 11 is a diagram schematically showing a state transition method in a second control example; FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of various counters in the second control example; (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main controller in the second control example, (b) is the block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the main controller in the second control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a jackpot type selection 2 table set in the ROM of the main controller in the second control example, (b) is for special figure 1 jackpot 2 in the second control example It is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the table, (c) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the special figure 2 jackpot 2 table in the second control example. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the small hit random number 2 table in the second control example, (b) schematically shows the defined contents of the small hit type selection 2 table in the second control example and (c) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the time saving end condition selection table in the second control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio ramp control device in the second control example; (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio ramp control device in the second control example; be. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship of each symbol in the second control example, and (b) is a dialogue mode related table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device in the second control example. FIG. 10 is a block diagram showing a configuration, and FIG. 10C is a diagram schematically showing defined contents of a dialog state setting table in a second control example; FIG. 11 is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of a character selection table in the second control example; FIG. 11 is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of a dialogue selection table in the second control example; FIG. 11 is a diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of an operation effect switching table in the second control example; It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation start process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the second control example. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing deviation processing performed by the MPU in the main controller in the second control example; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows the jackpot end processing 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the second control example. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing main processing 2 executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the second control example; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing effect update processing 2 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second control example; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing variable operation effect processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second control example; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing second period setting processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the second control example; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing press detection processing 2 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second control example; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing variable operation detection processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second control example; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing variable effect management processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the second control example; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing variable operating means management processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the second control example; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a hold advance notice lottery process 2 executed by an MPU in the sound lamp control device in the second control example; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing execution timing setting processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the second control example; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a variation effect setting process 2 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the second control example; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing normal effect setting processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the second control example; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing dialogue mode setting processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the second control example; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing rear mode lottery processing 2 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the second control example; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows back mode setting processing after the end of time reduction performed by MPU in an audio lamp control device in the example of the 2nd control.

BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, Figures 1 to 4
4, as a first embodiment, the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine (hereinafter simply "pachinko machine").
) 10 will be described. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 whose outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. and an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 12 .
The inner frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side, with the side on which is provided as an axis for opening and closing.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning slots 63 and 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. Balls (game balls) flow down in front of the game board 13 to play a pinball game. The inner frame 12 includes a ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that shoots a ball to the front area of the game board 13, and a shooting unit that guides the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. Front view (
(See FIG. 1) Metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower positions on the left side, and the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side, with the side on which the hinges 19 are provided as the axis for opening and closing. ing. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and has a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two sheet glasses is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.例文帳に追加

The front frame 14 has an upper tray 17 for storing balls projected to the front side and formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface, and the upper tray 17 discharges prize balls, rental balls, and the like. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination guides the ball thrown into the upper tray 17 to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4). A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17 . This frame button 22 is, for example, the third pattern display device 81 (Fig. 2
), or to change the contents of the super ready-to-win effect.

The front frame 14 is provided with light-emitting means such as various lamps around its periphery (for example, corner portions). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when a big win is made or when a predetermined ready-to-win state is reached, and play a role of enhancing the effect during the game. Illuminated parts 29 to 3 containing light-emitting means such as LEDs are mounted on the periphery of the window part 14c.
3 is provided. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as production lamps such as big win lamps, and the respective electric decoration parts 29 to 33 are lit by lighting or blinking of built-in LEDs at the time of a big win or a ready-to-win production. Alternatively, it flashes to indicate that the jackpot is in progress or that the player is in the process of reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, the front view of the front frame 14 (Fig. 1
(See) At the upper left part, there is provided a display lamp 34 which has a built-in light-emitting means such as an LED and can indicate that prize balls are being paid out and that an error has occurred.

In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized on the lower side of the right electrical decoration part 32, and a pasting space K1 (Fig. 2) can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more splendor, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chrome, is attached to the area around the electric decorations 29-33.

A ball rental operation unit 40 is arranged below the window portion 14c. The ball rental operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41 , a ball rental button 42 and a return button 43 . pachinko machine 1
When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of 0, the ball is lent according to the operation. done. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which the balance information of the card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on to display the remaining amount in numbers as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain lending balls based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and lending balls are supplied to the top tray 17 as long as the card or the like has a balance. be done. return button 4
3 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are directly lent to the upper tray 17 from a ball leasing device or the like without going through the card unit, that is, a so-called cash machine, does not require the ball leasing operation unit 40. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation portion to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to achieve commonality between a pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine.

In the lower tray unit 15 positioned below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. there is Lower plate 5
On the right side of 0, an operating handle 51 and an operating device 300 that are operated by the player to hit the ball into the front of the game board 13 are arranged. Note that the operation device 300 will be described later.

Inside the operation handle 51 are a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball shooting unit 112a, and a shooting stop switch 51 for stopping the shooting of the ball during the pressing operation.
b, and a variable resistor (not shown) for detecting the amount of rotation operation (rotation position) of the operation handle 51 from changes in electrical resistance. When the operating handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. A ball is shot with a strength (shooting intensity) corresponding to , and is hit in front of the game board 13 with a flying distance corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball extraction lever 52 is provided at the lower front portion of the lower tray 50 for operation when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. The ball extracting lever 52 is always biased to the right, and when it is slid to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed in the bottom of the lower tray 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball extracting lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally called a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 to receive the balls ejected from the lower tray 50 . The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and an ashtray (not shown) is attached to the left side of the lower tray 50 .

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front.
In addition to numerous nails (not shown) and windmills (not shown) for guiding the ball, rails 61 and 62, general winning opening 63, first winning opening 64, second winning opening 640, variable winning device 330, through gate 67,
It is configured by assembling the variable display unit 80 and the like, and its peripheral portion is the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1).
attached to the back side of the The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmissive resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. General winning port 63, first winning port 64, second winning port 640, variable display device unit 8
0 is arranged in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 by a tapping screw or the like.

The central portion of the front of the game board 13 is positioned through the inner frame 12 through the window 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14.
can be seen from the front side. Mainly referring to FIG. 2, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described below.

In front of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 is formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape.
is planted, and an arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed of a strip-shaped metal plate is planted inside the outer rail 62, like the outer rail 62. As shown in FIG. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area is formed in which a game is played by the behavior of . The game area is a front surface of the game board 13 and is defined by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a winning opening is provided,
area where the launched ball flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the balls shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. The tip portion of the inner rail 61 (Fig. 2
A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the upper left part of the game board 13) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning into the ball guide passage again. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the ball. is attenuated and rebounded toward the center.

First pattern display devices 37A and 37B having a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are provided in the lower left part of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left part in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are for displaying according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the game state of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. In this embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display whether the ball has entered the first winning port 64 or the second
It is configured to be used properly depending on whether or not a prize has been won in the prize winning port 640.例文帳に追加in particular,
When the ball enters the first winning hole 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while
When the ball enters the second winning hole 640, the first symbol display device 37B is activated.

In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the variable probability, the time saving mode, or the normal state by the lighting state, or indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing state by the lighting state. Whether the stop pattern is a pattern corresponding to the probability variable jackpot, a pattern corresponding to the normal jackpot, or a missing pattern is indicated by the lighting state, the number of pending balls is indicated by the lighting state, and a 7-segment display device indicates the round during the jackpot. Display numbers and errors. In addition, multiple L
The ED is configured so that the respective LEDs emit different colors (for example, red, green, and blue), and by combining the emitted colors, it is possible to suggest various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when a prize is won in the first prize winning port 64 and the second prize winning port 640.例文帳に追加In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big win (big win lottery), and also determines the kind of big win when it is determined as a big win. As the jackpot type determined here, a 15R probability variable jackpot, a 4R probability variable jackpot, and a 15R normal jackpot are prepared. In the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B,
Not only is it indicated whether the result of the lottery is a big hit or not as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation,
In the case of a jackpot, a pattern corresponding to the jackpot type is displayed.

Here, the “15R probability variable jackpot” is a probability variable jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds, and the “4R probability variable jackpot” is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4 rounds. It is a variable jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after . In addition, "15R normal jackpot" is the maximum number of rounds after the jackpot of 15 rounds,
Along with moving to a low probability state, during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations) is a jackpot that becomes a time-saving state.

In addition, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a subsequent jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of the jackpot, a time during so-called probability fluctuation (probability change), in other words, a game that is easy to shift to a special game state It is the state of The high-probability state (during variable probability) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the probability of winning a second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 640 . "Low probability state" refers to a state in which the odds are not variable, and the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than when the odds are variable. In addition, the time-saving state (during time-saving) of the "low-probability state" is a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, and the jackpot probability remains the same, but only the winning probability of the second symbol is increased, and the second winning port 640 It refers to the state of the game in which the ball is likely to win a prize. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is normal, it is a game state (
This is a state in which neither the jackpot probability nor the winning probability of the second symbol is increased.

During the probability change and the time saving, not only the probability of winning the second symbol increases, but also the second winning port 64
The time during which the electric accessory 640a associated with 0 is opened is also changed, and a longer time is set compared to normal. When the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (open state), the balls enter the second winning port 640 more than when the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). becomes easy. Therefore, during the probability change or the time reduction, the ball can easily enter the second winning hole 640, and the number of times the big winning lottery is performed can be increased.

In addition, instead of changing the opening time of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 during the probability change or the time saving, or in addition to changing the opening time, A change may be made to increase the number of times the accessory 640a is released more than during normal times. In addition, during the probability change or during the time saving, the probability of winning the second symbol does not change, and the second winning opening 640
At least one of the opening time of the electric accessory 640a attached to the and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened per time may be changed. In addition, during the probability change and the time reduction, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened per hit are not set. Only the probability may be changed to be higher than normal.

The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning holes 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. In the variable display device unit 80, the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B are triggered by the winning of the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640 (start winning).
A third pattern display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as "display device") that performs variable display of the third pattern while synchronizing with the variable display in , and the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 as a trigger A second pattern display device (not shown) composed of LEDs for variably displaying the second pattern is provided. A center frame 86 is arranged in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81 .

The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), so that, for example, upper, middle and lower three patterns are displayed. A column of symbols is displayed. Each pattern row is composed of a plurality of patterns (third patterns), and these third patterns are horizontally scrolled for each pattern row to variably display the third pattern on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加It's like In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B under the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4). Decorative display according to the display of the pattern display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Incidentally, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

The second pattern display device alternately lights up a symbol "O" and a symbol "X" as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined time each time the ball passes through the through gate 67. This is for variable display. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning lottery is won, the second symbol display device stops and displays the symbol "○" after the second symbol is variably displayed. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variable display of the third symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol ("○" symbol in this embodiment), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning hole 640
is activated (opened) for a predetermined period of time.

The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set so as to be shorter during the variable probability or during the time reduction than during the normal game state. As a result, the variable display of the second symbol is performed in a short time during the probability change and the time reduction, so that more winning lotteries can be performed than during normal times.
Therefore, the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, so that the player can be given more opportunities to open the electric accessary 640a of the second winning opening 640.例文帳に追加Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 640 during the probability variation and the time saving.

In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, other methods such as increasing the winning probability, increasing the opening time and the number of openings of the electric accessory 640a for one hit, etc. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be fixed regardless of the game state. On the other hand, if the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set shorter than normal during the variable probability or during the time saving, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the game state, and one winning The opening time and the number of openings of the electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the game state.

The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board 13 in the left and right regions of the variable display device unit 80, and is configured so that a part of the ball shot to the game board 13 can pass through. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, the symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the result of the winning lottery is a loss. For example, an "x" symbol is displayed as a variable display stop symbol.

The number of times the ball passes through the through gate 67 is suspended up to a total of four times, and the number of suspended balls is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B described above, and is displayed on the second symbol suspension lamp (not shown). is also displayed. Four second pattern holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third pattern display device 81 .

In addition, the variable display of the second pattern is performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second pattern display device as in the present embodiment.
37B and part of the third pattern display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second
A part of the third symbol display device 81 may light up the symbol reserve lamp. Also, the maximum number of held balls for passage of the ball through the through gate 67 is not limited to 4, and may be set to 3 or less, or 5 or more (for example, 8). Also, through gate 67
is not limited to two, and may be one, for example. Also, the mounting position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the right and left sides of the variable display unit 80, and may be below the variable display unit 80, for example. Also, the first pattern display device 37A
, 37B indicate the number of balls on hold, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol holding lamp.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first winning hole 64 through which balls can win is arranged. When a ball enters the first winning hole 64, a first winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused to turn on the first winning hole switch. (See FIG. 4), a lottery for a big hit is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, below the first prize winning port 64 in a front view, a second prize winning port 640 through which a ball can win a prize is arranged. When the ball enters the second winning hole 640, a second winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused to turn on the second winning hole switch. (See FIG. 4).
It is indicated by the pattern display device 37B.

In addition, the first prize winning port 64 and the second prize winning port 640 are also one of the prize winning ports from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. In addition, in this embodiment,
The number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the first prize winning port 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the second prize winning port 640 are configured to be the same, but the balls enter the first prize winning port 64. The number of prize balls paid out when a wins a prize and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second prize winning port 640 are different numbers, for example, the prize paid out when a ball enters the first prize winning port 64 The number of balls may be three, and the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the second winning hole 640 may be five.

An electric accessory 640a is attached to the second prize winning port 640. - 特許庁This electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to enter the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, as a result of the variable display of the second symbol triggered by the passage of the ball through the through gate 67, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device, the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state), and the ball enters the second winning hole 6
It will be in a state where it is easy to win to 40.

As mentioned above, during variable probability and short time, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than during normal,
In addition, since the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is short,
is more likely to be displayed, and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Furthermore, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is opened is also longer during the variable probability and the shorter working hours than during the normal time. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to enter the second winning hole 640 during the variable probability and the shorter working hours compared to the normal time.

Here, when the ball enters the first prize winning port 64 and when the ball enters the second prize winning port 640, the probability of winning the jackpot is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state. However, the probability of winning a 15R probability variable jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the event of a jackpot is higher when the ball enters the second winning port 640 than when the ball enters the first winning port 64. is set. On the other hand, the first prize winning port 64 does not have an electric accessory like the second prize winning port 640, and the ball can always win a prize.

Therefore, during normal operation, the electric accessory attached to the second prize winning port 640 is often closed, and it is difficult to win the second prize winning port 640. to shoot the ball so that it passes through the left side of the variable display unit 80 (so-called “left-handed hitting”).
), it is advantageous for the player to aim for a big win by obtaining many chances of a big win lottery by winning in the first winning hole 64 .

On the other hand, during the probability variation and the time reduction, by passing the ball through the through gate 67, the second winning opening 64
The electric accessory 640a associated with 0 is likely to be in an open state, and the second winning opening 640 is likely to win. It is better to shoot the ball (so-called "right shot"), pass through the through gate 67 to open the electric accessory, and aim to win a 15R probability variable jackpot by winning the second prize opening 640. , to the player's advantage.

In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, since the configuration of the game board 13 is bilaterally symmetrical, it is possible to aim for the first winning hole 64 by "right-handed hitting" or to aim for the second winning hole 640 by "left-handed hitting". You can also aim. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment provides the player with information on how to shoot balls according to the game state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether the game is in variable probability, short time, or normal). It is possible to eliminate the need to change the to "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the annoyance of changing the way the ball is hit.

A variable prize winning device 330 (see FIG. 11) is arranged below the first prize winning port 64, and a specific prize winning port 65a is provided substantially in the center thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning of the first prize winning port 64 or the second prize winning port 640 results in a jackpot, after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) elapses, the jackpot stop symbol is displayed. The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so as to cause the first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B to be lit, and the third symbol display device 81 is caused to display the stop symbol corresponding to the big win, thereby indicating the occurrence of the big win. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (jackpot) in which the ball is likely to win. As this special game state,
The specific prize winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls have been won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined period of time has passed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined period of time. The opening and closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a game value (game value) by paying out a larger amount of prize balls than usual. is done.

Incidentally, the special game state is not limited to the form described above. A large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big win is lit in the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the A special game is a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when a ball enters the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. You may make it form as a state. In addition, the number of the specific winning openings 65a is not limited to one, and one or more than two (for example, three) may be arranged. The left side of the variable display device unit 80 is not limited to the lower left side of the prize winning opening 64, for example.

An affixing space K1 for affixing a certificate stamp, an identification label, or the like is provided at the right corner of the lower side of the game board 13. 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with an out port 71 . Balls that flow down the game area and do not win in any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640 are guided through an out opening 71 to a ball discharge path (not shown). A pair of out ports 71 are arranged on the left and right sides of the specific winning port 65a.

The game board 13 is provided with a large number of nails for properly dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the balls, and various members (accessories) such as windmills.

As shown in FIG. 3, the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly provided with control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 . The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 as a unit. In addition, each control board has an MPU as a 1-chip microcomputer that manages each control, a port that communicates with various devices, a random number generator that is used for various lotteries, and is used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as required.

In addition, the main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, the card unit connection board 116
are accommodated in substrate boxes 100 to 104, respectively. Substrate box 100-10
4 includes a box base and a box cover covering the opening of the box base. The box base and box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each controller and each board.

In addition, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover in an unopenable manner (caulking structure) by a sealing unit (not shown). consolidation). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. The sealing seals are made of a brittle material.
If the board boxes 100 and 102 are forced to open, they are cut into the box base side and the box cover side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and open upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 downstream of the tank rail 131. a case rail 132 vertically connected to the side of the case rail 132; ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall, and a payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131 .

In addition, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, and the firing control device 11
2 is provided with an operation knob 121 of a variable resistor, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122 . The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate ball clogging (return to normal state) when a dispensing error such as a ball clogging in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4) occurs. The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when the pachinko machine 10 is to be returned to its initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. Some RAM 203
In addition, various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are built in. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 controls the jackpot lottery and the first symbol display device 3.
Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as display setting in 7A, 37B and the third pattern display device 81, and lottery of the display result in the second pattern display device is executed.

In addition, various commands are transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the sub-controllers such as the payout controller 111 and the sound lamp controller 113 to operate. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, flags, contents of internal registers of the MPU 201, return addresses of control programs executed by the MPU 201, etc., and a stack area for storing various flags, counters, I/O, and the like. The work area where the values are stored (
working area). The RAM 203 is supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 and retains data (backup) even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off.
All the data stored in the RAM 203 are backed up.

When power is interrupted due to power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of power interruption (including power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (not shown) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by the start-up process (not shown) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. , NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes
Payout control device 111, sound lamp control device 113, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, second symbol display device, second symbol reservation lamp, opening and closing driving to the front side with the lower side of the opening and closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a as an axis A solenoid 209 including a large-opening solenoid for driving and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected.

Further, the input/output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a group of switches (not shown), a group of sensors including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and the power supply device 1 .
15 is connected to a RAM erase switch circuit 253 which will be described later, and the MPU 201 receives signals output from various switches 208 and R output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253 .
Various processes are executed based on the AM elimination signal SG2.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 storing control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110,
A stack area that stores the contents of the internal registers of the PU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, etc., and a work area (work area) that stores various flags, counters, I/O values, etc. have. The RAM 213 is used for the pachinko machine 10
Data can be held (backed up) by supplying a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power supply is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 also receives a power failure signal SG from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like.
1 is input, and when the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) as power failure processing is immediately executed.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main controller 110, the dispensing motor 216, the launch controller 112, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid prize balls. In addition, the prize ball detection switch is the payout control device 1
11 but not connected to the main controller 110 .

The ball launching control device 112 controls the ball launching unit 112 so that the ball launching strength corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to launch the ball.
It controls a. The ball shooting unit 112a has a shooting solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operating handle 51, and the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (
is not operated), the firing solenoid is energized corresponding to the amount of rotation operation (rotation position) of the operation handle 51, and the ball is shot with the strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51. .

The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing from a lamp display device (electrical parts 29 to 33, an indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and changes production (variation display) and a display control device 114 such as an advance notice effect
It controls the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed in . The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 comprising an address bus and a data bus. Input/output port 22
5 are connected to the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the other device 228, the frame button 22, and the like. Other device 2
28 includes a drive motor 342 and a voice coil motor 352 .

Sound lamp control device 113, based on various commands (fluctuation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from main control device 110, determines the display mode of third symbol display device 81, and sends the determined display mode to the command The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player,
The display control device 114 is instructed to change the stage displayed on the third pattern display device 81 or change the content of the effect at the time of super reach. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the stage after the change is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the stage after the change on the third pattern display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third design, which is the main image to be displayed on the third design display device 81 . The display control device 114 displays various images on the third pattern display device 81 in accordance with commands transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 .

Also, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third pattern display device 81 from the display control device 114 . In the audio ramp control device 113,
Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, in accordance with the display content of the third pattern display device 81, the sound corresponding to the display content is output from the voice output device 226, and the display content is made to correspond. It controls lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 .

The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, displays the third pattern display device 81.
It controls the display such as the variation effect of the third symbol in . Also, the display control device 11
4 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113 . The sound lamp control device 113 outputs a sound from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by this display command, so that the third symbol display device 8
1 and the audio output from the audio output device 226 can be combined.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure or the like, and a RAM erase switch 122 (Fig. 3
), and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 provided with a . The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply unit 251 is an alternating current 2 supplied from the outside.
A voltage of 4 volts is taken in, and various switches such as the various switches 208 and the solenoid 20
9, a voltage of 12 volts for driving a motor, etc., a voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc., and these 12 volts, 5 volts and backup voltages are generated. Necessary voltage is supplied to each of the controllers 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 detects the MPU of the main controller 110 when power is cut off due to a power failure or the like.
201 and a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 . The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors a stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts, power failure (
It judges that the power failure, power interruption) has occurred, and outputs a power failure signal SG1 to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. Even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111, NMI
Interrupt processing (not shown) can be executed and completed normally.

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input, and controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. Send to device 111 .

FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the operation device 300. FIG. As shown in FIG. 5, the operating device 3
00 is arranged at the center of the inner frame 12 in the left-right direction (that is, the center of the pachinko machine 10 in the left-right direction) when viewed from the front.

The operation device 300 is provided with a tilting device 310 configured to be tiltable when pushed by the player, and is positioned in a region formed by a housing recess 17a recessed in the front-rear direction along the outer frame of the upper tray 17. are placed. When the player tilts (rotates) the tilting device 310, a signal is input to the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1).

Between the tilting device 310 and the housing recess 17a, a clearance is provided that is at least large enough for a finger to be comfortably inserted. As a result, the player can prepare to operate the tilting device 310 in such a manner that the fingertip is placed on the back side of the top surface of the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 7).

Since the player holds the operation handle 51 with the right hand, the tilting device 310 is often operated with the left hand. Therefore, in the following description, it is assumed that the player operates the tilting device 310 with the left hand.

FIG. 6(a) is a partial front view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 6(b) is a view of VI in FIG.
It is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine 10 taken along line b-VIb, and FIG.
0, and FIG. 7(b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine 10 taken along line VIIb-VIIb of FIG. 7(a).

6 and 7 partially show the vicinity of the operation device 300 of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. 6 shows a state in which the tilting device 310 is arranged in the first state (initial state in the present embodiment) in which the operation surface 312a1 faces the vertical direction, and FIG. A state in which the operation surface 312a1 is arranged in a second state in which the operation surface 312a1 faces upward and rearward is illustrated. Note that in FIG. 7, an example of a player's hand operating the tilting device 310 is illustrated by imaginary lines.

The tilting device 310 is configured to be automatically operable between the first state and the second state by the driving force of the driving device 340 . Details of the driving device 340 will be described later.

An example of operation of the tilting device 310 will be described. The operation of the tilting device 310 is performed, for example, by displaying a specific display (for example, a display of "press the button") on the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 2).
is what the player does when the appears.

Here, for example, if the tilting device 310 is pushed in by dropping the hand downward forcefully as in the case of pushing a button that advances and retreats up and down, the position of the operation surface 312a1 moves forward depending on the degree of tilting. In this mode, the operation surface 312a1 is easily rubbed against the palm of the hand. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of discomfort, and to prevent the player from performing a pressing operation by dropping the hand downward forcefully.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 7, by placing the fingertip near the shaft portion 314 of the tilting device 310 and lowering the palm downward using the fingertip as a fulcrum, the palm is integrated with the operation surface 312a1. The tilting device 310 can be pushed in comfortably.

Therefore, the player can be guided to perform the operation by lowering the palm downward with the fingertip as a fulcrum so as not to drop the hand vigorously downward. As a result, the degree of impact applied to the tilting device 310 by the player's operation can be reduced, and the possibility of damage to the tilting device 310 can be reduced.

The difference in how the tilting device 310 looks from the player's point of view will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 and 9. FIG. 8 is a front perspective view of the operation device 300 as viewed in the direction of arrow VIII in FIG. 6, and FIG. 9 is a front perspective view of the operation device 300 as viewed in the direction of arrow IX in FIG. 8 and 9, the shape of the pachinko machine 10 is partially illustrated by imaginary lines. In addition, in FIG. 9, an example of a player's hand pushing the tilting device 310 is illustrated by imaginary lines.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the operation surface 312a1 of the tilting device 310 is visible in the first state from the player's point of view, while its area is reduced to such an extent that it is invisible in the second state. (the operation surface 312a1 is directed to the outside of the player's viewpoint). This allows the first
The appearance of the tilting device 310 can be greatly changed between the state and the second state.

In this embodiment, in the process of changing from the first state to the second state, the protective lens member 31
The area of 1i is configured to gradually increase, and accordingly, the amount of light from the LED device 341f (see FIG. 12) arranged inside the operation device 300 is visually recognized to gradually increase.
The difference in the amount of light visible to the player (degree of brightness) between the first state and the second state increases, and the appearance of the tilting device 310 can be greatly changed between the first state and the second state. .

An example of operation of the tilting device 310 will be described. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG.
By placing the outer side of the little finger near the shaft portion 314 (see FIG. 7) of the tilting device 310 and lowering the palm downward using the outer side of the little finger as a fulcrum (by rotating the wrist as an axis), The tilting device 310 can be comfortably pushed and operated while the palm is integrated with the operation surface 312a1.

Therefore, the player can be guided to perform the operation by dropping the palm downward with the outer side portion of the little finger as a fulcrum so as not to force the player to drop the hand downward.
As a result, the degree of impact applied to the tilting device 310 by the player's operation can be reduced, and the possibility of damage to the tilting device 310 can be reduced.

Next, the operation device 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 and 11. FIG. Figure 10
is a front perspective view of the operation device 300, and FIG. 11 is a rear perspective view of the operation device 300. FIG. As shown in FIG. 10, the operating device 300 is rotatably supported around a shaft 314 on which the tilting device 310 is arranged at the rear end.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11, a voice coil motor 352 that imparts an impact in the straight direction to the tilting device 310, and detection sensors 324L and 324 that detect the pushing operation from the first state.
4R and are arranged outside the lower frame member 320 surrounding the tilting device 310 from below.

In this way, by arranging the sensor for detecting the position of the tilting device 310 and the voice coil motor for applying the driving force outside the lower frame member 320, a large area inside the lower frame member 320 can be used for tilting. Device 310 can be housed in lower frame member 320 . This will
A large movable amount of the tilting device 310 can be secured.

12 is a front exploded perspective view of the operation device 300, and FIG. 13 is an exploded perspective view of the operation device 30.
0 is a rear exploded perspective view of FIG. As shown in FIGS. 12 and 13, the operation device 300 includes a tilting device 310 having a ring member BR1 disposed at each of the left and right ends at the back side end (the far side end of the paper surface of FIG. 12), and a tilting device 310 having a ring member BR1. A lower frame member 320 that has a lower bearing portion 323 that supports the ring member BR1 of the device 310 from below and defines the pushing end of the tilting device 310, and a lower frame member 320 that supports the ring member BR1 of the tilting device 310 from above. It is a member that has a recessed portion that is arranged to face the lower frame member 320 and has a large opening in the center, and is fastened and fixed to the lower frame member 320 in a manner in which the tilting member 310 is arranged between the lower frame member 320 together with the tilting device 3
A driving force is applied to the tilting device 310 via an upper frame member 330 that determines the arrangement in the second state of 10 and an arm member 345 that is fastened and fixed to the lower side of the lower frame member 320 and constitutes a link mechanism with the tilting device 310. A driving device 340 for transmission, and a protective cover device 3 that is fastened and fixed to the driving device 340 and protects the driving device 340 by covering the driving device 340 from three sides, ie, the lateral direction and the rear.
50 and .

The lower frame member 320 is a cup-shaped member configured such that the left and right portions of the bottom surface slope downward toward the front side, and the bottom plate portion 321 slopes downward toward the front side. Horizontal part 3 composed of a plate-shaped member horizontally arranged at the upper end on the far side of
22, a lower bearing portion 323 which is a semicircular receiving portion opened upward near the rear end portion of the horizontal portion 322 and receives the shaft portion 314 of the tilting device 310 from below; A left side detection sensor 324L and a right side detection sensor 324R are arranged as a pair on the left and right side.
and an opening portion 325 that is an opening formed by scraping a portion arranged below the horizontal portion 322 at the center position in the left-right direction of the bottom plate portion 321 .

The bottom plate portion 321 abuts on the tilting device 310 to determine the end of the movement of the tilting device 310 and has a plurality of openings through which the tilting device 310 is exposed to the bottom plate portion 3 .
21 can pass through.

The bottom plate portion 321 includes a transmission hole 321a drilled in the central portion on the front side, a detection hole 321b drilled along the detection grooves of the left and right detection sensors 324L and 324R, and an opening 325.
and an insertion hole 321c that is symmetrically drilled on the left and right sides of the .

The transmission hole 321a is arranged in front of the voice coil motor 352 of the protective cover device 350, and formed with a size that allows the overhang projecting portion 311j of the tilting device 310 to pass through. By driving the voice coil motor 352 in a state in which the protruding projecting portion 311j of the tilting device 310 protrudes below the bottom plate portion 321, the tilting device 310 can be provided with a driving force in the linear motion direction.

The detection hole 321b is formed by detecting pieces 311gL and 311 projecting from the lower surface of the tilting device 310.
This is a through hole through which gR can be inserted. Detection piece 31 projecting from detection hole 321b
By arranging 1gL and 311gR in the detection grooves of the detection sensors 324L and 324R, the posture of the tilting device 310 can be detected.

The insertion hole 321c has a size that allows the shaft portion 311c arranged on the flange of the tilting device 310 and the arm member 345 of the driving device 340 to be inserted therein, and the arm member Through-holes are formed up to a position where interference with 345 can be avoided.

The horizontal portion 322 forms a flat surface for fastening and fixing the lower frame member 320 and the driving device 340, extends upward from the upper surface thereof, and has a U-shaped cross section with an open portion on the front side. A locking portion 322a is provided.

The locking portion 322a is a portion that locks one end of the torsion spring 315 of the tilting device 310 so that it does not move backward. By locking the torsion spring 315 with the locking portion 322a, the biasing force of the torsion spring 322a acts in the direction of moving the tilting device 310 to the second state.

The detection sensors 324L and 324R are photocoupler type sensors that detect the position of the tilting device 310 . Note that the detection sensors 324L and 324R are located on the bottom plate portion 32 of the lower frame member 320.
1 (the position of the detection groove) is the same on the left and right.

In addition, a photocoupler type sensor is equipped with a light projecting part that projects light and a light receiving part that receives the light from this light projecting part, and a gap (slit, detection groove) into which the part to be detected can be inserted. means a sensor arranged in a substantially U-shape.

The opening 325 is a through hole that allows the LED device 341 f of the drive device 340 , the rotary claw member 347 , and the like to enter the lower frame member 320 . Therefore, the lateral width thereof is made larger than the lateral width of the pair of rotary pawl members 347 .

On the other hand, with respect to the vertical width, since the driving device 340 is configured to project the LED device 341f to the upper front side (see FIG.
By pushing up the driving device 340 after passing through the LED device 341
f can be arranged above the opening 325, and the rotating claw member 34 from the LED device 341f.
7, the vertical width of the opening 325 can be shortened.

The upper frame member 330 is arranged to face the opening 331, which is large enough to catch the extended portion 311h extending from the lower end surface of the tilting device 310 toward the front side, and the lower receiving portion 323 of the lower frame member 320. and an upper bearing portion 332 configured in a semicircular shape with an open bottom and an upper bearing portion 332 for supporting the ring member BR1 of the tilting device 310 .

The protective cover device 350 is structured to be vertically divisible and covered in three directions except for the front side. A voice coil motor 352 that is supported by the bottom plate and arranged on the front side so that the vibration surface faces obliquely forward and upward, a left detection sensor 353L that is a detection sensor having a detection groove on the upper side of the bottom plate of the main body cover 351, and a right side detection sensor 353L. A detection sensor 353R is mainly provided.

Note that FIG. 12 shows a state in which the main body cover 351 is partially broken so that the right detection sensor 353R arranged on the opposite side of the left detection sensor 353L with respect to the left-right center can be visually recognized.

In the assembled state (see FIG. 10), the voice coil motor 352 has a vibrating surface that is the lower frame member 3 .
20 is disposed in a posture substantially parallel to the bottom plate portion 321 of the 20. As shown in FIG. As a result, the driving force can be efficiently transmitted to the tilting device 310 by driving the voice coil motor 352 when the tilting device 310 protrudes downward through the transmission hole 321a.

The detection sensors 353L and 353R are photocoupler type sensors that detect the phases of the disk cams 344L and 344R of the driving device 340 . Disk cams 344L, 3 of drive device 340
44R are arranged inside the detection grooves of the detection sensors 353L and 353R.
The detection holes 344eL and 344eR of the disk cams 344L and 344R are the detection sensors 353L and 353L.
It is possible to detect whether or not the disk cams 344L and 344R are arranged in a specific phase by detecting whether or not they are arranged in the detection groove of 53R.

In this embodiment, since the left and right disc cams 344L, 344R of the drive device 340 are provided with the detection holes 344eL, 344eR in different phases, the detection sensors 353L, 35
There are two types of specific phases detectable by 3R.

Next, the tilting device 310 will be described with reference to FIGS. 14 to 16. FIG. Figure 14(a)
) is a front view of the tilting device 310, FIG. 14(b) is a side view of the tilting device 310 as viewed in the direction of arrow XIVb in FIG. 14(a), and FIG. ) of XIVc
- XIVc is a cross-sectional view of the tilting device 310; 15 is a front exploded perspective view of the tilting device 310, and FIG. 16 is a rear exploded perspective view of the lid 312 of the tilting device 310. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 14 to 16, the tilting device 310 includes a case body 311 which is a box-shaped body having fan-shaped side surfaces and openings in the upper and lower sides, and the upper opening of the case body 311 is covered. Lid 312 fastened and fixed to case main body 311, spherical lens member 313 fastened and fixed to the front side end of lid 312 and hanging down, and a mode sandwiched between the rear ends of case main body 311 and lid 312. , a torsion spring 315 wound around the shaft 314 , and a rear end of the case body 311 and the lid 312 at the case body 3
and a ring-shaped ring member BR1 for fixing the lid 312 and the lid 312 indivisibly.

The case main body 311 includes a bottom plate portion 311a inclined downward from the back side to the front side in the first state, an opening portion 311b opened in the center of the bottom plate portion 311a, and left and right sides of the opening portion 311b. A cylindrical shaft portion 311c extending toward the center in the left-right direction from a flange projecting downward along the edge of the shaft 311c, and a concave portion 311d having a semicircular cross-section supporting the shaft portion 314 at the rear end. , an insertion groove 311e which is a groove arranged at a position where both arm portions 315a of the torsion spring 315 can be inserted, and a hook-shaped portion 311f which is formed in a hook shape and locks the central portion 315b of the torsion spring 315. , a pair of left detection pieces 311gL and a right detection piece 311gR (see FIG. 15) which are extended below the bottom plate portion 311a, and extension portions which are extended from the front end portion of the bottom plate portion 311a to the front side by a predetermined amount. a provision portion 311h, a protective lens member 311i which is arranged on the upper side of the front end portion of the bottom plate portion 311a, has a shape along an arc centered on the shaft portion 314, and is formed of a light-transmitting material, and a bottom plate portion. 311a mainly includes an overhang projecting portion 311j projecting downward from the central portion in the left-right direction of the front side end portion of 311a.

When the tilting device 310 is pushed downward by the player, the bottom plate portion 311a is supported by the lower frame member 3.
20 is a portion that abuts on the bottom plate portion 321 of the member 20. FIG.

The opening 311b is configured as an opening through which the LED device 341f of the driving device 340 and the arm member 345 of the driving device 340 can be inserted.

The shaft portion 311c is inserted into the guide hole 3 of the arm member 345 of the driving device 340 (see FIG. 17(b)).
45b, and serves as a portion that transmits driving force to and from the driving device 340. As shown in FIG.

The left detection piece 311gL and the right detection piece 311gR are portions inserted into the detection grooves of the left detection sensor 324L and the right detection sensor 324R (see FIG. 15) of the lower frame member 320, respectively. is longer than the right detecting piece 311gR.

In the present embodiment, the angle from the tip of the right detection piece 311gR to the tip of the left detection piece 311gL is about 3° centered on the shaft portion 314 (from the first state (see FIG. 22) to the push end (see FIG. 22). 23)), the left detection piece 311gL is projected more than the right detection piece 311gR.

The extended portion 311h projects from the lower end portion of the protective lens member 311i toward the front side, and projects to a position where it is engaged with the opening 331 of the upper frame member 330 in the assembled state (see FIG. 10). configured in a manner.

The protective lens member 311i is configured in a curved shape when viewed from above (FIG. 14A).
) and is curved in the left-right direction (see FIG. 14(c)), so that the load when the player pushes the tilting device 310 can be easily relieved (easy to flow).
Thereby, the durability of the tilting device 310 can be improved.

The protruding protruding portion 311j protrudes perpendicularly from the lower surface of the bottom plate portion 311a and has a smaller cross-sectional shape than the transmission hole 321a of the lower frame member 320.
is pushed (see FIG. 29), it is inserted through the transmission hole 321a and the tip is projected downward from the lower frame member 320. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 16, the lid 312 includes a top plate member 312a having an operation surface 312a1, an intermediate plate member 312b fastened and fixed to the lower surface of the top plate member 312a, and an intermediate plate member 312b.
2b is fixed to the top plate member 312a, and in the first state (see FIG. 6), the LED device 34
and a cylindrical member 312c having a cylindrical shape having a size surrounding 1f.

The cylindrical member 312c improves the strength of the lid 312 by its rigidity in the axial direction. While it is fixed inside the member 312c, in the second state (see FIG. 7), such limitation is lifted, and the light from the LED device 341f can be widely irradiated.

The lens member 313 is made of a light-transmitting material, has upper and lower ends extending forward in a flange shape, and has a shape conforming to the curved shape of the protective lens member 311i. , and a spherical shell portion 313a formed in a spherical shell shape in the central portion.

The torsion spring 315 is wound around the shaft portion 314 at a pair of left and right twisted portions, and has both arm portions 315a extending rearward from the left and right outer ends of the twisted portions, and a central portion 315b connecting the pair of twisted portions. , provided.

Next, the driving device 340 will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 and 18. FIG. 17(a) is a front view of the driving device 340, FIG. 17(b) is a side view of the driving device 340 as viewed in the direction of arrow XVIIb in FIG. 17(a), and FIG. is a front exploded perspective view of the.

As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, the drive device 340 includes a main body member 341 that forms a frame by bending a plate-shaped sheet metal member, and a drive motor that is fastened and fixed to the main body member 341 and generates a driving force. 342, a transmission shaft rod 343 for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 342, and a pair of disk cams 344 (
left disk cam 344L, right disk cam 344R) and a connecting pin 344d of the disk cam 344
and a release member 346 that is pivotally supported by the shaft portion 341c of the main body member 341 and comes into contact with the first projecting portion 344c1 and the second projecting portion 344c3 of the disk cam 344 in the rotational direction. , a rotating pawl member 347 that is coaxially supported with the releasing member 346 and moves relative to the releasing member 346 as it rotates, and a coil spring-like member that generates an urging force in the direction of tilting the rotating pawl member 347 downward. 1st spring SP1 which is a spring member of, release member 34
6 and the rotary pawl member 347 are mainly provided with a second spring SP2 which is a torsion spring-like spring member that generates an urging force in a direction to separate them from each other.

The main body member 341 is bent rearward on the left and right sides to form a U-shaped motor housing portion 3 when viewed from above.
41a and a shaft support hole 341b which is drilled at the same position of the opposing plate portion of the motor housing portion 341a and which supports the disc cam 344, and an axis parallel to the axis of the shaft support hole 341b. A shaft portion 341c projecting in the left-right direction at a position shifted to the front side from the shaft support hole 341b, an extension portion 341d extending from the motor housing portion 341a below the shaft portion 341c, and a motor A lighting support portion 341 extending forward and upward from the housing portion 341a
e, and an LED device 341f disposed at the upper end of the illumination support portion 341e and having an LED light source disposed therein.

The LED device 341f has a triangular member on its upper surface, and has a portion that refracts light (
part that refracts light). This makes it possible to evenly irradiate the light from the LED device 341f upward and forward.

The drive motor 342 is positioned inside the motor accommodating portion 341a in the U-shape.
A fixing member 342a is provided which is fastened and fixed to 1a.

The fixed member 342a supports the rotary gear of the drive motor 342 and supports the transmission shaft 343 in such a manner that the transmission gear 343b meshes with the rotary gear.

One end of the arm member 345 has a perfectly circular shaft support hole 345a that is supported by the connecting pin 344d of the disc cam 344, and the other end of the arm member 345 has a rectangular shaft support hole 345a. and a guide hole 345b through which the shaft portion 311c (see FIG. 15) of the tilting device 310 is inserted.

The guide hole 345b is formed at a position where the opposite end of the shaft support hole 345a abuts against the shaft portion 311c in the first state of the tilting device 310, and the opposite end of the guide hole 345b is formed so that the disk cam 344 rotates more than once. It is formed in a position sufficient to allow rotation.

The transmission shaft rod 343 will be described with reference to FIG. 19 is a front exploded perspective view of the transmission shaft rod 343. FIG. The transmission shaft 343 has a columnar member 343a to which disc cams 344 (see FIG. 18) are fixed at both ends, and is supported by the columnar member 343a.
a transmission gear 343b meshing with the rotary gear of the transmission gear 343b and the cylindrical member 343a, a movable clutch 343c capable of switching between the transmission gear 343b and the cylindrical member 343a by moving in the axial direction whether or not to transmit the driving force, and the movable clutch 343c and a coil spring 343d that presses against the transmission gear 343b.

The cylindrical member 343a has fixing portions 3 having a D-shaped cross section for fixing the disk cams 344 at both ends thereof.
43a1 and 343a2, and the right fixing portion 343a2 is formed longer toward the center than the left fixing portion 343a1. Here, the fixing portion 343a2 is, in detail, the movable clutch 3
43c is formed with a length that allows it to move to a position where it does not interfere with the transmission gear 343b when it moves against the biasing force of the coil spring 343d.

The transmission gear 343b includes a perfect circular insertion hole 343b1 through which the cylindrical member 343a is inserted,
A clutch portion 343b2 in which unevenness along the axial direction is formed at a circumferential position of the axial center from a surface arranged to face the movable clutch 343c.

Since the insertion hole 343b1 is perfectly circular, even when the cylindrical member 343a is fixed, the transmission gear 343b can rotate (idle) with respect to the cylindrical member 343a.

The movable clutch 343c has an angle fixing hole 3 having a D-shaped cross section through which the cylindrical member 343a is inserted.
43c1, and a clutch portion 343c2 that is configured to be engageable with the clutch portion 343b2 while forming unevenness along the axial direction at a circumferential position centered on the shaft from a surface that faces the transmission gear 343b. .

In this embodiment, the clutch portions 343b2 and 343c2 have an angle of about 100 degrees at the top.
It is composed of a mountain-shaped convex part and a concave part of °.

Since the angle fixing hole 343c1 has a D-shaped cross section, the movable clutch 343c cannot rotate relative to the cylindrical member 343a.
2 and the clutch portion 343c2 of the movable clutch 343c, the driving force transmitted from the drive motor 342 to the transmission gear 343b is transferred to the cylindrical member 34 via the movable clutch 343c.
3a. As a result, by rotating the drive motor 342, the disk cam 3
44 (see FIG. 18) can be rotated.

In addition, the movable clutch 343c is normally engaged with the transmission gear 3 by the biasing force of the coil spring 343d.
43b, and the engagement relationship between the clutch portions 343b2 and 343c2 is maintained. On the other hand, by applying an axial load to the movable clutch 343c, the fixed portion 3
43a2 so as to move away from the transmission gear 343b.

Disc cam 344 will be described with reference to FIG. The disk cam 344 has a shape that mirrors the left disk cam 344L and the right disk cam 344R.
Since there are only positions 44eL and 344eR, only the left disc cam 344L will be described, and the description of the right disc cam 344R will be omitted.

20(a) is a side view of the left disc cam 344L as viewed in the direction of arrow XXa in FIG. 18, and FIG. 20(b) is a side view of the left disc cam 344L as viewed in the direction of arrow XXb in FIG. be. 20(a) and 20(b) illustrate a state in which the driving device 340 is in the first initial state as shown in FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 20(a) and 20(b), the left disc cam 344L is a member having portions protruding from both sides of a perfectly circular disc, and is positioned at the center of the disc. A central shaft portion 344a protruding inwardly in a cylindrical shape, a circular rib 344b protruding inwardly as a ring-shaped rib centering on the central shaft portion 344a, and an outer side of the circular rib 344b. As a rib lower in height than the circular rib 344b, it protrudes inward and has two
Engagement rib 344c having a portion projecting radially outward at a point, and circular rib 344b
and the engaging rib 344c, the arm member 3
45 (see FIG. 18), and a detection hole 344eL drilled near the outer circumference.

The right disk cam 344R is different only in that the detection hole 344eR is arranged at a position forming an angle of 60° with the detection hole 344eL, and otherwise has a shape that mirrors the shape of the left disk cam 344L. .

The central shaft portion 344a has a cross section D whose inner periphery is engaged with both ends of the cylindrical member 343a (see FIG. 19).
, and the outer circumference is configured to be fitted into the shaft support hole 341b (see FIG. 18). That is, the disk cam 344 is rotatably supported in the shaft support hole 341b.

The circular rib 344b protrudes to a position where it can come into contact with the left and right wall surfaces of the motor housing portion 341a (see FIG. 18) when the disc cam 344 is supported by the shaft support hole 341b. As a result, misalignment of the disc cam 344 can be suppressed.

In the first initial state, the engaging rib 344c projects radially outward at a position shifted by 80° in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 20A) from the position where the detection hole 344eL is arranged. a protruding portion 344c1; At a position shifted by an angle θ2 (angle θ2=150° in this embodiment), a second projecting portion 344c3 projecting radially outward again, and the second projecting portion 344c.
3, and a second lead-in portion 344c4 that is retracted radially inward at a position shifted by an angle θ3 (angle θ3=20° in this embodiment).

In the first initial state of the driving device 340, the connecting pin 344d is arranged at the position with the longest separation distance from the shaft portion 311e of the tilting device 310 in the first state (see FIG. 22). That is, the connecting pin 344d is disposed on the opposite side of the shaft portion 311e of the tilting device 310 in the first state with respect to the central shaft portion 344a.

The releasing member 346 and the rotary pawl member 347 will be described with reference to FIG. Note that the releasing member 346 and the rotary pawl member 347 are arranged as a pair on the left and right, and the configurations thereof are the same on the left and right, so only one will be described.

21(a) and 21(b) are front views of the releasing member 346 and the rotating claw member 347. FIG. 21(a) shows a large angle state in which the rotary pawl member 347 is rotated with respect to the release member 346 to the terminal position in the biasing direction of the second spring SP2, and FIG. 21(b) shows the release member 346 A small angle state in which the rotary pawl member 347 is rotated to the terminal position against the biasing force of the second spring SP2 is illustrated.

The state in which the releasing member 346 is rotated by being brought into contact with the disk cam 344 is the state between the large angle state and the small angle state (when the projecting pin 346b is arranged at the intermediate position of the guide slot 347b). state) (see FIG. 35).

As shown in FIGS. 21(a) and 21(b), the release member 346 is formed of a substantially rectangular plate member, and includes a shaft support hole 346a supported by a shaft portion 341c (see FIG. 18), A protruding pin 346b projecting in the plate thickness direction in an arc shape centering on the central axis of the shaft support hole 346a, an insertion hole 346c through which the end of the second spring SP2 is inserted, and from the shaft support hole 346a and an engaging portion 346d configured as a portion projecting with the maximum diameter.

The engaging portion 346d is in the assembled state (see FIG. 10) so that the engaging rib 34 of the disc cam 344
4c (see FIG. 20). In this embodiment, the engaging portion 346
By forming the outer periphery of d to be curved, the contact with the engaging rib 344 can be performed smoothly.

The rotary pawl member 347 is formed of a substantially rectangular plate member, and has a shaft support hole 347a that is supported by the shaft portion 341c (see FIG. 18) and an arc shape centered on the central axis of the shaft support hole 347a. A long guide hole 347b is drilled along which the projecting pin 346b of the releasing member 346 can be guided (drilled with a size that includes the movement locus of the projecting pin 346b inside), and a second spring SP2.
an insertion hole 347c through which the end of the shaft support hole 347a is inserted, a hook-shaped portion 347d protruding downward at the opposite end of the shaft support hole 347a, and the end of the first spring (see FIG. 18). and a pull-down hole 347e drilled so as to be able to be inserted therethrough.

In this embodiment, in the large angle state shown in FIG. 21(a), the release member 346 is arranged at the end position of the rotation claw member 347 in the backward rolling direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 21(a)). Therefore, in the large angle state, when a load is applied to the engaging portion 346d in the downward direction, the releasing member 346 and the rotary pawl member 347 rotate together in the backward rotation direction. When a load in the upward direction is applied to 346d, only the releasing member 346 can be rotated to maintain the attitude of the rotating claw member 347 until reaching the small angle state shown in FIG. 21(b).

Next, an operation example of the operation device will be described. First, with reference to FIGS. 22 to 24, an operation example when the player performs the pushing operation when the tilting device 310 is arranged in the first state will be described. In addition, in the following description of the operation example, the illustration of the lid 312 is simplified for easy understanding.

22 to 24 show the operation device 300 on line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a).
is a cross-sectional view of. 22 shows a state in which the tilting device 310 is in the first state, FIG. 23 shows a state in which the player pushes the tilting device 310 from the state shown in FIG. 22 to the terminal position, and FIG. 23 shows the state after the tilting device 310 has returned from the state of FIG. 23 to the first state. Also, FIGS. 22 to 24 show an example of a player's hand repeatedly operating the tilting device 310 .

As shown in FIG. 22, the tilting device 310 receives an urging force in the direction of backward rotation (clockwise in FIG. 22) by a torsion spring 315, and the bottom plate portion 311a engages the hooked portion 347d of the rotating claw member 347. As shown in FIG.
be hooked on As a result, the posture of the tilting device 310 is maintained in the first state. That is, in the first state, the tilting device 310 is always biased in the backward direction (clockwise in FIG. 22).

In the state shown in FIG. 22, the left detection piece 311gL is inserted into the detection groove of the left detection sensor 324L (ON state), while the right detection piece 311gR is inserted into the right detection sensor 32
It is arranged in front of the 4R detection groove (OFF state, see FIG. 11).

As shown in FIG. 23, when the player performs an action of pushing the tilting device 310, the tilting device 31
0 rotates about 3° in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 23). In this state, the left detection piece 3
11gL is inserted through the detection groove of the left detection sensor 324L (ON state), and similarly, the right detection piece 311gR is inserted through the detection groove of the right detection sensor 324R (ON state).

Therefore, by determining a change in the detection states of the left detection sensor 324L and the right detection sensor 324R, it can be determined that the tilting device 310 has been pushed by the player from the first state.

Here, when the tilting device 310 is hit repeatedly, the state shown in FIG. 22 and the state shown in FIG. 23 are alternately repeated.
5, the tilting device 310 is not returned in time, and the pushing operation is performed at an incomplete position, which may make the player feel uncomfortable.

Conventionally, this can be dealt with by increasing the spring constant of the torsion spring 315 , but in this embodiment, when the spring constant of the torsion spring 315 is increased, the tilting device 310 moves against the biasing force of the torsion spring 315 . It is necessary to increase the driving force of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18) for pushing down, and it is necessary to increase the size of the drive motor 342 . As a result, there are problems such as an increase in product cost and an inability to save space.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a voice coil motor 352 capable of effecting by vibrating motion is arranged at a position facing the overhang projecting portion 311j of the tilting device 310 when the tilting device 310 is pushed. be.

As shown in FIG. 24, by driving the voice coil motor 352 in the extension direction from the state shown in FIG.
A return operation to 0 can be performed quickly.

Here, when the voice coil motor 352 is always driven when the tilting device 310 is pushed, for example, when the player presses the tilting device 310 for a long time, the voice coil motor 352 is driven and the player cannot Since unnecessary load is applied, the player may feel uncomfortable.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, when the left side detection sensor 324L is in the ON state, the number of times the right side detection sensor 324R switches between the ON state and the OFF state in a predetermined period is calculated, and if the number of times is equal to or greater than the threshold value, the voice coil is turned on. By driving the motor 352, the load for returning the tilting device 310 can be improved only when the player performs a repeated hitting operation. This will
A player can operate the tilting device 310 comfortably.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 25 to 30, a case (first operation mode) in which the tilting device 310 starts to reciprocate vertically from the first state (tilting operation) will be described. Figure 25 to Figure 3
0 is a cross-sectional view of the operation device 300 taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a).

25 shows a state in which the tilting device 310 is in the first state, and FIG.
FIG. 27 shows a state in which the disc cam 344 rotates forward by a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG. 28 shows a state in which the rotating claw member 347 has returned to its posture after being rotated in the forward direction.
29 shows a state in which the tilting device 310 is pushed back and forth from the state shown in FIG. 28 to the terminal position, and FIG. By rotating the plate cam 344 in the forward rotation direction by a predetermined amount, the engagement rib 34
4 c reaches the second initial state in which the second projecting portion 344 c 3 of the release member 346 contacts the engaging portion 346 d of the release member 346 . 28, the tilting device 3 in the state of FIG.
10 is shown in phantom lines, and in FIG. 29, an example of a player's hand pushing in the tilting device 310 is shown in phantom lines.

As shown in FIG. 25, when the tilting device 310 is in the first state, the cylindrical member 31 of the lid 312
The upper end portion (prism portion) of the LED device 341f is accommodated inside 2c. Therefore, while the amount of light irradiated in the radial direction of the cylindrical member 312c is suppressed by the thickness of the cylindrical member 312c, it is possible to ensure a large amount of light irradiated in the axial direction. Thereby, the cylindrical member 312c serves as a rib of the lid 312 to improve the strength, and in the first state of the tilting device 310, the light irradiation intensity of the LED device 341f can be adjusted.

As shown in FIG. 26, the disk cam 344 is rotated forward (counterclockwise in direction), the first projecting portion 344c1 of the disk cam 344 pushes down the engaging portion 346d of the releasing member 346, thereby rotating the releasing member 346 in the backward direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 26). Accordingly, the rotary pawl member 347 rotates in the backward rotation direction until it is disengaged from the bottom plate portion 311a of the tilting device 310 .

The change in posture of the release member 346 causes the first retraction portion 344c2 of the engagement rib 344c and the engagement portion 34
6d until the disc cam 344 rotates until the tilting device 310 is raised by the biasing force of the torsion spring 315 (rotates clockwise in FIG. 26).

25 and 26, the shaft portion 311c of the tilting device 310 is arranged at one end position of the guide hole 345b of the arm member 345 (the end position on the far side from the rotation shaft of the disc cam 344). Since the upward movement of the tilting device 310 is restricted by the arm member 345 , the upward movement of the tilting device 310 corresponds to the rotation angle of the disc cam 344 .

As shown in FIG. 27, the disc cam 344 rotates forward (counterclockwise in FIG. 27),
When the first retracting portion 344c2 of the disc cam 344 passes through the engaging portion 346d of the releasing member 346, the releasing member 346 and the rotary pawl member 347 rotate forward (counterclockwise in FIG. 27) due to the biasing force of the first spring SP1. 25), and the rotary pawl member 347 returns to the state where it can be engaged with the tilting device 310 (the state shown in FIG. 25). At this time, the biasing force of the second spring SP2 acts in the direction of increasing the angle between the release member 346 and the rotary claw member 347 (upper angle in FIG. 27). 347 rotates while maintaining the state shown in FIG. 26 (large angle state).

In this state, the lid 312 is retracted above the LED device 341f, and the tilting device 31 when the area where the protective lens member 311i is visible from the player's viewpoint is in the first state.
Since it increases compared to 0, the light of the LED device 341f is directed in the front direction (the direction toward the player).
It is also possible to irradiate to Therefore, by changing the posture of the tilting device 310, the LED device 3
It is possible to change the traveling direction of the light emitted from 41f, and to improve the presentation effect of the light.

In this state, the right detection sensor 353R of the protective cover device 350 is turned ON, and the starting point of the vertical reciprocating motion can be detected.

As shown in FIG. 28, from the state shown in FIG. 27, the disc cam 344 is rotated by a predetermined amount in the forward direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 28), and then the disc cam 344 is rotated by the same amount in the backward direction ( Figure 2
8 clockwise), the angle D1 shown in FIG.
The tilting device 310 can be repeatedly operated up and down within the range of . As a result, it is possible to change how the tilting device 310 looks to the player, and to increase the player's attention to the operation device 300 .

In addition, the area of the portion of the protective lens member 313 projecting upward from the upper frame member 331 changes in accordance with the repeated vertical motion of the tilting device 310 within the range of the angle D1. Therefore, of the light emitted from the LED device 341f, the amount of light visible through the protective lens member 313 can be changed according to the operation of the tilting device 310. FIG. Therefore, the brightness of the tilting device 310 can be changed, and the player's attention to the operation device 300 can be improved.

In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 28, the spherical shell portion 313a of the lens member 313
41f (left side in FIG. 28), the irradiation range of the light emitted from the LED device 341f can be expanded not only in the front-rear direction and the vertical direction but also in the left-right direction (perpendicular to the paper surface in FIG. 28). can be done.

According to this embodiment, as described above, when the tilting device 310 is arranged in the first state, the light from the LED device 341f travels upward, and the irradiation range is narrowed by the cylindrical member 312c. (See FIG. 25). On the other hand, when the tilting device 310 moves upward from the first state, the light from the LED device 341f is also emitted in the direction toward the player (frontal direction), and the irradiation range is widened by the lens member 313 .

That is, according to this embodiment, it is possible not only to change the irradiation direction of the light but also to change the irradiation range of the light at the same time as the posture of the tilting device 310 changes. As a result, the tilting device 310 attracts more attention.

As shown in FIG. 29, the player can push the tilting device 310 while the tilting device 310 is moving up and down in FIG. In the state of FIG. 28, the load applied from the arm member 345 to the tilting device 310 is only the load in the direction of lowering the tilting device 310 (even if the arm member 345 moves in the upward direction, the shaft portion 311c only moves the guide hole 345b of the arm member 345, and no load is generated).

Therefore, when the player pushes the tilting device 310 in the state of FIG. 28, it is possible to prevent the player from being subjected to the driving force of the driving motor 342 (see FIG. 18). At this time, only the load due to the biasing force of the torsion spring 315 is given to the player. As a result, when the player pushes the tilting device 310, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a large load on the player, so that the player can operate the operation device 300 comfortably.

As shown in FIG. 29, in the process from the state shown in FIG. When the member 347 rotates backward (clockwise direction in FIG. 29) and subsequently pushes the tilting device 310, the bottom plate portion 311a is moved to the hooked portion 347d.
, the rotary pawl member 347 returns to a position where it can be engaged with the tilting device 310 (rotates forward). Therefore, the tilting device 310 is restricted from moving upward by the rotating claw member 347 .

Therefore, the player moves the tilting device 31 from the state in which the tilting device 310 shown in FIG. 28 is moved up and down.
After depressing 0, the tilting device 310 can remain in the first state if the player releases the hand.

In the state shown in FIG. 29, the voice coil motor 352 vibrates (repeatedly moves in the extension direction and in the contraction direction). As a result, after the tilting device 310 is pushed to the end of the pushing operation, an effect of transmitting vibration to the player who keeps putting his hand on the tilting device 310 can be performed.

That is, the purpose of the voice coil motor 352 is to generate a driving force for assisting the upward movement of the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 24), and the purpose of vibrating the tilting device 310 arranged at the pushing end position to perform a vibration effect. can be used for

As shown in FIG. 30, when the player releases the tilting device 310 and the tilting device 310 returns to the first state, the overhanging projecting portion 311j of the tilting device 310 moves toward the lower frame member 320.
, and the contact with the voice coil motor 352 is released. Therefore, the vibration effect is effective only when the player pushes the tilting device 310 to the push end.

Therefore, compared to a game machine in which the operation button simply vibrates, when the tilting device 310 is pressed, whether or not the voice coil motor 352 vibrates at the end of the pressing is determined.
Only the player who pushes the tilting device 310 can grasp it.

Here, whether or not the lottery is a big win does not depend on the pushing operation of the tilting device 310 . Therefore, some players may not operate the tilting device 310 at all.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the player can feel the vibration of the voice coil motor 352 only when the tilting device 310 is pressed.

Here, for example, by controlling the voice coil motor 352 to perform a vibration effect when a big win is confirmed, it is possible to improve the sense of anticipation when the player pushes the tilting device 310, and the tilting device 310 value as a look-ahead means of
As a result, the tilting device 310 can be easily operated by the player, and the value of the tilting device 310 as operating means can be increased.

As shown in FIG. 30, the disk cam 344 is moved from the state shown in FIG. 29 to the second projecting portion 344c1.
By rotating the disk cam 344 forward (counterclockwise in FIG. 29) by a predetermined amount until it abuts against the engaging portion 346d of the release member 346, the driving device 340 can be brought into the second initial state. .

The second initial state is a state in which the engagement rib 344c and the release member 346 are in contact with each other in the rotational direction, as in the first initial state. In the first initial state, the first projecting portion 344c1 contacts the engaging rib 344c, while in the second initial state, the second projecting portion 344c3 contacts the engaging rib 344c.

29, the disk cam 344 is rotated backward (clockwise direction in FIG. 29) so that the first projecting portion 344c1 of the engaging rib 344c passes through the engaging portion 346d, and then reversely rotates. 29 can be returned to the first initial state shown in FIG. In this case, a load is applied to the release member 346 in a direction to push up the release member 346, and only the release member 346 is rotated forward (FIG. 29) while the posture of the rotary claw member 347 is maintained.
counterclockwise direction).

Next, referring to FIGS. 31 to 34, when the tilting device 310 is moved up and down (tilting motion) from the state in which the tilting device 310 is in the first state and the driving device 340 is in the second initial state ( Second operation mode) will be described. In this case, the tilting device 310 starts an operation (tilting operation) to reciprocate up and down after passing through the second state.

FIGS. 31 to 34 show the operation device 300 on line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a).
is a cross-sectional view of. In FIG. 31, the disk cam 344 is rotated forward (FIG. 31) from the state shown in FIG.
counterclockwise) and the releasing member 346 and the rotary pawl member 347 are rotated backward (clockwise in FIG. 31).
is rotated by a predetermined amount and the tilting device 310 reaches the second state.
2 shows how the disk cam 344 reciprocates and rotates from the state shown in FIG.
3 shows a state in which the player pushes the tilting device 310 to the terminal position from the state shown in FIG.
In addition, in FIG. 33, the position of the tilting device 310 in the state of FIG. 32 is illustrated by imaginary lines.
In FIG. 34, an example of a player's hand pushing the tilting device 310 is shown in phantom lines.

As shown in FIG. 31, when the disk cam 344 is rotated forward (counterclockwise in FIG. 31) from the state shown in FIG. Device 310 operates in the upward direction.

At this time, since the guide hole 345b of the arm member 345 extends (has a space) in the direction in which the shaft portion 311c of the tilting device 310 moves, the tilting device 310 moves toward the disk cam 344 via the arm member 345. The tilting device 310 can be lifted with low resistance without being pulled by the tilting device 310, and the state of the tilting device 310 can be changed from the first state to the second state in a short time.

As shown in FIG. 32, by rotating the disk cam 344 by about 10 degrees from the state shown in FIG. 310 can be placed in the second state (disc cam 344 is rotated 180° from the first initial state).
rotated posture). Therefore, when the tilting device 310 rises at a high speed and the tilting device 310 attempts to reach the second state from the state of FIG. It is possible to prevent the situation that the tilting device 310 takes a long time to reach the second state because the cam 344 is slow to rotate by a predetermined angle.

As shown in FIG. 33, from the state shown in FIG. 32, the disc cam 344 is rotated by a predetermined amount in the forward direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 32), and then the disc cam 344 is rotated by the same amount in the backward direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 32). Figure 3
2 clockwise), the angle D2 shown in FIG.
The tilting device 310 can be repeatedly operated up and down within the range of . As a result, it is possible to change how the tilting device 310 looks to the player, and to increase the player's attention to the operation device 300 .

In addition, the area of the portion of the protective lens member 313 projecting upward from the upper frame member 331 changes in accordance with the repeated vertical motion of the tilting device 310 within the range of the angle D2. Therefore, of the light emitted from the LED device 341f, the amount of light visible through the protective lens member 313 can be changed according to the operation of the tilting device 310. FIG. Therefore, the brightness of the tilting device 310 can be changed, and the player's attention to the operation device 300 can be improved.

In the state shown in FIG. 33, the spherical shell portion 313a of the lens member 313
41f (the left side of FIG. 33), the irradiation range of the light emitted from the LED device 341f can be expanded not only in the front-rear direction and up-down direction but also in the left-right direction (perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 33). can be done.

That is, according to this embodiment, it is possible not only to change the irradiation direction of the light but also to change the irradiation range of the light at the same time as the posture of the tilting device 310 changes. As a result, the tilting device 310 attracts more attention.

The range of angle D2 shown in FIG. 33 is different from the range of angle D1 shown in FIG. That is, in the present embodiment, the up-down motion of the tilting device 310 includes the up-down motion shown in FIG.
Two types of up-and-down motions (tilting motions), namely the up-and-down motion shown in FIG. Therefore, it is possible to create two modes in which the tilting device 310 in the first state is operated by the driving force of the drive motor 342 .

As a result, compared with the case where the operation member 310 performs the same operation every time, the operation mode can have a different meaning (for example, a difference in the expectation of a big win), and the tilting device 310
It is possible to improve the player's attention to.

As shown in FIG. 33, the player can push the tilting device 310 while the tilting device 310 is moving up and down in FIG. In the state of FIG. 33, the load applied from the arm member 345 to the tilting device 310 is only the load in the direction of pulling the tilting device 310 downward (even if the arm member 345 moves in the upward direction, the shaft portion 311
c only moves through the guide hole 345b of the arm member 345, and there is no load to lift the shaft portion 311c from the arm member 345).

Therefore, when the player pushes the tilting device 310 in the state of FIG. 33, it is possible to prevent the player from being subjected to the driving force of the driving motor 342 (see FIG. 18). At this time, only the load due to the biasing force of the torsion spring 315 is given to the player. As a result, when the player pushes the tilting device 310, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a large load on the player, so that the player can operate the operation device 300 comfortably.

As shown in FIG. 34, in the process of pushing the tilting device 310, the bottom plate portion 311a of the tilting device 310 pushes the hook-shaped portion 347d of the rotating claw member 347, causing the rotating claw member 347 to rotate backward. When the bottom plate portion 311a passes through the hook-shaped portion 347d by rotating in the direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 34) and subsequently pushing the tilting device 310. As shown in FIG. The rotating pawl member 347 returns to a position where it can be engaged with the tilting device 310 (rotates in the forward rolling direction). Therefore, the tilting device 310 is restricted from moving upward by the rotating claw member 347 .

Therefore, the player moves the tilting device 31 from the state in which the tilting device 310 shown in FIG. 33 is moved up and down.
After pressing 0 (see FIG. 34), if the player releases the tilting device 310
can be maintained in the first state.

Next, referring to FIGS. 35 to 37, after the player performs the pushing operation, the rotating claw member 3
An operation of setting the disc cam 344 to the second initial state without releasing the regulation of the tilting device 310 by 47 will be described. By this method, it is possible to alternately perform two kinds of vertical motions (tilting motions) of the tilting device 310, or to perform one of them continuously.

Figures 35 to 37 show the operating device 300 on line XXII-XXII of Figure 6(a).
is a cross-sectional view of. In FIG. 35, the disc cam 344 is rotated backward (as shown in FIG. 35) from the state shown in FIG.
clockwise) and the releasing member 346 is rotated forward (counterclockwise in FIG. 35). clockwise), and then the disc cam 344 rotates forward (counterclockwise in FIG. , the disk cam 344 rotates forward (counterclockwise in FIG. 36) to open the protective cover device 3
A state in which the left side detection sensor 353L of 50 is in an ON state is illustrated. 35 to 37, an example of a player's hand swinging from above on the tilting device 310 is illustrated by imaginary lines.

As shown in FIG. 35, when the disk cam 344 is rotated backward (clockwise in FIG. 34) from the state shown in FIG. 346d. In this case, the engagement rib 344c pushes up the release member 346 to change the posture of the release member 346. The stop, rotary pawl member 347 is shown in FIG.
5 is maintained.

35, the disk cam 344 is further rotated backward (clockwise in FIG. 35) to release the engagement between the engaging rib 344c and the releasing member 346. Regulation of the upward movement of the tilting device 310 can be maintained.

35, the disc cam 344 is further rotated backward (clockwise in FIG. 35), and then the rotating cam 344 is rotated forward (counterclockwise in FIG. 35), thereby , the drive device 340 can be in a second initial state.

In this embodiment, since there is no sensor for detecting the second initial state, it is difficult to accurately stop the disk cam 344 in the state shown in FIG. It is possible. Therefore, by operating the disc cam 344 from the state shown in FIG. 36, it is possible to perform the vertical motion (tilting motion) from the second initial state within the range of the angle D2, as described above.

Here, the player who pushes the tilting device 310 can perform an action of keeping his hand on the tilting device 310 after the pushing operation, even if there is no special display such as "long press". be.

This is, for example, an action that occurs when the user forgets to release the hand that pushed the tilting device 310 too much to concentrate on the performance. Therefore, even if the disk cam 344 performs a reciprocating motion (forward/reverse switching motion) for vertically moving (tilting motion) the tilting device 310 within the range of the angle D2,
The posture of the tilting device 310 cannot be changed. In this case, the rotation of the drive motor 342 is wasted, and if the rotation can be omitted, the life of the drive motor 342 can be extended.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the disc cam 344 is rotated forward (counterclockwise in FIG. 36) from the state shown in FIG.
5) maintains the ON state (while the tilting device 310 tilts to the first state or lower), the disk cam 344 is not reversely rotated, and the protective cover device 350 is shown in FIG. In the first initial state of the drive device 340 in which the left side detection sensor 353L (see FIG. 14) is turned ON, the rotation of the disk cam 344 is stopped (the driving of the drive motor 342 is stopped).

In the state shown in FIGS. 36 and 37, the player's hand is placed on the upper side of the tilting device 310, so that the tilting device 310 does not move upward.
7 is caused by rotating drive motor 342 in one direction.

Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 35 to 37, the player's hand continues to be placed on the upper side of the tilting device 310, and the driving motor 342 is reciprocated (normal/reverse switching) until the tilting device 310 cannot be moved up and down. operation) can be avoided, the load on the drive motor 342 can be reduced, and the motor life can be extended.

It should be noted that when the disc cam 344 is rotated by a predetermined amount (to the state shown in FIG. 31) from the state shown in FIG. Instead of rotating the plate cam 344, it may be controlled to immediately reversely rotate and return to the state shown in FIG. As a result, the driving device 340 can be quickly returned to the second initial state, and no unnecessary load is applied to the driving device 340, so that the motor life of the driving motor 342 (see FIG. 18) can be extended.

A device for preventing breakage of the driving device 340 will be described with reference to FIGS. 38 and 39. FIG. 38 is a cross-sectional view of the operation device 300 taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a), and FIG. 39 is a partial cross-sectional view of the operation device 300 taken along line XXXIX-XXXIX of FIG. Note that in FIG. 38, the tilting device 310 is in a state in which the tilting device 310 is in the second state.
The player's hand holding and fixing is shown in phantom lines, and in FIG. 39, illustration of the upper member of the main body cover 351 is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 38, when the player grabs and fixes the tilting device 310, the arm member 34
5 is restricted, disc cam 344 cannot be rotated from the state shown in FIG. Therefore, when the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 39) starts rotating, the drive motor 342
and the transmission gear 343b, and if left unattended, the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18) may fail.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the transmission gear 343b is configured to be idly rotatable with respect to the transmission shaft 343a that fixes the disk cam 344, so that the drive motor 342 can be prevented from malfunctioning.

That is, as shown in FIG. 39, the drive motor 342 starts driving with the disk cam 344 fixed, and the transmission gear 343b is urged in the rotational direction, thereby the clutch portion 343b.
2, 343c2, and the movable clutch 343c moves away from the transmission gear 343b. As a result, the transmission gear 343b is disengaged from the movable clutch 343c, and the transmission gear 343b can be idled. As a result, the drive motor 3
42 can be prevented from failing.

Note that when the player does not hold the tilting device 310, the tilting device 310 goes through the first state by rotating the disk cam 344 once due to the structure of the operation device 300. FIG. Therefore, in this embodiment, the lower frame member 3 is rotated while the drive motor 342 is rotated by a predetermined angle (for example, 360°).
20 is not in the ON state (when the tilting device 310 is not in the first state), it is determined that the player intentionally performs an unnecessary operation of holding and fixing the tilting device 310. Then, the rotation of the drive motor 342 is stopped while displaying, for example, a display on the third pattern display device 81 so as to stop the gripping operation.

As a result, it is possible to select a case in which the player intentionally performs an erroneous operation, and only at that time, it is possible to notify the user to stop the erroneous operation, and to stop the drive motor 342 at an early stage.
Failure can be prevented.

When the transmission gear 343b and the movable clutch 343c are separated from each other and a phase shift occurs,
The initial phase of the drive motor is shifted from the initial phase of the disc cam 344, which is in phase with the movable clutch 343c. Therefore, if the drive motor 342 is controlled continuously (with the number of steps, etc.) from the state before the phase shift occurs, the disc cam 344 cannot be operated accurately (the phase shift cannot be corrected).

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the left side detection sensor 353L of the protective cover member 350 is ON.
By detecting that the drive device 340 has entered the first initial state, it can be specified that the drive device 340 has entered the first initial state. By resetting the initial phase, even after phase shift occurs between the transmission gear 343b and the movable clutch 343c, the phase of the drive motor 342 and the phase of the disk cam 344 are controlled in a state where they are again matched. It can be performed.

As a result, when performing an effect by operating the tilting device 310, the drive motor 342
This rotation control prevents the tilting device 310 from being displaced from the movement that the tilting device 310 is actually to perform. Therefore, even after a phase shift occurs between the transmission gear 343b and the movable clutch 343c, the tilting device 310 can be properly operated to perform an effect.

Here, as shown in FIG. 39, the movable clutch 343c has a shape that idles with respect to the transmission gear 343b regardless of the rotation direction of the transmission gear 343b. The necessity will be explained below.

40, 41, 42 and 43 are cross-sectional views of the operating device 300 taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a). In addition, in FIG. 40, the disk cam 3 is shifted from the state shown in FIG.
44 is shown rotated 180 degrees in the forward rotation direction (arrow CCW direction), and FIG. 41 shows a state where the disc cam 344 is further rotated in the arrow CCW direction from the state shown in FIG. Further, in FIG. 42, the disk cam 344 is rotated backward (arrow CW direction) from the state shown in FIG.
43 shows a state in which the disk cam 344 has rotated 180 degrees from the state shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 41, when the disk cam 344 rotates in the arrow CCW direction, the tilting device 31
0 moves through the first state shown in FIG. 40 and moves toward the second state. On the other hand, Figure 4
3, when the disc cam 344 rotates in the direction of the arrow CW, the tilting device 310 is configured to maintain the first state shown in FIG.

This is not only because the engaging rib 344c moves away from the releasing member 346 as it moves from the state shown in FIG. 42 to the state shown in FIG.
This is because, when rotates in the direction of the arrow CW, even if the engaging rib 344c comes into contact with the releasing member 346, the fixation by the rotary pawl member 347 is not released. That is, when the disk cam 344 rotates in the direction of the arrow CW, the engagement rib 344c contacts the release member 346 from below. member 3
A load in the direction of pushing up 47 is not generated. Therefore, the fixation by the rotating claw member 347 is never released.

Here, when viewing the operation of the tilting device 310 from the player's point of view, FIGS. 38 to 40 and 42
Up to the first state shown in FIG. 4, both appear to be the same operation, and the movement after the first state is different from that shown in either FIG. 41 or FIG.

For example, the difference in operation after the tilting device 310 reaches the first state is determined by the drive motor 342
(See FIG. 39), but the difference in the drive sound due to the change in the number of revolutions of the drive motor 342 makes the player aware of the mode of control being performed, and the effect to be executed from now on. There is a risk that the player will grasp it and lose the player's interest. Also, the tilting device 3
10 is performed by suddenly stopping the drive motor 342, the load on the drive motor 342 increases, and the durability of the drive motor 342 may decrease.

On the other hand, according to this embodiment, when the tilting device 310 moves from the state shown in FIG.
The only difference is the direction of rotation, so it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the direction of rotation due to the drive mode (vibration, sound, etc.). For this reason, for example, when the degree of expectation for the presentation changes depending on whether the tilting device 310 is raised from the first state or is maintained in the first state, the tilting device 310 is moving toward the first state. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the change in the degree of expectation. Thereby, attention to the operation of the tilting device 310 can be improved.

On the other hand, by confirming whether the tilting device 310 reaches the first state and the drive motor 342 rotates to raise the tilting device 310 or maintain the first state,
Since the player can grasp the change in the degree of expectation of the performance, the player can understand the following when the tilting device 310 is in the second state (see FIG. 38) and the driving motor 342 moves toward the first state. It can be induced to watch the movement of the tilting device 310 .

That is, when the tilting device 310 is in the second state, it is possible to suppress the tilting device 310 from being held by the player. It is possible to prevent the device 340 from being overloaded.

In addition, since it is not necessary to suddenly stop the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 39) in order to perform the effect of suddenly stopping the tilting device 310, when the drive motor 342 is suddenly stopped, the drive motor 3
42 can be eliminated, and the durability of the drive motor 342 can be improved.

Next, referring to FIG. 44, regarding the case where the tilting device 310 moves up and down without being restricted by the rotating claw member 347 even when the player pushes down the tilting device 310 (third operation mode). explain.

FIG. 44 is a cross-sectional view of the operation device 300 taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a). 44, from the first initial state (see FIG. 25) of the drive device 340, the disc cam 3
44 is rotated forward by a predetermined amount (counterclockwise in FIG. 44), and the first
The disc cam 344 is held at an angle such that the overhanging portion 344c1 does not pass through the engaging portion 346d of the release member 346.
The outline of the tilting device 310 after rotating backward (clockwise in FIG. 44) is illustrated by imaginary lines.

As shown in FIG. 44, when the release member 346 is pushed down by the first projecting portion 344c1 of the disk cam 344, the first projecting portion 344c1 and the first retracting portion 344c2 are engaged with the releasing member 346. By reciprocatingly rotating the disc cam 344 while maintaining a positional relationship that does not pass through 346d, it is possible to reciprocate the tilting device 310 up and down while maintaining the posture of the release member 346. FIG.

In this case, the posture of the rotating claw member 347 changes in the backward rolling direction (
44 clockwise), the tilting device 31 is rotated in the manner shown in FIG.
0 moves up and down, even if the player pushes the tilting device 310, the tilting device 310 does not engage with the rotating claw member 347, and when the player releases the tilting device 310
moves above the first state (the position where the tilting device 310 is restricted from rising when the rotating claw member 347 engages with the tilting device 310) and continues the vertical movement. .

Therefore, for example, as the operation mode of the tilting device 310, the above-described first operation mode, the second operation mode, and the third operation mode shown in FIG. Manipulation of the device 300 can have non-traditional meanings. That is, according to the present embodiment, the tilting device 310 moves up and down in the first motion mode or the second motion mode only when the player pushes the tilting device 310 and then releases the tilting device 310. It is possible to know whether the robot was moving up and down in the third motion mode.

As a difference in production, when the tilting device 310 moves up and down in the first action mode and the second action mode (when the tilting device 310 is pushed in and then released, the tilting device 310 is maintained in the first state). case) is compared to the case where the tilting device 310 moves up and down in the third operation mode (the case where the tilting device 310 continues to move up and down even if the tilting device 310 is pushed in and then released). If a difference is provided in that the degree of expectation for a big win is high, the player recognizes the degree of expectation as to whether or not a big win will occur not only when the tilting device 310 is pushed in, but also when the player releases the tilting device 310. Since it is possible to obtain opportunities, it is possible to provide many timings at which the player pays attention to the operation device 300 . Thereby, the degree of attention of the operation device 300 can be improved.

Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 45 to 49. FIG. In the first embodiment, the case where the state of the rotating claw member 347 is maintained when the releasing member 346 is pushed up has been described. In addition, when the release member 2346 is pushed up, the slide claw member 23
48 is constructed in such a manner that it slides. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted. First, differences from the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46. FIG.

FIG. 45(a) is a side view of the slide claw member 2348 in the second embodiment, and FIG.
5(b) is a side view of the rotary plate member 2347, and FIG. 45(c) is a side view of the releasing member 2346. FIG.

46(a) and 46(b) are side views of the release member 2346, the rotary plate member 2347, and the slide claw member 2348, showing interlocking between the release member 2346, the rotary plate member 2347, and the slide claw member 2348. FIG. .

In FIG. 46(a), the rotary plate member 2347 is positioned against the release member 2346 by the second spring S.
46(b), the rotating plate member 2347 rotates to the terminal position against the biasing force of the second spring SP2 against the releasing member 2346. In FIG. Angular sub-states are shown. The state in which the releasing member 2346 is rotated by being brought into contact with the disk cam 344 is the state between the large angle state and the small angle state (projecting pin 3).
46b is arranged at the intermediate position of the guide slot 347b) (see FIG. 48).

As shown in FIGS. 45 and 46, the driving device 2340 (see FIG. 47) includes a shaft portion 341c (
47), a releasing member 2346, a rotating plate member 2347, and a tilting device 2310 (see FIG. 47) disposed on the opposite side of the releasing member 2346 across the rotating plate member 2347 ), and a slide claw member 2348 configured to be slidable along an arcuate trajectory centered on the rotation axis. In the releasing member 2346, the rotary plate member 2347, and the slide claw member 2348, the same reference numerals are given to the structures having the same functions as in the first embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 45(a), the slide claw member 2348 includes a curved portion 2348a formed in a curved shape so as to be slidably fitted in the rail portion 2347f, and an upper end portion of the curved portion 2348a. A hook-shaped portion 2348b that protrudes in a hook-like shape (to the left in FIG. 45), and the curved portion 2348a and the hook-shaped portion 2348b are stacked in the thickness direction (the direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 47(a)). Mainly, a reinforcing portion 2348c formed in a curved plate shape wider than the curved portion 2348a and a projecting pin 2348d projecting cylindrically toward the releasing member 2346 at the lower end of the reinforcing portion 2348c. Prepare.

The width of the curved portion 2348a is set to be slightly shorter than the separation width of the rail portions 2347f. Therefore, the curved portion 2348a of the slide claw member 2348
It is configured to be slidable with respect to the rotary plate member 2347 in a state of being internally fitted to 347f.

The hook-shaped portion 2348b has the same shape as the hook-shaped portion 347d of the first embodiment, and a magnetic material is provided on the lower surface thereof. This magnetic material is a bottom plate portion 2311 of a tilting device 2310, which will be described later.
It is a magnetic material for generating a magnetic force that attracts a.

The reinforcing portion 2348c is a portion facing the surface of the rotary plate member 2347 opposite to the surface facing the slide claw member 2348 in the assembled state (see FIG. 46), and is wider than the curved portion 2348a. , which reinforce the slide claw member 2348 .

The protruding pin 2348d is a cylindrical member that is inserted through the functional elongated hole 2346e of the release member 2346, and is composed of a metal rod that is inserted through and fixed to the main body plate portion 2348e. Release member 234
6 rotates relative to the rotating plate member 2347 so that the projecting pin 2348d moves into the function slot 23
Pushed by the side surface of 46e, the slide claw member 2348 slides.

The rotating plate member 2347 includes a shaft support hole 347a, a guide elongated hole 347b, an insertion hole 347c,
In addition to the pull-down hole 347e, a rail portion 2347f that guides the sliding motion of the slide claw member 2348, and a long support hole 2347g through which the projecting pin 2348d of the slide claw member 2348 is inserted are provided.

The rail portion 2347f is formed of a pair of plate-like portions extending from the upper end portion of the rotating plate member 2347. Side surfaces of the pair of plate-like portions facing each other are arranged such that the rotating plate member 2347 moves forward (see FIG. 3). 46 counterclockwise), the shank 314 (see FIG. 47)
It is formed from a curved shape along an arc centered at .

Like the rail portion 2347f, the support long hole 2347g is formed in a curved shape along an arc centered on the shaft portion 314 (see FIG. 47). A projecting pin 2348 is inserted into the support slot 2347g.
d is inserted, the slide claw member 2348 can be supported by the rail portion 2347f and the long support hole 2347g, and the slide claw member 2348 can be prevented from wobbling. can.

The releasing member 2346 includes a functional elongated hole 2346e that is elongated in the thickness direction, in addition to the pivot hole 346a, the projecting pin 346b, the insertion hole 346c, and the engaging portion 346d. .

The functional long hole 2346e is formed as a long hole having a width slightly wider than the diameter of the projecting pin 2348d of the slide pawl member 2348, and has a curved shape along an arc centered on the pivot hole 346a. a hole portion 2346e1, a second elongated hole portion 2346e2 extending from one end of the first elongated hole portion 2346e in an inclined direction toward the opposite direction of the pivot hole 346a,
Mainly provide

As shown in FIG. 46, when the release member 2346 rotates with respect to the rotary plate member 2347 and changes state between the large angle state and the small angle state, the slide pawl member 2348 is moved to the rail portion 234 .
It slides along the curved shape of 7f.

Since the functional long hole 2346e is formed as a long hole slightly wider than the diameter of the projecting pin 2348d, there is no time delay with respect to the movement of the releasing member 2346, and the moving speed of the releasing member 2346 is the same as the movement of the projecting pin 2348d. reflected in speed.

That is, if the releasing member 2346 is rotated quickly, the slide pawl member 2348 slides quickly.

As shown in FIG. 46(a), in the large angle state, even if the slide claw member 2348 is pulled in the sliding direction, the first arc portion 2346e1 is shaped along an arc centered on the shaft support hole 346a. Therefore, the load applied from the projecting pin 2348d to the functional elongated hole 2346e is directed in the linear direction passing through the shaft support hole 346a. Therefore, no force is generated to rotate the release member 2346, and the sliding movement of the slide claw member 2348 can be prevented.

That is, in this embodiment, the slide pawl member 2 is moved by rotating the release member 2346 .
Even if the slide claw member 347 slides, the slide claw member 2347 is not slid because the slide claw member 2347 is pulled in the large angle state. Therefore, similarly to the first embodiment, when the tilting device 2310 is arranged in the first state, the tilting device 2310 can be restricted from rising by engaging the slide claw member 2348 with the tilting device 2310 .

FIGS. 47 to 49 are diagrams illustrating changes in the attitude of the tilting device 2310 in chronological order, and are cross-sectional views of the operation device 2300 along the line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a). 47, the second retracting portion 344c4 of the disk cam 344 is the release member 234.
48, the disc cam 344 is rotated backward (clockwise in FIG. 47) from the state shown in FIG. 49, the disk cam 344 is rotated backward (clockwise in FIG. 48) from the state shown in FIG.
A state restored by the biasing force of 2 is illustrated.

In this embodiment, the bottom plate portion 2311a of the tilting device 2310 includes a magnet portion 2311a1 that is fixed to the upper side surface near the lower edge of the opening 311b and made of a magnetic material.

In the state shown in FIG. 47, the magnet portion 2311a1 and the hook-shaped portion 2348b are attracted by magnetic force. When the player pushes the tilting device 2310 from this state, the tilting device 23
Since the attraction between the magnet portion 2311 a 1 and the hook-shaped portion 2348 b is released due to the change in posture of 10, the tilting device 2310 does not apply a large load to the slide claw member 2348 .

As shown in FIG. 48, when the release member 2346 is pushed up, the slide pawl member 2348 slides upward in conjunction with the operation. At this time, the magnet portion 2311a1 and the hook-shaped portion 2348b are attracted to each other by magnetic force, so that if the releasing member 2346 operates quickly, the tilting device 2310 also operates quickly.

Therefore, by causing the slide claw member 2348 to slide at a speed different from the speed at which the tilting device 2310 rotates in the upward direction due to the biasing force of the torsion spring 315, the slide claw member 2348 rotates backward (clockwise in FIG. 48). The tilting device 2310 can be moved upward at a speed different from the upward movement when the tilting device 2310 is released from the upward movement restriction by rotating the tilting device 2310 (fourth operation mode). That is, the speed at which the tilting device 2310 moves upward can be changed.

As shown in FIG. 49, when the engagement between the disk cam 344 and the release member 2346 is released, the release member 2346 rotates backward (clockwise in FIG. 48) by the biasing force of the second spring SP2. As a result, the slide claw member 2348 is returned to the first state.

By enabling the operation modes shown in FIGS. 47 to 49, the tilting device 2310 can be operated in four operation modes in combination with the first to third operation modes described in the first embodiment. . As the number of operation modes increases, it becomes easier for the player to use the operation device 2300 as a means for foreseeing by associating the operation modes with the degree of expectation of the big win. Attention can be improved.

Further, according to this embodiment, when the tilting device 2310 is raised by raising the slide claw member 2348 as shown in FIG.
8b and the tilting device 2310 by magnetic attraction between the magnet portion 2311a1 of the tilting device 2310
Therefore, by securing a large magnetic force, the load applied to the tilting device 2310 can be increased compared to when the tilting device 2310 is lifted by the biasing force of the torsion spring 315 .

That is, normally, when the player puts his/her hand on the tilting device 2310 and the regulation by the slide claw member 2348 is released, the weight of the hand prevents the tilting device 2310 from rising. Also (even if the biasing force of the torsion spring 315 is not large enough to lift the weight of the hand), if the magnetic force is large enough to lift the weight of the hand, then FIG.
In the state shown in , the tilting device 2310 can be raised in a manner that lifts the player's hand.

As a result, when the tilting device 2310 is lifted, it is possible to provide a difference in the load in the upward direction (the force for maintaining the posture of the tilting device 2310 against the downward load). Therefore, a player who plays a game by putting his hand on the upper part of the tilting device 2310 before pushing the tilting device 2310 can feel the difference in load.

For example, by associating the difference in load with the degree of expectation of a big win, it becomes easier for the player to use the operation device 2300 as a means of foreseeing. can be improved.

Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 50 to 52. FIG. In the first embodiment, the detection sensors 324L and 324R can detect whether the tilting device 310 is in the first state or pushed by the player. is configured in such a manner that detection sensors 324L and 324R can detect whether the tilting device 3310 is in the state between the first state and the state pushed by the player, or pushed by the player. be. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 50 is a side view of the tilting device 3310 in the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 50, the tilting device 3310 includes a right detection piece 311gR extending downward from the bottom plate portion 311a of the case main body 3311, and the same position as the left detection piece 311gL in the first embodiment (rotation of the tilting device 3310). and a left detection piece 3311gL extending at a position opposite to the right detection piece 311gR with respect to a plane perpendicular to the axis and arranged at the center position in the rotation axis direction. The left detection piece 3311gL has a longer extension length than the right detection piece 311gR,
The extended length is shortened compared to the left detection piece 311gL in the first embodiment.

51(a) and 51(b) are side views of the operation device 3300. FIG. In addition, Fig. 5
1(a), the tilting device 3310 is in the first state, and in FIG. 51(b), the tilting device 331
A state in which 0 is being pressed is illustrated. Moreover, FIG.51(a) and FIG.51(b)
3, the outlines of the lower frame member 320, the upper frame member 330, and the protective cover device 350 are shown by imaginary lines, while the detection sensors 324L and 324R and the voice coil motor 352 are shown by solid lines. While being illustrated, the overlapping portions of the detection sensors 324L, 324R and the detection pieces 3311gL, 311gR are schematically illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 51(a), when the tilting device 3310 is in the first state, the left detection piece 3
311gL is not inserted into the left detection sensor 324L, and the right detection piece 311gR is not inserted into the right detection sensor 324R (the left detection sensor 324L is in the OFF state and the right detection sensor 324R is in the OFF state).

As shown in FIG. 51(b), when the tilting device 3310 is in the process of being pushed from the first state to the end of pushing, the left detection piece 3311gL is in contact with the left detection sensor 324L.
while the right detection piece 311gR is not inserted into the right detection sensor 324R (the left detection sensor 324L is ON and the right detection sensor 324R is OFF).
.

By detecting changes in the states of these detection sensors 324L and 324R, when the tilting device 3310 is in the state between the first state and the state pushed to the end of pushing, it is possible to detect the state in the middle of pushing. , or on the way back.

That is, when the left side detection sensor 324L is in the ON state and the right side detection sensor 324R is in the OFF state, the tilting device 3310 is in the middle state between the first state and the state pushed to the end of pushing. The left side detection sensor 324L is in the OFF state and the right side detection sensor 324
By detecting that R has changed from the OFF state, it can be determined that the tilting device 3310 is in the middle of the pushing operation.

52(a) and 52(b) are side views of the operation device 3300. FIG. In addition, Fig. 5
In 2(a), the tilting device 3310 is shown pushed to the end of the push, and FIG.
At 2(b), the tilting device 3310 is shown from the end of the push to the first state. 51(a) and 51(b), the outer shapes of the lower frame member 320, the upper frame member 330, and the protective cover device 350 are shown in imaginary lines for easy understanding. The detection sensors 324L, 324R and the voice coil motor 352 are illustrated by solid lines, and the overlapping portions of the detection sensors 324L, 324R and the detection pieces 3311gL, 311gR are schematically illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 52(a), when the tilting device 3310 is pushed to the end of the push, the left detection piece 3311gL is inserted through the left detection sensor 324L and the right detection piece 33
11gR is inserted into the right detection sensor 324R (the left detection sensor 324L is ON and the right detection sensor 324R is ON).

As shown in FIG. 52(b), when the tilting device 3310 is in a state between the first state and the state arranged at the end of the push, the left detection piece 3311gL is inserted into the left detection sensor 324L while the left detection sensor 324L is inserted. , the right detection piece 311gR is not inserted into the right detection sensor 324R (the left detection sensor 324L is ON and the right detection sensor 324R is OFF).

When the left side detection sensor 324L is in the ON state and the right side detection sensor 324R is in the OFF state, the tilting device 3310 is in the middle state between the first state and the state pushed to the end of pushing. The sensor 324L is ON and the right detection sensor 324R is ON
By detecting that the state has changed from the state, it can be determined that the tilting device 3310 is in the process of returning to the first state.

Here, the driving force of the voice coil motor 352 is transmitted to the tilting device 3310 so that the tilting device 3
310, rather than having the voice coil motor 352 collide with the tilting device 3310 while the tilting device 3310 moves downward, the voice coil motor 352 tilts while the tilting device 3310 moves upward. Collision with the device 3310 can provide a load that effectively raises the tilting device 3310 .

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 52(b), the operation direction of the tilting device 3310 is determined from the detection history of the detection sensors 324L and 324R. By driving the voice coil motor 352 when it is not in use, the driving force of the voice coil motor 352 can be effectively transmitted to the tilting device 3310, and the rising speed of the tilting device 3310 can be improved.

Here, when the biasing force of the torsion spring 315 is suppressed in order to suppress the driving force of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18), the tilting device 3 after the tilting device 3310 is pushed from the first state.
The rising speed of 310 slows down. In this case, even if the player repeatedly hits the tilting device 3310, the rising motion of the tilting device 3310 does not follow the movement of the player's hand, and the repeated hitting operation cannot be comfortably performed.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, by effectively using the driving force of the voice coil motor 352, the tilting device 3310 is more stable than when the tilting device 3310 moves upward only by the biasing force of the torsion spring 315. The tilting device 3310 can improve the speed of ascending.
It is possible to comfortably perform the continuous hit operation.

Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 53 to 55. FIG. In the first embodiment, the detection sensors 324L and 324R can detect whether the tilting device 310 is in the first state or pushed by the player. 3 detects the operating speed of the tilting device 4310 while it is changing from the second state to the first state, and changes the driving method of the voice coil motor 352 according to the detection result. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 53 is a side view of the tilting device 4310 in the fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 53, the tilting device 4310 includes a front detection piece 4311k projecting in a plate shape from the front side of the protruding projecting portion 311j of the case body 4311. As shown in FIG.

The front detection piece 4311k is configured to be able to pass through detection grooves (slits) of an upper detection sensor 4321d and a lower detection sensor 4321e (see FIG. 54) disposed on the bottom plate portion 4321 of the lower frame member 4320. This portion is for determining the operation speed of the tilting device 4310 based on the detection timing of the sensors 4321d and 4321e.

FIGS. 54(a) and 54(b) are side views of the operation device 4300 illustrating the depression operation of the operation device 4300 in chronological order. In addition, in FIG. 54(a), the tilting device 431
0 is the second state, and in FIG. 54(b), the tilting device 4310 is shifted from the state shown in FIG.
is pushed and the front detection piece 4311k passes the lower detection sensor 4321e downward. 54(a) and 54(b), the outer shapes of the lower frame member 4320, the upper frame member 330, and the protective cover device 350 are shown in phantom lines for easy understanding. Detection sensors 324L, 324R, 4321d, 4321e and voice coil motor 352 are shown in solid lines.

As shown in FIGS. 54(a) and 54(b), the lower frame member 4320 includes an upper detection sensor 4321d and a lower detection sensor 4321e on the front side portion of the bottom plate portion 4321. As shown in FIGS. The upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e are photocoupler-type sensors, and are arranged in such a manner that the detection groove is oriented in a direction that allows the front detection piece 4311k to pass through. In this embodiment, the upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e are arranged on an arc orbit around the rotation axis of the tilting device 4310 at intervals of 20°.

When the state shown in FIG. 54(a) changes to the state shown in FIG.
321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e in order. By detecting the timing interval of the passage, it is possible to determine whether the operating speed of the tilting device 4310 is large or small, and whether to drive the voice coil motor 352 is selected based on the determination.

Here, when the tilting device 4310 is pushed from the second position, the length of the push is long (because the acceleration period is long). The upper limit of the operating speed of 4310 is increased. Therefore, if there is no means of deceleration, the tilting device 4310 must be made strong as a safety measure for when the player pushes with all his might, and the tilting device 4310 tends to be heavy. A challenge arises.

It is also possible to incorporate an elastic spring that exerts a biasing force on the tilting device 4310 only when the tilting device 4310 is positioned near the push end, and the tilting device 4310 can be decelerated by the biasing force of the elastic spring. However, in this case, for a player with weak strength or a player who decides to perform the pressing operation softly, the increased reaction force in the vicinity of the pressing position becomes a burden on the pressing operation, and the player is likely to feel fatigued. Therefore, there is a possibility that the pushing operation of the tilting device 4310 cannot be performed comfortably.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e
By determining whether or not to drive the voice coil motor 352 based on the interval between the timings of switching between the ON state and the OFF state, a strong reaction force can be applied to the tilting device 4310 even when it is not necessary. can be prevented.

That is, for example, when the interval between timings at which the upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e switch between the ON state and the OFF state, respectively, is longer than a predetermined period (for example, 1 second), the voice coil motor 352 is turned on. While it is not driven, if the timing interval described above is shorter than the predetermined period, the voice coil motor 352 is controlled to be driven.

As a result, when the operation speed of the pushing operation of the tilting device 4310 is slow, the reaction force that the player feels from the tilting device 4310 is only the urging force generated by the torsion spring 315, and the tilting device 4310 can be easily moved even with a weak force. Push operation is possible.

Furthermore, when the operation speed of the pushing operation of the tilting device 4310 is fast, the tilting device 4310
As a reaction force against this, not only the biasing force generated by the torsion spring 315 but also the driving force generated by the voice coil motor 352 can be applied at the end of the pushing. Therefore, the operation speed of the tilting device 4310 can be suppressed.

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG.
11j is pushed out below the lower frame member 4320, the voice coil motor 352 is driven, and the movable member of the voice coil motor 352 is preliminarily pushed out to the side close to the tilting device 4310. be.

As a result, the tilting device 4310 is tilted while the movable member of the voice coil motor 352 is being pushed out.
and the voice coil motor 352, the impact applied to the tilting device 4310 can be suppressed.

55(a) and 55(b) are side views of the operation device 4300. FIG. In addition, Fig. 5
5(a) shows a state in which the tilting device 4310 is being pushed from the first state to the push end, and FIG. 55(b) shows a state where the tilting device 4310 has reached the push end.

In addition, in FIGS. 55(a) and 55(b), for ease of understanding, the lower frame member 4
320, the upper frame member 330 and the protective cover device 350 are shown in phantom lines,
Each detection sensor 324L, 324R, 4321d, 4321e and voice coil motor 35
2 are shown in solid lines.

As shown in FIG. 55(a), when the tilting device 4310 is pushed in at high speed from the second state, the tilting device 4310 protrudes convexly in the middle of reaching the end of pushing from the first state. The setting portion 311j and the voice coil motor 352 are brought into contact with each other.

By pushing the tilting device 4310, the direction in which the projecting portion 311j moves the voice coil motor 352 becomes the direction along the extension direction D41 of the voice coil motor 352, so that the voice coil motor 352 is retracted. It is possible to consume the force of the pushing operation to move to. Therefore, while the tilting device 4310 continues to move, the driving force of the voice coil motor 352 can apply a load in the direction of pushing up the tilting device 4310, and the tilting device 4310 can be decelerated.

At this time, the voice coil motor 352 does not have a structure that applies a load by friction like a disc brake, but a structure that applies a load by electromagnetic force, so damage to members can be suppressed and durability can be ensured.

In the state shown in FIG. 55(a), the overhang projecting portion 311j of the tilting device 4310 and the voice coil motor 352 are already in contact with each other, so the state shown in FIG. By gradually increasing the current supplied to the voice coil motor 352 from the ON state, the reaction force applied from the voice coil motor 352 to the tilting device 4310 can be gradually increased.

Therefore, the tilting device 4310 decelerates from the first state to the end of pushing while suppressing the reaction force felt by the player at the timing when the overhanging projecting portion 311j of the tilting device 4310 and the voice coil motor 352 come into contact with each other. You can improve the effect.

As shown in FIG. 55(b), when the tilting device 4310 is placed at the push end position, the right detection sensor 324R is turned on. In this state, the tilting device 4310 comes into contact with the lower frame member 4320 in the rotational direction and stops descending. Therefore, it becomes unnecessary to decelerate the tilting device 4310 by the voice coil motor 352 .

In this embodiment, in the state shown in FIG. 55(b), the voice coil motor 352 vibrates (moves in the extension direction and in the contraction direction repeatedly). This will
After pushing the tilting device 4310 to the end of the pushing operation, an effect of transmitting vibration to the player who keeps putting his hand on the tilting device 4310 can be performed.

That is, the voice coil motor 352 can be used for the purpose of reducing the speed of the pushing operation of the tilting device 4310 and for the purpose of vibrating the tilting device 4310 arranged at the pushing end position to perform a vibration effect.

Next, an operation device 5300 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 56 to 68. FIG.

In the first embodiment, by vibrating the voice coil motor 352, the tilting device 31
Although the case where vibration is transmitted to the player who presses 0 has been described, the operation device 5300 in the fifth embodiment includes a lower frame member 5320 and a weight member 5 arranged at a position where the center of gravity is eccentric.
412 is provided with a drive motor 5411, and based on the rotation of the drive motor 5411, vibration is transmitted to the player who touches the lower frame member 5320. FIG. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted. First, differences in configuration from the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 56 and 57. FIG.

FIG. 56 is an exploded front perspective view of the operation device 5300 in the fifth embodiment, and FIG.
7 is an exploded rear perspective view of the operation device 5300. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 56 and 57, the operation device 5300 is different from the operation device 300 in the first embodiment in that the lower frame member 320 is the lower frame member 5320, and the driving device 340
is a driving device 5340, and the protective cover member 350 to the voice coil motor 35
2 is omitted. The tilting device 310 and the upper frame member 330 are configured in the same manner as in the first embodiment.

A vibrating device 5400 having a drive motor 5411 is arranged on the lower frame member 5320, and a disk cam 5344 fixed to the transmission shaft rod 5343 with one touch is arranged on the drive device 5340. As shown in FIG. First, the vibration device 5400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 to 61, and then the disc cam 5344 will be described.

58 is an exploded front perspective view of the lower frame member 5320 and the vibration device 5400. FIG. As shown in FIG. 58, the vibration device 5400 includes a transmission device 5 that rotates a fan-shaped weight member 5412.
410, a transmission device 5410, a flexible member 5420 made of a flexible material and accommodating a transmission device 5410 and a drive motor 5411 of the transmission device 5410, a bottomed dish shape with an open upper surface, a weight member 5412 and a flexible member 5420. The lower frame member 53
and a housing member 5430 that is fastened and fixed to the bottom plate portion 5321 of 20 .

The transmission device 5410 includes a drive motor 5411 formed of a rotationally driven electric motor, and a weight member 5412 having a fan-shaped outer shape and having a portion corresponding to the pivot of the fan pivotally supported on the rotation shaft of the drive motor 5411. and are mainly provided.

The drive motor 5411 is provided with a pair of left and right fixed portions 5411a formed from a metal material in a flange shape on the side surface on which the shaft protrudes.

The weight member 5412 has a radius Ra and is eccentrically supported with respect to the rotating shaft of the driving motor 5411 . Therefore, when the driving motor 5411 rotates, the position of the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 changes, and the driving motor 5411 is configured to vibrate together.

The flexible member 5420 has a main body portion 5421 in the shape of a cylindrical container in which the drive motor 5411 is inserted along the axial direction and has a bottom on the side opposite to the side into which the drive motor 5411 is inserted. A pair of rib-shaped leg portions 5422 protruding in the left and right direction and downward in the radial direction of the main body 5421 and the rib-shaped leg portions 5422 protruding left and right on the open side of the main body 5421 are connected to each other. Posture maintaining portion 5423 in which fixing portion 5411a is embedded
and a pair of projecting leg portions 5424 projecting upward from the upper surface of the body portion 5421 in the form of a pair of columns.

The main body portion 5421 has the same depth as the length of the drive motor 5411 in the axial direction, and has a depth of a container shape. Therefore, when the drive motor 5411 is fully inserted into the body portion 5421, the shaft side end face of the drive motor 5411 and the opening side end face of the body portion 5421 are formed on the same plane. Also, in this state, the fixing portion 5411a is embedded in the posture maintaining portion 5423 .

The rib-shaped leg portions 5422 are formed on the left and right sides and the lower side of the main body portion 5421, but the rib-shaped leg portions 5422 on the left and right sides are formed on the left and right sides by the amount of the posture maintaining portions 5423 arranged on the left and right sides. Deformation resistance is greater than that of the rib-like leg portion 5422 on the lower side.

Since the projecting leg portion 5424 is projectingly provided in a columnar shape, it is possible to easily concentrate the load on one point in contact with the tilting device 310 described later. Therefore, when the flexible member 5420 is deformed by the tilting of the tilting device 310, the tilting angle of the tilting device 310 corresponds to the tilting angle of the flexible member 54.
The resolution of the 20 degrees of deformation can be made finer.

The accommodating member 5430 includes a first accommodating portion 5431 in which the drive motor 5411 and the flexible member 5420 are accommodated, and a weight member 5 adjacent to the first accommodating portion 5431 in the assembled state.
412 are accommodated in the second accommodation portion 5432, and the first accommodation portion 5431 and the second accommodation portion 5
A groove 5433 that is recessed downward from the upper surface of the connection surface of 432 is mainly provided.

The depth of the first receiving portion 5431 is increased by the flexible member 54 until the lower rib leg 5422 bottoms out.
20 is inserted and the load applied at the time of insertion is released (assembly load released state), the protruding leg portion 5424 protrudes from the upper surface.

The depth of the second housing portion 5432 is a depth that is recessed to the outside of the rotation trajectory of the weight member 5412 in the assembly load release state, while the player applies a load to the protruding leg portion 5424 and the flexible member. The depth is such that it interferes with the rotational trajectory of the weight member 5412 when the weight member 5420 is deformed (in an assembly load state).

The recessed groove 5433 has a width slightly larger than the diameter of the rotating shaft of the drive motor 5411 and a depth extending slightly below the rotating shaft of the drive motor 5411 in the assembly load state. be.

59(a) is a side view of the lower frame member 5320, FIG. 59(b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the lower frame member 5320 along line LIXb-LIXb of FIG. 59(a), and FIG. )teeth,
FIG. 59(a) is a partial top view of the lower frame member 5320 viewed in the direction of arrow LIXc in FIG. 59(a). In addition, in FIG.59(a), the part corresponding to the vibration apparatus 5400 is partially cross-sectionally viewed. again,
In FIG. 59(a), the first area S51, which is the area occupied by the tilting device 310 when the tilting device 310 is in the first state, and the first region S51, which is the region where the tilting device 310 is pushed three times from the first state, is pushed. An end region S52, which is the region occupied by the tilting device 310 when placed in the end position, is shown in phantom lines.

As shown in FIG. 59(a), a projecting leg portion 5424 is projected in a direction along a circular orbit formed with the central axis of the circular arc of the lower bearing portion 323 as a rotation axis. Therefore, the tilting device 310
(See FIG. 56), the maximum amount of deformation of the projecting leg portion 5424 can be ensured with respect to the angle change.

As shown in FIG. 59( b ), the weight member 5412 is separated from the second accommodating portion 5432 in the assembled load-released state in which no load is applied to the projecting leg portion 5424 .

As shown in FIG. 59(c), the projecting legs 5424 are arranged symmetrically with respect to the center line of the lower frame member 5320 when viewed in the extension direction. Therefore, since the projecting leg portion 5424 can be evenly pushed in on the bottom surface of the tilting device 310, it is possible to prevent the flexible member 5420 from tilting to the left or right (inclining to the left or right in the plane of FIG. 59(b)) when pushed. The protruding leg portion 5424 can be pushed in while maintaining the posture shown in FIG. 59(b).

As shown in FIG. 59(c), the bottom plate portion 5321 of the lower frame member 5320 has a projecting leg portion 5424.
A pair of through-holes 5321d are provided so that they can be inserted. Since the through-hole 5321d has a lateral width slightly larger than the diameter of the projecting leg portion 5424, the tilting device 310 is pushed by the player, and the bottom surface of the tilting device 310 is projected. When pressed against the leg portion 5424, the lateral deformation of the projecting leg portion 5424 can be suppressed.
Therefore, deformation of the shape of the protruding leg portion 5424 is suppressed, and the main body portion 5421 along with the protruding leg portion 5424 is
can be made easier to translate downward (downward in FIG. 59(b)).

60(a) and 60(b) are cross-sectional views of the vibration device 5400 along line LXa-LXa of FIG. 59(a). In addition, FIG. 60(a) illustrates the assembly load release state, and FIG.
In 0(b), the assembly load state after the projecting leg portion 5424 is pushed into the first accommodation portion 5431 in the state where the tilting device 310 occupies the terminal end region S52 (see FIG. 59(a)) is illustrated. Note that the outlines of the second accommodating portion 5432 and the weight member 5412 are shown by imaginary lines.

As shown in FIGS. 60(a) and 60(b), the vibration device 540
0 is applied to the assembly load state, the projecting leg portion 5424 and the lower rib-like leg portion 5
422 is deformed, the drive motor 5411 and weight member 5412 are displaced downward.

In the assembly load state, as shown in FIG. 60(b), the flexible member 5420 is elastically deformed by being pushed by the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 57). The elastic recovery force of this deformation acts as a force pushing back the tilting device 310, and the force increases as the tilting device 310 approaches the flexible member 5420. 310 can mitigate the impact when it collides with the lower frame member 5320 (see FIG. 57).
Moreover, since the load is due to the elastic recovery force, the load can be generated without time delay even when the tilting device 310 moves at high speed.

Here, when the biasing force of the torsion spring 315 is suppressed in order to suppress the driving force of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 57), from the first state (the state in which the tilting device 310 is arranged at the rising end, see FIG. 38) The rising speed of the tilting device 310 after the pushing operation of the tilting device 310 is slowed down. In this case, even if the player repeatedly hits the tilting device 310, the rising motion of the tilting device 310 does not follow the movement of the player's hand, and the repeated hitting operation cannot be comfortably performed.

In contrast, according to the present embodiment, the elastic recovery force of the flexible member 5420 is effectively used, so that the tilting device 310 is more stable than when the tilting device 310 is raised only by the biasing force of the torsion spring 315. Since the rising speed can be improved, the tilting device 310 can be comfortably hit repeatedly.

As shown in FIG. 60(a), in the assembly load released state, the weight member 5412 does not contact the inner wall of the second housing portion 5432 regardless of its posture. Therefore, even if the drive motor 5411 starts to be driven in the assembly load-released state, vibration due to contact between the weight member 5412 and the second housing portion 5432 does not occur.

In addition, the vibration of the drive motor 5411 itself and the slight vibration generated in the drive motor 5411 due to the movement of the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 are absorbed by the flexibility of the flexible member 5420,
Propagation to 0 is prevented. This makes it difficult for the player to grasp the drive start timing of the drive motor 5411 .

As shown in FIG. 60(b), in the assembly load state, the body portion 542 of the flexible member 5420
1 is constructed in a mode in which vertical displacement is permitted by deformation of the upper projecting leg portion 5424 and the lower rib-like leg portion 5422 .

When the flexible member 5420 moves downward, the state of the rib-like leg portion 5422 arranged on the lower side of the main body portion 5421 changes to a state of being more vertically compressed, and the rib-like leg portion 5422 hardens slightly. Therefore, the vibration damping effect of the rib-shaped leg portion 5422 can be weakened, and the vibration generated by the vibrating device 5400 can be easily transmitted to the player.

Also, the main body portion 5421 of the flexible member 5420 is formed in a cylindrical shape, and the rib-like leg portion 54 on the lower side
22 extend along the axial direction of the cylinder of the body portion 5421 and are arranged in a left and right pair at uniform intervals from the center axis to the left and right. The radially outer end portion of 5422 is deformed in such a manner that it moves left and right outward (the side with the smaller resistance at the connection position between main body portion 5421 and rib-like leg portion 5422) (see FIG. 60(b)).
In this case, since the projecting direction of the rib-shaped leg portion 5422 arranged on the lower side of the main body portion 5421 has a left-right component, the elastic force of the rib-shaped leg portion 5422 can act in the left-right direction. . Therefore, in the assembly load state, the lateral load that may occur when the weight member 5421 collides with the second housing portion 5432 is
22 can be partially absorbed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the displacement of the drive motor 5411 in the left-right direction.

Figures 61(a) and 61(b) are cross-sectional views of the transmission device 5410 and the housing member 5430 taken along line LIXb-LIXb of Figure 59(a).

FIGS. 61(a) and 61(b) show the assembly load state, FIG. 61(a) shows the state where the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 is located above the rotation axis, and FIG. In b), the state in which the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 is arranged below the rotation axis is illustrated. Fig. 6
In 1(a) and FIG. 61(b), the tilting device 310 is pushed by the player, and the end region S52
A state of the vibrating device 5400 in a state of occupying is illustrated.

The operation of transmission device 5410 based on the rotation of weight member 5412 will be described. First, in the present embodiment, when the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 is positioned upward in the assembly load state, the driving motor 5411 rotates to a position where the distance from the lower base of the second housing portion 5432 is the distance Q1. Axes are placed. In this embodiment, the distance Q1 is equal to the radius Ra of the weight member 5412 (Q1=Ra).

In other words, when the weight member 5412 rotates in the assembly load state, the outer peripheral side surface of the weight member 5412 moves toward the second accommodation portion 543 .
2 abuts (rubs). Therefore, the vibration caused by the rotation of the weight member 5412 changes compared to the state in which the assembly load is released, and a different kind of vibration can be transmitted to the player.

Due to the contact between the weight member 5412 and the second accommodation portion 5432, the weight member 5412
upward (upward in FIG. 61(b)). Here, since the weight member 5412 and the second housing portion 5432 move toward and away from each other along the moving direction of the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 57), the direction of the repulsive force is the direction along the moving direction of the tilting device 310 (upward). ) can be easily directed. This repulsive force causes the drive motor 5411 that supports the weight member 5412 and the flexible member 5 to move.
420 moves upward, and the force of the flexible member 5420 pushing back the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 57) upward (in the moving direction of the tilting device 310) can be reinforced.

In this way, the force pushing the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 57) upward is applied to the flexible member 542.
The force that pushes back the tilting device 310 is adjusted by combining the force generated as the elastic recovery force of 0 and the force generated by the contact between the weight member 5412 and the second housing portion 5432, which are generated separately. be able to.

That is, after the tilting device 310 starts contacting the projecting leg portion 5424, the end region S52 (FIG. 59)
(a)), the elastic recovery force of the flexible member 5420 is generated as a force pushing back the tilting device 310, and after the tilting device 310 reaches the end region S52, the weight member 5412
and the second receiving portion 5432 are added to the force pushing back the tilting device 310 . As a result, the force pushing back the tilting device 310 can be particularly increased in the vicinity of the end region S52, so that the tilting device 310 can be easily operated and the impact during the pushing operation can be reduced. This adjustment can be performed while the drive motor 5411 is kept rotating. Therefore, complicated control can be made unnecessary.

In this embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the length of the left detection piece 311gL and the length of the right detection piece 311gR are different (see FIG. 57). ) is higher than a specific speed (for example, 40 km/h), and the placement of the weight member 5412 is changed according to the determined operating speed.

For example, if the operating speed of the tilting device 310 is determined to be greater than a specific speed, the flexible member 5420 may be used to reduce the impact when the tilting device 310 collides with the lower frame member 5320.
is desired to increase the load on the tilting device 310 . Therefore, in the present embodiment, when it is determined that the operating speed of the tilting device 310 is higher than a specific speed, the weight member 5412 is moved in advance so as to assume the downward posture (see FIG. 61(b)).

As a result, the end of the lowering motion of the drive motor 5411 is positioned so that the rotary shaft of the drive motor 5411
2 can be raised to a position that is raised by a radius Ra from the lower end of the inner wall of 2. As a result, compared to the case where the weight member 5432 is arranged upward (see FIG. 61(a)) (when it can be lowered downward from the state shown in FIG. 61(a)), the upper side of the drive motor 5411 The movable area of the flexible member 5420 can be narrowed in the vertical direction.

That is, the compression dimension of the flexible member 5420 and the upper portion of the driving motor 5411 can be increased when the projecting leg 5424 is pushed down by the tilting device 310 by the same amount. Therefore, the repulsive force applied from the flexible member 5420 to the tilting device 310 can be increased, and the load for braking the tilting device 310 can be increased.

Although not described in this embodiment, the elastic recovery force of the flexible member 5420 generates the force to push back the tilting device 310 by keeping the driving motor 5411 stopped upward (see FIG. 61(a)). It is also possible to prevent the force due to contact between the weight member 5412 and the second housing portion 5432 from being generated.

Here, contact between the members occurs between the transmission device 5410 and the housing member 5430 fastened and fixed to the lower frame member 5320 , not between the tilting device 310 . Therefore, it is possible to change the vibration transmitted to the hand of the player who pushes the tilting device 310 and to widen the transmission range of the vibration. That is, the vibration can be transmitted to a portion other than the portion touching the tilting device 310, for example, the portion touching the frame of the pachinko machine 10. - 特許庁

That is, when the player pushes the tilting device 310, the vibration can be transmitted to the lower frame member 5320, so that the palm or a part of the side of the hand placed on the lower frame member 5320 as a fulcrum for pushing can be moved. Vibration can be transmitted to the player through the device. As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the vibration is not transmitted to the player.

As shown in FIGS. 61(a) and 61(b), the player tilts the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 56).
is pushed in, and the weight member 5
412 and the housing member 5430 come into contact with each other to generate vibration.

Therefore, even if the drive motor 5411 is in a rotating state in advance, the timing at which the vibration is transmitted to the player can be limited to the timing at which the tilting device 310 is pushed. Vibration can be easily transmitted to the player as compared with the case where vibration is generated from the body.

That is, when the player pushes the tilting device 310 in such a manner that the hand is released immediately after pushing the tilting device 310 (pulse pushing state), vibration is generated after detecting that the tilting device 310 has been pushed. In this case, there is a possibility that vibration cannot be generated (vibration is not started in time) before the player releases his/her hand, and the player may not be able to experience the effects of the vibration. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the drive motor 5411 rotates before the tilting device 310 is pushed in, and preparations for vibration generation are completed. As a result, the player can experience the effect of the vibration.

In addition, the flexibility of the flexible member 5420 can prevent the vibration of the main body of the drive motor 5411 from being transmitted to the first accommodating portion 5431 . Therefore, the driving motor 5411
is driven, it is possible to prevent the vibration from being transmitted to the player before the tilting device 310 is pushed.

Therefore, by driving the drive motor 5411 in advance before the tilting device 310 is pushed, a state in which vibration is transmitted by pushing the tilting device 310 can be realized.

Next, the driving device 5340 will be described. The driving device 5340 differs from the driving device 340 in the first embodiment in the disc cam 5344 and the transmission shaft 5343 . Others are the same as those of the driving device 340 of the first embodiment, so the same reference numerals are given and the description thereof is omitted.

62 is an exploded front perspective view of drive 5340. FIG. As shown in FIG. 62, an elongated concave portion C1 is formed in the central portion of a pair of disc cams 5344, which are composed of a left disc cam 5344L and a right disc cam 5344R.

FIG. 63(a) is a front perspective view of the right disc cam 5344R, and FIG. 63(b) is a rear perspective view of the right disc cam 5344R. Note that the right disc cam 5344R and the left disc cam 534R
4L is composed of a symmetrical shape, so only the right disc cam 5344R will be described, and the description of the left disc cam 5344L will be omitted.

The difference between the right disk cam 5344R and the right disk cam 344R in the first embodiment is that a pair of clamping arm portions A1 that sandwich the transmission shaft rod 5343 are arranged at the connecting portion with the transmission shaft rod 5343. is.

That is, the right disc cam 5344R is separated from the disc portion by the circular rib 344 at its center position.
A support cylinder P1 that extends in a cylindrical shape toward the side where b is disposed, and an axially symmetric long hole shape extending along the axial direction of the support cylinder P1 to a position about half the extension distance. A long hole recess C1 recessed from the disc portion and an axial end portion of the support cylinder portion P1 recessed by the long hole recess C1 extend toward the disc portion side along the axial direction. and a pair of holding arms A1.

The support cylinder portion P1 is a portion that supports the columnar member 5343a by making its inner diameter equal to the diameter of the columnar member 5343a of the transmission shaft 5343 . The support cylinder portion P1 includes a deformed portion P1a that is not recessed in the long hole recess C1 and remains in the same axial arrangement as the region recessed in the long hole recess C1.

The deformed portion P1a is a pair of connecting rod portions arranged to sandwich the elongated concave portion C1, and is elastically deformed when the right disc cam 5344R is axially deformed with respect to the transmission shaft rod 5343 (see FIG. 62). configured as a part to

The long hole recess C1 is formed with a width dimension slightly longer than the width dimension of the clamping arm portion A1. Therefore, the holding arms A1 are arranged in a direction (
longitudinal direction).

In addition, the opposing surface of the long hole recess C1 is configured to have a shape that engages with the D-shape of the fixing portion 5343a1 of the cylindrical member 5343a. That is, one side surface is formed as a flat surface, and the other side surface is formed as an arc shape along the outer shape of the cylindrical member 5343a. As a result, the cylindrical member 5
343 a can be prevented from rotating relative to the disc cam 5344 .

The holding arm portion A1 is formed of a pair of arm portions, from the side facing the other arm,
It has an engagement projection A1a projecting in a direction approaching the arm of the other party. Engagement protrusion A1a
engages with the tip of the cylindrical member 5343a when connected to the transmission shaft 5343, and prevents the cylindrical member 5343a from coming off the disk cam 5344.

The shape of the tip of the engagement projection A1a corresponds to the engagement groove 5343a of the cylindrical member 5343a (see FIG. 64).
It consists of a shape that matches the arc shape of 4. As a result, the radial overlapping length (Fig. 65 (b) length in the left-right direction) can be ensured to be long.

The engaging convex portion A1a has a side surface of the right disc cam 5344R on the side closer to the connecting pin 344d in the axial direction, and a recessed surface portion C2 (a long hole recessed portion) recessed along the shaft near the shaft. It is arranged at a position that is the plane position with the side surface on the opening side of C1.

As a result, the engagement between the columnar member 5343a and the engagement projection A1a can be completed on the support cylinder P1 side (lower side in FIG. 63(b)) than the recessed surface portion C2 (FIG. 65(b)). reference). Therefore, on the outside of the recessed surface portion C2 (the upper side in FIG. 63(b)), compared with the case where the e-ring is fitted in the cylindrical member 5343a, the length of the cylindrical member 5343a protruding from the recessed surface portion C2 is
It can be shortened by the thickness of the e-ring (see FIG. 65(b)).

In addition, there is no need to secure a space for fitting the e-ring (a space required for sliding the e-ring in contact with the surface) in the extending direction (direction parallel to the surface) of the right disk cam 5344R. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the width of the recess (the width in the radial direction) of the recessed surface portion C2.
Thereby, the degree of freedom in designing the shape of the right disk cam 5344R can be improved.

The transmission shaft rod 5343 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 64 shows the transmission shaft rod 5343
is a front exploded perspective view of the. A difference between the transmission shaft rod 5343 and the transmission shaft rod 353 in the first embodiment is a cylindrical member 5343a.

The cylindrical member 5343a has a fixing portion 5343a1 having a D-shaped cross section for fixing the disc cam 5344 formed at both ends thereof, and a fitting groove 5343a3 from the fixing portion 5343a1 on the left side in front view.
A clutch operating portion 5343a2 having a D-shaped cross section formed from the same cross-sectional shape as the fixing portion 5343a1 across the , and a disc cam 534 which is a groove into which the e-ring is fitted and which is formed by the e-ring.
4 and the e-ring fitted in the fitting groove 5343a3. An engaging groove 5343a4, which is a groove with which the portion A1a engages, is mainly provided. The fitting grooves 5343a3 are arranged laterally outside the pair of plates in which the pivot holes 341b are formed in the assembled state.

The clutch operating portion 5343a2 is a portion inserted through the angle fixing hole 343c1 of the movable clutch 343c, and is a portion in which the movable clutch 343c slides under the biasing force of the coil spring 343d in the assembled state.

By fitting the e-ring into the fitting groove 5343a3 from behind, a portion of the cylindrical member 5343a whose diameter is partially increased is formed by the e-ring. The diameter of member 5343a can be made uniform.

With this diameter uniform, the columnar member 5343a is inserted into the shaft support hole 341b (see FIG. 62) by a predetermined amount, and then the e-ring is fitted, thereby adjusting the axial direction of the columnar member 5343a with respect to the shaft support hole 341b with the e-ring. In addition, the e-ring can prevent the disk cam 5344 from axially dislocating.

With the above-described configuration of the disc cam 5344 and the transmission shaft 5343, the disc cam 5344
can be assembled to the transmission shaft rod 5343 with one touch. That is, when the disk cam 5344 is assembled to the transmission shaft rod 5343, the cylindrical member 5343a is positioned on the side of the support cylinder portion P1 of the disk cam 5344 on which the engagement protrusion A1a is arranged. From the opposite end, the engagement groove 5
343a4 is inserted to the position where the engaging protrusion A1a is fitted. At this time, the engagement groove 5343a4
Before the engaging protrusions A1a are inserted to the position where the engaging protrusions A1a are fitted, the tip of the columnar member 5343a enters between the engaging protrusions A1a, so that the pair of engaging protrusions A1a are pushed apart from each other. The clamping arm portion A1 is elastically deformed in a manner. After that, when the tip of the columnar member 5343a passes through the engagement protrusion A1a, the engagement protrusion A1a and the engagement groove 5343a4 are arranged to face each other, and the engagement protrusion A1a is fitted into the engagement groove 5343a4. Then, the holding arm portion A1 is elastically recovered, and the disk cam 5344 and the transmission shaft 5343 are assembled (see FIG. 65(b)).

On the other hand, the configuration of the disc cam 5344 and the transmission shaft rod 5343 functions not only for one-touch assembly, but also as a destruction prevention structure in this embodiment. This will be described with reference to FIGS. 65 and 66. FIG.

65(a) is a front view of the right disc cam 5344R viewed in the direction of arrow LXVa in FIG. 62, and FIG. 65(b) is a view of the right disc cam 53 along line LXVb-LXVb in FIG. 65(a).
44R, and FIG. 65(c) is a cross-sectional view of the right disc cam 5344R taken along line LXVc-LXVc in FIG. 65(a). 66(a) is a front view of the right disk cam 5344R viewed in the direction of arrow LXVa in FIG. 62, and FIG.
It is a cross-sectional view of the right disk cam 5344R along line XVIb-LXVIb.

FIG. 66 shows the right disc cam 5344R after being deformed when the player gives an overload to the unloaded right disc cam 5344R shown in FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 65 and 66, in this embodiment, the columnar member 5343a is supported by the extended distal end portion of the support cylinder portion P1 at a position spaced apart from the disc portion of the right disc cam 5344R. In the vicinity of the portion, only the engaging protrusion A1a engages with the engaging groove 5343a4. Therefore, when the columnar member 5343a or the right disk cam 5344R is overloaded, the columnar member 5343a can be tilted about the extended distal end portion of the support cylinder portion P1.

As shown in FIG. 65(b), since the space of the long hole recess C1 is arranged in the direction in which the pair of clamping arm portions A1 face each other, the resistance of the cylindrical member 5343a to axial tilt displacement is reduced. on the other hand,
As shown in FIG. 65(c), in the direction in which the supporting cylinder portion P1 and the connecting pin 344d are connected,
Since the cylindrical member 5343a and the right circular disc cam 5344R are in contact with each other along the axial direction of the right circular disc cam 5344R, the resistance of the cylindrical member 5343a to axial tilt displacement is increased.

Therefore, when the player forcibly holds down (pulls up) the tilting device 310 and an overload is applied to the right disk cam 5344R (displacement of the connecting pin 344d via the arm member 345 (see FIG. 62)). is applied), the deformation direction of the right disk cam 5344R with respect to the cylindrical member 5343a can be restricted.

In other words, the right disk cam 5344R deforms in the direction of less resistance, so that FIG.
As shown in (a) and FIG. 66(b), when the right disc cam 5344R is overloaded,
The disk portion is axially tilted and deformed about a support axis r1 connecting the connecting pin 344d and the center of the support cylinder portion P1 on a plane parallel to the surface of the disk portion. As a result, the tip position of the connecting pin 344d is shifted along the circumferential direction of the right disk cam 5344R compared to the position shown in FIG.
Displace.

67(a) is a cross-sectional view of the operation device 5300 along the line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a), and FIG. 67(b) is an operation in the direction of arrow LXVIIb in FIG. 67(a). 5300 is a partial rear view of device 5300. FIG. In FIG. 67(b), illustration of the protective cover device 350 is omitted, and only the disk cam 5344, the arm member 345 and the releasing member 346 are illustrated. Further, in FIG. 67(a), for ease of understanding, the outer shape of the right disc cam 5344R in a state in which it is perpendicularly inserted into and fixed to the transmission shaft rod 5343 is illustrated by a solid line. The outline of the folded state is illustrated by imaginary lines.

FIG. 67(a) shows the second state of the tilting device 310, the player's hand holding the tilting device 310, and an enlarged state of the vicinity of the connecting pin 344d. .

In the state shown in FIG. 67(a), when the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 62) starts operating, the left disk cam 5344L is about to start rotating, but the player restricts the displacement of the tilting device 310. Therefore, a load is generated between the arm member 345 trying to stay in place and the connecting pin 344d of the left disc cam 5344L trying to rotate. When this load is generated, the right disc cam 5344R can undergo the axial tilting deformation described above, so that the load can be alleviated.

In FIG. 67(a), the outer shape of the right disc cam 5344R after its axial tilt deformation is illustrated by imaginary lines. A change in the connection mode with the arm member 345 due to axial tilt deformation will be described with reference to an enlarged view.

In FIG. 67(a), when the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 62) starts operating and the outer circumference of the right disk cam 5344R rotates clockwise by the dimension Rd,
The shaft support hole 345a of the arm member 345 and the connecting pin 344d are displaced,
In order to absorb this, the right disc cam 5344R undergoes axial tilt deformation.

Since the connecting pin 344d falls in the direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. The position is shifted along the circumferential direction of the plate cam 5344R. This misalignment causes the right disk cam 534
Since the displacement between the connecting pin 344d and the arm member 345 due to the rotation of the dimension Rd of 4R can be partially absorbed, the driving motor 342 (
62), the load applied to the drive motor 342 can be alleviated.

As shown in FIG. 67(b), the disc cam 5344 is axially tilted and deformed so that the disc cam 5344 and the release member 346 come into contact with each other. As a result, the driving force of the drive motor 342 is consumed by the frictional force generated between the release member 346 and the disk cam 5344, so that the player drives the drive motor 342 while holding the tilting device 310 fixedly. In this case, the load applied to arm member 345 connecting disk cam 5344 and tilting device 310 can be reduced.

As shown in FIG. 67(a), when the disk cam 5344 rotates backward (in the direction of the arrow CW), the release member 346 is pushed upward by the frictional force, but the second spring The elastic force of SP2 acts on disc cam 5344 via release member 346 . In this case, the rotation claw member 347 is blocked by the bottom plate portion 5321 and stops.
The state of the first spring SP1 does not change (the elastic force does not change).

On the other hand, when the disk cam 5344 rotates forward (the direction of the arrow CCW, see FIG. 68), the release member 346 is pushed downward by the frictional force, but the elastic force of the first spring SP1 acts against it. disc cam 5344 through release member 346 and rotating pawl member 347
acts on In this case, since the relative positional relationship between the rotating claw member 347 and the release member 346 does not change, the state of the second spring SP2 does not change (the elastic force does not change).

Therefore, when the releasing member 346 and the disk cam 5344 are in contact with each other and the releasing member 346 moves along the direction of movement of the disk cam 5344, regardless of the rotation direction of the disk cam 5344, the first
Among the elastic forces of either the spring SP1 or the second spring SP2, the disc cam 5344
The elastic force acting on the disc cam 5344 in the direction opposite to the direction of rotation of can be increased.
As a result, the load applied by the release member 346 to the disk cam 5344 can be increased,
Since the consumption amount of the driving force of the drive motor 342 can be increased, the arm member 34
5 can be reduced regardless of the direction of rotation of the disk cam 5344 .

In this embodiment, the right disk cam 5344R is formed in a shape symmetrical with respect to the straight line passing through the connecting pin 344d and the center point (the direction perpendicular to the straight line passing through the connecting pin 344d and the center point). ), the right disc cam 5344R can be deformed in the same manner regardless of the direction of rotation of the right disc cam 5344R (regardless of the direction in which the connecting pin 344d is displaced from the arm member 345). It can be axially deformed by resistance.

FIG. 68(a) is a cross-sectional view of the operation device 5300 along the line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a), and FIG. 68(b) is an operation in the direction of arrow LXVIIIb in FIG. 68(a). 5300 is a partial rear view of device 5300. FIG. In addition, in FIG.68(b), illustration of the protective cover apparatus 350 is abbreviate|omitted. In addition, in FIG. 68(a), in order to facilitate understanding,
The outer shape of the right disc cam 5344R when it is vertically inserted into and fixed to the transmission shaft rod 5343 is shown by solid lines, and the outer shape of the right disk cam 5344R in the state of being tilted due to overload is shown by imaginary lines.

FIG. 68(a) shows a state in which the tilting device 310 is driven by the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 62) from the second state and is tilted downward by an angle D2. A player's hand is shown holding a

As shown in FIG. 68(a), when the player grips the tilting device 310 while the tilting device 310 is in motion, the right disc cam 5344 is held regardless of whether the tilting device 310 is in the second state or not.
The tip of the connecting pin 344d can be displaced in the circumferential direction of the right disk cam 5344R by the tilt of the R axis, thereby reducing the load generated between the arm member 345 and the right disk cam 5344R. Therefore, the load applied to the drive motor 342 can be reduced.

The items described for the right disc cam 5344R also apply to the left disc cam 5344L.

As shown in FIGS. 67(b) and 68(b), according to the present embodiment, the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 62) operates while the tilting device 310 is held by the player, causing an overload. and,
The right disk cam 5344R tilts in the axial direction.

Therefore, by detecting the degree of tilting motion in the axial direction, it is possible to quickly notice the occurrence of overload. That is, for example, according to the configuration of the first embodiment, the drive motor 34
2 is driven during one rotation of the right disc cam 344R, the detection hole 3 of the right disc cam 344R is detected.
44eR passes the right detection sensor 353R, but if the player is holding the tilting device 310, the right disc cam 344R will not rotate even if the drive motor 342 is rotated.
Since the detection hole 344eR does not pass through the right side detection sensor 353R and the input to the right side detection sensor 353R does not change, it is detected that an overload has occurred.

In this case, the right disc cam 3 is rotated in a state where no overload occurs before the occurrence of overload is detected.
Since it takes a period of time to rotate 44R by a predetermined angle, there is a problem that overload detection is delayed.

In contrast, according to the present embodiment, when the right disc cam 5344R is overloaded and tilts in the axial direction (see FIG. 66(b)), the overload occurs. Occurrences can be detected. Therefore, occurrence of overload can be detected early. As a detection method, for example, between the support cylinder portion P1 and the engagement rib 344c, the engagement rib 34
The method by the notification device E1 fixed to 4c is exemplified (illustrated by imaginary lines in FIG. 66(a))
.

The notification device E1 is a detection device that outputs a signal when an object comes into contact with the input portion, and is arranged in pairs at positions where a straight line connecting the pair of holding arm portions A1 and the engagement rib 344c intersect. and the input portion protrudes toward the support cylinder portion P1. In the no-load state, the notification device E1 and the support cylinder portion P1 are separated from each other (see FIG. 65(b)), and in the overload state, the notification device E1 and the support cylinder portion P1 are formed in a contact relationship (see FIG. 65(b)). 66(b)). Accordingly, by determining the output from the notification device E1, it is possible to quickly determine whether or not the disk cam 5344 is overloaded.

Next, an operation device 6300 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 73. FIG.

In the first embodiment, the disk cam 344, the connecting pin 344d, and the engaging rib 344c are integrally formed. 344c and 344c are composed of separate members and configured to be relatively rotatable with each other. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted. First, differences in configuration from the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 and 70. FIG.

69 is an exploded front perspective view of the drive device 6340 in the sixth embodiment, and FIG. 70 is an exploded front perspective view of the disc member 6344L1, the ring member 6344L2 and the second transmission member 6348 of the left disc cam 6344L. is. Although the configuration of the right disc cam 6344R is also different from that of the first embodiment, the right disc cam 6344R is configured in a mirror image of the left disc cam 6344L. , and the description of the right disc cam 6344R is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 69, this embodiment differs from the first embodiment in the configuration of the left disc cam 6344L and the shape of the fixing member 6342a, and a second transmission device 6348 is added.

The left disc cam 6344L includes a circular rib 344b, a connecting pin 344d, and a connecting pin 344d, as in the first embodiment.
and a disc member 6344L1 provided with a detection hole 344eL and pivotally supported by the cylindrical member 343a.
and a ring member 6344L2 that is coaxially supported with the disc member 6344L1 and rotates relative to the disc member 6344L1.

The disc member 6344L1 has the central shaft portion 344a of the first embodiment arranged at the center of the disc portion, and is spaced radially outward from the outer peripheral portion of the circular rib 344b. An annular rib 6344f is provided protruding along.

The ring member 6344L2 has a ring-shaped body 6344g having the same outer diameter as the engaging rib 344c in the first embodiment and an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the circular rib 344b. A cover plate portion 6344h that is disposed at the axial end of the ring body 6344g and covers the ring-shaped opening of the ring body 6344g, and the thickness increases from the cover plate portion 6344h to the opposite side of the ring body 6344g. and receiving gear teeth 6344i formed on and disposed radially outwardly at the thickened portion thereof.

Since the inner diameter of the ring main body 6344g is formed to be larger than the outer diameter of the circular rib 344b, in the assembled state, the ring main body 6344g is fitted onto the circular rib 344b, thereby forming the central shaft portion 344a. A ring member 6344L2 is supported so as to be relatively rotatable around .

It should be noted that the end surface of the annular main body 6344g on the side of the disk member 6344L1 in the axial direction is the annular rib 63
44f. As a result, the annular rib 6344f is not formed, and the disc member 634
The contact area can be reduced and the frictional resistance can be reduced as compared with the case of contact with 4L1. Therefore, relative rotation between the disk member 6344L1 and the ring member 6344L2 can be smoothly performed.

The receiving gear tooth 6344i meshes with the speed reduction transmission gear 6348c of the second transmission device 6348 . Therefore, the rotation of the second transmission device 6348 causes the ring member 6344L2 to rotate. In addition, in this embodiment, the number of revolutions of the ring member 6344L2 is equal to that of the disk member 6344L1.
(While the ring member 6344L2 rotates three times, the disc member 63
The numbers of teeth of the second transmission gear 6348b, the reduction transmission gear 6348c, and the receiving gear teeth 6344i are set in a mode in which 44L1 rotates once).

The second transmission device 6348 is a device that is rotatably supported by the fixed member 6342a along with the transmission shaft rod 343. The auxiliary column member 6348 is arranged in a posture parallel to the cylindrical member 343a.
a, and a second gear fixed to its auxiliary column member 6348a and meshed with the transmission gear 343b.
The transmission gear 6348b is fixed to both ends of the auxiliary column member 6348 and the ring member 63
and a deceleration transmission gear 6348c that meshes with the receiving gear teeth 6344i of 44L2.

With reference to FIGS. 71 to 73, it will be described that the tilting device 310 is lifted in a plurality of ways after the tilting device 310 is unlocked from the rotating claw member 347 in the first state.

71, 72, and 73 are cross-sectional views of the manipulation device 6300 along the line corresponding to line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a). 71 shows a state similar to the state shown in FIG. 36, and FIG. 72 shows a posture in which the ring member 6344R2 has made one rotation in the backward rotation direction (arrow CW direction) from the state shown in FIG. , after rotating more than one rotation, the state in which the disk member 6344R1 rotates in the backward direction (the direction of the arrow CW) by 1/3 rotation. is illustrated. Moreover, in FIG. 73, FIG.
2, the ring member 6344L2 rotates in the forward rotation direction (arrow CCW direction) by a predetermined angle, and the tilting device 310 moves upward.

Here, when the ring member 6344R2 is rotated in the forward rotation direction (arrow CCW direction) from the state shown in FIG. It rises instantaneously and reaches the second state (see FIG. 34).

In the operation device 300 according to the first embodiment, when the fixing by the rotary claw member 347 is released, and the tilting device 310 immediately (without waiting for the rotation of the disk cam 344) moves up, the reaching position is the second state. It was limited to the position to be arranged (see FIG. 34).

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the disc member 6344R1 and the ring member 6344R2 rotate relative to each other. can change the relative relationship of the tilting device 31
The types of 0 arrival positions can be increased.

That is, when the fixation by the rotating claw member 347 is released from the state shown in FIG.
10 instantly rises due to the biasing force of the torsion spring 315, and reaches a state tilted downward by an angle D6 from the second state (see FIG. 73). In this manner, the tilting device 310 instantaneously (disc cam) is released from the state shown in FIG. without waiting for 344 rotation)
, and the position reached can be varied.

As a result, for example, when the tilting device 310 is configured to change the degree of expectation for the performance depending on the difference in the height to which the tilting device 310 is instantaneously raised from the first state, the attention of the tilting device 310 can be increased. can be improved. In this case, it is not limited whether the degree of expectation is increased when the tilting device 310 rises higher or when the tilting device 310 reaches a lower elevation position.

However, by keeping the ascending reaching position of the normal tilting device 310 low (see FIG. 73) and reaching the second state (see FIG. 34) when the degree of expectation reaches its maximum, the degree of expectation It is possible to associate the magnitude of the amount of displacement with which the player pushes and operates the tilting device 310, thereby making it easy for the player to understand the difference in expectations due to the displacement of the tilting device 310.例文帳に追加

In this case, it is possible to motivate the player to check to what position the tilting device 310 rises, so that the player does not have to watch the movement of the tilting device 310 until the operation timing of the tilting device 310. can be directed to Therefore, the tilting device 3
A game method in which the tilting device 310 is operated chaotically can be suppressed regardless of the 10 presentation modes.

Next, an operation device 7300 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 to 85. FIG.

In the first embodiment, the disk cam 344, the connecting pin 344d, and the engaging rib 344c are integrally formed. 7344R1 and the connecting pin 344d are arranged on separate members, and these separate members are configured to be able to form a fixed state in which they are fixed to each other and a sliding state in which they are relatively rotatable. In addition, the same reference numerals are assigned to the same parts as those of the above-described embodiments,
The explanation is omitted. First, with reference to FIGS. 74 and 75, the features of a disc cam 7344 used as a substitute for the disc cam 344 in the first embodiment will be described.

FIG. 74(a) is a front view of the right disc cam 7344R in the seventh embodiment, and FIG.
(b) is a rear view of the right disc cam 7344R, and FIG. 75(a) is the LX of FIG. 74(a)
FIG. 75(b) is a cross-sectional view of the right disc cam 7344R along line XVa-LXXVa;
74(a) is a partial side view of the right disc cam 7344R viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVb in FIG. 74(a); FIG. Since the right disk cam 7344L has a symmetrical shape that is a mirror copy of the right disk cam 7344R, a description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 74 and 75, the right disc cam 7344R has a disc member 7344R having a central shaft portion 344a through which a cylindrical member 343a (see FIG. 62) is inserted and fixed in the assembled state.
1 and a ring member 73 inserted along the axial direction from the opening side of the disk member 7344R1.
44R2, and an engaging member 7 having an engaging portion 7630 that is immovable in the radial direction of the disk member 7344R1 in the assembled state and that fits into the equally divided concave portion 7522 of the ring member 7344R2.
344R3 and .

The disc member 7344R1 is formed in a cup shape having a central shaft portion 344a at its center,
A detection hole 344eR is formed in a flange-like portion extending radially outward from the edge of the cup.
and the engagement rib 344c is partially omitted (the first projecting portion 344c1 and the first
It is a member configured with a shape in which the portion between the retracting portion 344c2 is omitted).

The disk member 7344R supports the surface of the ring-shaped plate portion 7510 of the ring member 7344R2 in the assembled state, and the first circular recessed portion 7 is a circular recessed portion centered on the central shaft portion 344a.
410, a second circular recessed portion 7420 which is a circular recessed portion smaller in diameter and axially deeper than the first circular recessed portion 7410, a first projecting portion 344c1, and a first retracting portion 344c2. and an L-shaped insertion hole 7430 formed in the radial direction between them, and in the vicinity of the insertion hole 7430, radially outward from the side surface on the back side of the second circular recessed portion 7420 (the outer peripheral side of the disk member 7344R1). and a fixing protrusion 7440 that is protrudingly provided.

The insertion hole 7430 extends from an intermediate position between the first projecting portion 344c1 and the first retracting portion 344c2.
A first elongated hole 7431, which is a rectangular elongated hole portion elongated along the axial direction of the disk member 7344R1 at a displaced position, and the end of the first elongated hole 7431 on the bottom side of the disk member 7344R1. A second long hole 74, which is a rectangular long hole portion extending along the circumferential direction of the disk member 7344R1
32 and the second long hole 74 with the first long hole 7431 side of the lower end of the second long hole 7432 as a fulcrum.
A return portion 7433 configured to protrude toward the 32 side is mainly provided.

The dimension in the width direction (transverse direction) of the second long hole 7432 is smaller than the dimension in the width direction (transverse direction) of the first long hole 7431, and the width of the engaging portion 7630 of the engaging member 7344R3 is direction(
short direction).

The return portion 7433 is configured to be elastically deformable with the lower end portion of the second long hole 7432 (lower end portion in FIG. 75(b)) as a fulcrum. Due to this elastic deformation, the return portion 7433 moves toward the second elongated hole 743 .
2 are formed to be movable outwardly.

The fixing protrusion 7440 is inserted into the coil spring CS1 of the engaging member 7344R3 and is configured with a protrusion height sufficient to fix the position of the coil spring SC1.

Next, referring to FIG. 76, the ring member 7344R2 will be described. Figure 76(a)
is a front view of the ring member 7344R2, and FIG. 76(b) is a ring member 7344R2
76(c) is a side view of the ring member 7344R2 as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVIc in FIG. 76(a).

As shown in Figures 76(a) to 76(c), the ring member 7344R2
A ring-shaped plate portion 7510 in which 44d is protruded, and the ring-shaped plate portion 7510
and a thick portion 7520 extending in the thickness direction of the ring-shaped plate portion 7510 along the inner peripheral surface of the ring-shaped plate portion 7510 and having a star-shaped through hole formed in the center thereof.

The ring-shaped plate portion 7510 has a plate thickness dimension equal to the recess depth of the first circular recessed portion 7410 , and an outer diameter dimension slightly smaller than the inner diameter dimension of the first circular recessed portion 7410 . be. As a result, in the assembled state, the ring member 7344R2 and the disk member 7344R1 can be aligned with each other while preventing excessive resistance to relative rotation.

The thick portion 7520 has a length extending from the side surface of the ring-shaped plate portion 7510 to a length that reaches (does not interfere with) the second elongated hole 7432 in the assembled state (see FIG. 75(a)). is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the second circular recess 7420 . As a result, in the assembled state, the engagement member 7344R3 can be moved in the radial direction (vertical direction in FIG. 75(a)) while preventing the relative rotation resistance between the ring member 7344R2 and the disk member 7344R1 from becoming excessive. can do.

The thick portion 7520 includes a deformed through-hole 7521 drilled along the axial direction, and recesses radially outward in the deformed through-hole 7521 at equal intervals in the circumferential direction (five equal intervals in this embodiment). It mainly includes an equally divided concave portion 7522 provided.

The deformed through-hole 7521 has an inner peripheral shape that is arranged radially outward of the engaging portion 7630 when the later-described engaging member 7344R3 is pushed radially inward of the disk member 7344R1. Configured.

FIG. 77(a) is a front view of the engaging member 7344R3, and FIG. 77(b) is a front view of FIG.
) is a side view of the engaging member 7344R3 as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVIIb.

As shown in FIGS. 77(a) and 77(b), the engaging member 7344R3, in the assembled state (see FIG. 74(b)), is radially outward of the first projecting portion 344c1 and the first retracting portion 344c2. The arc-shaped plate portion 7610 arranged on the side and the back side end portion of the arc-shaped plate portion 7610 (FIG. 77 (
b) The extension part 7620 extending in the thickness direction from the right end) and the engagement extending from the extension tip of the extension part 7620 along the front-rear direction (left-right direction in FIG. 77(b)) It mainly includes a portion 7630 and a coil spring CS1 formed of a coil spring disposed on the side of the arcuate plate portion 7610 facing the engaging portion 7630 .

The arcuate plate portion 7610 has a spring fixing projection 7611, which is a projection into which the coil spring CS1 is fitted, at a position facing the distal end portion of the engaging portion 7630 on the inner peripheral side surface.

The extension part 7620 is a part inserted through the second long hole 7432 in the assembled state,
When pushed inward in the radial direction against the elastic force of the coil spring CS1, the extension end has an extension length that protrudes inward from the inner peripheral surface of the ring member 7344R2.

The engaging portion 7630 has a dimension in the width direction that is slightly shorter than the dimension in the width direction of the first elongated hole 7431, and extends to a length that passes through the deformed through hole 7521 of the thick portion 7520 in the assembled state. (See FIG. 75(a)).

As will be described later, the engaging member 7344R3 has both a function as a member that receives a load from the release member 346 and is displaced, and a function that positions the ring member 7344R2 with respect to the disk member 7344R1. Therefore, the number of members can be reduced.

A method of assembling the right disk cam 7344R will be described with reference to FIG. Figure 78(a)
78(b) is a front view of the right disk cam 7344R, and FIG. 78(b) is an arrow LXX in FIG. 78(a).
78(c) is a front view of the right disc cam 7344R, and FIG. 78(d) is an arrow LXXVIII in FIG. 78(c).
FIG. 78(e) is a side view of the right disc cam 7344R as viewed in direction d, and FIG.
78(f) is a side view of the right disc cam 7344R as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVIIIf in FIG. 78(e).

78(a), 78(b), 78(c) and 78(d), the disk member 7
78(e) and 78(f), a ring member 7344R2 and an engaging member 7344R2 are inserted into the disk member 7344R1.
A state in which R3 is inserted is illustrated. To facilitate understanding, FIG. 78(b),
In FIGS. 78(d) and 78(f), illustration of the arcuate plate portion 7610 and the coil spring CS1 is omitted.

As a method of assembling the right disc cam 7344R, first, the engaging member 734 is inserted into the first elongated hole 7431.
Insert the engaging portion 7630 of 4R3 (see FIGS. 78(a) and 78(b)). As described above, the widthwise dimension of the second long hole 7432 is made shorter than the widthwise dimension of the engaging portion 7630, thereby preventing the engaging portion 7630 from being erroneously inserted into the second long hole 7432. can be prevented. Therefore, erroneous assembly can be prevented.

Next, along the extending direction of the second long hole 7432, in the depth direction of FIG. 78(d), the engaging portion 7
The engagement member 7344R3 is slid to the position where the positions of 630 and the fixing projection 7440 are aligned.

At this position after the movement, the fixing projection 7440 is inserted into the coil spring CS1, and the engaging member 7344R3 suppresses positional displacement of the disk member 7344R1 in the circumferential direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 78(d)) and engages. The member 7344R3 can be held immovable in the radial direction of the disk member 7344R1.

In addition, the engaging member 7344R3 is restricted from moving in the circumferential direction by the return portion 7433 . This will be explained. First, in a state where the engaging portion 7630 is inserted into the first elongated hole 7431, the return portion 7433 is driven outside the second elongated hole 7432 (see FIG. 78(b)). Next, when the engaging member 7344R3 is slid in the extending direction of the second elongated hole 7432, the contact between the engaging member 7344R3 and the return portion 7433 in the vertical direction is released, and the return portion 7433 is moved to the second position by elastic recovery force. It enters inside the long hole 7432 (see FIG. 78(d)).

When the tip of the return portion 7433 is in contact with the extension portion 7620 of the engaging member 7344R3 in the state of entering the second long hole 7432, the contact direction is the longitudinal direction of the return portion 7433 (the deformation resistance is large). direction) (see FIG. 78(d)), movement of the extended portion 7620 (movement to the right in FIG. 78(f)) is suppressed. Thereby, the engaging member 73
Since the movement of 44R3 in the circumferential direction can be restricted, it is possible to prevent the engaging member 7344R3 from being displaced during operation.

Once the engaging member 7344R3 is held on the disk member 7344R1, the engaging member 734
4R3 is pushed radially inward of the disc member 7344R1, and the disc member 734
A ring member 7344R2 is inserted from the opening side of 4R1. By releasing the load from the engaging member 7344R3, the elastic force of the coil spring CS1 causes the engaging portion 7630 to move along the radially outward direction D7. This movement causes the engaging portion 7630 to be housed in the equally divided recessed portion 7522 of the ring member 7344R2, thereby fixing the ring member 7344R2 to the disk member 7344R1.

Through the steps described above, the right disk cam 7344R can be easily assembled. note that,
The right disc cam 7344L has a symmetrical shape that mirrors the right disc cam 7344R, and can be assembled in the same process as the right disc cam 7344R.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 79 to 81, the operation of the engaging member 7344R3 when the disk cam 7344 rotates backward will be described. 79(a), 79(b), 80(a), 80(b) and 81 are partial cross-sectional views of the manipulation device 7300 taken along line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 79(a), 79(b), 80(a), 80(b) and 81, the releasing member 7346 and the rotating claw member 7347
and the disk cam 7344 are shown as the center, and the illustration of other unnecessary parts is omitted.

The rotary pawl member 7347 in this embodiment differs from that in the first embodiment in the length of the guide elongated hole 7347b. That is, as shown in FIG. 80(a), the protruding pin 346b is configured to be the end of movement at the raised position when the engaging rib 344c abuts from below and passes through.

The releasing member 7346 differs from the first embodiment in that the upper rear portion of the main body portion (the upper right portion in FIG. 80(a)) is obliquely shaved in order to minimize interference with the engaging rib 344c.

79(a), 79(b), 80(a), 80(b) and 81 show how the disk cam 7344 rotates backward (clockwise direction in Fig. 79(a)). are shown in chronological order.

In FIG. 79(a), the releasing member 7346 is engaged with the engaging member 7344R3 of the right disc cam 7344R.
79(b) shows a state where the right disk cam 7344R has further rotated from the state shown in FIG. 79(a), and FIG.
(a) shows a state in which the engaging member 7344R3 has been pushed into the disk member 7344R1 to the end of the push, and in M6-2(b), the disk member 73 is pushed from the state shown in FIG.
81, the right disc cam 7344R rotates in the backward rotation direction from the state shown in FIG.
The state after moving away from 346 is illustrated. 79(a), 79(b), and 80
80(a) and 80(b) show a state (small angle state) in which the releasing member 7346 has reached the end of the range in which the releasing member 7346 can relatively rotate with respect to the rotating claw member 7347. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 79(a), immediately after the engaging member 7344R3 and the releasing member 7346 start contacting each other, the elastic force of the coil spring CS1 is set larger than that of the second spring SP2. Therefore, the engaging member 7344R3 is not pushed inward,
The state of protruding outward is maintained.

As shown in FIG. 79(b), the releasing member 734 is provided on the outermost side surface of the engaging member 7344R3.
6 are in contact with each other, the releasing member 7346 and the rotary pawl member 7347 are in a small angle state.

In this embodiment, the release member 7346 rotates forward, and the rotation pawl member 7347 is pressed against the side surface of the insertion hole 321c of the lower frame member 320 to form a small angle state. The inner peripheral surface and the first projecting portion 344c1 of the engaging rib 344c and the first retracting portion 3
The disk cam 7344 is arranged in such a positional relationship that the outer peripheral surface of the engaging member 7344R3 rubs against the releasing member 346 while the engaging member 7344R3 is in contact with 44c2 (see FIG. 80(a)).

That is, as shown in FIG. 80(a), the release member 7346 rotates toward the small angle state due to the rotation of the disk cam 7344, and when the release member 7346 becomes unable to rotate further (small angle state), the release member From 7346 , a load is applied to the engaging member 7344 R3 to push the engaging member 7344 R3 radially inward of the disk cam 7344 .

As shown in FIG. 79(b), in a state where the engaging member 7344R3 protrudes radially outward, the backward rotation cannot be continued. , the engaging member 7344R3 is pushed radially inward (see FIG. 80(a)). In this pushed state, the engaging portion 7630 is arranged radially inward of the minimum diameter portion of the deformed through-hole 7521 .

Therefore, since the load in the circumferential direction is not transmitted to the ring member 7344R2 via the engaging portion 7630, as shown in FIG.
Even if 4R1 is rotated, the ring member 7344R2 does not follow the rotation and maintains its posture.

Due to this deviation in the amount of rotation, the engaging portion 7630 shifts from the originally arranged one equally divided recessed portion 75.
22 to another equally divided concave portion 7522, the phases of the disc member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 are relatively rotated by one concave portion (72 degrees).

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 81, when the right disk cam 7344R rotates further, the engaging member 73
Since the contact between 44R3 and the releasing member 7346 is released, the engaging member 7344R3 protrudes radially outward, and the engaging portion 7630 is housed in the equally divided recessed portion 7522 again. In this process, the equally divided concave portion 7522 in which the engaging portion 7630 is accommodated is shifted by one.

79(a) to FIG. 81, the arrangement of the engaging rib 344c and the arrangement of the connecting pin 344d arranged in the ring member 7344R2 are equally divided into recessed portions 7522. can be relatively displaced by the arrangement interval (72 degrees) of the recessed portions.

Referring to FIG. 82, when disc cam 7344 rotates in the forward rotation direction, engaging member 73
The operation of 44R3 will be described. Figure 82(a), Figure 82(b), Figure 83(a) and Figure 8
3(b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the manipulation device 7300 taken along line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 82, the releasing member 7346, the rotary pawl member 7347, and the disk cam 7344 are mainly illustrated, and the illustration of other unnecessary parts is omitted.

FIGS. 82(a) to 83(b) show how the disk cam 7344 rotates in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 82(a)) in chronological order. In FIG. 82(a), the release member 734
6 and the engaging member 7344R3 of the right disc cam 7344R are shown in FIG. FIG. 83(a) shows a state in which the disk cam 7344 has further rotated forward from the state shown in FIG. 82(b), and FIG. The state after separation from the engaging member 7344R is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 82(a) to 83(b), when the disk cam 7344 rotates in the forward rotation direction, the release member 7346 and the rotary pawl member 7347 rotate in the backward rotation direction (clockwise rotation in FIG. 82(a)). direction), there is no member that restricts the movement of the release member 7346 and the rotation claw member 7347, and the release member 7346 and the rotation claw member 734 are moved by the elastic force of the first spring SP1.
7 can only be loaded in the forward rolling direction.

Therefore, no load is generated to push the engaging member 7344R3 inward in the radial direction, and the engaging member 7344R3 does not contact the releasing member 7346 until it separates from the releasing member 7346.
R3 maintains a state of projecting radially outward. Therefore, when rotating the disk cam 7344 in the forward rotation direction, it is possible to prevent the disk member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 from rotating relative to each other.

By switching the rotation direction of the disc cam 7344 from these configurations, the disc member 7
It is possible to switch whether 344R1 and ring member 7344R2 rotate relative to each other. Therefore, in the direction of rotation in which relative rotation does not occur (see FIGS. 82 and 83), it is possible to repeatedly perform the effect of tilting the tilting device 310 with the same tilt width, as in the first embodiment. Unlike the first embodiment, the tilting width of the tilting device 310 can be changed in the rotation direction (see FIGS. 79, 80, and 81) that causes relative rotation.

Further, in the present embodiment, the direction of rotation of the disc member 7344R1 that relatively rotates the disc member 744R1 and the ring member 7344R2 is the direction opposite to the direction of releasing the fixation by the rotating claw member 7347 (the direction in which the fixation is not released). Since they match, the tilting device 310 is in the first state (FIG. 84).
) (the attitude is kept constant), the disk member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 can be relatively rotated.

As a result, the state in which the player does not pay attention (the state in which the tilting device 310 stops) is
It can be used as a state for changing the relative posture between the disk member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 in a place invisible to the player.

With reference to FIGS. 84 and 85, it will be described that, according to the present embodiment, a plurality of modes for raising the tilting device 310 from the first state can be formed. 84 and 85 are cross-sectional views of manipulation device 7300 taken along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 84, the tilting device 310 is immediately moved from the first state to the second state shown in FIG.
Ring member 7344R2 is shown fixed to disc member 7344R1 in a phase relationship that allows displacement (without rotating
A state in which the ring member 7344R2 has rotated relative to the disc member 7344R1 by one equally divided concave portion 7522 through the process described in FIG.
In both cases, a state in which the second protruding portion 344c3 is in contact with the engaging portion 346d is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 84 and 85, according to this embodiment, the rotation claw member 347 is removed from the first state.
By releasing the fixation by , it is possible to change the movement range in which the tilting device 310 moves immediately (without rotating the disk cam 7344R2).

That is, when the fixing is released by rotating the rotating claw member 347 from the state shown in FIG. 84, the tilting device 310 moves to the second state (the state where the tilting device 310 has moved to the uppermost end of the movement range).

On the other hand, when the fixing is released by rotating the rotating claw member 347 from the state shown in FIG. Moves until it is sunk below the 2nd state.

Therefore, by releasing the fixation by the rotating claw member 347, the tilting device 3 can be moved from the first state.
The position that 10 reaches immediately (without rotation of disk cam 7344) by the upward motion can be varied. As a result, it is possible to increase the types of presentations by the operation of the tilting device 310, and to improve the attention of the operation device 7300 as a presentation device.

Next, a pachinko machine 8010 according to the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 86 to 179. FIG.

In the first embodiment, the front side of the operation device 300 is exposed, but the pachinko machine 8010 in the eighth embodiment has a covering cover 370 that covers the lower portion of the operation device 300 from the front side. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

In the following description, with respect to the pachinko machine 8010 in the state shown in FIG. 86, the front side of the paper surface is the front (front) side, and the back side of the paper surface is the rear (rear) side. Also, with respect to the pachinko machine 8010 in the state shown in FIG. ) side. Furthermore, the arrows UD, LR, and FB in the figure (see, for example, FIG. 86) indicate the pachinko machine 8010.
The up-down direction, left-right direction, and front-rear direction are shown, respectively. Also, the definition of this direction is shown in FIG.
The same applies to the description referring to the drawings before 6.

First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 8010 will be described with reference to FIGS. 86 to 90. FIG. FIG. 86 is a front view of a pachinko machine 8010 in the eighth embodiment, and FIG.
FIG. 88 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 8010 showing a state in which the inner frame 12 is opened (deployed) with respect to the outer frame 11, and FIG. Inner frame 1
89 is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine 8010 showing a state (deployed) opened with respect to 2, FIG.
90 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 8010 showing a state in which the inner frame 12 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11 and the front frame 14 is opened (developed), and FIG. 90 is a pachinko machine with the front frame 14 removed. 8010 is a front view of machine 8010. FIG. Note that, in FIG. 90, the reference numerals for the internal configuration of the game board 13 are omitted for the sake of convenience.

The outer frame 11 is formed in the shape of a frame whose upper and lower sides are made of wooden plate material and whose left and right sides are made of aluminum plate material and whose four sides are fixed. The pachinko machine 8010 is installed in the game hall by attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to the island facility. In the pachinko machine 8010, the outer frame 11 is not an essential configuration, but has the same inner shape as the outer frame 11 or the outer frame 11, and the inner frame 12 support structure (hinge 18 etc.) and the locking structure of the outer frame 11. It is good also as a structure with which the member which has is equipped with the game hall.

As shown in FIG. 89, the front frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 12. In a front view, the left side is the rotation base end side (opening/closing base end side) and the right side is the rotation tip side. (opening/closing front end side) is rotatable forward.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 88, the back pack unit 94 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 12, with the left side as the base end of rotation (opening/closing base end) and the right side as viewed from the front. It is rotatable rearward as the moving tip side (opening/closing tip side).

As shown in FIG. 87, the inner frame 12 is provided with a locking mechanism 20RK at the tip of rotation thereof, and has a function of locking the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 to the outer frame 11 so that they cannot be opened. , the front frame 14 has a function of locking the inner frame 12 so that the front frame 14 cannot be opened. Each of these locked states is unlocked by inserting a special key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 of the locking mechanism 20RK exposed on the front of the pachinko machine 8010 as shown in FIG. By doing so, they are canceled respectively.

The front frame 14 is rotatably attached to the front side of the inner frame 12 . As shown in FIG. 86, front door mounting brackets 57 and 58 are provided on the rotation proximal end side of the front frame 14. The front door mounting brackets 57 and 58 (the bracket 57 is a cylindrical portion and the bracket 58 is a shaft) are provided as shown in FIG. The front frame 14 is rotatably supported with respect to the inner frame 12 by engaging the metal plate having a hole with the inner frame 12 .

Specifically, the front door mounting bracket 57 extends from the front end of the inner frame 12 to the front side at a position below the hinge 19 on the upper side of the inner frame 12, and the front door mounting bracket 57 extends from the tip to the back side. It is pivotally supported by a pivot plate portion 12e having a fitting recess 12e1 (see FIG. 126) provided with a fitting size. In addition, the front door mounting bracket 58 has a stepped columnar shape projecting upward from the hinge 19 on the lower side of the inner frame 12 (in a configuration in which columns with different diameters are connected vertically, the diameter of the upper column It is axially supported by being externally fitted on a support pin 19a having a shape with a small diameter.

As shown in FIG. 89, the front frame 14 is formed in a rectangular shape having substantially the same outer shape as the inner frame 12 . The front frame 14 includes a body frame 14a formed of a metal plate in a vertically long rectangular frame shape. Various members (electrical decoration parts 8029 to 8033, etc.) are provided on the front side and the back side of the body frame 14a.
The front frame 14 is configured by fastening and fixing the units (operation device 300, operation handle 51, etc.).

The front frame 14 is provided with a window portion 14c having an opening smaller than that of the glass unit 16 so that the outer peripheral edge of the glass unit 16 is not exposed when viewed from the front (see FIG. 86). This window part 1
4c is covered from the back side by the glass unit 16, so that almost the entire front side of the inner frame 12 is covered by the front frame 14 to which the glass unit 16 is attached. Therefore, game board 1
3 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89).

As shown in FIG. 89, the glass unit 16 includes a pair of front and rear transparent glasses 16a and 16b having an outer shape larger than the window portion 14c and having transparency, and a fixing frame (not shown) that integrates the transparent glasses 16a and 16b. and have. The fixed frame is a transparent glass 16a made of synthetic resin.
, 16b, and the outer peripheral edges of the transparent glasses 16a and 16b are adhered to a fixed frame, whereby the glass unit 16 is formed into an integrated multi-layered glass.

Although the glass unit 16 is made of transparent glass 16a and 16b and is transparent and colorless, it is not limited to this and may be made of synthetic resin and transparent and colorless. As long as the game area can be visually recognized through 16, it may be formed in a colored transparent form instead of a colorless transparent form.

Around the window portion 14c of the front frame 14, as shown in FIG. 86, a plurality of decorative portions 8029 to 8033 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided. These illumination parts 8029-8
At 033, lighting and blinking are performed according to changes in the game state such as when a big hit is made or when a predetermined ready-to-win state is reached. In addition, the illumination portion 8030 on the upper side of the window portion 14c incorporates a light emitting means that lights up when a predetermined error such as a shortage of balls to be paid out and a light emitting means that lights up during prize ball payout are built in.

In addition, speaker covers 27 (thin plate members made of punching metal) are provided on the upper right side and the upper left side of the window portion 14c to cover the speaker assemblies 450 that output sound effects according to the game state. . Below the window 14c, as shown in FIG. 86, an upper tray 17 and a lower tray 50 are arranged so as to protrude forward and are vertically arranged side by side.

The upper tray 17 has the function of temporarily storing the game balls paid out from the payout device 133 (see FIG. 87) and guiding them to the ball shooting unit 112a side while aligning them in a line. Also, the lower plate 50
has a function of storing surplus game balls in the upper tray 17 . A ball guide opening 53 that opens in the front-rear direction and guides the ball to the lower tray 50 is formed in the rear side surface of the lower tray 50 .

It should be noted that there is no need to separate the upper tray 17 and the lower tray 50 and provide a plurality of portions for storing game balls, and the lower tray 50 is eliminated and only the upper tray 17 is provided, and only one storage section is provided. Also good.

An operation device 300 manually operated by the players is provided on the front side of the upper tray 17 (game ball storage area). The operation device 300 is an operation device used when an effect corresponding to the player's operation is performed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 or the like. The operation device 300 may be provided at another location such as the periphery of the lower tray 50 in addition to the upper tray 17.
It may be provided at a plurality of locations, and may be a push button type switch as an operation method, or may be configured to enable information input by another operation method such as a touch sensor or a non-contact sensor.

A passage forming unit 140 is attached to the rear side of the front frame 14 as shown in FIG. The passage forming unit 140 is molded of synthetic resin, and includes a front door side upper tray passage portion 141 leading to the upper tray 17, a front door side lower tray passage portion 142 leading to the lower tray 50, and a foul ball passage portion 145 ( See FIG. 92).

A put-out ball receptacle 143 that protrudes rearward and is open upward is formed in the upper corner of the passage forming unit 140 (the corner on the rotation base end side of the front frame 14). A passage entrance of the front door side upper tray passage portion 141 and a passage entrance of the front door side lower tray passage portion 142 are formed by partitioning the passage 143 to the left and right by a partition wall 144 .

The foul ball passage portion 145 (see FIG. 92) forms a passage for discharging game balls that have not reached the game area among the game balls shot from the ball shooting unit 112a into the lower tray 50 as foul balls.

As shown in FIG. 89, the foul ball passage portion 145 is provided with a foul ball receiving portion 146 that opens upward. A foul ball received in the foul ball receiving portion 146 is discharged to the lower tray 50 after flowing down the internal passage of the foul ball passage portion 145 (see FIG. 92). It should be noted that the foul ball passage portion 145 may be connected to the upper plate 17 instead of the lower plate 50 so that the foul ball is discharged to the upper plate 17 .

The foul ball passage portion 145 merges with a ball removal passage 147 (see FIG. 92), which is a passage through which an unfired ball flowing down from the upper tray 17 to the lower tray 50 is guided by the player's ball removal operation. is formed as

On the rear side of the front frame 14, multi-function cover members 171 and 172, which are resin cover members fastened and fixed to the left and right corners of the upper portion, are attached to protrude toward the rear side. On the front side of the multifunctional cover members 171 and 172, a wiring connector for conducting electricity to the electrical decoration part 8030 and the speaker assembly 450, an internal substrate of the electrical decoration parts 8031 and 8032 along the front frame 14, and one end An electronic board to which the other end of the connector to which the parts are connected is connected is arranged, and the electronic board and the connector are covered with the multifunctional cover members 171 and 172 .

In the portion covered by the multifunctional cover members 171 and 172 of the front frame 14, there are a wiring groove 14h communicating toward the left and right electric decoration parts 8031 and 8032, and an electric decoration part 8031, 8031, 8031, 8031, 8031 and 8031, An electronic board 14i is formed (see FIG. 103) to which the wiring drawn out from the 8032 is connected, and the terminal of each wiring is pulled out rearward through the wiring through groove 14h and inserted into the electronic board 14i from the rear side. be

Therefore, when the multifunctional cover members 171 and 172 are removed (see FIG. 103), electricity is supplied to the illumination section 8030 and the speaker assembly 450 from the back side of the front frame 14 (from the front side of the paper surface of FIG. 89). A connector for conductive wiring and a connector whose one end is connected to the inner substrate of the electrical decoration parts 8031 and 8032 can be easily inserted into and removed from the electronic substrate 14i.

A pair of multifunctional cover members 171 attached to the front end side of the front frame 14 are arranged on the upper and lower sides of the inner frame 12 at the front end side of the rotation.
0 (see FIG. 126) and the upper device in the front and rear direction, and can abut against each other depending on the situation, the details of which will be described later.

On the back side of the front frame 14, a container-shaped member made of a resin material and having an open front side is disposed in contact with the front frame 14 at the lower corner and formed between the front frame 14 and the front frame 14. A long cover member 173 that accommodates the wiring is attached from the rear side. The long cover member 173 is configured such that its cross-sectional area decreases as it moves from the rotation distal end side of the front frame 14 to the rotation base end side, and the lower wall portion 173a that forms the lower side of the space for accommodating the wiring is An upper wall portion 173b that is arranged parallel to the lower side of the front frame 14, is arranged above the lower wall portion 173a so as to face the lower wall portion 173a, and constitutes the upper side of the space that accommodates the wiring. Consists of shapes.

The long cover member 173 is a wall portion that is arranged to contact the front frame 14 in the same manner as the lower wall portion 173a and the upper wall portion 173b. An upward extending wall portion 173c extending upward from the wall portion 173b is provided.

The upward extending wall portion 173c is curved so that the end portion of the side connected to the lower wall portion 173a and the upper wall portion 173b protrudes in a semicircular shape toward the rotation base end side of the front frame . , a space that can be bent in a semicircular shape in the opposite direction is secured from the upper end of the curved portion, and the movable base end side of the front frame 14 is opened at the upper end.

That is, the wiring accommodated in the upwardly extending wall portion 173c is gently curved in a wavy shape (a wavy shape corresponding to one cycle of a sine wave), and the front frame 14 is rotated from the upper end position of the upwardly extending wall portion 173c. Protruded proximally. Therefore, by bending the wiring at the curved portion of the wiring, it is possible to absorb the positional change of the wiring (see FIG. 96) that occurs when the front frame 14 is opened and closed. It is possible to reduce the risk of disconnection of the wiring.

On the rear side of the front frame 14, an upper extending wall portion 173c of the long cover member 173 (front frame 14
The part closest to the rotation base end of the front frame 14) and the vertically elongated plate portion on the rotation base end side of the front frame 14, which is part of the main body frame 14a. An inverted cup-shaped inverted cup portion 178 that opens downward is provided.

The reverse cup part 178 is, for example, a part that countermeasures against fraudulent acts such as illegally spreading the rotation base end side of the front frame 14, inserting a piano wire from near the hinge 18 on the lower side, and entering the game area. is. That is, even if the piano wire is inserted between the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 from near the hinge 18 on the lower side, the tip of the piano wire enters the inverted cup shape of the inverted cup portion 178 from below. Since the movement of the piano wire can be hindered, the piano wire can be prevented from reaching the game area.

In addition, since the reverse cup portion 178 and the long cover member 173 are made of a resin material,
It is possible to take measures against cheating by heating the tip of the piano wire. That is, when a piano wire whose tip is heated is inserted into the inverted cup portion 178 and pressed against the inverted cup portion 178, the heat generated by the inverted cup portion 178
can pass through the inverted cup portion 178 as well as the elongated cover member 173
will also melt. Then, when the piano wire whose tip is heated passes through the long cover member 173, the wiring housed in the front side of the long cover member 173 is burnt out. , can make fraud easier to detect.

In particular, in this embodiment, the wall portion 178a of the reverse cup portion 178 on the side of the long cover 173 has a shape that matches the shape of the long cover member 173 and abuts (approaches) to each other. In addition, since the normal line of the lower surface of the reverse cup portion 178 in the wall portion 178a is directed downward, when the piano wire enters the reverse cup portion 178 from below, it can be pressed against the lower surface of the wall portion 178a. Since the long cover 173 can also be melted with a high probability when the reverse cup portion 178 is melted, it is possible to easily detect fraudulent acts.

The wall portion 178a has the effect of guiding the piano wire in the horizontal direction when the tip of the piano wire is not heated. That is, when the piano wire inserted through the gap forced into the rotation base end of the front frame 14 reaches the upper bottom of the reverse cup portion 178, when the piano wire is inserted deeper, the tip of the piano wire reaches the wall portion. 178a.

Since the wall portion 178a has a shape that matches the curved portion of the upward extending wall portion 173c, when the piano wire is inserted further deeply, the tip of the piano wire moves along the wall portion 178a, and the tip of the piano wire moves along the wall portion 178a. It is guided below the lower wall portion 173a. Furthermore, even if the piano wire is inserted deeply, the tip of the piano wire advances through the space below the lower wall portion 173a toward the rotating tip side of the front frame 14 (
The piano wire can be prevented from reaching the game area.

In addition, it is possible to prevent the tip of the piano wire from reaching the game area while preventing the reaction force applied to the person who cheats via the piano wire from increasing. By arranging a detection device for detecting the entrance of the piano wire in the space below 173a, it is possible to detect the fraudulent activity before the fraudulent person escapes, making it easier to secure the fraudulent person. .

That is, even if the piano wire is guided to the space below the lower wall portion 173a, the person who commits the fraud cannot discern it, so he/she will believe that the piano wire is on the way to the game area. . Then, until the tip of the piano wire reaches the game area (for example, the window part 14c
(until the end of the piano wire can be seen from the front side through the front side) and the action of inserting the piano wire further deeply (without making the person who commits the fraud have suspicion that the insertion of the piano wire is not going well). . Therefore, it is possible to lengthen the time it takes for a person who commits a fraudulent act to realize that the fraudulent act has been discovered and to plan an escape.

The detection device may be a photocoupler device, a magnetic sensor, or a button device. Further, the arrangement of the detection device is not limited to the space below the lower wall portion 173a, and various arrangements are permitted. For example, it may be arranged on the locking mechanism 20RK or may be arranged on the rear side portion of the operation handle 51 . In the case where it is arranged on the operating handle 51, for example, a detection device conventionally arranged on the operating handle 51 may also be used to determine whether the piano wire has entered.

The ball shooting unit 112a is a device that is exposed on the front side when the front frame 14 is opened, as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 90, this ball shooting unit 112a has an electromagnetic shooting solenoid 701 provided as a shooting device, and a game ball shot by the shooting solenoid 701 is disposed between an inner rail 61 and an outer rail 62. A launch rail 730 that guides the playing ball so that it is launched towards the area between
and a ball feeding device 720.

The ball feeding device 720 feeds the game balls stored in the upper tray 17 (see FIG. 89) to the launch rail 730.
Serve one at a time. In this case, the supplied game ball is arranged on the projecting path of the plunger 702 provided as the hitting portion in the shooting solenoid 701 . By inputting an electrical signal to the firing solenoid 701 , the plunger 702 moves toward the firing rail 7 .
It moves toward the game ball on 30, and the game ball is launched toward the game area. The electric actuator of the ball shooting unit 112a is not limited to the shooting solenoid 701, and a shooting motor or the like may be used. A detailed configuration of the ball shooting unit 112a will be described later.

On the left side of the inner frame 12 and to the left of the launch rail 730, as shown in FIG. 90, a board 167 having a plurality of connectors CN1 to CN3 to which the dish passage forming member 160 and harnesses HN1 to HN3 are connected is arranged. is set. The inner frame 12 is provided with a through-hole extending in the front-rear direction through the portion where the disc passage forming member 160 is provided. Fixed.

The plate passage forming member 160 has a main body side upper plate passage portion 161 and a main body side lower plate passage portion 162, as shown in FIG. The main body side upper tray passage portion 161 and the main body side lower tray passage portion 162 are
One end is opened toward the back side so as to be able to communicate with a through hole penetrating the inner frame 12 in the front-rear direction, and the other end is opened downward. direction changes by 90 degrees (changes from the front-back direction to the up-down direction). In this configuration:
The ball dispensed from the dispensing device 133 passes through the through hole of the inner frame 12, enters the dish passage forming member 160 from one end, and is discharged from the other end.

When the front frame 14 is in the closed state, the front frame 1 is attached to the lower portion of the dish passage forming member 160 .
4 of the passage forming unit 140 (see FIG. 89) enters. A front door side upper tray passage portion 141 is arranged below the main body side upper tray passage portion 161 , and a front door side lower tray passage portion 142 is arranged below the main body side lower tray passage portion 162 .

As shown in FIG. 90, a main body side upper dish passage portion 161 is provided on the lower side of the dish passage forming member 160.
And a shutter 163 is provided to regulate the outflow of game balls from the main body side lower tray passage portion 162 . The shutter 163 has a blocking position that narrows the exit portions of both passages to block the outflow of game balls,
It is provided so as to be switchable between a permissible position and a permissible position for permitting outflow of game balls.

A biasing member (such as a coil spring) is attached to the inner frame 12 to bias the shutter 163 toward the blocking position. It is configured such that the shutter 163 stays at the blocking position by force. As a result, when the front frame 14 is opened in a state in which game balls are stored in the main body side upper tray passage portion 161 or the main body side lower tray passage portion 162, the inconvenience of the stored balls falling out is avoided. there is

On the other hand, when the front frame 14 is closed with respect to the inner frame 12, the shutter 163 is pressed against the biasing force by the outer peripheral portion of the put-out ball socket portion 143 provided in the passage forming unit 140 of the front frame 14. is pushed back to the permissible position. In this state, the main body side upper tray passage portion 161 and the front door side upper tray passage portion 141 communicate with each other, and the main body side lower tray passage portion 162 and the front door side lower tray passage portion 142 communicate with each other, so that the game balls flow down. Permissible.

The substrate 167 includes a connector CN1 to which the harness HN1 is connected, a connector CN2 to which the harness HN2 is connected, and a connector CN3 to which the harness HN3 is connected. The substrate 167 is formed by separate substrates for the portions where the connectors CN1 and CN2 are arranged and the portion where the connector CN3 is arranged. This is because connectors CN1 and CN2 are connected to main controller 1.
10, while the connector CN3 is used for transmission with the sound lamp control device 113. Since the object of transmission is different, the intention is to prevent malfunction by using a separate board. according to.

The portion below the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 and 92. FIG. FIG. 91 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame 14 in which constituent members disposed below the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 are shown exploded, and FIG. 92 is a window portion of the front frame 14. 14c is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 14 in which constituent members disposed below 14c are shown exploded. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 91 and 92, below the window portion 14c of the front frame 14, the body frame 14
On the front side of c, the operation device 300 is disposed on the front side of the upper tray 17, diagonally above the lower tray 50 to the right, and at the center of the front frame 14 in the left-right direction.
A covering cover 370 is arranged on the front side of the .

The covering cover 370 is a member that is fastened and fixed to the front frame 14 in a positional relationship that covers the lower portion of the operation device 300 from the front side, and has a lateral width that is approximately the same as the lateral width of the front frame 14 . That is, the left and right end portions of the covering cover 370 are arranged vertically below the electrical decoration portions 8031 and 8032, respectively.

The covering cover 370 is fastened and fixed to the front frame 14 by fastening portions 370a formed at least at the left and right ends thereof, and a main body curved portion 371 configured in a curved shape in which the left and right central portions protrude toward the front side; Extending downward from the lower edge of the main body curved portion 371 at an intermediate position between the left-right central portion and the left-right end portion of the portion 371 toward the side adjacent to each other in the width direction, they merge at the extending lower end and are viewed from front V. A drooping portion 372 configured in a letter shape, a body curved portion 371 and a drooping portion 3
A translucent portion 373, which is a plate-like member that closes the opening surrounded by 72, is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is fastened and fixed to at least one of the main body curved portion 371 and the hanging portion 372, and the main body curved portion 371. A left flat support portion 374 is formed as a flat surface on the upper surface of the left end portion of the main body curved portion 371, a right flat support portion 375 is formed as a flat surface on the upper surface of the right end portion of the main body curved portion 371, and the right flat support portion 375 is supported from the rear side. Mainly provided is a support groove 376 which is a recessed groove and whose recessed width is increased (tapered) toward the rear side.

The main body curved portion 371 has a rounded front edge, and a rear edge that matches the front edge of the upper plate 17. When the upper plate is assembled (see FIG. 86), the main body curved portion 371 has a curved shape. 1
The rear left edge 371a abuts on the front side edge of the operating device 300 in the front-rear direction, and the rear left edge 371a is connected to the rear left edge 371a and has a shape that matches the front side edge of the upper frame member 330 of the operation device 300. A rear middle edge portion 371b that abuts on the frame member 330 in the front-rear direction, and the rear middle edge portion 371b.
1b on the opposite side of the back left edge 371a, has a shape that matches the front side edge of the ball rental operation unit 40, and contacts the ball rental operation unit 40 in the front-rear direction in the assembled state; Mainly provide

The drooping portion 372 covers the operation device 300 from the front side together with the main body curved portion 371, and is a plate portion on which the operation handle 51 is supported.
0 (a shape in which the contact positions with the right corner cover 380 match each other) to prevent access to the operation device 300 from the front side. Note that the drooping portion 372 is positioned closer to the front side than the recessed portion 15a, which will be described later.
By screwing a screw inserted from below into the bottom plate on which 5a is formed, it is fastened and fixed to the bottom plate on which recessed portion 15a is formed.

The translucent portion 373 is a portion that allows the light emitted from the operation device 300 to pass through to the front side, and is a portion that can perform an effect with the light, and is formed in a curved shape that matches the shape of the lower frame member 320 of the operation device 300. It is arranged close to the lower frame member 320 in the assembled state (see FIG. 86).

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the LED device 341f is arranged to emit light at least upward (see FIG. 32). The arrangement of the LED devices is an arbitrary matter, and in this embodiment, the LED devices 341f are arranged to emit light at least upward and downward. Specifically, it irradiates light upward (arranged on the upper surface of the lighting support portion 341e).
Six LEDs emit light downward (arranged on the lower surface of the lighting support portion 341e)
are arranged respectively.

The light emitted from the LED device 341f that emits light downward passes through a different number of members depending on the state of the operation device 300. FIG. For example, when the tilting device 310 is in the first state (see FIG. 22), the light emitted from the LED that emits light downward passes through the tilting device 310 and the lower frame member 320, and then passes through the translucent portion 373. do. On the one hand, the tilting device 3
When 10 is in the second state (see FIG. 32), the light emitted from the LED that emits light downward does not pass through the tilting device 310, but passes through the lower frame member 320 and then through the translucent portion 373. .

Therefore, for example, when the amount of light emitted from an LED that emits light downward is kept constant, the amount of light visible through the translucent portion 373 is compared to when the tilting device 310 is in the first state. Thus, it is stronger when the tilting device 310 is in the second state. Therefore, while making it unnecessary to change the amount of light emitted from the LED that emits light downward (while reducing the control load by omitting the control for changing the amount of light), the tilting device 310 can be adjusted according to the state change of the tilting device 310 . An effect of changing the amount of light that can be visually recognized through the translucent portion 373 can be performed.

As another effect control method, it is also possible to perform control to change the amount of light emitted from an LED that emits light downward in accordance with a change in the state of the tilting device 310 . For example, as the tilting device 310 changes from the second state (see FIG. 32) to the first state (see FIG. 22), the amount of light is strongly changed (stepwise), while the tilting device 310 changes to the first state (see FIG. 22). The amount of light is controlled to be weaker (stepwise) in accordance with the change from the state 1 to the second state, so that the light visible through the translucent portion 373 accompanying the change in the state of the tilting device 310 is reduced. It is possible to reduce the degree of change in the amount of light in (can be eliminated depending on the setting).

The left flat support portion 374 abuts on the lower end of the electrical decoration portion 8031 at the top and bottom in the assembled state (FIG. 86). That is, when a downward load is applied to the electrical decoration portion 8031 and the electrical decoration portion 8031 is displaced downward, an upward reaction force is generated from the left plane support portion 374 toward the electrical decoration portion 8031. . As a result, it is possible to suppress downward positional displacement of the electrical decoration part 8031 .

The right plane support portion 375 abuts on the lower end of the electrical decoration portion 8032 at the top and bottom in the assembled state (FIG. 86). That is, when a downward load is applied to the electrical decoration portion 8032 and the electrical decoration portion 8032 is displaced downward, an upward reaction force is generated from the right side plane support portion 375 toward the electrical decoration portion 8032. . As a result, it is possible to suppress the downward displacement of the electrical decoration part 8032 .

Although the details will be described later, the electrical decoration portion 8031 and the electrical decoration portion 8032 are provided in the upper panel unit 40.
0, and when the upper panel unit 400 is displaced downward, the electrical decoration part 803
An upward reaction force is generated from 1,8032 toward the upper panel unit 400 . for that reason,
According to this embodiment, the upper panel unit 400 can be supported over a wide area by the electrical decoration part 8031, the electrical decoration part 8032, and the covering cover 370 fastened and fixed to the body frame 14a. The force required to prop up the can be widely distributed.

The support groove 376 functions as a receiving groove for receiving the lower end portion of the electrical decoration portion 8032 entering from the rear side. In the assembled state (see FIG. 86), the electrical decoration part 8032 is in a state of being inserted to the deepest part of the support groove 376. In this state, the front lower corner end of the electrical decoration part 8032 and the front side end of the right plane support part 375 are aligned. matches the position of

The details of the engagement relationship between the support groove 376 and the electrical decoration portion 8032 will be described later. By connecting the covering cover 370 and the electric decoration part 8032 by the engaging relationship described later, the covering cover 370 and the electric decoration part 8032 can be respectively fastened and fixed to the main body frame 14a to form an assembled state. A separate fixing part that fastens the covering cover 370 and the electrical decoration part 8032 to each other can be eliminated.

Below the window portion 14c of the front frame 14, a resin plate-like plate member 14d is attached to the main body frame 14a (or another member (upper plate 17 The passage forming unit 140 is fastened and fixed to the body frame 14a on the back side of the plate member 14d (or on the front side of the body frame 14a) on the back side of the plate member 14d. The body frame 14a is fastened and fixed to another member (such as a member that constitutes the upper plate 17), and the metal plate-like sheet metal member 150 covers the passage forming unit 140 from the back side. It is fastened and fixed to the member 14d (or another member arranged on the front side of the main body frame 14a (a member constituting the upper plate 17, etc.) sandwiches the main body frame 14a).

Even if the passage forming unit 140 made of synthetic resin is penetrated through the sheet metal member 150 (for example, a wire or piano wire whose tip is heated is pressed and melted), the front frame is It functions as an entry prevention member that prevents entry from the front side of 14 to the inner frame 12 side. That is, even if a wire or the like whose tip is heated is pressed against the sheet metal member 150 made of metal, it will not penetrate, and the wire can be prevented from entering the rear side of the front frame 14 . .

The sheet metal member 150 is formed so as to cover the lower end of the front door side lower tray passage portion 142 and the lower end portion of the foul ball passage portion 145 on the left side in the front view, and the opened front side is the passage forming unit. It mainly includes a fitting box portion 151 to be fitted to 140 and a flat plate-like plate portion 152 covering the back surface of the lower side portions of the foul ball passage portion 145 and the ball extraction passage 147 .

Since the fitting box portion 151 covers the lower end portion of the front door side lower tray passage portion 142 and the lower end portion of the foul ball passage portion 145, the fitting box portion 151 covers the lower end portion of the front door side lower tray passage portion 142 and the foul ball passage portion. 145 is not limited to the case where the passage forming unit 140 is penetrated in the front-rear direction,
Even if the wire is penetrated in the horizontal direction or the vertical direction,
Entry beyond 40 can be prevented.

Since the plate-like portion 152 covers the rear surface of the foul ball passage portion 145 and the ball removal passage 147, when a wire exemplified by the passage forming unit 140 is pressed against the right side of the lower plate 50 to form a through hole, Even so, it is possible to prevent an illegal member from entering the rear side of the passage forming unit 140 . In a case where such a situation occurs, for example, the operation device 300 is removed, and the exemplified wire is pressed against a portion (a portion obliquely upward to the rear of the recessed portion 15a) where the front and back thickness is reduced accordingly. A case is exemplified in which a through-hole is opened by being pressed, and the exemplified wire enters.

Further, the front frame 14 is provided with an operating portion back member 155 fastened from the back side to the left end of the passage forming unit 140, and the operating portion back member 155 is arranged with the cylinder lock 20 in the assembled state (see FIG. 86). It is fastened and fixed to the body frame 14a at the upper and lower positions of the position where it is located.

As shown in FIGS. 89 and 91, the operation section back member 155 is a member configured to increase the dimension in the front-rear direction by ribs formed mainly from the outer edge of a plate member elongated in the left-right direction in the front-rear direction. There is a through hole 156 drilled in the plate member so that the cylinder lock 20 can pass through, and the through hole 1
56, and a pair of insertion holes 157 through which screws for fastening and fixing the operation unit back member 155 to the body frame 14a are inserted; A pair of connecting insertion holes 158 are drilled side by side, and an opening/closing regulating portion 159 protruding rearward from the through hole 156 on the rotation base end side.

The connection insertion hole 158 is formed in the connection portion 1 formed at the left end portion of the passage forming unit 140.
48 in the longitudinal direction. Here, the connection portion 148 of the passage forming unit 140 is positioned so as to coincide with the upper connection insertion hole 158 in the front-rear direction.
The projecting portion 148a, which has a columnar shape with an inner diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of 58 and protrudes toward the rear side, is inserted into the connecting insertion hole 158 at a position where it coincides with the lower connecting insertion hole 158 in the front-rear direction. and a threaded portion 148b drilled as a hole into which a screw can be screwed.

With this configuration, when the operating portion back member 155 is placed on the back side of the passage forming unit 140 and assembled, the passage forming unit 140 and the operating portion back surface are connected by passing the projecting portion 148a through the connecting insertion hole 158 on the upper side. After aligning with the member 155, the operation unit back surface member 1 can be easily assembled by inserting a screw through the lower coupling insertion hole 158 and screwing it into the screw-in portion 148b.
55 can be fastened to the passage forming unit 140 .

An L-shaped wall portion 158a is formed by forming the left edge of the left end portion of the operation portion back member 155, in which the connecting insertion hole 158 is formed, and the lower edge at right angles. On the other hand, the connecting portion 148 of the passage forming unit 140 includes an extending wall portion 148c extending from the plate forming the skeleton of the passage forming unit 140 to the rear side so as to partition the area. 148c is
In the assembled state (see FIG. 89), it is formed in an L-shape that can face up, down, left, and right with the wall portion 158a.

Therefore, when assembling the operation section back member 155 to the passage forming unit 140, the projection 148a is passed through the connection insertion hole 158, and the wall 158a is positioned vertically with respect to the extension wall 148c. The position and posture of the operation section back member 155 with respect to the passage forming unit 140 can be adjusted quickly and easily by the lateral contact.

The opening/closing restricting portion 159 is a portion that faces front and rear of the board support device 600 (see FIG. 90) disposed on the inner frame 12 in the assembled state (see FIG. 86), and will be described later in detail.
Under predetermined conditions, the front frame 1 is brought into contact with the board support device 600 or the game board 13
4 is prevented from being closed.

In the present embodiment, the opening/closing restricting portion 159 is a portion extending toward the back side of the operation portion back member 155 and made of synthetic resin. The shape is U-shaped. Therefore, it is more difficult to bend than when it is formed in a flat plate shape with the same plate thickness, and compared to the case where it is extended in a block shape that fills the U-shaped opening, the required amount of material is required while ensuring rigidity. can be reduced. Therefore, the plate thickness is the same as the thickness of the other portions of the operation unit back member 155 (for example, since the strength can be relied on the main body frame 14a, there is no problem even if the strength is low, and the portion is formed as thin as possible). The strength of the open/close restricting portion 159 can be ensured while improving moldability by forming the opening/closing restricting portion 159 with a plate thickness).

Note that the cross-sectional shape of the opening/closing restricting portion 159 is not limited to the U-shape as long as it is a shape that ensures rigidity and maintains the shape. For example, instead of a flat cross section, a curved (wavy) cross section, a stepped cross section, a rectangular wave cross section, or a cylindrical cross section may be used.

In addition, the opening/closing restricting portion 159 is not formed as a part of the operation portion rear surface member 155, but is formed as part of the body frame 14.
It may be composed of a metal part that is bent and extended from a to the back side, or that is extended to the back side from another member that is fixed to the back side of the body frame 14a. However, as in this embodiment,
Forming the open/close restricting portion 159 from a synthetic resin prevents the board support device 600 from being chipped or dented when it comes into contact with the board support device 600 (see FIG. 90) formed from a metal member. can do. As a result, a worker who changes the state of the board surface supporting device 600 to attach and detach the game board 13 can be less likely to be injured by touching the cracks or dents formed in the board surface supporting device 600.例文帳に追加

Here, since the opening/closing regulating portion 159 is arranged closer to the rotation proximal end side of the front frame 14 than the through hole 156 in which the cylinder lock 20 is arranged, the cylinder lock arranged further toward the rotation distal end side is arranged. A long interval can be secured between the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 at 20 points. Therefore, in a state in which the opening/closing regulating portion 159 is in contact with the board support device 600 or the game board 13, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the cylinder lock 20 and the locking mechanism 20RK arranged at the leading end of the rotation are locked by mistake. can.

As a route through which a foreign object such as a wire enters, for example, a route passing through a gap in the operation device 300 is assumed. On the other hand, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 91 and 92, the operation device 300 is configured to be entirely separable from the main body frame 14a toward the front side. In other words, since the structure of the operation device 300 is completed on the front side of the main body frame 14a, it is difficult to enter the rear surface of the main body frame 14a even if the operation device 300 is traced through the gap.

A harness HN3 (see FIG. 96) for supplying electric power to the operation device 300 has a wiring through hole 14 drilled in the front-rear direction of the body frame 14a at the right end position of the long cover member 173.
a1 (see FIG. 103), the harness HN3 is attached to the protective cover device 350 (see FIG. 103).
57) is connected to the operation device 300 via a connector (not shown) fixed to the lower corner of the right outer peripheral wall.

As a result, even if a foreign object such as a wire enters the inside of the operation device 300 through the gap of the operation device 300, the wire or the like can reach the harness HN3 connected to the outside of the operation device 300 having a substantially case shape. Therefore, foreign matter such as wires can be easily prevented from entering the back side of the body frame 14a.

It should be noted that the foreign matter entering the operation device 300 may be liquid. For example, a player who feels bad about the result of a game may pour drinking water or the like on the pachinko machine 10 . that time,
A conveniently located operating device 300 is likely to fall prey to being splashed with drinking water.
3) may fail.

Furthermore, if a liquid such as drinking water enters behind the body frame 14a, it may cause a failure of the electronic substrate or the like. Since the operation device 300 is separably independent, it is possible to prevent liquid such as drinking water poured on the operation device 300 from entering the back side of the body frame 14a.

A concave portion 15a is formed in a T-shape when viewed from above on the upper surface of the bottom plate of the lower tray unit 15 (the surface facing the operation device 300). The recessed portion 15a is configured as a deep recessed portion.
It is not a perfect case shape, and gaps are formed here and there (for example, see FIG. 13,
The transmission hole 321a and the opening 325 correspond to the clearance gap).
The concave portion 15 a serves to temporarily store the liquid that drops downward from the operation device 300 .

In the operation device 300, the drive motor 342 is arranged closer to the rear side of the opening 325, so the tilting device 310 functions as an umbrella (see FIGS. 13 and 17(b)) and is connected to wiring. Since the portion is arranged below the horizontal plate portion arranged between the motor housing portion 341e and the lighting support portion 341e (see FIGS. 17(b) and 18), liquid such as drinking water does not reach the drive motor 3.
42 can be directly applied to prevent failure.

Also, since the voice coil motor 352 communicates in the vertical direction through the transmission hole 321a, it may be exposed to liquid such as drinking water. The liquid only adheres to the vibrating surface (upper surface), and the adhered liquid flows down the front side due to the inclination of the vibrating surface itself of the voice coil motor 352 (see FIGS. 13 and 22). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the voice coil motor 352 from breaking down.

With the above-described configuration, even if a liquid such as drinking water is splashed on the player on his way home, the next player can continue playing normally by simply wiping off the touched portion of the upper surface of the operation device 300. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the maintenance time of the operation device 300 from putting pressure on the business hours.

Below the window portion 14c of the front frame 14, a binding movable member 180 is fastened and fixed to the plate member 14d on the rotation base end side of the front frame 14 on the back side of the main body frame 14a. Next, the binding movable member 180 will be described with reference to FIGS. 93 to 96. FIG. 93 to 9
6 shows a state in which the passage forming unit 140 and the sheet metal member 150 are removed from the front frame 14 as in FIG.

93(a) is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame 14, and FIG. 93(b) is a front perspective view of the movable binding member 180 in which the released state and the fixed state of the movable binding member 180 are shown side by side. be. In FIG. 93(b), the movable binding member 180 in the released state is shown on the upper side, and the movable binding member 180 in the fixed state is shown on the lower side.

The binding movable member 180 is fixed in the assembled state (see FIG. 86) and is a member that binds the harnesses HN1 to HN3 extended leftward from the upper end of the upwardly extending wall portion 173c.

In this embodiment, the harness HN1 connected to the operating handle 51 (see FIG. 92)
and the harness HN2 connected to the ball rental operating portion 40 (see FIG. 92) are each guided to the binding movable member 180 without a relay board and bound to the binding movable member 180, respectively.

On the other hand, each of the illumination parts 8029 to 8033, the operation device 300 or the frame button 22 (FIG. 86
) are once connected (gathered) to a relay board disposed in the space on the front side of the long cover member 173, and a bundle of extension harnesses HN is connected from the relay board.
3 moves to the binding movable member 180, and the extension harness HN3 is bound to the binding movable member 180 (see FIG. 96).

The binding movable member 180 is a member formed of a synthetic resin material, and is rotated by a main body portion 181 fastened and fixed to the plate member 14d from the back side and a screw fastened and fixed to the main body portion 181 in the vertical direction. A movable arm portion 182 that is pivotally supported, and one side surface of the movable arm portion 182 along the lower edge of the movable arm portion 182 (the side facing the main body portion 181 in FIG. 93(a)). A pair of highly flexible binding arms 183 extending from the opposite side) and a movable arm 182
93(a) on the side opposite to the main body 181) and is capable of locking the binding arm 183. A pair of locking portions 184
and a temporary fixing portion 185 extending downward from the lower edge of the movable arm portion 182 at a position (intermediate position) between the pair of binding arm portions 183 and having an opening.

In the binding movable member 180 , the binding arm portion 183 is formed with high flexibility, while the other portion is formed at least with lower flexibility (higher rigidity) than the binding arm portion 183 .

The body portion 181 includes a portion to be fixed 181a having a substantially horseshoe-shaped cross section and a through-hole in the center through which a screw is passed, and projecting from the left and right lower corners of the portion to be fixed 181a toward the plate member 14d. A pair of detent protrusions 181b provided, and an intermediate stop portion extending downward from the lower edge of the front side end portion of the fixed portion 181a, and the extending tip thereof curving close to the plate member 14d side. 181c, and a plate-shaped support plate portion 181d extending leftward along the lower edge of the fixed portion 181a.
(See FIG. 96(a)) and a cylindrical fastening portion which is a portion disposed on the upper portion of the support plate portion 181d and is formed of a cylindrical shape having an outer diameter smaller than the diameter of the screw head to be fastened. 181e;
Mainly provide

The plate member 14d includes a hole group 14d1 at a position where the binding movable member 180 is fixed, which is composed of through holes arranged in the same arrangement as the fixed portion 181a and the pair of anti-rotation portions 181b.

When the screws passing through the fixed portion 181a are fastened and fixed to the corresponding fastening holes of the hole group 14d1 of the plate member 14d, the pair of anti-rotation protrusions 181b are fitted into the corresponding fitting holes of the hole group 14d1. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the binding movable member 180 from rotating around the screw penetrating the fixed portion 181a at the time of fastening, and the plate member 14 of the binding movable member 180 at the time of fixing.
d can be determined.

The intermediate retaining portion 181c maintains the harnesses HN1 to HN3 between them and the plate member 14d.
In the present embodiment, by narrowing the distance between the extension end (lower end) and the plate member 14d, the harnesses HN1 to HN3 can be prevented from slipping down, and the center of the harnesses can be positioned on the plate member 14d side. The area (the plate member 14d and the intermediate stopper portion 18) that accommodates the harnesses HN1 to HN3 while suppressing stress concentration due to deformation due to the shape that is curved along the arranged circle.
1c) can be ensured to have a large cross-sectional area.

The support plate portion 181d forms a plane that guides the rotation of the movable arm portion 182, and the cylindrical fastening portion 181
The outer peripheral surface of e is fitted in the proximal end portion of the movable arm portion 182 to pivotally support the movable arm portion 182 (see FIG. 96).

The movable arm portion 182 has a proximal end that is smoothly connected to a plane OS1 that is offset from the axial support position of the cylindrical fastening portion 181e, with a portion that is externally and pivotally supported by the cylindrical fastening portion 181e as a proximal end. 182a and an elongated thin plate portion 182b provided continuously on the opposite side of the base end portion 182a from the pivotal support position.

The base end portion 182a includes the left and right ends (the portion where the straight line connecting to the axis is parallel to the plane OS1) and the back side end (the portion closest to the plane OS1) of the outer circumference of the cylindrical portion that is fitted onto the cylindrical fastening portion 181e. Extending from each of the adjacent portions are rotational sidewalls. Each side wall is formed in an arc shape in which the centers of curvature radii are arranged on the same side. equal to the thickness.

Therefore, the base end portion 182a maintains higher rigidity than the thin plate portion 182b. In this embodiment, the base end portion 182a is designed with a design concept (high rigidity) that does not intend elastic deformation, and the thin plate portion 182b is designed with a design concept (low rigidity) that intends elastic deformation depending on the situation. .

Since a pair of binding arm portions 183 are configured to have the same shape, one will be described and the description of the other will be omitted. The binding arm portion 183 has a small width portion 183a formed in the vicinity of the tip portion with a width equivalent to the width of the root, and a large width portion 183b formed wider than the small width portion 183a alternately at regular intervals. It is formed. In the fixed state, the binding arm portion 183 is inserted from below into the through hole formed between the locking portion 184 and the movable arm portion 182 (see FIG. 93(b)).

The large width portion 183b of the binding arm portion 183 is formed to be slightly thicker than the small width portion 183a. In this embodiment, a space can be secured on the inner peripheral side of the binding arm portion 183 by forming the thickened portion on the outer peripheral side in the fixed state (see the lower side of FIG. 93(b)).

The locking portion 184 includes a large opening portion 184a formed on the movable arm portion 182 side and the large opening portion 184a.
A small opening 184b formed on the opposite side of the movable arm 182 across the 84a and having an opening width smaller than that of the large opening 184a is mainly provided (see FIG. 96).

The large opening 184a is sized to allow the binding arm 183 to pass through regardless of the position of the binding arm 183, and the small opening 184b allows the small width portion 183a of the binding arm 183 to pass through. , and the large-width portion 183b are of such a size that they cannot be passed through (locked).

According to this embodiment, when the binding arm portion 183 is to be moved relative to the locking portion 184, it is arranged on the side of the large opening 184a (the side where the inner area surrounded by the binding arm portion 183 becomes smaller). ,
When the binding arm portion 183 is to be locked to the locking portion 184, the size (tightness) of the inner area surrounded by the binding arm portion 183 can be easily adjusted by arranging it on the side of the small opening 184b. can do.

The temporary fixing portion 185 has a through hole through which a binding band can be inserted in the central portion thereof. Even if the binding arm portion 183 breaks due to long-term use and the harnesses HN1 to HN3 cannot be bound, a commercially available binding band can be inserted through the through hole of the temporary fixing portion 185 and fixed. , harnesses HN1 to HN3 can be bundled.

A movable range of the binding movable member 180 will be described. FIG. 94(a) is a partial rear view of the front frame 14 showing the lower left corner of the front frame 14, and FIG. 94(b) is XCIVb of FIG. 94(a).
95(a) is a partial rear view of the front frame 14 showing the lower left corner of the front frame 14, and FIG. XCV of a)
2 is a partial cross-sectional view of the front frame 14 along line b-XCVb. FIG.

94(a) and 94(b) show a state in which the movable arm 182 is closest to the plate member 14d (one limit state of the movable range), and FIGS. 95(a) and 95 ( In b)
A state in which the movable arm portion 182 rotates away from the plate member 14d and abuts on the vertically long metal portion constituting the left portion of the body frame 14a (the other limit state of the movable range) is illustrated. .

As shown in FIGS. 94 and 95, the movable arm portion 182 has an axis parallel to the rotation axis of the front frame 14 (
rotatable about 160 degrees around a vertical axis). Considering the situation in which the pachinko machines 8010 are installed in the amusement arcade (a situation in which the pachinko machines 8010 are arranged side by side and are rotated by 90 degrees or more, there is a risk of collision with the adjacent pachinko machine 8010), this angle is normally used. It is sufficiently larger than the rotation angle required for the front frame 14 when opening and closing.

Therefore, during normal use, the movable arm 182 cannot be elastically deformed and cannot be rotated relative to the main body 181 (the range between the state shown in FIG. 94 and the state shown in FIG. 95). Since there is no movable arm portion 182, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the movable arm portion 182 will be deteriorated and broken due to elastic deformation.

Next, the manner in which the harnesses HN1 to HN3 are supported will be described. Harness HN1-HN
3 is supported by the binding movable member 180 so that the arrangement is defined, for example, it is possible to prevent accidental pinching between the outer frame 14 and the inner frame 12 and disconnection.

FIG. 96(a) is a schematic rear view of the movable binding member 180 and the harnesses HN1 to HN3, and FIG. 96(b) is a schematic top view of FIG. 96(a). FIG. 96(c) is a schematic rear view of the movable binding member 180 and the harnesses HN1 to HN3, and FIG. 96(d) is a schematic top view of FIG. 96(c).

96(a) and 96(b) show one limit state of the binding movable member 180, and FIGS. 96(c) and 96(d) show the other limit state of the binding movable member 180. is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 96, the intermediate stop portion 181c is located at a position moved from the opening opened leftward in the upper end portion of the upward extending wall portion 173c to the rotation base end side of the front frame 14. be. That is, since the intermediate stop portion 181c and the opening opened toward the left at the upper end portion of the upwardly extending wall portion 173c are on the same horizontal line, the upper end portion of the upwardly extending wall portion 173c is extended from the upwardly extending wall portion 173c. The harnesses HN1 to HN3 can be extended substantially horizontally and supported by the intermediate stop portion 181c.

Since the harnesses HN1 to HN3 are supported by the intermediate stop portion 181c near the cylindrical fastening portion 181e, which is the pivotal support position of the movable arm portion 182, the upward extending wall portion 173c sandwiching the intermediate stop portion 181c is formed.
The shape of the harnesses HN1 to HN3 on the opposite side to the movable arm portion 18 of the binding movable member 180
2 along the shape. As a result, FIGS. 96(b) and 96(d)
), the bending portions of the harnesses HN1 to HN3 are curved, and extreme bending deformation can be prevented.

Further, by arranging the locking portion 184 on the side close to the plate member 14d, the binding arm portion 18
3 can be arranged on the opposite side of the plate member 14d with the movable arm portion 182 interposed therebetween. Therefore, especially when the front frame 14 is closed with respect to the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 96(b)), the harnesses HN1 to HN3 can be curved with a sufficiently large radius of curvature. As a result, disconnection due to bending of the harnesses HN1 to HN3 can be prevented.

97(a) and 97(b) schematically show the front frame 14, the inner frame 12, the movable binding member 180 and the harnesses HN1 to HN3, which schematically illustrate the movable binding member 180 and the harnesses HN1 to HN3.
3 is a schematic top view of FIG. 97(a) shows one limit state of the movable binding member 180, and FIG. 97(b) shows the other limit state of the movable binding member 180. As shown in FIG.

97(a) and 97(b), the rotation center point P57 indicating the central axis position of the front door mounting bracket 57 (see FIG. 86) is illustrated, and the front frame 14 and inner frame 12 are schematically shown. The imaginary lines schematically show the members fixed to the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 and pivotally supported at the rotation center point P57, respectively. The rotation center point P57 is shown as the rotation axis of the front frame 14. Similarly to the front frame 14, the binding movable member 180 fixed to the front frame 14 also rotates about the rotation center point P57 with respect to the inner frame 12. Rotate.

From one limit state shown in FIG. 97(a) to the other limit state shown in FIG. 97(b),
The base end portion 182a of the movable arm portion 182 rotates about the cylindrical fastening portion 181e, thereby moving the inner frame 12.
and the opening and closing of the front frame 14, a large load is not applied to the thin plate portion 182b, and deformation of the thin plate portion 182b can be suppressed, thereby improving durability (see FIG. 9).
6(b), see also FIG. 96(d)).

As shown in FIGS. 97(a) and 97(b), the harnesses HN1 to HN3 supported by the binding movable member 180 are connected to the front frame 14 regardless of whether the front frame 14 is opened or closed with respect to the inner frame 12.
The vertically elongated metal portion (in FIG. 96(d),
The base end 182a of the movable arm 182 is routed along a path that passes through the vicinity of the contact. That is, by forcibly detouring the harnesses HN1 to HN3, the harness HN
1 to HN3 can be prevented from deviating to the front end of the front frame 14 when turning.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the harnesses HN1 to HN3 from interfering with the work performed by the operator when the front frame 14 is opened and closed, and the harness H when the front frame 14 is closed.
It is possible to improve the fit of N1 to HN3 (set by bending only once on the base end side of rotation) (see FIGS. 96(b) and 97(a)).

In this embodiment, the intermediate stop portion 181c is arranged vertically above the reverse cup portion 178 regardless of the position of the movable arm portion 182 (see FIG. 91). The harnesses HN1 to HN3 are supported by the intermediate stop portion 181c arranged vertically above the reverse cup portion 178. For example, by heating the tip of a wire or piano wire to a high temperature, the reverse cup portion 178 is melted and penetrated. , it is possible to take countermeasures against a fraudulent act of inserting a wire between the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12. - 特許庁

That is, when the wire is pressed against the lower surface of the reverse cup portion 178, melted, penetrates the wire, and advances toward the game area, when the wire advances vertically upward from the upper bottom portion of the reverse cup portion 178, the temperature rises. A harness H in which the tip of the heated wire is supported by the intermediate stopper 181c
It is pressed against N1 to HN3. As a result, the harnesses HN1 to HN3 are burnt out and rendered non-conductive.

By controlling to output an error signal and sound an alarm (to display an error screen) when the continuity of the harnesses HN1 to HN3 is interrupted, fraud can be quickly discovered. . Therefore, it is possible to prevent a fraudulent person from gaining fraudulent profits.

More specifically, since the harness HN1 is connected to the operating handle 51 (see FIG. 92) as described above, if the harness HN1 is burned out, the ball can be shot even by rotating the operating handle 51. Gone. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the period until the fraudulent act is discovered after the fraudulent act is committed (the fraudulent act can be detected early).

In this case, after inserting a wire into the game area and tampering with the game area (for example, after bending a nail to make it easier to illegally win a prize), the ball is inserted into the first prize opening 64 (see FIG. 2) or the like. Since it is possible to make it impossible to shoot balls to a person who commits a fraudulent act of illegally obtaining a prize ball by winning a prize, it is possible to prevent an illegal profit from being given. That is, it is possible to make it impossible to commit a specific fraudulent act.

Also, since the harness HN2 is connected to the ball lending operation unit 40 (see FIG. 92) as described above, when the harness HN2 is burned out, the ball lending button 42 (see FIG. 89) and the return button 43 (see FIG. 89) is disabled. Accordingly, a person who commits fraud shall:
Since there is a risk that due to one's own fraudulent behavior, it will be impossible to collect the bills and balls for the balance of the card inserted into the above-mentioned card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown). be able to.

Furthermore, in order to eliminate the risk of being unable to collect bills and balls for the balance of the card inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown), the card unit (ball lending unit) Unit) is 0 yen, but the player commits the fraudulent act without leaving the seat, so the gaming machine store can easily notice the fraudulent act.

In the first place, when the connection of the harness HN2 is cut off, the card unit (ball lending unit) (
(not shown) is output at a game machine shop where a disconnection error (CR error) is output, the disconnection error (C
By confirming the R error), the possibility of fraud can be easily grasped.

98 is a front view of the passage forming unit 140. FIG. In addition, in FIG. 98, the sheet metal member 15
The outline of 0 and the outline of the ball guide opening 53 are shown in phantom lines.

As shown in FIG. 98 , the ball guide opening 53 is arranged at the lower end of the front door side lower tray passage portion 142 and the lower end of the foul ball passage portion 145 . In addition, in this embodiment, the front door side lower tray passage portion 1
The lower end of 42 occupies about 2/3 of the lateral width of ball guide opening 53 in the left part of ball guide opening 53, and the lower end of foul ball passage part 145 occupies the remaining area in the right part of ball guide opening 53. The partition plate portion 53a is arranged so as to occupy an area (an area of about 1/3 of the lateral width of the ball guide opening 53).
partitioned by

The front door side lower tray passage portion 142 and the foul ball passage portion 145 are passages extending from the payout ball receiving portion 143 and the foul ball receiving portion 146, respectively, so that the ball can flow down toward the lower tray 50. , the extension direction is directed (switched) to the left and right sides at least once each, S-shaped paths SL1, S
L2 respectively.

Due to the S-shaped path SL1, it is possible to increase the flow path length of the front door side lower tray passage portion 142 while keeping the vertical dimension of the passage forming unit 140 short, so that the liquid stays inside the front door side lower tray passage portion 142. The number of possible spheres can be increased. As a result, the window portion 14c (see FIG. 86)
While securing a large vertical dimension of the lower tray 50, the number of balls that can be retained on the upstream side of the lower tray 50 can be increased. Due to the large number of balls that can be temporarily placed on the upstream side), the stress of replenishing balls is given to the player (when the balls for 50 minutes of the lower tray are exhausted, the player is required to replenish the balls from the senryo box). ) can be configured.

The front door side lower tray passage portion 142 and the foul ball passage portion 145 are respectively provided with bend regions NEa1, NEa2, NEb1, and NEb2 as regions in which the extension direction is bent in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction, and they are common. Features That is, the front door side lower tray passage portion 142 includes a first bending region NEa1 formed on the downstream side and a second bending region NEa1 formed upstream of the first bending region NEa1 and having a characteristic portion thereof reversed left and right. and an area NEa2.

Further, the foul ball passage portion 145 is composed of a first bending region NEb1 formed on the downstream side and a second bending region NE formed on the upstream side of the first bending region NEb1 by reversing the right and left of the characteristic portion.
and b2. In the description of the characteristic portions, the characteristics of the first bending region NEa1 will be described, and descriptions of the other bending regions NEa2, NEb1, and NEb2 will be omitted.

FIG. 99 is an enlarged front view of the first bending region NEa1. As shown in FIG. 99, in the first bending region NEa1, of the left and right side walls of the front door side lower tray passage portion 142, the side wall Na and the side wall Na disposed on the side opposite to the direction in which the S-shaped path SL1 extends left and right. , a ceiling wall Nb disposed above the side wall Na in a manner intersecting the extending direction of the side wall Na; and a neighboring wall Nc, each wall Na,
Nb and Nc are extended from the back side bottom plate portion of the passage forming unit 140 to the front side.

The adjacent wall Nc is formed by curving a surface Nc1 on the opposite side of the ceiling wall Nb along the S-shaped path SL1, so that the surface Nc1 functions as a spherical guide surface. On the other hand, the surface Nc2 (the surface facing the ceiling surface Nb) on the opposite side of the surface Nc1 regulates the traveling direction of the illegally inserted wire HM (a thin metal such as a wire or piano wire). It functions as a surface to support the surface, and the details will be described later. Note that the adjacent wall Nc has a gap Nin between the lower end of the extension and the side wall Na, which is the length of the wire H.
It is set larger than the width dimension (diameter) of M.

As shown in FIG. 99, due to the shape of the first bending region NEa1, the incorrectly inserted wire HM
can be prevented from penetrating deeper. That is, as shown in FIG. 99, as an entrance path for the illegally inserted wire HM, the ball guide opening 53 is used as an entrance and the front door side lower tray passage portion 14 is used.
2 is conceivable.
M is pressed against the side wall of the front door side lower tray passage portion 142 to advance.

When the wire HM is pressed against the side wall Na in the first bending region NEa1 by a person who commits fraud, the wire HM enters the gap Nin, but the wire HM is not pressed against the side wall Na in the first bending region NEa1. Even in this case, the wire HM advances rightward due to the S-shaped path SL1 of the front door side lower tray passage portion 142, so that the wire HM is pressed against the side wall Na in the second bending region NEa2 and enters the gap Nin. It will be. That is, a pair of bending regions NEa1,
By arranging the NEa2 with the left and right reversed, the wire HM can enter the gap Nin without exception.

FIG. 99 shows an example of the advancing route of the wire HM when entering the gap Nin. The position of the tip of the wire HM at each timing is indicated by a black circle, and the advancing direction of the wire HM at that time is indicated by an arrow. As shown in FIG. 99, the wire HM entering the gap Nin enters a tapered dead end portion formed between the ceiling wall Nb and the adjacent wall Nc. If the wire HM is caught (caught) at this point, it is possible to prevent the wire HM from advancing any further, to prevent the wire HM from being held, and to quickly discover the fraudulent act. can.

On the other hand, even if the wire HM is not caught and continues to advance, if the wire HM protrudes from the gap Nin, the tip of the wire HM protrudes downward.
advances, the tip of the wire HM advances downward. Therefore, wire HM
The payout device 133 arranged upstream of the payout ball receiving portion 143, and the foul ball receiving portion 146
It is possible to prevent reaching the game area arranged on the upstream side of.

As a result, by causing the wire HM to reach the payout device 133 (see FIG. 3) and causing the payout device 133 to malfunction, an illegal payout ball can be obtained, or the wire HM can be made to reach the game area and the electric accessory 64
By forcibly opening a movable device such as 0a (see FIG. 2) to make it easier to illegally win a prize, it is possible to prevent a person who commits fraudulent acts from gaining illegal profits by obtaining illegally dispensed balls. .

Returning to FIG. 98, description will be made. The foul ball passage portion 145 is formed such that the vertical width of the portion downstream from the confluence region CE where the ball extraction passage 147 merges is about twice the diameter of the ball (twice or more in this embodiment). As a result, when the balls flowing down the ball removal passage 147 are arranged in the confluence area CE, the balls flowing down the foul ball passage portion 145 enter the confluence passage CE (the balls enter the confluence area CE at the same time). , even if two balls are arranged vertically, the possibility of the balls being caught between the upper and lower walls and meshing with each other can be extremely reduced. As a result, it is possible to prevent the sphere from being hindered from flowing down in the portion downstream from the confluence area CE.

The foul ball passage portion 145 includes a passage portion 145a that is formed between the first bending region NEb1 and the second bending region NEb2 and vertically connects the bending regions NEb1 and NEb2. The width of the passage portion 145a is set to be slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere, and the passage forming unit 1
The rear side bottom plate portion 40 is formed to protrude toward the front side as it goes downward.

In the region upstream of the passage portion 145a, the back side bottom plate portion of the passage forming unit 140 is flush with the upstream end portion of the passage portion 145a, and in the region downstream of the passage portion 145a, the passage forming unit 140 The back side bottom plate portion of is positioned flush with the downstream end portion of the passage portion 145a.

That is, in the foul ball passage portion 145, the region on the upstream side of the passage portion 145a is closer to the passage portion 14
The front-to-rear width is set larger than that of the region on the downstream side of 5a. In this embodiment, the front-rear width of the foul ball passage portion 145 downstream of the passage portion 145a is set slightly larger than the diameter of the ball.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the front-rear width of the foul ball passage portion 145 upstream of the passage portion 145a is set slightly smaller than twice the diameter of the ball. Therefore, the foul ball passage portion 145
In the case where the balls stay in the upper stream of the passage 145, a plurality of balls can be arranged with their positions shifted forward and backward. Since they are prevented from lining up (because they are slightly shifted left, right, up and down), it is possible to prevent two balls from entering the passage portion 145a at the same time.

In other words, it is possible to restrict the balls from entering the passage portion 145a one by one. As a result, even when two or more foul balls flow into the foul ball passage portion 145 in a row, the foul balls can be prevented from reaching the confluence area CE at the same time. It is possible to reduce the possibility of being sandwiched between the upper and lower walls and meshing with each other.

The foul ball receptacle 146 extends from the bottom plate on the rear side of the passage forming unit 140 toward the front side, and the left end is connected to the left side wall, and the flow-down surface of the ball faces rightward. The inclined plate portion 146a inclined downward as
46, and the passage forming unit 1 below the inclined plate portion 146a.
A curved guide plate portion 146c extending from the back side bottom plate portion of 40 to the back side in a plate shape and curved in such a manner that the extension direction is directed upward toward the back side is mainly provided.

While the ball is guided toward the foul ball passage portion 145 (front side) along the upper surface of the curved guide plate portion 146c, the action of the inclined plate portion 146a and the blocking portion 146b causes the foul ball receiving portion 1
The passing position of the ball passing through 46 to the front side can be shifted to the right side of the foul ball receiving portion 146 . That is, the ball that rolls down the upper surface of the inclined plate portion 146a can flow rightward, and the block portion 146b prevents the ball from passing through the left side of the foul ball socket portion 146. can be done.

As a result, it is possible to lengthen the period until the ball that has passed through the foul ball receiving portion 146 reaches the S-shaped path SL2. That is, since the vertical bounce of the ball can be finished before the ball reaches the S-shaped path SL2 (because the variation in the vertical position of the ball can be reduced), the foul ball passage part in the S-shaped path SL2 While setting the width of 145 to be small (slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere), the sphere can flow down smoothly.

The foul ball passage portion 145 is formed in a range forming the S-shaped path SL2 (for example, the passage portion 145a
), the width of the passage is set to be small (slightly larger than the diameter of the ball), so it is possible to prevent an illegal tool with a larger outer shape from passing through the foul ball passage portion 145 .

Next, the structure of the front side of the front frame 14 will be described. 100 is a front exploded perspective view of the front frame 14, and FIG. 101 is a rear exploded perspective view of the front frame 14. FIG. 100 and 101 illustrate a state in which the constituent members of the upper panel unit 400 that constitute the electrical decoration portion 8030 are disassembled from the main body frame 14a.

The upper panel unit 400 is a unit elongated in the left and right direction, and the left and right ends of the upper panel unit 400 are supported by the right panel unit 500 that constitutes the electric decoration parts 8031 and 8032 . In this support structure, at the lower end of the right end of the upper panel unit 400, similarly to the support groove 376 of the covering cover 370, a tapered supported groove 417 is recessed from the back side to the front side. (see FIG. 118) are formed, and fitting grooves 522b and 562b (see FIGS. 108 and 109) formed at the upper end of the right panel unit 500 are fitted to the left and right hooks forming the supported groove 417. By doing so, the upper panel unit 400 and the right panel unit 50
0 is concatenated.

As a result, the upper panel unit 400 and the right panel unit 500 can be connected and fixed to each other by fastening and fixing to the body frame 14a, respectively, without the need to directly fasten and fix the upper panel unit 400 and the right panel unit 500. FIG. The shape of the supported groove 417 of the upper panel unit 400 defines the order of assembly to the main body frame 14a as the order in which the upper panel unit 400 is fastened and fixed after the right panel unit 500 is fastened and fixed. Details of the upper panel unit 400 will be described later.

In addition, the fitting grooves 522b and 562b (see FIGS. 108 and 109) provided in the heavy plate units 500R and 500L of the right panel unit 500 divided into left and right are fitted with left and right hooks forming the supported groove 417. Due to the configuration in which the parts are sandwiched and fitted, the heavy plate units 500R, 500R, 500R and 500R
00L can be prevented from being left or right. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the right panel unit 500 from being disassembled in the assembled state (fitted state, see FIG. 86).

102 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 14, and FIG. 103 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame 14. FIG. 102 and 103, the body frame 14a is located on the front side of the body frame 14a.
and the upper panel unit 400 (see FIG. 89), and the multifunctional cover members 171 and 172 and the upper side plate member 14e are shown disassembled from the body frame 14a.

The upper side plate member 14e is a member that sandwiches the speaker assembly 450 between itself and the upper frame member 410 (see FIG. 101), and the recessed portions 462 and 482 of the speaker assembly 450 (see FIG. 12).
1 and FIG. 122).

The fastening portion 14e1 has a through-hole through which a screw is inserted from the rear side thereof, and the screw passing through the through-hole is fastened to the second fastening portion 419b (see FIG. 101) of the upper frame member 410, whereby the upper frame is This is a portion for fastening and fixing the member 410 and the upper side plate member 14e.

104 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 14. FIG. In addition, in FIG. 104, the body frame 14a
The right panel unit 500, which is fastened and fixed to the body frame 14a by screws inserted from the rear side into the insertion holes drilled in the body frame 14a, is shown disassembled from the body frame 14a. and the multifunctional cover members 171, 172 are omitted, while the covering cover 370 is shown for reference.

As for the actual assembly procedure, the covering cover 370 is assembled to the main body frame 14a after the panel unit 500 is assembled to the main body frame 14a. Also, the right panel unit 500 has a right side wall forming the right edge of the pachinko machine 8010 (see FIG. 86).

105 is an exploded front perspective view of the right panel unit 500, FIG. 106 is an exploded rear perspective view of the right panel unit 500, FIG. 107 is a front view of the support plate portion 510,
108 and 109 are exploded front perspective views of the heavy plate units 500L and 500R. 108 shows a perspective view with the right side facing the front side, and FIG. 109 shows a perspective view with the left side facing the front side.

As shown in FIGS. 105 to 109, the right panel unit 500 includes a left stacking unit 500L and a right stacking unit 500R, which are stacked in the horizontal direction, and the stacking unit 50.
0L and 500R are fastened and fixed, and a plate-shaped support plate portion 510 elongated vertically is mainly provided, which is fastened and fixed to the body frame 14a (see FIG. 104).

The heavy plate unit 500 is fixed by screws inserted through the support plate portion 510 from the back side to the front side.
L and 500R are fastened and fixed to the support plate portion 510. In this state, the support plate portion 510
It is fastened and fixed to the body frame 14a (see FIG. 104) by screws inserted through the body 4a from the back side to the front side.

The support plate portion 510 is formed to have an L-shaped cross section by extending a plate-like extension portion 511a from the outer edge (right edge) of the side facing the main body frame 14a to the rear side, and is assembled. (Fig. 86
), a fixing plate 511 whose inner wall (left side wall) of the extension portion 511a abuts against the outer surface of the main body frame 14a, a substrate member 512 fastened and fixed to the fixing plate 511 on the front side of the fixing plate 511, and A plurality of cover-side through holes 513 drilled in the fixed plate 511 on the left side of the substrate member 512, a plurality of lens-side through holes 514 drilled in the fixed plate 511 on the right side of the substrate member 512, and the lens-side through holes 514. and a pin support hole 515 drilled in the fixed plate 511 on the right side of the hole 514 .

The fixing plate 511 has a base portion 511b that overlaps the substrate member 512 when viewed from the front, and the portion on the side of the substrate member 512 protrudes toward the front side in a pedestal shape. 512 is fastened and fixed to the fixing plate 511 .

In the assembled state (see FIG. 86), the base portion 511b is mounted on the heavy plate units 500L and 500R.
in the width direction (see FIG. 115(b)), the heavy plate units 500L, 50
It is possible to suppress tilting of 0R in the left-right direction. That is, the posture of the heavy plate units 500L and 500R with respect to the support plate portion 510 can be easily maintained.

In this embodiment, on the right side surface of the fixed plate 511, the extended portion 51
1a is displaced to the right by the thickness of the outer cover member 560, so that the extended portion 511
While the outer cover member 560 contacts the support plate portion 510 in the front-rear direction on the front side of a, the fixing plate 5
11 is formed up to the back side end as a surface that is substantially at the same plane as the side surface of the base portion 511 b , so that the back side end of the inner cover member 520 is aligned with the back side end of the support plate portion 510 . The inner side surface 521b1 of the inner cover member 520 contacts the left side surface 511c of the support plate portion 510 in the assembled state (see FIG. 86).

The substrate member 512 is an electronic substrate (printed substrate) on which a plurality of LEDs 512a are arranged on the front side. In this embodiment, the plurality of LEDs 512a are arranged in a row curved in accordance with the curved shape of the light guide member 540 with a predetermined interval (11 [mm] interval in this embodiment) between adjacent LEDs 512a. . That is, the plurality of LEDs 512a are arranged inside the shape in which the light guide member 540 is projected from the front, and emit light from directly behind the light guide member 540 toward the light guide member 540 with their optical axes parallel to each other. Illuminate (see FIG. 107).

Since the width of the end surface of the light guide member 540 on the side of the LED 512a is longer than the width of the LED 512a (the lateral width of the light emitting portion) (see the imaginary line in FIG. 107), the light emitted from the LED 512a passes through the light guide member without leakage. The light enters 540 and exits from one of the surfaces of the light guide member 540. The entry and exit of light and its path will be described later.

The cover-side through-hole 513 is a hole for positioning the back fastening portion 527 arranged on the inner cover member 520 and through which a screw fastened to the back fastening portion 527 is inserted from the back side. By fastening screws to the rear fastening portion 527 , the inner cover member 520 is attached to the support plate portion 51 .
Fixed to 0.

The lens-side through-hole 514 is a hole for positioning the back fastening portion 556 provided on the outer lens member 550 and through which the screw fastened to the back fastening portion 556 is inserted from the back side. By fastening screws to the back fastening portion 556 , the outer lens member 550 is attached to the support plate portion 51 .
Fixed to 0.

The pin support hole 515 is a through hole through which the projecting portion 566 of the outer cover member 560 is inserted.
The pin support hole 515 has a horizontal width slightly larger than the diameter of the protrusion 566 and a vertical width approximately twice the diameter of the protrusion 566 . Therefore, while the left and right positions of the outer cover member 560 are strictly defined, the work efficiency when the outer cover member 560 is brought into contact with the support plate portion 510 and fastened and fixed can be improved.

That is, in a fastening preparation state in which the heavy plate units 500L and 500R abut against the support plate portion 510 from the front side, when the plate units 500L and 500R are slightly displaced vertically with respect to the support plate portion 510 (projecting portion 566 ), the projecting portion 566 can be inserted into the pin support hole 515 . As a result, the projection 566
are inserted into the pin support holes 515, and then the heavy plate unit 500L,
By moving 500R up and down by the amount corresponding to the positional deviation, the positional deviation can be eliminated and fastening and fixing can be easily performed.

As shown in FIGS. 108 and 109, the left stacking unit 500L has a window portion 14c (see FIG. 86).
See), the inner cover member 520 that constitutes the right edge and is formed of a light-impermeable resin material
and an inner lens member 530 fastened and fixed to the inner cover member 520 from the right side and formed of a light-transmitting colorless resin material.

The right stacking unit 500R has a light guide member 540 arranged to face the left stacking unit 500L.
and an outer lens member 550 which faces the light guide member 540 in the left-right direction and whose front side end is opposed in the front-rear direction and which is formed of a light-transmitting white resin material, and the outer lens member. The light guide member 54 is arranged on the right side of 550 and is made of a resin material that does not transmit light.
0 and an outer cover member 560 to which the outer lens member 550 is fastened and fixed.

Next, details of each member will be described. 110 and 111 show the heavy plate unit 50.
It is an exploded front perspective view of 0L and 500R. FIG. 110 shows a perspective view with the right side facing the front side, and FIG. 111 shows a perspective view with the left side facing the front side. is shown exploded.

The inner cover member 520 includes a main body plate portion 521 formed in a vertically elongated plate shape, and an upper fastening portion 52 disposed at the upper end of the main body plate portion 521 and fastened and fixed to the outer cover member 560 .
2, a lower fastening portion 523 disposed at the lower end of the main body plate portion 521 and fastened and fixed to the outer cover member 560, a plurality of openings 524 opened in the main body plate portion 521, and the inner lens member 5
a plurality of short fastening portions 525, which are cylindrical portions inserted through the lens 30 and into which screws for fixing the inner lens member 530 to the inner cover member 520 are screwed; The inner cover member 520 is an outer cover member 560 which is a cylindrical portion inserted through the lens member 530 .
A plurality of long fastening portions 526 into which screws are screwed to fix the support plate portion 521, and a plurality of rear fastening portions protruding on the right side of the main body plate portion 521 and into which screws are screwed to fix the support plate portion 510 from the back side. 527
and are mainly provided.

The main body plate portion 521 has a wave-shaped front end portion 521a, and a connection plate portion 521c that connects the front end portion 521a and the back-side base portion 521b at the short width portion of the wave shape (portion closer to the back side). Prepare.

The back-side base portion 521b is attached to the base portion 511 of the support plate portion 510 in the assembled state (see FIG. 86).
It has an inner side surface 521b1 that contacts (matches in shape with) the left side surface.

The connecting plate portion 521c is a plate-like portion that is arranged in an attitude that inclines leftward toward the rear side, and the opening portion 524 is defined by the connecting plate portion 521c.

In the present embodiment, the connecting plate portions 521c are not arranged at regular intervals in the vertical direction, but are arranged such that the intervals increase in order from the lower side toward the upper side (see FIG. 114). Thereby, the opening widths of the plurality of openings 524 are made different, and the effect of light is produced by the openings 524.
can be different for each

The upper fastening portion 522 is a cylindrical portion into which a screw for fastening and fixing the outer cover member 560 is screwed. and a fitting groove 522b.

The fitting groove 522b is formed as a groove into which the left and right claws forming the supported groove 417 (see FIG. 118) of the upper panel unit 400 are fitted.

The lower fastening portion 523 includes a fastening portion 523a, which is a cylindrical portion into which screws for fastening and fixing the outer cover member 560 are screwed, and a fitting groove 523b recessed in the left-right direction on the left outer surface. That is, the outer cover member 560 is fastened and fixed to the inner cover member 520 by two screws inserted at the upper end and one screw at the lower end.

The fitting groove 523b is formed as a groove into which the left and right claw portions forming the support groove 376 of the covering cover 370 (see FIG. 92) are fitted.

The openings 524 are arranged side by side at four upper and lower positions, and are arranged in the inner lens member 530 in the assembled state.
It functions as a window through which the Each outer shape portion of the opening 524 is formed in a curved shape projecting rightward with the connection plate portion 521c as an end (left end). That is, each opening 524 is recessed rightward from the left end of the connecting plate portion 521c (see FIG. 114).

The short fastening portion 525 is arranged at the boundary portion between the back-side base portion 521b and the connecting plate portion 521c (see FIG. 110). This boundary part is designed in this embodiment, and the inner cover member 52
The surface (left side) of 0 corresponds to the portion that projects leftward (see FIG. 111). Back side base 52
The surface of 1b is recessed and curved to the right as designed between the boundary portions described above.
That is, the surface of the back side base portion 521b is formed in a wavy shape that undulates to the left and right as it advances in the vertical direction.

In this case, the short fastening portion 525 is arranged on the back side of the portion projecting to the design surface side. When the inner cover member 520 is formed to have a uniform thickness, the back surface of the design-like protruding portion is, conversely, formed with a recess that tends to become a dead space. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by arranging the short fastening portion 525 in the recess of the inner cover member 520, the dead space can be effectively utilized, and the space on the back side of the inner cover member 520 (on the side of the inner lens member 530) can be effectively utilized. Efficiency can be improved.

The front and rear end portions of the inner lens member 530 are formed to follow the shape of the front and rear end portions of the inner cover member 520 . That is, the inner lens member 530 is formed on the body plate portion 5 formed in a vertically elongated plate shape.
A front end portion 531 a of the inner cover member 520 has a corrugated shape that substantially matches the shape of the front end portion 521 a of the inner cover member 520 .

The front-side end portion 531a forms a curved surface that extends rightward from the front-side edge of the main body plate portion 531, and is perforated in the front-rear direction at the position where the curve forming the wave shape changes to the front-rear direction. support hole 531 through which the projecting portion 551b (see FIG. 109) of the outer lens member 550 is inserted.
b, 531c.

The support hole 531b is formed in the corrugated front portion of the front end portion 531a, and a through hole 531b1 through which a screw for fastening and fixing the short fastening portion 525 of the inner cover member 520 passes is formed on the rear side thereof. That is, since the screw is fastened and fixed behind the support hole 531b, the support hole 531b
Even if a load is applied to the vicinity of 31b, it is possible to prevent the support hole 531b from being deformed or displaced.

The support hole 531c is formed in the wavy rear portion of the front end portion 531a, and an inclined rib portion 532 extending to a position where the light guide member 540 can come into contact is arranged on the rear side thereof. . That is, since the rigidity behind the support hole 531c is strengthened by the inclined rib portion 532, the support hole 5
Even if a load is applied to the vicinity of 31c, it is possible to prevent the support hole 531c from being deformed or displaced.

The main body plate portion 531 has a through hole 531d which is sized to allow the long fastening portion 526 to pass through and is drilled in the horizontal direction at a position between the support holes 531b and 531c in the vertical direction. By inserting the long fastening portion 526 into the through hole 531d, the inner cover member 520 and the inner lens member 530 can be aligned.

The inclined rib portion 532 is arranged at a position (right side position) corresponding to the connecting plate portion 521c of the inner cover member 520, and the pair of upper and lower plate portions 53 extending rightward from the upper and lower edges of the connecting plate portion 521c.
2a and a plurality of reinforcing plate portions 532 vertically connecting the pair of upper and lower plate portions 532a.
and b.

The upper and lower plate portions 532a extend so as to fill the gap between them and the light guide member 540. As shown in FIG. Namely
Similar to the inner cover member 520, the inner lens member 530 has a shape that protrudes leftward toward the back side, and thus the width of the left and right becomes longer toward the back side (the front end is the tip when viewed from above). It is assumed to be a triangle shape).

The inner lens member 530 includes an overhanging portion 533 that overhangs leftward from the main body plate portion 531 so as to pass through the opening portion 524 . The protruding portion 533 includes a light scattering portion 533a on the side opposite to the protruding side, which protrudes in a wavy shape and has a wavy curved surface with a shape that scatters light.

The light guide member 540 is made of a thermoplastic resin, and has a halftone dot pattern on both left and right sides in which recessed portions that change the traveling direction of the light emitted from the LED 512a arranged on the back side to the left and right directions are arranged in a grid pattern. A so-called light guide plate is formed. That is, at least part of the light emitted from the LED 512a to the rear end portion of the light guide member 540 is redirected in the left-right direction via the light guide member 540, and is emitted to the inner lens member 530 or the outer lens member 550. be. In addition, the light guide member 540 is thermally bent into a curved shape corresponding to the arrangement of the LEDs 512a (see FIGS. 105 and 107), and the width dimension in the thickness direction is changed from the end face on the back side (LED 512a side) to the front side. It is formed from a shape that gradually tapers toward the end face.

Here, the concave portion is a so-called edge light type light source (in this embodiment, the LED 512a
) is a processed part for changing the light from the surface into a uniform surface light emission. The concave portion is a notch-shaped concave portion that is recessed from the left and right sides, and reflects or refracts incident light from the LED 512a so that the light guide member 5
The light is emitted from the left and right side surfaces of 40 .

In this embodiment, as an example, the recessed portion is formed by a thermoplastic mold plate having a pattern in which conical portions having an inclination angle of 45° with respect to the bottom surface and a bottom circle diameter of about 1 mm are arranged in a grid pattern at intervals of about 3 mm. It is formed by pressing (heat pressing) against resin. Of the light emitted from the LED 512a, the light reaching the concave portion is reflected by the concave portion and emitted from the left and right side surfaces of the light guide member 540 in a substantially vertical direction.

The thermoplastic resins used in the present invention are not particularly limited, but those having transparency are preferable, and acrylic resins (methacrylic resins), polycarbonate resins, polyvinyl chloride resins, amorphous polyester resins, amorphous olefin resins, etc. Resin, polystyrene resin, AS resin (
acrylonitrile, styrene copolymer) can be exemplified. Among them, by using an acrylic resin in particular, the light guide member 540 has a high average brightness and a small decrease in brightness distribution.
can be obtained.

In this embodiment, the light guide member 540 has a thickness of 5 mm at the end on the LED 512a side. By setting the thickness between 3 mm and 8 mm, it is possible to efficiently guide the light from the LED 512a, improve shape retention after thermal bending, and obtain practical strength.

In the assembled state (see FIG. 86), the light guide member 540 has a corrugated front end portion that is slightly displaced from the front end portion 531a of the inner lens member 530 toward the rear side, and has a wavy shape. are also formed from undulating corrugations.

The left and right wave shapes are not strict in the present invention. For the degree of corrugation,
Although there is no particular limitation, the curved surface portion has a radius of curvature (R) of 200 mm or more and 700 mm
The following are preferred. By setting such a radius of curvature (R), it is possible to provide a design capable of imparting a three-dimensional degree of freedom while reducing distortion after heat bending and maintaining good practical mechanical properties. .

Details of the wave shape undulating to the left and right will be described later (see FIG. 114), but the inner cover member 520
Positioned leftward at a position corresponding to the connecting plate portion 521c, and positioned rightward at a position between positions corresponding to the adjacent connecting plate portions 521c (located away from the inner cover member 520) It has a wavy shape.

The wavy shape in the left-right direction is formed by thermally bending the base material having the recessed portions, as described above. As a method of thermal bending of the present invention, a curved concave surface (female mold) and a convex surface (
This is done by pressing the substrate into a mold with a male mold. More specifically, when the thermoplastic resin contains an acrylic resin as a main component, the heating temperature can be 110° C. or higher and 150° C. or lower. Specifically, it is preferably performed at 130° C. or higher and 150° C. or lower.

At this time, the heating temperature of the base material is lower than the melting point of the thermoplastic resin. By setting the temperature of the base material during heating to the deflection temperature under load + 40°C or lower and the melting point or lower, the shape of the light guide pattern provided on the surface of the base material is not destroyed, and the light from the light source is emitted before and after the heat bending process. can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to prevent a decrease in luminance and an uneven luminance distribution in the light guide plate. Further, by setting such heating temperature conditions, it is possible to suppress distortion of the light guide plate.

The light guide member 540 includes a curved plate-shaped body plate portion 541 that constitutes a light guide plate, and a body plate portion 541 of the body plate portion 541 .
A fastening part 542 extending vertically from the upper and lower ends of the outer cover member 560 and through which a screw to be fastened to the outer cover member 560 is inserted.

The light guide member 540 includes a fastening portion 542 and a concave portion 541a for retreating from the long fastening portion 526.
In other positions, there is no portion penetrating in the left-right direction. That is, since the light guide member 540 is composed of a single plate without a hole at least inside the projection plane on which the opening 524 is projected in the left-right direction, the rendering effect of the light passing through the opening 524 is improved. be able to. The rear-side end of the light guide member 540 is substantially flush with the rear-side end of the inner lens member 530 .

The outer lens member 550 includes a main body plate portion 551 formed in a vertically elongated plate shape, and a fastening portion 542 of the light guide member 540 which is disposed at the upper and lower ends of the main body plate portion 551 and internally supported. Inner fitting part 5
52, a plurality of insertion holes 553 that can be configured as through holes through which screws fastened to the outer cover member 560 are inserted, and a region surrounded by the plurality of insertion holes 553 projecting rightward through the outer cover member. A projecting portion 554 that can be visually recognized, a plurality of through holes 555 through which the long fastening portion 526 of the inner cover member 520 is inserted, and a support plate portion projecting from the back side of the main body plate portion 551 and extending from the back side. It mainly includes a plurality of rear fastening portions 556 into which screws for fixing 510 are screwed.

The shape of the front and rear ends of the outer lens member 550 follows the shape of the front and rear ends of the light guide member 540 . That is, the outer lens member 550 has a front end portion 551a that extends leftward from the front edge of the main body plate portion 551 and forms a curved surface that substantially matches the shape of the front end portion of the light guide member 540. It has a corrugated shape and is arranged slightly shifted to the front side with respect to the front side end of the light guide member 540 . In this embodiment, the front end portion of the light guide member 540 and the front end portion 551a of the outer lens member 550 are formed so as to be spaced equally apart in the front-rear direction at any position in the vertical direction. be.

The front-side end portion 551a is located at a switching position in the front-rear direction of the curved line that forms the wave shape.
It has a plurality of projecting portions 551b projecting toward the front side and fitted into the support holes 531b and 531c in the assembled state (see FIG. 86).

To the front side, on the opposite side of the side facing the light guide member 540 of the front side end portion 551a,
Numerous bulging portions 551a1 (see FIG. 115(a)) bulging in a semicircular shape in a side view are formed vertically. The bulging portion 551a1 functions to scatter the light emitted from the front end surface of the light guide member 540, so that even if the LEDs 512a are arranged at a predetermined interval, the light guide member 540 The light emission on the front side end surface can be made into a band-shaped light emission mode that is continuous in the vertical direction.

The insertion hole 553 is arranged in a recessed deep portion that is recessed inwardly (inwardly of the surface of the main body plate portion 551 ) as the shape of the overhanging portion 554 . Thereby, the fastening of the outer lens member 550 to the outer cover member 560 can be strengthened, and the outer lens member 550 can be prevented from being peeled off from the outer cover member 560 .

In the right double plate unit 500R, the rear fastening portion 556 into which screws for fastening and fixing with the support plate portion 510 are screwed is provided on the outer lens member 550 and is not provided on the outer cover member 560. FIG. Therefore, the outer cover member 560 can be arranged as close as possible to the right edge of the support plate portion 510 (the outer edge of the pachinko machine 8010) (it can be arranged regardless of the screw diameter or screw arrangement). can). As a result, the area facing the player (the area on the left side of the right panel unit 500) can be enlarged.

The surface of the main body plate portion 551 facing the light guide member 540 is curved in accordance with the surface shape (curved shape) of the light guide member 540, and in the assembled state (see FIG. 86), the light guide member 5
40 and the main body plate portion 551 are in contact with each other (see FIG. 114(b)).

As a result, it is possible to prevent the light guide member 540 from being displaced in the direction in which it faces the main body plate portion 551 . In addition, since the body plate portion 551 is directly fastened and fixed to the support plate portion 510 , the support plate portion 510 and the light guide member 540 are aligned via the body plate portion 551 .

Therefore, the LED 512a arranged on the substrate member 512 fixed to the support plate portion 510,
It is possible to prevent misalignment with the light guide member 540, and allow light to enter the light guide member 540 from the LED 512a with high accuracy.

The outer cover member 560 has a main body plate portion 561 formed in a vertically elongated plate shape, and a receiving surface capable of receiving the fastening portion 522a of the inner cover member 520 at the upper end portion of the main body plate portion 561. It has a long hole formed in an oval shape with a vertical width slightly larger than the diameter of the screw hole of the fastening portion 522a and a horizontal width longer than the vertical width, and a plurality of screws are inserted from the opposite side. A receiving surface capable of receiving the fastening portion 523a of the inner cover member 520 at the upper to-be-fastened portion 562 having the screw receiving portion 562a and the lower end portion of the main body plate portion 561,
The lower side to be fastened has a screw receiving portion 563a formed in an elongated hole shape with a vertical width slightly larger than the diameter of the screw hole of the fastening portion 523a and a horizontal width longer than the vertical width and having a screw receiving portion 563a through which a screw is inserted from the opposite side. 563 and the long fastening portion 5 of the inner cover member 520 at the front side end portion of the main body plate portion 561 .
26, and is formed in an elongated hole shape with a vertical width slightly larger than the diameter of the screw hole of the long fastening portion 526 and a horizontal width longer than the vertical width. A plurality of screw receiving portions 564 through which screws are inserted, an opening portion 565 formed with an inner shape slightly larger than the outer shape of the overhanging portion 554 of the outer lens member 550, and a projecting portion from the body plate portion 561 to the back side. and a plurality of protrusions 566 that are

The upper to-be-fastened portion 562 includes a fitting groove 562b recessed in the lateral width direction at a vertical position corresponding to the fitting groove 522b of the upper fastening portion 522 . The fitting groove 562b is formed as a groove into which the left and right claws forming the supported groove 417 (see FIG. 118) of the upper panel unit 400 are fitted.

The lower part to be fastened 563 has a fitting groove 563b recessed in the horizontal width direction at a vertical position corresponding to the fitting groove 523b of the lower fastening part 523 . The fitting groove 563b is
70 (see FIG. 92) is formed as a groove into which the left and right claws constituting the support groove 376 are fitted.

That is, the right panel unit 500 is connected to the upper panel unit 400 and the covering cover 370 by fitting through the upper and lower fitting grooves 562b and 563b. Since the right panel unit 500 contacts the upper panel unit 400 and the cover 370 vertically (see FIG. 86), the cover 370 protrudes the right panel unit 500 toward the front. The upper panel unit 400 can be supported by the right panel unit 500 that is stably supported. Therefore, the allowable weight of the upper panel unit 400 can be increased.

The opening 565 is formed in such a shape that the projecting portion 554 of the outer lens member 550 is fitted therein (
formed from an inner shape equivalent to the outer shape of the overhang 554). Therefore, it is possible to narrow the access path to the lateral gap between the opening 565 and the protruding portion 554 , thereby suppressing an illegal act of peeling the outer lens member 550 from the outer cover member 560 .

112 and 113, left stacking unit 500L and right stacking unit 500
A method of assembling R will be described. FIG. 112(a) is a side view of the right panel unit 500, FIG. 112(b) is a partially enlarged sectional view of the right panel unit 500 taken along line CXIIb-CXIIb of FIG. 112(a), and FIG. 113a) is a side view of the right panel unit 500, and FIG. 113(b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the right panel unit 500 taken along line CXIIIb-CXIIIb of FIG. 113(a).

112(a) and 112(b) illustrate a state in which the projecting portion 551b is arranged on the back side of the support hole 531b, and FIGS. Part 55
1b is shown inserted through the support hole 531b.

To assemble the right panel unit 500, the main body plate portion 531 of the left stacking unit 500L and the left end of the front side end 551a of the right stacking unit 500R are brought into contact with each other in the left-right direction (see FIG. 11).
2(b)), the left stacking unit 500L is approached from the front side of the right stacking unit 500R, and the projections 551b and 551c are inserted into the support holes 531b.

In this way, at the front end of the right panel unit 500, the projections 551b, 551
By adopting a configuration in which the left stacking unit 500L and the right stacking unit 500R are fixed by inserting c into the support hole 531b and fitting them together, the degree of freedom in designing the front end of the right panel unit 500 is improved. be able to.

For example, in the present embodiment, as a result of adopting the above configuration, the front end of the right panel unit (
It is possible to reduce the number of screws that are arranged on the front side of the light guide member 540 and fasten and fix the left stacking unit 500L and the right stacking unit 500R, thereby blocking light by the screws. Since the area can be reduced, the light emitted from the front-side end surface of the light guide member 540 can be easily visually recognized in a strip shape extending in the vertical direction.

Further, for example, in the present embodiment, by reducing the number of screws (fastening points) that fasten and fix the left stacking unit 500L and the right stacking unit 500R at the front end of the right panel unit 500, it is possible to prevent misleading during fastening. The light guide member 540
can reduce the range where there is a risk of damage. Therefore, the range in which the light guide member 540 can be arranged can be expanded to near the front end of the right panel unit 500 (near the tapered end). Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the light guide member 540 from being discontinued and visually recognized near the front end of the right panel unit 500 .

When the left plate unit 500L is approached from the front side of the right plate unit 500R and the projecting portions 551b and 551c are inserted into the support holes 531b, the inclined rib portions 532 of the inner lens member 530 of the left plate unit 500L and , and the light guide member 540 of the right stack unit 500R,
Surfaces parallel to each other are configured along the front-rear direction, and the surfaces are in a positional relationship in which they can contact each other. That is, the contact surface between the inclined rib portion 532 and the light guide member 540 is the left stacking unit 500L.
functions as a guide surface (guide) when moving in the front-rear direction with respect to the right panel unit 500R, the right panel unit 500 can be easily assembled.

Here, a method for disassembling the right panel unit 500 for maintenance or the like will be described. The right panel unit 500 has the support plate portion 510 attached to the left stack unit 5 as described above.
00L and the right stacking unit 500R are respectively assembled by fastening and fixing, and at least two procedures are conceivable for the assembly procedure.

The first procedure is a method of fastening and fixing the left plate unit 500L and the right plate unit 500R to each other and then fastening and fixing them to the support plate section 510. The second procedure is a method of fastening and fixing the right plate unit 500R. is fastened and fixed to the support plate portion 510 alone, then the left stacking unit 500L is brought closer to the right stacking unit 500R, the projecting portions 551b and 551c are inserted into the support holes 531b,
In this method, the left stacking unit 500L is fastened and fixed to the right stacking unit 500R and the support plate section 510, respectively. These two procedures can be similarly adopted when the right panel unit 500 is disassembled.

As described above, since assembly and disassembly can be performed in two different procedures, a worker who performs maintenance or the like can use which procedure to install the right panel unit 50 according to the parts that need to be replaced.
0 can be disassembled or assembled, and the working time can be shortened.

It should be noted that, regardless of which procedure is used for disassembly, the left board unit 500L and the right board unit 500R must be disassembled in order to disassemble the left board unit 500L and the right board unit 500R.
must slide over each other in the plane direction. Protruding portions 551b and 551c and support hole 531b
This is because it is necessary to release the engagement with. When the left stacking unit 500L and the right stacking unit 500R are to be slid relative to each other in the plane direction, at least one of them needs to be disassembled from the support plate section 510 .

In this manner, the projections 551b, 551c and the support holes 531b are fitted into the right panel unit 500 by prying (disassembling) the right panel unit 500 from the outside of the pachinko machine 8010 (see FIG. 86). 500 and is useful for preventing fraudulent acts that enter the inside of the pachinko machine 8010.

That is, when the front side portion of the right panel unit 500 is fixed by tightening screws, the right panel unit 500 can be easily disassembled by removing the screws, and cheating can be easily performed. As in this embodiment, the left panel unit 5 of the right panel unit 500
00L and the right stacking unit 500R are fastened and fixed to the support plate portion 510 with screws that are inserted from the back side of the support plate portion 510, and the screws are not removed from the back side of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 104). By making it difficult to disassemble the stacking unit 500L and the right stacking unit 500R, it is possible to make it difficult to disassemble the right panel unit 500 from the outside of the pachinko machine 8010 . Therefore, it is possible to prevent a fraudulent act of entering the pachinko machine 8010 through the inside of the right panel unit 500 .

With reference to FIG. 114, the shape of light guide member 540 of right panel unit 500 and its effect in presentation will be described. 114(a) is a side view of the right panel unit 500, FIG. 114(b) is a rear view of the right panel unit 500, and FIG. 114(c) is a side view of the right panel unit 500. . In addition, in FIGS. 114(a) to 114(c),
Illustration of the support plate portion 510 is omitted.

The light guide member 540 is irradiated with light emitted from the LEDs 512a (see FIG. 105) of the support plate portion 510 from the rear side, and the light incident on the light guide member 540 is directed to the left and right by the action of the light guide member 540. be redirected. At this time, the light is emitted in a direction perpendicular to the plane of the light guide member 540 .

Since the light guide member 540 has a curved shape that undulates in the left-right direction (see FIG. 114(b)), light is condensed on the concave side, and light is diffused on the convex side. For example, at a position corresponding to the uppermost opening 524 among the plurality of openings 524, the light guide member 540 has a concave shape with a curvature radius R1 on the opening 524 side (left side). The light emitted from the optical member 540 to the opening 524 side can be condensed and produced. Thereby, the intensity of the light visually recognized through the opening 524 can be improved.

In addition, since the opposite side (right side) thereof has a convex shape, at a position corresponding to the uppermost opening 524 among the plurality of openings 524, the light guide member 540 faces the outer lens member 550. It can be used for production by diffusing the light emitted to.

As described above, in the present embodiment, even if the vertical position is the same, there is a difference in the mode of light production (whether light is condensed or diffused) performed on the left and right sides of the light guide member 540. It can be provided, and the production effect can be improved.

It should be noted that the difference in the mode of light production is not caused only by the curved shape of the light guide member 540, but various modes are exemplified. For example, by dividing the shape of the notched concave portion of the light guide member 540 according to regions, or by dividing the thickness of the light guide member 540 according to regions, it is possible to change the mode of light production on both the left and right sides. .

The light guide member 540 is always concave on the opening 524 side at a position facing the opening 524 , and the radius of curvature of the concave surface changes according to the size of the opening 524 . That is, the curvature radius of the concave surface of the light guide member 540 is also the same as that of the second opening from the top, corresponding to the fact that the upper three openings 524 have a larger vertical width as the openings 524 move upward. The radius of curvature R2 at the position corresponding to the portion 524 is made shorter than the radius of curvature R1 (R1
>R2), and similarly, the radius of curvature R3 at the position corresponding to the third opening 524 from the top is made shorter than the radius of curvature R2 (R1>R2>R3).

As a result, even if there is no change in the arrangement interval of the LEDs 512a arranged on the substrate member 512, the number of the LEDs 512a that emit the condensed light differs for each opening 524. The amount of light emitted can be varied for each opening 524 . That is, according to the present embodiment, the upper opening 524 can increase the amount of visible light compared to the lower opening 524 .

In addition, the curvature radius R4 at the position corresponding to the lowest opening 524, that is, the fourth opening 524 from the top is formed to be the same as the curvature radius R1 (R4≈R1), and the center of the concave surface The normal line coming out from the shape is a shape that points slightly upward. Therefore, the amount of light visible through the openings 524 at the upper and lower ends can be increased, and the light production can be sharpened. Can be directed upwards.

As shown in FIG. 114(c), the vertical widths W1 to W4 of each opening 524 are illustrated as lengths connecting the midpoints of the upper side and the lower side of the opening 524 in a side view. The width of the opening 524 facing the portion with the curvature radius R1 is the vertical width W1, the width of the opening 524 facing the portion with the curvature radius R2 is the vertical width W2, and the width of the opening 524 facing the portion with the curvature radius R3. The width of the openings 524 facing each other is the vertical width W3, and the width of the openings 524 facing the portion with the radius of curvature R4 is the vertical width W4.

In this embodiment, among the openings 524, the lower openings 524 are formed such that the vertical widths W1 to W4 are reduced (W1>W2>W3>W4). That is, in the portions of the curvature radii R1 to R3, the relationship between the magnitudes of the curvature radii R1 to R3 and the magnitudes of the vertical widths W1 to W3 of the opening 524 are related. As a result, a portion where the degree of light condensing is weak (for example, the radius of curvature R
1), the vertical width W1 of the opening 524 is increased so that light can enter the opening 524 sufficiently. The vertical width W3 of the opening 524 is made smaller than the vertical width W1 to avoid too much light entering the opening 524 . Therefore, with the configuration of this embodiment, the light emission mode of each opening 524 can be made uniform.

The center point of each radius of curvature R1 to R4 shown in FIG. is placed at approximately the middle position of

The light guide member 540 is convex leftward in the region KE of the boundary of the opening 524 . Here, the region KE is a strip-shaped region extending in the front-rear direction, and is defined as a region whose upper and lower ends do not interfere with adjacent openings 524 . That is, as shown in FIG. 114(c), the area K
The upper end of E coincides with the lower end of the opening 524 adjacent above it, and the lower end of the region KE coincides with the upper end of the opening 524 adjacent below it. Therefore, in area KE, LED 512
The light emitted in the front-rear direction from a is viewed from the left side of the right panel unit 500 (FIG. 114(c)).
), it advances in a state hidden by the connecting plate portion 521c.

In the region KE, the light emitted toward the inner lens member 530 passes through the inner cover member 520
Therefore, even if the light condensing action is reduced, the difference in the amount of light visually recognized by the player is small.

On the other hand, in the area KE, the light guide member 54
Since the shape of 0 can be formed from a curved shape without corners and stress concentration can be prevented, the durability of the light guide member 540 can be improved.

In addition, by forming a convex shape on the left side in the region KE, a concave shape can be formed on the right side. can be formed. As a result, it is possible to improve the presentation effect of the presentation of light visually recognized through the opening 565 .

That is, depending on whether or not light is incident on the region KE from the LED 512a, it is possible to change the light seen through the opening 565 while suppressing the change in the light seen through the opening 524. .

For example, the LED 512a that makes light enter the area KE is turned off, and the other LEDs 5
By turning ON 12a, it is possible to irradiate the inside of the opening 524 and the opening 565 with light without gaps. At this time, the right side of the light guide member 540 above and below the area KE is concave, so that the light emitted to the right from above and below the area KE intersects on the right side of the outer cover member 560. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the outer lens member 550 from being seen darkly in the region KE.

In addition, by turning on the LED 512a arranged at a position corresponding to the inner side of the area KE, the light emitted from the area KE is condensed and emitted in an edge shape, and the edge is visually recognized by the player. You can increase the amount of light. Therefore, overhang 554 (Fig. 106
) can be sharpened.

It should be noted that the light guide member 540 may be configured as a flat surface at the boundary of the opening 524 . In this case, by turning on the LED 512a arranged at a position corresponding to the inner side of the region KE, the corresponding portion (the region corresponding to the region KE) of the projecting portion 554 (see FIG. 106) emits light in a strip shape. can be made

The region KE has a shorter front-to-rear width of the right panel unit 500 (a shorter distance from the LED 512a) than the upper and lower portions thereof. Therefore, the light incident on the area KE easily reaches the front end portion even if the amount of light is weak. The light that reaches the front end portion may be used to produce an effect.

That is, the front end portion 5 of the inner lens member 530 cannot be seen through the connecting plate portion 521c.
31a (see FIG. 105), a light effect that can be visually recognized (visible from the front side of the right panel unit 500) is prepared, and the player's eye position is set by setting a high degree of expectation for the big win of the effect. , can be moved to the side away from the game board 13 from the front side end of the right panel unit 500 . As a result, the degree of eyestrain of the player can be reduced, and the player can play games for a long time without stress.

Here, the light incident on the area KE is blocked by the connecting plate portion 521c when viewed from the left side, but is viewed by the player through the outer lens member 550 (see FIG. 106) from the right side. Therefore, a player who sits on the left side of the right panel unit 500 and plays the pachinko machine 8010 is not visually recognized, but a clerk who is viewing the right panel unit 500 from the right side is notified by visible light. be able to.

As a result, while the cheating player is not noticed, the clerk can execute an error notification that can be easily noticed, so that the cheating player is prevented from trying to escape. can be prevented.

By reversing the left-right shape of the right panel unit 500, the light effect in the area KE may be made visible only to the player and not visible to the store clerk.

115(a) is a schematic side view of the light guide member 540, and FIG. 115(b) is a schematic side view of FIG.
FIG. 11 is a cross-sectional view of the light guide member 540 taken along line CXVb-CXVb of (a);

The light guide member 540 has a shape that gradually tapers from the end face (thickness of about 5 mm) on the LED 512a side toward the front side. Note that the maximum end of the front side of the light guide member 540 (the LED 512
The portion farthest from a) is designed to be 3 mm for the purpose of maintaining mechanical strength, and the horizontal width dimension is reduced with a similar gradient over the entire area in the vertical direction.

Therefore, the front end face of the light guide member 540 is not formed with the same width dimension (thickness). That is, the end surface of the portion of the inner lens member 530 facing the support hole 531b (see FIG. 111) is more LED5 than the end surface of the portion facing the support hole 531c (see FIG. 111).
Since the distance from the end surface on the side of 12a becomes longer, the tapered portion is excessively tapered and the width dimension (thickness) becomes thin. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the difference between the luminescence mode visually recognized near the support hole 531b and the luminescence mode visually recognized near the support hole 531c.

Here, in the present embodiment, since the vicinity of the support hole 531c is sandwiched between the portions near the support hole 531b and is recessed toward the rear side, the difference in the distance in the front-rear direction and the support hole 531b.
Due to the shadow created by the nearby portions, the portion near the support hole 531c is more likely to be visually recognized darker than the portion near the support hole 531b.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the portion of the light guide member 54 that is arranged to face the support hole 531b
0, the end face of the light guide member 540 in the portion facing the support hole 531c is formed to have a greater width dimension (thickness) than the end face of the light guide member 540, so that the light emitted from the LED 512a is received. It is possible to ensure a large area of the light-emitting surface.

Therefore, even if the amount of light emitted from any of the LEDs 512a among the plurality of LEDs 512a is the same, the amount of light visible in the vicinity of the support hole 531c is
The amount of light visible in the vicinity of 1b can be increased, and the degree of darkness due to differences in distance in the front-rear direction and shadows can be reduced. As a result, the front end portion 531 of the inner lens member 530
With a as the foreground, the degree of light emission visually recognized at the end of the right panel unit 500 on the front side can be easily made uniform over the top and bottom (difference in intensity can be reduced).

116 is a partial rear view of right panel unit 500. FIG. 116, illustration of the support plate portion 510 is omitted, and the light guide member 540 can be visually recognized. In addition, in FIG. 116, an example of the path (advancing direction) of light emitted through the light guide member 540 is illustrated by an imaginary arrow.

As shown in FIG. 116, the light emitted from the light guide member 540 toward the inner lens member 530 is condensed due to the curved shape of the light guide member 540, and passes through the inner lens member 530 to be slightly It is diffused and progresses outward.

Conversely, light emitted toward the outer lens member 550 is diffused as a result of the curving of the light guide member 540 . Therefore, the LED 51 that generates light incident on the light guide member 540
While the arrangement of 2a is fixed, both surfaces of the light guide member 540 can have different light emission modes (roughness and density, brightness and darkness). In other words, the player can be made to visually recognize the light in a light emission mode different from the light emission mode expected from the arrangement interval of the LEDs 521a.

In addition, the light emitted toward the inner lens member 530 side (player side) is
0 is bent to the side of the player instead of right sideways by being curved as shown in FIG. 115(b) (see the imaginary arrow in FIG. The line arrow
shows an example of the traveling direction of light passing through the light guide member 540). As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the light, and it is possible to improve the effect of the lighting effect.

Returning to FIGS. 100 and 101, description will be made. The upper panel unit 400 includes the upper side plate member 14
Fitting grooves 522b, 562b (see FIGS. 108 and 109) which are fastened and fixed to the main body frame 14a via e and arranged at the upper end of the right panel unit 500 at the lower right end thereof.
, and is supported from below, and is arranged at the upper end of the front frame 14 .

117 is an exploded front perspective view of the upper panel unit 400, and FIG. 118 is an exploded rear perspective view of the upper panel unit 400. FIG. As shown in FIGS. 117 and 118, the upper panel unit 400 includes an upper frame member 410 fastened and fixed to the upper side plate member 14e with the speaker assembly 450 interposed therebetween (see FIG. 100), and a front surface of the upper frame member 410. The illumination unit 401 is arranged on the side and fastened and fixed to the upper frame member 410, and the speaker assembly 450 is arranged on the back side of the upper frame member 410 and sandwiched between the upper frame member 410 and the upper side plate member 14e. ,
Mainly provide 117 and 118, illustration of the speaker assembly 450 is omitted (see FIGS. 100 and 101).

The illumination unit 401 is a unit decorated with a model name, etc. on the front side.
A substrate on which a plurality of EDs are arranged is included. By emitting light from the enclosed LED,
Perform a performance with light.

The illumination unit 401 includes a box-shaped main body 402 made of a light-transmitting resin material, a wavy wall 403 formed on the rear outer wall of the main body 402, and the wavy wall 403. A plate-like portion 404 extending from the lower edge to the back side in a horizontally long plate shape, and a portion above the plate-like portion 404 that protrudes from the corrugated wall portion 403 to the back side in a cylindrical shape and is inside the cylindrical shape. A cylindrical portion 405 having a shape penetrating the waved wall portion 403, and a plurality of fastening portions 406 disposed on the back side of the main body portion 402 and to which screws inserted through the upper frame member 410 are fastened. , is mainly provided.

The main body part 402 is formed in a box shape in such a manner that the front and rear dish-shaped members overlap each other with their open sides, and a space is formed inside. In addition, the included LED is arranged on the electronic board,
The electronic board is fixed to the body portion 402 .

The wavy wall portion 403 engages with the wavy wall portion 412 formed on the front side wall of the upper frame member 410 to easily determine the assembly position in the left-right direction, and the illumination unit 4 to the upper frame member 410.
01 to improve the workability of assembly.

The plate-like portion 404 is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the lower surface of the corrugated wall portion 412 of the upper frame member 410 , and is a portion that suppresses vertical displacement of the electrical decoration unit 401 with respect to the upper frame member 410 . The front side wall of the upper frame member 410 is recessed with a horizontally long groove that sandwiches the plate-like portion 404 from above and below.

The cylindrical portion 405 has a function as a through-hole for wiring through which the wiring of the electronic board on which the LEDs contained in the body portion 402 are arranged is passed to the upper frame member 410 side.

The illumination unit 401 is fastened and fixed to the upper frame member 410 by fastening screws to a plurality of fastening portions 406 through the upper frame member 410 . Here, when the upper frame member 410 is fastened and fixed to the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100), a closed space containing the speaker assembly 450 is formed between the upper side plate member 14e and access to the inside is made possible. formed to be difficult. That is, the upper frame member 410 is fastened and fixed to the upper side plate member 14e and the body frame 14a after the electrical decoration unit 401 is fastened and fixed.

119 is an exploded front perspective view of the upper frame member 410, and FIG. 120 is an exploded front perspective view of the upper frame member 41. FIG.
0 is an exploded rear perspective view of FIG. As shown in FIGS. 119 and 120, the upper frame member 410 is
A main body member 411 to which the illumination unit 401 is fastened and fixed, and a lower edge plate member formed in a curved shape along the lower edge of the main body member 411 and fastened and fixed from the back side along the lower edge of the main body member 411. 420, a right corner supporting member 430R fastened and fixed to the main body member 411 from the back side of the lower edge plate member 420 at the right corner of the main body member 411, and the front side of the lower edge plate member 420 at the left corner of the main body member 411. The left corner support member 430L is fastened and fixed to the main body member 411 from the rear side, and is fitted into the main body member 411 from the rear side to a position projecting from the opening 414 to the front side, and is pressed from the rear side by the right corner support member 430R. and a lens member 440 that is restricted from coming off to the back side and that constitutes the electrical decoration part 8033 .

The main body member 411 is a member elongated in the left and right direction, in which openings are formed on both left and right sides thereof for passing vibration waves (sound) generated from the speaker assembly 450, and the speaker covers 27 are arranged so as to cover the openings. On the front side, a wavy wall portion 412 formed in a wavy shape when viewed from above, and a portion of the wavy wall portion 412 facing the tubular portion 405 of the illumination unit 401 is larger than the outer shape of the tubular portion 405. a support through-hole 413 penetratingly formed with a slightly larger inner shape;
and an opening 414 penetrating in the front-rear direction at the upper right corner.

The wavy wall portion 412 is formed in substantially the same wavy shape as the wavy wall portion 403 of the electrical decoration unit 401 . This makes it possible to easily perform alignment in the horizontal direction when fitting the illumination unit 401 into the main body member 411 from the front side of the upper frame member 410 .

The tubular portion 405 is inserted through the support through hole 413 in the assembled state (see FIG. 86).
As a result, the wiring projecting through the cylindrical portion 405 can be passed through the support through-hole 413 to the rear side of the main body member 411 . Therefore, the other end of the wiring, one end of which is connected to the electronic board included in the illumination unit 401, can be connected to the terminal on the back side of the main body member 411, so that the front frame 14 is closed. It is possible to prevent the other end of the wiring from being detached.

The support through hole 413 defines the position of the tubular portion 405 when the tubular portion 405 is inserted.
Thereby, the support through-holes 413 can be used for positioning the electrical decoration unit 401 with respect to the upper frame member 410 .

The opening 414 is an opening that allows the lens member 440 to be visually recognized when viewed from the front. The upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100) has an LED 14 at a position aligned with the lens member 440 in the front-rear direction.
e2 is arranged, and the light emission of this LED 14e2 can be visually recognized by the player along the opening 414. - 特許庁

The main body member 411 has, on its back side, a wavy side portion 416 formed in a wavy shape when viewed from above, a supported groove 417 recessed from the back side at the lower end surface of the right corner, and a recessed portion from the back side at the lower end surface of the left corner. a supported groove 418 formed at a position close to the upper end, a fastening portion 419 formed at a symmetrical position near the upper end and formed so that a screw can be screwed therein; A fastening portion 419b is mainly provided.

The wavy side portion 416 has a shape that matches the shape of the opposing position of the lower edge plate member 420 (the shape of the wavy wall portion 422 formed at the front end portion of the lower edge). This makes it possible to easily position the lower edge plate member 420 in the left-right direction when fastening and fixing the lower edge plate member 420 to the main body member 411 .

The supported groove 417 has a shape in which the left and right hook portions can be fitted into the fitting groove 522b and the fitting groove 562b (see FIGS. 105 and 106) of the right panel unit 500, and the fitting state (FIG. 86) is formed.
), a load (such as weight) applied from the upper panel unit 400 can be applied to the right panel unit 500 via the surface on which the supported groove 417 is formed.

The supported groove 418 has a shape that can be fitted to the upper end portion of the electrical decoration portion 8031, and the fitted state (
86), the upper panel unit 40
It is configured such that a load (such as weight) given from 0 can be applied to the electrical decoration part 8031 .

The fastening portion 419 is disposed at a position where screws inserted through the through holes 463a and 483a (see FIG. 122) of the speaker assembly 450 can be fastened, and protrudes in a rib shape from the base to a position where the tip does not reach. and an enlarged rib 419a.

As will be described later, screws inserted through through holes 463a and 483a are fastened and fixed to the fastening portion 419 so that the front assembly 460, the rear assembly 480, and the upper side plate member 14e are attached to the main body frame 14a. (see FIG. 125(a)), the details of which will be described later.

In the present embodiment, the enlarged ribs 419a are three same-shaped ribs arranged at 120° intervals around the fastening portion 419 along the fastening direction of screws to the fastening portion 419 .

The second fastening portion 419b (see FIG. 118) is connected to the fastening portion 14e1 (see FIG. 100) of the upper side plate member 14e and the recessed portion 46 of the speaker assembly 450 at the lower position of the main body member 411.
2, 482 (see FIG. 122), and is formed at a position corresponding to the concave portions 462, 482 (see FIG. 122) of the speaker assembly 450 at the upper position of the body member 411. Details will be described later.

The lower edge plate member 420 includes a main body member 421 formed by bending a long plate, a wavy wall portion 422 formed in a wavy shape in a bottom view at the front side edge of the lower edge of the main body member 421, and After extending from the upper edge of the wavy wall portion 422 to the front side, it extends upward from the extending end, and the cross section L
A plurality of L-shaped extensions 423 formed in a letter shape and a plurality of extending portions 423 which are arranged at positions equidistant left and right from the center position of the main body plate portion 421 (upper end position of the curved shape) and penetrate vertically. and an opening 424 configured by a small-diameter through hole.

In a state in which the wavy wall portion 422 and the wavy side portion 416 of the main body member 411 are in front and back contact, the lower surface of the L-shaped extension portion 423 abuts the upper surface of the lower plate 416a having the wavy side portion 416 on the back surface, A part of the L-shaped extension portion 423 that extends upward is fastened and fixed to the main body member 411 in the front-rear direction.

Therefore, it is possible to increase the substantial plate thickness of the upper panel unit 400 at the portion where the L-shaped extension portion 423 and the lower plate 416a abut on the upper and lower sides, thereby improving the strength.

The opening 424 is the speaker 45 in the speaker assembly 450 (see FIG. 123).
1 through which the vibration wave (sound) output from the back side of the speaker assembly 450 to the inside passes (is emitted to the outside). The right corner support member 430R and the left corner support member 430L are provided with circular openings 430R1 and 430L1, which are circular openings through which vibrations generated toward the front side of the speaker assembly 450 pass.

The right corner support member 430R has a laterally long rectangular through hole 430R2 penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the opening 414 of the upper frame member 410 in the front-rear direction. Through hole 430R2
A player can see the light radiated through the lens member 440 through the opening 414 .

121 is an exploded front perspective view of speaker assembly 450, and FIG. 122 is an exploded rear perspective view of speaker assembly 450. FIG. In addition, in FIGS. 121 and 122, the speaker connection line 453 is illustrated by imaginary lines for easy understanding.

The speaker assembly 450 is composed of a pair of left and right assemblies 450R and 450L, which are fastened together to the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100) by screws inserted through connecting holes 469. The lower end is fastened and fixed to the upper side plate member 14e. Note that the speaker assembly 450 includes a pair of speaker assemblies 450R and 450R having substantially symmetrical shapes.
0L, the speaker assembly 450R will be explained, and the speaker assembly 4
Description of 50L is omitted.

The speaker assembly 450R includes a speaker (cone-shaped speaker) 451, which is an acoustic device that converts an electrical signal into an audible sound wave, and a front flange 452 of the speaker 451 inserted through a through hole 466. A front assembly 460 that is fastened and fixed from the front side, and an outer shape that substantially matches the outer shape of the front assembly 460 when viewed from the front,
Rear assembly 48 forming a space with front assembly 460 in the assembled state (see FIG. 100)
0 and .

The speaker 451 is attached to the front assembly 460 so as to close the through hole 466 of the front assembly 460 .
and emits a sound effect in relation to the game, and its speaker 451
A through-hole through which a speaker connection wire 453 (for example, an electric wire consisting of a copper wire and a covering portion covering the copper wire) extending with one end connected to the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 102) is drilled , and the terminal connector of the speaker connection line 453 is connected to the electronic board 14i (FIG. 102
), so that it is configured to be connected to the audio lamp controller 113 (see FIG. 4).

A front portion of the speaker 451 is covered with a protective cover 454 made of a synthetic fiber material that allows passage of sound emitted from the speaker 451 . And this protective cover 4
The speaker 451 covered with 54 is attached to the front assembly 460 with its front portion aligned with the speaker cover 27 (see FIG. 86).

Therefore, the front part of the speaker 451 is in direct contact with the atmosphere outside the pachinko machine 8010 (see FIG. 86) through the speaker cover 27 (see FIG. 86), and the reproduced sound from the speaker 451 cannot be heard. You can play back and output with high sound quality without any loss. In addition, the protective cover 454 can suitably protect the front portion of the speaker 451 without degrading the sound quality.

The front assembly 460 includes a body portion 46 formed in a cup shape that is elongated in the left and right direction and has an open back side.
1, a plurality of recessed portions 462 recessed from the upper and lower side edges of the main body portion 461 toward the center of the vertical width in a semicircular shape at the tip, and the back surface of the recessed portion 463b having the same shape as the recessed portions 462. An extension plate 463 extending in a plate shape from the side edge to the upper and lower side edges of the main body portion 461 toward the outside of the upper and lower widths, and the main body portion 461
A wiring passage recess 464 recessed from the back side end of the main body 461 toward the front side, a light passage through hole 465 formed through the upper right corner of the main body 461 in the front-rear direction, and a speaker 451 on the right side of the main body 461 , a plurality of passage forming ribs 467 extending from the cup-shaped bottom plate (front side plate) of the main body 461 toward the back side, and the rear assembly 480. a plurality of fastening portions 468 to which screws are fastened and fixed; connecting holes 469 through which screws for fastening the left and right speaker assemblies 450L and 450R together to the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100) are inserted; A front recessed portion 471 recessed from the back side toward the front side is mainly provided at the lower end portion of the portion 461T.

The main body portion 461 is divided in the left-right direction into a base-side main body portion 461B disposed on the side where the through hole 466 is formed, and a left-right center side of the base-end main body portion 461B (FIG. 12).
1 (left side)), and a distal end side main body portion 461T that is connected to the center side (left side in FIG. 121) of the intermediate body portion 461M in the left-right direction. A space is continuously formed between the proximal side main body portion 461B, the intermediate main body portion 461M, and the distal side main body portion 461T and the rear side assembly 480 .

The main body portion 461 includes a rear side wall portion 461H formed as a wall portion that surrounds substantially the entire circumference of the outer shape when viewed from the front. The rear side wall portion 461H has an edge portion without barbs on the inside (an edge portion on the inside where no flange or the like is formed).

The recessed portion 462 is a recessed portion in which the fastening portion 14e1 of the upper side plate member 14e (see FIGS. 100 and 101) is disposed on the center side of the circle, and is used for positioning with the fastening portion 14e1. be done.

The extension plate 463 has through holes 463a through which screws are inserted from the rear side. Through hole 463
The screws to be inserted through a are threaded from the rear side of the main body frame 14a through the common fastening hole 14a2 and the upper side plate member 1.
4e (see FIG. 102) and through hole 483a of rear assembly 480.
and the through hole 463a, and screwed into the fastening portion 419 (see FIG. 120) of the main body member 411. As shown in FIG.

That is, in the speaker assembly 450R, a screw inserted through the through hole 463a through the upper side plate member 14e is screwed into the main body member 411 from the rear side of the main body frame 14a. It is pressed against the rear assembly 480 . Therefore, the speaker assembly 450R is fastened together with the body frame 14a, the upper side plate member 14e, and the body member 411, thereby being firmly fixed to each other.

According to this configuration, the speaker assembly 450 is fastened and fixed to the metal body frame 14a with the upper side plate member 14e interposed therebetween (fastened and fixed to a hard material with the resin material interposed therebetween). Thereby, the acoustic effect of the speaker 451 can be improved.

The wire passage recess 464 forms part of an opening through which a speaker connection wire 453 connected to the speaker 451 is passed. The recess width of the wire passage recess 464 is formed smaller than the cross-sectional outline of the covered portion of the speaker connection wire 453 . As a result, pressure is applied to the covered portion of the speaker connection wire 453 passing through the wire passage recess 464 , thereby preventing a gap from occurring between the wire passage recess 464 and the speaker connection wire 453 . Therefore, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a problem that the acoustic effect is lowered due to sound leakage from the opening through which the speaker connection line 453 passes. 121 and 122, the illustration of the rear side wall portion 461H is omitted (broken) for the sake of convenience, and the wiring passage concave portion 464 is illustrated so as to be visible.

Here, in this embodiment, the wiring passage recess 464 is formed not in the rear assembly 480 but in the front assembly 460 to which the speaker 451 is assembled. The speaker connection line 453 that is connected to the speaker 451 in advance can be easily passed through the wiring passage recess 464 . As a result, the workability of assembling the speaker assembly 450 can be improved.

The light passage through-hole 465 is the LED 14e arranged in the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100).
2 through which the light emitted toward the lens member 440 passes.

The passage-forming rib 467 abuts on the passage-forming rib 487 of the rear assembly 480 without any gap in the front and rear, forming a curved passage (
123). This curved path is a path through which vibration waves (sound) emitted from the speaker 451 to the rear side pass. A front side end portion of the passage forming rib 467 is connected to a front side plate of the main body portion 461 . This prevents the formation of a gap on the front side of the passage forming rib 467 .

The front recessed portion 471 is formed in a size that surrounds the outer shape of the opening 424 of the lower edge plate member 420 (see FIG. 120) (protruding slightly outward from the outer shape).

The rear assembly 480 is a body part 48 that is elongated in the left and right direction and formed in a cup shape with an open front side.
1, a plurality of recessed portions 482 recessed from the upper and lower side edges of the main body portion 481 toward the center of the vertical width in a semicircular shape at the tip, and the back surface of the recessed portion 483b having the same shape as the recessed portions 482. An extension plate 483 extending in a plate shape from the side edge to the upper and lower side edges of the main body portion 481 toward the outside of the upper and lower widths, and the main body portion 481
A wiring pressing convex portion 484 projecting toward the front side of the body portion 481, a light passing through hole 485 formed through the front and rear direction at the upper right corner of the body portion 481, and a cup-shaped bottom plate (back side plate) of the body portion 481. A plurality of passage forming ribs 487 extending like ribs toward the front side and the fastening portion 4 of the front assembly 460
A plurality of through-holes 488 formed as through-holes through which screws are inserted at positions corresponding to 68 in the front-rear direction, and front recessed portions 471 of the front assembly 460 at positions corresponding in the front-rear direction. and a rear recessed portion 491 that is recessed toward.

The body portion 481 extends in a plate shape toward the front side in such a manner as to surround the outer periphery of the body portion 481 at a position moved inward by the plate thickness of the body portion 461 of the front assembly 460 from the outer shape of the rear side plate. The front side wall portion 48 formed from a shape that fits inside the inner side surface of the back side wall portion 461H of
1H is provided.

Since the speaker assembly 450R has a double wall portion that is fitted with the rear side wall portion 461H and the front side wall portion 481H on the entire outer periphery, it is possible to prevent air from leaking from the outer peripheral position. . As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem that the acoustic effect is lowered due to sound leakage from the outer peripheral position.

The front side wall portion 481H has a pair of auxiliary protrusions projecting toward the front side beyond the wire pressing protrusions 484 at positions sandwiching the wire pressing protrusions 484 on the left and right with a gap that allows the speaker connection line 453 to pass through. 481 Ha.

The auxiliary protrusions 481Ha are a pair of protrusions that prevent the position of the speaker connection wire 453 temporarily fixed in the wire passage recess 464 from being shifted when the rear assembly 480 is assembled to the front assembly 460 . That is, since the inner side surfaces of the pair of auxiliary protrusions 481Ha are tapered so as to widen to the left and right toward the front side (tip side) (see FIG. 124(c)), the speaker connection line 45
3 deviates from the wiring passage concave portion 464 and shifts to the left or right, the shift can be corrected by the taper of the pair of auxiliary convex portions 481Ha.

As a result, the speaker connection wire 453 can be returned to the wire passage recess 464 in the process of assembly, and in the assembled state (see FIG. 100), the speaker connection wire 453 is formed from the wire passage recess 464 and the wire pressing projection 484. can be easily accommodated in an opening in the

The recessed portion 482 has the same outer shape as the recessed portion 462 in a front view, and the fastening portion 14e1 of the upper side plate member 14e (see FIGS. 100 and 101) is arranged on the center side of the circle. It is a concave portion and is used for positioning with the fastening portion 14e1.

The extension plate 483 has through holes 483a through which screws are inserted from the rear side. Through hole 483
The screws to be inserted through a are threaded from the rear side of the main body frame 14a through the common fastening hole 14a2 and the upper side plate member 1.
4e through the common fastening hole 14e3 (see FIG. 102), through hole 483a and front assembly 46.
0 through the through hole 463a and screwed into the fastening portion 419 of the body member 411 (see FIG. 101).

That is, the speaker assembly 450R is extended from the back side of the body frame 14a to the extent that the screw is tightened by screwing a screw inserted into the through hole 483a through the upper side plate member 14e into the fastening portion 419 of the body member 411. The installation plate 483 is pressed against the extension plate 463 of the front assembly 460 . Accordingly, the speaker assembly 450R is fastened together with the body frame 14a, the upper side plate member 14e and the body member 411, and is firmly fixed to each other.

The wiring pressing protrusion 484 is protruded along the upper edge of the rear side plate of the main body 481 and formed with a width that fits inside the wiring passage recess 464. The protruding length is slightly shorter than the outer diameter of the covered portion of the speaker connection wire 453 .

That is, the speaker connection wire 4 is inserted into the opening surrounded by the wire pressing protrusion 484 and the wire passing recess 464 .
53, the covered portion of the speaker connection wire 453 is compressed, and a gap is generated between the speaker connection wire 453 and an opening surrounded by the wire pressing protrusion 484 and the wire passage recess 464. can be prevented. As a result, the speaker connection line 453
It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem that the acoustic effect is lowered due to sound leakage from the opening for passing the sound.

The light passage through-hole 485 is the LED 14e arranged in the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100).
2 through which the light emitted toward the lens member 440 passes. The light passing through-hole 485 is formed of a circular opening that surrounds one LED. The light passage through-hole 465 has a larger cross-sectional shape than the light-passing through hole 485, and is tapered so that the cross-sectional shape becomes larger toward the front side. ), the light passage through-holes 465 and 485 communicate in the front-rear direction.

The passage-forming ribs 487 are formed at the same position as the passage-forming ribs 467 of the front assembly 460 in a front view, and are in contact with each other without gaps in the front and rear. It is a rib that forms a curved path (see FIG. 123). This curved path is a path through which vibration waves (sound) emitted from the speaker 451 to the rear side pass.

The passage forming rib 487 is fixed to the front side wall portion 481H and is attached to the front side wall portion 481H.
are formed at the front and rear ends and surface positions of the That is, the rear side end portion of the passage forming rib 487 is located at the main body portion 48
1 back side plate. This prevents the formation of a gap on the rear side of the passage forming rib 487 .

Here, the passage forming rib 487 is designed to have dimensions such that the front side end abuts the passage forming rib 467 and a compressive force is generated in the front-rear direction. That is, the passage forming rib 467 is applied with a compressive force directed toward the back side from the passage forming rib 467, and the passage forming rib 4 is compressed by the compressive force.
67, 487 will close the gap while elastically deforming in the front-rear direction (Fig. 124(b)).
reference).

At this time, if the passage-forming rib 487 has a low rigidity in the left-right direction and bends in the left-right direction, the compressive force may not work well and the gap may not be closed. On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the passage-forming rib 487 is fixed to the front side wall portion 481H, the rigidity in the left-right direction is increased by the strength of the front side wall portion 481H (furthermore, in the assembled state (see FIG. 100), the overlapped rear surface is reduced). strength to be reinforced by the side wall portion 461H). Therefore, the rigidity in the lateral direction of the passage forming rib 487 can be strengthened, and the lateral bending of the passage forming rib 487 can be suppressed, so that the gap between the passage forming rib 467 can be closed well. can be done.

The rear recessed portion 491 is formed to have a shape inverted from the front recessed portion 471 and forms an opening together with the front recessed portion 471 . The opening is formed in a size surrounding the outer shape of the opening 424 of the lower edge plate member 420 (see FIG. 120) (protruding slightly outside the outer shape). It is placed in a position surrounding the outer shape.

123(a) is a rear view of the front assembly 460 and FIG. 123(b) is a rear view of the rear assembly 48.
0 is a front view. In FIGS. 123(a) and 123(b), for ease of understanding,
A speaker connection line 453 is shown in phantom lines, and a state in which a front assembly 460 and a rear assembly 480, which are arranged to face each other, are unfolded with their surfaces facing each other toward the front of the paper are shown. 123(a) and 123(b) are folded along a line (not shown) drawn vertically in the left-right center of the paper surface, so that the contact positions of the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 are adjusted. can be matched. That is, the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e and the rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e can be brought into contact with each other in the front-rear direction.

In the assembly state of the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 (speaker assembly 450, see FIG. 100), inside the speaker assembly 450 is the proximal body 46 of the front assembly 460.
An acoustic chamber is formed on the back side of 1B. Then, with the acoustic chamber as the base end, an acoustic passage as a passage path for the vibration wave Ws (sound) output from the back side of the speaker 451 extends toward the tip side main body portion 461T. This acoustic path is configured as a curved path by path forming ribs 467 and 487 .

As shown in FIGS. 123(a) and 123(b), the passage forming ribs 467 are formed laterally inward (to the left) of the wire passage recesses 464 through which the wires pass, and alternately vertically toward the left. Rib portions 467a and 467b arranged at a plurality of locations (five locations in this embodiment) in
, 467c, 467d, 467e.

By forming the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, and 467e on the inner side (left side) of the wiring passage recess 464 through which the wiring passes, each rib portion 467 can be positioned at the time of assembly.
a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e and each rib portion 487a of the rear assembly 480,
It is possible to prevent the wiring from being sandwiched between 487b, 487c, 487d, and 487e.

Since the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, and 467e are connected to the main body portion 461 and the rear side wall portion 461H, the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, and 467d
, 467e can enhance the rigidity of the body portion 461. As shown in FIG.

Each of the rib portions 467 a , 467 b , 467 c , 467 d , 467 e together with the passage forming rib 487 of the rear assembly 480 form a bent passage through which the vibration wave Ws generated from the rear side of the speaker 451 passes.

Here, when there is no passage forming rib 467 and a horizontally long cavity is formed, the speaker 451
While the vibration wave generated from the groove 467 travels linearly, in this embodiment, the vibration wave Ws travels while avoiding the passage forming rib 467 .

That is, as shown in FIG. 123(a) as an example of the traveling path, the vibration wave Ws travels to the left side (arrow L side) and the nearest rib portion (for example, rib portion 467b) in the left-right direction is arranged on the lower side, the traveling direction between the ribs is the upper left direction (directions of arrows L and U).

On the other hand, after the rib portion (for example, the rib portion 467b) of the passage forming rib 467 is arranged on the lower side, the vibration wave Ws is arranged on the left side (arrow L side) of the rib portion (for example, the rib portion 467b) that is closest in the left-right direction. , rib portion 467c) are arranged on the upper side, the traveling direction is the lower left direction (directions of arrows L and D).

Therefore, like this embodiment, each rib portion 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 4
When 67e are arranged alternately in the vertical direction, the traveling path of the vibration wave Ws can be a curved path in the vertical direction, and the length of the traveling path of the vibration wave Ws is ensured to be longer than the lateral width of the space. can do.

As a result, it is possible to easily adjust the travel path length of the vibration wave Ws until it passes through the opening formed by the pair of recessed portions 471 and 491, thereby suppressing the generation of standing waves due to the vibration wave Ws. be able to.

Further, in this embodiment, the recessed portions 462 and 463b have the same function as the passage forming rib 467.
can also be generated by That is, the vibration wave Ws is caused to move in the upper left direction between the recessed portion 462 arranged in the immediate vicinity of the front recessed portion 471 and the recessed portion 463b arranged above and on the right side (arrow R side). (Arrows L, U directions).

Therefore, the recessed portions 462 and 463b have the effect of regulating the traveling direction of the vibration wave Ws in addition to the effect of assembling.

As shown in FIG. 123(b), the passage forming rib 487 serves as the wiring pressing protrusion 4 for pressing the wiring.
Ribs 487a, 487b, 487c, and 484 are formed on the inner side (left side) of 84 in the left-right direction and arranged at a plurality of locations (five locations in this embodiment) alternately vertically toward the left side.
87d and 487e.

Since each rib portion 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e is connected to the main body portion 481 and the front side wall portion 481H, each rib portion 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d
, 487e can increase the rigidity of the body portion 481. As shown in FIG.

Here, each rib portion 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e
The ribs 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, and 467e of 60 are formed in a shape that matches in the front-rear direction, and are arranged to face each other in the front-rear direction in the assembled state (see FIG. 100).

The actions of the rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, and 487e are similar to the actions of the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, and 467e described above, so description thereof will be omitted.

Further, in this embodiment, the recessed portions 482 and 483b have the same function as the passage forming rib 487.
can also be generated by That is, the vibration wave Ws is placed between the recessed portion 482 arranged in the immediate vicinity of the rear recessed portion 491 and the recessed portion 483b arranged above and on the right side (arrow R side). It can be advanced in the direction (arrow L, U direction). Therefore, the recessed portion 48
2, 483b has an effect of regulating the traveling direction of the vibration wave Ws in addition to the effect of assembling.

Here, the space formed inside the speaker assembly 450R is narrowed in vertical width as the distance from the speaker 451 increases, and is narrowed once at the position where the recessed portions 462, 482 and the recessed portions 463b, 483b are vertically aligned. Further, at a position away from the speaker 451 , the vertical width is expanded at once, and then communicates with the opening formed by the concave portions 471 and 491 . Thereby, the acoustic effect can be improved.

In this embodiment, in the longitudinal direction of the speaker assembly 450, the speaker 451
Since the base end side body portion 461B side to which is assembled is sealed by the front side assembly 460 and the rear side assembly 480, the vibration wave Ws (sound) output from the back side of the speaker 451 is
In search of an exit, it advances to the tip side body portion 461T side, which is the opposite side in the longitudinal direction. Tip side main body 4
The vibration wave Ws (sound) reaching 61T passes through the opening formed by the front recessed portion 471 and the rear recessed portion 491, the opening 424 (see FIG. 120) of the lower edge plate member 420 in order, and then reaches the speaker assembly. The sound is emitted to the outside of the solid 450R (the outside of the pachinko machine 8010 (see FIG. 86)).

That is, the speaker assembly 450 is configured as a bass-reflex type speaker box, and the rear portion of the speaker 451 is the internal path of the speaker assembly 450 and the recessed portion 47 .
1, 491 and the opening 424 (see FIG. 120), the pachinko machine 8010 is in direct contact with the atmosphere outside, so the sound output from the back side of the speaker 451 is You can play back and output with high sound quality without being stuck.

The bass reflex type speaker assembly 450 resonates the sound output from the back side of the speaker 451 to invert the phase, and the sound output from the front side of the speaker 451 and the sound output from the front side of the speaker 451 are in phase with each other. Sound can be emitted from the opening formed by That is, the bass-reflex type speaker assembly 450 can emphasize the sound output from the back side of the speaker 450 by superimposing the sound output from the front side and the sound output from the front side by superimposing them in the same phase without canceling each other due to the opposite phase. That is, it becomes possible to amplify heavy bass. This will
The pachinko machine 8010 according to the present embodiment is capable of producing realistic effects,
It is possible to raise the player's interest and excitement for the game.

In this embodiment, since the upper panel unit 400 in which the opening 424 is formed is arranged on the front side of the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 91), the low frequency sound output from the back side of the speaker 451 is transmitted through the speaker assembly. The internal space of 450 is used as an enclosure, and is released to the front side of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 100) (released downward to the front side of the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 86)). As a result, it is possible to appropriately provide the player playing the game on the front side of the front frame 14 with the effect of the low sound emitted from the front frame 14 toward the front side.

The tuning of the sound of the vibration wave Ws (sound) is performed by setting the volume of the speaker assembly 450,
This can be done by setting the path length of the vibration wave Ws. For example, in this embodiment, each rib portion 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e of the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 48
0 rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, and 487e are defined as the path of the vibration wave Ws. Therefore, each rib portion 467a, 467b, 467c, 46
7d, 467e and the rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, and 487e can be individually set for their arrangement and vertical extension length to tune the sound of the vibration wave Ws (sound).

In addition, in the present embodiment, each rib portion 467a, 467b, 467c, 467c of the front assembly 460
67d, 467e and each rib portion 487a, 487b, 487c, 487 of the rear assembly 480
d and 487e are arranged at a portion where a load is applied when the speaker assembly 450 is fastened and fixed to reinforce the speaker assembly 450, in addition to the above purpose.

For example, the rib portions 467c, 487c, 467d, and 487d are arranged near the fastening portion 468 and the through hole 488, so that the fastening portion 468 and the vicinity of the through hole 488 can be reinforced. It is possible to prevent the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 from being damaged by the load applied to the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 when the screws are screwed.

Further, the extension plates 463 and 483 are sandwiched and pressed between the enlarged rib 419a of the fastening portion 419 and the upper side plate member 14e in the assembled state (see FIG. 125(a)).
7c, 487c, 467d, and 487d are arranged closer to the extension plates 463 and 483 than the fastening portion 468 and the through hole 488 which are closest thereto. Therefore, even after the front side assembly 460 and the rear side assembly 480 are fastened and fixed by screwing screws into the fastening portion 468, the extension plates 463 and 48 are fixed.
Screws are screwed into the fastening portions 419 inserted through the through holes 463a, 483a of No. 3, and when the upper frame member 410, the upper side plate member 14e, and the main body frame 14a are fastened and fixed, the rib portions 467c, 467c and 467c are inserted.
By bringing the 87c, 467d, and 487d into contact with each other, the front side assembly 460 and the rear side assembly 48
0 deformation can be prevented. That is, each rib portion 467c, 487c, 467d, 48
7d allows the front assembly 460 and rear assembly 480 to be reinforced.

Also, for example, the rib portions 467b and 487b are connected to the upper end portions of the recessed portions 462 and 482, respectively. Here, the recessed portions 462 and 482 are portions where the fastening portion 14e1 (see FIGS. 102 and 125) of the upper side plate member 14e is positioned downward in the assembled state, and the speaker assembly 450 is positioned on the upper side plate member. 14e, the speaker assembly 45
0 recessed portions 462 and 482 ride on the fastening portion 14e1. Therefore, the recessed portion 462
, 482 is subjected to an upward load from the fastening portion 14 e 1 as a reaction force generated when the fastening portion 14 e 1 supports the weight of the speaker assembly 450 .

Therefore, it is thought that the recessed portions 462 and 482 are likely to be damaged. It is possible to reinforce the load applied to the portions 462 and 482 and improve the durability of the recessed portions 462 and 482 .

An opening 424 (see FIG. 120) formed from a plurality of small-diameter through holes functions as a bass reflex port. Here, compared to the case where the opening 424 is formed from a single large-diameter through hole, fraudulent acts such as illegally entering the pachinko machine 8010 through the opening 424 with a wire, piano wire, or the like are prevented. It can be made easier to control.

In addition, in such fraudulent acts, wires, piano wires, etc. are illegally entered into the game area and nails are deformed. and the opening formed by the rear recessed portion 491, and the opening formed by the wire passing concave portion 464 and the wire pressing convex portion 484. A gap in the opening formed by the wire pressing projection 484 is closed by the speaker connection wire 453 . Therefore, when a wire, a piano wire, or the like enters the speaker assembly 450 through the opening formed by the front side recessed portion 471 and the rear side recessed portion 491, the speaker assembly 450 may be displaced through an opening other than the place where the wire or the piano wire entered. It is possible to make it difficult for the tip of a wire, piano wire, or the like to reach the game area through a through-hole formed as an opening for passing the speaker connection wire 453 through the upper side plate member 14e.

In addition, the through holes formed as openings for passing the speaker connection wires 453 through the upper side plate member 14e are arranged near the left and right ends of the upper side plate member 14e according to the arrangement of the speakers 451, so that wires and piano wires are not required. It is possible to lengthen the distance between the opening formed by the front side recessed portion 471 and the rear side recessed portion 491 , which is the location where the sound and the like enter the speaker assembly 450 .

Therefore, even if such a fraudulent act is performed, the success rate of the fraudulent act can be lowered, and it is possible to easily prevent fraudulent profit from being generated.

124(a) is a rear view of the speaker assembly 450R, FIG. 124(b) is a cross-sectional view of the speaker assembly 450R along line CXXIVb-CXXIVb of FIG. 124(a), and FIG. 124(c). 124(a) is a top view of the speaker assembly 450R viewed in the direction of arrow CXXIVc in FIG. 124(a), and FIG. 124(d) is an arrow CXXI in FIG.
It is a partial bottom view of the speaker assembly 450R viewed in the Vd direction. Note that FIG.
) and FIG. 124(c), the speaker connection line 453 is illustrated by an imaginary line for easy understanding, while the illustration of the speaker connection line 453 is omitted in the partially enlarged view of FIG. 124(c). .

As shown enlarged in FIG. 124(b), the inner side surface 461Hi (lower surface in FIG. 124(b)) of the rear side wall portion 461H of the front assembly 460 has a tapered shape that slopes inward toward the rear side. , the outer surface 481Ho of the front side wall portion 481H of the rear assembly 480 (FIG. 124(b)
The upper surface) has a tapered shape that inclines inward toward the back side and has an inner surface 461H.
It is shaped so as to fit with i in the assembled state. As a result, the work efficiency of inserting the front sidewall portion 481H of the rear assembly 480 into the rear sidewall portion 461H of the front assembly 460 can be improved.

In FIG. 124(b), the position of the front end of the rib portion 487c in the assembled state is illustrated by a solid line, and the position of the front end of the rib portion 487c before assembly is illustrated by an imaginary line. That is, in the assembled state, the rib portion 487c receives a compressive load from the rib portion 467c and is elastically deformed. A compressive force acts from the rib portion 487c toward the rib portion 467c due to the restoring force generated by this elastic deformation, so that the gap between the rib portions 467c and 487c can be filled. In addition, each rib portion 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e, 487a
, 487b, 487c, 487d, and 487e are designed to have a dimensional relationship in which a compressive load is generated between the abutting rib portions.

As shown in FIG. 124(c), the intermediate main body portion 461M is formed shorter in front-rear dimension than the proximal side main body portion 461B and the distal end side main body portion 461T. Therefore, the tip side body portion 46
Compared to 1T, the cross-sectional area of the path through which the vibration wave Ws can pass can be made smaller (squeezed) in the intermediate body portion 461M. Thereby, the improvement of an acoustic effect can be aimed at.

As shown in FIG. 124(d), the internal space of the tip side body portion 461T disposed above the opening formed by the front side recessed portion 471 and the rear side recessed portion 491 is the interior of the intermediate body portion 461M. A large space is ensured in a form that bulges in the front-rear direction compared to the space. As a result, the vibration wave Ws that has reached the distal end side main body portion 461T can be temporarily retained in the distal end side main body portion 461T and released at a low speed. As a result, it is possible to improve the acoustic effect, for example, it is possible to make it easier to hear deep bass by the vibration wave Ws.

FIG. 125(a) shows the front assembly 46 along line CXXVa-CXXVa in FIG. 124(a).
0, a partial cross-sectional view of the rear assembly 480, the upper frame member 410, the body frame 14a and the upper side plate member 14e, and FIG. FIG. 11 is a partial cross-sectional view of the side assembly 480, the upper frame member 410, the body frame 14a and the upper side plate member 14e;

As shown in FIG. 125(a), the enlarged rib 419a of the fastening portion 419 extends through the through holes 463a and 463a.
The screw inserted through 483a is fastened and fixed to the fastening portion 419, so that the front assembly 460
, the rear assembly 480 and the upper side plate member 14e are sandwiched between them and the body frame 14a.
That is, by arranging the enlarged rib 419a on the front surface of the extension plate 463, it is possible to prevent the front assembly 460, the rear assembly 480, and the upper side plate member 14e from being displaced in the front-rear direction. , the front assembly 460, the rear assembly 480, the upper side plate member 14e, and the metal body frame 14a can be firmly fixed.

As shown in FIG. 125(b), the second fastening portion 419b is fastened to the fastening portion 14e1 of the upper side plate member 14e at the lower position of the upper frame member 410, and the speaker assembly is attached at the upper position of the upper frame member 410. It is formed at a position corresponding to recessed portions 462 and 482 of 450 .

The second fastening portion 419b and the fastening portion 14e1 are disposed inside the recessed portions 462 and 482 (they pass through the recessed portions 462 and 482 in the fastening direction without coming into contact with each other).
And, without the rear assembly 480, the upper frame member 410 and the upper side plate member 14e are fastened and fixed.

The body frame 14a and the upper side plate member 14e are fastened together to the second fastening portion 419b at the upper position of the main body member 411, and the upper side plate member is fastened to the second fastening portion 419b at the lower position of the main body member 411. 14e is fastened and fixed, and the body frame 14a is not fastened and fixed.

Further, at the upper position of the main body member 411, the second fastening portion 419b (see FIG. 118) is arranged inside the concave portions 462 and 482 (the portion extending toward the rear side is arranged inside). At the lower position of the body member 411, the fastening portion 14e1 (see FIG. 100) is recessed portion 462,
482 (the part extending to the front side is arranged inside).

In this embodiment, the separate left and right speakers 451 are arranged in independent speaker assemblies 450R and 450L, respectively.
Conflict with the sound reproduced and output from the speaker 451 arranged in 450L can be avoided, and the reproduced sound can be reproduced with high quality as transparent sound without being muffled.

In this embodiment, the extension plate 483 of the rear assembly 480 and the upper side plate member 14e are in contact with each other at the upper part of the speaker assembly 450 (see FIG. 125(a)). In the lower part, the rear surface of the rear assembly 480 and the front surface of the upper side plate member 14e are separated from each other, and the front surface of the upper side plate member 14e protrudes toward the front side in a portion arranged to face the lower end of the rear assembly 480, The projecting portion and the lower end of the rear assembly 480 abut on each other in the front-rear direction. Namely
The speaker assembly 450 is not configured to be in contact (sticky) with the upper side plate member 14e over the entire surface, but is in a line-contact manner particularly at the lower end.

In this case, the portion that protrudes from the upper side plate member 14e and contacts the lower end of the speaker assembly 450 can function as an insulator, so that the acoustic effect of the sound output from the speaker 451 can be improved.

In this embodiment, the portion that protrudes from the upper side plate member 14e and contacts the lower end of the speaker assembly 450 is integrally formed with the upper side plate member 14e (made of synthetic resin).
However, it is not limited to this.

For example, a metal member may be provided between the speaker assembly 450 and the upper side plate member 14e, a member made of ebony, or a glass member may be provided. Alternatively, a member made of concrete may be provided, a soft resin material may be provided, or another commercially available member may be provided.

In particular, when arranging a metal member, it is desirable that the specific gravity is high. For example, it is desirable to employ cast iron, zinc, brass, lead, steel, and the like. By using these metals, it is possible to add depth to the sound.

Moreover, it is desirable that the member has high hardness. Examples include cast iron, steel, glass, and ceramics. By using these members, the rise performance of sound can be improved.

As for the shape, they may protrude in the shape of an elongated plate, may protrude in the shape of spikes, or may protrude in a form with rounded ends. Also, the upper side plate member 14e and the speaker assembly 450 are not limited to being fixed, and may be connected in a floating manner.

In addition, the arrangement of the portion functioning as the insulator described above is the same as that of the speaker assembly 45.
It is not limited to the back surface of the lower end of 0. For example, the rear surface of the upper end of the speaker assembly 450, the rear surface of the left and right ends of the speaker assembly 450, or the rear surface of the speaker assembly 450 may be used.
The side or front of 50 may also be used.

For example, when arranged on the rear surface of the upper end portion, a member functioning as an insulator is cylindrical, arranged between the rear assembly 480 and the upper side plate member 14e, and a screw to be inserted through the through hole 483a is inserted. Positioning may be done by In this case, it is possible to eliminate the need for a separate locking member for positioning the member functioning as an insulator, and the rear assembly 480, the upper side plate member 14e, and the insulator function depending on the degree of tightening of the screw inserted through the through hole 483a. It is possible to adjust the sound effect by adjusting the degree of contact with the member (the load applied to each other).

At this time, even if the screw inserted through the through-hole 483a is loosened, the speaker assembly 450 remains unaffected by the screw inserted through the connecting hole 469 (see FIG. 123(a)) and the connecting hole 469.
A screw inserted through a through-hole arranged on the opposite side of the connecting hole 469 in the left-right direction with the same shape as , and a through-hole arranged at the lower end of the speaker assembly 450 at the left-right position where the through-hole is arranged. As a result, the speaker assembly 450 can be prevented from coming off the upper side plate member 14e.

Regarding fixing of the upper frame member 410 to the upper side plate member 14e, the upper frame member 41 is fixed.
0 indicates the fastening portion 14e1 of the upper side plate member 14e (Fig. 1
00) is screwed into the fastening portion 419 (see FIG. 125(b)) to fasten and fix. As described above, in the fastening and fixing between the fastening portion 14e1 and the fastening portion 419, no load is applied to the speaker assembly 450. Therefore, by firmly fastening and fixing the fastening portion 14e1 and the fastening portion 419, It is possible to prevent the upper frame member 410 from coming off from the upper side plate member 14e while loosely tightening the screws inserted through the through holes 483a (adjusting the degree of tightening).

Also, the same relationship as the above-described speaker assembly 450 and the upper side plate member 14e is
The same applies to the relationship between the speaker assembly 450 and the body frame 14a connected and fixed via the upper side plate member 14e. That is, the metal body frame 14a can be made to function as an insulator, and the material and contact relationship can be designed in the same manner as described above.

126 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board 13 and the inner frame 12, FIG. 127(a) is a rear view of the game board 13, and FIG. 127(b) is a front view of the inner frame 12. . In addition, Fig. 127
(b) shows the inner frame 12 with the game board 13 removed.

First, in order to explain the procedure for fixing the game board 13 to the inner frame 12, the supporting portions 12a,
12b will be described. As shown in FIG. 126, at the upper and lower corners of the inner surface of the left wall of the inner frame 12, a left end front support portion 12a and a left end rear support portion 12b are spaced forward and backward for the purpose of supporting the left end portion of the game board 13. are placed.

The left end front support portion 12a is formed with an inclined surface 12a1 that inclines backward toward the left from the right end of the rear end surface that is arranged to face the game board 13 in the assembled state (see FIG. 89). A flat surface 12a2 extending in the left-right direction is formed leftward from the left end. In the assembled state, the flat surface 12a2 and the front surface of the game board 13 are in surface contact.

The rear left end support portion 12b has a rectangular outer shape when viewed from the front. . The left end rear support portion 12b includes an elastic support portion 12b1 having one end disposed inside thereof and a portion protruding from the front end surface of the cup-shaped portion.

The elastic support portion 12b1 is arranged in a posture of projecting toward the front side as it goes to the left in the state of its natural length. That is, the elastic support portion 12b1 and the inclined surface 12a1 of the left front support portion 12a jointly
A tapered shape that expands to the side (to the right) where the game board 13 is arranged in the horizontal direction is formed. As a result, it is possible to improve workability when an operator assembles the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 . Next, a procedure for fixing the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 will be described with reference to FIGS. 128 and 129. FIG.

Figures 128(a) and 128(b) are CXXVIIIa-CXXV of Figure 127(b)
129(a) and 129(b) are side views of the board support device 600 and the game board 13 schematically showing the board support device 600 and the game board 13. FIG. is. 128 and 129 show the process of assembling the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 in chronological order, and FIG. 128(b) and 129(a) show the game board 13 just before the assembly to the inner frame 12 is completed, and FIG. 129(b) shows the game board 13 after the assembly to the inner frame 12 is completed. illustrated. In addition, in FIGS. 128 and Z39, in order to facilitate understanding,
A part of the configuration of the game board 13 and the inner frame 12 is omitted in the drawing.

When an operator assembles the game board 13 to the inner frame 12, first, the game board 13 is temporarily placed on the upper surface of the plate passage forming member 160, and after adjusting the vertical position of the game board 13 to some extent, the game board 13 is installed.
is slid between the left end front support portion 12a and the left end rear support portion 12b. At this time, as shown in FIG. 128(a), the game board 13 is slid into the inner frame 12 in a posture rotated about an axis facing the vertical direction, so that the left end front support on the front side is provided. There is a possibility that the portion 12b and the game board 13 may interfere with each other.
Since a1 is formed, the range (position) where the game board 13 and the left end front support portion 12b interfere
can be reduced. Thereby, workability can be improved.

Next, as shown in FIG. 128(b), the left end of the game board 13 (specifically, the inclined surface 12a
1 and the front surface of the game board 13), the game board 13 is rotated so as to approach the inner frame 12.例文帳に追加In the course of this rotation, the front surface of the game board 13 is arranged to face the flat surface 12a2, and a biasing force is applied toward the game board 13 from the elastic support portions 12b1. Namely
The front surface of the game board 13 is pressed against the flat surface 12a2 by the biasing force applied from the elastic support portion 12b1. Thereby, the game board 13 can be temporarily fixed to the inner frame 12 .

In the process of rotating the game board 13, the vertical position of the game board 13 is the support bottom 1 of the inner frame.
2c. The support bottom portion 12c is a plate-like portion formed on the inner frame 12 along the left-right direction in an arrangement and length corresponding to the lower bottom surface of the game board 13, and is in an assembled state (see FIG. 90).
A guide rib 1 that supports the game board 13 from below and whose front upper end is cut as an inclined surface
A plurality of 2c1 are provided in the left-right direction.

With this configuration, in the process of changing the state from FIG. 128(a) to FIG. 128(b), the rear edge of the lower bottom surface of the game board 13 passes through the front edge of the guide rib 12c1 in top view. Since the game board 13 rides on the inclined surface of the guide rib 12c1 each time, the rotation of the game board 13 can be progressed smoothly by causing the game board 13 to ride on the guide rib 12c1 in order from the left side. . Therefore, the workability of assembling the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 can be improved.

The inclination angle of the inclined surface with respect to the upper surface of the guide rib 12c1 is set to approximately 15°, which is larger than the backward inclination (approximately 10°) when the pachinko machine 8010 is installed in the amusement arcade. As a result, it is possible to prevent the inclination of the inclined surface of the guide rib 12c1 from reversing in the front-rear direction due to the backward inclination of the pachinko machine 8013 at the time of installation.
Workability can be improved when the game board 13 is assembled to the inner frame 12 without depending on the backward inclination of the 013. - 特許庁

In addition, the inclination angle of the inclined surface of the guide rib 12c1 is not limited to this, and may be formed at an inclination angle equivalent to the backward inclination at the time of installation of the amusement arcade. In this case, the guide rib 1 on which the game board 13 rides
The slope of 2c1 can be horizontal.

In the state shown in FIG. 128(b), as shown in FIG. 129(a), the game board 13 is sandwiched between the board support devices 600 which are arranged vertically and are in a released state to be described later, and the rear surface of the game board 13 rotates. It abuts on the front surface of the rear claw member 640 .

Here, in the released state, the board support device 600 has the pre-rotation pawl member 620 and the pre-regulation pawl member 630 (the portion arranged on the front side of the position where the game board 13 is fixed)
Since the game board 13 is constructed so as to retreat from the entry route, the workability of the assembly work of the game board 13 can be improved.

Then, as shown in FIG. 129(b), by pushing the vicinity of the right end of the game board 13 toward the rear side, a load is applied to the post-rotation pawl member 640 via the game board 13, and the board support device 60 is rotated.
0 changes to a fixed state, which will be described later, and the game board 13 is fixed to the inner frame 12 . That is, the game board 13
, the state of the upper and lower board support devices 600 changes almost simultaneously.

The game board 13 is supported by the support bottom portion 12c and its vertical position is regulated. Figure 129(a)
) and as shown in FIG. 129(b), between the released state and the fixed state of the board support device 600, the board support device 600 does not come into contact with the lower end of the game board 13 (the game board 13 does not touch the board surface). It is not pushed up by the support device 600), and the vertical position of the game board 13 does not change. Therefore, the floating connector 13a and the receiving connector 12d can be stably attached and detached as the board support device 600 is changed between the released state and the fixed state.

Here, when the game board 13 near the right end is pushed to the back side, the game board 13 rotates around the left end as a fulcrum.
The force required for applying a load to 0 can be weakened by the long width dimension of the game board 13, and even a weak worker can assemble the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 without any problem.

When assembling the game board 13 to the inner frame 12, the left end portion of the game board 13 is attached to the left end front support portion 12a.
And since it is supported at two upper and lower positions by the left end rear support portion 12b (see FIG. 126), for example,
When the right end of the game board 13 is insufficiently fixed (when at least one of the upper and lower board support devices 600 is not fixed), the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89) is closed with respect to the inner frame 12. Even if there is, the extent to which the game board 13 falls forward can be reduced.

For example, when the upper board surface support device 600 is in the released state (see FIG. 134(a)), the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89) is pushed in to close against the inner frame 12, and the game board 13 The degree of tilting back and forth can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the state of the board surface support device 600 from changing due to the recoil when the front frame 14 is pushed in to close it with respect to the inner frame 12 (the possibility can be reduced).

In a state where the game board 13 is fixed to the inner frame 12, the left end of the game board 13 is a support portion 12a.
, 12b, the right end is fixed by the board support device 600, and the lower end is restricted in vertical position by the support bottom 12c.

In the state where the game board 13 is fixed to the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 129(b)), the game board 13
is arranged at the lower end of the back side of the game board 13, and is connected to wirings connected to various members and various devices arranged on the game board 13, and is supported by the game board 13 so that its position can be changed in the surface direction of the game board 13. The floating connector 13a and the receiving connector 12d are arranged on the inner frame 12 in the vicinity of the board surface support device 600 on the lower side, and the wiring connected to the control board unit 91 (see FIG. 3) etc. is connected on the back side. They are connected in the rotational direction of the game board 13 .

The floating connector 13a and the receiving side connector 12d are arranged in an inclined posture so that the connection direction is directed along the rotation direction of the game board 13 in order to reduce connection resistance in the rotation direction of the game board 13. (Refer to FIG. 126 for the receiving connector 12d).

The inner frame 12 includes a board surface supporting device 600 in which a pair of upper and lower members are arranged facing each other near the right corner of the inner frame 12 . Since the pair of upper and lower board support devices 600 have the same configuration and are arranged facing each other, one of the board support devices 600 will be explained, and the other board support device 600 will be omitted.

130(a) is a front perspective view of the board support device 600, FIG. 130(b) is a back perspective view of the board support device 600, and FIG. 131(a) is a front perspective view of the board support device 600. 131(b) is a rear perspective view of the board support device 600. FIG. Fig. 130
130(a) and 130(b) show a fixed state in which the board support device 600 fixes the game board 13, and FIGS. 131(a) and 131(b) show the game board 1
A released state in which the fixation of 3 is released is illustrated. As shown in FIGS. 130 and 131, the board support device 600 displaces the open side of the U-shape formed by the front rotating claw member 620 and the rear rotating claw member 640 in the front-rear direction.

132 is an exploded front perspective view of the board support device 600, and FIG. 133 is an exploded rear perspective view of the board support device 600. FIG. As shown in FIGS. 132 and 133, the board support device 60
0 is a frame member 610 formed in a rectangular frame shape when viewed from the top, a front rotating claw member 620 rotatably supported by a first shaft member P61 inserted through and fixed to the frame member 610, and a rotating claw member 620. A regulating front claw member 630 arranged on the front side of the front claw member 620 and rotatably supported by the second shaft member P62 inserted through and fixed to the front rotation claw member 620, and arranged on the back side of the front rotation claw member 620. The post-rotation pawl member 6 is rotatably supported by the third shaft member P63 inserted through and fixed to the pre-rotation pawl member 620.
40 and .

The frame member 610 includes a main body plate portion 611 formed in a rectangular frame shape by bending a sheet metal member at right angles at its corners, and a pair of parts of the main body plate portion 611 that are arranged opposite to each other on the left and right sides. A pair of support holes 612 formed through the plate portion 611a in a straight line, and an arcuate hole 613 formed in the plate portion 611a along an arc around the support hole 612 above the front side of the support hole 612. , the plate portion 6 along an arc centered on the support hole 612 on the back side of the support hole 612
11 a from below, and the plate portion 61 at a position vertically above the support hole 612 .
The inner frame 12 is secured by a rod-shaped regulating rod 615 inserted through and fixed to the frame 1a, and a screw extending from the plate portion 611a to the left and right in a flange shape and inserted through the through hole 616a in the assembled state (see FIG. 127(b)). and a pair of fixing plates 616 fastened and fixed to.

The support hole 612 is a through hole through which the first shaft member P61 is inserted and fixed. First shaft member P61
is formed as a cylindrical metal rod-shaped member with an enlarged diameter at the end on the insertion base end side.
fixed to This fixing method and the shape of the shaft member are the second shaft member P62 and the third shaft member P
63 is the same, so the explanation is omitted. When the first shaft member P61 is inserted through the support hole 612, the first shaft member P61 is also inserted through the supported hole 622 of the pre-rotation claw member 620 at the same time.

Similar to the frame member 610, the pre-rotation claw member 620 includes a main body plate portion 621 formed by bending a sheet metal member at a right angle at a corner to form a T-shape in a side view, and a part of the main body plate portion 621. A pair of supported holes 622 that are formed through the plate portions 621a that are arranged opposite to each other on the left and right and are axially supported by the first shaft member P61, and through the plate portions 621a on a straight line at the upper corners on the front side. A pair of support holes 623 formed and through which the second shaft member P62 is inserted and fixed, and a plate portion 621
A pair of support holes 624 are formed so as to penetrate in a straight line in the rear side part of the part a and into which the third shaft member P63 is inserted and fixed.

Note that when the second shaft member P62 is inserted into the support hole 623, the pre-regulation claw member 63
The second shaft member P62 is also inserted through the supported hole 632 of No. 0, and the third shaft member P63 is inserted into the support hole 624.
At the same time, the third shaft member P63 is also inserted into the supported hole 642 of the rotation rear claw member 640.
is inserted.

The main body plate portion 621 is a portion arranged opposite to the left and right, and has a longitudinally long long portion 621a1.
and an extension portion 621a2 extending vertically from the front end of the long portion 621a1 connect a pair of plate portions 621a formed in a T shape in a side view and the upper edges of the plate portions 621a. A connecting plate portion 621b to be fixed, a rear side extending plate 621c extending from the rear side end portion of the connecting plate portion 621b to the surface of the connecting plate portion 621b with a downward inclination of about 45 degrees, Part 621a
2, the hanging back plate portion 621d extends perpendicularly to the plate portion 621a toward the opposite side plate portion 621a, and the hanging back plate portion 621d extends from the lower end of the hanging back plate portion 621d. and a front side extension plate 621e that extends obliquely to the front side by about 45 degrees with respect to the plane.

The hanging back plate portion 621d is formed in a flat plate shape along a plane perpendicular to the long portion 621a1 and the connecting plate portion 621b. The side surface of the long portion 621a1 and the connecting plate portion 621b form a right angle, and the lower surface of the long portion 621a1 and the rear side surface of the hanging rear plate portion 621d are formed to be perpendicular to each other.

The rear-side extended plate 621c is arranged so that its lower surface can come into contact with the torsion spring NBb. In the present embodiment, in the released state, the torsion spring NBb abuts and the arm portion of the torsion spring NBb is separated from the body plate portion 611 (see FIG. 134(a)). By retracting NBb upward, the torsion spring NBb moves toward the body plate portion 611.
begin to come into contact with

As a result, when the operator starts pushing the game board 13 into the board support device 600, the game board 13 is fixed to the board support device 600 while preventing the repulsive force of the torsion spring NBb from being generated on the operator side. Immediately before finishing, the repulsive force of the torsion spring NBb can be generated toward the operator. That is, it is possible to suppress the force of rotation of the game board 13 by the repulsive force immediately before the game board 13 is fixed to the board support device 600 while reducing the force required at the start of pushing.

The hanging back plate portion 621d is a portion that abuts on the game board 13 from the front side in the assembled state (see FIG. 89) and regulates the front and rear positions of the game board 13 . The front-side extension plate 621e functions as a guide when the game board 13 is inserted into the back side of the hanging back plate portion 621d.

A torsion spring NBa is wound around the second shaft member P62. The torsion spring NBa generates an urging force in a direction to bring the front regulating claw member 630 and the hanging back plate portion 621d closer to each other. A torsion spring NBb is wound around the third shaft member P63. The torsion spring NBb generates an urging force in a direction to move the lower end of the post-rotation claw member 640 away from the rear side wall of the body plate portion 611 .

The pre-regulation claw member 630 is arranged to face the main body plate portion 631, which is formed in the shape of a letter in a side view by bending a sheet metal member at a right angle at the corner portion, and a part of the main body plate portion 631, which is arranged to be opposed to the left and right. A pair of supported holes 632 penetrating the plate portion 631a on a straight line and supported by the second shaft member P62, and a front connecting plate 631b connecting the plate portion 631a to the lower end of the front connecting plate 631b are inclined to the front side. It is mainly provided with an inclined extension plate 633 extending in the same direction and a curved surface 634 curved as the upper end surface of the plate portion 631a.

The obliquely extending plate 633 is a plate portion arranged opposite to the front frame 14, and
is the portion closest to the front frame 14 in the front-rear direction when is in the released state.

The curved surface 634 is a surface that abuts against the regulating rod 615 in the assembled state (see FIG. 126), thereby regulating the free posture change of the front regulating claw member 630 .

The post-rotation claw member 640 includes a main body plate portion 641 formed in a vertically long rectangular shape in a side view by bending a sheet metal member at right angles at corners, and a part of the main body plate portion 641, which is arranged opposite to the left and right. A pair of supported holes 642 penetrating through the plate portion 641a on a straight line and supported by the third shaft member P63, and a front connecting plate 641b connecting the pair of plate portions 641a to the rear side from the lower end portion thereof. and an inclined extension plate 643 that is inclined and extended.

The front connecting plate 641b is a portion that abuts on the back side of the game board 13 and regulates the front and rear positions of the game board 13 in the assembled state (see FIG. 89).

The inclined extension plate 643 is a portion that receives a load from the game board 13 when the game board 13 is pushed in, and is inclined at an angle of contact with the back surface of the game board 13 in the released state (see FIG. 129(a)). It is formed.

134(a), 134(b), 135(a) and 135(b) are side views of the board support device 600. FIG. 134(a), 134(b), 135(a), and 135(b) show the process of changing the board support device 600 from the released state to the fixed state in chronological order. 134(a), 134(b), 135(a) and 135
In (b), the arrangement of the multifunctional cover member 171 arranged close to the board support device 600 and the game board 13 fixed to the board support device 600 is illustrated by imaginary lines.

That is, in FIG. 134(a), the released state of the board support device 600 is shown in FIG. 135(b).
The fixed state of the board support device 600 is illustrated. In addition, in the fixed state shown in FIG. 135(b), the third shaft member P63 is arranged right behind the first shaft member P61 (on the rear side in the horizontal direction). As a result, the post-rotation pawl member 640 rotates too much around the first shaft member P61 (the third It is possible to prevent the shaft member P63 from moving above the first shaft member P61. Therefore, the post-rotation claw member 640 can be accurately moved to the position in the fixed state.

Here, as described above, the pre-regulation claw member 630 is applied with a biasing force in the direction of approaching the hanging rear plate portion 621d by the torsion spring NBa. Therefore, when no other external force acts, the pre-regulation claw member 630 is arranged close to the hanging rear plate portion 621d. on the other hand,
A change in posture of the pre-regulation claw member 630 is regulated by the contact between the curved surface 634 of the pre-regulation claw member 630 and the regulation rod 615 .

That is, as shown in FIGS. 134(a), 134(b), 135(a) and 135(b), as the board support device 600 changes from the released state to the fixed state, the rotation front claw member 6
20 tilts on the front side where the extended portion 621a2 is arranged, while the front regulating claw member 630 rises on the front side in such a manner as to separate from the hanging back plate portion 621d.

More specifically, the regulating rod 615 is the front side portion of the curved surface 634, and the second shaft member P
134(a) to FIG. 13
5( a )), the front side end of the regulation front claw member 630 rises as the rotation front claw member 620 tilts. In other words, the pre-regulation pawl member 630 moves in the direction opposite to the moving direction of the pre-rotation pawl member 620 .

On the other hand, a non-resisting portion 634b, which is a portion continuously provided on the back side of the resisting portion 634a and has an arc shape along a circle centered on the second shaft member P62, is arranged to face the regulating rod 615,
When the regulating rod 615 and the curved surface 634 are no longer in contact with each other in the circular direction about the second shaft member P62, the rising motion of the front regulating pawl member 630 is released, and the front regulating pawl member 630 faces the inclined extension plate 633. The tip portion is arranged close to the hanging back plate portion 621d (Fig. 135(a) to Fig. 135
(b)).

The angular range in which the pre-regulation pawl member 630 is raised (Fig. 134(a) to Fig. 135(a)
), even if a downward load, which is a load in the direction of tilting the front end portion of the front regulation claw member 630, is applied to the regulation front claw member 630, the downward load operates. Since the change in posture of the pre-regulation claw member 630 at this time is a change in posture toward the direction facing the downward load (posture change in the rising direction), the reaction force against the downward load becomes excessive, and the pre-regulation claw member 630 against the downward load becomes excessive. Attitude change of 630 is restricted.

In addition, since the game board 13 abuts against the rear surface of the rear side extension plate 621c, the rotation of the front claw member 620 is restricted by the game board 13 unless the game board 13 is pushed inward.

As a result, a downward load is applied to the pre-rotation pawl member 620 by applying a downward load to the pre-regulation pawl member 630 .
can be suppressed from rotating. Therefore, for example, when a load is applied to the front regulating claw member 630 from the front frame 14, the tilting motion of the front claw member 620 can be suppressed. In this embodiment, when the board surface support device 600 is released, the multifunctional cover member 171 arranged on the front frame 14 is positioned so as to abut on the inclined extension plate 633 of the front claw member 630 . , the shape of the front connection plate 631b, and the length and inclination angle of the inclined extension plate 633 are set.

In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 134(b), the game board 13 abuts on the back surface of the back side extension plate 621c, so that when the game board 13 moves (tilts) to the front side, the back side extension plate 621c
and the game board 13, rubbing friction occurs. As a result, the game board 1 is in the state of FIG. 134(b).
3 can be prevented from moving (tilting) to the front side. Therefore, when the lower board support device 600 (see FIGS. 136 to 139), which will be described later, applies a load to the game board 13,
It is possible to prevent the vicinity of the upper end of the game board 13 from moving (tilting) toward the front side due to the recoil.

Here, when the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89) is closed in the release state of the board surface support device 600, in the case of a structure in which the front rotation claw member 620 rotates due to the load from the front frame 14, it is arranged on the front frame 14. Depending on the manner of contact between the provided multifunctional cover member 171 and the front regulating claw member 630, the board surface support device 600 may reach the fixed state, and the board surface support device 600 may not reach the fixed state and may be stabilized at an incomplete angle. may occur.

The board support device 600 is stabilized at a halfway angle, and in that state the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89)
can be closed, the distance between the rear surface of the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 86) and the front surface of the game board 13 is shortened, which may interfere with the game.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by adopting a configuration that suppresses the rotation of the front claw member 620 due to the load from the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89), the multi-function When the cover member 171 and the front regulating claw member 630 abut against each other, the front frame 14 is prevented from being closed. As a result, it is possible to make the store clerk who is performing the work of closing the front frame 14 aware that the board support device 600 is not in the fixed state.

Upon noticing this, the clerk pushes the game board 13 until the board surface support device 600 is in a fixed state. You can stabilize the distance from the front.

In addition, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 135(a), the multifunctional cover member 171 provided on the front frame 14 and the restricting front claw member 171 are in a state immediately before the rotation front claw member 620 is fixed. Depending on the manner of contact of the member 630, it is unlikely that the board surface support device 600 will reach the fixed state, or that the board surface support device 600 will not reach the fixed state and will be stabilized at an incomplete angle. The board support device 600 reaches a fixed state).

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the multifunctional cover member 171 projects to a position where it can contact the front regulation claw member 630 when the front frame 14 is in the closed position, and in the state shown in FIG. 135(a), The pre-regulation claw member 630 is configured so that the posture is not regulated by the regulation bar 615 .

In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 135(a), the contact between the rear surface of the rear side extension plate 621c and the game board 13 is released, and the rotation of the pre-rotation claw member 620 is not restricted by the game board 13. None.

That is, when a downward load is applied to the pre-regulation pawl member 630 in a state immediately before the pre-rotation pawl member 620 is fixed, the tilting operation of the front side end portion of the pre-rotation pawl member 620 is allowed. there is

As a result, when the game board 13 is placed at the position just before the board surface support device 600 is fixed (for example, when the clerk's force to push the game board 13 is slightly insufficient, 9
To solve the situation that the front frame 14 does not close even when it is installed stably in the splitting direction, and in this case, the multifunctional cover member 171 arranged on the front frame 14 to the board surface support device 600
When a load is applied to the board support device 600, the load can change the board support device 600 into a fixed state.

Therefore, the workability of fixing the game board 13 to the board support device 600 can be improved. In this embodiment, the game board 13 is placed on the board support device 600 in the released state so that the back surface of the game board 13 and the inclined extension plate 643 of the board support device 600 are in contact (see FIG. 1).
34(a)), the game board 13 can be fixed by pushing the game board 13 to the rear side. That is, the post-rotation pawl member 640 is displaced by the game board 13, the pre-rotation pawl member 620 is rotated accordingly, and the board support device 600 is changed to the fixed state. According to this method, since a downward load is not applied to the front side end portion of the pre-regulating pawl member 630, the state of the board support device 600 can be changed from the released state to the fixed state with little resistance.

In the state shown in FIG. 135(a), the front surface of the game board 13 and the surface of the hanging back plate portion 621d of the board support device 600 facing the game board 13 come into contact with each other in the front-rear direction. In this state, the game board 13
moves (tilts) toward the front side, it moves (tilts) while pushing aside the hanging back plate portion 621d. is given as a resistance against movement (tilting) of the game board 13 toward the front side. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the game board 13 moves (tilts) toward the front side in the state shown in FIG. 135(a). Therefore, when a lower board support device 600 (see FIGS. 136 to 139), which will be described later, applies a load to the game board 13, the game board 13
can be suppressed from moving (tilting) toward the front side.

Between the state shown in FIG. 135(a) and the state shown in FIG. 135(b), the front regulating pawl member 630 is tilted by the urging force of the torsion spring NBa, and the non-resisting portion 634b is disposed facing the regulating rod 615. (See FIG. 135(b)). In this state, when the game board 13 moves (tilts) to the front side and the game board 13 pushes the hanging back plate portion 621d to rotate the pre-rotation claw member 620, the first shaft member P61 is the center. In the direction along the circular arc, the non-resisting portion 634b abuts against the regulation bar 615, and the resistance against movement (tilting) of the game board 13 to the front side increases accordingly.

As a result, between the state shown in FIG. 135(a) and the state shown in FIG. 135(b),
It is possible to reduce the possibility that the game board 13 moves (tilts) to the front side. Therefore, when a lower board support device 600 (see FIGS. 136 to 139), which will be described later, applies a load to the game board 13, the vicinity of the upper end of the game board 13 moves (tilts) toward the front side due to the reaction. can be suppressed.

Also, the non-resistance portion 634b of the curved surface 634 is in the state shown in FIG.
135(b), a curved surface whose radius gradually increases around the second shaft member P62 is formed.

135(a), the inclined extension plate 633 is pushed rearward by the multifunctional cover member 171, and the pre-rotation claw member 620 rotates to rotate the second shaft member P62.
is displaced, the non-resisting portion 634b and the regulating rod 615 are momentarily separated from each other. Therefore, the resistance applied to the front regulating pawl member 630 from the regulating rod 615 is momentarily reduced, and the front regulating pawl member 630 vigorously approaches the hanging rear plate portion 621d due to the biasing force of the torsion spring NBa. The state changes to the state shown in (b).

Therefore, as in this embodiment, in the fixed state of the board support device 600 shown in FIG. 135(a), the front frame 14 is set to the closed position in the state immediately before the board support device 600 is fixed, so that the multifunctional cover member 171 can be replaced by the front regulating claw member 630 or the inclined extension plate 633. , and then the board support device 600 can be brought into a fixed state.

In this embodiment, when the game board 13 is not fixed to the board support device 600, the front frame 14 can be arranged at the closed position regardless of the state of the board support device 600.
That is, in a state in which the back side surface of the back side extension plate 621c does not contact the game board 13 and the rotation of the front claw member 620 is not restricted by the game board 13, the board surface support device 600 and the multifunctional cover member 171 134(a) to the state shown in FIG. 135(a). Therefore, even when the game board 13 is not arranged (for example, when it is desired to temporarily close the front frame 14 when replacing the board surface), it is possible to avoid restricting the closing of the front frame 14. , can improve the work efficiency of workers.

When the board support device 600 is changed from the fixed state to the released state, the inclined extension plate 633
is pulled upward in the front direction to rotate the front regulating pawl member 630 against the biasing force of the torsion spring NBa. At this time, the load received from the regulating rod 615 is small (the curved surface 634 and the regulating rod 6
15 are not in contact with each other), the front regulation pawl member 630 can be rotated with a light force,
By continuing the rotation as it is, the board support device 600 can be brought into the released state.

When the board support device 600 is released while the game board 13 is fixed, the game board 13 is pushed forward by the displaced post-rotation claw member 640 (see FIG. 134(a)). Therefore, the workability of removing the game board 13 can be improved compared to the case where the front and rear positions of the game board 13 do not change when the board support device 600 is in the released state.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 129(a) and 134(a), in the released state, the game board 1
3 abuts on the lower surface of the back-side extension plate 621c of the board support device 600. As shown in FIG. This eliminates the risk of the game board 13 falling forward when both the upper and lower board support devices 600 are in the released state.

It should be noted that the upper and lower board support devices 600 can be switched between the released state and the fixed state one by one. Here, in the configuration in which the game board 13 moves back and forth as the state of the board support device 600 changes, as in the present embodiment, if the board support device 600 is operated one by one, the front and rear positions of the game board 13 will not match up and down. , the load applied to the game board 13 may become excessive.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the operation of the pre-regulation claw member 630, the pre-rotation claw member 620, and the post-rotation claw member 64, which are operated when the board support device 600 is brought into the released state, are controlled.
0 behavior is inconsistent. In other words, as shown in FIGS. 135(a) and 135(b), the pre-rotation pawl member 6 supporting the game board 13 is larger than the amount by which the pre-regulation pawl member 630 is displaced.
20 and the amount by which the post-rotation pawl member 640 is displaced is smaller.

Therefore, when the pre-regulation claw member 630 is displaced to such an extent that the pre-regulation claw member 630 does not return to the fixed state (to the extent that the return is regulated by the regulation rod 615), the pre-rotation claw member 620 and the post-rotation claw member 640 are displaced. Since the amount of displacement can be suppressed, it is possible to suppress the deviation of the front-rear position of the game board 13 at the portion supported by the upper and lower board support devices 600 . Therefore, the load applied to the game board 13 can be suppressed.

Further, the same effect is produced because the post-rotation pawl member 640 is rotatably supported by the pre-rotation pawl member 620 . That is, from the fixed state (see FIG. 135(b)) to the released state (see FIG. 13)
4(a)), the post-rotation pawl member 640 can be displaced in the direction of widening the angle between the pre-rotation pawl member 620 and the post-rotation pawl member 640 against the biasing force of the torsion spring NBb. It is said that

Therefore, compared with the displacement amount of the pre-rotation pawl member 620, since the displacement amount of the game board 13 pushed out by the post-rotation pawl member 640 can be suppressed, 13 can be prevented from shifting in the front-rear position. As a result, the game board 1
The load applied to 3 can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 136 to 139, the relationship between the board support device 600 arranged on the lower side and the front frame 14 will be described. Figures 136 to 139 are CXXXVI-
It is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine 8010 taken along line CXXXVI. 136 to 139, the front frame 14 is illustrated in a simple shape and the closed state of the front frame 14 is illustrated.

136 shows the released state of the board support device 600, FIG. 137 shows the fixed state of the board support device 600, and FIG. 139 shows the rotated state, the state immediately before the board support device 600 is fixed, and the thickness of the game board 13 supported by the board support device 600 is shown in phantom lines. be done.

136 to 139, the relationship between the board support device 600 and the opening/closing restricting portion 159 fixed to the front frame 14 will be described. To facilitate understanding, FIGS. 136 and 1
138 and 139, the opening/closing regulating portion 159 cross-sectionally viewed at 37 is illustrated by imaginary lines.

As shown in FIG. 136, when the board support device 600 is in the released state, if the front frame 14 is placed in the closed position (see FIG. 136), the interference between the open/close regulating portion 159 and the board support device 600 is avoided. However, the game board 13 and the operating portion back member 155 above the opening/closing restricting portion 159 interfere with each other. Therefore, in the released state of the board support device 600, the game board 13
While the front frame 14 is allowed to be closed when it is disengaged, the closing of the front frame 14 is restricted when the game board 13 is arranged.

As shown in FIG. 137, when the board support device 600 is in a fixed state, if the front frame 14 is placed in the closed position (see FIG. 137), the interference between the opening/closing regulation part 159 and the board support device 600 is avoided. . In addition, by arranging the game board 13 on the back side compared to the arrangement when the board support device 600 is in the released state, the game board 13 interferes with the operation part back member 155 above the opening/closing regulation part 159. is avoided. Therefore, in the fixed state of the board support device 600, the front frame 14 is permitted to be closed regardless of whether the game board 13 is present or not.

As shown in FIG. 138, when the pre-rotation claw member 620 of the board support device 600 is rotated from the released state to the fixed state side by a predetermined angle, the front frame 14 is arranged at the closed position (FIG. 1
38), the opening/closing restricting portion 159 and the inclined extension plate 633 of the board support device 600 interfere with each other.

In this state, even if an attempt is made to rotate the pre-rotation claw member 620 by applying a load toward the rear side to the inclined extension plate 633, the action of the regulating rod 615 prevents the pre-rotation claw member 620 from rotating in the direction of rotation. (clockwise direction in FIG. 138) and the rotational direction of the front regulating pawl member 630 (
Since the reaction force becomes excessive due to the counterclockwise direction) being the opposite direction, it is difficult with a normal load as described above (see FIG. 134(b)).

Therefore, in the state of the board support device 600 shown in FIG. 138, regardless of the presence or absence of the game board 13, closing the front frame 14 is restricted. In particular, when the game board 13 is arranged, there is a possibility that the lower end of the front side of the game board 13 and the rear side extension plate 621c may come into contact with each other in the vertical direction (see FIG. 138). The effect of restricting the closing of the frame 14 is strengthened.

As shown in FIG. 139, when the pre-rotation claw member 620 of the board support device 600 is in a state immediately before being fixed, when the front frame 14 is placed in the closed position (see FIG. 139), the open/close restricting portion 159 and the , and the inclined extension plate 633 of the board surface support device 600 interfere with each other.

Further, in this state, when an attempt is made to rotate the pre-rotation claw member 620 by applying a load toward the rear side to the inclined extension plate 633, the action of the regulating rod 615 causes the pre-rotation claw member 620 to rotate. direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 138) and the rotational direction of the front regulating pawl member 630 (
8 (counterclockwise direction) is not reversed, and it can be easily pushed in with a normal load as described above (see FIG. 135(a)).

Therefore, in the state of the board surface support device 600 shown in FIG.
can be fixed, allowing the front frame 14 to be closed.

140 is an exploded front perspective view of the outer frame 11 and inner frame 12, and FIG. 141 is an exploded rear perspective view of the outer frame 11 and inner frame 12. FIG. 140 and 141 illustrate a state in which the cover member that closes the rear surface of the ball shooting unit 112a and the back pack 92 is disassembled from the inner frame 12. As shown in FIG.

The detailed structure of the ball launching unit 112a will now be described with reference to FIGS. 142-148. FIG. 142(a) is a front perspective view of the ball launching unit 112a, and FIG. 142(b)
is a rear perspective view of the ball launching unit 112a. Figures 143(a) and 143(b) are exploded front perspective views of the ball firing unit 112a. In addition, FIG. 143(a) shows a disassembled state after the cover member 721 is opened, and FIG. 143(b) shows a state in which the ball receiving member 731 is disassembled and then turned back and forth. . That is, in FIG. 143(b),
Only the ball receiving member 731 is illustrated on the rear side.

As shown in FIGS. 142 and 143, the ball shooting unit 112a includes a base member 710 made of metal or die-cast, and a base member 711 made of resin attached to the base member 710. The closed state (see FIG. 142(a)) in which the front surface of the base member 710 is partially covered (see FIG. 142(a)), and the open state (see FIG. 23 (
a) See) a ball feeding device 720 having a cover member 721 pivotably supported between
and are mainly provided.

The base member 710 is a member that supports the cover member 721. The base member 711 is engaged with the base member 710 by a hook or the like that is elastically deformable, is disposed on the front side of the base member 710, and is formed of synthetic resin or the like. , a firing solenoid 701 disposed on the front side, a firing rail 730 that guides the ball P8 shot by the firing solenoid 701 toward the game area, and a ball receiving member 731 to regulate the posture. a fastening portion 716 which is cylindrically projected toward the front side at an intermediate position of the bulging portion 716a which bulges in a straight line toward the front side from the base member 710 and into which a screw for fastening and fixing the ball receiving member 731 is screwed; mounting holes 718 and a plurality of positioning protrusions 719 .

The base member 711 has a pair of receiving portions 712 through which the rod-shaped portion 722 is inserted at the right corner, and a locking portion 7 that is bored to lock the hook portion 723 on the opposite side of the receiving portions 712 in the left-right direction.
13, a projecting portion 714 protruding toward the front side close to the right side of the locking portion 713, and an attraction force generating solenoid 741 is arranged to face the attraction force generating solenoid 741 when the cover member 721 is closed (see FIG. 142(a)). and a defect determination convex portion 715 provided convexly.

The protruding portion 714 is a portion that covers the upper surface side of the cutting metal member 725 when the cover member 721 is closed (see FIG. 142(a)), and extends to the left inner side of the ball passage opening 724 when the cover member 721 is closed. A facing plane 714a formed as a plane facing the side surface 724c and parallel to the left inner side surface 724c, and a surface on the left-right opposite side of the facing plane 714a and inclined rightward toward the rear side. and a surface 714b.

When the attraction force generating solenoid 741 is fastened and fixed to the cover member 721, the malfunction determination convex portion 715 does not contact the attraction force generating solenoid 741, but the fastening force generating solenoid 741 is loosened ( It abuts against the cover member 721 when it is floating above the cover member 721 , and is formed with a protrusion height that restricts the rotation of the cover member 721 .

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the cover member 721 from being closed when the fastening of the attractive force generating solenoid 741 is loosened. It is possible to make the user aware that the fastening of the generation solenoid 741 is loose. Therefore, it is possible to perform repair (fasten and fix the attracting force generating solenoid 741 to the cover member 721 without loosening) before a problem occurs in the ball shooting unit 112a.

The ball feeding device 720 includes a cover member 721 rotatably and axially supported by a base member 711,
Switching is controlled to change the state between a regulation state that regulates the flow of the ball P8 that has entered the inside of the cover member 721 and a permitting state that permits the flow of the ball P8 (see FIG. 144) onto the launch rail 730. and a device 740 .

The cover member 721 is made of a light-transmitting resin material and formed into a cup shape with the back side (the front side of the paper surface in the posture of FIG. a bar P
8 (see FIG. 144). a cutting metal member 725 and a shaft rod portion 72 that pivotally supports a ball guide arm member 742 of a switching device 740
6 and .

The switching device 740 includes an attraction force generating solenoid 741 fastened and fixed to the cover member 721 and a synthetic resin member having one end loosely fitted to the shaft portion 726 .
A ball guide arm member 742 that rotates and changes its posture depending on whether or not 41 generates a magnetic force, and a sheet metal member that is locked to the upper surface of the ball guide arm member 742 and is attracted to the attracting force generating solenoid 741. A metal plate 743, a guide slanted portion 744 which is a part of the ball guide arm member 742 and which is disposed below the ball passage opening 724 and which is inclined downward as it moves away from the ball passage opening 724, and upward from the base of the guide slanted portion 744. It is extended by a distance that can accommodate the ball P8, and the extended end is the axial rod portion 72
6, and a regulating projecting portion 745 projecting toward the ball passage opening 724 along a plane orthogonal to 6.

The ball passage opening 724 is an opening that forms a passage through which the ball P8 (see FIG. 144) can be guided.
a, and a rib portion 724b which is arranged above the flow-down plate portion 724a so as to face it and which extends downward from the upper surface of the ball passage opening 724 in a rib-like manner, the extending tip surface of which is inclined downward toward the back side,
A left inner side surface 724 that is continuous with the left end of the flow-down plate portion 724a and has a surface formed along the vertical direction.
and c. With these configurations, the ball P8 that has flowed into the ball passage opening 724 flows down toward the rear and rightward.

In the closed state of the cover member 721 (see FIG. 142(a)), when the ball P8 (see FIG. 144) enters the ball passage opening 724, the ball P8 comes into contact with the inclined surface 714b. It flows down to the back side while being displaced to the right along. Therefore, sphere P8
flows downward from the cutting metal member 725 in a lateral direction, so that the cutting metal member 7
25 is arranged in such a manner as to protrude inside the ball passage opening 724, collision between the ball P8 and the cutting metal member 725 can be prevented.

The firing rail 730 is a rail member that extends upward from the middle position of the base member 710 toward the left side. Ball P8 (Fig. 14) near the lower end of the rail member.
4) are arranged at intervals shorter than the diameter of the ball receiving member 731 .

The ball receiving member 731 is a long plate member that is regulated in a posture in which the extending direction of the launch rail 730 and the elongated direction are parallel, and that is fastened and fixed to the base member 710. A through hole 731a formed as an elongated hole along the direction and through which a fastening screw is passed.
Similarly to the bulging portion 716a, it is formed in a straight line (a straight line passing through the through hole 731a and facing the long hole direction of the through hole 731a). and a regulating groove 731b formed with a groove depth slightly larger than the protrusion height.

When the ball receiving member 731 is fastened to the base member 710, the position of the through hole 731a to be fastened together with the fastening portion 716 is selected.
6a can be slid along the inflated straight line, thereby allowing the sphere P8 (Fig. 14
4) can be adjusted (the distance from the plunger 702). Therefore, by adjusting the position of the ball receiving member 731, the firing strength of the ball P81 (the operation handle 51
(see FIG. 86)) can be easily adjusted.
Since the regulating groove 731b of the ball receiving member 731 is guided by the bulging portion 716a, the posture of the ball receiving member 731 can be maintained unchanged.

The firing rail 730 is formed by bending a metal plate to have a substantially M-shaped cross section, and has a rolling plate portion 730a formed to have a substantially V-shaped cross section and extending obliquely upward to the left, and a rolling plate portion 730a. It has mounting plate portions 730b and 730c hanging down from the front and rear sides of the plate portion 730a.
0b and 730c are attached to the base member 710 with screws inserted through a plurality of (two in this embodiment) attachment holes 732 formed.

A rail guard 733 made of a synthetic resin material is provided in the longitudinal direction between the mounting plate portions 730b and 730c to prevent noise and vibration caused by contact between the metal rail and the metal game ball. suppressed.

The rolling plate portion 730a has a rolling surface that has a substantially V-shaped cross section, and is shaped like a ball P8 (FIG. 146(b)
)) are configured to guide the sphere P8 upward by contacting two front and rear portions on the peripheral surface of ).

FIGS. 144(a) to 144(c) are front views of the ball launching unit 112a showing in chronological order how the ball is delivered by the ball delivery device 720. FIG. 144(a) to 144
In (c), illustration of the cover member 721 is omitted for easy understanding.

144(a), the switching device 740 of the ball feeding device 720 is in the regulated state (the power supply to the attracting force generating solenoid 741 is stopped and the ball guide arm member 742 is lowered by gravity). , the regulating projecting portion 745 is arranged at a position corresponding to the back side open end of the ball passage opening 724, contacts the game ball P8 that has entered the ball passage opening 724, and flows down from the back side open end. is regulated.

Next, as shown in FIG. 144(b), when the switching device 740 is changed to the allowable state (state in which power is supplied to the attracting force generating solenoid 741 and the ball guide arm member 742 is raised), the regulating protruding portion 745 retreats above the sphere, and the restriction on the flow of the sphere P8 is released, so that the sphere P8 flows above the guide inclined portion 744. As shown in FIG. In this state, the sphere P8 abuts against the front side wall of the base member 711 to prevent it from further flowing down, and stays on the upper surface of the guide slope 744 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 144(c), the ball guide arm member 742 returns to the regulated state, so that the ball P8 riding on the guide slope portion 744 descends to a position where it does not come into contact with the front side wall of the base member 711. be done. As a result, the ball P8 is guided to the back side according to the inclination of the guide inclined portion 744 and is guided to the launch rail 730. As shown in FIG.

Since the state of the ball guide arm member 742 in FIG. 144(c) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 144(a), even in the state shown in FIG. flow is regulated. Thus, balls can be fed to launch rail 730 one ball at a time. The ball P8 entering the ball passage opening 724 is a ball supplied from an opening formed at the downstream end of the upper tray 17 (see FIG. 86) and stored in the upper tray 17. be.

145 is a front perspective view of the cutting metal member 725. FIG. The cutting metal member 725 is a metal plate member fastened and fixed to the cover member 721, and includes a through hole 725a through which a screw to be screwed into the cover member 721 can be inserted, and a flow-down plate portion 724a. A cut with an acute angle is formed between the lower blade portion 725b having an upper side substantially along the upper surface of the lower blade portion 725b, and the same plate as the plate on the proximal side of the lower blade portion 725b. Upper blade portion 72 extending from
5c and .

The upper blade portion 725c is formed such that the tip thereof is inclined toward the back side more than the lower blade portion 725b, and the lower side projects upward from the flow-down plate portion 724a. The lower edge of the upper blade portion 725c slopes downward toward the proximal side (left side), and the upper edge of the lower blade portion 725b slopes upward toward the proximal side (left side). That is, the upper blade portion 725c and the lower blade portion 725b form a tapered shape when viewed from the front.

The notch between the upper blade portion 725c and the lower blade portion 725b is for cutting a string member such as a kite string fixed to the ball. Next, referring to FIGS. 146 and 147, the sphere P
A description will be given of how the yarn Y8 is treated when the yarn Y8 is fixed to the yarn 8 and entered.

FIG. 146(a) is a front view of the ball launching unit 112a, and FIG. 146(b) is a front view of FIG.
FIG. 147(a) is a partial top view of the ball launching unit 112a viewed in the direction of arrow CXLVIb in 46(a), FIG. 147(a) is a front view of the ball launching unit 112a, and FIG. 147(b) is FIG. 147(a). FIG. 148 is a front perspective view of the cutting metal member 725, showing the relationship between the thread Y8 and the cutting metal member 725 in the state of FIG.
12a, a partial front view of an inner rail 61 and an outer rail 62. FIG. 146 and 14
7, the illustration of some components of the ball launching unit 112a is omitted to facilitate understanding.

As shown in FIGS. 146(a) and 146(b), the ball P guided to the launch rail 730
8 stays in contact with the left lower edge of the ball receiving member 731 (see FIG. 146(a)). From this state, the firing solenoid 701 is energized, causing the plunger 702 to protrude vigorously. , a launch force is applied to the ball P8, and the ball P8 is launched along the launch rail 730 (see FIG. 147(a)).

Here, the ball P8 is launched with one end of the string Y8 fixed to the ball P8, and the other end of the string Y8 left at hand is moved to pull the string Y8 while the ball P8 is in the game area. , loosening, etc., is known to cause the ball P8 to be repeatedly detected by the winning opening.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the thread Y8 fixed to the ball P8 can be cut using the momentum of the ball P8. More specifically, when the ball P8 is placed at the firing standby position (see FIG. 146(a)), the thread Y8 rides on the upper surface of the flow-down plate portion 724a in such a manner that it is drawn to the right as it goes toward the rear side. (See FIG. 146(b)).

When the ball P8 is launched in this state, it passes under the flow-down plate portion 724a and the launch rail 730
When the yarn Y8 moves by being pulled by the ball P8 rolling on the upper blade It enters the lower side of the portion 725c and enters the cut formed by the lower blade portion 725b and the upper blade portion 725c.

While the player is gripping the front end (the other end) of the string Y8, a load is applied to one end of the string Y8 fixed to the ball P8 as the ball P8 is launched, causing the string Y8 to is subjected to a large tensile force. As a result, the thread Y8 is pressed against the cut formed by the lower blade portion 725b and the upper blade portion 725c, and is finally cut (see FIG. 148). As a result, it is possible to prevent a fraudulent act of repeatedly detecting the ball P8 in the prize winning opening.

If the launch strength of the ball P8 is weak, there is a possibility that the string Y8 will not be cut due to insufficient tensile force applied to the string Y8. The ball flows backward between the rail 61 and the outer rail 62, passes through the foul ball receiving portion 146, flows down the foul ball passage portion 145 (see FIG. 98), and is discharged to the lower tray 50 (see FIG. 86). Therefore, in this state, no matter how much load is applied to the thread Y8, the ball P8 does not pass through the prize-winning opening, so that the fraudulent act of repeatedly detecting the ball P8 in the prize-winning opening can be eliminated.

Next, the rendering operation unit 1000 will be described with reference to FIGS. 149 to 179. FIG. 149 is a front view of the game board 13, FIGS. 150 and 151 are exploded front perspective views of the effect operation unit 1000, and FIG. 152 is an exploded rear perspective view of the effect operation unit 1000. FIG. The game board 13 shown in FIG. 149 is different from the game board 13 shown in FIG. 2 in that the petal motion device 800 is visible from the upper frame portion of the center frame 86. are substantially the same.

A performance operation unit 1000 shown in FIGS. The effect operation unit 1000 includes a petal operation device 800, a side base material 1000S, a substrate cover 1000C, a back plate 1100, and a forward/backward motion unit 900 arranged on the back plate 1100, and the like.

The advance/retreat operation unit 900 vertically moves the petal operation device 800 by the driving force of the drive motor 921 (advance/retreat operation, i.e., movement toward the inside of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 and movement toward the inside of the display area of the third pattern display device 81, movement including at least one of the movement of retracting toward the outside of the display area of the pattern display device 81), and the petal movement device 800 is connected to one end, and the other. is pivotally supported on the back plate 1100 and the arm gear 9
24, a drive-side arm member 910 that rotates by transmitting the drive force of the drive motor 921, and a drive motor 92 that generates the drive force for driving the drive-side arm member 910.
1, a transmission means 920 composed of a plurality of gears for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 921 to the drive side arm member 910, and the drive side arm member 910 slides in the left and right direction in conjunction with the rotational movement of the drive side arm member 910. A thin plate-shaped slide plate 930, a thin plate-shaped second effect member 940 that rotates in conjunction with the sliding motion of the slide plate 930, and a back plate 1100 and a petal motion device on the left and right opposite sides of the drive side arm member 910. and a long plate-shaped driven side arm member 950 connecting the 800 .

Next, the structure of the petal motion device 800 will be described. FIG. 153 shows the petal motion device 80
0, and FIG. 154 is a cross-sectional view of petal motion device 800 taken along line CLIV--CLIV of FIG. In addition, in FIG. 154, the supporting base material 801 is schematically illustrated by imaginary lines.

The petal motion device 800 is configured such that members such as petals 802 are supported by a supporting base material 801 . As shown in FIG. 152, the support base material 801 is arranged on the back side of the petals 802 and the like, and although the overall shape is hidden by other members and is not shown in the drawing, it is made of a resin material and is a substantially rectangular plate. It comprises a shaped portion and a substrate disposed on the back surface of the plate-shaped portion.

A central motor 804 is fixed from the rear side at a position near the upper right portion of the central body portion of the supporting base material 801 , and the drive shaft of the central motor 804 extends forward through a narrow gap formed in the supporting base material 801 . A first gear 804G (see FIG. 156), which will be described later, is fixed to the tip of the projection.

An opening 8 is located slightly below and to the left of the central motor 804 in the central body of the support base 801 .
01P is drilled, is disposed to the right of the opening 801P, and extends rearward in a pair of cylindrical shapes,
A screw insertion portion 801S having an insertion hole inside and a screw insertion hole at the tip portion is integrally formed. Around the screw insertion portion 801S, an arc plate 88 for detection of a loose fitting device 880, which will be described later, is provided.
A doughnut-shaped recessed portion 801D that is recessed from the front side to the back side in a donut shape through which 0d can pass.
(see FIG. 152) is formed.

Central motor 804 of support base 801 (see FIG. 152) to which central motor 804 is fixed
An oil damper 805 is fixed from the front side below (see FIG. 156).

A decorative member 807 is arranged and fixed on the front side of the supporting base material 801 so as to cover the peripheral area from the front while opening the vertically long, roughly oval area in the central portion. The decorative member 807 is divided into a horizontally long upper portion forming an upper end region and a substantially U-shaped lower portion forming a region below the upper end portion.

In this embodiment, the support base 801 as a whole has a shape that extends slightly vertically.
If the support base 801 is formed in a shape that is long in the vertical direction rather than in the shape that is long in the horizontal direction, the operation space can be reduced.

At this time, the central motor 804 and the oil damper 805 are respectively concentrically arranged with a second gear 830G and a third gear 810 overlapping the position of the opening 801P as will be described later.
Since it is interlockingly connected (linked) to G, it can be arranged at any position as long as it is on the outer periphery of the second gear 830G and the third gear 810G and does not interfere with each other. They are arranged to the right through the 2nd gear 830G and the 3rd gear 810G (see FIG. 156).

As a result, as shown in FIG. 154, by collecting the weight on the right half of the petal motion device 800 that is supported in a slightly tilted posture toward the front side, it is possible to prevent the left half on the opposite side from sagging downward. can. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gap between the support base 801 and the drive-side arm member 910 (see FIG. 152) connected to the left half of the support base 801. driving force can be appropriately transmitted to the support base 801 by

155 is an exploded front perspective view of the petal motion device 800, and FIG. 156 is an exploded rear perspective view of the petal motion device 800. FIG. In addition, in FIGS. 155 and 156, illustration of the supporting base material 801 is omitted in order to facilitate understanding.

As shown in FIGS. 155 and 156, the petals 802 are made of resin molded to imitate the shape of one of the five petals separated from each other, which constitutes a hibiscus flower in an open state as a whole. , and has a plate-like flat plate member 803 on the back side.

157(a) is an exploded front perspective view of the petal 802, the flat plate member 803 and the slide member 820, and FIG. 157(b) is an exploded rear perspective view of the petal 802, the flat plate member 803 and the slide member 820. FIG.

Each of the petals 802 has a substantially arcuate front shape that extends in the radial direction in the arranged state, and has a shape that gently bulges forward from the center to the outer periphery (FIG. 15).
4).

The surface of the petal 802 is formed with irregular unevenness including a large number of wrinkles, and the periphery also has an irregularly uneven shape when viewed from the front. Strictly speaking, the five petals 802 do not have the same shape, and although there are slight differences in unevenness and the like, they are formed in roughly the same shape. Most of the petals 802 have a specific color (red), but are almost transparent, and the outer peripheral edge is darkened in the specific color (red) without forming a particular boundary with the inner region. Coloring is done.

Each petal 802 is integrally formed with a threaded portion 802S extending cylindrically rearward and having a screw hole inside, at two locations near the outer circumference of the rear side surface of each petal 802 and at the center portion in the radial direction. there is

The petals 802 are arranged on the side of the rounded tip from the position where they are fastened to the flat plate member 803 (the counterclockwise side when viewed from the front, the right side of the paper in FIG. 157(a)).
The front side portion 802b arranged on the side of the sharp tip shape from 2a (the clockwise side when viewed from the front, the left side of the paper in FIG. 157(a)) is arranged on the front side. In other words, the front side 802b is positioned closer to the rear cover 886 of the loose fit device 880 than the rear side 802a.

The front side 802b of each petal 802 is superimposed on the front side of the rear side 802a of one adjacent petal 802, and the rear side 802a is superimposed on the rear side of the front side 802b of the other adjacent petal 802, thus five petals. petals 802 are arranged so that the tips on the inner peripheral side are directed toward the same center and gathered.

The petal 802 has a shape in which the rear side portion 802a and the front side portion 802b are displaced in the front and rear directions, so that the rear side portion 802a and the front side portion 802b are separated from each other in the concentrated position (see FIGS. 174 and 175).
Since the positional relationship between b and b can be superimposed in the front and back, the difference in shape (difference in size) of the entire petal 802 between the gathered position and the fully opened position (see FIGS. 178 and 179) is made noticeable. be able to.

The five petals 802 as a whole have a disk-shaped (doughnut-shaped) posterior side surface with a circular opening S1 in the center (see FIG. 155).

The flat plate member 803, as shown in FIGS.
02, they are long plate-shaped resin members separated from each other.

Each of the flat plate members 803 has a front shape extending from the center to the outer peripheral side in a substantially rectangular shape in the arranged state, and further has a shape in which the outer peripheral edge extends forward.

Also, the vicinity of the opening S1 (near the inner circumference) on the rear side surface of the flat plate member 803 in the arranged state
A pair of threaded portions 803S extending cylindrically rearward and having screw holes therein are integrally formed at positions spaced apart in the circumferential direction (transverse direction of the flat plate member 803).

The screw-in portions 803S are formed on both side walls in the circumferential direction (transverse direction) of each flat plate member 803 so as to be substantially flush with each other. A slide rib 803a which is perpendicular to the straight line connecting 803S and extends rearward from the rear side surface of the flat plate member 803 in a rectangular shape extends to both sides along the surface direction circumscribing the peripheral surface of the screw-in portion 803S. , formed integrally with the peripheral wall of the screw-in portion 803S.

As shown in FIG. 157(b), on the rear side of each flat plate member 803, there are screw insertion holes at two locations corresponding to the screw-insertion portions 802S of the petals 802.
A screw insertion portion 803H having an insertion hole for positioning the screw insertion portion 802S is integrally formed.

The screw insertion portion 8 of the corresponding petal 802 is inserted into the screw insertion portion 803H of each flat plate member 803 .
02S is abutted from the front and screws are screwed in from the rear side, whereby each flat plate member 803 is fixed to the corresponding petal 802, respectively.

158 is a front view of the slit member 810, and FIG. 159 is a front perspective view of the slit member 810. FIG. 155 and 156 will be referred to in the description of FIGS. 158 and 159 as appropriate. A slit member 810 is arranged behind the flat plate member 803 as shown in FIGS.

As shown in FIG. 158, the slit member 810 is a plate-shaped member made of resin having a front shape in which five similar shaped portions are continuous in an annular shape, and a circular opening 811 is bored in the center. As shown in FIG. 159, a substantially cylindrical front side peripheral wall portion 812 and a rear side peripheral wall portion 813 (see FIG. 156) extend from the periphery of the circular opening 811 in both front and rear directions.

Returning to FIG. 156, description will be made. On the rear side peripheral wall portion 813, two adjacent two out of five equally spaced places in the circumferential direction and one place in the middle of the three places excluding the two are cylindrically shaped in the front and rear direction. A threaded portion 813S having a threaded hole is formed integrally therewith.
3a is extended. The rear peripheral wall portion 813 is configured to protrude in the outer diameter direction at five locations corresponding to the screw-in portion 813S and the positioning boss 813a. One of the purposes of this bulging portion is to suppress sliding friction, the details of which will be described later.

The slit member 810 has a central slit 814 and side slits 815 as shown in FIG. Each of the central slits 814 is formed to linearly extend further outward from a position slightly outside the circular opening 811 . However, in the radial direction D11 of the circular opening 811, the central slit 81
4 extends along a direction D12 inclined by an angle θ11 (approximately 15° in the pachinko machine 8010) counterclockwise when viewed from the front.

Both side slits 815 are formed to extend in parallel on both sides of the central slit 814 with a slight gap.

In this manner, a set of three slits, that is, the central slit 814 and the two-side slits 815 on both sides thereof, is formed at five points in the circumferential direction at equal intervals (72° intervals). Note that each end of the central slit 814 and both side slits 815 may be formed in a round shape (semicircular shape) when viewed from the front, or may be formed in a rectangular shape.

In the present embodiment, one end of the outer edge of the two-side slit 815 located on the outermost side in the set of these three slits, that is, among the four corners of the three slits, the two corners on the smaller diameter side are the two-side slits. It has a substantially rectangular shape extending in the direction of extension of 815 (with a rectangular cut). This rectangular extension (cut) is for inserting the slide rib 803a of the flat plate member 803. As shown in FIG.

The slit member 810 is connected to the side ends of the flat plate on which the central slit 814 and both side slits 815 are formed, and has an outer diameter smaller than the outer peripheral side ends of the central slit 814 and both side slits 815. is provided with an arc plate 816 formed in an arc shape whose center coincides with the center of the circular opening 811 .

As a result, the arc plate 816 enhances the rigidity of the flat plate on which the central slit 814 and both side slits 815 are formed. Therefore, the central slit 814 and the side slits 81
It is possible to suppress deformation of the flat plate on which 5 is formed in the circumferential direction and the axial direction.

Also, as described above, as shown in FIG.
Since the sets each extend along the direction D12 inclined with respect to the radial direction D11 of the circular opening 811, the five sets of central slits 814 and the two side slits 815 are arranged so as to come together inwardly. , are arranged more densely, and this also results in the slit member 81
0 has a compact profile.

In other words, if five sets of central slits 814 and two side slits 815 are circular openings 811
In the case of being arranged and formed so as to extend along the inclined direction D12 as described above, rather than in the case of being arranged and formed so as to extend radially along this radial direction D11 without being inclined with respect to the radial direction D11 of the , the five sets of central slits 814 and both side slits 815 can be laid out more densely, and the outer peripheral shape of the slit member 810 can be made smaller accordingly.

As shown in FIGS. 155 and 156 , slide members 820 are arranged in the central slit 814 and both side slits 815 from behind the slit member 810 . slide member 8
As shown in FIG. 157, reference numeral 20 denotes a resin member having a long plate-like front shape. , a central portion that bulges out with a greater thickness than the effecting portion at a position between the extending portions, a screw insertion hole 821 that is drilled in the extending portion, and the slide member 820 from the center to the front. A guide pin 822 protruding on the side and inserted through the central slit 814 in the assembled state, and a slide pin 823 fixed so as to protrude from the center of the slide member 820 to the rear side and pass through the slide member 820 back and forth. .

As shown in FIGS. 155 and 156, the sliding member 820 is positioned so that the central slit 814 and the longitudinal direction of the slit member 820 intersect each other at right angles with the extending direction of the central slit 814 and the side slits 815 . and the slits 815 on both sides.

On the other hand, in the central slit 814 and both side slits 815 in the slit member 810,
The threaded portion 803S of the flat plate member 803 is inserted from the front side. In the fully inserted state, the threaded portion 803S of the flat plate member 803 protrudes rearward from the rear side surface of the slit member 810 very slightly. In this state, screws with washers (washer head screws) 824 are inserted through the screw insertion holes 821 on both sides of the slide member 820 from the rear side, and are screwed into the screw portions 803S of the plate member 803 and fixed.

As a result, the slide member 820 is moved to the flat plate member 8 with the slit member 810 interposed therebetween.
03 is fixed on the rear side. At this time, the guide pin 822 of the slide member 820 is inserted into the central slit 814 of the slit member 810 with little clearance, and the slide rib 803a of the flat plate member 803 is almost aligned along the corresponding outer edges of the slits 815 on both sides of the slit member 810. inserted without gaps.

As a result, the flat plate member 803 is slidably held in the central slit 814 and both side slits 815 of the slit member 810, and at this time, the flat plate member 803 is held by the guide pin 8.
It is restrained by slide rib 803a so that it slides in a constant outward orientation without turning around 22. As shown in FIG.

160 is a front perspective view of slide member 820 and central motor 804, FIG.
161(b) are rear perspective views of slide member 820 and central motor 804. FIG. Note that the illustration of the fourth gear 880G is omitted in FIG. 161(a). In addition, Fig. 16
155 and 156 will be referred to in the description of 0 and 161 as appropriate.

A rotating plate 830 is further arranged from the rear side of the slit member 810 to which the flat plate member 803 is slidably attached as described above. As shown in FIGS. 160 and 161, the rotating plate 830 is a resin disk having a circular pivot opening 831 in the center.

As shown in FIG. 160, the rotating plate 830 has a peripheral wall extending forward from the peripheral edge of the pivot opening 831 on the front side, and has a guide rail 832 formed around the peripheral wall.

The guide rail 832 has a peripheral wall extending forward from the front side surface of the rotary plate 830, and the peripheral wall
It is formed integrally with the rotating plate 830 so as to extend along the surface direction of the rotating plate 830 so as to be closed in an elongated loop shape when viewed from the front.

The extension height of the peripheral wall of the guide rail 832 is the same as the extension height of the peripheral wall at the peripheral edge of the pivot opening 831 . The width of the inner side of the guide rail 832 is such that the slide pin 823 can be inserted with a slight clearance of play. The edge corner portion at the extending end of the peripheral wall of the guide rail 832 is formed so as to be rounded.

From the position where the guide rail 832 is in contact with the outside of the peripheral wall at the peripheral edge of the pivot opening 831,
It extends clockwise in the front view along a direction substantially intermediate between the tangent line and the normal line of the pivot opening 831, and then arcuately further clockwise in the front view than the intermediate direction. While curving, it extends to a position near the outer circumference of the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 175(a)).

The end of the guide rail 832 on the pivot opening 831 side, that is, the peripheral wall of the portion that contacts the peripheral edge of the pivot opening 831 at the central end, is formed so as to be integrally continuous with the peripheral wall on the peripheral edge of the pivot opening 831. The front end portion thereof protrudes forward from the front end portion of the peripheral wall at the peripheral edge of the pivot opening 831 .

Around the peripheral wall of the pivot opening 831, four more guide rails 832 are formed in the same manner as described above. It extends so as to expand in a spiral shape from the surroundings to the outside.

As shown in FIG. 161, on the rear side of the rotating plate 830, a second gear 830G extending rearward from the peripheral edge of the pivot opening 831 in the form of a peripheral wall and having teeth on its outer periphery is integrally formed. The second gear 830G is arranged so as to mesh with the first gear 804G and is rotationally driven by the central motor 804. As shown in FIG.

The rotating plate 830 is attached so that the pivot opening 831 is fitted to the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 as shown in FIG. 154 . At this time, the rear ends of the five slide pins 823 projecting rearward from the slide member 820 are inserted into the five guide rails 832 (see FIG. 174(c)).

Since the outer peripheral surface of the rear side peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 is locally bulged at five locations as described above, the inner peripheral surface of the pivot opening 831 of the rotary plate 830 is linearly rather than surface-wise. As a result, the pivot opening 831 of the rotary plate 830 is fitted over the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 with little frictional resistance, and the rotary plate 830 is smoothly rotatably supported.

Further behind the second gear 830G, as shown in FIG. 161(a), the second gear 830G
A third gear 810G having a diameter slightly smaller than that of the pivot opening 831 and having a diameter larger than that of the pivot opening 831 is arranged and fixed so as to be concentric, and is arranged so as to mesh with the damper gear 805G of the oil damper 805 .

A circular pivot opening 810a is bored in the center of the third gear 810G.
0a, there are screw insertion holes 810b at positions corresponding to the three screw-in portions 813S in the rear side peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 (see FIG. 156), and at positions corresponding to the two positioning bosses 813a. A positioning hole 810c is drilled in each.

The third gear 810G is arranged so as to overlap the rear side of the second gear 830G fitted on the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810.
Positioning is performed by inserting the positioning boss 813a (see FIG. 156) into the positioning hole 810c, and a screw (not shown) is inserted through the screw insertion hole 810b into the screw portion 813S (see FIG. 1).
56).

As a result, the slit member 810 is linked to the damper gear 805G of the oil damper 805 via the third gear 810G and is braked by the oil damper 805. is held by the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 so as not to come off.

As shown in FIGS. 155 and 156 , a central shaft rotating device 850 is arranged from the front side of the slit member 810 . The central shaft rotating device 850 mainly includes a central shaft member 851 that is fastened and fixed to the support base material 801 (see FIG. 154), and a loose fitting device 880 that is rotatably loosely fitted around the central shaft member 851. Prepare for.

162 is an exploded front perspective view of the center shaft rotating device 850 and loose fit device 880, FIG.
63 is an exploded rear perspective view of the central shaft rotating device 850 and loose fitting device 880. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 162 and 163, the central shaft member 851 includes a shaft portion 852 formed in an incomplete cylindrical shape in which a part of the cylindrical peripheral wall is cut along the axial direction, and a shaft portion 852 of the shaft portion 852. A disk-shaped flange 855 is provided at the front end to increase the diameter, and the shaft portion 852 and the flange 855 are integrally formed.

A central portion of the flange 855 communicates with the inside of the shaft portion 852 and opens in a circular shape, thereby forming a bore portion 856 that penetrates the inside of the shaft portion 852 in the front-rear direction. Around the bore portion 856 on the front side surface of the flange 855, a front side threaded portion 857 having a screw hole inside and a threaded portion 857 on the side of the bore portion 856 from the front side threaded portion 857 are provided at two locations on the left and right sides of the bore portion 856. A holding portion 858 that has a counterbore at a deviated position and is drilled toward the rear side, and two columnar support projections 859 that slightly extend slightly forward are integrally formed. . The front end of the front threaded portion 857 and the base of the support projection 859 have the same extension height.

On the inner peripheral surface of the inner cavity portion 856, there are cylindrically extending along the axial direction of the shaft portion 852 so as to be parallel to two opposing locations, extend further rearward from the rear end of the shaft portion 852, and extend inside. A rear screw-in portion 853 having a screw hole is integrally formed. Further, rear positioning bosses 854 are integrally formed at positions equidistant from both rear screw-in portions 853 on the rear end of the peripheral wall of the shaft portion 852 so as to protrude rearward.

As shown in FIGS. 162 and 163, an LED board 861 is mounted on the front side of the central shaft member 851.
is placed. The LED board 861 is a substantially disc-shaped board having a slightly smaller diameter than the flange 855 of the central shaft member 851 .

A screw insertion hole 862 and a positioning hole 863 are formed in the LED board 861 at positions corresponding to the front screw portion 857 and the front positioning boss 854 of the central shaft member 851, respectively.

The front positioning boss 854 of the central shaft member 851 is inserted into the positioning hole 863 of the LED board 861 for positioning, and the screw is passed through the screw insertion hole 862 of the LED board 861 to the central shaft member 8 .
51 , the LED board 861 is fixed so as to cover the front side of the flange 855 of the central shaft member 851 .

In addition, an insertion hole 864 is formed in the LED board 861 at a position corresponding to the holding portion 858 of the central shaft member 851 and has a size that allows the threaded portion 869 of the central decorative member 868 to be fitted therein.

As shown in FIG. 162, on the front side surface of the LED substrate 861, there are a central point and a number of points arranged at equal intervals on concentric circles extending in multiple (double) directions around this one point. LE
Each D865 is arranged and fixed, and emits light toward the front.

Sideways LEDs 866 are arranged and fixed at a large number of positions arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction near the outer periphery on the front side surface and the rear side surface of the LED board 861, and emit light outward along the radial direction of the LED board 861. It is designed to The lateral LEDs 866 on the front side surface of the LED substrate 861 and the forward LEDs 865 are alternately arranged concentrically. A connector connection portion 867 is arranged and fixed to the rear side surface of the LED substrate 861 so as to face rearward.

A central decorative member 868 is arranged on the front side of the LED substrate 861 . central decorative member 868
, which has a specific color (yellow) but is made of a resin material that is almost transparent, extends from a long plate-shaped base to the back side in a cylindrical shape, and has a screw hole in the center that can be screwed in. A pair of threaded portions 869 are provided.

The threaded portion 869 is arranged at a position corresponding to the insertion hole 864 of the LED board 861 . LE
The insertion hole 864 of the LED board 861 is inserted into the holding portion 858 of the flange 855 with the D board 861 interposed therebetween.
The central decorative member 868 is fastened and fixed to the flange 855 by screwing a screw into the screw-in portion 869 from the rear side of the flange 855 . Thereby, the central decorative member 868 functions as a retainer for the LED substrate 861 .

The loose fitting device 880 includes a small-diameter cylindrical member 881 formed in a flanged cylindrical shape having an inner peripheral surface with an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer peripheral diameter of the shaft portion 852 of the central shaft member 851, and a small-diameter cylindrical member 881 coaxial with the small-diameter cylindrical member 881. A large-diameter cylindrical member 882 formed of a flanged cylindrical shape having an outer peripheral surface with an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the front side peripheral wall portion 812 of the slit member 810, the small-diameter cylindrical member 881 and the large-diameter It mainly includes a body cylindrical member 883 which is a flanged cylindrical member sandwiched between the cylindrical members 882 and rotatably and loosely fitted to the small-diameter cylindrical member 881 and the large-diameter cylindrical member 882 .

The main body cylindrical member 883 is provided with screw-in portions 883S, which extend cylindrically in the front-rear direction and have screw holes therein, integrally at two of the four locations equally spaced in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion. The positioning boss 883a extends from the tip edge of the portion where the threaded portion 883S is not formed among the above-mentioned four portions.

At four locations corresponding to the screw-in portion 883S and the positioning boss 883a, the body cylindrical member 8 is
83 is configured to bulge in the outer diameter direction. In addition, on the main body cylindrical member 883, rib-like projections are projected in the outer diameter direction at the corresponding four intermediate positions in the circumferential direction with a projection length similar to that of the screw-in portion 883S and the positioning boss 883a. Sliding rib 88 extending over
3b is formed.

The flange portion of the main body cylindrical member 883 is formed with an outer shape larger than the outer shape of the LED board 861, and in the assembled state (see FIG. 149), the decorative member 884 covering the LED board 861 from the front side and the decorative member 884 are arranged on the outside. A back cover 886 which is fastened and fixed near the diameter, forms a cup shape with an empty bottom rising toward the front from the outer peripheral side of the fastening portion, abuts on the flange portion of the main body cylindrical member 883 from the rear side, and is fastened and fixed. , are provided.

The back cover 886 is entirely plated (yellow in this pachinko machine 8010) on the front and back surfaces, so that the side surfaces are mirror-finished. Therefore, for example, by reflecting the light of the lateral LEDs 866 arranged on the back side surface of the LED substrate 861 near the outer periphery, it is possible to perform light emission effects.

The decorative member 884 is a member that emits light by being irradiated with light from the LEDs 865 and 866 arranged on the LED substrate 861. The decorative member 884 is shaped like a hibiscus flower and transmits light in a specific color (red). a front side plate portion made of a resin material having a specific property, and a rear side plate portion formed of a colorless and light-transmitting resin material, the rear side plate portion forming a disc shape with a peripheral wall standing upright on the rear side thereof. An opening 885 having a size that allows the central decorative member 868 to be inserted is formed in the central portion.

The body cylindrical member 883 configured in this manner is rotatable relative to the central shaft member 851 . The loose fitting device 880 is fastened and fixed to a fourth gear 880G arranged behind the third gear 810G (see FIG. 156).

On the rear side of the third gear 810G, as shown in FIG. 161(a), a fourth gear 880G having a slightly smaller diameter than the third gear 810G and a larger diameter than the pivot opening 831 is concentrically arranged and fixed.
It is meshed with a pair of intermediate gears 808 that are rotatably supported by the supporting base material 801 and mesh with each other.

One gear of the intermediate gear 808 meshes with the third gear 810G, and the other gear that meshes with the one gear meshes with the fourth gear 880G. That is, the fourth gear 880G is the intermediate gear 8
08 in the opposite direction to the third gear 810G.

A circular pivot opening 880a is bored in the center of the fourth gear 880G, and the pivot opening 880a
0a, screw insertion holes 880b are formed at positions corresponding to the two threaded portions 883S of the main body cylindrical member 883, and positioning holes 880c are formed at positions corresponding to the two positioning bosses 883a. there is

The fourth gear 880G is arranged so as to be superimposed on the rear side of the third gear 810G externally fitted on the main body cylindrical member 883 of the central shaft rotating device 850. 883a (see FIG. 163) is inserted into the positioning hole 880c for positioning, and a screw (not shown) is inserted through the screw insertion hole 880b into the screw portion 883S (FIG. 16).
3) is screwed into place.

As a result, the loose fitting device 880 is interlocked with the damper gear 805G of the oil damper 805 via the third gear 810G and is braked by the oil damper 805, and the fourth gear 880G is prevented from slipping off, and the slit The member 810 is held by the body cylindrical member 883 of the loose fitting device 880 so as not to come off.

The fourth gear 880G includes a detection arc plate 880d extending rearward in an arc around the rotation shaft on the outer peripheral side of the screw insertion hole 880b and the positioning hole 880c. The detection arc plates 880d are arranged at five locations with equal intervals in the circumferential direction.

In the assembled state (see FIG. 154), the detection arc plate 880d is positioned at the doughnut-shaped concave portion 80
1D (see FIG. 152), and is detected by a photocoupler-type detection sensor 801C arranged to detect a member passing through the doughnut-shaped concave portion 801D. That is, in the present embodiment, even if the fourth gear 880G starts rotating from any posture, the detection arc plate 88
The rotation angle corresponding to the arrangement interval of 0d (center angle 72°) can be detected (minimum angle 7
2° detection can be performed, and rotations of 72° or more can be ensured by detection).

Assembly of the central shaft rotating device 850 will be described. The shaft portion 852 of the central shaft member 851 to which the LED substrate 861 is arranged and fixed and the main cylindrical member 883 of the loose fitting device 880 are inserted into the circular opening 811 of the slit member 810 from the front side. When the shaft portion 852 of the central shaft member 851 and the main body cylindrical member 883 of the loose fitting device 880 are fully inserted, their rear ends slightly protrude rearward from the pivot opening 810a of the third gear 810G.

A rear positioning boss 854 projecting further rearward from the rear end of the shaft portion 852 is attached to the support base 801 .
(See FIG. 152) is positioned by inserting it into the positioning notch (not shown), and the rear screw portion 853 projecting further rearward from the rear end of the shaft portion 852 is inserted into the screw insertion portion 801S of the support base 801. The central shaft member 851 is fixed to the support base material 801 by inserting it into the insertion hole and screwing it.

At this time, wiring is connected to the connector connecting portion 867 of the LED board 861, and the wiring is led out rearward through the bore portion 856 of the central shaft member 851 and the opening 801P of the support base 801 (not shown).

With the mounting structure described above, the shaft portion 852 of the central shaft member 851 is fixed to the support base member 801 so as to protrude forward, and as shown in FIG.
The rear side peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 is fitted on the outside, and the large diameter cylindrical member 882 is fitted with the front side peripheral wall portion 8
12 is fitted on the outside.

At this time, the outer peripheral surface of the main body cylindrical member 883 is provided at eight places along the circumferential direction, and the threaded portions 883S,
Since the positioning boss 883a and the sliding rib 883b bulge out locally, the slit member 810 contacts the inner peripheral surface of the rear side peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 linearly rather than surfacely. The rear side peripheral wall portion 813 is fitted around the body cylindrical member 883 with little frictional resistance, and the slit member 810 is smoothly rotatably supported.

FIG. 164 shows the petal motion device 800, the drive side arm member 910 and the driven side arm member 95.
0 and FIG. 165 is a front perspective view of the backplate 1100. FIG. The petal motion device 800 vertically moves (advances and retreats) by receiving a load in the vertical direction from the drive-side arm member 910 . 150 to 15 in the description after FIG.
2 as appropriate.

The back plate 1100 is a laterally elongated rectangular member that is fastened and fixed to the deepest part inside the back case 200 (see FIG. 88) that is fastened and fixed to the back surface of the game board 13. A support column 1110 that protrudes in the front side in a columnar shape, a gear housing portion 1120 that is recessed above the support column 1110 so that a plurality of gears can be accommodated from the front side, and a vertical straight line at the center position of the left and right. The rail fixing portion 1130 arranged in the rail fixing portion 1130
and a supporting long hole 1140 formed as a long hole inclined downward toward the rail fixing portion 1130 on the left and right opposite sides of the supporting column 1110 across the rail.

The support column 1110 is a cylindrical portion that rotatably supports the drive-side arm member 910,
In the vicinity of the outer circumference of the front side end, a screw-in portion 1111 formed as a pair of left and right holes into which a screw can be screwed, and a pair of upper and lower screw portions 1111 on the same plane as the tip edge of the screw-in portion 1111 on the front side. a locating boss 1112 extending into the .

As shown in FIG. 164, the driving side arm member 910 is composed of a long rod-shaped main body member bent in a V-shape when viewed from the rear, and one end thereof is perforated in a circular shape in the front-rear direction and has a support column. 1110, a rotary shaft hole 911 rotatably supported by 1110; A transmission long hole 913 is drilled in a linear long hole shape from the bending point of the long main body member toward the rotation shaft hole 911 side, and the other end of the long main body member supports the petal motion device 800. A support portion 914 is mainly provided.

The drive-side arm member 910 includes an inner fitting convex portion 925 that is fitted in the transmission long hole 913 and a flange portion 926 that protrudes radially outward to a position detected by the detection sensor 1162 . In conjunction with it, it rotates about the support column 1110 as an axis.

The gear housing portion 1120 is a recessed portion in which the gear of the transmission means 920 is housed. A first accommodation portion 1121 and a second accommodation portion 11 connected to the first accommodation portion 1121
22 and a third accommodation portion 112 that accommodates an arm gear 924 that is arranged directly opposite to the first accommodation portion 1121 with the second accommodation portion 1122 interposed therebetween and that is fitted with the drive-side arm member 910 .
3 and .

The rail fixing portion 1130 is a portion that supports an operation rail 1000R (see FIG. 150, illustration is omitted in FIG. 165) that is supported so as to be vertically slidable by stacking a plurality of metal plates in the front-rear direction. It has an insertion hole 1131 through which a screw for fastening and fixing the rail 1000R to the back plate 1100 can be inserted, and a positioning boss 1132 that fits into the operation rail 1000R and positions the operation rail 1000R. placed on a line.
The rigidity of the motion rail 1000R keeps the attitude of the petal motion device 800 constant.

The support elongated hole 1140 is an elongated hole for slidably supporting the driven side arm member 950, and is inclined at an angle of about 50° in a front view so as to descend toward the left. An extension wall 1141 extending to the front side is provided.

As shown in FIG. 164, the driven-side arm member 950 is composed of a long bar-shaped main body member that is formed in a substantially straight line when viewed from the rear. It mainly includes a supported convex portion 951 slidably supported in the support slot 1140 of the face plate 1100 and a support portion 952 that supports the petal motion device 800 at the other end.

A cylindrical collar is loosely fitted in the supported convex portion 951 , and a screw is fastened to a threaded portion 951 a formed at the tip of the supported convex portion 951 in a state in which the collar is fitted in the long support hole 1140 . Thus, the driven side arm member 950 is slidably supported by the back plate 1100 . That is, the inner diameter of the collar is made slightly larger than the outer diameter of the supported projection 951, and the outer diameter
It is formed slightly smaller than the width of 0.

166 is an exploded front perspective view of the back plate 1100, the side base material 1000S and the second effect member 940, and FIG. 167 is an exploded front perspective view of the drive side arm member 910, the slide plate 930 and the second effect member 940. be.

The slide plate 930 is slidably supported in the lateral base 1000S by a plurality of (three in this embodiment) supported elongated holes 931 drilled in the front-rear direction in the form of elongated holes extending in the left-right direction. It is connected to the connecting convex portion 912 of the drive-side arm member 910 through a base-end-side elongated hole 932 that is drilled in the front-back direction in the shape of a vertically-extending elongated hole provided on the left-end side, and is provided on the right-end-side. It is connected with the second effect member 940 through a tip side insertion hole 933 drilled in the front-rear direction.

The base-side elongated hole 932 has a stopping portion 932a formed at its upper end along the trajectory of the connecting projection 912 rotating around the support column 1110, and extends vertically downward from the lower end of the stopping portion 932a. Mainly includes a displacement portion 932b.

As shown in FIG. 166, the side base member 1000S is a columnar portion arranged in a substantially triangular shape in a front view on the left side of the back plate 1100 in a front view, and has a threaded portion 1151 into which a screw can be screwed. a plate-shaped member that is fastened and fixed to the support column portion 1150 that has a fastening plate portion 1001S that is disposed at a position corresponding to the support column portion 1150 and has an insertion hole through which a screw can be inserted; The support projections 1002S are provided in a columnar shape to the rear side in a positional relationship (three locations) corresponding to the arrangement relationship of the supported elongated holes 931, and the support projections 1002S are provided circularly in the front-view right corner in the front-rear direction. A shaft support hole 1003S that rotatably supports the second effect member 940 together with the shaft support hole 1003S, and an arc recess 1004S that is recessed in an arc shape having the same center as the center of the shaft support hole 1003S, and similarly the center of the shaft support hole 1003S. Protrusive streak portion 1005S protruding on the front side along an arc shape having the same center as
and are mainly provided.

The support protrusion 1002S is formed in a cylindrical shape with a diameter smaller than the width of the supported elongated hole 931 of the slide plate 930, and a flanged cylindrical collar extends from the tip of the support protrusion 1002S.
and supported elongated hole 931, and in this state, a retaining screw is screwed from the tip of the support projection 1002S to support the slide plate 930 in a slidable manner. be.

The shaft support hole 1003S is a circular hole that rotatably supports the second effect member 940, and the arc recessed portion 1004S and the protruding portion 1005S are arranged for the purpose of smoothing the rotational movement of the second effect member 940. It is the part that In addition, the protrusion 1005S does not contact when the second effect member 940 is in the regular position, but is formed with a protrusion height that allows contact when it is displaced from the regular position or bent. be done.

The second effect member 940 has a main body part whose lower end is bifurcated and whose upper end is formed in a circle centered on the shaft support 941. A shaft support pillar 941 which is provided in a columnar shape and is pivotally supported with a collar interposed in the shaft support hole 1003S, and an auxiliary projection which is arranged close to the shaft support pillar 941 and is provided in a columnar shape to the rear side. a portion 942;
Mainly provide

The shaft support 941 is a cylindrical portion formed with an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the collar whose outer diameter is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 1003S. It has an inlet 941a (see FIG. 152). The shaft supporting support portion 941 is placed in the shaft support hole 1003 with the collar interposed therebetween.
A disc-shaped cover member 945 having an outer diameter larger than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 1003S is placed at the tip of the cover member 945 inserted into the shaft S.
5 plays a role of retaining. Thereby, the second effect member 940 is pivotally supported by the side base material 1000S.

The auxiliary convex portion 942 is inserted through the distal end side insertion hole 933 of the slide plate 930 (see FIG. 169), and is prevented from coming off the slide plate 930 by fastening and fixing a circular resin collar to the distal end thereof. . That is, the slide plate 930 and the second effect member 940 are interlocked by the connection of the auxiliary convex portion 942 and the tip end side insertion hole 933 .

The auxiliary protrusion 942 is a protrusion that displaces near the center of the width of the arc recess 1004S, and is formed in a cylindrical shape with a diameter slightly smaller than the width of the arc recess 1004S. As a result, even if the second effect member 940 is about to bend, the auxiliary projections 942 come into contact with the arc recesses 1004S to generate resistance, thereby suppressing bending deformation.

Description will be made with reference to FIG. The back plate 1100 includes three screw-in portions 1161 into which screws can be screwed when fastening the plate-like support plate 921a that supports the drive motor 921,
A detection sensor 1162 that detects the flange portion 926 projecting radially outward within a range of a predetermined angle from the arm gear 924, and a collar that guides the coil spring SP8 that generates a biasing force in the direction of lifting the petal motion device 800 are rotatably shafted. A support shaft 1163 to be supported, a cover support portion 1164 arranged in a triangular shape in a front view so as to support the substrate cover 1000C on the lower right side of the long support hole 1140, and a substrate cover 1000C arranged close to the cover support portion 1164.
00C, which is hidden in a front view, and a threaded portion 1166 into which a screw for fastening the substrate cover 1000C is screwed.

Similarly, the side base material 1000S includes threaded portions 1006S and 1007S into which screws for fastening the substrate cover 1000C are screwed. The screw-in portion 1006S is arranged in the direction of movement of the second effect member 940 with a slight gap from the second effect member 940 arranged at the end of movement (see FIG. 168). Therefore, for example, the auxiliary convex portion 942 may break due to long-term use,
Even if the part that restricts the counterclockwise rotation of the second effect member 940 when viewed from the front is missing,
The displacement of the second effect member 940 can be restricted by the screw-in portion 1006S.

In this way, the board cover 1000C is not fixed to a single member, but is fastened and fixed to each of the side base material 1000S and the rear plate 1100 which are arranged in a back-and-forth layered manner and fastened to each other. 1000C, side base material 1000S and back plate 11
00 can be firmly fixed to each other. This makes it easy to suppress vibration and displacement of the substrate cover 1000C and the side base member 1000S even when the petal motion device 800, which is a heavy device, is moved up and down by rotating the drive-side arm member 910. can be done.

Next, referring to FIGS. 168 to 173, the vertical motion of the petal motion device 800 by the forward/backward motion unit 900 will be described. FIG. 169 is a front view of 1100, FIG. 169, FIG.
71 and 173 are rear views of the petal motion device 800 and the forward/backward motion unit 900. FIG.

168 and 169 illustrate a state in which the drive-side arm member 910 is arranged on the upper end side of the movement range, and FIGS. ) is arranged at the connecting position between the stop portion 932a and the displacement portion 932b of the proximal side elongated hole 932, and in FIGS.
is arranged on the lower end side of the movement range.

As shown in FIGS. 169 and 173, when the driving side arm member 910 is located at the end of the movement range, the transmission elongated hole 913 of the driving side arm member 910 is aligned with the inner fitting convex portion 925 of the arm gear 924 (see FIG. 173). 151) as a base point and extends in the tangential direction of a circle centered on the rotation axis of the arm gear 924 . Therefore, when the drive motor 921 is started, the inner fitting convex portion 9
25 is displaced, and the drive-side arm member 910 has a range in which the posture is maintained (a range in which the drive motor 921 idles).

In FIGS. 170 and 171, the petal motion device 800 is slightly lowered compared to the state shown in FIGS. 168 and 169, while the slide plate 930 and the second effect member 940 are kept in the same position. That is, when the drive-side arm member 910 rotates in the downward direction, the petal motion device 800 operates prior to the slide plate 930 and the second effect member 940 .

From FIGS. 170 and 171 to FIGS. 172 and 173, it is visually recognized that the petal operating device 800 and the second effect member 940 are interlocked due to the interlocking of the drive side arm member 910 and the slide plate 930. can be made

Here, by moving the second effect member 940 toward the position where the petal motion device 800 was originally arranged, the second effect member 940 moves to the position where the petal motion device 800 was originally arranged, so that the second effect member 940 moves to the position of the petal motion device 800.
It can be visually recognized as if it is operating following 00.

Next, the collection and rotation operation of the petal motion device 800 will be described. 174(a) is a front perspective view of the petal motion device 800, FIG. 174(b) is a front view of the petal motion device 800, and FIG. 174(d) is a front view of the slit member 810 and the rotary plate 830. FIG.

FIG. 175(a) is a front view of the rotary plate 830, and FIG. 175(b) is the petal motion device 8. FIG.
175(c) is a rear view of the petal 802 and the flat plate member 803, and FIG. 175(d) is a rear perspective view of the petal motion device 800. FIG.

Similarly, FIG. 176(a) is a front perspective view of the petal motion device 800, and FIG. 176(b).
is a front view of the petal motion device 800, FIG. 176(c) is a front view showing the petal motion device 800 with the central shaft rotating device 850 omitted, and FIG. 176(d) is a slit member 810 and a front view of the rotating plate 830. FIG.

FIG. 177(a) is a front view of the rotary plate 830, and FIG. 177(b) is the petal motion device 8. FIG.
177(c) is a rear view of the petal 802 and the flat plate member 803, and FIG. 177(d) is a rear perspective view of the petal operating device 800. FIG.

Similarly, FIG. 178(a) is a front perspective view of the petal motion device 800, and FIG. 178(b).
is a front view of the petal motion device 800, FIG. 178(c) is a front view showing the petal motion device 800 with the central shaft rotating device 850 omitted, and FIG. 178(d) is a slit member 810 and a front view of the rotating plate 830. FIG.

FIG. 179(a) is a front view of the rotary plate 830, and FIG. 179(b) is the petal motion device 8. FIG.
179(c) is a rear view of the petal 802 and the flat plate member 803, and FIG. 179(d) is a rear perspective view of the petal motion device 800. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 172, when the petal motion device 800 is lowered by the up-and-down motion and is at the lowest position, it moves from the initial position (collected position) shown in FIGS.
178 and 179 to the fully open position shown in FIG. 178 and FIG. 179, perform a rotating operation (second operation) at the fully open position, and then gather It is configured to perform an operation (third operation) and return to the initial position (collecting position).

At the initial position (collected position), as shown in FIG. 174(d), the slide member 820
The slide pin 823 (see FIG. 157) is inserted into the central slit 81 of the slit member 810.
4 (the end on the side of the circular opening 811), and along with this, as shown in FIGS. in position and clustered together to form an open hibiscus flower.

When the petals 802 are in the initial position (collected position) as described above, the central motor 804 drives the first
When the gear 804G is rotated counterclockwise in rear view as indicated by arrow A9 in FIG.
0 is rotationally driven in the clockwise direction in rear view as indicated by arrow A10.

At this time, as described above, the rotating plate 830 is fitted around the front side peripheral wall portion 812 of the slit member 810 at the pivot opening 831 with little frictional resistance. can rotate. On the other hand, the slit member 810 is rotatably fitted on the large-diameter cylindrical member 882 of the loose fitting device 880 through the circular opening 811 as described above. Since it is braked in conjunction with the gear 805G of the oil damper 805, it is held so that it cannot rotate with a torque small enough to initiate the above-described rotary plate 830. FIG.

Therefore, when the first gear 804G is rotated by the central motor 804, the rotor plate 8 is initially rotated.
30 is rotated as described above, and the slit member 810 is held stationary (see FIGS. 176 and 177).

When the rotary plate 830 is driven to rotate as described above, as shown in FIG. 175(a), the guide rail 832 on its front side rotates counterclockwise in a front view as indicated by an arrow A11.
Along with this, a force is applied to the slide pin 823 of the slide member 820 (see FIG. 157) so as to be guided by the guide rail 832 and pushed outward along the radial direction.

At this time, the slide pin 823 moves along the slit member 81 as shown in FIG. 174(d).
0 center slit 814 , the slide pin 823 moves along the center slit 814 while being linearly guided from the inner end to the outside.

At this time, since the slide pin 823 is guided by the rotating guide rail 832, some torque is also applied to the slit member 810, but the braking force of the oil damper 805 exceeds this torque. While the slit member 810 is held stationary, the slide pin 823 moves toward the center slit 8 as the rotary plate 830 rotates.
It will move linearly outward along 14 .

As a result, as shown in FIGS. 176 and 177, the five sets of petals 802 start expanding radially outward from the concentrated position. In this spreading operation, the slit member 8
As described above, the 10 central slits 814 extend along the direction D12 inclined at an angle θ11 in the counterclockwise direction in front view with respect to the radial direction D11 of the circular opening 811 as shown in FIG. A relatively large load is applied to the slide pin 823 moving outward, but on the other hand, the movement speed of the slide pin 823 is relatively high due to this inclination.

That is, by inclining the central slit 814 in the counterclockwise direction in front view, the load on the slide pin 823 is relatively large, but the slide pin is moved by a relatively small amount of rotation (angle) of the rotary plate 830. 823 can be moved by a predetermined distance, so that the petals 802 can be expanded more efficiently.

Here, for example, assuming that the central slit 814 extends radially along the radial direction D11 without this inclination, the load on the slide pin 823 is relatively small compared to the case described above, while the slide The moving speed of the pin 823 becomes relatively slow, and furthermore, for example, assuming that the central slit 814 is inclined in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front with respect to the radial direction D11, the load on the slide pin 823 decreases and the moving speed increases. Both declines become more pronounced.

At this time, as described above, the guide rail 832 extends clockwise from the central end along the direction D15 between the tangent line and the normal line of the pivot opening 831 as shown in FIG. After that, it extends outward from the direction D15 while curving in an arc toward the clockwise side in the front view, and the five guide rails 832 extend outward in a spiral shape as a whole. .

The more the guide rail 832 inclines clockwise in the front view, the more the slide pin 82
As the load on 3 becomes smaller, the moving speed becomes slower. Furthermore, the guide rail 832
is curved more arcuately toward the clockwise side in front view than the direction D15, the more the slide pin 823
Both the decrease in load on and the decrease in movement speed become more pronounced.

That is, in the case of the central slit 814 described above, the load on the slide pin 823 is relatively large and the moving speed is relatively high by inclining the slide pin 823 in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front. In the case of the rail 832, the load on the slide pin 823 is relatively small and the moving speed is relatively slow by inclining clockwise in a front view and curving in an arc shape.

In the case of the guide rail 832, as described above, the peripheral wall extending forward from the front side surface of the rotary plate 830 is formed in a groove shape, and the tip of the slide pin 823 is fitted from the front side. Therefore, if a large load is applied between the guide rail 832 and the slide pin 823, the slide pin 823 may deviate from the guide rail 832 during movement. Therefore, it is configured to reduce the load on the slide pin 823 while sacrificing the moving speed of the slide pin 823 to reduce it.

On the other hand, in the case of the central slit 814, since the slide pin 823 penetrates therethrough, there is little fear of deviation. is configured to

In this way, by reducing the load on the slide pin 823 with the guide rail 832, troubles such as deviation can be prevented and power transmission can be ensured.
14, the movement speed of the slide pin 823 is increased.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 178 and 179, the slide pin 823 is inserted
4 (see FIG. 178(d)), the five sets of petals 802 radially expand to the fully open position, and the expanding operation ends.

In this fully open state, as shown in FIGS. 178 and 179, the five petals 802 move radially apart, so that they are continuously visible outside the decorative member 884 when viewed from the front. A petal 802 is arranged in the . As a result, the decorative member 884 and the petals 802 are viewed as one piece like a slightly larger hibiscus flower compared to the case where only the decorative member 884 is visually recognized (see FIG. 174(b)). 178(b)).

In this way, when the slide pin 823 reaches the outer end, which is the outer movement limit of the central slit 814, and can no longer move outward, the slide pin 823
is locked at the outer end of the central slit 814, the rotary plate 830 cannot rotate further in the same direction as before with a small torque that is less than the braking force of the oil damper 805.
Therefore, by stopping the operation of the central motor 804, it is possible to maintain the fully open state after the expansion operation is completed.

After completion of the opening operation, the center motor 804 transmits rotational power in the same direction to the rotary plate 830, and when the torque applied to the rotary plate 830 exceeds the braking force of the oil damper 805, the slit member 810 shakes off the damping by the oil damper 805 and starts rotating in the counterclockwise direction as indicated by arrow A12 in FIG. 178(d) together with the rotary plate 830. In this way, after the opening operation, the petal 802 rotates counterclockwise in a fully opened state as indicated by an arrow A13 in FIG. 178(b).

At this time, if the central motor 804 is not stopped after the expanding operation and the rotary plate 830 is continuously applied with rotational power, the expanding operation and the rotating operation can be performed immediately without any interval. can be transferred.

When the petal 802 rotates counterclockwise in a fully open state as indicated by an arrow A13,
The decorative member 884 rotates in the opposite direction (clockwise when viewed from the front) as indicated by arrow A14 in FIG. 178(b). Therefore, compared with the case where the decorative member 884 is stopped, the decorative member 8
Since the movement amount (relative movement amount) of one petal 802 with reference to the predetermined position of 84 becomes large, the rotational speed of the petal 802 can be made to appear higher than the actual rotational speed.

After completing the rotation operation, the central motor 804 rotates the first gear 804G,
179(b), when the slit member 810 is rotated clockwise in the rear view as indicated by the arrow A15, the slit member 810 is braked by the oil damper 805 and held in a stopped state. b), as indicated by an arrow A15, it is rotationally driven in the clockwise direction when viewed from the back, thereby performing the collecting operation in the direction opposite to the spreading operation.

That is, the slide pin 823 returns from the outer end, which is the outer movement limit of the central slit 814 , to the inner end, which is the inner movement limit of the central slit 814 . 174 and 175, and returns to the gathering state to complete the gathering operation.

Thereafter, the central motor 804 may be stopped to terminate the operation of the petal motion device 800. However, the central motor 804 may be operated continuously without being stopped, or after the central motor 804 is stopped. Once again, the central motor 804 drives the first gear 804
When G is rotated in the clockwise direction shown by the arrow A15 in FIG.
174(b), rotates in the clockwise direction in the assembled state as indicated by an arrow A16 in FIG. 174(b).

When the petals 802 rotate in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front as indicated by arrow A16, the decorative member 884 rotates in the opposite direction (counterclockwise when viewed from the front) as indicated by arrow A17 in FIG. 174(b). rotate to Therefore, compared with the case where the decorative member 884 is stopped, the decorative member 8
Since the movement amount (relative movement amount) of one petal 802 with reference to the predetermined position of 84 becomes large, the rotational speed of the petal 802 can be made to appear higher than the actual rotational speed.

By controlling the central motor 804 as described above, even from this gathering operation to the rotation operation,
It can be paused and transitioned after a pause, or it can be transitioned immediately so that it is continuous without a pause.

Here, in this embodiment, since the rotation of the fourth gear 880G is detected by the detection arc plate 880d passing the detection sensor 801c (see FIG. 153), the rotation angle of the central motor 804 is not controlled. , the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4) can determine whether or not the petal motion device 800 is rotating by determining the output of the detection sensor 801c.

Next, a ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 180 to 183. FIG. In the eighth embodiment, a tunnel-shaped foul ball passage portion 145 closed by walls on all sides is formed between the passage forming unit 140 and the plate member 14d. The unit 9140 has a notch 9145 in the wall forming the foul ball passage 9145 .
b is formed, and the sheet metal member 9150 protrudes along the notch 9145b. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted. Differences from the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 180 to 183. FIG.

180 is a front perspective view of the passage forming unit 9140 in the ninth embodiment, FIG. 181 is a rear perspective view of the passage forming unit 9140, and FIGS. 182 and 183 are front views of the ball firing unit 112a. be. As shown in FIGS. 180 and 181, the passage forming unit 9140 has an internal configuration of the foul ball passage portion 9145 and a lower end portion and a front portion of the foul ball passage portion 9145 in comparison with the passage forming unit 140 in the eighth embodiment. The vertical positional relationship of the lower end portion of the door side lower tray passage portion 9142, the shape of the lower end portion of the front door side lower tray passage portion 9142, and the configuration of the partition plate portion 53a are different.

That is, first, the foul ball passage portion 9145 includes a notch 9145b that is recessed from the front side end of the passage forming unit 9140 toward the rear side in the lower curved inner portion of the S-shaped path SL2. . Then, the sheet metal member 9150 includes a thin plate blade portion 9153 in which a portion extending upward from the upper portion of the plate portion 152 is bent toward the front side so as to cover the notch 9145b from above.

The notch 9145b is formed in a series of ranges including the recessed direction end of the S-shaped path SL2,
The recess depth is approximately the same as the radius Ra of the sphere.

The upper surface of the thin plate blade portion 9153 is in contact with the lower surface of a top stop projection (not shown) projecting from the plate member 14d (see FIG. 91) toward the back side, and the upward force generated from the interior of the foul ball passage portion 9145. configured to withstand the load.

This thin plate blade part 9153 passes the thread Y8 through the foul ball passage part 9145, and by pulling or loosening the thread Y8, illegally manipulates the ball inside the game area to take countermeasures against fraudulent profits. It is arranged for the purpose of cutting the thread Y8 passed through the foul ball passage portion 9145. Possible cheating is described here.

Returning to FIG. 148, description will be made. As described above, the ball launching unit 112a of the eighth embodiment
is provided with a cutting metal member 725 for cutting the thread Y8 fixed to the ball. This cutting metal member 725 is a member that attempts to cut the yarn Y8 fixed to the ball by utilizing the momentum of the ball being shot, but if the momentum of the ball is weak, the yarn Y8 will be cut. The ball was sometimes launched without

On the other hand, this ball does not reach the game area, flows down to the foul ball receiving portion 146 , passes through the foul ball passage portion 145 , and is discharged to the lower tray 50 . Therefore, there is no risk that the ball will enter the game area directly.

On the other hand, for example, if the balls P8 and P9 are fixed to both ends of the thread Y8, a new problem arises. That is, as shown in FIG. 182, the ball P fixed to one end of the thread Y8
8 is weakly hit and the ball P8 is guided to the foul ball receiving portion 146, the yarn Y9
When the ball P9 fixed to the other end of the thread Y8 is guided to the firing rail 730, the thread Y8 is arranged on the back side of the cutting metal member 725 (on the side of the firing solenoid 701), so that the ball P9 is vigorously moved. Even if the yarn Y8 is hammered out, the yarn Y8 will not be cut by the metal member 725 for cutting.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 183, if the ball P9 is hit vigorously, the ball P9 reaches the game area without being cut by the string Y8. The ball P8 shot in advance is the foul ball passage part 1
45, discharged to the front side of the player, and stored in the lower tray 50 (see FIG. 86).

Therefore, a person who commits fraud can pull or loosen the string Y8 by grabbing the ball P8 stored in the lower tray 50 and moving the ball P8. 63 (see FIG. 2), etc., and gain illicit benefits.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the thread Y8 to which the balls P8 and P9 are fixed at both ends thereof is used to commit a fraudulent act as described above, the thin plate blade is attached to the foul ball passage portion 145 through which the thread Y8 inevitably passes. By arranging the portion 9153, the yarn Y8 can be cut at an early stage.

That is, when a person who commits fraud pulls the thread Y8, the thread Y8 rubs against the thin plate blade portion 9153, thereby damaging the thread Y8 and cutting the thread Y8 at an early stage (see FIG. 180). ). At this time, as in this embodiment, the notch 9145 exposing the thin plate blade portion 9153
b is formed on the front side, that is, on the side where the thread Y8 is pulled when the thread Y8 is pulled from the front side, so that the thread Y8 is arranged inside the notch 9145b when the thread Y8 is pulled. , and the thread Y8 can be rubbed against the thin plate blade portion 9153 .

Further, as described above, the thin plate blade portion 9153 contacts the plate member 14d (see FIG. 91) on the opposite side of the foul ball passage portion 9145, thereby increasing the resistance force against the upward load. This prevents the thin plate blade portion 9153 from warping or bending when a load is applied to the thin plate blade portion 9153 toward the outside of the foul ball passage portion 9145 when the thread Y8 is pulled. be able to. Therefore, from the thread Y8 to the thin plate blade portion 915
Most of the load directed towards 3 can be used to damage yarn Y8.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, the recess depth of the notch 9145b is about the radius Ra of the sphere P8. At the same time, the ball P8 is prevented from colliding with the thin plate blade portion 9153 . As a result, the thin plate blade portion 9153 can be prevented from being cracked or chipped due to collision with the ball P8, so that the durability of the thin plate blade portion 9153 can be improved.

Secondly, in the passage forming unit 9140 , the lower end of the foul ball passage portion 9145 is positioned lower than the lower end of the front door side lower dish passage portion 9142 . More specifically, they are arranged with a vertical difference of about the radius Ra of the sphere. This makes it easier for the yarn Y8 to be damaged by the payout ball. That is, since the person who commits the fraudulent act is afraid that the fraudulent act will be discovered, the sphere P
After holding the ball P8, in order to prevent the clerk from suspicion, hold the ball P8 close to the body (for example,
It is easy to cheat by pulling or loosening the thread 8 by keeping it in a trouser pocket, etc.). In this case, the thread Y8 is maintained in a state of extending toward the player along the upper surface of the side wall of the lower tray 50 (in contact with the upper surface). At this time, the thread Y8 is stretched through a position above the bottom surface of the ball guide opening 53 by about the diameter of the ball (see FIG. 86).

In this state, when the prize ball is paid out, the lower tray 5 from the lower end of the front door side lower tray passage portion 9142
When the ball ejected to 0 collides with the lower tray 50 and bounces around, it steps on the thread Y8 arranged on the front side of the ball guide opening 53, or collides with the thread Y8. ) flows down to the right, and flows down through the bottom opening arranged behind the ball extracting lever 52 . That is, by arranging the lower end of the front door side lower tray passage portion 9142 above the lower end of the foul ball passage portion 9145 (by increasing the upper limit position for jumping around), the front door side lower tray Passage 9
The balls discharged from 142 to the lower plate 50 can come into contact with the thread Y8, increasing the possibility of damaging the thread Y8 and cutting the thread Y8 early.

Thirdly, the bottom surface of the lower end portion of the front door side lower tray passage portion 9142 is formed with a right inclined surface 9142a which is inclined downward toward the right. The right sloping surface 9142a makes it easy to impart a rightward velocity to the ball discharged from the ball guide opening 53 to the lower tray 50 through the front door side lower tray passage portion 9142 .

As a result, the yarn Y8 is pulled out before the momentum (kinetic energy) of the ball delivered to the lower tray 50 declines.
You can direct the ball towards That is, the right inclined surface 9142a can forcibly impart a rightward (foul ball passage portion 9145 side) velocity component to the ball discharged along the front-rear direction to the lower tray 50. It is possible to increase the percentage of balls that step on the thread Y8 or hit the thread Y8.

In addition, fourthly, in this embodiment, the lower end portion of the front door side lower tray passage portion 9142 is the ball guide opening 5
3 occupies an area of about 2/3 of the lateral width of the ball guide opening 53, and the lower end of the foul ball passage portion 9145 occupies the remaining area (left and right of the ball guide opening 53) in the right part of the ball guide opening 53. 1/3 of the width), and a boarding restricting stepped portion 9053a is formed at the boundary.

As shown in FIG. 180, the boarding restricting stepped portion 9053a consists of the right end (right edge) of the right inclined surface 9142a formed as the lower bottom portion of the front door side lower tray passage portion 9142 and the foul disposed on the right side of the right inclined surface 9142a. It is configured as a plane portion that connects the left end (left end side) of the bottom portion near the exit of the ball passage portion 9145 and extends in the vertical direction.

A space V9 having a vertical width larger than the diameter of the ball is formed above the riding regulation stepped portion 9053a on the back side of the ball guide opening 53, and the front door side lower tray passage portion 91 is formed by the space V9.
42 and the foul ball passage portion 9145 are communicated with each other. Therefore, before passing through the ball guide opening 53, the ball that has passed through the front door side lower tray passage portion 9142 can flow rightward along the space V9. Therefore, the ball can be easily brought closer to the thread Y8.

Note that the vertical width of the boarding restricting stepped portion 9053a is set to be equal to the radius Ra of the sphere.
As a result, the ball that rolls in the foul ball passage portion 9145 and comes into contact with the riding restriction stepped portion 9053a can be restricted from riding up to the right inclined surface 9142a side. In other words, the riding restricting stepped portion 9053a allows the passage of the ball in the horizontal direction in the space V9 in one direction (direction from left to right) and restricts it in the other direction (direction from right to left). Acts as a directional valve.

Next, a tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 184 to 186. FIG. In the eighth embodiment, a tunnel-shaped foul ball passage portion 145 closed on four sides by walls is formed between the passage forming unit 140 and the plate member 14d. The unit 10140 is configured such that a notch 10145c is formed in the wall forming the foul ball passage 10145, and the sheet metal member 10150 protrudes along the notch 10145c. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted. Differences from the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 184 to 186. FIG.

Figures 184 to 186 are front perspective views of the passage forming unit 10140 in the tenth embodiment. 184 shows the passage forming unit 10140 viewed obliquely from the upper right, FIG. 185 shows the passage forming unit 10140 seen from the oblique upper left, and FIG. A state seen obliquely from below is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 184 to 186, passage forming unit 10140 differs from passage forming unit 140 in the eighth embodiment only in the internal configuration of foul ball passage portion 10145. FIG.

That is, the foul ball passage portion 10145 is a notch 10 recessed from the front side end portion of the passage forming unit 10140 toward the rear side in the upper curved inner portion of the S-shaped path SL2.
145c. The sheet metal member 10150 is provided with thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 extending toward the front side in a manner covering the lower portion of the notch 10145c.

The notch 10145c is formed in a series of ranges including the recessed direction end of the S-shaped path SL2, and the recessed depth is set to be approximately twice the radius Ra of the sphere (see FIG. 180) (diameter). be. In addition, the notch 10145c has a through hole drilled in the front-rear direction along the rolling plate portion 10145d below the rolling plate portion 10145d in which the ball is guided to the passage portion 145a. The thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 of the sheet metal member 10150 are inserted from the rear side.

In the present embodiment, the plate member 14d (see FIG. 91) is arranged inside the notch 10145c and has an outer shape of the front view shape of the foul ball passage portion 10145 before the notch 10145 is formed. Auxiliary protrusion 1 protruding from the side surface of the back side to the back side
4d2. 184 and 185, the auxiliary convex portion 14d2 is illustrated by imaginary lines, and is omitted from the drawing in FIG.

The auxiliary convex portion 14d2 is provided so as to fill the notch 10145c halfway (approximately the radius of the sphere Ra (see FIG. 180)). It is about the radius Ra of P8. Therefore, the foul ball passage portion 101
45 can be prevented from colliding with the thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154, so that the thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 can be prevented from being cracked or chipped due to collision with the ball P8. The durability of the thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 can be improved.

A projecting distal end 14d3 of the auxiliary projecting portion 14d2 is formed in an inclined shape extending toward the back side toward the foul ball receiving portion 146 side (toward the right side). Therefore, in the notch 10145c, the width (front-rear width) of the gap on the back side of the protruding tip 14d3 of the auxiliary protruding portion 14d2 is
The closer it is to 5a, the wider it becomes. As a result, the thread Y8 arranged in the passage portion 145a is passed through the thin plate blade portion 1.
0153, 10154 can be easily inserted into the clearance on the back side of the projecting tip 14d3 of the auxiliary projection 14d2.

The first thin plate blade portion 10153 is a thin plate portion projecting from the back side edge of the notch 10145c to the front side, and the second thin plate blade portion 10154 is located on the front side of the first thin plate blade portion 10153. 10153 and a part constituting a forked blade part, the first thin plate blade part 10153
It extends to the left from the right end of the front side edge of the in a slightly upwardly inclined manner. As a result, between the first thin plate blade portion 10153 and the second thin plate blade portion 10154, there is formed an acute-angled recess 1015 with an acute-angled deep recess portion.
5 is formed.

Note that the thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 are metal members arranged for the purpose of cutting the thread Y8, like the thin plate blade portion 9153 in the ninth embodiment.

The acute-angled concave portion 10155 is arranged on the rear side of the projecting tip 14d3 and on the front side of the rear side edge of the notch 10145c. As a result, when the thread Y8 enters the rear surface side of the protruding tip 14d3 of the auxiliary protrusion 14d2, the thread Y8 is caused to enter the acute recess 10155 and the thread Y8
can be easily damaged.

Since the second thin plate blade portion 10154 arranged on the front side is arranged on the upper side compared to the first thin plate blade portion 10153, the thread Y8 is pulled obliquely downward on the front side by the person who commits the fraudulent act. can easily enter deep into the acute recess 10155 .

A plate-like portion connected to the right side of the thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 is a rolling plate portion 10145d.
and is configured to withstand an upward load originating from the interior of the foul ball passage portion 10145 .

The extended end on the lower end side of the inclined plate portion 146a and the lower end surface of the auxiliary convex portion 14d2 are arranged to face opposite left and right sides at a bending point where the internal passage of the foul ball passage portion 10145 bends in the left and right opposite directions. be. That is, at these two points, the thread Y8 is pulled in the left-right opposite direction.

For example, a person who commits a fraudulent act releases the ball P8 that has come out at hand, and the ball P8 flows backward through the foul ball passage portion 10145 and is discharged through the game area, thereby avoiding the discovery of the fraudulent act. However, according to this embodiment, a load is applied to the thread Y8 or the ball P8 in the left-right opposite direction at the extended end on the lower end side of the inclined plate portion 146a and the lower end surface of the auxiliary convex portion 14d2. Therefore, it is possible to easily cause a situation in which the backflowing ball P8 is caught on the lower end surface of the auxiliary convex portion 14d2 and stays there.

As a result, the ball P8 and the thread Y8 are kept inside the foul ball passage portion 10145, and the thread Y
By lengthening the time that 8 is exposed to the game area, it is possible to expedite the discovery of fraud.

Note that an adhesive member (glue, trimming, etc.) may be disposed deep in the acute recess 10155 to adhere to the thread Y8 that has entered the acute recess 10155 . In this case, even if the string Y8 that is attached to the ball P8 that has come to the hand of the cheater is cut, the string is adhered to the adhesive member provided in the acute recess 10155, and the ball P9 is returned to the game area. Since the yarn Y8 is not ejected from the yarn Y8 and is maintained there, it is possible to hasten the discovery of fraudulent use of the yarn Y8.

Next, an eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 187 to 190. FIG. In the eighth embodiment, a case has been described in which a ball (foul ball) that has a weak launch strength and has not reached the playing area is discharged to the lower tray 50. A foul ball receiving port 2164 is provided. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

187 is a front view of the inner frame 12 and the disc passage forming member 2160 in the eleventh embodiment, and FIG. 188 is a partially enlarged front perspective view of the outer rail 2062. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 187 and 188, the outer rail 2062 is arranged at the lower left corner of the game board 13 and is made of a resin material so as to have the same arc shape as the outer rail 62 in the eighth embodiment on the game area side. a tip member 206 formed and positioned proximate the ball firing unit 112a;
2a, and a guide member 2062b formed up to the vicinity of the left end of the inner frame 12 in a positional relationship having a gap V11 with a width in which the ball can flow down between the tip member 2062a.

A foul ball passage 2062c communicating with a foul ball receiving port 2164 formed at the right corner of the interior of the main body side upper dish passage portion 161 is formed downstream of the gap V11. Foul ball passage 2
062c is formed with a width slightly larger than the width that allows one ball to pass through the furniture, and a spare of the return ball prevention member 68 is arranged above it.

In this embodiment, the main body side upper tray passage portion 161 is moved to the left to the position where the main body side lower tray passage portion 162 is disposed in the above-described embodiment. formation is omitted. That is, the balls paid out from the payout device 133 (see FIG. 87) disposed on the back side of the game board 13 are exclusively supplied to the upper tray 17 via the upper tray passage portion 161 on the main body side. When the number of balls on the upper tray 17 exceeds the allowable amount, a full-tank switch (not shown) protruding inside the ball flow path on the downstream side of the dispensing device 133 is turned on by the load of the balls. It is configured so that the ball payout from 133 is stopped.

That is, in this embodiment, the ball that has passed through the foul ball passage 2062c also passes through the payout device 133 (
87) is also supplied to the upper tray 17. FIG. Therefore, as described above, by bonding balls to both ends of the thread Y8 and passing one of the balls through the foul ball passage 2062c, the thread Y8 can be
into the game area along the foul ball passage 2062c,
The action of damaging the yarn Y8 by striking the yarn Y8 with the payout ball can be produced regardless of how the balls accumulate on the upper plate 17. - 特許庁This makes it easier to cut the yarn Y8 at an early stage.

189 is a partially enlarged front perspective view of outer rail 2062. FIG. In FIG. 189, a spare of the return-ball prevention member 68 disposed above the foul-ball passage 2062c is disassembled and shown side by side as a rear perspective view. Further, FIG. 188 will be referred to as necessary in the description of FIG.

The return ball prevention member 68 is temporarily fastened to the game board 13 with a long metal screw B11 in a posture in which the base member 68b1 of the support member 68b that supports the tilting gate member 68a is arranged on the front side.

Specifically, the guide member 2062b is hollowed on the back side of the return ball prevention member 68. As shown in FIG. In the cavity, a support cylindrical portion 2062b2 is formed which protrudes from the rear side surface of the guide member 2062b toward the front side in a cylindrical shape and has an inner wall formed with a threaded groove into which the long screw B11 is screwed. A closing plate 2062b4 that closes the cavity of the guide member 2062b from the front side abuts against the tip of the supporting cylindrical portion 2062b2, and the base member 68 is placed in front of the closing plate 2062b4.
b1 is in contact with the base member 68b1, the long screw B11 is inserted into a through hole previously drilled as a mounting hole in the base member 68b1 and a through hole 2062b5 drilled in the blocking plate 2062b4 in alignment with the through hole. is inserted, and in this state it is screwed into the support cylindrical portion 2062b2, whereby the return ball prevention member 68 is fastened and fixed to the guide member 2062b.

The upper surface and the left surface of the closing plate 2062b4, which are the sides that contact the guide member 2062b, are formed so as to match the shape of the end surface of the guide member 2062b, while the lower surface avoids interference with the support member 68b. The right surface (surface on the front side in FIG. 189) is a guide member 20
It is formed as an inclined surface with the same gradient as the gradient increasing portion 2062d of 62b.

The slope increasing portion 2062d is sloped downward toward the tip member 2062a with respect to the surface forming the outer frame of the play area of the guide member 2062b. That is, the gradient increase section 206
A straight line L11 extending toward the tip member 2062a along the surface of 2d is below the upper end of the surface (upper surface) forming the outer frame of the play area of the tip member 2062a (in this embodiment, the diameter of the ball It intersects with the tip member 2062a at about ⅓ lower side).

By configuring in this way, when shooting a ball toward the game area, the gradient increasing unit 20
62d is withdrawn from the path of the sphere, and collision between the lower tip of the increasing gradient portion 2062d and the sphere can be avoided. On the other hand, when the ball that did not reach the game area flows backward, the upper end portion of the tip member 2062a protrudes inside the path of the ball rolling on the gradient increasing portion 2062d, so the ball moves left and right in the gap V11. It is possible to reduce the possibility of passing through and returning to the ball shooting unit 112a side beyond the tip member 2062a.

Between the side surface 2062d1 on the front side of the increasing gradient portion 2062d and the closing plate 2062b4,
Incision 206 with a width smaller than the diameter of the sphere and allowing the thread to enter (about 2 [mm] in this embodiment)
It is recessed toward the back side to a position where 2b1 can be formed. The cut 2062b1 is formed at a point where the path of the ball hit into the game area and the foul ball passage 2062c intersect at an acute angle.

In the support cylindrical portion 2062b2 on the right side in front view, on the front side of the side surface 2062d1,
A semicircular notch 2062b3 is provided on the side facing the gradient increasing portion 2062d. This notch 2062b is provided for the purpose of exposing the long screw B11.

In this way, the long screw B11 to be screwed into the support cylindrical portion 2062b2 on the right side in front view is exposed at the front and rear positions where the notch 2062b1 is formed. When the thread Y8 having the balls P8 and P9 fixed to both ends thereof is passed through the foul ball passage 2062c, the thread Y8 can rub against the long screw B11 in the event of a fraudulent act.

That is, due to the arrangement of the notches 2062b1, the thread Y8 is pressed against the long screws B11 arranged deep in the notches 2062b1 when subjected to a load that pulls both ends (Fig. 190 (
a) see). In this state, the thread Y8 is slid in the longitudinal direction, so that the thread Y8 is rubbed against the long screw B11, and the thread Y8 can be quickly cut.

In this embodiment, the notch 2062b1 is arranged closer to the front than the position through which the center of the sphere passes. As a result, it is possible to prevent the notch 2062b1 from being arranged at a position (vertical lower part of the center of the ball) where the ball to be shot contacts the outer rail 2062, so that the notch 2062b1 collides with the ball to be shot. It is possible to prevent the direction of the ball from being affected.

Also, a person who commits cheating through the thread Y8, to which the balls P8 and P9 are fixed at both ends, through the foul ball passage 2062c, will not be able to handle the end of the thread Y8 that protrudes toward the player side (the ball P8 is fixed). 182) is pulled forward to adjust the position of the ball P9 in the game area. Therefore, by arranging the cut 2062c closer to the front side, it is possible to make it easier for the yarn Y8 to enter the cut 2062c compared to when the cut 2062c is arranged closer to the back side.

A button-type switch SW11 having a detecting portion projecting downward is disposed in a cavity formed in the guide member 2062b. The button switch SW11 is configured as a switch that can be pushed under a load extremely weaker than the load generated when the gate member 68a rotates with the weight of the weight portion 68a2. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the button type switch SW11 will interfere with the operation of the gate member 68a. The button-type switch SW11 is for detecting the attitude of the gate member 68a, and when the attitude of the gate member 68a changes, the O
It is arranged so as to be switchable between N-OFF.

Figures 190(a) and 190(b) are partial front enlarged views of foul ball passage 2062c. In addition, in FIG. 190(a), the weight portion 68a of the gate member 68a of the return ball prevention member 68
190(b), the weight 68a2 is pushed up by the ball passing through the gate member 68a.
The opening/closing portion 68a1 side of is tilted toward the foul ball passage 2062c side. again,
In FIG. 190(a), the path of the thread Y8 used in the fraudulent act is shown for reference, and the button switch SW11 is turned on. In FIG. 190(b), the button switch SW11 is It is illustrated that it is OFF.

As shown in FIG. 190(b), the return-ball preventing member 68 only gives a slight resistance to the passing ball, and gives enough resistance to stop the ball passing through the foul-ball passage 2062c. Not. This is because the ball flows away under its own weight, and even if the width of the foul ball passage 2062c is narrowed by tilting the opening/closing portion 68a1 as shown in FIG. Since the state shown in 190(a) is restored, the foul ball passage 20
This is because the state shown in FIG. 190(a) can be restored by the time the ball is guided to 62c (0.6 seconds at the shortest).

On the other hand, the ball-return preventing member 68 provides great resistance to an object that does not flow away like a ball, for example, an object that advances while filling the passage, such as an endoscope. This is a structure as an anti-fraud measure.

For example, the tip of a device such as an endoscope advances through the foul ball passage 2062c in the direction opposite to the direction in which the ball flows down, reaches the inside of the game area, and attempts to interfere with the inside of the game area (for example, Bending a nail (not shown) planted in the game board 13, grasping a ball and putting it into the winning slot, using the tip of the device as a guide plate to the winning slot, and emitting a laser from the tip (e.g. cutting nails).

FIG. 191 is a partial front enlarged view of foul ball passageway 2062c. In addition, in FIG. 191, the outline of a device such as an endoscope that is illegally intruded is illustrated by imaginary lines.

In the present embodiment, when the tip of a device such as an endoscope is advanced through the foul ball passage 2062c in a direction opposite to the direction in which the ball flows down, the gate member 68a of the return ball prevention member 68 is displaced while advancing. Become. Here, when the state shown in FIG. 191 (the state in which the weight portion 68a2 is displaced by the distal end portion of the endoscope) shifts to the state shown in FIG. The insertion portion (long flexible portion) is still arranged below weight portion 68a2, and weight portion 68a
2 will be maintained in a state of being pushed up. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to disengage the opening/closing portion 68a1, and it is possible to prevent the distal end portion of the endoscope from advancing further.

Here, if the endoscope is forcibly advanced to destroy the gate member 68a and enter the inside, it is impossible to prevent fraud. On the other hand, in this case, since the button type switch SW11 is maintained in the OFF state, the button type switch SW1 is turned off.
1 is kept OFF for a predetermined period of time, a fraudulent act can be detected at an early stage.

Also, when the button type switch SW11 is in the OFF state, control may be performed so that the dispensing of balls from the dispensing device 133 (see FIG. 87) is stopped. Even in this case, in normal use, the state in which the button type switch SW11 is turned off occurs only at the timing when the foul ball passes (see FIG. 190(b)), and the button type switch SW11 is turned on immediately.
Since it is set to N (see FIG. 190(a)), the period during which the payout of balls from the payout device 133 is stopped can be shortened as much as possible, and the player can be prevented from feeling discomfort.
On the other hand, when the gate member 68a is illegally destroyed, the state in which the dispensing of balls from the dispensing device 133 is stopped can be maintained.

It should be noted that the member arranged above the foul ball passage 2062c need not be the return ball prevention member 68, and may be another movable member. However, as in this embodiment, the return ball prevention member 68
By arranging , if the return ball prevention member 68 on the side of the game board 13 is cracked or bent due to long-term use, it can be quickly replaced. As a result, compared with the case where the replacement member of the return ball prevention member 68 is simply purchased as an option, it has the effect of being able to play a role in preventing fraudulent acts before replacement, and the trouble of forgetting and searching for a storage place can be saved. It is possible to achieve the effect of Further, it is not necessary to include the entire structure of the return ball prevention member 68, and for example, the gate member 68a may be pivotally supported by a fixed shaft (the support member 68b may not be provided).

Also, if the return ball prevention member 68 cracks or bends and is replaced, whether or not the above-described fraudulent act prevention effect is achieved depends on the degree of damage to the return ball prevention member 68. , that the fraudulent party does not know whether or not the exchange has taken place, and
Even if it has been replaced, the degree of damage is not known, so the deterrence against fraud can still be maintained.

Next, a twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 192 to 197. FIG. In the eighth embodiment, the case where the petal motion device 800 rotates only at the gathered position or the fully opened position has been described, but the petal motion device 2800 in the twelfth embodiment can rotate even at the expanded position. configured in a manner. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 192 is a rear perspective view of the loose fitting device 2880 in the twelfth embodiment. Figure 192
, the back cover 2886 of the loose fitting device 2880 has a flange portion 2 extending radially outward from the outer edge of the rear end in comparison with the configuration of the back cover 886 in the eighth embodiment.
887 and a restricting portion 2888 projecting from the extended tip of the flange portion 2887 toward the rear side. The loose fitting device 2880 in this embodiment is the loose fitting device 8 in the eighth embodiment.
80, the only difference is the rear cover 2886, and the other parts are the same as the loose fitting device 880.

The restricting portion 2888 protrudes to a position (intermediate position) between the rear side portion 802a and the front side portion 802b of the petal 802 . That is, the restricting portion 2888 protrudes to a position where it can contact with the front side portion 802b but cannot contact with the rear side portion 802a.

In this embodiment, a single flange portion 2887 and a single restriction portion 2888 are arranged, but these may be scattered at a plurality of locations on the back cover 2886 .
Next, actions of the flange portion 2887 and the restricting portion 2888 will be described with reference to FIGS. 193 and 194. FIG.

193(a) and 193(b) are front views of the petal motion device 2800, and FIG.
4(a) and 194(b) are partially enlarged front views of the slit member 810 and the slide member 2820. FIG. 193 and 194 show an operation example of the petal operating device 2800 in chronological order.
) shows the state at the same point in time.

194(a) and 194(b), the guide pin 822 and the slide pin 823 are shown in cross section for convenience, and in the same cross section, the pair of threaded portions 2803 of the flat plate member 2803 are shown.
S is seen in cross section. Also, in FIG. 193, the petal 802 whose posture is changed by the action of the restricting portion 2888 is shown in white (the same applies to FIGS. 195 and 196).

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 194(a), a pair of threaded portions 2803S arranged inside the slits 815 on both sides are provided with opposite threaded portions centered on the screw insertion portion 803H. It has a sloped surface 2803T that slopes away from 2803S.

The inclined surface 2803T is approximately 30° with respect to the direction in which the slide member 2820 slides.
Formed at an angle. The action of the restricting portion 2888 on the petals 802 will be described.

As shown in FIGS. 193(a) and 193(b), the petal 802 is slid in a posture in which the restricting portion 2888 is arranged radially outward along the moving direction of the front side portion 802b of the petal 802 ( Rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 155) is rotated counterclockwise in a front view), restricting portion 2888 and front side portion 802b of petal 802 come into contact, and petal 802 receives a load from restricting portion 2888.

When the petals 802 are further slid (rotating the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 155) counterclockwise when viewed from the front) while the petals 802 are receiving the load from the restricting portion 2888, the petals 802 receive the load. To do so, change your posture.

At this time, the slide member 2820 fastened and fixed to the petals 802 is in the normal posture shown in FIG. , as shown in FIG. 194(b), the central slit 814
and a posture change to a tilted posture with respect to the slits 815 on both sides. petal 8
At 02, posture changes occur whenever possible.

By changing the attitude of the slide member 2820 and the petals 802 in this manner, the restricting portion 28
The resistance between slide member 2820 and slit member 810 changes while the load from 88 is deflected.

That is, in the normal posture shown in FIG. 194(a), only the narrow slide ribs 803a of the slide member 2820 are in contact with the slits 815 on both sides.
The slide member 2820 can move smoothly in the longitudinal direction of the slits 814,815.

On the other hand, in the inclined position shown in FIG. 194(b), the slide member 2820 has the slide rib 803a with respect to the slits 815 on both sides, and the inclined surface 280 with the inner inner wall.
Since the 3Ts are abutted (pressed) respectively, the frictional resistance increases. In addition, since the width of the inclined surface 2803T is formed to be larger than that of the slide rib 803a, the increase in frictional resistance is remarkable. Since the inclined surfaces 2803T are in contact with the inner walls of the slits 815 on both sides from both directions in the short direction of the slits 815 on both sides, the frictional resistance increases regardless of the rotation direction of the rotary plate 830. .

Therefore, in the inclined posture shown in FIG. 194(b), the slit 814 of the slide member 2820
, 815 in the longitudinal direction, the slide member 28
20 reach the ends of the slits 814 and 815, the slide pin 823
156) can exceed the braking force of the oil damper 805 (see FIG. 156). The braking force of the oil damper 805 can be set to a magnitude between the movement resistance of the slide member 2820).

In this case, the slit member 810 shakes off the damping by the oil damper 805 and starts rotating together with the rotary plate 830 (see FIG. 155). That is, from the state shown in FIG. 193(b),
Start to rotate counterclockwise when viewed from the front. Since this direction corresponds to the direction in which the petals 802 move away from the restricting portion 2888, the load applied to the petals 802 from the restricting portion 2888 can be released.

195 is a front view of petal motion device 2800. FIG. 193 (
The figure shows a state after the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 156) continues to rotate in the same direction from the state of b).

As shown in FIG. 195, the petal actuator 2800 can be rotated in the expanded position. At this time, the rear cover 2886 rotates in a direction (clockwise when viewed from the front) opposite to the rotating direction of the rotary plate 830 (see FIG. 155). 195, the torque applied from the slide pin 823 to the rotary plate 830 (see FIG. 156) is applied to the oil damper 805 (see FIG. 156).
156), the petals 802 can be rotated in both forward and reverse directions while maintaining the expanded position.

196(a), 196(b) and 197 are front views of the petal motion device 2800. FIG. 196(a), 196(b), and 197 show how the petals 802 move from the spreading position to the collected position in time series.

In FIG. 196(a), the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 156) is rotated clockwise from the state shown in FIG. When the rotary plate 830 further rotates in the same direction from this state, as shown in FIG. 196(b),
The restricting portion 2888 pushes the front side portion 802b, and the positions of the petals 802 and the slide member 2820 are returned to their normal positions.

Furthermore, when the rotary plate 830 (see FIG. 156) rotates in the same direction, the braking force of the oil damper 805 (see FIG. 156) exceeds the torque applied from the slide pin 823 to the rotary plate 830. The rotational motion of 802 subsides and the petals 802 slide toward the gathering position.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the petals 802 can be automatically rotated at the spreading position and then returned to the concentrated position.

Although the case where the front side portion 802b of the petal 802 expands at the position where it abuts against the restricting portion 2888 has been described, if the petal 802 is rotated by a slight angle (the rotating plate 830 is rotated clockwise when viewed from the front, ), contact between the front side portion 802b and the restricting portion 2888 can be avoided, so it is also possible in this embodiment to move the petal 802 to the fully open position and rotate it at the fully open position.

In addition, the restricting portion 2888 may be placed at a position where it does not contact the petals 802 at the gathered position or the fully opened position, or at a position where the petals 802 do not contact the petals 802 rotating at the fully opened position.
can slip through the regulating portion 2888 by slightly changing its posture, and can prevent the regulating portion 2888 from hindering the rotation of the petals 802 in the fully open position. can.

Further, as shown in this embodiment, by arranging the restricting portion 2888 at a position protruding from the back cover 886 in a front view, the restricting portion 2888 can be used as part of the effect device. For example, by arranging a star-shaped pattern on the front side of the restricting portion 2888, the petals 802
When the petals 802 expand, it can be used as a mark to determine whether the petals 802 pass through a position close to the star-shaped pattern or a position far from the star pattern. It is possible to make a difference between performing the rotation operation and performing the rotation operation by expanding halfway.

Then, for example, by performing an effect in which the degree of expectation for a big win varies depending on the degree of expansion during rotation, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the degree of distance between the star-shaped pattern and the petals 802. It is possible to make the pattern of the mold function as a production part. Thereby, the regulation part 2888 can be used as part of the effect device.

Note that the restricting portion 2888 may be arranged at a position hidden by the rear cover 886 when viewed from the front. In this case, it is not necessary to design the shape of the restricting portion 2888 in terms of design, so the degree of freedom in designing the restricting portion 2888 can be improved.

At the fully open position, the petal 802 abutting against the regulating portion 2888 and slightly changing its posture may be used as an effect (for example, an effect suggesting the degree of expectation for a big win). In this case, depending on whether the petals 802 are simply rotating, or are rotating while abutting the restricting portion 2888 and causing a slight change in posture (flutteringly), it is possible to change the meaning and content conveyed to the player. .

In the present embodiment, the position where the petal 802 contacts the restricting portion 2888 is the tip position.
If the contact position is closer to the center (if the arrangement of the petals 802 is different), the degree of expansion of the petals 802 when the posture changes will change. Therefore, even with the configuration in which the restricting portion 2888 is fixed to the rear cover 2886, it is possible to change the extent of expansion of the petals 802 when the attitude thereof changes.

Next, another example of the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 198 and 199. FIG.
In the twelfth embodiment, the case where the slit member 810 rotates along with the rotating plate 830 regardless of the rotating direction of the rotating plate 830 at the expanded position has been described. The slit member 3810 of 3800 is configured to be switchable between the case where the slit member 3810 rotates together with the rotating plate 830 and the case where the rotating plate 830 rotates independently depending on the rotating direction of the rotating plate 830 . In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

198(a), 198(b), 199(a) and 199(b) are partially enlarged front views of the slit member 3810 and the slide member 2820 in another example of the twelfth embodiment. 198 and 199 show, in chronological order, an operation example of the petal motion device 3800 when the rotary plate 830 rotates clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 198(a) when viewed from the front. again,
198(a), 198(b), 199(a) and 199(b), the rotating plate 83
0 guide rails 832 are shown in phantom lines.

When rotating plate 830 is rotated counterclockwise in front view from the state shown in FIG. Since it is the same as the twelfth embodiment that the slit member 3810 and the rotary plate 830 rotate together, exceeding the resistance applied, the description is omitted here.

198 and 199, the guide pin 822 and the slide pin 823 are cross-sectionally viewed for convenience, and the pair of threaded portions 2803S of the flat plate member 2803 are cross-sectionally viewed in the same cross section.

Here, when the rotary plate 830 is rotated clockwise in front view, the slide pin 823 is inserted through the guide rail 832 of the rotary plate 830 , so that the slide member 2820 that receives the load from the guide rail 832 Along with the displacement, it is displaced in the lower right direction in FIG. 198(a) (see FIG. 198(b)). In this embodiment, additional concave portions 3814a, 3815a, and 3815 are provided on the side for receiving the slide member 2820 displaced in this way.
b is formed.

That is, the slit member 3810 is different from the slit member 810 in that the central slit 814 is formed in the wall portion on the clockwise side in the front view among the wall portions extending along the radial direction of the central slit 814 .
A central recessed portion 3814a that is recessed in such a manner as to increase the width of the central recessed portion 3814a, and a wall portion extending along the radial direction of both side slits 815 arranged on the clockwise side of the central slit 814 when viewed from the front. A clockwise side recessed portion 3815a that is recessed in the wall portion so as to widen the lateral width of both side slits 815, and a radial direction of both side slits 815 that are disposed on the counterclockwise side of the central slit 814 in front view Both slits 81 in the wall on the clockwise side in front view
5, and a counterclockwise recessed portion 3815b that is recessed in such a manner as to widen the width in the lateral direction.

The clockwise side recessed portion 3815a is located at the flat plate member 280 in the state shown in FIG.
3 slide rib 803a.

The central recessed portion 3814a is in the state shown in FIG. 198(a).
from the position facing the guide pin 822 of the slit member 3810 toward the center of rotation of the slit member 3810 (Fig. 19
8(a) bottom).

The central recessed portion 3814a has a recess depth greater than that of the clockwise recessed portion 3815a and a radial length greater than that of the clockwise recessed portion 3815a.

The counterclockwise recessed portion 3815b is located in the flat plate member 28 in the state shown in FIG.
03 toward the rotation center of the slit member 3810 (
It is formed continuously to FIG. 198(a) bottom).

The counterclockwise side recessed portion 3815b is deeper than the clockwise side recessed portion 3815a and has a longer radial length than the central recessed portion 3814a.

The action when the rotating plate 830 of the petal motion device 3800 configured as described above rotates clockwise when viewed from the front will be described. First, from the state shown in FIG. 198(a), the rotating plate 830
starts to rotate clockwise in front view, the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 move in the lower right direction in FIG. 198(b)).

As a result, the contact between the counterclockwise side walls of the both-side slits 815 and the flat plate member 2803 is released, so that the frictional resistance between the flat plate member 2803 and the slit member 3810 is reduced.

When the rotating plate 830 is further rotated clockwise in front view, the sliding member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 move toward the contact portion between the recessed portion 3815a on the clockwise side and the slide rib 803a (the sliding member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 and the slit member 3810, with the first contact point) as a fulcrum, rotate counterclockwise in front view (Fig. 199(a) and Fig. 199(b)
)reference).

The center slit 3814a and the counterclockwise recessed portion 3815b are deeper than the clockwise recessed portion 3815a.
03, contact between the guide pin 822 and the central recessed portion 3814a, and the threaded portion 280
Contact between 3S and the counterclockwise recessed portion 3815b is avoided.

Further, the sliding member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 are recessed to a depth that does not abut the central slit 814 and both side slits 815 during the rotation described above. A turning side recessed portion 3815a is recessed.

Therefore, the load applied to the slit member 3810 via the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 is reduced, and the load generated between the slide member 2820 and the slit member 3810 falls below the resistance applied to the slit member 3810 from the oil damper 805. . As a result, the slit member 3810 and the rotary plate 830 do not rotate together.

As shown in FIG. 199(b), the longitudinal direction of the central slit 814 of the slit member 3810 and the direction connecting the pair of threaded portions 2803S (longitudinal direction of the flat plate member 2803) are perpendicular to each other. When the radial center side slide rib 803a housed in the clockwise side slits 815 abuts against the walls of the both side slits 815, the sliding member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 move around the abutting portion as a fulcrum when viewed from the front. Rotate counterclockwise. As a result, the slide rib 803a that has entered the clockwise recessed portion 3815a is removed.
moves counterclockwise in front view from the base end of the recessed portion 3815a on the clockwise side.

That is, the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 move in the radial direction (see FIG. 194).
(a)), the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 can be moved toward the center in the radial direction by continuously rotating the rotating plate 830 clockwise in the front view.

Therefore, according to another example of the twelfth embodiment, after the state shown in FIG. , the rotating plate 830 rotates independently and the attitude of the slit member 3810 is maintained.

As a result, the slide member 2820, the flat plate member 2803, and the petals 802 fastened and fixed to the flat plate member 2803 (see FIG. 193(a)) can be made to perform movements that could not be realized in the twelfth embodiment.

In other words, in the twelfth embodiment, after the postures of the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 change during the opening operation accompanying the rotation of the rotating plate 830 counterclockwise in front view (FIG. 194(b) )), and until the changed posture is restored, the flat plate member 280
3 and the petal 802 (see FIG. 193(a)) fastened and fixed to the flat plate member 2803 (see FIGS. 195 and 196).
(a) and FIG. 196(b)).

On the other hand, in another example of the twelfth embodiment, after the postures of the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 change during the opening operation accompanying the rotation of the rotating plate 830 counterclockwise in front view (Fig. 198 ( a)), and by rotating the rotary plate 830 clockwise in front view, the postures of the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 can be restored (see FIG. 199(b)).
. That is, until the changed posture is restored, the flat plate member 2803 and the petal 802 fastened and fixed to the flat plate member 2803 (see FIG. 193(a)) are rotated (rotated along with the slit member 3810). can be omitted.

Therefore, according to another example of the twelfth embodiment, after the postures of the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 are changed during the expansion operation accompanying the rotation of the rotary plate 830 counterclockwise when viewed from the front (Fig. 198(a)), rotating plate 830 in any state (phase or attitude)
By rotating clockwise from the front view, the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 are gathered from the position of the flat plate member 2803 that matches the arbitrary state (phase or posture) and the petal 802 fastened and fixed to the flat plate member 2803. It can start moving towards a position.
As a result, the flat plate member 2803 and the petals 802 fastened and fixed to the flat plate member 2803 (FIG. 1)
93(a)) rotates (see FIG. 195) during expansion (see FIG. 198(a)) and then gathers toward the gathered position (see FIG. 197). , so that the motion of the petal motion device 3800 can be diversified.

Next, a thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 200 to 203. FIG. In the first embodiment, the case where the curved surface forming the front side portion of the lower frame member 320 is formed of a plate with no opening has been described.
A plurality of through holes 8326a to 8326c are formed through the curved wall portion 8326 of the . In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

Figures 200, 201, 202(a) and 202(b) are front perspective views of the operation device 8300 in the thirteenth embodiment. 200 and 202(a) illustrate the second state of the tilting device 310, FIG. 201 illustrates the first state of the tilting device 310, and FIG. 202(b) illustrates the tilting device 310 in the first state. A state in the middle of changing from state 1 to state 2 is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 200 and 201, the operating device 8300 in this embodiment is different from the lower frame member 8 in comparison with the operating devices 300 to 7300 in each of the above-described embodiments.
The difference in the curved wall portion 8326 of 320 has not been explained, and other configurations have been mostly explained in the operation devices 300 to 7300 in each of the above-described embodiments.
Therefore, the details of the lower frame member 8320 will be described below, and other configurations will be limited to a few supplementary descriptions.

The curved wall portion 8326 of the lower frame member 8320 is a curved plate-like portion arranged to face the protective lens member 311i of the tilting device 310 in the first state in the front-rear direction, and is bored in a substantially oval shape at the left-right central position. and a first through hole 8326a formed on the left and right sides of the vibration device 5400. When viewed in a direction orthogonal to the rotation axis of the tilting device 310 and along the surface of the bottom plate portion 321, the cross-sectional shape of the bottom plate portion 321 has a horizontally long rectangular cross-sectional shape. A pair of second through holes 8326b drilled along the bottom plate portion 321 and connecting the upper surface and the lower surface of the bottom plate portion 321 at surface positions, and a pair of third through holes 8326b drilled at the left and right corners to have a vertically long rectangular cross-sectional shape when viewed from the front. It mainly includes a through hole 8326c.

Each of the through holes 8326a to 8326c has the purpose of facilitating the downward passage of liquid such as drinking water, and the purpose of facilitating removal of coin-shaped foreign objects inserted into gaps V13 and V14 of the operation device 8300 described below. and a through hole. For example, a coin-shaped foreign object may cause a player to stop the operation of the tilting device 300 when he/she feels that the operation of the tilting device 300 is a hindrance, or may cause the tilting device 310 and the upper frame to interfere with the tilting device 310 and the upper frame. Member 33
0 may be fitted in the gaps V13 and V14.

Here, since the operation device 8300 includes the tilting device 310 configured to be operable, slight gaps V13 and V14 are formed between the upper frame member 330 and the tilting device 310 .
By doing so, the operation of the tilting device 310 can be smoothed, but on the other hand, the gap V13
, V14.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the tilting device 310 is arranged at the rear end of the ring member BR1 (
14(b)), that is, the position supported by the upper frame member 330 is closer to the rear end. It is configured to easily shift (deform) to the left or right near the end on the front side. Note that this misalignment (deformation) includes, for example, misalignment using rattling caused by adding design errors incorporated from the design stage between members, and misalignment caused by slightly deforming each member. (variant) is included.

Therefore, during normal use, the gap V13 between the upper frame member 330 on both the left and right sides of the tilting device 310
However, even if the gap V13 is designed so as not to be large enough to insert a coin-shaped foreign object (eg, a 1-yen coin), the tilting device 310 can be displaced to either the left or the right (eg, to the left). In this case, the gap V13 created on the other side (for example, the right side) is
The gap V1 is the sum of the gaps V13 formed between the upper frame member 330 and the left and right sides of the
3, and can be large enough to insert a coin-shaped foreign object.

That is, the gap V13 between the tilting device 310 and the upper frame members 330 on both left and right sides of the tilting device 310 during normal use is set to be less than half the thickness of the coin-shaped foreign matter (for example, 0.5 mm or less for a 1-yen coin). Otherwise, if the tilting device 310 is misaligned to the left or right, a coin-shaped foreign object may be inserted.

Also, the gap V14 between the front end portion of the tilting device 310 and the upper frame member 330 in the front-rear direction is also adjusted by utilizing the backlash near the ring member BR1 (see FIG. 14(b)) of the tilting device 310.
If a load directed toward the back side is applied to 10 to shift (deform) the position, the gap V14 can be easily enlarged, so that a coin-shaped foreign object can be inserted into the gap V14 as well.

In this embodiment, the gap V13 between the tilting device 310 and the upper frame member 330 is either left or right.
Alternatively, if the tilting device 310 tilts while a coin-shaped foreign object is inserted in the gap V14 in the front-rear direction, the coin-shaped foreign object may enter the lower frame member 8320 .

In particular, as shown in FIGS. 202(a) and 202(b), when the left and right wall portions of the tilting device 310 are formed in a shape that narrows left and right inward toward the vertical center, the tilting device 310 easily fits the fingers of the player. On the other hand, in the second state (see FIG. 202(a)), the coin-shaped foreign object fitted in the gap V13 protrudes outward from the constriction of the case main body 311. A downward load is applied from the lower frame member 8320, making it easier to enter the lower frame member 8320.

If the tilting device 310 is operated with a coin-shaped foreign object inserted in the gaps V13 and V14, the operating resistance becomes excessive, which may cause a problem in driving the tilting device 310. FIG. In addition, rubbing between the coin-shaped foreign matter and the protective lens member 311i may deteriorate the translucency of the protective lens member 311i, which may interfere with the light emission effect.

In the first place, if a coin-shaped foreign object gets caught inside and restricts the operation of the tilting device 310, it becomes impossible to execute the intended effect with the operation device 8300. Therefore, the gap V13,
If it is discovered that a coin-shaped foreign object has been inserted into V14, it is desirable to remove it immediately. had to disassemble.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, through holes 8326a to 8326c are formed in the curved wall portion 8326, so that coin-shaped foreign matter can be removed through the through holes 8326a to 8326c. The shape and arrangement of the through holes 8326a to 8326c will be described below.

FIG. 203(a) is a front view of the operation device 8300, and FIG. 203(b) is a front view of FIG.
3(a) is a side view of the operation device 8300 as viewed in the direction of arrow CCIIIb in FIG.
03(c) is a bottom view of the operation device 8300, and FIG. 203(d) is a bottom view of FIG.
) is a partial cross-sectional view of the operation device 8300 on line CCIIId-CCIIId of FIG.
FIG. 203(e) is a cross-sectional view of the operation device 8300 along line CCIIIe-CCIIIe in FIG. 203(a).

The first through hole 8326a has the same center in the horizontal direction as the center in the horizontal direction of the vibrating device 5400, and is drilled with a lateral width larger than the lateral width of the vibrating device 5400 (the first accommodating portion 5431 of the vibrating device 5400, see FIG. 58). be. Therefore, even if liquid such as drinking water is poured into the vicinity of the left-right central position of the gap V14, the liquid is discharged through the first through hole 8326a before reaching the vibrating device 5400. Liquids can be prevented from reaching the vibration device 5400 .

The lower edge of the first through-hole 8326a is the extended portion 311h (FIG. 12) of the tilting device 310 in the first state.
) is placed below the top surface of the Therefore, when a coin-shaped foreign object fitted in the gap V14 is on the upper surface of the extension portion 311h, the upper surface of the extension portion 311h is inclined (horizontally when viewed vertically in the second state). The tilting device 3 is curved toward the
Inclination D81 downwardly inclined toward the left-right center in the first state of 10, and the tilting device 310
is tilted, coin-shaped foreign matter can be easily removed through the first through hole 8326a along the slope D82 (see FIG. 201) that slopes downward toward the front side.

As a result, the size required for the first through hole 8326a can be minimized while the coin-shaped foreign matter can be easily removed, so that the lower frame member 8320 can be designed freely. . For example, the strength of the lower frame member 8320 can be easily ensured compared to the case where the first through-hole 8326a needs to be widened to the left and right.

In this embodiment, the size of the first through hole 8326a is the same as that of the tilting device 310 in the first state.
A portion above the upper surface of the extended portion 311h (see FIG. 12) has a size equal to or greater than the size of an object assumed to be a coin-shaped foreign object. That is, in the present embodiment, the portion above the upper surface of the extension portion 311h of the tilting device 310 in the first state has a horizontal width and a vertical width of about 30 [m].
m].

The first through hole 8326a is located on the front side of the spherical shell portion 313a (see FIG. 15) when the tilting device 310 is in the first state. The spherical shell portion 313a is an LED device 341f.
(See FIG. 25). In this embodiment, the spherical shell portion 31
Except for 3a, the plate portions of the lens member 313 that are continuously provided on the left, right, top and bottom of the spherical shell portion 313 are mirror-finished in this embodiment (the mirror-finished member is fixed), Light passing through the spherical shell portion 313 is reflected.

With this arrangement, when the tilting device 310 is in the first state, the first through hole 8326a is used to make a difference in the amount of light that passes through the spherical shell portion 313a (see FIG. 15) and is visually recognized by the player. In particular, the first through hole 8326a removes the resin member that weakens the amount of light, so that the central portion in the left-right direction can be visually recognized brightly.

When a coin-shaped foreign object is placed at a position that partially closes the first through hole 8326a, the amount of light that passes through the spherical shell portion 313a (see FIG. 15) and is visually recognized by the player is It is weaker than when there is no foreign matter (a coin-shaped foreign matter becomes a shadow). That is, since it is possible to make it easy to notice that the coin-shaped foreign matter remains on the lower frame member 8320 by using the amount of light and the shadow of the coin-shaped foreign matter as a clue, the coin-shaped foreign matter is not noticed and the lower frame can be easily detected. Member 832
The possibility of remaining at 0 can be reduced. Note that this effect is
The same applies not only to the case of viewing through the second through hole 8326b or the third through hole 8326c, but also to the case of viewing through the second through hole 8326b or the third through hole 8326c.

The second through-hole 8326b allows a coin-shaped foreign object that has fallen on the bottom plate portion 321 to pass through the bottom plate portion 321.
It is configured as a through-hole that can be discharged in a direction along one plane. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the lateral width of the second through hole 8326 is about 30 [mm], and the bottom plate portion 321 is formed with a width of about 2 [mm] in the normal direction.

Since the second through-hole 8326b is arranged near the center of the bottom plate portion 321 in the left-right direction, even after a coin-shaped foreign object slides down along the curved shape of the front edge of the bottom plate portion 321, it can be easily removed. Coin-shaped foreign matter can be removed immediately.

Since the second through holes 8326b are arranged on both the left and right sides of the vibrating device 5400, for example, the liquid such as drinking water flowing along the curved wall portion 8326 or the bottom plate portion 321 reaches the vibrating device 5400. The second through-hole 8326b can be utilized for forward outward discharge.

The central axis of the third through hole 8326c is arranged along the left and right edges of the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 20).
3(a)), it is formed as a through-hole through which a coin-shaped foreign matter that has entered the gap V13 along the left and right side walls of the tilting device 310 can be removed while the device is in the standing state (orientation).

That is, the length of the third through-hole 8326c in the longitudinal direction needs to be set to a size that allows coin-shaped foreign matter to be discharged when viewed in the direction along the surface of the bottom plate portion 321. , the third through-hole 8326c has a length of about 30 mm and a width of about 2 mm when viewed along the surface of the bottom plate 321 .

When removing the coin-shaped foreign matter, the covering cover 370 is removed and the operation device 830 is opened.
0 in front view (see FIG. 92), the operator can open the through holes 8326a to 8326c.
can be accessed. In addition, the covering cover 370 is attached to the fastening portion 3 of the main body curved portion 371 .
70a (see FIG. 91) is fastened and fixed to the front frame 14 by screws inserted in the front-rear direction, and the drooping portion 372 is fastened and fixed to the bottom plate in which the concave portion 15a is formed by screws inserted in the vertical direction. Therefore, the covering cover 370 can be easily removed by removing the screws while the front frame 14 is open (see FIG. 89). Therefore, the working time can be shortened.

According to the configuration of this embodiment, it is possible to easily remove coin-shaped foreign objects that have entered the gaps V13 and V14 of the operation device 8300 without disassembling the operation device 8300 .

The harness HN3 connected to the operation device 8300 is connected to a connector portion 8353 that opens outward to the right at the lower right corner of the body cover 351 (see FIG. 203(b)).
. Including each embodiment described above, only the harness HN3 is connected to the operation device 8300 for transmitting and receiving signals to and from the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4).

Therefore, even if a coin-shaped foreign object cannot be taken out, the operation can be easily performed by removing the screw that fastens the front frame 14 and the operation device 8300 and then removing the harness HN3 from the connector portion 8353. Device 8300 can be removed from front frame 14 . Therefore, if a replacement for a normal operation device 8300 is prepared, the operation device 8300 in which a coin-shaped foreign object is caught can be quickly replaced with a normal operation device 8300 .

As a result, even if a coin-shaped foreign object enters the operation device 8300 and the operation of the pachinko machine 10 is stopped due to malfunction, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 can be quickly restarted.

Next, referring to FIG. 204, a fourteenth embodiment will be described. In the eighth embodiment,
A case has been described where the board support device 600 does not receive the load from the front frame 14 when it is in a fixed state, but the board support device 600 in the fourteenth embodiment is arranged so as to be able to abut against the front frame 14 in the fixed state. The load from the front frame 14 is received via the front-rear displacement member 2652 . In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

204(a) and 204(b) are partial cross-sectional views of the inner frame 12 in the fourteenth embodiment taken along line CXXXVI-CXXXVI in FIG. Note that FIG. 204 (
204(b) shows a state in which the front frame 14 is opened with respect to the inner frame 12 (illustration of the front frame 14 is omitted), and FIG. The states are illustrated. The shape of the inner frame 12 is shown in FIG. 204(a), and the shapes of the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 in FIG. 204(b) are simplified and illustrated by imaginary lines.

As shown in FIGS. 204(a) and 204(b), the inner frame 12 in this embodiment includes a load transmission device 2650 as a difference from the eighth embodiment. The load transmission device 2650 includes a vertical displacement member 2651 arranged so that the front side of the plate portion (the plate portion arranged on the rear side) of the main body plate portion 611 that is fastened and fixed to the inner frame 12 can be vertically displaced; The vertical displacement member 2651
A front-rear displacement member 2652 disposed so as to be able to abut on the lower end of the front-rear displacement member 2652 supported so as to be displaceable in the front-rear direction;
52 from above and below so as to be displaceable at two front and rear positions, and is fixed to the plate portion 611a. a biasing member 2655 such as a coil spring that applies a biasing force toward
Prepare.

The vertical displacement member 2651 can be switched between a state in which it abuts against the torsion spring NBb in the fixed state of the board support device 600 and a state in which it separates. That is, at the lower position shown in FIG. 204(a), it retreats from the torsion spring NBb, and at the upper position (position displaced upward from the lower position) shown in FIG. Deform the torsion spring NBb. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 204(a), the upper end of the vertical displacement member 2651 is positioned at a position with a slight gap from the torsion spring NBb at the lower position. is set.

The front-rear displacement member 2652 is placed at a front position (see FIG. 204(a)) where it is pushed forward by the biasing force of the biasing member 2655, and at a position where it is pushed backward by the front frame 14. 204(b)).

Here, an inclined surface 2652a is formed at the rear end portion of the front-rear displacement member 2652 and is inclined downward toward the end side. The inclined surface 2652a extends from a position vertically below the vertical displacement member 2651 in a state where the front-back displacement member 2652 is arranged at the front position.
52 is a slanted surface that continuously extends to the vertically lower position of the vertical displacement member 2651 when 52 is placed at the rear position.

The inclined surface 2652a is positioned in front of the front-rear displacement member 2652 so that the vertical displacement member 2651
is positioned at the lower position, and the vertical displacement member 2651 is positioned at the upper position at the rear position of the front-rear displacement member 2652, and the inclination angle and formation range are set.

With the above-described configuration, in this embodiment, by closing the front frame 14, the vertical displacement member 2651 is arranged at the upper position, and the torsion spring NBb is deformed to the side where the load is increased by the thickness in the front-rear direction. be able to.

As a result, it is possible to increase the load that the post-rotation pawl member 640 applies to the game board 13 from the rear side, making it easier to maintain the state in which the game board 13 is in contact with the hanging back plate portion 621d of the pre-rotation pawl member 620. The distance D14 between the front surface of the game board 13 and the rear surface of the front frame 14 (the rear surface of the glass unit 16 fixed to the front frame 14) can be easily defined. Therefore,
The thickness of the game area can be easily defined, and the downflow of the ball can be stabilized.

Here, the specifications required for the board support device 600 in the eighth embodiment and the board support device 600 in this embodiment are the same, namely that the game board 13 is fixed. At the time of fixing, the board surface support device 600 pushes the game board 13 toward the front side by the biasing force of the torsion spring NBb, and presses it against the hanging back plate portion 621d to fix it.

According to the configuration of this embodiment, the torsion spring NBb is further compressed by closing the front frame 14, so a spring having a lower elastic modulus than the spring used in the eighth embodiment is adopted as the torsion spring NBb. can do.

Therefore, when the game board 13 is fixed to the board support device 600, the load (reaction force) applied to the operator from the torsion spring NBb can be reduced, and the load required when fixing the game board 13 to the board support device 600 can be reduced. Since the force can be reduced, the operator's freedom of choice, and
Workability can be improved.

Next, referring to FIG. 205, a fifteenth embodiment will be described. In the eighth embodiment,
Harnesses HN1 to HN3 are laid over the reverse cup portion 178 to prevent the intrusion into the inside of the reverse cup portion 178 by melting it with a heated piano wire.
Although a case has been described in which the tampering detection device 2280 in the fifteenth embodiment detects that the reverse cup portion 178 is burnt by the heated piano wire and attempts to detect fraud at an early stage, the fraud detection device 2280 in the fifteenth embodiment is used when the reverse cup portion 178 is melted by the heated piano wire. In addition, the heat is detected and the harnesses HN1 to HN3 are configured to prevent burnout.

FIG. 205(a) is a partial rear view of the front frame 14 in the fifteenth embodiment, and FIG.
205(c) are rear views of the fraud detection device 2280. FIG. Note that FIG.
In b) the shape memory spring 2288 is shown maintained in a reduced shape, FIG.
5(c) shows a state in which the stretched shape (the memorized shape) is restored by the application of heat. 205(b) and 205(c), the fraud detection device 2280
It is cross-sectionally viewed at an intermediate position before and after 281 .

The fraud detection device 2280 is configured in a box-like shape with an opening on the back side and the bottom side.
178, and a rear cover member 2282 attached from the rear side so as to cover the opening on the rear side of the main body box part 2281.
A space is formed between 1 and the back cover member 2282 .

The body box portion 2281 is made of a metal material and extends from the lower right corner to form the reverse cup portion 217 .
8, a constricted portion 2284 extending from the inner wall so as to narrow the opening upward from the lower corner, and the vicinity of the edge of the upper end opening of the constricted portion 2284. It is housed in a projecting portion 2285 projecting upward from the body box portion 2281 and a recess recessed from the back side in the left side wall portion of the body box portion 2281, one end protruding outside the body box portion 2281, and the other end being the body box A first conductive portion 2286 extending in the left-right direction inside the portion 2281 and a main body box portion 228
1, one end protruding outside the main body box portion 2281, the other end extending in the left-right direction inside the main body box portion 2281, and the first conduction a second conductive portion 2287 formed with a length that can contact the upper surface of the portion 2286;
and a shape memory spring 2288 that rides on the upper surface of the constricted portion 2284 , is supported by the projecting portion 2285 , and is arranged below the second conducting portion 2287 .

The fraud detection device 2280 is a device for outputting an error signal when heat is detected. The first conductive portion 2286 and the second conductive portion 2287 are each connected at one end of separate wiring to the portion protruding outside the main body box portion 2281 by a method such as soldering, and the other end of the wiring is connected to the main control device. 110 (see FIG. 4). Then, the contact between the first conducting portion 2286 and the second conducting portion 2287 is released (see FIG. 205 ( c) see) cuts the continuity,
It is controlled to output an error signal with the fact that the continuity is cut off as an input.

When the error signal is output from the main control device, a loud alarm is output from the speaker 451 (see FIG. 120), or the ball dispensing device 133 (see FIG. 87) stops the dispensing of balls, etc., and continues. It is controlled so that it is impossible to play a game by

Details of the fraud detection device 2280 will be described. As shown in FIGS. 205( a ) to 205 ( c ), the body box portion 2281 of the fraud detection device 2280 covers the left side and the upper side of the inverted cup portion 2178 . Here, in the inverted cup portion 2178 in this embodiment, the formation location of the wall portion 2178a is displaced to the left as compared with the eighth embodiment, and the extended portion 2283 is provided between the long cover member 173 and the elongated cover member 173. There is a gap that can be accommodated.

The extended portion 2283 fills the gap between the wall portion 2178a and the long cover member 173, so that even if the wall portion 2178a is melted by the tip of the heated piano wire, the piano wire still covers the long cover member 173. can be prevented from penetrating.

According to this configuration, the piano wire that enters the inverted cup portion 2178 from below, melts the upper wall portion, and advances further is guided by the constricted portion 2284 and reaches the shape memory spring 2288 that is arranged at the upper opening of the constricted portion 2284. be guided.

The shape memory spring 2288 is made of a shape memory alloy such as a nickel-titanium alloy, and has the property of maintaining its deformed shape in a low temperature state and returning to its pre-memorized shape when heated to a predetermined transformation temperature or higher. . Note that in this embodiment, the shape memory spring 2288
, the transformation temperature is set to about the melting point of the inverted cup portion 2178 (approximately 80°), and the tensile shape (see FIG. 205(c)) is stored in advance.

Therefore, when the shape memory spring 2288 is heated to the transformation temperature or higher by the heated piano wire, the shape memory spring 2288 returns to the tensile shape, so that the second conductive portion 2287 is pushed up, and the first conductive portion 2286 and the second conductive portion 2287 is disconnected and an error signal is output. Therefore, early detection of fraud can be achieved.

An extension portion 2288a extending from the upper end of the shape memory spring 2288 to the front side is inserted into a guide elongated hole 2282a that is vertically elongated and is drilled in the front and back direction in the back cover member 2282, and extends to the front side. overhang. When the shape memory spring 2288 returns to the low temperature state after being in the tension state, the operator pushes down the extension part 2288a to deform the shape memory spring 2288 and contract the shape memory spring 2288 (see FIG. 205(b)). ) can be changed back again. That is, even after the fraudulent act is discovered, it can be repeatedly used for early detection of the fraudulent activity.

Next, referring to FIG. 206, a sixteenth embodiment will be described. In the eighth embodiment,
A case has been described in which even if the shape of the concave portion provided in the light guide member 540 is uniform, the light guide member 540 is formed to be curved to cause a difference in the traveling direction of the light emitted from both surfaces. The right panel unit 2500 in the 16th embodiment has recesses with different shapes in different regions. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 206(a) is a partial rear view of the right panel unit 2500 in the sixteenth embodiment, and FIG. 206(b) is an upward concave portion provided in the light guide member 2540 in the region CCVIb of FIG. 206(a). FIG. 206(c) is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member 2540 schematically showing the portion 2543b, and FIG. 206(c) schematically shows the downward recessed portion 2543c recessed in the light guide member 2540 in the region CCVIc of FIG. 206(a). FIG. 206(d) is a partially enlarged perspective view of a light guide member 2540 schematically shown in FIG. 206(a), and FIG. 206(e) is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member 2540, and FIG. 206(e) schematically shows an upward concave portion 2543e provided in the light guide member 2540 in the area CCVIe of FIG. 206(a). It is a partially enlarged perspective view. Note that the illustration of the support plate portion 510 is omitted in FIG. 206(a).

As shown in FIG. 206(a), the light guide member 2540 is formed in a plate shape extending straight in the vertical direction. In this embodiment, the LEDs 512a (see FIG. 107) arranged on the substrate member 512 are arranged vertically in a straight line according to the shape of the light guide member 2540. FIG.

On both surfaces of the light guide member 2540, concave portions are formed in the arrangement described above in the eighth embodiment.
3 shape can be changed.

That is, with the bottom of the curve of the inner lens member 530 as a reference, the area CCVIb is arranged above and on the side of the inner lens member 530, and the area CCVI is arranged above and on the side of the outer lens member 550.
The shape of the recessed portion 2543 is changed by the region CCVid arranged below and on the inner lens member 530 side, and the region CCVIe arranged below and on the outer lens member 550 side.

As shown in FIG. 206(b), in the area CCVIb, an upward concave portion 2543b is formed by hot-pressing a convex portion having a shape obtained by dividing a sphere into 1/8 equal parts. The upward concave portion 2543b has a flat surface on the lower side and the front side (the side opposite to the side on which the LED 512a (see FIG. 107) is arranged), and a curved surface on the upper side and the rear side. is formed.

Here, the lower plane is parallel to the optical axis direction of the LED 512a (see FIG. 107), and the front plane is perpendicular to the optical axis of the LED 512a.
At this position, the incident light is hardly reflected in the left-right direction. Therefore, the upward concave portion 2
543b refracts light exclusively at the curved portion and emits the light toward the outer lens member 550, and the emitted light is likely to be refracted upward due to the influence of its curved shape. Therefore, the light refracted in the region CCVIb and emitted to the outer lens member 550 is emitted in an upwardly inclined direction, as shown in FIG. 206(a).

As shown in FIG. 206(c), in the area CCVIc, a downward concave portion 2543c is formed by hot-pressing a convex portion having a shape obtained by dividing a sphere into ⅛ equal parts. The downward concave portion 2543c is heat-pressed in a posture in which a flat surface is arranged on the upper side and the front side (the side opposite to the side where the LED 512a (see FIG. 107) is arranged), and a curved surface is arranged on the lower side and the rear side. is formed.

Here, the upper plane is parallel to the optical axis direction of the LED 512a (see FIG. 107), and the front plane is perpendicular to the optical axis of the LED 512a.
At this position, the incident light is hardly reflected in the left-right direction. Therefore, the downward concave portion 2
543c refracts light exclusively at the curved portion and emits the light toward the inner lens member 530, and the emitted light is likely to be refracted downward due to the influence of the curved shape. Therefore, the light refracted in the region CCVIc and emitted to the inner lens member 530 is emitted in a downwardly inclined direction, as shown in FIG. 206(a).

As shown in FIG. 206(d), a downward concave portion 2543d is formed in the area CCVId by hot-pressing a convex portion having a shape obtained by dividing a sphere into 1/8 equal parts. The downward concave portion 2543d has flat surfaces on the upper side and the front side (the side opposite to the side on which the LED 512a (see FIG. 107) is arranged), and curved surfaces on the lower side and the rear side. is formed.

Here, the upper plane is parallel to the optical axis direction of the LED 512a (see FIG. 107), and the front plane is perpendicular to the optical axis of the LED 512a.
At this position, the incident light is hardly reflected in the left-right direction. Therefore, the downward concave portion 2
543d refracts light exclusively at the curved portion and emits the light toward the outer lens member 550, and the emitted light is likely to be refracted downward due to the influence of its curved shape. Therefore, the light refracted in the region CCVId and emitted to the outer lens member 550 is emitted in a downwardly inclined direction as shown in FIG. 206(a).

As shown in FIG. 206(e), in the region CCVIe, an upward concave portion 2543e is formed by hot-pressing a convex portion having a shape obtained by dividing a sphere into ⅛ equal parts. The upward concave portion 2543e has a flat surface on the upper side and the front side (the side opposite to the side where the LED 512a (see FIG. 107) is arranged), and a curved surface on the lower side and the rear side. is formed.

Here, the upper plane is parallel to the optical axis direction of the LED 512a (see FIG. 107), and the front plane is perpendicular to the optical axis of the LED 512a.
At this position, the incident light is hardly reflected in the left-right direction. Therefore, the upward concave portion 2
543e refracts light only at the curved portion and emits the light to the inner lens member 530 side, and the emitted light is likely to be refracted upward due to the influence of its curved shape. Therefore, the light refracted in the region CCVIe and emitted to the inner lens member 530 is emitted in an upwardly inclined direction, as shown in FIG. 206(a).

The concave portions formed on both surfaces of the light guide member 2540 in the region facing the bottom of the curve of the inner lens member 530 have the same shape as in the eighth embodiment (an inclination angle of 45° with respect to the bottom surface and a bottom circle diameter of approximately 1 mm cone). Therefore, the inner lens member 5 is removed from this portion.
The light emitted to 30 or the outer lens member 550 is slightly refracted vertically and travels in a substantially horizontal direction.

According to the present embodiment, with the configuration described above, as shown in FIG. 206(a), the light is allowed to travel toward the inner lens member 530 in the direction in which the light is collected, and toward the outer lens member 550 in the direction in which the light spreads. can be made That is, while the light guide member 2540 is formed in the shape of a flat plate, it is possible to give a difference in the traveling direction of the light emitted from both surfaces thereof.
While suppressing the left and right width of 0, the production effect of the light emission production can be improved.

Next, the seventeenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 207 to 281. FIG. In the first embodiment described above, the bottom surface of the lower tray unit 15 is formed flat, but in the pachinko machine 10010 according to the seventeenth embodiment, the bottom surface of the lower tray unit 6400 is formed with a convex portion. As a result, the transportability of the front frame 10014 including the lower tray unit 6400 is improved. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 207 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10010 in the seventeenth embodiment, and FIG.
is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 10010. FIG. In the following description, with respect to the pachinko machine 10010 in the state shown in FIG. 207, the front side of the paper surface is the front (front) side, and the back side of the paper surface is the rear (rear) side. Also, with respect to the pachinko machine 10010 in the state shown in FIG. ) side. Furthermore, arrows UD, LR,
FB indicates the up-down direction, left-right direction, and front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 10010, respectively.

As shown in FIGS. 207 and 208, the pachinko machine 10010 has an operation device 1030, which is shown in FIG.
0, a lower plate unit 6400 that is arranged below the operation device 10300 and covers the lower side of the front frame 10014, a horizontal effect device 6700 that covers the left and right portions of the front frame 10014 and mainly performs light emission effects, and a front. It mainly includes a performance effect device 6500 that covers the upper part of the frame 10014 and mainly executes light effect and sound effect.

The glass unit 16 described above is arranged in the area surrounded by the horizontal effect device 6700 and the upper effect device 6500, and the game area in which the game balls flow down is formed on the back side of the glass unit 16. It is similar to the embodiment. In order to avoid complicating the drawings, FIG. 207 omits the illustration of the rear side of the glass unit 16, and FIG. 208 shows the glass unit 16 and the game board 13 (see FIG. 2). The inside of the outer frame 11 (see FIG. 3) can be visually recognized from the opening in which the glass unit 16 is arranged.

209 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 10010. FIG. FIG. 209 illustrates a direction view along the longitudinal direction of the lever member (for example, lever member 10340 (see FIG. 80)) of the operation device 10300 (radial direction view of the rotation shaft of the lever member of the operation device 10300). be.

The operation device 10300 includes a left front cover 10321 and a right front cover 10322 which are formed in the shape of a thin plate and are flexible enough to bend and deform. As shown in FIG. 209, the housing recess 17a is formed as a substantially left-right symmetrical recess in which the depth of the recess toward the rear side increases as the center of the housing 17a is approached. 10300 are arranged so as to coincide with the left and right centers.

Rear-side ends of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are fitted and supported in the housing recess 17a. Therefore, the fitting position moves toward the rear side as it approaches the left-right center. In other words, the fitting position moves toward the body frame (metal body portion 10014a) of the front frame 10014 as it approaches the left-right center.

Therefore, at the left-right center position where the amount of load transmitted during operation of the operation device 10300 tends to increase, shortening the front-rear position from the metal main body 10014a to the fitting position
By suppressing the vertical displacement of the fitting position, it is possible to suppress the operation device 10300 from being displaced in the vertical direction (load direction).

On the other hand, the left and right positions (
At positions away from the center to the left and right), even if the front-rear position from the metal main body 10014a to the fitting position is lengthened, the effect of suppressing vertical displacement of the operation device 10300 is not hindered.
In addition, by arranging the fitting positions in this way, it is possible to form a space between the fitting positions and the metal body portion 10014a, so that a wide arrangement area for the upper plate 17, the frame button 22, and the like can be secured. can do.

210 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 10010. FIG. Note that in FIG. 210, the outer frame 1
1, a state in which the front frame 10014 is opened toward the near side centering on the left end portion pivotally supported by the hinge 19 is illustrated.

The front frame 10014 has a rod-shaped portion pivotally supported by the hinge 19 , and the rod-shaped portion is configured to be attachable to and detachable from the hinge 19 . By removing the rod-shaped portion from the hinge 19, the front frame 1
0014 can be separated from the inner frame 12 . Since the components to be newly described are arranged in the front frame 10014, the following description will focus on the front frame 10014. FIG.

FIG. 211 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame 10014, and FIG.
4 is an exploded front perspective view of FIG. 211 and 212 illustrate a state in which the lower tray unit 6400 and the operation device 10300 are removed from the front frame 10014. FIG.

The front frame 10014 is a frame-shaped metal member that forms a skeleton, and includes a metal body portion 10014a integrally formed with the front door mounting bracket 58. is fastened to the That is, the lower tray unit 6400
Both the operation device 10300 and the operation device 10300 are configured with a fastening portion (female screw forming portion) that opens toward the metal main body portion 10014a side (back side), and the metal main body portion 10014a is penetrated at a position corresponding to the fastening portion. A hole is drilled. A fastening member (male screw) is inserted through the through-hole from the back side of the metal main body 10014a, and the lower tray unit 6400 is screwed into the fastening portion and tightened.
Alternatively, the operation device 10300 is fastened and fixed to the front frame 10014 .

As shown in FIGS. 211 and 212, the operation device 10300 is held between the upper tray 17 and the lower tray unit 6400. As shown in FIGS. That is, the upper plate 17 is the operating device 10
300 holds the operation device 10300 from the upper rear, and the lower tray unit 6400 holds the operation device 10300 from the lower front of the operation device 10300 . The configuration in which the operation device 10300 is held by the front frame 10014 will be described in order below.

213 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 10014, and FIG.
4 is an exploded front view of FIG. 213 and 214, illustration of the upper half of the front frame 10014 and the lower tray unit 6400 is omitted. Further, in FIG. 213, the operation device 10
300 is disassembled from the metal main body 10014a and is shown in the direction viewed from the back side, and for easy understanding, the assembly direction lines connecting the insertion holes 6801R and 6801L and their fastening points are shown. is illustrated by imaginary lines.

When the operation device 10300 is assembled into the front frame 10014 by fitting it from the front side, the bottom surface of the bottom member De arranged below the inner case member 10330
It abuts so as to ride on the upper surface of a plate-like protrusion T10 that protrudes in a plate-like shape from the front side of the .

A bottom member De that is fastened and fixed to the bottom surface of the inner case member 10330 from below is arranged on the lower side of the operation device 10300 . The bottom member De mainly includes a fitting recess De1 (see FIG. 212) that is open to the front side, and a recess De2 that is open on the side (lower side) opposite to the inner case member 10330 side and the back side. Prepare.

The concave portion De2 is formed in a U-shape when viewed from the rear with an open bottom, and the plate-like convex portion T
The operation device 10300 can be aligned with the front frame 10014 by fitting the plate-like projection T10 and the recess De2. Further, since the plate-like protrusion T10 is formed in a thick plate shape, the vertical position of the operation device 10300 can be maintained by the rigidity of the plate-like protrusion T10. In addition, the mating here is
It is sufficient that the bottom member De can be positioned with respect to the plate-shaped convex portion T10 regardless of the presence or absence of the gap.

At the tip of the plate-shaped protrusion T10, a pair of left and right cylindrical protrusions projecting toward the front side in a thin columnar shape and a fastening screw can be screwed at an intermediate position between the pair of cylindrical protrusions. A female screw hole is formed.

The pair of columnar projecting portions are inserted into recesses formed in the corresponding wall portions (front side wall portions) of the recessed portion De2 for the purpose of aligning the plate-shaped projecting portion T10 and the bottom member De. A fastening screw that is screwed into the female screw hole is inserted into an insertion hole that is drilled at a corresponding position in the concave portion De2. The bottom member De is fastened and fixed.

As described above, the concave portion De2 formed in the rear half portion of the bottom member De rides on the plate-like convex portion T10, while the opposite front half portion (see FIG. 215(a)) serves as a plate-like support. It is arranged above the planar plate-like portion 6426a of the portion 6426. As shown in FIG. That is, the front half of the bottom member De is made of the resin member 6427
is disposed opposite to the plane plate-like portion 6426a in the up-down direction with the .theta.

It should be noted that the term "contactable" here is not limited to any situation. For example, the operation device 10300 may normally be in contact with the resin member 6427 due to its own weight. A mode in which the resin member 6427 and the bottom member De come into contact when the operation device 10300 is displaced downward due to the execution of a vibration presentation may also be adopted.

After the operation device 10300 is fitted into the front frame 10014, the operation device 10300 is attached to the front frame 1 by tightening the fastening screws that are inserted through the front frame 10014 from the rear side.
Fixed to 0014.

That is, the inner case member 10330 of the operation device 10300 includes a plurality of (three in this embodiment) fastening portions 10333 formed so that fastening screws can be screwed therein, and the fastening portions 10333
The metal plate portion 10334 is a metal plate covering one of the above, and is mainly provided with a metal plate portion 10334 which is provided with an insertion hole through which a fastening screw can be inserted and can receive a compressive force due to fastening and fixing.

The fastening portion 10333 is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the edge portion of an insertion hole H10a that is drilled in the metal main body portion 10014a with a diameter that allows the fastening screw to pass therethrough. An intermediate plate made of hard resin is disposed on the front side of the metal body portion 10014a, and a through hole is formed in the intermediate plate around the insertion hole H10a, so that the fastening portion 10333 can be connected through the through hole. It can be brought into contact with the metal body portion 10014a.

Here, the insertion hole H10a corresponding to the fastening portion 10333 in which the metal plate portion 10334 is arranged
, the through-hole of the intermediate plate is made larger than the other through-holes H10a. The shape of this through-hole is designed to have a size that does not interfere with the metal plate portion 10334 that is provided on the rear side of the fastening portion 10333 .

As a result, as the operation device 10300 is fastened and fixed to the front frame 10014,
The metal plate portion 10334 can be brought into close contact with the metal body portion 10014a. That is, since the metal plate portion 10334 and the metal body portion 10014a can be electrically connected, it can be given the same role as a so-called ground wire. As a result, the safety of the player who operates the operation device 10300 can be ensured.

By arranging the metal plate portion 10334 therebetween, the metal plate portion 10334 can have the function of a washer. As a result, the operation device 10300 is connected to the metal body portion 1001
It can be firmly fixed to 4a.

In addition, the shape of the metal plate portion 10334 is not limited to the present embodiment, and various aspects are exemplified. For example, instead of forming a through-hole, a pair of claws straddling the screw-in hole of the fastening portion 10333 may be provided. In addition, when the claws are formed to be shifted forward and backward, it is possible to have the function of a spring washer and to increase the fastening strength.

The places where the operation device 10300 is fastened to the front frame 10014 are the insertion holes 6801R,
Except for 6801L, they are concentrated on the back side. By concentrating the portions required for fastening on the back side, the degree of design freedom on the front side can be improved, and the design can be improved.

On the other hand, simply fastening and fixing the operation device 10300 on the back side is a problem because the operation device 10300 tends to be displaced downward when a load is applied to the front side of the operation device 10300 in a sinking direction (downward direction). Therefore, in the present embodiment, a structure is adopted in which the front side of the operation device 10300 is restrained from sinking displacement while concentrating the fastening points on the rear side. This will be explained in order below.

First, the action of the fitting recess De1 will be described. In the operation device 10300, the fitting recess De1 formed on the lower front side fits with the fitting portion 6426d (see FIGS. 211 and 212). As a result, the vertical movement of the front side portion of the operation device 10300 is restricted by the fitting portion 6426d, and sinking displacement is suppressed.

Next, the action of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 will be described. As shown in FIGS. 213 and 214, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are
The back side edge of the upper half of the swing operation member 10310 arranged on the back side is provided with a plate-like overhanging portion.

That is, the left front cover 10321 has a plate-like protruding portion 10321c protruding in a plate shape along the rear side edge of the upper half, and a plurality of partial protruding portions 103 further protruding from the plate-like protruding portion 10321c.
21d and .

Similarly, the right front cover 10322 has a plate-like protruding portion 10322c that protrudes in a plate shape along the rear side edge of the upper half portion. It should be noted that the right front cover 10322 has a partial projecting portion 1032
The portion corresponding to 1d is not formed, and the periphery of the plate-like projecting portion 10322c can be arbitrarily designed.

The plate-like overhanging portions 10321c, 10322c and the partial overhanging portion 10321d are
It is configured as a part that is inserted into and fitted to a. Here, the housing recess 17 of this embodiment
The configuration of a will be described.

As shown in FIGS. 213 and 214, the accommodation recess 17a has a lower edge projecting portion 10017b projecting to the front side with substantially the same projecting width across the left and right of the accommodation recess 17a, and a left and right extension of the accommodation recess 17a. On both sides of the lower edge projecting portion 10017b, the lower edge projecting portion 100 is located at a position slightly longer than the plate thickness of the plate-shaped projecting portions 10321c and 10322c in a manner projecting toward the front side.
17b and a plurality of opposed protruding portions 1 forming a groove between the lower edge protruding portion 10017b and the lower edge protruding portion 10017b
0017c, a plurality of positioning holes 10017d drilled in the front-rear direction as elongated holes whose upper side is aligned with the lower edge protruding portion 10017b, and the right facing protruding portion 10017c. and an escape hole 10017e provided.

When assembling the operation device 10300 into the housing recess 17a, the plate-like projecting portion 10321
c, 10322c are inserted into the grooves between the lower edge protruding portion 10017b and the opposing protruding portion 10017c, and the plurality of partial protruding portions 10321d are inserted into the plurality of positioning holes 10017d, respectively, so that the left front cover 10321 and A right front cover 10322 is fitted and supported in the housing recess 17a.

In this case, the plate-like projecting portions 10321c and 10322c are connected to the lower edge projecting portion 10017b.
and the opposing projecting portion 10017c, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are restrained from being displaced in the vertical direction.

In addition, by inserting (fitting) the plurality of partial projecting portions 10321d into the plurality of positioning holes 10017d, it is possible to easily align the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 with respect to the accommodation recess 17a. As a result, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be prevented from being displaced in the vertical and horizontal directions.

Furthermore, since the accommodation recess 17a is formed in an arch shape that opens on the front side, and the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are accommodated in contact with each other on the inner side of the arch.
Displacement of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 in the left-right direction and the rear side direction can be suppressed.

With this configuration, the swing operation member 10310 of the operation device 10300 is positioned upward, and displacement of the operation device 10300 is suppressed when the player applies a backward load to the swing operation member 10310. (Early return to original position).

Here, when the player operates the swing operation member 10310, it is mainly operated with the left hand. When operating the arranged operation device 10300, the left hand is stretched obliquely to the right front, so it is rare that the load during the operation does not have a left-right component.

Therefore, since a load in the left-right direction is applied to the swing operation member 10310 at the same time as the load in the rearward direction is applied, the operation device 10300 may be displaced in the rearward and lateral directions.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the operation device 10300 is surrounded by the arch-shaped portion of the housing recess 17a, and the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are arranged therebetween. The restoring force of the deformation of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 that can be generated is determined by the operation device 10300 in the left-right direction and the front-rear direction.
to return to its original position. As a result, even if the operation device 10300 is displaced, the position can be quickly restored.

From the above configurations, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 103 for the accommodation recess 17a
22 displacement can be suppressed. That is, the operation device 10 for the accommodation recess 17a
Suppression of the displacement of 300 can be aimed at.

The escape hole 10017e functions as a through-hole through which the fixing assembly 6802 of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322, which will be described later, is inserted. By forming the escape hole 10017e, the fixing assembly 6802 can be disposed at a position that protrudes outward from the plate-like projecting portion 10321c.

Next, the surroundings of the operation device 10300 will be described. First, the operation device 1030
An outline of the internal structure of 0 will be described. Figure 215(a), Figure 215(b), Figure 216(a)
) and FIG. 216(b) show the operation device 1 on the CCXVa-CCXVa line in FIG.
0300 is a partial cross-sectional view.

FIG. 215(a) shows a state in which the swing operation member 10310 is arranged in the upward position (initial position in this embodiment), and FIG. 215(b), FIG.
In b), the swing operation member 10310 is in the downward position (the depressed position in this embodiment).
, is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 215(a) and 215(b), the operation device 10300 includes a lever support shaft to which a lever member 10340 that pivotally supports a swing operation member 10310 with a pivot rod 10363 is fixed to an inner case member 10330. It is journalled at 10331d1. Therefore, the swinging operation member 10310 that can be operated by the player is displaced along with the movement of the shaft support rod 10363 arranged on an arc locus centered on the lever support shaft 10331d1, and Displacement is possible in combination with displacement in the rotational direction, and the displacement is caused by the operation of the player.

That is, by gripping the swinging operation member 10310 arranged in the upward position and applying a load toward the rear, the swinging operation member 10310 can be pushed in in a manner of rotational displacement about the pivot rod 10363. (push operation).

Also, by gripping the swinging operation member 10310 arranged in the upward position and applying a load toward the front side downward, the swinging operation member 10310 is pushed down in a manner of rotational displacement about the lever support shaft 10331d1. (press down operation).

In addition, when the swing operation member 10310 is arranged in the downward position, the posture correction device 1
The action of 0312 (the action of applying a load to the swing operation member 10310 in the direction away from the wall member 10322b) causes the swing operation member 10310 to assume a posture pushed backward with respect to the lever member 10340 (backward roll posture, 17y with respect to the lever member 10340 from the initial position). Therefore, since the angle of change in posture of the swing operation member 10310 is smaller than the rotation angle of the lever support shaft 10331d1, it is possible to suppress the change in the vibration direction of the vibration device 10366 due to the rotational displacement of the lever member 10340. .

Also, when the swing operation member 10310 is arranged at the downward position, the swing operation member 10
When the lens member 10317 displaceably supported by 310 is pushed (push operation), the swinging operation member 10310 is rotationally displaced around the pivot rod 10363 by the load during the operation, and falls forward. by displacing the vibrating device 10366 in the direction Y17c
(see FIG. 216(b)).

In this way, in this embodiment, the swing operation member 10310 is configured to be able to receive loads for operation from a plurality of directions.
can also be configured differently.

The lever member 10340 is rotationally driven around a lever support shaft 10331d1 by a drive motor. As a result, even if the swing operation member 10310 is pushed down and placed in the downward position, the drive motor controls the rotation of the lever member 10340 so that the swing operation member 10310 can be returned to the upward position.

A vibrating device 10366 composed of a voice coil motor that generates linear vibration is provided at the tip of the lever member 10340, and the vibration of the vibrating device 10366 is applied to the lens member 10317 by direct or indirect contact. configured to be transmitted.

The vibrating device 10366 is a device that causes a pair of members to move toward and away from each other in a linear direction by means of electromagnetic force.
A member arranged on the lever member 10340 side), a cylinder having an outer diameter smaller than the inner peripheral surface of the bobbin member and a cylinder having an inner diameter larger than the outer peripheral surface of the bobbin member are coaxially arranged. A pressing member connected by a disk-shaped plate (a member arranged on the lens member 10317 side)
and are mainly provided. The pressing member is made of a magnetic material whose polarity changes in the axial direction of the inner cylinder.

Vibration device 10366 is configured to generate linear vibration along direction Y17a along a straight line passing through the center of pivot rod 10363 . In addition, in this embodiment, the direction Y17a is configured to match the direction of displacement of the lens member 10317 .

As a result, the energy of the vibration of the vibrating device 10366 can be utilized to the maximum extent to vibrate (displace) the lens member 10317, and the effect of the vibration of the vibrating device 10366 can be improved.

Next, details of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 will be described in order. 217 is a front perspective view of the operation device 10300, and FIG. 218 is a rear perspective view of the operation device 10300. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 217, a left front cover 10321 and a right front cover 10322 are arranged behind the swing operation member 10310 of the operation device 10300 . left front cover 1032
1 and the right front cover 10322 have outer ends (ends opposite to the swing operation member 10310).
is curved, the center of the radius of curvature of the curved surface is arranged on the swing operation member 10310 side. As a result, a large space can be secured around the swing operation member 10310, so that the movable range of the swing operation member 10310 can be secured, and the swing operation member 10310 can be grasped by the player. Make sure you have enough space to put your finger in.

In addition, since the curve of the end portion is configured in a series so as to surround the swing operation member 10310,
Designability can be improved, and deformation of the curved portion can be divided and caused as a whole, so that the allowable range of deformation of the curved portion can be widened.

As shown in FIGS. 217 and 218, left front cover 10321 and right front cover 10322
are through holes 6801R and 6801L drilled in the front-rear direction so that fastening screws fastened to the left and right ends of the housing recess 17a can be inserted, and the fastening screws separate the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 from the inner case member 10330. Securing assembly 680 for permanent fixation
2 and a.

The left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 have insertion holes 6 arranged at both left and right ends.
801R and 6801L are fastened and fixed to the accommodation recess 17a. Both the left and right ends are farthest from the load applied to the operation device 10300 (mainly the load in the direction along the plane perpendicular to the left-right direction passing through the center in the left-right direction), and the load is less likely to be transmitted. 6801R
, 6801L and fastened and fixed to the housing recess 17a from being loosened.

The fixing assembly 6802 is formed at the interface between the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322. As shown in FIG.
321 and the center of the right front cover 10322 in the left-right direction (plate-like projecting portions 10321c, 10322
c is located on the rearmost side) to the right. That is, the left front cover 10
321 and the right front cover 10322 are not formed in a shape to be disassembled at the left-right center, the left front cover 10321 is formed beyond the left-right center to the right side, and the formation of the right front cover 10322 remains on the right side of the left-right center. In other words, the left front cover 10321 is formed in a wider range than the right front cover 10322 .

In the present embodiment, the boundary between the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 on the rear side is displaced from the center in the left-right direction, so that one member (main body) is placed in the central portion (the portion located on the rearmost side) of the accommodation recess 17a. In the embodiment, the alignment with the housing recess 17a can be completed by inserting the left front cover 10321), which makes assembly easier than when alignment is performed using both members.

Further, by shifting the position of the fixing assembly 6802 from the center in the left-right direction, it is possible to reduce the load transmitted when the operation device 10300 is operated. Here, a swinging operation member 10310, which is operated by the player, can be placed close to the rear side of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 (especially the upward position (Fig. 21).
8)), there is a risk that the fastening screw may loosen due to the transmission of the load when the operation device 10300 is operated. In contrast, in the present embodiment, the fixed assembly 6802 is displaced left and right from the left-right center where the load during operation is maximum, so that the transmitted load is reduced compared to the load during operation. As a result, loosening of the fastening screws in the fixed assembly 6802 can be suppressed.

In this way, the fixing assembly 6802 is shifted left and right from the left-right center, and the left front cover 1032 is
1 and the right front cover 10322, the assembly efficiency can be improved, and loosening of the fastening screws can be prevented.

Both the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are
2 is not directly fastened and fixed to the inner case member 10330 . That is, the fixed assembly 680
2 , the fastening screw inserted through the right front cover 10322 is fastened to the left front cover 10321 .

However, for the inner case member 10330, the fixing assembly 6802 is the inner case member 1
0330 (illustrated by imaginary lines in FIG. 220), and the fixing assembly 6802 sandwiches the upper plate from both sides (see FIG. 218). By configuring in this way, the front left cover 10321 and the front right cover 10321 and the front right cover 10321 and the front right cover 10321 can be mounted more easily than when the front left cover 10321 and the front right cover 10322 are respectively fastened to the inner case member 10330 .
0322 can be reduced.

Thereby, the bending of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be utilized. That is, when many fastening points are provided on the front left cover 10321 and the front right cover 10322, the rigidity of the fastening screws makes it difficult for the front left cover 10321 and the front right cover 10322 to bend, and there is a risk that they may be easily damaged.

On the other hand, in order to make it easier to flex while maintaining the fastening points, the plate thickness of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 should be reduced. There is a risk of

In contrast, by reducing the fastening locations as in the present embodiment, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be sufficiently bent without being affected by the rigidity of the fastening screws. Accordingly, the bending of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be utilized without excessively thinning the plate thickness of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 .

219 and 221 are exploded front perspective views of the operating device 10300 and FIG.
222 is an exploded rear perspective view of the operating device 10300. FIG. Figures 219 and 22
0, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are connected to the left cover member 103.
23 and the right cover member 10324 can be disassembled into left and right.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 221 and 222, the left front cover 10321 is attached to the left cover member 10.
323, the right front cover 10322 is fastened and fixed to the right cover member 10324 at one point (adjustment long holes 10323a, 10324a) in the front-rear direction.

Therefore, before the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are fastened and fixed to each other, the left front cover 10321 is attached to the left cover member 10323 .
22 are movable relative to the right cover member 10324, so that the assembly positions of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be easily adjusted. This will be explained below.

The operation device 10300 is arranged on the front side of the inner case member 10330 in such a manner that the rear side thereof is formed along the curved surfaces of the cover members 10344 and 10345 (see FIG. 215) and the left and right edges of the cover members 10344 and 10345 are hidden. a left front cover 10321, a right front cover 10322, and a left cover member 10323, a right cover member 10324 fastened and fixed to the inner case member 10330 from the left and right directions.

The left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324 are respectively provided with long adjustment holes 10323a and 10324a which are drilled in the front-rear direction and elongated in the left-right direction at the outer upper end portions.

The long adjustment holes 10323a and 10324a are holes for fastening and fixing the front left cover 10321 and the front right cover 10322, respectively. Even if the shape varies, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 1032 with respect to the swing operation member 10310
2 can be easily adjusted in the horizontal direction.

The front left cover 10321 and the front right cover 10322 are provided with long adjustment holes 10323a and 1032.
It is fastened and fixed to 4a in the front-rear direction, and is fastened and fixed in the left-right direction at end surfaces facing each other in the left-right direction.

As shown in FIG. 219, the right front cover 10322 has a fitting recess 10322a recessed rightward from the end surface of the right front cover 10322 that abuts against the left front cover 10321, and is retained in the front-rear direction by the fitting recess 10322a. and a wall member 10322b mounted in a manner in which the right front cover 10322 and the left front cover 10321 are assembled (Fig. 217
), the leftward movement is stopped by the end surface of the left front cover 10321, so that the wall member 10322b is held inside the fitting recess 10322a.

With such a configuration, when replacing the wall member 10322b, the right front cover 10322
The wall member 10322b can be replaced only by removing the
This is where the load from the posture correction device 10312 (see FIG. 215) is repeatedly received). Therefore, maintenance efficiency can be improved.

First, the procedure of assembly work will be described.
22 are assembled to the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324 (see FIG. 2).
21 and 222 to FIGS. 219 and 220), after being fastened and fixed, the left front cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324 are fastened to the inner case member 10330 to form the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover. 10322 are aligned,
After that, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are fastened and fixed.

Here, when the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 cannot move relative to the left cover member 10323 and the right front cover member 10324, when correcting the positional deviation of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322, the left cover member 10323 and the right front cover 10323 need not move. By loosening the fastening of the right cover member 10324 to the inner case member 10330, the left cover member 1032
3 and the right cover member 10324, it is necessary to make corrections.

In anticipation of this, the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324 are not fully tightened to the inner case member 10330, but rather weakly fastened and fixed.
0322, after fastening and fixing the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 (on the downstream side of the assembly procedure), the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 103
24 to the inner case member 10330 (on the upstream side of the assembly procedure).

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are movable relative to the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324. After fastening and fixing to the member 10330, the positions of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be adjusted. Therefore, assembly work can be simplified.

The left front cover 10321 and the right front cover member 10322 are provided with shielding plate portions 6803L and 6803R, respectively, whose front edge portions are arranged to face the guide portion 10344a of the upper cover member 10344. As shown in FIG. The shielding plate portions 6803L and 6803R have the role of closing the gap between the upper cover member 10344 and the inner case member 10330 (see FIG. 220), and allow the piano wire to enter the gap and enter the pachinko machine 10010. As a countermeasure against fraudulent actions and mischievous actions of pouring liquid, the gap between the guide portion 10344a is designed to be small (in this embodiment, the clearance is designed to be 0.3 mm).

On the other hand, if the positional relationship between the shielding plate portions 6803L and 6803R and the guide portion 10344a is displaced due to the influence of the load (impact) during operation, and the gap is closed, the guide portion 10344a and the shielding plate portion are closed when the operation device 10300 is operated. 6803L and 6803R rub against each other, and there is a risk of generation of resin shavings. Resin shavings have little effect as long as they are small, but if a large amount of shavings clog the detection groove of a light transmission type switch represented by a so-called photocoupler, the shavings may block light and induce erroneous detection. It is thought that there is Therefore, there is a possibility that the degree of freedom of selection of switches that can be used is limited.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, as described above, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 1
Since the fixed assembly 6802 as the fastening point of 0322 is arranged at a position left and right away from the left-right center position (the point where the load during operation and the maximum load during operation occurs), the impact transmitted to the fastening point The load can be reduced, and loosening of the fastening screw can be prevented.

As a result, it is possible to suppress the displacement of the positional relationship between the shield plate portions 6803L and 6803R and the guide portion 10344a, and it is possible to prevent the generation of shavings of the resin, thereby suppressing erroneous detection. In this embodiment, a photocoupler type detection switch FC is arranged on the front side of the shielding plate portions 6803L and 6803R.

Note that the detection switch FC is a switch for detecting a pushing operation of the swing operation member 10310 in the backward rotation direction, and is fixed to the connecting portion 10344c. A thin metal plate MB is fixed inside the swing operation member 10310 so as to face the detection switch FC.

When the swinging operation member 10310 is pushed backward, the metal plate MB enters the detection groove of the detection switch FC and the detection light is blocked, so that it is determined that the pushing operation has been performed. be able to. In this embodiment, neither the detection switch FC nor the metal plate MB is subjected to a load, so durability can be improved compared to the case where a load is applied.

The front left cover 10321 and the front right cover 10322 are shielding plate portions 6803L and 6803R.
A curved plate portion 6804L, 6804R formed as a continuous curved surface on the front side of the lower plate portion 6805L, a lower plate portion 6805L formed continuously as a fan-shaped plate portion below the curved plate portions 6804L, 6804R, 6805R and, mainly.

The curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R have a curved shape (that is, the lever support shaft 10331d1 (Fig. 215 ) with a central angle of about 90 degrees).

The lower plate portions 6805L and 6805R are protruding interfering portions 68 that protrude from the rear surface side to the rear surface side.
05a. The protruding interference portion 6805a is located on the left cover member 13331 in the left-right direction.
and slightly inside the inner edge Rm1 of the right cover member 13332, and is formed to protrude toward the rear side from the front side surfaces of the left cover member 13331 and the right cover member 13332 in the front-rear direction.

As a result, the projecting interfering portion 6805a is positioned between the front left cover 10321 and the front right cover 1032.
2, the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324 are respectively assembled (see FIG. 220), the lateral displacement is restricted by the inner edge Rm1. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the left front cover 10321 or the right front cover 10322 from being displaced laterally outward, thereby preventing the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 from being separated from each other and disassembled.

The left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 have curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R.
and connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R, which are portions that connect the outer peripheries of the lower plate portions 6805L and 6805R, respectively, spread outward in a front view, and curve toward the front side at the ends of the spread.

The left front cover 10321 has a plurality of fastening portions 6802L, 6807L, 6808L which are formed at the right end so that fastening screws can be screwed in and arranged vertically. Also, the right front cover 103
22 is a plurality of insertion holes 68 arranged vertically at the left end and through which fastening screws can be inserted.
02R, 6807R, and 6808R.

The left front cover 10321, the right front cover 10322, and the inner case member 10330 are fixed to each other by a plurality of fastening portions and insertion holes distributed in the vertical direction (direction along the operation direction of the operation device 10300). As a result, the load and impact caused by the operation of the operation device 10300 can be distributed to each fastening portion, and loosening of fastening screws can be suppressed.

Furthermore, since it is possible to suppress the occurrence of misalignment at the position of the gap between the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322, the design portion (particularly, the
Lower plate portions 6805L and 6805R and connecting curved portions 6806L and 68 which are easily visible in a front view
06R, see FIG. 207). These fastening portions and insertion holes have different roles. They will be described in order below.

The fastening portion 6802L and the insertion hole 6802R are assembled in such a manner as to sandwich the insertion hole H23a that is drilled in the left-right direction in the portion protruding from the upper surface of the inner case member 10330, and are fixed with the inner case member 10330 sandwiched by fastening screws. . It should be noted that instead of the so-called "fastening together" aspect, the tip of the cylindrical portion extending rightward from the fastening portion 6802L is fastened and fixed in a manner that abuts on the left surface of the plate portion in which the insertion hole 6802R is formed. . In other words, the fastening does not apply a compressive load to the portion where the insertion hole H23a is formed.

In addition, a gap is provided by designing the outer diameter of the cylindrical portion extending rightward from the fastening portion 6802L to be slightly shorter than the inner diameter of the insertion hole H23a. Even if the inner case member 10330 is displaced downward due to the load applied to the operation device 10300 during operation, the fastening portion 6802L and the inner case member 10330 can operate independently within the range of the gap described above. Therefore, when a minute displacement that can occur in the inner case member 10330 occurs, the fixed assembly 6
A similar displacement of 802 can be avoided.

It should be noted that the extension length of the tubular portion extending rightward from the fastening portion 6802L may be slightly shortened so that a compression load may be applied to the portion where the insertion hole H23a is drilled during fastening. . In this case, since the restoring force of the portion where the insertion hole H23a is drilled increases the fastening force, the fixing assembly 6
Loosening of the fastening screw at 802 can be avoided.

The fastening portion 6807L is a portion into which a fastening screw is inserted through an insertion hole H23b drilled in the left-right direction in a portion of the inner case member 10330 that protrudes toward the front side. The left front cover 10321 is fastened and fixed to the inner case member 10330 by screwing in the fastening screw. Note that, in the present embodiment, the portions where only the left front cover 10321 and the inner case member 10330 are fastened and fixed are only fastening portions by the fastening portion 6807L and the insertion hole H23b.

The insertion hole 6807R is a through hole through which a fastening screw is inserted to be fastened and fixed to a fastening portion T23a formed so as to be screwable in the left-right direction at a portion of the inner case member 10330 that protrudes toward the front side. By screwing in this fastening screw, the right front cover 10322 is attached to the inner case member 1 .
0330 is fastened and fixed. In this embodiment, only the right front cover 10322 and the inner case member 10330 are fastened and fixed to the fastening portion T23b and the insertion hole 6807.
It is only a fastening part by R.

The fastening portion 6808L and the insertion hole 6808R are portions that are directly fastened and fixed by screwing a fastening screw inserted through the insertion hole 6808R into the fastening portion 6808L. Note that, in the present embodiment, the portions where only the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are fastened and fixed are only fastening portions by the fastening portions 6808L and the insertion holes 6808R.

As described above, in the present embodiment, fastening portions and insertion holes are formed at a plurality of locations along the direction in which the facing portions of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are formed.
The combination of objects to be concluded is configured differently. As a result, when assembling the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 to the inner case member 10330, it is not necessary to fasten the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 at once, so the assembling work can be facilitated. The assembly procedure is described below.

First, if one of the left front cover 10321 or the right front cover 10322 is attached to the inner case member 10330 and fastened at even one place, either the left front cover 10321 or the right front cover 10322 is prevented from coming off from the inner case member 10330. be able to.

In this case, either the left front cover 10321 or the right front cover 10322 may be attached first. When the front left cover 10321 is attached first, the front left cover 10321 is fastened and fixed by screwing a fastening screw into the fastening portion 6807L through the insertion hole H23b.
321 can be fixed to the inner case member 10330, and when the right front cover 10322 is attached first, the right front cover 10322 can be fixed by screwing a fastening screw into the fastening portion T23a through the insertion hole 6807R. can be secured to the inner case member 10330 .

Next, the other of left front cover 10321 or right front cover 10322 is attached to inner case member 10 .
330 and similarly fasten and fix at one point, a state in which the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are independently fastened to the inner case member 10330 can be constructed.

Thereafter, although the order is not specified, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are attached to the inner case member 10 by screwing the fastening screws into the fixing assembly 6802 and fastening and fixing them.
330 can be integrally fixed. Also, the fastening portion 6808L and the insertion hole 6808R
Only the front left cover 10321 and the front right cover 10322 can be fastened and fixed to each other by screwing the fastening screws in and fixing them.

In this way, by also forming portions where the front left cover 10321 and the front right cover 10322 are fastened together, compared to the case where the front left cover 10321 and the front right cover 10322 are assembled to the inner case member 10330 only by fastening and fixing, The number of fastening points can be reduced.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the operation of fastening the front left cover 10321 and the front right cover 10322, all fastening screws are configured to be inserted from right to left. Therefore, compared with the case where the fastening screws are inserted in both left and right directions, the efficiency of the fastening work can be improved.

In addition, the screwing directions of the fastening screws fixed to the fastening portions 6802L, 6807L, and 6808L are unified in the horizontal direction along the rotation axis of the lever member 10340. As shown in FIG. Operation device 103
00, the operation direction of each operation portion is the direction along the plane orthogonal to the direction of the rotation axis of the lever member 10340. Therefore, the direction along the rotation axis of the lever member 10340 is the operation device 103
00 is a direction orthogonal to the operation direction of each operation unit. That is, when the load or impact during operation is generated along the direction of operation, there is no component in the screwing direction of the fastening screw. As a result, it is possible to prevent the tightening screw from loosening due to a load or impact when operating the operation device 10300 .

In this embodiment, the operation device 10300 includes a plurality of operation parts (parts operated by operation).
40, etc.), but since all operating parts are designed to operate in a direction orthogonal to the rotation axis of the lever member 10340, the screwing direction of the fastening screw is set to the left-right direction along the rotation axis of the lever member 10340.

On the other hand, if the operating portion does not operate on a plane orthogonal to the direction of the rotation axis of the lever member 10340 (for example, if there is an operating portion that is pushed in the left and right oblique directions), each operating portion A direction found as a balance (average) of the operation directions (for example, an intermediate angle direction) may be set as the direction of fastening, or an operation portion where operation instructions are frequently given (operation instructions are rarely generated) may be set as the fastening direction. The fastening direction may be set by ignoring the operation part that only performs the fastening.

223(a) is a front perspective view of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322, and FIG. 223(b) is a rear perspective view of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322. FIG. As shown in FIGS. 223(a) and 223(b), the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 have a gap between the curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R for arranging the lever member 10340 (see FIG. 220). A plurality of surfaces opposed to each other are in contact with each other vertically, except for the portion where the contact portion is formed and the portion where the fitting recess 10322a is formed.

In the contact portion, a plate-like portion extends rightward from the left front cover 10321 on the side that is not visually recognized by the player. That is, for example, the shielding plate portion 6803L has a lower overlapping portion 6803La extending rightward along its lower surface (see FIG. 223(a)).

Since the shielding plate portion 6803R is supported by the lower overlapping portion 6803La, the shielding plate portion 68
03R is restricted from being displaced downward with respect to the shielding plate portion 6803L. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent a gap from being generated between the shielding plate portions 6803R and 6803L, and it is possible to suppress the liquid from passing between the shielding plate portions 6803R and 6803L.

In this embodiment, an inner case member 10330 (see FIG. 218) arranged below the shielding plate portions 6803R and 6803L and a lever member 10340 in which the rear side portion is accommodated are provided.
, a drive motor that drives the lever member 10340, a transmission mechanism such as a cam or gear that transmits the drive force of the drive motor, and an electrical system (such as a substrate) that drives the drive motor. can be done.

In addition, while the cuts of the shield plate portions 6803R and 6803L are formed on the right side of the center of the swing operation member 10310, the cuts (connecting surfaces) of the left and right members constituting the inner case member 10330 are formed on the swing operation member. It is arranged on the same plane as the left and right central position of 10310 . Therefore, even if liquid passes between the shielding plate portions 6803R and 6803L, the liquid can be prevented from immediately reaching the gap between the left and right members forming the inner case member 10330. FIG.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the drive motor that drives the lever member 10340 is arranged to the left of the center of the inner case member 10330 (the inner case member 10
218), shielding plate portions 6803R, 6803L
Even if the lower part between the
Since the water can flow downward along the right outer surface of the drive motor, it is possible to avoid the drive motor from getting wet.

Further, for example, the lower plate portion 6805L includes a rear overlapping portion 6805Lb extending rightward along the rear surface below the fitting recess 10322a. Since the rear overlapping portion 6805Lb supports the lower plate portion 6805R from behind, the lower plate portion 6805R is restricted from being displaced rearward with respect to the lower plate portion 6805L. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the formation of a gap between the lower plate portions 6805R and 6805L, and it is possible to suppress the liquid from passing between the lower plate portions 6805R and 6805L.

The liquid that has passed below the lower plate portions 6805R and 6805L reaches the plate-like support portion 6426 (
232 and 234), when a large amount of liquid continues to pass through, it passes between the main body portion 6411 of the covering base member 6410 and the main body box portion 6421 of the lower plate forming member 6420, and flows toward the through hole 6412, There is a possibility that it may flow along the recessed shape portion 6414 . In particular, the through hole 6
If the liquid flows downward from 412, the liquid may flow downward from the lower surface of the outer frame of the front frame 10014 and splash the player or wet the senryo box.

In the present embodiment, as will be described later, the through hole 6412 is sandwiched between the lower tray forming member 6420 and the ball discharging device 6430. Therefore, the passage of the liquid is easily prevented by sandwiching without a gap. By suppressing the liquid from passing between the lower plate portions 6805R and 6805L as in the embodiment, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the liquid will splash on the player or wet the box. A pachinko machine 10010 that can be played comfortably can be configured.

As shown in FIGS. 223(a) and 223(b), shielding plate portions 6803L, 6803R,
The curved plate portions 6804L, 6804R and the lower plate portions 6805L, 6805R are provided with streaky portions D23 that are formed in streaks in a manner that they are pushed out from the front side to the back side. The streak D23 is visually recognized as a concave portion on the front surface and as a convex portion on the back surface due to its formation mode.

The striped portion D23 includes shielding plate portions 6803L and 6803R and curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R.
It also functions as a portion for adjusting the rigidity of the lower plate portions 6805L and 6805R. Namely
The rigidity along the direction in which the streak portion D23 is formed is improved while maintaining (or reducing) the rigidity in the direction perpendicular to the streak portion D23, compared to the case of forming a simple thin plate. (anisotropy). This will be explained using the curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R as an example.

The curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R are arranged between the lever member 10340 and the housing recess 17a (see FIG. 213) and have a role of filling the gap. Here, the operation device 10300 including the lever member 10340 is configured to be displaceable downward by a slight amount due to a load or impact during operation, in order to prevent the reaction force returned to the player during operation from becoming excessive. On the other hand, for the purpose of keeping the arrangement of the upper plate 17 unchanged, the accommodation recess 17a is configured to be non-displaceable.

That is, when the operation device 10300 is operated, a gap may occur between the lever member 10340 and the housing recess 17a. In the present embodiment, the curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R are vertically extended (elastically deformed or flexed) to accommodate changes in the distance between the lever member 10340 and the housing recess 17a. can be prevented from occurring.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the linear portions D23 are formed along the vertical direction in which the curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R are deformed (the direction in which the load is mainly directed during operation), thereby reducing deformation resistance in the vertical direction. Since it is made large (because the rigidity is made large), it is possible to suppress the occurrence of vibration and excessive deformation when restoring the shape. Thus, one purpose of designing the streak-like portion D23 in this embodiment is to take countermeasures against problems that may occur when the operation device 10300 is operated.

The striped portions D23 of the lower plate portions 6805L and 6805R are formed in a U shape when viewed from the front.
When a downward load is applied at the center, the left and right sides will withstand the upward force (pulling force is generated). That is, even if a downward load is applied when the operation device 10300 is operated and displacement occurs, the displacement can be quickly restored.

On the other hand, even if a load occurs in the direction perpendicular to the streak D23, the deformation that is permissible based on the flexibility of the resin occurs, so that the load is transmitted to the V-shaped design member 6450 arranged on the downstream side. can be reduced.

The connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R are provided with streak-like portions D24 that are formed in a streak-like manner so as to be pushed out from the front side to the back side. The streak D24 is visually recognized as a concave portion on the front surface and as a convex portion on the rear surface due to its formation mode.

The end muscle portion D24 mainly includes left and right muscle portions D24a formed on the left and right sides and a center muscle portion D24b formed on the center side, which are formed as countermeasures against loads in different directions.

The left and right muscle part D24a is a muscle-like part arranged above the fastening part 6807L (the uppermost part of the fastening part on the front side), and is formed in a shape that slopes down toward the back side. This downward slope corresponds to the direction of the load such as the operation of pushing the lens member 10317 of the swing operation member 10310 (along the direction of the load). That is, the connection bending portion 6 is connected by the left and right muscles D24a
By improving the rigidity of 806L and 6806R in the direction of the left and right muscle portions D24a, the resistance to the operation load can be improved.

As for the inclination angle of the left and right muscle portions D24a, the left and right muscle portions D24a are formed such that the angle with respect to the front-rear direction is gradually increased in comparison with the left and right muscle portions disposed on the left and right center sides. Namely
The streaks extend in multiple directions. As a result, regardless of the arrangement of the swing operation member 10310, the resistance to the load when the lens member 10317 is operated can be improved.

In addition, the formation width of the connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R where the left and right muscle portions D24a are formed is
Those arranged on the left and right sides are shorter than those arranged on the left and right central sides. That is, since the formed width is shorter on the side (left and right sides) where the inclination in the front-rear direction corresponds to a larger force, the amount of deformation allowed for the connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R is reduced, and the resistance is increased. be able to. As a result, it is possible to improve the resistance to the load in the direction in which the load during operation tends to increase (the direction in which the hand is swung down), which is inclined with respect to the front-rear direction.

On the other hand, the central muscle portion D24b is a muscle-like portion arranged downward from a position equivalent to the fastening portion 6807L (the uppermost part of the fastening portion on the front side), and has a shape that slopes upward toward the back side. formed from This upward slope is the operation device 10300 (inner case member 10330 of)
corresponds to the direction of load when falls forward.

That is, the rigidity of the connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R is controlled by the central muscle portion D24b.
24b, it is possible to improve the resistance to forward tilt displacement of (the inner case member 10330 of) the operation device 10300 due to the load during the tilting operation about the rotation axis of the lever member 10340. .

In addition, the center muscle D24b is formed of a total of seven, one in the center and three on each of the left and right sides, and the left and right center muscles D24b incline toward the left and right center as they go toward the back side. As a result, when the operation device 10300 (the inner case member 10330 thereof) is tilted forward due to the load during the tilting operation about the rotation axis of the lever member 10340, even if the lateral displacement is also generated, Resistance to displacement (resistance in the left-right direction) can be improved.

The central muscle portion D24b is formed denser than the left and right muscle portions D24a. As a result, particularly in the connection bending portions 6806L and 6806R, bending in the left-right direction (deformation that expands and contracts along the left-right direction) is smaller than bending in the up-down direction (deformation that expands and contracts along the up-and-down direction). large deflection.

Therefore, for example, when a downward load is applied to the lower tray unit 6400 (see FIGS. 208 and 212) and the lower edges of the connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R are pushed down by the V-shaped design member 6450 (position of the lower edge) connected curved portions 6806L and 6806R in a manner in which the
is deformed), the load (stress) applied to the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be released (stress avoid concentration).

Even in the case of such flexural deformation, the plate-shaped overhanging portions 10321c and 10322c formed continuously from the connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R are surrounded from the back side to the left and right front sides. 10017b and the facing projecting portion 10017c (see FIGS. 213 and 214). and right front cover 1032
2 and the accommodation recess 17a.

In addition, by varying the easiness of bending of the connecting bending portions 6806L and 6806R depending on the direction, the vibration of the vibrating device 10366 of the operation device 10300 and the load caused by the operation of the operation device 10300 can be transferred to the downstream side (V-shaped design member 6450, see FIG. 232) can be changed depending on the direction of vibration or load.

That is, vibration in the vertical direction and operation load can be easily transmitted to the operation handle 51 (see FIG. 207) and the lower tray 50 via the V-shaped design member 6450, while vibration in the horizontal direction and operation load can be easily transmitted. The load (for example, the load generated when the hand holding the ball collides with the swing operation member 10310 when transferring the ball from the lower tray 50 to the upper tray 17) is transmitted to the operation handle 51 and the lower tray 50. can be made difficult. As a result, the swinging operation member 10 is not intended by the player.
Even when a load is applied to 310, vibration and load are transmitted to the operation handle 51 and the lower plate 50, which can prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

Connected curved portions 6806L and 680 are provided on the left and right outer sides of the curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R.
Where 6R is formed continuously, the plate-like projecting portion 10321c formed on the upper edge thereof,
10322c is inserted between the laterally elongated lower edge overhanging portion 10017b and the opposing overhanging portion 10017c (see FIG. 214).

Here, in the case where the vicinity of the left and right ends is shifted in the front-rear direction due to a molding error or the like in comparison between the shapes of the plate-shaped overhanging portions 10321c and 10322c and the shapes of the lower edge overhanging portion 10017b and the facing overhanging portion 10017c. (For example, when the upper ends of the connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R on the front side protrude to the front side of the accommodation recess 17a), the plate-like projecting portions 10321c and 10322
It is preferable that forming errors can be dealt with by deforming so as to soften the curve of c (displace the left and right ends toward the back side).

In this respect, in the present embodiment, the curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R are formed with the streak portions D23 along the vertical direction, so that the lateral rigidity of the curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R is compared to the vertical rigidity. lowered by Therefore, plate-like projecting portions 10321c and 10322c
is deformed to the side where the curve becomes looser, the deformation of the plate-like protrusions 10321c and 10322c can be assisted by the deformation of the curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R.
The deformation width of 0321c and 10322c can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to increase the size of the forming error that can be dealt with.

In this way, the streak portion D23 does not improve (reduce) the rigidity in the forming direction and the vertical direction (horizontal direction), thereby taking measures against problems that may occur when the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are assembled. be able to.

For these reasons, the streak D23 allows the front left cover 10321 and the front right cover 10
322 (same as the operation device 10300, see FIG. 213) and the operation device 10300.

Returning to FIG. 212, description will be made. In this embodiment, the metal body portion 1001 of the front frame 10014
4a, a flat plate portion (ball guide opening 5
3 (see FIG. 214)), and the upper part of the upper part of the flat plate part, which is formed in a manner that slopes downward toward the right, is bent at the front side so as to form a bend. A plate-shaped upper plate portion that extends is provided, and a rear covering portion 10014b formed of a resin material is provided. That is, the rear covering portion 10014b is formed to have a substantially L-shaped cross section in a plane perpendicular to the straight line along the arrow LR.

The rear covering portion 10014b is a portion that defines the upper limit position and the right limit position of the lower plate 50. As shown in FIG. That is, the rear end portion of the lower plate 50 abuts (is connected to) the flat plate portion, and the right end portion of the lower plate 50 abuts (is connected to) the upper plate portion. Balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17, so-called foul balls, etc., are stored in the area (space) formed in this manner on the side where the lower plate 50 and the rear covering portion 10014b face each other. will be Next, the details of the lower tray unit 6400 that constitutes the lower tray 50 will be described.

224 is an exploded front perspective view of the lower tray unit 6400, and FIG. 225 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lower tray unit 6400. FIG. Note that in FIG. 225, each part of the lower tray unit 6400 is illustrated at an angle as viewed from below.

As shown in FIGS. 224 and 225, the lower tray unit 6400 is configured to cover the front side of the metal body 10014a of the front frame 10014 (see FIGS. 211 and 212).
A covering base member 6410 fastened and fixed to 0014a, a lower plate forming member 6420 fitted to the covering base member 6410 from above to form the lower plate 50, and a plate attached to the covering base member 6410 from below. A ball ejection device 6430 which is a shaped device and is fastened and fixed to a lower plate forming member 6420, and a lower plate forming member 64 from the back side at the left end of the covering base member 6410.
The intermediate holding member 6440 is attached to the covering base member 6410 in such a manner that it is possible to prevent the 20 from coming off, while the intermediate holding member 6440 is fastened and fixed to the metal body portion 10014a on the opposite side (rear side).
and a V-shaped design member 6450 disposed on the upper front side of the covering base member 6410 and formed of a resin material to have a V-shape when viewed from the front.

The covering base member 6410 includes a main body portion 6411 having a substantially flat lower bottom surface and a substantially box-like shape with an open rear surface and an open upper surface. A through hole 6412 is left to pass through, a protruding shape portion 6413 protrudes downward from the lower surface of the main body portion 6411 on the central side of the main body portion 6411 in the left-right direction with respect to the through hole 6412, and the protrusion is formed. On the back side of the shaped portion 6413, the protruding shaped portion 641
3 is mainly provided with a recessed shape portion 6414 that is recessed so that the thickness of the main body portion 6411 is substantially the same as that of the other portions of the main body portion 6411 .

By configuring the concave shape portion 6414, it is possible to prevent the plate thickness from becoming excessively large in the vicinity of the protruding shape portion 6413, so that the yield of resin molding is improved and stress concentration occurs in the protruding shape portion 6413. can be suppressed. The protruding shape portion 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414 have a plurality of advantageous effects at the location where the operation device 10300 is held from below, details of which will be described later.

The through-hole 6412 has a size substantially equal to the width of the bottom shape of the lower plate 50, which will be described later, and is much larger than the size of a bottom opening 6432 opened by sliding the ball extraction lever 52.

In this way, by forming the through hole 6412 large in advance, the covering base member 6410
The speed of discharging balls from the lower tray 50 can be made to correspond to the speed of discharging balls corresponding to the game characteristics realized by the pachinko machine 10010 without replacing the .

That is, the discharge speed of the balls from the lower tray 50 depends on the opening area of the bottom port 6432,
For example, if the size of the through-hole 6412 is the same as that of the bottom opening 6432, the ejection speed of the balls cannot be increased any further. On the other hand, in this embodiment, the through hole 6412
is formed large in advance, if the size of the bottom opening 6432 is changed or the arrangement of the bottom opening 6432 is changed within a range that does not exceed the through hole 6412 (design of the lower tray forming member 6420 and the ball discharging device 6430 If a change is made), it is possible to change the ejection speed (ejection mode) of balls from the lower tray 50 without replacing the covering base member 6410 . In other words, without changing the appearance of the lower tray unit 6400 visually recognized by the player (without changing the design).
, the ejection speed (ejection mode) of the ball can be changed.

The demand for changing the ball ejection speed is not limited to the case where the game characteristics of the pachinko machine 10010 are changed. For example, in amusement arcades, the pachinko machine 10010 may be installed in a manner that requires the dispensed balls to be transferred to the senryo box, or may be installed in a manner that does not require the dispensed balls to be transferred to the senryo box (a so-called “personal” machine). in the case of ).

When it is necessary to transfer the discharged balls to the senryo box, if the balls are discharged at high speed, there is a risk that the balls will overflow from the senryo box. It is desirable that

In this embodiment, the bottom opening 6432 is formed of a circular opening with a diameter of about 35 [mm], and from a comparison of the opening area and the shape of a sphere (a sphere with a diameter of about 11 [mm]), The upper limit of balls ejected simultaneously from the opening is limited to about seven.

On the other hand, when it is not necessary to transfer the put-out balls to the senryo box, there is no need to worry about the balls overflowing from the senryo box, so the desired upper limit of the discharge speed of the balls greatly changes in the increasing direction. In such an installation mode, the put out balls flow into the automatic counting machine installed in each pachinko machine 10010, so an example of the upper limit of the discharge speed is The operating speed of the ball-running device is exemplified.

By forming the through hole 6412 large in this way, there is an advantage that the discharge speed of the ball can be changed without changing the design in the front view.
There is a risk that the strength of 411 will decrease. In particular, the bottom surface of the main body portion 6411 is a portion where a load (mainly a downward load) when the player operates the operation device 10300 may be transmitted, so the size and arrangement of the through holes 6412 However, there is a risk that the load during operation will be limited to a tolerable level.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball discharging device 6430 are assembled to the covering base member 6410 in a manner that compensates for the reduction in strength due to the through holes 6412 . The lower tray forming member 6420 and the ball ejecting device 6430 are fastened and fixed to each other with the lines shown in phantom lines in FIGS. , the edge portion of the through hole 6412 is pressed against the lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball discharging device 6430 . As a result, the peripheral portion of the through-hole 6412 (for example, the laterally elongated frame portion located behind the through-hole 6412) can be reinforced with the strength of the lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball discharging device 6430.

The design mode in which the edge portion of the through hole 6412 is pressed against the lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball discharging device 6430 is not limited at all. For example, lower plate forming member 6420
Also, the edge portion of the through-hole 6412 and the lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball ejection device 6430 may be designed to abut before fastening the ball ejection device 6430 (positioned at the fastening preparation position) (see FIG. 233). Although there is a gap between them at the front, the design mode may be such that the gap can be filled by tightening the fastening screw and pressure can be applied.

Also, the portion to be pressed does not have to be the entire periphery of the edge portion of the through hole 6412, and may be a part of the edge portion. In this case, especially near the operation device 10300 (protruding shape portion 64
13) and the rear side portion (the long plate portion arranged behind the through-hole 6412), which may receive an impact every time it is opened and closed, are likely to be subjected to a large load. It is preferable to include

By sandwiching the edge portion of the through-hole 6412 between the lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball discharging device 6430 in this way, the strength of the edge portion of the through-hole 6412 can be sufficiently secured.
The bottom opening 6432 can be arranged at an arbitrary position without worrying about the reduction in strength due to the formation of the bottom opening 6432 . That is, the degree of freedom in arranging the bottom opening 6432 can be improved.

The lower tray forming member 6420 includes the main body box portion 64 in which the lower tray 50 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open top surface.
21, a discharge port 6422 opened in the vertical direction on the bottom surface of the main body box portion 6421, an L-shaped plate portion 6423 projecting from the back side of the bottom surface of the main body box portion 6421 in an L shape when viewed from the bottom, and the L shape. A plurality of fastening portions 6424 projecting downward in a cylindrical shape from the inside (front side) of the range surrounded by the plate portion 6423 and into which fastening screws for fastening the ball ejection device 6430 are screwed, and the edge portion of the ejection port 6422. A pair of guide ribs 6425 extending in the left-right direction as ends, a plate-like support portion 6426 extending rightward from the right end portion of the main body box portion 6421, and its plate-like support portion 642.
and a flexible resin member 6427 placed on the upper surface of .

The outlet 6422 is formed at the front end and right end of the lower plate 50 . The upper surface of the bottom of the lower tray 50 is configured as an inclined surface that slopes downward toward the outlet 6422. Balls that have flowed into the lower tray 50 from the pachinko machine 10010 flow down toward the outlet 6422. Since the exit 6422 is arranged on the front side near the player, the balls can be taken out smoothly from the lower tray 50 even when the number of balls stored in the lower tray 50 is small.

The discharge port 6422 is provided with a plate-like support portion 6426 where the load from the operation device 10300 is likely to occur.
is formed in the vicinity of , and it is considered that the influence of strength reduction due to the formation of the through-hole is taken into account by combining with the ball discharging device 6430, but the details will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 225, the L-shaped plate portion 6423 has different projecting lengths depending on the left and right positions. That is, the upper surface of the lower base of the main body 6411 is formed in a substantially flat shape, while the lower surface of the lower base of the lower tray 50 is inclined downward toward the right. 6412 edge),
The projecting length of the L-shaped plate portion 6423 needs to be shortened toward the right, and this corresponds to that. With this correspondence, in the assembled state (see FIG. 207), the protruding end (lower end) of the L-shaped plate portion 6423 is brought into contact with the edge of the through hole 6412 (either in line contact or surface contact). ).

The fastening portions 6424 are provided at two locations on the front side end portion where the load from the player is likely to occur, and on the front frame 10
014 is formed at the back side end where a load is likely to occur when opening and closing. By preferentially providing a fastening point at a location where a load is likely to occur, it is possible to limit the fastening location and prevent misalignment of the lower plate forming member 6420 due to misalignment when a load is generated. .

In addition, since the fastening portion 6424 is arranged near the L-shaped plate portion 6423, the through hole 641
2 (that is, fastening without forming a separate through-hole for positioning the fastening screw to be passed through the body portion 6411), the L-shaped plate portion 6423 and the covering base member 6410. contact with the edge of the through-hole 6412 can be easily maintained (relative position can be easily maintained). Therefore, it is possible to improve the positional stability of the lower tray forming member 6420 while eliminating the need to form through holes other than the through holes 6412 .

The guide rib 6425 serves both to guide the movement of the ball extracting lever 52 and to reinforce the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 . In particular, in the present embodiment, the bottom surface of the lower tray 50 is formed in the shape of a plate elongated in the left and right direction, and it is conceivable that reinforcement along the left and right direction is required.
Since the ball extracting lever 52 slides along the left-right direction that coincides with the longitudinal direction, the movement guidance of the ball extracting lever 52 and the reinforcement of the bottom surface of the lower tray 50 are preferably realized.

Since the guide ribs 6425 are formed in pairs as described above, the applied load can be dispersed. Also, even if one of them is damaged, as long as the other remains, there is no problem in using it, so the useful life of the lower tray unit 6400 can be extended.

The material of the resin member 6427 can be arbitrarily designed. For example, it may be made of urethane, silicone, or other flexible and appropriate repulsive force (shape restoring force).
It may be a member with

The ball ejection device 6430 includes a plate-shaped main body plate portion 6431 in which the above-described ball extraction lever 52 is arranged.
A circular bottom opening 6432 formed through the body plate portion 6431 in the vertical direction and a fastening portion 6424 of the lower plate forming member 6420 are arranged in a position vertically overlapping each other, and a fastening screw is screwed into the fastening portion 6424. A plurality of fastening holes 6433 that are fastened by
and a fitting frame portion 6434 having a rectangular frame shape surrounding the covering base member 6410 and having an outer shape slightly smaller than the inner shape of the through hole 6412 of the covering base member 6410 .

The ball extraction lever 52 has a grip portion 52a projecting forward so that the player can operate it in a laterally sliding manner, and a closing plate portion 52b that closes the discharge port 6422 in the assembled state (see FIG. 207). and a pair of rib-like portions projecting upward from the upper surface of the closing plate portion 52b and extending along the left-right direction, and guided by the guide ribs 6425.
c, which are integrally molded from a hard resin material.

The bottom port 6432 is disposed vertically opposite to the discharge port 6422 of the lower tray forming member 6420, and the closing plate portion 52b of the ball extraction lever 52 is arranged therebetween. As described above, when not operated, the ball extraction lever 52 is arranged between the discharge port 6422 and the bottom port 6432. Therefore, the degree of decrease in strength due to the formation of the opening is determined by the closure plate. It can be reduced by the rigidity of the portion 52b.

This can prevent the discharge port 6422 and the bottom port 6432 from becoming fragile.
Although the discharge port 6422 and the bottom port 6432 are arranged near the bottom of the operation device 10300 (arranged close to the operation device 10300) as in this embodiment, the durability of the lower tray unit 6400 is reduced. can be prevented.

The details of the fastening mode between the lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball discharging device 6430 will be described. The main body plate portion 6431 has a flange portion 6431a that protrudes outward from the fitting frame portion 6434 in three directions (flat side and both left and right sides) except for the front side. The fitting frame portion 6434 is in the assembled state (FIG. 2).
07), it is fitted into the through hole 6412 of the covering base member 6410 with a gap,
When the ball discharging device 6430 is fitted into the through hole 6412 as it is, the flange 6431 a abuts against the lower surface of the edge portion of the through hole 6412 .

On the other hand, the inner surface of the L-shaped plate portion 6423 of the lower plate forming member 6420 is formed in a shape that can be contacted from the outside of the fitting frame portion 6434 in the front, rear, left, and right directions, and the lower end portion of the L-shaped plate portion 6423 , abuts on the edge portion of the through hole 6412 in the vertical direction, as described above.

In this way, the ball ejection device 6430 can be positioned on the covering base member 6410, and the lower plate forming member 6420 can be positioned on the ball ejection device 6430. Each component can be fixed by passing a fastening screw through the hole 6433 and tightening it. Therefore, assembly work can be facilitated.

The intermediate holding member 6440 includes a plurality of through-holes 6441 protruding on the front side through which the fastening screws to be fastened and fixed to the covering base member 6410 are inserted, and the metal body portion 10014a (
FIG. 211), which is a portion to be fastened and fixed by a screw inserted through a through hole formed in the base member 6410, and a plurality of fastening portions 6442 protruding on the back side, the left upper end portion of the covering base member 6410, and the front-rear direction. and an interference portion 6443 which is a portion that interferes with and is formed in a plate shape.

226 is an exploded front perspective view of the lower tray unit 6400, and FIG. 227 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lower tray unit 6400. FIG. In Figures 226 and 227, Figures 224 and 225
A state in which the V-shaped design member 6450 is disassembled from is illustrated.

The V-shaped design member 6450 has a groove shape that is open on the back side and has a groove shape in which the opening width becomes narrower toward the center in the left-right direction, and a V-shaped main body portion 6451 that is disposed downward toward the center in the left-right direction,
A plurality of insertion holes 6452 formed as through holes through which fastening screws can be inserted in the lower edge of the body portion 6451, positioning portions 6453 formed in the vicinity of the central portion of the lower edge of the body portion 6451, and right and left sides of the body portion 6451. A plurality of overhanging fastening portions 6454 projecting toward the back side near the end portion and formed so that fastening screws can be screwed in, and a plate shape extending in the width direction of the groove of the main body portion 6451 on the right side of the main body portion 6451. A plurality of right reinforcing ribs 6455 aligned in the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 6451 and a plate-shaped member extending in the width direction of the groove of the main body portion 6451 on the left side of the main body portion 6451 are aligned in the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 6451 . and a plurality of left reinforcing ribs 6456 that

The V-shaped design member 6450 is formed to have higher rigidity than the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 described above. As a result, it is possible to limit the locations where through-holes are likely to be formed by those who commit fraudulent acts to allow illegal members to enter the inside of the pachinko machine 10010 . That is, compared to the case where a through hole is formed in the V-shaped design member 6450, the left front cover 10
321 or the right front cover 10322 is less difficult, it is possible to induce an unauthorized through hole to be opened in the left front cover 10321 or the right front cover 10322.例文帳に追加

Therefore, it is possible to narrow down the places to be periodically checked in order to discover fraud. That is, according to this embodiment, since the through holes are likely to be formed in the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322, it is possible to eliminate the need to check the V-shaped design member 6450. FIG. As a result, compared to the case where the V-shaped design member 6450 and the covers 10321 and 10322 need to be equally checked, the burden of checking can be reduced.

The body portion 6451 is formed to be thin, and is flexurally deformable in the direction of narrowing the groove width (flexurally deformable in a state of being crushed vertically). The V-shaped design member 6450 is the operation device 103
00, vertical displacement that may occur during operation of the operation device 10300 is transmitted through the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322. As shown in FIG. When this vertical displacement occurs, the V-shaped design member 6450 is flexurally deformed in a direction that narrows the width of the groove of the main body portion 6451, thereby causing the operation device 1030 to move.
At least part of the zero vertical displacement can be absorbed by the bending of the V-shaped design member 6450 .

That is, at least part of the load transmitted from the operation device 10300 is transferred to the V-shaped design member 6.
After operating in a variant of 450, it can be transmitted downstream (eg, overlying base member 6410). Therefore, since the load transmitted to the body portion 6411 of the covering base member 6410 arranged below the V-shaped design member 6450 can be suppressed, the amount of displacement of the member below the V-shaped design member 6450 can be reduced by the operation. Also, the degree of vibration can be suppressed.

The positioning portion 6453 includes a fastening portion 6453L formed so that a fastening screw can be screwed in on the left side with respect to the left-right center, and a plate-like projecting portion protruding toward the back side on the opposite side of the fastening portion 6453L. 6453R.

The insertion hole 6452 is a portion that is fixed to the covering base member 6410 by screwing a fastening screw into the recess formed on the front side of the covering base member 6410 while the fastening portion of the covering base member 6410 is inserted from the front side. be. That is, the V-shaped design member 6450 is assembled so as to approach from the back side of the covering base member 6410 (an example of the movement locus of the V-shaped design member 6450 is shown in phantom lines in FIGS. 226 and 227).

Note that at least some of the plurality of insertion holes 6452 (in this embodiment, the lower right insertion hole 6
452) is invisible when viewed in the direction in which the fastening screw is inserted into the lower plate forming member 6420 in the assembled state (see FIG. 230(b)). That is, the lower plate forming member 6420 is the covering base member 641
0, the fastening screws inserted through at least some of the insertion holes 6452 cannot be loosened. Since it is necessary to disassemble the V-shaped design member 6450, the number of man-hours required to disassemble the V-shaped design member 6450 can be increased.

In addition, the lower plate forming member 6420 is bored in the front longitudinal portion 6426c, which will be described later, in the front-rear direction. It has an insertion portion 6426c1 that is fixed to the . In addition, the insertion portion 6426
An operation device 10300 is arranged in such a manner as to shield c1 in rear view (see FIG. 232).

Therefore, as a premise for disassembling the lower tray forming member 6420, it is necessary to remove the operation device 10300 and move the insertion portion 6426c1 from the blocking position. That is, in order to disassemble the V-shaped design member 6450, the man-hours required for removing the operation device 10300 and disassembling the lower tray forming member 6420 can be increased. As a result, it is possible to suppress illegal actions such as illegally removing the V-shaped design member 6450 and entering the interior through the created gap.

The plate-like projecting portion 6453R corresponds to the front longitudinal portion 6426 of the plate-like support portion 6426 in the assembled state.
c (see FIG. 230(b)). That is, the downward displacement of the plate-shaped projecting portion 6453R is suppressed by the plate-shaped support portion 6426, and conversely, the upward displacement of the plate-shaped support portion 6426 is suppressed by the plate-shaped projecting portion 6453R.

As a result, for example, even when the operation device 10300 (see FIG. 208) is given a load in the lifting direction by the player, the fitting recess De1 (see FIG. 208) of the operation device 10300
219) and the fitting portion 6426d are fitted together, the operation device 10300
is displaced in the upward direction, the front side portion of the plate-like support portion 6426 is displaced in the upward direction.

Since this displacement is suppressed by the plate-like projecting portion 6453R, the operation device 10300
can be suppressed.

The left and right protruding fastening portions 6454 are portions into which fastening screws are inserted through resin intermediate members (not shown) fixed to the metal main body portion 10014a of the front frame 10014. The fastening positions are , the rear side of the fastening position of the fastening portion 6453L (the side close to the metal body portion 10014a).

The right reinforcing rib 6455 and the left reinforcing rib 6456 function as ribs that reinforce the main body portion 6451 in the groove width direction, and have a thin shape that is also flexibly deformable. It also has a function as a buffering means (displacement transmission suppressing means) that suppresses the As shown in FIG. 227, the left reinforcing ribs 6456 are arranged closer together than the right reinforcing ribs 6455 . They will be described in order below.

228(a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the right reinforcing rib 6455, and FIG. 228(b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the left reinforcing rib 6456. FIG. Note that FIGS. 228(a) and 228(b) show cross sections taken along a plane dividing the reinforcing ribs 6455 and 6456 in the thickness direction. Further, the reinforcing ribs 6455 and 6456 are designed to have the same thickness, but are designed to change the dimensions in the groove width direction and the groove depth direction according to the groove width of the main body 6451. Since the basic configuration is common, a typical example will be explained.

As shown in FIG. 228(a), the right reinforcing rib 6455 is a plate-like portion extending from the bottom of the groove of the body portion 6451 to the back side, and is a joint portion that is joined to the upper plate portion of the body portion 6451. 645
5a, and an upper facing portion 6 arranged parallel to and facing the upper plate portion of the main body portion 6451 to form a gap.
455b, and a lower facing portion 6455c arranged to face the lower plate portion of the main body portion 6451 in an inclined manner so that the separation width increases toward the back side.

The upper facing portion 6455b is a portion where the lower edge portion of the right front cover 10322 is fitted between the upper plate portion of the main body portion 6451 and the load from the right front cover 10322 is transmitted. Main body 645
1 and the upper facing portion 6455b are arranged substantially in parallel, contact with the right front cover 10322 at one point can be avoided, and the load can be dispersed in the front and rear positions. As a result, the load capacity of the right reinforcing rib 6455 can be increased.

Note that in this embodiment, the gap between the upper facing portion 6455b and the upper plate portion of the main body portion 6451 is formed so as to be equal to the thickness of the lower edge portion of the right front cover 10322 . As a result, the lower edge of the right front cover 10322 after fitting can be prevented from separating from the upper facing portion 6455b and the upper plate portion of the main body portion 6451, and collision and rubbing can be prevented. Therefore, generation of powder (dust) can be suppressed.

The lower facing portion 6455c is closer to the operation device 10300 (rear side, right front cover 103
22 where the displacement tends to be large), the distance between the main body portion 6451 and the lower plate is increased. Collision (contact) with the lower plate portion of the main body portion 6451 can be avoided when this occurs.

Therefore, since the right reinforcing rib 6455 plays a role as a cushioning member, the right front cover 10
322, the rate of transmission to the lower plate portion of the main body portion 6451 can be reduced.

In this embodiment, the downstream side of the right reinforcing rib 6455 starting from the right front cover 10322 (
The operation handle 51 is arranged on the lower right side), and the right reinforcing rib 6455 serves as a cushioning member, so that the operation handle 51 is not affected by the load, displacement, and vibration accompanying the operation and driving of the operation device 10300. The transmitted rate can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to secure a game property in which the player can freely operate the operation handle 51 without any sense of incongruity.

As shown in FIG. 228(b), the left reinforcing rib 6456 is a plate-like portion extending from the bottom of the groove of the main body 6451 toward the rear side, and is a connecting portion that is connected to the upper plate portion of the main body 6451. 645
6a, and an upper facing portion 6 arranged parallel to and facing the upper plate portion of the main body portion 6451 to form a gap.
456b and an overhanging portion 6456 that overhangs the rear side edge of the upper plate portion of the main body portion 6451 toward the rear side.
c, and a lower facing portion 64 arranged parallel to and facing the lower plate portion of the main body portion 6451 to form a gap.
56d and .

The upper facing portion 6456b is a portion where the lower edge portion of the left front cover 10321 is fitted between the upper plate portion of the main body portion 6451 and the load from the left front cover 10321 is transmitted. Main body 645
1 and the upper facing portion 6456b are arranged substantially in parallel, contact with the left front cover 10321 at one point can be avoided, and the load can be dispersed in the front and rear positions. Thereby, the load bearing capacity of the left reinforcing rib 6456 can be increased.

Note that in this embodiment, the gap between the upper facing portion 6456b and the upper plate portion of the main body portion 6451 is formed so as to be equal to the thickness of the lower edge portion of the left front cover 10321 . As a result, the lower edge of the left front cover 10321 after fitting can be prevented from separating from the upper facing portion 6456b and the upper plate portion of the main body portion 6451, and collision and rubbing can be prevented. Therefore, generation of powder (dust) can be suppressed.

The protruding portion 6456c extends in a direction (
downward) sloping upper edge. As a result, the protruding portion 6456c is
21, but is formed as a portion that comes into contact only when the amount of downward displacement of the left front cover 10321 is increased to some extent. That is, the projecting portion 6456c
can function as a portion (fail-safe) for suppressing the displacement when the displacement amount of the left front cover 10321 becomes abnormally large.

Note that the upper surface of the overhanging portion 6456c may be formed at the same level as the upper surface of the upper facing portion 6456b. In this case, the length of the front-rear position capable of distributing the load transmitted through the left front cover 10321 can be increased, so the load bearing capacity of the left reinforcing rib 6456 can be further increased.

The lower facing portion 6456d is a portion that contacts the upper surface of the rear covering portion 10014b (see FIG. 212) of the front frame 10014 when the rear covering portion 10014b (see FIG. 212) is inserted between the lower plate portion of the main body portion 6451. is. Since the lower facing portions 6456d of the plurality of left reinforcing ribs 6456 abut against the rear covering portion 10014b, the transmitted load can be dispersed, and the amount of downward displacement of the rear covering portion 10014b can be reduced. .

As a result, the arrangement of the back covering portion 10014b can be easily maintained, so that the space above the lower tray 50 (the space where balls are stored and the space where the player may touch)
can be prevented from being narrowed.

That is, the rear covering portion 10014b is connected to the left front cover 10321 through the V-shaped design member 6450.
, the load transmitted from the operation device 10300 side via the left front cover 10321 can be suppressed from displacing the rear covering portion 10014b. As a result, for example, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the surface constituting the lower plate 50 is displaced and collides with the game ball to generate abnormal noise.

As described above, the left reinforcing ribs 6456 are densely arranged compared to the spacing of the right reinforcing ribs 6455 . Therefore, it is configured to be able to cope with a larger load.
In the present embodiment, the weight of the player's hand touching the balls stored in the upper tray 17 arranged on the left side is likely to be applied, and the left side reinforcing ribs 6456 are densely arranged where the load tends to be uneven on the left and right sides. It is possible to deal with uneven loads by arranging the

As described above, in the present embodiment, the shapes of the right reinforcing rib 6455 and the left reinforcing rib 6456 are different, so that different types of loads can be handled. That is, in the right reinforcing rib 6455, a sufficient gap is formed between the lower plate portion of the main body portion 6451 and the lower facing portion 6455c to cut off the transmission of the load, thereby preventing instantaneous load or impact from the operation device 10300. can be prevented from being transmitted to the operation handle 51, while the left reinforcing rib 6456 disperses and supports the load, so even if the weight is placed on the upper plate 17 for a long time, the rear It is possible to prevent the covering portion 10014b from being displaced. As described above, in this embodiment, the reinforcing ribs 6455 and 64 are provided so as to cope with load conditions that tend to cause problems.
56 shapes are designed.

229(a) is a top view of the lower tray unit 6400, FIG. 229(b) is a front view of the lower tray unit 6400, and FIG. 230(a) is a bottom view of the lower tray unit 6400. 230(b) is a rear view of the lower tray unit 6400, FIG. 231(a) is a right side view of the lower tray unit 6400 as viewed in the direction of arrow L, and FIG. 231(b) is a lower tray unit. 6400 is a left side view when viewed in the direction of arrow R. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 229(a) and 230(b), the plate-like support portion 6426 of the lower tray forming member 6420 is arranged so as to straddle the recessed shape portion 6414 of the covering base member 6410 to the left and right. , the plate-like support portion 6426 is placed in surface contact with the upper bottom surface of the main body portion 6411 , while being spaced apart from the recessed shape portion 6414 . Details of the projecting shape portion 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414 will be described below.

The protruding shape portion 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414 are formed on the body portion 641 of the covering base member 6410 .
1 is a part that constitutes the front and back of the part that bulges (extends) downward from the bottom surface, and the shape of one of the front and back is similar to the shape of the other. ing. In other words, the outer shape of the protruding shape portion 6413 when viewed from the bottom and the inner shape of the recessed shape portion 6414 when viewed from the top are formed as a shape whose scale is changed by an amount that can ensure the plate thickness of the main body portion 6411 . be. Therefore, it is possible to easily imagine the shape of the other from the shape of one.

As shown in FIG. 230(a), the projecting shape portion 6413 gradually increases in lateral width toward the front side. Then, as shown in FIG. 229(a), the plate-like support portion 64 of the lower plate forming member 6420 is
26 is arranged closer to the front side than the center of the recessed shape portion 6414 in the front-rear direction, so that the plate-like support portion 6426 is supported at the portion where the lateral width of the projecting shape portion 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414 is large. be able to. As a result, when the plate-shaped support portion 6426 is displaced in a manner of sinking downward, the main body portion 6411 can be partially and sufficiently bent, which will be described later in detail.

Here, in a playable state, the operation device 10300 is placed on the plate-like support portion 6426, and as the player operates the operation device 10300, the plate-like support portion 642 is opened.
6 can be displaced up and down. In relation to this displacement, the plate-like support portion 6426 and the body portion 6411 are made of a resin material, and the plate-like support portion 6426 and the body portion 64 of the covering base member 6410 are displaced.
11, there is a risk of generation of shavings due to load generation, collision, or rubbing.

If shavings are generated around the operation device 10300, for example, the shavings may get into the gap and the clearance cannot be secured, resulting in malfunction, or the shavings may enter the detection area of the detection sensor and induce an erroneous detection. Therefore, it is desirable to suppress the generation of shavings.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, by reducing the contact area between the plate-like support portion 6426 and the main body portion 6411, it is possible to suppress the generation of shavings and reduce the amount of the generated shavings.

As described above, in this embodiment, the plate-like support portion 6426 and the main body portion 6411 are not directly fastened and fixed. This is based on the purpose of preventing direct transmission of the displacement of the plate-like support portion 6426 to the body portion 6411 .

That is, a load is applied to the operation device 10300 in the downward direction, and the plate-shaped support portion 6426
When is displaced downward, the displacement is received by the protruding shape portion 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414, so that displacement of other portions such as the main body portion 6411 and the like can be made unnecessary.

On the other hand, a load in the lifting direction is applied to the operation device 10300, and the plate-like support portion 642
6 is upwardly displaced, the displacement is received by the plate-shaped projecting portion 6453R (see FIG. 232) and converted into deformation of the V-shaped design member 6450, so that other portions such as the main body portion 6411 are displaced. can be made unnecessary.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the plate-like support portion 6426 and the main body portion 6411 are not directly fastened and fixed, and the load applied to the operation device 10300 is only indirectly transmitted to the main body portion 6411. With such a configuration, deformation or breakage of the main body portion 6411 can be prevented.

As shown in FIGS. 231(a) and 231(b), the lower surface of the projecting shaped portion 6413 is formed as a flat surface along the front-rear direction, while the lower surface of the main body portion 6411 of the covering base member 6410 is
It is formed as an inclined plane that is inclined upward toward the front side. This configuration works well, for example, when the front frame 10014 is stored alone.

When the front frame 10014 is stored alone, it is generally considered that the front frame 10014 is placed on a floor made of concrete or flooring in such a manner that the lower surface of the front frame 10014 contacts the floor. At this time, it is considered preferable to have the entire lower surface in contact with the floor from the viewpoint of stability and avoiding concentration of the load, but in this case, dirt on the floor may adhere to the entire lower surface. The lower surface of the main body part 6411 is difficult to see from the player, but since it is a product, it is preferable to avoid staining it.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, the lower surface of the protruding shape portion 6413 is formed as a flat surface along the front-rear direction, and the lower surface of the main body portion 6411 is formed as an inclined surface that slopes upward toward the front side. When the shaped portion 6413 comes into contact with the floor surface, a gap is created between the floor surface and the lower surface of the main body portion 6411 .
can be limited to Therefore, when the amusement center installs the front frame 10014 in a playable state, it is sufficient to wipe off only the dirt on the projecting shaped portion 6413, and it is not necessary to wipe the entire lower surface of the main body portion 6411. .

In addition, the projecting shape portion 6413 also functions as a finger hooking portion for hooking a finger when carrying the front frame 10014 . Conventionally, since the lower plate portion is arranged in the center of the front frame in the left and right direction, it is easy to lift the front frame by hooking the lower plate portion and assemble it to the rear frame (outer frame 11, inner frame 12). However, in the front frame 10014 of this embodiment, the lower plate 50 is arranged on the left side in the horizontal direction (opening/closing axis side).
The configuration is difficult to assemble.

On the other hand, if the front frame 10014 is lifted by hooking the operation handle 51, the weight of the front frame 10014 will be applied to the root side of the operation handle 41, and the operation handle 51 may be damaged. is not preferred.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the front frame 100 is lifted by hooking the bottom surface of the lower tray unit 6400 with a hand.
A protruding shape 641 that also functions as a finger rest so that it is recommended to lift 14.
3 are arranged at the left and right center positions. The worker can easily assemble the front frame 10014 to the rear frame by lifting the front frame 10014 by hooking the projecting shape portion 6413 and pivoting it on the rear frame.

And by making it a work procedure that includes the work of wiping off the dirt before and after the point where the finger is hooked,
It is possible to make the operator aware of the parts that need to be wiped clean in relation to the carrying operation. Therefore, it is possible to prevent forgetting to wipe off dirt.

Here, the gap between the floor surface and the main body portion 6411 is configured as a gap that is neither too much nor too little according to the amount of deformation that is expected in the protruding shape portion 6413 . More specifically, due to the shape of the lower surface of the main body part 6411, the gap between it and the floor surface becomes larger toward the front side, and the projecting shape part 6413 is formed wider toward the front side. , which corresponds to an increase in the amount of deformation (amount of deflection) due to the load.

That is, when the front frame 10014 is placed on the floor surface, the projecting shaped portion 6413
It is possible to easily secure a gap between the lower surface of the main body part 6411 and the floor even when the body part 6411 is flexurally deformed by the weight of . On the other hand, when the protruding shape portion 6413 is flexurally deformed to the limit and the gap between the bottom surface of the main body portion 6411 and the floor surface disappears, the entire bottom surface of the main body portion 6411 can be easily brought into contact with the floor surface. Therefore, the weight of the front frame 10014 can be supported by the entire lower surface of the main body portion 6411 .

Therefore, even if the front frame 10014 placed on the floor is heavier than expected, or if an excessive load is applied to the front frame 10014 placed on the floor, the body portion 6411 is partially It is possible to prevent the load from concentrating on the

Moreover, the amount of deformation that can be deformed is increased toward the front side of the projecting shape portion 6413 . It works well even during game execution. For example, when exchanging the senryo box, the amusement store clerk slides the senryo box back and forth on the lower surface of the main body portion 6411 and the lower side of the projecting shape portion 6413. At this time, the senryo box and the lower surface of the front frame 10014 move. There may be collisions. If the shock and load due to this collision are accumulated in the structural members as fatigue, the structural members will be destroyed (for example, cracked) when the allowable amount is exceeded, making it difficult to continue playing the game. There is

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the protruding shape portion 64 increases toward the front side where it is likely to collide with the senryo box.
13 is configured to have a large deformable amount. Therefore, the impact and load caused by the collision with the senryo box can be easily relieved by deformation (flexural deformation), and breakage of the protruding shape portion 6413 can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to easily maintain a comfortable gaming environment for the player.

In addition, on the left and right sides of the protruding shape portion 6413, the lower bottom surface of the main body portion 6411 is inclined so as to rise toward the front side (see FIG. 231(a)). As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility of collision between the 1,000-car box and the main body 6411 on the left and right sides of the protruding shape part 6413 when the 1,000-car box is replaced. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the lower bottom surface of the main body part 6411 will be damaged, so that it is possible to easily maintain a comfortable gaming environment for the player.

232 is a rear view of the lower tray unit 6400. FIG. Note that FIG. 232 shows the assembled state of the left front cover 10321 and the right cover 10322, and the operation device 1 other than that is shown.
The outline of 0300 is schematically shown in phantom lines.

As shown in FIG. 232, the lower edges of the left front cover 10321 and the right cover 10322 are attached to the reinforcing ribs 6455 and 6456 of the V-shaped design member 6450 (upper facing parts 6455b and 6455b and 6455b).
56b (see FIGS. 228(a) and 228(b))).

A body portion 6451 of the V-shaped design member 6450 is formed in a V-shape when viewed from the rear, and the reinforcing ribs 645
5 and 6456 are plate-shaped extending in the groove width direction of the main body portion 6451, so that the reinforcing ribs 6455
, 6456 is directed in a direction (upward oblique direction) having a directional component to return the left front cover 10321 and the right cover 10322 to the left-right center. For example, reinforcing ribs 6455,6
The restoring force from bending deformation at 456 is directed in the upward oblique direction.

As a result, not only vertical displacement of the operation device 10300 but also horizontal displacement can be accommodated. For example, as in the present embodiment, even if the movement direction of the operation portion of the operation device 10300 (for example, the swing operation member 10310) does not have a horizontal component, the downward load given by the player It may have a directional component, and when such a load is applied, the entire operation device 10300 may be displaced downward and slightly displaced (vibrated) in the left-right direction.

On the other hand, the left front cover 10321 and the right cover 10322 can respond to the horizontal displacement of the operation device 10300 by flexing and deforming based on their curved shapes (absorbing the horizontal displacement or using a restoring force). Further, the reaction force from the reinforcing ribs 6455 and 6456 is directed upward and toward the left-right center, so that the operation device 10300 can be quickly returned to the position before displacement. Therefore, it is possible to easily maintain the design of the front frame 10014 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 207).

FIG. 233(a) is a cross-sectional view of the lower tray unit 6400 along line CCXXXIIIa-CCXXXIIIa in FIG. 229(a), and FIG. 233(b) is CCX in FIG. 229(a).
233(c) is a cross-sectional view of the lower tray unit 6400 along the line CCXXXIIIc-CCXXXIIIc in FIG. 229(a). In addition, in FIGS. 233(a) to 233(c),
The vicinity of the edge of the through hole 6412 in the cross section is shown enlarged.

As shown in FIGS. 233(a) to 233(c), in the assembled state of the lower tray unit 6400, the edge portion of the through hole 6412 is aligned with the lower tray forming member 6420 (on the rear side, the protrusion of the L-shaped plate portion 6423). It is pressed against the set end (lower end)) and the ball discharging device 6430 (the flange 6431a thereof). As a result, the peripheral portion of the through hole 6412 can be reinforced with the strength of the lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball discharging device 6430 .

The inner surface of the L-shaped plate portion 6423 (see FIG. 225) of the lower plate forming member 6420 is the fitting frame portion 64
34 (see FIG. 224) from the outside in the front, rear, left, and right directions.
As described above, the lower end of 423 contacts the edge of through hole 6412 in the vertical direction (see FIG. 233(c)). As a result, the edge portion of the through-hole 6412 can be reinforced, so that the degree of freedom in designing the through-hole 6412 can be improved.

As described above, the ball extracting lever 52 is closed to the discharge port 6422 and the bottom port 6 when not operated.
432, the degree of reduction in strength due to the formation of the opening can be reduced by the rigidity of the closing plate portion 52b (see FIG. 233(b)).

This can prevent the discharge port 6422 and the bottom port 6432 from becoming fragile.
Although the discharge port 6422 and the bottom port 6432 are arranged near the bottom of the operation device 10300 (arranged close to the operation device 10300) as in this embodiment, the durability of the lower tray unit 6400 is reduced. can be prevented.

As shown in FIGS. 233(a) to 233(c), the shape of the concave portion 6414 is formed in such a manner that the width of the concave portion 6414 increases toward the front side and the depth of the concave portion increases. That is, the recessed shape portion 6414 is formed so as to bend more easily toward the front side.

As a result, it is possible to impart sufficient bending performance to the recessed shape portion 6414 in the vicinity of the front side where the load generated when the player operates the operation device 10300 tends to increase, so that the operation device 10300 can be operated with sufficient flexibility. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the covering base member 6410 that supports the operation device 10300 is damaged (for example, cracked) due to the load. This will be explained in detail.

The operation device 10300 is a device that can be operated in multiple operation modes, as described above. The operation timing and operation mode are notified by a display device or the like, and the player is made to operate the operation device 10300 in accordance with the notification, thereby drawing the player into the game. Here, the frequency of notification for each operation mode is not constant.

For example, as an example of control, the swing operation member 10310 is controlled to stop at the initial position from the start of the game until a specific ready-to-win effect is executed (see FIG. 215(a)). This state occupies most of the arrangement of the swing operation member 10310 during business hours.

In this state, a notification prompting an operation in the display effect (announcement such as "press the button!")
The player performs a pushing operation (push operation) of the lens member 10317 in order to operate the lens 10317, switch the stage, or the like. Therefore, most of the load caused by the operation is the load caused when the lens member 10317 is pushed and operated, and the direction Y17a (Fig. 2)
15(a)). Since the occurrence frequency of notification is high, the occurrence frequency of this load is high.

On the other hand, when a specific ready-to-win effect is executed, the operation device 10300 is drive-controlled to vertically displace the swing operation member 10310, for example, the swing operation member 10310 is arranged at the downward position. 215(b)), the notification prompting the operation is executed.

The operation direction in this case is a direction Y17b (see FIG. 215(b)) that is further inclined by an angle θ17y in the front-rear direction compared to the state in which the swing operation member 10310 is arranged in the upward position.
, and a load is generated along the direction Y17b. Since the occurrence of notification is limited to the execution of a specific ready-to-win effect, the frequency of occurrence is low.

That is, the frequency of occurrence of the load along the direction Y17a is controlled to be higher than the frequency of occurrence of the load along the direction Y17b. On the other hand, in this embodiment, the concave shape portion 6
The shape of 414 is such that the width increases toward the front side and the depth of the recess increases, so that the load handling performance increases toward the front side.

That is, compared to the case where a common shape is used in the front-rear direction, it is possible to configure it so that it can cope with the difference in the frequency of occurrence of loads at appropriate locations, and the applied load causes excessive deformation or insufficient deformation. It can be made easy to avoid becoming easily damaged.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the side closer to the player and the side on which the load is more frequently generated during operation are both the front side. , is formed deep, but is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the initial position of the swing operation member 10310 is set to the downward position, the frequency of load generation during operation is reversed. , By forming a deep bottom, compared to the case where the shape is common in the front and back direction, it can be configured so that it can respond to the difference in the frequency of occurrence of loads at the appropriate place, and excessive deformation due to the applied load It is possible to easily avoid the occurrence of deformation and the tendency to be easily damaged due to insufficient deformation.

As shown in FIG. 233(b) corresponding to the central cross section of the resin member 6427, the hanging plate-like portion 64
26b abuts on the body portion 6411 in the upper and lower positions at the left and right outer sides of the left and right width end portions of the recessed shape portion 6414 .

As a result, compared to the case where the hanging plate-like portion 6426b is in contact with the upper edge of the recessed shape portion 6414, the ratio of the load from the operation device 10300 to be transmitted to the recessed shape portion 6414 can be reduced. . Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the recessed shape portion 6414 from being damaged by the load when the operation device 10300 is operated.

In addition, as a response to the load, not only the bending of the recessed shape portion 6414 but also the recessed shape portion 6414
Since the deflection of the plate-like portion from the upper edge portion of 414 to the abutting position of the hanging plate-like portion 6426b and the main body portion 6411 can also be utilized, the allowable amount of load can be increased.

FIG. 234 is a cross-sectional view of the lower tray unit 6400 along line CCXXXIV-CCXXXIV in FIG. 229(a). As shown in FIG. 234, the plate-like support portion 6426 of the lower tray forming member 6420 includes a plane plate-like portion 6426a on which the resin member 6427 is placed, and its plane plate-like portion 6426a.
426a from the left, right, and rear edges of 426a in a plate-like shape, and a portion coupled to the front side edge of the flat plate-shaped portion 6426a and formed taller than the flat plate-shaped portion 6426a. It mainly includes a front vertical portion 6426c with an open bottom, and a fitting portion 6426d extending from the front vertical portion 6426c to the rear side and fitted with the operation device 10300. As shown in FIG. In the description of FIG. 234, FIGS. 224 to 229 are referred to as appropriate.

The planar plate-like portion 6426a is formed wider than the lateral width of the recessed shape portion 6414 and configured to cover the front half portion of the recessed shape portion 6414 . A hanging plate-like portion 6426b is formed between the flat plate-like portion 6426a and the main body portion 6411 of the covering base member 6410 (between the upper and lower sides).
That is, the plane plate-like portion 6426a does not abut on the main body portion 6411 and is formed in a U-shape when viewed from the bottom (
(See FIG. 225) The extended end of the hanging plate-like portion 6426b contacts the main body portion 6411, thereby determining the position of the flat plate-like portion 6426a with respect to the covering base member 6410. As shown in FIG.

In this way, the planar plate-shaped portion 6426a and the hanging plate-shaped portion 6426b are not block-shaped,
Since it is formed in a box shape with an open bottom, the flat plate-shaped portion 6426a and the hanging plate-shaped portion 6426
b is configured to be easily flexurally deformed. Therefore, not only the protruding shape portion 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414 of the main body portion 6411 are flexurally deformed, but also the planar plate portion 6426a and the hanging plate portion 6426b can also be flexurally deformed, and the plate-like support portion 6426 and the covering base member 6410 (the main body portion 6411, the projecting shape portion 6413, and the recess shape portion 6414) arranged below the operation device 10300 are Damage can be further prevented.

The hanging plate-like portion 6426b extends up to the top surface of the bottom portion of the main body portion 6411, but does not extend into the recessed shape portion 6414. As shown in FIG. That is, there is a space between the hanging plate-like portion 6426b and the recessed shape portion 6414 (see the bottom of the rear end portion of the planar plate-like portion 6426a in FIG. 234). As a result, it is possible to maintain a state in which there is no framework inside the recessed shape portion 6414, so that the deformation of the projecting shape portion 6413 is not hindered.

In addition, the space between the hanging plate-shaped portion 6426b and the recessed shape portion 6414 also serves as a drain. For example, even if the liquid enters from the gap between the operation device 10300 and the lower tray unit 6400, the liquid running along the rear side of the plate-shaped support portion 6426 can enter the front portion of the recessed shape portion 6414. As a result, the flow of liquid entering behind can be weakened. As a result, the front frame 10014 can easily prevent liquid from entering.

The front vertical portion 6426c is connected to the operation device 1 by a fitting portion 6426d extending to the rear side.
0300, and the lower part on the front side is supported by the V-shaped design member 6450. As a result, the load given by the player to the operation device 10300 is
Since the load can be distributed by having not only 411 but also the V-shaped design member 6450 take charge, the load applied to each component can be weakened.

A space is also generated between the front vertically elongated portion 6426c and the recessed shape portion 6414. As shown in FIG. As a result, it is possible to maintain a state in which there is no framework inside the recessed shape portion 6414.
It is possible to prevent the deformation of the projecting shape portion 6413 from being hindered.

The space between the front longitudinal portion 6426c and the recessed shape portion 6414 also serves as a drain. For example, even if the liquid enters from the gap between the operation device 10300 and the lower tray unit 6400, the liquid running along the rear side of the plate-shaped support portion 6426 can enter the front portion of the recessed shape portion 6414. As a result, the flow of liquid entering behind can be weakened. As a result, the front frame 10014 can easily prevent liquid from entering.

The fitting portion 6426d is elongated in the lateral direction so as to be fittable with the fitting recess De1 (see FIG. 212), and receives a load from the operation device 10300. As shown in FIG. The fitting portion 6426d includes a pair of plate-like reinforcing ribs 6426d1 coupled to the lower surface and the front longitudinally elongated portion 6426c formed on the extended base end side.

Since the reinforcing rib 6426d1 can suppress the vertical displacement (deformation) of the fitting portion 6426d, even if a load that displaces the operation device 10300 downward is applied, the rigidity of the fitting portion 6426d can withstand it. As a result, excessive displacement of the operation device 10300 can be prevented.

Here, the operation member 10300 is placed on the upper side of the resin member 6427. As shown in FIG. Therefore, the load associated with the player's operation and vibration of the operation member 10300 is transferred to the plate-like support portion 642 via the resin member.
6 and transmitted to the covering base member 6410 arranged downstream thereof, the plate-like support portion 6426 is supported on the bottom surface of the main body portion 6411 (see FIG. 233).

In this embodiment, the bottom surface of the body portion 6411 is formed as an inclined surface that slopes upward toward the front side (see FIG. 234). The directional component can be directed to the front side (the load can be released to the front side).

That is, it is possible to avoid problems that may occur due to the load generated from the operation device 10300 being transmitted to the back side (outer frame 11 side and inner frame 12 side). For example, the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) shakes, affecting the flow of the shot ball, or
It is possible to prevent problems such as cracking of the substrate due to the load being transmitted to the 0 to 104 and the electronic substrate.

Next, the presentation effect device 6500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 235 to 264. FIG. 235 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 10014, and FIG. 236 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame 10014. FIG. In addition, in FIG.235 and FIG.236, the lower tray unit 640 mentioned above
0 and the operation device 10300 are omitted, and the rendering device 6500 is the metal main body 10
014a is shown disassembled forward.

As shown in FIG. 235, the presentation device 6500 includes a pair of left and right sound devices 661.
0, which is a device for covering the front side of the display board 657, in which a light emitting means such as an LED is arranged.
0, and each constituent member that serves as a mediator for delivering the light emitted from the LED to the player.

As shown in FIG. 236, a plate-shaped metal spring member (plate spring) 6584d is arranged on the back side of the presentation effect device 6500 to generate an urging force in the separating direction with respect to the metal body portion 10014a.
This makes it possible to increase the fastening force of the fastening screw that fastens the presentation device 6500 to the metal main body 10014a (stable fastening and fixing).

237 is an exploded front perspective view of the performance effect device 6500, and FIG.
500 is an exploded rear perspective view of FIG. In addition, in FIGS. 237 and 238, the presentation effect device 6500
A state in which the upper cover member 6510 is disassembled upward is illustrated.

The presentation device 6500 includes a plate-shaped upper lid member 6510, front units 6520 to 6550 occupying the front portion below the upper lid member 6510, and front units 6520 to 6550.
and rear units 6560 to 6580 arranged behind the 6550.

The upper cover member 6510 is a member that covers the upper surface of the presentation device 6500 and is fastened and fixed to the metal main body portion 10014a, and is a main body plate that is configured as a semi-elliptical plate-like portion obtained by dividing an oval that is long in the left and right direction into the front and rear portions. a portion 6511, a plurality of insertion holes 6512 vertically drilled near the edge of the front side of the main body plate portion 6511 and configured so that fastening screws can be inserted through them, and extending downward from the rear side portion of the main body plate portion 6511. A plurality of fastening portions 6513 are configured so that fastening screws inserted through the metal main body portion 10014a can be fastened to the female screw holes formed from the rear surface of the extension tip.
and are mainly provided.

The upper lid member 6510 has a metal main body portion 10014 at the back side portion where the fastening portion 6513 extends.
Other components of the presentation device 6500 are supported by fastening screws that are fastened and fixed to a and inserted through the insertion holes 6512 . In other words, the mechanical rigidity of the upper lid member 6510 can be used to suppress the downward displacement of the front end portion of the effect device 6500 .

The fastening portion 6513 has a plate-shaped plate portion 6513 connected to the body plate portion 6511 on the front side thereof.
a. As a result, it is possible to prevent the main body plate portion 6511 from being deformed or displaced in a state of falling forward.

The fastening portion 6513 is inserted into the acoustic device 6610, and the plate portion 6513 is arranged to face the front surface of the plate in which the insertion hole of the acoustic device 6610 is formed. With such a configuration (see corresponding FIG. 125(a) described above, the fastening portion 419 is attached to the fastening portion 6513, and the plate portion 6513a is attached to the enlarged rib 4).
19a), the upper lid member 6510 can prevent the acoustic device 6610 from coming off the metal body 10014a.

The upper lid member 6510 is recessed from the upper surface to the lower surface side, and the concave-convex shaped portion 6514 formed in a manner that protrudes downward from the lower surface is formed as a decoration on the entire surface. This uneven shape portion 651
4, compared to the case where the upper cover member 6510 of the same thickness is configured by a plate-shaped member with a smooth surface, it is possible to increase the force of resisting the load in the direction perpendicular to the plane (the shape can be easily maintained). can).

239 is an exploded front perspective view of the presentation effect device 6500, and FIG.
500 is an exploded rear perspective view of FIG. 239 and 240, the presentation effect device 6500
Illustration of the upper lid member 6510 is omitted, and a state in which the front side units 6520 to 6550 are disassembled in front of the rear side units 6560 to 6580 is illustrated. In this embodiment, the front side units 6520 to 6550 are arranged forward and obliquely downward with respect to the rear side units 6560 to 6580 (
The presentation device 6500 can be disassembled by moving it in the forming direction of the extension plate portion 6552, the direction along which the surface of the extending plate portion 6552 is formed, and the details will be described later.

In this embodiment, the front units 6520 to 6550 have the role of receiving, refracting, and transmitting light emitted from light emitting means such as LEDs, and the rear units 6560 to 6550
6580 has a role of light emitting means such as LED and a role of supporting an electrical board on which light emitting means such as LED is arranged. First, the rear units 6560-6580 will be described in detail.

FIG. 241(a) is a front view of the rear units 6560 to 6580, and FIG. 241(b)
242 is an exploded front perspective view of the rear units 6560 to 6580, and FIG. 243 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rear units 6560 to 6580. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 241 to 243, each of the rear units 6560 to 6580 includes a partitioning member 6560 formed to partition the internal space into a plurality of sections when viewed from the front, and a plurality of LEDs for irradiating the partitioning member 6560 with light. A pair of electrical decoration substrates 6570 and a pair of electrical decoration substrates 6570 that are stacked on the back side of the partitioning member 6560 and are arranged with a slight gap from the electrical decoration substrate 6570 in the inner region of the outer shape and are surface-supported in the outer shape portion. and a rear support member 6580 of .

It should be noted that the surface support with a slight gap means that the posture of the electrical board 6570 can be maintained, and the partition member 6560 and the rear support member 6580 are supported so as to be displaceable back and forth by the gap. means that

The partitioning member 6560 is arranged close to the front side of the electrical board 6570 so as to face the electrical board 6570 .
It is configured to divide the light emitted from each of the lighting units 6574 to 6576 of 570 from the vicinity of the electrical board 6570 . By partitioning in this way, the light emitted from each of the illumination units 6574 to 6576 can be visually recognized for each partition, and even when the light emission modes of the light emitted from each of the illumination units 6574 to 6576 are significantly different. Also, it is possible to reduce the sense of discomfort given to the player.

The partitioning member 6560 includes a facing plate portion 6561 arranged to face the electrical board 6570 , central light holes 6562 drilled in the left and right central portions of the facing plate portion 6561 , and a facing plate portion 6560 .
1, a plurality of fastening portions 6564 to which fastening screws inserted through the back surface support member 6580 are fastened, and a pair of light beams extending to the back surface of the opposing plate portion 6561. A large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 and a rectangular cylindrical opposing plate portion 6561 surrounding the central light hole 6562 are provided.
a central cylindrical portion 6566 extending to the front side of the left and right light holes 6563, a left and right cylindrical portion 6567 extending to the front side of the opposing plate portion 6561 in a long cylindrical shape surrounding the left and right light holes 6563, and a T-shaped in front view. A plate-like connecting portion 6568 formed of a plate-like portion and connecting the facing plate portion 6561, the central cylindrical portion 6566, and the left and right cylindrical portions 6567 on the front side of the facing plate portion 6561 is mainly provided.

The opposing plate portion 6561 has a flange portion 6 protruding from its upper edge portion toward the rear side in a laterally elongated shape.
561a-6561c. The first flange portion 6561a is formed above the central hole 6562 for light. The second flange portion 6561b is formed as a pair of right and left flange portions 6561b.
It extends from the left and right end portions of 561a to the vicinity of the fastening portion 6564 from a position with a cut.
The third flange portion 6561c is formed as a pair of left and right, and extends from a position on the opposite side of the end portion of the second flange portion 6561b across the fastening portion 6564 to near the left and right end portions of the plate-like coupling portion 6568.

Each of the flange portions 6561a to 6561c has a role as a shielding plate that prevents light from entering and exiting between the partition member 6560 and the electrical board 6570, and the gaps thereof are provided at least in the electrical board 6570. It is configured at a location where the light emitted from the LED is unlikely to leak. In other words, this portion is a portion where even if light is incident from the outside, it is difficult for the light to mix with the light emitted from the LED.

The gap between the first flange portion 6561a and the second flange portion 6561b is formed between the center light hole 6562 and the left and right light holes 6563.
A discontinuity is provided at 570 where no LED is arranged. Therefore, since there is no LED that causes light leakage in the first place, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a phenomenon in which light leaks through the cut.

The gap between the second flange portion 6561b and the third flange portion 6561c is the fastening portion 65
It is formed at the place where 64 is arranged, and the break is purposely made at the place where the substitute part for blocking the light is arranged. That is, even if the light travels through the cut, the light that is about to pass through the cut is blocked by the fastening portion 6564, so that it is possible to suppress the occurrence of light leaking through the cut.

Here, the flange portions 6561a to 6561c can be configured as a series of continuous portions, but in that case, the rigidity of the flange portions 6561a to 6561c cannot be sufficiently ensured, and the downward load applied to the partition member 6560 cannot be secured. It is necessary to counteract the force generated by the fastening screw that fastens and fixes the fastening portion 6564 (assuming a downward load applied to a member arranged in front of the partitioning member 6560, gravity, and a load given by a player). occurs. In this embodiment, as the number of fastening portions 6564 increases, not only does the number of man-hours for tightening the fastening screws increase, but also the surface area of the electrical board 6570 decreases, limiting the locations where LEDs can be arranged. This reduces the design freedom of the 6570.

On the other hand, by dividing the flange portions 6561a to 6561c into lengths sufficient to ensure rigidity, the rigidity of the flange portions 6561a to 6561c can withstand the downward load applied to the partition member 6560. FIG. Therefore, the number of fastening portions 6564 can be limited, and the number of working steps can be reduced, and the degree of freedom in designing the electrical board 6570 can be improved.

Further, in this embodiment, the length in the longitudinal direction is designed according to the degree of rigidity required for the flange portions 6561a to 6561c. In this embodiment, the shape of the presentation device 6500 is
It is formed in a semi-elliptical shape in which the width in the front-rear direction becomes longer toward the left-right center when viewed from above (
See Figure 237). Generally, the load given by the player (for example, the hanging load) is applied at the front side end of the effect device 6500, so the load given by the player at the left-right central portion of the effect device 6500 is maximum. , and gradually decreases toward the left and right ends.

On the other hand, the flange portions 6561a to 6561c have different lengths. Specifically, compared to the lateral length of the first flange portion 6561a formed in the central portion where the load is maximum, the lateral length of the second flange portion 6561b arranged on the left and right is longer,
Further, the third flange portions 6561c arranged on the left and right sides are longer than the left and right lengths of the second flange portions 6561b. That is, the left-right length is the shortest at the left-right central portion,
It gradually becomes longer as it approaches the left and right ends. As a result, the load given to the presentation effect device 6500 can generate a sufficient counterforce.

As a result, deformation and displacement of the partitioning member 6560 can be suppressed, so that the relative relationship (positional relationship) between the partitioning member 6560 and the electrical board 6570 can be stably maintained. It should be noted that the maintenance of the relative relationship (positional relationship) is due to deformation and displacement in the separation direction.
It is not limited to the case of preventing the displacement of the electrical board 6570 due to a decrease in the force holding 0, but the deformation or displacement in the approaching direction causes a load in the compressive direction on the electrical board 6570, which may break the electrical board 6570. It also includes the case of preventing deformation.

The center light hole 6562 and the left and right light holes 6563 are LEDs arranged on the electrical board 6570 .
are a plurality of through-holes drilled corresponding to the pattern of Central light hole 6562 is a single L
While configured as a set of through holes slightly larger than the outer shape of the ED, the left and right light holes 6563 are
It is configured as a set of through holes sized to enclose a plurality of LEDs.

The fastening portion 6564 is fastened and fixed to the front plate portion 6581 of the back support member 6580 , and the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 is formed to protrude from the fastening portion 6564 toward the back side. As a result, the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 is inserted through the positioning hole 6581b of the front plate portion 6581, and the partition member 6560
and back support member 6580 are aligned.

The large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 has a front-side cylindrical portion extending toward the front side in a cylindrical shape of the same diameter, and has an insertion hole 6565a at the bottom of the front end thereof, through which a fastening screw can be inserted. This insertion hole 656
A fastening screw passing through the inside of the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 is inserted through 5a from the rear side, and the fastening screw is fastened and fixed to a partitioning unit 6540, which will be described later. By configuring in this way,
The step of inserting the fastening screw through the insertion hole 6565a and screwing it into the partition unit 6540 can be performed in the assembled state of the rear units 6560 to 6580 (see FIGS. 239 and 240).

The central tubular portion 6566 and the left and right tubular portions 6567 are extended until they reach the rear-side ends of the front units 6520-6550. Therefore, most (or all) of the light passing through the central tubular portion 6566 and the left and right tubular portions 6567 enters the front units 6520-6550.

The plate-like coupling portion 6568 is a portion to which the load is transmitted via the upper cover member 6510 (see FIG. 237) when a load (for example, a hanging load) is applied to the presentation device 6500. The upper surface is arranged at a position slightly higher than the upper end of the . As a result, since the plate-like coupling portion 6568 bears the load before the central tubular portion 6566, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the central tubular portion 6566 is subjected to a load, and the central tubular portion 6566 is not deformed or displaced. It is possible to make it easier to avoid a situation where

The plate-like connecting portion 6568 extends downward until the plate-like portion reaches the left and right cylindrical portions 6567 . As a result, when a load is transmitted to the plate-like connecting portion 6568 via the upper cover member 6510 (see FIG. 237), the resistance generated by the plate-like portion reaching the left and right cylindrical portions 6567 also resists the load. can do. In this case, since it is formed of the plate-like portion, it is possible to generate a counter force by bending deformation of the plate-like portion itself, so that displacement and deformation of the left and right cylindrical portions 6567 can be suppressed.

The electrical board 6570 is a so-called printed circuit board, and includes a plate-shaped board portion 6571 and a fastening portion 656 of the partitioning member 6560 which is a portion bored or notched in the board portion 6571 .
a large-diameter insertion portion 6573 drilled in the substrate portion 6571 and through which the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 of the partitioning member 6560 is inserted; A first illumination unit 6574 formed from LEDs (shown as uniform rectangles in FIG. 241(b)), and a plurality of LEs arranged symmetrically with respect to the first illumination unit 6574
a second lighting unit 6575 formed from D and arranged near the vertical center of the substrate unit 6571;
It mainly includes a third illumination part 6576 arranged symmetrically along the lower end of the substrate part 6571 and a connector 6577 for connecting electrical wiring (not shown).

As shown in FIGS. 241(a) and 241(b), each lighting section 6574 to 6576 is formed of a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light to the front side along the front-rear direction. are arranged according to the physical positional relationship. That is, the first lighting section 6574 is positioned corresponding to the central light hole 6562 , the second lighting section 6575 is positioned surrounded by the left and right light holes 6563 , and the third lighting section 6576 is positioned below the partition member 6560 . They are each arranged at a position below the edge. Thereby, each lighting section 6574 to 6576 illuminates a separate area partitioned by the partitioning member 6560 . Note that the first illumination unit 6574 and the second illumination unit 6575 illuminate the area inside the partitioning member 6560, while the third illumination unit 6576 illuminates the area inside the partitioning member 6560.
illuminate the area outside the

It should be noted that the third lighting section 6576 is illustrated as being partially shielded by the partitioning member 6560 when viewed from the front. As will be described later, the light emitted from the third illumination section 6576 reaches the light receiving member 65
58, the light emitted from the third illumination section 6576 can be prevented from being blocked by the partition member 6560.
and the partition member 6560 can be arranged to at least partially overlap in the front-rear direction.

The thickness of the substrate portion 6571 is equal to the thickness of the fastening portion 65 of the partition member 6560 at the fastening insertion portion 6572 .
64 and the rear supporting member 6580 are designed with dimensions that do not act upon fastening force. That is, the electrical board 6570 is separated from the partitioning member 6560 and the rear supporting member 65 without being fastened and fixed.
supported between 80

The fastening inserting portion 6572 is formed in a vertically elongated oval shape (or a shape obtained by cutting an oval in half) when viewed from the front. As a result, it is possible to improve assembly efficiency, and the details will be described later.

The rear support member 6580 is a member that covers the acoustic device 6610 from the front side, and is a pair of members that are configured to have substantially symmetrical shapes with each other.
581, a flange portion 6582 extending from the upper edge of the front plate portion 6581 to the front side, and an upper plate portion having the same plane as the upper surface of the flange portion 6582 and extending in a plate shape to the rear side. 6583
and a rear box portion 6584 which is connected to the left and right edges of the front plate portion 6581 (edges on the side opposite to the side where the pair of members face each other) and the lower edge and is formed in a box shape opened to the rear side, A pair of rear box parts 6
A lower box portion 6585 formed in a box-like shape having a smooth upper surface and opening downward on the side near the rear box portion 6584 of the 584 portion, the lower box portion 6585 and the front plate portion 65
81 and is arranged to face the mating member (back support member 6580), and between the opposing plate portion 6586 and the lower box portion 6585, there is a cut penetrating vertically. A notch portion 6587 that is a notch is mainly provided.

The front plate portion 6581 has a plurality of fastening supports each including an oval rib capable of supporting the fastening portion 6564 of the partition member 6560 and an insertion hole through which a fastening screw fastened to the fastening portion 6564 is inserted. A portion 6581a and a through hole formed in a vertically elongated oval shape with a left-right width slightly longer than the diameter of the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 of the partitioning member 6560 and arranged at a position overlapping the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 in the front and rear. Multiple positioning holes 6581b and a plurality of screw insertion portions 6581c through which fastening screws for fastening and fixing the front side units 6520 to 6550 can be inserted, mainly drilled in the lower edge portion forming the boundary between the rear box portion 6584, and Similarly to the screw insertion portion 6581c, the rear box portion 658
4 along the lower edge forming the boundary with the front side units 6520 to 6550
A plurality of long positioning holes 6581d used for positioning the electrical wiring board 6570, and a wiring hole 658 which is drilled at a location corresponding to the connector 6577 of the electrical board 6570 and allows the electrical wiring to pass back and forth.
1e and .

The rib of the fastening support portion 6581a has an inner width in the left-right direction that constitutes the short diameter of the partition member 656.
0 is slightly longer than the outer diameter of the fastening portion 6564, the outer width in the left-right direction is
It is longer than the lateral width of the fastening insertion portion 6572 of 70 . Therefore, in the assembled state (see FIG. 235), the fastening portion 6564 is inserted inside the elliptical rib of the fastening support portion 6581a, and the electrical board 6570 is surface-supported by the tip of the elliptical rib. (See FIG. 244(a)).

The screw insertion portion 6581c and the long positioning hole 6581d are holes used for assembling the rear support member 6580 and the front units 6520 to 6550.
6550 along the direction of travel. In other words, the screw insertion portion 6581c and the long positioning hole 6581d are formed in a downwardly inclined manner toward the front side (see FIGS. 244(a) and 246(b)).

The front units 6520 to 6550 have screw insertion portions 6581c and long positioning holes 6581.
It is attached to the rear units 6560 to 6580 along the inclined direction formed by d, and fastening screws are screwed in along the direction of the downward inclination (see FIG. 247).

This makes it easier to avoid interference between the front units 6520 to 6550 and the electrical board 6570 compared to the case where they are opened in the front-rear direction.
Since the position of 81d can be brought closer to the electrical board 6570, when the front plate portion 6581 is formed to have the same size, a wide installation area for the electrical board 6570 can be secured.
When the electrical board 6570 is formed in the same size, the area for forming the screw insertion portion 6581c and the long positioning hole 6581d can be narrowed (they can be formed compactly).

The flange portion 6582 is a portion that abuts on the upper surfaces of the flange portions 6561 a to 6561 c of the partition member 6560 . When a downward load (hanging load) is applied to the partition member 6560, the flange portion 6582 functions as a portion that suppresses the partition member 6560 from falling forward.

The upper plate portion 6583 is arranged at a position corresponding to the fastening portion 6513 (see FIG. 238) and includes a plurality of fitting recessed portions 6583a that are recessed so as to be fittable with the fastening portion 6513 . Fitting concave portion 6
583a is formed in a rectangular shape (shape corresponding to the shape of plate portion 6513a on the front side of fastening portion 6513) when viewed in the left-right direction, and is open at the top and rear.

The rear box portion 6584 includes an overhanging portion 6584a that overhangs the front side from the front plate portion 6581, and the sound transmission portion 6 made of punching metal that covers an opening formed in the overhanging portion 6584a.
584b, a light-receiving portion 6584c formed of a light-transmitting member disposed at the right end of the projecting portion 6584a of the right member, and a position closest to the center of the upper end (a position near the front plate portion 6581). A pair of plate-like metal spring members 6584d formed so as to be capable of generating a biasing force in a direction repulsive from the metal body portion 10014a in the assembled state (see FIG. 207), and an insertion hole 6512 of the upper cover member 6510 (see FIG. 237). ) and a pair of fastening portions 6584e to which fastening screws inserted through are fastened.

The projecting portion 6584a has an upper edge formed in a shape that follows the shape of the lower edge of the electrical board 6570 (
241), and its upper surface constitutes a guide surface for guiding the front units 6520-6550.

The sound transmission portion 6584b is a portion through which sound waves generated from the acoustic device 6610 (see FIG. 235) pass. The sound transmission portion 6584b is arranged at a position facing the vibrating membrane 6611 (see FIG. 235) of the acoustic device 6610. As shown in FIG.

The light-receiving part 6584c receives the light emitted from the lighting part 10014c (see FIG. 235) formed from a single LED arranged in the upper right corner of the front frame 10014, and shows it to the player as a light-emitting effect. is. This illumination part 10014c is the illumination board 65 in this embodiment.
Light emission is controlled in a manner different from that of 70 . That is, while the light emission effect of the illumination board 6570 is executed during a variable effect with a high occurrence probability, a normal change effect and reach effect, a demonstration effect, etc., the light emission effect of the lighting unit 10014c has a high probability of occurrence. It is executed when an extremely low and extremely advantageous effect for the player occurs. Therefore, the player's attention to the lighting section 10014c can be improved.

The lower box portion 6585 is a portion into which the front units 6520 to 6550 enter from below, and is a fastening portion 658 to which a fastening screw inserted from the rear side of the metal body portion 10014a is fastened.
5a.

The notch portion 6587 is one side of a through hole through which sound emitted from the exhaust pressure transmission hole 6612 vertically drilled in the lower surface of the left and right central portion of the acoustic device 6610 (the portion farthest from the diaphragm 6611) passes through. to form That is, the support plate portion 10014 that supports the back side of the acoustic device 6610
The sound emitted from the exhaust pressure transmission hole 6612 passes through the through hole formed by the notch 6587 and the notch 6587 .

The sound that passes through the exhaust pressure transmission hole 6612 is output as a sound directed toward the back side as the diaphragm 6611 vibrates, in contrast to the sound directed toward the front side as the diaphragm 6611 vibrates. This is the sound that passes through the internal cavity of the acoustic device 6610 (corresponding to the duct of the bass reflex speaker) and is emitted to the outside from the exhaust pressure transmission hole 6612 . By providing a plurality of sound output paths in this manner, sounds with different timbres can be generated at the same time.

FIG. 244(a) shows the dividing member 6 along line CCXLIVa-CCXLIVa in FIG.
244(b) is a partitioning member 6560, an electric board 6570, and a back support member 6580 taken along line CCXLIVb-CCXLIVb in FIG. 241. FIG. and a partial cross-sectional view of the acoustic device 6610, and FIG. 245(a) is a partial cross-sectional view of the partition member 6560, the decorative substrate 6570, the back support member 6580, and the acoustic device 6610 taken along line CCXLVa-CCXLVa in FIG. FIG. 245(b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the partition member 6560, the decorative board 6570, the back support member 6580 and the acoustic device 6610 along line CCXLVb-CCXLVb in FIG. 241, and FIG. 246(a) is CCXLVIa in FIG. Fig. 246(b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the partitioning member 6560, the electrical board 6570, the back support member 6580, and the acoustic device 6610 along the -CCXLVIa line; 6570, a partial cross-sectional view of back support member 6580 and acoustic device 6610. FIG.

244(a) to 246(b), the periphery of the flange portion 6582 is shown enlarged. As can be seen from this enlarged view, the upper end of the electrical board 6570 and the flange portion 6
A slight gap is formed with the lower edge of 582 . As a result, even if the back support member 6580 vibrates due to the transmission of vibration of the acoustic device 6610, the vibration of the electrical board 6570 due to the vibration of the back support member 6580 (vibration width) can be suppressed. .

As shown in FIGS. 244(a) and 245(a), the fastening screw inserted through the fastening support portion 6581a of the rear support member 6580 is screwed into the fastening portion 6564 of the partitioning member 6560 with the electrical board 6570 interposed therebetween. By inserting, the partitioning member 6560 and the back support member 6580 are fastened and fixed, but the fastening force is not transmitted to the electrical board 6570 . That is, the electrical board 657
0, the fastening inserting portion 6572 is only aligned with the fastening portion 6564, and the partitioning member 6560 and the back supporting member 6580 are not fixed at the fastening portion.

In addition, while the ribs of the fastening support portion 6581a are in contact with the rear surface of the electrical board 6570, the dividing member 6560 is separated from the electrical board 6570 at the front and rear positions thereof. That is, in this embodiment, since the electrical board 6570 is not sandwiched between the front and rear positions, the electrical board 6570
70 can be displaced in the front-rear direction (for example, tilting displacement).

In addition, the lower edge of the electrical board 6570 is not supported by the rear support member 6580 or the partition member 6560 . This also applies to FIGS. 244(b) to 246(b) described below.

As shown in FIG. 244(b), the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 is inserted through the large-diameter insertion portion 6573 of the electrical board 6570 and the positioning hole 6581b of the back support member 6580. As shown in FIG. Here, the large-diameter insertion portion 6573 and the positioning hole 6581b are formed in an oval shape that can form a gap below the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 . Similarly, the rib of the fastening support portion 6581a is formed in an elliptical shape to the extent that a gap can be formed below the fastening portion 6564 (Fig. 244(a)
)reference). A description will be given of the fact that by forming in this way, the assembly of the dividing member 6560 to the rear support member 6580 is facilitated.

As in the past, the fastening support portion 6 has an inner shape slightly larger than the outer shape of the fastening portion 6564, for example.
When the rib of 581a is formed, it becomes necessary to assemble the partitioning member 6560 with the rear support member 6580 aligned vertically and horizontally.

However, in this embodiment, since the electrical board 6570 is arranged in a non-fixed state between the partition member 6560 and the back support member 6580, the back support member 6580 of the electrical board 6570 is not fixed when the partition member 6560 is assembled. It is also necessary to align the position with respect to, and there is a possibility that the work will be difficult.

Therefore, in this embodiment, as described above, the fastening insertion portion 6572, the large-diameter insertion portion 6573, the ribs of the fastening support portion 6581a, and the positioning holes 6581b are elongated oval shapes (or halved oval shapes). , the assembly can be performed even if the vertical alignment is not accurate.

As an example of an assembly order, first, the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 of the partitioning member 6560 is attached to the electrical board 65 .
The electrical board 6570 is attached to the partition member 6560 so as to be inserted into the large-diameter insertion portion 6573 of 70 . At this time, the arrangement of the electrical board 6570 with respect to the partitioning member 6560 is the large-diameter insertion portion 65
It is not necessary to set it in the longitudinal direction of 73, and any position may be used.

In the present embodiment, the flange portions 6561a to 6561c are formed at positions where they can contact the electrical board 6570, so that when the electrical board 6570 is assembled to the dividing member 6560, the dividing member of the electrical board 6570 is formed. Positional deviation with respect to 6560 is greatly suppressed.

Next, the fastening portion 6564 of the partition member 6560 is connected to the fastening support portion 65 of the rear support member 6580 .
It is inserted inside the rib of 81a. At this time, the arrangement of the fastening portion 6564 with respect to the fastening support portion 6581a does not need to be determined in the longitudinal direction of the rib of the fastening support portion 6581a, and may be at any position. That is, it is sufficient to perform rough positioning (for example, positioning to the extent that the connector 6577 (see FIG. 243) is passed through the wiring hole 6581e (see FIG. 242), or positioning with a sufficiently long allowable width in the vertical direction). It is possible to improve the working efficiency of inserting the 6564 inside the rib of the fastening support portion 6581a.

Next, the partitioning member 6560 is moved with respect to the rear support member 6580 in the longitudinal direction (vertical direction) of the rib of the fastening support portion 6581a, and the fastening portion 6564 and the through hole of the fastening support portion 6581a are aligned. Then, the fastening screw is screwed in (see FIG. 244(a)).

In this state, even if the electrical board 5670 is misaligned, the dividing member 6560 can be lowered by its own weight to a position where the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 supports the large-diameter insertion portion 6573 (see FIG. 244(b)). and aligned with the back support member 6580 .

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the electrical board 6570 is arranged in a non-fixed manner between the partitioning member 6560 and the back support member. By forming the fastening insertion portion 6572, the large-diameter insertion portion 6573, the ribs of the fastening support portion 6581a, and the positioning hole 6581b in a vertically elongated oval shape (or a shape that is half an oval shape) in spite of the assembly mode, , the assembly efficiency can be improved. In addition, even if the illumination board 5670 is displaced, it is configured to be corrected to its original position by its own weight.
It is possible to prevent a long-term decrease in the performance effect of the light emission performance during the game due to the positional deviation of the illumination board 5670 .

The enlarged hole 6562a will be described with reference to FIG. 245(b). central light hole 6562
are arranged in an inverted T shape (four places, see FIG. 241) in the left and right central part, and an enlarged hole 6562a arranged in a substantially gourd shape (substantially pot shape) outside thereof (eight places). , see FIG. 241) and a direct entry hole 6562b. The direct entry hole 6562b will be described later with reference to FIG.

The enlarged hole 6562a is a long rectangular through-hole through which the light emitted from the first lighting unit 6574 passes, and the portion forming the outer edge is raised to the front side, and the inner wall is the front side (the side away from the light source). It is formed so as to incline so that the distance between the two faces widens as it goes to the left.

Thereby, the irradiation width of the light emitted from the first lighting section 6574 can be defined. That is, it is possible to change how the light is shown to the player by the design aspect of the enlarged hole 6562a (inclination angle of the inner wall, raised height, etc.).

In this embodiment, the front end of the enlarged hole 6562a raised to the front side is raised to a position where it abuts on the closed portion 6521c of the transparent tubular member 6521 (see FIG. 263). This allows the light that has passed through the enlarged hole 6562a to enter the transparent cylindrical member 6521 without leaking.

FIG. 246(a) illustrates the screw insertion portion 6581c, and FIG. 246(b) illustrates the positioning long hole 6581d. The screw insertion portion 6581c and the long positioning hole 6581d are
As described above, the front side units 6520 to 6550 are assembled to the rear side units 6560 to 6580 and fastened and fixed along the inclined direction.

Front side units 6520 to 6520-6 are inserted along the screw insertion portion 6581c and the long positioning hole 6581d.
Since 550 is assembled, the degree of freedom in arranging the constituent members can be improved compared to the case of assembling in the front-rear direction.

For example, as shown in FIG. 246(a), the electrical board 6570 can be positioned to cover the area on the front side of the screw insertion portion 6581c, so the size of the electrical board 6570 can be secured. . On the other hand, since the area below the rear side of the front units 6520 to 6550 can be widely used, the size of the rear box portion 6584 and the acoustic device 6610 to be accommodated can be secured.

In particular, in this embodiment, the screw insertion portions 6581c and the long positioning holes 6581d on the right and left outer sides where the diaphragm 6611 of the speaker is arranged are formed so as to be inclined downward toward the front side, so that the diaphragm 6611 can be made large. can be formed (FIGS. 235 and 24
6).

As shown in FIGS. 246(a) and 246(b), the upper edge of the screw insertion portion 6581c and the lower edge of the long positioning hole 6581d are inclined downward toward the front side, while the upper edge is inclined forward and backward. The reason why it is formed along (not inclined) is that the drawing direction of the resin mold used when manufacturing the back support member 6580 is the front-rear direction.

In other words, in order to simply construct the resin mold (consisting of two resin molds separated in the front-rear direction), the screw insertion portion 6581c and the long positioning hole 6581d are replaced with the rear support member 658.
It is necessary to have a shape that can be formed in the same drawing direction as the fastening support portion 6581a, the fitting concave portion 6583a, and the like, which are formed at 0. In this embodiment, the pulling direction is the fastening support portion 6581a.
and the screw insertion portion 658
1c and the long positioning hole 6581d are formed in a distorted shape (a shape that changes in the hole formation direction (depth direction)).

In particular, the screw insertion portion 6581c is a through-hole through which a fastening screw to be screwed into the back-side fastening portion 6555 (see FIG. 240) is inserted, and is a portion that receives the load that occurs due to fastening and fixing. As for the shape of the screw insertion portion 6581c, the thickness of the upper edge portion of the portion to which the load accompanying fastening is applied is
Since the hole is made thinner toward the center, the load is likely to be unbalanced between the upper edge and the rest of the hole, and there is a risk that the fastening screw may become loose depending on the state of use and the number of years of use.

In order to prevent the tightening screws from loosening, tightening screws with a large head diameter may be used.
The difference in quality required for fastening screws used in other fastening locations results in high costs. In other words, if a fastening screw with a large head diameter is used only at the problematic fastening point, the fastening screw cannot be used as a common component, resulting in high costs. , the material required for the fastening screw is bulky, resulting in high cost in terms of material cost.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the front wall 6620 of the acoustic device 6610, which is opposed to the head of the fastening screw inserted through the screw insertion portion 6581c, is formed in the front wall 6620 in a recessed shape ( A retaining plate portion 6621 formed as a plate upper portion parallel to the plate portion in which the screw insertion portion 6581c is formed is provided.

The retaining plate portion 6621 can secure a region where the head of the fastening screw can be arranged between the back support member 6580 and the retaining plate portion 6621 . In addition, since the retaining plate portion 6621 is arranged in the direction in which the head of the fastening screw is displaced when the fastening screw is loosened, it restricts further advancement of the fastening screw and prevents the fastening screw from coming off. can be prevented.

The retainer plate portion 6621 is formed with a dimension that leaves a slight gap from the head of the screw when the fastening screw is not loosened. Therefore, it is possible to avoid transmitting the vibration of the acoustic device 6610 through the head of the fastening screw.

On the other hand, when the fastening screw is loosened, the movement of the fastening screw is restricted by the abutment, so that the gap between the retainer plate portion 6621 and the head of the fastening screw is filled. At this time, the sound device 66
10, the vibration of the acoustic device 6610 can be transmitted to the front unit 6520-6550 via the head of the fastening screw.

In addition, the front wall 6620 has a fastening support portion 6581a (see FIG. 207) in the assembled state (see FIG.
FIG. 242) includes a plurality of contact avoidance recesses 6622 recessed at the back positions of the through holes.
The contact avoiding concave portion 6622 is inserted into the fastening support portion 6581a and the fastening portion 6564 (Fig. 243) is inserted.
See), it is recessed to the extent that contact with the head of the fastening screw to be screwed in can be avoided (a dimension that creates a slight gap between the head and the head).

This can prevent the vibration of the acoustic device 6610 from being transmitted to the partition member 6560 via the fastening screw. In addition, since the axial direction of the through hole of the fastening support portion 6581a is the front-rear direction, which is the same as the direction in which the resin mold is pulled out, the thickness of the plate portion to which the fastening force of the fastening screw is applied is constant in the direction of the hole. A fastening force can be generated. Therefore, the fastening support portion 65
Although it is unlikely that the fastening screw inserted through the 81a is loosened, if the fastening screw is loosened, the contact avoiding recessed portion 6622 performs the same function as the retaining plate portion 6621 described above.
can be generated in

That is, when the fastening screw is loosened, the progress of the fastening screw is restricted by the abutment, so that the gap between the contact avoiding concave portion 6622 and the head of the fastening screw is filled. At this time, the sound device 66
10, the vibration of the acoustic device 6610 can be transmitted to the front unit 6520-6550 via the head of the fastening screw.

As described above, it is possible to grasp the transmission of vibration caused by contact between the head of the fastening screw and the retaining plate portion 6621 or the contact avoiding concave portion 6622 due to the loosening of the fastening screw. It is possible to notice the occurrence of loosening, and it is possible to easily avoid a situation in which the fastening screw is left loose.

For example, transmission of vibration may be configured to generate abnormal noise or detect vibration.

As described with reference to FIGS. 244(a) to 246(b), in this embodiment, the illumination board 65
70 is positioned adjacent to the back support member 6580 while not being fixed to the back support member 6580 . As a result, the acoustic device 6610 and the electrical decoration board 6570 can be placed close to each other with the back support member 6580 interposed therebetween, while the vibration of the back support member 6580 caused by the vibration of the acoustic device 6610 is transmitted to the electrical decoration board 6570 . It is possible to avoid breaking the substrate 6570 .

Here, the partitioning member 6560 is the production part of the decorative board 6570 (that is, the lighting part 6574 to
6576) are connected to the back support member 6580, the area of the connecting portion between the partition member 6560 and the back support member 6580 is narrowed for the purpose of securing a large proportion of the performance portion on the surface of the electrical decoration board 6570. easy to get

As a result, there is a tendency for the partition member 6560 to be insufficiently fixed. If the 6560 vibrates, there is a risk that the presentation effect will be poor, the fastening part will loosen, or the partitioning member 6560 itself will be damaged.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, vibration of the partitioning member 6560 is suppressed by fixing the partitioning member 6560 from another direction. This will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 247 is a schematic side view of the presentation effect device 6500. FIG. In FIG. 247, the presentation effect device 65
00, the fastening locations, the fastening directions, and the fastening directions are schematically illustrated. That is, in FIG. 247, the fastening screw is indicated by a T, the horizontal line of the T indicates the head of the fastening screw,
A vertical line extending from the center of the horizontal line indicates the screw portion of the fastening screw.

As shown in FIG. 247, the presentation device 6500 includes front units 6520 to 6550 surrounding the front and bottom surfaces of the rear units 6560 to 6580.
. .

This avoids reinforcing the rigidity of the upper lid member 6510 . In this embodiment, since the upper lid member 6510 is formed in a thin plate shape (see FIG. 238), when the vibration of the acoustic device 6610 is transmitted through the back support member 6580, the upper lid member 6510 moves in the thickness direction ( It is easy to displace (deform) in the vertical direction.

Along with this displacement (deformation), the front-rear width of the upper lid member 6510 is shortened. For example, when the upper lid member 6510 is deformed so as to be curved with respect to the front-rear center thereof, the front-rear interval between the through-holes 6512 that are formed away from each other in the front-rear direction is shortened. As a result, a load that displaces the partitioning unit 6540 to the rear side is generated, and a compressive load in the front-rear direction can be applied to the partitioning member 6560 .

That is, since the partitioning member 6560 can be sandwiched between the rear support member 6580 and the partitioning unit 6540 and a load can be applied, even if the partitioning member 6560 vibrates due to the vibration of the acoustic device 6610, the vibration can be suppressed. can be done.

Here, even if the front-rear width of the upper lid member 6510 is shortened, the partition unit 6540
When the lower side of the partition member 6560 is displaced to the front side (displaced to the side away from the partition member 6560), the load applied from the partition unit 6540 to the partition member 6560 tends to be insufficient, and the partition member 656
There is a possibility that the effect of suppressing the vibration of 0 will be insufficient.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the displacement of the lower end of the partitioning unit 6540 in the front-rear direction is restricted by the guided unit 6550, it is possible to prevent the lower side of the partitioning unit 6540 from being displaced to the front side. As a result, the partitioning member 656 from the partitioning unit 6540
0 can be sufficiently ensured.

At this time, since the fastening screw is fastened and fixed in the direction along the plate surface of the extension plate portion 6552 at the end portion of the guided unit 6550 (see FIG. 254(a)), the acoustic device 6610 via the back support member 6580 can be set along the plate surface of the extended plate portion 6552 .

As a result, the curved deformation of the guided unit 6550 can be suppressed, and the front and rear fastening points can be suppressed from moving in the front-rear direction. Therefore, the guided unit 6550
Even when vibration is transmitted to the partition unit 6540, the function of suppressing the displacement of the lower end of the partition unit 6540 in the front-rear direction can be sufficiently ensured.

As shown in FIG. 247, by devising the fastening point, the acoustic device 66 that is likely to vibrate
10 in a non-fixed state, the electrical board 6570 is prevented from being damaged, and the electrical board 6570 is attached to the acoustic device 6610 (or the back support member 6580).
), the vibration of the partition member 6560 can be suppressed by transmitting the vibration to the partition member 6560 which prevents the partition member 6560 from being separated from the partition member 6560 by more than the allowable amount.

That is, it is possible to improve the shape maintenance performance of the presentation device 6500 while improving the durability of the electrical decoration board 6570 arranged close to the acoustic device 6610 .

One purpose of setting the fastening direction of the fastening screw in this embodiment is to
10 displacements can be supported. That is, the upper lid member 6510 has a fastening portion 6513
The back side is fixed by , and is extended in the front and rear in the form of a thin plate.

For example, when a downward load is applied to the front end of the upper lid member 6510, the shape of the upper lid member 6510 causes the center of the radius of curvature to be arranged below the upper lid member 6510 with the back side end as the starting point. can be bent and displaced at In this case, the upper cover member 6510 itself is subjected to a tensile load in the front-rear direction, while the other members arranged below it are subjected to a compressive load.

Since the direction of this compressive load is along the surface of the upper lid member 6510, it is along the front-rear direction on the back side, which is the base end side, but as the amount of displacement increases (toward the front side), It follows the direction of downward inclination toward the front side.

In the present embodiment, the fastening direction of the fastening screw inserted through the insertion hole 6547b of the insertion plate portion 6547 is the direction inclined downward toward the front side with respect to the front-rear direction. The direction of the compressive load caused by the displacement of the member 6510 can be brought closer.

As a result, in addition to being able to generate a sufficient resistance to the compressive load at the fastening position, the component of the compressive load applied in the direction of shearing the fastening screw (the direction perpendicular to the fastening direction) is reduced, so the fastening screw breaks. can be suppressed.

A fastening screw whose fastening direction is inclined downward toward the front side is the plate guide unit 6.
550, the plate guide unit 6550 is arranged close to the lower side and the back side of the electrical board 6570 (see the screw insertion portion 6581c and the like in FIG. 246(a)). In this embodiment, the electrical board 6570 is arranged in a non-fixed manner and is easily displaced. That is, even if the electrical board 6570 is displaced, excessive displacement of the electrical board 6570 can be regulated by enabling contact with the plate guide unit 6550 when the amount of displacement becomes excessive.

In addition, since the plate guide unit 6550 is arranged close to the back side of the electrical board 6570 (the side on which the acoustic device 6610 is arranged), the displacement of the electrical board 6570 to the back side can be particularly suppressed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the electrical board 6570 from approaching the acoustic device 6610 as a vibration source.

In this embodiment, the fastening parts (fastening support part 6581a, insertion hole 6565a, etc.) whose fastening direction is along the front-rear direction are gathered on the left-right center side (see FIG. 242), and the fastening direction is downward toward the front side. The fastening portion (screw insertion portion 6581c, insertion plate portion 6547, etc.) along the direction of inclination is
They are clustered on the left and right outer sides (see Figures 242 and 256) and they are not arranged in close proximity.

As a result, it is possible to suppress the influence of deformation (displacement) that occurs in one fastening portion on the other fastening portion. That is, even if loosening occurs in the fastening portion along the front-rear direction and displacement in the front-rear direction occurs, the portion affected by the loosening can be limited to the fastening portion along the front-rear direction. It is possible to avoid the occurrence of a load in a direction (along the front-rear direction) that is inclined with respect to the fastening direction on the fastening portion along the direction. As a result, loosening of the screws can be suppressed.

In addition, by fixing the longitudinally long portion of the left-right central side with a fastening portion whose fastening direction is along the front-rear direction, the resistance force of the effect device 6500 against the load in the downward direction can be improved.

On the other hand, it is thought that a fastening portion whose fastening direction is inclined downward toward the front side tends to have lower resistance to a load in the downward direction than a fastening portion whose fastening direction is along the front-rear direction. In this embodiment, the resistance to the load in the push-down direction is reduced by arranging the fastening portions along the direction in which the fastening direction inclines downward toward the front side on the left and right outer sides that are short along the front-rear direction. While minimizing the influence of this, it is possible to secure an arrangement area for the electrical board 6570 and the acoustic device 6610 .

FIG. 248 is a cross-sectional view of the rear units 6560-6580 along line CCXLVIII-CCXLVIII in FIG. 241(a). In addition, a specific part is expanded and illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 248, the electrical board 6570 has a large-diameter insertion portion 6573 that is connected to a partition member 6560 .
abuts on the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 of the left-right direction. In addition, while the front and rear surfaces are in contact with the left and right side portions of the partitioning member 6560 and the left and right side portions of the back support member 6580, the contact positions are formed so as not to coincide with each other.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to improve the durability of the electrical board 6570 and adjust the susceptibility to displacement. They will be explained in order below. First, the improvement in durability of the electrical board 6570 will be described.

Here, if the front and rear surfaces of the electrical board 6570 are in contact with the partitioning member 6560 and the rear support member 6580 at the same positions, for some reason (error during resin molding, poor fastening, etc.), the partitioning may occur. When the distance between the contact portions of the member 6560 and the back support member 6580 becomes shorter than the plate thickness of the electrical board 6570, a compressive force is applied to the electrical board 6570. There is a risk that the decorative substrate 6570 will break.

In addition, even if no compressive force is applied to the electrical board 6570 during assembly, the back support member 6580 vibrates due to the vibration of the acoustic device 6610 during movement, causing a load (for example, a compressive load). may be applied, and there is a risk that the electrical board 6570 may break due to this load.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the front and rear surfaces of the electrical board 6570 do not come into contact with the dividing member 6560 and the rear support member 6580 at the front and rear positions (there are places where they come into contact at different positions). Even if a load is applied to the electrical board 6570 in the manner described above, the load is not a load that compresses the electrical board 6570 but a load that bends the electrical board 6570 .
Therefore, the electric decoration board 6570 is flexurally deformed, so that the possibility of the electric decoration board 6570 cracking can be reduced.

Next, adjustment of the ease of displacement of the electrical board 6570 will be described. Decorative board 6570
The fastening portion 6564 (see FIG. 243) and the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 of the partitioning member 6560 are inserted to prevent misalignment. See Figure 243).

In addition, since the electrical board 6570 abuts (contacts) the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 in the lateral direction, the contact resistance between the electrical board 6570 and the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 is ensured. Since the large-diameter cylindrical portion 65656 is formed to have a diameter larger than that of the fastening portion 6564, the contact area is naturally increased, and sufficient frictional resistance can be ensured.

Therefore, it is possible to easily suppress the occurrence of displacement of the electrical board 6570 in the vicinity of the left-right central portion of the electrical board 6570 . Therefore, even when the surrounding members vibrate due to the vibration of the acoustic device 6610, the direction of the light emitted from the first lighting section 6574 of the electrical board 6570 can be easily maintained.

On the other hand, on the left and right sides (especially the lower side) of the electrical board 6570, neither the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 nor the fastening portion 6564 are arranged, and no compressive load is generated from the front and back. Displacement can be easily generated compared to the left and right central portions of the 6570.

Therefore, when the surrounding members vibrate due to the vibration of the acoustic device 6610, the electrical board 65
The direction of light emitted from the second lighting unit 6575 and the third lighting unit 6576 of 70 can be easily changed.

In this embodiment, since the left and right acoustic devices 6610 are arranged as a pair, each acoustic device 66
The vibration mode of the electrical board 6570 changes based on the ten vibration modes. That is, the case where the sound is output only from the right acoustic device 6610 and the right side of the illumination board 6570 is preferentially vibrated, and the case where the sound is output only from the left acoustic device 6610 and the left side of the illumination board 6570 is preferentially vibrated. When the sound is output from both the left and right acoustic devices 6610, the illumination board 6
The electrical board 6570 can be vibrated in at least three different vibration modes, including the case of vibrating both the left and right sides of the electric board 6570 .

Next, front side units 6520 to 6550 will be described. FIG. 249 is an exploded front perspective view of front units 6520-6550, and FIG. 250 is front units 6520-6.
550 is an exploded rear perspective view of 550. FIG. In addition, in FIGS. 249 and 250, illustration of reference numerals for detailed configurations is omitted in order to facilitate understanding.

249 and 250, an optical transmission unit 6520 that transmits light incident from the first lighting section 6574 of the electrical board 6570 to the front side, and an outer frame that surrounds the optical transmission unit 6520 and forms an outer frame. The figure shows a disassembled state of the member 6530, the partitioning unit 6540 that abuts on the partitioning member 6560 in the front and rear to similarly partition the light, and the guided unit 6550 that is guided on the upper surface of the projecting portion 6584a of the back support member 6580. be.

When performing light emission through the front units 6520 to 6550, the light transmission unit 6520
receives light from the first lighting section 6574 , the partitioning unit 6540 receives light from the second lighting section 6575 , and the guided unit 6550 receives light from the third lighting section 6576 . Next, the partitioning unit 6540 and guided unit 6550 will be described in detail.

251(a) is a front view of the partitioning unit 6540 and the guided unit 6550, FIG. 251(b) is a rear view of the partitioning unit 6540 and the guided unit 6550, and FIG. 252(b) is a rear view of the partitioning unit 6540; FIG. 253(a) is a front view of the plate guide unit 6550; FIG. 253(b) is a plate guide 6550 is a rear view of unit 6550. FIG.

254(a) is a cross-sectional view of the partitioning unit 6540 and the guided unit 6550 taken along line CCLIVa-CCLIVa in FIG. 251(b), and FIG.
254(c) is a cross-sectional view of the partitioning unit 6540 and the guided unit 6550 taken along the line CCLIVb-CCLIVb of FIG. 251(b); FIG.
FIG. 65 is a cross-sectional view of the partitioning unit 6540 and the guided unit 6550 taken along line IVc.

255 is an exploded front perspective view of the compartment unit 6540 and the guided unit 6550, and FIG. 256 is an exploded rear perspective view of the compartment unit 6540 and the guided unit 6550. FIG.

The division unit 6540 includes a milky-white member 6541 formed of a milky-white light-transmitting resin material and having a substantially inverted triangular shape when viewed from the front, and an optical transmission unit 6520 formed through the central portion of the milky-white member 6541 in the front-rear direction. Through hole 65 formed so that the rear part can be inserted
42, a pair of fastening portions 6543, which are portions projecting inward from the through-holes 6542 and to which the optical transmission unit 6520 is fastened and fixed, and fastening screws for fastening and fixing the outer frame member 6530 are inserted so as to be inserted. a pair of post-guide fastening portions 6545 extending cylindrically to the rear side and to which fastening screws passing through the insertion holes 6565a of the partitioning member 6560 are fastened; A pair of box-shaped light-receiving portions 6 formed in a box-like shape opened to the rear side through
546, and a plate-shaped portion extending downward from the lower edge of the box-shaped light receiving portion 6546, through which fastening screws for fastening and fixing the division unit 6540 to the plate guide unit 6550 are inserted so as to be inserted. A plurality of insertion plate portions 6547 in which insertion holes 6547b are formed, and a milky-white member 6541 are formed from a colorless and transparent light-transmitting resin material so as to cover the front side of the box-shaped light receiving portion 6546.
and a transparent covering member 6548 that is fitted and supported in the .

The partition unit 6540 has a front side edge formed in a curved shape that bulges to the front side when viewed from above, similarly to the upper lid member 6510, is formed in a substantially inverted triangle shape when viewed from the front, and is centered on the rear side when viewed from the side. 254(a)).

The opalescent member 6541 has a pair of fastening portions 6541a on its upper surface to which fastening screws inserted through the insertion holes 6512 (see FIG. 237) of the upper lid member 6510 are fastened. This fastening portion 6541
a and the upper lid member 6510 are fastened and fixed.

The front side of the through-hole 6542 is inclined downward toward the back side corresponding to the inclination of the contact plate portion 6525 (see FIG. 258(b)) of the optical transmission unit 6520, which will be described later. As a result, the front end portion of the through hole 6542 and the contact plate portion 6525 (see FIG. 258(b)) can be brought into contact with each other, thereby preventing the attitude of the optical transmission unit 6520 from changing. can be done.

The fastening portion 6543 is formed with the fastening hole facing the front side. That is, the fastening screw is screwed in from the front side. Further, the post-guidance fastening portion 6545 is formed with the fastening hole directed toward the back side. That is, the fastening screw is screwed in from the rear side.

The box-shaped light receiving portion 6546 is a portion arranged to face the second illumination portion 6575 (see FIG. 241(b)) of the electrical board 6570. teeth,
A jagged decoration with a short lateral width is formed. This jagged shape is formed by a concavo-convex shape in which ridges having a triangular cross section are densely aligned.

This shape can scatter (diffuse) the light incident from the back side, so that the box-shaped light receiving section 6546 and the transparent covering member 6548 covering the front side thereof can emit light uniformly when viewed from the front.

Note that this jagged shape is described as a process performed on the surface irradiated with light, and the shape is not limited at all. For example, shape processing in which dot shapes are densely formed, or wavy striped shape processing may be used.

The insertion plate portion 6547 includes a U-shaped wall portion 6547a formed in a U-shape with an upper side opened in a rear view, an insertion hole 6547b drilled in the front-rear direction, and a lower side of the insertion hole 6547b. and a protruding rib 6547c protruding toward the front side in a semi-elliptical shape surrounding the .

By aligning the U-shaped wall portion 6547 a with the front side fastening portion 6554 of the guided unit 6550 , the partitioning unit 6540 can be easily assembled to the guided unit 6550 .

The insertion plate portion 6547 is formed with an insertion hole through which a fastening screw to be screwed into the threaded portion 6554a (see FIG. 256) is inserted, and is a portion that receives the load that occurs during fastening and fixing. Insertion plate portion 6
The shape of the insertion hole formed in 547 is such that the thickness of the upper edge portion of the portion to which the load associated with fastening is applied in relation to the drawing direction of the resin mold (the front-rear direction in this embodiment) is the center of the hole. 254(b)).

In this case, load imbalance is likely to occur between the upper edge and the rest, so the compartment unit 6540
and the plate guide unit 6550, there is a risk that the tightening screw may become loose if small misalignments occur repeatedly.

In order to prevent the tightening screws from loosening, tightening screws with a large head diameter may be used.
The difference in quality required for fastening screws used in other fastening locations results in high costs. In other words, if a fastening screw with a large head diameter is used only at the problematic fastening point, the fastening screw cannot be used as a common component, resulting in high costs. , the material required for the fastening screw is bulky, resulting in high cost in terms of material cost.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the plate guide unit 6550 for the partition unit 6540
It is configured to prevent the positional deviation of at a plurality of locations. Namely, firstly, the plate guide unit 6
The downward displacement of the plate guide unit 6550 can be prevented by supporting the threaded portion 6554a of the plate guide unit 6550 with the projecting rib 6547c of the partition unit 6540 (see FIGS. 247 and 254(b)).

Secondly, the upper end of the plate guide unit 6550 on the front side is attached to the milky-white member 6541 by the engagement protrusion 6 .
It is configured to be engaged in the front-rear direction with the rear-side lower end portion of the transparent covering member 6548 that is locked at 548b (see FIG. 254(b)). As a result, the partition unit 6 of the plate guide unit 6550
Displacement to the front side with respect to 540 can be prevented.

Thirdly, the lower end of the insertion plate portion 6547 is the main body resin member 655 of the plate guide unit 6550 .
1 (see FIG. 254(b)). Thereby, upward displacement of the plate guide unit 6550 with respect to the partition unit 6540 can be prevented.

The partitioning unit 6 of the plate guide unit 6550 is mainly due to the first to third contact structures.
Since the displacement with respect to 540 can be suppressed, it is possible to suppress loosening of the fastening screw screwed into the screw-in portion 6554a.

The transparent covering member 6548 is formed in a substantially V shape when viewed from the front. A plurality of locking protrusions 6548b projecting to the side in a plate shape are provided. The left and right central portions of the box-shaped light receiving portion 6546 are notched from the rear side to the front side, and the lower edge plate-shaped portion 6548a enters so as to fill this gap.

On the upper surface of the lower edge plate-shaped portion 6548a, a jagged decoration is formed in the same manner as the box-shaped light receiving portion 6546. As shown in FIG. As a result, even if the central portion of the box-shaped light receiving portion 6546 is designed to be notched, the notched portion can be compensated for by the ornamental shape of the lower edge plate-shaped portion 6548a.
It is possible to emit light uniformly over the horizontal direction of 48 .

Note that this jagged shape is described as a process performed on the surface irradiated with light, and the shape is not limited at all. For example, shape processing in which dot shapes are densely formed, or wavy striped shape processing may be used.

Here, in this embodiment, as will be described later, the lower bottom surface of the guided unit 6550 is formed as an inclined surface that slopes upward toward the rear side (see FIG. 254(c)), and the lower edge plate-shaped portion In order to form the lower edge plate portion 6548a at the lower bottom surface of the guided unit 6550 and the plane position, the lower edge plate-like portion 6548a is formed as an inclined surface that rises and inclines toward the rear side, like the lower bottom surface of the guided unit 6550. .

If an attempt is made to form this inclined surface with the box-shaped light receiving portion 6546, the extraction direction of the mold for forming the box-shaped light receiving portion 6546 becomes complicated. That is, the extraction direction is in the front-rear direction near the through hole 6542, while in the vicinity of the lower edge of the box-shaped light-receiving part 6546, the direction is upwardly inclined toward the back side. Moreover, the manufacturing process may become complicated.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the inclined surface is not formed by the milky-white member 6541, but formed by a transparent covering member 6548 instead (see FIG. 254(c)). Furthermore, in the assembled state, a white partitioning member 6560 is arranged opposite to the back side of the lower edge plate-like portion 6548a of the transparent covering member 6548 that constitutes the inclined surface. can be visually recognized with a uniform color (white).

As a result, the extraction direction of the molding die for the milky-white member 6541 is unified in the front-rear direction, and the shape of the transparent covering member 6548 that covers the front side of the milky-white member 6541 is inclined to the side that interferes in the front-rear extraction direction. The transparent covering member 654 has a shape (a shape in which the lower edge plate-like portion 6548a of the transparent covering member 6548 is inclined in a direction in which it enters the compartment unit 6540 in a front view).
The light emission of 8 can be visually recognized by the player in a uniform light emission mode.

In other words, the division unit 6540 has a shape that tapers toward the back side (the space between the top and bottom narrows), and the back portion of the milky-white member 6541 and the transparent covering member 65 that are adjacent to each other.
Since the same decorative shape (cut) can be continuously applied to the upper surface portion of the lower edge plate-shaped portion 6548a of 48 (see the enlarged view of FIG. 240), it is possible to perform a uniform light emission effect. .

In this case, it is difficult to set the direction in which the transparent covering member 6548 is removed from the mold in the front-rear direction. Therefore, by setting the direction along the lower edge plate-shaped portion 6548a (the upwardly inclined direction) as the extraction direction of the mold, a manufacturing process in which resin is molded with a mold whose extraction direction is the front-rear direction (one direction). The transparent covering member 6548 can be manufactured in the same manufacturing process.

Therefore, the milky-white member 6541 and the transparent covering member 6548 can be easily manufactured, and the portion visible through the transparent covering member 6548 can be uniformly illuminated.

The latching protrusion 6548b is a portion latched to the upper edge of the bulging portion toward the front side at a position corresponding to the box-shaped light receiving portion 6546 of the milky white member 6541 . That is, when the transparent covering member 6548 is attached to the milky-white member 6541 , the locking protrusion 6548 b is locked to the milky-white member 6541 .

The guided unit 6550 is formed of a colored and opaque resin material in a substantially V-shape when viewed from the front, and includes a main body resin member 6551 guided along the upper surface of the projecting portion 6584a of the back support member 6580.
, an extension plate portion 6552 extending in a plate shape toward the back side along the lower edge of the left-right central portion of the main body resin member 6551, and the back side end portion of the extension plate portion 6552 is perforated. A pair of left and right exhaust pressure passage holes 6553 and partitioning units 6 arranged along the left and right upper edges of the main body resin member 6551 .
A plurality of front side fastening portions 6554 arranged opposite to the insertion plate portion 6547 of the 540 and to which fastening screws are fastened and fixed, and rear supporting members 6580 arranged along the left and right lower edges of the main body resin member 6551.
A plurality of rear side fastening portions 6555 to which the fastening screws passing through the screw insertion portion 6581c (see FIG. 241(a)) are fastened and fixed, and a rib-like protrusion between the rear side fastening portions 6555 and the rear support member A plurality of insertion ribs 6556 to be inserted into the long positioning holes 6581d (see FIG. 241(a)) of the 6580, and a plurality of through holes 6 drilled in the front-rear direction in the left and right arms.
557 and a pair of light receiving members 6558 formed of a colorless and transparent light-transmissive resin material and fitted and fixed in the plurality of through holes 6557 .

The direction in which the guided unit 6550 is guided along the upper surface of the protruding portion 6584a of the back support member 6580 is the mold removal direction. That is, each structural member is formed along a direction of inclination that slopes upward toward the rear side or along a direction perpendicular to the direction of inclination.

The exhaust pressure passage hole 6553 is formed at a position facing the exhaust pressure transmission hole 6612 (see FIG. 235) of the acoustic device 6610 . That is, the sound output through the exhaust pressure transmission hole 6612 reaches the player after passing through the exhaust pressure transmission hole 6553 .

Exhaust pressure passage hole 6553 has a range facing exhaust pressure transmission hole 6612 (see FIG. 235),
Instead of being formed as a single large hole, it is formed in a plurality of small hole shapes (formed in subdivided areas). As a result, it is possible to suppress fraudulent acts of entering a thin wire material such as a piano wire.

In addition, the exhaust pressure passage hole 6553 is formed so that the width of the hole becomes narrower toward the end of the hole and toward the rear side. As a result, the holes can be clogged with fine wires,
After entering the exhaust pressure passage hole 6553, the movement resistance of the fine wire can be increased when the fine wire is further advanced further or when a load is applied by hooking on a specific member. This will
Since the time required for fraud can be extended, it is possible to suppress fraud.

The front-side fastening portion 6554 includes a screw-in portion 6554a to which a fastening screw is fastened, and a screw-in portion 6554a thereof.
A positioning wall portion 6554b formed like a pair of walls on the left and right sides of 54a. The positioning wall portions 6554b are arranged to face each other at an interval slightly longer than the width of the U-shaped wall portion 6547a. Therefore, by inserting the U-shaped wall portion 6547a into the positioning wall portion 6554b, the division unit 6540 and the guided unit 6550 can be aligned.

The light receiving member 6558 is a portion guided along the upper surface of the lower edge of the main body resin member 6551 (along the direction inclined with respect to the front-rear direction), and has an L-shaped cross section perpendicular to the longitudinal direction. a guided portion 6558a, and a plurality of rear box-shaped portions 6558 which are formed in a box-like shape with a bulging front side of the guided portion 6558a and an open rear side and are formed so as to be able to be inserted into the through-holes 6557.
b and the center side end of the guided portion 6558a (the end on the side where the pair of light receiving members 6558 face each other)
and an upper edge extending portion 6558c extending in a plate shape toward the back side along the upper edge of the .

The light-receiving member 6558 is a third illumination portion 6576 of the electrical board 6570 (see FIG. 241(b)).
It is a member that receives light emitted from. The inner surface of the rear box-shaped portion 6558b is formed with the above-described decorative jagged shape. As a result, light can be refracted many times inside the rear box-shaped portion 6558b, so the number of LEDs corresponding to the through holes 6557 is small (
In FIG. 241(b), even in the case of 1 or 2), the entire rear box-shaped portion 6558b can be visually recognized as uniform light. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the number of LEDs is small (the feeling of a point light source can be diminished).

In addition, as described above, the light receiving member 6558 is attached in a posture that is inclined with respect to the front-rear direction (a posture that is inclined so that the traveling direction of light is aligned with the mounting direction of the plate guide unit 6550 (the light receiving surface is inclined toward the plate guide unit 6550). installed in an orientation that intersects the installation direction of the
Therefore, the light emitted in the front-rear direction from the LEDs arranged in the third illumination portion 6576 of the electrical board 6570 on the back side of the light-receiving member 6558 is refracted when passing through the light-receiving member 6558, and the light-receiving member 6558 It can be advanced in a direction that inclines obliquely downward toward the front side.

Note that this jagged shape is described as a process performed on the surface irradiated with light, and the shape is not limited at all. For example, shape processing in which dot shapes are densely formed, or wavy striped shape processing may be used.

The rear box-shaped portion 6558b is formed so that the one arranged on the left and right outer side has a shorter bulging length toward the front side than the one arranged on the left and right inner side. As a result, the rear box-shaped portion 6
The front face of 558b is the division unit 6540 and the guided unit 65 connected below it.
It can be formed along the curved shape of the front side edge of 50 .

The upper edge extending portion 6558c is a portion for facilitating assembly of the guided unit 6550 and the dividing member 6560. As shown in FIG. A main body resin member 6551 of the guided unit 6550 arranged to face the partitioning member 6560 is formed in a planar shape particularly at the central extended plate portion 6552, and since there is no partition, alignment with the partitioning member 6560 is required. hard to go In contrast, in this embodiment, the upper edge extension 6558c functions as a partition that partitions the area above the extension plate 6552, so that the partitioning member 6560 can be easily aligned.

Returning to FIG. 249, description will be made. In the description so far, the second lighting units 6575 arranged on the left and right
And the portion that receives the light emitted from the third illumination section 6576 has been described. The optical transmission unit 6520, which is the part that receives the light emitted from the first illumination section 6574, will be described below.

257(a) is a front view of the optical transmission unit 6520 and the outer frame member 6530, FIG. 257(b) is a rear view of the optical transmission unit 6520 and the outer frame member 6530, and FIG.
8(a) is an exploded front perspective view of the optical transmission unit 6520 and the outer frame member 6530, and FIG. 258(b) is an exploded rear perspective view of the optical transmission unit 6520 and the outer frame member 6530. FIG.

The outer frame member 6530 is a member formed of a colored (orange in this embodiment) light-impermeable resin material, and includes a main body portion 6531 formed in a substantially inverted triangular shape when viewed from the front, and a main body portion 653 thereof.
an opening 6532 drilled in the front-rear direction in a substantially gourd shape (substantially pot shape) in the central part of 1;
a protruding rib 6533 protruding along the lower edge of the main body portion 6531 and protruding on the back side in a rib shape;
It mainly includes a plurality of fastening portions 6534 which are disposed at positions corresponding to the insertion holes 6544 (see FIG. 254) of the partition unit 6540 and formed so that fastening screws inserted through the insertion holes 6544 can be screwed.

Since the main body portion 6531 of the outer frame member 6530 is opaque to light, the opening portion 6532 is the only portion of the outer frame member 6530 that transmits light. The shape of this opening 6532 is the first
It corresponds to the arrangement pattern of the lighting section 6574 . In other words, the edge of the opening 6532 is formed in a shape (enlarged shape) similar to the shape surrounding the LED of the first illumination portion 6574 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 241(a)).

The light emitted from the first illumination section 6574 passes through the transparent tubular member 6521. Since the shape of the transparent tubular member 6521 is formed differently depending on the difference in the front and rear positions, the light emitted from the first illumination section 6574 is formed in front of the opening 6532. It is possible to allow a player who views from the top view to view light of a pattern different from the arrangement pattern of the first lighting unit 6574 .

For example, the upper plate portion of the transparent tubular member 6521 is formed such that its width increases as it approaches the opening 6532 (both left and right edges are inclined in the wide direction). The light seen from the front of the opening 6532 in the vicinity of the position where it overlaps with the upper plate part in the front and rear is seen in a pattern that spreads horizontally compared to the arrangement pattern of the first lighting part 6574 .

As described above, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to narrow the arrangement range of the first lighting unit 6574 that emits light behind it while widening the range of light visually recognized by the player. Therefore, while suppressing the size of the first lighting unit 6574 (or the electrical board 6570), it is possible to perform an effect of visually recognizing light in a wide range. The details of the shape of the transparent tubular member 6521 will be described later.

The protruding rib 6533 is cut out at a position corresponding to the locking projection 6548b (see FIG. 255) of the transparent covering member 6548, and is disposed at a location where the formation of the locking projection 6548b is omitted. In this embodiment, the protruding rib 6533 and the locking projection 6548b are formed on the same curve when viewed from the front (they are formed on the same curve as the lower edge of the outer frame member 6530 so as to complement each other). is done).

259 is an exploded front perspective view of the optical transmission unit 6520, and FIG. 260 is an exploded rear perspective view of the optical transmission unit 6520. FIG. The optical transmission unit 6520 includes a transparent tubular member 6521 formed in a bottomed tubular shape extending in the front-rear direction from a colorless transparent light-transmitting resin, and a flat surface disposed in the middle of the transparent tubular member 6521. A flange portion 6522 extending outward along the outer periphery in a flange shape, and a cup-shaped member 6523 formed of a colorless and light-transmitting resin and covered with the transparent tubular member 6521. , a shielding member 6524 made of a colored (white in this embodiment) light-impermeable resin material and formed in a cylindrical shape so as to be able to pass through the portion opposite to the side where the cup-shaped member 6523 is covered, and the shielding member 6524. A contact plate portion 6525 formed as a flat plate surface portion capable of surface contact with the flange portion 6522 at the front side end portion, and an outer surface extending to the front side along the left and right edges and the lower edge of the contact plate portion 6525. A frame extension portion 6526 is mainly provided.

The bottomed cylindrical member 6521 is a member that extends in a cylindrical shape in the front-rear direction, and has a curved shape in which the left and right wall portions are constricted inward. a back contour portion 6521a formed from overlapping contours, a plurality of light-receiving projecting portions 6521b projecting from the back contour portion 6521a toward the back side at positions facing the LEDs, and the back contour portion 6
A blocking portion 6521c that blocks the area surrounded by 521a in a plate shape, a plurality of light passing holes 6521d that are drilled in the blocking portion 6521c at positions facing the LEDs, and at least the width of the upper wall and the width of the left and right walls. A main tubular portion 6521e whose interval becomes longer toward the front side, and a frame-shaped extension portion 6 that extends toward the front side of the flange portion 6522 along the shape of the main tubular portion 6521e.
521f and .

The light-receiving projecting portion 6521 b is a portion inserted into the central light hole 6562 of the partitioning member 6560 . That is, by shortening the distance between the partition member 6560 and the electrical board 6570 (Fig. 263
), the light from the LED of the first lighting section 6574 can be incident on the light receiving projecting section 6521 b without leaving a gap as large as the thickness of the opposing plate section 6561 of the partitioning member 6560 . This makes it easier to generate total reflection.

In this way, the light emitted from the LED of the first illumination unit 6574 is incident at a close distance, is totally reflected, and travels toward the front side, whereas the light emitted from the LED of the first illumination unit 6574 is reflected from the second illumination unit 6575 and the third illumination unit 657 described above.
The light emitted from the LED 6 travels in the air by the area inside the recess of the box-shaped light receiving portion 6546 and the rear box-shaped portion 6558b recessed in the direction away from the LED, and passes through the box-shaped light. Light is emitted from the light receiving portion 6546 and the front side wall portion of the rear box-shaped portion 6558b. Therefore, the first lighting unit 65
Compared to the light emitted from 74, the light emitted from the second irradiation unit 6575 and the third irradiation unit 6576 has a low light intensity and can be visually recognized by the player as uniform light.

The division unit 6540 in which the box-shaped light receiving portion 6546 is formed is made of a light-transmissive milky-white resin material, and the light-receiving member 6558 in which the rear box-shaped portion 6558b is formed is made of a colorless and transparent light-transmitting resin material. Since it is formed, the appearance of the light emitted from the second irradiation section 6575 and the third irradiation section 6576 can be changed step by step.

The frame-shaped extension 6521f has a shape similar to that of the back contour 6521a.
It is enlarged compared to the outline of 1a.

Therefore, compared to the size of the area where the LEDs are arranged in the first lighting unit 6574,
It can be visually recognized by the player as light that illuminates a large area.

The shape of the extension tip of the frame-shaped extension portion 6521f is such that each point is arranged at approximately the same distance as the bottom back surface (back surface) of the cup-shaped member 6523 . That is, depending on the shape of the cup-shaped member 6523, the shape of the extension tip of the frame-shaped extension portion 6521f is designed.
As a result, the frame-shaped extended portion 6521f can be illuminated in a uniform light emission mode.

The flange portion 6522 has a pair of right and left insertion holes 6522a having a size that allows insertion of the circular screw portion of the fastening portion 6543 (see FIG. 251(a)) of the partition unit 6540 .

The cup-shaped member 6523 has a flat rear surface and is formed into a cylindrical shape with a bottom that can support the fastening portion 6543 at a position that overlaps the insertion hole 6522a in the front-rear direction. A pair of end fastening portions 6523a to which the portion 6543 is fastened and fixed, a decorative shape portion 6523b in which a light diffusion shape (decorative shape consisting of a triangular cross-sectional ridge) is formed on the back bottom of the cup shape, and its decorative shape portion and a flat surface portion 6523c formed in a flat surface shape in a region surrounding the periphery of 6523b.

The decorative shape portion 6523b diffusely reflects the light irradiated to the cup-shaped member 6523 from the back side. As a result, a player who views the cup-shaped member 6523 from the front side can visually recognize the cup-shaped member 6523 as if it is emitting surface light, so that the visibility of the cup-shaped member 6523 in the front view can be improved.

Since the flat surface portion 6523c is formed in a region opposed to the frame-shaped extension portion 6521f (see FIG. 263), the light passing through the thick interior of the frame-shaped extension portion 6521f is not reflected diffusely and is reflected from the front surface. You can pass it sideways. This allows the player to visually recognize the light traveling through the frame-shaped extension 6521f as a clear light.

The shielding member 6524 has a rear side end formed in the same shape as the central cylindrical portion 6566 of the partitioning member 6560, and is recessed with a size capable of guiding the fastening portion 6543 (see FIG. 251(a)) of the partitioning unit 6540. A pair of left and right guide recesses 6524a are provided.

The contact plate portion 6525 is connected to the fastening portion 6543 of the partition unit 6540 (see FIG. 251(a)).
A pair of right and left through-holes 6525a are provided so as to be sized such that the circular threaded portion of .

The outer frame extension portion 6526 is formed with an inner shape that is slightly larger than the flange portion 6522 so as to accommodate the flange portion 6522, and the extension length is determined by the thickness of the flange portion 6522 and the thickness of the flange portion 6522.
The length is equal to or greater than the sum of the thickness of the edge of the plate-like portion on the back side of the cup-like member 6523 .

That is, in the assembled state of the optical transmission unit 6520, the plate-like portions of the flange portion 6522 and the cup-like member 6523 are accommodated inside the outer frame extension portion 6526 (see FIG. 258(a)).
Therefore, the assembled state of the optical transmission unit 6520 can be stably maintained. Furthermore, the circular screw-in portion of the fastening portion 6543 (see FIG. 251(a)) of the partition unit 6540
525a, the insertion hole 6522a, and the terminal fastening portion 6523a are inserted in this order and fastened and fixed, so that the assembled state of the optical transmission unit 6520 can be maintained more firmly.

According to the optical transmission unit 6520, the light incident from the rear side end surface of the light receiving projecting portion 6521b is totally reflected within the thickness of the main body cylindrical portion 6521e to travel forward, and the front side end portion of the frame-shaped extending portion 6521f is reflected. , and illuminate the cup-shaped member 6523 . cup-shaped member 6
523 is set at a short distance from the frame-shaped extension 6521f, so that the cup-shaped member 6523
A player who views the light from the front side of the cup-shaped member 6523 can view the light in a line-like (outline shape along the corner of the cup-shaped member 6523) light-emitting mode. As a result, the difference between the light emission mode of the cup-shaped member 6523 and the uniform light emission mode seen in the above-described transparent covering member 6548 can be emphasized, so that a well-modulated light emission effect can be executed. This will be explained in detail below.

261 shows six views of the transparent tubular member 6521, and FIG. 262 shows six views of the optical transmission unit 6520 in the assembled state. Since the optical transmission unit 6520 is configured symmetrically, the left side view is omitted.

261(a) is a front view of the transparent tubular member 6521, FIG. 261(b) is a top view of the transparent tubular member 6521, and FIG. 261(c) is a bottom view of the transparent tubular member 6521. 261(d) is a right side view of the transparent tubular member 6521 as viewed in the direction of arrow L, and FIG. 261(e) is a rear view of the transparent tubular member 6521. FIG.

262(a) is a front view of the optical transmission unit 6520, FIG. 262(b) is a top view of the optical transmission unit 6520, and FIG. 262(c) is a bottom view of the optical transmission unit 6520. 262(d) is a right side view of the optical transmission unit 6520 as viewed in the direction of arrow L, and FIG. 262(e) is a rear view of the optical transmission unit 6520. FIG. Note that FIG.
), the illustration of the pattern of the decorative shape portion 6523b is omitted for easy understanding.

As shown in FIGS. 261(b) and 261(d), the transparent cylindrical member 6521 has a shape in which the left and right sides and the lower bottom face are inclined so that the left and right width and the top and bottom width gradually increase toward the front side. It is said that On the other hand, since the drawing direction of the resin mold is set in the front-rear direction, the portion that interferes with the resin mold in the drawing direction cannot be formed as an inclined surface.

For example, even if the outer surface of the main body cylindrical portion 6521e is formed as an inclined surface, it does not interfere when the resin mold on the back side is moved in the drawing direction (backward).
If the inner surface of a is similarly inclined, it interferes when the resin mold on the back side is moved. See Figure 263).

Similarly, even if the inner surface of the main body cylindrical portion 6521e is formed as an inclined surface, it does not interfere when the resin mold on the front side is moved in the drawing direction (forward), but the frame-like shape formed on the front side portion does not interfere. If the outer surface of the extending portion 6521f is similarly inclined, it interferes when the resin mold is moved. (See FIG. 263).

Here, in the present embodiment, the boundary between the resin mold on the front side that is drawn forward and the resin mold on the back side that is drawn backward is constituted by the closing portion 6521c and the flange portion 6522. A surface is formed, and on the other hand, the above-described non-inclined surface is formed. It is formed on the side that becomes shorter and shorter.

As a result, while the transparent cylindrical member 6521 has the gradually increasing shape as described above, it is possible to suppress the change in the plate thickness due to the change in the front-rear position. It is possible to suppress the change in the forward/backward position of the traveling mode. Therefore, when light is made incident on the inside of the thickness and total reflection occurs at the boundary where the light first reaches, then the transparent cylindrical member 6
Total reflection can be easily repeated until reaching the front end of 521, and leakage of light can be suppressed.

The guide recessed portion 6524a is formed so that its vertical width becomes smaller (tapered) toward the front side. As a result, compared to the case where the upper and lower widths are equal in the front-rear direction, when the optical transmission unit 6520 and the partitioning unit 6540 are assembled (see FIGS. 249 and 250), the fastening portion of the guiding recessed portion 6524a is larger than that of the fastening portion. Since 6543 (see FIG. 255) can be easily inserted, the degree of difficulty in assembly can be reduced.

FIG. 263 shows the rear unit 65 on line CCLXIII-CCLXIII in FIG.
60 to 6580, an acoustic device 6610 and an optical transmission unit 6520. FIG. In FIG. 263, for convenience of explanation, the state in which the optical transmission unit 6520 and the acoustic device 6610 are arranged in the assembly position with respect to the rear units 6560 to 6580 is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 263, the light-receiving projecting portion 6521b of the transparent tubular member 6521
560 is formed with a dimension that creates a slight gap when it is inserted through the direct insertion hole 6562 b , and the tip thereof is inserted up to the surface position of the opposing plate portion 6561 . As a result, the opposing plate portion 6561
The distance between the first illumination portion 6574 and the light receiving projecting portion 6521b can be set without being affected by the plate thickness.

The light-receiving projecting portion 6521b is formed in a plate shape whose longitudinal direction is the direction along the shape of the rear outer shape portion 6521a (see FIG. 260). The dimension in the lateral direction that intersects the longitudinal direction is set to be substantially equal to the width dimension of the LEDs of the first illumination section 6574 that are arranged to face each other.

As a result, in the lateral direction of the light-receiving protruding portion 6521b, only light (light having a very small angle with respect to the optical axis) traveling substantially straight toward the front side from the first illumination portion 6574 is allowed to enter, and other light is prevented from entering. can be prevented.

The light incident in this manner easily travels toward the front side through the thick inside of the transparent tubular member 6521,
Even when the light is reflected at the boundary, the angle between the transparent tubular member 6521 and the direction of the light is small, so total reflection is likely to occur. can be suppressed.

The longitudinal dimension of the light-receiving projecting portion 6521b is set to be approximately twice the lateral dimension. Therefore, with respect to the spread direction of the surface of the transparent tubular member 6521, the light emitted from the first illumination unit 6574 and having a large angle from the optical axis is compared to the case where the thickness direction of the surface is explained. can also be incident on the light-receiving projecting portion 6521b.

On the other hand, the rear outer shape portion 6521a coupled with the light receiving projecting portion 6521b in the longitudinal direction does not contact the opposing plate portion 6561 and is arranged with a slight gap. As a result, the first lighting unit 657
4, the light incident from the end face of the rear outer shape portion 6521a (the light with a large angle between the optical axis and the direction of travel of the light) is reflected to avoid being visually recognized by the player. be able to.

That is, it is possible to allow the player to visually recognize only the light that passes through the light-receiving protruding portion 6521b and travels through the thickness of the main body cylindrical portion 6521e, and cuts out other light (weak light). In other words, by setting the longitudinal direction of the light-receiving projecting portion 6521b, it is possible to set the limit value of the angle based on the optical axis of the light incident on the main body cylindrical portion 6521e.

The light emitted from the LED of the first lighting unit 6574 that is not arranged to face the light receiving projecting portion 6521b passes through the enlarged hole 6562a and passes through the light passing hole 6521d of the transparent cylindrical member 6521.
(See FIG. 260) and irradiates the cup-shaped member 6523 (See FIG. 260). Since this light does not pass through the thickness of the member but travels through the air, it can be visually recognized by the player as uniform light.

The raised tip of the enlarged hole 6562a and the closed portion 6521c are in front and rear contact. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the leakage of light from the gap between the raised tip and the closing portion 6521c.

Next, with reference to FIG. 264, how light passing through the thickness of the transparent tubular member 6521 of the optical transmission unit 6520 will be described. FIG. 264(a) is a schematic front view showing the layout of the first lighting unit 6574, and FIG. 264(b) schematically shows the layout of light visually recognized through the optical transmission unit 6520. It is a schematic front view. 261 and 263 will be referred to as needed in the description of FIG.

First, as described above, the shape of the transparent tubular member 6521 is formed such that the width gradually increases toward the front side, so that the light passing through the thickness of the transparent tubular member 6521 (with total reflection) The light (light emitted from the eight edge light emitting portions 6574a on the left and right outer sides) is visually recognized as an enlarged shape (substantially gourd shape) formed by the arrangement of the edge light emitting portions 6574a.

In addition, as described above, the light in the thickness direction of the transparent tubular member 6521 travels to the front side end without being weakened, so even when the optical transmission unit 6520 is viewed from the front, the edge light emitting section 6
A position corresponding to the arrangement of 574a emits strong light (lights like a point light source).

Here, the distance between the light sources is longer than the actual distance L17a between the edge light emitting portions 6574a. However, the effect of lighting tends to be insufficient. This problem is caused by the fact that the distance L17b between the strong light emitting arrangements of the visually recognized light is longer than the actual distance L17a between the arrangement of the edge light emitting parts 6574a. It is difficult to solve the problem even if the distance between the LEDs is narrowed.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, as described above, the light from the edge light emitting portion 6574a travels radially in the direction along the side surface of the transparent cylindrical member 6521 (longitudinal direction of the light receiving projecting portion 6521b). , the light emitted from adjacent LEDs overlaps, and the intensity of the light viewed at the position between the light sources is reinforced.

As a result, line-shaped light can be visually recognized in a front view of the light transmission unit 6520 even in a portion (between the LEDs) where the LEDs of the first illumination unit 6574 are not arranged (see FIG. 2).
See phantom line in 64(b)). Therefore, it is possible to improve the state in which the light is visually recognized as a point.

In particular, the two left and right LEDs arranged at the lower end of the first illumination portion 6574 are
It is arranged at the boundary position between the side surface 6521e1 of 1e and the bottom surface 6521e2 (FIG. 262).
(e)). Therefore, the light traveling above the optical axis overlaps with the light from the LEDs above it, and the light traveling below the optical axis passes through the bottom surface 6521e2 to form the frame-shaped extension portion 65.
21f overlaps at the lower left and right centers.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 264(a), an L is formed at the center of the lower end of the first lighting unit 6574.
Although the ED is not arranged, as shown in FIG. 264(b), the optical transmission unit 6
Through 520, a line of light can be visually recognized in the center of the lower left and right.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, while reducing the arrangement space of the first lighting unit 6574, the shape formed by the light visually recognized through the light transmission unit 6520 is increased.
It is possible to weaken the degree to which the light is visually recognized as a point, and to make a clear line-shaped light visually recognized.

When the optical transmission unit 6520 is viewed from the front, the interior of the cup-shaped member 6523 is made difficult to see due to the decorative shape applied to the bottom of the cup-shaped member 6523. It is difficult to grasp the position where Therefore, even if the position where the light intersects is uncertain, it is possible to prevent the effect of the lighting effect from deteriorating.

In addition, if the position where the light overlaps is near the tip of the frame-shaped extended portion 6521f, it can be visually recognized as if a new point light source was arranged between the LEDs of the edge light emitting portion 6574a. That is, since it is possible to give the illusion that more LED light sources are arranged than the actual number of LEDs, even a small number of LEDs emit light to the same extent as when a large number of LEDs are used. The production effect of the production can be improved.

The surface light emitting portion 6574b (the first lighting portion 6
Light emitted from the four LEDs on the left and right central sides of 574 passes inside the transparent cylindrical member 6521 . Here, the light emitted from the surface light emitting portion 6574b does not travel through the thickness of the transparent cylindrical member 6521, and in addition, the shape of the enlarged hole 6562a (FIG. 2
45(b)).

Therefore, the light emitted from the surface light-emitting portion 6574b is emitted from the surface light-emitting portion 6574b when viewed from the front.
It is visually recognized as planar light spreading as an area A17 centering on the LED of b. In addition, the light is emitted from the decorative shape portion 6523b (FIG. 2) having a jagged shape on the back side of the cup-shaped member 6523
60), the light diffusely reflects and is visually recognized as planar light when viewed from the front.

That is, the area where the light radially emitted from the surface emitting portion 6574b reaches (FIG. 264(b)
See the imaginary line), and the decorative shape portion 6 on the outside and on the back side of the cup-shaped member 6523
523b (for example, the area A17 in the front view and the frame-shaped extension 6521f
area between ) can be illuminated brightly.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the light emitted from the first illumination unit 6574 can be visually recognized as edge-like light and planar light, which have different impressions. In addition, by irradiating the boundary between the edge-like light and the surface-like light with diffusely reflected light,
Darkening of the boundary can be avoided. Therefore, the visually recognized impression of light can be changed step by step and continuously.

Here, various modes are exemplified as changes in the visual impression of light. For example, it may be a change in the impression of the lighting situation such as brightness or blinking, or a change in the color of the light.

Note that this jagged shape is described as a process performed on the surface irradiated with light, and the shape is not limited at all. For example, shape processing in which dot shapes are densely formed, or wavy striped shape processing may be used.

The division units 6540 that are visually recognized on the left and right sides of the cup-shaped member 6523 in a front view have a curved shape that bulges to the front side in a front view and a side view, as described above. for that reason,
The light visually recognized on the left and right sides of the cup-shaped member 6523 travels in a direction away from the cup-shaped member 6523 to the left, right, and up and down (a direction of diffusion based on the point on the back side).

Furthermore, the light-receiving members 6558 arranged on the lower left and right sides of the partition unit 6540 have front side edges located on the back side toward the outer left and right sides as described above. , in a direction away from the cup-shaped member 6523 in the left-right direction and in the up-down direction (the direction of diffusion based on the point on the back side).

As a result, the player can be given an impression that the light becomes larger as the player approaches the player, compared to the case where the light is directed only in the forward and backward direction, and the light production effect is improved. can be improved.

Next, the horizontal effect device 6700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 265 to 281. FIG. FIG. 265 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 10014, and FIG.
is an exploded front perspective view of the.

265, the upper effect device 6500, the operation device 10300, and the lower plate unit 6400 are omitted, and the direction view from the front right is illustrated in a state in which the horizontal effect device 6700 is disassembled from the metal body portion 10014a. , in FIG. 266, horizontal effect device 6700
is shown obliquely from the front left.

As shown in FIGS. 265 and 266, the horizontal effect device 6700 has a metal body portion 10014a.
It is a production device arranged on the front side of the left and right vertically long parts of the , and is formed of a shape obtained by dividing a vertically long elliptical shape in half when viewed from the side.

The horizontal effect device 6700 is a pair of left and right devices with similar shapes, but the internal configuration is the same. Description is omitted.

A horizontal effect device 6700 can be seen so that the front and back stacking relationship can be seen in the upper end part of FIG.
is configured in such a manner that covering units 6730 to 6760 for covering the front side of the base member 6710 are arranged on the front side of the base member 6710 fitted to the metal body portion 10014a.

Fastening between the base member 6710 and the metal body portion 10014a will be described. When the base member 6710 is assembled to the metal main body portion 10014a, positioning protrusions (not shown) projecting from the back surface of the base member 6710 are inserted into the positioning recesses 10014e formed in the metal main body portion 10014a. Then, the fastening screw inserted through the through-hole of the metal body portion 10014a is fastened and fixed to the fastening hole (not shown) formed on the back side of the base member 6710 .

Of the constituent members of the horizontal effect device 6700, only the base member 6710 is fastened and fixed to the metal body portion 10014a. In other words, among the components of the horizontal effect device 6700,
Except for the base member 6710, no components are fastened to the metal body portion 10014a.

As shown in FIG. 266, on the side facing the game area, the main body curved portion 6751 of the curved plate member 6750 completely covers the side surface of the base member 6710 (the position where the back side edge of the base member 6710 and the surface position) formed up to The rear end of the curved plate member 6750 is shown in FIG.
5, it is arranged to face the glass unit 16 in close proximity in the front and rear, as shown by the left unit.

Due to this arrangement, it is possible to easily perform an effect in which the light emitted from the vicinity of the rear end portion of the curved plate member 6750 and the light emitted from the rear side of the glass unit 16 are integrally visible. can do.

267 is an exploded front perspective view of the horizontal effect device 6700, and FIG.
700 is an exploded rear perspective view of 700. FIG. 267 and 268, covering units 6730-6
760 is shown disassembled from the base member 6710 to the front side.

As shown in FIG. 267, the front side of the base member 6710 is provided with an illumination board 6720 on which a plurality of LED chips D1 capable of emitting light are mounted.
Covering units 6730 to 6760 are assembled to the base member 6710 so as to cover the base member 6710 from the front side.

That is, the horizontal effect device 6700 is a device that functions as one of the lamp display devices 227 (see FIG. 4), and supports an illumination board 6720 whose light emission is controlled by the sound lamp control device 113 and the illumination board 6720. a light-emitting side unit composed of a base member 6710 that
A covering unit 673 that receives the light emitted from the light-emitting side unit and makes the player visually recognize it.
and a light-receiving side unit composed of 0 to 6760. First, the light emitting unit will be described.

FIG. 269(a) is a front view of the base member 6710 and the electrical board 6720, and FIG.
9(b) is a left side view of the base member 6710, and FIG. 269(c) is a base member 67.
269(d) is a top view of the base member 6710, FIG.
9(e) is a bottom view of the base member 6710, and FIG. 269(f) is a sectional view of the base member 6710 and the electrical board 6720 along line CCLXIXf-CCLXIXf in FIG. 269(a).

As shown in Figures 269(a) to 269(f), the base member 6710
720 and arranged on the back side of the electrical board 6720, a flat support plate portion 6711
, a frame-shaped projecting portion 6712 projecting toward the front side of the support plate portion 6711 in a frame shape along the outer shape of the electrical board 6720, and a positioning unit projecting further toward the front side than the frame-shaped projecting portion 6712. Projecting portion 67
13, a plurality of insertion holes 6714 through which fastening screws can be inserted at positions outside the electrical board 6720 and close to the electrical board 6720 in a front view, and insertion holes 6736 at two upper and lower positions. A pair of fastening portions 6715 to which fastening screws to be inserted are fastened, and the support plate portion 6
711 (the stepped portion of the outer frame plate portion 6717) and on the right side of the frame-shaped projecting portion 6712 (opposite side of the window surrounding the game area, opposite side of the glass unit 16). A plurality of positioning holes 6716 drilled as holes, an outer frame plate portion 6717 extending from the right edge of the support plate portion 6711 toward the back side in a stepped plate shape, and a left edge of the support plate portion 6711 and an inner frame plate portion 6718 extending in a plate shape toward the back side.

The frame-shaped protruding portion 6712 is arranged such that the protruding tip thereof faces the rear surface portion of the electrical decoration substrate 6720 near the outer shape portion, and makes surface contact with the electrical decoration substrate 6720 . As a result, a space is provided between the support plate portion 6711 and the rear surface side of the electrical decoration substrate 6720 except for the vicinity of the outer shape portion (see FIG. 269(f)). Therefore, an air layer (heat insulating layer) can be provided between the support plate portion 6711 and the electrical board 6720 .

As a result, even if the base member 6710 is fastened and fixed to the metal main body 10014a and the heat transferred to the metal main body 10014a can be transferred to the base member 6710, the amount of heat transferred to the decorative board 6720 is can be suppressed (reduced to a low level), it is possible to suppress the occurrence of problems such as malfunction due to the electric board 6720 becoming hot.

The positioning projecting portion 6713 is located at two positioning holes 672 formed in the electrical board 6720 .
2 to align the electrical board 6720 with the base member 6710 . That is, the electrical decoration board 6720 includes the base member 6710 and the electrical decoration board 67
20 (see FIG. 269(a)), the positioning projecting portion 6
A positioning hole 6722 is drilled at a position corresponding to 713 .

The insertion hole 6714 is the fastening portion 67 of the flat plate member 6740 of the covering units 6730 to 6760.
44 and the fastening portion 6753 of the curved plate member 6750 have a cup-shaped portion that can be fitted from the front (
Fig. 268) is a through hole formed so that they can be aligned and through which a fastening screw to be fastened and fixed is inserted.

The fastening portion 6715 is fitted and aligned with the insertion hole 6736 of the light receiving member 6730 (see FIG. 271), and is formed so that a fastening screw inserted through the insertion hole 6736 can be screwed therein. The light receiving member 6730 is fixed to the base member by being fastened and fixed to the fastening portions 6715 at two upper and lower locations.

Alignment holes 6716 are formed by projections 6743, 676 of covering units 6730-6760.
6 (see FIG. 268) is a hole through which it is inserted. The covering units 6730 to 6760 are composed of a pair of thin plate-like members (a flat plate member 6740 and a curved plate member 6750) arranged opposite to each other on the left and right sides, and formed in a substantially cup shape that opens to the rear side (see FIG. 268). ), and is fixed to the base member 6710 at the rear side (edge-like portion).

Here, the joints between the base member 6710 and the covering units 6730 to 6760 are located at portions (outer shape portions) that can be touched by the player, and the load given by the player (for example, the It can be displaced by the load generated by As mentioned above, the base member 6
710 at the thin-walled rear side end portion, when a load directed in the thickness direction (for example, left-right direction) of the flat plate member 6740 or the curved plate member 6750 is applied, the plate member 6740 or the curved plate member 6750 is deformed,
There is a possibility that positional displacement with respect to the base member 6710 may occur. To prevent this,
Although the fixing points (fastening points) between the flat plate member 6740 and the curved plate member 6750 and the base member 6710 may be increased, there is a possibility that the number of man-hours for the assembly operation increases.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, while suppressing an increase in the number of fixing points, by inserting the projecting portions 6743 and 6766 into the plurality of positioning holes 6716, the flat plate member 6740 and the curved plate member 6750 are fixed to the base member. It is possible to suppress positional deviation (horizontal direction positional deviation) with respect to 6710 .

In addition, the inner side surface (left side surface) of the main body plate portion 6741 of the flat plate member 6740 is the frame-like projecting portion 671.
2, the flat plate member 6740 is placed in contact with the frame-shaped protruding portion 6712 even if the flat plate member 6740 is leftwardly loaded by the player. Since they are in contact with each other, the movement of the flat plate member 6740 is restricted. Therefore, covering units 6730-676
0 can be prevented from being deformed or displaced with respect to the base member 6710 .

Therefore, it is possible to improve the durability of the horizontal effect device 6700 while suppressing an increase in the man-hours of the assembly work. Note that the body plate portion 6741 is provided with an unevenness forming portion 6741a in which fine unevenness is formed in a contact range with the frame-shaped projecting portion 6712, thereby distributing the load, which will be described later in detail. .

The outer frame plate portion 6717 is arranged to face the right side surface of the metal body portion 10014a, is in surface contact with the right side surface of the metal body portion 10014a, and covers the right side of the metal body portion 10014a. As a result, the metal body portion 10014a
can be prevented from being viewed by the player.

The outer frame plate portion 6717 includes support recesses 6717a that are recessed along the front-rear direction from part of the positioning holes 6716 . The support recess 6717 a is recessed along the left side of the alignment hole 6716 on the front side of the alignment hole 6716 , and is recessed along the right side of the alignment hole 6716 on the rear side of the alignment hole 6716 .

The supporting recessed portion 6717a is formed to have dimensions such that it fits with the protruding portion 6743 or is opposed to the projecting portion 6743 with a slight gap in the assembled state of the horizontal effect device 6700 (see FIG. 265). Therefore, compared to the case where the projecting portion 6743 is supported only by the alignment hole 6716, the area capable of supporting the projecting portion 6743 can be increased (supported by the surface of the support recess 6717a). The displacement of the 6740 with respect to the base member 6710 can be suppressed. In other words, the flat plate member 6740 can be stably supported on the base member 6710 .

The inner frame plate portion 6718 is a portion arranged to face the main body curved portion 6751 of the curved plate member 6750, and is formed in a planar shape facing the game area side (inside).

The electrical board 6720 is a so-called printed circuit board, and includes a main body plate portion 6721 formed in a plate shape.
, positioning holes 6722 drilled in two places of the main body plate portion 6721, and main body plate portion 672
and LED chips D1 in which a plurality of LED chips D1 are mounted in an arbitrary pattern.

The body plate portion 6721 is held by the base member 6710 without being fastened and fixed. That is, the positioning projecting portion 6713 (see FIG. 269(c)) is inserted into the positioning hole 6722 to restrict the movement in the left, right, up and down directions, and the movement in the front and rear direction is restricted by the base member 6710 and the light receiving member 6730 (FIG. 280). See) are restricted from moving.

A similar chip is mounted on the LED chip D1 in this embodiment, but in relation to the area illustrated by the imaginary line in FIG. , can be divided into two types.

That is, the LED chip D1 has an edge light emitting portion D1a arranged inside the frame of the imaginary line shown in FIG. 269(a) and a surface light emitting portion D1b arranged outside the frame of the imaginary line. Prepare the Lord. The difference between these light-emitting portions D1a and D1b is that the light emitted from the light-emitting portion D1a is easily visible as linear (edge-like) light, while the light emitted from the light-emitting portion D1b is easily visible as planar light. This corresponds to the difference in the light emission mode visually recognized by the player, which will be described later in detail.

Next, covering units 6730 to 6760 (see FIG. 267) arranged on the front side of the electrical board 6720 will be described. FIG. 270 is an exploded front perspective view of covering units 6730-6760, and FIG. 271 is an exploded rear perspective view of covering units 6730-6760.

270 and 271 from the state shown in FIGS. 267 and 268, the covering units 6730 to 6760 are made of a light-transmitting resin inside, and the light passing through the inside of the covering units 6730 to 6760 is can be refracted and the light receiving member 6730 that covers the illumination substrate 6720 from the front side
and is configured to cover the front thereof with another component.

272(a) is a front perspective view of the light receiving member 6730, FIG. 272(b) is a front view of the light receiving member 6730, and FIG. 272(c) is a front perspective view of the light receiving member 6730,
FIG. 273(a) shows the light receiving member 6730 in range CCLXXIIIa of FIG. 272(a).
273(b) is a partially enlarged view of the light receiving member 6730 in the range CCLXXIIIb of FIG. 272(b).

274(a) is a rear perspective view of the light receiving member 6730, and FIG. 274(b) is a
274(c) is a rear perspective view of the light receiving member 6730. FIG.

Note that FIG. 272(a) is a front perspective view of the light receiving member 6730 as seen from the left side, and FIG.
2(c) is a front perspective view of the light receiving member 6730 viewed from the right side, FIG. 274(a) is a rear perspective view of the light receiving member 6730 viewed from the right side, and FIG. 274(c) is a light receiving member. 6730
is a rear perspective view of the from the left side. Also, in FIG. 272(b), covering units 6730 to 6760 are collectively illustrated for easy understanding.

The light-receiving member 6730 is a member made of a light-transmissive resin material, and
20, the light receiving surface portion 6731 is formed in a flat plate shape and arranged opposite to the electrical board 6720, and the inner edge (left edge in FIG. 272) of the light receiving surface portion 6731 in the assembled state (FIG. 207) is bent. and an outer extension portion 6732 extending to the back side so as to be bent from the outer edge (the right edge in FIG. 274) of the light receiving surface portion 6731 in the assembled state. a set portion 6733, a plurality of long ribs 6734 (five in this embodiment) protruding from the back surface of the light receiving surface portion 6731, and base ends of the long ribs 6734 (the light receiving surface portion 6731 and a plurality of (five in this embodiment) fins 6735 extending in a long fin shape from the front of the position where the front and back of the light receiving surface portion 6731 are matched with the light receiving surface portion 6731, and the fastening portions arranged at the upper and lower ends. 6715 (see FIG. 269(a)) through which fastening screws are inserted, and a shape that can be fitted with the decorative projecting portion 6751a (see FIG. 276) of the curved plate member 6750. and a fitting portion 6737 that

The light-receiving surface portion 6731 is a portion that refracts the light emitted from the LED chip D1, and has a decorative pattern with complicated cuts on the back side. The decorative pattern has elongated projections arranged along a plurality of concentric circles with different diameters, centering on a portion opposed to the surface light emitting portion D1b (see the enlarged view in FIG. 274(b)). ). Here, the outer peripheral surface of the projection with a small diameter at the position facing the surface light emitting portion D1b is inclined outward (a mode in which light irradiated from behind is refracted outward along the surface of the light receiving surface portion 6731). is inclined at , and Fig. 2
75(b)), the outer peripheral surface of the large-diameter projection is similarly inclined (inclined in such a manner that the light traveling along the surface of the light-receiving surface portion 6731 is refracted toward the front side of the light-receiving surface portion 6731. Figure 27
5(b)).

Therefore, the light emitted from the surface emitting portion D1b is refracted near the shaft of the elongated protrusion, travels toward the outer diameter side of the elongated protrusion, and then is further separated from the axis of the elongated protrusion with a large diameter. A wide range of the light receiving surface portion 6731 can be caused to emit light by refracting at a point and proceeding to the front side.

Furthermore, on the front side of the light receiving surface portion 6731, a basic shape that is triangular in front view and has a substantially central portion that bulges toward the front side is formed in a manner that is regularly and densely aligned. A decorative recessed portion 6731a recessed in a substantially hexagonal pyramid shape is provided at the front side position of D1b.

The decorative recessed portion 6731a can change the strength of surface light emission in the light receiving surface portion 6731 (the strength can be changed stepwise). That is, the shape of the decorative recessed portion 6731a converges light on the center side of the recessed portion, so that the decorative recessed portion 6731a can be visually recognized in a strong luminescence mode compared to other portions.

The inner extension portion 6732 and the outer extension portion 6733 are configured such that the extension ends are in contact with the electrical decoration substrate 6720 in the front and rear, and the extension end portions of the inner extension portion 6732 extend over the entire top and bottom. While abutting on the electrical board 6720 , the extended end of the outer extending portion 6733 is partially not abutted.

In other words, the outer extending portion 6733 has a separation end portion 6733a that is separated from the electrical board 6720 without coming into contact with the electrical board 6720 by forming the extended length as short as the plate thickness of the electrical board 6720 . In this embodiment, the spaced end 6733a allows air to flow well into and out of the area between the electrical board 6720 and the light-receiving member 6730, thereby preventing heat buildup.

In addition, when the inner extending portion 6732 is in contact with the electrical board 6720 over the entire top and bottom, the LED chip D1 arranged to protrude from the surface of the main body plate portion 6721 of the electrical board 6720 is placed inside. It cannot be placed behind the extension 6732 . Therefore, the area where the LED chip D1 is arranged is restricted as the plate thickness of the inner extension portion 6732 is increased.

On the other hand, a gap is formed between the spaced end portion 6733a of the outer extending portion 6733 and the electrical board 6720.
733a. Therefore, it is possible to secure a maximum layout area for the LED chips D1 while securing a sufficient plate pressure of the outer extending portion 6733 .

The left and right wall portions of the outer extension portion 6733 are formed as smooth surfaces, while the wall portion on the left side of the inner extension portion 6732 (opposite side to the outer extension portion 6733) is densely formed with ridges having a semicircular cross section. A concavo-convex shape is formed that is aligned with the . As a result, the light emitted leftward through the inner extension portion 6732 is surface-emitting (spreads radially), making it easier for the player to visually recognize uniform light.

As will be described later, part of the light emitted from the electrical board 6720 to the front side passes through the inner extending portion 6732, and the intensity of the light varies from region to region. That is, fin 6735
, the light D1m is a combination of the light emitted from the edge light emitting portion D1a and traveling through the long rib 6734 and the light emitted from the surface light emitting portion D1b. , the light traveling through the long rib 6734 does not reach the light D1p emitted from the surface emitting portion D1b, and the light D1m is more visible than the light D1m.
It is visually recognized as light stronger than 1p (the magnitude of light intensity corresponds to the length of the arrow).

Accordingly, the magnitude of the intensity of the light visually recognized through the inner extension portion 6732 can be changed and visually recognized for each vertically arranged region. It should be noted that the difference in the form of light visually recognized through the inner extension portion 6732 is not limited to the intensity.

For example, by making the color of the light emitted from the edge light emitting portion D1a and the color of the light emitted from the surface light emitting portion D1b different, the color of the light visually recognized through the inner extension portion 6732 can be changed vertically. It can be visually recognized by changing for each area lined up.

The elongated rib 6734 is arranged on the front side of the edge light emitting portion D1a (see FIG. 269(a)) in the assembled state of the horizontal effect device 6700 (see FIG. 265), and is formed with the same thickness without being tapered in the front and rear. It mainly includes a plurality of linear ribs 6734a that are substantially straight when viewed from the rear, and V-shaped ribs 6734b that are bent to have a substantially V shape when viewed from the rear.

A side surface of the long rib 6734 is formed as a smooth surface. That is, unlike the case where the surface of the long rib 6734 is notched on the line, when the light reaches and passes through the side surface of the long rib 6734, it does not spread (does not emit surface light) and is unidirectional. proceed to Therefore, the long rib 6
Since it is possible to prevent the side surface of 734 from emitting light uniformly, when the horizontal effect device 6700 is viewed from the left and right directions, the light emitted from the edge light emitting portion D1a and the light emitted from the surface light emitting portion D1b It is possible to reduce the degree to which it is mixed with light and visually recognized.

That is, the elongated rib 6734 is formed to be elongated in the vertical direction and configured as a portion that can be seen in the horizontal direction, while suppressing the light that has passed through the elongated rib 6734 from reaching the player's eyes in the form of surface emission. Therefore, a player who views the horizontal effect device 6700 from the left and right can easily recognize the color and brightness of the light emitted from the surface light emitting portion D1b.

Note that this jagged shape is described as a process performed on the surface irradiated with light, and the shape is not limited at all. For example, shape processing in which dot shapes are densely formed, or wavy striped shape processing may be used.

The linear ribs 6734a are arranged two by two on the upper and lower sides, and are formed in such a manner as to extend in a direction that inclines toward the upper and lower central positions as it goes leftward (the central side of the front frame 10014, see FIG. 265). 6734a1 is connected to inner extension 6732, while right end 6734a2
are spaced apart from the outer extension 6733 .

Therefore, the light traveling inside the linear rib 6734a can pass through the left end 6734a1 and enter the inner extension 6732 directly, while the light passing through the right end 6734a2 can pass through the outer extension 6733. The energy of the light drops in the gap between

As a result, the perceived brightness differs near the left and right ends of the linear rib 6734a. That is, a portion viewed through the inner extension portion 6732 is viewed brightly, and a portion viewed through the outer extension portion 6733 is viewed darker than that.

As described above, in this embodiment, surface light emission through the side surface of the long rib 6734 is suppressed, and the visibility of light from the left and right direction is deteriorated.
Light entering the inner extension portion 6732 through 734 a 1 is surface-emitted through the surface of the inner extension portion 6732 .

Therefore, of the light emitted from the edge light-emitting portion D1a, only the light that has entered the inner extension portion 6732 through the left end portion 6734a1 can be easily recognized visually in the horizontal direction. That is, the left end 6
In the vicinity of 734a1, the color and brightness of the light emitted from the edge light emitting portion D1a are visible, and at a position away from the left end portion 6734a1 (intermediate position), the color and brightness of the light emitted from the surface light emitting portion D1b are visible. Since it can be made visible, it is possible for a player who views the horizontal effect device 6700 from the left and right to visually recognize lights of different colors and brightnesses.

The V-shaped rib 6734b is arranged in the vertical center position, and the intermediate connecting portion 673 near the bending position
Both ends 6734b2 are connected to the outer extension 673 while being connected to the inner extension 6732 at 4b1.
3. The reason why the bending position and the intermediate connecting portion 6734b1 are slightly shifted is because
This is because the edge light emitting portion D1a (see FIG. 269(a)) is arranged to face the bending position.

That is, the intermediate connecting portion 6734b1 is positioned to receive the light emitted from the edge light emitting portion D1a.
By shifting the V-shaped rib 6734b, it is possible to suppress the light (main light) emitted linearly in the front-rear direction from the edge light-emitting portion D1a from entering the connecting position.
The loss of light incident on the fin 6735 from the fin 6735 can be reduced.

The V-shaped rib 6734b has a function similar to that of the linear rib 6734a described above. That is, the light traveling inside the V-shaped rib 6734b passes through the intermediate connecting portion 6734b1 and can enter the inner extending portion 6732 directly, while the light passing through the both end portions 6734b2 passes through the outer extending portion 6733. The energy of the light drops in the gap between

As a result, the perceived brightness is different near the left and right ends of the V-shaped rib 6734b. That is, a portion viewed through the inner extension portion 6732 is viewed brightly, and a portion viewed through the outer extension portion 6733 is viewed darker than that.

As described above, in the present embodiment, surface light emission through the side surface of the long rib 6734 is suppressed, and the visibility of light from the left and right direction is deteriorated. Light passing through and entering the inner extension 6732 is surface-illuminated through the surface of the inner extension 6732 .

Therefore, the light emitted from the edge light emitting portion D1a is limited to the light that has entered the inner extension portion 6732 through the intermediate connecting portion 6734b1, and is easily visible in the horizontal direction. That is, in the vicinity of the intermediate connecting portion 6734b1, the color and brightness of the light emitted from the edge light emitting portion D1a are visually recognized.
At a position away from the intermediate connection portion 6734b1 (intermediate position), the color and brightness of the light emitted from the surface light emitting portion D1b can be visually recognized.
A player who sees 00 can see lights of different colors and brightnesses.

The fin 6735 is formed so that the thickness becomes thinner from the extending proximal end toward the distal end side,
It mainly comprises a straight rib 6734a and corresponding distal curved fins 6735a and a V-shaped rib 6734b and corresponding distal curved fins 6735b.

The tip curved fin 6735a has curved upper and lower inner edges, and the left side (the front frame 100
14) are densely formed with triangular wave-like (jagged shape) notches to form a light diffusion portion, and the right side (outer side of the front frame 10014) is formed as a smooth surface.

The tip bending fin 6735b has an extending tip inclined toward the rear side as it goes from the upper and lower ends toward the vertical center, and has an inclined surface that intersects with the front side of the bending position of the V-shaped rib 6734b. A light diffusion portion is formed by densely forming triangular wave-shaped (notched) notches on the inner side surface of the front frame 10014, and the right side surface (the outer side surface of the front frame 10014) is formed as a smooth surface.

These fins 6735 are formed so that the extension length becomes shorter toward the left side. In particular, since the left end of the curved fin 6735a is coupled to the light-receiving surface portion 6731, a large amount of light emitted from the edge light-emitting portion D1a and emitted from the front end of the curved fin 6735a light) is emitted from the fin 6735 near the light receiving surface portion 6731 . Therefore, the light is directed to the inner extension part 6732 side (back side, root side)
As a result, the left side of the light receiving member 6730 can be easily brightened.

In addition, the long rib 6734 and the inner extension part 6732 are connected behind the position where the tip curved fin 6735a is connected to the light receiving surface part 6731, and the light passing through the inside of the long rib 6734 is also extended inward. The setting portion 6732 can be illuminated. That is, in the vicinity of the position where the tip curved fin 6735a couples with the light receiving surface portion 6731, the light passing through the inside of the elongated rib 6734 and the light passing through the tip curved fin 6735a can be combined to perform a light emitting effect. , the production effect of the light emission production can be improved.

Note that this jagged shape is described as a process performed on the surface irradiated with light, and the shape is not limited at all. For example, shape processing in which dot shapes are densely formed, or wavy striped shape processing may be used.

Due to the difference in the form of formation between the left side and the right side of the fin 6735, the passage of light passing through the side can be changed. That is, the light passing through the left side can be visually recognized as uniform light due to the surface emitting effect of the notch, while the light passing through the right side is not affected by the surface emitting effect, so the light passing through the right side can be viewed as uniform light. The light can be seen as localized light. It goes without saying that the elongated ribs 6734 and the fins 6735 function as reinforcing portions for reinforcing the base member 6710 because of their shapes.

One insertion hole 6736 is exposed in the assembled state of the horizontal effect device 6700 (FIG. 266), and only two insertion holes 6736 are arranged at the upper and lower ends of the light receiving member 6730 . Therefore, by loosening the fastening screw inserted through the exposed insertion hole 6736 and applying a load to the light receiving surface portion 6731, the position of the light receiving member 6730 can be displaced.

As a result, when the positional relationship between the long rib 6734 and the fins 6735 and the edge light-emitting portion D1a of the LED chip D1 deviates (for example, vibration due to the player's operation, the front frame 100
14) can be performed without disassembling the horizontal presentation device 6700, so maintenance work can be improved (difficulty is low and time is shortened). )be able to.

The fitting portion 6737 is recessed in the left-right direction in an inclined shape that tapers toward the back side, and aligns the positions and postures of the light receiving member 6730 and the constituent members of the covering units 6730 to 6760 other than the light receiving member 6730. , and is provided with a single recess 6737a so as to be further recessed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, while limiting (reducing) the number of places where the recessed portion 6737a is arranged (the place where the fastening portion 6753 is arranged) on the side of the inner extension portion 6732 (reduced), the light receiving member 6730 and the , positional deviation and attitude deviation from the constituent members of the covering units 6730 to 6760 other than the light receiving member 6730 are suppressed. This is detailed below.

Here, when the left and right side surfaces of the horizontal effect device 6700 are fastened and fixed, the fastening screws do not transmit light, so the more fastening locations there are, the more easily shadows are generated. Therefore, the horizontal direction device 67
Even if the surface area of 00 is formed to be large, the light will be separated at the fastening point, and there is a possibility that the performance effect of the light presentation will be reduced. On the other hand, reducing the number of fastening points leads to a decrease in bearing capacity,
There is a possibility that the lateral effect device 6700 will be deformed from its root due to the load given by the player or the load generated when the front frame 10014 is opened and closed.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, while the fastening portion is limited to the concave portion 6737a, the fitting portion 6737 is fitted to the decorative projecting portion 6751a (see FIG. 276) to maintain the supporting force. ing.

As a result, the horizontal effect device 6 on the game area (glass unit 16, see FIG. 265) side
700 (in this embodiment, the fastening points arranged between the main body curved portion 6751 as the light effecting point and the illumination board 6720) are reduced, and the durability of the horizontal effect device 6700 is improved. be able to.

In addition, in this embodiment, light is formed to be able to travel to the rear side through the concave portion 6737a. This will be explained with reference to FIG.

275(a) is a cross-sectional view of the horizontal effect device 6700 taken along line CCLXXVa-CCLXXVa in FIG. 274(b), and FIG.
FIG. 67 is a cross-sectional view of the light receiving member 6730 taken along line CCLXXVb;

As shown in FIG. 275(a), the recessed portion 6737a is arranged on the same cross section as the intermediate connecting portion 6734b1 of the V-shaped rib 6734b arranged to face the edge light emitting portion D1a. The V-shaped rib 6734b is a portion through which the light emitted from the edge light emitting portion D1a can travel (see FIG. 2).
81), the striped decorative portion 6751
It is formed so that light can travel to the rear side portion of the body curved portion 6751 where e is formed. That is, it is formed so that light can travel toward the back side of the electrical board 6720 (the side opposite to the light irradiation direction).

Here, the fastening portion 6753 is a portion to which the fastening screw is fastened, and it is considered unsuitable for lighting effect because the fastening screw is likely to be shadowed. Since the portion 6734b1 is formed, the light avoids the fastening screw in the vertical direction, so that the player can see the light while suppressing the influence of the shadow of the fastening screw.
That is, by causing the light to travel from both the upper and lower sides of the fastening screw, the shadow of the fastening screw visually recognized by the player can be eliminated (thinned).

In FIG. 275(b), the light receiving surface portion 6731 is shown enlarged. Of the light emitted from the surface light-emitting portion D1b, the light traveling in a direction with a small angle with respect to the optical axis along the front-rear direction enters the light-receiving surface portion 6731 while being gently refracted, and passes through the decorative recessed portion 6731a. In the process, the light is further refracted and condensed. As a result, it is possible to increase the emission intensity of light visually recognized through the decorative recessed portion 6731a.

In this way, the light emission mode on the front side of the light-receiving surface portion 6731 is centered on the decorative recessed portion 6731a where the light intensity is increased by condensing, and the light intensity increases as the distance from the decorative recessed portion 6731a increases. It is set to be low.

At this time, since the light is condensed in the decorative recessed portion 6731a, the light is gathered toward the optical axis side compared to when the surface light emitting portion D1b is viewed separately. D1
Compared to the case where the light emitted from b is visually recognized without the light receiving surface portion 6731, the intensity of the visually recognized light can be increased.

That is, due to the action of the light-receiving surface portion 6731, the light emitted from the surface light-emitting portion D1b has a higher intensity than when the light emitted from the surface light-emitting portion D1b is viewed directly (light visible near the decorative recessed portion 6731a), and the surface light-emitting portion D
The intensity of the light is gradually reduced to a light with a lower intensity than when the light emitted from 1b is directly viewed,
The light having different intensities can be visually recognized by the player through the surface of the light receiving surface portion 6731 .

Returning to FIG. 270, the member covering the light receiving member 6730 will be described. A cup-shaped member with an open rear side is provided on the front side of the light receiving member 6730 . A flat plate member 6740, a curved plate member 6750, and a cover member 6760 that constitute the cup-shaped member will be described.

276 is an exploded front perspective view of the flat plate member 6740, the curved plate member 6750 and the cover member 6760, and FIG.
760, FIG. 278 is an exploded rear perspective view of flat plate member 6740, curved plate member 6750 and cover member 6760, and FIG. It is an exploded rear perspective view.

After the flat plate member 6740 and the curved plate member 6750 are assembled from the left and right and are united by fastening and fixing, the cover member 6760 is assembled from the front side and fitted, thereby fixing each member inseparably.

The flat plate member 6740 is a member made of colorless, transparent, light-transmitting resin, and includes a main body plate portion 6741 formed of a flat plate having a shape obtained by dividing an oval shape, and the main body plate portion 6741. A main body plate portion 6741 which is a flat plate portion disposed on a plane translated leftward from the plane
A fitted plate portion 6742 connected with a step on the front side edge of the main body plate portion 6741, a plurality of projecting portions 6743 projecting from the back side end portion of the main body plate portion 6741 toward the back side, and from the projecting portions 6743 A plurality of fastening portions 6744 arranged at spaced apart positions and configured so that fastening screws can be screwed from the rear side.
and a plurality of insertion holes 6745 drilled in the main body plate portion 6741 with a size that allows the fastening screws to be inserted.
and are mainly provided.

The body plate portion 6741 has a decorative shape that is recessed leftward from the left surface and protrudes rightward from the right surface corresponding to the recess. , body plate portion 674
coincides with the right face of 1.

The concave-convex forming portion 6741a forms a honeycomb structure in which hexagonal pyramids arranged so as to taper leftward are filled, and produces an effect similar to that of a reflector. As a result, the main body plate portion 6741
Since the strength of the rear side portion (the portion that can come into contact with the outer frame plate portion 6717 (see FIG. 268) of the base member 6710 in the assembled state) can be improved, it is possible to prevent cracking or cracking due to the application of external force. can be prevented. Moreover, the flat plate member 67 is attached to the base member 6710 .
40, contact friction can be reduced when the assembly of the curved plate member 6750 and the cover member 6760 is slid to assemble.

Therefore, after the horizontal effect device 6700 is assembled to the front frame 10014, the outer frame plate portion 6717 is damaged when a player gives an impact or a load is applied when opening and closing the front frame 10014. In addition to being able to improve the durability by making it difficult, it is possible to facilitate the assembly of the horizontal effect device 6700 .

The fitted plate portion 6742 has a plurality of groove portions 6742a cut out as thin grooves extending in the front-rear direction on the right side surface and a step between the main body plate portion 6741 and the groove portions 6742a. and a hole 6742b. The groove portion 6742a and the front-rear direction hole 6742b have a function of aligning the flat plate member 6740 and the cover member 6760, which will be described later in detail.

The projecting portion 6743 is a portion that is inserted through the alignment hole 6716 (see FIG. 269(a)) of the base member 6710, and the fastening portion 6744 is a portion that is inserted through the insertion hole 6714 (see FIG. 269(a)) of the base member 6710.
269(a)) is fastened and fixed by a fastening screw.

In addition, the projecting portion 6743 and the fastening portion 6744 are connected to the electrical board 6720 and the light receiving member 6730.
It is arranged in a position close to the outside of the right edge of the front view. In particular, the fastening portion 6744 is
720 and the light receiving member 6730 (Fig. 269(a), Fig. 2
74(b)), therefore, the electric board 6720 and the light receiving member 673 with respect to the flat plate member 6740
0 positional deviation can be suppressed.

The through-holes 6745 are through-holes through which tightening screws to be screwed into the curved plate member 6750 are inserted, and are arranged at four upper and lower positions. The curved plate member 6750 is attached to the flat plate member 6740 at four fastening positions.
Since it can be firmly fastened to the curved plate member 6750, the fastening portion 6 formed on the back side of the curved plate member 6750
Even if 753 is small, insufficient fixing force can be avoided.

The curved plate member 6750 is arranged to face the main body plate portion 6741 of the flat plate member 6740, and is curved in such a manner that it swells leftward toward the back side, is formed to cover the front side of the light receiving member 6730, is colorless and transparent, and transmits light. main body curved portion 6 formed of flexible resin and having a plurality of striped shapes on the inner surface
751 and a curved plate portion arranged by moving parallel to the right side from the main body curved portion 6751 , which is connected to the front side edge of the main body curved portion 6751 with a step and arranged to face the fitted plate portion 6742 . A fitted plate portion 6752 and a plurality of fastening portions 6 configured so that fastening screws can be screwed in from the back side
753, a plurality of fastening portions 6754 formed so that fastening screws can be inserted at positions corresponding to the insertion holes 6745, and fastening screws drilled in the front side edge portion of the body curved portion 6751 so as to be able to be inserted in the front-rear direction. and a plurality of insertion holes 6756 through which fastening screws can be inserted in the front-rear direction at the front side edge of the fitted plate portion 6752 .

The main body curved portion 6751 has a triangular shape tapered toward the back side in a region including the fastening portion 6753 at the center of the upper and lower sides, and has a decorative projecting portion 6751a projecting rightward from the right side surface and the decorative projecting portion 6751a. A front-rear direction hole 6751b drilled in the front-rear direction in the front side portion of , a flat partition portion 6751c that divides the striped shape with a flat surface, and a central flat portion 6751d formed from a flat surface facing the front-rear direction at the vertical center position and a striped decorative portion 6751e formed in a thin striped shape on the inner surface near the rear end.

The decorative protruding portion 6751 a is configured as a portion that fits with the fitting portion 6737 of the light receiving member 6730 . Further, the front-rear direction hole 6751 b has a function of aligning the connection extension portion 6763 and the curved plate member 6750 .

Thus, the decorative projecting portion 6751a can be configured as a portion that has both a function as a decorative portion and a function as a portion that aligns with the light receiving member 6730 . As a result, even in a configuration in which only one fastening portion 6753 is provided (few) in the vertical central portion as in the present embodiment, it is possible to suppress the bending plate member 6750 from wobbling.

The flat partition portion 6751c is formed in a region including a position that coincides with the front edge portion of the tip curved fin 6735a (see FIG. 272(a)) when viewed in the front-rear direction and when viewed from the side. Thus, when the light emitted from the front edge of the tip curved fin 6735a is viewed from the front (see FIG. 207).
, the light passes through the flat partition 6751c, so that the light can be visually recognized as it is.

On the other hand, the light emitted to the inner side surface (the side surface facing the game area) of the tip curved fin 6735a is irregularly reflected by the plurality of striped portions partitioned by the flat partitioning portion 6751c. Therefore, when the light emitted from the inner side surface of the tip curved fin 6735a is visually recognized from the side, the light emission mode can be surface emission, and the light can be obscured and visually recognized.

The central flat portion 6751d is formed in a region including a position that coincides with the front edge portion of the tip bending fin 6735b (see FIG. 272(a)) when viewed in the front-rear direction and when viewed from the side. Accordingly, when the light emitted from the front edge of the tip bending fin 6735b is viewed from the front (see FIG. 207).
, the light passes through the central flat portion 6751d, so that it can be visually recognized as a clear light.

On the other hand, the light emitted to the inner side surface (the side surface facing the game area) of the tip bending fin 6735b is irregularly reflected by the plurality of striped portions. Therefore, when the light emitted from the inner side surface of the tip bending fin 6735b is visually recognized from the side surface, the light emission mode can be surface emission, and the light can be obscured and visually recognized.

Similar to the fitted plate portion 6742 of the flat plate member 6740, the fitted plate portion 6752 has a plurality of groove portions 6752a cut out as thin grooves extending in the front-rear direction on the left side surface, and a body curved portion 6751.
and a front-rear direction hole 6752b drilled in a direction along the groove portion 6752a in the step between. The groove portion 6752 a and the front-rear direction hole 6752 b are formed between the curved plate member 6750 and the cover member 676 .
It has a function of alignment with 0, the details of which will be described later.

The fastening portion 6753 is a portion that is fastened and fixed by a fastening screw passing through the insertion hole 6714 (see FIG. 269(a)) of the base member 6710 . The fastening portion 6753 is arranged at a position close to the outside of the left edge of the electrical board 6720 and the light receiving member 6730 in a front view, and is arranged in such a manner as to enter the concave portion of the electrical board 6720 and the light receiving member 6730 (FIG. 269 ( a), FIG. 274(b)
)), positional deviation of the electrical board 6720 and the light receiving member 6730 with respect to the curved plate member 6750 can be suppressed.

The fastening portions 6754 are portions into which fastening screws inserted through the insertion holes 6745 are screwed, and are arranged at positions (four locations) corresponding to the insertion holes 6745 . Since a plurality of fastening portions 6754 are arranged, the flat plate member 6740 and the curved plate member 6750 can be firmly fixed only by fastening in the left-right direction.

On the other hand, the flat plate member 6740 is attached to the base member 6 by the projecting portion 6743 and the fastening portion 6744.
710, it is possible to prevent the bending plate member 6750 from wobbling when the number of fastening portions 6753 of the bending plate member 6750 is reduced. As a result, since the number of fastening portions 6753 near the rear end of the curved plate member 6750 can be reduced, the number of locations where light is blocked by fastening screws can be reduced. large area can be secured.

The insertion hole 6755 and the insertion hole 6756 are through holes through which fastening screws can be inserted from the back side, and guide wall portions 6755a and 6756a for guiding the fastening portion 6764 (see FIG. 279) of the cover member 6760 are provided on the front side thereof. formed (see FIG. 277).

The guide wall portions 6755a and 6756a have inner surfaces with a slightly larger diameter than the outer diameter of the fastening portion 6764 of the cover member 6760, and are located on the right side of the fastening portion 6764 (the side close to the flat plate member 6740).
is formed so as to be arranged opposite to the As a result, the assembled state of the horizontal effect device 6700 (Fig. 2
65), the leftward movement of the curved plate member 6750 can be restricted by the fastening portion 6764 of the cover member 6760, so that the curved plate member 6750 can be prevented from being removed carelessly.

The cover member 6760 is attached to the flat plate member 6740 and the curved plate member 6750 by sliding the fastening portion 6764 back and forth along the guide wall portions 6755a and 6756a. The cover member 6760 includes a body plate portion 6761 that is a flat plate portion that covers the fitted plate portion 6742 of the flat plate member 6740 from the right side, and a front side edge of the body plate portion 6761 that is bent to cover the curved plate member 6750 . A curved plate portion 6762, which is a curved plate portion having a shape that covers the fitting plate portion 6742 from the left side, and a curved plate portion 6762 from two positions spaced apart from the vertical center position by approximately the same distance vertically.
A connection extension portion 6763 that extends to the left rear of and is connected at the extension end portion, and a fastening screw that is disposed on the back surface of the curved plate portion 6762 and is inserted through the insertion holes 6755 and 6756 of the curved plate member 6750 A plurality of fastening portions 6764 formed so that they can be screwed in, and fastening screws inserted through insertion holes 6714 disposed at the rear side end portion of the upper end portion of the curved plate portion 6762 and near the upper end portion of the base member 6710 are screwed. It mainly includes a base end fastening portion 6765 (see FIG. 279) that can be inserted, and a plurality of protrusions 6766 that protrude from the back side end of the main body plate portion 6761 toward the back side.

The main body plate portion 6761 is slidable inside the groove portion 6742a at a position corresponding to the groove portion 6742a of the flat plate member 6740, and protrudes leftward in a rib shape along a straight line in the front-rear direction. It has a plurality of projecting ribs 6761a.

The protruding rib 6761a is formed to protrude rearward from the back side edge of the main body plate portion 6761, and this protruding portion is inserted through the front-rear direction hole 6742b. That is, the projecting portion is arranged to face the left side surface of the main body plate portion 6741, and movement of the main body plate portion 6741 can be restricted.
As a result, it is possible to prevent the flat plate member 6740 from being displaced to the left with respect to the cover member 6760 in the assembled state of the horizontal effect device 6700 (FIG. 265).

At a position corresponding to the groove 6752a of the curved plate member 6750, the curved plate portion 6762 is
A plurality of protruding ribs 6762a are provided so as to be slidable inside the groove portion 6752a and protrude rightward in a rib shape along a straight line in the front-rear direction.

The protruding rib 6762a is formed to protrude rearward from the back side edge of the curved plate portion 6762, and this protruding portion is inserted through the front-rear direction hole 6752b. That is, the projecting portion is arranged to face the right side surface of the main body curved portion 6751, and the movement of the main body curved portion 6751 can be restricted. As a result, in the assembled state of the horizontal effect device 6700 (FIG. 265), the curved plate member 67
50 can be prevented from shifting to the right with respect to the cover member 6760 .

The connecting extension part 6763 has a projecting rib 6763a that projects rightward in a rib shape along a straight line in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the front-rear direction hole 6751b.

The protruding rib 6763a is formed to protrude rearward from the back side edge of the connecting extension portion 6763 at the connecting position, and this protruding portion is inserted through the front-rear direction hole 6751b. That is, the projecting portion is arranged to face the right side surface of the decorative projecting portion 6751a, and the movement of the body curved portion 6751 can be restricted. As a result, it is possible to prevent the curved plate member 6750 from shifting to the right with respect to the cover member 6760 in the assembled state of the horizontal effect device 6700 (FIG. 265).

As described above, the fastening portion 6764 is configured as a portion capable of restricting leftward movement of the curved plate member 6750 in the assembled state of the horizontal effect device 6700 (see FIG. 265). Careless removal can be prevented.

Thus, the cover member 6760 structurally restricts the lateral movement of the curved plate member 6750 . That is, the rightward movement of the curved plate member 6750 is restricted by the relationship between the projecting ribs 6762a, 6763a and the front-rear direction holes 6751b, 6752b.
The leftward movement of the curved plate member 6750 is restricted by the relationship with 755a and 6756a. Therefore, the arrangement of the curved plate member 6750 with respect to the cover member 6760 can be stabilized.

The base end fastening portion 6765 is disposed at the rear side end portion of the upper end portion of the curved plate portion 6762, and can be screwed with a fastening screw that is inserted through an insertion hole 6714 (see FIG. 267) near the upper end portion of the base member 6710. formed in That is, the insertion hole 6714 of the base member 6710 (see FIG. 269(a))
A fastening screw passing through the base member 67 is screwed into the proximal fastening portion 6765 .
10 is fastened and fixed.

The projecting portion 6766 is a portion that is inserted through the alignment hole 6716 (see FIG. 269(a)) of the base member 6710 . In addition, the projecting portion 6766 and the base end fastening portion 6765 correspond to the illumination substrate 6720 and the illumination substrate 6720 and the cover member 6760 arranged at a position close to the outside of the right edge or upper edge of the illumination substrate 6720 and the light receiving member 6730 in a front view. Positional deviation of the light receiving member 6730 can be suppressed.

FIG. 280(a) is a cross-sectional view of the base member 6710, the illumination substrate 6720 and the light-receiving member 6730 taken along line CCLXXXa-CCLXXXa in FIG. 272(b).
) is the base member 6710 on the line CCLXXXb-CCLXXXb in FIG.
280(c) is a cross-sectional view of an electrical board 6720 and a light-receiving member 6730, and FIG.
Base member 6710 and illumination board 67 on line CCLXXXc-CCLXXXc in (b)
20 and a light receiving member 6730. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 280(a), the front-rear spacing between the long rib 6734 and the LED chip D1 is
The height of the LED chip D<b>1 is suppressed to a level that protrudes from the surface of the main body plate portion 6721 . Therefore, the light emitted from the edge light emitting portion D1a is incident on the long rib 6734 without omission,
In addition, the light can be easily propagated to the front side by total reflection inside the long rib 6734 (see FIG. 281).

In addition, at locations where the long ribs 6734 are not arranged, the front-to-rear spacing between the surface emitting portion D1b and the light receiving surface portion 6731 is maintained to be equal to or greater than the front-to-rear width (formation length) of the long ribs 6734 . Therefore, it is possible to widen the area where the light emitted from the LED chip D1 can reach the light receiving surface portion 6731 .

As described above, according to the present embodiment, on the premise that the light emitted from the LED chip D1 is emitted radially, the light emitted from the edge light emitting portion D1a and the light emitted from the surface light emitting portion D1b It is possible to make it easier to visually recognize the light by distinguishing it from the light.

That is, the light emitted from the edge light-emitting portion D1a passes through the elongated rib 6734 and the fin 6735.
As a line-shaped clear light that progresses by total reflection inside the , or as a long rib 6734
The light emitted from the surface light emitting portion D1b passes through the light-receiving surface portion 6731 and the light refracting surface portion of the inner extension portion 6732 while it is visually recognized as light that brightens the small-scale range in which the light can travel through the It is visually recognized as uniform light (faint light).

As a result, compared to the production mode in which a lens for concentrating the light emitted from the illumination substrate 6720 is arranged opposite to the illumination substrate 6720 as in the related art, and the glittering light is visually recognized in a small area, this embodiment is superior. According to this, it is possible to visually recognize light (planar light) that spreads over the area of the electrical decoration substrate 6720 while visually recognizing brilliant light (line-shaped light) in a small area. In addition, it is possible to easily perform an effect in which only one or both of these different lights are visually recognized by control. Therefore, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in the lighting performance.

Therefore, for example, even when the same LED chip is adopted for the edge light emitting portion D1a and the surface light emitting portion D1b, the light emitted from the edge light emitting portion D1a and the light emitted from the surface light emitting portion D1b By varying the color and brightness of each, it is possible to perform a light emission effect rich in gradation (light emission effect of different colors and brightness).

As shown in FIG. 280(b), the side surface of the fin 6735 in the plate thickness direction is the right side surface (front frame 1
0014) is flush with the long rib 6734 in the front-rear direction, and the left side (front frame 10
014) is an inclined surface that tapers toward the end on the front side (closer to the right side).
Therefore, the normal line of the left side face does not face directly laterally (a direction parallel to the surface of the main body plate portion 6721 of the electrical board 6720, that is, a direction perpendicular to the front-rear direction), but has a component facing the front side. turn to As a result, the light emitted from the left side surface of the fin 6735 can be
It can also be directed to the front side.

As shown in FIG. 280(c), since the long rib 6734 is connected to the inner extending portion 6732, the light emitted from the edge light emitting portion D1a and incident on the long rib 6734 is emitted from the inner extending portion 67
32. The propagation of this light will be described using schematic diagrams.

FIG. 281 schematically shows the cross section of FIG.
20 and a light receiving member 6730. FIG. In FIG. 281, arrows L23a to L23e indicating light emitted from the edge light emitting portion D1a are schematically illustrated.

Although the intensity of the light emitted from the LEDs decreases as the angle between the surface of the electrical board 6720 and the axis X23 orthogonal to the surface of the decorative board 6720 increases, the light itself is emitted radially. In this embodiment, the subsequent arrival position differs depending on the traveling direction of the light, so the following description will be given in order.

The arrow L23a enters the end of the long rib 6734, and the long rib 6734 and the fin 67
35 shows the traveling direction of the light that is totally reflected inside the fin 6735 and reaches the front end of the fin 6735 . Since the light reaching the fin 6735 along the arrow 23a travels through total internal reflection, it is more difficult than the case where the light is partially transmitted (emitted) from the side surface of the long rib 6734 or the fin 6735. , can reduce the light energy loss. Therefore, even when the distance from the edge light emitting portion D1a is long, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the light with sufficient brightness.

Before the arrow L23b reaches the front end of the fin 6735, the left side (front frame 1001
4) indicates the traveling direction of light emitted from the side surface. As described above, the left side surface of the fin 6735 is processed to have a jagged shape, so that light is emitted in the form of surface emission.

An arrow L23c indicates the traveling direction of the light that passes through the elongated rib 6734, travels directly to the inner extension portion 6732, and is emitted from the surface thereof. Since this light is not refracted at the end face after entering the elongated rib 6734 and the energy loss of the light is suppressed, it can be visually recognized brightly. In addition, since the outer surface of the inner extending portion 6732 (the surface opposite to the outer extending portion 6733) is processed to have a jagged shape, light is emitted in the form of surface emission.

An arrow L23d indicates the light receiving surface portion 6 as a joint position between the long rib 6734 and the fin 6735.
After reaching 731, the traveling direction of the light that cannot travel inside the fin 6735 and is reflected is shown. That is, as described above, the fins 6735 are formed so that the length in the thickness direction becomes shorter toward the front side than the long ribs 6734, and the left side (the front frame 100
14), a jagged recessed portion is formed, so that when viewed in the front-rear direction, the long rib 6
734 is configured to partially protrude from the fins 6735 .

Therefore, even if the light similarly travels in the front-back direction, the long rib 6734 and the light-receiving surface portion 6
It is not possible to enter the fin 6735 at all of the joint positions with 731, and entry into the fin 6735 is suppressed in a part of the region (especially near the left side surface of the long rib 6734), Light reaching this area is reflected by the light receiving surface portion 6731 .

After that, the arrow L23d reaches the inner extension portion 6732 and is emitted. Note that the outer surface of the inner extension portion 6732 (the surface on the side opposite to the outer extension portion 6733) is processed to have a jagged shape, so that light is emitted in the form of surface emission.

Here, as shown in FIG. 281, the light indicated by the arrow L23d includes light traveling toward the rear side of the electrical board 6720. As shown in FIG. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, the electrical decoration board 6720 having the LED chip D1 that emits light to the front side on the front side can cause the back side portion of the electrical decoration board 6720 to emit light (at least, the electrical decoration Light can travel to the back side of the substrate 6720, see FIG. 281).

The inner surface of the rear-side end portion of the curved plate member 6750 arranged on the downstream side of the arrow L23d is formed into a lens shape in which fine semicircular cross-sections are arranged vertically in a rear view (see FIG. 276).
. As a result, the light traveling along the arrow L23d and reaching the rear end of the curved plate member 6750 can be emitted to the left in a uniform vertical manner, and the glass unit 16 can be brightly illuminated by this light.

Therefore, from the irradiation device arranged on the back side of the glass unit 16, the glass unit 16
Since the light directed toward and the light traveling along the arrow L23d can be combined to execute the light effect, the degree of freedom in designing the light effect can be improved.

Note that, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to reduce the difference in brightness between the light indicated by the arrow L23c and the light indicated by the arrow L23d. That is, at the time of incidence on the long rib 6734, due to the difference in angle with the axis X23, the light indicated by the arrow L23d is the light indicated by the arrow L23c.
However, the light indicated by the arrow L23 suffers an energy loss corresponding to the transmitted light when it is reflected by the light receiving surface portion 6731. Therefore, when the light reaches the inner extension portion 6732, are visually recognized as light with substantially the same brightness. In this way, it is possible to reduce the difference in the brightness of the light depending on the irradiation direction, and it is possible to easily make the brightness of the inner extending portion 6732 uniform over the front and back.

Here, in the present embodiment, the configuration of the horizontal effect device 6700 arranged on the left side is almost symmetrical (or similar) to the configuration of the horizontal effect device 6700 on the right side. As a special portion that is not symmetrical, the formation of long ribs 6734 (projecting to the back) is omitted (the formation of fins 6735 is maintained). As a result, the mode of light production is adjusted for each range of the game area (glass unit 16, see FIG. 265).

This adjustment is for ensuring the visibility of the player. In other words, the intention is to maintain the effect accompanying light traveling to the fins 6735 on the left side, but to suppress the light traveling to the game area side due to the light traveling to the long rib 6734 .

That is, in order to improve the visibility of the game ball at the left side of the game area where the shot ball enters the game area, the intensity of the light emitted inward (toward the game area) from the horizontal effect device 6700 is reduced. is aimed at. As a result, it is possible to prevent in advance that it becomes difficult to visually recognize the shot ball due to the dazzling light effect, and it becomes difficult to adjust the shooting intensity and confirm the shot of the game ball.

On the other hand, on the right side of the game area, most of the balls fired rightward (strongest firing strength) flow down, and there is little need for the player to visually recognize the ball to adjust the firing strength of the ball. . In addition, since a large number of game balls in a short period of time continuously flow down a narrow spot, light is emitted to the spot and reflected on the game ball, thereby producing a presentation effect using light. can be easily improved. Therefore, it is not necessary to weaken the intensity of the light on the right side of the game area. , the production effect can be improved.

An arrow L23e indicates light emitted in a direction intersecting the longitudinal direction of the long rib 6734 and emitted in a direction having a large angle with the axis X23 (light that does not enter the long rib 6734). Indicates the direction of travel. This light is reflected by the inner surfaces of the left and right extended portions 6732 and 6733 or reaches the light receiving surface portion 6731 to emit surface light.
is extended to a position very close to the edge light emitting portion D1a, the intensity of the light traveling in the direction of the arrow L23e is originally very small, so the light can be configured as light that is difficult for the player to visually recognize.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the light traveling along the arrow L23e from being visually recognized as being mixed with the light emitted from the surface light emitting portion D1b, thereby preventing a reduction in the effect of the light.

Returning to FIG. 280(a), the role of the fitting portion 6737 and the light emitting effect near the fitting portion 6737 will be described. The V-shaped rib 6734b is connected to the fitting portion 67 at the intermediate connecting portion 6734b1.
37 (see FIG. 274). Therefore, part of the light incident on the V-shaped rib 6734b reaches the left surface of the fitting portion 6737 through both walls of the recess 6737a, similar to the contents described above with the arrows L23c and L23d.

The recessed portion 6737a is configured as a recessed portion in which the fastening portion 6753 (see FIG. 278) of the curved plate member 6750 can slide back and forth. is blocked, there is a possibility that the effect of the lighting effect is lowered.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, sufficient alignment (prevention of misalignment) can be achieved by matching the shapes of the fitting portion 6737 and the decorative projecting portion 6751a. It is possible to reduce the number of fastening screws while preventing misalignment, and to reduce locations where the effect of the lighting effect is lowered.

In addition, a concave portion 6737a is arranged near the fastening screw to avoid interference with the fastening screw, and light passing through the concave portion 6737a is emitted from the surface of the inner extension portion 6732. It prevents the surrounding area from becoming too dark. As a result, it is possible to suppress the degree of reduction in the performance effect of the light emission performance.

Next, the eighteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 282 to 284. FIG. In the seventeenth embodiment described above, the electrical board 6 is provided on the front side of the acoustic device 6610 above the front frame 10014 .
570 is provided, but the pachinko machine 18010 in the eighteenth embodiment is provided with a production device 18800 having an illumination board 18830 at the lower right side of the operation device 10300, so that the front frame 18014 Also in the lower part, it is possible to execute the lighting effect. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 282 is a front view of the pachinko machine 18010 in the eighteenth embodiment, and FIG.
is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 18010. FIG. The pachinko machine 18010 has a front frame 180
14 differs from the pachinko machine 10010 in the 17th embodiment in that it is equipped with a production device 18800 in contrast to the front frame 10014 in the 17th embodiment, and since the rest of the configuration is the same, only the production device 18800 will be explained, Description of other configurations is omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 282 and 283, the effect device 18800 is a light-emitting device in which the back side and the top side of the lower plate unit 6400 are coupled to the covering base member 6410 on the front side. It is arranged between the operating handle 51 and the operating handle 51 .

This effect device 18800 is structurally devised so that the appearance of the light emission effect changes depending on whether or not the operation device 10300 participates in the operation effect. Next, the internal structure of the rendering device 18800 will be described in order to describe the structural contrivance.

284(a) is a cross-sectional view of the rendering device 18800 taken along line CCLXXXIVa-CCLXXXIVa in FIG. 282, and FIG.
It is a schematic diagram of the electrical decoration board 18830 of the production|presentation apparatus 18800 in XIVb direction view. In addition, in FIG.284(b), the support aspect of the electrical decoration board 18830 is shown typically.

As shown in FIG. 284(a), the effect device 18800 is provided with a connecting base member 18810 connected to the lower tray unit 6400 and a planar gap on the front side of the connecting base member 18810. An intermediate fixing member 18820 which is a frame-shaped member and is fixed to the connecting base member 18810, an electrical board 18830 arranged in a gap between the connecting base member 18810 and the intermediate fixing member 18820, and an electrical board 18830 A light receiving member 18840 fixed to the front side of the intermediate fixing member 18820 so that the light emitted from the LED chip D1 can travel inside, and a covering member 18 attached so as to cover the outer surface of the light receiving member 18840
850 and .

The connecting base member 18810 has a front wall surface facing the electrical board 18830 formed as an inclined surface that slopes downward toward the rear surface. The inclination angle of this inclined surface is the same as the direction Y17a (see FIG. 215) of vibration of the vibration device 10366 when the swing device member 10310 of the operation device 10300 is arranged in the upward position and is in the posture before operation. It is formed at an inclination angle parallel to the inclined surface.

The illumination board 18830 is arranged in parallel with the front wall surface of the connecting base member 18810 . Therefore, the vibration direction Y17a of the vibrating device 10366 is parallel to the surface of the electrical board 18830 . The electrical board 18830 mainly includes an LED chip D1, a long hole 18831 elongated in the vertical direction, and a plate spring 18832 that generates an upward biasing force.

The elongated hole 18831 is a hole through which the fixing portion 18821 of the intermediate fixing member 18820 is inserted for supporting the electrical board 18830 . Therefore, the difference (length) between the vertical length of the long hole 18831 and the diameter of the fixing portion 18821 is designed as the length (permissible length) that allows the electrical board 18830 to be mechanically displaced.

On the front side of the electrical board 18830, LED chips D1 are arranged in an arbitrary pattern (vertices of a pentagon in this embodiment), and irradiate light in the direction normal to the surface of the electrical board 18830. FIG. Therefore, the light emitted from the LED chip D1 is emitted in a downwardly inclined direction toward the front side. On the other hand, the light-receiving member 18840 that receives this light is formed so as to change the traveling direction of the light along the front-rear direction.

That is, the player sees the light whose traveling direction is changed by the light-receiving member 18840, so that the traveling direction of the light emitted from the LED chip D1 is inclined downward toward the front side (the player's line of sight). Even in the direction away from the ), it is possible to prevent the production effect of the light production from being lowered.

The light-receiving member 18840 is made of a colorless and transparent light-transmitting resin material, and
A plate-like portion 18841 configured to be able to block the opening on the front side of the 8820, and its plate-like portion 188
41 is mainly provided with a plurality of extension plate portions 18842 extending in a plate shape from the back surface of 41 .

The intermediate fixing member 18820 is made of a resin material with low light transmittance and formed into a container shape with an open front side. 18821 and a plurality of insertion holes 18822 drilled at positions and sizes capable of receiving the extended plate portion 18842 on the rear side bottom portion.

In the present embodiment, since the resin mold extraction direction of the light receiving member 18840 is set in the horizontal direction, the extended plate portion 18842 is formed in a plate shape with the same cross section in the horizontal direction. Therefore, L
Since the ED chips D1 are arranged at the apexes of the pentagon, the LED chips D1 arranged horizontally at the middle position and the lower position can be associated with the common extended plate portion 18842 . Thereby, the extension plate portion 18842 can be formed as three upper and lower plate-like portions having different widths. Similarly, the insertion hole 18822 of the intermediate fixing member 18820 is also bored at three upper and lower positions with different widths.

Here, as shown in FIG. 284, the extension plate portion 18842 is formed in a curved plate shape that gradually curves, although it begins to extend along the normal direction of the plate-like portion 18841 . The radius of curvature of the curve can be set arbitrarily, but in this embodiment, the LED chip D1 of the electrical board 18830
To the extent that total reflection can be continued until the light emitted from the plate-like portion 18841 is reached,
It is designed with a curved shape with a large radius of curvature. As a result, the extension tip of the extension plate portion 18842 (
It is possible to make it easier for the light incident on the rear surface side end portion to reach the plate-like portion 18841 while maintaining its intensity.

The covering member 18850 is a member for suppressing light leakage from a portion of the outer surface of the light receiving member 18840 where no light effect is desired, and can be realized in various ways. For example, it may be a light-shielding tape (insulating tape) that can be attached, or a cup-shaped member made of a resin material.

In this embodiment, the covering member 18850 is configured as a cup-shaped member that can be fitted from the front side. A plurality of through-holes 18851 are formed at the vertex position of to allow light to pass through.

As described above, the arrangement of the through holes 18851 does not have to be the same as the arrangement of the LED chips D1, and a similar shape with a slightly different size is possible. L.
Considering the traveling mode of the light emitted from the ED chip D1, the formation mode of the light receiving member 18840 is more important than the placement of the LED chip D1 when designing the placement of the through holes 18851. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the through hole 18851 is designed to be formed at a position that coincides with the position of the base of the extended plate portion 18842 of the light receiving member 18840 in a front view.

The action of the effect device 18800 will be described. As described above, the electrical board 18830 is movable in the first displacement direction parallel to the surface on which the LED chip D1 is arranged, within the allowable width of the long hole 18831. Vibrator 1036 of device 10300
6 coincides with the vibration direction Y17a.

That is, when the operation device 10300 performs a vibration effect, the vibration causes the electrical board 1883 to move.
0 is configured to be slidable. When the electrical board 18830 slides, the positional relationship between the position of the LED chip D1 and the end of the extended plate portion 18842 shifts.
It becomes difficult for the light emitted from to enter the extended plate portion 18842 .

In this case, even when light is emitted from the LED chip D1, the light is
through-hole 18851 is visually recognized as dark. That is, it cannot be grasped whether the LED chip D1 is emitting light. On the other hand, in the operation device 10300, as described above, by operating the swing operation member 10310, the vibration direction Y17a of the vibration device 10366 changes to a direction different from the first shift direction.

In this case, the influence of the vibration of the operation device 10300 on the electrical board 18830 is suppressed, and the electrical board 18830 returns to the initial position (upper end position) by the biasing force of the plate spring 18832 . At the initial position of the electrical board 18830, the LED chip D1 and the extended plate portion 188
42 is arranged to face the back side end of the LED chip D1, and the light emitted from the LED chip D1 is directed to the extended plate portion 18.
842, and is formed so as to be able to advance to the front side by total internal reflection.

That is, even when the operation device 10300 is performing a vibration effect (when the through-hole 18851 is visually recognized darkly) in a state where light is emitted from the LED chip D1, by pushing the swing operation member 10310 , the through-hole 18851 can be visually recognized brightly.

Therefore, when the through hole 18851 is visually recognized dark when the vibration effect is performed, it is possible to grasp whether or not the LED chip D1 is emitting light by operating the swing operation member 10310. can be done. Here, for example, the LED chip D1 is controlled to emit light when a big win occurs or when the game state is shifted to a game state advantageous to the player (that is, when a change advantageous to the player occurs). , the player's interest in whether or not the LED chip D1 emits light can be enhanced.

As a result, since the player's desire to operate the swing operation member 10310 can be enhanced, when the effect of operating the swing operation member 10310 is executed, the player's willingness to participate is enhanced, and the player is actually encouraged to participate. The swing operation member 10310 can be induced to operate.

In this embodiment, the case where the electrical board 18830 is arranged outside the covering base member 6410 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, electrical board 18830
is disposed in such a manner as to penetrate the covering base member 6410 and enter inside, and the operation device 103
00 may be made contactable.

In this case, the vibration of the operation device 10300 can be easily transmitted to the illumination board 18830, and the illumination board 18830 slides not only with the vibration but also with the pushing operation (push operation) into the lens member 10317. can be configured as

In this case, for example, the LED chip D1 may be controlled to emit light at a timing other than the timing at which the pressing instruction as the notification effect is generated. When the lens member 10317 is pushed (push operation) at the timing when the LED chip D1 emits light, L
It is possible to realize a configuration in which it is difficult to determine whether or not the ED chip D1 emits light when viewed from the front.

In other words, when the lens member 10317 is pressed (push operation) at a timing other than the notification, it is possible to make it easier for the player to miss the notification that is advantageous to the player. Since it is possible to easily suppress the pressing operation to the lens member 10317 at times other than the timing at which the pressing instruction is generated, the operation device 10300 may fail early, or the operation device may be operated unnecessarily many times to generate noise. It is possible to suppress nuisance behavior.

Next, the nineteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the seventeenth embodiment described above, the case where the covers 10321 and 10322 of the operation device 10300 are formed to be divisible into left and right has been described, but the covers 19321 and 19322 in the nineteenth embodiment
It is formed so that it can be divided into front and rear. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 285 is a side view of covers 19321 and 19322 in the nineteenth embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 285, in this embodiment, an upper cover 19321 and a lower cover 1932
2 are arranged so as to surround the swing operation member 10310 (see FIG. 207). The main configuration of the covers 19321 and 19322 has substantially the same shape as the above-described covers 10321 and 10322, and the description will be made mainly as an example in which the direction of division is changed.

The covers 19321 and 19322 are formed so as to be separable along a dividing plane coinciding with the reference line X19 shown in FIG. The cover 19322 can be fastened and fixed by a fastening screw that is screwed into the fastening portion 19322a of the cover 19322 .

Here, the reference line X19 is set as a direction parallel to the vibration direction Y17a (see FIG. 215) of the vibration device 10366 before operation when the swing operation member 10310 is in the upward position. That is, since the fastening direction of the fastening screw fastened to the fastening portion 19322a is perpendicular to the vibration direction Y17a in a side view (see FIG. 285), loosening of the fastening screw due to the impact of vibration can be suppressed.

In addition, since the direction Y17a of vibration of the swinging operation member 10310 is the same as the pushing operation direction (push direction) of the lens member 10317 (see FIG. 216(a)), the pushing operation direction of the lens member 10317 and the fastening screw 285 are perpendicular to each other in a side view (see FIG. 285), it is possible to suppress loosening of the fastening screws due to impact caused by the operation of the lens member 10317 .

Next, a twentieth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the seventeenth embodiment described above, the projecting shape portion 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414 are formed in a flat plate shape in cross section,
Although the case where the plate thickness is substantially constant at the slanted portion has been described, the protruding shape portion 16413 and the recessed shape portion 16414 in the twentieth embodiment are formed with a slight slope toward the vertical direction. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

286 is a cross-sectional view of the lower tray unit 16400 in the twentieth embodiment taken along line CCXXXIIIb-CCXXXIIIb in FIG. 229. FIG. As shown in FIG. 286, in this embodiment, the inclinations of the left and right ends of the projecting shape portion 16413 and the recessed shape portion 16414 are different from those of the projecting shape portion 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414 described above in the seventeenth embodiment. is set closer to the vertical direction.

In addition, the lower end portion of the protruding shape portion 16413 (corresponding to the protruding shape portion 6413 of the seventeenth embodiment) and the upper end portion of the recessed shape portion 16414 (corresponding to the recessed shape portion 6414 of the seventeenth embodiment) (
base end of the recess) are arranged on the same line in the up-down direction (vertical direction).

The hanging plate-like portion 6426b of the plate-like support portion 6426 of the lower plate forming member 6420
414 (the upper surface of the body portion 6411) and is supported by the base end portion of the body portion 6411, a sufficient thickness for supporting the body portion 6411 in the vertical direction (vertical direction) can be secured at the support position. Body portion 6411 due to load during operation of operation device 10300 (see FIG. 207)
deformation can be suppressed.

In this embodiment, the case where the inclination of the left and right ends is changed compared to the projecting shape portion 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this.
For example, the left and right outer surfaces of the projecting shape portion 6413 and the left and right inner surfaces of the recess shape portion 6414 may be formed along the vertical direction (the vertical direction in a cross-sectional view) without any inclination. Even in this case, the supporting thickness of the main body portion 6411 can be sufficiently secured.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by forming an inverted V shape in cross section, the direction in which the projecting shape portion 6413 and the recess shape portion 6414 are deformed when receiving an external force is shifted to the left-right center side. can be easily directed to As a result, the degree of fatigue caused by external force can be reduced compared to the case where deformation is possible in both the left and right directions, and the plate portion forming the projecting shape portion 6413 and the recess shape portion 6414 is damaged early. can be prevented. In other words, the durability of the lower tray unit 6400 can be improved.

Next, a twenty-first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 287 to 301. FIG. In the seventeenth embodiment described above, a case was described in which the supply of electricity to the lower tray unit 6400 was not required. Equipped with a device 21500, it is necessary to supply electricity to the lower tray unit 21400. In addition, the same reference numerals are assigned to the same parts as those of the above-described embodiments,
The explanation is omitted.

FIG. 287 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 10014, operation device 10300 and lower tray unit 21400 in the twenty-first embodiment. In addition, in FIG. 287, the front frame 1001
4 is omitted, and the lower tray unit 21400 and the operation device 10300 are
After being disassembled from the metal body part 10014a, it is illustrated in a direction view from the rear side.

In order to facilitate understanding, the assembling direction lines connecting the insertion holes 6801R and 6801L and their fastening portions are illustrated by imaginary lines. is partially illustrated in relation to the front frame 10014, the operating device 10300 and the lower tray unit 21400. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 287, a bottom member 21De obtained by changing the design of the bottom member De described above is fastened and fixed to the bottom side of the operation device 10300. As shown in FIG. The bottom member 21De includes, in addition to the configuration of the bottom member De described above, a projecting portion De3 that projects to the right.

The protruding portion De3 has both a function of applying a load to the vibrating device 21500 and a function of regulating the displacement of the electrical wiring 21513 connected to the vibrating device 21500 . That is, as shown in FIG. 287, the electrical wiring 21513 is routed along the underside of the protruding portion De3, so that when the lower tray unit 21400 is removed for maintenance, the electrical wiring 21513 and the right front cover are separated from each other. 10322 can be prevented from rubbing against each other.

The projecting portion De3 is formed so that the rear surface side is inclined in a manner that the width becomes narrower toward the projecting end,
The front side constitutes a plane parallel to a plane perpendicular to the front-rear direction. By configuring in this way, the metal main body 1001 can be mounted on the rear side of the overhang De3 while ensuring the rigidity of the overhang De3.
4a can be created.

In this gap, the electrical wiring 21513 of a length necessary for removing the lower tray unit 21400 during maintenance (wiring of a length that fills the length of the distance between the lower tray unit 21400 and the metal main body 10014a) is inserted into the lower tray unit 21400. is not removed (metal main body 1001
4a), it is effectively used as an area to be loosened and arranged. As a result, compared to the case where the electrical wiring 21513 is arranged in a tight space when the lower tray unit 21400 is not removed, the load received by the electrical wiring 21513 from the surroundings can be reduced.

As shown in FIG. 287, the operating handle 51 is internally supported by a handle support plate 21051, and the handle support plate 21051 is fastened and fixed to the metal body portion 10014a. In the assembled state (see FIG. 208), the left edge of the handle support plate 21051 and the right edge of the lower tray unit 21400 overlap front to back.
A fastening portion is not formed over the entire left side edge of 1, and the connection with the lower tray unit 21400 is performed not by fastening but by engagement (fitting by fitting in the front-rear direction).

Therefore, the lower tray unit 21400 and the handle support plate 21051 are not mechanically fixed, but are configured to be relatively displaceable in the front-rear direction.

As a result, compared to the case where the right edge of the lower tray unit 21400 and the left edge of the handle support plate 21051 are fastened and fixed over the entire area, the right edge of the lower tray unit 21400 is displaced in the front-rear direction. Along with this, it is possible to prevent the left edge of the handle support plate 21051 from being displaced in the front-rear direction. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the vibration of the vibrating device 21500, which will be described later, from being transmitted to the operation handle 51 via the handle support plate 21051. FIG.

That is, the vibration of the vibration device 21500 can be configured to be transmitted from the lower tray unit 21400 to the player. For example, the transmission path of the vibration transmitted to the player holding the operating handle 51 is not a path through the operating handle 51, but a lower tray unit that contacts the fingers or arms of the player holding the operating handle 51. 21400 right side.

288 is an exploded front perspective view of the lower tray unit 21400, and FIG. 289 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lower tray unit 21400. FIG. In Figures 288 and 289, the overlying base member 21
410, the lower plate forming member 21420, the V-shaped design member 21450, and the portions corresponding to the fixing points of the vibrating device 21500 are shown in imaginary lines.

The covering base member 21410 includes the body portion 641 in addition to the configuration of the covering base member 6410 described above.
A plurality (a pair in this embodiment) of fastening portions 21415 formed so that a fastening screw can be screwed in the region on the right side of the recessed shape portion 6414 of 1 is provided. The fastening portion 21415 includes the vibration device 21
A fastening screw inserted through a pair of upper and lower insertion portions 21535 arranged on the right side of 500 is screwed. That is, the right insertion portion 21535 is fastened and fixed to the covering base member 21410 .

The lower plate forming member 21420 has the configuration of the lower plate forming member 6420 described above, in addition to the front longitudinally elongated portion 6 .
A support hole 21428 is provided in the plate-like portion extending upward from the upper surface of 426c and is drilled in the front-rear direction. The fastening portion 21457 of the V-shaped design member 21450 , which is the connecting portion between the V-shaped design member 21450 and the vibration device 21500 , is inserted through the support hole 21428 .

The V-shaped design member 21450 has the configuration of the V-shaped design member 6450 described above, in addition to the plate-like projecting portion 6
453R (see FIG. 227), a fastening portion 21457 that protrudes toward the rear side in a columnar shape and is formed so that a fastening screw can be screwed therein, and a fastening portion 21457 that is formed in a plate shape and an insertion hole 6452 are separated from each other. and a connecting plate-like portion 21458 to be connected.

The fastening portion 21457 is inserted through the support hole 21428 in the assembled state (see FIG. 208), and a fastening screw inserted through the insertion portion 21535 on the left side of the vibrating device 21500 is screwed into the fastening portion 21457 to be fastened and fixed. That is, the left insertion portion 21535 is fastened and fixed to the lower plate forming member 21420 and the V-shaped design member 21450 .

Therefore, the vibrating device 21500 is not fastened and fixed to a single member, but is fastened and fixed to a plurality of members (covering base member 21410, lower plate forming member 21420 and V-shaped design member 21450). Thereby, the fastening strength of these members can be reinforced by the vibration device 21500 .

Here, as described above, the V-shaped design member 21450 has the protruding fastening portions 6454 disposed at the left and right ends fastened and fixed to the metal main body portion 10014a via intermediate members. for that reason,
It is structurally stiffer than the covering base member 21410, which is configured in a substantially bag-like shape that opens to the back side and is fastened and fixed to the metal main body 10014a mainly at the edge on the back side.

That is, the covering base member 21410 is fastened and fixed to the metal main body 10014a at a plurality of positions at the lower end and the left end on the back side, while the number of fastening positions at the upper part and the right edge is suppressed (or not, Since it is formed in a thin, substantially box-like (substantially bag-like) shape, it has a structure with a high degree of freedom of displacement (low resistance), especially at the right edge.

Furthermore, since the V-shaped design member 21450 is fastened and fixed to the front upper edge of the covering base member 21410, the vertical displacement of the covering base member 21410 can be suppressed by the V-shaped design member 21450. , the degree of freedom of displacement of the covering base member 21410 in the longitudinal direction (horizontal direction)
can be improved with As a result, the displacement of the covering base member 21410 can prevent the ball stored in the lower tray 50 from bouncing due to the vertical displacement of the lower tray 50, for example.

According to the present embodiment, with the V-shaped design member 21450 configured firmly as a base (reference),
Flexible covering base member 21410 (high degree of freedom of displacement) compared to V-shaped design member 21450
can be vibrated, the covering base member 214 can be vibrated by driving the vibration device 21500.
The right side of 10 can be intensively vibrated (strong vibration).

In addition, since the transmission of vibration to the V-shaped design member 21450 and the lower plate forming member 21420 can be suppressed, the operation device 10300 vibrates due to the vibration of the vibration device 21500, and the ball stored in the lower plate 50 vibrates. Vibration due to the vibration of the device 21500 can be avoided, and from this, it can be said that the right side portion of the covering base member 21410 can be intensively vibrated (strongly vibrated) by driving the vibration device 21500 .

The connecting plate-like portion 21458 is formed in an elongated plate-like shape along the longitudinal direction of the later-described shell-like overhanging portion 21541 . As a result, the connecting plate-like portion 214 extends along the longitudinal direction of the shell-like projecting portion 21541 .
58 and the shell-shaped protruding portion 21541 can be brought into contact with each other, and a large load generating area can be secured, so stress concentration during contact (pressing) can be avoided.

In the present embodiment, in the assembled state (see FIG. 208), the shell-like projecting portion 21541 is configured in a dimensional relationship to abut (press) the connecting plate-like portion 21458 (see FIG. 298).
Therefore, vibration can be received through at least the contact position between the shell-shaped projecting portion 21541 and the connecting plate-shaped portion 21458 .

This configuration is effective in a configuration in which the vibrating device 21500 is fastened and fixed to a plurality of members as in this embodiment. That is, compared to the case where the vibrating device 21500 is fastened and fixed to a single member, when fastening and fixing the vibrating device 21500 to a plurality of members, there is a possibility that deviations from the design dimensions of each member may accumulate, so the dimensions are increased. It is easy for the deviation to become large. Therefore, the arrangement of the vibration device 21500 becomes unstable, and it becomes difficult to stabilize the transmission strength of vibration.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in anticipation of the possibility of dimensional deviations, no matter how the dimensional deviations occur (regardless of the dimensions within the large and small limits), By designing the dimensions such that the projecting portion 21541 contacts the connecting plate portion 21458 (if the distance is short, the projecting portion 21541 contacts while being deformed so as to be crushed), the projecting portion 21541 is stably shaped like a shell. The projecting portion 21541 and the connecting plate-like portion 21458 can be brought into contact with each other. Therefore,
Vibration can be stably received.

In this embodiment, the direction of contact between the shell-shaped protruding portion 21541 and the connecting plate-shaped portion 21458 is set to the front-rear direction in the same manner as the screwing direction of the fastening screw. Therefore, even if the V-shaped design member 21450 is displaced downward by operating the operation device 10300 as described above, the V-shaped design member 21450 is displaced so as to slide relative to the shell-shaped projecting portion 21541. , and it is possible to avoid the transmission of the downward displacement. Therefore, vibrating device 21
500 can be suppressed from being pushed down when the operation device 10300 is operated.

In addition, in this embodiment, the place where the vibrating device 21500 is arranged is the covering base member 21
Since the portion 410 is flexible, it is easily broken in the event of a fraudulent act of breaking the outer shell of the pachinko machine A10 and penetrating inside (for example, penetrating a thin metal wire). That is, in the present embodiment, the vibrating device 21500 is arranged at a location that is likely to be selected as an intrusion route by a person who commits fraudulent acts.

Therefore, when the covering base member 21410 is broken, there is a possibility that the vibrating device 21500 will be destroyed or disconnected at the same time. By controlling so that an error signal is output as the audio lamp control device 113 detects this, it is possible to detect fraudulent activity at an early stage.

Also, instead of the vibration device 21500, a device that outputs an error signal may be provided. It can be used for performance. That is, since the vibrating device 21500 can be used both for vibrating effects and for detecting fraud (it can be configured as a multifunctional device), it is possible to reduce the installation space of the device.

290 is an exploded front perspective view of the vibration device 21500, and FIG.
500 is an exploded rear perspective view of FIG. As illustrated in Figures 290 and 291, the vibration device 2
1500 is formed of a vibration motor 21510 capable of generating vibration by controlling the eccentric weight 21512 to rotate, and a soft resin material (silicon resin, etc.).
A covering member 21520 that covers 1510 is formed of a harder material (for example, a resin material or a metal material) than the covering member 21520, and has a shape that can partially cover the covering member 21520 from the rear side. Formed covering cover member 21530 and covering member 21
A flat plate-like opposing plate member 2154 arranged to face the covering cover member 21530 with the 520 interposed therebetween.
0.

The covering cover member 21530 and the opposing plate member 21540 hold the vibration motor 21510 and the covering member 21520 so as to surround them from the front and back, and are fastened and fixed by fastening screws. Namely
There are a plurality of covering covers 21530 (two in this embodiment) through which the screw portions of the fastening screws can be inserted.
The opposing plate member 21540 includes a plurality of fastening portions 21542 into which fastening screws inserted through the insertion holes 21532 can be screwed. Hereinafter, the vibrating motor 21510 and the covering member 21520 to be held will be described first, and then the details of the covering cover member 21530 and the opposing plate member 21540 will be described.

292 is an exploded front perspective view of the vibration motor 21510 and the covering member 21520,
293 is an exploded rear perspective view of the vibration motor 21510 and the covering member 21520, and FIG. 294 is a front perspective view of the covering member 21520. FIG. In FIG. 294, covering member 21520
is viewed obliquely from above and forward.

The vibration motor 21510 includes a body portion 21511 whose rotation is controlled by energization of the shaft portion, an eccentric weight 21512 fixed to the shaft portion and having a center of gravity located at a position different from the shaft portion, and a lower surface of the body portion 21511. and an electric wiring 21513 (electrically connected to a terminal formed on the lower surface) extending downward from the .

The covering member 21520 includes a cylindrical body portion 21521 formed in a cylindrical shape with an inner shape slightly smaller than the outer shape of the body portion 21511 of the vibration motor 21510, and a ridge extending vertically along the back surface of the cylindrical body portion 21521. A pair of protrusions 21522 formed as
a plate-like protrusion 21523 protruding in the left-right direction along the lower surface of the tubular main body 21;
521, and an overhanging portion 21524 projecting downward from the lower surface of the device 521 in an oval shape when viewed from the bottom.

The protruding portion 21524 connects the body portion 21511 of the vibration motor 21510 and the electrical wiring 21513 .
It is formed in an oval shape of a size that encloses the connection position with the bottom view, and the top side is the electric wiring 21513
is recessed to accept the

That is, as shown in FIG. 294, the protruding portion 21524 extends vertically in a recessed portion 21524a that is recessed downward from the lower surface side of the tubular main body portion 21521 and in a region sandwiched between the recessed portion 21524a. A wiring through-hole 21524b is drilled, and a pair of spare holes 21524 are vertically drilled at a position opposite to the wiring through-hole 21524b across the recessed portion 21524a.
c.

With the above configuration, the electric wiring 21513 is guided to the wiring through-hole 21524b while being held in the recessed portion 21524a, and is guided in the opening direction (downward) of the wiring through-hole 21524b. That is, in this embodiment, the covering member 21520 has a function of preventing the electrical wiring 21513 from sagging due to its own weight, a function of bundling the electrical wiring 21513 , and a function of bundling the electrical wiring 21513 .
513 can be provided. As a result, the number of binding bands required can be reduced, and material costs and manufacturing man-hours can be reduced.

In addition, when the covering member 21520 is not assembled, a gap is generated between the covering cover 21530 and the opposing plate portion 21540.
It is possible to prevent forgetting to add 0. Therefore, forgetting to assemble the member for holding the electric wiring 21513 can be suppressed compared to the case where the binding band is prepared separately to hold the electric wiring 21513 .

Note that in this embodiment, the electrical wiring 21513 is connected to the input/output port 225 of the audio lamp controller 113 (see FIG. 4). That is, the vibration motor 21510 of the vibration device 21500
is configured as part of the other device 228 and is vibration-controlled by a control signal transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 .

The preliminary hole 21524c is formed at a position vertically corresponding to the connection position between the electrical wiring 21513 and the main body 21511 . That is, even if the electric wire 21513 is about to come off from the main body 21511, the electric wire 21513 can be pushed into the main body 21511 by inserting a thin rod through the spare hole 21524c and pushing the electric wire 21513. can. This can prevent the electrical wiring 21513 from coming off the main body 21511 .

In this embodiment, a vibrating device 21500 is arranged in a lower tray unit 21400 (see FIG. 287). Since the lower tray unit 21400 is detachable from the metal main body 10014a, if a worker who performs maintenance work accidentally removes the lower tray unit 21400 too far from the metal main body 10014a, the electrical wiring 21513 may be damaged. Excessive load is applied, and there is a risk of disconnection. Also, when the vibrating device 21500 vibrates, the electrical wiring 215
If an excessive load is applied to 13, there is also a risk of disconnection.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the projecting portion 21524 is formed so as to cover the connection position between the electrical wiring 21513 and the main body portion 21511, so that the electrical wiring 21513 and the main body portion 2
Excessive displacement of the connection position with 1511 can be prevented.

Furthermore, before the wiring through hole 21524b, the electric wiring 21513 having a length to be held in the recessed portion 21524a is secured, so that the electric wiring 21513 can be prevented from breaking for this length. You can (you can afford it). Also, electrical wiring 2
Even if a load is applied to 1513, the longitudinal direction of the electrical wiring 21513 held in the recessed portion 21524a (that is, the longitudinal direction of the projecting portion 21524) is not the connection direction between the electrical wiring 21513 and the main body portion 21511. Since the load is applied along the electrical wiring 21513
It is possible to avoid dropping out of 1511.

In addition, as described above, even if the electrical wiring 21513 falls out of the main body 21511, the electrical wiring 2151 can be easily removed by inserting a thin rod through the spare hole 21524c.
3 can be reconnected to body portion 21511 . Therefore, it is possible to improve the work efficiency of maintenance work including the step of removing the lower tray unit 21400 .

In addition, in the step of inserting (assembling) the vibration motor 21510 into the covering member 21520 , the electrical wiring 21513 is arranged on the covering member 21520 side with respect to the main body portion 21511 . Therefore, since the work of inserting the electric wiring 21513 into the wiring through-hole 21524b can be performed simultaneously with the work of inserting the vibration motor 21510 into the covering member 21520, the efficiency of the assembly work can be improved.

295 is a front view of the covering cover member 21530. FIG. In addition, in the description of FIG.
Reference is made to FIGS. 290 and 291 as appropriate. The covering cover member 21530 includes a body portion 21531 forming a frame whose front side and bottom side are open, the insertion hole 21532 described above, and the body portion 21532.
a receiving recess 21533 that is recessed in the front side of 1531 and receives the vibration motor 21510;
A plurality of projecting ridges 21534 extending in the front-rear direction, which are projections projecting inward from the left and right inner surfaces of the receiving recess 21533, and the insertion hole 21532 are drilled in the front-rear direction at the upper and lower positions, Covering base member 21410, lower plate forming member 21420 and V-shaped design member 2145
0 (see FIGS. 288 and 289).

The receiving recess 21533 includes a weight receiving recess 21533a for receiving the eccentric weight 21512, a main body receiving recess 21533b for receiving the main body 21511, and a weight receiving recess 21533a and the main body in such a manner that the rotation axis of the main body 21511 is arranged at the center position in the left-right direction. Receiving recess 2153
and a bearing receiving recess 21533c that connects 3b.

The main body receiving recess 21533b is recessed by an extra length on the right side with respect to the bearing receiving recess 21533c compared to the left side. Conversely, the protrusion 21534 protrudes longer on the right side than on the left side, so that the protruding tip of the protrusion 21534 is located in the bearing receiving recess 21.
533c are arranged at substantially symmetrical positions.

Thus, as a holding mode of the covering member 21520 , when the vibration motor 21510 is in a non-excited state (stopped state), the covering member 21520 is held by the projecting tip of the projection 21534 , while the vibration motor 21
In the excitation state (vibrating state) of 510, the coating member 2 is pushed by a deep recess formed on the right side of the body receiving recess 21533b (a recess formed between the vertically arranged ridges 21534).
1520 deformation (displacement, flow) can be supported. As a result, the covering cover member 2
1530 can be prevented from being overloaded, and the durability of the covering cover member 21530 can be improved.

Since the rib portion 21534 is formed along the front-rear direction, the displacement of the covering member 21520 that is supported in contact with the rib portion 21534 in the left and right direction is affected by engagement with and biting into the rib portion 21534. Therefore, it is likely to occur in the front, back, left and right (horizontal direction), and is suppressed in the vertical direction.

Therefore, even in a configuration in which the body portion 21511 is arranged at the upper end of the body portion 21511 such that the eccentric weight 21512 is arranged at the upper end of the body portion 21511, and the body portion 21511 tends to tilt about the lower end when vibration occurs, the vertical component of the vibration can be suppressed. , the displacement direction of the vibration motor 21510 can be corrected in the horizontal direction.

The projecting portion 21534 is formed in the shape of a plane plate having a vertical width half that of the left and right side portions in the left and right intermediate portions of the main body portion 21531, and the projecting length increases as it approaches the intermediate portion 21531a side (back side) (cover side). Since the covering member 215
20 can be supported from the left, right and rear sides.

In addition, the ridge portion 21534 has an intermediate lower surface 2153 that constitutes the lower surface of the intermediate portion 21531a.
On the lower side of 1b, there is provided a rear inclined portion 21534a that rises from the nearest projected streak portion 21534 toward the intermediate lower surface 21531b.

The distance between the rear inclined portion 21534a and the ridge portion 21534 directly above it narrows toward the rear side. Therefore, when the vibration motor 21510 is displaced toward the rear side in the excitation state of the vibration motor 21510 and the covering member 21520 is deformed, compared to the case where the interval between the upper and lower protrusions 21534 is not narrowed, the rear inclined portion The load (reaction force) applied to the portion of the covering member 21520 that enters between 21534a and the protrusion 21534 directly above it can be increased. This can prevent the covering member 21520 from being excessively displaced to the back side.

The protrusions 21534 are not arranged completely symmetrically, but are arranged with a partial vertical shift. As a result, compared to the case where the ridges 21534 are arranged at completely symmetrical positions, it is possible to easily avoid applying a load to the covering member 21520 from both left and right directions on the same horizontal plane. , the compressive load applied to the covering member 21520 can be reduced.

Note that the protrusions 21534 may be arranged completely symmetrically. In this case, it is preferable to select a material that is not brittle as the material of the covering member 21520 .

The formation of the lower half portion of the rear side wall portion of the body portion 21531 is omitted. Therefore, the covering member 21
As a holding mode of 520 , displacement of the covering member 21520 is restricted in the upper half of the body portion 21531 , while displacement of the covering member 21520 is allowed in the lower half of the body portion 21531 .

Therefore, when the covering member 21520 is displaced to the rear side due to the excitation of the vibration motor 21510, the upper half of the protrusion 21522 is restricted by the upper half of the main body 21531 and the lower half is allowed to displace. both proceed to the open area in the lower half of the body portion 21531 (
It can be deformed so as to flow) and work to improve the vibration performance of the vibrating device 21500, details of which will be described later.

The plate-like protrusion 21523 of the covering member 21520 is supported at its right side by the protrusion 21534 of the covering cover member 21530 from below. Also, the left side is open to the covering cover member 21530 and is supported by the support extending portion 21543 of the opposing plate member 21540 (see FIG. 2).
91). Thereby, in addition to being able to support the weight of the vibrating motor 21510 and the covering member 21520, it is possible to configure an open portion accessible from the outside on the lower side of the covering member 21520. FIG.

That is, with respect to the covering member 21520, the covering member 21530 covers the lower part from the right rear side, and the opposing plate member 21540 covers the lower part from the left front side. The lower left rear portion of the member 21520 can be opened as an opening. This open portion functions as a portion that ensures contact between the projecting portion De3 and the covering member 21520 .

The opposing plate member 21540 extends from the opening side of the covering cover member 21530 to the covering cover member 2 .
1530 is a plate-shaped member that is arranged to face 1530, and includes a shell-shaped protruding portion 21541 that protrudes toward the front side, the fastening portion 21542 described above, and a support extension that extends from the lower left end to the rear side. and a setting portion 21543 .

The shell-shaped overhanging portion 21541 is formed thin like the opposing plate member 21540, and a gap is formed between the overhanging tip portion and the covering member 21520, so that the shell-shaped overhanging portion 21541
Even if a load is applied in a direction (towards the back) that pushes against the covering member 21520 and the shell-shaped overhanging portion 21541 is deformed, transmission of a large load to the covering member 21520 can be avoided.

FIG. 296(a) is a top view of the lower tray unit 21400, and FIG.
96(a) is a cross-sectional view of the lower tray unit 21400 along line CCXCVIb-CCXCVIb, FIG. 297 is a rear view of the lower tray unit 21400, and FIG.
FIG. 11 is a cross-sectional view of the lower tray unit 21400 along line CCXCVIII-CCXCVIII in (a);

As shown in FIG. 296(b), the protrusion 21522 of the covering member 21520 and the bottom member 21D
e and the protruding portion De3 are in contact with each other in the front-rear direction. The streak portion 21522 is slightly deformed).

By applying a load from the projecting portion De3 to the ridge portion 21522, the vibrating device 2150
0 can be moved forward. As a result, it is possible to prevent the vibration motor 21510 and the covering member 21520 from unintentionally stopping at a position near the rear side.

FIG. 299(a) shows a lower tray unit 2140 schematically illustrating the lower tray unit 21400. FIG.
299(b) is a partial schematic side view of the lower tray unit 21400 viewed in the direction of the arrow CCXCIXb in FIG. 299(a), and FIG. FIG. 300(b) is a partial top view of the lower tray unit 21400 schematically illustrating the lower tray unit 214 when viewed in the direction of arrow CCCb in FIG. 300(a).
00 is a partial schematic side view.

299(a) and 299(b) show a state in which the vibrating device 21500 is arranged at the front side limit position of vibration displacement, similar to the non-excited state of the vibration motor 21510, and FIG.
0(a) and 300(b), the vibration motor 21510 is energized and the vibration device 2
A state in which 1500 is positioned at the back side limit position of vibration displacement is illustrated. That is, when the vibration motor 21510 is excited and the eccentric weight 21512 rotates and vibrates, the vibration device 21500
is repeatedly displaced between the state shown in FIG. 299 and the state shown in FIG. In the state shown in FIG. 300, the eccentric weight 21512 is in contact with the main body 21531 in the front-rear direction, and the vibration is also transmitted directly.

299 and 300, the mode of transmission of vibration of vibration device 21500 will be described. As described above, vibration device 21500 is intentionally fastened and fixed at a plurality of parts to members having different rigidity. The purpose of this is to effectively cause the vibration of the vibrating device 21500 to occur at a specific portion.

More specifically, if the member to which the entire vibrating device 21500 is fixed is too hard, the vibration will be suppressed too much. is fixed to the member on the hard side, and the vibrating device 215
00 is configured to vibrate the soft side member fixed to the other part. Thereby, the portion fixed to the other portion of the vibrating device 21500 can be sufficiently displaced.

That is, the insertion portion 21535 formed on the left side of the vibration device 21500 is the V-shaped design member 214.
50 (the hard side) and the shell-like projecting portion 21541 abuts against the connecting plate-like portion 21458, while the insertion portion 21535 formed on the right side of the vibration device 21500 is connected to the covering base member 21410 (the soft side). side).

Therefore, the vibrating device 21500 vibrates in such a manner that the insertion portion 21535 formed on the right side is displaced (rotationally displaced) with the insertion portion 21535 formed on the left side as a fixed reference (axis of vibration). By being transmitted to 21410, it is possible to vibrate the position near the fingers of the player who grips the operating handle 51. FIG.

When the vibrating device 21500 is displaced to the rear side due to the vibration of the vibrating device 21500, the protrusion 21522 of the covering member 21520 is pressed against the projecting portion De3 (see FIG. 300). As a result, the ridge portion 21522 receives a load directed toward the front side from the projecting portion De3. can be increased.

In addition, when the vibrating device 21500 is displaced in such a manner that it rotates backward about the left end as the vibrating device 21500 vibrates, this displacement causes the plate-like projection 21523 on the left side to be pressed against the left side surface of the bottom member 21De (see FIG. 300). (a)). As a result, the plate-like protrusion 21523 is attached to the bottom member 21De.
As a result, the vibrating device 21500 receives a load toward the right side from the left end portion, and the momentum of returning forward in the rotational direction about the left end portion can be increased.

When the vibration motor 21510 and the covering member 21520 are displaced to the back side, the volume of the covering member 21520 whose displacement is restricted by the intermediate portion 21531 of the covering cover member 21530 is allowed to flow below the intermediate lower surface 21531b. Therefore, by concentrating the resin material forming the covering member 21520 between the covering member 21520 and the overhanging portion De3, the covering member 21520 can be partially hardened, so that the reaction force received from the overhanging portion De3 can be increased. can be done. Since the bottom member 21De having the projecting portion De3 is not expected to be displaced in the front-rear direction, it is difficult to imagine a situation in which the cover member 21520 is deformed due to the displacement of the projecting portion De3.

As a result, the load generated between the vibrating device 21500 and the projecting portion De3 is reduced to the vibrating motor 2
It can be increased to a limited extent in the 1510 excitation state. In this case, when the operation device 10300 is operated, or when the vibration device 10366 of the operation device 10300 (see FIG. 216)
, when the vibration device 21500 is de-excited, the vibration device 215
00 and the projecting portion De3, it is possible to suppress the transmission of vibration to the vibrating device 21500 side. By increasing the load generated between the part De3 and the vibrating device 2
The effect of assisting the vibration of 1500 can be increased.

Therefore, in the non-excited state of the vibrating device 21500, the load transmitted to the vibrating device 21500 via the covering member 21520 is sufficiently suppressed (the covering member 215
20), on the other hand, when the vibrator 21500 is excited, compressive deformation (strain) occurs in the ridges 21522, thereby reducing the load transmitted to the vibrator 21500 via the covering member 21520. (reaction force) can be increased.

On the other hand, since the ridge portion 21522 is a ridge made of a flexible resin material, the ridge portion 2
It is possible to suppress displacement of the projecting portion De3 due to the pressing of the 1522 . Therefore, it is possible to suppress the vibration from being transmitted to the projecting portion De3, so that the operation device 10300 can be prevented from vibrating due to the vibration of the vibrating device 21500. FIG.

When the vibrating device 21500 is displaced to the rear side due to the vibration of the vibrating device 21500 and then displaced to return to the front side, the shell-like projecting portion 21541 is pressed against the connecting plate-like portion 21458 . As a result, the shell-shaped projecting portion 21541 receives a load from the connecting plate-shaped portion 21458 directed toward the rear surface side, so that the vibrating device 21500 is placed on the rear surface as compared with the case where the shell-shaped projecting portion 21541 is not formed. You can increase the momentum to re-return to the side.

As described above, in this embodiment, since the displacement of the vibrating device 21500 in both the forward and backward directions is supported, the vibrating device 21500 is placed in an excited state until the vibration becomes strong enough to be felt by the player. period can be shortened.

Note that in the above description, when the operation device 10300 is operated and when the operation device 10300 is
Although the state in which the vibrating device 21500 is de-excited during the vibrating performance of the vibrating device 10366 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, vibrator 21500
During the vibration of the operation device 10300 may be operated.

In this case, although the load generated between the covering member 21520 and the overhanging portion De3 increases, the displacement direction (vertical direction) of the overhanging portion De3 accompanying the operation of the operation device 10300,
Since the direction of the load generated between the covering member 21520 and the projecting portion De3 intersects,
The interaction between the load generated by the vibration device 21500 and the load applied to the operation device 10300 can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a situation (adverse effect) in which the vibrating device 21500 and the operating device 10300 fail due to the simultaneous load from the vibrating device 21500 and the operating device 10300 .

FIG. 301 is a partial top schematic view of the lower tray unit 21400 schematically illustrating the lower tray unit 21400. FIG. In FIG. 301, the main body 21511 of the vibration motor 21510 is restricted to the right end of the bearing receiving recess 21533c of the covering cover member 21530, that is, the vibration motor 21510 is placed at the right limit position of the displaceable region. illustrated.

In this embodiment, since the vibration motor 21510 is held by the covering member 21530 via the covering member 21520, the deformation of the covering member 21520 causes vibration of the vibration motor 21510.
1510 is configured to be displaceable with respect to covering cover 21530 . Furthermore, as described above, the vibration device 21500 displaces (rotates) the insertion portion 21535 formed on the right side with the left insertion portion 21535 (see FIG. 290) as a reference (vibration axis). Force is applied to the right.

That is, when the vibration of the vibrating device 21500 becomes intense, the centrifugal force generated in the vibrating device 21500 displaces the vibrating motor 21510 rightward (see FIG. 301). covering cover 215
30 is curved to the left at the rear end (see FIG. 295). The resistance received from the covering cover 21530 increases when displacing to the rear side. Thereby, the displacement of the vibration motor 21510 in the front-rear direction can be suppressed.

Therefore, according to the present embodiment, even when the vibration of the vibration motor 21510 becomes excessive, the vibration is suppressed by displacing the vibration motor 21510 in a direction intersecting the main vibration direction (front-rear direction). Since the action is generated, vibration can be suppressed without controlling the vibration motor 21510 (for example, before the vibration motor 21510 is stopped by control). As a result, problems due to excessive vibration of the vibration motor 21510 can be suppressed.

In addition, by configuring the vibration motor 21510 to be able to suppress the vibration due to the displacement of the vibration motor 21510 due to the excessive vibration of the vibration motor 21510, it is possible to eliminate the need to arrange a detection sensor for detecting the displacement due to the excessive vibration of the vibration motor 21510. . As a result, the product cost of the lower tray unit 21400 in this embodiment can be reduced, and the space left by omitting the arrangement of the detection sensor can be used for wires to pass through or heat generated by the vibration motor 21510 can be dissipated. It can be effectively used as a space for

Next, the twenty-second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 302 to 381. FIG. In the first embodiment, the game machine frame has been mainly described, but in the twenty-second embodiment, the operation unit A300 that is visually recognized through the window portion 14c will be described.

FIG. 302 is a front view of the game board A13 of the pachinko machine A10 in the twenty-second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 302, the game board A13 is a base plate A cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front.
60 includes a large number of nails (not shown) for ball guide and a windmill (not shown), as well as rails 61, 62,
General winning opening 63, first winning opening 64, second winning opening 640, variable winning device 65, through gate 67, variable display device unit A80, etc. fixed to

The base plate A60 is made of a light-transmissive resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate A60 from the front side thereof. General prize gate 6
3. The first prize winning port 64, the second prize winning port 640, and the variable display device unit A80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate A60 by router processing, and fixed by tapping screws or the like from the front side of the game board A13. It is

The central part of the front of the game board A13 is the inner frame 1 through the window 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14.
2 can be viewed from the front side. Mainly referring to FIG. 302, the game board A13
will be described.

In front of the game board A13, there is an outer rail 6 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape.
2 is erected, and an arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed of a strip-shaped metal plate like the outer rail 62 is erected on the inner side of the outer rail 62 . The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the front outer periphery of the game board A13, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board A13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area is formed in which a game is played by the behavior of . The game area is the front of the game board A13 and has two rails 61 and 6
2 and a resin-made outer edge member A73 connecting between the rails (the area in which the prize-winning opening etc. are arranged and the shot ball flows down).

In this embodiment, a metal plate member 75 (see FIG. 308) made of metal is attached to the outer edge member A73.
By incorporating, the combined strength (rigidity) of the game board A13 and the outer edge member A73 is strengthened, the details of which will be described later.

The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning holes 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. In this embodiment, the purpose of arranging the general prize winning openings 63 is different for each arrangement. This will be explained below.

In this embodiment, in the normal game, the route passing the left side of the third symbol display device 81 is the first
The ball is shot with the aim of making the ball enter the prize winning port 64, but the first prize winning port 64
A part of the balls flowing down the area on the left side of the first winning opening 64 without reaching the , wins the general winning opening 63 arranged on the left side of the game area. That is, the general prize winning opening 63 arranged on the left side of the game area is arranged with the aim of influencing the game during the normal game. For example, the higher the possibility of winning the general winning hole 63, the more likely it is that a small number of balls will win the first winning hole 64 during normal times.

On the other hand, in a game during time reduction or probability change, the ball is shot with the aim of winning the ball to the second winning port 640 on the route passing through the right side of the third symbol display device 81, but the second A part of the balls flowing down the area on the right side of the second winning opening 640 without reaching the winning opening 640 wins the general winning opening 63 arranged on the right side of the game area. That is, the general winning opening 63 arranged on the right side of the game area is arranged with the aim of influencing the game during probability variation or time reduction. For example, the higher the possibility of winning to the general winning hole 63, the more it is possible to suppress the loss of balls during probability variation and time reduction.

By suppressing the loss of the balls, the next big win is obtained before the balls held on the upper tray 17 run out, even if the game is not played in a shooting mode in which the shooting of the balls is stopped with good timing during the probability change (even if the balls are continuously hit). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the stress (feeling of fatigue) that the player receives while playing the game. Therefore, the number of rotations to the next big hit frequently increases during the probability variation (for example, 10
0 rotation or more), the player can comfortably play the game.

In the game in the special game state, the ball is shot with the aim of winning the ball into the specific winning hole 65a on the route passing through the right side of the third symbol display device 81, but the second winning hole 640
part of the ball flowing down the area on the right side of , flows down to the general winning opening 63 side (right side) instead of the specific winning opening 65a side (left side), and enters the general winning opening 63a. Since the prize balls accompanying the winning to the general prize winning port 63 are paid out as different prize balls from the prize balls to the specific winning port 65a, the player can, before the end of the special game state, In addition to the prize balls based on the number of winning prizes to the specific prize winning port 65a, the prize balls based on the number of winning prizes to the general prize winning port 63 can be obtained.

That is, the general winning hole 63 arranged on the right side of the game area is arranged with the aim of increasing the number of paid-out prize balls that the player can obtain in the special game state. Here, as the number of winnings to the general winning opening 63 increases, the time efficiency of winning to the specific winning opening 65a decreases, so the elapsed time until the special game state ends tends to become longer. In other words, the number of rounds in the special game state and the number of counts (regular number of prizes won for each round) in the special game state are the same in terms of control, depending on the location and number of the general winning ports 63 and the design of the upstream channel. Also, the time (long or short) required until the end of the special game state and the number of prize balls paid out to the player (more or less) can be varied.

In the special game state, the display mode when displaying the numbers corresponding to the number of paid-out prize balls on the third symbol display device 81 is not limited at all. For example, the number of prize balls to be paid out based on winning to the specific winning opening 65a and the number of winning balls to be paid out based on winning to the general winning opening 63 may be displayed separately, or the number of winning balls to be paid out to the specific winning opening 65a may be displayed separately. The total number of prize balls and the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning to the general prize winning opening 63 may be displayed, or a combination thereof may be displayed.

As mentioned above, during variable probability and short time, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than during normal,
In addition, since the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is short,
is more likely to be displayed, and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Furthermore, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is opened is also longer during the variable probability and the shorter working hours than during the normal time. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to enter the second winning hole 640 during the variable probability and the shorter working hours compared to the normal time.

Here, when the ball enters the first prize winning port 64 and when the ball enters the second prize winning port 640, the probability of winning the jackpot is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state. However, the probability of winning a 15R probability variable jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the event of a jackpot is higher when the ball enters the second winning port 640 than when the ball enters the first winning port 64. is set. On the other hand, the first prize winning port 64 does not have an electric accessory like the second prize winning port 640, and the ball can always win a prize.

Therefore, during normal operation, the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is often closed, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640.
4, shoot the ball so that it passes through the left side of the variable display unit A80 (so-called "left shot"), and by winning the first prize hole 64, get a lot of chances of winning the jackpot lottery, It is advantageous for the player to aim for a big win.

On the other hand, during the probability variation and the time reduction, by passing the ball through the through gate 67, the second winning opening 64
The electric accessory 640a associated with 0 is likely to be in an open state, and the second winning opening 640 is likely to win. (so-called "right-handed"), let it pass through the through gate 67, and the electric accessory 640a
is in an open state, and it is advantageous for the player to aim for a 15R probability variable jackpot by winning a prize in the second prize winning port 640.例文帳に追加

In the pachinko machine A10 according to the present embodiment, the configuration of the game board A13 is left-right asymmetrical, and it is required that the balls are hit to the left and right depending on the game state, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the configuration of the game board A13 may be bilaterally symmetrical (see FIG. 302).
. In this case, it is possible to aim for the first winning opening 64 by "right-handed hitting" or to aim for the second winning opening 640 by "left-handed hitting".
can also be aimed at. Therefore, depending on the game state (whether the game is variable, time-saving, or normal), the player changes the way the ball is shot between ``left-handed'' and ``right-handed''. can be made unnecessary. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the annoyance of changing the way the ball is hit.

In this embodiment, the input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the other device 228, the frame button 22, etc. (see FIG. 4). Other devices 228 include a drive motor AMT1, a drive motor AM
T2 and a drive motor for raising and lowering the production unit A710 are included.

FIG. 303 shows a pachinko machine A showing a state in which the front frame 14 is opened (deployed) with respect to the inner frame 12.
304 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine A10 with the front frame 14 removed. Note that FIG. 304 shows a state in which the game board A13 is separated from the inner frame 12, and in FIGS. 303 and 304, the reference numerals for the internal configuration of the game board A13 are omitted for convenience.

Next, referring to FIGS. 305 to 323, the structures of the game board A13 and the action unit A300 will be described. 305 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board A13, the center frame A86, the lottery unit A600 and the operation unit A300, and FIG.
13, an exploded rear perspective view of the center frame A86, the lottery unit A600, and the operation unit A300. 305 and 306, a part of the right side of the game board A13 is enlarged. 305 and 306, reference will be made to FIG. 302 as appropriate.

The center frame A86 is an annular member formed of a light-transmitting resin material, fitted from the front side into the through hole 13a drilled in the game board A13, and fastened and fixed in the vicinity of the peripheral edge.
A covering portion 86h that covers the game board A13, and a covering portion 86h that allows the balls to be distributed on the left side.
A distribution extension portion 86a extending from the upper end toward the front side, a left inclined portion 86b extending from the covering portion 86h toward the front side in a shape inclined downward from the upper end toward the left, and A right sloping portion 86c extending from the covering portion 86h to the front side in a shape sloping downward to the right, and the right sloping portion 8
A right flow passage forming wall portion 86d extending from the covering portion 86h to the front side in a manner of extending downward from a position facing the return rubber 69 connected to the lower end portion of the rubber member 6c, and the right flow passage forming wall portion 86d. Wall portion 86d
A plurality of lateral ribs 86e protruding toward the flow path (right side) as ribs spanning the front-to-rear width, and a right flow path forming wall 86d in a positional relationship alternating with the lateral ribs 86e. and a plurality of front projections 86f projecting from the covering portion 86h to the flow channel side (front side) as projections spanning the flow channel width in the region between the outer edge member A73 and the right flow channel forming wall portion 86d. It mainly includes a separation wall portion 86g extending downward from the lower end portion and configured to be able to separate the lower right corner portion of the through hole 13a from other portions.

FIG. 307(a) is an enlarged front view of the game board A13 in the range A5a of FIG. 302,
FIG. 307(b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the game board A13 taken along line CCCVIIb-CCCVIIb in FIG. 307(a).

When the player strongly rotates the operation handle 51 to the right to play a right-handed game, the ball flows down between the right flow passage forming wall portion 86d and the outer edge member A73. As shown in FIG. 307(a), the space between the right flow passage forming wall portion 86d and the outer edge member A73 is the space that allows the ball to flow down (the diameter of the ball is 11 m).
m, the interval is set to be about 16 mm, which is a length with a slight gap), so the ball flows down while contacting the right flow passage forming wall portion 86d or the outer edge member A73. Become.

More specifically, the ball that has reached the return rubber 69 is bounced back to the left and right central sides of the game area by the reaction force from the return rubber 69, and collides with the right flow path forming wall portion 86d. Right channel forming wall portion 86
Since the wall d is formed as an inclined wall that slopes downward toward the right side, the ball that flows down under its own weight tries to roll down the right flow path forming wall portion 86d.

In the process of flowing down, the ball rides on the horizontal rib portion 86e. In this embodiment, the horizontal rib portion 8
6e is designed to have a protruding length of about 2 mm (a length less than 20% of the diameter of the sphere) and an arrangement interval of 16 mm (a length similar to the width of the flow path), so that the spheres flowing down are decelerated, It is possible to achieve a good balance between preventing the occurrence of ball clogging.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the front rib portion 86f
is formed with the same projecting length (2 mm) as the horizontal rib portion 86e. As a result, it is possible to make it easier to prevent ball clogging while improving the deceleration effect by making the formation interval of the ridges half of the width of the flow path.

Normally, when the pachinko machine A10 is installed in a game parlor, it is slightly (1
Weak degree) is installed lying down. Therefore, the covering portion 86h is arranged as an inclined wall that slopes downward toward the front side, and the ball that flows down under its own weight tries to roll down the covering portion 86h. Since it is configured in this way, the glass unit 16 side (front side)
As compared with the case where the projecting portion is formed toward the flow path from the cover portion 86h, it is possible to favorably cause the ball to collide with the front projecting portion 86f projecting from the covering portion 86h. In addition, in FIG. 307(b), the inclination angle of the game board A13 is shown to be larger than usual (about 5 degrees) so that the inclination can be easily grasped.

The separation wall portion 86g is a wall portion arranged to face the lottery unit A600, and the through hole 13a.
has a role of blocking and separating the area in which the lottery unit A600 is arranged. The assembly of the lottery unit A600 to the game board A13 will be described below.

In the area where the lottery unit A600 is arranged, the through hole 13a of the game board A13 has
A small recess 13b projecting rightward from a substantially circular portion for receiving the center frame A86, and a large recess 13c projecting rightward and downward below the small recess 13b are formed. In this way, the small recessed portion 13b and the large recessed portion 13c as the arrangement areas of the lottery unit A600 are formed into the through holes 1
By forming the center frame A86 of 3a as a recessed portion connected to the open portion for receiving, compared to the case of forming a plurality of independent through holes (when occupying the area required as the width of the portion forming the boundary) A wide area that can be used as an arrangement area for the center frame A86 and the lottery unit A600 can be secured. Details of the lottery unit A600 will be described later.

As shown in FIGS. 305 and 306, the operation unit A300 has a box-like rear surface whose front side is open from a bottom wall portion A311 and an outer wall portion A312 erected from the outer edge of the bottom wall portion A311. It has a case A310.

A rectangular opening A311a is formed in the center of the bottom wall portion A311 of the rear case A310, so that the rear case A310 is formed in a rectangular frame shape when viewed from the front. The opening A311a is the third symbol display device 81
(ie, the display area of the third pattern display device 81 can be divided in a front view).

The operation unit A300 includes a plurality of first operation units A400 arranged in the inner space of the rear case A310 in such a manner that movable devices having substantially the same configuration cover the upper peripheral edge of the inner space, and the first operation units A400. and the second operation unit A700 arranged on the lower side where the arrangement of .

Specifically, the first operation unit A400 is positioned above and on the left and right sides of the opening A311a, and the second operation unit A700 is positioned below the opening A311a. are placed. 305 and 3
06, the first operation unit A400 and the second operation unit A700 are mounted on the rear case A31.
0 is shown.

The rear case A310 extends as a plane plate along the back of the game board A13 (for example, arranged in parallel) at the front end of the outer wall A312, and faces the game board A13 in the assembled state (see FIG. 304). A supporting plate portion A313 is provided for supporting.

The support plate portion A313 is a columnar portion protruding from the back side of the game board A13 toward the back side, and is protruded in a shape capable of positioning the fastening convex portion 13d having a female screw portion formed in the center. A positioning convex portion A313a is provided, and the approximate center position of the positioning convex portion A313a (fastening convex portion 13d
) is provided with an insertion hole A313b having a size through which a fastening screw to be screwed into the fastening protrusion 13d can be inserted.

That is, the game board A13 and the operation unit A300 can be integrally fixed by positioning the fastening projection 13d by the positioning projection A313a and screwing the fastening screw into the fastening projection 13d. It is possible to improve the rigidity of A13 and the operation unit A300 as a whole.

In addition, the shape of the positioning protrusion A313a is not limited at all, and various aspects are exemplified. For example, a projection having an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer shape (circular in this embodiment) of the fastening projection 13d may be formed along an annular shape.
A convex portion along an oval shape along the direction in which 313 is formed may also be used. Further, when the fastening protrusion 13d is formed in a rectangular columnar shape, it is naturally assumed that the shape of the positioning protrusion A313a is also formed along the rectangular shape correspondingly.

As shown in FIGS. 305 and 306, in this embodiment, more support plate portions A313 are provided on the left side and upper side of the rear case A310, and fewer support plate portions A313 are formed on the right side and lower side of the rear case A310. This is the result of designing the game board A13 and the operation unit A300 in consideration of the balance between the improvement in rigidity as a whole and the space efficiency.

That is, when the game board A13 is made of a light-transmitting resin material as in the present embodiment, the movable member disposed on the back side of the game board A13 can be visually recognized through the game board A13. The entire back side of the game board A13 becomes effective as an area for presentation to be arranged. On the other hand, at the location where the support plate portion A313 is formed, the inner space of the rear case A310 is eroded inwardly by the area of the support plate portion A313 when viewed from the front.
The area in which the movable member can be arranged is narrowed. Therefore, even if the support plate portion A313 is omitted, if the problem of strength can be maintained while being resolved, it is said that by omitting the support plate portion A313, it is possible to avoid the limitation of the arrangement range of the movable member. That is.

In this embodiment, many support plate portions A313 are arranged on the left side and the upper side of the rear case A310, which is related to the range of the game area or the like where the player can visually recognize the shot ball. That is, the support plate portion A313 is formed at a location other than the range where the shot ball is visually recognized.

More specifically, in this embodiment, the ball fired from the shooting device 112a (Fig. 304) passes between the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, passes through the return ball prevention member 68, and enters the game area. It is configured to be introduced and thereafter flow down the game area. In a pinball game, the point where the most attention is considered to be the point where the ball passes, and the other outer area (for example, the area on the opposite side of the third pattern display device 81 across the outer rail 62 or the inner rail 61) ) is usually low in attention.

Therefore, the lower left and upper left with reference to the left convex arc formed by the outer rail 62 and the upper left and upper right with reference to the upward convex arc are the ranges that the sphere cannot reach. It is conceivable that the player's attention to .

In addition, in this embodiment, the outer edge member A73 and the surfaces of the lower left and upper left parts of the outer rail 62 facing the outer rail 62 are formed in a shape along the outer rail 62 and arranged on the front side of the game board A13. The block-shaped member 74 is made of a light-impermeable resin material.
The back side of the game board A13 cannot be visually recognized from the front side of the game board A13 through the outer edge member A73 and the block-shaped member 74. - 特許庁

In the present embodiment, the support plate portion A313 is preferentially arranged at the location where the attention force is low or the location that is invisible. Actually, even in the left side and the upper side where many support plate portions A313 are formed, the support plate portions A313 are formed near the corners of the rear case A310, avoiding the central portion as the projecting end portion of the outer rail 62. be done.

In other words, by selecting the location where the space is eroded by forming the support plate portion A313 from locations with low visibility (low performance ability), the operation unit A3
00 and the game board A13 as a whole, it is possible to secure a wide area within the field of vision of the player who pays attention to the ball.

From this point of view, since the pachinko machine has a common configuration in which the ball fired by the ball firing unit 112a rolls along the outer rail 62 and is introduced into the game area, the range where the ball does not flow down is the lower left and the upper left. It is easy to seek in the upper part and upper right part. On the other hand, the return rubber 6 as a part that can temporarily absorb the kinetic energy of the ball and adjust the subsequent flow down mode
Downstream of 9, it is difficult to identify a common area where the sphere does not flow down.

That is, on the downstream side of the return rubber 69, not only the relationship with the member forming the outer edge of the game area, but also the structure and state of the lottery unit A600 and the variable prize winning device 65 change the flow path of the ball. , it becomes impossible to determine the arrangement location of the support plate portion A313 until the specifications of the game board A13 side are determined.

Compared to the configuration of the game board A13 related to the ball putting performance of the pachinko machine A10, the operation unit A
300 can be freely designed, the design of the action unit A300 usually progresses earlier than the design of the game board A13.
0's internal configuration can be elaborated. If the specification change (configuration change) of the game board A13 occurs at the end of the development schedule, and the position of the support plate part A313 is changed accordingly, not only the back case A310 but also the internal space of the operation unit A300 will be changed. This will lead to design changes of other devices installed in the system, and the cost of the design change will increase.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the support plate portion A is positioned downstream of the return rubber 69 .
The formation of 313 is omitted. As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the arrangement of the support plate portion A313 is changed due to the specification change (configuration change) of the game board A13.

In addition, in the area downstream of the return rubber 69, the inner space of the rear case A310 is prevented from being eroded by the support plate portion A313, and a sufficient space for disposing the first operation unit A400 for presentation is secured. and the path along which the sphere flows and the first operation unit A
Since the range in which 400 is arranged can be overlapped in the front and back, the first action unit A400 can naturally enter the field of view of the player who pays attention to the ball.

Further, in the present embodiment, the support plate portion A313 formed behind the outer edge member A73 is
It is formed on the inner side (left side) of the right outermost end of the outer wall portion A312. On the other hand, the support plate portion A313 formed on the left side of the rear case A310 is formed outside (left side) of the left outermost shortest portion of the outer wall portion A312. That is, the formation mode of the support plate portion A313 (formation direction with respect to the outer wall portion A312) is left-right asymmetric.

As a result, the distance between the outermost right end of the outer wall A312 and the right end of the game board A13 can be made shorter than the distance between the outermost left end of the outer wall A312 and the left end of the game board A13. Therefore, the right end of the internal space of the rear case A310 can be moved to the right end of the game board A13.

The outer wall portion A312 on the right side has no surface facing the game board A13 except for the support plate portion A313, and the edge on the front side comes into contact with the back surface of the game board A13. In other words, the right outer wall A312 abuts the game board A13 in line contact.

Approximately the lower half of the right outer wall A312 is provided with a notch A312a that is notched (formed as a notch) toward the rear side. This cutout portion A312a is the lottery unit A60.
0 below the upper edge, and in the assembled state (see FIG. 304),
A gap is formed between the game board A13.

By forming the cutout portion A312a in this manner, the following effects can be obtained. For example, the lottery unit A
600 and the wiring connected to the variable prize winning device 65 can function as a wiring passage through which the wiring passes outside the rear case A310. This makes it possible to reduce the possibility that the wiring will interfere with the side of the first operation unit A400 or the second operation unit A700 compared to the case where the wiring is routed vertically.

In addition, the gap formed by the notch A312a can be used as an arrangement space for the configuration required for the lottery unit A600 and the variable winning device 65. FIG. The configuration required for the lottery unit A600 and the variable prize winning device 65 includes, for example, a solenoid that generates a driving force, a flow path through which the ball flows, a substrate that accompanies the lighting effect, a detection sensor that detects the ball, Other structures and the like are exemplified. In this embodiment, the second winning opening 6 of the lottery unit A600
A discharge path ER through which balls that have won 40 are discharged passes through a gap between the notch A312a and the game board A13 (see FIG. 317).

Further, by arranging a light emitting means such as an LED near the notch A312a, the light emitted from the light emitting means can be made easier for the player to visually recognize as light with a blurred outline. In other words, compared to the case where the entire circumference of the back case A310 is connected to the game board A13 (the boundary of the light emitted from the back side of the game board A13 is formed along the shape of the back case A310). Thus, the boundary of the light seen through the game board A13 can be obscured. As a result, it is possible to avoid the boundary of the light visually recognized through the game board A13 from depending on the shape of the rear case A310, and to improve the degree of freedom of the lighting performance.

In addition, the formation length (vertical direction length) of notch part A312a is not limited at all. For example, the cutout portion A31 extends over the entire area (vertical width) between the upper and lower support plate portions A313.
2a may be formed.

As described above, in this embodiment, the game board A13 is mounted on the right side of the rear case A310.
Since the fastening and fixing with are omitted, in considering the rigidity of the right side of the game board A13,
We cannot rely on the stiffness of the motion unit A300.

As a countermeasure against this, in this embodiment, a metal plate-like member 75 made of metal is disposed on the outer edge portion 73 at a position corresponding to the right end portion of the game board A13. The metal plate member 75 will be described below.

308 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board A13, the outer edge member A73 and the metal plate member 75, and FIG. 309 is an exploded rear perspective view of the game board A13, the outer edge member A73 and the metal plate member 75. FIG. In FIGS. 308 and 309, the game board A13 is shown alone for easy understanding, and other members arranged on the game board A13 are omitted.

The outer edge member A73 is formed of a resin material, and includes an arcuate wall portion 73a forming an upper portion and having an arcuate inner surface, and a thin wall extending downward from a lower end portion of the arcuate wall portion 73a. and an inclined wall portion 73c having an upper surface inclined downward from the lower end of the vertical wall portion 73b toward the left. In this way, by configuring the outer edge member A73 with a single member that covers substantially the entire area in the vertical direction, the outer edge member A73 can be made more compact than the case where the outer edge member A73 is formed from a plurality of vertically divided members. It is possible to reduce the man-hours for assembling to the game board A13.

The vertical wall portion 73b has a plurality of plate-like projecting portions 73b1 projecting along the right surface portion toward the back side.
A plurality of bent portions 73b2 formed by bending the front side edge portion of the right side portion into a U-shape when viewed in the vertical direction, and the joint portion between the arc wall portion 73a and the inclined wall portion 73c are cylindrically formed to the rear side. A cylindrical projecting portion 73b3 that protrudes, and a fastening portion 73b4 that is provided along with the cylindrical projecting portion 73b3 and into which a fastening screw can be screwed are provided.

The bent portion 73b2 is arranged at an intermediate position between the plate-like projecting portions 73b1. As a result, in relation to the metal plate-like member 75, which will be described later, the holding force of the metal plate-like member 75 with respect to the vertical wall portion 73b is achieved while suppressing the number of seam penetration portions 75c formed in the metal plate-like member 75. can be improved.

In other words, compared to the case where only the three plate-like protrusions 73b1 resist bending of the metal plate-like member 75, the plate-like protrusions 73b1 and the bent portions 73b2 allow the metal plate-like member 75 to be bent. Since resistance to bending can be generated, the load generated at one location can be reduced. In addition, since the plate-like projecting portions 73b1 and the bent portions 73b2 are arranged at regular intervals, the load generated when the metal plate-like member 75 is bent can be evenly distributed.
It is possible to prevent an excessive load from occurring in any one place.

The metal plate-like member 75 has a body plate portion 75a that is folded back a plurality of times in the lateral direction and is formed without creases in the longitudinal direction, and the back side edge of the body plate portion 75a is bent leftward. A plurality of joint penetrating portions 75c penetrating in the front-rear direction at the joint portion between the bent portion 75b and the main body plate portion 75a and the bent portion 75b, and a plurality of joint penetrating portions 75c penetrating in the longitudinal direction at the upper and lower ends of the bent portion 75b. and an insertion hole 75e through which a fastening screw can be inserted through a plate portion formed side by side with the plate portion formed with the through hole 75d and stepped toward the front side.

The metal plate-like member 75 generates a particularly strong resistance to bending in the longitudinal direction because the bent portion 75b is formed in the vertical direction in addition to the way in which the body plate portion 75a is folded. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently reinforce the vertical wall portion 73b by arranging it integrally with the vertical wall portion 73b, which tends to bend in the longitudinal direction.

The joint penetrating portion 75c is formed to have a size that allows the plate-like projecting portion 73b1 of the vertical wall portion 73b to be inserted therethrough. In this embodiment, the vertical wall portion 73b and the metal plate-like member 75 are formed so as to be integrated by inserting the plate-like projecting portion 73b1 into the joint penetrating portion 75c.

When the metal plate-like member 75 is assembled integrally with the vertical wall portion 73b, the front side edge of the main body plate portion 75a is sandwiched between the bent portion 73b2 and the outer surface of the vertical wall portion 73b, forming a cylindrical projection. Part 73b3
is inserted through the through hole 75d. In this manner, the metal plate member 75 and the vertical wall portion 73b are positioned relative to each other at a plurality of locations in the vertical direction. In this state, the outer edge member A73 and the metal plate member 75 can be fastened and fixed by screwing the fastening screw inserted through the insertion hole 75e into the fastening portion 73b4.

Since the metal plate-like member 75 is arranged over the vertical wall portion 73b from the above configuration, the vertical wall portion 73b can be entirely reinforced. Here, the plate-like projecting portion 73b1 and the columnar projecting portion 73b3 of the vertical wall portion 73b penetrate the metal plate-like member 75 and extend to the back side, and the tip thereof engages the game board A13. The engagement between the metal plate member 75 and the game board A13 will be described below.

The game board A13 has a plurality of recessed portions 13e that are recessed to receive the plate-like projecting portions 73b1 on the right side edge of the front surface, and the columnar projecting portions 73b3 are received on the upper and lower sides of the recessed portions 13e. and a plurality of positioning holes 13f penetratingly formed as elongated holes that can be elongated vertically.

When the outer edge member A73 and the metal plate-like member 75 are assembled to the game board A13 in an integrated state, the plate-like projecting portion 73b1 is received in the concave portion 13e, and the circular projecting portion 73b3 is received in the positioning hole 13f. and positioned. That is, the plate-like projecting portion 73b1 and the circular projecting portion 7
3b3 is used not only for positioning with the metal plate member 75 but also for positioning with the game board A13. As a result, it is possible to reduce the number of pieces to be positioned.

In this embodiment, as described above, the metal plate member 75 is assembled so as to suppress the bending of the vertical wall portion 73b. The portion 73b can be formed so thin as to be easily curved in the left-right direction by itself.

Furthermore, the rigidity of the metal plate member 75 can suppress the deformation of the game board A13 (improve the rigidity). The shape of A13 can be maintained. Thereby, as shown in FIG. 309, the formation of the fastening protrusion 13d can be omitted at the right end position of the game board A13.

Therefore, a small recess 1 is located at a position short of the right end of the game board A13 (a position extremely close to the right end).
3b or the right edge of the large recess 13c can be arranged. As a result, the right limit positions of the through-hole 13a, the small concave portion 13b and the large concave portion 13c with respect to the game board A13 can be moved further to the right, and the shape of the opening can be enlarged.

In this case, when the game area is formed using the game board A13 having the same vertical width and horizontal width and the center frame A86 having the same opening size, the right end of the game area with respect to the game board A13 is positioned to the right. Since it can be moved to the left side, the area on the left side of the center frame A86 can be expanded. In other words, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in designing the path along which the game ball flows (the degree of freedom in designing the position of the nail, the ball guide channel, the position of the ball passage opening, etc.).

Furthermore, a distribution device (not shown) in which balls flow down during a right-handed game (for example, a device that switches the path in the order in which the balls arrive), a lottery unit A600, and a variable winning device 65 (Fig. 305)
) can be secured, the design flexibility of the sorting device, the lottery unit A600 and the variable winning device 65 (not shown) can be improved.

FIG. 310 is an exploded front perspective view of the lottery unit A600, and FIG. 311 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lottery unit A600. The lottery unit A600 includes the electric accessory 640 described above.
a, and a second winning hole 640 that can switch between a state in which the ball can pass and a state in which the ball cannot pass depending on whether the electric accessory 640a is in an open state or a closed state.

The lottery unit A600 has a main body member A610 which forms a flow-down path through which a second prize winning port 640 is formed and in which the balls flow down on the front side, and which is fastened and fixed to the game board A13 (see FIG. 305), and a back surface of the main body member A610. Engagement member A that is rotatably pivotally supported on the side and engages with the electric accessory 640a
620, and a driving device unit A63 that generates a driving force for operating the engaging member A620.
0, a covering member A650 that is arranged on the front side of the main body member A610 and defines the flow-down path of the sphere, and a main irradiation that irradiates light on the area corresponding to the down-flow path of the sphere, which is disposed on the back side of the main body member A610. A device A660, and an auxiliary irradiation device A that irradiates light to a region that is disposed on the back side of the main body member A610 and whose visibility is lowered by the covering member A650 and that is different from the ball flowing-down path.
670.

The main body member A610 includes a main body plate portion A6 having a plane parallel to the front surface of the game board A13 on the front side.
11, and a left extension wall portion A61 extending like a wall from the left edge portion of the main body plate portion A611 to the front side.
2, a right extending obstacle wall portion A613 extending in a wall shape from a position including the right edge of the main body plate portion A611 to the front side, and a rectangular frame shape surrounding the second prize winning opening 640 in the rear view on the rear side. an extending rectangular frame A614 extending to the extending rectangular frame A614, a projecting receiving portion A615 projecting to the back side above the second winning opening 640 inside the extending rectangular frame A614, and the right side of the extending rectangular frame A614 A frame-shaped main light-emitting holding frame A616 extending to the back side including a part, and a frame-shaped auxiliary light-emitting holding frame A617 extending to the back side on the left side of the extended rectangular frame A614.

A through gate 67 is inserted through and fixed to the upper end position of the main body plate portion A611. That is, in this embodiment, at least a part of the balls that are about to enter the lottery unit A600
It passes through the through gate 67 and flows downstream.

The left extending wall portion A612 is a wall portion arranged to face the separation wall portion 86g (see FIG. 305) of the center frame A86. That is, in the assembled state (see FIG. 304), the separation wall portion 86g of the center frame A86 and the left extending wall portion A612 are engaged (abutted) to ensure rigidity. As a result, the through hole 13a is connected to the center frame A86 and the lottery unit A600.
Center frame A86 and lottery unit A
600 can be stably held in a manner that suppresses positional displacement.

The right extending obstacle wall portion A613 is a wall portion that forms the rolling surface of the ball. That is, lottery unit A
The ball flowing down 600 rolls on the upper surface of the right extending obstacle wall A613 and flows downstream.

The extended rectangular frame A614 has a shaft support hole A614a that is bored as a portion that rotatably supports the engaging member A620, and the extended edge can receive the front side end of the drive unit A630. Formed from shape. That is, by fastening the front side end of the drive unit A630 to the extended end of the extended rectangular frame A614, the drive unit A63 can be connected.
0 is fixed to the extended rectangular frame A614.

The projecting receiving portion A615 is configured to be able to abut on the engaging member A620 and the operating member A632 of the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL as the driving device of the driving device unit A630, and is a portion that defines the movement end position thereof. will be described later.

The main light emission holding frame A616 is a frame that constitutes the outer frame of the light emitted from the main irradiation device A660, and an insertion hole A616a through which a fastening screw is inserted is formed inside. This insertion hole A6
The fastening screw inserted through 16a is screwed into the fastening portion A652a of the covering member A650. be done. As a result, the fastening screw inserted through the insertion hole A616a can be made difficult to be visually recognized in a front view, and it is possible to avoid impairing the design of the lottery unit A600.

The auxiliary light emission holding frame A617 is a frame that constitutes the outer frame of the light emitted from the auxiliary irradiation device A670, and is formed at a position that overlaps the low transmission range A651b of the covering member A650 in front view.

The engagement member A620 is rotatably supported in the support hole A614a of the extended rectangular frame A614,
It is configured such that the claw-shaped portion A622 arranged at the rotating tip portion and the electric accessory 640a are engaged with each other. As a result, the state (open state or closed state) of the electric accessory 640a changes as the attitude of the engaging member A620 changes. Next, details of the engaging member A620 will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 312(a) shows the engagement member A620 viewed from the rotation axis J1 direction.
FIG. 312(b) is a front view of the engagement member A620 as viewed in the direction of arrow CCCXIIb in FIG. 312(a), and FIG. 312(c) is a side view of CCCXII in FIG.
FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view of the engaging member A620 along line c-CCCXIIc;

The engaging member A620 is made of a flexible resin material, and includes a pair of rotating arms A621 composed of plate-shaped portions intersecting (perpendicular to) the rotation axis J1. A claw-shaped portion A622 formed in a C-shaped claw shape, a pair of protruding shaft portions A623 projecting from the rotating arm portion A621 in a cylindrical shape around the rotation axis J1, and a rotation base of the rotating arm portion A621. A base end side connecting rod portion A624 which is a rod-shaped portion extending radially from the end side and is formed in a U-shape in front view in a manner in which the extended end is bent toward the other side and then connected. and a rod-shaped portion extending in a direction parallel to the base end side connecting rod portion A624 from the rotation distal end side of the rotating arm portion A621, and the extending end portion thereof is bent toward the other side and then joined and a distal end side connecting rod portion A625 formed in a U shape in a front view.

A pair of rotating arms A621 are arranged to face each other with a gap larger than the diameter of the sphere. As a result, it is possible to form a flow path for the ball so that the ball passes between the rotating arms A621 (see FIG. 313). be able to.

The base end side connecting rod portion A624 includes a main body rod portion A624a formed with substantially the same cross-sectional shape along the longitudinal direction of the rod, and a distal end side connecting rod portion A62 at an intermediate position between the main body rod portion A624a.
and a projecting restricting portion A624b projecting to the 5 side. The protrusion restricting portion A624b is configured as a portion for restricting excessive rotation of the engaging member A620, and the details thereof will be described later.

The distal end side connecting rod portion A625 is formed so that the rod-shaped portion A625a extending parallel to the rotation axis J1 has a cross-sectional shape different from that of the proximal end side connecting rod portion A624. That is, the bar-shaped portion A625a
, the surface on the side facing the rotating arm A621 is formed in a planar shape that maintains the distance from the rotating arm A621, while the surface on the opposite side of the rotating arm A621 is formed so as to move toward the tip of the rotation. It is formed as an inclined surface A625b that inclines in a direction away from the rotating arm A621. That is, the rod-shaped portion A625a is formed so that the thickness increases toward the rotation tip side, and the rigidity increases (deformation resistance increases).

In addition, the bar-shaped portion A625a has a surface opposite to the rotating arm A621, which is recessed in a manner inclined toward the surface opposite to the rotating arm A621 as it moves toward the central side in the direction of the rotation axis J1. It is formed as a recessed surface A625c provided.

The recessed surface A625c is recessed along the inclination of the inclined surface A625b. That is, when viewed in the tilt direction of the inclined surface A625b, each point of the recessed surface A625c that differs only in the thickness direction of the distal end side connecting rod portion A625 (the width direction of the surface facing the rotating arm portion A621) is the same. visible as a dot.

The recessed surface A625c is recessed corresponding to the shape of the operation member A632 so as to be able to receive the operation member A632 of the drive unit A630, details of which will be described later.

FIG. 313 is an exploded rear perspective view of the main body member A610, engagement member A620 and drive unit A630. In FIG. 313, the engaging member A620 fits into the pivot hole A6 of the main body member A610.
14a is illustrated.

The engaging member A620 is attached to the main body member A610 by applying a compressive force to the engaging member A620, deforming the engaging member A620, and inserting the engaging member A620 into the elongated rectangular frame A614. This is carried out by removing the load and canceling the deformation in a state where the position with the shaft portion A623 is aligned.

That is, the engaging member A620 is gripped between fingers from the direction of the rotation axis J1, and a compressive force is applied to deform the projecting shaft portion A623 to such an extent that the width of the projecting shaft portion A623 becomes shorter than the inner width of the extending rectangular frame A614. The engaging member A620 can be assembled to the main body member A610 by inserting the engaging member A620 into the elongated rectangular frame A614, aligning the position, and releasing the finger.

In the present embodiment, the pair of rotating arm portions A621 are formed so as to be connected by a proximal side connecting rod portion A624 and a distal side connecting rod portion A625 which are narrower and more easily deformable than the rotating arm portions A621. Therefore, most of the deformation when applying a load for assembly is the proximal side connecting rod portion A624
and the distal end side connecting rod portion A625. Therefore, it is possible to suppress deformation of the rotating arm A621 related to the function of opening and closing the electric accessory 640a, so that it is possible to prevent the engaging member A620 from malfunctioning due to deformation during assembly.

In addition, since the pair of rotating arm portions A621 are connected not by a single rod-shaped portion but by a pair of rod-shaped portions (base-side connecting rod portion A624 and distal-side connecting rod portion A625), the load is released. After that, it is possible to easily avoid the postures of the rotating arms A621 from deviating from each other.

Furthermore, by arranging a rod-shaped portion that is wider than the base end side of rotation (see FIG. 312(c)), the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL It is possible to suppress the deviation of the postures of the rotating arms A621 when they are operated by the driving force of .

In addition, by narrowing the width of the rod-shaped portion on the proximal side of rotation (see FIG. 312(c)), the deformation of the engaging member A620 necessary for assembly is shifted to the vicinity of the projecting shaft A623 on the proximal side of rotation. can be produced intensively. Therefore, it is possible to facilitate the assembly of the engaging member A620 while realizing stable operation using the engaging member A620.

As shown in FIG. 313, the front end of the engaging member A620 abuts against the lower end of the projection receiving portion A615, thereby restricting further rotation. As described above, the engaging member A620 is a part for opening and closing the electric accessory 640a, and there is a possibility that the ball enters the second winning hole 640 when the electric accessory 640a is open. A ball that enters the second winning hole 640 is a surface that constitutes the engaging member A620 and the extended rectangular frame A614, is arranged opposite the engaging member A620, and is an inclined surface that slopes downward toward the back side. It flows down between the lower bottom inclined surface A614b formed as , and flows into the drive unit A630.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the rotating arms A621 are arranged at intervals longer than the diameter of the ball (11 mm), so the ball can flow between the opposing rotating arms A621. As a result, the engagement member A620 can be arranged in such a manner as to surround the ball flow-down path from above, so that the engagement member A620 and the ball flow-down path can be arranged compactly.

The driving device unit A630 is held by a box-shaped body box portion A631 with an open front side connected and fixed to the back side end portion of the extended rectangular frame A614 of the body member A610, and the upper side of the body box portion A631. an electromagnetic solenoid ASOL, an operating member A632 that slides in the front-rear direction by the excitation of the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL, a coil spring A633 that applies an urging force to the operating member A632, and a main body box portion A631 that is held at the lower side of the and a detection sensor A634 that detects the passage of the ball.

When the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL is not energized, the biasing force of the coil spring A633 places the operating member A632 at the front side position (see FIG. 314(a)), and the electromagnetic solenoid A
When SOL is energized, the operating member A6
32 is driven to the rear side position (see FIG. 314(b)). The front side position of the operating member A632 is configured as a position where a disc-shaped disk portion A632a fixed to the tip of the operating member A632 abuts on the projecting receiving portion A615. Next, referring to FIG. 314, the transmission path of the driving force of the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL will be described.

314(a) and 314(b) are side views of the electric accessory 640a, the engaging member A620 and the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL. In FIGS. 314(a) and 314(b), only the electric accessory 640a, the engagement member A620 and the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL are shown for easy understanding, and other configurations for holding these members are shown. Illustration is omitted.

Also, in FIG. 314(a), the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL is in a non-excited state (electric accessory 640
a closed state), and in FIG. 314(b), the energized state of the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL (
The open state of the electric accessory 640a) is illustrated.

When the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL is de-energized and the operating member A632 is positioned at the front side position, the engaging member A620 is inclined downward (see FIG. 314(a)), and the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL is energized. When the action member A632 is arranged at the rear side position, the engaging member A620 is in an upward inclined posture (see FIG. 314(b)).

The electric accessory 640a is rotatably supported by the shaft support A653 of the covering member A650,
An eccentric protrusion 640b is provided to protrude from a position eccentric to the rotation axis toward the rear side.
The eccentric projecting portion 640b is arranged so as to be able to abut on the claw-shaped portion A622 of the engaging member A620 at the top and bottom. The state of the electric accessory 640a changes.

In the present embodiment, the electric accessory 640a is composed of a single blade-shaped member, but as can be seen from the fact that there are two pairs of claw-shaped portions A622 of the engaging member A620, the electric accessory 640a can be connected to each other. You may make it comprise from a pair of blade-shaped member facing each other. In this case:
The engaging member A620 of this embodiment can be used.

Returning to FIGS. 310 and 311, description will be made. The covering member A650 is formed from a colorless and light-transmitting resin material, and is arranged on the front side of the main body member A610 with the electric accessory 640a interposed therebetween. A main body plate portion A651 that constitutes a flow-down path of the ball between, a regulation wall portion A652 that protrudes in a wall shape to the back side of the main body plate portion A651 and regulates the flow of the ball, and the back of the main body plate portion A651 The electric accessory 640a projecting to the side in a columnar shape
and a shaft post-shaped portion A653 that rotatably supports the .

The main body plate portion A651 has a high transmission range A651a in which the back side is easily visible in a front view, and a low transmission range A651 in which the light transmission is lower than the high transmission range A651a and the back side is difficult to recognize.
b.

In the present embodiment, a seal having a printed surface designed to form a high-transmittance range and a low-transmittance range is attached to the front side of the main body plate portion A651, so that the high transmittance range A651a and the Although the low transmittance range A651b is configured, the method is not limited to this. For example, the main body plate portion A651 may be manufactured by two-color resin molding,
A region with low permeability may be formed by roughening the surface of the body plate portion A651 by shaving.

In this embodiment, the high transmission range A651a is formed on the front side (mainly the right side) of the sphere flow-down path, and the low transmission range A651b is provided with a regulation wall portion A652 that regulates the sphere flow-down. It is formed on the side (mainly on the left side). As a result, it is possible to block the player's view of the internal structure in the range where the ball does not flow, while ensuring the visibility of the ball's flowing path.

The regulating wall portion A652 has, for example, an insertion hole A616a for fastening and fixing with the main body member A610.
It has a fastening portion A652a into which a fastening screw inserted through is screwed. Since the fastening screw screwed into the fastening portion A652a is made of metal and is non-transmissive, it easily creates a shadow when viewed from the front. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the fastening part A652a is arranged outside the ball flow path, so that the shadow generated by the fastening screw is prevented from entering the ball flow path and causing the player to feel uncomfortable. can do. As a result, it is possible to prevent the shadow of the fastening screw from degrading the concentration of the player who visually recognizes the flow of the ball.

The main irradiation device A660 includes a diffusion plate A661 housed inside a main light emission holding frame A616 of a main body member A610, an illumination substrate A662 on which light emitting means A663 such as LEDs are arranged on the diffusion plate A661 side, and A rear lid portion A664 formed with an outer shape substantially the same as the outer shape of the electrical decoration board A662 and fastened and fixed to the rear side end portion of the main light emission support frame A616.

The diffusing plate A661 is a plate-like member having an outer shape slightly smaller than the inner shape of the main light emission holding frame A616, and having a diffusing shape for diffusing light on both the front and back sides. It has a plurality of extended portions A661a extending in a plate shape. This extended portion A661a is the diffusion plate A
This is a posture maintaining part for preventing the diffusion plate A661 from tilting when the diffusion plate A661 is accommodated in the main light emission holding frame A616. When the diffusion plate A661 is about to tilt, one of the extended portions A6
61a comes into contact with the inner surface of the main light emission holding frame A616, and resistance in the direction of returning the tilt is generated, so the posture of the diffusion plate A661 is maintained.

In addition, when the main irradiation device A660 is attached to the main body member A610, the illumination board A66
2 is in contact with the extended end of the extended portion A661a, the diffusing plate A661 is restricted from coming off to the rear side.

The outer shape of the illumination board A662 is substantially the same as the outer shape of the outer surface of the main light emission holding frame A616,
The outer shape of the rear lid portion A664 is formed to have substantially the same outer shape as the outer shape of the electrical board A662.
That is, the vicinity of the outer peripheral edge of the electrical board A662 is held in a manner sandwiched from the front and rear by the main light emission holding frame A616 and the rear lid portion A664 (held by surface contact).

As a result, even if the rear lid portion A664 is thin and the rigidity of the rear lid portion A664 alone is low, the rigidity of the main light emission holding frame A616 can be used to stably hold the illumination board A662. can.

Here, an insertion hole A616a through which a fastening screw is inserted is formed on the front side of the diffusion plate A661. Therefore, in order to remove the fastening screws, it is necessary to remove the diffusion plate A661 from the main light emission holding frame A616.

In addition, as described above, the fastening screw is non-transmissive and tends to cause shadows. A diffusing plate A661 capable of diffusing the light is arranged. Therefore, the diffused light can reduce the shadow of the fastening screw (skip the shadow), and the shadow of the fastening screw can be made inconspicuous.

In particular, the light emitting means A663 is arranged at a position where the insertion hole A616a does not overlap the optical axis directed along the front-rear direction (a position where the outline projected in the front-rear direction does not overlap). As a result, the shadow of the fastening screw can be made thinner (the shadow is removed), and the effect of making the shadow of the fastening screw less conspicuous can be made more pronounced.

The main irradiation device A660 is arranged on the back side of the sphere flow-down path as described above, and the light emitted from the light emitting means A663 irradiates the sphere flow-down path. The light reaches the downflow path through the Therefore, compared to the light emitted from the light emitting means A663 without passing through the diffusion plate, the light can be light and spread. This will
It is possible to reduce fatigue given to the eyes of the player who pays attention to the flow path of the ball.

The auxiliary irradiation device A670 is arranged on the back side of the auxiliary light emission holding frame A617 and includes an illumination board A671 on which a plurality of light emitting means A672 are arranged, and an illumination board A671 arranged on the back side of the illumination board A671. and a rear lid portion A673 having an outer shape substantially the same as the outer shape.

The electrical board A671 is fixed in the same holding mode as the electrical board A662. That is, the vicinity of the outer peripheral edge of the electrical board A671 is held in a manner sandwiched between the auxiliary light holding frame A617 and the rear lid portion A673 from the front and back (held by contact on the surface).

As a result, even if the thickness of the rear lid portion A673 is thin and the rigidity of the rear lid portion A673 alone is low, the rigidity of the auxiliary light emission holding frame A617 can be used to stably hold the illumination board A671. can.

Here, unlike the main irradiation device A660, in the auxiliary irradiation device A670, the decorative substrate A671
A diffusion plate is not arranged on the front side of the . That is, the light emitted from the light emitting means A672 is irradiated onto the main body member A610 while maintaining the light emission intensity without being diffused.

Light is emitted in such a manner. In this embodiment, the light emitting means A672 is arranged at a position overlapping the low transmission range A651b in front view, so the light emitted from the light emitting means A672 is low. It is visually recognized by the player through the transmission range A651b. Accordingly, since the player sees the light weakened in the low transmission range A651b, it is possible to prevent the player's eyes from seeing the light from feeling excessive fatigue.

In addition, by maintaining the emission intensity of the light, it is possible to prevent the light from being completely blocked by the low transmission range A651b. Thereby, for example, when a character corresponding to the pachinko machine A10 is drawn in the low transmittance range A651b, the character can be illuminated brightly with the light emitted from the light emitting means A672.

Figures 315(a) and 315(b) are CCCXIIc-CCCXI of Figure 312(b)
It is a sectional view of lottery unit A600 in the line corresponding to the Ic line. In FIG. 315(a), the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL is in a non-excited state, that is, the closed state of the electric accessory 640a (FIG. 31
4 (a)) is illustrated, and in FIG. 315 (b), the excitation state of the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL,
That is, the open state of the electric accessory 640a (see FIG. 314(b)) is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 315(a), when the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL is not energized, the lower end of the disk portion at the tip of the operating member A632 is in contact with the recessed surface A625c of the engaging member A620. Here, the disk portion of the operating member A632 advances to the front side to such an extent that it is arranged to face the vicinity of the widthwise middle position of the recessed surface A625c, and the recessed surface A625c moves in the front-rear direction in which the operating member A632 moves. , the load applied from the engaging member A620 to the operating member A632 is a load whose main component is in the vertical direction (direction perpendicular to the front-rear direction).

Therefore, since it is possible to make it difficult to change the posture of the engaging member A620 by moving (retracting) the operating member A632 by the load from the engaging member A620, the piano wire can be pulled out from the gap of the pachinko machine A10. It is possible to take countermeasures against fraudulent acts that try to change to the open state by inserting a wire such as a wire and applying a load to the movable accessory 640a.

Here, conventional pachinko machines have a function of outputting an error notification when an illegal act is detected. If the movable accessory 640 can be placed in the open state regardless of the ASOL state, the deterrence against fraud is not sufficient.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine A10 of the present embodiment, even if a load is applied to the movable accessory 640 and the state is about to change, the movable accessory 640a and the movable accessory 640a move through the eccentric projecting portion 640b of the movable accessory 640a. Since the engaging member A620 is engaged (see FIG. 314(a)), the engaging member A
In the configuration of this embodiment in which it is difficult to change the posture of the movable accessory 620, it is also possible to make it difficult to release the movable accessory 640a by applying a load to the movable accessory 640a.

In addition, in response to the above fraudulent act that applies a load to the movable accessory 640a, in this embodiment, the recessed surface A
625c is inclined, when the engaging member A620 is forcibly displaced in the rising direction from the state of FIG. The contact position of the rod-shaped portion A625a moves to the thick side (rotation distal end side), and the distal end side connecting rod portion A625 becomes difficult to deform.

Therefore, each time the engaging member A620 is displaced in the rising direction, the engaging member A62
Since it can be configured to increase the load required to displace 0, it is possible to suppress fraudulent acts of opening the movable accessory 640a by applying a load to the movable accessory 640a.

Further, the plane opposite to the recessed surface A625c of the bar-shaped portion A625a is an inclined surface that slopes down toward the front side. Therefore, in the state shown in FIG.
When a is flexurally deformed in the thickness direction by the load received from the operation member A632, the operation member A6
The reaction force applied to 32 can be directed in a direction of increasing inclination toward the front side.

As a result, the load in the front-rear direction applied from the bar A625a to the operating member A632 can be generated as a front load, thereby preventing the operating member A632 from retracting rearward due to the load from the bar A625a. so that the engaging member A62 can be more reliably
A rising displacement of 0 can be regulated.

As shown in FIG. 315(b), in the energized state of the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL, the operating member A6
32 and the protrusion restricting portion A624b of the engaging member A620, the engaging member A620 is further rotated backward (raised up) before colliding with the body box portion of the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL. directional movement) is regulated. That is, the rotation of the base end connecting rod portion A624 can be restricted without causing a collision with the body box portion of the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL. It is possible to avoid problems such as cracking or bending due to collision with parts.

FIG. 316(a) is a top view of the operation unit A300, and FIG. 316(b) is the
317 is a side view of the operation unit A300 as viewed in the direction of the arrow L in 2, and FIG.
13 and a rear view of the operation unit A300.

As shown in FIGS. 316(a) and 316(b), the front end surface of the first operation unit A400 is arranged to protrude toward the front side beyond the front end of the rear case A310. When the game board A13 is made of plywood while the first operation unit A400 is arranged in this way, it is necessary to form a depression or hole on the back side of the game board A13 to avoid interference with the first operation unit A400. However, in this embodiment, since the game board A13 is formed from the resin base plate A60, if the shape is designed in advance to avoid interference with the first operation unit A400 and the mold is manufactured, The game board A13 can be easily formed in a shape that avoids interference.

That is, in this embodiment, since the recesses are provided from the rear side to the front side along the left, right, and upper surfaces of the base plate A60 of the game board A13 (see FIG. 306), the front end surface of the first operation unit A400 is recessed. Interference between the game board A13 and the first operation unit A400 can be easily avoided while projecting to the front side from the front end of the rear case A310. This will
Since the arrangement of the first action unit A400 can be brought closer to the player side, it is possible to improve the effect of the presentation to visually recognize the first action unit A400.

As shown in FIGS. 316(b) and 317, the support plate portion A313 arranged on the upper portion of the rear case A310 is arranged inside (below) the outer surface (upper surface) of the outer wall portion A312.
As a result, compared to the case where the support plate portion A313 is arranged outside the outer wall portion A312 while the outer wall portion A312 is arranged outside (upper side) at the left-right center where the support plate portion A313 is not arranged. can lower the upper end position of the rear case A310.

That is, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom of arrangement of the rear case A310 relative to the game board A13 while improving the degree of freedom of arrangement of the first action unit A400 (or the second action unit A700) relative to the rear case A310.

In addition, the left and right positions where the support plate portion A313 on the top of the back case A310 is arranged are positioned outside the game area in front view as described above, so the support plate portion A313 is positioned below the outer wall portion A312. It is possible to reduce the influence (disadvantage) on the game by being placed in the position.

As shown in FIG. 317, on the right side of the rear case A310, unlike the left side, the support plate portion A313 is omitted except for the upper end position. That is, since the space occupied when the support plate portion A313 is disposed below the upper end position can be omitted, the outer wall portion A312 of the rear case A310 is moved to the right end of the game board A13 accordingly. can be done.

Figure 318 shows the game board A13 on the CCCXVIII-CCCXVIII line in Figure 302
and a partial cross-sectional view of the operation unit A300. As shown in FIG. 318, the base plate A60
Compared to the outer edge extension part 60a that extends to the back side along the outer edge, the back side in the area that is inside the outer edge extension part 60a and overlaps at least a part of the game area in the front and back The front-to-rear width of the central overhanging portion 60b that overhangs is formed to be shorter.

Since the front end face of the base plate A60 is formed on substantially the same plane, the rear side end of the center overhanging portion 60b is arranged on the front side rather than the rear side end of the outer edge extending portion 60a. This avoids interference between the base plate A60 and the first motion unit A400.

A recessed portion 60 recessed toward the front side is provided between the outer edge extension portion 60a and the central projecting portion 60b.
c is formed, and the base plate A60 is formed thinner than the outer edge extending portion 60a and the central projecting portion 60b in the formation range of this recessed portion 60c. That is, the degree of reduction in the energy of light passing through the base plate A60 is determined by the outer edge extending portion 6
0a and central overhang 60b.

A center frame A86 is mounted on the front side of the base plate A60, and the covering portion 86h of the center frame A86 is formed with a gap between it and the outer edge member A73, as shown in FIG. This gap is arranged at a position overlapping with the concave portion 60c when viewed in the front-rear direction. That is, the effect of suppressing the energy reduction of light passing through the base plate A60 is
0 can also be maintained on the front side.

The light whose energy reduction has been suppressed is applied to the sphere flowing down between the center frame A86 and the outer edge member A73, and is used to illuminate the sphere. As described above, in the present embodiment, the degree of decrease in energy when the light used in the effect of irradiating the ball with light passes through the game board A13 can be reduced. It is possible to execute an effect that makes the ball shine.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 318, since the inner surface of the outer edge member A73 is arranged outside the inner surface of the outer edge extending portion 60a of the base plate A60 in a front view, the flow-down path of the ball is formed as a concave. setting part 6
It is possible to make it easier to arrange at a position overlapping with 0c in the front and rear. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier to irradiate the sphere with the light that has passed through the recessed portion 60c.

As shown in FIG. 318, the bent portion 75b of the metal plate member 75 is sandwiched between the outer edge member A73 and the base plate A60. As a result, the outer edge member A73, the base plate A60, and the metal plate member 75 can be configured integrally and mutually assisting each other from the viewpoint of rigidity.

In addition, when the bent portion 75b is irradiated with light, the light is reflected on the metal.
The emission intensity between 73 and base plate A60 can be locally increased. This locally increased intensity of light emission is generated by the inner edge (left edge) in the width direction of the bent portion 75b.
3, the light is generated at a location that can be visually recognized through the vertical wall portion 73b (FIG. 30).
8) (the arc wall portion 73a and the inclined wall portion 73c can be excluded).

As a result, even when light is emitted from the back side to the entire top and bottom of the metal plate member 75, the portion where the light emission intensity is locally high is limited to the vertical length range of the vertical wall portion 73b. Therefore, the player's line of sight can be easily focused on the lottery unit A600 disposed facing the vertical wall portion 73b and the formation range of the flow path above it.

319, 320, 321 and 322 are front views of the operation unit A300. 319, 320, 321 and 322, all the first operation units A400 and a plurality of first operation units A400 refer to five first operation units A400, A400A, A400B, It means A400C and A400D. again,
In some cases, the first operation unit A400 will be described as a representative of configurations and functions that can be commonly adopted by the five first operation units A400, A400A, A400B, A400C, and A400D.

In FIG. 319, all first operation units A400 and second operation units A700
A state in which the retracted state is maintained without projecting to the symbol display device 81 side is shown in FIG.
At 0, all the first operation units A400 are excited to be in a projecting state in which they project toward the third pattern display device 81, and the second operation unit A700 maintains the retracted state.

In FIG. 321, all of the first action units A400 maintain the retracted state, and the second action units A700 are in the protruding state in which they protrude toward the third symbol display device 81 side.
22, some of the first operation units A400B and A400C are in the retracted state, the other first operation units A400, A400A and A400D are in the extended state, and the second operation unit A700 is maintained in the extended state. The situation is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 319 to 322, the plurality of first action units A400 allow the player to:
A front cover A4 formed in a conspicuous color (in this embodiment, the front surface is plated with gold)
10 and the first displacement member A440 are mainly visible, and the first displacement member A440
is arranged so that the edge portion on the side of the third pattern display device 81 is the portion closest to the adjacent first operation unit A400.

That is, since the front cover A410 and the first displacement member A440 are arranged in a posture along the radial line that spreads outward from the inner side (center) of the third pattern display device 81, the center of the radial line is The player's line of sight can be focused toward the inside of the third pattern display device 81 .

The side surface of the first displacement member A440 on the side of the third pattern display device 81 is the adjacent first displacement member A440.
319, the side surface of the first displacement member A440 (side surface including the side surface adjacent to the adjacent first displacement member A440) is the tip side (third symbol display device 8
1 side) is chamfered so as to taper off. As a result, the adjacent first displacement member A4
Avoid interfering with 40.

Although the starting point of chamfering is not limited at all, in the present embodiment, the straight line extended along the lateral side surface of the first displacement member A440 is similarly extended from the adjacent first displacement member A440. Chamfering is not performed until just before the intersection where the straight line intersects, and chamfering is started just before the intersection. As a result, while avoiding interference between the first displacement members A440,
A wide range of visibility of the first displacement member A440 can be ensured.

As shown in FIG. 319, in the retracted state of the first motion unit A400, the first displacement member A4
40 is arranged in a posture that is wide in the front and rear direction so as to occupy a range from the back side of the game board A13 to the front side of the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Therefore, compared to the case where the posture of the first displacement member A440 is limited to the posture in which the light emitting side surface (the surface facing the front side in FIG. 320) faces the front side, the area occupied by the first displacement member A440 in the front view can be suppressed, and the visual change can be increased while suppressing the amount of displacement in front view.

This configuration is effective when there is a limited range available for displacement of the first displacement member A440 in the rotation angle range of the drive gear AMG1 (see FIG. 335) rotated by the drive motor AMT1. Details will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 320, in the extended state of the first motion unit A400, the second displacement member A4
90 is arranged at the overhanging position, while the first displacement member A440 is arranged at the overhanging position (a position away from the third pattern display device 81).

Specifically, the first displacement member A440 is arranged in a posture that is wide in the front and rear direction so as to occupy a range from the back side of the game board A13 to the front side of the third symbol display device 81, and the second
From the state of interfering with the movement trajectory of the displacement member A490 (retracted state of the first operation unit A400), to allow the movement of the second displacement member A490, it is closer to the game board A13 side and is closer to the front side than the second displacement member A490 (the extended state of the first operation unit A400).

As a result, the first displacement member A440 determines whether the first operation unit A400 is in the retracted state.
Regardless of whether the second displacement member A490 is in the overhanging state or not, it is possible to perform a light emitting effect in which light is emitted to the player side without being blocked by the second displacement member A490. In particular, in the overhanging state of the first displacement member A440, it is possible to switch the light emitting mode of the long holes A412a (see FIG. 325) arranged around the third pattern display device 81, and the line of sight to the third pattern display device 81 is changed. can be induced, the details of which will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 321, the effect unit A710 of the second action unit A700 can move up and down toward the center of the third symbol display device 81. As shown in FIG. Also, the second operation unit A700
has a rotator A720 configured to be operable regardless of the vertical position of the effect unit A710, and the rotation of the rotator A720 makes it possible to execute a light emission effect in which light travels in multiple directions. will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 322, each of the plurality of first operation units A400 is provided with an individual driving device, so each first operation unit A400 can independently change and maintain the state. That is, the combination that constitutes the retracted state and the extended state in the first operation unit A400 is not limited to that illustrated in FIG. 322, and can be set arbitrarily.

For example, it is possible to execute only the state change of any one of the first operation units A400, or it is possible to execute the state changes in different first operation units A400 in order. For example, it is possible to sequentially execute the state change clockwise from the lower left first operation unit A400 in the front view, or the third first operation unit A400B clockwise from the lower left.
, it is also possible to perform state changes in both directions. Thus, the first operating unit A
400 can be used to perform a variety of renditions.

Also, for example, the first operation units A400B and A4 that are in the retracted state in FIG.
00C of the second displacement member A490 is arranged at the extended position, the second operation unit A700
, the first operation units A400B and A400C, which may interfere with the second operation unit A700, are placed in the retracted state, and the other first operation units A400, A400A, and A400D are extended. can be put out. This will
Compared to the case where all the first operation units A400 operate synchronously with the same drive device, the first
It is possible to increase the variations of combinations of operations (states) of the operation unit A400 and the second operation unit A700.

FIG. 323 is a front view of the operation unit A300. In FIG. 323, the outer shape of the game board A13, the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 are illustrated by imaginary lines. As shown in FIG. 323, the first
A front cover A410 of the operation unit A400 is arranged so as to effectively decorate the game area. This will be explained below.

First, when defining a game area as an area in which a ball that has passed between the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 flows down, a section (a ball shooting unit The section from the 112a side to the ball return prevention member 68 (see FIG. 302)) is not included in the game area, and the outer frame of the game area is the inner rail 61 in this section. Therefore, the outer ends of the front covers A410 of the first operation units A400 and A400A (up to the second one from the lower left) arranged on the back side of the inner rail 61 are arranged near the inner rail 61 (on the outer side). (extending to outer rail 62 is not required).

On the other hand, the outer rail 62 is the outer frame of the game area in the area after the ball has passed between the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 (especially the area where the ball hit to the right flows down). Therefore, the outer ends of the front covers A410 of the first operation units A400B and A400C (third and fourth units from the lower left) arranged on the back side of the outer rail 62 are near the outer rail 62 (outer side). placed in

Furthermore, the outer frame of the game area in the area where the outer rail 62 is cut off and the outer edge member A73 is arranged becomes the outer edge member A73. Therefore, the outer end of the front cover A410 of the first operation unit A400D (first lower right) arranged on the back side of the outer edge member A73 is arranged near the inner surface (outer side) of the outer edge member A73. . This is the rear case A310 in this embodiment.
The arrangement of the support plate part A313 is omitted in the right middle part of the game board A13, and the back case A
Since the right end of 310 is brought together, this is feasible.

That is, by forming the inner area of the rear case A310 closer to the right end of the game board A13 in front view, the first operation unit A400D can be arranged close to the right end of the game board A13. As a result, a flow path arranged near the right end of the game board A13 as a flow path for a right-handed ball to flow down (a flow path sandwiched between the right flow path forming wall portion 86d and the outer edge member A73, FIG. 3
02) to the outside (to the right) of the front cover A410.
An operating unit A400D may be provided.

In other words, like a typical right-handed machine (for example, a pachinko machine that is not symmetrical),
When the right-handed flow path is extremely thin compared to the left-handed flow path and arranged near the right end of the game board A13, as in the present embodiment, the inner area of the back case A310 is aligned to the right. By configuring so that a movable device such as the first operation unit A400 can be arranged in , the movable device can be arranged in the entire back side of the game area.

On the other hand, on the left side of the rear case A310, a guide portion sandwiched between the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 is formed in a front view, and the player's line of sight is concentrated on this guide portion. Therefore, even if the support plate portion A313 is arranged on the left side of the rear case A310 as in the present embodiment, it is possible to avoid lowering the degree of improvement in the decoration of the game area. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the support plate portion A313 is arranged on the left side of the back case A310, and the support plate portion A313 is omitted on the right side of the back case A310 from the viewpoint of improving the decoration of the game area. It can be said that it is a choice.

As described above in a plurality of ways with reference to FIG. 323, since a plurality of front covers A410 are effectively arranged within the game area, patterns and figures that are visually recognized by a player who pays attention to the game area can be displayed on the game board A.
13 can be made up of a plurality of front covers A410.

As a result, it is possible to eliminate the need to decorate the game area by sticking a sticker or the like on which a character or the like is printed on the surface of the game board A13. In addition, the front cover A410
is arranged, as a part of the first operation unit A400, the appearance can be changed depending on the arrangement of each displacement member and the light emission mode of the light emitting means, so as described above, the game board A
It is possible to increase the variation of the aspect of decorating the game area as compared with the case where a sticker or the like is stuck on the game area 13.例文帳に追加Details of the change in appearance will be described later.

In addition, since the outside of the game area is hidden by the block-shaped member 74 (see FIG. 305),
Even if the portion where the structure is exposed and the driving device are arranged here, it is possible to avoid the deterioration of the appearance.

As shown in FIG. 323, the adjacent first motion units A400 are closely arranged with a slight gap, and the cover member A591 disposed between the adjacent first motion units A400
It is fastened and fixed to the first operation unit A400 in a manner of connecting each other. That is, in this embodiment, a plurality of (five in this embodiment) first operation units A400 arranged around the third pattern display device 81 are combined with each other to form an integrated structure.

Further, the outer side surface of the first operating unit A400 is arranged close to the inner side surface of the rear case A310 (see FIG. 324). Therefore, the rigidity of the first operation unit A400 as a whole can be improved, and the deformation of the rear case A310 can be assisted by the rigidity of the first operation unit A400. ,
Excessive reliance on the metal plate member 75 (see FIG. 308) can be avoided. Therefore,
Since the strength (rigidity, plate thickness) required for the metal plate-like member 75 can be reduced, the degree of freedom in designing the metal plate-like member 75 can be improved.

As a result, the metal plate member 75 can be easily designed into a shape that facilitates noise countermeasures and grounding (see FIGS. 303 and 304) by contact with the inner surface of the inner frame 12, which are the original functions of the metal plate member 75. can.

FIG. 324 is an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit A300. FIG. 324 shows a state in which a plurality of (five in this embodiment) first operation units A400 are removed from the rear case A310 toward the front side, and a second operation unit A700 is attached to the rear case A310.

The first operation unit A400 is configured to be operable in a substantially common operation mode,
A plurality of them are arranged so as to partially surround the inner space of the rear case A310. As shown in FIGS. 319 and 320, each first operation unit A400 moves toward the center of the internal space of the rear case A310 (direction along the radiation emitted from the center of the internal space of the rear case A310). configured to move with

Therefore, for example, since the influence given by gravity may change in each first operation unit A400, the configuration is devised so that the operation can be realized without relying on gravity in this embodiment.
Details will be described later. As described above, each first operation unit A400 has a substantially common configuration, so the first operation unit A400 arranged in the lower left will be explained in detail, and the other first operation units A400 will be explained. omitted.

FIG. 325 is a front perspective view of the first action unit A400, and FIG. 326 is a rear perspective view of the first action unit A400. As shown in FIGS. 325 and 326, the area of the first operation unit A400 is a substantially rectangular area in a front view and covered by the front cover A410. A juxtaposed area A400v is arranged side by side at the end of the area A400b.

The co-located area A400v is not an area that is supposed to be visually recognized by the player in the assembled state. In particular, a blindfold cover member A591 is provided on the central side where there is a risk of being seen by the player, and the rear side of the cover member A591 is configured to be invisible to the player.

In this side-by-side area A400v, a configuration (for example, a drive motor AMT1, a detection sensor A426 for detecting a position, wiring, a connector, etc.) that is inevitably generated along with the effect executed in the main area A400b is not intended to be visually recognized by the player. By arranging, the main body area A400b can be utilized to the maximum extent for arranging members on the assumption that the player can visually recognize the main body area A400b. Namely
Since the main body area A400b can be prevented from being eroded by a configuration that is not intended to be visually recognized by the player, it is possible to make the most of the width of the main body area A400b and arrange large members.

327 is an exploded front perspective view of the first operation unit A400, and FIG. 328 is an exploded rear perspective view of the first operation unit A400. 327 and 328 show a state in which the front cover A410 is removed.

As shown in FIGS. 327 and 328, the first operation unit A400 has a front cover A41.
0 and its front cover A410.
and a rear unit BU disposed on the rear side of the front unit FU.

The front cover A410 has a shape in which a thin plate is bent in a U-shape so as to cover the front side of the front unit FU on the front side of the front unit FU. , a plurality of through holes A412 drilled at positions defined by the relationship with the front unit FU, and a guide portion A413 that guides the displacement of the first displacement member A440 of the front unit FU.

The front cover A410 has the function of hiding most of the area of the front unit FU from the player and making a specific area visible through the through hole A412.
It mainly has a function of guiding the displacement of the first displacement member A440 of the front unit FU.

329 is an exploded front perspective view of the front cover A410, and FIG.
410 is an exploded rear perspective view of 410. FIG. As shown in FIGS. 329 and 330, the front cover A41
0 is arranged to face the production central part A411a as a structure laminated on the back side of the production central part A411a of the main body A411. A diffusing plate A415 formed of a material and a light emitting means A416a such as an LED (illustrated in a substantially square chip shape in FIG. 329) arranged opposite to the diffusing plate A415 and having an optical axis directed toward the diffusing plate A415 side are arranged. The electric decoration board A416 provided and the electric decoration board A
416, fixes the electrical board A416, and is mainly provided with a board fixing plate A417 that is fastened and fixed to the front unit FU.

Hereinafter, the configuration of the diffusion plate A415, the decorative electrical substrate A416, and the substrate fixing plate A417 and how the configuration suppresses positional deviation will be described.

The diffusion plate A415 is not fastened with a fastening screw or the like, but is supported by being sandwiched between the main body A411 and the substrate fixing plate A417 from the front and back direction, and is arranged at an axis corresponding position A415a facing the light emitting means A416a on the back side. A wavy pattern formed from ridges concentrically spreading around is formed, and a recessed portion A415b recessed inward from the outer edge and a through hole having a diameter smaller than that of the light emitting means are drilled. and a plurality of protruding plate portions A415d protruding from the sides constituting the upper and lower ends to the back side in a plate shape.

The ridges forming the wave pattern on the back side of the diffusion plate A415 refract the light irradiated to the axis-corresponding position A415a side, so that the light travels in the radial direction of a circle centered at the axis-corresponding position A415a. It is formed from a shape that advances to the front side. That is, the light incident on the side of the axis-corresponding position A415a is visually recognized by the player at a position away from the axis-corresponding position A415a (outside in the radial direction), but not vice versa. That is, it is formed so as to prevent light incident on a position away from the axis-corresponding position A415a from traveling toward the axis-corresponding position A415a.

The recessed portion A415b is a notch formed to avoid interference between members. formed by

The small diameter portion 415c is formed in the through hole A412 of the main body portion A411 so as to be difficult to see when viewed from the front.
(position facing the plate portion of the main body portion A411), and the substrate fixing plate A41
7 is a through-hole formed at a position corresponding to the insertion columnar portion A417f of 7, the diffusion plate A415,
It is used for alignment of the electrical board A416 and the board fixing plate A417, and the details will be described later.

The protruding plate portion A415d is fitted into the notch portion A417h of the substrate fixing plate A417 so that the diffuser plate A415 can be aligned with the substrate fixing plate A417. The projecting plate portion A415d has a projecting length of about 4 mm and a width of about 10 mm as upper limits, and has a certain degree of rigidity. It is possible to prevent the protruding plate portion A415d from bending or breaking due to a load caused by collision, rubbing, etc.), and the positioning function can be maintained for a long time.

The diffusing plate A415 has a wave pattern formed on the entire back side and can perform the function of diffusing light over the entire area. That is, the first area AC1 is an area that overlaps the decorative electrical board A416 in front view, and the second area AC2 is an area that does not overlap the decorative electrical board A416 in front view.

The optical axis of the light emitting means A416a of the electrical board A416 passes through the first area AC1, and it is possible for the player to visually recognize the strong light emitting mode as a light emitting effect. On the other hand, the second area AC2 is
It corresponds to the area formed so as to protrude from the right side wall A417a3 of the substrate fixing plate A417 to the outside (right side) of the substrate fixing plate A417, and the optical axis of the light emitting means A416a of the electrical board A416 does not pass through. Light from A416a arrives attenuated.

On the other hand, the second area AC2 has a function of enhancing the effect of the lighting effect by the first displacement member A440 of the front unit FU, which will be described later in detail.

The illumination board A416 includes the above-described light emitting means A416a, recessed portions A416b recessed inward from the outer edge, a plurality of large-diameter holes A416c for positioning, and small-diameter through holes A416c. A plurality of combination fastening holes 416d arranged as a group of holes, a plurality of connectors A416e arranged on the front and back sides to which ends of wiring are connected, and an electric wiring F for supplying electricity to the first displacement member A440.
Intermediate connector A416f to which C (flat cable in this embodiment) is connected
and are mainly provided.

The light emitting means A416a is located at a position where the intensity of the light visually recognized by the player is likely to be maximized. be. This makes it easier to ensure the intensity of the light that the player sees through the through hole A412.

The recessed portion A416b is a notch formed to avoid interference with the screw head of the fastening screw inserted through the through hole A417b to fasten and fix the substrate fixing plate A417 to the front unit FU.

The large-diameter hole A416c is a through hole with an inner diameter slightly larger than the outermost diameter of the insertion columnar portion A417f of the substrate fixing plate A417, and is bored at a position corresponding to the insertion columnar portion A417f. By inserting the insertion columnar portion A417f into the large diameter hole A416c, the decorative substrate A416
can be aligned with the substrate fixing plate A417.

The assembly fastening portion A416d is composed of a pair of small-diameter through-holes aligned vertically. The maintenance efficiency is improved by configuring the upper through-hole of the pair of through-holes so that the fastening screw is inserted through the upper through-hole.

For example, for maintenance, the main body A411 and diffusion plate A415 are removed while the first operation unit A400 is fixed to the rear case A310, and the faulty illumination board A4 is removed.
16 is removed from the substrate fixing plate A417, and the normal electrical decoration substrate A416 is attached to the substrate fixing plate A417.
In the place where work to attach to is assumed, the electrical board A416 falls forward due to its own weight before fastening and fixing. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the upper through-hole (the side on which the displacement to the front side due to the forward tilt is large) of the pair of upper and lower through-holes of the assembly fastening portion A416d is fixed by the fastening screw. The posture can be returned to the backward falling direction by the fastening screw. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the electrical board A416 from being erroneously fixed at the time of fastening and fixing for maintenance.

In addition, the columnar portion of the substrate fastening portion A417c protruding on the front side of the substrate fixing plate A417 is inserted through the lower through-hole of the combination fastening portion A416d to position and secure the illumination substrate A416. Equipped with a function for temporary fastening. That is, even before the fastening screws are fastened, the lower through-holes are hooked on the columnar portions of the substrate fastening portions A417c, so that the decorative substrate A416 can be prevented from falling due to its own weight.

The connector A416e is arranged on the front side, and includes a first connector A416e1 to which wiring for supplying power and controlling light emission of the light emitting means A416a is connected, and a wiring connected to the detection sensor A426 fixed to the front unit FU. It mainly includes a second connector A416e2 to be connected, and a third connector A416e3 to which wiring connected to the second displacement member A490 arranged in the rear unit BU is connected.

In these connectors A416e, the position of the mating member to which the wiring is connected is fixed (first connector A416e1, second connector A416e2), or there is a sufficient distance between the connectors even if the mating member is movable ( Because of the third connector A416e3), it can be placed in any position. In this embodiment, the side-by-side area A is located at a position corresponding to the lower end of the electrical decoration board A416 so as to prevent interference with other members and prevent the risk of being seen by the player.
400v.

On the other hand, the first displacement member A440 as a mating member to which the intermediate connector A416f is connected by wiring is located in the area opposite to the electrical board A416 with the board fixing plate A417 interposed therebetween (the board fixing plate A417 and the guide plate portion A430 (Fig. 335), the gap between the connectors (the gap between the connectors) is shortened. There is a risk of giving

In this embodiment, unlike the connector A416e (in this embodiment, the wiring is connected to the connector A416e from below), the wiring can be oriented in any direction, and the intermediate connector A416
The orientation of f is the direction A416x, which is the movement direction of the first displacement member A440 of the front unit FU.
and the stretchable direction of the electrical wiring FC (a band of a flat cable extends, can be easily bent, and is less likely to break).

The board fixing plate A417 has a main body A417a formed in a box shape with an open front side and capable of accommodating the decorative board A416, and a ridge part for receiving the fastening part of the front unit FU on the back side of the main body A417a. Then, from a plane common to a plurality of through holes A417b configured so that fastening screws screwed into the fastening portion can be inserted, the fastening portion into which the fastening screw is screwed, and the tip surface of the fastening portion A plurality of substrate fastening portions A417c configured by a set of small-diameter columnar portions projecting
And prepare.

The main body A417a of the substrate fixing plate A417 includes a plate-shaped deep bottom plate-shaped portion A417a1 connected to the rear end portion of the substrate fastening portion A417c, and parallel to the deep bottom plate-shaped portion A417a1, and the front thereof is the substrate fastening portion A417c. A shallow plate-shaped portion A4 formed on the same plane as the tip surface of the fastening portion of
17a2.

That is, the rear surface of the electrical board A416 can be surface-supported by the front end surfaces of the fastening portions of the plurality of board fastening portions A417c and the shallow plate portion A417a2.

The substrate fixing plate A417 has a sharp projecting portion A417d projecting from the deep bottom plate portion A417a1 to the front side with a sharp tip, and a vertical width of the sharp projecting portion A417d at the lower left of the sharp projecting portion A417d. and a rectangular insertion hole A417e having the same width.

The sharp projecting portion A417d is arranged in the lower left portion of the intermediate connector A416f in the assembled state, and is triangular in cross section in such a manner that it is spaced from the electrical board A416 by the thickness of the electrical wiring FC, which is a flat cable. It is formed as a linearly extending ridge, and the extending direction of the ridge intersects (perpendicularly) with the direction A416x in a front view. Since the wiring connected to the intermediate connector A416f is routed to the rear side through the insertion hole A417e,
The electric wiring FC connected to the intermediate connector A416f is sandwiched between the board fixing plate A417 and the sharp protrusion A417d.

By sandwiching and supporting the electric wiring FC between the board fixing plate A417 and the sharp projecting portion A417d in this way, the portion that receives the displacement of the electric wiring FC due to the displacement of the first displacement member A440 becomes the intermediate connector A416f. From the end position of the electric wiring FC to be connected, the board fixing plate A41
7 and the sharp projecting portion A417d. As a result, it is possible to prevent the electrical wiring FC from falling off from the intermediate connector A416f.

The substrate fixing plate A417 has a shallow plate-like portion A417 at a position corresponding to the large diameter hole A416c.
A plurality of insertion columnar portions A417f projecting from a2 toward the front side in a columnar shape and a shallow bottom plate portion A417
a2, a plurality of through holes A417g penetrating through the boundary between the shallow plate-like portion A417a2 and the deep plate-like portion A417a1, and the diffusion plate A415 protruding from the side wall A417a3 extending from the outer shape of the main body A417a toward the front side. A plurality of notch portions A417h formed with a width capable of receiving the installation plate portion A415d and protruding toward the inside of the main body portion A417a along the front end portion of the side wall A417a3 obliquely formed on the right side in front view. A plurality of protruding pieces A417i
And prepare.

The insertion columnar portion A417f has a diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the large-diameter hole A416c of the electrical board A416c, and exceeds the thickness of the electrical board A416. and a small-diameter tip protruding from the tip of the large-diameter base with a diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the small-diameter hole A415c of the diffusion plate A415.

Accordingly, the large-diameter base portion can be used for alignment of the electrical board A416 and surface support of the diffusion plate A415, and the small-diameter tip portion can be used for alignment of the diffusion plate A415. That is, the diffusion plate A4
15 is aligned at the small-diameter tip portion and is surface-supported by the side wall A417a3 and the tip of the large-diameter base portion of the insertion columnar portion A417f. With this configuration, it is possible to suppress the deviation of the posture of the diffusion plate A415 even though it is not directly fastened and fixed.

The through-hole A417g has a function of forming an air passage and suppressing heat generation of the electrical board A416. In the present embodiment, the diffuser plate A415 is arranged in such a manner as to block the front side of the light emitting means A416a of the electrical board A416. forming As a result, the heat generation of the electrical board A416 can be suppressed without lowering the performance effect of the light emitting means A416a.

The cutout portion A417h receives the projecting plate portion A415d of the diffuser plate A415, and the side wall A41
Engage in the direction along 7a3. As a result, even if the small-diameter tip of the insertion columnar portion A417f breaks due to deterioration over time or falls off due to manufacturing defects, the diffusion plate A4
15 can be prevented from being displaced from the board fixing plate A417 in the longitudinal direction of the protruding plate portion A415d (direction along the formation direction of the side wall A417a3, upper right direction). Therefore,
In a support mode in which the diffusion plate A415 is not fastened and fixed as described above, it is possible to prevent the diffusion plate A415 from being displaced.

The protruding piece A417i is formed in a thin plate shape that allows the electrical board A416 to enter between it and the shallow plate portion A417a2. In this embodiment, in the assembled state, the protruding piece A417i is formed with a protruding length that interferes with the electrical board A416 in a front view.
protrudes downward (diagonally downward) from the side wall A417a3. Therefore, even if the electrical board A416 receives a load in the direction of tilting forward due to gravity or the like, the projecting piece A417i is locked (stopped from the front side) at the tilting tip side (upper right side) of the electrical board A416, it is possible to prevent the electric board A416 from tilting forward.

The protruding piece A417i is formed inside the internal space of the operation unit A300, and
It restricts the displacement of 16 to the front side (suppresses flapping). Therefore, the operation unit A3
It is possible to stably fix the electrical board A416 while omitting the arrangement of fastening screws inside the internal space of 00. As a result, the action unit A3 tends to attract more attention of the player.
00 (due to shadows caused by the fastening screws).
7 can be stably fixed.

When assembling the decorative board A416 to the board fixing plate A417, the right side edge of the decorative board A416 is inserted all the way into the gap between the shallow plate portion A417a2 and the projecting piece A417i. can be smoothly assembled by pushing the electrical board A416 backward from the starting point. This will be described with reference to FIGS. 331 and 332. FIG.

FIG. 331(a) is a front view of the electrical board A416 and the board fixing plate A417, and FIG.
1(b) is a sectional view of the decorative board A416 and the board fixing plate A417 along line CCCXXXIb-CCCXXXIb of FIG. 331(a), and FIG.
and a substrate fixing plate A417, and FIG. 332(b) is a front view of the CCCX of FIG.
It is a cross-sectional view of the decorative board A416 and the board fixing plate A417 along line XXIIb-CCCXXXIIb.

FIGS. 331(a) and 331(b) show a state in which the electrical board A416 is inserted into the board fixing plate A417, and FIGS. 332(a) and 332(b) show the electrical board A416 is attached to the board fixing plate A417.

The electrical board A416 has a chamfered portion A416g chamfered from the upper and lower ends of the right side of the board body.
, A416h. The form of the chamfered portions A416g and A416h corresponds to the length from the upper and lower ends of the right side of the substrate fixing plate A417 to the adjacent cutout portion A417h. That is, the length up to the notch A417h at the lower end of the board fixing plate A417 is shorter than the length up to the notch A417h at the upper end of the right side of the board fixing plate A417.
16, the second chamfered portion A416h at the lower end is formed at a shorter distance from the right side of the electrical board A416 than the first chamfered portion A416g at the upper end.

In FIG. 331, compared with the state shown in FIG. 332, the electrical board A416 is attached to the board fixing plate A41
7 is shown displaced upward along the slope of the left side. The upper limit of the extent of this displacement is the length of the space formed between the first chamfered portion A416g and the upper surface of the substrate fixing plate A417. edge is inserted into the gap formed by the notch A417h.

Contrary to the state shown in FIG. 331, when the electrical board A416 is displaced downward, the length of the space formed between the lower surface of the board fixing plate A417 by the second chamfered portion A416h is set as the upper limit. 332, the edge of the second chamfered portion A416h enters the gap formed by the notch A417h.

By forming the chamfered portions A416g and A416h on the decorative board A416 in this manner, the degree of freedom of the position of the decorative board A416 when inserting the decorative board A416 into the board fixing plate A417 can be improved. That is, the right side of the electrical board A416 and the board fixing plate A417
332, the electrical board A416 can be inserted into the board fixing plate A417 with a slight vertical displacement. This will
The electrical board A416 can be easily inserted into the board fixing plate A417.

331 to the state shown in FIG. 332, the electrical board A416 should be tilted so as to approach the board fixing plate A417 with its right side as the tilting axis. On this occasion,
As shown in FIG. 331, the board fixing plate A41 is passed through the large diameter hole A416c of the electrical board A416.
7 can be seen, the large-diameter hole 417c is guided by the tapered insertion column A417f (see FIG. 329), so that the electrical board A4
16 is corrected, and the state shown in FIG. 332 is obtained. Therefore, the vertical deviation of the electrical board A416 can be corrected without intentionally correcting the vertical deviation of the electrical board A416.
The electrical board A416 can be easily assembled to the board fixing plate A417.

In the assembled state (see FIG. 325), the protruding plate portion A415
d is fitted and the gap is filled. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the electrical board A416 from entering the notch A417h after assembly. That is, for the notch A417h,
While providing the function of widening the gap when the decorative board A416 is assembled, the function of maintaining the arrangement of the decorative board A416 can be provided by filling the gap after the assembled state.

As shown in FIG. 332(b), when the decorative board A416 is attached to the board fixing plate A417, the protruding piece A417i protrudes from the front side of the decorative board A416 and is attached to the board A.
416, the right side of the electrical board A416 is attached to the board fixing plate A41.
7 can be prevented from falling off.

In this embodiment, the board fastening portion A417 is provided near the right sides of the decorative board A416 and the board fixing plate A417 by preventing the decorative board A416 from coming off with such a retaining structure.
c is not arranged (arrangement of fastening screws is omitted). As a result, it is possible to secure an arrangement area for the light emitting means A416a in the vicinity of the right sides of the electrical board A416 and the board fixing plate A417, and to avoid shadows caused by the fastening screws. Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect of the light emission performance in the vicinity of the right side of the decorative board A416 and the board fixing plate A417.

When performing maintenance work to replace the decorative board A416 because the decorative board A416 becomes defective, the decorative board A416 is moved from the state shown in FIG. 332(b) to the board fixing plate A417 as shown in FIG. must be tilted. At this time, the electrical board A416 is fixed to the board fixing plate A.
Since it is surrounded by 417, it is difficult to directly tilt the electrical board A416. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the first connector A416e1 is arranged on the front side, and by pulling the wiring connected to the first connector A416e1 to the front, the electrical board A416 can be easily removed. It can be tilted with respect to the substrate fixing plate A417.

Furthermore, since the first connector A416e1 is disposed on the opposite side of the right end (the end facing the side wall A417a3), which is the starting point of the attitude change of the electrical board A416,
The electrical board A can be efficiently operated by the load applied to the wiring connected to the first connector A416e1.
416 can be rotationally displaced. In other words, it is possible to increase the moment of force applied to the electrical board A416 by the load applied to the wiring. As a result, it is possible to avoid applying an extra (excessive) load to the electrical board A416 and the wiring during maintenance work.

FIG. 333 is an exploded front perspective view of the front side unit FU and the rear side unit BU, and FIG.
4 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front unit FU and the rear unit BU. As shown in FIGS. 333 and 334, the rear unit BU is formed in a box-like shape with an open front side, and the front unit FU is fixed to the open front side in such a manner as to cover it. That is, the rear unit B
A second displacement member A490 disposed on the front side of U is configured to be able to advance and retreat through the gap between the rear unit BU and the front unit FU.

As shown in FIG. 333, only one drive motor AMT1 is provided in each first operation unit A400. The driving force of the driving motor AMT1 is applied to the front unit F
By being transmitted to the first displacement member A440 of U and the second displacement member A490 of the rear unit BU, the movement effect of the first operation unit A400 is executed.

It should be noted that in the present embodiment, units that can be disassembled as units are simply referred to as the front unit FU and the rear unit BU. work in tandem rather than independently. For example, the drive motor AMT1 is arranged in the front unit FU, while the transmission gear A461 for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor AMT1 is arranged in the rear unit BU.

335 is an exploded front perspective view of the front unit FU and the rear unit BU of the first operation unit A400, and FIG. 336 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front unit FU and the rear unit BU of the first operation unit A400. be. 335 and B11 show the front cover A4
10 is an exploded perspective view of the first operation unit A400 with the 10 removed. FIG. 335 and 336, illustration of wiring HC and the like is omitted. First, an outline of the configuration of the first operation unit A400 will be described.

As shown in FIGS. 335 and 336, the first operation unit A400 includes a front unit FU
A support plate portion A420 formed in a plate shape from a light-transmissive colored (black in this embodiment) resin material, and a support plate portion A42 formed from a light-transmissive and colorless resin material
A first displacement member A440 is disposed on the front side of the support plate portion A42 with a gap that allows advance and retreat.
0, the guide plate portion A430 and the support plate portion A42
339 to 344), and a mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor AMT1 to the first displacement member A440. Slide link A4 displaced in conjunction with the displacement of the first displacement member A440
50, a drive motor AMT1 fastened and fixed to the support plate portion A420, and its drive motor AM
and a driving gear AMG1 fastened and fixed to T1.

In addition, the first operation unit A400 constitutes the rear unit BU, and includes a transmission gear group A460 that meshes with the drive gear AMG1 and rotates each component along with the rotation of the drive gear AMG1, and a transmission gear group A460. A support box portion A470 that rotatably supports the gear group A460 and is formed in a box shape with an open front side from a light-transmissive colored (black in this embodiment) resin material.
A rear plate portion A480 formed from a light-transmissive and colorless resin material, disposed on the back side of the support box portion A470 with a gap therebetween and fastened and fixed to the support box portion A470, and a front surface of the support box portion A470. Forward and backward displacement (
356 to 358), and a rack and pinion mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor AMT1 to the second displacement member A490, which is the rear side of the support box portion A470. and a rack and pinion A510 fastened and fixed to.

As described above, the first displacement member A440 and the second displacement member A490 have a plate-like portion (the support plate portion A420 and the bottom portion of the support box portion A470) disposed on the back side of the plate-like portion. (slide link A450, rack and pinion A510) are arranged, and the slide link A4 is provided in the gap between the support plate portion A420 and the support box portion A470
50 and the second displacement member A490 are arranged together.

That is, the displacement members A440 and A490 and the transmission mechanism (slide link A45
0, rack and pinion A510) are arranged in the front and rear, which makes the structure easy to be bulky in the front and rear, while the slide link A450 as a transmission mechanism of the first displacement member A440 on the front side and the second
Compared to the case where the displacement member A490 and the displacement member A490 are arranged in the front and rear independent gaps, it is possible to omit the arrangement of the plate members for forming the independent gaps. The front-rear width occupied by the displacement mechanism portion of the displacement member A490 can be suppressed. As a result, another rendering mechanism can be arranged in the front-to-rear gap that can be formed by suppressing the front-to-rear width, so that the rendering effect of the first operation unit A400 can be improved.

Next, each configuration of the first operation unit A400 will be described in detail. As described above, the first motion unit A400 includes the first displacement member A440 and the second displacement member A490 with different displacement modes, and the configurations required for each displacement are partially different.
The configuration required to realize the displacement of the displacement member A440 will be explained, and later the second displacement member A
The rest of the configuration required for 490 displacement is described.

The support plate portion A420 constitutes the framework of the first motion unit A400 and guides the displacement direction of the first displacement member A440. A portion A421, a plurality of guide holes A422 penetratingly formed as elongated holes extending parallel to the direction A416x, a through hole A423 provided as a similar elongated hole in one of the guide holes A422, and a hole parallel to the direction A416x. A plurality of guide ridges A424 projecting on the front side as ridges, and a main body plate portion A421 that is recessed along a direction A416x from the right edge of the main body plate portion A421 so that the recessed end faces the front side. A concave portion A425 formed as an inclined surface that is inclined in a direction away from the right edge of the slide link A450, a detection sensor A426 that detects that the first displacement member A440 is arranged at the initial position, and a slide link A450. Shaft hole A45
2, and a shaft supporting portion A427 protruding from the main body plate portion A421 to the rear side, and a cylindrically protruding rear side from the main body plate portion A421 at a position corresponding to the arrangement of the transmission gear group A460. It mainly includes a plurality of retaining cylindrical portions A428 provided.

The guide hole A422 includes a first guide hole A422a that guides the displacement of the first displacement member A440,
A plurality of second guide holes A for guiding the displacement of the guided projecting portion A455c of the slide link A450
422b.

The through hole A423 is a through hole for the spring hooking portion A455d of the slide link A450 to pass through toward the front side. lock (hook) the end of the

The other end of the coil spring ASP1 is locked (hooked) on the lower left corner of the main body plate A421, and the coil spring ASP1 generates an urging force in the contracting direction (lower left direction).

The guide ridge A424 straddles the guide groove A441g of the first displacement member A440 and has a function of guiding the displacement of the first displacement member A440. The recessed portion A425 is formed to guide the bending of the electrical wiring FC connected to the first displacement member A440, the details of which will be described later.

The detection sensor A426 is a photocoupler-type sensor arranged so as to be able to determine that the first displacement member A440 is arranged at the initial position. In this embodiment, the detection sensor A426 does not directly detect the position of the first displacement member A440, but the position of the slide link A45.
0 of the detected plate portion A455e is detected.

In this embodiment, the sensor arranged to determine the placement of the first displacement member A440 and the second displacement member A490 is the detection sensor A426, and the first displacement member A440 and the second displacement member A490 are in the extended position. The arrangement of a detection sensor for determining the arrangement is omitted.

As a result, it is possible to reduce member costs and create space for arranging other displacement members. It is conceivable that a problem such as the drive motor AMT1 not stopping despite the fact that the On the other hand, even if the drive motor AMT1 does not stop, it is possible to avoid overloading the parts involved in the displacement of the first displacement member A440.
Measures are taken so that the arrangement of 0s can also be maintained, but the details will be described later.

The retaining cylindrical portion A428 protrudes in a cylindrical shape having an inner diameter that is approximately half the outermost diameter of the transmission gear A461 of the transmission gear group A460. They are arranged to face the group A460. That is, the retainer cylindrical portion A428 is connected to the transmission gear A461.
It has a function of suppressing displacement in the shaft-side falling-off direction.

Incidentally, in this embodiment, a retaining screw (not shown) is fixed to the tip of the shaft support portion of the transmission gear A461. Therefore, as long as the screw does not loosen or fall off, it is possible to restrict the transmission gear A461 from being displaced in the shaft-side falling-off direction by the screw. As described above, in this embodiment, the transmission gear A461 is prevented from coming off from the shaft by the screw and the retaining cylindrical portion A428 in two stages. can be prevented.

The right edge of the guide plate portion A430 is parallel to the right edge of the main body plate portion A421.
21 and a plate-like body plate portion A431 arranged facing each other in a posture along a plane parallel to the plane formed by 21;
A plurality of long rectangular recesses A432 along the direction A416x are provided on the back side of the body plate portion A431. Inclined surface A433 inclined toward the front side, configured to assist displacement of (rear lid portion 443 of) first displacement member A440, and recessed portion A of support plate portion A420
A guide plate portion A434 formed in a long plate shape along the direction A416x with a width corresponding to the width of 425
and are mainly provided.

The main body plate portion A431 has a plurality of insertion holes A431a through which fastening screws are inserted in the peripheral portion thereof. The left side edge of the main body plate portion A431 is supported by the surface (side) of the side wall portion A421a raised from the left side edge of the main body plate portion A421 of the support plate portion A420 toward the front side. The guide plate portion A
430 can be stably fastened and fixed to the support plate portion A420.

Further, the main body plate portion A4 as a position passing through the front and back when the first displacement member A440 advances and retreats
31, the insertion hole A431a is arranged only at one substantially central position in the vertical width.
1 and the support plate portion A420 can be suppressed over the entire right edge portion, and compared to the case where a plurality of insertion hole portions A431a are arranged, the first displacement member A44
0 design freedom can be improved.

The long concave portion A432 is a concave portion that guides the displacement-stopping projecting portion A441e of the first displacement member A440 in the direction A416x, which is the direction in which the displacement-stopping projecting portion A441e of the first displacement member A440 is displaced. It is recessed with a length substantially equal to that of the . That is, the first displacement member A440
, the back side is not only guided by the guide hole A422 of the support plate portion A420, but also the long concave portion A
The front side is also guided by 432 .

The guide plate portion A434 has an electrical wiring FC formed of a flat cable on the right edge side.
Equipped with a plurality of claw portions A434a arranged at intervals slightly wider than the thickness of the claw portion A
An electric wiring FC whose end is connected to the first displacement member A440 is passed through the gap between 434a and temporarily fixed. By this. Electric wiring FC that is bent and displaced by displacement of the first displacement member A440
can be set to the position of the claw portion A434a, and the position of the electrical wiring FC on the left side of the claw portion A434a can be stabilized.

Therefore, the electric wiring FC composed of a flat cable is attached to the guide plate portion A434.
Therefore, when the first displacement member A440 is displaced to the front side of the guide plate portion A434 and the electric wiring FC is similarly displaced (see FIG. 346), the first Interference between the displacement member A440 and the electrical wiring FC can be avoided. The first displacement member A440 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 337 and 338. FIG.

337 is an exploded front perspective view of the first displacement member A440, and FIG. 338 is an exploded rear perspective view of the first displacement member A440. Note that FIG. 338 is shown in a different direction from FIG. 336 for convenience of explanation.

As shown in FIGS. 337 and 338, the first displacement member A440 is a guided plate portion A4 which is a plate-like portion guided along the direction A416x between the support plate portion A420 and the guide plate portion A430.
41, a plate formed of a colored (gold-plated in this embodiment) and light-impermeable resin material, pivotally supported by the guided plate portion A441, and displaced in conjunction with the guided plate portion A441. An interlocking plate portion A442 which is a shaped portion and an interlocking plate portion A44 which is fastened and fixed to the back side of the interlocking plate portion A442
2, a diffusion plate A444 formed in a plate shape from a colorless, light-transmitting resin material and arranged opposite to the back side of the interlocking plate portion A442, and the diffusion plate A444. and an ornamental board A445 arranged opposite to the back side of the diffuser plate A444 and having an outer shape substantially equal to the outer shape of the diffusion plate A444 and arranged opposite to the rear lid portion 443 .

Here, the interlocking plate portion A442, the rear lid portion 443, the diffusion plate A444, and the electrical board A445 are
Since they are fixed together, these will be explained first. That is, the interlocking plate portion A442
A plurality of positioning pins A442a projecting from the rear surface of the diffusion plate A444 are inserted into a plurality of insertion holes A
The interlocking plate portion A442 and the diffuser plate A444 are positioned relative to each other by being inserted through the diffuser plate A444a.
5, the diffusion plate A444 and the electrical decoration substrate A445 are positioned relative to each other.

Then, the plurality of insertion holes 4 of the rear lid portion 443 are inserted into the plurality of screw portions A442b of the interlocking plate portion A442.
43a is fastened and fixed, the diffusion plate A444 and the decorative substrate A445 between the interlocking plate portion A442 and the rear lid portion 443 are displaced (positioning pin height).
As a result, the diffusion plate A444 and the electrical board A445 can be stably fixed without directly inserting the fastening screws into the diffusion board A444 and the electrical board A445.

In this embodiment, a plurality of protruding ribs 443b projecting toward the front side near the outer periphery of the rear lid portion 443 come into contact with the electrical board A445 and press against the interlocking plate portion A442 and the diffusion plate A444. It is formed with a dimensional relationship that causes a load. Due to this pressing force, the diffusion plate A
444 and the electrical board A445 can be stably fixed to the interlocking plate portion A442.

The illumination board A445 has a plurality of light emitting means A445b such as LEDs (illustrated in a substantially square chip shape in FIG. 337) whose optical axis is directed toward the diffusion plate A444 on the front side.

The diffusion plate A444 has an axis-corresponding position A444 arranged opposite to the light emitting means A445b on the back side.
A wave pattern is formed from ridges that spread concentrically around c, and the outer edge of the wave pattern is formed at a position corresponding to the opening A442c of the interlocking plate portion A442.

A fitting portion A444d is formed on the front side of the diffuser plate A444, and has an outer shape slightly smaller than the inner shape of the opening A442c of the interlocking plate portion A442. be

With this configuration, the light emitted from the light emitting means A445b diffuses the diffusion plate A444.
The player can visually recognize the light that has passed through the aperture A442c among the lights that have passed through.

The electrical board A445 has a connector A445c arranged on the back side and connected with an electrical wiring FC composed of a flat cable. The electric wiring FC connected to the connector A445c is connected to the connector A445c from the rotation tip side of the interlocking plate portion A442.
As a result, the bending position of the electric wire FC can be configured on the rotation distal end side of the interlocking plate portion A442, and the degree of bending can be moderated.

The rear lid portion 443 includes a connector A445c and a circuit configuration device (not shown) (capacitor, resistor, etc.).
and a through hole A443d formed through the ventilation opening 416c in the direction A416x.

The tip of the electric wire FC connected to the connector A445c is arranged in the ventilation opening 443c where the connector A445c is located, but the electric wire FC is routed to the rear side of the rear lid portion 443 through the through hole A443d. . As a result, the electrical wiring FC can be sandwiched between the small-diameter rod-shaped portion 443e that partitions between the ventilation opening 443c and the through-hole A443d, and the electrical board A445. Wiring FC
can be prevented from being displaced. The through-hole A443d also has a role of forming a space for arranging the electric wire FC, and compared with the case where the through-hole A443d is not formed with a sufficient length along the direction A416x, the electric wire FC can reduce the load on the

In addition, in the present embodiment, the thin rod-shaped portion 443e is formed to protrude toward the electrical board A445 in the same manner as the projecting rib 443b. Therefore, the thin rod-shaped portion 443e and the electrical board A445
The gap between will be narrowed. With such a configuration, it is possible to limit the point at which a load is applied from the rear cover portion 443 to the electrical board A445. That is, only the protruding rib 443b and the thin rod-shaped portion 443e are configured to apply a load from the rear lid portion 443 to the electrical board A445.

As a result, even if the electric wire FC is displaced by the displacement of the first displacement member A440, it is possible to prevent the electric wire FC from coming out of the connector A445c.

Next, a connection mode between the interlocking plate portion A442 and the guided plate portion A441 and details of the guided plate portion A441 will be described. The interlocking plate portion A442 has a support shaft portion A442d protruding in a circular outer shape.
and a shaft support hole A442e, which is a circular opening coaxial with the central axis of the support shaft portion A442d, and is rotatably supported by the interlocking plate portion A442 about an axis parallel to the central axis of the support shaft portion A442d. and a roller member A442f which is a member made of resin and formed in a circular outer shape.

The guided plate portion A441 includes a main body plate portion A441a formed in a long plate shape from a resin material, a support shaft portion A441b projecting from an upper end portion of the main body plate portion A441a, and a support shaft portion A441b. A shaft support hole A441c, which is circular and coaxial with the central axis of the support shaft portion A441b, is drilled at the lower end of the main body plate portion A441a, and a long straight line from the front to the front side of the main body plate portion A441a. A plurality of projecting guide ribs A441d, a plurality of displacement stop projections A441e projecting toward the front side in an elongated shape along a direction intersecting (perpendicular to) the guide ribs A441d, and an electric wire. An inclined surface A441f inclined outward (lower left side) toward the front side at a position opposed to the electrical wiring FC connected to the connector A445c of the decorative substrate A445, and a main body plate portion A4.
A plurality of guide grooves A4 formed as small-diameter grooves along the direction A416x on the back side of 41a
41g, a recessed portion A441h recessed along the direction A416x from the upper right edge of the main body plate portion A441a, and a fastening portion protruding from the back side of the main body plate portion A441a in such a manner that a fastening screw can be fastened. and A441i.

The support shaft portion A441b and the shaft support hole A441c are used for connection with the interlocking plate portion A442. As for the method of assembly, the shaft support hole A442e of the interlocking plate portion A442 is connected to the support shaft portion A441b.
After arranging the interlocking plate portion A 442 so as to be arranged in the shape of the axis of the interlocking plate portion A
442 is moved with respect to the guided plate portion A441 so that the support shaft portion A is inserted into the shaft supported hole A442e.
441b, and the support shaft portion A442d is inserted into the shaft-supported hole A441c, respectively, to form a shaft-supported state. In addition, the shaft support hole A442e, the support shaft portion A441b, and the shaft support hole A
441c and the support shaft portion A442d are configured with dimensions such that a slight gap is formed therebetween so as to be rotatable.

In this embodiment, after the interlocking plate portion A442 and the guided plate portion A441 are axially supported by the above-described method, a screw for preventing slippage is fixed to the tip of the support shaft portion A441b. The diameter of the head of is larger than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole A442e, thereby preventing the interlocking plate portion A442 from slipping out of the guided plate portion A441.

The guide ridge portion A441d is a narrow diameter portion for narrowing the contact area with the back surface of the guide plate portion A430. As a result, the frictional force generated between the guide plate portion A430 and the main body plate portion A431 can be reduced, and the guided plate portion A441 can be smoothly displaced.

The displacement-stopping projecting portion A441e is formed with a width slightly shorter than the width of the elongated recess A432 of the guide plate portion A430, and enters the elongated recess A432 in the assembled state of the first operation unit A400 (see FIG. 324). It is formed with a protruding length.

When the guided plate portion A441 is arranged at the end of the displacement, the formation position of the displacement stopping protruding portion A441e is designed so that the displacement stopping protruding portion A441e is arranged at the end of the long concave portion A432 in the longitudinal direction. be done. Therefore, even if the guided plate portion A441 does not normally stop at the end of the displacement, the displacement stopping protruding portion A441e can be locked by the long concave portion A432 so that the guided plate portion A4
41 displacement can be regulated.

The inclined surface A441f is an electric wire F connected to the connector A445c of the electrical board A445.
Plane for receiving and guiding C. By forming the inclined plate portion A
The load applied to the electrical wiring FC due to the displacement of 441 can be suppressed. Note that the flat type (
A mode of bending of the electric wiring FC composed of the flat cable will be described later.

The guide groove A441g is a groove that straddles the guide ridge A424 of the support plate portion A420, and is formed with a groove width larger than the thickness of the guide ridge A424. Equipped with a projecting portion that projects in a circular shape. The distance between the tips of the protruding parts is the guide ridge A424
The dimension is slightly longer than the thickness of the As a result, the direction in which the guide groove A441g extends is suppressed from deviating from the longitudinal direction of the guide ridge A424, while the guide groove A441g and the guide ridge A4 are suppressed.
24 can be reduced.

The recessed portion A441h is a relief portion that is recessed to avoid interference with a portion used for fastening by a fastening screw that is inserted through the insertion hole portion A431a on the right side of the guide plate portion A430. Thus, in the present embodiment, the right end of the guided plate portion A441 can be arranged on the right side of the insertion hole portion A431a.

The fastening portion A441i is inserted through the first guide hole A422a of the support plate portion A420 in the assembled state (see FIG. 324) and connected to the displacement-side long hole A453 of the slide link A450.
That is, the driving force is transmitted to the fastening portion A441i via the slide link A450, thereby displacing the first displacement member A440 including the guided plate portion A441.

Returning to FIGS. 335 and 336, description will be made. The slide link A450 is connected to the support plate portion A42.
A long link A451 rotatably supported by the shaft support A427 of No. 0 and its long link A4
51 and a deformed slide member A4 supported so as to be able to move in parallel along the direction A416x
55 and .

The long link A451 is a member formed in the shape of a long rod, and has a supported shaft hole A452 drilled with a diameter that allows the shaft support portion A427 to be inserted therethrough, and a long side with respect to the shaft supported hole A452. Displacement-side long hole A453 drilled in the end portion in the shape of a long hole along the longitudinal direction, and displacement-side long hole A45
A long hole A45 on the transmission side is formed in a long hole shape along the longitudinal direction at the end opposite to the side on which 3 is arranged.
4 and .

The odd-shaped slide member A455 is arranged in the recessed portion A421b of the main body plate portion A421, which is recessed on the front side of the base end surface of the support plate portion A420 from which the shaft support portion A427 protrudes.
21 and the long link A451; and a plurality of guided projecting portions A455c projecting in an outer circular shape toward the front side of the main body plate portion A455a and inserted into the second guide holes A422b of the support plate portion A420,
A spring hooking portion A that protrudes toward the front side of the main body plate portion A455a in a hook-like shape and is inserted into the through hole A423 of the support plate portion A420 so that the end portion of the coil spring ASP1 is hooked (locked).
455d, a detected plate portion A455e formed in a thin plate shape that can enter the detection gap of the detection sensor A426, and a deformed transmitted portion A456 to which driving force is transmitted from the transmission gear group A460.

The transmission gear group A460 is composed of a pair of gears rotatably supported by the support box portion A470. A pinned gear A462 meshed on the opposite side of the drive gear AMG1
and a same-phase member A465 that follows the pinned gear A462 in phase.

The pinned gear A462 has a transmission protrusion A that protrudes from an eccentric position toward the front side in a circular shape.
463, and an arcuate wall portion A464 formed as an arcuate wall portion around the rotational axis of the pinned gear A462 with the transmission protrusion A463 as the base end.

The arcuate wall portion A464 has a central angle of approximately 230 degrees, and is shorter in length toward the front than the transmission protrusion A463. Therefore, as will be described later, the transmission protrusion A463 is also the arc wall portion A.
Similarly, 464 is a portion that transmits the load to the heteromorphic transmitted portion A456, but the load generation location differs in the front-rear direction. That is, the position where the load is generated via the transmission projection A463 (if the load is generated at multiple points, the middle point or average point) is closer to the front side than the position where the load is generated via the circular arc wall portion A464. becomes. Since the displacement mode of the first displacement member A440 can be described by the above-described configuration, the displacement mode of the first displacement member A440 will be described below.

339(a) is a front view of the front unit FU, FIG. 339(b) is a rear view of the front unit FU, and FIG. 339(c) is CCCXXXIXc-CCCXX of FIG.
FIG. 11 is a partial cross-sectional view of the first operating unit A400 taken along line XIXc;

In order to facilitate understanding, the guide plate portion A430 is illustrated by imaginary lines in FIG. 339(a), and the transmission gear A461 and the electrical wiring FC are omitted in FIG. As for A462, only the transmission protrusion A463 and the arcuate wall portion A464 are shown, and in FIG. 339(c), the front cover A410 is shown in phantom lines. Also, in FIGS. 339(a) and 339(b), illustration of the rear unit BU is omitted unless otherwise specified.
The same applies to FIGS. 340 to 345 below.

In FIGS. 339(a) to 339(c), the first displacement member A440 is connected to the drive motor AMT1.
is arranged at the retracted position before the excitation of . In this state, the deformed slide member A455 is arranged on the outermost side (left side), and the length of the coil spring ASP1 is the shortest. is the weakest.

As shown in FIG. 339(b), the deformed transmitted portion A456 is a portion that engages with the gear with pin A462, and is located on the projecting position (upper right) side of the transmission protrusion A463.
A protruding plate portion A456a protruding from 5a in a plate shape toward the rear side, and a protruding plate portion A456 at a retracted position (lower left) side of the protruding plate portion A456a at a distance equal to or larger than the diameter of the transmission protruding portion A463.
a, and the projecting plate portion A456a and the opposing arrangement portion A
456b and an insertion gap A456c formed between them.

The protruding length of the protruding plate portion A456a is longer than the length of the opposing arrangement portion A456b in the same direction, and in the assembled state (see FIG. 324), the transmission protruding portion A463 and the arc wall portion A46
4 in the moving direction.

The opposing arrangement portion A456b can abut against the transmission projection A463a in the movement direction (
overlap), on the other hand, it is not in contact with the circular arc wall portion A464 in the moving direction (does not overlap).
That is, the opposing arrangement portion A456b and the arcuate wall portion A464 are formed in a dimensional relationship that creates a front-to-rear gap.

The insertion gap A456c is configured to be able to receive the transmission projection A463, and an escape portion A456d formed in a shape along the moving direction of the transmission projection A463 is formed on the open end side. The relief portion A456d allows the transmission projection A463 to smoothly move forward and backward with respect to the insertion gap A456c (with low resistance).

Although illustration of the transmission gear A461 is omitted in FIG. 339(b), the actual assembled state (
324), a pair of transmission gears A461, which are gears of the same shape, are arranged between the driving gear AMG1 and the pinned gear A462, and transfer the driving force of the driving gear AMG1 to the pinned gear A4.
62.

As shown in FIG. 339(b), the first displacement member A44 guided by the first guide hole A422a
0 and the odd-shaped slide member A455 guided by the second guide hole A422b form the long link A
451. That is, the long link A451 that is rotationally displaced about the pivotal support A427
As a result, the first displacement member A440 and the deformed slide member A455 are displaced in opposite directions parallel to the direction A416x.

As shown in FIG. 339(b), the detected plate portion A455e enters the detection gap of the detection sensor A426 when the first displacement member A440 is arranged at the retracted position.

As shown in FIG. 339(c), the first displacement member A440 has a roller member A442f disposed between the guide wall portion A471b of the support box portion A470 and the guide portion A413 of the front cover A410. The placement of A442f is the guide wall portion A47 of the support box portion A470.
1b and the guide portion A413 of the front cover A410, the guided plate portion A44
The interlocking plate portion A442 is configured to rotate around the pivoted support hole A442e in accordance with one slide displacement. Operation diagrams for explaining the displacement mode of the first displacement member A440 in chronological order will be explained.

340(a) is a front view of the front unit FU, FIG. 340(b) is a rear view of the front unit FU, and FIG. 340(c) is CCCXXXIXc-CCCXX in FIG.
FIG. 11 is a partial cross-sectional view of the first operating unit A400 taken along line XIXc;

In FIGS. 340(a) to 340(c), the driving motor AMT1 is excited to rotate, the roller member A442f is at the same position as in FIG.
0 is in contact with the bent corner of the guide wall A471b.

By the time the state shown in FIG. 339 changes to the state shown in FIG. 340, the pinned gear A462 rotates from the initial angle d0 by the first angle d1. With this rotation, the transmission protrusion A463 pushes the protruding plate portion A456a, thereby causing the deformed slide member A455 to slide and displace, and the slide displacement to be transmitted to the first displacement member A440 via the long link A451. be. As described above, the arc wall portion A464 and the facing arrangement portion A456b have a front-to-rear gap, so that the arc wall portion A464 can be arranged to overlap the facing arrangement portion A456b in the front-to-rear direction. (See FIG. 340(b)).

In the present embodiment, the straight line connecting the rotation axis of the pinned gear A462 and the center of the transmission protrusion A463 is parallel to the direction A416x at the initial angle d0, but the present invention is not limited to this. .

For example, at the initial angle d0, the straight line connecting the rotation axis of the pinned gear A462 and the center of the transmission protrusion A463 is inclined by 10 degrees with respect to the direction A416x (10 degrees in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the pinned gear A462). slanted) straight line. In this case, the section of 10 degrees from the initial angle d0 can be configured as a section in which no load is applied to the projecting plate portion A456a in the traveling direction, so that excessive driving resistance is prevented immediately after the start of rotation. can be avoided.

In other words, a section of 10 degrees from the initial angle d0 can be used as a run-up section, and the protruding plate portion A456a can be vigorously pushed after being rotated by 10 degrees from the initial angle d0. Suppression can be achieved. Also, when driving in the direction returning to the initial angle d0, a section of 10 degrees can be used as a deceleration section.

341(a) is a front view of the front unit FU, FIG. 341(b) is a rear view of the front unit FU, and FIG. 341(c) is CCCXXXIXc-CCCXX in FIG.
FIG. 11 is a partial cross-sectional view of the first operating unit A400 taken along line XIXc;

FIGS. 341(a) to 341(c) show a state in which the drive motor AMT1 is excited to rotate and the roller member A442f contacts the intermediate portion of the guide wall portion A471b of the support box portion A470.

By the time the state shown in FIG. 339 changes to the state shown in FIG. 341, the pinned gear A462 rotates from the initial angle d0 by the second angle d2. With this rotation, the transmission protrusion A463 pushes the protruding plate portion A456a, thereby causing the deformed slide member A455 to slide and displace, and the slide displacement to be transmitted to the first displacement member A440 via the long link A451. be. As described above, the arc wall portion A464 and the facing arrangement portion A456b have a front-to-rear gap, so that the arc wall portion A464 can be arranged to overlap the facing arrangement portion A456b in the front-to-rear direction. (See FIG. 341(b)).

342(a) is a front view of the front unit FU, FIG. 342(b) is a rear view of the front unit FU, and FIG. 342(c) is CCCXXXIXc-CCCXX in FIG.
FIG. 11 is a partial cross-sectional view of the first operating unit A400 taken along line XIXc;

FIGS. 342(a) to 342(c) show a state in which the drive motor AMT1 is excited and rotated, and the longitudinal direction of the long link A451 is substantially perpendicular to the direction A416x.

By the time the state shown in FIG. 339 changes to the state shown in FIG. 342, the pinned gear A462 rotates from the initial angle d0 by the third angle d3. With this rotation, the transmission protrusion A463 pushes the protruding plate portion A456a, thereby causing the deformed slide member A455 to slide and displace, and the slide displacement to be transmitted to the first displacement member A440 via the long link A451. be. As described above, the arc wall portion A464 and the facing arrangement portion A456b have a front-to-rear gap, so that the arc wall portion A464 can be arranged to overlap the facing arrangement portion A456b in the front-to-rear direction. (See FIG. 342(b)).

In this embodiment, when the first displacement member A440 starts to slide along a plane perpendicular to the front-rear direction (see FIG. 342), the longitudinal direction of the long link A451 and the displacement direction of the deformed slide member A455 (the direction parallel to the direction A416x) are substantially perpendicular to each other, the first displacement member A440 can be smoothly slid in one direction (on the same plane).

That is, the direction of the load applied from the displacement-side elongated hole A453 to the fastening portion A441i is directed to one side (lower side in this embodiment) with respect to the displacement direction (direction parallel to the direction A416x) of the deformed slide member A455. can be limited. As a result, compared to the case where the load applied to the first displacement member A440 is reversed in the direction intersecting the displacement direction of the first displacement member A440 during the slide displacement of the first displacement member A440, the first displacement member A440 rattling of the slide displacement can be suppressed.

343(a) is a front view of the front unit FU, FIG. 343(b) is a rear view of the front unit FU, and FIG. 343(c) is CCCXXXIXc-CCCXX in FIG.
FIG. 11 is a partial cross-sectional view of the first operating unit A400 taken along line XIXc;

In FIGS. 343(a) to 343(c), the drive motor AMT1 is excited to rotate, and the roller member A442f shifts from the state shown in FIG.
44(c)) is shown in a state in which it is placed at approximately the middle position of the displacement until reaching the state of 44(c)).

By the time the state in FIG. 339 changes to the state in FIG. 343, the pinned gear A462 rotates by a fourth angle d4 from the initial angle d0. With this rotation, the transmission protrusion A463 pushes the protruding plate portion A456a, thereby causing the deformed slide member A455 to slide and displace, and the slide displacement to be transmitted to the first displacement member A440 via the long link A451. be. As described above, the arc wall portion A464 and the facing arrangement portion A456b have a front-to-rear gap, so that the arc wall portion A464 can be arranged to overlap the facing arrangement portion A456b in the front-to-rear direction. (See FIG. 343(b)).

344(a) is a front view of the front unit FU, FIG. 344(b) is a rear view of the front unit FU, and FIG. 344(c) is CCCXXXIXc-CCCXX in FIG.
FIG. 11 is a partial cross-sectional view of the first operating unit A400 taken along line XIXc;

FIGS. 344(a) to 344(c) show a state (also referred to as an extended state) in which the drive motor AMT1 is excited to rotate and the first displacement member A440 is arranged at the extended position.

By the time the state shown in FIG. 339 changes to the state shown in FIG. 344, the pinned gear A462 rotates from the initial angle d0 by the fifth angle d5. With this rotation, the transmission protrusion A463 pushes the protruding plate portion A456a, thereby causing the deformed slide member A455 to slide and displace, and the slide displacement to be transmitted to the first displacement member A440 via the long link A451. be. As described above, the arc wall portion A464 and the facing arrangement portion A456b have a front-to-rear gap, so that the arc wall portion A464 can be arranged to overlap the facing arrangement portion A456b in the front-to-rear direction. (See FIG. 344(b)).

When the pinned gear A462 rotates further from the state shown in FIG. 344, the transmission protrusion A463 begins to displace in the direction opposite to the direction A416x. Here, since the arcuate wall portion A464 and the protruding plate portion A456a are formed in a dimensional relationship to abut in the direction A416x, the transmission protruding portion A
463 separates from the protruding plate portion A456a, the arc wall portion A464
Displacement of the deformed slide member A455 is restricted in a state of contact with 456a.

The contact point between the arcuate wall portion A464 and the projecting plate portion A456a is arranged in a straight line parallel to the direction A416x passing through the rotation axis of the pinned gear A462. Therefore, the load applied from the protruding plate portion A456a to the arcuate wall portion A464 passes through the rotation axis of the pinned gear A462. can be prevented.

Furthermore, since the arcuate wall portion A464 is curved, the contact area between the arcuate wall portion A464 and the projecting plate portion A456a can be suppressed (theoretically, since line contact can be achieved, the contact area is 0). Therefore, when the pinned gear A462 further rotates from the state shown in FIG. ), it is possible to avoid the need for extra driving force for restricting the displacement of the odd-shaped slide member A455. That is, the displacement of the deformed slide member A455 can be restricted only by the driving force required to rotate the pinned gear A462.

In addition, considering the deformation due to wear of the resin material that actually constitutes the arcuate wall portion A464 and the protruding plate portion A456a, the contact area increases over time, and the arc wall portion A464 and the protruding plate portion A456a increase.
It is thought that the frictional force generated between a and a increases. To deal with this, a low-friction seal may be applied to the arcuate wall portion A464 and the projecting plate portion A456a, or a lubricant (such as grease) may be applied. In this embodiment, since the ideal contact area is formed small, the area that needs to be treated with a low-friction seal or lubricant can be reduced. Therefore, countermeasure costs can be suppressed.

As shown in FIG. 344(b), the outer surface of the transmission projection A463 and the outer surface of the arcuate wall A464 are formed in the same circular shape coaxial with the rotation axis of the pin gear A462. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the timing of transition from the contact state with the protrusion A463 to the contact state with the arcuate wall portion A464.

FIG. 345 is a rear view of the front unit FU. FIG. 345 shows a state in which the driving motor AMT1 is excited to rotate, the first displacement member A440 is arranged at the extended position, and the transmission projection A463 contacts the deformed transmitted portion A456.

339 to 345, the pinned gear A462 rotates from the initial angle d0 by the sixth angle d6 (360 degrees or more) (see FIG. 360). Figure 344
After the state of , the transmission projection A463 does not push the projecting plate portion A456a, and is displaced without contacting other members. 345, the protruding plate portion A456a has an arc wall portion A
344(b) is maintained (displacement in the return direction is restricted). That is, the contact between the transmission protrusion A463 and the deformed transmitted portion A456 occurs in a state where the first displacement member A440 is arranged at the overhang position.

As shown in FIG. 345, the contact position between the transmitting protrusion A463 and the deformed transmitted portion A456 is the position on the projecting position side of the first displacement member A440 with respect to the insertion gap A456c. That is, the location (insertion gap A456c) where the load is applied to the deformed transmitted portion A456 due to the displacement of the first displacement member A440 is different from the location where the deformed transmitted portion A456 in FIG. 345 is subjected to the load. As a result, the pinned gear A462 unintentionally overrotates, and the transmission projection A4
Even if an overload occurs in 63 or deformed transmitted portion A456, it is possible to avoid a change in the shape of insertion gap A456c. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the displacement of the deformed slide member A455 will be affected after the overload occurs.

In the state of FIG. 345, the direction of the load applied from the transmission protrusion A463 to the odd-shaped slide member A455 is the direction (upper right direction) toward the retracted position side of the first displacement member A440.
Since the deformed slide member A455 is arranged at the end of the movement range in this direction, the deformed slide member A455 is prevented from being displaced by the load applied from the transmission protrusion A463.

In this way, while avoiding the deformed slide member A455 from being displaced, the transmission protrusion A4
The load applied from 63 can be softened by elastic deformation (deflection and expansion/contraction) of the opposing arrangement portion A456b.

As shown in FIG. 345, the portion with which the transmission projection A463 abuts is the side wall of the opposing arrangement portion A456b on the detection plate portion A455e side.
5e is loaded. In the present embodiment, when an overload occurs in the deformed transmitted portion A456 due to excessive rotation of the pinned gear A462, the detected plate portion A455e is preferentially broken. That is, compared with the transmission protrusion A463, the detected plate portion A455e is configured to be weaker.

As a result, it is possible to avoid destruction of the structure related to the displacement of the deformed slide member A455 among the structures of the deformed transmitted portion A456 due to the load due to the excessive rotation of the pinned gear A462. Therefore, the durability of the deformed slide member A455 can be improved.

When the detected plate portion A455e is broken, even if the first displacement member A440 returns to the retracted position, the detected plate portion A455e is not detected by the detection sensor A426.
Based on the detection failure of 455e, it is possible to assume the possibility that the pinned gear A462 has over-rotated, and timely maintenance can be performed.

The design aspect of the detected plate portion A455e is not limited at all, and various aspects are exemplified. For example, every time the first displacement member A440 is displaced, the transmission projection A463 comes into contact with the deformed transmitted portion A456, and the drive motor AMT1 is controlled so as to be energized until a slight load is applied. where is likely to occur (for example, transmission protrusion A463)
It may be designed so that the plate portion A455e to be detected is broken by accumulation of a load of the number of times of contact that is approximately the same as the number of times of durable operation. In this case, in addition to being able to assume the possibility of occurrence of excessive rotation of the pinned gear A462, it is possible to inform the replacement timing of the transmission protrusion A463, so that timely maintenance can be performed.

346(a) is a cross-sectional view of the first operation unit A400 taken along the line CCCXLVIa-CCCXLVIa in FIG. 339(a), and FIG. 346(b) is the CCC in FIG. 344(a).
FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view of the first operating unit A400 along line XLVIb-CCCXLVIb; FIG. 346(a) shows the first displacement member A440 in the retracted position (also referred to as retracted state), and FIG. 346(b) illustrates the first displacement member A440 in the extended position (extended state). ) are illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 346(a) and 346(b), the connector A of the first displacement member A440
An electrical wiring FC formed as a flat cable is connected to 445c.
The electric wiring FC is loosely arranged in the space between the guided plate portion A441 and the rear lid portion 443. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 346(a), the inclined surface A441f of the guided plate portion A441 is connected to the electrical wiring FC.
formed so as not to abut against the That is, the upper edge of the slanted surface A441f is positioned slightly further back than the end of the slanted surface A433 of the guide plate portion A430 (the end facing the first displacement member A440). position), and the inclined surface A4
A space can be secured between 41f and the electrical wiring FC.

When the first displacement member A440 is in the extended state, the electric wiring FC retreats from the displacement trajectory of the second displacement member A490. be. As a result, the space VE, which will be described later, can be used both as a space into which the electric wiring FC enters and a space into which the second displacement member A490 enters, so that the space required for arrangement can be reduced.

The electric wiring FC is arranged in the space VE formed on the back side of the first displacement member A440 in the retracted state of the first displacement member A440. As a result, the first displacement member A440 functions as shielding means for shielding the field of view to the electric wiring FC, and the electric wiring FC is viewed from the front, rear, left, and right.
can be prevented from being viewed. The space VE will be explained.

The space VE is a surface (
This is a space behind the interlocking plate portion A442 side formed with the opening A442c formed in an inclined posture toward the third pattern display device 81 side. In this way the space V
E is easy because the first displacement member A440 is formed in the shape of a plate, and the first displacement member A440 is configured in an inclined posture that is easy for the player to see in the retracted state in which the first displacement member A440 is wide in the front-rear direction. formed in

On the other hand, since this space VE is also a space into which a second displacement member A490, which will be described later, is displaced, it is preferable to maintain a wide field of view in a front view, considering the visibility of the second displacement member A490. Since the field of view in a front view spreads at an angle centering on the player's eyes, the outline of the space VE is preferably formed so as to be inclined away from the third symbol display device 81 toward the rear side, but this is not the case. In embodiments, for ease of manufacture, the space VE
(boundary surface on the far side from the third pattern display device 81) is formed of a non-tilted surface in the front-rear direction.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the space VE created for improving the visibility of the first displacement member A440 and the second displacement member A490 is effectively used as an area in which the wires are laid out. As a result, the slack portion of the electrical wiring FC is moved to the third position with respect to the first displacement member A440 at the projecting position.
It is not necessary to secure an area (in other words, an area between the outer wall A312 of the rear case A310 and the first displacement member A440) necessary for loosening the wiring when arranged on the opposite side of the pattern display device 81. can be

Therefore, compared to the case where the slack portion of the electric wiring FC is arranged on the opposite side of the third pattern display device 81 with respect to the first displacement member A440 at the projecting position, the electric wiring FC can be arranged inward of the rear case A310. The displacement end of the first displacement member A440 can be brought close to the outer wall A312 of the rear case A310 while being accommodated.

As shown in FIG. 346, the first displacement member A440 is arranged such that the front surface of the interlocking plate portion A442 is located on the front limit line FL in the extended position (see FIG. 346(b)), and the retracted position (see FIG. 346(a)
))), at least a portion of the interlocking plate portion A442 (mainly, the overhang position side portion) overhangs the front side beyond the front limit line FL. This overhang is the first displacement member A44
0 is displaced from the retracted position, the first displacement member A440 moves to the retracted position (Fig. 339 (
c)) to the completion of the posture change of the first displacement member A440 (see FIG. 342(c)). , the first displacement member A440 can protrude to the front side beyond the front limit line FL.

Therefore, it is necessary to form a space on the front side of the front limit line FL to avoid collision with the first displacement member A440. ), but in this embodiment, the decorative board A416 is placed at the first
By not forming the displacement member A440 on the retracted position side (left side in FIG. 346), the first displacement member A4
40 forms a space for overhanging. In addition, by forming only the diffuser plate A415 to protrude toward the retracted position side of the first displacement member A440, the region where the light emitted from the light emitting means A416a disposed on the electrical board A416 can be seen is the electrical board A416. It avoids being limited to the formation range of A416.

In this way, by limiting the formation range of the electrical board A416 and forming the diffusion plate A415 projecting from the outer edge of the electrical board A416, the electrical board A416 and the first displacement member A44
It is possible to secure a sufficient range for visually recognizing the light emission effect by the illumination board A416 while narrowing the space before and after the placement of 0.

With reference to FIGS. 347 to 352, changes in the appearance of the first operation unit A400 caused by the displacement of the first displacement member A440 will be described from the viewpoint of lighting effect. This change in appearance is caused by the fact that the first displacement member A440 is partially visible through the through hole A412 of the front cover A410 when the first displacement member A440 is arranged in the extended position (position after excitation). be.

Figures 347(a), 347(b) and 348 are front views of the first operation unit A400. FIG. 347(a) shows the retracted state of the first displacement member A440, and FIG.
b) shows a state in which the first displacement member A440 is arranged in the middle of the displacement section (the position shown in FIG. 342), and FIG. 348 shows the overhanging state of the first displacement member A440. . 347(b) and 348, the front cover A41 of the first displacement member A440
The shape of the part hidden in 0 is illustrated with hidden lines.

A diffusion plate A415 for diffusing the light emitted from the light emitting means A416a provided on the electrical board A416 is disposed on the rear side of the front cover A410.
It is divided into the above-described first area AC1 and second area AC2 (see FIG. 330).

The first displacement means 440 is arranged on the rear side of the diffusion plate A415 at least at the overhang position, and the light emitted from the light emitting means A445b (see FIG. 337) and passed through the opening A442c travels toward the diffusion plate A415. Here, although the opening A442c of the first displacement means 440 is displaced to a position overlapping with the first area AC1 in front view, the decorative substrate A41 is located in the first area AC1.
6 is provided, the light passing through the opening A442c is shielded by the electrical board A416.

Therefore, the light passing through the aperture A442c can reach the diffusion plate A415 in the second area AC2. In other words, in the second area AC2, the light emitted from the light emitting means A416a (see FIG. 329) arranged on the electrical board A416 and diffused by the diffusion plate A415 and the light emitting means A445b of the first displacement means 440 (see FIG. 337) can be seen in a mixed state with the light emitted from.

More specifically, the mode of the second area AC2 is to turn on the light emitting means A416a and turn on the light emitting means A
445b, a mode in which the light emitting means A416a is turned off and the light emitting means A445b is turned on, a mode in which both the light emitting means A416a and the light emitting means A445b are turned on, and a mode in which both the light emitting means A416a and the light emitting means A445b are turned off. It is configured to be switchable in at least four modes.

In this embodiment, the aspect of the second area AC2 can be visually recognized through the through hole A412 of the front cover A410.
It has a plurality of long holes A412a formed at three locations along a straight line along the edge of 410 on the side of the third pattern display device 81 .

As shown in FIG. 348, among the plurality of long holes A412a, the central long hole A412a is arranged to face the opening A442c of the first displacement means 440, and the long holes A412a on both sides thereof are arranged to face the opening A442.
c (not facing each other). As a result, the light emitting means A is more visible through the long holes A412a in the center than through the long holes A412a on both sides.
The visibility of the light emitted from 445b can be improved.

For example, in a state where the first displacement member A440 is arranged at the extended position, the light emitting means A44
The light emitted from 5b can be configured to be visible through the central elongated hole A412a and invisible through the elongated holes A412a on both sides. As a result, through the long hole A412a in the center, the light emitted from the light emitting means A416a and the light emitted from the light emitting means A445b can be seen in a mixed state, and through the long holes A412a on both sides, the light emitted from the light emitting means A416
The light emitted from the light emitting means A445b can be made visible (the light emitted from the light emitting means A445b is difficult to see).

Here, the aspect of the front cover A410 (emission color, brightness, etc.) is determined by the first displacement member A440.
While the light emitting means A445b of the light emitting means A445b is extinguished, it depends on the light emitting mode of the light emitting means A416a (see FIG. 329). Therefore, even when the first displacement member A440 is arranged at the extended position (see FIG. 348), if the light emitting means A445b is turned off, the effect of the light emitting means 416b on the lighting effect can be reduced. That is, it is possible to displace the first displacement member A440 to the extended position without causing a change in the front view of the front cover A410.

On the other hand, when the light emitting means A445b is turned on in the state of being arranged at the projecting position 440, the long hole A412a formed at a position closer to the third pattern display device 81 in common with each first operation unit A400 is illuminated. Since the light emitting mode changes, the player's line of sight can be guided to the third symbol display device 81 side.

In addition, the effect of the change of the aspect visually recognized through the through-hole A412 is not limited to this. For example, in a state in which the first displacement members A440 of the first operation unit A400, which are arranged in a set of five pieces, are arranged in the extended position, first, the light emitting means A445b of the first displacement member A440 arranged in the lower left is turned on. Then, at the timing of turning off the light emitting means A445b, the light emitting means A445b of the first displacement member A440 adjacent clockwise in the front view is turned on, and at the timing of turning off the light emitting means A445b of the first displacement member A440 adjacent clockwise in the front view, next Light emitting means A4 of displacement member A440
45b may be lighted in such a manner that the light emitting means A 445b are sequentially turned on clockwise when viewed from the front.

In this case, by keeping the light emitting means 416b lit, the brightness of the front cover A410 itself is maintained, and only the form of the light seen through the elongated holes A412a is sequentially changed clockwise in the front view. can be executed.

Here, the light emission modes of the other first operation units A400A, A400B, A400C, and A400D will be described. The first operation unit A400A is two
The first operation unit A400B is the third unit clockwise from the bottom left when viewed from the front, and the first operation unit A400C is the fourth unit clockwise from the bottom left when viewed from the front. , the first operation unit A400D is the fifth unit clockwise from the lower left in the front view. The main differences of the first motion units A400A, A400B, A400C, and A400D from the first motion unit A400 are the displacement direction of the first displacement member A440 and the shape of the opening A442c. Therefore, the first operation units A400A, A400B, A40
Apertures WA, WB, WC, and apertures WA, WB, WC,
WD is shown, and other configurations are denoted by the same reference numerals as those of the first operation unit A400 for convenience.

Figures 349(a) and 349(b) are front views of the first operation unit A400A.
Note that FIG. 349(a) shows a state in which the first displacement member A440 is arranged at an intermediate position (same position as shown in FIG. 342), and FIG. 349(b) shows the first displacement member A4
40 is shown in the extended position.

As shown in FIGS. 349(a) and 349(b), in the first operation unit A400A,
Unlike the first operation unit A400, the opening WA is configured to overlap the elongated holes A412a at both ends when viewed from the front. Furthermore, since the width of the opening WA changes along the displacement direction of the first displacement member A440 (longer on the retracted position side), as the first displacement member A440 approaches the overhang position, the width of the opening WA and both ends increases. The overlapping area with the long hole A412a can be increased. This makes it possible to change the arrangement of the first displacement member A440 and how the light viewed through the elongated hole A412a looks in conjunction with each other.

Figures 350(a) and 350(b) are front views of the first operation unit A400B.
In addition, FIG. 350(a) shows a state in which the first displacement member A440 is arranged at an intermediate position (the same position as shown in FIG. 342), and FIG. 350(b) shows the first displacement member A4
40 is shown in the extended position.

As shown in FIGS. 350(a) and 350(b), in the first operation unit A400B,
Unlike the first motion unit A400, the opening WB is configured to overlap the long holes A412a at both ends in a front view. It is configured to change so as to repeat enlargement and contraction with each other. This will
The long hole A41 in the center while the first displacement member A440 is displaced from the retracted position to the extended position
The overlapping area of 2a and the opening WB is configured so that it is maximized in the state shown in FIG. 350(a), temporarily reduced as the first displacement member A440 is displaced, and then increased again in the state shown in FIG. 350(b). can do. As a result, while the first displacement member A440 is displaced in one direction, it is possible to change the appearance of the light seen through the central long hole A412a in two directions (enlargement direction and contraction direction).

Figures 351(a) and 351(b) are front views of the first operation unit A400C.
In addition, FIG. 351(a) shows a state in which the first displacement member A440 is arranged at an intermediate position (the same position as shown in FIG. 342), and FIG. 351(b) shows the first displacement member A4
40 is shown in the extended position.

As shown in FIGS. 351(a) and 351(b), in the first operation unit A400C,
Unlike the first motion unit A400, the opening WC is configured to overlap the long holes A412a at both ends in front view, and the width of the opening WC is along the displacement direction of the first displacement member A440. It is configured to change so as to repeat enlargement and contraction with each other. That is, the opening W
C is tapered and widened in the direction crossing the displacement direction of the first displacement member A440 near the upper end.

As a result, the overlapping area between the left and right long holes A412a and the opening WC while the first displacement member A440 is displaced from the retracted position to the overhanging position is temporarily reduced and then increased again as the first displacement member A440 is displaced. can be configured as As a result, the first displacement member A4
While 40 is displaced in one direction, it is possible to change the appearance of light visually through the long holes A412a at both ends in two directions (enlargement direction and contraction direction).

Figures 352(a) and 352(b) are front views of the first operation unit A400D.
In addition, FIG. 352(a) shows a state in which the first displacement member A440 is arranged at an intermediate position (the same position as shown in FIG. 342), and FIG. 352(b) shows the first displacement member A4
40 is shown in the extended position.

As shown in FIGS. 352(a) and 352(b), in the first operation unit A400D,
Unlike the first operation unit A400, the opening WD is configured in a branched shape when viewed from the front. That is, the opening WD is formed in a branched shape in the vicinity of the lower end so as to widen toward the retracted position side of the first displacement member A440.

As a result, it is possible to divide the overlapping range of the central long hole A412a and the opening WD while the first displacement member A440 is displaced from the retracted position to the extended position. That is, the mode of light visually recognized through the central long hole A412a is changed from the mode in which the entire central long hole A412a emits light uniformly (see FIG. 352(a)), and the central long hole A412a is divided into multiple ranges. 352(b)).

In addition, in the first operation unit A400D, the case where the edge of the opening WD divides the central long hole A412a has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the three long holes A412a as a whole may be configured so as to divide the visible range of light. That is, the case where the three long holes A412a overlap the opening WD and uniform light can be visually recognized through the three long holes A412a, and the case where the opening WD is the center long hole A412 of the three long holes A412a.
By overlapping only the long holes A412a at both ends without overlapping with a, the range in which the light can be visually recognized is divided into the central long holes A412a, and the case where it is limited to the long holes A412a on both sides can be switched. can be

Returning to FIGS. 335 and 336, description will be made. The support box portion A470 includes a main box portion A471 formed in the shape of a box whose front and upper right sides are open, and a shaft hole drilled in the main box portion A471 through which the rotation shaft of the gear A462 with a pin of the transmission gear group A460 passes. A472 and the second displacement member A4
A shaft support hole A473 drilled so as to be able to support 90, a notch portion A474 formed along an arc centered on the shaft support hole A473, and a columnar shape in the vicinity of the notch portion A474. A fastening portion A475 protruding from the rear plate portion A480 and having a tip formed so that a fastening screw inserted through the through hole A482 of the rear plate portion A480 can be screwed in, and a slide rack A511 of the rack and pinion A510 are slidably supported. Rack support A476 and its rack support A4
and a pinion support portion A477 that supports a pinion A517 that meshes with the slide rack A511 supported by 76 .

The main body box portion A471 includes a protruding wall portion A471a protruding from the back bottom edge portion toward the back side in a wall shape,
A wall-like projection is provided from the front upper edge to the front side, and the assembled state of the first operation unit A400 (FIG. 32)
4), a guide wall portion A471b arranged to face the roller member A442f, and a projecting wall portion A471 on the opposite side of the shaft hole A472 (see FIG. 335) across the notch portion A474
and a wiring guide portion A471c arranged opposite to a.

Although the detailed shape of the guide wall portion A471b will be described later, the roller member A442f abuts against the edge portion of the guide wall portion A471b and guides the displacement of the first displacement member A440 in a sliding or rolling manner (FIG. 339 to Figure 344).

The wiring guide portion A471c is designed so that the shape thereof can appropriately correct the arrangement of the wiring HC, which will be described later, and the details thereof will be described later.

The second displacement member A490 and the reinforcing arm portion A518 of the rack and pinion A510 are connected through the shaft support hole A473 and the notch portion A474. In particular, the notch A474 is formed wide as a region through which the wiring connected to the second displacement member A490 passes, the details of which will be described later.

The rack support portion A476 is a pair of columnar portions protruding toward the rear side of the main body box portion A471, and includes a support columnar portion A476a inserted through the support hole A512 of the rack and pinion A510 and a slide rack A511 of the rack and pinion A510. a stepped portion A476b formed in a stepped shape extending along the slide movement direction (direction parallel to the direction A416x) and protruding toward the back side from the surface on which the support columnar portion A476a is arranged; Prepare.

The pinion support portion A477 includes a pinion shaft A477a on which the pinion A517 of the rack and pinion A510 is rotatably supported, and a wall-like (plate and an arcuate wall portion A477b extending in a shape).

Through the shaft hole A472, the pin-equipped gear A462 of the transmission gear group A460 and the in-phase member A
465 are connected. Here, with reference to FIG. 353, the connection mode of the pinned gear A462 and the in-phase member A465 will be described.

Figure 353(a) is an exploded perspective view of the pin-equipped gear A462 and the same-phase member A465, Figure 353(b) is a front perspective view of the pin-equipped gear A462 and the same-phase member A465 on the left, and the right It is a back perspective view of gear A462 with a pin, and in-phase member A465. In addition, in FIG. 353(a), the pinned gear A462 and the in-phase member A465 are illustrated in a posture in which the mutually connected side faces the front.

As shown in FIG. 353(a), the pinned gear A462 has a plurality of phase matching circumferential projections A that protrude toward the same phase member A465 from the side facing the same phase member A465.
462a.

The same-phase member A465 has a phase-matching diameter projection A465a projecting from the side facing the pin-equipped gear A462 toward the pin-equipped gear A462, and an outer circular shape from the eccentric position toward the back side. An arcuate wall portion A467 formed as an arcuate wall portion centered on the rotation axis of the same-phase member A465 with the transmission projection A466 as a base end.
and Compared with the transmission projection A466, the arc wall A467 has a shorter formation length toward the back side.

The phase matching circumferential protrusion A462a and the phase matching radial protrusion A465a will be described. The phase matching circumferential projection A462a has a plurality of arcuate wall portions formed by axially cutting a circular wall portion centered on the rotation axis of the pinned gear A462.

The phase-matching radial projection A465a has a projection projecting radially outward from a cylindrical projection having an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the phase-matching circumferential projection A462a. It is formed so as to match the angle (phase) at which the notch is made in the matching circumferential protrusion A462a. By entering the projection into the notch of the phase-matching circumferential projection A462a, the pin-equipped gear A462 and the same-phase member A465 can be connected in a state where the phase of the same-phase member A465 with respect to the pin-equipped gear A462 is matched. By inserting the fastening gear along the central axis of the pin-equipped gear A462 and screwing it into the leading end of the phase-matching radial projection A465a, the pin-equipped gear A4 is connected.
62 and in-phase member A465 can be fixed.

Here, in the present embodiment, the angles between the notches of the phase matching peripheral projection A462a are not made uniform (120 degree intervals if divided into three as in the present embodiment), but are made uneven. Pinned gear A462 and in-phase member A4 only in a specific angular relationship (see FIG. 353(b))
65 are connected.

That is, the angles between the notches of the phase matching circumferential protrusion A462a are set to 100 degrees, 120 degrees, and 140 degrees.
By combining with degrees (by making it uneven), the pinned gear A462 and the in-phase member A
465 can be limited to one type of angular relationship.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the notch of the phasing circumferential protrusion A462a (the phasing radial protrusion A
465a) are formed at three locations, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, one or two locations may be used, or four or more locations may be used, which can be selected as appropriate in consideration of the rigidity in the assembled state of the pinned gear A462 and the in-phase member A465.

Returning to FIGS. 335 and 336, description will be made. The rear plate portion A480 includes a main body plate portion A481 formed in a plate shape from a colorless, light-transmitting resin material, and a fastener that is drilled through the main body plate portion A481 and screwed into the fastening portion A475 of the support box portion A470. A through hole A482 through which a screw is inserted, and a plurality of alignment protrusions A483 that protrude toward the outer peripheral side of the arcuate wall portion A477b of the support box portion A470 and are used for alignment by coming into contact with the outer peripheral side. and a plurality of projecting plate portions A484 projecting from the body plate portion A481 toward the front side so as to have a plate shape along the outer shape of the movement range of the slide rack A511 of the rack and pinion A510.

The outer edge of the rear plate portion A480 (the left edge in FIGS. 335 and 336) is in surface contact with the back side edge of the protruding wall portion A471a of the main body box portion A471, and is positioned in the left-right direction by a protrusion. Only the plate part A484 functions.

On the other hand, the inner edge of the rear plate portion A480 (the right edge in FIGS. 335 and 336)
, the contact between the alignment projection A483 and the arc wall A477b causes multiple directions (
up, down, left, and right) can be aligned. As a result, while the rear plate portion A480 is properly aligned with the support box portion A470, a wide space can be secured in the vicinity of the outer edge portion by eliminating the portion for alignment from the vicinity of the outer edge portion. In this embodiment,
The secured space is used as a space for arranging the wiring HC (see FIG. 356(a)), the details of which will be described later.

The protruding plate portion A484 is disposed so that its protruding tip is opposed to the back bottom portion of the main body box portion A471 (either in contact with it or with a slight gap that prevents wiring from passing through), and the rack and pinion A
It functions to partition the movement range of the slide rack A511 of 510 and the outer area. As a result, the wiring HC connected to the second displacement member A490 can be prevented from entering the movement range of the slide rack A511 of the rack and pinion A510, the details of which will be described later.

354 is an exploded front perspective view of the second displacement member A490, and FIG. 355 is an exploded rear perspective view of the second displacement member A490. As shown in FIGS. 354 and 355, the second displacement member A490 is made of a colorless and light-transmitting resin material and is fitted into the support box portion A470 through the shaft support hole A473.
and a supported support plate A491 that is formed with an inner shape similar to the outer shape of the supported support plate A491 and is fitted to the supported support plate A491 in a manner that covers the supported support plate A491 from the front side, A covering member A492 made of a colorless, light-transmitting resin material, and a light emitting part A493 made up of an LED or the like.
an electrical board A493 on which a is disposed and which is housed in a shaft support plate A491 and a covering member A492;
Prepare.

The shaft support plate A491 has a shaft support projection A491a that protrudes toward the rear side in a circular shape and is inserted into the shaft support hole A473, and a shaft support projection A491a that is shorter in length than the shaft support projection A491a. a fastening protrusion A491b, a plurality of insertion holes A491c through which fastening screws can be inserted, and a long rectangular hole A491d drilled along the radial direction of the shaft supported protrusion A491a. , insertion hole A491
A plurality of circular support portions A491e protruding to the front side in a circular (arc) shape centered on c, and a plurality of thin protruding shapes protruding to the front side along the side wall portion forming the outer periphery and a narrow projection A491f.

The circular support portion A491e and the narrow projection A491f are in the assembled state of the second displacement member A490 (
335 and 336), it abuts against the outer peripheral edge of the electrical board A493 and supports the electrical board A493 from the rear side.

In particular, the thin protrusion A491f is formed at a portion where the shape of the electrical board A493 to be accommodated is constricted, that is, at a portion where the outer peripheral side wall of the shaft support plate A491 is recessed inward. A part where the shape of A493 is constricted can be selectively supported. As a result, it is possible to suppress the deformation of the electrical board A493 at the constricted portion where it is assumed that the stiffness is likely to be lowered by shortening the width dimension, and it is possible to avoid breakage of the electrical board A493. .

The covering member A492 is inserted through the supported portion A493b of the electrical board A493, and is inserted through the insertion hole A4.
A plurality of fastening portions A492a into which fastening screws inserted through 91c are screwed, and fastening portions A49 thereof
A plurality of projecting support portions A492b projecting in the radial direction on the base side of 2a and coupled to the plate-like portion of the covering member A492, and a narrow projecting portion A491f of the driven support plate A491, A plurality of narrow protrusions A4 protruding toward the back side in a narrow protrusion shape along the side wall forming the outer periphery
92c.

With the above configuration, the electrical board A493 is supported at its outer peripheral edge by the thin protrusions A491f and A492c, and around the fastening screw, the circular support section A491e and the protruding support section A492b are supported.
Supported by As a result, the electrical board A493 is connected to the supported support plate A491 and the covering member A4.
92 can be fixed well.

In addition, the supporting mode of the electrical board A493 is not limited at all. For example, the electrical board A493 may be fixed by applying a load along the fastening direction, or a dimensional relationship that does not cause a compressive load A dimension relationship equivalent to the thickness of A493).
493 arrangement may be maintained.

The electrical board A493 includes a plurality of light-emitting portions A493a and a plurality of supported portions A493b that are drilled or recessed so as not to interfere with the fastening portion A492a when viewed in the front-rear direction, and arranged on the back side. and a board-side connector A493c to which an end (connector) of the wiring is connected.

The board-side connector A493 is fixed in a posture in which the wiring extends along the long direction of the long hole A491d of the shaft support plate A491. A section extending portion A491d1 extending in a direction intersecting the direction until the distance from the inner edge on the opposite side becomes shorter than the width dimension of the board-side connector A493c (or the wiring bundle to be connected), and the section extending portion A491d1. is formed as a reference, a wide protrusion A491d2 protrudes from the opposite edge of the board-side connector A493c toward the back side.

With reference to the partition extension part A491d1, the visual recognition area side of the third pattern display device 81 (Fig. 355
(left side) is provided with a board-side connector A493c, and on the opposite side is a board-side connector A493c.
The wiring connected to 3c passes through the long hole A491d. Namely, board side connector A493c
The wiring connected to is sandwiched and supported between the section extending portion A491d1 and the electrical board A493.

As a result, even if the second displacement member A490 is displaced, displacement of the wiring between the board-side connector A493c and the partition extension part A491d1 can be suppressed. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the wiring will come off from the A493c.

The protruding portion A491d2 is formed with a projecting length to the extent that it enters the notch portion A474 of the support box portion A470. As a result, the wiring HC, the end of which is connected to the board-side connector A493c, can be routed so as to stand up toward the rear side of the supported support plate A491 (in the projecting direction of the projection A491d2). is arranged close to the rear surface of the supported support plate A491 and routed to the rear surface of the support box portion A470, the wiring HC can be prevented from coming into contact with the notch portion A474. Therefore, disconnection of the wiring can be avoided.

In addition, since the ridge portion A491d2 protrudes perpendicularly to the back surface of the supported support plate A491, the rising angle of the wiring HC can be shifted to the right angle side, and contact with the wiring HC can be avoided. It is possible to suppress the width of the notch A474 for the purpose. As a result, the main body box part A4
Since a large area (area) can be secured on the side of the fastening portion A475 of 71, the main body box portion A
The rigidity of 471 can be ensured, and the degree of freedom of arrangement of fastening portion A475 can be improved.

Returning to FIGS. 335 and 336, description will be made. The rack and pinion A510 is oriented in the direction A416x
A slide rack A511 supported so as to be slidable along the slide rack A511, meshed with the gear portion of the slide rack A511, supported by the pinion shaft A477a of the support box portion A470, and synchronized with the slide movement of the slide rack A511 It has a rotating pinion A517 and a reinforcing arm A518 that meshes with the pinion A517 and rotates in synchronism with the rotation of the pinion A517.

The reinforcing arm A518 is connected and fixed to the above-described second displacement member A490, whereby the second
A displacement member A490 is supported by the support box portion A470 so as not to be pulled out. That is, the reinforcing arm A5
18 is fastened to the supported projection A491a of the second displacement member A490 at the rotation center position of 18,
The rotation tip side portion of the reinforcing arm portion A518 is fastened to the fastening protrusion A491b (see FIG. 355). Therefore, rotational displacement of the reinforcing arm A518 is synonymous with rotational displacement of the second displacement member A490.

The slide rack A511 has a pair of support holes A512 formed in a long hole shape extending along the direction A416x and having a size that allows the support columnar portion A476a of the support box portion A470 to pass through, and a plate shape formed along the gear portion. a supported plate portion A513, a protruding plate portion A514 projecting in a plate shape toward the front side at a position separated from the support hole A512 in the longitudinal direction of the support hole A512, and a same-phase member A465 arranged opposite to the same-phase member A465. Deformed transmitted portion A5 to which driving force is transmitted from member A465
15.

The support hole A512 is inserted through the small-diameter tip portion of the support columnar portion A476a of the support box portion A470, and the large-diameter portion on the base end side is formed with a diameter larger than the width of the support hole A512. By arranging this large-diameter portion on the front side of the support hole A512, even if the slide rack A511 is about to be displaced to the front side, the displacement can be prevented by the large-diameter portion of the support columnar portion A476a. . In this way, the slide rack A511 has a plate-like portion facing the rear bottom portion of the main body box portion A471 with a gap at least about the height of the large-diameter portion of the supporting columnar portion A476a. It is configured to be slidable along the direction A416x while being held.

The supported plate portion A513 is arranged to face the back side end portion of the stepped portion A476b of the support box portion A470 with a slight gap, and the protruding plate portion A514 is arranged with a slight gap from the rear bottom portion of the main box portion A471. are placed facing each other with a space between them. That is, even if the slide rack A511 is about to be displaced to the front side, the occurrence of such displacement can be prevented by the supported plate portion A513 and the projecting plate portion A514.

There are various reasons for the displacement of the slide rack A511 in the front-rear direction. For example, the case where the player gives an impact to the pachinko machine A10 (so-called pounding), or the case where the meshing resistance becomes excessive due to the clogging of fine particles in the gaps, etc., and the excessive load is generated at the meshing position. be.

Figures 356(a), 356(b), 357(a), 357(b), and 358 are rear views of the rear unit BU. 356(a), 356(b), and 357(a)
), and in FIGS. 357(b) and 358, the illustration of the rear plate portion A480 is omitted for ease of understanding, and the plate portion of the slide rack A511 is torn so that the deformed transmitted portion A515 can be seen. The states are illustrated. In addition, in FIG. 358, in order to facilitate understanding, the in-phase member A
465 and deformed transmitted portion A515 are shown enlarged.

356(a), 356(b), 357(a), 357(b), and 358,
The second displacement member A490 moves from the retracted position (see FIG. 356(a)) to the extended position (see FIG. 358).
The state of displacement to

The second displacement member A490 is fixed to the reinforcing arm A518. When the in-phase member A465 rotates, the transmission protrusion A466 pushes the slide rack A511 along with the rotation. When the slide rack A511 is pushed forward, driving force is transmitted to the reinforcing arm portion A518 via the pinion A517. Thus, displacement of the second displacement member A490 is caused by rotation of the in-phase member A465.

The in-phase member A465 rotates in the same phase as the pinned gear A462 as described above. Therefore, in synchronism with the rotation of the in-phase member A465 described in FIGS. Rotation of the pinned gear A462 will occur, and the relationship between these will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 356(b), the deformed transmitted portion A515 is a portion that engages with the in-phase member A465, and allows the transmission protrusion A466 to enter and move independently (slide rack A
A non-transmitting recess A515a recessed in (movable without applying a load to 511), a connecting recess A515b which is a recess of the same depth connected to the end of the non-transmitting recess A515a, and the connecting recess A515b is also narrow, and the non-transmitting recess A5 with respect to the connecting recess A515b
The insertion gap A515c, which is a concave portion of the same depth connected to the opposite side of 15a, and the transmission protrusion A4
A projecting plate portion A515d projecting from the slide rack A511 toward the front side in the retracted position (lower left) side of 66 and constituting the left side surface of the insertion gap A515c, and the projecting plate portion A5
15d projecting position (upper right) side, facing the protruding plate portion A515d with a gap equal to or larger than the diameter of the transmission protrusion A466, and forming the right side surface of the insertion gap A515c.
5e.

The protruding length of the protruding plate portion A515d is longer than the length of the opposing arrangement portion A515e in the same direction, and in the assembled state (see FIG. 324), the transmission protruding portion A466 and the arc wall portion A46
7 in the direction of movement.

The opposing arrangement portion A515e can abut (overlap) the transmission protrusion A466 in the movement direction, while it does not abut (do not overlap) the circular arc wall portion A467 in the movement direction. That is, the opposing arrangement portion A515e and the arcuate wall portion A467 are formed in a dimensional relationship that creates a front-to-rear gap.

The side surfaces of the projecting plate portion A515d and the opposing arrangement portion A515e are configured as planes perpendicular to the moving direction of the slide rack A511 (the direction parallel to the direction A416x).

The connecting concave portion A515b has the same function as the relief portion A456d of the deformed transmitted portion A456. That is, the connecting recess A515b is configured to receive the transmission projection A466, and the side connected to the non-transmission recess A515a is formed in a shape along the moving direction of the transmission projection A466. As a result, the forward/backward displacement of the transmission protrusion A466 with respect to the insertion gap A515c can be performed smoothly (with low resistance).

Although not shown in FIGS. 356(a), 356(b), 357(a), 357(b), and 358, the in-phase member A465, like the pinned gear A462, is connected to the drive motor The driving force of AMT1 is transmitted by the driving gear AMG1 and the pair of transmission gears A461 to rotate (see FIG. 335). Thereafter, the drive motor AMT1 is excited and the drive gear AMG1
rotates, and the displacement mode in which the second displacement member A490 is displaced from the retracted position to the extended position will be described in chronological order.

FIG. 356(a) shows the state before the drive gear AMG1 rotates, in which the slide rack A511 is arranged at the end of the movement range on the retracted position side.
0 is shown in the retracted position.

In this state, the transmitting protrusion A466 is connected to the deformed transmitted portion A515 in the moving direction (direction A416x).
), the circular arc wall portion A467 is moved to the upper right along the moving direction (direction A416x) with respect to the protruding plate portion A515d at the contact portion A467a arranged opposite to the protruding plate portion A515d. (Overhanging position side). As a result, the projecting plate portion A515 is formed by the arc wall portion A467.
Since the displacement of d can be regulated, it is possible to prevent the slide rack A511 from being displaced unintentionally due to an external force applied while the drive motor AMT1 is in a non-excited (non-driven) state.

The contact points between the circular arc wall portion A467 and the projecting plate portion A515d are arranged in a straight line parallel to the direction A416x through the rotation axis of the same phase member A465. Therefore, the load applied from the protruding plate portion A515d to the arc wall portion A467 passes through the rotation axis of the in-phase member A465, so that the in-phase member A465 is rotated by the load from the protruding plate portion A515d. can be prevented.

Furthermore, since the arcuate wall portion A467 is curved, the contact area between the arcuate wall portion A467 and the protruding plate portion A515d can be suppressed (theoretically, since line contact is possible, the contact area is 0). Therefore, when the in-phase member A465 rotates from the state shown in FIG. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the need for extra driving force for restricting the displacement of the slide rack A511. That is, the in-phase member A4
The displacement of the slide rack A511 can be restricted only by the driving force required to rotate the slide rack A511.

In addition, considering the deformation due to wear of the resin material that actually constitutes the arcuate wall portion A467 and the protruding plate portion A515d, the contact area increases over time, and the arc wall portion A467 and the protruding plate portion A515
It is thought that the frictional force generated between d and d increases. To deal with this problem, a low-friction seal may be applied to the arcuate wall portion A467 and the projecting plate portion A515d, or a lubricant (such as grease) may be applied. In this embodiment, since the ideal contact area is formed small, the area that needs to be treated with a low-friction seal or lubricant can be reduced. Therefore, countermeasure costs can be suppressed.

Examples of the external force include gravity, a load caused by earthquake vibration, and a force caused when the player hits or shakes the pachinko machine A10.

FIG. 356(b) shows a state in which the drive motor AMT1 is excited and rotated, and the transmission projection A466 starts entering the coupling recess A515b. From the state of FIG. 356(a) to the state of FIG.
b), the in-phase member A465 changes from the initial angle d10 to the first angle d11
, but the transmitting projection A466 is still aligned with the deformed transmitted portion A515 in the moving direction (
In the direction A416x), they are out of contact.

On the other hand, the arcuate wall portion A467 is still in contact with the protruding plate portion A515d at the contact portion A467a from the upper right (overhang position side) along the moving direction (direction A416x). Figure 35
6(a) and FIG. 356(b), the contact portion A467a is formed on the outer surface of the arcuate wall portion A467. No displacement. Therefore, even in the state of FIG. 356(b), FIG. 356(a)
3, the position of the slide rack A511 is maintained at the retracted position side end of the movement range.

As described above, the arc wall portion A467 and the facing arrangement portion A515e have a front-to-rear gap, so that the arc wall portion A467 can be arranged to overlap the facing arrangement portion A515e in the front-to-rear direction. (See FIG. 356(b)).

FIG. 357(a) shows a state in which the driving motor AMT1 is excited and rotated, and the transmission protrusion A466 starts entering the insertion gap A515c. From the state of Fig. 356(a) to Fig. 357(a)
), the in-phase member A465 rotates from the initial angle d10 by the second angle d12, and the transmission protrusion A466 comes into contact with the protrusion plate portion A515d.

In FIG. 357(a), a straight line passing through the rotation center of the in-phase member A465 and the center of the transmission protrusion A466 is parallel to the moving direction of the slide rack A511 (the direction parallel to the direction A416x). That is, since the farthest portion of the transmission protrusion A466 from the rotation center of the in-phase member A465 abuts on the projecting plate portion A515d, when the in-phase member A465 rotates beyond the state shown in FIG. The restriction by the in-phase member A465 is released, and the slide rack A5
11 can be displaced to the projecting position side (upper right side).

As described above, the arc wall portion A467 and the facing arrangement portion A515e have a front-to-rear gap, so that the arc wall portion A467 can be arranged to overlap the facing arrangement portion A515e in the front-to-rear direction. (See FIG. 357(a)).

FIG. 357(b) shows a state in which the drive motor AMT1 is excited and rotated, and the transmission protrusion A466 enters the insertion gap A515c. From the state of FIG. 356(a) to the state of FIG.
b), the in-phase member A465 changes from the initial angle d10 to the third angle d13
only rotate. With this rotation, the transmission projection A466 pushes the facing arrangement portion A515e, causing the slide rack A511 to slide and displace the pinion A517.
to the second displacement member A490.

In FIG. 357(b), a straight line passing through the rotation center of the in-phase member A465 and the center of the transmission protrusion A466 intersects perpendicularly with the moving direction of the slide rack A511 (the direction parallel to the direction A416x). That is, the angle obtained by subtracting the second angle d12 from the third angle d13 is 90 degrees.

As described above, the arc wall portion A467 and the facing arrangement portion A515e have a front-to-rear gap, so that the arc wall portion A467 can be arranged to overlap the facing arrangement portion A515e in the front-to-rear direction. (See FIG. 357(b)).

In FIG. 358, the driving motor AMT1 is excited and rotated, and the transmission projection A466
515e is pushed forward, the slide rack A511 is arranged at the overhang position side end of the movement range, and the second displacement member A490 is arranged at the overhang position.

356(a) to the state of FIG. 358, the in-phase member A465 rotates from the initial angle d10 by the fourth angle d14 (rotates by one or more rotations). With this rotation, the transmission projection A466 pushes the opposing arrangement portion A515e, thereby moving the slide rack A5.
11 is slid, and the slide displacement is the second displacement member A4 via the pinion A517.
90.

In FIG. 358, a straight line passing through the rotation center of the in-phase member A465 and the center of the transmission protrusion A466 is parallel to the moving direction of the slide rack A511 (the direction parallel to the direction A416x). That is, the angle obtained by subtracting the third angle d13 from the fourth angle d14 is 90 degrees.

As described above, the arc wall portion A467 and the facing arrangement portion A515e have a front-to-rear gap, so that the arc wall portion A467 can be arranged to overlap the facing arrangement portion A515e in the front-to-rear direction. (see Figure 358).

In FIG. 358, the farthest portion of the transmission protrusion A466 from the rotation center of the in-phase member A465 abuts against the opposing arrangement portion A515e. A511 may be displaced to the retracted position side (lower left side). In this embodiment, as shown enlarged in FIG. 358, a slide rack A511
is located at the overhang position side end of the movement range, the in-phase member A465 is configured to allow rotation from the arrangement of the fourth angle d14 (see FIG. 358) to the allowable angle dd1.

That is, since the transmission protrusion A466 and the protruding plate portion A515d are configured to come into contact only after the in-phase member A465 rotates by the allowable angle dd1, the transmission protrusion A466 and the projecting plate portion A515d do not contact each other until the rotation of the allowable angle dd1. Since the provided plate portion A515d is out of contact and no load is transmitted,
The arrangement of the slide rack A511 can be maintained at the overhang position side end of the movement range.

Thus, in the series of displacements illustrated in FIGS. 356-358, the in-phase member A46
5 is stopped at the fourth angle d14, the in-phase member A465 is actually the fourth angle d14.
Even when the slide rack A511 rotates beyond the angle d14, if the rotation angle exceeds the allowable angle dd1, the slide rack A511 can be maintained at the overhang position side end of the movement range, and the second displacement member A490. can be maintained in an overhang position.

In other words, even if the accuracy of the stop position of the in-phase member A465 is not strict (allowable angle dd1
Even if there is the following error), the arrangement of the second displacement member A490 can be maintained at the overhang position, so that the rotation speed of the in-phase member A465 can be increased and the rotation speed of the second displacement member A49 can be increased with a simple configuration.
It is possible to realize a highly accurate displacement of 0 (the second displacement member A490 can be rapidly decelerated and stopped at the overhang position without suddenly decelerating and stopping the in-phase member A465).
.

In addition, by purposely causing an excess of the rotation angle from the fourth angle d14 to the allowable angle dd1 or less, the excess is used when driving the second displacement member A490 toward the retracted position (when the driving direction is reversed). It can be used as a run-up section.

Further, when the transmission projection A466 of the same-phase member A465 is arranged at the position of the fourth angle d14 (see FIG. 358), the transmission projection A466 and the facing arrangement portion A515e are aligned with the slide rack A51.
1 (direction parallel to the direction A416x), the slide rack A51
1 can be prevented from returning to the retracted position (bound displacement).

As a result, the rotation of the pinion A517 can be restricted in the state of FIG. 358 (return rotation can be prevented). It is possible to prevent the second displacement member A490 from rotating back from the extended position (see FIG. 358).

Figure 359 shows the rear unit B on the CCCLIX-CCCLIX line in Figure 356(a).
1 is a cross-sectional view of U. FIG. In FIG. 359, for ease of understanding, illustration of the alignment protrusion A483 of the rear plate portion A480 is omitted, and the shape of the main body plate portion A481 is mainly illustrated.

The wiring HC connected to the second displacement member A490 will be described below with reference to FIG. Note that FIGS. 356 to 358 will be referred to as appropriate for the description of the wiring HC. Wiring H
C is an electric wiring composed of a plurality of cables having a circular cross section connected to the board-side connector A493c of the second displacement member A490, and is connected to the space surrounded by the support box portion A470 and the rear plate portion A480. are placed.

As shown in FIG. 359, the portion of the wiring HC on the side connected to the board-side connector A493c passes between the section extension part A491d1 and the electrical board A493, and extends along the protrusion A491d2 to the support box part A470. and the rear plate portion A480.

As described above, the protrusion A491d2 is formed to have a protruding length sufficient to enter the notch A474 of the support box portion A470, so that the wiring HC is guided away from the notch A474. , contact with the notch A474 is avoided. This can prevent the wiring HC from rubbing against the notch A474 and disconnecting.

On the other hand, the wiring HC is guided by the protrusion A491d2 so that it is guided closer to the rear plate portion A480, and if no countermeasure is taken, the wiring HC may rub against the rear plate portion A480 and break in a short period of time. However, in this embodiment, the intermediate portion HC of the wiring HC between the rear plate portion A480
Friction with the rear plate portion A480 is suppressed by suitably inserting a. This will be explained in detail below.

In this embodiment, the wire HC is wound around the fastening portion A475 of the support box portion A470. More specifically, the wiring HC extending from the third connector A416e3 of the electrical board A416 (see FIG. 330) is wound around the winding portion A471a1 formed so that the binding band KB can be wound around the intermediate position of the projecting wall portion A471a. The side of the second displacement member A490 that is connected to the board-side connector A493c is wrapped around the fastening portion A475 with the binding position as a reference, and the tip thereof is connected to the board-side connector A493c. .

The wiring HC is wound around the fastening portion A475 and is in a loosened state (Fig. 356(a)
)), the amount of displacement of the wiring HC in the upward direction away from the fastening portion A475 (in the direction in which the wiring HC bound by the binding band KB extends) can be suppressed. As a result, the load applied to the wiring HC can be reduced without forming a large gap above the fastening portion A475.

In the present embodiment, the portion around which the wiring HC is wound is the fastening portion A475, which is advantageous in terms of ease of assembly. That is, in the assembly process for fastening and fixing the rear plate portion A480 to the support box portion A470, after the wiring HC is wound around the fastening portion A475, the fastening screw is screwed into the fastening portion A475 through the rear plate portion A480. At this time, it is possible to prevent the wire HC from falling off from the fastening portion A475 before fastening and fixing is completed by the fastening screw that is in the middle of screwing.

In addition, when fastening and fixing, the back side of the support box portion A470 (the side where the fastening portion A475 protrudes) faces upward, and after the wiring HC is wound around the fastening portion A475, the rear plate portion A480 is attached to the support box portion A470. By screwing the fastening screw into the fastening portion A475, the wiring HC can be assembled while preventing the wiring HC from sagging in the gravity direction in the main body box portion A471, so that the assembly can be easily completed. . That is, compared to the case where the fastening portion A475 is designed to be assembled in a downward posture, the wiring HC is wound around the fastening portion A475 to facilitate the assembly of the support box portion A470 and the rear plate portion A480. can be

Since the winding portion A471a1 is formed on the protruding end side of the protruding wall portion A471a, the wiring HC temporarily fixed by the binding band KB is guided (pulled) toward the rear plate portion A480. As a result, when the wire HC is wound around the fastening portion A475, the wire HC comes closest to the rear plate portion A480 at the upper portion of the fastening portion A475 that is closest to the fastening portion A475 (see FIG. 359).

Then, the wiring HC is extended toward the board-side connector A493c while allowing a margin in the length of the wiring HC so that a tensile load is not applied to the wiring HC when the second displacement member A490 is displaced, and the wirings HC intersect each other. In the position, the end of the wiring HC connected to the board-side connector A493c is wound so as to slide between the already arranged wiring HC and the support box portion A470.

As a result, the intermediate portion HCa is connected to the rear plate portion A480 of the wiring HC on the board side connector A493c side.
It is possible to construct a state in which the wiring HC abuts from the side (see FIG. 356(a)), and the wiring HC
The degree of proximity to the rear plate portion A480 can be suppressed by 491d2.

A description will be given of how the wiring HC is displaced when the second displacement member A490 is displaced.
The wiring HC is not positionally fixed by the support box portion A470 or the rear plate portion A480 between the binding band KB and the board-side connector A493c of the second displacement member A490. Therefore, the wiring HC between the binding band KB and the board-side connector A493c of the second displacement member A490
By generating displacement (deflection) corresponding to the displacement of the second displacement member A490 using the entire length, the load (fatigue) accompanying the displacement can be made uniform. Loading can be avoided.

The board-side connector A493c is located at the retracted position compared to the shaft-supported protrusion 491a functioning as the rotation shaft of the second displacement member A490 and the reinforcing arm A518 formed on the projecting position side of the second displacement member A490. placed on the side. That is, when the second displacement member A490 is arranged at the retracted position, the support plate portion 420 that shields the line of sight directed to the second displacement member A490 is positioned inside the member (see FIG. 346(a), right) toward the substrate side. A connector A493 is provided.

As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the wiring HC protrudes outward from the outer shape of the support plate portion A420 and the support box portion A470. That is, by arranging the shaft-supporting projection A491a and the reinforcing arm A518 closer to the overhanging position side (the third symbol display device 81 side), a large amount of overhanging of the second displacement member A490 is ensured, and the wiring is It is possible to avoid the HC being visually recognized by the player.

As shown in FIG. 356(a), the board-side connector A493c is configured to be able to receive the end of the wiring HC along the radial direction of a circle centered on the supported projection A491a. The board-side connector A493c is arranged on one side of the straight line connecting the center of the supported projection A491a and the center of the fastening portion A475 (lower right side, see FIG. 356(a)). , and the other side (upper left side, see FIG. 358) are switched by displacement of the second displacement member A490.

As a result, the board-side connector A49 of the wiring HC is
It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a difference in the displacement mode of the portion on the side connected to 3c. As a result, it is possible to suppress the fluctuation of the load applied to the wiring HC, thereby preventing disconnection of the wiring HC.

In addition, since the displacement mode of the portion of the wiring HC connected to the board-side connector A493c can be easily shifted toward the straight line connecting the center of the supported projection A491a and the center of the fastening portion A475, the displacement The amount can be reduced, and the absolute value of the load applied to the wiring HC can be reduced. This will be explained in detail below.

FIG. 357(b) shows a state in which the second displacement member A490 has started to be displaced from the retracted position to the overhanging position and rotated about 45 degrees. In this state, the board side connector A493
The direction in which the wiring HC connected to c is extended is the center of the supported projection A491a and the fastening portion A475.
It is approximately parallel to the straight line connecting the center of the

In other words, in the present embodiment, the fastening portion A475 is arranged on the bisector of the rotation angle of the second displacement member A490 passing through the center of the supported projection A491. That is, the fastening portion A475, which is the position where the wiring HC is loosely wound, is positioned at the intermediate position of the rotation angle of the second displacement member A490, so that the amount of deformation (bending) of the wiring HC can be minimized. .

In comparison with the retracted state (see FIG. 357(a)), the local displacement of the wiring HC will be explained. slightly rising. Further, the intermediate portion HCa is arranged at a position where it does not interfere with the wiring HC extending from the board-side connector A493c in the front-rear direction.

That is, when the second displacement member A490 is displaced from the state shown in FIG. While the effect of entrapment cannot be obtained, the second displacement member A490 can be displaced at high speed without the wirings HC rubbing against each other.

Here, as the second displacement member A490 is displaced from the state shown in FIG. 357(b) to the projecting position shown in FIG. Become. Therefore, as a load applied to the wiring HC, a load for maintaining the attitude along the left-right direction is generated. Therefore, the influence of the load applied by the protrusion A491d2 on the layout of the wiring HC is reduced.

Therefore, even if the intermediate portion HCa does not enter between the rear plate portion A480 and the wiring HC, excessive frictional force is prevented from being generated between the wiring HC and the rear plate portion A480. That is, in this embodiment,
Only when there is a risk of excessive frictional force being generated between the rear plate portion A480 and the wiring HC extending from the board-side connector A493c, the intermediate portion HCa is inserted between the rear plate portion A480 and the wiring HC extending from the board-side connector A493c. An action of separating from the plate portion A480 is generated.

On the other hand, when the possibility of excessive frictional force is low, as shown in FIG. 357(b),
By eliminating the front-rear overlap between the intermediate portion HCa and the wiring HC extending from the board-side connector A493c, it is possible to prevent the second displacement member A490 from generating excessive resistance to displacement, and the second displacement member A490 High-speed displacement can be achieved.

In the overhanging state of the second displacement member A490 (see FIG. 358), in comparison with the state shown in FIG. The location is slightly lowered, and the location located below the fastening portion A475 is slightly raised. That is, the wiring HC is displaced so as to approach the linear side connecting the center of the supported projection A491a and the center of the fastening portion A475.

As shown in FIG. 358, in the state where the second displacement member A490 is arranged in the extended position (that is, in the state rotated by 90 degrees from the retracted position), the wire HC contacts the wire guide portion A471c, thereby changing the position of the wire HC. is corrected. The wiring guide portion A471c is designed for one purpose of reducing the load applied to the wiring HC in this corrected arrangement.

More specifically, in the overhanging state of the second displacement member A490, an arc passing through the board-side connector A493c and in contact with the lower end of the wiring guide portion A471c is the fastening portion A, which is the passage of the wiring HC.
475 and the projecting wall portion A471a. As a result, wiring HC
Therefore, it is possible to avoid applying an excessive load to the wiring HC, thereby improving the durability of the wiring HC.

FIG. 360 is a schematic diagram showing rotation angles of the pinned gear A462 and the in-phase member A465 with reference to the initial angles d0 and d10. In the description of FIG. 360, angles d0 to d6, d10 to d14, and dd1 indicate rotation angles of the pinned gear A462 and the same phase member A465, unless otherwise described.

As described above, the first displacement member A440 is between the initial angle d0 and the fifth angle d5,
While continuously displacing and stopping after the fifth angle d5, the second displacement member A490 stops between the initial angle d10 and the second angle d12, while stopping between the second angle d12 and the fourth angle d.
It continues to displace up to 14.

Here, as shown in FIG. 360, a gap of 10 degrees is formed between the fifth angle d5 and the second angle d12. That is, in this embodiment, the rotation angle range of the pinned gear A462 and the in-phase member A465 that generate the driving force for displacing the first displacement member A440 and the driving force for displacing the second displacement member A490 are Gear A462 with pin for generating
and the rotation angle range of the in-phase member A465, an angle range in which no driving force is generated is inserted. Thereby, the first displacement member A440 and the second displacement member A490 can be stably driven.

Note that the manner of setting the angle range is not limited to this. For example, the fifth angle d5 and the second angle d12 may be the same angle. In this case, the second displacement member A490 starts displacing from the stop state at the same time that the first displacement member A440 is switched from the state of continuing displacement to the stop state. Therefore, the first displacement member A440 is driven by the driving force of the driving motor AMT1.
and the second displacement member A490 at the same time.
490), the load on the drive motor AMT1 can be reduced (the load applied by a single member can be reduced).

Also, for example, the second angle d12 may be arranged between the initial angle d0 and the fifth angle d5. In this case, while forming a section in which the first displacement member A440 and the second displacement member A490 are displaced simultaneously, there is a section in which it is necessary to generate driving force for both the first displacement member A440 and the second displacement member A490. It can be limited between the second angle d12 and the fifth angle d5.

According to this embodiment, since the members that are displaced at the fifth angle d5 or the second angle d12 are switched, the pinned gear A462 And by inverting and rotating the in-phase member A465, one member (
While the first displacement member A440 or the second displacement member A490) is stopped, the other member (the second
The displacement member A490 or the first displacement member A440) can be reversed.

As described above, it is not necessary to apply a large driving force to stop one of the members (the first displacement member A440 or the second displacement member A490). That is, at the contact position for restricting the displacement of one member, the members come into line contact (rub) with each other, so theoretically no frictional force is generated. As a result, the drive force required for the drive motor AMT1 can be suppressed, so that a small drive device can be selected as the drive motor AMT1.

Further, by driving to the fifth angle d5 or the second angle d12, stopping, and rotating the driving motor AMT1 in the reverse direction, only the first displacement member A440 is displaced, and the second displacement member A49 is caused.
A drive mode in which 0 is maintained in a retracted state is also possible.

As shown in FIG. 360, the sixth angle d6 is set as an angle that does not exceed the sum of the fourth angle d14 and the allowable angle dd1. Therefore, the pinned gear A462 and the in-phase member A4
65 is mechanically restricted from rotating when it rotates by the sixth angle d6 before it rotates by the allowable angle dd1 from the fourth angle d14 (see FIG. 345). Therefore, since the rotation does not exceed the allowable angle dd1, even if the same-phase member A465 is stopped at the fourth angle d14 with low accuracy and is likely to rotate excessively (control mode), the second displacement member A490 the overhang position (Fig. 3
58).

Note that the numerical value of the sixth angle d6 is not limited to this. For example, the sixth angle d6 may be set as an angle that slightly exceeds the sum of the fourth angle d14 and the allowable angle dd1 (for example, it may be set as an angle that exceeds the fourth angle d14 by about 20 degrees. good). In this case, the pinned gear A462 and the in-phase member A465 exceed the fourth angle d14 and the allowable angle dd
While allowing to rotate by 1, the rotation continues beyond the allowable angle dd1, and when the sixth angle d6 is reached, the displacement of the second displacement member A490 is immediately stopped by mechanical regulation. can be

As a result, the allowable amount (that is, the fourth
By performing stop control at an angle (permissible amount) that slightly exceeds the angle d14, the second displacement means A490 is prevented from reaching the overhanging position, and the second displacement means A490 can be stopped at the overhanging position. In addition, it is possible to prevent the second displacement member A490 from being erroneously displaced to a large extent when the deviation of the stop timing of the drive motor AMT1 unintentionally increases.

Since the circular arc wall portion A464 is formed with a center angle of about 230 degrees as described above, even when the rotation angle reaches the sixth angle, the position for restricting the first displacement member A440 (fifth angle d
5 where the arc wall portion A464 abuts on the first displacement member A440), it is possible to maintain the displacement regulation at the projecting position of the first displacement member A440. .

The state in which the arcuate wall portion A467 of the in-phase member A465 abuts the protruding plate portion A515d corresponds to the state in which the plate portion A455e is detected by the detection sensor A426 and is controlled to stop. The probability that the stop timing deviation of the drive motor AMT1 unintentionally increases near the angular state where the wall portion A467 contacts the protruding plate portion A515d is low. Therefore, the arc wall portion A467 extends from the initial angle d10 to the second angle d12 by the second displacement member A490.
is formed at an angle smaller than that of the arcuate wall portion A464 (approximately 210 degrees in this embodiment) as the minimum angle range required to maintain the A at the retracted position. As a result, the cost of materials required for the arcuate wall portion A467 can be suppressed.

Next, the second operation unit A700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 361 to 381. FIG. FIG. 361 is a front exploded perspective view of the second operation unit A700 and the rear case A310. As shown in FIG. 361, the second operation unit A700 is formed with a horizontal width exceeding the horizontal width of the visual recognition area of the display of the third pattern display device 81, and is positioned below the visual recognition area of the display of the third pattern display device 81. placed in

FIG. 362 is a front exploded perspective view of the second action unit A700, and FIG. 363 is a rear exploded perspective view of the second action unit A700. As shown in FIGS. 362 and 363, the second
The operation unit A700 is held by a rectangular plate-like member that is elongated in the left and right direction, and includes an elevating unit A701 that includes an elevating unit A702 configured to be able to move up and down. and an effect unit A710 configured to be displaceable between and operable (performable) in a plurality of modes.

The elevating unit A701 supports a vertically elongated elevating part A702 on the left and right sides, and a pair of arm members A703 rotatably supported on the left and right ends thereof, and the arm members A703 via a drive mechanism (not shown). and a pair of drive motors A704 that transmit drive power to the.

As a mechanism for transmitting the driving force from the drive motor A704 to the arm member A703,
For example, a gear transmission mechanism is exemplified in which gear teeth are formed on the end of the arm member A703 on the side of the rotation shaft, and a gear fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor A704 meshes with the gear teeth.

Further, an elongated hole is formed in the arm member A703, and a rotating body having gear teeth formed on its outer periphery and protruding in the axial direction at a position where a pin inserted through the elongated hole is eccentric is disposed. A gear link transmission mechanism in which the gear teeth of the body mesh with the gear fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor A704 may also be used.

Further, an elongated hole is formed in the arm member A703, and a pin formed at an end portion of an auxiliary arm member (not shown) fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor A704 is inserted through the elongated hole. , a link transmission mechanism in which the driving force is transmitted from the auxiliary arm member to the arm member A703.

In addition, in this embodiment, the game board A that is arranged opposite to the front side of the second operation unit A700
13 is left-right asymmetrical (see FIG. 306), the drive motor A7
04 is left-right asymmetrical. That is, the gap (space) in the back side configuration of the game board A13
By inserting the drive motor A704 into the , the front-to-rear width necessary for arranging the game board A13 and the second operation unit A700 is suppressed.

In this way, since there is a desire to set the arrangement of the drive motor A704 according to the shape of the game board A13, in this embodiment, a gear link transmission mechanism or a gear transmission mechanism is adopted rather than a link transmission mechanism. is preferred.

Figure 364 is a front exploded perspective view of the effect unit A710, and Figure 365 is a rear exploded perspective view of the effect unit A710. In Figures 364 and 365, the production unit A710
Annular front cover A711 that divides the performance range of and its annular front cover A711
A skirt-shaped upper cover A7 arranged below and fastened and fixed to an upper lid portion A740 described later
12, and an elevating unit A7 arranged under the upper cover A712 so as to overlap on the back side.
A skirt-shaped lower cover A713, which is fastened and fixed to the elevating portion of 01, is disassembled and separated toward the front side.

In FIGS. 364 and 365, an annular rear cover A714, which is formed in an annular shape substantially equivalent to the annular front cover A711 when viewed in the front-rear direction and forms an annular internal space IE between the annular front cover A711 and the annular front cover A711, is fixed to the upper lid portion A740. A rotating body A720 rotatably disposed at the center of the circle of the annular rear cover A714 is illustrated.

The rotating body A720 is a member having a size that fits in a circle formed by the inner peripheral surface of the annular front cover A711 when viewed from the front. Light-emitting means A7 such as LEDs arranged on a plurality of electric decoration boards A715
Light emitted from 15a can be received. The light emitting means A715a is an electrical board A715
On each side of the pentagon formed by , three are arranged at equal intervals in the direction of the side.

In the present embodiment, the electrical board A715 is composed of three LEDs or the like arranged at equal intervals along one side of the pentagon, similarly to the light emitting means A715a, and the optical axis is directed toward the front side. A front light emitting means A715b is provided. The front light emitting means A715b is an annular front cover A71.
1, the annular front cover A711 emits light. In other words, the player can visually recognize the lighting effect through the light-transmitting portion partially formed in the annular front cover A711.

In this embodiment, the five flat plate-shaped decorative boards A715 each form one side of a pentagon, and the decorative boards A715 above the rotating body A720 are in a horizontal posture, and the decorative boards A715 below the left and right The lower end of A715 is arranged to face the rotating shaft side, and the light emitting means A715a is arranged in such a manner that the optical axis is directed in the normal direction of the inward surface of each electrical board A715. That is, the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a is emitted toward the center of the pentagon so as to intersect near the center of the pentagon.

Therefore, when the rotating body A720 rotates, the rotating outer portion of the rotating body A720
It can be configured to traverse the optical axis of light emitted from 715a. As a result, when the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a is reflected by the rotator A720, the traveling direction of the light can be changed with the rotation of the rotator A720, so that a splendid effect can be executed. .

In addition, in this embodiment, in order to facilitate the reflection of light by the rotating body A720, the rotating body A
The outer surface of 720 is plated (gold plating, silver plating, etc.). The aspect of the outer surface is not limited to plating, and may be various other aspects. For example, a tape having a color that is easy to reflect may be attached.

As described above, since the body of rotation A720 rotates around the rotation axis extending in the vertical direction, the light traveling on the rotation axis is reflected on the rotation axis of the body of rotation A720 regardless of whether the body of rotation A720 is rotating. is irradiated to the same part of In the present embodiment, the light passing concave portion A722a is formed at that location to open the upper portion of the rotating body A720 so that light can pass through.
Details will be described later.

The annular front cover A711 and the annular rear cover A714 have recessed portions A711a and A714a which form windows through which the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a passes at the opposite edge portions.
and a semicircular recessed portion A711b which is recessed in a semicircular cross-section to surround the rotating shaft of the rotating body A720.
, A714b.

The inner peripheral surface of the ring excluding the window portion formed by the recessed portions A711a and A714a and the other outer surface are plated. Therefore, the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a and reflected by the rotating body A720 can be further applied to and reflected by the annular front cover A711 and the annular rear cover A714. It can be visually recognized by the player as light traveling (reflecting) from the point. As a result, it is possible to reduce the number of light emitting means A715a to be arranged while executing a gorgeous effect.

In this respect, it is better to make the window necessary for passing the light from the light emitting means A715a as small as possible to ensure a wide area for reflecting other light (the area to be plated). It is advantageous because it can In this embodiment, recessed portions A711a and A714
The shape of the window formed by a is formed to be slightly larger than the outer shape of the LED that constitutes the light emitting means A715a, so that the light reflecting area can be increased without impairing the brightness of the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a. can be widely secured.

FIG. 366 is an exploded front perspective view of the rotating body A720 of the production unit A710, and FIG.
7 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rotating body A720 of the production unit A710. In FIGS. 366 and 367, illustration of the annular front cover A711, upper cover A712 and lower cover A713 of the effect unit A710 is omitted.

The rotating body A720 is composed of a plurality of rotating members, and is a set of members supported by a plurality of support portions A730 that support the plurality of rotating members, and has a pair of members having a substantially hemispherical outer shape. A first rotary member A721 and a second rotary member composed of a pair of members made of a colored (blue in this embodiment) light-transmissive resin material in a rotatable shape on the outside of the first rotary member A721. A728.

The first rotating member A721 is divided into front and rear parts and is formed of a resin material with low light transmittance so as to have a substantially hemispherical shell-like skeleton.
722, and an annular gear member A723, which is an annular member rotatably supported in an annular recessed portion formed on the back side of the shell portion A722 on the front side, and having gear teeth engraved on the back side. And, arranged on the back side of the annular gear member A723, rotatably supported in a manner sandwiched between the pair of shell portions A722, gear teeth A724a engraved on the shaft portion and the gear teeth of the annular gear member A723 It mainly includes a central rotary member A724 that is meshed with each other.

The pair of shell portions A722 are recessed at their upper portions in directions away from each other.
722a. At least in the shell portion A722 on the front side, the light passage concave portion A72
2a is formed on both the upper and lower sides of the annular gear member A723, and is arranged in such a manner that most of the annular gear member A723 enters the front side of the recessed end of the light passage recess A722a.

That is, even if the through hole surrounded by the light passage recess A722a is viewed from the top, most of the annular gear member A723 is not visible in that direction, so the central rotary member A724 arranged inside the annular gear member A723 is not visible. can be visually recognized. Therefore, when the light traveling in the vertical direction passes through the through hole surrounded by the light passage recess A722a, the annular gear member A72
3 can avoid blocking the light and allow the light to reach the central rotating member A724. Here, with reference to FIG. 368, an outline of the operation mode of the first rotating member A721 will be described.

FIG. 368 is a rear view of the first rotating member A721. In FIG. 368, the illustration of the shell A722 on the back side is omitted in order to make the inside visible, and for convenience of explanation, the support A7
A fixed gear SG arranged non-rotatably above 30 is illustrated in a state of meshing with an annular gear member A723.

An outline of the operation mode of the first rotating member A721 will be described. As described above, the first rotating member A721 is configured to rotate around the vertically extending rotating shaft (coaxial with the central axis of the fixed gear SG). When this rotation occurs, the relative position between the annular gear member A723 arranged inside the first rotating member A721 and the fixed gear SG changes, and accordingly the annular gear member A723 and the fixed gear SG move relative to each other. Displaced (engagement relationship changes).

In this embodiment, since the fixed gear SG is non-rotatably fixed to the tip of the shaft portion A751 of the box-shaped portion A750, relative displacement with respect to the fixed gear SG is ensured by the rotation of the annular gear member A723. . When the annular gear member A723 rotates, the annular gear member A7
A central rotating member A724 meshing with 23 rotates. The rotation axis of the central rotation member A724 is
Since it extends in a direction that intersects (perpendicular to) the axis (coaxial with the center axis of the fixed gear SG) that extends in the vertical direction as the rotation axis of the first rotation member A721, the shell portion A of the first rotation member A721
With the rotation of 722 (horizontal rotation about the vertical axis), the central rotating member A 724 rotates (vertical rotation about the horizontal axis) in a different manner. Note that the relationship between the rotation directions will be described later.

The rotation axis of the central rotating member A724 rotates along with the rotation of the shell A722 (in synchronization with the rotation angle).
Since it continues to change within the same plane, it can be made to appear to the player that the central rotating member A724 rotates on a plurality of vertical and horizontal rotation axes. Therefore, by causing the shell A722 to rotate in one direction, it is possible to cause the central rotating member A724 to rotate in multiple directions.

In this embodiment, since the number of teeth of the gear teeth A724a and the number of teeth of the fixed gear SG are the same (both are 10 teeth), the absolute value of the rotation angle of the shell portion A722 and the central rotation member A724
is synchronized with the absolute value of the rotation angle of As a result, each time the shell A722 takes a posture in which the ring shape can be visually recognized in a front view as shown in FIG. As indicated by 368, the posture is such that the disc portion faces the front side (returns). Therefore, it is possible to maintain the reproducibility of the rotation effect.

Returning to FIGS. 366 and 367, description will be made. The second rotating member A728 is connected to the first rotating member A7
21, and is fastened and fixed to the support portion A730 below the first rotating member A721.
A rod-shaped extension A formed in a rod-like shape extending upward to reach a position covering 21 from above
728a.

The rod-shaped extended portion A728a is formed narrower than the outer shape of the first rotating member A721,
Depending on the difference in arrangement, the first rotating member A721 may be partially hidden and the first rotating member A721 may be hidden.
(the case where it hardly overlaps with the first rotating member A721) can be configured, the details of which will be described later.

The outer shape of the first rotating member A721 and the second rotating member A728 is that of the annular rear cover A7.
14, so that the gap in the vertical direction is shortened. As a result, the annular rear cover A714 functions as a retainer for the first rotating member A721 and the second rotating member A728, and the first rotating member A721 and the second rotating member A728 can be secured while the annular rear cover A714 is arranged. Inadvertent disassembly such as pulling upward (disassembly) can be prevented.

As described above, the rotating body A720 is composed of a plurality of rotating members (the first rotating member A721 and the second rotating member A728) fastened and fixed to the supporting portion A730.
Rotate with 30 rotations. Next, this support portion A730 will be described.

FIG. 369(a) is a front exploded perspective view of the support portion A730, and FIG. 369(b) is a second
Fig. 11 is a front exploded perspective view of the support portion A735; FIG. 370(a) is a rear exploded perspective view of the support portion A730, and FIG. 370(b) is a rear exploded perspective view of the second support portion A735.

As shown in FIGS. 369 and 370, the support A730 is colored (white in this embodiment).
A first support portion A731 whose main body is formed in a cylindrical shape from a non-light-transmitting resin material, and an inner diameter slightly longer than the outer diameter of the main body of the first support portion A731 from a colorless and light-transmitting resin material and a second support portion A735 configured as a set of divided bodies divided into two in the radial direction, and a box shape described later inside the first support portion A731 and the second support portion A735. Part A7
A shaft rod portion A751 fixed to 50 is inserted, and the tip side portion of the shaft rod portion A751 is removed by a metal ring-shaped C ring C1 and a fixed gear SG that are fixed so as to be non-rotatable by fitting with an irregularly shaped shaft. Impossibly supported.

The first support portion A731 has a cylindrical body portion having an inner diameter slightly longer than the diameter of the axial rod portion A751 of the box-shaped portion A750 and a through hole A731a formed so that the axial rod portion A751 can be inserted therethrough; A plurality of support plate portions A732 extending in a straight line in both directions from the upper end portion of the main body portion A732 and formed with through-holes through which fastening screws can be inserted; A pair of projecting portions A733 are provided.

The protruding portion A733 is arranged at a position corresponding to a notch portion A772a of a lower layer transmission mechanism A770, which will be described later, and is a portion that enables transmission of force in the rotational direction by fitting. be. As a result, compared to the case where the pair of protruding portions A733 are formed to have the same width, it is easier to perform angle matching between the cylindrical extension portion A772 of the lower transmission mechanism A770 and the first support portion A731 at the time of fitting. can do.

As shown in FIGS. 369(b) and 370(b), the second support portion A735 includes a semi-cylindrical portion A736 forming a cylindrical portion and a plate extending in both directions on a straight line from the upper end of the semi-cylindrical portion A736. It is composed of a pair of divided bodies having a substantially symmetrical shape including a plurality of semi-supporting plate portions A737 extending in a shape and having through-holes through which fastening screws can be inserted.

The semi-cylindrical portion A736 has a recessed fitting portion A736a that is recessed upward from the lower end in a rectangular shape at the center position of the arc at the lower end side portion, and a rectangular shape that protrudes radially outward from the end portion of the arc. and a projecting fitting portion A736b.

The recessed fitting portion A736a is formed by an inner protrusion A762d (see FIG. 3) of an upper transmission mechanism A760 described later.
73), and the protruding fitting portion A736b is a protrusion that fits into the notch portion A762c of the upper transmission mechanism A760.

At the fitting position of the recessed fitting portion A736a, the wall portion around the recessed fitting portion A736a is arranged to face the inner wall of the cylindrical ridge portion A762b. The displacement to the left is restricted, and the protruding fitting portion A736b fits into the notch portion A762c, so that the divided body constituting the second support portion A735 can be supported indivisibly.

Further, the recessed fitting portion A736a and the projecting fitting portion A736b are fitted in such a manner that they come into contact with the notch portion A762c of the upper layer transmission mechanism A760 in the circumferential direction of rotation about the shaft rod portion A751. Therefore, it also functions as a transmission portion for transmitting the rotation of the large-diameter gear LG12 to the second support portion A735. Therefore, the concave fitting portion A736a and the projecting fitting portion A736b can function both to prevent the second support portion A736 from splitting and to transmit rotation to the second support portion A736.

A groove portion A735a recessed along the circumferential direction is formed on the inner surface of the semi-cylindrical portion in which the semi-supporting plate portion A737 is formed. The inner surface of the second support portion A735 and the first
The contact area with the outer surface of the support portion A731 can be reduced, and the generated frictional force can be reduced.

In particular, there is a risk that a load will be applied when the second rotating member A728 is fastened and fixed at a location between the half-supporting plate portions A737, and the inner diameter may be narrower than the design dimension. . On the other hand, in this embodiment, the groove portion A735 is positioned between the semi-supporting plate portions A737.
Since a is formed, it is possible to reduce the contact area at the location where sliding friction is likely to occur between the second support portion A735 and the first support portion A731. As a result, the second support portion A735 and the first support portion A731 are supported while minimizing the decrease in rigidity due to the formation of the groove portion A735a.
It is possible to effectively reduce the frictional force generated between.

The semi-supporting plate portion A737 includes a pair of assembly protrusions A737a protruding toward the opposite side of the mating member along the direction in which the second support portion A735 is split, and a pair of positional protrusions A737a protruding from one split body. An alignment protrusion A737b, an insertion hole A737c drilled in the other divided body as a through hole having a size that allows the alignment protrusion A737b to be inserted, and a second rotating member A728 drilled in the thickness direction are fastened. It is provided with a pair of fastening holes A737d which are formed to have a size through which the portion A728b (see FIG. 367) can be inserted.

The semi-supporting plate portions A737 are aligned with each other by inserting the alignment protrusions A737b into the insertion holes A737c, and the second rotating member A728 (
367) are fastened and fixed by screwing a fastening screw into the fastening portion A728b to be coupled to each other. That is, since the fastening screws used for fastening and fixing the second rotating member A728 can also be used for fastening and fixing the semi-supporting plate portion A737, the number of fastening screws can be reduced.

The mounting protrusion A737a is inserted into a recess formed at a corresponding position of the second rotating member A728 and used for positioning. different from each other. That is, the interval between the assembling projections A737a arranged on the divided body arranged on the front side is greater than the distance between the assembling projections A737a arranged on the divided body arranged on the back side.
wider than the spacing of 37a.

By forming the assembling projections A737a at different intervals, each of the pair of members that constitute the second rotating member A728 can be assembled from the correct direction of the second supporting portion A735. That is, it is possible to properly fit the mounting protrusion A737a and the second rotating member A728 only when the mounting is performed in the correct direction. If the position of the two-rotation member A728 does not match the concave portion and the assembly is not completed, the user can be made aware of the error in the assembly direction.

In addition, the second rotating member A728 has a major difference in the presence or absence of the fastening portion A728b, and other configurations are substantially the same.
There is a risk of error in attempting to assemble two members of a pair of member sets. According to this embodiment, since the formation intervals of the assembly protrusions A737a are different (because they are not common modes), the members of the second rotating member A728 to be assembled to the second support portion A735 are both attached to one member (combined). It is possible to make the mistake of trying to assemble by using one side member) be noticed before the fastening screw is inserted.

The second support portion A735, before being disassembled, has a radial separation that corresponds to the cylindrical ridge portion A of the upper layer transmission mechanism A760.
762b (see FIG. 366), the first support portion A731 and the second support portion A73
5 is assembled exclusively by parallel movement in the axial direction.
733 is a notch A772a, and a concave fitting portion A736a is an inner projection A762d (Fig. 373
), and the projecting fitting portion A736b is fitted with the notch portion A762c. Here, due to its shape, the second support portion A735 is assembled first, and in that state, the first support portion A73
1 is assembled.

Here, due to the shape relationship with the mating member to be assembled, the first support portion A731 and the second support portion A731
The posture when assembled together with the support portion A735 is not an arbitrary posture, but is limited to a specific posture. Therefore, when the first support portion A731 is assembled, the second support portion A735 may block the field of view, making it difficult to assemble the first support portion A731.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the second supporting portion A735 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and the first supporting portion A731 is made of a non-light-transmitting resin material.
After assembling, the inside of the second support portion A735 can be visually recognized. In addition, the tubular extending portion A772 of the lower transmission mechanism A770 to which the first support portion A731 is assembled is the upper lid portion A7.
40, the position where the projecting portion A733 of the first support portion A731 is fitted is not hidden by the upper lid portion A740, and can be configured to be easily visible.

Therefore, when the first support portion A731 is assembled, it can be easily adjusted to a suitable posture, so that the first support portion A731 and the second support portion A735 can be easily assembled.

Here, in the upper cover portion A740 that arranges (accommodates) the upper layer transmission mechanism A760 and the lower layer transmission mechanism A770 described later between the box-shaped portion A750 and the box-shaped portion A750, a through hole A that surrounds the central axis of the support portion A730 is provided.
741 is provided, in order to disassemble the upper cover portion A740 and modify the upper layer transmission mechanism A760 and the lower layer transmission mechanism A770, the shaft portion A751 fixed to the box-shaped portion A750 must be removed from the through hole A741. It is necessary to displace the upper lid portion A740 upward with respect to the box-shaped portion A750 in order to remove it.

At this time, if the support portion A730 remains assembled, the support plate portion A732 and the semi-support plate portion A
737 interfere with each other and the upper lid portion A740 cannot be displaced upward. Therefore, the upper lid part A
Before disassembling 740, it is necessary to disassemble the support A730. Further, as described above, in order to disassemble the support portion A730, it is necessary to disassemble the C-ring C1 and the fixed gear SG. ), it is necessary to disassemble the rotating body A720 in order to disassemble the fixed gear SG.

In this way, in order to access the upper-layer transmission mechanism A760 and the lower-layer transmission mechanism A770, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to the upper-layer transmission mechanism A760 and the lower-layer transmission mechanism A770 by configuring a plurality of members to be disassembled in order. In addition, it is possible to easily prevent fraudulent acts that cause malfunction by tampering with the upper layer transmission mechanism A760 or the lower layer transmission mechanism A770.

371 and 372 are front exploded perspective views of the upper lid portion A740 and the box-shaped portion A750. Note that FIG. 371 shows a view looking down obliquely from above, and FIG. 372 shows a view looking up obliquely from below (a view inclined at 22.5 degrees with respect to the vertical direction).

As shown in FIGS. 371 and 372, the upper lid portion A740 has a through hole A741 vertically drilled in the center position of the left and right, and supports each transmission member of the upper layer transmission mechanism A760 on the lower surface facing the box-shaped portion A750. A shape (a shape such as unevenness) is formed for the purpose.

The box-shaped part A750 is arranged below the upper lid part A740 and is formed in a box-like shape with at least the upper surface side open, and the upper layer transmission mechanism A760 and the lower layer transmission mechanism A770 are arranged at the open position. It is fixed to the bottom plate portion A750a of the upper lid portion A740 through the through hole A741
A metal (in this embodiment, made of brass) axial rod A751 extending vertically coaxially with the central axis of
And, a first detection sensor A752 consisting of a detection device configured by a photocoupler system arranged on the upper surface side of the box-shaped part A750, and a photocoupler system arranged on the lower surface side of the box-shaped part A750. a second detection sensor A753 consisting of a detection device, a drive motor AMT2 whose main body protrudes downward and is fastened and fixed, a drive gear AMG2 rotated by the excitation of the drive motor AMT2, and a bottom plate portion A750a. and a relay board A754 for relaying wiring connected to various sensors A752 and A753, the driving motor AMT2, and the like.

Figures 373 and 374 show the box A750, the upper transmission mechanism A760 and the lower transmission mechanism A
770 is an exploded front perspective view of 770. FIG. 373 and 374 show the state in which the upper layer transmission mechanism A760 is separated from the lower layer transmission mechanism A770 in the vertical direction, FIG. It is illustrated in a directional view looking up.

Both the upper layer transmission mechanism A760 and the lower layer transmission mechanism A770 are configured by meshing four gears, and each gear is limited to gears of two types (sizes). That is, the lower-layer transmission mechanism A770 includes a drive gear AMG2, a small-sized small gear PG1 meshed with the drive gear AMG2, a small gear PG2 of the same shape meshed with the small gear PG1, and the small gear PG2. It is composed of a drive gear AMG2 and a large-diameter gear LG1 having the same shape.

The upper-layer transmission mechanism A760 includes a large-diameter gear LG11 having the same shape as the drive gear AMG2, a large-diameter gear LG12 having the same shape meshing with the large-diameter gear LG11, and a small-diameter gear meshing with the large-diameter gear LG12. It is composed of a small-diameter gear PG11 having the same shape as the gear PG1 and a large-diameter gear LG13 meshing with the small-diameter gear PG11 and having the same shape as the drive gear AMG2.

Large-diameter gears LG13 and LG1 arranged on the most downstream side with the drive gear AMG2 side as the upstream side
Detected pieces A763 and A773 that are detected by a first detection sensor A752 and a second detection sensor A753 are formed respectively.

In the process of transmitting the driving force of each of the transmission mechanisms A760 and A770, a gear with a small diameter is used. In this case, the absolute value of the rotation angle is equal to the absolute value of the rotation angle of the drive gear AMG2.

In this embodiment, detection pieces A763 extending radially outward from a head covering the gear teeth of the large-diameter gear LG13 from above are formed at two locations (180° intervals) on the circumference at equal intervals. A piece A7 to be detected extends axially from a head covering the gear teeth of the large-diameter gear LG1 from below.
73 are formed at four locations (at 90-degree intervals) at equal intervals on the circumference, so that the first detection sensor A7
52 and the second detection sensor A753 (see FIG. 372), the first detection sensor A752 and the second detection The detection pieces A763 and A773 are detected by both of the sensors A753. Thus, in this embodiment, the first detection sensor A75
2 and the detection timing of the second detection sensor A753 can be related.

On the other hand, the reason why a plurality of detection sensors such as the first detection sensor A752 and the second detection sensor A753 are provided is that there is a timing for making only one of the detection sensors function.
Details will be described later.

In the detailed description of the upper layer transmission mechanism A760 and the lower layer transmission mechanism A770, since the upper layer transmission mechanism A760 is supported by the lower layer transmission mechanism A770 at a plurality of points, the lower layer transmission mechanism A770 will be described first for easy understanding. . The lower layer transmission mechanism A770 includes a box-shaped portion A7
50, and four gears AMG2, PG1,
It is a transmission mechanism composed of PG2 and LG1.

A plurality of recesses A771 for fitting are formed on the upper surface side of the driving gear AMG2 of the lower transmission mechanism A770 at equal intervals in the circumferential direction, and a projection A protruding radially inward in one of the recesses A771.
771a is formed. As a result, the internal shape of one recessed portion A771 is changed to that of the other recessed portion A771.
formed to be different from the internal shape of the

The small-diameter gear PG2 of the lower-layer transmission mechanism A770 includes a cylindrical extension portion A772 that extends cylindrically upward from the upper surface so as to surround the shaft portion A751. At the upper end of the tubular extension A772, a pair of rectangular notches A772a are provided at symmetrical positions with respect to the axial rod A751.
is formed. The notch A772a is a portion to be fitted with the projecting portion A733 of the support portion, and is formed as notches having different widths corresponding to the form of the projecting portion A733.

The large-diameter gear LG1 is arranged below an intermediate plate portion A750b formed above the bottom plate portion A750a of the box-shaped portion A750, and is restricted from being removed upward by the intermediate plate portion A750b. That is, in order to extract the large-diameter gear LG1, the second
Since it is necessary to remove the detection sensor A753, it is possible to increase the number of man-hours required to remove the large-diameter gear LG1. This makes it easier to avoid the large-diameter gear LG1 from being unintentionally pulled out.

Further, by dividing the area by the intermediate plate portion A750b, it is possible to easily avoid contact between the large-diameter gear LG1 and the constituent members of the upper-layer transmission mechanism A760. As a result, it is possible to avoid transmission of the driving force between the large-diameter gear LG1 and the upper transmission mechanism A760 (on the downstream side of the transmission path of the driving force).

Next, the details of the upper layer transmission mechanism A760 will be described. The upper layer transmission mechanism A760 is disposed in the upper layer of the box-shaped portion A750, and includes four gears LG11,
It is a transmission mechanism composed of LG12, PG11 and LG13.

The large-diameter gear LG11 of the upper-layer transmission mechanism A760 transmits driving force only when it rotates in one direction (clockwise when viewed from the top) by a one-way clutch housed inside.
When the one-way clutch rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the top, it is configured to idle, and has a plurality of ridges A761 projecting downward from the lower surface of the one-way clutch.

The protrusion A761 is a curved wall-shaped protrusion that fits into the recess A771 of the drive gear AMG2. linear shape with reduced overhang). As a result, it is possible to assemble only in a posture in which the protrusion A771a of the drive gear AMG2 and the corresponding portion A761a of the large-diameter gear LG11 match.

The large-diameter gear LG12 of the upper-layer transmission mechanism A760 has a cylindrical extension portion A of the small-diameter gear PG2 in the center.
A through hole A762a with an inner diameter slightly longer than the outer diameter of 772 is drilled, and a cylindrical protrusion A762b protruding from the upper surface side in a large diameter cylindrical shape, and a shaft rod at the protruding tip of the cylindrical protrusion A762b A pair of rectangular cutouts A7 formed at opposite positions across the central axis of the portion A751
62c, its notch A762c, and a pair of protruding parts along a straight line passing through the central axis of the axial rod portion A751 and orthogonal to the straight line passing through the central axis of the axial rod portion A751 in a top view. and an inner protrusion A762d.

The cylindrical ridge portion A762b receives the lower end portion of the second support portion A735 (see FIG. 366),
It is a portion that regulates the displacement of the second support portion A735 in the dividing direction, and the notch portion A762c and the inner projection portion A762d correspond to the projection fitting portion A736b and the recess fitting portion A736a of the second support portion A735, respectively. It is a part that fits together and is configured to be able to transmit driving force.

The large-diameter gear LG13 of the upper-layer transmission mechanism A760 is formed along the axial direction by omitting the formation of the head portion at a position shifted in the same direction and at the same angle from the pair of detected pieces A763 described above. and a cylindrical functional portion A765 which is coaxially rotatably disposed inside the large-diameter gear LG13 and configured to be relatively rotatable with the large-diameter gear LG13.

The columnar functional portion A765 has a pair of rotation restricting projections A765a arranged symmetrically with respect to the rotation axis and supported in a groove-shaped support groove A750c formed on the upper surface of the box-shaped portion A750. Here, a functional device that functions as a so-called torque limiter (safety clutch) with respect to the large-diameter gear LG13 is accommodated inside the cylindrical functional portion A765.

That is, when the load generated between the large-diameter gear LG13 and the cylindrical functional portion A765 is smaller than the standard (slight), torque transmission is maintained, and the large-diameter gear LG13 and the cylindrical functional portion A765 are maintained.
65, the torque transmission is interrupted when the load is excessive.

In this embodiment, the drive gear AMG2 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from above, and the one-way clutch inside the large-diameter gear LG11 idles, thereby interrupting the transmission of the driving force to the upper transmission mechanism A760. A torque limiter is used to provide resistance to more reliably prevent rotation of the motor. Therefore, from this point of view, it functions in the same way as a resistance member that constantly generates resistance and a member that generates viscous resistance such as a damper gear.

On the other hand, when the drive gear AMG2 rotates clockwise in top view and the one-way clutch inside the large diameter gear LG11 rotates without idling, the driving force is transmitted through the upper transmission mechanism A760. , the transmission of torque is interrupted, and the resistance from the large-diameter gear LG13 side can be reduced, so the load applied to the drive motor AMT2 can be suppressed, and the heat generation of the drive motor AMT2 can be suppressed.

Here, when the drive gear AMG2 rotates clockwise in top view and the one-way clutch inside the large diameter gear LG11 rotates without idling, the torque limiter transmits torque at the start of rotation. , after the rotation continues to some extent (after rotating by a certain angle), the torque transmission is switched to the state of canceling. Therefore, before the switch occurs,
A large load is generated between the small diameter gear PG11 and the large diameter gear LG13.

In this embodiment, the elongated gear tooth A764 is formed as a portion that receives this large load. That is, the attitude of the large-diameter gear LG13 when the drive gear AMG2 starts to rotate clockwise when viewed from above is changed to the attitude in which the detected piece A763 enters the gap of the first detection sensor A752 (FIG. 37).
3), it is possible to limit the gear teeth that mesh with the small-diameter gear PG11 to specific gear teeth when the drive gear AMG2 starts to rotate clockwise in top view.

By making the specific gear tooth longer in the axial direction as an elongated gear tooth A764, the load generated per unit length in the axial direction can be reduced. As a result, the large diameter gear LG13
durability can be improved.

It should be noted that the first detection sensor A752 can detect a plurality of objects by detecting the detected piece A763 of the large-diameter gear LG13. First, the upper transmission mechanism A760
rotates for driving force transmission and then stops, the upper layer transmission mechanism A76
It can be detected that 0 has stopped at the proper pose (angle).

Second, when the one-way clutch disposed inside the large-diameter gear LG11 is idling to release the driving force transmission to the upper transmission mechanism A760 (when the driving gear AMG2 rotates counterclockwise in top view). ), it can be detected that the release of the driving force transmission is functioning well. That is, for example, when the cutoff of driving force transmission (idling) is insufficient due to damage to the internal structure of the one-way clutch, or when the torque generation function of the torque limiter is insufficient due to a malfunction, When the driving force transmitted to the radial gear LG13 exceeds the resistance of the torque limiter, the large diameter gear LG13 rotates.

When the first detection sensor A752 detects that the piece A763 to be detected has been displaced while the driving gear AMG2 is controlled to rotate counterclockwise when viewed from above, an error signal is sent to the first detection sensor A752. can be used to find faults in one-way clutches and torque limiters.

It should be noted that the mechanism that compensates for the cancellation of the driving force transmission using the one-way clutch with the function of the torque limiter as described above is effective when the transmitted driving force is directed in the horizontal direction as in the present embodiment. be. In other words, in this embodiment, the driving force is transmitted by a plurality of transmission members that rotate around the rotating shaft extending in the vertical direction, but gravity cannot be used in this configuration.

When the driving force to be transmitted has a component in the direction of gravity, it is possible to use the weight of the member to which the driving force is transmitted to suppress the movement in the direction in which the driving force transmission is canceled. In the embodiment, the self weight cannot be used, and even a weak load caused by idling in the disengaging direction of the one-way clutch may cause transmission of driving force.

In addition, as a structure for suppressing displacement due to idling, it is conceivable to generate friction with other members, but in this case, it is necessary to generate a driving force greater than the friction to drive the members, so there is another problem. may occur. From this point of view, in this embodiment, a torque limiter is employed so that the transmission of the driving force can be reliably canceled when the driving direction is switched.

FIG. 375(a) is a top view of the upper lid portion A740, the box-shaped portion A750, the upper layer transmission mechanism A760, and the lower layer transmission mechanism A770, and FIG. 375(b) is the top lid portion A740 and the box-shaped portion A750.
4 is a front view of an upper layer transmission mechanism A760 and a lower layer transmission mechanism A770. FIG.

Transmission of the drive force of the drive motor AMT2 will be described with reference to FIGS. 375(a) and 375(b). When the drive gear AMG2 rotates due to the excitation of the drive motor AMT2, the protrusion A761 (see FIG. 374) engages with the recess A771 (see FIG. 373) of the drive gear AMG2.
) are also rotated.

When the rotation direction of the driving gear AMG2 is counterclockwise when viewed from above, the one-way clutch accommodated inside the large-diameter gear LG11 idles as described above, and the protrusion A761 and the large-diameter gear LG11 rotate relative to each other. Thus, even if the drive gear AMG2 rotates, the large-diameter gear LG11 maintains its state.

That is, the driving force is transmitted only through the lower transmission path DL1 through the lower transmission mechanism A770, and the transmission of the driving force through the upper transmission path UL1 through the upper transmission mechanism A760 is interrupted. Therefore, of the cylindrical extension portion A772 and the cylindrical ridge portion A762b fitted to the support portion A730 (see FIG. 369), only the cylindrical extension portion A772 rotates, and the cylindrical ridge portion A762b remains as it is. maintain.

As a result, in the assembled state of the production unit A710 (see FIG. 362), the first support portion A7 that fits into the cylindrical extension portion A772 of the first support portion A731 and the second support portion A735
31 (see FIG. 369) rotates, and the second support portion A735 maintains its state. Only one rotating member A721 (see FIG. 367) rotates, and the second rotating member A728 remains unchanged.

On the other hand, when the driving gear AMG2 rotates clockwise when viewed from the top, the driving force is sufficiently transmitted by the one-way clutch housed inside the large-diameter gear LG11 as described above. It rotates (integrally) in synchronization with the gear LG11. That is, drive gear A
When MG2 rotates, large diameter gear LG11 also rotates.

That is, the driving force is transmitted not only through the lower transmission path DL1 but also through the upper transmission path UL1. Therefore, the cylindrical extension portion A772 and the cylindrical ridge portion A7 that fit into the support portion A730 (see FIG. 369)
Both 62b rotate.

As a result, in the assembled state of the effect unit A710 (see FIG. 362), both the first support portion A731 and the second support portion A735 (see FIG. 369) rotate, and the first support portion A73
Both the first rotating member A721 and the second rotating member A728 (see FIG. 367) which are respectively fastened and fixed to the first and second support portions A735 rotate.

Here, the rotation directions of the first rotating member A721 and the second rotating member A728 will be described. First, the second rotating member A728 (see FIG. 367) is rotated by the driving force transmitted through the upper transmission path UL1. As the drive gear AMG2 rotates clockwise in top view, the large diameter gear LG
11 rotates clockwise when viewed from the top, and the large-diameter gear LG12 meshing with the large-diameter gear LG11 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the top. clockwise.

Next, the first rotating member A721 (see FIG. 367) is rotated by the driving force transmitted through the lower transmission path DL1. As the drive gear AMG2 rotates clockwise in top view, the drive gear A
The small gear PG1 meshing with MG2 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the top, and the small gear PG2 (see FIG. 373) meshing with the small gear PG1 rotates clockwise when viewed from the top. is clockwise when viewed from the top.

That is, the rotation directions of the first rotating member A721 and the second rotating member A728 are the axial rod portion A751
is the opposite direction to the rotation axis. As a result, the first rotating member A721 and the second rotating member A7
28 are rotating in the same direction, the player can visually recognize that they are rotating at high speed (with a large angle change), and the first rotating member A721 and the second rotating member A7 can be visually recognized.
28 can be made to appear to be rotating independently.

FIG. 376(a) is a front view of the first rotating member A721, and FIG. 376(b) is a front view of FIG.
376(c) is a top view of the first rotating member A721 as viewed in the direction of arrow D in 6(a);
is a front view of the first rotating member A721, and FIG. 376(d) is an arrow D in FIG. 376(c)
It is a top view of the 1st rotation member A721 in direction view.

FIGS. 376(a) and 376(b) show the initial state of the first rotating member A721, and FIGS. 376(c) and 376(d) show the shell portion A722 of the first rotating member A721 in the initial state. 45 degrees (first state) after being rotated 45 degrees counterclockwise in top view.

FIG. 377(a) is a front view of the first rotating member A721, and FIG. 377(b) is a front view of FIG.
377(c) is a top view of the first rotating member A721 as viewed in the direction of arrow D in 7(a);
is a front view of the first rotating member A721, and FIG. 377(d) is an arrow D in FIG. 377(c)
It is a top view of the 1st rotation member A721 in direction view.

In FIGS. 377(a) and 377(b), the shell A722 of the first rotating member A721 is the first
FIG. 377 shows a state (second state) after rotating 45 degrees counterclockwise in top view from the state shown in FIG.
377(c) and 377(d) show a state (third state) after the shell portion A722 of the first rotating member A721 has rotated 45 degrees counterclockwise in top view from the second state.

FIG. 378(a) is a front view of the first rotating member A721, and FIG. 378(b) is a front view of FIG.
378(c) is a top view of the first rotating member A721 as viewed in the direction of arrow D in 8(a);
is a front view of the first rotating member A721, and FIG. 378(d) is an arrow D in FIG. 378(c)
It is a top view of the 1st rotation member A721 in direction view.

378(a) and 378(b), the shell A722 of the first rotating member A721 is the third
FIG. 378 shows a state (fourth state) after rotating 45 degrees counterclockwise in top view from the state shown in FIG.
(c) and FIG. 378(d) show a state (fifth state) after the shell portion A722 of the first rotating member A721 has rotated 45 degrees counterclockwise in top view from the fourth state.

FIG. 379(a) is a front view of the first rotating member A721, and FIG. 379(b) is a front view of FIG.
379(c) is a top view of the first rotating member A721 as viewed in the direction of arrow D in 9(a);
is a front view of the first rotating member A721, and FIG. 379(d) is an arrow D in FIG. 379(c)
It is a top view of the 1st rotation member A721 in direction view.

In FIGS. 379(a) and 379(b), the shell A722 of the first rotating member A721 is the fifth
FIG. 379 shows a state (sixth state) after rotating 45 degrees counterclockwise in top view from the state shown in FIG.
(c) and FIG. 379(d) show a state (seventh state) after the shell portion A722 of the first rotating member A721 has rotated 45 degrees counterclockwise in top view from the sixth state.

When the shell portion A722 rotates 45 degrees counterclockwise in top view from the seventh state, the first rotating member A7
21 returns to the initial state. 376 to 379 illustrate one section (one cycle) of the rotation of the first rotating member A721.

Note that in the initial state of the first rotating member A721 (see FIG. 376(a)), the shell portion A72
2 as a front shell portion A722F, and the opposite side as a rear shell portion A722B. Similarly, in the initial state of the first rotating member A721, the central rotating member A7
24 as viewed from the front is the member front surface A724F, and the opposite side thereof is the member rear surface A724B.

376(a), 376(c), 377(a), 377(c), and 378
In (a), FIG. 378(c), FIG. 379(a) and FIG. 379(c), the electrical board A715 (
The optical axis KJ of the LED constituting the light emitting means A715a of FIG. 364) is illustrated by an imaginary line,
Figures 376(b), 376(d), 377(b), 377(d), 378(b),
In Figures 378(d), 379(b) and 379(d), a given virtual plane VS is illustrated. The optical axis KJ passes through this virtual plane VS.

376(d), FIG. 377(d), FIG. 378(d) and FIG. 379(d), arrows HL and VL schematically indicating light reflection directions are illustrated. Arrow HL indicates central rotary member A7
The arrow VL indicates the direction in which the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a arranged on the left and right sides of the central rotating member A724 is reflected by the shell A722 and propagates. It represents the direction in which the irradiated light travels after being reflected by the central rotating member A724.

As shown in Figures 376(d), 377(d), 378(d) and 379(d),
As the first rotary member A721 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the top, the direction of the arrow VL changes by one rotation clockwise when viewed from the top. That is, in this embodiment, the central rotating member A7
24, the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a disposed above the central rotary member A724
can be advanced in the radial direction of a circle centered on the rotation axis of the first rotation member A721 via the , and the direction can be changed in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the first rotation member A721.

For example, this is difficult to achieve with a configuration in which the light emitting means are arranged on the side surface of the shell A722 or the central rotating member A724. For example, when the light emitting means is provided on the side surface of the shell A722, the direction of the light emitted from the light emitting means changes in the same rotational direction as the first rotating member A721.

Further, for example, since the member front surface A724F of the central rotating member A724 always faces the front side when the first rotating member A721 rotates, the member front surface A724F and the member rear surface A724B
In the case where the light emitting means is arranged on the surface, the change in the traveling direction of the light irradiated in the normal direction of the surface does not change around the rotation axis of the first rotating member A721 (rotational axis having the rotation axis in the front-rear direction). change direction).

Therefore, as compared with the case of adopting the configuration in which the light emitting means is arranged on the side surface of the first rotating member A721 to perform the light emission effect, it is possible to execute the light emission effect with unexpectedness. For example, since the direction of rotation of the change in the traveling direction of the light is opposite to the direction of rotation of the first rotating member A721, the player will feel as if the rotating member is rotating at a higher speed than the actual rotation speed. can make you feel

As shown in FIGS. 376 to 379, the central rotating member A724 rotates with the rotation of the first rotating member A721, but the surface viewed by the player is limited to the member front surface A724F. Therefore, even if the fastening screw for fastening and fixing the central rotating member A724 is exposed on the back side (see FIG. 368), it is possible to prevent the fastening screw from being visually recognized by the player.

That is, the member back surface A724B of the central rotating member A724 can be configured not as an area to be visually recognized by the player but as an area for another purpose. A configuration that makes it easier to achieve the purpose of reflecting light can be selected. For example, in this embodiment, by intentionally exposing the fastening screw, it is possible to cause reflection of light using the luster of the member surface of the fastening screw.

In addition, the aspect of the member surface of a fastening screw can be set arbitrarily. For example, the surface of the fastening screw member may be painted black to facilitate shadow formation, the surface of the fastening screw member may be painted with a color to reflect the color, or the fastening screw may be coated with an LED. You may attach a light emission means, such as.

The action of light applied to the first rotating member A721 will be described. In the following description, FIG. 364 will be referred to as appropriate. The electrical board A715 having the light emitting means A715a for irradiating the first rotating member A721 with light is arranged so as to configure each side of the pentagon as described above. The optical axis KJ is arranged along the direction of
The electrical board A715 (see FIG. 364) arranged above the first rotating member A721 will be described first, and the electrical board A715 located on the left and right sides of the first rotating member A721 will be described later.

The illumination board A715 arranged above the first rotating member A721 is irradiated with light downward from the light emitting means A715a. This light reaches the central rotating member A724 through the light passage concave portion A722a regardless of the state of the first rotating member A721. That is, the first rotating member A7
By irradiating light from the light emitting means A715a arranged on the electrical board A715 arranged above 21, the central rotating member A724 can always be illuminated with light.

In addition, since three LEDs are arranged side by side in the light emitting means A715a, the amount of light reaching the central rotating member A724 can vary depending on the state of the first rotating member A721. Namely
In the initial state (see FIG. 376(b)), the light passing concave portion A722a is elongated in the same direction as the light emitting means A715a are arranged in parallel, so the light emitted from the left and right light emitting means A715a is also centrally rotated. It is easy to reach the member A724.

On the other hand, in the second state (see FIG. 377(b)), the light passing recesses A722a do not extend in the direction in which the light emitting means A715a are arranged in parallel, and the light emitted from the left and right light emitting means A715a passes through the light passing recesses. Since it is difficult to enter A722a, of the light emitted from the decorative board A715 arranged above the central rotating member A724, the light reaching the central rotating member A724 is mainly the light emitted from the central light emitting means A715a. Become. Therefore, the difference in the state of the first rotating member A721 can be associated with the difference in the emission intensity of the central rotating member A724.

From this point of view, in the initial state and the fourth state in which the member front face A724F of the central rotating member A724 is easily visually recognized in a front view, the decorative board A71 arranged above the central rotating member A724
5 and reaching the central rotating member A724 is maximized, and the central rotating member A7
In the second state and sixth state in which the member front face A724F of No. 24 is difficult to visually recognize from the front view, the intensity of the light emitted from the decorative board A715 arranged above the central rotating member A724 and reaching the central rotating member A724 is minimized. can be That is, it is possible to change the visibility of the central rotating member A724 in a front view and the intensity of the light reaching the central rotating member A724.

The electrical boards A715 arranged on the left and right sides of the first rotating member A721 are provided with light emitting means A715a with the optical axis KJ arranged on a plane (virtual plane VS) passing through the rotation axis of the shell A722. Light is emitted from the light emitting means A715a toward the first rotating member A721.
Depending on the state of the rotating member A721, the location where the light reaches differs.

That is, the state where the shell A722 is arranged between the central rotating member A724 and the light emitting means A715a (initial state (see FIGS. 376(a) and 376(b)) or the fourth state (see FIG. 378(a
) and FIG. 378(b))), the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a reaches the shell A72
2 and does not reach the central rotary member A724.

The outer peripheral edge of the shell A722 is curved in such a manner that the width becomes smaller as it goes radially outward.
b. Therefore, even in the initial state and the fourth state of the first rotating member A721, part of the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a to the shell A722 is reflected by the curvature of the outer peripheral edge of the shell A722 and the arch of the connecting portion A722b. It can be made to progress toward the player by reflecting it on the curvature of the .

In addition, in the state between the initial state and the fourth state of the first rotating member A721, the shell A722 reflects the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a toward the player (reflects along the arrow HL). ), it is possible to emphasize the difference between the amount of light traveling toward the player in a state slightly deviated from the initial state and the fourth state and the amount of light in other states. That is, in the initial state and the fourth state of the first rotary member A721, the central rotary member A724 is momentarily (pulse-like) visually recognized in the dark, and in a state slightly deviated from the initial state and the fourth state, the central rotary member A724 is displayed. It is possible to execute a lighting effect of switching to a brightly visible state.

On the other hand, in the state between the initial state and the fourth state in the rotational displacement of the first rotating member A721, the optical axis of the light emitting means A715a does not entirely overlap with the shell A722. reaches the central rotating member A724.

In this way, the light emitting means A of the electrical board A715 arranged on the left and right sides of the first rotating member A721
A state in which the light emitted from 715a reaches the central rotating member A724 and a state in which the central rotating member A7
24 can be switched depending on the state of the first rotating member A721. As a result, even without controlling the light emission mode (for example, the flashing mode) of the light emitting means A715a, it is possible to perform a light emission effect in which the light that reaches the central rotating member A724 appears to be blinking.

For example, by changing the rotation speed of the first rotating member A721 while maintaining the lighting state of the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a, it is possible to make the light appear to blink at different lighting or extinguishing times ( It can be visually recognized as a light emission effect with different blinking cycles).

In this case, if the central rotating member A724 cannot be followed as a still image and is driven to rotate at a speed that exceeds the degree of causing an afterimage (for example, 20 [rps]), the Regardless of the speed, the central rotating member A724 appears as if it is stopped, while the blinking period of the light applied to the central rotating member A724 can be varied depending on the difference in speed.

That is, the higher the rotation speed of the first rotating member A721, the shorter the interval until the first rotating member A721 reaches the initial state and the fourth state, and the shell A722 illuminates the light emitting means A715a (center Since the period in which the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a) arranged on the left and right sides of the rotating member A724 is blocked can be shortened, the flickering period of the light emitted to the central rotating member A724 can be shortened. Therefore, in this embodiment, the first rotating member A7
By changing the rotation speed of A724, it is possible to perform an effect of changing the flashing cycle of the light irradiated to the central rotary member A724.

In the present embodiment, as shown in the initial state and the fourth state of the first rotating member A721, in a state in which the optical axis of the light emitting means A715a and the shell portion A722 are arranged to face each other, the central rotating member A724 is , the longitudinal direction overlaps with the shell portion A722 when viewed from the direction of the rotation axis (or viewed from the direction of the optical axis of the light emitting means A715a). In this embodiment, the central rotating member A
724 is defined as a direction parallel to the member front face A724F or the member back face A724B (for example, the direction of arrows LR, the direction of arrows UD in FIG. 376(a), or the direction orthogonal to arrows FB). , the direction in which the lateral direction connects the member front surface A724F and the member rear surface A724B (Fig. 37
6(b) in the direction of arrows FB).

In other words, in the initial state and the fourth state of the first rotating member A721, the central rotating member A724 has the longitudinal direction of the shell portion A72 when viewed in the direction of the rotation axis (or in the direction of the optical axis of the light emitting means A715a).
It becomes a posture that enters (fits) inside the thickness of 2. Thereby, the light shielding effect of the shell portion A722 in the initial state and the fourth state of the first rotating member A721 can be improved. That is, by shielding the light with the shell A722, it is possible to prevent the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a from reaching the central rotating member A724. , but not the central rotary member A724.

When rotating the first rotating member A721 at a constant speed, the total (ratio) of the time during which the first rotating member A721 is maintained in the initial state or the fourth state with respect to the time during which the rotation is continued is the rotational speed It's the same regardless. As a result, the change in the rotational speed of the first rotating member A721 can prevent the change in the brightness of the first rotating member A721 visually recognized by the player. That is, when the first rotating member A721 is rotated at high speed, it is possible to prevent the first rotating member A721 from being seen in the dark.

In this embodiment, the first rotating member A72 is rotated while the light emitting means A715a is turned on.
1 can change the blinking period of the light reaching the central rotating member A724. According to this, it is possible to eliminate the need to form a circuit for causing the flashing of the light emitting means A715a while achieving the same effect as in the case of flashing the light emitting means A715a itself. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the size of the electrical board A715.

As described above, the light emitting means A715a for emitting light from above the central rotating member A724;
The light emitting means A715a for emitting light from the left and right sides of the central rotating member A724 is the first rotating member A
It is configured so that how the first rotating member A721 is illuminated differs from the state of A721. Therefore, by controlling separately, it is possible to execute the lighting effect illustrated below.

For example, the initial state of the first rotating member A721 (see FIGS. 376(a) and 376(b))
Or in the fourth state (see FIGS. 378(a) and 378(b)), the central rotary member A7
24 is turned off, and by controlling the light emitting means A715a arranged on the left and right of the central rotating member A724 to light or blink, the central rotating member A724 is darkly visible, and the shell part A light effect that brightly illuminates the A722 can be executed.

Further, for example, only the light emitting means A715a (the central light emitting means A715a) arranged above the central rotating member A724 are lit or blinked, and the light emitting means A715a arranged to the left and right of the central rotating member A724 are extinguished. By controlling, it is possible to perform a light effect that illuminates the central rotating member A724 brightly and visually recognizes the shell A722 darkly.

Further, for example, light is irradiated from both directions in the horizontal direction, but light is irradiated only from one side (upper side) in the vertical direction (every half rotation, the light is reflected from the central rotating member A724 to the front side. A complex lighting effect can be executed by using the difference between the case and the case of being reflected to the back side). For example, blue light is emitted from the light emitting means A715a arranged on the left and right of the central rotating member A724, and red light is emitted from the light emitting means A715a arranged above the central rotating member A724. For a player who views from the front, switching between a situation in which blue light is seen and a situation in which blue light and red light are mixed is switched every half rotation of the first rotating member A721. can be done.

In this case, by changing the rotation speed of the first rotating member A721 while executing the control to continuously turn on the light without flashing the light, it is possible to arbitrarily change the period in which the appearance of the light changes. .

An example of stop control of the first rotating member A721 will be described. As described above, the driving force for rotationally driving the first rotating member A721 is transmitted through the lower transmission path DL1 (see FIG. 375(b)). Since the pieces to be detected A773 (see FIG. 374) are detected by the second detection sensor A753 at intervals of 90 degrees, the sound lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) controls each time the first rotating member A721 rotates 90 degrees. The occurrence of rotation can be determined. The state of the first rotating member A721 can be determined by dividing this determination according to the rotation direction of the first rotating member A721, accumulating the results, and determining the accumulated result separately.

That is, for example, when the drive motor AMT2 is driven to rotate in the rotation direction (positive direction) in which the shell A722 rotates counterclockwise in top view, the piece A773 to be detected is detected by the second detection sensor A75.
While the numerical value of the cumulative counter is incremented by 1 each time 3 is detected, when the drive motor AMT2 is rotationally driven in the direction of rotation (reverse direction) in which the shell portion A722 rotates clockwise in top view, the piece to be detected is detected. Each time A773 is detected by the second detection sensor A753, the numerical value of the cumulative counter is decremented by one.

If the numerical value of the cumulative counter is a multiple of 0 or 4, the initial state is (0 or 4
(multiple of 0 or 4) + 1 is the second state, (multiple of 0 or 4) + 2 is the fourth state, and (multiple of 0 or 4) + 3 is the sixth state. can be done.

Therefore, according to the present embodiment, even if the rotation angle of the drive motor AMT2 cannot be designated, by determining the numerical value of the cumulative counter and controlling the stop of the drive motor AMT2, the initial state, the second The first rotary member A72 in either the second state, the fourth state or the sixth state
1 can be stopped.

Therefore, it is possible to perform an effect such that the postures in which the first rotating member A721 stops have different meanings. For example, it can be utilized as an effect means for notifying the difference in the degree of expectation for a big win, or notifying the time information (for example, the stopping posture changes every two hours).

In this embodiment, the case where the pieces A773 to be detected are formed at four locations at regular intervals has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. The pieces A773 to be detected may be arranged at non-equidistant intervals, may be formed at three locations, five or more locations, or may be formed at one location.

FIG. 380(a) is a front view of the production unit A710, and FIG.
Fig. 380(c) is a top view of the effect unit A710 viewed in the direction of arrow D in 0(a);
is a front view of the effect unit A710, and FIG. 380(d) is an arrow D in FIG. 380(c)
It is a top view of production|presentation unit A710 in direction view.

FIG. 381(a) is a front view of the production unit A710, and FIG.
381(c) is a top view of the effect unit A710 viewed in the direction of arrow D in 1(a);
is a front view of the production unit A710, and FIG. 381(d) is an arrow D in FIG. 381(c)
It is a top view of production|presentation unit A710 in direction view.

In FIGS. 380 and 381, the state of rotation of the rotating body A720 is illustrated in chronological order. That is, the first rotating member A721 is driven in the rotating direction of rotating counterclockwise when viewed from the top, as shown in FIG.
380(c) and 380(d), the first state of the first rotating member A721 is shown in FIGS. 381(a) and 381(d). (b
), the second state of the first rotating member A721 is the first state in FIGS. 381(c) and 381(d).
A third state of the rotating member A721 is illustrated respectively.

When the first rotating member A721 is driven in the rotating direction of rotating counterclockwise in top view, as described above, the driving force is transmitted through the upper transmission path UL1, so the second rotating member A728 also rotates in the first rotation. It reversely rotates at the same rotation angle as the member A721.

That is, FIGS. 380(a) and 380(b) show the initial state of the second rotating member A728 in which the rod-shaped extensions A728a are arranged on the left and right sides of the first rotating member A721, and FIG.
In c) and FIG. 380(d), the rod-shaped extension A728a is rotated 4 degrees clockwise in top view from the initial state.
A first state of the second rotating member A728 rotated 5 degrees is illustrated, FIGS.
In (b), the rod-shaped extension A728a rotates 45 degrees clockwise from the first state to the second state.
The second state of the rotating member A728 is illustrated, and in FIGS. 381(c) and 381(d), the second rotating member A728 in which the rod-shaped extension portion A728a is rotated 45 degrees clockwise in top view from the second state.
A third state of is illustrated.

Since the pair of rod-shaped extensions A728a are formed in a substantially rotationally symmetrical shape, the second rotating member A728 returns to the initial state by further rotating 45 degrees clockwise in top view from the third state. do.

In FIGS. 380(b), 380(d), 381(b) and 381(d), for ease of understanding, the annular front cover A711 and the annular rear cover A714 are schematic diagrams (simplified diagrams). ) in phantom lines.

In addition, in FIGS. 380(a), 380(c), 381(a) and 381(c), the outer shape of the electrical board A715 is illustrated by imaginary lines, and FIGS. 380(b) and 380(d). ), Figure 381
In (b) and FIG. 381(d), a virtual plane VS is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 380 and 381, the second rotating member A728 rotates along with the first
It passes through the optical axis of the light emitted from the illumination boards A715 (two boards arranged on each side) arranged on the left and right sides of the rotating member A721. Therefore, similarly to the first rotating member A721, the traveling mode of the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a of the electrical board A715 is controlled by the second rotating member A7.
It can be changed corresponding to 28 rotations.

Here, unlike the case where the shell A722 of the first rotating member A721 is made of a resin material with low light transmittance, the second rotating member A728 is made of a resin material with light transmittance. It does not block light when passing through the optical axis of , but acts to cause a change in light refraction mode or light color. In this embodiment, since the second rotating member A728 is made of a blue resin material, the light reaching the first rotating member A721 is changed to a blue color at the timing when the second rotating member A728 passes through the optical axis. (color mixed with blue) can be changed.

In this embodiment, the second rotating member A728 is formed in a rod shape extending in the direction along the rotation axis and bent along the circumferential direction of rotation. is configured so as not to overlap with all of the optical axes of

For example, in the state shown in FIG. 380(d), the optical axis of the light emitting means A715a arranged on the electrical board A715 arranged on the left and right upper sides of the central rotating member A724 overlaps with the second rotating member A728, and the other Although the optical axis of the light emitting means A715a arranged on the electrical board A715 and the second rotating member A728 do not overlap, on the other hand, in the state shown in FIG.
The optical axis of the light emitting means A715a arranged on the electrical decoration board A715 arranged on the left and right lower side of 724 overlaps with the second rotating member A728, and the light emitting means A arranged on the other electrical decoration board A715.
The optical axis of 715a and the second rotating member A728 do not overlap. In addition, FIG.380(b) and FIG.3
In the state shown in 81(b), the optical axis of any light emitting means A715a is aligned with the second rotating member A72.
8 are configured so that they do not overlap.

As a result, compared to the case where the optical axes of all the light emitting means A715a arranged on the left and right sides of the central rotating member A724 and the second rotating member A728 are switched to overlap or not overlap, the central rotating member A724 The variety of modes of light arriving can be increased. That is, the second
Light passing through the rotating member A728 reaches the central rotating member A724. Only light arriving from the upper left and right sides passes through the second rotating member A728. Only light arriving from the lower left and right sides passes through the second rotating member A728. It can be increased to a mode that passes through the A728.

In this case, the light emitting means A715a whose optical axis overlaps with the second rotating member A728 is turned on and the light emitting means A715a whose optical axis does not overlap with the second rotating member A728 is turned off. light emitting means A715a overlapping the second rotating member A72
The central rotating member A724
can change the appearance of That is, the central rotating member A724 is replaced by the second rotating member A72.
It is possible to switch between emitting light in a manner in which the colors of A728 are mixed and emitting light regardless of the color of the second rotating member A728.

In addition, the direction of the optical axis that overlaps the second rotating member A728 can be changed from the upper left and right to the lower left and right depending on the arrangement of the second rotating member A728.
The part of the central rotating member A724 that is illuminated in a mixed manner of 28 colors can be switched.

In addition, as illustrated in FIGS. 380 and 381, when viewed from above, the second rotating member A7
28 is configured so as not to overlap with the light passage concave portion A722a. As a result, the optical axis of the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a arranged above the central rotating member A724 does not depend on the arrangement of the second rotating member A728, and does not pass through the second rotating member A728. A72
Go to 2a.

Therefore, for example, only the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a arranged above the central rotating member A724 is turned on, and the light emitting means A715 arranged to the left and right of the central rotating member A724 are turned on.
By configuring a to turn off, it is possible to prevent the color of the light reaching the central rotating member A724 from being changed by the second rotating member A728.

If this is achieved by the light emitting means A715a arranged on the left and right sides of the central rotating member A724, the light emitting means A715a is turned on at the timing when the second rotating member A728 does not intersect the optical axis of the light emitting means A715a, and the second rotating member A728 intersects the optical axis, it is necessary to turn off the light emitting means A715a (control synchronized with the rotation of the second rotating member A728). Such control can be made unnecessary by the function of the light emitting means A715a.

The second rotating member A728 partially hides the central rotating member A724 from the field of view of the player in a posture in which the member front surface A724F of the central rotating member A724 does not face the front and the performance function of the central rotating member A724 is lowered. (see FIG. 381(a)), and is configured so that the light refracted by the second rotating member A728 can easily travel to the player. As a result, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the presentation function of the rotating body A720 during the continuation of the rotation.

Here, since the rod-shaped extension portion A728a of the second rotating member A728 is formed in a rotationally symmetrical shape, the shape (outer shape) in a front view can be switched at intervals of 180 degrees. That is, FIG.
The shape (outer shape) of the second rotating member A728 shown in 1(a) is equivalent to the shape (outer shape) in the state where the second rotating member A728 is rotated 180 degrees from the state shown in FIG. 381(a).

On the other hand, the first rotating member A721 rotating inside the second rotating member A728 is not in the same state at 180 degree intervals. That is, when the first rotating member A721 rotates 180 degrees from the second state (see FIG. 377(a)) shown in FIG. 381(a), the state changes to the sixth state (see FIG. 379(a)). In this embodiment, as described above, the second rotating member A728 is the first rotating member A721.
(see FIG. 381(a)), the first rotating member A721 is partially hidden by the second rotating member A728.
It is possible to make it difficult to determine whether 21 is in the second state or the sixth state.

Then, from the state where the second rotating member A728 is arranged as illustrated in FIG. 381(a),
While the second rotating member A728 and the first rotating member A721 are synchronously rotated by 45 degrees, if the first rotating member A721 is in the second state (see FIG. 377(a)), the first rotation Light emitted from the light emitting means A715a arranged above the member A721
The direction reflected by 724 is the direction facing the front (see arrow VL in FIG. 377(d)), and while the central rotating member A724 is brightly visible to the player, the first rotating member A721
is in the sixth state (see FIG. 379(a)), the direction in which the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a arranged above the first rotating member A721 is reflected by the central rotating member A724 is the rear surface. The direction toward the side (see arrow VL in FIG. 379(d)), and the central rotating member A7
24 is darkly visible to the player.

That is, changing the appearance of the first rotating member A721 (brightness of the central rotating member A724) while maintaining the same external shape of the second rotating member A728 that is visually recognized during displacement is performed by the light emitting means A.
715a can be generated without changing the lighting mode. In this case:
When the second rotating member A728 is stopped in the state of FIG. In addition, it is possible to heighten the sense of anticipation for the subsequent operation mode, and to improve the ability to pay attention to the rotating body A720.

In this case, while the second rotating member A728 and the first rotating member A721 are synchronously rotated by 90 degrees from the arrangement shown in FIG. , the member front surface A724F of the central rotating member A724 rotates 90 degrees from an upward posture to a forward and backward posture. Along with this, the first rotating member A721 and the second rotating member A728
The direction of the light reflected via the central rotating member A724 gradually changes from the vertical direction to the front-rear direction until just before the rotation angle of reaches 90 degrees (synchronized with the rotation angle of the first rotating member A721). On the other hand, when the rotation angles of the first rotating member A721 and the second rotating member A728 reach 90 degrees, the member front surface A724F faces the front-rear direction (because the tilt with respect to the optical axis KJ from above disappears). ), the front-to-rear direction component of the direction of the light reflected through the central rotary member A724 becomes close to 0, and the light reflection direction returns to the vertical direction.

In this way, in synchronization with the rotation of the first rotating member A721 from the second state or the sixth state, light emitted from the light emitting means A715a arranged above the central rotating member A724 is emitted from the central rotating member A724. It is possible to gradually increase the forward and backward component of the light when it is reflected. As a result, the longer the rotation time of the first rotating member A721, the more the first rotating member A
721 is in the second state or in the sixth state.
1 can be maintained at a high level of attention.

In this embodiment, the second rotating member A728 is stopped by driving the rotating body A720 in the direction in which the first rotating member A721 rotates clockwise in top view from the state shown in FIG. 381(a). It is also possible to rotate the first rotating member A721 while keeping it. In this case
Since the light reflected by the central rotating member A724 (light along the arrow VL) passes through the second rotating member A728 and easily reaches the player's eyes, the central rotating member A724 is colored and easily visible.

That is, in the state shown in FIG. 381(a), the posture of the first rotating member A721 can be configured in two ways with an interval of 180 degrees, and from the state shown in FIG. and rotating the first rotating member A721 while maintaining the posture of the second rotating member A728 from the state shown in FIG. A total of four ways of showing the rotating member A724 to the player can be executed.

The light reflected through the central rotating member A724 functions not only to change the brightness of the central rotating member A724 itself, but also to illuminate the members arranged around the central rotating member A724.

For example, when light is reflected to the left front side via the central rotating member A724 (Fig. 377 (
d)), in the game area formed on the front side of the game board A13. When the light is reflected to the right front side via the central rotating member A724 (
376(d)), in the game area formed on the front side of the game board A13, the right flow path (the flow path configured in the area on the right side with respect to the center of the horizontal width of the game area, mainly It can be used as a light that brightly illuminates the flow path through which the ball fired with the right hand passes.

Further, for example, when light is reflected to the left rear side via the central rotating member A724 (Fig. 3
78(d)), the light can be used to brightly illuminate the first operation units A400, A400A, A400B, etc. arranged on the front left side of the third pattern display device 81, and the central rotating member A724 can be used. When the light is reflected to the right rear side through (see FIG. 379(d)), the first operation units A400C and A4 arranged on the right side of the front side of the third pattern display device 81
It can be used as light that brightly illuminates 00D and the like. Thus, the central rotating member A7
Since the light reflected via 24 can be switched in a direction directed toward different members, the player's line of sight can be guided to different members (places) by switching the direction of the light.

In addition, the second rotating member A728 is configured with a vertical length capable of dividing the inner region of the annular front cover A711 in front view into left and right (see FIG. 381(a)). Thereby, in a state where the second rotating member A728 is stopped, for example, the effect unit A710
is arranged on the front side of the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 321), the display region of the third pattern display device 81 viewed through the inner region of the annular front cover A711 is divided into left and right. can be partitioned. In other words, the second rotating member A728 can be used not only as a member that executes an effect by rotating motion, but also as a member that divides the display area of the display device when stopped.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, when the rotation direction of the drive gear AMG2 is counterclockwise when viewed from above, the first rotation member A721 can be rotated while the second rotation member A728 is stopped. , the effect of rotating the first rotating member A721 can be executed in a state in which the display area of the display device is divided.

In this embodiment, the second rotating member A728 is configured to rotate only when the first rotating member A721 is driven in a counterclockwise rotating direction when viewed from above, and rotates in the opposite direction (first rotating member A7
21 is rotated clockwise in top view), the second rotating member A728 stops.

In other words, in one direction of rotation, the first rotating member A721 has the effect of arbitrarily changing the flickering cycle of the light reaching the central rotating member A724 by passing through the optical axis of the light emitting means A715a arranged on the left and right. In the other direction of rotation, in addition to the effect of changing the blinking period, the central rotating member A7
A change in the emission behavior (color, width, etc.) of the light reaching 24 can be produced.

In this way, by varying the direction of rotation, it is possible to change the visibility of the lighting effect. Since the frequency with which the second rotating member A728 passes through the optical axis depends on the rotation speed of the second rotating member A728, variations in the change in the light emission mode (color, width, etc.) of the light reaching the central rotating member A724 2 Depends on the rotational speed resolution (switchable number) of the rotating member A728.

The rotation speed of the second rotating member A728 naturally has a permissible limit, and this permissible limit defines the limit of variations in the light emission mode. , the second rotating member A728 can be switched to operate or stop. Therefore, even if the rotating speed is the same, if the rotating direction is changed, the light emission mode (color, width, etc.) reaching the central rotating member A724 can be changed. can be different.

Therefore, when the first rotating member A721 or the second rotating member A728 rotates only in one direction, or when the influence on light does not change even if the rotating directions are different (for example, when the second rotating member A728
28, or when only the rotating direction of the first rotating member A721 changes, the second rotating member A72
8 can double the change in the visibility of the light reaching the central rotating member A724 compared to the case of maintaining rotation, etc.), so that the variation in the appearance of the central rotating member A724 is increased. be able to.

Details of how the central rotating member A724 looks will be described. As described above, the central rotary member A724 maintains the posture in which the member front surface A724F faces the front side, and the member front surface A724
Repeat the operation of flipping F upside down.

Therefore, when the central rotating member A724 cannot be followed as a still image and is driven to rotate at a speed that exceeds the degree of causing an afterimage (for example, 20 [rps]), the central rotating member A724 When viewed from the front, A724 is visually recognized as if the upside-down inverted shape of the member front A724F is united. That is, in this embodiment, the central rotating member A724 formed in a star shape with five corners is visually recognized as a star shape with ten corners.

In this embodiment, the member front face A724F of the central rotating member A724 is formed in a vertically asymmetrical shape, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the member front face A724F of the central rotary member A724 may be formed in a vertically symmetrical shape. In this case, since there is no difference between the shape that is visually recognized as an afterimage during rotation (the shape in which the upside down shapes are united) and the shape of the member front surface A724F, it seems as if the central rotating member A724 is stopped. can be visually recognized.

In addition, for example, a characteristic shape or figure is formed on either side of the rotation axis of the central rotating member A724, and this shape or figure is inverted upside down and united to evoke a different concept. You can

For example, by drawing an equilateral triangular figure on the front face A724F of the central rotating member A724 in such a manner that one side overlaps the rotating shaft in a front view above the rotating shaft of the central rotating member A724, the central rotating member A724
When 24 is rotated, the equilateral triangles are united at the top and bottom, so that a diamond-shaped figure can be visually recognized. By drawing a hiragana letter (figure) on the front, when the central rotating member A724 is rotated, the reversed shape unites up and down to make the number "3" (figure) visible. be able to. As a result, it is possible to execute an unexpected effect.

In FIG. 382, an example of an effect using the second action unit A700 will be described.
FIG. 382 is a front view of the annular front cover A711 and the rotating body A720. Figure 382
Now, the state where the effect unit A710 is arranged in the extended position (see FIG. 321), that is, the third
A state in which an annular front cover A711 and a rotating body A720 are arranged on the front side of the pattern display device 81 is illustrated.

In FIG. 382, the second state of the first rotating member A721 and the second rotating member A728 (see FIG. 381
(a)) is illustrated, and the third pattern display device 81 An image displayed by is shown.

That is, the third symbol display device 81 displays the rotating second rotary member A728V on the display. As a result, even when the second rotating member A728 is stopped, the player can visually recognize as if the second rotating member A728 is rotating.

The means for displaying the second rotating member A728V on the display is not limited to the third pattern display device 81 arranged on the back side of the second rotating member A728. For example, transmissive liquid crystals may be provided on the front side of the second rotating member A728, and the state of rotation of the second rotating member A728 may be displayed by the transmissive liquid crystals. , an illumination plate may be arranged on the illumination plate, and the figure formed on the illumination plate and the image of the third pattern display device 81 may be combined so as to be visible as the second rotating member A728V on the display. The second rotating member A728V on the display may be displayed by a combination of a plurality of display means including means.

In this state, when light is emitted from the light emitting means A715a of the decorative board A715, the player expects the mode of light production in the rotating state of the second rotating member A728, but the second rotating member A728 is stopped. Since the light effect can be executed in the mode in (1), a highly unexpected effect can be executed.

Moreover, this is not limited to the state in which the effect unit A710 of the second operation unit A700 is stopped at the overhanging position, and the same applies while the effect unit A710 is vertically displaced. For example, the effect unit A710 is configured so that the third pattern display device 81 cannot be visually recognized through the left and right positions of the rotating body A720 at the retracted position (Fig. 3
20) On the other hand, at the extended position, the third pattern display device 8
1 can be seen (see Figure 321).

That is, in response to the upward motion of the effect unit A710 toward the extended position, the annular front cover A711 on the left and right sides of the first rotating member A721 and the second rotating member A728
The display area of the third pattern display device 81 that is visible through the area inside (inside the circular opening) gradually widens. By displaying the above-described second rotating member A728V on the display in the area of the third symbol display device 81 that is gradually visually recognized, the effect unit A710 is raised while the second rotating member A728 is stopped. When the control is performed to the player, the second rotating member A
728 has started to rotate without notice (an effect can be performed using an optical illusion).

When the effect unit A710 rises in this case, the outer shape of the rotating body A720 that is visually recognized by the player when the second rotating member A728 is actually rotating and when the second rotating member A728 is stopped can be maintained in the same way, when the light is emitted from the light emitting means A715a, the second rotating member A728 is actually rotating and the second rotating member A728 is stopped. It is possible to change the light emission mode (light reflection mode) of the rotating body A720 visually recognized by the player. As a result, it is possible to execute a highly unexpected presentation.

Next, with reference to FIG. 383, a twenty-third embodiment will be described. In the twenty-second embodiment, the second rotating member A728 passes through the optical axis KJ of the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a. It is configured as a sliding member A2729 that moves in parallel. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 383 is a schematic top view showing the first rotating member A2721 in the twenty-third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 383, the slide member A2729 is configured to be slidable between a rear side position intersecting the virtual plane VS and a front side position not intersecting the virtual plane VS.

Therefore, even if the slide member A2729 is arranged at a position intersecting the optical axis KJ at the back side position, the crossing with the optical axis KJ can be eliminated by moving to the front side position. 1 It is possible to change the way light reaches the rotary member A2721. Further, since the movement of the slide member A2729 is a sliding movement in the front-rear direction, it is possible to make it difficult for a player viewing the slide member A2729 from the front side to grasp that the slide member A2729 is moving.

That is, while maintaining (retaining) the shape (outer shape) of the first rotating member A2721 and the sliding member A2729 when viewed from the front, the presentation mode of the first rotating member A2721 when the LED or the like constituting the light emitting means A715a is turned on. (How it shines) can be changed. As a result, it is possible to construct an unexpected presentation without performing control to change the LEDs to be lit.

In addition, the material of the slide member A2729 is not limited at all. For example, it may be formed from a light-transmitting resin material, it may be formed from a light-impermeable resin material, or it may be formed from a metal material.

Next, a twenty-fourth embodiment will be described. In the 22nd embodiment, the pinned gear A46
2 is formed in an arc shape along the movement locus of the transmission projection A463, but in the twenty-fourth embodiment, the pinned gear A3462 is formed on the outer surface of the arc wall A464. A plurality of outer diameter projections A3 projecting radially outward from the
464. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 384 is a rear view of the front unit FU in the twenty-fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 384, the outer diameter protrusions A3464 are formed at four locations that divide the circumferential length of the circular arc wall portion A464 into approximately five equal parts when viewed from the rear.

In the twenty-fourth embodiment, long holes formed to displace the first displacement member A440 (first long hole A422a, second long hole A422b, displacement side long hole A453, and transmission side long hole A45
4) is formed longer than in the 22nd embodiment, so that the first displacement member A440 can be displaced beyond the displacement end on the overhang position side in the 22nd embodiment.

In the state shown in FIG. 384, the deformed slide member A455 comes into contact with the arcuate wall portion A464 and its movement is restricted, so that the first displacement member A440 stops at the overhang position. When the pin-equipped gear A3462 is rotated counterclockwise in rear view, the outer diameter projection A3464 moves toward the projecting plate portion A4.
384, the long link A451 rotates and the first displacement member A440 is displaced leftward from the extended position. can be configured as

As a result, at the timing when the second displacement member A490 is displaced (see FIG. 360),
It can be configured such that the first displacement member A440 is displaced.

In addition, in FIG. 384, the size of the outer diameter protrusion A3464 is shown randomly, but it is not limited to this. For example, all of them may project with the same size, or external projections A3464 with different sizes may be formed. In this case, they need not all be of different sizes.

In this embodiment, the two outer diameter projections A3464 closer to the transmission projection A463 are formed larger than the two projections farther from the transmission projection A463. Therefore, the first displacement member A4
40 reaches the extended position, the displacement caused by the contact between the outer protrusion A3464 and the deformed slide member A455 when the pin-equipped gear A3462 is continuously rotated is greater than that of the previous two times. is smaller than twice. That is, the first displacement member A after reaching the overhang position
The displacement of 440 (reciprocating minute displacement) can be produced so as to gradually settle down.

From this point of view, the outer diameter protrusion A3464 may be formed so as to become smaller as it goes away from the transmission protrusion A463 side along the circular arc wall portion A464, or may be formed vice versa. As a result, an effect can be executed in which the displacement width of the displacement (reciprocating minute displacement) of the first displacement member A440 changes gradually.

Further, a recessed portion that is recessed radially inward from the arcuate wall portion A464 may be formed at the location where the outer diameter protrusion A3464 is formed. In this case, contrary to the description in the twenty-fourth embodiment, each time the concave portion is arranged to face the protruding plate portion A456a, the deformed slide member A455 moves downward to the left from the state shown in FIG. It can be configured such that it is pulled back by force, the long link A451 rotates accordingly, and the first displacement member A440 is displaced to the right (retracted position side) of the extended position.

Also, the formation position of the outer diameter protrusion A3464 is set to the first operation units A400, A400A, A
400B, A400C, and A400D (see FIG. 319) may be made different (shifted). As a result, the first operation units A400, A400A, A400B, A400C
, A400D (when the first displacement member A440 and the second displacement member A490 start to operate at the same timing), the second The timing at which the 1-displacement member A440 is displaced can be varied. That is, in the control mode in which the driving motors AMT1 are excited all at once,
It is possible to shift the timing of the displacement (small displacement) that occurs in the first displacement member A440 in relation to the outer diameter protrusion A3464 by a deviation width predetermined by the arrangement of the outer diameter protrusion A3464.

For example, each first operating unit A400, A400A, A400B, A400C, A40
The timing at which each first displacement member A440 of 0D (see FIG. 319) reaches the extended position (see FIG. 320) and the timing at which each second displacement member A490 reaches the extended position (see FIG. 320) are the same. , after the first displacement member A440 reaches the overhanging position, the outer diameter protrusion A3
464, the generation timing of the displacement (small displacement) that occurs in the first displacement member A440 is
Adjustments can be made so that the motions are sequentially generated clockwise from the first motion unit A400 arranged on the lower left side when viewed from the front.

As a result, the line of sight of the player who pays attention to the displacement of the first displacement member A440 can be easily guided in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front. In addition, as described above, in conjunction with the displacement of the first displacement member A440, it is possible to change the aspect of the light visually recognized through the long hole A412a (see FIG. 320). The line of sight can be easily guided in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front. For example, it is possible to use the order of displacement of the first displacement member A440 to produce an effect suggesting hitting to the right executed by the third symbol display device 81 or the like during a jackpot game (special game).

Next, a twenty-fifth embodiment will be described. In the twenty-second embodiment, the first displacement member A44
0 is displaced on the back side of the electrical board A416, the twenty-fifth embodiment includes a decorative member A4550 that is displaced on the front side of the electrical board A416. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 385(a) shows the first operation unit A4400 in FIG. 339 (
a) is a cross-sectional view along the line corresponding to the CCCXLVIa-CCCXLVIa line, FIG.
85(b) is a cross-sectional view of the first operation unit A4400 along the line corresponding to the CCCXLVIb-CCCXLVIb line in FIG. 344(a).

As shown in FIGS. 385(a) and 385(b), the decorative member A4550 includes a plate-like decorative plate portion A4551 displaceably disposed on the front side of the front cover A410, and a main body portion A411.
A pair of guided parts A4552 guided by long holes A4411b drilled along a straight line parallel to the direction A416x on the side surface of the front cover A416x, and a pair of connecting arm parts A4553 formed outside the front cover A410 is integrally connected and fixed to the

Since the pair of guided portions A4552 are both inserted through the long holes A4411b,
The guided portion A4552 is allowed to displace only along the long hole A4411b. As a result, the posture change of the decorative plate portion A4551 can be suppressed. That is, the displacement of the decorative plate portion A4551 is limited to the sliding displacement in the direction parallel to the direction A416x, which is the extending direction of the long hole A4411b.

The first displacement member A4440 has a pair of projecting portions A4442g projecting from the left and right ends of the interlocking plate portion A4442 toward the front side, and has the same configuration as the first displacement member A440 except for this.

In this embodiment, the guided portion A4552 is formed to protrude inward of the front cover A410 to a position where it can abut on the projecting portion A4442g in the displacement direction. As a result, the first displacement member A
The decorative member A4550 interlocks with the first displacement member A4440 at the timing when the projecting portion A4442g and the guided portion A4552 abut during the displacement of the 4440.

The interlocking plate portion A4442 of the first displacement member A4440 is configured to be displaced with a change in posture during the displacement of the guided plate portion A441.
The arrangement of the projecting portion A4442g is set so that the projecting portion A4442g can enter between .
As a result, the decorative member A455 is interlocked with the displacement of the first displacement member A4440 in both forward and backward directions.
0 can be displaced in both forward and backward directions (both left and right directions in FIG. 385(a)).

According to this embodiment, since the decorative plate portion A4551 is arranged on the front side of the front cover A410, the timing of hiding the through hole A412 with the decorative plate portion A4551 can be configured.
This can physically block the light traveling through the through hole A412.

In addition, the first displacement member A4440 hidden behind the front cover A410 at the extended position
, the decorative plate portion A4551 is always arranged so as to be visible to the player without being hidden by the front cover A410. Therefore, the decorative plate portion A4551 and the opening A442c of the first displacement member A4440 are configured in different shapes for each first operation unit A4400, and are configured to have a series of meanings in the retracted position. In the overhanging position, which is hidden, it is not possible for the player to visually recognize the position, and at the same time, it is difficult to give a sense of unity in the lighting mode.

That is, by arranging the shape of the decorative plate portion A4551 of each first operation unit A4440 and the drawn figure in the same manner, the first displacement member A4440 is arranged at the projecting position and the front cover A41
0 (see FIG. 385(b)), the sense of unity of each first operation unit A4440 can be created by the decorative plate portion A4551.

Further, the light emitting means is preliminarily placed at a similar position on the first displacement member A4440 of the plurality of first operation units A4400 and visible through the through hole A412 in a state where the first displacement member A4440 is arranged at the protruding position. A445b is provided, and in a state where the first displacement member A4440 is hidden as described above, the light emitting means A445b are simultaneously lighted by the plurality of first operation units A4400, thereby providing a sense of unity. can be realized.

In this embodiment, the long hole A4411b is formed using a gap area (area on the retracted position side of the first displacement member A4440) secured by not forming the electrical board A416. That is, the space created by limiting the formation range of the electrical board A416 is replaced by the decorative member A4550.
It can be effectively used as a space for arranging a structure for realizing the displacement of

The range in which the decorative member A4550 can be displaced is limited to the formation range of the long hole A4411b.
That is, only the space created by limiting the formation range of the electrical board A416 can be a range in which not only the first displacement member A4440 but also the decoration member A4550 can be displaced. Therefore, it is possible to increase the number of displaced members in the range where the electrical board A416 is not formed (corresponding range in front view).

Before and after the displacement of the decorative member A4550, the first displacement member A4440 undergoes a change in posture (displacement in the front-rear direction). Therefore, it is possible to secure a large amount of displacement (amount of displacement in the front-rear direction) of the first displacement member A4440 in a range where the electrical board A416 is not formed (corresponding range in front view).

The mode of the decorative member A4550 is not limited at all. For example, it may be formed from a light-transmissive resin material, or may be formed from a resin material with low light-transmittance, and an LED or the like or an electric board may be arranged inside. Also, a through hole may be formed in the decorative member A4550 in the front-rear direction. This makes it possible to visually recognize the light emitted from the electrical board A416 through the through hole.

Next, referring to FIG. 386, the twenty-sixth embodiment will be described. In the twenty-second embodiment, the circular arc wall portion A464 is rotationally displaced along the displacement trajectory of the transmission protrusion A463, so that even after the transmission protrusion A463 is separated from the deformed slide member A455, the deformation of the deformed slide member A455 continues.
5 has been described, but in the twenty-sixth embodiment, a case where the displacement mode is not limited to rotation will be described. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

Figures 386(a) and 386(b) are front views of the displacement device A5000 in the twenty-sixth embodiment. FIG. 386(a) shows a state in which the displacement member A5001 of the displacement device A5000 is being displaced, and FIG. 386(b) shows a state where the displacement member A5001 is arranged at the end of the displacement.

The displacement device A5000 is configured to be slidable along a straight line and has a biasing member (not shown) (
A displacement member A5001 biased leftward by a coil spring or the like, and its displacement member A5
A transmission member A5002 to which a driving force for displacing 001 along the displacement direction is transmitted, a supported member A5003 rotatably supported at the end of the transmission member A5002, and a supported member A5003 A thin-walled portion A that extends to one side in the rotational direction and is connected to each other from both ends of the
5004, a roller member A5005 disposed at the opposite end of the supported member A5003 to the supported end, and guide grooves A5006 and A5 in which the roller member A5005 is guided
007.

The guide grooves A5006 and A5007 are first grooves extending along the displacement direction of the displacement member A5001.
It is composed of an area A5006 and a second area A5007 deviating from the displacement direction of the displacement member A5001 with the end of the first area A5006 as a starting point. In this embodiment, the second region A
5007 is formed in an arc shape, but it is not limited to an arc shape as long as it deviates from the displacement direction of the displacement member A5001.

The action of the displacement device 5000 will be described. While the roller member A5005 is guided in the first area A5006 of the guide groove, the displacement member A5001 is pushed to the end of the transmission member A5002 (see FIG. 386(a)).

On the other hand, at the stage where the roller member A5005 is guided in the second area A5007 of the guide groove (see FIG. 386(b)), the portion that contacts the displacement member A5001 is switched to the thin portion A5004, and in this state, the displacement member A5001 leftward displacement can be regulated.

In addition, the outer shape of the thin portion A5004 is adjusted to the second region A50 of the guide groove by the roller member A5005.
07, the position of the displacement member A5001 remains unchanged in at least one section (
The contact position of the displacement member A5001 remains unchanged in the displacement direction of the displacement member A5001, so that the displacement of the displacement member A5001 during the displacement of the transmitted member A5003 can be restricted in the above-described one section. .

In addition, when the thin portion A5004 is configured to be deformable so as to collapse toward the supported member A5003, the repulsive force of the deformed thin portion A5004 and the urging force applied to the displacement member A5001 are balanced. Displacement member A5001 can be maintained. Thereby, even after the abutment between the supported member A5003 and the displacement member A5001 is released, the displacement of the displacement member A5001 can be suppressed.

Next, the twenty-seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 387 and 388. FIG. 22nd
In the embodiment, the case where the wiring HC is loosely wound around the fastening portion A475 and supported so as not to fall off from the fastening portion A475 has been described.
A case where the wiring HC is supported so as to be relatively displaceable by the wiring guide member A6560 supported so as to be displaceable to 0 will be described. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

Figures 387(a), 387(b) and 388 are rear views of the rear unit BU in the twenty-seventh embodiment. In FIG. 387(a), the state in which the second displacement member A490 is arranged at the retracted position, and in FIG.
87(b) illustrates a state in which the second displacement member A490 is arranged at a position intermediate between the retracted position and the overhang position (rotated about 45 degrees). In addition, in FIGS. 387(a), 387(b) and 388, illustration of the rear plate portion A480 is omitted in order to facilitate understanding of the structure of the rear unit BU.

As shown in FIGS. 387(a), 387(b) and 388, in this embodiment, the fastening portion A475 (see FIG. 356) is not formed, and instead the wire guide member A6560 is connected to the support box portion A6470. It is supported between the rear plate portion A480 (see FIG. 359).

The wiring guide member A6560 is rotatably supported at its upper end by at least one of the support box portion A6470 and the rear plate portion A480. In this embodiment, the rear plate portion A480 is inserted in a state in which the columnar support protrusion A6471d protruding toward the back side of the support box portion A6470 is inserted into the through hole formed in the upper end portion of the wiring guide member A6560. By fixing, the wiring guide member A656
0 is rotatably supported by the support protrusion A6471d.

The wiring guide member A6560 is formed in a long plate shape, and is arranged to face the back surface of the support box portion A6470 with a space therebetween, and the front from the lower end portion of the main body plate portion A6561 and the middle portion of the body plate portion A6561. A plurality of projecting portions A6562 projecting to the side (supporting box portion A6470 side) are provided.

The body plate portion A6561 is arranged close to the rear plate portion A480. As a result, the main body plate portion A6
Since the space on the front side of 561 can be increased, a large arrangement space for the wiring HC can be secured. Therefore, it is possible to avoid applying an extra load to the wiring HC.

In addition, since the main body plate portion A6561 is arranged between the wiring HC and the rear plate portion A480, it is possible to prevent the wiring HC and the rear plate portion A480 from rubbing against each other. In particular, in this embodiment, the wiring HC is guided toward the rear side (the rear plate portion A480 side) by the ridge portion A491d2 and the binding band KB, and the position therebetween (position sandwiched in the left-right direction). Since the main body plate portion A6561 is arranged in the rear plate portion A480, the main body plate portion A6561 can be arranged between the wiring HC and the rear plate portion A480 at a position where the wiring HC is closer to the rear plate portion A480.
Rubbing between the wiring HC and the rear plate portion A480 can be effectively suppressed.

Further, by setting the position where the wiring HC is pressed against the rear plate portion A480 side to overlap with the main body plate portion A6561, the main body plate portion A6561 is displaced in the direction along the displacement in synchronization with the displacement of the wiring HC. It can make it easier for the situation to occur. In this case, the absolute value of the relative displacement between the wiring HC and the main body plate portion A6561 can be reduced, so the occurrence of rubbing can be suppressed. Therefore, the wear of the wiring HC can be prevented, and the durability of the wiring HC can be improved.

A displacement mode of the wiring guide member A6560 will be described. In the state shown in FIG. 387(a), the wiring guide member A6560 is arranged at the limit position on the retracted position side. In the state shown in FIG. 387(b), although the second displacement member A490 starts to displace, the displacement of the board-side connector A493c in the horizontal direction is small and the displacement in the vertical direction is large. It occurs vertically. Therefore, the wiring guide member A6560 maintains the posture shown in FIG. 387(a).

In the state shown in FIG. 387(b), the upward displacement of the wiring HC
6562. That is, the projecting portion A6562 can function as a portion that regulates the vertical displacement limit of the wiring HC.

In the state shown in FIG. 388, the board-side connector A 493c is mainly displaced in the left-right direction, so the wiring HC is also displaced in the left-right direction.
The posture of 6560 changes. In this case, the wiring HC is placed on the wiring guide member A with a margin.
6560, the lower limit of its displacement can be defined by the projecting portion A6562 on the lower side. Therefore, the wiring HC is overstretched, and the pinion A517 and the reinforcing arm A5
It is possible to prevent it from entering (drooping down) to the 18 side.

In this way, the portion where the wiring HC is wound (projecting portion A656 on the tip side of the main body plate portion A6561)
By configuring the arrangement of 2) to be variable, the design length of the wiring HC can be reduced compared to the case where the arrangement of the portion where the wiring HC is wound is fixed (fastening portion A475, see FIG. 356(a)). can be shortened.

As a policy of changing the arrangement of the portion where the wiring HC is wound (protruding portion A6562 on the tip side of the main body plate portion A6561), to explain from another viewpoint, the displacement from FIG. 387(a) to FIG. 387(b) is The board-side connector A493c is displaced so as to approach the projecting portion A6552 (wiring H
387(b) to FIG. Set department A
6552, the board-side connector A493c is displaced (the wiring HC
6552), the portion of the wire HC wound around the protruding portion A6552 is displaced to the tightening side. In this embodiment, the wiring guide member A6560 is shown in FIG.
) and FIG.

For this reason, the wire guide member A6560 suppresses the displacement of the wire HC to the tightened side when the portion of the wire HC wound around the projecting portion A6552 is displaced to the tightened side (
It can be said that the wiring HC is displaced to the widening side. As a result, it is possible to prevent the radius of curvature of the portion of the wiring HC wound around the protruding portion A6552 from becoming excessively small, thereby preventing excessive deformation (bending, chipping, etc.) of the wiring HC. .

According to this embodiment, the wiring guide member A6560 that is disconnected from the second displacement member A490
is displaced as the wiring HC is displaced. Therefore, for example, it is a member that interlocks with the wiring guide member A6560, and is arranged so that the player can visually recognize it in any of the states of FIG. 387(a), FIG. By arranging the decorative member on the side of the symbol display device 81 (the right side of FIG. 387(a)), the decorative member displaced by the displacement of the wiring HC can be used to perform an effect.

In this case, as described above, the second displacement member A490 and the wire guide member A6560 are not completely interlocked, and the wire guide member A6560 stops while the second displacement member A490 rotates 45 degrees from the retracted position. , the wiring guide member A6560 is configured to be displaced when the second displacement member A490 rotates further (because the displacement timing is shifted), it is as if the decorative member is the second displacement member A490. It can be visually recognized as if they are displaced independently.

For convenience of explanation, the wire HC is shown to be wound once (the wire passes through the pair of projecting portions A6562 twice), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a plurality of protrusions A
The wiring HC may pass through (not be wound) between the 6562 only once.

Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiments, the present invention is by no means limited to the above embodiments, and it will be easily understood that various modifications and improvements are possible without departing from the scope of the present invention. It can be inferred.

In each of the above embodiments, part or all of the configuration in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced with part or all of the configuration in another embodiment to form another embodiment.

In the first embodiment, the case where the tilting device 310 is pushed downward has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the state in which the tilting device 310 hangs downward may be the initial position, and the tilting device 310 may be pushed up. In this case, the force of returning the tilting device 310 to the initial position can be provided by gravity, so that the torsion spring 3
15 can be dispensed with.

In the first embodiment, the case where the voice coil motor 352 is driven after the tilting device 310 has moved to the end of the push has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the voice coil motor 352 may be driven in advance when the tilting device 310 is in the first state. In this case, the load required to push the tilting device 310 from the first state can be increased, and the change in the load can be used for effects (for example, a "button that cannot be pushed" effect can be performed. can).

In this case, even if the voice coil motor 352 has moved to the end of the operation (the end of the extension operation), the voice coil motor 352 cannot move because of the dimensional relationship that causes a slight gap between the voice coil motor 352 and the lower frame member 320 . and the lower frame member 320 are preferably arranged. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of an impact sound due to the collision with the lower frame member 320 when the voice coil motor 352 operates. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from noticing that the voice coil motor 352 is protruding in advance, and it is possible to make the player aware that the tilting device 310 is in the state of "the button that cannot be pushed" only after the tilting device 310 is pushed. can.

In the first embodiment, the case where the engaging rib 344c of the disk cam 344 and the connecting pin 344d are fixed relative to each other has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the engagement rib 344c may be configured as a separate member and configured to rotate relative to the disc cam 344 . In this case, for example, it is possible to change the position of the connecting pin 344d in a state where the first projecting portion 344c1 and the engaging portion 346d are in contact with each other. It is possible to change the degree to which the tilting device 310 rises immediately after changing the posture of the rotating claw member 347 . Therefore, it is possible to form more operation states of the tilting operation of the tilting device 310 than in the first embodiment.

In addition, the operating state of the tilting device 310 can be sequentially switched (the rising end can be sequentially switched) by the driving mode in which the disc cam 344 is continuously rotated in the forward direction. As a result, by operating the drive motor 342 in one direction, it is possible to suppress deterioration of the drive motor 342 and perform a complex operation mode in which the tilting device 310 is sequentially switched to a raised position.

In the third embodiment, the voice coil motor 352 that applies the driving force to the tilting device 310
Although the case where the operation timing of is controlled by the operation speed and the operation direction of the tilting device 310 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the driving mode of the drive motor 5411 that drives the weight member 5412 to rotate may be controlled by the operating speed and the operating direction of the tilting device 310 . For example, until the tilting device 310 reaches the end of pushing (
During the downward movement), the driving motor 5411 is fixed in such a posture that the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 is arranged above the rotation axis, and immediately before the tilting device 310 reaches the pushing end and immediately before it starts to move upward. , the driving motor 5411 may start rotating. In this case, the repulsive force pushing back the tilting device 310 can be reduced while the tilting device 310 is repeatedly pushed, and the repulsive force pushing back the tilting device 310 can be increased when the tilting device 310 starts to move upward. .

In the fifth embodiment, the case where the housing member 5430 is fixed to the bottom plate portion 5321 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, if the tilting device 310 has a housing member 543
0 may be fixed and the vibrating device 5400 may be operated therein. tilting device 31
0, the projecting leg portion 5424 is fixed to the bottom plate portion 5321, for example.
, and the projecting leg portion 5424 is pressed against the bottom plate portion 5321 when the tilting device 310 is moved downward to the end of the push, so that the shape of the flexible member 5420 in the vibration device 5400 is changed to switch whether or not the weight member 5412 can come into contact with the housing member 5430 .

In this case, the flexible member 5420 arranged inside the housing member 5430 moves in conjunction with the tilting operation of the tilting device 310, and at this time, the shape of the flexible member 5420 changes. The degree of change in the shape of the flexible member 5420 changes in conjunction with the tilting speed when the tilting device 310 is operated. By increasing the amount of deformation of the weight member 5412, a state in which the weight member 5412 abuts against the housing member 5430 can be formed. That is, the player can feel the vibration not only when the tilting device 310 is pushed to the push end, but also when the tilting device 310 is operated at high speed. It is possible to increase the variation of the production of.

For example, when the player operates the tilting device 310, the third symbol display device 81 displays "Press the button." A great chance.", it is possible to provide an effect for the player to specify how to press the button (tilting device 310). In this case, by setting whether or not the player presses the button (tilting device 310) in a designated way as a condition for transmitting the vibration to the player,
It is possible to increase the motivation of the player to operate the button (tilting device 310) in a designated manner of pressing, and prevent the button (tilting device 310) from becoming monotonous.

As for the degree of change in the shape of the flexible member 5420, the degree of pushing speed of the tilting device 310 may be reversed. That is, when the tilting speed of the tilting device 310 is slow, the amount of deformation of the flexible member 5420 becomes large, and the weight member 5412 and the housing member 5430 may be formed in a manner in which they can come into contact with each other. In this case, the slow pushing speed of the tilting device 310 can be a condition for the vibration generated by the vibrating device 5400 to be transmitted to the player, and the player is recommended to slow down the pushing speed of the tilting device 310. can do.
As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from pushing the tilting device 310 by force, and prevent a failure caused by pushing the tilting device 310 by force.

In the above-described fifth embodiment, a case has been described in which the player can feel the vibration generated by the vibrating device 5400 by pushing the tilting device 310, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, while the weight member 5412 of the vibrating device 5400 is arranged so as to be able to abut against the housing member 5430 when the tilting device 310 is not pushed in,
On the condition that the tilting device 310 is pushed to the end of movement, the weight member 5412 may be formed in such a manner that it cannot come into contact with the housing member 5430 . In this case, the tilting device 31
Vibration can be transmitted to the player in the state where 0 is not operated, and the performance can be lively.
By stopping the vibration when pressing the button, the player can see the change in the presentation mode (
To produce a feeling of premium that only the player who is playing the machine can perceive the change in the performance mode, excluding the surrounding players, because the difference in expectations can be recognized. can be done.

As a variation of the effect, when the player pushes the tilting device 310, the weight member 5412 and the housing member 5430 are arranged so that they cannot contact each other.
It is desired that both the 412 and the housing member 5430 are arranged so that they can continuously contact each other. For example, two different cases can occur due to the difference in the direction of rotation of the weight member 5412 .

In the above-described fifth embodiment, the disc cam 5344 is axially tilted and deformed so that the disc cam 5344
Although the case where frictional force is generated by contact between 44 and release member 346 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the plate portion of the main body member 341 in which the shaft support hole 341b is formed partially protrudes toward the disk cam 5344, and is configured to abut when the disk cam 5344 is axially tilted and deformed. can be In this case, since the main body member 341 is not a moving part, a greater frictional force is ensured between the disc cam 5344 and the disc cam 5344 than when the disc cam 5344 and the operable releasing member 346 are in contact with each other. be able to. Therefore, the load applied to the arm member 345 connecting the disk cam 5344 and the tilting device 310 can be sufficiently reduced.

In the above-described eighth embodiment, a case has been described in which both of the board support devices 600 arranged above and below the inner frame 12 are configured to be able to abut against the front frame 14, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, only one of the upper and lower board support devices 600 may be configured to contact the front frame 14 . For example, at the upper position, the portion of the multifunctional cover member 171 that interferes with the board support device 600 may be chamfered so that it does not come into contact with the board support device 600 arranged at the upper position.

In the eighth embodiment, when the game board 13 is attached to the board support device 600, the game board 13
Although the case in which the vertical position of is not changed has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the support bottom portion 12c that supports the lower end surface of the game board 13 is configured as an inclined surface that slopes down toward the front side, and the front side end portion of the support bottom portion 12c is the board surface support device 60 in the released state.
0 may be arranged below the upper surface of the rear side extension plate 621c. In this case, when the game board 13 is placed on the board support device 600 in the released state, the game board 13 is supported by the rear side extension plate 621c, and the game board 13 is supported in the process of fixing the board support device 600 therefrom. 13 can ride on the support bottom 12c. Therefore, the height at which the game board 13 is placed on the board support device 600 in the released state can be made lower than the height at which the game board 13 is fixed. Efficiency can be improved.

In the eighth embodiment described above, the case where the foul ball passage portion 145 is configured as a passage that bends to the left and right has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be bent back and forth, or a combination of bending back and forth and left and right. In this case, the ball guide opening 5
Directly behind 3, it is preferable to form a long path in the front and rear direction because the ball can be ejected smoothly. In addition, by making the path curved back and forth, the range of the foul ball passage portion 145 along the surface of the game board 13 can be narrowed, thereby preventing interference between the launch path and the foul ball passage portion 145. can be made easier.

In the eighth embodiment, the case where the light guide member 540 is curved so that the position facing the opening 524 is concave has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. for example,
A convex surface may be formed at a position facing the opening 524 . In this case, the light reaching the player through the opening 524 is faintly visible. Moreover, the light guide member 540 does not need to be curved vertically, and for example, a curved portion and a straightly extending portion may be mixed in the vertical position.

In the above-described eighth embodiment, the passage forming ribs 467 and 487 form a vertically curved path, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the bending direction of the path may be left or right, or may be a combination of up, down, left and right.

In the eighth embodiment, a case has been described in which the auxiliary convex portion 481Ha of the rear assembly 480 contacts the inner surface 461Hi of the front assembly 460 in the thickness direction, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the auxiliary convex portion 481Ha and the inner side surface 461Hi form the back side wall portion 461H.
It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which they are spaced apart by the diameter of the speaker connection line 453 in the thickness direction. in this case,
Since the speaker connection wire 453 can be clamped between the auxiliary convex portion 481Ha and the inner side surface 461Hi, the clamping resistance exerts a load on the speaker connection wire 453 in the direction of pulling it out of the speaker assembly 450. Even if it is hung, the speaker connection line 4
53 can be prevented from coming off the speaker 451 .

Further, the auxiliary projection 481Ha abuts on the inner side surface 461Hi in the thickness direction of the rear side wall portion 461H within a projection length range corresponding to the recess depth of the wiring passage recess 464, but the projection beyond that contacts the inner side surface 461Hi. In the range of length, a step may be formed in the middle such that the inner side surface 461Hi and the rear side wall portion 461H are separated from each other by the diameter of the speaker connection line 453 in the thickness direction. In this case, the range where the rear side wall portion 461H and the front side wall portion 481H form a double wall is sufficiently secured, and the speaker connection line 453 can be sandwiched while suppressing sound leakage.

In the eighth embodiment, the speaker assembly 450 constitutes a double bass reflex speaker in which the base end side body portion 461B and the tip end side body portion 461T correspond to the speaker chambers, and the intermediate body portion 461M corresponds to the duct. has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by extending the width of the intermediate body portion 461M in the front-rear direction to the same extent as that of the proximal side body portion 461B and the distal side body portion 461T, the proximal side body portion 461B and the intermediate body portion 461
A large speaker room may be configured jointly by M and the tip side body portion 461T.

Also, although the base end side main body portion 461B has a larger volume than the distal end side main body portion 461T, the size relationship may be reversed, and the capacities may be the same. speaker 45
The arrangement of 1 is not limited to the left and right ends, but may be at the center in the left and right direction, or may be between the left and right ends and the center in the left and right direction.

In the eighth embodiment, the rib portions 467a to 467a to 467a constituting the passage forming ribs 467 and 487
67e, 487a to 487e, the adjacent ribs are in the left-right direction (the direction connecting the proximal side main body portion 461B and the distal side main body portion 461T, the opening of the opening formed by the front side recessed portion 471 and the rear side recessed portion 491) A direction intersecting the direction) has been described, but the case is not necessarily limited to this. For example, adjacent rib portions (for example, rib portion 467d and rib portion 467c) may be configured to overlap each other when viewed in the horizontal direction. In this case, the path inside the speaker assembly 450 can be bent like a maze.
1 and the rear side recessed portion 491 to insert a fine metal wire such as a piano wire into the opening formed by the rear recessed portion 491, and to make it difficult to commit a fraudulent act of intruding the tip of the wire into the game area, and to prolong the time required for the fraudulent act. Unauthorized acts can be suppressed. In addition, here, suppression of fraud means suppression of fraud itself and gaining fraudulent profit from fraud (successful fraud).
is exemplified.

In the eighth embodiment described above, the fourth gear 880G of the loose fitting device 880 interlocks with the third gear 810G of the slit member 810 via the intermediate gear 808, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the intermediate gear 808 is connected to the second gear 830 of the rotating plate 830
G and the fourth gear 880G of the loose fitting device 880 may be meshed. in this case,
Since the rotating plate 830 and the loose fitting device 880 can be interlocked, the loose fitting device 880 can be rotated not only during the rotating operation of the petal motion device 800 but also during the spreading operation and the gathering operation. can. As a result, the petals 802 can be slid in the radial direction and the decorative member 884 can be rotated at the same time, thereby improving the presentation effect.

Although the loose fitting device 880 is configured as a device that rotates coaxially with the rotary plate 830, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be configured to expand and contract as the rotating plate 830 rotates, or may rotate on an axis different from the rotation axis of the rotating plate 830 .

In the eighth embodiment, a case has been described in which the second effect member 940 operates by transmitting a driving force through the slide plate 930 that slides according to the operation of the drive arm member 910, but this is not necessarily the case. It is not something that can be done. For example, by connecting the upper part of the support base 801 of the petal motion device 800 and the tip of the second effect member 940, the second effect member 940 is operated based on the displacement of the petal motion device 800. can be In this case, the slide plate 930 can be omitted.

In the above eighth embodiment, when the board surface support device 600 arranged on the lower side of the inner frame 12 is in a fixed state, the case where the operation portion back surface member 155 and the game board 13 are separated above the opening/closing regulation portion 159 will be described. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the board surface supporting device 600 arranged on the lower side of the inner frame 12 is in a fixed state, the operation part back member 155 and the game board 13 are configured to contact each other in the front-rear direction above the opening/closing regulation part 159. Also good. In this case, even if the lower board surface support device 600 is in a fixed state, if the upper board surface support device 600 is not in a fixed state, the upper end of the game board 13 is displaced to the front side (game As the right side of the board 13 tilts toward the front side, the game board 13 is arranged to face the operation unit back member 155.
Since the portion is also displaced to the front side, the operation portion back member 155 and the game board 13 can interfere with each other. This prevents the front frame 14 from being closed with respect to the inner frame 12 .

In this case, when the game board 13 is installed on the inner frame 12 and the board surface support device 600 arranged on the lower side of the inner frame 12 is fixed, the board surface support device arranged on the upper side of the inner frame 12 6
00 is in a fixed state or not is determined by the relationship between the game board 13 and the operating part back member 155 arranged facing the board surface support device 600 on the lower side, and the board surface arranged on the upper side of the inner frame 12. When the support device 600 is not in a fixed state, the closing of the front frame 14 with respect to the inner frame 12 can be restricted. As a result, the function of determining the state of the board support device 600 installed on the upper side of the inner frame 12 can be removed from the multifunctional cover member 171, so that the degree of freedom in designing the multifunctional cover member 171 can be improved. can. For example, the multifunctional cover member 171 is recessed to a position where it does not come into contact with the board support device 600 regardless of the state of the board support device 600 (
be chamfered). In this case, the multifunctional cover member 171 made of synthetic resin collides with the board support device 600 made of metal, and the multifunctional cover member 171
is less likely to be damaged, the multifunctional cover member 171 can be used for a long period of time for other purposes (for example, as a wiring cover).

In the eighth embodiment, the case where the right panel unit 500 from which the light irradiated to the end surface of the light guide member 540 is emitted from both surfaces of the light guide member 540 is arranged at the right end and front side of the front frame 14 will be described. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be arranged inside the center frame 86 . In this case, for example, a state in which one surface of the right panel unit 500 is arranged on the front side and a case in which the other surface is arranged on the front side can be switched (for example, parallel to the longitudinal direction of the support plate portion 510). By configuring the right panel unit 500 to rotate about an axis, it is possible to switch the mode of the light irradiated to the center frame 86 . Also, the aspect of the light irradiated to the center frame 86 and the center frame 86
It is possible to diversify the production by switching the correspondence with the moving accessory that protrudes inward.

That is, for example, among the plurality of openings 524, only the LEDs 512a at the upper and lower positions corresponding to the uppermost opening 524 are made to emit light, and the right panel unit 500 is arranged such that one surface faces the front side and the other surface Consider switching between the case of being arranged on the front side and the case of being arranged on the front side. inner cover member 52
When the surface on the 0 side faces the moving accessory side, the moving accessory arranged opposite to the location corresponding to the uppermost opening 524 (the location near the end) emits light, while the outer cover member 560 side of the moving accessory emits light. When the surface faces the moving role, the moving role that is arranged to face the wide area of the opening 565 (wider range than the top opening 524) emits light. Therefore, by switching the posture of the right panel unit 500 without switching the LED 512a to emit light, it is possible to switch the light emitting position of the moving accessory.

In this case, for example, by moving the moving accessory in time with the timing of the change in the light-emitting part, it is possible to improve the presentation effect. For example, at the timing when the surface on the side of the inner cover member 520 faces the moving accessory, the surface on the side of the outer cover member 560 is reduced and changed so as to fit in the location corresponding to the uppermost opening 524, while the surface on the side of the outer cover member 560 faces the moving accessory. At the timing of turning the right panel unit 500, the moving accessory may be configured to expand and contract so as to expand (extend) in the longitudinal direction of the right panel unit 500. As a result, it is possible to change the position to emit light in accordance with the action of the moving accessory by switching the attitude of the right panel unit 500 while eliminating the need to switch the LED 512a that controls light emission.

In addition, in the right panel unit 500, the light emitted from the inner cover member 520 side is condensed (brightness increases, the amount of light increases, and the light emitted from the outer cover member 560 side becomes clear). Diffused (lower brightness, lower light intensity, faint emission). Therefore, by switching the posture of the right panel unit 500, the light emitting target (liquid crystal or moving accessory)
can change the light emission mode.

Furthermore, the right panel unit 500 is changed so that the front side end 551a of the outer lens member 550 faces the moving object or the liquid crystal (for example, when the right panel unit 500 is arranged on the front side of the moving object or the liquid crystal). , the front side end portion 551a of the outer lens member 550 is changed to a posture that is arranged on the back side of the support plate portion 510).
While irradiating light with a narrow width), it is possible to emit light over a wide range in a direction perpendicular to the direction toward the moving object or liquid crystal. As a result, it is possible to light up a wide range of positions away from the moving role and the liquid crystal while only the details of the moving role and the liquid crystal are illuminated.

In the ninth and tenth embodiments, foul ball passage portions 9145 and 10145
Although the case where the thread Y8 is cut by the sheet metal members 9150 and 10150 arranged in the above has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the sheet metal member is partially broken by the load from the thread Y8, and the broken portion is so fragile that it falls, and the detection sensor is arranged at a position through which the broken portion falls. Also good. In this case, due to the detection of the sheet metal member by the detection sensor, an alarm is issued and the launch of the ball is forcibly stopped. It is possible to minimize the profit (loss suffered by the gaming machine hall) obtained by a person who commits fraudulent acts.

In the twelfth embodiment, the case where the inclined surface 2803T is formed as an inclined surface has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, various configurations that improve frictional force may be added. For example, the frictional force may be improved by attaching a rubber sheet to the inclined surface 2803T, or by arranging a spike-shaped hard member (a member harder than the material of the slit member 810). The movement resistance may be improved by biting into the slit member 810 .

Further, for example, when the slide member 2820 is inclined with respect to the longitudinal direction of the central slit 814, the wall portions of the both side slits 815 arranged to face the inclined surface 2803T are provided with
A concave portion may be formed to the extent that the inclined surface 2803T can enter. In this case, it is possible to improve the motion resistance by inserting the inclined surface 2803T into the recessed portion.

In the sixteenth embodiment described above, by changing the shape of the recessed portion 2543 formed in each region of the light guide member 2540, the direction in which light travels can be changed to the direction in which the light is collected or the direction in which the light is spread. Although explained, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, upward concave portions 2543b and 2543e may be formed in all of the regions CCVIb to CCVIe. In this case, the direction of travel of the light emitted from both surfaces of the light guide member 2540 is the direction of each region CCVIb.
Since the direction is upwardly slanted in all of CCVIe, it is possible to make it easier for the light to travel toward the line of sight of a person walking to select a machine to play. As a result, the effect of attracting customers of the pachinko machine 8010 can be improved.

Further, for example, regions CCVIc and CCV that are regions for emitting light to the inner lens member 530
A downward concave portion 2543c may be formed in Ie, and an upward concave portion 2543b may be formed in regions CCVIb and CCVId, which are regions for emitting light to the outer lens member 550. FIG. In this case, the light that travels in the opposite direction to the player playing pachinko 8010, and the light that is emitted to the outer lens member 550 is inclined upward. While it is possible to make it easier for the light to travel toward the height of the line of sight of the person walking on the floor, the light that travels toward the player side and is emitted to the inner lens member 530 is in a downwardly inclined direction. Therefore, for example, it is possible to illuminate the ball stored in the upper plate 17 with light to make the ball look gorgeous. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the players playing the game while improving the effect of attracting customers of the pachinko machine 8010 .

In the seventeenth embodiment, the case where the protruding shaped portion 6413 and the recessed shaped portion 6414 are formed near the left-right center has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the position may be changed according to the arrangement of the operation device 10300. FIG.

Moreover, both the one formed corresponding to the arrangement of the operation device 10300 and the one formed near the left-right center may be provided. That is, the projecting shape portion 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414 for coping with the operation load of the operation device 10300 and the problem of the front frame 10014 alone (
A protruding shape portion 6413 and a recessed shape portion 6414 may be separately provided in order to cope with ease of holding, durability, etc.).

In the seventeenth embodiment, a case has been described in which the operation device 10300 configured to be operable by the player is disposed above the projecting shape portion 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414 so as to be assembled (replaceable). It is not limited to this. That is, anything can be used as long as it can be assembled (exchanged). For example, it may be a sound device such as a speaker box that outputs sound, a vibrating device that is configured to be unoperable by the player and performs vibration effects, an illumination board that performs light emission effects, or a board box. It may be something that is not directly intended to be visually recognized by the player.

In the seventeenth embodiment, the case where the protruding shape portion 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414 are formed in a groove shape extending in the front-rear direction has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, triangular or circular recesses and protrusions may be formed when viewed from above. In this case, a plurality of concave portions and convex portions may be formed, and the size of each concave portion and convex portion is designed based on the amount of the operation load applied to the operation device 10300 and the frequency with which the load is applied. can be

Moreover, even if it has the same groove shape, a plurality of grooves may be formed. In this case, by forming a large number of grooves while narrowing the width of the grooves, the effect of reducing the contact area with the operation device 10300 is the same as in the case where one wide groove is formed. can be done. When forming a plurality of grooves, each groove does not necessarily have to extend in the front-rear direction.
It may be formed radially when viewed from above.

In the seventeenth embodiment, the projecting portion 6413 projects below the outer shape of the front frame 10014 so that it can be used as a finger hook when carrying the front frame 10014. However, this is not necessarily the case. It is not something that can be done. For example, the gap between the lower surface of the plate-like support portion 6426 and the recessed shape portion 6414 may be formed vertically longer than the finger of the operator who carries the front frame 10014 . In this case, the lower surface of the plate-like support portion 6426 and the concave shape portion 64 .
14 (can be used as a finger hook), the front frame 10014 can be easily carried.

In the seventeenth embodiment described above, the case where the resin member 6427 is arranged below the operation device 10300 to soften the transmission of the load of the operation device 10300 has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be a member (coil spring, torsion spring, etc.) that produces an elastic biasing force, or a device for damping vibration, such as a damper.

In the seventeenth embodiment, the case where the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are fastened and fixed to the upper tray 17 and the lower tray unit 6400 has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 may be connected to the upper tray 17 and the lower tray unit 6400 via a floating mechanism. In this case, even if the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 lack softness and flexibility, it is possible to suppress transmission of the load generated in the operation device 10300 to the upper tray 17 and the lower tray unit 6400 .

In the seventeenth embodiment, the case where the lever member 10340 is rotationally driven around the lever support shaft 10331d1 by the drive motor has been described, but various modes of the drive motor are exemplified. For example, the load may be transmitted from the rotary gear rotated by the drive motor to the lever member 10340 by load transmission of a simple gear mechanism, or a mechanism that does not rely on the gear mechanism (for example, a rotating cam) may be interposed in the transmission path. The load may be transmitted to the lever member 10340, or the load may be transmitted to the lever member 10340 via the movable clutch 343c and the transmission gear 343b.
By transmitting the load to 0340, it may be configured to be idling when an overload occurs.

In the seventeenth embodiment, the case where the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are fastened and fixed in a direction perpendicular to the plane on which the load is applied during operation of the operation device 10300 has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, if there is an operation part that does not operate on the plane (for example, if there is an operation part that pushes in the left and right diagonal directions), the balance (average) of the operation direction of each operation part is The detected direction (for example, an intermediate angle direction) may be set as the fastening direction, or the fastening direction may be set for the operation portion where the operation instruction is frequently given (ignoring the operation portion where the operation instruction is rare). You can set the direction. As a result, it is possible to suppress the loosening of the fastening due to the load during operation.

In the seventeenth embodiment described above, the case where the front left cover 10321 and the front right cover 10322 are joined by fastening has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, it may be combined with an adhesive material, or may be combined by fitting by conforming shapes.

In the seventeenth embodiment, the case where the direction of high rigidity of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 (vertical direction) is aligned with the vibration direction of the vibration device 10366 has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. . For example, the vibrating direction of the vibrating device 10366 may be the horizontal direction. In this case, the shape of the front left cover 10321 and the front right cover 10322 can be easily changed due to the vibration of the vibrating device 10366. Therefore, it is possible to dynamically change the design around the operation device 10300 when the vibration is generated. can. Moreover, the mode of the vibrating device 10366 is not limited at all. For example, it may be a direct acting type represented by a voice coil motor or the like, a rotary type represented by a vibrator or the like, or a combination thereof.

Further, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 may be made of transparent resin material instead of opaque resin. In this case, by irradiating the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 with light emitted from a predetermined irradiation device, the left front cover 1
0321 and the shape of the right front cover 10322 are changed, the appearance of the light seen through the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be changed.

In the seventeenth embodiment, the case where the right and left muscle portions D24a are formed with different inclinations to easily suppress bending regardless of the arrangement of the swing operation member 10310 has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, by setting the inclination angles of the left and right muscle portions D24a to be the same regardless of the position, there is a difference in the degree of rigidity between the direction in which the rigidity is improved by the left and right muscle portions D24a and the direction in which the rigidity is weakened. can make a big difference.

In this case, for example, by setting the formation direction of the left and right muscle portions D24a along the direction Y17a, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10321 and right front cover 10321 and right front cover 10321 and right front cover 10321 and right front cover 10321 and right front cover 10321 and right front cover 10321 and right front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10321 and the front right cover 10321 and 10321 and 10321 and 10321 and 10321 and 10321 and 10321 and 10321 and 10321 and the front right cover 100, and 10321 and 103210. While suppressing the deflection of the cover 10322, the deflection of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 due to the vibration generated by the vibration device 10366 when the swing operation member 10310 is arranged in the downward position is increased. be able to. That is, by changing the arrangement of the swing operation member 10310, the front left cover 10321 and the front right cover 10321 and the front right cover 10321 caused by the vibration of the vibrating device 10366
The degree of flexing of 0322 can be different.

Conversely, the formation direction of the left and right muscle portions D24a may be the direction along the direction Y17b.
In this case, when the swing operation member 10310 is arranged in the downward position, the vibration device 1036
While suppressing the deflection of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 due to the vibration generated by 6, the left front cover 10366 suppresses the deflection due to the vibration generated by the vibration device 10366 when the swing operation member 10310 is arranged in the upward position. Cover 10321 and right front cover 103
The deflection of 22 can be increased. That is, by changing the arrangement of the swing operation member 10310, the degree of bending of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 caused by the vibration of the vibration device 10366 can be varied.

In the seventeenth embodiment, the case where the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324 can be removed from the inner case member 10330 and the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be easily attached has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. It is not something that can be done. For example, left cover member 10323 and right cover member 10324 are integrally formed with inner case member 10330, and left front cover 10321 and right front cover 1 are mounted thereon.
0322 may be assembled. In this case, when assembled to the inner case member 10330, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be easily assembled by bending, and after the subsequent assembly to the front frame 10014, the bending of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 is suppressed. By doing so, the displacement suppressing effect due to the interference between the projecting interference portion 6805a and the inner edge portion Rm1 can be effective.

In the seventeenth embodiment, the case where the plate-like projecting portion 6453R of the V-shaped design member 6450 abuts on the plate-like support portion 6426 above and below has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a fastening portion into which a fastening screw is screwed in the front-rear direction is formed at the position of the plate-like projecting portion 6453R, and the fastening screw is a plate extending above the plate-like support portion 6426 corresponding to the fastening portion. You may comprise so that it may be inserted in the insertion hole formed in a part. In this case, the plate-like support portion 642
Not only during the upward displacement of 6, but also during the downward displacement, the V-shaped design member 645
0, and the load can be distributed.

In the seventeenth embodiment, the V-shaped design member 6450 has a gap between the main body portion 6451 and the upper facing portions 6455b and 6456b so that the covers 10321 and 103 into which the covers 10321 and 103 are inserted.
22, the case where it is formed with a thickness that allows fitting (a dimensional relationship with almost no gap) has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the thickness dimension of the covers 10321 and 10322 to be inserted may be smaller than the dimension of the gap (they may be configured so that the gap between the members is formed during assembly). In this case, when the displacement of the covers 10321 and 10322 (the displacement of the operation device 10300) is smaller than the gap between the members, the covers 10321 and 10322 and the V-shaped design member 6450 are prevented from coming into contact (collision). Therefore, generation of powder (dust) can be suppressed.

In the seventeenth embodiment, the case where the flange portion 6582 is formed in the shape of a flat plate has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the opposing plate portion 6 of the partition member 6560 is formed with a hook-shaped cross-sectional shape projecting downward from the front side edge of the flange portion 6582 .
561 may be formed in a shape that mates with that shape so that they fit together during assembly. In this case, with the partition member 6560 positioned at the assembled position, the partition member 65
60 can be prevented from separating from the back supporting member 6580 to the front side.

In the seventeenth embodiment, the opposite side surfaces of the enlarged hole 6562a are inclined with respect to the front-rear direction in a cross-sectional view. It is not something that can be done. For example, only one of the side surfaces may be inclined, or both side surfaces may be curved.

In the seventeenth embodiment, the transparent covering member 654 made of colorless and transparent resin material
By making it possible for a player who visually recognizes the lower edge plate-shaped portion 6548a of No. 8 to visually recognize the color of the milky white member 6541 and the partition member 6560 arranged behind it, the lower edge plate-shaped portion 6548a and the box-shaped portion are made visible. Although the case where the lower edge of the light receiving portion 6546 is configured to be easily visible as a series of regions has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by forming the transparent covering member 6548 by two-color molding, the lower edge plate-like portion 6548a may be formed milky white in advance.

In the seventeenth embodiment described above, the plate guide unit 6550 is fastened with a fastening screw whose fastening direction is inclined downward toward the front side, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be fastened with a fastening screw whose fastening direction is inclined downward toward the rear side. This fastening direction can be arbitrarily set according to the arrangement space required by the parts arranged near the fastening position and the selection of the side on which displacement is desired to be suppressed.

In the seventeenth embodiment described above, a configuration in which a compressive force is generated between the partition member 6560 and the back support member 6580 due to deformation of the upper lid member 6510 has been described, but the configuration is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the partition member 6560 may be configured to be driven such that its front-to-rear width can be changed so that the degree of compressive force that can be generated as the upper lid member 6510 deforms can be changed.

That is, if the partition member 6560 is driven to shorten the front-to-rear width by displacing the back side edge of the partition member 6560 toward the front side, the partition member 6560 and the back support member 6580 can be aligned even if the upper lid member 6510 is deformed. A gap can still occur between them, and compressive forces can be less likely to occur. Since the compressive force is less likely to be generated, the extent to which the electrical board 6570 is held can be reduced, so that the degree of displacement of the electrical board 6570 can be changed in a situation where the upper cover member 6510 is similarly deformed.

In other words, by controlling the front-to-rear width of the partition member 6560, the behavior of the decorative substrate 6570 can be changed in a situation where the upper lid member 6510 may be deformed. It is possible to change the appearance of the emitted light.

Note that the front-to-rear width of the partition member 6560 is normally shortened (a space is left between the partition member 6560 and the rear surface support member 6580), and the front-to-rear width is widened by drive control so that the partition member 6560 and the rear surface support It may be configured to change the situation in which a compressive force can be generated between the member 6580 and the member 6580 .

In the seventeenth embodiment, the case where the partition member 6560 and the back support member 6580 that sandwich and support the electrical board 6570 are stacked on the front side of the front frame 10014 has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. do not have. For example, the electrical board 6570 is attached to the back support member 6
580, or the electric board 6570 is the partition member 6560 (acoustic device 6
610), or the electrical board 6570 may be fixed to the partition member 6
It may be inserted (fixed) in the light-receiving projecting portion 6521b of the transparent cylindrical member 6521 inserted in the 560 . In either case, transmission of vibration from the acoustic device 6610 to the electrical board 6570 can be suppressed.

Further, the rear support member 6580 (and the acoustic device 6610) is fixed to the outer frame 11 or the inner frame 12 arranged on the rear side of the front frame 10014, while the partition member 6560 is fixed to the front frame 1
0014 may be fixed. In this case, by opening the front frame 10014, the rear support member 6580 and the partition member 6560 can be separated from each other.
In the closed state of 014, the electrical board 6570 sandwiched between the back supporting member 6580 and the partitioning member 6560 can be easily replaced or misaligned.

In the seventeenth embodiment, the plate portion of the acoustic device 6610 is arranged opposite to the head of the fastening screw, and when the fastening screw is loosened, vibration is transmitted and abnormal noise is generated. Although the case where it is possible to grasp is described, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when light travels near the head of a fastening screw and the fastening screw loosens, the shadow of the fastening screw may be visible from the front side. In this case, by checking the presence or absence of shadows, it is possible to grasp the occurrence of loosening of the fastening screw. can be made easier.

In the seventeenth embodiment described above, the case where the fastening direction of the fastening screw is inclined vertically with respect to the front-rear direction has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the direction may be tilted left and right with respect to the front-rear direction, or there may be portions tilted vertically or horizontally.

In the seventeenth embodiment, the long ribs 6734 and the fins 6735 have been described as extending linearly when viewed from the front, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be formed in a curved shape, or may be formed in a mesh shape or a lattice shape.

In the seventeenth embodiment, the case where the side surfaces of the long rib 6734 are made smooth to suppress the diffusion of light from the side surfaces has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, light leakage from the side surface may be prevented by attaching a light shielding tape to the side surface of the long rib 6734 . In this case, it is possible to easily suppress the decrease in the energy of light traveling to the fins 6735 . Also, a light shielding tape may be attached to the side surface of the fin 6735 . In this case, if the entire side surface is covered, the light at the edge of the front side can be emphasized, and if part of the side surface is covered (for example, by using light-shielding tape with polka-dot holes), Since the light can be visually recognized by the player as light conforming to the shape of the light shielding tape, it is possible to improve the presentation effect of the light traveling through the side surfaces of the fins 6735 .

In the seventeenth embodiment, the case where the long rib 6734 does not extend to the back side of the horizontal effect device 6700 on the left side of the pachinko machine 10010 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the long rib 6734 extends toward the back side, but the left and right ends may be formed so as not to be connected to the inner extending portion 6732 . In this case also, the intensity of light near the glass unit 16 can be suppressed.

In the seventeenth embodiment, the case where the light traveling along the longitudinal direction of the long rib 6734 is emitted from the front-side end portion of the fin 6735 to improve the effect of the light in the front view of the fin 6735 Although explained, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a shape (notch (cut) or the like) for emitting at least part of the light traveling through the fin 6735 from the side surface of the fin 6735 in the middle of the front-rear width of the fin 6735 may be formed.

For example, as shown in this embodiment, the fins 6735 are tilted so that the thickness of the fins 6735 gradually decreases toward the front side, so that the light reaches the front ends of the fins 6735. The fin 6735 may be configured so that the light can be easily emitted from the side surface of the fin 6735 by making it easy to repeatedly reach the side surface.

In the seventeenth embodiment, the case where the number of fastening positions of the curved plate member 6750 to the base member 6710 is reduced has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this.
For example, it may be fixed by fitting or meshing of claws based on the shape relationship. In this case, since the fastening screw can be eliminated, it is possible to prevent the shadow of the fastening screw from degrading the lighting effect.

In the eighteenth embodiment, the case where the electrical board 18830 slides under the influence of the vibration of the operation device 10300 has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a speaker box similar to the acoustic device 6610 may be arranged close to the back side of the connecting base member 18810, and the electrical board 18830 may be slid even by the vibration of this speaker box. In this case, since the vibration direction of the operation device 10300 (the direction along the direction Y17a) is different from the vibration direction of the speaker box (generally the front-rear direction), the displacement mode of the electrical board 18830 can be complicated.

In addition, by generating sound with a frequency outside the audible sound range from the speaker, a silent effect is executed in which the illumination board 18830 can be slid while maintaining a state in which the player cannot hear the sound. can do. At this time, the vibration of the electrical board 18830 is transmitted to the operation device 10300, so that the operation device 103
A player who touches 00 can grasp the vibration derived from the sound output from the speaker. As a result, for example, by controlling the silent effect to be executed when a change in circumstances that is advantageous to the player occurs, it is possible to increase the player's interest in touching the operation device 10300 .

In the eighteenth embodiment, the case where the electrical board 18830 is floatably (slidably) supported near the operation device 10300 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the electric decoration board 6570 of the presentation device 6500 may be supported so as to be floating. In this case, it may be fixed to the front frame 10014 and floatably supported by a rod member extending from the gap between the pair of left and right acoustic devices 6610 to the front side, or a rod member fixed to the wall of the acoustic device 6610. may be floatably supported. Moreover, the sliding direction is not limited to the vertical direction, and may be horizontal or oblique.

In the nineteenth embodiment, the case where the reference line X19 is along the vibration direction Y17a has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when a plurality of vibration directions Y17a are set, the reference line X19 may be arranged along any one of the vibration directions Y17a, or between the plurality of vibration directions Y17a (for example, an intermediate line). angle)) may be configured so that the reference line X19 is along the direction.

Considering the frequency of vibration and the frequency of operation of the lens member 10317, the reference line X1
Nine directions may be set. For example, when a plurality of vibration directions Y17a and operation directions are set in the first direction and other directions, the frequency of occurrence of vibration and operation in the first direction is extremely high, and vibration in the other directions is extremely high. or when the frequency of occurrence of the operation is low, the reference line X
By setting 19, it is possible to suppress loosening of the fastening screw that fastens and fixes the insertion hole 19321a and the fastening portion 19322a.

In the twenty-first embodiment, a case has been described in which the vibration of the vibrating device 21500 is difficult to be transmitted to the operation device 10300 side, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, to the operation device 10300 as well, the body portion 6411 of the covering base member 21410
It may be configured so that the vibration is transmitted to the same extent as the vibration transmission to the. In this case, the vibration device 2
Multiple objects can be vibrated by 1500 .

In the twenty-first embodiment, a case has been described in which the front portion of the projecting portion De3 against which the ridge portion 21522 is pressed due to the vibration of the vibrating device 21500 is formed in a plane perpendicular to the front-rear direction, but this is not necessarily the case. not a thing For example, the front portion of the protruding portion De3 may be formed as a flat surface that is vertically inclined with respect to the front-rear direction. In this case, the direction of the load applied from the overhang De3 to the vibrating device 21500 (normal direction of the front surface of the overhanging portion De3) is inclined with respect to the front-rear direction. A component in a direction intersecting the front-rear direction (vertical direction) can be added to the displacement of time (especially the displacement toward the front side). As a result, the vibration motor 21510 of the vibration device 21500 can be displaced in the vertical direction. 21534 (non-guiding direction intersecting with the guiding direction of 21534) can be configured, and the vibration mode can be complicated.

In the twenty-first embodiment, the protrusion 21534 of the covering cover member 21530 is formed along the longitudinal direction, which is the direction in which the vibration motor 21510 vibrates (the direction perpendicular to the rotation axis of the eccentric weight 21512). Although explained, it is not necessarily limited to this.
For example, the ridge 21534 may be formed along a direction that is inclined with respect to the front-rear direction, along a curved line, or along a line of arbitrary shape. . Thus, the direction in which the vibration motor 21510 and the covering member 21520 are guided by the protrusion 21534 when the vibrating device 21500 vibrates can be arbitrarily set.

In the twenty-first embodiment, the fastening portion 21457 of the V-shaped design member 21450 is fastened together through the support hole 21428 of the lower plate forming member 21420, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the length of the fastening portion 21457 is slightly increased, and the support hole 214 is
It may be configured so that the fastening force is not applied to 28 . This makes it difficult for the vibration of the vibrating device 21500 to be transmitted to the lower plate forming member 21420 through the plate portion having the support hole 21428, and the balls stored in the lower plate 50 vibrate as the vibrating device 21500 vibrates. Therefore, it is possible to execute the vibration presentation by the vibration device 21500 without making the player feel uncomfortable.

In the twenty-second embodiment, the case where the formation of the support plate portion A313 is omitted on the side of the rear case A310 on which the notch portion A312a is formed, and the end face is arranged opposite to the base plate A60 has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. It is not limited. For example, the formation of the support plate portion A313 may be maintained on the side where the notch portion A312a is formed. In this case, while maintaining the rigidity in the assembled state of the base plate A60 and the rear case A310, it is possible to maintain the effect that the boundary of the light seen through the base plate A60 of the game board A13 can be obscured. can.

In the twenty-second embodiment, the rear case A310 is formed in a box shape with an opening on the front side, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, rear case A3
10 may be composed of a plurality of members (as an assembly of divided members), or configured so that the outer edge is composed of a columnar portion extending from the bottom on the back side to the front side (no wall portion is formed). You can In this case, rigidity can be ensured by fastening and fixing the back case A310 to the third pattern display device 81 and other movable units (the first operation unit A400 and the second operation unit A700).

In the 22nd embodiment, the case where the portion adjacent to the game board A13 on the right side is formed not as a surface but as a line has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the linear portion may be formed on the left side. Further, when the linear portions are formed on both the left and right sides, the formation ratio (ratio) of one of the left and right may be made lower than that of the other.

In the twenty-second embodiment, the case where the metal plate member 75 is arranged on the outer peripheral side of the game board A13 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the metal plate is the outer edge member A7
3 may be arranged on the inner side (game area side). In this case, by forming the metal plate along the curved shape on the inner side of the outer edge member A73, the function of improving the rigidity of the game board A13 and the operation unit A300 with respect to the metal plate and the game area are increased. A function to guide the falling ball can be given. Alternatively, a gap may be provided inside the outer edge member A73, and a metal member may be arranged in the gap.

In the twenty-second embodiment, the case where the front protrusion A86f that can contact the game ball is projected from the back side of the game area toward the front side has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. . For example, a flange portion extending from the front end portion of the right flow path forming wall portion A86d of the center frame A86 to the game area side may be provided, and a ridge portion may protrude from the rear surface of the flange portion toward the rear surface side. In this case, even when the game ball flows down the position near the front side of the game area, the protrusion can be brought into contact with the game ball, so that the game ball can be efficiently decelerated.

In the twenty-second embodiment, the case where the front surface of the electrical board A416 and the protruding piece A417i do not abut against each other when the electrical board A416 is assembled to the board fixing plate A417 is explained. It is not necessarily limited to this. For example, decorative board A416
and the projecting piece A417i may be in contact with each other, or another member (for example, a flexible rubber-like member) may be interposed between the front surface of the electrical board A416 and the projecting piece A417i. The projecting piece A417i may be configured to transmit the load to the electrical board A416. As a result, the electrical board A416 can be stably supported.

In the twenty-second embodiment, the second area AC2 of the area of the diffusion plate A415 of the first operation unit A400 is arranged closer to the third pattern display device 81, and the plurality of first operation units A4
Although the case where the third pattern display device 81 is surrounded from above by the second area AC2 of 00 has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the second area AC2 may be configured to be scattered around the third pattern display device 81, or may be configured to be displaceable so that the second area AC2 reaches the front and rear of the third pattern display device 81. may be arranged, and may be configured in an arbitrary arrangement.

In the twenty-second embodiment, the case where the electrical board A445 is included in the first displacement member A440 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, an illumination board and a diffusion plate on which light-emitting means such as LEDs that irradiate light to the front side are arranged may be arranged in the guide plate portion A430 and the support plate portion A420. Thus, the arrangement of the first displacement member A440 can be configured to hide the light emitting means from the player.

Also, the first displacement member A440 may be configured to move on the front side of the electrical board A416 and the diffusion plate A415. Even with such a configuration, similar effects can be obtained. In this case, the first displacement member A440 may be configured so that the electrical board A445 is not provided. For example, one or more through-holes may be formed in the thickness direction of the first displacement member A440 so that light can pass through the through-holes. According to this, since the position of the through-hole changes due to the different arrangement of the first displacement member A440, it is possible to change the position where the light irradiated to the rear side of the first displacement member A440 leaks.

In the twenty-second embodiment, the first displacement member A440 is the electrical board A416 or the diffusion plate A41.
5 is displaced (does not cut through the electrical board A416 when viewed from the front), but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be displaced so as to pass through (cut through) the illumination board A416 or the diffusion plate A415 in a front view. Further, it is not necessary for the entire first displacement member A440 to enter the rear side of the diffuser plate A415 when viewed from the front, and a part of the first displacement member A440 is configured so as not to reach the rear side of the diffuser plate A415 when viewed from the front. can be

In the twenty-second embodiment, the case where the electrical board A445 is included in the first displacement member A440 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the first displacement member A4
40 may not be provided with the electrical board A445. In this case, by arranging the electrical board on the back side of the first displacement member A440 and irradiating light on the front side, the ventilation opening A443c of the rear lid portion A443 and the opening A442c of the interlocking plate portion A442 The light passing through can be configured to be visible to the player.

In the twenty-second embodiment, even after the transmission protrusion A463 of the pin-equipped gear A462 is separated from the deformed slide member A455, the displacement of the deformed slide member A455 is restricted by the arc wall portion A464 of the pin-equipped gear A462. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the arc wall portion A464 is not formed, the transmission protrusion A463
is located away from the deformed slide member A455, the arc wall portion A464
A shutter member configured as a separate member from the gear A462 with a pin protrudes to the position where was supposed to be arranged, and the displacement of the deformed slide member A455 is restricted by coming into contact with the shutter member. good.

In the twenty-second embodiment, a case has been described in which the plurality of guided protruding portions A455c arranged on the odd-shaped slide member A455 are displaced in the direction (right and left) crossing the direction A416x, but this is not necessarily the case. It is not limited. For example, a plurality of guided protrusions A45
5c may be arranged on the same straight line parallel to the direction A416x, or the direction A4
16x may be shifted in a direction that intersects with 16x. In either case, the posture of the deformed slide member A455 can be stabilized.

In the twenty-second embodiment, the case where the first displacement member A440 and the second displacement member A490 are displaced at different timings has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the length of the arcuate wall portion A464 of the gear with pin A462 from the transmission protrusion A463 is shortened (at the same time, the projecting plate portion A456a is lengthened so as not to interfere with contact with the arcuate wall portion A464).
By reducing the angular width of the deformed slide member A455 restricted by the arcuate wall portion A464, the first displacement member A440 is moved in synchronism with the displacement of the second displacement member A490 from the retracted position toward the extended position. It can be displaced from the extended position to the retracted position. At this time, by adjusting the length of the arc wall portion A464 so that the displacement of the first displacement member A440 is contained in the section where the posture of the first displacement member A440 is maintained, the first displacement member A440 and the second displacement member Interference with A490 can be avoided.

Also, in this case, after the first displacement member A440 is displaced to the retracted position, does it abut on the transmission projection A463, or does it abut on the end of the circular arc wall portion A464 opposite to the transmission projection A463? depends on the operating mode of the pinned gear A462, that is, the driving mode of the drive motor AMT1. That is, by controlling the driving speed of the drive motor AMT1 (either constant speed or variable speed) and the stop timing to be different, the stop position after the first displacement member A440 is displaced to the retracted position side can be changed to The deformed slide member A455 (deformed transmitted portion A456) can be different depending on whether the deformed slide member A455 abuts on the arcuate wall portion A464 or the transmitting protrusion A463.

In addition, here, the deformed slide member A455 (
It is assumed that the deformed transmitted portion A456) abuts on at least one of the arcuate wall portion A464 and the transmission protrusion A463, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, arc wall A
464 and the transmission projection A 463 are in a predetermined arrangement, the direction A
A fixed wall portion projecting toward the deformed slide member A455 (deformed transmitted portion A456) may be formed along 416x. In this case, the deformed slide member A455 (deformed transmitted portion A456) moves the arc wall portion A46 to the stop position after the first displacement member A440 is displaced to the retracted position side.
4, the case of contacting the transmission protrusion A463, and the case of contacting the fixed wall can be made different.

In the twenty-second embodiment, the wiring HC is arranged on the outer side of the rotating shaft of the second displacement member A490, but the arrangement is not necessarily limited to this. For example, reinforcement arm A518
may be formed in a cylindrical shape, and the wiring HC may pass through the cylindrical interior to reach the board-side connector A493c. In this case, the displacement of the second displacement member A490 can prevent the portion of the wiring HC arranged on the opposite side of the second displacement member A490 from being displaced (pulled) via the tube.

In the twenty-second embodiment, the wiring HC is wound around the fixed fastening portion A475, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a flexible member having the same shape as the fastening portion A475 and made of a flexible material may be fixed to the front side of the rear plate portion A480, and the wiring HC may be wound around the flexible member. Also, the number of flexible members need not be one, and may be plural. In this case, even if the wiring HC is excessively pulled and comes into contact with the flexible member, the deformation of the flexible member can alleviate the load on the wiring HC.

Further, the wire HC may be supported by a mere columnar portion (portion not used for fastening) instead of the fastening portion A475. In this case, there may be a gap (a gap narrower than the width of the wiring HC) between the columnar portion and the rear plate portion A480. In addition, the body box portion A471, the rear plate portion A480
Alternatively, a binding band that is loosely wound around a fixing portion separately formed on the wire guide member A6560 or the like may be used. In this case, the displacement of the wire HC can be absorbed by the displacement allowed for the binding band, so the load applied to the wire HC can be reduced.

Further, the fastening portion A475 may not be fixed, but may be configured to be displaceable along the displacement direction of the wiring HC. In this case, the direction of displacement is not limited to
Various aspects are illustrated.

Further, the displacement of the fastening portion A475 may occur in synchronization with the displacement of the first displacement member A440 and the second displacement member A490. For example, by displacing the second displacement member A490 in the opposite direction as it approaches the overhang position, it is possible to prevent the wiring HC from coming into the eyes of the player.

As for the method of displacing the fastening portion A475, the fastening portion A475 may be displaceably supported by the long hole, or the fastening portion A475 may be configured to tilt with the main body box portion A471 side as a fulcrum. In this case, it is preferable that the rear plate portion A480 is formed with a guide groove, a notch, or an interlocking portion so as to allow the displacement of the fastening portion A475 while maintaining the coupled state with the fastening portion A475.

Also, although the fastening portion A475 has been described as a portion around which the wiring HC is wound, the fastening portion A475 is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be configured as a pair of wall-like support walls formed on both upper and lower sides of the wiring HC to restrict passage of the wiring HC. In this case, the width of the range in which the wiring HC can be displaced can be defined by the support wall.

In the twenty-second embodiment, one end of the wiring HC is connected to the board-side connector A493c of the second displacement member A490 from the rear side, and the other end is arranged on the front side of the board-side connector A493c. Although the case where it is connected from the back side to the third connector A416e3, which is connected to the connector A416e3, is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the board to which the other end is connected may be arranged on the side surface of the rear case A310 so as to face inward. In this case, since the wiring HC can be connected to the substrate by extending it to the side surface of the back case A310, the length required to route the wiring HC to the front side can be omitted.

Further, for example, the substrate to which the other end is connected may be arranged on the rear plate portion A480 arranged on the back side of the substrate-side connector A493c. In this case, the length required to route the wiring HC to the front side can be omitted.

In the twenty-second embodiment, the drive motor AMT1 is driven (excited) in one direction to displace the second displacement member A490 from the retracted position to the extended position. However, this is not necessarily the case. do not have. For example, from the end surface of the plate portion A455e to be detected which abuts on the transmission protrusion A463, it is recessed toward the opposite arrangement portion A456b side, and the pin gear A462
may be configured so that the rotation angle of is allowed to exceed the sixth angle. In this case, since the in-phase member A465 can rotate from the fourth angle d14 beyond the allowable angle dd1, by driving (exciting) the drive motor AMT1 in one direction, the second displacement member A490 is moved from the retracted position. It can be displaced to the extended position and further displaced back to the retracted position. As a result, by switching the length for driving (exciting) the drive motor AMT1, the displacement mode of the second displacement member A490 can be changed from the mode in which the displaced state is maintained from the retracted position to the extended position, and the extended mode from the retracted position. After being displaced to the extended position, it is possible to switch between a mode in which the displacement is returned to the retracted position side.

In the twenty-second embodiment, the upper transmission path UL1 and the lower transmission path DL1 are described as paths through which driving force is transmitted by gears, but they are not necessarily limited to this. For example, a cam, a gear belt, or a direct-acting slider may be used.

In the twenty-second embodiment, a case has been described in which the electrical board A715 that irradiates the rotating body A720 with light is formed of a flat member, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. for example,
It may be configured as a sheet-like substrate that is formed in a sheet-like shape from a flexible material. in this case,
A substrate having a light emitting means for irradiating the rotating body A720 with light can be easily arranged on the circumference surrounding the rotating body A720.

In the twenty-second embodiment, the case where the rotating body A720 is arranged at a position always visible to the player has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, rotating body A7
20 may be configured to be movable to an invisible position where the player is invisible. In this case, the first rotating member A721 is moved to the second rotating member A7 while the rotating body A720 is arranged at the invisible position.
28 on the vertical axis (the second rotating member A728 is stopped), start synchronous rotation in that state, and move it to a position visible to the player while continuing to rotate. Attention can be drawn to the relative relationship between the rotating first rotating member A721 and the second rotating member A728. As a result, during the continuation of the rotation of the rotating body A720 when executing an effect that associates the relative relationship between the first rotating member A721 and the second rotating member A728 at the time of stop with information beneficial to the player (for example, the degree of expectation for a big win). attention to the rotating body A720 can be improved.

In the twenty-second embodiment, the case where the first operation unit A400 and the second operation unit A700 operate independently has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the effect unit A710 of the second action unit A700 can be tilted forward from the lower end,
When the second displacement member A490 of the first motion unit A400 is in the extended position, the effect unit A71
0 may be moved up and down to come into contact with each other and receive a load, so that the production unit A710 may change to an inclined posture. In this case, the arrangement of the second displacement member A490 makes it possible to execute an effect of changing the attitude of the effect unit A710. In addition, the configuration in which the effect unit A710 can be tilted is not limited at all. For example, the production unit A710 and the lifting section may be connected by a flexible member, or may be configured to be pivotally supported by the lifting section.

In the twenty-second embodiment, the shell A722 is made of an impermeable material, and the first rotary member A
Although the case of shielding the light directed toward the central rotary member A724 in the initial state or the fourth state of 721 has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, shell A72
2 may be configured to have a light transmissive portion. As a result, the first rotating member A721
and the amount of light reaching the central rotating member A724 can be finely adjusted.

In the twenty-second embodiment, the case where the rotation axis of the annular gear member A723 meshing with the fixed gear SG intersects with the axis of the fixed gear SG has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the annular gear member A723 may have a rack shape extending linearly (corresponding to an infinite radius of curvature), or the rotating shaft of the meshed gear member may be arranged parallel to the fixed gear SG. . a first effect member in which the rotation axis of the meshed gear member intersects the axis of the fixed gear SG;
Complicated effects can be executed by combining the second effect member in which the rotating shaft of the meshed gear member is parallel to the axis of the fixed gear SG.

In the twenty-second embodiment, the case where the first area AC1 of the diffusion plate A415 is formed on the outer side of the operation unit A300 has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this.
For example, by forming the illumination board A416 in a C shape that is recessed from the outside toward the inside when viewed from the front, the first area AC1 is formed closer to the inner side of the operation unit A300, and the second area AC2 is formed into the operation unit. It may be formed at a position closer to the outer side of A300. In this case, the player's line of sight can be easily guided to a position closer to the outside of the action unit A300.

In the twenty-second embodiment, the case where the second rotating member A728 is irradiated with light from the left, right, and above has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, rotating body A72
0, and the light emitted from the light-emitting means such as an LED disposed on the electrical board is conducted to the second supporting portion A735 and supported by the second supporting portion A735. After reaching the second rotating member A728 and conducting the second rotating member A728, it may be visually recognized by the player. In this case, unlike the second supporting portion A735, the first rotating member A721
Since the first supporting portion A731 that supports the is hard to transmit light, it is possible to perform an effect of lighting the second rotating member A728 without lighting the first rotating member A721.

This assumes an effect that is difficult to achieve with the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a. That is, the optical axis KJ of the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a is directed toward the first rotating member A721, and the second rotating member A7 can be arranged between the first rotating member A721 and the light emitting means A715a.
28 transmits light, so that the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a passes through the second rotating member A728.
It is difficult to control so that it reaches only the first rotating member A721 and does not reach the first rotating member A721. Therefore, by conducting the second support portion A735 and allowing the light to reach the second rotating member A728, it is possible to perform an effect that is difficult to achieve with the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a.

In the twenty-second embodiment, the first rotating member A721 supported by the first supporting portion A731 arranged inside the rotating shaft is the second rotating member supported by the second supporting portion A735 arranged outside the rotating shaft. Although the case where it is arranged inside the rotation axis of A728 has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the first rotating member A721 has the side opposite to the side supported by the first supporting portion A731 extending outside the rotating shaft, and rotates from the extended end side so as to cover the second rotating member A728 from the outside of the rotating shaft. An extension may be formed in a direction parallel to the axis. In this case, the first rotating member A721 supported on the inner side of the rotating shaft can be configured to rotate on the outer side of the rotating shaft of the second rotating member A728, and an unexpected performance can be executed.

In the twenty-second embodiment, the rotation of the central rotating member A724 causes the light emitting means A7 to rotate.
Although the case where the area of the central rotary member A724 changes when viewed in the optical axis direction of 15a has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the central rotating member A724 expands without changing its posture, or when the moving body protrudes from the inside, the light emitting means A715
It may be configured such that the area of the central rotating member A724 in the optical axis direction view of a is changed.

In the twenty-second embodiment, the case where the shell portion A722 intervening between the central rotating member A724 and the light emitting means A715a is rotationally displaced has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a predetermined member may be configured to advance and retreat between the central rotating member A724 and the light emitting means A715a by linear movement (sliding movement). Alternatively, the light emitting means A715a may be arranged on the predetermined member.

In the twenty-second embodiment, the case where the optical axis of the light emitting means A715a is always directed toward the central rotary member A724 has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, light emitting means A
The optical axis of 715a may be configured to oscillate around the central rotating member A724, and may be configured to face the central rotating member A724 at a predetermined timing.

In the twenty-second embodiment, the case where the central rotating member A724 and the shell A722 are driven by the same drive source has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, separate driving may be used, or the timing of driving by the same driving source and the timing of separate driving may be switched.

In the twenty-second embodiment, the second rotating member A728 is configured so as not to overlap all the optical axes of the light emitting means A715a arranged on the left and right sides of the central rotating member A724. It is not something that can be done. For example, the second rotating member A728 may be composed of a plate-shaped member formed so as to cover a plane passing through the rotating shaft when viewed in the direction of the rotating shaft, and may be configured to overlap the entire optical axis at a timing. In this case, when light is emitted from the light emitting means A715a arranged on the left and right sides of the central rotating member A724, the influence of the attitude of the second rotating member A728 on the central rotating member A724 can be increased.

In the twenty-second embodiment, when the shell portion A722 of the first rotating member A721 changes its posture by 180 degrees, the shape in a front view is different, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the posture is changed by 180 degrees, the shape in the front view may be the same. This makes it impossible to recognize the second state and the sixth state of the first rotating member A721 from the difference in shape of the shell portion A722.

In the twenty-second embodiment, the case where the light emitting means A715a is arranged with the optical axis KJ on the virtual plane VS has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, a plurality of planes on which the optical axis KJ is arranged may be set. In this case, the plane through which the optical axis KJ passes does not have to pass through the rotation axis of the rotating body A720.

In the twenty-third embodiment, the case where the slide member A2729 is displaced in the front-rear direction has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the first rotating member A2721 may be configured to be displaceable in the front-rear direction, or the light emitting means A715 may be configured to be displaceable, and the displacement of the light emitting means A715 (not limited to the front-rear direction, but mixed displacement in the front, back, left, right, up and down directions) may be used) to change the virtual plane VS. In any case, the appearance of the first rotating member A2721 when the light emitting means A715 is lit is changed while suppressing the change in the outer shape (shape) of the first rotating member A2721 and the sliding member A2729 in the front view. be able to.

In the twenty-fourth embodiment, the pin-equipped gear A3462 for the odd-shaped slide member A455
Although a case has been described in which a plurality of contact positions are arranged in the circumferential direction, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by forming the projecting tip of the transmission projection A463 to have a large diameter, the transmission projection A463 contacts the deformed slide member A455, and the external projection A3464 contacts the deformed slide member A455. may be shifted in the front-rear direction.

In the twenty-fourth embodiment, the pin-equipped gear A3462 is used for the odd-shaped slide member A455.
A case has been described in which the plurality of outer diameter protrusions A3464 abut at the same position, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the longitudinal direction of the projecting plate portion A456a (direction A416x in rear view).
direction perpendicular to the direction) inner side (opposite side of the plate portion A455e to be detected) further extends along the longitudinal direction, and the wall portion perpendicular to the side surface of the extended portion in rear view is a gear with a pin A346
It may be configured to extend to two sides.

In this case, the orthogonal wall portion is not in contact with the arcuate wall portion A464, and the outer diameter protrusion A
3464, the deformed slide member A455 is prevented from being displaced in a direction intersecting the direction A416x when the orthogonal wall portion and the outer diameter protrusion A3464 come into contact with each other. A load in the direction of rotation (load in the braking direction) can be generated in the attached gear A3462.

Furthermore, by deforming the second guide hole A422b so as to extend in the lateral direction (into an L shape) at the longitudinal end portion, the deformed slide member A455 can be displaced in a direction intersecting the direction A416x. You may comprise so that 1st displacement member A440 may be interlocked and displaced. That is, the deformed slide member A455 pushed by the outer diameter protrusion A3464 is pushed into the second guide hole A
By entering the portion extending in the lateral direction of 422b, the transmission projecting portion A455b moves in the direction A41.
6x, and the displacement may be transmitted to the first displacement member A440 via the long link A451.

In this case, when the odd-shaped slide member A455 enters the portion extending in the lateral direction of the second guide hole A422b, the second guide hole A422b and the guided projecting portion A455c move in the direction A416x.
, it is possible to restrict the displacement of the deformed slide member A455 along the direction A416x. Thus, even after the contact between the projecting plate portion A456a and the arcuate wall portion A464 is released, displacement of the odd-shaped slide member A455 along the direction A416x can be restricted.

There is no limitation to the displacement that occurs in the first displacement member A440 when the deformed slide member A455 enters the portion extending in the lateral direction of the second guide hole A422b. For example, it may be configured to generate displacement along the direction A416x, or may be configured to generate displacement in a direction crossing the direction A416x.

In the twenty-fourth embodiment, the outer diameter protrusion A3464 has been described as having a semicircular shape, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may have a rectangular shape, a triangular shape, a semi-elliptical shape, or an arbitrary shape. On the other hand, in consideration of durability, the shape of the outer diameter protrusion A3464 is preferably configured so as to taper (the width does not increase) toward the radially outward direction.

Note that this is the same when forming a recess instead of the outer diameter protrusion A3464. That is, while the shape may be any shape, it tapers toward the radially inner side (the width does not increase).
It is preferably configured as follows.

The shape of the outer diameter protrusion A3464 may be symmetrical or asymmetrical with respect to a straight line passing through the rotation axis. In this case, if configured in an asymmetrical shape, the displacement speed of the first displacement member A440 can be changed for each direction.

For example, in the rear view of the external projection A3464, the side surface of the arcuate wall A464 on the extension distal end side (the side opposite to the transmission projection A463 along the circumference of the arcuate wall A464) is the extension base end side. (along the circumference of the arc wall A464 on the side of the transmission projection A463), the arc wall A46
4 may be configured so that the angle with respect to the outer peripheral surface is small.

In this case, the displacement of the first displacement member A440 caused by contact with the outer diameter protrusion A3464 under the condition that the gear with pin A3462 is rotated at constant speed is It is possible to increase the speed when displacing toward the retracted position side compared to the speed when displacing toward the overhanging side. That is, the displacement speed of the first displacement member A440 can be changed for each displacement direction.

As for the case where the first displacement member A440 is displaced toward the side opposite to the retracted position, if the outer diameter protrusion A3464 is of a projecting shape, it may be displaced beyond the extended position to the opposite side of the retracted position. As shown in the example, when a concave portion is formed instead of the external protrusion A3464, the deformed slide member A455 slides by the size of the concave portion, and the first displacement member A440
is displaced to the retracted position, the deformed slide member A455 is pushed out to the outer surface of the arcuate wall portion A464 and slides, thereby displacing the first displacement member A440 to the extended position.

Further, when the first displacement member A440 is displaced toward the retracted position, the outer diameter protrusion A
If 3464 is a projecting shape, after the first displacement member A440 is displaced to the opposite side of the retracted position as the deformed slide member A455 slides by the projecting dimension, the outer diameter projection A3
464 is released from contact with the deformed slide member A455, the deformed slide member A45
5 slides, the first displacement member A440 is displaced to the extended position (retracted position side). As the deformed slide member A455 is displaced by the dimension of the provided portion, the first displacement member
A case where 40 is displaced from the extended position to the retracted position is exemplified.

In the twenty-seventh embodiment, the case where the main body plate portion A6561 is arranged closer to the rear plate portion A480 has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, main body plate A6561
may be disposed at a position away from the rear plate portion A480 (a position closer to the support box portion A6470), and the protruding portion A6562 may protrude toward the rear plate portion A480 side. In addition, the main body plate portion A65
61 may be configured to be thin (for example, sheet-like). In this case, it is possible to ensure a wide area in which the wiring HC is displaced.

Moreover, although the case where the main-body board part A6561 was formed in an elongated shape was demonstrated, it is not necessarily restricted to this. For example, the body plate portion A6561 may have a wide plate shape. In this case, members can be arranged between the rear plate portion A480 and the wiring HC in a wide range, so that the wiring HC and the main body plate portion A6561 are synchronously displaced, thereby increasing the possibility of suppressing friction. can do.

In the twenty-seventh embodiment, the projecting portion A6562 is fixedly arranged on the main body plate portion A6561, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the protruding portion A6562 is held so as to be displaceable in the longitudinal direction of the main body plate portion A6561, and the protruding portion A is displaced by the load received from the wiring HC.
The body plate portion A6561A may be configured to rotate according to the displacement of the 6562. That is, for example, a long hole (groove) through which the projecting portion A6562 is inserted is formed in the main body box portion A471, and the long hole (groove) displaces the projecting portion A6562 in the longitudinal direction of the main body plate portion A6561. Accordingly, the main body plate portion A6561 may be formed in a shape that causes rotational displacement. In this case, the arrangement of the wiring guide members A6560 can be appropriately changed according to the magnitude of the load applied from the wiring HC to the wiring guide members A6560. can be moderately reduced.

Moreover, although the case where the main body plate portion A6561 is rotatably supported has been described, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be one that slides, or one that moves along a path combining rotation and sliding.

Although the case where the second displacement member A490 is reciprocally rotationally displaced has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the second displacement member A490 may be slidably displaced, or the second rotating member A490 may be rotationally displaced by one or more rotations.

In the twenty-seventh embodiment, the case where the wiring guide member A6560 is disposed on the back side of the support box portion A6470 has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, main body plate part A
6561 is arranged on the front side of the support box portion A6470, and a long through-hole (a long hole along an arc centered on the rotation axis of the main body plate portion A6561) that guides the projecting portion A6562 to the support box portion A6470. may be provided, and the protruding portion A6562 may protrude to the rear side of the support box portion A6470 through the elongated through hole. In this case, the support box portion A6470 and the rear plate portion A480
A space corresponding to the volume of the main body plate portion A6561 can be provided as compared with the case where the main body plate portion A6561 is arranged between the . As a result, it is possible to easily secure a space in which the wiring HC is displaced, and it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in designing the main body plate portion A6561 (for example, the gap between the support box portion A6470 and the rear plate portion A480 can also be configured as a thick member).

<First control example>
Next, various control examples applicable to the pachinko machines of the above embodiments will be described. First, with reference to FIGS. 389 to 478, a first control example in the pachinko machines of the above embodiments will be described. In addition, in the configuration used in the first control example, there are some configurations that are the same as those in the above-described embodiments and are given different reference numerals. Since the specific contents of the configuration are the same as those corresponding to the above-described embodiments, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, an overview (specifications) of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example will be described. The pachinko machine 10 in the first control example has a first area (V area) in which a game ball can enter and a variable winning device 65 in which a ball can enter when a special symbol lottery results in a big win. , a second area (non-V area) different from the first area, and a distribution device (V Roles) are provided. During one big win, at least one game ball enters (passes through) the first area, so that after the end of the big win, a variable probability state of the special symbol is imparted, while the second during one big win. When not even one game ball enters one area, a time-saving state of normal patterns is imparted until the lottery of special patterns is executed 100 times at maximum after the end of the big win. Therefore, when a jackpot game is executed, the game can be played in anticipation that the game balls will be distributed to the first region (V region) by the distribution device (V role).

The distribution device (V role) is basically maintained in an arrangement that allows game balls to be distributed to the second area (an arrangement that cannot be distributed to the first area), and a predetermined round (for example, 5 Round), only during a specific period (for example, 5 seconds after the start of the 5th round to 10 seconds after the start of the 5th round), change the arrangement so that the game balls can be distributed to the first area. . By entering the game ball into the specific winning hole 65a during this specific period, the game ball can be entered into the first area, and the game state after the big win is finished is changed with an advantageous special pattern. state can be transferred.

In addition, in this first control example, the opening and closing pattern in which the game ball can reach the distribution device during the specific period in the 5th round (for example, 5 seconds after the start of the 5th round to 9.5 seconds The opening and closing pattern in which the specific winning opening 65a is opened for 4.5 seconds at the time of elapse). A specific winning opening with an opening and closing pattern that makes it impossible to reach the device (for example, an opening and closing pattern in which the specific winning opening 65a is opened for 4.5 seconds from the start of the 5th round to the time when 4.5 seconds have elapsed) At least a jackpot type (normal jackpot) in which the (large opening) 65a is opened and closed is provided. In the former jackpot type (probable variable jackpot), game balls are easily sent to the first area by the sorting device simply by continuing to shoot the game balls aiming at the specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a in the fifth round of the jackpot. can be distributed, so after the end of the big hit, it will be in a probability variable state of special symbols. On the other hand, in the latter jackpot type (normal jackpot), even if game balls continue to be shot aiming at the specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a in the fifth round of the jackpot, all game balls that reach the sorting device Since it is distributed to the second area, a variable probability state is not given (a time saving state is given).

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example, when shifting to the probability variable state of the special symbols, it is determined whether or not to fall to the low probability state of the special symbols each time the lottery condition of the special symbols is satisfied. It is configured to execute a lottery. More specifically, when the special symbol lottery condition is established in the special symbol probability variable state, first, a lottery (fall probability 1/500) is executed to determine whether or not to fall to the special symbol low probability state. When a corresponding lottery result is obtained, a large winning lottery is executed with a lottery probability (1/250) in a special pattern low probability state, while a special pattern high probability state is not obtained when the lottery result does not correspond to falling. It is configured to execute a jackpot lottery with a lottery probability (1/125). On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example, regardless of whether it is a probability variable jackpot or a normal jackpot, after the jackpot is finished, until the lottery of the special pattern is finished 100 times, the time saving state of the normal pattern. It is configured to be maintained at That is, when the variable probability state of the special symbol is set after the end of the jackpot, it depends on whether the lottery result corresponding to the fall is obtained before the lottery of the special symbol is executed 100 times. However, the normal state of normal symbols continues until the lottery condition for the 100th special symbol is established after the end of the big win. Therefore, after the end of the big win, until the lottery of the special symbols is executed 100 times, the operation other than the probability of the big win is almost the same. can be made imperceptible to the player. Therefore, if the previous big win is a normal big win and the probability of special symbols is low after the big win is over, or if the previous big win was a variable big win, the lottery of special symbols will be executed 100 times. Even if the player falls to a low probability state in the meantime, the player continues to have expectations for the variable probability state of the special symbols until the lottery of the special symbols is executed 100 times. You can continue to let it go. Therefore, it is possible to maintain the player's motivation for the game.

In addition, as described above with reference to FIG. It is provided at a position where a ball can be entered (a position where a game ball that has flowed down the flow path provided on the left side in front view cannot be entered (difficult)). That is, the electric accessory 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640 is easily opened (that is, the game ball is easy to enter the second ball entrance 640). In the time-saving state, by shooting a game ball toward the flow path on the right side in front view, the game ball enters the second ball entrance 640 at a high rate (for example, a rate of 1 ball out of 3 balls). Therefore, the game can be played efficiently. On the other hand, in the normal state in which the normal state of the normal symbol is set, the electric accessory 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640 is difficult to open (that is, the game ball enters the second ball entrance 640). difficult), the position where the game ball that has flowed down the flow path provided on the left side of the front view with respect to the third symbol display device 81 can enter (the game flowed down the flow path provided on the right side of the front view A game is played by a game method in which a game ball is aimed at a first ball entrance (first prize winning opening) 64 provided at a position where a ball cannot (is difficult to) enter. Hereinafter, for simplification of explanation, shooting a game ball toward the flow path on the left side of the third symbol display device 81 when viewed from the front is referred to as "left-handed hitting". Shooting a game ball is called "right hitting". In addition, the lottery for the special symbol executed based on the entry of the game ball into the first ball entrance (first winning slot) 64 is referred to as the lottery for the first special symbol (lottery for special symbol 1). A lottery for a special symbol that is executed based on the entry of a game ball into the second entrance (second prize entrance) 640 is referred to as a second special symbol lottery (special figure 2 lottery). ).

Next, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. Figure 389 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in the first control example, Figure 389 (b) is the third 8 is a schematic diagram schematically showing display contents of a pattern display device 81. FIG. The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 404), for example, three patterns of left, middle and right. A row of symbols is displayed.

The third symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are composed of nine types of main symbols numbered from "1" to "9". Each main design consists of a back design made of a wooden box with a number from "1" to "9". , Large numbers are added to almost the entire front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main designs with even numbers (2, 4, 6, 8) have accessory designs imitating characters such as shields, swords, cloaks, etc. that fill the front of the wooden box. An even number is attached to the lower right side of , in green, small, and displayed in front of the attached symbols.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the result of the special symbol lottery performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 404) to be described later is a jackpot (jackets A to E), the same main pattern Matching variable display is performed, and after the variable display is finished, a big win is generated. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss, a variable display in which the same main symbols are not aligned is performed.

Furthermore, if the type of the winning jackpot is a normal jackpot, a variable display is performed in which the same main symbols with even numbers are always displayed, while if the variable jackpot is a variable jackpot, the same main symbols with even numbers are displayed. Either the variation display in which the symbols are aligned or the variation display in which the same main symbols with odd numbers are aligned is executed. In other words, by executing the variable display in which the same main symbols with odd numbers are aligned, not only the big win but also the definite variable state after the big win is finalized. In addition, in the first control example, the rate at which the variable display in which the same main symbols with odd numbers are aligned is set to an extremely low probability (for example, the rate of 1%) in the event of a variable probability jackpot. there is As a result, it is possible to make rare the case where it is possible to grasp that it is a probability variable jackpot from the type of symbols that are collected when the jackpot is won. As described above, until the lottery of 100 special symbols is executed after the end of the jackpot, the time-saving state of the normal symbols is maintained (whether or not the variable probability state is determined from the operation mode of the electric accessory 640a). Therefore, by making it difficult to grasp whether or not it is a probability variable jackpot from the types of the main patterns arranged at the time of jackpot winning, from the end of the jackpot to the end of the lottery of special patterns 100 times. During the period, it is possible to more frequently generate a situation in which it is not known whether it is a variable probability state or a time saving state. Therefore, even if the probability variable jackpot is won or when the normal jackpot is won, the player is in a variable probability state from the end of the jackpot to the end of the lottery of 100 times of special symbols. You can keep your hopes up.

As shown in FIG. 389(a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is a main display for displaying the third symbol when the third symbol is variably displayed or when the third symbol is stopped and displayed. A region Dm, a small region Ds1 for displaying the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol, a small region Ds2 for displaying the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol, and a predetermined effect (for example, an interrupt described later and a small area Ds3 for reducing and displaying the variable effect of the third symbol while executing the continuous hitting effect).

The main display area Dm is divided into three left, middle and right display areas Dm1 to Dm3, and three pattern rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. The above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending numerical order in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is periodically scrolled from top to bottom for variable display. In particular, the left symbol row Z1 is arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in descending order, and the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3 are arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in ascending order.

Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbols are displayed in three stages of upper, middle and lower stages for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The middle part of the main display area Dm is set as the activated line L1, and the third symbols stop on the activated line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1→right symbol row Z3→middle symbol row Z2 in each game. Is displayed. When the third symbol stops, if a combination of big winning symbols (in this embodiment, a combination of the same main symbols) is aligned on the activated line L1, a big winning moving image is displayed as a big winning.

On the other hand, the small area Ds1 is an area for displaying the number of balls (holding balls) for which variation has not been executed (the number of holding balls of the first special symbol) among the balls that have entered the first ball entrance 64. The small area Ds2 is an area for displaying the number of balls (holding balls) for which variation has not been executed (the number of holding balls of the second special symbol) among the balls that have entered the second ball entrance 640, and is a small area. Ds3 is an area in which the variable effect is reduced and displayed when, for example, a display effect different from the variable effect is executed in the main display area. By shrinking and displaying the variable effect, it is possible to prevent the display effect different from the variable effect from being hidden by the third pattern and becoming difficult to see.

On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 389(b), a total of three main patterns of the third pattern are displayed in the main display area Dm, and in the background of the third pattern, a display indicating the degree of expectation for the big win is displayed. Performances and the like are executed.

When the game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 while the variable display is being performed in the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display devices 37A, 37B), the number of times of the ball entrance is up to 4 times. The number of reserved balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37A and is also displayed in the small area Ds1. Similarly, when a game ball enters the second ball entrance 640, the number of times the ball enters is held up to four times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37B, and in the small area Ds2. Also shown in In the small area Ds1, one reserved ball number pattern is displayed per one reserved ball number of the first special pattern, and in the small area Ds2, one reserved ball number pattern is displayed per one reserved ball number of the second special pattern. is displayed. That is, when one reserved ball number pattern is displayed in the small area Ds1 or small area Ds2, it indicates that the number of reserved ball numbers is one ball, and when four reserved ball number patterns are displayed, It indicates that the number of retained balls is 4 balls. Further, when the reserved ball number symbol is not displayed, it indicates that the reserved ball number of the first special symbol is 0 ball, that is, the reserved ball does not exist. FIG. 389(b) illustrates a case where the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is four and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is zero.

In this first control example, the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 are each suspended up to four times, but the maximum number of suspended balls is four. , and may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls in the small areas Ds1 and Ds2, the number of reserved balls may be displayed in part of the third pattern display device 81 as a number, or the area divided into four may be displayed as many as the number of reserved balls. It may be displayed in a different mode (for example, color or lighting pattern). Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the third symbol display device 81 may not display the number of reserved balls. Furthermore, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls, which is the maximum holding number, and the number of holding balls may be displayed according to the number of holding lamps in the lighting state.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 390 to 403, various entertainment effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example will be described. First, referring to FIGS. 390 to 393, in the first control example, the third symbol display device 81 is executed during the game state (time saving state or probability variable state) in which the time saving state of normal symbols is set. The following describes the display effect. As described above, in the first control example, after the end of the big hit, until the lottery of special symbols is executed 100 times, it is difficult for the player to distinguish whether it is a time saving state or a variable probability state. Configure. That is, even when the game state after the end of the big win is set to the time-saving state or the variable probability state, the lottery of the special symbols is executed 100 times after the last big win is finished unless the big win is made. Until then, it is configured to be maintained in a time-saving state of normal patterns. This time-saving state of the normal pattern is maintained even when the probability variation state of the special pattern falls to the low probability state of the special pattern before it is executed 100 times, so the game set at the end of the jackpot. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to identify not only the state but also the timing of falling from the probability variable state of the special symbol to the low probability state.

However, if the state of the special symbols of the pachinko machine 10 (whether the special symbols are in the variable probability state or the low probability state) is configured to be completely unidentifiable, the game state in which the time-saving state of the normal symbols is set. The game becomes monotonous while is continuing, and there is a possibility that the player's interest in the game cannot be sufficiently improved. Therefore, in the first control example, the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 allows the player to predict the possibility of the variable probability state to some extent. More specifically, every time the variable display of the special symbols is executed, one back mode is selected from among three types of back modes that suggest the degree of expectation of the probability variable state, taking into consideration the game state etc. at the time of execution. It is configured to be set. As a result, it is possible to realize the playability of predicting the state of the special symbol from the aspect of the backside mode, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

First, with reference to FIG. 390(a), the display mode (rear view mode) with a relatively low degree of expectation that the current state is the variable probability state will be described. As shown in FIG. 390(a), when the back mode (cave exploration mode), which is a variable state with a relatively low degree of expectation, is set, a character 801 imitating an adventurer holds a sword and a torch. A display mode for searching the inside of the cave is displayed. In addition, on the lower right side of the front view on the display screen of the third design display device 81, the number of lotteries of the remaining special symbols until the number of lotteries that the time saving state of the normal design may end (time saving state of the normal design guaranteed number of times) is displayed. The example of FIG. 390(a) illustrates a case where 90 times is displayed as the guaranteed number of times. That is, it illustrates the state after the lottery for the special symbol is executed 10 times after the big win is finished. Further, a display area 803 having a horizontally elongated substantially rectangular shape is displayed in the lower part of the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 when viewed from the front. Inside the display area 803, horizontally elongated substantially elliptical right-handed images displaying the characters "Right-handed" are displayed on the left and right, and between these right-handed images, a "cave search mode" is displayed. is displayed. According to these display modes, the time-saving state of normal symbols continues until the lottery of special symbols is executed at least 90 times (the time-saving state may end when the lottery of 90 times ends), And the player can easily understand that the game should be played by hitting to the right. In addition, compared to the temple search mode (see FIG. 390 (b)) and the super temple search mode (see FIG. 391), which will be described later, the display contents are plain, so that the player can intuitively It can be made to understand that the possibility of the condition continuing is relatively low.

FIG. 390(b) is a diagram showing a display mode when the back mode (temple search mode), which has a higher expectation that the current state is a variable probability state, is set compared to the cave search mode. When the temple search mode is set, a display mode in which a character 801 imitating an adventurer searches the temple is displayed, and the characters between the right-handed images in the display area 803 are displayed as "temple search mode". is changed to The contents displayed in the temple search mode are brighter in appearance than in the cave search mode, and the display mode is such that the player can easily have a flashy impression. can be intuitively understood.

FIG. 391 is a diagram showing a display mode when the back mode (super temple search mode) indicating that the degree of expectation of the probability change state is higher than the temple search mode is set. When this super temple search mode is set, the characters "CHANCE" are displayed on the pillars of the temple, and torches are set on the pillars of the temple. Furthermore, a substantially circular display area 804 displaying the characters "super" is displayed on the upper left side of the characters "temple search mode" in the display area 803. FIG. These display modes can give the player a more flashy impression than the temple search mode (see FIG. 390(b)), so that the expectation of the variable probability state can be further improved. It should be noted that this super temple search mode is a back mode that may be set (shifted) only when the game state is a variable probability state and the lottery result of falling is not included in the hold. In other words, at the time of transitioning to the super temple search mode, not only is the variable state confirmed, but at least it is confirmed that the variable state continues until the pending ball at the time of transition is digested, so the transition to the super temple search mode By doing so, it is possible to please the player.

Thus, in the first control example, during the gaming state in which the time saving state of the normal symbol is set, the cave search mode with a relatively low expectation of the probability change state, the temple search mode with a relatively high expectation of the probability change state , and 3 of the super temple search mode that confirms that the definite variable state is confirmed and that the lottery result corresponding to the fall is not included in the hold (at least the definite variable state continues until the hold is digested) It is configured to set one of the types of back modes at the time of execution of the variable display performance based on the lottery result of the special symbol. By constructing in this way, while the time-saving state of normal symbols is set, the player can be given the pleasure of predicting the current game state from the back mode, so that the player's interest in the game can be enhanced. can be improved. In addition, by setting the super temple search mode, it is confirmed that the game state is a variable state. You can make them feel joy that their predictions were correct. On the other hand, if the state of the special symbol is predicted to be low probability, but the state is shifted to the super temple mode, the player will be delighted that the game state is set to be more advantageous than expected. can let Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved. Furthermore, by setting the super temple mode, it is confirmed that the lottery result corresponding to the fall is not included in the hold (at least the lottery for the number of pending balls can be executed with a jackpot probability in a variable state. possible), the game can be played with a stronger expectation of a big win during the hold.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 392 and 393, in the first control example, a lottery of special symbols for a predetermined number of times (for example, 96 times) is performed without winning the jackpot in a state where the time saving state of normal symbols is set. The probability variation continuation suggestion effect executed when is executed will be described. FIG. 392 is a diagram showing a display mode at the start of this variable probability continuation suggestion effect. This variable probability continuation suggesting performance is a performance for suggesting whether or not the game state is the variable probability state, and is executed from the 96th variable display performance to the 99th variable display performance after the end of the big win. That is, it is an effect that is executed until immediately before the 100th special symbol lottery, which is the guaranteed number of times of the time saving state, is executed. In addition, in this first control example, in the time saving state, it is configured to subtract the number of remaining time saving times when the special symbols start to fluctuate. That is, in the time saving state, after the jackpot ends, the number of time saving times becomes 0 at the start of the 100th variable display, so during the execution of the 100th variable display, the time saving state has already ended (shift to normal state completed state). Therefore, whether or not it is in the probability variable state or in the time-saving state is notified by the 99th variable display performance in which the time-saving state of the normal pattern is surely maintained. By configuring in this way, it becomes difficult to identify whether the probability variation state continues until the result of the probability variation continuation suggestion effect is confirmed (that is, it is a time saving state from the operation of the electric accessory 640a It becomes difficult to see whether it is in a probability variable state or not), so the player can be made to pay attention to the game by the probability variable continuation suggestive effect.

As shown in FIG. 392, when the variable probability continuation suggestion effect is started, an effect is executed in which a door 806 appears in front of a character 801 imitating an adventurer. Also, above the door 806, a display area 805 is displayed in which the characters "Door breaking mode start!" Further, the characters displayed between the right-handed images in the display area 803 are changed to "door breaking mode". With these display contents, the player can easily understand that if the character 801 can break through the door, it means that the variable probability state continues. In this probability variable continuation suggestion effect (door breakthrough mode), the effect of adding an attack to the door 806 is executed each time the variable display is executed, and if the door 806 can be finally destroyed (breakthrough), the probability variable state An effect in which the continuation of is notified is executed.

FIG. 393(a) is a diagram showing an effect mode suggesting that the degree of expectation that the probability change state continues is relatively low in the probability change continuation suggestion production (door breakthrough mode). When this low-expectation production mode is executed, as shown in FIG. 393(a), a character 801 imitating an adventurer attacks the door 806 by slashing it with a sword, thereby destroying (breaking through) the door 806. ) is executed. On the other hand, FIG. 393(b) is a diagram showing an effect mode suggesting that the degree of expectation that the probability change state continues is relatively high in the probability change continuation suggestion production (door breakthrough mode). 393(b), a character 801 imitating an adventurer strikes the door 806 with a giant hammer. An effect of trying to destroy (break through) is executed.

Since it is intuitively obvious to many players that hitting with a hammer is more effective than cutting with a sword in order to break the door 806, the effect of hitting with a hammer is more effective. , the player can easily understand that the expectation of breaking through the door 806 is high. Therefore, during the execution of the variable probability continuation suggestive effect, the game can be played in anticipation that the effect of hitting the door 806 with a hammer will be executed more times. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in the first control example, at the start of the probability variable continuation suggestion effect, the lottery result of the 96th to 99th times, which is the execution range of the probability variable continuation suggestion effect, is read in advance, and the probability variable state until the 99th special symbol lottery. It is determined whether or not is continuing, and if the variable probability state continues until the 99th special symbol lottery, the selection rate of the production scenario that is likely to generate high-expectation attack patterns is high. . On the other hand, if the time-saving state has fallen before the 99th special symbol lottery is executed (or the time-saving state was after the end of the previous jackpot), a low-expectation attack pattern occurs. It is configured to increase the selection rate of production scenarios that are easy to play. In this way, by setting the effect mode based on the game state at the end of the effect, it is possible to more accurately notify the game state after the end of the effect.

Here, if it is configured to execute the variable probability continuation suggestion effect only based on the game state at the start of the effect, it falls to a low probability state during the execution of the variable probability continuation suggestion effect, and the continuation of the variable probability state is notified. In spite of this, there is a risk that the time saving state will be terminated with the start of the 100th special symbol lottery. In this case, there is a possibility that the player will have a sense of distrust toward the pachinko machine 10 and the hall due to the contradiction between the content of the performance and the actual action. Also, as a countermeasure, there is a method of configuring the variable probability continuation suggestion production by a production that is completed with one fluctuation, but in this method, it is difficult to ensure a sufficient production period, so there are various production modes. becomes difficult to convert.

On the other hand, in the first control example, it is configured to execute the probability variable continuation suggestion effect over the last four fluctuation displays that guarantee the time saving state of the normal symbol, and the notification content of the probability variable continuation suggestion effect is changed. , It is determined based on the game state at the time when the last special symbol lottery in the execution range of the variable probability continuous effect is executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to diversify the mode of presentation while making it possible to accurately notify the game state at the end of the presentation. In addition, when the probability is variable at the start of the production, and the ball is not held until the end of the production, the production is selected so that an attack pattern with a relatively high degree of expectation is likely to occur. ing. This is because the probability of a lottery result corresponding to the fall is lower than the probability of a big hit, and it is extremely rare to fall into a low probability state of special symbols during the production period (relatively high probability of a variable state) This is because the performance ends immediately).

Next, with reference to FIG. 394, the transition of various states after the end of the variable probability jackpot in the first control example will be described. First, referring to FIG. 394(a), the transition of the state in the case of falling to the low probability state within 100 times after the end of the variable probability jackpot will be described. As shown in FIG. 394 (a), when falling within 100 times, although it shifts to the low probability state of the special design at the time of falling, the lottery of the special design is executed 100 times in the time saving state of the normal design. continue until Then, in the variable probability continuation suggestion effect executed in the 96th to 99th variable display effects, the effect of failing to break through the door 806 is executed, and the transition to the normal state is notified.

On the other hand, FIG. 394(b) is a diagram showing the transition of the state in the case of falling to the low probability state of the special symbol in the lottery of the special symbol 100 times or later after the end of the probability variable jackpot. As shown in FIG. 394(b), when falling after 100 times after the end of the jackpot, the time-saving state of normal symbols and the variable probability state of special symbols are maintained until falling. Therefore, in the variable probability continuation suggestion performance executed over the execution period of the 96th to 99th variable display, the performance of successfully breaking through the door 806 is executed to inform the continuation of the variable probability state.

In addition, in this first control example, as in the case of falling in the special symbol lottery after 100 times, even if the special symbol lottery hits a jackpot during the time saving state of the normal symbol, normal at the start of the fluctuation It is configured to end the time saving state of the pattern. Therefore, when the time saving state is terminated within 100 times of lottery number of special symbols (that is, within the guaranteed number of times of the time saving state), winning of the jackpot is confirmed at that time. On the other hand, when the time saving state is ended after 100 times (that is, after the guaranteed number of times of the time saving state has elapsed), it means that it is either a big hit or a fall. And since the probability of winning the jackpot (1/125) is higher than the probability of falling (1/500), even if the time saving state ends at the start of the fluctuation after 100 times, it will be a jackpot. can be expected. Therefore, since it is possible to play a game while paying attention to whether the time saving state continues, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 395, the press stop effect in the first control example will be described. This pressing stop effect is a effect in which each symbol row is stopped and displayed each time the lens member (PUSH button) 10317 provided on the swing operation member 10310 is pressed. In other words, it is an effect that the player can set the stop timing of each symbol row to any timing according to the player's operation timing of the PUSH button 10317 .

FIG. 395(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 during execution of the press stop effect. 395(a), button images imitating the PUSH button 10317 (left button image 807aL, center button image 807aC, right button image 807aR) is displayed. Also, below each button image, effective period gauges (left effective period gauge 807bL, central effective period gauge 807bC, right effective period gauge 807bR) are displayed to indicate the remaining period during which the stop operation for each symbol row is valid. . With these display contents, the player can easily understand that each symbol row is stopped and displayed each time the PUSH button 10317 is pressed.

FIG. 395(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when the player performs the first operation (pressing) on the PUSH button 10317 during execution of the press stop effect. As shown in FIG. 395(b), when the first operation (pressing) is executed, the left symbol row is stopped and displayed. When the second operation is performed within the operation valid period, the right symbol row is stopped and displayed, and when the third operation is performed, the center symbol row is stopped and displayed. In this way, by allowing the player to arbitrarily determine the symbol stop timing, the player's interest in the game can be enhanced.

In the case where each symbol row is stopped and displayed according to the operation timing of the player, if the player operates too early, there may be too much time left after all the symbol rows are stopped. As a countermeasure against this, in the first control example, when the stop operation is performed three times early (for example, within one second after the start of the effective period), the central symbol row is not immediately stopped and displayed. 2, the stop display of the center symbol row is executed after a specific effect is performed, thereby suppressing the period after the stop display from becoming too long. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 396(a), a plurality of ( 3) symbols move up and down in the central symbol row (i.e. after suggesting that any of the three symbols may be displayed as the stopping symbol in the central symbol row). It is configured to execute an effect (chance charge fan effect) in which symbols other than (chance charge symbol) are stopped and displayed. In this way, depending on the length of the remaining operation effective period at the time of performing the stop operation of the center symbol row (the third depression of the PUSH button 10317), the center symbol row is immediately stopped and displayed, or the chance charge is performed. By adopting a configuration in which it is switched whether to fill up the time by the fanning effect, it is possible to prevent the state in which all the symbol rows are stopped and displayed from becoming unnaturally long. Therefore, a more natural presentation mode can be realized.

In addition, in the first control example, there is also an effect of a pattern in which the chance charge symbol is stopped and displayed in the center symbol row in the press stop effect. In this case, regardless of the timing at which the stop operation is performed on the center symbol row, the chance charge symbols are stop-displayed through the chance charge effect (see FIG. 396(a)). When the stop display of this chance charge symbol occurs, it develops into a chance charge effect (see FIG. 396(b)), which will be described later. By setting an effect pattern in which the chance charge symbol is actually stopped and displayed, even if the operation stop effect is selected as a simple effect of losing the chance charge, even if the chance charge fan effect occurs, there is a possibility that it will develop into a chance charge effect. The player can be made to think that there is Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 396(b) and FIG. 397, an effect mode of the chance charge effect will be described. FIG. 396(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 when the chance charge effect is started. When the chance charge effect is started, a character 801 imitating an adventurer is displayed in the center of the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, and the surroundings are set to emit light (aura). be done. In addition, on the right side of the character 801, a vertically long substantially rectangular spirit gauge KG is displayed. This fighting spirit gauge KG is for displaying the degree of fighting spirit of the character 801 in a meter format, and can be displayed in one to six levels. In addition, in a display area 805 displayed above the character 801, characters such as "The more you get fired up, the more chances you will have" are displayed. Furthermore, the characters “Chance Charge, remaining 5 times” are displayed in the display area 803 . In the chance charge effect 1, the character 801 tries to build up his fighting spirit five times. is signaled by a metered amount of With these display contents, the player can easily understand that there are things that are better the more motivated you are.

FIG. 397(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode at the end of the chance charge effect. As shown in FIG. 397(a), in addition to the size of the light around the character 801 (amount of aura enveloping it) and the meter amount of the kiai gauge KG, characters displayed in the display area 805 also determine how much kiai is accumulated. is reported. In the example of FIG. 397(a), a state in which the spirit is accumulated up to the 5th stage out of 6 stages is illustrated, and the display area 805 displays characters "Charge Level 5!!". These display contents make it possible for the player to easily understand the amount of finally accumulated fighting spirit.

The spirit gauge accumulated in the chance charge effect is consumed to generate some chance-up effect at each timing until the held balls are consumed at the start of the chance charge effect. The chance-up effect is a effect that increases the expectation of a big win, such as a change in the display mode of the number of pending balls, the occurrence of a so-called pseudo-run, the occurrence of a cut-in effect, and the red-letter dialogue. occurrence and the like. It should be noted that the spirit gauge is always consumed until it reaches zero. That is, it is configured so as not to be discarded without being consumed. With this configuration, the player can easily grasp the remaining number of chance-up effects, so that the player can play the game looking forward to what kind of chance-up effect will occur next. . Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Note that, in the first control example, the gauge amount of the spirit gauge KG accumulated in the chance charge effect is mainly determined based on the number of held balls at the start of the chance charge effect. After completion of the chance charge effect, the pace at which the chance-up effect is executed (that is, the spirit gauge is consumed) is variable in consideration of the lottery result of each reserved ball. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce the processing load (the processing load when determining the number of gauges) at the start of the chance charge effect.

FIG. 397(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when the spirit gauge is consumed. FIG. 397(b) exemplifies a case where one gauge of the spirit gauge is consumed and a so-called holding change effect is executed as a chance-up effect. That is, as shown in FIG. 397(b), the gauge amount of the spirit gauge KG is reduced (consumed) by one gauge, and at the same time, the display mode of the third reserved ball number symbol Hz3 in the small area Ds1 changes from white to blue. A production that changes to (increases the degree of expectation) is executed. In this way, by adopting a configuration in which some kind of effect (chance-up effect) is executed to increase the chance of winning as the gauge amount of the spirit gauge KG decreases, it is possible to perform the game at any time while the gauge amount of the spirit gauge KG remains. , the game can be played looking forward to what kind of chance-up effect will occur next. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 398, the change over time of the display mode (effect mode) in the variable display effect in which the pressing stop effect is set will be described. First, referring to FIG. 398(a), in the pressing stop effect that does not develop into a chance charge effect, when the third stop operation (stop operation for the middle symbol row) is executed after 1 second from the start of the valid period. A description will be given of the change over time of the presentation mode of . As shown in FIG. 398(a), when the variable display is executed in which only the press stop effect is set (that is, the chance charge effect is not executed), normal A variable display (simply a variable display in which each symbol row fluctuates in the vertical direction at high speed) is executed, and when 6 seconds have passed, the press stop effect (see FIG. 395(a)) is started. Then, when the third stop operation is executed after 1 second from the start of the effective period of the pressing stop effect (when 2 seconds have passed in the example of FIG. 398(a)), the already stopped left symbol column , and in addition to the right symbol row, the center symbol row is pseudo-stopped. It should be noted that the pseudo stop display means that display is performed in a manner that is difficult to distinguish from the final stop display (for example, a manner in which vibration is performed with extremely small amplitude). This pseudo-stop continues until the stop display timing of the original variable display (the timing of receiving the stop command from the main controller 110), and each symbol row is completely stopped and displayed at the stop display timing.

Next, referring to FIG. 398(b), in the pressing stop effect that does not develop into a chance charge effect, the third stop operation (stop operation for the middle symbol row) is executed within 1 second or less from the start of the valid period. A description will be given of the change over time of the effect mode when the player is shown. As shown in FIG. 398(b), when the variable display in which only the press stop effect is set (that is, the chance charge effect is not executed) is executed, the normal The variable display is executed, and when 6 seconds have passed, the press stop effect (see FIG. 395(a)) is started. Then, when the third stop operation is performed within a range of 1 second or less (0.5 seconds after the example in FIG. 398(b)) from the start of the effective period of the press stop effect, the chance charge effect is performed. After (see FIG. 396(a)) is executed, an effect is executed in which the combination of winning symbols is stop-displayed at the stop display timing. As a result, even if the stop operation is executed three times at a relatively early stage after the start of the valid period, the period until the stop display can be connected (filled) by the chance charge fanning effect, so that the missing symbol. It is possible to show the transition of the presentation mode up to the stop display of , in a natural form. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with an effect mode that causes less discomfort.

Next, with reference to FIG. 398(c), the change over time of the presentation mode when developing into the chance charge presentation will be described. As shown in FIG. 398(c), even when the chance charge effect develops, the transition of the effect mode is the same as when the chance charge effect is not executed until the press stop effect is executed. Then, in the variable display in which the chance charge effect is set, when the stop operation is executed three times in the press stop effect, the chance charge boost effect (Fig. 396(a)) is performed regardless of the timing of the third stop operation. ) is generated, and after that, when 10 seconds have passed since the start of the fluctuation, it develops into a chance charge effect.

As described above, in the first control example, even in the variable display in which only the press stop effect is set, the chance charge effect can be executed depending on the end timing of the stop operation, so the chance charge effect is executed. It is possible to hold the expectation for more times. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 399 to FIG. 401, an interruption continuous hit effect, which is a type of entertainment effect in the first control example, will be described. This interrupting continuous hit effect is a display mode effect as if a different mode of effect from the display effect that had been displayed until then suddenly interrupted during normal variable display or reach fluctuation. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 399(a), the image of the normal variable display effect is displayed by executing the continuous interrupt effect during execution of the normal variable display effect (see FIG. 389(b)). (on the front layer), a cut-in area CR is formed (displayed) in which the face of the monster is displayed in close-up. That is, as shown in FIG. 399(a), a display area (cut-in area CR) formed in a belt shape extending downward from the upper left side to the lower right side on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is displayed. . As shown in FIG. 399(a), this cut-in region CR occupies about 70% of the display area of the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, and a monster is modeled in the central portion of the cut-in region CR. The displayed image is enlarged. In addition, a display area 805 displaying characters "Monster Group Assault!!" is displayed (formed) above the image simulating a monster in the cut-in area CR. From these display contents, the player can easily understand that an effect completely different from the effect executed before the cut-in area CR is displayed (interrupted) has been executed. can be made While the cut-in area CR is being formed (that is, while the interrupt repeated hitting effect is being executed), the display effect being executed immediately before is interrupted. That is, the display effect of the layer on the back side of the cut-in area CR is all temporarily stopped, and the effect mode is restarted from the state at the time of interruption when the interrupt continuous hit effect ends. Note that audio (music) can be paused (interrupted) or continued depending on the situation. In this first control example, when the continuous hit effect is executed during normal variable display, both the display mode and the sound mode are controlled so as to be interrupted until the continuous hit effect ends. Only the display mode is interrupted when the interruption continuous hit effect is executed after the reach occurs (while the reach is fluctuating). This is because more flashy music (BGM) is played after the occurrence of ready-to-win as compared to during execution of normal variable display. It is intended to prevent them from being caught.

After the cut-in region CR in which images imitating monsters and the like are displayed by executing the interrupt continuous hitting effect, the player is urged to continuously press the PUSH button 10317 (continuous hitting). A display mode is displayed. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 399(b), a button image BG imitating the PUSH button 10317 is displayed in the cut-in region CR, and a message indicating that the operation of the PUSH button 10317 is valid is displayed below the button image BG. A gauge image GG showing the remaining period of time in a gauge format is displayed. In addition, above the button image BG, the characters "Consecutive hits" and an image of three arrows facing the PUSH button image BG are displayed. In addition, a display area 805 displays the text "Reduce the number of monsters with repeated hits!" Is displayed. With these display contents, the player can easily understand that the number of monsters can be reduced by pressing the PUSH button 10317 within the continuous hit valid period.

In this first control example, as the types of interrupt barrage effects, a plurality of types are provided that differ in at least the number of monsters that can be reduced during the barrage valid period (the lower limit of the number of remaining monsters to be displayed). It is And basically, it is configured so that the more monsters are subjugated (the number of remaining monsters is reduced), the higher the expected jackpot is. More specifically, in the case where an interrupt continuous hitting effect is set for the variable display of the jackpot, a type of effect that makes it possible to subdue all 100 monsters (reset the number of remaining monsters to 0). While the mode can be selected, it is configured so that it is impossible to reduce the number of monsters to 0 (the number of monsters can only be reduced to 3 at maximum) in the non-variable display.

In addition, in this first control example, the number of monsters subjugated (subtracted) by pressing the PUSH button 10317 once is configured to vary according to the length of the remaining effective period. More specifically, the longer the remaining valid period is, the smaller the number of kills (the number of subtractions) by pressing once. By configuring in this way, even when a player with a fast pace of repeated hits is playing a game, it is possible to prevent the number of monsters from being reduced to the lower limit early after the start of the effect.

Here, conventionally, as a kind of entertainment effect, an operation effect is known in which an operation means such as an operation button is continuously operated for a predetermined period to change the effect mode. In this operation effect, the upper limit of the number of times the effect mode is variable (number of times of development) is generally set for each effect, and when the number of times of operation reaches a specific number, the mode of development is variable up to the upper limit. Things were normal. However, in the production of such specifications, when a player with a fast operation speed is playing a game, the upper limit level of the production is developed (variable) early, so the upper limit level is low. There is a problem that there is a possibility that the interest of the player may be spoiled when the stage is to indicate . Furthermore, when a player whose operation speed is slow is playing a game, even though the player is actively performing the operation, the operation is performed before the predetermined number of operations for developing to the upper limit development mode. There is a possibility that the valid period will expire and the interest of the player will be spoiled.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example, the number of monsters to be subdued (subtracted) by one depression is varied according to the length of the remaining valid period, and the longer the remaining valid period, the more Since it is configured so that the number of subjugated monsters is reduced, even if the button is pressed at a fast pace, it is possible to prevent the number of monsters from being subjugated at an early stage up to the minimum number of monsters. In other words, it is possible to prevent the decrease of the number of monsters based on the depression of the remaining 10 bodies or the remaining 4 bodies, which are likely to be set in the case of losing, from being stopped and the player's expectation for the big win being spoiled. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved. In addition, even when a player whose pressing pace is slow is playing a game, pressing in the latter half of the continuous hitting effective period makes it easier to select a relatively large number of subjugations, so that the lower limit number of monsters can be reached. can make it more likely. Therefore, even a player whose pressing pace is slow can be entertained with the continuous interrupt effect, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, referring to FIG. 400(a), in an effect in which continuous operation of the PUSH button 10317 is effective, such as an interrupting repeated hit effect, an operation (pressing) of the PUSH button 10317 is performed within the continuous hit effective period of the effect. A description will be given of the output mode of the sound that is output each time it is detected. As shown in FIG. 400(a), each time a push (operation) on the PUSH button 10317 is detected during the repeated hitting valid period, the voice output device 226 (see FIG. 423), which will be described later, is activated to reproduce voice data. Audio data corresponding to pressing is reproduced for either CN2 or CN3 among the plurality of provided channels. More specifically, when the pressing is detected for the first time in the repeated hitting valid period, the first voice data (first repeated hitting sound) is reproduced for CN2. As shown in FIG. 400(a), the sound data corresponding to the first repeated hitting sound is composed of sound data that outputs a sound of "busy" when reproduced. Further, when the second depression is detected in the repeated hitting valid period, the second voice data (second repeated hitting sound) is reproduced for CN3. The sound data corresponding to this second repeated hitting sound is composed of sound data that outputs a sound of "bushi-ooh" when reproduced, as shown in FIG. 400(a). Thereafter, every time a depression is detected, the control for reproducing the audio data corresponding to the first repeated tapping sound for CN2 and the control for reproducing the audio data corresponding to the second repeated tapping sound for CN3 are alternately performed. is repeated to In this way, by outputting audio data corresponding to a different sound each time a depression is detected, it is possible to diversify the audio mode during continuous hitting. In other words, since it is possible to prevent the voice mode from becoming monotonous, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game during the repeated hitting valid period. Also, in the case of a configuration in which the first repeated sound and the second repeated sound are simply played alternately on a single channel (that is, control is performed to stop the output of one sound during reproduction and output the other sound). ), it is possible to output one sound while maintaining the output state of the other sound (the first repeated sound and the second repeated sound are output in duplicate). Therefore, it is possible to make the voice mode more lively during execution of repeated hits. More specifically, in a configuration in which the first repeated hit sound and the second repeated hit sound are alternately reproduced in a single channel, when a player who has a short interval between repeated hits performs the repeated hit operation, the leading portion of each sound data This results in a monotonous voice mode in which only the voices are alternately repeated. On the other hand, if a plurality of audio data are sequentially reproduced on a plurality of channels, the output of one audio data reproduced on one channel is not interrupted, and other audio data is reproduced on other channels. can be played. That is, it is possible to synthesize and output a sound based on one sound data and a sound based on another sound data. Therefore, since it is possible to easily output sounds other than the beginning part of each sound, it is possible to further diversify the sound modes. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in this first control example, each time the push button 10317 is pressed, two types of audio data are alternately reproduced on two channels, thereby diversifying the audio mode. The configuration is not limited to this, and three or more types of audio data may be alternately reproduced in order on CN1 and CN2. This makes it possible to further diversify voice modes. In this case, the number of channels for reproducing the audio data is not limited to two, and the audio data may be sequentially reproduced for three or more channels. By configuring in this way, after one audio data is reproduced for one channel, until the next audio data is reproduced for the same channel (the audio data being reproduced is terminated). can be made longer, it is possible to further diversify the voice modes. Furthermore, the type of the audio data to be output may be changed according to the interval of successive hits. Specifically, for example, when a player is playing a game with a relatively short interval between consecutive hits (for example, 0.5 seconds or less), three types of sound modes are reproduced in order on three channels. On the other hand, when a player is playing a game with a relatively long interval between consecutive hits (for example, an interval longer than 0.5 seconds), two types of audio data are sent to two channels in order. It may be configured to reproduce (alternately). By configuring in this way, it is possible to vary the output mode of the sound according to the interval of successive hits, so that it is possible to realize the playability of adjusting the interval of repeated hits. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.

In the first control example, it is configured to output one of the repeated hitting sounds in conjunction with the repeated hitting operation. . More specifically, for example, if the last repeated hit sound output during the effective period of the repeated hit operation is the first repeated hit sound, the second repeated hit sound may be output after the end of the repeated hit sound. With this configuration, although the first repeated hitting sound and the second repeated hitting sound are output as a set according to the repeated hitting operation, the last output sound is the first repeated hitting sound. (That is, the paired second repeated hitting sound is not output), and it is possible to prevent the voice mode from becoming incomplete. Therefore, the voice mode can be set more appropriately. In this case, if the last repeated hitting sound is the first repeated hitting sound, the control to output the second repeated hitting sound after the end is changed to a variation display ( For example, it may be configured to be set only during the execution of the jackpot variation). By constructing in this way, for the player who desires to know whether or not it is a predetermined variation type, the last continuous hitting sound to be output during the interrupt continuous hitting effect is dared to be the first repeated hitting sound. It is possible to realize the playability. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the first control example, the first repeated hit sound and the second repeated hit sound are alternately output regardless of the interval between repeated hits by the player, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured such that the first repeated hitting sound is always output when the repeated hitting operation is detected while no sound is being reproduced. That is, if the interval between repeated hits is too long and the next repeated hit operation is executed after the reproduction of the first repeated hit sound is completed, only the first repeated hit sound will continue to be output. may be configured. By constructing in this way, a player who desires to diversify the voice modes can be made to perform the continuous hitting operation at a faster pace, so that the player's willingness to participate in the interruption continuous hitting performance can be improved. be able to.

Next, with reference to FIG. 400(b), the correspondence relationship between the press timing in the continuous hitting valid period of the interrupt continuous hitting effect and the subtraction number of the monster will be described. In the example of FIG. 400, a description will be given by taking as an example the correspondence relationship in the type of interrupt continuous hitting effect that enables subjugation of up to 100 monsters. FIG. 400(b) is a graph showing the correspondence relationship between the elapsed time (horizontal axis) at the time when the depression of the PUSH button 10317 is detected and the number of monsters defeated (vertical axis). As shown in FIG. 400(b), the later the pressing timing is, the more monsters are subtracted (killed). As a result, even if the player presses the PUSH button 10317 at a fast pace, it is possible to prevent the number of monsters from being quickly defeated to the minimum number. In other words, it is possible to prevent the decrease of the number of monsters based on the depression of the remaining 10 bodies or the remaining 4 bodies, which are likely to be set in the case of losing, from being stopped and the player's expectation for the big win being spoiled. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved. In addition, even when a player whose pressing pace is slow is playing a game, pressing in the latter half of the continuous hitting effective period makes it easier to select a relatively large number of subjugations, so that the lower limit number of monsters can be reached. can make it more likely. Therefore, even a player whose pressing pace is slow can be entertained with the continuous interrupt effect, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Note that the correspondence relationship between the pressing timing and the subtraction number of the monster is not limited to that shown in FIG. 400(b), and can be determined arbitrarily. Specifically, for example, by reducing the inclination (for example, halving) of the corresponding relationship shown in FIG. can make it more difficult to subtract monsters until Therefore, it is possible to make the player perform the repeated hits more seriously, so that the player's willingness to participate in the interrupt repeated hits effect can be further improved. On the other hand, if the slope is increased, it is relatively easy to reduce the number of monsters until the number of monsters reaches the minimum number by repeated hits. It becomes possible to easily confirm. Therefore, even a player who is not good at repeated hits can be made to actively participate in the interrupt repeated hit effect. In addition, in the first control example, the correspondence relationship between the pressing timing and the subtraction number of the monster was configured to be a proportional relationship (linear function). A designer's arbitrary correspondence can be set, such as a correspondence or an exponential correspondence. Further, the correspondence relationship may be configured to be different according to the effect type of the interrupt repeated hit effect. By configuring in this way, it is possible to realize a game property in which the player can predict the degree of expectation for a big win even from the transition of the subtraction number in repeated hits, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 401, a description will be given of changes over time in the effect mode during the execution of the variable display effect in which the continuous interrupt effect is set. First, with reference to FIG. 401(a), the change over time of the effect mode during execution of the variable display effect in which the repeated interrupt effect is not executed will be described. As shown in FIG. 401(a), when the variable effect in which the interrupt continuous hit effect is not set is executed, the normal variable display is executed for 10 seconds. Then, while the normal variable display is being executed, the variable display BGM (music 1) corresponding to the normal variable display is loop-reproduced. This song 1 has three melody parts, A part, B part, and C part. is configured to

Then, as shown in FIG. 401(a), normal reach occurs after 10 seconds have passed, and the display mode changes to the variable display mode of normal reach. When this normal reach occurs, as shown in FIG. 401(a), the sound is switched to BGM (music 2) corresponding to normal reach variation. Similarly to the music piece 1, the music piece 2 is also loop-reproduced so that the reproduction time is set so as to end in time with the normal reach effect.

On the other hand, in the variable display effect in which the interrupt continuous hit effect occurs before the normal reach effect occurs, as shown in FIG. , The normal variable display effect is interrupted, and the interrupt continuous hit effect is started (interrupted). When the interrupt continuous hit effect is executed, not only the display mode (normal variable display effect) but also the sound (normal variable display BGM) is interrupted. Then, when 9 seconds have passed since the start of the fluctuation (when 7 seconds have passed since the start of the interrupt repeated hitting effect), the interrupt repeated hitting effect is ended, and the normal changing display effect and the changing display BGM are resumed from the interruption point. After that, at the timing when 17 seconds have passed since the start of the fluctuation, the normal fluctuation display ends and the normal reach occurs. That is, normal reach occurs after the normal variable display is performed for a total of 10 seconds. After progressing to normal reach, the transition of the display mode is the same as that in the variable display in which the interrupt continuous hit effect is not set (see FIG. 401(a)), so the description thereof will be omitted here.

In addition, in the variable display effect in which the interrupt continuous hit effect occurs after the normal ready-to-win effect occurs, as shown in FIG. Up to this point, it is the same as the transition of the display mode of the variable display effect in which the interrupt continuous hit effect is not set (see FIG. 401(a)). Then, when 5 seconds have passed since the development to the normal ready-to-win effect, the normal ready-to-win effect is interrupted, and the interruption repeated hitting effect is executed for 7 seconds. Then, when the continuous hitting effect for 7 seconds ends, the interrupted normal ready-to-win effect is resumed. It should be noted that, when the interruption continuous hit effect is executed after the occurrence of the reach, only the display mode is interrupted, and the voice output mode is maintained as it is. In other words, while maintaining the reproduction of the BGM for the ready-to-win effect, the BGM for the repeated interrupt effect is reproduced in other channels (eg, CN2 to CN4). By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the relatively lively BGM for the ready-to-win effect from being suddenly interrupted and making the player feel uncomfortable.

In addition, in this first control example, as the types of fluctuations in which normal reach occurs, normal reach with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds (missing normal reach A, hit normal reach A) and normal reach with a fluctuation time of 37 seconds (missing normal reach B, hit normal reach B ) are provided. That is, different variation types with different variation times are set for 7 seconds, which is the effect time of the interrupt continuous hit effect. Then, the execution of the continuous interrupt effect is determined by lottery only in the case of a variation type with a variation time of 37 seconds. By configuring in this way, by combining the production mode (30-second production mode) that can be set for the variation pattern of 30 seconds and the production mode of the continuous interrupting production, the variation time is exactly 37 seconds. can be filled. That is, since there is no need to provide a dedicated effect mode when the interrupt continuous hit effect is set, display data and sound data can be reduced. Therefore, the storage capacity of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced. Similarly, for the variation type that does not generate reach, and the variation type that develops to super reach, multiple types with different variation times of 7 seconds are set. It is configured so that it can be set only for As a result, the storage capacity of the pachinko machine 10 can be increased because the variation time that is longer by 7 seconds can be filled just by combining the performance mode that can be selected in the variation type that is shorter by 7 seconds and the performance mode of the continuous interrupting performance. It is possible to suitably execute the production without

Here, although the details will be described later, in this first control example, along with the execution of the special symbol lottery, the fluctuation time of the first symbol for indicating the special symbol lottery result is determined by lottery in the main controller 110. Then, the determined variation time is notified to the sound lamp control device 113 by a variation pattern command. Then, the voice lamp control device 113 selects the variable display effect of the effect period that matches the variable time notified by the variable pattern command, synchronizes with the variable display of the first pattern, and the variable display effect of the third pattern. is configured to execute The variation pattern command output from the main controller 110 is composed of a basic time command indicating a basic variation time and an additional time command indicating an additional variation time. Whether or not is notified by an additional time command. More specifically, when a variation pattern of a variation time of 30 seconds is determined, a command corresponding to 30 seconds is notified as a basic time command, and a command corresponding to 0 seconds is issued as an additional variation time. be notified. On the other hand, when a variation pattern with a variation time of 37 seconds is determined, a command corresponding to 30 seconds is notified as the basic time command, and a command corresponding to 7 seconds is notified as the additional variation time. . In other words, it is configured to be able to identify whether or not it is a variation type longer by 7 seconds depending on the notification content of the additional time command. As a result, it is possible to determine whether or not the change type is a lottery target for whether or not to execute the interrupt continuous hitting effect, simply by confirming the content of the additional time command. Further, when it is decided to execute the interrupt continuous hit effect, the variable time can be filled by setting the effect mode corresponding to the variable time notified by the basic time command (the variable time shorter by 7 seconds). can. Therefore, it is possible to easily match the end timing of the performance mode with the end timing of the variable display performance without preparing a performance mode dedicated to the interrupt continuous hitting performance, so that a suitable performance mode can be provided.

Next, with reference to FIG. 402 to FIG. 403, the pending batch change effect, which is a type of interest effect in the first control example, will be described. This pending collective change effect is an effect that may be executed when there are a plurality of pending balls. It is an effect that changes to a highly anticipated display mode based on the operation of . In FIGS. 402 to 403, there are four reserved balls, and the second reserved ball number pattern Hz2 is changed to a blue display mode, and the third reserved ball number pattern Hz3 is changed to a green display mode. , the case where the pending collective change effect is executed will be described as an example. It should be noted that the display mode of the number of pending ball symbols is configured so that the expectation of a big win increases in the order of white, blue, green, and red. The display mode of the number of pending balls is basically, when the start winning (entering the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640) is detected, various types acquired based on the starting winning It is determined based on a random value (counter value). In more detail, from the various random values obtained at the time of the start winning, predict in advance (read ahead) whether the special symbol lottery will be executed and the type of fluctuation, and according to the prediction result (read ahead result) At the selected lottery probability, a lottery is made to determine which display mode the reserved ball number pattern is to be set. In this lottery, control is performed such that the higher the prospective result corresponding to the lottery result with the higher degree of expectation, the higher the percentage of the number of pending balls symbols set in the form of the higher degree of expectation. It should be noted that the timing of the start winning is variable according to the game situation of the player (pace of game ball launch, etc.), so the pending collective change effect is executed independently of the variable display effect. . In other words, it is an effect that may be executed over a plurality of variable display effect fluctuation periods (possibly within one fluctuation period).

FIG. 402(a) is a diagram showing a display mode at the time when the pending collective change effect is executed. This pending collective change effect may be executed when a plurality of pending balls are present at the time when a new start winning prize is detected. When the pending collective change effect is executed, first, a pending change character HC suggesting the start of the pending collective change effect is framed in from the top of the display screen. As shown in FIG. 402(a), this hold change character HC is displayed in a manner that imitates the PUSH button 10317 in the part corresponding to the face. This display mode of the pending change character HC can suggest to the player in advance that the effect of pressing the PUSH button 10371 will be executed.

After the pending change character HC appears (into the frame), as shown in FIG. 402(b), all of the pending ball symbols Hz1 to Hz4 are changed to a rock-like display mode. That is, the degree of expectation indicated by the number of pending balls pattern (the display color of the number of pending balls pattern) is temporarily changed to a hidden state. Moreover, a balloon image FG imitating a balloon is displayed above the hold change character HC, and inside the balloon image FG, a character saying "Press button PUSH to increase hold rank!?" is displayed. With this display mode, the player can easily understand that the degree of expectation (display color) of one of the reserved ball number symbols is improved by pressing the PUSH button 10317. can.

FIG. 403(a) is a diagram showing a display mode when the player presses the PUSH button 10317 during execution of the pending collective change effect. As shown in FIG. 403( a ), when the player presses the PUSH button 10317 , the rocks around all the pending ball patterns that have been changed to a rock-like display mode pop off, and the normal held balls are displayed. An effect of returning to the display mode of several symbols is executed. In addition, at this time, the degree of expectation indicated by at least a part of the reserved number of balls symbols increases compared to before the occurrence of the reserved collective change effect. In the example of FIG. 403(a), the second reserved ball number pattern Hz2, which had been set to the blue display mode before execution of the pending collective change effect, was changed to the red display mode through the pending collective change effect. indicates the case.

By executing this pending collective change effect, it is confirmed that the degree of expectation indicated by at least one pending ball number symbol is increased, so that the player's sense of expectation for the big win can be improved. In addition, since it is not known until the PUSH button 10317 is pressed, which pattern of the number of pending balls will change (increase in the degree of expectation), the operation on the PUSH button 10317 will be fun to see which pattern of the number of pending balls will change. can be done. Furthermore, since the degree of expectation is notified by pressing the PUSH button 10317, the notification timing can be adjusted to the player's favorite timing. Therefore, convenience for the player can be improved.

FIG. 403(b) shows a state in which the suspension change character HC (mini character) fades out of the screen during the effective period of the suspension collective change effect. When the pending change character HC fades out to the outside of the screen, even if the operation valid period in the pending collective change performance remains, the valid period is interrupted. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 403(b), even if the player presses the PUSH button 10317, an effect (see FIG. 403(a)) in which the degree of expectation of each reserved ball number symbol changes is executed. no. This effect in which the mini character is absent is executed, for example, when another operation effect involving the operation of the PUSH button 10317 conflicts with the pending collective change effect. The absence of the pending change character HC corresponding to the pending collective change effect makes it possible for the player to easily understand that the valid operation period is temporarily interrupted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling dissatisfied with the fact that the operation of the PUSH button 10317 is misunderstood as effective in the pending batch change effect and the effect does not develop. Therefore, it is possible to realize a more suitable presentation mode.

<Electrical Configuration in First Control Example>
Next, referring to FIG. 404, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 404 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are incorporated. In addition, various commands are transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the sub-controllers such as the payout controller 111 and the sound lamp controller 113 to operate. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

The main controller 110 executes major processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as a jackpot lottery, setting of display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of the display result in the second symbol display device 83. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer (see FIG. 405) that stores various counters for controlling these processes.

Here, with reference to FIG. 405, counters and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described. These counters and the like are used by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 in order to set the jackpot lottery, the display settings of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the lottery of the display result of the second symbol display device 83, and the like. used in

For setting the jackpot lottery and the display of the first pattern display device 37 and the third pattern display device 81, a special hit random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery, a special hit type counter C2 used for selecting the jackpot pattern, A stop type counter C3 used for selecting a stop type, a falling lottery counter C4 used for a falling lottery from a probability variable state of special symbols, a variation type counter CS1 used for selecting a variation pattern, and a special winning random number counter. An initial value random number counter CINI1 used to set the initial value of C1 is used. In addition, a normal winning random number counter C5 is used for lottery of normal symbols (second symbol display device 83), and a normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the normal winning random number counter C5. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 425), and some counters are updated irregularly during the main processing (see FIG. 434). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 . The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a consisting of four reserved areas (first to fourth reserved areas). Each value of the special winning random number counter C1, the special winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the falling lottery counter C4, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in accordance with the timing. In addition, the RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b consisting of four reserved areas (first to fourth reserved areas). Each value of the special winning random number counter C1, the special winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the drop lottery counter C4, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in accordance with the timing of entering the ball. In addition, the RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol reserved ball execution area, and a special winning random number counter C1, a special winning type counter C2, a stop type selection counter C3, a falling lottery counter C4, and a variable Each value of the type counter CS1 is stored. Further, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c consisting of one execution area and four reserved areas (first to fourth reserved areas). The value of the normal winning random number counter C5 is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through the normal entrance (through gate) 67. - 特許庁

Each counter will be described in detail. The special hit random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 999), and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 999 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 999). It is configured to return. In particular, when the special winning random number counter C1 makes one cycle, the value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the special winning random number counter C1.

The initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the special winning random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the special winning random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0-999, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter that ranges from 0-999. This initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 425) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 434).

The value of the special hit random number counter C1 is, for example, periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), and when the game ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the value It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM203. On the other hand, when the game ball enters the second ball entrance 640, the value is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b.

The value of the random number for the special symbol jackpot is set by the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 407(a)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the special symbol random number counter C1 is If the value of the random number for the big hit set by the special symbol big hit random number table 202a matches, it is determined as the special symbol big hit. In addition, this special symbol jackpot random number table 202a is for when the probability of special symbols is low (a period in which the probability of special symbols is low), and when the probability of winning a special symbol is high (special The number of random numbers to be a big hit included in each type is set differently (see FIG. 407(a)). In this way, by varying the number of random numbers that result in a big win, the probability of a big win is changed between when the probability of special symbols is low and when the probability of special symbols is high.

The special winning type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol jackpot is won, and is incremented one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). , and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take values from 0 to 99). The value of the special hit type counter C2, for example, is periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), and when the game ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the value is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 (special symbol reserved ball execution area when the special symbol lottery is not being executed). On the other hand, when the game ball enters the second ball entrance 640, the value is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 (if the special symbol lottery is not being executed, the special symbol reserved ball execution area ).

Here, if the value of the special winning random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol reserved ball execution area is not a random number that will result in a special symbol jackpot, that is, if it is a random number that will result in an omission of the special symbol, display the first symbol. The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the device 37 is the one when the special symbol is out.

On the other hand, if the value of the special winning random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol reserved ball execution area is a random number for a special symbol jackpot, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37. will be the one at the time of the special pattern jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the special winning type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Become.

The special winning random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter ranging from 0 to 999. FIG. In this special winning random number counter C1, there are four random numbers that become a special symbol jackpot when the probability of special symbols is low, and the random numbers "0 to 3" are the special symbol jackpot random number table for when the probability is low. (see FIG. 407(a)). In this way, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that will be a big hit is 4 among the total number of random numbers of 1000, so the probability that the special symbol will be a big hit is "1/250". It should be noted that the random number value (counter value) to be a big hit is common to the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol.

On the other hand, when the probability of special symbols is high, there are 8 random numbers that will be the special symbol jackpot, and the values "4 to 11" are stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability ( Figure 407(a)). In this way, when the probability of special symbols is high, the total number of random numbers that will be a big hit is 8 among the total number of random numbers of 1000, so the probability of a big win of special symbols is "1/125".

Further, the value of the special winning type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a loop counter within the range of 0-99. Then, as shown in FIG. 408(b), when the lottery of the first special symbol results in a big hit and the value of the special winning type counter C2 is "0 to 9", the jackpot type is "jackpot A" (15 Round probability variation jackpot). In addition, when the value is "10 to 49", the jackpot type is "jackpot B" (5 round probability variable jackpot), and when the value is "50 to 99", the jackpot type is "jackpot C". (5 rounds normal jackpot).

On the other hand, when the second special symbol lottery results in a big hit and the value of the special winning type counter C2 is "0 to 79", the jackpot type is "jackpot D" (15 round probability variable jackpot). Also, when the value is "80 to 99", the jackpot type is "jackpot E" (15-round normal jackpot).

Thus, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment selects one jackpot type out of five jackpot types (jackpots A to E) according to the type of special symbol and the value of the random number indicated by the special hit type counter C2. configured to be determined.

The stop type selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by one within a range of 0 to 250, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 250). In this embodiment, the stop type of the stop symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is selected by the stop type selection counter C3. As the stop type, for example, after the occurrence of the reach, the final stop symbol is shifted to the front or back of the reach symbol by one and stops, "front and back reach", or after the occurrence of the reach, the final stop symbol is before or after the reach symbol. "Reach other than front and rear out" that stops at other than, "Complete out" that does not generate reach, etc. are selected. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is, for example, periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), and when a game ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the value is stored in the RAM 203. is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a (special symbol reserved ball execution area when special symbol lottery is not being executed). Also, when the game ball enters the second ball entrance 640, the value is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 (special symbol reserved ball execution area when the special symbol lottery is not being executed). Stored.

The fluctuation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). Rough display modes such as so-called normal reach and super reach are determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1. Determination of the display mode is, specifically, determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the variation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the reach type of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the detailed symbol variation mode are determined by the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. be. The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the main process (see FIG. 434), which will be described later, is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process. It should be noted that the variation pattern table 202b (see FIG. 409(a)) storing a random number value for determining one variation time of symbol variation from the value (random number value) of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. is provided in

Next, with reference to FIGS. 409 and 410, the variation pattern selection table 202b used when main controller 110 selects a variation pattern will be described. FIG. 409(a) is a diagram showing the configuration of the fluctuation pattern selection table 202b. As shown in FIG. 409(a), the variation pattern selection table 202b in the first control example is a symbol variation for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol when the lottery of the special symbol is executed in the normal state. Normal table 202b1 referred to for determining the variation time and the game state (probability variation state and time reduction state) in which the normal symbol time reduction state is set When the special symbol lottery is executed, the symbol variation It is configured at least with a table 202b2 for probability variation/time reduction that is referred to for determining the variation time.

First, the normal table 202b1 will be described with reference to FIG. 409(b). FIG. 409(b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of this normal table 202b1. In this normal table 202b1, various variation patterns are defined corresponding to the lottery results of special symbols, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 and the variation type counter CS1 and values are assigned. Also, if the result of the determination is a hit, the variation pattern corresponding to the determined jackpot type (jackpot type determined from the jackpot type selection table 202d by the value of the acquired special hit type counter C2) is set. Specifically, the special symbol type (symbol type) is the first special symbol (special symbol 1), the success/failure determination result is a jackpot, and the value of the acquired stop type selection counter C3 is "0 to 50". When the obtained value of the variation type selection counter CS1 is "0 to 180", normal reach A is defined as a variation pattern with a variation time of 30 seconds. When the hit normal reach A is determined, a combination command indicating a basic time of 30 seconds and an additional time of 0 seconds is output as a variation pattern command. Since the additional time is 0 seconds, when the hit normal reach A is notified to the sound lamp control device 113, as described above, the interrupt continuous hit effect (see FIG. 399) is not executed. Also, when the value of the acquired stop type selection counter C3 is "0 to 50" and the value of the acquired variation type selection counter CS1 is "181 to 198", the variation pattern is 37 seconds per normal reach B is stipulated. When the hit normal reach B is determined, a combination command indicating a basic time of 30 seconds and an additional time of 7 seconds is output as a variation pattern command. Since the additional time is 7 seconds, when the hit normal reach B is notified to the sound lamp control device 113, as described above, a lottery is drawn as to whether or not the interrupt continuous hit effect (see FIG. 399) can be executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 409(b), the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is "51 to 250", and the value of the variation type selection counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 150". , a super reach A per variation time of 60 seconds is defined, and a super reach B per variation time of 67 seconds is defined in the range of the value of the variation type selection counter CS1 from "151 to 198". In winning super reach A, since the additional time is 0 seconds, there is no possibility of execution of the interrupt continuous hit effect, while in winning super reach B, an additional time command indicating that the additional time is 7 seconds is voiced. Since the notification is sent to the lamp control device 113, a lottery is drawn as to whether or not the interrupt continuous hit effect can be executed.

Similarly, when the symbol type is special figure 1 and the success/failure determination result is out, as shown in FIG. A variation pattern is defined in which a variation time of 8 seconds to 67 seconds is set. Even in the case of deviation, in the variation pattern in which the additional time command corresponding to the additional time of 7 seconds is specified, the execution of the interrupt continuous hit effect is randomly selected in the voice lamp control device 113, while the additional time of 0 seconds. In the variation pattern in which the additional time command corresponding to is stipulated, the interrupt repeated hit effect is not executed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 409 (b), if the symbol type is special figure 2, the result of the hit/fail judgment is hit (jackpot D, jackpot E), the value of the stop type selection counter C3, and the variation type selection counter Regardless of the value of CS1, long fluctuation A with a fluctuation time of 150 seconds is defined as a fluctuation pattern, and if the result of the judgment is wrong, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 and the value of the fluctuation type selection counter CS1 An off-long variation with a variation time of 150 seconds is specified, regardless of the value. This is because, in the normal state, the distribution of the jackpot is advantageous (that is, the ratio of the probability variable jackpot is high), and when the player hits to the right to execute the lottery for the second special symbol, the game efficiency is deteriorated. This is intended to suppress an irregular game method in which the player hits to the right normally.

Next, with reference to FIG. 410, the defined contents of the table 202b2 for variable probability/reduction of working hours will be described. Also in the probability variation / time saving table 202b2, as shown in FIG. 410, various variation patterns are set in correspondence with the lottery result of the special symbol, and for each of the variation patterns, the stop type selection counter C3 and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 are allocated. In addition, in the probability variation / time saving table 202b2, relative to the normal table 202b1, it is easy to set a relatively short variation time, and the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery Common variation time Since the only difference is that it is configured to select , a detailed description thereof will be omitted here. By structuring such that a short variable time can be easily set, during the probability variable state in which the time saving state of normal patterns is set and the time saving state, the lottery of special patterns can be executed more efficiently than other game states. can do.

Returning to FIG. 405, the description continues. The normal hit random number counter C5 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by one within the range of 0 to 239, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the normal winning random number counter C5 completes one cycle, the value of the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the normal winning random number counter C5. In the present embodiment, the value of the normal random number counter C5 is updated, for example, periodically for each timer interrupt process, and is acquired when it is detected that the game ball has passed through the through gate 67, and the normal symbol is reserved in the RAM 203. It is stored in the ball storage area 203d.

Then, the value of the random number that becomes the normal winning pattern is defined in the normal winning random number table 202c (see FIG. 407(b)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the normal winning random number counter C5 is If the value of the random number that becomes a win defined in the normal winning random number table 202c is matched, it is determined as a normal symbol win. In addition, this normal random number table is for normal patterns when the probability is low (the period when the normal pattern is normal) and when the probability of winning the normal pattern is higher than the low probability (normal pattern time reduction). 407(b)). In this way, by making the number of random numbers to be winning different, the probability of winning is changed between when the probability of normal symbols is low and when the probability of normal symbols is high.

As shown in FIG. 407(b), when the probability of the normal symbol is low, there are two random numbers that will win the normal symbol, and the values are "5, 6". In this way, when the probability of normal symbols is low, the total number of random numbers that will be a big hit is 2 among the total number of random numbers of 240, so the probability of a big win of special symbols is "1/120".

When the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal pattern low probability mode, when the game ball passes through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, the value of the normal hit random number counter C5 is acquired, and the second pattern display device 83 is obtained. In , the variable display of normal symbols is executed for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired normal winning random number counter C5 is within the range of "5, 6", it is determined to be winning, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol ), and the electric accessory 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640 is opened only for "0.2 seconds x 1 time". In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of normal symbols, the electric accessory 640a is opened only for "0.2 seconds x 1 time" when the normal symbols are won. The time and number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "0.5 sec x 2 times".

On the other hand, there are 200 random numbers for the normal symbol jackpot when the probability of the normal symbol is high, and the range is "5 to 204". These random numbers are stored in a normal winning random number table for high probability. In this way, when the probability of special symbols is low, the total number of random numbers that will be a big hit is 200 out of the total number of random numbers of 240, so the probability of a big win of special symbols is "1/1.2".

When the pachinko machine 10 is at the time of normal pattern high probability, when the game ball passes through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, the value of the normal winning random number counter C5 is obtained, and the second pattern display device 83. , the variable display of normal symbols is executed for 3 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired normal winning random number counter C5 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that the normal design winning. In this case, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol "○" is lighted and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol), and the electric accessory 640a is opened "1 second x 2 times". be done. In this way, when the probability of normal symbols is high, the variable display time is very short, from 30 seconds to 3 seconds, compared to when the probability of normal symbols is low. Since it becomes very long, such as “0.2 seconds×1 time→1 second×2 times”, the game ball easily enters the second ball entrance 640 . In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of normal symbols, the electric accessory 64a is opened only "1 second x 2 times" when the normal symbols are won. The number of times can be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "3 seconds x 2 times".

The normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the normal random number counter C5 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once per timer interrupt processing (see Fig. 425). , is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 434).

In this way, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main controller 110 controls the big winning lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the values of the counters and the like. Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result in the second pattern display device 83 can be executed.

Returning to FIG. 404, the description continues. The RAM 203 includes a counter buffer shown in FIG. 405, a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags and counters, and an I/O memory. and a work area (work area) in which values such as are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When the power supply is cut off due to a power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of the power interruption (including the time of power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was turned off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 30) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by the start-up process (see FIG. 433) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. , NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 432) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

Next, specific contents of the ROM 202 will be described with reference to FIG. 406(a). FIG. 406(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110 in this embodiment. In the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, as part of the fixed value data described above, a special symbol jackpot random number table 202a, a variation pattern selection table 202b, a normal hit random number table 202c, a jackpot type selection table 202d, a drop lottery table 202e, and an open At least a pattern selection table 202f is stored.

The special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 407(a)) is a data table that defines the correspondence between the value of the first winning random number counter C1 and the lottery result. Specifically, in the low probability state of the special design, "0 to 3" is defined as the range of the determination value that is determined to be a big hit, and in the high probability state of the special design (variable state), the judgment that it is determined to be a big hit "4 to 11" is defined as the value range (see FIG. 407(a)). When the value of the first winning random number counter C1 acquired based on the starting winning matches with one of the judgment values corresponding to the big winning defined in this special symbol big winning random number table 202a (see FIG. 407(a)) , is determined to be a special symbol jackpot.

The jackpot type selection table 202b (see FIG. 408(a)) is a data table in which the determination value for determining the jackpot type is stored for each type of special symbol, and the determination value of the special hit type counter C2 is It is defined in association with each jackpot type. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined to be a special symbol jackpot, the value of the special hit type counter C2 acquired based on the start winning is compared with the jackpot type selection table 202b, and the special hit type counter A jackpot type corresponding to the value of C2 is selected.

As shown in FIG. 408(a), the jackpot type selection table 202b is a special figure that is referred to for determining the jackpot type when the first special symbol lottery (lottery of the special figure 1) results in a jackpot. 1 jackpot table 202d1 and a special figure 2 jackpot table 202d2 that is referenced to determine the jackpot type when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol (lottery of the special figure 2). ing. First, with reference to FIG. 408(a), the details of the special figure 1 jackpot table 202d1 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 408(b), the value of the special hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "0 to 9" in association with "jackpot A" (see FIG. 408(b)). This "jackpot A" has 15 rounds, and after the jackpot ends, a variable probability state is given (the opening and closing pattern that allows the ball to enter the specific winning hole 65a during the period allocated to the V area is set. ) is a big hit. Of the 100 possible counter values of the special winning type counter C2, 10 counter values become ``jackpot A'', so when the first special symbol lottery results in a jackpot, ``jackpot A'' is determined. The proportion is 10% (10/100). This "jackpot A" has the largest number of rounds among the jackpots of the first special symbol, and is given an advantageous variable state after the jackpot is completed, so it is the most advantageous jackpot among the jackpots of the first special symbol. It is a type.

In addition, the value of the special hit type counter C2 is defined in association with the "jackpot B" in the range of "10 to 49" (see FIG. 408(b)). This "jackpot B" has 5 rounds, and after the jackpot ends, a variable probability state is given (the opening and closing pattern that allows the ball to enter the specific winning hole 65a during the period allocated to the V area is set. ) is a big hit. Of the 100 possible counter values of the special winning type counter C2, 40 counter values become ``jackpot B'', so when the first special symbol lottery results in a jackpot, ``jackpot B'' is determined. The proportion is 40% (40/100). This "jackpot B" has a smaller number of rounds than the "jackpot A", but is a relatively advantageous jackpot type because an advantageous variable probability state is provided after the jackpot ends.

In addition, the value of the special hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "50 to 99" in association with "jackpot C" (see FIG. 408(b)). This "jackpot C" has 5 rounds, and after the jackpot ends, a time-saving state is given (the opening and closing pattern that makes it impossible to enter the specific winning port 65a during the period allocated to the V area is set. It is a big hit. Of the 100 possible counter values of the special winning type counter C2, 50 counter values are the ``jackpot C'', so the ``jackpot C'' is determined when the first special symbol lottery results in a jackpot. The proportion is 50% (50/100). This "jackpot C" is the most disadvantageous jackpot type among the first special pattern jackpots because it has the smallest number of rounds and the game state after the jackpot ends is set to a comparatively disadvantageous time-saving state. . It is configured to be a probability change at a lower rate than.

Next, with reference to FIG. 408(c), the details of the special figure 2 jackpot table 202d2 will be described. As shown in FIG. 408(c), the value of the special hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "0 to 79" in association with "jackpot D" (see FIG. 408(b)). This "jackpot D" has 15 rounds, and after the jackpot ends, a variable probability state is given (the opening and closing pattern that allows the ball to enter the specific winning hole 65a during the period allocated to the V area is set. ) is a big hit. Of the 100 possible counter values of the special winning type counter C2, 80 counter values are "jackpot D", so when the second special symbol lottery results in a big win, "jackpot D" is determined. The proportion is 80% (80/100). This "jackpot D" is the most advantageous jackpot type because it has the largest number of rounds among the jackpots and is given an advantageous variable probability state after the jackpot ends.

Further, as shown in FIG. 408(c), the value of the special hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "80 to 99" in association with "jackpot E" (see FIG. 408(b) ). This "jackpot E" has 15 rounds, and after the jackpot ends, a time-saving state is given (the opening and closing pattern that makes it impossible to enter the specific winning hole 65a during the period allocated to the V area is set. It is a big hit. Among the 100 possible counter values of the special winning type counter C2, 20 counter values become ``jackpot E'', so when the second special pattern lottery results in a jackpot, ``jackpot E'' is determined. The proportion is 20% (20/100). This "jackpot E" has the largest number of rounds among the jackpots, but is a jackpot type that is disadvantageous in terms of the game state after the jackpot is finished because a disadvantageous time-saving state is given after the jackpot is finished.

Thus, in this first control example, when the first special symbol lottery results in a big win, the probability variable big wins (jackpots A and B) are determined at a rate of 50%, while the second When the lottery of the special symbols results in a big win, the variable probability big win (jackpot D) is determined at a rate of 80%. Therefore, when the lottery for the second special symbol results in a big win, the player can be made to expect a probability change state more strongly. As described above, in the first control example, the case where the jackpot type is clearly indicated to the player is extremely rare (1% of the probability variable jackpot). After the end of the jackpot, the time-saving state of the normal symbols is maintained until the lottery of the special symbols is executed 100 times. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp whether the variable probability state or the time saving state is set during the period from the end of the big win until the lottery of the special symbols is executed 100 times. Even if a disadvantageous time-saving state is set, a game can be played in anticipation of a variable probability state until the lottery of special symbols is executed 100 times. Also, if you hit a jackpot within 100 times, even if it was a jackpot in a time-saving state, you can make it seem like you hit a jackpot during the variable state, so you can enter the variable state more than it should. It can make you feel like you have a high rate and retention rate. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The normal hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 407(b)) is a data table that defines (stores) the hit determination value of the normal symbol. Specifically, in the normal state of the normal design, "5, 6" is defined as the determination value for winning the normal design (see FIG. 407(b)). In addition, in the high-probability state of the normal design, "5 to 204" is defined as the judgment value for winning the normal design (see FIG. 407(b)). In the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example, the value of the normal winning random number counter C4 acquired based on the game ball passing through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 and the normal winning random number table 202c are referred to. Then, it is determined whether or not it is a hit of a normal pattern.

The variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 409(a)) is a data table in which the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 for determining the display mode of the variation pattern is defined for each display mode. The details of the variation pattern selection table 202d are as described above in the description of the variation type counter CS1, so detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

The falling lottery table 202e is a data table that defines the determination value of the falling lottery counter C4 that is determined to be a fall. The value of the fall lottery counter C4 acquired when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 in the probability variable state of the special symbol (at the time of starting winning) is the fall lottery table 202e. If it matches any of the determination values defined in, it is set to shift to a special symbol low probability state (to fall down).

More specifically, two determination values of "0, 1" are defined as determination values determined to fall in the variable probability state of the special symbol. Here, the drop lottery counter C4 is a loop counter whose value is updated within the range of "0 to 999". Of the 1000 possible values of the falling lottery counter C4, there are two determination values for falling, so the probability of falling (moving to a low probability state of special symbols) in the variable probability state of special symbols. is 1/500 (2/1000).

It should be noted that, in the fall lottery table 202e in the present embodiment, only the determination value (determination value for the probability variation state of the special symbol) for determining whether or not to fall in the probability variation state of the special symbol is defined, and the special symbol Criteria for low-probability conditions are not specified. This is because it is useless to determine whether or not to shift to the special symbol low probability state when the special symbol low probability state has already been reached.

In the present embodiment, this drop lottery table 202e is compared with a drop lottery counter C4 that is updated periodically, and whether or not to shift (fall) from the probability variable state of special symbols to the low probability state of special symbols. is determined. That is, the timing of shifting from the variable probability state to the time saving state can be made random. Therefore, when the state is shifted to the variable probability state, the player can play the game while having a sense of tension for not knowing when the variable probability state will end, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in the first control mode, it is determined whether or not to shift (fall) from the variable probability state of the special symbol to the low probability state of the special symbol (judgment), but it is possible to move to another state. A lottery (judgment) may be configured. For example, it may be determined by a lottery executed for each variation whether or not to shift from the time saving state of the normal design to the normal state of the normal design. As a result, since the number of continuation times of the time saving state of the normal symbols can be randomized, also in this case, the game can be played with a sense of tension. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The opening pattern selection table 202f is a data table that defines data for setting a pattern according to the jackpot type as the opening pattern (opening/closing pattern of the specific winning opening 65a) in the fifth round of the jackpot. Although not shown, in the fifth round of the variable probability jackpot (jackpots A, B, D), the distribution device (V role) is arranged in a state of distributing the game balls to the first region (V region). During the period (5 seconds after the start of the 5th round to 10 seconds after the start of the 5th round), the release period (5 seconds after the start of the 5th round to 9.5 seconds) during which the game ball can reach the distribution device. Data for setting the open period until 5 seconds have passed is read. On the other hand, in the 5th round of the normal jackpots (jackets C, E), the period during which the distribution device (V role) distributes the game balls to the second region (non-V region) (5th round start Set the release period (4.5 seconds from immediately after the start of the 5th round to 4.5 seconds after the start of the 5th round) during which the game ball can reach the sorting device during the period from immediately after the start to the time when 5 seconds have passed. data is read out.

Next, the details of the RAM 203 will be described with reference to FIG. 406(b). FIG. 406(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main controller 110. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 403(b), the RAM 203 includes a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d, and a special symbol. 2 reserved ball number counter 203e, normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, time saving medium counter 203g, probability variable flag 203h, jackpot start flag 203i, jackpot medium flag 203j, probability variable setting flag 203k, probability variable passing counter 203m, winning number counter 203n, remaining It has at least a ball timer flag 203p, a remaining ball timer 203q, a variable probability effective flag 203r, a variable probability effective timer 203s, a discharge number counter 203t, and a memory area 203z.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a has four reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area), and each of these areas has a first hit random number counter C1 and a first hit type counter. Each value of C2 and stop type selection counter C3 is stored.

More specifically, at the timing when the game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (start winning), each value of each counter C1-C4, CS1 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas. Among the vacant areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), the area numbers (first to fourth) are stored in ascending order. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest winning is stored, and the first reserved area stores the data corresponding to the oldest winning. Note that if data is stored in all of the four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, in the main controller 110, when a special symbol lottery is performed, the values of the counters C1 to C4 and CS1 stored in the first reserved area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a are the special symbols. It is shifted (moved) to the reserved ball special symbol reserved ball execution area (see FIG. 405), and based on the values of the counters C1 to C4 and CS1 stored in the execution area, determination of special symbol lottery etc. is done.

In addition, when the data is shifted from the first reserved area to the special symbol reserved ball execution area, the first reserved area becomes empty. Therefore, there is a shift process that packs the winning data stored in the other reservation areas (second reservation area to fourth reservation area) to the reservation area (first reservation area to third reservation area) with an area number smaller by 1. done. In the first control example, in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, data shift is performed only for the reserved areas (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) in which winning data is stored.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b has four reserved areas like the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. Each counter value obtained based on the start winning to the second ball entrance 640 is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Since the counter value storage method and the like are the same as those of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c has one execution area and four reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area). Each of these areas stores a normal random number counter C5. More specifically, the value of the counter C5 is acquired at the timing when the game ball passes through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first area to holding 4th area) are stored in ascending order of area number (first to fourth). That is, like the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, the data corresponding to the winning are stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four reservation areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, in the main controller 110, when the normal symbol winning lottery is performed, the value of the counter C5 stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( ), and based on the value of the counter C5 stored in the execution area, a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed.

In addition, when the data is shifted from the first reserved area to the execution area, the first reserved area becomes empty. A shift process is performed to move winning data stored in other reserve areas to a reserve area with an area number smaller by one. Also, the data shift is performed only for the reserved areas in which the winning data are stored.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is a variable display (third symbol It is a counter that counts the number of held balls (waiting number of times) of the variable display performed on the display device 81 up to four times. The initial value of this special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and the maximum value is 4 each time a game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the number of reserved balls displayed in variable display increases. is incremented by 1 (see S404 in FIG. 428). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time a special symbol variable display is newly executed (see S210 in FIG. 426).

The value of this special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (number of times N1 of holding variable display in the first special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command (S211 in FIG. 426, S405 in FIG. 428 reference). The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113 every time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203e is changed.

The voice lamp control device 113 suspends the variable display suspended in the main controller 110 by the suspended ball number command sent from the main controller 110 every time the value of the special symbol 1 suspended ball number counter 203d is changed. You can get the value of the number of balls itself. As a result, the number of holding balls of variable display managed by the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223a of the sound lamp control device 113 is changed to the actual holding ball of variable display that was held by the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it deviates from the number, the deviation can be corrected by the next received ball number command.

In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of pending balls based on the number of pending balls command, and every time the number of pending balls changes, the display control device 114 is notified of the number of pending balls. Send a pitch command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number pattern on the third pattern display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is a variable display (third symbol It is a counter that counts the number of held balls (number of times of standby) of variable display performed on the display device 81 up to a maximum of 4 times. The initial value of this special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is set to zero, and the maximum value is 4 each time a game ball enters the second ball entrance 640 and the number of reserved balls displayed in a variable display increases. is incremented by 1 (see S410 in FIG. 428). On the other hand, the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 each time a special symbol variable display is newly executed (see S205 in FIG. 426). The value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is also notified to the sound lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command, similarly to the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d.

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is the normal symbol (second symbol) variable display held ball number ( This is a counter that counts the number of standby times up to four times. The initial value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is set to zero, and each time a game ball passes through the through gate 67 and the number of reserved balls of variable display increases, 1 is added up to a maximum value of 4. (See S704 in FIG. 431). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S605 in FIG. 430).

When the game ball passes through the through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of times M of holding variable display in normal symbols) is less than 4, the value of the normal per random number counter C4 is obtained. , the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (S705 in FIG. 431). On the other hand, when the game ball passes through the through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (S703 in FIG. 431: No).

The time-saving medium counter 203g is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state with normal patterns, and if the value of the time-saving medium counter 203g is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state with normal patterns. If the value of the time saving medium counter 203g is 0 and the variable probability flag 203h is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of normal symbols. The initial value of the time-saving counter 203g is set to zero, and a lottery for special symbols is performed in the main control device 110, and 100 is set at the end of the big win every time the big win is made (see FIG. 437). (see S1303). In addition, regardless of the type of big win, when a special symbol lottery results in a big win, the value is set to 0 at the start of the variable display indicating the big win (see S310 in FIG. 427). By configuring the value to be set to 0 at the start of the variable display indicating a big hit, there is a possibility that the time-saving state has ended, such as the normal design being missed during the variable display executed in the time-saving state of the normal design. If a certain behavior occurs, it is possible to improve the expectation for the big win. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

When the lottery for the normal pattern is performed, the value of the time saving medium counter 203g and the state of the probability variation flag 203h are referred to, and the value of the time saving medium counter 203g is 1 or more, or the probability variation flag 203h is on. If it is normal, it is determined that it is during the time saving of the pattern. In this case, a lottery for normal symbols is performed based on the normal winning random number table for high probability (see S609 in FIG. 430). On the other hand, if the value of the time saving counter 203g is 0 and the probability variation flag 203h is off, it is determined that the normal state of the design is normal, and based on the normal per random number table for low probability, the normal design of A lottery is held (see S610 in FIG. 430).

The variable probability flag 203h is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the variable probability state of the special symbols. If the flag 203h is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol low probability state. In addition, as described above, during the probability variation state of the special symbol, it becomes the time saving state of the normal symbol. Therefore, if the probability variation flag 203h is ON, it indicates that the probability variation state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the normal symbol.

The variable probability flag 203h has an initial value set to OFF, and when the game ball enters the first area (V area) in the variable prize winning device 65 in the fifth round of the big win, at the end of the big win It is set to ON (see S1302 in FIG. 437). In addition, the variable probability flag 203h is reset to OFF when the lottery result corresponding to falling in the variable probability state (see S305 in FIG. 427) and when the variation display of the jackpot starts (see S310 in FIG. 427) be done.

This probability variation flag 203h is referred to in order to determine whether or not the game state is the probability variation state in the special symbol variation start process (see S302 in FIG. 427). Specifically, when the special symbol variation start process (FIG. 427, S208) is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed. In the special symbol variation start process (FIG. 427, S208), the probability variation flag 203h is referred to, and if it is ON, first, the falling lottery is executed, and if it is not falling, the first per random number table 202a for high probability. Based on (see FIG. 407(a)), a special symbol lottery is performed. On the other hand, if the probability variation flag 203h is off or the probability variation flag 203h is on and it is determined to fall by the falling lottery, the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a for low probability (see FIG. 407 (a) ), a lottery for special symbols is carried out.

In addition, the probability variation flag 203h is also referred to in order to determine whether or not the gaming state is the time saving state in the normal symbol variation processing (S608, S614, S620 in FIG. 430). Specifically, the probability variation flag 203h and the above-described time saving counter 203g are referred to in the normal symbol variation process, and if the probability variation flag 203h is on or the value of the time saving counter 203g is 1 or more, It is determined that the time saving state of normal symbols is in progress, and lottery for normal symbols is performed based on the normal winning random number table 202c for high probability (see FIG. 407(b)) (see S609 in FIG. 430). On the other hand, if the probability variation flag 203h is off and the value of the time saving counter 203g is 0, it is determined that the normal state of the symbol is normal, and the second random number table 202c for low probability (Fig. 407 ( (See S610 in FIG. 430). In addition, in the normal symbol variation process, the probability variation flag 203h is also referred to when determining the variation time of the normal symbol and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a in the case of winning the normal symbol (S614 in FIG. 430, S620).

The jackpot start flag 203i is a flag indicating whether or not to start a jackpot. If the big win start flag 203i is ON, it means that it is time to start a big win, and if it is OFF, it means that it is not time to start a big win. This jackpot start flag 203i is set to ON when the end timing of the fluctuation display indicating the jackpot has come (see S217 in FIG. 426). Also, the jackpot start flag 203i is set to OFF when the jackpot start is set (see S1103 in FIG. 435).

The jackpot flag 203j is a flag indicating whether or not the jackpot (special game state) is in progress. If the big winning flag 203j is on, it means that the big winning is going on, and if it is off, it means that the big winning is not going on. The jackpot middle flag 203j is set to ON as soon as the jackpot (special game state) is started (see S1103 in FIG. 435) when a jackpot is won by a lottery of special symbols. In addition, it is set to OFF at the end of the jackpot (special game state) (see S1305 in FIG. 437). In the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 426), this jackpot flag 203j is referenced to determine whether or not the jackpot is in progress (see S201 in FIG. 426).

The variable probability setting flag 203k is a flag indicating whether or not to shift the gaming state to the variable probability state after the jackpot game. In the pachinko machine 10, whether or not the game state is set to the variable probability state is determined by whether or not the game ball enters the first region (V region) during the jackpot game. Here, when it is detected that the gaming ball has entered the first area (passing of the variable probability switch provided in the first area), the variable probability setting flag 203k is set to ON (S1415 in FIG. 438). . On the other hand, this variable probability setting flag 203k is set to OFF at the end of the jackpot (see S1305 in FIG. 437). The variable probability setting flag 203k is backed up when the power is turned off, and is set to the state immediately before the power was turned off when the power is restored (when the power is turned on). Moreover, it is set to OFF when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized.

In addition, when the probability variation setting flag 203k is set to ON when the power is turned on, it is determined whether the probability variation switch has passed before the power is turned off. may be configured to formally set to ON and return. In this case, whether or not the variable probability switch is passed before the power is turned off can be determined by determining whether the variable probability passage counter 203m, which will be described later, is greater than zero. By configuring in this way, in a state where the power is turned off, it is possible to reduce the damage on the side of the amusement arcade by determining fraud such as rewriting the probability variable setting flag 203k to ON and turning on the power again. can.

The variable probability passage counter 203m is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed through the variable probability switch (entered the V area) in one round (one round of the jackpot in this embodiment) during the jackpot game. . In addition, it can be determined whether or not all the game balls that have entered the specific winning hole 65a of the variable winning device 65 have been discharged from the sum of the probability variable passage counter 203m and the ejection number counter 203u described later. This variable probability passing counter 203m is updated by being incremented by 1 when passing through the variable probability switch (detecting the ball entering the V area) (S1414 in FIG. 438). In addition, after executing the determination processing of whether or not the number of game balls that have won the variable winning device 65 and the number of ejected matches, the initial value is reset to "0" (S1511 in FIG. 439). It should be noted that the probability variable passage counter 203m is backed up when the power is turned off. It is set to 0 in the initialized state.

The prize number counter 203p is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have entered the specific prize winning opening 65a of the variable prize winning device 65 in one round in the jackpot game. is incremented by 1 and updated (S1403 in FIG. 438). On the other hand, when one round ends, the number of winnings of the variable winning device 65 (the value of the winning number counter 203p) and the number of ejected items (the total value of the ejection number counter 203u and the probability variable passing counter 203m) are the same. After it is determined whether they match, the initial value is reset to "0" (see S1511 in FIG. 439). The value of the winning number counter 203p is backed up when the power is turned off. It is set to 0 in the initialized state.

The remaining ball timer flag 203q is a flag indicating whether or not it is a ball sweeping period after one round is finished and the specific winning hole 65a is closed. When the remaining ball timer flag 203q is set to ON, it means that it is the ball sweeping period. While the remaining ball timer flag 203q is set to ON, the remaining ball timer 203r, which will be described later, is incremented by one and updated (see S1505 in FIG. 439). The remaining ball timer 203r is a counter for determining the time after the specific winning hole 65a is closed, and determines whether the time required for the game balls in the variable winning device 65 to be discharged has passed. is a counter for

The remaining ball timer 203r is required for discharging the winning game balls to the variable winning device 65 when one preset round is completed and the specific winning port 65a of the variable winning device 65 is closed. A counter for determining whether time has passed. In this embodiment, the time required for the winning game ball 65 to be discharged is 0.5 seconds. 203r is set as the upper limit. When the remaining ball timer 203r reaches the upper limit value (0.8 seconds in this embodiment), it is determined whether the number of prizes awarded to the variable prize winning device 65 and the number of discharged prizes match. (S1507 in FIG. 439). If they do not match, an error command is set to notify you. Therefore, it is possible to notify early that game balls are clogged in the variable prize winning device 65.例文帳に追加In addition, the balls are illegally left in the variable prize winning device 65, and the game balls are distributed to the distribution device (V role) at the timing when 5 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fifth round of the big win C or big win E. It is possible to suppress fraud that flows down.

In addition, if the winning number and the discharge number do not match, a dedicated flag is set to ON, and if the flag is ON, the probability variation setting flag 203k is turned on even if the game ball passes through the probability variation switch may be configured not to be set to . By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the variable probability state from being improperly imparted.

Probability variation effective flag 203s, after the V role is switched to an arrangement that cannot be distributed to the first region (V region), when the game ball passes through the probability variation switch (enters the V region), the passage ( It is a flag for determining whether or not to validate the ball entry). When this variable probability effective flag 203s is set to ON, it indicates that the game ball passes through the variable probability switch during a normal period.

The variable probability effective timer 203t is a counter for counting the time after the variable probability effective flag 203s is set to ON. After the V role is switched to the non-V side arrangement by this variable probability valid timer 203t, it is possible to determine the period required to normally pass the variable probability switch. In this embodiment, it takes 0.3 seconds for the game ball that has reached the V accessory to pass through the variable probability switch. The upper limit value of the variable probability valid timer 203t is set to a counter value corresponding to 0.5 seconds, and even if the variable probability switch is passed after that, it is determined as illegal and not determined as passing.

As a result, the game ball is illegally entered into the V area and passed through the variable probability switch, the game ball is pushed up with a piano wire or the like from below the variable probability switch and passed, or the magnetic sensor is erroneously detected by radio waves etc. It is possible to suppress damage caused by fraud such as

The discharged number counter 203u is a counter for counting the number of game balls discharged from the variable winning device 65 in one round. This discharge number counter 203u is reset to 0, which is an initial value, after it is determined that the number of winning balls in the variable winning device 65 matches the discharge number (S1511 in FIG. 439).

The other memory area 203z is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 .

Thus, the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 is provided with various counters and flags.

Next, referring to FIG. 411, the state transition method of the pachinko machine 10 realized by performing control based on various tables defined in the ROM 202 and various flags and counters provided in the RAM 203 will be described. explain. FIG. 411 is a diagram showing a state transition method of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example.

As shown in FIG. 411, the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example is roughly divided into three game states. That is, the normal state shown in the upper part of FIG. 411, the variable probability state shown in the middle part of FIG. 411, and the time saving state shown in the lower part of FIG. 411 are provided.

As described above, the normal state indicates a low probability state of special symbols and a normal state of normal symbols, the probability of becoming a big hit is low, and it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entrance 640. (The electric accessary 640a is difficult to be released), which is the most disadvantageous game state for the player. In addition, as described above, the probability variation state indicates that the probability variation state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the normal symbol, the probability of the big hit is high, and by hitting the right hand to the second entrance 640 Since the game balls enter the ball frequently, the game state becomes the most advantageous for the player. In addition, the time-saving state indicates a low-probability state of special symbols and a time-saving state of normal symbols. Since the ball is hit frequently, the game state becomes relatively advantageous for the player.

As shown in the upper part of FIG. 411, there is a possibility of transitioning from the normal state to another state only in the event of a big win. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 411, the first special symbol is a jackpot, and when either jackpot A or B is selected as the jackpot type, the game ball moves to the V area in the fifth round of the jackpot. On the condition that the ball was entered, it will shift to a variable state after the jackpot ends. In the big hits A and B, the game ball can enter almost the V area simply by hitting right in 5 rounds. In addition, if the game ball does not enter the V area in the 5th round due to the player not hitting the game ball in the 5th round, the game state after the jackpot ends will be in a time saving state. set. On the other hand, as shown in the upper part of FIG. 411, when jackpot C is selected as the jackpot type of the first special symbol, it is impossible (difficult ), so it shifts to a time saving state after the end of the jackpot.

In addition, as shown in the interruption of FIG. 411, there is a possibility of shifting from the variable probability state to another state when the player falls down in the drop lottery as well as when the game hits a jackpot. Specifically, when a jackpot is achieved in the variable probability state and a jackpot E determined at a rate of 20% is reached, the game state after the jackpot is completed is set to the time saving state. In addition, when the lottery result corresponding to the fall is obtained in the fall lottery before the lottery for the special symbol is executed 100 times after setting the variable probability state, the state is shifted to the time saving state. Further, when the lottery result corresponding to the fall is obtained in the fall lottery after the lottery of the special symbols is executed 100 times or more after setting to the variable probability state, the state is shifted to the normal state. On the other hand, when a big win is achieved in the variable probability state and a big win D determined at a rate of 80% is reached, the game state after the end of the big win is again set to the variable probability state (the most advantageous variable probability state is looped). Therefore, in the variable probability state, the game can be played with the expectation that the player will get a big win and a big win D before falling down.

In addition, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 411, when the time saving state is changed to another game state, in addition to the case where the jackpot is won, after the jackpot is finished, when the lottery of the special symbols of the specified number of times is executed, other move to state. More specifically, when the time-saving state results in a jackpot and a jackpot D determined at a rate of 80% is reached, the game state after the jackpot ends is set to the most advantageous variable probability state. In addition, when the lottery for the special symbol is executed 100 times after the last big win is completed, the state shifts to the most disadvantageous normal state. On the other hand, when the jackpot of the second special symbol is a jackpot E determined at a rate of 20%, the game state after the jackpot is again set to the time saving state (time saving state ). In the short time state, the probability of winning the jackpot is 1/250, which is the same as in the normal state, so the possibility of winning the jackpot again within 100 times is not so high (about 33% of the time). . Therefore, when it becomes a time-saving state, possibility that it will transfer to a normal state will become high. In addition, as described above, it is difficult to accurately distinguish between the time saving state and the variable probability state (operations other than the jackpot probability, such as the operation mode of the electric accessory 640a, are the same), so the time saving state of the normal symbol is set, the player can continue to have expectations for being in the variable probability state. That is, even if the time-saving state, which is disadvantageous compared to the variable probability state (that is, it is easy to shift to the normal state), it can be made to feel as if the game is being played in the variable probability state, so the player's Motivation for games can be maintained at a high level. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

As described above, in the first control example, it is possible to provide a novel game property in which three types of game states are traversed, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Returning to FIG. 404, the description continues. An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, a sound lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a large opening solenoid for closing or opening the specific winning opening 65a, and an electric function. A solenoid 209 for driving an object is connected, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these through the input/output port 205 .

The input/output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown) and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115. The MPU 201 receives signals output from the various switches 208. Also, various processes are executed based on the RAM erasing signal SG2 output from the RAM erasing switch circuit 253. FIG.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 storing control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 432) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main controller 110, the dispensing motor 216, the launch controller 112, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout controller 111 but not to the main controller 110 .

The shooting control device 112 controls the ball shooting unit 112a so that the shooting strength of the game ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to shoot the game ball. be. The ball shooting unit 112a has a shooting solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the game ball is turned off (not operated). A shooting solenoid is energized corresponding to the amount of rotation of the handle 51, and a game ball is shot with strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle 51. - 特許庁

The audio lamp control device 113 performs display control such as audio output in the audio output device 226, output of lighting and extinguishing in the lamp display device (illumination parts 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and variable display effect (variable display). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed by the device 114, and the like. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, the PUSH button 10317, and the like.

In addition, the sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or super reach. It controls the voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 and instructs the display control device 114 so as to change the performance contents of the hour. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the stage after the change is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the stage after the change on the third pattern display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third design, which is the main image to be displayed on the third design display device 81 .

The audio lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the audio lamp control device 113, and displays and controls the error command including the error type. Send to device 114 . The display control device 114 controls the third pattern display device 81 to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

Next, the details of the electrical configuration of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 412(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. FIG. The ROM 222 includes a variation pattern selection table 222a, a back mode lottery table 222b, a pending change lottery table 222c, a change point calculation table 222d, a batch change lottery table 222e, a chance charge lottery table 222f, and a continuation suggestion effect selection table. 222g, and an interrupt consecutive hitting lottery table 222h.

The variation pattern selection table 222a is based on the variation pattern command output from the main controller 110 by the sound ramp control device 113. ) to determine more detailed variations. This makes it possible to determine a wider variety of variation modes. Here, one variation mode out of a plurality of types is determined by lottery for the rough variation contents instructed by the main controller 110 .

The back mode lottery table 222b is, in the game state (probability variable state, time saving state) in which the time saving state of the normal symbol is set, the data for lottery change of the back mode for showing the degree of expectation that the probability variable state is set. is a data table in which Details of the back mode lottery table 222b will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 413 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the rear mode selection table 222b.

As shown in FIG. 413, in the back mode lottery table 222b, the current game state is the variable probability state, and the back mode lottery table 222b is confirmed that the holding does not include the lottery result corresponding to the fall. In order to draw a lottery for changing the back mode in the state where the probability variable continuation table referred to in order to draw a lottery for the change and the lottery result corresponding to the fall are included in the hold even though the current game state is the probability variable state. and a table for having fallen, which is referred to for lottery for changing the rear mode in the state of having already fallen to the time-saving state.

As shown in FIG. 413, the background mode lottery table 222b defines the range of values of the effect lottery counter 223y for each combination of the type of the current background mode and the transition destination (after change) background mode. It is Here, the effect lottery counter 223y is composed of a random number counter whose value is periodically updated, and is updated to any value within the range of "0 to 99" each time the update timing comes. Using the value of the effect lottery counter 223y, the effect modes of various effects are selected. The effect lottery counter 223y is provided with a separate and independent random number counter for each type of effect for executing the lottery. In other words, the effect lottery counter 223y is a general term for random number counters used for lotteries for various effects.

As shown in FIG. 413, in the probability variable continuation table, the current back mode is the cave search mode, and the destination back mode is the temple search mode (mode transition from cave search mode to temple search mode). A value range "0 to 19" of the effect lottery counter 223y is defined in correspondence. Of the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the production lottery counter 223y, the number of random numbers associated with the mode transition from the cave search mode to the temple search mode is 20, so the current game state is In a probability variable state and in a state where the lottery result of falling is not included in the hold, the ratio of shifting (changed) from the cave search mode to the temple search mode is 20% (20/100). In addition, as shown in FIG. 413, the values "20, 21" of the effect lottery counter 223y are defined in association with the mode transition from the cave search mode to the super-temple search mode. Of the 100 possible random numbers of the effect lottery counter 223y, the number of random numbers associated with the mode transition from the cave search mode to the temple search mode is 2, so the current game state is a probability variable state, In addition, in a state where the lottery result of falling is not included in the hold, the rate of transition (change) from the cave exploration mode to the super temple exploration mode is 2% (2/100). If the value range of the effect lottery counter 223y is other than the above (that is, the range of "22 to 99"), mode transition is not performed. That is, the cave search mode is maintained.

Thus, in the state where the cave search mode is set, if the probability variation continuation table is referred to (probability variation state, and if the lottery result of falling in the hold is not included), the fluctuation display is Every time it is executed, it shifts from the cave exploration mode to another mode at a rate of 22%. That is, the number of continuations of the cave exploration mode is reduced to about 5 times on average. In other words, even if it is set to cave exploration mode, it shifts to another mode with higher expectations in a relatively short period of time, so the period set in cave exploration mode tends to be shortened (high expectation mode stay rate will tend to increase). Therefore, the longer the period of staying in the high-expectation mode, the more the player's expectation for the continuation of the variable probability state can be improved, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. can.

Further, as shown in FIG. 413, in the variable probability continuation table, the mode transition from the temple search mode to the cave search mode is defined in association with the value range "0" of the effect lottery counter 223y. Of the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the production lottery counter 223y, the number of random numbers associated with the mode transition from the temple search mode to the cave search mode is one. In the probability variable state and in the state where the lottery result of falling is not included in the hold, the rate of shifting (changed) from the temple search mode to the cave search mode is 1% (1/100). Further, as shown in FIG. 413, the mode transition from the temple search mode to the super temple search mode is defined in association with the value range "1 to 10" of the effect lottery counter 223y. Of the 100 possible random numbers of the production lottery counter 223y, the number of random numbers associated with the mode transition from the temple search mode to the super temple search mode is 10, so the current game state is a variable state. In addition, in a state in which the lottery result of falling is not included in the hold, the rate of transition (change) from the temple search mode to the super temple search mode is 10% (10/100). If the range of the value of the effect lottery counter 223y is other than the above (that is, the range of "11 to 99"), mode transition is not performed. That is, the temple search mode is maintained.

In this way, in the state where the temple search mode is set, if the probability variation continuation table is referred to (the probability variation state and the lottery result of falling in the hold is not included), the fluctuation display Every time it is executed, it shifts to the cave exploration mode at a rate of 1%, and at a rate of 10%, the probability change state is confirmed, and the lottery result of the fall is not included in the hold. switch to mode. That is, the configuration is such that it is difficult to shift to the cave exploration mode with low expectations, and it is easy to shift to the super temple mode with high expectations.

Further, as shown in FIG. 413, in the variable probability continuation table, the value of the effect lottery counter 223y is not associated with the mode transition from the super temple search mode to the cave search mode. In addition, the mode transition from the super-temple search mode to the temple search mode is defined in association with the value range "0 to 4" of the effect lottery counter 223y. Of the 100 possible random numbers of the production lottery counter 223y, the number of random numbers associated with the mode transition from the super temple search mode to the temple search mode is 5, so the current game state is a probability variable state. In addition, in a state where the lottery result of falling is not included in the hold, the rate of transition (change) from the super temple search mode to the temple search mode is 5% (5/100). If the range of the value of the effect lottery counter 223y is other than the above (that is, the range of "5 to 99"), mode transition is not performed. That is, the super temple search mode is maintained.

In this way, in the state where the super temple search mode is set, only 5% of the time it shifts to another mode, and even if the mode is shifted, temple searches with relatively high expectations Since the mode is shifted to the mode, even if the super-temple mode with the highest degree of expectation is shifted to another back mode, the player's expectation for the variable state can be maintained.

Further, as shown in FIG. 413, in the non-falling table, mode transition from the cave search mode to the temple search mode is defined in association with the value range "0 to 4" of the effect lottery counter 223y. . Of the 100 possible random numbers of the effect lottery counter 223y, the number of random numbers associated with the mode transition from the cave search mode to the temple search mode is 5, so the current game state is a probability variable state, In addition, in a state in which the lottery result of falling is included in the hold, the rate of transition (change) from the cave exploration mode to the temple exploration mode is 5% (5/100). On the other hand, the mode transition from the cave search mode to the super temple search mode is not associated with the value of the effect lottery counter 223y. If the range of the value of the effect lottery counter 223y is other than the above (that is, the range of "5 to 99"), mode transition is not performed. That is, the cave exploration mode is maintained.

Further, as shown in FIG. 413, in the non-falling table, the mode transition from the temple search mode to the cave search mode is defined in association with the value range "0 to 9" of the effect lottery counter 223y. . Of the 100 possible random numbers of the effect lottery counter 223y, the number of random numbers associated with the mode transition from the temple search mode to the cave search mode is 10, so the current game state is a probability variable state, In addition, in a state in which the lottery result of falling is included in the hold, the rate of transition (change) from the temple search mode to the cave search mode is 10% (10/100). On the other hand, the mode transition from the temple search mode to the super temple search mode is not associated with the value of the effect lottery counter 223y. If the range of the value of the effect lottery counter 223y is other than the above (that is, the range of "10 to 99"), mode transition is not performed. That is, the temple search mode is maintained.

Further, as shown in FIG. 413, in the non-falling table, the mode transition from the super temple search mode to the cave search mode is not associated with the value of the effect lottery counter 223y. On the other hand, the mode transition from the super-temple search mode to the temple search mode is defined in association with the value range "0 to 99" of the effect lottery counter 223y. That is, in a state in which the super-temple searching mode is set, when the non-falling table is referred to, the transition (falling) to the temple searching mode is made without fail. When the non-falling table is referenced in the super temple search mode, at the start of the previous change, the result of the falling lottery was not included in the hold, and the new hold until the start of the change display this time Only if the ball on hold is the result of a fall lottery. Therefore, in order to prevent the super temple mode from being maintained even though the lottery result of the fall is included, in this case it is always configured to switch to the temple search mode.

In this way, when the back mode transition lottery is executed with reference to the non-fall table (that is, the lottery result corresponding to the fall is included in the hold), the probability variable continuation table is referenced. The mode transition rate from cave search mode to temple search mode is lower than when it is done, and even if it shifts to temple search mode, the rate of falling to cave search mode is higher. That is, the rate of staying in the cave exploration mode with a low degree of expectation increases. Therefore, it is possible to realize the playability of predicting whether or not the current game state is the variable probability state by using the staying ratio of the cave search mode as a clue, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIG. 413, in the fallen table, the mode transition from the cave search mode to the temple search mode is defined in association with the value range "0, 1" of the effect lottery counter 223y. . Of the 100 possible random numbers of the production lottery counter 223y, the number of random numbers associated with the mode shift from the cave search mode to the temple search mode is 2, so the current game state is the time saving state. In this case, the rate of transition (changed) from the cave search mode to the temple search mode is 2% (2/100). On the other hand, the mode transition from the cave search mode to the super temple search mode is not associated with the value of the effect lottery counter 223y. If the range of the value of the effect lottery counter 223y is other than the above (that is, the range of "2 to 99"), mode transition is not performed. That is, the cave search mode is maintained.

Further, as shown in FIG. 413, in the fallen table, the mode transition from the temple search mode to the cave search mode is defined in association with the value range "0 to 29" of the effect lottery counter 223y. . Of the 100 possible random numbers of the effect lottery counter 223y, the number of random numbers associated with the mode transition from the temple search mode to the cave search mode is 30, so the current game state is a probability variable state, In addition, in a state in which the lottery result of falling is included in the hold, the rate of transition (change) from the temple search mode to the cave search mode is 30% (30/100). On the other hand, the mode transition from the temple search mode to the super temple search mode is not associated with the value of the effect lottery counter 223y. If the range of the value of the effect lottery counter 223y is other than the above (that is, the range of "30 to 99"), mode transition is not performed. That is, the temple search mode is maintained.

Further, as shown in FIG. 413, in the fallen table, the mode transition from the super temple search mode to the cave search mode is not associated with the value of the effect lottery counter 223y. On the other hand, the mode transition from the super-temple search mode to the temple search mode is defined in association with the value range "0 to 99" of the effect lottery counter 223y. That is, in the state in which the super-temple search mode is set, when the fallen table is referred to, the transition (fall) to the temple search mode is made without fail in the same manner as when the non-falled table is referred to. In the super-temple search mode, the fallen table is referred to only when it is in the variable probability state at the start of the previous fluctuation, and the special symbol lottery results in falling. Therefore, in order to prevent the super temple mode from being maintained even though the lottery result of the fall is included, in this case it is always configured to switch to the temple search mode.

In this way, when the back mode transition lottery is executed with reference to the table for fallen (that is, in the time saving state), the temple from the cave search mode is further removed from the cave search mode than when the table for not fallen is referenced. Mode transition rate to search mode is low, and even if you shift to temple search mode, the rate of falling to cave search mode is greatly increased. That is, the rate of staying in the cave exploration mode with a low degree of expectation increases. Therefore, it is possible to realize the game property of predicting whether or not the current game state is the variable probability state by using the staying ratio of the cave search mode as a clue, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Returning to FIG. 412(a), the description continues. The pending change lottery table 222c refers to the look-ahead result executed based on the detection of the start winning for the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640, and the number of pending balls symbols corresponding to the start winning. It is a data table referred to when executing a lottery in the display mode of . The details of this hold change lottery table 222c will be described with reference to FIG. 414(a). FIG. 414(a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the hold change lottery table 222c.

As shown in FIG. 414(a), in the pending change lottery table 222c, the value of the effect lottery counter 223y in which each pending design mode (white, blue, green, red) is selected for each prefetch result (variation type) is defined in association with the range of More specifically, as shown in FIG. 414(a), when the variation type is "long out", the value of the effect lottery counter 223y is in the range of "0 to 98", and the white reserved symbol Modes are defined in association with each other, and blue reserved symbol modes are defined in association with the value "99" of the effect lottery counter 223y. On the other hand, the value of the effect lottery counter 223y is not associated with the green and red reserved symbol modes. Therefore, when the look-ahead result becomes a long-out variation type (the long-out look-ahead result is notified from the main controller 110 by the winning information command), 99% of the pending ball number symbols corresponding to the start winning A white reserved design mode is set at a rate of (99/100), and a blue reserved design mode is set at a rate of 1% (1/100). That is, in the case of long out, almost, the white reserved design mode is set, and it is extremely rare that the reserved change (the reserved design mode other than white) is set.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 414 (a), for the variation type "normal reach out", the value of the effect lottery counter 223y is in the range of "0 to 94", the white pending symbol mode is associated. , and the value of the effect lottery counter 223y is defined in a range of "95 to 99" in association with a blue reserved symbol mode. On the other hand, the value of the effect lottery counter 223y is not associated with the green and red reserved symbol modes. Therefore, if the look-ahead result is off and the variation type is normal reach, the white pending pattern mode is set at a rate of 95% (95/100) as the pending ball number pattern corresponding to the start winning prize, and 5% ( 5/100), a blue reserved design mode is set. That is, even in the case of the lost normal reach, the white pending symbol mode is set at a relatively high rate, and the rate at which the pending change (non-white pending symbol mode) is set is low.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 414(a), for the variation type "outgoing super reach", the value of the effect lottery counter 223y is in the range of "0 to 74", and the white reserved symbol mode corresponds. is defined with, the range of "75 to 89" is defined in association with the blue reserved design mode, and the range of "90 to 97" is defined in association with the green reserved design mode. , “98, 99” are defined in association with red reserved symbol modes. That is, in the case of the variation type of super-reach, in which the variation time is long and a relatively flashy (lively) production mode is executed, the ratio of the white pending symbol mode is 75% (75/100) and others. It is lower than the variation type of the deviation, and the percentage of the blue reserved design mode is as high as 10% (10/100). Furthermore, it can also be set to a green or red reserved symbol mode. That is, the ratio of green reserved design mode is 8% (8/100), and the ratio of red reserved design mode is 2% (2/100). Therefore, in the case of a green or red reserved pattern mode, at least the variation type below the normal reach out (variation type with low expectation) is denied, so that the player's expectation for the big hit is improved. be able to.

Further, as shown in FIG. 414(a), when the variation type is "win normal reach", the value of the effect lottery counter 223y is in the range of "0 to 74", and the white pending symbol mode is associated. , and the range of "75 to 84" is defined in association with the blue reserved design mode, and the range of "85 to 94" is defined in association with the green reserved design mode, A red pending symbol mode is defined in association with the range of "95 to 99". That is, the rate of being set to the green or red reserved symbol mode is higher than in the case of the lost super reach.

Further, as shown in FIG. 414(a), when the variation type is "win super reach", the value of the effect lottery counter 223y is in the range of "0 to 49", and the white reserved symbol mode corresponds. is defined with, the range of "50 to 59" is defined in association with the blue reserved design mode, and the range of "60 to 84" is defined in association with the green reserved design mode. , and the range of "85 to 99" are defined in association with red reserved symbol modes. That is, the rate of occurrence of pending change itself is improved, and the percentage of green and red pending symbol modes selected is also high, compared to the variation type of loss super reach and hit normal reach. Therefore, when the reserved symbol mode of green or red is set, the feeling of expectation for the big win can be further improved.

Returning to FIG. 412, the description continues. The change point calculation table 222d is a data table that is referred to when calculating a change point that serves as a criterion for determining whether or not the pending batch change effect (see FIGS. 402 and 403) can be executed. Details will be described later, but at the time of the lottery for the batch change effect on hold, this change point is a deviation between the variation type of each hold ball and the expected jackpot indicated from the hold pattern mode (notice low expectation The number of points is set to be large as the number of points is set too high. It is configured such that the more a reserved pattern mode with a relatively low degree of expectation is set by the reserved change performance, the more easily the performance for improving the degree of expectation is executed by the reserved collective change performance. Thereby, the degree of expectation can be notified more appropriately by the reserved symbol mode. Details of the change point calculation table 222d will be described with reference to FIG. 414(b).

As shown in FIG. 414(b), in the change point lottery table 222d, change points are associated with each change type (forecasting result) of the reserved ball and each reserved pattern mode set for the reserved ball. are stipulated. In the first control example, when a plurality of reserved balls are reserved at the time of detecting the start winning, the change point of each reserved ball is calculated by the change point lottery table 222d, and the total value of the change points is calculated. Based on this, it is configured to draw a lottery as to whether or not the pending batch change effect can be executed. That is, the larger the total value of change points, the higher the execution ratio of the pending batch change effect. As a result, even if a lower expectation degree is once notified in the reservation change performance, an opportunity to improve the expectation degree can be given by the reservation collective change performance, so that the expectation degree can be more appropriately notified by the reservation pattern mode. can be done.

As shown in FIG. 414(b), "0" is defined as a change point in association with the variation types of short and long deviations regardless of the reserved symbol mode. In addition, with respect to the variation type of the lost normal reach, "1" is defined as a change point in association with the reserved design mode of white reservation, and "0" is defined as the change point with respect to the other reserved design modes. are defined in association with each other. In addition, for the variation type of super reach out, "2" is defined as a change point in association with the reserved design mode of white reservation, and "2" is defined as the change point for the reserved design mode of blue reservation. 1" is defined in association with the other reserved design modes, and '0' is defined in association with the other reserved symbol modes as a change point. In addition, for the variation type of hit normal reach and hit super reach, 3 is defined as a change point in association with the reserved design mode of white reservation, and as a change point for the reserved design mode of blue reservation 2 is defined in correspondence, 1 is defined in correspondence with the reserved design mode of green reservation, and 0 is defined in correspondence with the reserved design mode of red reservation as a change point.

In this way, in the first control example, the more the reserved symbol mode with a lower degree of expectation is set for the reserved ball of the variation type with a higher degree of expectation, the more change points there are. That is, the larger the room for improving the expectation level of the reserved symbol mode, the more the change points are, so that the execution of the reserved batch change effect is more likely to be permitted. By configuring in this way, it is possible to notify a more appropriate degree of expectation according to the reserved symbol mode.

Returning to FIG. 412(a), the description continues. The collective change lottery table 222e is a data table that is referred to when performing a lottery as to whether or not the pending collective change effect can be executed. Details of the collective change lottery table 222e will be described with reference to FIG. 415(a). FIG. 415(a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the collective change lottery table 222e. As shown in FIG. 415(a), in the collective change lottery table 222e, the value range of the effect lottery counter 223y for determining the execution of the pending collective change effect is defined in association with each total change point value. ing. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 415(a), when the total value of change points is 0, the value of the effect lottery counter 223y is not associated. In addition, when the total value of change points is 1, the value "0 to 9" of the effect lottery counter 223y is defined in correspondence, and when the total value of change points is 2, the value of the effect lottery counter 223y is defined. "0 to 24" are defined in association with each other, and the value "0 to 49" of the effect lottery counter 223y is defined in association with the total value of change points of 3 or more. That is, if the change point is 1, the pending collective change effect is selected at a rate of 10%, and if the change point is 2, the pending collective change effect is selected at a rate of 25%, and the change point is 3. For example, the pending collective change effect is selected at a rate of 50%.

Thus, in the first control example, as the total number of change points increases (holding symbol mode with low expectation is set for the holding ball of high expectation variation type), the holding collective change production is configured to have a high percentage of decisions to execute. As a result, the larger the room for improving the degree of expectation of the reserved symbol mode, the more the number of change points, so that the execution of the reserved collective change effect is more likely to be permitted. By configuring in this way, it is possible to notify a more appropriate degree of expectation by the reserved symbol mode.

Returning to FIG. 412(a), the description continues. The chance charge lottery table 222f is a data table referred to in order to determine whether or not the chance charge effect can be executed. Details of the chance charge lottery table 222f will be described with reference to FIG. 415(b). FIG. 415(b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the chance charge lottery table 222f. As shown in FIG. 415(b), in the chance charge lottery table 222f, the number of pending balls and the value range of the effect lottery counter 223y determined to execute the chance charge effect are associated with each variation type. stipulated.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 415(b), in the variation patterns of lost normal reach and lost super reach, the value range of the effect lottery counter 223y is "0 to 4” are defined in association with each other. In addition, when the number of reserved balls is 2, the value range of the effect lottery counter 223y is defined in correspondence with "0 to 14", and when the number of reserved balls is 3 or more, the value of the effect lottery counter 223y is defined. A range "0 to 24" is associated and defined. That is, if the number of pending balls is 0 or 1, execution of the chance charge effect is determined at a rate of 5%, and if the number of pending balls is 2, execution of the chance charge effect is determined at a rate of 15%. If the number of pending balls is 3 or more, execution of the chance charge effect is determined at a rate of 25%.

Further, as shown in FIG. 415(b), in the normal reach variation pattern, the number of retained balls of 0 and 1 is defined in association with the range of the value of the effect lottery counter 223y "0 to 34". On the other hand, the value of the effect lottery counter 223y is not associated with the number of pending balls of 2 or more. That is, if the number of pending balls is 0 or 1, execution of the chance charge effect is determined at a rate of 35%, while if the number of pending balls is 2 or more, execution of the chance charge effect is determined. do not have. That is, when the number of held balls is 1 or less, the decision rate of the chance charge effect is higher than in the case of the variation pattern of loss. The reason why the chance charge effect is not executed when the number of pending balls is 2 or more is to suppress the problem that the spirit gauge is accumulated too much and a big win is started before it is completely consumed. That is, in the case of winning normal reach, the fluctuation time is relatively short (there are few chances to execute the chance-up effect), so there is a high possibility that the spirit gauge will be accumulated beyond the timing at which the chance-up is possible. Then, the number of spirit gauges accumulated in the chance charge effect is determined only according to the number of held balls. That is, the higher the number of held balls, the higher the possibility that a larger number of spirit gauges will be set. Therefore, in this control example, when the number of pending balls is large under the situation where the change is a hit, the execution of the chance charge effect is avoided. As a result, it is possible to suppress the problem that the big win is started before the number of the spirit gauge is completely consumed.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 415(b), in the variation pattern of winning super reach, the value range "0 to 49" of the effect lottery counter 223y is defined in association with the number of held balls of 0 to 2. The value range "0 to 9" of the effect lottery counter 223y is defined in association with the number of reserved balls of 3. On the other hand, the value of the effect lottery counter 223y is not associated with the number of reserved balls of 4. That is, if the number of pending balls is 0 to 2, execution of the chance charge effect is determined at a rate of 50%, and if the number of pending balls is 3, execution of the chance charge effect is determined at a rate of 10%. On the other hand, if the number of reserved balls is 4, execution of the chance charge effect is not determined. That is, when the number of pending balls is 2 or less, the determination ratio of the chance charge effect is higher than in the fluctuation pattern of loss and the fluctuation pattern of hit normal reach. When the number of reserved balls is 3, the execution ratio of the chance charge effect is low, and when the number of reserved balls is 4, the chance charge effect is not executed. This is for the purpose of suppressing the problem that the big win starts before the spirit gauge is completely consumed, as in the normal reach for the win.

Returning to FIG. 412(a), the description continues. The continuous suggestive effect selection table 222g is used when selecting the effect scenario of the continuous suggestive effect to be executed over the 96th to 99th variable display effects after the end of the jackpot (that is, after the start of the time saving state of the normal symbols). A referenced data table. Details of the continuation suggestion effect selection table 222g will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 416 is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of the continuation suggestion effect selection table 222g. As shown in FIG. 416, the continuation suggestion effect selection table 222g is a continuation determination table that is referred to when the continuation of the variable probability state is determined until the end of the continuation suggestion effect, and the continuation suggestion effect until the end of the continuation suggestion effect. It is confirmed that the continuous rich table referred to when the suspended ball is not suspended, but it is confirmed that the probability variable state is maintained within the suspension, and the time-saving state at the end of the continuous suggestion production. and a non-continuation table. In each table, a plurality of combinations (scenarios) of presentation modes to be executed in the 96th to 99th variable displays are defined.

As shown in FIG. 416, in the continuation decision table, seven scenarios "01H" to "07H" are defined in association with the range of values of the effect lottery counter 223y. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 416, in the 96th to 98th fluctuation displays, a weak attack with a low expectation (see FIG. 393(a)) is executed, and in the 99th fluctuation display, a high-expectation attack is executed. Values "0 to 9" of the effect lottery counter 223y are defined in association with the effect scenario "01H" in which a strong attack (see FIG. 393(b)) is executed and the door 806 is broken through. Also, a weak attack (see FIG. 393(a)) is executed in the 96th and 97th variable displays, and a strong attack (see FIG. 393(b)) is executed in the 98th and 99th variable displays to break through the door 806. A value of "10 to 19" of the effect lottery counter 223y is defined in association with the effect scenario "02H" of the aspect to be performed, and a weak attack (see FIG. 393(a)) is executed in the 96th variable display, In the 97th to 99th fluctuation display, the effect lottery counter 223y has a value of "20 to 59" for the production scenario "03H" in which a strong attack (see FIG. 393(b)) is executed to break through the door 806. Effect lottery counter 223y for effect scenario "04H" defined in association with and in which a strong attack (see FIG. 393(b)) is executed in all of the 96th to 99th fluctuation displays to break through the door 806. values "60 to 89" are defined in association with each other. In other words, the selection rate of production scenarios with a small number of strong attacks is low, and the selection rate of production scenarios with a large number of strong attacks is high.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 416, the continuation decision table is provided with a special effect scenario in which the door 806 is broken through less than 99 times. That is, the effect scenario "05H" (range of values "90, 91" of the effect lottery counter 223y) in which a light attack is performed in the 96th variable effect and the door 806 is broken through as it is, and the light attack, 97 in the 96th time. A production scenario "06H" (a value in the range of "92 to 94" of the production lottery counter 223y) in which a strong attack is performed for the first time to break through the door 806; A production scenario "07H" (a value of the production lottery counter 223y ranging from "95 to 99") is set in which a strong attack is made to break through the door 806. These special aspects scenarios may only be set when the table for continuation determination is referenced. That is, until the end of the 99th variable display, there is a possibility that it will be executed only in a state where it is confirmed that the probability variable state continues. Therefore, by executing a special scenario, It is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 416, four scenarios from "08H" to "0BH" are defined in the continuous rich table. Since the production flow of the production scenarios "08H" to "0BH" is exactly the same as the production scenarios "01H" to "04H" described above, the details thereof will be omitted here. As shown in FIG. 416, the production scenario "08H" is defined in association with the values "0 to 14" of the production lottery counter 223y, and the production scenario "09H" is defined by the values "15 to 15" of the production lottery counter 223y. 29” is defined in association with the effect scenario “0AH”, the value “30 to 69” of the effect lottery counter 223y is defined in association with the effect scenario “0BH”, and the value “ 70 to 99” are defined in association with each other. That is, similar to the continuation confirmation table, the selection rate of production scenarios with a small number of strong attacks is low, and the selection rate of production scenarios with a large number of strong attacks is high. In addition, if the lottery result corresponding to the fall occurs during the progress of the scenario specified in the continuous rich table, the effect specified in the non-continuous table will be displayed from the fluctuation display that resulted in the lottery result of that fall. It is switched to the production scenario "0CH" which is one of the scenarios. As a result, even if the reserved balls up to the 99th variation display are not reserved at the start of the continuation suggestion effect, the game state at the end of the 99th variation can be accurately reproduced by switching the scenario on the way. can be notified.

Further, as shown in FIG. 416, the discontinuation table defines four scenarios "0CH" to "0FH". The production flow of the production scenarios "0CH" to "0FH" is exactly the same as the production scenarios "01H" to "04H" described above, except that the breakthrough of the door 806 is ultimately failed. Details are omitted. As shown in FIG. 416, the production scenario "0CH" is defined in association with the value "0 to 39" of the production lottery counter 223y, and the production scenario "0DH" is defined by the value "40 to 40" of the production lottery counter 223y. 79” is defined in association with the effect scenario “0EH”, the value “80 to 94” of the effect lottery counter 223y is defined in association with the effect scenario “0FH”, and the value “ 95 to 99” are defined in association with each other. That is, in contrast to the continuation determination table and the continuation rich table, the selection rate of production scenarios with a small number of strong attacks is high, and the selection rate of production scenarios with a large number of strong attacks is low. there is Therefore, the greater the number of strong attacks, the lower the possibility that the non-continuation table was referred to and the production scenario was determined. can be done. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Returning to FIG. 412(a), the description continues. The interrupt repeated hit lottery table 222h is a data table referred to for lottery of whether or not the interrupt repeated hit effect (see FIG. 399) can be executed, and effect type. The details of the interrupt repeated hit lottery table 222h will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 417 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the interrupt consecutive hit lottery table 222h. As shown in FIG. 417, in the interrupt repeated hitting lottery table 222h, the effect type and the value range of the effect lottery counter 223y are defined for each variation type in association with each other.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 417, in the long fluctuation pattern, it is executed during the normal fluctuation production period, and for the production type of the production mode that can reduce the monsters to the minimum of 10 remaining monsters are defined in association with the values "0 to 4" of the effect lottery counter 223y. For this reason, in the case of a long-out, the interrupt continuous hit effect is executed at a rate of 5% (5/100).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 417, in the change pattern of the lost normal reach, the effect lottery is executed during the normal change effect period, and the effect type of the effect mode that can reduce the remaining monsters to the minimum of 5 The value "0 to 9" of the counter 223y is defined in association with the value of the effect lottery counter 223y for the effect type of the effect mode that is executed during reach fluctuation and can reduce the number of monsters to the minimum of four remaining monsters. "10 to 14" are associated and defined. Therefore, in the fluctuation pattern of the lost normal reach, the execution of the 15% rate interrupt continuous hit effect in total is determined. That is, the execution of the interrupt continuous hit effect is determined at a higher rate than in the case of long out.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 417, in the variation pattern of Lost Super Reach, as an interrupting barrage effect executed during the normal variation effect period, the effect mode can be reduced to a minimum of 5 remaining monsters. A value "0 to 4" of the effect lottery counter 223y is defined in association with the type, and the value of the effect lottery counter 223y is defined for the effect type of the effect mode in which the number of monsters can be reduced to a minimum of four remaining monsters. "5 to 9" are defined in association with each other. In addition, as an interrupt barrage effect executed during reach fluctuation, the value "10 to 14" of the effect lottery counter 223y is associated with the effect type of the effect mode in which the number of monsters can be reduced to a minimum of four. Values "15 to 19" of the effect lottery counter 223y are defined in association with the effect type of the effect mode in which the number of monsters can be reduced to three at the minimum. That is, the execution ratio of the total interrupting continuous hit effect is higher than that of the losing normal reach, and the number of monsters can be reduced to a smaller number, so that the player's expectation for the big win can be improved.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 417, in the variation pattern of hit normal reach, as an interrupt continuous hitting effect executed during the normal variation effect period, the effect type of effect mode that can reduce the number of monsters to the minimum of 5 remaining monsters. , the value "0 to 3" of the effect lottery counter 223y is defined in correspondence, and the value "4" of the effect lottery counter 223y is defined for the effect type of the effect mode that can reduce the number of monsters to 0. are defined in association with each other. In addition, as an interrupting barrage effect executed during reach fluctuation, the value "5 to 24" of the effect lottery counter 223y is associated with the effect type of the effect mode in which the number of monsters can be reduced to a minimum of four. A value "25" of the effect lottery counter 223y is defined in association with the effect type of the effect mode that is defined and can reduce the number of monsters to zero. That is, the execution ratio of the total interruption continuous hit effect is higher than in the case of losing, and there is a possibility that all the monsters will be defeated, so that the player's expectation for the big win can be improved.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 417, in the variation pattern of winning super reach, as an interruption barrage effect executed during the normal variation effect period, the effect mode can be reduced to a minimum of four remaining monsters. The value "0, 1" of the effect lottery counter 223y is defined in association with the type, and the value "2" of the effect lottery counter 223y is defined for the effect type of the effect mode in which the number of monsters can be reduced to 0. are defined in association with each other. In addition, as an interrupting barrage effect executed during reach fluctuation, the value "3 to 19" of the effect lottery counter 223y is associated with the effect type of the effect mode in which the number of monsters can be reduced to a minimum of four. A value "20 to 39" of the effect lottery counter 223y is defined in association with the effect type of the specified effect mode in which the number of monsters can be reduced to 3, and the effect mode in which the number of monsters can be reduced to 0. , the value "40, 41" of the effect lottery counter 223y is defined in association with the effect type. That is, compared to the case of losing or winning normal reach, the execution ratio of the total interrupt continuous hit performance is higher and the possibility of defeating all the monsters is higher, so that the player's expectation for the big win is improved. can be done.

In this way, in the first control example, the execution timing of the interrupt continuous hit effect and the number of monsters that can be subjugated are configured to be different for each variation type, and only in the case of a big win, the effect of subjugating all the monsters is provided. It is configured so that it can be selected. By configuring in this way, it is possible to actively perform the repeated hitting operation during the execution of the interrupting repeated hitting effect, so that the player's willingness to participate in the interrupting repeated hitting effect can be improved.

Next, the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 412(b). FIG. 412(b) is a block diagram showing the contents of the RAM 223. As shown in FIG. The RAM 223 contains a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b, a normal reserved ball number counter 223c, a fluctuation start flag 223d, a stop type selection flag 223e, and a game state storage area 223f. , a guaranteed time counter 223g, a continuous scenario storage area 223h, a winning flag 223i during right hitting, a repeated hitting type storage area 223j, a chance charge waiting flag 223k, a charge number counter 223m, and a charge state number counter 223n. , batch change flag 223p, change point storage area 223q, reserved symbol state storage area 223r, variable time timer 223s, operation effective period timer 223t, stop operation number counter 223u, continuous hit effective period timer 223v, collectively At least a change period timer 223x, an effect lottery counter 223y, and another memory area 223z are provided.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a is a counter that counts up to 4 times the number of reserved balls (standby number) corresponding to the lottery of the first special symbol reserved in the main control device 110, and special symbol 2 reserved. The number-of-balls counter 223b is a counter that counts up to four times the number of reserved balls corresponding to the second special symbol lottery.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 directly accesses the main control device 110, and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 cannot get the value of Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the number of reserved balls command transmitted from the main controller 110, and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b Then, the number of reserved balls is managed for each type of special symbol.

Specifically, in the main controller 110, when the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 is added to the number of pending balls in the variable display, or when the main controller 110 When the variable display is executed and the number of reserved balls is subtracted, the number of reserved balls indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d after addition or subtraction, or the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e Send the command to the audio ramp controller 113 .

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 or the special symbol 2 reserved ball from the reserved ball number command The value of the number counter 203e is acquired and stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b (see S3910 in FIG. 451). As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b in accordance with the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110. While synchronizing with the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110, the values can be updated.

The values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223 a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223 b are used to display the reserved ball number symbols on the third symbol display device 81 . That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b in response to the reception of the reserved ball number command. , In order to notify the display control device 114 of the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b after storage, a display reserved ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114. .

When the display control device 114 receives this display pending ball number command, the value of the pending ball number indicated by the command, that is, the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 223a of the audio lamp control device 113 and the special symbol 2 pending ball number counter 223a The drawing of the image is controlled so as to display the number of pending ball symbols corresponding to the value of the number of ball counter 223b in the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81. FIG. As described above, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b are synchronized with the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110. while its value is changed. Therefore, the number of reserved ball number symbols displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third pattern display device 81 is also synchronized with the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110. It can be changed while Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of held balls whose variable display is held.

The normal reserved ball number counter 223c has the same content as the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b described above, but differs in that the target is changed from the special symbol to the normal symbol. Since the technical control concept is the same, detailed description is omitted.

The fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on when the first special symbol fluctuation pattern command or the second special symbol fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S3904 in FIG. 451), and the third symbol It is turned off when the variable display is set on the display device 81 (see S4202 in FIG. 455). When the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on, a fluctuation pattern command for display is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is executed by the MPU 221 in the command output processing (S3102) of the main processing (see FIG. 441), It is transmitted toward the display control device 114 . In the display control device 114, by receiving this display variation pattern command, the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is used to perform the variation display of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81. Display control of the variable effect is started.

The stop type selection flag 223e is turned on when receiving a special symbol stop type command transmitted from the main controller 110 (see S3907 in FIG. 451), and the stop type in the third symbol display device 81 is set. is turned off (see S4208 in FIG. 455). When the stop type selection flag 223e is turned on, the stop type is determined based on the stop type (jackpot type in the case of a jackpot) extracted from the received stop type command.

The game state storage area 223f is a storage area for storing data corresponding to the game state of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. This game state storage area 223f is updated every time a state command output every time the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed is received from the main controller 110 (see S3902 in FIG. 451). The game state storage area 223f is composed of, for example, a 1-byte storage area, and is configured so that the game state can be specified by the state of the lower 2 bits. More specifically, for example, the least significant bit indicates whether or not it is the time saving state of normal symbols, and the bit of the second lower order bit indicates whether or not it is the probability variable state of special symbols. Therefore, in the "low-probability state of special symbols" and "normal state of normal symbols", the lower 2 bits are "00B", and in the "low-probability state of special symbols" and "time-saving state of normal symbols", the lower The 2 bits are "01B", and in the "probability variable state of special symbols" and "time saving state of normal symbols", the lower 2 bits are "11B". The MPU 221 of the voice ramp control device 113 can grasp the game state of the pachinko machine 10 on the side of the voice ramp control device 113 based on the data stored in the game state storage area 223f.

Shortening of working hours guarantee counter 223f is a counter for counting the number of remaining fluctuations in which the time saving state is guaranteed. The initial value of the guaranteed time counter 223f is set to 0, and the value is set to 100 at the end of the jackpot (see S4107 in FIG. 454). In addition, the value is decremented by 1 every time the execution of a new variable display is set (see S4304 in FIG. 456). As described above, in the first control example, after the end of the jackpot, the time-saving state of the normal symbols is maintained until the lottery of the special symbols is executed 100 times. By counting the number of time saving guarantees by the time saving guarantee number counter 223f, the sound lamp control device 113 side can also accurately grasp the guaranteed number of times.

The continuation scenario storage area 223h is a storage area for storing data indicating the type of effect scenario determined from the continuation suggestion effect selection table 222g (see FIG. 416) at the start of the variable probability continuation suggestion effect. The initial value of this continuation scenario storage area 223h is set to 00H, and when the production scenario is determined by lottery using the continuation suggestion production selection table 222g (see FIG. 416) at the start timing of the variable probability continuation suggestion production, Data indicating the production scenario is stored (see S4409 in FIG. 457). During execution of the variable probability continuation suggestion effect, the variable display mode at the start of each variable display is determined based on the data in the continuous scenario storage area 223h (see S4415 in FIG. 457).

The winning flag 223i during right hitting is a flag indicating whether or not the jackpot in execution is a jackpot won during the right hitting gaming state (time saving state of normal symbols). If this right-handed winning flag 223i is on, it indicates that it is a jackpot won during the right-handed gaming state, and if it is off, it indicates a jackpot won during the left-handed gaming state (that is, the first hit). indicates that At the end of the jackpot, the back mode is set according to the state of the winning flag 223i during hitting to the right. That is, if it is on, the temple search mode is set, and if it is off, the cave search mode is set (see S4109 and S4110 in FIG. 454). As described above, when the jackpot is hit in the left-handed game state (that is, the jackpot is hit in the lottery of the first special symbol), only at a rate of 50%, the state is shifted to the variable probability state, while the jackpot is hit in the right-handed game state. When it becomes (that is, it becomes a big hit in the lottery of the second special symbol), it shifts to the variable probability state at a rate of 80%. This difference in ratio is configured to be notified by the degree of expectation indicated by the rear mode.

The repeated hitting type storage area 223j is a storage area for storing data indicating the type of interrupting repeated hitting effect (the execution timing of the effect and the lower limit value of the number of monster subtractions). Depending on the data in the repeated hit type storage area 223j, the start timing of the interrupt repeated hit effect, the subtraction number of the monster with respect to the depression of the PUSH button 10317, and the like are set.

The chance charge standby flag 223k is a flag indicating whether or not it is a period (chance charge standby period) from when the execution of the chance charge effect is determined to when the chance charge effect is actually started. If so, it indicates that it is the chance charge waiting period. The initial value of the chance charge wait flag 223k is set to OFF, and is set to ON when execution of the chance charge effect is determined (see S4564 in FIG. 459), and execution of the chance charge effect is started. is set to off (see S3313 in FIG. 443). When a new start prize is detected while the chance charge waiting flag 223k is on, the number of gauges is added to the number of gauges determined in advance as the number of spirit gauges accumulated in the chance charge performance to be executed thereafter. It is determined whether or not

The charge number counter 223m is a counter indicating the gauge number of the spirit gauge notified in the chance charge effect. This charge number counter 223m has an initial value set to 0, and when execution of the chance charge effect is decided, a value obtained by adding 1 to the number of pending balls at the time of the decision is set (see FIG. 459). (see S4563). Also, by executing the chance-up effect, every time the spirit gauge is consumed, the value is decremented by 1 and updated (see S3559 and S3561 in FIG. 446).

The charge state number counter 223n is a counter that indicates the number of remaining fluctuations until consumption of the energy gauge accumulated by the chance charge effect is completed. This charge state number counter 223n is set to a value corresponding to the current number of pending balls at the start of the chance charge effect (see S3314 in FIG. 443), and each time a new variable display effect is set to be executed, the value increases. It is decremented by 1 (see S4302 in FIG. 456). While the value of the charge state counter 223n is 1 or more, it is determined whether or not to execute the chance-up effect by consuming the spirit gauge each time the chance-up effect can be executed.

The collective change flag 223p is a flag indicating whether or not the pending collective change effect is being executed. If it is ON, it means that the pending collective change effect is being executed, and if it is OFF, the pending collective change is being executed. Indicates that the performance is not in progress. The batch change flag 223p has an initial value set to OFF, and is set to ON when execution of the pending batch change effect is set (see S4059 in FIG. 453).

The change point storage area 223q is a storage area for storing the change points specified by referring to the change point calculation table 222d described above. The change point storage area 223q is configured to be able to store the change points of each reserved ball separately.

The reserved symbol state storage area 223r is a storage area for storing data indicating the reserved symbol mode of each reserved ball number symbol. With the data stored in the reserved symbol state storage area 223r, it is possible to accurately grasp the reserved symbol mode of each reserved ball number symbol.

The variable time timer 223s is a timer for measuring variable time. The progress of the variable display presentation can be accurately determined based on the timer value of the variable time timer 223s.

The operation effective period timer 223t is a timer for measuring the period during which the PUSH button 10317 is effective in the press stop effect (see FIG. 395). It is determined by this operation effective period timer 223t whether or not the operation of the PUSH button 10317 in the pressing stop effect is treated as valid. In the press stop effect, separate button images and validity period gauges are displayed on the display screen for each symbol row, but in reality, the operation of the PUSH button 10317 is validated by a single operation validity period. It is determined whether or not By configuring in this way, it is possible to simplify the judgment as to whether or not the stop operation of each symbol row is valid, so that the processing load of the sound lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

The stop operation number counter 223u is a counter that indicates the number of remaining stop operations that can be executed in the press stop effect (see FIG. 395). If a stop operation is detected during the valid operation period while the value of the stop operation number counter 223u is 3, the left symbol column is stopped and displayed while the value is 2 and the operation is stopped during the valid operation period. When the operation is detected, the right symbol row is stopped and displayed, and when the value is 1 and the stop operation is detected during the operation valid period, the center symbol row is stopped and displayed.

The repeated hit valid period timer 223s is a timer for measuring the period during which the repeated hit operation on the PUSH button 10317 is valid in the interrupt repeated hit effect (see FIG. 399). It is determined whether or not the operation of the PUSH button 10317 in the interrupt continuous hitting effect is treated as valid by the continuous hitting effective period timer 223s.

The collective change period timer 223x is a timer for measuring the period during which the PUSH button 10317 is valid in the pending collective change effect (see FIGS. 403 and 404). By this collective change period timer 223x, it is determined whether or not the operation on the PUSH button 10317 in the pending collective change effect is treated as valid.

The effect lottery counter 223y is a random number counter for executing the lottery for the effect mode, as described above.

The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. FIG. The other memory area 223z includes, for example, a winning information storage area for storing winning information based on winning information commands received from the main controller 110, and the like. The winning information storage area has a storage area consisting of four areas (first area to fourth area) for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In addition, it has one execution area. Winning information is stored in each area. In the pachinko machine 10, when the start winning is detected in the main controller 110, each of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 obtained according to the starting winning Based on the value, various information (win/fail, stop type, variation pattern) obtained when the special symbol lottery corresponding to the starting prize is performed is predicted (estimated) in the main controller 110, and the predicted various information. is notified from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp controller 113 by means of the winning information command.

When the winning information command is received, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts the various information (win/fail, stop type, variation pattern) notified by the winning information command as winning information. It is stored in the storage area 223a. More specifically, the extracted winning information is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (1st to 4th) among the four open areas (1st to 4th areas). be done. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest winning is stored, and the first area stores the data corresponding to the oldest winning.

The RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores commands received from the main controller 110 until processing corresponding to the commands is performed, and a timer that counts the performance time. are doing. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination processing (see FIG. 36) of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed, the first stored command among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read, and the command determination processing The command is parsed and processing is performed according to the command.

The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third pattern display device 81 performs variable display (variation) of the third pattern. production) and continuous announcement production are controlled. Details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

The power supply unit 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, etc., and a RAM deletion switch circuit 253 provided with a RAM deletion switch 122. have. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts supplied from the outside, various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, a voltage of 12 volts for driving a motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and backup voltages are supplied to the controllers 110 to 114 and the like as necessary voltages.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 at the time of power failure due to power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of stable DC 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power shutdown, power shutdown) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. Then, a power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. Even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 432).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input, and controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. Send to device 111 .

Next, referring to FIG. 418, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 418 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device 114. As shown in FIG. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the sound lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238 , and the MPU 231 , work RAM 233 , character ROM 234 and image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via the bus line 240 . . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237 , and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241 . A third pattern display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239 .

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model with a different lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot or a different number of prize balls paid out for one special symbol jackpot, the symbols displayed by the third symbol display device 81 are different. Since there are models with exactly the same specifications, the display control device 114 is made a common component to reduce costs.

The MPU 231, character ROM 234, image controller 237, resident video RAM 235, and normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described below.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the audio ramp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110 . The MPU 231 incorporates an instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is designed so that a system reset is applied from the power supply 115 immediately after power is turned on (including recovery from a power failure; the same shall apply hereinafter). is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231 . Each time an instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. Further, when the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer indicated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although the details will be described later, in this embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are stored in a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional game machine. The image data to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data.

Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. As a result, not only image data but also control programs and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the control program and the like are stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the read speed becomes slow especially when performing random access. For example, when reading data continuously arranged in a plurality of pages, the data of the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed. It takes a long time before the data is output. Also, when reading discontinuous data, a long time is required each time the data is read. As described above, since the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions that make up the control program. However, even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may deteriorate.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. store. The MPU 231 then executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233 . The work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), as will be described later, and reads and writes data at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores control programs executed by the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third pattern display device 81 , and is connected to the MPU 231 via a bus line 240 . The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234 to a resident video RAM 235, which is connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236 .

The character ROM 234 is constructed by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

The NAND type flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storage and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

Here, the NAND type flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in this pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. can. Therefore, the images displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated in order to increase the interest of the player.

In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store control programs and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 while storing a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2. In this way, the control program and fixed value data are provided to store the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without providing and storing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. Since the characters can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data is retrieved from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 .

Here, the NAND type flash memory 234a, due to its nature, generates a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data is written) when writing data, and generates defective data blocks into which data cannot be written. or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b applies known error correction to the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and avoids bad data blocks when reading and writing data to the NAND flash memory 234a. data address translation.

The ROM controller 234b corrects errors in the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a that contains error bits. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

In addition, the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data blocks of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids access to the defective data blocks. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address allocated to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b reads one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data corresponding to the designated address. is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. do. Then, the ROM controller 234 b outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 after performing known error correction processing.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and one page of data of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set in each bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b, for example, outputs the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using the other bank while data is set in one bank, or outputs the data specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or image controller 237 is transferred to the other bank. The processing of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234 can be improved.

The NOR type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub-storage unit in the character ROM 234, and is intended to complement the NAND type flash memory 234a. ). Of the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the NOR-type ROM 234d stores programs that are not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND-type flash memory 234a. At least a first program storage area 234d1 is provided for storing a portion of the boot program to be executed.

The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third pattern display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after releasing the system reset. As a result, the display control device 114 can be put into a state in which various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 stores the boot program within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a), which should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, instructions for 1024 words (1 word=2 bytes)) are stored. The number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 should be within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware and instructs the bus line 240 to specify the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified on the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d is transferred to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. , and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231 .

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and transfers the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. to specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234, while the address specified by the bus line 240 is the address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d, selects the program previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d. , the instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234 c and output to the MPU 231 .

Here, in this embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing in is as follows. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time to read the data of the first page after the address is specified until the data is output. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code that the MPU 231 should execute first after the system reset is released. If so, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read and set the buffer RAM 234c. You spend a lot of time waiting to receive your code. Therefore, the time taken to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory from which data can be read at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. Thus, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d into the buffer RAM 234c. , and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 . Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", and the MPU 231 can be activated in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

The boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program other than the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. , fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control program are stored in the program storage area of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). 233a and the data table storage area 233b. The MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. While using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c that is stored, a predetermined amount is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to this, the boot program is set only in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c is transferred to the program storage area 233a. The transfer process can be performed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in storage area 234d1. Therefore, after the transfer process, it is unnecessary to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 again in the buffer RAM 234c, so that the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the command pointer 231a to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to be set to a first predetermined address. As a result, when the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a after the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined number in the program storage area 233a. Set to a street address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processing can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but rather reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. and execute various processes. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch instructions at high speed and process the instructions.

Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount from the second program storage area 234a1. The instruction pointer 231a is programmed so as to include the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as a first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Execute the rest of the boot program contained in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, the remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control programs are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. Also, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, the initialization process (see S8002 in FIG. 460) executed after the boot process (see S8001 in FIG. 460) by the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address. Set the start address of the program corresponding to .

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can read the control program from the work RAM configured by the DRAM with a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

Further, as described above, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time simply by adding the NOR type ROM 234d with a very small capacity. can be done.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third pattern display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 423) transmitted from the MPU 231 to be described later, and draws one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c to be described later. The image drawn in the buffer is developed, and the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer is output to the third pattern display device 81 to display the image on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加. The image controller 237 performs the one-frame image drawing process and the one-frame image display process within the one-frame image display time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) on the third pattern display device 81 . parallel processing in

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing processing for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, the MPU 231 executes V interrupt processing (see FIG. 462(b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of causing the third pattern display device 81 to display the image developed by the previous drawing.

In this manner, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and issues a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs image drawing processing and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in accordance with a new drawing instruction in a frame buffer storing image information being displayed.

The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236 based on transfer instructions from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

Image drawing is performed using image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236 . That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 based on instructions from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, the NAND type flash memory makes it easy to increase the capacity of the ROM, but its read speed is slower than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. is configured to As will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image is drawn by the image controller 237 while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. can be processed. Therefore, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, when drawing the image. , the time required for reading the image can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

In particular, image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images to be displayed immediately after display is determined by main controller 110 or display controller 114 are permanently resident in resident video RAM 235. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until an image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

Further, when the display control device 114 draws an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, before the drawing is performed, the display controller 114 stores necessary data for drawing from the character ROM 234 in the normal video RAM 236. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal-use video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for image drawing. Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of , and the time required for reading the data can be saved, the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. can.

Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236 as well, there is no need to keep all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so there is no need to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. FIG. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of an SRAM of 132 kilobytes, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction given to the image controller 237 by the MPU 231 based on the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the head address (storage source head address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and top of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Contains an address. Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

The image controller 237 reads one block of data from a predetermined address in the character ROM 234 according to various information of this transfer instruction, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and stores it in the buffer RAM 237a when the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 is not in use. , is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 . Then, the processing is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source start address to the storage source end address indicated by the transfer instruction is transferred.

As a result, the image data read out from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 in a short time. can be done. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long period of time by transferring the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of image data, these video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for image drawing processing. , it is possible to prevent the display on the third pattern display device 81 from being too late.

In addition, since image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are used for image drawing processing and third symbol display. It is possible to easily determine the period during which the display processing on the device 81 is not used, and to simplify the processing.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 can be retained while the power is turned on without being overwritten. 235e and an error message image area 235f are provided, and at least a power-on variation image area 235b and a third pattern area 235d are provided.

The power-on main image area 235a is the power-on main image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 after power is turned on until all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is an area for storing corresponding data. In the power-on variation image area 235b, the game is started by the player while the main image at power-on is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the entry of a ball into the first start hole 64a is detected. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a power-on varying image for displaying the results of the lottery performed by the main controller 110 in a varying effect.

The MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on varying image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235 a when power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started. A transfer instruction is sent to the controller 237 (see FIG. 460).

Here, the power-on variation image will be described. Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on varying image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on varying image area 235b. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 displays the power-on main image (see FIG. 419) using the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a. It is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

At this time, when receiving a display variation pattern command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a variation pattern command from the main controller 110, which is an instruction command to start variation, the display control device 114 displays the main image at power-on. On the display screen of , a variation image at the time of power-on with an "○" symbol at the lower right position of the screen, and a variation image at the time of power-on with an "X" symbol at the same position as the "○" symbol are displayed during the variation period. Medium, alternately displayed repeatedly. Then, based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main controller 110, the lottery performed by the main controller 110 is selected from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113. The result is judged, and if it is ``a big hit with a special pattern'', an image showing it is displayed for a certain period after stopping the variable performance, and if it is ``no special pattern'', an image showing it is displayed to stop the variable performance. It will be displayed for a certain period of time later.

The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to use the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the rest of the image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person involved in the hall can confirm the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. Also, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the remaining image to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is displayed. To wait until the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying whether the operation is stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235.例文帳に追加can be done.

Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacture, since the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the operation of the third pattern display device 81 is started without any problem when the power is turned on. Furthermore, by using the NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress deterioration in the efficiency of the operation check.

Further, when the player starts the game while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the entry of the first entrance ball 64 is detected, the power-on fluctuation image area is displayed. The power-on variation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image resident in 235b, and the images showing "O" and "X" are alternately displayed on the third pattern display device 81. The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 as follows. As a result, a simple variation effect can be performed using the power-on variation image. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation performance.

Further, at the stage when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation effect image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. When the entry of the first entrance ball 64 is detected while the main image is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the corresponding variation effect can be immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加can.

Returning to FIG. 418, the description continues. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. The third symbol area 235d is an area for permanently storing the third symbol used in the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. That is, in the third pattern area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-described nine types of main patterns numbered "1" to "9", which are the third patterns, are resident. As a result, when the third pattern display device 81 performs a variable effect, it is not necessary to read image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. It is possible to quickly start a variable production. Therefore, after the ball enters the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b, the third symbol display device 81 fluctuates even though the first symbol display device 37 starts the variation effect. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the performance is not started immediately.

The character design area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character designs used in various effects displayed on the third design display device 81. FIG. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "Boy" are displayed according to various effects, and data corresponding to these characters are resident in the character design area 235e to control the display. When the device 114 changes the character design based on the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, instead of newly reading out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, the image data is stored in the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. By reading the image data resident in advance, the image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image. This eliminates the need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so even if the character ROM 234 uses the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the character design can be changed immediately.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when vibration is detected by the sound ramp control device 113 from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the sound ramp control device 113 detects the occurrence of a vibration error. Notify the display controller 114 with an error command. Also, when the audio lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of another error, the audio lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the error occurrence together with the error type by an error command. The display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81 when an error command is received.

Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the standpoint of preventing fraud by the player and protecting the player against errors. In the pachinko machine 10, since image data corresponding to various error messages are preliminarily resident in the error message image area 235f, the display control device 114 displays the error message in the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading the image data pre-resident in the image area 235f, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. As a result, it is not necessary to sequentially read the image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is read after receiving the error command. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data can be overwritten and updated as needed, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b and a second frame buffer 236c.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235, among the image data necessary for drawing the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data to be stored in each sub-area is predetermined.

The MPU 231 extracts image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 in a sub area provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236 . , instructs the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area for storing. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234 and transfers the read image data to the designated predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including the transfer data information in the later-described drawing list in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image. As a result, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. The image controller 237 writes the one-frame image drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 to either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby rendering the one-frame image to the frame buffer. While the image is developed and the image is developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame previously developed is read out from the other frame buffer, and sent to the third pattern display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information with the third pattern display device 81, a process for displaying the image for one frame is executed.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 can expand the one-frame image drawn in one of the frame buffers, and simultaneously , the image of one frame developed earlier can be read from the other frame buffer, and the image of the read one frame can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

A frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame for displaying an image on the third pattern display device 81 are used for drawing processing of an image for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds of completion, the MPU 231 alternately designates either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. be.

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. be. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternating designations, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing drawing processing for an image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and for temporarily storing work data and flags used when various control programs are executed by the MPU 231. Configured. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, and a stored image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233i, a drawing target buffer flag 233j, a background mode storage area 233k, and an interruption data storage area 233m.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing control programs executed by the MPU 231 . When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. After storing all the control programs in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

The data table storage area 233b includes a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main controller 110, and a display data table. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in one effect displayed by the table and a transfer data table defining transfer timing.

These data tables are normally stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 434 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. , these data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. After all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data tables stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared one by one for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a variable effect, a round effect, etc. , an ending effect, and a display data table corresponding to the demo effect are prepared.

The variation effect is an effect that is started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command from the sound lamp control device 113 is received. In addition, when the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variable performance is started, if the stop type of the variable performance is off, the stop symbol indicating the failure is finally stopped and displayed, and the stop type of the variable performance is the jackpot A or the jackpot B. If it is either, the stop symbol indicating each jackpot is finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbols in this variable effect, and can easily determine the game value to be given according to the jackpot type.

In addition, since the first ball entrance 64 is a prize winning opening in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters, a jackpot of normal symbols is produced, and the electric accessory is released, and the ball enters the second ball. If it becomes easier to enter the ball opening 640, the number of prize balls increases. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 is in a state in which it is difficult to reduce the number of balls in hand or in a state in which the number of balls in hand does not decrease even if a game is played, so that the player is in a state in which the number of balls in hand is difficult to decrease or the number of balls in hand does not decrease. You can get a sense of the period that you can get a special symbol jackpot without it. Therefore, since the player's desire to participate in the game can be enhanced, the player can continue to have the desire to participate in the game.

In addition, as described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the start winning does not start even after a predetermined time has passed since one variable effect stopped. The third pattern composed of the main patterns with no numerals '0' to '9' is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player and the people involved in the hall can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is not playing a game.

The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table each corresponding to the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect. In addition, if there are 32 variable performance patterns to be set, the variable display data table, which is a display data table for the variable performance, is prepared with one table for one variable performance pattern and a total of 32 tables.

Details of the display data table will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 421 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at that time in association with an address that represents the time (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) during which an image for one frame is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as one unit. It defines in detail the content (drawing content) of an image for one frame.

The drawing contents specify the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and translucency according to the type of sprite. Rendering information for causing the third pattern display device 81 to render sprites, such as values, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The sprite type is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third pattern display device 81 where the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for specifying an enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement ratio. If the magnification is greater than 100%, the sprite will be displayed larger than the standard size, and if the magnification is less than 100%, the sprite will be displayed smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when rotating and displaying the sprite. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed behind the sprite can be seen through. The α-blending information is information for specifying known α-blending coefficients used when performing superimposition processing with other sprites. Color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when rendering the designated sprite.

In the variable display data table, the drawing contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address are one rear image, nine third patterns (design 1, design 2, . Rendering information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of a character, a character used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is defined for each address. One or a plurality of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81, and the magnification, rotation angle, translucency, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information are changed over time. Since it is fixed, the variable display data table defines only the back face type, which is information for specifying the back face image type.

The MPU 231 selects one of the backgrounds corresponding to the background mode (sea, beach, preparation period background, time production background) according to the background type. A rear image corresponding to the specified stage is specified as a drawing target, and the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame is specified according to the lapse of time.

In the present embodiment, a description will be given of a case in which only the back surface type is defined as the drawing content of the back surface image in the display data table. may be defined as position information indicating whether the should be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 identifies the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame based on the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information was displayed.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on this display data table (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) is started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started.

Furthermore, the position information is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed according to the back surface type, and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third pattern display device 81 display) may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display, or along with the back surface type and position information, the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position It is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started. information indicating whether or not the background image is drawn) may be defined as the drawing content of the back image. Alternatively, the position information may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored, instead of information indicating the elapsed time.

The third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2, . . . ) describe symbol type offset information as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to the respective third symbols. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variable effect is the stop symbol of the variable effect performed one before and the variable effect performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop pattern, and in the pattern offset information from the start of the variation until the predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop pattern of the previous variation performance is described. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop pattern set according to the stop type command (stop type command for display) received from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113 Include information. As a result, the variable effect can be stopped with a stop pattern corresponding to the stop type specified by the main controller 110. - 特許庁

In addition, since each third symbol is assigned a unique number, the variable symbol in the previous variable effect or the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main controller 110 can be selected as the third symbol. , and the offset information is represented by the difference between the numbers attached to each third pattern, the third pattern to be displayed can be easily specified from the offset information.

In addition, in the pattern offset information, the third pattern fluctuates at high speed during the predetermined time when the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance performed this time. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third pattern is being variably displayed at high speed, the third pattern is invisible to the player. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third pattern is interrupted, the player does not recognize the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described at "0000H", which is the top address of the display data table, and the last address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 36) is the data table. "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing contents corresponding to the presentation mode to be defined in the display data table are displayed. is described.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and displays the selected display data table. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the next A drawing list (see FIG. 423), which will be described later, is created by specifying the image contents to be drawn. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, as the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table, so the image specified in the display data table is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

Thus, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. .

Here, as in the conventional pachinko machine, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is started each time the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, the effect image becomes more diverse. Therefore, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a risk that the diversification of controllable effect images will be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, various modes of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81. - 特許庁

In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. The reason why it can be created is that the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance in the pachinko machine 10 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the starting prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the mode of presentation. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the presentation mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. This configuration can be realized only when the pachinko machine 10 is configured to determine the presentation mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the starting prize.

Next, with reference to FIG. 422, details of the transfer data table will be described. FIG. 422 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect. Transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and its transfer timing are defined.

If all the image data of the sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is prepared. As a result, an increase in capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

The transfer data table contains transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") to be transferred at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table in correspondence with the address. (corresponding to addresses "0001H" and "0097H" in FIG. 422). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in association with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transferring at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transferring corresponding to that address. (corresponding to address “0002H” in FIG. 422).

The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). is included.

It should be noted that, similarly to the display data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H", which is the top address of the transfer data table. "02F0H") describes "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table is described.

When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table exists, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233, which will be described later. Then, every time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f are identified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 423) to be described later is created. At the same time, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer is to be started at that time is acquired, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 422, when the pointer 233f is "0001H" or "0097H", the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified for the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. The drawing list is added, and the drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 237 . On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", Null data is defined at the address "0002H" of the transfer data table. The drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 without adding transfer data information to the drawing list.

When transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. process.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 required for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and displays the display data. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Data can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

The transfer data table defines transfer data information so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and is associated with an address defined in the display data table. Since the data information is defined, the image data is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of the predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. Thus, since the timing of the start of transfer can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND-type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the third pattern display device 81 can easily display various effects images. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) shown in FIG. This simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and power-on varying image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or power-on varying image area 235b of the resident video RAM. , is set to ON in the main process (see FIG. 460) executed by the MPU 231 (see S8005 in FIG. 460). Then, when all the resident object image data are stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer processing of the image transfer processing, in order to display an image other than the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, It is set to OFF (see S9705 in FIG. 471(b)).

The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S8301 in FIG. 462(b)). When the image display flag 233c is on, the simple command determination process (see S8308 in FIG. 462(b)) and the simple display setting process (see S8308 in FIG. 462(b) S8309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to commands transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 463 to 468) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 469 and 470) are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S9601 in FIG. 471(a)), and when the simple image display flag 233c is on. Since there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235, resident image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 471(b)) is executed to transfer the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. However, if the simple image display flag 233c is off, normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 472) is executed to transfer image data required for drawing processing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. FIG.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to commands and the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on commands and the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for The MPU 231 determines the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, and stores the display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. It selects and stores the selected display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by 1, and based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 423) in which the content of the image drawing instruction for is described is generated. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

While incrementing the pointer 233f one by one, the MPU 231 draws an image for the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list (see FIG. 423), which will be described later, is generated in which the content of the drawing instruction is described. As a result, an effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 .

The transfer data table buffer 233e transfers a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. is a buffer for storing When the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b, and transfers the selected transfer data table. Store in the data table buffer 233e. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents of the transfer data table buffer 233e by writing Null data, which means that there is no transfer target image data.

While incrementing the pointer 233f by one, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is added to a later-described rendering list (see FIG. 423) describing the image rendering instruction contents for the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

As a result, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data necessary for drawing the sprite can be obtained. Image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The pointer 233f is an address at which transfer data information of corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data should be obtained from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. is for specifying The MPU 231 once initializes the pointer 233f to 0 when the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, display setting processing for V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the rendering processing of one frame of image is completed (FIG. 462(b)). ), the pointer update process (see S9305 in FIG. 470(b)) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

Every time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 identifies the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and stores the drawing content in the drawing list described later. (see FIG. 423), acquires the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer is to be started at that time from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and obtains the transfer data Add information to the created drawing list.

As a result, an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. Therefore, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various effects can be displayed.

In addition, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is displayed based on the transfer data table before the corresponding display data table starts drawing a predetermined sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The drawing list area 233g is used by the image controller to draw an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list that instructs H.237.

Details of the drawing list will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 423 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. Symbol 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character (character 1, character 2, ..., number of reserved balls pattern 1, number of reserved balls pattern 2, ..., error (symbol) describes detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite for each sprite. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 .

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the type of RAM (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and its type. The image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is scaled according to the enlargement ratio, rotated according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the translucency value. alpha blending information, compositing with other sprites, color tone correction according to color information, and filtering according to filter specification information. After that, an image obtained by performing various processes at the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is developed by the image controller 237 in either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c designated by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 stores the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, the pending number of balls to be displayed). Image, warning image that notifies the occurrence of an error, etc.), generates detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw the image for one frame, and provides the detailed information for each sprite. Create a draw list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the RAM type and address for storing the data of the sprite (display object) are the sprite type defined in the display data table and the sprite type specified from other image contents. Generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 can store the image data according to the sprite type. , the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

In addition, the MPU 231 sets other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite as defined in the display data table. copy the information as is.

Further, in generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged in the order of the sprites to be arranged in the front side from the sprites to be arranged in the rearmost side in the image for one frame, and obtains detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, the detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, followed by the third pattern (pattern 1, pattern 2, . . . ), effect (effect 1, effect 2, . . . ). , characters (character 1, character 2, . . . , reserved ball number pattern 1, reserved ball number pattern 2, . . . , error pattern).

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and overwrites the drawn sprite in the frame buffer to develop it. Therefore, in the one-frame image generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

In the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, if the transfer data information is written at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the MPU 231 stores the transfer data information (character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source end address in the ROM 234, and the storage destination start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a where the image data to be transferred is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 draws an image from a predetermined area of the character ROM 234 (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source end address) based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236 .

The clock counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. When one display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect to be displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the performance time by the image display time for one frame on the third pattern display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment).

Then, the MPU 231 executes V interrupt processing (see (b )) is executed, the clock counter 233h is decremented by one (see S9307 in FIG. 469). As a result, when the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 judges that the presentation displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the presentation at the end of the presentation. perform various operations to

The storage image data determination flag 233i is set to indicate whether image data corresponding to all sprites whose corresponding image data are not resident in the resident video RAM 235 are stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is.

This stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by initial setting processing (see S8002 in FIG. 460) executed by the MPU 231 in the main processing when power is turned on. The storage image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to "OFF" indicating that the storage status for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated when an instruction to transfer image data to be transferred corresponding to one sprite is set during normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 472) executed by the MPU 231. will be In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "on" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Also, image data of other sprites to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236a as that one sprite will always be in a non-stored state when the image data of one sprite is stored. Therefore, the stored state corresponding to the other sprites is set to "off".

Also, when transferring the image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i and determines the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S9813 in FIG. 472). Then, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "OFF" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, an instruction to transfer the image data is set (see S9814 in FIG. 472). , causes the image controller 237 to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer processing of that image data is stopped. As a result, unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233i is a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as a "drawing target buffer") that develops an image drawn by the image controller 237 from among the two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c). ), and when the drawing object buffer flag 233j is 0, it designates the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing object buffer, and when it is 1, it designates the second frame buffer 236c. Then, the information of the designated rendering target buffer is sent to the image controller 237 together with the rendering list (see S9902 in FIG. 473).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of developing the image drawn based on the drawing list on the specified drawing target buffer. In parallel with the drawing process, the image controller 237 reads the drawn image information previously developed from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer, and transmits the image to the third pattern display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, display processing for displaying an image on the third pattern display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated as the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is done by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". done by As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Also, the transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of the image for one frame are completed. This is performed each time the rendering process of the process (see FIG. 462(b)) is executed (see S9902 in FIG. 473).

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. be.

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. be. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternating designations, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing drawing processing for an image for one frame.

The background mode storage area 233k is a storage area for storing data corresponding to the currently set background mode. Further, the interruption data storage area 233m is a storage area for temporarily holding information indicating the display mode at the time of interruption when the interruption of the display mode is instructed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 424, the audio output device 226 in this first control example will be described. FIG. 424 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the audio output device 226. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 424, the audio output device 226 is equipped with an MPU 301 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic device. The MPU 301 includes a ROM 302 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 301, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 302. A RAM 303 is built in.

The MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 is electrically connected to the input/output port 305 and the audio synthesizing section 306 . When a command specifying audio data is received from the audio lamp control device 113 to the audio output device 226 , the command is input to the MPU 301 via the input/output port 305 . Also, the audio data specified by the audio lamp control device 113 is read from the ROM 302 and output to the channel corresponding to the audio type of the audio synthesizing section 306 .

The voice synthesizing unit 306 is composed of a known voice synthesizing LSI that synthesizes voice data input to each channel and outputs the synthesized voice data to the amplifier unit 307 . Synthesized speech data is amplified by amplifier section 307 and input to speaker section 308 . As a result, various sounds designated by the sound lamp control device 113 can be output from the speaker unit 308 .

Next, referring to FIG. 424, the configuration of the ROM 302 provided in the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 in this first control example will be described. As shown in FIG. 424, the ROM 302 is provided with at least a voice file storage area 302a.

The audio file storage area 302a is a storage area in which audio files (audio data) used for outputting music, sound effects, etc. in various effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 are stored. When the execution of various effects is notified by the audio lamp control device 113, the audio file corresponding to the effects is read out from the audio file storage area 302a and output to the corresponding channel of the audio synthesizing section 306.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 303 provided in the audio output device 226 will be described. As shown in FIG. 424, the RAM 303 is provided with at least a repeated hitting sound output flag 303a, a reproduction position storage area 303b, and a music output flag 303c.

The repeated-hit sound output flag 303a is a flag indicating the type of repeated-hit sound (whether it is the first repeated-hit sound or the second repeated-hit sound) that was output most recently during the execution of the interrupt repeated-hit effect. If the repeated hitting sound output flag 303a is 01H, it indicates that the latest repeated hitting sound is the first repeated hitting sound, and if it is "02H", it indicates that it is the second repeating sound. By using the repeated hitting sound output flag 303a, it is possible to grasp the type of the repeated hitting sound output most recently, so that each time a repeated hitting operation is detected, different types of repeated hitting sounds can be alternately reproduced for different channels. can. Therefore, since it is possible to diversify the voice mode during the execution of the continuous hitting operation, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

The reproduction position storage area 303b is a storage area for storing data indicating the reproduction position at the time of interruption of music reproduction when an instruction to interrupt reproduction of music is given. When resuming the reproduction of music, the reproduction can be restarted accurately from the interrupted reproduction position based on the data stored in the reproduction position storage area 303b.

The music output flag 303c is a flag indicating whether or not a variable display effect or the like is being executed and music based on an audio file is being output. When the music output flag 303c is ON, it means that music is being output, and when it is OFF, it means that music is not being output.

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the first control example>
Next, each control process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to flowcharts of FIGS. 425 to 439. FIG. The processing of the MPU 201 can be broadly classified into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and a timer that is started periodically (at intervals of 2 milliseconds in this control example). There are interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing that is activated by input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. and main processing.

425 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. FIG. Timer interrupt processing is periodic processing that is executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, various winning switch reading processes are executed (S101). That is, it reads the states of various switches connected to the main controller 110, determines the states of the switches, and saves detection information (winning detection information).

Next, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (999 in this control example). Then, the updated value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM203. Similarly, the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this control example), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is stored in the RAM 203. stored in the corresponding buffer area.

Further, the special winning random number counter C1, the special winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the falling lottery counter C4, the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the normal winning random number counter C5 are updated (S103). Specifically, the special winning random number counter C1, the special winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the falling lottery counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values (in this control example, 999, 99, 250, 999, 198, 239) are cleared to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C5 and CS1 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203. FIG.

Next, a special symbol variation process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104), and then, A starting winning process associated with winning (starting winning) to the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation processing and the start winning processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 426-429.

After executing the start winning process, the normal symbol variation process, which is the process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and the through gate passage process associated with the passage of the ball through the normal entrance is executed. Execute (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation processing and the through gate passage processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 430 and 431. FIG. After executing the through gate passing process, the firing control process is executed (S108), and then other winning processes are executed (S109). Furthermore, other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S110), and the timer interrupt process ends. Note that the shooting control process is performed on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and that the stop switch 51b for stopping shooting is not operated. This is a process of determining on/off of the . Main controller 110 gives a ball launch instruction to launch controller 112 when ball launch is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 426, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 426 is a flow chart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 425), and the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device This is a process for controlling the variable display of the third pattern performed in 81.

In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is in the middle of a jackpot at the moment (S201). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and during the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S201: Yes), this process is finished as it is.

If the special symbol jackpot is not being won (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (S202: No), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times of holding the fluctuation display in the special symbol N1) and the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (the fluctuation display in the special number of times N2) is obtained (S203). Next, it is determined whether the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is greater than 0 (S204), and if the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is not 0 ( S204: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (S205), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e changed by calculation is set. (S206). The pending ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 434), which will be described later. , is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 . When receiving the reserved ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. store in

After setting the reserved ball number command by the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the reservation first area to the reservation fourth area of the special symbol 2 reservation ball storage area 203b are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the first holding area → execution area, the second holding area → the first holding area, the third holding area → the second holding area, the fourth holding area → the third holding area, etc. Shift data. After the process of S207 is executed, the process proceeds to S208.

On the other hand, in the process of S204, when it is determined that the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S204: No), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d obtained in the process of S203 It is determined whether the value (N1) is 0 (S209). When it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S209: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S209, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S209: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is set to 1. Subtract (S210), and set a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation (S211). The pending ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 434), which will be described later. , is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223a of the RAM 223. store in

After setting the reserved ball number command by the process of S211, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S212). In the process of S212, the data stored in the reservation first area to the reservation fourth area of the special symbol 1 reservation ball storage area 203a are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the first holding area → execution area, the second holding area → the first holding area, the third holding area → the second holding area, the fourth holding area → the third holding area, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, a special symbol variation start process for setting the start of variation of the special symbol (first symbol) is executed (S208), and this process is terminated. The special symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the processing of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variation display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S213). The variation time of the variation display executed in the first pattern display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this variation time has not elapsed (S213: No), the display of the first symbol display device is updated (S214), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S213, if the variation time of the variable display being executed has passed (S213: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S215). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by special symbol variation start processing (S208), which will be described later with reference to FIG. When this special symbol variation start process (S208) is executed, the values of various counters stored in the execution area provided in common to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. A lottery for special symbols will be held based on. More specifically, it is determined whether or not there is a special symbol jackpot according to the value of the special winning random number counter C1, and if it is a special symbol jackpot, the jackpot is determined according to the value of the special winning type counter C2. A type is determined.

In this control example, when the jackpot A is the stop pattern of the first pattern (special pattern), the first pattern display device 37 turns on the blue LED, and when the jackpot B is the red LED. When the jackpot C is reached, the green LED is turned on. When the jackpot D is reached, the blue and red LEDs are turned on. When the jackpot E is reached, the red LED is turned on. and turn on the green LED. In addition, when it is out, it is set to turn on the blue LED and the green LED. The display of each LED is turned off when the next variable display is started, but it may be turned on only for several seconds after the variable display is stopped.

After the process of S215 is completed, when the variation display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 is started, the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the special symbol variation start process (S208) (this lottery result ) is a special symbol jackpot (S216). If the lottery result of this time is a special symbol jackpot (S216: Yes), the jackpot start flag 203i is set to ON (S217). Then, a stop command is set (S218), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S216, when it is determined that the current lottery result is not a big hit (S216: No), the processing of S217 is skipped, and after the processing of S218 is executed, this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 427, the special symbol variation start process (S208) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 427 is a flow chart showing the special symbol variation start process (S208). This special symbol variation start process (S208) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 426) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 425). Based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a lottery (win/fail judgment) of "special symbol jackpot" or "special symbol omission" is performed, and the first symbol display device 37 and the third pattern display device 81 to determine the effect pattern of the variable effect (variable effect pattern).

In the special symbol variation start process (S208), first, a special winning random number counter C1, a special winning type counter C2, a stop type counter C3, a falling lottery counter C4, and a variation type counter CS1 stored in the special symbol reserved ball execution area are counted. Each value is acquired (S301). Next, it is determined whether or not the game state is currently changing probability (high probability state of special symbols) (S302). It should be noted that the determination of whether or not the probability variation is in progress is executed by determining whether the value of the probability variation flag 203h is 1 or more. Here, the variable probability flag 203h is set to a predetermined value based on the end of the jackpot game. On the other hand, the value is set to 0 based on the start of the jackpot game.

In the process of S302, if it is determined that the probability is changing (S302: Yes), the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability changing (high probability state of special symbols), so the fall lottery counter C4 acquired in the process of S301 By comparing the value and the falling lottery table 202e (see FIG. 407(c)), a lottery (falling lottery) is performed to determine whether to fall from the probability variable state of the special design to the low probability state of the special design ( S303). Specifically, the value of the falling lottery counter C4 is compared one by one with two random numbers stored in the falling lottery table 202e. As described above, two random numbers "0, 1" corresponding to falling to a low probability state are set during probability variation (high probability state of special symbols), and the value of the falling lottery counter C4 and , and the random numbers corresponding to these falls, it is determined that the player falls to the low probability state. When the lottery result of the fall lottery is obtained in the process of S303, the process proceeds to S304.

In the process of S304, it is determined whether or not the lottery result corresponds to the fall to the low probability state of the special symbol (S304), and when it is determined that the lottery result corresponds to the fall (S304: Yes), The variable probability flag 203h is set to OFF (S305), a state command indicating a fall to a low probability state is set (S306), and the process proceeds to S307.

On the other hand, in the process of S302, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is not in the probability variable state (high probability state of special symbols), that is, it is in the low probability state of special symbols (S302: No), S303 to S306 Skip the process and move to the process of S307.

In the process of S307, based on the value of the special winning random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 and the special symbol big winning random number table 202a for low probability (see FIG. 407(a)), whether or not the special symbol is a big winning. One lottery result is acquired (S307). Specifically, the value of the special winning random number counter C1 is compared one by one with four random numbers stored in the special symbol big winning random number table 202a. Four random numbers of "0 to 3" are set as the random numbers that become the special symbol jackpot in the special symbol low probability state, and the value of the special winning random number counter C1 and the random numbers that become these winnings are set. If they match, it is determined to be a special symbol jackpot. When the lottery result of the special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to S309.

On the other hand, in the process of S304, when it is determined that the lottery result does not correspond to falling (S304: No), the process proceeds to S308. In the process of S308, based on the value of the special winning random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 and the special symbol big winning random number table 202a for high probability (see FIG. 407(a)), whether or not the special symbol is a big winning. One lottery result is acquired (S308). Specifically, the value of the special winning random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the eight random numbers stored in the special symbol big winning random number table 202a. Eight numbers of "4 to 11" are set as the random numbers that become the special symbol jackpot in the special symbol high probability state, and the value of the special winning random number counter C1 and the random numbers that become these winnings are set. If they match, it is determined to be a special symbol jackpot. When the lottery result of the special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to S309.

In the processing of S309, whether the special symbol lottery result acquired by the processing of S307 or S308 is a special symbol jackpot (that is, the value of the special winning random number counter C1 that has been acquired and the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a match the set judgment value) is determined (S309), and when it is determined that it is a special symbol jackpot (S309: Yes), the value of the time saving counter 203g and the probability variation flag are set to the initial values Reset (S310), based on the value of the special hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301, to set the display mode at the time of the big hit (S311). More specifically, the value of the special hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the jackpot type selection table 202d, and the jackpot types (jackets A to Among the jackpots E), it is determined which jackpot type this time is. As described above, in the first special pattern jackpot, if the value of the special hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 9", it is determined to be a jackpot A (15R probability variable jackpot), and "10 to 49" If it is in the range of , it is determined to be a jackpot B (5R probability variable jackpot), and if it is in the range of "50 to 99", it is determined to be a jackpot C (5R normal jackpot) (see FIG. 408 (b)) . In addition, in the second special pattern jackpot, if the value of the special hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 79", it is determined to be a jackpot D (15R probability variable jackpot), and in the range of "80 to 99" If there is, it is determined as a jackpot E (15R normal jackpot) (see FIG. 408(c)).

In the processing of S311, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 (the lighting state of the LEDs 37A and 37B) is set according to the determined jackpot type (jackpots A to E). In addition, the jackpot types (jackpots A to E) are set as the stop types so that the stop symbols corresponding to the jackpot types are stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 . The display mode of the stop symbol set in the process of S311 is stopped and displayed by the process of S215 of the above-described special symbol variation process (see FIG. 426).

Next, with reference to the variation pattern selection table 202b (see FIGS. 409(a) and 410), a variation pattern at the time of winning the jackpot is selected. Here, in this control example, as described above with reference to FIGS. 409(b) and 410, the set game The variable time of the special symbol is set by referring to different data tables depending on the state. Specifically, when the gaming state is the normal state, the variation pattern is determined by referring to the normal table 222b1 (see FIG. 409(a)) of the variation pattern selection table 222b, while the gaming state is In the case of the probability variable state or the time saving state, the variation pattern is determined by referring to the probability variation/time saving table 222b2 (see FIG. 410) of the variation pattern selection table 202b (S312). After the process of S312 ends, the process proceeds to S318. When the variation pattern is set in the process of S312, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 until it stops with the jackpot symbol. A pattern variation time is determined. At this time, based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the special symbol holding ball execution area of the RAM 203 and the value of the stop type selection counter C3, the variation time of the symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined. .

On the other hand, in the process of S309, if it is determined that the special symbol lottery result is out (S309: No), then it is determined whether the value of the counter 203g during time saving is a value greater than 0. (S313). In the process of S313, when it is determined that the value of the counter 203g during time saving is greater than 0 (that is, the value is 1 or more) (S313: Yes), the value of the counter 203g during time saving is subtracted by 1 (S314), A state command indicating the value of the time saving medium counter 203g after subtraction is set (S315), and the process proceeds to S316. On the other hand, in the process of S313, when it is determined that the value of the counter 203g during time saving is 0 (S313: No), the processes of S314 and S315 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S316.

In the process of S316, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the off symbol, and the stop type selection stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol reserved ball execution area is selected. Based on the values of the counter C3 and the variation type counter CS1, the variation pattern (variation time) at the time of deviation is determined (S317). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the lost symbol is determined. At this time, similar to the process of S312, the variation time of symbol variation such as normal reach, super reach, etc. is determined based on the values of the stop type selection counter C3 and the variation type counter CS1 stored in the special symbol holding ball execution area. .

In the process of S312 or the process of S318 that is executed after the process of S317 is completed, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in the process of S312 or S317 is set. (S318). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the processing of S312 or S317 is set (S319). When the processing of S319 ends, the process returns to the special symbol variation processing (S104).

Next, referring to FIG. 428, the starting winning process (S105) executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 428 is a flow chart showing this starting winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 425) to determine whether or not there is a win to the first ball entrance 64 (start winning). , Reservation processing of values indicated by various random number counters, and processing for executing prefetching of lottery results in special symbols from the values indicated by the various reserved random number counters.

When the starting winning process (S105) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning) (S401). Here, the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected over three times of timer interrupt processing. Then, when it is determined that the game ball has entered the first ball entrance 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (number of times N1 of holding variable display in the special symbol) is obtained (S402). . Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit (4 in this control example) (S403).

Then, in the processing of S401, if it is determined that there is no winning to the first ball entrance 64 (S401: No), the process proceeds to S408, and even if there is a winning to the first ball entrance 64 ( S401: Yes), when it is determined in the process of S403 that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is not less than 4 (that is, 4, which is the upper limit) (S403: No), the process of S407 to On the other hand, in the process of S401, it is determined that the first ball entrance 64 has won (S401: Yes), and in the process of S403, the value (N) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d If it is determined to be less than 4 (S403: Yes), 1 is added to the value (N) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (S404). Then, a first special symbol reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S405).

The pending ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 434), which will be described later. , is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the pending ball number command by the process of S405, the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the fall lottery counter C4, and the variation type updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above. Each value of the counter CS1 is stored in the first area among the vacant reservation areas (reservation first area to reservation fourth area) of the special symbol 1 reservation ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 (S406). In the process of S406, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the first reserved area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the second reserved area is the first area, if the value is 2, the third reserved area is the first area, and if the value is 3, the fourth reserved area is the first area. After completing the process of S406, next, the prefetch process is executed (S407), and the process proceeds to the process of S408. Details of this look-ahead processing (S407) will be described later with reference to FIG. Based on this, a process of preliminarily judging (prefetching) each lottery result to be executed at the start of fluctuation is executed.

It should be noted that the processes of S408 to S413 are only performed by changing the above-described processes of S401 to S407 based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 to the processes based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 640. , S401 to S406 are executed, detailed description thereof will be omitted. After executing the process of S413, the prefetching process is executed (S414 (S407)), and then the process ends.

In this control example, the value of each counter is acquired based on the ball entering, but may be acquired at the start of fluctuation. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the use of the storage area of the RAM 203 without requiring a storage area for storing the values of each counter until the start of fluctuation. Further, among the counters, some counters (for example, only the fluctuation type counter CS1) may be configured to be acquired at the start of fluctuation. By configuring in this way, the counter related to the winning/failure determination can be acquired at the time of entering the ball, and the counter not related to the winning/failure determination can be acquired later, and the amount of data to be stored can be reduced while maintaining the fairness of the game. can be suppressed.

Next, referring to FIG. 429, the look-ahead process (S407 (S414)), which is one process in the starting winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 429 is a flow chart showing this prefetching process (S407 (S414)).

In the look-ahead process, first, it is determined whether or not there is a new winning (S501). In the process of S501, when the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is added, it is determined that a new prize has been won. . In the process of S501, if it is determined that there is no new winning (S501: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is a new winning prize (S501: Yes), next, it is determined whether or not the current winning prize is a special symbol 1 (first special symbol) (S502). When it is determined (S502: Yes), the lottery result for each counter value acquired this time is acquired in advance based on the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a and the special symbol jackpot table 202d1 (S503), and the process proceeds to S504. Transition. In the processing of S504, as the lottery result obtained in advance, a prize information command including the jackpot determination result and jackpot type is set (S504), and the processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S502, if it is determined that the winning this time is not the special symbol 1 (special figure 1), that is, the special symbol 2 (special figure 2) (S502: No), each counter acquired this time The lottery result for the value is acquired in advance based on the special symbol big hit random number table 202a and the special figure 2 big win table 202d2 (S505), and as the previously acquired lottery result, the winning information command including the jackpot determination result and the jackpot type is set (S504), and the process ends.

In this way, before the start of the variation, the result of the winning/failure determination in advance is output to the voice ramp control device 113 as a prize winning information command each time the ball is held, so the voice ramp control device 113 , it is possible to recognize in advance the result of the judgment of success or failure and the type of success. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113, based on the prize winning information command, foreseeing the result of the judgment result of the reserved ball to the player in advance (for example, changing the color of the reserved symbol to a color that suggests the result of the judgment result) Or, an effect such as outputting a notification sound for notifying the success/failure determination result in the held ball) can be executed. As for the winning information command, one winning information command is output for each pending ball, so that the sound lamp control device 113 can also recognize the establishment of the pending ball. can. In addition, in the prefetching process (see S407 in FIG. 429) in this control example, when it is determined that there is no new winning in the process of S501 (S501: No), this process is terminated as it is. However, without being limited to this, for example, the winning information command is set again for each counter value already stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Also good. By configuring in this way, even if it is determined not to execute the notice effect in response to the prize winning information command received by the audio lamp control device 113 side, the notice effect is executed again for the same reserved pattern. It is possible to determine whether or not to Further, in this control example, the lottery result based on each counter value acquired by the main controller 110 side is determined in advance, and the information for indicating the result of the preliminary determination is set as the winning information command. However, without being limited to this, information for indicating each acquired counter value is set as a winning information command, and the result of the lottery is determined in advance based on the winning information command received by the sound lamp control device 113 side. may be configured. In addition, when information for indicating each acquired counter value is set as a winning information command, it may be encrypted so that the counter value acquired this time cannot be specified by a player who illegally acquires the winning information command. It is preferable to configure such that the winning information command is output at a plurality of timings.

Next, referring to FIG. 430, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 430 is a flow chart showing this normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation processing (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 425), and is associated with the variation display of the second symbol performed in the second symbol display device 83 and the second entrance 640. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory 640a.

In this normal symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently hitting (S601). During the winning of the normal symbol (second symbol), the second symbol display device 83 is displaying the winning, and the opening and closing control of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is performed. including while As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is in the process of hitting (S601: Yes), this process is finished as it is.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S601: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is fluctuating (S602), and the second symbol display device is determined. If the display mode of 83 is not fluctuating (S602: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of times of suspension of variable display in normal symbols M) is obtained (S603). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203f is greater than 0 (S604), and if the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203f is 0 (S604: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203f is not 0 (S604: Yes), the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203f is subtracted by 1 (S605).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted (S606). In the process of S606, the data stored in the first reservation area to the fourth reservation area of the normal symbol reservation ball storage area 203c are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the first holding area → execution area, the second holding area → the first holding area, the third holding area → the second holding area, the fourth holding area → the third holding area, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the normal winning random number counter C5 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is obtained (S607), and the process proceeds to S608.

In the process of S608, it is determined whether or not it is during time saving (high probability state of normal symbols) (S608). In the process of S608, the value of the time saving medium counter 203g and the state of the probability variation flag 203h are checked, and if the value of the time saving medium counter 203g is 1 or more or the probability variation flag 203h is on, during the time saving If the value of the time saving counter 203g is 0 and the probability variation flag 203h is off, it is determined that the time saving is not in progress. In the process of S608, when it is determined that it is during time saving (high probability state of normal symbol) (value of counter 203g during time saving is 1 or more, or probability variation flag 203h is ON) (S608: Yes) , Since the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of normal symbols, the value of the normal winning random number counter C5 acquired in the process of S603 and the normal winning random number table 202c for high probability (see FIG. 407 (b)) Based on this, the lottery result as to whether or not the normal symbol wins is acquired (S609), and the process proceeds to S611. Specifically, in the process of S609, the value of the normal winning random number counter C5 is compared with the random value stored in the normal winning random number table 202c for high probability (see FIG. 407(b)). As described above, if the value of the normal hit random number counter C5 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined to be a hit in the normal design, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4,205 to 239", it is normal It is determined that the pattern is out of line (see FIG. 407(b)).

On the other hand, in the process of S608, when it is determined that it is not during time saving (high probability state of normal symbol) (value of counter 203g during time saving is 0, and probability variation flag 203h is off) (S608: No) , Since the pachinko machine 10 is in the low probability state (normal state, latent probability state) of normal symbols, the value of the normal winning random number counter C5 acquired in the process of S603 and the normal winning random number table 202c for low probability (Fig. 407(b)), the lottery result as to whether or not the normal symbol wins is acquired (S610). Specifically, the value of the normal winning random number counter C5 is compared with the random value stored in the normal winning random number table 202c for low probability (see FIG. 407(b)). As described above, if the value of the normal hit random number counter C5 is in the range of "5, 6", it is determined that it is a normal pattern hit. It is determined that the design is out of line (see FIG. 407(b)).

In this control example, during the special symbol jackpot, the normal symbol lottery is less likely to win. This is because during the special symbol jackpot (that is, during the special game state), the player hits the ball to win the specific winning hole 65a, so the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entry hole 640 is opened. This is to suppress as much as possible the game ball which is to be entered into the specific winning hole 65a by entering the second ball entering hole 640.例文帳に追加

After executing the process of S609 or S610, the process proceeds to S611. In the process of S611, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the normal symbol obtained by the process of S609 or S610 is a hit of the normal symbol (S611). Yes), the display mode at the time of winning is set (S612), and the process proceeds to S614. In the process of S612, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol "O" is set to be illuminated as the stop symbol (second symbol).

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S611 that it is out of the normal symbol (S611: No), the display mode at the time of out is set (S613), and the process proceeds to S614. In the process of S613, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol "x" is lit as the stop symbol (second symbol).

In the process of S614, it is determined whether or not the current time is during time saving (whether or not the high probability state of normal symbols) (S614), and if it is during time saving (high probability state of normal symbols) (S614: Yes) , the variation time of the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is set to 3 seconds (S615), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S614, it is not during time saving (high probability state of normal symbols), that is, if it is a low probability state of normal symbols (S614: No), the variation time of the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is 30 Seconds are set (S616), and the process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S602, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602: Yes), whether or not the variation time of the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed is determined (S617). It should be noted that the variable time here is the time set in advance by the processing of S615 or S616 before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device 83 .

In the process of S617, if the variable time has not elapsed (S617: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S617, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has passed (S617: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S618). In the process of S618, if the normal symbol lottery is won and the display mode is set by the process of S612, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted up) on the second symbol display device 83. displayed). On the other hand, if the lottery for the normal symbol is lost and the display mode is set by the processing of S613, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped (lighted up) on the second symbol display device 83. is set to When the stop display is set by the process of S618, when the second symbol display update process (see S1009) of the main process (see FIG. 434) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is changed. After the game ends, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped (lighted up) on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the process of S612 or S613.

Next, when the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 is started, whether the normal symbol lottery result (current lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process is a normal symbol hit. is determined (S619). If the result of the lottery this time is not a hit of the normal symbol (S619: No), the processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the result of the lottery this time is a win in the normal design (S619: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the present time is during the time saving (S620). If it is determined that the time is being shortened (S620: Yes), the opening time and number of times of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 are set to 1 second x 2 times (S622), and the process proceeds to S623. Transition.

On the other hand, in the processing of S620, if it is determined that the working hours are not being shortened (S620: No), the opening time and number of times of the first electric accessory 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640 are set to 0.2 seconds x 1 time. (S622), and the process proceeds to S623.

In the process of S623 executed after the process of S6212 or S622, the start of opening/closing control of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640 is set (S623), and this process ends. When the opening/closing control start of the electric accessory 640a is set by the process of S623, when the electric accessory opening/closing process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 434) is executed next, the electric accessory 640a The opening/closing control is started, and the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 640a is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S621 or S622 of FIG. 430 are completed.

In this way, except during the special symbol jackpot, in the normal symbol high-probability state, compared to the normal symbol low-probability state, the variable display time is very short from "30 seconds to 3 seconds", and furthermore. , the release period of the second ball entrance 640 becomes very long as “0.2 seconds×1 time→1 second×2 times”, so that the ball can easily enter the second ball entrance 640 .

In this control example, the opening time and the number of times of opening per long time are the same operation in the normal state and the latent state, but it is not limited to this, and it is configured to set different opening time and number of times of opening. good too. In addition, in this control example, the contents of the opening operation of the first electric accessory 640a are set based on the game state set at the start of fluctuation of the normal symbols (during the lottery). Without limitation, for example, at the time of start of variation of normal symbols (at the time of lottery), the determination of whether or not the normal symbols are set is executed based on the game state, and the game at the time when the variation time of the normal symbols that have been elected has passed. The content of the opening operation of the first electric accessory 640a may be set based on the state. That is, in this control example, since the game state is configured to be variably set based on the lottery of the special symbols, the game state may be variably set while the normal symbols are fluctuating. In such a case, if the contents of the opening operation of the first electric accessory 640a are set based on the game state set at the start of the variation of the symbols (at the time of the lottery), for example, during the jackpot game or normal There is a problem that the first electric accessory 640a is open for a long time during the high probability state of the pattern. On the other hand, by configuring so as to set the contents of the opening operation of the first electric role product 640a based on the game state at the time when the fluctuation time of the winning normal symbol has passed, the first electric role product 640a is set. can be executed with contents suitable for the set game state.

Next, the through gate passage processing (S107) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 431 is a flow chart showing this through gate passage processing (S107). This through gate passage processing (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 425) to determine whether or not a ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67. This is a process for obtaining and holding the value indicated by the normal random number counter C5 in this case.

In the through gate passing process, first, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 (S701). Here, passage of the ball through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 (S701: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of times of suspension of variable display in normal symbols M) is obtained. (S702). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit (4 in this control example) (S703).

Whether the game ball has not passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 (S701: No), or even if the game ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, the normal symbol holding ball number counter If the value (M) of 203f is not less than 4 (S703: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the game ball passes through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 (S701: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S703: Yes), normal 1 is added to the value (M) of the symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (S704). Then, the value of the normal hit random number counter C5 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above is set to the first of the free reservation areas (reservation first area to reservation fourth area) of the normal symbol reservation ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. The data is stored in the area (S705), and then the processing ends. In the process of S705, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the first reserved area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

Next, referring to FIG. 432, NMI interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. 432 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. FIG. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 . That is, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 . Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power interruption occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power interruption occurrence information (S801), and ends the NMI interruption processing. do.

The above NMI interrupt processing is also executed in the payout launch control device 111 in the same manner, and information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 213 by such NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, NMI interrupt processing is started.

Next, referring to FIG. 433, startup processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 when main controller 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 433 is a flow chart showing this startup process. This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S901). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, in order to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable, wait processing (in this control example, wait time of 1 second setting process) is executed (S902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S904), and if it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process proceeds to S913. On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is determined whether or not power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905), and if not stored (S905: No). , there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown did not end normally.

If power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906). If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved at the time of power shutdown, the backed-up data is destroyed. As will be described later in the processing of S1016 in FIG. 434, the RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value in the work area address of the RAM 203. FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the processing of S913, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 serving as a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S913). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets the initial value, and becomes ready to start the game ball payout control. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes the initialization process of RAM 203 (S914, S915).

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, such as when the hall starts operating. Therefore, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S914, S915) is executed. Also, if power failure occurrence information is not set, or if a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.), the RAM 203 initialization processing (S914, S915) is executed in the same way. . In the RAM initialization process (S914, S915), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S914), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S915). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S911.

On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), power failure occurrence information is stored (S905: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( S907: Yes), a state command indicating the value of the time saving counter 203g and the state of the probability variation flag 203h (that is, the game state at the time of start-up) is transmitted (S908). Next, while retaining the data backed up in the RAM 203, the power failure occurrence information is cleared (S909). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the game state at the time of drive power shutdown is transmitted (S910), and the process proceeds to S911. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the game ball payout control can be started while retaining the data stored in the RAM 213 .

In the processing of S911, an effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the execution of various effects is permitted to the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. FIG. Next, the interrupt is permitted (S912), and the process proceeds to main processing, which will be described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 434, main processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 after the start-up processing described above will be described. FIG. 434 is a flow chart showing this main process. Main processing of the game is executed in this main processing. As an outline, each process of S1001 to S1007 is executed as a periodical process with a period of 4 ms, and the counter update process of S1010 and S1011 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main process, first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 425), output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is sent to each sub-side control device (peripheral (S1001). Specifically, it determines whether or not there is winning detection information detected in the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 425). Send a prize ball command to In addition, it transmits to the voice lamp control device 113 the reserved ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 426) or the starting winning process (see FIG. 428). In addition, it transmits to the sound lamp control device 113 the winning commands set in the startup winning process (see FIG. 428) and the look-ahead process (see FIG. 429). Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, etc. necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 .

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this control example). Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM203.

When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is finished, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003), and then, in the case of the special symbol jackpot state, the execution of the jackpot production and the variable A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S1004). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning port 65a is opened according to the content of the jackpot game to be executed (jackpot type), and the maximum opening time of the specific winning port 65a has passed, or the specified number of balls is in the specific winning port 65a. Determine if you have won a prize. Then, when any one of these conditions is established, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a are repeated for a predetermined number of rounds. Details of this jackpot control process (S1004) will be described later with reference to FIGS. In this control example, the jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process, but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process. In addition, in this control example, the jackpot game contents corresponding to the jackpot type (type of entrance to be opened, opening time, number of openings (number of rounds), opening period, interval period, ending period) are used as a jackpot scenario. A jackpot scenario stored in advance corresponding to the jackpot type set when the jackpot is won is read, and a jackpot game is executed based on the read jackpot scenario.

Next, an electric accessary product opening/closing process for controlling opening/closing of the electric accessary product 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is executed (S1005). In the electric accessary product opening/closing process, when the opening/closing control start of the electric accessary product 640a is set by the processing of S623 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 430), the opening/closing control of the electric accessary product 640a is started. The opening/closing control of the first electric accessory 640a is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S621 or S622 of FIG. 430 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

Next, a first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is executed (S1006). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the process of S312 or the process of S317 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 427), the variation display corresponding to the variation pattern is displayed as the first symbol display. Starting at devices 37A and 37B. In this control example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off and the green LED is turned on, and the green LED is turned on. If the LED is on, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on, and if the blue LED is on, the blue LED is turned off and the red LED is turned on.

Note that the main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the lighting color of the LED is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED change the lighting color of That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

Also, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S312 or the process of S317 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 427) ends, the first symbol display device 37, the stop pattern (first pattern) is displayed on the first pattern display device in the display mode set by the processing of S311 or the processing of S316 of the special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 427). 37 is stopped (lighted up).

Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1007). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S615 or the process of S616 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 430), the variation display is started on the second symbol display device 83. do. As a result, the second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display in which the second symbol "o" and the symbol "x" are alternately lit. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the process of S618 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 430), it is executed in the second symbol display device 83. End the current variation display, in the display mode set by the processing of S612 or the processing of S613 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 430), the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 ( display).

After that, it is determined whether power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008). SG1 is not output and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has come, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in this control example) has elapsed since the start of the main processing this time (S1009). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1009: Yes), the process proceeds to S1001, and the above-described processes after S1001 are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet passed since the start of the main processing this time (S1009: No), the second main processing is executed until the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing. The first initial value random number counter CINI1, second initial value random number counter CINI2 and variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1010, S1011).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1010). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter values reach the maximum values (999, 239 in this control example), they are cleared to 0. . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the change type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the processing of S1002 (S1011).

Here, since the execution time of each process of S1001 to S1007 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , the initial value of the special winning random number counter C1, the initial value of the normal winning random number counter C5) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can also be randomly updated.

In addition, in the process of S1008, if information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, the NMI interrupt processing in FIG. 432 has been executed, so the processing at power-off from S1012 onward is executed. First, to prohibit the occurrence of each interrupt processing (S1012), to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113) a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off and transmit (S1013). Then, a RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S1014), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1015), and the infinite loop continues until the power supply is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203 .

It should be noted that the process of S1008 is performed at the end of a series of processes corresponding to the game state change performed in S1001 to S1007, or at the time of the end of one cycle of the processes of S1010 and S1011 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, information on the occurrence of power failure is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. It can start from the processing of S1001. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1001, as in the case of initialization in the start-up process. Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved in the processing when the power is turned off, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value ( initial value), the process can be started from S1001. Therefore, the control load on the main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main controller 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the jackpot control process (S1004) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 435 is a flow chart showing this jackpot control process (S1004). This jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 434), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in a jackpot state with special symbols, execution of various effects according to the jackpot, specific winning opening ( This is a process for opening or closing the large opening 65a.

In the jackpot control process (S1004), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot start flag 203i is ON (S1101). When it is determined that the jackpot start flag 203i is ON (S1101: Yes), the jackpot opening command is set (S1102), the jackpot start flag 203i is set to OFF, and the jackpot middle flag 203j is set to ON (S1103). , the process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1101, if it is determined that the jackpot start flag 203i is off (S1101: No), then whether the special symbol jackpot is currently on (that is, the jackpot flag 203j is on) ) or not (S1104). In the process of S1104, when it is determined that the current jackpot is not in progress (the jackpot flag 203j is off) (S1104: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S1104, if it is determined that the current jackpot is in progress (the jackpot flag 203j is ON) (S1104: Yes), then it is determined whether or not it is time to start a new round ( S1105).

In the process of S1105, if it is determined that it is time to start a new round (S1105: Yes), a jackpot operation setting process for setting the opening/closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a according to the number of rounds is executed (S1106 ), the process ends. The details of this jackpot action setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1105 that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1105: No), then it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending period of the round currently being executed (S1107). . Here, in this control example, it is determined that it is time to start the ending period when the final round of the jackpot ends. If it is determined that it is time to start the ending period (S1107: Yes), an ending command is set (S1108), and this process ends. The ending command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 434). It is sent towards device 113 . Upon receiving the ending command, the audio lamp control device 113 transmits a display ending command to the display control device 114 . When the display control device 114 receives the display ending command, the third symbol display device 81 starts an ending effect indicating the end of the big win.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1107, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the currently executed ending period (S1107: No), then it is determined whether it is the end timing of the jackpot (S1109). Here, the end timing of the jackpot indicates a case where the execution period of the ending effect has passed. In the process of S1109, when it is determined that it is time to end the big win (S1109: Yes), a big win end process for setting the game state after the big win ends is executed (S1110), and this process ends. The details of this jackpot ending process will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, in the process of S1109, when it is determined that it is not the timing of the end of the jackpot (S1109: No), the winning process for performing control according to the winning to the specific winning opening 65a is executed (S1111), Abnormality processing for determining whether or not the ball that entered the winning opening 65a was discharged normally is executed (S1112), and then this processing is terminated. Details of the winning process and the abnormality process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 438 and 439. FIG.

Next, details of the jackpot operation setting process (S1106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 436 is a flow chart showing this jackpot operation setting process (S1106). This jackpot action setting process (S1106) is executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 435), and as described above, is a process for setting the opening/closing action of the specific winning hole 65a according to the number of rounds.

When this jackpot operation setting process (see FIG. 436) is started, first, it is determined whether it is time to start the 5th round (that is, the round in which the V role is activated) (S1201). In the process of S1201, when it is determined that it is time to start the fifth round (S1201: Yes), the start of the action scenario of the V role is set (S1202), and the opening pattern of the specific winning opening 65a corresponding to the jackpot type. is set (S1203), and the process proceeds to S1205.

As described above, in the first control example, a common action scenario is set for the V role regardless of the jackpot type (regardless of the type). Specifically, an operation scenario is set in which the arrangement is changed so that the game balls can be distributed to the V area from the time when 5 seconds have passed since the start of the 5th round to the time when 10 seconds have passed. On the other hand, as described above, different opening patterns are set for the opening pattern of the specific winning opening 65a depending on whether the probability variable jackpot or the normal jackpot is selected. Specifically, in the case of a variable probability jackpot, the opening and closing pattern that allows the game ball to reach the V role while the V role is changing to the arrangement that distributes the game ball to the V area (5th round For 4.5 seconds after 5 seconds to 9.5 seconds after the start, the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is opened and closed in the opening and closing pattern in which the specific winning opening 65a is opened, while normal In the case of a big hit, the opening and closing pattern that makes it impossible to reach the V role while changing the arrangement of the V role to distribute the game balls to the V area (4.5 seconds after the start of the 5th round During the 4.5 seconds until time, the specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a is opened and closed in an opening/closing pattern in which the specific winning opening 65a is opened.

On the other hand, in the process of S1201, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the fifth round (S1201: No), the opening of the specific winning opening 65a is set (S1204), and the process proceeds to S1205. In the process of S1205 executed after the process of S1203 or S1204, a round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set (S1205), and this process ends.

The round number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 434) executed by the MPU 201, the sound lamp It is transmitted toward the control device 113 . Upon receiving the round number command, the sound lamp control device 113 sets a display round number command for displaying the newly started round number on the third symbol display device 81 . Thereby, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 can be updated in accordance with the number of rounds of the big win.

By executing this jackpot operation setting process (see FIG. 436), it is possible to open the specific winning hole 65a in each round of jackpot, and to set the state in which a ball can enter the V area in the fifth round. can be done. As a result, in the jackpots A, B, and D, the game ball almost certainly enters the V area and passes through the variable probability switch just by hitting the player right in the fifth round, so that after the jackpot ends. It is possible to shift to a definite variable state (a definite variable state of special symbols and a time saving state of normal symbols). In the case of the big hits C and E, it is difficult to enter the game ball into the V region even if the player hits to the right. As a result, the lottery of the first special symbol, in which the jackpot C is determined at a relatively high rate (50%) in the case of a big win, is set as a lottery disadvantageous to the player, and when a big win is made, the The lottery for the second special symbol in which the jackpot E is determined at a low rate (20% rate) can be an advantageous lottery for the player.

Next, details of the jackpot ending process (S1110) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 437 is a flow chart showing this jackpot ending process (S1110). This jackpot end process (S1110) is executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 435), and as described above, is a process for setting the gaming state after the jackpot ends.

In this jackpot end processing (S1110), first, it is determined whether the probability variation setting flag 203k is ON (S1301). In the process of S1301, if it is determined that the variable probability setting flag 203k is ON (S1301: Yes), it means that the game ball has passed through the variable probability switch during the big hit, so the variable probability flag 203h is set to ON. The state after the jackpot is set to the variable probability state (S1302), and the process proceeds to S1303. On the other hand, in the processing of S1301, if the variable probability setting flag 203k is off (S1301: No), it means that the game ball has not passed through the variable probability switch during the big hit, so by skipping the processing of S1302 , After the end of the jackpot is set to the low probability state of the special symbol, and the process proceeds to S1303.

In the process of S1303, the value of the counter 203g during time saving is set to 100 (S1303), and based on the state of the probability variation flag 203h and the counter 203g during time saving, a state command (jackpot end command ) is set (S1304). The state command (jackpot end command) set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 434). , and is transmitted to the audio lamp controller 113 . Upon receiving the state command, the sound lamp control device 113 updates the game state storage area 223f according to the game state notified by the state command. Thereby, the game state of the pachinko machine 10 can be accurately grasped in the sound lamp control device 113 . Next, both the big hit medium flag 203j and the variable probability setting flag 203k are set to OFF (S1305), and the process is terminated.

By executing this jackpot end processing (see FIG. 437), it is possible to accurately set the game state after the jackpot ends depending on whether or not the game ball passes through the variable probability switch during the jackpot.

Next, the details of the winning process (S1111) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 438 is a flow chart showing this winning process (S1111). This winning process (S1111) is executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 435), and as described above, is a process for performing control according to winning to the specific winning opening 65a.

In the winning process (S1111), first, it is determined whether the current round valid period is reached (S1401). Here, the round valid period is the period during which the round game is set, that is, the period from the open state of the specific winning opening 65a to the end of the interval period. In the process of S1401, if it is not the round effective period (S1401: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1401, when it is determined that the current round valid period (S1401: Yes), then it is determined whether winning to the specific winning opening 65a is detected (S1402), If winning has been detected (S1402: Yes), the value of the winning number counter 203p is updated by adding 1 (S1403), and a winning command indicating that a winning to the specific winning opening 65a has been detected is set. (S1404), the process proceeds to S1405. On the other hand, in the process of S1402, if winning to the specific winning hole 65a is not detected (S1402: No), the processes of S1403 and S1404 are skipped and the process proceeds to S1405.

In the processing of S1405, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning number counter 203p is 10 or more (S1405). On the other hand, in the processing of S1405, if it is determined that the value of the winning number counter is 9 or less (S1405: No), it is determined whether the round time has elapsed (S1406), and if the round time has elapsed ( S1406: Yes), the process proceeds to S1407. In the process of S1406, it is determined that the round time has elapsed when 30 seconds have elapsed since the start of the round.

In the process of S1407, closing of the specific winning opening 65a is set (S1407), and a closing command indicating that closing of the specific winning opening 65a is set is set (S1408). Next, it is determined whether the closing of the specific winning opening 65a this time is based on the end of one round (S1409). By setting off the flow path solenoid for varying , the state of the V role is set to an arrangement in which the game balls are distributed to the non-V area (S1410), and the process proceeds to S1411. On the other hand, in the process of S1409, when it is determined that the closing of the specific winning opening 65a is due to the completion of rounds other than 5 rounds (S1409: No), the channel solenoid is set to ON. Since there is no possibility, the process of S1410 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1411.

In the process of S1411, the remaining ball timer flag 203q, the variable probability effective flag 203s, and the round end flag are set to ON (S1411), and the process proceeds to S1412. Further, when it is determined in the process of S1405 that the value of the winning prize number counter 203p is 9 or less (S1405: No), and when it is determined in the process of S1406 that the round time has not elapsed (S1406: No), The process of S1407 to S1411 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1412.

In the process of S1412, it is determined whether the round end flag is ON (S1412), and if the round end flag is OFF (S1412: No), the process proceeds to S1413. On the other hand, when it is determined that the round end flag is on in the process of S1412 (S1412: Yes), then it is determined whether the probability variable effective flag 203s is on (S1416). In the processing of S1416, if the variable probability effective flag 203s is off (S1416: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the probability variable effective flag 203s is on (S1416: Yes), add 1 to the value of the probability variable effective timer 203t (S1417), then determine whether the value of the probability variable effective timer 203t is the upper limit value ( S1418). Then, if the value of the variable probability valid timer 203t is not the upper limit value (S1418: No), the processing proceeds to S1413, and the processing of monitoring the variable probability switch and updating the variable probability setting flag 203k is executed. Thereby, if the variable probability effective timer 203t is not the upper limit value, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the variable probability switch, so the variable probability state can be set in consideration of the time of the ball hitting. In addition, since there is an upper limit to the time that is determined to be valid, it is possible to prevent the variable probability state from being imparted by illegally passing the game ball through the variable probability switch.

On the other hand, if the value of the probability variable effective timer 203t is the upper limit value (S1418: Yes), the probability variable effective flag 203s and the round end flag are set to OFF (S1419), and the value of the probability variable effective timer 203t is reset (S1420) , the process ends.

In addition, in the processing of S1413, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the variable probability switch (S1413), and if the game ball has not passed through the variable probability switch (S1413: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if the game ball has passed through the variable probability switch (S1413: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the variable probability passage counter 203m (S1414), the variable probability setting flag 203k is set to ON (S1415), and this processing exit.

Next, the abnormality processing (S1112) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 439 is a flow chart showing this abnormality processing (S1112). This abnormality process (S1112) is a process executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 435), and as described above, it is determined whether or not the ball that entered the specific winning hole 65a was discharged normally. This process is for

In the abnormality processing (S1112), first, it is determined whether the current round valid period is reached (S1501), and if not (S1501: No), the present process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the round is valid (S1501: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the ball discharge port switch (whether or not the game ball discharged from the variable winning device 65 has been detected). It is determined (S1502).

In the processing of S1502, when it is determined that the game ball has passed the ball discharge port switch (the game ball has been discharged from the variable winning device 65) (S1502: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the discharge number counter 203u. (S1503), the process proceeds to S1504. On the other hand, in the process of S1502, if the game ball has not passed the ball outlet switch (S1502: No), the process of S1503 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1504.

In the process of S1504, it is determined whether the remaining ball timer flag 203q is ON (S1504). If it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203q is off (S1504: No), this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the remaining ball timer flag 203q is ON (S1504: Yes), it means that the ball is being swept, so the value of the remaining ball timer 203r is updated by adding 1 (S1505). Next, it is determined whether the value of the remaining ball timer 203r is the upper limit (S1506). On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the remaining ball timer 203r is the upper limit value (S1506: Yes), then the number of discharges (the sum of the value of the probability variable passage counter 203m and the value of the discharge number counter 203u) wins. It is determined whether the number (the value of the winning number counter 203p) matches (S1507).

In the processing of S1507, when it is determined that the number of discharged coins and the number of winning prizes do not match (S1507: No), an error command is set (S1508), and the process proceeds to S1509. When the error command is received by the audio lamp control device 113, an error is displayed (for example, characters indicating a winning number mismatch error are displayed), and an error signal is output to the hall computer. Therefore, during the period when the V area is closed, it is possible to suppress the fraudulent act of illegally entering the game ball into the V area and passing through the variable probability switch.

On the other hand, in the process of S1507, when it is determined that the number of discharged coins and the number of winning prizes match (S1507: Yes), the process of S1508 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S1509. In the process of S1509, the remaining ball timer flag 203q is set to OFF (S1509), and then the value of the remaining ball timer 203r is reset (S1510). After that, the values of the winning prize number counter 203p, the discharge number counter 203u, and the variable probability passage counter 203m are reset (S1511), and the process ends.

By executing this abnormal processing (see FIG. 439), the occurrence of a problem that the ball entering the specific winning hole 65a is not discharged normally due to the clogging of the ball inside the variable winning device 65 is prevented. Early detection and notification are possible.

<Regarding control processing of the audio ramp control device in the first control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 440 to 458, each control process executed by the MPU 221 within the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 can be broadly classified into startup processing that is started upon power-on and main processing that is executed after the startup processing.

First, referring to FIG. 440, start-up processing executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 440 is a flow chart showing this startup process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S3001). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is ON, the power-off processing in S3119 (see FIG. 441) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (instantaneous power failure, so-called "instantaneous power failure"). ) is started during execution (S3002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 441, when the audio lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main controller 110 (see S3116 in FIG. 441), it executes power-off processing in S3119. Before the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag is turned on, and after the power-off processing is completed, the power-off processing flag is turned off. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing of S3119 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off processing in-progress flag.

If the power-off processing flag is off (S3002: No), the startup process this time was started after the power was completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurred and the power was shut off in S3119. Either it was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started when only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise (without receiving a power off command from the main controller 110). be. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S3003).

Destruction of data in the RAM 223 is confirmed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of "55AAh" is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S3006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if it is not "55AAh", it can be confirmed that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed. If data destruction of RAM223 is confirmed (S3003: Yes), it will transfer to S3004 and will start initialization of RAM223. On the other hand, if destruction of data in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S3003: No), the process proceeds to S3008.

It should be noted that if the startup process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power cut). ), it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S3003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S3004. On the other hand, whether the current start-up processing was started after a momentary power failure occurred and after the execution of the power-off processing in S3119 was completed, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like. If the process is started after the above, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S3003: No), and the process proceeds to S3008.

If the power-off processing flag is on (S3002: Yes), the startup process this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and the sound lamp control device 113 It is started by resetting the MPU 221 of . In such a case, the memory state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct because the power-off process is in progress. Therefore, since control cannot be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S3004 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the processing of S3004, the storage area of the entire range of RAM 223 is checked (S3004). As a checking method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, read for each byte to check whether it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined as normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". All storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to 0 by this read/write check of the RAM 223 .

If the read/write check is normal for all storage areas of the RAM 223 (S3005: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set RAM destruction check data (S3006). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data destruction. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read/write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S3005: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S3007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. An abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34 . In addition, it is possible to output a sound by the sound output device 226 to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or to transmit an error command to the display control device 114 and display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. can be

In the process of S3008, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S3008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S3119 is executed (see S3118 in FIG. 441). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off processing of S3119 is executed, the process of S3008 is reached with the power-off flag turned on because the startup processing this time is instantaneous. This is the case where the process is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S3119 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S3008: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S3009), and after setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S3010), an interrupt Permission is set (S3011). The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110 . When the process of S3011 is finished, next, it is determined whether or not a status command has been received from the main controller 110 (S3012). This status command is a command set in the process of S908 of the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 433). In the process of S3012, if it is determined that a status command has been received (S3012: Yes), information indicating the received status command is set in the status setting area (S3013), and the process proceeds to the main process (see FIG. 441). and migrate. On the other hand, in the process of S3012, if it is determined that the status command has not been received (S3012: No), the process of S3013 is skipped and the process proceeds to the main process (see FIG. 441).

On the other hand, the process of S3008 is reached with the power-off flag turned off because the current start-up process was started after, for example, the power supply was completely shut off. This is the case where the processing has been reached, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 has been reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S3008: No), S3009, which is the processing for clearing the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, the processing proceeds to S3010, the processing of S3010 to S3013 described above is executed, and the main processing (Fig. 441).

In this way, when the power is turned on, the main control unit 110 outputs a command that can determine whether or not the normal symbol is in the long-term hit state, so that the sound lamp control unit 113 side can also determine the state. can be done.

The reason why the clearing process of S3009 is skipped is that when the process of S3008 is reached from S3004 via the process of S3006, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S3004, When only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and start-up processing is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the audio lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, referring to FIG. 441, main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after startup processing of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 441 is a flow chart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 ms or more has passed since the main process was started or after the current process of S3101 was executed (S3101). If not (S3101: No), the process proceeds to S3114 without performing the processes of S3102 to S3113. In the process of S3101, it is determined whether or not 1 msec has elapsed because S3102 to S3113 are mainly processes related to display (effect), and there is no need to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). , the command determination processing in S3114, the variable display setting processing in S3115, and the processing for updating various counter values (not shown) are preferably executed in short cycles. That is, by executing the process of S3114 in a short period, it is possible to prevent the command transmitted from the main controller 110 from being missed in reception, and by executing the process of S3115 in a short period, the command can be received by the command determination process. Based on the command, it is possible to make settings related to variable effects without delay.

If 1 millisecond or more has elapsed in the processing of S3101 (S3101: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of S3103 to S3115 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S3102 ). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S3108 described later (S3103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S3104). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, it is notified that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). will be Also, a command may be sent to the display control device 114 to notify that the power is supplied on the screen of the third pattern display device 81 . Note that if the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S3105 without notifying by the power-on notification process.

In the process of S3105, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the pending number display update process is executed (S3106). In the customer waiting effect process, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by a player for a predetermined period of time, a setting such as switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to a title screen is performed, and the setting is used as a command for display control. It is sent to device 114 . In the pending number display update process, a process of lighting a pending lamp (not shown) according to the value of the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 223a, the value of the special symbol 2 pending ball number counter 223b, or the value of the normal pending ball number counter 223c. is done.

After that, frame button input monitoring/effect processing is executed (S3107). In this frame button input monitoring and effect processing, input as to whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed is monitored in order to enhance the effect of the effect, and the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed is dealt with. This is a process of setting to perform production.

When the frame button input monitoring/effect processing is completed, the lamp editing processing is executed (S3108), and then the sound editing/output processing is executed (S3109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination parts 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81 . In the sound editing/output process, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the process of S3109, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S3110), and the process proceeds to S3111. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110, the time required for the variation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 and the time synchronized therewith are set. Lamp edit processing of S3108 is executed based on the time set in this liquid crystal effect execution monitoring processing. The sound editing/output processing of S3109 is also executed at the time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

After the processing of S3110 is finished, next, an effect update process for updating the effect mode of various effects executed during execution of the variable display effect is executed (S3111). This rendering update process (S3111) will be described later with reference to FIGS. After the performance update process (S3111) is executed, the operation status (whether pressed or not) of the PUSH button 10317 is then monitored, and when the pressed is detected, control is executed according to the pressed status. Press detection processing is executed (S3112). The details of this press detection process (S3112) will be described later with reference to FIGS.

After the process of S3112 is finished, the counter update process is executed (S3113). In this counter update process (S3113), a process for updating the value of a counter (for example, the effect lottery counter 223y for lottery of the effect mode) required when executing various effects is executed.

After the processing of S3113 is finished, next, command determination processing for executing control according to various commands received from the main controller 110 is executed (S3114). Details of this command determination process (S3114) will be described later with reference to FIGS. After executing the command determination process (S3114), the variable display setting process is executed (S3115). In the variable display setting process, a variable pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variable pattern command received from the main controller 110 in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to perform a variable effect. As a result, the command is sent to display controller 114 . Details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

When the processing of S3115 is finished, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S3116). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110 . If power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of S3116 (S3116: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S3118), and the power-off processing is executed (S3119). After the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag is turned off (S3120), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power-off processing, interrupt processing is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. In addition, the memory of information on occurrence of power failure is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S3116 (S3116: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S3117), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S3117: No), the process returns to S3101, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S3117: Yes), the process is looped infinitely to stop execution of subsequent processes. Here, since the main processing is not executed when it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change after that. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, the player can call the hall clerk or the like and ask them to repair the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the RAM destruction may be notified by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 .

Next, with reference to FIG. 442, the rendering update process (S3111) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 442 is a flow chart showing this effect update process (S3111). This effect update process (S3111) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 441) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and as described above, various effects are executed during execution of the variable display effect. It is a process for updating the effect mode of.

In the effect update process (S3111), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the variable time timer 223s is greater than 0 (S3201). means that the variable display is not being executed, meaning that there is no possibility that the effect to be updated is being executed, so the process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the variable time timer 223s is greater than 0 (that is, the value is 1 or more) (S3201: Yes), the value of the variable time timer is subtracted (S3202), and then A press stop effect process for updating the effect mode during execution of the press stop effect (see FIG. 395) is executed (S3203). The details of this press stop effect processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the processing of S3203 ends, then, an interrupt continuous hit effect process for updating the effect mode during execution of the interrupt continuous hit effect (see FIG. 399) is executed (S3204). The details of this interrupt continuous hit effect processing (S3204) will be described later with reference to FIG. Further, when the processing of S3204 ends, next, batch change effect processing for updating the effect mode during execution of the pending collective change effect (see FIGS. 402 and 403) is executed (S3205). Details of this batch change effect processing (S3205) will be described later with reference to FIG. When the processing of S3205 ends, charge consumption processing for setting the consumption of the charged spirit gauge in the chance charge effect (see FIG. 397) is executed (S3206), and this processing ends. Details of this charge consumption processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 443, the press stop rendering process (S3203) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 443 is a flow chart showing this press stop effect process (S3203). This press stop effect process (S3203) is executed in the effect update process (see FIG. 442) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and as described above, the press stop effect (see FIG. 395) is executed. This is a process for updating the effect mode in the middle.

In this press stop effect process (see FIG. 443), first, it is determined whether or not it is time to start the press stop effect (see FIG. 395) (S3301). In the processing of S3301, if it is determined that it is time to start the press stop effect (see FIG. 395) (S3301: Yes), the start of the press stop effect is set (S3302), and the value of the operation effective period timer 223t is set to 3. A timer value corresponding to seconds is set (S3303). Next, the value of the stop operation number counter 223u is set to 3 (S3304), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3301 that it is not the time to start the press stop effect (S3301: No), then it is determined whether or not the value of the operation effective period timer 223t is greater than 0 (S3305). In the process of S3305, if it is determined that the value of the operation valid period timer 223t is greater than 0 (S3305: Yes), the value of the operation valid period timer 223t is updated (S3306), and then the updated operation valid period timer It is determined whether or not the value of 223t is 0 (S3307). In the process of S3307, if it is determined that the value of the operation effective period timer 223t after updating is not 0 (S3307: No), this process ends. If it is determined that the value of the operation effective period timer 223t after updating is 0 (S3307: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the chance charge standby flag 223k is ON (S3308). In the process of S3308, when it is determined that the chance charge standby flag 223k is ON (S3308: Yes), the stop display of the chance charge symbol is set (S3309), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S3308, if it is determined that the chance charge standby flag 223k is off (S3308: No), only the press stop effect (see FIG. 395) is set for the current variable display effect. In this state (the execution of the chance charge effect was not set), it means that the operation valid period (3 seconds) has passed without the player performing the stop operation, so the stop display of the missing symbol is set. (S3310), and the process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3305 that the value of the operation effective period timer 223t is 0 (S3305: No), then it is determined whether or not the stop display period of the chance charge symbol has elapsed (S3311). If it is determined that the stop display period of the chance charge symbols has not passed (S3311: No), this processing is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S3311, if it is determined that the stop display period of the chance charge symbol has elapsed (S3311: Yes), the start of the chance charge effect corresponding to the value of the charge number counter 223m is set (S3312), and the chance The charge standby flag 223k is set to off (S3313). Next, a value corresponding to the current number of balls on hold is set to the value of the charge state number counter 223n (S3314), and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 444, the interrupt continuous hitting effect processing (S3204) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 444 is a flow chart showing this interrupt continuous hit effect processing (S3204). This interrupt continuous hit effect processing (S3204) is executed in the effect update process (see FIG. 442) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and is performed during execution of the interrupt continuous hit effect (see FIG. 399). This is processing for updating the mode.

When this interrupt continuous hitting effect process (see FIG. 444) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not it is time to start the interrupt continuous hitting effect (S3401). In the processing of S3401, if it is determined that it is time to start the interrupt continuous hit effect (S3401: Yes), then, from the value of the variable time timer 223s, whether or not the current variable time is the time before reach is determined (S3402). In the processing of S3402, if it is determined that it is a variable time indicating before reach (S3402: Yes), after setting the pause of both the display and the sound, set the pause flag to "01H" ( S3404), the process proceeds to S3405. Specifically, in the processing of S3404, a display interruption command indicating the start of stopping (suspending) the display mode is set to be output to the display control device 114, and the stopping (suspending) of the BGM output is started. is set to be output to the audio output device 226.

On the other hand, in the process of S3402, if it is determined that the value of the variable time timer 223s is not the timer value indicating the pre-reach (S3402: No), a temporary stop (interruption) is set only for the display mode, and a temporary stop flag is set. is set to "02H" (S3403), and the process proceeds to S3405. In the process of S3405, which is executed after the process of S3403 or S3404 is finished, the start of the interrupt continuous hit effect (see FIG. 399) is set (S3405), and this process is finished.

On the other hand, in the process of S3401, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the interrupt continuous hitting effect (S3401: No), then it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the continuous hitting period (S3406). In the process of S3406, if it is determined that it is time to start the repeated hit period (S3406: Yes), the timer value corresponding to 5 seconds is set as the value of the repeated hit effective period timer 223v (S3407), and this process ends. .

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3406 that it is not the time to start the repeated hitting period (S3406: No), then it is determined whether or not the value of the repeated hitting effective period timer 223v is greater than 0 (S3408). If it is determined that the value of the continuous-hit effective period timer 223v is greater than 0 (S3408: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value of the continuous-hit effective period timer 223v (S3409), and then the value of the repeated-hit effective period timer 223v after the subtraction. is 0 (S3410). If it is determined that the value of the repeated hitting effective period timer 223v after the subtraction is 0 (S3410: Yes), this processing is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S3410, if it is determined that the value of the repeated hitting effective period timer 223v after the subtraction is not 0 (S3410: No), display of the end image of the interruption repeated hitting effect is set (S3411), and then, End this process.

On the other hand, in the process of S3408, if it is determined that the value of the repeated hit effective period timer 223v is 0 (S3408: No), then it is determined whether or not it is time to end the interrupt repeated hit effect (S3412). . In the process of S3412, if it is determined that it is time to end the interrupt continuous hit effect (S3412: Yes), it is determined whether or not the value of the pause flag is "01H" (S3413). If it is determined that the value of the temporary stop flag is "01H" (S3413: Yes), it means that both the display and the sound were stopped (interrupted) at the start of the interrupt continuous hit effect. Both the aspect and the audio aspect are set to resume from the paused position (S3414). That is, the display control device 114 is set to output a display interruption command indicating the end of interruption of the display mode, and the audio output device 226 is set to output an audio interruption command indicating the end of interruption of the audio mode. Set output. When the processing of S3414 ends, the processing moves to S3415.

On the other hand, in the process of S3413, if it is determined that the value of the pause flag is not "01H" (S3413: No), it means that the value of the pause flag is "02H", and only the display mode is temporarily displayed. Since it means that it is stopped (interrupted), it is set to resume the display mode from the pause position (that is, to the display control device 114, to output a display suspension command indicating the end of the suspension of the display mode). setting) (S3416), and the process proceeds to S3415. In the process of S3415 that is executed after the process of S3414 or S3416, neither the sound nor the display is paused (interrupted) by setting the pause flag to the initial value "00H" (S3415). is displayed, and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S3412, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the interrupt continuous hitting effect (S3412: No), the present processing is terminated as it is.

Next, with reference to FIG. 445, collective change effect processing (S3205) executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 445 is a flow chart showing this collective change effect processing (S3205). This collective change effect processing (S3205) is executed in the effect update processing (see FIG. 442) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and execution of the pending collective change effect (see FIGS. 402 and 403). This is a process for updating the effect mode in the middle.

In the batch change effect processing (see FIG. 445), first, it is determined whether or not the batch change flag 223p is on (S3501). S3501: No) This means that the pending batch change effect (see FIGS. 402 and 403) is not being executed, and there is no possibility of setting the pending batch change effect. When it is determined that the collective change flag 223p is ON (S3501: Yes), next, in the pending collective change effect, the timing at which the effective period of the operation for the PUSH button 10317 for collectively changing the pending symbol mode is started. (S3502). In the process of S3502, if it is determined that it is time to start the effective period of the operation on the PUSH button 10317 (S3502: Yes), the timer value corresponding to 3 seconds is set to the batch change period timer 223x ( S3503), the validity period of the operation on the PUSH button 10317 is set to 3 seconds, and this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of 3502 that it is not the start timing of the effective period (S3502: No), then the value of the collective change period timer 223x is greater than 0 (that is, whether the operation of the PUSH button 10317 is effective). It is determined whether it is within the period or not (S3504). In the process of S3504, if it is determined that the value of the batch change period timer 223x is greater than 0 (S3504: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value of the batch change period timer 223x (S3505), and the batch change period timer 223x after subtraction is is 0 (S3506). In the process of S3506, if it is determined that the value of the collective change period timer 223x after subtraction is not 0 (S3506: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S3506, if it is determined that the value of the collective change period timer 223x after the subtraction is 0 (S3506: Yes), each number of pending balls in the pending design mode indicated by the data in the pending design mode storage area 223r The setting is made so that the pattern is changed and displayed (S3507), the values of the batch change flag 223p, the change point storage area 223q, and the batch change period timer 223x are all reset (S3508), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S3504, if it is determined that the value of the batch change period timer 223x is 0 (S3504: No), this process ends.

Next, the charge consumption processing (S3206) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 446 is a flowchart showing this charge consumption processing (S3206). This charge consumption process (S3206) is executed in the effect update process (see FIG. 442) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and as described above, the chance charge effect (see FIG. 397) is charged. This is the processing for setting the consumption of the Kiai gauge.

In the charge consumption process (S3206), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the charge number counter 223m is greater than 0 (S3551), and if it is determined that the value of the charge number counter 223m is 0 (S3551: No) , means that there is no room for consuming the spirit gauge to generate the chance-up effect, so this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3551 that the value of the charge number counter 223m is greater than 0 (S3551: Yes), then it is determined whether or not it is time to execute the charge consumption effect (S3552). In the process of S3552, if it is determined that it is not the timing at which the charge consumption effect can be executed (S3552: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3552 that it is time to execute the charge consumption effect (S3552: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the value of the charge state number counter 223n is 0 ( S3553). If it is determined that the value of the charge state number counter 223n is 0 (S3553: Yes), it means that this is the last variation display that allows the consumption of the spirit gauge. Since it is necessary to completely consume the spirit gauge, processing (each processing of S3560 and S3561) for setting the chance-up effect by consuming the spirit gauge is executed.

On the other hand, in the processing of S3553, if it is determined that the value of the charge state number counter 223n is not 0 (S3553: No), then the currently executed variation display (the variation) indicates the degree of expectation of super reach or higher. It is determined whether or not the displayed effect mode is the set variable display (S3554). If it is determined that the change is not the expected degree of super reach or higher (it is equal to or lower than the normal reach effect) (S3354: No), next, whether or not the charge state range includes a hold of super reach or higher. is determined (S3555). If it is determined that the range of the charge state includes a hold of super reach or higher (S3555: Yes), then the value of the charge number counter 223m is a value obtained by adding 2 to the number of balls held within the charge range. It is determined whether or not it is larger (S3556). If it is determined that the value of the charge number counter 223m is greater than the value obtained by adding 2 to the number of balls held within the charge range (S3556: Yes), the ball held above the super ready-to-win effect with many chances to execute the chance-up effect. Even if it is included, it means that the number of gauges (charges) of the spirit gauge remains large compared to the number of balls held, so in order to reduce the spirit gauge in the change, Processing (each processing of S3558, S3559) for consuming the gauge and setting the chance-up effect is executed.

On the other hand, in the processing of S3556, if it is determined that the value of the charge number counter 223m is equal to or less than the value obtained by adding 2 to the number of held balls within the charge range (S3556: No), variable display with super reach effect set. means that it is possible to fully consume the spirit gauge within the range of the value of the charge state number counter 223n by consuming the spirit gauge at the execution timing of the chance-up effect a plurality of times in . This processing ends without setting the consumption of the spirit gauge in .

In addition, in the process of S3555, if it is determined that the range of the charge state includes a hold of super reach or more (S3555: No), then the value of the charge number counter 223m is a hold ball within the charge range It is determined whether or not it is greater than the number (S3557). When it is determined that the value of the charge number counter 223m is equal to or less than the number of held balls within the charge range (S3557: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the processing of S3557, if it is determined that the value of the charge number counter 223m is greater than the number of held balls within the charge range (S3557: Yes), the gauge number (charge number) of the spirit gauge with respect to the number of held balls is increased. Since it means that there are many remaining, in order to decrease the spirit gauge in the change, the processing (each processing of S3558, S3559) for setting the chance up effect by consuming the spirit gauge is executed.

In the process of S3558, the charge consumption effect of the effect mode corresponding to the execution timing is set (S3558), the value of the charge number counter 223m is subtracted by 1 (S3559), and then the process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S3554, if it is determined that the fluctuation is greater than or equal to super reach (S3354: Yes), the charge consumption effect of the effect mode corresponding to the execution timing is set (S3560), and the value of the charge number counter 223m is set. is decremented by 1 (S3561), and then the process ends.

Next, the press detection process (S3112) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 447 is a flow chart showing this press detection process (S3112). This press detection process (S3112) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 441) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and monitors the operation status of the PUSH button 10317 (whether or not it is pressed). This is a process for executing control according to the state of the depression when the depression is detected.

In the press detection process (S3112), first, it is determined whether or not the push on the PUSH button 10317 has been detected (S3601). End this process. On the other hand, if it is determined that pressing of the PUSH button 10317 has been detected (S3601: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the value of the operation effective period timer 223t is greater than 0 (S3602). If it is determined that the value of the operation valid period timer 223t is greater than 0 (S3602: Yes), it means that the PUSH button 10317 was pressed (operated) during the valid period of the press stop effect (see FIG. 395). Therefore, stop operation detection processing for performing control corresponding to the stop operation during execution of the press stop effect is executed (S3603), and this processing ends. The details of this stop operation detection process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the processing of S3602, if it is determined that the value of the operation effective period timer 223t is 0 (S3602: No), then the value of the continuous hit effective period timer 223v is greater than 0 (S3604). If it is determined that the value of the repeated hitting valid period timer 223v is greater than 0 (S3604: Yes), repeated hitting operation detection processing for executing control corresponding to the repeated hitting operation during execution of the interrupt repeated hitting effect is executed (S3605). , and then terminate this process. The details of this repeated hit operation detection process will be described later with reference to FIG. 449 .

In the process of S3604, if it is determined that the value of the repeated hit effective period timer 223v is 0 (S3604: No), then whether the value of the batch change period timer 223x is greater than 0 (that is, in the pending batch change effect It is determined whether or not the PUSH button 10317 is valid (S3606). If it is determined that the value of the collective change period timer 223x is greater than 0 (S3606: Yes), change operation detection processing for performing control for setting the collective change is executed during execution of the pending collective change effect. (S3607), and then the process ends. Details of this change operation detection process will be described later with reference to FIG. 450 . On the other hand, in the process of S3606, if it is determined that the value of the batch change period timer 223x is 0 (S3606: No), this process ends.

Next, the stop operation detection process (S3603) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 448 is a flow chart showing this stop operation detection process (S3603). This stop operation detection process (S3603) is executed in the press detection process (see FIG. 447) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. This is processing for performing corresponding control.

In the stop operation detection process (S3603), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the stop operation number counter 223u is greater than 1 (S3701). : Yes), stop display of the symbol row corresponding to the value of the stop operation number counter 223u is set (S3702), and the process proceeds to S3709. In the processing of S3702, if the value of the stop operation number counter 223u is 3, the stop operation of the left symbol row is set, and if the value of the stop operation number counter 223u is 2, the right symbol row is stopped. set.

On the other hand, in the processing of S3701, when it is determined that the value of the stop operation number counter 223u is 1 or less (S3701: No), it is determined whether or not the chance charge waiting flag 223k is ON (S3703). In the process of S3703, if it is determined that the chance charge standby flag 223k is ON (S3703: Yes), it means that the variable display for which execution of the chance charge effect is set is being executed, and therefore the remaining period By setting the stop display effect of the chance charge symbol in , the start of the chance charge effect is notified (S3707), and the process proceeds to S3708.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3703 that the chance charge standby flag 223k is off (S3703: No), then it is determined whether or not the operation valid period remains for two seconds or more (S3704). If it is determined that the operation valid period remains for 2 seconds or more (S3704: Yes), the execution of the chance charge effect (see FIG. 396(a)) is set (S3705), and the process proceeds to S3708. do. By executing the processing of S3705, in the variable display in which only the press stop effect is set, if three presses are completed early in the effective period (within 1 second after the start), the It is possible to execute a chance charge fanning performance with a longer performance period than stopping the symbol. Therefore, the effect period can be varied according to the speed of the player's operation (pressing), so that a more suitable effect mode can be realized.

In the processing of S3704, if it is determined that the operation valid period does not remain for 2 seconds or more (less than 2 seconds) (S3704: No), the stop display of the middle symbol row is set so as to be a combination of winning symbols. (S3706), the process proceeds to S3708.

In the process of S3708 executed after any one of the processes of S3705 to S3707 is executed, the value of the operation effective period timer 223t is reset to 0 (S3708), and the process proceeds to S3709. In the process of S3709 executed after the process of S3702 or S3708 is executed, the value of the stop operation number counter 223u is decremented by 1 and updated (S3709), and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 449, repeated hitting operation detection processing (S3605) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 449 is a flow chart showing this repeated hit operation detection process (S3605). This continuous-hit operation detection process (S3605) is executed in the press detection process (see FIG. 447) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. This is processing for executing corresponding control.

In the repeated hit operation detection process (S3605), first, the remaining effective period (T) is specified from the value of the repeated hit effective period timer 223v (S3751), and then the number of monsters corresponding to the effect type of the current interrupt repeated effect is determined. A lower limit value (D) is calculated (S3752). It should be noted that the lower limit of the number of monsters is defined in advance for each effect type in the interruption repeated hit lottery table 222h (see FIG. 417) as described above. When the processing of S3752 is completed, next, "T/5 seconds x (100 bodies - D)" is calculated (S3753), and the value obtained by subtracting the calculated value from the current remaining number of monsters is calculated (S3754). ). In addition, in the process of S3754, the value after the decimal point is rounded off. When the process of S3754 is finished, next, it is determined whether or not the calculated number of monsters is less than the lower limit value of the effect type of the current interruption continuous hit effect (S3755).

In the process of S3755, if it is determined that the number of monsters below the lower limit has been calculated (S3755: Yes), the display of the remaining number of monsters is updated to the lower limit (S3756), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S3755, if it is determined that the calculated number of monsters is equal to or higher than the lower limit (S3755: No), the number of remaining monsters displayed is updated by subtracting the specified subtraction number (S3757), and then , the process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 450, the change operation detection process (S3607) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 450 is a flow chart showing this changing operation detection process (S3607). This change operation detection process (S3607) is executed in the press detection process (see FIG. 447) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. This is a process for performing control for setting changes.

In the change operation detection process (S3607), first, the change point corresponding to each held ball is identified from the data in the change point storage area 223q (S3801), and the state of the held ball with a change point of 1 or more is uniformly increased by one step. The data in the reserved design mode storage area 223r is updated as follows (S3802). Next, the change type of hold 1 is specified (S3803), and the hold design mode is specified according to the specified change type, hold change lottery table 222c, and effect lottery counter (S3804). Then, it is determined whether or not the identified reserved design mode has a higher degree of expectation than the data in the reserved design mode storage area 223r (S3805). When it is determined that the specified reserved design mode has a higher degree of expectation than the data in the reserved design mode storage area 223r (S3805: Yes), the data in the reserved design mode storage area 223r is replaced with data indicating the specified reserved design mode. (S3806), and the process proceeds to S3807.

On the other hand, in the processing of S3805, when it is determined that the specified reserved design mode is not higher expected than the data in the reserved design mode storage area 223r (S3805: No), the processing of S38006 is skipped, and the processing of S3807 is performed. Transition.

In the processing of S3807, it is determined whether or not the rank-up lottery of the reserved design mode by the processing of S3804 to S3806 has been completed for all the reserved balls (S3807), and the lottery for all the reserved balls has not been completed. If so (S3807: No), the variation type of the held ball whose start winning time is detected newer than the held ball targeted for this lottery is specified (S3808), and the process returns to S3804.

In the process of S3807, when it is determined that the rank-up lottery for all the reserved balls has been completed (S3807: Yes), the display of the reserved design mode indicated by the data of the reserved design mode storage area 223r is set (S3809), and collectively The values of the change flag 223p, the change point storage area 223q, and the collective change period timer 223x are all reset (S3810), and this processing ends.

Next, the command determination processing (S3114) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 451 is a flow chart showing this command determination process (S3114). This command determination process (S3114) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 441) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp controller 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main controller 110. .

In the command determination process (S3114), first, an unprocessed command received from main controller 110 is read from the command storage area provided in RAM 223, analyzed, and the unprocessed command received from main controller 110 is analyzed. It is determined whether or not a status command is included in the command (S3901). In the processing of S3901, if it is determined that the state command is included in the unprocessed command received from the main control device 110 (S3901: Yes), the game is played according to the game state notified by the received command. The data in the status storage area 223f is updated (S3902), and then this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S3901, if it is determined that the state command has not been received (S3901: No), then the variation pattern command has been received from the main controller 110 (variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands). pattern command is included) (S3903). In the process of S3903, if it is determined that the variation pattern command has been received (S3903: Yes), the variation start flag 223d is set to ON (S3904), and the variation pattern is extracted from the received variation pattern command (S3905) , and then terminate this process.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3903 that the variation pattern command has not been received (S3903: No), then it is determined whether or not the stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S3906). In the processing of S3906, if it is determined that the stop type command has been received (S3906: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S3907), and the stop type is extracted from the received command. (S3908), and the process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S3909, if it is determined that the stop type command has not been received (S3906: No), then it is determined whether or not the pending ball number command has been received (S3909). In the processing of S3909, if it is determined that the number of reserved balls command has been received (S3909: Yes), the number of reserved balls is extracted from the received command, and the corresponding special symbol reserved ball number counter (special symbol 1 reserved ball number The values of the counter 223a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b) are updated (S3910), and this process is terminated. Here, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the first special symbol is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a, and the number of reserved balls corresponding to the second special symbol is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b. Stored. Further, when receiving a reserved ball number command indicating the number of reserved balls of normal symbols, information for indicating the number of reserved balls is stored in the normal reserved ball number counter 223c. In this control example, since information indicating the current number of reserved balls is included in the number of reserved balls command sent from the main controller 110, for example, due to a power failure, etc. Even if the value is erased, the value of each pending ball number counter can be restored to an appropriate value by receiving the pending ball number command to be transmitted next. In this case, in the process of transmitting the state command (see S908 in FIG. 433) of the start-up process of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 433), it is preferable to transmit each pending pitch command.

On the other hand, in the process of S3909, if the command for the number of reserved balls has not been received (S3909: No), then it is determined whether or not the winning information command has been received from the main controller 110 (S3911). In the processing of S3911, if it is determined that the winning information command has been received (S3911: Yes), various effects (prefetching effects) are set according to the type of winning information notified by the winning information command. (S3912), and the process ends. The details of the winning information command process (S3912) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 452 and 453. FIG.

In the process of S3911, if it is determined that the winning information command has not been received (S3911: No), then various commands related to winning (opening command, round number command, jackpot end command, and ending command) Either) is received (S3913), and if it is determined that a hit-related command is received (S3913: Yes), control is executed according to the type of command related to hit Win-related command processing is executed (S3914), and this processing ends. The hit-related command processing (S3914) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, in the process of S3913, if it is determined that the winning-related command has not been received from the main controller 110 (S3913: No), then this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 452, the details of the winning information command process (S3912), which is one process in the command determination process (S3114), will be described. FIG. 452 is a flow chart showing this winning information command process (S3912). In the winning information command process (S3912), first, the data indicating the lottery result notified by the command is stored in an empty area of the winning information storage area (S4001), and the process proceeds to S4002. In the processing of S4001, the data indicating the winning information notified by the command is stored in the empty area with the smallest number among the first to fourth areas of the winning information storage area.

In the processing of S4002, it is determined whether or not the chance charge standby flag 223k is ON (S4002). If it is determined that the chance charge standby flag 223k is ON (S4002: No), it means that the variable display effect set for the chance charge effect is being executed and the chance charge effect has not yet started. Therefore, according to the contents of the newly detected starting prize, the gauge number (charge number) of the spirit gauge charged in the chance charge effect is added to the value predetermined at the start of the fluctuation. Execute the process. More specifically, first, it is determined whether or not the current winning information command is a winning information command indicating winning (S4003). ), the value of the charge number counter 223m is updated by adding 2 (S4004), and the process proceeds to S4006. On the other hand, in the processing of S4003, if it is determined that the current winning information command is not a winning information command indicating winning (is a winning information command indicating loss) (S4003: No), the value of the charge number counter 223m 1 is added and updated (S4005), and the process proceeds to S4006.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4002, if it is determined that the chance charge standby flag 223k is off (S4002: No), since there is no possibility of adding the number of gauges (charges) of the spirit gauge, each of S4003 to S4006 Skip the process and move to the process of S4006. In the process of S4006, it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery corresponding to falling has been notified (S4006). In the process of S4006, if it is determined that the lottery result corresponding to the fall has been notified (S4006: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the production mode corresponding to the continuous rich scenario in the variable probability continuous suggestion production is being executed. It is determined (S4007). In the process of S4007, if the data in the continuous scenario storage area 223h is any one of "08H" to "0BH" corresponding to the continuous rich scenario, the effect mode corresponding to the continuous rich scenario is being executed. determine that there is

In the processing of S4007, if it is determined that the continuation suggestion effect of the continuous rich scenario is being executed (S4007: Yes), next, the winning information notified by the winning information command this time is the probability variable continuation suggestion effect It is determined whether or not the winning information is consumed during execution (S4008). That is, according to the new winning information, during the execution of the probability variation continuation suggestion production, it is determined whether it is confirmed that the special symbol falls from the probability variation state to the low probability state, and it is digested during the execution of the continuation suggestion production (S4008: Yes), refer to the discontinuation table of the continuation suggestion effect selection table 222g (see FIG. 416). Then, a continuation suggestive rendering scenario is determined (S4009), the continuation scenario storage area 223h is overwritten with data indicating the selected scenario (S4010), and the process proceeds to S4011. In the processes of S4009 and S4010, the effect scenario of "0CH" in the non-continuing table is stored in the continuous scenario storage area 223h.

In addition, in the first control example, when the new starting prize is a lottery result corresponding to the number of times of variation within the execution range of the variable probability continuation suggestion effect, the production scenario of "0CH" is always set. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and one scenario may be determined by lottery from among the four production scenarios (one of "0CH" to "0FH") defined in the discontinuation table. By configuring in this way, it is possible to further diversify the mode of presentation at the time of falling.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4006, if it is determined that the lottery result corresponding to the fall has not been notified (S4006: No), if it is determined that the probability variable continuation suggestion effect of the continuous rich scenario is not being executed (S4007: No ), and if it is determined that the new winning information notified by the winning information command this time is not the winning information digested during the execution of the variable probability continuation suggestion effect (S4008: No), the effect in the probability variable continuation suggestion effect Since there is no need to rewrite the scenario to the scenario of the table for discontinuation, the process proceeds directly to S4011.

By executing each process of S4006 to S4010, the probability variable state at the start of the probability variable continuation suggestion production is in a probability variable state, and the probability variable continuation suggestion production ends. When the continuation suggestion performance is executed, and after that the start winning corresponding to the fall occurs, by switching to the non-continuation performance scenario (“0CH” performance scenario), the result of the probability variable continuation suggestion performance is that the player has fallen. It can be notified that it is. That is, since it is possible to prevent the effect from being continued even though the player has already fallen, it is possible to realize a more suitable effect.

In addition, in the process of S4011, based on the winning information notified by the winning information command, a pending advance notice lottery process is executed to determine whether the pending change effect and the pending batch change effect can be executed (S4011), and this process exit. The details of this pending advance notice lottery process will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 453 is a flow chart showing this pending notice lottery process (S4011). In this pending notice lottery process (S4011), first, data indicating a pending design mode of white pending is stored in an empty area of the pending design mode storage area 223r (S4051). More specifically, data indicating the reserved design mode of white reservation is stored in the area with the smallest number among the empty areas of the reserved design mode storage area 223r. When the process of S4051 ends, it is then determined whether or not the batch change flag 223p is on (S4052). The symbol mode is set so as to be displayed as a reserved symbol corresponding to the new winning information (S4053), and this process is terminated. By executing the processing of S4053, the pending ball number pattern changed to a rock-like mode by the pending batch change effect and the pending ball number pattern based on the start prize newly detected after the start of the pending batch change effect. Since the reserved pattern mode can be changed between and, the player can easily understand the range of the reserved number of ball patterns to be subjected to the reserved batch change effect. Therefore, it is possible to realize an effect mode that is easier for the player to understand.

In addition, in the first control example, the number of pending ball symbols based on the start winning prize detected after the start of the pending collective change effect is uniformly set to the pending symbol mode of white pending, but it is limited to this. isn't it. For example, for a new number of reserved ball symbols, it may be configured to execute a lottery in a reserved design mode using the reserved change lottery table 222c (see FIG. 414(a)). As a result, not only the reserved number of balls pattern which is the object of the reserved collective change performance but also the reserved number of balls pattern based on the new start prize can be given a feeling of big hit. Further, for example, a new starting winning prize detected after the start of the pending batch change effect may be added to the target of the pending batch change effect. In this case, the number of pending ball patterns based on the new start winning may be configured to always be added to the target of the pending batch change effect, or may be added to the target of the pending batch change effect only under a predetermined condition. good too. As a predetermined condition, for example, when the winning information corresponding to the new start winning indicates the degree of expectation of the jackpot more than the super reach out, it may be included in the execution target of the pending collective change effect. , For example, only when winning information corresponding to a variation type with a higher degree of expectation than the pending ball in the range where the pending batch change effect is set is newly notified, as a configuration to be included in the execution target of the pending batch change effect good too. By constructing in this way, when the reserved number of balls pattern based on the new start prize is added to the execution target of the reserved collective change performance, the player's expectation for the big win can be further improved.

In the process of S4052, if it is determined that the collective change flag 223p is off (S4052: No), then it is determined whether or not the number of pending balls is greater than 1 (S4054), and the number of pending balls is 1 or less. If it is determined to be (S4054: No), there is no possibility of executing the pending collective change effect, so the processing of S4060 for drawing the pending symbol mode of the pending ball number symbol corresponding to the new winning information Transition. On the other hand, in the process of S4054, if it is determined that the number of pending balls is greater than 1 (2 or more) (S4054: Yes), the data in the winning information storage area and the data in the pending symbol mode storage area 223r , and the change point calculation table 222d (S4055), and whether or not to execute the pending batch change effect is determined according to the calculated change points, the values of the batch change lottery table 222e, and the effect lottery counter. (S4056). Next, it is determined whether or not the determination result by the processing of S4056 is the determination result corresponding to the execution of the pending batch change effect (S4057), and it is determined that it is not the determination result corresponding to the execution of the pending batch change effect. In that case (S4057: No), the process moves to S4060 for drawing a lottery for the reserved design mode of the reserved ball number design corresponding to the new prize information. On the other hand, in the processing of S4057, if it is determined that the determination result corresponds to the execution of the pending batch change effect (S4057: Yes), the execution of the pending batch change effect is set (S4058), and the batch change flag 223p is turned on. (S4059), and the process ends.

In the process of S4060, the hold change lottery table 222c (see FIG. 414(a)) is read (S4060), and the read hold change lottery table 222c, the winning information notified by the command, and the value of the effect lottery counter to determine the reserved design mode (S4061). Next, according to the reserved design mode determined in the process of S4061, the data corresponding to the latest winning information in the reserved design mode storage area 223r is updated (S4062), and the reserved design mode indicated by the updated data is updated. The display is set (S4063), and this processing ends.

By executing this reservation advance notice lottery process (see FIG. 453), it is possible to suitably set various production modes using the number of reserved ball symbols.

Next, with reference to FIG. 454, the content of the hit-related command process (S3914) described above will be described. FIG. 454 is a flow chart showing the contents of the win-related command process (S3914). This win-related command process (S3914) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 451) of the sound lamp control device 113, and when a win-related command is received from the main controller 110, This is processing for performing control according to the type of the received command.

In the hit-related command process (see FIG. 454), first, it is determined whether or not the command received this time is an opening command (S4101). If it is determined that the command received this time is an opening command (S4101: Yes), a display opening command corresponding to the received opening command is set (S4102), and then this processing ends.

In the process of S4101, if it is determined that the command received this time is not the opening command (S4101: No), then it is determined whether the command received this time is the number of rounds command (S4103). If it is determined that there is (S4103: Yes), the display round number command is set based on the round number indicated by the round number information included in the received round number command (S4104), and this process ends.

In the process of S4103, if it is determined that the command received this time is not a round number command (S4103: No), it is determined whether the command received this time is a jackpot end command (S4105), and if it is a jackpot end command When it is determined (S4105: Yes), the data in the game state storage area 223f is updated according to the information indicating the game state after the end of the jackpot included in the received jackpot end command (S4106), and then the right hit It is determined whether or not the medium winning flag 223i is on (S4107). When it is determined that the winning flag 223i during right hitting is on (S4107: Yes), the hit is a big hit during the probability variable state or the time saving state in which the game is played by right hitting (that is, so-called consecutive house has occurred) This means that it means that the second special symbol lottery with a high probability variable jackpot ratio has hit the jackpot, so the back mode for high expectations (see FIG. 390 (b)) is set (S4109), End this process. Uniformly setting the back mode for high expectations is to make it difficult to understand whether the time saving state is set or the variable probability state is set, so that the player can predict the current game state. It is for realization.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4107, when it is determined that the winning flag 223i during right-handed hitting is off (S4107: No), a jackpot is won in the normal state in which the game is played with left-handed hitting (so-called first winning). This means that the ratio of the probability variable jackpot is low in the lottery of the first special symbol, so the back mode for low expectations (see FIG. 390 (a)) is set (S4108), After that, this process is terminated. Uniformly setting the back mode for low expectations is to make it difficult to understand whether the time saving state is set or the variable probability state is set, so that the player can predict the current game state. It is for realization.

Also, if it is determined that the jackpot end command is not received in the process of S4105 (S4105: No), then it is determined whether the command received this time is the ending command (S4110), and if it is the ending command If so (S4110: Yes), a display ending command is set (S4111), and this process ends. If it is determined in the process of S4110 that the ending command has not been received (S4110: No), then this process ends.

Next, the variable display setting process (S3115) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 455 is a flow chart showing this variable display setting process (S3115). This variable display setting process (S3115) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 441) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and in order to execute the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81, This is a process for generating and setting display variation pattern commands based on the variation pattern commands received from main controller 110 .

In the variable display setting process (S3115), first, it is determined whether or not the variable start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is ON (S4201). Then, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is not ON (that is, it is OFF) (S4201: No), it means that the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110, so the process of S4207 Move to On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is on (S4201: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned off (S4202), and the fluctuation pattern type in the fluctuation effect extracted from the display fluctuation pattern command is stored in the RAM 223. (S4203).

Next, a variable effect setting process for setting the effect mode to be executed with the extracted variable pattern (variable time) is executed (S4204). The contents of this variable effect setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. When the processing of S4204 ends, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the effect mode determined in the processing of S4204 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 ( S4205). In the display control device 114, by receiving this display variation pattern command, the third pattern display device 81 performs the variation display of the third pattern in the variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command, Display control of the variable effect is started.

Next, the data stored in the winning information storage area is shifted (S4206). In this process, the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the winning information storage area are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of 1st area→execution area, 2nd area→1st area, 3rd area→2nd area, 4th area→3rd area. After shifting the data, the process proceeds to S4207.

In the processing of S4207, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is ON (S4207). Then, if it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is not ON (that is, it is OFF) (S4207: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is on (S4207: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e is turned off (S4208), and the stop type in the variable effect extracted from the stop type command is stored in the RAM 223. (S4209). Next, the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main controller 110 is set as it is as the stop type of the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81 (S4210), and the process proceeds to S4211.

In the processing of S4211, based on the set stop type, a display stop type command for notification to the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set for transmission to the display control device 114 (S4211). . In the display control device 114, by receiving this stop type command for display, the stop pattern corresponding to the stop type indicated by this stop type command for display is stopped and displayed on the third pattern display device 81. The stop display of the variable production is controlled. After the process of S4211 is executed, this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 456, the content of the variable effect setting process (S4204), which is one process in the variable display setting process (see FIG. 455) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, will be described. . FIG. 456 is a flow chart showing the contents of the variable effect setting process (S4204). In this variable effect setting process (S4204), a process for setting a detailed effect mode (announcement contents) of the variable effect of the third symbol corresponding to the variation of the special symbol is executed.

In the variable effect setting process (S4204), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the charge state number counter 223n is greater than 0 (S4301). : Yes), the value of the charge state number counter 223n is decremented by 1 (S4302), and the process proceeds to S4303. On the other hand, in the process of S4301, when it is determined that the value of the charge state number counter 223n is 0 (S4301: No), the process of S4302 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S4303.

In the processing of S4303, it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving guarantee counter 223g is greater than 0 (S4303). When it is determined that the value of the time saving guarantee counter 223g is 0 (S4303: No), the process proceeds to S4311. On the other hand, in the process of S4303, if it is determined that the value of the time saving guarantee number counter 223g is greater than 0 (S4303: Yes), the value of the time saving guarantee number counter 223g is subtracted by 1 (S4304), then after the subtraction It is determined whether or not the value of the time saving guarantee counter 223g is greater than 0 (S4305). In the process of S4305, when it is determined that the value of the reduced working hours guarantee counter 223g is 0 (S4305: No), the process proceeds to S4311. On the other hand, in the process of S4305, if it is determined that the value of the time saving guarantee number counter 223g after subtraction is greater than 0 (S4305: Yes), then whether the value of the time saving guarantee number counter 223g after subtraction is greater than 4 It is determined whether or not (S4306). In the process of S4306, when it is determined that the value of the reduced working hours guarantee counter 223g is greater than 4 (S4306: Yes), the process proceeds to S4312.

In the processing of S4311, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is a variable probability state (S4311). Here, based on the data stored in the game state storage area 223f, it is determined whether the current game state is the variable probability state. In the process of S4311, when it is determined that the current state is the variable probability state (S4311: Yes), it means that the variable probability state continues beyond 100 times after the end of the big hit, so the back mode lottery is performed. Therefore, the process proceeds to S4312. On the other hand, in the process of S4311, if it is determined that the current state is not the variable probability state (S4311: No), the process of S4312 is skipped and the process proceeds to S4313.

In the process of S4312, in the gaming state (time saving state, probability variable state) in which the game is played with the right hand, one back mode is drawn by lottery from among a plurality of back modes indicating the expectation of the probability variable state with a lottery probability according to the gaming state. Back mode lottery processing is executed (S4312), and the process proceeds to S4313. The details of this back mode lottery process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of S4313, an effect mode selection process for selecting an effect mode in the variable display effect is executed (S4313), and then this process is terminated. The details of this effect mode selection process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In addition, in the variable effect setting process in the first control example, in the process of S4306, if it is determined that the value of the time reduction guaranteed number counter 223g after subtraction is 4 or less (S4306: No), the probability variable continuation suggestion effect Since it means that it is the execution period (the fluctuation period of the 96th to 99th fluctuation display after the end of the big win), next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is the big win (S4307). In the process of S4307, when it is determined that the lottery result is a big win (S4307: Yes), the big win performance mode dedicated to the execution period of the continuous suggestion performance is set as the current variable display mode (S4308), and during right hand hitting. The winning flag is set to ON (S4309), and this processing is terminated. Note that, as a jackpot effect mode dedicated to the execution period of the continuous suggestion effect, for example, an effect is executed in which an adventurer who breaks through the door 806 discovers a treasure on the other side of the door 806 by the effect of breaking through the door 806. , an effect or the like in which a jackpot is announced is executed.

On the other hand, in the process of S4307, if it is determined that the special symbol lottery result is not a special symbol jackpot (S4307: No), the continuous suggestion effect setting for setting the effect mode in the execution period of the probability variable continuous suggestive effect The process is executed (S4310) and the process ends. Details of the continuation suggestion effect setting process (S4310) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, referring to FIG. 457, description will be given of the contents of the continuous suggestive effect setting process (S4310) which is one process in the variable effect setting process (see FIG. 456) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. do. FIG. 457 is a flow chart showing the contents of the continuation suggestion effect setting process (S4310).

When the continuation suggestion effect setting process (S4310) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the time reduction guarantee number counter 223g is 4 (S4401), and the value of the time reduction guarantee number counter 223g is not 4 (3 or less) (S4401: No), the data in the continuous scenario storage area 223h is read (S4411), and it is determined whether or not the read scenario is a continuous rich scenario (S4412). In the processing of S4412, if it is determined that the read scenario is not the scenario for continuous enrichment (S4412: No), the processing proceeds to S4415. On the other hand, in the process of S4412, if it is determined that the read scenario is a scenario for continuous concentration (S4412: Yes), it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol this time is the lottery result of falling ( S4413), if it is determined that the lottery result is not falling (S4413: No), the process proceeds to S4415. On the other hand, in the process of S4413, when it is determined that the lottery result is falling (S4413: Yes), the production scenario is switched to "0CH" (S4414), and the process proceeds to S4415.

In the process of S4415, from the scenario read out from the continuous scenario storage area 223h, the effect mode of the number of fluctuations corresponding to the value of the time reduction guarantee counter 223g is read (S4415), and the read effect mode is used as the display mode of the current variation pattern. Set (S4416). Next, it is determined whether or not the final rendering mode of the scenario has been set (S4417). If it is determined that the final rendering mode of the scenario has been set (S4417: Yes), the data in the continuous scenario storage area 223h is determined. is reset to "00H" (S4418), and the process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S4417, if it is determined that the final rendering mode of the scenario is not set (S4417: No), the process of S4418 is skipped and the process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S4401, if it is determined that the value of the time saving guarantee counter 223g is 4 (S4401: Yes), it means that it is the start timing of the probability variation continuation suggestion production (see FIG. 392), so the probability variation A process for determining a production scenario for continuous suggestive production is executed. Specifically, first, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is a variable probability state (S4402). In the process of S4402, if it is determined that the current gaming state is a variable probability state (S4402: Yes), the data in the winning information storage area is read (S4403), and the winning information includes the lottery result of falling. It is determined whether or not there is (S4404). In the process of S4404, if it is determined that the lottery result of falling is not included in the winning information (S4404: No), then four winning information is stored (that is, the probability variation continuation suggestion effect It is determined whether or not the ball held until the end has already been held (S4405).

In the processing of S4405, if it is determined that four pieces of winning information are stored (S4405: Yes), the table for continuation confirmation in the continuation suggestion effect selection table 222g (see FIG. 416) is referred to, and the continuation suggestion effect scenario is determined. is determined (S4406), and the process proceeds to S4409. On the other hand, in the processing of S4405, if it is determined that the four pieces of winning information are not stored (S4405: No), the continuation rich table in the continuation suggestion effect selection table 222g (see FIG. 416) is referred to, and the continuation suggestion A production scenario is determined (S4407), and the process proceeds to S4409.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4402, if it is determined that the current gaming state is not a probability variable state (S4402: No), and in the processing of S4404, the lottery result of falling is included in the prize information If so (S4404: Yes), the discontinuation table in the continuation suggestion effect selection table 222g (see FIG. 416) is referred to determine the effect scenario (S4408), and the process proceeds to S4409.

In the process of S4409 executed after any one of the processes of S4406 to S4408 is executed, data indicating the selected production scenario is stored in the continuous scenario storage area 223h (S4409), and the first variation in the determined scenario is executed. is set as the effect mode of the current variation pattern (S4410), and the process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 458, the contents of the back mode lottery process (S4312), which is one process in the variation effect setting process (see FIG. 456) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, will be described. . FIG. 458 is a flow chart showing the contents of the back mode lottery process (S4312).

When the back mode lottery process (S4312) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the current variation pattern is a big hit variation pattern (S4501). When it is determined that the current variation pattern is a variation pattern for a big win (S4501: Yes), the variation display mode for a big win is selected as the variation display mode (S4502), and the winning flag 223i during right hitting is set to ON. (S4503), and the process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S4501, if it is determined that the current variation pattern is not a big hit variation pattern (S4501: No), then it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is a variable probability state (S4504). . If it is determined that the current game state is not the variable probability state (S4504: No), the back mode lottery table 222b (see FIG. 413) is referred to for fallen table and the value of the effect lottery counter 223y. is selected (S4505), and the process proceeds to S4510.

On the other hand, in the process of S4504, if it is determined that the current gaming state is a variable probability state (S4504: Yes), the data in the winning information storage area is read (S4506), and then the lottery result of falling in the winning information is included (S4507). In the process of S4507, if it is determined that the prize winning information includes the lottery result of falling (S4507: Yes), the non-fall table in the back mode lottery table 222b (see FIG. 413) and the effect lottery counter 223y , and the back mode is selected by lottery (S4508), and the process proceeds to S4510.

On the other hand, in the process of S4507, if it is determined that the falling lottery result is not included in the winning information (S4507: No), the probability variation continuation table in the back mode lottery table 222b (see FIG. 413) and the effect lottery The back mode is selected by referring to the value of the counter 223y (S4509), and the process proceeds to S4510.

In the process of S4510 executed after any one of the processes of S4505, S4508, and S4509 is executed, the lottery result of each process is the lottery result indicating the change to the rear mode different from the current rear mode. (S4510). In the processing of S4510, if it is determined that the result of the lottery corresponds to the change of the rear face mode (S4510: Yes), a rear face change command for display indicating the changed rear face mode is set (S4511), and this processing ends. do. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4510 that the back mode is not to be changed (S4510: No), the process of S4511 is skipped and the process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 459, the content of the effect mode selection process (S4313), which is one process in the variation effect setting process (see FIG. 456) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, will be described. . FIG. 459 is a flow chart showing the contents of the effect mode selection process (S4313).

When the effect mode selection process (S4313) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not a variation pattern command including an additional time command (including an additional time command indicating an additional time of 7 seconds) has been received (S4551). If it is determined that the variation pattern command including the additional time command has not been received (S4551: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S4551, if it is determined that the variation pattern command including the additional time command is received (S4551: Yes), the interrupt repeated hit lottery table 222h (see FIG. 417) is read (S4552), and the effect lottery counter Whether or not the continuous hit effect can be executed and the type are determined according to the value of 223y (S4553), and then it is determined whether or not the lottery result corresponds to the execution of the repeated interrupt effect (S4554). In the process of S4554, if it is determined that the lottery result corresponds to the execution of the interrupt continuous hit effect (S4554: Yes), the data corresponding to the type of the interrupt continuous hit effect to be executed is stored in the repeated hit type storage area 223j (S4555 ), and then, it is determined whether or not the type of interrupt continuous hit effect is the type to be executed before reach (S4556). In the processing of S4556, if it is determined that the type of interrupt repeated hit effect to be executed before reaching reach (S4556: Yes), the voice mode corresponding to the variable time indicated by the basic time command is determined (S4558), and the sound mode of S4559 is determined. Go to processing.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4556, if it is determined that the type of the determined interrupt continuous hit effect is not the type to be executed before reach (S4556: No), the variable time indicated by the basic time command and the additional time command The voice mode corresponding to the sum of the indicated fluctuation time is determined (S4557), and the process proceeds to S4559.

In the process of S4559, the display mode corresponding to the variable time indicated by the basic time command is determined (S4559), and this process ends. Thus, in the first control example, it is configured to be easily identifiable whether or not it is a variation type long by 7 seconds depending on the presence or absence of the additional time saving command. As a result, it is possible to determine whether or not the change type is a lottery target for whether or not to execute the interrupt continuous hitting effect, simply by confirming the content of the additional time command. Further, when it is decided to execute the interrupt continuous hit effect, the variable time can be filled by setting the effect mode corresponding to the variable time notified by the basic time command (the variable time shorter by 7 seconds). can. Therefore, it is possible to easily match the end timing of the performance mode with the end timing of the variable display performance without preparing a performance mode dedicated to the interrupt continuous hitting performance, so that a suitable performance mode can be provided.

On the other hand, in the process of S4554, if it is determined that the interrupt continuous hit effect is not executed (S4554: No), the chance charge lottery table 222f (see FIG. 415(b)) is read out (S4560), and the current variation type Then, it determines whether or not the chance charge effect (see FIGS. 396(b) and 397(a)) can be executed according to the number of pending balls and the value of the effect lottery counter 223y (S4561), and then the process of S4561. It is determined whether or not execution of the chance charge effect has been determined by determination (lottery) (S4562). In the process of S4562, if it is determined that the execution of the chance charge effect has not been determined (S4562: No), the effect mode corresponding to the variation type indicated by the variation pattern command is determined (S4566), and this process ends. .

On the other hand, in the process of S4562, if it is determined that the execution of the chance charge effect has been determined (S4562: Yes), the value of the charge number counter 223m is set to the number of pending balls plus 1 (S4563), and the chance The charge standby flag 223k is set to ON (S4564), the effect mode including the chance charge effect is determined as the variable display mode of this time (S4565), and this process is terminated. As described above, in the first control example, when execution of the chance charge effect is determined, the gauge amount of the spirit gauge KG accumulated by the chance charge effect (charge number counter 223 m) is based on the number of held balls at the time of the determination. value). After completion of the chance charge effect, the pace at which the chance-up effect is executed (that is, the spirit gauge is consumed) is variable in consideration of the lottery result of each reserved ball. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce the processing load (the processing load when determining the number of gauges) at the start of the chance charge effect.

<Regarding control processing of the display control device in the first control example>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 460 to 473. FIG. The processing of the MPU 231 can be broadly classified into main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, and processing for one frame from the image controller 237. There is V interrupt processing that is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal that is transmitted every 20 milliseconds when image drawing processing is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command reception processing is preferentially executed. As a result, it is possible to quickly reflect the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113 and execute the V interrupt process.

First, with reference to FIG. 460, main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 460 is a flow chart showing this main process. The main processing is to execute initialization processing when the power is turned on.

Activation of this main process is specifically performed according to the following flow. When power is turned on from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" and , the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is specified for the bus line 240. FIG. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address designated on the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231 . Then, the MPU 231 fetches the received instruction code from the character ROM 234, and starts the main process by starting the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction.

Here, if all the boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address designated to the bus line 240 is "0000H". When detected, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND type flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read out and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, the time taken to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in the present control example, the NOR ROM 234d stores a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program that should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is canceled, thereby speeding up the NOR ROM. Since it is a memory from which data can be read, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234 c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 . Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S8001), and the display control device 114 to start.

Here, referring to FIG. 461, the boot processing (S8001) will be described. 461 is a flowchart showing boot processing (S8001) executed in the main processing in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. FIG.

As described above, in this control example, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81 instead of being stored in a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. The character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed is stored. The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND-type flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed, especially when performing random access. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may deteriorate. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by DRAM and the data table. A process of transferring and storing in the storage area 233b is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the hardware operations of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234 described above, the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR-type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c after the system reset is canceled is executed. Of the control programs stored in the 2-program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S8101). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the head address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S8102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the rest of the boot program included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S8101.

By setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S8102, the MPU 231 can execute various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but rather reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. and execute various processing. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the process for the instruction.

After the command pointer 231a is set by the process of S8102, the remaining boot program whose execution is started by the set command pointer 231a is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a. Of the control programs stored, the remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a are transferred by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b (S8103). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) of the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

After executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S8104), the instruction pointer 231a is moved to the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the boot process (see S8001 in FIG. 460) is completed. By setting the top address of the program corresponding to the initializing process (see S8002 in FIG. 460) (S8105), the execution of the boot program is finished, and the boot process ends.

By executing the boot process (S8001) in this way, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the work RAM 233, which is composed entirely of DRAM. It is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. At the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processing is executed using

Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a whose read speed is slow, the control program and fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the fixed value data after the system reset is released. By transferring to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read the control program and fixed value data from the work RAM configured by the DRAM with a high read speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect part.

On the other hand, without storing the entire boot program in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the rest of the boot program is stored in the NAND type flash memory 234a. , the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time simply by adding the NOR type ROM 234d with a very small capacity. can be done.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 461, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S8101 includes all remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. may be part of As for the boot program transferred here, a predetermined amount of the control program including all remaining boot programs is transferred to the program storage area 233a. 231a may be executed. Then, the processes of S8103 to S8105 may be executed by all remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

In addition, the boot program transferred by the process of S8101 transfers a part of the remaining boot program by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and then the beginning of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. A process of setting an address to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. In addition, part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing is further transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount of part of the remaining boot program, and subsequently stored in the program storage area 233a. A process of setting the start address of the stored boot program to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a predetermined amount of a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a, and then the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set in the instruction pointer 231a in step S8101. and the processing of S8102 may be repeated a plurality of times, and then the processing of S8103 to S8105 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the rest of the boot program not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at once, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. Using the boot program, a predetermined amount can be transferred to the program storage area 233a.

Further, in this control example, the first program storage area 234d1 stores a part of the boot program that is first executed by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released. It may be stored in the 1-program storage area 234d1. In this case, the MPU 231 may perform the processes of S8103 to S8105 without performing the processes of S8101 and S8102 after starting the boot process. This eliminates the need to transfer the boot program to the program storage area 233a, reducing the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the boot processing time. Therefore, it is possible to start the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231, which becomes possible after the boot process, more quickly.

Returning now to the description of FIG. After the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S8002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings are made for the registers in the MPU 231 and the I/O device. In addition, processing for clearing the memory of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set to the respective flags. As the initial value of each flag, "off" or "0" is set unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after the image controller 237 is initialized, the image controller 237 is instructed to draw an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81. and instruct execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81 . Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be a different color according to the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacture, immediately after turning on the power, it is inspected whether or not the image of the color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the pachinko machine 10 It is possible to easily and immediately judge whether or not the activation can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S8003). This transfer instruction contains the leading and trailing addresses of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the main image when the power is turned on, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The image controller 237 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

Then, when the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating transfer end to the MPU 231 . By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. When the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 stores transfer end information indicating transfer end in a register provided inside the image controller 237 or in a partial area of the built-in memory. It may be written. The MPU 231 reads information from this register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby ascertaining that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. You may do so.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S8003, the power-on variation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to . This transfer instruction contains the head address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image, the data size of the image data, and information on the transfer destination (here, the resident video RAM 235). , and the head address of the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, which is the transfer destination. It is transferred to the change image area 235b when the power is turned on. The image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S8004, then the simple image display flag 233c is set. is turned on (S8005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 471(a)), which will be described later. Resident image transfer setting processing for instructing the image controller 237 to transfer is executed (see S9602 in FIG. 471(a)).

Further, the simple image display flag 233c indicates that all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. Remains on until terminated. As a result, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 462(b)), the power-on images (power-on main image and power-on variation image) shown in FIGS. 462(b), the simple command determination process (see S8308 in FIG. 462(b)) and the simple display setting process (see S8309 in FIG. 462(b)) are executed.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234. Due to its slow read speed, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is It takes a long time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Therefore, as in this main processing, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on varying image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image at power-on is transferred to the third image. By displaying it on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player and the people involved in the hall can see the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. On the other hand, while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed, so that the rest of the resident video RAM 235 can be resident. It is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying whether the operation is stopped while the image data to be processed is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 .

Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like during manufacturing, since the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the operation of the third pattern display device 81 is started without any problem when the power is turned on. Therefore, it is possible to prevent deterioration of the operation check efficiency by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234. FIG.

In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so that the power-on main image is the third symbol. When the player starts the game while the display is displayed on the display device 81, a ball enters the first start hole 64 (start winning), and an instruction to start the variable effect is issued from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device. 113, that is, when a display variation pattern command is received, a power-on variation image (not shown) is immediately displayed during the variation presentation period, and a simple variation presentation can be performed. can. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation performance.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the third symbol display device 81 continues to display the main image when the power is turned on. is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, it takes a long time to transfer the data. However, in this pachinko machine 10, since it is possible to perform a simple variation effect using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, after the power is restored, Immediately after the power is turned on, even while the main image is being displayed, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the processing of S8005, interrupt permission is set (S8006), and thereafter, the main processing executes infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Accordingly, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S8006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 462(a). FIG. 462(a) is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes command interrupt processing.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S8201), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt processing are read out by command determination processing or simple command determination processing of V interrupt processing to be described later, and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 462(b). FIG. 462(b) is a flow chart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and after specifying the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 423) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

As described above, this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the image controller 237 and sent to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing processing for one frame is completed. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in accordance with a new drawing instruction in a frame buffer storing image information being displayed.

Here, first, an outline of the flow of V interrupt processing will be described, and then details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 462(b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S8301). If it is off (S8301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. In order to display on the display device 81, command determination processing (S8302) is executed, and then display setting processing (S8303) is executed.

In the command determination process (S8302), the content of the command from the sound lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process is analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the demonstration display data table or the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and processed. This is because command determination processing is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when V interrupt processing is executed, and there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during those 20 milliseconds. be. In particular, when main controller 110 decides to start a variable effect, there is a high possibility that a display variation pattern command, a display stop type command, and the like are stored in the command buffer area at the same time. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands all at once, it is possible to quickly comprehend the mode and stop type of the variable performance selected by the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113, and generate a performance image corresponding to the mode. Drawing of an image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . Details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

In the display setting process (S8303), based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S8302), etc., the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81 is displayed. specifically identify the content of In addition, depending on the status of processing, etc., the effect mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is determined, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. Details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

After the display setting process is executed, task processing is executed (S8304). In this task processing, the image is configured based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 specified by the display setting processing (S8303) or the simple display setting processing (S8309). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be displayed, various parameters required for drawing such as the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, transfer setting processing is executed (S8305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 is caused to transfer image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. While the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. When a transfer instruction to transfer to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 is set, and a continuous notice command (not shown) is received from the sound lamp control device 113, the continuous notice is sent to the image controller 237. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview images used in the effect and the image data of the rear image after change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. FIG. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 471 and 472. FIG.

Next, drawing processing is executed (S8306). In this drawing process, based on the types of sprites that make up one frame determined in the task process (S8304) and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S8305), 423, and transmits the drawing list to the image controller 237 together with the buffer information to be drawn. As a result, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list. Details of the rendering process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S8307). Then, the V interrupt process ends. As a counter updated by the process of S8307, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and is updated each time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, in the command determination process, when reception of the stop type command for display is detected, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type indicated by the stop type command for display is compared with the stop type counter, and the third symbol display device A stop symbol after the variable effect displayed at 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S8301 that the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S8301: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. In order to display the power-on image (not shown) on the third pattern display device 81, a simple command determination process (S8308) is executed, then a simple display setting process (S8309) is executed, and the process proceeds to S8304. do.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 463 to 468, the details of the command determination process (S8302), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 463 is a flow chart showing this command determination processing.

In this command determination process (FIG. 463, S8302), as shown in FIG. 463, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S8401). (S8401: No), the command determination process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S8401: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S8303) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S8402). All unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area are analyzed for their command types (S8403).

Then, among the unprocessed commands, first, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command (S8404), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S8404: Yes), the variation pattern command process is executed. (S8405) and returns to the processing of S8401.

Details of the variation pattern command process (S8405) will now be described with reference to FIG. 464(a). FIG. 464(a) is a flowchart showing variation pattern command processing. In this variation pattern command processing, processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the sound lamp control device 114 is executed.

In the variation pattern command process, first, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data table. It is set in the buffer 233d (S8501).

Here, since the main controller 110 always determines the start of variation at a time interval of several seconds or more, it does not receive two or more display variation pattern commands within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command is mistakenly used for display. There is a possibility that it will be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S8501, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a variation display data table corresponding to a variation pattern with a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the main control device will actually produce a variation effect with a shorter variation time than the set display data table. 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation performance according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may make the player feel uncomfortable.

On the other hand, as in this control example, by setting the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time in the display data table buffer 233d, the variation longer than the set display data table can be actually obtained. Even if the variable effect with time is instructed by main controller 110, after the variable effect according to display data table buffer 233d is completed, main controller 110 will send the next display for display, as will be described later. Since the display of the third pattern display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player can feel the third pattern display on the third pattern display device 81 without any discomfort. 3 You can continue to see the variation of the pattern.

Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S8501 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S8502). Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each variation display data table corresponding to each variation pattern, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the variation display data table set by the processing of S8501 is turned on, and other variation The data table discrimination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to off (S8503). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table determination flag set by the process of S8503, it is possible to easily determine which variation pattern the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. can judge.

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S8501, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S8504), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S8505). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S8506), the variation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this variation pattern command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S8505, the variable display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S8501 , extracts the drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, and specifies the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81. At the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e The transfer data information specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set to 1, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is stored in advance from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. image storage area 236a.

Also, in the display setting process, the time counter 233h to which the time data is set by the process of S8504 is used to measure the time of the variable presentation specified in the variable display data table, and when the variable presentation in the variable display data table ends. When it is determined, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop pattern corresponding to the stop type command for display from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

Now, return to the description of FIG. 463 . In the processing of S8404, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S8404: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command in the unprocessed commands (S8406). If there is a stop type command (S8406: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (S8407), and the process returns to S8401.

Details of the stop type command process (S8407) will now be described with reference to FIG. 464(b). FIG. 464(b) is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the sound lamp control device 114 .

In the stop class command processing, first, the stop class table corresponding to the stop class information indicated by the stop class command for display is determined (S8601), and the stop class table and V interrupt processing (see FIG. 462(b)). is compared with the value of the stop type counter which is updated each time is executed, and finally the stop symbol after the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set (S8602).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S8602 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the other stop symbols is turned on. (S8603). After that, the processing returns to S8401 in FIG.

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has passed since the variation based on the data table is started. , offset information (design offset information) from the stop design set by the processing of S8602. In the above-described task processing (S8304), after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variation, the stop design set by the processing of S8602 is specified from the stop design determination flag set by S8603, and the specified stop By adding the design offset information acquired by the display setting process to the design, the third design to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address where the image data corresponding to the specified third pattern is stored is specified. Image data corresponding to the third design is stored in the third design area 235d of the resident video RAM 235, as described above.

Returning to FIG. 463, the description is continued. If it is determined in the process of S8406 that there is no display stop type command (S8406: No), then it is determined whether there is a display interruption command among the unprocessed commands (S8408). If it is determined that the display suspend command has been received (S8408: Yes), suspend command processing is executed (S8409). Details of the suspend command process (S8409) will be described with reference to FIG.

Here, with reference to FIG. 465, the suspension command processing (S8409) will be described. FIG. 465 is a flow chart showing this interruption command process (S8409).

In the suspension command process (FIG. 465, S8409), first, it is determined whether or not the received command is a command indicating the start of suspension (S8701). In the process of S8701, if it is determined that the received command is a command indicating the start of suspension (S8701: Yes), the data indicating the type of the current display data table, the value of the pointer, and the value of the timer counter are stored as suspension data. Store in the storage area 233m (S8702), and set the interrupt repeated hit effect display data table in the display data table buffer 233d (S8703). Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the interrupt continuous hitting effect display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S8704), and the time data is set in the clock counter 233h based on the interrupt continuous hitting effect display data table (S8705). , and the pointer 233f are initialized (S8706), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S8701, if it is determined that the received command is not the command indicating the start of interruption (that is, the command indicating the end of interruption) (S8701: No), the command is stored in the interruption data storage area 233m. The type of the display data table, the value of the pointer 233f, and the value of the clock counter 233h are specified based on the data stored in the display data table (S8707). (S8708), and the process ends.

By executing this interruption command process, the progress of the display effect paused (suspended) at the start of the interrupt continuous hit effect is held in the interrupt data storage area 233m, and at the end of the interrupt continuous effect effect, the interrupt data storage area is stored. The display mode can be resumed from the display mode at the time of interruption held at 233m.

Returning to FIG. 463, the description continues. In the processing of S8408, if it is determined that there is no display interruption command (S8408: No), it is determined whether or not there is a display opening command among the unprocessed commands (S8410), and the display opening command is determined. If there is a command (S8410: Yes), the opening command process is executed (S8411), and the process returns to S8401.

Details of the opening command process (S8411) will now be described with reference to FIG. 466(a). FIG. 466(a) is a flowchart showing opening command processing. This opening command process is for executing a process corresponding to the display opening command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the opening command process, first, the opening display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S8801). Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in the process of S8801 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S8802).

Then, based on the opening display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S8801, time data representing the performance time is set in the timer counter 233h (S8803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S8804). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S8805), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this opening command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S8804, from the opening display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S8801, At the same time as extracting the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and specifying the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81, the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored by the processing of S8802. From the set transfer data table, the transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted. The image controller 237 is controlled so that the image is transferred to the image storage area 236a.

Returning to FIG. 463, the description is continued. In the process of S8410, if it is determined that there is no display opening command (S8410: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command in the unprocessed commands (S8412), and the If there is a round number command for use (S8412: Yes), the round number command process is executed (S8413), and the process returns to S8401.

Here, with reference to FIG. 466(b), the details of the round number command process (S8413) will be described. FIG. 466(b) is a flowchart showing round number command processing. The number-of-rounds command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the number-of-rounds command for display received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the round number command processing, first, the round number display data table corresponding to the number of rounds indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data. It is set in the table buffer 233d (S8901). Next, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents are cleared (S8902).

Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S8901, time data representing the performance time is set in the clock counter 233h (S8903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S8904). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S8905), the round number command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Now, return to the description of FIG. 463 . In the processing of S8412, if it is determined that there is no command for the number of rounds for display (S8412: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an ending command for display among the unprocessed commands (S8414). If there is an ending command (S8414: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S8415), and the process returns to S8401.

Details of the ending command process (S8415) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 467 is a flowchart showing ending command processing. This ending command process is to execute the process corresponding to the display ending command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the ending command process, first, the ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the ending command for display is determined, the determined ending display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed. It is set in the buffer 233d (S9001). Next, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents are cleared (S9002).

Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S9001, time data representing the performance time is set in the clock counter 233h (S9003), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S9004). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to off (S9005), the ending command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Now, return to the description of FIG. 463 . In the processing of S8414, if it is determined that there is no display ending command (S8414: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a back image change command among the unprocessed commands (S8416), and the back image is displayed. If there is a change command (S8416: Yes), the back image change command process is executed (S8417), and the process returns to S8401.

Here, with reference to FIG. 468(a), the details of the back image change command process (S8417) will be described. FIG. 468(a) is a flowchart showing back image change command processing. The back image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the back image change command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the back image change command processing, first, the back image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting processing (S9603) of the change in the back image accompanying the reception of the back image change command in the ON state is set to ON (S9101). . Then, among the back image determination flags provided for each back image type), the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is turned on, and the back image determination flag corresponding to the other back image type is turned on. The image determination flag is set to OFF (S9102), the back image change command processing is terminated, and the command determination processing is returned to.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag set by the process of S9101 is turned on, the back image type after change is specified from the back image discrimination flag set by the process of S9102. . Then, when the identified back image type is back B or C, part of the image data corresponding to those back images is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, as described above. Therefore, a transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the rear image in a predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. FIG.

Further, in the task processing, if it is specified to display one of a plurality of back surface types according to the back surface type of the back surface image specified in the display data table, the back image discrimination flag set by the processing in S9102 is used. , specifying the back image type to be displayed at that time, further specifying the range of the back image to be displayed according to the passage of time, and the RAM type in which the image data corresponding to the range of the back image is stored. (Resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of that RAM are specified.

Since the player never continuously operates the frame button 22 for 20 milliseconds or less, two or more background image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, so the command determination process is executed. In this case, there should be no cases where two or more background image change commands are stored in the command buffer area. It could be interpreted as a command. In the process of S9102, if it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the previously received back image command is turned on. Alternatively, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, any one back image change command may be extracted and the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the back image does not directly affect the game value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set it according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

Now, return to the description of FIG. 463 . In the process of S8416, if it is determined that there is no back image change command (S8416: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S8418). Otherwise (S8418: Yes), the error command process is executed (S8419), and the process returns to S8401.

Details of the error command processing (S8419) will now be described with reference to FIG. 468(b). FIG. 468(b) is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the error command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the error command process, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S9201). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to off (S9202). End the process and return to the command determination process.

In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S9201, the type of error that has occurred is determined from the error determination flag set by the process of S9202, and the error type is handled. A process is executed to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display a warning image to be displayed.

Note that if it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in the process of S9202, the error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to ON. As a result, the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player and the people involved in the hall can correctly grasp the occurrence of the error.

Now, return to the description of FIG. 463 . If it is determined in the process of S8418 that there is no error command (S8418: No), then the process corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S8420), and the process returns to the process of S8401.

In the process of S8401, which is executed again after each command has been processed, it is again determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S8401: Yes ), and the processing of S8402 to S8420 is executed again. Then, the processing of S8401 to S8420 is repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area. finish.

The simple command determination process (S8308) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 462(b)) is also performed in the same manner as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, commands necessary for displaying the power-on image shown in FIG. Extract only the type command, and execute the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 464 (a)) and the stop type command process (see FIG. 464 (b)), which are the processes corresponding to each command, and other A command is discarded without executing the process corresponding to the command.

Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 464(a)) executed in this case, in the processing of S8501, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on varying image that are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main moving image area 235a and the power-on varying moving image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S8502, the process of writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e and clearing the contents thereof is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 469 to 470, details of the display setting process (S8303), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 469 is a flow chart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 469, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S9301). It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination processing to be executed first, the processing of S9302 to S9304 is skipped, and the processing proceeds to S9305. On the other hand, if the new flag is ON (S9301: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the previously executed command determination processing, and after setting the new command flag to OFF (S9302), S9303-S9304 , the process corresponding to the new command is executed.

In the processing of S9303, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is ON (S9303). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S9303: Yes), warning image setting processing is executed (S9304).

Details of the warning image setting process will now be described with reference to FIG. 470(a). FIG. 470(a) is a flowchart showing warning image setting processing. This process is a process for developing image data for displaying a warning image corresponding to an error that has occurred on the third pattern display device 81. First, the error determination flag is referred to, and all error determination flags set to ON are displayed. Warning image data for displaying an error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third pattern display device 81 is developed (S9401).

In the task processing, based on this expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) that makes up the warning image is specified, and for each sprite, the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, etc. are determined. Determine the various parameters required.

Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S9401, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S9402), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Now, return to the description of FIG. 469 . After the warning image setting process (S9304) or when it is determined in the process of S9303 that the error occurrence flag is not ON, that is, it is OFF (S9303: No), the process proceeds to S9305.

In S9305, pointer update processing is executed (S9305). Here, the details of the pointer update processing will be described with reference to FIG. 470(b). FIG. 470(b) is a flowchart showing pointer update processing. This pointer updating process acquires the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the respective buffers of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is the process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the address to which it should be applied.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S9501). That is, the pointer 233f is basically updated so that it is incremented by 1 each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is specified after the address "0001H". When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with the storage in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the processing of S9501, it is then checked whether the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is End information. is determined (S9502). As a result, if it is End information (S9502: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the substance data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S9503). The time data corresponding to the performance time of the display data table for demonstration set in the table buffer 233d is set in the clock counter 233h (S9504), the pointer 233f is initialized by setting it to 1 (S9505), and this processing ends. and return to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed sequentially from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demonstration effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S9503, if it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demonstration display data table (S9503: No), the value of the pointer 233f is decremented by 1 ( S9506), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demonstration display data table, for example, a variable display data table, is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which the End information is described is displayed. is always expanded, the third pattern display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S9502, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not the End information (S9502: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, return to FIG. 469 to continue the description. After the pointer update process, the drawing contents of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process are obtained from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S9306). In the task processing, based on the drawing contents developed in the processing of S9306 together with the previously developed warning image, etc., the types of sprites (display objects) that make up the image are specified, and the display coordinates are determined for each sprite. Determine various parameters required for drawing such as position, magnification, and rotation angle.

Next, the value of the clock counter 233h is decremented by 1 (S9307), and it is determined whether or not the value of the clock counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S9308). Then, if the value of the clock counter 233h is 1 or more (S9308: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if the value of the clock counter 233h is 0 or less (S9308: Yes), it means that the effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is time to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is checked whether the fixed display flag is on. (S9309).

As a result, if the confirmed display flag is off (S9309: No), the confirmed display effect has not yet been performed, and it is time to perform the confirmed display effect. The transfer data table buffer 233e is set (S9310), and then the content is cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S9311). Then, the time data corresponding to the performance time of the fixed display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S9312), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S9313). Then, after setting the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state to ON (S9314), the content of the stop symbol discrimination flag is copied as it is to the previous stop symbol discrimination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S9315), returns to V interrupt processing.

Thus, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, etc., the fixed display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. You can set the drawing contents like this. In addition, only by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to the fixed display data table, the effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can be easily changed to the fixed display effect. In addition, compared to the conventional case of changing the display contents by activating another program, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore the MPU 231 is not overloaded. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various modes of effect images can be displayed on the third pattern display 81. - 特許庁

Incidentally, the last stop symbol determination flag set by the processing of S9315 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variable effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before, and in the variable display data table, the variation based on the data table Until a predetermined time elapses after the start, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variable effect performed one before is described. In the task processing (S8304), until a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variation, from the last stop design determination flag set by S9315, the stop design of the fluctuation production performed one before is specified, and the The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, in the process of S9309, if the fixed display flag is ON instead of OFF (S9309: Yes), it is determined whether or not the demonstration display flag is ON (S9316). If the demonstration display flag is off (S9316: No), it means that the value of the clock counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the fixed display effect, so the demonstration display data table is changed to the display data table. The transfer data table buffer 233d is set in the buffer 233d (S9317), and then the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S9318). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S9319). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S9320), the demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S9321), the processing ends, and the processing returns to the V interrupt processing.

In the process of S9316, if the demonstration display flag is ON (S9316: Yes), it means that the demonstration effect is performed after the fixed display effect is completed, and the demonstration effect is completed, so the display setting process is terminated as it is. and return to V interrupt processing. In this case, various settings are made so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer updating process executed in the next V interrupt process. The demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

The simple display setting process (S8309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 462(b)) also performs the same process as the display setting process. However, in the simple display setting process, one of the power-on variable images corresponding to the stop pattern set based on the stop type command for display is displayed for a predetermined time after the effect time of the power-on variable image ends. 419(b) and (c)) is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 471 and 472, the details of the transfer setting process (S8305), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 471(a) is a flow chart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S9601). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S9601: Yes), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting is made. The process is executed (S9602), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 471(b).

On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not turned on as a result of the processing of S9601, that is, if it is turned off (S9601: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video data. It has been transferred to the RAM 235 . In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S9603), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 . Details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S9602), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S8305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 471(b). FIG. 471(b) is a flow chart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S9602).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not a transfer instruction for untransferred image data has been issued to the image controller 237 (S9701). ), and further determines whether or not the image data transfer processing performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has ended (S9702). In the process of S9702, after instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image data, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined by the process of S9702 that the transfer process has not ended (S9702: No), the resident image transfer setting process ends because the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process. do. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S9702: Yes), the process proceeds to S9703. Also, as a result of the process of S9701, even if the transfer instruction for the image data that has not been transferred has not been transmitted to the image controller 237 (S9701: No), the process proceeds to S9703.

In the process of S9703, it is determined whether or not all resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 have been transferred (S9703). A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so as to transfer the resident image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S9704), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated.

As a result, the transfer data information about the untransferred resident target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer data described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236 . The transfer data information includes the head address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident target image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (where the data is transferred). The first address of the area provided in the resident video RAM 235 where the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then stores it in the buffer RAM 237a while the resident video RAM 236 is not in use. , it is transferred to the specified address of the resident video RAM 236 . Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231 .

As a result of the process of S9703, if all the resident target image data have been transferred (S9703: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S9705), and the resident image transfer setting process ends. As a result, in V interrupt processing (see FIG. 462(b)), command Since determination processing (see FIGS. 463 to 282) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 469 to 470 (a) and (b)) are executed, normal image drawing is set. A normal image is displayed on the three-symbol display device 81 . Further, subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 472) (see S9601: No in FIG. 471(a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 transfers all resident images to be resident in the resident video RAM 235, excluding the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . The MPU 231 then controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 to be held without being overwritten while the power is turned on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process will be resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the image controller 237 can perform image drawing processing. As a result, if image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, when drawing the image. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawing of the image can be immediately performed and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images such as rear images, third designs, character designs, and error messages, as well as main controller 110, sound lamp controller 113, and display controller 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is immediately resident after the display is determined by such as, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND type flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at any timing can be prevented. , high responsiveness can be maintained until an image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

Next, with reference to FIG. 472, the normal image transfer setting process (S9603), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S8305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 472 is a flow chart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S9603).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S9305) of the previously executed display setting process (S8303) is used. Information described in the indicated address is acquired (S9801). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S9802). , and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S9803), furthermore, a transfer start flag, which is provided in the work RAM 233 and indicates that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state, is set to ON (S9804), and the process proceeds to S9805.

Also, in the processing of S9802, if the acquired information is not the transfer data information but Null data (S9802: No), the processing of S9803 and S9804 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S9805. In the processing of S9805, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (S9805), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S9805: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has ended (S9806).

In the process of S9806, after setting an image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined by the process of S9806 that the transfer process has not ended (S9806: No), the image transfer process continues in the image controller 237, so this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S9806: Yes), the process proceeds to S9807. Also, as a result of the process of S9805, even if the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer process is completed (S9805: No), the process proceeds to S9807.

In the processing of S9807, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S9807). is turned off (S9808), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the processing of S9803 is set as the image data to be transferred, and then the processing proceeds to S9813. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S9807: No), then it is determined whether or not the back image change flag is on (S9809). Then, if the back image change flag is not on but off (S9809: No), there is no image data to start transferring, so the normal image transfer setting process ends.

On the other hand, if the back image change flag is on (S9809: Yes), it means that the back image has been changed. Of the discrimination flags, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is specified, and the image data is set as the image data to be transferred (S9811). Furthermore, the head address (storage source head address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is stored, and the transfer destination (usually (S9812), and the process proceeds to S9813.

When the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is for the back A, all the corresponding image data are resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, so the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 Data does not exist. Therefore, in the process of S9812, if the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is for the back A, the normal image transfer process ends.

In the process of S9813, it is determined whether or not the image data to be transferred has already been stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S9813). The determination in the processing of S9813 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is read from the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the sprite to be transferred is normal video If it is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236 and the storage state is "OFF", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236. FIG.

As a result of the process of S9813, if the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S9813: Yes), there is no need to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , the normal image transfer setting process ends. As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240. can be planned.

On the other hand, if the image data to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the process of S9813 (S9813: No), a transfer instruction for the image data to be transferred is set (S9814). As a result, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 receives the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 . The transfer data information includes the head address and the end address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the image to be transferred, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (here, the transfer destination). The start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is to be stored. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, and specifies the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). forward to the specified address. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231 .

After the process of S9814, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated (S9815), and this normal transfer setting process ends. The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated by, as described above, setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the image data to be transferred to "on", and by substituting the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites that are to be stored in the area to "off".

By executing the normal image transfer processing in this way, the processing corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the previously executed command determination processing. When the displayed stop type information is determined to be a jackpot stop type, the image data used in the opening effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Further, when the back image is changed based on the reception of the back image change command in the previously executed command determination processing, the image data used for the back image is stored in the back image of the resident video RAM 235 . Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

In addition, in this embodiment, the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. , a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. By executing the normal image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 sends data to the image controller 237 in accordance with the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the image data to be transferred is set, the sprite image data used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. can be done.

Here, the transfer data table stores the image data to be transferred so that the image data corresponding to the given sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the given sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, whereby the predetermined address is obtained according to the display data table. image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 required for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The transfer data table defines transfer data information so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 473, details of the drawing process (S8306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 473 is a flow chart showing this rendering process.

In the drawing process, the types of various sprites that make up one frame determined in task processing (S8304) and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information 423 is generated (S9901) from the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S8305). That is, in the processing of S9901, from the types of various sprites forming one frame determined in the task processing (S8304), for each sprite, the storage RAM type and address where the sprite image data is stored are specified. Then, parameters necessary for the sprite determined by task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, each sprite is rearranged in order from the sprite that should be placed on the backmost side to the sprite that should be placed on the front side in the image for one frame. As drawing information (detailed information), a drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type and address in which sprite image data is stored and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. Further, when a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S8305), the top address (storage source top address) of the character ROM 234 where the transfer target image data is stored as the transfer data information is displayed at the end of the drawing list. , the final address (storage source final address), and the top address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

As described above, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite. , according to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S9902). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j includes information instructing to expand the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information. includes information instructing to develop the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws the image in order from the sprite described at the head of the drawing list, and develops it by overwriting in the frame buffer indicated by the drawing object buffer information. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

If the drawing list contains transfer data information, the transfer data information is used to determine the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. ), and the head address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236), and the image data stored from the head address of the storage source to the end address of the storage source are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a are sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination head address of the normal video RAM 236 when the normal video RAM 236 is not in use. The image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer designated by the drawing object buffer information, and sends the image information along with the drive signal to the third pattern display device 81. Send to As a result, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . In addition, while developing the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image developed from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third pattern display 81, and the drawing process and the display process can be processed simultaneously in parallel. can be done.

In the rendering process, after the process of S9902, the rendering target buffer flag 233j is updated (S9903). Then, the drawing process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The rendering target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of one frame of image are completed. This is performed each time the drawing process of the load process (see FIG. 462(b)) is performed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. is executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing processing for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information for the first half is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By specifying these alternately, it is possible to perform display processing of an image for one frame continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing processing for an image for one frame is being performed.

<Regarding control processing of the audio output device in the first control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 in the first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 474 to 478. FIG. First, the main processing executed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 will be described with reference to FIG. 474(a). FIG. 474(a) is a flow chart showing the contents of this main process.

When the main processing of the audio output device 226 is executed, first, command determination processing for performing control according to various commands received from the audio lamp control device 113 is executed (20001). Details of this command determination process (S20001) will be described later with reference to FIG. After the processing of S20001, an audio setting process for reproducing audio data (audio file) corresponding to the effect is executed (S20001). Details of this audio setting process (S20001) will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the processing of S20001 is completed, it is determined whether or not the work RAM 303 stores power failure occurrence information (S20003). If power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of S20003 (S20003: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S20005), and the power-off processing is executed (S20006). After the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag is turned off (S20007), and then the processing is looped infinitely.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S20003 (S20003: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 303 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 303 (S20004), and the RAM 303 is destroyed. If not (S20004: No), the process returns to S20001, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 303 is destroyed (S20004: Yes), the process is looped infinitely to stop execution of subsequent processes.

Next, command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 will be described with reference to FIG. 474(b). FIG. 474(b) is a flow chart showing the contents of this command interrupt processing. This command interrupt process (see FIG. 474(b)) is a process executed each time a command is received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the RAM 303 (S20101), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt processing are read out by command determination processing, which will be described later, and processing corresponding to the commands is performed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 475, the command determination process (S20001), which is one process in the main process (see FIG. 474(a)) executed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226, will be described. FIG. 475 is a flow chart showing the contents of this command determination process (S20001).

In the command determination process (S20001), first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S20201). If there is no unprocessed new command (S20201: No), the command determination process ends. and return to main processing. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S20201: Yes), the new command flag indicating that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S20202). For all commands of processing, the types of the commands are analyzed (S20203).

Then, it is first determined whether or not there is an audio variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S20204). This audio variation pattern command is used when outputting the display variation pattern command (see S4205 in FIG. 455) in the variation display setting process of the audio lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 455). It is set to notify the type of sound to be reproduced and the output timing corresponding to the mode.

In the process of S20204, if it is determined that there is a variation pattern command for voice among the unprocessed commands (S20204: Yes), music and sound effects used during execution of the notified variation pattern command are specified (S20205 ), set the specified song, the output channel and the output timing of the sound effect (S20206), and return to the processing of S20201.

On the other hand, in the process of S20204, if it is determined that there is no voice variation pattern command (S20204: No), then it is determined whether or not the unprocessed command includes a voice repeated command ( S20207), if an audio repeated hit command is included (S20207: Yes), it means that the player has performed a repeated hit operation. is executed (S20208), and the process returns to S20201. The details of this repeated hitting sound command process (S20208) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the processing of S20207, if it is determined that the unprocessed command does not include the repeated sound command for voice (S20207: No), then it is determined whether or not the interruption command for voice is included. (S20209), and if it is determined that the unprocessed commands include a repeated sound command for voice (S20209: Yes), the interruption command processing for setting the interruption and restart of the BGM being played is executed. Execute (S20210) and return to the process of S20201. Details of this suspend command processing will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, in the process of S20209, if there is no voice interruption command among the unprocessed commands (S20209: No), the process corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S20211), and the process returns to S20201.

Next, with reference to FIG. 476, details of the repeated hitting sound command process (S20208) will be described. FIG. 476 is a flow chart showing repeated hit sound command processing (S20208). This repeated hitting sound command processing (S20208) is executed in the command determination processing (FIG. 475) in the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226, and as described above, is processing for setting the reproduction (output) of the repeated hitting sound.

In this repeated hitting sound command process (S20208), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the repeated hitting sound output flag 303a is set to "00H" (S20301). In the process of S20301, if it is determined that the value of the repeated hitting sound output flag 303a is set to "00H" (S20301: Yes), a repeated hitting sound command for the first repeated hitting operation in the interrupt repeated hitting effect (see FIG. 399) is issued. Since it means that it has been received, the process proceeds to S20305 in order to reproduce the first repeated hitting sound.

On the other hand, if it is determined that "00H" is not set to the value of the repeated hitting sound output flag 303a (S20301: No), then it is determined whether "01H" is set to the value of the repeated hitting sound output flag 303a. is determined (S20302). In the process of S20302, if it is determined that the value of the repeated hitting sound output flag 303a is not set to "01H" (that is, the value of the repeated hitting sound output flag 303a is "02H") (S20302: No), 1 This means that the repeated hitting sound output last time in the interrupt repeated hitting effect is the second repeated hitting sound. Therefore, in this case also, the process proceeds to S20305 in order to reproduce the first repeated hitting sound.

In the process of S20305, CN2 of the voice synthesizing unit 306 (see FIG. 424) is set to reproduce the audio file corresponding to the first repeated hitting sound (S20305), and the repeated hitting sound output flag 303a is set to correspond to the first repeated hitting sound. It is updated (set) to "01H" (S20306), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S20302 that the value of the repeated hitting sound output flag 303a is set to "01H" (that is, the previously output repeated hitting sound is the first repeated hitting sound) (S20302: Yes). , CN3 of the voice synthesizing unit 306 (see FIG. 424) is set to reproduce the sound file corresponding to the second repeated hitting sound (S20303), and the repeated hitting sound output flag 303a is set to "02H" corresponding to the second repeated hitting sound. is updated (set) to (S20304), and the process ends.

By executing this repeated hitting sound command processing, it is possible to alternately reproduce two types of audio data on two channels each time a repeated hitting operation is executed, so that it is possible to diversify the audio mode. . Also, in the case of a configuration in which the first repeated sound and the second repeated sound are simply played alternately on a single channel (that is, control is performed to stop the output of one sound during reproduction and output the other sound). ), it is possible to output one sound while maintaining the output state of the other sound (the first repeated sound and the second repeated sound are output in duplicate). Therefore, it is possible to make the voice mode more lively during execution of repeated hits. More specifically, in a configuration in which the first repeated hit sound and the second repeated hit sound are alternately reproduced in a single channel, when a player who has a short interval between repeated hits performs the repeated hit operation, the leading portion of each sound data This results in a monotonous voice mode in which only the voices are alternately repeated. On the other hand, if a plurality of audio data are sequentially reproduced on a plurality of channels, the output of one audio data reproduced on one channel is not interrupted, and other audio data is reproduced on other channels. can be played. That is, it is possible to synthesize and output a sound based on one sound data and a sound based on another sound data. Therefore, since it is possible to easily output sounds other than the beginning part of each sound, it is possible to further diversify the sound modes. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the first control example, two types of sound data (sounds of repeated hits) are alternately output to two channels each time a repeated hit operation is detected, but this is not restrictive. A configuration may be adopted in which three or more types of audio data are alternately reproduced in order on CN1 and CN2. This makes it possible to further diversify voice modes. In this case, the number of channels for reproducing the audio data is not limited to two, and the audio data may be sequentially reproduced for three or more channels. By configuring in this way, after one audio data is reproduced for one channel, until the next audio data is reproduced for the same channel (the audio data being reproduced is terminated). can be made longer, it is possible to further diversify the voice modes. Furthermore, the type of the audio data to be output may be changed according to the interval of successive hits. Specifically, for example, when a player is playing a game with a relatively short interval between consecutive hits (for example, 0.5 seconds or less), three types of sound modes are reproduced in order on three channels. On the other hand, when a player is playing a game with a relatively long interval between consecutive hits (for example, an interval longer than 0.5 seconds), two types of audio data are sent to two channels in order. It may be configured to reproduce (alternately). By configuring in this way, it is possible to vary the output mode of the sound according to the interval of successive hits, so that it is possible to realize the playability of adjusting the interval of repeated hits. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.

In the first control example, it is configured to output one of the repeated hitting sounds in conjunction with the repeated hitting operation. . More specifically, for example, if the last repeated hitting sound output during the effective period of the repeated hitting operation is the first repeated hitting sound, the second repeated hitting sound may be output after the end of the repeated hitting sound. With this configuration, although the first repeated hitting sound and the second repeated hitting sound were output as a set in accordance with the repeated hitting operation, the last output sound would be the first repeated hitting sound. (That is, the paired second repeated hitting sound is not output), and it is possible to prevent the sound mode from becoming incomplete. Therefore, the voice mode can be set more preferably. In this case, if the last repeated hitting sound is the first repeated hitting sound, the control to output the second repeated hitting sound after the end is changed to a variation display ( For example, it may be configured to be set only during the execution of the jackpot variation). By constructing in this way, for a player who desires to know whether or not it is a predetermined variation type, the last repeated hitting sound to be output during the interruption repeated hitting effect is dared to be the first repeated hitting sound. It is possible to realize the playability. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the first control example, the first repeated hit sound and the second repeated hit sound are alternately output regardless of the interval between repeated hits by the player, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured such that the first repeated hitting sound is always output when the repeated hitting operation is detected while no sound is being reproduced. That is, if the interval between repeated hits is too long and the next repeated hit operation is executed after the reproduction of the first repeated hit sound is completed, only the first repeated hit sound will continue to be output. may be configured. By constructing in this way, a player who desires to diversify the voice modes can be made to perform the continuous hitting operation at a faster pace, so that the player's willingness to participate in the interruption continuous hitting performance can be improved. be able to.

Next, with reference to FIG. 477, the suspension command process (S20210) will be described. FIG. 477 is a flow chart showing this interruption command process (S20210). The interruption command process (S20210) is executed during the command determination process (FIG. 475) in the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226, and is a process for setting interruption and resumption of the BGM being reproduced.

In the suspension command process (S20210), first, it is determined whether or not the received command is a command indicating the start of suspension (S20401). If it is determined that the received command indicates the start of interruption (S20401: Yes), data indicating the playback position of the variation BGM being played is stored in the playback position storage area 303b (S20402). Playback of BGM for interrupt continuous hit effect is set (S20403), and then this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S20401, if it is determined that the received command is not the command indicating the start of interruption (that is, the command indicating the end of interruption) (S20401: No), the BGM for the interrupt repeated hit effect is played. Playback is terminated (S20404), data in the playback position storage area 303b is read (S20405), playback of the variation BGM from the read playback position is resumed in CN1 (S20406), and then this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 478, the details of the audio setting process (S20002) will be described. FIG. 478 is a flow chart showing the audio setting process (S20002). This audio setting process (S20002) is executed in the main process (FIG. 474) in the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226. FIG.

In this audio setting process (S20002), first, it is determined whether or not it is time to output music (S20501). If it is determined that the present time is not the output timing of the music (S20501: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S20501, if it is determined that the current time is the output timing of the music (S20501: Yes), the audio file corresponding to the current music is read (S20502), and the read audio file is played on the corresponding channel. (S20503), the music output flag 303c is set to ON (S20504), and this process is terminated.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example, when the jackpot is won, regardless of the jackpot type, after the jackpot ends, the special symbol lottery is executed 100 times. The configuration was such that the state continued. That is, the variable probability jackpot and the normal jackpot are configured so that the operation (operation mode of the electric accessory 640a) until the lottery of special symbols is executed 100 times after the jackpot ends is common. Only when the game state is the probability variable state at the time when the lottery of the special symbols is completed 100 times after the end of the jackpot, the time saving state of the normal symbols is continued after the 100th time. That is, when the time-saving state is set as the game state after the end of the big hit, and the variable probability state is set as the game state after the end of the big hit, and the state is shifted to the low probability state of the special symbol within 100 times. In this case, at the timing when the lottery for the 100th special symbol is executed, the time-saving state of the normal symbol is ended, and the state is shifted to the normal state. By configuring in this way, if a relatively disadvantageous time-saving state is set after the end of the jackpot, or if the variable probability state is set, it falls to a low probability state within 100 times. Also, until the special symbol lottery is executed 100 times, it becomes difficult for the player to distinguish between the time saving state and the variable probability state, so the special symbol lottery is executed at least 100 times. Until then, the player can continue to have an expectation that the game state is a variable probability state.

In addition, in the first control example, if the time-saving state of normal symbols at the time of winning the jackpot, the game state is set to the normal state at the start of the variable display for showing the big win (time-saving state of normal symbols end). By configuring in this way, the case where the time saving state of the normal pattern ends within 100 times after the end of the big win can be limited to the case where the variation pattern of the big win is started, so after the end of the big win, 100 Behavior that is likely to end the time saving state of the normal pattern during the execution of the variable display effect within the times (for example, if the fluctuation time of the normal pattern exceeds 3 seconds, or if the lottery of the normal pattern is lost or when a pattern of 0.2 seconds x 1 time is executed as the opening pattern of the electric accessory 640a), the player can be pleased. Therefore, the game can be played while paying attention to the result of the lottery of normal symbols, the operation mode of the electric accessory 640a, etc. until the lottery of special symbols is executed 100 times after the end of the big win.

In addition, in the first control example, the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 allows the player to predict the possibility of the variable probability state to some extent. More specifically, during the game state in which the time-saving state of the normal pattern is set, the cave search mode with a relatively low expectation of the probability change state, the temple search mode with a relatively high expectation of the probability change state, and the probability change state It is confirmed that there is a lottery result corresponding to the fall in the hold (at least the variable state continues until the hold is digested). Either one is configured to be set at the time of executing the variable display effect based on the lottery result of the special symbol. By constructing in this way, while the time-saving state of normal symbols is set, the player can be given the pleasure of predicting the current game state from the back mode, so that the player's interest in the game can be enhanced. can be improved. In addition, by setting the super temple search mode, it is confirmed that the game state is a variable state. You can make them feel joy that their predictions were correct. On the other hand, if the state of the special symbol is predicted to be low probability, but the state is shifted to the super temple mode, the player will be delighted that the game state is set to be more advantageous than expected. can let Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved. Furthermore, by setting the super temple mode, it is confirmed that the lottery result corresponding to the fall is not included in the hold (at least the lottery for the number of pending balls can be executed with a jackpot probability in a variable state. possible), the game can be played with a stronger expectation of winning a jackpot during the hold.

In addition, in the first control example, regardless of the game state, the variable display of a specific range that is executed before the end of the lottery of 100 special symbols that guarantees the time saving state of normal symbols ( That is, just before the lottery of 100 times of special symbols ends, over the 96th to 99th fluctuation display after the end of the big hit), the probability variation continuation suggestion production for informing whether the probability variation state continues or not It is configured to run. When starting this definite variable continuation suggestion production, the lottery results from the 96th to 99th times, which is the execution range of the definite variable continuation suggestion production, are read in advance, and whether the definite variable state continues until the 99th special symbol lottery. When the variable probability state continues until the 99th special symbol lottery, the selection rate of the performance scenario in which the highly expected attack pattern is likely to occur is increased. On the other hand, if the time-saving state has fallen before the 99th special symbol lottery is executed (or the time-saving state was after the end of the previous jackpot), a low-expectation attack pattern occurs. It is configured to increase the selection rate of production scenarios that are easy to play. In this way, by setting the effect mode based on the game state at the end of the effect, it is possible to more accurately notify the game state after the end of the effect. Here, if it is configured to execute the variable probability continuation suggestion effect only based on the game state at the start of the effect, it falls to a low probability state during the execution of the variable probability continuation suggestion effect, and the continuation of the variable probability state is notified. In spite of this, there is a possibility that the time saving state will be ended with the start of the 100th special symbol lottery. In this case, there is a possibility that the content of the performance and the actual action contradict each other, causing the player to distrust the pachinko machine 10 and the hall. In addition, as a countermeasure, there is a method of configuring the probability variable continuation suggestive production by a production that is completed with one fluctuation, but in this method, it is difficult to ensure a sufficient production period, so there are various production modes. becomes difficult to convert. On the other hand, in the first control example, it is configured to execute the probability variable continuation suggestion effect over the last four fluctuation displays that guarantee the time saving state of the normal symbol, and the notification content of the probability variable continuation suggestion effect is changed. , It is determined based on the game state at the time when the last special symbol lottery in the execution range of the variable probability continuous effect is executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to diversify the mode of presentation while making it possible to accurately notify the game state at the end of the presentation. In addition, when the probability is variable at the start of the production, and the ball is not held until the end of the production, the production is selected so that an attack pattern with a relatively high degree of expectation is likely to occur. ing. This is because the probability of the lottery result corresponding to the fall is lower than the probability of a big hit, and it is extremely rare to fall into a low probability state of special symbols during the production period (relatively high probability of a variable state) This is because the performance ends immediately).

In addition, in the first control example, as a kind of entertainment effect, it is possible to execute a press stop effect in which a stop operation of each symbol row is executed according to the operation timing of the PUSH button 10317 of the player. This press stop effect is basically an effect suggesting that there is a possibility of developing into a chance charge effect. In this pressing stop effect, if it does not develop into a chance charge effect, each symbol row is stopped and displayed as a simple combination of failures according to the timing of pressing by the player, while if it develops into a chance charge effect, a chance The charging pattern is (pseudo-) stop-displayed, and the development to the chance charge effect is notified. In this way, by changing the stop timing of each symbol row according to the player's pressing timing, the timing of notifying whether or not the chance charge effect will develop can be set to the player's favorite timing. can be adjusted. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved. In addition, in the press stop effect which does not develop into the chance charge effect, at least the mode of the stop display of the central symbol row is changed according to the timing at which the stop operation is performed for all the symbol rows. More specifically, when the stop operation is completed a specified number of times (three times) within a predetermined period of time (one second) (that is, at a relatively early stage) after the start of the effective period of the stop operation, a comparative effect is obtained. While the stop display of the central pattern row is performed by the long chance charge fan effect, when the stop operation of the specified number of times is completed after the predetermined period (1 second) has passed, the central pattern row is immediately removed. An effect (that is, a relatively short effect) that is stopped and displayed with a symbol is executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the period after the stop display from becoming too long or conversely shortening depending on the completion timing of the stop operation by the player, and to prevent the period from becoming too short depending on the completion timing of the stop operation by the player. It is possible to show the transition of the performance mode up to the stop display of the missing pattern in a natural form. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with an effect mode that causes less discomfort. In addition, in the pressing stop effect in the first control example, separate button images and valid period gauges are displayed for each symbol row on the display screen. It is determined whether or not the operation of is valid. Then, according to the number of times the stop operation (pressing the PUSH button 10317) is executed in one operation valid period, the symbol row for which the stop display is set is varied (it is determined whether the stop operation has been executed for all symbol rows). ) configuration. As a result, it is possible to simplify the judgment as to whether or not the stop operation of each symbol row is valid, so that the processing load of the sound lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

Further, in the first control example, a chance charge effect can be executed as a type of entertainment effect. This chance charge production is the number of times (minimum guaranteed number of times) that a specific production mode (chance up production) is performed within a predetermined number of fluctuations (until all the balls held on hold at the start of the production are consumed). This is an effect that suggests (informs) the player in advance. The guaranteed number of chance-up effects notified in this chance-charge effect (the number of accumulated spirit gauge gauges) generates some kind of chance-up effect at each timing until the held balls are consumed at the start of the chance-charge effect. consumed for Here, the chance-up effect is a effect that increases the expectation of a big win. , and the like. It should be noted that the spirit gauge is always consumed until it reaches zero. That is, it is configured so as not to be discarded without being consumed. With this configuration, the player can easily grasp the remaining number of chance-up effects, so that the player can play the game looking forward to what kind of chance-up effect will occur next. . Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved. In addition, in the first control example, the gauge amount of the spirit gauge accumulated in the chance charge effect is mainly determined based on the number of held balls at the start of the chance charge effect. After completion of the chance charge effect, the pace at which the chance-up effect is executed (that is, the spirit gauge is consumed) is variable in consideration of the lottery result of each reserved ball. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce the processing load (the processing load when determining the number of gauges) at the start of the chance charge effect.

In addition, in the first control example, as one type of entertainment effect, it is configured to be able to execute interrupt repeated hit effect. This interrupting continuous hit effect is a display mode effect as if a different mode effect from the display effect that had been displayed until then suddenly interrupted during the normal variable display or the reach fluctuation. On the other hand, the PUSH button 10317 is composed of an effect mode of prompting to operate the PUSH button 10317 in a specific operation mode (continuous hit operation mode). In this interrupt continuous hit effect, the more the stage of the effect mode develops (the number of displayed monsters is reduced) according to the player's continuous hit operation, the higher the expectation of a big win. be. As a result, the player can be made to actively perform the continuous hitting operation, so that the player's willingness to participate in the interruption continuous hitting effect can be improved. This interrupt continuous hit effect is performed when it is determined that the additional time command is not a command indicating 0 seconds (is a command indicating 7 seconds) of the basic time command and the additional time command that constitute the variation pattern command. It is a production that may be executed. Here, the variable time is set by the sum of the basic time notified by the basic time command and the additional time notified by the additional time command. Then, when it is decided to execute the repeated interrupt effect, the repeated repeated effect is executed for the same length of time as the additional time notified by the additional time command, and the normal variable display effect (execution of the repeated repeated interrupt effect) is performed. Regarding the mode of presentation for a period other than the period), the configuration is such that the mode of presentation for a period of the same length as the basic time notified by the basic time command is set. By constructing in this way, even if the variable display performance in which the interrupt continuous hitting performance is set is executed, the performance mode corresponding to the basic time command can be reused, thereby reducing the memory capacity of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加can do.

In addition, in the interrupt continuous hit effect in the first control example, a plurality of types of audio data (audio data corresponding to the first repeated hit sound, audio data corresponding to the second repeated hit sound, and ), one audio data is reproduced. More specifically, when an odd-numbered repeated hit operation is detected during the effective period of the repeated hit operation in one interrupt repeated hit effect, the audio data corresponding to the first repeated hit sound is played back to CN2 in the voice synthesizing unit 306. On the other hand, when an even-numbered repeated tapping operation is detected, the voice data corresponding to the second repeated tapping sound is played back to CN3 in the voice synthesizing section 306 . In this way, each time a repeated hit operation is performed, one of a plurality of different sound data is output to one of a plurality of different channels (the first repeated hit sound and the second repeated hit sound are output to CN1 and CN2). output alternately), it is possible to diversify the voice modes during the continuous hitting operation. In other words, since it is possible to prevent the voice mode from becoming monotonous, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game during the repeated hitting valid period. Also, in the case of a configuration in which the first repeated sound and the second repeated sound are simply played alternately on a single channel (that is, control is performed to stop the output of one sound during reproduction and output the other sound). ), it is possible to output one sound while maintaining the output state of the other sound (the first repeated sound and the second repeated sound are output in duplicate). Therefore, it is possible to make the voice mode more lively during execution of repeated hits. More specifically, in a configuration in which the first repeated hit sound and the second repeated hit sound are alternately reproduced in a single channel, when a player who has a short interval between repeated hits performs the repeated hit operation, the leading portion of each sound data This results in a monotonous voice mode in which only the voices are alternately repeated. On the other hand, if a plurality of audio data are sequentially reproduced on a plurality of channels, the output of one audio data reproduced on one channel is not interrupted, and other audio data is reproduced on other channels. can be played. That is, it is possible to synthesize and output a sound based on one sound data and a sound based on another sound data. Therefore, since it is possible to easily output sounds other than the beginning part of each sound, it is possible to further diversify the sound modes. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in the interrupt continuous hit effect in the first control example, the later the timing of pressing (the remaining time of the effective period becomes shorter) in the effective period in which the continuous hitting operation is valid, the more the subtraction number of the monster increases (the more It is configured to make it easier to set the production mode at the stage of high expectations. As a result, even if the player presses the PUSH button 10317 at a fast pace, it is possible to prevent the number of monsters from being quickly defeated to the minimum number. In other words, it is possible to prevent the decrease of the number of monsters based on the depression of the remaining 10 bodies or the remaining 4 bodies, which are likely to be set in the case of losing, from being stopped and the player's expectation for the big win being spoiled. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved. In addition, even when a player whose pressing pace is slow is playing a game, pressing in the latter half of the continuous hitting effective period makes it easier to select a relatively large number of subjugations, so that the lower limit number of monsters can be reached. can make it more likely. Therefore, even a player whose pressing pace is slow can be entertained with the continuous interrupt effect, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in the first control example, as a kind of entertainment effect, a plurality of reserved ball number symbols that are reserved are changed to a specific mode (display mode that looks like a rock) different from the normal reserved pattern mode. It is configured to be able to execute the pending batch change effect. In this pending collective change effect, after a plurality of pending ball number symbols are changed to a specific mode, the player performs a specific operation (pressing operation on the PUSH button 10317) to obtain at least one pending ball number symbol. is changed to a mode with a higher degree of expectation than the reserved symbol mode before being changed to the specific mode. By executing this pending batch change effect, it is confirmed that the degree of expectation indicated by at least one pending ball number symbol is increased, so that the player's sense of expectation for the big win can be improved. In addition, since it is not known until the PUSH button 10317 is pressed, which pattern of the number of pending balls will change (increase in the degree of expectation), the operation on the PUSH button 10317 is fun to see which pattern of the number of pending balls will change. can be done. Furthermore, since the degree of expectation is notified by pressing the PUSH button 10317, the notification timing can be adjusted to the player's favorite timing. Therefore, convenience for the player can be improved.

In addition, in the first control example, during execution of the interrupt continuous hit effect, every time the push of the PUSH button 10317 is detected, two types of sound data are alternately reproduced on two channels, thereby changing the sound mode. Although the configuration is diversified, the configuration is not limited to this, and three or more types of audio data may be alternately reproduced in order by CN1 and CN2. This makes it possible to further diversify voice modes. In this case, the number of channels for reproducing the audio data is not limited to two, and the audio data may be sequentially reproduced for three or more channels. By configuring in this way, after one audio data is reproduced for one channel, until the next audio data is reproduced for the same channel (the audio data being reproduced is terminated). can be made longer, it is possible to further diversify the voice modes. Furthermore, the type of the audio data to be output may be changed according to the interval of successive hits. Specifically, for example, when a player is playing a game with a relatively short interval between consecutive hits (for example, 0.5 seconds or less), three types of sound modes are reproduced in order on three channels. On the other hand, when a player is playing a game with a relatively long interval between consecutive hits (for example, an interval longer than 0.5 seconds), two types of audio data are sent to two channels in order. It may be configured to reproduce (alternately). By configuring in this way, it is possible to vary the output mode of the sound according to the interval of successive hits, so that it is possible to realize the playability of adjusting the interval of repeated hits. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.

In the first control example, during execution of the interrupt continuous hit effect, one of the repeated hit sounds is output in conjunction with the repeated hit operation. It may be configured to enable output. More specifically, for example, if the last repeated hit sound output during the effective period of the repeated hit operation is the first repeated hit sound, the second repeated hit sound may be output after the end of the repeated hit sound. With this configuration, although the first repeated hitting sound and the second repeated hitting sound are output as a set according to the repeated hitting operation, the last output sound is the first repeated hitting sound. (That is, the paired second repeated hitting sound is not output), and it is possible to prevent the voice mode from becoming incomplete. Therefore, the voice mode can be set more preferably. In this case, if the last repeated hitting sound is the first repeated hitting sound, the control to output the second repeated hitting sound after the end is changed to a variation display ( For example, it may be configured to be set only during the execution of the jackpot variation). By constructing in this way, for the player who desires to know whether or not it is a predetermined variation type, the last continuous hitting sound to be output during the interrupt continuous hitting effect is dared to be the first repeated hitting sound. It is possible to realize the playability. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the first control example, the first repeated hit sound and the second repeated hit sound are alternately output during execution of the interrupt repeated hit effect regardless of the intervals between repeated hits by the player. isn't it. For example, it may be configured such that the first repeated hitting sound is always output when the repeated hitting operation is detected while no sound is being reproduced. That is, if the interval between repeated hits is too long and the next repeated hit operation is executed after the reproduction of the first repeated hit sound is completed, only the first repeated hit sound will continue to be output. may be configured. By constructing in this way, a player who desires to diversify the voice modes can be made to perform the continuous hitting operation at a faster pace, so that the player's willingness to participate in the interruption continuous hitting performance can be improved. be able to.

In this first control example, every time a continuous tapping operation is detected, the audio data (audio file) corresponding to the first continuous tapping sound and the audio data (audio file) corresponding to the second continuous tapping sound are alternately transferred to different channels. However, the configuration may be such that the method of reproducing the audio data is changed (or the audio data is processed in a predetermined manner) under predetermined conditions. More specifically, for example, the reproduction speed may be varied (or the sound data may be processed) so that the output period of each repeated hitting sound varies according to the interval between repeated hitting operations by the player. . That is, if the interval between repeated hits by the player is longer than a predetermined interval (for example, 1 second interval), the output period may be longer (for example, 1.5 seconds or longer). With this configuration, even when a player is playing a game with a long interval between repeated hits, it is relatively easy to output one repeated hit sound while the other repeated hit sound is being output. Voice mode can be diversified. In this first control example, the first repeated hitting sound and the second repeated hitting sound are alternately output (reproduced) to different channels based on the execution of the repeated hitting operation. is not limited to the case based on the continuous hitting operation. The same control may be executed when outputting a starting winning sound based on a starting winning or when outputting a winning sound based on detection of winning to the specific winning opening 65a. By configuring in this way, the sound can be output more preferably, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved. Also, this control can be adopted when simply outputting a sound effect whose output period is set in advance as part of the variable display effect. With this configuration, when sound effects are continuously output in a relatively short period of time, the sound can be output more preferably, so that the player's interest in the game can be further enhanced. can.

In the first control example, if the execution timing of the interrupting repeated hits effect is before the ready-to-win effect, both the display mode and the sound mode are interrupted to execute the interrupting repeated hits effect, while the interrupting repeated hits effect execution timing is during the reach effect. If so, the configuration is such that only the display mode is interrupted and the interrupt continuous hit effect is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the continuous hit effect that is executed before reaching the reach, only the display mode is interrupted. good. Since the sound output before the reach is relatively plain, it is difficult to interfere with the sound of the continuous hit effect even if the output is not interrupted. On the other hand, since a flashy sound is likely to be output after the reach, interrupting the sound mode can prevent the sound of the interruption repeated hit effect from becoming difficult to hear. Therefore, it is possible to more preferably set the sound mode of the interrupt repeated hit effect. Further, for example, both the display mode and the sound mode may be interrupted regardless of the execution timing of the interrupt barrage effect, or conversely, only the display mode may be interrupted regardless of the execution timing. . In addition, the control is not limited to switching the object to be interrupted (at least one of the audio mode and the display mode) according to the execution timing of the interrupt continuous hit effect, and control may be performed to switch according to other conditions. . More specifically, for example, it may be configured such that it is determined by lottery at the start of the interrupt continuous hit effect whether both the sound and the display are to be interrupted or only one of them is to be interrupted. In this case, the probability of determining that both are interrupted may be made different depending on whether it is a big win or a loss. With this configuration, it is possible to play the game by paying attention to whether both the sound and the display are interrupted, or whether only one of them is interrupted. can improve interest in In addition, in the first control example, only an effect with an effect time of 7 seconds is provided as the interrupt continuous hit effect, but a plurality of interrupt repeated effect effects with different effect times may be provided. In this case, by providing a command indicating an additional time different from 0 seconds and 7 seconds as the additional time command, the interrupt continuous hit effect is executed for the effect time corresponding to the additional time notified by the additional time command. can be configured to As a result, it is possible to further diversify the presentation mode, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. Also, instead of or in addition to increasing the variation of the additional time that can be notified by the additional time command, the total notified by the variation pattern command (that is, the basic time notified by the basic time command and the additional time command A configuration that determines the effect time of the continuous interrupt effect so that the difference between the fluctuation time of the variable time of the sum of the additional time notified by and the effect time of the continuous interrupt effect is the basic time that can be notified by the basic time command. may be More specifically, for example, when the variation pattern of the lost super reach B with a variation time of 67 seconds is notified, the effect time of the interrupt repeated hit effect is 37 seconds so that 30 seconds, which is the basic time of the lost normal reach, remains. may be set. By constructing in this way, the variable display performance can be ended just at the end of the variable time together with the performance time of the continuous interrupt performance only by setting the performance mode for 30 seconds which is the basic time. Therefore, it is possible to preferably set the effect mode of the variable display effect in which the continuous interrupt effect is set without providing a variable display effect exclusively for the continuous interrupt effect. It should be noted that, when this control (control for determining the effect time of the interrupt continuous hit effect so that the fluctuation time for the basic time remains) is adopted, even if the additional time is 0 seconds, the interrupt continuous effect can be executed. can. That is, it can also be applied to a pachinko machine 10 with specifications that do not have an additional time command in the first place. Therefore, it is possible to increase the chances of executing the repeated interrupt effect, thereby further enhancing the player's interest in the game.

In this first control example, after the end of the big hit, if the number of times of lottery of special symbols exceeds 100 times and the variable probability state continues, based on the lottery result corresponding to falling, the special symbol is low. While falling to the probability state, it was configured to end the time-saving state of normal symbols, but it is not limited to this. Even after the number of lotteries of the special symbols exceeds 100 times, the condition for ending the time saving state of the normal symbols may be different from the condition of falling to the low probability state of the special symbols. Specifically, for example, a lottery as to whether or not to fall from the time-saving state of the normal pattern to the normal state of the normal pattern may be configured to be executed at the start of the fluctuation, separately from the falling lottery from the variable probability state. good. Further, for example, when a specific lottery result is obtained in a special symbol lottery, only the time saving state may be terminated. By constructing in this way, even if the time saving state of the normal design is ended, it can be configured so that the probability variable state of the special design may continue, so immediately after the time saving state of the normal design is finished. To prevent a player from quitting the game and to continue the game in anticipation of the continuation of the variable probability state of the special symbols. Therefore, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

In the first control example, the number of pending ball symbols based on the start winning prize detected after the start of the pending collective change effect is uniformly set to the pending symbol mode of white pending, but it is not limited to this. . For example, for a new number of reserved ball symbols, it may be configured to execute a lottery in a reserved design mode using the reserved change lottery table 222c (see FIG. 414(a)). As a result, not only the reserved number of balls pattern which is the object of the reserved collective change performance but also the reserved number of balls pattern based on the new start prize can be given a feeling of big hit. Further, for example, a new starting winning prize detected after the start of the pending batch change effect may be added to the target of the pending batch change effect. In this case, the number of pending ball patterns based on the new start winning may be configured to always be added to the target of the pending batch change effect, or may be added to the target of the pending batch change effect only under a predetermined condition. good too. As a predetermined condition, for example, when the winning information corresponding to the new start winning indicates the degree of expectation of the jackpot more than the super reach out, it may be included in the execution target of the pending collective change effect. , For example, only when winning information corresponding to a variation type with a higher degree of expectation than the pending ball in the range where the pending batch change effect is set is newly notified, as a configuration to be included in the execution target of the pending batch change effect good too. By constructing in this way, when the reserved number of balls pattern based on the new start prize is added to the execution target of the reserved collective change performance, the player's expectation for the big win can be further improved.

<Second control example>
Next, a second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 479 to 516. FIG. In the first control example described above, as described above with reference to FIG. 411, the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), variable state (high probability state of special symbols, normal High probability state of the pattern), time saving state (low probability state of special pattern, high probability state of normal pattern) can be set, special pattern lottery (special lottery) jackpot winning, falling lottery falling lottery, special Based on the figure fluctuation frequency (special figure lottery frequency), the game state is configured to be variably set.

On the other hand, in this second control example, in addition to the normal state, the probability variable state, and the time saving state, the latent probability state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) can be set as the game state. Configure. In addition, it is configured to win a small win in some cases when a big win is not won in the special lottery. Here, a small hit that can be won in the special drawing lottery will be explained.

When a small win is won in a special lottery, a small win game different from the big win game executed when a big win is won is executed. In this control example, the amount of privilege (the number of prize balls) given to the player is smaller in the small winning game than in the big winning game. Specifically, the variable winning device 65 is used in the big winning game. Five rounds or more of the round game for opening the game are executed, while only one round of the round game for opening the variable winning device 65 is executed in the small winning game. Further, after the jackpot game ends, a game state is set according to the type of jackpot won. That is, the game state at the time of winning the big win and the game state set after the end of the big win game can be varied, whereas when winning the small win, the game state is changed to the small one. A game state at the time of winning a prize and a game state set after the end of a small prize game are configured so as not to be variable.

Furthermore, in this control example, in the state where the high probability state of the normal design is set (probability variable state, time saving state), the low probability of the high probability state of the normal design based on winning the small hit in the special drawing lottery It is configured to transition to a state. In other words, the first time-saving end condition (special figure fluctuation number of 100 times) provided in the above-described first control example as a condition (time-saving end condition) for shifting the high probability state of the normal pattern to the low probability state In addition to reaching), the second time-saving end condition (small hit winning) is provided. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the timing of shifting the high probability state of the normal symbol to the low probability state.

In this control example, if a plurality of small hit types (small hit A, small hit B) are provided when a small hit is won, and the set small hit type is a specific small hit type (small hit A) In addition, it is configured so that the above-described second time-saving end condition is satisfied. By configuring in this way, the high probability state of the normal pattern shifts to the low probability state only when a specific small winning type is won, so the high probability state of the normal design ends based on the small winning. It is possible to set the case where it is executed and the case where it is not ended. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the timing of shifting the high probability state of the normal symbol to the low probability state.

In addition, in this control example, as in the first control example described above, it is configured to shift the high probability state of the normal symbol to the low probability state at the start timing of the special figure fluctuation, and based on the small winning Even when the high-probability state of the normal design is shifted to the low-probability state, the high-probability state of the normal design is shifted to the low-probability state at the start timing of the special pattern variation. In this way, by making the timing of ending the high probability state of the normal symbols the same regardless of the occasion for ending the high probability state of the normal symbols, the high probability state of the normal symbols is ended for the player. It can be difficult to understand what the trigger is.

Furthermore, in this control example, when a predetermined number of times (twice) is won in a specific small hit type (small hit A), the above-described second time saving end condition is established. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the timing of shifting the high probability state of the normal symbol to the low probability state.

In the above description, the game state (time saving state, variable probability state) in which it is easy to open the electric accessory 640a is generally regarded as a high probability state of normal symbols, but for convenience of explanation, the electric accessory 640a will be opened. The easy game state (the game state in which the high probability state of the normal figure is set) is simply called the time saving state.

In addition, in this control example, when a small hit is won in a special lottery, it is possible to set a plurality of small hit types, but even if any small hit type is set, the same small hit game configured to run. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the small winning type set this time based on the game mode of the small winning game (opening operation mode of the variable winning device 65). Therefore, every time a small hit game is executed, by predicting whether or not a specific small hit type (small hit A) is set, time saving end conditions for ending the time saving state (second time saving end conditions ) can be enjoyed.

In addition, in this control example, as a time saving end condition for ending the time saving state, the number of special figure fluctuations in the period in which the time saving state is set, or a specific small hit (small hit A) It is set based on the number of winning times. However, without being limited to this, for example, as the number of special figure fluctuations, the number of fluctuations of a specific special figure type (for example, the second special symbol (special figure 2)) The number of specific special figure fluctuations that accumulates only (the number of lotteries), the number of times that the result of the special figure lottery is lost (lottery results other than jackpot winnings and small winnings), and the number of times the ball has passed through a specific area A time-saving end condition that is established when a predetermined number of times is reached may be provided.

In the first control example described above, when the probability variable state or the time saving state is set after the jackpot game ends, the time saving state (high probability state of normal symbols) is guaranteed until the number of special figure fluctuations reaches 100 times. In contrast, in this second control example, before the number of special figure fluctuations reaches 100 times, the second time saving end condition is configured to be satisfied. And, if the second time saving end condition is satisfied before the number of special figure fluctuations reaches 100 times, the time saving state (normal pattern high probability state) based on the fact that the second time saving end condition is satisfied configured to terminate.

In the second control example configured in this way, the rear mode effect (high probability state of special symbols based on the lottery result of the fall lottery) explained with reference to FIGS. 390 and 391 of the first control example It is configured to notify that the time saving state has ended in the production for suggesting to the player whether it has ended or not. As a result, it is possible to execute the back mode effect according to the game state variably set according to the lottery result of the falling lottery and whether or not the time saving end condition is satisfied. The detailed content of this rear mode effect will be described later.

<Regarding the contents of the performance in the pachinko machine of the second control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 479 to 487, description will be given of the effect contents executed in the pachinko machine 10 of the second control example.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 479 to 481, the contents of the background mode effect will be described. Figure 479 (a) shows an example of the effect executed when the winning information (winning information indicating small hit A winning) indicating that the second time saving end condition is satisfied in the temple search mode is stored. FIG. 479(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the effect executed when starting the special figure 2 fluctuation that is elected to the small hit A during the temple search mode. Among the display elements shown in each figure, the display elements that are the same as those in the first control example described above are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Figure 479 (a) shows the display screen during the special figure 2 fluctuation, which is the 77th special figure fluctuation number after the end of the jackpot game, and the display area 802 shows the special figure fluctuation number "23 times" is displayed as the remaining period display mode indicating the remaining period (remaining fluctuation period) until reaching 100 times. And as shown in FIG. 479 (a), if there is a special figure 2 reservation (displayed with "small" characters in the figure) having winning information indicating that the small hit A is won, the temple Along with the production of the pillars shaking, the characters "pinch" are displayed on the pillars of the temple. Then, in the display area 812 where the comment for suggesting the game situation is displayed, the comment "What, what!?" is displayed.

By setting such a display mode, it is possible to make the player think that the time saving state is established before the number of special figure fluctuations reaches 100 times, so the time saving state as in the first control example It is possible to suppress the game from becoming monotonous compared to the case where the guaranteed number of times is set.

In addition, in this control example, when the above-described second time-saving end condition is established, or when a jackpot is won in a special drawing lottery, the number of special drawing fluctuations reaches 100 times after the jackpot game ends. It is configured so that the time-saving state will end by then. Therefore, by executing the end suggestion production that suggests that the time saving state shown in FIG. Any can be suggested to be set. As a result, the player can be made to pay attention to the effect result of the end-suggesting effect, and it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game early.

In addition, in this control example, when winning information that satisfies the conditions for ending the time saving state is included in the special figure suspension that is stored and stored, the end suggesting effect (see FIG. 479(a)) is executed. However, without being limited to this, for example, as in this control example, a small hit type set at the time of winning a small hit, and a small hit number of times a specific small hit type is set In the pachinko machine 10 configured to establish the second time-saving end condition based on the above, the end suggesting performance is executed based on the winning of the small win, or the end suggesting performance is executed based on the type of the set small win type. You can run it. In addition, in this case, winning a small win type that can trigger the establishment of the second time reduction end condition is configured to make it easier to execute the end suggesting performance than winning a small win type that cannot trigger the establishment, Furthermore, it is preferable to configure such that the end suggesting effect is more likely to be executed as the number of winnings of the small win type that can be the establishment opportunity approaches the number of winnings that satisfies the second time saving end condition.

By configuring in this way, it is possible for the player to predict whether or not the time-saving end condition is likely to be satisfied according to the execution frequency of the end suggesting effect, so how often the end suggesting effect is performed. The player can be made to watch as it is being executed. Therefore, the production effect can be enhanced. In addition, the execution frequency of the end suggestion production may be varied based on whether or not the high probability state (variable probability state) of the special symbol is set, for example, when the variable probability state is set, the time saving state is set so that the end-suggesting effect is more likely to be executed.

In other words, in the state where the variable state is set, the probability of winning the jackpot in the special lottery is higher than when the time saving state is set, so after the end suggestion production is executed, the time saving Even if the state ends, it is possible to increase the ratio of ending the time saving state with the winning of the jackpot as an opportunity. Therefore, when the variable probability state is set, the end suggesting performance is more likely to be executed than when the time saving state is set, so that the player can have expectations for the end suggesting performance. .

In addition, without being limited to this, when the variable probability state is set, it may be configured so that the end suggesting effect is less likely to be executed than when the time saving state is set, or after the jackpot game ends. If the time-saving state is set from the beginning, and if the variable probability state is set after the jackpot game ends, and then the time-saving state is shifted to based on winning the falling lottery, the execution frequency of the end suggestion effect is different. It may be configured to allow In addition, the execution frequency of the end suggestion effect will be different based on the period (number of special figure fluctuations) required from the time the variable state is set to the falling election, and the elapsed period after falling (number of special figure fluctuations). It may be configured to allow

And when time passes from the state shown in FIG. 479(a) and the special figure variation in which the second time saving end condition is established is started, the display screen shown in FIG. 479(b) is displayed. In this control example, when the time saving state (normal pattern high probability state) is ended at the start timing of the special figure fluctuation where the second time saving end condition is satisfied, and the lottery result of the special figure lottery is a jackpot winning Also, since it is configured to terminate the time saving state (high probability state of normal symbols) at the start timing of the special figure fluctuation, in any case, the display screen shown in FIG. 479 (b) is displayed be done.

FIG. 479(b) shows a scene of the effect in which the main character 801 falls into a pitfall 820, and the display area 806 displays "Temple Search end" is displayed, and the characters "left-handed" are displayed as a guidance notification mode 821 for guiding the player to the game method after the time-saving state is ended. Then, as a display mode 812 for informing the player of the content of the effect being executed, a comment "It's a trap!!" is displayed. Also, in the display area 802, "? times" is displayed as a remaining period display mode indicating the remaining period (remaining fluctuation period) until the number of special figure fluctuations reaches 100 times.

Next, the continuation of the effect shown in FIG. 479(b) will be described with reference to FIGS. 480 and 481. FIG. FIG. 480(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the effect contents displayed when the effect result of the pitfall effect is a big hit, and FIG. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the content of the production|presentation displayed when it is the completion|finish of a time saving state. 480(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the production contents displayed during the fluctuation production corresponding to the 99th special figure fluctuation after the end of the jackpot game, and FIG. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display screen showing the effect result of the variation effect corresponding to the special figure variation of the 99th rotation after the end of the jackpot game.

When the pitfall effect shown in FIG. 479(b) described above is executed based on the winning of the special lottery jackpot, the display mode in which the character 801 discovers the treasure box 807 as shown in FIG. is displayed, and a display mode of "333" indicating a big win is displayed in the display area Ds3 showing the lottery result of the special symbol. In the display areas 821 and 823, "Right shot" is displayed as a guidance display mode for indicating the game method during the jackpot game, and in the display area 806, " Treasure found!" is displayed.

On the other hand, when the pitfall effect shown in FIG. 479(b) described above is executed based on the establishment of the second time saving end condition, as shown in FIG. A wandering background mode (lost child mode) is set. This lost child mode is a latent state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability of normal symbols) due to the establishment of the second time-saving end condition during the variable state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) state) is set, and the second time-saving end condition is established during the time-saving state (low-probability state of special symbols, high-probability state of normal symbols) Normal state (low-probability state of special symbols, normal design is set when the low-probability state of

As described above, when the lost child mode is set, since it is a normal pattern with a low probability state, "Left shot" is displayed in the display areas 821 and 823 as a guidance display mode for showing the game method to the player. In the display area 806, the words "enter lost child mode" are displayed to indicate that the "lost child mode" has been set as the background mode. In addition, a display mode of "341" indicating a small win (small win A win) is displayed in the display area Ds3 showing the lottery result of the special symbols.

This "lost child mode" is configured to be continuously set until the number of special figure variations executed after the end of the big win game reaches 99 times, and the 99th special figure after the end of the big win. When the variation is executed, as shown in FIG. 481(a), an effect is executed in which the character 801 stands at the fork and chooses the direction of travel. Then, when the character 801 walks in the selected advancing direction, a game state notification mode 821 for indicating the current game state is displayed as shown in FIG. 481(b).

According to the example shown in FIG. 481(b), the game state notification mode 821 indicating that the current game state is the normal state is displayed, and the display area 806 indicates that the normal state is "Unfortunately, normal "To mode" is displayed, and the background mode production ends. On the other hand, although not shown, when the 99th special figure variation is executed after the end of the jackpot, and the current game state is the latent state, the character "continue" is displayed as the game state notification mode 821. It is displayed, and the lost child mode continues until the game state shifts from the latent certainty state to the normal state by the falling lottery.

That is, in this control example, if the lost child mode is set even after the 99th special figure variation is executed after the end of the jackpot, it is configured to determine that the latent definite state is set. . In this way, during a predetermined period (for 99 special figure fluctuations) after the end of the jackpot game, even if the time saving state ends, it is determined whether the current game state is the normal state or the latent state. It is difficult for players to understand, and after the lapse of a predetermined period (99 times of special figure fluctuation), a performance is executed so that the current game state is easy for the player to understand, so that the predetermined period after the end of the jackpot game. Since it is possible to make it difficult for the player to stop the game until (for 99 special figure fluctuations) elapses, it is possible to improve the operation of the game. In addition, after a predetermined period (99 special figure fluctuations) has passed, the current game state is notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner, thereby suppressing the player from playing an excessively disadvantageous game. can do.

In addition, in this control example, the timing of informing the player of the current game state is fixed to the timing when the special figure fluctuation is executed 99 times after the jackpot game ends, but it is not limited to this, For example, a plurality of timings (for example, the timing when the number of special figure fluctuations after the end of the jackpot game becomes 10, 30, 70, 90) are set as the gaming state notification possible timing, and when the timing is reached, the time is reduced. It is determined whether the state has ended (whether the second time saving end condition is satisfied), and if it is determined that the time saving state has ended, an effect (Fig. 481(b)). In addition, a measurement means for measuring the number of special figure fluctuations after the second time saving end condition is established (after the lost child mode is set) is provided, and the measurement result of the measurement means is a predetermined number (for example, 20, 30, 40), a lottery is conducted to determine whether or not to execute an effect (see FIG. 481(b)) for notifying the current game state at the timing of 40), and the current game state is notified based on the result of the lottery. (See FIG. 481(b)).

By configuring in this way, the second time-saving end condition is established immediately after the time-saving state (high probability state of normal symbols) is set, and when the time-saving state (high probability state of normal symbols) ends, useless It is possible to prevent the game from being played in the lost child mode for a long period of time.

In addition, in this control example, even if the jackpot is won while the lost child mode is set, the effects shown in FIGS. It is configured to be displayed in characters of "big hit". As a result, even when the effect (see FIG. 481(b)) for notifying the current gaming state is started, the user can wait for the result of the effect while expecting the winning of the jackpot. can increase

Also, although detailed description is omitted, as in the first control example described above, based on the look-ahead result of the special figure reservation, predict the game state at the execution timing of the special figure fluctuation to be executed in the future, the prediction result Based on this, the game state notification mode 821 may be displayed in advance.

As described above, in this control example, when the time saving state (high probability state of normal symbols) is set after the jackpot game ends, the time saving state (high probability state of normal symbols) ends at various timings. Since the transition process of the game state is different depending on the timing when the second time saving end condition is satisfied and the timing when the fall lottery is won by the fall lottery, the player can play in various game states. can be performed, and the interest in the game can be improved. In addition, as a background mode effect, it is configured to set a background mode corresponding to each game state, and when the time saving state (normal pattern high probability state) ends, the latent state is set. Since the background mode (lost child mode) is set to make it difficult for the player to understand whether the normal state is set or not, the player can continue playing the game.

Also, if you win a jackpot during the background mode production (right-handed game), you will be notified of "left-handed" during the special figure fluctuation period that indicates the jackpot winner, and after the special figure fluctuation is stopped (confirmed display) " By configuring to notify "Right hit", the production mode (see FIG. 479 (b)) when the time saving state ends during the background mode production (during the left hitting game) is the opportunity to end the time saving state can be unified regardless of In addition, in this control example, when the time-saving state ends, it is configured to unify and notify (display) "left-handed", but not limited to this, a special figure that ends the time-saving state A configuration may be adopted in which "right hitting" is uniformly announced (displayed) during the period until the fluctuation is stopped and displayed (determined display).

In addition, in this control example, an example of the effect for making it difficult for the player to understand the trigger for ending the time saving state has been described, but it is not limited to this, and the effect mode of a part of the effect to be executed can be changed. may be configured to suggest to the player the opportunity to end the time-saving state established this time, for example, in the end suggestion production shown in FIG. By changing the type of characters that are displayed, it may be configured to suggest to the player the opportunity to end the time saving state that is established this time, and in the pitfall production shown in FIG. By changing the color and the display mode of the display area 812, it may be configured to suggest to the player the timing for ending the time saving state established this time.

In this control example, when the time saving state (high probability state of normal design) is set after the end of the jackpot game, the first time saving state (high probability state of normal design) is terminated based on the number of special figure fluctuations. The end condition (100 special fluctuations) is set, and the second time-saving end condition is established when a specific small hit is won a predetermined number of times by a special drawing lottery before the first time-saving end condition is established. or when a big hit is won, the time-saving state (high-probability state of normal symbols) is terminated at that time.

Furthermore, in this control example, in order to end the time saving state described above, it is configured to end the time saving state at the start timing of the special figure variation where various conditions are established. In other words, when setting the number of times of special figure fluctuations as the first time saving end condition 100 times, the time saving state ends at the start timing of the special figure fluctuation that is the 100th time in the state where the time saving state is set, and the second time saving When setting to win a specific small win (small win A) twice as an end condition, the start timing of the special figure variation where the second small win A wins (does) while the time saving state is set. The time saving state is ended with , and the time saving state is ended at the start timing of the special figure fluctuation that wins (does) the jackpot in the state where the time saving state is set.

By configuring in this way, when the time saving state ends while the first time saving end condition is not satisfied, the special figure fluctuation being executed displays the lottery result indicating the big hit or the lottery result indicating the small hit Since it is possible to inform the player that the stop display is performed in the mode, until the special figure variation being executed when the time saving state is ended is stopped and displayed, the special figure is made interesting to the player. It is possible to make the player pay attention to the variation performance that is executed corresponding to the variation.

In addition, in this control example, since the condition is established when winning a small hit multiple times as the second time saving end condition, for example, pay attention to the special drawing lottery result executed during the time saving state , By determining whether or not there is a small hit, when the time saving state ends in a state where the first time saving end condition is not satisfied and the small win has never been won, the running It becomes possible to grasp that the lottery result of the special figure fluctuation is a big hit. In this way, only the end timing of the time saving state makes it difficult to identify the time saving end condition established this time, and the game content (special drawing lottery result) during the time saving state (high probability state of normal symbols) and the end timing of the time saving state By making it possible to specify the time saving end condition established this time based on, the player can be interested in the game content (special drawing lottery result) during the time saving state, which is advantageous to the player It is possible to suppress the game from becoming monotonous during the time-saving state, which is a game state.

In addition, in this control example, the game contents of the jackpot game executed when the jackpot is won in the special figure fluctuation (for example, round game, 15 round game), and the small hit game executed when the small hit is won Since the game content (1 round game) is different, it is possible to determine the lottery result of the special drawing lottery after the fact based on the contents of the winning game that is executed. Not limited to, for example, as a game type of a jackpot game that is executed based on winning a jackpot in a special lottery, the same as a small hit game (a concept that includes a difference that makes it difficult for players to identify) Hit The game type in which the game is executed may be configured so as to be settable.

By configuring in this way, a part of the big win game executed based on winning the big win in the special lottery and a small winning game executed based on winning the small win in the special lottery. Since the game content of the winning game (the content of the opening operation for the variable winning device 65) can be unified, the winning game executed this time is a big winning game or a small winning game based on the game content of the winning game to be executed. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to identify whether it is a game.

Also, in this case, when the big winning game in which the same winning game content as the small winning game is set is executed, after the big winning game, the latent state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) should be configurable. By configuring in this way, the game (left-handed game) after the end of the small-hit game based on the small-hit winning in which the second time-saving end condition is established, the game (left-handed game) after the end of the big winning game, can be made the same. Therefore, when the time saving state ends while the first time saving end condition is not established, the game content (open operation content for the variable winning device 65) of the winning game (jackpot game, small winning game) to be executed, and hit It is possible to make it difficult for a player to understand what the time-saving end condition established this time is based on the game contents (left-handed game) executed after the end of the game (big win game, small win game).

Furthermore, in this control example, the probability state of the special design and the probability state of the normal design can be variably set based on the winning of the jackpot. It is configured only to be variable from the state to the low-probability state. That is, the jackpot winning is a trigger that can variably set the game state within a range of 1, and the small winning is a trigger that can variably set the game state within a range of 2 narrower than the range of 1. there is In this way, by varying the range of game states that can be variably set based on the lottery result of the special figure lottery, the game state to be set in the future is predicted to the player when the lottery result of the special figure lottery is grasped. can be made easier.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 482 and 483, the contents of the effect in the dialogue zone executed by the pachinko machine 10 of this control example will be described. In this control example, it is configured such that the dialogue zone can be set based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 . When this serif zone is set, the character of the left third design LZ (see FIG. 482(a)) that is first stop-displayed among the third designs that are stop-displayed on the display screen of the third design display device 81. An effect is executed in which each third symbol emits a line corresponding to .

Here, in the case of executing an effect in which each third symbol emits a line corresponding to the display mode (for example, character) of the left third symbol LZ (see FIG. 482 (a)) that is first stopped and displayed, If the same display mode (for example, a character) of the left third symbol LZ (see FIG. 482(a)) stopped and displayed on the screen continues, the same dialogue production will be executed, resulting in a production effect There was a problem that the

On the other hand, in the second control example, it is possible to store information (past information) indicating the character of the left third symbol LZ (see FIG. 482(a)) that was stop-displayed in the past and the set lines. , and based on the stored past information, it is configured to set the performance mode (character, dialogue) of the dialogue performance to be newly executed. As a result, a variety of presentation modes can be set as the presentation mode of the speech presentation, and the presentation effect can be enhanced.

Furthermore, in the second control example, when setting the effect mode of the new dialogue effect, the effect mode is set based on the result of the special symbol lottery (special figure lottery). As a result, for example, when the result of the special lottery is a big win, it is possible to intentionally set a production mode that gives the player a feeling of discomfort (for example, a production mode in which the same character is set continuously). Become. Therefore, since it is possible to predict the lottery result of the special drawing lottery based on the performance mode of the dialogue performance, the player can be made to pay attention to the performance, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in this second control example, a plurality of characters that can be stopped and displayed in the left third symbol LZ (see FIG. 482(a)) are in a plurality of groups (in this control example, a land creature group and a sea creature group ), and when the third symbols corresponding to the characters in the same group are stopped and displayed, and when the third symbols corresponding to the characters in different groups are stopped and displayed It is structured so that the contents are different. As a result, it is possible to predict the lines to be displayed by grasping the third symbols to be stopped and displayed before the timing at which the lines are displayed (the timing at which each third symbol is stopped and displayed). Become. Therefore, it is possible to entertain whether or not the contents of the predicted lines match the contents of the lines actually displayed.

495 to 497 for the method of selecting the character used for the dialogue production and the specific contents of the dialogue will be described later. Description will be made with reference to FIG. FIG. 482(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display screen when the left third symbol LZ is stopped and displayed in dialogue production, and FIG. FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display screen when 3 symbols RZ are stopped and displayed. And FIG. 483(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display screen when the ready-to-win state occurs due to the dialogue effect, and FIG. FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display screen when a character is stopped and displayed;

As shown in FIG. 482(a), when the dialogue zone is set, the display area 806 displays the characters "serif zone" as an effect notification mode for informing the player that the dialogue zone is set. be done. Then, in the center of the display screen, the left third pattern LZ, the middle third pattern CZ, and the right third pattern RZ are variably displayed. A line corresponding to the character that has been displayed is displayed. In a state in which the serif zone is set, the third pattern is a fusion third pattern in which the number mode as identification information for indicating the lottery result of the special pattern and the character mode corresponding to the number mode are fused. In the figure shown in FIG. 482(a), as the left third symbol LZ, the fusion third symbol in which the character mode of "elephant" and the number mode of "1" are combined is stopped and displayed. , and the characters "Hello" are displayed as the lines LZ1.

In this control example, a different character mode is associated with each of the nine types of number modes. A detailed description of the display mode of each fusion third pattern will be given later with reference to FIG. 495(a).

Further, in this control example, the dialogue displayed in the dialogue effect is output by the audio output device 226 as sound. As a result, it is possible to audibly identify the effect to be executed, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced. In addition, since it is possible for nearby players who have difficulty in visually recognizing the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 to recognize the production mode (sound mode) of the dialogue production, for example, winning a jackpot is possible. It is possible to obtain a sense of superiority when a line effect with a high degree of expectation is executed.

FIG. 482(b) shows a state in which the effect progresses from the state of FIG. 482(a) described above, and the right third symbol RZ is stopped and displayed. In FIG. 482(b), as the right third pattern RZ, the fusion third pattern in which the character mode of "Lion" and the number mode of "2" are fused is stopped and displayed, and the words "Long time no see" are displayed as the dialogue RZ1. is displayed. Here, in FIG. 482(b), both the left third symbol LZ and the right third symbol RZ are stop-displayed as the fusion third symbol having characters belonging to the same group (land creature group). A dialogue production that establishes a conversation is being executed.

The variable display displayed in FIG. 482(b) is that in FIG. 483(a), the left third symbol LZ and the right third symbol RZ both have the character mode of "elephant" and the numeral The fused third symbol fused with the aspect is stopped and displayed, and the ready-to-win state in which the left third symbol LZ and the right third symbol RZ are stopped and displayed with the same fused third symbol is displayed. Then, the characters "weather is good" are displayed as the dialogue LZ1, and the characters "hot weather" are displayed as the dialogue RZ1.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 484 and 485, the variable operation effect will be described. In this second control example, it is possible to execute a variable operation presentation in which the player operates a lever member 10340 that is movable between a first position (origin position) and a second position (operating position). . This variable operation effect includes a preparation effect executed during an effect preparation processing period (2 seconds) for moving the lever member 10340 normally positioned at the first position to the second position, and a lever member 10340 positioned at the second position. An operation instruction effect executed during an operation instruction period (3 seconds) for causing the player to operate the member 10340, an operation corresponding effect indicating that the player has operated the lever member 10340 during the operation instruction period, and a result effect executed during a result display period (2 seconds) showing the effect result of the variable operation effect.

Also, a variable operation effective period for validly determining the player's operation to the operation means (lever member 10340) is set corresponding to the period in which the operation instruction period (3 seconds) is set. When the player operates the lever member 10340 during the operation instruction period and the operation is determined to be valid, the operation corresponding effect is executed without waiting for the operation instruction period to elapse, and then the result effect is produced. configured to be displayed. As a result, the effect can be displayed in response to the operation performed by the player on the operation means, so that the player can be motivated to operate the operation means. In addition, without being limited to this, the player operates the lever member 10340 during the operation instruction period, and when the operation is determined to be valid, only the operation corresponding effect is executed, and after the operation instruction period has elapsed, the result It may be configured to execute production.

Here, the contents of various effects executed during the variable operation effect will be briefly described. First, during the preparation effect, an effect is executed to suggest to the player that the effect of operating the lever member 10340 will soon be executed. Specifically, an image simulating the lever member 10340 is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 to inform the player that the lever member 10340 is moving from the first position to the second position. A preparation effect is executed in the effect mode for the purpose.

In this control example, since the operation means is operated from the second position toward the first position during the variable operation presentation, the lever member 10340 moves from the first position to the second position. By informing the player of the preparation effect indicating that the lever member 10340 is moving, it becomes possible for the player to easily grasp the direction in which the lever member 10340 is operated by the current variable operation effect. It should be noted that, after the operating means has moved from the first position to the second position, in the case of executing a variable operation effect in which the player operates the second position to a third position different from the first position, preparation is required. A game player is notified that an operation means moves to a first position, a second position and a third position during performance, and that the operation means is positioned at the second position when performance preparation processing is completed. It is preferable to configure so as to set an effect mode for informing the person. In other words, it is preferable to use the preparatory effect to inform the operation means of the contents of the operation to be performed by the player for the operation means.

Then, after the preparation effect is completed, an operation instruction effect is executed for causing the player to operate the operation means (lever member 10340). Here, with reference to FIG. 484(a), the contents of the operation instruction rendering will be described. FIG. 484(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of an effect screen displayed during the operation instruction effect. As shown in FIG. 484(a), when the operation instruction effect is executed, an image simulating the lever member 10340 is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the lever member 10340 is moved downward (first position). direction) and a comment "press the lever" are displayed.

Although not shown in FIG. 484(a), a period gauge for indicating the elapsed period and the remaining period of the operation instruction period (3 seconds) is also displayed. Although illustration is omitted, when the player presses down the lever member 10340 during the operation instruction period, an operation corresponding effect (for example, display of a comment indicating operation completion) indicating that the operation means has been operated during the operation valid period is performed. ) is displayed, and then the effect result is displayed. The effect result is the same as the effect result of various effects using the operation means used in the first control example, and therefore detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Thus, in this control example, as a variable operation effect, the operating means (lever member 10340) located at the first position (origin position) is moved to the second position (operating position), and then the player is configured to be executable to perform an operation of moving the operation means from the second position to the first position. As a result, as in the first control example described above, compared to the case where the operation effect is executed by simply pressing the PUSH button 10317, the player's operational feeling can be improved, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced. can be done.

However, when the above-described variable operation effect is executed, if the player does not operate the operation means (lever member 10340) during the effective operation period, the lever member 10340 will continue to move to the second position even after the variable operation effect ends. There is a problem that the structure of the operation device 10300 having the lever member 10340 becomes unstable. Further, the operation device 10300 used in this control example is provided with operation means (PUSH button 10317) in addition to the lever member 10340, and if the lever member 10340 remains positioned at the second position, another operation can be performed. There is a problem that it becomes difficult to press the means (PUSH button 10317).

To solve such a problem, the position of the lever member 10340 is determined at the end timing of the variable operation effect, and if the lever member 10340 is not located at the first position, the lever member It is conceivable to execute operation control (return operation control) for forcibly returning the lever member 10340 to the first position. In spite of the movement, the movement is made from the second position to the first position without intervention of the player's operation.

On the other hand, in this control example, the position of the lever member 10340 is determined at the end timing of the variable operation effect, and if the lever member 10340 is not located at the first position, the next variable operation effect It is designed to be easy to execute. By configuring in this way, the lever member 10340 once moved to the second position can be easily moved to the first position by the player's operation. 10340 can be moved to the first position (origin position).

Furthermore, in this control example, an upper limit is set for the period during which the next variable operation effect is likely to be executed. A drive motor) is used to execute return operation control for moving the lever member 10340 to the first position. As a result, it is possible to prevent the variable operation effect from being excessively executed for the player.

Here, when executing the return operation control, the player applies a force in a direction that resists the force generated when the lever member 10340 positioned at the second position moves toward the first position. In other words, if the player pushes up the lever member 10340 so that the lever member 10340 does not move to the first position, there arises a problem that the lever member 10340 cannot be moved to the first position by the return operation control. .

Therefore, if the player executes the return operation control so as to move the lever member 10340 to the first position with a force stronger than the force that can be applied by the player, the player may be injured. If return operation control is continuously executed until 10340 is moved to the first position, there is a problem that an excessive load is applied to the drive motor that drives lever member 10340, causing failure.

On the other hand, in the second control example, when the lever member 10340 is positioned at the second position after completing the return operation control for the predetermined period (5 seconds), the initial position of the lever member 10340 is configured to execute a process of switching from the first position to the second position, and an effect is executed in which the second position is the initial position.

When the variable operation effect is executed in a state where the second position is the initial position, the lever member 10340 during the effect preparation period in which the effect preparation process is executed moves from the second position to the first position, and the operation instruction is performed. As an effect, an effect (see FIG. 484(b)) of operating the lever member 10340 from the first position to the second position is executed. In this way, by varying the effect mode of the variable operation effect, it is possible to make the player interested in the variable operation effect and enhance the effect of the effect.

Further, when it is determined that the position of the lever member 10340 is neither the first position nor the second position after the end of the variable operation presentation, that is, both the origin detection flag 223ae and the operation position detection flag 223af, which will be described later, are set to ON. If not, the player may be holding the lever member 10340 at an intermediate position between the first position and the second position. In order to make it possible, an effect mode using a touch sensor having a detection area formed at a position overlapping the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is set.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 485, an image 891 imitating a hand is displayed corresponding to the detection area 890 of the touch sensor displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, and the detection area 890 is touched. , the characters "touch" are displayed in the display area 892, and the comment "touch the liquid crystal" is displayed in the display area 806 to indicate the operation content of the current operation presentation. By executing the effect of touching the liquid crystal (touch effect) in this way, the player can release the lever member 10340 and touch the liquid crystal. Then, in this control example, the return operation control of the lever member 10340 is executed in accordance with the execution period of the touch effect. Thereby, the lever member 10340 can be reliably moved to the first position.

In the second control example, the touch sensor is configured to be operable with one hand. In this case, the touch sensor can be operated while holding the lever member 10340 by releasing the operating handle. Therefore, in addition to the touch effect for operating the touch sensor, it is preferable to execute a shooting effect for prompting the player to shoot the ball by operating the operation handle. As a result, the player's hand can be more easily released from the lever member 10340 .

In addition, only the shooting effect described above may be executed, or a touch effect using both hands may be performed. A plurality of touch sensors may be provided so as to be formed, and a touch effect may be executed in which the plurality of touch sensors are operated at the same time.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 486 to 488, the content of the holding effect in the second control example will be described. In this control example, as in the above-described first control example, the special figure variation effect that can be executed in response to the special figure variation for showing the lottery result of the special symbol, and the special figure based on the start winning of the special symbol and a holding effect that can be executed when the holding is obtained, and in any of the effects, an operation effect can be set for the player to operate the operation means.

As mentioned above, the special figure fluctuation production is executed based on the special figure fluctuation, the suspension production is executed based on the acquisition of the special figure reservation, and the suspension production is performed even during the special figure fluctuation production Since it is configured to be executable, it was possible to execute the operation production at various timings, which improved the interest of the game, but the operation production derived from the special figure fluctuation production and the operation derived from the pending production , and are executed at the same time, making it difficult for the player to understand which operation effect is to be changed based on the operation result of the operation means executed by the player.

On the other hand, in this control example, when the execution condition of one operation effect is satisfied, the execution status of the other operation effect is determined, and the execution start timing of the one operation effect is determined based on the determination result. It is configured to be variable. As a result, it is possible to prevent a plurality of operation effects from being executed at the same time, and to provide an easy-to-understand operation effect to the player. Further, a suggestive effect suggesting that the execution of the operation effect is in a waiting state can be executed by using the period from when the execution condition of the operation effect is satisfied until the operation effect is actually executed. are doing. As a result, it is possible to suggest that a new operation performance will be executed after the operation performance currently being executed is finished, so that the player can play the game while anticipating the performance to be executed in the future.

Here, with reference to FIG. 486, the content of the standby effect executed when the operation effects overlap will be described. Figure 486 (a) is a model of an example of the standby effect displayed on the display screen when the conditions for executing the operation effect as a pending effect are established while the operation effect is being executed in the special figure fluctuation effect. FIG. 486(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of display contents displayed on the display screen after the end of the standby effect. In addition, since it is the same as that of the 1st control example mentioned above about the operation production|presentation derived from the special figure fluctuation production|presentation performed in this control example, the detailed description about the content of the production|presentation and an execution opportunity is abbreviate|omitted.

Figure 486 (a) shows the display area on the upper left side of the display screen (see Figure 389) of the third symbol display device 81, specifically, the number of pending balls of the first special symbol (special figure 1). It is a schematic diagram in which the vicinity of the display area Ds1 in which the display mode (reserved ball pattern) is displayed is enlarged. As described above, the standby effect shown in FIG. 486 (a) is executed when the operation effect derived from the special figure fluctuation effect is executed, so the illustration is omitted in FIG. 486 (a) However, in the substantially central portion of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the operation effect derived from the special figure variation effect is executed.

In FIG. 486(a), the fourth reserved ball design Hz4 is displayed on the display screen while the first reserved ball design Hz1 to the fourth reserved ball design Hz4 are displayed as the reserved designs of the special figure 1. Based on (based on the fact that the voice lamp control device 113 receives the winning information command indicating the winning information to be the fourth reserved ball of the special figure 1), it shows the state in which the standby effect is being executed.

That is, based on the reception of the winning information command indicating the winning information as the fourth reserved ball of the special figure 1, when the operation effect (suspended operation effect) for causing the player to operate the operation means as the pending effect is executed If it is determined (the execution condition of the pending operation effect is established), and furthermore, it is determined that the operation effect (special figure operation effect) is being executed as a special figure fluctuation effect at that time (the standby condition of the pending operation effect is established ), a standby effect is executed that suggests that the pending operation effect is executed.

In this standby effect, an effect is executed in which the suggestive character HC1 appears (into the frame) in the display screen while rotating the display part (the head in FIG. 486(a)) having a plurality of display surfaces. This suggestive character HC1 has three display surfaces, on which characters "PUSH", "red", and "chance" are displayed. Then, after the display parts are rotated during the standby effect, the specific display part is stopped and displayed at a position more easily visible than the other display parts as the effect result of the standby effect.

For example, when a pending operation effect is executed after a standby effect, a specific display portion where the characters “PUSH” are displayed as a result of the standby effect is stopped and displayed at a position that is easier to see than other display portions. , the pending operation effect is executed.

In this way, when the standby effect is being executed, the effect of rotating the display part of the suggestion character HC1 framed in the display screen is executed. By displaying the display mode (“PUSH”) for operating the operation means, it is possible to suggest to the player that the pending operation effect is in the standby state. In addition, by rotating the display mode ("PUSH") for allowing the player to operate the operation means, the player can be notified that the operation effective period of the pending operation effect is not set at the present time (during the standby effect). It can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner.

In this control example, the suggestive character HC1 is framed in the display screen while the standby effect is being executed. may be configured to be framed in. In addition, as a waiting effect, a rotating effect is executed with predetermined display modes (“PUSH”, “red”, “chance”) displayed on a plurality of display surfaces serving as display portions of the suggestive character HC1. However, without being limited to this, the display mode displayed on the plurality of display surfaces that serve as the display parts of the suggestive character HC1 may be changed during the standby effect, or the display mode may not be displayed. It may be configured to execute an effect of rotating the display part.

Further, in the effect of rotating the display part of the suggestion character HC1 executed during the standby effect, the rotation speed of the display part may be varied according to the progress of the standby effect. It may be configured to reduce the rotational speed. By configuring in this way, it is difficult to understand what the suggestion character HC1 is suggesting immediately after the standby effect is executed, and as time elapses, it becomes easier for the player to comprehend the suggestion content of the suggestion character HC1. can do. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the effect contents of the standby effect.

Further, the rotation speed of the display part of the suggestion character HC1 may be varied based on the operation contents of the operation means in the special figure operation presentation being executed. It is preferable to configure so that the rotation speed is increased based on the operation of the operating means. By configuring in this way, in a state in which the operating means is being actively operated during the special figure operation presentation, the display portion of the suggestive character HC1 rotates at high speed, and is displayed at the display portion of the suggestive character HC1. It is possible to make it difficult to identify the characters of "PUSH" that are displayed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player concentrate on the special figure operation effect and play the game.

In addition, the relationship between the operation mode of the player's operation means for the special figure operation effect and the effect mode displayed during the standby effect is not limited to this, and the player operates the operation means during the special figure operation effect. The display mode displayed on each display surface of the display portion of the suggestion character HC1 may be changed based on the operation.

In this control example, when the standby effect shown in FIG. The character "PUSH" is stopped and displayed so that it can be identified, but if it is determined that the pending operation effect cannot be executed after the standby effect is completed, the display portion of the suggestion character HC1 is changed to "red" or "chance". It is configured to stop display so that the characters are identifiable.

Then, as shown in FIG. 486(b), when the display portion of the suggestion character HC1 is stopped so that the characters "red" can be identified, the hold ball pattern is displayed without executing the operation effect. (In FIG. 486(a), the second reserved ball pattern, which was in the blue display mode, is changed to the red display mode).

In this way, when the execution condition of the pending operation effect is satisfied and the pending operation effect cannot be executed immediately, the standby effect is executed, and whether the pending operation effect can be executed at the end timing of the standby effect. It is possible to simplify the determination of the execution condition of the standby effect by determining again and varying the effect result of the standby effect based on the result of the determination.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 487 and 488, the flow of setting the operation effect in the second control example will be described. In this second control example, the production mode of the fluctuation production corresponding to the special figure fluctuation is set at different timings in the first half period (first period) and the second half period (second period) of the special figure fluctuation period. It consists of Specifically, the production mode of the special figure fluctuation production corresponding to the first half period (first period) of the special figure fluctuation period is set at the start timing of the special figure fluctuation (timing of receiving the fluctuation pattern command), and the special figure The production mode of the special figure fluctuation production corresponding to the second half period (second period) of the fluctuation period is configured to be set after the passage of a predetermined period after the special figure fluctuation has passed.

Furthermore, in this control example, the information (first information) used to set the production mode (first production mode) of the variation production corresponding to the first period of the special figure fluctuation period, and the second special figure fluctuation period The information (second information) used for setting the effect mode (second effect mode) of the variable effect corresponding to the period is different. The effect mode is set based on the variation pattern command output from, and the second effect mode is the effect information stored when the first effect mode is set (information stored in the effect information storage area 223ak), Information indicating whether the pending effect (holding operation effect) is on standby (setting status of the standby flag 223ah) is configured to be set based on this.

Here, with reference to Figure 487 and Figure 488, the setting method of special figure fluctuation production and reservation production is explained. Figure 487 is a diagram showing a setting method of various effects in the case where the execution condition of the holding operation effect is established as a holding effect during the first period of the special figure fluctuation period, and Figure 488 shows the setting method of the special figure fluctuation period It is the figure which showed the setting method of various production|presentations when the execution conditions of the pending|holding operation production|presentation are satisfied during the 2nd period as a holding|holding production|presentation.

As shown in FIG. 487, the variation pattern command is output from the main controller 110 to the audio ramp controller 113 at the timing when the special figure variation is executed. Then, on the voice lamp control device 11 side, based on the information indicating the special figure fluctuation time included in the received variation pattern command, the information indicating the lottery result of the special figure lottery, and the information indicating the stop type of the special figure, the variation pattern With reference to the table 223a, the variable effect of the first period is set. Specifically, the variable effect mode of the first period and the effect information indicating the length of the second period are set and stored in the effect information storage area 223ak.

Here, when the operation effect (special figure operation effect) is set as the variable effect mode of the set first period, the special figure operation effect is executed in accordance with the execution timing of the special figure operation effect, and the game Set an operation validity period that effectively determines the operation that the user performs on the operation means. Then, during the period during which the variable effect of the first period is being executed, a start winning of a special symbol (a ball entering the first winning opening 64) occurs, and the main controller 110 gives the prefetch result corresponding to the starting win. When the winning information command including , when it is determined that the holding effect has been executed, a process of setting the effect mode of the holding effect is executed.

A performance mode other than the operation performance (suspension operation performance) as the performance mode of the suspension performance (for example, display of any one of the special figure suspension ball patterns Hz1 to Hz4 based on the elapsed time without using the operation of the operation means by the player When the performance mode of changing the mode) is set, the pending performance is executed without discriminating the performance mode of the special figure variation performance being executed. On the other hand, when the operation effect (holding operation effect) is set as the effect mode of the holding effect, in order to determine whether the current situation is such that the holding operation effect can be executed, the special figure fluctuation effect being executed (first Analyze the content of the special figure fluctuation performance during the period) and determine whether the operation performance does not overlap. Parse the content.

By this analysis, if it is determined that the operation effect overlaps, that is, the current time is within the period in which the special figure operation effect is being executed, or if the pending operation effect is executed, special during the pending operation effect When it is determined that the figure operation effect will be executed, the holding operation effect is not executed within the first period of the special figure fluctuation period, and the standby effect is executed (see FIG. 486(a)).

Then, the second period of the special figure fluctuation period (the period of 30 seconds to 60 seconds of the special figure fluctuation period) is set at the timing (28 seconds after the start of the special figure fluctuation), the first period Production mode during the second period based on production results of various productions (for example, production results for operation production) in the second period, production information stored in the production information storage area 223ak, and standby status of pending operation production. set. Although a detailed explanation is omitted, the information to be referred to when setting the effect mode during the second period is given a priority order, and information that overlaps when setting the effect mode is It is configured such that the mode of presentation is set based on information for which a high priority is set. Specifically, if the lottery result of the special figure fluctuation being executed is a big hit, the various information for indicating the lottery result of the fluctuation is set higher than the standby information of the pending operation effect. When the lottery result of the special figure variation under execution is out, the standby information of the holding operation performance should be configured to have a higher priority than the lottery result of the special figure variation under execution. By configuring in this way, the effect executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 can be executed in accordance with the interest of the player.

Next, with reference to FIG. 488, an effect setting method for a case where a new special figure winning occurs during the second period of the special figure fluctuation period will be described. As shown in FIG. 488, when the timing determined to receive the winning information command and execute the pending operation effect is during the second period of the special figure fluctuation effect, at that time, whether the pending operation effect can be executed It is determined whether or not, and when it is determined to be executable, the pending operation performance is executed as it is, and when it is determined to be impracticable (difficult), the pending performance which does not execute the pending operation performance is executed as the current pending performance. .

As described above, in this control example, at the execution start timing of the special symbol variation effect (special figure variation effect), the length of the first period and the first period based on the variation time information included in the received variation pattern command The length of two periods is set, and the presentation mode is set according to the length of the set period. The execution period of the set effect mode may be set as the first period, and the remaining period may be set as the second period. By configuring in this way, the performance mode of the variable performance to be executed in the first half period can be set without worrying about the performance period, so that the types of performances to be executed can be easily increased.

In addition, in this control example, the pending operation effect that has entered the standby state during the first period is configured to be executable during the second period. (Production content, production period) and the production mode of the pending operation production executed after the second period (executed after waiting) may be configured to be different. It is preferable that the effect mode of the pending operation effect to be executed has a shorter effect period than the effect mode of the pending operation effect to be executed during the second period.

By configuring in this way, when the standby effect is executed and then the pending operation effect is executed, the pending operation effect using a longer period is executed, so that the effect of the pending operation effect can be easily enhanced. can do. Therefore, when the waiting effect is executed, the game can be played while expecting that the holding operation effect will be executed.

Furthermore, during the waiting period in which the pending operation effect is waiting, if a new special figure pending is acquired, the pending operation effect that also reflects the look-ahead result corresponding to the newly acquired special figure pending is executed. should be configured to By configuring in this way, it is possible to motivate the player to play the game even while the standby effect is being executed. In addition, in the pending operation effect executed after the standby effect, it is possible to execute the effect capable of changing the display mode of a plurality of special figure pending, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Next, referring to FIG. 489, the state transition method of the pachinko machine 10 realized by performing control based on various tables defined in the ROM 202 and various flags and counters provided in the RAM 203. explain. FIG. 489 is a transition diagram showing the state transition flow of the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example. As shown in FIG. 489, in the second control example, the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is the potential state (high probability state of special symbols, low Probability state) can be set, and when a jackpot is won in a special lottery, a normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) can be set after the jackpot game ends. And, it is greatly different in that a state transition is provided to terminate the time saving state (high probability state of normal symbols) based on having won a small hit in the special drawing lottery.

That is, in the first control example described above, since only the normal state can be set as the game state in which the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, when the jackpot game is not executed after the time saving state ends , the player can easily determine that the currently set game state is the normal state. To make it difficult for a player to easily discriminate a set game state when a jackpot game is not executed after a time-saving state is finished, because a normal state and a latent state can be set. can be done.

In addition, among the game states in which the low probability state of the normal design is set, the latent state is set to the high probability state of the special design, and the normal state is set to the low probability state of the special design. The latent state is also configured to be a game state in which it is easy to win a big hit in a special symbol lottery, that is, a game state advantageous to the player. Therefore, even after the time saving state ends, the player can play while expecting that the currently set game state is the latent state, so that the time saving state It is possible to make it difficult to stop the game with the end of .

Here, with reference to FIG. 489, the flow of game state transition of the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example will be specifically described. Note that the detailed description of the same flow as that of the first control example described above will be omitted. First, when the normal state (low probability state of the special design, low probability state of the normal design) is set, the normal design is a low probability state, and the second special design (special design 2) is started. Since the game state is such that it is difficult for the ball to enter the second winning hole 640, the ball enters the first winning hole 64 that triggers the start of the first special symbol (special figure 1) in the same manner as the first control example described above. A special figure 1 game (left-handed game) is executed.

When a jackpot is won (jackpot probability 1/250) by special figure 1 lottery, a different game state is set after the jackpot ends according to the type of jackpot won. Specifically, when the type of the winning jackpot is "jackpot A, B" (50% of the total jackpot), the variable state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) after the end of the jackpot game is set, and if it is "jackpot C" (30% of the total jackpot), a time-saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is set after the end of the jackpot game, and "jackpot F" In some cases (20% of all jackpots), the normal state is set again after the jackpot game ends.

Next, when the time saving state is set, the normal symbol is a high probability state, and since it is a game state that makes it easy to win the ball to the second winning port 640 that is the trigger for starting the special figure 2, as described above As in the first control example, a special figure 2 game (right-handed game) is executed in which the ball is entered into the second winning opening 640 that triggers the start of the special figure 2.

Then, when a jackpot is won in the special figure 2 lottery (jackpot probability 1/250), a different game state is set after the jackpot ends according to the type of jackpot won. Specifically, if the type of the winning jackpot is "jackpot D" (80% of the total jackpot), the variable probability state is set after the jackpot game ends, and if it is "jackpot E, G" (the total jackpot 20%) is configured so that the time saving state is set again after the jackpot game ends. In other words, when a big win is won in the special figure 2 lottery during the variable probability state, the high probability state of the normal pattern is always set after the big win game ends.

In addition, in this control example, as in the above-described first control example, every time the special symbol lottery condition is established, a lottery (so-called drop lottery) is performed to determine whether or not to fall to a special symbol low probability state. It is configured to run. Furthermore, it has a plurality of conditions for shifting the time saving state (high probability state of normal symbols) to the low probability state of normal symbols, and after the time saving state set in the first control example is set. In addition to the first time-saving end condition that is established when the number of special figure fluctuations reaches a predetermined number of times (e.g., 100 times), as a result of the special figure lottery during the time-saving state, a specific lottery result other than the jackpot winning (e.g., Set the second time-saving end condition that is satisfied when the number of times that the small hit A winning) is won reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 2 times), and if any of the time-saving end conditions are satisfied, the time-saving state (normal high probability state of the design) to the low probability state of the normal design.

Thus, in this control example, when the variable probability state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is set after the end of the jackpot game, during the variable state, aim at the jackpot by special drawing lottery. A game (falling lottery) for shifting a high probability state of a special pattern to a low probability state while executing a game, and a game (a special drawing lottery) for shifting a high probability state of a normal pattern to a low probability state. will run in parallel. In addition, the timing of shifting the probability state of the special pattern based on the drop lottery and the timing of shifting the probability state of the normal pattern based on the special pattern lottery are not related, and which timing is faster. Since it is configured so that it is determined based on the result of a predetermined lottery whether it will arrive, the game state transition can be set intricately for the player.

Returning to FIG. 489, the description continues. If you win a small hit (1/100) in a variable state, if the small hit type is other than a specific small hit type (small hit B) (50% of the total small hit), or the first specific small If it is a hit type (small hit A), without shifting the game state, if it is the second specific small hit type (small hit A), the high probability state of the normal pattern is changed to a low probability state. configured to migrate. Furthermore, the fall lottery is executed in the same manner as the first control example described above, and the fall lottery is won at the timing when the number of special drawing lots after the variable probability state is set is less than 100 times (fall probability 1/500). In the case, it shifts to a time-saving state, and if the number of special lotteries after the variable state is set is 100 times or more, the fall lottery will be won (fall probability 1/500). It is configured as follows.

In addition, in this control example, without falling during the probability variable state, and when the time saving end condition is not satisfied, the probability variable state is configured to continue until the jackpot is won in the special lottery. , Without being limited to this, when the number of special figure fluctuations (the number of special figure lotteries) reaches a predetermined number (for example, 150 times), a configuration is provided to shift the high probability state of the special symbol to the low probability state. Also good. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult to set a game state (probability variable state) advantageous to the player for a long period of time, and to prevent the player from being provided with an excessively advantageous game state. can. Also, in this case, when the high probability state of the normal design is set at the timing of shifting the high probability state of the special design to the low probability state, the high probability state of the normal design also goes to the low probability state. It may be configured to shift to .

Finally, when the latent certainty state is set, the normal symbol is a low probability state, and since it is a game state where it is difficult to win the ball to the second winning hole 640 which is the trigger for starting the special figure 2, the normal state Similarly, a special figure 1 game (left-handed game) for winning the ball to the first winning opening 64 that triggers the start of special figure 1 is executed.

Then, when a jackpot is won in the special figure 1 lottery (jackpot probability 1/125), a different game state is set after the jackpot ends according to the type of jackpot won. Specifically, when the type of the winning jackpot is “jackpot A, B” (50% of the total jackpot), the variable probability state is set after the jackpot game ends, and when it is “jackpot C, F” (jackpot 50% of the total) is configured so that the time saving state is set after the jackpot game ends.

In other words, when the jackpot is won in the latent state, it is easier to set a game state advantageous to the player after the jackpot game than when the jackpot is won in the normal state. . By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the game state more advantageous to the player in the latent state than in the normal state, so even after the time saving state is over, the current setting is performed for the player. Since it is possible to play the game while expecting that the current game state is the latent state, it is possible to make it difficult to stop the game when the time saving state ends. Also, during the latent state, the low probability state of the normal pattern is set, so if you win the fall lottery and shift the high probability state of the special pattern to the low probability state, the number of special drawing lots Regardless, it will return to normal.

As described above, in the second control example, after the end of the jackpot game, the high probability state of the normal symbol (probability variable state or time saving state) is set, and after that, before the special figure fluctuation reaches 100 times (the first If the high-probability state of the normal pattern ends before the time-saving end condition is established), a special lottery wins a jackpot, or a time-saving end condition (second time-saving end condition) is set based on a small win. That's what it means. Therefore, when the high-probability state of the normal pattern ends before the first time-shortening end condition is established, the game can be played while expecting whether or not a big win is won in the special drawing.

Furthermore, in this control example, as in the first control described above, even if the drop lottery is won during the period until the special figure fluctuation reaches 100 times, the player is not notified of the drop win. there is Then, when the high probability state of the normal pattern ends in the period until the special figure fluctuation reaches 100 times, the same back mode (lost mode) regardless of the game state (normal state or latent state) ) is configured to be set. By configuring in this way, when the high probability state of the normal pattern is set after the end of the jackpot, the current probability state (high probability state of special patterns, high probability state of normal patterns) or time saving state (special It is difficult to understand whether it is a low probability state of the pattern, a high probability state of the normal pattern, and even after the high probability state of the normal pattern is over, the current is a latent state (high probability state of the special pattern, normal pattern) It is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand whether it is a low probability state) or a normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols).

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from easily determining that the currently set game state is a disadvantageous game state (for example, a normal state) and stopping the game early.

<Electrical Configuration in Second Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 490 to 498, the electrical configuration in this second control example will be described. In this control example, the configuration of various counters possessed by the main controller 110, the configuration of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the configuration of the RAM 203, and the sound lamp are different from the electrical configuration of the first control example described above. The difference is that new elements are added to the configuration of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the control device 113 and the configuration of the RAM 223 . Elements that are the same as those in the first control example are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 490, configurations of various counters in the second control example will be described. FIG. 490 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the counter configuration in the second control example. In contrast to the first control example described above, this second control example is configured so that a small win can be won in a special symbol lottery. Based on the value of the special hit random number counter C1, it is configured to determine whether or not there is a small hit using the small hit random number 2 table 202ab (see FIG. 493(a)). Then, when a small hit is won in the special lottery, the small hit type selection 2 table 202ac is used based on the acquired value of the small hit type counter C6 in order to select the small hit type of the won small hit. The small hit type is configured to be selectable. In addition, the detailed contents of the small hit type that can be selected in this control example will be described later.

In this second control example configured in this way, the above-described small hit type counter C6 is added to the various counters of the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10, and the value of the acquired small hit type counter C6 and a small hit type counter storage area in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. The difference is that they are provided. Although not shown in FIG. 490, the special symbol reserved ball execution area also stores the counters provided in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. It is different from the first control example in that an area is provided and a small hit type counter storage area is also provided.

Although the details will be described later, in this second control example, the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1 lottery) does not win a small hit, and only the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2 lottery) It is configured so that a small prize can be won. In this way, by providing a small hit type storage area for the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a corresponding to the special symbol (special symbol 1) that cannot be won with a small hit, the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area is provided. 203a and the configuration of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b can be unified. In addition, it is possible to unify the contents of the processing (information acquisition processing) that is executed when the acquisition conditions for acquiring the values of various counters are satisfied. That is, by daringly providing a process for acquiring the value of the small hit type counter C6 that is unnecessary because there is no winning in the small hit in the special figure 1 lottery, and a configuration for storing the acquired value of the small hit type counter C6. , When the acquisition condition of special figure 1 is satisfied (when the ball wins in the first winning opening 64), and when the acquisition condition of special figure 2 is satisfied (when the ball wins in the second winning opening 640) , and the processing load on the main controller 110 can be reduced.

Furthermore, in the case of changing the game property so as to win a small prize even in the special figure 1 lottery, the change processing can be easily executed, so that the game property can be easily diversified. It should be noted that, as in this control example, without using a configuration that simplifies the entire process by providing an unnecessary process, when the acquisition conditions of the special figure 1 is satisfied, the value of the small hit type counter C6 may be configured not to acquire As a result, the acquisition of information (the value of the small win type counter C6) that is not actually used in the game is eliminated, so that it is possible to reliably prevent the act of analyzing the game content based on the information acquired unnecessarily. can.

As described above, in the second control example, the special winning random number counter C1 is used for the small winning lottery that draws the presence or absence of the small winning winning among the special symbol lottery (special drawing lottery), and the small winning type is selected. When doing so, a small hit type counter C6 is used. An initial value random number counter CINI1 and a variation type counter CS1 used for selecting a variation pattern of special symbols are used to set the initial value of the small winning type counter C6. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 425), and some counters are updated irregularly during the main processing (see FIG. 434). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 . The RAM 203 includes a first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a corresponding to winning in the first winning opening 64 consisting of four reserved areas (first to fourth reserved areas), and four reserved areas (first reserved area). to the fourth area), and a second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b corresponding to the winning to the second winning opening 640 is provided. In accordance with the winning timing to the winning opening 64 (according to the establishment of the acquisition condition), a special winning random number counter C1, a special winning type counter C2, a stop type selection counter C3, a fluctuation type counter CS1, a falling lottery counter C4, and a small winning. Each value of the type counter C6 is stored.

Then, when the starting condition (fluctuation condition) of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is established, the various values stored in the first reserved area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a are changed to the first special symbol. It shifts to the execution area, and special symbol variation based on various values stored is started. In addition, in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, in accordance with the winning timing to the second winning opening 640 (according to the establishment of the acquisition condition), a special winning random number counter C1, a special winning type counter C2, a stop type Each value of the selection counter C3, the variation type counter CS1, the falling lottery counter C4, and the small hit type counter C6 is stored.

Then, when the starting condition (fluctuation condition) of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is established, the various values stored in the first reserved area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a are changed to the first special symbol. It shifts to the execution area, and special symbol variation based on various values stored is started.

In addition, in this control example, the value of the special winning random number counter C1 is used when the lottery for the presence or absence of the small winning winning is made. In other words, in order not to win both a big hit and a small hit in one special lottery, it is first determined whether the big hit has been won in the special lottery, and it is determined that the jackpot has not been won. Since it is configured to determine whether or not a small win is won in the case of winning, a common counter (special win random number counter C1) is used to determine whether the big win or the small win is won. are doing. Without being limited to this, it may be configured to provide a dedicated counter (for example, a small hit random number counter) for determining the presence or absence of a small hit winning.

In addition, in this control example, when the acquisition condition is satisfied based on the ball winning in the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 640 (for example, the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second When there is a new winning while the storage area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is empty), the value of each main counter described above is acquired, and the acquired value is stored in the corresponding reserved ball storage area. Although it is configured to store, it is not limited to this, for example, a new new in a state where there is space in the storage area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b. When a prize is won, only the right to acquire the values of various counters is stored in each corresponding reserved ball storage area, and the values of various counters are acquired based on the establishment of the variable condition of the special symbol. Alternatively, only a specific counter value is obtained based on the ball winning in the first prize winning port 64 or the second prize winning port 640, and the remaining counter value is obtained when the fluctuation condition is satisfied. It may be configured to acquire.

As described above, in this control example, in contrast to the above-described first control example, it is configured to be able to win a small hit in a special symbol lottery (special lottery), and the acquired small hit type It is configured to execute various controls based on the value of the counter C6. Although illustration is omitted, the value of the obtained small hit type counter C is configured to be used for various processes like other counters, and S406 in the start winning process (see FIG. 428), and In the process of S413, a process of storing the value of the small hit type counter C6 acquired in the same manner as other counters in the corresponding reserved ball storage area is executed. In addition, in the processing of S503 and S505 in the look-ahead processing (see FIG. 429), the result of the small winning lottery corresponding to the new winning is acquired, and as the winning information command set in the processing of S504, whether or not the small winning is won And, a winning information command containing information indicating the set small hit type is set.

Furthermore, although the detailed explanation is omitted, if you win a small hit in the special lottery, after the special figure fluctuation for showing the lottery result of the special lottery is displayed (confirmed display), the small hit is won. The flag (small hit start flag) shown is set to ON, and the main processing of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 434) is performed every 4 milliseconds by the small hit control processing, so that the small hit game based on the small hit winning is executed.

When this small hit control process is executed, first, it is determined whether the flag indicating the small hit winning (small hit start flag) is set to ON, and if it is determined that it is set to ON, it is set A process of setting an opening operation for executing a small winning game according to the small winning type, setting a small winning middle flag to ON, and setting a small winning start flag to OFF is executed. In this control example, when the small winning game is executed, the variable winning device 65 is configured to be opened. Specifically, the opening period of the small winning game (closing period of the variable winning device 65 ( 0.2 seconds)), round game period (opening period of variable winning device 65 (0.2 seconds)), ending period (closing period of variable winning device 65 (0.2 seconds)) small winning game is set.

In addition, in this control example, even when any of the plurality of small hit types is set, the opening operation described above is configured to be set. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from easily identifying the small win type set for the small win won this time based on the game contents of the small win game (contents of opening operation of the variable winning device 65). can.

The game content of the small hit game is not limited to this, for example, different game content may be set according to the small hit type. The game contents of the small winning game to be executed may be different from the small winning type. Further, as described above, in this control example, the period in which the variable winning device 65 that is opened during the small winning game is in the open state is configured to be shorter than in the big winning game, and is more specific than the big winning game. A winning game in which it is difficult for the ball to enter the winning opening 65 is executed. It should be noted that, regarding the specific contents of the small winning game in this control example, only the period in which the variable winning device 65 is in the open state and the period in which the variable prize winning device 65 is in the closed state are different. It is the same as the jackpot game described above.

Therefore, the various processing contents executed during the small winning game are the same as the processing related to the big winning control of the first control example (see FIGS. 434 to 436), so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 491(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the second control example. As shown in FIG. 491 (a), in this second control example, a jackpot type selection 2 table 202aa is provided instead of the jackpot type selection table 202c (see FIG. 408) for the first control example described above. And, a small hit random number 2 table 202ab referred to when determining the presence or absence of a small hit winning, a small hit type selection table 202ac referred to when selecting a small hit type set when a small hit is won, The difference is that a time saving end condition selection table 202ad in which a time saving end condition for ending the time saving state (high probability state of normal symbols) is defined is added. Other elements are the same, and detailed descriptions of the same elements are omitted.

The jackpot type selection 2 table 202aa is used to select the jackpot type that is set when the jackpot is won. It is different in that the jackpot type that has been added is added. Specifically, when a jackpot is won in the special drawing 1, "jackpot F" can be selected as the jackpot type, and when a jackpot is won in the special drawing 2, "jackpot G" is selected as the jackpot type. It is different in that it is configured to obtain In addition, it is different in that the game state set after the end of the jackpot game is set based on the set jackpot type and the game state when the jackpot is won.

Here, with reference to FIG. 492, the contents of the jackpot type selection 2 table 202aa will be described. FIG. 492(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot type selection 2 table 202aa. As shown in FIG. 492 (a), the jackpot type selection 2 table 202aa is the special drawing 1 jackpot 2 table 202aa1 that is referred to when the jackpot is won in the special drawing 1 lottery, and the jackpot is won in the special drawing 2 drawing. It has a special figure 2 jackpot 2 table 202aa2 that is referred to when the game is played.

Next, the contents of the special figure 1 jackpot 2 table 202aa1 will be described with reference to FIG. 492(b). FIG. 492(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special figure 1 jackpot 2 table 202aa1. This special figure 1 jackpot 2 table 202aa1 is a data table used when a jackpot is won in the special figure 1 lottery like the special figure 1 jackpot table 202d1 described above. As shown in FIG. 492 (b), in this control example, when the jackpot is won in the special figure 1 lottery, the jackpot types are "jackpot A", "jackpot B", "jackpot C", and "jackpot F". It is configured so that four types can be set. And, the content of the jackpot game (the number of round games) is defined in correspondence with the set jackpot type. Furthermore, a game state to be set after the end of the big win game is defined for each big win type in correspondence with the game state when the big win is won.

Specifically, the value of the acquired special hit type counter C is in the range of "0 to 9", "jackpot A", in the range of "10 to 49", "jackpot B", "50 to 79" "jackpot C" is defined in the range of , and "jackpot F" is defined in the range of "80 to 99". When "jackpot A" is set as the jackpot type, "15 rounds (R) round game" is executed as the jackpot game. Then, regardless of the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, the "probability variable state" is set after the jackpot game ends.

When "jackpot B" is set as the jackpot type, "five rounds (R) round game" is executed as the jackpot game. Then, regardless of the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, the "probability variable state" is set after the jackpot game ends.

Further, when "jackpot C" is set as the jackpot type, "five rounds (R) round game" is executed as the jackpot game. Then, when the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is the normal state, the "time saving state" is set after the end of the jackpot game, and the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is other than the normal state (latency state, probability variable state, time saving state). In the case of , "time saving state" is set after the jackpot game ends.

Finally, when "jackpot F" is set as the jackpot type, "five rounds (R) round game" is executed as the jackpot game. Then, when the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is the normal state, the "normal state" is set after the end of the jackpot game, and the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is other than the normal state (latency state, probability variable state, time saving state). In the case of , "time saving state" is set after the jackpot game ends.

In this control example, the game (left-handed game) in which the special figure 1 lottery is executed is configured to be executed in the normal state and the latent state, and on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 In the effect mode of the effect (background mode effect) to be executed, the same effect mode (lost child mode) is set when the normal state is set and when the latent state is set. Configure.

And, as described above, the game state (normal state) is configured to be difficult to set. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the game state more advantageous to the player in the latent state than in the normal state. A game can be played while expecting that the latent certainty state is set. In addition, as described above, the latent state, which is a high probability state of special symbols, is configured to have a higher probability of winning a jackpot in a special lottery than the normal state, which is a low probability state of special symbols. Therefore, it is possible to make the game state more advantageous to the player in the potential state than in the normal state.

In addition, as a pattern in which the special figure 1 lottery is executed during the variable state in which the game (right-handed game) in which the special figure 2 lottery is performed (right-handed game) is performed, the pattern in which the special figure 1 lottery is performed during the time saving state There is a pattern in which the special figure 1 lottery based on the special figure 1 reservation is executed during the variable probability state or the time saving state set after the end of the jackpot game. In this control example, when the big hit is won in the special figure 1 lottery in such a pattern, the game state is set with the same contents as when the big hit is won in the special figure 1 lottery during the latent state. Configure.

By configuring in this way, immediately after the game state (probability variable state, time-saving state) that makes the player play the right-handed game is set, the jackpot is won in the special figure 1 lottery based on the special figure 1 reservation, and the It is possible to suppress the setting of a game state (normal state) in which a left-handed game is performed after the jackpot game ends. Therefore, although the right-handed game advantageous to the player is once set, the left-handed game is set without executing the special figure 2 lottery by the right-handed game, and the player's willingness to play is reduced. It is possible to suppress the situation where

Next, with reference to FIG. 492(c), the contents of the special figure 2 jackpot 2 table 222aa2 that the jackpot type selection 2 table 202aa has will be described. FIG. 492(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special figure 2 jackpot 2 table 222aa2. This special figure 2 jackpot 2 table 222aa2 is a data table referred to when selecting a jackpot type when winning a jackpot in a special figure 2 lottery.

As shown in FIG. 492(c), in this control example, when the jackpot is won in the special figure 2 lottery, three types of "jackpot D", "jackpot E", and "jackpot G" can be set as the jackpot types. It consists of And, the content of the jackpot game (the number of round games) is defined in correspondence with the set jackpot type. Furthermore, a game state to be set after the end of the big win game is defined for each big win type in correspondence with the game state when the big win is won.

Specifically, the value of the acquired special hit type counter C is in the range of "0 to 79", "jackpot D", in the range of "80 to 89", "jackpot E", "90 to 99" "jackpot G" is defined in the range of . In this control example, when the jackpot is won in the special figure 2 lottery, regardless of the set jackpot type, the "15 round (R) round game" is executed as the jackpot game. And, according to the big win type which is set, it is constituted so that the game state which is set after the big win game ends is made different.

Specifically, when the "jackpot D" is set, regardless of the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, the "probability variable state" is set after the jackpot game ends, and when the "jackpot E" is set. , Regardless of the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, the "time saving state" is set after the jackpot game ends. Then, when the "jackpot G" is set, if the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is the "probability variable state", the "normal state" is set after the jackpot game ends, and other than the probability variable state (normal state, Latency state, time saving state) is set, "time saving state" is set after the jackpot game ends.

The small winning random number 2 table 202ab is a data table for determining whether or not the small winning is won in the special lottery, and is referred to when the big winning is not won in the special lottery (when the winning is lost). It is. This small hit random number 2 table 202ab determines whether the lottery result is a small hit in the deviation process (see S351 in FIG. 500) executed in the special symbol variation start process 2 (see S258 in FIG. 499). It is referenced when

Here, the contents of the small hit random number 2 table 202ab will be described with reference to FIG. 493(a). Figure 493 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the small winning random number 2 table 202ab. As shown in FIG. 493(a), the small hit random number 2 table 202ab defines the value of the special hit random number counter C1 that becomes the small hit winning for each symbol type (special symbol type), and each special symbol type. When the lottery is executed, the result of the special lottery is a small winning by comparing the value of the acquired special winning random number counter C1 and the determination value defined in the small winning random number 2 table 202ab. It is determined whether or not

Specifically, the value of the special winning random number counter C1 that becomes a small winning win is not defined for the symbol type "Special Figure 1", and the special winning random number counter C1 for the symbol type "Special Figure 2" becomes a small winning. "0 to 4" are defined as the value of the winning random number counter C1. That is, in this control example, it is specified that the small hit is elected only in the special figure 2 lottery, and the small hit probability in the special figure 2 lottery is 1/100. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the lottery result different between the special figure 1 lottery and the special figure 2 lottery, so that the diversification of the game can be realized and the interest of the game can be improved. can.

In addition, although the details will be described later, in this control example, when a specific small hit (small hit A) is elected a predetermined number of times (twice) during the time saving state (normal symbol high probability state), the time saving end condition (second time saving It is configured so that the end condition) is established and the time saving state ends. As described above, this control example does not win a small hit by the special figure 1 lottery, so the special figure 1 lottery based on the special figure 1 reservation is executed immediately after the time saving state is set. The second time-saving end condition is never satisfied based on the lottery.

Therefore, when the jackpot is won in the special figure 1 lottery executed in the normal state, and the time saving state is set after the jackpot game ends, that is, the time saving state is set in the state where the special figure 2 hold is not acquired. It is possible to suppress the end of the time saving state by the special figure 1 lottery executed in the case. In addition, this control example, like the first control example described above, because it is configured so that the time saving state ends at the start timing of the special figure fluctuation, for example, the time saving state is executed immediately after being set When the time saving end condition is satisfied based on the special drawing lottery (the first special drawing drawing after the time saving state is set), the game during the time saving state (time saving game), that is, the electric accessory 640a is opened. There is a problem that the time-saving state ends without performing a game in which the ball is entered into the second prize winning port 640.例文帳に追加

On the other hand, in this control example, since it is configured so that the second time saving end condition is not satisfied by the special figure 1 lottery, the jackpot is won in the special figure 1 lottery executed in the normal state, When the time saving state is set after the jackpot game ends, that is, when the time saving state is set in a state where the special figure 2 reservation is not acquired, the time saving state ends without performing the time saving game. can be suppressed. In addition, in this control example, since the number of winnings of the small hit that satisfies the second time saving end condition is set to "2 times", it is configured so that the time saving state is not ended by one special lottery during the time saving state. there is Therefore, although the time saving state is set, it is possible to suppress the end of the time saving state without performing the time saving game.

Here, when a small win is won in a special lottery (special figure 2 lottery), a winning game different from when a big win is won is executed. A winning game in which the device 65 is opened for a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.2 seconds), that is, a winning game capable of giving the player a privilege smaller than that of the big winning game is executed.

In addition, in this control example, the same winning hole (specific winning hole 65a) in the case of winning a small prize and in the case of winning a big win changes from the first state (closed state) in which it is difficult to win a ball to the first state in which a ball is likely to win. Although it is configured to execute a winning game that opens the variable winning device 65 so as to be variable to two states (open state), it is not limited to this, and different variables are used for the big winning game and the small winning game. The prize winning device may be configured to be opened.

In this case, the privilege (the number of prize balls to be paid out when the ball wins) given when the ball wins the prize opening of the variable prize winning device that is opened during the small win game is opened during the big win game. It may be configured so that the number of balls won in the winning opening of the variable winning device is smaller than that in the case of winning the ball, or the winning opening of the variable winning device to be opened during the big winning game is opened during the small winning game. The winning opening of the operated variable winning device may be configured to make it more difficult for the ball to win.

In this control example, in the special drawing lottery, a data table (special symbol jackpot random number table 202a) for determining whether the jackpot was won and a data table (small hit random number 2) for determining whether the small hit was won Although the table 203ab) is used separately, it is not limited to this, and it is configured to use one data table to determine whether the special drawing lottery this time is a big win or a small win. can be In this case, for example, the value of the special winning random number counter C1 corresponding to the small winning winning may be defined in the big winning random number table 202a without duplication with the value of the special winning random number counter C1 corresponding to the winning big winning. By configuring in this way, the number of data tables that the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 has can be reduced.

The small hit type selection 2 table 202ac is a data table that is referred to when selecting the small hit type that is set when the small hit is won, and is referred to when the small hit is won in the special lottery. be. The small hit type selection 2 table 202ac of this control example is configured to be able to select the small hit A and the small hit B as the small hit type, and is executed in the special symbol variation start process 2 (see S258 in FIG. 499) When it is determined that the special figure lottery result of this time is a small hit (see S371 of FIG. 500), it is referred to determine the small hit type ( (See S374 in FIG. 500).

Here, with reference to FIG. 493(b), the contents of the small hit type selection 2 table 202ac will be described. Figure 493 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the small hit type selection 2 table 202ac. In this small hit type selection 2 table 202ac, different small hit types are defined corresponding to the value of the acquired small hit type counter C6. Specifically, the value of the obtained small hit type counter C6 is defined as "small hit A" in the range of "0 to 64", and "small hit B" in the range of "65 to 99". Although detailed description will be described later, in this control example, a predetermined small hit (for example, a small hit A) in the state (time saving state, probability variable state) in which the time saving state (high probability state of normal symbols) is set When the number of times (for example, twice) is won, it is configured to end the time-saving state (high-probability state of normal symbols). In other words, as a condition (time saving end condition) for shifting the time saving state (high probability state of normal pattern) to a low probability state of normal pattern, time saving end condition (second time saving end condition) based on small winning is set It is configured so that

Here, in the state where the time saving state (low probability state of special design, high probability of normal design) is set, when the time saving end condition is satisfied, normal state (low probability state of special design, low probability of normal design) is set. This control example, like the first control example described above, is configured so that the time saving state is more advantageous to the player than the normal state. The game is played while expecting that is set.

On the other hand, in this control example, as described above, the time saving end condition is established based on the small winning, so the player can understand at what timing the time saving state ends. can be made difficult. Therefore, the player who is playing the game in the time saving state can be made to play the game with a sense of tension.

In addition, in this control example, as the same time saving end condition as the first control example described above, the number of lotteries (number of fluctuations) of special symbols executed in a state where the high probability state of normal symbols is set is a predetermined number of times ( For example, it is configured to set a time saving end condition that is satisfied when reaching 100 times. As a result, it is possible to set an upper limit to the period in which the game state that is advantageous to the player is set (the period in which the time saving state is set), so it is possible to suppress the excessive awarding of benefits to the player. can do.

Similarly, in a state in which the variable state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability of normal symbols) is set, when the time-saving end condition is satisfied, the latent state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability of normal symbols ) is set. Also in this case, the variable definite state becomes a game state more advantageous to the player than the latent definite state. In this control example, similarly to the above-described first control example, when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set after the jackpot game ends, a predetermined period after the jackpot game ends (the number of special symbol fluctuations is 100 times During the period until reaching ), a special mode effect is executed, and if the normal state or latent state is set during the mode effect, the same mode (lost child mode) is set, and a mode effect corresponding to the lost child mode is executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81.例文帳に追加

By configuring in this way, it is difficult for the player to understand whether the current state is the normal state or the latent state during execution of the mode effect. Here, the difference between the normal state and the latent certain state will be explained. The normal state and the latent probability state are both set to a normal pattern low probability state, and the electric accessory 640a is opened based on the normal pattern hit, and the ball is difficult to win in the second winning hole 640. Therefore, it becomes a game state in which a left-handed game (special figure 1 game) is executed to win the ball in the first winning hole 64, but the normal state is a low probability state of special symbols, while the latent Since the definite state is a high probability state of special symbols, the probability of winning the jackpot in the special symbol lottery (special lottery) is higher than the normal state (jackpot winning probability 1/250), the latent state (jackpot winning probability 1 /125) is higher.

Furthermore, when a jackpot is won, the game state set after the end of the jackpot game based on the jackpot win is made different between when the jackpot is won during the normal state and when the jackpot is won during the latent state. It is constructed in such a manner that a game state advantageous to a player is set more easily when a big win is won during a latent state than when a big win is won during a normal state. Specifically, when the jackpot is won in the normal state, the ratio of the game state set after the end of the jackpot game is set to 50% variable probability state, 30% time-saving state, and 20% normal state. On the other hand, the ratio of the game state set after the end of the jackpot game when winning the jackpot in the latent probability state is configured to be 50% of the variable probability state and 50% of the time saving state. Therefore, the latent state is a game state more advantageous to the player than the normal state.

As described above, in this control example, when the normal state is set during the mode effect executed during the predetermined period after the end of the jackpot game (the period until the number of special figure fluctuations reaches 100 times) , the same mode (lost child mode) is set as when the latent state is set, and the mode effect is executed in the same effect mode. By configuring in this way, while the mode production corresponding to the lost child mode (normal state or mode for indicating the latent state) is being executed, the current state is the normal state or the latent state. can be made not easily identifiable by the player. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from immediately stopping the game when the time saving state or the variable probability state ends.

Furthermore, in this control example, at the timing when the mode effect ends (timing when the number of special figure fluctuations executed after the jackpot game ends reaches 100 times), the player is told that the current game state is the normal state. It is configured to be able to execute a notification effect that can identify whether it is in a latent state. As a result, a game that is disadvantageous to the player by executing an effect that makes it difficult to understand whether the current state is the normal state or the latent state for a long time (for example, the latent state is set even though the normal state is set). It is possible to suppress the situation where a game that makes you think that a certain state is set) is executed.

The time saving end condition selection table 202ad is a data table for setting a condition (time saving end condition) for ending the time saving state (high probability state of normal symbols) set after the end of the jackpot game, and is a data table for setting the time saving state. It is referred to at the set timing (end timing of the jackpot game).

Here, the contents of the time saving termination condition selection table 202ad will be described with reference to FIG. 493(c). FIG.493(c) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content prescribed|regulated by the time saving end condition selection table 202ad. As shown in FIG. 493 (c), the time saving end condition selection table 202ad is defined so that different time saving end conditions are set according to the set jackpot type. After the end of the jackpot game in which the jackpots A, E, F, G" are set, the value of the time saving medium counter 203j is set to "100", and the time saving end condition is set in which no value is set to the small hit counter 203aa. be.

Although the details will be described later, the time saving counter 203j is a counter whose value is subtracted by 1 each time the special figure variation is executed during the time saving state, and when the value of the counter becomes "0", It is determined that the conditions for terminating the time saving state (first time saving end condition) are established. In addition, the value of the small hit counter 203aa is subtracted by 1 each time a specific small hit (small hit A) is won during the time saving state (every time a special figure variation that wins a specific small hit is executed) When the value of the counter becomes "0", it is determined that the condition for terminating the time saving state (second time saving end condition) has been established.

That is, after the end of the jackpot game in which the "jackets A, E, F, G" are set, a time saving state is set in which the second time saving end condition (time saving end condition established based on the winning of the small win) is not set. .

On the other hand, after the end of the jackpot game in which "jackets B, C, D" are set as the jackpot types, the value of the time-saving medium counter 203j is set to "100" and the value of the small hit counter 203aa is set to "2". A time-saving end condition is set. That is, after the end of the big win game in which "big wins B, C, D" are set, when the small win A is won twice as the second time-saving end condition (time-saving end condition established based on the small win winning). A time saving state is set in which the time saving end condition to be established is set.

In this control example, as described above, the game state in which the time saving state (high probability state of normal symbols) is set is more advantageous to the player than the game state in which the low probability state of normal symbols is set. Therefore, by providing a time saving state in which the second time saving end condition is set and a time saving state in which the second time saving end condition is not set, the game state advantageous to the player can be easily continued. It is possible to set a state and a time saving state that is difficult to continue.

In addition, in this control example, even if the time saving state is set based on which jackpot type, the number of times of special symbol fluctuation (number of special figure fluctuations) "100 times" is set as the first time saving end condition However, without being limited to this, a different first time-saving end condition may be set according to the jackpot type, or a jackpot type in which the first time-saving end condition is not set may be provided. Furthermore, a jackpot type for which the second time-saving end condition is set and a jackpot type for which the second time-saving end condition is not set are provided, but different end conditions may be set as the second time-saving end condition according to the jackpot type. Furthermore, in this control example, the first time saving end condition, or the second time saving end condition is configured to end the time saving state when either is satisfied, but not limited to this, the first time saving You may comprise so that a time saving state may be ended when end conditions and 2nd time saving end conditions are satisfied.

In addition, in the present control example, even if any of the time saving end conditions are established, it is configured to end the time saving state at the start timing of the special figure fluctuation, but not limited to this, established Depending on the type of time saving end condition, the time saving state may be ended at different timings, for example, when the first time saving end condition is met, the timing at which the established special figure fluctuation is stopped and displayed, and the stop display ends The time saving state may be ended at the timing (the timing when the symbol confirmation display period has passed), and if the second time saving end condition is satisfied, the second time saving end condition is satisfied. The timing when the figure fluctuation is stopped and displayed, the timing when the stop display ends (the timing when the symbol fixed display period has passed), or the timing when the small winning game based on the small winning winning in which the second time saving end condition is satisfied , the time saving state may be terminated at the timing when the small winning game is terminated. By configuring in this way, by grasping the timing when the time saving state ends, it becomes possible for the player to predict the time saving end condition established this time.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 491(b). The RAM 203 of the second control example differs from the configuration of the RAM 203 of the first control example described above in that a small hit medium flag 203aa and a small hit counter 203ab are added, and the rest is the same. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

The small hit medium flag 203aa is a flag used for determining whether or not the small hit game is currently in progress, and is set to ON when the small hit game is being executed. A detailed description of the specific processing contents is omitted, but in this control example, it is determined that the variation time has elapsed in the special figure variation processing (see S104 in FIG. 426) of the first control example described above (see FIG. S213 of 426: Yes), when it is determined that the current lottery result is not a big win (S216 of FIG. 426; No), a process for determining whether the current lottery result is a small win is added, and the process is performed. When it is determined that the lottery result of this time is a small hit, a control process for starting a small hit game is executed, and a flag indicating that the small hit game is executable (for example, Small hit start flag) is set to ON. Then, in the main processing (see FIG. 434) of the main controller 110 of the first control example described above, a flag (for example, a small winning start flag) indicating that the small winning game is executable is set to ON. To determine periodically (every 4 milliseconds) whether or not it is set, and to execute a small winning game according to a predetermined opening operation rule when it is determined that it is set to ON. While executing the control process of , the flag 203aa during the small hit is set to ON. Then, when the small winning game executed by the control processing for executing the small winning game ends, the small winning medium flag 203aa is set to OFF.

In this control example, the variable winning device 65 is configured to be opened during the small winning game. The distribution device (V role) is configured to be maintained in a distributable arrangement (arrangement that cannot be distributed to the first area), and the ball wins the variable prize winning device 65 during the small winning game. However, it is configured so as not to pass through the first region (V region). As a result, even though the ball passes through the first area (V area) during the period when the variable winning device 65 is open, a situation occurs in which the variable probability state (high probability state of the special symbol) is not awarded. It is restrained.

In addition, in this control example, the winning device opened by the small winning game and the winning device opened by the big winning game are made the same, thereby reducing the number of devices arranged on the game board 13 and reducing the cost. Although reduction is attempted, a winning device dedicated to a small winning game may be provided separately from the variable winning device 65 without being limited to this. In this case, it is better to provide a winning device dedicated to the small winning game (small winning winning device) at a position away from the second winning opening 640 which is the starting condition for the special figure 2 lottery that can win the small winning, for example, If the pachinko machine 10 uses the configuration of the game board 13 that allows the ball to enter the second winning hole 640 by the right-handed game, the ball launched by the left-handed game can flow down (right-handed game It is preferable to arrange a prize winning device for a small hit in an area where it is difficult (impossible) for the ball shot by to flow down. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player who is executing the right-handed game to execute the special figure 2 lottery to notice that the small winning game has been executed. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the trigger that the above-described second time saving end condition is established. Also, in this case, in a part of the case where the result of the special figure 2 lottery is out, it is preferable to configure so that the period (fixed display period) during which the result of the special figure lottery is stopped and displayed is longer. As a result, the period from when the result of the special figure lottery is stopped to when the next special figure lottery is executed can be lengthened. The player determines whether a predetermined period is required until the lottery is executed, or whether a predetermined period is required until the next special figure lottery is executed because the fixed display period is long and the stop display is displayed. can be difficult to grasp.

The small win counter 203ab is a counter for measuring the number of times the small win is won in the special figure 2 lottery and the small win A is set as the small win type, and after the big win game ends, the time reduction end condition selection table 202ad is changed. A value that is referred to as the second time saving end condition is set. Then, when the small hit A is set during the time saving state, the value is subtracted by 1. Then, the value of the small hit counter 203ab after the subtraction is referred to when determining whether or not to end the time saving state, and when the value after the subtraction becomes 0, the control for ending the time saving state is executed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 494 to 498, the electrical configuration of the audio ramp control device 113 in this control example will be described. This control example differs from the above-described first control example in that configurations are added to the ROM 222 and RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 . First, referring to FIG. 494(a), the configuration of the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described. FIG. 494(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the audio ramp control device 113 in this control example. The ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 in this control example is different from the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the above-described first control example in that a dialogue mode related table 222aa and an operation effect switching table 222ab are added. different, otherwise identical. In FIG. 494(a), description of some of the same elements as in the first control example is omitted, but since they have the same elements, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The dialogue mode related table 222aa is a data table for setting the effect mode of the dialogue effect executed when the dialogue mode is set. Here, the dialogue mode set in this control example will be briefly described. The dialogue mode is one of the presentation modes set based on the variation pattern command output from the main controller 110. When the dialogue mode is set, the dialogue mode described above with reference to FIGS. Zone" is displayed, and an effect is executed in which words corresponding to the stop display mode of the third symbol are displayed (output from the audio output device 226).

Next, the detailed contents of the dialogue mode related table 222aa will be described with reference to FIG. First, with reference to FIG. 495(a), the display mode of each symbol that is variably displayed as the third symbol (fused third symbol) when the serif mode is set will be described. FIG. 495(a) is a diagram showing the correspondence between the symbols. As shown in FIG. 495(a), the fusion third pattern is formed in a display mode in which the number mode, which is identification information for indicating the lottery result of the special lottery, and the character mode indicating the character that emits the lines are fused. , and a number mode is attached corresponding to each character mode. The image data of the third fusion pattern is stored in the character ROM of the display control device 114, and the voice lamp control device 113 outputs a display command indicating that the dialog mode is set to the display control device 114. When it does, it is used as the image data indicating the identification information for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol.

In this control example, different character modes are associated with the number modes 1 to 9, and further, the character modes corresponding to the number modes "1 to 4" and "5 to 9" are associated. A fusion third pattern is formed so that the other is separated. Specifically, in the third fusion pattern corresponding to the number mode "1 to 4", the character mode included in the land creature group is set, and in the third fusion pattern corresponding to "5 to 9" , and the character modes included in the sea creature group are set.

Next, referring to FIG. 495(b), the contents of the dialogue mode related table 222aa will be described. FIG. 495(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the dialog mode related table 222aa. As shown in FIG. 495(b), the dialogue mode related table 222aa includes a dialogue state setting table 222aa1 for setting the current degree of progression of dialogue, a character selection table 222aa2 for selecting a character who will give a dialogue, and an actual Each table is referenced to select a fusion third symbol to be stopped and displayed during dialogue mode, and further, each fusion third symbol is It is configured so as to select the type of spoken lines.

First, the contents of the dialogue state setting table 222aa1 will be described with reference to FIG. 495(c). FIG. 495(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the dialogue state setting table 222aa1. This dialog state setting table 222aa1 is based on the history information stored in the stop symbol information storage area 223ac in which the history information of the third merged symbol that is stop-displayed in the state where the dialog mode is set is stored. It is a data table referred to when setting the state, and as shown in FIG. 495(c), each line state is defined based on the information stored in the stop symbol information storage area 223ac. Based on the speech state selected here, the type of the fusion third symbol to be stopped and displayed next and the contents of speech (speech mode) to be displayed (output) during the speech mode are selected.

Next, referring to FIG. 496, the contents of the character selection table 222aa2 will be described. FIG. 496 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the character selection table 222aa2. This character selection table 222aa2 is different characters ( It is configured so that the first stopped left fusion third symbol) is selected.

Next, referring to FIG. 497, the contents of the dialogue selection table 222aa3 will be described. FIG. 497 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the dialogue selection table 222aa3. This dialogue selection table 222aa3 is based on the dialogue state set using the dialogue state setting table 222aa1 and the character selected by the character selection table 222aa2, the types of right fusion third symbol, medium fusion third symbol, And, it is a data table for selecting the contents of the lines (line mode) of each fusion third pattern.

The operation effect switching table 222ab is a data table for switching the effect mode of the variable operation effect to be executed when the variable operation effect is set based on the variation pattern output from the main controller 110 . In this control example, when the variable operation effect is set, after the lever member 10340 (hereinafter referred to as lever member 10340) of the operation device 10300 is moved from the origin position to the operating position (up position), As shown in 484(a), it is configured such that a variable operation effect is executed for causing the player to operate (depress) the lever member 10340 .

However, in a state in which the presentation period (operation valid period) of the variable operation presentation has passed, if the pressing operation is not performed on the lever member 10340, even if the presentation period (operation valid period) of the variable operation presentation has passed. In spite of this, the lever member 10340 remains in the operating position (up position). In this case, a drive means (motor or the like) for variably operating the lever member 10340 is used to move the lever member 10340 from the operating position (up position) to the origin position, and the lever member 10340 is moved to the initial state (origin position). It is possible to return the lever member 10340 to the state before the start of the variable operation effect by executing the return process for positioning the lever member 10340, but if this configuration is used, the effect will be enhanced. Although the lever member 10340 is moved to the operating position for the purpose, the lever member 10340 returns to the initial position without allowing the player to operate the lever member 10340 located at the operating position, so the production effect is reduced. There was a problem that it could not be increased.

On the other hand, in the second control example, when the lever member 10340 is positioned at the operating position after the effect period of the variable operation effect has passed, the normal state (the lever member 10340 is positioned at the initial position It is configured to make it easier to execute a push-down operation rendering for executing a push-down operation on the lever member 10340 than in the state where the lever member 10340 is pressed. That is, in order to execute one variable operation effect, an effect preparation process is executed to move the operating means (lever member 10340) from the first position (origin position) to the second position (operating position). is completed, a variable operation performance for moving the operation means from the second position to the first position is executed for the player, and the player operates the operation means during the variable operation performance. If the operating means (lever member 10340) does not move to the first position (continues to be positioned at the second position), the operating means (lever member 10340) remains at the second position even after the variable operation effect ends. (operating position) (the state in which the effect preparation process is completed) is maintained, and in the state in which the effect preparation process is completed, the above-described push-down operation effect is easily executed. ing.

By configuring in this way, in order to execute one push-down operation effect, it is possible to cause the operation means (lever member 10340) for which the effect preparation process has been executed to execute the push-down operation effect a plurality of times. Therefore, the operation means can be easily moved to the initial position by the player's operation.

Further, in this control example, in the state where the effect preparation process is completed (the state where the operation means is positioned at the operating position), the operation means is located at the second position (operating position), the operating means (lever member 10340) is moved to the first position (origin position) using a driving means (such as a motor) for variably operating the operating means. It is configured to move (execute return processing). By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the pressing operation effect is persistently executed. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the frequency of execution of effects that give dissatisfaction to players who do not want to operate the operating means. Further, in this case, a storage means capable of storing the execution of the return processing is provided, and when the return processing is executed, that is, the state in which the production preparation processing is completed (the state in which the operating means is positioned at the operating position) , when it is stored that a state in which the operation means is positioned at the second position (operating position) appears despite the execution of the predetermined number of times (twice) of the depression operation effects. , the variable operation presentation may be configured to be difficult to execute. As a result, it is possible to provide an effect corresponding to the taste of the player.

Here, with reference to FIG. 498, the contents of the operation effect switching table 222ab will be described. FIG. 498 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the operation effect switching table 222ab. The operation effect switching table 222ab is referred to when switching the effect mode of the variable operation effect to be executed according to the setting conditions of the initial position change flag 223ag, the origin detection flag 223ae, and the operating position detection flag 223af. be.

Specifically, when the initial position switching flag 223ag is off, the origin detection flag 223ae is off, and the operating position detection flag 223af is off, the touch effect (see FIG. 485) is set as the effect mode of the variable operation effect. When the actuation position detection flag 223af is ON, the lever push-up effect (see FIG. 484(b)) is set. When the initial position switching flag 223ag is off and the origin detection flag 223ae is on, the lever depression effect (see FIG. 484(a)) is set regardless of the setting status of the operating position detection flag 223af.

Further, when the initial position switching flag 223ag is on, the origin detection flag 223ae is off, and the operating position detection flag 223af is off, a touch effect is set, and when the operating position detection flag 223af is on, the lever is pushed up. Performance is set. Finally, when the initial position switching flag 223ag is on and the origin detection flag 223ae is on, the lever depression effect is set regardless of the setting status of the operating position detection flag 223af.

Next, with reference to FIG. 494(b), the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the second control example will be described. FIG. 494(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the second control example. As shown in FIG. 494(b), the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the second control example has a special figure fluctuation counter 223aa, Effect mode storage area 223ab, stop pattern information storage area 223ac, character selection counter 223ad, origin detection flag 223ae, operating position detection flag 223af, initial position change flag 223ag, return operation timer 223ah, operation effect in progress flag 223ai, effect standby The difference is that a flag 223aj, an effect information storage area 223ak, a variable operation effective period timer 223am, a second variable time timer 223an, a pressing effect prohibition flag 223ao, and a variable effect priority flag 223ap are added, and the others are the same. As shown in FIG. 494(b), for convenience of explanation, some of the elements of the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 of the first control example are omitted. The RAM 223 of the device 113 has all the elements of the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 of the first control example described above, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The special figure fluctuation number counter 223aa is a counter for measuring the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (special figure), and when the time saving state (normal high probability state of the symbol) is set after the end of the jackpot game, the jackpot game It is for measuring the period until the number of special figure fluctuations to be executed after the end reaches 100 times. In addition, in this control example, when the second time saving end condition is satisfied, the time saving state (high probability state of normal symbol) is before the number of special figure fluctuations to be executed after the end of the jackpot game reaches 100 times. Since it may end, the name and configuration are divided, but the specific contents of the special figure fluctuation number counter 223aa are the same as the time saving guarantee number counter 223g in the first control example described above.

The production mode storage area 223ab is a storage area for storing the production mode set by the background mode production. It is something to remember.

The stop symbol information storage area 223ac is a storage area for storing stop symbol information (type of left symbol, set words) when the dialogue mode is set.

The character selection counter 223ad is a loop counter that is a kind of effect counter, and its value is referred to when setting a character with reference to the character selection table 2222aa2.

The origin detection flag 223ae and the operating position detection flag 223af are flags for indicating the position of the lever member 10340. An origin detection sensor (not shown) detects that the lever member 10340 is positioned at the initial position (origin position). ) is detected, the origin detection flag 223ae is set to ON, and the operating position detection flag 223af is turned ON when an operating position detection sensor (not shown) detects that the lever member 10340 is positioned at the operating position. is set to

When both the origin detection flag 223ae and the operating position detection flag 223af are set to OFF, it is determined that the lever member 10340 is positioned between the initial position and the operating position, and the origin detection flag 223ae , and the operating position detection flag 223af are both set to ON, the detection means (origin detection sensor, operating position detection sensor) for detecting the position of the lever member 10340 malfunctions, or the lever member 10340 malfunctions. Therefore, it is determined to be in an abnormal state.

Although the detailed explanation is omitted, when it is determined that the lever member 10340 is in an abnormal state, the operation performance is produced using the abnormal selection table in which the variable operation production using the lever member 10340 is not selected. The mode is set, and an error command indicating that the lever member 10340 is in an abnormal state is output to the outside.

The initial position change flag 223ag is a flag for changing the initial position of the lever member 10340, and is set to OFF during the normal state in which the initial position of the lever member 10340 is the origin position. Set to ON when the position is the origin position. Depending on the setting state of the initial position change flag 223ag, the effect mode of the variable operation effect is set.

This eliminates the need to repeatedly execute the return process which is executed after the execution period of the operation presentation has elapsed. In addition, it is possible to prevent the operation device 10300 from breaking down by executing the return processing against the force that maintains the operating position.

The return operation timer 223ah is a timer for measuring the elapsed time during the return process for driving the lever member 10340 toward the initial position, and is set to a predetermined value (for example, 5 seconds) when the return process is executed. seconds) is set. The value of the return operation timer 223ah is decremented by the counter updating process (see S3113 in FIG. 502) of the main process 2 (see FIG. 502) of the sound lamp control device 113 which is periodically executed, and the value becomes 0. It is configured so that the return process is executed until Note that the value (time) set in the return operation timer 223af is set to be longer than the time required for one return process, and once the return process is executed, the lever member 10340 is configured to execute recovery processing a plurality of times.

The flag 223ai during operation presentation is a flag for determining whether or not the operation presentation is currently being performed, and is set to ON when the operation presentation is executed, and is set to OFF when the operation presentation is finished. . This control example is configured to be able to set (execute) the operation production at different opportunities, specifically, when setting the production (variation production) corresponding to the special figure fluctuation, In the case of setting an effect (holding effect) based on the winning of a ball in the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 640), the operation effect can be executed.

The effect waiting flag 223aj is a flag for indicating that the operation effect is in an execution standby state, and is set to ON when the execution of the operation effect is to be put on standby. This effect standby flag 223aj is set when the timing at which it is determined that the operation effect can be executed as the pending effect is during the first period of the variable effect and the timing when the operation effect is being executed as the variable effect. set to on.

Then, at the timing of setting the effect mode for the second period of the variable effect, the effect mode is set based on the setting state of the flag.

The performance information storage area 223ak is a storage area for temporarily storing information regarding each performance. Various effects are set using the information stored in the effect information storage area 223ak.

The variable operation effective period timer 223am measures the variable operation effective period for validly determining the operation of the operation means (lever member 10340) executed by the player when the variable operation effect is set as the operation effect. is a timer, when executing a variable operation effect, a value corresponding to the variable operation effect to be executed is set, and the main processing 2 (see FIG. 502) of the audio lamp control device 113 that is periodically executed It is decremented by the counter update process (see S3113 in FIG. 502). Then, the period until it is determined that the value of the variable operation valid period timer 223am becomes 0 is set as the variable operation valid period.

The second variable time timer 223an is a timer for measuring the elapsed period of the variable performance executed corresponding to the special figure variation, and is the timing for setting the performance mode of the second period of the performance period of the variable performance. It is referred to when determining whether or not the point has been reached. In the second variable time timer 223an, the value calculated as the timing for setting the effect mode of the second period in the normal effect setting process (see S4351 in FIG. 513) is set (see S5215 in FIG. 513), It is decremented by the counter updating process (see S3113 in FIG. 502) of the main process 2 (see FIG. 502) of the sound lamp control device 113 which is periodically executed. Then, in the effect update process 2 (see S3151 in FIG. 503), when it is determined that the value is 0 (S3255 in FIG. 503: Yes), the second A period setting process is executed (see S3256 in FIG. 505).

The pressing effect prohibition flag 223ao is a flag for indicating a period for prohibiting the selection of the pressing effect for operating the PUSH button 10317 as a variation effect corresponding to the special figure variation, and the pressing effect is selected. is set to ON during the period of prohibition of

In this control example, as described above with reference to FIGS. 207 to 211, one operation device 10300 has the PUSH button 10317 and the lever member 10340, and by moving the lever member 10340, the PUSH button 10317 is also configured to move together. Therefore, in this control example, during the period in which the return process for moving the lever member 10340 to the initial position is being executed, the pressing effect for causing the player to operate the PUSH button 10317 is not executed.

With this configuration, the PUSH button 10317 moves smoothly in conjunction with the movement of the lever member 10340 when the player is about to press the PUSH button 10317 based on the execution of the pressing effect. It is possible to suppress the problem that the PUSH button 10317 cannot be pressed immediately.

In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from paying attention to the operating device 10300 during the returning process and giving the player a sense of incongruity with the effect due to the pressing effect being executed while the returning process of the lever member 10340 is being executed. can do. In this control example, a configuration is used in which the pressing effect prohibition flag 223ao is set so that the pressing effect is not executed during the return processing of the lever member 10340. It is also possible to configure so that the return processing of the lever member 10340 is not executed while the lever member 10340 is being held.

The variable effect priority flag 223ap gives priority to the variable operation when setting the operation effect (variable operation effect, pressing effect, etc.) for the player to operate the operation means (for example, the lever member 10340, the PUSH button 10317). A flag for indicating a period in which the effect is set, and is set to ON during a period in which the variable operation effect is preferentially set.

This variable effect priority flag 223ap is set to ON when the variable operation effect is completed with the lever member 10340 positioned at the second position (operating position). As a result, when the lever member 10340 is at the second position (operating position), the variable operation performance can be set more easily than when the lever member 10340 is at the initial position (original position). can be done. Further, it is possible to make it difficult to execute other operation effects (for example, pressing effect) while the lever member 10340 is positioned at the second position (operating position).

As described above, in this control example, the operation device 10300 uses the configuration having the PUSH button 10317 and the lever member 10340, and when the lever member 10340 is at the operating position, it is at the initial position. The lever member 10340 is separated from the base of the operation device 10300 more than the case. Since the PUSH button 10317 is provided on the tip side of the lever member 10340 (on the opposite side to the base of the operation device 10300), the PUSH button 10317 is pressed when the lever member 10340 is at the operating position. When the push operation is performed on the PUSH button 10317 while the lever member 10340 is at the initial position, various structures of the operation device 10300 (for example, the lever member 10340 ), which may lead to a failure of the operation device 10300 . On the other hand, in this control example, when the lever member 10340 is in the operating position, the variable operation effect is preferentially selected as the operation effect. The lever member 10340 can be easily moved to the initial position by the player's operation, and failure of the operation device 10300 can be suppressed.

In this control example, when an operation effect is set in a state where the lever member 10340 is positioned at the operating position, the variable operation effect is selected with priority over other operation effects. However, without being limited to this, for example, even if a variable performance is set without setting an operation performance, it may be configured to set a variable operation performance instead of the performance mode of the variable performance. It is sufficient that the variable operation effect is more easily selected when the lever member 10340 is at the operating position than when it is at the initial position. In addition, in addition to the variation performance that is executed in response to the special figure variation, for example, the normal pattern variation performance that is performed in response to the normal pattern variation (normal pattern variation), the big hit game, and the small hit game. In the winning game effect, the variable operation effect may be more easily selected when the lever member 10340 is positioned at the operating position than when it is positioned at the initial position.

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the second control example>
Next, each control process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 in the second control example will be described with reference to flowcharts in FIGS. 499 to 501. FIG. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are assigned to the same control processes as those of the first control example, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 499, the details of the special symbol variation start process 2 (S258) in the second control example will be described. This special symbol variation start process 2 (S258) is a process executed in place of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 427) in the first control example.

Of the special symbol variation start processing 2 (S258) in the second control example, in each processing of S301 to S309, S310 to 313, S315, S318 and S319, the special symbol variation start processing in the first control example (Fig. 427 See), the same processes as the processes of S301 to S309, S310 to S313, S315, S318 and S319 are executed.

In the process of S309, when it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is determined (S309: Yes), the jackpot type is determined based on the jackpot type selection 2 table 202aa (S352), and the process proceeds to S310.

Further, in the process of S313, after the process of S313 is executed, the process of S314 is not executed, and the process of S315 is executed. After executing the process of S315, the processes of S316 and S317 are not executed, but the deviation process is executed (S351), and the process proceeds to S318. Note that the details of the deviation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 500 .

Next, with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 500, the details of the deviation process (S351) in the second control example will be described. This loss time variation process (S351) is a process executed in the special symbol variation start process 2 (see FIG. 499) in the second control example, and the result of the special figure lottery is other than a big hit (off or small hit).

When the change process at the time of loss (S351) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current lottery result is a small win (S371). (S371: No), the display mode at the time of loss is set (S372), the variation pattern at the time of loss is determined (S373), and the process proceeds to S381. Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the lost symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S307, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is compared with the variation pattern table 202d, and the variation pattern (variation pattern) corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 time).

In the processing of S371, when it is determined that the current lottery result is a small hit (S371: Yes), the small hit type is determined based on the small hit type selection 2 table 202ac (S374).

Here, the value of the small hit type counter C6 obtained in the process of S301, compared with the random value stored in the small hit type selection 2 table 202ac (see FIG. 493 (b)), the small hit type set. Specifically, if the value of the small hit type counter C6 is in the range of "0 to 64", the small hit A is set, and if it is in the range of "65 to 99", the small hit B is set.

After finishing the processing of S374, it is next determined whether or not the determined small hit type is the small hit A (S375). If it is determined that the small hit type is not the small hit A (it is the small hit B) (S375: No), the process proceeds to S381. On the other hand, when it is determined that the small hit type is the small hit A (S375: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the small hit counter 203ab (S376), and then the value of the small hit counter 203ab after the addition is 2 (S377).

When it is determined that the value of the small hit counter 203ab after the addition is not 2 (S377: No), the process proceeds to S380. If it is determined that the value of the small hit counter 203ab after addition is 2 (S377: Yes), that is, if it is determined that the second time saving end condition is satisfied by this small hit winning, the time saving state (normal symbol In order to shift the high probability state) to the low probability state, reset the value of the time saving counter 203g to the initial value (S378), set the state command indicating the time saving end (S379), and move to the process of S380 do.

In the processing of S380, a variation pattern (small winning variation pattern) corresponding to the small winning winning this time is determined. Although detailed description is omitted, when a small win is won in the special drawing lottery, the same variation pattern as when a big win is won in the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example described above is set. That is, the variation pattern to be referred to when a big hit is won in the special drawing lottery is determined from the variation pattern selection table 202b. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the variation pattern determined based on the small win winning and the variation pattern determined based on the big win winning the same. Therefore, since the performance mode of the special figure variation performance to be executed based on the determined variation pattern can be made the same, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand whether he or she has won a big win or a small win.

In the processing of S381, a variation pattern command is set for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 of the variation pattern determined in the processing of S373 and S380 (S381). Then, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type is set (S382). These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the process of S1001 of the main process (see FIG. 434) in the first control example, the sound lamp control device 113 sent. When the processing of S382 ends, the process returns to the special symbol variation processing.

Next, details of the jackpot ending process 2 (S1160) in the second control example will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This jackpot end process 2 (S1160) is a process executed instead of the jackpot end process (see FIG. 437) in the first control example.

Of the jackpot end processing 2 (S1160) in the second control example, in each of S1301 to S1302 and S1305, in the jackpot end processing 2 (see FIG. 437) in the first control example S1301 to S1302 and S1305 The same processing as each processing is executed.

After executing the processing of S1301 and S1302, the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is read (S1351), and the presence or absence of time saving state setting is determined based on the read game state and the jackpot type (S1352). Here, in this second control example, as the other memory area 203z of the RAM 203 of the main controller 110, the current game state, the game state at the time of winning (at the time of winning determination by the special drawing lottery), and the winning It has storage means (game state storage means) capable of temporarily storing the game state at the start of the game. Then, in the process of S1351 described above, the process of reading the game state at the time of winning the jackpot from the game state storage means of the other memory area 203z is executed. With this configuration, it is possible to set a new game state based on not only the currently set game state but also the past game state (the game state at the time when the setting condition of the game state is satisfied). Therefore, it is possible to provide a variety of games.

Next, it is determined whether or not there is a time saving state setting (S1353). When it is determined that there is a time saving state setting (S1353: Yes), based on the contents defined in the time saving end condition selection table 202ad, values are set to various counters (S1354), and the game state after the end of the jackpot is set (S1355), and the process proceeds to S1305.

On the other hand, in the process of S1353, when it is determined that there is no time saving state setting (S1353: No), the process of S1354 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1355.

<Regarding control processing of the sound ramp control device in the second control example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 502 to 516. FIG. In the second control example, a process for executing a variable operation effect for operating the lever member 10340, which is a variable operation member, is added to the above-described first control example. and change the processing content for setting the production mode of the variable production to be set when the variation pattern command is received, and can be set when the winning information command is received. In order to change the processing content for setting a pending effect (holding notice effect), and to select the lost child mode to be executed when the latent state or normal state is set in the process of selecting the back mode The difference is that the processing of is added, and the rest is the same. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are assigned to the same control processes as those of the first control example, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, main processing 2 executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 502 is a flow chart showing this main process 2. FIG. This main process 2 is a process executed instead of the main process (see FIG. 441) in the first control example.

Of the main process 2 in the second control example, the processes of S3102 to S3110 and S3116 to S3120 are the same as the processes of S3102 to S3110 and S3116 to S3120 of the main process (see FIG. 441) in the first control example. process is executed.

After executing the process of S3110, the effect update process 2 is executed (S3151). Details of the effect execution process 2 will be described later with reference to FIGS. After executing the process of S3151, the press detection process 2 is executed (S3152). The details of this press detection process 2 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 506 and 507. FIG. After executing the process of S3152, an operation effect management process is executed (S3153). The details of this operation effect management process will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the process of S3153, the variable operating means management process is executed (S3154). The details of this variable operating means management process will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the processing of S3154, command determination processing 2 is executed (S3155). After executing the process of S3155, the variable display setting process 2 is executed (S3156), and the process proceeds to S3116.

Next, the effect update process 2 (S3151) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 503 is a flow chart showing the effect update process 2 (S3151). This effect update process 2 (S3151) is a process that is executed in place of the effect update process (see FIG. 442) in the first control example, sets a value corresponding to the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation, and periodically While determining the progress of the variable production (variable display production) based on the value of the variable time timer 223s that measures the variable time (variable elapsed time, variable remaining period) of the special figure fluctuation by updating the value, variable The process for updating the effect contents of the operation effect and executing the variable effect corresponding to the second period (the second half period of the special figure change being executed) is the effect update process ( 442) is executed.

In addition, the second variable time timer 223an, which measures the period from the start timing of the special figure variation to the setting of the effect mode of the variable effect corresponding to the second period, is updated in the same manner as the above-described variable time timer 223s. is executed, and when the value becomes 0 (when it is determined that it is time to set the effect mode of the second period), the process for setting the effect mode of the second period is executed. are doing.

Of the effect update process 2 (S3151) in the second control example, the processes of S3201 to S3206 are the same as the processes of S3201 to S3206 of the effect update process (see FIG. 442) in the first control example. executed.

In the processing of S3201, when it is determined that the value of the variable time timer 223s is 0, that is, when it is determined that the present is not during the special figure variation (S3201), the process proceeds to S3255.

On the other hand, after executing the process of S3206, the variable operation presentation process is executed (S3251), and the process proceeds to S3252. Details of this variable operation effect processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the processing of S3252, it is determined whether the value of the variable time timer 223s indicates the start timing of the second period (S3252). When it is determined that the value of the variable time timer 223s indicates the second period start timing (S3252: Yes), the information indicating the variable display mode of the second period stored in the effect information storage area 223ak is read. (S3253), based on the read information, set the display variation pattern command (S3254), and proceed to the process of S3255.

Although a detailed description will be given later, in this control example, when a variation pattern command is received, instead of setting the presentation mode of the variation display presentation for the entire period of the variation time included in the variation pattern command, the first half period It is configured to set the effect mode only (first period). Specifically, as described above with reference to FIG. 487, if the received variation pattern command includes information indicating a variation time of 60 seconds (set a variation effect corresponding to the variation time of 60 seconds case), when the variation pattern command is received, the effect period information indicating that the current variation time is 60 seconds, and the effect period is set to the first period (30 seconds) and the second period (30 seconds) Each period information divided into two and the first period effect mode information indicating the effect mode set for the first period are stored in the effect information storage area 223ak. Then, a value corresponding to the second variable time timer 223an is set in order to measure the second period effect mode setting timing (28 seconds after the start of variation) indicating the timing of setting the effect mode corresponding to the second period.

By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to execute the processing for setting the effect mode of the second period effect 28 seconds after the start of the special figure fluctuation. The exercise information storage area 223ak is also configured to store the effect result of the effect executed during the first period (for example, the effect result of the operation effect executed during the first period). The effect mode of the second period effect is set based on various information stored in the effect information storage area 223ak.

As a result, even at a timing different from the timing at which the variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110, it is possible to set the presentation mode of the variation presentation corresponding to the remaining period (second period) of the special figure variation period. . Furthermore, since it is possible to set the second period production based on the information indicating the production result of the production that has already been executed (the production that is executed during the first period), the special figure fluctuation start timing It is possible to make it easier to set a variety of presentation modes than in the case of setting the presentation mode of the variable presentation for the entire period of the figure fluctuation period.

In addition, in this control example, an example is shown in which the special figure fluctuation period is divided into two periods, the first period (first half period) and the second period (second half period). It may be configured such that the game is divided into variable periods, and an effect mode corresponding to each variable period is set before reaching each variable period. Also, in this control example, the arrival timing of the second period (in the example shown in FIG. 487, the timing after 30 seconds have passed since the start of the special figure fluctuation), but the timing before the arrival timing of the second period (in FIG. 487 In the example shown, at the timing of 28 seconds from the start of the special figure fluctuation), the production mode during the second period is set, and once stored in the production information storage area 223ak, at the arrival timing of the second period, By configuring so as to execute a variable effect in the effect mode stored in the effect information storage area 223ak, it is configured to be able to simplify the processing executed at the arrival timing of the second period. Without being limited to , the process for setting the effect mode during the second period may be executed at the arrival timing of the second period. By configuring in this way, the number of processes to be executed at the arrival timing of the second period is increased. Since it can be executed as it is, it is possible to simplify the storage area for storing the information indicating the effect mode of the variable effect.

In the process of S3252, if it is determined that the value of the fluctuation time timer 223s does not indicate the start timing of the second period (in the example of FIG. 487, the timing of 30 seconds from the start of the special figure fluctuation) (S3252: No ), the process of S3253 and S3254 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S3255.

In the process of S3255, it is determined whether the value of the second variable time timer 223an is 0 (S3255). If it is determined that the value of the second variable time timer 223an is not 0 (S3255: No), this process is terminated. When it is determined that the value of the second variable time timer 223an is 0 (S3255: Yes), that is, when it is determined that it is time to set the effect mode of the second period, the second period setting process is executed. (S3256), after which this process is terminated. Details of the second period setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the variable operation presentation process (S3251) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 504 is a flow chart showing this variable operation rendering process (S3251). This variable operation effect process (S3251) is a process executed within the effect update process 2 (FIG. 503) in the second control example.

In this variable operation effect processing (S3251), a process for setting the effect mode of the variable operation effect and a process for ending the variable operation effect are executed. As described with reference to FIGS. 485 and 486, in this control example, the variable operation effects include a push-down operation effect of pushing down the lever member 10340, a push-up effect of pushing up the lever member 10340, and a push-up effect of pushing up the lever member 10340. Alternatively, a touch effect of touching the detection range of the touch sensor can be set. are doing.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress a situation in which a contradiction occurs between the effect mode of the variable operation effect to be executed and the positional state of the lever member 10340 . Specifically, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the pressing operation effect is executed in a state in which the lever member 10340 is already lowered.

In addition, in this control example, for convenience of explanation, a touch effect for not allowing the player to operate the lever member 10340 will be described as part of the variable operation effect. As described above, this touch effect is an operation effect using the touch sensor, and is an operation effect that does not use the lever member 10340 which is a variable operation member. However, since it is an operation effect for creating a state in which the player's hand is away from the lever member 10340 by executing the effect for touching the detection range of the touch sensor, for example, the lever member For the player who continues to hold the 10340, an effect is made to let go of the lever member 10340, which is a variable operating member. Therefore, in a broader sense, it is part of the variable operation effect. That is, in this control example, as the variable operation effect, the variable operation member (lever member 10340) positioned at the second position (operating position) is moved toward the first position (origin position) (Fig. 484(a)) and a push-up operation performance (FIG. 484(b)) that moves the variable operating member (lever member 10340) located at the first position (origin position) toward the second position (origin position). ) and a touch effect (see FIG. 485) for letting go of the variable operation member (lever member 10340).

When the variable operation effect process (S3251) is started, first, it is determined whether or not it is time to start the variable operation effect (S4601). Here, determination is made based on the effect mode information stored in the effect information storage area 223ak and the value of the variable time counter 223s.

In the processing of S4601, if it is determined that the current time is the start timing of the variable operation effect (S4601: Yes), the operation effect switching table 222ab is referred to and the effect mode of the current variable operation effect is set (S4602). A value corresponding to the operation effect period is set to the variable operation effective period timer 223am corresponding to the set effect mode (S4603), the operation effect in progress flag 223ai is set to ON (S4604), and the process proceeds to S4608.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4601, if it is determined that the present timing is not the start timing of the variable operation effect (S4601: No), then it is determined whether the value of the variable operation effective period timer 223am is 0 (S4605). . When it is determined that the value of the variable operation effective period timer 223am is 0 (S4605: Yes), the effect mode indicating the end of the variable operation effect is set (S4606), and the operation effect in progress flag 223ai is set to OFF ( S4607), and shifts to the processing of S4608. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the variable operation effective period timer 223am is not 0 (S4605: No), the processes of S4606 and S4607 are skipped and the process proceeds to S4608.

In the process of S4608, a display command indicating the effect mode set this time is set (S4608), and then this process is terminated. As a result, it is possible to execute an effect corresponding to the start timing and the end timing of the variable operation effect.

Next, the second period setting process (S3256) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in this second control example will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 505 is a flow chart showing this second period setting process (S3256).

This second period setting process (S3256) is a process executed within the effect update process 2 (FIG. 503) in the second control example. In this second period setting process (S3256), a process for setting the effect mode corresponding to the second period (second half period) of the effect period of the variable effect corresponding to the special figure fluctuation being executed is executed. . In addition, when the pending operation effect is on standby (the effect standby flag 223ah is set to ON), processing for setting the effect mode for executing the pending operation effect during the second period is executed. .

When the second period setting process (S3256) is started, first, from the effect information storage area 223ak, information on the special figure fluctuation being executed (information corresponding to various information contained in the corresponding fluctuation pattern command), Information on the effect result of the first period and information on the second period (information indicating the length of the second period) are read out (S4701), and then it is determined whether the effect standby flag 223ah is on (S4702). . If it is determined that the effect standby flag 223ah is not ON (is OFF) (S4702: No), then it is determined whether or not there is additional effect information during the first effect period (S4703). The additional effect information determined in the process of S4703 is the effect executed during the first period (first effect period) when the player presses the operation means (for example, PUSH button 10317, lever member 10340). Like information for indicating the effect result of the effect (for example, special operation effect) in which the effect result is variable based on the executed operation content, the variable effect executed during the first period (first effect period) As the effect mode, the effect that is actually selected (set This indicates information for indicating the presentation mode. This additional effect information is stored in the effect information storage area 223ak as additional effect information when a effect mode is selected based on a selection condition established from among a plurality of effect modes. Stored.

Based on the information stored in the effect information storage area 223ak, when it is determined that there is additional effect information during the first effect period (S4703: Yes), the variable display mode corresponding to the additional effect information is set ( S4705), the process proceeds to S4710. When it is determined that there is no additional effect information during the first effect period (S4703: No), the variable display mode is set based on the information regarding the second period stored in the effect information storage area 223ak (S4704), The process proceeds to S4710.

Thus, in this control example, based on the content of the additional effect information acquired during the first period (first effect period) (stored in the effect information storage area 223ak), the second period (second effect period) Since it is configured so that the production mode can be set, the production mode of the variable production executed in correspondence with the fluctuation time of one special figure fluctuation is divided into a plurality of production periods and set at different timings. , it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel a sense of incongruity when the performance modes set in each performance period are combined. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the production effect in the entire variable production.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4702, if it is determined that the effect standby flag 223ah is ON (S4702: Yes), it is determined whether or not the pending collective change effect is possible during the second effect period (S4706). When it is determined that the pending collective change effect is possible during the second effect period (S4706: Yes), the variable display mode corresponding to the pending collective change effect is set (S4707), and the process proceeds to S4709. If it is determined that the pending collective change effect is not possible during the second effect period (S4706: No), the variable display mode is set based on the information about the second period stored in the effect information storage area 223ak ( S4708), the process proceeds to S4709.

Here, when specifically explaining the processing contents executed in S4706, in this control example, if the special figure fluctuation of this time is the special figure fluctuation that won the jackpot, or the lottery result of the special figure lottery is not out. However, if the variation pattern is a variation pattern with a high expectation of winning a jackpot (for example, a variation pattern in which a long variation time is set), the second half of the special figure variation production (corresponding to the second period) , it is configured to facilitate the execution of a special figure variation performance (for example, super ready-to-win performance) for suggesting to the player that there is a high possibility that the current special figure variation is a big win.

In such a case, that is, when an effect is being executed to make the player interested in the lottery result of the special figure fluctuation being executed, the newly acquired winning information (special figure reservation) By executing the pending production for suggesting the contents in the second half period (second period) of the special figure fluctuation production, the interest in the special figure fluctuation production is weakened, and the production effect is reduced. there were. Therefore, in this control example, it is configured to determine whether or not the pending operation effect is executed based on the information for setting the effect mode of the second period (various information stored in the effect information storage area 223ak). are doing. As a result, it is possible to make it easier to understand the effects (special figure fluctuation effects, pending effects) that the player should pay attention to during the second period. In addition, without being limited to this, it is simply determined whether the length of the second period is longer than the execution period of the pending operation effect (holding batch change effect), and the period during which the pending operation effect can be executed during the second period. can be secured, and as the effect result of the effect executed during the first period, the effect result indicating that the pending operation effect is not to be executed during the second period is displayed (executed ), and the determination may be made based on the determination result.

In addition, despite the processing of S4708 described above, that is, the effect standby flag 223ah is set to ON during the first period, the pending operation effect (holding collective change effect) during the second period cannot be executed. 486(b), the display part of the suggestive character HC1 is stopped in a display mode (a display mode other than "PUSH") that does not cause the operation means to be operated, and the display is stopped. An effect that is changed to an effect mode corresponding to the displayed display mode is executed.

In this control example, as shown in FIG. 486(a), when execution of the pending operation effect is in a standby state, the suggesting character HC1 is displayed, and the effect of rotating the display part of the suggesting character HC1 is executed. It is configured as follows. By rotating and displaying the display part in this way, it is possible to execute an effect that suggests the possibility that the pending operation effect will be executed later, and even if a situation occurs in which the pending operation effect is not executed as described above. , the game can be continued without giving the player a feeling of dissatisfaction.

In the process of S4709, the effect standby flag 223ah is set to OFF (S4709), and the process proceeds to S4710. In the process of S4710, each information set this time is stored in the effect information storage area 223ak (S4710), and then this process is terminated.

Next, the press detection process 2 (S3152) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 506 is a flow chart showing this press detection process 2 (S3152). This press detection process 2 (S3152) is executed in place of the press detection process (see FIG. 447) in the first control example, and is referred to when the PUSH button 10317 is pressed. and the variable operation detection process executed when the lever member 10340 is variably operated.

Of the press detection process 2 (S3152) in the second control example, the processes of S3601 to S3607 are the same as the processes of S3601 to S3607 of the press detection process (see FIG. 447) in the first control example. executed.

If it is determined in the process of S3601 that the push button has not been pressed (S3601: No), the process proceeds to S3653. If it is determined in the process of S3606 that the value of the collective change period timer 223x is 0 (S3606: No), then it is determined whether the value of the other pressing effective period timer is greater than 0 ( S3651). In addition, when it is determined that the value of the pressing effective period timer is greater than 0 (S3651: Yes), an effect mode corresponding to the effect being executed is set (S3652), and then the process proceeds to S3653. Further, when it is determined that the value of the other pressing valid period timer is 0 (S3651: No), the process proceeds to S3653.

In the processing of S3653, it is determined whether or not an operation to the operation means (lever member 10340, touch sensor) used for the variable operation effect is detected (S3653). When it is determined that an operation to the operation means used for the variable operation presentation is detected (S3653: Yes), variable operation detection processing is executed (S3654). Details of this variable operation detection processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

Here, the processing contents of S3653 will be described. As described above, in this control example, the lever member 10340 is configured to be variably operable between the first position (origin position) and the second position (operating position). When a detection sensor (not shown) for detecting that the lever member 10340 is positioned at the first position detects the lever member 10340, the origin detection flag 223ae is set to ON, and the lever A detection sensor (not shown) for detecting that the member 10340 is positioned at the second position is configured so that the operating position detection flag 223af is set to ON when the lever member 10340 is detected. are doing.

Then, after the origin detection flag 223ae, which was on, is turned off, the operating position detection flag 223af, which was on, is turned on, or when the operating position detection flag 223af, which was on, is turned off. , and then the origin detection flag 223ae, which was in the off state, is set to on, it is determined in the process of S3653 that an operation on the lever member 10340 has been detected.

Note that the method of determining that the operation of the lever member 10340 has been detected is not limited to the method of this control example. off state) has been switched, it may be determined that an operation to the lever member 10340 has been detected. When it is determined that the setting state (on state, off state) has been switched, it is determined that the first operation has been performed, and the setting state (on state) of both detection flags (origin detection flag 223ae, operating position detection flag 223af) is determined. , off state) has been switched (when it is determined that an operation has been detected according to the operation detection content in this control example), it is determined that the second operation has been performed, and when the first operation is established , the detection result may differ depending on whether or not the second operation is established. Furthermore, when the above-described second operation is established, the period from when the setting state of one detection flag is switched to when the setting state of the other is switched, that is, the lever member 10340 located at the origin position is moved to the operating position. Alternatively, a different detection result may be obtained based on the period required for moving the lever member 10340 from the operating position to the origin position.

In the process of S3653, if it is determined that the operation for the operation means used for the variable operation presentation is not detected (S3653: No), this process is terminated.

Next, variable operation detection processing (S3654) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 507 is a flow chart showing this variable operation detection process (S3654). This variable operation detection process (S3654) is a process executed within the press detection process 2 (FIG. 506) in the second control example.

When the variable operation detection process (S3654) is started, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the variable operation effective period timer 223am is greater than 0 (S4801). That is, it is determined whether or not the variable operation presentation is currently being executed. If it is determined in the process of S4801 that the value of the variable operation effective period timer 223am is greater than 0 (S4801: Yes), the operating means (lever member 10340, touch sensor) is operated, the effect mode corresponding to the effect being executed is set (S4802), the value of the variable operation effective period timer 223am is reset to 0 (S4803), and then this process is terminated. do.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the variable operation effective period timer 223am is not greater than 0 (it is 0) (S4801: No), then it is determined whether or not the origin detection flag 223ae is on ( S4804). If it is determined that the origin detection flag 223ae is on (S4804: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the initial position change flag 223ag is on (S4805). If it is determined that the initial position change flag 223ag is ON (S4805: Yes), the initial position change flag 223ag is set to OFF (S4806), and the process proceeds to S4807. If it is determined that the initial position change flag 223ag is off (S4805: No), the process of S4806 is skipped and the process proceeds to S4807. In the process of S4807, a lock process is set to fix the variable operating means at the origin position (S4807), and then the process ends.

By executing the above-described processing, when the lever member 10340 that is not at the origin position is moved to the origin position during the period in which the variable operation effective period is not set, the lever member 10340 is moved to the origin position. will be locked with Therefore, even if the lever member 10340 is left in a position other than the origin position while the variable operation effect is being executed, the lever member 10340 is simply moved to the origin position. can be securely locked.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4804 that the origin detection flag 223ae is off (S4804: No), then it is determined whether or not the operating position detection flag 223af is on (S4808). If it is determined that the actuation position detection flag 223af is off (S4808: No), this processing ends. If it is determined that the operating position detection flag 223af is on (S4808: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the initial position change flag 223ag is on (S4809). If it is determined that the initial position change flag 223ag is ON (S4809: Yes), the initial position change flag 223ag is set to OFF (S4810), and then this processing is terminated. If it is determined that the initial position change flag 223ag is off (S4809: No), the process of S4810 is skipped and this process ends.

Next, the operation effect management process (S3153) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 508 is a flow chart showing this operation effect management process (S3153). This operation effect management process (S3153) is a process executed within the main process 2 (FIG. 502) in the second control example, and updates the value of the variable operation effective period timer 223am during the variable operation effect period. process is executed.

When the operation effect management process (S3153) is started, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the variable operation effective period timer 223am is greater than 0 (S4901). If it is determined that the value of the variable operation effective period timer 223am is 0 (S4901: No), this process is terminated. When it is determined that the value of the variable operation effective period timer 223am is greater than 0 (S4901: Yes), the value of the variable operation effective period timer 223am is updated (S4902), and then the updated variable operation effective period timer 223am is set. It is determined whether the value is 0 (S4903). If it is determined that the value of the updated variable operation effective period timer 223am is not 0 (S4903: No), this process is terminated. If it is determined that the value of the updated variable operation effective period timer 223am is 0 (S4903: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the initial position change flag 223ag is ON (S4904). If it is determined that the initial position change flag 223ag is ON (S4904: Yes), the initial return operation scenario is set (S4905), and the return operation timer 223ah is set to a value corresponding to 5 seconds (S4906). ), the pressing effect prohibition flag 223ao is set to ON (S4907), and then this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4904 that the initial position change flag 223ag is off (S4904: No), then it is determined whether or not the origin detection flag 223ae is on (S4908). If it is determined that the origin detection flag 223ae is on (S4908: Yes), this processing is terminated. When it is determined that the origin detection flag 223ae is off (S4908: No), the variable effect priority flag 223ap is set to on (S4909), and then this process is terminated.

Next, the variable operating means management process (S3154) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in this second control example will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 509 is a flowchart showing this variable operating means management processing (S3154). This variable operating means management process (S3154) is a process executed within the main process 2 (FIG. 502) in the second control example.

When the variable operating means management process (S3154) is started, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the return action timer 223ah is greater than 0 (S5001). If it is determined that the value of the return operation timer 223ah is 0 (S5001: No), this process is terminated. If it is determined that the value of the return action timer 223ah is greater than 0 (S5001: Yes), the value of the return action timer 223ah is updated (S5002), and whether the updated value of the return action timer 223ah is 0 It is determined whether or not (S5003). If it is determined that the updated value of the return action timer 223ah is not 0 (S5003: No), the return action corresponding to the value of the return action timer 223ah is set (S5004), and then this process is terminated. .

In the process of S5003, when it is determined that the value of the updated return action timer 223ah is 0 (S5003: Yes), the pressing effect inhibition flag 223ao is set to OFF (S5005), and then the origin detection flag 223ae. is on (S5006). If it is determined that the origin detection flag 223ae is on (S5006: Yes), information indicating that the variable operating means is in the normal position is stored in the effect information storage area 223ak (S5007), and then this process is terminated. do.

If it is determined in the process of S5006 that the origin detection flag 223ae is off (S5006: No), then it is determined whether or not the operating position detection flag 223af is on (S5008). When it is determined that the operating position detection flag 223af is on (S5008: Yes), the initial position change flag 223ag is set on (S5009), and information indicating that the variable operating means is in the opposite position is stored in the performance information. It is stored in the area 223ak (S5010), and then this process is terminated.

In the process of S5008, if it is determined that the operating position detection flag 223af is off (S5008: No), information indicating that the variable operating means is at an unknown position is stored in the effect information storage area 223ak (S5011), After that, this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to the flow chart of FIG. 510, the holding notice lottery process 2 (S4031) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described. FIG. 510 is a flow chart showing this pending notice lottery process 2 (S4031). This pending advance notice lottery process 2 (S4031) is a process that is executed in place of the pending advance notice lottery process (see FIG. 453) in the first control example.

In the processes of S4051 to S4057 and S4060 to S4063 of the holding notice lottery process 2 (S4031) in the second control example, S4051 to S4057 and S4060 of the holding notice lottery process (see FIG. 453) in the first control example The same processing as each processing of S4063 is executed.

In the process of S4057, when it is determined that the pending collective change effect has been executed (S4057: Yes), the execution timing setting process is executed (S4081), and then this process is terminated. The details of this execution timing setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the execution timing setting process (S4081) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 511 is a flow chart showing this execution timing setting process (S4081). This execution timing setting process (S4081) is a process executed within the pending advance notice lottery process 2 (FIG. 510) in the second control example.

When the execution timing setting process (S4081) is started, first, information stored in the effect information storage area 223ak is read out (S5101), and then it is determined whether or not the operation effecting flag 223ai is ON. (S5102). If it is determined that the operation effect in progress flag 223ai is off (S5102: No), then it is determined whether or not it is possible to secure the execution period of the pending batch change effect (S5103). If it is determined that the execution period can be secured (S5103: Yes), the execution of the pending batch change effect is set (S5104), the batch change flag 223p is set to ON (S5105), and then this process ends. do. Also, in the processing of S5103, if it is determined that the execution period of the pending collective change effect cannot be secured (S5103: No), the processing of S5104 and S5105 is skipped, and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S5102, if it is determined that the operation effect in progress flag 223ai is ON (S5102: Yes), then it is determined whether the current variable effect is during the effect of the first period ( S5106). If it is determined that the current variable production is in the production of the first period (S5106: Yes), the production standby flag 223aj is set to ON (S5107), and the display of the pending design mode indicating waiting is set ( S5108), and then the process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S5106, if it is determined that the current variable effect is not in the effect of the first period (S5106: No), then whether or not the current variable effect is in the effect of the second period is determined (S5109), and if it is determined that the current variable effect is not during the effect of the second period (S5109: No), this process is terminated as it is. When it is determined that the current variable effect is during the second period effect (S5109: Yes), the display of the pending symbol mode corresponding to the latest winning information is set (S5110), and then this process is terminated. .

Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 512, the variation effect setting process 2 (S4252) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described. FIG. 512 is a flow chart showing this variable effect setting process 2 (S4252). This variable effect setting process 2 (S4252) is a process executed instead of the variable effect setting process (see FIG. 456) in the first control example.

Of the variable effect setting process 2 (S4252) in the second control example, in each process of S4301 to S4311 and S4313, each of S4301 to S4311 and S4313 of the variable effect setting process (see FIG. 456) in the first control example The same processing as the processing is executed.

In the process of S4311, when it is determined that the current state is the variable probability state (S4311: Yes), the back mode lottery process 2 is executed (S4352), and the process proceeds to S4312. The details of the rear mode lottery process 2 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 515 and 516. FIG.

On the other hand, in the process of S4311, when it is determined that the current state is not the variable probability state (S4311: No), the normal effect setting process is executed (S4351), and the process proceeds to S4313. The details of this normal effect setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 513 and 514. FIG.

Next, the normal effect setting process (S4351) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 513 is a flow chart showing the normal effect setting process (S4351). This normal effect setting process (S4351) is a process executed within the variable effect setting process 2 (FIG. 512) in the second control example.

When the normal effect setting process (S4351) is started, first, it is determined whether or not the current state is the normal state (S5201). If it is determined that the current state is not normal (S5201: No), the process proceeds to S5214. If it is determined that the current state is the normal state (S5201: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the current mode is the dialogue mode (S5202). If it is determined that the dialogue mode is currently on (S5202: Yes), the dialogue mode setting process is executed (S5203), and the process proceeds to S5204. Details of the dialog mode setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of S5202, if it is determined that the dialog mode is not currently in effect (S5202: No), the process of S5203 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S5204.

In the processing of S5204, it is determined whether or not the variation time is 30 seconds or more (S5204). If it is determined that the fluctuation time is not longer than 30 seconds (S5204: No), the fluctuation display mode corresponding to the received fluctuation pattern is set (S5205), and then the process proceeds to S5214. In the process of S5204, if it is determined that the fluctuation time is 30 seconds or more (S5204: Yes), the first period (first half) corresponding to the received fluctuation pattern is extracted (S5206), and then the operation effect is being performed. It is determined whether the flag 223ai is on (S5207). If it is determined that the operation effect flag 223ai is on (S5207: Yes), the variable display mode is set from the effect mode group that does not use the operation effect as the effect mode for the first period (S5208), and then , S5214.

On the other hand, in the processing of S5207, if it is determined that the operation effect in progress flag 223ai is off (S5207: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an operation effect in the set effect mode (S5210). If it is determined that there is an operation effect in the set effect mode (S5210: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the variable effect priority flag 223ap is ON (S5211). When it is determined that the variable effect priority flag 223ap is ON (S5211: Yes), the variable operation effect is set as the operation effect (S5212), the variable effect priority flag 223ap is set to OFF (S5213), and the processing of S5214 Move to

Also, in the process of S5210, if it is determined that there is no operation effect in the set effect mode (S5210: No), and if it is determined in the process of S5211 that the variable effect priority flag 223ap is off (S5211: No ), the process proceeds to S5214.

In the processing of S5214, a value obtained by subtracting 2 seconds from the number of seconds corresponding to the first period is calculated (S5214), and the data value corresponding to the calculated value is set in the second variable time timer 223an (S5215). Each of the set information is stored in the effect information storage area 223ak (S5216), and then this process is terminated.

Next, the dialogue mode setting process (S5203) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 514 is a flow chart showing the dialogue mode setting process (S5203). This dialogue mode setting process (S5203) is a process executed within the normal effect setting process (FIG. 513) in the second control example.

When the dialog mode setting process (S5203) is started, first, the information stored in the stop symbol information storage area 223ac is read (S5301), and it is determined whether or not the second stop symbol information is stored ( S5302). If it is determined that there is no memory for the second stop pattern information (S5302: No), the stop character and lines corresponding to the lottery result are randomly selected, and the effect mode of the line effect is set (S5303), followed by S5306. Go to processing.

In the process of S5302, if it is determined that the second stop symbol information is stored (S5302: Yes), the dialogue state is set based on the dialogue state setting table 222aa1 (S5304), and the set dialogue state and Based on the determination result, the character selection table 222aa2 is referred to select a stop character (S5305), and the process proceeds to S5306.

In the process of S5306, the dialogue selection table 222aa3 is referenced to set the effect mode of the current dialogue effect (S5306), the information stored in the stop symbol information storage area 223ac is shifted by one (S5307), The set effect mode is stored in the previous memory area (S5308), and then this process is terminated.

Next, the back mode lottery process 2 (S4362) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 515 is a flow chart showing the rear mode lottery process 2 (S4362). This background mode lottery process 2 (S4362) is a process executed instead of the background mode lottery process (see FIG. 458) in the first control example.

In the processes of S4501 to S4504 and S4506 to S4511 of the rear face mode lottery process 2 (S4362) in the second control example, S4501 to S4504 and S4506 of the rear face mode lottery process (see FIG. 458) in the first control example, respectively. The same processing as each processing of S4511 is executed.

In the process of S4504, when it is determined that the current game state is not the variable probability state (S4504: No), the back mode setting process is executed after the time saving ends (S4551), and the process proceeds to S4510. The details of the rear face mode setting process after the end of the time saving will be described later with reference to FIG. 516 .

Next, with reference to the flow chart of Drawing 516, back mode setting processing (S4551) after the end of time saving performed by MPU221 in sound lamp control device 113 in this 2nd example of control is explained. FIG. 516 is a flow chart showing the back mode setting process (S4551) after the end of the time saving. The rear mode setting process after the time saving (S4551) is a process executed in the rear mode lottery process 2 (FIG. 515) in the second control example.

When the back mode setting process (S4551) is started after the end of time saving, first, it is determined whether the current game state is the normal state or the latent state (S4561). When it is determined that the current game state is the normal state or the latent state (S4561: Yes), the back mode corresponding to the lost child mode is determined (S4562), and then this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4561, if it is determined that the current game state is not the normal state or the latent state (S4561: No), the table for falling and the value of the effect lottery counter are referred to, and the back mode is selected (S4563), and then the process ends.

<Regarding the first modification of the second control example>
Next, a first modification of the second control example will be described. In the second control example described above, while the operation effect (special figure operation effect) for operating the operation means in the special figure fluctuation effect is being executed, the operation effect for operating the operation means as a pending effect When an execution condition for executing (suspended operation effect) is satisfied, the execution timing of each operation effect is configured so as not to overlap. On the other hand, in the first modification, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with game environment adjusting means capable of adjusting the volume level output from the audio output device 226, the brightness of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, etc. and the display of the third pattern display device 81, and the operation means for adjustment by the player (for example, the first button (for example, a button composed of an up arrow button and a down arrow button) that allows the player to select the operation content By operating a second button (for example, a button with menu/decision displayed on the pressing surface of the button) that is operated when displaying a menu screen on the screen or determining the selection content, the player can It is configured so that the game environment can be set according to the preferences of the player.

Here, to briefly explain the method of adjusting the game environment, when the above-described second button is pressed while the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, a portion of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 displays, A menu screen for adjusting the game environment is displayed. The menu screen includes a volume adjustment display mode for adjusting the volume level, a light amount adjustment display mode for adjusting the brightness, a game information display mode for checking the game information of the pachinko machine 10, and a menu screen. is displayed, and an arbitrary display mode is selected by operating the above-described first button, and when the second button is pressed, the corresponding screen is displayed.

When the first button is operated to select the volume adjustment display mode and the second button is pressed, the volume adjustment screen is displayed. A volume indicator indicating the volume of the pachinko machine 10 in stages is displayed on the volume adjustment screen, and the volume level of the pachinko machine 10 can be variably operated by operating the first button to vary the volume indicator. It is configured. In this case, each time the first button is operated to change the volume indicator, the demonstration voice (for example, the words of the character 801) is output at a volume corresponding to the selected volume level. As a result, the player can easily grasp how much the sound volume corresponds to the currently selected sound volume level. Then, by operating the second button while the volume adjustment screen is displayed, the currently selected volume level is determined, and the volume adjustment is completed.

When the second button is pressed with the light amount display mode selected, the light amount adjustment screen is displayed. On this light amount adjustment screen, a light amount indicator showing stepwise the brightness (light amount) of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 is displayed. It is configured so that the amount of light can be adjusted based on the operation content of the button. Based on the amount of light determined here, the brightness of the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 (specifically, the brightness of the backlight for illuminating the display surface of the liquid crystal display constituting the third pattern display device 81 ) can be adjusted.

Furthermore, when the second button is pressed with the game state display mode selected, the game characteristics of the pachinko machine 10 and the past game history are displayed.

In the state where the second button is operated in this way and the menu screen is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the special symbol reserve obtained based on the special symbol variation effect and the special symbol start winning prize is displayed. The pending effect based on is in a state where it is difficult to see. Furthermore, since it is necessary to provide a plurality of operation means in the limited space of the pachinko machine 10, the operation means (lever member 10340, PUSH button 10317) used in each control example described above and the game environment are adjusted. Therefore, it is necessary to arrange the adjustment operation means (first button, second button) in the vicinity.

Therefore, during the adjustment of the game environment (during the operation of the first button and the second button), a special figure operation effect is executed as a special symbol variation effect, or a pending operation effect is executed as a pending effect. If so, there is a problem that the operation means is erroneously operated instead of the adjustment operation means when adjusting the game environment, and an unintended effect is executed.

On the other hand, in the first modified example, as in the second control example described above, the execution condition for executing the operation effect (special figure operation effect, pending operation effect) for operating the operation means is established. If so, determine whether it is during the period during which the adjustment operation means is operated (the period during which the menu screen is displayed), and if it is determined that it is the period during which the adjustment operation means is operated, wait for the execution of the operation effect. It is configured as follows.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which different operation means are operated at the same time, so that it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand. Furthermore, in a state in which the standby effect is executed and the suggestion character HC1 (see FIG. 486(a)) is displayed to suggest that the execution of the operation effect is on standby, the player can adjust the game environment. When the first button is operated, the speed of rotation of the display portion of the suggestive character HC1 increases, and the display is rotated at high speed.

As a result, when the standby effect is being executed while the game environment is being adjusted, when the adjusting operation means is operated to adjust the game environment, the display content suggested by the effect mode of the standby effect is displayed. can be obfuscated. Specifically, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the character "PUSH" that prompts the player to operate the operation means displayed on the display portion of the suggestion character HC1. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player who recognizes the character "PUSH" rotated and displayed by the suggestive character HC1 from erroneously operating the operation means or the adjustment operation means.

On the other hand, when the operation effect using the operation means is being executed, the effective period during which the operation to the second button can be effectively determined is not set. Even if the second button is operated by mistake, the menu screen is not displayed. Thus, by arranging the adjusting operation means in the vicinity of the operation means, when the second button is erroneously operated during the operation performance, the menu screen is displayed to suppress the situation that the performance effect is remarkably lowered. can be done.

It should be noted that, without being limited to the configuration of the first modified example, even when the first button or the second button is operated during the period during which the operation effect is being executed, the operating means (lever member 10340, PUSH button 10317) may be configured to execute the same effect as when the button 10317) is operated. A configuration may be used in which a physical restriction is provided so that the player cannot press the 2 button.

<Regarding the second modification of the second control example>
Next, a second modification of the second control example will be described. In the second control example described above, while the operation effect (special figure operation effect) for operating the operation means in the special figure fluctuation effect is being executed, the operation effect for operating the operation means as a pending effect When the execution condition for executing (suspended operation effect) is satisfied, by configuring so that the execution timing of each operation effect does not overlap, a game that is difficult for the player to understand, that is, one operation effect (for example, In spite of operating the operation means for the special operation performance), the performance mode of the other operation performance (for example, the pending operation performance) is changed based on the operation of the operation means. was configured to On the other hand, in this second modification, the operation effect (special figure operation effect) for operating the operating means in the special figure fluctuation effect (special figure operation effect) and the operation effect (suspended operation ) and are executed (operation valid periods set for each operation effect overlap), by setting a special operation effect mode, an operation effect that is easy for the player to understand is provided. configured to be executable. Specifically, it is configured so as to be able to execute a fusion operation effect in which the special figure operation effect and the pending operation effect are fused.

This fusion operation effect is an operation in which the effect mode for indicating the effect result of the special operation effect or the effect result of the pending operation effect is set as the effect mode of the effect executed based on the operation of the operation means. It is an effect, specifically, for example, a special figure operation effect in which an operation valid period that can effectively determine the operation for the operation means is set in 10 seconds from 5 seconds to 15 seconds after the start of the special figure fluctuation , in a state in which an operation effect (so-called continuous hit effect) is set to vary the effect mode based on the number of times the player operates the operation means, the effect mode ( When the execution condition of the holding operation effect that changes the display mode of the holding pattern is established, the fusion operation effect set to 10 seconds, which is the operation effective period of the special figure operation effect, is executed.

And while the fusion operation effect is being executed, the final effect result (the effect result of the special operation effect and the effect result of the pending operation effect) is configured to be displayed at the timing when the operation effective period has elapsed. Each time the player operates the operation means during the valid operation period, an effect is executed to gradually change the effect mode of the special figure operation effect and the effect mode of the pending operation effect.

In other words, unlike the pending operation effect described above, the effect result is displayed by combining the operation effect, which is set so that the effect result is displayed based on a single operation. The content of the operation to the operation means required until is made different, and the effect result is notified with the lapse of a specific effect period (operation effective period).

In this way, when the execution timings of a plurality of operation effects with different display conditions (operation conditions) for displaying the effect results of the operation effects overlap, the display conditions (operation conditions) of the overlapping operation effects are specified. By executing the fusion operation effect corrected so that when the operation effect is executed redundantly, the operation effect on the unintended side displays the effect result first, and the effect is difficult for the player to understand. It is possible to suppress the provision of

Further, in the above example, when the execution timings of a plurality of operation effects with different display conditions (operation conditions) for displaying the effect results of the operation effects overlap, the specific conditions are set so that the display conditions are difficult to be established. configured to set. As a result, the period during which the fusion operation performance is executed can be made longer than the period during which the single operation performance is executed, so that the player can easily recognize that the fusion operation performance is being executed. can.

Furthermore, in the above-described example, the operation valid period set for the combined operation effect is configured to be the same as the operation valid period set for any one of the overlapping operation effects. As a result, it is possible to execute the fusion operation effect without newly setting the operation valid period exclusively for the fusion operation effect, so that the processing load of the sound lamp control device 113 can be reduced. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to this, and may be configured to set an operation effective period dedicated to the combined operation presentation.

A detailed description will be given of the effect contents of the fusion operation effect described above. In other words, the effect in which the special figure operation effect and the pending operation effect are respectively executed is executed. Then, an operation suggestion mode that suggests the operation contents of the operation means for each operation effect, and an effect mode that is set when an operation is performed on the operation means, are compared with the case where each operation effect is executed alone. are configured differently.

Specifically, when the fusion operation effect is executed, the third symbol display device 81 displays a comment "set operation start" as a display mode indicating that the fusion operation effect is executed for the player. Along with being displayed on the screen, one display mode for operating the operation means (for example, PUSH button 10317) is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81.

Then, when the player operates (presses) the operation means (PUSH button 10317) during the operation valid period of the fusion operation effect, the operation content of this time is determined by the operation determination means, and which effect mode is selected from the fusion operation effect. to be variable. Then, the effect mode of the operation effect that is the object of the effect mode to be varied is varied. In this case, for example, like the pending operation effect described above, when it is executed alone, a display mode showing the effect result of the pending operation effect by one operation (for example, the color of the pending symbol is changed from blue to red and variable display mode) is displayed, the currently displayed display mode (blue An effect is executed in which the reserved pattern) is changed to a display mode (for example, a blue cracked reserved pattern) different from the display mode (red reserved pattern) indicating the effect result of the pending operation effect.

As a result, it is possible to inform the player that the holding operation performance is being executed as part of the integrated operation performance, and to delay the period until the presentation result of the holding operation performance is displayed. Therefore, it is possible for the player to operate the operation means willingly until the fusion operation effect is completed. In this case, if the effect of the operation effect to be executed is a effect that changes a specific display mode step by step, the display mode showing the current stage, the display mode of the stage indicated by the effect result, It is preferable that the display mode of the stage positioned between is displayed during the fusion operation presentation. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting the effect result of the fusion operation effect.

In addition, while the fusion operation effect is being executed, a notification means (for example, a third symbol It is preferable to provide notification by bringing the position of the operating means displayed on the display screen of the display device 81 closer to any of the effect positions of the plurality of operation effects being executed. As a result, it is possible to provide an effect that is easy for the player to understand. In addition, in this modification, when the fusion operation effect is executed, only one operation means is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, but this is not the only option. The number of operation means corresponding to the number of operation effects may be displayed, and the corresponding operation means may be alternately displayed as the notification means described above.

Furthermore, in the second modified example described above, an example in which two operation effects are merged as a fusion operation effect has been described. good. Also, by using the configuration of the second control example and the configuration of the second modified example described above, a waiting period after the condition for executing the operation effect is satisfied is set for one or both of them. However, after adjusting the execution period so that a plurality of operation effects are executed at the same time, the combined operation effect may be executed.

<Regarding the third modification of the second control example>
Next, a third modified example of the above-described second control example will be described. In the second control example described above, a lever member 10340 that can move between a first position (origin position) and a second position (operating position) is provided as the variable operation means, and the lever member 10340 is used when executing the variable operation effect. 10340 so as to vary the presentation mode of the variable operation presentation in accordance with the positional state of the lever member 10340, so that there is no difference between the presentation contents of the variable operation presentation and the operation contents that can actually be executed with respect to the lever member 10340. It consisted of Then, regardless of the operation of the player, the lever member 10340, which is not located at the first position (origin position), is returned to the first position (origin position) by using the drive motor as return control. I used a moving configuration. In addition, in order to prevent the player from operating the lever member 10340 positioned at the first position (origin position) (operation to move it toward the second position direction) except for the period during which the variable operation effect is being executed. By using the locking configuration of (1), the lever member 10340 positioned at the first position (original position) is prevented from being unnecessarily moved.

However, in the configuration of the second control example described above, the lever member 10340 positioned at a position other than the first position (for example, the second position or an intermediate position between the first position and the second position) is always operated by the player. Therefore, there remains a possibility that the lever member 10340 is moved unnecessarily.

On the other hand, in the present third modification, an urging means (e.g., a spring member) that always applies an urging force in the direction of the first position is provided to the lever member 10340, The positioned lever member 10340 is configured to always move toward the first position. Further, it has a second locking structure for maintaining the position when the lever member 10340 is positioned at the second position.

In the third modification configured in this manner, the lever member 10340 can be maintained at either the first position or the second position, and can be held at an intermediate position between the first position and the second position. Since the lever member 10340 positioned at the position is moved to the first position by the biasing means, it is possible to prevent the lever member 10340 from being positioned at the intermediate position without being held by the player. .

In the third modified example configured as described above, when the player grips the lever member 10340 and determines that the lever member 10340 is positioned at the intermediate position (that is, the origin detection flag 223ae and the operating position detection flag 223af are When it is determined that both are set to OFF), an effect (touch effect) for letting the player release the lever member 10340 is executed. Then, when the player releases the lever member 10340 based on the touch effect, the lever member 10340 is moved to the first position (original position) by the action of the biasing means.

As described above, in the third modification, when the player grips the lever member 10340 to move the lever member 10340 located at the intermediate position to the first position, the player's hand is It is only necessary to execute an effect (for example, a touch effect) for making it easier to move away from the lever member 10340, and unlike the second control example described above, there is no need to execute return operation control in accordance with the touch effect. The configuration for moving the member 10340 to the first position can be simplified.

In addition, in the third modified example, as means for moving the lever member 10340 toward the first position, first moving means using driving means (driving motor) and second moving means using biasing means are used. means, and the moving speed for moving the lever member 10340 is made different between the first moving means and the second moving means. Specifically, the first moving means is configured to move faster than the second moving means.

As a result, for example, when the timing for executing the variable operation effect using the lever member 10340 is already set and the lever member 10340 must be moved to the first position within a predetermined period of time, the touch effect is executed. Along with the execution, if the lever member 10340 is configured to move to the first position using the first moving means, and the timing for executing the variable operation effect using the lever member 10340 is not set, i.e. If there is no limitation on the period until the lever member 10340 is moved to the first position, the second moving means can be used to move the lever member 10340 to the first position. . By varying the speed at which the lever member 10340 is moved according to the situation, it is possible to prevent the lever member 10340 from being loaded more than necessary.

Note that, as in the second control example and the third modification described above, the first position is controlled by using the variable operation means configured to be movable between the first position and the second position based on the player's operation. A first variable operation effect of moving the variable operation means from the second position toward the second position, and a second variable operation effect of moving the variable operation means from the second position toward the first position. Further, in a pachinko machine 10 configured to be able to execute movement control for moving the variable operation means to the first position or the second position without being based on the player's operation, a second variable operation effect is executed, While the player is performing the operation of moving the variable operating means toward the first position, the variable operating means is moved toward the first position using the first moving means, the second moving means, or the like. A case and a case in which the first moving means, the second moving means, etc. are not used may be provided.

With this configuration, when the player operates the variable operating means, it is possible to vary the force (pushing force) applied by the player to the variable operating means. Therefore, the performance effect can be enhanced by making the player's operational feeling different when the variable operation means is moved in the same direction as the variable operation performance. In this case, it is preferable to vary the force (pressing force) applied by the player to the variable operation means according to the effect result of the variable operation effect. In addition, when executing the above-described first variable operation effect, the force applied by the player to the variable operation means ( It may be configured such that the push-up force) is variable.

As described above, in the second control example, in the state where the high probability state of the normal design is set (probability variable state, time saving state), the normal design based on winning a small hit in the special drawing lottery is configured to shift from the high-probability state to the low-probability state. In other words, as a condition (time saving end condition) for shifting the high probability state of the normal pattern to the low probability state, the first time saving end condition (special figure fluctuation number 100 times) also provided in the above-described first control example In addition to reaching), the second time-saving end condition (small hit winning) is provided. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the timing of shifting the high probability state of the normal symbol to the low probability state.

In this control example, if a plurality of small hit types (small hit A, small hit B) are provided when a small hit is won, and the set small hit type is a specific small hit type (small hit A) In addition, it is configured so that the above-described second time-saving end condition is satisfied. By configuring in this way, the high probability state of the normal pattern shifts to the low probability state only when a specific small winning type is won, so the high probability state of the normal design ends based on the small winning. It is possible to set the case where it is executed and the case where it is not ended. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the timing of shifting the high probability state of the normal symbol to the low probability state.

Furthermore, this control example, like the first control example described above, is configured to shift the high probability state of the normal symbol to the low probability state at the start timing of the special figure fluctuation, based on the small winning Even when the high-probability state of the normal design is shifted to the low-probability state, the high-probability state of the normal design is shifted to the low-probability state at the start timing of the special pattern variation. In this way, by making the timing of ending the high probability state of the normal symbols the same regardless of the occasion for ending the high probability state of the normal symbols, the high probability state of the normal symbols is ended for the player. It can be difficult to understand what the trigger is.

Furthermore, in this control example, when a predetermined number of times (twice) is won in a specific small hit type (small hit A), the above-described second time saving end condition is established. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the timing of shifting the high probability state of the normal symbol to the low probability state.

In addition, in this control example, when the above-described first time saving end condition or second time saving end condition is established, the high probability state of the normal symbol is configured to shift to the low probability state, Without being limited to this, for example, when both the first time saving end condition and the second time saving end condition are satisfied, the high probability state of the normal symbol may be shifted to the low probability state. Also, the order of establishment of the first time saving end condition and the second time saving end condition may be defined, for example, after the first time saving end condition is met, when the second time saving end condition is met, the normal symbol The high probability state may be changed to the low probability state.

In addition, in this control example, when the second time-saving end condition is established based on winning a small hit in the special drawing lottery, it is configured to shift the high probability state of the normal pattern to the low probability state. However, without being limited to this, for example, it may be configured to shift the high probability state of the special symbol to the low probability state based on winning a small hit in the special symbol lottery. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the timing at which the high probability state of the special symbols shifts to the low probability state.

In the above-described second control example, it is configured so that the second time-saving end condition is established when a specific small hit (small hit A) is elected a predetermined number of times (twice), but the high probability state of normal symbols is set, a suggestive performance suggesting that a specific small win (small win A) in which the second time-saving end condition can be established may be configured to be executable, and the suggestive performance to be executed. If the number of times you win a specific small hit (small hit A) where the second time saving end condition can be satisfied is less than the number of winning times when the second time saving end condition is satisfied It should be configured so that it can be changed.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to predict the period until the second time saving end condition is satisfied in the state where the high probability state of the normal symbol is set. In addition, the above-mentioned suggestive effect may be executed during the variable display of special symbols to indicate that a specific small win (small win A) has been won, or a specific small win (small win A) has been won. It may be executed at the timing when the special symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) in a display mode indicating that it has been done, or it may be executed during a small winning game corresponding to a specific small winning (small winning A), It may be executed during the variation of the special symbols after the small winning game corresponding to the specific small winning (small winning A) is finished.

In addition, a variable time that cannot be set in other lottery results is provided as a variable time of special symbols that can be set when a specific small win (small win A) is won, and the game is played according to the length of the variable time of the special symbols. It may be configured to suggest to the player that he or she has won a specific small win (small win A). Further, as the fluctuation time of the next special pattern that wins a specific small win (small prize A), a fluctuation time that cannot be set in other lottery results is provided, and the length of the special pattern fluctuation time is specified by the player. It may be configured to suggest that a small win (small win A) has been won.

In the above-described second control example, a variable operating means (lever member 10340) capable of moving between a first position (origin position) and a second position (operating position) is provided, and a variable operating means using the variable operating means is provided. It is configured to be able to execute the operation presentation. Then, after executing control (performance preparation control) to move the variable operation means from the first position to the second position using an electric drive means (driving motor, etc.), the variable operation means is applied to the player. It is configured to be able to execute a variable operation effect of moving in the direction of the first position.

By using the variable operation effect in this way, it is possible to execute an effect that greatly displaces the operating means for the player, so that a powerful effect can be provided to the player. Further, since the variable operation means can be moved in the direction of the first position by the operation of the player, the processing for returning the variable operation means to the first position (origin position) after execution of the variable operation effect is omitted. can be made easier.

A position determining means for determining the position of the variable operating means at the timing when the execution period of the variable operation effect has passed is provided, and the determination result of the position determining means determines that the variable operating means is not positioned at the first position. In this case, it is configured to facilitate the execution of the variable operation effect.

As a result, the variable operation means can be easily returned to the first position by the player's operation on the variable operation means. Note that if it is determined that the variable operation means is not positioned at the first position even though the variable operation effect has been executed a predetermined number of times during the period in which the state that facilitates execution of the variable operation effect is set. , an electric drive source (driving motor) is used to execute a return process for returning the variable operating means to the first position.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent a player who does not want to operate the variable operation means from being reduced in motivation to play due to excessive execution of the variable operation effect. Furthermore, in the second control example, in order to make it easier for the player to execute the above-described return processing while releasing the variable operation means, a control for operating the operation means (touch sensor) other than the variable operation means is performed. It is configured to execute a touch effect.

As a result, the return processing can be executed while the player is operating the touch sensor, so that it is difficult for the player to understand that the return processing has been executed. In addition, it is possible to prevent the return processing from being performed while the player is holding the variable operation means, and the variable operation means being subjected to an excessive load and being damaged.

In addition, in the above-described second control example, the lever member 10340 that can move between the first position and the second position is used as the variable operating means, but the configuration of the variable operating means is not limited to this. It may be configured to be movable between the first position, the second position, and a further different third position, or it may be moved to the third position only after being moved from the first position to the second position. configuration. Further, a configuration in which the pressing operation and the moving operation are combined may be employed. For example, a configuration may be employed in which pressing of a predetermined pressing portion enables movement between the first position and the second position.

In addition, as a drive control of the electric drive source (drive motor) for the variable operation means, the variable operation means is It may be possible to execute a return-to-origin process to move the variable operation means to the origin position, or when a specific effect is being executed, an electric drive source (driving motor) is used to lock the variable operation means so that it does not move. It may be controlled and executed. Further, as lock control for restricting the movement of the variable operating means, a stopper (for example, a pin that is protruded by driving a solenoid) may be provided in the movement path of the variable operating means.

In each of the above control examples, each time the value (N) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d in the main controller 110 is updated (that is, each time it increases or decreases), the reserved ball number command is issued. Although the case of transmitting from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp controller 113 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, only when the value (N) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d in the main controller 110 increases, the main controller 110 transmits the reserved number command to the sound lamp controller 113 . In addition, in the voice lamp control device 113, when receiving the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110, it is configured to decrease the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b by one. As a result, the number of times master controller 110 transmits a hold number command to audible lamp controller 113 and the number of times audible lamp controller 113 receives a hold number command can be reduced. The control load of the audio ramp control device 113 can be reduced.

In each of the above control examples, winning into the first ball entrance 64 and passing through the through gate 67 are each suspended up to four times, but the maximum number of suspended balls is limited to four. Instead, it may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, the number of pending balls in the variable display based on the winning to the first ball entrance 64 is displayed numerically in a part of the third pattern display device 81, or the area divided into four is displayed by the number of pending balls. It may be displayed in a different manner (for example, color or lighting pattern), and a light-emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first pattern display device 37, and the number of reserved balls is notified by the light-emitting member. can be configured to

Further, as shown in each of the above control examples, the variable display, which is a type of dynamic display, is not limited to vertically scrolling the pattern as identification information on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81. The pattern may be moved and displayed in the vertical direction or along a predetermined path such as an L-shape. Further, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the variable display of the pattern. It also includes the production display etc. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

In each control example described above, the third symbol display for showing the lottery result of each symbol to the player is executed by one display means (third symbol display device 81), but other configurations are used. For example, among the third symbols, different display means may be provided for displaying the main symbol to be displayed in an emphasized manner to the player and for displaying the sub-symbols. Also, as the configuration of the display means, a configuration other than the liquid crystal display may be used.

In each control example described above, a right-handed game aiming at the right side area of the game board 13 is executed in the case of the game state (time saving state) that is advantageous to the player, and in the case of the normal game state, the left side area of the game board 13 However, it suffices if the target area of the game board 13 is changed according to the game state, and the left-handed game is executed during the time-saving state, and during the normal state. may be caused to execute a right-handed game. Also, it may be possible to execute games in different game states while aiming at the same area.

In each of the control examples described above, the frame button 22 is used as the operation means that can be operated by the player. may be used, an operation means configured in a lever shape that can determine that the player has operated it by tilting it left or right or back and forth, or that can determine that it has been operated by the player touching or approaching It is also possible to use a touch sensor type operation means that can be used, or a wireless operation means that can determine that an operation has been performed by transmitting a predetermined radio wave. In addition, each of the movable valve 750, storage device (first storage device 770, second storage device 771), second frame button (release button) 22b (1022b, 1122b), and third frame button (release button) 22c A part or all of the operation control may be performed by the sound lamp control device 113 instead of the main control device 110 .

In each control example described above, the sound lamp control device 113 performs processing for setting the display mode in the effect executed using the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the game (lottery) itself is the sound lamp Although it is configured to be executed by the main control device 110 different from the control device 113, the processing for executing the game (lottery) and the result of the game (lottery) are displayed as effects without being limited to this. It may be configured such that the processing for and the processing are executed by the same control device. By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to execute a plurality of different processes with one control device.

The present invention may be applied to a different type of pachinko machine or the like from the above embodiments. For example, once the jackpot hits, the expected value of the jackpot is increased until the jackpot state occurs multiple times (for example, 2 times, 3 times) including the pachinko machine (commonly known as 2 times rights product, 3 times rights product) may be implemented as Further, after the big winning pattern is displayed, the pachinko machine may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the ball enters a predetermined area. Also, a pachinko machine having a prize winning device having a special area such as a V-zone and entering a special game state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area may be implemented. In addition, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine in which a plurality of combinations of probabilities (commonly referred to as settings) relating to the jackpot lottery are provided, and the settings can be changed on the gaming parlor side. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, various game machines such as arepachi, mammoth, slot machines, and so-called game machines in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are combined may be implemented.

In addition, as a pachinko machine with multiple stages of settings, the combination of jackpot probability (a combination of the jackpot probability in the low probability state and the jackpot probability in the variable probability state) can be set in multiple stages (for example, 6 stages) can be set as a representative example, but is not limited to this. In place of or in addition to combinations of jackpot probabilities, for example, a pachinko machine capable of varying the ratio of each jackpot pattern (each jackpot type) determined in the event of a jackpot according to settings. may That is, depending on the setting, the rate at which a jackpot type advantageous to the player is determined may be varied, or the rate at which a jackpot type disadvantageous to the player is determined may be varied. More specifically, for example, the ratio of determining the jackpot with a large number of rounds (eg, 16 rounds) is varied according to the setting, or the jackpot with a small number of rounds (eg, 2 rounds) is determined. A configuration may be adopted in which the degree of advantage for each setting can be varied by varying the ratio of each setting according to the setting. In addition, for example, the ratio of determining the jackpot with a large number of times of time reduction (for example, 100 times) after the end of the jackpot is varied according to the setting, or the jackpot with a small number of times of time reduction (for example, 0 times) may be varied according to the setting. Furthermore, after the end of the jackpot, the rate at which the jackpot that transitions to (or easily transitions to) an advantageous game state (eg, variable probability state) is determined can be varied according to settings, or a disadvantageous game state (eg, normal state) ) (or easily shifted) may be changed according to the setting. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which provides a big-hit classification in which the ratio determined only by specific setting increases significantly (almost never determined by other settings). Specifically, for example, six settings from 1 to 6 can be set, and setting 6 is the most advantageous setting. In setting 6, a 6-round jackpot is determined at a rate of 2% when a jackpot is achieved, whereas in other settings, a 6-round jackpot is determined only at a rate of 0.01%. may be configured. By constructing in this way, when the jackpot ends in 6 rounds, the possibility that the setting is the most advantageous setting 6 is extremely high, so the player is made to play the game paying attention to the number of rounds of the jackpot. be able to. Alternatively or in addition, for example, in setting 6, the ratio of the jackpot type in which 66 times of time saving is given after the jackpot ends may be higher than other settings. By configuring in this way, it is possible to play a game while paying attention to the number of times the time saving state ends. Alternatively, or in addition to these, for example, a jackpot type in which the jackpot (or accessories inside the jackpot, etc.) operates in an operation pattern different from other jackpot types during execution of the jackpot game. It may be configured such that the jackpot type is easily determined by a specific setting (the rate of determination is increased). In addition, in the case of varying the combination of the probability of the big win according to the setting, in the low probability state, the setting is more advantageous to the player, the higher the probability of the big win, while in the variable probability state, the setting is disadvantageous to the player. It is good also as a structure which makes a jackpot probability high as it is. In particular, in the variable probability state, the more the number of special symbol lotteries increases, the easier it is to increase the number of possession balls (the number of prize balls paid out tends to be greater than the number of game balls fired). Effective in game machines. More specifically, for example, it is a configuration that continues until the next big hit is won in the variable probability state, and by applying it to a game machine of the type that becomes a small hit with a high probability in the variable probability state, the high setting advantage You can increase your sexuality. That is, if the probability of winning a big win in the variable probability state is low, the number of lottery times until the next big win tends to increase, so the chances of getting a small win and winning balls also increase. Therefore, when the probability variable state occurs, it becomes easier for the player to win more prize balls until the next big win, which is advantageous for the player.

Furthermore, in each of the above embodiments, two types of special symbols, the first special symbol and the second special symbol, are used as a plurality of special symbol types. may be used, or only one special symbol type may be used. Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, a game property in which a lottery (fluctuation) is performed according to a rule in which a plurality of special symbols are determined in advance, and a game property in which a lottery (fluctuation) is performed independently of each other are explained. However, each of the game features described in each embodiment may be replaced or combined.

In the slot machine, for example, the pattern is changed by operating the control lever in a state where the pattern effective line is determined by inserting a coin, and the pattern is stopped and fixed by operating the stop button. It is. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is "provided with a display device that confirms and displays identification information after variably displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stopping (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed, and the stop is displayed. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value under the condition that the combination of time identification information is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Examples include:

Further, as a specific example of a game machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, it is equipped with a display device for displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then confirming and displaying the symbols, and is equipped with a ball launching handle. There are things that are not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the pattern starts to change due to the operation of the control lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or a predetermined As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game is generated in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the determined symbols at the time of the stop are so-called jackpot symbols, and the player is given a special game. A lot of balls are paid out to the tray at the bottom. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the balls can be treated as game value in the game hall. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment due to the separate handling of the medals and the balls and the restrictions on the installation location of the game machine.

All or part of the above-described embodiments and control examples may be combined.

In the following, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are shown.

<Points where the player pushes in the direction from the back to the front>
In an operation device having operation means that a player pushes in, the operation device is arranged in a first state in a normal state and a position in which the operation means protrudes from the first state with respect to the player. and a biasing means for biasing the operating means from the first state to the second state, wherein the pushing direction of the operating means in the second state is from the depth side to the front side for the player. A gaming machine A1 characterized in that it is directed to the side.

Among game machines such as pachinko machines, there is a game machine configured in such a manner that an operation means that can be operated by a player advances and retreats between a first position and a second position (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-14421
8). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, since the performance is performed in a manner that heightens the player's expectation of a big win at the advance position, the player can easily operate the operation means at the advance position with a large acceleration. , it was necessary to design the operating means with high strength. In this case, there is a problem that the operation means becomes heavy as a whole and the driving means for driving the operation means becomes large.

On the other hand, according to the game machine A1, when the pushing operation is performed in the second state, the pushing direction of the operation means is the direction from the back side to the front side for the player, so that a straightforward up and down linear motion is performed. By causing the slippage between the player's hand and the operating means, the momentum of pushing can be released.

Also, considering the game posture of the player, when the operation means is pushed around the shoulder or elbow,
Since it becomes difficult to apply force in the forward direction, the player can naturally weaken the force applied to the operating means.

In the gaming machine A1, the operation device is rotatable about an axial rod arranged on the far side for the player, tilts up and down about the axial rod, and has the operation means. The gaming machine A2 is characterized by comprising a tilting means, wherein the tilting means is arranged so that the operating means faces the opposite direction of the player in the second state.

According to the gaming machine A2, the tilting means having the operation means is configured in a manner to rotate, and in the second state, the operation means is arranged in the direction opposite to the player, so that the game can be played in the second state. It is possible to prevent a person from performing an operation of hitting the operating means.

In addition, by placing the hand near the shaft and tilting the hand around that position as a fulcrum, the operation means can be easily pushed in, so that a new pushing operation method that is less likely to be accelerated can be provided. , it is possible to prevent the operation device from being damaged by the pushing operation of the player.

The new push operation method is, for example, placing the outer side of the little finger of the left hand near the shaft, placing the hand near the operation means with the palm up and down, and then turning the thumb side toward the operation means. A method in which the tip of the middle finger is placed near the shaft and the palm is placed facing the operation means, and then a method in which the palm is dropped toward the operation means is exemplified. be done.

A gaming machine A3 characterized in that, in the gaming machine A1 or A2, in the first state, the direction of the pushing operation of the operating means is vertical.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A1 or A2, the direction of the pushing operation of the operation means in the first state is the vertical direction. It is possible to prevent breakage due to the pushing operation in the state.

In the game machine A3, the operation device is configured so that the operation means can be automatically operated, and includes a driving means for generating a driving force for the automatic operation. A gaming machine A4 characterized in that it acts in the direction of one side and does not act in the opposite direction.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A3, the driving force of the driving means for automatically operating the operation device acts only in the pushing operation direction, so that the driving force is directed in the direction opposite to the operation direction of the player. can be prevented from working. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the driving means from being damaged by the player's operation.

For example, by configuring the button so that it can only be pushed, it is possible to prevent the driving means from being pulled in the opposite direction by the player when the button is retracted and receiving a high load.

In the game machine A4, a maintenance state that maintains the operation device in the first state or the second state can be formed, and the maintenance means is operated by the driving means. a rotating means for transmitting a driving force to the operating means, wherein the rotating means is capable of phase change between a first phase and a second phase different from the first phase while the maintaining means is maintained; In the first phase and the second phase, the range in which the operating means can move when the maintaining state is canceled is changed, and in both the first phase and the second phase,
A gaming machine A5 configured to be able to release the maintained state by the same rotation.

According to the game machine A5, in addition to the effects of the game machine A4, the phase of the driving means can be changed while the maintaining means is kept in the maintained state, and in the phase after the change, the movement to release the maintained state is rotated. The movement width of the operation device can be changed by the biasing means. Therefore, it is possible to configure a plurality of operation modes by the biasing means.

In the gaming machine A5, the maintaining means is movable in the urging direction of the urging means in the maintaining state, and the moving speed of the maintaining means increases or decreases in accordance with the rotational speed of the rotating means. , a game machine A6 configured such that the operating means moves following the movement of the maintaining means.

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A5, the movement of the urging means in the direction of the urging force is caused only by the urging force, so the mode of movement is limited to one way. Since it is possible to add a moving mode of moving following the maintaining means to the operating means, it is possible to increase the types of moving modes of the operating means. Thereby, the degree of attention of the operation device can be improved.

In any one of the game machines A1 to A6, light-emitting means disposed inside the operation device and emitting light toward the player is provided, and the second state is more favorable than the first state. However, from a player's point of view, the game machine A7 is characterized in that the area of the operating means is reduced and the irradiation range of the light emitted by the light emitting means is expanded.

According to the game machine A7, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines A1 to A6, the light emitting means is provided, and the second state is more illuminated by the light emitting means from the player's point of view than the first state. Since the irradiation range of the emitted light is expanded and the area of the operation means is reduced, the player can be made to pay attention to the light and the performance effect can be improved, and at the same time, it is difficult to press the operation means unless aiming. By adopting this mode, it is possible to reduce the power of the player at the time of operation.

In the gaming machine A7, the operating means is made of a non-transmissive material, and the area of the exposed portion of the light emitting means is changed by moving the operating means toward and away from the display means. Characterized game machine A8.

According to the game machine A8, in addition to the effects of the game machine A7, the operation means is made of a non-transmissive material, and the operation means moves toward and away from the display means to emit light from the display means. Since the area of the exposed portion changes, it is possible to prevent the emitted light from reflecting on the display means and making it difficult to see the image on the display means.

<The point of making the repulsive force at normal times small while making it possible to respond to repeated hits>
In an operation device having an operation means that allows a player to perform an operation up to an end position, a first state and a second state in which the range of motion of the operation up to the end position is wider than that of the first state.
a first driving means for generating a driving force for moving from the second state to the first state; and biasing means for generating a biasing force for moving from the first state to the second state. A game machine B1 characterized by comprising a second driving means for generating a driving force for moving the operation means from the first state to the second state in accordance with the player's operation.

Among game machines such as pachinko machines, there is a game machine configured in such a manner that an operation means that can be operated by a player advances and retreats between a first position and a second position (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-14421
8). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, the force for returning the operation means to the initial position is generated by the spring, and the automatic operation of the operation means is performed by the drive motor. However, in that case, the return of the operating means is delayed, and if the player's operation is fast, the operating means does not follow the player's operation, making it difficult for the player to repeat the operation. There was a problem.

According to the gaming machine B1, by setting the biasing force to be weak, the driving force of the motor can be reduced when the operating means is moved by the first driving means. 2
By pushing back the operation means with the drive means, the return can be made faster, so that the player can enjoy the continuous hitting operation.

The game machine B1 is provided with repeated hitting determination means for determining whether or not a repeated hitting operation is being performed based on a sensor detection value of the stroke operation means within a predetermined time, and the second driving means is operated based on the detection value of the repeated hitting determination means. A gaming machine B2 characterized by determining whether or not to drive.

According to the gaming machine B2, whether or not to drive the second drive means is determined based on the detection value of the repeated hitting determination means, so the player does not perform repeated hitting operations (for example, single pressing operation, long pressing, and so on). It is possible to prevent the second driving means from operating even when the player is performing an operation, etc., and the player feels the load of pushing back the hand.

In the gaming machine B2, terminal detecting means for detecting the position of the operating means and whether or not the operating means is arranged at the terminal position, and detecting whether or not the operating means is arranged at a position shifted by a predetermined amount from the terminal position. position difference detection means for detecting; and movement direction determination means for determining the direction of movement of the operation means from the time relationship between the detection value of the terminal end detection means and the detection value of the position difference detection means; a game machine B3 characterized in that the second drive means is driven when the direction of movement determined by is the direction from the end of the push-in to return to the first state.

According to the game machine B3, in addition to the effects of the game machine B2, when the direction of movement determined by the movement direction determination means is the direction from the end of the push to return to the first state, that is, when the player's hand moves away from the button. Since the second driving means is driven at the timing of moving in the direction of separation, it is possible to generate a load that pushes back the operating means in synchronization with the movement of the player.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the second driving device from operating in a direction opposite to the moving direction of the player's hand, and placing a high load on the player's hand.

In any one of game machines B1 to B3, the second drive means is composed of a voice coil motor that vibrates and displaces along a direction connecting the first state and the second state of the operation means. Game machine B4 to play.

According to the game machine B4, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines B1 to B3, the vibration displacement of the voice coil motor can be effectively used to generate the driving force for moving the operating means.

In any one of game machines B1 to B3, a support frame for supporting the operation means is provided, and the second drive means includes a drive motor for rotating an eccentric weight and elastically supports the drive motor on the support frame. a supporting means, wherein the driving force for moving the operating means from the position of the first state toward the position of the second state increases as the operating means approaches the terminal position. The game machine B5 is characterized in that the eccentric weight abuts against the support frame in a state in which the operating means is arranged at the terminal position, thereby generating a driving force.

According to the game machine B5, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines B1 to B3, the driving force by the second driving means is generated by the driving force generated by the supporting means and the contact between the eccentric weight and the supporting frame. By generating it separately from the driving force, it is possible to adjust the driving force applied to the operating means while maintaining the rotation of the driving motor. At this time, it is unnecessary to perform control to start or stop the rotation of the drive motor, and the rotation of the drive motor can be maintained.

In the gaming machine B5, the eccentric weight moves closer to the support frame in the moving direction of the operation means and comes into contact with the support frame based on the arrangement of the operation means at the end position. A game machine B6 characterized by.

According to the game machine B6, in addition to the effects of the game machine B5, the eccentric weight moves closer to the support frame in the movement direction of the operation means and comes into contact with the support frame. By doing so, the drive motor can be moved away from the support frame in the moving direction of the operating means. As a result, the support means for supporting the drive motor moves in the direction away from the support frame (the direction toward the operation means), so that the driving force for pushing back the operation means can be further increased.

<Points of using VCM as a braking device and vibration effect device>
A detection sensor for detecting a position near the end position of the operation means, the detection sensor is composed of a plurality of sensors, measuring means for measuring the speed of the operation means from the detection interval of the detection sensors, and the measurement means threshold determination means for determining whether or not the measured value measured by is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold; The driving force generated by the repulsion means increases when the measured threshold value is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold value, compared to when the threshold value measured by the threshold determination means is equal to or less than the predetermined threshold value. Characteristic gaming machine C1.

Among game machines such as pachinko machines, there is a game machine configured in such a manner that an operation means that can be operated by a player advances and retreats between a first position and a second position (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-14421
8). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, if the player's light operation is emphasized, the operation resistance will be low, and there is a risk that the operation means will be damaged by the player's operation. Although the speed can be reduced and the possibility of damage to the operating means can be reduced, there is a problem that the force required for the player's operation increases, and the operation of the operating means becomes a burden for weak players. .

On the other hand, according to the game machine C1, the threshold determination means determines whether the speed of the operating means is equal to or higher than the threshold, and if it is equal to or higher than the threshold, the drive force generated by the repulsion means is increased. Therefore, the operation resistance can be reduced when the speed of the operation means is equal to or less than the threshold, and the operation means can be decelerated only when necessary. Therefore, it is possible to improve operability and prevent destruction by the repulsion means.

In the game machine C1, the repulsive means includes a voice coil motor that generates a driving force in a direction opposite to the pushing direction of the operating means, and when the threshold measured by the threshold determination means is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold, , before the control for pushing out the voice coil motor to the extended position is executed and the operating means is arranged at a position capable of coming into contact with the voice coil motor,
A gaming machine C2 characterized by driving the voice coil motor in advance.

According to the game machine C2, in addition to the effects of the game machine C1, the voice coil motor can be driven and controlled to decelerate the operating means, and the operating means can be arranged at a position where it can come into contact with the voice coil motor. By driving the voice coil motor before moving, it is possible to suppress the impact generated between the operating means and the voice coil motor.

In the gaming machine C1 or C2, the gaming machine C3 is characterized in that, after the operating means and the voice coil motor come into contact with each other, control is performed to increase the current flowing through the voice coil motor.

According to the game machine C3, in addition to the effects of the game machine C1 or C2, after the operation means and the voice coil motor come into contact with each other, the operation means is controlled to increase the current flowing through the voice coil motor. While suppressing the occurrence of a large load at the moment of contact with the voice coil motor, the degree of braking the operation means can be gradually improved, and the sense of discomfort felt by the player during operation can be reduced.

In the game machine C1, the repulsion means is disposed so as to be able to come into contact with the operation means, and generates a driving force corresponding to the amount of deformation caused by the movement of the operation means by means of spring elasticity. .

According to the game machine C4, in addition to the effects of the game machine C1, the repulsion means generates a driving force corresponding to the amount of deformation by means of spring elasticity. can be generated.

In the gaming machine C4, the repulsion means compares the value measured by the threshold value determining means when the value measured by the threshold value determination means is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold value to the case where the value measured by the threshold value determination means is equal to or less than the predetermined threshold value. A gaming machine C5 is characterized in that a movable area of an end portion of said repulsion means opposite to a side contacting said operation means is narrowed.

According to the game machine C5, in addition to the effects of the game machine C4, the movable area of the end of the repulsion means, which is the end opposite to the side that contacts the operation means, is narrowed, thereby making it possible to operate the operation means. A higher velocity can increase the elastic force generated by the repulsive means.

<Damage of the driving means is prevented by interrupting the transmission of the driving force with the clutch>
An operation device having operation means operated by a player, wherein the operation device includes drive means for generating a driving force for operating the operation means, transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the drive means to the operation means, a releasing means for releasing the transmission of the driving force, the releasing means releasing the driving force when the load generated between the driving means and the operating means through the transmitting means exceeds a predetermined amount. A gaming machine D1 characterized by canceling transmission.

Among game machines such as pachinko machines, there is a game machine configured in such a manner that an operation means that can be operated by a player advances and retreats between a first position and a second position (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-14421
8). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, when the operation means is automatically operated for the effect, if the operation means is operated during the automatic operation, there is a risk that a large load will be applied to the drive system. There was a problem.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, the canceling means cancels the transmission of the driving force when the load generated between the driving means and the operating means via the transmitting means exceeds a predetermined amount. Therefore, even if the player operates the operation means while the operation means is automatically operating, the transmission of the load to the drive system is canceled (disconnected), and the load applied to the drive system can be suppressed. can.

In the game machine D1, the driving means is capable of driving in a first direction and driving in a second direction opposite to the first direction, and during driving in the first direction, The gaming machine D2 is characterized in that the release by the release means functions regardless of whether the game machine is being driven in the second direction.

Here, when whether or not the transmission of the driving force can be canceled depends on the operating direction of the driving means,
If the operating means is operated by the player while driving the driving means in an operation direction in which transmission of the driving force cannot be released, there is a risk that a large load will be applied to the driving means. Therefore, the degree of freedom of performance is reduced when the operating means is operated to effect performance.

When the button is driven between the first position and the second position, the lock member that locks the button is moved in the unlocking direction or in the unlocking direction depending on whether the driving means rotates forward or backward. Toggles whether to move in the opposite direction. In this case, two modes of button operation can be created (a release pattern and a non-release pattern), but the driving force must be interrupted in both cases.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D1, the transmission of the driving force can be canceled (disconnected) in both driving directions regardless of the driving direction of the driving means. , it is possible to improve the degree of freedom of action in the effect of automatically operating the operating means.

It should be noted that, as a method of releasing the transmission, the clutch is moved in a direction intersecting with the operating direction of the driving means. The intersecting direction is intended to exclude, for example, the circumferential direction when the drive means rotates, and the clutch may move in the rotation axis direction or in the radial direction.

The gaming machine D1 or D2 includes biasing means for biasing the driving means and the transmission means to a state in which the driving force can be transmitted, and the release means is a contact portion between the driving means and the transmission means. and engaging teeth for transmitting a driving force when they are engaged with each other. A game machine D3, characterized in that the game machine D3 has a shape that tapers away from the contact surface and is inclined with respect to the contact surface.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D1 or D2, the urging means presses the driving means and the transmission means, and the release means applies the driving force in the engaged state on the contact surfaces of the pressing means. On the other hand, since both surfaces facing the direction of movement of the driving means are provided with engaging teeth that are tapered away from the abutment surfaces, the engagement between the engaging teeth causes the transmission means to move from the driving means. They can be separated, thereby canceling the transmission of the driving force.

Further, a biasing force is constantly applied by the biasing means between the driving means and the transmitting means, and when the transmitting means is separated from the driving means, the biasing force acts in the direction of movement of the driving means via the engagement teeth. load is applied. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a sudden change in the load applied to the driving means between the state in which the driving force is transmitted and the state in which the transmission is cancelled.

The size of the engaging portion of the engaging tooth decreases in the circumferential direction of the transmitting means as the transmitting means moves away from the driving means. Therefore, when the phase difference between the transmission means and the drive means increases, it is possible to prevent the load generated in the circumferential direction of the transmission means from becoming excessive.

In addition, in the released state, the resistance is periodically reinstated, rather than completely de-resistance away. As a result, when the player releases the button, the button can be started to operate within a short period of time.

That is, if the player is holding the button when the button is driven "as an effect",
It goes through one phase of the button action. In addition, if the player releases his hand in the middle of the game, if the player moves from the end of the first phase, the period during which the button is stopped becomes longer, and "
The player's feeling of "starting to move because the load on the player is relieved" is reduced.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D3, the operation means can be started within a short period of time after the player releases the hand and the load is released. As a result, it is possible to produce a feeling that the player starts to move because the load on the player is relieved.

In any one of the game machines D1 to D3, the engagement surface between the transmission means and the release means is:
A gaming machine D4 characterized in that it is formed from sawtooth shapes that engage with each other.

According to the game machine D4, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines D1 to D3, when the load from the player is released, the release means can be easily returned to the engagement position with the transmission means at an early stage.
That is, when the tip of the engaging surface has a plane parallel to the direction in which the transmission means and the release means move toward and away from each other, the transmission means and the release means collide with each other at this plane, and the release means is disengaged. It is possible to suppress the movement along the direction of approaching and separating from the means to be stopped. Therefore, after the load from the player is released, the operation means can be started to operate early.

In any one of the game machines D1 to D4, the operation mode of the operating means differs between when the driving means is continuously operated in the forward direction and when the driving means is continuously operated in the reverse direction. A gaming machine D5 characterized by:

According to the game machine D5, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines D1 to D4, while preparing a plurality of operation modes of the operating means, the driving force transmission can be canceled without being limited to any one operation mode. It can be carried out.

In the game machine D5, the operating mode of the operating means is the following for a predetermined period from the start of the operation of the driving means when there is a difference between whether the driving means operates in the forward direction or in the reverse direction. A gaming machine D6 is similar in that the operation after the predetermined period of time has elapsed is different.

According to the game machine D6, in addition to the effects of the game machine D5, when there is a difference in the operation direction of the drive means in the operation mode of the operation means, the operation mode for a predetermined period from the start of the operation of the drive means is the same. Since the action after the predetermined period of time has elapsed is different, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the operating means.

Here, by combining the difference in the operating mode of the operating means with information that is beneficial to the player, such as the degree of expectation for a big win, the player is instructed to operate the operating means for a predetermined period of time until the operating mode of the operating means changes. can be supervised.

In addition, since the difference in operation mode is caused by the difference in the operation direction of the drive means, if the operation direction of the drive means can be confirmed in advance, the player can grasp the difference in the degree of expectation for the big win without watching the operation of the operation means. can be done. However, the drive means is usually hidden from the player, and the difference in the direction of action cannot be recognized from the vibration sound. can be made to watch over the operation of the operating means.

<Change the position of the protrusion of the cam based on the rotation of the cam>
An operation device having operation means operated by a player, wherein the operation device includes drive means for generating a driving force for operating the operation means, transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the drive means to the operation means, first means configured to operate the operating means between a first position and a second position different from the first position, and suppressing a change in the position of the operating means from the first position; biasing means for biasing the operating means in a direction from the first position to the second position; and operating means for moving from the first position to the second position by the biasing force of the biasing means. terminating means for variably forming the movement terminating end of the first means, wherein the first means suppresses a change in the position of the operating means by engaging with the operating means; 1 means includes releasing load means for applying a load to the first means for releasing the engagement with the operating means, and releasing the engagement by the releasing load means and terminating the movement of the operating means in the terminating means. A game machine E characterized in that the change is performed by a single driving means.
1.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a cam-operated and movable operating means is fixed at a first position, and the fixing is released by a release load means, whereby the urging force of the urging means expands and operates. , There is a game machine that can change the amount of displacement of the overhanging operation by the termination means (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-144218). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, since the amount of displacement of the overhanging operation of the operation means is changed according to the phase of the cam when the fixation is released, the phase of the cam when the fixation is released varies in various ways. The cam for moving the means and the release load means for releasing the fixation are driven by separate driving forces. Therefore, there is a problem that a plurality of driving means are required and the space for arranging the driving means becomes large.

On the other hand, in the game machine E1, the releasing load means for releasing the fixation of the operating means is driven by the driving means for driving the operating means. As a result, the driving means for changing the terminal position of the operating means by the terminal means and the driving means for moving the release load means can be used together, so the number of driving means can be reduced.

A game machine E2 characterized in that, in the game machine E1, the change in the position of the release load means is performed based on the operation of the transmission means.

According to the game machine E2, in addition to the effects of the game machine E1, the position of the release load means can be changed based on the operation of the transmission means. The state of the load means can be determined. As a result, the number of detecting means such as position sensors for detecting the state of the load release means can be reduced, and the number of parts can be reduced.

As a method for switching the state of the load release means, when the transmission means is composed of a cam and the load release means is composed of a projection that rotates coaxially with the cam, there is a method of shifting the rotational cycle of the cam and the projection. , a method of desynchronizing the rotation of the cam and the rotation of the projection when the cam is arranged in a predetermined phase, and synchronizing the rotation of the cam and the rotation of the projection in other phases, etc.
exemplified.

In the gaming machine E2, the release load means, by the load given from the first means,
A gaming machine E3 is arranged operably with respect to the transmitting means, and is characterized in that whether or not the releasing load means and the transmitting means are synchronously operated is switched by the operation of the load releasing means.

According to the game machine E3, in addition to the effects of the game machine E2, the release load means is arranged to be operable with respect to the transmission means by the load from the first means, and the release load means is operated by the operation of the release load means. Since it is switched whether or not to operate synchronously with the transmission means, the synchronous state between the release load means and the transmission means can be changed without adding a member.

In the game machine E2, the transmission means includes a rotating first rotating member, the operating means is supported eccentrically with respect to the rotating shaft of the first rotating member, and the release load means includes a rotating second rotating member. A gaming machine E4 comprising members, wherein the rotation periods of the first rotating member and the second rotating member are different.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E2, the first rotating member and the second rotating member are operated by a single drive means, but the rotation cycles are different, so that the second rotating means can be operated at a predetermined speed. A plurality of phases of the first rotary member can be prepared when the first means is released by coming into contact with the first means in phase.

According to this configuration, it is possible to prepare a plurality of types of end positions when the operating means is held at the first position and then released and moved toward the second position. ,
You can expand your production range. For example, an effect of gradually moving the end position away from the first position or an effect of gradually approaching the first position can be realized with the same configuration.

<Vibration device supported by soft case>
In an operation device having operation means operated by a player, the operation device has a first position for the operation means and a second position reached by the operation means when the player performs an operation from the first position. A game machine comprising vibrating means having a vibrating portion configured to be movable between and vibrating; and receiving means disposed so as to be in contact with the vibrating portion, wherein the operating means is disposed at the first position Then, the vibrating portion is in a separated state in which it cannot abut against the receiving means. A gaming machine F1 characterized by being in a contact state.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines that are provided with operating means that can be operated by the player and vibration means that transmits vibrations to the player via the operating means or the frame of the gaming machine (for example,
See JP-A-2014-144218). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, regardless of whether the operation means is operated or not, when the vibration means vibrates, the vibration is transmitted to the operation means or the frame of the game machine. Alternatively, since it is transmitted to the player who touches the frame of the game machine, when performing an effect of transmitting vibration immediately after operating the operation means,
It is necessary to operate the vibrating means after detecting the operation of the operating means. Therefore, after the player operates the operation means, it is necessary to operate the vibration means before releasing the operation means. mode), there is a problem that the vibration may not start in time before releasing the hand, and the player may not notice the vibration.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F1, whether or not the vibrating portion contacts the receiving means is determined depending on whether the operating means is placed at the first position or is placed at the second position by being operated by the player. Since it changes, even when the vibrating portion is continuously vibrated, the player can feel the vibration only when the player operates the operating means. In addition, since the vibration of the vibrating portion occurs before the player performs the pressing operation, the vibrating portion can be vibrated before the player releases the hand regardless of the mode of operation by the player. Vibration can be transmitted to a person.

In the gaming machine F1, the vibration means is arranged to protrude in the occupation area occupied when the operation means is arranged at the second position in the separated state, and the operation means moves to the second position. The game machine F2 changes to the abutting state by moving the vibrating means out of the occupied area.

According to the game machine F2, in addition to the effects of the game machine F1, the vibration means moves based on the movement of the operation means, thereby changing from the separated state to the contact state. The contact strength between the operating means or the receiving means and the vibrating portion can be changed,
The intensity of transmitted vibrations can also be varied. Therefore, the effect of changing the strength of the transmitted vibration with respect to the player's operation strength can be performed by similarly vibrating the vibrating means without any particular change in the driving mode.

A game machine F3 characterized in that, in the game machines F1 or F2, the vibration means is supported by the receiving means via support means having spring elasticity.

According to the game machine F3, in addition to the effects of the game machine F1 or F2, the support means can perform positioning with respect to the receiving means while suppressing the vibration of the vibrating means from being transmitted to the receiving means. As a result, it is possible to separate the receiving means and the vibrating means, prevent transmission of vibration, and suppress displacement occurring in the vibrating means during vibration.

A game machine F4 characterized in that, in the game machine F3, in the contact state, the support means expands and contracts based on the vibration of the vibrating portion.

According to the game machine F4, in addition to the effects of the game machine F3, the elasticity of the support means can be used to increase the load generated when the vibrating portion and the receiving means come into contact with each other. That is, the extension and contraction of the supporting means can give momentum when the vibrating part moves in the direction of approaching the receiving means.

In the game machine F3, the support means has deformation resistance along the operating direction of the operation means,
A gaming machine F5 characterized in that the deformation resistance in a direction perpendicular to the operating direction of the operating means is made lower than that.

According to the game machine F5, in addition to the effects of the game machine F3, the direction in which the support means deforms can be finely set when the operation means is operated and interferes with the support means due to the difference in deformation resistance of the support means. can.

Thus, even if the amount of movement of the operating means is slightly different, the amount of expansion and contraction of the supporting means can be made different, and the load generated between the vibrating portion and the receiving means can be made different. .

As a method for differentiating the deformation resistance, in the case where the support means is composed of a rubber member surrounding the vibrating means, a method of extending rubber legs along the movement direction of the operating means, or a method in which the support means surrounds the vibrating means. A method of manufacturing a rubber member by two-color molding to change the deformation resistance for each direction when it is composed of a rubber member; , and a coil spring that biases the vibrating means along the operating direction of the operating means.

A game machine F6 characterized in that, in the game machine F3, the portion with which the vibrating portion abuts is the receiving means, and the receiving means is configured as a separate means from the operating means.

According to the game machine F6, in addition to the effects of the game machine F3, the vibration is not transmitted to the player through the operation means, but the vibration is transmitted to the player through the receiving means which is separate from the operation means. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the vibration of the vibrating means from being transmitted to the driving means via the operating means and the transmitting means, thereby suppressing a state in which a load is applied to the driving means. Thereby, the durability of the driving means can be improved.

In addition, since it is possible to suppress the vibration from being transmitted to the hand of the player who operates the operation means, it is possible to prevent the player who is surprised by the vibration from stopping the operation during the operation.

As the receiving means, for example, among the frame parts of the game machine, the part near the upper tray to which the game balls are supplied, the edge part of the glass frame, etc. Examples include a portion that may be touched by hands, a housing portion that partially encloses the operation means, and the like.

<One-touch attachment between cam and shaft. Shape deformation (elastic deformation) is possible at the mounting part>
In an operation device having operation means operated by a player, the operation device is configured such that the operation means is movable between a first position and a second position different from the first position, and the operation means is operated by a player. and a transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the operation means, wherein the transmission means comprises a deformation portion that elastically deforms due to an overload. Gaming machine G1 to play.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, an operating means that can be operated by a player, a driving means that generates driving force for driving the operating means, and a transmission means that transmits the driving force from the driving means to the operating means. There is a game machine provided (for example, see JP 2014-144218)
. However, in the above-described conventional game machine, when the player holds and fixes the operation means, when the drive means generates a driving force for driving the operation means, the connecting portion between the transmission means and the operation means,
There is a problem that a load is accumulated in the connecting portion between the transmission means and the driving means, and these connecting portions may be damaged.

On the other hand, according to the game machine G1, when the operation device is overloaded, the deformable portion of the transmission means is elastically deformed, so that the connecting portion between the operation means and the transmission means, the drive means and the transmission means It is possible to relax the load applied to the connection part with.

In the gaming machine G1, the transmission means includes a cam member that is rotatably supported, the deforming portion constitutes a connection portion of the cam member with the rotating shaft, and the elasticity of the deforming portion causes the cam member to move toward the rotating shaft. A game machine G2 characterized in that a fixing force of is generated.

According to the game machine G2, the deforming portion plays a role of a portion responsible for elastic deformation of the cam member with respect to the rotating shaft of the transmission means, a role of a portion generating a supporting force of the cam member with respect to the rotating shaft,
Prepare. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the configuration of the transmission member by sharing the functions. For example, separate securing members such as e-rings can be omitted.

In the gaming machine G2, the cam member has a projecting portion projecting in parallel with the rotation shaft, the projecting portion and the operating means are connected, and the elastic deformation of the deformation portion causes the cam member to On the other hand, a gaming machine G3 is characterized in that the rotating shaft is tilted.

Here, the elastic deformation of the transmission means can also be performed, for example, by displacing the projecting portion along the circumferential direction of the cam member. However, in this case, it becomes difficult to construct the cam member and the projecting portion as one member, and the number of members may increase.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G2, the elastic deformation of the deformation portion is such that the rotating shaft tilts with respect to the cam member. Compared to the case where the cam member is slid relative to the cam member, the cam member can be easily constructed from a single member, and the members can be simplified.

In the gaming machine G3, the elastic deformation resistance of the deforming portion is greater than that of the rotating shaft in comparison with the first rotating direction in which the cam member is rotated about a straight line connecting the rotating shaft and the projecting portion. A gaming machine characterized in that deformation resistance is greater in a second rotation direction in which rotation is performed around a straight line perpendicular to both a straight line connecting the projecting portion and an extending direction of the rotation shaft. G4.

According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G3, by making the deformation resistance of the deformation portion different for each direction, the state after the deformation portion is elastically deformed when viewed from the rotation axis direction is more Compared to the state before elastic deformation, the projecting tip of the projecting portion can be displaced in the circumferential direction of the cam member. As a result, the projecting portion of the cam member can be displaced along the direction in which the projecting portion is to move, so that the elastic deformation of the deformation portion relieves the load generated between the projecting portion and the operating means. can do.

The game machine G3 or G4 includes a friction member arranged at a predetermined distance along a direction parallel to the rotation axis of the cam member, wherein the deformation portion elastically deforms to change the posture of the cam member, The game machine G5 is characterized in that the cam member and the friction member are in contact with each other.

According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G3 or G4, when an overload is applied to the operation means, the deformable portion elastically deforms, thereby changing the attitude of the cam member, and the cam member and the friction member are brought into contact with each other. contact, the movement resistance of the cam member itself can be increased, thereby reducing the load applied to the connecting portion between the cam member and the operating means.

A gaming machine G6 is characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines G3 to G5, the gaming machine G6 comprises detection means for detecting that at least part of the cam member is tilted with respect to an axis.

Here, in a situation where the operating device is overloaded and the driving means is operating but the operating means is not, for example, the displacement expected by driving the driving means and the actual displacement of the operating means When it is detected that an overload has occurred on the basis of a deviation from , it is necessary to drive the driving means for a predetermined period of time before the occurrence of the overload is detected. This period can be shortened as the arrangement interval of the detection means for detecting displacement deviation becomes smaller, but the smaller the arrangement interval of the detection means, the more complicated the structure of the detection means and the higher the cost. Therefore, there is a problem that it is difficult to provide a configuration that can detect the occurrence of an overload at a low cost and at an early stage.

On the other hand, according to the game machine G6, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines G3 to G5, the detection means detects whether or not at least a part of the cam member is tilted with respect to the axis. Therefore, it is possible to determine that an overload has occurred at the same time when the detecting means detects at least a part of the cam member, without the need to drive the driving means for a predetermined period while suppressing the number of additional detecting means. This makes it possible to reduce the load applied to the driving means when an overload occurs.

<Structure to prevent balls with threads. Game machine H>
In a game machine provided with a foul ball passage through which foul balls flowing back toward a launching device, among game balls shot into a game area, can pass, the foul ball passage permits passage of the falling game balls. The game machine H1 is characterized by comprising a one-way obstruction means for obstructing the movement of objects flowing backward.

A game machine such as a pachinko machine, where a thread cutting blade is arranged inside the guide path that guides the game ball from the upper tray to the launcher, and the game ball with the thread connected is driven into the game area. There is a game machine with a function to prevent (cut the thread) (for example, JP 2015-02
4179). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, the thread is pressed against the thread cutting teeth when the ball is shot, and the thread is cut by the tension generated at that time. It may be returned to the player side as a foul ball.
For this reason, for example, a cheating tool is prepared in which game balls are connected to both ends of a string, and one of the game balls connected to one end of the string is shot with a weak firing strength to flow into the foul ball passage and be returned to the player. By hitting the other game ball connected to the other end of the string into the game area while gripping one of the game balls that have been drawn, the string can be removed from the guide path and passed through the foul ball passage to the other side. Since it is possible to create a state in which one game ball and the other game ball are connected by a string, a load is applied from the outside to the string connected to the other game ball, and the other game ball placed in the game area There is a problem that there is a possibility that it may be possible to obtain illicit profits by manipulating the

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine H1, even if a fraudulent act of applying a load to the other game ball using the string guided to the game area through the foul ball passage is performed, the one-way obstruction means However, by interfering with the movement of the string in the reverse direction of the game ball, it is possible to make it difficult to generate illicit profits.

A game machine H2 characterized in that the foul ball path in the game machine H1 has a bent portion for bending a downflow path of the game ball.

According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H1, the string guided along the path of the game ball can be rubbed against the bent portion, so that the string can be quickly cut.

In the gaming machine H2, the bending portion is provided with a load means which does not apply a load to the game balls flowing down, but applies a load to the objects flowing backward, on the inner corner side of the bending.
.

According to the game machine H3, in addition to the effects of the game machine H2, it is possible to apply a load to the backflowing object (for example, a thread-like member) by the load means.

In the game machine H3, the game machine H4 is characterized in that the load means is arranged in a concave portion having a width smaller than the diameter of the game ball.

According to the game machine H4, in addition to the effect of the game machine H3, by preventing the game ball from entering the recess of the recessed part, collision between the load means and the game ball is avoided, and the load means is damaged. can be prevented.

A gaming machine H5 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine H3 or H4, the gaming machine H5 comprises regulation means for regulating the movement of the load means to the outside of the foul ball passage.

According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H3 or H4, the restricting means restricts the outward movement of the load means in the foul ball passage. When a load is applied, it is possible to prevent the load applied to the on-line member from weakening due to the deformation of the load means to the outside of the foul ball passage.

In any one of the game machines H1 to H5, a receiving tray is provided as a tray on the front side of the front door for the foul balls to reach first, and the receiving tray is a portion for discharging the game balls paid out from the payout device. The game machine H6 is characterized in that the ball discharge part is arranged above the discharge side exit of the foul ball passage.

According to the game machine H6, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines H1 to H5, the game balls paid out from the payout device pass in front of the discharge side exit of the foul ball passage. To reduce the durability of the string by intentionally hitting the put out game ball to apply the load when the string guided to the game area is used to apply the load to the other game ball. be able to.

In any one of the game machines H1 to H6, the lower end of the put-out ball discharge part that discharges the game balls put out from the pay-out device to the receiving tray, which is the tray where the foul balls reach first on the front side of the front door. , a game machine H7 characterized by being positioned below the lower end of the discharge-side exit of the foul ball passage.

According to the game machine H7, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines H1 to H6, a cheating act was performed in which a string guided to the game area through the foul ball passage was used to apply a load to the other game ball. In this case, the thread can be easily damaged by the game balls that are paid out.

<Structure of board holder. Game machine I>
A game means used during a game, and a receiving means which is open on one side facing the game means and capable of receiving the game means from the one side, the receiving means receives the game means. A state changing means is provided for changing the gaming means from the unusable state to the usable state, wherein the state changing means changes the gaming means to the usable state. A gaming machine I1 characterized by comprising an approach means for approaching the game means from the one side when setting the above.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, the state changes between a fixed state in which the game board is rotatable in a rotational direction parallel to the front surface of the game board and the game board is fixed to the inner frame, and a released state in which the game board can be removed from the inner frame. There is a game machine provided with a fixing means for holding (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2005-230420). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, the fixing means is configured to be able to change its state only after the game board is pushed into the position of the use state. Therefore, there is a problem that the work efficiency may be lowered.

On the other hand, according to the game machine I1, since the state changing means has a means for approaching the game means from the receiving side (one side) when the game means is put into use, the pushing of the game board is prevented. Even if it is halfway, the proximity means contacts the game board and adds a pushing force,
The effect is that the game board can be pushed to the position of the use state.

In the game machine I1, the state changing means displaces the game means to the one side as the game means is changed to an unusable state. .

According to the game machine I2, in addition to the effects of the game machine I1, the game means is displaced to the receiving side (one side) as the game means is changed to the unusable state, so that the game means can be removed. It is effective in improving the working efficiency of the work.

In the game machine I1 or I2, the state changing means makes the game means unusable and the proximity means retreats to the outside of the game means. Gaming machine I3.

According to the game machine I3, in addition to the effects of the game machine I1 or I2, the proximity means retracts to the outside of the game means, so that it is possible to improve the working efficiency of the work of removing the game means. Since this is performed along with disabling the means, the working efficiency can be further improved.

In any one of the game machines I1 to I3, the game machine I4 is provided with contact means for receiving a load from the game means when the state changing means is changed to the usable state.

According to the game machine I4, since the contact means receives a load from the game means to change the state of the state changing means to the usable state, the operation of pressing the game means against the state changing means causes the usable state as a series of flows. can change state to

In the game machine I4, the game means is supported by a shaft on one side of the receiving means and is received by the receiving means by approaching the other side, and the state changing means is the receiving means. A gaming machine I5 characterized in that it is arranged on the other side of the.

According to the game machine I5, in addition to the effects of the game machine I4, the width dimension of the game means is used to
A load can be efficiently applied to the abutment means via the game means.

In any one of the game machines I1 to I5, there is provided blocking means for blocking the opening on the one side of the receiving means, the blocking means being unusable by the state changing means making the game means unusable. The gaming machine I6 is characterized by comprising a closing regulation part that prevents the opening on one side of the gaming means from being closed when the state is maintained.

According to the gaming machine I6, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines I1 to I5, the state changing means puts the gaming means into a usable state depending on whether or not the closing means can close the opening on one side of the gaming means. You can decide whether to As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the closing means closes the opening on one side of the game means even though the game means is maintained in an unusable state.

<The reverse cup and harness band prevent the piano wire from getting stuck. Game machine J>
A game means used during a game, and a receiving means which is open on one side facing the game means and capable of receiving the game means from the one side, the receiving means being connected to the game means. A game machine J1, characterized in that it comprises an arranging means arranged on a path that communicates with the outside, wherein the arranging means is constructed so as to be capable of suppressing entry of an object from the outside at a plurality of points.

In game machines such as pachinko machines, there is a game machine equipped with a fraud prevention unit for preventing fraudulent acts of inserting a piano wire from the rotating shaft side of the front frame (for example, JP-A-2016-
26573). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, there is only one anti-fraud section, and there is a problem that the anti-fraud effect is not sufficient.

On the other hand, in the game machine J1, the arranging means is arranged in the path where the piano wire is likely to be inserted, and the arranging means is configured to be capable of suppressing the entry of the piano wire at a plurality of points, thereby preventing fraud. can improve the effect of

In the gaming machine J1, the arrangement means includes first means for suppressing entry of members from the outside at a first location, and second means for suppressing entry of members from the outside at a second location,
A game machine J2 characterized by suppressing entry of members from the outside by a different method.

According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J1, the arrangement means differs in the method of suppressing the entry of members from the outside between the first location and the second location. Entry of members from the outside can be further suppressed as compared with the case where the number of is increased.

In addition, the method of suppressing the intrusion from the outside is not limited at all. For example, a method of restricting entry by blocking a route, or a method of suppressing fraudulent activity by detecting heat and sounding an alarm may be used.

In the game machine J1 or J2, the game machine J3 is characterized in that the arrangement means comprises an intrusion control portion formed in a cup shape that opens outward of the receiving means.

According to the game machine J3, in addition to the effects of the game machine J1 or J2, the intrusion control portion is formed in the shape of a cup, so that the intruding member can be prevented from further intrusion.

In the game machine J3, the arrangement means includes support means for supporting electric wiring, and the support means is arranged downstream of the entry control section in a route from the outside to the game means. Characterized game machine J4.

According to the game machine J4, in addition to the effects of the game machine J3, when a fraudulent act of penetrating the entry control portion with high heat occurs, changes in the wiring caused by the high heat (disconnection due to heat, etc.) are detected. It is possible to easily produce the effect of suppressing the entry of the member.

In any one of the game machines J1 to J4, the arrangement means arranges the members entered from the outside,
The gaming machine J5 is characterized by comprising elimination means for guiding to an elimination area far from the gaming means.

According to the game machine J5, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines J1 to J4, the member entering from the outside is guided to the resolution area far from the game means by the arranging means. Even if the degree becomes stronger, it is possible to prevent the members entering from the outside from reaching the game means.

<Structure of five decorative plates. Including fraud prevention. Game machine K>
a first means and a second means arranged oppositely along a first direction and connected by at least one side; A gaming machine comprising a third means for connecting the first means and the second means, wherein the connection direction of the connecting part is set in a second direction that intersects the first direction A gaming machine K1 characterized by:

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, first means and second means arranged to face each other and connected on at least one side, and disposed between the first means and second means along the first direction There is a gaming machine comprising a third means that
However, in the above-described conventional game machine, each member is connected by an existing method such as adhesion or screwing, and when the first means and the second means are connected, the load along the first direction is the first. There is a problem that the third means may be damaged by being hung up on the third means.

On the other hand, according to the game machine K1, since the connecting direction of the connecting portion connecting the first means and the second means is set to the second direction intersecting the first direction, the third means It is possible to reduce the load applied from Thereby, it is possible to prevent the third means from being damaged.

A game machine K2 characterized in that, in the game machine K1, the connecting portion is arranged apart from the third means.

According to the game machine K2, in addition to the effects of the game machine K1, it is possible to prevent the load from being applied to the third means from the connecting portion.

The gaming machine K1 or K2 comprises connected means connected and fixed to other sides of the first means and the second means, wherein the one side of the first means and the second means is connected to the connected means A gaming machine K3 characterized by being connected by displacing the second means with respect to the first means in a third direction of approaching and fitting them to each other.

According to the game machine K3, in addition to the effects of the game machine K1 or K2, it is provided with a connected means connected to the other sides of the first means and the second means, and one side of the first means and the second means are connected and fixed by fitting caused by displacing the second means with respect to the first means in the third direction close to the connected means, so that the first means and The resistance to decomposition of the second means can be improved.

A gaming machine K4 characterized in that, in the gaming machine K3, the one side of the first means and the second means are arranged to be exposed to the outside.

According to the game machine K4, in addition to the effects of the game machine K3, one side of the first means and the second means are arranged to be exposed to the outside, so that the state of the fitting portion can be easily confirmed. be able to.
Thereby, even if a fraudulent act of breaking the fitting portion and disassembling the first means and the second means occurs, the fraudulent act can be detected early.

In the game machine K3 or K4, the first means and the second means are fastened and fixed to the connected means, and the fastening and fixing direction is the same as the third direction. .

According to the gaming machine K5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine K3 or K4, the fastening direction between the first means and the second means and the connected means is set in the same direction as the third direction. The tightening strength can reinforce the fitting strength.

In any one of game machines K3 to K5, light irradiation means for irradiating light toward said first means or second means side and fixed to said connected means, and one of said first means or second means a light guiding means fixed to a member of the light emitting means and capable of introducing the light emitted by the light emitting means.

According to the game machine K6, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines K3 to K5, it is possible to prevent positional deviation between the first and second means and the light guide means.

A game machine K7 characterized in that a game machine K7 is characterized by comprising contact means for surface contact in a region facing the other member of the first means or the second means and the light guide means.

According to the game machine K7, in addition to the effects of the game machine K6, a space corresponding to the size of the abutting means is maintained in the opposing region between the other member of the first means or the second means and the light guide means. can be done.
This prevents the gap between the other member of the first means or the second means and the light guide means from changing when the first means or the second means receives a load in the opposite direction and is displaced. can be done.

This prevents the positional relationship between the first means, the second means, and the light guide means from changing even if the first means or the second means receives a load in the opposing direction when an illegal attempt is made to disassemble the first means or the second means. can do.

<Point L for utilizing curved light guiding means. As a point, unachieved>
A light guide means formed in a curved wave shape when viewed in an irradiation direction of light passing through the interior, and a projecting means arranged opposite to the light guide means and onto which the light that has passed through the light guide means is projected, The game machine L1 is characterized in that the projected means comprises a concave facing portion arranged to face the concave surface portion of the light guide means, and a convex facing portion arranged to face the convex surface portion of the light guiding means.

2. Description of the Related Art Among game machines such as pachinko machines, there is a game machine equipped with a light guide plate that uniformly emits light from an end surface (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-26573). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, since the light guide plate is formed in the shape of a flat plate, it is necessary to change the intensity of the incident light in order to partially change the intensity of the surface-emitting light. There was a problem.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine L1, since the projected means has the concave surface facing portion and the convex surface facing portion, even if the intensity of the light incident on the light guide means is constant, the concave surface facing portion and the convex surface facing portion Department and
It is possible to change the emission intensity of the projection target means.

In the game machine L1, the projection target means is characterized in that the concave surface facing portion is made of a light-transmitting material, and the convex surface facing portion is made of a material that is less likely to transmit light than the concave surface facing portion. Gaming machine L2.

According to the gaming machine L2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine L1, by intentionally weakening the intensity of the light transmitted through the convex facing portion, the light emitted from the light guiding means is condensed at the concave facing portion. The production effect of the production by the light can be improved.

In the gaming machine L2, a reverse projection means is provided on the opposite side of the projection target means with the light guide means therebetween, and the light passing through the light guide means is projected. A gaming machine L3, wherein a portion of the light means facing the concave surface and a portion of the light guiding means facing the convex surface are made of a material having substantially the same light transmittance.

According to the game machine L3, in addition to the effects of the game machine L2, the part of the counterprojection means arranged to face the concave surface of the light guide means and the part arranged to face the convex surface of the light guide means emit light. Since they are made of a material with substantially the same transmittance, by making the same light incident on the light guiding means, the rendering mode of the light visually recognized through the means to be projected and the rendering mode of the light visually recognized through the opposite projection means can be achieved. can be different from

<Arrangement structure of the bass reflex speaker. Game machine M>
first means and second means arranged opposite to each other and fixed to form an internal space in the fixed state; acoustic means disposed so as to enter at least a portion of the internal space; A gaming machine M1, characterized by comprising bending means for constructing a bending path in an internal space.

In game machines such as pachinko machines, there are game machines in which speakers are arranged at the left and right ends of the front frame, and effects are performed by the sound output from the speakers (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2016-1
6088). In such a gaming machine, the vibration wave traveling toward the rear side of the speaker body is advanced to the left-right central position of the gaming machine and sent out of the gaming machine,
There is a problem that the path length of the vibration wave is regulated by the left-right width of the game machine, where the effect of making the bass sound is likely to be performed.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine M1, since the bending means constitutes a curved path in the internal space of the first means and the second means, by configuring a path longer than the length of one piece, the By removing the restriction on the left-right width, it is possible to make the vibration wave travel an arbitrary distance.

In the gaming machine M1, the first means and the second means are fastened and fixed in such a manner that loads are applied in opposite directions, and the bending means is a rib-like member extending from at least one of the first means and the second means to the other. A gaming machine M2, characterized in that it has a protruding part protruding from the second means, and a protruding tip of the protruding part abuts on the other of the first means and the second means.

According to the gaming machine M2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine M1, the projecting tip of the projecting portion and the other of the first means or the second means are connected in the direction in which the fastening force is applied to the first means and the second means. It is possible to prevent a gap from being generated between the projecting portion and the other of the first means and the second means due to the fastening and fixing. Therefore, it is possible to prevent fluid such as vibration waves from passing through the gap in the curved path.

In the game machine M1 or M2, an opening connecting the internal space and the outside is provided, and the opening is passed through the opening to the internal space and the outside and is connected to the sound means. A gaming machine M3 characterized in that it is closed by

According to the game machine M3, in addition to the effects of the game machine M1 or M2, the opening is closed by the passing member connected to the sound means, so it is not necessary to prepare an additional closing member. The walls forming the internal space can be closed appropriately in a state where the passage member passes from the internal space to the outside.

The gaming machine M4, wherein the opening is arranged closer to the sound means than the protruding portion in the gaming machine M3.

According to the game machine M4, in addition to the effects of the game machine M3, when the wiring of the sound means is passed from the internal space to the outside through the opening, the wiring of the sound means is prevented from being caught by the projecting portion and broken. be able to.

In any one of game machines M1 to M4, support fastening means to which at least one of the first means and second means is fastened and fixed, and presentation means arranged below the support fastening means for performing presentation accompanying a game. and wherein the effect means supports the support fastening means from below.

According to the game machine M5, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines M1 to M4, the supporting and fastening means is supported by the effect means from below, so that the supporting and fastening means does not have to press the space used for the effect. things can be adopted.

<Movable unit, reverse rotating flower. Petals that stop on the way. Game machine N>
a base member, a first displacement means displaceably supported by the base member, a driving means for applying a driving force to the first displacement means, a following state in which the first displacement means is displaced in a displacement direction; A second displacing state switchable between a non-following state displaced in a direction different from the displacing direction of the first displacing means
and a displacement means, wherein at least when the second displacement means is in the following state, the third displacement means is displaced in a direction opposite to the displacement direction of the second displacement means by the driving force of the drive means. A gaming machine N1 characterized by comprising:

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, as the first displacement means expands and contracts, the second displacement means displaces in the direction of the expansion and contraction of the first displacement means, while the first displacement means operates in the vicinity of the extension end. When doing so, there is a game machine in which the second displacement means is displaced in a direction different from the expansion and contraction direction of the first displacement means (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-229580). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, since the directions of displacement of the first displacement means and the second displacement means are the same when the first displacement means expands and contracts, the performance becomes slow and the performance effect is not sufficient. there was a point

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine N1, at least in the following state of the second displacement means, the third
Since the displacement means is displaced in the direction opposite to the displacement direction of the second displacement means, the displacement speed of the second displacement means can be visually recognized as a speed based on the third displacement means. Therefore, compared with the speed at which the second displacement means is actually driven, the speed of the second displacement means that the player feels can be increased.

The gaming machine N1 is characterized by comprising resistance means for generating resistance against the displacement of the second displacement means, and the resistance means is configured to be able to change a switching point between the following state and the non-following state. Game machine N2 to play.

According to the gaming machine N2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine N1, the following state in which the second displacement means follows the first displacement means by the action of the resistance means, and the non-following state in which the second displacement means deviates from the following state. Since the switching point can be changed, it is possible to increase the types of modes of displacement of the second displacement means with respect to the first displacement means. Thereby, the production effect can be improved.

In the gaming machine N2, the resistance means is configured to be able to change the state of the second displacement means by using a driving force when operating the second displacement means in the non-following state. Game machine N3.

According to the gaming machine N3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine N2, the driving force for switching the state of the second displacement means can be generated by the driving means for driving the first displacement means. be able to.

A game machine N4 characterized in that, in the game machine N2 or N3, the resistance means is arranged so as to be visible from the front.

According to the game machine N4, in addition to the effects of the game machine N2 or N3, by configuring the resistance means to be visible, the resistance means has a function of changing the state of the first displacement means and is visually recognized by the player. It can also serve as a performance device.

The gaming machine N4 is characterized by comprising a rod-shaped shaft means fixed to the base member, the shaft means coaxially and rotatably supporting the first displacement means, the second displacement means and the resistance means. Gaming machine N5.

According to the gaming machine N5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine N4, since the shaft means functioning as the rotating shaft of the first displacement means, the second displacement means, and the resistance means is fixed to the base member, the first displacement means, To prevent the displacement resistance from increasing excessively because the attitude of any one of the second displacement means and the resistance means changes, and the attitudes of the other members or means follow and change. can be done.

<Utilization of shell buttons and holes. As a point, unachieved>
In a game machine comprising first means and housing means capable of housing the first means, the housing means is an opening for receiving the first means when housing the first means. A gaming machine O1 comprising: a first opening; and a second opening having a width equal to or larger than a width of a gap between the first opening and the first means.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines that are provided with operation means that can be operated by a player and an upper plate that covers the operation means from below, and that the operation means moves up and down with respect to the upper plate. See JP-A-2012-048970). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, when a foreign object is inserted into the gap between the upper tray and the operating means, there is a problem that the foreign object remains inside and may induce a malfunction. .

On the other hand, the gaming machine O1 is provided with the second opening formed with a width equal to or greater than the width of the gap between the first opening of the accommodating means and the first means. It can be easily removed to the outside of the means. As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation in which foreign matter remains inside.

In the gaming machine O1, the housing means includes a support portion that supports the first means, and the second opening is arranged on the opposite side of the support portion with the first means interposed therebetween. game machine O2.

According to the game machine O2, in addition to the effects of the game machine O1, the second opening can be formed while maintaining the support strength of the support part.

A gaming machine O3, in the gaming machine O1 or O2, wherein the accommodating means includes a low water resistant portion having low water resistance, and the second opening is disposed around the low water resistant portion.

According to the game machine O3, in addition to the effects of the game machine O1 or O2, the water can be discharged outward along the second opening before the water reaches the low water resistance portion. That is, the second opening can be used both for the purpose of allowing a predetermined solid object to pass through and for the purpose of discharging a liquid such as water.

In any one of the game machines O1 to O3, a plurality of the second openings are formed, and the plurality of the second openings are configured from a shape based on a shape of the solid object projected in a different direction. A game machine O4 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine O4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines O1 to O3, a plurality of second
The solid object can be easily removed through the second opening because the opening is configured with a shape based on the shape of the solid object in the opposite direction.

A gaming machine O5 characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines O1 to O4, the second opening is arranged closer to the player than the first means.

According to the game machine O5, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines O1 to O4, the shadow of the solid object can be visually recognized by the player when the second opening is partially blocked by the solid object. can be made As a result, it is possible to make the player aware that the solid object is inserted between the first means and the containing means, thereby reducing the possibility that the solid object will continue to remain. .

<Points related to devising the shape of the bottom of the glass frame (front frame)>
A gaming machine comprising a first means and a first supporting means for supporting the first means, wherein the first supporting means comprises a projection-shaped portion projecting from a lower surface. P1.

Here, in game machines such as pachinko machines, there is a game machine in which a glass frame (front frame) in which an operation handle is arranged is configured to be removable from an outer frame in which a game board is arranged (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2015-159837). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, since the bottom surface of the glass frame is formed in a flat shape, there is a risk that it may slip when the bottom surface is covered with a finger. There was a problem.

On the other hand, according to the game machine P1, the protruding shape part protruding from the bottom surface of the first support means functions as a part on which a finger is hooked, thereby suppressing the occurrence of a situation where the first support means slips down from the hand. Therefore, it can be improved from the viewpoint of ease of handling.

It should be noted that the arrangement of the protruding shaped portion is not limited at all, and it is sufficient if the protruding portion protrudes outward from the first support means. For example, it may protrude in the vertical direction, or it may protrude in the front side.

In the game machine P1, the second support means for detachably supporting the first support means is provided, and the protruding shaped portion is separated from the support position where the first support means is supported by the second support means. A game machine P2 characterized in that it is arranged in a row.

According to the gaming machine P2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine P1, the projecting shaped portion is provided downwardly from the lower bottom surface at a position away from the position where the weight of the first supporting means is centrally applied as the supporting position. Therefore, it is possible to make the first support means easier to hold. This facilitates attachment and detachment of the first support means to and from the second support means.

In addition, the position away from the supporting position is not limited at all. For example, the first
It may be positioned closer to the front when the support means is supported on the front side of the second support means, or closer to the other end when the first support means is pivotally supported by the second support means at one end. It may be a position or a position on the opposite side of the pivotal support position with reference to the plate for storing the game balls.

In the game machine P1 or P2, the first support means includes a recessed shape portion that is recessed from the inside to the outside, and the first means leaves a gap between the recessed shape portion and the A game machine P3 characterized in that it is arranged opposite to the recessed shape portion.

According to the game machine P3, in addition to the effects of the game machine P1 or P2, the first means can Powder that may be generated when the first means and the first support means rub against each other due to positional deviation (shaving powder, dust)
can be reduced. In other words, it is possible to suppress the accumulation of powder and clogging of the movable portion, which causes malfunction, and the accumulation of powder in the detection portion of the detection device, resulting in erroneous detection.

In this way, the recessed shape part can be used not only during non-operation (for example, when the glass frame is opened to cancel an error, during maintenance, or when replacing the glass frame), but also during operation (for example, when playing games). It is effective even in the middle or in the game waiting state (demonstration screen display state, etc.).

The game machine P4 is characterized in that, in the game machine P3, the recessed shape portion is arranged inside the range where the projecting shape portion protrudes.

According to the game machine P4, in addition to the effects of the game machine P3, the portion where the recessed shape portion is formed can be prevented from becoming extremely thin compared to other portions and falling into insufficient strength. can. In addition, since the recessed portion is formed behind the projecting portion, the projecting portion can be flexed and deformed in the inward and outward directions. Cracking of the shaped portion can be suppressed.

In addition, the load applied to the projecting shaped portion includes, for example, the weight of the first support means that may be applied during transportation or temporary placement, the load applied when moving the first support means, and the load applied when the first support means is moved.
An example is a load applied by a collision of objects (such as a thousand-ryo box) moved by a player or a store clerk near the support means.

In the gaming machine P4, the first means is a portion of the first support means outside the recessed shape portion and is supported in a manner of contacting the overlapping portion that overlaps the projecting shape portion in the inward and outward directions. A game machine P5, characterized by comprising a contact means, and an operating portion positioned on the contact means and configured to be operable by a player.

According to the game machine P5, in addition to the effects of the game machine P4, while maintaining the effect of the recessed shape portion, it is possible to sufficiently secure the support thickness of the overlapping position that supports the abutting means. It is possible to suppress deformation of the first support means during operation.

In the gaming machine P5, the abutting means includes impact damping means that is continuously formed between the operation part and is capable of attenuating impact, and the impact damping means is located in the recessed shape part. A gaming machine P6 characterized in that it is formed with a width that is shorter than the width.

According to the gaming machine P6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine P5, the impact transmitted from the operating portion to the contact means can be attenuated by the impact attenuation means, and in addition, the distance between the impact attenuation means and the overlapping portion is increased. Therefore, the impact can be attenuated also by the deformation (deflection) of the contact means.

Various aspects are exemplified as the impact attenuation means. For example, it may be a mass member formed of a flexible material, an elastic member such as a coil spring, a device such as a damper, or a damping device.

In any one of the game machines P3 to P6, the concave shape portion has a first portion facing the first means and a second portion extending from the first portion, wherein the first portion The gaming machine P7 is characterized in that the second portion is formed to have a greater degree of depression than the second portion.

According to the game machine P7, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines P3 to P6, a sufficient space is provided in the first part, which is expected to be given a large load, and compared with the first part. By forming the space of the second portion, which is expected to receive a small load from the bottom, to be small, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in designing the concave portion while maintaining high durability.

The degree of recess includes, for example, the depth of recess (the greater the degree of recess, the deeper) and the width of the recess (the greater the degree of recess, the wider).

In addition, when the structure of the first means is complicated and the load applied to the portion facing the first means is smaller than that of the other portions, a concave shape corresponding to the other portions may be used. The recessed degree of the portion may be formed to be large.

Moreover, the recess shape portion may be designed based on, for example, the magnitude of the frequency of occurrence of the load, without being limited to the magnitude of the load. In this case, the frequency of occurrence of the load may be based on the magnitude of the frequency of occurrence during the entire business hours of the game parlor, or the frequency of occurrence in a predetermined state of the gaming machine (a predetermined effect state, a game state such as a specific game state). may be used as a reference.

In any one of the game machines P1 to P7, the protruding portion is formed along the front-rear direction below the bottom portion of the first support means, and the formation range becomes wider toward the front. Gaming machine P8.

According to the game machine P8, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines P1 to P7, the load resistance of the front part where the load concentrates when the first support means stands alone can be improved. The first supporting means can be stored for a long period of time without the first supporting means falling down even in a storage method in which the single supporting means is placed on the floor.

It should be noted that what is considered when designing the projecting shape is not limited to the weight of the first support means. For example, the shape of the protruding shape portion may be designed by considering the magnitude of the load generated when the first means is operated and the frequency of occurrence of the load.

The game machine P9 is characterized in that, in any one of the game machines P1 to P8, the lower surface of the first support means is formed as an inclined surface that is inclined upward in a direction away from the second support means.

According to the game machine P9, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines P1 to P8, the first support means can be easily self-sustained by itself, and the contact portion with the floor is limited to the projecting shape portion. Therefore, it is possible to avoid contamination of portions other than the projecting shape portion.

<Points related to the deformation mode based on the support structure and shape of the scarf>
A gaming machine comprising operating means operable by a player, first supporting means for supporting the operating means, and second supporting means for supporting at least one of the first supporting means and the operating means, The game machine Q1 is characterized in that the first support means is deformable in a direction to narrow the gap between the operation means and the second support means.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines in which operating means such as effect buttons are supported by a glass frame (see, for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2016-106830). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, countermeasures against positional deviation occurring in the area around the operating means due to the load during operation of the operating means are insufficient. There is a problem that there is room for improvement from the point of view.

For example, when the player's weight is applied to the operation means and the operation means descends, the second support means also descends at the same time. At this time, the lowering distance of the front side portion of the second support means tends to be longer than the lowering distance of the operating means. At this time, due to the difference in the descent distance, in the front side part,
A gap may occur between the operating means and the second support means.

On the other hand, according to the game machine Q1, even if the second support means descends excessively, the deformation of the first support means suppresses the formation of a gap between the operation means and the second support means. can do. That is, since the operating means can be allowed to descend excessively (sinking),
It is possible to simplify the manner in which the operating means is supported.

Note that the operation direction is not limited at all. For example, it may be in a descending direction, an ascending direction, a pushing direction along the longitudinal direction, a rotating (turning) direction, or a combination thereof.

In addition, as a form of contact from the operation direction, various forms are exemplified other than the case where the normal line extending from the contact surface coincides with the operation direction. For example, the contact surface may be formed as a surface that spreads in a mortar shape (V-shaped cross section) in the operation direction. In this case, the operation direction can be moved toward the center of the bottom of the mortar (V-shaped) formed by the contact surface, and in addition, since the reaction force increases toward the center of the bottom, the operation means can be effectively supported. can be done systematically.

Also, a common support means for commonly supporting the first support means and the second support means may be provided. In this case, the first support means and the second support means may be connected (coupled, fitted) at a position opposite to the support position supported by the common support means.

In the game machine Q1, the first support means is made of a flexible material, and includes a support portion that supports the operation means, and a game ball that can be held. A game machine Q2 characterized by comprising a game ball holding portion connected to the game machine Q2.

According to the gaming machine Q2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Q1, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a gap between the operation means and the game ball holding portion.

In addition, when the first support means is composed of a flexible member, or when it is connected to the operation means or the game ball holding portion in a floating structure, the vibration generated when the operation means is operated can directly affect the holding of the game ball. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball held in the game ball holding part from being displaced every time the operation means is operated, thereby preventing abnormal noise from being generated.

Various modes are exemplified as the structure for preventing (suppressing) vibration transmission. For example, the first
Vibration transmission may be prevented in the (1) direction, while vibration transmission may be maintained in the second direction. In this case, by generating the vibration in the second direction, it is possible to deliberately generate an abnormal sound, and to execute a sound effect.

In the gaming machine Q2, the operation means includes an operation unit configured to be operable by the player,
The first support means, the farther the connection position with the game ball holding portion is from the operation portion,
A gaming machine Q3 characterized by being arranged on the front side.

In the game machine Q3, in addition to the effects of the game machine Q2, in the vicinity of the operation unit, which is a position that is likely to be displaced due to operation, the connection position is moved to the back side to reduce the absolute amount of displacement. While suppressing the occurrence of a gap between the ball holding part and the first support means, the connection position is arranged on the front side (closer to the player) in the remote part of the operation part, which is a position that is difficult to shift due to the operation. , the design can be improved.

In any one of the game machines Q1 to Q3, the operation means includes an operation portion configured to be operable by the player, a body portion supported by the first support means, and the operation portion and the body portion. and a connecting portion for connecting, wherein the operation portion is formed wider than the connecting portion, and the first support means is formed of a plurality of divided bodies, and is detachable in a direction sandwiching the connecting portion. A gaming machine Q4 characterized in that it is configured in a manner that even the connecting portion is surrounded.

According to the gaming machine Q4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines Q1 to Q3, it is possible to facilitate the assembly of the first support means while sufficiently ensuring the size of the operating portion.

Various modes are exemplified for the method of fixing the first support means formed from the divided body.
For example, a plurality of divided bodies may be connected to the operating means, or one divided body among the plurality of divided bodies may be connected to the operating means and another divided body may be connected to the divided body. You can let me.

Moreover, various aspects are exemplified for the fixing position and fixing manner of the divided body. For example, fitting may be used, or fastening may be used.

In the case of fastening, by fixing the divided body at a plurality of positions along the operation direction of the operation part, the impact generated when the operation part is operated can be distributed and received at the plurality of fixed positions. Since the durability of fixing the divided body can be improved, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of displacement of the first support means.

Furthermore, by setting the tightening direction to a direction that intersects (for example, is perpendicular to) the operating direction of the operating portion, the direction of the load due to the operation of the operating portion can be made different from the tightening direction of the fastening screw. It is possible to suppress loosening of the fastening screw due to impact during operation.

A game machine Q5 characterized in that, in the game machine Q4, a fastening direction of a fastening means for fastening the divided body intersects with an operation direction of the operation portion.

According to the game machine Q5, in addition to the effects of the game machine Q4, it is possible to suppress the load applied in the fastening direction when the operation unit is operated, so that the fastening by the fastening means is loosened during the operation.
It is possible to prevent the separation of the divided body from being released.

Various modes are exemplified as the direction that intersects with the operation direction. For example, if the operation direction is a rotation direction along a circle centered on a predetermined rotation axis, the direction that intersects the operation direction is a direction that intersects a plane perpendicular to the predetermined rotation axis (for example, a predetermined rotation axis). direction along the axis of rotation) is exemplified.

Further, for example, when the operation direction is a direction along a predetermined straight line (push operation or pull-out operation), the direction intersecting the operation direction is along a plane intersecting the predetermined straight line. direction is exemplified.

In this case, when a plurality of predetermined straight lines (straight lines along the operation direction with a high proportion (frequency) of operations) are assumed during the game, at least The fastening direction may be set in a direction along one plane, or in a direction that intersects a plurality of planes, that is, a direction that intersects any of a plurality of predetermined straight lines.

In the gaming machine Q4 or Q5, the divided body has a plurality of fastening points, and a first plane including one fastening point and a second plane including other fastening points are configured as different planes. A gaming machine Q6 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine Q6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Q4 or Q5, even if a large load is applied to one fastening point (including the first plane), the other fastening points are simultaneously subjected to a large load. Therefore, it is possible to prevent simultaneous displacement of the split bodies and loosening of the fastening at both fastening points.

Note that the fastening portion of the divided body may be arranged at a portion where a load concentrates when the operating portion is operated. In this case as well, separate fastening points are arranged on a plane different from the plane on which the load is concentrated, so that it is possible to prevent the position of the divided body from being displaced or the fastening to be loosened due to the load during operation. can be prevented.

In any one of game machines Q4 to Q6, the operation means includes detection means configured to be capable of detecting a predetermined operation of the operation section, and the detection means is arranged at a position away from the division position of the divided body. A gaming machine Q7, characterized in that it is provided with:

According to the game machine Q7, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines Q4 to Q6, the holding force tends to be insufficient at the split position, and when the operation part is moved along with the operation of the operation part at the split position, the operation part and the divided body may rub against each other and powder (such as dust) may be generated. can do. As a result, occurrence of erroneous detection can be suppressed.

In any one of the game machines Q4 to Q7, the operating means is an interference means for interfering with the divided body on the side of the divided body that separates in the dividing direction (approaching and separating direction) when the game is possible. A gaming machine Q8 characterized by comprising:

According to the game machine Q8, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines Q4 to Q7, the interference means can suppress the displacement of the operating means with respect to the divided body in the dividing direction.

The interfering means may interfere with the operating means in the assembled state, but may be formed so as not to interfere with the operating means before entering the assembled state, for example, during assembly work. For example, if the split body is made of a flexible material, the split body can be bent during assembly work, so that interference with the interfering means can be easily avoided, and ease of assembly can be maintained. can do.

Further, for example, even if the divided body is made of a hard material, it may be constructed so as not to interfere with the interfering means in the process of assembling. That is, they may be formed in a shape that does not interfere with each other in the assembly direction (for example, in the direction in which the divided bodies are brought closer together for assembly) before fastening. In this case, it is possible to suppress the positional deviation of the divided body when the game is possible while securing the ease of assembly.

A gaming machine Q9 in any one of the gaming machines Q1 to Q8, wherein the second supporting means comprises a recessed receiving portion that is recessed to receive the first supporting means.

According to the game machine Q9, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines Q1 to Q8, the first support means is received in the receiving concave portion, so that the first support means is displaced under the influence of the positional deviation of the operation means. Even if they are displaced, the operating means and the first supporting means can be quickly returned to their original positions by the repulsive force from the receiving recessed portion.

A game machine according to any one of game machines Q1 to Q9, wherein the first support means is formed in a curved shape along a circle having a center of curvature radius arranged on the operation portion side of the operation means. Q10.

According to the gaming machine Q10, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines Q1 to Q9, it is possible to secure a large area in which the operating section can be arranged, and in addition, when the player grips the operating section, it feels cramped. can prevent you from feeling As a result, it is possible to improve the design of the operating section and improve the operability of the operating section.

In any one of the game machines Q1 to Q10, the first support means includes streak-like portions processed into streaks for reinforcement, and the extending direction of the streak-like portions is formed in different directions for each region. A gaming machine Q11 characterized in that:

According to the game machine Q11, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines Q1 to Q10, the extending direction of the streaky portion is different for each region, so that the first support means having an anisotropic rigidity is provided. can be configured.

In addition, the design standard of the extending direction of the streak is not limited at all. For example, the shape of the first support means may be designed as an extending direction with a good yield, or if the load generated during operation of the operation means acts in different manners for each region, it is the best way to deal with the load. As the direction, the extending direction of the streak may be designed.

<Points regarding the support structure between the speaker and the substrate>
vibrating means; light emitting means arranged at a position to which the vibration is transmitted and capable of emitting light;
, wherein the light emitting means has a displaceable width with respect to the vibrating means.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines in which speakers and light-emitting elements are arranged side by side (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2016-16088). However, the above-described conventional game machine has a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of light emission effects.

More specifically, in the above-described conventional game machine, light-emitting elements (LEDs, fluorescent lamps, discharge tubes, etc.) are arranged behind the speakers in order to prevent the board from receiving the vibrations of the speakers. In the place where it is, it becomes dark because the light emission effect cannot be performed. in this case,
In the front area where the game machine is likely to be visually recognized, the area that can be gorgeously produced is narrowed. In the first place, the size of game machines represented by pachinko machines is generally determined by standards, so
Securing a light emission production area is recognized as an important issue.

On the other hand, according to the game machine R1, since the light emitting means has a displaceable width with respect to the vibrating means, the light emitting means can receive the vibration of the vibrating device. can be brought closer to As a result, the front area can be visually recognized brightly regardless of the vibrating portion of the vibrating means.

In addition, the mode of the vibration means is not limited at all. For example, it may be an acoustic device capable of outputting sound, or an operation device having a built-in vibration device. Further, the means is not limited to the means capable of actively vibrating, and means configured to be able to vibrate (passively vibrate) against the load of an external force may be used.

Various modes are exemplified as the acoustic means. For example, the diaphragm that the speaker has,
For example, an exhaust port for discharging the back pressure of vibration of the speaker seen in a bass reflex type speaker, and a path connected from the vibrating portion to the exhaust port are exemplified.

The vibrating device may be a rotationally driven vibrating device (for example, a vibrator),
A vibrating device (for example, a voice coil motor) that generates vibration by linear driving may be used.

In addition, the form of close arrangement is not limited at all, as long as the player can visually recognize the light of the light emitting means. For example, the vibrating means may be laminated with the light emitting means,
In this case, the stacking direction may be the front-rear direction, may be a direction inclined upward or downward with respect to the front-rear direction, or may be a direction inclined leftward and rightward inward from the left and right ends.

A game machine R2 comprising a plurality of said vibrating means, a light emitting substrate on which said light emitting means are arranged, and said light emitting substrate being stacked on said plurality of said vibrating means in said gaming machine R1. .

According to the game machine R2, in addition to the effects of the game machine R1, the light-emitting substrate tends to be displaced (vibration, displacement, etc.) due to the vibration generated when the vibrating means outputs sound. Since it is possible to change the presentation mode of the light emitting means, the displacement mode of the light emitting substrate can be varied by changing the vibrating means for outputting the sound. ) can be increased.

In addition, the number of light-emitting substrates may be one, or plural. When there are a plurality of substrates, at least one substrate for light emission should be laminated on a plurality of vibrating means. In this case, a combination of a light emitting substrate that is displaced by vibration generated by the vibrating means and a light emitting substrate that is not displaced can be provided.

In the game machine R2, holding means for holding the vibrating means is provided, the light-emitting substrate is not fixed to the holding means in the stacking direction, and the holding means moves the light-emitting device along the stacking direction. A gaming machine R3 characterized in that it is constructed so as to generate a load in a direction that suppresses the displacement of the game board.

According to the game machine R3, in addition to the effects of the game machine R2, it is possible to suppress the displacement of the light-emitting substrate and the holding means.

Note that the non-fixed mode is not limited to the case where the light-emitting substrate and the holding means are not mechanically connected. For example, even if the light-emitting substrate and the holding means are connected with screws, if the fastening force does not act (for example, simply preventing them from coming off), it can be said that they are not fixed.

Moreover, the expression "unfixed" does not assume that a large displacement is allowed. For example, by fixing two plate members that define the front and rear positions of the light emitting substrate to the holding means, the front and rear positions of the light emitting substrate are defined (the front and rear positions are stabilized and small vibrations are allowed), and the shape of the light emitting substrate determines the position of the light emitting substrate. By enclosing the direction orthogonal to the front and rear directions with a slightly larger frame-shaped frame member, it is possible to suppress displacement in directions (up, down, left, and right) different from the front and rear directions.

As a result, compared to the case where the light emitting substrate is fixed to the holding means like the vibrating means, the influence of the vibration generated by the vibrating means on the light emitting substrate can be reduced. can increase

In the gaming machine R2 or R3, a first member and a second member arranged on both sides of the light-emitting substrate in the stacking direction, fixing means for fixing the first member and the second member to the holding means, a regulating means for regulating moving directions of the first member and the second member in the stacking direction, wherein the fixing means advances toward the holding means along a direction inclined with respect to the stacking direction. A game machine R4 characterized by.

According to the game machine R4, in addition to the effects of the game machine R2 or R3, the direction in which the first member and the second member are stacked does not match the direction in which the fixing means advances, and the first member and the second member Since the movement of the fixing means in the direction of movement is restricted, even if the fixing by the fixing means is loosened (even if some of the fixing means are loosened), the displacement of the fixing means is relatively small. can reduce the displacement of the first member and the second member.

This makes it easier to maintain the positional relationship between the first member and the second member. In other words, it is possible to prevent the first member and the second member from separating or coming closer than expected.

In addition, various aspects are illustrated as an aspect to progress. For example, a rod-like member may be inserted through the through hole, or a fastening screw may be fastened to the screw hole.

In any one of the game machines R2 to R4, the light-emitting substrate has a first displacement area configured to be displaceable and a second displacement area whose displacement is suppressed compared to the first displacement area. A gaming machine R5 characterized by:

According to the game machine R5, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines R2 to R4, the change in the light emission mode when the light emission substrate is displaced due to the vibration of the vibration means is changed for each area of the light emission substrate. can be made

Thus, by designing the mode of the light emitting effect in the first displacement area and the mode of the light emitting effect in the second displacement area in a different manner, an excellent effect can be achieved. For example, as the first refracting means for receiving and refracting the light emitted from the first displacement area, a surface emitting means for performing uniform light emission effect by surface emission is arranged, while receiving and refracting the light emitted from the second displacement area. As the second refracting means, an edge light emitting means is arranged to show the player a high-intensity light by totally reflecting the light incident from one edge and emitting it from the other edge. With this, it is possible to perform a novel light-emitting effect in which the light-emitting mode (for example, luminance) differs for each region.

In addition, the aspect of suppressing displacement is not limited at all. For example, the suppression mode may be defined by the positional relationship between the light-emitting substrate and the plurality of vibrating means, or the mode may be defined by the holding mode of the light-emitting substrate.

For example, regarding the positional relationship between a plurality of vibrating means and the light-emitting substrate, in an area that is equidistant from each vibrating means, the influence of one vibrating means is offset by the influence of the other vibrating means. , the displacement may be suppressed.

In any one of the game machines R1 to R5, a fastening screw for fastening and fixing and a facing portion arranged opposite to the head of the fastening screw are provided, and when the fastening screw is loosened, the head of the fastening screw is provided. A gaming machine R6 characterized in that the portion and the facing portion are arranged so as to be able to abut against each other.

According to the game machine R6, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines R1 to R5, by regulating the progress of the fastening screw by the opposing portion, when the fastening screw is loosened, the fastening relationship is further deteriorated. can be prevented.

Various aspects are exemplified as to how to deal with loosening of the fastening screw. For example, when a fastening screw is loosened, it may be configured so that the looseness can be detected electrically. It may be configured so that when it is vibrated, an abnormal noise is generated and the looseness can be noticed, or the looseness can be repaired by regular maintenance without providing a special notification.

In any one of the game machines R1 to R6, comprising a first member and a second member arranged on both sides of the light emitting substrate, and connecting means fastened and fixed to the first member and the second member,
The connecting means is configured in such a manner that deformation in a direction intersecting the connecting direction occurs more easily than deformation in the connecting direction connecting the first member and the second member. Characterized game machine R7.

Here, if the connecting means is constructed in a manner that allows deformation in the connecting direction to occur easily, the interval between the connecting positions will change in both directions, such as extending and contracting, and the advantageous and disadvantageous effects will occur in cycles. This is undesirable.

On the other hand, according to the game machine R7, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines R1 to R6, the connecting means is deformed in the direction intersecting the connecting direction, so that the interval between the connecting positions is changed only to the side that shrinks. It is possible to preferentially generate a load in a direction in which the first member and the second member are pressed against each other.

As a result, the load in the direction in which the first member and the second member are pressed against each other can be increased only when the connecting means is deformed (for example, when a load is applied to the connecting means). While the load in the facing direction of the member and the second member is set low, the load in the direction in which the first member and the second member are pressed against each other can be increased only when the light-emitting substrate is easily shaken by the vibration of the vibrating means. Suppression of shaking of the substrate can be achieved.

It should be noted that the manner in which deformation occurs easily in a predetermined direction is not limited at all. For example, the shape of the connecting means may be formed so that the thickness differs in each direction, or the size of the load applied to the connecting means may change in each direction.

Moreover, the mode of switching the load in the pressing direction is not limited at all. For example, a drive device may be provided to displace either the first member or the second member. According to this, the load in the direction of pressing the first member and the second member against each other can be changed at any timing by controlling the driving device.

In any one of game machines R1 to R7, the vibrating means is configured to change the direction of vibration between a first direction along the displaceable width and a second direction crossing the first direction. Characterized game machine R8.

According to the game machine R8, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines R1 to R7, it is possible to configure a plurality of types of effects of the vibration of the vibration means on the light emitting means.

<Technical concept of side light emitting means. Edge light travels to the side and back of the member>
Light emitting means configured to be capable of emitting light, and light guiding means capable of guiding light, wherein the light guiding means guides the light emitted from the light emitting means in a first mode. A gaming machine S1 comprising light guiding means and second light guiding means for guiding the light emitted from the light emitting means in a mode different from the first mode.

Here, in game machines such as pachinko machines, there is a game machine configured so that LED light is incident from the end of a plate-shaped member and emitted from the surface of the plate-shaped member (for example, JP-A-2015-
159875). However, the conventional game machine described above has a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of the effect of the lighting effect.

More specifically, as in the above-described conventional game machine, when the LED board formed from a flat plate is used to perform the lighting effect, the board can be made cheaper, which helps to reduce the cost. It was difficult to achieve both

That is, a difference in light emission mode (brightness, intensity, luminance, etc.) occurs between a position closer to the LED and a position farther from the LED, which tends to reduce the performance effect. It is possible to increase the number of LEDs in areas that tend to be (dark), but in that case, the number of LED elements required for the effect will increase with respect to the area of the LED substrate, resulting in hindrance to cost reduction. It will be. Therefore, it was unavoidable to choose between improvement in performance effect and cost reduction.

On the other hand, according to the game machine S1, since the light guide means is configured to be able to guide the light from the light emitting means in different modes, even if the distance with respect to the light emitting means is different, the presentation effect is lowered. (change) can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to improve from the viewpoint of the production effect of the lighting production while reducing the cost.

Various modes are exemplified as modes of the light guiding means. For example, it may be a light-transmitting member made of a colorless or colored transparent member, a member that emits light in a nearly uniform manner like frosted glass, or a member formed by hardening a milky-white resin or the like. It may be a white member that is transparent, a member that allows light to pass through a gap similar to a screen door or a shoji, a member that projects (projects) a display on the member itself similar to a transmissive liquid crystal, or others. The member of the mode may be used.

A gaming machine S2 in the gaming machine S1, characterized in that the light guide means is constructed so that the way of lighting changes step by step according to the difference in the distance from the light emitting means.

According to the game machine S2, in addition to the effects of the game machine S1, even when the substrate on which the light guide means is arranged is formed of a flat plate, the light guide means is configured in a plate shape forming a curved surface. when
It is possible to execute an effect in which the curved surface is uniformly (uniformly) illuminated.

The game machine S1 or S2 includes housing means for housing the light emitting means, and a light emitting substrate on which the light emitting means is disposed, the housing means supporting the light emitting substrate and the light guiding means. is fixed at least at a first position; and shielding means configured to be able to shield between the light guide means and the player, and the first position is outside the outer shape of the shielding means. A game machine S3 characterized in that it is arranged in the direction of the game machine S3.

In the gaming machine S3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine S1 or S2, the fixing at the first position can be loosened while the shielding means is still assembled, so the position of the light guiding means relative to the supporting means can be easily adjusted. can be adjusted. Therefore, it becomes easy to repair the misalignment between the light emitting means and the light guiding means, and the maintainability can be improved.

The mode of shielding by the shielding means is not limited at all. For example, while shielding the light guide means so that the player cannot touch it, it may be configured so that it can be seen, or it may be configured so that the player cannot touch or see the light guide means. You can

In addition, when the first positions are formed at a plurality of positions, all the first positions may be arranged outside the outline of the shielding means, or at least one of the plurality of first positions may It may be arranged outside the outline of the shielding means.

In the gaming machine S3, the light-emitting substrate is not fixed to the support means and the light guide means, the light guide means has a long plate shape, and the first position is the light guide means. A gaming machine S4 characterized by being arranged at an end in the longitudinal direction.

According to the game machine S4, in addition to the effects of the game machine S3, the light guide means is formed into a long plate shape,
Since the first position is arranged at the end in the longitudinal direction, it is possible to easily correct misalignment of the light guide means by loosening the fixation of the first position and applying a load in the lateral direction of the light guide means. .

Specifically, the correction of the positional deviation of the light guide means is supplemented by deformation of the light guide means in the lateral direction,
By compensating for slippage by applying a strong load, the position of the light guide means can be adjusted even if only one end in the longitudinal direction is loosened and the other end is kept fixed. Misalignment can be easily repaired.

In addition, in the case of the support mode in which the light guide means presses the light emitting substrate against the support means, the degree of support of the light emitting substrate by the support means can be weakened as the light guide means bends and deforms.
Therefore, even if the light guide means is not removed from the support means, by loosening the fixing at the first position and bending and deforming the light guide means, the degree of support of the light emitting substrate can be weakened, and the light emitting substrate is loaded in this state. By providing , it is possible to correct the positional deviation of the light-emitting substrate.

In addition, the adjustment width of the position adjustment is not limited at all. For example, it is based on a design that is mechanically regulated so that the portion to be irradiated by the light guide means does not completely deviate from the outer shape of the light emitting means arranged on the light emitting substrate when viewed from the irradiation direction. The adjustment width may be enough to correct the positional deviation in (small adjustment width). The position of the light guiding means may be adjustable to a position where it is completely removed by sight (large adjustment range).

In this case, it is possible to change the aspect of the luminous effect visually recognized during the same effect while the light emitting means and the light guiding means have the same structure. In this case, for example, when a game machine with the same configuration is prepared so that it can be played with a different game feature (for example, when configuring a game machine with different specifications),
It is possible to change the mode of light emitting performance by adjusting the position of the light guide means without greatly changing the mechanical structure of each part, so that the burden (for example, cost) associated with the manufacture of the game machine can be reduced.

In addition, the non-fixing mode is not limited at all. For example, a mode other than the case of being fixed by a fixture such as a fastening screw may generally be expressed as non-fixed. Also, the term "edge" is used to express the intention of avoiding being limited to the edge. In other words, the first position may be arranged at a position including the periphery of the ends in the longitudinal direction.

In the gaming machine S3 or S4, the shielding means is fixed to the supporting means, and the light guide means and the shielding means are configured to reduce relative positional deviation as the distance between them is shortened. A game machine S5, characterized in that it comprises a portion, and the positional deviation prevention portion comprises a fixing portion with respect to the support means.

Here, since it is necessary to connect electrical wiring to the light-emitting substrate, misalignment or chipping of the wiring directly affects malfunction of the light-emitting means. It is preferable that the substrate and the supporting means are configured so as not to be easily misaligned.

Considering the presentation effect, it is preferable that the position of the light guide means should be easy to align with the light emitting substrate, on the premise that it is not easily misaligned with the light emitting substrate. , it is also considered to be better to hold on the side of the support means. On the other hand, if there is a positional deviation between the light guiding means and the shielding means, the light guiding means and the shielding means may collide with each other, resulting in a poor appearance.

Since the shielding means is a portion that can be touched by the player, it is preferable to fix it to the supporting means as a base in consideration of strength. In this way, there were various forms of support expected for each means.

According to the gaming machine S5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine S3 or S4, the positional deviation preventing portion facilitates the mutual positioning of the light guiding means and the shielding means during assembly without directly fixing them. In addition, it is possible to easily maintain the positional relationship between the light guiding means and the shielding means during the game.

In addition, the mode of the positional deviation prevention portion is not limited at all. For example, it may be concavo-convex that has the same shape and can be fitted, or the concavo-convex that can be fitted may be one whose shape along the assembly direction does not change, or a convex that tapers closer to the mating member. It may be composed of a shape and an expanding concave shape.

In any one of the game machines S1 to S5, the light guide means corresponds to a main body, a separate extension part extending from the main body to the side away from the light emitting means, and an outer shape of the extension part. and a facing extending portion extending toward the light emitting means with a cross-sectional shape of the A game machine S6 characterized by comprising a part.

According to the game machine S6, since it is possible to suppress the light emitted from the total reflection light-emitting portion from entering the portions other than the opposing extending portion, the separating extending portion and the opposing extending portion and the other portion can be suppressed. The boundary between the two can be clarified, and an effect of changing the mode of light (separating the light) can be executed at the boundary of a short width.

Note that the mode of total reflection is not limited at all. For example, the positional relationship between the light guiding means and the light emitting means, the direction of the irradiated light, the width of the irradiated light, the material and shape of the light guiding means,
and a combination thereof.

In the gaming machine S6, the light guide means includes a covering portion that covers the light-emitting substrate and an outer shape of the covering portion, and is formed in a frame shape similar to the outer shape of the light-emitting substrate. A gaming machine S7, characterized in that it comprises a frame portion that is connected to the frame portion, wherein the facing extending portion extends from the covering portion and is coupled to the frame portion.

According to the gaming machine S7, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine S6, light can be incident on the frame from the connecting portion, so that the effect of the light emission presentation of the frame can be improved, and the opposing extension portion can be By functioning as reinforcing ribs, the strength of the light guiding means can be improved.

According to this, if the frame portion extends to the back of the light emitting means along the direction of the light emitted from the light emitting means, it is possible to perform an effect in which the side opposite to the emission direction is illuminated.

In the game machine S7, the opposing extension part is formed in an elongated shape along the covering part, is connected to the frame part at one end in the longitudinal direction, and extends from the frame part at the other end. A game machine S8 characterized by separating.

According to the game machine S8, in addition to the effects of the game machine S7, based on the design of the facing extension part,
Since it is possible to form an end portion that allows light to enter the frame portion in the longitudinal direction and an end portion that restricts the incidence of light, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in designing light emission effects using the frame portion.

In any one of the game machines S6 to S8, the light emitting means is arranged at the projected position of the facing extension portion and the separated extension portion, and the tip shape of the separated extension portion has an inclination angle with respect to the light irradiation direction. The game machine S9 is characterized in that the smaller the size, the closer to the ends of the cross-sectional shapes of the opposed extension portion and the separated extension portion.

According to the game machine S9, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines S6 to S8, even if the tip shape of the separating extension part is inclined with respect to the plane of the light emitting substrate, the light emission intensity of the light emitting means is increased. is kept uniform, the light emitting performance can be performed without giving the player a feeling of discomfort. That is, the entire cross-sectional shape of the separated extending portion can be illuminated to the same extent.

<Technical concept of top lighting means. Points for changing the lighting method according to the distance from the light source>
a light-emitting means capable of emitting light, and a light-receiving means capable of receiving light, wherein the light-receiving means receives the light emitted from the light-emitting means in a first mode; A gaming machine T1 comprising a second light-receiving means for receiving the light emitted from the light-emitting means in a manner different from the first manner.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, LED light is made to enter from the edge of a planar member,
There is a game machine configured to emit light from the surface of the planar member (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2015
-159875). However, the conventional game machine described above has a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of the effect of the lighting effect.

More specifically, as in the above-described conventional game machine, when the LED board formed from a flat plate is used to perform the lighting effect, the board can be made cheaper, which helps to reduce the cost. It was difficult to achieve both

That is, a difference in light emission mode (brightness, intensity, luminance, etc.) occurs between a position closer to the LED and a position farther from the LED, which tends to reduce the performance effect. It is possible to increase the number of LEDs in areas that tend to be (dark), but in that case, the number of LED elements required for the effect will increase with respect to the area of the LED substrate, resulting in hindrance to cost reduction. It will be. Therefore, it was unavoidable to choose between improvement in performance effect and cost reduction.

On the other hand, according to the game machine T1, the light receiving means is configured to be able to receive the light from the light emitting means in different modes, so even if the distance with respect to the light emitting means is different, the production effect is reduced (change ) can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to improve from the viewpoint of the production effect of the lighting production while reducing the cost.

Various modes are exemplified as modes of the light receiving means. For example, it may be a light-transmitting member made of a colorless or colored transparent member, a member that emits light in a nearly uniform manner like frosted glass, or a member formed by hardening a milky-white resin or the like. It may be a white member that is transparent, a member that allows light to pass through a gap similar to a screen door or a shoji, a member that projects (projects) a display on the member itself similar to a transmissive liquid crystal, or others. The member of the mode may be used.

In game machine T1, game machine T2 is characterized in that the light-receiving means is constructed so that the way of lighting changes in stages according to the difference in the distance from the light-emitting means.

According to the game machine T2, in addition to the effects of the game machine T1, even when the board on which the light receiving means is arranged is formed of a flat plate, the light receiving means is configured in a plate shape forming a curved surface. to the
It is possible to execute an effect in which the curved surface is uniformly (uniformly) illuminated.

The game machine T1 or T2 includes housing means for housing the light emitting means, and a light emitting substrate on which the light emitting means is disposed, and the housing means is arranged to face one surface of the light emitting substrate. A game machine T3, further comprising partitioning means for partitioning an area defined by the partitioning means, wherein the light-receiving means is configured to change the lighting method for each area partitioned by the partitioning means.

According to the game machine T3, in addition to the effects of the game machine T1 or T2, the frame of the dividing means is arranged at the boundary where the lighting of the light receiving means changes, so that the lighting of the light receiving means can be changed rapidly. It is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity given to the player when the player is allowed to do so. As a result, even when the number of light-emitting substrates is small, it is possible to improve the performance effect of the light-emitting performance using the light-emitting substrates.

In the game machine T3, the game machine T4 is characterized in that the light-emitting substrate is supported by the partitioning means in a direction opposed to the biasing force applied to the light-emitting substrate so that the light-emitting substrate is aligned.

According to the game machine T4, in addition to the effects of the game machine T3, it is possible to facilitate the assembly work by facilitating the alignment of the light emitting substrate and the partitioning means. and the partitioning means can be suppressed from being misaligned.

In the game machine T3 or T4, the partitioning means has a through hole formed corresponding to the shape of the light emitting portion disposed on the light emitting substrate, and the light receiving means is an insertion through the through hole. A gaming machine T5 characterized by comprising a part.

According to the gaming machine T5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine T3 or T4, the distance between the light-emitting portion and the light-receiving means can be narrowed without being affected by the size of the dividing means, and the light incident on the inside of the insertion portion can be reduced. Total reflection is facilitated, and reduction in the intensity of light emitted from the light emitting means can be prevented.

In the gaming machine T5, the partitioning means is provided with a non-insertion through-hole that is bored corresponding to the shape of the light-emitting portion arranged on the light-emitting substrate and does not receive the insertion portion, and the non-insertion through-hole is ,
A gaming machine T6 characterized in that the opening is formed in such a manner that it expands as it separates from the light emitting substrate, and is brought into contact with the light receiving means from the opposite side of the light emitting substrate.

According to the game machine T6, in addition to the effects of the game machine T5, the through hole through which the insertion portion is not inserted can be configured as means for emitting light emitted from the light emitting portion at a wide angle, and in addition, the light receiving means Light leakage can be suppressed by narrowing the gap between the .

In any one of game machines T1 to T6, a game machine characterized in that the light receiving means has a larger cross-sectional outline on a side farther from the light emitting means than on a side closer to the light emitting means. T7.

According to the game machine T7, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines T1 to T6, the area where the player visually recognizes the light through the light receiving means can be made larger than the area where the light emitting means is formed. can be done.

In the gaming machine T7, the light-receiving means includes a light-conducting portion extending from the light-emitting means side, and a cut-out boundary surface portion intersecting with the light-conducting portion. The gaming machine T8 is characterized in that it is arranged at a position where the front-rear direction surface portion in the extending direction is shorter than the inclined surface portion.

According to the gaming machine T8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine T7, even when the light receiving means is formed in a manner in which the outer shape of the cross-sectional shape increases toward the front, it is possible to form the punched boundary surface portion. Even so, the thickness of the light-conducting portion can be easily made uniform. This makes it possible to easily maintain total reflection over the extending direction of the light-conducting portion.

In the gaming machine T7 or T8, the light receiving means has a light conducting portion extending from the light emitting means side, and the light conducting portion is formed in a line shape including the base end portion of the insertion portion. Characterized game machine T9.

According to the game machine T9, in addition to the effects of the game machine T7 or T8, the light emitted from the LED of the light emitting means can be easily visually recognized as linear light (light in which light from a point light source is mixed). Therefore, the feeling of a point light source can be reduced without increasing the number of LEDs arranged.

<Point composed of two directions in which the fastening direction is inclined>
A gaming machine comprising first means and second means fixed to the first means by fixing means, wherein the fixing means includes first fixing means for generating a fixing force in a first direction; and second fixing means for generating a fixing force in a second direction that is inclined with respect to the direction.

Here, in game machines such as pachinko machines, there is a game machine in which a front frame is configured by combining a plurality of structures with fastening screws that are inserted in the front-rear direction (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-41185). . However, in the above-described conventional game machine, the shape of the structure is regulated by the arrangement of the fixing means, and there is a problem that the degree of freedom in designing the structure is reduced.

For example, when a fastening screw that is inserted in the front-rear direction is inserted through the fixing means, a light-emitting member such as an LED cannot be arranged at a position where the fastening screw is inserted in a cross section that interferes with the fastening screw when viewed from the front. That is, since the area where the fixing means can be arranged practically coincides with the limit position of the outer shape of the light emitting member, the size of the structure is limited to the position where the fixing means can be arranged.

In other words, the shape of the supporting plate that supports the light-emitting substrate from the back side must be larger than the light-emitting substrate by the size of the fixing means. This limits the size of the light-emitting substrate.

On the other hand, according to the game machine U1, since the insertion direction of the fastening screw for fixing the fixing means is composed of the first direction and the second direction that are inclined to each other, all the fixing means are aligned along the front-rear direction. As compared with the case where it is inserted, it is possible to ensure a wider performance area on the side that the player visually recognizes.

In the gaming machine U1, the fixing means is characterized in that the external surface is provided with a first surface formed along the first direction and a second surface formed along the second direction. Game machine U2
.

According to the game machine U2, in addition to the effects of the game machine 1, since the outer surface is formed along the direction of the fixing force applied to the fixing means, even if the outer surface is likely to be deformed by an external force, sufficient resistance is provided. A force can be generated, and deformation of the outer surface can be suppressed.

A gaming machine U3, wherein at least one of the fixing locations of the fixing means is provided with suppressing means for suppressing a decrease in fixing force in the gaming machine U1 or U2.

Here, assuming that the first means and the second means are composed of a resin molded product, and that the resin mold for manufacturing is pulled out in one direction, the first direction or the second direction and the pulled-out direction are inclined to each other. Since it is inclined, there is a possibility that the fixing force of the first or second fixing means corresponding to the inclined side may be weakened.

On the other hand, according to the game machine U3, in addition to the effects of the game machine U1 or U2, the reduction of the fixing force can be suppressed by the suppressing means, so that the fastening screw used for fastening the fixing means can be used as a common part. can do.

In addition, the structure of the said suppression means is not limited at all. For example, it may be loosening preventing means for preventing loosening of fixation, or loosening restricting means for restricting further loosening when fixation loosening occurs.

In the game machine U3, the game machine U4 is characterized in that the suppressing means is provided with an informing means capable of informing of the fixation failure of the fixing means.

According to the game machine U4, in addition to the effects of the game machine U3, the notifying means notifies the fixing failure of the fixing means.

Note that the configuration of the notification means is not limited at all. For example, it may be a means for electrically notifying such as a detecting means such as a sensor, or a structural means for causing a change in appearance.
Structural means include, for example, transmission change means for changing the transmission strength of vibrations generated inside the game machine to the outside of the game machine, light effect change means for blocking light emitted from the inside and generating shadows that can be seen from the outside, Vibration notification means for making the player aware of it by contacting the vibrating portion of the vibrating device to generate an abnormal sound or strengthen the vibration is exemplified.

In any one of the game machines U2 to U4, a third means disposed between the first means and the second means is provided, and the third means is a player between the first surface and the second surface. A gaming machine U5 characterized in that it is disposed between.

According to the game machine U5, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines U2 to U4, the first means and the second means set the direction in which the resistance force can be generated as the component direction of the fixing force of the fixing means to a plurality of directions. Therefore, it is possible to easily hold the third means safely.

Note that the configuration of the third means is not limited at all. For example, the third means may be configured to allow the player to visually recognize the first means but not to visually recognize the second means. In this case, by setting the widening side between the first surface and the second surface to the first means side and the narrowing side to the second means side, a wide area to be visually recognized by the player is secured while the side not to be visually recognized is secured. The area occupied by the configuration can be narrowed.

The gaming machine U5 is characterized by comprising a fourth means disposed on the opposite side of the third means with the first surface interposed therebetween, wherein the first surface is formed to be inclined with respect to the front-rear direction. game machine U
6.

According to the gaming machine U6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine U5, interference between the area occupied by the third means and the area occupied by the fourth means in a front view can be achieved. , a large area can be secured for placement.

A game machine U7 characterized in that, in any one of the game machines U1 to U6, the first fixing means and the second fixing means are arranged in pairs with a predetermined space therebetween.

According to the game machine U7, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines U1 to U6, the first fixing means and the second fixing means are arranged in a set with a predetermined space therebetween. It is possible to avoid deformation along the direction in which the fixing force is generated from occurring in the other fixing means. That is, it is possible to suppress the deformation in the direction intersecting with the direction in which the fixing force is generated, so it is possible to avoid loosening of the fixing means.

<The rigidity of the game board assists the decrease in rigidity due to the notch (through hole) on the side of the back case>
In a game machine comprising a game board and facing means having edges facing the game board, the facing means has adjacent parts arranged close to the game board on the left and right edges of the game board. , and a gaming machine ZA1 characterized in that the forming aspect of the adjacent portion is left-right asymmetrical.

2. Description of the Related Art Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine that includes a game board that forms a game area and a back case in which movable units and the like are arranged (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-77627). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, the internal space of the back case is eroded by the space occupied by the connection position between the game board and the back case, so it is difficult to secure a sufficient space for arranging the movable units and the like. There was a problem of difficulty.

In particular, in a right-handed machine that performs a right-handed game in a variable probability state (high probability state) or a jackpot game (special game state), the player's line of sight is often concentrated on the right side of the game area. It has been required to secure an internal space of the back case on the back side of the channel (the channel on the right side of the liquid crystal device) through which the hit game ball flows down.

On the other hand, according to the game machine ZA1, by making the form of the proximity part left-right asymmetrical,
Since the arrangement of the left and right edges of the facing means with respect to the game board can be left-right asymmetrical, instead of sacrificing the internal area of one of the left and right facing means, the internal area of the other of the left and right facing means is secured. can be made easier. As a result, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in arranging the facing means with respect to the game board, to ensure sufficient space for arranging the movable units, etc., and to improve the degree of freedom in performance that is visually recognized by the player through the game board. be able to. For example, the vicinity of the edge of the game board (for example, the right-handed channel) can be illuminated by the light-emitting means of the moving accessory, or by the light emitted from the liquid crystal display device.

In addition, the form of formation of the proximity part is not limited at all. For example, it may be in contact with the game board, may be arranged away from the game board, or may be a combination thereof.

In addition, the formation mode of the proximity part is not limited at all. For example, it is possible to secure a wide area in which the connection portion (contact portion) used for connection with the game board is not formed,
The connection portion (contact portion) may be arranged after suppressing the area occupied by the connection portion (contact portion).

Moreover, the aspect of left-right asymmetry is not limited at all. For example, the area in which the proximal portion is formed may be asymmetrical, the direction of formation of the proximal portion may be left-right asymmetrical, and the functional portion provided in the proximal portion (the female screw to which the fastening screw is fastened and fixed may be The formation position, the formation direction (for example, the direction in which the insertion direction of the fastening screw is set in the front-rear direction, the left-right direction, or another direction) or the number of formations of the fastening portion to be formed, etc., may be left-right asymmetric.

In the game machine ZA1, the facing means includes an arrangement section in which the proximity section is formed at the end on the game board side and arranged to face each other in the left-right direction, and the proximity section is formed in the left-right direction with respect to the arrangement section. A gaming machine ZA2 characterized by being asymmetrically configured.

According to the game machine ZA2, in addition to the effects of the game machine ZA1, the area between the arrangement portions can be configured asymmetrically with respect to the game board. In addition, the form in which the formation direction is left-right asymmetrical is not limited at all. For example, the forming direction may be opposite to the left-right symmetrical direction (same direction for both left and right), or the forming direction may be a direction intersecting left and right (for example, a direction perpendicular to each other).

Examples of the direction of formation include the direction in which the plate-shaped portion extends (the direction in which it is provided), the direction in which the recessed portion is recessed as a notch (the direction in which it is cut), and the like.

In the gaming machine ZA1 or ZA2, the proximity portion includes a facing surface that faces the game board and a facing side that faces the game board, and is compared to the left side of the game board. The game machine ZA3 is characterized in that the portion of the game board facing the right side has a larger proportion of the facing side than the facing surface.

According to the game machine ZA3, in addition to the effects of the game machine ZA1 or ZA2, the lateral width occupied by the proximity portion can be narrowed on the right side of the game board compared to the left side of the game board.

A game machine ZA4 characterized in that, in any one of the game machines ZA1 to ZA3, the game machine ZA4 is characterized by comprising suppressing means for suppressing displacement of the game board or the opposing means in the opposing direction.

According to the game machine ZA4, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines ZA1 to ZA3, the rigidity of the opposing means can be reinforced by the suppressing means. In addition, arrangement|positioning of a suppressing means is not limited at all. For example, it may be disposed at a position away from the game board (including a position in contact with the facing means) or at a position away from the facing means (including a position in contact with the game board). However, it may be arranged at a position between the game board and the opposing means (including a position in contact with at least one of the game board or the opposing means).

A gaming machine ZA5 characterized in that, in the gaming machine ZA4, the suppressing means is arranged on the gaming board side.

According to the game machine ZA5, in addition to the effects of the game machine ZA4, it is possible to maintain the strength (ensure the rigidity) of the game unit as a whole without providing a special member for the opposing means.

A gaming machine ZA6 in the gaming machine ZA4 or ZA5, wherein the suppressing means includes an overlapping portion that overlaps the outermost side surface of the opposing means in a front view.

According to the game machine ZA6, in addition to the effects of the game machine ZA4 or ZA5, it is possible to prevent sacrificing the degree of freedom in the design of the inside of the game board. It is possible to maintain the strength (ensure the rigidity) of the game unit as a whole.

In any one of the game machines ZA1 to ZA6, the facing means includes a non-contact portion that does not contact the game board at the edge of the outermost side in the predetermined direction on the game board side. Characteristic game machine ZA7.

According to the game machine ZA7, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines ZA1 to ZA6, the gap between the game board and the non-contact part can be used as a location for the driving device of the variable winning opening, and the driving device It can be effectively used as a path for wires connected to a winning sensor or a light-emitting device, or as a location for arranging a light-emitting device.

In any one of game machines ZA1 to ZA7, the game board is made of a resin material,
A game machine characterized in that the facing means includes effect means disposed between the game board and a front end of the effect means arranged forward of the front end of the facing means. ZA8
.

According to the game machine ZA8, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines ZA1 to ZA7, the arrangement space of the effect means can be extended to the front side.

<Various lighting modes for movable accessories>
light emitting means for irradiating a predetermined light emitting region with light; displacement means configured such that a first position at least partially overlapping the light emitting region when viewed from a predetermined direction is included in at least a portion of a displacement section;
, wherein the light-emitting area includes a possible area configured to be visible in a plurality of types of light-emitting modes corresponding to the arrangement of the displacement means.

2. Description of the Related Art Among game machines such as pachinko machines, there is a game machine configured such that a light emitting means and a displacement means overlap when viewed from the front (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-159178). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, there is a problem that the light emitting means and the displacing means are visually recognized individually, and the presentation effect using the overlap is insufficient. That is, the displacement means is arranged in front of the light emitting means so that the light emitting means is hidden by the displacement means,
There was a problem that the production effect was insufficient.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine ZB1, since the light emitting means is configured to be visually recognizable in different light emitting modes depending on the mode of the displacement means, it is possible to diversify the presentation modes.

The mode of the displacement means includes, for example, an arrangement mode of the displacement means, a displacement mode of the displacement means, an orientation (posture) mode of the displacement means, a light emission mode of the light emitting means provided in the displacement means, and the like. exemplified. Examples of the mode of arrangement of the displacement means include a case where the displacement means partially overlaps the light emitting means, a case where the displacement means entirely overlaps the light emitting means, and the like. As the displacement mode of the displacement means,
Examples include a case where the displacement means is displaced toward the light emitting means and a case where the displacement means is displaced away from the light emitting means. The orientation (orientation) of the displacing means includes a case where the front surface of the displacement means faces the light emitting means side, a case where the back surface of the displacement means faces the light emitting means side, a case where the surface between them faces the light emitting means side, and the like. exemplified.

The light emission mode of the light emitting means includes a mode in which the light emitting means that emits light toward the displacement means lights, blinks, or goes out, and a mode that the light emitting means that emits light toward the side away from the displacement means lights, blinks, or goes out. are exemplified.

In the game machine ZB1, the possible area is a first state in which the displacement means is arranged at the first position and a second state in which the displacement means is arranged at a second position different from the first position, The game machine ZB2 is characterized in that it is possible to configure a case where the light emission modes viewed from the predetermined direction are different.

According to the game machine ZB2, in addition to the effects of the game machine ZB1, the light emission mode can be changed by changing the position of the displacement means. can change suddenly.

In the gaming machine ZB1 or ZB2, the light emitting means includes a substrate on which a light emitting portion is arranged, and a refracting means arranged to refract the light emitted from the light emitting portion, and the substrate A game machine ZB3, wherein the refraction means includes a first refraction section which is arranged outside the possible area when viewed in a direction, and which overlaps the possible area when viewed in the predetermined direction.

According to the game machine ZB3, in addition to the effects of the game machine ZB1 or ZB2, the mode of the light visually recognized through the first refraction unit is changed by combining the light emitted from the light emitting unit and the color and brightness based on the displacement means. can be expressed by

Further, by narrowing the formation range of the substrate, it is possible to secure a region for arranging other components such as a driving device for generating the driving force of the displacement means and a space for displacing the displacement means.

In game machine ZB3, game machine ZB4 is characterized in that the displacement means has a larger displacement at a position overlapping with the possible area when viewed from the predetermined direction than displacement at other positions.

According to the game machine ZB4, in addition to the effects of the game machine ZB3, the displacement of the displacement means is suppressed at the position where the light emitting means occupies a large space, and the displacement of the displacement means is increased at the position where the space occupied by the light emitting means is small. Therefore, the degree of freedom of displacement of the displacement means can be maximized while reducing the space occupied by the light emitting means and the displacement means.

It should be noted that the magnitude of the displacement is not limited at all. For example, the absolute value of the displacement of the displacement means may be compared, the positive and negative values may be set in opposite directions for comparison, the displacement in a predetermined direction (component) of the displacement means may be compared, The comparison may include the number of members configured in the displacement means to be displaced.

In any one of game machines ZB1 to ZB4, the displacement means includes second light emitting means for emitting light in a manner visible from the predetermined direction, and transmitting means for transmitting light emitted from the second light emitting means. The gaming machine ZB5 is characterized in that the transmission means has a shape in which a width in a direction intersecting the direction of displacement of the displacement means changes along the displacement direction of the displacement means.

According to the game machine ZB5, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the game machines ZB1 to ZB4, the width of the light of the second light emitting means visually recognized through the possible area is determined by the position of the displacement section where the displacement means is arranged. can be changed by

A gaming machine ZB6 characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines ZB1 to ZB5, the possible area is arranged on the center side of a window that opens so that the liquid crystal display area can be visually recognized.

According to the game machine ZB6, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines ZB1 to ZB5, the change in the lighting mode of the possible area can be used to guide the player's line of sight toward the liquid crystal display area.

Note that the manner of arranging the possible regions is not limited at all, and various manners are exemplified.
For example, it may be scattered around the window (including the case where the possible area is one place),
A circular (arc) shape surrounding the window may also be used.

In any one of game machines ZB1 to ZB6, comprising a substrate on which the light emitting means is arranged,
The game machine ZB7 is characterized in that the board has no fastening means for fastening at the end on the possible area side.

According to the gaming machine ZB7, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines ZB1 to ZB6, it is possible to secure a space for arranging the light emitting means on the side of the possible area, and to prevent the shadow of the fastening means from occurring in the possible area. can be avoided.

A gaming machine ZB8, wherein the gaming machine ZB7 is characterized by comprising a covering means covering a space between the possible area and the board when viewed from the predetermined direction.

According to the game machine ZB8, in addition to the effects of the game machine ZB7, the covering means hides the boundary position between the possible area and the board, so that the visibility of light is not deteriorated near the edge of the board. Even if there is, it is possible to avoid showing it to the player.

A gaming machine ZB7 or ZB8 comprising board holding means for holding the board, the board holding means comprising a gap forming portion for forming a gap for facilitating assembly of the board,
The game machine ZB9 is characterized in that the gap forming portion is closed in the assembled state.

According to the game machine ZB9, in addition to the effect of the game machine ZB7 or ZB8, the gap forming part can facilitate the assembly of the board, while avoiding problems such as light leakage from the gap forming part. . Also, this gap forming portion may be used for engagement with another member and utilized for positioning of the other member.

In any one of game machines ZB7 to ZB9, the board is provided with a connector section to which wiring is connected, and the connector section is arranged at a position away from the end on the possible area side. Game machine ZB10.

According to the game machine ZB10, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines ZB7 to ZB9, by applying a load to the wiring connected to the connector part, a moment originating from the end on the possible area side can be generated. Therefore, even if the substrate cannot be taken out directly, the substrate can be easily taken out.

<Transmission of driving force to multiple members, switching between transmission and interruption>
Displacing means configured to be displaceable, driving means for generating a driving force for displacing the displacing means, and driving force generated by the driving means is configured to be able to be transmitted to the displacement means in a predetermined state. and transmission means, wherein the transmission means comprises a transmission part for transmitting a driving force to a predetermined transmitted part of the displacement means, and in a driving state of the driving means, the transmission part A gaming machine ZC1 characterized in that the displacement of the displacement means can be suppressed when it is not in contact with the part.

In game machines such as pachinko machines, there is a game machine in which a cylindrical portion used for driving force transmission is guided by a concave portion of a displacement member, and the arrangement of the cylindrical portion corresponds to the posture of the displacement member (for example, See JP-A-2010-234152). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine,
Since the posture of the displacement member is maintained by the support by the columnar portion, there is a problem that it is difficult to perform other effects using the columnar portion while the posture of the displacement member is maintained.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine ZC1, since the displacement of the displacement means can be suppressed even when the transmission part is in the non-contact state, the transmission part can be changed to another effect while the posture of the displacement means is maintained. can be used.

In addition, the aspect of a transmission means is not limited at all. For example, a single gear or a plurality of gears arranged between the displacement means and the driving means may be used, or a mechanism such as a slider crank or a cam in which a plurality of members interact with each other may be used.

It should be noted that the manner in which displacement can be suppressed is not limited at all. For example, it may be biased by gravity or an elastic force based on a spring member, it may be locked (engaged) by a claw-like member, or it may be restrained by coming into contact with a member functioning as a stopper. A mode in which the In addition, as suppressable, a mode of reducing the displacement of the displacement means, a mode of preventing (restricting) the displacement of the displacement means, and the like are exemplified.

In the gaming machine ZC1, the transmission means includes a formation portion formed along the movement locus of the transmission portion, and the formation portion is such that the transmission portion is non-uniform with respect to the displacement means in the movement direction of the displacement means. The game machine ZC2 is configured to be able to abut against the displacement means in a state of abutment.

According to the game machine ZC2, in addition to the effects of the game machine ZC1, the displacement of the displacement means can be suppressed by the contact between the forming portion and the displacement means, so that the stability of the arrangement of the displacement means against external force is improved. be able to.

In the gaming machine ZC2, the forming portion extends from the transmission portion along the displacement direction of the transmission means, and the distance between the displacement means is longer than the distance between the transmission portion and the displacement means. A game machine ZC3 characterized by being configured as follows.

According to the game machine ZC3, in addition to the effects of the game machine ZC2, in the direction in which the displacement means and the transmission means face each other, the part where the load is generated when the driving force is transmitted and the part where the load is generated when the displacement is suppressed are divided. can be shifted.

In the gaming machine ZC3, the displacement means includes a one-side functional part formed on one side of the transmitted part in the moving direction of the displacement means, and a moving direction other side of the displacement means on the transmitted part. The one-side functional part is formed on the same plane as the movement locus of the forming part, and the other-side functional part is arranged outwardly of the movement locus of the forming part. A gaming machine ZC4 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine ZC4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine ZC3, the moving direction in which the movement is suppressed by the formation unit can be set to one side direction.

In any one of game machines ZC1 to ZC4, the displacement means comprises first displacement means and second displacement means different from the first displacement means, and the transmission means comprises the first displacement means and the second displacement means. A gaming machine ZC5 characterized in that the transmission mode to the displacement means is configured to be changeable for each operation section.

Note that the method of switching the transmission mode is not limited at all. For example, when the driving force is transmitted to one of the first displacement means and the second displacement means, the transmission of the driving force to the other may be interrupted. It is also possible to change the ratio of the applied driving force.

According to the game machine ZC5, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines ZC1 to ZC4, one transmission means can displace a plurality of displacement means in different displacement modes.

In the game machine ZC5, the first displacement means is arranged on one side of the transmission means, and the second displacement means is arranged on the other side of the transmission means.

According to the game machine ZC6, in addition to the effects of the game machine ZC5, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in setting the combinations of the displacement modes of the first displacement means and the second displacement means.

In addition, the combination of the displacement modes of the first displacement means and the second displacement means is not limited at all. For example, it may include the timing at which the first displacement means and the second displacement means are synchronously displaced. It may be one that does not displace.

Moreover, in the case where the timing of synchronous displacement is included, the displacement mode may be changed by changing the relative speed of the first displacement means and the second displacement means.

A gaming machine ZC7, wherein in the gaming machine ZC5 or ZC6, the displacement direction of the first displacement means and the displacement direction of the second displacement means are set in opposite directions.

According to the game machine ZC7, in addition to the effects of the game machine ZC5 or ZC6, the first displacement means and the second displacement means can be mutually recognized in the common area, so that the first displacement means and the second displacement means can be mutually recognized. Effective performance can be executed even when the performance area displaced by the means is narrow.

In addition, the aspect of a 1st displacement means and a 2nd displacement means is not limited at all. for example,
A plurality of displacement means that are stacked in front and behind may be projected into a common area at different timings, or the initial arrangement may be configured such that while stacking front and back, they pass through a common range during movement of a plurality of movable members. can be

<Displacement of the stop position is prevented by the load generating part catching up and making contact>
In a gaming machine comprising first displacement means configured to be displaceable and second displacement means configured to be displaceable by displacing the first displacement means in a predetermined direction, the second displacement means comprises:
a load generating section that applies a load along the predetermined direction to displace the first displacement means; the first displacement means includes a loaded section that receives the load from the load generating section; The portion is separated from the loaded portion during displacement along the predetermined direction, and is configured to contact a predetermined portion different from the loaded portion of the first displacement means. ZD1
.

In game machines such as pachinko machines, there is a game machine in which a cylindrical portion used for driving force transmission is guided by a concave portion of a displacement member, and the arrangement of the cylindrical portion corresponds to the posture of the displacement member (for example, See JP-A-2010-234152). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine,
If the cylindrical portion moves excessively due to a problem with the drive transmission, the position of the displacement member is displaced from the end of the movement, which may give the player a sense of discomfort.

On the other hand, according to the game machine ZD1, the load generating portion separates from the load receiving portion during displacement and is brought into contact with a predetermined portion different from the load receiving portion, thereby causing excessive displacement of the second displacement means. However, it is possible to prevent the first displacement means from being placed in an unintended position.

In the gaming machine ZD1, the load generating section applies a load directed from the other side in the predetermined direction to the one side in a state in which the first displacement means is arranged at one end of the displaceable section. A game machine ZD2 characterized in that it is configured to be able to grant to.

According to the game machine ZD2, in addition to the effects of the game machine ZD1, when the first displacement means is arranged at one end in the predetermined direction, the load generating section moves the first displacement means in the predetermined direction. Since a load is applied in a direction from the other side to the one side, the first displacement means can be pressed against the end portion on the one side in the predetermined direction.

In the game machine ZD1 or ZD2, a drive means configured to drive the second displacement means is provided, and the load generating part is arranged on the other side of the load receiving part in the predetermined direction to move the first position.
A gaming machine ZD3 characterized by coming into contact with displacement means.

According to the game machine ZD3, in addition to the effects of the game machine ZD1 or ZD2, the second displacement means can be mechanically stopped by the contact between the load generating part and the first displacement means, so that the driving force can be stopped. Even if the accuracy of the timing is low, the end positions of the first displacement means and the second displacement means can be easily kept constant. As a result, it is possible to suppress displacement of the first displacement means and the second displacement means from the terminal positions while abruptly setting the stops of the first displacement means and the second displacement means.

In addition, the part that takes measures against the rarely occurring phenomenon that the second displacement means moves excessively is
By providing it at a location different from the loaded portion that receives the load in each driving force transmission, even if the loaded portion is deformed, the fail-safe function can be exhibited without any problem.

A game machine ZD4 characterized in that in any one of the game machines ZD1 to ZD3, the game machine ZD4 is characterized by comprising a restricting means capable of restricting the first displacement means at one end in the predetermined direction.

According to the game machine ZD4, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines ZD1 to ZD3, while the first displacement means is regulated at one end in the predetermined direction by the regulating means, the second displacement means is the second displacement means. It can be displaced independently with respect to one displacing means.

In addition, the aspect of a control means is not limited at all. For example, it may be a claw-shaped member that moves in and out in a direction that intersects the displacement direction of the first displacement means and engages, or may be restricted by the biasing force of gravity or an elastic member, or part of the second displacement means. It may be configured by

In any one of game machines ZD1 to ZD4, a detection means configured to detect that the first displacement means is arranged at one end in the predetermined direction, wherein the first displacement means
The game machine ZD5 is characterized in that the detecting means comprises a detected part whose position is detected, and the load generating part is in contact with the detected part.

According to the game machine ZD5, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines ZD1 to ZD4, it is possible to limit the portion damaged by the load at the time of contact to the detected portion.

By linking the life that can be calculated from the number of displacements (the number of times of driving) of the second displacement means and the durability of the detection piece, it is possible to determine detection failures due to breakage of the detection piece. It is possible to grasp the replacement timing (maintenance timing) of the displacement means.

In any one of game machines ZD1 to ZD5, the direction of the load applied from the load generation section to the predetermined section intersects the direction of the load applied from the load generation section to the load receiving section. A gaming machine ZD6 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine ZD6, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines ZD1 to ZD5, the first
A plurality of directions of movement of the displacement means can be provided.

A gaming machine ZD7 in any one of the gaming machines ZD1 to ZD6, wherein the load-bearing portion and the predetermined portion are disposed apart from each other by a predetermined distance in a direction orthogonal to the predetermined direction.
.

According to the game machine ZD7, in any one of the game machines ZD1 to ZD6, the loaded portion and the predetermined portion are arranged at the same position when viewed from a direction perpendicular to the predetermined direction.
The area required for arranging the load receiving portion and the predetermined portion can be narrowed.

<Technical concept of holding by using flexibility of follow-up means>
In a game machine comprising displacement means configured to be capable of displacing a predetermined area and follow-up means for following the displacement of the displacement means, prevention of preventing a predetermined part of the follow-up means from entering the predetermined area side A game machine ZE1 characterized by comprising means.

Among game machines such as pachinko machines, there is a game machine configured such that flexible wiring is routed along the direction of displacement of the displacement means (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-157474).
. However, in the above-described conventional game machine, by setting the length of the wire in comparison with the displacement means, there is an advantage that the wire is less likely to bend when the displacement means is displaced. In order to prevent this, it is necessary to form a temporary fixing portion for temporarily fixing the wiring so that the wiring is not relatively displaced at various places on the displacement means. It is normal to take a long time to assemble because it is assembled by hand.
As a result, there is a problem that the degree of freedom in design and assembly efficiency may be lowered.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine ZE1, the following means such as wiring is prevented from being displaced to the predetermined area side by the preventing means, so that the following means is prevented from rubbing against the displacement means and being damaged. can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to eliminate the need to form a plurality of temporary fixing portions on the displacement means, thereby improving the degree of freedom in designing the displacement means and improving the assembly efficiency.

In the gaming machine ZE1, the preventing means supports the following means so as to be relatively displaceable in a predetermined direction in which a distance from the displacing means changes with displacement of the displacing means.

According to the game machine ZE2, in addition to the effects of the game machine ZE1, the prevention means supports the following means in a manner displaceable in the direction in which the distance between the prevention means and the displacement means changes as the displacement means is displaced. , the load applied to the following means can be reduced as compared with the case where the position of the following means is fixed by a fixing member such as a binding band.

In addition, the aspect of a prevention means is not limited at all. For example, it may be a columnar portion around which the following means may be wound, or may be a claw-like portion capable of sandwiching the following means. Further, when the prevention means is formed as a columnar portion, for example, the columnar portion may be formed as a fastening portion used for fastening and fixing members together, or may be used for alignment when assembling members together. It may be formed as a positioning portion.

Also, the form of the follower means is not limited at all. For example, it may be an electric wiring that supplies electricity to the displacement means, or a belt-shaped member that is displaced based on the displacement of the displacement means, and a figure or pattern is drawn on the surface, and the figure or pattern is visually recognized by the player. It may be a band-like effect member that assists the effect, or an elastic means such as a coil spring that generates an urging force that assists the displacement of the displacement means.

A gaming machine ZE3 in the gaming machine ZE1 or ZE2, characterized in that the following means is configured to be capable of supplying electricity to the displacement means.

According to the gaming machine ZE3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine ZE1 or ZE2, it is possible to favorably supply electricity to the displacement means.

In any one of game machines ZE1 to ZE3, the predetermined direction is a direction intersecting the direction in which the displacement means is displaced, and the following means is configured to surround the prevention means. A gaming machine ZE4.

According to the game machine ZE4, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines ZE1 to ZE3, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the following means protrudes greatly to one side. That is, since the range in which the following means can be displaced can be arranged on both sides of the preventing means, the area where it is necessary to avoid interference between the following means and other members can be limited to the range around the preventing means. .

Further, it is possible to eliminate the need to construct a relief portion for allowing the following means to enter from the displacement end of the displacement means to the outside in the displacement direction. Thereby, the displacement means can be arranged in a space-saving manner.

In any one of the game machines ZE1 to ZE4, it comprises a shielding means for shielding at least part of the displacement means, and the following means is connected to the displacement means at a position inside the shielding means. Gaming machine ZE5.

According to the game machine ZE5, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines ZE1 to ZE4, the shielding means can prevent the connecting portion between the following means and the displacement means from being visually recognized by the player. The term "inward" as used herein means an inward direction when the outer shape is an edge portion in a front view.

In the game machine ZE5, the displacement means is configured to be rotatable about a first axis, and the first axis is arranged at the outer edge of the shield means.

According to the gaming machine ZE6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine ZE5, while keeping the following means out of the player's field of vision, the amount of protrusion of the displacement means from the outer shape (outer edge) of the shielding means is secured. be able to.

In the game machine ZE5 or ZE6, the prevention means is arranged on a straight line that equally divides the rotatable angle of the displacement means about the first axis and that passes through the first axis. A game machine ZE7 characterized by.

According to the game machine ZE7, in addition to the effects of the game machine ZE5 or ZE6, the absolute value of the displacement amount of the following means can be suppressed.

The game machine ZE8 is characterized in that, in any one of the game machines ZE1 to ZE7, the displacement means comprises a guide part for guiding the follow-up means in a direction away from the displacement trajectory.

According to the game machine ZE8, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines ZE1 to ZE7, it is possible to prevent rubbing against the displacement means and improve the durability of the following means.

A gaming machine ZE9 in the gaming machine ZE8, wherein the guide portion extends in a direction orthogonal to the outer shape of the predetermined area.

According to the game machine ZE9, in addition to the effects of the game machine ZE8, the area occupied by the follower means can be narrowed in the vicinity of the displacement means, and the gap area through which the follower means can pass can be narrowed. The rigidity of the external means for holding the displacement means can be improved compared to when the gap is large.

In any one of the gaming machines ZE1 to ZE9, the follower means is formed in a string-like or belt-like shape, one end of which is connected to the displacement means, the other end of which is connected to the game machine, and is directed to both ends. A game machine ZE10 characterized in that the game machine ZE10 is guided from one side of the predetermined area.

According to the game machine ZE10, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines ZE1 to ZE9, a load in a pulling direction can be applied from one side of the predetermined area at both ends of the follow-up means. As a result, the follower means as a whole can be balanced with the load applied from the guide section.

In any one of the gaming machines ZE1 to ZE10, the following means is configured to be wound around the preventing means in a loosening direction when the displacement means is displaced from the pre-displacement position to the post-displacement position. Machine ZE11.

According to the game machine ZE11, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines ZE1 to ZE10,
By absorbing the displacement of the displacement means by the slackness of the follower means, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of an excessive load on the follower means.

In any one of the game machines ZE1 to ZE11, an arranging means for arranging the follower means between the displacement means and a positioning unit for aligning the arranging means is provided, and the aligning unit comprises the above-mentioned A gaming machine Z characterized in that it is arranged outside the movement trajectory of the following means
E12.

According to the game machine ZE12, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines ZE1 to ZE11,
Since it is possible to avoid the aligning portion from encroaching on the displacement space of the follower means, the load applied to the follower means due to the displacement of the displacer means can be minimized.

In the gaming machine ZE12, the following means is configured to be wound around the preventing means, and the following means has a first displacement portion (weak displacement portion) and a larger displacement than the first displacement portion. and a second displacement portion (strong displacement portion), wherein the first displacement portion is arranged between the second displacement portion and the arrangement means.

According to the gaming machine ZE13, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine ZE12, it is possible to limit the locations where the following means are likely to be damaged by coming into contact with the arranging means. As a result, it is possible to limit the locations where reinforcement is required, so that durability can be improved at low cost.

In addition, the aspect of comparison of the magnitude of the displacement of the first displacement portion and the second displacement portion is not limited at all. For example, the linear distance between positions before and after the displacement may be compared, or when the displacement occurs in a plurality of directions, the comparison may be limited to the displacement in a predetermined direction (or on a predetermined plane).

In the game machine ZE12 or ZE13, the game machine ZE14 is characterized in that the prevention means comprises a protruding part protruding from the arrangement means, and the following means is wound around the protruding part.

According to the gaming machine ZE14, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine ZE12 or ZE13, the fixing means can be assembled to the arranging means from above while supporting the following means that hangs down by its own weight with the arranging means. and the fixing means can be assembled easily.

<Technical concept that changes the displacement mode (transmission mode) in forward and reverse rotation>
A game machine comprising: driving means; displacement means configured to be displaceable by the driving force of the driving means; and transmission means configured to transmit the driving force generated by the driving means to the displacement means, The driving means includes a first driving mode for generating a driving force in a first direction;
and a second driving mode for generating a driving force in a second direction different from the driving direction, wherein the displacement means is driven in the first driving mode and in the second driving mode A gaming machine ZF1 characterized by being configured to be displaceable in a driven second displacement mode.

A game machine such as a pachinko machine is provided with a first displacement means and a second displacement means that are displaced by the driving force of a common driving device, and the direction of displacement is reversed by reversing the driving direction of the driving device. There is a game machine configured as
. However, in the above-described conventional game machine, the first
Only the displacement modes of the displacement means and the second displacement means change, and even if the driving direction of the driving device is reversed, both the first displacement means and the second displacement means are displaced. For this reason, there is a problem that the degree of improvement in performance effect due to the adoption of a device that can be driven in forward and reverse directions as the drive device is insufficient.

On the other hand, according to the game machine ZF1, by changing the direction in which the driving force is generated, the displacement mode of the displacement means can be changed. The production effect used can be sufficiently improved.

The gaming machine ZF1 is characterized by comprising light emitting means for emitting light toward the displacement means, wherein the displacement means is configured to be displaceable so as to pass through the optical axis of the light emitted from the light emitting means. A game machine ZF2.

According to the game machine ZF2, in addition to the effects of the game machine ZF1, the position at which the light emitted from the light emitting means intersects the displacement means can be changed during the displacement of the displacement means. can perform a gorgeous production that changes with the passage of time.

In game machine ZF1 or ZF2, displacement suppression means for suppressing displacement of at least a part of said transmission means is provided, and said transmission means, in at least one of said first drive mode and said second drive mode, A game machine ZF3, comprising a suppression area in which transmission of driving force is suppressed, wherein the displacement suppression means is configured to be capable of suppressing a predetermined displacement in the suppression area.

According to the game machine ZF3, in addition to the effects of the game machine ZF1 or ZF2, the displacement suppression means unintentionally displaces the transmission means when the transmission of the driving force is suppressed, thereby displacing in an unintended displacement mode. Displacement of the means can be prevented.

Further, compared to the case where the displacement means is stopped by directly contacting the displacement means with another member, the visibility of the displacement means can be maintained at a high level. Therefore, it is possible to configure the displacement means of an appropriate displacement mode so that it is easy for the player to see.

Note that the mode of the displacement suppressing means is not limited at all. For example, it may be an engagement device that produces viscous resistance represented by a damper device, or a resistance device that produces resistance due to its own weight. If the direction is along the horizontal direction), the idling motion cannot be suppressed by the force of gravity.

In the game machine ZF3, detection means configured to be capable of detecting displacement of the displacement suppression means is provided, and the displacement suppression means generates resistance when the operating speed of the transmission means in the suppression area is lower than a predetermined speed. the resistance is suppressed when the operating speed of the transmission means in the suppression region is equal to or higher than a predetermined speed, and the detection means detects the portion to be detected of the displacement suppression means at a position where the displacement suppression means generates the resistance. A gaming machine ZF4 characterized in that it is arranged so as to be able to detect the .

According to the gaming machine ZF4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine ZF3, whether the detection means functions well to detect the stop position of the displacement suppression means and to suppress the displacement in the suppression area of the transmission means in the displacement suppression means. It can be used both for the detection of

In any one of game machines ZF1 to ZF4, the displacement means comprises first displacement means for rotationally displacing around a first axis and second displacement means for rotationally displacing the outside of the first displacement means around the first axis. A gaming machine ZF5 comprising displacement means, wherein displacement of the second displacement means can be suppressed in the first drive mode or the second drive mode.

According to the gaming machine ZF5, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines ZF1 to ZF4, the first
In the drive mode or the second drive mode, the displacement of the second displacement means can be suppressed. Therefore, in this suppressed state, the second displacement means is arranged between the player and the first displacement means and the field of view is increased. and the case where the second displacement means is arranged outside between the player and the first displacement means and does not block the field of view.In addition, the second displacement means Since displacement is possible even in a drive mode in which the displacement of is not suppressed, an effect by the displacement means can be configured in a total of three different displacement modes.

Game machine ZF6 according to any one of the game machines ZF1 to ZF5, wherein the transmission means comprises light transmission means formed of a light transmission material on the side of the connection position with the displacement means.
.

According to the game machine ZF6, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines ZF1 to ZF5, the effect of facilitating the assembly of the displacement means by the light transmitting means and the light emitting performance by conducting light toward the displacement means. It is possible to achieve the effect of enabling

In any one of game machines ZF1 to ZF6, the displacement means includes first displacement means for rotationally displacing about a first axis, and transmission means for the first displacement means for rotationally displacing about the first axis. and a second displacement means connected to the transmission means outside the connection position of the second displacement means, wherein the second displacement means overlaps the first displacement means when viewed in the first axial direction. Characterized game machine ZF7.

According to the gaming machine ZF7, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines ZF1 to ZF6, the second
The displacement means can be retained by the first displacement means. This eliminates the need to dispose a separate retaining member.

<Vibration device next to the device (P9 Policy 1)>
A first operating means configured to be operable by the player, a second operating means arranged at a position different from the first operating means and configured to be operable by the player, and the first operating means. and said second
A game machine ZG1, further comprising a load generating means disposed on the operating means side and capable of generating a load toward the first operating means and the second operating means.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine that includes a plurality of operating devices and a driving device for producing an effect of driving the operating devices (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-159).
178). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, each operating device is provided with a vibrating device, so the space required for arranging each operating device increases, and the number of arrangable operating devices tends to be limited. In addition, there is a problem that the cost becomes high due to an increase in the number of driving devices.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine ZG1, since the load generation means is arranged on the second operation means side with respect to the first operation means, the load generation means is arranged on the first operation means and the second operation means (that is, , a plurality of operating means). This makes it possible to reduce the space required for arranging the first operation means and the second operation means, and raise the upper limit of the number of operation means that can be arranged. In addition, since the number of load generating means can also be reduced, the cost for constructing the game machine can be suppressed.

Note that the form of the load generating means is not limited at all. For example, it may be means configured to vibrate (high-speed repeated displacement), means such as a pump that generates a load at a predetermined cycle, or means composed of an arm member that changes its posture by displacement of a cam. good. Moreover, the mode of load is not limited at all. For example, it may be a load that is mechanically transmitted in a contact state, or a load that is transmitted in a non-contact state (wind pressure, sound pressure, high pressure, etc.).

In the game machine ZG1, the load generation means is arranged between the first operation means and the second operation means.

According to the game machine ZG2, in addition to the effects of the game machine ZG1, the load can be transmitted to both the first operation means and the second operation means to the same extent.

In the game machine ZG1 or ZG2, the first operation means is operated to shoot game balls toward the game area, and the load generation means is a cover that at least partially covers the first operation means from a predetermined direction. A game machine ZG3, characterized in that it is disposed in the installation means.

According to the game machine ZG3, in addition to the effects of the game machine ZG1 or ZG2, the load generating means is arranged at a position where the fingers of the player operating the first operation means are sandwiched between the first operation means and the first operation means. Therefore, the load generated by the load generating means can be easily transmitted to the fingers of the player.

For example, the covering means is arranged at a position where the player's fingers can easily pass through in the process of moving the player's fingers by bringing the fingers close to the first operating means and then removing the fingers from the first operating means after completing the operation. By arranging the covering means so as to cover it from the direction where it is likely to interfere with the fingers, it is possible to make it possible to easily transmit the load of the load generating means to the player, especially while the fingers are moving.

In addition, for example, by arranging the covering means at a position where the finger touches with a high probability when the player operates the first operating means, the load of the load generating means is reduced during the operation of the first operating means. It is possible to configure a state that is easy to convey to the player.

This idea is different from the idea of arranging the load generating means in the first operating means.
That is, since the load generating means is arranged on the side of the second operating means with respect to the first operating means, the load generating means is arranged at a position different from that of the first operating means.

In the gaming machine ZG3, intervening means interposed between the load generating means and the first operating means and the second operating means, and configured to transmit a load to the first operating means and the second operating means and the intervening means is configured so that the strength of vibration transmission to the first operation means is higher than the strength of vibration transmission to the second operation means.
4.

According to the gaming machine ZG4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine ZG3, the load transmission can be concentrated on the side of the first operating means.

In game machine ZG4, game machine ZG5 is characterized in that the intervening means is configured to change the intensity of load transmission by displacing the load generating means as the load generating means is driven.

According to the gaming machine ZG5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine ZG4, the strength of the load transmitted through the intervening means is improved when the load generating means is driven compared to when the load generating means is not driven. Therefore, while suppressing the degree of interlocking operation (vibration) between the first operation means and the second operation means due to the load or the like applied to the pachinko machine by the player, the first
It is possible to execute an effect of strongly operating (vibrating) the operating means and the second operating means.

A game machine ZG6 characterized in that, in any one of game machines ZG1 to ZG5, holding means for holding the load generating means displaceably is provided, and the holding means is provided with a guide portion for guiding the displacement of the load generating means. .

According to the gaming machine ZG6, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines ZG1 to ZG5, the safety of the player can be ensured by defining the displacement direction of the load generating means. That is, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of problems such as the unintentional collision of the displaced member displaced by the vibration of the load generating means with the player.

In addition, regardless of the structure of the load generating means itself, if it is guided in the desired direction, the load generating means can be displaced in the desired direction. The degree of freedom of means can be improved.

In the game machine ZG6, the holding means is configured to allow displacement of the load generating means in a direction that intersects the direction guided by the guide portion.
G7.

According to the gaming machine ZG7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine ZG6, the load generating means can be configured to be displaced in the crossing direction when switching between the non-driving state and the driving state. , the load generating means can be displaced in different manners. As a result, it is possible to improve the performance effect of the load generating means.

Various modes are exemplified as modes for allowing the displacement. For example, a second holding means for guiding the holding means may be provided, and the guiding direction of the second holding means may intersect the guiding direction of the guide portion. It may be configured to interpose a flexible member, and the displacement may be caused by deformation of the flexible member.

<Vibration means for covering means (P9 policy 2)>
frame means configured in a frame shape; covering means for covering at least a part of the frame means from the front side; means is
A gaming machine ZH1 comprising an allowance portion for allowing displacement, and configured to be able to transmit the vibration of the vibrating means via the allowance portion.

2. Description of the Related Art Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine that includes a front frame and vibration means arranged in front of the front frame (see, for example, JP-A-2015-159837). but,
In the above-mentioned conventional game machine, it is necessary to suppress the vibration of the vibration means to the extent that the vibration of a predetermined strength or more is not transmitted to the front frame side (internal mechanism side), and there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of vibration performance. was there.

On the other hand, according to the game machine ZH1, the vibrating means is arranged in the covering means, and the displacement of the covering means is allowed, so that the vibration can be transmitted to the player through the covering means. On the other hand, by absorbing the vibration by displacing the covering means, it is possible to suppress the transmission of the vibration to the side of the frame means.
As a result, the allowable degree of vibration strength of the vibrating means can be increased.

In addition, the mode of the allowance part is not limited at all. For example, it may be configured in a connection mode assuming displacement of slides, rings, gears, etc., and displacement may occur when the slides, links, gears, etc. operate. It may be configured flexibly, and displacement may occur when an overload is applied.

In the game machine ZH1, the covering means is configured so that the allowable amount of displacement in the vertical direction is smaller than the allowable amount of displacement in the horizontal direction.
.

According to the gaming machine ZH2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine ZH1, while maintaining the effect of the allowable portion in the horizontal displacement, the player can move the covering means in the direction of gravity, such as by placing his/her hand on the covering means. When a load is applied, it is possible to prevent the covering means from being displaced excessively and disturbing the posture of the player. That is, by reducing the permissible amount of displacement in the vertical direction, the structural stability of the product can be achieved.

In game machine ZH1 or ZH2, game machine ZH3 is characterized in that said covering means is configured in the shape of a bag with said frame means side opened.

According to the game machine ZH3, in addition to the effects of the game machine ZH1 or ZH2, since the side of the frame means is configured in the form of a bag that is open, the edges of the bag and the frame means are arranged to face each other.
It is possible to reduce the contact area between the covering means and the frame means which are in contact with each other to transmit vibration. As a result, transmission of vibration to the frame means side can be suppressed, so that transmission of vibration to main substrates, ball passages, and main electrical components disposed on the frame means side can be avoided.

In any one of the game machines ZH1 to ZH3, the vibrating means includes an arrangement portion arranged on the side of the frame means, the frame means comprises a support portion for supporting the arrangement portion, and the arrangement Department is
A game machine ZH4 characterized in that the deformation resistance is lower than that of the supporting portion.

According to the game machine ZH4, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines ZH1 to ZH3, the displacement range of the vibration means is limited while suppressing the transmission of vibration to the frame means side, and furthermore, the arrangement portion is Compared to the case of a rigid structure, it is possible to generate biting by utilizing the fact that deformation resistance is low, and it is possible to ensure a large absolute value of the amount of displacement of the vibrating means toward the frame means. Thereby, it is possible to easily displace the covering means in which the vibrating means is disposed.

In any one of game machines ZH1 to ZH4, the covering means includes a first covering section and a second covering section having a lower deformation resistance than the first covering section, and the vibrating means includes , and a contact portion connected to the first covering portion and the second covering portion and capable of locally contacting the first covering portion.

According to the game machine ZH5, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines ZH1 to ZH4, by locally contacting the first covering portion with high deformation resistance and the contact portion, the contact position can be changed. can be used as a fixed point (reference point) of vibration. That is, it is possible to increase the absolute value of the displacement of the vibrating means and the second covering portion with respect to the contact position.

In any one of game machines ZH1 to ZH5, a ball shooting operation means operated to shoot game balls toward a game area is provided, and the covering means has at least a space between the ball shooting operation means and the ball shooting operation means. A gaming machine ZH6 characterized by interposing a predetermined member.

According to the game machine ZH6, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines ZH1 to ZH5, it is possible to suppress the vibration transmission to the ball shooting operation means.

<The point that is characterized by blocking the light itself by the displacement of the character>
In a gaming machine comprising a light emitting means and an illuminated means to which the light emitted from the light emitting means is emitted, changing the appearance of the illuminated means while leaving the outer shape of the illuminated means when viewed from a predetermined direction. Characterized game machine ZI1.

Among game machines such as pachinko machines, there is a game machine equipped with a light-emitting means configured to be mounted on a movable accessory and capable of executing a light-emitting effect (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-208360).
. However, in the above-described conventional game machine, there is no displaceable member disposed so as to interfere with the optical axis of the light emitting means, and it is necessary to control the light emitting means in order to change the mode of the light emitting effect. However, there is a problem that there is room for improvement in terms of the method of realizing the lighting effect because the data capacity is compressed and the board becomes large due to the control.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine ZI1, for example, the displacement means is configured to be displaceable between the first position and the second position. By configuring so as to be able to do so, it is possible to switch the mode of the light emitting effect by displacing the displacing means. Therefore, it is possible to change the mode of the lighting performance without controlling the light emitting means, and it is possible to reduce the size of the substrate by eliminating the need for data for control and the circuit for control. can. As a result, it is possible to improve the technique for realizing the lighting effect.

In addition, the mode of displacement is not limited at all, and various modes are exemplified. For example, it may be a rotation, a linear slide, or a displacement along a predetermined curve. When the displacement mode of the displacement means is a linear slide, the displacement means is more effective when the direction of the slide coincides with the predetermined direction than when the direction of the slide intersects the predetermined direction. Maintaining the outer shape can be facilitated.

In addition, the aspect of the irradiated means is not limited at all. For example, it may be configured to rotate on a rotation axis that intersects the optical axis, and the projected area may change depending on the difference in posture, or even if there is no change in posture, the member may be configured to protrude from the inside and be scaled. The displacement may change the relative projected area.

The aspect of the displacement means is not limited at all. For example, it may be constructed so as to be rotationally displaced around the irradiated means, or may slide on a plane to enter the side of the irradiated means (between the light emitting means).

In addition, the mode in which the outer shape of the displacement means is left is not limited at all.
For example, the displacement means may be visually recognized as if it is stopped, or the absolute value of the displacement amount may be smaller than that of the irradiated means, so that the displacement of the displacement means is not recognized by the player. Any form is fine.

Also, the displacement means may be displaced in relation to the light emitting means. The light emitting means may be configured to face the irradiated means at any timing of the displacement.

The aspect of the light emitting means is not limited at all. For example, the position may be fixed, or may be displaceable. In the displaceable state, the light emitting means may be arranged in the displacement means, or the light emitting means and the displacement means may be displaced separately (independently). Also, the irradiation direction may be fixed, or the irradiation direction may be variable.

As for the mode of displacement of the light emitting means, the light emitting means may be slid in such a manner that the optical axis is directed toward the means to be irradiated and move toward and away from the means to be irradiated, or the means to be irradiated may be moved around the means to be irradiated while the optical axis is directed to the means to be irradiated. It may be something that rotates.

The light emitting mode of the light emitting means is not limited at all. For example, it may be one that always maintains a lighting state, or one that can be switched between lighting and lighting.

In game machine ZI1, game machine ZI2 is characterized in that the difference in appearance of said means to be illuminated is caused by said means to be illuminated reflecting light emitted from said light emitting means.

According to the gaming machine ZI2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine ZI1, it is possible to immediately recognize the difference in the means to be irradiated when the light emitting means emits light, so it is possible to improve attention to the timing of light irradiation. . According to this, even if the means to be irradiated is displaceable,
A non-displaceable means may be used.

A gaming machine ZI3 characterized in that, in the gaming machine ZI1 or ZI2, the degree of difference in appearance of said means to be irradiated changes based on the displacement of said means to be irradiated.

According to the game machine ZI3, in addition to the effects of the game machine ZI1 or ZI2, it is possible to improve the attention to the means to be irradiated.

Note that the mode of displacement that is the basis for the difference in appearance of the means to be irradiated is not limited at all. For example, constant (periodic) displacement continuing at a constant speed or irregular displacement may be used. Also, the displacement may be instantaneous, or may be slow (so slow that it is difficult for the player to grasp the displacement, for example, a displacement of 1 [mm/min]).

A gaming machine ZI4 characterized in that in any one of the gaming machines ZI1 to ZI3, the illuminated means can be configured to change the direction in which the light from the light emitting means is reflected.

According to the game machine ZI4, in any one of the game machines ZI1 to ZI3, while maintaining the outer shape of the irradiated means, the light reflected through the irradiated means can illuminate and make the area stand out.

In any one of game machines ZI1 to ZI3, game machine ZI5 is characterized in that the direction of light reflected by said means to be irradiated is the same, but at least one of light quantity and color of light is different. .

According to the game machine ZI5, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines ZI1 to ZI3, it is possible to improve the attention to the light emitting mode of the means to be irradiated.

In any one of the game machines ZI1 to ZI5, the optical axis is configured to be able to irradiate the means to be irradiated with light in an irradiation mode in which the optical axis does not interfere with the movement trajectory of the displacement means arranged around the means to be irradiated. A gaming machine ZI6 characterized by comprising shielding light emitting means.

According to the game machine ZI6, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines ZI1 to ZI5, by irradiating the light from the non-shielding light emitting means, the light can be applied to the irradiated means regardless of the arrangement of the displacement means. , it is possible to prevent the irradiated means from being seen darker than necessary.

In any one of game machines ZI1 to ZI6, the irradiated means includes first irradiated means;
a second irradiation means configured to be arranged at a shielding position capable of shielding the light emitted from the light emitting means toward the first irradiation means, wherein the first irradiation means is the light emitting means; is smaller when the second irradiated means is placed at the shielding position than when the second irradiated means is not placed at the shielding position. A gaming machine ZI7 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine ZI7, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines ZI1 to ZI6, the first
It is possible to make it difficult for light to reach the means to be irradiated. That is, the effect of shielding light can be improved. It should be noted that the change in the area of the first irradiated means may occur only when the light is emitted from the light emitting means.

In any one of game machines ZI1 to ZI7, the light emitting means is configured to irradiate the means to be irradiated with light from a plurality of optical axes, and the means to be irradiated can intersect the plurality of optical axes at a predetermined position. A gaming machine ZI8 characterized by:

According to the game machine ZI8, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines ZI1 to ZI7, the amount of light received by the means to be irradiated is increased by increasing the optical axis of the light emitting means (for example, by increasing the number of LEDs). can be made

In any one of game machines ZI1 to ZI8, drive means configured to be capable of synchronously driving the irradiated means and displacement means disposed around the irradiated means, the irradiated means being displaced A gaming machine ZI9 is characterized in that a predetermined first surface faces the same side, and the displacement means is configured to cyclically displace the first position and the second position.
.

According to the game machine ZI9, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines ZI1 to ZI8, while suppressing a large change in the visibility of the irradiated means, the light emitting mode ( For example, the timing of switching between light and dark can be changed by changing the speed of the displacement means.

In addition, the displacement mode of the irradiated means is not limited at all. For example, sliding displacement or rotational displacement may be used. The rotational displacement may be, for example, rotational displacement occurring along a rotational axis along the display surface of the display device, or rotational displacement occurring along a rotational axis orthogonal to the display surface of the display area.

In any one of the game machines ZI1 to ZI9, at least one of the displacement means arranged around the irradiated means and the irradiated means has a surface on the light emitting means side, and the displacement means is arranged at the second position. A game machine ZI10 is characterized in that the traveling direction of the light emitted from the light emitting means can be changed to the side of the player accordingly.

According to the game machine ZI10, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines ZI1 to ZI9, the light emitted from the light emitting means is emitted depending on whether the displacement means is arranged at the first position or the second position. It is possible to increase the difference in the extent to which the light traveling toward the player side.

<Characteristic AA group> (Lever UP control)
An operation means that can be operated by a player at least in a first direction from a predetermined first position, and an effect execution means that can execute an effect corresponding to the operation based on the operation of the operation means. and a notification means capable of notifying an operation suggestion mode suggesting that the operation means is operated in the first direction; a specific effect setting means capable of setting a specific effect when the operating means is not positioned at a specific position.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a case where a privilege game was executed. Before the result of the lottery is notified, an operation effect for causing the player to operate the operation means is made executable as a suggestion effect for suggesting the result of the lottery, and the period until the result of the lottery is notified is set. There was something for the players to enjoy. Further, in the above-described game machine, there is a game machine that allows the player to operate the operating means in a state in which it is moved from the initial position in order to further enhance the performance effect (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-090780). In such a game machine, when the player does not operate the operating means even though the operating means is moved from the initial position, the operating means in the movable state is initialized regardless of the player's operation. There is a problem that it is necessary to execute the control to return to the position, and the performance effect is lowered and the interest of the game is lowered. It is an object of the above game machine to provide a game with improved interest in the game.

According to the gaming machine AA1, when the operation means is not positioned at the specific position in the state where the cancellation condition is established, the specific effect is set by the specific effect setting means, so the operation means is not positioned at the specific position. It is possible to provide the player with an effect that would otherwise be possible. Therefore, even if the operation means is not operated after the operation means is moved, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the presentation effect, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

In the game machine AA1, it is possible to have biasing means for always biasing the operating means toward the specific position, and to move the operating means from the specific position to the first position different from the specific position. and the operation means is positioned at the specific position by being operated in the first direction from the first position.

According to the gaming machine AA2, the player can move the operating means to the specific position by operating the operating means positioned at the first position. , and the act of moving the operation means to a specific position can be executed simultaneously. Therefore, there is an effect that the operation presentation can be performed smoothly, and the presentation effect can be enhanced.

The game machine AA2 has a second operating means operable by the player different from the operating means, and the specific effect includes at least a suggestion mode suggesting that the second operating means is operated. A gaming machine AA3 characterized by:

According to the game machine AA3, in addition to the effects of the game machine AA2, a specific effect including a suggestive mode suggesting the operation of the second operating means is executed, so that the second operating means can be easily operated. becomes possible. Therefore, the player can release the operation means and can easily move the operation means to the specific position by the biasing means, so that the operation means can be easily positioned at the predetermined position, and the operation presentation can be performed. There is an effect that the execution can be facilitated.

A gaming machine AA4 characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines AA1 to AA3, the gaming machine AA4 has a fixing means for fixing the operating means at the specific position so as to make it difficult to operate.

According to the game machine AA4, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines A1 to A3, when the operation means is positioned at a specific position, the movement of the operation means is restricted by the fixing means. It is possible to suppress that the operation means is operated regardless. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress unnecessary operation of the operating means, which may cause a failure.

Any one of the game machines AA1 to AA4 has a shooting means capable of shooting game balls based on the player's operation, and the specific effect includes a mode for prompting the player to shoot the game balls. A gaming machine AA5, characterized in that

According to the gaming machine AA5, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines AA1 to AA4, a mode for prompting the player to shoot the game ball is included as the specific effect, so when the specific effect is executed, A player can be actively encouraged to shoot a game ball. As a result, it is possible to execute an effect that makes it easier for the player to release the operating means, so that the operating means can be easily moved to a specific position, so that the operating means can be easily positioned at a predetermined position. This has the effect of making it easier to execute the operation effect.

<Characteristics AB group> (Combined control of pending PUSH and PUSH notice)
Acquisition means capable of acquiring information, storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, determination means capable of performing determination based on the information stored in the storage means, and determination means display means for displaying identification information for indicating the determination result; dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means; and identification patterns corresponding to the information stored in the storage means. In a gaming machine having an identification pattern display means for displaying on the display means, an operation means operable by a player, and an operation capable of executing an operation performance in which a performance mode is changed by operating the operation means. an effect execution means; an identification symbol effect execution means capable of executing an identification symbol effect that can change the mode of the displayed identification symbol by operating the operation means; a regulating means for regulating execution of the identification symbol performance in a period overlapping with the identification symbol performance.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a case where a privilege game was executed. Before the result of the lottery is notified, an operation effect for causing the player to operate the operation means is made executable as a suggestion effect for suggesting the result of the lottery, and the period until the result of the lottery is notified is set. There was something for the players to enjoy. (For example, JP-A-2013-090780). In addition, in the gaming machine having the above-described configuration, there is a game machine in which a plurality of conditions for executing operation effects are provided in order to further enhance the effects of the effects. In this case, there is a problem that a plurality of operation presentations are executed in duplicate, resulting in presentations that are difficult for the player to understand, thereby reducing the interest in the game. It is an object of the above game machine to provide a game with improved interest in the game.

According to the game machine AB1, since it is possible to regulate the execution of the operation performance and the identification symbol performance in the overlapping period by the regulating means, it is possible to prevent a plurality of operation performances from being executed redundantly. becomes possible. Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine AB1, the regulating means is configured to set a period during which the identification information is dynamically displayed for regulating the execution of the operation presentation mode, and to execute the identification symbol presentation within that period. The game machine AB2 is characterized by:

According to the gaming machine AB2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AB1, during the period during which the identification information is dynamically displayed, the regulation means sets a period for regulating the execution of the operation presentation mode, and identification is performed within that period. Since the symbol effect is executed, it is possible to smoothly execute a plurality of operation effects. Therefore, there is an effect that a plurality of operation presentations can be executed in an easy-to-understand manner for the player, and the presentation effect can be enhanced.

In the game machine AB1 or AB2, during the period in which the operation performance is executed, the mode variable performance in which the mode of the identification pattern is changed and displayed without the operation means being operated can be executed. A gaming machine AB3 characterized by:

According to the game machine AB3, in addition to the effects of the game machine AB1 or AB2, since the variable mode effect can be executed during the period in which the operation effect is executed, it is identified whether the variable mode effect is executed. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand whether the symbol presentation is to be executed, and there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

<Characteristic AC group> (Electric support end control by falling)
A variable that can be changed between a ball entry means into which a game ball can enter, a first state in which a game ball can enter the ball entry means, and a second state in which the ball entry is more difficult than in the first state. a member, an acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on the entry of a game ball into the ball entry means, a determination means capable of performing determination based on the information acquired by the acquisition means, and the determination means display means for displaying identification information for indicating the determination result by means of display means, dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information displayed on the display means, and for indicating the specific determination result of the display means When the identification information is displayed, a privilege giving means capable of giving a privilege advantageous to the player, a first probability as a probability of being determined as the specific determination result, and a second probability higher than the first probability a probability setting means capable of setting a probability, a determination means capable of executing a determination when the second probability is set by the probability setting means, and a specific determination result determined by the determination means. probability control means for setting the first probability based on; setting means capable of setting a specific game state in which the variable member is more likely to be varied from the second state to the first state than in a normal game state; and end condition determination means for determining whether an end condition for setting the normal game state is established when the special game state is set by the setting means, wherein the setting means determines that the second probability is It is configured to be able to set the special game state when it is set, and the end condition determination means determines the second probability in a state where a predetermined period has elapsed after the special game state is set. to the first probability, the game machine AC1 determines that the termination condition is established.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a case where a privilege game was executed. In order to make it possible to set a high-probability state in which it is easy to win and a low-probability state in which it is difficult to win as a game state, and to shift the game state to a low-probability state when the high-probability state is set. There was a lottery (so-called drop lottery). Furthermore, in the gaming machine described above, there is a configuration in which it is possible to set a specific game state in which the lottery of the game is likely to be executed and a normal game state in which it is difficult to execute the game. (For example, JP-A-2010-269007). However, in the above game machine, there is no relationship between the timing of transition from the high probability state to the low probability state and the timing of transition from the specific game state to the normal game state, and the player can understand the transition state of each game state. There is a problem that it becomes difficult and the interest in the game is reduced. It is an object of the above game machine to provide a game with improved interest in the game.

According to the gaming machine AC1, when the probability control means sets the first probability, the normal game state is set. can. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand the transition state of the game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the game machine AC1, the determination means executes the determination when a determination condition for the determination means to perform the determination is satisfied.

According to the game machine AC2, since it is possible to cause the determination means to perform determination when the determination condition is satisfied, it is possible to suppress excessive determination by the determination means when the second probability is set. be able to. Therefore, there is an effect that a proper game can be provided to the player.

In the gaming machine AC2, the determination means executes determination before dynamic display of the identification information is started based on the information acquired by the acquisition means. Machine AC3.

According to the game machine AC3, in addition to the effects of the game machine AC2, since the determination by the determination means is executed before the dynamic display of the identification information is started, the determination is executed based on the establishment of the determination condition. Dynamic display of the identification information for indicating the result of the determination made can be executed based on the determination result of the determining means. Thus, when the determination means determines that the determination result is a specific determination result, determination by the determination means, which is executed based on the establishment of the determination condition that triggered the determination, can be performed with the first probability. Therefore, there is an effect that a proper game can be provided to the player.

In any one of the game machines AC1 to AC3, the probability control means sets the first probability before starting the dynamic display of the identification information when the determination means determines that the specific determination result is obtained. A game machine AC4 characterized in that it is set.

According to the game machine AC4, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines AC1 to AC3, when the determination result of the determination means is a specific determination result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started by the probability control means. A first probability is set before . Therefore, it is possible to prevent the dynamic display of the identification information based on the second probability from being executed after a specific determination result is determined, so that a proper game can be provided to the player. effective.

In any one of the game machines AC1 to AC4, the setting means sets the normal game state based on the fact that the special game state is set and the specific determination result is determined. A gaming machine AC5 characterized by:

According to the game machine AC5, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines AC1 to AC4, even when the determination result of the determination means is a specific determination result, the normal game state is set by the setting means. When the normal game state is set by the means, it is difficult for the player to understand whether the determination result of the determination means is a specific determination result or whether the determination result of the determination means is a specific determination result. It can provide predictable fun. Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

<Characteristic AD group> (Burst interruption effect)
In a game machine having a performance executing means capable of executing a performance and a performance period determining means for determining the execution period of the performance executed by the performance executing means, the period during which the performance is executed by the performance executing means. a specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect by suspending at least a part of the effect being executed by the effect executing means, and the effect being executed by the effect executing means when the specific effect is executed A game machine AD1, characterized in that it has a setting means capable of changing and setting the effect to be interrupted corresponding to the state of the effect.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a case where a privilege game was executed. Then, before the lottery result is reported, a suggestive effect for suggesting the lottery result can be executed, and the player can enjoy the period until the lottery result is reported. Furthermore, there is a game machine that further enhances the effect of suggestive effects by executing various effects as suggestive effects at various timings (for example, JP-A-2014-209952). In such a gaming machine, even when one suggestive effect is being executed, another suggestive effect can be executed, so the effect is that the types of effects to be executed can be increased and the effect of the effect can be enhanced. be. However, the above-described gaming machine is configured to execute another suggestive effect regardless of the effect situation of the one suggestive effect being executed. However, there is a problem that the player's motivation to play is reduced. Furthermore, when the suggestive effect being executed indicates a predetermined process change (for example, story development), switching the suggestive effect causes the predetermined process change mode to end in the middle. Therefore, there is a problem that the player is more confused. It is an object of the above-described gaming machine to provide a game that enhances the interest of the game by executing various suggestive effects without confusing the player.

According to the game machine AD1, since the setting means can change the aspect of the performance interrupted by the execution of the specific performance, it is possible to prevent the player from being puzzled by the performance being interrupted during execution. can be suppressed. Therefore, in a gaming machine capable of overlapping and executing a plurality of effects, it is possible to provide an effect that is easy for the player to understand.

In the game machine AD1, the effect executed by the effect execution means includes a sound effect, and the setting means interrupts the sound effect depending on the state of the effect, The game machine AD2 is characterized in that it sets a case where the presentation by sound is not interrupted.

According to the game machine AD2, in addition to the effects of the game machine AD1, when the effect is interrupted, it is possible to set whether only the sound is continued or the sound is also interrupted. It is possible to change the mode of interrupting the performance according to the contents of the performance. Therefore, it is possible to make the player's degree of interest in the interrupted presentation different, and to enhance the presentation effect.

In this case, it may be determined whether or not to interrupt the output of the sound based on the effect mode of the specific effect and the effect mode of the interrupted effect, and the sound set as the effect mode of the specific effect When the type and the sound type set as the effect mode of the effect to be interrupted are the same sound type, the output of the sound may be interrupted. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the situation where the sound of the interrupted performance is output and confused with the sound set as the performance mode of the specific performance, resulting in the provision of an incomprehensible performance.

Further, it may be configured such that it is determined whether or not to interrupt the output of the sound according to the interruption timing of the presentation. In this case, if the remaining period of the effect to be interrupted is a predetermined period or less (for example, one second or less), even if the effect is interrupted, only the sound can be output to the end. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand that the performance has been interrupted.

In the game machine AD1 or AD2, a display means for dynamically displaying a plurality of identification symbols as one of the effects executed by the effect execution means, and a case where the identification symbols are displayed in a specific combination on the display means. and a privilege granting means for imparting a privilege that is advantageous to the player, wherein the setting means dynamically displays one of the plurality of identification symbols while the other identification symbols are displayed. The game machine AD3 is characterized in that the effect to be interrupted is changed and set depending on whether or not the ready-to-win display mode displayed in the combination that can be the specific combination is displayed. .

According to the game machine AD3, in addition to the effects of the game machine AD1 or AD2, the effect can be changed depending on whether the effect to be interrupted is before or after the ready-to-win display. That is, it is possible to change the aspect of the effect set by the setting means based on the timing of interrupting the effect executed by the effect executing means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from being puzzled by the interruption of the performance.

In the game machine AD3, the setting means interrupts the effect by the voice when the effect executed by the effect matter means is interrupted before the ready-to-win display mode is displayed, and the ready-to-win display mode is displayed. The game machine AD4 is characterized in that the presentation is set so as not to interrupt the presentation by the voice when the presentation is interrupted after is displayed.

According to the game machine AD4, in addition to the effects of the game machine AD3, if the production is interrupted before the ready-to-win display mode is displayed, the sound is interrupted, and if the production is interrupted after the ready-to-win display mode is displayed, It is possible to prevent audio from being interrupted. Therefore, even if the effect is interrupted after the ready-to-win display mode is displayed, the voice can be output continuously, so that the player is puzzled that the ready-to-win display mode has been canceled in the middle. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress that it will be lost.

<Characteristic AE group> (Button repeated hitting sound control)
In a gaming machine having an operation means operable by a player and an effect execution means for changing an effect based on the operation of the operation means, a first operation is performed each time the operation means is operated. A gaming machine AE1 is characterized by having voice control means capable of alternately outputting a sound and a second operation sound different from the first operation sound.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a case where a privilege game was executed. Before the result of the lottery is notified, an operation effect for causing the player to operate the operation means is made executable as a suggestion effect for suggesting the result of the lottery, and the period until the result of the lottery is notified is set. There is something that entertains players (for example, JP-A-2013-090780). Further, in the game machine described above, when the player operates the operating means, there are some that output an operation sound in order to notify that the operation has been correctly accepted. In such a game machine, it was possible to easily determine whether or not the player could operate the operation means by the output operation sound. When the next operation is performed during the period, that is, when the continuous hitting operation is performed, there is a problem that it becomes difficult for the player to hear the operation sound output corresponding to each operation. In addition, there is a problem that the game becomes monotonous if only one operation sound is output. It is an object of the above game machine to provide a game that enhances interest in the game by making it easier for the player to hear the output operation sound and by outputting the operation sound rich in variations.

According to the gaming machine AE1, when the player operates the operation means a plurality of times, the first operation sound and the second operation sound are alternately output. There is an effect that it is possible to output operation sounds that are rich in variations. In addition, since different operation sounds are output alternately, even when the operation means are operated at short intervals (intervals shorter than the output period of one operation sound), the player cannot operate the operation means. can be easily discriminated by the operation sound. Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the game machine AE1, the sound control means causes the first operation sound to be output during the first period, and before the first period elapses, an operation to output the first operation sound is performed. In this case, the gaming machine AE2 is characterized in that the first operation sound being output is stopped and the output of the first operation sound is newly started.

According to the gaming machine AE2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AE1, when the next first operation sound is output within the first period in which the first operation sound is output, the first operation sound being output is is stopped and a new first operation sound is output, there is an effect that the execution of a new operation can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

In the game machine AE1 or AE2, the sound control means causes the second operation sound to be output during the second period, and before the second period elapses, an operation to output the second operation sound is performed. The game machine E3 is characterized in that, when the second operation sound is output, the second operation sound being output is stopped and the output of the second operation sound is newly started.

According to the gaming machine AE3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AE1 or AE2, when the next second operation sound is output within the second period in which the second operation sound is output, the second operation sound being output is Since the operation sound is stopped and a new second operation sound is output, there is an effect that the execution of the new operation can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

In any one of the game machines AE1 to AE3, the effect executing means is configured to be capable of executing a continuous operation effect in which the mode of effect is varied in response to successively operating the operation means a plurality of times. A gaming machine AE4 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine AE4, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines AE1 to AE3, the continuous operation presentation is executed in response to the continuous operation of the operating means a plurality of times, thereby changing the presentation state. The player can be notified that the operating means has been operated by . This makes it possible to determine from the operation sound and the effect that the operation to the operating means has been accepted. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

<Characteristic AF group> (Holding notice)
Acquisition means capable of acquiring information, storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, determination means capable of performing determination based on the information stored in the storage means, and determination means display means for displaying identification information for indicating the determination result; dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means; and identification patterns corresponding to the information stored in the storage means. In a gaming machine having an identification pattern display means for displaying on the display means, an operation means operable by a player, and an operation capable of executing an operation performance in which a performance mode is changed by operating the operation means. a performance executing means; and an identification pattern performance execution means capable of executing an identification pattern performance capable of varying a mode of the displayed identification pattern by operating the operation means, The identification symbol effect execution means executes the identification symbol effect for two or more identification symbols when a plurality of identification symbols are displayed on the display means. .

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is a game machine such as a pachinko machine that variably displays symbols based on the winning of a game ball into a starting winning slot, and informs a player of the result of a lottery after the variative display is completed. Further, the lottery executed based on the winning of the game ball into the start prize winning slot can be held and stored a plurality of times, the held patterns corresponding to the number of reserved memories are displayed, and the displayed reserved patterns are displayed. There is one that is configured to be able to execute a pending notice effect that can notify information about the corresponding lottery in advance by using it (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-297071). In the above-described gaming machine, by changing the color and shape of the reserved symbols, by suggesting the degree of expectation that the variable display corresponding to the reserved symbols will be a big hit, the game can be played before the variable display is started. It made it possible to raise people's expectations. However, there is a problem that when the suspension notice performance is generated, it becomes difficult for the player to have expectations for the suspension symbols that are not subject to the suspension notice, and the player's desire to play is lowered. An object of the present invention is to solve the problems exemplified above.

According to the game machine AF1, as one identification symbol effect, the identification symbol effect is executed for two or more identification symbols. It is possible to reduce the number of identification patterns that are not targeted for design performance. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player's desire to play from declining, and to improve the interest in the game.

In the gaming machine AF1, there is pre-determination means capable of executing the determination before the information stored in the storage means is determined by the determination means, and the identification symbol effect execution means The gaming machine AF2 is characterized in that the aspect of the identification pattern is varied based on the result of discrimination by a pre-discrimination means.

According to the gaming machine AF2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AF1, the aspect of the identification symbol can be changed based on the determination result of the preliminary determination means, so that the player is interested in the performance result of the identification symbol performance. can have Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine AF1 or AF2, the identification symbol effect executing means changes the mode of the two or more identification symbols based on the establishment of a predetermined condition by operating the operating means. Characteristic game machine AF3.

According to the game machine AF3, in addition to the effects of the game machine AF1 or AF2, the aspect of two or more identification symbols can be changed based on the operation of the operation means, so the effect executed for the player There is an effect that it can increase the willingness to participate in

In any one of the game machines AF1 to AF3, the identification symbol effect executing means executes the identification symbol effect over a period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed a plurality of times, and the identification symbol effect is executed, the game machine AF4 has regulation period setting means for setting a regulation period during which the operation of the operating means is not valid.

According to the game machine AF4, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the game machines AF1 to AF3, the identification symbol effect is executed over the period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed a plurality of times, and furthermore, the identification symbol effect is executed. A restriction period is provided during the execution period during which the operation to the operating means is not determined to be valid. As a result, it is possible to entertain the player at which timing to operate the operating means, and there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

A gaming machine AF5 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine AF4, a specific performance is executed during a period other than the regulation period in a period during which the identification symbol performance is executed.

According to the gaming machine AF5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AF4, by executing the specific performance, during the identification symbol performance, the game can be determined whether or not it is currently in the regulation period in which the operation of the operation means is not valid. Since it is possible for the player to easily discriminate, there is an effect that an effect that is easy for the player to understand can be executed.

<Characteristic AG group> (Probable fall with small winning)
A variable that can be changed between a ball entry means into which a game ball can enter, a first state in which a game ball can enter the ball entry means, and a second state in which the ball entry is more difficult than in the first state. a member, an acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on the entry of a game ball into the ball entry means, a determination means capable of performing determination based on the information acquired by the acquisition means, and the determination means display means for displaying identification information for indicating the determination result by means of display means, dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information displayed on the display means, and for indicating the specific determination result of the display means When the identification information is displayed, a privilege giving means capable of giving an advantageous privilege to the player, a first probability as a discrimination probability of being discriminated from the specific discrimination result, and a second probability higher than the first probability a probability setting means capable of setting 2 probabilities, a normal game state as game states, and a specific game state in which the variable member is more likely to be varied from the second state to the first state than in the normal game state. and setting means capable of setting, wherein the probability setting means sets the first probability when a first transition condition is established in a state where the second probability is set. The setting means sets the normal game state when the second transition condition is established in the state where the specific game state is set, and the first transition condition and the second transition condition. and an effect execution means capable of executing an effect based on the effect mode set by the effect mode setting means. A gaming machine AG1 characterized by:

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a case where a privilege game was executed. In order to make it possible to set a high-probability state in which it is easy to win and a low-probability state in which it is difficult to win as a game state, and to shift the game state to a low-probability state when the high-probability state is set. There was a lottery (so-called drop lottery). Furthermore, in the gaming machine described above, there is a configuration in which it is possible to set a specific game state in which the lottery of the game is likely to be executed and a normal game state in which it is difficult to execute the game. (For example, JP-A-2010-269007). However, in the above game machine, there is no relationship between the timing of transition from the high probability state to the low probability state and the timing of transition from the specific game state to the normal game state, and the player can understand the transition state of each game state. There is a problem that it becomes difficult and the interest in the game is reduced. It is an object of the above game machine to provide a game with improved interest in the game.

According to the game machine AG1, since the performance is executed in different performance modes based on the order in which the first transition condition and the second transition condition are established, the current game situation is predicted based on the details of the performance to be executed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In the gaming machine AG1, the determination means can determine the special determination result different from the specific determination result, and the second transition condition is that the determination result of the determination means is the special determination result. The game machine AG2 is characterized by being established based on the following.

According to the game machine AG2, in addition to the effects of the game machine AG1, the second transition condition is satisfied based on the determination result of the determination means. , and cases in which the judgment results are disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be interested in the determination result of the determination means, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

The game machine AG2 has counting means capable of counting the number of times the determination result of the determination means becomes the special determination result in the state where the specific game state is set, and the second transition condition is the counting The gaming machine AG3 is characterized in that the second transition condition is established when the result of the counting by means is a predetermined counting result.

According to the gaming machine AG3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AG2, the second transition condition is established when the number of times the discrimination result of the discrimination means becomes the special discrimination result reaches a predetermined number of times. By discriminating that the result is a special discrimination result, it is possible to provide the enjoyment of predicting the period until the second transition condition is established, and to improve the amusement of the game.

In any one of the game machines AG1 to AG3, the effect mode setting means sets the effect mode based on the discrimination probability set by the probability setting means and the game state set by the setting means. A gaming machine AG4 characterized in that it sets the .

According to the game machine AG4, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the game machines AG1 to AG3, the effect mode is set based on the set discrimination probability and the game state. It is possible to provide the enjoyment of predicting the current game situation, and there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the game machine AG4, the effect mode setting means sets the first probability by the probability setting means, the first game state in which the normal game state is set by the setting means, and the normal game state by the probability setting means. The game machine AG5 is characterized in that the second probability is set, and the same effect mode is set in the second game state in which the normal game state is set by the setting means.

According to the game machine AG5, in addition to the effects of the game machine AG4, the first probability is set and the normal game state is set, and the second probability is set and the normal game state is set. Since the same effect mode is set in the second game state, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to distinguish between the first game state and the second game state. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting the current game situation, and to improve the interest in the game.

The gaming machine AG5 has a determination means capable of executing a determination when the second probability is set by the probability setting means, and the determination means is a determination means for the determination means to perform the determination. The game machine AC6 is characterized in that the determination is executed when the condition is satisfied, and the first transition condition is satisfied when the determination result of the determination means is a specific determination result. .

According to the gaming machine AC6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AG5, the determination by the determination means can be executed when the determination condition is satisfied. It is possible to suppress execution of determination. Therefore, there is an effect that a proper game can be provided to the player.

In the gaming machine AG5 or AG6, the performance mode setting means suggests the discrimination probability set by the probability setting means when a predetermined period of time has passed after the privilege is given by the privilege giving means. The game machine AC7 is characterized in that it sets a suggestive effect mode for the game.

According to the gaming machine AC7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AG5 or AG6, after the privilege is granted by the privilege granting means, the suggestive effect mode is set when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, so that the first game state is set. Alternatively, when the second game state is set, the player can be made aware of the current game state based on the contents of the suggestive effect mode. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to continue the game until the predetermined period elapses, and there is an effect that the operation of the game can be improved.

<Characteristic AH group> (Composite control development of pending PUSH and PUSH notice)
Acquisition means capable of acquiring information, storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, determination means capable of performing determination based on the information stored in the storage means, and determination means display means for displaying identification information for indicating the determination result; dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means; and identification patterns corresponding to the information stored in the storage means. In a game machine having identification pattern display means for displaying on said display means, an operation means operable by a player and an operation capable of executing an operation effect in which the effect mode is changed by operating the operation means. an effect execution means; an identification symbol effect execution means capable of executing an identification symbol effect that can change the mode of the displayed identification symbol by operating the operation means; a specific effect execution means capable of executing a specific effect based on the operation of the operation means during the overlapping period when the identification pattern effect is executed in the overlapping period. A gaming machine AH1 characterized by:

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a case where a privilege game was executed. Before the result of the lottery is notified, an operation effect for causing the player to operate the operation means is made executable as a suggestion effect for suggesting the result of the lottery, and the period until the result of the lottery is notified is set. There was something for the players to enjoy. (For example, JP-A-2013-090780). In addition, in the gaming machine having the above-described configuration, there is a game machine in which a plurality of conditions for executing operation effects are provided in order to further enhance the effects of the effects. In this case, there is a problem that a plurality of operation presentations are executed in duplicate, resulting in presentations that are difficult for the player to understand, thereby reducing the interest in the game. It is an object of the above game machine to provide a game with improved interest in the game.

According to the gaming machine AH1, when the operation effect and the identification symbol effect are executed in a period in which the operation effect and the identification symbol effect overlap, the specific effect is executed. It is possible to execute an easy-to-understand production. Therefore, there is an effect that the production effect can be enhanced and the amusement of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine AH1 has setting means for setting the operation effect or the identification symbol effect to be varied when the operation means is operated in the overlapping period, and the specific effect includes the operation AH2 is characterized in that it includes a suggestion mode indicating the operation effect or the identification pattern effect that is to be changed by operating means.

According to the gaming machine AH2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine AH1, it is possible to suggest to the player the production to be changed when the operation means is operated by the effect specific production produced by the gaming machine AH. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of executing an effect that is easy for the player to understand.

In the gaming machine AH1 or AH2, in the overlapping period, the number of operations for varying the operation performance or the identification symbol performance is set differently based on the operation of the operation means. A game machine AH3 characterized by

According to the gaming machine AH3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AA1 or AA2, the number of operations to be varied differs depending on whether the operation presentation or the variable operation presentation is executed alone or overlapped. It becomes possible to Therefore, there is an effect that the production effect of the specific production can be enhanced.

In any of the game machines AH1 to AH3, when the operation performance and the identification symbol performance are executed in overlapping periods, at least one of them is changed by operating the operation means a plurality of times. A gaming machine AH4 characterized in that it has a switching setting means for setting as follows.

According to the game machine AH4, in addition to the effects of the game machines AH1 to AH3, when the operation performance and the identification symbol performance are executed in overlapping periods, at least the number of operations corresponding to either one of the operation performances. can be increased, it is possible to easily comprehend that the specific effect is being executed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the specific effect from ending in a short period of time and the execution of an effect that is difficult for the player to understand.

In the game machine AH4, the game machine AH5 is characterized in that the specific effect includes one in which an execution period of the operation effect mode after being varied is set longer than a normal time.

According to the game machine AH5, in addition to the effects of the game machine AH4, during the specific effect, the execution period of the operation effect mode is set longer than during the normal time, so the specific effect is executed for the player. Since the fact can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner, there is an effect that the performance effect can be enhanced.

<Characteristic AI group> (Pending notice development)
Acquisition means capable of acquiring information, storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, determination means capable of performing determination based on the information stored in the storage means, and determination means display means for displaying identification information for indicating the determination result; dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means; and identification patterns corresponding to the information stored in the storage means. In a gaming machine having an identification pattern display means for displaying on the display means, an operation means operable by a player, and an operation capable of executing an operation performance in which a performance mode is changed by operating the operation means. a performance execution means, an identification pattern performance execution means capable of executing an identification pattern performance capable of varying the mode of the identification pattern being displayed by operating the operation means, and executing the identification pattern performance. an effect mode changing means for varying the effect mode of the identification symbol effect being executed based on the establishment of a predetermined change condition during the period in which the identification symbol effect is being executed. A gaming machine AI1 characterized by:

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is a game machine such as a pachinko machine that variably displays symbols based on the winning of a game ball into a starting winning slot, and informs a player of the result of a lottery after the variative display is completed. Further, the lottery executed based on the winning of the game ball into the start prize winning slot can be held and stored a plurality of times, the held patterns corresponding to the number of reserved memories are displayed, and the displayed reserved patterns are displayed. There is one that is configured to be able to execute a pending notice effect that can notify information about the corresponding lottery in advance by using it (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-297071). In the above-described gaming machine, by changing the color and shape of the reserved symbols, by suggesting the degree of expectation that the variable display corresponding to the reserved symbols will be a big hit, the game can be played before the variable display is started. It made it possible to raise people's expectations. However, since the content of the pending notice effect cannot be made to correspond to the change in the game situation after the pending notice effect has occurred, the player may have expectations for the content of the pending notice effect. There is a problem that it becomes difficult and lowers the desire to play. An object of the present invention is to solve the problems exemplified above.

According to the game machine AI1, when the change condition is established during execution of the identification symbol performance, the performance mode of the identification symbol performance being executed can be changed, so that the performance effect of the identification symbol performance can be enhanced. can. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the decrease in desire to play and improve the interest in the game.

In the game machine AI1, the change condition is established based on the fact that the new information is stored in the storage means during the period in which the identification symbol performance is executed. AI2.

According to the game machine AI2, in addition to the effects of the game machine A1, the production mode of the identification symbol production can be varied based on the fact that new information is stored in the storage means. Also in the above, there is an effect that the player can play the game with motivation to store new information in the storage means, and the operation of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine AI2, there is pre-determination means capable of executing the determination before the information stored in the storage means is determined by the determination means, and the identification symbol effect execution means The game machine AI3 is characterized in that the mode of the identification pattern is varied based on the result of discrimination by a pre-discrimination means.

According to the game machine AI3, in addition to the effects of the game machine AI2, the mode of the identification pattern is varied based on the determination result of the preliminary determination means, so that the identification pattern performance to be executed is made interesting. There is an effect that it is possible to enhance the production effect.

In the game machine AI3, the effect mode varying means varies the effect mode based on the determination result of the prior determination means for the information that triggers the establishment of the change condition. Machine AI4.

According to the game machine AI4, in addition to the effects of the game machine AI3, it is possible to vary the production mode of the identification symbol production based on the result of pre-determination of the newly stored information. Identification patterns in a wider range than the range of identification patterns indicated by the identification pattern presentation in . Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to easily make the player feel a sense of expectation for the identification symbol performance, and to improve the interest of the game.

In any one of the gaming machines AI1 to AI4, the identification symbol effect executing means executes the identification symbol effect over a period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed a plurality of times, and the identification symbol effect A game machine AI5, characterized in that it has regulation period setting means for setting a regulation period in which the operation of the operation means is not valid during a period in which is being executed.

According to the gaming machine AI5, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines AI1 to AI4, the identification symbol performance is executed over the period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed a plurality of times, and furthermore, the identification symbol performance is performed. A restriction period is provided during the execution period during which the operation to the operating means is not determined to be valid. As a result, it is possible to entertain the player at which timing to operate the operating means, and there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

A game machine AI6 characterized in that, in the game machine AI5, a specific effect is executed in a period other than the regulation period in a period during which the identification symbol effect is executed.

According to the game machine AI 6, in addition to the effects of the game machine AI 5, by executing the specific effect, during the identification pattern effect, the game can be determined whether it is currently in the regulation period in which the operation of the operation means is not valid. Since it is possible for the player to easily discriminate, there is an effect that an effect that is easy for the player to understand can be executed.

<Characteristic AJ group> (Button repeated tapping sound control)
In a game machine having an operation means operable by a player and an effect execution means for changing an effect based on the operation of the operation means, an operation sound is generated each time the operation means is operated. a sound control means capable of outputting at least a first operation sound and a second operation sound different from the first operation sound; and a type of the operation sound output by the sound control means can be set. a sound setting means; and a sound discrimination means capable of discriminating the type of the operation sound output by the sound control means, wherein the sound setting means determines the The gaming machine AJ1 is characterized in that it sets the type of operation sound.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a case where a privilege game was executed. Before the result of the lottery is notified, an operation effect for causing the player to operate the operation means is made executable as a suggestion effect for suggesting the result of the lottery, and the period until the result of the lottery is notified is set. There is something that entertains players (for example, JP-A-2013-090780). Further, in the game machine described above, when the player operates the operating means, there are some that output an operation sound in order to notify that the operation has been correctly accepted. In such a game machine, it was possible to easily determine whether or not the player could operate the operation means by the output operation sound. When the next operation is performed during the period, that is, when the continuous hitting operation is performed, there is a problem that it becomes difficult for the player to hear the operation sound output corresponding to each operation. In addition, there is a problem that the game becomes monotonous if only one operation sound is output. It is an object of the above game machine to provide a game that enhances interest in the game by making it easier for the player to hear the output operation sound and by outputting the operation sound rich in variations.

According to the gaming machine AJ1, it is possible to set a new type of operation sound based on the type of operation sound that is actually output. There is an effect that interest can be improved.

The game machine AJ2 in the game machine AJ1 is characterized in that the sound setting means sets a type of the operation sound different from the type of the operation sound determined by the sound determination means.

According to the game machine AJ2, in addition to the effects of the game machine AJ1, it is possible to set an operation sound of a type different from the type of operation sound that is actually output, so various operation sounds are output. By doing so, it is possible to execute a production rich in variations, and there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the game machine AJ1 or AJ2, the sound setting means sets the first operation sound when the sound determination means determines that the operation sound is not output. Machine AJ3.

According to the game machine AJ3, in addition to the effects of the game machine AJ1 or AJ2, the first operation sound is set by the sound setting means when the operation sound is not output. Therefore, it is possible to output an operation sound with a predetermined regularity to the operation of the operation means, and to enhance the presentation effect.

Any one of the gaming machines AJ1 to AJ3 has an operation status determination means capable of determining an interval between the operations performed on the operation means, and the voice setting means determines whether the determination result of the operation status determination means is The game machine AJ4 is characterized in that it is possible to set a third operation sound different from the first operation sound and the second operation sound when a specific situation determination result is obtained.

According to the game machine AJ4, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the game machines AJ1 to AJ3, the third operation sound can be set based on the determination result of the operation status determination means. The fun of operating the means can be provided. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine AJ4, the operation status determination means determines the specific status determination result when an interval between the operations performed on the operation means is shorter than a predetermined period. Amusement machine AJ5.

According to the game machine AJ5, in addition to the effects of the game machine AJ4, when the interval between the operations performed on the operation means is shorter than the predetermined period, the third operation sound is output. There is an effect that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be enhanced.

In any one of the game machines AJ1 to AJ5, the effect executing means executes the effect during a predetermined effect period, based on the determination result of the sound determining means when the effect period has elapsed. and a pseudo-sound setting means capable of setting a pseudo-sound after the performance period elapses, and the sound control means being capable of outputting the pseudo-sound set by the pseudo-sound setting means. A game machine AJ6 characterized by

According to the gaming machine AJ6, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines AJ1 to AJ5, a pseudo sound can be output based on the type of operation sound output when the presentation period elapses, so that the presentation period ends. There is an effect that the output control of the sound can be terminated without making the player feel uncomfortable regardless of the type of the operation sound being output at the time.

In the game machine AJ6, the pseudo-sound setting means sets a pseudo-sound corresponding to the second operation sound when the sound discrimination means determines a type of the operation sound different from the second operation sound. A gaming machine AJ7 characterized by:

According to the game machine AJ7, in addition to the effects of the game machine AJ6, when the type of the operation sound output when the presentation period elapses is other than the second operation sound, the second operation sound is responded to by a pseudo sound. Since the sound is output, the end sound of the sound output by the sound control means can be standardized. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide an effect that does not make the player feel uncomfortable.

In the gaming machine AJ7, a determination means capable of performing determination when a determination condition is satisfied, a display means for displaying identification information for indicating a determination result by the determination means, and a predetermined identification information on the display means. dynamic display means for dynamic display for a period of time, and the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means is stopped and displayed in a specific display mode indicating that the determination result of the determination means is a specific determination result. and a privilege granting means for granting a privilege based on the fact that the performance period is set during a dynamic display period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display, The pseudo-sound setting means, when the identification information dynamically displayed while the effect is being executed is statically displayed in the specific display mode, is more sensitive than when it is not statically displayed in the specific display mode. , a game machine AJ8 characterized in that it facilitates the setting of the pseudo voice.

According to the game machine AJ8, in addition to the effects of the game machine AJ7, a pseudo sound is produced during the dynamic display period of the identification information indicating that the determination result of the determination means is a specific determination result. Since it is made easy to output, there is an effect that the player can be interested in the end content of the voice output by the voice control means.

A gaming machine Z1 characterized in that the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine in any one of the gaming machines described above. Above all, the basic structure of a pachinko game machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, balls are shot into a predetermined game area, and the balls are ejected into actuating openings arranged at predetermined positions in the game area. For example, the identification information dynamically displayed on the display device is determined and stopped after a predetermined period of time, with the requirement of winning a prize (or passing through an activation opening). In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable prize winning device (specific prize winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow the balls to win prizes, and a value corresponding to the number of prizes won Values (including not only prize balls but also data written to magnetic cards, etc.) can be given.

A gaming machine Z2 characterized in that the gaming machine is a slot machine in any one of the gaming machines described above. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with variable display means for displaying the identification information in a fixed manner after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed, and the stop time and a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the definite identification information of is the specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

A gaming machine Z3 characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines described above, the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the integrated game machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, and an operation means for starting (such as an operation lever) The identification information starts to change due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed. a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information; the ball is used as a game medium; A gaming machine configured to require a predetermined number of balls at the start of dynamic display, and to pay out a large number of balls at the occurrence of a special game state.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
81 Third pattern display device (display means)
203a Special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area (part of storage means)
203b Special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area (part of storage means)
10317 PUSH button (operation means)
S309 Determination means S406, S413 Acquisition means S503, S505 Pre-determination means S4058 Identification symbol effect execution means S4053, S4063 Identification symbol display means S4205 Dynamic display means

The present invention relates to a game machine represented by a pachinko machine.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. It has been proposed that a privilege game is executed.

JP 2013-090780 A

In such a game machine, there is a demand for an improvement in the amusement of the game.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of improving the enjoyment of a game.

In order to achieve this object, the game machine according to claim 1 comprises acquisition means capable of acquiring information, storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, and the information stored in the storage means . A discriminating means capable of discriminating based on information, a display means for displaying identification information for indicating a discrimination result by the discriminating means, and a dynamic display of the identification information displayed on the display means. a state setting means capable of setting at least one of a first game state and a second game state more advantageous to the player than the first game state based on the determination result; a pre-determination means capable of executing pre-determination based on the information stored in the storage means before the determination is executed by the determination means ; a performance selection means capable of selecting one performance mode group from among a plurality of performance mode groups including at least the performance mode of the performance executed by the performance execution means; and group switching means for switching between groups of effects modes, wherein the group switching means is configured to be able to determine the type of the group of effects modes based on the determination result of the preliminary determination means, and the gaming machine is a first performance mode as the performance mode of the performance, and is shifted from the second game state to the first game state according to the determination result of the preliminary determination in comparison with the first performance mode. Including a second effect mode that can suggest that the ratio containing the result that the condition is satisfied is small, and the first game from the second game state according to the determination result of the preliminary determination It is determined if it includes a result that the condition for transitioning to the state is satisfied, and if it does not include a result that the condition for transition from the second game state to the first game state is satisfied. The second effect mode group having a higher rate of successively executing the first effect mode than the first effect mode group can be selected, and the second effect mode group is selected. , in the state in which the specific second effect mode has already been executed among the second effect modes, compared with the case in which the specific second effect mode is not executed. The ratio of execution of the 1st effect mode is set to be low.

According to the gaming machine of claim 1, the acquisition means capable of acquiring information, the storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, and the determination based on the information stored in the storage means display means for displaying identification information for indicating the result of determination by the determination means; and dynamic display capable of dynamically displaying the identification information displayed on the display means. means, state setting means capable of setting at least one of a first game state and a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state based on the result of the determination, and determination by the determination means. a preliminary determination means capable of executing preliminary determination based on the information stored in the storage means prior to the execution of a performance execution means capable of executing a performance ; A performance selection means capable of selecting one performance mode group from among a plurality of performance mode groups including at least the performance mode of the performance to be executed, and the performance mode group selected by the performance selection means are switched. and a group switching means, wherein the group switching means is configured to be able to determine the type of the effect mode group based on the determination result of the preliminary determination means, and the gaming machine is configured to perform the effect. As a performance mode, a first performance mode and a condition for shifting from the second game state to the first game state based on the determination result of the preliminary determination in comparison with the first performance mode are established. It includes a second production mode that can suggest that the ratio containing the result is small, and the transition from the second game state to the first game state is performed by the determination result of the preliminary determination. If it includes a result that the condition is satisfied, the first production that is determined if it does not include a result that the condition for moving from the second game state to the first game state is satisfied When the second effect mode group having a higher rate of continuously executing the first effect mode than the mode group is selected, and the second effect mode group is switched to In addition, among the second effects modes, when the specific second effects mode has already been executed, the first effects mode is more pronounced than when the specific second effects mode is not executed. It is made to run less frequently.

Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment; FIG. 1 is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a front perspective view of an operation device. (a) is a partial front view of the pachinko machine, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine taken along line VIb-VIb of FIG. 6(a). (a) is a partial front view of the pachinko machine, and (b) is a partial sectional view of the pachinko machine taken along line VIIb-VIIb of FIG. 7(a). FIG. 7 is a front perspective view of the operation device as viewed in the direction of arrow VIII in FIG. 6; FIG. 8 is a front perspective view of the operation device as viewed in the direction of arrow IX in FIG. 7; It is a front perspective view of an operation device. It is a back perspective view of an operation device. It is a front exploded perspective view of an operation device. It is a back exploded perspective view of an operation device. (a) is a front view of the tilting device, (b) is a side view of the tilting device viewed in the direction of arrow XIVb in FIG. FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view of the tilting device on line XIVc; It is a front exploded perspective view of a tilting device. Fig. 10 is a rear exploded perspective view of the lid of the tilting device; (a) is a front view of the driving device, and (b) is a side view of the driving device viewed in the direction of arrow XVIIb in FIG. 17(a). It is a front exploded perspective view of a drive. It is a front exploded perspective view of a transmission shaft. 18. (a) is a side view of the left disc cam as viewed in the direction of arrow XXa in FIG. 18, and (b) is a side view of the left disc cam as viewed in the direction of arrow XXb in FIG. (a) and (b) are front views of a release member and a rotary pawl member. FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); FIG. 39 is a partial cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXXIX-XXXIX of FIG. 38; FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); (a) is a side view of a slide claw member in a second embodiment, (b) is a side view of a rotary plate member, and (c) is a side view of a releasing member. (a) and (b) are side views of a release member, a rotary plate member, and a slide claw member. FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line corresponding to line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line corresponding to line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line corresponding to line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); It is a side view of the tilting device in 3rd Embodiment. (a) and (b) are side views of the operation device. (a) and (b) are side views of the operation device. It is a side view of the tilting device in 4th Embodiment. (a) and (b) are side views of the operation device. (a) and (b) are side views of the operation device. FIG. 11 is an exploded front perspective view of an operation device according to a fifth embodiment; It is an exploded rear perspective view of the operation device. It is an exploded front perspective view of a lower frame member and a vibration device. (a) is a side view of the lower frame member, (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the lower frame member taken along line LIXb-LIXb in FIG. 59(a), and (c) is FIG. 59(a). is a partial top view of the lower frame member as viewed in the direction of the arrow LIXc. 59(a) and 59(b) are sectional views of the vibrating device taken along line LXa-LXa of FIG. 59(a). 59(a) and 59(b) are cross-sectional views of the transmission device 5410 and the housing member 5430 taken along line LIXb-LIXb in FIG. 59(a). It is an exploded front perspective view of a drive. (a) is a front perspective view of a right disc cam, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the right disc cam. It is a front exploded perspective view of a transmission shaft. (a) is a front view of the right disc cam viewed in the direction of arrow LXVa in FIG. 62, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the right disc cam taken along line LXVb-LXVb in FIG. c) is a cross-sectional view of the right disc cam taken along line LXVc-LXVc of FIG. 65(a). 66(a) is a front view of the right disc cam viewed in the direction of arrow LXVa in FIG. 62, and (b) is a sectional view of the right disc cam taken along line LXVIb-LXVIb in FIG. 66(a). 67(a) is a cross-sectional view of the operation device taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a), and (b) is a partial rear view of the operation device as viewed in the direction of arrow LXVIIb in FIG. 67(a); is. 68(a) is a cross-sectional view of the operation device taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a), and (b) is a partial rear view of the operation device viewed in the direction of arrow LXVIIIb in FIG. 68(a); is. It is an exploded front perspective view of a drive device in a sixth embodiment. FIG. 4 is a front exploded perspective view of a disk member, a ring member and a second transmission member of the left disk cam; FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line corresponding to line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line corresponding to line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line corresponding to line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); (a) is a front view of a right disc cam in a seventh embodiment, and (b) is a rear view of the right disc cam. 74(a) is a cross-sectional view of the right disc cam taken along line LXXVa-LXXVa in FIG. 74(a), and (b) is a partial side view of the right disc cam viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVb in FIG. 74(a). is. (a) is a front view of the ring member, (b) is a rear view of the ring member, and (c) is a side view of the ring member viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVIc in FIG. 76(a). (a) is a front view of an engaging member, and (b) is a side view of the engaging member as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVIIb in FIG. 77(a). (a) is a front view of the right disc cam, (b) is a side view of the right disc cam viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVIIIb in FIG. 78 (a), and (c) is a right disc cam. 78(d) is a side view of the right disc cam as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVIIId in FIG. 78(c); (e) is a front view of the right disc cam; (f) [ Fig. 78 ] is a side view of the right disk cam as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVIIIf in Fig. 78(e) ; 7(a) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operation device taken along the line corresponding to line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6. FIG. 7(a) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operation device taken along the line corresponding to line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6. FIG. FIG. 7 is a partial cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line corresponding to line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6; 7(a) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operation device taken along the line corresponding to line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6. FIG. 7(a) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operation device taken along the line corresponding to line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6. FIG. FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device on a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6; FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device on a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6; It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 8th Embodiment. 1 is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine showing a state in which an inner frame is opened (deployed) with respect to an outer frame; FIG. 1 is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine showing a state in which an inner frame is opened from an outer frame and a back pack is opened from the inner frame (deployed); FIG. 1 is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine showing a state in which an inner frame is closed with respect to an outer frame and a front frame is opened (deployed); FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine with a front frame removed; FIG. FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame, in which constituent members arranged below the window portion of the front frame are shown exploded; FIG. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame in which constituent members arranged below the window portion of the front frame are shown exploded; (a) is an exploded rear perspective view of a front frame, and (b) is a front perspective view of a movable binding member in which a released state and a fixed state of the movable binding member are shown side by side. (a) is a partial rear view of the front frame showing the lower left corner of the front frame, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the front frame taken along line XCIVb-XCIVb of FIG. 94(a). (a) is a partial rear view of the front frame showing the lower left corner of the front frame, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the front frame taken along line XCVb-XCVb of FIG. 95(a). (a) is a rear view schematically illustrating the movable binding member and the harness, (b) is a schematic top view of FIG. 96(a), and (c) is the movable binding member and the harness. 96(d) is a schematic top view of FIG. 96(c). FIG. (a) And (b) is a front frame which illustrates a binding movable member and a harness typically, an inner frame, a binding movable member, and the upper surface schematic diagram of a harness. It is a front view of a passage formation unit. It is an enlarged front view of a first bending region. It is a front exploded perspective view of a front frame. It is a rear exploded perspective view of a front frame. It is an exploded front perspective view of a front frame. It is an exploded back perspective view of a front frame. It is an exploded front perspective view of a front frame. FIG. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the right panel unit; It is an exploded rear perspective view of the right panel unit. It is a front view of a support plate part. It is an exploded front perspective view of the heavy plate unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the heavy plate unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the heavy plate unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the heavy plate unit. 112(a) is a side view of the right panel unit, and (b) is a partially enlarged sectional view of the right panel unit taken along line CXIIb-CXIIb of FIG. 112(a). 113(a) is a side view of the right panel unit, and (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the right panel unit taken along line CXIIIb-CXIIIb of FIG. 113(a). (a) is a side view of the right panel unit, (b) is a rear view of the right panel unit, and (c) is a side view of the right panel unit. 115(a) is a schematic side view of the light guide member, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the light guide member taken along line CXVb-CXVb of FIG. 115(a). It is a partial rear view of the right panel unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the upper panel unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the upper panel unit. FIG. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of an upper frame member; It is an exploded rear perspective view of an upper frame member. 1 is an exploded front perspective view of a speaker assembly; FIG. Fig. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the speaker assembly; (a) is a rear view of the front assembly, and (b) is a front view of the rear assembly. (a) is a rear view of the speaker assembly, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the speaker assembly taken along line CXXIVb-CXXIVb of FIG. 124(a), and (c) is a view of FIG. FIG. 124D is a top view of the speaker assembly viewed in the direction of arrow CXXIVc, and FIG. 124D is a partial bottom view of the speaker assembly viewed in the direction of arrow CXXIVd in FIG. 124(a) is a partial cross-sectional view of the front side assembly, the rear side assembly, the upper frame member, the body frame and the upper side plate member taken along the line CXXVa-CXXVa of FIG. 124(a); is a partial cross-sectional view of the front side assembly, the rear side assembly, the upper frame member, the body frame and the upper side plate member taken along line CXXVb-CXXVb of FIG. It is an exploded front perspective view of a game board and an inner frame. (a) is a back view of the game board, and (b) is a front view of the inner frame. 127(a) and 127(b) are cross-sectional views of the inner frame taken along line CXXVIIIa-CXXVIIIa in FIG. 127(b). (a) and (b) are side views of the board support device and the game board, schematically showing the board support device and the game board. (a) is a front perspective view of a board support device, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the board support device. (a) is a front perspective view of a board support device, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the board support device. It is an exploded front perspective view of a board support device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the board support device. (a) and (b) are side views of the board support device. (a) and (b) are side views of the board support device. 87 is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine taken along line CXXXVI-CXXXVI of FIG. 86; FIG. 87 is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine taken along line CXXXVI-CXXXVI of FIG. 86; FIG. 87 is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine taken along line CXXXVI-CXXXVI of FIG. 86; FIG. 87 is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine taken along line CXXXVI-CXXXVI of FIG. 86; FIG. It is an exploded front perspective view of an outer frame and an inner frame. It is an exploded rear perspective view of an outer frame and an inner frame. (a) is a front perspective view of the ball shooting unit, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the ball shooting unit. (a) and (b) are exploded front perspective views of the ball launching unit. (a) to (c) are front views of the ball launching unit showing in chronological order how the ball is delivered by the ball delivery device. 1 is a front perspective view of a metal member for cutting; FIG. 146(a) is a front view of the ball shooting unit, and (b) is a partial top view of the ball shooting unit viewed in the direction of arrow CXLVIb in FIG. 146(a). 147(a) is a front view of the ball shooting unit, and (b) is a front perspective view of the cutting metal member showing the relationship between the thread and the cutting metal member in the state of FIG. 147(a). FIG. 10 is a partial front view of the ball launching unit, inner rail and outer rail after launching the ball; It is a front view of a game board. It is an exploded front perspective view of the production operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the production operation unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the production operation unit. It is a front view of a petal motion device. FIG. 154 is a cross-sectional view of the petal motion device taken along line CLIV-CLIV of FIG. 153; Fig. 2 is an exploded front perspective view of the petal motion device; It is an exploded rear perspective view of the petal motion device. (a) is an exploded front perspective view of a petal, a flat plate member and a slide member, and (b) is an exploded rear perspective view of the petal, the flat plate member and the slide member. It is a front view of a slit member. It is a front perspective view of a slit member. Fig. 2 is a front perspective view of a slide member and a drive motor; (a) and (b) are rear perspective views of a slide member and a drive motor. FIG. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the central shaft rotating device and loose fitting device; FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of the central shaft rotating device and loose fitting device; It is a back perspective view of a petal motion device, a drive-side arm member, and a driven-side arm member. Fig. 3 is a front perspective view of the back plate; It is an exploded front perspective view of a back plate, a side base material, and a 2nd production|presentation member. It is an exploded front perspective view of a drive-side arm member, a slide plate, and a second effect member. It is a front view of a petal motion device, an advancing/retreating motion unit, and a back plate. It is a rear view of a petal motion device and an advancing/retreating motion unit. It is a front view of a petal motion device, an advancing/retreating motion unit, and a back plate. It is a rear view of a petal motion device and an advancing/retreating motion unit. It is a front view of a petal motion device, an advancing/retreating motion unit, and a back plate. It is a rear view of a petal motion device and an advancing/retreating motion unit. (a) is a front perspective view of the petal motion device, (b) is a front view of the petal motion device, and (c) is a transparent front view of the petal motion device with the central shaft rotating device omitted. It is a figure and (d) is a front view of a slit member and a rotating plate. (a) is a front view of a rotating plate, (b) is a rear view of a petal motion device, (c) is a rear view of a petal and a flat plate member, and (d) is a petal motion device. is a rear perspective view of the. (a) is a front perspective view of the petal motion device, (b) is a front view of the petal motion device, and (c) is a transparent front view of the petal motion device with the central shaft rotating device omitted. It is a figure and (d) is a front view of a slit member and a rotating plate. (a) is a front view of a rotating plate, (b) is a rear view of a petal motion device, (c) is a rear view of a petal and a flat plate member, and (d) is a petal motion device. is a rear perspective view of the. (a) is a front perspective view of the petal motion device, (b) is a front view of the petal motion device, and (c) is a transparent front view of the petal motion device with the central shaft rotating device omitted. It is a figure and (d) is a front view of a slit member and a rotating plate. (a) is a front view of a rotating plate, (b) is a rear view of a petal motion device, (c) is a rear view of a petal and a flat plate member, and (d) is a petal motion device. is a rear perspective view of the. FIG. 20 is a front perspective view of a passage forming unit in a ninth embodiment; It is a back perspective view of a passage formation unit. Fig. 2 is a front view of the ball launching unit; Fig. 2 is a front view of the ball launching unit; FIG. 20 is a front perspective view of a passage forming unit according to a tenth embodiment; It is a front perspective view of a passage forming unit. It is a front perspective view of a passage forming unit. It is a front view of an inner frame and a dish passage formation member in an 11th embodiment. Fig. 3 is a partially enlarged front perspective view of an outer rail; Fig. 3 is a partially enlarged front perspective view of an outer rail; (a) and (b) are partial front enlarged views of a foul ball passage. It is a partial front enlarged view of a foul ball passage. FIG. 32 is a rear perspective view of a loose fitting device according to a twelfth embodiment; (a) and (b) are front views of the petal motion device. (a) and (b) are partially enlarged front views of a slit member and a slide member. It is a front view of a petal motion device. (a) and (b) are front views of the petal motion device. It is a front view of a petal motion device. FIG. 21 is a partially enlarged front view of a slit member and a slide member in another example of the twelfth embodiment; 4 is a partially enlarged front view of a slit member and a slide member; FIG. FIG. 32 is a front perspective view of an operation device according to a thirteenth embodiment; It is a front perspective view of an operation device. (a) and (b) are front perspective views of the operation device. (a) is a front view of the operation device, (b) is a side view of the operation device as viewed in the direction of arrow CCIIIb in FIG. 203(a), and (c) is a bottom view of the operation device, 203(d) is a partial cross-sectional view of the operation device along line CCIIId-CCIIId in FIG. 203(a), and FIG. 203(e) is a cross-sectional view of the operation device along line CCIIIe-CCIIIe in FIG. 203(a). 87(a) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the inner frame in the fourteenth embodiment taken along line CXXXVI-CXXXVI in FIG. 86. FIG. (a) is a partial rear view of the front frame in the fifteenth embodiment, and (b) and (c) are rear views of the fraud detection device. 206(a) is a partial rear view of the right panel unit according to the sixteenth embodiment, and (b) schematically represents an upward recess recessed in the light guide member in region CCVIb of FIG. 206(a). FIG. FIG. 206C is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member, and FIG. 206C is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member schematically showing a downward concave portion recessed in the light guide member in the region CCVIc of FIG. 206A; 206(d) is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member schematically showing a downward concave portion provided in the light guide member in region CCVId of FIG. 206(a), and (e) is FIG. FIG. 11 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member schematically showing an upward concave portion provided in the light guide member in the area CCVIe of (a); It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 17th Embodiment. 1 is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine; FIG. 1 is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine; FIG. 1 is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is an exploded back perspective view of a front frame. It is an exploded front perspective view of a front frame. It is an exploded front perspective view of a front frame. It is an exploded front view of a front frame. 208(a) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operation device taken along line CCXVa-CCXVa in FIG. 207. FIG. 208(a) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operation device taken along line CCXVa-CCXVa in FIG. 207. FIG. It is a front perspective view of an operation device. It is a back perspective view of an operation device. It is an exploded front perspective view of the operation device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the operation device. It is an exploded front perspective view of the operation device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the operation device. (a) is a front perspective view of a left front cover and a right front cover, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the left front cover and the right front cover. It is an exploded front perspective view of a lower tray unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the lower tray unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a lower tray unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the lower tray unit. (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of a right reinforcing rib, and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of a left reinforcing rib. (a) is a top view of a lower tray unit, and (b) is a front view of the lower tray unit. (a) is a bottom view of the lower tray unit, and (b) is a rear view of the lower tray unit. (a) is a right view of the lower tray unit as viewed in the direction of arrow L, and (b) is a left view of the lower tray unit as viewed in the direction of arrow R. FIG. It is a rear view of a lower tray unit. (a) is a cross-sectional view of the lower tray unit along line CCXXXIIIa-CCXXXIIIa in FIG. 229(a), and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the lower tray unit along line CCXXXIIIb-CCXXXIIIb in FIG. 229(a); 229(c) is a cross-sectional view of the lower tray unit taken along line CCXXXIIIc-CCXXXIIIc in FIG. 229(a). FIG. 229(a) is a cross-sectional view of the lower tray unit taken along line CCXXXIV-CCXXXIV of FIG. 229(a); It is an exploded front perspective view of a front frame. It is an exploded back perspective view of a front frame. It is an exploded front perspective view of the presentation effect device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the presentation device. It is an exploded front perspective view of the presentation effect device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the presentation device. (a) is a front view of a rear unit, and (b) is a front view of an electrical board. It is an exploded front perspective view of the rear unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the rear unit. 241 (a) is a partial cross-sectional view of the partitioning member, the electrical board, the back support member, and the acoustic device along line CCXLIVa-CCXLIVa in FIG. 241; It is a partial sectional view of a decoration board, a back support member, and an acoustic device. (a) is a partial cross-sectional view of the partitioning member, the decorative substrate, the back support member, and the acoustic device along line CCXLVa-CCXLVa in FIG. 241; It is a partial sectional view of a decoration board, a back support member, and an acoustic device. 241 (a) is a partial cross-sectional view of the partitioning member, the electrical board, the back support member, and the acoustic device along line CCXLVIa-CCXLVIa in FIG. 241; It is a partial sectional view of a decoration board, a back support member, and an acoustic device. It is a side view schematic diagram of a performance effect device. FIG. 241 is a cross-sectional view of the rear unit taken along line CCXLVIII-CCXLVIII of FIG. 241(a); It is an exploded front perspective view of a front side unit. It is an exploded back perspective view of a front side unit. (a) is a front view of the partitioning unit and the guided unit, and (b) is a rear view of the partitioning unit and the guided unit. (a) is a front view of the partition unit, and (b) is a rear view of the partition unit. (a) is a front view of the plate guiding unit, and (b) is a rear view of the plate guiding unit. (a) is a sectional view of the partitioning unit and the guided unit along the line CCLIVa-CCLIVa in FIG. 251(b), and (b) is a partitioning unit and the guided unit along the line CCLIVb-CCLIVb in FIG. 251(b). 251(c) is a cross-sectional view of the partitioning unit and the guided unit taken along line CCLIVc-CCLIVc in FIG. 251(b). FIG. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the partitioning unit and the guided unit; FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of the partitioning unit and the guided unit; (a) is a front view of the optical transmission unit and the outer frame member, and (b) is a rear view of the optical transmission unit and the outer frame member. (a) is an exploded front perspective view of the optical transmission unit and the outer frame member, and (b) is an exploded rear perspective view of the optical transmission unit and the outer frame member. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the optical transmission unit; FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of the optical transmission unit; FIG. (a) is a front view of a transparent tubular member, (b) is a top view of the transparent tubular member, (c) is a bottom view of the transparent tubular member, and (d) is a It is a right view of the transparent tubular member as viewed in the direction of arrow L, and (e) is a rear view of the transparent tubular member. (a) is a front view of an optical transmission unit, (b) is a top view of the optical transmission unit, (c) is a bottom view of the optical transmission unit, and (d) is an optical transmission unit. 1 is a right side view as viewed in the direction of arrow L, and (e) is a rear view of the optical transmission unit. FIG. 242 is a partial cross-sectional view of the rear unit, acoustic device, and optical transmission unit taken along line CCLXIII-CCLXIII in FIG. 241; (a) is a schematic front view schematically illustrating the arrangement of a first lighting unit, and (b) is a schematic front view schematically illustrating the arrangement of light visually recognized through the optical transmission unit. . It is an exploded front perspective view of a front frame. It is an exploded front perspective view of a horizontal effect device. It is an exploded front perspective view of a horizontal effect device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the horizontal effect device. (a) is a front view of a base member and an electrical board, (b) is a left side view of the base member, (c) is a right side view of the base member, and (d) is a 269(e) is a bottom view of the base member, and (f) is a cross-sectional view of the base member and the illumination board taken along line CCLXIXf-CCLXIXf in FIG. 269(a). FIG. FIG. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the covering unit; FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of the covering unit; (a) is a front perspective view of a light receiving member, (b) is a front view of the light receiving member, and (c) is a front perspective view of the light receiving member. 272(a) is a partially enlarged view of the light receiving member in range CCLXXIIIa of FIG. 272(a), and (b) is a partially enlarged view of the light receiving member in range CCLXXIIIb of FIG. 272(b). (a) is a back perspective view of the light receiving member, (b) is a back view of the light receiving member, and (c) is a back perspective view of the light receiving member. 274(a) is a cross-sectional view of the lateral effect device taken along line CCLXXVa-CCLXXVa in FIG. 274(b), and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the light receiving member taken along line CCLXXVb-CCLXXVb in FIG. 274(b). 4 is an exploded front perspective view of a flat plate member, a curved plate member and a cover member; FIG. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of a flat plate member, a curved plate member and a cover member; FIG. FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of a flat plate member, a curved plate member, and a cover member; FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of a flat plate member, a curved plate member, and a cover member; (a) is a cross-sectional view of the base member, the illumination board, and the light-receiving member taken along line CCLXXXa-CCLXXXa of FIG. 272(b); (b) is a base member taken along line CCLXXXb-CCLXXXb of FIG. 272(c) is a cross-sectional view of the base member, the decorative substrate and the light receiving member taken along the line CCLXXXc-CCLXXXc in FIG. 272(b). FIG. 280(a) is a schematic diagram of a base member, an electrical board, and a light-receiving member, schematically showing the cross section of FIG. 280(a). FIG. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 18th Embodiment. 1 is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine; FIG. 284(a) is a cross-sectional view of the rendering device taken along line CCLXXXIVa-CCLXXXIVa in FIG. 282, and (b) is a schematic diagram of the illumination board of the rendering device viewed in the direction of arrow CCLXXXIVb in FIG. 284(a). FIG. 30 is a side view of the cover in the nineteenth embodiment; FIG. 230 is a cross-sectional view of the lower tray unit in the twentieth embodiment taken along line CCXXXIIIb-CCXXXIIIb of FIG. 229; FIG. 22 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame, operation device, and lower tray unit in the twenty-first embodiment; It is an exploded front perspective view of a lower tray unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the lower tray unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a vibration device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the vibration device. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of a vibration motor and a covering member; FIG. FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of a vibration motor and a covering member; It is a front perspective view of a covering member. 4 is a front view of the covering cover member; FIG. 296(a) is a top view of the lower tray unit, and (b) is a sectional view of the lower tray unit along line CCXCVIb-CCXCVIb in FIG. 296(a). FIG. It is a rear view of a lower tray unit. FIG. 296(a) is a cross-sectional view of the lower tray unit taken along line CCXCVIII-CCXCVIII of FIG. 296(a); 299(a) is a schematic partial top view of the lower tray unit schematically illustrating the lower tray unit, and (b) is a partial schematic side view of the lower tray unit viewed in the direction of arrow CCXCIXb in FIG. 299(a). be. 300(a) is a schematic partial top view of the lower tray unit schematically illustrating the lower tray unit, and (b) is a partial schematic side view of the lower tray unit viewed in the direction of arrow CCCb in FIG. 300(a). be. It is a partial upper surface schematic diagram of the lower tray unit which illustrates a lower tray unit typically. FIG. 22 is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine in a twenty-second embodiment; It is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine showing a state in which the front frame is opened (deployed) with respect to the inner frame. 1 is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine with a front frame removed; FIG. It is an exploded front perspective view of a game board, a center frame, a lottery unit and an operation unit. It is an exploded back perspective view of the game board, the center frame, the lottery unit and the operation unit. (a) is an enlarged front view of the game board in area A5a of FIG. 302, and FIG. 307(b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the game board taken along line CCCVIIb-CCCVIIb of FIG. 307(a). It is an exploded front perspective view of a game board, an outer edge member, and a metal plate-shaped member. It is an exploded back perspective view of a game board, an outer edge member, and a metal plate-shaped member. It is an exploded front perspective view of a lottery unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the lottery unit. (a) is a side view of the engaging member viewed from the rotation axis direction, (b) is a front view of the engaging member as viewed in the direction of arrow CCCXIIb in FIG. c) is a cross-sectional view of the engaging member taken along line CCCXIIc-CCCXIIc in FIG. 312(b); Fig. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the body member, engagement member and drive unit; (a) and (b) are side views of an electric accessory, an engaging member, and an electromagnetic solenoid. 312(a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the lottery unit along the line corresponding to the CCCXIIc-CCCXIIc line in FIG. 312(b). (a) is a top view of the operation unit, and (b) is a side view of the operation unit viewed in the direction of arrow L in FIG. 302. FIG. It is a rear view of a game board and an operation unit. FIG. 303 is a partial cross-sectional view of the game board and the operation unit taken along line CCCXVIII-CCCXVIII of FIG. 302; FIG. 4 is a front view of the operating unit; FIG. 4 is a front view of the operating unit; FIG. 4 is a front view of the operating unit; FIG. 4 is a front view of the operating unit; FIG. 4 is a front view of the operating unit; 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the operating unit; FIG. Fig. 3 is a front perspective view of the first operating unit; Fig. 10 is a rear perspective view of the first operating unit; 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the first motion unit; FIG. FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of the first operation unit; Fig. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the front cover; Fig. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front cover; 331(a) is a front view of an electrical board and a board fixing plate, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the electrical board and a board fixing board taken along line CCCXXXXIb-CCCXXXXIb of FIG. 331(a). 332(a) is a front view of the illumination board and the board fixing plate, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the illumination board and the board fixing board taken along the line CCCXXXIIb-CCCXXXIIb of FIG. 332(a). It is an exploded front perspective view of a front side unit and a rear side unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a front side unit and a rear side unit. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of a front unit and a rear unit of the first operation unit; FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of a front unit and a rear unit of the first operation unit; FIG. FIG. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of a first displacement member; FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of a first displacement member; 319(a) is a front view of the front unit, (b) is a rear view of the front unit, and (c) is a partial cross-sectional view of the first operation unit taken along line CCCXXXIXc-CCCXXXIXc in FIG. 319(a) is a front view of the front unit, (b) is a rear view of the front unit, and (c) is a partial cross-sectional view of the first operation unit taken along line CCCXXXIXc-CCCXXXIXc in FIG. 319(a) is a front view of the front unit, (b) is a rear view of the front unit, and (c) is a partial cross-sectional view of the first operation unit taken along line CCCXXXIXc-CCCXXXIXc in FIG. 319(a) is a front view of the front unit, (b) is a rear view of the front unit, and (c) is a partial cross-sectional view of the first operation unit taken along line CCCXXXIXc-CCCXXXIXc in FIG. 319(a) is a front view of the front unit, (b) is a rear view of the front unit, and (c) is a partial cross-sectional view of the first operation unit taken along line CCCXXXIXc-CCCXXXIXc in FIG. 319(a) is a front view of the front unit, (b) is a rear view of the front unit, and (c) is a partial cross-sectional view of the first operation unit taken along line CCCXXXIXc-CCCXXXIXc in FIG. It is a rear view of a front side unit. 344(a) is a cross-sectional view of the first operation unit taken along line CCCXLVIa-CCCXLVIa of FIG. 339(a), and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the first operation unit taken along line CCCXLVIb-CCCXLVIb of FIG. 344(a); be. (a) and (b) are front views of the first operation unit. FIG. 4 is a front view of the first operating unit; (a) and (b) are front views of the first operation unit. (a) and (b) are front views of the first operation unit. (a) and (b) are front views of the first operation unit. (a) and (b) are front views of the first operation unit. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the pin-equipped gear and the same-phase member, (b) is a front perspective view of the pin-equipped gear and the same-phase member on the left, and the pin-equipped gear and the same-phase member on the right. It is a rear perspective view. FIG. 11 is an exploded front perspective view of a second displacement member; FIG. 11 is an exploded rear perspective view of the second displacement member; (a) and (b) are rear views of the rear unit. (a) and (b) are rear views of the rear unit. It is a rear view of a rear side unit. FIG. 356(a) is a cross-sectional view of the rear unit taken along line CCCLIX-CCCLIX of FIG. 356(a); FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram showing the rotation angles of the pinned gear and the in-phase member with reference to the initial angle; FIG. 4 is a front exploded perspective view of a second operation unit and a rear case; FIG. 11 is a front exploded perspective view of the second operation unit; FIG. 11 is a rear exploded perspective view of the second operation unit; It is a front exploded perspective view of a production unit. It is a back exploded perspective view of a production|presentation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the rotating body of the production unit. It is an exploded back perspective view of the rotating body of the production unit. It is a rear view of a 1st rotating member. (a) is a front exploded perspective view of a support portion, and (b) is a front exploded perspective view of a second support portion. (a) is a rear exploded perspective view of a support portion, and (b) is a rear exploded perspective view of a second support portion. It is a front exploded perspective view of an upper cover part and a box-shaped part. It is a front exploded perspective view of an upper cover part and a box-shaped part. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the box-shaped portion, upper layer transmission mechanism, and lower layer transmission mechanism; FIG. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the box-shaped portion, upper layer transmission mechanism, and lower layer transmission mechanism; FIG. (a) is a top view of an upper lid, a box-shaped portion, an upper layer transmission mechanism, and a lower layer transmission mechanism, and (b) is a front view of the upper lid, the box-shaped portion, an upper layer transmission mechanism, and a lower layer transmission mechanism. (a) is a front view of the first rotating member, (b) is a top view of the first rotating member as viewed in the direction of arrow D in (a) of FIG. 376, and (c) is the first rotating member. 376(d) is a top view of the first rotating member as viewed in the direction of arrow D in FIG. 376(c). (a) is a front view of the first rotating member, (b) is a top view of the first rotating member as viewed in the direction of arrow D in (a) of FIG. 377, and (c) is the first rotating member. 377(d) is a top view of the first rotating member as viewed in the direction of arrow D in FIG. 377(c). (a) is a front view of the first rotating member, (b) is a top view of the first rotating member as viewed in the direction of arrow D in (a) of FIG. 378, and (c) is the first rotating member. 378(d) is a top view of the first rotating member as viewed in the direction of arrow D in FIG. 378(c). (a) is a front view of the first rotating member, (b) is a top view of the first rotating member as viewed in the direction of arrow D in (a) of FIG. 379, and (c) is the first rotating member. 379(d) is a top view of the first rotating member as viewed in the direction of arrow D in FIG. 379(c). (a) is a front view of the effect unit, (b) is a top view of the effect unit viewed in the direction of arrow D in FIG. 380(a), and (c) is a front view of the effect unit, (d) is a top view of the production unit as viewed in the direction of arrow D in FIG. 380(c). (a) is a front view of the effect unit, (b) is a top view of the effect unit viewed in the direction of arrow D in FIG. 381(a), and (c) is a front view of the effect unit, (d) is a top view of the production unit viewed in the direction of arrow D in FIG. 381(c). It is a front view of an annular front cover and a rotating body. FIG. 21 is a top schematic view schematically showing a first rotating member in the twenty-third embodiment; FIG. 32 is a rear view of the front unit in the twenty-fourth embodiment; 344(a) is a cross-sectional view of the first operation unit in the twenty-fifth embodiment taken along line CCCXLVIa-CCCXLVIa in FIG. 339(a), and (b) is a cross-sectional view along line CCCXLVIb-CCCXLVIb in FIG. 1 is a cross-sectional view of the first operating unit on the line corresponding to FIG. (a) and (b) are front views of a displacement device in a twenty-sixth embodiment. (a) and (b) are rear views of the rear unit in the twenty-seventh embodiment. It is a rear view of a rear side unit. (a) is a diagram schematically showing a display area of a third symbol display device in the first control example, and (b) is a display mode displayed by the third symbol display device in the first control example. It is a schematic diagram showing an example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of a back mode with a low expectation of a variable probability state among the back modes displayed by the third symbol display device in the first control example; It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of the back mode with high expectation of probability variation state among the back modes displayed with the 3rd design display apparatus in the 1st control example. Of the back modes displayed by the third symbol display device in the first control example, an example of the display mode of the back mode in which at least the continuation of the variable probability state is confirmed until all the held balls at the start of fluctuation are digested is shown. It is a diagram. It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode at the time of the start of the variable probability continuation suggestion production|presentation displayed with the 3rd design display apparatus in a 1st control example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of a low-expectation attack pattern in the variable probability continuation suggestion effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the first control example; In the variable probability continuation suggestion effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the control example, it is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of a high-expectation attack pattern. (a) and (b) are diagrams schematically showing the transition of the state after the end of the probability variable jackpot in the first control example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode during execution of a press stop effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the first control example, and (b) is a third symbol in the first control example. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when the player performs the first operation (pressing) on the PUSH button during execution of the press stop effect displayed on the display device. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode during execution of a chance charge fan effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the first control example, and (b) is a diagram showing the third In the symbol display device, it is a diagram showing an example of a display mode during execution of the chance charge effect which is executed after the stop of the chance charge symbol. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode at the end of the chance charge effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the first control example, and (b) is a third symbol in the first control example. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when a spirit gauge is consumed, which is displayed on the display device; (a) to (c) are diagrams schematically showing changes over time in the effect mode during the execution of the variable display effect in which the pressing stop effect is set in the first control example. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode during execution of an interruption continuous hit effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the first control example. (a) is a diagram schematically showing an output mode of sound while the PUSH button is repeatedly hit during the execution of the interruption repeated hit effect in the first control example; (b) is the first control; FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between execution timings of repeated hitting operations and monster subtraction numbers during execution of repeated interrupt effects in the example. (a) to (c) are diagrams schematically showing changes over time in the presentation mode of the variable display presentation in which the continuous interrupt presentation is set in the first control example. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode of a pending collective change effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the first control example. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of the display mode when the player presses the PUSH button during execution of the pending collective change effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the first control example. be. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine in the first control example. FIG. 4 is a diagram schematically showing configurations of various counters in the first control example; (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main controller in the first control example, (b) is the block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the main controller in the first control example. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the special symbol jackpot random number table in the first control example, and (b) schematically shows the specified contents of the normal winning random number table in the first control example. FIG. 11C is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the falling lottery table in the first control example; (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a jackpot type selection table set in the ROM of the main controller in the first control example, and (b) is a special figure 1 jackpot table in the first control example. It is a diagram schematically showing the stipulated content, (c) is a diagram schematically showing the stipulated content of the special figure 2 jackpot table in the first control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the main controller in the first control example, (b) constitutes the variation pattern selection table in the first control example It is the figure which showed typically the content of specification of the table for normal. It is the figure which showed typically the defined content of the table for probability variation / time reduction which comprises the variation pattern selection table in a 1st control example. FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing a state transition method in the first control example; (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio ramp control device in the first control example; (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio ramp control device in the first control example; be. FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the back mode lottery table in the first control example; (a) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the hold change lottery table in the first control example, and (b) schematically shows the specified contents of the change point calculation table in the first control example. It is a diagram. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the batch change lottery table in the first control example, and (b) schematically shows the defined contents of the chance charge lottery table in the first control example. It is a diagram. FIG. 11 is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of a continuation-suggestion effect selection table in the first control example; FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the interrupt repeated hitting lottery table in the first control example; 3 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a display control device in a first control example; FIG. (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining a power-on image in the first control example. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a rear surface A in the first control example, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining rear surfaces BD in the first control example. FIG. 7 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a display data table in the first control example; FIG. 11 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table in the first control example; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a drawing list in the first control example; FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the audio output device in the first control example; FIG. 8 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit in the first control example; It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation start process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a starting winning process executed by an MPU in the main control device in the first control example; FIG. 8 is a flow chart showing prefetching processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first control example; It is a flow chart showing normal symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. 4 is a flow chart showing through gate passage processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first control example; 4 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit in the first control example; 4 is a flow chart showing startup processing executed by an MPU in a main controller in a first control example; 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by an MPU in a main controller in a first control example; It is a flow chart which shows the jackpot control processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. It is a flow chart showing a jackpot operation setting process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. It is a flow chart which shows the jackpot end processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing a winning process executed by an MPU in the main control device in the first control example; FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing abnormality processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first control example; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing startup processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the first control example; FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the first control example; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing effect update processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a press stop rendering process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing interrupt repeated hit effect processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the first control example; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing collective change effect processing executed by the MPU in the sound ramp control device in the first control example; FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing charge consumption processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the first control example; 9 is a flowchart showing press detection processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example; 9 is a flowchart showing stop operation detection processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing repeated hitting operation detection processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the first control example; FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing change operation detection processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example; 8 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing winning information command processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a pending notice lottery process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the first control example; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing win-related command processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the first control example; FIG. 9 is a flow chart showing a variable display setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example; It is a flow chart which shows the fluctuation effect setting process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the first control example. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a continuation suggestion effect setting process executed by an MPU in the sound lamp control device in the first control example; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing rear mode lottery processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the first control example; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing effect mode selection processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the first control example; FIG. 8 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; 8 is a flowchart showing boot processing executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example; (a) is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, (b) is a flow chart executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; 4 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing; 9 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; (a) is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example 8 is a flowchart showing stop type command processing; 9 is a flow chart showing suspension command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; (a) is a flowchart showing opening command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; (b) is a flow chart executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; 10 is a flow chart showing number command processing. 9 is a flowchart showing ending command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; (a) is a flowchart showing rear image change command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, (b) is a flow chart executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example 4 is a flow chart showing error command processing. 8 is a flowchart showing display setting processing executed by an MPU in the display device in the first control example; (a) is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; (b) is a flowchart executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; It is the flowchart which showed the pointer update process which carries out. (a) is a flowchart showing a transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; 10 is a flowchart showing resident image transfer setting processing; 10 is a flowchart showing normal image transfer setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; 8 is a flowchart showing drawing processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; (a) is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the audio output device in the first control example, (b) is a command executed by the MPU in the audio output device in the first control example; 4 is a flowchart showing interrupt processing; 8 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the audio output device in the first control example; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing repeated hitting sound command processing executed by the MPU in the audio output device in the first control example; FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing interruption command processing executed by the MPU in the audio output device in the first control example; 8 is a flowchart showing audio setting processing executed by the MPU in the audio output device in the first control example; (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode in the temple search mode displayed on the third symbol display device in the second control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device in the second control example. It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode at the time of small hit A winning during the temple search displayed. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode at the time of winning the probability variable medium jackpot displayed on the third symbol display device in the second control example, and (b) is a third symbol display in the second control example. It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode at the time of probability variable middle and small hit A winning displayed by the apparatus. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode in the lost child mode predetermined timing (99th rotation after the jackpot) effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the second control example, and (b) is the second control example. It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode in the fall winning pattern in the lost child mode displayed with the 3rd pattern display apparatus in a control example. (a), (b) is the figure which showed an example of the display mode in the dialogue mode displayed with the 3rd design display device in the 2nd example of control. (a), (b) is the figure which showed an example of the display mode in the dialogue mode displayed with the 3rd design display device in the 2nd example of control. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the press-down effect among the variable operation effects displayed on the third symbol display device in the second control example; It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of the pushing-up production|presentation among the variable operation production|presentations displayed by 3 design display devices. It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of the touch effect among the variable operation effects displayed by the 3rd pattern display apparatus in the 2nd control example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode in the pending change standby effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the second control example, (b) is a third symbol display in the second control example It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode in the production|presentation after suspension change standby|waiting displayed with a device. (a) to (c) are diagrams schematically showing changes over time in the effect mode of the variable effect (special figure winning pattern during the first period) in the second control example. (a) to (c) are diagrams schematically showing changes over time of the effect mode of the variable effect (special figure winning pattern during the second period) in the second control example. FIG. 11 is a diagram schematically showing a state transition method in a second control example; FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of various counters in the second control example; (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main controller in the second control example, (b) is the block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the main controller in the second control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a jackpot type selection 2 table set in the ROM of the main controller in the second control example, (b) is for special figure 1 jackpot 2 in the second control example It is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the table, (c) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the special figure 2 jackpot 2 table in the second control example. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the small hit random number 2 table in the second control example, (b) schematically shows the defined contents of the small hit type selection 2 table in the second control example and (c) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the time saving end condition selection table in the second control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio ramp control device in the second control example; (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio ramp control device in the second control example; be. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship of each symbol in the second control example, and (b) is a dialogue mode related table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device in the second control example. FIG. 10 is a block diagram showing a configuration, and FIG. 10C is a diagram schematically showing defined contents of a dialog state setting table in a second control example; FIG. 11 is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of a character selection table in the second control example; FIG. 11 is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of a dialogue selection table in the second control example; FIG. 11 is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of an operation effect switching table in the second control example; It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation start process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the second control example. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing deviation processing performed by the MPU in the main controller in the second control example; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows the jackpot end processing 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the second control example. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing main processing 2 executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the second control example; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing effect update processing 2 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the second control example. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing variable operation effect processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second control example; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing second period setting processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the second control example; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing press detection processing 2 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second control example; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing variable operation detection processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second control example; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing variable effect management processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the second control example; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing variable operating means management processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the second control example; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a hold advance notice lottery process 2 executed by an MPU in the sound lamp control device in the second control example; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing execution timing setting processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the second control example; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a variation effect setting process 2 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the second control example; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing normal effect setting processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the second control example; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing dialogue mode setting processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the second control example; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing rear mode lottery processing 2 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the second control example; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows back mode setting processing after the end of time reduction performed by MPU in an audio lamp control device in the example of the 2nd control.

BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, Figures 1 to 4
4, as a first embodiment, the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine (hereinafter simply "pachinko machine").
) 10 will be described. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 whose outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. and an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 12 .
The inner frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side, with the side on which is provided as an axis for opening and closing.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning slots 63 and 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. Balls (game balls) flow down in front of the game board 13 to play a pinball game. The inner frame 12 includes a ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that shoots a ball to the front area of the game board 13, and a shooting unit that guides the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. Front view (
(See FIG. 1) Metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower positions on the left side, and the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side, with the side on which the hinges 19 are provided as the axis for opening and closing. ing. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and has a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two sheet glasses is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.例文帳に追加

The front frame 14 has an upper tray 17 for storing balls projected to the front side and formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface, and the upper tray 17 discharges prize balls, rental balls, and the like. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination guides the ball thrown into the upper tray 17 to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4). A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17 . This frame button 22 is, for example, the third pattern display device 81 (Fig. 2
), or to change the contents of the super ready-to-win effect.

The front frame 14 is provided with light-emitting means such as various lamps around its periphery (for example, corner portions). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when a big win is made or when a predetermined ready-to-win state is reached, and play a role of enhancing the effect during the game. Illuminated parts 29 to 3 containing light-emitting means such as LEDs are mounted on the periphery of the window part 14c.
3 is provided. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as production lamps such as big win lamps, and the respective electric decoration parts 29 to 33 are lit by lighting or blinking of built-in LEDs at the time of a big win or a ready-to-win production. Alternatively, it flashes to indicate that the jackpot is in progress or that the player is in the process of reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, the front view of the front frame 14 (Fig. 1
(See) At the upper left part, there is provided a display lamp 34 which has a built-in light-emitting means such as an LED and can indicate that prize balls are being paid out and that an error has occurred.

In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized on the lower side of the right electrical decoration part 32, and a pasting space K1 (Fig. 2) can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more splendor, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chrome, is attached to the area around the electric decorations 29-33.

A ball rental operation unit 40 is arranged below the window portion 14c. The ball rental operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41 , a ball rental button 42 and a return button 43 . pachinko machine 1
When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of 0, the ball is lent according to the operation. done. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which the balance information of the card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on to display the remaining amount in numbers as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain lending balls based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and lending balls are supplied to the top tray 17 as long as the card or the like has a balance. be done. return button 4
3 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are directly lent to the upper tray 17 from a ball leasing device or the like without going through the card unit, that is, a so-called cash machine, does not require the ball leasing operation unit 40. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation portion to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to achieve commonality between a pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine.

In the lower tray unit 15 positioned below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. there is Lower plate 5
On the right side of 0, an operating handle 51 and an operating device 300 that are operated by the player to hit the ball into the front of the game board 13 are arranged. Note that the operation device 300 will be described later.

Inside the operation handle 51 are a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball shooting unit 112a, and a shooting stop switch 51 for stopping the shooting of the ball during the pressing operation.
b, and a variable resistor (not shown) for detecting the amount of rotation operation (rotation position) of the operation handle 51 from changes in electrical resistance. When the operating handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. A ball is shot with a strength (shooting intensity) corresponding to , and is hit in front of the game board 13 with a flying distance corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball extraction lever 52 is provided at the lower front portion of the lower tray 50 for operation when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. The ball extracting lever 52 is always biased to the right, and when it is slid to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed in the bottom of the lower tray 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball extracting lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally called a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 to receive the balls ejected from the lower tray 50 . The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and an ashtray (not shown) is attached to the left side of the lower tray 50 .

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front.
In addition to numerous nails (not shown) and windmills (not shown) for guiding the ball, rails 61 and 62, general winning opening 63, first winning opening 64, second winning opening 640, variable winning device 330, through gate 67,
It is configured by assembling the variable display unit 80 and the like, and its peripheral portion is the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1).
attached to the back side of the The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmissive resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. General winning port 63, first winning port 64, second winning port 640, variable display device unit 8
0 is arranged in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 by a tapping screw or the like.

The central portion of the front of the game board 13 is positioned through the inner frame 12 through the window 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14.
can be seen from the front side. Mainly referring to FIG. 2, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described below.

In front of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 is formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape.
is planted, and an arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed of a strip-shaped metal plate is planted inside the outer rail 62, like the outer rail 62. As shown in FIG. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area is formed in which a game is played by the behavior of . The game area is a front surface of the game board 13 and is defined by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a winning opening is provided,
area where the launched ball flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the balls shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. The tip portion of the inner rail 61 (Fig. 2
A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the upper left part of the game board 13) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning into the ball guide passage again. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the ball. is attenuated and rebounded toward the center.

First pattern display devices 37A and 37B having a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are provided in the lower left part of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left part in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are for displaying according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the game state of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. In this embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display whether the ball has entered the first winning port 64 or the second
It is configured to be used properly depending on whether or not a prize has been won in the prize winning port 640.例文帳に追加in particular,
When the ball enters the first winning hole 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while
When the ball enters the second winning hole 640, the first symbol display device 37B is activated.

In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the variable probability, the time saving mode, or the normal state by the lighting state, or indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing state by the lighting state. Whether the stop pattern is a pattern corresponding to the probability variable jackpot, a pattern corresponding to the normal jackpot, or a missing pattern is indicated by the lighting state, the number of pending balls is indicated by the lighting state, and a 7-segment display device indicates the round during the jackpot. Display numbers and errors. In addition, multiple L
The ED is configured so that the respective LEDs emit different colors (for example, red, green, and blue), and by combining the emitted colors, it is possible to suggest various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when a prize is won in the first prize winning port 64 and the second prize winning port 640.例文帳に追加In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big win (big win lottery), and also determines the kind of big win when it is determined as a big win. As the jackpot type determined here, a 15R probability variable jackpot, a 4R probability variable jackpot, and a 15R normal jackpot are prepared. In the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B,
Not only is it indicated whether the result of the lottery is a big hit or not as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation,
In the case of a jackpot, a pattern corresponding to the jackpot type is displayed.

Here, the “15R probability variable jackpot” is a probability variable jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds, and the “4R probability variable jackpot” is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4 rounds. It is a variable jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after . In addition, "15R normal jackpot" is the maximum number of rounds after the jackpot of 15 rounds,
Along with moving to a low probability state, during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations) is a jackpot that becomes a time-saving state.

In addition, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a subsequent jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of the jackpot, a time during so-called probability fluctuation (probability change), in other words, a game that is easy to shift to a special game state It is the state of The high-probability state (during variable probability) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the probability of winning a second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 640 . "Low probability state" refers to a state in which the odds are not variable, and the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than when the odds are variable. In addition, the time-saving state (during time-saving) of the "low-probability state" is a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, and the jackpot probability remains the same, but only the winning probability of the second symbol is increased, and the second winning port 640 It refers to the state of the game in which the ball is likely to win a prize. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is normal, it is a game state (
This is a state in which neither the jackpot probability nor the winning probability of the second symbol is increased.

During the probability change and the time saving, not only the probability of winning the second symbol increases, but also the second winning port 64
The time during which the electric accessory 640a associated with 0 is opened is also changed, and a longer time is set compared to normal. When the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (open state), the balls enter the second winning port 640 more than when the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). becomes easy. Therefore, during the probability change or the time reduction, the ball can easily enter the second winning hole 640, and the number of times the big winning lottery is performed can be increased.

In addition, instead of changing the opening time of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 during the probability change or the time saving, or in addition to changing the opening time, A change may be made to increase the number of times the accessory 640a is released more than during normal times. In addition, during the probability change or during the time saving, the probability of winning the second symbol does not change, and the second winning opening 640
At least one of the opening time of the electric accessory 640a attached to the and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened per time may be changed. In addition, during the probability change and the time reduction, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened per hit are not set. Only the probability may be changed to be higher than normal.

The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning holes 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. In the variable display device unit 80, the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B are triggered by the winning of the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640 (start winning).
A third pattern display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as "display device") that performs variable display of the third pattern while synchronizing with the variable display in , and the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 as a trigger A second pattern display device (not shown) composed of LEDs for variably displaying the second pattern is provided. A center frame 86 is arranged in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81 .

The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), so that, for example, upper, middle and lower three patterns are displayed. A column of symbols is displayed. Each pattern row is composed of a plurality of patterns (third patterns), and these third patterns are horizontally scrolled for each pattern row to variably display the third pattern on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加It's like In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B under the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4). Decorative display according to the display of the pattern display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Incidentally, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

The second pattern display device alternately lights up a symbol "O" and a symbol "X" as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined time each time the ball passes through the through gate 67. This is for variable display. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning lottery is won, the second symbol display device stops and displays the symbol "○" after the second symbol is variably displayed. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variable display of the third symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol ("○" symbol in this embodiment), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning hole 640
is activated (opened) for a predetermined period of time.

The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set so as to be shorter during the variable probability or during the time saving than during the normal gaming state. As a result, the variable display of the second symbol is performed in a short time during the probability change and the time reduction, so that more winning lotteries can be performed than during normal times.
Therefore, the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, so that the player can be given more opportunities to open the electric accessary 640a of the second winning opening 640.例文帳に追加Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 640 during the probability variation and the time saving.

In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, other methods such as increasing the winning probability, increasing the opening time and the number of openings of the electric accessory 640a for one hit, etc. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be fixed regardless of the game state. On the other hand, if the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set shorter than normal during the variable probability or during the time saving, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the game state, and one winning The opening time and the number of openings of the electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the game state.

The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board 13 in the left and right regions of the variable display device unit 80, and is configured so that a part of the ball shot to the game board 13 can pass through. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, the symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the result of the winning lottery is a loss. For example, an "x" symbol is displayed as a variable display stop symbol.

The number of times the ball passes through the through gate 67 is suspended up to a total of four times, and the number of suspended balls is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B described above, and is displayed on the second symbol suspension lamp (not shown). is also displayed. Four second pattern holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third pattern display device 81 .

In addition, the variable display of the second pattern is performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second pattern display device as in the present embodiment.
37B and part of the third pattern display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second
A part of the third symbol display device 81 may light up the symbol reserve lamp. Also, the maximum number of held balls for passage of the ball through the through gate 67 is not limited to 4, and may be set to 3 or less, or 5 or more (for example, 8). Also, through gate 67
is not limited to two, and may be one, for example. Also, the mounting position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the right and left sides of the variable display unit 80, and may be below the variable display unit 80, for example. Also, the first pattern display device 37A
, 37B indicate the number of balls on hold, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol holding lamp.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first winning hole 64 through which balls can win is arranged. When a ball enters the first winning hole 64, a first winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused to turn on the first winning hole switch. (See FIG. 4), a lottery for a big hit is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, below the first prize winning port 64 in a front view, a second prize winning port 640 through which a ball can win a prize is arranged. When the ball enters the second winning hole 640, a second winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused to turn on the second winning hole switch. (See FIG. 4).
It is indicated by the pattern display device 37B.

In addition, the first prize winning port 64 and the second prize winning port 640 are also one of the prize winning ports from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. In addition, in this embodiment,
The number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the first prize winning port 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the second prize winning port 640 are configured to be the same, but the balls enter the first prize winning port 64. The number of prize balls paid out when a wins a prize and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second prize winning port 640 are different numbers, for example, the prize paid out when a ball enters the first prize winning port 64 The number of balls may be three, and the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the second winning hole 640 may be five.

An electric accessory 640a is attached to the second prize winning port 640. - 特許庁This electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to enter the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, as a result of the variable display of the second symbol triggered by the passage of the ball through the through gate 67, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device, the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state), and the ball enters the second winning hole 6
It will be in a state where it is easy to win to 40.

As mentioned above, during variable probability and short time, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than during normal,
In addition, since the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is short,
is more likely to be displayed, and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Furthermore, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is opened is also longer during the variable probability and the shorter working hours than during the normal time. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to enter the second winning hole 640 during the variable probability and the shorter working hours compared to the normal time.

Here, when the ball enters the first prize winning port 64 and when the ball enters the second prize winning port 640, the probability of winning the jackpot is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state. However, the probability of winning a 15R probability variable jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the event of a jackpot is higher when the ball enters the second winning port 640 than when the ball enters the first winning port 64. is set. On the other hand, the first prize winning port 64 does not have an electric accessory like the second prize winning port 640, and the ball can always win a prize.

Therefore, during normal operation, the electric accessory attached to the second prize winning port 640 is often closed, and it is difficult to win the second prize winning port 640. to shoot the ball so that it passes through the left side of the variable display unit 80 (so-called “left-handed hitting”).
), it is advantageous for the player to aim for a big win by obtaining many chances of a big win lottery by winning in the first winning hole 64 .

On the other hand, during the probability variation and the time reduction, by passing the ball through the through gate 67, the second winning opening 64
The electric accessory 640a associated with 0 is likely to be in an open state, and the second winning opening 640 is likely to win. It is better to shoot the ball (so-called "right shot"), pass through the through gate 67 to open the electric accessory, and aim to win a 15R probability variable jackpot by winning the second prize opening 640. , to the player's advantage.

In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, since the configuration of the game board 13 is bilaterally symmetrical, it is possible to aim for the first winning hole 64 by "right-handed hitting" or to aim for the second winning hole 640 by "left-handed hitting". You can also aim. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment provides the player with information on how to shoot balls according to the game state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether the game is in variable probability, short time, or normal). It is possible to eliminate the need to change the to "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the annoyance of changing the way the ball is hit.

A variable prize winning device 330 (see FIG. 11) is arranged below the first prize winning port 64, and a specific prize winning port 65a is provided substantially in the center thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning of the first prize winning port 64 or the second prize winning port 640 results in a jackpot, after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) elapses, the jackpot stop symbol is displayed. The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so as to cause the first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B to be lit, and the third symbol display device 81 is caused to display the stop symbol corresponding to the big win, thereby indicating the occurrence of the big win. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (jackpot) in which the ball is likely to win. As this special game state,
The specific prize winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls have been won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined period of time has passed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined period of time. The opening and closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a game value (game value) by paying out a larger amount of prize balls than usual. is done.

Incidentally, the special game state is not limited to the form described above. A large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big win is lit in the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the A special game is a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when a ball enters the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. You may make it form as a state. In addition, the number of the specific winning openings 65a is not limited to one, and one or more than two (for example, three) may be arranged. The left side of the variable display device unit 80 is not limited to the lower left side of the prize winning opening 64, for example.

An affixing space K1 for affixing a certificate stamp, an identification label, or the like is provided at the right corner of the lower side of the game board 13. 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with an out port 71 . Balls that flow down the game area and do not win in any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640 are guided through an out opening 71 to a ball discharge path (not shown). A pair of out ports 71 are arranged on the left and right sides of the specific winning port 65a.

The game board 13 is provided with a large number of nails for properly dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the balls, and various members (accessories) such as windmills.

As shown in FIG. 3, the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly provided with control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 . The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 as a unit. In addition, each control board has an MPU as a 1-chip microcomputer that manages each control, a port that communicates with various devices, a random number generator that is used for various lotteries, and is used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as required.

In addition, the main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, the card unit connection board 116
are accommodated in substrate boxes 100 to 104, respectively. Substrate box 100-10
4 includes a box base and a box cover covering the opening of the box base. The box base and box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each controller and each board.

In addition, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover in an unopenable manner (caulking structure) by a sealing unit (not shown). consolidation). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. The sealing seals are made of a brittle material.
If the board boxes 100 and 102 are forced to open, they are cut into the box base side and the box cover side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and open upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 downstream of the tank rail 131. a case rail 132 vertically connected to the side of the case rail 132; ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall, and a payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131 .

In addition, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, and the firing control device 11
2 is provided with an operation knob 121 of a variable resistor, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122 . The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate ball clogging (return to normal state) when a dispensing error such as a ball clogging in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4) occurs. The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when the pachinko machine 10 is to be returned to its initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. Some RAM 203
In addition, various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are built in. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 controls the jackpot lottery and the first symbol display device 3.
Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as display setting in 7A, 37B and the third pattern display device 81, and lottery of the display result in the second pattern display device is executed.

In addition, various commands are transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the sub-controllers such as the payout controller 111 and the sound lamp controller 113 to operate. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, flags, contents of internal registers of the MPU 201, return addresses of control programs executed by the MPU 201, etc., and a stack area for storing various flags, counters, I/O, and the like. The work area where the values are stored (
working area). The RAM 203 is supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 and retains data (backup) even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off.
All the data stored in the RAM 203 are backed up.

When power is interrupted due to power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of power interruption (including power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (not shown) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by the start-up process (not shown) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. , NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes
Payout control device 111, sound lamp control device 113, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, second symbol display device, second symbol reservation lamp, opening and closing driving to the front side with the lower side of the opening and closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a as an axis A solenoid 209 including a large-opening solenoid for driving and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected.

Further, the input/output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a group of switches (not shown), a group of sensors including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and the power supply device 1 .
15 is connected to a RAM erase switch circuit 253 which will be described later, and the MPU 201 receives signals output from various switches 208 and R output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253 .
Various processes are executed based on the AM elimination signal SG2.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 storing control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110,
A stack area that stores the contents of the internal registers of the PU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, etc., and a work area (work area) that stores various flags, counters, I/O values, etc. have. The RAM 213 is used for the pachinko machine 10
Data can be held (backed up) by supplying a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power supply is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 also receives a power failure signal SG from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like.
1 is input, and when the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) as power failure processing is immediately executed.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main controller 110, the dispensing motor 216, the launch controller 112, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid prize balls. In addition, the prize ball detection switch is the payout control device 1
11 but not connected to the main controller 110 .

The ball launching control device 112 controls the ball launching unit 112 so that the ball launching strength corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to launch the ball.
It controls a. The ball shooting unit 112a has a shooting solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operating handle 51, and the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (
is not operated), the firing solenoid is energized corresponding to the amount of rotation operation (rotation position) of the operation handle 51, and the ball is shot with the strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51. .

The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing from a lamp display device (electrical parts 29 to 33, an indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and changes production (variation display) and a display control device 114 such as an advance notice effect
It controls the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed in . The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 comprising an address bus and a data bus. Input/output port 22
5 are connected to the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the other device 228, the frame button 22, and the like. Other device 2
28 includes a drive motor 342 and a voice coil motor 352 .

Sound lamp control device 113, based on various commands (fluctuation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from main control device 110, determines the display mode of third symbol display device 81, and sends the determined display mode to the command The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player,
The display control device 114 is instructed to change the stage displayed on the third pattern display device 81 or change the content of the effect at the time of super reach. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the stage after the change is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the stage after the change on the third pattern display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third design, which is the main image to be displayed on the third design display device 81 . The display control device 114 displays various images on the third pattern display device 81 in accordance with commands transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 .

Also, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third pattern display device 81 from the display control device 114 . In the audio ramp control device 113,
Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, in accordance with the display content of the third pattern display device 81, the sound corresponding to the display content is output from the voice output device 226, and the display content is made to correspond. It controls lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 .

The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, displays the third pattern display device 81.
It controls the display such as the variation effect of the third symbol in . Also, the display control device 11
4 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113 . The sound lamp control device 113 outputs a sound from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by this display command, so that the third symbol display device 8
1 and the audio output from the audio output device 226 can be combined.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure or the like, and a RAM erase switch 122 (Fig. 3
), and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 provided with a . The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply unit 251 is an alternating current 2 supplied from the outside.
A voltage of 4 volts is taken in, and various switches such as the various switches 208 and the solenoid 20
9, a voltage of 12 volts for driving a motor, etc., a voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc., and these 12 volts, 5 volts and backup voltages are generated. Necessary voltage is supplied to each of the controllers 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 detects the MPU of the main controller 110 when power is cut off due to a power failure or the like.
201 and a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 . The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors a stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts, power failure (
It judges that the power failure, power interruption) has occurred, and outputs a power failure signal SG1 to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. Even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111, NMI
Interrupt processing (not shown) can be executed and completed normally.

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input, and controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. Send to device 111 .

FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the operation device 300. FIG. As shown in FIG. 5, the operating device 3
00 is arranged at the center of the inner frame 12 in the left-right direction (that is, the center of the pachinko machine 10 in the left-right direction) when viewed from the front.

The operation device 300 is provided with a tilting device 310 configured to be tiltable when pushed by the player, and is positioned in a region formed by a housing recess 17a recessed in the front-rear direction along the outer frame of the upper tray 17. are placed. When the player tilts (rotates) the tilting device 310, a signal is input to the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1).

Between the tilting device 310 and the housing recess 17a, a clearance is provided that is at least large enough for a finger to be comfortably inserted. As a result, the player can prepare to operate the tilting device 310 in such a manner that the fingertip is placed on the back side of the top surface of the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 7).

Since the player holds the operation handle 51 with the right hand, the tilting device 310 is often operated with the left hand. Therefore, in the following description, it is assumed that the player operates the tilting device 310 with the left hand.

FIG. 6(a) is a partial front view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 6(b) is a view of VI in FIG.
It is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine 10 taken along line b-VIb, and FIG.
0, and FIG. 7(b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine 10 taken along line VIIb-VIIb of FIG. 7(a).

6 and 7 partially show the vicinity of the operation device 300 of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. 6 shows a state in which the tilting device 310 is arranged in the first state (initial state in the present embodiment) in which the operation surface 312a1 faces the vertical direction, and FIG. A state in which the operation surface 312a1 is arranged in a second state in which the operation surface 312a1 faces upward and rearward is illustrated. Note that in FIG. 7, an example of a player's hand operating the tilting device 310 is illustrated by imaginary lines.

The tilting device 310 is configured to be automatically operable between the first state and the second state by the driving force of the driving device 340 . Details of the driving device 340 will be described later.

An example of operation of the tilting device 310 will be described. The operation of the tilting device 310 is performed, for example, by displaying a specific display (for example, a display of "press the button") on the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 2).
is what the player does when the appears.

Here, for example, if the tilting device 310 is pushed in by dropping the hand downward forcefully as in the case of pushing a button that advances and retreats up and down, the position of the operation surface 312a1 moves forward depending on the degree of tilting. In this mode, the operation surface 312a1 is easily rubbed against the palm of the hand. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of discomfort, and to prevent the player from performing a pressing operation by dropping the hand downward forcefully.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 7, by placing the fingertip near the shaft portion 314 of the tilting device 310 and lowering the palm downward using the fingertip as a fulcrum, the palm is integrated with the operation surface 312a1. The tilting device 310 can be pushed in comfortably.

Therefore, the player can be guided to perform the operation by lowering the palm downward with the fingertip as a fulcrum so as not to drop the hand vigorously downward. As a result, the degree of impact applied to the tilting device 310 by the player's operation can be reduced, and the possibility of damage to the tilting device 310 can be reduced.

The difference in how the tilting device 310 looks from the player's point of view will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 and 9. FIG. 8 is a front perspective view of the operation device 300 as viewed in the direction of arrow VIII in FIG. 6, and FIG. 9 is a front perspective view of the operation device 300 as viewed in the direction of arrow IX in FIG. 8 and 9, the shape of the pachinko machine 10 is partially illustrated by imaginary lines. In addition, in FIG. 9, an example of a player's hand pushing the tilting device 310 is illustrated by imaginary lines.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the operation surface 312a1 of the tilting device 310 is visible in the first state from the player's point of view, while its area is reduced to such an extent that it is invisible in the second state. (the operation surface 312a1 is directed to the outside of the player's viewpoint). This allows the first
The appearance of the tilting device 310 can be greatly changed between the state and the second state.

In this embodiment, in the process of changing from the first state to the second state, the protective lens member 31
The area of 1i is configured to gradually increase, and accordingly, the amount of light from the LED device 341f (see FIG. 12) arranged inside the operation device 300 is visually recognized to gradually increase.
The difference in the amount of light visible to the player (degree of brightness) between the first state and the second state increases, and the appearance of the tilting device 310 can be greatly changed between the first state and the second state. .

An example of operation of the tilting device 310 will be described. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG.
By placing the outer side of the little finger near the shaft portion 314 (see FIG. 7) of the tilting device 310 and lowering the palm downward using the outer side of the little finger as a fulcrum (by rotating the wrist as an axis), The tilting device 310 can be comfortably pushed and operated while the palm is integrated with the operation surface 312a1.

Therefore, the player can be guided to perform the operation by dropping the palm downward with the outer side portion of the little finger as a fulcrum so as not to force the player to drop the hand downward.
As a result, the degree of impact applied to the tilting device 310 by the player's operation can be reduced, and the possibility of damage to the tilting device 310 can be reduced.

Next, the operation device 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 and 11. FIG. Figure 10
is a front perspective view of the operation device 300, and FIG. 11 is a rear perspective view of the operation device 300. FIG. As shown in FIG. 10, the operating device 300 is rotatably supported around a shaft 314 on which the tilting device 310 is arranged at the rear end.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11, a voice coil motor 352 that imparts an impact in the straight direction to the tilting device 310, and detection sensors 324L and 324 that detect the pushing operation from the first state.
4R and are arranged outside the lower frame member 320 surrounding the tilting device 310 from below.

In this way, by arranging the sensor for detecting the position of the tilting device 310 and the voice coil motor for applying the driving force outside the lower frame member 320, a large area inside the lower frame member 320 can be used for tilting. Device 310 can be housed in lower frame member 320 . This will
A large movable amount of the tilting device 310 can be secured.

12 is a front exploded perspective view of the operation device 300, and FIG. 13 is an exploded perspective view of the operation device 30.
0 is a rear exploded perspective view of FIG. As shown in FIGS. 12 and 13, the operation device 300 includes a tilting device 310 having a ring member BR1 disposed at each of the left and right ends at the back side end (the far side end of the paper surface of FIG. 12), and a tilting device 310 having a ring member BR1. A lower frame member 320 that has a lower bearing portion 323 that supports the ring member BR1 of the device 310 from below and defines the pushing end of the tilting device 310, and a lower frame member 320 that supports the ring member BR1 of the tilting device 310 from above. It is a member that has a recessed portion that is arranged to face the lower frame member 320 and has a large opening in the center, and is fastened and fixed to the lower frame member 320 in a manner in which the tilting member 310 is arranged between the lower frame member 320 together with the tilting device 3
A driving force is applied to the tilting device 310 via an upper frame member 330 that determines the arrangement in the second state of 10 and an arm member 345 that is fastened and fixed to the lower side of the lower frame member 320 and constitutes a link mechanism with the tilting device 310. A driving device 340 for transmission, and a protective cover device 3 that is fastened and fixed to the driving device 340 and protects the driving device 340 by covering the driving device 340 from three sides, ie, the lateral direction and the rear.
50 and .

The lower frame member 320 is a cup-shaped member configured such that the left and right portions of the bottom surface slope downward toward the front side, and the bottom plate portion 321 slopes downward toward the front side. Horizontal part 3 composed of a plate-shaped member horizontally arranged at the upper end on the far side of
22, a lower bearing portion 323 which is a semicircular receiving portion opened upward near the rear end portion of the horizontal portion 322 and receives the shaft portion 314 of the tilting device 310 from below; A left side detection sensor 324L and a right side detection sensor 324R are arranged as a pair on the left and right side.
and an opening portion 325 that is an opening formed by scraping a portion arranged below the horizontal portion 322 at the center position in the left-right direction of the bottom plate portion 321 .

The bottom plate portion 321 abuts on the tilting device 310 to determine the end of the movement of the tilting device 310 and has a plurality of openings through which the tilting device 310 is exposed to the bottom plate portion 3 .
21 can pass through.

The bottom plate portion 321 includes a transmission hole 321a drilled in the central portion on the front side, a detection hole 321b drilled along the detection grooves of the left and right detection sensors 324L and 324R, and an opening 325.
and an insertion hole 321c that is symmetrically drilled on the left and right sides of the .

The transmission hole 321a is arranged in front of the voice coil motor 352 of the protective cover device 350, and formed with a size that allows the overhang projecting portion 311j of the tilting device 310 to pass through. By driving the voice coil motor 352 in a state in which the protruding projecting portion 311j of the tilting device 310 protrudes below the bottom plate portion 321, the tilting device 310 can be provided with a driving force in the linear motion direction.

The detection hole 321b is formed by detecting pieces 311gL and 311 projecting from the lower surface of the tilting device 310.
This is a through hole through which gR can be inserted. Detection piece 31 projecting from detection hole 321b
By arranging 1gL and 311gR in the detection grooves of the detection sensors 324L and 324R, the posture of the tilting device 310 can be detected.

The insertion hole 321c has a size that allows the shaft portion 311c arranged on the flange of the tilting device 310 and the arm member 345 of the driving device 340 to be inserted therein, and the arm member Through-holes are formed up to a position where interference with 345 can be avoided.

The horizontal portion 322 forms a flat surface for fastening and fixing the lower frame member 320 and the driving device 340, extends upward from the upper surface thereof, and has a U-shaped cross section with an open portion on the front side. A locking portion 322a is provided.

The locking portion 322a is a portion that locks one end of the torsion spring 315 of the tilting device 310 so that it does not move backward. By locking the torsion spring 315 with the locking portion 322a, the biasing force of the torsion spring 322a acts in the direction of moving the tilting device 310 to the second state.

The detection sensors 324L and 324R are photocoupler type sensors that detect the position of the tilting device 310 . Note that the detection sensors 324L and 324R are located on the bottom plate portion 32 of the lower frame member 320.
1 (the position of the detection groove) is the same on the left and right.

In addition, a photocoupler type sensor is equipped with a light projecting part that projects light and a light receiving part that receives the light from this light projecting part, and a gap (slit, detection groove) into which the part to be detected can be inserted. means a sensor arranged in a substantially U-shape.

The opening 325 is a through hole that allows the LED device 341 f of the drive device 340 , the rotary claw member 347 , and the like to enter the lower frame member 320 . Therefore, the lateral width thereof is made larger than the lateral width of the pair of rotary pawl members 347 .

On the other hand, with respect to the vertical width, since the driving device 340 is configured to project the LED device 341f to the upper front side (see FIG.
By pushing up the driving device 340 after passing through the LED device 341
f can be arranged above the opening 325, and the rotating claw member 34 from the LED device 341f.
7, the vertical width of the opening 325 can be shortened.

The upper frame member 330 is arranged to face the opening 331, which is large enough to catch the extended portion 311h extending from the lower end surface of the tilting device 310 toward the front side, and the lower receiving portion 323 of the lower frame member 320. and an upper bearing portion 332 configured in a semicircular shape with an open bottom and an upper bearing portion 332 for supporting the ring member BR1 of the tilting device 310 .

The protective cover device 350 is structured to be vertically divisible and covered in three directions except for the front side. A voice coil motor 352 that is supported by the bottom plate and arranged on the front side so that the vibration surface faces obliquely forward and upward, a left detection sensor 353L that is a detection sensor having a detection groove on the upper side of the bottom plate of the main body cover 351, and a right side detection sensor 353L. A detection sensor 353R is mainly provided.

Note that FIG. 12 shows a state in which the main body cover 351 is partially broken so that the right detection sensor 353R arranged on the opposite side of the left detection sensor 353L with respect to the left-right center can be visually recognized.

In the assembled state (see FIG. 10), the voice coil motor 352 has a vibrating surface that is the lower frame member 3 .
20 is disposed in a posture substantially parallel to the bottom plate portion 321 of the 20. As shown in FIG. As a result, the driving force can be efficiently transmitted to the tilting device 310 by driving the voice coil motor 352 when the tilting device 310 protrudes downward through the transmission hole 321a.

The detection sensors 353L and 353R are photocoupler type sensors that detect the phases of the disk cams 344L and 344R of the driving device 340 . Disk cams 344L, 3 of drive device 340
44R are arranged inside the detection grooves of the detection sensors 353L and 353R.
The detection holes 344eL and 344eR of the disk cams 344L and 344R are the detection sensors 353L and 353L.
It is possible to detect whether or not the disk cams 344L and 344R are arranged in a specific phase by detecting whether or not they are arranged in the detection groove of 53R.

In this embodiment, since the left and right disc cams 344L, 344R of the drive device 340 are provided with the detection holes 344eL, 344eR in different phases, the detection sensors 353L, 35
There are two types of specific phases detectable by 3R.

Next, the tilting device 310 will be described with reference to FIGS. 14 to 16. FIG. Figure 14(a)
) is a front view of the tilting device 310, FIG. 14(b) is a side view of the tilting device 310 as viewed in the direction of arrow XIVb in FIG. 14(a), and FIG. ) of XIVc
- XIVc is a cross-sectional view of the tilting device 310; 15 is a front exploded perspective view of the tilting device 310, and FIG. 16 is a rear exploded perspective view of the lid 312 of the tilting device 310. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 14 to 16, the tilting device 310 includes a case body 311 which is a box-shaped body having fan-shaped side surfaces and openings in the upper and lower sides, and the upper opening of the case body 311 is covered. Lid 312 fastened and fixed to case main body 311, spherical lens member 313 fastened and fixed to the front side end of lid 312 and hanging down, and a mode sandwiched between the rear ends of case main body 311 and lid 312. , a torsion spring 315 wound around the shaft 314 , and a rear end of the case body 311 and the lid 312 at the case body 3
and a ring-shaped ring member BR1 for fixing the lid 312 and the lid 312 indivisibly.

The case main body 311 includes a bottom plate portion 311a inclined downward from the back side to the front side in the first state, an opening portion 311b opened in the center of the bottom plate portion 311a, and left and right sides of the opening portion 311b. A cylindrical shaft portion 311c extending toward the center in the left-right direction from a flange projecting downward along the edge of the shaft 311c, and a concave portion 311d having a semicircular cross-section supporting the shaft portion 314 at the rear end. , an insertion groove 311e which is a groove arranged at a position where both arm portions 315a of the torsion spring 315 can be inserted, and a hook-shaped portion 311f which is formed in a hook shape and locks the central portion 315b of the torsion spring 315. , a pair of left detection pieces 311gL and a right detection piece 311gR (see FIG. 15) which are extended below the bottom plate portion 311a, and extension portions which are extended from the front end portion of the bottom plate portion 311a to the front side by a predetermined amount. a provision portion 311h, a protective lens member 311i which is arranged on the upper side of the front end portion of the bottom plate portion 311a, has a shape along an arc centered on the shaft portion 314, and is formed of a light-transmitting material, and a bottom plate portion. 311a mainly includes an overhang projecting portion 311j projecting downward from the central portion in the left-right direction of the front side end portion of 311a.

When the tilting device 310 is pushed downward by the player, the bottom plate portion 311a is supported by the lower frame member 3.
20 is a portion that abuts on the bottom plate portion 321 of the member 20. FIG.

The opening 311b is configured as an opening through which the LED device 341f of the driving device 340 and the arm member 345 of the driving device 340 can be inserted.

The shaft portion 311c is inserted into the guide hole 3 of the arm member 345 of the driving device 340 (see FIG. 17(b)).
45b, and serves as a portion that transmits driving force to and from the driving device 340. As shown in FIG.

The left detection piece 311gL and the right detection piece 311gR are portions inserted into the detection grooves of the left detection sensor 324L and the right detection sensor 324R (see FIG. 15) of the lower frame member 320, respectively. is longer than the right detecting piece 311gR.

In the present embodiment, the angle from the tip of the right detection piece 311gR to the tip of the left detection piece 311gL is about 3° centered on the shaft portion 314 (from the first state (see FIG. 22) to the push end (see FIG. 22). 23)), the left detection piece 311gL is projected more than the right detection piece 311gR.

The extended portion 311h projects from the lower end portion of the protective lens member 311i toward the front side, and projects to a position where it is engaged with the opening 331 of the upper frame member 330 in the assembled state (see FIG. 10). configured in a manner.

The protective lens member 311i is configured in a curved shape when viewed from above (FIG. 14A).
) and is curved in the left-right direction (see FIG. 14(c)), so that the load when the player pushes the tilting device 310 can be easily relieved (easy to flow).
Thereby, the durability of the tilting device 310 can be improved.

The protruding protruding portion 311j protrudes perpendicularly from the lower surface of the bottom plate portion 311a and has a smaller cross-sectional shape than the transmission hole 321a of the lower frame member 320.
is pushed (see FIG. 29), it is inserted through the transmission hole 321a and the tip is projected downward from the lower frame member 320. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 16, the lid 312 includes a top plate member 312a having an operation surface 312a1, an intermediate plate member 312b fastened and fixed to the lower surface of the top plate member 312a, and an intermediate plate member 312b.
2b is fixed to the top plate member 312a, and in the first state (see FIG. 6), the LED device 34
and a cylindrical member 312c having a cylindrical shape having a size surrounding 1f.

The cylindrical member 312c improves the strength of the lid 312 by its rigidity in the axial direction. While it is fixed inside the member 312c, in the second state (see FIG. 7), such limitation is lifted, and the light from the LED device 341f can be widely irradiated.

The lens member 313 is made of a light-transmitting material, has upper and lower ends extending forward in a flange shape, and has a shape conforming to the curved shape of the protective lens member 311i. , and a spherical shell portion 313a formed in a spherical shell shape in the central portion.

The torsion spring 315 is wound around the shaft portion 314 at a pair of left and right twisted portions, and has both arm portions 315a extending rearward from the left and right outer ends of the twisted portions, and a central portion 315b connecting the pair of twisted portions. , provided.

Next, the driving device 340 will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 and 18. FIG. 17(a) is a front view of the driving device 340, FIG. 17(b) is a side view of the driving device 340 as viewed in the direction of arrow XVIIb in FIG. 17(a), and FIG. is a front exploded perspective view of the.

As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, the drive device 340 includes a main body member 341 that forms a frame by bending a plate-shaped sheet metal member, and a drive motor that is fastened and fixed to the main body member 341 and generates a driving force. 342, a transmission shaft rod 343 for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 342, and a pair of disk cams 344 (
left disk cam 344L, right disk cam 344R) and a connecting pin 344d of the disk cam 344
and a release member 346 that is pivotally supported by the shaft portion 341c of the main body member 341 and comes into contact with the first projecting portion 344c1 and the second projecting portion 344c3 of the disk cam 344 in the rotational direction. , a rotating pawl member 347 that is coaxially supported with the releasing member 346 and moves relative to the releasing member 346 as it rotates, and a coil spring-like member that generates an urging force in the direction of tilting the rotating pawl member 347 downward. 1st spring SP1 which is a spring member of, release member 34
6 and the rotary pawl member 347 are mainly provided with a second spring SP2 which is a torsion spring-like spring member that generates an urging force in a direction to separate them from each other.

The main body member 341 is bent rearward on the left and right sides to form a U-shaped motor housing portion 3 when viewed from above.
41a and a shaft support hole 341b which is drilled at the same position of the opposing plate portion of the motor housing portion 341a and which supports the disc cam 344, and an axis parallel to the axis of the shaft support hole 341b. A shaft portion 341c projecting in the left-right direction at a position shifted to the front side from the shaft support hole 341b, an extension portion 341d extending from the motor housing portion 341a below the shaft portion 341c, and a motor A lighting support portion 341 extending forward and upward from the housing portion 341a
e, and an LED device 341f disposed at the upper end of the illumination support portion 341e and having an LED light source disposed therein.

The LED device 341f has a triangular member on its upper surface, and has a portion that refracts light (
part that refracts light). This makes it possible to evenly irradiate the light from the LED device 341f upward and forward.

The drive motor 342 is positioned inside the motor accommodating portion 341a in the U-shape.
A fixing member 342a is provided which is fastened and fixed to 1a.

The fixed member 342a supports the rotary gear of the drive motor 342 and supports the transmission shaft 343 in such a manner that the transmission gear 343b meshes with the rotary gear.

One end of the arm member 345 has a perfectly circular shaft support hole 345a that is supported by the connecting pin 344d of the disc cam 344, and the other end of the arm member 345 has a rectangular shaft support hole 345a. and a guide hole 345b through which the shaft portion 311c (see FIG. 15) of the tilting device 310 is inserted.

The guide hole 345b is formed at a position where the opposite end of the shaft support hole 345a abuts against the shaft portion 311c in the first state of the tilting device 310, and the opposite end of the guide hole 345b is formed so that the disk cam 344 rotates more than once. It is formed in a position sufficient to allow rotation.

The transmission shaft rod 343 will be described with reference to FIG. 19 is a front exploded perspective view of the transmission shaft rod 343. FIG. The transmission shaft 343 has a columnar member 343a to which disc cams 344 (see FIG. 18) are fixed at both ends, and is supported by the columnar member 343a.
a transmission gear 343b meshing with the rotary gear of the transmission gear 343b and the cylindrical member 343a, a movable clutch 343c capable of switching between the transmission gear 343b and the cylindrical member 343a by moving in the axial direction whether or not to transmit the driving force, and the movable clutch 343c and a coil spring 343d that presses against the transmission gear 343b.

The cylindrical member 343a has fixing portions 3 having a D-shaped cross section for fixing the disk cams 344 at both ends thereof.
43a1 and 343a2, and the right fixing portion 343a2 is formed longer toward the center than the left fixing portion 343a1. Here, the fixing portion 343a2 is, in detail, the movable clutch 3
43c is formed with a length that allows it to move to a position where it does not interfere with the transmission gear 343b when it moves against the biasing force of the coil spring 343d.

The transmission gear 343b includes a perfect circular insertion hole 343b1 through which the cylindrical member 343a is inserted,
A clutch portion 343b2 in which unevenness along the axial direction is formed at a circumferential position of the axial center from a surface arranged to face the movable clutch 343c.

Since the insertion hole 343b1 is perfectly circular, even when the cylindrical member 343a is fixed, the transmission gear 343b can rotate (idle) with respect to the cylindrical member 343a.

The movable clutch 343c has an angle fixing hole 3 having a D-shaped cross section through which the cylindrical member 343a is inserted.
43c1, and a clutch portion 343c2 that is configured to be engageable with the clutch portion 343b2 while forming unevenness along the axial direction at a circumferential position centered on the shaft from a surface that faces the transmission gear 343b. .

In this embodiment, the clutch portions 343b2 and 343c2 have an angle of about 100 degrees at the top.
It is composed of a mountain-shaped convex part and a concave part of °.

Since the angle fixing hole 343c1 has a D-shaped cross section, the movable clutch 343c cannot rotate relative to the cylindrical member 343a.
2 and the clutch portion 343c2 of the movable clutch 343c, the driving force transmitted from the drive motor 342 to the transmission gear 343b is transferred to the cylindrical member 34 via the movable clutch 343c.
3a. As a result, by rotating the drive motor 342, the disk cam 3
44 (see FIG. 18) can be rotated.

In addition, the movable clutch 343c is normally engaged with the transmission gear 3 by the biasing force of the coil spring 343d.
43b, and the engagement relationship between the clutch portions 343b2 and 343c2 is maintained. On the other hand, by applying an axial load to the movable clutch 343c, the fixed portion 3
43a2 so as to move away from the transmission gear 343b.

Disc cam 344 will be described with reference to FIG. The disk cam 344 has a shape that mirrors the left disk cam 344L and the right disk cam 344R.
Since there are only positions 44eL and 344eR, only the left disc cam 344L will be described, and the description of the right disc cam 344R will be omitted.

20(a) is a side view of the left disc cam 344L as viewed in the direction of arrow XXa in FIG. 18, and FIG. 20(b) is a side view of the left disc cam 344L as viewed in the direction of arrow XXb in FIG. be. 20(a) and 20(b) illustrate a state in which the driving device 340 is in the first initial state as shown in FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 20(a) and 20(b), the left disc cam 344L is a member having portions protruding from both sides of a perfectly circular disc, and is positioned at the center of the disc. A central shaft portion 344a protruding inwardly in a cylindrical shape, a circular rib 344b protruding inwardly as a ring-shaped rib centering on the central shaft portion 344a, and an outer side of the circular rib 344b. As a rib lower in height than the circular rib 344b, it protrudes inward and has two
Engagement rib 344c having a portion projecting radially outward at a point, and circular rib 344b
and the engaging rib 344c, the arm member 3
45 (see FIG. 18), and a detection hole 344eL drilled near the outer circumference.

The right disk cam 344R is different only in that the detection hole 344eR is arranged at a position forming an angle of 60° with the detection hole 344eL, and otherwise has a shape that mirrors the shape of the left disk cam 344L. .

The central shaft portion 344a has a cross section D whose inner periphery is engaged with both ends of the cylindrical member 343a (see FIG. 19).
, and the outer circumference is configured to be fitted into the shaft support hole 341b (see FIG. 18). That is, the disk cam 344 is rotatably supported in the shaft support hole 341b.

The circular rib 344b protrudes to a position where it can come into contact with the left and right wall surfaces of the motor housing portion 341a (see FIG. 18) when the disc cam 344 is supported by the shaft support hole 341b. As a result, misalignment of the disc cam 344 can be suppressed.

In the first initial state, the engaging rib 344c projects radially outward at a position shifted by 80° in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 20A) from the position where the detection hole 344eL is arranged. a protruding portion 344c1; At a position shifted by an angle θ2 (angle θ2=150° in this embodiment), a second projecting portion 344c3 projecting radially outward again, and the second projecting portion 344c.
3, and a second lead-in portion 344c4 that is retracted radially inward at a position shifted by an angle θ3 (angle θ3=20° in this embodiment).

In the first initial state of the driving device 340, the connecting pin 344d is arranged at the position with the longest separation distance from the shaft portion 311e of the tilting device 310 in the first state (see FIG. 22). That is, the connecting pin 344d is disposed on the opposite side of the shaft portion 311e of the tilting device 310 in the first state with respect to the central shaft portion 344a.

The releasing member 346 and the rotary pawl member 347 will be described with reference to FIG. Note that the releasing member 346 and the rotary pawl member 347 are arranged as a pair on the left and right, and the configurations thereof are the same on the left and right, so only one will be described.

21(a) and 21(b) are front views of the releasing member 346 and the rotating claw member 347. FIG. 21(a) shows a large angle state in which the rotary pawl member 347 is rotated with respect to the release member 346 to the terminal position in the biasing direction of the second spring SP2, and FIG. 21(b) shows the release member 346 A small angle state in which the rotary pawl member 347 is rotated to the terminal position against the biasing force of the second spring SP2 is illustrated.

The state in which the releasing member 346 is rotated by being brought into contact with the disk cam 344 is the state between the large angle state and the small angle state (when the projecting pin 346b is arranged at the intermediate position of the guide slot 347b). state) (see FIG. 35).

As shown in FIGS. 21(a) and 21(b), the release member 346 is formed of a substantially rectangular plate member, and includes a shaft support hole 346a supported by a shaft portion 341c (see FIG. 18), A protruding pin 346b projecting in the plate thickness direction in an arc shape centering on the central axis of the shaft support hole 346a, an insertion hole 346c through which the end of the second spring SP2 is inserted, and from the shaft support hole 346a and an engaging portion 346d configured as a portion projecting with the maximum diameter.

The engaging portion 346d is in the assembled state (see FIG. 10) so that the engaging rib 34 of the disc cam 344
4c (see FIG. 20). In this embodiment, the engaging portion 346
By forming the outer periphery of d to be curved, the contact with the engaging rib 344 can be performed smoothly.

The rotary pawl member 347 is formed of a substantially rectangular plate member, and has a shaft support hole 347a that is supported by the shaft portion 341c (see FIG. 18) and an arc shape centered on the central axis of the shaft support hole 347a. A long guide hole 347b is drilled along which the projecting pin 346b of the releasing member 346 can be guided (drilled with a size that includes the movement locus of the projecting pin 346b inside), and a second spring SP2.
an insertion hole 347c through which the end of the shaft support hole 347a is inserted, a hook-shaped portion 347d protruding downward at the opposite end of the shaft support hole 347a, and the end of the first spring (see FIG. 18). and a pull-down hole 347e drilled so as to be able to be inserted therethrough.

In this embodiment, in the large angle state shown in FIG. 21(a), the release member 346 is arranged at the end position of the rotation claw member 347 in the backward rolling direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 21(a)). Therefore, in the large angle state, when a load is applied to the engaging portion 346d in the downward direction, the releasing member 346 and the rotary pawl member 347 rotate together in the backward rotation direction. When a load in the upward direction is applied to 346d, only the releasing member 346 can be rotated to maintain the attitude of the rotating claw member 347 until reaching the small angle state shown in FIG. 21(b).

Next, an operation example of the operation device will be described. First, with reference to FIGS. 22 to 24, an operation example when the player performs the pushing operation when the tilting device 310 is arranged in the first state will be described. In addition, in the following description of the operation example, the illustration of the lid 312 is simplified for easy understanding.

22 to 24 show the operation device 300 on line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a).
is a cross-sectional view of. 22 shows a state in which the tilting device 310 is in the first state, FIG. 23 shows a state in which the player pushes the tilting device 310 from the state shown in FIG. 22 to the terminal position, and FIG. 23 shows the state after the tilting device 310 has returned from the state of FIG. 23 to the first state. Also, FIGS. 22 to 24 show an example of a player's hand repeatedly operating the tilting device 310 .

As shown in FIG. 22, the tilting device 310 receives an urging force in the direction of backward rotation (clockwise in FIG. 22) by a torsion spring 315, and the bottom plate portion 311a engages the hooked portion 347d of the rotating claw member 347. As shown in FIG.
be hooked on As a result, the posture of the tilting device 310 is maintained in the first state. That is, in the first state, the tilting device 310 is always biased in the backward direction (clockwise in FIG. 22).

In the state shown in FIG. 22, the left detection piece 311gL is inserted into the detection groove of the left detection sensor 324L (ON state), while the right detection piece 311gR is inserted into the right detection sensor 32
It is arranged in front of the 4R detection groove (OFF state, see FIG. 11).

As shown in FIG. 23, when the player performs an action of pushing the tilting device 310, the tilting device 31
0 rotates about 3° in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 23). In this state, the left detection piece 3
11gL is inserted through the detection groove of the left detection sensor 324L (ON state), and similarly, the right detection piece 311gR is inserted through the detection groove of the right detection sensor 324R (ON state).

Therefore, by determining a change in the detection states of the left detection sensor 324L and the right detection sensor 324R, it can be determined that the tilting device 310 has been pushed by the player from the first state.

Here, when the tilting device 310 is hit repeatedly, the state shown in FIG. 22 and the state shown in FIG. 23 are alternately repeated.
5, the tilting device 310 is not returned in time, and the pushing operation is performed at an incomplete position, which may make the player feel uncomfortable.

Conventionally, this can be dealt with by increasing the spring constant of the torsion spring 315 , but in this embodiment, when the spring constant of the torsion spring 315 is increased, the tilting device 310 moves against the biasing force of the torsion spring 315 . It is necessary to increase the driving force of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18) for pushing down, and it is necessary to increase the size of the drive motor 342 . As a result, there are problems such as an increase in product cost and an inability to save space.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a voice coil motor 352 capable of effecting by vibrating motion is arranged at a position facing the overhang projecting portion 311j of the tilting device 310 when the tilting device 310 is pushed. be.

As shown in FIG. 24, by driving the voice coil motor 352 in the extension direction from the state shown in FIG.
A return operation to 0 can be performed quickly.

Here, when the voice coil motor 352 is always driven when the tilting device 310 is pushed, for example, when the player presses the tilting device 310 for a long time, the voice coil motor 352 is driven and the player cannot Since unnecessary load is applied, the player may feel uncomfortable.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, when the left side detection sensor 324L is in the ON state, the number of times the right side detection sensor 324R switches between the ON state and the OFF state in a predetermined period is calculated, and if the number of times is equal to or greater than the threshold value, the voice coil is turned on. By driving the motor 352, the load for returning the tilting device 310 can be improved only when the player performs a repeated hitting operation. This will
A player can operate the tilting device 310 comfortably.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 25 to 30, a case (first operation mode) in which the tilting device 310 starts to reciprocate vertically from the first state (tilting operation) will be described. Figure 25 to Figure 3
0 is a cross-sectional view of the operation device 300 taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a).

25 shows a state in which the tilting device 310 is in the first state, and FIG.
FIG. 27 shows a state in which the disc cam 344 rotates forward by a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG. 28 shows a state in which the rotating claw member 347 has returned to its posture after being rotated in the forward direction.
29 shows a state in which the tilting device 310 is pushed back and forth from the state shown in FIG. 28 to the terminal position, and FIG. By rotating the plate cam 344 in the forward rotation direction by a predetermined amount, the engagement rib 34
4 c reaches the second initial state in which the second projecting portion 344 c 3 of the release member 346 contacts the engaging portion 346 d of the release member 346 . 28, the tilting device 3 in the state of FIG.
10 is shown in phantom lines, and in FIG. 29, an example of a player's hand pushing in the tilting device 310 is shown in phantom lines.

As shown in FIG. 25, when the tilting device 310 is in the first state, the cylindrical member 31 of the lid 312
The upper end portion (prism portion) of the LED device 341f is accommodated inside 2c. Therefore, while the amount of light irradiated in the radial direction of the cylindrical member 312c is suppressed by the thickness of the cylindrical member 312c, it is possible to ensure a large amount of light irradiated in the axial direction. Thereby, the cylindrical member 312c serves as a rib of the lid 312 to improve the strength, and in the first state of the tilting device 310, the light irradiation intensity of the LED device 341f can be adjusted.

As shown in FIG. 26, the disk cam 344 is rotated forward (counterclockwise in direction), the first projecting portion 344c1 of the disk cam 344 pushes down the engaging portion 346d of the releasing member 346, thereby rotating the releasing member 346 in the backward direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 26). Accordingly, the rotary pawl member 347 rotates in the backward rotation direction until it is disengaged from the bottom plate portion 311a of the tilting device 310 .

The change in posture of the release member 346 causes the first retraction portion 344c2 of the engagement rib 344c and the engagement portion 34
6d until the disc cam 344 rotates until the tilting device 310 is raised by the biasing force of the torsion spring 315 (rotates clockwise in FIG. 26).

25 and 26, the shaft portion 311c of the tilting device 310 is arranged at one end position of the guide hole 345b of the arm member 345 (the end position on the far side from the rotation shaft of the disc cam 344). Since the upward movement of the tilting device 310 is restricted by the arm member 345 , the upward movement of the tilting device 310 corresponds to the rotation angle of the disc cam 344 .

As shown in FIG. 27, the disc cam 344 rotates forward (counterclockwise in FIG. 27),
When the first retracting portion 344c2 of the disc cam 344 passes through the engaging portion 346d of the releasing member 346, the releasing member 346 and the rotary pawl member 347 rotate forward (counterclockwise in FIG. 27) due to the biasing force of the first spring SP1. 25), and the rotary pawl member 347 returns to the state where it can be engaged with the tilting device 310 (the state shown in FIG. 25). At this time, the biasing force of the second spring SP2 acts in the direction of increasing the angle between the release member 346 and the rotary claw member 347 (upper angle in FIG. 27). 347 rotates while maintaining the state shown in FIG. 26 (large angle state).

In this state, the lid 312 is retracted above the LED device 341f, and the tilting device 31 when the area where the protective lens member 311i is visible from the player's viewpoint is in the first state.
Since it increases compared to 0, the light of the LED device 341f is directed in the front direction (the direction toward the player).
It is also possible to irradiate to Therefore, by changing the posture of the tilting device 310, the LED device 3
It is possible to change the traveling direction of the light emitted from 41f, and to improve the presentation effect of the light.

In this state, the right detection sensor 353R of the protective cover device 350 is turned ON, and the starting point of the vertical reciprocating motion can be detected.

As shown in FIG. 28, from the state shown in FIG. 27, the disc cam 344 is rotated by a predetermined amount in the forward direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 28), and then the disc cam 344 is rotated by the same amount in the backward direction ( Figure 2
8 clockwise), the angle D1 shown in FIG.
The tilting device 310 can be repeatedly operated up and down within the range of . As a result, it is possible to change how the tilting device 310 looks to the player, and to increase the player's attention to the operation device 300 .

In addition, the area of the portion of the protective lens member 313 projecting upward from the upper frame member 331 changes in accordance with the repeated vertical motion of the tilting device 310 within the range of the angle D1. Therefore, of the light emitted from the LED device 341f, the amount of light visible through the protective lens member 313 can be changed according to the operation of the tilting device 310. FIG. Therefore, the brightness of the tilting device 310 can be changed, and the player's attention to the operation device 300 can be improved.

In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 28, the spherical shell portion 313a of the lens member 313
41f (left side in FIG. 28), the irradiation range of the light emitted from the LED device 341f can be expanded not only in the front-rear direction and the vertical direction but also in the left-right direction (perpendicular to the paper surface in FIG. 28). can be done.

According to this embodiment, as described above, when the tilting device 310 is arranged in the first state, the light from the LED device 341f travels upward, and the irradiation range is narrowed by the cylindrical member 312c. (See FIG. 25). On the other hand, when the tilting device 310 moves upward from the first state, the light from the LED device 341f is also emitted in the direction toward the player (frontal direction), and the irradiation range is widened by the lens member 313 .

That is, according to this embodiment, it is possible not only to change the irradiation direction of the light but also to change the irradiation range of the light at the same time as the posture of the tilting device 310 changes. As a result, the tilting device 310 attracts more attention.

As shown in FIG. 29, the player can push the tilting device 310 while the tilting device 310 is moving up and down in FIG. In the state of FIG. 28, the load applied from the arm member 345 to the tilting device 310 is only the load in the direction of lowering the tilting device 310 (even if the arm member 345 moves in the upward direction, the shaft portion 311c only moves the guide hole 345b of the arm member 345, and no load is generated).

Therefore, when the player pushes the tilting device 310 in the state of FIG. 28, it is possible to prevent the player from being subjected to the driving force of the driving motor 342 (see FIG. 18). At this time, only the load due to the biasing force of the torsion spring 315 is given to the player. As a result, when the player pushes the tilting device 310, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a large load on the player, so that the player can operate the operation device 300 comfortably.

As shown in FIG. 29, in the process from the state shown in FIG. When the member 347 rotates backward (clockwise direction in FIG. 29) and subsequently pushes the tilting device 310, the bottom plate portion 311a is moved to the hooked portion 347d.
, the rotary pawl member 347 returns to a position where it can be engaged with the tilting device 310 (rotates forward). Therefore, the tilting device 310 is restricted from moving upward by the rotating claw member 347 .

Therefore, the player moves the tilting device 31 from the state in which the tilting device 310 shown in FIG. 28 is moved up and down.
After depressing 0, the tilting device 310 can remain in the first state if the player releases the hand.

In the state shown in FIG. 29, the voice coil motor 352 vibrates (repeatedly moves in the extension direction and in the contraction direction). As a result, after the tilting device 310 is pushed to the end of the pushing operation, an effect of transmitting vibration to the player who keeps putting his hand on the tilting device 310 can be performed.

That is, the purpose of the voice coil motor 352 is to generate a driving force for assisting the upward movement of the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 24), and the purpose of vibrating the tilting device 310 arranged at the pushing end position to perform a vibration effect. can be used for

As shown in FIG. 30, when the player releases the tilting device 310 and the tilting device 310 returns to the first state, the overhanging projecting portion 311j of the tilting device 310 moves toward the lower frame member 320.
, and the contact with the voice coil motor 352 is released. Therefore, the vibration effect is effective only when the player pushes the tilting device 310 to the push end.

Therefore, compared to a game machine in which the operation button simply vibrates, when the tilting device 310 is pressed, whether or not the voice coil motor 352 vibrates at the end of the pressing is determined.
Only the player who pushes the tilting device 310 can grasp it.

Here, whether or not the lottery is a big win does not depend on the pushing operation of the tilting device 310 . Therefore, some players may not operate the tilting device 310 at all.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the player can feel the vibration of the voice coil motor 352 only when the tilting device 310 is pressed.

Here, for example, by controlling the voice coil motor 352 to perform a vibration effect when a big win is confirmed, it is possible to improve the sense of anticipation when the player pushes the tilting device 310, and the tilting device 310 value as a look-ahead means of
As a result, the tilting device 310 can be easily operated by the player, and the value of the tilting device 310 as operating means can be increased.

As shown in FIG. 30, the disk cam 344 is moved from the state shown in FIG. 29 to the second projecting portion 344c1.
By rotating the disk cam 344 forward (counterclockwise in FIG. 29) by a predetermined amount until it abuts against the engaging portion 346d of the release member 346, the driving device 340 can be brought into the second initial state. .

The second initial state is a state in which the engagement rib 344c and the release member 346 are in contact with each other in the rotational direction, as in the first initial state. In the first initial state, the first projecting portion 344c1 contacts the engaging rib 344c, while in the second initial state, the second projecting portion 344c3 contacts the engaging rib 344c.

29, the disk cam 344 is rotated backward (clockwise direction in FIG. 29) so that the first projecting portion 344c1 of the engaging rib 344c passes through the engaging portion 346d, and then reversely rotates. 29 can be returned to the first initial state shown in FIG. In this case, a load is applied to the release member 346 in a direction to push up the release member 346, and only the release member 346 is rotated forward (FIG. 29) while the posture of the rotary claw member 347 is maintained.
counterclockwise direction).

Next, referring to FIGS. 31 to 34, when the tilting device 310 is moved up and down (tilting motion) from the state in which the tilting device 310 is in the first state and the driving device 340 is in the second initial state ( Second operation mode) will be described. In this case, the tilting device 310 starts an operation (tilting operation) to reciprocate up and down after passing through the second state.

FIGS. 31 to 34 show the operation device 300 on line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a).
is a cross-sectional view of. In FIG. 31, the disk cam 344 is rotated forward (FIG. 31) from the state shown in FIG.
counterclockwise) and the releasing member 346 and the rotary pawl member 347 are rotated backward (clockwise in FIG. 31).
is rotated by a predetermined amount and the tilting device 310 reaches the second state.
2 shows how the disk cam 344 reciprocates and rotates from the state shown in FIG.
3 shows a state in which the player pushes the tilting device 310 to the terminal position from the state shown in FIG.
In addition, in FIG. 33, the position of the tilting device 310 in the state of FIG. 32 is illustrated by imaginary lines.
In FIG. 34, an example of a player's hand pushing the tilting device 310 is shown in phantom lines.

As shown in FIG. 31, when the disk cam 344 is rotated forward (counterclockwise in FIG. 31) from the state shown in FIG. Device 310 operates in the upward direction.

At this time, since the guide hole 345b of the arm member 345 extends (has a space) in the direction in which the shaft portion 311c of the tilting device 310 moves, the tilting device 310 moves toward the disk cam 344 via the arm member 345. The tilting device 310 can be lifted with low resistance without being pulled by the tilting device 310, and the state of the tilting device 310 can be changed from the first state to the second state in a short time.

As shown in FIG. 32, by rotating the disk cam 344 by about 10 degrees from the state shown in FIG. 310 can be placed in the second state (disc cam 344 is rotated 180° from the first initial state).
rotated posture). Therefore, when the tilting device 310 rises at a high speed and the tilting device 310 attempts to reach the second state from the state of FIG. It is possible to prevent the situation that the tilting device 310 takes a long time to reach the second state because the cam 344 is slow to rotate by a predetermined angle.

As shown in FIG. 33, from the state shown in FIG. 32, the disc cam 344 is rotated by a predetermined amount in the forward direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 32), and then the disc cam 344 is rotated by the same amount in the backward direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 32). Figure 3
2 clockwise), the angle D2 shown in FIG.
The tilting device 310 can be repeatedly operated up and down within the range of . As a result, it is possible to change how the tilting device 310 looks to the player, and to increase the player's attention to the operation device 300 .

In addition, the area of the portion of the protective lens member 313 projecting upward from the upper frame member 331 changes in accordance with the repeated vertical motion of the tilting device 310 within the range of the angle D2. Therefore, of the light emitted from the LED device 341f, the amount of light visible through the protective lens member 313 can be changed according to the operation of the tilting device 310. FIG. Therefore, the brightness of the tilting device 310 can be changed, and the player's attention to the operation device 300 can be improved.

In the state shown in FIG. 33, the spherical shell portion 313a of the lens member 313
41f (the left side of FIG. 33), the irradiation range of the light emitted from the LED device 341f can be expanded not only in the front-rear direction and up-down direction but also in the left-right direction (perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 33). can be done.

That is, according to this embodiment, it is possible not only to change the irradiation direction of the light but also to change the irradiation range of the light at the same time as the posture of the tilting device 310 changes. As a result, the tilting device 310 attracts more attention.

The range of angle D2 shown in FIG. 33 is different from the range of angle D1 shown in FIG. That is, in the present embodiment, the up-down motion of the tilting device 310 includes the up-down motion shown in FIG.
Two types of up-and-down motions (tilting motions), namely the up-and-down motion shown in FIG. Therefore, it is possible to create two modes in which the tilting device 310 in the first state is operated by the driving force of the drive motor 342 .

As a result, compared with the case where the operation member 310 performs the same operation every time, the operation mode can have a different meaning (for example, a difference in the expectation of a big win), and the tilting device 310
It is possible to improve the player's attention to.

As shown in FIG. 33, the player can push the tilting device 310 while the tilting device 310 is moving up and down in FIG. In the state of FIG. 33, the load applied from the arm member 345 to the tilting device 310 is only the load in the direction of pulling the tilting device 310 downward (even if the arm member 345 moves in the upward direction, the shaft portion 311
c only moves through the guide hole 345b of the arm member 345, and there is no load to lift the shaft portion 311c from the arm member 345).

Therefore, when the player pushes the tilting device 310 in the state of FIG. 33, it is possible to prevent the player from being subjected to the driving force of the driving motor 342 (see FIG. 18). At this time, only the load due to the biasing force of the torsion spring 315 is given to the player. As a result, when the player pushes the tilting device 310, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a large load on the player, so that the player can operate the operation device 300 comfortably.

As shown in FIG. 34, in the process of pushing the tilting device 310, the bottom plate portion 311a of the tilting device 310 pushes the hook-shaped portion 347d of the rotating claw member 347, causing the rotating claw member 347 to rotate backward. When the bottom plate portion 311a passes through the hook-shaped portion 347d by rotating in the direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 34) and subsequently pushing the tilting device 310. As shown in FIG. The rotating pawl member 347 returns to a position where it can be engaged with the tilting device 310 (rotates in the forward rolling direction). Therefore, the tilting device 310 is restricted from moving upward by the rotating claw member 347 .

Therefore, the player moves the tilting device 31 from the state in which the tilting device 310 shown in FIG. 33 is moved up and down.
After pressing 0 (see FIG. 34), if the player releases the tilting device 310
can be maintained in the first state.

Next, referring to FIGS. 35 to 37, after the player performs the pushing operation, the rotating claw member 3
An operation of setting the disc cam 344 to the second initial state without releasing the regulation of the tilting device 310 by 47 will be described. By this method, it is possible to alternately perform two kinds of vertical motions (tilting motions) of the tilting device 310, or to perform one of them continuously.

Figures 35 to 37 show the operating device 300 on line XXII-XXII of Figure 6(a).
is a cross-sectional view of. In FIG. 35, the disc cam 344 is rotated backward (as shown in FIG. 35) from the state shown in FIG.
clockwise) and the releasing member 346 is rotated forward (counterclockwise in FIG. 35). clockwise), and then the disc cam 344 rotates forward (counterclockwise in FIG. , the disk cam 344 rotates forward (counterclockwise in FIG. 36) to open the protective cover device 3
A state in which the left side detection sensor 353L of 50 is in an ON state is illustrated. 35 to 37, an example of a player's hand swinging from above on the tilting device 310 is illustrated by imaginary lines.

As shown in FIG. 35, when the disk cam 344 is rotated backward (clockwise in FIG. 34) from the state shown in FIG. 346d. In this case, the engagement rib 344c pushes up the release member 346 to change the posture of the release member 346. The stop, rotary pawl member 347 is shown in FIG.
5 is maintained.

35, the disk cam 344 is further rotated backward (clockwise in FIG. 35) to release the engagement between the engaging rib 344c and the releasing member 346. Regulation of the upward movement of the tilting device 310 can be maintained.

35, the disc cam 344 is further rotated backward (clockwise in FIG. 35), and then the rotating cam 344 is rotated forward (counterclockwise in FIG. 35), thereby , the drive device 340 can be in a second initial state.

In this embodiment, since there is no sensor for detecting the second initial state, it is difficult to accurately stop the disk cam 344 in the state shown in FIG. It is possible. Therefore, by operating the disc cam 344 from the state shown in FIG. 36, it is possible to perform the vertical motion (tilting motion) from the second initial state within the range of the angle D2, as described above.

Here, the player who pushes the tilting device 310 can perform an action of keeping his hand on the tilting device 310 after the pushing operation, even if there is no special display such as "long press". be.

This is, for example, an action that occurs when the user forgets to release the hand that pushed the tilting device 310 too much to concentrate on the performance. Therefore, even if the disk cam 344 performs a reciprocating motion (forward/reverse switching motion) for vertically moving (tilting motion) the tilting device 310 within the range of the angle D2,
The posture of the tilting device 310 cannot be changed. In this case, the rotation of the drive motor 342 is wasted, and if the rotation can be omitted, the life of the drive motor 342 can be extended.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the disc cam 344 is rotated forward (counterclockwise in FIG. 36) from the state shown in FIG.
5) maintains the ON state (while the tilting device 310 tilts to the first state or lower), the disk cam 344 is not reversely rotated, and the protective cover device 350 is shown in FIG. In the first initial state of the drive device 340 in which the left side detection sensor 353L (see FIG. 14) is turned ON, the rotation of the disk cam 344 is stopped (the driving of the drive motor 342 is stopped).

In the state shown in FIGS. 36 and 37, the player's hand is placed on the upper side of the tilting device 310, so that the tilting device 310 does not move upward.
7 is caused by rotating drive motor 342 in one direction.

Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 35 to 37, the player's hand continues to be placed on the upper side of the tilting device 310, and the driving motor 342 is reciprocated (normal/reverse switching) until the tilting device 310 cannot be moved up and down. operation) can be avoided, the load on the drive motor 342 can be reduced, and the motor life can be extended.

It should be noted that when the disc cam 344 is rotated by a predetermined amount (to the state shown in FIG. 31) from the state shown in FIG. Instead of rotating the plate cam 344, it may be controlled to immediately reversely rotate and return to the state shown in FIG. As a result, the driving device 340 can be quickly returned to the second initial state, and no unnecessary load is applied to the driving device 340, so that the motor life of the driving motor 342 (see FIG. 18) can be extended.

A device for preventing breakage of the driving device 340 will be described with reference to FIGS. 38 and 39. FIG. 38 is a cross-sectional view of the operation device 300 taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a), and FIG. 39 is a partial cross-sectional view of the operation device 300 taken along line XXXIX-XXXIX of FIG. Note that in FIG. 38, the tilting device 310 is in a state in which the tilting device 310 is in the second state.
The player's hand holding and fixing is shown in phantom lines, and in FIG. 39, illustration of the upper member of the main body cover 351 is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 38, when the player grabs and fixes the tilting device 310, the arm member 34
5 is restricted, disc cam 344 cannot be rotated from the state shown in FIG. Therefore, when the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 39) starts rotating, the drive motor 342
and the transmission gear 343b, and if left unattended, the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18) may fail.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the transmission gear 343b is configured to be idly rotatable with respect to the transmission shaft 343a that fixes the disk cam 344, so that the drive motor 342 can be prevented from malfunctioning.

That is, as shown in FIG. 39, the drive motor 342 starts driving with the disk cam 344 fixed, and the transmission gear 343b is urged in the rotational direction, thereby the clutch portion 343b.
2, 343c2, and the movable clutch 343c moves away from the transmission gear 343b. As a result, the transmission gear 343b is disengaged from the movable clutch 343c, and the transmission gear 343b can be idled. As a result, the drive motor 3
42 can be prevented from failing.

Note that when the player does not hold the tilting device 310, the tilting device 310 goes through the first state by rotating the disk cam 344 once due to the structure of the operation device 300. FIG. Therefore, in this embodiment, the lower frame member 3 is rotated while the drive motor 342 is rotated by a predetermined angle (for example, 360°).
20 is not in the ON state (when the tilting device 310 is not in the first state), it is determined that the player intentionally performs an unnecessary operation of holding and fixing the tilting device 310. Then, the rotation of the drive motor 342 is stopped while displaying, for example, a display on the third pattern display device 81 so as to stop the gripping operation.

As a result, it is possible to select a case in which the player intentionally performs an erroneous operation, and only at that time, it is possible to notify the user to stop the erroneous operation, and to stop the drive motor 342 at an early stage.
Failure can be prevented.

When the transmission gear 343b and the movable clutch 343c are separated from each other and a phase shift occurs,
The initial phase of the drive motor is shifted from the initial phase of the disc cam 344, which is in phase with the movable clutch 343c. Therefore, if the drive motor 342 is controlled continuously (with the number of steps, etc.) from the state before the phase shift occurs, the disc cam 344 cannot be operated accurately (the phase shift cannot be corrected).

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the left side detection sensor 353L of the protective cover member 350 is ON.
By detecting that the drive device 340 is in the first state, it can be specified that the drive device 340 is in the first initial state. By resetting the initial phase, even after a phase shift occurs between the transmission gear 343b and the movable clutch 343c, the phase of the drive motor 342 and the phase of the disk cam 344 are adjusted again. It can be performed.

As a result, when performing an effect by operating the tilting device 310, the drive motor 342
This rotation control prevents the tilting device 310 from being displaced from the movement that the tilting device 310 is actually to perform. Therefore, even after a phase shift occurs between the transmission gear 343b and the movable clutch 343c, the tilting device 310 can be properly operated to perform an effect.

Here, as shown in FIG. 39, the movable clutch 343c has a shape that idles with respect to the transmission gear 343b regardless of the rotation direction of the transmission gear 343b. The necessity will be explained below.

40, 41, 42 and 43 are cross-sectional views of the operating device 300 taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a). In addition, in FIG. 40, the disk cam 3 is shifted from the state shown in FIG.
44 is shown rotated 180 degrees in the forward rotation direction (arrow CCW direction), and FIG. 41 shows a state where the disc cam 344 is further rotated in the arrow CCW direction from the state shown in FIG. Further, in FIG. 42, the disk cam 344 is rotated backward (arrow CW direction) from the state shown in FIG.
43 shows a state in which the disk cam 344 has rotated 180 degrees from the state shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 41, when the disk cam 344 rotates in the arrow CCW direction, the tilting device 31
0 moves through the first state shown in FIG. 40 and moves toward the second state. On the other hand, Figure 4
3, when the disk cam 344 rotates in the direction of the arrow CW, the tilting device 310 is configured to maintain the first state shown in FIG.

This is not only because the engaging rib 344c moves away from the release member 346 as it moves from the state shown in FIG. 42 to the state shown in FIG.
This is because, when is rotated in the direction of the arrow CW, even if the engaging rib 344c comes into contact with the releasing member 346, the fixation by the rotary pawl member 347 is not released. That is, when the disk cam 344 rotates in the direction of the arrow CW, the engagement rib 344c contacts the release member 346 from below. member 3
A load in the direction of pushing up 47 is not generated. Therefore, the fixation by the rotating claw member 347 is never released.

Here, when viewing the operation of the tilting device 310 from the player's point of view, FIGS. 38 to 40 and 42
Up to the first state shown in FIG. 4, both appear to be the same operation, and the movement after the first state is different from that shown in either FIG. 41 or FIG.

For example, the difference in operation after the tilting device 310 reaches the first state is determined by the drive motor 342
(See FIG. 39), but the difference in the drive sound due to the change in the number of revolutions of the drive motor 342 makes the player aware of the mode of control being performed, and the effect to be executed from now on. There is a risk that the player will grasp it and lose the player's interest. Also, the tilting device 3
10 is performed by suddenly stopping the drive motor 342, the load on the drive motor 342 increases, and the durability of the drive motor 342 may decrease.

On the other hand, according to this embodiment, when the tilting device 310 moves from the state shown in FIG.
The only difference is the direction of rotation, so it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the direction of rotation due to the drive mode (vibration, sound, etc.). For this reason, for example, when the degree of expectation for the presentation changes depending on whether the tilting device 310 is raised from the first state or is maintained in the first state, the tilting device 310 is moving toward the first state. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the change in the degree of expectation. Thereby, attention to the operation of the tilting device 310 can be improved.

On the other hand, by confirming whether the tilting device 310 reaches the first state and the drive motor 342 rotates to raise the tilting device 310 or maintain the first state,
Since the player can grasp the change in the degree of expectation of the performance, the player can understand the following when the tilting device 310 is in the second state (see FIG. 38) and the driving motor 342 moves toward the first state. It can be induced to watch the movement of the tilting device 310 .

That is, when the tilting device 310 is in the second state, it is possible to suppress the tilting device 310 from being held by the player. It is possible to prevent the device 340 from being overloaded.

In addition, since it is not necessary to suddenly stop the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 39) in order to perform the effect of suddenly stopping the tilting device 310, when the drive motor 342 is suddenly stopped, the drive motor 3
42 can be eliminated, and the durability of the drive motor 342 can be improved.

Next, referring to FIG. 44, regarding the case where the tilting device 310 moves up and down without being restricted by the rotating claw member 347 even when the player pushes down the tilting device 310 (third operation mode). explain.

FIG. 44 is a cross-sectional view of the operation device 300 taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a). 44, from the first initial state (see FIG. 25) of the drive device 340, the disc cam 3
44 is rotated forward by a predetermined amount (counterclockwise in FIG. 44), and the first
The disc cam 344 is held at an angle such that the overhanging portion 344c1 does not pass through the engaging portion 346d of the release member 346.
The outline of the tilting device 310 after rotating backward (clockwise in FIG. 44) is illustrated by imaginary lines.

As shown in FIG. 44, when the release member 346 is pushed down by the first projecting portion 344c1 of the disk cam 344, the first projecting portion 344c1 and the first retracting portion 344c2 are engaged with the releasing member 346. By reciprocatingly rotating the disc cam 344 while maintaining a positional relationship that does not pass through 346d, it is possible to reciprocate the tilting device 310 up and down while maintaining the posture of the release member 346. FIG.

In this case, the posture of the rotating claw member 347 changes in the backward rolling direction (
44 clockwise), the tilting device 31 is rotated in the manner shown in FIG.
0 moves up and down, even if the player pushes the tilting device 310, the tilting device 310 does not engage with the rotating claw member 347, and when the player releases the tilting device 310
moves above the first state (the position where the tilting device 310 is restricted from rising when the rotating claw member 347 engages with the tilting device 310) and continues the vertical movement. .

Therefore, for example, as the operation mode of the tilting device 310, the above-described first operation mode, the second operation mode, and the third operation mode shown in FIG. Manipulation of the device 300 can have non-traditional meanings. That is, according to the present embodiment, the tilting device 310 moves up and down in the first motion mode or the second motion mode only when the player pushes the tilting device 310 and then releases the tilting device 310. It is possible to know whether the robot was moving up and down in the third motion mode.

As a difference in production, when the tilting device 310 moves up and down in the first action mode and the second action mode (when the tilting device 310 is pushed in and then released, the tilting device 310 is maintained in the first state). case) is compared to the case where the tilting device 310 moves up and down in the third operation mode (the case where the tilting device 310 continues to move up and down even if the tilting device 310 is pushed in and then released). If a difference is provided in that the degree of expectation for a big win is high, the player recognizes the degree of expectation as to whether or not a big win will occur not only when the tilting device 310 is pushed in, but also when the player releases the tilting device 310. Since it is possible to obtain opportunities, it is possible to provide many timings at which the player pays attention to the operation device 300 . Thereby, the degree of attention of the operation device 300 can be improved.

Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 45 to 49. FIG. In the first embodiment, the case where the state of the rotating claw member 347 is maintained when the releasing member 346 is pushed up has been described. In addition, when the release member 2346 is pushed up, the slide claw member 23
48 is constructed in such a manner that it slides. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted. First, differences from the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46. FIG.

FIG. 45(a) is a side view of the slide claw member 2348 in the second embodiment, and FIG.
5(b) is a side view of the rotary plate member 2347, and FIG. 45(c) is a side view of the releasing member 2346. FIG.

46(a) and 46(b) are side views of the release member 2346, the rotary plate member 2347, and the slide claw member 2348, showing interlocking between the release member 2346, the rotary plate member 2347, and the slide claw member 2348. FIG. .

In FIG. 46(a), the rotary plate member 2347 is positioned against the release member 2346 by the second spring S.
46(b), the rotating plate member 2347 rotates to the terminal position against the biasing force of the second spring SP2 against the releasing member 2346. In FIG. Angular sub-states are shown. The state in which the releasing member 2346 is rotated by being brought into contact with the disk cam 344 is the state between the large angle state and the small angle state (projecting pin 3).
46b is arranged at the intermediate position of the guide slot 347b) (see FIG. 48).

As shown in FIGS. 45 and 46, the driving device 2340 (see FIG. 47) includes a shaft portion 341c (
47), a releasing member 2346, a rotating plate member 2347, and a tilting device 2310 (see FIG. 47) disposed on the opposite side of the releasing member 2346 across the rotating plate member 2347 ), and a slide claw member 2348 configured to be slidable along an arcuate trajectory centered on the rotation axis. In the releasing member 2346, the rotary plate member 2347, and the slide claw member 2348, the same reference numerals are given to the structures having the same functions as in the first embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 45(a), the slide claw member 2348 includes a curved portion 2348a formed in a curved shape so as to be slidably fitted in the rail portion 2347f, and an upper end portion of the curved portion 2348a. A hook-shaped portion 2348b that protrudes in a hook-like shape (to the left in FIG. 45), and the curved portion 2348a and the hook-shaped portion 2348b are stacked in the thickness direction (the direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 47(a)). Mainly, a reinforcing portion 2348c formed in a curved plate shape wider than the curved portion 2348a and a projecting pin 2348d projecting cylindrically toward the releasing member 2346 at the lower end of the reinforcing portion 2348c. Prepare.

The width of the curved portion 2348a is set to be slightly shorter than the separation width of the rail portions 2347f. Therefore, the curved portion 2348a of the slide claw member 2348
It is configured to be slidable with respect to the rotary plate member 2347 in a state of being internally fitted to 347f.

The hook-shaped portion 2348b has the same shape as the hook-shaped portion 347d of the first embodiment, and a magnetic material is provided on the lower surface thereof. This magnetic material is a bottom plate portion 2311 of a tilting device 2310, which will be described later.
It is a magnetic material for generating a magnetic force that attracts a.

The reinforcing portion 2348c is a portion facing the surface of the rotary plate member 2347 opposite to the surface facing the slide claw member 2348 in the assembled state (see FIG. 46), and is wider than the curved portion 2348a. , which reinforce the slide claw member 2348 .

The protruding pin 2348d is a cylindrical member that is inserted through the functional elongated hole 2346e of the release member 2346, and is composed of a metal rod that is inserted through and fixed to the main body plate portion 2348e. Release member 234
6 rotates relative to the rotating plate member 2347 so that the projecting pin 2348d moves into the function slot 23
Pushed by the side surface of 46e, the slide claw member 2348 slides.

The rotating plate member 2347 includes a shaft support hole 347a, a guide elongated hole 347b, an insertion hole 347c,
In addition to the pull-down hole 347e, a rail portion 2347f that guides the sliding motion of the slide claw member 2348, and a long support hole 2347g through which the projecting pin 2348d of the slide claw member 2348 is inserted are provided.

The rail portion 2347f is formed of a pair of plate-like portions extending from the upper end portion of the rotating plate member 2347. Side surfaces of the pair of plate-like portions facing each other are arranged such that the rotating plate member 2347 moves forward (see FIG. 3). 46 counterclockwise), the shank 314 (see FIG. 47)
It is formed from a curved shape along an arc centered at .

Like the rail portion 2347f, the support long hole 2347g is formed in a curved shape along an arc centered on the shaft portion 314 (see FIG. 47). A projecting pin 2348 is inserted into the support slot 2347g.
d is inserted, the slide claw member 2348 can be supported by the rail portion 2347f and the long support hole 2347g, and the slide claw member 2348 can be prevented from wobbling. can.

The releasing member 2346 includes a functional elongated hole 2346e that is elongated in the thickness direction, in addition to the pivot hole 346a, the projecting pin 346b, the insertion hole 346c, and the engaging portion 346d. .

The functional long hole 2346e is formed as a long hole having a width slightly wider than the diameter of the projecting pin 2348d of the slide pawl member 2348, and has a curved shape along an arc centered on the pivot hole 346a. a hole portion 2346e1, a second elongated hole portion 2346e2 extending from one end of the first elongated hole portion 2346e in an inclined direction toward the opposite direction of the pivot hole 346a,
Mainly provide

As shown in FIG. 46, when the release member 2346 rotates with respect to the rotary plate member 2347 and changes state between the large angle state and the small angle state, the slide pawl member 2348 is moved to the rail portion 234 .
It slides along the curved shape of 7f.

Since the functional long hole 2346e is formed as a long hole slightly wider than the diameter of the projecting pin 2348d, there is no time delay with respect to the movement of the releasing member 2346, and the moving speed of the releasing member 2346 is the same as the movement of the projecting pin 2348d. reflected in speed.

That is, if the releasing member 2346 is rotated quickly, the slide pawl member 2348 slides quickly.

As shown in FIG. 46(a), in the large angle state, even if the slide claw member 2348 is pulled in the sliding direction, the first arc portion 2346e1 is shaped along an arc centered on the shaft support hole 346a. Therefore, the load applied from the projecting pin 2348d to the functional elongated hole 2346e is directed in the linear direction passing through the shaft support hole 346a. Therefore, no force is generated to rotate the release member 2346, and the sliding movement of the slide claw member 2348 can be prevented.

That is, in this embodiment, the slide pawl member 2 is moved by rotating the release member 2346 .
Even if the slide claw member 347 slides, the slide claw member 2347 is not slid because the slide claw member 2347 is pulled in the large angle state. Therefore, similarly to the first embodiment, when the tilting device 2310 is arranged in the first state, the tilting device 2310 can be restricted from rising by engaging the slide claw member 2348 with the tilting device 2310 .

FIGS. 47 to 49 are diagrams illustrating changes in the attitude of the tilting device 2310 in chronological order, and are cross-sectional views of the operation device 2300 along the line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a). 47, the second retracting portion 344c4 of the disc cam 344 is the releasing member 234.
48, the disc cam 344 is rotated backward (clockwise in FIG. 47) from the state shown in FIG. 49, the disk cam 344 is rotated backward (clockwise in FIG. 48) from the state shown in FIG.
A state restored by the biasing force of 2 is illustrated.

In this embodiment, the bottom plate portion 2311a of the tilting device 2310 includes a magnet portion 2311a1 that is fixed to the upper side surface near the lower edge of the opening 311b and made of a magnetic material.

In the state shown in FIG. 47, the magnet portion 2311a1 and the hook-shaped portion 2348b are attracted by magnetic force. When the player pushes the tilting device 2310 from this state, the tilting device 23
Since the attraction between the magnet portion 2311 a 1 and the hook-shaped portion 2348 b is released due to the change in posture of 10, the tilting device 2310 does not apply a large load to the slide claw member 2348 .

As shown in FIG. 48, when the release member 2346 is pushed up, the slide pawl member 2348 slides upward in conjunction with the operation. At this time, the magnet portion 2311a1 and the hook-shaped portion 2348b are attracted to each other by magnetic force, so that if the releasing member 2346 operates quickly, the tilting device 2310 also operates quickly.

Therefore, by causing the slide claw member 2348 to slide at a speed different from the speed at which the tilting device 2310 rotates in the upward direction due to the biasing force of the torsion spring 315, the slide claw member 2348 rotates backward (clockwise in FIG. 48). The tilting device 2310 can be moved upward at a speed different from the upward movement when the tilting device 2310 is released from the upward movement restriction by rotating the tilting device 2310 (fourth operation mode). That is, the speed at which the tilting device 2310 moves upward can be changed.

As shown in FIG. 49, when the engagement between the disk cam 344 and the release member 2346 is released, the release member 2346 rotates backward (clockwise in FIG. 48) by the biasing force of the second spring SP2. As a result, the slide claw member 2348 is returned to the first state.

By enabling the operation modes shown in FIGS. 47 to 49, the tilting device 2310 can be operated in four operation modes in combination with the first to third operation modes described in the first embodiment. . As the number of operation modes increases, it becomes easier for the player to use the operation device 2300 as a means for foreseeing by associating the operation modes with the degree of expectation of the big win. Attention can be improved.

Further, according to this embodiment, when the tilting device 2310 is raised by raising the slide claw member 2348 as shown in FIG.
8b and the tilting device 2310 by magnetic attraction between the magnet portion 2311a1 of the tilting device 2310
Therefore, by securing a large magnetic force, the load applied to the tilting device 2310 can be increased compared to when the tilting device 2310 is lifted by the biasing force of the torsion spring 315 .

That is, normally, when the player puts his/her hand on the tilting device 2310 and the regulation by the slide claw member 2348 is released, the weight of the hand prevents the tilting device 2310 from rising. Also (even if the biasing force of the torsion spring 315 is not large enough to lift the weight of the hand), if the magnetic force is large enough to lift the weight of the hand, then FIG.
In the state shown in , the tilting device 2310 can be raised in a manner that lifts the player's hand.

As a result, when the tilting device 2310 is lifted, it is possible to provide a difference in the load in the upward direction (the force for maintaining the posture of the tilting device 2310 against the downward load). Therefore, a player who plays a game by putting his hand on the upper part of the tilting device 2310 before pushing the tilting device 2310 can feel the difference in load.

For example, by associating the difference in load with the degree of expectation of a big win, it becomes easier for the player to use the operation device 2300 as a means of foreseeing. can be improved.

Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 50 to 52. FIG. In the first embodiment, the detection sensors 324L and 324R can detect whether the tilting device 310 is in the first state or pushed by the player. is configured in such a manner that detection sensors 324L and 324R can detect whether the tilting device 3310 is in the state between the first state and the state pushed by the player, or pushed by the player. be. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 50 is a side view of the tilting device 3310 in the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 50, the tilting device 3310 includes a right detection piece 311gR extending downward from the bottom plate portion 311a of the case main body 3311, and the same position as the left detection piece 311gL in the first embodiment (rotation of the tilting device 3310). and a left detection piece 3311gL extending at a position opposite to the right detection piece 311gR with respect to a plane perpendicular to the axis and arranged at the center position in the rotation axis direction. The left detection piece 3311gL has a longer extension length than the right detection piece 311gR,
The extended length is shortened compared to the left detection piece 311gL in the first embodiment.

51(a) and 51(b) are side views of the operation device 3300. FIG. In addition, Fig. 5
1(a), the tilting device 3310 is in the first state, and in FIG. 51(b), the tilting device 331
A state in which 0 is being pressed is illustrated. Moreover, FIG.51(a) and FIG.51(b)
3, the outlines of the lower frame member 320, the upper frame member 330, and the protective cover device 350 are shown by imaginary lines, while the detection sensors 324L and 324R and the voice coil motor 352 are shown by solid lines. While being illustrated, the overlapping portions of the detection sensors 324L, 324R and the detection pieces 3311gL, 311gR are schematically illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 51(a), when the tilting device 3310 is in the first state, the left detection piece 3
311gL is not inserted into the left detection sensor 324L, and the right detection piece 311gR is not inserted into the right detection sensor 324R (the left detection sensor 324L is in the OFF state and the right detection sensor 324R is in the OFF state).

As shown in FIG. 51(b), when the tilting device 3310 is in the process of being pushed from the first state to the end of pushing, the left detection piece 3311gL is in contact with the left detection sensor 324L.
while the right detection piece 311gR is not inserted into the right detection sensor 324R (the left detection sensor 324L is ON and the right detection sensor 324R is OFF).
.

By detecting changes in the states of these detection sensors 324L and 324R, when the tilting device 3310 is in the state between the first state and the state pushed to the end of pushing, it is possible to detect the state in the middle of pushing. , or on the way back.

That is, when the left side detection sensor 324L is in the ON state and the right side detection sensor 324R is in the OFF state, the tilting device 3310 is in the middle state between the first state and the state pushed to the end of pushing. The left side detection sensor 324L is in the OFF state and the right side detection sensor 324
By detecting that R has changed from the OFF state, it can be determined that the tilting device 3310 is in the middle of the pushing operation.

52(a) and 52(b) are side views of the operation device 3300. FIG. In addition, Fig. 5
In 2(a), the tilting device 3310 is shown pushed to the end of the push, and FIG.
At 2(b), the tilting device 3310 is shown from the end of the push to the first state. 51(a) and 51(b), the outer shapes of the lower frame member 320, the upper frame member 330, and the protective cover device 350 are shown in imaginary lines for easy understanding. The detection sensors 324L, 324R and the voice coil motor 352 are illustrated by solid lines, and the overlapping portions of the detection sensors 324L, 324R and the detection pieces 3311gL, 311gR are schematically illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 52(a), when the tilting device 3310 is pushed to the end of the push, the left detection piece 3311gL is inserted through the left detection sensor 324L and the right detection piece 33
11gR is inserted into the right detection sensor 324R (the left detection sensor 324L is ON and the right detection sensor 324R is ON).

As shown in FIG. 52(b), when the tilting device 3310 is in a state between the first state and the state arranged at the end of the push, the left detection piece 3311gL is inserted into the left detection sensor 324L while the left detection sensor 324L is inserted. , the right detection piece 311gR is not inserted into the right detection sensor 324R (the left detection sensor 324L is ON and the right detection sensor 324R is OFF).

When the left side detection sensor 324L is in the ON state and the right side detection sensor 324R is in the OFF state, the tilting device 3310 is in the middle state between the first state and the state pushed to the end of pushing. The sensor 324L is ON and the right detection sensor 324R is ON
By detecting that the state has changed from the state, it can be determined that the tilting device 3310 is in the process of returning to the first state.

Here, the driving force of the voice coil motor 352 is transmitted to the tilting device 3310 so that the tilting device 3
310, rather than having the voice coil motor 352 collide with the tilting device 3310 while the tilting device 3310 moves downward, the voice coil motor 352 tilts while the tilting device 3310 moves upward. Collision with the device 3310 can provide a load that effectively raises the tilting device 3310 .

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 52(b), the operation direction of the tilting device 3310 is determined from the detection history of the detection sensors 324L and 324R. By driving the voice coil motor 352 when it is not in use, the driving force of the voice coil motor 352 can be effectively transmitted to the tilting device 3310, and the rising speed of the tilting device 3310 can be improved.

Here, when the biasing force of the torsion spring 315 is suppressed in order to suppress the driving force of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18), the tilting device 3 after the tilting device 3310 is pushed from the first state.
The rising speed of 310 slows down. In this case, even if the player repeatedly hits the tilting device 3310, the rising motion of the tilting device 3310 does not follow the movement of the player's hand, and the repeated hitting operation cannot be comfortably performed.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, by effectively using the driving force of the voice coil motor 352, the tilting device 3310 is more stable than when the tilting device 3310 moves upward only by the biasing force of the torsion spring 315. The tilting device 3310 can improve the speed of ascending.
It is possible to comfortably perform the continuous hit operation.

Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 53 to 55. FIG. In the first embodiment, the detection sensors 324L and 324R can detect whether the tilting device 310 is in the first state or pushed by the player. 3 detects the operating speed of the tilting device 4310 while it is changing from the second state to the first state, and changes the driving method of the voice coil motor 352 according to the detection result. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 53 is a side view of the tilting device 4310 in the fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 53, the tilting device 4310 includes a front detection piece 4311k projecting in a plate shape from the front side of the protruding projecting portion 311j of the case body 4311. As shown in FIG.

The front detection piece 4311k is configured to be able to pass through detection grooves (slits) of an upper detection sensor 4321d and a lower detection sensor 4321e (see FIG. 54) disposed on the bottom plate portion 4321 of the lower frame member 4320. This portion is for determining the operation speed of the tilting device 4310 based on the detection timing of the sensors 4321d and 4321e.

FIGS. 54(a) and 54(b) are side views of the operation device 4300 illustrating the depression operation of the operation device 4300 in chronological order. In addition, in FIG. 54(a), the tilting device 431
0 is the second state, and in FIG. 54(b), the tilting device 4310 is shifted from the state shown in FIG.
is pushed and the front detection piece 4311k passes the lower detection sensor 4321e downward. 54(a) and 54(b), the outer shapes of the lower frame member 4320, the upper frame member 330, and the protective cover device 350 are shown in phantom lines for easy understanding. Detection sensors 324L, 324R, 4321d, 4321e and voice coil motor 352 are shown in solid lines.

As shown in FIGS. 54(a) and 54(b), the lower frame member 4320 includes an upper detection sensor 4321d and a lower detection sensor 4321e on the front side portion of the bottom plate portion 4321. As shown in FIGS. The upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e are photocoupler-type sensors, and are arranged in such a manner that the detection groove is oriented in a direction that allows the front detection piece 4311k to pass through. In this embodiment, the upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e are arranged on an arc orbit around the rotation axis of the tilting device 4310 at intervals of 20°.

When the state shown in FIG. 54(a) changes to the state shown in FIG.
321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e in order. By detecting the timing interval of the passage, it is possible to determine whether the operating speed of the tilting device 4310 is large or small, and whether to drive the voice coil motor 352 is selected based on the determination.

Here, when the tilting device 4310 is pushed from the second position, the length of the push is long (because the acceleration period is long). The upper limit of the operating speed of 4310 is increased. Therefore, if there is no means of deceleration, the tilting device 4310 must be made strong as a safety measure for when the player pushes with all his might, and the tilting device 4310 tends to be heavy. A challenge arises.

It is also possible to incorporate an elastic spring that exerts a biasing force on the tilting device 4310 only when the tilting device 4310 is positioned near the push end, and the tilting device 4310 can be decelerated by the biasing force of the elastic spring. However, in this case, for a player with weak strength or a player who decides to perform the pressing operation softly, the increased reaction force in the vicinity of the pressing position becomes a burden on the pressing operation, and the player is likely to feel fatigued. Therefore, there is a possibility that the pushing operation of the tilting device 4310 cannot be performed comfortably.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e
By determining whether or not to drive the voice coil motor 352 based on the interval between the timings of switching between the ON state and the OFF state, a strong reaction force can be applied to the tilting device 4310 even when it is not necessary. can be prevented.

That is, for example, when the interval between timings at which the upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e switch between the ON state and the OFF state, respectively, is longer than a predetermined period (for example, 1 second), the voice coil motor 352 is turned on. While it is not driven, if the timing interval described above is shorter than the predetermined period, the voice coil motor 352 is controlled to be driven.

As a result, when the operation speed of the pushing operation of the tilting device 4310 is slow, the reaction force that the player feels from the tilting device 4310 is only the urging force generated by the torsion spring 315, and the tilting device 4310 can be easily moved even with a weak force. Push operation is possible.

Furthermore, when the operation speed of the pushing operation of the tilting device 4310 is fast, the tilting device 4310
As a reaction force against this, not only the biasing force generated by the torsion spring 315 but also the driving force generated by the voice coil motor 352 can be applied at the end of the pushing. Therefore, the operation speed of the tilting device 4310 can be suppressed.

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG.
11j is pushed out below the lower frame member 4320, the voice coil motor 352 is driven, and the movable member of the voice coil motor 352 is preliminarily pushed out to the side close to the tilting device 4310. be.

As a result, the tilting device 4310 is tilted while the movable member of the voice coil motor 352 is being pushed out.
and the voice coil motor 352, the impact applied to the tilting device 4310 can be suppressed.

55(a) and 55(b) are side views of the operation device 4300. FIG. In addition, Fig. 5
5(a) shows a state in which the tilting device 4310 is being pushed from the first state to the push end, and FIG. 55(b) shows a state where the tilting device 4310 has reached the push end.

In addition, in FIGS. 55(a) and 55(b), for ease of understanding, the lower frame member 4
320, the upper frame member 330 and the protective cover device 350 are shown in phantom lines,
Each detection sensor 324L, 324R, 4321d, 4321e and voice coil motor 35
2 are shown in solid lines.

As shown in FIG. 55(a), when the tilting device 4310 is pushed in at high speed from the second state, the tilting device 4310 protrudes convexly in the middle of reaching the end of pushing from the first state. The setting portion 311j and the voice coil motor 352 are brought into contact with each other.

By pushing the tilting device 4310, the direction in which the projecting portion 311j moves the voice coil motor 352 becomes the direction along the extension direction D41 of the voice coil motor 352, so that the voice coil motor 352 is retracted. It is possible to consume the force of the pushing operation to move to. Therefore, while the tilting device 4310 continues to move, the driving force of the voice coil motor 352 can apply a load in the direction of pushing up the tilting device 4310, and the tilting device 4310 can be decelerated.

At this time, the voice coil motor 352 does not have a structure that applies a load by friction like a disc brake, but a structure that applies a load by electromagnetic force, so damage to members can be suppressed and durability can be ensured.

In the state shown in FIG. 55(a), the overhang projecting portion 311j of the tilting device 4310 and the voice coil motor 352 are already in contact with each other, so the state shown in FIG. By gradually increasing the current supplied to the voice coil motor 352 from the ON state, the reaction force applied from the voice coil motor 352 to the tilting device 4310 can be gradually increased.

Therefore, the tilting device 4310 decelerates from the first state to the end of pushing while suppressing the reaction force felt by the player at the timing when the overhanging projecting portion 311j of the tilting device 4310 and the voice coil motor 352 come into contact with each other. You can improve the effect.

As shown in FIG. 55(b), when the tilting device 4310 is placed at the push end position, the right detection sensor 324R is turned on. In this state, the tilting device 4310 comes into contact with the lower frame member 4320 in the rotational direction and stops descending. Therefore, it becomes unnecessary to decelerate the tilting device 4310 by the voice coil motor 352 .

In this embodiment, in the state shown in FIG. 55(b), the voice coil motor 352 vibrates (moves in the extension direction and in the contraction direction repeatedly). This will
After pushing the tilting device 4310 to the end of the pushing operation, an effect of transmitting vibration to the player who keeps putting his hand on the tilting device 4310 can be performed.

That is, the voice coil motor 352 can be used for the purpose of reducing the speed of the pushing operation of the tilting device 4310 and for the purpose of vibrating the tilting device 4310 arranged at the pushing end position to perform a vibration effect.

Next, an operation device 5300 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 56 to 68. FIG.

In the first embodiment, by vibrating the voice coil motor 352, the tilting device 31
Although the case where vibration is transmitted to the player who presses 0 has been described, the operation device 5300 in the fifth embodiment includes a lower frame member 5320 and a weight member 5 arranged at a position where the center of gravity is eccentric.
412 is provided with a drive motor 5411, and based on the rotation of the drive motor 5411, vibration is transmitted to the player who touches the lower frame member 5320. FIG. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted. First, differences in configuration from the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 56 and 57. FIG.

FIG. 56 is an exploded front perspective view of the operation device 5300 in the fifth embodiment, and FIG.
7 is an exploded rear perspective view of the operation device 5300. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 56 and 57, the operation device 5300 is different from the operation device 300 in the first embodiment in that the lower frame member 320 is the lower frame member 5320, and the driving device 340
is a driving device 5340, and the protective cover member 350 to the voice coil motor 35
2 is omitted. The tilting device 310 and the upper frame member 330 are configured in the same manner as in the first embodiment.

A vibrating device 5400 having a drive motor 5411 is arranged on the lower frame member 5320, and a disk cam 5344 fixed to the transmission shaft rod 5343 with one touch is arranged on the drive device 5340. As shown in FIG. First, the vibration device 5400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 to 61, and then the disc cam 5344 will be described.

58 is an exploded front perspective view of the lower frame member 5320 and the vibration device 5400. FIG. As shown in FIG. 58, the vibration device 5400 includes a transmission device 5 that rotates a fan-shaped weight member 5412.
410, a transmission device 5410, a flexible member 5420 made of a flexible material and accommodating a transmission device 5410 and a drive motor 5411 of the transmission device 5410, a bottomed dish shape with an open upper surface, a weight member 5412 and a flexible member 5420. The lower frame member 53
and a housing member 5430 that is fastened and fixed to the bottom plate portion 5321 of 20 .

The transmission device 5410 includes a drive motor 5411 formed of a rotationally driven electric motor, and a weight member 5412 having a fan-shaped outer shape and having a portion corresponding to the pivot of the fan pivotally supported on the rotation shaft of the drive motor 5411. and are mainly provided.

The drive motor 5411 is provided with a pair of left and right fixed portions 5411a formed from a metal material in a flange shape on the side surface on which the shaft protrudes.

The weight member 5412 has a radius Ra and is eccentrically supported with respect to the rotating shaft of the driving motor 5411 . Therefore, when the driving motor 5411 rotates, the position of the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 changes, and the driving motor 5411 is configured to vibrate together.

The flexible member 5420 has a main body portion 5421 in the shape of a cylindrical container in which the drive motor 5411 is inserted along the axial direction and has a bottom on the side opposite to the side into which the drive motor 5411 is inserted. A pair of rib-shaped leg portions 5422 protruding in the left and right direction and downward in the radial direction of the main body 5421 and the rib-shaped leg portions 5422 protruding left and right on the open side of the main body 5421 are connected to each other. Posture maintaining portion 5423 in which fixing portion 5411a is embedded
and a pair of projecting leg portions 5424 projecting upward from the upper surface of the body portion 5421 in the form of a pair of columns.

The main body portion 5421 has the same depth as the length of the drive motor 5411 in the axial direction, and has a depth of a container shape. Therefore, when the drive motor 5411 is fully inserted into the body portion 5421, the shaft side end face of the drive motor 5411 and the opening side end face of the body portion 5421 are formed on the same plane. Also, in this state, the fixing portion 5411a is embedded in the posture maintaining portion 5423 .

The rib-shaped leg portions 5422 are formed on the left and right sides and the lower side of the main body portion 5421, but the rib-shaped leg portions 5422 on the left and right sides are formed on the left and right sides by the amount of the posture maintaining portions 5423 arranged on the left and right sides. Deformation resistance is greater than that of the rib-like leg portion 5422 on the lower side.

Since the projecting leg portion 5424 is projectingly provided in a columnar shape, it is possible to easily concentrate the load on one point in contact with the tilting device 310 described later. Therefore, when the flexible member 5420 is deformed by the tilting of the tilting device 310, the tilting angle of the tilting device 310 corresponds to the tilting angle of the flexible member 54.
The resolution of the 20 degrees of deformation can be made finer.

The accommodating member 5430 includes a first accommodating portion 5431 in which the drive motor 5411 and the flexible member 5420 are accommodated, and a weight member 5 adjacent to the first accommodating portion 5431 in the assembled state.
412 are accommodated in the second accommodation portion 5432, and the first accommodation portion 5431 and the second accommodation portion 5
A groove 5433 that is recessed downward from the upper surface of the connection surface of 432 is mainly provided.

The depth of the first receiving portion 5431 is increased by the flexible member 54 until the lower rib leg 5422 bottoms out.
20 is inserted and the load applied at the time of insertion is released (assembly load released state), the protruding leg portion 5424 protrudes from the upper surface.

The depth of the second housing portion 5432 is a depth that is recessed to the outside of the rotation trajectory of the weight member 5412 in the assembly load release state, while the player applies a load to the protruding leg portion 5424 and the flexible member. The depth is such that it interferes with the rotational trajectory of the weight member 5412 when the weight member 5420 is deformed (in an assembly load state).

The recessed groove 5433 has a width slightly larger than the diameter of the rotating shaft of the drive motor 5411 and a depth extending slightly below the rotating shaft of the drive motor 5411 in the assembly load state. be.

59(a) is a side view of the lower frame member 5320, FIG. 59(b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the lower frame member 5320 along line LIXb-LIXb of FIG. 59(a), and FIG. )teeth,
FIG. 59(a) is a partial top view of the lower frame member 5320 viewed in the direction of arrow LIXc in FIG. 59(a). In addition, in FIG.59(a), the part corresponding to the vibration apparatus 5400 is partially cross-sectionally viewed. again,
In FIG. 59(a), the first area S51, which is the area occupied by the tilting device 310 when the tilting device 310 is in the first state, and the first region S51, which is the region where the tilting device 310 is pushed three times from the first state, is pushed. An end region S52, which is the region occupied by the tilting device 310 when placed in the end position, is shown in phantom lines.

As shown in FIG. 59(a), a projecting leg portion 5424 is projected in a direction along a circular orbit formed with the central axis of the circular arc of the lower bearing portion 323 as a rotation axis. Therefore, the tilting device 310
(See FIG. 56), the maximum amount of deformation of the projecting leg portion 5424 can be ensured with respect to the angle change.

As shown in FIG. 59( b ), the weight member 5412 is separated from the second accommodating portion 5432 in the assembled load-released state in which no load is applied to the projecting leg portion 5424 .

As shown in FIG. 59(c), the projecting legs 5424 are arranged symmetrically with respect to the center line of the lower frame member 5320 when viewed in the extension direction. Therefore, since the projecting leg portion 5424 can be evenly pushed in on the bottom surface of the tilting device 310, it is possible to prevent the flexible member 5420 from tilting to the left or right (inclining to the left or right in the plane of FIG. 59(b)) when pushed. The protruding leg portion 5424 can be pushed in while maintaining the posture shown in FIG. 59(b).

As shown in FIG. 59(c), the bottom plate portion 5321 of the lower frame member 5320 has a projecting leg portion 5424.
A pair of through-holes 5321d are provided so that they can be inserted. Since the through-hole 5321d has a lateral width slightly larger than the diameter of the projecting leg portion 5424, the tilting device 310 is pushed by the player, and the bottom surface of the tilting device 310 is projected. When pressed against the leg portion 5424, the lateral deformation of the projecting leg portion 5424 can be suppressed.
Therefore, deformation of the shape of the protruding leg portion 5424 is suppressed, and the main body portion 5421 along with the protruding leg portion 5424 is
can be made easier to translate downward (downward in FIG. 59(b)).

60(a) and 60(b) are cross-sectional views of the vibration device 5400 along line LXa-LXa of FIG. 59(a). In addition, FIG. 60(a) illustrates the assembly load release state, and FIG.
In 0(b), the assembly load state after the projecting leg portion 5424 is pushed into the first accommodation portion 5431 in the state where the tilting device 310 occupies the terminal end region S52 (see FIG. 59(a)) is illustrated. Note that the outlines of the second accommodating portion 5432 and the weight member 5412 are shown by imaginary lines.

As shown in FIGS. 60(a) and 60(b), the vibration device 540
0 is applied to the assembly load state, the projecting leg portion 5424 and the lower rib-like leg portion 5
422 is deformed, the drive motor 5411 and weight member 5412 are displaced downward.

In the assembly load state, as shown in FIG. 60(b), the flexible member 5420 is elastically deformed by being pushed by the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 57). The elastic recovery force of this deformation acts as a force pushing back the tilting device 310, and the force increases as the tilting device 310 approaches the flexible member 5420. 310 can mitigate the impact when it collides with the lower frame member 5320 (see FIG. 57).
Moreover, since the load is due to the elastic recovery force, the load can be generated without time delay even when the tilting device 310 moves at high speed.

Here, when the biasing force of the torsion spring 315 is suppressed in order to suppress the driving force of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 57), from the first state (the state in which the tilting device 310 is arranged at the rising end, see FIG. 38) The rising speed of the tilting device 310 after the pushing operation of the tilting device 310 is slowed down. In this case, even if the player repeatedly hits the tilting device 310, the rising motion of the tilting device 310 does not follow the movement of the player's hand, and the repeated hitting operation cannot be comfortably performed.

In contrast, according to the present embodiment, the elastic recovery force of the flexible member 5420 is effectively used, so that the tilting device 310 is more stable than when the tilting device 310 is raised only by the biasing force of the torsion spring 315. Since the rising speed can be improved, the tilting device 310 can be comfortably hit repeatedly.

As shown in FIG. 60(a), in the assembly load released state, the weight member 5412 does not contact the inner wall of the second housing portion 5432 regardless of its posture. Therefore, even if the drive motor 5411 starts to be driven in the assembly load-released state, vibration due to contact between the weight member 5412 and the second housing portion 5432 does not occur.

In addition, the vibration of the drive motor 5411 itself and the slight vibration generated in the drive motor 5411 due to the movement of the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 are absorbed by the flexibility of the flexible member 5420,
Propagation to 0 is prevented. This makes it difficult for the player to grasp the drive start timing of the drive motor 5411 .

As shown in FIG. 60(b), in the assembly load state, the body portion 542 of the flexible member 5420
1 is constructed in a mode in which vertical displacement is permitted by deformation of the upper projecting leg portion 5424 and the lower rib-like leg portion 5422 .

When the flexible member 5420 moves downward, the state of the rib-like leg portion 5422 arranged on the lower side of the main body portion 5421 changes to a state of being more vertically compressed, and the rib-like leg portion 5422 hardens slightly. Therefore, the vibration damping effect of the rib-shaped leg portion 5422 can be weakened, and the vibration generated by the vibrating device 5400 can be easily transmitted to the player.

Also, the main body portion 5421 of the flexible member 5420 is formed in a cylindrical shape, and the rib-like leg portion 54 on the lower side
22 extend along the axial direction of the cylinder of the body portion 5421 and are arranged in a left and right pair at uniform intervals from the center axis to the left and right. The radially outer end portion of 5422 is deformed in such a manner that it moves left and right outward (the side with the smaller resistance at the connection position between main body portion 5421 and rib-like leg portion 5422) (see FIG. 60(b)).
In this case, since the projecting direction of the rib-shaped leg portion 5422 arranged on the lower side of the main body portion 5421 has a left-right component, the elastic force of the rib-shaped leg portion 5422 can act in the left-right direction. . Therefore, in the assembly load state, the lateral load that may occur when the weight member 5421 collides with the second housing portion 5432 is
22 can be partially absorbed. As a result, it is possible to suppress displacement of the drive motor 5411 in the left-right direction.

Figures 61(a) and 61(b) are cross-sectional views of the transmission device 5410 and the housing member 5430 taken along line LIXb-LIXb of Figure 59(a).

FIGS. 61(a) and 61(b) show the assembly load state, FIG. 61(a) shows the state where the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 is located above the rotation axis, and FIG. In b), the state in which the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 is arranged below the rotation axis is illustrated. Fig. 6
In 1(a) and FIG. 61(b), the tilting device 310 is pushed by the player, and the end region S52
A state of the vibrating device 5400 in a state of occupying is illustrated.

The operation of transmission device 5410 based on the rotation of weight member 5412 will be described. First, in the present embodiment, when the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 is positioned upward in the assembly load state, the driving motor 5411 rotates to a position where the distance from the lower base of the second housing portion 5432 is the distance Q1. Axes are placed. In this embodiment, the distance Q1 is equal to the radius Ra of the weight member 5412 (Q1=Ra).

In other words, when the weight member 5412 rotates in the assembly load state, the outer peripheral side surface of the weight member 5412 moves toward the second accommodation portion 543 .
2 abuts (rubs). Therefore, the vibration caused by the rotation of the weight member 5412 changes compared to the state in which the assembly load is released, and a different kind of vibration can be transmitted to the player.

Due to the contact between the weight member 5412 and the second accommodation portion 5432, the weight member 5412
upward (upward in FIG. 61(b)). Here, since the weight member 5412 and the second housing portion 5432 move toward and away from each other along the moving direction of the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 57), the direction of the repulsive force is the direction along the moving direction of the tilting device 310 (upward). ) can be easily directed. This repulsive force causes the drive motor 5411 that supports the weight member 5412 and the flexible member 5 to move.
420 moves upward, and the force of the flexible member 5420 pushing back the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 57) upward (in the moving direction of the tilting device 310) can be reinforced.

In this way, the force pushing the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 57) upward is applied to the flexible member 542.
The force that pushes back the tilting device 310 is adjusted by combining the force generated as the elastic recovery force of 0 and the force generated by the contact between the weight member 5412 and the second housing portion 5432, which are generated separately. be able to.

That is, after the tilting device 310 starts contacting the projecting leg portion 5424, the end region S52 (FIG. 59)
(a)), the elastic recovery force of the flexible member 5420 is generated as a force pushing back the tilting device 310, and after the tilting device 310 reaches the end region S52, the weight member 5412
and the second receiving portion 5432 are added to the force pushing back the tilting device 310 . As a result, the force pushing back the tilting device 310 can be particularly increased in the vicinity of the end region S52, so that the tilting device 310 can be easily operated and the impact during the pushing operation can be reduced. This adjustment can be performed while the drive motor 5411 is kept rotating. Therefore, complicated control can be made unnecessary.

In this embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the length of the left detection piece 311gL and the length of the right detection piece 311gR are different (see FIG. 57). ) is higher than a specific speed (for example, 40 km/h), and the placement of the weight member 5412 is changed according to the determined operating speed.

For example, if the operating speed of the tilting device 310 is determined to be greater than a specific speed, the flexible member 5420 may be used to reduce the impact when the tilting device 310 collides with the lower frame member 5320.
is desired to increase the load on the tilting device 310 . Therefore, in the present embodiment, when it is determined that the operating speed of the tilting device 310 is higher than a specific speed, the weight member 5412 is moved in advance so as to assume the downward posture (see FIG. 61(b)).

As a result, the end of the lowering motion of the drive motor 5411 is positioned so that the rotary shaft of the drive motor 5411
2 can be raised to a position that is raised by a radius Ra from the lower end of the inner wall of 2. As a result, compared to the case where the weight member 5432 is arranged upward (see FIG. 61(a)) (when it can be lowered downward from the state shown in FIG. 61(a)), the upper side of the drive motor 5411 The movable area of the flexible member 5420 can be narrowed in the vertical direction.

That is, the compression dimension of the flexible member 5420 and the upper portion of the driving motor 5411 can be increased when the projecting leg 5424 is pushed down by the tilting device 310 by the same amount. Therefore, the repulsive force applied from the flexible member 5420 to the tilting device 310 can be increased, and the load for braking the tilting device 310 can be increased.

Although not described in this embodiment, the elastic recovery force of the flexible member 5420 generates the force to push back the tilting device 310 by keeping the driving motor 5411 stopped upward (see FIG. 61(a)). It is also possible to prevent the force due to contact between the weight member 5412 and the second housing portion 5432 from being generated.

Here, contact between the members occurs between the transmission device 5410 and the housing member 5430 fastened and fixed to the lower frame member 5320 , not between the tilting device 310 . Therefore, it is possible to change the vibration transmitted to the hand of the player who pushes the tilting device 310 and to widen the transmission range of the vibration. That is, the vibration can be transmitted to a portion other than the portion touching the tilting device 310, for example, the portion touching the frame of the pachinko machine 10. - 特許庁

That is, when the player pushes the tilting device 310, the vibration can be transmitted to the lower frame member 5320, so that the palm or a part of the side of the hand placed on the lower frame member 5320 as a fulcrum for pushing can be moved. Vibration can be transmitted to the player through the device. As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the vibration is not transmitted to the player.

As shown in FIGS. 61(a) and 61(b), the player tilts the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 56).
is pushed in, and the weight member 5
412 and the housing member 5430 come into contact with each other to generate vibration.

Therefore, even if the drive motor 5411 is in a rotating state in advance, the timing at which the vibration is transmitted to the player can be limited to the timing at which the tilting device 310 is pushed. Vibration can be easily transmitted to the player as compared with the case where vibration is generated from the body.

That is, when the player pushes the tilting device 310 in such a manner that the hand is released immediately after pushing the tilting device 310 (pulse pushing state), vibration is generated after detecting that the tilting device 310 has been pushed. In this case, there is a possibility that vibration cannot be generated (vibration is not started in time) before the player releases his/her hand, and the player may not be able to experience the effects of the vibration. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the drive motor 5411 rotates before the tilting device 310 is pushed in, and preparations for vibration generation are completed. As a result, the player can experience the effect of the vibration.

In addition, the flexibility of the flexible member 5420 can prevent the vibration of the main body of the drive motor 5411 from being transmitted to the first accommodating portion 5431 . Therefore, the driving motor 5411
is driven, it is possible to prevent the vibration from being transmitted to the player before the tilting device 310 is pushed.

Therefore, by driving the drive motor 5411 in advance before the tilting device 310 is pushed, a state in which vibration is transmitted by pushing the tilting device 310 can be realized.

Next, the driving device 5340 will be described. The driving device 5340 differs from the driving device 340 in the first embodiment in the disc cam 5344 and the transmission shaft 5343 . Others are the same as those of the driving device 340 of the first embodiment, so the same reference numerals are given and the description thereof is omitted.

62 is an exploded front perspective view of drive 5340. FIG. As shown in FIG. 62, an elongated concave portion C1 is formed in the central portion of a pair of disc cams 5344, which are composed of a left disc cam 5344L and a right disc cam 5344R.

FIG. 63(a) is a front perspective view of the right disc cam 5344R, and FIG. 63(b) is a rear perspective view of the right disc cam 5344R. Note that the right disc cam 5344R and the left disc cam 534R
4L is composed of a symmetrical shape, so only the right disc cam 5344R will be described, and the description of the left disc cam 5344L will be omitted.

The difference between the right disk cam 5344R and the right disk cam 344R in the first embodiment is that a pair of clamping arm portions A1 that sandwich the transmission shaft rod 5343 are arranged at the connecting portion with the transmission shaft rod 5343. is.

That is, the right disc cam 5344R is separated from the disc portion by the circular rib 344 at its center position.
A support cylinder P1 that extends in a cylindrical shape toward the side where b is disposed, and an axially symmetric long hole shape extending along the axial direction of the support cylinder P1 to a position about half the extension distance. A long hole recess C1 recessed from the disc portion and an axial end portion of the support cylinder portion P1 recessed by the long hole recess C1 extend toward the disc portion side along the axial direction. and a pair of holding arms A1.

The support cylinder portion P1 is a portion that supports the columnar member 5343a by making its inner diameter equal to the diameter of the columnar member 5343a of the transmission shaft 5343 . The support cylinder portion P1 includes a deformed portion P1a that is not recessed in the long hole recess C1 and remains in the same axial arrangement as the region recessed in the long hole recess C1.

The deformed portion P1a is a pair of connecting rod portions arranged to sandwich the elongated concave portion C1, and is elastically deformed when the right disc cam 5344R is axially deformed with respect to the transmission shaft rod 5343 (see FIG. 62). configured as a part to

The long hole recess C1 is formed with a width dimension slightly longer than the width dimension of the clamping arm portion A1. Therefore, the holding arms A1 are arranged in a direction (
longitudinal direction).

In addition, the opposing surface of the long hole recess C1 is configured to have a shape that engages with the D-shape of the fixing portion 5343a1 of the cylindrical member 5343a. That is, one side surface is formed as a flat surface, and the other side surface is formed as an arc shape along the outer shape of the cylindrical member 5343a. As a result, the cylindrical member 5
343 a can be prevented from rotating relative to the disc cam 5344 .

The holding arm portion A1 is formed of a pair of arm portions, from the side facing the other arm,
It has an engagement projection A1a projecting in a direction approaching the arm of the other party. Engagement protrusion A1a
engages with the tip of the cylindrical member 5343a when connected to the transmission shaft 5343, and prevents the cylindrical member 5343a from coming off the disk cam 5344.

The shape of the tip of the engagement projection A1a corresponds to the engagement groove 5343a of the cylindrical member 5343a (see FIG. 64).
It consists of a shape that matches the arc shape of 4. As a result, the radial overlapping length (Fig. 65 (b) length in the left-right direction) can be ensured to be long.

The engaging convex portion A1a has a side surface of the right disc cam 5344R on the side closer to the connecting pin 344d in the axial direction, and a recessed surface portion C2 (a long hole recessed portion) recessed along the shaft near the shaft. It is arranged at a position that is the plane position with the side surface on the opening side of C1.

As a result, the engagement between the columnar member 5343a and the engagement projection A1a can be completed on the support cylinder P1 side (lower side in FIG. 63(b)) than the recessed surface portion C2 (FIG. 65(b)). reference). Therefore, on the outside of the recessed surface portion C2 (the upper side in FIG. 63(b)), compared with the case where the e-ring is fitted in the cylindrical member 5343a, the length of the cylindrical member 5343a protruding from the recessed surface portion C2 is
It can be shortened by the thickness of the e-ring (see FIG. 65(b)).

In addition, there is no need to secure a space for fitting the e-ring (a space required for sliding the e-ring in contact with the surface) in the extending direction (direction parallel to the surface) of the right disk cam 5344R. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the width of the recess (the width in the radial direction) of the recessed surface portion C2.
Thereby, the degree of freedom in designing the shape of the right disk cam 5344R can be improved.

The transmission shaft rod 5343 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 64 shows the transmission shaft rod 5343
is a front exploded perspective view of the. A difference between the transmission shaft rod 5343 and the transmission shaft rod 353 in the first embodiment is a cylindrical member 5343a.

The cylindrical member 5343a has a fixing portion 5343a1 having a D-shaped cross section for fixing the disc cam 5344 formed at both ends thereof, and a fitting groove 5343a3 from the fixing portion 5343a1 on the left side in front view.
A clutch operating portion 5343a2 having a D-shaped cross section formed from the same cross-sectional shape as the fixing portion 5343a1 across the , and a disc cam 534 which is a groove into which the e-ring is fitted and which is formed by the e-ring.
4 and the e-ring fitted in the fitting groove 5343a3. An engaging groove 5343a4, which is a groove with which the portion A1a engages, is mainly provided. The fitting grooves 5343a3 are arranged laterally outside the pair of plates in which the pivot holes 341b are formed in the assembled state.

The clutch operating portion 5343a2 is a portion inserted through the angle fixing hole 343c1 of the movable clutch 343c, and is a portion in which the movable clutch 343c slides under the biasing force of the coil spring 343d in the assembled state.

By fitting the e-ring into the fitting groove 5343a3 from behind, a portion of the cylindrical member 5343a whose diameter is partially increased is formed by the e-ring. The diameter of member 5343a can be made uniform.

With this diameter uniform, the columnar member 5343a is inserted into the shaft support hole 341b (see FIG. 62) by a predetermined amount, and then the e-ring is fitted, thereby adjusting the axial direction of the columnar member 5343a with respect to the shaft support hole 341b with the e-ring. In addition, the e-ring can prevent the disk cam 5344 from axially dislocating.

With the above-described configuration of the disc cam 5344 and the transmission shaft 5343, the disc cam 5344
can be assembled to the transmission shaft rod 5343 with one touch. That is, when the disc cam 5344 is assembled to the transmission shaft rod 5343, the cylindrical member 5343a is positioned on the side of the end portion of the support cylinder portion P1 of the disc cam 5344 on which the engagement projection A1a is arranged. From the opposite end, the engagement groove 5
343a4 is inserted to the position where the engaging protrusion A1a is fitted. At this time, the engagement groove 5343a4
Before the engaging protrusions A1a are inserted to the position where the engaging protrusions A1a are fitted, the tip of the columnar member 5343a enters between the engaging protrusions A1a, and the pair of engaging protrusions A1a are pushed apart from each other. The clamping arm portion A1 is elastically deformed in a manner. After that, when the tip of the columnar member 5343a passes through the engagement protrusion A1a, the engagement protrusion A1a and the engagement groove 5343a4 are arranged to face each other, and the engagement protrusion A1a is fitted into the engagement groove 5343a4. Then, the holding arm portion A1 is elastically recovered, and the disk cam 5344 and the transmission shaft rod 5343 are assembled (see FIG. 65(b)).

On the other hand, the configuration of the disc cam 5344 and the transmission shaft rod 5343 functions not only for one-touch assembly, but also as a destruction prevention structure in this embodiment. This will be described with reference to FIGS. 65 and 66. FIG.

65(a) is a front view of the right disc cam 5344R viewed in the direction of arrow LXVa in FIG. 62, and FIG. 65(b) is a view of the right disc cam 53 along line LXVb-LXVb in FIG. 65(a).
44R, and FIG. 65(c) is a cross-sectional view of the right disc cam 5344R taken along line LXVc-LXVc in FIG. 65(a). 66(a) is a front view of the right disk cam 5344R viewed in the direction of arrow LXVa in FIG. 62, and FIG.
It is a cross-sectional view of the right disk cam 5344R along line XVIb-LXVIb.

FIG. 66 shows the right disc cam 5344R after being deformed when the player gives an overload to the unloaded right disc cam 5344R shown in FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 65 and 66, in this embodiment, the columnar member 5343a is supported by the extended distal end portion of the support cylinder portion P1 at a position spaced apart from the disc portion of the right disc cam 5344R. In the vicinity of the portion, only the engaging protrusion A1a engages with the engaging groove 5343a4. Therefore, when the columnar member 5343a or the right disk cam 5344R is overloaded, the columnar member 5343a can be tilted about the extended distal end portion of the support cylinder portion P1.

As shown in FIG. 65(b), since the space of the long hole recess C1 is arranged in the direction in which the pair of clamping arm portions A1 face each other, the resistance of the cylindrical member 5343a to axial tilt displacement is reduced. on the other hand,
As shown in FIG. 65(c), in the direction in which the supporting cylinder portion P1 and the connecting pin 344d are connected,
Since the cylindrical member 5343a and the right circular disc cam 5344R are in contact with each other along the axial direction of the right circular disc cam 5344R, the resistance of the cylindrical member 5343a to axial tilt displacement is increased.

Therefore, when the player forcibly holds down (pulls up) the tilting device 310 and an overload is applied to the right disk cam 5344R (displacement of the connecting pin 344d via the arm member 345 (see FIG. 62)). is applied), the deformation direction of the right disk cam 5344R with respect to the cylindrical member 5343a can be restricted.

In other words, the right disk cam 5344R deforms in the direction of less resistance, so that FIG.
As shown in (a) and FIG. 66(b), when the right disc cam 5344R is overloaded,
The disk portion is axially tilted and deformed about a support axis r1 connecting the connecting pin 344d and the center of the support cylinder portion P1 on a plane parallel to the surface of the disk portion. As a result, the tip position of the connecting pin 344d is shifted along the circumferential direction of the right disk cam 5344R compared to the position shown in FIG.
Displace.

67(a) is a cross-sectional view of the operation device 5300 along the line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a), and FIG. 67(b) is an operation in the direction of arrow LXVIIb in FIG. 67(a). 5300 is a partial rear view of device 5300. FIG. In FIG. 67(b), illustration of the protective cover device 350 is omitted, and only the disk cam 5344, the arm member 345 and the releasing member 346 are illustrated. Further, in FIG. 67(a), for ease of understanding, the outer shape of the right disc cam 5344R in a state in which it is perpendicularly inserted into and fixed to the transmission shaft rod 5343 is illustrated by a solid line. The outline of the folded state is illustrated by imaginary lines.

FIG. 67(a) shows the second state of the tilting device 310, the player's hand holding the tilting device 310, and an enlarged state of the vicinity of the connecting pin 344d. .

In the state shown in FIG. 67(a), when the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 62) starts operating, the left disk cam 5344L is about to start rotating, but the player restricts the displacement of the tilting device 310. Therefore, a load is generated between the arm member 345 trying to stay in place and the connecting pin 344d of the left disc cam 5344L trying to rotate. When this load is generated, the right disc cam 5344R can undergo the axial tilting deformation described above, so that the load can be alleviated.

In FIG. 67(a), the outer shape of the right disc cam 5344R after its axial tilt deformation is illustrated by imaginary lines. A change in the connection mode with the arm member 345 due to axial tilt deformation will be described with reference to an enlarged view.

In FIG. 67(a), when the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 62) starts operating and the outer circumference of the right disk cam 5344R rotates clockwise by the dimension Rd,
The shaft support hole 345a of the arm member 345 and the connecting pin 344d are displaced,
In order to absorb this, the right disc cam 5344R undergoes axial tilt deformation.

Since the connecting pin 344d falls in the direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. The position is shifted along the circumferential direction of the plate cam 5344R. This misalignment causes the right disk cam 534
Since the displacement between the connecting pin 344d and the arm member 345 due to the rotation of the dimension Rd of 4R can be partially absorbed, the driving motor 342 (
62), the load applied to the drive motor 342 can be alleviated.

As shown in FIG. 67(b), the disc cam 5344 is axially tilted and deformed so that the disc cam 5344 and the release member 346 come into contact with each other. As a result, the driving force of the drive motor 342 is consumed by the frictional force generated between the release member 346 and the disk cam 5344, so that the player drives the drive motor 342 while holding the tilting device 310 fixedly. In this case, the load applied to arm member 345 connecting disk cam 5344 and tilting device 310 can be reduced.

As shown in FIG. 67(a), when the disk cam 5344 rotates backward (in the direction of the arrow CW), the release member 346 is pushed upward by the frictional force, but the second spring The elastic force of SP2 acts on disc cam 5344 via release member 346 . In this case, the rotation claw member 347 is blocked by the bottom plate portion 5321 and stops.
The state of the first spring SP1 does not change (the elastic force does not change).

On the other hand, when the disk cam 5344 rotates forward (the direction of the arrow CCW, see FIG. 68), the release member 346 is pushed downward by the frictional force, but the elastic force of the first spring SP1 acts against it. disc cam 5344 through release member 346 and rotating pawl member 347
acts on In this case, since the relative positional relationship between the rotating claw member 347 and the release member 346 does not change, the state of the second spring SP2 does not change (the elastic force does not change).

Therefore, when the releasing member 346 and the disk cam 5344 are in contact with each other and the releasing member 346 moves along the direction of movement of the disk cam 5344, regardless of the rotation direction of the disk cam 5344, the first
Among the elastic forces of either the spring SP1 or the second spring SP2, the disc cam 5344
The elastic force acting on the disc cam 5344 in the direction opposite to the direction of rotation of can be increased.
As a result, the load applied by the release member 346 to the disk cam 5344 can be increased,
Since the consumption amount of the driving force of the drive motor 342 can be increased, the arm member 34
5 can be reduced regardless of the direction of rotation of the disk cam 5344 .

In this embodiment, the right disk cam 5344R is formed in a shape symmetrical with respect to the straight line passing through the connecting pin 344d and the center point (the direction perpendicular to the straight line passing through the connecting pin 344d and the center point). ), the right disc cam 5344R can be deformed in the same manner regardless of the direction of rotation of the right disc cam 5344R (regardless of the direction in which the connecting pin 344d is displaced from the arm member 345). It can be axially deformed by resistance.

FIG. 68(a) is a cross-sectional view of the operation device 5300 along the line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a), and FIG. 68(b) is an operation in the direction of arrow LXVIIIb in FIG. 68(a). 5300 is a partial rear view of device 5300. FIG. In addition, in FIG.68(b), illustration of the protective cover apparatus 350 is abbreviate|omitted. In addition, in FIG. 68(a), in order to facilitate understanding,
The outer shape of the right disc cam 5344R when it is vertically inserted into and fixed to the transmission shaft rod 5343 is shown by solid lines, and the outer shape of the right disk cam 5344R in the state of being tilted due to overload is shown by imaginary lines.

FIG. 68(a) shows a state in which the tilting device 310 is driven by the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 62) from the second state and is tilted downward by an angle D2. A player's hand is shown holding a

As shown in FIG. 68(a), when the player grips the tilting device 310 while the tilting device 310 is in motion, the right disc cam 5344 is held regardless of whether the tilting device 310 is in the second state or not.
The tip of the connecting pin 344d can be displaced in the circumferential direction of the right disk cam 5344R by the tilt of the R axis, thereby reducing the load generated between the arm member 345 and the right disk cam 5344R. Therefore, the load applied to the drive motor 342 can be reduced.

The items described for the right disc cam 5344R also apply to the left disc cam 5344L.

As shown in FIGS. 67(b) and 68(b), according to the present embodiment, the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 62) operates while the tilting device 310 is held by the player, causing an overload. and,
The right disk cam 5344R tilts in the axial direction.

Therefore, by detecting the degree of tilting motion in the axial direction, it is possible to quickly notice the occurrence of overload. That is, for example, according to the configuration of the first embodiment, the drive motor 34
2 is driven during one rotation of the right disc cam 344R, the detection hole 3 of the right disc cam 344R is detected.
44eR passes the right detection sensor 353R, but if the player is holding the tilting device 310, the right disc cam 344R will not rotate even if the drive motor 342 is rotated.
Since the detection hole 344eR does not pass through the right side detection sensor 353R and the input to the right side detection sensor 353R does not change, it is detected that an overload has occurred.

In this case, the right disc cam 3 is rotated in a state where no overload occurs before the occurrence of overload is detected.
Since it takes a period of time to rotate 44R by a predetermined angle, there is a problem that overload detection is delayed.

In contrast, according to the present embodiment, when the right disc cam 5344R is overloaded and tilts in the axial direction (see FIG. 66(b)), the overload occurs. Occurrences can be detected. Therefore, occurrence of overload can be detected early. As a detection method, for example, between the support cylinder portion P1 and the engagement rib 344c, the engagement rib 34
The method by the notification device E1 fixed to 4c is exemplified (illustrated by imaginary lines in FIG. 66(a))
.

The notification device E1 is a detection device that outputs a signal when an object comes into contact with the input portion, and is arranged in pairs at positions where a straight line connecting the pair of holding arm portions A1 and the engagement rib 344c intersect. and the input portion protrudes toward the support cylinder portion P1. In the no-load state, the notification device E1 and the support cylinder portion P1 are separated from each other (see FIG. 65(b)), and in the overload state, the notification device E1 and the support cylinder portion P1 are formed in a contact relationship (see FIG. 65(b)). 66(b)). Accordingly, by determining the output from the notification device E1, it is possible to quickly determine whether or not the disk cam 5344 is overloaded.

Next, an operation device 6300 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 73. FIG.

In the first embodiment, the disk cam 344, the connecting pin 344d, and the engaging rib 344c are integrally formed. 344c and 344c are composed of separate members and configured to be relatively rotatable with each other. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted. First, differences in configuration from the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 and 70. FIG.

69 is an exploded front perspective view of the drive device 6340 in the sixth embodiment, and FIG. 70 is an exploded front perspective view of the disc member 6344L1, the ring member 6344L2 and the second transmission member 6348 of the left disc cam 6344L. is. Although the configuration of the right disc cam 6344R is also different from that of the first embodiment, the right disc cam 6344R is configured in a mirror image of the left disc cam 6344L. , and the description of the right disc cam 6344R is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 69, this embodiment differs from the first embodiment in the configuration of the left disc cam 6344L and the shape of the fixing member 6342a, and a second transmission device 6348 is added.

The left disc cam 6344L includes a circular rib 344b, a connecting pin 344d, and a connecting pin 344d, as in the first embodiment.
and a disc member 6344L1 provided with a detection hole 344eL and pivotally supported by the cylindrical member 343a.
and a ring member 6344L2 that is coaxially supported with the disc member 6344L1 and rotates relative to the disc member 6344L1.

The disc member 6344L1 has the central shaft portion 344a of the first embodiment arranged at the center of the disc portion, and is spaced radially outward from the outer peripheral portion of the circular rib 344b. An annular rib 6344f is provided protruding along.

The ring member 6344L2 has a ring-shaped body 6344g having the same outer diameter as the engaging rib 344c in the first embodiment and an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the circular rib 344b. A cover plate portion 6344h that is disposed at the axial end of the ring body 6344g and covers the ring-shaped opening of the ring body 6344g, and the thickness increases from the cover plate portion 6344h to the opposite side of the ring body 6344g. and receiving gear teeth 6344i formed on and disposed radially outwardly at the thickened portion thereof.

Since the inner diameter of the ring main body 6344g is formed to be larger than the outer diameter of the circular rib 344b, in the assembled state, the ring main body 6344g is fitted onto the circular rib 344b, thereby forming the central shaft portion 344a. A ring member 6344L2 is supported so as to be relatively rotatable around .

It should be noted that the end surface of the annular main body 6344g on the side of the disk member 6344L1 in the axial direction is the annular rib 63
44f. As a result, the annular rib 6344f is not formed, and the disc member 634
The contact area can be reduced and the frictional resistance can be reduced as compared with the case of contact with 4L1. Therefore, relative rotation between the disk member 6344L1 and the ring member 6344L2 can be smoothly performed.

The receiving gear tooth 6344i meshes with the speed reduction transmission gear 6348c of the second transmission device 6348 . Therefore, the rotation of the second transmission device 6348 causes the ring member 6344L2 to rotate. In addition, in this embodiment, the number of revolutions of the ring member 6344L2 is equal to that of the disk member 6344L1.
(While the ring member 6344L2 rotates three times, the disc member 63
The numbers of teeth of the second transmission gear 6348b, the reduction transmission gear 6348c, and the receiving gear teeth 6344i are set in a mode in which 44L1 rotates once).

The second transmission device 6348 is a device that is rotatably supported by the fixed member 6342a along with the transmission shaft rod 343. The auxiliary column member 6348 is arranged in a posture parallel to the cylindrical member 343a.
a, and a second gear fixed to its auxiliary column member 6348a and meshed with the transmission gear 343b.
The transmission gear 6348b is fixed to both ends of the auxiliary column member 6348 and the ring member 63
and a deceleration transmission gear 6348c that meshes with the receiving gear teeth 6344i of 44L2.

With reference to FIGS. 71 to 73, it will be described that the tilting device 310 is lifted in a plurality of ways after the tilting device 310 is unlocked from the rotating claw member 347 in the first state.

71, 72, and 73 are cross-sectional views of the manipulation device 6300 along the line corresponding to line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a). 71 shows a state similar to the state shown in FIG. 36, and FIG. 72 shows a posture in which the ring member 6344R2 has made one rotation in the backward rotation direction (arrow CW direction) from the state shown in FIG. , after rotating more than one rotation, the state in which the disk member 6344R1 rotates in the backward direction (the direction of the arrow CW) by 1/3 rotation. is illustrated. Moreover, in FIG. 73, FIG.
2, the ring member 6344L2 rotates in the forward rotation direction (arrow CCW direction) by a predetermined angle, and the tilting device 310 moves upward.

Here, when the ring member 6344R2 is rotated in the forward rotation direction (arrow CCW direction) from the state shown in FIG. It rises instantaneously and reaches the second state (see FIG. 34).

In the operation device 300 according to the first embodiment, when the fixing by the rotary claw member 347 is released, and the tilting device 310 immediately (without waiting for the rotation of the disk cam 344) moves up, the reaching position is the second state. It was limited to the position to be arranged (see FIG. 34).

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the disc member 6344R1 and the ring member 6344R2 rotate relative to each other. can change the relative relationship of the tilting device 31
The types of 0 arrival positions can be increased.

That is, when the fixation by the rotating claw member 347 is released from the state shown in FIG.
10 instantly rises due to the biasing force of the torsion spring 315, and reaches a state tilted downward by an angle D6 from the second state (see FIG. 73). In this manner, the tilting device 310 instantaneously (disc cam) is released from the state shown in FIG. without waiting for 344 rotation)
, and the position reached can be varied.

As a result, for example, when the tilting device 310 is configured to change the degree of expectation for the performance depending on the difference in the height to which the tilting device 310 is instantaneously raised from the first state, the attention of the tilting device 310 can be increased. can be improved. In this case, it is not limited whether the degree of expectation is increased when the tilting device 310 rises higher or when the tilting device 310 reaches a lower elevation position.

However, by keeping the ascending reaching position of the normal tilting device 310 low (see FIG. 73) and reaching the second state (see FIG. 34) when the degree of expectation reaches its maximum, the degree of expectation It is possible to associate the magnitude of the amount of displacement with which the player pushes and operates the tilting device 310, thereby making it easy for the player to understand the difference in expectations due to the displacement of the tilting device 310.例文帳に追加

In this case, it is possible to motivate the player to check to what position the tilting device 310 rises, so that the player does not have to watch the movement of the tilting device 310 until the operation timing of the tilting device 310. can be directed to Therefore, the tilting device 3
A game method in which the tilting device 310 is operated chaotically can be suppressed regardless of the 10 presentation modes.

Next, an operation device 7300 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 to 85. FIG.

In the first embodiment, the disk cam 344, the connecting pin 344d, and the engaging rib 344c are integrally formed. 7344R1 and the connecting pin 344d are arranged on separate members, and these separate members are configured to be able to form a fixed state in which they are fixed to each other and a sliding state in which they are relatively rotatable. In addition, the same reference numerals are assigned to the same parts as those of the above-described embodiments,
The explanation is omitted. First, with reference to FIGS. 74 and 75, the features of a disc cam 7344 used as a substitute for the disc cam 344 in the first embodiment will be described.

FIG. 74(a) is a front view of the right disc cam 7344R in the seventh embodiment, and FIG.
(b) is a rear view of the right disc cam 7344R, and FIG. 75(a) is the LX of FIG. 74(a)
FIG. 75(b) is a cross-sectional view of the right disc cam 7344R along line XVa-LXXVa;
74(a) is a partial side view of the right disc cam 7344R viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVb in FIG. 74(a); FIG. Since the right disk cam 7344L has a symmetrical shape that is a mirror copy of the right disk cam 7344R, a description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 74 and 75, the right disc cam 7344R has a disc member 7344R having a central shaft portion 344a through which a cylindrical member 343a (see FIG. 62) is inserted and fixed in the assembled state.
1 and a ring member 73 inserted along the axial direction from the opening side of the disk member 7344R1.
44R2, and an engaging member 7 having an engaging portion 7630 that is immovable in the radial direction of the disk member 7344R1 in the assembled state and that fits into the equally divided concave portion 7522 of the ring member 7344R2.
344R3 and .

The disc member 7344R1 is formed in a cup shape having a central shaft portion 344a at its center,
A detection hole 344eR is formed in a flange-like portion extending radially outward from the edge of the cup.
and the engagement rib 344c is partially omitted (the first projecting portion 344c1 and the first
It is a member configured with a shape in which the portion between the retracting portion 344c2 is omitted).

The disk member 7344R supports the surface of the ring-shaped plate portion 7510 of the ring member 7344R2 in the assembled state, and the first circular recessed portion 7 is a circular recessed portion centered on the central shaft portion 344a.
410, a second circular recessed portion 7420 which is a circular recessed portion smaller in diameter and axially deeper than the first circular recessed portion 7410, a first projecting portion 344c1, and a first retracting portion 344c2. and an L-shaped insertion hole 7430 formed in the radial direction between them, and in the vicinity of the insertion hole 7430, radially outward from the side surface on the back side of the second circular recessed portion 7420 (the outer peripheral side of the disk member 7344R1). and a fixing protrusion 7440 that is protrudingly provided.

The insertion hole 7430 extends from an intermediate position between the first projecting portion 344c1 and the first retracting portion 344c2.
A first elongated hole 7431, which is a rectangular elongated hole portion elongated along the axial direction of the disk member 7344R1 at a displaced position, and the end of the first elongated hole 7431 on the bottom side of the disk member 7344R1. A second long hole 74, which is a rectangular long hole portion extending along the circumferential direction of the disk member 7344R1
32 and the second long hole 74 with the first long hole 7431 side of the lower end of the second long hole 7432 as a fulcrum.
A return portion 7433 configured to protrude toward the 32 side is mainly provided.

The dimension in the width direction (transverse direction) of the second long hole 7432 is smaller than the dimension in the width direction (transverse direction) of the first long hole 7431, and the width of the engaging portion 7630 of the engaging member 7344R3 is direction(
short direction).

The return portion 7433 is configured to be elastically deformable with the lower end portion of the second long hole 7432 (lower end portion in FIG. 75(b)) as a fulcrum. Due to this elastic deformation, the return portion 7433 moves toward the second elongated hole 743 .
2 are formed to be movable outwardly.

The fixing protrusion 7440 is inserted into the coil spring CS1 of the engaging member 7344R3 and is configured with a protrusion height sufficient to fix the position of the coil spring SC1.

Next, referring to FIG. 76, the ring member 7344R2 will be described. Figure 76(a)
is a front view of the ring member 7344R2, and FIG. 76(b) is a ring member 7344R2
76(c) is a side view of the ring member 7344R2 as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVIc in FIG. 76(a).

As shown in Figures 76(a) to 76(c), the ring member 7344R2
A ring-shaped plate portion 7510 in which 44d is protruded, and the ring-shaped plate portion 7510
and a thick portion 7520 extending in the thickness direction of the ring-shaped plate portion 7510 along the inner peripheral surface of the ring-shaped plate portion 7510 and having a star-shaped through hole formed in the center thereof.

The ring-shaped plate portion 7510 has a plate thickness dimension equal to the recess depth of the first circular recessed portion 7410 , and an outer diameter dimension slightly smaller than the inner diameter dimension of the first circular recessed portion 7410 . be. As a result, in the assembled state, the ring member 7344R2 and the disk member 7344R1 can be aligned with each other while preventing excessive resistance to relative rotation.

The thick portion 7520 has a length extending from the side surface of the ring-shaped plate portion 7510 to a length that reaches (does not interfere with) the second elongated hole 7432 in the assembled state (see FIG. 75(a)). is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the second circular recess 7420 . As a result, in the assembled state, the engagement member 7344R3 can be moved in the radial direction (vertical direction in FIG. 75(a)) while preventing the relative rotation resistance between the ring member 7344R2 and the disk member 7344R1 from becoming excessive. can do.

The thick portion 7520 includes a deformed through-hole 7521 drilled along the axial direction, and recesses radially outward in the deformed through-hole 7521 at equal intervals in the circumferential direction (five equal intervals in this embodiment). It mainly includes an equally divided concave portion 7522 provided.

The deformed through-hole 7521 has an inner peripheral shape that is arranged radially outward of the engaging portion 7630 when the later-described engaging member 7344R3 is pushed radially inward of the disk member 7344R1. Configured.

FIG. 77(a) is a front view of the engaging member 7344R3, and FIG. 77(b) is a front view of FIG.
) is a side view of the engaging member 7344R3 as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVIIb.

As shown in FIGS. 77(a) and 77(b), the engaging member 7344R3, in the assembled state (see FIG. 74(b)), is radially outward of the first projecting portion 344c1 and the first retracting portion 344c2. The arc-shaped plate portion 7610 arranged on the side and the back side end portion of the arc-shaped plate portion 7610 (FIG. 77 (
b) The extension part 7620 extending in the thickness direction from the right end) and the engagement extending from the extension tip of the extension part 7620 along the front-rear direction (left-right direction in FIG. 77(b)) It mainly includes a portion 7630 and a coil spring CS1 formed of a coil spring disposed on the side of the arcuate plate portion 7610 facing the engaging portion 7630 .

The arcuate plate portion 7610 has a spring fixing projection 7611, which is a projection into which the coil spring CS1 is fitted, at a position facing the distal end portion of the engaging portion 7630 on the inner peripheral side surface.

The extension part 7620 is a part inserted through the second long hole 7432 in the assembled state,
When pushed inward in the radial direction against the elastic force of the coil spring CS1, the extension end has an extension length that protrudes inward from the inner peripheral surface of the ring member 7344R2.

The engaging portion 7630 has a dimension in the width direction that is slightly shorter than the dimension in the width direction of the first elongated hole 7431, and extends to a length that passes through the deformed through hole 7521 of the thick portion 7520 in the assembled state. (See FIG. 75(a)).

As will be described later, the engaging member 7344R3 has both a function as a member that receives a load from the release member 346 and is displaced, and a function that positions the ring member 7344R2 with respect to the disk member 7344R1. Therefore, the number of members can be reduced.

A method of assembling the right disk cam 7344R will be described with reference to FIG. Figure 78(a)
78(b) is a front view of the right disk cam 7344R, and FIG. 78(b) is an arrow LXX in FIG. 78(a).
78(c) is a front view of the right disc cam 7344R, and FIG. 78(d) is an arrow LXXVIII in FIG. 78(c).
FIG. 78(e) is a side view of the right disc cam 7344R as viewed in direction d, and FIG.
78(f) is a side view of the right disc cam 7344R as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVIIIf in FIG. 78(e).

78(a), 78(b), 78(c) and 78(d), the disk member 7
78(e) and 78(f), a ring member 7344R2 and an engaging member 7344R2 are inserted into the disk member 7344R1.
A state in which R3 is inserted is illustrated. To facilitate understanding, FIG. 78(b),
In FIGS. 78(d) and 78(f), illustration of the arcuate plate portion 7610 and the coil spring CS1 is omitted.

As a method of assembling the right disc cam 7344R, first, the engaging member 734 is inserted into the first elongated hole 7431.
Insert the engaging portion 7630 of 4R3 (see FIGS. 78(a) and 78(b)). As described above, the widthwise dimension of the second long hole 7432 is made shorter than the widthwise dimension of the engaging portion 7630, thereby preventing the engaging portion 7630 from being erroneously inserted into the second long hole 7432. can be prevented. Therefore, erroneous assembly can be prevented.

Next, along the extending direction of the second long hole 7432, in the depth direction of FIG. 78(d), the engaging portion 7
The engagement member 7344R3 is slid to the position where the positions of 630 and the fixing projection 7440 are aligned.

At this position after the movement, the fixing projection 7440 is inserted into the coil spring CS1, and the engaging member 7344R3 suppresses positional displacement of the disk member 7344R1 in the circumferential direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 78(d)) and engages. The member 7344R3 can be held immovable in the radial direction of the disk member 7344R1.

In addition, the engaging member 7344R3 is restricted from moving in the circumferential direction by the return portion 7433 . This will be explained. First, in a state where the engaging portion 7630 is inserted into the first elongated hole 7431, the return portion 7433 is driven outside the second elongated hole 7432 (see FIG. 78(b)). Next, when the engaging member 7344R3 is slid in the extending direction of the second elongated hole 7432, the contact between the engaging member 7344R3 and the return portion 7433 in the vertical direction is released, and the return portion 7433 is moved to the second position by elastic recovery force. It enters inside the long hole 7432 (see FIG. 78(d)).

When the tip of the return portion 7433 is in contact with the extension portion 7620 of the engaging member 7344R3 in the state of entering the second long hole 7432, the contact direction is the longitudinal direction of the return portion 7433 (the deformation resistance is large). direction) (see FIG. 78(d)), movement of the extended portion 7620 (movement to the right in FIG. 78(f)) is suppressed. Thereby, the engaging member 73
Since the movement of 44R3 in the circumferential direction can be restricted, it is possible to prevent the engaging member 7344R3 from being displaced during operation.

Once the engaging member 7344R3 is held on the disk member 7344R1, the engaging member 734
4R3 is pushed radially inward of the disc member 7344R1, and the disc member 734
A ring member 7344R2 is inserted from the opening side of 4R1. By releasing the load from the engaging member 7344R3, the elastic force of the coil spring CS1 causes the engaging portion 7630 to move along the radially outward direction D7. This movement causes the engaging portion 7630 to be housed in the equally divided recessed portion 7522 of the ring member 7344R2, thereby fixing the ring member 7344R2 to the disk member 7344R1.

Through the steps described above, the right disk cam 7344R can be easily assembled. note that,
The right disc cam 7344L has a symmetrical shape that mirrors the right disc cam 7344R, and can be assembled in the same process as the right disc cam 7344R.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 79 to 81, the operation of the engaging member 7344R3 when the disk cam 7344 rotates backward will be described. 79(a), 79(b), 80(a), 80(b) and 81 are partial cross-sectional views of the manipulation device 7300 taken along line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 79(a), 79(b), 80(a), 80(b) and 81, the releasing member 7346 and the rotating claw member 7347
and the disk cam 7344 are shown as the center, and the illustration of other unnecessary parts is omitted.

The rotary pawl member 7347 in this embodiment differs from that in the first embodiment in the length of the guide elongated hole 7347b. That is, as shown in FIG. 80(a), the protruding pin 346b is configured to be the end of movement at the raised position when the engaging rib 344c abuts from below and passes through.

The releasing member 7346 differs from the first embodiment in that the upper rear portion of the main body portion (the upper right portion in FIG. 80(a)) is obliquely shaved in order to minimize interference with the engaging rib 344c.

79(a), 79(b), 80(a), 80(b) and 81 show how the disk cam 7344 rotates backward (clockwise direction in Fig. 79(a)). are shown in chronological order.

In FIG. 79(a), the releasing member 7346 is engaged with the engaging member 7344R3 of the right disk cam 7344R.
79(b) shows a state where the right disk cam 7344R has further rotated from the state shown in FIG. 79(a), and FIG.
(a) shows a state in which the engaging member 7344R3 has been pushed into the disk member 7344R1 to the end of the push, and in M6-2(b), the disk member 73 is pushed from the state shown in FIG.
81, the right disc cam 7344R rotates in the backward rotation direction from the state shown in FIG.
The state after moving away from 346 is illustrated. 79(a), 79(b), and 80
80(a) and 80(b) show a state (small angle state) in which the releasing member 7346 has reached the end of the range in which the releasing member 7346 can relatively rotate with respect to the rotating claw member 7347. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 79(a), immediately after the engaging member 7344R3 and the releasing member 7346 start contacting each other, the elastic force of the coil spring CS1 is set larger than that of the second spring SP2. Therefore, the engaging member 7344R3 is not pushed inward,
The state of protruding outward is maintained.

As shown in FIG. 79(b), the releasing member 734 is provided on the outermost side surface of the engaging member 7344R3.
6 are in contact with each other, the releasing member 7346 and the rotary pawl member 7347 are in a small angle state.

In this embodiment, the release member 7346 rotates forward, and the rotation pawl member 7347 is pressed against the side surface of the insertion hole 321c of the lower frame member 320 to form a small angle state. The inner peripheral surface and the first projecting portion 344c1 of the engaging rib 344c and the first retracting portion 3
The disk cam 7344 is arranged in such a positional relationship that the outer peripheral surface of the engaging member 7344R3 rubs against the releasing member 346 while the engaging member 7344R3 is in contact with 44c2 (see FIG. 80(a)).

That is, as shown in FIG. 80(a), the release member 7346 rotates toward the small angle state due to the rotation of the disk cam 7344, and when the release member 7346 becomes unable to rotate further (small angle state), the release member From 7346 , a load is applied to the engaging member 7344 R3 to push the engaging member 7344 R3 radially inward of the disk cam 7344 .

As shown in FIG. 79(b), in a state where the engaging member 7344R3 protrudes radially outward, the backward rotation cannot be continued. , the engaging member 7344R3 is pushed radially inward (see FIG. 80(a)). In this pushed state, the engaging portion 7630 is arranged radially inward of the minimum diameter portion of the deformed through-hole 7521 .

Therefore, since the load in the circumferential direction is not transmitted to the ring member 7344R2 via the engaging portion 7630, as shown in FIG.
Even if 4R1 is rotated, the ring member 7344R2 does not follow the rotation and maintains its posture.

Due to this deviation in the amount of rotation, the engaging portion 7630 shifts from the originally arranged one equally divided recessed portion 75.
22 to another equally divided concave portion 7522, the phases of the disc member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 are relatively rotated by one concave portion (72 degrees).

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 81, when the right disk cam 7344R rotates further, the engaging member 73
Since the contact between 44R3 and the releasing member 7346 is released, the engaging member 7344R3 protrudes radially outward, and the engaging portion 7630 is housed in the equally divided recessed portion 7522 again. In this process, the equally divided concave portion 7522 in which the engaging portion 7630 is accommodated is shifted by one.

79(a) to FIG. 81, the arrangement of the engaging rib 344c and the arrangement of the connecting pin 344d arranged in the ring member 7344R2 are equally divided into recessed portions 7522. can be relatively displaced by the arrangement interval (72 degrees) of the recessed portions.

Referring to FIG. 82, when disc cam 7344 rotates in the forward rotation direction, engaging member 73
The operation of 44R3 will be described. Figure 82(a), Figure 82(b), Figure 83(a) and Figure 8
3(b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the manipulation device 7300 taken along line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 82, the releasing member 7346, the rotary pawl member 7347, and the disk cam 7344 are mainly illustrated, and the illustration of other unnecessary parts is omitted.

FIGS. 82(a) to 83(b) show how the disk cam 7344 rotates in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 82(a)) in chronological order. In FIG. 82(a), the release member 734
6 and the engaging member 7344R3 of the right disc cam 7344R are shown in FIG. FIG. 83(a) shows a state in which the disk cam 7344 has further rotated forward from the state shown in FIG. 82(b), and FIG. The state after separation from the engaging member 7344R is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 82(a) to 83(b), when the disk cam 7344 rotates in the forward rotation direction, the release member 7346 and the rotary pawl member 7347 rotate in the backward rotation direction (clockwise rotation in FIG. 82(a)). direction), there is no member that restricts the movement of the release member 7346 and the rotation claw member 7347, and the release member 7346 and the rotation claw member 734 are moved by the elastic force of the first spring SP1.
7 can only be loaded in the forward rolling direction.

Therefore, no load is generated to push the engaging member 7344R3 inward in the radial direction, and the engaging member 7344R3 does not contact the releasing member 7346 until it separates from the releasing member 7346.
R3 maintains a state of projecting radially outward. Therefore, when rotating the disk cam 7344 in the forward rotation direction, it is possible to prevent the disk member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 from rotating relative to each other.

By switching the rotation direction of the disc cam 7344 from these configurations, the disc member 7
It is possible to switch whether 344R1 and ring member 7344R2 rotate relative to each other. Therefore, in the direction of rotation in which relative rotation does not occur (see FIGS. 82 and 83), it is possible to repeatedly perform the effect of tilting the tilting device 310 with the same tilt width, as in the first embodiment. Unlike the first embodiment, the tilting width of the tilting device 310 can be changed in the rotation direction (see FIGS. 79, 80, and 81) that causes relative rotation.

Further, in the present embodiment, the direction of rotation of the disc member 7344R1 that relatively rotates the disc member 744R1 and the ring member 7344R2 is the direction opposite to the direction of releasing the fixation by the rotating claw member 7347 (the direction in which the fixation is not released). Since they match, the tilting device 310 is in the first state (FIG. 84).
) (the attitude is kept constant), the disk member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 can be relatively rotated.

As a result, the state in which the player does not pay attention (the state in which the tilting device 310 stops) is
It can be used as a state for changing the relative posture between the disk member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 in a place invisible to the player.

With reference to FIGS. 84 and 85, it will be described that, according to the present embodiment, a plurality of modes for raising the tilting device 310 from the first state can be formed. 84 and 85 are cross-sectional views of manipulation device 7300 taken along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 84, the tilting device 310 is immediately moved from the first state to the second state shown in FIG.
Ring member 7344R2 is shown fixed to disc member 7344R1 in a phase relationship that allows displacement (without rotating
A state in which the ring member 7344R2 has rotated relative to the disc member 7344R1 by one equally divided concave portion 7522 through the process described in FIG.
In both cases, a state in which the second protruding portion 344c3 is in contact with the engaging portion 346d is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 84 and 85, according to this embodiment, the rotation claw member 347 is removed from the first state.
By releasing the fixation by , it is possible to change the movement range in which the tilting device 310 moves immediately (without rotating the disk cam 7344R2).

That is, when the fixing is released by rotating the rotating claw member 347 from the state shown in FIG. 84, the tilting device 310 moves to the second state (the state where the tilting device 310 has moved to the uppermost end of the movement range).

On the other hand, when the fixing is released by rotating the rotating claw member 347 from the state shown in FIG. Moves until it is sunk below the 2nd state.

Therefore, by releasing the fixation by the rotating claw member 347, the tilting device 3 can be moved from the first state.
The position that 10 reaches immediately (without rotation of disk cam 7344) by the upward motion can be varied. As a result, it is possible to increase the types of presentations by the operation of the tilting device 310, and to improve the attention of the operation device 7300 as a presentation device.

Next, a pachinko machine 8010 according to the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 86 to 179. FIG.

In the first embodiment, the front side of the operation device 300 is exposed, but the pachinko machine 8010 in the eighth embodiment has a covering cover 370 that covers the lower portion of the operation device 300 from the front side. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

In the following description, with respect to the pachinko machine 8010 in the state shown in FIG. 86, the front side of the paper surface is the front (front) side, and the back side of the paper surface is the rear (rear) side. Also, with respect to the pachinko machine 8010 in the state shown in FIG. ) side. Furthermore, the arrows UD, LR, and FB in the figure (see, for example, FIG. 86) indicate the pachinko machine 8010.
The up-down direction, left-right direction, and front-rear direction are shown, respectively. Also, the definition of this direction is shown in FIG.
The same applies to the description referring to the drawings before 6.

First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 8010 will be described with reference to FIGS. 86 to 90. FIG. FIG. 86 is a front view of a pachinko machine 8010 in the eighth embodiment, and FIG.
FIG. 88 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 8010 showing a state in which the inner frame 12 is opened (deployed) with respect to the outer frame 11, and FIG. Inner frame 1
89 is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine 8010 showing a state (deployed) opened with respect to 2, FIG.
90 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 8010 showing a state in which the inner frame 12 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11 and the front frame 14 is opened (developed), and FIG. 90 is a pachinko machine with the front frame 14 removed. 8010 is a front view of machine 8010. FIG. Note that, in FIG. 90, the reference numerals for the internal configuration of the game board 13 are omitted for the sake of convenience.

The outer frame 11 is formed in the shape of a frame whose upper and lower sides are made of wooden plates and whose left and right sides are made of aluminum plates and whose four sides are fixed. The pachinko machine 8010 is installed in the game hall by fixing the outer frame 11 to the island equipment. In the pachinko machine 8010, the outer frame 11 is not an essential configuration, but has the same inner shape as the outer frame 11 or the outer frame 11, and the inner frame 12 support structure (hinge 18 etc.) and the locking structure of the outer frame 11. It is good also as a structure with which the member which has is equipped with the game hall.

As shown in FIG. 89, the front frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 12. In a front view, the left side is the rotation base end side (opening/closing base end side) and the right side is the rotation tip side. (opening/closing front end side) is rotatable forward.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 88, the back pack unit 94 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 12, with the left side as the base end of rotation (opening/closing base end) and the right side as viewed from the front. It is rotatable rearward as the moving tip side (opening/closing tip side).

As shown in FIG. 87, the inner frame 12 is provided with a locking mechanism 20RK at the tip of rotation thereof, and has a function of locking the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 to the outer frame 11 so that they cannot be opened. , the front frame 14 has a function of locking the inner frame 12 so that the front frame 14 cannot be opened. Each of these locked states is unlocked by inserting a special key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 of the locking mechanism 20RK exposed on the front of the pachinko machine 8010 as shown in FIG. By doing so, they are canceled respectively.

The front frame 14 is rotatably attached to the front side of the inner frame 12 . As shown in FIG. 86, front door mounting brackets 57 and 58 are provided on the rotation proximal end side of the front frame 14. The front door mounting brackets 57 and 58 (the bracket 57 is a cylindrical portion and the bracket 58 is a shaft) are provided as shown in FIG. The front frame 14 is rotatably supported with respect to the inner frame 12 by engaging the metal plate having a hole with the inner frame 12 .

Specifically, the front door mounting bracket 57 extends from the front end of the inner frame 12 to the front side at a position below the hinge 19 on the upper side of the inner frame 12, and the front door mounting bracket 57 extends from the tip to the back side. It is pivotally supported by a pivot plate portion 12e having a fitting recess 12e1 (see FIG. 126) provided with a fitting size. In addition, the front door mounting bracket 58 has a stepped columnar shape projecting upward from the hinge 19 on the lower side of the inner frame 12 (in a configuration in which columns with different diameters are connected vertically, the diameter of the upper column It is axially supported by being externally fitted on a support pin 19a having a shape with a small diameter.

As shown in FIG. 89, the front frame 14 is formed in a rectangular shape having substantially the same outer shape as the inner frame 12 . The front frame 14 includes a body frame 14a formed of a metal plate in a vertically long rectangular frame shape. Various members (electrical decoration parts 8029 to 8033, etc.) are provided on the front side and the back side of the body frame 14a.
The front frame 14 is configured by fastening and fixing the units (operation device 300, operation handle 51, etc.).

The front frame 14 is provided with a window portion 14c having an opening smaller than that of the glass unit 16 so that the outer peripheral edge of the glass unit 16 is not exposed when viewed from the front (see FIG. 86). This window part 1
4c is covered from the back side by the glass unit 16, so that almost the entire front side of the inner frame 12 is covered by the front frame 14 to which the glass unit 16 is attached. Therefore, game board 1
3 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89).

As shown in FIG. 89, the glass unit 16 includes a pair of front and rear transparent glasses 16a and 16b having an outer shape larger than the window portion 14c and having transparency, and a fixing frame (not shown) that integrates the transparent glasses 16a and 16b. and have. The fixed frame is a transparent glass 16a made of synthetic resin.
, 16b, and the outer peripheral edges of the transparent glasses 16a and 16b are adhered to a fixed frame, whereby the glass unit 16 is formed into an integrated multi-layered glass.

Although the glass unit 16 is made of transparent glass 16a and 16b and is transparent and colorless, it is not limited to this and may be made of synthetic resin and transparent and colorless. As long as the game area can be visually recognized through 16, it may be formed in a colored transparent form instead of a colorless transparent form.

Around the window portion 14c of the front frame 14, as shown in FIG. 86, a plurality of decorative portions 8029 to 8033 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided. These illumination parts 8029-8
At 033, lighting and blinking are performed according to changes in the game state such as when a big hit is made or when a predetermined ready-to-win state is reached. In addition, the illumination portion 8030 on the upper side of the window portion 14c incorporates a light emitting means that lights up when a predetermined error such as a shortage of balls to be paid out and a light emitting means that lights up during prize ball payout are built in.

In addition, speaker covers 27 (thin plate members made of punching metal) are provided on the upper right side and the upper left side of the window portion 14c to cover the speaker assemblies 450 that output sound effects according to the game state. . Below the window 14c, as shown in FIG. 86, an upper tray 17 and a lower tray 50 are arranged so as to protrude forward and are vertically arranged side by side.

The upper tray 17 has the function of temporarily storing the game balls paid out from the payout device 133 (see FIG. 87) and guiding them to the ball shooting unit 112a side while aligning them in a line. Also, the lower plate 50
has a function of storing surplus game balls in the upper tray 17 . A ball guide opening 53 that opens in the front-rear direction and guides the ball to the lower tray 50 is formed in the rear side surface of the lower tray 50 .

It should be noted that there is no need to separate the upper tray 17 and the lower tray 50 and provide a plurality of portions for storing game balls, and the lower tray 50 is eliminated and only the upper tray 17 is provided, and only one storage section is provided. Also good.

An operation device 300 manually operated by the players is provided on the front side of the upper tray 17 (game ball storage area). The operation device 300 is an operation device used when an effect corresponding to the player's operation is performed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 or the like. The operation device 300 may be provided at another location such as the periphery of the lower tray 50 in addition to the upper tray 17.
It may be provided at a plurality of locations, and may be a push button type switch as an operation method, or may be configured to enable information input by another operation method such as a touch sensor or a non-contact sensor.

A passage forming unit 140 is attached to the rear side of the front frame 14 as shown in FIG. The passage forming unit 140 is molded of synthetic resin, and includes a front door side upper tray passage portion 141 leading to the upper tray 17, a front door side lower tray passage portion 142 leading to the lower tray 50, and a foul ball passage portion 145 ( See FIG. 92).

A put-out ball receptacle 143 that protrudes rearward and is open upward is formed in the upper corner of the passage forming unit 140 (the corner on the rotation base end side of the front frame 14). A passage entrance of the front door side upper tray passage portion 141 and a passage entrance of the front door side lower tray passage portion 142 are formed by partitioning the passage 143 to the left and right by a partition wall 144 .

The foul ball passage portion 145 (see FIG. 92) forms a passage for discharging game balls that have not reached the game area among the game balls shot from the ball shooting unit 112a into the lower tray 50 as foul balls.

As shown in FIG. 89, the foul ball passage portion 145 is provided with a foul ball receiving portion 146 that opens upward. A foul ball received in the foul ball receiving portion 146 is discharged to the lower tray 50 after flowing down the internal passage of the foul ball passage portion 145 (see FIG. 92). It should be noted that the foul ball passage portion 145 may be connected to the upper plate 17 instead of the lower plate 50 so that the foul ball is discharged to the upper plate 17 .

The foul ball passage portion 145 merges with a ball removal passage 147 (see FIG. 92), which is a passage through which an unfired ball flowing down from the upper tray 17 to the lower tray 50 is guided by the player's ball removal operation. is formed as

On the rear side of the front frame 14, multi-function cover members 171 and 172, which are resin cover members fastened and fixed to the left and right corners of the upper portion, are attached to protrude toward the rear side. On the front side of the multifunctional cover members 171 and 172, a wiring connector for conducting electricity to the electrical decoration part 8030 and the speaker assembly 450, an internal substrate of the electrical decoration parts 8031 and 8032 along the front frame 14, and one end An electronic board to which the other end of the connector to which the parts are connected is connected is arranged, and the electronic board and the connector are covered with the multifunctional cover members 171 and 172 .

In the portion covered by the multifunctional cover members 171 and 172 of the front frame 14, there are a wiring groove 14h communicating toward the left and right electric decoration parts 8031 and 8032, and an electric decoration part 8031, 8031, 8031, 8031, 8031 and 8031, An electronic board 14i is formed (see FIG. 103) to which the wiring drawn out from the 8032 is connected, and the terminal of each wiring is pulled out rearward through the wiring through groove 14h and inserted into the electronic board 14i from the rear side. be

Therefore, when the multifunctional cover members 171 and 172 are removed (see FIG. 103), electricity is supplied to the illumination section 8030 and the speaker assembly 450 from the back side of the front frame 14 (from the front side of the paper surface of FIG. 89). A connector for conductive wiring and a connector whose one end is connected to the inner substrate of the electrical decoration parts 8031 and 8032 can be easily inserted into and removed from the electronic substrate 14i.

A pair of multifunctional cover members 171 attached to the front end side of the front frame 14 are arranged on the upper and lower sides of the inner frame 12 at the front end side of the rotation.
0 (see FIG. 126) and the upper device in the front and rear direction, and can abut against each other depending on the situation, the details of which will be described later.

On the back side of the front frame 14, a container-shaped member made of a resin material and having an open front side is disposed in contact with the front frame 14 at the lower corner and formed between the front frame 14 and the front frame 14. A long cover member 173 that accommodates the wiring is attached from the rear side. The long cover member 173 is configured such that its cross-sectional area decreases as it moves from the rotation distal end side of the front frame 14 to the rotation base end side, and the lower wall portion 173a that forms the lower side of the space for accommodating the wiring is An upper wall portion 173b that is arranged parallel to the lower side of the front frame 14, is arranged above the lower wall portion 173a so as to face the lower wall portion 173a, and constitutes the upper side of the space that accommodates the wiring. Consists of shapes.

The long cover member 173 is a wall portion that is arranged to contact the front frame 14 in the same manner as the lower wall portion 173a and the upper wall portion 173b. An upward extending wall portion 173c extending upward from the wall portion 173b is provided.

The upward extending wall portion 173c is curved so that the end portion of the side connected to the lower wall portion 173a and the upper wall portion 173b protrudes in a semicircular shape toward the rotation base end side of the front frame . , a space that can be bent in a semicircular shape in the opposite direction is secured from the upper end of the curved portion, and the movable base end side of the front frame 14 is opened at the upper end.

That is, the wiring accommodated in the upwardly extending wall portion 173c is gently curved in a wavy shape (a wavy shape corresponding to one cycle of a sine wave), and the front frame 14 is rotated from the upper end position of the upwardly extending wall portion 173c. Protruded proximally. Therefore, by bending the wiring at the curved portion of the wiring, it is possible to absorb the positional change of the wiring (see FIG. 96) that occurs when the front frame 14 is opened and closed. It is possible to reduce the risk of disconnection of the wiring.

On the rear side of the front frame 14, an upper extending wall portion 173c of the long cover member 173 (front frame 14
The part closest to the rotation base end of the front frame 14) and the vertically elongated plate portion on the rotation base end side of the front frame 14, which is part of the main body frame 14a. An inverted cup-shaped inverted cup portion 178 that opens downward is provided.

The reverse cup part 178 is, for example, a part that countermeasures against fraudulent acts such as illegally spreading the rotation base end side of the front frame 14, inserting a piano wire from near the hinge 18 on the lower side, and entering the game area. is. That is, even if the piano wire is inserted between the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 from near the hinge 18 on the lower side, the tip of the piano wire enters the inverted cup shape of the inverted cup portion 178 from below. Since the movement of the piano wire can be hindered, the piano wire can be prevented from reaching the game area.

In addition, since the reverse cup portion 178 and the long cover member 173 are made of a resin material,
It is possible to take measures against cheating by heating the tip of the piano wire. That is, when a piano wire whose tip is heated is inserted into the inverted cup portion 178 and pressed against the inverted cup portion 178, the heat generated by the inverted cup portion 178
can pass through the inverted cup portion 178 as well as the elongated cover member 173
will also melt. Then, when the piano wire whose tip is heated passes through the long cover member 173, the wiring housed in the front side of the long cover member 173 is burnt out. , can make fraud easier to detect.

In particular, in this embodiment, the wall portion 178a of the reverse cup portion 178 on the side of the long cover 173 has a shape that matches the shape of the long cover member 173 and abuts (approaches) to each other. In addition, since the normal line of the lower surface of the reverse cup portion 178 in the wall portion 178a is directed downward, when the piano wire enters the reverse cup portion 178 from below, it can be pressed against the lower surface of the wall portion 178a. Since the long cover 173 can also be melted with a high probability when the reverse cup portion 178 is melted, it is possible to easily detect fraudulent acts.

The wall portion 178a has the effect of guiding the piano wire in the horizontal direction when the tip of the piano wire is not heated. That is, when the piano wire inserted through the gap forced into the rotation base end of the front frame 14 reaches the upper bottom of the reverse cup portion 178, when the piano wire is inserted deeper, the tip of the piano wire reaches the wall portion. 178a.

Since the wall portion 178a has a shape that matches the curved portion of the upward extending wall portion 173c, when the piano wire is inserted further deeply, the tip of the piano wire moves along the wall portion 178a, and the tip of the piano wire moves along the wall portion 178a. It is guided below the lower wall portion 173a. Furthermore, even if the piano wire is inserted deeply, the tip of the piano wire advances through the space below the lower wall portion 173a toward the rotating tip side of the front frame 14 (
The piano wire can be prevented from reaching the game area.

In addition, it is possible to prevent the tip of the piano wire from reaching the game area while preventing the reaction force applied to the person who cheats via the piano wire from increasing. By arranging a detection device for detecting the entrance of the piano wire in the space below 173a, it is possible to detect the fraudulent activity before the fraudulent person escapes, making it easier to secure the fraudulent person. .

That is, even if the piano wire is guided to the space below the lower wall portion 173a, the person who commits the fraud cannot discern it, so he/she will believe that the piano wire is on the way to the game area. . Then, until the tip of the piano wire reaches the game area (for example, the window part 14c
(until the end of the piano wire can be seen from the front side through the front side) and the action of inserting the piano wire further deeply (without making the person who commits the fraud have suspicion that the insertion of the piano wire is not going well). . Therefore, it is possible to lengthen the time it takes for a person who commits a fraudulent act to realize that the fraudulent act has been discovered and to plan an escape.

The detection device may be a photocoupler device, a magnetic sensor, or a button device. Further, the arrangement of the detection device is not limited to the space below the lower wall portion 173a, and various arrangements are permitted. For example, it may be arranged on the locking mechanism 20RK or may be arranged on the rear side portion of the operation handle 51 . In the case where it is arranged on the operating handle 51, for example, a detection device conventionally arranged on the operating handle 51 may also be used to determine whether the piano wire has entered.

The ball shooting unit 112a is a device that is exposed on the front side when the front frame 14 is opened, as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 90, this ball shooting unit 112a has an electromagnetic shooting solenoid 701 provided as a shooting device, and a game ball shot by the shooting solenoid 701 is disposed between an inner rail 61 and an outer rail 62. A launch rail 730 that guides the playing ball so that it is launched towards the area between
and a ball feeding device 720.

The ball feeding device 720 feeds the game balls stored in the upper tray 17 (see FIG. 89) to the launch rail 730.
Serve one at a time. In this case, the supplied game ball is arranged on the projecting path of the plunger 702 provided as the hitting portion in the shooting solenoid 701 . By inputting an electrical signal to the firing solenoid 701 , the plunger 702 moves toward the firing rail 7 .
It moves toward the game ball on 30, and the game ball is launched toward the game area. The electric actuator of the ball shooting unit 112a is not limited to the shooting solenoid 701, and a shooting motor or the like may be used. A detailed configuration of the ball shooting unit 112a will be described later.

On the left side of the inner frame 12 and to the left of the launch rail 730, as shown in FIG. 90, a board 167 having a plurality of connectors CN1 to CN3 to which the dish passage forming member 160 and harnesses HN1 to HN3 are connected is arranged. is set. The inner frame 12 is provided with a through-hole extending in the front-rear direction through the portion where the disc passage forming member 160 is provided. Fixed.

The plate passage forming member 160 has a main body side upper plate passage portion 161 and a main body side lower plate passage portion 162, as shown in FIG. The main body side upper tray passage portion 161 and the main body side lower tray passage portion 162 are
One end is opened toward the back side so as to be able to communicate with a through hole penetrating the inner frame 12 in the front-rear direction, and the other end is opened downward. direction changes by 90 degrees (changes from the front-back direction to the up-down direction). In this configuration:
The ball dispensed from the dispensing device 133 passes through the through hole of the inner frame 12, enters the dish passage forming member 160 from one end, and is discharged from the other end.

When the front frame 14 is in the closed state, the front frame 1 is attached to the lower portion of the dish passage forming member 160 .
4 of the passage forming unit 140 (see FIG. 89) enters. A front door side upper tray passage portion 141 is arranged below the main body side upper tray passage portion 161 , and a front door side lower tray passage portion 142 is arranged below the main body side lower tray passage portion 162 .

As shown in FIG. 90, a main body side upper dish passage portion 161 is provided on the lower side of the dish passage forming member 160.
And a shutter 163 is provided to regulate the outflow of game balls from the main body side lower tray passage portion 162 . The shutter 163 has a blocking position that narrows the exit portions of both passages to block the outflow of game balls,
It is provided so as to be switchable between a permissible position and a permissible position for permitting outflow of game balls.

A biasing member (such as a coil spring) is attached to the inner frame 12 to bias the shutter 163 toward the blocking position. It is configured such that the shutter 163 stays at the blocking position by force. As a result, when the front frame 14 is opened in a state in which game balls are stored in the main body side upper tray passage portion 161 or the main body side lower tray passage portion 162, the inconvenience of the stored balls falling out is avoided. there is

On the other hand, when the front frame 14 is closed with respect to the inner frame 12, the shutter 163 is pressed against the biasing force by the outer peripheral portion of the put-out ball socket portion 143 provided in the passage forming unit 140 of the front frame 14. is pushed back to the permissible position. In this state, the main body side upper tray passage portion 161 and the front door side upper tray passage portion 141 communicate with each other, and the main body side lower tray passage portion 162 and the front door side lower tray passage portion 142 communicate with each other, so that the game balls flow down. Permissible.

The substrate 167 includes a connector CN1 to which the harness HN1 is connected, a connector CN2 to which the harness HN2 is connected, and a connector CN3 to which the harness HN3 is connected. The substrate 167 is formed by separate substrates for the portions where the connectors CN1 and CN2 are arranged and the portion where the connector CN3 is arranged. This is because connectors CN1 and CN2 are connected to main controller 1.
10, while the connector CN3 is used for transmission with the sound lamp control device 113. Since the object of transmission is different, the intention is to prevent malfunction by using a separate board. according to.

The portion below the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 and 92. FIG. FIG. 91 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame 14 in which constituent members disposed below the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 are shown exploded, and FIG. 92 is a window portion of the front frame 14. 14c is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 14 in which constituent members disposed below 14c are shown exploded. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 91 and 92, below the window portion 14c of the front frame 14, the body frame 14
On the front side of c, the operation device 300 is disposed on the front side of the upper tray 17, diagonally above the lower tray 50 to the right, and at the center of the front frame 14 in the left-right direction.
A covering cover 370 is arranged on the front side of the .

The covering cover 370 is a member that is fastened and fixed to the front frame 14 in a positional relationship that covers the lower portion of the operation device 300 from the front side, and has a lateral width that is approximately the same as the lateral width of the front frame 14 . That is, the left and right end portions of the covering cover 370 are arranged vertically below the electrical decoration portions 8031 and 8032, respectively.

The covering cover 370 is fastened and fixed to the front frame 14 by fastening portions 370a formed at least at the left and right ends thereof, and a main body curved portion 371 configured in a curved shape in which the left and right central portions protrude toward the front side; Extending downward from the lower edge of the main body curved portion 371 at an intermediate position between the left-right central portion and the left-right end portion of the portion 371 toward the side adjacent to each other in the width direction, they merge at the extending lower end and are viewed from front V. A drooping portion 372 configured in a letter shape, a body curved portion 371 and a drooping portion 3
A translucent portion 373, which is a plate-like member that closes the opening surrounded by 72, is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is fastened and fixed to at least one of the main body curved portion 371 and the hanging portion 372, and the main body curved portion 371. A left flat support portion 374 is formed as a flat surface on the upper surface of the left end portion of the main body curved portion 371, a right flat support portion 375 is formed as a flat surface on the upper surface of the right end portion of the main body curved portion 371, and the right flat support portion 375 is supported from the rear side. Mainly provided is a support groove 376 which is a recessed groove and whose recessed width is increased (tapered) toward the rear side.

The main body curved portion 371 has a rounded front edge, and a rear edge that matches the front edge of the upper plate 17. When the upper plate is assembled (see FIG. 86), the main body curved portion 371 has a curved shape. 1
The rear left edge 371a abuts on the front side edge of the operating device 300 in the front-rear direction, and the rear left edge 371a is connected to the rear left edge 371a and has a shape that matches the front side edge of the upper frame member 330 of the operation device 300. A rear middle edge portion 371b that abuts on the frame member 330 in the front-rear direction, and the rear middle edge portion 371b.
1b on the opposite side of the back left edge 371a, has a shape that matches the front side edge of the ball rental operation unit 40, and contacts the ball rental operation unit 40 in the front-rear direction in the assembled state; Mainly provide

The drooping portion 372 covers the operation device 300 from the front side together with the main body curved portion 371, and is a plate portion on which the operation handle 51 is supported.
0 (a shape in which the contact positions with the right corner cover 380 match each other) to prevent access to the operation device 300 from the front side. Note that the drooping portion 372 is positioned closer to the front side than the recessed portion 15a, which will be described later.
By screwing a screw inserted from below into the bottom plate on which 5a is formed, it is fastened and fixed to the bottom plate on which recessed portion 15a is formed.

The translucent portion 373 is a portion that allows the light emitted from the operation device 300 to pass through to the front side, and is a portion that can perform an effect with the light, and is formed in a curved shape that matches the shape of the lower frame member 320 of the operation device 300. It is arranged close to the lower frame member 320 in the assembled state (see FIG. 86).

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the LED device 341f is arranged to emit light at least upward (see FIG. 32). The arrangement of the LED devices is an arbitrary matter, and in this embodiment, the LED devices 341f are arranged to emit light at least upward and downward. Specifically, it irradiates light upward (arranged on the upper surface of the lighting support portion 341e).
Six LEDs emit light downward (arranged on the lower surface of the lighting support portion 341e)
are arranged respectively.

The light emitted from the LED device 341f that emits light downward passes through a different number of members depending on the state of the operation device 300. FIG. For example, when the tilting device 310 is in the first state (see FIG. 22), the light emitted from the LED that emits light downward passes through the tilting device 310 and the lower frame member 320, and then passes through the translucent portion 373. do. On the one hand, the tilting device 3
When 10 is in the second state (see FIG. 32), the light emitted from the LED that emits light downward does not pass through the tilting device 310, but passes through the lower frame member 320 and then through the translucent portion 373. .

Therefore, for example, when the amount of light emitted from an LED that emits light downward is kept constant, the amount of light visible through the translucent portion 373 is compared to when the tilting device 310 is in the first state. Thus, it is stronger when the tilting device 310 is in the second state. Therefore, while making it unnecessary to change the amount of light emitted from the LED that emits light downward (while reducing the control load by omitting the control for changing the amount of light), the tilting device 310 can be adjusted according to the state change of the tilting device 310 . An effect of changing the amount of light that can be visually recognized through the translucent portion 373 can be performed.

As another effect control method, it is also possible to perform control to change the amount of light emitted from an LED that emits light downward in accordance with a change in the state of the tilting device 310 . For example, as the tilting device 310 changes from the second state (see FIG. 32) to the first state (see FIG. 22), the amount of light is strongly changed (stepwise), while the tilting device 310 changes to the first state (see FIG. 22). The amount of light is controlled to be weaker (stepwise) in accordance with the change from the state 1 to the second state, so that the light visible through the translucent portion 373 accompanying the change in the state of the tilting device 310 is reduced. It is possible to reduce the degree of change in the amount of light in (can be eliminated depending on the setting).

The left flat support portion 374 abuts on the lower end of the electrical decoration portion 8031 at the top and bottom in the assembled state (FIG. 86). That is, when a downward load is applied to the electrical decoration portion 8031 and the electrical decoration portion 8031 is displaced downward, an upward reaction force is generated from the left plane support portion 374 toward the electrical decoration portion 8031. . As a result, it is possible to suppress downward positional displacement of the electrical decoration part 8031 .

The right plane support portion 375 abuts on the lower end of the electrical decoration portion 8032 at the top and bottom in the assembled state (FIG. 86). That is, when a downward load is applied to the electrical decoration portion 8032 and the electrical decoration portion 8032 is displaced downward, an upward reaction force is generated from the right side plane support portion 375 toward the electrical decoration portion 8032. . As a result, it is possible to suppress the downward displacement of the electrical decoration part 8032 .

Although the details will be described later, the electrical decoration portion 8031 and the electrical decoration portion 8032 are provided in the upper panel unit 40.
0, and when the upper panel unit 400 is displaced downward, the electrical decoration part 803
An upward reaction force is generated from 1,8032 toward the upper panel unit 400 . for that reason,
According to this embodiment, the upper panel unit 400 can be supported over a wide area by the electrical decoration part 8031, the electrical decoration part 8032, and the covering cover 370 fastened and fixed to the body frame 14a. The force required to prop up the can be widely distributed.

The support groove 376 functions as a receiving groove for receiving the lower end portion of the electrical decoration portion 8032 entering from the rear side. In the assembled state (see FIG. 86), the electrical decoration part 8032 is in a state of being inserted to the deepest part of the support groove 376. In this state, the front lower corner end of the electrical decoration part 8032 and the front side end of the right plane support part 375 are aligned. matches the position of

The details of the engagement relationship between the support groove 376 and the electrical decoration portion 8032 will be described later. By connecting the covering cover 370 and the electric decoration part 8032 by the engaging relationship described later, the covering cover 370 and the electric decoration part 8032 can be respectively fastened and fixed to the main body frame 14a to form an assembled state. A separate fixing part that fastens the covering cover 370 and the electrical decoration part 8032 to each other can be eliminated.

Below the window portion 14c of the front frame 14, a resin plate-like plate member 14d is attached to the main body frame 14a (or another member (upper plate 17 The passage forming unit 140 is fastened and fixed to the body frame 14a on the back side of the plate member 14d (or on the front side of the body frame 14a) on the back side of the plate member 14d. The body frame 14a is fastened and fixed to another member (such as a member that constitutes the upper plate 17), and the metal plate-like sheet metal member 150 covers the passage forming unit 140 from the back side. It is fastened and fixed to the member 14d (or another member arranged on the front side of the main body frame 14a (a member constituting the upper plate 17, etc.) sandwiches the main body frame 14a).

Even if the passage forming unit 140 made of synthetic resin is penetrated through the sheet metal member 150 (for example, a wire or piano wire whose tip is heated is pressed and melted), the front frame is It functions as an entry prevention member that prevents entry from the front side of 14 to the inner frame 12 side. That is, even if a wire or the like whose tip is heated is pressed against the sheet metal member 150 made of metal, it will not penetrate, and the wire can be prevented from entering the rear side of the front frame 14 . .

The sheet metal member 150 is formed so as to cover the lower end of the front door side lower tray passage portion 142 and the lower end portion of the foul ball passage portion 145 on the left side in the front view, and the opened front side is the passage forming unit. It mainly includes a fitting box portion 151 to be fitted to 140 and a flat plate-like plate portion 152 covering the back surface of the lower side portions of the foul ball passage portion 145 and the ball extraction passage 147 .

Since the fitting box portion 151 covers the lower end portion of the front door side lower tray passage portion 142 and the lower end portion of the foul ball passage portion 145, the fitting box portion 151 covers the lower end portion of the front door side lower tray passage portion 142 and the foul ball passage portion. 145 is not limited to the case where the passage forming unit 140 is penetrated in the front-rear direction,
Even if the wire is penetrated in the horizontal direction or the vertical direction,
Entry beyond 40 can be prevented.

Since the plate-like portion 152 covers the rear surface of the foul ball passage portion 145 and the ball removal passage 147, when a wire exemplified by the passage forming unit 140 is pressed against the right side of the lower plate 50 to form a through hole, Even so, it is possible to prevent an illegal member from entering the rear side of the passage forming unit 140 . In a case where such a situation occurs, for example, the operation device 300 is removed, and the exemplified wire is pressed against a portion (a portion obliquely upward to the rear of the recessed portion 15a) where the front and back thickness is reduced accordingly. A case is exemplified in which a through-hole is opened by being pressed, and the exemplified wire enters.

Further, the front frame 14 is provided with an operating portion back member 155 fastened from the back side to the left end of the passage forming unit 140, and the operating portion back member 155 is arranged with the cylinder lock 20 in the assembled state (see FIG. 86). It is fastened and fixed to the body frame 14a at the upper and lower positions of the position where it is located.

As shown in FIGS. 89 and 91, the operation section back member 155 is a member configured to increase the dimension in the front-rear direction by ribs formed mainly from the outer edge of a plate member elongated in the left-right direction in the front-rear direction. There is a through hole 156 drilled in the plate member so that the cylinder lock 20 can pass through, and the through hole 1
56, and a pair of insertion holes 157 through which screws for fastening and fixing the operation unit back member 155 to the body frame 14a are inserted; A pair of connecting insertion holes 158 are drilled side by side, and an opening/closing regulating portion 159 protruding rearward from the through hole 156 on the rotation base end side.

The connection insertion hole 158 is formed in the connection portion 1 formed at the left end portion of the passage forming unit 140.
48 in the longitudinal direction. Here, the connection portion 148 of the passage forming unit 140 is positioned so as to coincide with the upper connection insertion hole 158 in the front-rear direction.
The projecting portion 148a, which has a columnar shape with an inner diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of 58 and protrudes toward the rear side, is inserted into the connecting insertion hole 158 at a position where it coincides with the lower connecting insertion hole 158 in the front-rear direction. and a threaded portion 148b drilled as a hole into which a screw can be screwed.

With this configuration, when the operating portion back member 155 is placed on the back side of the passage forming unit 140 and assembled, the passage forming unit 140 and the operating portion back surface are connected by passing the projecting portion 148a through the connecting insertion hole 158 on the upper side. After aligning with the member 155, the operation unit back surface member 1 can be easily assembled by inserting a screw through the lower coupling insertion hole 158 and screwing it into the screw-in portion 148b.
55 can be fastened to the passage forming unit 140 .

An L-shaped wall portion 158a is formed by forming the left edge of the left end portion of the operation portion back member 155, in which the connecting insertion hole 158 is formed, and the lower edge at right angles. On the other hand, the connecting portion 148 of the passage forming unit 140 includes an extending wall portion 148c extending from the plate forming the skeleton of the passage forming unit 140 to the rear side so as to partition the area. 148c is
In the assembled state (see FIG. 89), it is formed in an L-shape that can face up, down, left, and right with the wall portion 158a.

Therefore, when assembling the operation section back member 155 to the passage forming unit 140, the projection 148a is passed through the connection insertion hole 158, and the wall 158a is positioned vertically with respect to the extension wall 148c. The position and posture of the operation section back member 155 with respect to the passage forming unit 140 can be adjusted quickly and easily by the lateral contact.

The opening/closing restricting portion 159 is a portion that faces front and rear of the board support device 600 (see FIG. 90) disposed on the inner frame 12 in the assembled state (see FIG. 86), and will be described later in detail.
Under predetermined conditions, the front frame 1 is brought into contact with the board support device 600 or the game board 13
4 is prevented from being closed.

In the present embodiment, the opening/closing restricting portion 159 is a portion extending toward the back side of the operation portion back member 155 and made of synthetic resin. The shape is U-shaped. Therefore, it is more difficult to bend than when it is formed in a flat plate shape with the same plate thickness, and compared to the case where it is extended in a block shape that fills the U-shaped opening, the required amount of material is required while ensuring rigidity. can be reduced. Therefore, the plate thickness is the same as the thickness of the other portions of the operation unit back member 155 (for example, since the strength can be relied on the main body frame 14a, there is no problem even if the strength is low, and the portion is formed as thin as possible). The strength of the open/close restricting portion 159 can be ensured while improving moldability by forming the opening/closing restricting portion 159 with a plate thickness).

Note that the cross-sectional shape of the opening/closing restricting portion 159 is not limited to the U-shape as long as it is a shape that ensures rigidity and maintains the shape. For example, instead of a flat cross section, a curved (wavy) cross section, a stepped cross section, a rectangular wave cross section, or a cylindrical cross section may be used.

In addition, the opening/closing restricting portion 159 is not formed as a part of the operation portion rear surface member 155, but is formed as part of the body frame 14.
It may be composed of a metal part that is bent and extended from a to the back side, or that is extended to the back side from another member that is fixed to the back side of the body frame 14a. However, as in this embodiment,
Forming the open/close restricting portion 159 from a synthetic resin prevents the board support device 600 from being chipped or dented when it comes into contact with the board support device 600 (see FIG. 90) formed from a metal member. can do. As a result, a worker who changes the state of the board surface supporting device 600 to attach and detach the game board 13 can be less likely to be injured by touching the cracks or dents formed in the board surface supporting device 600.例文帳に追加

Here, since the opening/closing regulating portion 159 is arranged closer to the rotation proximal end side of the front frame 14 than the through hole 156 in which the cylinder lock 20 is arranged, the cylinder lock arranged further toward the rotation distal end side is arranged. A long interval can be secured between the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 at 20 points. Therefore, in a state in which the opening/closing regulating portion 159 is in contact with the board support device 600 or the game board 13, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the cylinder lock 20 and the locking mechanism 20RK arranged at the leading end of the rotation are locked by mistake. can.

As a route through which a foreign object such as a wire enters, for example, a route passing through a gap in the operation device 300 is assumed. On the other hand, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 91 and 92, the operation device 300 is configured to be entirely separable from the main body frame 14a toward the front side. In other words, since the structure of the operation device 300 is completed on the front side of the main body frame 14a, it is difficult to enter the rear surface of the main body frame 14a even if the operation device 300 is traced through the gap.

A harness HN3 (see FIG. 96) for supplying electric power to the operation device 300 has a wiring through hole 14 drilled in the front-rear direction of the body frame 14a at the right end position of the long cover member 173.
a1 (see FIG. 103), the harness HN3 is attached to the protective cover device 350 (see FIG. 103).
57) is connected to the operation device 300 via a connector (not shown) fixed to the lower corner of the right outer peripheral wall.

As a result, even if a foreign object such as a wire enters the inside of the operation device 300 through the gap of the operation device 300, the wire or the like can reach the harness HN3 connected to the outside of the operation device 300 having a substantially case shape. Therefore, foreign matter such as wires can be easily prevented from entering the back side of the body frame 14a.

It should be noted that the foreign matter entering the operation device 300 may be liquid. For example, a player who feels bad about the result of a game may pour drinking water or the like on the pachinko machine 10 . that time,
A conveniently located operating device 300 is likely to fall prey to being splashed with drinking water.
3) may fail.

Furthermore, if a liquid such as drinking water enters behind the body frame 14a, it may cause a failure of the electronic substrate or the like. Since the operation device 300 is separably independent, it is possible to prevent liquid such as drinking water poured on the operation device 300 from entering the back side of the body frame 14a.

A concave portion 15a is formed in a T-shape when viewed from above on the upper surface of the bottom plate of the lower tray unit 15 (the surface facing the operation device 300). The recessed portion 15a is configured as a deep recessed portion.
It is not a perfect case shape, and gaps are formed here and there (for example, see FIG. 13,
The transmission hole 321a and the opening 325 correspond to the clearance gap).
The concave portion 15 a serves to temporarily store the liquid that drops downward from the operation device 300 .

In the operation device 300, the drive motor 342 is arranged closer to the rear side of the opening 325, so the tilting device 310 functions as an umbrella (see FIGS. 13 and 17(b)) and is connected to wiring. Since the portion is arranged below the horizontal plate portion arranged between the motor housing portion 341e and the lighting support portion 341e (see FIGS. 17(b) and 18), liquid such as drinking water does not reach the drive motor 3.
42 can be directly applied to prevent failure.

Also, since the voice coil motor 352 communicates in the vertical direction through the transmission hole 321a, it may be exposed to liquid such as drinking water. The liquid only adheres to the vibrating surface (upper surface), and the adhered liquid flows down the front side due to the inclination of the vibrating surface itself of the voice coil motor 352 (see FIGS. 13 and 22). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the voice coil motor 352 from breaking down.

With the above-described configuration, even if a liquid such as drinking water is splashed on the player on his way home, the next player can continue playing normally by simply wiping off the touched portion of the upper surface of the operation device 300. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the maintenance time of the operation device 300 from putting pressure on the business hours.

Below the window portion 14c of the front frame 14, a binding movable member 180 is fastened and fixed to the plate member 14d on the rotation base end side of the front frame 14 on the back side of the main body frame 14a. Next, the binding movable member 180 will be described with reference to FIGS. 93 to 96. FIG. 93 to 9
6 shows a state in which the passage forming unit 140 and the sheet metal member 150 are removed from the front frame 14 as in FIG.

93(a) is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame 14, and FIG. 93(b) is a front perspective view of the movable binding member 180 in which the released state and the fixed state of the movable binding member 180 are shown side by side. be. In FIG. 93(b), the movable binding member 180 in the released state is shown on the upper side, and the movable binding member 180 in the fixed state is shown on the lower side.

The binding movable member 180 is fixed in the assembled state (see FIG. 86) and is a member that binds the harnesses HN1 to HN3 extended leftward from the upper end of the upwardly extending wall portion 173c.

In this embodiment, the harness HN1 connected to the operating handle 51 (see FIG. 92)
and the harness HN2 connected to the ball rental operating portion 40 (see FIG. 92) are each guided to the binding movable member 180 without a relay board and bound to the binding movable member 180, respectively.

On the other hand, each of the illumination parts 8029 to 8033, the operation device 300 or the frame button 22 (FIG. 86
) are once connected (gathered) to a relay board disposed in the space on the front side of the long cover member 173, and a bundle of extension harnesses HN is connected from the relay board.
3 moves to the binding movable member 180, and the extension harness HN3 is bound to the binding movable member 180 (see FIG. 96).

The binding movable member 180 is a member formed of a synthetic resin material, and is rotated by a main body portion 181 fastened and fixed to the plate member 14d from the back side and a screw fastened and fixed to the main body portion 181 in the vertical direction. A movable arm portion 182 that is pivotally supported, and one side surface of the movable arm portion 182 along the lower edge of the movable arm portion 182 (the side facing the main body portion 181 in FIG. 93(a)). A pair of highly flexible binding arms 183 extending from the opposite side) and a movable arm 182
93(a) on the side opposite to the main body 181) and is capable of locking the binding arm 183. A pair of locking portions 184
and a temporary fixing portion 185 extending downward from the lower edge of the movable arm portion 182 at a position (intermediate position) between the pair of binding arm portions 183 and having an opening.

In the binding movable member 180 , the binding arm portion 183 is formed with high flexibility, while the other portion is formed at least with lower flexibility (higher rigidity) than the binding arm portion 183 .

The body portion 181 includes a portion to be fixed 181a having a substantially horseshoe-shaped cross section and a through-hole in the center through which a screw is passed, and projecting from the left and right lower corners of the portion to be fixed 181a toward the plate member 14d. A pair of detent protrusions 181b provided, and an intermediate stop portion extending downward from the lower edge of the front side end portion of the fixed portion 181a, and the extending tip thereof curving close to the plate member 14d side. 181c, and a plate-shaped support plate portion 181d extending leftward along the lower edge of the fixed portion 181a.
(See FIG. 96(a)) and a cylindrical fastening portion which is a portion disposed on the upper portion of the support plate portion 181d and is formed of a cylindrical shape having an outer diameter smaller than the diameter of the screw head to be fastened. 181e;
Mainly provide

The plate member 14d includes a hole group 14d1 at a position where the binding movable member 180 is fixed, which is composed of through holes arranged in the same arrangement as the fixed portion 181a and the pair of anti-rotation portions 181b.

When the screws passing through the fixed portion 181a are fastened and fixed to the corresponding fastening holes of the hole group 14d1 of the plate member 14d, the pair of anti-rotation protrusions 181b are fitted into the corresponding fitting holes of the hole group 14d1. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the binding movable member 180 from rotating around the screw penetrating the fixed portion 181a at the time of fastening, and the plate member 14 of the binding movable member 180 at the time of fixing.
d can be determined.

The intermediate retaining portion 181c maintains the harnesses HN1 to HN3 between them and the plate member 14d.
In the present embodiment, by narrowing the distance between the extension end (lower end) and the plate member 14d, the harnesses HN1 to HN3 can be prevented from slipping down, and the center of the harnesses can be positioned on the plate member 14d side. The area (the plate member 14d and the intermediate stopper portion 18) that accommodates the harnesses HN1 to HN3 while suppressing stress concentration due to deformation due to the shape that is curved along the arranged circle.
1c) can be ensured to have a large cross-sectional area.

The support plate portion 181d forms a plane that guides the rotation of the movable arm portion 182, and the cylindrical fastening portion 181
The outer peripheral surface of e is fitted in the proximal end portion of the movable arm portion 182 to pivotally support the movable arm portion 182 (see FIG. 96).

The movable arm portion 182 has a proximal end that is smoothly connected to a plane OS1 that is offset from the axial support position of the cylindrical fastening portion 181e, with a portion that is externally and pivotally supported by the cylindrical fastening portion 181e as a proximal end. 182a and an elongated thin plate portion 182b provided continuously on the opposite side of the base end portion 182a from the pivotal support position.

The base end portion 182a includes the left and right ends (the portion where the straight line connecting to the axis is parallel to the plane OS1) and the back side end (the portion closest to the plane OS1) of the outer circumference of the cylindrical portion that is fitted onto the cylindrical fastening portion 181e. Extending from each of the adjacent portions are rotational sidewalls. Each side wall is formed in an arc shape in which the centers of curvature radii are arranged on the same side. equal to the thickness.

Therefore, the base end portion 182a maintains higher rigidity than the thin plate portion 182b. In this embodiment, the base end portion 182a is designed with a design concept (high rigidity) that does not intend elastic deformation, and the thin plate portion 182b is designed with a design concept (low rigidity) that intends elastic deformation depending on the situation. .

Since a pair of binding arm portions 183 are configured to have the same shape, one will be described and the description of the other will be omitted. The binding arm portion 183 has a small width portion 183a formed in the vicinity of the tip portion with a width equivalent to the width of the root, and a large width portion 183b formed wider than the small width portion 183a alternately at regular intervals. It is formed. In the fixed state, the binding arm portion 183 is inserted from below into the through hole formed between the locking portion 184 and the movable arm portion 182 (see FIG. 93(b)).

The large width portion 183b of the binding arm portion 183 is formed to be slightly thicker than the small width portion 183a. In this embodiment, a space can be secured on the inner peripheral side of the binding arm portion 183 by forming the thickened portion on the outer peripheral side in the fixed state (see the lower side of FIG. 93(b)).

The locking portion 184 includes a large opening portion 184a formed on the movable arm portion 182 side and the large opening portion 184a.
A small opening 184b formed on the opposite side of the movable arm 182 across the 84a and having an opening width smaller than that of the large opening 184a is mainly provided (see FIG. 96).

The large opening 184a is sized to allow the binding arm 183 to pass through regardless of the position of the binding arm 183, and the small opening 184b allows the small width portion 183a of the binding arm 183 to pass through. , and the large-width portion 183b are of such a size that they cannot be passed through (locked).

According to this embodiment, when the binding arm portion 183 is to be moved relative to the locking portion 184, it is arranged on the side of the large opening 184a (the side where the inner area surrounded by the binding arm portion 183 becomes smaller). ,
When the binding arm portion 183 is to be locked to the locking portion 184, the size (tightness) of the inner area surrounded by the binding arm portion 183 can be easily adjusted by arranging it on the side of the small opening 184b. can do.

The temporary fixing portion 185 has a through hole through which a binding band can be inserted in the central portion thereof. Even if the binding arm portion 183 breaks due to long-term use and the harnesses HN1 to HN3 cannot be bound, a commercially available binding band can be inserted through the through hole of the temporary fixing portion 185 and fixed. , harnesses HN1 to HN3 can be bundled.

A movable range of the binding movable member 180 will be described. FIG. 94(a) is a partial rear view of the front frame 14 showing the lower left corner of the front frame 14, and FIG. 94(b) is XCIVb of FIG. 94(a).
95(a) is a partial rear view of the front frame 14 showing the lower left corner of the front frame 14, and FIG. XCV of a)
2 is a partial cross-sectional view of the front frame 14 along line b-XCVb. FIG.

94(a) and 94(b) show a state in which the movable arm 182 is closest to the plate member 14d (one limit state of the movable range), and FIGS. 95(a) and 95 ( In b)
A state in which the movable arm portion 182 rotates away from the plate member 14d and abuts on the vertically long metal portion constituting the left portion of the body frame 14a (the other limit state of the movable range) is illustrated. .

As shown in FIGS. 94 and 95, the movable arm portion 182 has an axis parallel to the rotation axis of the front frame 14 (
rotatable about 160 degrees around a vertical axis). Considering the situation in which the pachinko machines 8010 are installed in the amusement arcade (a situation in which the pachinko machines 8010 are arranged side by side and are rotated by 90 degrees or more, there is a risk of collision with the adjacent pachinko machine 8010), this angle is normally used. It is sufficiently larger than the rotation angle required for the front frame 14 when opening and closing.

Therefore, during normal use, the movable arm 182 cannot be elastically deformed and cannot be rotated relative to the main body 181 (the range between the state shown in FIG. 94 and the state shown in FIG. 95). Since there is no movable arm portion 182, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the movable arm portion 182 will be deteriorated and broken due to elastic deformation.

Next, the manner in which the harnesses HN1 to HN3 are supported will be described. Harness HN1-HN
3 is supported by the binding movable member 180 so that the arrangement is defined, for example, it is possible to prevent accidental pinching between the outer frame 14 and the inner frame 12 and disconnection.

FIG. 96(a) is a schematic rear view of the movable binding member 180 and the harnesses HN1 to HN3, and FIG. 96(b) is a schematic top view of FIG. 96(a). FIG. 96(c) is a schematic rear view of the movable binding member 180 and the harnesses HN1 to HN3, and FIG. 96(d) is a schematic top view of FIG. 96(c).

96(a) and 96(b) show one limit state of the binding movable member 180, and FIGS. 96(c) and 96(d) show the other limit state of the binding movable member 180. is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 96, the intermediate stop portion 181c is located at a position moved from the opening opened leftward in the upper end portion of the upward extending wall portion 173c to the rotation base end side of the front frame 14. be. That is, since the intermediate stop portion 181c and the opening opened toward the left at the upper end portion of the upwardly extending wall portion 173c are on the same horizontal line, the upper end portion of the upwardly extending wall portion 173c is extended from the upwardly extending wall portion 173c. The harnesses HN1 to HN3 can be extended substantially horizontally and supported by the intermediate stop portion 181c.

Since the harnesses HN1 to HN3 are supported by the intermediate stop portion 181c near the cylindrical fastening portion 181e, which is the pivotal support position of the movable arm portion 182, the upward extending wall portion 173c sandwiching the intermediate stop portion 181c is formed.
The shape of the harnesses HN1 to HN3 on the opposite side to the movable arm portion 18 of the binding movable member 180
2 along the shape. As a result, FIGS. 96(b) and 96(d)
), the bending portions of the harnesses HN1 to HN3 are curved, and extreme bending deformation can be prevented.

Further, by arranging the locking portion 184 on the side close to the plate member 14d, the binding arm portion 18
3 can be arranged on the opposite side of the plate member 14d with the movable arm portion 182 interposed therebetween. Therefore, especially when the front frame 14 is closed with respect to the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 96(b)), the harnesses HN1 to HN3 can be curved with a sufficiently large radius of curvature. As a result, disconnection due to bending of the harnesses HN1 to HN3 can be prevented.

97(a) and 97(b) schematically show the front frame 14, the inner frame 12, the movable binding member 180 and the harnesses HN1 to HN3, which schematically illustrate the movable binding member 180 and the harnesses HN1 to HN3.
3 is a schematic top view of FIG. 97(a) shows one limit state of the movable binding member 180, and FIG. 97(b) shows the other limit state of the movable binding member 180. As shown in FIG.

97(a) and 97(b), the rotation center point P57 indicating the central axis position of the front door mounting bracket 57 (see FIG. 86) is illustrated, and the front frame 14 and inner frame 12 are schematically shown. The imaginary lines schematically show the members fixed to the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 and pivotally supported at the rotation center point P57, respectively. The rotation center point P57 is shown as the rotation axis of the front frame 14. Similarly to the front frame 14, the binding movable member 180 fixed to the front frame 14 also rotates about the rotation center point P57 with respect to the inner frame 12. Rotate.

From one limit state shown in FIG. 97(a) to the other limit state shown in FIG. 97(b),
The base end portion 182a of the movable arm portion 182 rotates about the cylindrical fastening portion 181e, thereby moving the inner frame 12.
and the opening and closing of the front frame 14, a large load is not applied to the thin plate portion 182b, and deformation of the thin plate portion 182b can be suppressed, thereby improving durability (see FIG. 9).
6(b), see also FIG. 96(d)).

As shown in FIGS. 97(a) and 97(b), the harnesses HN1 to HN3 supported by the binding movable member 180 are connected to the front frame 14 regardless of whether the front frame 14 is opened or closed with respect to the inner frame 12.
The vertically elongated metal portion (in FIG. 96(d),
The base end 182a of the movable arm 182 is routed along a path that passes through the vicinity of the contact. That is, by forcibly detouring the harnesses HN1 to HN3, the harness HN
1 to HN3 can be prevented from deviating to the front end of the front frame 14 when turning.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the harnesses HN1 to HN3 from interfering with the work performed by the operator when the front frame 14 is opened and closed, and the harness H when the front frame 14 is closed.
It is possible to improve the fit of N1 to HN3 (set by bending only once on the base end side of rotation) (see FIGS. 96(b) and 97(a)).

In this embodiment, the intermediate stop portion 181c is arranged vertically above the reverse cup portion 178 regardless of the position of the movable arm portion 182 (see FIG. 91). The harnesses HN1 to HN3 are supported by the intermediate stop portion 181c arranged vertically above the reverse cup portion 178. For example, by heating the tip of a wire or piano wire to a high temperature, the reverse cup portion 178 is melted and penetrated. , it is possible to take countermeasures against a fraudulent act of inserting a wire between the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12. - 特許庁

That is, when the wire is pressed against the lower surface of the reverse cup portion 178, melted, penetrates the wire, and advances toward the game area, when the wire advances vertically upward from the upper bottom portion of the reverse cup portion 178, the temperature rises. A harness H in which the tip of the heated wire is supported by the intermediate stopper 181c
It is pressed against N1 to HN3. As a result, the harnesses HN1 to HN3 are burnt out and rendered non-conductive.

By controlling to output an error signal and sound an alarm (to display an error screen) when the continuity of the harnesses HN1 to HN3 is interrupted, fraud can be quickly discovered. . Therefore, it is possible to prevent a fraudulent person from gaining fraudulent profits.

More specifically, since the harness HN1 is connected to the operating handle 51 (see FIG. 92) as described above, if the harness HN1 is burned out, the ball can be shot even by rotating the operating handle 51. Gone. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the period until the fraudulent act is discovered after the fraudulent act is committed (the fraudulent act can be detected early).

In this case, after inserting a wire into the game area and tampering with the game area (for example, after bending a nail to make it easier to illegally win a prize), the ball is inserted into the first prize opening 64 (see FIG. 2) or the like. Since it is possible to make it impossible to shoot balls to a person who commits a fraudulent act of illegally obtaining a prize ball by winning a prize, it is possible to prevent an illegal profit from being given. That is, it is possible to make it impossible to commit a specific fraudulent act.

Also, since the harness HN2 is connected to the ball lending operation unit 40 (see FIG. 92) as described above, when the harness HN2 is burned out, the ball lending button 42 (see FIG. 89) and the return button 43 (see FIG. 89) is disabled. Accordingly, a person who commits fraud shall:
Since there is a risk that due to one's own fraudulent behavior, it will be impossible to collect the bills and balls for the balance of the card inserted into the above-mentioned card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown). be able to.

Furthermore, in order to eliminate the risk of being unable to collect bills and balls for the balance of the card inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown), the card unit (ball lending unit) Unit) is 0 yen, but the player commits the fraudulent act without leaving the seat, so the gaming machine store can easily notice the fraudulent act.

In the first place, when the connection of the harness HN2 is cut off, the card unit (ball lending unit) (
(not shown) is output at a game machine shop where a disconnection error (CR error) is output, the disconnection error (C
By confirming the R error), the possibility of fraud can be easily grasped.

98 is a front view of the passage forming unit 140. FIG. In addition, in FIG. 98, the sheet metal member 15
The outline of 0 and the outline of the ball guide opening 53 are shown in phantom lines.

As shown in FIG. 98 , the ball guide opening 53 is arranged at the lower end of the front door side lower tray passage portion 142 and the lower end of the foul ball passage portion 145 . In addition, in this embodiment, the front door side lower tray passage portion 1
The lower end of 42 occupies about 2/3 of the lateral width of ball guide opening 53 in the left part of ball guide opening 53, and the lower end of foul ball passage part 145 occupies the remaining area in the right part of ball guide opening 53. The partition plate portion 53a is arranged so as to occupy an area (an area of about 1/3 of the lateral width of the ball guide opening 53).
partitioned by

The front door side lower tray passage portion 142 and the foul ball passage portion 145 are passages extending from the payout ball receiving portion 143 and the foul ball receiving portion 146, respectively, so that the ball can flow down toward the lower tray 50. , the extension direction is directed (switched) to the left and right sides at least once each, S-shaped paths SL1, S
L2 respectively.

Due to the S-shaped path SL1, it is possible to increase the flow path length of the front door side lower tray passage portion 142 while keeping the vertical dimension of the passage forming unit 140 short, so that the liquid stays inside the front door side lower tray passage portion 142. The number of possible spheres can be increased. As a result, the window portion 14c (see FIG. 86)
While securing a large vertical dimension of the lower tray 50, the number of balls that can be retained on the upstream side of the lower tray 50 can be increased. Due to the large number of balls that can be temporarily placed on the upstream side), the stress of replenishing balls is given to the player (when the balls for 50 minutes of the lower tray are exhausted, the player is required to replenish the balls from the senryo box). ) can be configured.

The front door side lower tray passage portion 142 and the foul ball passage portion 145 are respectively provided with bend regions NEa1, NEa2, NEb1, and NEb2 as regions in which the extension direction is bent in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction, and they are common. Features That is, the front door side lower tray passage portion 142 includes a first bending region NEa1 formed on the downstream side and a second bending region NEa1 formed upstream of the first bending region NEa1 and having a characteristic portion thereof reversed left and right. and an area NEa2.

Further, the foul ball passage portion 145 is composed of a first bending region NEb1 formed on the downstream side and a second bending region NE formed on the upstream side of the first bending region NEb1 by reversing the right and left of the characteristic portion.
and b2. In the description of the characteristic portions, the characteristics of the first bending region NEa1 will be described, and descriptions of the other bending regions NEa2, NEb1, and NEb2 will be omitted.

FIG. 99 is an enlarged front view of the first bending region NEa1. As shown in FIG. 99, in the first bending region NEa1, of the left and right side walls of the front door side lower tray passage portion 142, the side wall Na and the side wall Na disposed on the side opposite to the direction in which the S-shaped path SL1 extends left and right. , a ceiling wall Nb disposed above the side wall Na in a manner intersecting the extending direction of the side wall Na; and a neighboring wall Nc, each wall Na,
Nb and Nc are extended from the back side bottom plate portion of the passage forming unit 140 to the front side.

The adjacent wall Nc is formed by curving a surface Nc1 on the opposite side of the ceiling wall Nb along the S-shaped path SL1, so that the surface Nc1 functions as a spherical guide surface. On the other hand, the surface Nc2 (the surface facing the ceiling surface Nb) on the opposite side of the surface Nc1 regulates the traveling direction of the illegally inserted wire HM (a thin metal such as a wire or piano wire). It functions as a surface to support the surface, and the details will be described later. Note that the adjacent wall Nc has a gap Nin between the lower end of the extension and the side wall Na, which is the length of the wire H.
It is set larger than the width dimension (diameter) of M.

As shown in FIG. 99, due to the shape of the first bending region NEa1, the incorrectly inserted wire HM
can be prevented from penetrating deeper. That is, as shown in FIG. 99, as an entrance path for the illegally inserted wire HM, the ball guide opening 53 is used as an entrance and the front door side lower tray passage portion 14 is used.
2 is conceivable.
M is pressed against the side wall of the front door side lower tray passage portion 142 to advance.

When the wire HM is pressed against the side wall Na in the first bending region NEa1 by a person who commits fraud, the wire HM enters the gap Nin, but the wire HM is not pressed against the side wall Na in the first bending region NEa1. Even in this case, the wire HM advances rightward due to the S-shaped path SL1 of the front door side lower tray passage portion 142, so that the wire HM is pressed against the side wall Na in the second bending region NEa2 and enters the gap Nin. It will be. That is, a pair of bending regions NEa1,
By arranging the NEa2 with the left and right reversed, the wire HM can enter the gap Nin without exception.

FIG. 99 shows an example of the advancing route of the wire HM when entering the gap Nin. The position of the tip of the wire HM at each timing is indicated by a black circle, and the advancing direction of the wire HM at that time is indicated by an arrow. As shown in FIG. 99, the wire HM entering the gap Nin enters a tapered dead end portion formed between the ceiling wall Nb and the adjacent wall Nc. If the wire HM is caught (caught) at this point, it is possible to prevent the wire HM from advancing any further, to prevent the wire HM from being held, and to quickly discover the fraudulent act. can.

On the other hand, even if the wire HM is not caught and continues to advance, if the wire HM protrudes from the gap Nin, the tip of the wire HM protrudes downward.
advances, the tip of the wire HM advances downward. Therefore, wire HM
The payout device 133 arranged upstream of the payout ball receiving portion 143, and the foul ball receiving portion 146
It is possible to prevent reaching the game area arranged on the upstream side of.

As a result, by causing the wire HM to reach the payout device 133 (see FIG. 3) and causing the payout device 133 to malfunction, an illegal payout ball can be obtained, or the wire HM can be made to reach the game area and the electric accessory 64
By forcibly opening a movable device such as 0a (see FIG. 2) to make it easier to illegally win a prize, it is possible to prevent a person who commits fraudulent acts from gaining illegal profits by obtaining illegally dispensed balls. .

Returning to FIG. 98, description will be made. The foul ball passage portion 145 is formed such that the vertical width of the portion downstream from the confluence region CE where the ball extraction passage 147 merges is about twice the diameter of the ball (twice or more in this embodiment). As a result, when the balls flowing down the ball removal passage 147 are arranged in the confluence area CE, the balls flowing down the foul ball passage portion 145 enter the confluence passage CE (the balls enter the confluence area CE at the same time). , even if two balls are arranged vertically, the possibility of the balls being caught between the upper and lower walls and meshing with each other can be extremely reduced. As a result, it is possible to prevent the sphere from being hindered from flowing down in the portion downstream from the confluence area CE.

The foul ball passage portion 145 includes a passage portion 145a that is formed between the first bending region NEb1 and the second bending region NEb2 and vertically connects the bending regions NEb1 and NEb2. The width of the passage portion 145a is set to be slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere, and the passage forming unit 1
The rear side bottom plate portion 40 is formed to protrude toward the front side as it goes downward.

In the region upstream of the passage portion 145a, the back side bottom plate portion of the passage forming unit 140 is flush with the upstream end portion of the passage portion 145a, and in the region downstream of the passage portion 145a, the passage forming unit 140 The back side bottom plate portion of is positioned flush with the downstream end portion of the passage portion 145a.

That is, in the foul ball passage portion 145, the region on the upstream side of the passage portion 145a is closer to the passage portion 14
The front-to-rear width is set larger than that of the region on the downstream side of 5a. In this embodiment, the front-rear width of the foul ball passage portion 145 downstream of the passage portion 145a is set slightly larger than the diameter of the ball.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the front-rear width of the foul ball passage portion 145 upstream of the passage portion 145a is set slightly smaller than twice the diameter of the ball. Therefore, the foul ball passage portion 145
In the case where the balls stay in the upper stream of the passage 145, a plurality of balls can be arranged with their positions shifted forward and backward. Since they are prevented from lining up (because they are slightly shifted left, right, up and down), it is possible to prevent two balls from entering the passage portion 145a at the same time.

In other words, it is possible to restrict the balls from entering the passage portion 145a one by one. As a result, even when two or more foul balls flow into the foul ball passage portion 145 in a row, the foul balls can be prevented from reaching the confluence area CE at the same time. It is possible to reduce the possibility of being sandwiched between the upper and lower walls and meshing with each other.

The foul ball receptacle 146 extends from the bottom plate on the rear side of the passage forming unit 140 toward the front side, and the left end is connected to the left side wall, and the flow-down surface of the ball faces rightward. The inclined plate portion 146a inclined downward as
46, and the passage forming unit 1 below the inclined plate portion 146a.
A curved guide plate portion 146c extending from the back side bottom plate portion of 40 to the back side in a plate shape and curved in such a manner that the extension direction is directed upward toward the back side is mainly provided.

While the ball is guided toward the foul ball passage portion 145 (front side) along the upper surface of the curved guide plate portion 146c, the action of the inclined plate portion 146a and the blocking portion 146b causes the foul ball receiving portion 1
The passing position of the ball passing through 46 to the front side can be shifted to the right side of the foul ball receiving portion 146 . That is, the ball that rolls down the upper surface of the inclined plate portion 146a can flow rightward, and the block portion 146b prevents the ball from passing through the left side of the foul ball socket portion 146. can be done.

As a result, it is possible to lengthen the period until the ball that has passed through the foul ball receiving portion 146 reaches the S-shaped path SL2. That is, since the vertical bounce of the ball can be finished before the ball reaches the S-shaped path SL2 (because the variation in the vertical position of the ball can be reduced), the foul ball passage part in the S-shaped path SL2 While setting the width of 145 to be small (slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere), the sphere can flow down smoothly.

The foul ball passage portion 145 is formed in a range forming the S-shaped path SL2 (for example, the passage portion 145a
), the width of the passage is set to be small (slightly larger than the diameter of the ball), so it is possible to prevent an illegal tool with a larger outer shape from passing through the foul ball passage portion 145 .

Next, the structure of the front side of the front frame 14 will be described. 100 is a front exploded perspective view of the front frame 14, and FIG. 101 is a rear exploded perspective view of the front frame 14. FIG. 100 and 101 illustrate a state in which the constituent members of the upper panel unit 400 that constitute the electrical decoration portion 8030 are disassembled from the main body frame 14a.

The upper panel unit 400 is a unit elongated in the left and right direction, and the left and right ends of the upper panel unit 400 are supported by the right panel unit 500 that constitutes the electric decoration parts 8031 and 8032 . In this support structure, at the lower end of the right end of the upper panel unit 400, similarly to the support groove 376 of the covering cover 370, a tapered supported groove 417 is recessed from the back side to the front side. (see FIG. 118) are formed, and fitting grooves 522b and 562b (see FIGS. 108 and 109) formed at the upper end of the right panel unit 500 are fitted to the left and right hooks forming the supported groove 417. By doing so, the upper panel unit 400 and the right panel unit 50
0 is concatenated.

As a result, the upper panel unit 400 and the right panel unit 500 can be connected and fixed to each other by fastening and fixing to the body frame 14a, respectively, without the need to directly fasten and fix the upper panel unit 400 and the right panel unit 500. FIG. The shape of the supported groove 417 of the upper panel unit 400 defines the order of assembly to the main body frame 14a as the order in which the upper panel unit 400 is fastened and fixed after the right panel unit 500 is fastened and fixed. Details of the upper panel unit 400 will be described later.

In addition, the fitting grooves 522b and 562b (see FIGS. 108 and 109) provided in the heavy plate units 500R and 500L of the right panel unit 500 divided into left and right are fitted with left and right hooks forming the supported groove 417. Due to the configuration in which the parts are sandwiched and fitted, the heavy plate units 500R, 500R, 500R and 500R
00L can be prevented from being left or right. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the right panel unit 500 from being disassembled in the assembled state (fitted state, see FIG. 86).

102 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 14, and FIG. 103 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame 14. FIG. 102 and 103, the body frame 14a is located on the front side of the body frame 14a.
and the upper panel unit 400 (see FIG. 89), and the multifunctional cover members 171 and 172 and the upper side plate member 14e are shown disassembled from the body frame 14a.

The upper side plate member 14e is a member that sandwiches the speaker assembly 450 between itself and the upper frame member 410 (see FIG. 101), and the recessed portions 462 and 482 of the speaker assembly 450 (see FIG. 12).
1 and FIG. 122).

The fastening portion 14e1 has a through-hole through which a screw is inserted from the rear side thereof, and the screw passing through the through-hole is fastened to the second fastening portion 419b (see FIG. 101) of the upper frame member 410, whereby the upper frame is This is a portion for fastening and fixing the member 410 and the upper side plate member 14e.

104 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 14. FIG. In addition, in FIG. 104, the body frame 14a
The right panel unit 500, which is fastened and fixed to the body frame 14a by screws inserted from the rear side into the insertion holes drilled in the body frame 14a, is shown disassembled from the body frame 14a. and the multifunctional cover members 171, 172 are omitted, while the covering cover 370 is shown for reference.

As for the actual assembly procedure, the covering cover 370 is assembled to the main body frame 14a after the panel unit 500 is assembled to the main body frame 14a. Also, the right panel unit 500 has a right side wall forming the right edge of the pachinko machine 8010 (see FIG. 86).

105 is an exploded front perspective view of the right panel unit 500, FIG. 106 is an exploded rear perspective view of the right panel unit 500, FIG. 107 is a front view of the support plate portion 510,
108 and 109 are exploded front perspective views of the heavy plate units 500L and 500R. 108 shows a perspective view with the right side facing the front side, and FIG. 109 shows a perspective view with the left side facing the front side.

As shown in FIGS. 105 to 109, the right panel unit 500 includes a left stacking unit 500L and a right stacking unit 500R, which are stacked in the horizontal direction, and the stacking unit 50.
0L and 500R are fastened and fixed, and a plate-shaped support plate portion 510 elongated vertically is mainly provided, which is fastened and fixed to the body frame 14a (see FIG. 104).

The heavy plate unit 500 is fixed by screws inserted through the support plate portion 510 from the back side to the front side.
L and 500R are fastened and fixed to the support plate portion 510. In this state, the support plate portion 510
It is fastened and fixed to the body frame 14a (see FIG. 104) by screws inserted through the body 4a from the back side to the front side.

The support plate portion 510 is formed to have an L-shaped cross section by extending a plate-like extension portion 511a from the outer edge (right edge) of the side facing the main body frame 14a to the back side, and is assembled. (Fig. 86
), a fixing plate 511 whose inner wall (left side wall) of the extending portion 511a abuts against the outer surface of the main body frame 14a, a substrate member 512 fastened and fixed to the fixing plate 511 on the front side of the fixing plate 511, and A plurality of cover-side through holes 513 drilled in the fixed plate 511 on the left side of the substrate member 512, a plurality of lens-side through holes 514 drilled in the fixed plate 511 on the right side of the substrate member 512, and the lens-side through holes 514. and a pin support hole 515 drilled in the fixed plate 511 on the right side of the hole 514 .

The fixing plate 511 has a base portion 511b that overlaps the substrate member 512 when viewed from the front, and the portion on the side of the substrate member 512 protrudes toward the front side in a pedestal shape. 512 is fastened and fixed to the fixing plate 511 .

In the assembled state (see FIG. 86), the base portion 511b is mounted on the heavy plate units 500L and 500R.
in the width direction (see FIG. 115(b)), the heavy plate units 500L, 50
It is possible to suppress tilting of 0R in the left-right direction. That is, the posture of the heavy plate units 500L and 500R with respect to the support plate portion 510 can be easily maintained.

In this embodiment, on the right side surface of the fixed plate 511, the extended portion 51
1a is displaced to the right by the thickness of the outer cover member 560, so that the extended portion 511
While the outer cover member 560 contacts the support plate portion 510 in the front-rear direction on the front side of a, the fixing plate 5
11 is formed up to the back side end as a surface that is substantially at the same plane as the side surface of the base portion 511 b , so that the back side end of the inner cover member 520 is aligned with the back side end of the support plate portion 510 . The inner side surface 521b1 of the inner cover member 520 contacts the left side surface 511c of the support plate portion 510 in the assembled state (see FIG. 86).

The substrate member 512 is an electronic substrate (printed substrate) on which a plurality of LEDs 512a are arranged on the front side. In this embodiment, the plurality of LEDs 512a are arranged in a row curved in accordance with the curved shape of the light guide member 540 with a predetermined interval (11 [mm] interval in this embodiment) between adjacent LEDs 512a. . That is, the plurality of LEDs 512a are arranged inside the shape in which the light guide member 540 is projected from the front, and emit light from directly behind the light guide member 540 toward the light guide member 540 with their optical axes parallel to each other. Illuminate (see FIG. 107).

Since the width of the end surface of the light guide member 540 on the side of the LED 512a is longer than the width of the LED 512a (the lateral width of the light emitting portion) (see the imaginary line in FIG. 107), the light emitted from the LED 512a passes through the light guide member without leakage. The light enters 540 and exits from one of the surfaces of the light guide member 540. The entry and exit of light and its path will be described later.

The cover-side through-hole 513 is a hole for positioning the back fastening portion 527 arranged on the inner cover member 520 and through which a screw fastened to the back fastening portion 527 is inserted from the back side. By fastening screws to the rear fastening portion 527 , the inner cover member 520 is attached to the support plate portion 51 .
Fixed to 0.

The lens-side through-hole 514 is a hole for positioning the back fastening portion 556 provided on the outer lens member 550 and through which the screw fastened to the back fastening portion 556 is inserted from the back side. By fastening screws to the back fastening portion 556 , the outer lens member 550 is attached to the support plate portion 51 .
Fixed to 0.

The pin support hole 515 is a through hole through which the projecting portion 566 of the outer cover member 560 is inserted.
The pin support hole 515 has a horizontal width slightly larger than the diameter of the protrusion 566 and a vertical width approximately twice the diameter of the protrusion 566 . Therefore, while the left and right positions of the outer cover member 560 are strictly defined, the work efficiency when the outer cover member 560 is brought into contact with the support plate portion 510 and fastened and fixed can be improved.

That is, in a fastening preparation state in which the heavy plate units 500L and 500R abut against the support plate portion 510 from the front side, when the plate units 500L and 500R are slightly displaced vertically with respect to the support plate portion 510 (projecting portion 566 ), the projecting portion 566 can be inserted into the pin support hole 515 . As a result, the projection 566
are inserted into the pin support holes 515, and then the heavy plate unit 500L,
By moving 500R up and down by the amount corresponding to the positional deviation, the positional deviation can be eliminated and fastening and fixing can be easily performed.

As shown in FIGS. 108 and 109, the left stacking unit 500L has a window portion 14c (see FIG. 86).
See), the inner cover member 520 that constitutes the right edge and is formed of a light-impermeable resin material
and an inner lens member 530 fastened and fixed to the inner cover member 520 from the right side and formed of a light-transmitting colorless resin material.

The right stacking unit 500R has a light guide member 540 arranged to face the left stacking unit 500L.
and an outer lens member 550 which faces the light guide member 540 in the left-right direction and whose front side end is opposed in the front-rear direction and which is formed of a light-transmitting white resin material, and the outer lens member. The light guide member 54 is arranged on the right side of 550 and is made of a resin material that does not transmit light.
0 and an outer cover member 560 to which the outer lens member 550 is fastened and fixed.

Next, details of each member will be described. 110 and 111 show the heavy plate unit 50.
It is an exploded front perspective view of 0L and 500R. FIG. 110 shows a perspective view with the right side facing the front side, and FIG. 111 shows a perspective view with the left side facing the front side. is shown exploded.

The inner cover member 520 includes a main body plate portion 521 formed in a vertically elongated plate shape, and an upper fastening portion 52 disposed at the upper end of the main body plate portion 521 and fastened and fixed to the outer cover member 560 .
2, a lower fastening portion 523 disposed at the lower end of the main body plate portion 521 and fastened and fixed to the outer cover member 560, a plurality of openings 524 opened in the main body plate portion 521, and the inner lens member 5
a plurality of short fastening portions 525, which are cylindrical portions inserted through the lens 30 and into which screws for fixing the inner lens member 530 to the inner cover member 520 are screwed; The inner cover member 520 is an outer cover member 560 which is a cylindrical portion inserted through the lens member 530 .
A plurality of long fastening portions 526 into which screws are screwed to fix the support plate portion 521, and a plurality of rear fastening portions protruding on the right side of the main body plate portion 521 and into which screws are screwed to fix the support plate portion 510 from the back side. 527
and are mainly provided.

The main body plate portion 521 has a wave-shaped front end portion 521a, and a connection plate portion 521c that connects the front end portion 521a and the back-side base portion 521b at the short width portion of the wave shape (portion closer to the back side). Prepare.

The back-side base portion 521b is attached to the base portion 511 of the support plate portion 510 in the assembled state (see FIG. 86).
It has an inner side surface 521b1 that contacts (matches in shape with) the left side surface.

The connecting plate portion 521c is a plate-like portion that is arranged in an attitude that inclines leftward toward the rear side, and the opening portion 524 is defined by the connecting plate portion 521c.

In the present embodiment, the connecting plate portions 521c are not arranged at regular intervals in the vertical direction, but are arranged such that the intervals increase in order from the lower side toward the upper side (see FIG. 114). Thereby, the opening widths of the plurality of openings 524 are made different, and the effect of light is produced by the openings 524.
can be different for each

The upper fastening portion 522 is a cylindrical portion into which a screw for fastening and fixing the outer cover member 560 is screwed. and a fitting groove 522b.

The fitting groove 522b is formed as a groove into which the left and right claws forming the supported groove 417 (see FIG. 118) of the upper panel unit 400 are fitted.

The lower fastening portion 523 includes a fastening portion 523a, which is a cylindrical portion into which screws for fastening and fixing the outer cover member 560 are screwed, and a fitting groove 523b recessed in the left-right direction on the left outer surface. That is, the outer cover member 560 is fastened and fixed to the inner cover member 520 by two screws inserted at the upper end and one screw at the lower end.

The fitting groove 523b is formed as a groove into which the left and right claw portions forming the support groove 376 of the covering cover 370 (see FIG. 92) are fitted.

The openings 524 are arranged side by side at four upper and lower positions, and are arranged in the inner lens member 530 in the assembled state.
It functions as a window through which the Each outer shape portion of the opening 524 is formed in a curved shape projecting rightward with the connection plate portion 521c as an end (left end). That is, each opening 524 is recessed rightward from the left end of the connecting plate portion 521c (see FIG. 114).

The short fastening portion 525 is arranged at the boundary portion between the back-side base portion 521b and the connecting plate portion 521c (see FIG. 110). This boundary part is designed in this embodiment, and the inner cover member 52
The surface (left side) of 0 corresponds to the portion that projects leftward (see FIG. 111). Back side base 52
The surface of 1b is recessed and curved to the right as designed between the boundary portions described above.
That is, the surface of the back side base portion 521b is formed in a wavy shape that undulates to the left and right as it advances in the vertical direction.

In this case, the short fastening portion 525 is arranged on the back side of the portion projecting to the design surface side. When the inner cover member 520 is formed to have a uniform thickness, the back surface of the design-like protruding portion is, conversely, formed with a recess that tends to become a dead space. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by arranging the short fastening portion 525 in the recess of the inner cover member 520, the dead space can be effectively utilized, and the space on the back side of the inner cover member 520 (on the side of the inner lens member 530) can be effectively used. Efficiency can be improved.

The front and rear end portions of the inner lens member 530 are formed to follow the shape of the front and rear end portions of the inner cover member 520 . That is, the inner lens member 530 is formed on the body plate portion 5 formed in a vertically elongated plate shape.
A front end portion 531 a of the inner cover member 520 has a corrugated shape that substantially matches the shape of the front end portion 521 a of the inner cover member 520 .

The front-side end portion 531a forms a curved surface that extends rightward from the front-side edge of the main body plate portion 531, and is perforated in the front-rear direction at the position where the curve forming the wave shape changes to the front-rear direction. support hole 531 through which the projecting portion 551b (see FIG. 109) of the outer lens member 550 is inserted.
b, 531c.

The support hole 531b is formed in the corrugated front portion of the front end portion 531a, and a through hole 531b1 through which a screw for fastening and fixing the short fastening portion 525 of the inner cover member 520 passes is formed on the rear side thereof. That is, since the screw is fastened and fixed behind the support hole 531b, the support hole 531b
Even if a load is applied to the vicinity of 31b, it is possible to prevent the support hole 531b from being deformed or displaced.

The support hole 531c is formed in the wavy rear portion of the front end portion 531a, and an inclined rib portion 532 extending to a position where the light guide member 540 can come into contact is arranged on the rear side thereof. . That is, since the rigidity behind the support hole 531c is strengthened by the inclined rib portion 532, the support hole 5
Even if a load is applied to the vicinity of 31c, it is possible to prevent the support hole 531c from being deformed or displaced.

The main body plate portion 531 has a through hole 531d which is sized to allow the long fastening portion 526 to pass through and is drilled in the horizontal direction at a position between the support holes 531b and 531c in the vertical direction. By inserting the long fastening portion 526 into the through hole 531d, the inner cover member 520 and the inner lens member 530 can be aligned.

The inclined rib portion 532 is arranged at a position (right side position) corresponding to the connecting plate portion 521c of the inner cover member 520, and the pair of upper and lower plate portions 53 extending rightward from the upper and lower edges of the connecting plate portion 521c.
2a and a plurality of reinforcing plate portions 532 vertically connecting the pair of upper and lower plate portions 532a.
and b.

The upper and lower plate portions 532a extend so as to fill the gap between them and the light guide member 540. As shown in FIG. Namely
Similar to the inner cover member 520, the inner lens member 530 has a shape that protrudes leftward toward the back side, and thus the width of the left and right becomes longer toward the back side (the front end is the tip when viewed from above). It is assumed to be a triangle shape).

The inner lens member 530 includes an overhanging portion 533 that overhangs leftward from the main body plate portion 531 so as to pass through the opening portion 524 . The protruding portion 533 includes a light scattering portion 533a on the side opposite to the protruding side, which protrudes in a wavy shape and has a wavy curved surface with a shape that scatters light.

The light guide member 540 is made of a thermoplastic resin, and has a halftone dot pattern on both left and right sides in which recessed portions that change the traveling direction of the light emitted from the LED 512a arranged on the back side to the left and right directions are arranged in a grid pattern. A so-called light guide plate is formed. That is, at least part of the light emitted from the LED 512a to the rear end portion of the light guide member 540 is redirected in the left-right direction via the light guide member 540, and is emitted to the inner lens member 530 or the outer lens member 550. be. In addition, the light guide member 540 is thermally bent into a curved shape corresponding to the arrangement of the LEDs 512a (see FIGS. 105 and 107), and the width dimension in the thickness direction is changed from the end face on the back side (LED 512a side) to the front side. It is formed from a shape that gradually tapers toward the end face.

Here, the concave portion is a so-called edge light type light source (in this embodiment, the LED 512a
) is a processed part for changing the light from the surface into a uniform surface light emission. The concave portion is a notch-shaped concave portion that is recessed from the left and right sides, and reflects or refracts incident light from the LED 512a so that the light guide member 5
The light is emitted from the left and right side surfaces of 40 .

In this embodiment, as an example, the recessed portion is formed by a thermoplastic mold plate having a pattern in which conical portions having an inclination angle of 45° with respect to the bottom surface and a bottom circle diameter of about 1 mm are arranged in a grid pattern at intervals of about 3 mm. It is formed by pressing (heat pressing) against resin. Of the light emitted from the LED 512a, the light reaching the concave portion is reflected by the concave portion and emitted from the left and right side surfaces of the light guide member 540 in a substantially vertical direction.

The thermoplastic resins used in the present invention are not particularly limited, but those having transparency are preferable, and acrylic resins (methacrylic resins), polycarbonate resins, polyvinyl chloride resins, amorphous polyester resins, amorphous olefin resins, etc. Resin, polystyrene resin, AS resin (
acrylonitrile, styrene copolymer) can be exemplified. Among them, by using an acrylic resin in particular, the light guide member 540 has a high average brightness and a small decrease in brightness distribution.
can be obtained.

In this embodiment, the light guide member 540 has a thickness of 5 mm at the end on the LED 512a side. By setting the thickness between 3 mm and 8 mm, it is possible to efficiently guide the light from the LED 512a, improve shape retention after thermal bending, and obtain practical strength.

In the assembled state (see FIG. 86), the light guide member 540 has a corrugated front end portion that is slightly displaced from the front end portion 531a of the inner lens member 530 toward the rear side, and has a wavy shape. are also formed from undulating corrugations.

The left and right wave shapes are not strict in the present invention. For the degree of corrugation,
Although there is no particular limitation, the curved surface portion has a radius of curvature (R) of 200 mm or more and 700 mm
The following are preferred. By setting such a radius of curvature (R), it is possible to provide a design capable of imparting a three-dimensional degree of freedom while reducing distortion after heat bending and maintaining good practical mechanical properties. .

Details of the wave shape undulating to the left and right will be described later (see FIG. 114), but the inner cover member 520
Positioned leftward at a position corresponding to the connecting plate portion 521c, and positioned rightward at a position between positions corresponding to the adjacent connecting plate portions 521c (located away from the inner cover member 520) It has a wavy shape.

The wavy shape in the left-right direction is formed by thermally bending the base material having the recessed portions, as described above. As a method of thermal bending of the present invention, a curved concave surface (female mold) and a convex surface (
This is done by pressing the substrate into a mold with a male mold. More specifically, when the thermoplastic resin contains an acrylic resin as a main component, the heating temperature can be 110° C. or higher and 150° C. or lower. Specifically, it is preferably performed at 130° C. or higher and 150° C. or lower.

At this time, the heating temperature of the base material is lower than the melting point of the thermoplastic resin. By setting the temperature of the base material during heating to the deflection temperature under load + 40°C or lower and the melting point or lower, the shape of the light guide pattern provided on the surface of the base material is not destroyed, and the light from the light source is emitted before and after the heat bending process. can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to prevent a decrease in luminance and an uneven luminance distribution in the light guide plate. Further, by setting such heating temperature conditions, it is possible to suppress distortion of the light guide plate.

The light guide member 540 includes a curved plate-shaped body plate portion 541 that constitutes a light guide plate, and a body plate portion 541 of the body plate portion 541 .
A fastening part 542 extending vertically from the upper and lower ends of the outer cover member 560 and through which a screw to be fastened to the outer cover member 560 is inserted.

The light guide member 540 includes a fastening portion 542 and a concave portion 541a for retreating from the long fastening portion 526.
In other positions, there is no portion penetrating in the left-right direction. That is, since the light guide member 540 is composed of a single plate without a hole at least inside the projection plane on which the opening 524 is projected in the left-right direction, the rendering effect of the light passing through the opening 524 is improved. be able to. The rear-side end of the light guide member 540 is substantially flush with the rear-side end of the inner lens member 530 .

The outer lens member 550 includes a main body plate portion 551 formed in a vertically elongated plate shape, and a fastening portion 542 of the light guide member 540 which is disposed at the upper and lower ends of the main body plate portion 551 and internally supported. Inner fitting part 5
52, a plurality of insertion holes 553 that can be configured as through holes through which screws fastened to the outer cover member 560 are inserted, and a region surrounded by the plurality of insertion holes 553 projecting rightward through the outer cover member. A projecting portion 554 that can be visually recognized, a plurality of through holes 555 through which the long fastening portion 526 of the inner cover member 520 is inserted, and a support plate portion projecting from the back side of the main body plate portion 551 and extending from the back side. It mainly includes a plurality of rear fastening portions 556 into which screws for fixing 510 are screwed.

The shape of the front and rear ends of the outer lens member 550 follows the shape of the front and rear ends of the light guide member 540 . That is, the outer lens member 550 has a front end portion 551a that extends leftward from the front edge of the main body plate portion 551 and forms a curved surface that substantially matches the shape of the front end portion of the light guide member 540. It has a corrugated shape and is arranged slightly shifted to the front side with respect to the front side end of the light guide member 540 . In this embodiment, the front end portion of the light guide member 540 and the front end portion 551a of the outer lens member 550 are formed so as to be spaced equally apart in the front-rear direction at any position in the vertical direction. be.

The front-side end portion 551a is located at a switching position in the front-rear direction of the curved line that forms the wave shape.
It has a plurality of projecting portions 551b projecting toward the front side and fitted into the support holes 531b and 531c in the assembled state (see FIG. 86).

To the front side, on the opposite side of the side facing the light guide member 540 of the front side end portion 551a,
Numerous bulging portions 551a1 (see FIG. 115(a)) bulging in a semicircular shape in a side view are formed vertically. The bulging portion 551a1 functions to scatter the light emitted from the front end surface of the light guide member 540, so that even if the LEDs 512a are arranged at a predetermined interval, the light guide member 540 The light emission on the front side end surface can be made into a band-shaped light emission mode that is continuous in the vertical direction.

The insertion hole 553 is arranged in a recessed deep portion that is recessed inwardly (inwardly of the surface of the main body plate portion 551 ) as the shape of the overhanging portion 554 . Thereby, the fastening of the outer lens member 550 to the outer cover member 560 can be strengthened, and the outer lens member 550 can be prevented from being peeled off from the outer cover member 560 .

In the right double plate unit 500R, the rear fastening portion 556 into which screws for fastening and fixing with the support plate portion 510 are screwed is provided on the outer lens member 550 and is not provided on the outer cover member 560. FIG. Therefore, the outer cover member 560 can be arranged as close as possible to the right edge of the support plate portion 510 (the outer edge of the pachinko machine 8010) (it can be arranged regardless of the screw diameter or screw arrangement). can). As a result, the area facing the player (the area on the left side of the right panel unit 500) can be enlarged.

The surface of the main body plate portion 551 facing the light guide member 540 is curved in accordance with the surface shape (curved shape) of the light guide member 540, and in the assembled state (see FIG. 86), the light guide member 5
40 and the main body plate portion 551 are in contact with each other (see FIG. 114(b)).

As a result, it is possible to prevent the light guide member 540 from being displaced in the direction in which it faces the main body plate portion 551 . In addition, since the body plate portion 551 is directly fastened and fixed to the support plate portion 510 , the support plate portion 510 and the light guide member 540 are aligned via the body plate portion 551 .

Therefore, the LED 512a arranged on the substrate member 512 fixed to the support plate portion 510,
It is possible to prevent misalignment with the light guide member 540, and allow light to enter the light guide member 540 from the LED 512a with high accuracy.

The outer cover member 560 has a main body plate portion 561 formed in a vertically elongated plate shape, and a receiving surface capable of receiving the fastening portion 522a of the inner cover member 520 at the upper end portion of the main body plate portion 561. It has a long hole formed in an oval shape with a vertical width slightly larger than the diameter of the screw hole of the fastening portion 522a and a horizontal width longer than the vertical width, and a plurality of screws are inserted from the opposite side. A receiving surface capable of receiving the fastening portion 523a of the inner cover member 520 at the upper to-be-fastened portion 562 having the screw receiving portion 562a and the lower end portion of the main body plate portion 561,
The lower side to be fastened has a screw receiving portion 563a formed in an elongated hole shape with a vertical width slightly larger than the diameter of the screw hole of the fastening portion 523a and a horizontal width longer than the vertical width and having a screw receiving portion 563a through which a screw is inserted from the opposite side. 563 and the long fastening portion 5 of the inner cover member 520 at the front side end portion of the main body plate portion 561 .
26, and is formed in an elongated hole shape with a vertical width slightly larger than the diameter of the screw hole of the long fastening portion 526 and a horizontal width longer than the vertical width. A plurality of screw receiving portions 564 through which screws are inserted, an opening portion 565 formed with an inner shape slightly larger than the outer shape of the overhanging portion 554 of the outer lens member 550, and a projecting portion from the body plate portion 561 to the back side. and a plurality of protrusions 566 that are

The upper to-be-fastened portion 562 includes a fitting groove 562b recessed in the lateral width direction at a vertical position corresponding to the fitting groove 522b of the upper fastening portion 522 . The fitting groove 562b is formed as a groove into which the left and right claws forming the supported groove 417 (see FIG. 118) of the upper panel unit 400 are fitted.

The lower part to be fastened 563 has a fitting groove 563b recessed in the horizontal width direction at a vertical position corresponding to the fitting groove 523b of the lower fastening part 523 . The fitting groove 563b is
70 (see FIG. 92) is formed as a groove into which the left and right claws constituting the support groove 376 are fitted.

That is, the right panel unit 500 is connected to the upper panel unit 400 and the covering cover 370 by fitting through the upper and lower fitting grooves 562b and 563b. Since the right panel unit 500 contacts the upper panel unit 400 and the cover 370 vertically (see FIG. 86), the cover 370 protrudes the right panel unit 500 toward the front. The upper panel unit 400 can be supported by the right panel unit 500 that is stably supported. Therefore, the allowable weight of the upper panel unit 400 can be increased.

The opening 565 is formed in such a shape that the projecting portion 554 of the outer lens member 550 is fitted therein (
formed from an inner shape equivalent to the outer shape of the overhang 554). Therefore, it is possible to narrow the access path to the lateral gap between the opening 565 and the protruding portion 554 , thereby suppressing an illegal act of peeling the outer lens member 550 from the outer cover member 560 .

112 and 113, left stacking unit 500L and right stacking unit 500
A method of assembling R will be described. FIG. 112(a) is a side view of the right panel unit 500, FIG. 112(b) is a partially enlarged sectional view of the right panel unit 500 taken along line CXIIb-CXIIb of FIG. 112(a), and FIG. 113a) is a side view of the right panel unit 500, and FIG. 113(b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the right panel unit 500 taken along line CXIIIb-CXIIIb of FIG. 113(a).

112(a) and 112(b) illustrate a state in which the projecting portion 551b is arranged on the back side of the support hole 531b, and FIGS. Part 55
1b is shown inserted through the support hole 531b.

To assemble the right panel unit 500, the main body plate portion 531 of the left stacking unit 500L and the left end of the front side end 551a of the right stacking unit 500R are brought into contact with each other in the left-right direction (see FIG. 11).
2(b)), the left stacking unit 500L is approached from the front side of the right stacking unit 500R, and the projections 551b and 551c are inserted into the support holes 531b.

In this way, at the front end of the right panel unit 500, the projections 551b, 551
By adopting a configuration in which the left stacking unit 500L and the right stacking unit 500R are fixed by inserting c into the support hole 531b and fitting them together, the degree of freedom in designing the front end of the right panel unit 500 is improved. be able to.

For example, in the present embodiment, as a result of adopting the above configuration, the front end of the right panel unit (
It is possible to reduce the number of screws that are arranged on the front side of the light guide member 540 and fasten and fix the left stacking unit 500L and the right stacking unit 500R, thereby blocking light by the screws. Since the area can be reduced, the light emitted from the front-side end surface of the light guide member 540 can be easily visually recognized in a strip shape extending in the vertical direction.

Further, for example, in the present embodiment, by reducing the number of screws (fastening points) that fasten and fix the left stacking unit 500L and the right stacking unit 500R at the front end of the right panel unit 500, it is possible to prevent misleading during fastening. The light guide member 540
can reduce the range where there is a risk of damage. Therefore, the range in which the light guide member 540 can be arranged can be expanded to near the front end of the right panel unit 500 (near the tapered end). Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the light guide member 540 from being discontinued and visually recognized near the front end of the right panel unit 500 .

When the left plate unit 500L is approached from the front side of the right plate unit 500R and the projecting portions 551b and 551c are inserted into the support holes 531b, the inclined rib portions 532 of the inner lens member 530 of the left plate unit 500L and , and the light guide member 540 of the right stack unit 500R,
Surfaces parallel to each other are configured along the front-rear direction, and the surfaces are in a positional relationship in which they can contact each other. That is, the contact surface between the inclined rib portion 532 and the light guide member 540 is the left stacking unit 500L.
functions as a guide surface (guide) when moving in the front-rear direction with respect to the right panel unit 500R, the right panel unit 500 can be easily assembled.

Here, a method for disassembling the right panel unit 500 for maintenance or the like will be described. The right panel unit 500 has the support plate portion 510 attached to the left stack unit 5 as described above.
00L and the right stacking unit 500R are respectively assembled by fastening and fixing, and at least two procedures are conceivable for the assembly procedure.

The first procedure is a method of fastening and fixing the left plate unit 500L and the right plate unit 500R to each other and then fastening and fixing them to the support plate section 510. The second procedure is a method of fastening and fixing the right plate unit 500R. is fastened and fixed to the support plate portion 510 alone, then the left stacking unit 500L is brought closer to the right stacking unit 500R, the projecting portions 551b and 551c are inserted into the support holes 531b,
In this method, the left stacking unit 500L is fastened and fixed to the right stacking unit 500R and the support plate section 510, respectively. These two procedures can be similarly adopted when the right panel unit 500 is disassembled.

As described above, since assembly and disassembly can be performed in two different procedures, a worker who performs maintenance or the like can use which procedure to install the right panel unit 50 according to the parts that need to be replaced.
0 can be disassembled or assembled, and the working time can be shortened.

It should be noted that, regardless of which procedure is used for disassembly, the left board unit 500L and the right board unit 500R must be disassembled in order to disassemble the left board unit 500L and the right board unit 500R.
must slide over each other in the plane direction. Protruding portions 551b and 551c and support hole 531b
This is because it is necessary to release the engagement with. When the left stacking unit 500L and the right stacking unit 500R are to be slid relative to each other in the plane direction, at least one of them needs to be disassembled from the support plate section 510 .

In this manner, the projections 551b, 551c and the support holes 531b are fitted into the right panel unit 500 by prying (disassembling) the right panel unit 500 from the outside of the pachinko machine 8010 (see FIG. 86). 500 and is useful for preventing fraudulent acts that enter the inside of the pachinko machine 8010.

That is, when the front side portion of the right panel unit 500 is fixed by tightening screws, the right panel unit 500 can be easily disassembled by removing the screws, and cheating can be easily performed. As in this embodiment, the left panel unit 5 of the right panel unit 500
00L and the right stacking unit 500R are fastened and fixed to the support plate portion 510 with screws that are inserted from the back side of the support plate portion 510, and the screws are not removed from the back side of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 104). By making it difficult to disassemble the stacking unit 500L and the right stacking unit 500R, it is possible to make it difficult to disassemble the right panel unit 500 from the outside of the pachinko machine 8010 . Therefore, it is possible to prevent a fraudulent act of entering the pachinko machine 8010 through the inside of the right panel unit 500 .

With reference to FIG. 114, the shape of light guide member 540 of right panel unit 500 and its effect in presentation will be described. 114(a) is a side view of the right panel unit 500, FIG. 114(b) is a rear view of the right panel unit 500, and FIG. 114(c) is a side view of the right panel unit 500. . In addition, in FIGS. 114(a) to 114(c),
Illustration of the support plate portion 510 is omitted.

The light guide member 540 is irradiated with light emitted from the LEDs 512a (see FIG. 105) of the support plate portion 510 from the rear side, and the light incident on the light guide member 540 is directed to the left and right by the action of the light guide member 540. be redirected. At this time, the light is emitted in a direction perpendicular to the plane of the light guide member 540 .

Since the light guide member 540 has a curved shape that undulates in the left-right direction (see FIG. 114(b)), light is condensed on the concave side, and light is diffused on the convex side. For example, at a position corresponding to the uppermost opening 524 among the plurality of openings 524, the light guide member 540 has a concave shape with a curvature radius R1 on the opening 524 side (left side). The light emitted from the optical member 540 to the opening 524 side can be condensed and produced. Thereby, the intensity of the light visually recognized through the opening 524 can be improved.

In addition, since the opposite side (right side) thereof has a convex shape, at a position corresponding to the uppermost opening 524 among the plurality of openings 524, the light guide member 540 faces the outer lens member 550. It can be used for production by diffusing the light emitted to.

As described above, in the present embodiment, even if the vertical position is the same, there is a difference in the mode of light production (whether light is condensed or diffused) performed on the left and right sides of the light guide member 540. It can be provided, and the production effect can be improved.

It should be noted that the difference in the mode of light production is not caused only by the curved shape of the light guide member 540, but various modes are exemplified. For example, by dividing the shape of the notched concave portion of the light guide member 540 according to regions, or by dividing the thickness of the light guide member 540 according to regions, it is possible to change the mode of light production on both the left and right sides. .

The light guide member 540 is always concave on the opening 524 side at a position facing the opening 524 , and the radius of curvature of the concave surface changes according to the size of the opening 524 . That is, the curvature radius of the concave surface of the light guide member 540 is also the same as that of the second opening from the top, corresponding to the fact that the upper three openings 524 have a larger vertical width as the openings 524 move upward. The radius of curvature R2 at the position corresponding to the portion 524 is made shorter than the radius of curvature R1 (R1
>R2), and similarly, the radius of curvature R3 at the position corresponding to the third opening 524 from the top is made shorter than the radius of curvature R2 (R1>R2>R3).

As a result, even if there is no change in the arrangement interval of the LEDs 512a arranged on the substrate member 512, the number of the LEDs 512a that emit the condensed light differs for each opening 524. The amount of light emitted can be varied for each opening 524 . That is, according to the present embodiment, the upper opening 524 can increase the amount of visible light compared to the lower opening 524 .

In addition, the curvature radius R4 at the position corresponding to the lowest opening 524, that is, the fourth opening 524 from the top is formed to be the same as the curvature radius R1 (R4≈R1), and the center of the concave surface The normal line coming out from the shape is a shape that points slightly upward. Therefore, the amount of light visible through the openings 524 at the upper and lower ends can be increased, and the light production can be sharpened. Can be directed upwards.

As shown in FIG. 114(c), the vertical widths W1 to W4 of each opening 524 are illustrated as lengths connecting the midpoints of the upper side and the lower side of the opening 524 in a side view. The width of the opening 524 facing the portion with the curvature radius R1 is the vertical width W1, the width of the opening 524 facing the portion with the curvature radius R2 is the vertical width W2, and the width of the opening 524 facing the portion with the curvature radius R3. The width of the openings 524 facing each other is the vertical width W3, and the width of the openings 524 facing the portion with the radius of curvature R4 is the vertical width W4.

In this embodiment, among the openings 524, the lower openings 524 are formed such that the vertical widths W1 to W4 are reduced (W1>W2>W3>W4). That is, in the portions of the curvature radii R1 to R3, the relationship between the magnitudes of the curvature radii R1 to R3 and the magnitudes of the vertical widths W1 to W3 of the opening 524 are related. As a result, a portion where the degree of light condensing is weak (for example, the radius of curvature R
1), the vertical width W1 of the opening 524 is increased so that light can enter the opening 524 sufficiently. The vertical width W3 of the opening 524 is made smaller than the vertical width W1 to avoid too much light entering the opening 524 . Therefore, with the configuration of this embodiment, the light emission mode of each opening 524 can be made uniform.

The center point of each radius of curvature R1 to R4 shown in FIG. is arranged at approximately the middle position of

The light guide member 540 is convex leftward in the region KE of the boundary of the opening 524 . Here, the region KE is a strip-shaped region extending in the front-rear direction, and is defined as a region whose upper and lower ends do not interfere with adjacent openings 524 . That is, as shown in FIG. 114(c), the area K
The upper end of E coincides with the lower end of the opening 524 adjacent above it, and the lower end of the region KE coincides with the upper end of the opening 524 adjacent below it. Therefore, in area KE, LED 512
The light emitted in the front-rear direction from a is viewed from the left side of the right panel unit 500 (FIG. 114(c)).
), it advances in a state hidden by the connecting plate portion 521c.

In the region KE, the light emitted toward the inner lens member 530 passes through the inner cover member 520
Therefore, even if the light condensing action is reduced, the difference in the amount of light visually recognized by the player is small.

On the other hand, in the area KE, the light guide member 54
Since the shape of 0 can be formed from a curved shape without corners and stress concentration can be prevented, the durability of the light guide member 540 can be improved.

In addition, by forming a convex shape on the left side in the region KE, a concave shape can be formed on the right side. can be formed. As a result, it is possible to improve the presentation effect of the presentation of light visually recognized through the opening 565 .

That is, depending on whether or not light is incident on the region KE from the LED 512a, it is possible to change the light seen through the opening 565 while suppressing the change in the light seen through the opening 524. .

For example, the LED 512a that makes light enter the area KE is turned off, and the other LEDs 5
By turning ON 12a, it is possible to irradiate the inside of the opening 524 and the opening 565 with light without gaps. At this time, the right side of the light guide member 540 above and below the area KE is concave, so that the light emitted to the right from above and below the area KE intersects on the right side of the outer cover member 560. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the outer lens member 550 from being seen darkly in the region KE.

In addition, by turning on the LED 512a arranged at a position corresponding to the inner side of the area KE, the light emitted from the area KE is condensed and emitted in an edge shape, and the edge is visually recognized by the player. You can increase the amount of light. Therefore, overhang 554 (Fig. 106
) can be sharpened.

It should be noted that the light guide member 540 may be configured as a flat surface at the boundary of the opening 524 . In this case, by turning on the LED 512a arranged at a position corresponding to the inner side of the region KE, the corresponding portion (the region corresponding to the region KE) of the projecting portion 554 (see FIG. 106) emits light in a strip shape. can be made

The region KE has a shorter front-to-rear width of the right panel unit 500 (a shorter distance from the LED 512a) than the upper and lower portions thereof. Therefore, the light incident on the area KE easily reaches the front end portion even if the amount of light is weak. The light that reaches the front end portion may be used to produce an effect.

That is, the front end portion 5 of the inner lens member 530 cannot be seen through the connecting plate portion 521c.
31a (see FIG. 105), a light effect that can be visually recognized (visible from the front side of the right panel unit 500) is prepared, and the player's eye position is set by setting a high degree of expectation for the big win of the effect. , can be moved to the side away from the game board 13 from the front side end of the right panel unit 500 . As a result, the degree of eyestrain of the player can be reduced, and the player can play games for a long time without stress.

Here, the light incident on the area KE is blocked by the connecting plate portion 521c when viewed from the left side, but is viewed by the player through the outer lens member 550 (see FIG. 106) from the right side. Therefore, a player who sits on the left side of the right panel unit 500 and plays the pachinko machine 8010 is not visually recognized, but a clerk who is viewing the right panel unit 500 from the right side is notified by visible light. be able to.

As a result, while the cheating player is not noticed, the clerk can execute an error notification that can be easily noticed, so that the cheating player is prevented from trying to escape. can be prevented.

By reversing the left-right shape of the right panel unit 500, the light effect in the area KE may be made visible only to the player and not visible to the store clerk.

115(a) is a schematic side view of the light guide member 540, and FIG. 115(b) is a schematic side view of FIG.
FIG. 11 is a cross-sectional view of the light guide member 540 taken along line CXVb-CXVb of (a);

The light guide member 540 has a shape that gradually tapers from the end face (thickness of about 5 mm) on the LED 512a side toward the front side. Note that the maximum end of the front side of the light guide member 540 (the LED 512
The portion farthest from a) is designed to be 3 mm for the purpose of maintaining mechanical strength, and the horizontal width dimension is reduced with a similar gradient over the entire area in the vertical direction.

Therefore, the front end face of the light guide member 540 is not formed with the same width dimension (thickness). That is, the end surface of the portion of the inner lens member 530 facing the support hole 531b (see FIG. 111) is more LED5 than the end surface of the portion facing the support hole 531c (see FIG. 111).
Since the distance from the end surface on the side of 12a becomes longer, the tapered portion is excessively tapered and the width dimension (thickness) becomes thin. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the difference between the luminescence mode visually recognized near the support hole 531b and the luminescence mode visually recognized near the support hole 531c.

Here, in the present embodiment, since the vicinity of the support hole 531c is sandwiched between the portions near the support hole 531b and is recessed toward the rear side, the difference in the distance in the front-rear direction and the support hole 531b.
Due to the shadow created by the nearby portions, the portion near the support hole 531c is more likely to be visually recognized darker than the portion near the support hole 531b.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the portion of the light guide member 54 that is arranged to face the support hole 531b
0, the end face of the light guide member 540 in the portion facing the support hole 531c is formed to have a greater width dimension (thickness) than the end face of the light guide member 540, so that the light emitted from the LED 512a is received. It is possible to ensure a large area of the light-emitting surface.

Therefore, even if the amount of light emitted from any of the LEDs 512a among the plurality of LEDs 512a is the same, the amount of light visible in the vicinity of the support hole 531c is
The amount of light visible in the vicinity of 1b can be increased, and the degree of darkness due to differences in distance in the front-rear direction and shadows can be reduced. As a result, the front end portion 531 of the inner lens member 530
With a as the foreground, the degree of light emission visually recognized at the end of the right panel unit 500 on the front side can be easily made uniform over the top and bottom (difference in intensity can be reduced).

116 is a partial rear view of right panel unit 500. FIG. 116, illustration of the support plate portion 510 is omitted, and the light guide member 540 can be visually recognized. In addition, in FIG. 116, an example of the path (advancing direction) of light emitted through the light guide member 540 is illustrated by an imaginary arrow.

As shown in FIG. 116, the light emitted from the light guide member 540 toward the inner lens member 530 is condensed due to the curved shape of the light guide member 540, and passes through the inner lens member 530 to be slightly It is diffused and progresses outward.

Conversely, light emitted toward the outer lens member 550 is diffused as a result of the curving of the light guide member 540 . Therefore, the LED 51 that generates light incident on the light guide member 540
While the arrangement of 2a is fixed, both surfaces of the light guide member 540 can have different light emission modes (roughness and density, brightness and darkness). In other words, the player can be made to visually recognize the light in a light emission mode different from the light emission mode expected from the arrangement interval of the LEDs 521a.

In addition, the light emitted toward the inner lens member 530 side (player side) is
0 is bent to the side of the player instead of right sideways by being curved as shown in FIG. 115(b) (see the imaginary arrow in FIG. The line arrow
shows an example of the traveling direction of light passing through the light guide member 540). As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the light, and it is possible to improve the effect of the lighting effect.

Returning to FIGS. 100 and 101, description will be made. The upper panel unit 400 includes the upper side plate member 14
Fitting grooves 522b, 562b (see FIGS. 108 and 109) which are fastened and fixed to the main body frame 14a via e and arranged at the upper end of the right panel unit 500 at the lower right end thereof.
, and is supported from below, and is arranged at the upper end of the front frame 14 .

117 is an exploded front perspective view of the upper panel unit 400, and FIG. 118 is an exploded rear perspective view of the upper panel unit 400. FIG. As shown in FIGS. 117 and 118, the upper panel unit 400 includes an upper frame member 410 fastened and fixed to the upper side plate member 14e with the speaker assembly 450 interposed therebetween (see FIG. 100), and a front surface of the upper frame member 410. The illumination unit 401 is arranged on the side and fastened and fixed to the upper frame member 410, and the speaker assembly 450 is arranged on the back side of the upper frame member 410 and sandwiched between the upper frame member 410 and the upper side plate member 14e. ,
Mainly provide 117 and 118, illustration of the speaker assembly 450 is omitted (see FIGS. 100 and 101).

The illumination unit 401 is a unit decorated with a model name, etc. on the front side.
A substrate on which a plurality of EDs are arranged is included. By emitting light from the enclosed LED,
Perform a performance with light.

The illumination unit 401 includes a box-shaped main body 402 made of a light-transmitting resin material, a wavy wall 403 formed on the rear outer wall of the main body 402, and the wavy wall 403. A plate-like portion 404 extending from the lower edge to the back side in a horizontally long plate shape, and a portion above the plate-like portion 404 that protrudes from the corrugated wall portion 403 to the back side in a cylindrical shape and is inside the cylindrical shape. A cylindrical portion 405 having a shape penetrating the waved wall portion 403, and a plurality of fastening portions 406 disposed on the back side of the main body portion 402 and to which screws inserted through the upper frame member 410 are fastened. , is mainly provided.

The main body part 402 is formed in a box shape in such a manner that the front and rear dish-shaped members overlap each other with their open sides, and a space is formed inside. In addition, the included LED is arranged on the electronic board,
The electronic board is fixed to the body portion 402 .

The wavy wall portion 403 engages with the wavy wall portion 412 formed on the front side wall of the upper frame member 410 to easily determine the assembly position in the left-right direction, and the illumination unit 4 to the upper frame member 410.
01 to improve the workability of assembly.

The plate-like portion 404 is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the lower surface of the corrugated wall portion 412 of the upper frame member 410 , and is a portion that suppresses vertical displacement of the electrical decoration unit 401 with respect to the upper frame member 410 . The front side wall of the upper frame member 410 is recessed with a horizontally long groove that sandwiches the plate-like portion 404 from above and below.

The cylindrical portion 405 has a function as a through-hole for wiring through which the wiring of the electronic board on which the LEDs contained in the body portion 402 are arranged is passed to the upper frame member 410 side.

The illumination unit 401 is fastened and fixed to the upper frame member 410 by fastening screws to a plurality of fastening portions 406 through the upper frame member 410 . Here, when the upper frame member 410 is fastened and fixed to the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100), a closed space containing the speaker assembly 450 is formed between the upper side plate member 14e and access to the inside is made possible. formed to be difficult. That is, the upper frame member 410 is fastened and fixed to the upper side plate member 14e and the body frame 14a after the electrical decoration unit 401 is fastened and fixed.

119 is an exploded front perspective view of the upper frame member 410, and FIG. 120 is an exploded front perspective view of the upper frame member 41. FIG.
0 is an exploded rear perspective view of FIG. As shown in FIGS. 119 and 120, the upper frame member 410 is
A main body member 411 to which the illumination unit 401 is fastened and fixed, and a lower edge plate member formed in a curved shape along the lower edge of the main body member 411 and fastened and fixed from the back side along the lower edge of the main body member 411. 420, a right corner supporting member 430R fastened and fixed to the main body member 411 from the back side of the lower edge plate member 420 at the right corner of the main body member 411, and the front side of the lower edge plate member 420 at the left corner of the main body member 411. The left corner support member 430L is fastened and fixed to the main body member 411 from the rear side, and is fitted into the main body member 411 from the rear side to a position projecting from the opening 414 to the front side, and is pressed from the rear side by the right corner support member 430R. and a lens member 440 that is restricted from coming off to the back side and that constitutes the electrical decoration part 8033 .

The main body member 411 is a member elongated in the left and right direction, in which openings are formed on both left and right sides thereof for passing vibration waves (sound) generated from the speaker assembly 450, and the speaker covers 27 are arranged so as to cover the openings. On the front side, a wavy wall portion 412 formed in a wavy shape when viewed from above, and a portion of the wavy wall portion 412 facing the tubular portion 405 of the illumination unit 401 is larger than the outer shape of the tubular portion 405. a support through-hole 413 penetratingly formed with a slightly larger inner shape;
and an opening 414 penetrating in the front-rear direction at the upper right corner.

The wavy wall portion 412 is formed in substantially the same wavy shape as the wavy wall portion 403 of the electrical decoration unit 401 . This makes it possible to easily perform alignment in the horizontal direction when fitting the illumination unit 401 into the main body member 411 from the front side of the upper frame member 410 .

The tubular portion 405 is inserted through the support through hole 413 in the assembled state (see FIG. 86).
As a result, the wiring projecting through the cylindrical portion 405 can be passed through the support through-hole 413 to the rear side of the main body member 411 . Therefore, the other end of the wiring, one end of which is connected to the electronic board included in the illumination unit 401, can be connected to the terminal on the back side of the main body member 411, so that the front frame 14 is closed. It is possible to prevent the other end of the wiring from being detached.

The support through hole 413 defines the position of the tubular portion 405 when the tubular portion 405 is inserted.
Thereby, the support through-holes 413 can be used for positioning the electrical decoration unit 401 with respect to the upper frame member 410 .

The opening 414 is an opening that allows the lens member 440 to be visually recognized when viewed from the front. The upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100) has an LED 14 at a position aligned with the lens member 440 in the front-rear direction.
e2 is arranged, and the light emission of this LED 14e2 can be visually recognized by the player along the opening 414. - 特許庁

The main body member 411 has, on its back side, a wavy side portion 416 formed in a wavy shape when viewed from above, a supported groove 417 recessed from the back side at the lower end surface of the right corner, and a recessed portion from the back side at the lower end surface of the left corner. a supported groove 418 formed at a position close to the upper end, a fastening portion 419 formed at a symmetrical position near the upper end and formed so that a screw can be screwed therein; A fastening portion 419b is mainly provided.

The wavy side portion 416 has a shape that matches the shape of the opposing position of the lower edge plate member 420 (the shape of the wavy wall portion 422 formed at the front end portion of the lower edge). This makes it possible to easily position the lower edge plate member 420 in the left-right direction when fastening and fixing the lower edge plate member 420 to the main body member 411 .

The supported groove 417 has a shape in which the left and right hook portions can be fitted into the fitting groove 522b and the fitting groove 562b (see FIGS. 105 and 106) of the right panel unit 500, and the fitting state (FIG. 86) is formed.
), a load (such as weight) applied from the upper panel unit 400 can be applied to the right panel unit 500 via the surface on which the supported groove 417 is formed.

The supported groove 418 has a shape that can be fitted to the upper end portion of the electrical decoration portion 8031, and the fitted state (
86), the upper panel unit 40
It is configured such that a load (such as weight) given from 0 can be applied to the electrical decoration part 8031 .

The fastening portion 419 is disposed at a position where screws inserted through the through holes 463a and 483a (see FIG. 122) of the speaker assembly 450 can be fastened, and protrudes in a rib shape from the base to a position where the tip does not reach. and an enlarged rib 419a.

As will be described later, screws inserted through through holes 463a and 483a are fastened and fixed to the fastening portion 419 so that the front assembly 460, the rear assembly 480, and the upper side plate member 14e are attached to the main body frame 14a. (see FIG. 125(a)), the details of which will be described later.

In the present embodiment, the enlarged ribs 419a are three same-shaped ribs arranged at 120° intervals around the fastening portion 419 along the fastening direction of screws to the fastening portion 419 .

The second fastening portion 419b (see FIG. 118) is connected to the fastening portion 14e1 (see FIG. 100) of the upper side plate member 14e and the recessed portion 46 of the speaker assembly 450 at the lower position of the main body member 411.
2, 482 (see FIG. 122), and is formed at a position corresponding to the concave portions 462, 482 (see FIG. 122) of the speaker assembly 450 at the upper position of the body member 411. Details will be described later.

The lower edge plate member 420 includes a main body member 421 formed by bending a long plate, a wavy wall portion 422 formed in a wavy shape in a bottom view at the front side edge of the lower edge of the main body member 421, and After extending from the upper edge of the wavy wall portion 422 to the front side, it extends upward from the extending end, and the cross section L
A plurality of L-shaped extensions 423 formed in a letter shape and a plurality of extending portions 423 which are arranged at positions equidistant left and right from the center position of the main body plate portion 421 (upper end position of the curved shape) and penetrate vertically. and an opening 424 configured by a small-diameter through hole.

In a state in which the wavy wall portion 422 and the wavy side portion 416 of the main body member 411 are in front and back contact, the lower surface of the L-shaped extension portion 423 abuts the upper surface of the lower plate 416a having the wavy side portion 416 on the back surface, A part of the L-shaped extension portion 423 that extends upward is fastened and fixed to the main body member 411 in the front-rear direction.

Therefore, it is possible to increase the substantial plate thickness of the upper panel unit 400 at the portion where the L-shaped extension portion 423 and the lower plate 416a abut on the upper and lower sides, thereby improving the strength.

The opening 424 is the speaker 45 in the speaker assembly 450 (see FIG. 123).
1 through which the vibration wave (sound) output from the back side of the speaker assembly 450 to the inside passes (is emitted to the outside). The right corner support member 430R and the left corner support member 430L are provided with circular openings 430R1 and 430L1, which are circular openings through which vibrations generated toward the front side of the speaker assembly 450 pass.

The right corner support member 430R has a laterally long rectangular through hole 430R2 penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the opening 414 of the upper frame member 410 in the front-rear direction. Through hole 430R2
A player can see the light radiated through the lens member 440 through the opening 414 .

121 is an exploded front perspective view of speaker assembly 450, and FIG. 122 is an exploded rear perspective view of speaker assembly 450. FIG. In addition, in FIGS. 121 and 122, the speaker connection line 453 is illustrated by imaginary lines for easy understanding.

The speaker assembly 450 is composed of a pair of left and right assemblies 450R and 450L, which are fastened together to the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100) by screws inserted through connecting holes 469. The lower end is fastened and fixed to the upper side plate member 14e. Note that the speaker assembly 450 includes a pair of speaker assemblies 450R and 450R having substantially symmetrical shapes.
0L, the speaker assembly 450R will be explained, and the speaker assembly 4
Description of 50L is omitted.

The speaker assembly 450R includes a speaker (cone-shaped speaker) 451, which is an acoustic device that converts an electrical signal into an audible sound wave, and a front flange 452 of the speaker 451 inserted through a through hole 466. A front assembly 460 that is fastened and fixed from the front side, and an outer shape that substantially matches the outer shape of the front assembly 460 when viewed from the front,
Rear assembly 48 forming a space with front assembly 460 in the assembled state (see FIG. 100)
0 and .

The speaker 451 is attached to the front assembly 460 so as to close the through hole 466 of the front assembly 460 .
and emits a sound effect in relation to the game, and its speaker 451
A through-hole through which a speaker connection wire 453 (for example, an electric wire consisting of a copper wire and a covering portion covering the copper wire) extending with one end connected to the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 102) is drilled , and the terminal connector of the speaker connection line 453 is connected to the electronic board 14i (FIG. 102
), so that it is configured to be connected to the audio lamp controller 113 (see FIG. 4).

A front portion of the speaker 451 is covered with a protective cover 454 made of a synthetic fiber material that allows passage of sound emitted from the speaker 451 . And this protective cover 4
The speaker 451 covered with 54 is attached to the front assembly 460 with its front portion aligned with the speaker cover 27 (see FIG. 86).

Therefore, the front part of the speaker 451 is in direct contact with the atmosphere outside the pachinko machine 8010 (see FIG. 86) through the speaker cover 27 (see FIG. 86), and the reproduced sound from the speaker 451 cannot be heard. You can play back and output with high sound quality without any loss. In addition, the protective cover 454 can suitably protect the front portion of the speaker 451 without degrading the sound quality.

The front assembly 460 includes a body portion 46 formed in a cup shape that is elongated in the left and right direction and has an open back side.
1, a plurality of recessed portions 462 recessed from the upper and lower side edges of the main body portion 461 toward the center of the vertical width in a semicircular shape at the tip, and the back surface of the recessed portion 463b having the same shape as the recessed portions 462. An extension plate 463 extending in a plate shape from the side edge to the upper and lower side edges of the main body portion 461 toward the outside of the upper and lower widths, and the main body portion 461
A wiring passage recess 464 recessed from the back side end of the main body 461 toward the front side, a light passage through hole 465 formed through the upper right corner of the main body 461 in the front-rear direction, and a speaker 451 on the right side of the main body 461 , a plurality of passage forming ribs 467 extending from the cup-shaped bottom plate (front side plate) of the main body 461 toward the back side, and the rear assembly 480. a plurality of fastening portions 468 to which screws are fastened and fixed; connecting holes 469 through which screws for fastening the left and right speaker assemblies 450L and 450R together to the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100) are inserted; A front recessed portion 471 recessed from the back side toward the front side is mainly provided at the lower end portion of the portion 461T.

The main body portion 461 is divided in the left-right direction into a base-side main body portion 461B disposed on the side where the through hole 466 is formed, and a left-right center side of the base-end main body portion 461B (FIG. 12).
1 (left side)), and a distal end side main body portion 461T that is connected to the center side (left side in FIG. 121) of the intermediate body portion 461M in the left-right direction. A space is continuously formed between the proximal side main body portion 461B, the intermediate main body portion 461M, and the distal side main body portion 461T and the rear side assembly 480 .

The main body portion 461 includes a rear side wall portion 461H formed as a wall portion that surrounds substantially the entire circumference of the outer shape when viewed from the front. The rear side wall portion 461H has an edge portion without barbs on the inside (an edge portion on the inside where no flange or the like is formed).

The recessed portion 462 is a recessed portion in which the fastening portion 14e1 of the upper side plate member 14e (see FIGS. 100 and 101) is disposed on the center side of the circle, and is used for positioning with the fastening portion 14e1. be done.

The extension plate 463 has through holes 463a through which screws are inserted from the rear side. Through hole 463
The screws to be inserted through a are threaded from the rear side of the main body frame 14a through the common fastening hole 14a2 and the upper side plate member 1.
4e (see FIG. 102) and through hole 483a of rear assembly 480.
and the through hole 463a, and screwed into the fastening portion 419 (see FIG. 120) of the main body member 411. As shown in FIG.

That is, in the speaker assembly 450R, a screw inserted through the through hole 463a through the upper side plate member 14e is screwed into the main body member 411 from the rear side of the main body frame 14a. It is pressed against the rear assembly 480 . Therefore, the speaker assembly 450R is fastened together with the body frame 14a, the upper side plate member 14e, and the body member 411, thereby being firmly fixed to each other.

According to this configuration, the speaker assembly 450 is fastened and fixed to the metal body frame 14a with the upper side plate member 14e interposed therebetween (fastened and fixed to a hard material with the resin material interposed therebetween). Thereby, the acoustic effect of the speaker 451 can be improved.

The wire passage recess 464 forms part of an opening through which a speaker connection wire 453 connected to the speaker 451 is passed. The recess width of the wire passage recess 464 is formed smaller than the cross-sectional outline of the covered portion of the speaker connection wire 453 . As a result, pressure is applied to the covered portion of the speaker connection wire 453 passing through the wire passage recess 464 , thereby preventing a gap from occurring between the wire passage recess 464 and the speaker connection wire 453 . Therefore, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a problem that the acoustic effect is lowered due to sound leakage from the opening through which the speaker connection line 453 passes. 121 and 122, the illustration of the rear side wall portion 461H is omitted (broken) for the sake of convenience, and the wiring passage concave portion 464 is illustrated so as to be visible.

Here, in this embodiment, the wiring passage recess 464 is formed not in the rear assembly 480 but in the front assembly 460 to which the speaker 451 is assembled. The speaker connection line 453 that is connected to the speaker 451 in advance can be easily passed through the wiring passage recess 464 . As a result, the workability of assembling the speaker assembly 450 can be improved.

The light passage through-hole 465 is the LED 14e arranged in the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100).
2 through which the light emitted toward the lens member 440 passes.

The passage-forming rib 467 abuts on the passage-forming rib 487 of the rear assembly 480 without any gap in the front and rear, forming a curved passage (
123). This curved path is a path through which vibration waves (sound) emitted from the speaker 451 to the rear side pass. A front side end portion of the passage forming rib 467 is connected to a front side plate of the main body portion 461 . This prevents the formation of a gap on the front side of the passage forming rib 467 .

The front recessed portion 471 is formed in a size that surrounds the outer shape of the opening 424 of the lower edge plate member 420 (see FIG. 120) (protruding slightly outward from the outer shape).

The rear assembly 480 is a body part 48 that is elongated in the left and right direction and formed in a cup shape with an open front side.
1, a plurality of recessed portions 482 recessed from the upper and lower side edges of the main body portion 481 toward the center of the vertical width in a semicircular shape at the tip, and the back surface of the recessed portion 483b having the same shape as the recessed portions 482. An extension plate 483 extending in a plate shape from the side edge to the upper and lower side edges of the main body portion 481 toward the outside of the upper and lower widths, and the main body portion 481
A wiring pressing convex portion 484 projecting toward the front side of the body portion 481, a light passing through hole 485 formed through the front and rear direction at the upper right corner of the body portion 481, and a cup-shaped bottom plate (back side plate) of the body portion 481. A plurality of passage forming ribs 487 extending like ribs toward the front side and the fastening portion 4 of the front assembly 460
A plurality of through-holes 488 formed as through-holes through which screws are inserted at positions corresponding to 68 in the front-rear direction, and front recessed portions 471 of the front assembly 460 at positions corresponding in the front-rear direction. and a rear recessed portion 491 that is recessed toward.

The body portion 481 extends in a plate shape toward the front side in such a manner as to surround the outer periphery of the body portion 481 at a position moved inward by the plate thickness of the body portion 461 of the front assembly 460 from the outer shape of the rear side plate. The front side wall portion 48 formed from a shape that fits inside the inner side surface of the back side wall portion 461H of
1H is provided.

Since the speaker assembly 450R has a double wall portion that is fitted with the rear side wall portion 461H and the front side wall portion 481H on the entire outer periphery, it is possible to prevent air from leaking from the outer peripheral position. . As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem that the acoustic effect is lowered due to sound leakage from the outer peripheral position.

The front side wall portion 481H has a pair of auxiliary protrusions projecting toward the front side beyond the wire pressing protrusions 484 at positions sandwiching the wire pressing protrusions 484 on the left and right with a gap that allows the speaker connection line 453 to pass through. 481 Ha.

The auxiliary protrusions 481Ha are a pair of protrusions that prevent the position of the speaker connection wire 453 temporarily fixed in the wire passage recess 464 from being shifted when the rear assembly 480 is assembled to the front assembly 460 . That is, since the inner side surfaces of the pair of auxiliary protrusions 481Ha are tapered so as to widen to the left and right toward the front side (tip side) (see FIG. 124(c)), the speaker connection line 45
3 deviates from the wiring passage concave portion 464 and shifts to the left or right, the shift can be corrected by the taper of the pair of auxiliary convex portions 481Ha.

As a result, the speaker connection wire 453 can be returned to the wire passage recess 464 in the process of assembly, and in the assembled state (see FIG. 100), the speaker connection wire 453 is formed from the wire passage recess 464 and the wire pressing projection 484. can be easily accommodated in an opening in the

The recessed portion 482 has the same outer shape as the recessed portion 462 in a front view, and the fastening portion 14e1 of the upper side plate member 14e (see FIGS. 100 and 101) is arranged on the center side of the circle. It is a concave portion and is used for positioning with the fastening portion 14e1.

The extension plate 483 has through holes 483a through which screws are inserted from the rear side. Through hole 483
The screws to be inserted through a are threaded from the rear side of the main body frame 14a through the common fastening hole 14a2 and the upper side plate member 1.
4e through the common fastening hole 14e3 (see FIG. 102), through hole 483a and front assembly 46.
0 through the through hole 463a and screwed into the fastening portion 419 of the body member 411 (see FIG. 101).

That is, the speaker assembly 450R is extended from the back side of the body frame 14a to the extent that the screw is tightened by screwing a screw inserted into the through hole 483a through the upper side plate member 14e into the fastening portion 419 of the body member 411. The installation plate 483 is pressed against the extension plate 463 of the front assembly 460 . Accordingly, the speaker assembly 450R is fastened together with the body frame 14a, the upper side plate member 14e and the body member 411, and is firmly fixed to each other.

The wiring pressing protrusion 484 is protruded along the upper edge of the rear side plate of the main body 481 and formed with a width that fits inside the wiring passage recess 464. The protruding length is slightly shorter than the outer diameter of the covered portion of the speaker connection wire 453 .

That is, the speaker connection wire 4 is inserted into the opening surrounded by the wire pressing protrusion 484 and the wire passing recess 464 .
53, the covered portion of the speaker connection wire 453 is compressed, and a gap is generated between the speaker connection wire 453 and an opening surrounded by the wire pressing protrusion 484 and the wire passage recess 464. can be prevented. As a result, the speaker connection line 453
It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem that the acoustic effect is lowered due to sound leakage from the opening for passing the sound.

The light passage through-hole 485 is the LED 14e arranged in the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100).
2 through which the light emitted toward the lens member 440 passes. The light passing through-hole 485 is formed of a circular opening that surrounds one LED. The light passage through-hole 465 has a larger cross-sectional shape than the light-passing through hole 485, and is tapered so that the cross-sectional shape becomes larger toward the front side. ), the light passage through-holes 465 and 485 communicate in the front-rear direction.

The passage-forming ribs 487 are formed at the same position as the passage-forming ribs 467 of the front assembly 460 in a front view, and are in contact with each other without gaps in the front and rear. It is a rib that forms a curved path (see FIG. 123). This curved path is a path through which vibration waves (sound) emitted from the speaker 451 to the rear side pass.

The passage forming rib 487 is fixed to the front side wall portion 481H and is attached to the front side wall portion 481H.
are formed at the front and rear ends and surface positions of the That is, the rear side end portion of the passage forming rib 487 is located at the main body portion 48
1 back side plate. This prevents the formation of a gap on the rear side of the passage forming rib 487 .

Here, the passage forming rib 487 is designed to have dimensions such that the front side end abuts the passage forming rib 467 and a compressive force is generated in the front-rear direction. That is, the passage forming rib 467 is applied with a compressive force directed toward the back side from the passage forming rib 467, and the passage forming rib 4 is compressed by the compressive force.
67, 487 will close the gap while elastically deforming in the front-rear direction (Fig. 124(b)).
reference).

At this time, if the passage-forming rib 487 has a low rigidity in the left-right direction and bends in the left-right direction, the compressive force may not work well and the gap may not be closed. On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the passage-forming rib 487 is fixed to the front side wall portion 481H, the rigidity in the left-right direction is increased by the strength of the front side wall portion 481H (furthermore, in the assembled state (see FIG. 100), the overlapped rear surface is reduced). strength to be reinforced by the side wall portion 461H). Therefore, the rigidity in the lateral direction of the passage forming rib 487 can be strengthened, and the lateral bending of the passage forming rib 487 can be suppressed, so that the gap between the passage forming rib 467 can be closed well. can be done.

The rear recessed portion 491 is formed to have a shape inverted from the front recessed portion 471 and forms an opening together with the front recessed portion 471 . The opening is formed in a size surrounding the outer shape of the opening 424 of the lower edge plate member 420 (see FIG. 120) (protruding slightly outside the outer shape). It is placed in a position surrounding the outer shape.

123(a) is a rear view of the front assembly 460 and FIG. 123(b) is a rear view of the rear assembly 48.
0 is a front view. In FIGS. 123(a) and 123(b), for ease of understanding,
A speaker connection line 453 is shown in phantom lines, and a state in which a front assembly 460 and a rear assembly 480, which are arranged to face each other, are unfolded with their surfaces facing each other toward the front of the paper are shown. 123(a) and 123(b) are folded along a line (not shown) drawn vertically in the left-right center of the paper surface, so that the contact positions of the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 are adjusted. can be matched. That is, the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e and the rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e can be brought into contact with each other in the front-rear direction.

In the assembly state of the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 (speaker assembly 450, see FIG. 100), inside the speaker assembly 450 is the proximal body 46 of the front assembly 460.
An acoustic chamber is formed on the back side of 1B. Then, with the acoustic chamber as the base end, an acoustic passage as a passage path for the vibration wave Ws (sound) output from the back side of the speaker 451 extends toward the tip side main body portion 461T. This acoustic path is configured as a curved path by path forming ribs 467 and 487 .

As shown in FIGS. 123(a) and 123(b), the passage forming ribs 467 are formed laterally inward (to the left) of the wire passage recesses 464 through which the wires pass, and alternately vertically toward the left. Rib portions 467a and 467b arranged at a plurality of locations (five locations in this embodiment) in
, 467c, 467d, 467e.

By forming the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, and 467e on the inner side (left side) of the wiring passage recess 464 through which the wiring passes, each rib portion 467 can be positioned at the time of assembly.
a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e and each rib portion 487a of the rear assembly 480,
It is possible to prevent the wiring from being sandwiched between 487b, 487c, 487d, and 487e.

Since the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, and 467e are connected to the main body portion 461 and the rear side wall portion 461H, the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, and 467d
, 467e can enhance the rigidity of the body portion 461. As shown in FIG.

Each of the rib portions 467 a , 467 b , 467 c , 467 d , 467 e together with the passage forming rib 487 of the rear assembly 480 form a bent passage through which the vibration wave Ws generated from the rear side of the speaker 451 passes.

Here, when there is no passage forming rib 467 and a horizontally long cavity is formed, the speaker 451
While the vibration wave generated from the groove 467 travels linearly, in this embodiment, the vibration wave Ws travels while avoiding the passage forming rib 467 .

That is, as shown in FIG. 123(a) as an example of the traveling path, the vibration wave Ws travels to the left side (arrow L side) and the nearest rib portion (for example, rib portion 467b) in the left-right direction is arranged on the lower side, the traveling direction between the ribs is the upper left direction (directions of arrows L and U).

On the other hand, after the rib portion (for example, the rib portion 467b) of the passage forming rib 467 is arranged on the lower side, the vibration wave Ws is arranged on the left side (arrow L side) of the rib portion (for example, the rib portion 467b) that is closest in the left-right direction. , rib portion 467c) are arranged on the upper side, the traveling direction is the lower left direction (directions of arrows L and D).

Therefore, like this embodiment, each rib portion 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 4
When 67e are arranged alternately in the vertical direction, the traveling path of the vibration wave Ws can be a curved path in the vertical direction, and the length of the traveling path of the vibration wave Ws is ensured to be longer than the lateral width of the space. can do.

As a result, it is possible to easily adjust the travel path length of the vibration wave Ws until it passes through the opening formed by the pair of recessed portions 471 and 491, thereby suppressing the generation of standing waves due to the vibration wave Ws. be able to.

Further, in this embodiment, the recessed portions 462 and 463b have the same function as the passage forming rib 467.
can also be generated by That is, the vibration wave Ws is caused to move in the upper left direction between the recessed portion 462 arranged in the immediate vicinity of the front recessed portion 471 and the recessed portion 463b arranged above and on the right side (arrow R side). (Arrows L, U directions).

Therefore, the recessed portions 462 and 463b have the effect of regulating the traveling direction of the vibration wave Ws in addition to the effect of assembling.

As shown in FIG. 123(b), the passage forming rib 487 serves as the wiring pressing protrusion 4 for pressing the wiring.
Ribs 487a, 487b, 487c, and 484 are formed on the inner side (left side) of 84 in the left-right direction and arranged at a plurality of locations (five locations in this embodiment) alternately vertically toward the left side.
87d and 487e.

Since each rib portion 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e is connected to the main body portion 481 and the front side wall portion 481H, each rib portion 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d
, 487e can increase the rigidity of the body portion 481. As shown in FIG.

Here, each rib portion 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e
The ribs 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, and 467e of 60 are formed in a shape that matches in the front-rear direction, and are arranged to face each other in the front-rear direction in the assembled state (see FIG. 100).

The actions of the rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, and 487e are similar to the actions of the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, and 467e described above, so description thereof will be omitted.

Further, in this embodiment, the recessed portions 482 and 483b have the same function as the passage forming rib 487.
can also be generated by That is, the vibration wave Ws is placed between the recessed portion 482 arranged in the immediate vicinity of the rear recessed portion 491 and the recessed portion 483b arranged above and on the right side (arrow R side). It can be advanced in the direction (arrow L, U direction). Therefore, the recessed portion 48
2, 483b has an effect of regulating the traveling direction of the vibration wave Ws in addition to the effect of assembling.

Here, the space formed inside the speaker assembly 450R is narrowed in vertical width as the distance from the speaker 451 increases, and is narrowed once at the position where the recessed portions 462, 482 and the recessed portions 463b, 483b are vertically aligned. Further, at a position away from the speaker 451 , the vertical width is expanded at once, and then communicates with the opening formed by the concave portions 471 and 491 . Thereby, the acoustic effect can be improved.

In this embodiment, in the longitudinal direction of the speaker assembly 450, the speaker 451
Since the base end side body portion 461B side to which is assembled is sealed by the front side assembly 460 and the rear side assembly 480, the vibration wave Ws (sound) output from the back side of the speaker 451 is
In search of an exit, it advances to the tip side body portion 461T side, which is the opposite side in the longitudinal direction. Tip side main body 4
The vibration wave Ws (sound) reaching 61T passes through the opening formed by the front recessed portion 471 and the rear recessed portion 491, the opening 424 (see FIG. 120) of the lower edge plate member 420 in order, and then reaches the speaker assembly. The sound is emitted to the outside of the solid 450R (the outside of the pachinko machine 8010 (see FIG. 86)).

That is, the speaker assembly 450 is configured as a bass-reflex type speaker box, and the rear portion of the speaker 451 is the internal path of the speaker assembly 450 and the recessed portion 47 .
1, 491 and the opening 424 (see FIG. 120), the pachinko machine 8010 is in direct contact with the atmosphere outside, so the sound output from the back side of the speaker 451 is You can play back and output with high sound quality without being stuck.

The bass reflex type speaker assembly 450 resonates the sound output from the back side of the speaker 451 to invert the phase, and the sound output from the front side of the speaker 451 and the sound output from the front side of the speaker 451 are in phase with each other. Sound can be emitted from the opening formed by That is, the bass-reflex type speaker assembly 450 can emphasize the sound output from the back side of the speaker 450 by superimposing the sound output from the front side and the sound output from the front side by superimposing them in the same phase without canceling each other due to the opposite phase. That is, it becomes possible to amplify heavy bass. This will
The pachinko machine 8010 according to the present embodiment is capable of producing realistic effects,
It is possible to raise the player's interest and excitement for the game.

In this embodiment, since the upper panel unit 400 in which the opening 424 is formed is arranged on the front side of the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 91), the low frequency sound output from the back side of the speaker 451 is transmitted through the speaker assembly. The internal space of 450 is used as an enclosure, and is released to the front side of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 100) (released downward to the front side of the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 86)). As a result, it is possible to appropriately provide the player playing the game on the front side of the front frame 14 with the effect of the low sound emitted from the front frame 14 toward the front side.

The tuning of the sound of the vibration wave Ws (sound) is performed by setting the volume of the speaker assembly 450,
This can be done by setting the path length of the vibration wave Ws. For example, in this embodiment, each rib portion 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e of the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 48
0 rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, and 487e are defined as the path of the vibration wave Ws. Therefore, each rib portion 467a, 467b, 467c, 46
7d, 467e and the rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, and 487e can be individually set for their arrangement and vertical extension length to tune the sound of the vibration wave Ws (sound).

In addition, in the present embodiment, each rib portion 467a, 467b, 467c, 467c of the front assembly 460
67d, 467e and each rib portion 487a, 487b, 487c, 487 of the rear assembly 480
d and 487e are arranged at a portion where a load is applied when the speaker assembly 450 is fastened and fixed to reinforce the speaker assembly 450, in addition to the above purpose.

For example, the rib portions 467c, 487c, 467d, and 487d are arranged near the fastening portion 468 and the through hole 488, so that the fastening portion 468 and the vicinity of the through hole 488 can be reinforced. It is possible to prevent the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 from being damaged by the load applied to the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 when the screws are screwed.

Further, the extension plates 463 and 483 are sandwiched and pressed between the enlarged rib 419a of the fastening portion 419 and the upper side plate member 14e in the assembled state (see FIG. 125(a)).
7c, 487c, 467d, and 487d are arranged closer to the extension plates 463 and 483 than the fastening portion 468 and the through hole 488 which are closest thereto. Therefore, even after the front side assembly 460 and the rear side assembly 480 are fastened and fixed by screwing screws into the fastening portion 468, the extension plates 463 and 48 are fixed.
Screws are screwed into the fastening portions 419 inserted through the through holes 463a, 483a of No. 3, and when the upper frame member 410, the upper side plate member 14e, and the main body frame 14a are fastened and fixed, the rib portions 467c, 467c and 467c are inserted.
By bringing the 87c, 467d, and 487d into contact with each other, the front side assembly 460 and the rear side assembly 48
0 deformation can be prevented. That is, each rib portion 467c, 487c, 467d, 48
7d allows the front assembly 460 and rear assembly 480 to be reinforced.

Also, for example, the rib portions 467b and 487b are connected to the upper end portions of the recessed portions 462 and 482, respectively. Here, the recessed portions 462 and 482 are portions where the fastening portion 14e1 (see FIGS. 102 and 125) of the upper side plate member 14e is positioned downward in the assembled state, and the speaker assembly 450 is positioned on the upper side plate member. 14e, the speaker assembly 45
0 recessed portions 462 and 482 ride on the fastening portion 14e1. Therefore, the recessed portion 462
, 482 is subjected to an upward load from the fastening portion 14 e 1 as a reaction force generated when the fastening portion 14 e 1 supports the weight of the speaker assembly 450 .

Therefore, it is thought that the recessed portions 462 and 482 are likely to be damaged. It is possible to reinforce the load applied to the portions 462 and 482 and improve the durability of the recessed portions 462 and 482 .

An opening 424 (see FIG. 120) formed from a plurality of small-diameter through holes functions as a bass reflex port. Here, compared to the case where the opening 424 is formed from a single large-diameter through hole, fraudulent acts such as illegally entering the pachinko machine 8010 through the opening 424 with a wire, piano wire, or the like are prevented. It can be made easier to control.

In addition, in such fraudulent acts, wires, piano wires, etc. are illegally entered into the game area and nails are deformed. and the opening formed by the rear recessed portion 491, and the opening formed by the wire passing concave portion 464 and the wire pressing convex portion 484. A gap in the opening formed by the wire pressing projection 484 is closed by the speaker connection wire 453 . Therefore, when a wire, a piano wire, or the like enters the speaker assembly 450 through the opening formed by the front side recessed portion 471 and the rear side recessed portion 491, the speaker assembly 450 may be displaced through an opening other than the place where the wire or the piano wire entered. It is possible to make it difficult for the tip of a wire, piano wire, or the like to reach the game area through a through-hole formed as an opening for passing the speaker connection wire 453 through the upper side plate member 14e.

In addition, the through holes formed as openings for passing the speaker connection wires 453 through the upper side plate member 14e are arranged near the left and right ends of the upper side plate member 14e according to the arrangement of the speakers 451, so that wires and piano wires are not required. It is possible to lengthen the distance between the opening formed by the front side recessed portion 471 and the rear side recessed portion 491 , which is the location where the sound and the like enter the speaker assembly 450 .

Therefore, even if such a fraudulent act is performed, the success rate of the fraudulent act can be lowered, and it is possible to easily prevent fraudulent profit from being generated.

124(a) is a rear view of the speaker assembly 450R, FIG. 124(b) is a cross-sectional view of the speaker assembly 450R along line CXXIVb-CXXIVb of FIG. 124(a), and FIG. 124(c). 124(a) is a top view of the speaker assembly 450R viewed in the direction of arrow CXXIVc in FIG. 124(a), and FIG. 124(d) is an arrow CXXI in FIG.
It is a partial bottom view of the speaker assembly 450R viewed in the Vd direction. Note that FIG.
) and FIG. 124(c), the speaker connection line 453 is illustrated by an imaginary line for easy understanding, while the illustration of the speaker connection line 453 is omitted in the partially enlarged view of FIG. 124(c). .

As shown enlarged in FIG. 124(b), the inner side surface 461Hi (lower surface in FIG. 124(b)) of the rear side wall portion 461H of the front assembly 460 has a tapered shape that slopes inward toward the rear side. , the outer surface 481Ho of the front side wall portion 481H of the rear assembly 480 (FIG. 124(b)
The upper surface) has a tapered shape that inclines inward toward the back side and has an inner surface 461H.
It is shaped so as to fit with i in the assembled state. As a result, the work efficiency of inserting the front sidewall portion 481H of the rear assembly 480 into the rear sidewall portion 461H of the front assembly 460 can be improved.

In FIG. 124(b), the position of the front end of the rib portion 487c in the assembled state is illustrated by a solid line, and the position of the front end of the rib portion 487c before assembly is illustrated by an imaginary line. That is, in the assembled state, the rib portion 487c receives a compressive load from the rib portion 467c and is elastically deformed. A compressive force acts from the rib portion 487c toward the rib portion 467c due to the restoring force generated by this elastic deformation, so that the gap between the rib portions 467c and 487c can be filled. In addition, each rib portion 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e, 487a
, 487b, 487c, 487d, and 487e are designed to have a dimensional relationship in which a compressive load is generated between the abutting rib portions.

As shown in FIG. 124(c), the intermediate main body portion 461M is formed shorter in front-rear dimension than the proximal side main body portion 461B and the distal end side main body portion 461T. Therefore, the tip side body portion 46
Compared to 1T, the cross-sectional area of the path through which the vibration wave Ws can pass can be made smaller (squeezed) in the intermediate body portion 461M. Thereby, the improvement of an acoustic effect can be aimed at.

As shown in FIG. 124(d), the internal space of the tip side body portion 461T disposed above the opening formed by the front side recessed portion 471 and the rear side recessed portion 491 is the interior of the intermediate body portion 461M. A large space is ensured in a form that bulges in the front-rear direction compared to the space. As a result, the vibration wave Ws that has reached the distal end side main body portion 461T can be temporarily retained in the distal end side main body portion 461T and released at a low speed. As a result, it is possible to improve the acoustic effect, for example, it is possible to make it easier to hear deep bass by the vibration wave Ws.

FIG. 125(a) shows the front assembly 46 along line CXXVa-CXXVa in FIG. 124(a).
0, a partial cross-sectional view of the rear assembly 480, the upper frame member 410, the body frame 14a and the upper side plate member 14e, and FIG. FIG. 11 is a partial cross-sectional view of the side assembly 480, the upper frame member 410, the body frame 14a and the upper side plate member 14e;

As shown in FIG. 125(a), the enlarged rib 419a of the fastening portion 419 extends through the through holes 463a and 463a.
The screw inserted through 483a is fastened and fixed to the fastening portion 419, so that the front assembly 460
, the rear assembly 480 and the upper side plate member 14e are sandwiched between them and the body frame 14a.
That is, by arranging the enlarged rib 419a on the front surface of the extension plate 463, it is possible to prevent the front assembly 460, the rear assembly 480, and the upper side plate member 14e from being displaced in the front-rear direction. , the front assembly 460, the rear assembly 480, the upper side plate member 14e, and the metal body frame 14a can be firmly fixed.

As shown in FIG. 125(b), the second fastening portion 419b is fastened to the fastening portion 14e1 of the upper side plate member 14e at the lower position of the upper frame member 410, and the speaker assembly is attached at the upper position of the upper frame member 410. It is formed at a position corresponding to recessed portions 462 and 482 of 450 .

The second fastening portion 419b and the fastening portion 14e1 are disposed inside the recessed portions 462 and 482 (they pass through the recessed portions 462 and 482 in the fastening direction without coming into contact with each other).
And, without the rear assembly 480, the upper frame member 410 and the upper side plate member 14e are fastened and fixed.

The body frame 14a and the upper side plate member 14e are fastened together to the second fastening portion 419b at the upper position of the main body member 411, and the upper side plate member is fastened to the second fastening portion 419b at the lower position of the main body member 411. 14e is fastened and fixed, and the body frame 14a is not fastened and fixed.

Further, at the upper position of the main body member 411, the second fastening portion 419b (see FIG. 118) is arranged inside the concave portions 462 and 482 (the portion extending toward the rear side is arranged inside). At the lower position of the body member 411, the fastening portion 14e1 (see FIG. 100) is recessed portion 462,
482 (the part extending to the front side is arranged inside).

In this embodiment, the separate left and right speakers 451 are arranged in independent speaker assemblies 450R and 450L, respectively.
Conflict with the sound reproduced and output from the speaker 451 arranged in 450L can be avoided, and the reproduced sound can be reproduced with high quality as transparent sound without being muffled.

In this embodiment, the extension plate 483 of the rear assembly 480 and the upper side plate member 14e are in contact with each other at the upper part of the speaker assembly 450 (see FIG. 125(a)). In the lower part, the rear surface of the rear assembly 480 and the front surface of the upper side plate member 14e are separated from each other, and the front surface of the upper side plate member 14e protrudes toward the front side in a portion arranged to face the lower end of the rear assembly 480, The projecting portion and the lower end of the rear assembly 480 abut on each other in the front-rear direction. Namely
The speaker assembly 450 is not configured to be in contact (sticky) with the upper side plate member 14e over the entire surface, but is in a line-contact manner particularly at the lower end.

In this case, the portion that protrudes from the upper side plate member 14e and contacts the lower end of the speaker assembly 450 can function as an insulator, so that the acoustic effect of the sound output from the speaker 451 can be improved.

In this embodiment, the portion that protrudes from the upper side plate member 14e and contacts the lower end of the speaker assembly 450 is integrally formed with the upper side plate member 14e (made of synthetic resin).
However, it is not limited to this.

For example, a metal member may be provided between the speaker assembly 450 and the upper side plate member 14e, a member made of ebony, or a glass member may be provided. Alternatively, a member made of concrete may be provided, a soft resin material may be provided, or another commercially available member may be provided.

In particular, when arranging a metal member, it is desirable that the specific gravity is high. For example, it is desirable to employ cast iron, zinc, brass, lead, steel, and the like. By using these metals, it is possible to add depth to the sound.

Moreover, it is desirable that the member has high hardness. Examples include cast iron, steel, glass, and ceramics. By using these members, the rise performance of sound can be improved.

As for the shape, they may protrude in the shape of an elongated plate, may protrude in the shape of spikes, or may protrude in a form with rounded ends. Also, the upper side plate member 14e and the speaker assembly 450 are not limited to being fixed, and may be connected in a floating manner.

In addition, the arrangement of the portion functioning as the insulator described above is the same as that of the speaker assembly 45.
It is not limited to the back surface of the lower end of 0. For example, the rear surface of the upper end of the speaker assembly 450, the rear surface of the left and right ends of the speaker assembly 450, or the rear surface of the speaker assembly 450 may be used.
The side or front of 50 may also be used.

For example, when arranged on the rear surface of the upper end portion, a member functioning as an insulator is cylindrical, arranged between the rear assembly 480 and the upper side plate member 14e, and a screw to be inserted through the through hole 483a is inserted. Positioning may be done by In this case, it is possible to eliminate the need for a separate locking member for positioning the member functioning as an insulator, and the rear assembly 480, the upper side plate member 14e, and the insulator function depending on the degree of tightening of the screw inserted through the through hole 483a. It is possible to adjust the sound effect by adjusting the degree of contact with the member (the load applied to each other).

At this time, even if the screw inserted through the through-hole 483a is loosened, the speaker assembly 450 remains unaffected by the screw inserted through the connecting hole 469 (see FIG. 123(a)) and the connecting hole 469.
A screw inserted through a through-hole arranged on the opposite side of the connecting hole 469 in the left-right direction with the same shape as , and a through-hole arranged at the lower end of the speaker assembly 450 at the left-right position where the through-hole is arranged. As a result, the speaker assembly 450 can be prevented from coming off the upper side plate member 14e.

Regarding fixing of the upper frame member 410 to the upper side plate member 14e, the upper frame member 41 is fixed.
0 indicates the fastening portion 14e1 of the upper side plate member 14e (Fig. 1
00) is screwed into the fastening portion 419 (see FIG. 125(b)) to fasten and fix. As described above, in the fastening and fixing between the fastening portion 14e1 and the fastening portion 419, no load is applied to the speaker assembly 450. Therefore, by firmly fastening and fixing the fastening portion 14e1 and the fastening portion 419, It is possible to prevent the upper frame member 410 from coming off from the upper side plate member 14e while loosely tightening the screws inserted through the through holes 483a (adjusting the degree of tightening).

Also, the same relationship as the above-described speaker assembly 450 and the upper side plate member 14e is
The same applies to the relationship between the speaker assembly 450 and the body frame 14a connected and fixed via the upper side plate member 14e. That is, the metal body frame 14a can be made to function as an insulator, and the material and contact relationship can be designed in the same manner as described above.

126 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board 13 and the inner frame 12, FIG. 127(a) is a rear view of the game board 13, and FIG. 127(b) is a front view of the inner frame 12. . In addition, Fig. 127
(b) shows the inner frame 12 with the game board 13 removed.

First, in order to explain the procedure for fixing the game board 13 to the inner frame 12, the supporting portions 12a,
12b will be explained. As shown in FIG. 126, at the upper and lower corners of the inner surface of the left wall of the inner frame 12, a left end front support portion 12a and a left end rear support portion 12b are spaced forward and backward for the purpose of supporting the left end portion of the game board 13. are placed.

The left end front support portion 12a is formed with an inclined surface 12a1 that inclines backward toward the left from the right end of the rear end surface that is arranged to face the game board 13 in the assembled state (see FIG. 89). A flat surface 12a2 extending in the left-right direction is formed leftward from the left end. In the assembled state, the flat surface 12a2 and the front surface of the game board 13 are in surface contact.

The rear left end support portion 12b has a rectangular outer shape when viewed from the front. . The left end rear support portion 12b includes an elastic support portion 12b1 having one end disposed inside thereof and a portion protruding from the front end surface of the cup-shaped portion.

The elastic support portion 12b1 is arranged in a posture of projecting toward the front side as it goes to the left in the state of its natural length. That is, the elastic support portion 12b1 and the inclined surface 12a1 of the left front support portion 12a jointly
A tapered shape that expands to the side (to the right) where the game board 13 is arranged in the horizontal direction is formed. As a result, it is possible to improve workability when an operator assembles the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 . Next, a procedure for fixing the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 will be described with reference to FIGS. 128 and 129. FIG.

Figures 128(a) and 128(b) are CXXVIIIa-CXXV of Figure 127(b)
129(a) and 129(b) are side views of the board support device 600 and the game board 13 schematically showing the board support device 600 and the game board 13. FIG. is. 128 and 129 show the process of assembling the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 in chronological order, and FIG. 128(b) and 129(a) show the game board 13 just before the assembly to the inner frame 12 is completed, and FIG. 129(b) shows the game board 13 after the assembly to the inner frame 12 is completed. illustrated. In addition, in FIGS. 128 and Z39, in order to facilitate understanding,
A part of the configuration of the game board 13 and the inner frame 12 is omitted in the drawing.

When an operator assembles the game board 13 to the inner frame 12, first, the game board 13 is temporarily placed on the upper surface of the plate passage forming member 160, and after adjusting the vertical position of the game board 13 to some extent, the game board 13 is installed.
is slid between the left end front support portion 12a and the left end rear support portion 12b. At this time, as shown in FIG. 128(a), the game board 13 is slid into the inner frame 12 in a posture rotated about an axis facing the vertical direction, so that the left end front support on the front side is provided. There is a possibility that the portion 12b and the game board 13 may interfere with each other.
Since a1 is formed, the range (position) where the game board 13 and the left end front support portion 12b interfere
can be reduced. Thereby, workability can be improved.

Next, as shown in FIG. 128(b), the left end of the game board 13 (specifically, the inclined surface 12a
1 and the front surface of the game board 13), the game board 13 is rotated so as to approach the inner frame 12.例文帳に追加In the course of this rotation, the front surface of the game board 13 is arranged to face the flat surface 12a2, and a biasing force is applied toward the game board 13 from the elastic support portions 12b1. Namely
The front surface of the game board 13 is pressed against the flat surface 12a2 by the biasing force applied from the elastic support portion 12b1. Thereby, the game board 13 can be temporarily fixed to the inner frame 12 .

In the process of rotating the game board 13, the vertical position of the game board 13 is the support bottom 1 of the inner frame.
2c. The support bottom portion 12c is a plate-like portion formed on the inner frame 12 along the left-right direction in an arrangement and length corresponding to the lower bottom surface of the game board 13, and is in an assembled state (see FIG. 90).
A guide rib 1 that supports the game board 13 from below and whose front upper end is cut as an inclined surface
A plurality of 2c1 are provided in the left-right direction.

With this configuration, in the process of changing the state from FIG. 128(a) to FIG. 128(b), the rear edge of the lower bottom surface of the game board 13 passes through the front edge of the guide rib 12c1 in top view. Since the game board 13 rides on the inclined surface of the guide rib 12c1 each time, the rotation of the game board 13 can be progressed smoothly by causing the game board 13 to ride on the guide rib 12c1 in order from the left side. . Therefore, the workability of assembling the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 can be improved.

The inclination angle of the inclined surface with respect to the upper surface of the guide rib 12c1 is set to approximately 15°, which is larger than the backward inclination (approximately 10°) when the pachinko machine 8010 is installed in the amusement arcade. As a result, it is possible to prevent the inclination of the inclined surface of the guide rib 12c1 from reversing in the front-rear direction due to the backward inclination of the pachinko machine 8013 at the time of installation.
Workability can be improved when the game board 13 is assembled to the inner frame 12 without depending on the backward inclination of the 013. - 特許庁

In addition, the inclination angle of the inclined surface of the guide rib 12c1 is not limited to this, and may be formed at an inclination angle equivalent to the backward inclination at the time of installation of the amusement arcade. In this case, the guide rib 1 on which the game board 13 rides
The slope of 2c1 can be horizontal.

In the state shown in FIG. 128(b), as shown in FIG. 129(a), the game board 13 is sandwiched between the board support devices 600 which are arranged vertically and are in a released state to be described later, and the rear surface of the game board 13 rotates. It abuts on the front surface of the rear claw member 640 .

Here, in the released state, the board support device 600 has the pre-rotation pawl member 620 and the pre-regulation pawl member 630 (the portion arranged on the front side of the position where the game board 13 is fixed)
Since the game board 13 is constructed so as to retreat from the entry route, the workability of the assembly work of the game board 13 can be improved.

Then, as shown in FIG. 129(b), by pushing the vicinity of the right end of the game board 13 toward the rear side, a load is applied to the post-rotation pawl member 640 via the game board 13, and the board support device 60 is rotated.
0 changes to a fixed state, which will be described later, and the game board 13 is fixed to the inner frame 12 . That is, the game board 13
, the state of the upper and lower board support devices 600 changes almost simultaneously.

The game board 13 is supported by the support bottom portion 12c and its vertical position is regulated. Figure 129(a)
) and as shown in FIG. 129(b), between the released state and the fixed state of the board support device 600, the board support device 600 does not come into contact with the lower end of the game board 13 (the game board 13 does not touch the board surface). It is not pushed up by the support device 600), and the vertical position of the game board 13 does not change. Therefore, the floating connector 13a and the receiving connector 12d can be stably attached and detached as the board support device 600 is changed between the released state and the fixed state.

Here, when the game board 13 near the right end is pushed to the back side, the game board 13 rotates around the left end as a fulcrum.
The force required for applying a load to 0 can be weakened by the long width dimension of the game board 13, and even a weak worker can assemble the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 without any problem.

When assembling the game board 13 to the inner frame 12, the left end portion of the game board 13 is attached to the left end front support portion 12a.
And since it is supported at two upper and lower positions by the left end rear support portion 12b (see FIG. 126), for example,
When the right end of the game board 13 is insufficiently fixed (when at least one of the upper and lower board support devices 600 is not fixed), the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89) is closed with respect to the inner frame 12. Even if there is, the extent to which the game board 13 falls forward can be reduced.

For example, when the upper board surface support device 600 is in the released state (see FIG. 134(a)), the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89) is pushed in to close against the inner frame 12, and the game board 13 The degree of tilting back and forth can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the state of the board surface support device 600 from changing due to the recoil when the front frame 14 is pushed in to close it with respect to the inner frame 12 (the possibility can be reduced).

In a state where the game board 13 is fixed to the inner frame 12, the left end of the game board 13 is a support portion 12a.
, 12b, the right end is fixed by the board support device 600, and the lower end is restricted in vertical position by the support bottom 12c.

In the state where the game board 13 is fixed to the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 129(b)), the game board 13
is arranged at the lower end of the back side of the game board 13, and is connected to wirings connected to various members and various devices arranged on the game board 13, and is supported by the game board 13 so that its position can be changed in the surface direction of the game board 13. The floating connector 13a and the receiving connector 12d are arranged on the inner frame 12 in the vicinity of the board surface support device 600 on the lower side, and the wiring connected to the control board unit 91 (see FIG. 3) etc. is connected on the back side. They are connected in the rotational direction of the game board 13 .

The floating connector 13a and the receiving side connector 12d are arranged in an inclined posture so that the connection direction is directed along the rotation direction of the game board 13 in order to reduce connection resistance in the rotation direction of the game board 13. (Refer to FIG. 126 for the receiving connector 12d).

The inner frame 12 includes a board surface supporting device 600 in which a pair of upper and lower members are arranged facing each other near the right corner of the inner frame 12 . Since the pair of upper and lower board support devices 600 have the same configuration and are arranged facing each other, one of the board support devices 600 will be explained, and the other board support device 600 will be omitted.

130(a) is a front perspective view of the board support device 600, FIG. 130(b) is a back perspective view of the board support device 600, and FIG. 131(a) is a front perspective view of the board support device 600. 131(b) is a rear perspective view of the board support device 600. FIG. Fig. 130
130(a) and 130(b) show a fixed state in which the board support device 600 fixes the game board 13, and FIGS. 131(a) and 131(b) show the game board 1
A released state in which the fixation of 3 is released is illustrated. As shown in FIGS. 130 and 131, the board support device 600 displaces the open side of the U-shape formed by the front rotating claw member 620 and the rear rotating claw member 640 in the front-rear direction.

132 is an exploded front perspective view of the board support device 600, and FIG. 133 is an exploded rear perspective view of the board support device 600. FIG. As shown in FIGS. 132 and 133, the board support device 60
0 is a frame member 610 formed in a rectangular frame shape when viewed from the top, a front rotating claw member 620 rotatably supported by a first shaft member P61 inserted through and fixed to the frame member 610, and a rotating claw member 620. A regulating front claw member 630 arranged on the front side of the front claw member 620 and rotatably supported by the second shaft member P62 inserted through and fixed to the front rotation claw member 620, and arranged on the back side of the front rotation claw member 620. The post-rotation pawl member 6 is rotatably supported by the third shaft member P63 inserted through and fixed to the pre-rotation pawl member 620.
40 and .

The frame member 610 includes a main body plate portion 611 formed in a rectangular frame shape by bending a sheet metal member at right angles at its corners, and a pair of parts of the main body plate portion 611 that are arranged opposite to each other on the left and right sides. A pair of support holes 612 formed through the plate portion 611a in a straight line, and an arcuate hole 613 formed in the plate portion 611a along an arc around the support hole 612 above the front side of the support hole 612. , the plate portion 6 along an arc centered on the support hole 612 on the back side of the support hole 612
11 a from below, and the plate portion 61 at a position vertically above the support hole 612 .
The inner frame 12 is secured by a rod-shaped regulating rod 615 inserted through and fixed to the frame 1a, and a screw extending from the plate portion 611a to the left and right in a flange shape and inserted through the through hole 616a in the assembled state (see FIG. 127(b)). and a pair of fixing plates 616 fastened and fixed to.

The support hole 612 is a through hole through which the first shaft member P61 is inserted and fixed. First shaft member P61
is formed as a cylindrical metal rod-shaped member with an enlarged diameter at the end on the insertion base end side.
fixed to This fixing method and the shape of the shaft member are the second shaft member P62 and the third shaft member P
63 is the same, so the explanation is omitted. When the first shaft member P61 is inserted through the support hole 612, the first shaft member P61 is also inserted through the supported hole 622 of the pre-rotation claw member 620 at the same time.

Similar to the frame member 610, the pre-rotation claw member 620 includes a main body plate portion 621 formed by bending a sheet metal member at a right angle at a corner to form a T-shape in a side view, and a part of the main body plate portion 621. A pair of supported holes 622 that are formed through the plate portions 621a that are arranged opposite to each other on the left and right and are axially supported by the first shaft member P61, and through the plate portions 621a on a straight line at the upper corners on the front side. A pair of support holes 623 formed and through which the second shaft member P62 is inserted and fixed, and a plate portion 621
A pair of support holes 624 are formed so as to penetrate in a straight line in the rear side part of the part a and into which the third shaft member P63 is inserted and fixed.

Note that when the second shaft member P62 is inserted into the support hole 623, the pre-regulation claw member 63
The second shaft member P62 is also inserted through the supported hole 632 of No. 0, and the third shaft member P63 is inserted into the support hole 624.
At the same time, the third shaft member P63 is also inserted into the supported hole 642 of the rotation rear claw member 640.
is inserted.

The main body plate portion 621 is a portion arranged opposite to the left and right, and has a longitudinally long long portion 621a1.
and an extension portion 621a2 extending vertically from the front end of the long portion 621a1 connect a pair of plate portions 621a formed in a T shape in a side view and the upper edges of the plate portions 621a. A connecting plate portion 621b to be fixed, a rear side extending plate 621c extending from the rear side end portion of the connecting plate portion 621b to the surface of the connecting plate portion 621b with a downward inclination of about 45 degrees, Part 621a
2, the hanging back plate portion 621d extends perpendicularly to the plate portion 621a toward the opposite side plate portion 621a, and the hanging back plate portion 621d extends from the lower end of the hanging back plate portion 621d. and a front side extension plate 621e that extends obliquely to the front side by about 45 degrees with respect to the plane.

The hanging back plate portion 621d is formed in a flat plate shape along a plane perpendicular to the long portion 621a1 and the connecting plate portion 621b. The side surface of the long portion 621a1 and the connecting plate portion 621b form a right angle, and the lower surface of the long portion 621a1 and the rear side surface of the hanging rear plate portion 621d are formed to be perpendicular to each other.

The rear-side extended plate 621c is arranged so that its lower surface can come into contact with the torsion spring NBb. In the present embodiment, in the released state, the torsion spring NBb abuts and the arm portion of the torsion spring NBb is separated from the body plate portion 611 (see FIG. 134(a)). By retracting NBb upward, the torsion spring NBb moves toward the body plate portion 611.
begin to come into contact with

As a result, when the operator starts pushing the game board 13 into the board support device 600, the game board 13 is fixed to the board support device 600 while preventing the repulsive force of the torsion spring NBb from being generated on the operator side. Immediately before finishing, the repulsive force of the torsion spring NBb can be generated toward the operator. That is, it is possible to suppress the force of rotation of the game board 13 by the repulsive force immediately before the game board 13 is fixed to the board support device 600 while reducing the force required at the start of pushing.

The hanging back plate portion 621d is a portion that abuts on the game board 13 from the front side in the assembled state (see FIG. 89) and regulates the front and rear positions of the game board 13 . The front-side extension plate 621e functions as a guide when the game board 13 is inserted into the back side of the hanging back plate portion 621d.

A torsion spring NBa is wound around the second shaft member P62. The torsion spring NBa generates an urging force in a direction to bring the front regulating claw member 630 and the hanging back plate portion 621d closer to each other. A torsion spring NBb is wound around the third shaft member P63. The torsion spring NBb generates an urging force in a direction to move the lower end of the post-rotation claw member 640 away from the rear side wall of the body plate portion 611 .

The pre-regulation claw member 630 is arranged to face the main body plate portion 631, which is formed in the shape of a letter in a side view by bending a sheet metal member at a right angle at the corner portion, and a part of the main body plate portion 631, which is arranged to be opposed to the left and right. A pair of supported holes 632 penetrating the plate portion 631a on a straight line and supported by the second shaft member P62, and a front connecting plate 631b connecting the plate portion 631a to the lower end of the front connecting plate 631b are inclined to the front side. It is mainly provided with an inclined extension plate 633 extending in the same direction and a curved surface 634 curved as the upper end surface of the plate portion 631a.

The obliquely extending plate 633 is a plate portion arranged opposite to the front frame 14, and
is the portion closest to the front frame 14 in the front-rear direction when is in the released state.

The curved surface 634 is a surface that abuts against the regulating rod 615 in the assembled state (see FIG. 126), thereby regulating the free posture change of the front regulating claw member 630 .

The post-rotation claw member 640 includes a main body plate portion 641 formed in a vertically long rectangular shape in a side view by bending a sheet metal member at right angles at corners, and a part of the main body plate portion 641, which is arranged opposite to the left and right. A pair of supported holes 642 penetrating through the plate portion 641a on a straight line and supported by the third shaft member P63, and a front connecting plate 641b connecting the pair of plate portions 641a to the rear side from the lower end portion thereof. and an inclined extension plate 643 that is inclined and extended.

The front connecting plate 641b is a portion that abuts on the back side of the game board 13 and regulates the front and rear positions of the game board 13 in the assembled state (see FIG. 89).

The inclined extension plate 643 is a portion that receives a load from the game board 13 when the game board 13 is pushed in, and is inclined at an angle of contact with the back surface of the game board 13 in the released state (see FIG. 129(a)). It is formed.

134(a), 134(b), 135(a) and 135(b) are side views of the board support device 600. FIG. 134(a), 134(b), 135(a), and 135(b) show the process of changing the board support device 600 from the released state to the fixed state in chronological order. 134(a), 134(b), 135(a) and 135
In (b), the arrangement of the multifunctional cover member 171 arranged close to the board support device 600 and the game board 13 fixed to the board support device 600 is illustrated by imaginary lines.

That is, in FIG. 134(a), the released state of the board support device 600 is shown in FIG. 135(b).
The fixed state of the board support device 600 is illustrated. In addition, in the fixed state shown in FIG. 135(b), the third shaft member P63 is arranged right behind the first shaft member P61 (on the rear side in the horizontal direction). As a result, the post-rotation pawl member 640 rotates too much around the first shaft member P61 (the third It is possible to prevent the shaft member P63 from moving above the first shaft member P61. Therefore, the post-rotation claw member 640 can be accurately moved to the position in the fixed state.

Here, as described above, the pre-regulation claw member 630 is applied with a biasing force in the direction of approaching the hanging rear plate portion 621d by the torsion spring NBa. Therefore, when no other external force acts, the pre-regulation claw member 630 is arranged close to the hanging rear plate portion 621d. on the other hand,
A change in posture of the pre-regulation claw member 630 is regulated by the contact between the curved surface 634 of the pre-regulation claw member 630 and the regulation rod 615 .

That is, as shown in FIGS. 134(a), 134(b), 135(a) and 135(b), as the board support device 600 changes from the released state to the fixed state, the rotation front claw member 6
20 tilts on the front side where the extended portion 621a2 is arranged, while the front regulating claw member 630 rises on the front side in such a manner as to separate from the hanging back plate portion 621d.

More specifically, the regulating rod 615 is the front side portion of the curved surface 634, and the second shaft member P
134(a) to FIG. 13
5( a )), the front side end of the regulation front claw member 630 rises as the rotation front claw member 620 tilts. In other words, the pre-regulation pawl member 630 moves in the direction opposite to the moving direction of the pre-rotation pawl member 620 .

On the other hand, a non-resisting portion 634b, which is a portion continuously provided on the back side of the resisting portion 634a and has an arc shape along a circle centered on the second shaft member P62, is arranged to face the regulating rod 615,
When the regulating rod 615 and the curved surface 634 are no longer in contact with each other in the circular direction about the second shaft member P62, the rising motion of the front regulating pawl member 630 is released, and the front regulating pawl member 630 faces the inclined extension plate 633. The tip portion is arranged close to the hanging back plate portion 621d (Fig. 135(a) to Fig. 135
(b)).

The angular range in which the pre-regulation pawl member 630 is raised (Fig. 134(a) to Fig. 135(a)
), even if a downward load, which is a load in the direction of tilting the front end portion of the front regulation claw member 630, is applied to the regulation front claw member 630, the downward load operates. Since the change in posture of the pre-regulation claw member 630 at this time is a change in posture toward the direction facing the downward load (posture change in the rising direction), the reaction force against the downward load becomes excessive, and the pre-regulation claw member 630 against the downward load becomes excessive. Attitude change of 630 is restricted.

In addition, since the game board 13 abuts against the rear surface of the rear side extension plate 621c, the rotation of the front claw member 620 is restricted by the game board 13 unless the game board 13 is pushed inward.

As a result, a downward load is applied to the pre-rotation pawl member 620 by applying a downward load to the pre-regulation pawl member 630 .
can be suppressed from rotating. Therefore, for example, when a load is applied to the front regulating claw member 630 from the front frame 14, the tilting motion of the front claw member 620 can be suppressed. In this embodiment, when the board surface support device 600 is released, the multifunctional cover member 171 arranged on the front frame 14 is positioned so as to abut on the inclined extension plate 633 of the front claw member 630 . , the shape of the front connection plate 631b, and the length and inclination angle of the inclined extension plate 633 are set.

In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 134(b), the game board 13 abuts on the back surface of the back side extension plate 621c, so that when the game board 13 moves (tilts) to the front side, the back side extension plate 621c
and the game board 13, rubbing friction occurs. As a result, the game board 1 is in the state of FIG. 134(b).
3 can be prevented from moving (tilting) to the front side. Therefore, when the lower board support device 600 (see FIGS. 136 to 139), which will be described later, applies a load to the game board 13,
It is possible to prevent the vicinity of the upper end of the game board 13 from moving (tilting) toward the front side due to the recoil.

Here, when the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89) is closed in the release state of the board surface support device 600, in the case of a structure in which the front rotation claw member 620 rotates due to the load from the front frame 14, it is arranged on the front frame 14. Depending on the manner of contact between the provided multifunctional cover member 171 and the front regulating claw member 630, the board surface support device 600 may reach the fixed state, and the board surface support device 600 may not reach the fixed state and may be stabilized at an incomplete angle. may occur.

The board support device 600 is stabilized at a halfway angle, and in that state the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89)
can be closed, the distance between the rear surface of the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 86) and the front surface of the game board 13 is shortened, which may interfere with the game.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by adopting a configuration that suppresses the rotation of the front claw member 620 due to the load from the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89), the multi-function When the cover member 171 and the front regulating claw member 630 abut against each other, the front frame 14 is prevented from being closed. As a result, it is possible to make the store clerk who is performing the work of closing the front frame 14 aware that the board support device 600 is not in the fixed state.

Upon noticing this, the clerk pushes the game board 13 until the board surface support device 600 is in a fixed state. You can stabilize the distance from the front.

In addition, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 135(a), the multifunctional cover member 171 provided on the front frame 14 and the restricting front claw member 171 are in a state immediately before the rotation front claw member 620 is fixed. Depending on the manner of contact of the member 630, it is unlikely that the board surface support device 600 will reach the fixed state, or that the board surface support device 600 will not reach the fixed state and will be stabilized at an incomplete angle. The board support device 600 reaches a fixed state).

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the multifunctional cover member 171 projects to a position where it can contact the front regulation claw member 630 when the front frame 14 is in the closed position, and in the state shown in FIG. 135(a), The pre-regulation claw member 630 is configured so that the posture is not regulated by the regulation bar 615 .

In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 135(a), the contact between the rear surface of the rear side extension plate 621c and the game board 13 is released, and the rotation of the pre-rotation claw member 620 is not restricted by the game board 13. None.

That is, when a downward load is applied to the pre-regulation pawl member 630 in a state immediately before the pre-rotation pawl member 620 is fixed, the tilting operation of the front side end portion of the pre-rotation pawl member 620 is allowed. there is

As a result, when the game board 13 is placed at the position just before the board surface support device 600 is fixed (for example, when the clerk's force to push the game board 13 is slightly insufficient, 9
To solve the situation that the front frame 14 does not close even when it is installed stably in the splitting direction, and in this case, the multifunctional cover member 171 arranged on the front frame 14 to the board surface support device 600
When a load is applied to the board support device 600, the load can change the board support device 600 into a fixed state.

Therefore, the workability of fixing the game board 13 to the board support device 600 can be improved. In this embodiment, the game board 13 is placed on the board support device 600 in the released state so that the back surface of the game board 13 and the inclined extension plate 643 of the board support device 600 are in contact (see FIG. 1).
34(a)), the game board 13 can be fixed by pushing the game board 13 to the rear side. That is, the post-rotation pawl member 640 is displaced by the game board 13, the pre-rotation pawl member 620 is rotated accordingly, and the board support device 600 is changed to the fixed state. According to this method, since a downward load is not applied to the front side end portion of the pre-regulating pawl member 630, the state of the board support device 600 can be changed from the released state to the fixed state with little resistance.

In the state shown in FIG. 135(a), the front surface of the game board 13 and the surface of the hanging back plate portion 621d of the board support device 600 facing the game board 13 come into contact with each other in the front-rear direction. In this state, the game board 13
moves (tilts) toward the front side, it moves (tilts) while pushing aside the hanging back plate portion 621d. is given as a resistance against movement (tilting) of the game board 13 toward the front side. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the game board 13 moves (tilts) toward the front side in the state shown in FIG. 135(a). Therefore, when a lower board support device 600 (see FIGS. 136 to 139), which will be described later, applies a load to the game board 13, the game board 13
can be suppressed from moving (tilting) toward the front side.

Between the state shown in FIG. 135(a) and the state shown in FIG. 135(b), the front regulating pawl member 630 is tilted by the urging force of the torsion spring NBa, and the non-resisting portion 634b is disposed facing the regulating rod 615. (See FIG. 135(b)). In this state, when the game board 13 moves (tilts) to the front side and the game board 13 pushes the hanging back plate portion 621d to rotate the pre-rotation claw member 620, the first shaft member P61 is the center. In the direction along the circular arc, the non-resisting portion 634b abuts against the regulation bar 615, and the resistance against movement (tilting) of the game board 13 to the front side increases accordingly.

As a result, between the state shown in FIG. 135(a) and the state shown in FIG. 135(b),
It is possible to reduce the possibility that the game board 13 moves (tilts) to the front side. Therefore, when a lower board support device 600 (see FIGS. 136 to 139), which will be described later, applies a load to the game board 13, the vicinity of the upper end of the game board 13 moves (tilts) toward the front side due to the reaction. can be suppressed.

Also, the non-resistance portion 634b of the curved surface 634 is in the state shown in FIG.
135(b), a curved surface whose radius gradually increases around the second shaft member P62 is formed.

135(a), the inclined extension plate 633 is pushed rearward by the multifunctional cover member 171, and the pre-rotation claw member 620 rotates to rotate the second shaft member P62.
is displaced, the non-resisting portion 634b and the regulating rod 615 are momentarily separated from each other. Therefore, the resistance applied to the front regulating pawl member 630 from the regulating rod 615 is momentarily reduced, and the front regulating pawl member 630 vigorously approaches the hanging rear plate portion 621d due to the biasing force of the torsion spring NBa. The state changes to the state shown in (b).

Therefore, as in this embodiment, in the fixed state of the board support device 600 shown in FIG. 135(a), the front frame 14 is set to the closed position in the state immediately before the board support device 600 is fixed, so that the multifunctional cover member 171 can be replaced by the front regulating claw member 630 or the inclined extension plate 633. , and then the board support device 600 can be brought into a fixed state.

In this embodiment, when the game board 13 is not fixed to the board support device 600, the front frame 14 can be arranged at the closed position regardless of the state of the board support device 600.
That is, in a state in which the back side surface of the back side extension plate 621c does not contact the game board 13 and the rotation of the front claw member 620 is not restricted by the game board 13, the board surface support device 600 and the multifunctional cover member 171 134(a) to the state shown in FIG. 135(a). Therefore, even when the game board 13 is not arranged (for example, when it is desired to temporarily close the front frame 14 when replacing the board surface), it is possible to avoid restricting the closing of the front frame 14. , can improve the work efficiency of workers.

When the board support device 600 is changed from the fixed state to the released state, the inclined extension plate 633
is pulled upward in the front direction to rotate the front regulating pawl member 630 against the biasing force of the torsion spring NBa. At this time, the load received from the regulating rod 615 is small (the curved surface 634 and the regulating rod 6
15 are not in contact with each other), the front regulation pawl member 630 can be rotated with a light force,
By continuing the rotation as it is, the board support device 600 can be brought into the released state.

When the board support device 600 is released while the game board 13 is fixed, the game board 13 is pushed forward by the displaced post-rotation claw member 640 (see FIG. 134(a)). Therefore, the workability of removing the game board 13 can be improved compared to the case where the front and rear positions of the game board 13 do not change when the board support device 600 is in the released state.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 129(a) and 134(a), in the released state, the game board 1
3 abuts on the lower surface of the back-side extension plate 621c of the board support device 600. As shown in FIG. This eliminates the risk of the game board 13 falling forward when both the upper and lower board support devices 600 are in the released state.

It should be noted that the upper and lower board support devices 600 can be switched between the released state and the fixed state one by one. Here, in the configuration in which the game board 13 moves back and forth as the state of the board support device 600 changes, as in the present embodiment, if the board support device 600 is operated one by one, the front and rear positions of the game board 13 will not match up and down. , the load applied to the game board 13 may become excessive.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the operation of the pre-regulation claw member 630, the pre-rotation claw member 620, and the post-rotation claw member 64, which are operated when the board support device 600 is brought into the released state, are controlled.
0 behavior is inconsistent. In other words, as shown in FIGS. 135(a) and 135(b), the pre-rotation pawl member 6 supporting the game board 13 is larger than the amount by which the pre-regulation pawl member 630 is displaced.
20 and the amount by which the post-rotation pawl member 640 is displaced is smaller.

Therefore, when the pre-regulation claw member 630 is displaced to such an extent that the pre-regulation claw member 630 does not return to the fixed state (to the extent that the return is regulated by the regulation rod 615), the pre-rotation claw member 620 and the post-rotation claw member 640 are displaced. Since the amount of displacement can be suppressed, it is possible to suppress the deviation of the front-rear position of the game board 13 at the portion supported by the upper and lower board support devices 600 . Therefore, the load applied to the game board 13 can be suppressed.

Further, the same effect is produced because the post-rotation pawl member 640 is rotatably supported by the pre-rotation pawl member 620 . That is, from the fixed state (see FIG. 135(b)) to the released state (see FIG. 13)
4(a)), the post-rotation pawl member 640 can be displaced in the direction of widening the angle between the pre-rotation pawl member 620 and the post-rotation pawl member 640 against the biasing force of the torsion spring NBb. It is said that

Therefore, compared with the displacement amount of the pre-rotation pawl member 620, since the displacement amount of the game board 13 pushed out by the post-rotation pawl member 640 can be suppressed, 13 can be prevented from shifting in the front-rear position. As a result, the game board 1
The load applied to 3 can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 136 to 139, the relationship between the board support device 600 arranged on the lower side and the front frame 14 will be described. Figures 136 to 139 are CXXXVI-
It is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine 8010 taken along line CXXXVI. 136 to 139, the front frame 14 is illustrated in a simple shape and the closed state of the front frame 14 is illustrated.

136 shows the released state of the board support device 600, FIG. 137 shows the fixed state of the board support device 600, and FIG. 139 shows the rotated state, the state immediately before the board support device 600 is fixed, and the thickness of the game board 13 supported by the board support device 600 is shown in phantom lines. be done.

136 to 139, the relationship between the board support device 600 and the opening/closing restricting portion 159 fixed to the front frame 14 will be described. To facilitate understanding, FIGS. 136 and 1
138 and 139, the opening/closing regulating portion 159 cross-sectionally viewed at 37 is illustrated by imaginary lines.

As shown in FIG. 136, when the board support device 600 is in the released state, if the front frame 14 is placed in the closed position (see FIG. 136), the interference between the open/close regulating portion 159 and the board support device 600 is avoided. However, the game board 13 and the operating portion back member 155 above the opening/closing restricting portion 159 interfere with each other. Therefore, in the released state of the board support device 600, the game board 13
While the front frame 14 is allowed to be closed when it is disengaged, the closing of the front frame 14 is restricted when the game board 13 is arranged.

As shown in FIG. 137, when the board support device 600 is in a fixed state, if the front frame 14 is placed in the closed position (see FIG. 137), the interference between the opening/closing regulation part 159 and the board support device 600 is avoided. . In addition, by arranging the game board 13 on the back side compared to the arrangement when the board support device 600 is in the released state, the game board 13 interferes with the operation part back member 155 above the opening/closing regulation part 159. is avoided. Therefore, in the fixed state of the board support device 600, the front frame 14 is permitted to be closed regardless of whether the game board 13 is present or not.

As shown in FIG. 138, when the pre-rotation claw member 620 of the board support device 600 is rotated from the released state to the fixed state side by a predetermined angle, the front frame 14 is arranged at the closed position (FIG. 1
38), the opening/closing restricting portion 159 and the inclined extension plate 633 of the board support device 600 interfere with each other.

In this state, even if an attempt is made to rotate the pre-rotation claw member 620 by applying a load toward the rear side to the inclined extension plate 633, the action of the regulating rod 615 prevents the pre-rotation claw member 620 from rotating in the direction of rotation. (clockwise direction in FIG. 138) and the rotational direction of the front regulating pawl member 630 (
Since the reaction force becomes excessive due to the counterclockwise direction) being the opposite direction, it is difficult with a normal load as described above (see FIG. 134(b)).

Therefore, in the state of the board support device 600 shown in FIG. 138, regardless of the presence or absence of the game board 13, closing the front frame 14 is restricted. In particular, when the game board 13 is arranged, there is a possibility that the lower end of the front side of the game board 13 and the rear side extension plate 621c may come into contact with each other in the vertical direction (see FIG. 138). The effect of restricting the closing of the frame 14 is strengthened.

As shown in FIG. 139, when the pre-rotation claw member 620 of the board support device 600 is in a state immediately before being fixed, when the front frame 14 is placed in the closed position (see FIG. 139), the open/close restricting portion 159 and the , and the inclined extension plate 633 of the board surface support device 600 interfere with each other.

Further, in this state, when an attempt is made to rotate the pre-rotation claw member 620 by applying a load toward the rear side to the inclined extension plate 633, the action of the regulating rod 615 causes the pre-rotation claw member 620 to rotate. direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 138) and the rotational direction of the front regulating pawl member 630 (
8 (counterclockwise direction) is not reversed, and it can be easily pushed in with a normal load as described above (see FIG. 135(a)).

Therefore, in the state of the board surface support device 600 shown in FIG.
can be fixed, allowing the front frame 14 to be closed.

140 is an exploded front perspective view of the outer frame 11 and inner frame 12, and FIG. 141 is an exploded rear perspective view of the outer frame 11 and inner frame 12. FIG. 140 and 141 illustrate a state in which the cover member that closes the rear surface of the ball shooting unit 112a and the back pack 92 is disassembled from the inner frame 12. As shown in FIG.

The detailed structure of the ball launching unit 112a will now be described with reference to FIGS. 142-148. FIG. 142(a) is a front perspective view of the ball launching unit 112a, and FIG. 142(b)
is a rear perspective view of the ball launching unit 112a. Figures 143(a) and 143(b) are exploded front perspective views of the ball firing unit 112a. In addition, FIG. 143(a) shows a disassembled state after the cover member 721 is opened, and FIG. 143(b) shows a state in which the ball receiving member 731 is disassembled and then turned back and forth. . That is, in FIG. 143(b),
Only the ball receiving member 731 is illustrated on the rear side.

As shown in FIGS. 142 and 143, the ball shooting unit 112a includes a base member 710 made of metal or die-cast, and a base member 711 made of resin attached to the base member 710. The closed state (see FIG. 142(a)) in which the front surface of the base member 710 is partially covered (see FIG. 142(a)), and the open state (see FIG. 23 (
a) See) a ball feeding device 720 having a cover member 721 pivotably supported between
and are mainly provided.

The base member 710 is a member that supports the cover member 721. The base member 711 is engaged with the base member 710 by a hook or the like that is elastically deformable, is disposed on the front side of the base member 710, and is formed of synthetic resin or the like. , a firing solenoid 701 disposed on the front side, a firing rail 730 that guides the ball P8 shot by the firing solenoid 701 toward the game area, and a ball receiving member 731 to regulate the posture. a fastening portion 716 which is cylindrically projected toward the front side at an intermediate position of the bulging portion 716a which bulges in a straight line toward the front side from the base member 710 and into which a screw for fastening and fixing the ball receiving member 731 is screwed; mounting holes 718 and a plurality of positioning protrusions 719 .

The base member 711 has a pair of receiving portions 712 through which the rod-shaped portion 722 is inserted at the right corner, and a locking portion 7 that is bored to lock the hook portion 723 on the opposite side of the receiving portions 712 in the left-right direction.
13, a projecting portion 714 protruding toward the front side close to the right side of the locking portion 713, and an attraction force generating solenoid 741 is arranged to face the attraction force generating solenoid 741 when the cover member 721 is closed (see FIG. 142(a)). and a defect determination convex portion 715 provided convexly.

The protruding portion 714 is a portion that covers the upper surface side of the cutting metal member 725 when the cover member 721 is closed (see FIG. 142(a)), and extends to the left inner side of the ball passage opening 724 when the cover member 721 is closed. A facing plane 714a formed as a plane facing the side surface 724c and parallel to the left inner side surface 724c, and a surface on the left-right opposite side of the facing plane 714a and inclined rightward toward the rear side. and a surface 714b.

When the attraction force generating solenoid 741 is fastened and fixed to the cover member 721, the malfunction determination convex portion 715 does not contact the attraction force generating solenoid 741, but the fastening force generating solenoid 741 is loosened ( It abuts against the cover member 721 when it is floating above the cover member 721 , and is formed with a protrusion height that restricts the rotation of the cover member 721 .

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the cover member 721 from being closed when the fastening of the attractive force generating solenoid 741 is loosened. It is possible to make the user aware that the fastening of the generation solenoid 741 is loose. Therefore, it is possible to perform repair (fasten and fix the attracting force generating solenoid 741 to the cover member 721 without loosening) before a problem occurs in the ball shooting unit 112a.

The ball feeding device 720 includes a cover member 721 rotatably and axially supported by a base member 711,
Switching is controlled to change the state between a regulation state that regulates the flow of the ball P8 that has entered the inside of the cover member 721 and a permitting state that permits the flow of the ball P8 (see FIG. 144) onto the launch rail 730. and a device 740 .

The cover member 721 is made of a light-transmitting resin material and formed into a cup shape with the back side (the front side of the paper surface in the posture of FIG. a bar P
8 (see FIG. 144). a cutting metal member 725 and a shaft rod portion 72 that pivotally supports a ball guide arm member 742 of a switching device 740
6 and .

The switching device 740 includes an attraction force generating solenoid 741 fastened and fixed to the cover member 721 and a synthetic resin member having one end loosely fitted to the shaft portion 726 .
A ball guide arm member 742 that rotates and changes its posture depending on whether or not 41 generates a magnetic force, and a sheet metal member that is locked to the upper surface of the ball guide arm member 742 and is attracted to the attracting force generating solenoid 741. A metal plate 743, a guide slanted portion 744 which is a part of the ball guide arm member 742 and which is disposed below the ball passage opening 724 and which is inclined downward as it moves away from the ball passage opening 724, and upward from the base of the guide slanted portion 744. It is extended by a distance that can accommodate the ball P8, and the extended end is the axial rod portion 72
6, and a regulating projecting portion 745 projecting toward the ball passage opening 724 along a plane orthogonal to 6.

The ball passage opening 724 is an opening that forms a passage through which the ball P8 (see FIG. 144) can be guided.
a, and a rib portion 724b which is arranged above the flow-down plate portion 724a so as to face it and which extends downward from the upper surface of the ball passage opening 724 in a rib-like manner, the extending tip surface of which is inclined downward toward the back side,
A left inner side surface 724 that is continuous with the left end of the flow-down plate portion 724a and has a surface formed along the vertical direction.
and c. With these configurations, the ball P8 that has flowed into the ball passage opening 724 flows down toward the rear and rightward.

In the closed state of the cover member 721 (see FIG. 142(a)), when the ball P8 (see FIG. 144) enters the ball passage opening 724, the ball P8 comes into contact with the inclined surface 714b. It flows down to the back side while being displaced to the right along. Therefore, sphere P8
flows downward from the cutting metal member 725 in a lateral direction, so that the cutting metal member 7
25 is arranged in such a manner as to protrude inside the ball passage opening 724, collision between the ball P8 and the cutting metal member 725 can be prevented.

The firing rail 730 is a rail member that extends upward from the middle position of the base member 710 toward the left side. Ball P8 (Fig. 14) near the lower end of the rail member.
4) are arranged at intervals shorter than the diameter of the ball receiving member 731 .

The ball receiving member 731 is a long plate member that is regulated in a posture in which the extending direction of the launch rail 730 and the elongated direction are parallel, and that is fastened and fixed to the base member 710. A through hole 731a formed as an elongated hole along the direction and through which a fastening screw is passed.
Similarly to the bulging portion 716a, it is formed in a straight line (a straight line passing through the through hole 731a and facing the long hole direction of the through hole 731a). and a regulating groove 731b formed with a groove depth slightly larger than the protrusion height.

When the ball receiving member 731 is fastened to the base member 710, the position of the through hole 731a to be fastened together with the fastening portion 716 is selected.
6a can be slid along the inflated straight line, thereby allowing the sphere P8 (Fig. 14
4) can be adjusted (the distance from the plunger 702). Therefore, by adjusting the position of the ball receiving member 731, the firing strength of the ball P81 (the operation handle 51
(see FIG. 86)) can be easily adjusted.
Since the regulating groove 731b of the ball receiving member 731 is guided by the bulging portion 716a, the posture of the ball receiving member 731 can be maintained unchanged.

The firing rail 730 is formed by bending a metal plate to have a substantially M-shaped cross section, and has a rolling plate portion 730a formed to have a substantially V-shaped cross section and extending obliquely upward to the left, and a rolling plate portion 730a. It has mounting plate portions 730b and 730c hanging down from the front and rear sides of the plate portion 730a.
0b and 730c are attached to the base member 710 with screws inserted through a plurality of (two in this embodiment) attachment holes 732 formed.

A rail guard 733 made of a synthetic resin material is provided in the longitudinal direction between the mounting plate portions 730b and 730c to prevent noise and vibration caused by contact between the metal rail and the metal game ball. suppressed.

The rolling plate portion 730a has a rolling surface that has a substantially V-shaped cross section, and is shaped like a ball P8 (FIG. 146(b)
)) are configured to guide the sphere P8 upward by contacting two front and rear portions on the peripheral surface of ).

FIGS. 144(a) to 144(c) are front views of the ball launching unit 112a showing in chronological order how the ball is delivered by the ball delivery device 720. FIG. 144(a) to 144
In (c), illustration of the cover member 721 is omitted for easy understanding.

144(a), the switching device 740 of the ball feeding device 720 is in the regulated state (the power supply to the attracting force generating solenoid 741 is stopped and the ball guide arm member 742 is lowered by gravity). , the regulating projecting portion 745 is arranged at a position corresponding to the back side open end of the ball passage opening 724, contacts the game ball P8 that has entered the ball passage opening 724, and flows down from the back side open end. is regulated.

Next, as shown in FIG. 144(b), when the switching device 740 is changed to the allowable state (state in which power is supplied to the attracting force generating solenoid 741 and the ball guide arm member 742 is raised), the regulating protruding portion 745 retreats above the sphere, and the restriction on the flow of the sphere P8 is released, so that the sphere P8 flows above the guide inclined portion 744. As shown in FIG. In this state, the sphere P8 abuts against the front side wall of the base member 711 to prevent it from further flowing down, and stays on the upper surface of the guide slope 744 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 144(c), the ball guide arm member 742 returns to the regulated state, so that the ball P8 riding on the guide slope portion 744 descends to a position where it does not come into contact with the front side wall of the base member 711. be done. As a result, the ball P8 is guided to the back side according to the inclination of the guide inclined portion 744 and is guided to the launch rail 730. As shown in FIG.

Since the state of the ball guide arm member 742 in FIG. 144(c) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 144(a), even in the state shown in FIG. flow is regulated. Thus, balls can be fed to launch rail 730 one ball at a time. The ball P8 entering the ball passage opening 724 is a ball supplied from an opening formed at the downstream end of the upper tray 17 (see FIG. 86) and stored in the upper tray 17. be.

145 is a front perspective view of the cutting metal member 725. FIG. The cutting metal member 725 is a metal plate member fastened and fixed to the cover member 721, and includes a through hole 725a through which a screw to be screwed into the cover member 721 can be inserted, and a flow-down plate portion 724a. A cut with an acute angle is formed between the lower blade portion 725b having an upper side substantially along the upper surface of the lower blade portion 725b, and the same plate as the plate on the proximal side of the lower blade portion 725b. Upper blade portion 72 extending from
5c and .

The upper blade portion 725c is formed such that the tip thereof is inclined toward the back side more than the lower blade portion 725b, and the lower side projects upward from the flow-down plate portion 724a. The lower edge of the upper blade portion 725c slopes downward toward the proximal side (left side), and the upper edge of the lower blade portion 725b slopes upward toward the proximal side (left side). That is, the upper blade portion 725c and the lower blade portion 725b form a tapered shape when viewed from the front.

The notch between the upper blade portion 725c and the lower blade portion 725b is for cutting a string member such as a kite string fixed to the ball. Next, referring to FIGS. 146 and 147, the sphere P
A description will be given of how the yarn Y8 is treated when the yarn Y8 is fixed to the yarn 8 and entered.

FIG. 146(a) is a front view of the ball launching unit 112a, and FIG. 146(b) is a front view of FIG.
FIG. 147(a) is a partial top view of the ball launching unit 112a viewed in the direction of arrow CXLVIb in 46(a), FIG. 147(a) is a front view of the ball launching unit 112a, and FIG. 147(b) is FIG. 147(a). FIG. 148 is a front perspective view of the cutting metal member 725, showing the relationship between the thread Y8 and the cutting metal member 725 in the state of FIG.
12a, a partial front view of an inner rail 61 and an outer rail 62. FIG. 146 and 14
7, the illustration of some components of the ball launching unit 112a is omitted to facilitate understanding.

As shown in FIGS. 146(a) and 146(b), the ball P guided to the launch rail 730
8 stays in contact with the left lower edge of the ball receiving member 731 (see FIG. 146(a)). From this state, the firing solenoid 701 is energized, causing the plunger 702 to protrude vigorously. , a launch force is applied to the ball P8, and the ball P8 is launched along the launch rail 730 (see FIG. 147(a)).

Here, the ball P8 is launched with one end of the string Y8 fixed to the ball P8, and the other end of the string Y8 left at hand is moved to pull the string Y8 while the ball P8 is in the game area. , loosening, etc., is known to cause the ball P8 to be repeatedly detected by the winning opening.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the thread Y8 fixed to the ball P8 can be cut using the momentum of the ball P8. More specifically, when the ball P8 is placed at the firing standby position (see FIG. 146(a)), the thread Y8 rides on the upper surface of the flow-down plate portion 724a in such a manner that it is drawn to the right as it goes toward the rear side. (See FIG. 146(b)).

When the ball P8 is launched in this state, it passes under the flow-down plate portion 724a and the launch rail 730
When the yarn Y8 moves by being pulled by the ball P8 rolling on the upper blade It enters the lower side of the portion 725c and enters the cut formed by the lower blade portion 725b and the upper blade portion 725c.

While the player is gripping the front end (the other end) of the string Y8, a load is applied to one end of the string Y8 fixed to the ball P8 as the ball P8 is launched, causing the string Y8 to is subjected to a large tensile force. As a result, the thread Y8 is pressed against the cut formed by the lower blade portion 725b and the upper blade portion 725c, and is finally cut (see FIG. 148). As a result, it is possible to prevent a fraudulent act of repeatedly detecting the ball P8 in the prize winning opening.

If the launch strength of the ball P8 is weak, there is a possibility that the string Y8 will not be cut due to insufficient tensile force applied to the string Y8. The ball flows backward between the rail 61 and the outer rail 62, passes through the foul ball receiving portion 146, flows down the foul ball passage portion 145 (see FIG. 98), and is discharged to the lower tray 50 (see FIG. 86). Therefore, in this state, no matter how much load is applied to the thread Y8, the ball P8 does not pass through the prize-winning opening, so that the fraudulent act of repeatedly detecting the ball P8 in the prize-winning opening can be eliminated.

Next, the rendering operation unit 1000 will be described with reference to FIGS. 149 to 179. FIG. 149 is a front view of the game board 13, FIGS. 150 and 151 are exploded front perspective views of the effect operation unit 1000, and FIG. 152 is an exploded rear perspective view of the effect operation unit 1000. FIG. The game board 13 shown in FIG. 149 is different from the game board 13 shown in FIG. 2 in that the petal motion device 800 is visible from the upper frame portion of the center frame 86. are substantially the same.

A performance operation unit 1000 shown in FIGS. The effect operation unit 1000 includes a petal operation device 800, a side base material 1000S, a substrate cover 1000C, a back plate 1100, and a forward/backward motion unit 900 arranged on the back plate 1100, and the like.

The advance/retreat operation unit 900 vertically moves the petal operation device 800 by the driving force of the drive motor 921 (advance/retreat operation, i.e., movement toward the inside of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 and movement toward the inside of the display area of the third pattern display device 81, movement including at least one of the movement of retracting toward the outside of the display area of the pattern display device 81), and the petal movement device 800 is connected to one end, and the other. is pivotally supported on the back plate 1100 and the arm gear 9
24, a drive-side arm member 910 that rotates by transmitting the drive force of the drive motor 921, and a drive motor 92 that generates the drive force for driving the drive-side arm member 910.
1, a transmission means 920 composed of a plurality of gears for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 921 to the drive side arm member 910, and the drive side arm member 910 slides in the left and right direction in conjunction with the rotational movement of the drive side arm member 910. A thin plate-shaped slide plate 930, a thin plate-shaped second effect member 940 that rotates in conjunction with the sliding motion of the slide plate 930, and a back plate 1100 and a petal motion device on the left and right opposite sides of the drive side arm member 910. and a long plate-shaped driven side arm member 950 connecting the 800 .

Next, the structure of the petal motion device 800 will be described. FIG. 153 shows the petal motion device 80
0, and FIG. 154 is a cross-sectional view of petal motion device 800 taken along line CLIV--CLIV of FIG. In addition, in FIG. 154, the supporting base material 801 is schematically illustrated by imaginary lines.

The petal motion device 800 is configured such that members such as petals 802 are supported by a supporting base material 801 . As shown in FIG. 152, the support base material 801 is arranged on the back side of the petals 802 and the like, and although the overall shape is hidden by other members and is not shown in the drawing, it is made of a resin material and is a substantially rectangular plate. It comprises a shaped portion and a substrate disposed on the back surface of the plate-shaped portion.

A central motor 804 is fixed from the rear side at a position near the upper right portion of the central body portion of the supporting base material 801 , and the drive shaft of the central motor 804 extends forward through a narrow gap formed in the supporting base material 801 . A first gear 804G (see FIG. 156), which will be described later, is fixed to the tip of the projection.

An opening 8 is located slightly below and to the left of the central motor 804 in the central body of the support base 801 .
01P is drilled, is disposed to the right of the opening 801P, and extends rearward in a pair of cylindrical shapes,
A screw insertion portion 801S having an insertion hole inside and a screw insertion hole at the tip portion is integrally formed. Around the screw insertion portion 801S, an arc plate 88 for detection of a loose fitting device 880, which will be described later, is provided.
A doughnut-shaped recessed portion 801D that is recessed from the front side to the back side in a donut shape through which 0d can pass.
(see FIG. 152) is formed.

Central motor 804 of support base 801 (see FIG. 152) to which central motor 804 is fixed
An oil damper 805 is fixed from the front side below (see FIG. 156).

A decorative member 807 is arranged and fixed on the front side of the supporting base material 801 so as to cover the peripheral area from the front while opening the vertically long, roughly oval area in the central portion. The decorative member 807 is divided into a horizontally long upper portion forming an upper end region and a substantially U-shaped lower portion forming a region below the upper end portion.

In this embodiment, the support base 801 as a whole has a shape that extends slightly vertically.
If the support base 801 is formed in a shape that is long in the vertical direction rather than in the shape that is long in the horizontal direction, the operation space can be reduced.

At this time, the central motor 804 and the oil damper 805 are respectively concentrically arranged with a second gear 830G and a third gear 810 overlapping the position of the opening 801P as will be described later.
Since it is interlockingly connected (linked) to G, it can be arranged at any position as long as it is on the outer periphery of the second gear 830G and the third gear 810G and does not interfere with each other. They are arranged to the right through the 2nd gear 830G and the 3rd gear 810G (see FIG. 156).

As a result, as shown in FIG. 154, by collecting the weight on the right half of the petal motion device 800 that is supported in a slightly tilted posture toward the front side, it is possible to prevent the left half on the opposite side from sagging downward. can. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gap between the support base 801 and the drive-side arm member 910 (see FIG. 152) connected to the left half of the support base 801. driving force can be appropriately transmitted to the support base 801 by

155 is an exploded front perspective view of the petal motion device 800, and FIG. 156 is an exploded rear perspective view of the petal motion device 800. FIG. In addition, in FIGS. 155 and 156, illustration of the supporting base material 801 is omitted in order to facilitate understanding.

As shown in FIGS. 155 and 156, the petals 802 are made of resin molded to imitate the shape of one of the five petals separated from each other, which constitutes a hibiscus flower in an open state as a whole. , and has a plate-like flat plate member 803 on the back side.

157(a) is an exploded front perspective view of the petal 802, the flat plate member 803 and the slide member 820, and FIG. 157(b) is an exploded rear perspective view of the petal 802, the flat plate member 803 and the slide member 820. FIG.

Each of the petals 802 has a substantially arcuate front shape that extends in the radial direction in the arranged state, and has a shape that gently bulges forward from the center to the outer periphery (FIG. 15).
4).

The surface of the petal 802 is formed with irregular unevenness including a large number of wrinkles, and the periphery also has an irregularly uneven shape when viewed from the front. Strictly speaking, the five petals 802 do not have the same shape, and although there are slight differences in unevenness and the like, they are formed in roughly the same shape. Most of the petals 802 have a specific color (red), but are almost transparent, and the outer peripheral edge is darkened in the specific color (red) without forming a particular boundary with the inner region. Coloring is done.

Each petal 802 is integrally formed with a threaded portion 802S extending cylindrically rearward and having a screw hole inside, at two locations near the outer circumference of the rear side surface of each petal 802 and at the center portion in the radial direction. there is

The petals 802 are arranged on the side of the rounded tip from the position where they are fastened to the flat plate member 803 (the counterclockwise side when viewed from the front, the right side of the paper in FIG. 157(a)).
The front side portion 802b arranged on the side of the sharp tip shape from 2a (the clockwise side when viewed from the front, the left side of the paper in FIG. 157(a)) is arranged on the front side. In other words, the front side 802b is positioned closer to the rear cover 886 of the loose fit device 880 than the rear side 802a.

The front side 802b of each petal 802 is superimposed on the front side of the rear side 802a of one adjacent petal 802, and the rear side 802a is superimposed on the rear side of the front side 802b of the other adjacent petal 802, thus five petals. petals 802 are arranged so that the tips on the inner peripheral side are directed toward the same center and gathered.

The petal 802 has a shape in which the rear side portion 802a and the front side portion 802b are displaced in the front and rear directions, so that the rear side portion 802a and the front side portion 802b are separated from each other in the concentrated position (see FIGS. 174 and 175).
Since the positional relationship between b and b can be superimposed in the front and back, the difference in shape (difference in size) of the entire petal 802 between the gathered position and the fully opened position (see FIGS. 178 and 179) is made noticeable. be able to.

The five petals 802 as a whole have a disk-shaped (doughnut-shaped) posterior side surface with a circular opening S1 in the center (see FIG. 155).

The flat plate member 803, as shown in FIGS.
02, they are long plate-shaped resin members separated from each other.

Each of the flat plate members 803 has a front shape extending from the center to the outer peripheral side in a substantially rectangular shape in the arranged state, and further has a shape in which the outer peripheral edge extends forward.

Also, the vicinity of the opening S1 (near the inner circumference) on the rear side surface of the flat plate member 803 in the arranged state
A pair of threaded portions 803S extending cylindrically rearward and having screw holes therein are integrally formed at positions spaced apart in the circumferential direction (transverse direction of the flat plate member 803).

The screw-in portions 803S are formed on both side walls in the circumferential direction (transverse direction) of each flat plate member 803 so as to be substantially flush with each other. A slide rib 803a which is perpendicular to the straight line connecting 803S and extends rearward from the rear side surface of the flat plate member 803 in a rectangular shape extends to both sides along the surface direction circumscribing the peripheral surface of the screw-in portion 803S. , formed integrally with the peripheral wall of the screw-in portion 803S.

As shown in FIG. 157(b), on the rear side of each flat plate member 803, there are screw insertion holes at two locations corresponding to the screw-insertion portions 802S of the petals 802.
A screw insertion portion 803H having an insertion hole for positioning the screw insertion portion 802S is integrally formed.

The screw insertion portion 8 of the corresponding petal 802 is inserted into the screw insertion portion 803H of each flat plate member 803 .
02S is abutted from the front and screws are screwed in from the rear side, whereby each flat plate member 803 is fixed to the corresponding petal 802, respectively.

158 is a front view of the slit member 810, and FIG. 159 is a front perspective view of the slit member 810. FIG. 155 and 156 will be referred to in the description of FIGS. 158 and 159 as appropriate. A slit member 810 is arranged behind the flat plate member 803 as shown in FIGS.

As shown in FIG. 158, the slit member 810 is a plate-shaped member made of resin having a front shape in which five similar shaped portions are continuous in an annular shape, and a circular opening 811 is bored in the center. As shown in FIG. 159, a substantially cylindrical front side peripheral wall portion 812 and a rear side peripheral wall portion 813 (see FIG. 156) extend from the periphery of the circular opening 811 in both front and rear directions.

Returning to FIG. 156, description will be made. On the rear side peripheral wall portion 813, two adjacent two out of five equally spaced places in the circumferential direction and one place in the middle of the three places excluding the two are cylindrically shaped in the front and rear direction. A threaded portion 813S having a threaded hole is formed integrally therewith.
3a is extended. The rear peripheral wall portion 813 is configured to protrude in the outer diameter direction at five locations corresponding to the screw-in portion 813S and the positioning boss 813a. One of the purposes of this bulging portion is to suppress sliding friction, the details of which will be described later.

The slit member 810 has a central slit 814 and side slits 815 as shown in FIG. Each of the central slits 814 is formed to linearly extend further outward from a position slightly outside the circular opening 811 . However, in the radial direction D11 of the circular opening 811, the central slit 81
4 extends along a direction D12 inclined by an angle θ11 (approximately 15° in the pachinko machine 8010) counterclockwise when viewed from the front.

Both side slits 815 are formed to extend in parallel on both sides of the central slit 814 with a slight gap.

In this manner, a set of three slits, that is, the central slit 814 and the two-side slits 815 on both sides thereof, is formed at five points in the circumferential direction at equal intervals (72° intervals). Note that each end of the central slit 814 and both side slits 815 may be formed in a round shape (semicircular shape) when viewed from the front, or may be formed in a rectangular shape.

In the present embodiment, one end of the outer edge of the two-side slit 815 located on the outermost side in the set of these three slits, that is, among the four corners of the three slits, the two corners on the smaller diameter side are the two-side slits. It has a substantially rectangular shape extending in the direction of extension of 815 (with a rectangular cut). This rectangular extension (cut) is for inserting the slide rib 803a of the flat plate member 803. As shown in FIG.

The slit member 810 is connected to the side ends of the flat plate on which the central slit 814 and both side slits 815 are formed, and has an outer diameter smaller than the outer peripheral side ends of the central slit 814 and both side slits 815. is provided with an arc plate 816 formed in an arc shape whose center coincides with the center of the circular opening 811 .

As a result, the arc plate 816 enhances the rigidity of the flat plate on which the central slit 814 and both side slits 815 are formed. Therefore, the central slit 814 and the side slits 81
It is possible to suppress deformation of the flat plate on which 5 is formed in the circumferential direction and the axial direction.

Also, as described above, as shown in FIG.
Since the sets each extend along the direction D12 inclined with respect to the radial direction D11 of the circular opening 811, the five sets of central slits 814 and the two side slits 815 are arranged so as to come together inwardly. , are arranged more densely, and this also results in the slit member 81
0 has a compact profile.

In other words, if five sets of central slits 814 and two side slits 815 are circular openings 811
In the case of being arranged and formed so as to extend along the inclined direction D12 as described above, rather than in the case of being arranged and formed so as to extend radially along this radial direction D11 without being inclined with respect to the radial direction D11 of the , the five sets of central slits 814 and both side slits 815 can be laid out more densely, and the outer peripheral shape of the slit member 810 can be made smaller accordingly.

As shown in FIGS. 155 and 156 , slide members 820 are arranged in the central slit 814 and both side slits 815 from behind the slit member 810 . slide member 8
As shown in FIG. 157, reference numeral 20 denotes a resin member having a long plate-like front shape. , a central portion that bulges out with a greater thickness than the effecting portion at a position between the extending portions, a screw insertion hole 821 that is drilled in the extending portion, and the slide member 820 from the center to the front. A guide pin 822 protruding on the side and inserted through the central slit 814 in the assembled state, and a slide pin 823 fixed so as to protrude from the center of the slide member 820 to the rear side and pass through the slide member 820 back and forth. .

As shown in FIGS. 155 and 156, the sliding member 820 is positioned so that the central slit 814 and the longitudinal direction of the slit member 820 intersect each other at right angles with the extending direction of the central slit 814 and the side slits 815 . and the slits 815 on both sides.

On the other hand, in the central slit 814 and both side slits 815 in the slit member 810,
The threaded portion 803S of the flat plate member 803 is inserted from the front side. In the fully inserted state, the threaded portion 803S of the flat plate member 803 protrudes rearward from the rear side surface of the slit member 810 very slightly. In this state, screws with washers (washer head screws) 824 are inserted through the screw insertion holes 821 on both sides of the slide member 820 from the rear side, and are screwed into the screw portions 803S of the plate member 803 and fixed.

As a result, the slide member 820 is moved to the flat plate member 8 with the slit member 810 interposed therebetween.
03 is fixed on the rear side. At this time, the guide pin 822 of the slide member 820 is inserted into the central slit 814 of the slit member 810 with little clearance, and the slide rib 803a of the flat plate member 803 is almost aligned along the corresponding outer edges of the slits 815 on both sides of the slit member 810. inserted without gaps.

As a result, the flat plate member 803 is slidably held in the central slit 814 and both side slits 815 of the slit member 810, and at this time, the flat plate member 803 is held by the guide pin 8.
It is restrained by slide rib 803a so that it slides in a constant outward orientation without turning around 22. As shown in FIG.

160 is a front perspective view of slide member 820 and central motor 804, FIG.
161(b) are rear perspective views of slide member 820 and central motor 804. FIG. Note that the illustration of the fourth gear 880G is omitted in FIG. 161(a). In addition, Fig. 16
155 and 156 will be referred to in the description of 0 and 161 as appropriate.

A rotating plate 830 is further arranged from the rear side of the slit member 810 to which the flat plate member 803 is slidably attached as described above. As shown in FIGS. 160 and 161, the rotating plate 830 is a resin disk having a circular pivot opening 831 in the center.

As shown in FIG. 160, the rotating plate 830 has a peripheral wall extending forward from the peripheral edge of the pivot opening 831 on the front side, and has a guide rail 832 formed around the peripheral wall.

The guide rail 832 has a peripheral wall extending forward from the front side surface of the rotary plate 830, and the peripheral wall
It is formed integrally with the rotating plate 830 so as to extend along the surface direction of the rotating plate 830 so as to be closed in an elongated loop shape when viewed from the front.

The extension height of the peripheral wall of the guide rail 832 is the same as the extension height of the peripheral wall at the peripheral edge of the pivot opening 831 . The width of the inner side of the guide rail 832 is such that the slide pin 823 can be inserted with a slight clearance of play. The edge corner portion at the extending end of the peripheral wall of the guide rail 832 is formed so as to be rounded.

From the position where the guide rail 832 is in contact with the outside of the peripheral wall at the peripheral edge of the pivot opening 831,
It extends clockwise in the front view along a direction substantially intermediate between the tangent line and the normal line of the pivot opening 831, and then arcuately further clockwise in the front view than the intermediate direction. While curving, it extends to a position near the outer circumference of the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 175(a)).

The end of the guide rail 832 on the pivot opening 831 side, that is, the peripheral wall of the portion that contacts the peripheral edge of the pivot opening 831 at the central end, is formed so as to be integrally continuous with the peripheral wall on the peripheral edge of the pivot opening 831. The front end portion thereof protrudes forward from the front end portion of the peripheral wall at the peripheral edge of the pivot opening 831 .

Around the peripheral wall of the pivot opening 831, four more guide rails 832 are formed in the same manner as described above. It extends so as to expand in a spiral shape from the surroundings to the outside.

As shown in FIG. 161, on the rear side of the rotating plate 830, a second gear 830G extending rearward from the peripheral edge of the pivot opening 831 in the form of a peripheral wall and having teeth on its outer periphery is integrally formed. The second gear 830G is arranged so as to mesh with the first gear 804G and is rotationally driven by the central motor 804. As shown in FIG.

The rotating plate 830 is attached so that the pivot opening 831 is fitted to the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 as shown in FIG. 154 . At this time, the rear ends of the five slide pins 823 projecting rearward from the slide member 820 are inserted into the five guide rails 832 (see FIG. 174(c)).

Since the outer peripheral surface of the rear side peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 is locally bulged at five locations as described above, the inner peripheral surface of the pivot opening 831 of the rotary plate 830 is linearly rather than surface-wise. As a result, the pivot opening 831 of the rotary plate 830 is fitted over the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 with little frictional resistance, and the rotary plate 830 is smoothly rotatably supported.

Further behind the second gear 830G, as shown in FIG. 161(a), the second gear 830G
A third gear 810G having a diameter slightly smaller than that of the pivot opening 831 and having a diameter larger than that of the pivot opening 831 is arranged and fixed so as to be concentric, and is arranged so as to mesh with the damper gear 805G of the oil damper 805 .

A circular pivot opening 810a is bored in the center of the third gear 810G.
0a, there are screw insertion holes 810b at positions corresponding to the three screw-in portions 813S in the rear side peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 (see FIG. 156), and at positions corresponding to the two positioning bosses 813a. A positioning hole 810c is drilled in each.

The third gear 810G is arranged so as to overlap the rear side of the second gear 830G fitted on the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810.
Positioning is performed by inserting the positioning boss 813a (see FIG. 156) into the positioning hole 810c, and a screw (not shown) is inserted through the screw insertion hole 810b into the screw portion 813S (see FIG. 1).
56).

As a result, the slit member 810 is linked to the damper gear 805G of the oil damper 805 via the third gear 810G and is braked by the oil damper 805. is held by the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 so as not to come off.

As shown in FIGS. 155 and 156 , a central shaft rotating device 850 is arranged from the front side of the slit member 810 . The central shaft rotating device 850 mainly includes a central shaft member 851 that is fastened and fixed to the support base material 801 (see FIG. 154), and a loose fitting device 880 that is rotatably loosely fitted around the central shaft member 851. Prepare for.

162 is an exploded front perspective view of the center shaft rotating device 850 and loose fit device 880, FIG.
63 is an exploded rear perspective view of the central shaft rotating device 850 and loose fitting device 880. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 162 and 163, the central shaft member 851 includes a shaft portion 852 formed in an incomplete cylindrical shape in which a part of the cylindrical peripheral wall is cut along the axial direction, and a shaft portion 852 of the shaft portion 852. A disk-shaped flange 855 is provided at the front end to increase the diameter, and the shaft portion 852 and the flange 855 are integrally formed.

A central portion of the flange 855 communicates with the inside of the shaft portion 852 and opens in a circular shape, thereby forming a bore portion 856 that penetrates the inside of the shaft portion 852 in the front-rear direction. Around the bore portion 856 on the front side surface of the flange 855, a front side threaded portion 857 having a screw hole inside and a threaded portion 857 on the side of the bore portion 856 from the front side threaded portion 857 are provided at two locations on the left and right sides of the bore portion 856. A holding portion 858 that has a counterbore at a deviated position and is drilled toward the rear side, and two columnar support projections 859 that slightly extend slightly forward are integrally formed. . The front end of the front threaded portion 857 and the base of the support projection 859 have the same extension height.

On the inner peripheral surface of the inner cavity portion 856, there are cylindrically extending along the axial direction of the shaft portion 852 so as to be parallel to two opposing locations, extend further rearward from the rear end of the shaft portion 852, and extend inside. A rear screw-in portion 853 having a screw hole is integrally formed. Further, rear positioning bosses 854 are integrally formed at positions equidistant from both rear screw-in portions 853 on the rear end of the peripheral wall of the shaft portion 852 so as to protrude rearward.

As shown in FIGS. 162 and 163, an LED board 861 is mounted on the front side of the central shaft member 851.
is placed. The LED board 861 is a substantially disc-shaped board having a slightly smaller diameter than the flange 855 of the central shaft member 851 .

A screw insertion hole 862 and a positioning hole 863 are formed in the LED board 861 at positions corresponding to the front screw portion 857 and the front positioning boss 854 of the central shaft member 851, respectively.

The front positioning boss 854 of the central shaft member 851 is inserted into the positioning hole 863 of the LED board 861 for positioning, and the screw is passed through the screw insertion hole 862 of the LED board 861 to the central shaft member 8 .
51 , the LED board 861 is fixed so as to cover the front side of the flange 855 of the central shaft member 851 .

In addition, an insertion hole 864 is formed in the LED board 861 at a position corresponding to the holding portion 858 of the central shaft member 851 and has a size that allows the threaded portion 869 of the central decorative member 868 to be fitted therein.

As shown in FIG. 162, on the front side surface of the LED substrate 861, there are a central point and a number of points arranged at equal intervals on concentric circles extending in multiple (double) directions around this one point. LE
Each D865 is arranged and fixed, and emits light toward the front.

Sideways LEDs 866 are arranged and fixed at a large number of positions arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction near the outer periphery on the front side surface and the rear side surface of the LED board 861, and emit light outward along the radial direction of the LED board 861. It is designed to The lateral LEDs 866 on the front side surface of the LED substrate 861 and the forward LEDs 865 are alternately arranged concentrically. A connector connection portion 867 is arranged and fixed to the rear side surface of the LED substrate 861 so as to face rearward.

A central decorative member 868 is arranged on the front side of the LED substrate 861 . central decorative member 868
, which has a specific color (yellow) but is made of a resin material that is almost transparent, extends from a long plate-shaped base to the back side in a cylindrical shape, and has a screw hole in the center that can be screwed in. A pair of threaded portions 869 are provided.

The threaded portion 869 is arranged at a position corresponding to the insertion hole 864 of the LED board 861 . LE
The insertion hole 864 of the LED board 861 is inserted into the holding portion 858 of the flange 855 with the D board 861 interposed therebetween.
The central decorative member 868 is fastened and fixed to the flange 855 by screwing a screw into the screw-in portion 869 from the rear side of the flange 855 . Thereby, the central decorative member 868 functions as a retainer for the LED substrate 861 .

The loose fitting device 880 includes a small-diameter cylindrical member 881 formed in a flanged cylindrical shape having an inner peripheral surface with an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer peripheral diameter of the shaft portion 852 of the central shaft member 851, and a small-diameter cylindrical member 881 coaxial with the small-diameter cylindrical member 881. A large-diameter cylindrical member 882 formed of a flanged cylindrical shape having an outer peripheral surface with an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the front side peripheral wall portion 812 of the slit member 810, the small-diameter cylindrical member 881 and the large-diameter It mainly includes a body cylindrical member 883 which is a flanged cylindrical member sandwiched between the cylindrical members 882 and rotatably and loosely fitted to the small-diameter cylindrical member 881 and the large-diameter cylindrical member 882 .

The main body cylindrical member 883 is provided with screw-in portions 883S, which extend cylindrically in the front-rear direction and have screw holes therein, integrally at two of the four locations equally spaced in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion. The positioning boss 883a extends from the tip edge of the portion where the threaded portion 883S is not formed among the above-mentioned four portions.

At four locations corresponding to the screw-in portion 883S and the positioning boss 883a, the body cylindrical member 8 is
83 is configured to bulge in the outer diameter direction. In addition, on the main body cylindrical member 883, rib-like projections are projected in the outer diameter direction at the corresponding four intermediate positions in the circumferential direction with a projection length similar to that of the screw-in portion 883S and the positioning boss 883a. Sliding rib 88 extending over
3b is formed.

The flange portion of the main body cylindrical member 883 is formed with an outer shape larger than the outer shape of the LED board 861, and in the assembled state (see FIG. 149), the decorative member 884 covering the LED board 861 from the front side and the decorative member 884 are arranged on the outside. A back cover 886 which is fastened and fixed near the diameter, forms a cup shape with an empty bottom rising toward the front from the outer peripheral side of the fastening portion, abuts on the flange portion of the main body cylindrical member 883 from the rear side, and is fastened and fixed. , are provided.

The back cover 886 is entirely plated (yellow in this pachinko machine 8010) on the front and back surfaces, so that the side surfaces are mirror-finished. Therefore, for example, by reflecting the light of the lateral LEDs 866 arranged on the back side surface of the LED substrate 861 near the outer periphery, it is possible to perform light emission effects.

The decorative member 884 is a member that emits light by being irradiated with light from the LEDs 865 and 866 arranged on the LED substrate 861. The decorative member 884 is shaped like a hibiscus flower and transmits light in a specific color (red). a front side plate portion made of a resin material having a specific property, and a rear side plate portion formed of a colorless and light-transmitting resin material, the rear side plate portion forming a disc shape with a peripheral wall standing upright on the rear side thereof. An opening 885 having a size that allows the central decorative member 868 to be inserted is formed in the central portion.

The body cylindrical member 883 configured in this manner is rotatable relative to the central shaft member 851 . The loose fitting device 880 is fastened and fixed to a fourth gear 880G arranged behind the third gear 810G (see FIG. 156).

On the rear side of the third gear 810G, as shown in FIG. 161(a), a fourth gear 880G having a slightly smaller diameter than the third gear 810G and a larger diameter than the pivot opening 831 is concentrically arranged and fixed.
It is meshed with a pair of intermediate gears 808 that are rotatably supported by the supporting base material 801 and mesh with each other.

One gear of the intermediate gear 808 meshes with the third gear 810G, and the other gear that meshes with the one gear meshes with the fourth gear 880G. That is, the fourth gear 880G is the intermediate gear 8
08 in the opposite direction to the third gear 810G.

A circular pivot opening 880a is bored in the center of the fourth gear 880G, and the pivot opening 880a
0a, screw insertion holes 880b are formed at positions corresponding to the two threaded portions 883S of the main body cylindrical member 883, and positioning holes 880c are formed at positions corresponding to the two positioning bosses 883a. there is

The fourth gear 880G is arranged so as to be superimposed on the rear side of the third gear 810G externally fitted on the main body cylindrical member 883 of the central shaft rotating device 850. 883a (see FIG. 163) is inserted into the positioning hole 880c for positioning, and a screw (not shown) is inserted through the screw insertion hole 880b into the screw portion 883S (FIG. 16).
3) is screwed into place.

As a result, the loose fitting device 880 is interlocked with the damper gear 805G of the oil damper 805 via the third gear 810G and is braked by the oil damper 805, and the fourth gear 880G is prevented from slipping off, and the slit The member 810 is held by the body cylindrical member 883 of the loose fitting device 880 so as not to come off.

The fourth gear 880G includes a detection arc plate 880d extending rearward in an arc around the rotation shaft on the outer peripheral side of the screw insertion hole 880b and the positioning hole 880c. The detection arc plates 880d are arranged at five locations with equal intervals in the circumferential direction.

In the assembled state (see FIG. 154), the detection arc plate 880d is positioned at the doughnut-shaped concave portion 80
1D (see FIG. 152), and is detected by a photocoupler-type detection sensor 801C arranged to detect a member passing through the doughnut-shaped concave portion 801D. That is, in the present embodiment, even if the fourth gear 880G starts rotating from any posture, the detection arc plate 88
The rotation angle corresponding to the arrangement interval of 0d (center angle 72°) can be detected (minimum angle 7
2° detection can be performed, and rotations of 72° or more can be ensured by detection).

Assembly of the central shaft rotating device 850 will be described. The shaft portion 852 of the central shaft member 851 to which the LED substrate 861 is arranged and fixed and the main cylindrical member 883 of the loose fitting device 880 are inserted into the circular opening 811 of the slit member 810 from the front side. When the shaft portion 852 of the central shaft member 851 and the main body cylindrical member 883 of the loose fitting device 880 are fully inserted, their rear ends slightly protrude rearward from the pivot opening 810a of the third gear 810G.

A rear positioning boss 854 projecting further rearward from the rear end of the shaft portion 852 is attached to the support base 801 .
(See FIG. 152) is positioned by inserting it into the positioning notch (not shown), and the rear screw portion 853 projecting further rearward from the rear end of the shaft portion 852 is inserted into the screw insertion portion 801S of the support base 801. The central shaft member 851 is fixed to the support base material 801 by inserting it into the insertion hole and screwing it.

At this time, wiring is connected to the connector connecting portion 867 of the LED board 861, and the wiring is led out rearward through the bore portion 856 of the central shaft member 851 and the opening 801P of the support base 801 (not shown).

With the mounting structure described above, the shaft portion 852 of the central shaft member 851 is fixed to the support base member 801 so as to protrude forward, and as shown in FIG.
The rear side peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 is fitted on the outside, and the large diameter cylindrical member 882 is fitted with the front side peripheral wall portion 8
12 is fitted on the outside.

At this time, the outer peripheral surface of the main body cylindrical member 883 is provided at eight places along the circumferential direction, and the threaded portions 883S,
Since the positioning boss 883a and the sliding rib 883b bulge out locally, the slit member 810 contacts the inner peripheral surface of the rear side peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 linearly rather than surfacely. The rear side peripheral wall portion 813 is fitted around the body cylindrical member 883 with little frictional resistance, and the slit member 810 is smoothly rotatably supported.

FIG. 164 shows the petal motion device 800, the drive side arm member 910 and the driven side arm member 95.
0 and FIG. 165 is a front perspective view of the backplate 1100. FIG. The petal motion device 800 vertically moves (advances and retreats) by receiving a load in the vertical direction from the drive-side arm member 910 . 150 to 15 in the description after FIG.
2 as appropriate.

The back plate 1100 is a laterally elongated rectangular member that is fastened and fixed to the deepest part inside the back case 200 (see FIG. 88) that is fastened and fixed to the back surface of the game board 13. A support column 1110 that protrudes in the front side in a columnar shape, a gear housing portion 1120 that is recessed above the support column 1110 so that a plurality of gears can be accommodated from the front side, and a vertical straight line at the center position of the left and right. The rail fixing portion 1130 arranged in the rail fixing portion 1130
and a supporting long hole 1140 formed as a long hole inclined downward toward the rail fixing portion 1130 on the left and right opposite sides of the supporting column 1110 across the rail.

The support column 1110 is a cylindrical portion that rotatably supports the drive-side arm member 910,
In the vicinity of the outer circumference of the front side end, a screw-in portion 1111 formed as a pair of left and right holes into which a screw can be screwed, and a pair of upper and lower screw portions 1111 on the same plane as the tip edge of the screw-in portion 1111 on the front side. a locating boss 1112 extending into the .

As shown in FIG. 164, the driving side arm member 910 is composed of a long rod-shaped main body member bent in a V-shape when viewed from the rear, and one end thereof is perforated in a circular shape in the front-rear direction and has a support column. 1110, a rotary shaft hole 911 rotatably supported by 1110; A transmission long hole 913 is drilled in a linear long hole shape from the bending point of the long main body member toward the rotation shaft hole 911 side, and the other end of the long main body member supports the petal motion device 800. A support portion 914 is mainly provided.

The drive-side arm member 910 includes an inner fitting convex portion 925 that is fitted in the transmission long hole 913 and a flange portion 926 that protrudes radially outward to a position detected by the detection sensor 1162 . In conjunction with it, it rotates about the support column 1110 as an axis.

The gear housing portion 1120 is a recessed portion in which the gear of the transmission means 920 is housed. A first accommodation portion 1121 and a second accommodation portion 11 connected to the first accommodation portion 1121
22 and a third accommodation portion 112 that accommodates an arm gear 924 that is arranged directly opposite to the first accommodation portion 1121 with the second accommodation portion 1122 interposed therebetween and that is fitted with the drive-side arm member 910 .
3 and .

The rail fixing portion 1130 is a portion that supports an operation rail 1000R (see FIG. 150, illustration is omitted in FIG. 165) that is supported so as to be vertically slidable by stacking a plurality of metal plates in the front-rear direction. It has an insertion hole 1131 through which a screw for fastening and fixing the rail 1000R to the back plate 1100 can be inserted, and a positioning boss 1132 that fits into the operation rail 1000R and positions the operation rail 1000R. placed on a line.
The rigidity of the motion rail 1000R keeps the attitude of the petal motion device 800 constant.

The support elongated hole 1140 is an elongated hole for slidably supporting the driven side arm member 950, and is inclined at an angle of about 50° in a front view so as to descend toward the left. An extension wall 1141 extending to the front side is provided.

As shown in FIG. 164, the driven-side arm member 950 is composed of a long bar-shaped main body member that is formed in a substantially straight line when viewed from the rear. It mainly includes a supported convex portion 951 slidably supported in the support slot 1140 of the face plate 1100 and a support portion 952 that supports the petal motion device 800 at the other end.

A cylindrical collar is loosely fitted in the supported convex portion 951 , and a screw is fastened to a threaded portion 951 a formed at the tip of the supported convex portion 951 in a state in which the collar is fitted in the long support hole 1140 . Thus, the driven side arm member 950 is slidably supported by the back plate 1100 . That is, the inner diameter of the collar is made slightly larger than the outer diameter of the supported projection 951, and the outer diameter
It is formed slightly smaller than the width of 0.

166 is an exploded front perspective view of the back plate 1100, the side base material 1000S and the second effect member 940, and FIG. 167 is an exploded front perspective view of the drive side arm member 910, the slide plate 930 and the second effect member 940. be.

The slide plate 930 is slidably supported in the lateral base 1000S by a plurality of (three in this embodiment) supported elongated holes 931 drilled in the front-rear direction in the form of elongated holes extending in the left-right direction. It is connected to the connecting convex portion 912 of the drive-side arm member 910 through a base-end-side elongated hole 932 that is drilled in the front-back direction in the shape of a vertically-extending elongated hole provided on the left-end side, and is provided on the right-end-side. It is connected with the second effect member 940 through a tip side insertion hole 933 drilled in the front-rear direction.

The base-side elongated hole 932 has a stopping portion 932a formed at its upper end along the trajectory of the connecting projection 912 rotating around the support column 1110, and extends vertically downward from the lower end of the stopping portion 932a. Mainly includes a displacement portion 932b.

As shown in FIG. 166, the side base member 1000S is a columnar portion arranged in a substantially triangular shape in a front view on the left side of the back plate 1100 in a front view, and has a threaded portion 1151 into which a screw can be screwed. a plate-shaped member that is fastened and fixed to the support column portion 1150 that has a fastening plate portion 1001S that is disposed at a position corresponding to the support column portion 1150 and has an insertion hole through which a screw can be inserted; The support projections 1002S are provided in a columnar shape to the rear side in a positional relationship (three locations) corresponding to the arrangement relationship of the supported elongated holes 931, and the support projections 1002S are provided circularly in the front-view right corner in the front-rear direction. A shaft support hole 1003S that rotatably supports the second effect member 940 together with the shaft support hole 1003S, and an arc recess 1004S that is recessed in an arc shape having the same center as the center of the shaft support hole 1003S, and similarly the center of the shaft support hole 1003S. Protrusive streak portion 1005S protruding on the front side along an arc shape having the same center as
and are mainly provided.

The support protrusion 1002S is formed in a cylindrical shape with a diameter smaller than the width of the supported elongated hole 931 of the slide plate 930, and a flanged cylindrical collar extends from the tip of the support protrusion 1002S.
and supported elongated hole 931, and in this state, a retaining screw is screwed from the tip of the support projection 1002S to support the slide plate 930 in a slidable manner. be.

The shaft support hole 1003S is a circular hole that rotatably supports the second effect member 940, and the arc recessed portion 1004S and the protruding portion 1005S are arranged for the purpose of smoothing the rotational movement of the second effect member 940. It is the part that In addition, the protrusion 1005S does not contact when the second effect member 940 is in the regular position, but is formed with a protrusion height that allows contact when it is displaced from the regular position or bent. be done.

The second effect member 940 has a main body part whose lower end is bifurcated and whose upper end is formed in a circle centered on the shaft support 941. A shaft support pillar 941 which is provided in a columnar shape and is pivotally supported with a collar interposed in the shaft support hole 1003S, and an auxiliary projection which is arranged close to the shaft support pillar 941 and is provided in a columnar shape to the rear side. a portion 942;
Mainly provide

The shaft support 941 is a cylindrical portion formed with an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the collar whose outer diameter is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 1003S. It has an inlet 941a (see FIG. 152). The shaft supporting support portion 941 is placed in the shaft support hole 1003 with the collar interposed therebetween.
A disc-shaped cover member 945 having an outer diameter larger than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 1003S is placed at the tip of the cover member 945 inserted into the shaft S.
5 plays a role of retaining. Thereby, the second effect member 940 is pivotally supported by the side base material 1000S.

The auxiliary convex portion 942 is inserted through the distal end side insertion hole 933 of the slide plate 930 (see FIG. 169), and is prevented from coming off the slide plate 930 by fastening and fixing a circular resin collar to the distal end thereof. . That is, the slide plate 930 and the second effect member 940 are interlocked by the connection of the auxiliary convex portion 942 and the tip end side insertion hole 933 .

The auxiliary protrusion 942 is a protrusion that displaces near the center of the width of the arc recess 1004S, and is formed in a cylindrical shape with a diameter slightly smaller than the width of the arc recess 1004S. As a result, even if the second effect member 940 is about to bend, the auxiliary projections 942 come into contact with the arc recesses 1004S to generate resistance, thereby suppressing bending deformation.

Description will be made with reference to FIG. The back plate 1100 includes three screw-in portions 1161 into which screws can be screwed when fastening the plate-like support plate 921a that supports the drive motor 921,
A detection sensor 1162 that detects the flange portion 926 projecting radially outward within a range of a predetermined angle from the arm gear 924, and a collar that guides the coil spring SP8 that generates a biasing force in the direction of lifting the petal motion device 800 are rotatably shafted. A support shaft 1163 to be supported, a cover support portion 1164 arranged in a triangular shape in a front view so as to support the substrate cover 1000C on the lower right side of the long support hole 1140, and a substrate cover 1000C arranged close to the cover support portion 1164.
00C, which is hidden in a front view, and a threaded portion 1166 into which a screw for fastening the substrate cover 1000C is screwed.

Similarly, the side base material 1000S includes threaded portions 1006S and 1007S into which screws for fastening the substrate cover 1000C are screwed. The screw-in portion 1006S is arranged in the direction of movement of the second effect member 940 with a slight gap from the second effect member 940 arranged at the end of movement (see FIG. 168). Therefore, for example, the auxiliary convex portion 942 may break due to long-term use,
Even if the part that restricts the counterclockwise rotation of the second effect member 940 when viewed from the front is missing,
The displacement of the second effect member 940 can be restricted by the screw-in portion 1006S.

In this way, the board cover 1000C is not fixed to a single member, but is fastened and fixed to each of the side base material 1000S and the rear plate 1100 which are arranged in a back-and-forth layered manner and fastened to each other. 1000C, side base material 1000S and back plate 11
00 can be firmly fixed to each other. This makes it easy to suppress vibration and displacement of the substrate cover 1000C and the side base member 1000S even when the petal motion device 800, which is a heavy device, is moved up and down by rotating the drive-side arm member 910. can be done.

Next, referring to FIGS. 168 to 173, the vertical motion of the petal motion device 800 by the forward/backward motion unit 900 will be described. FIG. 169 is a front view of 1100, FIG. 169, FIG.
71 and 173 are rear views of the petal motion device 800 and the forward/backward motion unit 900. FIG.

168 and 169 illustrate a state in which the drive-side arm member 910 is arranged on the upper end side of the movement range, and FIGS. ) is arranged at the connecting position between the stop portion 932a and the displacement portion 932b of the proximal side elongated hole 932, and in FIGS.
is arranged on the lower end side of the movement range.

As shown in FIGS. 169 and 173, when the driving side arm member 910 is located at the end of the movement range, the transmission elongated hole 913 of the driving side arm member 910 is aligned with the inner fitting convex portion 925 of the arm gear 924 (see FIG. 173). 151) as a base point and extends in the tangential direction of a circle centered on the rotation axis of the arm gear 924 . Therefore, when the drive motor 921 is started, the inner fitting convex portion 9
25 is displaced, and the drive-side arm member 910 has a range in which the posture is maintained (a range in which the drive motor 921 idles).

In FIGS. 170 and 171, the petal motion device 800 is slightly lowered compared to the state shown in FIGS. 168 and 169, while the slide plate 930 and the second effect member 940 are kept in the same position. That is, when the drive-side arm member 910 rotates in the downward direction, the petal motion device 800 operates prior to the slide plate 930 and the second effect member 940 .

From FIGS. 170 and 171 to FIGS. 172 and 173, it is visually recognized that the petal operating device 800 and the second effect member 940 are interlocked due to the interlocking of the drive side arm member 910 and the slide plate 930. can be made

Here, by moving the second effect member 940 toward the position where the petal motion device 800 was originally arranged, the second effect member 940 moves to the position where the petal motion device 800 was originally arranged, so that the second effect member 940 moves to the position of the petal motion device 800.
It can be visually recognized as if it is operating following 00.

Next, the collection and rotation operation of the petal motion device 800 will be described. 174(a) is a front perspective view of the petal motion device 800, FIG. 174(b) is a front view of the petal motion device 800, and FIG. 174(d) is a front view of the slit member 810 and the rotary plate 830. FIG.

FIG. 175(a) is a front view of the rotary plate 830, and FIG. 175(b) is the petal motion device 8. FIG.
175(c) is a rear view of the petal 802 and the flat plate member 803, and FIG. 175(d) is a rear perspective view of the petal motion device 800. FIG.

Similarly, FIG. 176(a) is a front perspective view of the petal motion device 800, and FIG. 176(b).
is a front view of the petal motion device 800, FIG. 176(c) is a front view showing the petal motion device 800 with the central shaft rotating device 850 omitted, and FIG. 176(d) is a slit member 810 and a front view of the rotating plate 830. FIG.

FIG. 177(a) is a front view of the rotary plate 830, and FIG. 177(b) is the petal motion device 8. FIG.
177(c) is a rear view of the petal 802 and the flat plate member 803, and FIG. 177(d) is a rear perspective view of the petal operating device 800. FIG.

Similarly, FIG. 178(a) is a front perspective view of the petal motion device 800, and FIG. 178(b).
is a front view of the petal motion device 800, FIG. 178(c) is a front view showing the petal motion device 800 with the central shaft rotating device 850 omitted, and FIG. 178(d) is a slit member 810 and a front view of the rotating plate 830. FIG.

FIG. 179(a) is a front view of the rotary plate 830, and FIG. 179(b) is the petal motion device 8. FIG.
179(c) is a rear view of the petal 802 and the flat plate member 803, and FIG. 179(d) is a rear perspective view of the petal motion device 800. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 172, when the petal motion device 800 is lowered by the up-and-down motion and is at the lowest position, it moves from the initial position (collected position) shown in FIGS.
178 and 179 to the fully open position shown in FIG. 178 and FIG. 179, perform a rotating operation (second operation) at the fully open position, and then gather It is configured to perform an operation (third operation) and return to the initial position (collecting position).

At the initial position (collected position), as shown in FIG. 174(d), the slide member 820
The slide pin 823 (see FIG. 157) is inserted into the central slit 81 of the slit member 810.
4 (the end on the side of the circular opening 811), and along with this, as shown in FIGS. in position and clustered together to form an open hibiscus flower.

When the petals 802 are in the initial position (collected position) as described above, the central motor 804 drives the first
When the gear 804G is rotated counterclockwise in rear view as indicated by arrow A9 in FIG.
0 is rotationally driven in the clockwise direction in rear view as indicated by arrow A10.

At this time, as described above, the rotating plate 830 is fitted around the front side peripheral wall portion 812 of the slit member 810 at the pivot opening 831 with little frictional resistance. can rotate. On the other hand, the slit member 810 is rotatably fitted on the large-diameter cylindrical member 882 of the loose fitting device 880 through the circular opening 811 as described above. Since it is braked in conjunction with the gear 805G of the oil damper 805, it is held so that it cannot rotate with a torque small enough to initiate the above-described rotary plate 830. FIG.

Therefore, when the first gear 804G is rotated by the central motor 804, the rotor plate 8 is initially rotated.
30 is rotated as described above, and the slit member 810 is held stationary (see FIGS. 176 and 177).

When the rotary plate 830 is driven to rotate as described above, as shown in FIG. 175(a), the guide rail 832 on its front side rotates counterclockwise in a front view as indicated by an arrow A11.
Along with this, a force is applied to the slide pin 823 of the slide member 820 (see FIG. 157) so as to be guided by the guide rail 832 and pushed outward along the radial direction.

At this time, the slide pin 823 moves along the slit member 81 as shown in FIG. 174(d).
0 center slit 814 , the slide pin 823 moves along the center slit 814 while being linearly guided from the inner end to the outside.

At this time, since the slide pin 823 is guided by the rotating guide rail 832, some torque is also applied to the slit member 810, but the braking force of the oil damper 805 exceeds this torque. While the slit member 810 is held stationary, the slide pin 823 moves toward the center slit 8 as the rotary plate 830 rotates.
It will move linearly outward along 14 .

As a result, as shown in FIGS. 176 and 177, the five sets of petals 802 start expanding radially outward from the concentrated position. In this spreading operation, the slit member 8
As described above, the 10 central slits 814 extend along the direction D12 inclined at an angle θ11 in the counterclockwise direction in front view with respect to the radial direction D11 of the circular opening 811 as shown in FIG. A relatively large load is applied to the slide pin 823 moving outward, but on the other hand, the movement speed of the slide pin 823 is relatively high due to this inclination.

That is, by inclining the central slit 814 in the counterclockwise direction in front view, the load on the slide pin 823 is relatively large, but the slide pin is moved by a relatively small amount of rotation (angle) of the rotary plate 830. 823 can be moved by a predetermined distance, so that the petals 802 can be expanded more efficiently.

Here, for example, assuming that the central slit 814 extends radially along the radial direction D11 without this inclination, the load on the slide pin 823 is relatively small compared to the case described above, while the slide The moving speed of the pin 823 becomes relatively slow, and furthermore, for example, assuming that the central slit 814 is inclined in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front with respect to the radial direction D11, the load on the slide pin 823 decreases and the moving speed increases. Both declines become more pronounced.

At this time, as described above, the guide rail 832 extends clockwise from the central end along the direction D15 between the tangent line and the normal line of the pivot opening 831 as shown in FIG. After that, it extends outward from the direction D15 while curving in an arc toward the clockwise side in the front view, and the five guide rails 832 extend outward in a spiral shape as a whole. .

The more the guide rail 832 inclines clockwise in the front view, the more the slide pin 82
As the load on 3 becomes smaller, the moving speed becomes slower. Furthermore, the guide rail 832
is curved more arcuately toward the clockwise side in front view than the direction D15, the more the slide pin 823
Both the decrease in load on and the decrease in movement speed become more pronounced.

That is, in the case of the central slit 814 described above, the load on the slide pin 823 is relatively large and the moving speed is relatively high by inclining the slide pin 823 in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front. In the case of the rail 832, the load on the slide pin 823 is relatively small and the moving speed is relatively slow by inclining clockwise in a front view and curving in an arc shape.

In the case of the guide rail 832, as described above, the peripheral wall extending forward from the front side surface of the rotary plate 830 is formed in a groove shape, and the tip of the slide pin 823 is fitted from the front side. Therefore, if a large load is applied between the guide rail 832 and the slide pin 823, the slide pin 823 may deviate from the guide rail 832 during movement. Therefore, it is configured to reduce the load on the slide pin 823 while sacrificing the moving speed of the slide pin 823 to reduce it.

On the other hand, in the case of the central slit 814, since the slide pin 823 penetrates therethrough, there is little fear of deviation. is configured to

In this way, by reducing the load on the slide pin 823 with the guide rail 832, troubles such as deviation can be prevented and power transmission can be ensured.
14, the movement speed of the slide pin 823 is increased.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 178 and 179, the slide pin 823 is inserted
4 (see FIG. 178(d)), the five sets of petals 802 radially expand to the fully open position, and the expanding operation ends.

In this fully open state, as shown in FIGS. 178 and 179, the five petals 802 move radially apart, so that they are continuously visible outside the decorative member 884 when viewed from the front. A petal 802 is arranged in the . As a result, the decorative member 884 and the petals 802 are viewed as one piece like a slightly larger hibiscus flower compared to the case where only the decorative member 884 is visually recognized (see FIG. 174(b)). 178(b)).

In this way, when the slide pin 823 reaches the outer end, which is the outer movement limit of the central slit 814, and can no longer move outward, the slide pin 823
is locked at the outer end of the central slit 814, the rotary plate 830 cannot rotate further in the same direction as before with a small torque that is less than the braking force of the oil damper 805.
Therefore, by stopping the operation of the central motor 804, it is possible to maintain the fully open state after the expansion operation is finished.

After completion of the opening operation, the center motor 804 transmits rotational power in the same direction to the rotary plate 830, and when the torque applied to the rotary plate 830 exceeds the braking force of the oil damper 805, the slit member 810 shakes off the damping by the oil damper 805 and starts rotating in the counterclockwise direction as indicated by arrow A12 in FIG. 178(d) together with the rotary plate 830. In this way, after the opening operation, the petal 802 rotates counterclockwise in a fully opened state as indicated by an arrow A13 in FIG. 178(b).

At this time, if the central motor 804 is not stopped after the expanding operation and the rotary plate 830 is continuously applied with rotational power, the expanding operation and the rotating operation can be performed immediately without any interval. can be transferred.

When the petal 802 rotates counterclockwise in a fully open state as indicated by an arrow A13,
The decorative member 884 rotates in the opposite direction (clockwise when viewed from the front) as indicated by arrow A14 in FIG. 178(b). Therefore, compared with the case where the decorative member 884 is stopped, the decorative member 8
Since the movement amount (relative movement amount) of one petal 802 with reference to the predetermined position of 84 becomes large, the rotational speed of the petal 802 can be made to appear higher than the actual rotational speed.

After completing the rotation operation, the central motor 804 rotates the first gear 804G,
179(b), when the slit member 810 is rotated clockwise in the rear view as indicated by the arrow A15, the slit member 810 is braked by the oil damper 805 and held in a stopped state. b), as indicated by an arrow A15, it is rotationally driven in the clockwise direction when viewed from the back, thereby performing the collecting operation in the direction opposite to the spreading operation.

That is, the slide pin 823 returns from the outer end, which is the outer movement limit of the central slit 814 , to the inner end, which is the inner movement limit of the central slit 814 . 174 and 175, and returns to the gathering state to complete the gathering operation.

Thereafter, the central motor 804 may be stopped to terminate the operation of the petal motion device 800. However, the central motor 804 may be operated continuously without being stopped, or after the central motor 804 is stopped. Once again, the central motor 804 drives the first gear 804
When G is rotated in the clockwise direction shown by the arrow A15 in FIG.
174(b), rotates in the clockwise direction in the assembled state as indicated by an arrow A16 in FIG. 174(b).

When the petals 802 rotate in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front as indicated by arrow A16, the decorative member 884 rotates in the opposite direction (counterclockwise when viewed from the front) as indicated by arrow A17 in FIG. 174(b). rotate to Therefore, compared with the case where the decorative member 884 is stopped, the decorative member 8
Since the movement amount (relative movement amount) of one petal 802 with reference to the predetermined position of 84 becomes large, the rotational speed of the petal 802 can be made to appear higher than the actual rotational speed.

By controlling the central motor 804 as described above, even from this gathering operation to the rotation operation,
It can be paused and transitioned after a pause, or it can be transitioned immediately so that it is continuous without a pause.

Here, in this embodiment, since the rotation of the fourth gear 880G is detected by the detection arc plate 880d passing the detection sensor 801c (see FIG. 153), the rotation angle of the central motor 804 is not controlled. , the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4) can determine whether or not the petal motion device 800 is rotating by determining the output of the detection sensor 801c.

Next, a ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 180 to 183. FIG. In the eighth embodiment, a tunnel-shaped foul ball passage portion 145 closed by walls on all sides is formed between the passage forming unit 140 and the plate member 14d. The unit 9140 has a notch 9145 in the wall forming the foul ball passage 9145 .
b is formed, and the sheet metal member 9150 protrudes along the notch 9145b. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted. Differences from the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 180 to 183. FIG.

180 is a front perspective view of the passage forming unit 9140 in the ninth embodiment, FIG. 181 is a rear perspective view of the passage forming unit 9140, and FIGS. 182 and 183 are front views of the ball firing unit 112a. be. As shown in FIGS. 180 and 181, the passage forming unit 9140 has an internal configuration of the foul ball passage portion 9145 and a lower end portion and a front portion of the foul ball passage portion 9145 in comparison with the passage forming unit 140 in the eighth embodiment. The vertical positional relationship of the lower end portion of the door side lower tray passage portion 9142, the shape of the lower end portion of the front door side lower tray passage portion 9142, and the configuration of the partition plate portion 53a are different.

That is, first, the foul ball passage portion 9145 includes a notch 9145b that is recessed from the front side end of the passage forming unit 9140 toward the rear side in the lower curved inner portion of the S-shaped path SL2. . Then, the sheet metal member 9150 includes a thin plate blade portion 9153 in which a portion extending upward from the upper portion of the plate portion 152 is bent toward the front side so as to cover the notch 9145b from above.

The notch 9145b is formed in a series of ranges including the recessed direction end of the S-shaped path SL2,
The recess depth is approximately the same as the radius Ra of the sphere.

The upper surface of the thin plate blade portion 9153 is in contact with the lower surface of a top stop projection (not shown) projecting from the plate member 14d (see FIG. 91) toward the back side, and the upward force generated from the interior of the foul ball passage portion 9145. configured to withstand the load.

This thin plate blade part 9153 passes the thread Y8 through the foul ball passage part 9145, and by pulling or loosening the thread Y8, illegally manipulates the ball inside the game area to take countermeasures against fraudulent profits. It is arranged for the purpose of cutting the thread Y8 passed through the foul ball passage portion 9145. Possible cheating is described here.

Returning to FIG. 148, description will be made. As described above, the ball launching unit 112a of the eighth embodiment
is provided with a cutting metal member 725 for cutting the thread Y8 fixed to the ball. This cutting metal member 725 is a member that attempts to cut the yarn Y8 fixed to the ball by utilizing the momentum of the ball being shot, but if the momentum of the ball is weak, the yarn Y8 will be cut. The ball was sometimes launched without

On the other hand, this ball does not reach the game area, flows down to the foul ball receiving portion 146 , passes through the foul ball passage portion 145 , and is discharged to the lower tray 50 . Therefore, there is no risk that the ball will enter the game area directly.

On the other hand, for example, if the balls P8 and P9 are fixed to both ends of the thread Y8, a new problem arises. That is, as shown in FIG. 182, the ball P fixed to one end of the thread Y8
8 is weakly hit and the ball P8 is guided to the foul ball receiving portion 146, the yarn Y9
When the ball P9 fixed to the other end of the thread Y8 is guided to the firing rail 730, the thread Y8 is arranged on the back side of the cutting metal member 725 (on the side of the firing solenoid 701), so that the ball P9 is vigorously moved. Even if the yarn Y8 is hammered out, the yarn Y8 will not be cut by the metal member 725 for cutting.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 183, if the ball P9 is hit vigorously, the ball P9 reaches the game area without being cut by the string Y8. The ball P8 shot in advance is the foul ball passage part 1
45, discharged to the front side of the player, and stored in the lower tray 50 (see FIG. 86).

Therefore, a person who commits fraud can pull or loosen the string Y8 by grabbing the ball P8 stored in the lower tray 50 and moving the ball P8. 63 (see FIG. 2), etc., and gain illicit benefits.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the thread Y8 to which the balls P8 and P9 are fixed at both ends thereof is used to commit a fraudulent act as described above, the thin plate blade is attached to the foul ball passage portion 145 through which the thread Y8 inevitably passes. By arranging the portion 9153, the yarn Y8 can be cut at an early stage.

That is, when a person who commits fraud pulls the thread Y8, the thread Y8 rubs against the thin plate blade portion 9153, thereby damaging the thread Y8 and cutting the thread Y8 at an early stage (see FIG. 180). ). At this time, as in this embodiment, the notch 9145 exposing the thin plate blade portion 9153
b is formed on the front side, that is, on the side where the thread Y8 is pulled when the thread Y8 is pulled from the front side, so that the thread Y8 is arranged inside the notch 9145b when the thread Y8 is pulled. , and the thread Y8 can be rubbed against the thin plate blade portion 9153 .

Further, as described above, the thin plate blade portion 9153 contacts the plate member 14d (see FIG. 91) on the opposite side of the foul ball passage portion 9145, thereby increasing the resistance force against the upward load. This prevents the thin plate blade portion 9153 from warping or bending when a load is applied to the thin plate blade portion 9153 toward the outside of the foul ball passage portion 9145 when the thread Y8 is pulled. be able to. Therefore, from the thread Y8 to the thin plate blade portion 915
Most of the load directed towards 3 can be used to damage yarn Y8.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, the recess depth of the notch 9145b is about the radius Ra of the sphere P8. At the same time, the ball P8 is prevented from colliding with the thin plate blade portion 9153 . As a result, the thin plate blade portion 9153 can be prevented from being cracked or chipped due to collision with the ball P8, so that the durability of the thin plate blade portion 9153 can be improved.

Secondly, in the passage forming unit 9140 , the lower end of the foul ball passage portion 9145 is positioned lower than the lower end of the front door side lower tray passage portion 9142 . More specifically, they are arranged with a vertical difference of about the radius Ra of the sphere. This makes it easier for the yarn Y8 to be damaged by the payout ball. That is, since the person who commits the fraudulent act is afraid that the fraudulent act will be discovered, the sphere P
After holding the ball P8, in order to prevent the clerk from suspicion, hold the ball P8 close to the body (for example,
It is easy to cheat by pulling or loosening the thread 8 by keeping it in a trouser pocket, etc.). In this case, the thread Y8 is maintained in a state of extending toward the player along the upper surface of the side wall of the lower tray 50 (in contact with the upper surface). At this time, the thread Y8 is stretched through a position above the bottom surface of the ball guide opening 53 by about the diameter of the ball (see FIG. 86).

In this state, when the prize ball is paid out, the lower tray 5 from the lower end of the front door side lower tray passage portion 9142
When the ball ejected to 0 collides with the lower tray 50 and bounces around, it steps on the thread Y8 arranged on the front side of the ball guide opening 53, or collides with the thread Y8. ) flows down to the right, and flows down through the bottom opening arranged behind the ball extracting lever 52 . That is, by arranging the lower end of the front door side lower tray passage portion 9142 above the lower end of the foul ball passage portion 9145 (by increasing the upper limit position for jumping around), the front door side lower tray Passage 9
The balls discharged from 142 to the lower plate 50 can come into contact with the thread Y8, increasing the possibility of damaging the thread Y8 and cutting the thread Y8 early.

Thirdly, the bottom surface of the lower end portion of the front door side lower tray passage portion 9142 is formed with a right inclined surface 9142a which is inclined downward toward the right. The right sloping surface 9142a makes it easy to impart a rightward velocity to the ball discharged from the ball guide opening 53 to the lower tray 50 through the front door side lower tray passage portion 9142 .

As a result, the yarn Y8 is pulled out before the momentum (kinetic energy) of the ball delivered to the lower tray 50 declines.
You can direct the ball towards That is, the right inclined surface 9142a can forcibly impart a rightward (foul ball passage portion 9145 side) velocity component to the ball discharged along the front-rear direction to the lower tray 50. It is possible to increase the percentage of balls that step on the thread Y8 or hit the thread Y8.

In addition, fourthly, in this embodiment, the lower end portion of the front door side lower tray passage portion 9142 is the ball guide opening 5
3 occupies an area of about 2/3 of the lateral width of the ball guide opening 53, and the lower end of the foul ball passage portion 9145 occupies the remaining area (left and right of the ball guide opening 53) in the right part of the ball guide opening 53. 1/3 of the width), and a boarding restricting stepped portion 9053a is formed at the boundary.

As shown in FIG. 180, the boarding restricting stepped portion 9053a consists of the right end (right edge) of the right inclined surface 9142a formed as the lower bottom portion of the front door side lower tray passage portion 9142 and the foul disposed on the right side of the right inclined surface 9142a. It is configured as a flat portion that connects the left end (left end side) of the bottom portion near the exit of the ball passage portion 9145 and extends in the vertical direction.

A space V9 having a vertical width larger than the diameter of the ball is formed above the riding regulation stepped portion 9053a on the back side of the ball guide opening 53, and the front door side lower tray passage portion 91 is formed by the space V9.
42 and the foul ball passage portion 9145 are communicated with each other. Therefore, before passing through the ball guide opening 53, the ball that has passed through the front door side lower tray passage portion 9142 can flow rightward along the space V9. Therefore, the ball can be easily brought closer to the thread Y8.

Note that the vertical width of the boarding restricting stepped portion 9053a is set to be equal to the radius Ra of the sphere.
As a result, the ball that rolls in the foul ball passage portion 9145 and comes into contact with the riding restriction stepped portion 9053a can be restricted from riding up to the right inclined surface 9142a side. In other words, the riding restricting stepped portion 9053a allows the passage of the ball in the horizontal direction in the space V9 in one direction (direction from left to right) and restricts it in the other direction (direction from right to left). Acts as a directional valve.

Next, a tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 184 to 186. FIG. In the eighth embodiment, a tunnel-shaped foul ball passage portion 145 closed on four sides by walls is formed between the passage forming unit 140 and the plate member 14d. The unit 10140 is configured such that a notch 10145c is formed in the wall forming the foul ball passage 10145, and the sheet metal member 10150 protrudes along the notch 10145c. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted. Differences from the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 184 to 186. FIG.

Figures 184 to 186 are front perspective views of the passage forming unit 10140 in the tenth embodiment. 184 shows the passage forming unit 10140 viewed obliquely from the upper right, FIG. 185 shows the passage forming unit 10140 seen from the oblique upper left, and FIG. A state seen obliquely from below is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 184 to 186, passage forming unit 10140 differs from passage forming unit 140 in the eighth embodiment only in the internal configuration of foul ball passage portion 10145. FIG.

That is, the foul ball passage portion 10145 is a notch 10 recessed from the front side end portion of the passage forming unit 10140 toward the rear side in the upper curved inner portion of the S-shaped path SL2.
145c. The sheet metal member 10150 is provided with thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 extending toward the front side in a manner covering the lower portion of the notch 10145c.

The notch 10145c is formed in a series of ranges including the recessed direction end of the S-shaped path SL2, and the recessed depth is set to be approximately twice the radius Ra of the sphere (see FIG. 180) (diameter). be. In addition, the notch 10145c has a through hole drilled in the front-rear direction along the rolling plate portion 10145d below the rolling plate portion 10145d in which the ball is guided to the passage portion 145a. The thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 of the sheet metal member 10150 are inserted from the rear side.

In the present embodiment, the plate member 14d (see FIG. 91) is arranged inside the notch 10145c and has an outer shape of the front view shape of the foul ball passage portion 10145 before the notch 10145 is formed. Auxiliary protrusion 1 protruding from the side surface of the back side to the back side
4d2. 184 and 185, the auxiliary convex portion 14d2 is illustrated by imaginary lines, and is omitted from the drawing in FIG.

The auxiliary convex portion 14d2 is provided so as to fill the notch 10145c halfway (approximately the radius of the sphere Ra (see FIG. 180)). It is about the radius Ra of P8. Therefore, the foul ball passage portion 101
45 can be prevented from colliding with the thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154, so that the thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 can be prevented from being cracked or chipped due to collision with the ball P8. The durability of the thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 can be improved.

A projecting distal end 14d3 of the auxiliary projecting portion 14d2 is formed in an inclined shape extending toward the back side toward the foul ball receiving portion 146 side (toward the right side). Therefore, in the notch 10145c, the width (front-rear width) of the gap on the back side of the protruding tip 14d3 of the auxiliary protruding portion 14d2 is
The closer it is to 5a, the wider it becomes. As a result, the thread Y8 arranged in the passage portion 145a is passed through the thin plate blade portion 1.
0153, 10154 can be easily inserted into the clearance on the back side of the projecting tip 14d3 of the auxiliary projection 14d2.

The first thin plate blade portion 10153 is a thin plate portion projecting from the back side edge of the notch 10145c to the front side, and the second thin plate blade portion 10154 is located on the front side of the first thin plate blade portion 10153. 10153 and a part constituting a forked blade part, the first thin plate blade part 10153
It extends to the left from the right end of the front side edge of the in a slightly upwardly inclined manner. As a result, between the first thin plate blade portion 10153 and the second thin plate blade portion 10154, there is formed an acute-angled recess 1015 with an acute-angled deep recess portion.
5 is formed.

Note that the thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 are metal members arranged for the purpose of cutting the thread Y8, like the thin plate blade portion 9153 in the ninth embodiment.

The acute-angled concave portion 10155 is arranged on the rear side of the projecting tip 14d3 and on the front side of the rear side edge of the notch 10145c. As a result, when the thread Y8 enters the rear surface side of the protruding tip 14d3 of the auxiliary protrusion 14d2, the thread Y8 is caused to enter the acute recess 10155 and the thread Y8
can be easily damaged.

Since the second thin plate blade portion 10154 arranged on the front side is arranged on the upper side compared to the first thin plate blade portion 10153, the thread Y8 is pulled obliquely downward on the front side by the person who commits the fraudulent act. can easily enter deep into the acute recess 10155 .

A plate-like portion connected to the right side of the thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 is a rolling plate portion 10145d.
and is configured to withstand an upward load originating from the interior of the foul ball passage portion 10145 .

The extended end on the lower end side of the inclined plate portion 146a and the lower end surface of the auxiliary convex portion 14d2 are arranged to face opposite left and right sides at a bending point where the internal passage of the foul ball passage portion 10145 bends in the left and right opposite directions. be. That is, at these two points, the thread Y8 is pulled in the left-right opposite direction.

For example, a person who commits a fraudulent act releases the ball P8 that has come out at hand, and the ball P8 flows backward through the foul ball passage portion 10145 and is discharged through the game area, thereby avoiding the discovery of the fraudulent act. However, according to this embodiment, a load is applied to the thread Y8 or the ball P8 in the left-right opposite direction at the extended end on the lower end side of the inclined plate portion 146a and the lower end surface of the auxiliary convex portion 14d2. Therefore, it is possible to easily cause a situation in which the backflowing ball P8 is caught on the lower end surface of the auxiliary convex portion 14d2 and stays there.

As a result, the ball P8 and the thread Y8 are kept inside the foul ball passage portion 10145, and the thread Y
By lengthening the time that 8 is exposed to the game area, it is possible to expedite the discovery of fraud.

Note that an adhesive member (glue, trimming, etc.) may be disposed deep in the acute recess 10155 to adhere to the thread Y8 that has entered the acute recess 10155 . In this case, even if the string Y8 that is attached to the ball P8 that has come to the hand of the cheater is cut, the string is adhered to the adhesive member provided in the acute recess 10155, and the ball P9 is returned to the game area. Since the yarn Y8 is not ejected from the yarn Y8 and is maintained there, it is possible to hasten the discovery of fraudulent use of the yarn Y8.

Next, an eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 187 to 190. FIG. In the eighth embodiment, a case has been described in which a ball (foul ball) that has a weak launch strength and has not reached the playing area is discharged to the lower tray 50. A foul ball receiving port 2164 is provided. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

187 is a front view of the inner frame 12 and the disc passage forming member 2160 in the eleventh embodiment, and FIG. 188 is a partially enlarged front perspective view of the outer rail 2062. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 187 and 188, the outer rail 2062 is arranged at the lower left corner of the game board 13 and is made of a resin material so as to have the same arc shape as the outer rail 62 in the eighth embodiment on the game area side. a tip member 206 formed and positioned proximate the ball firing unit 112a;
2a, and a guide member 2062b formed up to the vicinity of the left end of the inner frame 12 in a positional relationship having a gap V11 with a width in which the ball can flow down between the tip member 2062a.

A foul ball passage 2062c communicating with a foul ball receiving port 2164 formed at the right corner of the interior of the main body side upper dish passage portion 161 is formed downstream of the gap V11. Foul ball passage 2
062c is formed with a width slightly larger than the width that allows one ball to pass through the furniture, and a spare of the return ball prevention member 68 is arranged above it.

In this embodiment, the main body side upper tray passage portion 161 is moved to the left to the position where the main body side lower tray passage portion 162 is disposed in the above-described embodiment. formation is omitted. That is, the balls paid out from the payout device 133 (see FIG. 87) disposed on the back side of the game board 13 are exclusively supplied to the upper tray 17 via the upper tray passage portion 161 on the main body side. When the number of balls on the upper tray 17 exceeds the allowable amount, a full-tank switch (not shown) protruding inside the ball flow path on the downstream side of the dispensing device 133 is turned on by the load of the balls. It is configured so that the ball payout from 133 is stopped.

That is, in this embodiment, the ball that has passed through the foul ball passage 2062c also passes through the payout device 133 (
87) is also supplied to the upper tray 17. FIG. Therefore, as described above, by bonding balls to both ends of the thread Y8 and passing one of the balls through the foul ball passage 2062c, the thread Y8 can be
into the game area along the foul ball passage 2062c,
The action of damaging the yarn Y8 by striking the yarn Y8 with the payout ball can be produced regardless of how the balls accumulate on the upper plate 17. - 特許庁This makes it easier to cut the yarn Y8 at an early stage.

189 is a partially enlarged front perspective view of outer rail 2062. FIG. In FIG. 189, a spare of the return-ball prevention member 68 disposed above the foul-ball passage 2062c is disassembled and shown side by side as a rear perspective view. Further, FIG. 188 will be referred to as necessary in the description of FIG.

The return ball prevention member 68 is temporarily fastened to the game board 13 with a long metal screw B11 in a posture in which the base member 68b1 of the support member 68b that supports the tilting gate member 68a is arranged on the front side.

Specifically, the guide member 2062b is hollowed on the back side of the return ball prevention member 68. As shown in FIG. In the cavity, a support cylindrical portion 2062b2 is formed which protrudes from the rear side surface of the guide member 2062b toward the front side in a cylindrical shape and has an inner wall formed with a threaded groove into which the long screw B11 is screwed. A closing plate 2062b4 that closes the cavity of the guide member 2062b from the front side abuts against the tip of the supporting cylindrical portion 2062b2, and the base member 68 is placed in front of the closing plate 2062b4.
b1 is in contact with the base member 68b1, the long screw B11 is inserted into a through hole previously drilled as a mounting hole in the base member 68b1 and a through hole 2062b5 drilled in the blocking plate 2062b4 in alignment with the through hole. is inserted, and in this state it is screwed into the support cylindrical portion 2062b2, whereby the return ball prevention member 68 is fastened and fixed to the guide member 2062b.

The upper surface and the left surface of the closing plate 2062b4, which are the sides that contact the guide member 2062b, are formed so as to match the shape of the end surface of the guide member 2062b, while the lower surface avoids interference with the support member 68b. The right surface (surface on the front side in FIG. 189) is a guide member 20
It is formed as an inclined surface with the same gradient as the gradient increasing portion 2062d of 62b.

The slope increasing portion 2062d is sloped downward toward the tip member 2062a with respect to the surface forming the outer frame of the play area of the guide member 2062b. That is, the gradient increase section 206
A straight line L11 extending toward the tip member 2062a along the surface of 2d is below the upper end of the surface (upper surface) forming the outer frame of the play area of the tip member 2062a (in this embodiment, the diameter of the ball It intersects with the tip member 2062a at about ⅓ lower side).

By configuring in this way, when shooting a ball toward the game area, the gradient increasing unit 20
62d is withdrawn from the path of the sphere, and collision between the lower tip of the increasing gradient portion 2062d and the sphere can be avoided. On the other hand, when the ball that did not reach the game area flows backward, the upper end portion of the tip member 2062a protrudes inside the path of the ball rolling on the gradient increasing portion 2062d, so the ball moves left and right in the gap V11. It is possible to reduce the possibility of passing through and returning to the ball shooting unit 112a side beyond the tip member 2062a.

Between the side surface 2062d1 on the front side of the increasing gradient portion 2062d and the closing plate 2062b4,
Incision 206 with a width smaller than the diameter of the sphere and allowing the thread to enter (about 2 [mm] in this embodiment)
It is recessed toward the back side to a position where 2b1 can be formed. The cut 2062b1 is formed at a point where the path of the ball hit into the game area and the foul ball passage 2062c intersect at an acute angle.

In the support cylindrical portion 2062b2 on the right side in front view, on the front side of the side surface 2062d1,
A semicircular notch 2062b3 is provided on the side facing the gradient increasing portion 2062d. This notch 2062b is provided for the purpose of exposing the long screw B11.

In this way, the long screw B11 to be screwed into the support cylindrical portion 2062b2 on the right side in front view is exposed at the front and rear positions where the notch 2062b1 is formed. When the thread Y8 having the balls P8 and P9 fixed to both ends thereof is passed through the foul ball passage 2062c, the thread Y8 can rub against the long screw B11 in the event of a fraudulent act.

That is, due to the arrangement of the notches 2062b1, the thread Y8 is pressed against the long screws B11 arranged deep in the notches 2062b1 when subjected to a load that pulls both ends (Fig. 190 (
a) see). In this state, the thread Y8 is slid in the longitudinal direction, so that the thread Y8 is rubbed against the long screw B11, and the thread Y8 can be quickly cut.

In this embodiment, the notch 2062b1 is arranged closer to the front than the position through which the center of the sphere passes. As a result, it is possible to prevent the notch 2062b1 from being arranged at a position (vertical lower part of the center of the ball) where the ball to be shot contacts the outer rail 2062, so that the notch 2062b1 collides with the ball to be shot. It is possible to prevent the direction of the ball from being affected.

Also, a person who commits cheating through the thread Y8, to which the balls P8 and P9 are fixed at both ends, through the foul ball passage 2062c, will not be able to handle the end of the thread Y8 that protrudes toward the player side (the ball P8 is fixed). 182) is pulled forward to adjust the position of the ball P9 in the game area. Therefore, by arranging the cut 2062c closer to the front side, it is possible to make it easier for the yarn Y8 to enter the cut 2062c compared to when the cut 2062c is arranged closer to the back side.

A button-type switch SW11 having a detecting portion projecting downward is disposed in a cavity formed in the guide member 2062b. The button switch SW11 is configured as a switch that can be pushed under a load extremely weaker than the load generated when the gate member 68a rotates with the weight of the weight portion 68a2. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the button type switch SW11 will interfere with the operation of the gate member 68a. The button-type switch SW11 is for detecting the attitude of the gate member 68a, and when the attitude of the gate member 68a changes, the O
It is arranged so as to be switchable between N-OFF.

Figures 190(a) and 190(b) are partial front enlarged views of foul ball passage 2062c. In addition, in FIG. 190(a), the weight portion 68a of the gate member 68a of the return ball prevention member 68
190(b), the weight 68a2 is pushed up by the ball passing through the gate member 68a.
The opening/closing portion 68a1 side of is tilted toward the foul ball passage 2062c side. again,
In FIG. 190(a), the path of the thread Y8 used in the fraudulent act is shown for reference, and the button switch SW11 is turned on. In FIG. 190(b), the button switch SW11 is It is illustrated that it is OFF.

As shown in FIG. 190(b), the return-ball preventing member 68 only gives a slight resistance to the passing ball, and gives enough resistance to stop the ball passing through the foul-ball passage 2062c. Not. This is because the ball flows away under its own weight, and even if the width of the foul ball passage 2062c is narrowed by tilting the opening/closing portion 68a1 as shown in FIG. Since the state shown in 190(a) is restored, the foul ball passage 20
This is because the state shown in FIG. 190(a) can be restored by the time the ball is guided to 62c (0.6 seconds at the shortest).

On the other hand, the ball-return preventing member 68 provides great resistance to an object that does not flow away like a ball, for example, an object that advances while filling the passage, such as an endoscope. This is a structure as an anti-fraud measure.

For example, the tip of a device such as an endoscope advances through the foul ball passage 2062c in the direction opposite to the direction in which the ball flows down, reaches the inside of the game area, and attempts to interfere with the inside of the game area (for example, Bending a nail (not shown) planted in the game board 13, grasping a ball and putting it into the winning slot, using the tip of the device as a guide plate to the winning slot, and emitting a laser from the tip (e.g. cutting nails).

FIG. 191 is a partial front enlarged view of foul ball passageway 2062c. In addition, in FIG. 191, the outline of a device such as an endoscope that is illegally intruded is illustrated by imaginary lines.

In the present embodiment, when the tip of a device such as an endoscope is advanced through the foul ball passage 2062c in a direction opposite to the direction in which the ball flows down, the gate member 68a of the return ball prevention member 68 is displaced while advancing. Become. Here, when the state shown in FIG. 191 (the state in which the weight portion 68a2 is displaced by the distal end portion of the endoscope) shifts to the state shown in FIG. The insertion portion (long flexible portion) is still arranged below weight portion 68a2, and weight portion 68a
2 will be maintained in a state of being pushed up. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to disengage the opening/closing portion 68a1, and it is possible to prevent the distal end portion of the endoscope from advancing further.

Here, if the endoscope is forcibly advanced to destroy the gate member 68a and enter the inside, it is impossible to prevent fraud. On the other hand, in this case, since the button type switch SW11 is maintained in the OFF state, the button type switch SW1 is turned off.
1 is kept OFF for a predetermined period of time, a fraudulent act can be detected at an early stage.

Also, when the button type switch SW11 is in the OFF state, control may be performed so that the dispensing of balls from the dispensing device 133 (see FIG. 87) is stopped. Even in this case, in normal use, the state in which the button type switch SW11 is turned off occurs only at the timing when the foul ball passes (see FIG. 190(b)), and the button type switch SW11 is turned on immediately.
Since it is set to N (see FIG. 190(a)), the period during which the payout of balls from the payout device 133 is stopped can be shortened as much as possible, and the player can be prevented from feeling discomfort.
On the other hand, when the gate member 68a is illegally destroyed, the state in which the dispensing of balls from the dispensing device 133 is stopped can be maintained.

It should be noted that the member arranged above the foul ball passage 2062c need not be the return ball prevention member 68, and may be another movable member. However, as in this embodiment, the return ball prevention member 68
By arranging , if the return ball prevention member 68 on the side of the game board 13 is cracked or bent due to long-term use, it can be quickly replaced. As a result, compared with the case where the replacement member of the return ball prevention member 68 is simply purchased as an option, it has the effect of being able to play a role in preventing fraudulent acts before replacement, and the trouble of forgetting and searching for a storage place can be saved. It is possible to achieve the effect of Further, it is not necessary to include the entire structure of the return ball prevention member 68, and for example, the gate member 68a may be pivotally supported by a fixed shaft (the support member 68b may not be provided).

Also, if the return ball prevention member 68 cracks or bends and is replaced, whether or not the above-described fraudulent act prevention effect is achieved depends on the degree of damage to the return ball prevention member 68. , that the fraudulent party does not know whether or not the exchange has taken place, and
Even if it has been replaced, the degree of damage is not known, so the deterrence against fraud can still be maintained.

Next, a twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 192 to 197. FIG. In the eighth embodiment, the case where the petal motion device 800 rotates only at the gathered position or the fully opened position has been described, but the petal motion device 2800 in the twelfth embodiment can rotate even at the expanded position. configured in a manner. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 192 is a rear perspective view of the loose fitting device 2880 in the twelfth embodiment. Figure 192
, the back cover 2886 of the loose fitting device 2880 has a flange portion 2 extending radially outward from the outer edge of the rear end in comparison with the configuration of the back cover 886 in the eighth embodiment.
887 and a restricting portion 2888 projecting from the extended tip of the flange portion 2887 toward the rear side. The loose fitting device 2880 in this embodiment is the loose fitting device 8 in the eighth embodiment.
80, the only difference is the rear cover 2886, and the other parts are the same as the loose fitting device 880.

The restricting portion 2888 protrudes to a position (intermediate position) between the rear side portion 802a and the front side portion 802b of the petal 802 . That is, the restricting portion 2888 protrudes to a position where it can contact with the front side portion 802b but cannot contact with the rear side portion 802a.

In this embodiment, a single flange portion 2887 and a single restriction portion 2888 are arranged, but these may be scattered at a plurality of locations on the back cover 2886 .
Next, actions of the flange portion 2887 and the restricting portion 2888 will be described with reference to FIGS. 193 and 194. FIG.

193(a) and 193(b) are front views of the petal motion device 2800, and FIG.
4(a) and 194(b) are partially enlarged front views of the slit member 810 and the slide member 2820. FIG. 193 and 194 show an operation example of the petal operating device 2800 in chronological order.
) shows the state at the same point in time.

194(a) and 194(b), the guide pin 822 and the slide pin 823 are shown in cross section for convenience, and in the same cross section, the pair of threaded portions 2803 of the flat plate member 2803 are shown.
S is seen in cross section. Also, in FIG. 193, the petal 802 whose posture is changed by the action of the restricting portion 2888 is shown in white (the same applies to FIGS. 195 and 196).

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 194(a), a pair of threaded portions 2803S arranged inside the slits 815 on both sides are provided with opposite threaded portions centered on the screw insertion portion 803H. It has a sloped surface 2803T that slopes away from 2803S.

The inclined surface 2803T is approximately 30° with respect to the direction in which the slide member 2820 slides.
Formed at an angle. The action of the restricting portion 2888 on the petals 802 will be described.

As shown in FIGS. 193(a) and 193(b), the petal 802 is slid in a posture in which the restricting portion 2888 is arranged radially outward along the moving direction of the front side portion 802b of the petal 802 ( Rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 155) is rotated counterclockwise in a front view), restricting portion 2888 and front side portion 802b of petal 802 come into contact, and petal 802 receives a load from restricting portion 2888.

When the petals 802 are further slid (rotating the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 155) counterclockwise when viewed from the front) while the petals 802 are receiving the load from the restricting portion 2888, the petals 802 receive the load. To do so, change your posture.

At this time, the slide member 2820 fastened and fixed to the petals 802 is in the normal posture shown in FIG. , as shown in FIG. 194(b), the central slit 814
and a posture change to a tilted posture with respect to the slits 815 on both sides. petal 8
At 02, posture changes occur whenever possible.

By changing the attitude of the slide member 2820 and the petals 802 in this manner, the restricting portion 28
The resistance between slide member 2820 and slit member 810 changes while the load from 88 is deflected.

That is, in the normal posture shown in FIG. 194(a), only the narrow slide ribs 803a of the slide member 2820 are in contact with the slits 815 on both sides.
The slide member 2820 can move smoothly in the longitudinal direction of the slits 814,815.

On the other hand, in the inclined position shown in FIG. 194(b), the slide member 2820 has the slide rib 803a with respect to the slits 815 on both sides, and the inclined surface 280 with the inner inner wall.
Since the 3Ts are abutted (pressed) respectively, the frictional resistance increases. In addition, since the width of the inclined surface 2803T is formed to be larger than that of the slide rib 803a, the increase in frictional resistance is remarkable. Since the inclined surfaces 2803T are in contact with the inner walls of the slits 815 on both sides from both directions in the short direction of the slits 815 on both sides, the frictional resistance increases regardless of the rotation direction of the rotary plate 830. .

Therefore, in the inclined posture shown in FIG. 194(b), the slit 814 of the slide member 2820
, 815 in the longitudinal direction, the slide member 28
20 reach the ends of the slits 814 and 815, the slide pin 823
156) can exceed the braking force of the oil damper 805 (see FIG. 156). The braking force of the oil damper 805 can be set to a magnitude between the movement resistance of the slide member 2820).

In this case, the slit member 810 shakes off the damping by the oil damper 805 and starts rotating together with the rotary plate 830 (see FIG. 155). That is, from the state shown in FIG. 193(b),
Start to rotate counterclockwise when viewed from the front. Since this direction corresponds to the direction in which the petals 802 move away from the restricting portion 2888, the load applied to the petals 802 from the restricting portion 2888 can be released.

195 is a front view of petal motion device 2800. FIG. 193 (
The figure shows a state after the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 156) continues to rotate in the same direction from the state of b).

As shown in FIG. 195, the petal actuator 2800 can be rotated in the expanded position. At this time, the rear cover 2886 rotates in a direction (clockwise when viewed from the front) opposite to the rotating direction of the rotary plate 830 (see FIG. 155). 195, the torque applied from the slide pin 823 to the rotary plate 830 (see FIG. 156) is applied to the oil damper 805 (see FIG. 156).
156), the petals 802 can be rotated in both forward and reverse directions while maintaining the expanded position.

196(a), 196(b) and 197 are front views of the petal motion device 2800. FIG. 196(a), 196(b), and 197 show how the petals 802 move from the spreading position to the collected position in time series.

In FIG. 196(a), the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 156) is rotated clockwise from the state shown in FIG. When the rotary plate 830 further rotates in the same direction from this state, as shown in FIG. 196(b),
The restricting portion 2888 pushes the front side portion 802b, and the positions of the petals 802 and the slide member 2820 are returned to their normal positions.

Furthermore, when the rotary plate 830 (see FIG. 156) rotates in the same direction, the braking force of the oil damper 805 (see FIG. 156) exceeds the torque applied from the slide pin 823 to the rotary plate 830. The rotational motion of 802 subsides and the petals 802 slide toward the gathering position.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the petals 802 can be automatically rotated at the spreading position and then returned to the gathered position.

Although the case where the front side portion 802b of the petal 802 expands at the position where it abuts against the restricting portion 2888 has been described, if the petal 802 is rotated by a slight angle (the rotating plate 830 is rotated clockwise when viewed from the front, ), contact between the front side portion 802b and the restricting portion 2888 can be avoided, so it is also possible in this embodiment to move the petal 802 to the fully open position and rotate it at the fully open position.

In addition, the restricting portion 2888 may be placed at a position where it does not contact the petals 802 at the gathered position or the fully opened position, or at a position where the petals 802 do not contact the petals 802 rotating at the fully opened position.
can slip through the regulating portion 2888 by slightly changing its posture, and can prevent the regulating portion 2888 from hindering the rotation of the petals 802 in the fully open position. can.

Further, as shown in this embodiment, by arranging the restricting portion 2888 at a position protruding from the back cover 886 in a front view, the restricting portion 2888 can be used as part of the effect device. For example, by arranging a star-shaped pattern on the front side of the restricting portion 2888, the petals 802
When the petals 802 expand, it can be used as a mark to determine whether the petals 802 pass through a position close to the star-shaped pattern or a position far from the star pattern. It is possible to make a difference between performing the rotation operation and performing the rotation operation by expanding halfway.

Then, for example, by performing an effect in which the degree of expectation for a big win varies depending on the degree of expansion during rotation, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the degree of distance between the star-shaped pattern and the petals 802. It is possible to make the pattern of the mold function as a production part. Thereby, the regulation part 2888 can be used as part of the effect device.

Note that the restricting portion 2888 may be arranged at a position hidden by the rear cover 886 when viewed from the front. In this case, it is not necessary to design the shape of the restricting portion 2888 in terms of design, so the degree of freedom in designing the restricting portion 2888 can be improved.

At the fully open position, the petal 802 abutting against the regulating portion 2888 and slightly changing its posture may be used as an effect (for example, an effect suggesting the degree of expectation for a big win). In this case, depending on whether the petals 802 are simply rotating, or are rotating while abutting the restricting portion 2888 and causing a slight change in posture (flutteringly), it is possible to change the meaning and content conveyed to the player. .

In the present embodiment, the position where the petal 802 contacts the restricting portion 2888 is the tip position.
If the contact position is closer to the center (if the arrangement of the petals 802 is different), the degree of expansion of the petals 802 when the posture changes will change. Therefore, even with the configuration in which the restricting portion 2888 is fixed to the rear cover 2886, it is possible to change the extent of expansion of the petals 802 when the attitude thereof changes.

Next, another example of the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 198 and 199. FIG.
In the twelfth embodiment, the case where the slit member 810 rotates along with the rotating plate 830 regardless of the rotating direction of the rotating plate 830 at the expanded position has been described. The slit member 3810 of 3800 is configured to be switchable between the case where the slit member 3810 rotates together with the rotating plate 830 and the case where the rotating plate 830 rotates independently depending on the rotating direction of the rotating plate 830 . In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

198(a), 198(b), 199(a) and 199(b) are partially enlarged front views of the slit member 3810 and the slide member 2820 in another example of the twelfth embodiment. 198 and 199 show, in chronological order, an operation example of the petal motion device 3800 when the rotary plate 830 rotates clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 198(a) when viewed from the front. again,
198(a), 198(b), 199(a) and 199(b), the rotating plate 83
0 guide rails 832 are shown in phantom lines.

When rotating plate 830 is rotated counterclockwise in front view from the state shown in FIG. Since it is the same as the twelfth embodiment that the slit member 3810 and the rotary plate 830 rotate together, exceeding the resistance applied, the description is omitted here.

198 and 199, the guide pin 822 and the slide pin 823 are cross-sectionally viewed for convenience, and the pair of threaded portions 2803S of the flat plate member 2803 are cross-sectionally viewed in the same cross section.

Here, when the rotary plate 830 is rotated clockwise in front view, the slide pin 823 is inserted through the guide rail 832 of the rotary plate 830 , so that the slide member 2820 that receives the load from the guide rail 832 Along with the displacement, it is displaced in the lower right direction in FIG. 198(a) (see FIG. 198(b)). In this embodiment, additional concave portions 3814a, 3815a, and 3815 are provided on the side for receiving the slide member 2820 displaced in this way.
b is formed.

That is, the slit member 3810 is different from the slit member 810 in that the central slit 814 is formed in the wall portion on the clockwise side in the front view among the wall portions extending along the radial direction of the central slit 814 .
A central recessed portion 3814a that is recessed in such a manner as to increase the width of the central recessed portion 3814a, and a wall portion extending along the radial direction of both side slits 815 arranged on the clockwise side of the central slit 814 when viewed from the front. A clockwise side recessed portion 3815a that is recessed in the wall portion so as to widen the lateral width of both side slits 815, and a radial direction of both side slits 815 that are disposed on the counterclockwise side of the central slit 814 in front view Both slits 81 in the wall on the clockwise side in front view
5, and a counterclockwise recessed portion 3815b that is recessed in such a manner as to widen the width in the lateral direction.

The clockwise side recessed portion 3815a is located at the flat plate member 280 in the state shown in FIG.
3 slide rib 803a.

The central recessed portion 3814a is in the state shown in FIG. 198(a).
from the position facing the guide pin 822 of the slit member 3810 toward the center of rotation of the slit member 3810 (Fig. 19
8(a) bottom).

The central recessed portion 3814a has a recess depth greater than that of the clockwise recessed portion 3815a and a radial length greater than that of the clockwise recessed portion 3815a.

The counterclockwise recessed portion 3815b is located in the flat plate member 28 in the state shown in FIG.
03 toward the rotation center of the slit member 3810 (
It is formed continuously to FIG. 198(a) bottom).

The counterclockwise side recessed portion 3815b is deeper than the clockwise side recessed portion 3815a and has a longer radial length than the central recessed portion 3814a.

The action when the rotating plate 830 of the petal motion device 3800 configured as described above rotates clockwise when viewed from the front will be described. First, from the state shown in FIG. 198(a), the rotating plate 830
starts to rotate clockwise in front view, the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 move in the lower right direction in FIG. 198(b)).

As a result, the contact between the counterclockwise side walls of the both-side slits 815 and the flat plate member 2803 is released, so that the frictional resistance between the flat plate member 2803 and the slit member 3810 is reduced.

When the rotating plate 830 is further rotated clockwise in front view, the sliding member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 move toward the contact portion between the recessed portion 3815a on the clockwise side and the slide rib 803a (the sliding member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 and the slit member 3810, with the first contact point) as a fulcrum, rotate counterclockwise in front view (Fig. 199(a) and Fig. 199(b)
)reference).

The center slit 3814a and the counterclockwise recessed portion 3815b are deeper than the clockwise recessed portion 3815a.
03, contact between the guide pin 822 and the central recessed portion 3814a, and the threaded portion 280
Contact between 3S and the counterclockwise recessed portion 3815b is avoided.

Further, the sliding member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 are recessed to a depth that does not abut the central slit 814 and both side slits 815 during the rotation described above. A turning side recessed portion 3815a is recessed.

Therefore, the load applied to the slit member 3810 via the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 is reduced, and the load generated between the slide member 2820 and the slit member 3810 falls below the resistance applied to the slit member 3810 from the oil damper 805. . As a result, the slit member 3810 and the rotary plate 830 do not rotate together.

As shown in FIG. 199(b), the longitudinal direction of the central slit 814 of the slit member 3810 and the direction connecting the pair of threaded portions 2803S (longitudinal direction of the flat plate member 2803) are perpendicular to each other. When the radial center side slide rib 803a housed in the clockwise side slits 815 abuts against the walls of the both side slits 815, the sliding member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 move around the abutting portion as a fulcrum when viewed from the front. Rotate counterclockwise. As a result, the slide rib 803a that has entered the clockwise recessed portion 3815a is removed.
moves counterclockwise in front view from the base end of the recessed portion 3815a on the clockwise side.

That is, the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 move in the radial direction (see FIG. 194).
(a)), the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 can be moved toward the center in the radial direction by continuously rotating the rotating plate 830 clockwise in the front view.

Therefore, according to another example of the twelfth embodiment, after the state shown in FIG. , the rotating plate 830 rotates independently and the attitude of the slit member 3810 is maintained.

As a result, the slide member 2820, the flat plate member 2803, and the petals 802 fastened and fixed to the flat plate member 2803 (see FIG. 193(a)) can be made to perform movements that could not be realized in the twelfth embodiment.

In other words, in the twelfth embodiment, after the postures of the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 change during the opening operation accompanying the rotation of the rotating plate 830 counterclockwise in front view (FIG. 194(b) )), and until the changed posture is restored, the flat plate member 280
3 and the petal 802 (see FIG. 193(a)) fastened and fixed to the flat plate member 2803 (see FIGS. 195 and 196).
(a) and FIG. 196(b)).

On the other hand, in another example of the twelfth embodiment, after the postures of the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 change during the opening operation accompanying the rotation of the rotating plate 830 counterclockwise in front view (Fig. 198 ( a)), and by rotating the rotary plate 830 clockwise in front view, the postures of the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 can be restored (see FIG. 199(b)).
. That is, until the changed posture is restored, the flat plate member 2803 and the petal 802 fastened and fixed to the flat plate member 2803 (see FIG. 193(a)) are rotated (rotated along with the slit member 3810). can be omitted.

Therefore, according to another example of the twelfth embodiment, after the postures of the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 are changed during the expansion operation accompanying the rotation of the rotary plate 830 counterclockwise when viewed from the front (Fig. 198(a)), rotating plate 830 in any state (phase or attitude)
By rotating clockwise from the front view, the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 are gathered from the position of the flat plate member 2803 that matches the arbitrary state (phase or posture) and the petal 802 fastened and fixed to the flat plate member 2803. It can start moving towards a position.
As a result, the flat plate member 2803 and the petals 802 fastened and fixed to the flat plate member 2803 (FIG. 1)
93(a)) rotates (see FIG. 195) during expansion (see FIG. 198(a)) and then gathers toward the gathered position (see FIG. 197). , so that the motion of the petal motion device 3800 can be diversified.

Next, a thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 200 to 203. FIG. In the first embodiment, the case where the curved surface forming the front side portion of the lower frame member 320 is formed of a plate with no opening has been described.
A plurality of through holes 8326a to 8326c are formed through the curved wall portion 8326 of the . In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

Figures 200, 201, 202(a) and 202(b) are front perspective views of the operation device 8300 in the thirteenth embodiment. 200 and 202(a) illustrate the second state of the tilting device 310, FIG. 201 illustrates the first state of the tilting device 310, and FIG. 202(b) illustrates the tilting device 310 in the first state. A state in the middle of changing from state 1 to state 2 is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 200 and 201, the operating device 8300 in this embodiment is different from the lower frame member 8 in comparison with the operating devices 300 to 7300 in each of the above-described embodiments.
The difference in the curved wall portion 8326 of 320 has not been explained, and other configurations have been mostly explained in the operation devices 300 to 7300 in each of the above-described embodiments.
Therefore, the details of the lower frame member 8320 will be described below, and other configurations will be limited to a few supplementary descriptions.

The curved wall portion 8326 of the lower frame member 8320 is a curved plate-like portion arranged to face the protective lens member 311i of the tilting device 310 in the first state in the front-rear direction, and is bored in a substantially oval shape at the left-right central position. and a first through hole 8326a formed on the left and right sides of the vibration device 5400. When viewed in a direction orthogonal to the rotation axis of the tilting device 310 and along the surface of the bottom plate portion 321, the cross-sectional shape of the bottom plate portion 321 has a horizontally long rectangular cross-sectional shape. A pair of second through holes 8326b drilled along the bottom plate portion 321 and connecting the upper surface and the lower surface of the bottom plate portion 321 at surface positions, and a pair of third through holes 8326b drilled at the left and right corners to have a vertically long rectangular cross-sectional shape when viewed from the front. It mainly includes a through hole 8326c.

Each of the through holes 8326a to 8326c has the purpose of facilitating the downward passage of liquid such as drinking water, and the purpose of facilitating removal of coin-shaped foreign objects inserted into gaps V13 and V14 of the operation device 8300 described below. and a through hole. For example, a coin-shaped foreign object may cause a player to stop the operation of the tilting device 300 when he/she feels that the operation of the tilting device 300 is a hindrance, or may cause the tilting device 310 and the upper frame to interfere with the tilting device 310 and the upper frame. Member 33
0 may be fitted in the gaps V13 and V14.

Here, since the operation device 8300 includes the tilting device 310 configured to be operable, slight gaps V13 and V14 are formed between the upper frame member 330 and the tilting device 310 .
By doing so, the operation of the tilting device 310 can be smoothed, but on the other hand, the gap V13
, V14.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the tilting device 310 is arranged at the rear end of the ring member BR1 (
14(b)), that is, the position supported by the upper frame member 330 is closer to the rear end. It is configured to easily shift (deform) to the left or right near the end on the front side. Note that this misalignment (deformation) includes, for example, misalignment using rattling caused by adding design errors incorporated from the design stage between members, and misalignment caused by slightly deforming each member. (variant) is included.

Therefore, during normal use, the gap V13 between the upper frame member 330 on both the left and right sides of the tilting device 310
However, even if the gap V13 is designed so as not to be large enough to insert a coin-shaped foreign object (eg, a 1-yen coin), the tilting device 310 can be displaced to either the left or the right (eg, to the left). In this case, the gap V13 created on the other side (for example, the right side) is
The gap V1 is the sum of the gaps V13 formed between the upper frame member 330 and the left and right sides of the
3, and can be large enough to insert a coin-shaped foreign object.

That is, the gap V13 between the tilting device 310 and the upper frame members 330 on both left and right sides of the tilting device 310 during normal use is set to be less than half the thickness of the coin-shaped foreign matter (for example, 0.5 mm or less for a 1-yen coin). Otherwise, if the tilting device 310 is misaligned to the left or right, a coin-shaped foreign object may be inserted.

Also, the gap V14 between the front end portion of the tilting device 310 and the upper frame member 330 in the front-rear direction is also adjusted by utilizing the backlash near the ring member BR1 (see FIG. 14(b)) of the tilting device 310.
If a load directed toward the back side is applied to 10 to shift (deform) the position, the gap V14 can be easily enlarged, so that a coin-shaped foreign object can be inserted into the gap V14 as well.

In this embodiment, the gap V13 between the tilting device 310 and the upper frame member 330 is either left or right.
Alternatively, if the tilting device 310 tilts while a coin-shaped foreign object is inserted in the gap V14 in the front-rear direction, the coin-shaped foreign object may enter the lower frame member 8320 .

In particular, as shown in FIGS. 202(a) and 202(b), when the left and right wall portions of the tilting device 310 are formed in a shape that narrows left and right inward toward the vertical center, the tilting device 310 easily fits the fingers of the player. On the other hand, in the second state (see FIG. 202(a)), the coin-shaped foreign object fitted in the gap V13 protrudes outward from the constriction of the case main body 311. A downward load is applied from the lower frame member 8320, making it easier to enter the lower frame member 8320.

If the tilting device 310 is operated with a coin-shaped foreign object inserted in the gaps V13 and V14, the operating resistance becomes excessive, which may cause a problem in driving the tilting device 310. FIG. In addition, rubbing between the coin-shaped foreign matter and the protective lens member 311i may deteriorate the translucency of the protective lens member 311i, which may interfere with the light emission effect.

In the first place, if a coin-shaped foreign object gets caught inside and restricts the operation of the tilting device 310, it becomes impossible to execute the intended effect with the operation device 8300. Therefore, the gap V13,
If it is discovered that a coin-shaped foreign object has been inserted into V14, it is desirable to remove it immediately. had to disassemble.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, through holes 8326a to 8326c are formed in the curved wall portion 8326, so that coin-shaped foreign matter can be removed through the through holes 8326a to 8326c. The shape and arrangement of the through holes 8326a to 8326c will be described below.

FIG. 203(a) is a front view of the operation device 8300, and FIG. 203(b) is a front view of FIG.
3(a) is a side view of the operation device 8300 as viewed in the direction of arrow CCIIIb in FIG.
03(c) is a bottom view of the operation device 8300, and FIG. 203(d) is a bottom view of FIG.
) is a partial cross-sectional view of the operation device 8300 on line CCIIId-CCIIId of FIG.
FIG. 203(e) is a cross-sectional view of the operation device 8300 along line CCIIIe-CCIIIe in FIG. 203(a).

The first through hole 8326a has the same center in the horizontal direction as the center in the horizontal direction of the vibrating device 5400, and is drilled with a lateral width larger than the lateral width of the vibrating device 5400 (the first accommodating portion 5431 of the vibrating device 5400, see FIG. 58). be. Therefore, even if liquid such as drinking water is poured into the vicinity of the left-right central position of the gap V14, the liquid is discharged through the first through hole 8326a before reaching the vibrating device 5400. Liquids can be prevented from reaching the vibration device 5400 .

The lower edge of the first through-hole 8326a is the extended portion 311h (FIG. 12) of the tilting device 310 in the first state.
) is placed below the top surface of the Therefore, when a coin-shaped foreign object fitted in the gap V14 is on the upper surface of the extension portion 311h, the upper surface of the extension portion 311h is inclined (horizontally when viewed vertically in the second state). The tilting device 3 is curved toward the
Inclination D81 downwardly inclined toward the left-right center in the first state of 10, and the tilting device 310
is tilted, coin-shaped foreign matter can be easily removed through the first through hole 8326a along the slope D82 (see FIG. 201) that slopes downward toward the front side.

As a result, the size required for the first through hole 8326a can be minimized while the coin-shaped foreign matter can be easily removed, so that the lower frame member 8320 can be designed freely. . For example, the strength of the lower frame member 8320 can be easily ensured compared to the case where the first through-hole 8326a needs to be widened to the left and right.

In this embodiment, the size of the first through hole 8326a is the same as that of the tilting device 310 in the first state.
A portion above the upper surface of the extended portion 311h (see FIG. 12) has a size equal to or greater than the size of an object assumed to be a coin-shaped foreign object. That is, in the present embodiment, the portion above the upper surface of the extension portion 311h of the tilting device 310 in the first state has a horizontal width and a vertical width of about 30 [m].
m].

The first through hole 8326a is located on the front side of the spherical shell portion 313a (see FIG. 15) when the tilting device 310 is in the first state. The spherical shell portion 313a is an LED device 341f.
(See FIG. 25). In this embodiment, the spherical shell portion 31
Except for 3a, the plate portions of the lens member 313 that are continuously provided on the left, right, top and bottom of the spherical shell portion 313 are mirror-finished in this embodiment (the mirror-finished member is fixed), Light passing through the spherical shell portion 313 is reflected.

With this arrangement, when the tilting device 310 is in the first state, the first through hole 8326a is used to make a difference in the amount of light that passes through the spherical shell portion 313a (see FIG. 15) and is visually recognized by the player. In particular, the first through hole 8326a removes the resin member that weakens the amount of light, so that the central portion in the left-right direction can be visually recognized brightly.

When a coin-shaped foreign object is placed at a position that partially closes the first through hole 8326a, the amount of light that passes through the spherical shell portion 313a (see FIG. 15) and is visually recognized by the player is It is weaker than when there is no foreign matter (a coin-shaped foreign matter becomes a shadow). That is, since it is possible to make it easy to notice that the coin-shaped foreign matter remains on the lower frame member 8320 by using the amount of light and the shadow of the coin-shaped foreign matter as a clue, the coin-shaped foreign matter is not noticed and the lower frame can be easily detected. Member 832
The possibility of remaining at 0 can be reduced. Note that this effect is
The same applies not only to the case of viewing through the second through hole 8326b or the third through hole 8326c, but also to the case of viewing through the second through hole 8326b or the third through hole 8326c.

The second through-hole 8326b allows a coin-shaped foreign object that has fallen on the bottom plate portion 321 to pass through the bottom plate portion 321.
It is configured as a through-hole that can be discharged in a direction along one plane. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the lateral width of the second through hole 8326 is about 30 [mm], and the bottom plate portion 321 is formed with a width of about 2 [mm] in the normal direction.

Since the second through-hole 8326b is arranged near the center of the bottom plate portion 321 in the left-right direction, even after a coin-shaped foreign object slides down along the curved shape of the front edge of the bottom plate portion 321, it can be easily removed. Coin-shaped foreign matter can be removed immediately.

Since the second through holes 8326b are arranged on both the left and right sides of the vibrating device 5400, for example, the liquid such as drinking water flowing along the curved wall portion 8326 or the bottom plate portion 321 reaches the vibrating device 5400. The second through-hole 8326b can be utilized for forward outward discharge.

The central axis of the third through hole 8326c is arranged along the left and right edges of the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 20).
3(a)), it is formed as a through-hole through which a coin-shaped foreign matter that has entered the gap V13 along the left and right side walls of the tilting device 310 can be removed while the device is in the standing state (orientation).

That is, the length of the third through-hole 8326c in the longitudinal direction needs to be set to a size that allows coin-shaped foreign matter to be discharged when viewed in the direction along the surface of the bottom plate portion 321. , the third through-hole 8326c has a length of about 30 mm and a width of about 2 mm when viewed along the surface of the bottom plate 321 .

When removing the coin-shaped foreign matter, the covering cover 370 is removed and the operation device 830 is opened.
0 in front view (see FIG. 92), the operator can open the through holes 8326a to 8326c.
can be accessed. In addition, the covering cover 370 is attached to the fastening portion 3 of the main body curved portion 371 .
70a (see FIG. 91) is fastened and fixed to the front frame 14 by screws inserted in the front-rear direction, and the drooping portion 372 is fastened and fixed to the bottom plate in which the concave portion 15a is formed by screws inserted in the vertical direction. Therefore, the covering cover 370 can be easily removed by removing the screws while the front frame 14 is open (see FIG. 89). Therefore, the working time can be shortened.

According to the configuration of this embodiment, it is possible to easily remove coin-shaped foreign objects that have entered the gaps V13 and V14 of the operation device 8300 without disassembling the operation device 8300 .

The harness HN3 connected to the operation device 8300 is connected to a connector portion 8353 that opens outward to the right at the lower right corner of the body cover 351 (see FIG. 203(b)).
. Including each embodiment described above, only the harness HN3 is connected to the operation device 8300 for transmitting and receiving signals to and from the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4).

Therefore, even if a coin-shaped foreign object cannot be taken out, the operation can be easily performed by removing the screw that fastens the front frame 14 and the operation device 8300 and then removing the harness HN3 from the connector portion 8353. Device 8300 can be removed from front frame 14 . Therefore, if a replacement for a normal operation device 8300 is prepared, the operation device 8300 in which a coin-shaped foreign object is caught can be quickly replaced with a normal operation device 8300 .

As a result, even if a coin-shaped foreign object enters the operation device 8300 and the operation of the pachinko machine 10 is stopped due to malfunction, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 can be quickly restarted.

Next, referring to FIG. 204, a fourteenth embodiment will be described. In the eighth embodiment,
A case has been described where the board support device 600 does not receive the load from the front frame 14 when it is in a fixed state, but the board support device 600 in the fourteenth embodiment is arranged so as to be able to abut against the front frame 14 in the fixed state. The load from the front frame 14 is received via the front-rear displacement member 2652 . In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

204(a) and 204(b) are partial cross-sectional views of the inner frame 12 in the fourteenth embodiment taken along line CXXXVI-CXXXVI in FIG. Note that FIG. 204 (
204(b) shows a state in which the front frame 14 is opened with respect to the inner frame 12 (illustration of the front frame 14 is omitted), and FIG. The states are illustrated. The shape of the inner frame 12 is shown in FIG. 204(a), and the shapes of the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 in FIG. 204(b) are simplified and illustrated by imaginary lines.

As shown in FIGS. 204(a) and 204(b), the inner frame 12 in this embodiment includes a load transmission device 2650 as a difference from the eighth embodiment. The load transmission device 2650 includes a vertical displacement member 2651 arranged so that the front side of the plate portion (the plate portion arranged on the rear side) of the main body plate portion 611 that is fastened and fixed to the inner frame 12 can be vertically displaced; The vertical displacement member 2651
A front-rear displacement member 2652 disposed so as to be able to abut on the lower end of the front-rear displacement member 2652 supported so as to be displaceable in the front-rear direction;
52 from above and below so as to be displaceable at two front and rear positions, and is fixed to the plate portion 611a. a biasing member 2655 such as a coil spring that applies a biasing force toward
Prepare.

The vertical displacement member 2651 can be switched between a state in which it abuts against the torsion spring NBb in the fixed state of the board support device 600 and a state in which it separates. That is, at the lower position shown in FIG. 204(a), it retreats from the torsion spring NBb, and at the upper position (position displaced upward from the lower position) shown in FIG. Deform the torsion spring NBb. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 204(a), the upper end of the vertical displacement member 2651 is positioned at a position with a slight gap from the torsion spring NBb at the lower position. is set.

The front-rear displacement member 2652 is placed at a front position (see FIG. 204(a)) where it is pushed forward by the biasing force of the biasing member 2655, and at a position where it is pushed backward by the front frame 14. 204(b)).

Here, an inclined surface 2652a is formed at the rear end portion of the front-rear displacement member 2652 and is inclined downward toward the end side. The inclined surface 2652a extends from a position vertically below the vertical displacement member 2651 in a state where the front-back displacement member 2652 is arranged at the front position.
52 is a slanted surface that continuously extends to the vertically lower position of the vertical displacement member 2651 when 52 is placed at the rear position.

The inclined surface 2652a is positioned in front of the front-rear displacement member 2652 so that the vertical displacement member 2651
is positioned at the lower position, and the vertical displacement member 2651 is positioned at the upper position at the rear position of the front-rear displacement member 2652, and the inclination angle and formation range are set.

With the above-described configuration, in this embodiment, by closing the front frame 14, the vertical displacement member 2651 is arranged at the upper position, and the torsion spring NBb is deformed to the side where the load is increased by the thickness in the front-rear direction. be able to.

As a result, it is possible to increase the load that the post-rotation pawl member 640 applies to the game board 13 from the rear side, making it easier to maintain the state in which the game board 13 is in contact with the hanging back plate portion 621d of the pre-rotation pawl member 620. The distance D14 between the front surface of the game board 13 and the rear surface of the front frame 14 (the rear surface of the glass unit 16 fixed to the front frame 14) can be easily defined. Therefore,
The thickness of the game area can be easily defined, and the downflow of the ball can be stabilized.

Here, the specifications required for the board support device 600 in the eighth embodiment and the board support device 600 in this embodiment are the same, namely that the game board 13 is fixed. At the time of fixing, the board surface support device 600 pushes the game board 13 toward the front side by the biasing force of the torsion spring NBb, and presses it against the hanging back plate portion 621d to fix it.

According to the configuration of this embodiment, the torsion spring NBb is further compressed by closing the front frame 14, so a spring having a lower elastic modulus than the spring used in the eighth embodiment is adopted as the torsion spring NBb. can do.

Therefore, when the game board 13 is fixed to the board support device 600, the load (reaction force) applied to the operator from the torsion spring NBb can be reduced, and the load required when fixing the game board 13 to the board support device 600 can be reduced. Since the force can be reduced, the operator's freedom of choice, and
Workability can be improved.

Next, referring to FIG. 205, a fifteenth embodiment will be described. In the eighth embodiment,
Harnesses HN1 to HN3 are laid over the reverse cup portion 178 to prevent the intrusion into the inside of the reverse cup portion 178 by melting it with a heated piano wire.
Although a case has been described in which the tampering detection device 2280 in the fifteenth embodiment detects that the reverse cup portion 178 is burnt by the heated piano wire and attempts to detect fraud at an early stage, the fraud detection device 2280 in the fifteenth embodiment is used when the reverse cup portion 178 is melted by the heated piano wire. In addition, the heat is detected and the harnesses HN1 to HN3 are configured to prevent burnout.

FIG. 205(a) is a partial rear view of the front frame 14 in the fifteenth embodiment, and FIG.
205(c) are rear views of the fraud detection device 2280. FIG. Note that FIG.
In b) the shape memory spring 2288 is shown maintained in a reduced shape, FIG.
5(c) shows a state in which the stretched shape (the memorized shape) is restored by the application of heat. 205(b) and 205(c), the fraud detection device 2280
It is cross-sectionally viewed at an intermediate position before and after 281 .

The fraud detection device 2280 is configured in a box-like shape with an opening on the back side and the bottom side.
178, and a rear cover member 2282 attached from the rear side so as to cover the opening on the rear side of the main body box part 2281.
A space is formed between 1 and the back cover member 2282 .

The body box portion 2281 is made of a metal material and extends from the lower right corner to form the reverse cup portion 217 .
8, a constricted portion 2284 extending from the inner wall so as to narrow the opening upward from the lower corner, and the vicinity of the edge of the upper end opening of the constricted portion 2284. It is housed in a projecting portion 2285 projecting upward from the body box portion 2281 and a recess recessed from the back side in the left side wall portion of the body box portion 2281, one end protruding outside the body box portion 2281, and the other end being the body box A first conductive portion 2286 extending in the left-right direction inside the portion 2281 and a main body box portion 228
1, one end protruding outside the main body box portion 2281, the other end extending in the left-right direction inside the main body box portion 2281, and the first conduction a second conductive portion 2287 formed with a length that can contact the upper surface of the portion 2286;
and a shape memory spring 2288 that rides on the upper surface of the constricted portion 2284 , is supported by the projecting portion 2285 , and is arranged below the second conducting portion 2287 .

The fraud detection device 2280 is a device for outputting an error signal when heat is detected. The first conductive portion 2286 and the second conductive portion 2287 are each connected at one end of separate wiring to the portion protruding outside the main body box portion 2281 by a method such as soldering, and the other end of the wiring is connected to the main control device. 110 (see FIG. 4). Then, the contact between the first conducting portion 2286 and the second conducting portion 2287 is released (see FIG. 205 ( c) see) cuts the continuity,
It is controlled to output an error signal with the fact that the continuity is cut off as an input.

When the error signal is output from the main control device, a loud alarm is output from the speaker 451 (see FIG. 120), or the ball dispensing device 133 (see FIG. 87) stops the dispensing of balls, etc., and continues. It is controlled so that it is impossible to play a game by

Details of the fraud detection device 2280 will be described. As shown in FIGS. 205( a ) to 205 ( c ), the body box portion 2281 of the fraud detection device 2280 covers the left side and the upper side of the inverted cup portion 2178 . Here, in the inverted cup portion 2178 in this embodiment, the formation location of the wall portion 2178a is displaced to the left as compared with the eighth embodiment, and the extended portion 2283 is provided between the long cover member 173 and the elongated cover member 173. There is a gap that can be accommodated.

The extended portion 2283 fills the gap between the wall portion 2178a and the long cover member 173, so that even if the wall portion 2178a is melted by the tip of the heated piano wire, the piano wire still covers the long cover member 173. can be prevented from penetrating.

According to this configuration, the piano wire that enters the inverted cup portion 2178 from below, melts the upper wall portion, and advances further is guided by the constricted portion 2284 and reaches the shape memory spring 2288 that is arranged at the upper opening of the constricted portion 2284. be guided.

The shape memory spring 2288 is made of a shape memory alloy such as a nickel-titanium alloy, and has the property of maintaining its deformed shape in a low temperature state and returning to its pre-memorized shape when heated to a predetermined transformation temperature or higher. . Note that in this embodiment, the shape memory spring 2288
, the transformation temperature is set to about the melting point of the inverted cup portion 2178 (approximately 80°), and the tensile shape (see FIG. 205(c)) is stored in advance.

Therefore, when the shape memory spring 2288 is heated to the transformation temperature or higher by the heated piano wire, the shape memory spring 2288 returns to the tensile shape, so that the second conductive portion 2287 is pushed up, and the first conductive portion 2286 and the second conductive portion 2287 is disconnected and an error signal is output. Therefore, early detection of fraud can be achieved.

An extension portion 2288a extending from the upper end of the shape memory spring 2288 to the front side is inserted into a guide elongated hole 2282a that is vertically elongated and is drilled in the front and back direction in the back cover member 2282, and extends to the front side. overhang. When the shape memory spring 2288 returns to the low temperature state after being in the tension state, the operator pushes down the extension part 2288a to deform the shape memory spring 2288 and contract the shape memory spring 2288 (see FIG. 205(b)). ) can be changed back again. That is, even after the fraudulent act is discovered, it can be repeatedly used for early detection of the fraudulent activity.

Next, referring to FIG. 206, a sixteenth embodiment will be described. In the eighth embodiment,
A case has been described in which even if the shape of the concave portion provided in the light guide member 540 is uniform, the light guide member 540 is formed to be curved to cause a difference in the traveling direction of the light emitted from both surfaces. The right panel unit 2500 in the 16th embodiment has recesses with different shapes in different regions. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 206(a) is a partial rear view of the right panel unit 2500 in the sixteenth embodiment, and FIG. 206(b) is an upward concave portion provided in the light guide member 2540 in the region CCVIb of FIG. 206(a). FIG. 206(c) is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member 2540 schematically showing the portion 2543b, and FIG. 206(c) schematically shows the downward recessed portion 2543c recessed in the light guide member 2540 in the region CCVIc of FIG. 206(a). FIG. 206(d) is a partially enlarged perspective view of a light guide member 2540 schematically shown in FIG. 206(a), and FIG. 206(e) is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member 2540, and FIG. 206(e) schematically shows an upward concave portion 2543e provided in the light guide member 2540 in the area CCVIe of FIG. 206(a). It is a partially enlarged perspective view. Note that the illustration of the support plate portion 510 is omitted in FIG. 206(a).

As shown in FIG. 206(a), the light guide member 2540 is formed in a plate shape extending straight in the vertical direction. In this embodiment, the LEDs 512a (see FIG. 107) arranged on the substrate member 512 are arranged vertically in a straight line according to the shape of the light guide member 2540. FIG.

On both surfaces of the light guide member 2540, concave portions are formed in the arrangement described above in the eighth embodiment.
3 shape can be changed.

That is, with the bottom of the curve of the inner lens member 530 as a reference, the area CCVIb is arranged above and on the side of the inner lens member 530, and the area CCVI is arranged above and on the side of the outer lens member 550.
The shape of the recessed portion 2543 is changed by the region CCVid arranged below and on the inner lens member 530 side, and the region CCVIe arranged below and on the outer lens member 550 side.

As shown in FIG. 206(b), in the area CCVIb, an upward concave portion 2543b is formed by hot-pressing a convex portion having a shape obtained by dividing a sphere into 1/8 equal parts. The upward concave portion 2543b has a flat surface on the lower side and the front side (the side opposite to the side on which the LED 512a (see FIG. 107) is arranged), and a curved surface on the upper side and the rear side. is formed.

Here, the lower plane is parallel to the optical axis direction of the LED 512a (see FIG. 107), and the front plane is perpendicular to the optical axis of the LED 512a.
At this position, the incident light is hardly reflected in the left-right direction. Therefore, the upward concave portion 2
543b refracts light exclusively at the curved portion and emits the light toward the outer lens member 550, and the emitted light is likely to be refracted upward due to the influence of its curved shape. Therefore, the light refracted in the region CCVIb and emitted to the outer lens member 550 is emitted in an upwardly inclined direction, as shown in FIG. 206(a).

As shown in FIG. 206(c), in the area CCVIc, a downward concave portion 2543c is formed by hot-pressing a convex portion having a shape obtained by dividing a sphere into ⅛ equal parts. The downward concave portion 2543c is heat-pressed in a posture in which a flat surface is arranged on the upper side and the front side (the side opposite to the side where the LED 512a (see FIG. 107) is arranged), and a curved surface is arranged on the lower side and the rear side. is formed.

Here, the upper plane is parallel to the optical axis direction of the LED 512a (see FIG. 107), and the front plane is perpendicular to the optical axis of the LED 512a.
At this position, the incident light is hardly reflected in the left-right direction. Therefore, the downward concave portion 2
543c refracts light exclusively at the curved portion and emits the light toward the inner lens member 530, and the emitted light is likely to be refracted downward due to the influence of the curved shape. Therefore, the light refracted in the region CCVIc and emitted to the inner lens member 530 is emitted in a downwardly inclined direction, as shown in FIG. 206(a).

As shown in FIG. 206(d), a downward concave portion 2543d is formed in the area CCVId by hot-pressing a convex portion having a shape obtained by dividing a sphere into 1/8 equal parts. The downward concave portion 2543d has flat surfaces on the upper side and the front side (the side opposite to the side on which the LED 512a (see FIG. 107) is arranged), and curved surfaces on the lower side and the rear side. is formed.

Here, the upper plane is parallel to the optical axis direction of the LED 512a (see FIG. 107), and the front plane is perpendicular to the optical axis of the LED 512a.
At this position, the incident light is hardly reflected in the left-right direction. Therefore, the downward concave portion 2
543d refracts light exclusively at the curved portion and emits the light toward the outer lens member 550, and the emitted light is likely to be refracted downward due to the influence of its curved shape. Therefore, the light refracted in the region CCVId and emitted to the outer lens member 550 is emitted in a downwardly inclined direction as shown in FIG. 206(a).

As shown in FIG. 206(e), in the region CCVIe, an upward concave portion 2543e is formed by hot-pressing a convex portion having a shape obtained by dividing a sphere into ⅛ equal parts. The upward concave portion 2543e has a flat surface on the upper side and the front side (the side opposite to the side where the LED 512a (see FIG. 107) is arranged), and a curved surface on the lower side and the rear side. is formed.

Here, the upper plane is parallel to the optical axis direction of the LED 512a (see FIG. 107), and the front plane is perpendicular to the optical axis of the LED 512a.
At this position, the incident light is hardly reflected in the left-right direction. Therefore, the upward concave portion 2
543e refracts light only at the curved portion and emits the light to the inner lens member 530 side, and the emitted light is likely to be refracted upward due to the influence of its curved shape. Therefore, the light refracted in the region CCVIe and emitted to the inner lens member 530 is emitted in an upwardly inclined direction, as shown in FIG. 206(a).

The concave portions formed on both surfaces of the light guide member 2540 in the region facing the bottom of the curve of the inner lens member 530 have the same shape as in the eighth embodiment (an inclination angle of 45° with respect to the bottom surface and a bottom circle diameter of approximately 1 mm cone). Therefore, the inner lens member 5 is removed from this portion.
The light emitted to 30 or the outer lens member 550 is slightly refracted vertically and travels in a substantially horizontal direction.

According to the present embodiment, with the configuration described above, as shown in FIG. 206(a), the light is allowed to travel toward the inner lens member 530 in the direction in which the light is collected, and toward the outer lens member 550 in the direction in which the light spreads. can be made That is, while the light guide member 2540 is formed in the shape of a flat plate, it is possible to give a difference in the traveling direction of the light emitted from both surfaces thereof.
While suppressing the left and right width of 0, the production effect of the light emission production can be improved.

Next, the seventeenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 207 to 281. FIG. In the first embodiment described above, the bottom surface of the lower tray unit 15 is formed flat, but in the pachinko machine 10010 according to the seventeenth embodiment, the bottom surface of the lower tray unit 6400 is formed with a convex portion. As a result, the transportability of the front frame 10014 including the lower tray unit 6400 is improved. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 207 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10010 in the seventeenth embodiment, and FIG.
is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 10010. FIG. In the following description, with respect to the pachinko machine 10010 in the state shown in FIG. 207, the front side of the paper surface is the front (front) side, and the back side of the paper surface is the rear (rear) side. Also, with respect to the pachinko machine 10010 in the state shown in FIG. ) side. Furthermore, arrows UD, LR,
FB indicates the up-down direction, left-right direction, and front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 10010, respectively.

As shown in FIGS. 207 and 208, the pachinko machine 10010 has an operation device 1030, which is shown in FIG.
0, a lower plate unit 6400 that is arranged below the operation device 10300 and covers the lower side of the front frame 10014, a horizontal effect device 6700 that covers the left and right portions of the front frame 10014 and mainly performs light emission effects, and a front. It mainly includes a performance effect device 6500 that covers the upper part of the frame 10014 and mainly executes light effect and sound effect.

The glass unit 16 described above is arranged in the area surrounded by the horizontal effect device 6700 and the upper effect device 6500, and the game area in which the game balls flow down is formed on the back side of the glass unit 16. It is similar to the embodiment. In order to avoid complicating the drawings, FIG. 207 omits the illustration of the rear side of the glass unit 16, and FIG. 208 shows the glass unit 16 and the game board 13 (see FIG. 2). The inside of the outer frame 11 (see FIG. 3) can be visually recognized from the opening in which the glass unit 16 is arranged.

209 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 10010. FIG. FIG. 209 illustrates a direction view along the longitudinal direction of the lever member (for example, lever member 10340 (see FIG. 80)) of the operation device 10300 (radial direction view of the rotation shaft of the lever member of the operation device 10300). be.

The operation device 10300 includes a left front cover 10321 and a right front cover 10322 which are formed in the shape of a thin plate and are flexible enough to bend and deform. As shown in FIG. 209, the housing recess 17a is formed as a substantially left-right symmetrical recess in which the depth of the recess toward the rear side increases as the center of the housing 17a is approached. 10300 are arranged so as to coincide with the left and right centers.

Rear-side ends of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are fitted and supported in the housing recess 17a. Therefore, the fitting position moves toward the rear side as it approaches the left-right center. In other words, the fitting position moves toward the body frame (metal body portion 10014a) of the front frame 10014 as it approaches the left-right center.

Therefore, at the left-right center position where the amount of load transmitted during operation of the operation device 10300 tends to increase, shortening the front-rear position from the metal main body 10014a to the fitting position
By suppressing the vertical displacement of the fitting position, it is possible to suppress the operation device 10300 from being displaced in the vertical direction (load direction).

On the other hand, the left and right positions (
At positions away from the center to the left and right), even if the front-rear position from the metal main body 10014a to the fitting position is lengthened, the effect of suppressing vertical displacement of the operation device 10300 is not hindered.
In addition, by arranging the fitting positions in this way, it is possible to form a space between the fitting positions and the metal body portion 10014a, so that a wide arrangement area for the upper plate 17, the frame button 22, and the like can be secured. can do.

210 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 10010. FIG. Note that in FIG. 210, the outer frame 1
1, a state in which the front frame 10014 is opened toward the near side centering on the left end portion pivotally supported by the hinge 19 is illustrated.

The front frame 10014 has a rod-shaped portion pivotally supported by the hinge 19 , and the rod-shaped portion is configured to be attachable to and detachable from the hinge 19 . By removing the rod-shaped portion from the hinge 19, the front frame 1
0014 can be separated from the inner frame 12 . Since the components to be newly described are arranged in the front frame 10014, the following description will focus on the front frame 10014. FIG.

FIG. 211 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame 10014, and FIG.
4 is an exploded front perspective view of FIG. 211 and 212 illustrate a state in which the lower tray unit 6400 and the operation device 10300 are removed from the front frame 10014. FIG.

The front frame 10014 is a frame-shaped metal member that forms a skeleton, and includes a metal body portion 10014a integrally formed with the front door mounting bracket 58. is fastened to the That is, the lower tray unit 6400
Both the operation device 10300 and the operation device 10300 are configured with a fastening portion (female screw forming portion) that opens toward the metal main body portion 10014a side (back side), and the metal main body portion 10014a is penetrated at a position corresponding to the fastening portion. A hole is drilled. A fastening member (male screw) is inserted through the through-hole from the back side of the metal main body 10014a, and the lower tray unit 6400 is screwed into the fastening portion and tightened.
Alternatively, the operation device 10300 is fastened and fixed to the front frame 10014 .

As shown in FIGS. 211 and 212, the operation device 10300 is held between the upper tray 17 and the lower tray unit 6400. As shown in FIGS. That is, the upper plate 17 is the operating device 10
300 holds the operation device 10300 from the upper rear, and the lower tray unit 6400 holds the operation device 10300 from the lower front of the operation device 10300 . The configuration in which the operation device 10300 is held by the front frame 10014 will be described in order below.

213 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 10014, and FIG.
4 is an exploded front view of FIG. 213 and 214, illustration of the upper half of the front frame 10014 and the lower tray unit 6400 is omitted. Further, in FIG. 213, the operation device 10
300 is disassembled from the metal main body 10014a and is shown in the direction viewed from the back side, and for easy understanding, the assembly direction lines connecting the insertion holes 6801R and 6801L and their fastening points are shown. is illustrated by imaginary lines.

When the operation device 10300 is assembled into the front frame 10014 by fitting it from the front side, the bottom surface of the bottom member De arranged below the inner case member 10330
It abuts so as to ride on the upper surface of a plate-like protrusion T10 that protrudes in a plate-like shape from the front side of the .

A bottom member De that is fastened and fixed to the bottom surface of the inner case member 10330 from below is arranged on the lower side of the operation device 10300 . The bottom member De mainly includes a fitting recess De1 (see FIG. 212) that is open to the front side, and a recess De2 that is open on the side (lower side) opposite to the inner case member 10330 side and the back side. Prepare.

The concave portion De2 is formed in a U-shape when viewed from the rear with an open bottom, and the plate-like convex portion T
The operation device 10300 can be aligned with the front frame 10014 by fitting the plate-like projection T10 and the recess De2. Further, since the plate-like protrusion T10 is formed in a thick plate shape, the vertical position of the operation device 10300 can be maintained by the rigidity of the plate-like protrusion T10. In addition, the mating here is
It is sufficient that the bottom member De can be positioned with respect to the plate-shaped convex portion T10 regardless of the presence or absence of the gap.

At the tip of the plate-shaped protrusion T10, a pair of left and right cylindrical protrusions projecting toward the front side in a thin columnar shape and a fastening screw can be screwed at an intermediate position between the pair of cylindrical protrusions. A female screw hole is formed.

The pair of columnar projecting portions are inserted into recesses formed in the corresponding wall portions (front side wall portions) of the recessed portion De2 for the purpose of aligning the plate-shaped projecting portion T10 and the bottom member De. A fastening screw that is screwed into the female screw hole is inserted into an insertion hole that is drilled at a corresponding position in the concave portion De2. The bottom member De is fastened and fixed.

As described above, the concave portion De2 formed in the rear half portion of the bottom member De rides on the plate-like convex portion T10, while the opposite front half portion (see FIG. 215(a)) serves as a plate-like support. It is arranged above the planar plate-like portion 6426a of the portion 6426. As shown in FIG. That is, the front half of the bottom member De is made of the resin member 6427
is disposed opposite to the plane plate-like portion 6426a in the up-down direction with the .theta.

It should be noted that the term "contactable" here is not limited to any situation. For example, the operation device 10300 may normally be in contact with the resin member 6427 due to its own weight. A mode in which the resin member 6427 and the bottom member De come into contact when the operation device 10300 is displaced downward due to the execution of a vibration presentation may also be adopted.

After the operation device 10300 is fitted into the front frame 10014, the operation device 10300 is attached to the front frame 1 by tightening the fastening screws that are inserted through the front frame 10014 from the rear side.
Fixed to 0014.

That is, the inner case member 10330 of the operation device 10300 includes a plurality of (three in this embodiment) fastening portions 10333 formed so that fastening screws can be screwed therein, and the fastening portions 10333
The metal plate portion 10334 is a metal plate covering one of the above, and is mainly provided with a metal plate portion 10334 which is provided with an insertion hole through which a fastening screw can be inserted and can receive a compressive force due to fastening and fixing.

The fastening portion 10333 is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the edge portion of an insertion hole H10a that is drilled in the metal main body portion 10014a with a diameter that allows the fastening screw to pass therethrough. An intermediate plate made of hard resin is disposed on the front side of the metal body portion 10014a, and a through hole is formed in the intermediate plate around the insertion hole H10a, so that the fastening portion 10333 can be connected through the through hole. It can be brought into contact with the metal body portion 10014a.

Here, the insertion hole H10a corresponding to the fastening portion 10333 in which the metal plate portion 10334 is arranged
, the through-hole of the intermediate plate is made larger than the other through-holes H10a. The shape of this through-hole is designed to have a size that does not interfere with the metal plate portion 10334 that is provided on the rear side of the fastening portion 10333 .

As a result, as the operation device 10300 is fastened and fixed to the front frame 10014,
The metal plate portion 10334 can be brought into close contact with the metal body portion 10014a. That is, since the metal plate portion 10334 and the metal body portion 10014a can be electrically connected, it can be given the same role as a so-called ground wire. As a result, the safety of the player who operates the operation device 10300 can be ensured.

By arranging the metal plate portion 10334 therebetween, the metal plate portion 10334 can have the function of a washer. As a result, the operation device 10300 is connected to the metal body portion 1001
It can be firmly fixed to 4a.

In addition, the shape of the metal plate portion 10334 is not limited to the present embodiment, and various aspects are exemplified. For example, instead of forming a through-hole, a pair of claws straddling the screw-in hole of the fastening portion 10333 may be provided. In addition, when the claws are formed to be shifted forward and backward, it is possible to have the function of a spring washer and to increase the fastening strength.

The places where the operation device 10300 is fastened to the front frame 10014 are the insertion holes 6801R,
Except for 6801L, they are concentrated on the back side. By concentrating the portions required for fastening on the back side, the degree of design freedom on the front side can be improved, and the design can be improved.

On the other hand, simply fastening and fixing the operation device 10300 on the back side is a problem because the operation device 10300 tends to be displaced downward when a load is applied to the front side of the operation device 10300 in a sinking direction (downward direction). Therefore, in the present embodiment, a structure is adopted in which the front side of the operation device 10300 is restrained from sinking displacement while concentrating the fastening points on the rear side. This will be explained in order below.

First, the action of the fitting recess De1 will be described. In the operation device 10300, the fitting recess De1 formed on the lower front side fits with the fitting portion 6426d (see FIGS. 211 and 212). As a result, the vertical movement of the front side portion of the operation device 10300 is restricted by the fitting portion 6426d, and sinking displacement is suppressed.

Next, the action of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 will be described. As shown in FIGS. 213 and 214, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are
The back side edge of the upper half of the swing operation member 10310 arranged on the back side is provided with a plate-like overhanging portion.

That is, the left front cover 10321 has a plate-like protruding portion 10321c protruding in a plate shape along the rear side edge of the upper half, and a plurality of partial protruding portions 103 further protruding from the plate-like protruding portion 10321c.
21d and .

Similarly, the right front cover 10322 has a plate-like protruding portion 10322c that protrudes in a plate shape along the rear side edge of the upper half portion. It should be noted that the right front cover 10322 has a partial projecting portion 1032
The portion corresponding to 1d is not formed, and the periphery of the plate-like projecting portion 10322c can be arbitrarily designed.

The plate-like overhanging portions 10321c, 10322c and the partial overhanging portion 10321d are
It is configured as a part that is inserted into and fitted to a. Here, the housing recess 17 of this embodiment
The configuration of a will be described.

As shown in FIGS. 213 and 214, the accommodation recess 17a has a lower edge projecting portion 10017b projecting to the front side with substantially the same projecting width across the left and right of the accommodation recess 17a, and a left and right extension of the accommodation recess 17a. On both sides of the lower edge projecting portion 10017b, the lower edge projecting portion 100 is located at a position slightly longer than the plate thickness of the plate-shaped projecting portions 10321c and 10322c in a manner projecting toward the front side.
17b and a plurality of opposed protruding portions 1 forming a groove between the lower edge protruding portion 10017b and the lower edge protruding portion 10017b
0017c, a plurality of positioning holes 10017d drilled in the front-rear direction as elongated holes whose upper side is aligned with the lower edge protruding portion 10017b, and the right facing protruding portion 10017c. and an escape hole 10017e provided.

When assembling the operation device 10300 into the housing recess 17a, the plate-like projecting portion 10321
c, 10322c are inserted into the grooves between the lower edge protruding portion 10017b and the opposing protruding portion 10017c, and the plurality of partial protruding portions 10321d are inserted into the plurality of positioning holes 10017d, respectively, so that the left front cover 10321 and A right front cover 10322 is fitted and supported in the housing recess 17a.

In this case, the plate-like projecting portions 10321c and 10322c are connected to the lower edge projecting portion 10017b.
and the opposing projecting portion 10017c, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are restrained from being displaced in the vertical direction.

In addition, by inserting (fitting) the plurality of partial projecting portions 10321d into the plurality of positioning holes 10017d, it is possible to easily align the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 with respect to the accommodation recess 17a. As a result, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be prevented from being displaced in the vertical and horizontal directions.

Furthermore, since the accommodation recess 17a is formed in an arch shape that opens on the front side, and the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are accommodated in contact with each other on the inner side of the arch.
Displacement of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 in the left-right direction and the rear side direction can be suppressed.

With this configuration, the swing operation member 10310 of the operation device 10300 is positioned upward, and displacement of the operation device 10300 is suppressed when the player applies a backward load to the swing operation member 10310. (Early return to original position).

Here, when the player operates the swing operation member 10310, it is mainly operated with the left hand. When operating the arranged operation device 10300, the left hand is stretched obliquely to the right front, so it is rare that the load during the operation does not have a left-right component.

Therefore, since a load in the left-right direction is applied to the swing operation member 10310 at the same time as the load in the rearward direction is applied, the operation device 10300 may be displaced in the rearward and lateral directions.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the operation device 10300 is surrounded by the arch-shaped portion of the housing recess 17a, and the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are arranged therebetween. The restoring force of the deformation of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 that can be generated is determined by the operation device 10300 in the left-right direction and the front-rear direction.
to return to its original position. As a result, even if the operation device 10300 is displaced, the position can be quickly restored.

From the above configurations, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 103 for the accommodation recess 17a
22 displacement can be suppressed. That is, the operation device 10 for the accommodation recess 17a
Suppression of the displacement of 300 can be aimed at.

The escape hole 10017e functions as a through-hole through which the fixing assembly 6802 of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322, which will be described later, is inserted. By forming the escape hole 10017e, the fixing assembly 6802 can be disposed at a position that protrudes outward from the plate-like projecting portion 10321c.

Next, the surroundings of the operation device 10300 will be described. First, the operation device 1030
An outline of the internal structure of 0 will be described. Figure 215(a), Figure 215(b), Figure 216(a)
) and FIG. 216(b) show the operation device 1 on the CCXVa-CCXVa line in FIG.
0300 is a partial cross-sectional view.

FIG. 215(a) shows a state in which the swing operation member 10310 is arranged in the upward position (initial position in this embodiment), and FIG. 215(b), FIG.
In b), the swing operation member 10310 is in the downward position (the depressed position in this embodiment).
, is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 215(a) and 215(b), the operation device 10300 includes a lever support shaft to which a lever member 10340 that pivotally supports a swing operation member 10310 with a pivot rod 10363 is fixed to an inner case member 10330. It is journalled at 10331d1. Therefore, the swinging operation member 10310 that can be operated by the player is displaced along with the movement of the shaft support rod 10363 arranged on an arc locus centered on the lever support shaft 10331d1, and Displacement is possible in combination with displacement in the rotational direction, and the displacement is caused by the operation of the player.

That is, by gripping the swinging operation member 10310 arranged in the upward position and applying a load toward the rear, the swinging operation member 10310 can be pushed in in a manner of rotational displacement about the pivot rod 10363. (push operation).

Also, by gripping the swinging operation member 10310 arranged in the upward position and applying a load toward the front side downward, the swinging operation member 10310 is pushed down in a manner of rotational displacement about the lever support shaft 10331d1. (press down operation).

In addition, when the swing operation member 10310 is arranged in the downward position, the posture correction device 1
The action of 0312 (the action of applying a load to the swing operation member 10310 in the direction away from the wall member 10322b) causes the swing operation member 10310 to assume a posture pushed backward with respect to the lever member 10340 (backward roll posture, 17y with respect to the lever member 10340 from the initial position). Therefore, since the angle of change in posture of the swing operation member 10310 is smaller than the rotation angle of the lever support shaft 10331d1, it is possible to suppress the change in the vibration direction of the vibration device 10366 due to the rotational displacement of the lever member 10340. .

Also, when the swing operation member 10310 is arranged at the downward position, the swing operation member 10
When the lens member 10317 displaceably supported by 310 is pushed (push operation), the swinging operation member 10310 is rotationally displaced around the pivot rod 10363 by the load during the operation, and falls forward. by displacing the vibrating device 10366 in the direction Y17c
(see FIG. 216(b)).

In this way, in this embodiment, the swing operation member 10310 is configured to be able to receive loads for operation from a plurality of directions.
can also be configured differently.

The lever member 10340 is rotationally driven around a lever support shaft 10331d1 by a drive motor. As a result, even if the swing operation member 10310 is pushed down and placed in the downward position, the drive motor controls the rotation of the lever member 10340 so that the swing operation member 10310 can be returned to the upward position.

A vibrating device 10366 composed of a voice coil motor that generates linear vibration is provided at the tip of the lever member 10340, and the vibration of the vibrating device 10366 is applied to the lens member 10317 by direct or indirect contact. configured to be transmitted.

The vibrating device 10366 is a device that causes a pair of members to move toward and away from each other in a linear direction by means of electromagnetic force.
A member arranged on the lever member 10340 side), a cylinder having an outer diameter smaller than the inner peripheral surface of the bobbin member and a cylinder having an inner diameter larger than the outer peripheral surface of the bobbin member are coaxially arranged. A pressing member connected by a disk-shaped plate (a member arranged on the lens member 10317 side)
and are mainly provided. The pressing member is made of a magnetic material whose polarity changes in the axial direction of the inner cylinder.

Vibration device 10366 is configured to generate linear vibration along direction Y17a along a straight line passing through the center of pivot rod 10363 . In addition, in this embodiment, the direction Y17a is configured to match the direction of displacement of the lens member 10317 .

As a result, the energy of the vibration of the vibrating device 10366 can be utilized to the maximum extent to vibrate (displace) the lens member 10317, and the effect of the vibration of the vibrating device 10366 can be improved.

Next, details of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 will be described in order. 217 is a front perspective view of the operation device 10300, and FIG. 218 is a rear perspective view of the operation device 10300. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 217, a left front cover 10321 and a right front cover 10322 are arranged behind the swing operation member 10310 of the operation device 10300 . left front cover 1032
1 and the right front cover 10322 have outer ends (ends opposite to the swing operation member 10310).
is curved, the center of the radius of curvature of the curved surface is arranged on the swing operation member 10310 side. As a result, a large space can be secured around the swing operation member 10310, so that the movable range of the swing operation member 10310 can be secured, and the swing operation member 10310 can be grasped by the player. Make sure you have enough space to put your finger in.

In addition, since the curve of the end portion is configured in a series so as to surround the swing operation member 10310,
Designability can be improved, and deformation of the curved portion can be divided and caused as a whole, so that the allowable range of deformation of the curved portion can be widened.

As shown in FIGS. 217 and 218, left front cover 10321 and right front cover 10322
are through holes 6801R and 6801L drilled in the front-rear direction so that fastening screws fastened to the left and right ends of the housing recess 17a can be inserted, and the fastening screws separate the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 from the inner case member 10330. Securing assembly 680 for permanent fixation
2 and a.

The left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 have insertion holes 6 arranged at both left and right ends.
801R and 6801L are fastened and fixed to the accommodation recess 17a. Both the left and right ends are farthest from the load applied to the operation device 10300 (mainly the load in the direction along the plane perpendicular to the left-right direction passing through the center in the left-right direction), and the load is less likely to be transmitted. 6801R
, 6801L and fastened and fixed to the housing recess 17a from being loosened.

The fixing assembly 6802 is formed at the interface between the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322. As shown in FIG.
321 and the center of the right front cover 10322 in the left-right direction (plate-like projecting portions 10321c, 10322
c is located on the rearmost side) to the right. That is, the left front cover 10
321 and the right front cover 10322 are not formed in a shape to be disassembled at the left-right center, the left front cover 10321 is formed beyond the left-right center to the right side, and the formation of the right front cover 10322 remains on the right side of the left-right center. In other words, the left front cover 10321 is formed in a wider range than the right front cover 10322 .

In the present embodiment, the boundary between the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 on the rear side is displaced from the center in the left-right direction, so that one member (main body) is placed in the central portion (the portion located on the rearmost side) of the accommodation recess 17a. In the embodiment, the alignment with the housing recess 17a can be completed by inserting the left front cover 10321), which makes assembly easier than when alignment is performed using both members.

Further, by shifting the position of the fixing assembly 6802 from the center in the left-right direction, it is possible to reduce the load transmitted when the operation device 10300 is operated. Here, a swinging operation member 10310, which is operated by the player, can be placed close to the rear side of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 (especially the upward position (Fig. 21).
8)), there is a risk that the fastening screw may loosen due to the transmission of the load when the operation device 10300 is operated. In contrast, in the present embodiment, the fixed assembly 6802 is displaced left and right from the left-right center where the load during operation is maximum, so that the transmitted load is reduced compared to the load during operation. As a result, loosening of the fastening screws in the fixed assembly 6802 can be suppressed.

In this way, the fixing assembly 6802 is shifted left and right from the left-right center, and the left front cover 1032 is
1 and the right front cover 10322, the assembly efficiency can be improved, and loosening of the fastening screws can be prevented.

Both the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are
2 is not directly fastened and fixed to the inner case member 10330 . That is, the fixed assembly 680
2 , the fastening screw inserted through the right front cover 10322 is fastened to the left front cover 10321 .

However, for the inner case member 10330, the fixing assembly 6802 is the inner case member 1
0330 (illustrated by imaginary lines in FIG. 220), and the fixing assembly 6802 sandwiches the upper plate from both sides (see FIG. 218). By configuring in this way, the front left cover 10321 and the front right cover 10321 and the front right cover 10321 and the front right cover 10321 can be mounted more easily than when the front left cover 10321 and the front right cover 10322 are respectively fastened to the inner case member 10330 .
0322 can be reduced.

Thereby, the bending of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be utilized. That is, when many fastening points are provided on the front left cover 10321 and the front right cover 10322, the rigidity of the fastening screws makes it difficult for the front left cover 10321 and the front right cover 10322 to bend, and there is a risk that they may be easily damaged.

On the other hand, in order to make it easier to flex while maintaining the fastening points, the plate thickness of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 should be reduced. There is a risk of

In contrast, by reducing the fastening locations as in the present embodiment, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be sufficiently bent without being affected by the rigidity of the fastening screws. Accordingly, the bending of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be utilized without excessively thinning the plate thickness of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 .

219 and 221 are exploded front perspective views of the operating device 10300 and FIG.
222 is an exploded rear perspective view of the operating device 10300. FIG. Figures 219 and 22
0, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are connected to the left cover member 103.
23 and the right cover member 10324 can be disassembled into left and right.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 221 and 222, the left front cover 10321 is attached to the left cover member 10.
323, the right front cover 10322 is fastened and fixed to the right cover member 10324 at one point (adjustment long holes 10323a, 10324a) in the front-rear direction.

Therefore, before the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are fastened and fixed to each other, the left front cover 10321 is attached to the left cover member 10323 .
22 are movable relative to the right cover member 10324, so that the assembly positions of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be easily adjusted. This will be explained below.

The operation device 10300 is arranged on the front side of the inner case member 10330 in such a manner that the rear side thereof is formed along the curved surfaces of the cover members 10344 and 10345 (see FIG. 215) and the left and right edges of the cover members 10344 and 10345 are hidden. a left front cover 10321, a right front cover 10322, and a left cover member 10323, a right cover member 10324 fastened and fixed to the inner case member 10330 from the left and right directions.

The left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324 are respectively provided with long adjustment holes 10323a and 10324a which are drilled in the front-rear direction and elongated in the left-right direction at the outer upper end portions.

The long adjustment holes 10323a and 10324a are holes for fastening and fixing the front left cover 10321 and the front right cover 10322, respectively. Even if the shape varies, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 1032 with respect to the swing operation member 10310
2 can be easily adjusted in the horizontal direction.

The front left cover 10321 and the front right cover 10322 are provided with long adjustment holes 10323a and 1032.
It is fastened and fixed to 4a in the front-rear direction, and is fastened and fixed in the left-right direction at end surfaces facing each other in the left-right direction.

As shown in FIG. 219, the right front cover 10322 has a fitting recess 10322a recessed rightward from the end surface of the right front cover 10322 that abuts against the left front cover 10321, and is retained in the front-rear direction by the fitting recess 10322a. and a wall member 10322b mounted in a manner in which the right front cover 10322 and the left front cover 10321 are assembled (Fig. 217
), the leftward movement is stopped by the end surface of the left front cover 10321, so that the wall member 10322b is held inside the fitting recess 10322a.

With such a configuration, when replacing the wall member 10322b, the right front cover 10322
The wall member 10322b can be replaced only by removing the
This is where the load from the posture correction device 10312 (see FIG. 215) is repeatedly received). Therefore, maintenance efficiency can be improved.

First, the procedure of assembly work will be described.
22 are assembled to the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324 (see FIG. 2).
21 and 222 to FIGS. 219 and 220), after being fastened and fixed, the left front cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324 are fastened to the inner case member 10330 to form the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover. 10322 are aligned,
After that, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are fastened and fixed.

Here, when the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 cannot move relative to the left cover member 10323 and the right front cover member 10324, when correcting the positional deviation of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322, the left cover member 10323 and the right front cover 10323 need not move. By loosening the fastening of the right cover member 10324 to the inner case member 10330, the left cover member 1032
3 and the right cover member 10324, it is necessary to make corrections.

In anticipation of this, the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324 are not fully tightened to the inner case member 10330, but rather weakly fastened and fixed.
0322, after fastening and fixing the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 (on the downstream side of the assembly procedure), the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 103
24 to the inner case member 10330 (on the upstream side of the assembly procedure).

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are movable relative to the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324. After fastening and fixing to the member 10330, the positions of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be adjusted. Therefore, assembly work can be simplified.

The left front cover 10321 and the right front cover member 10322 are provided with shielding plate portions 6803L and 6803R, respectively, whose front edge portions are arranged to face the guide portion 10344a of the upper cover member 10344. As shown in FIG. The shielding plate portions 6803L and 6803R have the role of closing the gap between the upper cover member 10344 and the inner case member 10330 (see FIG. 220), and allow the piano wire to enter the gap and enter the pachinko machine 10010. As a countermeasure against fraudulent actions and mischievous actions of pouring liquid, the gap between the guide portion 10344a is designed to be small (in this embodiment, the clearance is designed to be 0.3 mm).

On the other hand, if the positional relationship between the shielding plate portions 6803L and 6803R and the guide portion 10344a is displaced due to the influence of the load (impact) during operation, and the gap is closed, the guide portion 10344a and the shielding plate portion are closed when the operation device 10300 is operated. 6803L and 6803R rub against each other, and there is a risk of generation of resin shavings. Resin shavings have little effect as long as they are small, but if a large amount of shavings clog the detection groove of a light transmission type switch represented by a so-called photocoupler, the shavings may block light and induce erroneous detection. It is thought that there is Therefore, there is a possibility that the degree of freedom of selection of switches that can be used is limited.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, as described above, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 1
Since the fixed assembly 6802 as the fastening point of 0322 is arranged at a position left and right away from the left-right center position (the point where the load during operation and the maximum load during operation occurs), the impact transmitted to the fastening point The load can be reduced, and loosening of the fastening screw can be prevented.

As a result, it is possible to suppress the displacement of the positional relationship between the shield plate portions 6803L and 6803R and the guide portion 10344a, and it is possible to prevent the generation of shavings of the resin, thereby suppressing erroneous detection. In this embodiment, a photocoupler type detection switch FC is arranged on the front side of the shielding plate portions 6803L and 6803R.

Note that the detection switch FC is a switch for detecting a pushing operation of the swing operation member 10310 in the backward rotation direction, and is fixed to the connecting portion 10344c. A thin metal plate MB is fixed inside the swing operation member 10310 so as to face the detection switch FC.

When the swinging operation member 10310 is pushed backward, the metal plate MB enters the detection groove of the detection switch FC and the detection light is blocked, so that it is determined that the pushing operation has been performed. be able to. In this embodiment, neither the detection switch FC nor the metal plate MB is subjected to a load, so durability can be improved compared to the case where a load is applied.

The front left cover 10321 and the front right cover 10322 are shielding plate portions 6803L and 6803R.
A curved plate portion 6804L, 6804R formed as a continuous curved surface on the front side of the lower plate portion 6805L, a lower plate portion 6805L formed continuously as a fan-shaped plate portion below the curved plate portions 6804L, 6804R, 6805R and, mainly.

The curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R have a curved shape (that is, the lever support shaft 10331d1 (Fig. 215 ) with a central angle of about 90 degrees).

The lower plate portions 6805L and 6805R are protruding interfering portions 68 that protrude from the rear surface side to the rear surface side.
05a. The protruding interference portion 6805a is located on the left cover member 13331 in the left-right direction.
and slightly inside the inner edge Rm1 of the right cover member 13332, and is formed to protrude toward the rear side from the front side surfaces of the left cover member 13331 and the right cover member 13332 in the front-rear direction.

As a result, the projecting interfering portion 6805a is positioned between the front left cover 10321 and the front right cover 1032.
2, the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324 are respectively assembled (see FIG. 220), the lateral displacement is restricted by the inner edge Rm1. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the left front cover 10321 or the right front cover 10322 from being displaced laterally outward, thereby preventing the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 from being separated from each other and disassembled.

The left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 have curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R.
and connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R, which are portions that connect the outer peripheries of the lower plate portions 6805L and 6805R, respectively, spread outward in a front view, and curve toward the front side at the ends of the spread.

The left front cover 10321 has a plurality of fastening portions 6802L, 6807L, 6808L which are formed at the right end so that fastening screws can be screwed in and arranged vertically. Also, the right front cover 103
22 is a plurality of insertion holes 68 arranged vertically at the left end and through which fastening screws can be inserted.
02R, 6807R, and 6808R.

The left front cover 10321, the right front cover 10322, and the inner case member 10330 are fixed to each other by a plurality of fastening portions and insertion holes distributed in the vertical direction (direction along the operation direction of the operation device 10300). As a result, the load and impact caused by the operation of the operation device 10300 can be distributed to each fastening portion, and loosening of fastening screws can be suppressed.

Furthermore, since it is possible to suppress the occurrence of misalignment at the position of the gap between the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322, the design portion (particularly, the
Lower plate portions 6805L and 6805R and connecting curved portions 6806L and 68 which are easily visible in a front view
06R, see FIG. 207). These fastening portions and insertion holes have different roles. They will be described in order below.

The fastening portion 6802L and the insertion hole 6802R are assembled in such a manner as to sandwich the insertion hole H23a that is drilled in the left-right direction in the portion protruding from the upper surface of the inner case member 10330, and are fixed with the inner case member 10330 sandwiched by fastening screws. . It should be noted that instead of the so-called "fastening together" aspect, the tip of the cylindrical portion extending rightward from the fastening portion 6802L is fastened and fixed in a manner that abuts on the left surface of the plate portion in which the insertion hole 6802R is formed. . In other words, the fastening does not apply a compressive load to the portion where the insertion hole H23a is formed.

In addition, a gap is provided by designing the outer diameter of the cylindrical portion extending rightward from the fastening portion 6802L to be slightly shorter than the inner diameter of the insertion hole H23a. Even if the inner case member 10330 is displaced downward due to the load applied to the operation device 10300 during operation, the fastening portion 6802L and the inner case member 10330 can operate independently within the range of the gap described above. Therefore, when a minute displacement that can occur in the inner case member 10330 occurs, the fixed assembly 6
A similar displacement of 802 can be avoided.

It should be noted that the extension length of the tubular portion extending rightward from the fastening portion 6802L may be slightly shortened so that a compression load may be applied to the portion where the insertion hole H23a is drilled during fastening. . In this case, since the restoring force of the portion where the insertion hole H23a is drilled increases the fastening force, the fixing assembly 6
Loosening of the fastening screw at 802 can be avoided.

The fastening portion 6807L is a portion into which a fastening screw is inserted through an insertion hole H23b drilled in the left-right direction in a portion of the inner case member 10330 that protrudes toward the front side. The left front cover 10321 is fastened and fixed to the inner case member 10330 by screwing in the fastening screw. Note that, in the present embodiment, the portions where only the left front cover 10321 and the inner case member 10330 are fastened and fixed are only fastening portions by the fastening portion 6807L and the insertion hole H23b.

The insertion hole 6807R is a through hole through which a fastening screw is inserted to be fastened and fixed to a fastening portion T23a formed so as to be screwable in the left-right direction at a portion of the inner case member 10330 that protrudes toward the front side. By screwing in this fastening screw, the right front cover 10322 is attached to the inner case member 1 .
0330 is fastened and fixed. In this embodiment, only the right front cover 10322 and the inner case member 10330 are fastened and fixed to the fastening portion T23b and the insertion hole 6807.
It is only a fastening part by R.

The fastening portion 6808L and the insertion hole 6808R are portions that are directly fastened and fixed by screwing a fastening screw inserted through the insertion hole 6808R into the fastening portion 6808L. Note that, in the present embodiment, the portions where only the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are fastened and fixed are only fastening portions by the fastening portions 6808L and the insertion holes 6808R.

As described above, in the present embodiment, fastening portions and insertion holes are formed at a plurality of locations along the direction in which the facing portions of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are formed.
The combination of objects to be concluded is configured differently. As a result, when assembling the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 to the inner case member 10330, it is not necessary to fasten the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 at once, so the assembling work can be facilitated. The assembly procedure is described below.

First, if one of the left front cover 10321 or the right front cover 10322 is attached to the inner case member 10330 and fastened at even one place, either the left front cover 10321 or the right front cover 10322 is prevented from coming off from the inner case member 10330. be able to.

In this case, either the left front cover 10321 or the right front cover 10322 may be attached first. When the front left cover 10321 is attached first, the front left cover 10321 is fastened and fixed by screwing a fastening screw into the fastening portion 6807L through the insertion hole H23b.
321 can be fixed to the inner case member 10330, and when the right front cover 10322 is attached first, the right front cover 10322 can be fixed by screwing a fastening screw into the fastening portion T23a through the insertion hole 6807R. can be secured to the inner case member 10330 .

Next, the other of left front cover 10321 or right front cover 10322 is attached to inner case member 10 .
330 and similarly fasten and fix at one point, a state in which the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are independently fastened to the inner case member 10330 can be configured.

Thereafter, although the order is not specified, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are attached to the inner case member 10 by screwing the fastening screws into the fixing assembly 6802 and fastening and fixing them.
330 can be integrally fixed. Also, the fastening portion 6808L and the insertion hole 6808R
Only the front left cover 10321 and the front right cover 10322 can be fastened and fixed to each other by screwing the fastening screws in and fixing them.

In this way, by also forming portions where the front left cover 10321 and the front right cover 10322 are fastened together, compared to the case where the front left cover 10321 and the front right cover 10322 are assembled to the inner case member 10330 only by fastening and fixing, The number of fastening points can be reduced.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the operation of fastening the front left cover 10321 and the front right cover 10322, all fastening screws are configured to be inserted from right to left. Therefore, compared with the case where the fastening screws are inserted in both left and right directions, the efficiency of the fastening work can be improved.

In addition, the screwing directions of the fastening screws fixed to the fastening portions 6802L, 6807L, and 6808L are unified in the horizontal direction along the rotation axis of the lever member 10340. As shown in FIG. Operation device 103
00, the operation direction of each operation portion is the direction along the plane orthogonal to the direction of the rotation axis of the lever member 10340. Therefore, the direction along the rotation axis of the lever member 10340 is the operation device 103
00 is a direction orthogonal to the operation direction of each operation unit. That is, when the load or impact during operation is generated along the direction of operation, there is no component in the screwing direction of the fastening screw. As a result, it is possible to prevent the tightening screw from loosening due to a load or impact when operating the operation device 10300 .

In this embodiment, the operation device 10300 includes a plurality of operation parts (parts operated by operation).
40, etc.), but since all operating parts are designed to operate in a direction orthogonal to the rotation axis of the lever member 10340, the screwing direction of the fastening screw is set to the left-right direction along the rotation axis of the lever member 10340.

On the other hand, if the operating portion does not operate on a plane orthogonal to the direction of the rotation axis of the lever member 10340 (for example, if there is an operating portion that is pushed in the left and right oblique directions), each operating portion A direction found as a balance (average) of the operation directions (for example, an intermediate angle direction) may be set as the direction of fastening, or an operation portion where operation instructions are frequently given (operation instructions are rarely generated) may be set as the fastening direction. The fastening direction may be set by ignoring the operation part that only performs the fastening.

223(a) is a front perspective view of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322, and FIG. 223(b) is a rear perspective view of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322. FIG. As shown in FIGS. 223(a) and 223(b), the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 have a gap between the curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R for arranging the lever member 10340 (see FIG. 220). A plurality of surfaces opposed to each other are in contact with each other vertically, except for the portion where the contact portion is formed and the portion where the fitting recess 10322a is formed.

In the contact portion, a plate-like portion extends rightward from the left front cover 10321 on the side that is not visually recognized by the player. That is, for example, the shielding plate portion 6803L has a lower overlapping portion 6803La extending rightward along its lower surface (see FIG. 223(a)).

Since the shielding plate portion 6803R is supported by the lower overlapping portion 6803La, the shielding plate portion 68
03R is restricted from being displaced downward with respect to the shielding plate portion 6803L. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent a gap from being generated between the shielding plate portions 6803R and 6803L, and it is possible to suppress the liquid from passing between the shielding plate portions 6803R and 6803L.

In this embodiment, an inner case member 10330 (see FIG. 218) arranged below the shielding plate portions 6803R and 6803L and a lever member 10340 in which the rear side portion is accommodated are provided.
, a drive motor that drives the lever member 10340, a transmission mechanism such as a cam or gear that transmits the drive force of the drive motor, and an electrical system (such as a substrate) that drives the drive motor. can be done.

In addition, while the cuts of the shield plate portions 6803R and 6803L are formed on the right side of the center of the swing operation member 10310, the cuts (connecting surfaces) of the left and right members constituting the inner case member 10330 are formed on the swing operation member. It is arranged on the same plane as the left and right central position of 10310 . Therefore, even if liquid passes between the shielding plate portions 6803R and 6803L, the liquid can be prevented from immediately reaching the gap between the left and right members forming the inner case member 10330. FIG.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the drive motor that drives the lever member 10340 is arranged to the left of the center of the inner case member 10330 (the inner case member 10
218), shielding plate portions 6803R, 6803L
Even if the lower part between the
Since the water can flow downward along the right outer surface of the drive motor, it is possible to avoid the drive motor from getting wet.

Further, for example, the lower plate portion 6805L includes a rear overlapping portion 6805Lb extending rightward along the rear surface below the fitting recess 10322a. Since the rear overlapping portion 6805Lb supports the lower plate portion 6805R from behind, the lower plate portion 6805R is restricted from being displaced rearward with respect to the lower plate portion 6805L. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the formation of a gap between the lower plate portions 6805R and 6805L, and it is possible to suppress the liquid from passing between the lower plate portions 6805R and 6805L.

The liquid that has passed below the lower plate portions 6805R and 6805L reaches the plate-like support portion 6426 (
232 and 234), when a large amount of liquid continues to pass through, it passes between the main body portion 6411 of the covering base member 6410 and the main body box portion 6421 of the lower plate forming member 6420, and flows toward the through hole 6412, There is a possibility that it may flow along the recessed shape portion 6414 . In particular, the through hole 6
If the liquid flows downward from 412, the liquid may flow downward from the lower surface of the outer frame of the front frame 10014 and splash the player or wet the senryo box.

In the present embodiment, as will be described later, the through hole 6412 is sandwiched between the lower tray forming member 6420 and the ball discharging device 6430. Therefore, the passage of the liquid is easily prevented by sandwiching without a gap. By suppressing the liquid from passing between the lower plate portions 6805R and 6805L as in the embodiment, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the liquid will splash on the player or wet the box. A pachinko machine 10010 that can be played comfortably can be configured.

As shown in FIGS. 223(a) and 223(b), shielding plate portions 6803L, 6803R,
The curved plate portions 6804L, 6804R and the lower plate portions 6805L, 6805R are provided with streaky portions D23 that are formed in streaks in a manner that they are pushed out from the front side to the back side. The streak D23 is visually recognized as a concave portion on the front surface and as a convex portion on the back surface due to its formation mode.

The striped portion D23 includes shielding plate portions 6803L and 6803R and curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R.
It also functions as a portion for adjusting the rigidity of the lower plate portions 6805L and 6805R. Namely
The rigidity along the direction in which the streak portion D23 is formed is improved while maintaining (or reducing) the rigidity in the direction perpendicular to the streak portion D23, compared to the case of forming a simple thin plate. (anisotropy). This will be explained using the curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R as an example.

The curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R are arranged between the lever member 10340 and the housing recess 17a (see FIG. 213) and have a role of filling the gap. Here, the operation device 10300 including the lever member 10340 is configured to be displaceable downward by a slight amount due to a load or impact during operation, in order to prevent the reaction force returned to the player during operation from becoming excessive. On the other hand, for the purpose of keeping the arrangement of the upper plate 17 unchanged, the accommodation recess 17a is configured to be non-displaceable.

That is, when the operation device 10300 is operated, a gap may occur between the lever member 10340 and the housing recess 17a. In the present embodiment, the curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R are vertically extended (elastically deformed or flexed) to accommodate changes in the distance between the lever member 10340 and the housing recess 17a. can be prevented from occurring.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the linear portions D23 are formed along the vertical direction in which the curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R are deformed (the direction in which the load is mainly directed during operation), thereby reducing deformation resistance in the vertical direction. Since it is made large (because the rigidity is made large), it is possible to suppress the occurrence of vibration and excessive deformation when restoring the shape. Thus, one purpose of designing the streak-like portion D23 in this embodiment is to take countermeasures against problems that may occur when the operation device 10300 is operated.

The striped portions D23 of the lower plate portions 6805L and 6805R are formed in a U shape when viewed from the front.
When a downward load is applied at the center, the left and right sides will withstand the upward force (pulling force is generated). That is, even if a downward load is applied when the operation device 10300 is operated and displacement occurs, the displacement can be quickly restored.

On the other hand, even if a load occurs in the direction perpendicular to the streak D23, the deformation that is permissible based on the flexibility of the resin occurs, so that the load is transmitted to the V-shaped design member 6450 arranged on the downstream side. can be reduced.

The connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R are provided with streak-like portions D24 that are formed in a streak-like manner so as to be pushed out from the front side to the back side. The streak D24 is visually recognized as a concave portion on the front surface and as a convex portion on the rear surface due to its formation mode.

The end muscle portion D24 mainly includes left and right muscle portions D24a formed on the left and right sides and a center muscle portion D24b formed on the center side, which are formed as countermeasures against loads in different directions.

The left and right muscle part D24a is a muscle-like part arranged above the fastening part 6807L (the uppermost part of the fastening part on the front side), and is formed in a shape that slopes down toward the back side. This downward slope corresponds to the direction of the load such as the operation of pushing the lens member 10317 of the swing operation member 10310 (along the direction of the load). That is, the connection bending portion 6 is connected by the left and right muscles D24a
By improving the rigidity of 806L and 6806R in the direction of the left and right muscle portions D24a, the resistance to the operation load can be improved.

As for the inclination angle of the left and right muscle portions D24a, the left and right muscle portions D24a are formed such that the angle with respect to the front-rear direction is gradually increased in comparison with the left and right muscle portions disposed on the left and right center sides. Namely
The streaks extend in multiple directions. As a result, regardless of the arrangement of the swing operation member 10310, the resistance to the load when the lens member 10317 is operated can be improved.

In addition, the formation width of the connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R where the left and right muscle portions D24a are formed is
Those arranged on the left and right sides are shorter than those arranged on the left and right central sides. That is, since the formed width is shorter on the side (left and right sides) where the inclination in the front-rear direction corresponds to a larger force, the amount of deformation allowed for the connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R is reduced, and the resistance is increased. be able to. As a result, it is possible to improve the resistance to the load in the direction in which the load during operation tends to increase (the direction in which the hand is swung down), which is inclined with respect to the front-rear direction.

On the other hand, the central muscle portion D24b is a muscle-like portion arranged downward from a position equivalent to the fastening portion 6807L (the uppermost part of the fastening portion on the front side), and has a shape that slopes upward toward the back side. formed from This upward slope is the operation device 10300 (inner case member 10330 of)
corresponds to the direction of load when falls forward.

That is, the rigidity of the connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R is controlled by the central muscle portion D24b.
24b, it is possible to improve the resistance to forward tilt displacement of (the inner case member 10330 of) the operation device 10300 due to the load during the tilting operation about the rotation axis of the lever member 10340. .

In addition, the center muscle D24b is formed of a total of seven, one in the center and three on each of the left and right sides, and the left and right center muscles D24b incline toward the left and right center as they go toward the back side. As a result, when the operation device 10300 (the inner case member 10330 thereof) is tilted forward due to the load during the tilting operation about the rotation axis of the lever member 10340, even if the lateral displacement is also generated, Resistance to displacement (resistance in the left-right direction) can be improved.

The central muscle portion D24b is formed denser than the left and right muscle portions D24a. As a result, particularly in the connection bending portions 6806L and 6806R, bending in the left-right direction (deformation that expands and contracts along the left-right direction) is smaller than bending in the up-down direction (deformation that expands and contracts along the up-and-down direction). large deflection.

Therefore, for example, when a downward load is applied to the lower tray unit 6400 (see FIGS. 208 and 212) and the lower edges of the connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R are pushed down by the V-shaped design member 6450 (position of the lower edge) connected curved portions 6806L and 6806R in a manner in which the
is deformed), the load (stress) applied to the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be released (stress avoid concentration).

Even in the case of such flexural deformation, the plate-shaped overhanging portions 10321c and 10322c formed continuously from the connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R are surrounded from the back side to the left and right front sides. 10017b and the facing projecting portion 10017c (see FIGS. 213 and 214). and right front cover 1032
2 and the accommodation recess 17a.

In addition, by varying the easiness of bending of the connecting bending portions 6806L and 6806R depending on the direction, the vibration of the vibrating device 10366 of the operation device 10300 and the load caused by the operation of the operation device 10300 can be transferred to the downstream side (V-shaped design member 6450, see FIG. 232) can be changed depending on the direction of vibration or load.

That is, vibration in the vertical direction and operation load can be easily transmitted to the operation handle 51 (see FIG. 207) and the lower tray 50 via the V-shaped design member 6450, while vibration in the horizontal direction and operation load can be easily transmitted. The load (for example, the load generated when the hand holding the ball collides with the swing operation member 10310 when transferring the ball from the lower tray 50 to the upper tray 17) is transmitted to the operation handle 51 and the lower tray 50. can be made difficult. As a result, the swinging operation member 10 is not intended by the player.
Even when a load is applied to 310, vibration and load are transmitted to the operation handle 51 and the lower plate 50, which can prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

Connected curved portions 6806L and 680 are provided on the left and right outer sides of the curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R.
Where 6R is formed continuously, the plate-like projecting portion 10321c formed on the upper edge thereof,
10322c is inserted between the laterally elongated lower edge overhanging portion 10017b and the opposing overhanging portion 10017c (see FIG. 214).

Here, in the case where the vicinity of the left and right ends is shifted in the front-rear direction due to a molding error or the like in comparison between the shapes of the plate-shaped overhanging portions 10321c and 10322c and the shapes of the lower edge overhanging portion 10017b and the facing overhanging portion 10017c. (For example, when the upper ends of the connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R on the front side protrude to the front side of the accommodation recess 17a), the plate-like projecting portions 10321c and 10322
It is preferable that forming errors can be dealt with by deforming so as to soften the curve of c (displace the left and right ends toward the back side).

In this respect, in the present embodiment, the curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R are formed with the streak portions D23 along the vertical direction, so that the lateral rigidity of the curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R is compared to the vertical rigidity. lowered by Therefore, plate-like projecting portions 10321c and 10322c
is deformed to the side where the curve becomes looser, the deformation of the plate-like protrusions 10321c and 10322c can be assisted by the deformation of the curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R.
The deformation width of 0321c and 10322c can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to increase the size of the forming error that can be dealt with.

In this way, the streak portion D23 does not improve (reduce) the rigidity in the forming direction and the vertical direction (horizontal direction), thereby taking measures against problems that may occur when the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are assembled. be able to.

For these reasons, the streak D23 allows the front left cover 10321 and the front right cover 10
322 (same as the operation device 10300, see FIG. 213) and the operation device 10300.

Returning to FIG. 212, description will be made. In this embodiment, the metal body portion 1001 of the front frame 10014
4a, a flat plate portion (ball guide opening 5
3 (see FIG. 214)), and the upper part of the upper part of the flat plate part, which is formed in a manner that slopes downward toward the right, is bent at the front side so as to form a bend. A plate-shaped upper plate portion that extends is provided, and a rear covering portion 10014b formed of a resin material is provided. That is, the rear covering portion 10014b is formed to have a substantially L-shaped cross section in a plane perpendicular to the straight line along the arrow LR.

The rear covering portion 10014b is a portion that defines the upper limit position and the right limit position of the lower plate 50. As shown in FIG. That is, the rear end portion of the lower plate 50 abuts (is connected to) the flat plate portion, and the right end portion of the lower plate 50 abuts (is connected to) the upper plate portion. Balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17, so-called foul balls, etc., are stored in the area (space) formed in this manner on the side where the lower plate 50 and the rear covering portion 10014b face each other. will be Next, the details of the lower tray unit 6400 that constitutes the lower tray 50 will be described.

224 is an exploded front perspective view of the lower tray unit 6400, and FIG. 225 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lower tray unit 6400. FIG. Note that in FIG. 225, each part of the lower tray unit 6400 is illustrated at an angle as viewed from below.

As shown in FIGS. 224 and 225, the lower tray unit 6400 is configured to cover the front side of the metal body 10014a of the front frame 10014 (see FIGS. 211 and 212).
A covering base member 6410 fastened and fixed to 0014a, a lower plate forming member 6420 fitted to the covering base member 6410 from above to form the lower plate 50, and a plate attached to the covering base member 6410 from below. A ball ejection device 6430 which is a shaped device and is fastened and fixed to a lower plate forming member 6420, and a lower plate forming member 64 from the back side at the left end of the covering base member 6410.
The intermediate holding member 6440 is attached to the covering base member 6410 in such a manner that it is possible to prevent the 20 from coming off, while the intermediate holding member 6440 is fastened and fixed to the metal body portion 10014a on the opposite side (rear side).
and a V-shaped design member 6450 disposed on the upper front side of the covering base member 6410 and formed of a resin material to have a V-shape when viewed from the front.

The covering base member 6410 includes a main body portion 6411 having a substantially flat lower bottom surface and a substantially box-like shape with an open rear surface and an open upper surface. A through hole 6412 is left to pass through, a protruding shape portion 6413 protrudes downward from the lower surface of the main body portion 6411 on the central side of the main body portion 6411 in the left-right direction with respect to the through hole 6412, and the protrusion is formed. On the back side of the shaped portion 6413, the protruding shaped portion 641
3 is mainly provided with a recessed shape portion 6414 that is recessed so that the thickness of the main body portion 6411 is substantially the same as that of the other portions of the main body portion 6411 .

By configuring the concave shape portion 6414, it is possible to prevent the plate thickness from becoming excessively large in the vicinity of the protruding shape portion 6413, so that the yield of resin molding is improved and stress concentration occurs in the protruding shape portion 6413. can be suppressed. The protruding shape portion 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414 have a plurality of advantageous effects at the location where the operation device 10300 is held from below, details of which will be described later.

The through-hole 6412 has a size substantially equal to the width of the bottom shape of the lower plate 50, which will be described later, and is much larger than the size of a bottom opening 6432 opened by sliding the ball extraction lever 52.

In this way, by forming the through hole 6412 large in advance, the covering base member 6410
The speed of discharging balls from the lower tray 50 can be made to correspond to the speed of discharging balls corresponding to the game characteristics realized by the pachinko machine 10010 without replacing the .

That is, the discharge speed of the balls from the lower tray 50 depends on the opening area of the bottom port 6432,
For example, if the size of the through-hole 6412 is the same as that of the bottom opening 6432, the ejection speed of the balls cannot be increased any further. On the other hand, in this embodiment, the through hole 6412
is formed large in advance, if the size of the bottom opening 6432 is changed or the arrangement of the bottom opening 6432 is changed within a range that does not exceed the through hole 6412 (design of the lower tray forming member 6420 and the ball discharging device 6430 If a change is made), it is possible to change the ejection speed (ejection mode) of balls from the lower tray 50 without replacing the covering base member 6410 . In other words, without changing the appearance of the lower tray unit 6400 visually recognized by the player (without changing the design).
, the ejection speed (ejection mode) of the ball can be changed.

The demand for changing the ball ejection speed is not limited to the case where the game characteristics of the pachinko machine 10010 are changed. For example, in amusement arcades, the pachinko machine 10010 may be installed in a manner that requires the dispensed balls to be transferred to the senryo box, or may be installed in a manner that does not require the dispensed balls to be transferred to the senryo box (a so-called “personal” machine). in the case of ).

When it is necessary to transfer the discharged balls to the senryo box, if the balls are discharged at high speed, there is a risk that the balls will overflow from the senryo box. It is desirable that

In this embodiment, the bottom opening 6432 is formed of a circular opening with a diameter of about 35 [mm], and from a comparison of the opening area and the shape of a sphere (a sphere with a diameter of about 11 [mm]), The upper limit of balls ejected simultaneously from the opening is limited to about seven.

On the other hand, when it is not necessary to transfer the put-out balls to the senryo box, there is no need to worry about the balls overflowing from the senryo box, so the desired upper limit of the discharge speed of the balls greatly changes in the increasing direction. In such an installation mode, the put out balls flow into the automatic counting machine installed in each pachinko machine 10010, so an example of the upper limit of the discharge speed is The operating speed of the ball-running device is exemplified.

By forming the through hole 6412 large in this way, there is an advantage that the discharge speed of the ball can be changed without changing the design in the front view.
There is a risk that the strength of 411 will decrease. In particular, the bottom surface of the main body portion 6411 is a portion where a load (mainly a downward load) when the player operates the operation device 10300 may be transmitted, so the size and arrangement of the through holes 6412 However, there is a risk that the load during operation will be limited to a tolerable level.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball discharging device 6430 are assembled to the covering base member 6410 in a manner that compensates for the reduction in strength due to the through holes 6412 . The lower tray forming member 6420 and the ball ejecting device 6430 are fastened and fixed to each other with the lines shown in phantom lines in FIGS. , the edge portion of the through hole 6412 is pressed against the lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball discharging device 6430 . As a result, the peripheral portion of the through-hole 6412 (for example, the laterally elongated frame portion located behind the through-hole 6412) can be reinforced with the strength of the lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball discharging device 6430.

The design mode in which the edge portion of the through hole 6412 is pressed against the lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball discharging device 6430 is not limited at all. For example, lower plate forming member 6420
Also, the edge portion of the through-hole 6412 and the lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball ejection device 6430 may be designed to abut before fastening the ball ejection device 6430 (positioned at the fastening preparation position) (see FIG. 233). Although there is a gap between them at the front, the design mode may be such that the gap can be filled by tightening the fastening screw and pressure can be applied.

Also, the portion to be pressed does not have to be the entire periphery of the edge portion of the through hole 6412, and may be a part of the edge portion. In this case, especially near the operation device 10300 (protruding shape portion 64
13) and the rear side portion (the long plate portion arranged behind the through-hole 6412), which may receive an impact every time it is opened and closed, are likely to be subjected to a large load. It is preferable to include

By sandwiching the edge portion of the through-hole 6412 between the lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball discharging device 6430 in this way, the strength of the edge portion of the through-hole 6412 can be sufficiently secured.
The bottom opening 6432 can be arranged at an arbitrary position without worrying about the reduction in strength due to the formation of the bottom opening 6432 . That is, the degree of freedom in arranging the bottom opening 6432 can be improved.

The lower tray forming member 6420 includes the main body box portion 64 in which the lower tray 50 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open top surface.
21, a discharge port 6422 opened in the vertical direction on the bottom surface of the main body box portion 6421, an L-shaped plate portion 6423 projecting from the back side of the bottom surface of the main body box portion 6421 in an L shape when viewed from the bottom, and the L shape. A plurality of fastening portions 6424 projecting downward in a cylindrical shape from the inside (front side) of the range surrounded by the plate portion 6423 and into which fastening screws for fastening the ball ejection device 6430 are screwed, and the edge portion of the ejection port 6422. A pair of guide ribs 6425 extending in the left-right direction as ends, a plate-like support portion 6426 extending rightward from the right end portion of the main body box portion 6421, and its plate-like support portion 642.
and a flexible resin member 6427 placed on the upper surface of .

The outlet 6422 is formed at the front end and right end of the lower plate 50 . The upper surface of the bottom of the lower tray 50 is configured as an inclined surface that slopes downward toward the outlet 6422. Balls that have flowed into the lower tray 50 from the pachinko machine 10010 flow down toward the outlet 6422. Since the exit 6422 is arranged on the front side near the player, the balls can be taken out smoothly from the lower tray 50 even when the number of balls stored in the lower tray 50 is small.

The discharge port 6422 is provided with a plate-like support portion 6426 where the load from the operation device 10300 is likely to occur.
is formed in the vicinity of , and it is considered that the influence of strength reduction due to the formation of the through-hole is taken into account by combining with the ball discharging device 6430, but the details will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 225, the L-shaped plate portion 6423 has different projecting lengths depending on the left and right positions. That is, the upper surface of the lower base of the main body 6411 is formed in a substantially flat shape, while the lower surface of the lower base of the lower tray 50 is inclined downward toward the right. 6412 edge),
The projecting length of the L-shaped plate portion 6423 needs to be shortened toward the right, and this corresponds to that. With this correspondence, in the assembled state (see FIG. 207), the protruding end (lower end) of the L-shaped plate portion 6423 is brought into contact with the edge of the through hole 6412 (either in line contact or surface contact). ).

The fastening portions 6424 are provided at two locations on the front side end portion where the load from the player is likely to occur, and on the front frame 10
014 is formed at the back side end where a load is likely to occur when opening and closing. By preferentially providing a fastening point at a location where a load is likely to occur, it is possible to limit the fastening location and prevent misalignment of the lower plate forming member 6420 due to misalignment when a load is generated. .

In addition, since the fastening portion 6424 is arranged near the L-shaped plate portion 6423, the through hole 641
2 (that is, fastening without forming a separate through-hole for positioning the fastening screw to be passed through the body portion 6411), the L-shaped plate portion 6423 and the covering base member 6410. contact with the edge of the through-hole 6412 can be easily maintained (relative position can be easily maintained). Therefore, it is possible to improve the positional stability of the lower tray forming member 6420 while eliminating the need to form through holes other than the through holes 6412 .

The guide rib 6425 serves both to guide the movement of the ball extracting lever 52 and to reinforce the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 . In particular, in the present embodiment, the bottom surface of the lower tray 50 is formed in the shape of a plate elongated in the left and right direction, and it is conceivable that reinforcement along the left and right direction is required.
Since the ball extracting lever 52 slides along the left-right direction that coincides with the longitudinal direction, the movement guidance of the ball extracting lever 52 and the reinforcement of the bottom surface of the lower tray 50 are preferably achieved.

Since the guide ribs 6425 are formed in pairs as described above, the applied load can be dispersed. Also, even if one of them is damaged, as long as the other remains, there is no problem in using it, so the useful life of the lower tray unit 6400 can be extended.

The material of the resin member 6427 can be arbitrarily designed. For example, it may be made of urethane, silicone, or other flexible and appropriate repulsive force (shape restoring force).
It may be a member with

The ball ejection device 6430 includes a plate-shaped main body plate portion 6431 in which the above-described ball extraction lever 52 is arranged.
A circular bottom opening 6432 formed through the body plate portion 6431 in the vertical direction and a fastening portion 6424 of the lower plate forming member 6420 are arranged in a position vertically overlapping each other, and a fastening screw is screwed into the fastening portion 6424. A plurality of fastening holes 6433 that are fastened by
and a fitting frame portion 6434 having a rectangular frame shape surrounding the covering base member 6410 and having an outer shape slightly smaller than the inner shape of the through hole 6412 of the covering base member 6410 .

The ball extraction lever 52 has a grip portion 52a projecting forward so that the player can operate it in a laterally sliding manner, and a closing plate portion 52b that closes the discharge port 6422 in the assembled state (see FIG. 207). and a pair of rib-like portions projecting upward from the upper surface of the closing plate portion 52b and extending along the left-right direction, and guided by the guide ribs 6425.
c, which are integrally molded from a hard resin material.

The bottom port 6432 is disposed vertically opposite to the discharge port 6422 of the lower tray forming member 6420, and the closing plate portion 52b of the ball extraction lever 52 is arranged therebetween. As described above, when not operated, the ball extraction lever 52 is arranged between the discharge port 6422 and the bottom port 6432. Therefore, the degree of decrease in strength due to the formation of the opening is determined by the closure plate. It can be reduced by the rigidity of the portion 52b.

This can prevent the discharge port 6422 and the bottom port 6432 from becoming fragile.
Although the discharge port 6422 and the bottom port 6432 are arranged near the bottom of the operation device 10300 (arranged close to the operation device 10300) as in this embodiment, the durability of the lower tray unit 6400 is reduced. can be prevented.

The details of the fastening mode between the lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball discharging device 6430 will be described. The main body plate portion 6431 has a flange portion 6431a that protrudes outward from the fitting frame portion 6434 in three directions (flat side and both left and right sides) except for the front side. The fitting frame portion 6434 is in the assembled state (FIG. 2).
07), it is fitted into the through hole 6412 of the covering base member 6410 with a gap,
When the ball discharging device 6430 is fitted into the through hole 6412 as it is, the flange 6431 a abuts against the lower surface of the edge portion of the through hole 6412 .

On the other hand, the inner surface of the L-shaped plate portion 6423 of the lower plate forming member 6420 is formed in a shape that can be contacted from the outside of the fitting frame portion 6434 in the front, rear, left, and right directions, and the lower end portion of the L-shaped plate portion 6423 , abuts on the edge portion of the through hole 6412 in the vertical direction, as described above.

In this way, the ball ejection device 6430 can be positioned on the covering base member 6410, and the lower plate forming member 6420 can be positioned on the ball ejection device 6430. Each component can be fixed by passing a fastening screw through the hole 6433 and tightening it. Therefore, assembly work can be facilitated.

The intermediate holding member 6440 includes a plurality of through-holes 6441 protruding on the front side through which the fastening screws to be fastened and fixed to the covering base member 6410 are inserted, and the metal body portion 10014a (
FIG. 211), which is a portion to be fastened and fixed by a screw inserted through a through hole formed in the base member 6410, and a plurality of fastening portions 6442 protruding on the back side, the left upper end portion of the covering base member 6410, and the front-rear direction. and an interference portion 6443 which is a portion that interferes with and is formed in a plate shape.

226 is an exploded front perspective view of the lower tray unit 6400, and FIG. 227 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lower tray unit 6400. FIG. In Figures 226 and 227, Figures 224 and 225
A state in which the V-shaped design member 6450 is disassembled from is illustrated.

The V-shaped design member 6450 has a groove shape that is open on the back side and has a groove shape in which the opening width becomes narrower toward the center in the left-right direction, and a V-shaped main body portion 6451 that is disposed downward toward the center in the left-right direction,
A plurality of insertion holes 6452 formed as through holes through which fastening screws can be inserted in the lower edge of the body portion 6451, positioning portions 6453 formed in the vicinity of the central portion of the lower edge of the body portion 6451, and right and left sides of the body portion 6451. A plurality of overhanging fastening portions 6454 projecting toward the back side near the end portion and formed so that fastening screws can be screwed in, and a plate shape extending in the width direction of the groove of the main body portion 6451 on the right side of the main body portion 6451. A plurality of right reinforcing ribs 6455 aligned in the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 6451 and a plate-shaped member extending in the width direction of the groove of the main body portion 6451 on the left side of the main body portion 6451 are aligned in the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 6451 . and a plurality of left reinforcing ribs 6456 that

The V-shaped design member 6450 is formed to have higher rigidity than the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 described above. As a result, it is possible to limit the locations where through-holes are likely to be formed by those who commit fraudulent acts to allow illegal members to enter the inside of the pachinko machine 10010 . That is, compared to the case where a through hole is formed in the V-shaped design member 6450, the left front cover 10
321 or the right front cover 10322 is less difficult, it is possible to induce an unauthorized through hole to be opened in the left front cover 10321 or the right front cover 10322.例文帳に追加

Therefore, it is possible to narrow down the places to be periodically checked in order to discover fraud. That is, according to this embodiment, since the through holes are likely to be formed in the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322, it is possible to eliminate the need to check the V-shaped design member 6450. FIG. As a result, compared to the case where the V-shaped design member 6450 and the covers 10321 and 10322 need to be equally checked, the burden of checking can be reduced.

The body portion 6451 is formed to be thin, and is flexurally deformable in the direction of narrowing the groove width (flexurally deformable in a state of being crushed vertically). The V-shaped design member 6450 is the operation device 103
00, vertical displacement that may occur during operation of the operation device 10300 is transmitted through the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322. As shown in FIG. When this vertical displacement occurs, the V-shaped design member 6450 is flexurally deformed in a direction that narrows the width of the groove of the main body portion 6451, thereby causing the operation device 1030 to move.
At least part of the zero vertical displacement can be absorbed by the bending of the V-shaped design member 6450 .

That is, at least part of the load transmitted from the operation device 10300 is transferred to the V-shaped design member 6.
After operating in a variant of 450, it can be transmitted downstream (eg, overlying base member 6410). Therefore, since the load transmitted to the body portion 6411 of the covering base member 6410 arranged below the V-shaped design member 6450 can be suppressed, the amount of displacement of the member below the V-shaped design member 6450 can be reduced by the operation. Also, the degree of vibration can be suppressed.

The positioning portion 6453 includes a fastening portion 6453L formed so that a fastening screw can be screwed in on the left side with respect to the left-right center, and a plate-like projecting portion protruding toward the back side on the opposite side of the fastening portion 6453L. 6453R.

The insertion hole 6452 is a portion that is fixed to the covering base member 6410 by screwing a fastening screw into the recess formed on the front side of the covering base member 6410 while the fastening portion of the covering base member 6410 is inserted from the front side. be. That is, the V-shaped design member 6450 is assembled so as to approach from the back side of the covering base member 6410 (an example of the movement locus of the V-shaped design member 6450 is shown in phantom lines in FIGS. 226 and 227).

Note that at least some of the plurality of insertion holes 6452 (in this embodiment, the lower right insertion hole 6
452) is invisible when viewed in the direction in which the fastening screw is inserted into the lower plate forming member 6420 in the assembled state (see FIG. 230(b)). That is, the lower plate forming member 6420 is the covering base member 641
0, the fastening screws inserted through at least some of the insertion holes 6452 cannot be loosened. Since it is necessary to disassemble the V-shaped design member 6450, the number of man-hours required to disassemble the V-shaped design member 6450 can be increased.

In addition, the lower plate forming member 6420 is bored in the front longitudinal portion 6426c, which will be described later, in the front-rear direction. It has an insertion portion 6426c1 that is fixed to the . In addition, the insertion portion 6426
An operation device 10300 is arranged in such a manner as to shield c1 in rear view (see FIG. 232).

Therefore, as a premise for disassembling the lower tray forming member 6420, it is necessary to remove the operation device 10300 and move the insertion portion 6426c1 from the blocking position. That is, in order to disassemble the V-shaped design member 6450, the man-hours required for removing the operation device 10300 and disassembling the lower tray forming member 6420 can be increased. As a result, it is possible to suppress illegal actions such as illegally removing the V-shaped design member 6450 and entering the interior through the created gap.

The plate-like projecting portion 6453R corresponds to the front longitudinal portion 6426 of the plate-like support portion 6426 in the assembled state.
c (see FIG. 230(b)). That is, the downward displacement of the plate-shaped projecting portion 6453R is suppressed by the plate-shaped support portion 6426, and conversely, the upward displacement of the plate-shaped support portion 6426 is suppressed by the plate-shaped projecting portion 6453R.

As a result, for example, even when the operation device 10300 (see FIG. 208) is given a load in the lifting direction by the player, the fitting recess De1 (see FIG. 208) of the operation device 10300
219) and the fitting portion 6426d are fitted together, the operation device 10300
is displaced in the upward direction, the front side portion of the plate-like support portion 6426 is displaced in the upward direction.

Since this displacement is suppressed by the plate-like projecting portion 6453R, the operation device 10300
can be suppressed.

The left and right protruding fastening portions 6454 are portions into which fastening screws are inserted through resin intermediate members (not shown) fixed to the metal main body portion 10014a of the front frame 10014. The fastening positions are , the rear side of the fastening position of the fastening portion 6453L (the side close to the metal body portion 10014a).

The right reinforcing rib 6455 and the left reinforcing rib 6456 function as ribs that reinforce the main body portion 6451 in the groove width direction, and have a thin shape that is also flexibly deformable. It also has a function as a buffering means (displacement transmission suppressing means) that suppresses the As shown in FIG. 227, the left reinforcing ribs 6456 are arranged closer together than the right reinforcing ribs 6455 . They will be described in order below.

228(a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the right reinforcing rib 6455, and FIG. 228(b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the left reinforcing rib 6456. FIG. Note that FIGS. 228(a) and 228(b) show cross sections taken along a plane dividing the reinforcing ribs 6455 and 6456 in the thickness direction. Further, the reinforcing ribs 6455 and 6456 are designed to have the same thickness, but are designed to change the dimensions in the groove width direction and the groove depth direction according to the groove width of the main body 6451. Since the basic configuration is common, a typical example will be explained.

As shown in FIG. 228(a), the right reinforcing rib 6455 is a plate-like portion extending from the bottom of the groove of the body portion 6451 to the back side, and is a joint portion that is joined to the upper plate portion of the body portion 6451. 645
5a, and an upper facing portion 6 arranged parallel to and facing the upper plate portion of the main body portion 6451 to form a gap.
455b, and a lower facing portion 6455c arranged to face the lower plate portion of the main body portion 6451 in an inclined manner so that the separation width increases toward the back side.

The upper facing portion 6455b is a portion where the lower edge portion of the right front cover 10322 is fitted between the upper plate portion of the main body portion 6451 and the load from the right front cover 10322 is transmitted. Main body 645
1 and the upper facing portion 6455b are arranged substantially in parallel, contact with the right front cover 10322 at one point can be avoided, and the load can be dispersed in the front and rear positions. As a result, the load capacity of the right reinforcing rib 6455 can be increased.

Note that in this embodiment, the gap between the upper facing portion 6455b and the upper plate portion of the main body portion 6451 is formed so as to be equal to the thickness of the lower edge portion of the right front cover 10322 . As a result, the lower edge of the right front cover 10322 after fitting can be prevented from separating from the upper facing portion 6455b and the upper plate portion of the main body portion 6451, and collision and rubbing can be prevented. Therefore, generation of powder (dust) can be suppressed.

The lower facing portion 6455c is closer to the operation device 10300 (rear side, right front cover 103
22 where the displacement tends to be large), the distance between the main body portion 6451 and the lower plate is increased. Collision (contact) with the lower plate portion of the main body portion 6451 can be avoided when this occurs.

Therefore, since the right reinforcing rib 6455 plays a role as a cushioning member, the right front cover 10
322, the rate of transmission to the lower plate portion of the main body portion 6451 can be reduced.

In this embodiment, the downstream side of the right reinforcing rib 6455 starting from the right front cover 10322 (
The operation handle 51 is arranged on the lower right side), and the right reinforcing rib 6455 serves as a cushioning member, so that the operation handle 51 is not affected by the load, displacement, and vibration accompanying the operation and driving of the operation device 10300. The transmitted rate can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to secure a game property in which the player can freely operate the operation handle 51 without any sense of incongruity.

As shown in FIG. 228(b), the left reinforcing rib 6456 is a plate-like portion extending from the bottom of the groove of the main body 6451 toward the rear side, and is a connecting portion that is connected to the upper plate portion of the main body 6451. 645
6a, and an upper facing portion 6 arranged parallel to and facing the upper plate portion of the main body portion 6451 to form a gap.
456b and an overhanging portion 6456 that overhangs the rear side edge of the upper plate portion of the main body portion 6451 toward the rear side.
c, and a lower facing portion 64 arranged parallel to and facing the lower plate portion of the main body portion 6451 to form a gap.
56d and .

The upper facing portion 6456b is a portion where the lower edge portion of the left front cover 10321 is fitted between the upper plate portion of the main body portion 6451 and the load from the left front cover 10321 is transmitted. Main body 645
1 and the upper facing portion 6456b are arranged substantially in parallel, contact with the left front cover 10321 at one point can be avoided, and the load can be dispersed in the front and rear positions. Thereby, the load bearing capacity of the left reinforcing rib 6456 can be increased.

Note that in this embodiment, the gap between the upper facing portion 6456b and the upper plate portion of the main body portion 6451 is formed so as to be equal to the thickness of the lower edge portion of the left front cover 10321 . As a result, the lower edge of the left front cover 10321 after fitting can be prevented from separating from the upper facing portion 6456b and the upper plate portion of the main body portion 6451, and collision and rubbing can be prevented. Therefore, generation of powder (dust) can be suppressed.

The protruding portion 6456c extends in a direction (
downward) sloping upper edge. As a result, the protruding portion 6456c is
21, but is formed as a portion that comes into contact only when the amount of downward displacement of the left front cover 10321 is increased to some extent. That is, the projecting portion 6456c
can function as a portion (fail-safe) for suppressing the displacement when the displacement amount of the left front cover 10321 becomes abnormally large.

Note that the upper surface of the overhanging portion 6456c may be formed at the same level as the upper surface of the upper facing portion 6456b. In this case, the length of the front-rear position capable of distributing the load transmitted through the left front cover 10321 can be increased, so the load bearing capacity of the left reinforcing rib 6456 can be further increased.

The lower facing portion 6456d is a portion that contacts the upper surface of the rear covering portion 10014b (see FIG. 212) of the front frame 10014 when the rear covering portion 10014b (see FIG. 212) is inserted between the lower plate portion of the main body portion 6451. is. Since the lower facing portions 6456d of the plurality of left reinforcing ribs 6456 abut against the rear covering portion 10014b, the transmitted load can be dispersed, and the amount of downward displacement of the rear covering portion 10014b can be reduced. .

As a result, the arrangement of the back covering portion 10014b can be easily maintained, so that the space above the lower tray 50 (the space where balls are stored and the space where the player may touch)
can be prevented from being narrowed.

That is, the rear covering portion 10014b is connected to the left front cover 10321 through the V-shaped design member 6450.
, the load transmitted from the operation device 10300 side via the left front cover 10321 can be suppressed from displacing the rear covering portion 10014b. As a result, for example, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the surface constituting the lower plate 50 is displaced and collides with the game ball to generate abnormal noise.

As described above, the left reinforcing ribs 6456 are densely arranged compared to the spacing of the right reinforcing ribs 6455 . Therefore, it is configured to be able to cope with a larger load.
In the present embodiment, the weight of the player's hand touching the balls stored in the upper tray 17 arranged on the left side is likely to be applied, and the left side reinforcing ribs 6456 are densely arranged where the load tends to be uneven on the left and right sides. It is possible to deal with uneven loads by arranging the

As described above, in the present embodiment, the shapes of the right reinforcing rib 6455 and the left reinforcing rib 6456 are different, so that different types of loads can be handled. That is, in the right reinforcing rib 6455, a sufficient gap is formed between the lower plate portion of the main body portion 6451 and the lower facing portion 6455c to cut off the transmission of the load, thereby preventing instantaneous load or impact from the operation device 10300. can be prevented from being transmitted to the operation handle 51, while the left reinforcing rib 6456 disperses and supports the load, so even if the weight is placed on the upper plate 17 for a long time, the rear It is possible to prevent the covering portion 10014b from being displaced. As described above, in this embodiment, the reinforcing ribs 6455 and 64 are provided so as to cope with load conditions that tend to cause problems.
56 shapes are designed.

229(a) is a top view of the lower tray unit 6400, FIG. 229(b) is a front view of the lower tray unit 6400, and FIG. 230(a) is a bottom view of the lower tray unit 6400. 230(b) is a rear view of the lower tray unit 6400, FIG. 231(a) is a right side view of the lower tray unit 6400 as viewed in the direction of arrow L, and FIG. 231(b) is a lower tray unit. 6400 is a left side view when viewed in the direction of arrow R. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 229(a) and 230(b), the plate-like support portion 6426 of the lower tray forming member 6420 is arranged so as to straddle the recessed shape portion 6414 of the covering base member 6410 to the left and right. , the plate-like support portion 6426 is placed in surface contact with the upper bottom surface of the main body portion 6411 , while being spaced apart from the recessed shape portion 6414 . Details of the projecting shape portion 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414 will be described below.

The protruding shape portion 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414 are formed on the body portion 641 of the covering base member 6410 .
1 is a part that constitutes the front and back of the part that bulges (extends) downward from the bottom surface, and the shape of one of the front and back is similar to the shape of the other. ing. In other words, the outer shape of the protruding shape portion 6413 when viewed from the bottom and the inner shape of the recessed shape portion 6414 when viewed from the top are formed as a shape whose scale is changed by an amount that can ensure the plate thickness of the main body portion 6411 . be. Therefore, it is possible to easily imagine the shape of the other from the shape of one.

As shown in FIG. 230(a), the projecting shape portion 6413 gradually increases in lateral width toward the front side. Then, as shown in FIG. 229(a), the plate-like support portion 64 of the lower plate forming member 6420 is
26 is arranged closer to the front side than the center of the recessed shape portion 6414 in the front-rear direction, so that the plate-like support portion 6426 is supported at the portion where the lateral width of the projecting shape portion 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414 is large. be able to. As a result, when the plate-shaped support portion 6426 is displaced in a manner of sinking downward, the main body portion 6411 can be partially and sufficiently bent, which will be described later in detail.

Here, in a playable state, the operation device 10300 is placed on the plate-like support portion 6426, and as the player operates the operation device 10300, the plate-like support portion 642 is opened.
6 can be displaced up and down. In relation to this displacement, the plate-like support portion 6426 and the body portion 6411 are made of a resin material, and the plate-like support portion 6426 and the body portion 64 of the covering base member 6410 are displaced.
11, there is a risk of generation of shavings due to load generation, collision, or rubbing.

If shavings are generated around the operation device 10300, for example, the shavings may get into the gap and the clearance cannot be secured, resulting in malfunction, or the shavings may enter the detection area of the detection sensor and induce an erroneous detection. Therefore, it is desirable to suppress the generation of shavings.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, by reducing the contact area between the plate-like support portion 6426 and the main body portion 6411, it is possible to suppress the generation of shavings and reduce the amount of the generated shavings.

As described above, in this embodiment, the plate-like support portion 6426 and the main body portion 6411 are not directly fastened and fixed. This is based on the purpose of preventing direct transmission of the displacement of the plate-like support portion 6426 to the body portion 6411 .

That is, a load is applied to the operation device 10300 in the downward direction, and the plate-shaped support portion 6426
When is displaced downward, the displacement is received by the protruding shape portion 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414, so that displacement of other portions such as the main body portion 6411 and the like can be made unnecessary.

On the other hand, a load in the lifting direction is applied to the operation device 10300, and the plate-like support portion 642
6 is upwardly displaced, the displacement is received by the plate-shaped projecting portion 6453R (see FIG. 232) and converted into deformation of the V-shaped design member 6450, so that other portions such as the main body portion 6411 are displaced. can be made unnecessary.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the plate-like support portion 6426 and the main body portion 6411 are not directly fastened and fixed, and the load applied to the operation device 10300 is only indirectly transmitted to the main body portion 6411. With such a configuration, deformation or breakage of the main body portion 6411 can be prevented.

As shown in FIGS. 231(a) and 231(b), the lower surface of the projecting shaped portion 6413 is formed as a flat surface along the front-rear direction, while the lower surface of the main body portion 6411 of the covering base member 6410 is
It is formed as an inclined plane that is inclined upward toward the front side. This configuration works well, for example, when the front frame 10014 is stored alone.

When the front frame 10014 is stored alone, it is generally considered that the front frame 10014 is placed on a floor made of concrete or flooring in such a manner that the lower surface of the front frame 10014 contacts the floor. At this time, it is considered preferable to have the entire lower surface in contact with the floor from the viewpoint of stability and avoiding concentration of the load, but in this case, dirt on the floor may adhere to the entire lower surface. The lower surface of the main body part 6411 is difficult to see from the player, but since it is a product, it is preferable to avoid staining it.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, the lower surface of the protruding shape portion 6413 is formed as a flat surface along the front-rear direction, and the lower surface of the main body portion 6411 is formed as an inclined surface that slopes upward toward the front side. When the shaped portion 6413 comes into contact with the floor surface, a gap is created between the floor surface and the lower surface of the main body portion 6411 .
can be limited to Therefore, when the amusement center installs the front frame 10014 in a playable state, it is sufficient to wipe off only the dirt on the projecting shaped portion 6413, and it is not necessary to wipe the entire lower surface of the main body portion 6411. .

In addition, the projecting shape portion 6413 also functions as a finger hooking portion for hooking a finger when carrying the front frame 10014 . Conventionally, since the lower plate portion is arranged in the center of the front frame in the left and right direction, it is easy to lift the front frame by hooking the lower plate portion and assemble it to the rear frame (outer frame 11, inner frame 12). However, in the front frame 10014 of this embodiment, the lower plate 50 is arranged on the left side in the horizontal direction (opening/closing axis side).
The configuration is difficult to assemble.

On the other hand, if the front frame 10014 is lifted by hooking the operation handle 51, the weight of the front frame 10014 will be applied to the root side of the operation handle 41, and the operation handle 51 may be damaged. is not preferred.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the front frame 100 is lifted by hooking the bottom surface of the lower tray unit 6400 with a hand.
A protruding shape 641 that also functions as a finger rest so that it is recommended to lift 14.
3 are arranged at the left and right center positions. The worker can easily assemble the front frame 10014 to the rear frame by lifting the front frame 10014 by hooking the projecting shape portion 6413 and pivoting it on the rear frame.

And by making it a work procedure that includes the work of wiping off the dirt before and after the point where the finger is hooked,
It is possible to make the operator aware of the parts that need to be wiped clean in relation to the carrying operation. Therefore, it is possible to prevent forgetting to wipe off dirt.

Here, the gap between the floor surface and the main body portion 6411 is configured as a gap that is neither too much nor too little according to the amount of deformation that is expected in the protruding shape portion 6413 . More specifically, due to the shape of the lower surface of the main body part 6411, the gap between it and the floor surface becomes larger toward the front side, and the projecting shape part 6413 is formed wider toward the front side. , which corresponds to an increase in the amount of deformation (amount of deflection) due to the load.

That is, when the front frame 10014 is placed on the floor surface, the projecting shaped portion 6413
It is possible to easily secure a gap between the lower surface of the main body part 6411 and the floor even when the body part 6411 is flexurally deformed by the weight of . On the other hand, when the protruding shape portion 6413 is flexurally deformed to the limit and the gap between the bottom surface of the main body portion 6411 and the floor surface disappears, the entire bottom surface of the main body portion 6411 can be easily brought into contact with the floor surface. Therefore, the weight of the front frame 10014 can be supported by the entire lower surface of the main body portion 6411 .

Therefore, even if the front frame 10014 placed on the floor is heavier than expected, or if an excessive load is applied to the front frame 10014 placed on the floor, the body portion 6411 is partially It is possible to prevent the load from concentrating on the

Moreover, the amount of deformation that can be deformed is increased toward the front side of the projecting shape portion 6413 . It works well even during game execution. For example, when exchanging the senryo box, the amusement store clerk slides the senryo box back and forth on the lower surface of the main body portion 6411 and the lower side of the projecting shape portion 6413. At this time, the senryo box and the lower surface of the front frame 10014 move. There may be collisions. If the shock and load due to this collision are accumulated in the structural members as fatigue, the structural members will be destroyed (for example, cracked) when the allowable amount is exceeded, making it difficult to continue playing the game. There is

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the protruding shape portion 64 increases toward the front side where it is likely to collide with the senryo box.
13 is configured to have a large deformable amount. Therefore, the impact and load caused by the collision with the senryo box can be easily relieved by deformation (flexural deformation), and breakage of the protruding shape portion 6413 can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to easily maintain a comfortable gaming environment for the player.

In addition, on the left and right sides of the protruding shape portion 6413, the lower bottom surface of the main body portion 6411 is inclined so as to rise toward the front side (see FIG. 231(a)). As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility of collision between the 1,000-car box and the main body 6411 on the left and right sides of the protruding shape part 6413 when the 1,000-car box is replaced. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the lower bottom surface of the main body part 6411 will be damaged, so that it is possible to easily maintain a comfortable gaming environment for the player.

232 is a rear view of the lower tray unit 6400. FIG. Note that FIG. 232 shows the assembled state of the left front cover 10321 and the right cover 10322, and the operation device 1 other than that is shown.
The outline of 0300 is schematically shown in phantom lines.

As shown in FIG. 232, the lower edges of the left front cover 10321 and the right cover 10322 are attached to the reinforcing ribs 6455 and 6456 of the V-shaped design member 6450 (upper facing parts 6455b and 6455b and 6455b).
56b (see FIGS. 228(a) and 228(b))).

A body portion 6451 of the V-shaped design member 6450 is formed in a V-shape when viewed from the rear, and the reinforcing ribs 645
5 and 6456 are plate-shaped extending in the groove width direction of the main body portion 6451, so that the reinforcing ribs 6455
, 6456 is directed in a direction (upward oblique direction) having a directional component to return the left front cover 10321 and the right cover 10322 to the left-right center. For example, reinforcing ribs 6455,6
The restoring force from bending deformation at 456 is directed in the upward oblique direction.

As a result, not only vertical displacement of the operation device 10300 but also horizontal displacement can be accommodated. For example, as in the present embodiment, even if the movement direction of the operation portion of the operation device 10300 (for example, the swing operation member 10310) does not have a horizontal component, the downward load given by the player It may have a directional component, and when such a load is applied, the entire operation device 10300 may be displaced downward and slightly displaced (vibrated) in the left-right direction.

On the other hand, the left front cover 10321 and the right cover 10322 can respond to the horizontal displacement of the operation device 10300 by flexing and deforming based on their curved shapes (absorbing the horizontal displacement or using a restoring force). Further, the reaction force from the reinforcing ribs 6455 and 6456 is directed upward and toward the left-right center, so that the operation device 10300 can be quickly returned to the position before displacement. Therefore, it is possible to easily maintain the design of the front frame 10014 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 207).

FIG. 233(a) is a cross-sectional view of the lower tray unit 6400 along line CCXXXIIIa-CCXXXIIIa in FIG. 229(a), and FIG. 233(b) is CCX in FIG. 229(a).
233(c) is a cross-sectional view of the lower tray unit 6400 along the line CCXXXIIIc-CCXXXIIIc in FIG. 229(a). In addition, in FIGS. 233(a) to 233(c),
The vicinity of the edge of the through hole 6412 in the cross section is shown enlarged.

As shown in FIGS. 233(a) to 233(c), in the assembled state of the lower tray unit 6400, the edge portion of the through hole 6412 is aligned with the lower tray forming member 6420 (on the rear side, the protrusion of the L-shaped plate portion 6423). It is pressed against the set end (lower end)) and the ball discharging device 6430 (the flange 6431a thereof). As a result, the peripheral portion of the through hole 6412 can be reinforced with the strength of the lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball discharging device 6430 .

The inner surface of the L-shaped plate portion 6423 (see FIG. 225) of the lower plate forming member 6420 is the fitting frame portion 64
34 (see FIG. 224) from the outside in the front, rear, left, and right directions.
As described above, the lower end of 423 contacts the edge of through hole 6412 in the vertical direction (see FIG. 233(c)). As a result, the edge portion of the through-hole 6412 can be reinforced, so that the degree of freedom in designing the through-hole 6412 can be improved.

As described above, the ball extracting lever 52 is closed to the discharge port 6422 and the bottom port 6 when not operated.
432, the degree of reduction in strength due to the formation of the opening can be reduced by the rigidity of the closing plate portion 52b (see FIG. 233(b)).

This can prevent the discharge port 6422 and the bottom port 6432 from becoming fragile.
Although the discharge port 6422 and the bottom port 6432 are arranged near the bottom of the operation device 10300 (arranged close to the operation device 10300) as in this embodiment, the durability of the lower tray unit 6400 is reduced. can be prevented.

As shown in FIGS. 233(a) to 233(c), the shape of the concave portion 6414 is formed in such a manner that the width of the concave portion 6414 increases toward the front side and the depth of the concave portion increases. That is, the recessed shape portion 6414 is formed so as to bend more easily toward the front side.

As a result, it is possible to impart sufficient bending performance to the recessed shape portion 6414 in the vicinity of the front side where the load generated when the player operates the operation device 10300 tends to increase, so that the operation device 10300 can be operated with sufficient flexibility. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the covering base member 6410 that supports the operation device 10300 is damaged (for example, cracked) due to the load. This will be explained in detail.

The operation device 10300 is a device that can be operated in multiple operation modes, as described above. The operation timing and operation mode are notified by a display device or the like, and the player is made to operate the operation device 10300 in accordance with the notification, thereby drawing the player into the game. Here, the frequency of notification for each operation mode is not constant.

For example, as an example of control, the swing operation member 10310 is controlled to stop at the initial position from the start of the game until a specific ready-to-win effect is executed (see FIG. 215(a)). This state occupies most of the arrangement of the swing operation member 10310 during business hours.

In this state, a notification prompting an operation in the display effect (announcement such as "press the button!")
The player performs a pushing operation (push operation) of the lens member 10317 in order to operate the lens 10317, switch the stage, or the like. Therefore, most of the load caused by the operation is the load caused when the lens member 10317 is pushed and operated, and the direction Y17a (Fig. 2)
15(a)). Since the occurrence frequency of notification is high, the occurrence frequency of this load is high.

On the other hand, when a specific ready-to-win effect is executed, the operation device 10300 is drive-controlled to vertically displace the swing operation member 10310, for example, the swing operation member 10310 is arranged at the downward position. 215(b)), the notification prompting the operation is executed.

The operation direction in this case is a direction Y17b (see FIG. 215(b)) that is further inclined by an angle θ17y in the front-rear direction compared to the state in which the swing operation member 10310 is arranged in the upward position.
, and a load is generated along the direction Y17b. Since the occurrence of notification is limited to the execution of a specific ready-to-win effect, the frequency of occurrence is low.

That is, the frequency of occurrence of the load along the direction Y17a is controlled to be higher than the frequency of occurrence of the load along the direction Y17b. On the other hand, in this embodiment, the concave shape portion 6
The shape of 414 is such that the width increases toward the front side and the depth of the recess increases, so that the load handling performance increases toward the front side.

That is, compared to the case where a common shape is used in the front-rear direction, it is possible to configure it so that it can cope with the difference in the frequency of occurrence of loads at appropriate locations, and the applied load causes excessive deformation or insufficient deformation. It can be made easy to avoid becoming easily damaged.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the side closer to the player and the side on which the load is more frequently generated during operation are both the front side. , is formed deep, but is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the initial position of the swing operation member 10310 is set to the downward position, the frequency of load generation during operation is reversed. , By forming a deep bottom, compared to the case where the shape is common in the front and back direction, it can be configured so that it can respond to the difference in the frequency of occurrence of loads at the appropriate place, and excessive deformation due to the applied load It is possible to easily avoid the occurrence of deformation and the tendency to be easily damaged due to insufficient deformation.

As shown in FIG. 233(b) corresponding to the central cross section of the resin member 6427, the hanging plate-like portion 64
26b abuts on the body portion 6411 in the upper and lower positions at the left and right outer sides of the left and right width end portions of the recessed shape portion 6414 .

As a result, compared to the case where the hanging plate-like portion 6426b is in contact with the upper edge of the recessed shape portion 6414, the ratio of the load from the operation device 10300 to be transmitted to the recessed shape portion 6414 can be reduced. . Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the recessed shape portion 6414 from being damaged by the load when the operation device 10300 is operated.

In addition, as a response to the load, not only the bending of the recessed shape portion 6414 but also the recessed shape portion 6414
Since the deflection of the plate-like portion from the upper edge portion of 414 to the abutting position of the hanging plate-like portion 6426b and the main body portion 6411 can also be utilized, the allowable amount of load can be increased.

FIG. 234 is a cross-sectional view of the lower tray unit 6400 along line CCXXXIV-CCXXXIV in FIG. 229(a). As shown in FIG. 234, the plate-like support portion 6426 of the lower tray forming member 6420 includes a plane plate-like portion 6426a on which the resin member 6427 is placed, and its plane plate-like portion 6426a.
426a from the left, right, and rear edges of 426a in a plate-like shape, and a portion coupled to the front side edge of the flat plate-shaped portion 6426a and formed taller than the flat plate-shaped portion 6426a. It mainly includes a front vertical portion 6426c with an open bottom, and a fitting portion 6426d extending from the front vertical portion 6426c to the rear side and fitted with the operation device 10300. As shown in FIG. In the description of FIG. 234, FIGS. 224 to 229 are referred to as appropriate.

The planar plate-like portion 6426a is formed wider than the lateral width of the recessed shape portion 6414 and configured to cover the front half portion of the recessed shape portion 6414 . A hanging plate-like portion 6426b is formed between the flat plate-like portion 6426a and the main body portion 6411 of the covering base member 6410 (between the upper and lower sides).
That is, the plane plate-like portion 6426a does not abut on the main body portion 6411 and is formed in a U-shape when viewed from the bottom (
(See FIG. 225) The extended end of the hanging plate-like portion 6426b contacts the main body portion 6411, thereby determining the position of the flat plate-like portion 6426a with respect to the covering base member 6410. As shown in FIG.

In this way, the planar plate-shaped portion 6426a and the hanging plate-shaped portion 6426b are not block-shaped,
Since it is formed in a box shape with an open bottom, the flat plate-shaped portion 6426a and the hanging plate-shaped portion 6426
b is configured to be easily flexurally deformed. Therefore, not only the protruding shape portion 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414 of the main body portion 6411 are flexurally deformed, but also the planar plate portion 6426a and the hanging plate portion 6426b can also be flexurally deformed, and the plate-like support portion 6426 and the covering base member 6410 (the main body portion 6411, the projecting shape portion 6413, and the recess shape portion 6414) arranged below the operation device 10300 are Damage can be further prevented.

The hanging plate-like portion 6426b extends up to the top surface of the bottom portion of the main body portion 6411, but does not extend into the recessed shape portion 6414. As shown in FIG. That is, there is a space between the hanging plate-like portion 6426b and the recessed shape portion 6414 (see the bottom of the rear end portion of the planar plate-like portion 6426a in FIG. 234). As a result, it is possible to maintain a state in which there is no framework inside the recessed shape portion 6414, so that the deformation of the projecting shape portion 6413 is not hindered.

In addition, the space between the hanging plate-shaped portion 6426b and the recessed shape portion 6414 also serves as a drain. For example, even if the liquid enters from the gap between the operation device 10300 and the lower tray unit 6400, the liquid running along the rear side of the plate-shaped support portion 6426 can enter the front portion of the recessed shape portion 6414. As a result, the flow of liquid entering behind can be weakened. As a result, the front frame 10014 can easily prevent liquid from entering.

The front vertical portion 6426c is connected to the operation device 1 by a fitting portion 6426d extending to the rear side.
0300, and the lower part on the front side is supported by the V-shaped design member 6450. As a result, the load given by the player to the operation device 10300 is
Since the load can be distributed by having not only 411 but also the V-shaped design member 6450 take charge, the load applied to each component can be weakened.

A space is also generated between the front vertically elongated portion 6426c and the recessed shape portion 6414. As shown in FIG. As a result, it is possible to maintain a state in which there is no framework inside the recessed shape portion 6414.
It is possible to prevent the deformation of the projecting shape portion 6413 from being hindered.

The space between the front longitudinal portion 6426c and the recessed shape portion 6414 also serves as a drain. For example, even if the liquid enters from the gap between the operation device 10300 and the lower tray unit 6400, the liquid running along the rear side of the plate-shaped support portion 6426 can enter the front portion of the recessed shape portion 6414. As a result, the flow of liquid entering behind can be weakened. As a result, the front frame 10014 can easily prevent liquid from entering.

The fitting portion 6426d is elongated in the lateral direction so as to be fittable with the fitting recess De1 (see FIG. 212), and receives a load from the operation device 10300. As shown in FIG. The fitting portion 6426d includes a pair of plate-like reinforcing ribs 6426d1 coupled to the lower surface and the front longitudinally elongated portion 6426c formed on the extended base end side.

Since the reinforcing rib 6426d1 can suppress the vertical displacement (deformation) of the fitting portion 6426d, even if a load that displaces the operation device 10300 downward is applied, the rigidity of the fitting portion 6426d can withstand it. As a result, excessive displacement of the operation device 10300 can be prevented.

Here, the operation member 10300 is placed on the upper side of the resin member 6427. As shown in FIG. Therefore, the load associated with the player's operation and vibration of the operation member 10300 is transferred to the plate-like support portion 642 via the resin member.
6 and transmitted to the covering base member 6410 arranged downstream thereof, the plate-like support portion 6426 is supported on the bottom surface of the main body portion 6411 (see FIG. 233).

In this embodiment, the bottom surface of the body portion 6411 is formed as an inclined surface that slopes upward toward the front side (see FIG. 234). The directional component can be directed to the front side (the load can be released to the front side).

That is, it is possible to avoid problems that may occur due to the load generated from the operation device 10300 being transmitted to the back side (outer frame 11 side and inner frame 12 side). For example, the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) shakes, affecting the flow of the shot ball, or
It is possible to prevent problems such as cracking of the substrate due to the load being transmitted to the 0 to 104 and the electronic substrate.

Next, the presentation effect device 6500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 235 to 264. FIG. 235 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 10014, and FIG. 236 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame 10014. FIG. In addition, in FIG.235 and FIG.236, the lower tray unit 640 mentioned above
0 and the operation device 10300 are omitted, and the rendering device 6500 is the metal main body 10
014a is shown disassembled forward.

As shown in FIG. 235, the presentation device 6500 includes a pair of left and right sound devices 661.
0, which is a device for covering the front side of the display board 657, in which a light emitting means such as an LED is arranged.
0, and each constituent member that serves as a mediator for delivering the light emitted from the LED to the player.

As shown in FIG. 236, a plate-shaped metal spring member (plate spring) 6584d is arranged on the back side of the presentation effect device 6500 to generate an urging force in the separating direction with respect to the metal body portion 10014a.
This makes it possible to increase the fastening force of the fastening screw that fastens the presentation device 6500 to the metal main body 10014a (stable fastening and fixing).

237 is an exploded front perspective view of the performance effect device 6500, and FIG.
500 is an exploded rear perspective view of FIG. In addition, in FIGS. 237 and 238, the presentation effect device 6500
A state in which the upper cover member 6510 is disassembled upward is illustrated.

The presentation device 6500 includes a plate-shaped upper lid member 6510, front units 6520 to 6550 occupying the front portion below the upper lid member 6510, and front units 6520 to 6550.
and rear units 6560 to 6580 arranged behind the 6550.

The upper cover member 6510 is a member that covers the upper surface of the presentation device 6500 and is fastened and fixed to the metal main body portion 10014a, and is a main body plate that is configured as a semi-elliptical plate-like portion obtained by dividing an oval that is long in the left and right direction into the front and rear portions. a portion 6511, a plurality of insertion holes 6512 vertically drilled near the edge of the front side of the main body plate portion 6511 and configured so that fastening screws can be inserted through them, and extending downward from the rear side portion of the main body plate portion 6511. A plurality of fastening portions 6513 are configured so that fastening screws inserted through the metal main body portion 10014a can be fastened to the female screw holes formed from the rear surface of the extension tip.
and are mainly provided.

The upper lid member 6510 has a metal main body portion 10014 at the back side portion where the fastening portion 6513 extends.
Other components of the presentation device 6500 are supported by fastening screws that are fastened and fixed to a and inserted through the insertion holes 6512 . In other words, the mechanical rigidity of the upper lid member 6510 can be used to suppress the downward displacement of the front end portion of the effect device 6500 .

The fastening portion 6513 has a plate-shaped plate portion 6513 connected to the body plate portion 6511 on the front side thereof.
a. As a result, it is possible to prevent the main body plate portion 6511 from being deformed or displaced in a state of falling forward.

The fastening portion 6513 is inserted into the acoustic device 6610, and the plate portion 6513 is arranged to face the front surface of the plate in which the insertion hole of the acoustic device 6610 is formed. With such a configuration (see corresponding FIG. 125(a) described above, the fastening portion 419 is attached to the fastening portion 6513, and the plate portion 6513a is attached to the enlarged rib 4).
19a), the upper lid member 6510 can prevent the acoustic device 6610 from coming off the metal body 10014a.

The upper lid member 6510 is recessed from the upper surface to the lower surface side, and the concave-convex shaped portion 6514 formed in a manner that protrudes downward from the lower surface is formed as a decoration on the entire surface. This uneven shape portion 651
4, compared to the case where the upper cover member 6510 of the same thickness is configured by a plate-shaped member with a smooth surface, it is possible to increase the force of resisting the load in the direction perpendicular to the plane (the shape can be easily maintained). can).

239 is an exploded front perspective view of the presentation effect device 6500, and FIG.
500 is an exploded rear perspective view of FIG. 239 and 240, the presentation effect device 6500
Illustration of the upper lid member 6510 is omitted, and a state in which the front side units 6520 to 6550 are disassembled in front of the rear side units 6560 to 6580 is illustrated. In this embodiment, the front side units 6520 to 6550 are arranged forward and obliquely downward with respect to the rear side units 6560 to 6580 (
The presentation device 6500 can be disassembled by moving it in the forming direction of the extension plate portion 6552, the direction along which the surface of the extending plate portion 6552 is formed, and the details will be described later.

In this embodiment, the front units 6520 to 6550 have the role of receiving, refracting, and transmitting light emitted from light emitting means such as LEDs, and the rear units 6560 to 6550
6580 has a role of light emitting means such as LED and a role of supporting an electrical board on which light emitting means such as LED is arranged. First, the rear units 6560-6580 will be described in detail.

FIG. 241(a) is a front view of the rear units 6560 to 6580, and FIG. 241(b)
242 is an exploded front perspective view of the rear units 6560 to 6580, and FIG. 243 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rear units 6560 to 6580. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 241 to 243, each of the rear units 6560 to 6580 includes a partitioning member 6560 formed to partition the internal space into a plurality of sections when viewed from the front, and a plurality of LEDs for irradiating the partitioning member 6560 with light. A pair of electrical decoration substrates 6570 and a pair of electrical decoration substrates 6570 that are stacked on the back side of the partitioning member 6560 and are arranged with a slight gap from the electrical decoration substrate 6570 in the inner region of the outer shape and are surface-supported in the outer shape portion. and a rear support member 6580 of .

It should be noted that the surface support with a slight gap means that the posture of the electrical board 6570 can be maintained, and the partition member 6560 and the rear support member 6580 are supported so as to be displaceable back and forth by the gap. means that

The partitioning member 6560 is arranged close to the front side of the electrical board 6570 so as to face the electrical board 6570 .
It is configured to divide the light emitted from each of the lighting units 6574 to 6576 of 570 from the vicinity of the electrical board 6570 . By partitioning in this way, the light emitted from each of the illumination units 6574 to 6576 can be visually recognized for each partition, and even when the light emission modes of the light emitted from each of the illumination units 6574 to 6576 are significantly different. Also, it is possible to reduce the sense of discomfort given to the player.

The partitioning member 6560 includes a facing plate portion 6561 arranged to face the electrical board 6570 , central light holes 6562 drilled in the left and right central portions of the facing plate portion 6561 , and a facing plate portion 6560 .
1, a plurality of fastening portions 6564 to which fastening screws inserted through the back surface support member 6580 are fastened, and a pair of light beams extending to the back surface of the opposing plate portion 6561. A large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 and a rectangular cylindrical opposing plate portion 6561 surrounding the central light hole 6562 are provided.
a central cylindrical portion 6566 extending to the front side of the left and right light holes 6563, a left and right cylindrical portion 6567 extending to the front side of the opposing plate portion 6561 in a long cylindrical shape surrounding the left and right light holes 6563, and a T-shaped in front view. A plate-like connecting portion 6568 formed of a plate-like portion and connecting the facing plate portion 6561, the central cylindrical portion 6566, and the left and right cylindrical portions 6567 on the front side of the facing plate portion 6561 is mainly provided.

The opposing plate portion 6561 has a flange portion 6 protruding from its upper edge portion toward the rear side in a laterally elongated shape.
561a-6561c. The first flange portion 6561a is formed above the central hole 6562 for light. The second flange portion 6561b is formed as a pair of right and left flange portions 6561b.
It extends from the left and right end portions of 561a to the vicinity of the fastening portion 6564 from a position with a cut.
The third flange portion 6561c is formed as a pair of left and right, and extends from a position on the opposite side of the end portion of the second flange portion 6561b across the fastening portion 6564 to near the left and right end portions of the plate-like coupling portion 6568.

Each of the flange portions 6561a to 6561c has a role as a shielding plate that prevents light from entering and exiting between the partition member 6560 and the electrical board 6570, and the gaps thereof are provided at least in the electrical board 6570. It is configured at a location where the light emitted from the LED is unlikely to leak. In other words, this portion is a portion where even if light is incident from the outside, it is difficult for the light to mix with the light emitted from the LED.

The gap between the first flange portion 6561a and the second flange portion 6561b is formed between the center light hole 6562 and the left and right light holes 6563.
A discontinuity is provided at 570 where no LED is arranged. Therefore, since there is no LED that causes light leakage in the first place, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a phenomenon in which light leaks through the cut.

The gap between the second flange portion 6561b and the third flange portion 6561c is the fastening portion 65
It is formed at the place where 64 is arranged, and the break is purposely made at the place where the substitute part for blocking the light is arranged. That is, even if the light travels through the cut, the light that is about to pass through the cut is blocked by the fastening portion 6564, so that it is possible to suppress the occurrence of light leaking through the cut.

Here, the flange portions 6561a to 6561c can be configured as a series of continuous portions, but in that case, the rigidity of the flange portions 6561a to 6561c cannot be sufficiently ensured, and the downward load applied to the partition member 6560 cannot be secured. It is necessary to counteract the force generated by the fastening screw that fastens and fixes the fastening portion 6564 (assuming a downward load applied to a member arranged in front of the partitioning member 6560, gravity, and a load given by a player). occurs. In this embodiment, as the number of fastening portions 6564 increases, not only does the number of man-hours for tightening the fastening screws increase, but also the surface area of the electrical board 6570 decreases, limiting the locations where LEDs can be arranged. This reduces the design freedom of the 6570.

On the other hand, by dividing the flange portions 6561a to 6561c into lengths sufficient to ensure rigidity, the rigidity of the flange portions 6561a to 6561c can withstand the downward load applied to the partition member 6560. FIG. Therefore, the number of fastening portions 6564 can be limited, and the number of working steps can be reduced, and the degree of freedom in designing the electrical board 6570 can be improved.

Further, in this embodiment, the length in the longitudinal direction is designed according to the degree of rigidity required for the flange portions 6561a to 6561c. In this embodiment, the shape of the presentation device 6500 is
It is formed in a semi-elliptical shape in which the width in the front-rear direction becomes longer toward the left-right center when viewed from above (
See Figure 237). Generally, the load given by the player (for example, the hanging load) is applied at the front side end of the effect device 6500, so the load given by the player at the left-right central portion of the effect device 6500 is maximum. , and gradually decreases toward the left and right ends.

On the other hand, the flange portions 6561a to 6561c have different lengths. Specifically, compared to the lateral length of the first flange portion 6561a formed in the central portion where the load is maximum, the lateral length of the second flange portion 6561b arranged on the left and right is longer,
Further, the third flange portions 6561c arranged on the left and right sides are longer than the left and right lengths of the second flange portions 6561b. That is, the left-right length is the shortest at the left-right central portion,
It gradually becomes longer as it approaches the left and right ends. As a result, the load given to the presentation effect device 6500 can generate a sufficient counterforce.

As a result, deformation and displacement of the partitioning member 6560 can be suppressed, so that the relative relationship (positional relationship) between the partitioning member 6560 and the electrical board 6570 can be stably maintained. It should be noted that the maintenance of the relative relationship (positional relationship) is due to deformation and displacement in the separation direction.
It is not limited to the case of preventing the displacement of the electrical board 6570 due to a decrease in the force holding 0, but the deformation or displacement in the approaching direction causes a load in the compressive direction on the electrical board 6570, which may break the electrical board 6570. It also includes the case of preventing deformation.

The center light hole 6562 and the left and right light holes 6563 are LEDs arranged on the electrical board 6570 .
are a plurality of through-holes drilled corresponding to the pattern of Central light hole 6562 is a single L
While configured as a set of through holes slightly larger than the outer shape of the ED, the left and right light holes 6563 are
It is configured as a set of through holes sized to enclose a plurality of LEDs.

The fastening portion 6564 is fastened and fixed to the front plate portion 6581 of the back support member 6580 , and the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 is formed to protrude from the fastening portion 6564 toward the back side. As a result, the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 is inserted through the positioning hole 6581b of the front plate portion 6581, and the partition member 6560
and back support member 6580 are aligned.

The large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 has a front-side cylindrical portion extending toward the front side in a cylindrical shape of the same diameter, and has an insertion hole 6565a at the bottom of the front end thereof, through which a fastening screw can be inserted. This insertion hole 656
A fastening screw passing through the inside of the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 is inserted through 5a from the rear side, and the fastening screw is fastened and fixed to a partitioning unit 6540, which will be described later. By configuring in this way,
The step of inserting the fastening screw through the insertion hole 6565a and screwing it into the partition unit 6540 can be performed in the assembled state of the rear units 6560 to 6580 (see FIGS. 239 and 240).

The central tubular portion 6566 and the left and right tubular portions 6567 are extended until they reach the rear-side ends of the front units 6520-6550. Therefore, most (or all) of the light passing through the central tubular portion 6566 and the left and right tubular portions 6567 enters the front units 6520-6550.

The plate-like coupling portion 6568 is a portion to which the load is transmitted via the upper cover member 6510 (see FIG. 237) when a load (for example, a hanging load) is applied to the presentation device 6500. The upper surface is arranged at a position slightly higher than the upper end of the . As a result, since the plate-like coupling portion 6568 bears the load before the central tubular portion 6566, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the central tubular portion 6566 is subjected to a load, and the central tubular portion 6566 is not deformed or displaced. It is possible to make it easier to avoid a situation where

The plate-like connecting portion 6568 extends downward until the plate-like portion reaches the left and right cylindrical portions 6567 . As a result, when a load is transmitted to the plate-like connecting portion 6568 via the upper cover member 6510 (see FIG. 237), the resistance generated by the plate-like portion reaching the left and right cylindrical portions 6567 also resists the load. can do. In this case, since it is formed of the plate-like portion, it is possible to generate a counter force by bending deformation of the plate-like portion itself, so that displacement and deformation of the left and right cylindrical portions 6567 can be suppressed.

The electrical board 6570 is a so-called printed circuit board, and includes a plate-shaped board portion 6571 and a fastening portion 656 of the partitioning member 6560 which is a portion bored or notched in the board portion 6571 .
a large-diameter insertion portion 6573 drilled in the substrate portion 6571 and through which the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 of the partitioning member 6560 is inserted; A first illumination unit 6574 formed from LEDs (shown as uniform rectangles in FIG. 241(b)), and a plurality of LEs arranged symmetrically with respect to the first illumination unit 6574
a second lighting unit 6575 formed from D and arranged near the vertical center of the substrate unit 6571;
It mainly includes a third illumination part 6576 arranged symmetrically along the lower end of the substrate part 6571 and a connector 6577 for connecting electrical wiring (not shown).

As shown in FIGS. 241(a) and 241(b), each lighting section 6574 to 6576 is formed of a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light to the front side along the front-rear direction. are arranged according to the physical positional relationship. That is, the first lighting section 6574 is positioned corresponding to the central light hole 6562 , the second lighting section 6575 is positioned surrounded by the left and right light holes 6563 , and the third lighting section 6576 is positioned below the partition member 6560 . They are each arranged at a position below the edge. Thereby, each lighting section 6574 to 6576 illuminates a separate area partitioned by the partitioning member 6560 . Note that the first illumination unit 6574 and the second illumination unit 6575 illuminate the area inside the partitioning member 6560, while the third illumination unit 6576 illuminates the area inside the partitioning member 6560.
illuminates the area outside the

It should be noted that the third lighting section 6576 is illustrated as being partially shielded by the partitioning member 6560 when viewed from the front. As will be described later, the light emitted from the third illumination section 6576 reaches the light receiving member 65
58, the light emitted from the third illumination section 6576 can be prevented from being blocked by the partition member 6560.
and the partition member 6560 can be arranged to at least partially overlap in the front-rear direction.

The thickness of the substrate portion 6571 is equal to the thickness of the fastening portion 65 of the partition member 6560 at the fastening insertion portion 6572 .
64 and the rear supporting member 6580 are designed with dimensions that do not act upon fastening force. That is, the electrical board 6570 is separated from the partitioning member 6560 and the rear supporting member 65 without being fastened and fixed.
supported between 80

The fastening inserting portion 6572 is formed in a vertically elongated oval shape (or a shape obtained by cutting an oval in half) when viewed from the front. As a result, it is possible to improve assembly efficiency, and the details will be described later.

The rear support member 6580 is a member that covers the acoustic device 6610 from the front side, and is a pair of members that are configured to have substantially symmetrical shapes with each other.
581, a flange portion 6582 extending from the upper edge of the front plate portion 6581 to the front side, and an upper plate portion having the same plane as the upper surface of the flange portion 6582 and extending in a plate shape to the rear side. 6583
and a rear box portion 6584 which is connected to the left and right edges of the front plate portion 6581 (edges on the side opposite to the side where the pair of members face each other) and the lower edge and is formed in a box shape opened to the rear side, A pair of rear box parts 6
A lower box portion 6585 formed in a box-like shape having a smooth upper surface and opening downward on the side near the rear box portion 6584 of the 584 portion, the lower box portion 6585 and the front plate portion 65
81 and is arranged to face the mating member (back support member 6580), and between the opposing plate portion 6586 and the lower box portion 6585, there is a cut penetrating vertically. A notch portion 6587 that is a notch is mainly provided.

The front plate portion 6581 has a plurality of fastening supports each including an oval rib capable of supporting the fastening portion 6564 of the partition member 6560 and an insertion hole through which a fastening screw fastened to the fastening portion 6564 is inserted. A portion 6581a and a through hole formed in a vertically elongated oval shape with a left-right width slightly longer than the diameter of the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 of the partitioning member 6560 and arranged at a position overlapping the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 in the front and rear. Multiple positioning holes 6581b and a plurality of screw insertion portions 6581c through which fastening screws for fastening and fixing the front side units 6520 to 6550 can be inserted, mainly drilled in the lower edge portion forming the boundary between the rear box portion 6584, and Similarly to the screw insertion portion 6581c, the rear box portion 658
4 along the lower edge forming the boundary with the front side units 6520 to 6550
A plurality of long positioning holes 6581d used for positioning the electrical wiring board 6570, and a wiring hole 658 which is drilled at a location corresponding to the connector 6577 of the electrical board 6570 and allows the electrical wiring to pass back and forth.
1e and .

The rib of the fastening support portion 6581a has an inner width in the left-right direction that constitutes the short diameter of the partition member 656.
0 is slightly longer than the outer diameter of the fastening portion 6564, the outer width in the left-right direction is
It is longer than the lateral width of the fastening insertion portion 6572 of 70 . Therefore, in the assembled state (see FIG. 235), the fastening portion 6564 is inserted inside the elliptical rib of the fastening support portion 6581a, and the electrical board 6570 is surface-supported by the tip of the elliptical rib. (See FIG. 244(a)).

The screw insertion portion 6581c and the long positioning hole 6581d are holes used for assembling the rear support member 6580 and the front units 6520 to 6550.
6550 along the direction of travel. In other words, the screw insertion portion 6581c and the long positioning hole 6581d are formed in a downwardly inclined manner toward the front side (see FIGS. 244(a) and 246(b)).

The front units 6520 to 6550 have screw insertion portions 6581c and long positioning holes 6581.
It is attached to the rear units 6560 to 6580 along the inclined direction formed by d, and fastening screws are screwed in along the direction of the downward inclination (see FIG. 247).

This makes it easier to avoid interference between the front units 6520 to 6550 and the electrical board 6570 compared to the case where they are opened in the front-rear direction.
Since the position of 81d can be brought closer to the electrical board 6570, when the front plate portion 6581 is formed to have the same size, a wide installation area for the electrical board 6570 can be secured.
When the electrical board 6570 is formed in the same size, the area for forming the screw insertion portion 6581c and the long positioning hole 6581d can be narrowed (they can be formed compactly).

The flange portion 6582 is a portion that abuts on the upper surfaces of the flange portions 6561 a to 6561 c of the partition member 6560 . When a downward load (hanging load) is applied to the partition member 6560, the flange portion 6582 functions as a portion that suppresses the partition member 6560 from falling forward.

The upper plate portion 6583 is arranged at a position corresponding to the fastening portion 6513 (see FIG. 238) and includes a plurality of fitting recessed portions 6583a that are recessed so as to be fittable with the fastening portion 6513 . Fitting concave portion 6
583a is formed in a rectangular shape (shape corresponding to the shape of plate portion 6513a on the front side of fastening portion 6513) when viewed in the left-right direction, and is open at the top and rear.

The rear box portion 6584 includes an overhanging portion 6584a that overhangs the front side from the front plate portion 6581, and the sound transmission portion 6 made of punching metal that covers an opening formed in the overhanging portion 6584a.
584b, a light-receiving portion 6584c formed of a light-transmitting member disposed at the right end of the projecting portion 6584a of the right member, and a position closest to the center of the upper end (a position near the front plate portion 6581). A pair of plate-like metal spring members 6584d formed so as to be capable of generating a biasing force in a direction repulsive from the metal body portion 10014a in the assembled state (see FIG. 207), and an insertion hole 6512 of the upper cover member 6510 (see FIG. 237). ) and a pair of fastening portions 6584e to which fastening screws inserted through are fastened.

The projecting portion 6584a has an upper edge formed in a shape that follows the shape of the lower edge of the electrical board 6570 (
241), and its upper surface constitutes a guide surface for guiding the front units 6520-6550.

The sound transmission portion 6584b is a portion through which sound waves generated from the acoustic device 6610 (see FIG. 235) pass. The sound transmission portion 6584b is arranged at a position facing the vibrating membrane 6611 (see FIG. 235) of the acoustic device 6610. As shown in FIG.

The light-receiving part 6584c receives the light emitted from the lighting part 10014c (see FIG. 235) formed from a single LED arranged in the upper right corner of the front frame 10014, and shows it to the player as a light-emitting effect. is. This illumination part 10014c is the illumination board 65 in this embodiment.
Light emission is controlled in a manner different from that of 70 . That is, while the light emission effect of the illumination board 6570 is executed during a variable effect with a high occurrence probability, a normal change effect and reach effect, a demonstration effect, etc., the light emission effect of the lighting unit 10014c has a high probability of occurrence. It is executed when an extremely low and extremely advantageous effect for the player occurs. Therefore, the player's attention to the lighting section 10014c can be improved.

The lower box portion 6585 is a portion into which the front units 6520 to 6550 enter from below, and is a fastening portion 658 to which a fastening screw inserted from the rear side of the metal body portion 10014a is fastened.
5a.

The notch portion 6587 is one side of a through hole through which sound emitted from the exhaust pressure transmission hole 6612 vertically drilled in the lower surface of the left and right central portion of the acoustic device 6610 (the portion farthest from the diaphragm 6611) passes through. to form That is, the support plate portion 10014 that supports the back side of the acoustic device 6610
The sound emitted from the exhaust pressure transmission hole 6612 passes through the through hole formed by the notch 6587 and the notch 6587 .

The sound that passes through the exhaust pressure transmission hole 6612 is output as a sound directed toward the back side as the diaphragm 6611 vibrates, in contrast to the sound directed toward the front side as the diaphragm 6611 vibrates. This is the sound that passes through the internal cavity of the acoustic device 6610 (corresponding to the duct of the bass reflex speaker) and is emitted to the outside from the exhaust pressure transmission hole 6612 . By providing a plurality of sound output paths in this manner, sounds with different timbres can be generated at the same time.

FIG. 244(a) shows the dividing member 6 along line CCXLIVa-CCXLIVa in FIG.
244(b) is a partitioning member 6560, an electric board 6570, and a back support member 6580 taken along line CCXLIVb-CCXLIVb in FIG. 241. FIG. and a partial cross-sectional view of the acoustic device 6610, and FIG. 245(a) is a partial cross-sectional view of the partition member 6560, the decorative substrate 6570, the back support member 6580, and the acoustic device 6610 taken along line CCXLVa-CCXLVa in FIG. FIG. 245(b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the partition member 6560, the decorative board 6570, the back support member 6580 and the acoustic device 6610 along line CCXLVb-CCXLVb in FIG. 241, and FIG. 246(a) is CCXLVIa in FIG. Fig. 246(b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the partitioning member 6560, the electrical board 6570, the back support member 6580, and the acoustic device 6610 along the -CCXLVIa line; 6570, a partial cross-sectional view of back support member 6580 and acoustic device 6610. FIG.

244(a) to 246(b), the periphery of the flange portion 6582 is shown enlarged. As can be seen from this enlarged view, the upper end of the electrical board 6570 and the flange portion 6
A slight gap is formed with the lower edge of 582 . As a result, even if the back support member 6580 vibrates due to the transmission of vibration of the acoustic device 6610, the vibration of the electrical board 6570 due to the vibration of the back support member 6580 (vibration width) can be suppressed. .

As shown in FIGS. 244(a) and 245(a), the fastening screw inserted through the fastening support portion 6581a of the rear support member 6580 is screwed into the fastening portion 6564 of the partitioning member 6560 with the electrical board 6570 interposed therebetween. By inserting, the partitioning member 6560 and the back support member 6580 are fastened and fixed, but the fastening force is not transmitted to the electrical board 6570 . That is, the electrical board 657
0, the fastening inserting portion 6572 is only aligned with the fastening portion 6564, and the partitioning member 6560 and the back supporting member 6580 are not fixed at the fastening portion.

In addition, while the ribs of the fastening support portion 6581a are in contact with the rear surface of the electrical board 6570, the dividing member 6560 is separated from the electrical board 6570 at the front and rear positions thereof. That is, in this embodiment, since the electrical board 6570 is not sandwiched between the front and rear positions, the electrical board 6570
70 can be displaced in the front-rear direction (for example, tilting displacement).

In addition, the lower edge of the electrical board 6570 is not supported by the rear support member 6580 or the partition member 6560 . This also applies to FIGS. 244(b) to 246(b) described below.

As shown in FIG. 244(b), the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 is inserted through the large-diameter insertion portion 6573 of the electrical board 6570 and the positioning hole 6581b of the back support member 6580. As shown in FIG. Here, the large-diameter insertion portion 6573 and the positioning hole 6581b are formed in an oval shape that can form a gap below the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 . Similarly, the rib of the fastening support portion 6581a is formed in an elliptical shape to the extent that a gap can be formed below the fastening portion 6564 (Fig. 244(a)
)reference). A description will be given of the fact that by forming in this way, the assembly of the dividing member 6560 to the rear support member 6580 is facilitated.

As in the past, the fastening support portion 6 has an inner shape slightly larger than the outer shape of the fastening portion 6564, for example.
When the rib of 581a is formed, it becomes necessary to assemble the partitioning member 6560 with the rear support member 6580 aligned vertically and horizontally.

However, in this embodiment, since the electrical board 6570 is arranged in a non-fixed state between the partition member 6560 and the back support member 6580, the back support member 6580 of the electrical board 6570 is not fixed when the partition member 6560 is assembled. It is also necessary to align the position with respect to, and there is a possibility that the work will be difficult.

Therefore, in this embodiment, as described above, the fastening insertion portion 6572, the large-diameter insertion portion 6573, the ribs of the fastening support portion 6581a, and the positioning holes 6581b are elongated oval shapes (or halved oval shapes). , the assembly can be performed even if the vertical alignment is not accurate.

As an example of an assembly order, first, the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 of the partitioning member 6560 is attached to the electrical board 65 .
The electrical board 6570 is attached to the partition member 6560 so as to be inserted into the large-diameter insertion portion 6573 of 70 . At this time, the arrangement of the electrical board 6570 with respect to the partitioning member 6560 is the large-diameter insertion portion 65
It is not necessary to set it in the longitudinal direction of 73, and any position may be used.

In the present embodiment, the flange portions 6561a to 6561c are formed at positions where they can contact the electrical board 6570, so that when the electrical board 6570 is assembled to the dividing member 6560, the dividing member of the electrical board 6570 is formed. Positional deviation with respect to 6560 is greatly suppressed.

Next, the fastening portion 6564 of the partition member 6560 is connected to the fastening support portion 65 of the rear support member 6580 .
It is inserted inside the rib of 81a. At this time, the arrangement of the fastening portion 6564 with respect to the fastening support portion 6581a does not need to be determined in the longitudinal direction of the rib of the fastening support portion 6581a, and may be at any position. That is, it is sufficient to perform rough positioning (for example, positioning to the extent that the connector 6577 (see FIG. 243) is passed through the wiring hole 6581e (see FIG. 242), or positioning with a sufficiently long allowable width in the vertical direction). It is possible to improve the working efficiency of inserting the 6564 inside the rib of the fastening support portion 6581a.

Next, the partitioning member 6560 is moved with respect to the rear support member 6580 in the longitudinal direction (vertical direction) of the rib of the fastening support portion 6581a, and the fastening portion 6564 and the through hole of the fastening support portion 6581a are aligned. Then, the fastening screw is screwed in (see FIG. 244(a)).

In this state, even if the electrical board 5670 is misaligned, the dividing member 6560 can be lowered by its own weight to a position where the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 supports the large-diameter insertion portion 6573 (see FIG. 244(b)). and aligned with the back support member 6580 .

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the electrical board 6570 is arranged in a non-fixed manner between the partitioning member 6560 and the back support member. By forming the fastening insertion portion 6572, the large-diameter insertion portion 6573, the ribs of the fastening support portion 6581a, and the positioning hole 6581b in a vertically elongated oval shape (or a shape that is half an oval shape) in spite of the assembly mode, , the assembly efficiency can be improved. In addition, even if the illumination board 5670 is displaced, it is configured to be corrected to its original position by its own weight.
It is possible to prevent a long-term decrease in the performance effect of the light emission performance during the game due to the positional deviation of the illumination board 5670 .

The enlarged hole 6562a will be described with reference to FIG. 245(b). central light hole 6562
are arranged in an inverted T shape (four places, see FIG. 241) in the left and right central part, and an enlarged hole 6562a arranged in a substantially gourd shape (substantially pot shape) outside thereof (eight places). , see FIG. 241) and a direct entry hole 6562b. The direct entry hole 6562b will be described later with reference to FIG.

The enlarged hole 6562a is a long rectangular through-hole through which the light emitted from the first lighting unit 6574 passes, and the portion forming the outer edge is raised to the front side, and the inner wall is the front side (the side away from the light source). It is formed so as to incline so that the distance between the two faces widens as it goes to the left.

Thereby, the irradiation width of the light emitted from the first lighting section 6574 can be defined. That is, it is possible to change how the light is shown to the player by the design aspect of the enlarged hole 6562a (inclination angle of the inner wall, raised height, etc.).

In this embodiment, the front end of the enlarged hole 6562a raised to the front side is raised to a position where it abuts on the closed portion 6521c of the transparent tubular member 6521 (see FIG. 263). This allows the light that has passed through the enlarged hole 6562a to enter the transparent cylindrical member 6521 without leaking.

FIG. 246(a) illustrates the screw insertion portion 6581c, and FIG. 246(b) illustrates the positioning long hole 6581d. The screw insertion portion 6581c and the long positioning hole 6581d are
As described above, the front side units 6520 to 6550 are assembled to the rear side units 6560 to 6580 and fastened and fixed along the inclined direction.

Front side units 6520 to 6520-6 are inserted along the screw insertion portion 6581c and the long positioning hole 6581d.
Since 550 is assembled, the degree of freedom in arranging the constituent members can be improved compared to the case of assembling in the front-rear direction.

For example, as shown in FIG. 246(a), the electrical board 6570 can be positioned to cover the area on the front side of the screw insertion portion 6581c, so the size of the electrical board 6570 can be secured. . On the other hand, since the area below the rear side of the front units 6520 to 6550 can be widely used, the size of the rear box portion 6584 and the acoustic device 6610 to be accommodated can be secured.

In particular, in this embodiment, the screw insertion portions 6581c and the long positioning holes 6581d on the right and left outer sides where the diaphragm 6611 of the speaker is arranged are formed so as to be inclined downward toward the front side, so that the diaphragm 6611 can be made large. can be formed (FIGS. 235 and 24
6).

As shown in FIGS. 246(a) and 246(b), the upper edge of the screw insertion portion 6581c and the lower edge of the long positioning hole 6581d are inclined downward toward the front side, while the upper edge is inclined forward and backward. The reason why it is formed along (not inclined) is that the drawing direction of the resin mold used when manufacturing the back support member 6580 is the front-rear direction.

In other words, in order to simply construct the resin mold (consisting of two resin molds separated in the front-rear direction), the screw insertion portion 6581c and the long positioning hole 6581d are replaced with the rear support member 658.
It is necessary to have a shape that can be formed in the same drawing direction as the fastening support portion 6581a, the fitting concave portion 6583a, and the like, which are formed at 0. In this embodiment, the pulling direction is the fastening support portion 6581a.
and the screw insertion portion 658
1c and the long positioning hole 6581d are formed in a distorted shape (a shape that changes in the hole formation direction (depth direction)).

In particular, the screw insertion portion 6581c is a through-hole through which a fastening screw to be screwed into the back-side fastening portion 6555 (see FIG. 240) is inserted, and is a portion that receives the load that occurs due to fastening and fixing. As for the shape of the screw insertion portion 6581c, the thickness of the upper edge portion of the portion to which the load accompanying fastening is applied is
Since the hole is made thinner toward the center, the load is likely to be unbalanced between the upper edge and the rest of the hole, and there is a risk that the fastening screw may become loose depending on the state of use and the number of years of use.

In order to prevent the tightening screws from loosening, tightening screws with a large head diameter may be used.
The difference in quality required for fastening screws used in other fastening locations results in high costs. In other words, if a fastening screw with a large head diameter is used only at the problematic fastening point, the fastening screw cannot be used as a common component, resulting in high costs. , the material required for the fastening screw is bulky, resulting in high cost in terms of material cost.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the front wall 6620 of the acoustic device 6610, which is opposed to the head of the fastening screw inserted through the screw insertion portion 6581c, is formed in the front wall 6620 in a recessed shape ( A retaining plate portion 6621 formed as a plate upper portion parallel to the plate portion in which the screw insertion portion 6581c is formed is provided.

The retaining plate portion 6621 can secure a region where the head of the fastening screw can be arranged between the back support member 6580 and the retaining plate portion 6621 . In addition, since the retaining plate portion 6621 is arranged in the direction in which the head of the fastening screw is displaced when the fastening screw is loosened, it restricts further advancement of the fastening screw and prevents the fastening screw from coming off. can be prevented.

The retainer plate portion 6621 is formed with a dimension that leaves a slight gap from the head of the screw when the fastening screw is not loosened. Therefore, it is possible to avoid transmitting the vibration of the acoustic device 6610 through the head of the fastening screw.

On the other hand, when the fastening screw is loosened, the movement of the fastening screw is restricted by the abutment, so that the gap between the retainer plate portion 6621 and the head of the fastening screw is filled. At this time, the sound device 66
10, the vibration of the acoustic device 6610 can be transmitted to the front unit 6520-6550 via the head of the fastening screw.

In addition, the front wall 6620 has a fastening support portion 6581a (see FIG. 207) in the assembled state (see FIG.
FIG. 242) includes a plurality of contact avoidance recesses 6622 recessed at the back positions of the through holes.
The contact avoiding concave portion 6622 is inserted into the fastening support portion 6581a and the fastening portion 6564 (Fig. 243) is inserted.
See), it is recessed to the extent that contact with the head of the fastening screw to be screwed in can be avoided (a dimension that creates a slight gap between the head and the head).

This can prevent the vibration of the acoustic device 6610 from being transmitted to the partition member 6560 via the fastening screw. In addition, since the axial direction of the through hole of the fastening support portion 6581a is the front-rear direction, which is the same as the direction in which the resin mold is pulled out, the thickness of the plate portion to which the fastening force of the fastening screw is applied is constant in the direction of the hole. A fastening force can be generated. Therefore, the fastening support portion 65
Although it is unlikely that the fastening screw inserted through the 81a is loosened, if the fastening screw is loosened, the contact avoiding recessed portion 6622 performs the same function as the retaining plate portion 6621 described above.
can be generated in

That is, when the fastening screw is loosened, the progress of the fastening screw is restricted by the abutment, so that the gap between the contact avoiding concave portion 6622 and the head of the fastening screw is filled. At this time, the sound device 66
10, the vibration of the acoustic device 6610 can be transmitted to the front unit 6520-6550 via the head of the fastening screw.

As described above, it is possible to grasp the transmission of vibration caused by contact between the head of the fastening screw and the retaining plate portion 6621 or the contact avoiding concave portion 6622 due to the loosening of the fastening screw. It is possible to notice the occurrence of loosening, and it is possible to easily avoid a situation in which the fastening screw is left loose.

For example, transmission of vibration may be configured to generate abnormal noise or detect vibration.

As described with reference to FIGS. 244(a) to 246(b), in this embodiment, the illumination board 65
70 is positioned adjacent to the back support member 6580 while not being fixed to the back support member 6580 . As a result, the acoustic device 6610 and the electrical decoration board 6570 can be placed close to each other with the back support member 6580 interposed therebetween, while the vibration of the back support member 6580 caused by the vibration of the acoustic device 6610 is transmitted to the electrical decoration board 6570 . It is possible to avoid breaking the substrate 6570 .

Here, the partitioning member 6560 is the production part of the decorative board 6570 (that is, the lighting part 6574 to
6576) are connected to the back support member 6580, the area of the connecting portion between the partition member 6560 and the back support member 6580 is narrowed for the purpose of securing a large proportion of the performance portion on the surface of the electrical decoration board 6570. easy to get

As a result, there is a tendency for the partition member 6560 to be insufficiently fixed. If the 6560 vibrates, there is a risk that the presentation effect will be poor, the fastening part will loosen, or the partitioning member 6560 itself will be damaged.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, vibration of the partitioning member 6560 is suppressed by fixing the partitioning member 6560 from another direction. This will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 247 is a schematic side view of the presentation effect device 6500. FIG. In FIG. 247, the presentation effect device 65
00, the fastening locations, the fastening directions, and the fastening directions are schematically illustrated. That is, in FIG. 247, the fastening screw is indicated by a T, the horizontal line of the T indicates the head of the fastening screw,
A vertical line extending from the center of the horizontal line indicates the screw portion of the fastening screw.

As shown in FIG. 247, the presentation device 6500 includes front units 6520 to 6550 surrounding the front and bottom surfaces of the rear units 6560 to 6580.
. .

This avoids reinforcing the rigidity of the upper lid member 6510 . In this embodiment, since the upper lid member 6510 is formed in a thin plate shape (see FIG. 238), when the vibration of the acoustic device 6610 is transmitted through the back support member 6580, the upper lid member 6510 moves in the thickness direction ( It is easy to displace (deform) in the vertical direction.

Along with this displacement (deformation), the front-rear width of the upper lid member 6510 is shortened. For example, when the upper lid member 6510 is deformed so as to be curved with respect to the front-rear center thereof, the front-rear interval between the through-holes 6512 that are formed away from each other in the front-rear direction is shortened. As a result, a load that displaces the partitioning unit 6540 to the rear side is generated, and a compressive load in the front-rear direction can be applied to the partitioning member 6560 .

That is, since the partitioning member 6560 can be sandwiched between the rear support member 6580 and the partitioning unit 6540 and a load can be applied, even if the partitioning member 6560 vibrates due to the vibration of the acoustic device 6610, the vibration can be suppressed. can be done.

Here, even if the front-rear width of the upper lid member 6510 is shortened, the partition unit 6540
When the lower side of the partition member 6560 is displaced to the front side (displaced to the side away from the partition member 6560), the load applied from the partition unit 6540 to the partition member 6560 tends to be insufficient, and the partition member 656
There is a possibility that the effect of suppressing the vibration of 0 will be insufficient.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the displacement of the lower end of the partitioning unit 6540 in the front-rear direction is restricted by the guided unit 6550, it is possible to prevent the lower side of the partitioning unit 6540 from being displaced to the front side. As a result, the partitioning member 656 from the partitioning unit 6540
0 can be sufficiently ensured.

At this time, since the fastening screw is fastened and fixed in the direction along the plate surface of the extension plate portion 6552 at the end portion of the guided unit 6550 (see FIG. 254(a)), the acoustic device 6610 via the back support member 6580 can be set along the plate surface of the extended plate portion 6552 .

As a result, the curved deformation of the guided unit 6550 can be suppressed, and the front and rear fastening points can be suppressed from moving in the front-rear direction. Therefore, the guided unit 6550
Even when vibration is transmitted to the partition unit 6540, the function of suppressing the displacement of the lower end of the partition unit 6540 in the front-rear direction can be sufficiently ensured.

As shown in FIG. 247, by devising the fastening point, the acoustic device 66 that is likely to vibrate
10 in a non-fixed state, the electrical board 6570 is prevented from being damaged, and the electrical board 6570 is attached to the acoustic device 6610 (or the back support member 6580).
), the vibration of the partition member 6560 can be suppressed by transmitting the vibration to the partition member 6560 which prevents the partition member 6560 from being separated from the partition member 6560 by more than the allowable amount.

That is, it is possible to improve the shape maintenance performance of the presentation device 6500 while improving the durability of the electrical decoration board 6570 arranged close to the acoustic device 6610 .

One purpose of setting the fastening direction of the fastening screw in this embodiment is to
10 displacements can be supported. That is, the upper lid member 6510 has a fastening portion 6513
The back side is fixed by , and is extended in the front and rear in the form of a thin plate.

For example, when a downward load is applied to the front end of the upper lid member 6510, the shape of the upper lid member 6510 causes the center of the radius of curvature to be arranged below the upper lid member 6510 with the back side end as the starting point. can be bent and displaced at In this case, the upper cover member 6510 itself is subjected to a tensile load in the front-rear direction, while the other members arranged below it are subjected to a compressive load.

Since the direction of this compressive load is along the surface of the upper lid member 6510, it is along the front-rear direction on the back side, which is the base end side, but as the amount of displacement increases (toward the front side), It follows the direction of downward inclination toward the front side.

In the present embodiment, the fastening direction of the fastening screw inserted through the insertion hole 6547b of the insertion plate portion 6547 is the direction inclined downward toward the front side with respect to the front-rear direction. The direction of the compressive load caused by the displacement of the member 6510 can be brought closer.

As a result, in addition to being able to generate a sufficient resistance to the compressive load at the fastening position, the component of the compressive load applied in the direction of shearing the fastening screw (the direction perpendicular to the fastening direction) is reduced, so the fastening screw breaks. can be suppressed.

A fastening screw whose fastening direction is inclined downward toward the front side is the plate guide unit 6.
550, the plate guide unit 6550 is arranged close to the lower side and the back side of the electrical board 6570 (see the screw insertion portion 6581c and the like in FIG. 246(a)). In this embodiment, the electrical board 6570 is arranged in a non-fixed manner and is easily displaced. That is, even if the electrical board 6570 is displaced, excessive displacement of the electrical board 6570 can be regulated by enabling contact with the plate guide unit 6550 when the amount of displacement becomes excessive.

In addition, since the plate guide unit 6550 is arranged close to the back side of the electrical board 6570 (the side on which the acoustic device 6610 is arranged), the displacement of the electrical board 6570 to the back side can be particularly suppressed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the electrical board 6570 from approaching the acoustic device 6610 as a vibration source.

In this embodiment, the fastening parts (fastening support part 6581a, insertion hole 6565a, etc.) whose fastening direction is along the front-rear direction are gathered on the left-right center side (see FIG. 242), and the fastening direction is downward toward the front side. The fastening portion (screw insertion portion 6581c, insertion plate portion 6547, etc.) along the direction of inclination is
They are clustered on the left and right outer sides (see Figures 242 and 256) and they are not arranged in close proximity.

As a result, it is possible to suppress the influence of deformation (displacement) that occurs in one fastening portion on the other fastening portion. That is, even if loosening occurs in the fastening portion along the front-rear direction and displacement in the front-rear direction occurs, the portion affected by the loosening can be limited to the fastening portion along the front-rear direction. It is possible to avoid the occurrence of a load in a direction (along the front-rear direction) that is inclined with respect to the fastening direction on the fastening portion along the direction. As a result, loosening of the screws can be suppressed.

In addition, by fixing the longitudinally long portion of the left-right central side with a fastening portion whose fastening direction is along the front-rear direction, the resistance force of the effect device 6500 against the load in the downward direction can be improved.

On the other hand, it is thought that a fastening portion whose fastening direction is inclined downward toward the front side tends to have lower resistance to a load in the downward direction than a fastening portion whose fastening direction is along the front-rear direction. In this embodiment, the resistance to the load in the push-down direction is reduced by arranging the fastening portions along the direction in which the fastening direction inclines downward toward the front side on the left and right outer sides that are short along the front-rear direction. While minimizing the influence of this, it is possible to secure an arrangement area for the electrical board 6570 and the acoustic device 6610 .

FIG. 248 is a cross-sectional view of the rear units 6560-6580 along line CCXLVIII-CCXLVIII in FIG. 241(a). In addition, a specific part is expanded and illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 248, the electrical board 6570 has a large-diameter insertion portion 6573 that is connected to a partition member 6560 .
abuts on the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 of the left-right direction. In addition, while the front and rear surfaces are in contact with the left and right side portions of the partitioning member 6560 and the left and right side portions of the back support member 6580, the contact positions are formed so as not to coincide with each other.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to improve the durability of the electrical board 6570 and adjust the susceptibility to displacement. They will be explained in order below. First, the improvement in durability of the electrical board 6570 will be described.

Here, if the front and rear surfaces of the electrical board 6570 are in contact with the partitioning member 6560 and the rear support member 6580 at the same positions, for some reason (error during resin molding, poor fastening, etc.), the partitioning may occur. When the distance between the contact portions of the member 6560 and the back support member 6580 becomes shorter than the plate thickness of the electrical board 6570, a compressive force is applied to the electrical board 6570. There is a risk that the decorative substrate 6570 will break.

In addition, even if no compressive force is applied to the electrical board 6570 during assembly, the back support member 6580 vibrates due to the vibration of the acoustic device 6610 during movement, causing a load (for example, a compressive load). may be applied, and there is a risk that the electrical board 6570 may break due to this load.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the front and rear surfaces of the electrical board 6570 do not come into contact with the dividing member 6560 and the rear support member 6580 at the front and rear positions (there are places where they come into contact at different positions). Even if a load is applied to the electrical board 6570 in the manner described above, the load is not a load that compresses the electrical board 6570 but a load that bends the electrical board 6570 .
Therefore, the electric decoration board 6570 is flexurally deformed, so that the possibility of the electric decoration board 6570 cracking can be reduced.

Next, adjustment of the ease of displacement of the electrical board 6570 will be described. Decorative board 6570
The fastening portion 6564 (see FIG. 243) and the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 of the partitioning member 6560 are inserted to prevent misalignment. See Figure 243).

In addition, since the electrical board 6570 abuts (contacts) the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 in the lateral direction, the contact resistance between the electrical board 6570 and the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 is ensured. Since the large-diameter cylindrical portion 65656 is formed to have a diameter larger than that of the fastening portion 6564, the contact area is naturally increased, and sufficient frictional resistance can be ensured.

Therefore, it is possible to easily suppress the occurrence of displacement of the electrical board 6570 in the vicinity of the left-right central portion of the electrical board 6570 . Therefore, even when the surrounding members vibrate due to the vibration of the acoustic device 6610, the direction of the light emitted from the first lighting section 6574 of the electrical board 6570 can be easily maintained.

On the other hand, on the left and right sides (especially the lower side) of the electrical board 6570, neither the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 nor the fastening portion 6564 are arranged, and no compressive load is generated from the front and back. Displacement can be easily generated compared to the left and right central portions of the 6570.

Therefore, when the surrounding members vibrate due to the vibration of the acoustic device 6610, the electrical board 65
The direction of light emitted from the second lighting unit 6575 and the third lighting unit 6576 of 70 can be easily changed.

In this embodiment, since the left and right acoustic devices 6610 are arranged as a pair, each acoustic device 66
The vibration mode of the electrical board 6570 changes based on the ten vibration modes. That is, the case where the sound is output only from the right acoustic device 6610 and the right side of the illumination board 6570 is preferentially vibrated, and the case where the sound is output only from the left acoustic device 6610 and the left side of the illumination board 6570 is preferentially vibrated. When the sound is output from both the left and right acoustic devices 6610, the illumination board 6
The electrical board 6570 can be vibrated in at least three different vibration modes, including the case of vibrating both the left and right sides of the electric board 6570 .

Next, front side units 6520 to 6550 will be described. FIG. 249 is an exploded front perspective view of front units 6520-6550, and FIG. 250 is front units 6520-6.
550 is an exploded rear perspective view of 550. FIG. In addition, in FIGS. 249 and 250, illustration of reference numerals for detailed configurations is omitted in order to facilitate understanding.

249 and 250, an optical transmission unit 6520 that transmits light incident from the first lighting section 6574 of the electrical board 6570 to the front side, and an outer frame that surrounds the optical transmission unit 6520 and forms an outer frame. The figure shows a disassembled state of the member 6530, the partitioning unit 6540 that abuts on the partitioning member 6560 in the front and rear to similarly partition the light, and the guided unit 6550 that is guided on the upper surface of the projecting portion 6584a of the back support member 6580. be.

When performing light emission through the front units 6520 to 6550, the light transmission unit 6520
receives light from the first lighting section 6574 , the partitioning unit 6540 receives light from the second lighting section 6575 , and the guided unit 6550 receives light from the third lighting section 6576 . Next, the partitioning unit 6540 and guided unit 6550 will be described in detail.

251(a) is a front view of the partitioning unit 6540 and the guided unit 6550, FIG. 251(b) is a rear view of the partitioning unit 6540 and the guided unit 6550, and FIG. 252(b) is a rear view of the partitioning unit 6540; FIG. 253(a) is a front view of the plate guide unit 6550; FIG. 253(b) is a plate guide 6550 is a rear view of unit 6550. FIG.

254(a) is a cross-sectional view of the partitioning unit 6540 and the guided unit 6550 taken along line CCLIVa-CCLIVa in FIG. 251(b), and FIG.
254(c) is a cross-sectional view of the partitioning unit 6540 and the guided unit 6550 taken along the line CCLIVb-CCLIVb of FIG. 251(b); FIG.
FIG. 65 is a cross-sectional view of the partitioning unit 6540 and the guided unit 6550 taken along line IVc.

255 is an exploded front perspective view of the compartment unit 6540 and the guided unit 6550, and FIG. 256 is an exploded rear perspective view of the compartment unit 6540 and the guided unit 6550. FIG.

The division unit 6540 includes a milky-white member 6541 formed of a milky-white light-transmitting resin material and having a substantially inverted triangular shape when viewed from the front, and an optical transmission unit 6520 formed through the central portion of the milky-white member 6541 in the front-rear direction. Through hole 65 formed so that the rear part can be inserted
42, a pair of fastening portions 6543, which are portions projecting inward from the through-holes 6542 and to which the optical transmission unit 6520 is fastened and fixed, and fastening screws for fastening and fixing the outer frame member 6530 are inserted so as to be inserted. a pair of post-guide fastening portions 6545 extending cylindrically to the rear side and to which fastening screws passing through the insertion holes 6565a of the partitioning member 6560 are fastened; A pair of box-shaped light-receiving portions 6 formed in a box-like shape opened to the rear side through
546, and a plate-shaped portion extending downward from the lower edge of the box-shaped light receiving portion 6546, through which fastening screws for fastening and fixing the division unit 6540 to the plate guide unit 6550 are inserted so as to be inserted. A plurality of insertion plate portions 6547 in which insertion holes 6547b are formed, and a milky-white member 6541 are formed from a colorless and transparent light-transmitting resin material so as to cover the front side of the box-shaped light receiving portion 6546.
and a transparent covering member 6548 that is fitted and supported in the .

The partition unit 6540 has a front side edge formed in a curved shape that bulges to the front side when viewed from above, similarly to the upper lid member 6510, is formed in a substantially inverted triangle shape when viewed from the front, and is centered on the rear side when viewed from the side. 254(a)).

The opalescent member 6541 has a pair of fastening portions 6541a on its upper surface to which fastening screws inserted through the insertion holes 6512 (see FIG. 237) of the upper lid member 6510 are fastened. This fastening portion 6541
a and the upper lid member 6510 are fastened and fixed.

The front side of the through-hole 6542 is inclined downward toward the back side corresponding to the inclination of the contact plate portion 6525 (see FIG. 258(b)) of the optical transmission unit 6520, which will be described later. As a result, the front end portion of the through hole 6542 and the contact plate portion 6525 (see FIG. 258(b)) can be brought into contact with each other, thereby preventing the attitude of the optical transmission unit 6520 from changing. can be done.

The fastening portion 6543 is formed with the fastening hole facing the front side. That is, the fastening screw is screwed in from the front side. Further, the post-guidance fastening portion 6545 is formed with the fastening hole directed toward the back side. That is, the fastening screw is screwed in from the rear side.

The box-shaped light receiving portion 6546 is a portion arranged to face the second illumination portion 6575 (see FIG. 241(b)) of the electrical board 6570. teeth,
A jagged decoration with a short lateral width is formed. This jagged shape is formed by a concavo-convex shape in which ridges having a triangular cross section are densely aligned.

This shape can scatter (diffuse) the light incident from the back side, so that the box-shaped light receiving section 6546 and the transparent covering member 6548 covering the front side thereof can emit light uniformly when viewed from the front.

Note that this jagged shape is described as a process performed on the surface irradiated with light, and the shape is not limited at all. For example, shape processing in which dot shapes are densely formed, or wavy striped shape processing may be used.

The insertion plate portion 6547 includes a U-shaped wall portion 6547a formed in a U-shape with an upper side opened in a rear view, an insertion hole 6547b drilled in the front-rear direction, and a lower side of the insertion hole 6547b. and a protruding rib 6547c protruding toward the front side in a semi-elliptical shape surrounding the .

By aligning the U-shaped wall portion 6547 a with the front side fastening portion 6554 of the guided unit 6550 , the partitioning unit 6540 can be easily assembled to the guided unit 6550 .

The insertion plate portion 6547 is formed with an insertion hole through which a fastening screw to be screwed into the threaded portion 6554a (see FIG. 256) is inserted, and is a portion that receives the load that occurs during fastening and fixing. Insertion plate portion 6
The shape of the insertion hole formed in 547 is such that the thickness of the upper edge portion of the portion to which the load associated with fastening is applied in relation to the drawing direction of the resin mold (the front-rear direction in this embodiment) is the center of the hole. 254(b)).

In this case, load imbalance is likely to occur between the upper edge and the rest, so the compartment unit 6540
and the plate guide unit 6550, there is a risk that the tightening screw may become loose if small misalignments occur repeatedly.

In order to prevent the tightening screws from loosening, tightening screws with a large head diameter may be used.
The difference in quality required for fastening screws used in other fastening locations results in high costs. In other words, if a fastening screw with a large head diameter is used only at the problematic fastening point, the fastening screw cannot be used as a common component, resulting in high costs. , the material required for the fastening screw is bulky, resulting in high cost in terms of material cost.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the plate guide unit 6550 for the partition unit 6540
It is configured to prevent the positional deviation of at a plurality of locations. Namely, firstly, the plate guide unit 6
The downward displacement of the plate guide unit 6550 can be prevented by supporting the threaded portion 6554a of the plate guide unit 6550 with the projecting rib 6547c of the partition unit 6540 (see FIGS. 247 and 254(b)).

Secondly, the upper end of the plate guide unit 6550 on the front side is attached to the milky-white member 6541 by the engagement protrusion 6 .
It is configured to be engaged in the front-rear direction with the rear-side lower end portion of the transparent covering member 6548 that is locked at 548b (see FIG. 254(b)). As a result, the partition unit 6 of the plate guide unit 6550
Displacement to the front side with respect to 540 can be prevented.

Thirdly, the lower end of the insertion plate portion 6547 is the main body resin member 655 of the plate guide unit 6550 .
1 (see FIG. 254(b)). Thereby, upward displacement of the plate guide unit 6550 with respect to the partition unit 6540 can be prevented.

The partitioning unit 6 of the plate guide unit 6550 is mainly due to the first to third contact structures.
Since the displacement with respect to 540 can be suppressed, it is possible to suppress loosening of the fastening screw screwed into the screw-in portion 6554a.

The transparent covering member 6548 is formed in a substantially V shape when viewed from the front. A plurality of locking projections 6548b projecting to the side in a plate shape are provided. The left and right central portions of the box-shaped light receiving portion 6546 are notched from the back side to the front side, and the lower edge plate-shaped portion 6548a enters so as to fill this gap.

On the upper surface of the lower edge plate-shaped portion 6548a, a jagged decoration is formed in the same manner as the box-shaped light receiving portion 6546. As shown in FIG. As a result, even if the central portion of the box-shaped light receiving portion 6546 is designed to be notched, the notched portion can be compensated for by the ornamental shape of the lower edge plate-shaped portion 6548a.
It is possible to emit light uniformly over the horizontal direction of 48 .

Note that this jagged shape is described as a process performed on the surface irradiated with light, and the shape is not limited at all. For example, shape processing in which dot shapes are densely formed, or wavy striped shape processing may be used.

Here, in this embodiment, as will be described later, the lower bottom surface of the guided unit 6550 is formed as an inclined surface that slopes upward toward the rear side (see FIG. 254(c)), and the lower edge plate-shaped portion In order to form the lower edge plate portion 6548a at the lower bottom surface of the guided unit 6550 and the plane position, the lower edge plate-like portion 6548a is formed as an inclined surface that rises and inclines toward the rear side, like the lower bottom surface of the guided unit 6550. .

If an attempt is made to form this inclined surface with the box-shaped light receiving portion 6546, the extraction direction of the mold for forming the box-shaped light receiving portion 6546 becomes complicated. That is, the extraction direction is in the front-rear direction near the through hole 6542, while in the vicinity of the lower edge of the box-shaped light-receiving part 6546, the direction is upwardly inclined toward the back side. Moreover, the manufacturing process may become complicated.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the inclined surface is not formed by the milky-white member 6541, but formed by a transparent covering member 6548 instead (see FIG. 254(c)). Furthermore, in the assembled state, a white partitioning member 6560 is arranged opposite to the back side of the lower edge plate-like portion 6548a of the transparent covering member 6548 that constitutes the inclined surface. can be visually recognized with a uniform color (white).

As a result, the extraction direction of the molding die for the milky-white member 6541 is unified in the front-rear direction, and the shape of the transparent covering member 6548 that covers the front side of the milky-white member 6541 is inclined to the side that interferes in the front-rear extraction direction. The transparent covering member 654 has a shape (a shape in which the lower edge plate-like portion 6548a of the transparent covering member 6548 is inclined in a direction in which it enters the compartment unit 6540 in a front view).
The light emission of 8 can be visually recognized by the player in a uniform light emission mode.

In other words, the division unit 6540 has a shape that tapers toward the back side (the space between the top and bottom narrows), and the back portion of the milky-white member 6541 and the transparent covering member 65 that are adjacent to each other.
Since the same decorative shape (cut) can be continuously applied to the upper surface portion of the lower edge plate-shaped portion 6548a of 48 (see the enlarged view of FIG. 240), it is possible to perform a uniform light emission effect. .

In this case, it is difficult to set the direction in which the transparent covering member 6548 is removed from the mold in the front-rear direction. Therefore, by setting the direction along the lower edge plate-shaped portion 6548a (the upwardly inclined direction) as the extraction direction of the mold, a manufacturing process in which resin is molded with a mold whose extraction direction is the front-rear direction (one direction). The transparent covering member 6548 can be manufactured in the same manufacturing process.

Therefore, the milky-white member 6541 and the transparent covering member 6548 can be easily manufactured, and the portion visible through the transparent covering member 6548 can be uniformly illuminated.

The latching protrusion 6548b is a portion latched to the upper edge of the bulging portion toward the front side at a position corresponding to the box-shaped light receiving portion 6546 of the milky white member 6541 . That is, when the transparent covering member 6548 is attached to the milky-white member 6541 , the locking protrusion 6548 b is locked to the milky-white member 6541 .

The guided unit 6550 is formed of a colored and opaque resin material in a substantially V-shape when viewed from the front, and includes a main body resin member 6551 guided along the upper surface of the projecting portion 6584a of the back support member 6580.
, an extension plate portion 6552 extending in a plate shape toward the back side along the lower edge of the left-right central portion of the main body resin member 6551, and the back side end portion of the extension plate portion 6552 is perforated. A pair of left and right exhaust pressure passage holes 6553 and partitioning units 6 arranged along the left and right upper edges of the main body resin member 6551 .
A plurality of front side fastening portions 6554 arranged opposite to the insertion plate portion 6547 of the 540 and to which fastening screws are fastened and fixed, and rear supporting members 6580 arranged along the left and right lower edges of the main body resin member 6551.
A plurality of rear side fastening portions 6555 to which the fastening screws passing through the screw insertion portion 6581c (see FIG. 241(a)) are fastened and fixed, and a rib-like protrusion between the rear side fastening portions 6555 and the rear support member A plurality of insertion ribs 6556 to be inserted into the long positioning holes 6581d (see FIG. 241(a)) of the 6580, and a plurality of through holes 6 drilled in the front-rear direction in the left and right arms.
557 and a pair of light receiving members 6558 formed of a colorless and transparent light-transmissive resin material and fitted and fixed in the plurality of through holes 6557 .

The direction in which the guided unit 6550 is guided along the upper surface of the protruding portion 6584a of the back support member 6580 is the mold removal direction. That is, each structural member is formed along a direction of inclination that slopes upward toward the rear side or along a direction perpendicular to the direction of inclination.

The exhaust pressure passage hole 6553 is formed at a position facing the exhaust pressure transmission hole 6612 (see FIG. 235) of the acoustic device 6610 . That is, the sound output through the exhaust pressure transmission hole 6612 reaches the player after passing through the exhaust pressure transmission hole 6553 .

Exhaust pressure passage hole 6553 has a range facing exhaust pressure transmission hole 6612 (see FIG. 235),
Instead of being formed as a single large hole, it is formed in a plurality of small hole shapes (formed in subdivided areas). As a result, it is possible to suppress fraudulent acts of entering a thin wire material such as a piano wire.

In addition, the exhaust pressure passage hole 6553 is formed so that the width of the hole becomes narrower toward the end of the hole and toward the rear side. As a result, the holes can be clogged with fine wires,
After entering the exhaust pressure passage hole 6553, the movement resistance of the fine wire can be increased when the fine wire is further advanced further or when a load is applied by hooking on a specific member. This will
Since the time required for fraud can be extended, it is possible to suppress fraud.

The front-side fastening portion 6554 includes a screw-in portion 6554a to which a fastening screw is fastened, and a screw-in portion 6554a thereof.
A positioning wall portion 6554b formed like a pair of walls on the left and right sides of 54a. The positioning wall portions 6554b are arranged to face each other at an interval slightly longer than the width of the U-shaped wall portion 6547a. Therefore, by inserting the U-shaped wall portion 6547a into the positioning wall portion 6554b, the division unit 6540 and the guided unit 6550 can be aligned.

The light receiving member 6558 is a portion guided along the upper surface of the lower edge of the main body resin member 6551 (along the direction inclined with respect to the front-rear direction), and has an L-shaped cross section perpendicular to the longitudinal direction. and a plurality of rear box-shaped portions 6558 which are formed in a box-like shape with a bulging front side of the guided portion 6558a and an open rear side and are formed so as to be able to be inserted into the through-holes 6557.
b and the center side end portion of the guided portion 6558a (the end portion on the side where the pair of light receiving members 6558 face each other)
and an upper edge extending portion 6558c extending in a plate shape toward the back side along the upper edge of the .

The light-receiving member 6558 is a third illumination portion 6576 of the electrical board 6570 (see FIG. 241(b)).
It is a member that receives light emitted from. The inner surface of the rear box-shaped portion 6558b is formed with the above-described decorative jagged shape. As a result, light can be refracted many times inside the rear box-shaped portion 6558b, so the number of LEDs corresponding to the through holes 6557 is small (
In FIG. 241(b), even in the case of 1 or 2), the entire rear box-shaped portion 6558b can be visually recognized as uniform light. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the number of LEDs is small (the feeling of a point light source can be diminished).

In addition, as described above, the light receiving member 6558 is attached in a posture that is inclined with respect to the front-rear direction (a posture that is inclined so that the traveling direction of light is aligned with the mounting direction of the plate guide unit 6550 (the light receiving surface is inclined toward the plate guide unit 6550). installed in an orientation that intersects the installation direction of the
Therefore, the light emitted in the front-rear direction from the LEDs arranged in the third illumination portion 6576 of the electrical board 6570 on the back side of the light-receiving member 6558 is refracted when passing through the light-receiving member 6558, and the light-receiving member 6558 It can be advanced in a direction that inclines obliquely downward toward the front side.

Note that this jagged shape is described as a process performed on the surface irradiated with light, and the shape is not limited at all. For example, shape processing in which dot shapes are densely formed, or wavy striped shape processing may be used.

The rear box-shaped portion 6558b is formed so that the one arranged on the left and right outer side has a shorter bulging length toward the front side than the one arranged on the left and right inner side. As a result, the rear box-shaped portion 6
The front face of 558b is the division unit 6540 and the guided unit 65 connected below it.
It can be formed along the curved shape of the front side edge of 50 .

The upper edge extending portion 6558c is a portion for facilitating assembly of the guided unit 6550 and the dividing member 6560. As shown in FIG. A main body resin member 6551 of the guided unit 6550 arranged to face the partitioning member 6560 is formed in a planar shape particularly at the central extended plate portion 6552, and since there is no partition, alignment with the partitioning member 6560 is required. hard to go In contrast, in this embodiment, the upper edge extension 6558c functions as a partition that partitions the area above the extension plate 6552, so that the partitioning member 6560 can be easily aligned.

Returning to FIG. 249, description will be made. In the description so far, the second lighting units 6575 arranged on the left and right
And the portion that receives the light emitted from the third illumination section 6576 has been described. The optical transmission unit 6520, which is the part that receives the light emitted from the first illumination section 6574, will be described below.

257(a) is a front view of the optical transmission unit 6520 and the outer frame member 6530, FIG. 257(b) is a rear view of the optical transmission unit 6520 and the outer frame member 6530, and FIG.
8(a) is an exploded front perspective view of the optical transmission unit 6520 and the outer frame member 6530, and FIG. 258(b) is an exploded rear perspective view of the optical transmission unit 6520 and the outer frame member 6530. FIG.

The outer frame member 6530 is a member formed of a colored (orange in this embodiment) light-impermeable resin material, and includes a main body portion 6531 formed in a substantially inverted triangular shape when viewed from the front, and a main body portion 653 thereof.
an opening 6532 drilled in the front-rear direction in a substantially gourd shape (substantially pot shape) in the central part of 1;
a protruding rib 6533 protruding along the lower edge of the main body portion 6531 and protruding on the back side in a rib shape;
It mainly includes a plurality of fastening portions 6534 which are disposed at positions corresponding to the insertion holes 6544 (see FIG. 254) of the partition unit 6540 and formed so that fastening screws inserted through the insertion holes 6544 can be screwed.

Since the main body portion 6531 of the outer frame member 6530 is opaque to light, the opening portion 6532 is the only portion of the outer frame member 6530 that transmits light. The shape of this opening 6532 is the first
It corresponds to the arrangement pattern of the lighting section 6574 . In other words, the edge of the opening 6532 is formed in a shape (enlarged shape) similar to the shape surrounding the LED of the first illumination portion 6574 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 241(a)).

The light emitted from the first illumination section 6574 passes through the transparent tubular member 6521. Since the shape of the transparent tubular member 6521 is formed differently depending on the difference in the front and rear positions, the light emitted from the first illumination section 6574 is formed in front of the opening 6532. It is possible to allow a player who views from the top view to view light of a pattern different from the arrangement pattern of the first lighting unit 6574 .

For example, the upper plate portion of the transparent tubular member 6521 is formed such that its width increases as it approaches the opening 6532 (both left and right edges are inclined in the wide direction). The light seen from the front of the opening 6532 in the vicinity of the position where it overlaps with the upper plate part in the front and rear is seen in a pattern that spreads horizontally compared to the arrangement pattern of the first lighting part 6574 .

As described above, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to narrow the arrangement range of the first lighting unit 6574 that emits light behind it while widening the range of light visually recognized by the player. Therefore, while suppressing the size of the first lighting unit 6574 (or the electrical board 6570), it is possible to perform an effect of visually recognizing light in a wide range. The details of the shape of the transparent tubular member 6521 will be described later.

The protruding rib 6533 is cut out at a position corresponding to the locking projection 6548b (see FIG. 255) of the transparent covering member 6548, and is disposed at a location where the formation of the locking projection 6548b is omitted. In this embodiment, the protruding rib 6533 and the locking projection 6548b are formed on the same curve when viewed from the front (they are formed on the same curve as the lower edge of the outer frame member 6530 so as to complement each other). is done).

259 is an exploded front perspective view of the optical transmission unit 6520, and FIG. 260 is an exploded rear perspective view of the optical transmission unit 6520. FIG. The optical transmission unit 6520 includes a transparent tubular member 6521 formed in a bottomed tubular shape extending in the front-rear direction from a colorless transparent light-transmitting resin, and a flat surface disposed in the middle of the transparent tubular member 6521. A flange portion 6522 extending outward along the outer periphery in a flange shape, and a cup-shaped member 6523 formed of a colorless and light-transmitting resin and covered with the transparent tubular member 6521. , a shielding member 6524 made of a colored (white in this embodiment) light-impermeable resin material and formed in a cylindrical shape so as to be able to pass through the portion opposite to the side where the cup-shaped member 6523 is covered, and the shielding member 6524. A contact plate portion 6525 formed as a flat plate surface portion capable of surface contact with the flange portion 6522 at the front side end portion, and an outer surface extending to the front side along the left and right edges and the lower edge of the contact plate portion 6525. A frame extension portion 6526 is mainly provided.

The bottomed cylindrical member 6521 is a member that extends in a cylindrical shape in the front-rear direction, and has a curved shape in which the left and right wall portions are constricted inward. a back contour portion 6521a formed by overlapping contours, a plurality of light-receiving projecting portions 6521b projecting from the back contour portion 6521a toward the back side at positions facing the LEDs, and the back contour portion 6
A blocking portion 6521c that blocks the area surrounded by 521a in a plate shape, a plurality of light passage holes 6521d that are drilled in the blocking portion 6521c at positions facing the LEDs, and at least the width of the upper wall and the width of the left and right walls. A main tubular portion 6521e whose interval becomes longer toward the front side, and a frame-shaped extension portion 6 that extends toward the front side of the flange portion 6522 along the shape of the main tubular portion 6521e.
521f and .

The light-receiving projecting portion 6521 b is a portion inserted into the central light hole 6562 of the partitioning member 6560 . That is, by shortening the distance between the partition member 6560 and the electrical board 6570 (Fig. 263
), the light from the LED of the first lighting section 6574 can be incident on the light receiving projecting section 6521 b without leaving a gap as large as the thickness of the opposing plate section 6561 of the partitioning member 6560 . This makes it easier to generate total reflection.

In this way, the light emitted from the LED of the first illumination unit 6574 is incident at a close distance, is totally reflected, and travels toward the front side, whereas the light emitted from the LED of the first illumination unit 6574 is reflected from the second illumination unit 6575 and the third illumination unit 657 described above.
The light emitted from the LED 6 travels in the air by the area inside the recess of the box-shaped light receiving portion 6546 and the rear box-shaped portion 6558b recessed in the direction away from the LED, and passes through the box-shaped light. Light is emitted from the light receiving portion 6546 and the front side wall portion of the rear box-shaped portion 6558b. Therefore, the first lighting unit 65
Compared to the light emitted from 74, the light emitted from the second irradiation unit 6575 and the third irradiation unit 6576 has a low light intensity and can be visually recognized by the player as uniform light.

The division unit 6540 in which the box-shaped light receiving portion 6546 is formed is made of a light-transmissive milky-white resin material, and the light-receiving member 6558 in which the rear box-shaped portion 6558b is formed is made of a colorless and transparent light-transmitting resin material. Since it is formed, the appearance of the light emitted from the second irradiation section 6575 and the third irradiation section 6576 can be changed step by step.

The frame-shaped extension 6521f has a shape similar to that of the back contour 6521a.
It is enlarged compared to the outline of 1a.

Therefore, compared to the size of the area where the LEDs are arranged in the first lighting unit 6574,
It can be visually recognized by the player as light that illuminates a large area.

The shape of the extension tip of the frame-shaped extension portion 6521f is such that each point is arranged at approximately the same distance as the bottom back surface (back surface) of the cup-shaped member 6523 . That is, depending on the shape of the cup-shaped member 6523, the shape of the extension tip of the frame-shaped extension portion 6521f is designed.
As a result, the frame-shaped extended portion 6521f can be illuminated in a uniform light emission mode.

The flange portion 6522 has a pair of right and left insertion holes 6522a having a size that allows insertion of the circular screw portion of the fastening portion 6543 (see FIG. 251(a)) of the partition unit 6540 .

The cup-shaped member 6523 has a flat rear surface and is formed into a cylindrical shape with a bottom that can support the fastening portion 6543 at a position that overlaps the insertion hole 6522a in the front-rear direction. A pair of end fastening portions 6523a to which the portion 6543 is fastened and fixed, a decorative shape portion 6523b in which a light diffusion shape (decorative shape consisting of a triangular cross-sectional ridge) is formed on the back bottom of the cup shape, and its decorative shape portion and a flat surface portion 6523c formed in a flat surface shape in a region surrounding the periphery of 6523b.

The decorative shape portion 6523b diffusely reflects the light irradiated to the cup-shaped member 6523 from the back side. As a result, a player who views the cup-shaped member 6523 from the front side can visually recognize the cup-shaped member 6523 as if it is emitting surface light, so that the visibility of the cup-shaped member 6523 in the front view can be improved.

Since the flat surface portion 6523c is formed in a region opposed to the frame-shaped extension portion 6521f (see FIG. 263), the light passing through the thick interior of the frame-shaped extension portion 6521f is not reflected diffusely and is reflected from the front surface. You can pass it sideways. This allows the player to visually recognize the light traveling through the frame-shaped extension 6521f as a clear light.

The shielding member 6524 has a rear side end formed in the same shape as the central cylindrical portion 6566 of the partitioning member 6560, and is recessed with a size capable of guiding the fastening portion 6543 (see FIG. 251(a)) of the partitioning unit 6540. A pair of left and right guide recesses 6524a are provided.

The contact plate portion 6525 is connected to the fastening portion 6543 of the partition unit 6540 (see FIG. 251(a)).
A pair of right and left through-holes 6525a are provided so as to be sized such that the circular threaded portion of .

The outer frame extension portion 6526 is formed with an inner shape that is slightly larger than the flange portion 6522 so as to accommodate the flange portion 6522, and the extension length is determined by the thickness of the flange portion 6522 and the thickness of the flange portion 6522.
The length is equal to or greater than the sum of the thickness of the edge of the plate-like portion on the back side of the cup-like member 6523 .

That is, in the assembled state of the optical transmission unit 6520, the plate-like portions of the flange portion 6522 and the cup-like member 6523 are accommodated inside the outer frame extension portion 6526 (see FIG. 258(a)).
Therefore, the assembled state of the optical transmission unit 6520 can be stably maintained. Furthermore, the circular screw-in portion of the fastening portion 6543 (see FIG. 251(a)) of the partition unit 6540
525a, the insertion hole 6522a, and the terminal fastening portion 6523a are inserted in this order and fastened and fixed, so that the assembled state of the optical transmission unit 6520 can be maintained more firmly.

According to the optical transmission unit 6520, the light incident from the rear side end surface of the light receiving projecting portion 6521b is totally reflected within the thickness of the main body cylindrical portion 6521e to travel forward, and the front side end portion of the frame-shaped extending portion 6521f is reflected. , and illuminate the cup-shaped member 6523 . cup-shaped member 6
523 is set at a short distance from the frame-shaped extension 6521f, so that the cup-shaped member 6523
A player who views the light from the front side of the cup-shaped member 6523 can view the light in a line-like (outline shape along the corner of the cup-shaped member 6523) light-emitting mode. As a result, the difference between the light emission mode of the cup-shaped member 6523 and the uniform light emission mode seen in the above-described transparent covering member 6548 can be emphasized, so that a well-modulated light emission effect can be executed. This will be explained in detail below.

261 shows six views of the transparent tubular member 6521, and FIG. 262 shows six views of the optical transmission unit 6520 in the assembled state. Since the optical transmission unit 6520 is configured symmetrically, the left side view is omitted.

261(a) is a front view of the transparent tubular member 6521, FIG. 261(b) is a top view of the transparent tubular member 6521, and FIG. 261(c) is a bottom view of the transparent tubular member 6521. 261(d) is a right side view of the transparent tubular member 6521 as viewed in the direction of arrow L, and FIG. 261(e) is a rear view of the transparent tubular member 6521. FIG.

262(a) is a front view of the optical transmission unit 6520, FIG. 262(b) is a top view of the optical transmission unit 6520, and FIG. 262(c) is a bottom view of the optical transmission unit 6520. 262(d) is a right side view of the optical transmission unit 6520 as viewed in the direction of arrow L, and FIG. 262(e) is a rear view of the optical transmission unit 6520. FIG. Note that FIG.
), the illustration of the pattern of the decorative shape portion 6523b is omitted for easy understanding.

As shown in FIGS. 261(b) and 261(d), the transparent cylindrical member 6521 has a shape in which the left and right sides and the lower bottom face are inclined so that the left and right width and the top and bottom width gradually increase toward the front side. It is said that On the other hand, since the drawing direction of the resin mold is set in the front-rear direction, the portion that interferes with the resin mold in the drawing direction cannot be formed as an inclined surface.

For example, even if the outer surface of the main body cylindrical portion 6521e is formed as an inclined surface, it does not interfere when the resin mold on the back side is moved in the drawing direction (backward).
If the inner surface of a is similarly inclined, it interferes when the resin mold on the back side is moved. See Figure 263).

Similarly, even if the inner surface of the main body cylindrical portion 6521e is formed as an inclined surface, it does not interfere when the resin mold on the front side is moved in the drawing direction (forward), but the frame-like shape formed on the front side portion does not interfere. If the outer surface of the extending portion 6521f is similarly inclined, it interferes when the resin mold is moved. (See FIG. 263).

Here, in the present embodiment, the boundary between the resin mold on the front side that is drawn forward and the resin mold on the back side that is drawn backward is constituted by the closing portion 6521c and the flange portion 6522. A surface is formed, and on the other hand, the above-described non-inclined surface is formed. It is formed on the side that becomes shorter and shorter.

As a result, while the transparent cylindrical member 6521 has the gradually increasing shape as described above, it is possible to suppress the change in the plate thickness due to the change in the front-rear position. It is possible to suppress the change in the forward/backward position of the traveling mode. Therefore, when light is made incident on the inside of the thickness and total reflection occurs at the boundary where the light first reaches, then the transparent cylindrical member 6
Total reflection can be easily repeated until reaching the front end of 521, and leakage of light can be suppressed.

The guide recessed portion 6524a is formed so that its vertical width becomes smaller (tapered) toward the front side. As a result, compared to the case where the upper and lower widths are equal in the front-rear direction, when the optical transmission unit 6520 and the partitioning unit 6540 are assembled (see FIGS. 249 and 250), the fastening portion of the guiding recessed portion 6524a is larger than that of the fastening portion. Since 6543 (see FIG. 255) can be easily inserted, the degree of difficulty in assembly can be reduced.

FIG. 263 shows the rear unit 65 on line CCLXIII-CCLXIII in FIG.
60 to 6580, an acoustic device 6610 and an optical transmission unit 6520. FIG. In FIG. 263, for convenience of explanation, the state in which the optical transmission unit 6520 and the acoustic device 6610 are arranged in the assembly position with respect to the rear units 6560 to 6580 is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 263, the light-receiving projecting portion 6521b of the transparent tubular member 6521
560 is formed with a dimension that creates a slight gap when it is inserted through the direct insertion hole 6562 b , and the tip thereof is inserted up to the surface position of the opposing plate portion 6561 . As a result, the opposing plate portion 6561
The distance between the first illumination portion 6574 and the light receiving projecting portion 6521b can be set without being affected by the plate thickness.

The light-receiving projecting portion 6521b is formed in a plate shape whose longitudinal direction is the direction along the shape of the rear outer shape portion 6521a (see FIG. 260). The dimension in the lateral direction that intersects the longitudinal direction is set to be substantially equal to the width dimension of the LEDs of the first illumination section 6574 that are arranged to face each other.

As a result, in the lateral direction of the light-receiving protruding portion 6521b, only light (light having a very small angle with respect to the optical axis) traveling substantially straight toward the front side from the first illumination portion 6574 is allowed to enter, and other light is prevented from entering. can be prevented.

The light incident in this manner easily travels toward the front side through the thick inside of the transparent tubular member 6521,
Even when the light is reflected at the boundary, the angle between the transparent tubular member 6521 and the direction of the light is small, so total reflection is likely to occur. can be suppressed.

The longitudinal dimension of the light-receiving projecting portion 6521b is set to be approximately twice the lateral dimension. Therefore, with respect to the spread direction of the surface of the transparent tubular member 6521, the light emitted from the first illumination unit 6574 and having a large angle from the optical axis is compared to the case where the thickness direction of the surface is explained. can also be incident on the light-receiving projecting portion 6521b.

On the other hand, the rear outer shape portion 6521a coupled with the light receiving projecting portion 6521b in the longitudinal direction does not contact the opposing plate portion 6561 and is arranged with a slight gap. As a result, the first lighting unit 657
4, the light incident from the end face of the rear outer shape portion 6521a (the light with a large angle between the optical axis and the direction of travel of the light) is reflected to avoid being visually recognized by the player. be able to.

That is, it is possible to allow the player to visually recognize only the light that passes through the light-receiving protruding portion 6521b and travels through the thickness of the main body cylindrical portion 6521e, and cuts out other light (weak light). In other words, by setting the longitudinal direction of the light-receiving projecting portion 6521b, it is possible to set the limit value of the angle based on the optical axis of the light incident on the main body cylindrical portion 6521e.

The light emitted from the LED of the first lighting unit 6574 that is not arranged to face the light receiving projecting portion 6521b passes through the enlarged hole 6562a and passes through the light passing hole 6521d of the transparent cylindrical member 6521.
(See FIG. 260) and irradiates the cup-shaped member 6523 (See FIG. 260). Since this light does not pass through the thickness of the member but travels through the air, it can be visually recognized by the player as uniform light.

The raised tip of the enlarged hole 6562a and the closed portion 6521c are in front and rear contact. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the leakage of light from the gap between the raised tip and the closing portion 6521c.

Next, with reference to FIG. 264, how light passing through the thickness of the transparent tubular member 6521 of the optical transmission unit 6520 will be described. FIG. 264(a) is a schematic front view showing the layout of the first lighting unit 6574, and FIG. 264(b) schematically shows the layout of light visually recognized through the optical transmission unit 6520. It is a schematic front view. 261 and 263 will be referred to as needed in the description of FIG.

First, as described above, the shape of the transparent tubular member 6521 is formed such that the width gradually increases toward the front side, so that the light passing through the thickness of the transparent tubular member 6521 (with total reflection) The light (light emitted from the eight edge light emitting portions 6574a on the left and right outer sides) is visually recognized as an enlarged shape (substantially gourd shape) formed by the arrangement of the edge light emitting portions 6574a.

In addition, as described above, the light in the thickness direction of the transparent tubular member 6521 travels to the front side end without being weakened, so even when the optical transmission unit 6520 is viewed from the front, the edge light emitting section 6
A position corresponding to the arrangement of 574a emits strong light (lights like a point light source).

Here, the distance between the light sources is longer than the actual distance L17a between the edge light emitting portions 6574a. However, the effect of lighting tends to be insufficient. This problem is caused by the fact that the distance L17b between the strong light emitting arrangements of the visually recognized light is longer than the actual distance L17a between the arrangement of the edge light emitting parts 6574a. It is difficult to solve the problem even if the distance between the LEDs is narrowed.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, as described above, the light from the edge light emitting portion 6574a travels radially in the direction along the side surface of the transparent cylindrical member 6521 (longitudinal direction of the light receiving projecting portion 6521b). , the light emitted from adjacent LEDs overlaps, and the intensity of the light viewed at the position between the light sources is reinforced.

As a result, line-shaped light can be visually recognized in a front view of the light transmission unit 6520 even in a portion (between the LEDs) where the LEDs of the first illumination unit 6574 are not arranged (see FIG. 2).
See phantom line in 64(b)). Therefore, it is possible to improve the state in which the light is visually recognized as a point.

In particular, the two left and right LEDs arranged at the lower end of the first illumination portion 6574 are
It is arranged at the boundary position between the side surface 6521e1 of 1e and the bottom surface 6521e2 (FIG. 262).
(e)). Therefore, the light traveling above the optical axis overlaps with the light from the LEDs above it, and the light traveling below the optical axis passes through the bottom surface 6521e2 to form the frame-shaped extension portion 65.
21f overlaps at the lower left and right centers.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 264(a), an L is formed at the center of the lower end of the first lighting unit 6574.
Although the ED is not arranged, as shown in FIG. 264(b), the optical transmission unit 6
Through 520, a line of light can be visually recognized in the center of the lower left and right.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, while reducing the arrangement space of the first lighting unit 6574, the shape formed by the light visually recognized through the light transmission unit 6520 is increased.
It is possible to weaken the degree to which the light is visually recognized as a point, and to make a clear line-shaped light visually recognized.

When the optical transmission unit 6520 is viewed from the front, the interior of the cup-shaped member 6523 is made difficult to see due to the decorative shape applied to the bottom of the cup-shaped member 6523. It is difficult to grasp the position where Therefore, even if the position where the light intersects is uncertain, it is possible to prevent the effect of the lighting effect from deteriorating.

In addition, if the position where the light overlaps is near the tip of the frame-shaped extended portion 6521f, it can be visually recognized as if a new point light source was arranged between the LEDs of the edge light emitting portion 6574a. That is, since it is possible to give the illusion that more LED light sources are arranged than the actual number of LEDs, even a small number of LEDs emit light to the same extent as when a large number of LEDs are used. The production effect of the production can be improved.

The surface light emitting portion 6574b (the first lighting portion 6
Light emitted from the four LEDs on the left and right central sides of 574 passes inside the transparent cylindrical member 6521 . Here, the light emitted from the surface light emitting portion 6574b does not travel through the thickness of the transparent cylindrical member 6521, and in addition, the shape of the enlarged hole 6562a (FIG. 2
45(b)).

Therefore, the light emitted from the surface light-emitting portion 6574b is emitted from the surface light-emitting portion 6574b when viewed from the front.
It is visually recognized as planar light spreading as an area A17 centering on the LED of b. In addition, the light is emitted from the decorative shape portion 6523b (FIG. 2) having a jagged shape on the back side of the cup-shaped member 6523
60), the light diffusely reflects and is visually recognized as planar light when viewed from the front.

That is, the area where the light radially emitted from the surface emitting portion 6574b reaches (FIG. 264(b)
See the imaginary line), and the decorative shape portion 6 on the outside and on the back side of the cup-shaped member 6523
523b (for example, the area A17 in the front view and the frame-shaped extension 6521f
area between ) can be illuminated brightly.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the light emitted from the first illumination unit 6574 can be visually recognized as edge-like light and planar light, which have different impressions. In addition, by irradiating the boundary between the edge-like light and the surface-like light with diffusely reflected light,
Darkening of the boundary can be avoided. Therefore, the visually recognized impression of light can be changed step by step and continuously.

Here, various modes are exemplified as changes in the visual impression of light. For example, it may be a change in the impression of the lighting situation such as brightness or blinking, or a change in the color of the light.

Note that this jagged shape is described as a process performed on the surface irradiated with light, and the shape is not limited at all. For example, shape processing in which dot shapes are densely formed, or wavy striped shape processing may be used.

The division units 6540 that are visually recognized on the left and right sides of the cup-shaped member 6523 in a front view have a curved shape that bulges to the front side in a front view and a side view, as described above. for that reason,
The light visually recognized on the left and right sides of the cup-shaped member 6523 travels in a direction away from the cup-shaped member 6523 to the left, right, and up and down (a direction of diffusion based on the point on the back side).

Furthermore, the light-receiving members 6558 arranged on the lower left and right sides of the partition unit 6540 have front side edges located on the back side toward the outer left and right sides as described above. , in a direction away from the cup-shaped member 6523 in the left-right direction and in the up-down direction (the direction of diffusion based on the point on the back side).

As a result, the player can be given an impression that the light becomes larger as the player approaches the player, compared to the case where the light is directed only in the forward and backward direction, and the light production effect is enhanced. can be improved.

Next, the horizontal effect device 6700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 265 to 281. FIG. FIG. 265 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 10014, and FIG.
is an exploded front perspective view of the.

265, the upper effect device 6500, the operation device 10300, and the lower plate unit 6400 are omitted, and the direction view from the front right is illustrated in a state in which the horizontal effect device 6700 is disassembled from the metal body portion 10014a. , in FIG. 266, horizontal effect device 6700
is shown obliquely from the front left.

As shown in FIGS. 265 and 266, the horizontal effect device 6700 has a metal body portion 10014a.
It is a production device arranged on the front side of the left and right vertically long parts of the , and is formed of a shape obtained by dividing a vertically long elliptical shape in half when viewed from the side.

The horizontal effect device 6700 is a pair of left and right devices with similar shapes, but the internal configuration is the same. Description is omitted.

A horizontal effect device 6700 can be seen so that the front and back stacking relationship can be seen in the upper end part of FIG.
is configured in such a manner that covering units 6730 to 6760 for covering the front side of the base member 6710 are arranged on the front side of the base member 6710 fitted to the metal body portion 10014a.

Fastening between the base member 6710 and the metal body portion 10014a will be described. When the base member 6710 is assembled to the metal main body portion 10014a, positioning protrusions (not shown) projecting from the back surface of the base member 6710 are inserted into the positioning recesses 10014e formed in the metal main body portion 10014a. Then, the fastening screw inserted through the through-hole of the metal body portion 10014a is fastened and fixed to the fastening hole (not shown) formed on the back side of the base member 6710 .

Of the constituent members of the horizontal effect device 6700, only the base member 6710 is fastened and fixed to the metal body portion 10014a. In other words, among the components of the horizontal effect device 6700,
Except for the base member 6710, no components are fastened to the metal body portion 10014a.

As shown in FIG. 266, on the side facing the game area, the main body curved portion 6751 of the curved plate member 6750 completely covers the side surface of the base member 6710 (the position where the back side edge of the base member 6710 and the surface position) formed up to The rear end of the curved plate member 6750 is shown in FIG.
5, it is arranged to face the glass unit 16 in close proximity in the front and rear, as shown by the left unit.

Due to this arrangement, it is possible to easily perform an effect in which the light emitted from the vicinity of the rear end portion of the curved plate member 6750 and the light emitted from the rear side of the glass unit 16 are integrally visible. can do.

267 is an exploded front perspective view of the horizontal effect device 6700, and FIG.
700 is an exploded rear perspective view of 700. FIG. 267 and 268, covering units 6730-6
760 is shown disassembled from the base member 6710 to the front side.

As shown in FIG. 267, the front side of the base member 6710 is provided with an illumination board 6720 on which a plurality of LED chips D1 capable of emitting light are mounted.
Covering units 6730 to 6760 are assembled to the base member 6710 so as to cover the base member 6710 from the front side.

That is, the horizontal effect device 6700 is a device that functions as one of the lamp display devices 227 (see FIG. 4), and supports an illumination board 6720 whose light emission is controlled by the sound lamp control device 113 and the illumination board 6720. a light-emitting side unit composed of a base member 6710 that
A covering unit 673 that receives the light emitted from the light-emitting side unit and makes the player visually recognize it.
and a light-receiving side unit composed of 0 to 6760. First, the light emitting unit will be described.

FIG. 269(a) is a front view of the base member 6710 and the electrical board 6720, and FIG.
9(b) is a left side view of the base member 6710, and FIG. 269(c) is a base member 67.
269(d) is a top view of the base member 6710, FIG.
9(e) is a bottom view of the base member 6710, and FIG. 269(f) is a sectional view of the base member 6710 and the electrical board 6720 along line CCLXIXf-CCLXIXf in FIG. 269(a).

As shown in Figures 269(a) to 269(f), the base member 6710
720 and arranged on the back side of the electrical board 6720, a flat support plate portion 6711
, a frame-shaped projecting portion 6712 projecting toward the front side of the support plate portion 6711 in a frame shape along the outer shape of the electrical board 6720, and a positioning unit projecting further toward the front side than the frame-shaped projecting portion 6712. Projecting portion 67
13, a plurality of insertion holes 6714 through which fastening screws can be inserted at positions outside the electrical board 6720 and close to the electrical board 6720 in a front view, and insertion holes 6736 at two upper and lower positions. A pair of fastening portions 6715 to which fastening screws to be inserted are fastened, and the support plate portion 6
711 (the stepped portion of the outer frame plate portion 6717) and on the right side of the frame-shaped projecting portion 6712 (opposite side of the window surrounding the game area, opposite side of the glass unit 16). A plurality of positioning holes 6716 drilled as holes, an outer frame plate portion 6717 extending from the right edge of the support plate portion 6711 toward the back side in a stepped plate shape, and a left edge of the support plate portion 6711 and an inner frame plate portion 6718 extending in a plate shape toward the back side.

The frame-shaped protruding portion 6712 is arranged such that the protruding tip thereof faces the rear surface portion of the electrical decoration substrate 6720 near the outer shape portion, and makes surface contact with the electrical decoration substrate 6720 . As a result, a space is provided between the support plate portion 6711 and the rear surface side of the electrical decoration substrate 6720 except for the vicinity of the outer shape portion (see FIG. 269(f)). Therefore, an air layer (heat insulating layer) can be provided between the support plate portion 6711 and the electrical board 6720 .

As a result, even if the base member 6710 is fastened and fixed to the metal main body 10014a and the heat transferred to the metal main body 10014a can be transferred to the base member 6710, the amount of heat transferred to the decorative board 6720 is can be suppressed (reduced to a low level), it is possible to suppress the occurrence of problems such as malfunction due to the electric board 6720 becoming hot.

The positioning projecting portion 6713 is located at two positioning holes 672 formed in the electrical board 6720 .
2 to align the electrical board 6720 with the base member 6710 . That is, the electrical decoration board 6720 includes the base member 6710 and the electrical decoration board 67
20 (see FIG. 269(a)), the positioning projecting portion 6
A positioning hole 6722 is drilled at a position corresponding to 713 .

The insertion hole 6714 is the fastening portion 67 of the flat plate member 6740 of the covering units 6730 to 6760.
44 and the fastening portion 6753 of the curved plate member 6750 have a cup-shaped portion that can be fitted from the front (
Fig. 268) is a through hole formed so that they can be aligned and through which a fastening screw to be fastened and fixed is inserted.

The fastening portion 6715 is fitted and aligned with the insertion hole 6736 of the light receiving member 6730 (see FIG. 271), and is formed so that a fastening screw inserted through the insertion hole 6736 can be screwed therein. The light receiving member 6730 is fixed to the base member by being fastened and fixed to the fastening portions 6715 at two upper and lower locations.

Alignment holes 6716 are formed by projections 6743, 676 of covering units 6730-6760.
6 (see FIG. 268) is a hole through which it is inserted. The covering units 6730 to 6760 are composed of a pair of thin plate-like members (a flat plate member 6740 and a curved plate member 6750) arranged opposite to each other on the left and right sides, and formed in a substantially cup shape that opens to the rear side (see FIG. 268). ), and is fixed to the base member 6710 at the rear side (edge-like portion).

Here, the joints between the base member 6710 and the covering units 6730 to 6760 are located at portions (outer shape portions) that can be touched by the player, and the load given by the player (for example, the It can be displaced by the load generated by As mentioned above, the base member 6
710 at the thin-walled rear side end portion, when a load directed in the thickness direction (for example, left-right direction) of the flat plate member 6740 or the curved plate member 6750 is applied, the plate member 6740 or the curved plate member 6750 is deformed,
There is a possibility that positional displacement with respect to the base member 6710 may occur. To prevent this,
Although the fixing points (fastening points) between the flat plate member 6740 and the curved plate member 6750 and the base member 6710 may be increased, there is a possibility that the number of man-hours for the assembly operation increases.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, while suppressing an increase in the number of fixing points, by inserting the projecting portions 6743 and 6766 into the plurality of positioning holes 6716, the flat plate member 6740 and the curved plate member 6750 are fixed to the base member. It is possible to suppress positional deviation (horizontal direction positional deviation) with respect to 6710 .

In addition, the inner side surface (left side surface) of the main body plate portion 6741 of the flat plate member 6740 is the frame-like projecting portion 671.
2, the flat plate member 6740 is placed in contact with the frame-shaped protruding portion 6712 even if the flat plate member 6740 is leftwardly loaded by the player. Since they are in contact with each other, the movement of the flat plate member 6740 is restricted. Therefore, covering units 6730-676
0 can be prevented from being deformed or displaced with respect to the base member 6710 .

Therefore, it is possible to improve the durability of the horizontal effect device 6700 while suppressing an increase in the man-hours of the assembly work. Note that the body plate portion 6741 is provided with an unevenness forming portion 6741a in which fine unevenness is formed in a contact range with the frame-shaped projecting portion 6712, thereby distributing the load, which will be described later in detail. .

The outer frame plate portion 6717 is arranged to face the right side surface of the metal body portion 10014a, is in surface contact with the right side surface of the metal body portion 10014a, and covers the right side of the metal body portion 10014a. As a result, the metal body portion 10014a
can be prevented from being viewed by the player.

The outer frame plate portion 6717 includes support recesses 6717a that are recessed along the front-rear direction from part of the positioning holes 6716 . The support recess 6717 a is recessed along the left side of the alignment hole 6716 on the front side of the alignment hole 6716 , and is recessed along the right side of the alignment hole 6716 on the rear side of the alignment hole 6716 .

The supporting recessed portion 6717a is formed to have dimensions such that it fits with the protruding portion 6743 or is opposed to the projecting portion 6743 with a slight gap in the assembled state of the horizontal effect device 6700 (see FIG. 265). Therefore, compared to the case where the projecting portion 6743 is supported only by the alignment hole 6716, the area capable of supporting the projecting portion 6743 can be increased (supported by the surface of the support recess 6717a). The displacement of the 6740 with respect to the base member 6710 can be suppressed. In other words, the flat plate member 6740 can be stably supported on the base member 6710 .

The inner frame plate portion 6718 is a portion arranged to face the main body curved portion 6751 of the curved plate member 6750, and is formed in a planar shape facing the game area side (inside).

The electrical board 6720 is a so-called printed circuit board, and includes a main body plate portion 6721 formed in a plate shape.
, positioning holes 6722 drilled in two places of the main body plate portion 6721, and main body plate portion 672
and LED chips D1 in which a plurality of LED chips D1 are mounted in an arbitrary pattern.

The body plate portion 6721 is held by the base member 6710 without being fastened and fixed. That is, the positioning projecting portion 6713 (see FIG. 269(c)) is inserted into the positioning hole 6722 to restrict the movement in the left, right, up and down directions, and the movement in the front and rear direction is restricted by the base member 6710 and the light receiving member 6730 (FIG. 280). See) are restricted from moving.

A similar chip is mounted on the LED chip D1 in this embodiment, but in relation to the area illustrated by the imaginary line in FIG. , can be divided into two types.

That is, the LED chip D1 has an edge light emitting portion D1a arranged inside the frame of the imaginary line shown in FIG. 269(a) and a surface light emitting portion D1b arranged outside the frame of the imaginary line. Prepare the Lord. The difference between these light-emitting portions D1a and D1b is that the light emitted from the light-emitting portion D1a is easily visible as linear (edge-like) light, while the light emitted from the light-emitting portion D1b is easily visible as planar light. This corresponds to the difference in the light emission mode visually recognized by the player, which will be described later in detail.

Next, covering units 6730 to 6760 (see FIG. 267) arranged on the front side of the electrical board 6720 will be described. FIG. 270 is an exploded front perspective view of covering units 6730-6760, and FIG. 271 is an exploded rear perspective view of covering units 6730-6760.

270 and 271 from the state shown in FIGS. 267 and 268, the covering units 6730 to 6760 are made of a light-transmitting resin inside, and the light passing through the inside of the covering units 6730 to 6760 is can be refracted and the light receiving member 6730 that covers the illumination substrate 6720 from the front side
and is configured to cover the front thereof with another component.

272(a) is a front perspective view of the light receiving member 6730, FIG. 272(b) is a front view of the light receiving member 6730, and FIG. 272(c) is a front perspective view of the light receiving member 6730,
FIG. 273(a) shows the light receiving member 6730 in range CCLXXIIIa of FIG. 272(a).
273(b) is a partially enlarged view of the light receiving member 6730 in the range CCLXXIIIb of FIG. 272(b).

274(a) is a rear perspective view of the light receiving member 6730, and FIG. 274(b) is a
274(c) is a rear perspective view of the light receiving member 6730. FIG.

Note that FIG. 272(a) is a front perspective view of the light receiving member 6730 as seen from the left side, and FIG.
2(c) is a front perspective view of the light receiving member 6730 viewed from the right side, FIG. 274(a) is a rear perspective view of the light receiving member 6730 viewed from the right side, and FIG. 274(c) is a light receiving member. 6730
is a rear perspective view of the from the left side. Also, in FIG. 272(b), covering units 6730 to 6760 are collectively illustrated for easy understanding.

The light-receiving member 6730 is a member made of a light-transmissive resin material, and
20, the light receiving surface portion 6731 is formed in a flat plate shape and arranged opposite to the electrical board 6720, and the inner edge (left edge in FIG. 272) of the light receiving surface portion 6731 in the assembled state (FIG. 207) is bent. and an outer extension portion 6732 extending to the back side so as to be bent from the outer edge (the right edge in FIG. 274) of the light receiving surface portion 6731 in the assembled state. a set portion 6733, a plurality of long ribs 6734 (five in this embodiment) protruding from the back surface of the light receiving surface portion 6731, and base ends of the long ribs 6734 (the light receiving surface portion 6731 and a plurality of (five in this embodiment) fins 6735 extending in a long fin shape from the front of the position where the front and back of the light receiving surface portion 6731 are matched with the light receiving surface portion 6731, and the fastening portions arranged at the upper and lower ends. 6715 (see FIG. 269(a)) through which fastening screws are inserted, and a shape that can be fitted with the decorative projecting portion 6751a (see FIG. 276) of the curved plate member 6750. and a fitting portion 6737 that

The light-receiving surface portion 6731 is a portion that refracts the light emitted from the LED chip D1, and has a decorative pattern with complicated cuts on the back side. The decorative pattern has elongated projections arranged along a plurality of concentric circles with different diameters, centering on a portion opposed to the surface light emitting portion D1b (see the enlarged view in FIG. 274(b)). ). Here, the outer peripheral surface of the projection with a small diameter at the position facing the surface light emitting portion D1b is inclined outward (a mode in which light irradiated from behind is refracted outward along the surface of the light receiving surface portion 6731). is inclined at , and Fig. 2
75(b)), the outer peripheral surface of the large-diameter projection is similarly inclined (inclined in such a manner that the light traveling along the surface of the light-receiving surface portion 6731 is refracted toward the front side of the light-receiving surface portion 6731. Figure 27
5(b)).

Therefore, the light emitted from the surface emitting portion D1b is refracted near the shaft of the elongated protrusion, travels toward the outer diameter side of the elongated protrusion, and then is further separated from the axis of the elongated protrusion with a large diameter. A wide range of the light receiving surface portion 6731 can be caused to emit light by refracting at a point and proceeding to the front side.

Furthermore, on the front side of the light receiving surface portion 6731, a basic shape that is triangular in front view and has a substantially central portion that bulges toward the front side is formed in a manner that is regularly and densely aligned. A decorative recessed portion 6731a recessed in a substantially hexagonal pyramid shape is provided at the front side position of D1b.

The decorative recessed portion 6731a can change the strength of surface light emission in the light receiving surface portion 6731 (the strength can be changed stepwise). That is, the shape of the decorative recessed portion 6731a converges light on the center side of the recessed portion, so that the decorative recessed portion 6731a can be visually recognized in a strong luminescence mode compared to other portions.

The inner extension portion 6732 and the outer extension portion 6733 are configured such that the extension ends are in contact with the electrical decoration substrate 6720 in the front and rear, and the extension end portions of the inner extension portion 6732 extend over the entire top and bottom. While abutting on the electrical board 6720 , the extended end of the outer extending portion 6733 is partially not abutted.

In other words, the outer extending portion 6733 has a separation end portion 6733a that is separated from the electrical board 6720 without coming into contact with the electrical board 6720 by forming the extended length as short as the plate thickness of the electrical board 6720 . In this embodiment, the spaced end 6733a allows air to flow well into and out of the area between the electrical board 6720 and the light-receiving member 6730, thereby preventing heat buildup.

In addition, when the inner extending portion 6732 is in contact with the electrical board 6720 over the entire top and bottom, the LED chip D1 arranged to protrude from the surface of the main body plate portion 6721 of the electrical board 6720 is placed inside. It cannot be placed behind the extension 6732 . Therefore, the area where the LED chip D1 is arranged is restricted as the plate thickness of the inner extension portion 6732 is increased.

On the other hand, a gap is formed between the spaced end portion 6733a of the outer extending portion 6733 and the electrical board 6720.
733a. Therefore, it is possible to secure a maximum layout area for the LED chips D1 while securing a sufficient plate pressure of the outer extending portion 6733 .

The left and right wall portions of the outer extension portion 6733 are formed as smooth surfaces, while the wall portion on the left side of the inner extension portion 6732 (opposite side to the outer extension portion 6733) is densely formed with ridges having a semicircular cross section. A concavo-convex shape is formed that is aligned with the . As a result, the light emitted leftward through the inner extension portion 6732 is surface-emitting (spreads radially), making it easier for the player to visually recognize uniform light.

As will be described later, part of the light emitted from the electrical board 6720 to the front side passes through the inner extending portion 6732, and the intensity of the light varies from region to region. That is, fin 6735
, the light D1m is a combination of the light emitted from the edge light emitting portion D1a and traveling through the long rib 6734 and the light emitted from the surface light emitting portion D1b. , the light traveling through the long rib 6734 does not reach the light D1p emitted from the surface emitting portion D1b, and the light D1m is more visible than the light D1m.
It is visually recognized as light stronger than 1p (the magnitude of light intensity corresponds to the length of the arrow).

Accordingly, the magnitude of the intensity of the light visually recognized through the inner extension portion 6732 can be changed and visually recognized for each vertically arranged region. It should be noted that the difference in the form of light visually recognized through the inner extension portion 6732 is not limited to the intensity.

For example, by making the color of the light emitted from the edge light emitting portion D1a and the color of the light emitted from the surface light emitting portion D1b different, the color of the light visually recognized through the inner extension portion 6732 can be changed vertically. It can be visually recognized by changing for each area lined up.

The elongated rib 6734 is arranged on the front side of the edge light emitting portion D1a (see FIG. 269(a)) in the assembled state of the horizontal effect device 6700 (see FIG. 265), and is formed with the same thickness without being tapered in the front and rear. It mainly includes a plurality of linear ribs 6734a that are substantially straight when viewed from the rear, and V-shaped ribs 6734b that are bent to have a substantially V shape when viewed from the rear.

A side surface of the long rib 6734 is formed as a smooth surface. That is, unlike the case where the surface of the long rib 6734 is notched on the line, when the light reaches and passes through the side surface of the long rib 6734, it does not spread (does not emit surface light) and is unidirectional. proceed to Therefore, the long rib 6
Since it is possible to prevent the side surface of 734 from emitting light uniformly, when the horizontal effect device 6700 is viewed from the left and right directions, the light emitted from the edge light emitting portion D1a and the light emitted from the surface light emitting portion D1b It is possible to reduce the degree to which it is mixed with light and visually recognized.

That is, the elongated rib 6734 is formed to be elongated in the vertical direction and configured as a portion that can be seen in the horizontal direction, while suppressing the light that has passed through the elongated rib 6734 from reaching the player's eyes in the form of surface emission. Therefore, a player who views the horizontal effect device 6700 from the left and right can easily recognize the color and brightness of the light emitted from the surface light emitting portion D1b.

Note that this jagged shape is described as a process performed on the surface irradiated with light, and the shape is not limited at all. For example, shape processing in which dot shapes are densely formed, or wavy striped shape processing may be used.

The linear ribs 6734a are arranged two by two on the upper and lower sides, and are formed in such a manner as to extend in a direction that inclines toward the upper and lower central positions as it goes leftward (the central side of the front frame 10014, see FIG. 265). 6734a1 is connected to inner extension 6732, while right end 6734a2
are spaced apart from the outer extension 6733 .

Therefore, the light traveling inside the linear rib 6734a can pass through the left end 6734a1 and enter the inner extension 6732 directly, while the light passing through the right end 6734a2 can pass through the outer extension 6733. The energy of the light drops in the gap between

As a result, the perceived brightness differs near the left and right ends of the linear rib 6734a. That is, a portion viewed through the inner extension portion 6732 is viewed brightly, and a portion viewed through the outer extension portion 6733 is viewed darker than that.

As described above, in this embodiment, surface light emission through the side surface of the long rib 6734 is suppressed, and the visibility of light from the left and right direction is deteriorated.
Light entering the inner extension portion 6732 through 734 a 1 is surface-emitted through the surface of the inner extension portion 6732 .

Therefore, of the light emitted from the edge light-emitting portion D1a, only the light that has entered the inner extension portion 6732 through the left end portion 6734a1 can be easily recognized visually in the horizontal direction. That is, the left end 6
In the vicinity of 734a1, the color and brightness of the light emitted from the edge light emitting portion D1a are visible, and at a position away from the left end portion 6734a1 (intermediate position), the color and brightness of the light emitted from the surface light emitting portion D1b are visible. Since it can be made visible, it is possible for a player who views the horizontal effect device 6700 from the left and right to visually recognize lights of different colors and brightnesses.

The V-shaped rib 6734b is arranged in the vertical center position, and the intermediate connecting portion 673 near the bending position
Both ends 6734b2 are connected to the outer extension 673 while being connected to the inner extension 6732 at 4b1.
3. The reason why the bending position and the intermediate connecting portion 6734b1 are slightly shifted is because
This is because the edge light emitting portion D1a (see FIG. 269(a)) is arranged to face the bending position.

That is, the intermediate connecting portion 6734b1 is positioned to receive the light emitted from the edge light emitting portion D1a.
By shifting the V-shaped rib 6734b, it is possible to suppress the light (main light) emitted linearly in the front-rear direction from the edge light-emitting portion D1a from entering the connecting position.
The loss of light incident on the fin 6735 from the fin 6735 can be reduced.

The V-shaped rib 6734b has a function similar to that of the linear rib 6734a described above. That is, the light traveling inside the V-shaped rib 6734b passes through the intermediate connecting portion 6734b1 and can enter the inner extending portion 6732 directly, while the light passing through the both end portions 6734b2 passes through the outer extending portion 6733. The energy of the light drops in the gap between

As a result, the perceived brightness is different near the left and right ends of the V-shaped rib 6734b. That is, a portion viewed through the inner extension portion 6732 is viewed brightly, and a portion viewed through the outer extension portion 6733 is viewed darker than that.

As described above, in the present embodiment, surface light emission through the side surface of the long rib 6734 is suppressed, and the visibility of light from the left and right direction is deteriorated. Light passing through and entering the inner extension 6732 is surface-illuminated through the surface of the inner extension 6732 .

Therefore, the light emitted from the edge light emitting portion D1a is limited to the light that has entered the inner extension portion 6732 through the intermediate connecting portion 6734b1, and is easily visible in the horizontal direction. That is, in the vicinity of the intermediate connecting portion 6734b1, the color and brightness of the light emitted from the edge light emitting portion D1a are visually recognized.
At a position away from the intermediate connection portion 6734b1 (intermediate position), the color and brightness of the light emitted from the surface light emitting portion D1b can be visually recognized.
A player who sees 00 can see lights of different colors and brightnesses.

The fin 6735 is formed so that the thickness becomes thinner from the extending proximal end toward the distal end side,
It mainly comprises a straight rib 6734a and corresponding distal curved fins 6735a and a V-shaped rib 6734b and corresponding distal curved fins 6735b.

The tip curved fin 6735a has curved upper and lower inner edges, and the left side (the front frame 100
14) are densely formed with triangular wave-like (jagged shape) notches to form a light diffusion portion, and the right side (outer side of the front frame 10014) is formed as a smooth surface.

The tip bending fin 6735b has an extending tip inclined toward the rear side as it goes from the upper and lower ends toward the vertical center, and has an inclined surface that intersects with the front side of the bending position of the V-shaped rib 6734b. A light diffusion portion is formed by densely forming triangular wave-shaped (notched) notches on the inner side surface of the front frame 10014, and the right side surface (the outer side surface of the front frame 10014) is formed as a smooth surface.

These fins 6735 are formed so that the extension length becomes shorter toward the left side. In particular, since the left end of the curved fin 6735a is coupled to the light-receiving surface portion 6731, a large amount of light emitted from the edge light-emitting portion D1a and emitted from the front end of the curved fin 6735a light) is emitted from the fin 6735 near the light receiving surface portion 6731 . Therefore, the light is directed to the inner extension part 6732 side (back side, root side)
As a result, the left side of the light receiving member 6730 can be easily brightened.

In addition, the long rib 6734 and the inner extension part 6732 are connected behind the position where the tip curved fin 6735a is connected to the light receiving surface part 6731, and the light passing through the inside of the long rib 6734 is also extended inward. The setting portion 6732 can be illuminated. That is, in the vicinity of the position where the tip curved fin 6735a couples with the light receiving surface portion 6731, the light passing through the inside of the elongated rib 6734 and the light passing through the tip curved fin 6735a can be combined to perform a light emitting effect. , the production effect of the light emission production can be improved.

Note that this jagged shape is described as a process performed on the surface irradiated with light, and the shape is not limited at all. For example, shape processing in which dot shapes are densely formed, or wavy striped shape processing may be used.

Due to the difference in the form of formation between the left side and the right side of the fin 6735, the passage of light passing through the side can be changed. That is, the light passing through the left side can be visually recognized as uniform light due to the surface emitting effect of the notch, while the light passing through the right side is not affected by the surface emitting effect, so the light passing through the right side can be viewed as uniform light. The light can be seen as localized light. It goes without saying that the elongated ribs 6734 and the fins 6735 function as reinforcing portions for reinforcing the base member 6710 because of their shapes.

One insertion hole 6736 is exposed in the assembled state of the horizontal effect device 6700 (FIG. 266), and only two insertion holes 6736 are arranged at the upper and lower ends of the light receiving member 6730 . Therefore, by loosening the fastening screw inserted through the exposed insertion hole 6736 and applying a load to the light receiving surface portion 6731, the position of the light receiving member 6730 can be displaced.

As a result, when the positional relationship between the long rib 6734 and the fins 6735 and the edge light-emitting portion D1a of the LED chip D1 deviates (for example, vibration due to the player's operation, the front frame 100
14) can be performed without disassembling the horizontal presentation device 6700, so maintenance work can be improved (difficulty is low and time is shortened). )be able to.

The fitting portion 6737 is recessed in the left-right direction in an inclined shape that tapers toward the back side, and aligns the positions and postures of the light receiving member 6730 and the constituent members of the covering units 6730 to 6760 other than the light receiving member 6730. , and is provided with a single recess 6737a so as to be further recessed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, while limiting (reducing) the number of places where the recessed portion 6737a is arranged (the place where the fastening portion 6753 is arranged) on the side of the inner extension portion 6732 (reduced), the light receiving member 6730 and the , positional deviation and attitude deviation from the constituent members of the covering units 6730 to 6760 other than the light receiving member 6730 are suppressed. This is detailed below.

Here, when the left and right side surfaces of the horizontal effect device 6700 are fastened and fixed, the fastening screws do not transmit light, so the more fastening locations there are, the more easily shadows are generated. Therefore, the horizontal direction device 67
Even if the surface area of 00 is formed to be large, the light will be separated at the fastening point, and there is a possibility that the performance effect of the light presentation will be reduced. On the other hand, reducing the number of fastening points leads to a decrease in bearing capacity,
There is a possibility that the lateral effect device 6700 will be deformed from its root due to the load given by the player or the load generated when the front frame 10014 is opened and closed.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, while the fastening portion is limited to the concave portion 6737a, the fitting portion 6737 is fitted to the decorative projecting portion 6751a (see FIG. 276) to maintain the supporting force. ing.

As a result, the horizontal effect device 6 on the game area (glass unit 16, see FIG. 265) side
700 (in this embodiment, the fastening points arranged between the main body curved portion 6751 as the light effecting point and the illumination board 6720) are reduced, and the durability of the horizontal effect device 6700 is improved. be able to.

In addition, in this embodiment, light is formed to be able to travel to the rear side through the concave portion 6737a. This will be explained with reference to FIG.

275(a) is a cross-sectional view of the horizontal effect device 6700 taken along line CCLXXVa-CCLXXVa in FIG. 274(b), and FIG.
FIG. 67 is a cross-sectional view of the light receiving member 6730 taken along line CCLXXVb;

As shown in FIG. 275(a), the recessed portion 6737a is arranged on the same cross section as the intermediate connecting portion 6734b1 of the V-shaped rib 6734b arranged to face the edge light emitting portion D1a. The V-shaped rib 6734b is a portion through which the light emitted from the edge light emitting portion D1a can travel (see FIG. 2).
81), the striped decorative portion 6751
It is formed so that light can travel to the rear side portion of the body curved portion 6751 where e is formed. That is, it is formed so that light can travel toward the back side of the electrical board 6720 (the side opposite to the light irradiation direction).

Here, the fastening portion 6753 is a portion to which the fastening screw is fastened, and it is considered unsuitable for lighting effect because the fastening screw is likely to be shadowed. Since the portion 6734b1 is formed, the light avoids the fastening screw in the vertical direction, so that the player can see the light while suppressing the influence of the shadow of the fastening screw.
That is, by causing the light to travel from both the upper and lower sides of the fastening screw, the shadow of the fastening screw visually recognized by the player can be eliminated (thinned).

In FIG. 275(b), the light receiving surface portion 6731 is shown enlarged. Of the light emitted from the surface light-emitting portion D1b, the light traveling in a direction with a small angle with respect to the optical axis along the front-rear direction enters the light-receiving surface portion 6731 while being gently refracted, and passes through the decorative recessed portion 6731a. In the process, the light is further refracted and condensed. As a result, it is possible to increase the emission intensity of light visually recognized through the decorative recessed portion 6731a.

In this way, the light emission mode on the front side of the light-receiving surface portion 6731 is centered on the decorative recessed portion 6731a where the light intensity is increased by condensing, and the light intensity increases as the distance from the decorative recessed portion 6731a increases. It is set to be low.

At this time, since the light is condensed in the decorative recessed portion 6731a, the light is gathered toward the optical axis side compared to when the surface light emitting portion D1b is viewed separately. D1
Compared to the case where the light emitted from b is visually recognized without the light receiving surface portion 6731, the intensity of the visually recognized light can be increased.

That is, due to the action of the light-receiving surface portion 6731, the light emitted from the surface light-emitting portion D1b has a higher intensity than when the light emitted from the surface light-emitting portion D1b is viewed directly (light visible near the decorative recessed portion 6731a), and the surface light-emitting portion D
The intensity of the light is gradually reduced to a light with a lower intensity than when the light emitted from 1b is directly viewed,
The light having different intensities can be visually recognized by the player through the surface of the light receiving surface portion 6731 .

Returning to FIG. 270, the member covering the light receiving member 6730 will be described. A cup-shaped member with an open rear side is provided on the front side of the light receiving member 6730 . A flat plate member 6740, a curved plate member 6750, and a cover member 6760 that constitute the cup-shaped member will be described.

276 is an exploded front perspective view of the flat plate member 6740, the curved plate member 6750 and the cover member 6760, and FIG.
760, FIG. 278 is an exploded rear perspective view of flat plate member 6740, curved plate member 6750 and cover member 6760, and FIG. It is an exploded rear perspective view.

After the flat plate member 6740 and the curved plate member 6750 are assembled from the left and right and are united by fastening and fixing, the cover member 6760 is assembled from the front side and fitted, thereby fixing each member inseparably.

The flat plate member 6740 is a member made of colorless, transparent, light-transmitting resin, and includes a main body plate portion 6741 formed of a flat plate having a shape obtained by dividing an oval shape, and the main body plate portion 6741. A main body plate portion 6741 which is a flat plate portion disposed on a plane translated leftward from the plane
A fitted plate portion 6742 connected with a step on the front side edge of the main body plate portion 6741, a plurality of projecting portions 6743 projecting from the back side end portion of the main body plate portion 6741 toward the back side, and from the projecting portions 6743 A plurality of fastening portions 6744 arranged at spaced apart positions and configured so that fastening screws can be screwed from the rear side.
and a plurality of insertion holes 6745 drilled in the main body plate portion 6741 with a size that allows the fastening screws to be inserted.
and are mainly provided.

The body plate portion 6741 has a decorative shape that is recessed leftward from the left surface and protrudes rightward from the right surface corresponding to the recess. , body plate portion 674
coincides with the right face of 1.

The concave-convex forming portion 6741a forms a honeycomb structure in which hexagonal pyramids arranged so as to taper leftward are filled, and produces an effect similar to that of a reflector. As a result, the main body plate portion 6741
Since the strength of the rear side portion (the portion that can come into contact with the outer frame plate portion 6717 (see FIG. 268) of the base member 6710 in the assembled state) can be improved, it is possible to prevent cracking or cracking due to the application of external force. can be prevented. Moreover, the flat plate member 67 is attached to the base member 6710 .
40, contact friction can be reduced when the assembly of the curved plate member 6750 and the cover member 6760 is slid to assemble.

Therefore, after the horizontal effect device 6700 is assembled to the front frame 10014, the outer frame plate portion 6717 is damaged when a player gives an impact or a load is applied when opening and closing the front frame 10014. In addition to being able to improve the durability by making it difficult, it is possible to facilitate the assembly of the horizontal effect device 6700 .

The fitted plate portion 6742 has a plurality of groove portions 6742a cut out as thin grooves extending in the front-rear direction on the right side surface and a step between the main body plate portion 6741 and the groove portions 6742a. and a hole 6742b. The groove portion 6742a and the front-rear direction hole 6742b have a function of aligning the flat plate member 6740 and the cover member 6760, which will be described later in detail.

The projecting portion 6743 is a portion that is inserted through the alignment hole 6716 (see FIG. 269(a)) of the base member 6710, and the fastening portion 6744 is a portion that is inserted through the insertion hole 6714 (see FIG. 269(a)) of the base member 6710.
269(a)) is fastened and fixed by a fastening screw.

In addition, the projecting portion 6743 and the fastening portion 6744 are connected to the electrical board 6720 and the light receiving member 6730.
It is arranged in a position close to the outside of the right edge of the front view. In particular, the fastening portion 6744 is
720 and the light receiving member 6730 (Fig. 269(a), Fig. 2
74(b)), therefore, the electric board 6720 and the light receiving member 673 with respect to the flat plate member 6740
0 positional deviation can be suppressed.

The through-holes 6745 are through-holes through which tightening screws to be screwed into the curved plate member 6750 are inserted, and are arranged at four upper and lower positions. The curved plate member 6750 is attached to the flat plate member 6740 at four fastening positions.
Since it can be firmly fastened to the curved plate member 6750, the fastening portion 6 formed on the back side of the curved plate member 6750
Even if 753 is small, insufficient fixing force can be avoided.

The curved plate member 6750 is arranged to face the main body plate portion 6741 of the flat plate member 6740, and is curved in such a manner that it swells leftward toward the back side, is formed to cover the front side of the light receiving member 6730, is colorless and transparent, and transmits light. main body curved portion 6 formed of flexible resin and having a plurality of striped shapes on the inner surface
751 and a curved plate portion arranged by moving parallel to the right side from the main body curved portion 6751 , which is connected to the front side edge of the main body curved portion 6751 with a step and arranged to face the fitted plate portion 6742 . A fitted plate portion 6752 and a plurality of fastening portions 6 configured so that fastening screws can be screwed in from the back side
753, a plurality of fastening portions 6754 formed so that fastening screws can be inserted at positions corresponding to the insertion holes 6745, and fastening screws drilled in the front side edge portion of the body curved portion 6751 so as to be able to be inserted in the front-rear direction. and a plurality of insertion holes 6756 through which fastening screws can be inserted in the front-rear direction at the front side edge of the fitted plate portion 6752 .

The main body curved portion 6751 has a triangular shape tapered toward the back side in a region including the fastening portion 6753 at the center of the upper and lower sides, and has a decorative projecting portion 6751a projecting rightward from the right side surface and the decorative projecting portion 6751a. A front-rear direction hole 6751b drilled in the front-rear direction in the front side portion of , a flat partition portion 6751c that divides the striped shape with a flat surface, and a central flat portion 6751d formed from a flat surface facing the front-rear direction at the vertical center position and a striped decorative portion 6751e formed in a thin striped shape on the inner surface near the rear end.

The decorative protruding portion 6751 a is configured as a portion that fits with the fitting portion 6737 of the light receiving member 6730 . Further, the front-rear direction hole 6751 b has a function of aligning the connection extension portion 6763 and the curved plate member 6750 .

Thus, the decorative projecting portion 6751a can be configured as a portion that has both a function as a decorative portion and a function as a portion that aligns with the light receiving member 6730 . As a result, even in a configuration in which only one fastening portion 6753 is provided (few) in the vertical central portion as in the present embodiment, it is possible to suppress the bending plate member 6750 from wobbling.

The flat partition portion 6751c is formed in a region including a position that coincides with the front edge portion of the tip curved fin 6735a (see FIG. 272(a)) when viewed in the front-rear direction and when viewed from the side. Thus, when the light emitted from the front edge of the tip curved fin 6735a is viewed from the front (see FIG. 207).
, the light passes through the flat partition 6751c, so that the light can be visually recognized as it is.

On the other hand, the light emitted to the inner side surface (the side surface facing the game area) of the tip curved fin 6735a is irregularly reflected by the plurality of striped portions partitioned by the flat partitioning portion 6751c. Therefore, when the light emitted from the inner side surface of the tip curved fin 6735a is visually recognized from the side, the light emission mode can be surface emission, and the light can be obscured and visually recognized.

The central flat portion 6751d is formed in a region including a position that coincides with the front edge portion of the tip bending fin 6735b (see FIG. 272(a)) when viewed in the front-rear direction and when viewed from the side. Accordingly, when the light emitted from the front edge of the tip bending fin 6735b is viewed from the front (see FIG. 207).
, the light passes through the central flat portion 6751d, so that it can be visually recognized as a clear light.

On the other hand, the light emitted to the inner side surface (the side surface facing the game area) of the tip bending fin 6735b is irregularly reflected by the plurality of striped portions. Therefore, when the light emitted from the inner side surface of the tip bending fin 6735b is visually recognized from the side surface, the light emission mode can be surface emission, and the light can be obscured and visually recognized.

Similar to the fitted plate portion 6742 of the flat plate member 6740, the fitted plate portion 6752 has a plurality of groove portions 6752a cut out as thin grooves extending in the front-rear direction on the left side surface, and a body curved portion 6751.
and a front-rear direction hole 6752b drilled in a direction along the groove portion 6752a in the step between. The groove portion 6752 a and the front-rear direction hole 6752 b are formed between the curved plate member 6750 and the cover member 676 .
It has a function of alignment with 0, the details of which will be described later.

The fastening portion 6753 is a portion that is fastened and fixed by a fastening screw passing through the insertion hole 6714 (see FIG. 269(a)) of the base member 6710 . The fastening portion 6753 is arranged at a position close to the outside of the left edge of the electrical board 6720 and the light receiving member 6730 in a front view, and is arranged in such a manner as to enter the concave portion of the electrical board 6720 and the light receiving member 6730 (FIG. 269 ( a), FIG. 274(b)
)), positional deviation of the electrical board 6720 and the light receiving member 6730 with respect to the curved plate member 6750 can be suppressed.

The fastening portions 6754 are portions into which fastening screws inserted through the insertion holes 6745 are screwed, and are arranged at positions (four locations) corresponding to the insertion holes 6745 . Since a plurality of fastening portions 6754 are arranged, the flat plate member 6740 and the curved plate member 6750 can be firmly fixed only by fastening in the left-right direction.

On the other hand, the flat plate member 6740 is attached to the base member 6 by the projecting portion 6743 and the fastening portion 6744.
710, it is possible to prevent the bending plate member 6750 from wobbling when the number of fastening portions 6753 of the bending plate member 6750 is reduced. As a result, since the number of fastening portions 6753 near the rear end of the curved plate member 6750 can be reduced, the number of locations where light is blocked by fastening screws can be reduced. large area can be secured.

The insertion hole 6755 and the insertion hole 6756 are through holes through which fastening screws can be inserted from the back side, and guide wall portions 6755a and 6756a for guiding the fastening portion 6764 (see FIG. 279) of the cover member 6760 are provided on the front side thereof. formed (see FIG. 277).

The guide wall portions 6755a and 6756a have inner surfaces with a slightly larger diameter than the outer diameter of the fastening portion 6764 of the cover member 6760, and are located on the right side of the fastening portion 6764 (the side close to the flat plate member 6740).
is formed so as to be arranged opposite to the As a result, the assembled state of the horizontal effect device 6700 (Fig. 2
65), the leftward movement of the curved plate member 6750 can be restricted by the fastening portion 6764 of the cover member 6760, so that the curved plate member 6750 can be prevented from being removed carelessly.

The cover member 6760 is attached to the flat plate member 6740 and the curved plate member 6750 by sliding the fastening portion 6764 back and forth along the guide wall portions 6755a and 6756a. The cover member 6760 includes a body plate portion 6761 that is a flat plate portion that covers the fitted plate portion 6742 of the flat plate member 6740 from the right side, and a front side edge of the body plate portion 6761 that is bent to cover the curved plate member 6750 . A curved plate portion 6762, which is a curved plate portion having a shape that covers the fitting plate portion 6742 from the left side, and a curved plate portion 6762 from two positions spaced apart from the vertical center position by approximately the same distance vertically.
A connection extension portion 6763 that extends to the left rear of and is connected at the extension end portion, and a fastening screw that is disposed on the back surface of the curved plate portion 6762 and is inserted through the insertion holes 6755 and 6756 of the curved plate member 6750 A plurality of fastening portions 6764 formed so that they can be screwed in, and fastening screws inserted through insertion holes 6714 disposed at the rear side end portion of the upper end portion of the curved plate portion 6762 and near the upper end portion of the base member 6710 are screwed. It mainly includes a base end fastening portion 6765 (see FIG. 279) that can be inserted, and a plurality of protrusions 6766 that protrude from the back side end of the main body plate portion 6761 toward the back side.

The main body plate portion 6761 is slidable inside the groove portion 6742a at a position corresponding to the groove portion 6742a of the flat plate member 6740, and protrudes leftward in a rib shape along a straight line in the front-rear direction. It has a plurality of projecting ribs 6761a.

The protruding rib 6761a is formed to protrude rearward from the back side edge of the main body plate portion 6761, and this protruding portion is inserted through the front-rear direction hole 6742b. That is, the projecting portion is arranged to face the left side surface of the main body plate portion 6741, and movement of the main body plate portion 6741 can be restricted.
As a result, it is possible to prevent the flat plate member 6740 from being displaced to the left with respect to the cover member 6760 in the assembled state of the horizontal effect device 6700 (FIG. 265).

At a position corresponding to the groove 6752a of the curved plate member 6750, the curved plate portion 6762 is
A plurality of protruding ribs 6762a are provided so as to be slidable inside the groove portion 6752a and protrude rightward in a rib shape along a straight line in the front-rear direction.

The protruding rib 6762a is formed to protrude rearward from the back side edge of the curved plate portion 6762, and this protruding portion is inserted through the front-rear direction hole 6752b. That is, the projecting portion is arranged to face the right side surface of the main body curved portion 6751, and the movement of the main body curved portion 6751 can be restricted. As a result, in the assembled state of the horizontal effect device 6700 (FIG. 265), the curved plate member 67
50 can be prevented from shifting to the right with respect to the cover member 6760 .

The connecting extension part 6763 has a projecting rib 6763a that projects rightward in a rib shape along a straight line in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the front-rear direction hole 6751b.

The protruding rib 6763a is formed to protrude rearward from the back side edge of the connecting extension portion 6763 at the connecting position, and this protruding portion is inserted through the front-rear direction hole 6751b. That is, the projecting portion is arranged to face the right side surface of the decorative projecting portion 6751a, and the movement of the body curved portion 6751 can be restricted. As a result, it is possible to prevent the curved plate member 6750 from shifting to the right with respect to the cover member 6760 in the assembled state of the horizontal effect device 6700 (FIG. 265).

As described above, the fastening portion 6764 is configured as a portion capable of restricting leftward movement of the curved plate member 6750 in the assembled state of the horizontal effect device 6700 (see FIG. 265). Careless removal can be prevented.

Thus, the cover member 6760 structurally restricts the lateral movement of the curved plate member 6750 . That is, the rightward movement of the curved plate member 6750 is restricted by the relationship between the projecting ribs 6762a, 6763a and the front-rear direction holes 6751b, 6752b.
The leftward movement of the curved plate member 6750 is restricted by the relationship with 755a and 6756a. Therefore, the arrangement of the curved plate member 6750 with respect to the cover member 6760 can be stabilized.

The base end fastening portion 6765 is disposed at the rear side end portion of the upper end portion of the curved plate portion 6762, and can be screwed with a fastening screw that is inserted through an insertion hole 6714 (see FIG. 267) near the upper end portion of the base member 6710. formed in That is, the insertion hole 6714 of the base member 6710 (see FIG. 269(a))
A fastening screw passing through the base member 67 is screwed into the proximal fastening portion 6765 .
10 is fastened and fixed.

The projecting portion 6766 is a portion that is inserted through the alignment hole 6716 (see FIG. 269(a)) of the base member 6710 . In addition, the projecting portion 6766 and the base end fastening portion 6765 correspond to the illumination substrate 6720 and the illumination substrate 6720 and the cover member 6760 arranged at a position close to the outside of the right edge or upper edge of the illumination substrate 6720 and the light receiving member 6730 in a front view. Positional deviation of the light receiving member 6730 can be suppressed.

FIG. 280(a) is a cross-sectional view of the base member 6710, the illumination substrate 6720 and the light-receiving member 6730 taken along line CCLXXXa-CCLXXXa in FIG. 272(b).
) is the base member 6710 on the line CCLXXXb-CCLXXXb in FIG.
280(c) is a cross-sectional view of an electrical board 6720 and a light-receiving member 6730, and FIG.
Base member 6710 and illumination board 67 on line CCLXXXc-CCLXXXc in (b)
20 and a light receiving member 6730. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 280(a), the front-rear spacing between the long rib 6734 and the LED chip D1 is
The height of the LED chip D<b>1 is suppressed to a level that protrudes from the surface of the main body plate portion 6721 . Therefore, the light emitted from the edge light emitting portion D1a is incident on the long rib 6734 without omission,
In addition, the light can be easily propagated to the front side by total reflection inside the long rib 6734 (see FIG. 281).

In addition, at locations where the long ribs 6734 are not arranged, the front-to-rear spacing between the surface emitting portion D1b and the light receiving surface portion 6731 is maintained to be equal to or greater than the front-to-rear width (formation length) of the long ribs 6734 . Therefore, it is possible to widen the area where the light emitted from the LED chip D1 can reach the light receiving surface portion 6731 .

As described above, according to the present embodiment, on the premise that the light emitted from the LED chip D1 is emitted radially, the light emitted from the edge light emitting portion D1a and the light emitted from the surface light emitting portion D1b It is possible to make it easier to visually recognize the light by distinguishing it from the light.

That is, the light emitted from the edge light-emitting portion D1a passes through the elongated rib 6734 and the fin 6735.
As a line-shaped clear light that progresses by total reflection inside the , or as a long rib 6734
The light emitted from the surface light emitting portion D1b passes through the light-receiving surface portion 6731 and the light refracting surface portion of the inner extension portion 6732 while it is visually recognized as light that brightens the small-scale range in which the light can travel through the It is visually recognized as uniform light (faint light).

As a result, compared to the production mode in which a lens for concentrating the light emitted from the illumination substrate 6720 is arranged opposite to the illumination substrate 6720 as in the related art, and the glittering light is visually recognized in a small area, this embodiment is superior. According to this, it is possible to visually recognize light (planar light) that spreads over the area of the electrical decoration substrate 6720 while visually recognizing brilliant light (line-shaped light) in a small area. In addition, it is possible to easily perform an effect in which only one or both of these different lights are visually recognized by control. Therefore, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in the lighting performance.

Therefore, for example, even when the same LED chip is adopted for the edge light emitting portion D1a and the surface light emitting portion D1b, the light emitted from the edge light emitting portion D1a and the light emitted from the surface light emitting portion D1b By varying the color and brightness of each, it is possible to perform a light emission effect rich in gradation (light emission effect of different colors and brightness).

As shown in FIG. 280(b), the side surface of the fin 6735 in the plate thickness direction is the right side surface (front frame 1
0014) is flush with the long rib 6734 in the front-rear direction, and the left side (front frame 10
014) is an inclined surface that tapers toward the end on the front side (closer to the right side).
Therefore, the normal line of the left side face does not face directly laterally (a direction parallel to the surface of the main body plate portion 6721 of the electrical board 6720, that is, a direction perpendicular to the front-rear direction), but has a component facing the front side. turn to As a result, the light emitted from the left side surface of the fin 6735 can be
It can also be directed to the front side.

As shown in FIG. 280(c), since the long rib 6734 is connected to the inner extending portion 6732, the light emitted from the edge light emitting portion D1a and incident on the long rib 6734 is emitted from the inner extending portion 67
32. The propagation of this light will be described using schematic diagrams.

FIG. 281 schematically shows the cross section of FIG.
20 and a light receiving member 6730. FIG. In FIG. 281, arrows L23a to L23e indicating light emitted from the edge light emitting portion D1a are schematically illustrated.

Although the intensity of the light emitted from the LEDs decreases as the angle between the surface of the electrical board 6720 and the axis X23 orthogonal to the surface of the decorative board 6720 increases, the light itself is emitted radially. In this embodiment, the subsequent arrival position differs depending on the traveling direction of the light, so the following description will be given in order.

The arrow L23a enters the end of the long rib 6734, and the long rib 6734 and the fin 67
35 shows the traveling direction of the light that is totally reflected inside the fin 6735 and reaches the front end of the fin 6735 . Since the light reaching the fin 6735 along the arrow 23a travels through total internal reflection, it is more difficult than the case where the light is partially transmitted (emitted) from the side surface of the long rib 6734 or the fin 6735. , can reduce the light energy loss. Therefore, even when the distance from the edge light emitting portion D1a is long, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the light with sufficient brightness.

Before the arrow L23b reaches the front end of the fin 6735, the left side (front frame 1001
4) indicates the traveling direction of light emitted from the side surface. As described above, the left side surface of the fin 6735 is processed to have a jagged shape, so that light is emitted in the form of surface emission.

An arrow L23c indicates the traveling direction of the light that passes through the elongated rib 6734, travels directly to the inner extension portion 6732, and is emitted from the surface thereof. Since this light is not refracted at the end face after entering the elongated rib 6734 and the energy loss of the light is suppressed, it can be visually recognized brightly. In addition, since the outer surface of the inner extending portion 6732 (the surface opposite to the outer extending portion 6733) is processed to have a jagged shape, light is emitted in the form of surface emission.

An arrow L23d indicates the light receiving surface portion 6 as a joint position between the long rib 6734 and the fin 6735.
After reaching 731, the traveling direction of the light that cannot travel inside the fin 6735 and is reflected is shown. That is, as described above, the fins 6735 are formed so that the length in the thickness direction becomes shorter toward the front side than the long ribs 6734, and the left side (the front frame 100
14), a jagged recessed portion is formed, so that when viewed in the front-rear direction, the long rib 6
734 is configured to partially protrude from the fins 6735 .

Therefore, even if the light similarly travels in the front-back direction, the long rib 6734 and the light-receiving surface portion 6
It is not possible to enter the fin 6735 at all of the joint positions with 731, and entry into the fin 6735 is suppressed in a part of the region (especially near the left side surface of the long rib 6734), Light reaching this area is reflected by the light receiving surface portion 6731 .

After that, the arrow L23d reaches the inner extension portion 6732 and is emitted. Note that the outer surface of the inner extension portion 6732 (the surface on the side opposite to the outer extension portion 6733) is processed to have a jagged shape, so that light is emitted in the form of surface emission.

Here, as shown in FIG. 281, the light indicated by the arrow L23d includes light traveling toward the rear side of the electrical board 6720. As shown in FIG. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, the electrical decoration board 6720 having the LED chip D1 that emits light to the front side on the front side can cause the back side portion of the electrical decoration board 6720 to emit light (at least, the electrical decoration Light can travel to the back side of the substrate 6720, see FIG. 281).

The inner surface of the rear-side end portion of the curved plate member 6750 arranged on the downstream side of the arrow L23d is formed into a lens shape in which fine semicircular cross-sections are arranged vertically in a rear view (see FIG. 276).
. As a result, the light traveling along the arrow L23d and reaching the rear end of the curved plate member 6750 can be emitted to the left in a uniform vertical manner, and the glass unit 16 can be brightly illuminated by this light.

Therefore, from the irradiation device arranged on the back side of the glass unit 16, the glass unit 16
Since the light directed toward and the light traveling along the arrow L23d can be combined to execute the light effect, the degree of freedom in designing the light effect can be improved.

Note that, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to reduce the difference in brightness between the light indicated by the arrow L23c and the light indicated by the arrow L23d. That is, at the time of incidence on the long rib 6734, due to the difference in angle with the axis X23, the light indicated by the arrow L23d is the light indicated by the arrow L23c.
However, the light indicated by the arrow L23 suffers an energy loss corresponding to the transmitted light when it is reflected by the light receiving surface portion 6731. Therefore, when the light reaches the inner extension portion 6732, are visually recognized as light with substantially the same brightness. In this way, it is possible to reduce the difference in the brightness of the light depending on the irradiation direction, and it is possible to easily make the brightness of the inner extending portion 6732 uniform over the front and back.

Here, in the present embodiment, the configuration of the horizontal effect device 6700 arranged on the left side is almost symmetrical (or similar) to the configuration of the horizontal effect device 6700 on the right side. As a special portion that is not symmetrical, the formation of long ribs 6734 (projecting to the back) is omitted (the formation of fins 6735 is maintained). As a result, the mode of light production is adjusted for each range of the game area (glass unit 16, see FIG. 265).

This adjustment is for ensuring the visibility of the player. In other words, the intention is to maintain the effect accompanying light traveling to the fins 6735 on the left side, but to suppress the light traveling to the game area side due to the light traveling to the long rib 6734 .

That is, in order to improve the visibility of the game ball at the left side of the game area where the shot ball enters the game area, the intensity of the light emitted inward (toward the game area) from the horizontal effect device 6700 is reduced. is aimed at. As a result, it is possible to prevent in advance that it becomes difficult to visually recognize the shot ball due to the dazzling light effect, and it becomes difficult to adjust the shooting intensity and confirm the shot of the game ball.

On the other hand, on the right side of the game area, most of the balls fired rightward (strongest firing strength) flow down, and there is little need for the player to visually recognize the ball to adjust the firing strength of the ball. . In addition, since a large number of game balls in a short period of time continuously flow down a narrow spot, light is emitted to the spot and reflected on the game ball, thereby producing a presentation effect using light. can be easily improved. Therefore, it is not necessary to weaken the intensity of the light on the right side of the game area. , the production effect can be improved.

An arrow L23e indicates light emitted in a direction intersecting the longitudinal direction of the long rib 6734 and emitted in a direction having a large angle with the axis X23 (light that does not enter the long rib 6734). Indicates the direction of travel. This light is reflected by the inner surfaces of the left and right extended portions 6732 and 6733 or reaches the light receiving surface portion 6731 to emit surface light.
is extended to a position very close to the edge light emitting portion D1a, the intensity of the light traveling in the direction of the arrow L23e is originally very small, so the light can be configured as light that is difficult for the player to visually recognize.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the light traveling along the arrow L23e from being visually recognized as being mixed with the light emitted from the surface light emitting portion D1b, thereby preventing a reduction in the effect of the light.

Returning to FIG. 280(a), the role of the fitting portion 6737 and the light emitting effect near the fitting portion 6737 will be described. The V-shaped rib 6734b is connected to the fitting portion 67 at the intermediate connecting portion 6734b1.
37 (see FIG. 274). Therefore, part of the light incident on the V-shaped rib 6734b reaches the left surface of the fitting portion 6737 through both walls of the recess 6737a, similar to the contents described above with the arrows L23c and L23d.

The recessed portion 6737a is configured as a recessed portion in which the fastening portion 6753 (see FIG. 278) of the curved plate member 6750 can slide back and forth. is blocked, there is a possibility that the effect of the lighting effect is lowered.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, sufficient alignment (prevention of misalignment) can be achieved by matching the shapes of the fitting portion 6737 and the decorative projecting portion 6751a. It is possible to reduce the number of fastening screws while preventing misalignment, and to reduce locations where the effect of the lighting effect is lowered.

In addition, a concave portion 6737a is arranged near the fastening screw to avoid interference with the fastening screw, and light passing through the concave portion 6737a is emitted from the surface of the inner extension portion 6732. It prevents the surrounding area from becoming too dark. As a result, it is possible to suppress the degree of reduction in the performance effect of the light emission performance.

Next, the eighteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 282 to 284. FIG. In the seventeenth embodiment described above, the electrical board 6 is provided on the front side of the acoustic device 6610 above the front frame 10014 .
570 is provided, but the pachinko machine 18010 in the eighteenth embodiment is provided with a production device 18800 having an illumination board 18830 at the lower right side of the operation device 10300, so that the front frame 18014 Also in the lower part, it is possible to execute the lighting effect. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 282 is a front view of the pachinko machine 18010 in the eighteenth embodiment, and FIG.
is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 18010. FIG. The pachinko machine 18010 has a front frame 180
14 differs from the pachinko machine 10010 in the 17th embodiment in that it is equipped with a production device 18800 in contrast to the front frame 10014 in the 17th embodiment, and since the rest of the configuration is the same, only the production device 18800 will be explained, Description of other configurations is omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 282 and 283, the effect device 18800 is a light-emitting device in which the back side and the top side of the lower plate unit 6400 are coupled to the covering base member 6410 on the front side. It is arranged between the operating handle 51 and the operating handle 51 .

This effect device 18800 is structurally devised so that the appearance of the light emission effect changes depending on whether or not the operation device 10300 participates in the operation effect. Next, the internal structure of the rendering device 18800 will be described in order to describe the structural contrivance.

284(a) is a cross-sectional view of the rendering device 18800 taken along line CCLXXXIVa-CCLXXXIVa in FIG. 282, and FIG.
It is a schematic diagram of the electrical decoration board 18830 of the production|presentation apparatus 18800 in XIVb direction view. In addition, in FIG.284(b), the support aspect of the electrical decoration board 18830 is shown typically.

As shown in FIG. 284(a), the effect device 18800 is provided with a connecting base member 18810 connected to the lower tray unit 6400 and a planar gap on the front side of the connecting base member 18810. An intermediate fixing member 18820 which is a frame-shaped member and is fixed to the connecting base member 18810, an electrical board 18830 arranged in a gap between the connecting base member 18810 and the intermediate fixing member 18820, and an electrical board 18830 A light receiving member 18840 fixed to the front side of the intermediate fixing member 18820 so that the light emitted from the LED chip D1 can travel inside, and a covering member 18 attached so as to cover the outer surface of the light receiving member 18840
850 and .

The connecting base member 18810 has a front wall surface facing the electrical board 18830 formed as an inclined surface that slopes downward toward the rear surface. The inclination angle of this inclined surface is the same as the direction Y17a (see FIG. 215) of vibration of the vibration device 10366 when the swing device member 10310 of the operation device 10300 is arranged in the upward position and is in the posture before operation. It is formed at an inclination angle parallel to the inclined surface.

The illumination board 18830 is arranged in parallel with the front wall surface of the connecting base member 18810 . Therefore, the vibration direction Y17a of the vibrating device 10366 is parallel to the surface of the electrical board 18830 . The electrical board 18830 mainly includes an LED chip D1, a long hole 18831 elongated in the vertical direction, and a plate spring 18832 that generates an upward biasing force.

The elongated hole 18831 is a hole through which the fixing portion 18821 of the intermediate fixing member 18820 is inserted for supporting the electrical board 18830 . Therefore, the difference (length) between the vertical length of the long hole 18831 and the diameter of the fixing portion 18821 is designed as the length (permissible length) that allows the electrical board 18830 to be mechanically displaced.

On the front side of the electrical board 18830, LED chips D1 are arranged in an arbitrary pattern (vertices of a pentagon in this embodiment), and irradiate light in the direction normal to the surface of the electrical board 18830. FIG. Therefore, the light emitted from the LED chip D1 is emitted in a downwardly inclined direction toward the front side. On the other hand, the light-receiving member 18840 that receives this light is formed so as to change the traveling direction of the light along the front-rear direction.

That is, the player sees the light whose traveling direction is changed by the light-receiving member 18840, so that the traveling direction of the light emitted from the LED chip D1 is inclined downward toward the front side (the player's line of sight). Even in the direction away from the ), it is possible to prevent the production effect of the light production from being lowered.

The light-receiving member 18840 is made of a colorless and transparent light-transmitting resin material, and
A plate-like portion 18841 configured to be able to block the opening on the front side of the 8820, and its plate-like portion 188
41 is mainly provided with a plurality of extension plate portions 18842 extending in a plate shape from the back surface of 41 .

The intermediate fixing member 18820 is made of a resin material with low light transmittance and formed into a container shape with an open front side. 18821 and a plurality of insertion holes 18822 drilled at positions and sizes capable of receiving the extended plate portion 18842 on the rear side bottom portion.

In the present embodiment, since the resin mold extraction direction of the light receiving member 18840 is set in the horizontal direction, the extended plate portion 18842 is formed in a plate shape with the same cross section in the horizontal direction. Therefore, L
Since the ED chips D1 are arranged at the apexes of the pentagon, the LED chips D1 arranged horizontally at the middle position and the lower position can be associated with the common extended plate portion 18842 . Thereby, the extension plate portion 18842 can be formed as three upper and lower plate-like portions having different widths. Similarly, the insertion hole 18822 of the intermediate fixing member 18820 is also bored at three upper and lower positions with different widths.

Here, as shown in FIG. 284, the extension plate portion 18842 is formed in a curved plate shape that gradually curves, although it begins to extend along the normal direction of the plate-like portion 18841 . The radius of curvature of the curve can be set arbitrarily, but in this embodiment, the LED chip D1 of the electrical board 18830
To the extent that total reflection can be continued until the light emitted from the plate-like portion 18841 is reached,
It is designed with a curved shape with a large radius of curvature. As a result, the extension tip of the extension plate portion 18842 (
It is possible to make it easier for the light incident on the rear surface side end portion to reach the plate-like portion 18841 while maintaining its intensity.

The covering member 18850 is a member for suppressing light leakage from a portion of the outer surface of the light receiving member 18840 where no light effect is desired, and can be realized in various ways. For example, it may be a light-shielding tape (insulating tape) that can be attached, or a cup-shaped member made of a resin material.

In this embodiment, the covering member 18850 is configured as a cup-shaped member that can be fitted from the front side. A plurality of through-holes 18851 are formed at the vertex position of to allow light to pass through.

As described above, the arrangement of the through holes 18851 does not have to be the same as the arrangement of the LED chips D1, and a similar shape with a slightly different size is possible. L.
Considering the traveling mode of the light emitted from the ED chip D1, the formation mode of the light receiving member 18840 is more important than the placement of the LED chip D1 when designing the placement of the through holes 18851. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the through hole 18851 is designed to be formed at a position that coincides with the position of the base of the extended plate portion 18842 of the light receiving member 18840 in a front view.

The action of the effect device 18800 will be described. As described above, the electrical board 18830 is movable in the first displacement direction parallel to the surface on which the LED chip D1 is arranged, within an allowable width corresponding to the long hole 18831. Vibrator 1036 of device 10300
6 coincides with the vibration direction Y17a.

That is, when the operation device 10300 performs a vibration effect, the vibration causes the electrical board 1883 to move.
0 is configured to be slidable. When the electrical board 18830 slides, the positional relationship between the position of the LED chip D1 and the end of the extended plate portion 18842 shifts.
It becomes difficult for the light emitted from to enter the extended plate portion 18842 .

In this case, even when light is emitted from the LED chip D1, the light is
through-hole 18851 appears dark. That is, it cannot be grasped whether the LED chip D1 is emitting light. On the other hand, in the operation device 10300, as described above, by operating the swing operation member 10310, the vibration direction Y17a of the vibration device 10366 changes to a direction different from the first shift direction.

In this case, the influence of the vibration of the operation device 10300 on the electrical board 18830 is suppressed, and the electrical board 18830 returns to the initial position (upper end position) by the biasing force of the plate spring 18832 . At the initial position of the electrical board 18830, the LED chip D1 and the extended plate portion 188
42 is arranged to face the back side end of the LED chip D1, and the light emitted from the LED chip D1 is directed to the extended plate portion 18.
842, and is formed so as to be able to advance to the front side by total internal reflection.

That is, even when the operation device 10300 is performing a vibration effect (when the through-hole 18851 is visually recognized darkly) in a state where light is emitted from the LED chip D1, by pushing the swing operation member 10310 , the through-hole 18851 can be visually recognized brightly.

Therefore, when the through hole 18851 is visually recognized dark when the vibration effect is performed, it is possible to grasp whether or not the LED chip D1 is emitting light by operating the swing operation member 10310. can be done. Here, for example, the LED chip D1 is controlled to emit light when a big win occurs or when the game state is shifted to a game state advantageous to the player (that is, when a change advantageous to the player occurs). , the player's interest in whether or not the LED chip D1 emits light can be enhanced.

As a result, since the player's desire to operate the swing operation member 10310 can be enhanced, when the effect of operating the swing operation member 10310 is executed, the player's willingness to participate is enhanced, and the player is actually encouraged to participate. The swing operation member 10310 can be induced to operate.

In this embodiment, the case where the electrical board 18830 is arranged outside the covering base member 6410 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, electrical board 18830
is disposed in such a manner as to penetrate the covering base member 6410 and enter inside, and the operation device 103
00 may be made contactable.

In this case, the vibration of the operation device 10300 can be easily transmitted to the illumination board 18830, and the illumination board 18830 slides not only with the vibration but also with the pushing operation (push operation) into the lens member 10317. can be configured as

In this case, for example, the LED chip D1 may be controlled to emit light at a timing other than the timing at which the pressing instruction as the notification effect is generated. When the lens member 10317 is pushed (push operation) at the timing when the LED chip D1 emits light, L
It is possible to realize a configuration in which it is difficult to determine whether or not the ED chip D1 emits light when viewed from the front.

In other words, when the lens member 10317 is pressed (push operation) at a timing other than the notification, it is possible to make it easier for the player to miss the notification that is advantageous to the player. Since it is possible to easily suppress the pressing operation to the lens member 10317 at times other than the timing at which the pressing instruction is generated, the operation device 10300 may fail early, or the operation device may be operated unnecessarily many times to generate noise. It is possible to suppress nuisance behavior.

Next, the nineteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the seventeenth embodiment described above, the case where the covers 10321 and 10322 of the operation device 10300 are formed to be divisible into left and right has been described, but the covers 19321 and 19322 in the nineteenth embodiment
It is formed so that it can be divided into front and rear. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 285 is a side view of covers 19321 and 19322 in the nineteenth embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 285, in this embodiment, an upper cover 19321 and a lower cover 1932
2 are arranged so as to surround the swing operation member 10310 (see FIG. 207). The main configuration of the covers 19321 and 19322 has substantially the same shape as the above-described covers 10321 and 10322, and the description will be made mainly as an example in which the direction of division is changed.

The covers 19321 and 19322 are formed so as to be separable along a dividing plane coinciding with the reference line X19 shown in FIG. The cover 19322 can be fastened and fixed by a fastening screw that is screwed into the fastening portion 19322a of the cover 19322 .

Here, the reference line X19 is set as a direction parallel to the vibration direction Y17a (see FIG. 215) of the vibration device 10366 before operation when the swing operation member 10310 is in the upward position. That is, since the fastening direction of the fastening screw fastened to the fastening portion 19322a is perpendicular to the vibration direction Y17a in a side view (see FIG. 285), loosening of the fastening screw due to the impact of vibration can be suppressed.

In addition, since the direction Y17a of vibration of the swinging operation member 10310 is the same as the pushing operation direction (push direction) of the lens member 10317 (see FIG. 216(a)), the pushing operation direction of the lens member 10317 and the fastening screw 285 are perpendicular to each other in a side view (see FIG. 285), it is possible to suppress loosening of the fastening screws due to impact caused by the operation of the lens member 10317 .

Next, a twentieth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the seventeenth embodiment described above, the projecting shape portion 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414 are formed in a flat plate shape in cross section,
Although the case where the plate thickness is substantially constant at the slanted portion has been described, the protruding shape portion 16413 and the recessed shape portion 16414 in the twentieth embodiment are formed with a slight slope toward the vertical direction. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

286 is a cross-sectional view of the lower tray unit 16400 in the twentieth embodiment taken along line CCXXXIIIb-CCXXXIIIb in FIG. 229. FIG. As shown in FIG. 286, in this embodiment, the inclinations of the left and right ends of the projecting shape portion 16413 and the recessed shape portion 16414 are different from those of the projecting shape portion 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414 described above in the seventeenth embodiment. is set closer to the vertical direction.

In addition, the lower end portion of the protruding shape portion 16413 (corresponding to the protruding shape portion 6413 of the seventeenth embodiment) and the upper end portion of the recessed shape portion 16414 (corresponding to the recessed shape portion 6414 of the seventeenth embodiment) (
base end of the recess) are arranged on the same line in the up-down direction (vertical direction).

The hanging plate-like portion 6426b of the plate-like support portion 6426 of the lower plate forming member 6420
414 (the upper surface of the body portion 6411) and is supported by the base end portion of the body portion 6411, a sufficient thickness for supporting the body portion 6411 in the vertical direction (vertical direction) can be secured at the support position. Body portion 6411 due to load during operation of operation device 10300 (see FIG. 207)
deformation can be suppressed.

In this embodiment, the case where the inclination of the left and right ends is changed compared to the projecting shape portion 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this.
For example, the left and right outer surfaces of the projecting shape portion 6413 and the left and right inner surfaces of the recess shape portion 6414 may be formed along the vertical direction (the vertical direction in a cross-sectional view) without any inclination. Even in this case, the supporting thickness of the main body portion 6411 can be sufficiently secured.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by forming an inverted V shape in cross section, the direction in which the projecting shape portion 6413 and the recess shape portion 6414 are deformed when receiving an external force is shifted to the left-right center side. can be easily directed to As a result, the degree of fatigue caused by external force can be reduced compared to the case where deformation is possible in both the left and right directions, and the plate portion forming the projecting shape portion 6413 and the recess shape portion 6414 is damaged early. can be prevented. In other words, the durability of the lower tray unit 6400 can be improved.

Next, a twenty-first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 287 to 301. FIG. In the seventeenth embodiment described above, a case was described in which the supply of electricity to the lower tray unit 6400 was not required. Equipped with a device 21500, it is necessary to supply electricity to the lower tray unit 21400. In addition, the same reference numerals are assigned to the same parts as those of the above-described embodiments,
The explanation is omitted.

FIG. 287 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 10014, operation device 10300 and lower tray unit 21400 in the twenty-first embodiment. In addition, in FIG. 287, the front frame 1001
4 is omitted, and the lower tray unit 21400 and the operation device 10300 are
After being disassembled from the metal body part 10014a, it is illustrated in a direction view from the rear side.

In order to facilitate understanding, the assembling direction lines connecting the insertion holes 6801R and 6801L and their fastening portions are illustrated by imaginary lines. is partially illustrated in relation to the front frame 10014, the operating device 10300 and the lower tray unit 21400. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 287, a bottom member 21De obtained by changing the design of the bottom member De described above is fastened and fixed to the bottom side of the operation device 10300. As shown in FIG. The bottom member 21De includes, in addition to the configuration of the bottom member De described above, a projecting portion De3 that projects to the right.

The protruding portion De3 has both a function of applying a load to the vibrating device 21500 and a function of regulating the displacement of the electrical wiring 21513 connected to the vibrating device 21500 . That is, as shown in FIG. 287, the electrical wiring 21513 is routed along the underside of the protruding portion De3, so that when the lower tray unit 21400 is removed for maintenance, the electrical wiring 21513 and the right front cover are separated from each other. 10322 can be prevented from rubbing against each other.

The projecting portion De3 is formed so that the rear surface side is inclined in a manner that the width becomes narrower toward the projecting end,
The front side constitutes a plane parallel to a plane perpendicular to the front-rear direction. By configuring in this way, the metal main body 1001 can be mounted on the rear side of the overhang De3 while ensuring the rigidity of the overhang De3.
4a can be created.

In this gap, the electrical wiring 21513 of a length necessary for removing the lower tray unit 21400 during maintenance (wiring of a length that fills the length of the distance between the lower tray unit 21400 and the metal main body 10014a) is inserted into the lower tray unit 21400. is not removed (metal main body 1001
4a), it is effectively used as an area to be loosened and arranged. As a result, compared to the case where the electrical wiring 21513 is arranged in a tight space when the lower tray unit 21400 is not removed, the load received by the electrical wiring 21513 from the surroundings can be reduced.

As shown in FIG. 287, the operating handle 51 is internally supported by a handle support plate 21051, and the handle support plate 21051 is fastened and fixed to the metal body portion 10014a. In the assembled state (see FIG. 208), the left edge of the handle support plate 21051 and the right edge of the lower tray unit 21400 overlap front to back.
A fastening portion is not formed over the entire left side edge of 1, and the connection with the lower tray unit 21400 is performed not by fastening but by engagement (fitting by fitting in the front-rear direction).

Therefore, the lower tray unit 21400 and the handle support plate 21051 are not mechanically fixed, but are configured to be relatively displaceable in the front-rear direction.

As a result, compared to the case where the right edge of the lower tray unit 21400 and the left edge of the handle support plate 21051 are fastened and fixed over the entire area, the right edge of the lower tray unit 21400 is displaced in the front-rear direction. Along with this, it is possible to prevent the left edge of the handle support plate 21051 from being displaced in the front-rear direction. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the vibration of the vibrating device 21500, which will be described later, from being transmitted to the operation handle 51 via the handle support plate 21051. FIG.

That is, the vibration of the vibration device 21500 can be configured to be transmitted from the lower tray unit 21400 to the player. For example, the transmission path of the vibration transmitted to the player holding the operating handle 51 is not a path through the operating handle 51, but a lower tray unit that contacts the fingers or arms of the player holding the operating handle 51. 21400 right side.

288 is an exploded front perspective view of the lower tray unit 21400, and FIG. 289 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lower tray unit 21400. FIG. In Figures 288 and 289, the overlying base member 21
410, the lower plate forming member 21420, the V-shaped design member 21450, and the portions corresponding to the fixing points of the vibrating device 21500 are shown in imaginary lines.

The covering base member 21410 includes the body portion 641 in addition to the configuration of the covering base member 6410 described above.
A plurality (a pair in this embodiment) of fastening portions 21415 formed so that a fastening screw can be screwed in the region on the right side of the recessed shape portion 6414 of 1 is provided. The fastening portion 21415 includes the vibration device 21
A fastening screw inserted through a pair of upper and lower insertion portions 21535 arranged on the right side of 500 is screwed. That is, the right insertion portion 21535 is fastened and fixed to the covering base member 21410 .

The lower plate forming member 21420 has the configuration of the lower plate forming member 6420 described above, in addition to the front longitudinally elongated portion 6 .
A support hole 21428 is provided in the plate-like portion extending upward from the upper surface of 426c and is drilled in the front-rear direction. The fastening portion 21457 of the V-shaped design member 21450 , which is the connecting portion between the V-shaped design member 21450 and the vibration device 21500 , is inserted through the support hole 21428 .

The V-shaped design member 21450 has the configuration of the V-shaped design member 6450 described above, in addition to the plate-like projecting portion 6
453R (see FIG. 227), a fastening portion 21457 that protrudes toward the rear side in a columnar shape and is formed so that a fastening screw can be screwed therein, and a fastening portion 21457 that is formed in a plate shape and an insertion hole 6452 are separated from each other. and a connecting plate-like portion 21458 to be connected.

The fastening portion 21457 is inserted through the support hole 21428 in the assembled state (see FIG. 208), and a fastening screw inserted through the insertion portion 21535 on the left side of the vibrating device 21500 is screwed into the fastening portion 21457 to be fastened and fixed. That is, the left insertion portion 21535 is fastened and fixed to the lower plate forming member 21420 and the V-shaped design member 21450 .

Therefore, the vibrating device 21500 is not fastened and fixed to a single member, but is fastened and fixed to a plurality of members (covering base member 21410, lower plate forming member 21420 and V-shaped design member 21450). Thereby, the fastening strength of these members can be reinforced by the vibration device 21500 .

Here, as described above, the V-shaped design member 21450 has the protruding fastening portions 6454 disposed at the left and right ends fastened and fixed to the metal main body portion 10014a via intermediate members. for that reason,
It is structurally stiffer than the covering base member 21410, which is configured in a substantially bag-like shape that opens to the back side and is fastened and fixed to the metal main body 10014a mainly at the edge on the back side.

That is, the covering base member 21410 is fastened and fixed to the metal main body 10014a at a plurality of positions at the lower end and the left end on the back side, while the number of fastening positions at the upper part and the right edge is suppressed (or not, Since it is formed in a thin, substantially box-like (substantially bag-like) shape, it has a structure with a high degree of freedom of displacement (low resistance), especially at the right edge.

Furthermore, since the V-shaped design member 21450 is fastened and fixed to the front upper edge of the covering base member 21410, the vertical displacement of the covering base member 21410 can be suppressed by the V-shaped design member 21450. , the degree of freedom of displacement of the covering base member 21410 in the longitudinal direction (horizontal direction)
can be improved with As a result, the displacement of the covering base member 21410 can prevent the ball stored in the lower tray 50 from bouncing due to the vertical displacement of the lower tray 50, for example.

According to the present embodiment, with the V-shaped design member 21450 configured firmly as a base (reference),
Flexible covering base member 21410 (high degree of freedom of displacement) compared to V-shaped design member 21450
can be vibrated, the covering base member 214 can be vibrated by driving the vibration device 21500.
The right side of 10 can be intensively vibrated (strong vibration).

In addition, since the transmission of vibration to the V-shaped design member 21450 and the lower plate forming member 21420 can be suppressed, the operation device 10300 vibrates due to the vibration of the vibration device 21500, and the ball stored in the lower plate 50 vibrates. Vibration due to the vibration of the device 21500 can be avoided, and from this, it can be said that the right side portion of the covering base member 21410 can be intensively vibrated (strongly vibrated) by driving the vibration device 21500 .

The connecting plate-like portion 21458 is formed in an elongated plate-like shape along the longitudinal direction of the later-described shell-like overhanging portion 21541 . As a result, the connecting plate-like portion 214 extends along the longitudinal direction of the shell-like projecting portion 21541 .
58 and the shell-shaped protruding portion 21541 can be brought into contact with each other, and a large load generating area can be secured, so stress concentration during contact (pressing) can be avoided.

In the present embodiment, in the assembled state (see FIG. 208), the shell-like projecting portion 21541 is configured in a dimensional relationship to abut (press) the connecting plate-like portion 21458 (see FIG. 298).
Therefore, vibration can be received through at least the contact position between the shell-shaped projecting portion 21541 and the connecting plate-shaped portion 21458 .

This configuration is effective in a configuration in which the vibrating device 21500 is fastened and fixed to a plurality of members as in this embodiment. That is, compared to the case where the vibrating device 21500 is fastened and fixed to a single member, when fastening and fixing the vibrating device 21500 to a plurality of members, there is a possibility that deviations from the design dimensions of each member may accumulate, so the dimensions are increased. It is easy for the deviation to become large. Therefore, the arrangement of the vibration device 21500 becomes unstable, and it becomes difficult to stabilize the transmission strength of vibration.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in anticipation of the possibility of dimensional deviations, no matter how the dimensional deviations occur (regardless of the dimensions within the large and small limits), By designing the dimensions such that the projecting portion 21541 contacts the connecting plate portion 21458 (if the distance is short, the projecting portion 21541 contacts while being deformed so as to be crushed), the projecting portion 21541 is stably shaped like a shell. The projecting portion 21541 and the connecting plate-like portion 21458 can be brought into contact with each other. Therefore,
Vibration can be stably received.

In this embodiment, the direction of contact between the shell-shaped protruding portion 21541 and the connecting plate-shaped portion 21458 is set to the front-rear direction in the same manner as the screwing direction of the fastening screw. Therefore, even if the V-shaped design member 21450 is displaced downward by operating the operation device 10300 as described above, the V-shaped design member 21450 is displaced so as to slide relative to the shell-shaped projecting portion 21541. , and it is possible to avoid the transmission of the downward displacement. Therefore, vibrating device 21
500 can be suppressed from being pushed down when the operation device 10300 is operated.

In addition, in this embodiment, the place where the vibrating device 21500 is arranged is the covering base member 21
Since the portion 410 is flexible, it is easily broken in the event of a fraudulent act of breaking the outer shell of the pachinko machine A10 and penetrating inside (for example, penetrating a thin metal wire). That is, in the present embodiment, the vibrating device 21500 is arranged at a location that is likely to be selected as an intrusion route by a person who commits fraudulent acts.

Therefore, when the covering base member 21410 is broken, there is a possibility that the vibrating device 21500 will be destroyed or disconnected at the same time. By controlling so that an error signal is output as the audio lamp control device 113 detects this, it is possible to detect fraudulent activity at an early stage.

Also, instead of the vibration device 21500, a device that outputs an error signal may be provided. It can be used for performance. That is, since the vibrating device 21500 can be used both for vibrating effects and for detecting fraud (it can be configured as a multifunctional device), it is possible to reduce the installation space of the device.

290 is an exploded front perspective view of the vibration device 21500, and FIG.
500 is an exploded rear perspective view of FIG. As illustrated in Figures 290 and 291, the vibration device 2
1500 is formed of a vibration motor 21510 capable of generating vibration by controlling the eccentric weight 21512 to rotate, and a soft resin material (silicon resin, etc.).
A covering member 21520 that covers 1510 is formed of a harder material (for example, a resin material or a metal material) than the covering member 21520, and has a shape that can partially cover the covering member 21520 from the rear side. Formed covering cover member 21530 and covering member 21
A flat plate-like opposing plate member 2154 arranged to face the covering cover member 21530 with the 520 interposed therebetween.
0.

The covering cover member 21530 and the opposing plate member 21540 hold the vibration motor 21510 and the covering member 21520 so as to surround them from the front and back, and are fastened and fixed by fastening screws. Namely
There are a plurality of covering covers 21530 (two in this embodiment) through which the screw portions of the fastening screws can be inserted.
The opposing plate member 21540 includes a plurality of fastening portions 21542 into which fastening screws inserted through the insertion holes 21532 can be screwed. Hereinafter, the vibrating motor 21510 and the covering member 21520 to be held will be described first, and then the details of the covering cover member 21530 and the opposing plate member 21540 will be described.

292 is an exploded front perspective view of the vibration motor 21510 and the covering member 21520,
293 is an exploded rear perspective view of the vibration motor 21510 and the covering member 21520, and FIG. 294 is a front perspective view of the covering member 21520. FIG. In FIG. 294, covering member 21520
is viewed obliquely from above and forward.

The vibration motor 21510 includes a body portion 21511 whose rotation is controlled by energization of the shaft portion, an eccentric weight 21512 fixed to the shaft portion and having a center of gravity located at a position different from the shaft portion, and a lower surface of the body portion 21511. and an electric wiring 21513 (electrically connected to a terminal formed on the lower surface) extending downward from the .

The covering member 21520 includes a cylindrical body portion 21521 formed in a cylindrical shape with an inner shape slightly smaller than the outer shape of the body portion 21511 of the vibration motor 21510, and a ridge extending vertically along the back surface of the cylindrical body portion 21521. A pair of protrusions 21522 formed as
a plate-like protrusion 21523 protruding in the left-right direction along the lower surface of the tubular main body 21;
521, and an overhanging portion 21524 projecting downward from the lower surface of the device 521 in an oval shape when viewed from the bottom.

The protruding portion 21524 connects the body portion 21511 of the vibration motor 21510 and the electrical wiring 21513 .
It is formed in an oval shape of a size that encloses the connection position with the bottom view, and the top side is the electric wiring 21513
is recessed to accept the

That is, as shown in FIG. 294, the protruding portion 21524 extends vertically in a recessed portion 21524a that is recessed downward from the lower surface side of the tubular main body portion 21521 and in a region sandwiched between the recessed portion 21524a. A wiring through-hole 21524b is drilled, and a pair of spare holes 21524 are vertically drilled at a position opposite to the wiring through-hole 21524b across the recessed portion 21524a.
c.

With the above configuration, the electric wiring 21513 is guided to the wiring through-hole 21524b while being held in the recessed portion 21524a, and is guided in the opening direction (downward) of the wiring through-hole 21524b. That is, in this embodiment, the covering member 21520 has a function of preventing the electrical wiring 21513 from sagging due to its own weight, a function of bundling the electrical wiring 21513 , and a function of bundling the electrical wiring 21513 .
513 can be provided. As a result, the number of binding bands required can be reduced, and material costs and manufacturing man-hours can be reduced.

In addition, when the covering member 21520 is not assembled, a gap is generated between the covering cover 21530 and the opposing plate portion 21540.
It is possible to prevent forgetting to add 0. Therefore, forgetting to assemble the member for holding the electric wiring 21513 can be suppressed compared to the case where the binding band is prepared separately to hold the electric wiring 21513 .

Note that in this embodiment, the electrical wiring 21513 is connected to the input/output port 225 of the audio lamp controller 113 (see FIG. 4). That is, the vibration motor 21510 of the vibration device 21500
is configured as part of the other device 228 and is vibration-controlled by a control signal transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 .

The preliminary hole 21524c is formed at a position vertically corresponding to the connection position between the electrical wiring 21513 and the main body 21511 . That is, even if the electric wire 21513 is about to come off from the main body 21511, the electric wire 21513 can be pushed into the main body 21511 by inserting a thin rod through the spare hole 21524c and pushing the electric wire 21513. can. This can prevent the electrical wiring 21513 from coming off the main body 21511 .

In this embodiment, a vibrating device 21500 is arranged in a lower tray unit 21400 (see FIG. 287). Since the lower tray unit 21400 is detachable from the metal main body 10014a, if a worker who performs maintenance work accidentally removes the lower tray unit 21400 too far from the metal main body 10014a, the electrical wiring 21513 may be damaged. Excessive load is applied, and there is a risk of disconnection. Also, when the vibrating device 21500 vibrates, the electrical wiring 215
If an excessive load is applied to 13, there is also a risk of disconnection.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the projecting portion 21524 is formed so as to cover the connection position between the electrical wiring 21513 and the main body portion 21511, so that the electrical wiring 21513 and the main body portion 2
Excessive displacement of the connection position with 1511 can be prevented.

Furthermore, before the wiring through hole 21524b, the electric wiring 21513 having a length to be held in the recessed portion 21524a is secured, so that the electric wiring 21513 can be prevented from breaking for this length. You can (you can afford it). Also, electrical wiring 2
Even if a load is applied to 1513, the longitudinal direction of the electrical wiring 21513 held in the recessed portion 21524a (that is, the longitudinal direction of the projecting portion 21524) is not the connection direction between the electrical wiring 21513 and the main body portion 21511. Since the load is applied along the electrical wiring 21513
It is possible to avoid dropping out of 1511.

In addition, as described above, even if the electrical wiring 21513 falls out of the main body 21511, the electrical wiring 2151 can be easily removed by inserting a thin rod through the spare hole 21524c.
3 can be reconnected to body portion 21511 . Therefore, it is possible to improve the work efficiency of maintenance work including the step of removing the lower tray unit 21400 .

In addition, in the step of inserting (assembling) the vibration motor 21510 into the covering member 21520 , the electrical wiring 21513 is arranged on the covering member 21520 side with respect to the main body portion 21511 . Therefore, since the work of inserting the electric wiring 21513 into the wiring through-hole 21524b can be performed simultaneously with the work of inserting the vibration motor 21510 into the covering member 21520, the efficiency of the assembly work can be improved.

295 is a front view of the covering cover member 21530. FIG. In addition, in the description of FIG.
Reference is made to FIGS. 290 and 291 as appropriate. The covering cover member 21530 includes a body portion 21531 forming a frame whose front side and bottom side are open, the insertion hole 21532 described above, and the body portion 21532.
a receiving recess 21533 that is recessed in the front side of 1531 and receives the vibration motor 21510;
A plurality of projecting ridges 21534 extending in the front-rear direction, which are projections projecting inward from the left and right inner surfaces of the receiving recess 21533, and the insertion hole 21532 are drilled in the front-rear direction at the upper and lower positions, Covering base member 21410, lower plate forming member 21420 and V-shaped design member 2145
0 (see FIGS. 288 and 289).

The receiving recess 21533 includes a weight receiving recess 21533a for receiving the eccentric weight 21512, a main body receiving recess 21533b for receiving the main body 21511, and a weight receiving recess 21533a and the main body in such a manner that the rotation axis of the main body 21511 is arranged at the center position in the left-right direction. Receiving recess 2153
and a bearing receiving recess 21533c that connects 3b.

The main body receiving recess 21533b is recessed by an extra length on the right side with respect to the bearing receiving recess 21533c compared to the left side. Conversely, the protrusion 21534 protrudes longer on the right side than on the left side, so that the protruding tip of the protrusion 21534 is located in the bearing receiving recess 21.
533c are arranged at substantially symmetrical positions.

Thus, as a holding mode of the covering member 21520 , when the vibration motor 21510 is in a non-excited state (stopped state), the covering member 21520 is held by the projecting tip of the projection 21534 , while the vibration motor 21
In the excitation state (vibrating state) of 510, the coating member 2 is pushed by a deep recess formed on the right side of the body receiving recess 21533b (a recess formed between the vertically arranged ridges 21534).
1520 deformation (displacement, flow) can be supported. As a result, the covering cover member 2
1530 can be prevented from being overloaded, and the durability of the covering cover member 21530 can be improved.

Since the rib portion 21534 is formed along the front-rear direction, the displacement of the covering member 21520 that is supported in contact with the rib portion 21534 in the left and right direction is affected by engagement with and biting into the rib portion 21534. Therefore, it is likely to occur in the front, back, left and right (horizontal direction), and is suppressed in the vertical direction.

Therefore, even in a configuration in which the body portion 21511 is arranged at the upper end of the body portion 21511 such that the eccentric weight 21512 is arranged at the upper end of the body portion 21511, and the body portion 21511 tends to tilt about the lower end when vibration occurs, the vertical component of the vibration can be suppressed. , the displacement direction of the vibration motor 21510 can be corrected in the horizontal direction.

The projecting portion 21534 is formed in the shape of a plane plate having a vertical width half that of the left and right side portions in the left and right intermediate portions of the main body portion 21531, and the projecting length increases as it approaches the intermediate portion 21531a side (back side) (cover side). Since the covering member 215
20 can be supported from the left, right and rear sides.

In addition, the ridge portion 21534 has an intermediate lower surface 2153 that constitutes the lower surface of the intermediate portion 21531a.
On the lower side of 1b, there is provided a rear inclined portion 21534a that rises from the nearest projected streak portion 21534 toward the intermediate lower surface 21531b.

The distance between the rear inclined portion 21534a and the ridge portion 21534 directly above it narrows toward the rear side. Therefore, when the vibration motor 21510 is displaced toward the rear side in the excitation state of the vibration motor 21510 and the covering member 21520 is deformed, compared to the case where the interval between the upper and lower protrusions 21534 is not narrowed, the rear inclined portion The load (reaction force) applied to the portion of the covering member 21520 that enters between 21534a and the protrusion 21534 directly above it can be increased. This can prevent the covering member 21520 from being excessively displaced to the back side.

The protrusions 21534 are not arranged completely symmetrically, but are arranged with a partial vertical shift. As a result, compared to the case where the ridges 21534 are arranged at completely symmetrical positions, it is possible to easily avoid applying a load to the covering member 21520 from both left and right directions on the same horizontal plane. , the compressive load applied to the covering member 21520 can be reduced.

Note that the protrusions 21534 may be arranged completely symmetrically. In this case, it is preferable to select a material that is not brittle as the material of the covering member 21520 .

The formation of the lower half portion of the rear side wall portion of the body portion 21531 is omitted. Therefore, the covering member 21
As a holding mode of 520 , displacement of the covering member 21520 is restricted in the upper half of the body portion 21531 , while displacement of the covering member 21520 is allowed in the lower half of the body portion 21531 .

Therefore, when the covering member 21520 is displaced to the rear side due to the excitation of the vibration motor 21510, the upper half of the protrusion 21522 is restricted by the upper half of the main body 21531 and the lower half is allowed to displace. both proceed to the open area in the lower half of the body portion 21531 (
It can be deformed so as to flow) and work to improve the vibration performance of the vibrating device 21500, details of which will be described later.

The plate-like protrusion 21523 of the covering member 21520 is supported at its right side by the protrusion 21534 of the covering cover member 21530 from below. Also, the left side is open to the covering cover member 21530 and is supported by the support extending portion 21543 of the opposing plate member 21540 (see FIG. 2).
91). Thereby, in addition to being able to support the weight of the vibrating motor 21510 and the covering member 21520, it is possible to configure an open portion accessible from the outside on the lower side of the covering member 21520. FIG.

That is, with respect to the covering member 21520, the covering member 21530 covers the lower part from the right rear side, and the opposing plate member 21540 covers the lower part from the left front side. The lower left rear portion of the member 21520 can be opened as an opening. This open portion functions as a portion that ensures contact between the projecting portion De3 and the covering member 21520 .

The opposing plate member 21540 extends from the opening side of the covering cover member 21530 to the covering cover member 2 .
1530 is a plate-shaped member that is arranged to face 1530, and includes a shell-shaped protruding portion 21541 that protrudes toward the front side, the fastening portion 21542 described above, and a support extension that extends from the lower left end to the rear side. and a setting portion 21543 .

The shell-shaped overhanging portion 21541 is formed thin like the opposing plate member 21540, and a gap is formed between the overhanging tip portion and the covering member 21520, so that the shell-shaped overhanging portion 21541
Even if a load is applied in a direction (towards the back) that pushes against the covering member 21520 and the shell-shaped overhanging portion 21541 is deformed, transmission of a large load to the covering member 21520 can be avoided.

FIG. 296(a) is a top view of the lower tray unit 21400, and FIG.
96(a) is a cross-sectional view of the lower tray unit 21400 along line CCXCVIb-CCXCVIb, FIG. 297 is a rear view of the lower tray unit 21400, and FIG.
FIG. 11 is a cross-sectional view of the lower tray unit 21400 along line CCXCVIII-CCXCVIII in (a);

As shown in FIG. 296(b), the protrusion 21522 of the covering member 21520 and the bottom member 21D
e and the protruding portion De3 are in contact with each other in the front-rear direction. The streak portion 21522 is slightly deformed).

By applying a load from the projecting portion De3 to the ridge portion 21522, the vibrating device 2150
0 can be moved forward. As a result, it is possible to prevent the vibration motor 21510 and the covering member 21520 from unintentionally stopping at a position near the rear side.

FIG. 299(a) shows a lower tray unit 2140 schematically illustrating the lower tray unit 21400. FIG.
299(b) is a partial schematic side view of the lower tray unit 21400 viewed in the direction of the arrow CCXCIXb in FIG. 299(a), and FIG. FIG. 300(b) is a partial top view of the lower tray unit 21400 schematically illustrating the lower tray unit 214 when viewed in the direction of arrow CCCb in FIG. 300(a).
00 is a partial schematic side view.

299(a) and 299(b) show a state in which the vibrating device 21500 is arranged at the front side limit position of vibration displacement, similar to the non-excited state of the vibration motor 21510, and FIG.
0(a) and 300(b), the vibration motor 21510 is energized and the vibration device 2
A state in which 1500 is positioned at the back side limit position of vibration displacement is illustrated. That is, when the vibration motor 21510 is excited and the eccentric weight 21512 rotates and vibrates, the vibration device 21500
is repeatedly displaced between the state shown in FIG. 299 and the state shown in FIG. In the state shown in FIG. 300, the eccentric weight 21512 is in contact with the main body 21531 in the front-rear direction, and the vibration is also transmitted directly.

299 and 300, the mode of transmission of vibration of vibration device 21500 will be described. As described above, vibration device 21500 is intentionally fastened and fixed at a plurality of parts to members having different rigidity. The purpose of this is to effectively cause the vibration of the vibrating device 21500 to occur at a specific portion.

More specifically, if the member to which the entire vibrating device 21500 is fixed is too hard, the vibration will be suppressed too much. is fixed to the member on the hard side, and the vibrating device 215
00 is configured to vibrate the soft side member fixed to the other part. Thereby, the portion fixed to the other portion of the vibrating device 21500 can be sufficiently displaced.

That is, the insertion portion 21535 formed on the left side of the vibration device 21500 is the V-shaped design member 214.
50 (the hard side) and the shell-like projecting portion 21541 abuts against the connecting plate-like portion 21458, while the insertion portion 21535 formed on the right side of the vibration device 21500 is connected to the covering base member 21410 (the soft side). side).

Therefore, the vibrating device 21500 vibrates in such a manner that the insertion portion 21535 formed on the right side is displaced (rotationally displaced) with the insertion portion 21535 formed on the left side as a fixed reference (axis of vibration). By being transmitted to 21410, it is possible to vibrate the position near the fingers of the player who grips the operating handle 51. FIG.

When the vibrating device 21500 is displaced to the rear side due to the vibration of the vibrating device 21500, the protrusion 21522 of the covering member 21520 is pressed against the projecting portion De3 (see FIG. 300). As a result, the ridge portion 21522 receives a load directed toward the front side from the projecting portion De3. can be increased.

In addition, when the vibrating device 21500 is displaced in such a manner that it rotates backward about the left end as the vibrating device 21500 vibrates, this displacement causes the plate-like projection 21523 on the left side to be pressed against the left side surface of the bottom member 21De (see FIG. 300). (a)). As a result, the plate-like protrusion 21523 is attached to the bottom member 21De.
As a result, the vibrating device 21500 receives a load toward the right side from the left end portion, and the momentum of returning forward in the rotational direction about the left end portion can be increased.

When the vibration motor 21510 and the covering member 21520 are displaced to the back side, the volume of the covering member 21520 whose displacement is restricted by the intermediate portion 21531 of the covering cover member 21530 is allowed to flow below the intermediate lower surface 21531b. Therefore, by concentrating the resin material forming the covering member 21520 between the covering member 21520 and the overhanging portion De3, the covering member 21520 can be partially hardened, so that the reaction force received from the overhanging portion De3 can be increased. can be done. Since the bottom member 21De having the projecting portion De3 is not expected to be displaced in the front-rear direction, it is difficult to imagine a situation in which the cover member 21520 is deformed due to the displacement of the projecting portion De3.

As a result, the load generated between the vibrating device 21500 and the projecting portion De3 is reduced to the vibrating motor 2
It can be increased to a limited extent in the 1510 excitation state. In this case, when the operation device 10300 is operated, or when the vibration device 10366 of the operation device 10300 (see FIG. 216)
, when the vibration device 21500 is de-excited, the vibration device 215
00 and the projecting portion De3, it is possible to suppress the transmission of vibration to the vibrating device 21500 side. By increasing the load generated between the part De3 and the vibrating device 2
The effect of assisting the vibration of 1500 can be increased.

Therefore, in the non-excited state of the vibrating device 21500, the load transmitted to the vibrating device 21500 via the covering member 21520 is sufficiently suppressed (the covering member 215
20), on the other hand, when the vibrator 21500 is excited, compressive deformation (strain) occurs in the ridges 21522, thereby reducing the load transmitted to the vibrator 21500 via the covering member 21520. (reaction force) can be increased.

On the other hand, since the ridge portion 21522 is a ridge made of a flexible resin material, the ridge portion 2
It is possible to suppress displacement of the projecting portion De3 due to the pressing of the 1522 . Therefore, it is possible to suppress the vibration from being transmitted to the projecting portion De3, so that the operation device 10300 can be prevented from vibrating due to the vibration of the vibrating device 21500. FIG.

When the vibrating device 21500 is displaced to the rear side due to the vibration of the vibrating device 21500 and then displaced to return to the front side, the shell-like projecting portion 21541 is pressed against the connecting plate-like portion 21458 . As a result, the shell-shaped projecting portion 21541 receives a load from the connecting plate-shaped portion 21458 directed toward the rear surface side, so that the vibrating device 21500 is placed on the rear surface as compared with the case where the shell-shaped projecting portion 21541 is not formed. You can increase the momentum to re-return to the side.

As described above, in this embodiment, since the displacement of the vibrating device 21500 in both the forward and backward directions is supported, the vibrating device 21500 is placed in an excited state until the vibration becomes strong enough to be felt by the player. period can be shortened.

Note that in the above description, when the operation device 10300 is operated and when the operation device 10300 is
Although the state in which the vibrating device 21500 is de-excited during the vibrating performance of the vibrating device 10366 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, vibrator 21500
During the vibration of the operation device 10300 may be operated.

In this case, although the load generated between the covering member 21520 and the overhanging portion De3 increases, the displacement direction (vertical direction) of the overhanging portion De3 accompanying the operation of the operation device 10300,
Since the direction of the load generated between the covering member 21520 and the projecting portion De3 intersects,
The interaction between the load generated by the vibration device 21500 and the load applied to the operation device 10300 can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a situation (adverse effect) in which the vibrating device 21500 and the operating device 10300 fail due to the simultaneous load from the vibrating device 21500 and the operating device 10300 .

FIG. 301 is a partial top schematic view of the lower tray unit 21400 schematically illustrating the lower tray unit 21400. FIG. In FIG. 301, the main body 21511 of the vibration motor 21510 is restricted to the right end of the bearing receiving recess 21533c of the covering cover member 21530, that is, the vibration motor 21510 is placed at the right limit position of the displaceable region. illustrated.

In this embodiment, since the vibration motor 21510 is held by the covering member 21530 via the covering member 21520, the deformation of the covering member 21520 causes vibration of the vibration motor 21510.
1510 is configured to be displaceable with respect to covering cover 21530 . Furthermore, as described above, the vibration device 21500 displaces (rotates) the insertion portion 21535 formed on the right side with the left insertion portion 21535 (see FIG. 290) as a reference (vibration axis). Force is applied to the right.

That is, when the vibration of the vibrating device 21500 becomes intense, the centrifugal force generated in the vibrating device 21500 displaces the vibrating motor 21510 rightward (see FIG. 301). covering cover 215
30 is curved to the left at the rear end (see FIG. 295). The resistance received from the covering cover 21530 increases when displacing to the rear side. Thereby, the displacement of the vibration motor 21510 in the front-rear direction can be suppressed.

Therefore, according to the present embodiment, even when the vibration of the vibration motor 21510 becomes excessive, the vibration is suppressed by displacing the vibration motor 21510 in a direction intersecting the main vibration direction (front-rear direction). Since the action is generated, vibration can be suppressed without controlling the vibration motor 21510 (for example, before the vibration motor 21510 is stopped by control). As a result, problems due to excessive vibration of the vibration motor 21510 can be suppressed.

In addition, by configuring the vibration motor 21510 to be able to suppress the vibration due to the displacement of the vibration motor 21510 due to the excessive vibration of the vibration motor 21510, it is possible to eliminate the need to arrange a detection sensor for detecting the displacement due to the excessive vibration of the vibration motor 21510. . As a result, the product cost of the lower tray unit 21400 in this embodiment can be reduced, and the space left by omitting the arrangement of the detection sensor can be used for wires to pass through or heat generated by the vibration motor 21510 can be dissipated. It can be effectively used as a space for

Next, the twenty-second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 302 to 381. FIG. In the first embodiment, the game machine frame has been mainly described, but in the twenty-second embodiment, the operation unit A300 that is visually recognized through the window portion 14c will be described.

FIG. 302 is a front view of the game board A13 of the pachinko machine A10 in the twenty-second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 302, the game board A13 is a base plate A cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front.
60 includes a large number of nails (not shown) for ball guide and a windmill (not shown), as well as rails 61, 62,
General winning opening 63, first winning opening 64, second winning opening 640, variable winning device 65, through gate 67, variable display device unit A80, etc. fixed to

The base plate A60 is made of a light-transmissive resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate A60 from the front side thereof. General prize gate 6
3. The first prize winning port 64, the second prize winning port 640, and the variable display device unit A80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate A60 by router processing, and fixed by tapping screws or the like from the front side of the game board A13. It is

The central part of the front of the game board A13 is the inner frame 1 through the window 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14.
2 can be viewed from the front side. Mainly referring to FIG. 302, the game board A13
will be described.

In front of the game board A13, there is an outer rail 6 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape.
2 is erected, and an arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed of a strip-shaped metal plate like the outer rail 62 is erected on the inner side of the outer rail 62 . The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the front outer periphery of the game board A13, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board A13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area is formed in which a game is played by the behavior of . The game area is the front of the game board A13 and has two rails 61 and 6
2 and a resin-made outer edge member A73 connecting between the rails (the area in which the prize-winning opening etc. are arranged and the shot ball flows down).

In this embodiment, a metal plate member 75 (see FIG. 308) made of metal is attached to the outer edge member A73.
By incorporating, the combined strength (rigidity) of the game board A13 and the outer edge member A73 is strengthened, the details of which will be described later.

The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning holes 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. In this embodiment, the purpose of arranging the general prize winning openings 63 is different for each arrangement. This will be explained below.

In this embodiment, in the normal game, the route passing the left side of the third symbol display device 81 is the first
The ball is shot with the aim of making the ball enter the prize winning port 64, but the first prize winning port 64
A part of the balls flowing down the area on the left side of the first winning opening 64 without reaching the , wins the general winning opening 63 arranged on the left side of the game area. That is, the general prize winning opening 63 arranged on the left side of the game area is arranged with the aim of influencing the game during the normal game. For example, the higher the possibility of winning the general winning hole 63, the more likely it is that a small number of balls will win the first winning hole 64 during normal times.

On the other hand, in a game during time reduction or probability change, the ball is shot with the aim of winning the ball to the second winning port 640 on the route passing through the right side of the third symbol display device 81, but the second A part of the balls flowing down the area on the right side of the second winning opening 640 without reaching the winning opening 640 wins the general winning opening 63 arranged on the right side of the game area. That is, the general winning opening 63 arranged on the right side of the game area is arranged with the aim of influencing the game during probability variation or time reduction. For example, the higher the possibility of winning to the general winning hole 63, the more it is possible to suppress the loss of balls during probability variation and time reduction.

By suppressing the loss of the balls, the next big win is obtained before the balls held on the upper tray 17 run out, even if the game is not played in a shooting mode in which the shooting of the balls is stopped with good timing during the probability change (even if the balls are continuously hit). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the stress (feeling of fatigue) that the player receives while playing the game. Therefore, the number of rotations to the next big hit frequently increases during the probability variation (for example, 10
0 rotation or more), the player can comfortably play the game.

In the game in the special game state, the ball is shot with the aim of winning the ball into the specific winning hole 65a on the route passing through the right side of the third symbol display device 81, but the second winning hole 640
part of the ball flowing down the area on the right side of , flows down to the general winning opening 63 side (right side) instead of the specific winning opening 65a side (left side), and enters the general winning opening 63a. Since the prize balls accompanying the winning to the general prize winning port 63 are paid out as different prize balls from the prize balls to the specific winning port 65a, the player can, before the end of the special game state, In addition to the prize balls based on the number of winning prizes to the specific prize winning port 65a, the prize balls based on the number of winning prizes to the general prize winning port 63 can be obtained.

That is, the general winning hole 63 arranged on the right side of the game area is arranged with the aim of increasing the number of paid-out prize balls that the player can obtain in the special game state. Here, as the number of winnings to the general winning opening 63 increases, the time efficiency of winning to the specific winning opening 65a decreases, so the elapsed time until the special game state ends tends to become longer. In other words, the number of rounds in the special game state and the number of counts (regular number of prizes won for each round) in the special game state are the same in terms of control, depending on the location and number of the general winning ports 63 and the design of the upstream channel. Also, the time (long or short) required until the end of the special game state and the number of prize balls paid out to the player (more or less) can be varied.

In the special game state, the display mode when displaying the numbers corresponding to the number of paid-out prize balls on the third symbol display device 81 is not limited at all. For example, the number of prize balls to be paid out based on winning to the specific winning opening 65a and the number of winning balls to be paid out based on winning to the general winning opening 63 may be displayed separately, or the number of winning balls to be paid out to the specific winning opening 65a may be displayed separately. The total number of prize balls and the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning to the general prize winning opening 63 may be displayed, or a combination thereof may be displayed.

As mentioned above, during variable probability and short time, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than during normal,
In addition, since the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is short,
is more likely to be displayed, and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Furthermore, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is opened is also longer during the variable probability and the shorter working hours than during the normal time. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to enter the second winning hole 640 during the variable probability and the shorter working hours compared to the normal time.

Here, when the ball enters the first prize winning port 64 and when the ball enters the second prize winning port 640, the probability of winning the jackpot is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state. However, the probability of winning a 15R probability variable jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the event of a jackpot is higher when the ball enters the second winning port 640 than when the ball enters the first winning port 64. is set. On the other hand, the first prize winning port 64 does not have an electric accessory like the second prize winning port 640, and the ball can always win a prize.

Therefore, during normal operation, the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is often closed, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640.
4, shoot the ball so that it passes through the left side of the variable display unit A80 (so-called "left shot"), and by winning the first prize hole 64, get a lot of chances of winning the jackpot lottery, It is advantageous for the player to aim for a big win.

On the other hand, during the probability variation and the time reduction, by passing the ball through the through gate 67, the second winning opening 64
The electric accessory 640a associated with 0 is likely to be in an open state, and the second winning opening 640 is likely to win. (so-called "right-handed"), let it pass through the through gate 67, and the electric accessory 640a
is in an open state, and it is advantageous for the player to aim for a 15R probability variable jackpot by winning a prize in the second prize winning port 640.例文帳に追加

In the pachinko machine A10 according to the present embodiment, the configuration of the game board A13 is left-right asymmetrical, and it is required that the balls are hit to the left and right depending on the game state, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the configuration of the game board A13 may be bilaterally symmetrical (see FIG. 302).
. In this case, it is possible to aim for the first winning opening 64 by "right-handed hitting" or to aim for the second winning opening 640 by "left-handed hitting".
can also be aimed at. Therefore, depending on the game state (whether the game is variable, time-saving, or normal), the player changes the way the ball is shot between ``left-handed'' and ``right-handed''. can be made unnecessary. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the annoyance of changing the way the ball is hit.

In this embodiment, the input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the other device 228, the frame button 22, etc. (see FIG. 4). Other devices 228 include a drive motor AMT1, a drive motor AM
T2 and a drive motor for raising and lowering the production unit A710 are included.

FIG. 303 shows a pachinko machine A showing a state in which the front frame 14 is opened (deployed) with respect to the inner frame 12.
304 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine A10 with the front frame 14 removed. Note that FIG. 304 shows a state in which the game board A13 is separated from the inner frame 12, and in FIGS. 303 and 304, the reference numerals for the internal configuration of the game board A13 are omitted for convenience.

Next, referring to FIGS. 305 to 323, the structures of the game board A13 and the action unit A300 will be described. 305 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board A13, the center frame A86, the lottery unit A600 and the operation unit A300, and FIG.
13, an exploded rear perspective view of the center frame A86, the lottery unit A600, and the operation unit A300. 305 and 306, a part of the right side of the game board A13 is enlarged. 305 and 306, reference will be made to FIG. 302 as appropriate.

The center frame A86 is an annular member formed of a light-transmitting resin material, fitted from the front side into the through hole 13a drilled in the game board A13, and fastened and fixed in the vicinity of the peripheral edge.
A covering portion 86h that covers the game board A13, and a covering portion 86h that allows the balls to be distributed on the left side.
A distribution extension portion 86a extending from the upper end toward the front side, a left inclined portion 86b extending from the covering portion 86h toward the front side in a shape inclined downward from the upper end toward the left, and A right sloping portion 86c extending from the covering portion 86h to the front side in a shape sloping downward to the right, and the right sloping portion 8
A right flow passage forming wall portion 86d extending from the covering portion 86h to the front side in a manner of extending downward from a position facing the return rubber 69 connected to the lower end portion of the rubber member 6c, and the right flow passage forming wall portion 86d. Wall portion 86d
A plurality of lateral ribs 86e protruding toward the flow path (right side) as ribs spanning the front-to-rear width, and a right flow path forming wall 86d in a positional relationship alternating with the lateral ribs 86e. and a plurality of front projections 86f projecting from the covering portion 86h to the flow channel side (front side) as projections spanning the flow channel width in the region between the outer edge member A73 and the right flow channel forming wall portion 86d. It mainly includes a separation wall portion 86g extending downward from the lower end portion and configured to be able to separate the lower right corner portion of the through hole 13a from other portions.

FIG. 307(a) is an enlarged front view of the game board A13 in the range A5a of FIG. 302,
FIG. 307(b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the game board A13 taken along line CCCVIIb-CCCVIIb in FIG. 307(a).

When the player strongly rotates the operation handle 51 to the right to play a right-handed game, the ball flows down between the right flow passage forming wall portion 86d and the outer edge member A73. As shown in FIG. 307(a), the space between the right flow passage forming wall portion 86d and the outer edge member A73 is the space that allows the ball to flow down (the diameter of the ball is 11 m).
m, the interval is set to be about 16 mm, which is a length with a slight gap), so the ball flows down while contacting the right flow passage forming wall portion 86d or the outer edge member A73. Become.

More specifically, the ball that has reached the return rubber 69 is bounced back to the left and right central sides of the game area by the reaction force from the return rubber 69, and collides with the right flow path forming wall portion 86d. Right channel forming wall portion 86
Since the wall d is formed as an inclined wall that slopes downward toward the right side, the ball that flows down under its own weight tries to roll down the right flow path forming wall portion 86d.

In the process of flowing down, the ball rides on the horizontal rib portion 86e. In this embodiment, the horizontal rib portion 8
6e is designed to have a protruding length of about 2 mm (a length less than 20% of the diameter of the sphere) and an arrangement interval of 16 mm (a length similar to the width of the flow path), so that the spheres flowing down are decelerated, It is possible to achieve a good balance between preventing the occurrence of ball clogging.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the front rib portion 86f
is formed with the same projecting length (2 mm) as the horizontal rib portion 86e. As a result, it is possible to make it easier to prevent ball clogging while improving the deceleration effect by making the formation interval of the ridges half of the width of the flow path.

Normally, when the pachinko machine A10 is installed in a game parlor, it is slightly (1
Weak degree) is installed lying down. Therefore, the covering portion 86h is arranged as an inclined wall that slopes downward toward the front side, and the ball that flows down under its own weight tries to roll down the covering portion 86h. Since it is configured in this way, the glass unit 16 side (front side)
As compared with the case where the projecting portion is formed toward the flow path from the cover portion 86h, it is possible to favorably cause the ball to collide with the front projecting portion 86f projecting from the covering portion 86h. In addition, in FIG. 307(b), the inclination angle of the game board A13 is shown to be larger than usual (about 5 degrees) so that the inclination can be easily grasped.

The separation wall portion 86g is a wall portion arranged to face the lottery unit A600, and the through hole 13a.
has a role of blocking and separating the area in which the lottery unit A600 is arranged. The assembly of the lottery unit A600 to the game board A13 will be described below.

In the area where the lottery unit A600 is arranged, the through hole 13a of the game board A13 has
A small recess 13b projecting rightward from a substantially circular portion for receiving the center frame A86, and a large recess 13c projecting rightward and downward below the small recess 13b are formed. In this way, the small recessed portion 13b and the large recessed portion 13c as the arrangement areas of the lottery unit A600 are formed into the through holes 1
By forming the center frame A86 of 3a as a recessed portion connected to the open portion for receiving, compared to the case of forming a plurality of independent through holes (when occupying the area required as the width of the portion forming the boundary) A wide area that can be used as an arrangement area for the center frame A86 and the lottery unit A600 can be secured. Details of the lottery unit A600 will be described later.

As shown in FIGS. 305 and 306, the operation unit A300 has a box-like rear surface whose front side is open from a bottom wall portion A311 and an outer wall portion A312 erected from the outer edge of the bottom wall portion A311. It has a case A310.

A rectangular opening A311a is formed in the center of the bottom wall portion A311 of the rear case A310, so that the rear case A310 is formed in a rectangular frame shape when viewed from the front. The opening A311a is the third symbol display device 81
(ie, the display area of the third pattern display device 81 can be divided in a front view).

The operation unit A300 includes a plurality of first operation units A400 arranged in the inner space of the rear case A310 in such a manner that movable devices having substantially the same configuration cover the upper peripheral edge of the inner space, and the first operation units A400. and the second operation unit A700 arranged on the lower side where the arrangement of .

Specifically, the first operation unit A400 is positioned above and on the left and right sides of the opening A311a, and the second operation unit A700 is positioned below the opening A311a. are placed. 305 and 3
06, the first operation unit A400 and the second operation unit A700 are mounted on the rear case A31.
0 is shown.

The rear case A310 extends as a plane plate along the back of the game board A13 (for example, arranged in parallel) at the front end of the outer wall A312, and faces the game board A13 in the assembled state (see FIG. 304). A supporting plate portion A313 is provided for supporting.

The support plate portion A313 is a columnar portion protruding from the back side of the game board A13 toward the back side, and is protruded in a shape capable of positioning the fastening convex portion 13d having a female screw portion formed in the center. A positioning convex portion A313a is provided, and the approximate center position of the positioning convex portion A313a (fastening convex portion 13d
) is provided with an insertion hole A313b having a size through which a fastening screw to be screwed into the fastening protrusion 13d can be inserted.

That is, the game board A13 and the operation unit A300 can be integrally fixed by positioning the fastening projection 13d by the positioning projection A313a and screwing the fastening screw into the fastening projection 13d. It is possible to improve the rigidity of A13 and the operation unit A300 as a whole.

In addition, the shape of the positioning protrusion A313a is not limited at all, and various aspects are exemplified. For example, a projection having an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer shape (circular in this embodiment) of the fastening projection 13d may be formed along an annular shape.
A convex portion along an oval shape along the direction in which 313 is formed may also be used. Further, when the fastening protrusion 13d is formed in a rectangular columnar shape, it is naturally assumed that the shape of the positioning protrusion A313a is also formed along the rectangular shape correspondingly.

As shown in FIGS. 305 and 306, in this embodiment, more support plate portions A313 are provided on the left side and upper side of the rear case A310, and fewer support plate portions A313 are formed on the right side and lower side of the rear case A310. This is the result of designing the game board A13 and the operation unit A300 in consideration of the balance between the improvement in rigidity as a whole and the space efficiency.

That is, when the game board A13 is made of a light-transmitting resin material as in the present embodiment, the movable member disposed on the back side of the game board A13 can be visually recognized through the game board A13. The entire back side of the game board A13 becomes effective as an area for presentation to be arranged. On the other hand, at the location where the support plate portion A313 is formed, the inner space of the rear case A310 is eroded inwardly by the area of the support plate portion A313 when viewed from the front.
The area in which the movable member can be arranged is narrowed. Therefore, even if the support plate portion A313 is omitted, if the problem of strength can be maintained while being resolved, it is said that by omitting the support plate portion A313, it is possible to avoid the limitation of the arrangement range of the movable member. That is.

In this embodiment, many support plate portions A313 are arranged on the left side and the upper side of the rear case A310, which is related to the range of the game area or the like where the player can visually recognize the shot ball. That is, the support plate portion A313 is formed at a location other than the range where the shot ball is visually recognized.

More specifically, in this embodiment, the ball fired from the shooting device 112a (Fig. 304) passes between the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, passes through the return ball prevention member 68, and enters the game area. It is configured to be introduced and thereafter flow down the game area. In a pinball game, the point where the most attention is considered to be the point where the ball passes, and the other outer area (for example, the area on the opposite side of the third pattern display device 81 across the outer rail 62 or the inner rail 61) ) is usually low in attention.

Therefore, the lower left and upper left with reference to the left convex arc formed by the outer rail 62 and the upper left and upper right with reference to the upward convex arc are the ranges that the sphere cannot reach. It is conceivable that the player's attention to .

In addition, in this embodiment, the outer edge member A73 and the surfaces of the lower left and upper left parts of the outer rail 62 facing the outer rail 62 are formed in a shape along the outer rail 62 and arranged on the front side of the game board A13. The block-shaped member 74 is made of a light-impermeable resin material.
The back side of the game board A13 cannot be visually recognized from the front side of the game board A13 through the outer edge member A73 and the block-shaped member 74. - 特許庁

In the present embodiment, the support plate portion A313 is preferentially arranged at the location where the attention force is low or the location that is invisible. Actually, even in the left side and the upper side where many support plate portions A313 are formed, the support plate portions A313 are formed near the corners of the rear case A310, avoiding the central portion as the projecting end portion of the outer rail 62. be done.

In other words, by selecting the location where the space is eroded by forming the support plate portion A313 from locations with low visibility (low performance ability), the operation unit A3
00 and the game board A13 as a whole, it is possible to secure a wide area within the field of vision of the player who pays attention to the ball.

From this point of view, since the pachinko machine has a common configuration in which the ball fired by the ball firing unit 112a rolls along the outer rail 62 and is introduced into the game area, the range where the ball does not flow down is the lower left and the upper left. It is easy to seek in the upper part and upper right part. On the other hand, the return rubber 6 as a part that can temporarily absorb the kinetic energy of the ball and adjust the subsequent flow down mode
Downstream of 9, it is difficult to identify a common area where the sphere does not flow down.

That is, on the downstream side of the return rubber 69, not only the relationship with the member forming the outer edge of the game area, but also the structure and state of the lottery unit A600 and the variable prize winning device 65 change the flow path of the ball. , it becomes impossible to determine the arrangement location of the support plate portion A313 until the specifications of the game board A13 side are determined.

Compared to the configuration of the game board A13 related to the ball putting performance of the pachinko machine A10, the operation unit A
300 can be freely designed, the design of the action unit A300 usually progresses earlier than the design of the game board A13.
0's internal configuration can be elaborated. If the specification change (configuration change) of the game board A13 occurs at the end of the development schedule, and the position of the support plate part A313 is changed accordingly, not only the back case A310 but also the internal space of the operation unit A300 will be changed. This will lead to design changes of other devices installed in the system, and the cost of the design change will increase.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the support plate portion A is positioned downstream of the return rubber 69 .
The formation of 313 is omitted. As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the arrangement of the support plate portion A313 is changed due to the specification change (configuration change) of the game board A13.

In addition, in the area downstream of the return rubber 69, the inner space of the rear case A310 is prevented from being eroded by the support plate portion A313, and a sufficient space for disposing the first operation unit A400 for presentation is secured. and the path along which the sphere flows and the first operation unit A
Since the range in which 400 is arranged can be overlapped in the front and back, the first action unit A400 can naturally enter the field of view of the player who pays attention to the ball.

Further, in the present embodiment, the support plate portion A313 formed behind the outer edge member A73 is
It is formed on the inner side (left side) of the right outermost end of the outer wall portion A312. On the other hand, the support plate portion A313 formed on the left side of the rear case A310 is formed outside (left side) of the left outermost shortest portion of the outer wall portion A312. That is, the formation mode of the support plate portion A313 (formation direction with respect to the outer wall portion A312) is left-right asymmetric.

As a result, the distance between the outermost right end of the outer wall A312 and the right end of the game board A13 can be made shorter than the distance between the outermost left end of the outer wall A312 and the left end of the game board A13. Therefore, the right end of the internal space of the rear case A310 can be moved to the right end of the game board A13.

The outer wall portion A312 on the right side has no surface facing the game board A13 except for the support plate portion A313, and the edge on the front side comes into contact with the back surface of the game board A13. In other words, the right outer wall A312 abuts the game board A13 in line contact.

Approximately the lower half of the right outer wall A312 is provided with a notch A312a that is notched (formed as a notch) toward the rear side. This cutout portion A312a is the lottery unit A60.
0 below the upper edge, and in the assembled state (see FIG. 304),
A gap is formed between the game board A13.

By forming the cutout portion A312a in this manner, the following effects can be obtained. For example, the lottery unit A
600 and the wiring connected to the variable prize winning device 65 can function as a wiring passage through which the wiring passes outside the rear case A310. This makes it possible to reduce the possibility that the wiring will interfere with the side of the first operation unit A400 or the second operation unit A700 compared to the case where the wiring is routed vertically.

In addition, the gap formed by the notch A312a can be used as an arrangement space for the configuration required for the lottery unit A600 and the variable winning device 65. FIG. The configuration required for the lottery unit A600 and the variable prize winning device 65 includes, for example, a solenoid that generates a driving force, a flow path through which the ball flows, a substrate that accompanies the lighting effect, a detection sensor that detects the ball, Other structures and the like are exemplified. In this embodiment, the second winning opening 6 of the lottery unit A600
A discharge path ER through which balls that have won 40 are discharged passes through a gap between the notch A312a and the game board A13 (see FIG. 317).

Further, by arranging a light emitting means such as an LED near the notch A312a, the light emitted from the light emitting means can be made easier for the player to visually recognize as light with a blurred outline. In other words, compared to the case where the entire circumference of the back case A310 is connected to the game board A13 (the boundary of the light emitted from the back side of the game board A13 is formed along the shape of the back case A310). Thus, the boundary of the light seen through the game board A13 can be obscured. As a result, it is possible to avoid the boundary of the light visually recognized through the game board A13 from depending on the shape of the rear case A310, and to improve the degree of freedom of the lighting performance.

In addition, the formation length (vertical direction length) of notch part A312a is not limited at all. For example, the cutout portion A31 extends over the entire area (vertical width) between the upper and lower support plate portions A313.
2a may be formed.

As described above, in this embodiment, the game board A13 is mounted on the right side of the rear case A310.
Since the fastening and fixing with are omitted, in considering the rigidity of the right side of the game board A13,
We cannot rely on the stiffness of the motion unit A300.

As a countermeasure against this, in this embodiment, a metal plate-like member 75 made of metal is disposed on the outer edge portion 73 at a position corresponding to the right end portion of the game board A13. The metal plate member 75 will be described below.

308 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board A13, the outer edge member A73 and the metal plate member 75, and FIG. 309 is an exploded rear perspective view of the game board A13, the outer edge member A73 and the metal plate member 75. FIG. In FIGS. 308 and 309, the game board A13 is shown alone for easy understanding, and other members arranged on the game board A13 are omitted.

The outer edge member A73 is formed of a resin material, and includes an arcuate wall portion 73a forming an upper portion and having an arcuate inner surface, and a thin wall extending downward from a lower end portion of the arcuate wall portion 73a. and an inclined wall portion 73c having an upper surface inclined downward from the lower end of the vertical wall portion 73b toward the left. In this way, by configuring the outer edge member A73 with a single member that covers substantially the entire area in the vertical direction, the outer edge member A73 can be made more compact than the case where the outer edge member A73 is formed from a plurality of vertically divided members. It is possible to reduce the man-hours for assembling to the game board A13.

The vertical wall portion 73b has a plurality of plate-like projecting portions 73b1 projecting along the right surface portion toward the back side.
A plurality of bent portions 73b2 formed by bending the front side edge portion of the right side portion into a U-shape when viewed in the vertical direction, and the joint portion between the arc wall portion 73a and the inclined wall portion 73c are cylindrically formed to the rear side. A cylindrical projecting portion 73b3 that protrudes, and a fastening portion 73b4 that is provided along with the cylindrical projecting portion 73b3 and into which a fastening screw can be screwed are provided.

The bent portion 73b2 is arranged at an intermediate position between the plate-like projecting portions 73b1. As a result, in relation to the metal plate-like member 75, which will be described later, the holding force of the metal plate-like member 75 with respect to the vertical wall portion 73b is achieved while suppressing the number of seam penetration portions 75c formed in the metal plate-like member 75. can be improved.

In other words, compared to the case where only the three plate-like protrusions 73b1 resist bending of the metal plate-like member 75, the plate-like protrusions 73b1 and the bent portions 73b2 allow the metal plate-like member 75 to be bent. Since resistance to bending can be generated, the load generated at one location can be reduced. In addition, since the plate-like projecting portions 73b1 and the bent portions 73b2 are arranged at regular intervals, the load generated when the metal plate-like member 75 is bent can be evenly distributed.
It is possible to prevent an excessive load from occurring in any one place.

The metal plate-like member 75 has a body plate portion 75a that is folded back a plurality of times in the lateral direction and is formed without creases in the longitudinal direction, and the back side edge of the body plate portion 75a is bent leftward. A plurality of joint penetrating portions 75c penetrating in the front-rear direction at the joint portion between the bent portion 75b and the main body plate portion 75a and the bent portion 75b, and a plurality of joint penetrating portions 75c penetrating in the longitudinal direction at the upper and lower ends of the bent portion 75b. and an insertion hole 75e through which a fastening screw can be inserted through a plate portion formed side by side with the plate portion formed with the through hole 75d and stepped toward the front side.

The metal plate-like member 75 generates a particularly strong resistance to bending in the longitudinal direction because the bent portion 75b is formed in the vertical direction in addition to the way in which the body plate portion 75a is folded. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently reinforce the vertical wall portion 73b by arranging it integrally with the vertical wall portion 73b, which tends to bend in the longitudinal direction.

The joint penetrating portion 75c is formed to have a size that allows the plate-like projecting portion 73b1 of the vertical wall portion 73b to be inserted therethrough. In this embodiment, the vertical wall portion 73b and the metal plate-like member 75 are formed so as to be integrated by inserting the plate-like projecting portion 73b1 into the joint penetrating portion 75c.

When the metal plate-like member 75 is assembled integrally with the vertical wall portion 73b, the front side edge of the main body plate portion 75a is sandwiched between the bent portion 73b2 and the outer surface of the vertical wall portion 73b, forming a cylindrical projection. Part 73b3
is inserted through the through hole 75d. In this manner, the metal plate member 75 and the vertical wall portion 73b are positioned relative to each other at a plurality of locations in the vertical direction. In this state, the outer edge member A73 and the metal plate member 75 can be fastened and fixed by screwing the fastening screw inserted through the insertion hole 75e into the fastening portion 73b4.

Since the metal plate-like member 75 is arranged over the vertical wall portion 73b from the above configuration, the vertical wall portion 73b can be entirely reinforced. Here, the plate-like projecting portion 73b1 and the columnar projecting portion 73b3 of the vertical wall portion 73b penetrate the metal plate-like member 75 and extend to the back side, and the tip thereof engages the game board A13. The engagement between the metal plate member 75 and the game board A13 will be described below.

The game board A13 has a plurality of recessed portions 13e that are recessed to receive the plate-like projecting portions 73b1 on the right side edge of the front surface, and the columnar projecting portions 73b3 are received on the upper and lower sides of the recessed portions 13e. and a plurality of positioning holes 13f penetratingly formed as elongated holes that can be elongated vertically.

When the outer edge member A73 and the metal plate-like member 75 are assembled to the game board A13 in an integrated state, the plate-like projecting portion 73b1 is received in the concave portion 13e, and the circular projecting portion 73b3 is received in the positioning hole 13f. and positioned. That is, the plate-like projecting portion 73b1 and the circular projecting portion 7
3b3 is used not only for positioning with the metal plate member 75 but also for positioning with the game board A13. As a result, it is possible to reduce the number of pieces to be positioned.

In this embodiment, as described above, the metal plate member 75 is assembled so as to suppress the bending of the vertical wall portion 73b. The portion 73b can be formed so thin as to be easily curved in the left-right direction by itself.

Furthermore, the rigidity of the metal plate member 75 can suppress the deformation of the game board A13 (improve the rigidity). The shape of A13 can be maintained. Thereby, as shown in FIG. 309, the formation of the fastening protrusion 13d can be omitted at the right end position of the game board A13.

Therefore, a small recess 1 is located at a position short of the right end of the game board A13 (a position extremely close to the right end).
3b or the right edge of the large recess 13c can be arranged. As a result, the right limit positions of the through-hole 13a, the small concave portion 13b and the large concave portion 13c with respect to the game board A13 can be moved further to the right, and the shape of the opening can be enlarged.

In this case, when the game area is formed using the game board A13 having the same vertical width and horizontal width and the center frame A86 having the same opening size, the right end of the game area with respect to the game board A13 is positioned to the right. Since it can be moved to the left side, the area on the left side of the center frame A86 can be expanded. In other words, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in designing the path along which the game ball flows (the degree of freedom in designing the position of the nail, the ball guide channel, the position of the ball passage opening, etc.).

Furthermore, a distribution device (not shown) in which balls flow down during a right-handed game (for example, a device that switches the path in the order in which the balls arrive), a lottery unit A600, and a variable winning device 65 (Fig. 305)
) can be secured, the design flexibility of the sorting device, the lottery unit A600 and the variable winning device 65 (not shown) can be improved.

FIG. 310 is an exploded front perspective view of the lottery unit A600, and FIG. 311 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lottery unit A600. The lottery unit A600 includes the electric accessory 640 described above.
a, and a second winning hole 640 that can switch between a state in which the ball can pass and a state in which the ball cannot pass depending on whether the electric accessory 640a is in an open state or a closed state.

The lottery unit A600 has a main body member A610 which forms a flow-down path through which a second prize winning port 640 is formed and in which the balls flow down on the front side, and which is fastened and fixed to the game board A13 (see FIG. 305), and a back surface of the main body member A610. Engagement member A that is rotatably pivotally supported on the side and engages with the electric accessory 640a
620, and a driving device unit A63 that generates a driving force for operating the engaging member A620.
0, a covering member A650 that is arranged on the front side of the main body member A610 and defines the flow-down path of the sphere, and a main irradiation that irradiates light on the area corresponding to the down-flow path of the sphere, which is disposed on the back side of the main body member A610. A device A660, and an auxiliary irradiation device A that irradiates light to a region that is disposed on the back side of the main body member A610 and whose visibility is lowered by the covering member A650 and that is different from the ball flowing-down path.
670.

The main body member A610 includes a main body plate portion A6 having a plane parallel to the front surface of the game board A13 on the front side.
11, and a left extension wall portion A61 extending like a wall from the left edge portion of the main body plate portion A611 to the front side.
2, a right extending obstacle wall portion A613 extending in a wall shape from a position including the right edge of the main body plate portion A611 to the front side, and a rectangular frame shape surrounding the second prize winning opening 640 in the rear view on the rear side. an extending rectangular frame A614 extending to the extending rectangular frame A614, a projecting receiving portion A615 projecting to the back side above the second winning opening 640 inside the extending rectangular frame A614, and the right side of the extending rectangular frame A614 A frame-shaped main light-emitting holding frame A616 extending to the back side including a part, and a frame-shaped auxiliary light-emitting holding frame A617 extending to the back side on the left side of the extended rectangular frame A614.

A through gate 67 is inserted through and fixed to the upper end position of the main body plate portion A611. That is, in this embodiment, at least a part of the balls that are about to enter the lottery unit A600
It passes through the through gate 67 and flows downstream.

The left extending wall portion A612 is a wall portion arranged to face the separation wall portion 86g (see FIG. 305) of the center frame A86. That is, in the assembled state (see FIG. 304), the separation wall portion 86g of the center frame A86 and the left extending wall portion A612 are engaged (abutted) to ensure rigidity. As a result, the through hole 13a is connected to the center frame A86 and the lottery unit A600.
Center frame A86 and lottery unit A
600 can be stably held in a manner that suppresses positional displacement.

The right extending obstacle wall portion A613 is a wall portion that forms the rolling surface of the ball. That is, lottery unit A
The ball flowing down 600 rolls on the upper surface of the right extending obstacle wall A613 and flows downstream.

The extended rectangular frame A614 has a shaft support hole A614a that is bored as a portion that rotatably supports the engaging member A620, and the extended edge can receive the front side end of the drive unit A630. Formed from shape. That is, by fastening the front side end of the drive unit A630 to the extended end of the extended rectangular frame A614, the drive unit A63 can be connected.
0 is fixed to the extended rectangular frame A614.

The projecting receiving portion A615 is configured to be able to abut on the engaging member A620 and the operating member A632 of the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL as the driving device of the driving device unit A630, and is a portion that defines the movement end position thereof. will be described later.

The main light emission holding frame A616 is a frame that constitutes the outer frame of the light emitted from the main irradiation device A660, and an insertion hole A616a through which a fastening screw is inserted is formed inside. This insertion hole A6
The fastening screw inserted through 16a is screwed into the fastening portion A652a of the covering member A650. be done. As a result, the fastening screw inserted through the insertion hole A616a can be made difficult to be visually recognized in a front view, and it is possible to avoid impairing the design of the lottery unit A600.

The auxiliary light emission holding frame A617 is a frame that constitutes the outer frame of the light emitted from the auxiliary irradiation device A670, and is formed at a position that overlaps the low transmission range A651b of the covering member A650 in front view.

The engagement member A620 is rotatably supported in the support hole A614a of the extended rectangular frame A614,
It is configured such that the claw-shaped portion A622 arranged at the rotating tip portion and the electric accessory 640a are engaged with each other. As a result, the state (open state or closed state) of the electric accessory 640a changes as the attitude of the engaging member A620 changes. Next, details of the engaging member A620 will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 312(a) shows the engagement member A620 viewed from the rotation axis J1 direction.
FIG. 312(b) is a front view of the engagement member A620 as viewed in the direction of arrow CCCXIIb in FIG. 312(a), and FIG. 312(c) is a side view of CCCXII in FIG.
FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view of the engaging member A620 along line c-CCCXIIc;

The engaging member A620 is made of a flexible resin material, and includes a pair of rotating arms A621 composed of plate-shaped portions intersecting (perpendicular to) the rotation axis J1. A claw-shaped portion A622 formed in a C-shaped claw shape, a pair of protruding shaft portions A623 projecting from the rotating arm portion A621 in a cylindrical shape around the rotation axis J1, and a rotation base of the rotating arm portion A621. A base end side connecting rod portion A624 which is a rod-shaped portion extending radially from the end side and is formed in a U-shape in front view in a manner in which the extended end is bent toward the other side and then connected. and a rod-shaped portion extending in a direction parallel to the base end side connecting rod portion A624 from the rotation distal end side of the rotating arm portion A621, and the extending end portion thereof is bent toward the other side and then joined and a distal end side connecting rod portion A625 formed in a U shape in a front view.

A pair of rotating arms A621 are arranged to face each other with a gap larger than the diameter of the sphere. As a result, it is possible to form a flow path for the ball so that the ball passes between the rotating arms A621 (see FIG. 313). be able to.

The base end side connecting rod portion A624 includes a main body rod portion A624a formed with substantially the same cross-sectional shape along the longitudinal direction of the rod, and a distal end side connecting rod portion A62 at an intermediate position between the main body rod portion A624a.
and a projecting restricting portion A624b projecting to the 5 side. The protrusion restricting portion A624b is configured as a portion for restricting excessive rotation of the engaging member A620, and the details thereof will be described later.

The distal end side connecting rod portion A625 is formed so that the rod-shaped portion A625a extending parallel to the rotation axis J1 has a cross-sectional shape different from that of the proximal end side connecting rod portion A624. That is, the bar-shaped portion A625a
, the surface on the side facing the rotating arm A621 is formed in a planar shape that maintains the distance from the rotating arm A621, while the surface on the opposite side of the rotating arm A621 is formed so as to move toward the tip of the rotation. It is formed as an inclined surface A625b that inclines in a direction away from the rotating arm A621. That is, the rod-shaped portion A625a is formed so that the thickness increases toward the rotation tip side, and the rigidity increases (deformation resistance increases).

In addition, the bar-shaped portion A625a has a surface opposite to the rotating arm A621, which is recessed in a manner inclined toward the surface opposite to the rotating arm A621 as it moves toward the central side in the direction of the rotation axis J1. It is formed as a recessed surface A625c provided.

The recessed surface A625c is recessed along the inclination of the inclined surface A625b. That is, when viewed in the tilt direction of the inclined surface A625b, each point of the recessed surface A625c that differs only in the thickness direction of the distal end side connecting rod portion A625 (the width direction of the surface facing the rotating arm portion A621) is the same. visible as a dot.

The recessed surface A625c is recessed corresponding to the shape of the operation member A632 so as to be able to receive the operation member A632 of the drive unit A630, details of which will be described later.

FIG. 313 is an exploded rear perspective view of the main body member A610, engagement member A620 and drive unit A630. In FIG. 313, the engaging member A620 fits into the pivot hole A6 of the main body member A610.
14a is illustrated.

The engaging member A620 is attached to the main body member A610 by applying a compressive force to the engaging member A620, deforming the engaging member A620, and inserting the engaging member A620 into the elongated rectangular frame A614. This is carried out by removing the load and canceling the deformation in a state where the position with the shaft portion A623 is aligned.

That is, the engaging member A620 is gripped between fingers from the direction of the rotation axis J1, and a compressive force is applied to deform the projecting shaft portion A623 to such an extent that the width of the projecting shaft portion A623 becomes shorter than the inner width of the extending rectangular frame A614. The engaging member A620 can be assembled to the main body member A610 by inserting the engaging member A620 into the elongated rectangular frame A614, aligning the position, and releasing the finger.

In the present embodiment, the pair of rotating arm portions A621 are formed so as to be connected by a proximal side connecting rod portion A624 and a distal side connecting rod portion A625 which are narrower and more easily deformable than the rotating arm portions A621. Therefore, most of the deformation when applying a load for assembly is the proximal side connecting rod portion A624
and the distal end side connecting rod portion A625. Therefore, it is possible to suppress deformation of the rotating arm A621 related to the function of opening and closing the electric accessory 640a, so that it is possible to prevent the engaging member A620 from malfunctioning due to deformation during assembly.

In addition, since the pair of rotating arm portions A621 are connected not by a single rod-shaped portion but by a pair of rod-shaped portions (base-side connecting rod portion A624 and distal-side connecting rod portion A625), the load is released. After that, it is possible to easily avoid the postures of the rotating arms A621 from deviating from each other.

Furthermore, by arranging a rod-shaped portion that is wider than the base end side of rotation (see FIG. 312(c)), the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL It is possible to suppress the deviation of the postures of the rotating arms A621 when they are operated by the driving force of .

In addition, by narrowing the width of the rod-shaped portion on the proximal side of rotation (see FIG. 312(c)), the deformation of the engaging member A620 necessary for assembly is shifted to the vicinity of the projecting shaft A623 on the proximal side of rotation. can be produced intensively. Therefore, it is possible to facilitate the assembly of the engaging member A620 while realizing stable operation using the engaging member A620.

As shown in FIG. 313, the front end of the engaging member A620 abuts against the lower end of the projection receiving portion A615, thereby restricting further rotation. As described above, the engaging member A620 is a part for opening and closing the electric accessory 640a, and there is a possibility that the ball enters the second winning hole 640 when the electric accessory 640a is open. A ball that enters the second winning hole 640 is a surface that constitutes the engaging member A620 and the extended rectangular frame A614, is arranged opposite the engaging member A620, and is an inclined surface that slopes downward toward the back side. It flows down between the lower bottom inclined surface A614b formed as , and flows into the drive unit A630.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the rotating arms A621 are arranged at intervals longer than the diameter of the ball (11 mm), so the ball can flow between the opposing rotating arms A621. As a result, the engagement member A620 can be arranged in such a manner as to surround the ball flow-down path from above, so that the engagement member A620 and the ball flow-down path can be arranged compactly.

The driving device unit A630 is held by a box-shaped body box portion A631 with an open front side connected and fixed to the back side end portion of the extended rectangular frame A614 of the body member A610, and the upper side of the body box portion A631. an electromagnetic solenoid ASOL, an operating member A632 that slides in the front-rear direction by the excitation of the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL, a coil spring A633 that applies an urging force to the operating member A632, and a main body box portion A631 that is held at the lower side of the and a detection sensor A634 that detects the passage of the ball.

When the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL is not energized, the biasing force of the coil spring A633 places the operating member A632 at the front side position (see FIG. 314(a)), and the electromagnetic solenoid A
When SOL is energized, the operating member A6
32 is driven to the rear side position (see FIG. 314(b)). The front side position of the operating member A632 is configured as a position where a disc-shaped disk portion A632a fixed to the tip of the operating member A632 abuts on the projecting receiving portion A615. Next, referring to FIG. 314, the transmission path of the driving force of the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL will be described.

314(a) and 314(b) are side views of the electric accessory 640a, the engaging member A620 and the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL. In FIGS. 314(a) and 314(b), only the electric accessory 640a, the engagement member A620 and the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL are shown for easy understanding, and other configurations for holding these members are shown. Illustration is omitted.

Also, in FIG. 314(a), the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL is in a non-excited state (electric accessory 640
a closed state), and in FIG. 314(b), the energized state of the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL (
The open state of the electric accessory 640a) is illustrated.

When the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL is de-energized and the operating member A632 is positioned at the front side position, the engaging member A620 is inclined downward (see FIG. 314(a)), and the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL is energized. When the action member A632 is arranged at the rear side position, the engaging member A620 is in an upward inclined posture (see FIG. 314(b)).

The electric accessory 640a is rotatably supported by the shaft support A653 of the covering member A650,
An eccentric protrusion 640b is provided to protrude from a position eccentric to the rotation axis toward the rear side.
The eccentric projecting portion 640b is arranged so as to be able to abut on the claw-shaped portion A622 of the engaging member A620 at the top and bottom. The state of the electric accessory 640a changes.

In the present embodiment, the electric accessory 640a is composed of a single blade-shaped member, but as can be seen from the fact that there are two pairs of claw-shaped portions A622 of the engaging member A620, the electric accessory 640a can be connected to each other. You may make it comprise from a pair of blade-shaped member facing each other. In this case:
The engaging member A620 of this embodiment can be used.

Returning to FIGS. 310 and 311, description will be made. The covering member A650 is formed from a colorless and light-transmitting resin material, and is arranged on the front side of the main body member A610 with the electric accessory 640a interposed therebetween. A main body plate portion A651 that constitutes a flow-down path of the ball between, a regulation wall portion A652 that protrudes in a wall shape to the back side of the main body plate portion A651 and regulates the flow of the ball, and the back of the main body plate portion A651 The electric accessory 640a projecting to the side in a columnar shape
and a shaft post-shaped portion A653 that rotatably supports the .

The main body plate portion A651 has a high transmission range A651a in which the back side is easily visible in a front view, and a low transmission range A651 in which the light transmission is lower than the high transmission range A651a and the back side is difficult to recognize.
b.

In the present embodiment, a seal having a printed surface designed to form a high-transmittance range and a low-transmittance range is attached to the front side of the main body plate portion A651, so that the high transmittance range A651a and the Although the low transmittance range A651b is configured, the method is not limited to this. For example, the main body plate portion A651 may be manufactured by two-color resin molding,
A region with low permeability may be formed by roughening the surface of the body plate portion A651 by shaving.

In this embodiment, the high transmission range A651a is formed on the front side (mainly the right side) of the sphere flow-down path, and the low transmission range A651b is provided with a regulation wall portion A652 that regulates the sphere flow-down. It is formed on the side (mainly on the left side). As a result, it is possible to block the player's view of the internal structure in the range where the ball does not flow, while ensuring the visibility of the ball's flowing path.

The regulating wall portion A652 has, for example, an insertion hole A616a for fastening and fixing with the main body member A610.
It has a fastening portion A652a into which a fastening screw inserted through is screwed. Since the fastening screw screwed into the fastening portion A652a is made of metal and is non-transmissive, it easily creates a shadow when viewed from the front. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the fastening part A652a is arranged outside the ball flow path, so that the shadow generated by the fastening screw is prevented from entering the ball flow path and causing the player to feel uncomfortable. can do. As a result, it is possible to prevent the shadow of the fastening screw from degrading the concentration of the player who visually recognizes the flow of the ball.

The main irradiation device A660 includes a diffusion plate A661 housed inside a main light emission holding frame A616 of a main body member A610, an illumination substrate A662 on which light emitting means A663 such as LEDs are arranged on the diffusion plate A661 side, and A rear lid portion A664 formed with an outer shape substantially the same as the outer shape of the electrical decoration board A662 and fastened and fixed to the rear side end portion of the main light emission support frame A616.

The diffusing plate A661 is a plate-like member having an outer shape slightly smaller than the inner shape of the main light emission holding frame A616, and having a diffusing shape for diffusing light on both the front and back sides. It has a plurality of extended portions A661a extending in a plate shape. This extended portion A661a is the diffusion plate A
This is a posture maintaining part for preventing the diffusion plate A661 from tilting when the diffusion plate A661 is accommodated in the main light emission holding frame A616. When the diffusion plate A661 is about to tilt, one of the extended portions A6
61a comes into contact with the inner surface of the main light emission holding frame A616, and resistance in the direction of returning the tilt is generated, so the posture of the diffusion plate A661 is maintained.

In addition, when the main irradiation device A660 is attached to the main body member A610, the illumination board A66
2 is in contact with the extended end of the extended portion A661a, the diffusing plate A661 is restricted from coming off to the rear side.

The outer shape of the illumination board A662 is substantially the same as the outer shape of the outer surface of the main light emission holding frame A616,
The outer shape of the rear lid portion A664 is formed to have substantially the same outer shape as the outer shape of the electrical board A662.
That is, the vicinity of the outer peripheral edge of the electrical board A662 is held in a manner sandwiched from the front and rear by the main light emission holding frame A616 and the rear lid portion A664 (held by surface contact).

As a result, even if the rear lid portion A664 is thin and the rigidity of the rear lid portion A664 alone is low, the rigidity of the main light emission holding frame A616 can be used to stably hold the illumination board A662. can.

Here, an insertion hole A616a through which a fastening screw is inserted is formed on the front side of the diffusion plate A661. Therefore, in order to remove the fastening screws, it is necessary to remove the diffusion plate A661 from the main light emission holding frame A616.

In addition, as described above, the fastening screw is non-transmissive and tends to cause shadows. A diffusing plate A661 capable of diffusing the light is arranged. Therefore, the diffused light can reduce the shadow of the fastening screw (skip the shadow), and the shadow of the fastening screw can be made inconspicuous.

In particular, the light emitting means A663 is arranged at a position where the insertion hole A616a does not overlap the optical axis directed along the front-rear direction (a position where the outline projected in the front-rear direction does not overlap). As a result, the shadow of the fastening screw can be made thinner (the shadow is removed), and the effect of making the shadow of the fastening screw less conspicuous can be made more pronounced.

The main irradiation device A660 is arranged on the back side of the sphere flow-down path as described above, and the light emitted from the light emitting means A663 irradiates the sphere flow-down path. The light reaches the downflow path through the Therefore, compared to the light emitted from the light emitting means A663 without passing through the diffusion plate, the light can be light and spread. This will
It is possible to reduce fatigue given to the eyes of the player who pays attention to the flow path of the ball.

The auxiliary irradiation device A670 is arranged on the back side of the auxiliary light emission holding frame A617 and includes an illumination board A671 on which a plurality of light emitting means A672 are arranged, and an illumination board A671 arranged on the back side of the illumination board A671. and a rear lid portion A673 having an outer shape substantially the same as the outer shape.

The electrical board A671 is fixed in the same holding mode as the electrical board A662. That is, the vicinity of the outer peripheral edge of the electrical board A671 is held in a manner sandwiched between the auxiliary light holding frame A617 and the rear lid portion A673 from the front and back (held by contact on the surface).

As a result, even if the thickness of the rear lid portion A673 is thin and the rigidity of the rear lid portion A673 alone is low, the rigidity of the auxiliary light emission holding frame A617 can be used to stably hold the illumination board A671. can.

Here, unlike the main irradiation device A660, in the auxiliary irradiation device A670, the decorative substrate A671
A diffusion plate is not arranged on the front side of the . That is, the light emitted from the light emitting means A672 is irradiated onto the main body member A610 while maintaining the light emission intensity without being diffused.

Light is emitted in such a manner. In this embodiment, the light emitting means A672 is arranged at a position overlapping the low transmission range A651b in front view, so the light emitted from the light emitting means A672 is low. It is visually recognized by the player through the transmission range A651b. Accordingly, since the player sees the light weakened in the low transmission range A651b, it is possible to prevent the player's eyes from seeing the light from feeling excessive fatigue.

In addition, by maintaining the emission intensity of the light, it is possible to prevent the light from being completely blocked by the low transmission range A651b. Thereby, for example, when a character corresponding to the pachinko machine A10 is drawn in the low transmittance range A651b, the character can be illuminated brightly with the light emitted from the light emitting means A672.

Figures 315(a) and 315(b) are CCCXIIc-CCCXI of Figure 312(b)
It is a sectional view of lottery unit A600 in the line corresponding to the Ic line. In FIG. 315(a), the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL is in a non-excited state, that is, the closed state of the electric accessory 640a (FIG. 31
4 (a)) is illustrated, and in FIG. 315 (b), the excitation state of the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL,
That is, the open state of the electric accessory 640a (see FIG. 314(b)) is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 315(a), when the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL is not energized, the lower end of the disk portion at the tip of the operating member A632 is in contact with the recessed surface A625c of the engaging member A620. Here, the disk portion of the operating member A632 advances to the front side to such an extent that it is arranged to face the vicinity of the widthwise middle position of the recessed surface A625c, and the recessed surface A625c moves in the front-rear direction in which the operating member A632 moves. , the load applied from the engaging member A620 to the operating member A632 is a load whose main component is in the vertical direction (direction perpendicular to the front-rear direction).

Therefore, since it is possible to make it difficult to change the posture of the engaging member A620 by moving (retracting) the operating member A632 by the load from the engaging member A620, the piano wire can be pulled out from the gap of the pachinko machine A10. It is possible to take countermeasures against fraudulent acts that try to change to the open state by inserting a wire such as a wire and applying a load to the movable accessory 640a.

Here, conventional pachinko machines have a function of outputting an error notification when an illegal act is detected. If the movable accessory 640 can be placed in the open state regardless of the ASOL state, the deterrence against fraud is not sufficient.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine A10 of the present embodiment, even if a load is applied to the movable accessory 640 and the state is about to change, the movable accessory 640a and the movable accessory 640a move through the eccentric projecting portion 640b of the movable accessory 640a. Since the engaging member A620 is engaged (see FIG. 314(a)), the engaging member A
In the configuration of this embodiment in which it is difficult to change the posture of the movable accessory 620, it is also possible to make it difficult to release the movable accessory 640a by applying a load to the movable accessory 640a.

In addition, in response to the above fraudulent act that applies a load to the movable accessory 640a, in this embodiment, the recessed surface A
625c is inclined, when the engaging member A620 is forcibly displaced in the rising direction from the state of FIG. The contact position of the rod-shaped portion A625a moves to the thick side (rotation distal end side), and the distal end side connecting rod portion A625 becomes difficult to deform.

Therefore, each time the engaging member A620 is displaced in the rising direction, the engaging member A62
Since it can be configured to increase the load required to displace 0, it is possible to suppress fraudulent acts of opening the movable accessory 640a by applying a load to the movable accessory 640a.

Further, the plane opposite to the recessed surface A625c of the bar-shaped portion A625a is an inclined surface that slopes down toward the front side. Therefore, in the state shown in FIG.
When a is flexurally deformed in the thickness direction by the load received from the operation member A632, the operation member A6
The reaction force applied to 32 can be directed in a direction of increasing inclination toward the front side.

As a result, the load in the front-rear direction applied from the bar A625a to the operating member A632 can be generated as a front load, thereby preventing the operating member A632 from retracting rearward due to the load from the bar A625a. so that the engaging member A62 can be more reliably
A rising displacement of 0 can be regulated.

As shown in FIG. 315(b), in the energized state of the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL, the operating member A6
32 and the protrusion restricting portion A624b of the engaging member A620, the engaging member A620 is further rotated backward (raised up) before colliding with the body box portion of the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL. directional movement) is regulated. That is, the rotation of the base end connecting rod portion A624 can be restricted without causing a collision with the body box portion of the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL. It is possible to avoid problems such as cracking or bending due to collision with parts.

FIG. 316(a) is a top view of the operation unit A300, and FIG. 316(b) is the
317 is a side view of the operation unit A300 as viewed in the direction of the arrow L in 2, and FIG.
13 and a rear view of the operation unit A300.

As shown in FIGS. 316(a) and 316(b), the front end surface of the first operation unit A400 is arranged to protrude toward the front side beyond the front end of the rear case A310. When the game board A13 is made of plywood while the first operation unit A400 is arranged in this way, it is necessary to form a depression or hole on the back side of the game board A13 to avoid interference with the first operation unit A400. However, in this embodiment, since the game board A13 is formed from the resin base plate A60, if the shape is designed in advance to avoid interference with the first operation unit A400 and the mold is manufactured, The game board A13 can be easily formed in a shape that avoids interference.

That is, in this embodiment, since the recesses are provided from the rear side to the front side along the left, right, and upper surfaces of the base plate A60 of the game board A13 (see FIG. 306), the front end surface of the first operation unit A400 is recessed. Interference between the game board A13 and the first operation unit A400 can be easily avoided while projecting to the front side from the front end of the rear case A310. This will
Since the arrangement of the first action unit A400 can be brought closer to the player side, it is possible to improve the effect of the presentation to visually recognize the first action unit A400.

As shown in FIGS. 316(b) and 317, the support plate portion A313 arranged on the upper portion of the rear case A310 is arranged inside (below) the outer surface (upper surface) of the outer wall portion A312.
As a result, compared to the case where the support plate portion A313 is arranged outside the outer wall portion A312 while the outer wall portion A312 is arranged outside (upper side) at the left-right center where the support plate portion A313 is not arranged. can lower the upper end position of the rear case A310.

That is, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom of arrangement of the rear case A310 relative to the game board A13 while improving the degree of freedom of arrangement of the first action unit A400 (or the second action unit A700) relative to the rear case A310.

In addition, the left and right positions where the support plate portion A313 on the top of the back case A310 is arranged are positioned outside the game area in front view as described above, so the support plate portion A313 is positioned below the outer wall portion A312. It is possible to reduce the influence (disadvantage) on the game by being placed in the position.

As shown in FIG. 317, on the right side of the rear case A310, unlike the left side, the support plate portion A313 is omitted except for the upper end position. That is, since the space occupied when the support plate portion A313 is disposed below the upper end position can be omitted, the outer wall portion A312 of the rear case A310 is moved to the right end of the game board A13 accordingly. can be done.

Figure 318 shows the game board A13 on the CCCXVIII-CCCXVIII line in Figure 302
and a partial cross-sectional view of the operation unit A300. As shown in FIG. 318, the base plate A60
Compared to the outer edge extension part 60a that extends to the back side along the outer edge, the back side in the area that is inside the outer edge extension part 60a and overlaps at least a part of the game area in the front and back The front-to-rear width of the central overhanging portion 60b that overhangs is formed to be shorter.

Since the front end face of the base plate A60 is formed on substantially the same plane, the rear side end of the center overhanging portion 60b is arranged on the front side rather than the rear side end of the outer edge extending portion 60a. This avoids interference between the base plate A60 and the first motion unit A400.

A recessed portion 60 recessed toward the front side is provided between the outer edge extension portion 60a and the central projecting portion 60b.
c is formed, and the base plate A60 is formed thinner than the outer edge extending portion 60a and the central projecting portion 60b in the formation range of this recessed portion 60c. That is, the degree of reduction in the energy of light passing through the base plate A60 is determined by the outer edge extending portion 6
0a and central overhang 60b.

A center frame A86 is mounted on the front side of the base plate A60, and the covering portion 86h of the center frame A86 is formed with a gap between it and the outer edge member A73, as shown in FIG. This gap is arranged at a position overlapping with the concave portion 60c when viewed in the front-rear direction. That is, the effect of suppressing the energy reduction of light passing through the base plate A60 is
0 can also be maintained on the front side.

The light whose energy reduction has been suppressed is applied to the sphere flowing down between the center frame A86 and the outer edge member A73, and is used to illuminate the sphere. As described above, in the present embodiment, the degree of decrease in energy when the light used in the effect of irradiating the ball with light passes through the game board A13 can be reduced. It is possible to execute an effect that makes the ball shine.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 318, since the inner surface of the outer edge member A73 is arranged outside the inner surface of the outer edge extending portion 60a of the base plate A60 in a front view, the flow-down path of the ball is formed as a concave. setting part 6
It is possible to make it easier to arrange at a position overlapping with 0c in the front and rear. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier to irradiate the sphere with the light that has passed through the recessed portion 60c.

As shown in FIG. 318, the bent portion 75b of the metal plate member 75 is sandwiched between the outer edge member A73 and the base plate A60. As a result, the outer edge member A73, the base plate A60, and the metal plate member 75 can be configured integrally and mutually assisting each other from the viewpoint of rigidity.

In addition, when the bent portion 75b is irradiated with light, the light is reflected on the metal.
The emission intensity between 73 and base plate A60 can be locally increased. This locally increased intensity of light emission is generated by the inner edge (left edge) in the width direction of the bent portion 75b.
3, the light is generated at a location that can be visually recognized through the vertical wall portion 73b (FIG. 30).
8) (the arc wall portion 73a and the inclined wall portion 73c can be excluded).

As a result, even when light is emitted from the back side to the entire top and bottom of the metal plate member 75, the portion where the light emission intensity is locally high is limited to the vertical length range of the vertical wall portion 73b. Therefore, the player's line of sight can be easily focused on the lottery unit A600 disposed facing the vertical wall portion 73b and the formation range of the flow path above it.

319, 320, 321 and 322 are front views of the operation unit A300. 319, 320, 321 and 322, all the first operation units A400 and a plurality of first operation units A400 refer to five first operation units A400, A400A, A400B, It means A400C and A400D. again,
In some cases, the first operation unit A400 will be described as a representative of configurations and functions that can be commonly adopted by the five first operation units A400, A400A, A400B, A400C, and A400D.

In FIG. 319, all first operation units A400 and second operation units A700
A state in which the retracted state is maintained without projecting to the symbol display device 81 side is shown in FIG.
At 0, all the first operation units A400 are excited to be in a projecting state in which they project toward the third pattern display device 81, and the second operation unit A700 maintains the retracted state.

In FIG. 321, all of the first action units A400 maintain the retracted state, and the second action units A700 are in the protruding state in which they protrude toward the third symbol display device 81 side.
22, some of the first operation units A400B and A400C are in the retracted state, the other first operation units A400, A400A and A400D are in the extended state, and the second operation unit A700 is maintained in the extended state. The situation is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 319 to 322, the plurality of first action units A400 allow the player to:
A front cover A4 formed in a conspicuous color (in this embodiment, the front surface is plated with gold)
10 and the first displacement member A440 are mainly visible, and the first displacement member A440
is arranged so that the edge portion on the side of the third pattern display device 81 is the portion closest to the adjacent first operation unit A400.

That is, since the front cover A410 and the first displacement member A440 are arranged in a posture along the radial line that spreads outward from the inner side (center) of the third pattern display device 81, the center of the radial line is The player's line of sight can be focused toward the inside of the third pattern display device 81 .

The side surface of the first displacement member A440 on the side of the third pattern display device 81 is the adjacent first displacement member A440.
319, the side surface of the first displacement member A440 (side surface including the side surface adjacent to the adjacent first displacement member A440) is the tip side (third symbol display device 8
1 side) is chamfered so as to taper off. As a result, the adjacent first displacement member A4
Avoid interfering with 40.

Although the starting point of chamfering is not limited at all, in the present embodiment, the straight line extended along the lateral side surface of the first displacement member A440 is similarly extended from the adjacent first displacement member A440. Chamfering is not performed until just before the intersection where the straight line intersects, and chamfering is started just before the intersection. As a result, while avoiding interference between the first displacement members A440,
A wide range of visibility of the first displacement member A440 can be ensured.

As shown in FIG. 319, in the retracted state of the first motion unit A400, the first displacement member A4
40 is arranged in a posture that is wide in the front and rear direction so as to occupy a range from the back side of the game board A13 to the front side of the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Therefore, compared to the case where the posture of the first displacement member A440 is limited to the posture in which the light emitting side surface (the surface facing the front side in FIG. 320) faces the front side, the area occupied by the first displacement member A440 in the front view can be suppressed, and the visual change can be increased while suppressing the amount of displacement in front view.

This configuration is effective when there is a limited range available for displacement of the first displacement member A440 in the rotation angle range of the drive gear AMG1 (see FIG. 335) rotated by the drive motor AMT1. Details will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 320, in the extended state of the first motion unit A400, the second displacement member A4
90 is arranged at the overhanging position, while the first displacement member A440 is arranged at the overhanging position (a position away from the third pattern display device 81).

Specifically, the first displacement member A440 is arranged in a posture that is wide in the front and rear direction so as to occupy a range from the back side of the game board A13 to the front side of the third symbol display device 81, and the second
From the state of interfering with the movement trajectory of the displacement member A490 (retracted state of the first operation unit A400), to allow the movement of the second displacement member A490, it is closer to the game board A13 side and is closer to the front side than the second displacement member A490 (the extended state of the first operation unit A400).

As a result, the first displacement member A440 determines whether the first operation unit A400 is in the retracted state.
Regardless of whether the second displacement member A490 is in the overhanging state or not, it is possible to perform a light emitting effect in which light is emitted to the player side without being blocked by the second displacement member A490. In particular, in the overhanging state of the first displacement member A440, it is possible to switch the light emitting mode of the long holes A412a (see FIG. 325) arranged around the third pattern display device 81, and the line of sight to the third pattern display device 81 is changed. can be induced, the details of which will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 321, the effect unit A710 of the second action unit A700 can move up and down toward the center of the third symbol display device 81. As shown in FIG. Also, the second operation unit A700
has a rotator A720 configured to be operable regardless of the vertical position of the effect unit A710, and the rotation of the rotator A720 makes it possible to execute a light emission effect in which light travels in multiple directions. will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 322, each of the plurality of first operation units A400 is provided with an individual driving device, so each first operation unit A400 can independently change and maintain the state. That is, the combination that constitutes the retracted state and the extended state in the first operation unit A400 is not limited to that illustrated in FIG. 322, and can be set arbitrarily.

For example, it is possible to execute only the state change of any one of the first operation units A400, or it is possible to execute the state changes in different first operation units A400 in order. For example, it is possible to sequentially execute the state change clockwise from the lower left first operation unit A400 in the front view, or the third first operation unit A400B clockwise from the lower left.
, it is also possible to perform state changes in both directions. Thus, the first operating unit A
400 can be used to perform a variety of renditions.

Also, for example, the first operation units A400B and A4 that are in the retracted state in FIG.
00C of the second displacement member A490 is arranged at the extended position, the second operation unit A700
, the first operation units A400B and A400C, which may interfere with the second operation unit A700, are placed in the retracted state, and the other first operation units A400, A400A, and A400D are extended. can be put out. This will
Compared to the case where all the first operation units A400 operate synchronously with the same drive device, the first
It is possible to increase the variations of combinations of operations (states) of the operation unit A400 and the second operation unit A700.

FIG. 323 is a front view of the operation unit A300. In FIG. 323, the outer shape of the game board A13, the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 are illustrated by imaginary lines. As shown in FIG. 323, the first
A front cover A410 of the operation unit A400 is arranged so as to effectively decorate the game area. This will be explained below.

First, when defining a game area as an area in which a ball that has passed between the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 flows down, a section (a ball shooting unit The section from the 112a side to the ball return prevention member 68 (see FIG. 302)) is not included in the game area, and the outer frame of the game area is the inner rail 61 in this section. Therefore, the outer ends of the front covers A410 of the first operation units A400 and A400A (up to the second one from the lower left) arranged on the back side of the inner rail 61 are arranged near the inner rail 61 (on the outer side). (extending to outer rail 62 is not required).

On the other hand, the outer rail 62 is the outer frame of the game area in the area after the ball has passed between the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 (especially the area where the ball hit to the right flows down). Therefore, the outer ends of the front covers A410 of the first operation units A400B and A400C (third and fourth units from the lower left) arranged on the back side of the outer rail 62 are near the outer rail 62 (outer side). placed in

Furthermore, the outer frame of the game area in the area where the outer rail 62 is cut off and the outer edge member A73 is arranged becomes the outer edge member A73. Therefore, the outer end of the front cover A410 of the first operation unit A400D (first lower right) arranged on the back side of the outer edge member A73 is arranged near the inner surface (outer side) of the outer edge member A73. . This is the rear case A310 in this embodiment.
The arrangement of the support plate part A313 is omitted in the right middle part of the game board A13, and the back case A
Since the right end of 310 is brought together, this is feasible.

That is, by forming the inner area of the rear case A310 closer to the right end of the game board A13 in front view, the first operation unit A400D can be arranged close to the right end of the game board A13. As a result, a flow path arranged near the right end of the game board A13 as a flow path for a right-handed ball to flow down (a flow path sandwiched between the right flow path forming wall portion 86d and the outer edge member A73, FIG. 3
02) to the outside (to the right) of the front cover A410.
An operating unit A400D may be provided.

In other words, like a typical right-handed machine (for example, a pachinko machine that is not symmetrical),
When the right-handed flow path is extremely thin compared to the left-handed flow path and arranged near the right end of the game board A13, as in the present embodiment, the inner area of the back case A310 is aligned to the right. By configuring so that a movable device such as the first operation unit A400 can be arranged in , the movable device can be arranged in the entire back side of the game area.

On the other hand, on the left side of the rear case A310, a guide portion sandwiched between the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 is formed in a front view, and the player's line of sight is concentrated on this guide portion. Therefore, even if the support plate portion A313 is arranged on the left side of the rear case A310 as in the present embodiment, it is possible to avoid lowering the degree of improvement in the decoration of the game area. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the support plate portion A313 is arranged on the left side of the back case A310, and the support plate portion A313 is omitted on the right side of the back case A310 from the viewpoint of improving the decoration of the game area. It can be said that it is a choice.

As described above in a plurality of ways with reference to FIG. 323, since a plurality of front covers A410 are effectively arranged within the game area, patterns and figures that are visually recognized by a player who pays attention to the game area can be displayed on the game board A.
13 can be made up of a plurality of front covers A410.

As a result, it is possible to eliminate the need to decorate the game area by sticking a sticker or the like on which a character or the like is printed on the surface of the game board A13. In addition, the front cover A410
is arranged, as a part of the first operation unit A400, the appearance can be changed depending on the arrangement of each displacement member and the light emission mode of the light emitting means, so as described above, the game board A
It is possible to increase the variation of the aspect of decorating the game area as compared with the case where a sticker or the like is stuck on the game area 13.例文帳に追加Details of the change in appearance will be described later.

In addition, since the outside of the game area is hidden by the block-shaped member 74 (see FIG. 305),
Even if the portion where the structure is exposed and the driving device are arranged here, it is possible to avoid the deterioration of the appearance.

As shown in FIG. 323, the adjacent first motion units A400 are closely arranged with a slight gap, and the cover member A591 disposed between the adjacent first motion units A400
It is fastened and fixed to the first operation unit A400 in a manner of connecting each other. That is, in this embodiment, a plurality of (five in this embodiment) first operation units A400 arranged around the third pattern display device 81 are combined with each other to form an integrated structure.

Further, the outer side surface of the first operating unit A400 is arranged close to the inner side surface of the rear case A310 (see FIG. 324). Therefore, the rigidity of the first operation unit A400 as a whole can be improved, and the deformation of the rear case A310 can be assisted by the rigidity of the first operation unit A400. ,
Excessive reliance on the metal plate member 75 (see FIG. 308) can be avoided. Therefore,
Since the strength (rigidity, plate thickness) required for the metal plate-like member 75 can be reduced, the degree of freedom in designing the metal plate-like member 75 can be improved.

As a result, the metal plate member 75 can be easily designed into a shape that facilitates noise countermeasures and grounding (see FIGS. 303 and 304) by contact with the inner surface of the inner frame 12, which are the original functions of the metal plate member 75. can.

FIG. 324 is an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit A300. FIG. 324 shows a state in which a plurality of (five in this embodiment) first operation units A400 are removed from the rear case A310 toward the front side, and a second operation unit A700 is attached to the rear case A310.

The first operation unit A400 is configured to be operable in a substantially common operation mode,
A plurality of them are arranged so as to partially surround the inner space of the rear case A310. As shown in FIGS. 319 and 320, each first operation unit A400 moves toward the center of the internal space of the rear case A310 (direction along the radiation emitted from the center of the internal space of the rear case A310). configured to move with

Therefore, for example, since the influence given by gravity may change in each first operation unit A400, the configuration is devised so that the operation can be realized without relying on gravity in this embodiment.
Details will be described later. As described above, each first operation unit A400 has a substantially common configuration, so the first operation unit A400 arranged in the lower left will be explained in detail, and the other first operation units A400 will be explained. omitted.

FIG. 325 is a front perspective view of the first action unit A400, and FIG. 326 is a rear perspective view of the first action unit A400. As shown in FIGS. 325 and 326, the area of the first operation unit A400 is a substantially rectangular area in a front view and covered by the front cover A410. A juxtaposed area A400v is arranged side by side at the end of the area A400b.

The co-located area A400v is not an area that is supposed to be visually recognized by the player in the assembled state. In particular, a blindfold cover member A591 is provided on the central side where there is a risk of being seen by the player, and the rear side of the cover member A591 is configured to be invisible to the player.

In this side-by-side area A400v, a configuration (for example, a drive motor AMT1, a detection sensor A426 for detecting a position, wiring, a connector, etc.) that is inevitably generated along with the effect executed in the main area A400b is not intended to be visually recognized by the player. By arranging, the main body area A400b can be utilized to the maximum extent for arranging members on the assumption that the player can visually recognize the main body area A400b. Namely
Since the main body area A400b can be prevented from being eroded by a configuration that is not intended to be visually recognized by the player, it is possible to make the most of the width of the main body area A400b and arrange large members.

327 is an exploded front perspective view of the first operation unit A400, and FIG. 328 is an exploded rear perspective view of the first operation unit A400. 327 and 328 show a state in which the front cover A410 is removed.

As shown in FIGS. 327 and 328, the first operation unit A400 has a front cover A41.
0 and its front cover A410.
and a rear unit BU disposed on the rear side of the front unit FU.

The front cover A410 has a shape in which a thin plate is bent in a U-shape so as to cover the front side of the front unit FU on the front side of the front unit FU. , a plurality of through holes A412 drilled at positions defined by the relationship with the front unit FU, and a guide portion A413 that guides the displacement of the first displacement member A440 of the front unit FU.

The front cover A410 has the function of hiding most of the area of the front unit FU from the player and making a specific area visible through the through hole A412.
It mainly has a function of guiding the displacement of the first displacement member A440 of the front unit FU.

329 is an exploded front perspective view of the front cover A410, and FIG.
410 is an exploded rear perspective view of 410. FIG. As shown in FIGS. 329 and 330, the front cover A41
0 is arranged to face the production central part A411a as a structure laminated on the back side of the production central part A411a of the main body A411. A diffusing plate A415 formed of a material and a light emitting means A416a such as an LED (illustrated in a substantially square chip shape in FIG. 329) arranged opposite to the diffusing plate A415 and having an optical axis directed toward the diffusing plate A415 side are arranged. The electric decoration board A416 provided and the electric decoration board A
416, fixes the electrical board A416, and is mainly provided with a board fixing plate A417 that is fastened and fixed to the front unit FU.

Hereinafter, the configuration of the diffusion plate A415, the decorative electrical substrate A416, and the substrate fixing plate A417 and how the configuration suppresses positional deviation will be described.

The diffusion plate A415 is not fastened with a fastening screw or the like, but is supported by being sandwiched between the main body A411 and the substrate fixing plate A417 from the front and back direction, and is arranged at an axis corresponding position A415a facing the light emitting means A416a on the back side. A wavy pattern formed from ridges concentrically spreading around is formed, and a recessed portion A415b recessed inward from the outer edge and a through hole having a diameter smaller than that of the light emitting means are drilled. and a plurality of protruding plate portions A415d protruding from the sides constituting the upper and lower ends to the back side in a plate shape.

The ridges forming the wave pattern on the back side of the diffusion plate A415 refract the light irradiated to the axis-corresponding position A415a side, so that the light travels in the radial direction of a circle centered at the axis-corresponding position A415a. It is formed from a shape that advances to the front side. That is, the light incident on the side of the axis-corresponding position A415a is visually recognized by the player at a position away from the axis-corresponding position A415a (outside in the radial direction), but not vice versa. That is, it is formed so as to prevent light incident on a position away from the axis-corresponding position A415a from traveling toward the axis-corresponding position A415a.

The recessed portion A415b is a notch formed to avoid interference between members. formed by

The small diameter portion 415c is formed in the through hole A412 of the main body portion A411 so as to be difficult to see when viewed from the front.
(position facing the plate portion of the main body portion A411), and the substrate fixing plate A41
7 is a through-hole formed at a position corresponding to the insertion columnar portion A417f of 7, the diffusion plate A415,
It is used for alignment of the electrical board A416 and the board fixing plate A417, and the details will be described later.

The protruding plate portion A415d is fitted into the notch portion A417h of the substrate fixing plate A417 so that the diffuser plate A415 can be aligned with the substrate fixing plate A417. The projecting plate portion A415d has a projecting length of about 4 mm and a width of about 10 mm as upper limits, and has a certain degree of rigidity. It is possible to prevent the protruding plate portion A415d from bending or breaking due to a load caused by collision, rubbing, etc.), and the positioning function can be maintained for a long time.

The diffusing plate A415 has a wave pattern formed on the entire back side and can perform the function of diffusing light over the entire area. That is, the first area AC1 is an area that overlaps the decorative electrical board A416 in front view, and the second area AC2 is an area that does not overlap the decorative electrical board A416 in front view.

The optical axis of the light emitting means A416a of the electrical board A416 passes through the first area AC1, and it is possible for the player to visually recognize the strong light emitting mode as a light emitting effect. On the other hand, the second area AC2 is
It corresponds to the area formed so as to protrude from the right side wall A417a3 of the substrate fixing plate A417 to the outside (right side) of the substrate fixing plate A417, and the optical axis of the light emitting means A416a of the electrical board A416 does not pass through. Light from A416a arrives attenuated.

On the other hand, the second area AC2 has a function of enhancing the effect of the lighting effect by the first displacement member A440 of the front unit FU, which will be described later in detail.

The illumination board A416 includes the above-described light emitting means A416a, recessed portions A416b recessed inward from the outer edge, a plurality of large-diameter holes A416c for positioning, and small-diameter through holes A416c. A plurality of combination fastening holes 416d arranged as a group of holes, a plurality of connectors A416e arranged on the front and back sides to which ends of wiring are connected, and an electric wiring F for supplying electricity to the first displacement member A440.
Intermediate connector A416f to which C (flat cable in this embodiment) is connected
and are mainly provided.

The light emitting means A416a is located at a position where the intensity of the light visually recognized by the player is likely to be maximized. be. This makes it easier to ensure the intensity of the light that the player sees through the through hole A412.

The recessed portion A416b is a notch formed to avoid interference with the screw head of the fastening screw inserted through the through hole A417b to fasten and fix the substrate fixing plate A417 to the front unit FU.

The large-diameter hole A416c is a through hole with an inner diameter slightly larger than the outermost diameter of the insertion columnar portion A417f of the substrate fixing plate A417, and is bored at a position corresponding to the insertion columnar portion A417f. By inserting the insertion columnar portion A417f into the large diameter hole A416c, the decorative substrate A416
can be aligned with the substrate fixing plate A417.

The assembly fastening portion A416d is composed of a pair of small-diameter through-holes aligned vertically. The maintenance efficiency is improved by configuring the upper through-hole of the pair of through-holes so that the fastening screw is inserted through the upper through-hole.

For example, for maintenance, the main body A411 and diffusion plate A415 are removed while the first operation unit A400 is fixed to the rear case A310, and the faulty illumination board A4 is removed.
16 is removed from the substrate fixing plate A417, and the normal electrical decoration substrate A416 is attached to the substrate fixing plate A417.
In the place where work to attach to is assumed, the electrical board A416 falls forward due to its own weight before fastening and fixing. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the upper through-hole (the side on which the displacement to the front side due to the forward tilt is large) of the pair of upper and lower through-holes of the assembly fastening portion A416d is fixed by the fastening screw. The posture can be returned to the backward falling direction by the fastening screw. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the electrical board A416 from being erroneously fixed at the time of fastening and fixing for maintenance.

In addition, the columnar portion of the substrate fastening portion A417c protruding on the front side of the substrate fixing plate A417 is inserted through the lower through-hole of the combination fastening portion A416d to position and secure the illumination substrate A416. Equipped with a function for temporary fastening. That is, even before the fastening screws are fastened, the lower through-holes are hooked on the columnar portions of the substrate fastening portions A417c, so that the decorative substrate A416 can be prevented from falling due to its own weight.

The connector A416e is arranged on the front side, and includes a first connector A416e1 to which wiring for supplying power and controlling light emission of the light emitting means A416a is connected, and a wiring connected to the detection sensor A426 fixed to the front unit FU. It mainly includes a second connector A416e2 to be connected, and a third connector A416e3 to which wiring connected to the second displacement member A490 arranged in the rear unit BU is connected.

In these connectors A416e, the position of the mating member to which the wiring is connected is fixed (first connector A416e1, second connector A416e2), or there is a sufficient distance between the connectors even if the mating member is movable ( Because of the third connector A416e3), it can be placed in any position. In this embodiment, the side-by-side area A is located at a position corresponding to the lower end of the electrical decoration board A416 so as to prevent interference with other members and prevent the risk of being seen by the player.
400v.

On the other hand, the first displacement member A440 as a mating member to which the intermediate connector A416f is connected by wiring is located in the area opposite to the electrical board A416 with the board fixing plate A417 interposed therebetween (the board fixing plate A417 and the guide plate portion A430 (Fig. 335), the gap between the connectors (the gap between the connectors) is shortened. There is a risk of giving

In this embodiment, unlike the connector A416e (in this embodiment, the wiring is connected to the connector A416e from below), the wiring can be oriented in any direction, and the intermediate connector A416
The orientation of f is the direction A416x, which is the movement direction of the first displacement member A440 of the front unit FU.
and the stretchable direction of the electrical wiring FC (a band of a flat cable extends, can be easily bent, and is less likely to break).

The board fixing plate A417 has a main body A417a formed in a box shape with an open front side and capable of accommodating the decorative board A416, and a ridge part for receiving the fastening part of the front unit FU on the back side of the main body A417a. Then, from a plane common to a plurality of through holes A417b configured so that fastening screws screwed into the fastening portion can be inserted, the fastening portion into which the fastening screw is screwed, and the tip surface of the fastening portion A plurality of substrate fastening portions A417c configured by a set of small-diameter columnar portions projecting
And prepare.

The main body A417a of the substrate fixing plate A417 includes a plate-shaped deep bottom plate-shaped portion A417a1 connected to the rear end portion of the substrate fastening portion A417c, and parallel to the deep bottom plate-shaped portion A417a1, and the front thereof is the substrate fastening portion A417c. A shallow plate-shaped portion A4 formed on the same plane as the tip surface of the fastening portion of
17a2.

That is, the rear surface of the electrical board A416 can be surface-supported by the front end surfaces of the fastening portions of the plurality of board fastening portions A417c and the shallow plate portion A417a2.

The substrate fixing plate A417 has a sharp projecting portion A417d projecting from the deep bottom plate portion A417a1 to the front side with a sharp tip, and a vertical width of the sharp projecting portion A417d at the lower left of the sharp projecting portion A417d. and a rectangular insertion hole A417e having the same width.

The sharp projecting portion A417d is arranged in the lower left portion of the intermediate connector A416f in the assembled state, and is triangular in cross section in such a manner that it is spaced from the electrical board A416 by the thickness of the electrical wiring FC, which is a flat cable. It is formed as a linearly extending ridge, and the extending direction of the ridge intersects (perpendicularly) with the direction A416x in a front view. Since the wiring connected to the intermediate connector A416f is routed to the rear side through the insertion hole A417e,
The electric wiring FC connected to the intermediate connector A416f is sandwiched between the board fixing plate A417 and the sharp protrusion A417d.

By sandwiching and supporting the electric wiring FC between the board fixing plate A417 and the sharp projecting portion A417d in this way, the portion that receives the displacement of the electric wiring FC due to the displacement of the first displacement member A440 becomes the intermediate connector A416f. From the end position of the electric wiring FC to be connected, the board fixing plate A41
7 and the sharp projecting portion A417d. As a result, it is possible to prevent the electrical wiring FC from falling off from the intermediate connector A416f.

The substrate fixing plate A417 has a shallow plate-like portion A417 at a position corresponding to the large diameter hole A416c.
A plurality of insertion columnar portions A417f projecting from a2 toward the front side in a columnar shape and a shallow bottom plate portion A417
a2, a plurality of through holes A417g penetrating through the boundary between the shallow plate-like portion A417a2 and the deep plate-like portion A417a1, and the diffusion plate A415 protruding from the side wall A417a3 extending from the outer shape of the main body A417a toward the front side. A plurality of notch portions A417h formed with a width capable of receiving the installation plate portion A415d and protruding toward the inside of the main body portion A417a along the front end portion of the side wall A417a3 obliquely formed on the right side in front view. A plurality of protruding pieces A417i
And prepare.

The insertion columnar portion A417f has a diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the large-diameter hole A416c of the electrical board A416c, and exceeds the thickness of the electrical board A416. and a small-diameter tip protruding from the tip of the large-diameter base with a diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the small-diameter hole A415c of the diffusion plate A415.

Accordingly, the large-diameter base portion can be used for alignment of the electrical board A416 and surface support of the diffusion plate A415, and the small-diameter tip portion can be used for alignment of the diffusion plate A415. That is, the diffusion plate A4
15 is aligned at the small-diameter tip portion and is surface-supported by the side wall A417a3 and the tip of the large-diameter base portion of the insertion columnar portion A417f. With this configuration, it is possible to suppress the deviation of the posture of the diffusion plate A415 even though it is not directly fastened and fixed.

The through-hole A417g has a function of forming an air passage and suppressing heat generation of the electrical board A416. In the present embodiment, the diffuser plate A415 is arranged in such a manner as to block the front side of the light emitting means A416a of the electrical board A416. forming As a result, the heat generation of the electrical board A416 can be suppressed without lowering the performance effect of the light emitting means A416a.

The cutout portion A417h receives the projecting plate portion A415d of the diffuser plate A415, and the side wall A41
Engage in the direction along 7a3. As a result, even if the small-diameter tip of the insertion columnar portion A417f breaks due to deterioration over time or falls off due to manufacturing defects, the diffusion plate A4
15 can be prevented from being displaced from the board fixing plate A417 in the longitudinal direction of the protruding plate portion A415d (direction along the formation direction of the side wall A417a3, upper right direction). Therefore,
In a support mode in which the diffusion plate A415 is not fastened and fixed as described above, it is possible to prevent the diffusion plate A415 from being displaced.

The protruding piece A417i is formed in a thin plate shape that allows the electrical board A416 to enter between it and the shallow plate portion A417a2. In this embodiment, in the assembled state, the protruding piece A417i is formed with a protruding length that interferes with the electrical board A416 in a front view.
protrudes downward (diagonally downward) from the side wall A417a3. Therefore, even if the electrical board A416 receives a load in the direction of tilting forward due to gravity or the like, the projecting piece A417i is locked (stopped from the front side) at the tilting tip side (upper right side) of the electrical board A416, it is possible to prevent the electric board A416 from tilting forward.

The protruding piece A417i is formed inside the internal space of the operation unit A300, and
It restricts the displacement of 16 to the front side (suppresses flapping). Therefore, the operation unit A3
It is possible to stably fix the electrical board A416 while omitting the arrangement of fastening screws inside the internal space of 00. As a result, the action unit A3 tends to attract more attention of the player.
00 (due to shadows caused by the fastening screws).
7 can be stably fixed.

When assembling the decorative board A416 to the board fixing plate A417, the right side edge of the decorative board A416 is inserted all the way into the gap between the shallow plate portion A417a2 and the projecting piece A417i. can be smoothly assembled by pushing the electrical board A416 backward from the starting point. This will be described with reference to FIGS. 331 and 332. FIG.

FIG. 331(a) is a front view of the electrical board A416 and the board fixing plate A417, and FIG.
1(b) is a sectional view of the decorative board A416 and the board fixing plate A417 along line CCCXXXIb-CCCXXXIb of FIG. 331(a), and FIG.
and a substrate fixing plate A417, and FIG. 332(b) is a front view of the CCCX of FIG.
It is a cross-sectional view of the decorative board A416 and the board fixing plate A417 along line XXIIb-CCCXXXIIb.

FIGS. 331(a) and 331(b) show a state in which the electrical board A416 is inserted into the board fixing plate A417, and FIGS. 332(a) and 332(b) show the electrical board A416 is attached to the board fixing plate A417.

The electrical board A416 has a chamfered portion A416g chamfered from the upper and lower ends of the right side of the board body.
, A416h. The form of the chamfered portions A416g and A416h corresponds to the length from the upper and lower ends of the right side of the substrate fixing plate A417 to the adjacent cutout portion A417h. That is, the length up to the notch A417h at the lower end of the board fixing plate A417 is shorter than the length up to the notch A417h at the upper end of the right side of the board fixing plate A417.
16, the second chamfered portion A416h at the lower end is formed at a shorter distance from the right side of the electrical board A416 than the first chamfered portion A416g at the upper end.

In FIG. 331, compared with the state shown in FIG. 332, the electrical board A416 is attached to the board fixing plate A41
7 is shown displaced upward along the slope of the left side. The upper limit of the extent of this displacement is the length of the space formed between the first chamfered portion A416g and the upper surface of the substrate fixing plate A417. edge is inserted into the gap formed by the notch A417h.

Contrary to the state shown in FIG. 331, when the electrical board A416 is displaced downward, the length of the space formed between the lower surface of the board fixing plate A417 by the second chamfered portion A416h is set as the upper limit. 332, the edge of the second chamfered portion A416h enters the gap formed by the notch A417h.

By forming the chamfered portions A416g and A416h on the decorative board A416 in this manner, the degree of freedom of the position of the decorative board A416 when inserting the decorative board A416 into the board fixing plate A417 can be improved. That is, the right side of the electrical board A416 and the board fixing plate A417
332, the electrical board A416 can be inserted into the board fixing plate A417 with a slight vertical displacement. This will
The electrical board A416 can be easily inserted into the board fixing plate A417.

331 to the state shown in FIG. 332, the electrical board A416 should be tilted so as to approach the board fixing plate A417 with its right side as the tilting axis. On this occasion,
As shown in FIG. 331, the board fixing plate A41 is passed through the large diameter hole A416c of the electrical board A416.
7 can be seen, the large-diameter hole 417c is guided by the tapered insertion column A417f (see FIG. 329), so that the electrical board A4
16 is corrected, and the state shown in FIG. 332 is obtained. Therefore, the vertical deviation of the electrical board A416 can be corrected without intentionally correcting the vertical deviation of the electrical board A416.
The electrical board A416 can be easily assembled to the board fixing plate A417.

In the assembled state (see FIG. 325), the protruding plate portion A415
d is fitted and the gap is filled. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the electrical board A416 from entering the notch A417h after assembly. That is, for the notch A417h,
While providing the function of widening the gap when the decorative board A416 is assembled, the function of maintaining the arrangement of the decorative board A416 can be provided by filling the gap after the assembled state.

As shown in FIG. 332(b), when the decorative board A416 is attached to the board fixing plate A417, the protruding piece A417i protrudes from the front side of the decorative board A416 and is attached to the board A.
416, the right side of the electrical board A416 is attached to the board fixing plate A41.
7 can be prevented from falling off.

In this embodiment, the board fastening portion A417 is provided near the right sides of the decorative board A416 and the board fixing plate A417 by preventing the decorative board A416 from coming off with such a retaining structure.
c is not arranged (arrangement of fastening screws is omitted). As a result, it is possible to secure an arrangement area for the light emitting means A416a in the vicinity of the right sides of the electrical board A416 and the board fixing plate A417, and to avoid shadows caused by the fastening screws. Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect of the light emission performance in the vicinity of the right side of the decorative board A416 and the board fixing plate A417.

When performing maintenance work to replace the decorative board A416 because the decorative board A416 becomes defective, the decorative board A416 is moved from the state shown in FIG. 332(b) to the board fixing plate A417 as shown in FIG. must be tilted. At this time, the electrical board A416 is fixed to the board fixing plate A.
Since it is surrounded by 417, it is difficult to directly tilt the electrical board A416. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the first connector A416e1 is arranged on the front side, and by pulling the wiring connected to the first connector A416e1 to the front, the electrical board A416 can be easily removed. It can be tilted with respect to the substrate fixing plate A417.

Furthermore, since the first connector A416e1 is disposed on the opposite side of the right end (the end facing the side wall A417a3), which is the starting point of the attitude change of the electrical board A416,
The electrical board A can be efficiently operated by the load applied to the wiring connected to the first connector A416e1.
416 can be rotationally displaced. In other words, it is possible to increase the moment of force applied to the electrical board A416 by the load applied to the wiring. As a result, it is possible to avoid applying an extra (excessive) load to the electrical board A416 and the wiring during maintenance work.

FIG. 333 is an exploded front perspective view of the front side unit FU and the rear side unit BU, and FIG.
4 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front unit FU and the rear unit BU. As shown in FIGS. 333 and 334, the rear unit BU is formed in a box-like shape with an open front side, and the front unit FU is fixed to the open front side in such a manner as to cover it. That is, the rear unit B
A second displacement member A490 disposed on the front side of U is configured to be able to advance and retreat through the gap between the rear unit BU and the front unit FU.

As shown in FIG. 333, only one drive motor AMT1 is provided in each first operation unit A400. The driving force of the driving motor AMT1 is applied to the front unit F
By being transmitted to the first displacement member A440 of U and the second displacement member A490 of the rear unit BU, the movement effect of the first operation unit A400 is executed.

It should be noted that in the present embodiment, units that can be disassembled as units are simply referred to as the front unit FU and the rear unit BU. work in tandem rather than independently. For example, the drive motor AMT1 is arranged in the front unit FU, while the transmission gear A461 for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor AMT1 is arranged in the rear unit BU.

335 is an exploded front perspective view of the front unit FU and the rear unit BU of the first operation unit A400, and FIG. 336 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front unit FU and the rear unit BU of the first operation unit A400. be. 335 and B11 show the front cover A4
10 is an exploded perspective view of the first operation unit A400 with the 10 removed. FIG. 335 and 336, illustration of wiring HC and the like is omitted. First, an outline of the configuration of the first operation unit A400 will be described.

As shown in FIGS. 335 and 336, the first operation unit A400 includes a front unit FU
A support plate portion A420 formed in a plate shape from a light-transmissive colored (black in this embodiment) resin material, and a support plate portion A42 formed from a light-transmissive and colorless resin material
A first displacement member A440 is disposed on the front side of the support plate portion A42 with a gap that allows advance and retreat.
0, the guide plate portion A430 and the support plate portion A42
339 to 344), and a mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor AMT1 to the first displacement member A440. Slide link A4 displaced in conjunction with the displacement of the first displacement member A440
50, a drive motor AMT1 fastened and fixed to the support plate portion A420, and its drive motor AM
and a driving gear AMG1 fastened and fixed to T1.

In addition, the first operation unit A400 constitutes the rear unit BU, and includes a transmission gear group A460 that meshes with the drive gear AMG1 and rotates each component along with the rotation of the drive gear AMG1, and a transmission gear group A460. A support box portion A470 that rotatably supports the gear group A460 and is formed in a box shape with an open front side from a light-transmissive colored (black in this embodiment) resin material.
A rear plate portion A480 formed from a light-transmissive and colorless resin material, disposed on the back side of the support box portion A470 with a gap therebetween and fastened and fixed to the support box portion A470, and a front surface of the support box portion A470. Forward and backward displacement (
356 to 358), and a rack and pinion mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor AMT1 to the second displacement member A490, which is the rear side of the support box portion A470. and a rack and pinion A510 fastened and fixed to.

As described above, the first displacement member A440 and the second displacement member A490 have a plate-like portion (the support plate portion A420 and the bottom portion of the support box portion A470) disposed on the back side of the plate-like portion. (slide link A450, rack and pinion A510) are arranged, and the slide link A4 is provided in the gap between the support plate portion A420 and the support box portion A470
50 and the second displacement member A490 are arranged together.

That is, the displacement members A440 and A490 and the transmission mechanism (slide link A45
0, rack and pinion A510) are arranged in the front and rear, which makes the structure easy to be bulky in the front and rear, while the slide link A450 as a transmission mechanism of the first displacement member A440 on the front side and the second
Compared to the case where the displacement member A490 and the displacement member A490 are arranged in the front and rear independent gaps, it is possible to omit the arrangement of the plate members for forming the independent gaps. The front-rear width occupied by the displacement mechanism portion of the displacement member A490 can be suppressed. As a result, another rendering mechanism can be arranged in the front-to-rear gap that can be formed by suppressing the front-to-rear width, so that the rendering effect of the first operation unit A400 can be improved.

Next, each configuration of the first operation unit A400 will be described in detail. As described above, the first motion unit A400 includes the first displacement member A440 and the second displacement member A490 with different displacement modes, and the configurations required for each displacement are partially different.
The configuration required to realize the displacement of the displacement member A440 will be explained, and later the second displacement member A
The rest of the configuration required for 490 displacement is described.

The support plate portion A420 constitutes the framework of the first motion unit A400 and guides the displacement direction of the first displacement member A440. A portion A421, a plurality of guide holes A422 penetratingly formed as elongated holes extending parallel to the direction A416x, a through hole A423 provided as a similar elongated hole in one of the guide holes A422, and a hole parallel to the direction A416x. A plurality of guide ridges A424 projecting on the front side as ridges, and a main body plate portion A421 that is recessed along a direction A416x from the right edge of the main body plate portion A421 so that the recessed end faces the front side. A concave portion A425 formed as an inclined surface that is inclined in a direction away from the right edge of the slide link A450, a detection sensor A426 that detects that the first displacement member A440 is arranged at the initial position, and a slide link A450. Shaft hole A45
2, and a shaft supporting portion A427 protruding from the main body plate portion A421 to the rear side, and a cylindrically protruding rear side from the main body plate portion A421 at a position corresponding to the arrangement of the transmission gear group A460. It mainly includes a plurality of retaining cylindrical portions A428 provided.

The guide hole A422 includes a first guide hole A422a that guides the displacement of the first displacement member A440,
A plurality of second guide holes A for guiding the displacement of the guided projecting portion A455c of the slide link A450
422b.

The through hole A423 is a through hole for the spring hooking portion A455d of the slide link A450 to pass through toward the front side. lock (hook) the end of the

The other end of the coil spring ASP1 is locked (hooked) on the lower left corner of the main body plate A421, and the coil spring ASP1 generates an urging force in the contracting direction (lower left direction).

The guide ridge A424 straddles the guide groove A441g of the first displacement member A440 and has a function of guiding the displacement of the first displacement member A440. The recessed portion A425 is formed to guide the bending of the electrical wiring FC connected to the first displacement member A440, the details of which will be described later.

The detection sensor A426 is a photocoupler-type sensor arranged so as to be able to determine that the first displacement member A440 is arranged at the initial position. In this embodiment, the detection sensor A426 does not directly detect the position of the first displacement member A440, but the position of the slide link A45.
0 of the detected plate portion A455e is detected.

In this embodiment, the sensor arranged to determine the placement of the first displacement member A440 and the second displacement member A490 is the detection sensor A426, and the first displacement member A440 and the second displacement member A490 are in the extended position. The arrangement of a detection sensor for determining the arrangement is omitted.

As a result, it is possible to reduce member costs and create space for arranging other displacement members. It is conceivable that a problem such as the drive motor AMT1 not stopping despite the fact that the On the other hand, even if the drive motor AMT1 does not stop, it is possible to avoid overloading the parts involved in the displacement of the first displacement member A440.
Measures are taken so that the arrangement of 0s can also be maintained, but the details will be described later.

The retaining cylindrical portion A428 protrudes in a cylindrical shape having an inner diameter that is approximately half the outermost diameter of the transmission gear A461 of the transmission gear group A460. They are arranged to face the group A460. That is, the retainer cylindrical portion A428 is connected to the transmission gear A461.
It has a function of suppressing displacement in the shaft-side falling-off direction.

Incidentally, in this embodiment, a retaining screw (not shown) is fixed to the tip of the shaft support portion of the transmission gear A461. Therefore, as long as the screw does not loosen or fall off, it is possible to restrict the transmission gear A461 from being displaced in the shaft-side falling-off direction by the screw. As described above, in this embodiment, the transmission gear A461 is prevented from coming off from the shaft by the screw and the retaining cylindrical portion A428 in two stages. can be prevented.

The right edge of the guide plate portion A430 is parallel to the right edge of the main body plate portion A421.
21 and a plate-like body plate portion A431 arranged facing each other in a posture along a plane parallel to the plane formed by 21;
A plurality of long rectangular recesses A432 along the direction A416x are provided on the back side of the body plate portion A431. Inclined surface A433 inclined toward the front side, configured to assist displacement of (rear lid portion 443 of) first displacement member A440, and recessed portion A of support plate portion A420
A guide plate portion A434 formed in a long plate shape along the direction A416x with a width corresponding to the width of 425
and are mainly provided.

The main body plate portion A431 has a plurality of insertion holes A431a through which fastening screws are inserted in the peripheral portion thereof. The left side edge of the main body plate portion A431 is supported by the surface (side) of the side wall portion A421a raised from the left side edge of the main body plate portion A421 of the support plate portion A420 toward the front side. The guide plate portion A
430 can be stably fastened and fixed to the support plate portion A420.

Further, the main body plate portion A4 as a position passing through the front and back when the first displacement member A440 advances and retreats
31, the insertion hole A431a is arranged only at one substantially central position in the vertical width.
1 and the support plate portion A420 can be suppressed over the entire right edge portion, and compared to the case where a plurality of insertion hole portions A431a are arranged, the first displacement member A44
0 design freedom can be improved.

The long concave portion A432 is a concave portion that guides the displacement-stopping projecting portion A441e of the first displacement member A440 in the direction A416x, which is the direction in which the displacement-stopping projecting portion A441e of the first displacement member A440 is displaced. It is recessed with a length substantially equal to that of the . That is, the first displacement member A440
, the back side is not only guided by the guide hole A422 of the support plate portion A420, but also the long concave portion A
The front side is also guided by 432 .

The guide plate portion A434 has an electrical wiring FC formed of a flat cable on the right edge side.
Equipped with a plurality of claw portions A434a arranged at intervals slightly wider than the thickness of the claw portion A
An electric wiring FC whose end is connected to the first displacement member A440 is passed through the gap between 434a and temporarily fixed. By this. Electric wiring FC that is bent and displaced by displacement of the first displacement member A440
can be set to the position of the claw portion A434a, and the position of the electrical wiring FC on the left side of the claw portion A434a can be stabilized.

Therefore, the electric wiring FC composed of a flat cable is attached to the guide plate portion A434.
Therefore, when the first displacement member A440 is displaced to the front side of the guide plate portion A434 and the electric wiring FC is similarly displaced (see FIG. 346), the first Interference between the displacement member A440 and the electrical wiring FC can be avoided. The first displacement member A440 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 337 and 338. FIG.

337 is an exploded front perspective view of the first displacement member A440, and FIG. 338 is an exploded rear perspective view of the first displacement member A440. Note that FIG. 338 is shown in a different direction from FIG. 336 for convenience of explanation.

As shown in FIGS. 337 and 338, the first displacement member A440 is a guided plate portion A4 which is a plate-like portion guided along the direction A416x between the support plate portion A420 and the guide plate portion A430.
41, a plate formed of a colored (gold-plated in this embodiment) and light-impermeable resin material, pivotally supported by the guided plate portion A441, and displaced in conjunction with the guided plate portion A441. An interlocking plate portion A442 which is a shaped portion and an interlocking plate portion A44 which is fastened and fixed to the back side of the interlocking plate portion A442
2, a diffusion plate A444 formed in a plate shape from a colorless, light-transmitting resin material and arranged opposite to the back side of the interlocking plate portion A442, and the diffusion plate A444. and an ornamental board A445 arranged opposite to the back side of the diffuser plate A444 and having an outer shape substantially equal to the outer shape of the diffusion plate A444 and arranged opposite to the rear lid portion 443 .

Here, the interlocking plate portion A442, the rear lid portion 443, the diffusion plate A444, and the electrical board A445 are
Since they are fixed together, these will be explained first. That is, the interlocking plate portion A442
A plurality of positioning pins A442a projecting from the rear surface of the diffusion plate A444 are inserted into a plurality of insertion holes A
The interlocking plate portion A442 and the diffuser plate A444 are positioned relative to each other by being inserted through the diffuser plate A444a.
5, the diffusion plate A444 and the electrical decoration substrate A445 are positioned relative to each other.

Then, the plurality of insertion holes 4 of the rear lid portion 443 are inserted into the plurality of screw portions A442b of the interlocking plate portion A442.
43a is fastened and fixed, the diffusion plate A444 and the decorative substrate A445 between the interlocking plate portion A442 and the rear lid portion 443 are displaced (positioning pin height).
As a result, the diffusion plate A444 and the electrical board A445 can be stably fixed without directly inserting the fastening screws into the diffusion board A444 and the electrical board A445.

In this embodiment, a plurality of protruding ribs 443b projecting toward the front side near the outer periphery of the rear lid portion 443 come into contact with the electrical board A445 and press against the interlocking plate portion A442 and the diffusion plate A444. It is formed with a dimensional relationship that causes a load. Due to this pressing force, the diffusion plate A
444 and the electrical board A445 can be stably fixed to the interlocking plate portion A442.

The illumination board A445 has a plurality of light emitting means A445b such as LEDs (illustrated in a substantially square chip shape in FIG. 337) whose optical axis is directed toward the diffusion plate A444 on the front side.

The diffusion plate A444 has an axis-corresponding position A444 arranged opposite to the light emitting means A445b on the back side.
A wave pattern is formed from ridges that spread concentrically around c, and the outer edge of the wave pattern is formed at a position corresponding to the opening A442c of the interlocking plate portion A442.

A fitting portion A444d is formed on the front side of the diffuser plate A444, and has an outer shape slightly smaller than the inner shape of the opening A442c of the interlocking plate portion A442. be

With this configuration, the light emitted from the light emitting means A445b diffuses the diffusion plate A444.
The player can visually recognize the light that has passed through the aperture A442c among the lights that have passed through.

The electrical board A445 has a connector A445c arranged on the back side and connected with an electrical wiring FC composed of a flat cable. The electric wiring FC connected to the connector A445c is connected to the connector A445c from the rotation tip side of the interlocking plate portion A442.
As a result, the bending position of the electric wire FC can be configured on the rotation distal end side of the interlocking plate portion A442, and the degree of bending can be moderated.

The rear lid portion 443 includes a connector A445c and a circuit configuration device (not shown) (capacitor, resistor, etc.).
and a through hole A443d formed through the ventilation opening 416c in the direction A416x.

The tip of the electric wire FC connected to the connector A445c is arranged in the ventilation opening 443c where the connector A445c is located, but the electric wire FC is routed to the rear side of the rear lid portion 443 through the through hole A443d. . As a result, the electrical wiring FC can be sandwiched between the small-diameter rod-shaped portion 443e that partitions between the ventilation opening 443c and the through-hole A443d, and the electrical board A445. Wiring FC
can be prevented from being displaced. The through-hole A443d also has a role of forming a space for arranging the electric wire FC, and compared with the case where the through-hole A443d is not formed with a sufficient length along the direction A416x, the electric wire FC can reduce the load on the

In addition, in the present embodiment, the thin rod-shaped portion 443e is formed to protrude toward the electrical board A445 in the same manner as the projecting rib 443b. Therefore, the thin rod-shaped portion 443e and the electrical board A445
The gap between will be narrowed. With such a configuration, it is possible to limit the point at which a load is applied from the rear cover portion 443 to the electrical board A445. That is, only the protruding rib 443b and the thin rod-shaped portion 443e are configured to apply a load from the rear lid portion 443 to the electrical board A445.

As a result, even if the electric wire FC is displaced by the displacement of the first displacement member A440, it is possible to prevent the electric wire FC from coming out of the connector A445c.

Next, a connection mode between the interlocking plate portion A442 and the guided plate portion A441 and details of the guided plate portion A441 will be described. The interlocking plate portion A442 has a support shaft portion A442d protruding in a circular outer shape.
and a shaft support hole A442e, which is a circular opening coaxial with the central axis of the support shaft portion A442d, and is rotatably supported by the interlocking plate portion A442 about an axis parallel to the central axis of the support shaft portion A442d. and a roller member A442f which is a member made of resin and formed in a circular outer shape.

The guided plate portion A441 includes a main body plate portion A441a formed in a long plate shape from a resin material, a support shaft portion A441b projecting from an upper end portion of the main body plate portion A441a, and a support shaft portion A441b. A shaft support hole A441c, which is circular and coaxial with the central axis of the support shaft portion A441b, is drilled at the lower end of the main body plate portion A441a, and a long straight line from the front to the front side of the main body plate portion A441a. A plurality of projecting guide ribs A441d, a plurality of displacement stop projections A441e projecting toward the front side in an elongated shape along a direction intersecting (perpendicular to) the guide ribs A441d, and an electric wire. An inclined surface A441f inclined outward (lower left side) toward the front side at a position opposed to the electrical wiring FC connected to the connector A445c of the decorative substrate A445, and a main body plate portion A4.
A plurality of guide grooves A4 formed as small-diameter grooves along the direction A416x on the back side of 41a
41g, a recessed portion A441h recessed along the direction A416x from the upper right edge of the main body plate portion A441a, and a fastening portion protruding from the back side of the main body plate portion A441a in such a manner that a fastening screw can be fastened. and A441i.

The support shaft portion A441b and the shaft support hole A441c are used for connection with the interlocking plate portion A442. As for the method of assembly, the shaft support hole A442e of the interlocking plate portion A442 is connected to the support shaft portion A441b.
After arranging the interlocking plate portion A 442 so as to be arranged in the shape of the axis of the interlocking plate portion A
442 is moved with respect to the guided plate portion A441 so that the support shaft portion A is inserted into the shaft supported hole A442e.
441b, and the support shaft portion A442d is inserted into the shaft-supported hole A441c, respectively, to form a shaft-supported state. In addition, the shaft support hole A442e, the support shaft portion A441b, and the shaft support hole A
441c and the support shaft portion A442d are configured with dimensions such that a slight gap is formed therebetween so as to be rotatable.

In this embodiment, after the interlocking plate portion A442 and the guided plate portion A441 are axially supported by the above-described method, a screw for preventing slippage is fixed to the tip of the support shaft portion A441b. The diameter of the head of is larger than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole A442e, thereby preventing the interlocking plate portion A442 from slipping out of the guided plate portion A441.

The guide ridge portion A441d is a narrow diameter portion for narrowing the contact area with the back surface of the guide plate portion A430. As a result, the frictional force generated between the guide plate portion A430 and the main body plate portion A431 can be reduced, and the guided plate portion A441 can be smoothly displaced.

The displacement-stopping projecting portion A441e is formed with a width slightly shorter than the width of the elongated recess A432 of the guide plate portion A430, and enters the elongated recess A432 in the assembled state of the first operation unit A400 (see FIG. 324). It is formed with a protruding length.

When the guided plate portion A441 is arranged at the end of the displacement, the formation position of the displacement stopping protruding portion A441e is designed so that the displacement stopping protruding portion A441e is arranged at the end of the long concave portion A432 in the longitudinal direction. be done. Therefore, even if the guided plate portion A441 does not normally stop at the end of the displacement, the displacement stopping protruding portion A441e can be locked by the long concave portion A432 so that the guided plate portion A4
41 displacement can be regulated.

The inclined surface A441f is an electric wire F connected to the connector A445c of the electrical board A445.
Plane for receiving and guiding C. By forming the inclined plate portion A
The load applied to the electrical wiring FC due to the displacement of 441 can be suppressed. Note that the flat type (
A mode of bending of the electric wiring FC composed of the flat cable will be described later.

The guide groove A441g is a groove that straddles the guide ridge A424 of the support plate portion A420, and is formed with a groove width larger than the thickness of the guide ridge A424. Equipped with a projecting portion that projects in a circular shape. The distance between the tips of the protruding parts is the guide ridge A424
The dimension is slightly longer than the thickness of the As a result, the direction in which the guide groove A441g extends is suppressed from deviating from the longitudinal direction of the guide ridge A424, while the guide groove A441g and the guide ridge A4 are suppressed.
24 can be reduced.

The recessed portion A441h is a relief portion that is recessed to avoid interference with a portion used for fastening by a fastening screw that is inserted through the insertion hole portion A431a on the right side of the guide plate portion A430. Thus, in the present embodiment, the right end of the guided plate portion A441 can be arranged on the right side of the insertion hole portion A431a.

The fastening portion A441i is inserted through the first guide hole A422a of the support plate portion A420 in the assembled state (see FIG. 324) and connected to the displacement-side long hole A453 of the slide link A450.
That is, the driving force is transmitted to the fastening portion A441i via the slide link A450, thereby displacing the first displacement member A440 including the guided plate portion A441.

Returning to FIGS. 335 and 336, description will be made. The slide link A450 is connected to the support plate portion A42.
A long link A451 rotatably supported by the shaft support A427 of No. 0 and its long link A4
51 and a deformed slide member A4 supported so as to be able to move in parallel along the direction A416x
55 and .

The long link A451 is a member formed in the shape of a long rod, and has a supported shaft hole A452 drilled with a diameter that allows the shaft support portion A427 to be inserted therethrough, and a long side with respect to the shaft supported hole A452. Displacement-side long hole A453 drilled in the end portion in the shape of a long hole along the longitudinal direction, and displacement-side long hole A45
A long hole A45 on the transmission side is formed in a long hole shape along the longitudinal direction at the end opposite to the side on which 3 is arranged.
4 and .

The odd-shaped slide member A455 is arranged in the recessed portion A421b of the main body plate portion A421, which is recessed on the front side of the base end surface of the support plate portion A420 from which the shaft support portion A427 protrudes.
21 and the long link A451; and a plurality of guided projecting portions A455c projecting in an outer circular shape toward the front side of the main body plate portion A455a and inserted into the second guide holes A422b of the support plate portion A420,
A spring hooking portion A that protrudes toward the front side of the main body plate portion A455a in a hook-like shape and is inserted into the through hole A423 of the support plate portion A420 so that the end portion of the coil spring ASP1 is hooked (locked).
455d, a detected plate portion A455e formed in a thin plate shape that can enter the detection gap of the detection sensor A426, and a deformed transmitted portion A456 to which driving force is transmitted from the transmission gear group A460.

The transmission gear group A460 is composed of a pair of gears rotatably supported by the support box portion A470. A pinned gear A462 meshed on the opposite side of the drive gear AMG1
and a same-phase member A465 that follows the pinned gear A462 in phase.

The pinned gear A462 has a transmission protrusion A that protrudes from an eccentric position toward the front side in a circular shape.
463, and an arcuate wall portion A464 formed as an arcuate wall portion around the rotational axis of the pinned gear A462 with the transmission protrusion A463 as the base end.

The arcuate wall portion A464 has a central angle of approximately 230 degrees, and is shorter in length toward the front than the transmission protrusion A463. Therefore, as will be described later, the transmission protrusion A463 is also the arc wall portion A.
Similarly, 464 is a portion that transmits the load to the heteromorphic transmitted portion A456, but the load generation location differs in the front-rear direction. That is, the position where the load is generated via the transmission projection A463 (if the load is generated at multiple points, the middle point or average point) is closer to the front side than the position where the load is generated via the circular arc wall portion A464. becomes. Since the displacement mode of the first displacement member A440 can be described by the above-described configuration, the displacement mode of the first displacement member A440 will be described below.

339(a) is a front view of the front unit FU, FIG. 339(b) is a rear view of the front unit FU, and FIG. 339(c) is CCCXXXIXc-CCCXX of FIG.
FIG. 11 is a partial cross-sectional view of the first operating unit A400 taken along line XIXc;

In order to facilitate understanding, the guide plate portion A430 is illustrated by imaginary lines in FIG. 339(a), and the transmission gear A461 and the electrical wiring FC are omitted in FIG. As for A462, only the transmission protrusion A463 and the arcuate wall portion A464 are shown, and in FIG. 339(c), the front cover A410 is shown in phantom lines. Also, in FIGS. 339(a) and 339(b), illustration of the rear unit BU is omitted unless otherwise specified.
The same applies to FIGS. 340 to 345 below.

In FIGS. 339(a) to 339(c), the first displacement member A440 is connected to the drive motor AMT1.
is arranged at the retracted position before the excitation of . In this state, the deformed slide member A455 is arranged on the outermost side (left side), and the length of the coil spring ASP1 is the shortest. is the weakest.

As shown in FIG. 339(b), the deformed transmitted portion A456 is a portion that engages with the gear with pin A462, and is located on the projecting position (upper right) side of the transmission protrusion A463.
A protruding plate portion A456a protruding from 5a in a plate shape toward the rear side, and a protruding plate portion A456 at a retracted position (lower left) side of the protruding plate portion A456a at a distance equal to or larger than the diameter of the transmission protruding portion A463.
a, and the projecting plate portion A456a and the opposing arrangement portion A
456b and an insertion gap A456c formed between them.

The protruding length of the protruding plate portion A456a is longer than the length of the opposing arrangement portion A456b in the same direction, and in the assembled state (see FIG. 324), the transmission protruding portion A463 and the arc wall portion A46
4 in the moving direction.

The opposing arrangement portion A456b can abut against the transmission projection A463a in the movement direction (
overlap), on the other hand, it is not in contact with the circular arc wall portion A464 in the moving direction (does not overlap).
That is, the opposing arrangement portion A456b and the arcuate wall portion A464 are formed in a dimensional relationship that creates a front-to-rear gap.

The insertion gap A456c is configured to be able to receive the transmission projection A463, and an escape portion A456d formed in a shape along the moving direction of the transmission projection A463 is formed on the open end side. The relief portion A456d allows the transmission projection A463 to smoothly move forward and backward with respect to the insertion gap A456c (with low resistance).

Although illustration of the transmission gear A461 is omitted in FIG. 339(b), the actual assembled state (
324), a pair of transmission gears A461, which are gears of the same shape, are arranged between the driving gear AMG1 and the pinned gear A462, and transfer the driving force of the driving gear AMG1 to the pinned gear A4.
62.

As shown in FIG. 339(b), the first displacement member A44 guided by the first guide hole A422a
0 and the odd-shaped slide member A455 guided by the second guide hole A422b form the long link A
451. That is, the long link A451 that is rotationally displaced about the pivotal support A427
As a result, the first displacement member A440 and the deformed slide member A455 are displaced in opposite directions parallel to the direction A416x.

As shown in FIG. 339(b), the detected plate portion A455e enters the detection gap of the detection sensor A426 when the first displacement member A440 is arranged at the retracted position.

As shown in FIG. 339(c), the first displacement member A440 has a roller member A442f disposed between the guide wall portion A471b of the support box portion A470 and the guide portion A413 of the front cover A410. The placement of A442f is the guide wall portion A47 of the support box portion A470.
1b and the guide portion A413 of the front cover A410, the guided plate portion A44
The interlocking plate portion A442 is configured to rotate around the pivoted support hole A442e in accordance with one slide displacement. Operation diagrams for explaining the displacement mode of the first displacement member A440 in chronological order will be explained.

340(a) is a front view of the front unit FU, FIG. 340(b) is a rear view of the front unit FU, and FIG. 340(c) is CCCXXXIXc-CCCXX in FIG.
FIG. 11 is a partial cross-sectional view of the first operating unit A400 taken along line XIXc;

In FIGS. 340(a) to 340(c), the driving motor AMT1 is excited to rotate, the roller member A442f is at the same position as in FIG.
0 is in contact with the bent corner of the guide wall A471b.

By the time the state shown in FIG. 339 changes to the state shown in FIG. 340, the pinned gear A462 rotates from the initial angle d0 by the first angle d1. With this rotation, the transmission protrusion A463 pushes the protruding plate portion A456a, thereby causing the deformed slide member A455 to slide and displace, and the slide displacement to be transmitted to the first displacement member A440 via the long link A451. be. As described above, the arc wall portion A464 and the facing arrangement portion A456b have a front-to-rear gap, so that the arc wall portion A464 can be arranged to overlap the facing arrangement portion A456b in the front-to-rear direction. (See FIG. 340(b)).

In the present embodiment, the straight line connecting the rotation axis of the pinned gear A462 and the center of the transmission protrusion A463 is parallel to the direction A416x at the initial angle d0, but the present invention is not limited to this. .

For example, at the initial angle d0, the straight line connecting the rotation axis of the pinned gear A462 and the center of the transmission protrusion A463 is inclined by 10 degrees with respect to the direction A416x (10 degrees in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the pinned gear A462). slanted) straight line. In this case, the section of 10 degrees from the initial angle d0 can be configured as a section in which no load is applied to the projecting plate portion A456a in the traveling direction, so that excessive driving resistance is prevented immediately after the start of rotation. can be avoided.

In other words, a section of 10 degrees from the initial angle d0 can be used as a run-up section, and the protruding plate portion A456a can be vigorously pushed after being rotated by 10 degrees from the initial angle d0. Suppression can be achieved. Also, when driving in the direction returning to the initial angle d0, a section of 10 degrees can be used as a deceleration section.

341(a) is a front view of the front unit FU, FIG. 341(b) is a rear view of the front unit FU, and FIG. 341(c) is CCCXXXIXc-CCCXX in FIG.
FIG. 11 is a partial cross-sectional view of the first operating unit A400 taken along line XIXc;

FIGS. 341(a) to 341(c) show a state in which the drive motor AMT1 is excited to rotate and the roller member A442f contacts the intermediate portion of the guide wall portion A471b of the support box portion A470.

By the time the state shown in FIG. 339 changes to the state shown in FIG. 341, the pinned gear A462 rotates from the initial angle d0 by the second angle d2. With this rotation, the transmission protrusion A463 pushes the protruding plate portion A456a, thereby causing the deformed slide member A455 to slide and displace, and the slide displacement to be transmitted to the first displacement member A440 via the long link A451. be. As described above, the arc wall portion A464 and the facing arrangement portion A456b have a front-to-rear gap, so that the arc wall portion A464 can be arranged to overlap the facing arrangement portion A456b in the front-to-rear direction. (See FIG. 341(b)).

342(a) is a front view of the front unit FU, FIG. 342(b) is a rear view of the front unit FU, and FIG. 342(c) is CCCXXXIXc-CCCXX in FIG.
FIG. 11 is a partial cross-sectional view of the first operating unit A400 taken along line XIXc;

FIGS. 342(a) to 342(c) show a state in which the drive motor AMT1 is excited and rotated, and the longitudinal direction of the long link A451 is substantially perpendicular to the direction A416x.

By the time the state shown in FIG. 339 changes to the state shown in FIG. 342, the pinned gear A462 rotates from the initial angle d0 by the third angle d3. With this rotation, the transmission protrusion A463 pushes the protruding plate portion A456a, thereby causing the deformed slide member A455 to slide and displace, and the slide displacement to be transmitted to the first displacement member A440 via the long link A451. be. As described above, the arc wall portion A464 and the facing arrangement portion A456b have a front-to-rear gap, so that the arc wall portion A464 can be arranged to overlap the facing arrangement portion A456b in the front-to-rear direction. (See FIG. 342(b)).

In this embodiment, when the first displacement member A440 starts to slide along a plane perpendicular to the front-rear direction (see FIG. 342), the longitudinal direction of the long link A451 and the displacement direction of the deformed slide member A455 (the direction parallel to the direction A416x) are substantially perpendicular to each other, the first displacement member A440 can be smoothly slid in one direction (on the same plane).

That is, the direction of the load applied from the displacement-side elongated hole A453 to the fastening portion A441i is directed to one side (lower side in this embodiment) with respect to the displacement direction (direction parallel to the direction A416x) of the deformed slide member A455. can be limited. As a result, compared to the case where the load applied to the first displacement member A440 is reversed in the direction intersecting the displacement direction of the first displacement member A440 during the slide displacement of the first displacement member A440, the first displacement member A440 rattling of the slide displacement can be suppressed.

343(a) is a front view of the front unit FU, FIG. 343(b) is a rear view of the front unit FU, and FIG. 343(c) is CCCXXXIXc-CCCXX in FIG.
FIG. 11 is a partial cross-sectional view of the first operating unit A400 taken along line XIXc;

In FIGS. 343(a) to 343(c), the drive motor AMT1 is excited to rotate, and the roller member A442f shifts from the state shown in FIG.
44(c)) is shown in a state in which it is placed at approximately the middle position of the displacement until reaching the state of 44(c)).

By the time the state in FIG. 339 changes to the state in FIG. 343, the pinned gear A462 rotates by a fourth angle d4 from the initial angle d0. With this rotation, the transmission protrusion A463 pushes the protruding plate portion A456a, thereby causing the deformed slide member A455 to slide and displace, and the slide displacement to be transmitted to the first displacement member A440 via the long link A451. be. As described above, the arc wall portion A464 and the facing arrangement portion A456b have a front-to-rear gap, so that the arc wall portion A464 can be arranged to overlap the facing arrangement portion A456b in the front-to-rear direction. (See FIG. 343(b)).

344(a) is a front view of the front unit FU, FIG. 344(b) is a rear view of the front unit FU, and FIG. 344(c) is CCCXXXIXc-CCCXX in FIG.
FIG. 11 is a partial cross-sectional view of the first operating unit A400 taken along line XIXc;

FIGS. 344(a) to 344(c) show a state (also referred to as an extended state) in which the drive motor AMT1 is excited to rotate and the first displacement member A440 is arranged at the extended position.

By the time the state shown in FIG. 339 changes to the state shown in FIG. 344, the pinned gear A462 rotates from the initial angle d0 by the fifth angle d5. With this rotation, the transmission protrusion A463 pushes the protruding plate portion A456a, thereby causing the deformed slide member A455 to slide and displace, and the slide displacement to be transmitted to the first displacement member A440 via the long link A451. be. As described above, the arc wall portion A464 and the facing arrangement portion A456b have a front-to-rear gap, so that the arc wall portion A464 can be arranged to overlap the facing arrangement portion A456b in the front-to-rear direction. (See FIG. 344(b)).

When the pinned gear A462 rotates further from the state shown in FIG. 344, the transmission protrusion A463 begins to displace in the direction opposite to the direction A416x. Here, since the arcuate wall portion A464 and the protruding plate portion A456a are formed in a dimensional relationship to abut in the direction A416x, the transmission protruding portion A
463 separates from the protruding plate portion A456a, the arc wall portion A464
Displacement of the deformed slide member A455 is restricted in a state of contact with 456a.

The contact point between the arcuate wall portion A464 and the projecting plate portion A456a is arranged in a straight line parallel to the direction A416x passing through the rotation axis of the pinned gear A462. Therefore, the load applied from the protruding plate portion A456a to the arcuate wall portion A464 passes through the rotation axis of the pinned gear A462. can be prevented.

Furthermore, since the arcuate wall portion A464 is curved, the contact area between the arcuate wall portion A464 and the projecting plate portion A456a can be suppressed (theoretically, since line contact can be achieved, the contact area is 0). Therefore, when the pinned gear A462 further rotates from the state shown in FIG. ), it is possible to avoid the need for extra driving force for restricting the displacement of the odd-shaped slide member A455. That is, the displacement of the deformed slide member A455 can be restricted only by the driving force required to rotate the pinned gear A462.

In addition, considering the deformation due to wear of the resin material that actually constitutes the arcuate wall portion A464 and the protruding plate portion A456a, the contact area increases over time, and the arc wall portion A464 and the protruding plate portion A456a increase.
It is thought that the frictional force generated between a and a increases. To deal with this, a low-friction seal may be applied to the arcuate wall portion A464 and the projecting plate portion A456a, or a lubricant (such as grease) may be applied. In this embodiment, since the ideal contact area is formed small, the area that needs to be treated with a low-friction seal or lubricant can be reduced. Therefore, countermeasure costs can be suppressed.

As shown in FIG. 344(b), the outer surface of the transmission projection A463 and the outer surface of the arcuate wall A464 are formed in the same circular shape coaxial with the rotation axis of the pin gear A462. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the timing of transition from the contact state with the protrusion A463 to the contact state with the arcuate wall portion A464.

FIG. 345 is a rear view of the front unit FU. FIG. 345 shows a state in which the driving motor AMT1 is excited to rotate, the first displacement member A440 is arranged at the extended position, and the transmission projection A463 contacts the deformed transmitted portion A456.

339 to 345, the pinned gear A462 rotates from the initial angle d0 by the sixth angle d6 (360 degrees or more) (see FIG. 360). Figure 344
After the state of , the transmission projection A463 does not push the projecting plate portion A456a, and is displaced without contacting other members. 345, the protruding plate portion A456a has an arc wall portion A
344(b) is maintained (displacement in the return direction is restricted). That is, the contact between the transmission protrusion A463 and the deformed transmitted portion A456 occurs in a state where the first displacement member A440 is arranged at the overhang position.

As shown in FIG. 345, the contact position between the transmitting protrusion A463 and the deformed transmitted portion A456 is the position on the projecting position side of the first displacement member A440 with respect to the insertion gap A456c. That is, the location (insertion gap A456c) where the load is applied to the deformed transmitted portion A456 due to the displacement of the first displacement member A440 is different from the location where the deformed transmitted portion A456 in FIG. 345 is subjected to the load. As a result, the pinned gear A462 unintentionally overrotates, and the transmission projection A4
Even if an overload occurs in 63 or deformed transmitted portion A456, it is possible to avoid a change in the shape of insertion gap A456c. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the displacement of the deformed slide member A455 will be affected after the overload occurs.

In the state of FIG. 345, the direction of the load applied from the transmission protrusion A463 to the odd-shaped slide member A455 is the direction (upper right direction) toward the retracted position side of the first displacement member A440.
Since the deformed slide member A455 is arranged at the end of the movement range in this direction, the deformed slide member A455 is prevented from being displaced by the load applied from the transmission protrusion A463.

In this way, while avoiding the deformed slide member A455 from being displaced, the transmission protrusion A4
The load applied from 63 can be softened by elastic deformation (deflection and expansion/contraction) of the opposing arrangement portion A456b.

As shown in FIG. 345, the portion with which the transmission projection A463 abuts is the side wall of the opposing arrangement portion A456b on the detection plate portion A455e side.
5e is loaded. In the present embodiment, when an overload occurs in the deformed transmitted portion A456 due to excessive rotation of the pinned gear A462, the detected plate portion A455e is preferentially broken. That is, compared with the transmission protrusion A463, the detected plate portion A455e is configured to be weaker.

As a result, it is possible to avoid destruction of the structure related to the displacement of the deformed slide member A455 among the structures of the deformed transmitted portion A456 due to the load due to the excessive rotation of the pinned gear A462. Therefore, the durability of the deformed slide member A455 can be improved.

When the detected plate portion A455e is broken, even if the first displacement member A440 returns to the retracted position, the detected plate portion A455e is not detected by the detection sensor A426.
Based on the detection failure of 455e, it is possible to assume the possibility that the pinned gear A462 has over-rotated, and timely maintenance can be performed.

The design aspect of the detected plate portion A455e is not limited at all, and various aspects are exemplified. For example, every time the first displacement member A440 is displaced, the transmission projection A463 comes into contact with the deformed transmitted portion A456, and the drive motor AMT1 is controlled so as to be energized until a slight load is applied. where is likely to occur (for example, transmission protrusion A463)
It may be designed so that the plate portion A455e to be detected is broken by accumulation of a load of the number of times of contact that is approximately the same as the number of times of durable operation. In this case, in addition to being able to assume the possibility of occurrence of excessive rotation of the pinned gear A462, it is possible to inform the replacement timing of the transmission protrusion A463, so that timely maintenance can be performed.

346(a) is a cross-sectional view of the first operation unit A400 taken along the line CCCXLVIa-CCCXLVIa in FIG. 339(a), and FIG. 346(b) is the CCC in FIG. 344(a).
FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view of the first operating unit A400 along line XLVIb-CCCXLVIb; FIG. 346(a) shows the first displacement member A440 in the retracted position (also referred to as retracted state), and FIG. 346(b) illustrates the first displacement member A440 in the extended position (extended state). ) are illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 346(a) and 346(b), the connector A of the first displacement member A440
An electrical wiring FC formed as a flat cable is connected to 445c.
The electric wiring FC is loosely arranged in the space between the guided plate portion A441 and the rear lid portion 443. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 346(a), the inclined surface A441f of the guided plate portion A441 is connected to the electrical wiring FC.
formed so as not to abut against the That is, the upper edge of the slanted surface A441f is positioned slightly further back than the end of the slanted surface A433 of the guide plate portion A430 (the end facing the first displacement member A440). position), and the inclined surface A4
A space can be secured between 41f and the electrical wiring FC.

When the first displacement member A440 is in the extended state, the electric wiring FC retreats from the displacement trajectory of the second displacement member A490. be. As a result, the space VE, which will be described later, can be used both as a space into which the electric wiring FC enters and a space into which the second displacement member A490 enters, so that the space required for arrangement can be reduced.

The electric wiring FC is arranged in the space VE formed on the back side of the first displacement member A440 in the retracted state of the first displacement member A440. As a result, the first displacement member A440 functions as shielding means for shielding the field of view to the electric wiring FC, and the electric wiring FC is viewed from the front, rear, left, and right.
can be prevented from being viewed. The space VE will be explained.

The space VE is a surface (
This is a space behind the interlocking plate portion A442 side formed with the opening A442c formed in an inclined posture toward the third pattern display device 81 side. In this way the space V
E is easy because the first displacement member A440 is formed in the shape of a plate, and the first displacement member A440 is configured in an inclined posture that is easy for the player to see in the retracted state in which the first displacement member A440 is wide in the front-rear direction. formed in

On the other hand, since this space VE is also a space into which a second displacement member A490, which will be described later, is displaced, it is preferable to maintain a wide field of view in a front view, considering the visibility of the second displacement member A490. Since the field of view in a front view spreads at an angle centering on the player's eyes, the outline of the space VE is preferably formed so as to be inclined away from the third symbol display device 81 toward the rear side, but this is not the case. In embodiments, for ease of manufacture, the space VE
(boundary surface on the far side from the third pattern display device 81) is formed of a non-tilted surface in the front-rear direction.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the space VE created for improving the visibility of the first displacement member A440 and the second displacement member A490 is effectively used as an area in which the wires are laid out. As a result, the slack portion of the electrical wiring FC is moved to the third position with respect to the first displacement member A440 at the projecting position.
It is not necessary to secure an area (in other words, an area between the outer wall A312 of the rear case A310 and the first displacement member A440) necessary for loosening the wiring when arranged on the opposite side of the pattern display device 81. can be

Therefore, compared to the case where the slack portion of the electric wiring FC is arranged on the opposite side of the third pattern display device 81 with respect to the first displacement member A440 at the projecting position, the electric wiring FC can be arranged inward of the rear case A310. The displacement end of the first displacement member A440 can be brought close to the outer wall A312 of the rear case A310 while being accommodated.

As shown in FIG. 346, the first displacement member A440 is arranged such that the front surface of the interlocking plate portion A442 is located on the front limit line FL in the extended position (see FIG. 346(b)), and the retracted position (see FIG. 346(a)
))), at least a portion of the interlocking plate portion A442 (mainly, the overhang position side portion) overhangs the front side beyond the front limit line FL. This overhang is the first displacement member A44
0 is displaced from the retracted position, the first displacement member A440 moves to the retracted position (Fig. 339 (
c)) to the completion of the posture change of the first displacement member A440 (see FIG. 342(c)). , the first displacement member A440 can protrude to the front side beyond the front limit line FL.

Therefore, it is necessary to form a space on the front side of the front limit line FL to avoid collision with the first displacement member A440. ), but in this embodiment, the decorative board A416 is placed at the first
By not forming the displacement member A440 on the retracted position side (left side in FIG. 346), the first displacement member A4
40 forms a space for overhanging. In addition, by forming only the diffuser plate A415 to protrude toward the retracted position side of the first displacement member A440, the region where the light emitted from the light emitting means A416a disposed on the electrical board A416 can be seen is the electrical board A416. It avoids being limited to the formation range of A416.

In this way, by limiting the formation range of the electrical board A416 and forming the diffusion plate A415 projecting from the outer edge of the electrical board A416, the electrical board A416 and the first displacement member A44
It is possible to secure a sufficient range for visually recognizing the light emission effect by the illumination board A416 while narrowing the space before and after the placement of 0.

With reference to FIGS. 347 to 352, changes in the appearance of the first operation unit A400 caused by the displacement of the first displacement member A440 will be described from the viewpoint of lighting effects. This change in appearance is caused by the fact that the first displacement member A440 is partially visible through the through hole A412 of the front cover A410 when the first displacement member A440 is arranged in the extended position (position after excitation). be.

Figures 347(a), 347(b) and 348 are front views of the first operation unit A400. FIG. 347(a) shows the retracted state of the first displacement member A440, and FIG.
b) shows a state in which the first displacement member A440 is arranged in the middle of the displacement section (the position shown in FIG. 342), and FIG. 348 shows the overhanging state of the first displacement member A440. . 347(b) and 348, the front cover A41 of the first displacement member A440
The shape of the part hidden in 0 is illustrated with hidden lines.

A diffusion plate A415 for diffusing the light emitted from the light emitting means A416a provided on the electrical board A416 is disposed on the rear side of the front cover A410.
It is divided into the above-described first area AC1 and second area AC2 (see FIG. 330).

The first displacement means 440 is arranged on the rear side of the diffusion plate A415 at least at the overhang position, and the light emitted from the light emitting means A445b (see FIG. 337) and passed through the opening A442c travels toward the diffusion plate A415. Here, although the opening A442c of the first displacement means 440 is displaced to a position overlapping with the first area AC1 in front view, the decorative substrate A41 is located in the first area AC1.
6 is provided, the light passing through the opening A442c is shielded by the electrical board A416.

Therefore, the light passing through the aperture A442c can reach the diffusion plate A415 in the second area AC2. In other words, in the second area AC2, the light emitted from the light emitting means A416a (see FIG. 329) arranged on the electrical board A416 and diffused by the diffusion plate A415 and the light emitting means A445b of the first displacement means 440 (see FIG. 337) can be seen in a mixed state with the light emitted from.

More specifically, the mode of the second area AC2 is to turn on the light emitting means A416a and turn on the light emitting means A
445b, a mode in which the light emitting means A416a is turned off and the light emitting means A445b is turned on, a mode in which both the light emitting means A416a and the light emitting means A445b are turned on, and a mode in which both the light emitting means A416a and the light emitting means A445b are turned off. It is configured to be switchable in at least four modes.

In this embodiment, the aspect of the second area AC2 can be visually recognized through the through hole A412 of the front cover A410.
It has a plurality of long holes A412a formed at three locations along a straight line along the edge of 410 on the side of the third pattern display device 81 .

As shown in FIG. 348, among the plurality of long holes A412a, the central long hole A412a is arranged to face the opening A442c of the first displacement means 440, and the long holes A412a on both sides thereof are arranged to face the opening A442.
c (not facing each other). As a result, the light emitting means A is more visible through the long holes A412a in the center than through the long holes A412a on both sides.
The visibility of the light emitted from 445b can be improved.

For example, in a state where the first displacement member A440 is arranged at the extended position, the light emitting means A44
The light emitted from 5b can be configured to be visible through the central elongated hole A412a and invisible through the elongated holes A412a on both sides. As a result, through the long hole A412a in the center, the light emitted from the light emitting means A416a and the light emitted from the light emitting means A445b can be seen in a mixed state, and through the long holes A412a on both sides, the light emitted from the light emitting means A416
The light emitted from the light emitting means A445b can be made visible (the light emitted from the light emitting means A445b is difficult to see).

Here, the aspect of the front cover A410 (emission color, brightness, etc.) is determined by the first displacement member A440.
While the light emitting means A445b of the light emitting means A445b is extinguished, it depends on the light emitting mode of the light emitting means A416a (see FIG. 329). Therefore, even when the first displacement member A440 is arranged at the extended position (see FIG. 348), if the light emitting means A445b is turned off, the effect of the light emitting means 416b on the lighting effect can be reduced. That is, it is possible to displace the first displacement member A440 to the extended position without causing a change in the front view of the front cover A410.

On the other hand, when the light emitting means A445b is turned on in the state of being arranged at the projecting position 440, the long hole A412a formed at a position closer to the third pattern display device 81 in common with each first operation unit A400 is illuminated. Since the light emitting mode changes, the player's line of sight can be guided to the third symbol display device 81 side.

In addition, the effect of the change of the aspect visually recognized through the through-hole A412 is not limited to this. For example, in a state in which the first displacement members A440 of the first operation unit A400, which are arranged in a set of five pieces, are arranged in the extended position, first, the light emitting means A445b of the first displacement member A440 arranged in the lower left is turned on. Then, at the timing of turning off the light emitting means A445b, the light emitting means A445b of the first displacement member A440 adjacent clockwise in the front view is turned on, and at the timing of turning off the light emitting means A445b of the first displacement member A440 adjacent clockwise in the front view, next Light emitting means A4 of displacement member A440
45b may be lighted in such a manner that the light emitting means A 445b are sequentially turned on clockwise when viewed from the front.

In this case, by keeping the light emitting means 416b lit, the brightness of the front cover A410 itself is maintained, and only the form of the light seen through the elongated holes A412a is sequentially changed clockwise in the front view. can be executed.

Here, the light emission modes of the other first operation units A400A, A400B, A400C, and A400D will be described. The first operation unit A400A is two
The first operation unit A400B is the third unit clockwise from the bottom left when viewed from the front, and the first operation unit A400C is the fourth unit clockwise from the bottom left when viewed from the front. , the first operation unit A400D is the fifth unit clockwise from the lower left in the front view. The main differences of the first motion units A400A, A400B, A400C, and A400D from the first motion unit A400 are the displacement direction of the first displacement member A440 and the shape of the opening A442c. Therefore, the first operation units A400A, A400B, A40
Apertures WA, WB, WC, and apertures WA, WB, WC,
WD is shown, and other configurations are denoted by the same reference numerals as those of the first operation unit A400 for convenience.

Figures 349(a) and 349(b) are front views of the first operation unit A400A.
Note that FIG. 349(a) shows a state in which the first displacement member A440 is arranged at an intermediate position (same position as shown in FIG. 342), and FIG. 349(b) shows the first displacement member A4
40 is shown in the extended position.

As shown in FIGS. 349(a) and 349(b), in the first operation unit A400A,
Unlike the first operation unit A400, the opening WA is configured to overlap the elongated holes A412a at both ends when viewed from the front. Furthermore, since the width of the opening WA changes along the displacement direction of the first displacement member A440 (longer on the retracted position side), as the first displacement member A440 approaches the overhang position, the width of the opening WA and both ends increases. The overlapping area with the long hole A412a can be increased. This makes it possible to change the arrangement of the first displacement member A440 and how the light viewed through the elongated hole A412a looks in conjunction with each other.

Figures 350(a) and 350(b) are front views of the first operation unit A400B.
In addition, FIG. 350(a) shows a state in which the first displacement member A440 is arranged at an intermediate position (the same position as shown in FIG. 342), and FIG. 350(b) shows the first displacement member A4
40 is shown in the extended position.

As shown in FIGS. 350(a) and 350(b), in the first operation unit A400B,
Unlike the first motion unit A400, the opening WB is configured to overlap the long holes A412a at both ends in front view, and the width of the opening WB is along the displacement direction of the first displacement member A440. It is configured to change so as to repeat enlargement and contraction with each other. This will
The long hole A41 in the center while the first displacement member A440 is displaced from the retracted position to the extended position
The overlapping area of 2a and the opening WB is set to the maximum in the state shown in FIG. 350(a), temporarily decreased as the first displacement member A440 is displaced, and then increased again in the state shown in FIG. 350(b). can do. As a result, while the first displacement member A440 is displaced in one direction, it is possible to change the appearance of the light seen through the central long hole A412a in two directions (enlargement direction and contraction direction).

Figures 351(a) and 351(b) are front views of the first operation unit A400C.
In addition, FIG. 351(a) shows a state in which the first displacement member A440 is arranged at an intermediate position (the same position as shown in FIG. 342), and FIG. 351(b) shows the first displacement member A4
40 is shown in the extended position.

As shown in FIGS. 351(a) and 351(b), in the first operation unit A400C,
Unlike the first motion unit A400, the opening WC is configured to overlap the long holes A412a at both ends in front view, and the width of the opening WC is along the displacement direction of the first displacement member A440. It is configured to change so as to repeat enlargement and contraction with each other. That is, the opening W
C is tapered and widened in the direction crossing the displacement direction of the first displacement member A440 near the upper end.

As a result, the overlapping area between the left and right long holes A412a and the opening WC while the first displacement member A440 is displaced from the retracted position to the overhanging position is temporarily reduced and then increased again as the first displacement member A440 is displaced. can be configured as As a result, the first displacement member A4
While 40 is displaced in one direction, it is possible to change the appearance of light visually through the long holes A412a at both ends in two directions (enlargement direction and contraction direction).

Figures 352(a) and 352(b) are front views of the first operation unit A400D.
In addition, FIG. 352(a) shows a state in which the first displacement member A440 is arranged at an intermediate position (the same position as shown in FIG. 342), and FIG. 352(b) shows the first displacement member A4
40 is shown in the extended position.

As shown in FIGS. 352(a) and 352(b), in the first operation unit A400D,
Unlike the first operation unit A400, the opening WD is configured in a branched shape when viewed from the front. That is, the opening WD is formed in a branched shape in the vicinity of the lower end so as to widen toward the retracted position side of the first displacement member A440.

As a result, it is possible to divide the overlapping range of the central long hole A412a and the opening WD while the first displacement member A440 is displaced from the retracted position to the extended position. That is, the mode of light visually recognized through the central long hole A412a is changed from the mode in which the entire central long hole A412a emits light uniformly (see FIG. 352(a)), and the central long hole A412a is divided into multiple ranges. 352(b)).

In addition, in the first operation unit A400D, the case where the edge of the opening WD divides the central long hole A412a has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the three long holes A412a as a whole may be configured so as to divide the visible range of light. That is, the case where the three long holes A412a overlap the opening WD and uniform light can be visually recognized through the three long holes A412a, and the case where the opening WD is the center long hole A412 of the three long holes A412a.
By overlapping only the long holes A412a at both ends without overlapping with a, the range in which the light can be visually recognized is divided into the central long holes A412a, and the case where it is limited to the long holes A412a on both sides can be switched. can be

Returning to FIGS. 335 and 336, description will be made. The support box portion A470 includes a main box portion A471 formed in the shape of a box whose front and upper right sides are open, and a shaft hole drilled in the main box portion A471 through which the rotation shaft of the gear A462 with a pin of the transmission gear group A460 passes. A472 and the second displacement member A4
A shaft support hole A473 drilled so as to be able to support 90, a notch portion A474 formed along an arc centered on the shaft support hole A473, and a columnar shape in the vicinity of the notch portion A474. A fastening portion A475 protruding from the rear plate portion A480 and having a tip formed so that a fastening screw inserted through the through hole A482 of the rear plate portion A480 can be screwed in, and a slide rack A511 of the rack and pinion A510 are slidably supported. Rack support A476 and its rack support A4
and a pinion support portion A477 that supports a pinion A517 that meshes with the slide rack A511 supported by 76 .

The main body box portion A471 includes a protruding wall portion A471a protruding from the back bottom edge portion toward the back side in a wall shape,
A wall-like projection is provided from the front upper edge to the front side, and the assembled state of the first operation unit A400 (FIG. 32)
4), a guide wall portion A471b arranged to face the roller member A442f, and a projecting wall portion A471 on the opposite side of the shaft hole A472 (see FIG. 335) across the notch portion A474
and a wiring guide portion A471c arranged opposite to a.

Although the detailed shape of the guide wall portion A471b will be described later, the roller member A442f abuts against the edge portion of the guide wall portion A471b and guides the displacement of the first displacement member A440 in a sliding or rolling manner (FIG. 339 to Figure 344).

The wiring guide portion A471c is designed so that the shape thereof can appropriately correct the arrangement of the wiring HC, which will be described later, and the details thereof will be described later.

The second displacement member A490 and the reinforcing arm portion A518 of the rack and pinion A510 are connected through the shaft support hole A473 and the notch portion A474. In particular, the notch A474 is formed wide as a region through which the wiring connected to the second displacement member A490 passes, the details of which will be described later.

The rack support portion A476 is a pair of columnar portions protruding toward the rear side of the main body box portion A471, and includes a support columnar portion A476a inserted through the support hole A512 of the rack and pinion A510 and a slide rack A511 of the rack and pinion A510. a stepped portion A476b formed in a stepped shape extending along the slide movement direction (direction parallel to the direction A416x) and protruding toward the back side from the surface on which the support columnar portion A476a is arranged; Prepare.

The pinion support portion A477 includes a pinion shaft A477a on which the pinion A517 of the rack and pinion A510 is rotatably supported, and a wall-like (plate and an arcuate wall portion A477b extending in a shape).

Through the shaft hole A472, the pin-equipped gear A462 of the transmission gear group A460 and the in-phase member A
465 are connected. Here, with reference to FIG. 353, the connection mode of the pinned gear A462 and the in-phase member A465 will be described.

Figure 353(a) is an exploded perspective view of the pin-equipped gear A462 and the same-phase member A465, Figure 353(b) is a front perspective view of the pin-equipped gear A462 and the same-phase member A465 on the left, and the right It is a back perspective view of gear A462 with a pin, and in-phase member A465. In addition, in FIG. 353(a), the pinned gear A462 and the in-phase member A465 are illustrated in a posture in which the mutually connected side faces the front.

As shown in FIG. 353(a), the pinned gear A462 has a plurality of phase matching circumferential projections A that protrude toward the same phase member A465 from the side facing the same phase member A465.
462a.

The same-phase member A465 has a phase-matching diameter projection A465a projecting from the side facing the pin-equipped gear A462 toward the pin-equipped gear A462, and an outer circular shape from the eccentric position toward the back side. An arcuate wall portion A467 formed as an arcuate wall portion centered on the rotation axis of the same-phase member A465 with the transmission projection A466 as a base end.
and Compared with the transmission projection A466, the arc wall A467 has a shorter formation length toward the back side.

The phase matching circumferential protrusion A462a and the phase matching radial protrusion A465a will be described. The phase matching circumferential projection A462a has a plurality of arcuate wall portions formed by axially cutting a circular wall portion centered on the rotation axis of the pinned gear A462.

The phase-matching radial projection A465a has a projection projecting radially outward from a cylindrical projection having an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the phase-matching circumferential projection A462a. It is formed so as to match the angle (phase) at which the notch is made in the matching circumferential protrusion A462a. By entering the projection into the notch of the phase-matching circumferential projection A462a, the pin-equipped gear A462 and the same-phase member A465 can be connected in a state where the phase of the same-phase member A465 with respect to the pin-equipped gear A462 is matched. By inserting the fastening gear along the central axis of the pin-equipped gear A462 and screwing it into the leading end of the phase-matching radial projection A465a, the pin-equipped gear A4 is connected.
62 and in-phase member A465 can be fixed.

Here, in the present embodiment, the angles between the notches of the phase matching peripheral projection A462a are not made uniform (120 degree intervals if divided into three as in the present embodiment), but are made uneven. Pinned gear A462 and in-phase member A4 only in a specific angular relationship (see FIG. 353(b))
65 are connected.

That is, the angles between the notches of the phase matching circumferential protrusion A462a are set to 100 degrees, 120 degrees, and 140 degrees.
By combining with degrees (by making it uneven), the pinned gear A462 and the in-phase member A
465 can be limited to one type of angular relationship.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the notch of the phasing circumferential protrusion A462a (the phasing radial protrusion A
465a) are formed at three locations, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, one or two locations may be used, or four or more locations may be used, which can be selected as appropriate in consideration of the rigidity in the assembled state of the pinned gear A462 and the in-phase member A465.

Returning to FIGS. 335 and 336, description will be made. The rear plate portion A480 includes a main body plate portion A481 formed in a plate shape from a colorless, light-transmitting resin material, and a fastener that is drilled through the main body plate portion A481 and screwed into the fastening portion A475 of the support box portion A470. A through hole A482 through which a screw is inserted, and a plurality of alignment protrusions A483 that protrude toward the outer peripheral side of the arcuate wall portion A477b of the support box portion A470 and are used for alignment by coming into contact with the outer peripheral side. and a plurality of projecting plate portions A484 projecting from the body plate portion A481 toward the front side so as to have a plate shape along the outer shape of the movement range of the slide rack A511 of the rack and pinion A510.

The outer edge of the rear plate portion A480 (the left edge in FIGS. 335 and 336) is in surface contact with the back side edge of the protruding wall portion A471a of the main body box portion A471, and is positioned in the left-right direction by a protrusion. Only the plate section A484 functions.

On the other hand, the inner edge of the rear plate portion A480 (the right edge in FIGS. 335 and 336)
, the contact between the alignment projection A483 and the arc wall A477b causes multiple directions (
up, down, left, and right) can be aligned. As a result, while the rear plate portion A480 is properly aligned with the support box portion A470, a wide space can be secured in the vicinity of the outer edge portion by eliminating the portion for alignment from the vicinity of the outer edge portion. In this embodiment,
The secured space is used as a space for arranging the wiring HC (see FIG. 356(a)), the details of which will be described later.

The protruding plate portion A484 is disposed so that its protruding tip is opposed to the back bottom portion of the main body box portion A471 (either in contact with it or with a slight gap that prevents wiring from passing through), and the rack and pinion A
It functions to partition the movement range of the slide rack A511 of 510 and the outer area. As a result, the wiring HC connected to the second displacement member A490 can be prevented from entering the movement range of the slide rack A511 of the rack and pinion A510, the details of which will be described later.

354 is an exploded front perspective view of the second displacement member A490, and FIG. 355 is an exploded rear perspective view of the second displacement member A490. As shown in FIGS. 354 and 355, the second displacement member A490 is made of a colorless and light-transmitting resin material and is fitted into the support box portion A470 through the shaft support hole A473.
and a supported support plate A491 that is formed with an inner shape similar to the outer shape of the supported support plate A491 and is fitted to the supported support plate A491 in a manner that covers the supported support plate A491 from the front side, A covering member A492 made of a colorless, light-transmitting resin material, and a light emitting part A493 made up of an LED or the like.
an electrical board A493 on which a is disposed and which is housed in a shaft support plate A491 and a covering member A492;
Prepare.

The shaft support plate A491 has a shaft support projection A491a that protrudes toward the rear side in a circular shape and is inserted into the shaft support hole A473, and a shaft support projection A491a that is shorter in length than the shaft support projection A491a. a fastening protrusion A491b, a plurality of insertion holes A491c through which fastening screws can be inserted, and a long rectangular hole A491d drilled along the radial direction of the shaft supported protrusion A491a. , insertion hole A491
A plurality of circular support portions A491e protruding to the front side in a circular (arc) shape centered on c, and a plurality of thin protruding shapes protruding to the front side along the side wall portion forming the outer periphery and a narrow projection A491f.

The circular support portion A491e and the narrow projection A491f are in the assembled state of the second displacement member A490 (
335 and 336), it abuts against the outer peripheral edge of the electrical board A493 and supports the electrical board A493 from the rear side.

In particular, the thin protrusion A491f is formed at a portion where the shape of the electrical board A493 to be accommodated is constricted, that is, at a portion where the outer peripheral side wall of the shaft support plate A491 is recessed inward. A part where the shape of A493 is constricted can be selectively supported. As a result, it is possible to suppress the deformation of the electrical board A493 at the constricted portion where it is assumed that the stiffness is likely to be lowered by shortening the width dimension, and it is possible to avoid breakage of the electrical board A493. .

The covering member A492 is inserted through the supported portion A493b of the electrical board A493, and is inserted through the insertion hole A4.
A plurality of fastening portions A492a into which fastening screws inserted through 91c are screwed, and fastening portions A49 thereof
A plurality of projecting support portions A492b projecting in the radial direction on the base side of 2a and coupled to the plate-like portion of the covering member A492, and a narrow projecting portion A491f of the driven support plate A491, A plurality of narrow protrusions A4 protruding toward the back side in a narrow protrusion shape along the side wall forming the outer periphery
92c.

With the above configuration, the electrical board A493 is supported at its outer peripheral edge by the thin protrusions A491f and A492c, and around the fastening screw, the circular support section A491e and the protruding support section A492b are supported.
Supported by As a result, the electrical board A493 is connected to the supported support plate A491 and the covering member A4.
92 can be fixed well.

In addition, the supporting mode of the electrical board A493 is not limited at all. For example, the electrical board A493 may be fixed by applying a load along the fastening direction, or a dimensional relationship that does not cause a compressive load A dimension relationship equivalent to the thickness of A493).
493 arrangement may be maintained.

The electrical board A493 includes a plurality of light-emitting portions A493a and a plurality of supported portions A493b that are drilled or recessed so as not to interfere with the fastening portion A492a when viewed in the front-rear direction, and arranged on the back side. and a board-side connector A493c to which an end (connector) of the wiring is connected.

The board-side connector A493 is fixed in a posture in which the wiring extends along the long direction of the long hole A491d of the shaft support plate A491. A section extending portion A491d1 extending in a direction intersecting the direction until the distance from the inner edge on the opposite side becomes shorter than the width dimension of the board-side connector A493c (or the wiring bundle to be connected), and the section extending portion A491d1. is formed as a reference, a wide protrusion A491d2 protrudes from the opposite edge of the board-side connector A493c toward the back side.

With reference to the partition extension part A491d1, the visual recognition area side of the third pattern display device 81 (Fig. 355
(left side) is provided with a board-side connector A493c, and on the opposite side is a board-side connector A493c.
The wiring connected to 3c passes through the long hole A491d. Namely, board side connector A493c
The wiring connected to is sandwiched and supported between the section extending portion A491d1 and the electrical board A493.

As a result, even if the second displacement member A490 is displaced, displacement of the wiring between the board-side connector A493c and the partition extension part A491d1 can be suppressed. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the wiring will come off from the A493c.

The protruding portion A491d2 is formed with a projecting length to the extent that it enters the notch portion A474 of the support box portion A470. As a result, the wiring HC, the end of which is connected to the board-side connector A493c, can be routed so as to stand up toward the rear side of the supported support plate A491 (in the projecting direction of the projection A491d2). is arranged close to the rear surface of the supported support plate A491 and routed to the rear surface of the support box portion A470, the wiring HC can be prevented from coming into contact with the notch portion A474. Therefore, disconnection of the wiring can be avoided.

In addition, since the ridge portion A491d2 protrudes perpendicularly to the back surface of the supported support plate A491, the rising angle of the wiring HC can be shifted to the right angle side, and contact with the wiring HC can be avoided. It is possible to suppress the width of the notch A474 for the purpose. As a result, the main body box part A4
Since a large area (area) can be secured on the side of the fastening portion A475 of 71, the main body box portion A
The rigidity of 471 can be ensured, and the degree of freedom of arrangement of fastening portion A475 can be improved.

Returning to FIGS. 335 and 336, description will be made. The rack and pinion A510 is oriented in the direction A416x
A slide rack A511 supported so as to be slidable along the slide rack A511, meshed with the gear portion of the slide rack A511, supported by the pinion shaft A477a of the support box portion A470, and synchronized with the slide movement of the slide rack A511 It has a rotating pinion A517 and a reinforcing arm A518 that meshes with the pinion A517 and rotates in synchronism with the rotation of the pinion A517.

The reinforcing arm A518 is connected and fixed to the above-described second displacement member A490, whereby the second
A displacement member A490 is supported by the support box portion A470 so as not to be pulled out. That is, the reinforcing arm A5
18 is fastened to the supported projection A491a of the second displacement member A490 at the rotation center position of 18,
The rotation tip side portion of the reinforcing arm portion A518 is fastened to the fastening protrusion A491b (see FIG. 355). Therefore, rotational displacement of the reinforcing arm A518 is synonymous with rotational displacement of the second displacement member A490.

The slide rack A511 has a pair of support holes A512 formed in a long hole shape extending along the direction A416x and having a size that allows the support columnar portion A476a of the support box portion A470 to pass through, and a plate shape formed along the gear portion. a supported plate portion A513, a protruding plate portion A514 projecting in a plate shape toward the front side at a position separated from the support hole A512 in the longitudinal direction of the support hole A512, and a same-phase member A465 arranged opposite to the same-phase member A465. Deformed transmitted portion A5 to which driving force is transmitted from member A465
15.

The support hole A512 is inserted through the small-diameter tip portion of the support columnar portion A476a of the support box portion A470, and the large-diameter portion on the base end side is formed with a diameter larger than the width of the support hole A512. By arranging this large-diameter portion on the front side of the support hole A512, even if the slide rack A511 is about to be displaced to the front side, the displacement can be prevented by the large-diameter portion of the support columnar portion A476a. . In this way, the slide rack A511 has a plate-like portion facing the rear bottom portion of the main body box portion A471 with a gap at least about the height of the large-diameter portion of the supporting columnar portion A476a. It is configured to be slidable along the direction A416x while being held.

The supported plate portion A513 is arranged to face the back side end portion of the stepped portion A476b of the support box portion A470 with a slight gap, and the protruding plate portion A514 is arranged with a slight gap from the rear bottom portion of the main box portion A471. are placed facing each other with a space between them. That is, even if the slide rack A511 is about to be displaced to the front side, the occurrence of such displacement can be prevented by the supported plate portion A513 and the projecting plate portion A514.

There are various reasons for the displacement of the slide rack A511 in the front-rear direction. For example, the case where the player gives an impact to the pachinko machine A10 (so-called pounding), or the case where the meshing resistance becomes excessive due to the clogging of fine particles in the gaps, etc., and the excessive load is generated at the meshing position. be.

Figures 356(a), 356(b), 357(a), 357(b), and 358 are rear views of the rear unit BU. 356(a), 356(b), and 357(a)
), and in FIGS. 357(b) and 358, the illustration of the rear plate portion A480 is omitted for ease of understanding, and the plate portion of the slide rack A511 is torn so that the deformed transmitted portion A515 can be seen. The states are illustrated. In addition, in FIG. 358, in order to facilitate understanding, the in-phase member A
465 and deformed transmitted portion A515 are shown enlarged.

356(a), 356(b), 357(a), 357(b), and 358,
The second displacement member A490 moves from the retracted position (see FIG. 356(a)) to the extended position (see FIG. 358).
The state of displacement to

The second displacement member A490 is fixed to the reinforcing arm A518. When the in-phase member A465 rotates, the transmission protrusion A466 pushes the slide rack A511 along with the rotation. When the slide rack A511 is pushed forward, driving force is transmitted to the reinforcing arm portion A518 via the pinion A517. Thus, displacement of the second displacement member A490 is caused by rotation of the in-phase member A465.

The in-phase member A465 rotates in the same phase as the pinned gear A462 as described above. Therefore, in synchronism with the rotation of the in-phase member A465 described in FIGS. Rotation of the pinned gear A462 will occur, and the relationship between these will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 356(b), the deformed transmitted portion A515 is a portion that engages with the in-phase member A465, and allows the transmission protrusion A466 to enter and move independently (slide rack A
A non-transmitting recess A515a recessed in (movable without applying a load to 511), a connecting recess A515b which is a recess of the same depth connected to the end of the non-transmitting recess A515a, and the connecting recess A515b is also narrow, and the non-transmitting recess A5 with respect to the connecting recess A515b
The insertion gap A515c, which is a concave portion of the same depth connected to the opposite side of 15a, and the transmission protrusion A4
A projecting plate portion A515d projecting from the slide rack A511 toward the front side in the retracted position (lower left) side of 66 and constituting the left side surface of the insertion gap A515c, and the projecting plate portion A5
15d projecting position (upper right) side, facing the protruding plate portion A515d with a gap equal to or larger than the diameter of the transmission protrusion A466, and forming the right side surface of the insertion gap A515c.
5e.

The protruding length of the protruding plate portion A515d is longer than the length of the opposing arrangement portion A515e in the same direction, and in the assembled state (see FIG. 324), the transmission protruding portion A466 and the arc wall portion A46
7 in the direction of movement.

The opposing arrangement portion A515e can abut (overlap) the transmission protrusion A466 in the movement direction, while it does not abut (do not overlap) the circular arc wall portion A467 in the movement direction. That is, the opposing arrangement portion A515e and the arcuate wall portion A467 are formed in a dimensional relationship that creates a front-to-rear gap.

The side surfaces of the projecting plate portion A515d and the opposing arrangement portion A515e are configured as planes perpendicular to the moving direction of the slide rack A511 (the direction parallel to the direction A416x).

The connecting concave portion A515b has the same function as the relief portion A456d of the deformed transmitted portion A456. That is, the connecting recess A515b is configured to receive the transmission projection A466, and the side connected to the non-transmission recess A515a is formed in a shape along the moving direction of the transmission projection A466. As a result, the forward/backward displacement of the transmission protrusion A466 with respect to the insertion gap A515c can be performed smoothly (with low resistance).

Although not shown in FIGS. 356(a), 356(b), 357(a), 357(b), and 358, the in-phase member A465, like the pinned gear A462, is connected to the drive motor The driving force of AMT1 is transmitted by the driving gear AMG1 and the pair of transmission gears A461 to rotate (see FIG. 335). Thereafter, the drive motor AMT1 is excited and the drive gear AMG1
rotates, and the displacement mode in which the second displacement member A490 is displaced from the retracted position to the extended position will be described in chronological order.

FIG. 356(a) shows the state before the drive gear AMG1 rotates, in which the slide rack A511 is arranged at the end of the movement range on the retracted position side.
0 is shown in the retracted position.

In this state, the transmitting protrusion A466 is connected to the deformed transmitted portion A515 in the moving direction (direction A416x).
), the circular arc wall portion A467 is moved to the upper right along the moving direction (direction A416x) with respect to the protruding plate portion A515d at the contact portion A467a arranged opposite to the protruding plate portion A515d. (Overhanging position side). As a result, the projecting plate portion A515 is formed by the arc wall portion A467.
Since the displacement of d can be regulated, it is possible to prevent the slide rack A511 from being displaced unintentionally due to an external force applied while the drive motor AMT1 is in a non-excited (non-driven) state.

The contact points between the circular arc wall portion A467 and the projecting plate portion A515d are arranged in a straight line parallel to the direction A416x through the rotation axis of the same phase member A465. Therefore, the load applied from the protruding plate portion A515d to the arc wall portion A467 passes through the rotation axis of the in-phase member A465, so that the in-phase member A465 is rotated by the load from the protruding plate portion A515d. can be prevented.

Furthermore, since the arcuate wall portion A467 is curved, the contact area between the arcuate wall portion A467 and the protruding plate portion A515d can be suppressed (theoretically, since line contact is possible, the contact area is 0). Therefore, when the in-phase member A465 rotates from the state shown in FIG. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the need for extra driving force for restricting the displacement of the slide rack A511. That is, the in-phase member A4
The displacement of the slide rack A511 can be restricted only by the driving force required to rotate the slide rack A511.

In addition, considering the deformation due to wear of the resin material that actually constitutes the arcuate wall portion A467 and the protruding plate portion A515d, the contact area increases over time, and the arc wall portion A467 and the protruding plate portion A515
It is thought that the frictional force generated between d and d increases. To deal with this problem, a low-friction seal may be applied to the arcuate wall portion A467 and the projecting plate portion A515d, or a lubricant (such as grease) may be applied. In this embodiment, since the ideal contact area is formed small, the area that needs to be treated with a low-friction seal or lubricant can be reduced. Therefore, countermeasure costs can be suppressed.

Examples of the external force include gravity, a load caused by earthquake vibration, and a force caused when the player hits or shakes the pachinko machine A10.

FIG. 356(b) shows a state in which the drive motor AMT1 is excited and rotated, and the transmission projection A466 starts entering the coupling recess A515b. From the state of FIG. 356(a) to the state of FIG.
b), the in-phase member A465 changes from the initial angle d10 to the first angle d11
, but the transmitting projection A466 is still aligned with the deformed transmitted portion A515 in the moving direction (
In the direction A416x), they are out of contact.

On the other hand, the arcuate wall portion A467 is still in contact with the protruding plate portion A515d at the contact portion A467a from the upper right (overhang position side) along the moving direction (direction A416x). Figure 35
6(a) and FIG. 356(b), the contact portion A467a is formed on the outer surface of the arcuate wall portion A467. No displacement. Therefore, even in the state of FIG. 356(b), FIG. 356(a)
3, the position of the slide rack A511 is maintained at the retracted position side end of the movement range.

As described above, the arc wall portion A467 and the facing arrangement portion A515e have a front-to-rear gap, so that the arc wall portion A467 can be arranged to overlap the facing arrangement portion A515e in the front-to-rear direction. (See FIG. 356(b)).

FIG. 357(a) shows a state in which the driving motor AMT1 is excited and rotated, and the transmission protrusion A466 starts entering the insertion gap A515c. From the state of Fig. 356(a) to Fig. 357(a)
), the in-phase member A465 rotates from the initial angle d10 by the second angle d12, and the transmission protrusion A466 comes into contact with the protrusion plate portion A515d.

In FIG. 357(a), a straight line passing through the rotation center of the in-phase member A465 and the center of the transmission protrusion A466 is parallel to the moving direction of the slide rack A511 (the direction parallel to the direction A416x). That is, since the farthest portion of the transmission protrusion A466 from the rotation center of the in-phase member A465 abuts on the projecting plate portion A515d, when the in-phase member A465 rotates beyond the state shown in FIG. The restriction by the in-phase member A465 is released, and the slide rack A5
11 can be displaced to the projecting position side (upper right side).

As described above, the arc wall portion A467 and the facing arrangement portion A515e have a front-to-rear gap, so that the arc wall portion A467 can be arranged to overlap the facing arrangement portion A515e in the front-to-rear direction. (See FIG. 357(a)).

FIG. 357(b) shows a state in which the drive motor AMT1 is excited and rotated, and the transmission protrusion A466 enters the insertion gap A515c. From the state of FIG. 356(a) to the state of FIG.
b), the in-phase member A465 changes from the initial angle d10 to the third angle d13
only rotate. With this rotation, the transmission projection A466 pushes the facing arrangement portion A515e, causing the slide rack A511 to slide and displace the pinion A517.
to the second displacement member A490.

In FIG. 357(b), a straight line passing through the rotation center of the in-phase member A465 and the center of the transmission protrusion A466 intersects perpendicularly with the moving direction of the slide rack A511 (the direction parallel to the direction A416x). That is, the angle obtained by subtracting the second angle d12 from the third angle d13 is 90 degrees.

As described above, the arc wall portion A467 and the facing arrangement portion A515e have a front-to-rear gap, so that the arc wall portion A467 can be arranged to overlap the facing arrangement portion A515e in the front-to-rear direction. (See FIG. 357(b)).

In FIG. 358, the driving motor AMT1 is excited and rotated, and the transmission projection A466
515e is pushed forward, the slide rack A511 is arranged at the overhang position side end of the movement range, and the second displacement member A490 is arranged at the overhang position.

356(a) to the state of FIG. 358, the in-phase member A465 rotates from the initial angle d10 by the fourth angle d14 (rotates by one or more rotations). With this rotation, the transmission projection A466 pushes the opposing arrangement portion A515e, thereby moving the slide rack A5.
11 is slid, and the slide displacement is the second displacement member A4 via the pinion A517.
90.

In FIG. 358, a straight line passing through the rotation center of the in-phase member A465 and the center of the transmission protrusion A466 is parallel to the moving direction of the slide rack A511 (the direction parallel to the direction A416x). That is, the angle obtained by subtracting the third angle d13 from the fourth angle d14 is 90 degrees.

As described above, the arc wall portion A467 and the facing arrangement portion A515e have a front-to-rear gap, so that the arc wall portion A467 can be arranged to overlap the facing arrangement portion A515e in the front-to-rear direction. (see Figure 358).

In FIG. 358, the farthest portion of the transmission protrusion A466 from the rotation center of the in-phase member A465 abuts against the opposing arrangement portion A515e. A511 may be displaced to the retracted position side (lower left side). In this embodiment, as shown enlarged in FIG. 358, a slide rack A511
is located at the overhang position side end of the movement range, the in-phase member A465 is configured to allow rotation from the arrangement of the fourth angle d14 (see FIG. 358) to the allowable angle dd1.

That is, since the transmission protrusion A466 and the protruding plate portion A515d are configured to come into contact only after the in-phase member A465 rotates by the allowable angle dd1, the transmission protrusion A466 and the projecting plate portion A515d do not contact each other until the rotation of the allowable angle dd1. Since the provided plate portion A515d is out of contact and no load is transmitted,
The arrangement of the slide rack A511 can be maintained at the overhang position side end of the movement range.

Thus, in the series of displacements illustrated in FIGS. 356-358, the in-phase member A46
5 is stopped at the fourth angle d14, the in-phase member A465 is actually the fourth angle d14.
Even when the slide rack A511 rotates beyond the angle d14, if the rotation angle exceeds the allowable angle dd1, the slide rack A511 can be maintained at the overhang position side end of the movement range, and the second displacement member A490. can be maintained in an overhang position.

In other words, even if the accuracy of the stop position of the in-phase member A465 is not strict (allowable angle dd1
Even if there is the following error), the arrangement of the second displacement member A490 can be maintained at the overhang position, so that the rotation speed of the in-phase member A465 can be increased and the rotation speed of the second displacement member A49 can be increased with a simple configuration.
It is possible to realize a highly accurate displacement of 0 (the second displacement member A490 can be rapidly decelerated and stopped at the overhang position without suddenly decelerating and stopping the in-phase member A465).
.

In addition, by purposely causing an excess of the rotation angle from the fourth angle d14 to the allowable angle dd1 or less, the excess is used when driving the second displacement member A490 toward the retracted position (when the driving direction is reversed). It can be used as a run-up section.

Further, when the transmission projection A466 of the same-phase member A465 is arranged at the position of the fourth angle d14 (see FIG. 358), the transmission projection A466 and the facing arrangement portion A515e are aligned with the slide rack A51.
1 (direction parallel to the direction A416x), the slide rack A51
1 can be prevented from returning to the retracted position (bound displacement).

As a result, the rotation of the pinion A517 can be restricted in the state of FIG. 358 (return rotation can be prevented). It is possible to prevent the second displacement member A490 from rotating back from the extended position (see FIG. 358).

Figure 359 shows the rear unit B on the CCCLIX-CCCLIX line in Figure 356(a).
1 is a cross-sectional view of U. FIG. In FIG. 359, for ease of understanding, illustration of the alignment protrusion A483 of the rear plate portion A480 is omitted, and the shape of the main body plate portion A481 is mainly illustrated.

The wiring HC connected to the second displacement member A490 will be described below with reference to FIG. Note that FIGS. 356 to 358 will be referred to as appropriate for the description of the wiring HC. Wiring H
C is an electric wiring composed of a plurality of cables having a circular cross section connected to the board-side connector A493c of the second displacement member A490, and is connected to the space surrounded by the support box portion A470 and the rear plate portion A480. are placed.

As shown in FIG. 359, the portion of the wiring HC on the side connected to the board-side connector A493c passes between the section extension part A491d1 and the electrical board A493, and extends along the protrusion A491d2 to the support box part A470. and the rear plate portion A480.

As described above, the protrusion A491d2 is formed to have a protruding length sufficient to enter the notch A474 of the support box portion A470, so that the wiring HC is guided away from the notch A474. , contact with the notch A474 is avoided. This can prevent the wiring HC from rubbing against the notch A474 and disconnecting.

On the other hand, the wiring HC is guided by the protrusion A491d2 so that it is guided closer to the rear plate portion A480, and if no countermeasure is taken, the wiring HC may rub against the rear plate portion A480 and break in a short period of time. However, in this embodiment, the intermediate portion HC of the wiring HC between the rear plate portion A480
Friction with the rear plate portion A480 is suppressed by suitably inserting a. This will be explained in detail below.

In this embodiment, the wire HC is wound around the fastening portion A475 of the support box portion A470. More specifically, the wiring HC extending from the third connector A416e3 of the electrical board A416 (see FIG. 330) is wound around the winding portion A471a1 formed so that the binding band KB can be wound around the intermediate position of the projecting wall portion A471a. The side of the second displacement member A490 that is connected to the board-side connector A493c is wrapped around the fastening portion A475 with the binding position as a reference, and the tip thereof is connected to the board-side connector A493c. .

The wiring HC is wound around the fastening portion A475 and is in a loosened state (Fig. 356(a)
)), the amount of displacement of the wiring HC in the upward direction away from the fastening portion A475 (in the direction in which the wiring HC bound by the binding band KB extends) can be suppressed. As a result, the load applied to the wiring HC can be reduced without forming a large gap above the fastening portion A475.

In the present embodiment, the portion around which the wiring HC is wound is the fastening portion A475, which is advantageous in terms of ease of assembly. That is, in the assembly process for fastening and fixing the rear plate portion A480 to the support box portion A470, after the wiring HC is wound around the fastening portion A475, the fastening screw is screwed into the fastening portion A475 through the rear plate portion A480. At this time, it is possible to prevent the wire HC from falling off from the fastening portion A475 before fastening and fixing is completed by the fastening screw that is in the middle of screwing.

In addition, when fastening and fixing, the back side of the support box portion A470 (the side where the fastening portion A475 protrudes) faces upward, and after the wiring HC is wound around the fastening portion A475, the rear plate portion A480 is attached to the support box portion A470. By screwing the fastening screw into the fastening portion A475, the wiring HC can be assembled while preventing the wiring HC from sagging in the gravity direction in the main body box portion A471, so that the assembly can be easily completed. . That is, compared to the case where the fastening portion A475 is designed to be assembled in a downward posture, the wiring HC is wound around the fastening portion A475 to facilitate the assembly of the support box portion A470 and the rear plate portion A480. can be

Since the winding portion A471a1 is formed on the protruding end side of the protruding wall portion A471a, the wiring HC temporarily fixed by the binding band KB is guided (pulled) toward the rear plate portion A480. As a result, when the wire HC is wound around the fastening portion A475, the wire HC comes closest to the rear plate portion A480 at the upper portion of the fastening portion A475 that is closest to the fastening portion A475 (see FIG. 359).

Then, the wiring HC is extended toward the board-side connector A493c while allowing a margin in the length of the wiring HC so that a tensile load is not applied to the wiring HC when the second displacement member A490 is displaced, and the wirings HC intersect each other. In the position, the end of the wiring HC connected to the board-side connector A493c is wound so as to slide between the already arranged wiring HC and the support box portion A470.

As a result, the intermediate portion HCa is connected to the rear plate portion A480 of the wiring HC on the board side connector A493c side.
It is possible to construct a state in which the wiring HC abuts from the side (see FIG. 356(a)), and the wiring HC
The degree of proximity to the rear plate portion A480 can be suppressed by 491d2.

A description will be given of how the wiring HC is displaced when the second displacement member A490 is displaced.
The wiring HC is not positionally fixed by the support box portion A470 or the rear plate portion A480 between the binding band KB and the board-side connector A493c of the second displacement member A490. Therefore, the wiring HC between the binding band KB and the board-side connector A493c of the second displacement member A490
By generating displacement (deflection) corresponding to the displacement of the second displacement member A490 using the entire length, the load (fatigue) accompanying the displacement can be made uniform. Loading can be avoided.

The board-side connector A493c is located at the retracted position compared to the shaft-supported protrusion 491a functioning as the rotation shaft of the second displacement member A490 and the reinforcing arm A518 formed on the projecting position side of the second displacement member A490. placed on the side. That is, when the second displacement member A490 is arranged at the retracted position, the support plate portion 420 that shields the line of sight directed to the second displacement member A490 is positioned inside the member (see FIG. 346(a), right) toward the substrate side. A connector A493 is provided.

As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the wiring HC protrudes outward from the outer shape of the support plate portion A420 and the support box portion A470. That is, by arranging the shaft-supporting projection A491a and the reinforcing arm A518 closer to the overhanging position side (the third symbol display device 81 side), a large amount of overhanging of the second displacement member A490 is ensured, and the wiring is It is possible to avoid the HC being visually recognized by the player.

As shown in FIG. 356(a), the board-side connector A493c is configured to be able to receive the end of the wiring HC along the radial direction of a circle centered on the supported projection A491a. The board-side connector A493c is arranged on one side of the straight line connecting the center of the supported projection A491a and the center of the fastening portion A475 (lower right side, see FIG. 356(a)). , and the other side (upper left side, see FIG. 358) are switched by displacement of the second displacement member A490.

As a result, the board-side connector A49 of the wiring HC is
It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a difference in the displacement mode of the portion on the side connected to 3c. As a result, it is possible to suppress the fluctuation of the load applied to the wiring HC, thereby preventing disconnection of the wiring HC.

In addition, since the displacement mode of the portion of the wiring HC connected to the board-side connector A493c can be easily shifted toward the straight line connecting the center of the supported projection A491a and the center of the fastening portion A475, the displacement The amount can be reduced, and the absolute value of the load applied to the wiring HC can be reduced. This will be explained in detail below.

FIG. 357(b) shows a state in which the second displacement member A490 has started to be displaced from the retracted position to the overhanging position and rotated about 45 degrees. In this state, the board side connector A493
The direction in which the wiring HC connected to c is extended is the center of the supported projection A491a and the fastening portion A475.
It is approximately parallel to the straight line connecting the center of the

In other words, in the present embodiment, the fastening portion A475 is arranged on the bisector of the rotation angle of the second displacement member A490 passing through the center of the supported projection A491. That is, the fastening portion A475, which is the position where the wiring HC is loosely wound, is positioned at the intermediate position of the rotation angle of the second displacement member A490, so that the amount of deformation (bending) of the wiring HC can be minimized. .

In comparison with the retracted state (see FIG. 357(a)), the local displacement of the wiring HC will be explained. slightly rising. Further, the intermediate portion HCa is arranged at a position where it does not interfere with the wiring HC extending from the board-side connector A493c in the front-rear direction.

That is, when the second displacement member A490 is displaced from the state shown in FIG. While the effect of entrapment cannot be obtained, the second displacement member A490 can be displaced at high speed without the wirings HC rubbing against each other.

Here, as the second displacement member A490 is displaced from the state shown in FIG. 357(b) to the projecting position shown in FIG. Become. Therefore, as a load applied to the wiring HC, a load for maintaining the attitude along the left-right direction is generated. Therefore, the influence of the load applied by the protrusion A491d2 on the layout of the wiring HC is reduced.

Therefore, even if the intermediate portion HCa does not enter between the rear plate portion A480 and the wiring HC, excessive frictional force is prevented from being generated between the wiring HC and the rear plate portion A480. That is, in this embodiment,
Only when there is a risk of excessive frictional force being generated between the rear plate portion A480 and the wiring HC extending from the board-side connector A493c, the intermediate portion HCa is inserted between the rear plate portion A480 and the wiring HC extending from the board-side connector A493c. An action of separating from the plate portion A480 is generated.

On the other hand, when the possibility of excessive frictional force is low, as shown in FIG. 357(b),
By eliminating the front-rear overlap between the intermediate portion HCa and the wiring HC extending from the board-side connector A493c, it is possible to prevent the second displacement member A490 from generating excessive resistance to displacement, and the second displacement member A490 High-speed displacement can be achieved.

In the overhanging state of the second displacement member A490 (see FIG. 358), in comparison with the state shown in FIG. The location is slightly lowered, and the location located below the fastening portion A475 is slightly raised. That is, the wiring HC is displaced so as to approach the linear side connecting the center of the supported projection A491a and the center of the fastening portion A475.

As shown in FIG. 358, in the state where the second displacement member A490 is arranged in the extended position (that is, in the state rotated by 90 degrees from the retracted position), the wire HC contacts the wire guide portion A471c, thereby changing the position of the wire HC. is corrected. The wiring guide portion A471c is designed for one purpose of reducing the load applied to the wiring HC in this corrected arrangement.

More specifically, in the overhanging state of the second displacement member A490, an arc passing through the board-side connector A493c and in contact with the lower end of the wiring guide portion A471c is the fastening portion A, which is the passage of the wiring HC.
475 and the projecting wall portion A471a. As a result, wiring HC
Therefore, it is possible to avoid applying an excessive load to the wiring HC, thereby improving the durability of the wiring HC.

FIG. 360 is a schematic diagram showing rotation angles of the pinned gear A462 and the in-phase member A465 with reference to the initial angles d0 and d10. In the description of FIG. 360, angles d0 to d6, d10 to d14, and dd1 indicate rotation angles of the pinned gear A462 and the same phase member A465, unless otherwise described.

As described above, the first displacement member A440 is between the initial angle d0 and the fifth angle d5,
While continuously displacing and stopping after the fifth angle d5, the second displacement member A490 stops between the initial angle d10 and the second angle d12, while stopping between the second angle d12 and the fourth angle d.
It continues to displace up to 14.

Here, as shown in FIG. 360, a gap of 10 degrees is formed between the fifth angle d5 and the second angle d12. That is, in this embodiment, the rotation angle range of the pinned gear A462 and the in-phase member A465 that generate the driving force for displacing the first displacement member A440 and the driving force for displacing the second displacement member A490 are Gear A462 with pin for generating
and the rotation angle range of the in-phase member A465, an angle range in which no driving force is generated is inserted. Thereby, the first displacement member A440 and the second displacement member A490 can be stably driven.

Note that the manner of setting the angle range is not limited to this. For example, the fifth angle d5 and the second angle d12 may be the same angle. In this case, the second displacement member A490 starts displacing from the stop state at the same time that the first displacement member A440 is switched from the state of continuing displacement to the stop state. Therefore, the first displacement member A440 is driven by the driving force of the driving motor AMT1.
and the second displacement member A490 at the same time.
490), the load on the drive motor AMT1 can be reduced (the load applied by a single member can be reduced).

Also, for example, the second angle d12 may be arranged between the initial angle d0 and the fifth angle d5. In this case, while forming a section in which the first displacement member A440 and the second displacement member A490 are displaced simultaneously, there is a section in which it is necessary to generate driving force for both the first displacement member A440 and the second displacement member A490. It can be limited between the second angle d12 and the fifth angle d5.

According to this embodiment, since the members that are displaced at the fifth angle d5 or the second angle d12 are switched, the pinned gear A462 And by inverting and rotating the in-phase member A465, one member (
While the first displacement member A440 or the second displacement member A490) is stopped, the other member (the second
The displacement member A490 or the first displacement member A440) can be reversed.

As described above, it is not necessary to apply a large driving force to stop one of the members (the first displacement member A440 or the second displacement member A490). That is, at the contact position for restricting the displacement of one member, the members come into line contact (rub) with each other, so theoretically no frictional force is generated. As a result, the drive force required for the drive motor AMT1 can be suppressed, so that a small drive device can be selected as the drive motor AMT1.

Further, by driving to the fifth angle d5 or the second angle d12, stopping, and rotating the driving motor AMT1 in the reverse direction, only the first displacement member A440 is displaced, and the second displacement member A49 is caused.
A drive mode in which 0 is maintained in a retracted state is also possible.

As shown in FIG. 360, the sixth angle d6 is set as an angle that does not exceed the sum of the fourth angle d14 and the allowable angle dd1. Therefore, the pinned gear A462 and the in-phase member A4
65 is mechanically restricted from rotating when it rotates by the sixth angle d6 before it rotates by the allowable angle dd1 from the fourth angle d14 (see FIG. 345). Therefore, since the rotation does not exceed the allowable angle dd1, even if the same-phase member A465 is stopped at the fourth angle d14 with low accuracy and is likely to rotate excessively (control mode), the second displacement member A490 the overhang position (Fig. 3
58).

Note that the numerical value of the sixth angle d6 is not limited to this. For example, the sixth angle d6 may be set as an angle that slightly exceeds the sum of the fourth angle d14 and the allowable angle dd1 (for example, it may be set as an angle that exceeds the fourth angle d14 by about 20 degrees. good). In this case, the pinned gear A462 and the in-phase member A465 exceed the fourth angle d14 and the allowable angle dd
While allowing to rotate by 1, the rotation continues beyond the allowable angle dd1, and when the sixth angle d6 is reached, the displacement of the second displacement member A490 is immediately stopped by mechanical regulation. can be

As a result, the allowable amount (that is, the fourth
By performing stop control at an angle (permissible amount) that slightly exceeds the angle d14, the second displacement means A490 is prevented from reaching the overhanging position, and the second displacement means A490 can be stopped at the overhanging position. In addition, it is possible to prevent the second displacement member A490 from being erroneously displaced to a large extent when the deviation of the stop timing of the drive motor AMT1 unintentionally increases.

Since the circular arc wall portion A464 is formed with a center angle of about 230 degrees as described above, even when the rotation angle reaches the sixth angle, the position for restricting the first displacement member A440 (fifth angle d
5 where the arc wall portion A464 abuts on the first displacement member A440), it is possible to maintain the displacement regulation at the projecting position of the first displacement member A440. .

The state in which the arcuate wall portion A467 of the in-phase member A465 abuts the protruding plate portion A515d corresponds to the state in which the plate portion A455e is detected by the detection sensor A426 and is controlled to stop. The probability that the stop timing deviation of the drive motor AMT1 unintentionally increases near the angular state where the wall portion A467 contacts the protruding plate portion A515d is low. Therefore, the arc wall portion A467 extends from the initial angle d10 to the second angle d12 by the second displacement member A490.
is formed at an angle smaller than that of the arcuate wall portion A464 (approximately 210 degrees in this embodiment) as the minimum angle range required to maintain the A at the retracted position. As a result, the cost of materials required for the arcuate wall portion A467 can be suppressed.

Next, the second operation unit A700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 361 to 381. FIG. FIG. 361 is a front exploded perspective view of the second operation unit A700 and the rear case A310. As shown in FIG. 361, the second operation unit A700 is formed with a horizontal width exceeding the horizontal width of the visual recognition area of the display of the third pattern display device 81, and is positioned below the visual recognition area of the display of the third pattern display device 81. placed in

FIG. 362 is a front exploded perspective view of the second action unit A700, and FIG. 363 is a rear exploded perspective view of the second action unit A700. As shown in FIGS. 362 and 363, the second
The operation unit A700 is held by a rectangular plate-like member that is elongated in the left and right direction, and includes an elevating unit A701 that includes an elevating unit A702 configured to be able to move up and down. and an effect unit A710 configured to be displaceable between and operable (performable) in a plurality of modes.

The elevating unit A701 supports a vertically elongated elevating part A702 on the left and right sides, and a pair of arm members A703 rotatably supported on the left and right ends thereof, and the arm members A703 via a drive mechanism (not shown). and a pair of drive motors A704 that transmit drive power to the.

As a mechanism for transmitting the driving force from the drive motor A704 to the arm member A703,
For example, a gear transmission mechanism is exemplified in which gear teeth are formed on the end of the arm member A703 on the side of the rotation shaft, and a gear fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor A704 meshes with the gear teeth.

Further, an elongated hole is formed in the arm member A703, and a rotating body having gear teeth formed on its outer periphery and protruding in the axial direction at a position where a pin inserted through the elongated hole is eccentric is disposed. A gear link transmission mechanism in which the gear teeth of the body mesh with the gear fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor A704 may also be used.

Further, an elongated hole is formed in the arm member A703, and a pin formed at an end portion of an auxiliary arm member (not shown) fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor A704 is inserted through the elongated hole. , a link transmission mechanism in which the driving force is transmitted from the auxiliary arm member to the arm member A703.

In addition, in this embodiment, the game board A that is arranged opposite to the front side of the second operation unit A700
13 is left-right asymmetrical (see FIG. 306), the drive motor A7
04 is left-right asymmetrical. That is, the gap (space) in the back side configuration of the game board A13
By inserting the drive motor A704 into the , the front-to-rear width necessary for arranging the game board A13 and the second operation unit A700 is suppressed.

In this way, since there is a desire to set the arrangement of the drive motor A704 according to the shape of the game board A13, in this embodiment, a gear link transmission mechanism or a gear transmission mechanism is adopted rather than a link transmission mechanism. is preferred.

Figure 364 is a front exploded perspective view of the effect unit A710, and Figure 365 is a rear exploded perspective view of the effect unit A710. In Figures 364 and 365, the production unit A710
Annular front cover A711 that divides the performance range of and its annular front cover A711
A skirt-shaped upper cover A7 arranged below and fastened and fixed to an upper lid portion A740 described later
12, and an elevating unit A7 arranged under the upper cover A712 so as to overlap on the back side.
A skirt-shaped lower cover A713, which is fastened and fixed to the elevating portion of 01, is disassembled and separated toward the front side.

In FIGS. 364 and 365, an annular rear cover A714, which is formed in an annular shape substantially equivalent to the annular front cover A711 when viewed in the front-rear direction and forms an annular internal space IE between the annular front cover A711 and the annular front cover A711, is fixed to the upper lid portion A740. A rotating body A720 rotatably disposed at the center of the circle of the annular rear cover A714 is illustrated.

The rotating body A720 is a member having a size that fits in a circle formed by the inner peripheral surface of the annular front cover A711 when viewed from the front. Light-emitting means A7 such as LEDs arranged on a plurality of electric decoration boards A715
Light emitted from 15a can be received. The light emitting means A715a is an electrical board A715
On each side of the pentagon formed by , three are arranged at equal intervals in the direction of the side.

In the present embodiment, the electrical board A715 is composed of three LEDs or the like arranged at equal intervals along one side of the pentagon, similarly to the light emitting means A715a, and the optical axis is directed toward the front side. A front light emitting means A715b is provided. The front light emitting means A715b is an annular front cover A71.
1, the annular front cover A711 emits light. In other words, the player can visually recognize the lighting effect through the light-transmitting portion partially formed in the annular front cover A711.

In this embodiment, the five flat plate-shaped decorative boards A715 each form one side of a pentagon, and the decorative boards A715 above the rotating body A720 are in a horizontal posture, and the decorative boards A715 below the left and right The lower end of A715 is arranged to face the rotating shaft side, and the light emitting means A715a is arranged in such a manner that the optical axis is directed in the normal direction of the inward surface of each electrical board A715. That is, the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a is emitted toward the center of the pentagon so as to intersect near the center of the pentagon.

Therefore, when the rotating body A720 rotates, the rotating outer portion of the rotating body A720
It can be configured to traverse the optical axis of light emitted from 715a. As a result, when the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a is reflected by the rotator A720, the traveling direction of the light can be changed with the rotation of the rotator A720, so that a splendid effect can be executed. .

In addition, in this embodiment, in order to facilitate the reflection of light by the rotating body A720, the rotating body A
The outer surface of 720 is plated (gold plating, silver plating, etc.). The aspect of the outer surface is not limited to plating, and may be various other aspects. For example, a tape having a color that is easy to reflect may be attached.

As described above, since the body of rotation A720 rotates around the rotation axis extending in the vertical direction, the light traveling on the rotation axis is reflected on the rotation axis of the body of rotation A720 regardless of whether the body of rotation A720 is rotating. is irradiated to the same part of In the present embodiment, the light passing concave portion A722a is formed at that location to open the upper portion of the rotating body A720 so that light can pass through.
Details will be described later.

The annular front cover A711 and the annular rear cover A714 have recessed portions A711a and A714a which form windows through which the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a passes at the opposite edge portions.
and a semicircular recessed portion A711b which is recessed in a semicircular cross-section to surround the rotating shaft of the rotating body A720.
, A714b.

The inner peripheral surface of the ring excluding the window portion formed by the recessed portions A711a and A714a and the other outer surface are plated. Therefore, the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a and reflected by the rotating body A720 can be further applied to and reflected by the annular front cover A711 and the annular rear cover A714. It can be visually recognized by the player as light traveling (reflecting) from the point. As a result, it is possible to reduce the number of light emitting means A715a to be arranged while executing a gorgeous effect.

In this respect, it is better to make the window necessary for passing the light from the light emitting means A715a as small as possible to ensure a wide area for reflecting other light (the area to be plated). It is advantageous because it can In this embodiment, recessed portions A711a and A714
The shape of the window formed by a is formed to be slightly larger than the outer shape of the LED that constitutes the light emitting means A715a, so that the light reflecting area can be increased without impairing the brightness of the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a. can be widely secured.

FIG. 366 is an exploded front perspective view of the rotating body A720 of the production unit A710, and FIG.
7 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rotating body A720 of the production unit A710. In FIGS. 366 and 367, illustration of the annular front cover A711, upper cover A712 and lower cover A713 of the effect unit A710 is omitted.

The rotating body A720 is composed of a plurality of rotating members, and is a set of members supported by a plurality of support portions A730 that support the plurality of rotating members, and has a pair of members having a substantially hemispherical outer shape. A first rotary member A721 and a second rotary member composed of a pair of members made of a colored (blue in this embodiment) light-transmissive resin material in a rotatable shape on the outside of the first rotary member A721. A728.

The first rotating member A721 is divided into front and rear parts and is formed of a resin material with low light transmittance so as to have a substantially hemispherical shell-like skeleton.
722, and an annular gear member A723, which is an annular member rotatably supported in an annular recessed portion formed on the back side of the shell portion A722 on the front side, and having gear teeth engraved on the back side. And, arranged on the back side of the annular gear member A723, rotatably supported in a manner sandwiched between the pair of shell portions A722, gear teeth A724a engraved on the shaft portion and the gear teeth of the annular gear member A723 It mainly includes a central rotary member A724 that is meshed with each other.

The pair of shell portions A722 are recessed at their upper portions in directions away from each other.
722a. At least in the shell portion A722 on the front side, the light passage concave portion A72
2a is formed on both the upper and lower sides of the annular gear member A723, and is arranged in such a manner that most of the annular gear member A723 enters the front side of the recessed end of the light passage recess A722a.

That is, even if the through hole surrounded by the light passage recess A722a is viewed from the top, most of the annular gear member A723 is not visible in that direction, so the central rotary member A724 arranged inside the annular gear member A723 is not visible. can be visually recognized. Therefore, when the light traveling in the vertical direction passes through the through hole surrounded by the light passage recess A722a, the annular gear member A72
3 can avoid blocking the light and allow the light to reach the central rotating member A724. Here, with reference to FIG. 368, an outline of the operation mode of the first rotating member A721 will be described.

FIG. 368 is a rear view of the first rotating member A721. In FIG. 368, the illustration of the shell A722 on the back side is omitted in order to make the inside visible, and for convenience of explanation, the support A7
A fixed gear SG arranged non-rotatably above 30 is illustrated in a state of meshing with an annular gear member A723.

An outline of the operation mode of the first rotating member A721 will be described. As described above, the first rotating member A721 is configured to rotate around the vertically extending rotating shaft (coaxial with the central axis of the fixed gear SG). When this rotation occurs, the relative position between the annular gear member A723 arranged inside the first rotating member A721 and the fixed gear SG changes, and accordingly the annular gear member A723 and the fixed gear SG move relative to each other. Displaced (engagement relationship changes).

In this embodiment, since the fixed gear SG is non-rotatably fixed to the tip of the shaft portion A751 of the box-shaped portion A750, relative displacement with respect to the fixed gear SG is ensured by the rotation of the annular gear member A723. . When the annular gear member A723 rotates, the annular gear member A7
A central rotating member A724 meshing with 23 rotates. The rotation axis of the central rotation member A724 is
Since it extends in a direction that intersects (perpendicular to) the axis (coaxial with the center axis of the fixed gear SG) that extends in the vertical direction as the rotation axis of the first rotation member A721, the shell portion A of the first rotation member A721
With the rotation of 722 (horizontal rotation about the vertical axis), the central rotating member A 724 rotates (vertical rotation about the horizontal axis) in a different manner. Note that the relationship between the rotation directions will be described later.

The rotation axis of the central rotating member A724 rotates along with the rotation of the shell A722 (in synchronization with the rotation angle).
Since it continues to change within the same plane, it can be made to appear to the player that the central rotating member A724 rotates on a plurality of vertical and horizontal rotation axes. Therefore, by causing the shell A722 to rotate in one direction, it is possible to cause the central rotating member A724 to rotate in multiple directions.

In this embodiment, since the number of teeth of the gear teeth A724a and the number of teeth of the fixed gear SG are the same (both are 10 teeth), the absolute value of the rotation angle of the shell portion A722 and the central rotation member A724
is synchronized with the absolute value of the rotation angle of As a result, each time the shell A722 takes a posture in which the ring shape can be visually recognized in a front view as shown in FIG. As indicated by 368, the posture is such that the disc portion faces the front side (returns). Therefore, it is possible to maintain the reproducibility of the rotation effect.

Returning to FIGS. 366 and 367, description will be made. The second rotating member A728 is connected to the first rotating member A7
21, and is fastened and fixed to the support portion A730 below the first rotating member A721.
A rod-shaped extension A formed in a rod-like shape extending upward to reach a position covering 21 from above
728a.

The rod-shaped extended portion A728a is formed narrower than the outer shape of the first rotating member A721,
Depending on the difference in arrangement, the first rotating member A721 may be partially hidden and the first rotating member A721 may be hidden.
(the case where it hardly overlaps with the first rotating member A721) can be configured, the details of which will be described later.

The outer shape of the first rotating member A721 and the second rotating member A728 is that of the annular rear cover A7.
14, so that the gap in the vertical direction is shortened. As a result, the annular rear cover A714 functions as a retainer for the first rotating member A721 and the second rotating member A728, and the first rotating member A721 and the second rotating member A728 can be secured while the annular rear cover A714 is arranged. Inadvertent disassembly such as pulling upward (disassembly) can be prevented.

As described above, the rotating body A720 is composed of a plurality of rotating members (the first rotating member A721 and the second rotating member A728) fastened and fixed to the supporting portion A730.
Rotate with 30 rotations. Next, this support portion A730 will be described.

FIG. 369(a) is a front exploded perspective view of the support portion A730, and FIG. 369(b) is a second
Fig. 11 is a front exploded perspective view of the support portion A735; FIG. 370(a) is a rear exploded perspective view of the support portion A730, and FIG. 370(b) is a rear exploded perspective view of the second support portion A735.

As shown in FIGS. 369 and 370, the support A730 is colored (white in this embodiment).
A first support portion A731 whose main body is formed in a cylindrical shape from a non-light-transmitting resin material, and an inner diameter slightly longer than the outer diameter of the main body of the first support portion A731 from a colorless and light-transmitting resin material and a second support portion A735 configured as a set of divided bodies divided into two in the radial direction, and a box shape described later inside the first support portion A731 and the second support portion A735. Part A7
A shaft rod portion A751 fixed to 50 is inserted, and the tip side portion of the shaft rod portion A751 is removed by a metal ring-shaped C ring C1 and a fixed gear SG that are fixed so as to be non-rotatable by fitting with an irregularly shaped shaft. Impossibly supported.

The first support portion A731 has a cylindrical body portion having an inner diameter slightly longer than the diameter of the axial rod portion A751 of the box-shaped portion A750 and a through hole A731a formed so that the axial rod portion A751 can be inserted therethrough; A plurality of support plate portions A732 extending in a straight line in both directions from the upper end portion of the main body portion A732 and formed with through-holes through which fastening screws can be inserted; A pair of projecting portions A733 are provided.

The protruding portion A733 is arranged at a position corresponding to a notch portion A772a of a lower layer transmission mechanism A770, which will be described later, and is a portion that enables transmission of force in the rotational direction by fitting. be. As a result, compared to the case where the pair of protruding portions A733 are formed to have the same width, it is easier to perform angle matching between the cylindrical extension portion A772 of the lower transmission mechanism A770 and the first support portion A731 at the time of fitting. can do.

As shown in FIGS. 369(b) and 370(b), the second support portion A735 includes a semi-cylindrical portion A736 forming a cylindrical portion and a plate extending in both directions on a straight line from the upper end of the semi-cylindrical portion A736. It is composed of a pair of divided bodies having a substantially symmetrical shape including a plurality of semi-supporting plate portions A737 extending in a shape and having through-holes through which fastening screws can be inserted.

The semi-cylindrical portion A736 has a recessed fitting portion A736a that is recessed upward from the lower end in a rectangular shape at the center position of the arc at the lower end side portion, and a rectangular shape that protrudes radially outward from the end portion of the arc. and a projecting fitting portion A736b.

The recessed fitting portion A736a is formed by an inner protrusion A762d (see FIG. 3) of an upper transmission mechanism A760 described later.
73), and the protruding fitting portion A736b is a protrusion that fits into the notch portion A762c of the upper transmission mechanism A760.

At the fitting position of the recessed fitting portion A736a, the wall portion around the recessed fitting portion A736a is arranged to face the inner wall of the cylindrical ridge portion A762b. The displacement to the left is restricted, and the protruding fitting portion A736b fits into the notch portion A762c, so that the divided body constituting the second support portion A735 can be supported indivisibly.

Further, the recessed fitting portion A736a and the projecting fitting portion A736b are fitted in such a manner that they come into contact with the notch portion A762c of the upper layer transmission mechanism A760 in the circumferential direction of rotation about the shaft rod portion A751. Therefore, it also functions as a transmission portion for transmitting the rotation of the large-diameter gear LG12 to the second support portion A735. Therefore, the concave fitting portion A736a and the projecting fitting portion A736b can function both to prevent the second support portion A736 from splitting and to transmit rotation to the second support portion A736.

A groove portion A735a recessed along the circumferential direction is formed on the inner surface of the semi-cylindrical portion in which the semi-supporting plate portion A737 is formed. The inner surface of the second support portion A735 and the first
The contact area with the outer surface of the support portion A731 can be reduced, and the generated frictional force can be reduced.

In particular, there is a risk that a load will be applied when the second rotating member A728 is fastened and fixed at a location between the half-supporting plate portions A737, and the inner diameter may be narrower than the design dimension. . On the other hand, in this embodiment, the groove portion A735 is positioned between the semi-supporting plate portions A737.
Since a is formed, it is possible to reduce the contact area at the location where sliding friction is likely to occur between the second support portion A735 and the first support portion A731. As a result, the second support portion A735 and the first support portion A731 are supported while minimizing the decrease in rigidity due to the formation of the groove portion A735a.
It is possible to effectively reduce the frictional force generated between.

The semi-supporting plate portion A737 includes a pair of assembly protrusions A737a protruding toward the opposite side of the mating member along the direction in which the second support portion A735 is split, and a pair of positional protrusions A737a protruding from one split body. An alignment protrusion A737b, an insertion hole A737c drilled in the other divided body as a through hole having a size that allows the alignment protrusion A737b to be inserted, and a second rotating member A728 drilled in the thickness direction are fastened. It is provided with a pair of fastening holes A737d which are formed to have a size through which the portion A728b (see FIG. 367) can be inserted.

The semi-supporting plate portions A737 are aligned with each other by inserting the alignment protrusions A737b into the insertion holes A737c, and the second rotating member A728 (
367) are fastened and fixed by screwing a fastening screw into the fastening portion A728b to be coupled to each other. That is, since the fastening screws used for fastening and fixing the second rotating member A728 can also be used for fastening and fixing the semi-supporting plate portion A737, the number of fastening screws can be reduced.

The mounting protrusion A737a is inserted into a recess formed at a corresponding position of the second rotating member A728 and used for positioning. different from each other. That is, the interval between the assembling projections A737a arranged on the divided body arranged on the front side is greater than the distance between the assembling projections A737a arranged on the divided body arranged on the back side.
wider than the spacing of 37a.

By forming the assembling projections A737a at different intervals, each of the pair of members that constitute the second rotating member A728 can be assembled from the correct direction of the second supporting portion A735. That is, it is possible to properly fit the mounting protrusion A737a and the second rotating member A728 only when the mounting is performed in the correct direction. If the position of the two-rotation member A728 does not match the concave portion and the assembly is not completed, the user can be made aware of the error in the assembly direction.

In addition, the second rotating member A728 has a major difference in the presence or absence of the fastening portion A728b, and other configurations are substantially the same.
There is a risk of error in attempting to assemble two members of a pair of member sets. According to this embodiment, since the formation intervals of the assembly protrusions A737a are different (because they are not common modes), the members of the second rotating member A728 to be assembled to the second support portion A735 are both attached to one member (combined). It is possible to make the mistake of trying to assemble by using one side member) be noticed before the fastening screw is inserted.

The second support portion A735, before being disassembled, has a radial separation that corresponds to the cylindrical ridge portion A of the upper layer transmission mechanism A760.
762b (see FIG. 366), the first support portion A731 and the second support portion A73
5 is assembled exclusively by parallel movement in the axial direction.
733 is a notch A772a, and a concave fitting portion A736a is an inner projection A762d (Fig. 373
), and the projecting fitting portion A736b is fitted with the notch portion A762c. Here, due to its shape, the second support portion A735 is assembled first, and in that state, the first support portion A73
1 is assembled.

Here, due to the shape relationship with the mating member to be assembled, the first support portion A731 and the second support portion A731
The posture when assembled together with the support portion A735 is not an arbitrary posture, but is limited to a specific posture. Therefore, when the first support portion A731 is assembled, the second support portion A735 may block the field of view, making it difficult to assemble the first support portion A731.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the second supporting portion A735 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and the first supporting portion A731 is made of a non-light-transmitting resin material.
After assembling, the inside of the second support portion A735 can be visually recognized. In addition, the tubular extending portion A772 of the lower transmission mechanism A770 to which the first support portion A731 is assembled is the upper lid portion A7.
40, the position where the projecting portion A733 of the first support portion A731 is fitted is not hidden by the upper lid portion A740, and can be configured to be easily visible.

Therefore, when the first support portion A731 is assembled, it can be easily adjusted to a suitable posture, so that the first support portion A731 and the second support portion A735 can be easily assembled.

Here, in the upper cover portion A740 that arranges (accommodates) the upper layer transmission mechanism A760 and the lower layer transmission mechanism A770 described later between the box-shaped portion A750 and the box-shaped portion A750, a through hole A that surrounds the central axis of the support portion A730 is provided.
741 is provided, in order to disassemble the upper cover portion A740 and modify the upper layer transmission mechanism A760 and the lower layer transmission mechanism A770, the shaft portion A751 fixed to the box-shaped portion A750 must be removed from the through hole A741. It is necessary to displace the upper lid portion A740 upward with respect to the box-shaped portion A750 in order to remove it.

At this time, if the support portion A730 remains assembled, the support plate portion A732 and the semi-support plate portion A
737 interfere with each other and the upper lid portion A740 cannot be displaced upward. Therefore, the upper lid part A
Before disassembling 740, it is necessary to disassemble the support A730. Further, as described above, in order to disassemble the support portion A730, it is necessary to disassemble the C-ring C1 and the fixed gear SG. ), it is necessary to disassemble the rotating body A720 in order to disassemble the fixed gear SG.

In this way, in order to access the upper-layer transmission mechanism A760 and the lower-layer transmission mechanism A770, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to the upper-layer transmission mechanism A760 and the lower-layer transmission mechanism A770 by configuring a plurality of members to be disassembled in order. In addition, it is possible to easily prevent fraudulent acts that cause malfunction by tampering with the upper layer transmission mechanism A760 or the lower layer transmission mechanism A770.

371 and 372 are front exploded perspective views of the upper lid portion A740 and the box-shaped portion A750. Note that FIG. 371 shows a view looking down obliquely from above, and FIG. 372 shows a view looking up obliquely from below (a view inclined at 22.5 degrees with respect to the vertical direction).

As shown in FIGS. 371 and 372, the upper lid portion A740 has a through hole A741 vertically drilled in the center position of the left and right, and supports each transmission member of the upper layer transmission mechanism A760 on the lower surface facing the box-shaped portion A750. A shape (a shape such as unevenness) is formed for the purpose.

The box-shaped part A750 is arranged below the upper lid part A740 and is formed in a box-like shape with at least the upper surface side open, and the upper layer transmission mechanism A760 and the lower layer transmission mechanism A770 are arranged at the open position. It is fixed to the bottom plate portion A750a of the upper lid portion A740 through the through hole A741
A metal (in this embodiment, made of brass) axial rod A751 extending vertically coaxially with the central axis of
And, a first detection sensor A752 consisting of a detection device configured by a photocoupler system arranged on the upper surface side of the box-shaped part A750, and a photocoupler system arranged on the lower surface side of the box-shaped part A750. a second detection sensor A753 consisting of a detection device, a drive motor AMT2 whose main body protrudes downward and is fastened and fixed, a drive gear AMG2 rotated by the excitation of the drive motor AMT2, and a bottom plate portion A750a. and a relay board A754 for relaying wiring connected to various sensors A752 and A753, the driving motor AMT2, and the like.

Figures 373 and 374 show the box A750, the upper transmission mechanism A760 and the lower transmission mechanism A
770 is an exploded front perspective view of 770. FIG. 373 and 374 show the state in which the upper layer transmission mechanism A760 is separated from the lower layer transmission mechanism A770 in the vertical direction, FIG. It is illustrated in a directional view looking up.

Both the upper layer transmission mechanism A760 and the lower layer transmission mechanism A770 are configured by meshing four gears, and each gear is limited to gears of two types (sizes). That is, the lower-layer transmission mechanism A770 includes a drive gear AMG2, a small-sized small gear PG1 meshed with the drive gear AMG2, a small gear PG2 of the same shape meshed with the small gear PG1, and the small gear PG2. It is composed of a drive gear AMG2 and a large-diameter gear LG1 having the same shape.

The upper-layer transmission mechanism A760 includes a large-diameter gear LG11 having the same shape as the drive gear AMG2, a large-diameter gear LG12 having the same shape meshing with the large-diameter gear LG11, and a small-diameter gear meshing with the large-diameter gear LG12. It is composed of a small-diameter gear PG11 having the same shape as the gear PG1 and a large-diameter gear LG13 meshing with the small-diameter gear PG11 and having the same shape as the drive gear AMG2.

Large-diameter gears LG13 and LG1 arranged on the most downstream side with the drive gear AMG2 side as the upstream side
Detected pieces A763 and A773 that are detected by a first detection sensor A752 and a second detection sensor A753 are formed respectively.

In the process of transmitting the driving force of each of the transmission mechanisms A760 and A770, a gear with a small diameter is used. In this case, the absolute value of the rotation angle is equal to the absolute value of the rotation angle of the driving gear AMG2.

In this embodiment, detection pieces A763 extending radially outward from a head covering the gear teeth of the large-diameter gear LG13 from above are formed at two locations (180° intervals) on the circumference at equal intervals. A piece A7 to be detected extends axially from a head covering the gear teeth of the large-diameter gear LG1 from below.
73 are formed at four locations (at 90-degree intervals) at equal intervals on the circumference, so that the first detection sensor A7
52 and the second detection sensor A753 (see FIG. 372), the first detection sensor A752 and the second detection The detection pieces A763 and A773 are detected by both of the sensors A753. Thus, in this embodiment, the first detection sensor A75
2 and the detection timing of the second detection sensor A753 can be related.

On the other hand, the reason why a plurality of detection sensors such as the first detection sensor A752 and the second detection sensor A753 are provided is that there is a timing for making only one of the detection sensors function.
Details will be described later.

In the detailed description of the upper layer transmission mechanism A760 and the lower layer transmission mechanism A770, since the upper layer transmission mechanism A760 is supported by the lower layer transmission mechanism A770 at a plurality of points, the lower layer transmission mechanism A770 will be described first for easy understanding. . The lower layer transmission mechanism A770 includes a box-shaped portion A7
50, and four gears AMG2, PG1,
It is a transmission mechanism composed of PG2 and LG1.

A plurality of recesses A771 for fitting are formed on the upper surface side of the driving gear AMG2 of the lower transmission mechanism A770 at equal intervals in the circumferential direction, and a projection A protruding radially inward in one of the recesses A771.
771a is formed. As a result, the internal shape of one recessed portion A771 is changed to that of the other recessed portion A771.
formed to be different from the internal shape of the

The small-diameter gear PG2 of the lower-layer transmission mechanism A770 includes a cylindrical extension portion A772 that extends cylindrically upward from the upper surface so as to surround the shaft portion A751. At the upper end of the tubular extension A772, a pair of rectangular notches A772a are provided at symmetrical positions with respect to the axial rod A751.
is formed. The notch A772a is a portion to be fitted with the projecting portion A733 of the support portion, and is formed as notches having different widths corresponding to the form of the projecting portion A733.

The large-diameter gear LG1 is arranged below an intermediate plate portion A750b formed above the bottom plate portion A750a of the box-shaped portion A750, and is restricted from being removed upward by the intermediate plate portion A750b. That is, in order to extract the large-diameter gear LG1, the second
Since it is necessary to remove the detection sensor A753, it is possible to increase the number of man-hours required to remove the large-diameter gear LG1. This makes it easier to avoid the large-diameter gear LG1 from being unintentionally pulled out.

Further, by dividing the area by the intermediate plate portion A750b, it is possible to easily avoid contact between the large-diameter gear LG1 and the constituent members of the upper-layer transmission mechanism A760. As a result, it is possible to avoid transmission of the driving force between the large-diameter gear LG1 and the upper transmission mechanism A760 (on the downstream side of the transmission path of the driving force).

Next, the details of the upper layer transmission mechanism A760 will be described. The upper layer transmission mechanism A760 is disposed in the upper layer of the box-shaped portion A750, and includes four gears LG11,
It is a transmission mechanism composed of LG12, PG11 and LG13.

The large-diameter gear LG11 of the upper-layer transmission mechanism A760 transmits driving force only when it rotates in one direction (clockwise when viewed from the top) by a one-way clutch housed inside.
When the one-way clutch rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the top, it is configured to idle, and has a plurality of ridges A761 projecting downward from the lower surface of the one-way clutch.

The protrusion A761 is a curved wall-shaped protrusion that fits into the recess A771 of the drive gear AMG2. linear shape with reduced overhang). As a result, it is possible to assemble only in a posture in which the protrusion A771a of the drive gear AMG2 and the corresponding portion A761a of the large-diameter gear LG11 match.

The large-diameter gear LG12 of the upper-layer transmission mechanism A760 has a cylindrical extension portion A of the small-diameter gear PG2 in the center.
A through hole A762a with an inner diameter slightly longer than the outer diameter of 772 is drilled, and a cylindrical protrusion A762b protruding from the upper surface side in a large diameter cylindrical shape, and a shaft rod at the protruding tip of the cylindrical protrusion A762b A pair of rectangular cutouts A7 formed at opposite positions across the central axis of the portion A751
62c, its notch A762c, and a pair of protruding parts along a straight line passing through the central axis of the axial rod portion A751 and orthogonal to the straight line passing through the central axis of the axial rod portion A751 in a top view. and an inner protrusion A762d.

The cylindrical ridge portion A762b receives the lower end portion of the second support portion A735 (see FIG. 366),
It is a portion that regulates the displacement of the second support portion A735 in the dividing direction, and the notch portion A762c and the inner projection portion A762d correspond to the projection fitting portion A736b and the recess fitting portion A736a of the second support portion A735, respectively. It is a part that fits together and is configured to be able to transmit driving force.

The large-diameter gear LG13 of the upper-layer transmission mechanism A760 is formed along the axial direction by omitting the formation of the head portion at a position shifted in the same direction and at the same angle from the pair of detected pieces A763 described above. and a cylindrical functional portion A765 which is coaxially rotatably disposed inside the large-diameter gear LG13 and configured to be relatively rotatable with the large-diameter gear LG13.

The columnar functional portion A765 has a pair of rotation restricting projections A765a arranged symmetrically with respect to the rotation axis and supported in a groove-shaped support groove A750c formed on the upper surface of the box-shaped portion A750. Here, a functional device that functions as a so-called torque limiter (safety clutch) with respect to the large-diameter gear LG13 is accommodated inside the cylindrical functional portion A765.

That is, when the load generated between the large-diameter gear LG13 and the cylindrical functional portion A765 is smaller than the standard (slight), torque transmission is maintained, and the large-diameter gear LG13 and the cylindrical functional portion A765 are maintained.
65, the torque transmission is interrupted when the load is excessive.

In this embodiment, the drive gear AMG2 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from above, and the one-way clutch inside the large-diameter gear LG11 idles, thereby interrupting the transmission of the driving force to the upper transmission mechanism A760. A torque limiter is used to provide resistance to more reliably prevent rotation of the motor. Therefore, from this point of view, it functions in the same way as a resistance member that constantly generates resistance and a member that generates viscous resistance such as a damper gear.

On the other hand, when the drive gear AMG2 rotates clockwise in top view and the one-way clutch inside the large diameter gear LG11 rotates without idling, the driving force is transmitted through the upper transmission mechanism A760. , the transmission of torque is interrupted, and the resistance from the large-diameter gear LG13 side can be reduced, so the load applied to the drive motor AMT2 can be suppressed, and the heat generation of the drive motor AMT2 can be suppressed.

Here, when the drive gear AMG2 rotates clockwise in top view and the one-way clutch inside the large diameter gear LG11 rotates without idling, the torque limiter transmits torque at the start of rotation. , after the rotation continues to some extent (after rotating by a certain angle), the torque transmission is switched to the state of canceling. Therefore, before the switch occurs,
A large load is generated between the small diameter gear PG11 and the large diameter gear LG13.

In this embodiment, the elongated gear tooth A764 is formed as a portion that receives this large load. That is, the attitude of the large-diameter gear LG13 when the drive gear AMG2 starts to rotate clockwise when viewed from above is changed to the attitude in which the detected piece A763 enters the gap of the first detection sensor A752 (FIG. 37).
3), it is possible to limit the gear teeth that mesh with the small-diameter gear PG11 to specific gear teeth when the drive gear AMG2 starts to rotate clockwise in top view.

By making the specific gear tooth longer in the axial direction as an elongated gear tooth A764, the load generated per unit length in the axial direction can be reduced. As a result, the large diameter gear LG13
durability can be improved.

It should be noted that the first detection sensor A752 can detect a plurality of objects by detecting the detected piece A763 of the large-diameter gear LG13. First, the upper transmission mechanism A760
rotates for driving force transmission and then stops, the upper layer transmission mechanism A76
It can be detected that 0 has stopped at the proper pose (angle).

Second, when the one-way clutch disposed inside the large-diameter gear LG11 is idling to release the driving force transmission to the upper transmission mechanism A760 (when the driving gear AMG2 rotates counterclockwise in top view). ), it can be detected that the release of the driving force transmission is functioning well. That is, for example, when the cutoff of driving force transmission (idling) is insufficient due to damage to the internal structure of the one-way clutch, or when the torque generation function of the torque limiter is insufficient due to a malfunction, When the driving force transmitted to the radial gear LG13 exceeds the resistance of the torque limiter, the large diameter gear LG13 rotates.

When the first detection sensor A752 detects that the piece A763 to be detected has been displaced while the driving gear AMG2 is controlled to rotate counterclockwise when viewed from above, an error signal is sent to the first detection sensor A752. can be used to find faults in one-way clutches and torque limiters.

It should be noted that the mechanism that compensates for the cancellation of the driving force transmission using the one-way clutch with the function of the torque limiter as described above is effective when the transmitted driving force is directed in the horizontal direction as in the present embodiment. be. In other words, in this embodiment, the driving force is transmitted by a plurality of transmission members that rotate around the rotating shaft extending in the vertical direction, but gravity cannot be used in this configuration.

When the driving force to be transmitted has a component in the direction of gravity, it is possible to use the weight of the member to which the driving force is transmitted to suppress the movement in the direction in which the driving force transmission is canceled. In the embodiment, the self weight cannot be used, and even a weak load caused by idling in the disengaging direction of the one-way clutch may cause transmission of driving force.

In addition, as a structure for suppressing displacement due to idling, it is conceivable to generate friction with other members, but in this case, it is necessary to generate a driving force greater than the friction to drive the members, so there is another problem. may occur. From this point of view, in this embodiment, a torque limiter is employed so that the transmission of the driving force can be reliably canceled when the driving direction is switched.

FIG. 375(a) is a top view of the upper lid portion A740, the box-shaped portion A750, the upper layer transmission mechanism A760, and the lower layer transmission mechanism A770, and FIG. 375(b) is the top lid portion A740 and the box-shaped portion A750.
4 is a front view of an upper layer transmission mechanism A760 and a lower layer transmission mechanism A770. FIG.

Transmission of the drive force of the drive motor AMT2 will be described with reference to FIGS. 375(a) and 375(b). When the drive gear AMG2 rotates due to the excitation of the drive motor AMT2, the protrusion A761 (see FIG. 374) engages with the recess A771 (see FIG. 373) of the drive gear AMG2.
) are also rotated.

When the rotation direction of the driving gear AMG2 is counterclockwise when viewed from above, the one-way clutch accommodated inside the large-diameter gear LG11 idles as described above, and the protrusion A761 and the large-diameter gear LG11 rotate relative to each other. Thus, even if the drive gear AMG2 rotates, the large-diameter gear LG11 maintains its state.

That is, the driving force is transmitted only through the lower transmission path DL1 through the lower transmission mechanism A770, and the transmission of the driving force through the upper transmission path UL1 through the upper transmission mechanism A760 is interrupted. Therefore, of the cylindrical extension portion A772 and the cylindrical ridge portion A762b fitted to the support portion A730 (see FIG. 369), only the cylindrical extension portion A772 rotates, and the cylindrical ridge portion A762b remains as it is. maintain.

As a result, in the assembled state of the production unit A710 (see FIG. 362), the first support portion A7 that fits into the cylindrical extension portion A772 of the first support portion A731 and the second support portion A735
31 (see FIG. 369) rotates, and the second support portion A735 maintains its state. Only one rotating member A721 (see FIG. 367) rotates, and the second rotating member A728 remains unchanged.

On the other hand, when the driving gear AMG2 rotates clockwise when viewed from the top, the driving force is sufficiently transmitted by the one-way clutch housed inside the large-diameter gear LG11 as described above. It rotates (integrally) in synchronization with the gear LG11. That is, drive gear A
When MG2 rotates, large diameter gear LG11 also rotates.

That is, the driving force is transmitted not only through the lower transmission path DL1 but also through the upper transmission path UL1. Therefore, the cylindrical extension portion A772 and the cylindrical ridge portion A7 that fit into the support portion A730 (see FIG. 369)
Both 62b rotate.

As a result, in the assembled state of the effect unit A710 (see FIG. 362), both the first support portion A731 and the second support portion A735 (see FIG. 369) rotate, and the first support portion A73
Both the first rotating member A721 and the second rotating member A728 (see FIG. 367) which are respectively fastened and fixed to the first and second support portions A735 rotate.

Here, the rotation directions of the first rotating member A721 and the second rotating member A728 will be described. First, the second rotating member A728 (see FIG. 367) is rotated by the driving force transmitted through the upper transmission path UL1. As the drive gear AMG2 rotates clockwise in top view, the large diameter gear LG
11 rotates clockwise when viewed from the top, and the large-diameter gear LG12 meshing with the large-diameter gear LG11 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the top. clockwise.

Next, the first rotating member A721 (see FIG. 367) is rotated by the driving force transmitted through the lower transmission path DL1. As the drive gear AMG2 rotates clockwise in top view, the drive gear A
The small gear PG1 meshing with MG2 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the top, and the small gear PG2 (see FIG. 373) meshing with the small gear PG1 rotates clockwise when viewed from the top. is clockwise when viewed from the top.

That is, the rotation directions of the first rotating member A721 and the second rotating member A728 are the axial rod portion A751
is the opposite direction to the rotation axis. As a result, the first rotating member A721 and the second rotating member A7
28 are rotating in the same direction, the player can visually recognize that they are rotating at high speed (with a large angle change), and the first rotating member A721 and the second rotating member A7 can be visually recognized.
28 can be made to appear to be rotating independently.

FIG. 376(a) is a front view of the first rotating member A721, and FIG. 376(b) is a front view of FIG.
376(c) is a top view of the first rotating member A721 as viewed in the direction of arrow D in 6(a);
is a front view of the first rotating member A721, and FIG. 376(d) is an arrow D in FIG. 376(c)
It is a top view of the 1st rotation member A721 in direction view.

FIGS. 376(a) and 376(b) show the initial state of the first rotating member A721, and FIGS. 376(c) and 376(d) show the shell portion A722 of the first rotating member A721 in the initial state. 45 degrees (first state) after being rotated 45 degrees counterclockwise in top view.

FIG. 377(a) is a front view of the first rotating member A721, and FIG. 377(b) is a front view of FIG.
377(c) is a top view of the first rotating member A721 as viewed in the direction of arrow D in 7(a);
is a front view of the first rotating member A721, and FIG. 377(d) is an arrow D in FIG. 377(c)
It is a top view of the 1st rotation member A721 in direction view.

In FIGS. 377(a) and 377(b), the shell A722 of the first rotating member A721 is the first
FIG. 377 shows a state (second state) after rotating 45 degrees counterclockwise in top view from the state shown in FIG.
377(c) and 377(d) show a state (third state) after the shell portion A722 of the first rotating member A721 has rotated 45 degrees counterclockwise in top view from the second state.

FIG. 378(a) is a front view of the first rotating member A721, and FIG. 378(b) is a front view of FIG.
378(c) is a top view of the first rotating member A721 as viewed in the direction of arrow D in 8(a);
is a front view of the first rotating member A721, and FIG. 378(d) is an arrow D in FIG. 378(c)
It is a top view of the 1st rotation member A721 in direction view.

378(a) and 378(b), the shell A722 of the first rotating member A721 is the third
FIG. 378 shows a state (fourth state) after rotating 45 degrees counterclockwise in top view from the state shown in FIG.
(c) and FIG. 378(d) show a state (fifth state) after the shell portion A722 of the first rotating member A721 has rotated 45 degrees counterclockwise in top view from the fourth state.

FIG. 379(a) is a front view of the first rotating member A721, and FIG. 379(b) is a front view of FIG.
379(c) is a top view of the first rotating member A721 as viewed in the direction of arrow D in 9(a);
is a front view of the first rotating member A721, and FIG. 379(d) is an arrow D in FIG. 379(c)
It is a top view of the 1st rotation member A721 in direction view.

In FIGS. 379(a) and 379(b), the shell A722 of the first rotating member A721 is the fifth
FIG. 379 shows a state (sixth state) after rotating 45 degrees counterclockwise in top view from the state shown in FIG.
(c) and FIG. 379(d) show a state (seventh state) after the shell portion A722 of the first rotating member A721 has rotated 45 degrees counterclockwise in top view from the sixth state.

When the shell portion A722 rotates 45 degrees counterclockwise in top view from the seventh state, the first rotating member A7
21 returns to the initial state. 376 to 379 illustrate one section (one cycle) of the rotation of the first rotating member A721.

Note that in the initial state of the first rotating member A721 (see FIG. 376(a)), the shell portion A72
2 as a front shell portion A722F, and the opposite side as a rear shell portion A722B. Similarly, in the initial state of the first rotating member A721, the central rotating member A7
24 as viewed from the front is the member front surface A724F, and the opposite side thereof is the member rear surface A724B.

376(a), 376(c), 377(a), 377(c), and 378
In (a), FIG. 378(c), FIG. 379(a) and FIG. 379(c), the electrical board A715 (
The optical axis KJ of the LED constituting the light emitting means A715a of FIG. 364) is illustrated by an imaginary line,
Figures 376(b), 376(d), 377(b), 377(d), 378(b),
In Figures 378(d), 379(b) and 379(d), a given virtual plane VS is illustrated. The optical axis KJ passes through this virtual plane VS.

376(d), FIG. 377(d), FIG. 378(d) and FIG. 379(d), arrows HL and VL schematically indicating light reflection directions are illustrated. Arrow HL indicates central rotary member A7
The arrow VL indicates the direction in which the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a arranged on the left and right sides of the central rotating member A724 is reflected by the shell A722 and propagates. It represents the direction in which the irradiated light travels after being reflected by the central rotating member A724.

As shown in Figures 376(d), 377(d), 378(d) and 379(d),
As the first rotary member A721 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the top, the direction of the arrow VL changes by one rotation clockwise when viewed from the top. That is, in this embodiment, the central rotating member A7
24, the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a disposed above the central rotary member A724
can be advanced in the radial direction of a circle centered on the rotation axis of the first rotation member A721 via the , and the direction can be changed in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the first rotation member A721.

For example, this is difficult to achieve with a configuration in which the light emitting means are arranged on the side surface of the shell A722 or the central rotating member A724. For example, when the light emitting means is provided on the side surface of the shell A722, the direction of the light emitted from the light emitting means changes in the same rotational direction as the first rotating member A721.

Further, for example, since the member front surface A724F of the central rotating member A724 always faces the front side when the first rotating member A721 rotates, the member front surface A724F and the member rear surface A724B
In the case where the light emitting means is arranged on the surface, the change in the traveling direction of the light irradiated in the normal direction of the surface does not change around the rotation axis of the first rotating member A721 (rotational axis having the rotation axis in the front-rear direction). change direction).

Therefore, as compared with the case of adopting the configuration in which the light emitting means is arranged on the side surface of the first rotating member A721 to perform the light emission effect, it is possible to execute the light emission effect with unexpectedness. For example, since the direction of rotation of the change in the traveling direction of the light is opposite to the direction of rotation of the first rotating member A721, the player will feel as if the rotating member is rotating at a higher speed than the actual rotation speed. can make you feel

As shown in FIGS. 376 to 379, the central rotating member A724 rotates with the rotation of the first rotating member A721, but the surface viewed by the player is limited to the member front surface A724F. Therefore, even if the fastening screw for fastening and fixing the central rotating member A724 is exposed on the back side (see FIG. 368), it is possible to prevent the fastening screw from being visually recognized by the player.

That is, the member back surface A724B of the central rotating member A724 can be configured not as an area to be visually recognized by the player but as an area for another purpose. A configuration that makes it easier to achieve the purpose of reflecting light can be selected. For example, in this embodiment, by intentionally exposing the fastening screw, it is possible to cause reflection of light using the luster of the member surface of the fastening screw.

In addition, the aspect of the member surface of a fastening screw can be set arbitrarily. For example, the surface of the fastening screw member may be painted black to facilitate shadow formation, the surface of the fastening screw member may be painted with a color to reflect the color, or the fastening screw may be coated with an LED. You may attach a light emission means, such as.

The action of light applied to the first rotating member A721 will be described. In the following description, FIG. 364 will be referred to as appropriate. The electrical board A715 having the light emitting means A715a for irradiating the first rotating member A721 with light is arranged so as to configure each side of the pentagon as described above. The optical axis KJ is arranged along the direction of
The electrical board A715 (see FIG. 364) arranged above the first rotating member A721 will be described first, and the electrical board A715 located on the left and right sides of the first rotating member A721 will be described later.

The illumination board A715 arranged above the first rotating member A721 is irradiated with light downward from the light emitting means A715a. This light reaches the central rotating member A724 through the light passage concave portion A722a regardless of the state of the first rotating member A721. That is, the first rotating member A7
By irradiating light from the light emitting means A715a arranged on the electrical board A715 arranged above 21, the central rotating member A724 can always be illuminated with light.

In addition, since three LEDs are arranged side by side in the light emitting means A715a, the amount of light reaching the central rotating member A724 can vary depending on the state of the first rotating member A721. Namely
In the initial state (see FIG. 376(b)), the light passing concave portion A722a is elongated in the same direction as the light emitting means A715a are arranged in parallel, so the light emitted from the left and right light emitting means A715a is also centrally rotated. It is easy to reach the member A724.

On the other hand, in the second state (see FIG. 377(b)), the light passing recesses A722a do not extend in the direction in which the light emitting means A715a are arranged in parallel, and the light emitted from the left and right light emitting means A715a passes through the light passing recesses. Since it is difficult to enter A722a, of the light emitted from the decorative board A715 arranged above the central rotating member A724, the light reaching the central rotating member A724 is mainly the light emitted from the central light emitting means A715a. Become. Therefore, the difference in the state of the first rotating member A721 can be associated with the difference in the emission intensity of the central rotating member A724.

From this point of view, in the initial state and the fourth state in which the member front face A724F of the central rotating member A724 is easily visually recognized in a front view, the decorative board A71 arranged above the central rotating member A724
5 and reaching the central rotating member A724 is maximized, and the central rotating member A7
In the second state and sixth state in which the member front face A724F of No. 24 is difficult to visually recognize from the front view, the intensity of the light emitted from the decorative board A715 arranged above the central rotating member A724 and reaching the central rotating member A724 is minimized. can be That is, it is possible to change the visibility of the central rotating member A724 in a front view and the intensity of the light reaching the central rotating member A724.

The electrical boards A715 arranged on the left and right sides of the first rotating member A721 are provided with light emitting means A715a with the optical axis KJ arranged on a plane (virtual plane VS) passing through the rotation axis of the shell A722. Light is emitted from the light emitting means A715a toward the first rotating member A721.
Depending on the state of the rotating member A721, the location where the light reaches differs.

That is, the state where the shell A722 is arranged between the central rotating member A724 and the light emitting means A715a (initial state (see FIGS. 376(a) and 376(b)) or the fourth state (see FIG. 378(a
) and FIG. 378(b))), the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a reaches the shell A72
2 and does not reach the central rotary member A724.

The outer peripheral edge of the shell A722 is curved in such a manner that the width becomes smaller as it goes radially outward.
b. Therefore, even in the initial state and the fourth state of the first rotating member A721, part of the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a to the shell A722 is reflected by the curvature of the outer peripheral edge of the shell A722 and the arch of the connecting portion A722b. It can be made to progress toward the player by reflecting it on the curvature of the .

In addition, in the state between the initial state and the fourth state of the first rotating member A721, the shell A722 reflects the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a toward the player (reflects along the arrow HL). ), it is possible to emphasize the difference between the amount of light traveling toward the player in a state slightly deviated from the initial state and the fourth state and the amount of light in other states. That is, in the initial state and the fourth state of the first rotary member A721, the central rotary member A724 is momentarily (pulse-like) visually recognized in the dark, and in a state slightly deviated from the initial state and the fourth state, the central rotary member A724 is displayed. It is possible to execute a lighting effect of switching to a brightly visible state.

On the other hand, in the state between the initial state and the fourth state in the rotational displacement of the first rotating member A721, the optical axis of the light emitting means A715a does not entirely overlap with the shell A722. reaches the central rotating member A724.

In this way, the light emitting means A of the electrical board A715 arranged on the left and right sides of the first rotating member A721
A state in which the light emitted from 715a reaches the central rotating member A724 and a state in which the central rotating member A7
24 can be switched depending on the state of the first rotating member A721. As a result, even without controlling the light emission mode (for example, the flashing mode) of the light emitting means A715a, it is possible to perform a light emission effect in which the light that reaches the central rotating member A724 appears to be blinking.

For example, by changing the rotation speed of the first rotating member A721 while maintaining the lighting state of the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a, it is possible to make the light appear to blink at different lighting or extinguishing times ( It can be visually recognized as a light emission effect with different blinking cycles).

In this case, if the central rotating member A724 cannot be followed as a still image and is driven to rotate at a speed that exceeds the degree of causing an afterimage (for example, 20 [rps]), the Regardless of the speed, the central rotating member A724 appears as if it is stopped, while the blinking period of the light applied to the central rotating member A724 can be varied depending on the difference in speed.

That is, the higher the rotation speed of the first rotating member A721, the shorter the interval until the first rotating member A721 reaches the initial state and the fourth state, and the shell A722 illuminates the light emitting means A715a (center Since the period in which the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a) arranged on the left and right sides of the rotating member A724 is blocked can be shortened, the flickering period of the light emitted to the central rotating member A724 can be shortened. Therefore, in this embodiment, the first rotating member A7
By changing the rotation speed of A724, it is possible to perform an effect of changing the flashing cycle of the light irradiated to the central rotary member A724.

In the present embodiment, as shown in the initial state and the fourth state of the first rotating member A721, in a state in which the optical axis of the light emitting means A715a and the shell portion A722 are arranged to face each other, the central rotating member A724 is , the longitudinal direction overlaps with the shell portion A722 when viewed from the direction of the rotation axis (or viewed from the direction of the optical axis of the light emitting means A715a). In this embodiment, the central rotating member A
724 is defined as a direction parallel to the member front face A724F or the member back face A724B (for example, the direction of arrows LR, the direction of arrows UD in FIG. 376(a), or the direction orthogonal to arrows FB). , the direction in which the lateral direction connects the member front surface A724F and the member rear surface A724B (Fig. 37
6(b) in the direction of arrows FB).

In other words, in the initial state and the fourth state of the first rotating member A721, the central rotating member A724 has the longitudinal direction of the shell portion A72 when viewed in the direction of the rotation axis (or in the direction of the optical axis of the light emitting means A715a).
It becomes a posture that enters (fits) inside the thickness of 2. Thereby, the light shielding effect of the shell portion A722 in the initial state and the fourth state of the first rotating member A721 can be improved. That is, by shielding the light with the shell A722, it is possible to prevent the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a from reaching the central rotating member A724. , but not the central rotary member A724.

When rotating the first rotating member A721 at a constant speed, the total (ratio) of the time during which the first rotating member A721 is maintained in the initial state or the fourth state with respect to the time during which the rotation is continued is the rotational speed It's the same regardless. As a result, the change in the rotational speed of the first rotating member A721 can prevent the change in the brightness of the first rotating member A721 visually recognized by the player. That is, when the first rotating member A721 is rotated at high speed, it is possible to prevent the first rotating member A721 from being seen in the dark.

In this embodiment, the first rotating member A72 is rotated while the light emitting means A715a is turned on.
1 can change the blinking period of the light reaching the central rotating member A724. According to this, it is possible to eliminate the need to form a circuit for causing the flashing of the light emitting means A715a while achieving the same effect as in the case of flashing the light emitting means A715a itself. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the size of the electrical board A715.

As described above, the light emitting means A715a for emitting light from above the central rotating member A724;
The light emitting means A715a for emitting light from the left and right sides of the central rotating member A724 is the first rotating member A
It is configured so that how the first rotating member A721 is illuminated differs from the state of A721. Therefore, by controlling separately, it is possible to execute the lighting effect illustrated below.

For example, the initial state of the first rotating member A721 (see FIGS. 376(a) and 376(b))
Or in the fourth state (see FIGS. 378(a) and 378(b)), the central rotary member A7
24 is turned off, and by controlling the light emitting means A715a arranged on the left and right of the central rotating member A724 to light or blink, the central rotating member A724 is darkly visible, and the shell part A light effect that brightly illuminates the A722 can be executed.

Further, for example, only the light emitting means A715a (the central light emitting means A715a) arranged above the central rotating member A724 are lit or blinked, and the light emitting means A715a arranged to the left and right of the central rotating member A724 are extinguished. By controlling, it is possible to perform a light effect that illuminates the central rotating member A724 brightly and visually recognizes the shell A722 darkly.

Further, for example, light is irradiated from both directions in the horizontal direction, but light is irradiated only from one side (upper side) in the vertical direction (every half rotation, the light is reflected from the central rotating member A724 to the front side. A complex lighting effect can be executed by using the difference between the case and the case of being reflected to the back side). For example, blue light is emitted from the light emitting means A715a arranged on the left and right of the central rotating member A724, and red light is emitted from the light emitting means A715a arranged above the central rotating member A724. For a player who views from the front, switching between a situation in which blue light is seen and a situation in which blue light and red light are mixed is switched every half rotation of the first rotating member A721. can be done.

In this case, by changing the rotation speed of the first rotating member A721 while executing the control to continuously turn on the light without flashing the light, it is possible to arbitrarily change the period in which the appearance of the light changes. .

An example of stop control of the first rotating member A721 will be described. As described above, the driving force for rotationally driving the first rotating member A721 is transmitted through the lower transmission path DL1 (see FIG. 375(b)). Since the pieces to be detected A773 (see FIG. 374) are detected by the second detection sensor A753 at intervals of 90 degrees, the sound lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) controls each time the first rotating member A721 rotates 90 degrees. The occurrence of rotation can be determined. The state of the first rotating member A721 can be determined by dividing this determination according to the rotation direction of the first rotating member A721, accumulating the results, and determining the accumulated result separately.

That is, for example, when the drive motor AMT2 is driven to rotate in the rotation direction (positive direction) in which the shell A722 rotates counterclockwise in top view, the piece A773 to be detected is detected by the second detection sensor A75.
While the numerical value of the cumulative counter is incremented by 1 each time 3 is detected, when the drive motor AMT2 is rotationally driven in the direction of rotation (reverse direction) in which the shell portion A722 rotates clockwise in top view, the piece to be detected is detected. Each time A773 is detected by the second detection sensor A753, the numerical value of the cumulative counter is decremented by one.

If the numerical value of the cumulative counter is a multiple of 0 or 4, the initial state is (0 or 4
(multiple of 0 or 4) + 1 is the second state, (multiple of 0 or 4) + 2 is the fourth state, and (multiple of 0 or 4) + 3 is the sixth state. can be done.

Therefore, according to the present embodiment, even if the rotation angle of the drive motor AMT2 cannot be designated, by determining the numerical value of the cumulative counter and controlling the stop of the drive motor AMT2, the initial state, the second The first rotary member A72 in either the second state, the fourth state or the sixth state
1 can be stopped.

Therefore, it is possible to perform an effect such that the postures in which the first rotating member A721 stops have different meanings. For example, it can be utilized as an effect means for notifying the difference in the degree of expectation for a big win, or notifying the time information (for example, the stopping posture changes every two hours).

In this embodiment, the case where the pieces A773 to be detected are formed at four locations at regular intervals has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. The pieces A773 to be detected may be arranged at non-equidistant intervals, may be formed at three locations, five or more locations, or may be formed at one location.

FIG. 380(a) is a front view of the production unit A710, and FIG.
Fig. 380(c) is a top view of the effect unit A710 viewed in the direction of arrow D in 0(a);
is a front view of the effect unit A710, and FIG. 380(d) is an arrow D in FIG. 380(c)
It is a top view of production|presentation unit A710 in direction view.

FIG. 381(a) is a front view of the production unit A710, and FIG.
381(c) is a top view of the effect unit A710 viewed in the direction of arrow D in 1(a);
is a front view of the production unit A710, and FIG. 381(d) is an arrow D in FIG. 381(c)
It is a top view of production|presentation unit A710 in direction view.

In FIGS. 380 and 381, the state of rotation of the rotating body A720 is illustrated in chronological order. That is, the first rotating member A721 is driven in the rotating direction of rotating counterclockwise when viewed from the top, as shown in FIG.
380(c) and 380(d), the first state of the first rotating member A721 is shown in FIGS. 381(a) and 381(d). (b
), the second state of the first rotating member A721 is the first state in FIGS. 381(c) and 381(d).
A third state of the rotating member A721 is illustrated respectively.

When the first rotating member A721 is driven in the rotating direction of rotating counterclockwise in top view, as described above, the driving force is transmitted through the upper transmission path UL1, so the second rotating member A728 also rotates in the first rotation. It reversely rotates at the same rotation angle as the member A721.

That is, FIGS. 380(a) and 380(b) show the initial state of the second rotating member A728 in which the rod-shaped extensions A728a are arranged on the left and right sides of the first rotating member A721, and FIG.
In c) and FIG. 380(d), the rod-shaped extension A728a is rotated 4 degrees clockwise in top view from the initial state.
A first state of the second rotating member A728 rotated 5 degrees is illustrated, FIGS.
In (b), the rod-shaped extension A728a rotates 45 degrees clockwise from the first state to the second state.
The second state of the rotating member A728 is illustrated, and in FIGS. 381(c) and 381(d), the second rotating member A728 in which the rod-shaped extension portion A728a is rotated 45 degrees clockwise in top view from the second state.
A third state of is illustrated.

Since the pair of rod-shaped extensions A728a are formed in a substantially rotationally symmetrical shape, the second rotating member A728 returns to the initial state by further rotating 45 degrees clockwise in top view from the third state. do.

In FIGS. 380(b), 380(d), 381(b) and 381(d), for ease of understanding, the annular front cover A711 and the annular rear cover A714 are schematic diagrams (simplified diagrams). ) in phantom lines.

In addition, in FIGS. 380(a), 380(c), 381(a) and 381(c), the outer shape of the electrical board A715 is illustrated by imaginary lines, and FIGS. 380(b) and 380(d). ), Figure 381
In (b) and FIG. 381(d), a virtual plane VS is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 380 and 381, the second rotating member A728 rotates along with the first
It passes through the optical axis of the light emitted from the illumination boards A715 (two boards arranged on each side) arranged on the left and right sides of the rotating member A721. Therefore, similarly to the first rotating member A721, the traveling mode of the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a of the electrical board A715 is controlled by the second rotating member A7.
It can be changed corresponding to 28 rotations.

Here, unlike the case where the shell A722 of the first rotating member A721 is made of a resin material with low light transmittance, the second rotating member A728 is made of a resin material with light transmittance. It does not block light when passing through the optical axis of , but acts to cause a change in light refraction mode or light color. In this embodiment, since the second rotating member A728 is made of a blue resin material, the light reaching the first rotating member A721 is changed to a blue color at the timing when the second rotating member A728 passes through the optical axis. (color mixed with blue) can be changed.

In this embodiment, the second rotating member A728 is formed in a rod shape extending in the direction along the rotation axis and bent along the circumferential direction of rotation. is configured so as not to overlap with all of the optical axes of

For example, in the state shown in FIG. 380(d), the optical axis of the light emitting means A715a arranged on the electrical board A715 arranged on the left and right upper sides of the central rotating member A724 overlaps with the second rotating member A728, and the other Although the optical axis of the light emitting means A715a arranged on the electrical board A715 and the second rotating member A728 do not overlap, on the other hand, in the state shown in FIG.
The optical axis of the light emitting means A715a arranged on the electrical decoration board A715 arranged on the left and right lower side of 724 overlaps with the second rotating member A728, and the light emitting means A arranged on the other electrical decoration board A715.
The optical axis of 715a and the second rotating member A728 do not overlap. In addition, FIG.380(b) and FIG.3
In the state shown in 81(b), the optical axis of any light emitting means A715a is aligned with the second rotating member A72.
8 are configured so that they do not overlap.

As a result, compared to the case where the optical axes of all the light emitting means A715a arranged on the left and right sides of the central rotating member A724 and the second rotating member A728 are switched to overlap or not overlap, the central rotating member A724 The variety of modes of light arriving can be increased. That is, the second
Light passing through the rotating member A728 reaches the central rotating member A724. Only light arriving from the upper left and right sides passes through the second rotating member A728. Light arriving from the lower left and right sides passes through the second rotating member A728. It can be increased to a mode that passes through the A728.

In this case, the light emitting means A715a whose optical axis overlaps with the second rotating member A728 is turned on and the light emitting means A715a whose optical axis does not overlap with the second rotating member A728 is turned off. light emitting means A715a overlapping the second rotating member A72
The central rotating member A724
can change the appearance of That is, the central rotating member A724 is replaced by the second rotating member A72.
It is possible to switch between emitting light in a manner in which the colors of A728 are mixed and emitting light regardless of the color of the second rotating member A728.

In addition, the direction of the optical axis that overlaps the second rotating member A728 can be changed from the upper left and right to the lower left and right depending on the arrangement of the second rotating member A728.
The part of the central rotating member A724 that is illuminated in a mixed manner of 28 colors can be switched.

In addition, as illustrated in FIGS. 380 and 381, when viewed from above, the second rotating member A7
28 is configured so as not to overlap with the light passage concave portion A722a. As a result, the optical axis of the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a arranged above the central rotating member A724 does not depend on the arrangement of the second rotating member A728, and does not pass through the second rotating member A728. A72
Go to 2a.

Therefore, for example, only the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a arranged above the central rotating member A724 is turned on, and the light emitting means A715 arranged to the left and right of the central rotating member A724 are turned on.
By configuring a to turn off, it is possible to prevent the color of the light reaching the central rotating member A724 from being changed by the second rotating member A728.

If this is achieved by the light emitting means A715a arranged on the left and right sides of the central rotating member A724, the light emitting means A715a is turned on at the timing when the second rotating member A728 does not intersect the optical axis of the light emitting means A715a, and the second rotating member A728 intersects the optical axis, it is necessary to turn off the light emitting means A715a (control synchronized with the rotation of the second rotating member A728). Such control can be made unnecessary by the function of the light emitting means A715a.

The second rotating member A728 partially hides the central rotating member A724 from the field of view of the player in a posture in which the member front surface A724F of the central rotating member A724 does not face the front and the performance function of the central rotating member A724 is lowered. (see FIG. 381(a)), and is configured so that the light refracted by the second rotating member A728 can easily travel to the player. As a result, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the presentation function of the rotating body A720 during the continuation of the rotation.

Here, since the rod-shaped extension portion A728a of the second rotating member A728 is formed in a rotationally symmetrical shape, the shape (outer shape) in a front view can be switched at intervals of 180 degrees. That is, FIG.
The shape (outer shape) of the second rotating member A728 shown in 1(a) is equivalent to the shape (outer shape) in the state where the second rotating member A728 is rotated 180 degrees from the state shown in FIG. 381(a).

On the other hand, the first rotating member A721 rotating inside the second rotating member A728 is not in the same state at 180 degree intervals. That is, when the first rotating member A721 rotates 180 degrees from the second state (see FIG. 377(a)) shown in FIG. 381(a), the state changes to the sixth state (see FIG. 379(a)). In this embodiment, as described above, the second rotating member A728 is the first rotating member A721.
(see FIG. 381(a)), the first rotating member A721 is partially hidden by the second rotating member A728.
It is possible to make it difficult to determine whether 21 is in the second state or the sixth state.

Then, from the state where the second rotating member A728 is arranged as illustrated in FIG. 381(a),
While the second rotating member A728 and the first rotating member A721 are synchronously rotated by 45 degrees, if the first rotating member A721 is in the second state (see FIG. 377(a)), the first rotation Light emitted from the light emitting means A715a arranged above the member A721
The direction reflected by 724 is the direction facing the front (see arrow VL in FIG. 377(d)), and while the central rotating member A724 is brightly visible to the player, the first rotating member A721
is in the sixth state (see FIG. 379(a)), the direction in which the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a arranged above the first rotating member A721 is reflected by the central rotating member A724 is the rear surface. The direction toward the side (see arrow VL in FIG. 379(d)), and the central rotating member A7
24 is darkly visible to the player.

That is, changing the appearance of the first rotating member A721 (brightness of the central rotating member A724) while maintaining the same external shape of the second rotating member A728 that is visually recognized during displacement is performed by the light emitting means A.
715a can be generated without changing the lighting mode. In this case:
When the second rotating member A728 is stopped in the state of FIG. In addition, it is possible to heighten the sense of anticipation for the subsequent operation mode, and to improve the ability to pay attention to the rotating body A720.

In this case, while the second rotating member A728 and the first rotating member A721 are synchronously rotated by 90 degrees from the arrangement shown in FIG. , the member front surface A724F of the central rotating member A724 rotates 90 degrees from an upward posture to a forward and backward posture. Along with this, the first rotating member A721 and the second rotating member A728
The direction of the light reflected via the central rotating member A724 gradually changes from the vertical direction to the front-rear direction until just before the rotation angle of reaches 90 degrees (synchronized with the rotation angle of the first rotating member A721). On the other hand, when the rotation angles of the first rotating member A721 and the second rotating member A728 reach 90 degrees, the member front surface A724F faces the front-rear direction (because the tilt with respect to the optical axis KJ from above disappears). ), the front-to-rear direction component of the direction of light reflected via the central rotary member A724 becomes close to 0, and the direction of light reflection returns to the vertical direction.

In this way, in synchronization with the rotation of the first rotating member A721 from the second state or the sixth state, light emitted from the light emitting means A715a arranged above the central rotating member A724 is emitted from the central rotating member A724. It is possible to gradually increase the forward and backward component of the light when it is reflected. As a result, the longer the rotation time of the first rotating member A721, the more the first rotating member A
721 is in the second state or in the sixth state.
1 can be maintained at a high level of attention.

In this embodiment, the second rotating member A728 is stopped by driving the rotating body A720 in the direction in which the first rotating member A721 rotates clockwise in top view from the state shown in FIG. 381(a). It is also possible to rotate the first rotating member A721 while keeping it. In this case
Since the light reflected by the central rotating member A724 (light along the arrow VL) passes through the second rotating member A728 and easily reaches the player's eyes, the central rotating member A724 is colored and easily visible.

That is, in the state shown in FIG. 381(a), the posture of the first rotating member A721 can be configured in two ways with an interval of 180 degrees, and from the state shown in FIG. and rotating the first rotating member A721 while maintaining the posture of the second rotating member A728 from the state shown in FIG. A total of four ways of showing the rotating member A724 to the player can be executed.

The light reflected through the central rotating member A724 functions not only to change the brightness of the central rotating member A724 itself, but also to illuminate the members arranged around the central rotating member A724.

For example, when light is reflected to the left front side via the central rotating member A724 (Fig. 377 (
d)), in the game area formed on the front side of the game board A13. When the light is reflected to the right front side via the central rotating member A724 (
376(d)), in the game area formed on the front side of the game board A13, the right flow path (the flow path configured in the area on the right side with respect to the center of the horizontal width of the game area, mainly It can be used as a light that brightly illuminates the flow path through which the ball fired with the right hand passes.

Further, for example, when light is reflected to the left rear side via the central rotating member A724 (Fig. 3
78(d)), the light can be used to brightly illuminate the first operation units A400, A400A, A400B, etc. arranged on the front left side of the third pattern display device 81, and the central rotating member A724 can be used. When the light is reflected to the right rear side through (see FIG. 379(d)), the first operation units A400C and A4 arranged on the right side of the front side of the third pattern display device 81
It can be used as light that brightly illuminates 00D and the like. Thus, the central rotating member A7
Since the light reflected via 24 can be switched in a direction directed toward different members, the player's line of sight can be guided to different members (places) by switching the direction of the light.

In addition, the second rotating member A728 is configured with a vertical length capable of dividing the inner region of the annular front cover A711 in front view into left and right (see FIG. 381(a)). Thereby, in a state where the second rotating member A728 is stopped, for example, the effect unit A710
is arranged on the front side of the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 321), the display region of the third pattern display device 81 viewed through the inner region of the annular front cover A711 is divided into left and right. can be partitioned. In other words, the second rotating member A728 can be used not only as a member that executes an effect by rotating motion, but also as a member that divides the display area of the display device when stopped.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, when the rotation direction of the drive gear AMG2 is counterclockwise when viewed from above, the first rotation member A721 can be rotated while the second rotation member A728 is stopped. , the effect of rotating the first rotating member A721 can be executed in a state in which the display area of the display device is divided.

In this embodiment, the second rotating member A728 is configured to rotate only when the first rotating member A721 is driven in a counterclockwise rotating direction when viewed from above, and rotates in the opposite direction (first rotating member A7
21 is rotated clockwise in top view), the second rotating member A728 stops.

In other words, in one direction of rotation, the first rotating member A721 has the effect of arbitrarily changing the flickering cycle of the light reaching the central rotating member A724 by passing through the optical axis of the light emitting means A715a arranged on the left and right. In the other direction of rotation, in addition to the effect of changing the blinking period, the central rotating member A7
A change in the emission behavior (color, width, etc.) of the light reaching 24 can be produced.

In this way, by varying the direction of rotation, it is possible to change the visibility of the lighting effect. Since the frequency with which the second rotating member A728 passes through the optical axis depends on the rotation speed of the second rotating member A728, variations in the change in the light emission mode (color, width, etc.) of the light reaching the central rotating member A724 2 Depends on the rotational speed resolution (switchable number) of the rotating member A728.

The rotation speed of the second rotating member A728 naturally has a permissible limit, and this permissible limit defines the limit of variations in the light emission mode. , the second rotating member A728 can be switched to operate or stop. Therefore, even if the rotating speed is the same, if the rotating direction is changed, the light emission mode (color, width, etc.) reaching the central rotating member A724 can be changed. can be different.

Therefore, when the first rotating member A721 or the second rotating member A728 rotates only in one direction, or when the influence on light does not change even if the rotating directions are different (for example, when the second rotating member A728
28, or when only the rotating direction of the first rotating member A721 changes, the second rotating member A72
8 can double the change in the visibility of the light reaching the central rotating member A724 compared to the case of maintaining rotation, etc.), so that the variation in the appearance of the central rotating member A724 is increased. be able to.

Details of how the central rotating member A724 looks will be described. As described above, the central rotary member A724 maintains the posture in which the member front surface A724F faces the front side, and the member front surface A724
Repeat the operation of flipping F upside down.

Therefore, when the central rotating member A724 cannot be followed as a still image and is driven to rotate at a speed that exceeds the degree of causing an afterimage (for example, 20 [rps]), the central rotating member A724 When viewed from the front, A724 is visually recognized as if the upside-down inverted shape of the member front A724F is united. That is, in this embodiment, the central rotating member A724 formed in a star shape with five corners is visually recognized as a star shape with ten corners.

In this embodiment, the member front face A724F of the central rotating member A724 is formed in a vertically asymmetrical shape, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the member front face A724F of the central rotary member A724 may be formed in a vertically symmetrical shape. In this case, since there is no difference between the shape that is visually recognized as an afterimage during rotation (the shape in which the upside down shapes are united) and the shape of the member front surface A724F, it seems as if the central rotating member A724 is stopped. can be visually recognized.

In addition, for example, a characteristic shape or figure is formed on either side of the rotation axis of the central rotating member A724, and this shape or figure is inverted upside down and united to evoke a different concept. You can

For example, by drawing an equilateral triangular figure on the front face A724F of the central rotating member A724 in such a manner that one side overlaps the rotating shaft in a front view above the rotating shaft of the central rotating member A724, the central rotating member A724
When 24 is rotated, the equilateral triangles are united at the top and bottom, so that a diamond-shaped figure can be visually recognized. By drawing a hiragana letter (figure) on the front, when the central rotating member A724 is rotated, the reversed shape unites up and down to make the number "3" (figure) visible. be able to. As a result, it is possible to execute an unexpected effect.

In FIG. 382, an example of an effect using the second action unit A700 will be described.
FIG. 382 is a front view of the annular front cover A711 and the rotating body A720. Figure 382
Now, the state where the effect unit A710 is arranged in the extended position (see FIG. 321), that is, the third
A state in which an annular front cover A711 and a rotating body A720 are arranged on the front side of the pattern display device 81 is illustrated.

In FIG. 382, the second state of the first rotating member A721 and the second rotating member A728 (see FIG. 381
(a)) is illustrated, and the third pattern display device 81 An image displayed by is shown.

That is, the third symbol display device 81 displays the rotating second rotary member A728V on the display. As a result, even when the second rotating member A728 is stopped, the player can visually recognize as if the second rotating member A728 is rotating.

The means for displaying the second rotating member A728V on the display is not limited to the third pattern display device 81 arranged on the back side of the second rotating member A728. For example, transmissive liquid crystals may be provided on the front side of the second rotating member A728, and the state of rotation of the second rotating member A728 may be displayed by the transmissive liquid crystals. , an illumination plate may be arranged on the illumination plate, and the figure formed on the illumination plate and the image of the third pattern display device 81 may be combined so as to be visible as the second rotating member A728V on the display. The second rotating member A728V on the display may be displayed by a combination of a plurality of display means including means.

In this state, when light is emitted from the light emitting means A715a of the decorative board A715, the player expects the mode of light production in the rotating state of the second rotating member A728, but the second rotating member A728 is stopped. Since the light effect can be executed in the mode in (1), a highly unexpected effect can be executed.

Moreover, this is not limited to the state in which the effect unit A710 of the second operation unit A700 is stopped at the overhanging position, and the same applies while the effect unit A710 is vertically displaced. For example, the effect unit A710 is configured so that the third pattern display device 81 cannot be visually recognized through the left and right positions of the rotating body A720 at the retracted position (Fig. 3
20) On the other hand, at the extended position, the third pattern display device 8
1 can be seen (see Figure 321).

That is, in response to the upward motion of the effect unit A710 toward the extended position, the annular front cover A711 on the left and right sides of the first rotating member A721 and the second rotating member A728
The display area of the third pattern display device 81 that is visible through the area inside (inside the circular opening) gradually widens. By displaying the above-described second rotating member A728V on the display in the area of the third symbol display device 81 that is gradually visually recognized, the effect unit A710 is raised while the second rotating member A728 is stopped. When the control is performed to the player, the second rotating member A
728 has started to rotate without notice (an effect can be performed using an optical illusion).

When the effect unit A710 rises in this case, the outer shape of the rotating body A720 that is visually recognized by the player when the second rotating member A728 is actually rotating and when the second rotating member A728 is stopped can be maintained in the same way, when the light is emitted from the light emitting means A715a, the second rotating member A728 is actually rotating and the second rotating member A728 is stopped. It is possible to change the light emission mode (light reflection mode) of the rotating body A720 visually recognized by the player. As a result, it is possible to execute a highly unexpected presentation.

Next, with reference to FIG. 383, a twenty-third embodiment will be described. In the twenty-second embodiment, the second rotating member A728 passes through the optical axis KJ of the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a. It is configured as a sliding member A2729 that moves in parallel. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 383 is a schematic top view showing the first rotating member A2721 in the twenty-third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 383, the slide member A2729 is configured to be slidable between a rear side position intersecting the virtual plane VS and a front side position not intersecting the virtual plane VS.

Therefore, even if the slide member A2729 is arranged at a position intersecting the optical axis KJ at the back side position, the crossing with the optical axis KJ can be eliminated by moving to the front side position. 1 It is possible to change the way light reaches the rotary member A2721. Further, since the movement of the slide member A2729 is a sliding movement in the front-rear direction, it is possible to make it difficult for a player viewing the slide member A2729 from the front side to grasp that the slide member A2729 is moving.

That is, while maintaining (retaining) the shape (outer shape) of the first rotating member A2721 and the sliding member A2729 when viewed from the front, the presentation mode of the first rotating member A2721 when the LED or the like constituting the light emitting means A715a is turned on. (How it shines) can be changed. As a result, it is possible to construct an unexpected presentation without performing control to change the LEDs to be lit.

In addition, the material of the slide member A2729 is not limited at all. For example, it may be formed from a light-transmitting resin material, it may be formed from a light-impermeable resin material, or it may be formed from a metal material.

Next, a twenty-fourth embodiment will be described. In the 22nd embodiment, the pinned gear A46
2 is formed in an arc shape along the movement locus of the transmission projection A463, but in the twenty-fourth embodiment, the pinned gear A3462 is formed on the outer surface of the arc wall A464. A plurality of outer diameter projections A3 projecting radially outward from the
464. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 384 is a rear view of the front unit FU in the twenty-fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 384, the outer diameter protrusions A3464 are formed at four locations that divide the circumferential length of the circular arc wall portion A464 into approximately five equal parts when viewed from the rear.

In the twenty-fourth embodiment, long holes formed to displace the first displacement member A440 (first long hole A422a, second long hole A422b, displacement side long hole A453, and transmission side long hole A45
4) is formed longer than in the 22nd embodiment, so that the first displacement member A440 can be displaced beyond the displacement end on the overhang position side in the 22nd embodiment.

In the state shown in FIG. 384, the deformed slide member A455 comes into contact with the arcuate wall portion A464 and its movement is restricted, so that the first displacement member A440 stops at the overhang position. When the pin-equipped gear A3462 is rotated counterclockwise in rear view, the outer diameter projection A3464 moves toward the projecting plate portion A4.
384, the long link A451 rotates and the first displacement member A440 is displaced leftward from the extended position. can be configured as

As a result, at the timing when the second displacement member A490 is displaced (see FIG. 360),
It can be configured such that the first displacement member A440 is displaced.

In addition, in FIG. 384, the size of the outer diameter protrusion A3464 is shown randomly, but it is not limited to this. For example, all of them may project with the same size, or external projections A3464 with different sizes may be formed. In this case, they need not all be of different sizes.

In this embodiment, the two outer diameter projections A3464 closer to the transmission projection A463 are formed larger than the two projections farther from the transmission projection A463. Therefore, the first displacement member A4
40 reaches the extended position, the displacement caused by the contact between the outer protrusion A3464 and the deformed slide member A455 when the pin-equipped gear A3462 is continuously rotated is greater than that of the previous two times. is smaller than twice. That is, the first displacement member A after reaching the overhang position
The displacement of 440 (reciprocating minute displacement) can be produced so as to gradually settle down.

From this point of view, the outer diameter protrusion A3464 may be formed so as to become smaller as it goes away from the transmission protrusion A463 side along the circular arc wall portion A464, or may be formed vice versa. As a result, an effect can be executed in which the displacement width of the displacement (reciprocating minute displacement) of the first displacement member A440 changes gradually.

Further, a recessed portion that is recessed radially inward from the arcuate wall portion A464 may be formed at the location where the outer diameter protrusion A3464 is formed. In this case, contrary to the description in the twenty-fourth embodiment, each time the concave portion is arranged to face the protruding plate portion A456a, the deformed slide member A455 moves downward to the left from the state shown in FIG. It can be configured such that it is pulled back by force, the long link A451 rotates accordingly, and the first displacement member A440 is displaced to the right (retracted position side) of the extended position.

Also, the formation position of the outer diameter protrusion A3464 is set to the first operation units A400, A400A, A
400B, A400C, and A400D (see FIG. 319) may be made different (shifted). As a result, the first operation units A400, A400A, A400B, A400C
, A400D (when the first displacement member A440 and the second displacement member A490 start to operate at the same timing), the second The timing at which the 1-displacement member A440 is displaced can be varied. That is, in the control mode in which the driving motors AMT1 are excited all at once,
It is possible to shift the timing of the displacement (small displacement) that occurs in the first displacement member A440 in relation to the outer diameter protrusion A3464 by a deviation width predetermined by the arrangement of the outer diameter protrusion A3464.

For example, each first operating unit A400, A400A, A400B, A400C, A40
The timing at which each first displacement member A440 of 0D (see FIG. 319) reaches the extended position (see FIG. 320) and the timing at which each second displacement member A490 reaches the extended position (see FIG. 320) are the same. , after the first displacement member A440 reaches the overhanging position, the outer diameter protrusion A3
464, the generation timing of the displacement (small displacement) that occurs in the first displacement member A440 is
Adjustments can be made so that the motions are sequentially generated clockwise from the first motion unit A400 arranged on the lower left side when viewed from the front.

As a result, the line of sight of the player who pays attention to the displacement of the first displacement member A440 can be easily guided in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front. In addition, as described above, in conjunction with the displacement of the first displacement member A440, it is possible to change the aspect of the light visually recognized through the long hole A412a (see FIG. 320). The line of sight can be easily guided in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front. For example, it is possible to use the order of displacement of the first displacement member A440 to produce an effect suggesting hitting to the right executed by the third symbol display device 81 or the like during a jackpot game (special game).

Next, a twenty-fifth embodiment will be described. In the twenty-second embodiment, the first displacement member A44
0 is displaced on the back side of the electrical board A416, the twenty-fifth embodiment includes a decorative member A4550 that is displaced on the front side of the electrical board A416. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 385(a) shows the first operation unit A4400 in FIG. 339 (
a) is a cross-sectional view along the line corresponding to the CCCXLVIa-CCCXLVIa line, FIG.
85(b) is a cross-sectional view of the first operation unit A4400 along the line corresponding to the CCCXLVIb-CCCXLVIb line in FIG. 344(a).

As shown in FIGS. 385(a) and 385(b), the decorative member A4550 includes a plate-like decorative plate portion A4551 displaceably disposed on the front side of the front cover A410, and a main body portion A411.
A pair of guided parts A4552 guided by long holes A4411b drilled along a straight line parallel to the direction A416x on the side surface of the front cover A416x, and a pair of connecting arm parts A4553 formed outside the front cover A410 is integrally connected and fixed to the

Since the pair of guided portions A4552 are both inserted through the long holes A4411b,
The guided portion A4552 is allowed to displace only along the long hole A4411b. As a result, the posture change of the decorative plate portion A4551 can be suppressed. That is, the displacement of the decorative plate portion A4551 is limited to the sliding displacement in the direction parallel to the direction A416x, which is the extending direction of the long hole A4411b.

The first displacement member A4440 has a pair of projecting portions A4442g projecting from the left and right ends of the interlocking plate portion A4442 toward the front side, and has the same configuration as the first displacement member A440 except for this.

In this embodiment, the guided portion A4552 is formed to protrude inward of the front cover A410 to a position where it can abut on the projecting portion A4442g in the displacement direction. As a result, the first displacement member A
The decorative member A4550 interlocks with the first displacement member A4440 at the timing when the projecting portion A4442g and the guided portion A4552 abut during the displacement of the 4440.

The interlocking plate portion A4442 of the first displacement member A4440 is configured to be displaced with a change in posture during the displacement of the guided plate portion A441.
The arrangement of the projecting portion A4442g is set so that the projecting portion A4442g can enter between .
As a result, the decorative member A455 is interlocked with the displacement of the first displacement member A4440 in both forward and backward directions.
0 can be displaced in both forward and backward directions (both left and right directions in FIG. 385(a)).

According to this embodiment, since the decorative plate portion A4551 is arranged on the front side of the front cover A410, the timing of hiding the through hole A412 with the decorative plate portion A4551 can be configured.
This can physically block the light traveling through the through hole A412.

In addition, the first displacement member A4440 hidden behind the front cover A410 at the extended position
, the decorative plate portion A4551 is always arranged so as to be visible to the player without being hidden by the front cover A410. Therefore, the decorative plate portion A4551 and the opening A442c of the first displacement member A4440 are configured in different shapes for each first operation unit A4400, and are configured to have a series of meanings in the retracted position. In the overhanging position, which is hidden, it is not possible for the player to visually recognize the position, and at the same time, it is difficult to give a sense of unity in the lighting mode.

That is, by arranging the shape of the decorative plate portion A4551 of each first operation unit A4440 and the drawn figure in the same manner, the first displacement member A4440 is arranged at the projecting position and the front cover A41
0 (see FIG. 385(b)), the sense of unity of each first operation unit A4440 can be created by the decorative plate portion A4551.

Further, the light emitting means is preliminarily placed at a similar position on the first displacement member A4440 of the plurality of first operation units A4400 and visible through the through hole A412 in a state where the first displacement member A4440 is arranged at the protruding position. A445b is provided, and in a state where the first displacement member A4440 is hidden as described above, the light emitting means A445b are simultaneously lighted by the plurality of first operation units A4400, thereby providing a sense of unity. can be realized.

In this embodiment, the long hole A4411b is formed using a gap area (area on the retracted position side of the first displacement member A4440) secured by not forming the electrical board A416. That is, the space created by limiting the formation range of the electrical board A416 is replaced by the decorative member A4550.
It can be effectively used as a space for arranging a structure for realizing the displacement of

The range in which the decorative member A4550 can be displaced is limited to the formation range of the long hole A4411b.
That is, only the space created by limiting the formation range of the electrical board A416 can be a range in which not only the first displacement member A4440 but also the decoration member A4550 can be displaced. Therefore, it is possible to increase the number of displaced members in the range where the electrical board A416 is not formed (corresponding range in front view).

Before and after the displacement of the decorative member A4550, the first displacement member A4440 undergoes a change in posture (displacement in the front-rear direction). Therefore, it is possible to secure a large amount of displacement (amount of displacement in the front-rear direction) of the first displacement member A4440 in a range where the electrical board A416 is not formed (corresponding range in front view).

The mode of the decorative member A4550 is not limited at all. For example, it may be formed from a light-transmissive resin material, or may be formed from a resin material with low light-transmittance, and an LED or the like or an electric board may be arranged inside. Also, a through hole may be formed in the decorative member A4550 in the front-rear direction. This makes it possible to visually recognize the light emitted from the electrical board A416 through the through hole.

Next, referring to FIG. 386, the twenty-sixth embodiment will be described. In the twenty-second embodiment, the circular arc wall portion A464 is rotationally displaced along the displacement trajectory of the transmission protrusion A463, so that even after the transmission protrusion A463 is separated from the deformed slide member A455, the deformation of the deformed slide member A455 continues.
5 has been described, but in the twenty-sixth embodiment, a case where the displacement mode is not limited to rotation will be described. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

Figures 386(a) and 386(b) are front views of the displacement device A5000 in the twenty-sixth embodiment. FIG. 386(a) shows a state in which the displacement member A5001 of the displacement device A5000 is being displaced, and FIG. 386(b) shows a state where the displacement member A5001 is arranged at the end of the displacement.

The displacement device A5000 is configured to be slidable along a straight line and has a biasing member (not shown) (
A displacement member A5001 biased leftward by a coil spring or the like, and its displacement member A5
A transmission member A5002 to which a driving force for displacing 001 along the displacement direction is transmitted, a supported member A5003 rotatably supported at the end of the transmission member A5002, and a supported member A5003 A thin-walled portion A that extends to one side in the rotational direction and is connected to each other from both ends of the
5004, a roller member A5005 disposed at the opposite end of the supported member A5003 to the supported end, and guide grooves A5006 and A5 in which the roller member A5005 is guided
007.

The guide grooves A5006 and A5007 are first grooves extending along the displacement direction of the displacement member A5001.
It is composed of an area A5006 and a second area A5007 deviating from the displacement direction of the displacement member A5001 with the end of the first area A5006 as a starting point. In this embodiment, the second area A
5007 is formed in an arc shape, but it is not limited to an arc shape as long as it deviates from the displacement direction of the displacement member A5001.

The action of the displacement device 5000 will be described. While the roller member A5005 is guided in the first area A5006 of the guide groove, the displacement member A5001 is pushed to the end of the transmission member A5002 (see FIG. 386(a)).

On the other hand, at the stage where the roller member A5005 is guided in the second area A5007 of the guide groove (see FIG. 386(b)), the portion that contacts the displacement member A5001 is switched to the thin portion A5004, and in this state, the displacement member A5001 leftward displacement can be regulated.

In addition, the outer shape of the thin portion A5004 is adjusted to the second region A50 of the guide groove by the roller member A5005.
07, the position of the displacement member A5001 remains unchanged in at least one section (
The contact position of the displacement member A5001 remains unchanged in the displacement direction of the displacement member A5001, so that the displacement of the displacement member A5001 during the displacement of the transmitted member A5003 can be restricted in the above-described one section. .

In addition, when the thin portion A5004 is configured to be deformable so as to collapse toward the supported member A5003, the repulsive force of the deformed thin portion A5004 and the urging force applied to the displacement member A5001 are balanced. Displacement member A5001 can be maintained. Thereby, even after the abutment between the supported member A5003 and the displacement member A5001 is released, the displacement of the displacement member A5001 can be suppressed.

Next, the twenty-seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 387 and 388. FIG. 22nd
In the embodiment, the case where the wiring HC is loosely wound around the fastening portion A475 and supported so as not to fall off from the fastening portion A475 has been described.
A case where the wiring HC is supported so as to be relatively displaceable by the wiring guide member A6560 supported so as to be displaceable to 0 will be described. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

Figures 387(a), 387(b) and 388 are rear views of the rear unit BU in the twenty-seventh embodiment. In FIG. 387(a), the state in which the second displacement member A490 is arranged at the retracted position, and in FIG.
87(b) illustrates a state in which the second displacement member A490 is arranged at a position intermediate between the retracted position and the overhang position (rotated about 45 degrees). In addition, in FIGS. 387(a), 387(b) and 388, illustration of the rear plate portion A480 is omitted in order to facilitate understanding of the structure of the rear unit BU.

As shown in FIGS. 387(a), 387(b) and 388, in this embodiment, the fastening portion A475 (see FIG. 356) is not formed, and instead the wire guide member A6560 is connected to the support box portion A6470. It is supported between the rear plate portion A480 (see FIG. 359).

The wiring guide member A6560 is rotatably supported at its upper end by at least one of the support box portion A6470 and the rear plate portion A480. In this embodiment, the rear plate portion A480 is inserted in a state in which the columnar support protrusion A6471d protruding toward the back side of the support box portion A6470 is inserted into the through hole formed in the upper end portion of the wiring guide member A6560. By fixing, the wiring guide member A656
0 is rotatably supported by the support protrusion A6471d.

The wiring guide member A6560 is formed in a long plate shape, and is arranged to face the back surface of the support box portion A6470 with a space therebetween, and the front from the lower end portion of the main body plate portion A6561 and the middle portion of the body plate portion A6561. A plurality of projecting portions A6562 projecting to the side (supporting box portion A6470 side) are provided.

The body plate portion A6561 is arranged close to the rear plate portion A480. As a result, the main body plate portion A6
Since the space on the front side of 561 can be increased, a large arrangement space for the wiring HC can be secured. Therefore, it is possible to avoid applying an extra load to the wiring HC.

In addition, since the main body plate portion A6561 is arranged between the wiring HC and the rear plate portion A480, it is possible to prevent the wiring HC and the rear plate portion A480 from rubbing against each other. In particular, in this embodiment, the wiring HC is guided toward the rear side (the rear plate portion A480 side) by the ridge portion A491d2 and the binding band KB, and the position therebetween (position sandwiched in the left-right direction). Since the main body plate portion A6561 is arranged in the rear plate portion A480, the main body plate portion A6561 can be arranged between the wiring HC and the rear plate portion A480 at a position where the wiring HC is closer to the rear plate portion A480.
Rubbing between the wiring HC and the rear plate portion A480 can be effectively suppressed.

Further, by setting the position where the wiring HC is pressed against the rear plate portion A480 side to overlap with the main body plate portion A6561, the main body plate portion A6561 is displaced in the direction along the displacement in synchronization with the displacement of the wiring HC. It can make it easier for the situation to occur. In this case, the absolute value of the relative displacement between the wiring HC and the main body plate portion A6561 can be reduced, so the occurrence of rubbing can be suppressed. Therefore, the wear of the wiring HC can be prevented, and the durability of the wiring HC can be improved.

A displacement mode of the wiring guide member A6560 will be described. In the state shown in FIG. 387(a), the wiring guide member A6560 is arranged at the limit position on the retracted position side. In the state shown in FIG. 387(b), although the second displacement member A490 starts to displace, the displacement of the board-side connector A493c in the horizontal direction is small and the displacement in the vertical direction is large. It occurs vertically. Therefore, the wiring guide member A6560 maintains the posture shown in FIG. 387(a).

In the state shown in FIG. 387(b), the upward displacement of the wiring HC
6562. That is, the projecting portion A6562 can function as a portion that regulates the vertical displacement limit of the wiring HC.

In the state shown in FIG. 388, the board-side connector A 493c is mainly displaced in the left-right direction, so the wiring HC is also displaced in the left-right direction.
The posture of 6560 changes. In this case, the wiring HC is placed on the wiring guide member A with a margin.
6560, the lower limit of its displacement can be defined by the projecting portion A6562 on the lower side. Therefore, the wiring HC is overstretched, and the pinion A517 and the reinforcing arm A5
It is possible to prevent it from entering (drooping down) to the 18 side.

In this way, the portion where the wiring HC is wound (projecting portion A656 on the tip side of the main body plate portion A6561)
By configuring the arrangement of 2) to be variable, the design length of the wiring HC can be reduced compared to the case where the arrangement of the portion where the wiring HC is wound is fixed (fastening portion A475, see FIG. 356(a)). can be shortened.

As a policy of changing the arrangement of the portion where the wiring HC is wound (protruding portion A6562 on the tip side of the main body plate portion A6561), to explain from another viewpoint, the displacement from FIG. 387(a) to FIG. 387(b) is The board-side connector A493c is displaced so as to approach the projecting portion A6552 (wiring H
387(b) to FIG. Set department A
6552, the board-side connector A493c is displaced (the wiring HC
6552), the portion of the wire HC wound around the protruding portion A6552 is displaced to the tightening side. In this embodiment, the wiring guide member A6560 is shown in FIG.
) and FIG.

For this reason, the wire guide member A6560 suppresses the displacement of the wire HC to the tightened side when the portion of the wire HC wound around the projecting portion A6552 is displaced to the tightened side (
It can be said that the wiring HC is displaced to the widening side. As a result, it is possible to prevent the radius of curvature of the portion of the wiring HC wound around the protruding portion A6552 from becoming excessively small, thereby preventing excessive deformation (bending, chipping, etc.) of the wiring HC. .

According to this embodiment, the wiring guide member A6560 that is disconnected from the second displacement member A490
is displaced as the wiring HC is displaced. Therefore, for example, it is a member that interlocks with the wiring guide member A6560, and is arranged so that the player can visually recognize it in any of the states of FIG. 387(a), FIG. By arranging the decorative member on the side of the symbol display device 81 (the right side of FIG. 387(a)), the decorative member displaced by the displacement of the wiring HC can be used to perform an effect.

In this case, as described above, the second displacement member A490 and the wire guide member A6560 are not completely interlocked, and the wire guide member A6560 stops while the second displacement member A490 rotates 45 degrees from the retracted position. , the wiring guide member A6560 is configured to be displaced when the second displacement member A490 rotates further (because the displacement timing is shifted), it is as if the decorative member is the second displacement member A490. It can be visually recognized as if they are displaced independently.

For convenience of explanation, the wire HC is shown to be wound once (the wire passes through the pair of projecting portions A6562 twice), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a plurality of protrusions A
The wiring HC may pass through (not be wound) between the 6562 only once.

Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiments, the present invention is by no means limited to the above embodiments, and it will be easily understood that various modifications and improvements are possible without departing from the scope of the present invention. It can be inferred.

In each of the above embodiments, part or all of the configuration in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced with part or all of the configuration in another embodiment to form another embodiment.

In the first embodiment, the case where the tilting device 310 is pushed downward has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the state in which the tilting device 310 hangs downward may be the initial position, and the tilting device 310 may be pushed up. In this case, the force of returning the tilting device 310 to the initial position can be provided by gravity, so that the torsion spring 3
15 can be dispensed with.

In the first embodiment, the case where the voice coil motor 352 is driven after the tilting device 310 has moved to the end of the push has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the voice coil motor 352 may be driven in advance when the tilting device 310 is in the first state. In this case, the load required to push the tilting device 310 from the first state can be increased, and the change in the load can be used for effects (for example, a "button that cannot be pushed" effect can be performed. can).

In this case, even if the voice coil motor 352 has moved to the end of the operation (the end of the extension operation), the voice coil motor 352 cannot move because of the dimensional relationship that causes a slight gap between the voice coil motor 352 and the lower frame member 320 . and the lower frame member 320 are preferably arranged. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of an impact sound due to the collision with the lower frame member 320 when the voice coil motor 352 operates. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from noticing that the voice coil motor 352 is protruding in advance, and it is possible to make the player aware that the tilting device 310 is in the state of "the button that cannot be pushed" only after the tilting device 310 is pushed. can.

In the first embodiment, the case where the engaging rib 344c of the disk cam 344 and the connecting pin 344d are fixed relative to each other has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the engagement rib 344c may be configured as a separate member and configured to rotate relative to the disc cam 344 . In this case, for example, it is possible to change the position of the connecting pin 344d in a state where the first projecting portion 344c1 and the engaging portion 346d are in contact with each other. It is possible to change the degree to which the tilting device 310 rises immediately after changing the posture of the rotating claw member 347 . Therefore, it is possible to form more operation states of the tilting operation of the tilting device 310 than in the first embodiment.

In addition, the operating state of the tilting device 310 can be sequentially switched (the rising end can be sequentially switched) by the driving mode in which the disc cam 344 is continuously rotated in the forward direction. As a result, by operating the drive motor 342 in one direction, it is possible to suppress deterioration of the drive motor 342 and perform a complex operation mode in which the tilting device 310 is sequentially switched to a raised position.

In the third embodiment, the voice coil motor 352 that applies the driving force to the tilting device 310
Although the case where the operation timing of is controlled by the operation speed and the operation direction of the tilting device 310 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the driving mode of the drive motor 5411 that drives the weight member 5412 to rotate may be controlled by the operating speed and the operating direction of the tilting device 310 . For example, until the tilting device 310 reaches the end of pushing (
During the downward movement), the driving motor 5411 is fixed in such a posture that the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 is arranged above the rotation axis, and immediately before the tilting device 310 reaches the pushing end and immediately before it starts to move upward. , the driving motor 5411 may start rotating. In this case, the repulsive force pushing back the tilting device 310 can be reduced while the tilting device 310 is repeatedly pushed, and the repulsive force pushing back the tilting device 310 can be increased when the tilting device 310 starts to move upward. .

In the fifth embodiment, the case where the housing member 5430 is fixed to the bottom plate portion 5321 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, if the tilting device 310 has a housing member 543
0 may be fixed and the vibrating device 5400 may be operated therein. tilting device 31
0, the projecting leg portion 5424 is fixed to the bottom plate portion 5321, for example.
, and the projecting leg portion 5424 is pressed against the bottom plate portion 5321 when the tilting device 310 is moved downward to the end of the push, so that the shape of the flexible member 5420 in the vibration device 5400 is changed to switch whether or not the weight member 5412 can come into contact with the housing member 5430 .

In this case, the flexible member 5420 arranged inside the housing member 5430 moves in conjunction with the tilting operation of the tilting device 310, and at this time, the shape of the flexible member 5420 changes. The degree of change in the shape of the flexible member 5420 changes in conjunction with the tilting speed when the tilting device 310 is operated. By increasing the amount of deformation of the weight member 5412, a state in which the weight member 5412 abuts against the housing member 5430 can be formed. That is, the player can feel the vibration not only when the tilting device 310 is pushed to the push end, but also when the tilting device 310 is operated at high speed. It is possible to increase the variation of the production of.

For example, when the player operates the tilting device 310, the third symbol display device 81 displays "Press the button." A great chance.", it is possible to provide an effect for the player to specify how to press the button (tilting device 310). In this case, by setting whether or not the player presses the button (tilting device 310) in a designated way as a condition for transmitting the vibration to the player,
It is possible to increase the motivation of the player to operate the button (tilting device 310) in a designated manner of pressing, and prevent the button (tilting device 310) from becoming monotonous.

As for the degree of change in the shape of the flexible member 5420, the degree of pushing speed of the tilting device 310 may be reversed. That is, when the tilting speed of the tilting device 310 is slow, the amount of deformation of the flexible member 5420 becomes large, and the weight member 5412 and the housing member 5430 may be formed in a manner in which they can come into contact with each other. In this case, the slow pushing speed of the tilting device 310 can be a condition for the vibration generated by the vibrating device 5400 to be transmitted to the player, and the player is recommended to slow down the pushing speed of the tilting device 310. can do.
As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from pushing the tilting device 310 by force, and prevent a failure caused by pushing the tilting device 310 by force.

In the above-described fifth embodiment, a case has been described in which the player can feel the vibration generated by the vibrating device 5400 by pushing the tilting device 310, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, while the weight member 5412 of the vibrating device 5400 is arranged so as to be able to abut against the housing member 5430 when the tilting device 310 is not pushed in,
On the condition that the tilting device 310 is pushed to the end of movement, the weight member 5412 may be formed in such a manner that it cannot come into contact with the housing member 5430 . In this case, the tilting device 31
Vibration can be transmitted to the player in the state where 0 is not operated, and the performance can be lively.
By stopping the vibration when pressing the button, the player can see the change in the presentation mode (
To produce a feeling of premium that only the player who is playing the machine can perceive the change in the performance mode, excluding the surrounding players, because the difference in expectations can be recognized. can be done.

As a variation of the effect, when the player pushes the tilting device 310, the weight member 5412 and the housing member 5430 are arranged so that they cannot contact each other.
It is desired that both the 412 and the housing member 5430 are arranged so that they can continuously contact each other. For example, two different cases can occur due to the difference in the direction of rotation of the weight member 5412 .

In the above-described fifth embodiment, the disc cam 5344 is axially tilted and deformed so that the disc cam 5344
Although the case where frictional force is generated by contact between 44 and release member 346 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the plate portion of the main body member 341 in which the shaft support hole 341b is formed partially protrudes toward the disk cam 5344, and is configured to abut when the disk cam 5344 is axially tilted and deformed. can be In this case, since the main body member 341 is not a moving part, a greater frictional force is ensured between the disc cam 5344 and the disc cam 5344 than when the disc cam 5344 and the operable releasing member 346 are in contact with each other. be able to. Therefore, the load applied to the arm member 345 connecting the disk cam 5344 and the tilting device 310 can be sufficiently reduced.

In the above-described eighth embodiment, a case has been described in which both of the board support devices 600 arranged above and below the inner frame 12 are configured to be able to abut against the front frame 14, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, only one of the upper and lower board support devices 600 may be configured to contact the front frame 14 . For example, at the upper position, the portion of the multifunctional cover member 171 that interferes with the board support device 600 may be chamfered so that it does not come into contact with the board support device 600 arranged at the upper position.

In the eighth embodiment, when the game board 13 is attached to the board support device 600, the game board 13
Although the case in which the vertical position of is not changed has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the support bottom portion 12c that supports the lower end surface of the game board 13 is configured as an inclined surface that slopes down toward the front side, and the front side end portion of the support bottom portion 12c is the board surface support device 60 in the released state.
0 may be arranged below the upper surface of the rear side extension plate 621c. In this case, when the game board 13 is placed on the board support device 600 in the released state, the game board 13 is supported by the rear side extension plate 621c, and the game board 13 is supported in the process of fixing the board support device 600 therefrom. 13 can ride on the support bottom 12c. Therefore, the height at which the game board 13 is placed on the board support device 600 in the released state can be made lower than the height at which the game board 13 is fixed. Efficiency can be improved.

In the eighth embodiment described above, the case where the foul ball passage portion 145 is configured as a passage that bends to the left and right has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be bent back and forth, or a combination of bending back and forth and left and right. In this case, the ball guide opening 5
Directly behind 3, it is preferable to form a long path in the front and rear direction because the ball can be ejected smoothly. In addition, by making the path curved back and forth, the range of the foul ball passage portion 145 along the surface of the game board 13 can be narrowed, thereby preventing interference between the launch path and the foul ball passage portion 145. can be made easier.

In the eighth embodiment, the case where the light guide member 540 is curved so that the position facing the opening 524 is concave has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. for example,
A convex surface may be formed at a position facing the opening 524 . In this case, the light reaching the player through the opening 524 is faintly visible. Moreover, the light guide member 540 does not need to be curved vertically, and for example, a curved portion and a straightly extending portion may be mixed in the vertical position.

In the above-described eighth embodiment, the passage forming ribs 467 and 487 form a vertically curved path, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the bending direction of the path may be left or right, or may be a combination of up, down, left and right.

In the eighth embodiment, a case has been described in which the auxiliary convex portion 481Ha of the rear assembly 480 contacts the inner surface 461Hi of the front assembly 460 in the thickness direction, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the auxiliary convex portion 481Ha and the inner side surface 461Hi form the back side wall portion 461H.
It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which they are spaced apart by the diameter of the speaker connection line 453 in the thickness direction. in this case,
Since the speaker connection wire 453 can be clamped between the auxiliary convex portion 481Ha and the inner side surface 461Hi, the clamping resistance exerts a load on the speaker connection wire 453 in the direction of pulling it out of the speaker assembly 450. Even if it is hung, the speaker connection line 4
53 can be prevented from coming off the speaker 451 .

Further, the auxiliary projection 481Ha abuts on the inner side surface 461Hi in the thickness direction of the rear side wall portion 461H within a projection length range corresponding to the recess depth of the wiring passage recess 464, but the projection beyond that contacts the inner side surface 461Hi. In the range of length, a step may be formed in the middle such that the inner side surface 461Hi and the rear side wall portion 461H are separated from each other by the diameter of the speaker connection line 453 in the thickness direction. In this case, the range where the rear side wall portion 461H and the front side wall portion 481H form a double wall is sufficiently secured, and the speaker connection line 453 can be sandwiched while suppressing sound leakage.

In the eighth embodiment, the speaker assembly 450 constitutes a double bass reflex speaker in which the base end side body portion 461B and the tip end side body portion 461T correspond to the speaker chambers, and the intermediate body portion 461M corresponds to the duct. has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by extending the width of the intermediate body portion 461M in the front-rear direction to the same extent as that of the proximal side body portion 461B and the distal side body portion 461T, the proximal side body portion 461B and the intermediate body portion 461
A large speaker room may be configured jointly by M and the tip side body portion 461T.

Also, although the base end side main body portion 461B has a larger volume than the distal end side main body portion 461T, the size relationship may be reversed, and the capacities may be the same. speaker 45
The arrangement of 1 is not limited to the left and right ends, but may be at the center in the left and right direction, or may be between the left and right ends and the center in the left and right direction.

In the eighth embodiment, the rib portions 467a to 467a to 467a constituting the passage forming ribs 467 and 487
67e, 487a to 487e, the adjacent ribs are in the left-right direction (the direction connecting the proximal side main body portion 461B and the distal side main body portion 461T, the opening of the opening formed by the front side recessed portion 471 and the rear side recessed portion 491) A direction intersecting the direction) has been described, but the case is not necessarily limited to this. For example, adjacent rib portions (for example, rib portion 467d and rib portion 467c) may be configured to overlap each other when viewed in the horizontal direction. In this case, the path inside the speaker assembly 450 can be bent like a maze.
1 and the rear side recessed portion 491 to insert a fine metal wire such as a piano wire into the opening formed by the rear recessed portion 491, and to make it difficult to commit a fraudulent act of intruding the tip of the wire into the game area, and to prolong the time required for the fraudulent act. Unauthorized acts can be suppressed. In addition, here, suppression of fraud means suppression of fraud itself and gaining fraudulent profit from fraud (successful fraud).
is exemplified.

In the eighth embodiment described above, the fourth gear 880G of the loose fitting device 880 interlocks with the third gear 810G of the slit member 810 via the intermediate gear 808, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the intermediate gear 808 is connected to the second gear 830 of the rotating plate 830
G and the fourth gear 880G of the loose fitting device 880 may be meshed. in this case,
Since the rotating plate 830 and the loose fitting device 880 can be interlocked, the loose fitting device 880 can be rotated not only during the rotating operation of the petal motion device 800 but also during the spreading operation and the gathering operation. can. As a result, the petals 802 can be slid in the radial direction and the decorative member 884 can be rotated at the same time, thereby improving the presentation effect.

Although the loose fitting device 880 is configured as a device that rotates coaxially with the rotary plate 830, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be configured to expand and contract as the rotating plate 830 rotates, or may rotate on an axis different from the rotation axis of the rotating plate 830 .

In the eighth embodiment, a case has been described in which the second effect member 940 operates by transmitting a driving force through the slide plate 930 that slides according to the operation of the drive arm member 910, but this is not necessarily the case. It is not something that can be done. For example, by connecting the upper part of the support base 801 of the petal motion device 800 and the tip of the second effect member 940, the second effect member 940 is operated based on the displacement of the petal motion device 800. can be In this case, the slide plate 930 can be omitted.

In the above eighth embodiment, when the board surface support device 600 arranged on the lower side of the inner frame 12 is in a fixed state, the case where the operation portion back surface member 155 and the game board 13 are separated above the opening/closing regulation portion 159 will be described. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the board surface supporting device 600 arranged on the lower side of the inner frame 12 is in a fixed state, the operation part back member 155 and the game board 13 are configured to contact each other in the front-rear direction above the opening/closing regulation part 159. Also good. In this case, even if the lower board surface support device 600 is in a fixed state, if the upper board surface support device 600 is not in a fixed state, the upper end of the game board 13 is displaced to the front side (game As the right side of the board 13 tilts toward the front side, the game board 13 is arranged to face the operation unit back member 155.
Since the portion is also displaced to the front side, the operation portion back member 155 and the game board 13 can interfere with each other. This prevents the front frame 14 from being closed with respect to the inner frame 12 .

In this case, when the game board 13 is installed on the inner frame 12 and the board surface support device 600 arranged on the lower side of the inner frame 12 is fixed, the board surface support device arranged on the upper side of the inner frame 12 6
00 is in a fixed state or not is determined by the relationship between the game board 13 and the operation part back member 155 arranged opposite to the board support device 600 on the lower side, and the board placed above the inner frame 12 When the support device 600 is not in a fixed state, the closing of the front frame 14 with respect to the inner frame 12 can be restricted. As a result, the function of determining the state of the board support device 600 installed on the upper side of the inner frame 12 can be removed from the multifunctional cover member 171, so that the degree of freedom in designing the multifunctional cover member 171 can be improved. can. For example, the multifunctional cover member 171 is recessed to a position where it does not come into contact with the board support device 600 regardless of the state of the board support device 600 (
be chamfered). In this case, the multifunctional cover member 171 made of synthetic resin collides with the board support device 600 made of metal, and the multifunctional cover member 171
Since the risk of breakage of the multifunctional cover member 171 can be reduced, the multifunctional cover member 171 can be used for a long period of time for other purposes (for example, as a wiring cover).

In the eighth embodiment, the case where the right panel unit 500 from which the light irradiated to the end surface of the light guide member 540 is emitted from both surfaces of the light guide member 540 is arranged at the right end and front side of the front frame 14 will be described. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be arranged inside the center frame 86 . In this case, for example, a state in which one surface of the right panel unit 500 is arranged on the front side and a case in which the other surface is arranged on the front side can be switched (for example, parallel to the longitudinal direction of the support plate portion 510). By configuring the right panel unit 500 to rotate about an axis, it is possible to switch the mode of the light irradiated to the center frame 86 . Also, the aspect of the light irradiated to the center frame 86 and the center frame 86
It is possible to diversify the production by switching the correspondence with the moving accessory that protrudes inward.

That is, for example, among the plurality of openings 524, only the LEDs 512a at the upper and lower positions corresponding to the uppermost opening 524 are made to emit light, and the right panel unit 500 is arranged such that one surface faces the front side and the other surface Consider switching between the case of being arranged on the front side and the case of being arranged on the front side. inner cover member 52
When the surface on the 0 side faces the moving accessory side, the moving accessory arranged opposite to the location corresponding to the uppermost opening 524 (the location near the end) emits light, while the outer cover member 560 side of the moving accessory emits light. When the surface faces the moving role, the moving role that is arranged to face the wide area of the opening 565 (wider range than the top opening 524) emits light. Therefore, by switching the posture of the right panel unit 500 without switching the LED 512a to emit light, it is possible to switch the light emitting position of the moving accessory.

In this case, for example, by moving the moving accessory in time with the timing of the change in the light-emitting part, it is possible to improve the presentation effect. For example, at the timing when the surface on the side of the inner cover member 520 faces the moving accessory, the surface on the side of the outer cover member 560 is reduced and changed so as to fit in the location corresponding to the uppermost opening 524, while the surface on the side of the outer cover member 560 faces the moving accessory. At the timing of turning the right panel unit 500, the moving accessory may be configured to expand and contract so as to expand (extend) in the longitudinal direction of the right panel unit 500. As a result, it is possible to change the position to emit light in accordance with the action of the moving accessory by switching the attitude of the right panel unit 500 while eliminating the need to switch the LED 512a that controls light emission.

In addition, in the right panel unit 500, the light emitted from the inner cover member 520 side is condensed (brightness increases, the amount of light increases, and the light emitted from the outer cover member 560 side becomes clear). Diffused (lower brightness, lower light intensity, faint emission). Therefore, by switching the posture of the right panel unit 500, the light emitting target (liquid crystal or moving accessory)
can change the light emission mode.

Furthermore, the right panel unit 500 is changed so that the front side end 551a of the outer lens member 550 faces the moving object or the liquid crystal (for example, when the right panel unit 500 is arranged on the front side of the moving object or the liquid crystal). , the front side end portion 551a of the outer lens member 550 is changed to a posture that is arranged on the back side of the support plate portion 510).
While irradiating light with a narrow width), it is possible to emit light over a wide range in a direction perpendicular to the direction toward the moving object or liquid crystal. As a result, it is possible to light up a wide range of positions away from the moving role and the liquid crystal while only the details of the moving role and the liquid crystal are illuminated.

In the ninth and tenth embodiments, foul ball passage portions 9145 and 10145
Although the case where the thread Y8 is cut by the sheet metal members 9150 and 10150 arranged in the above has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the sheet metal member is partially broken by the load from the thread Y8, and the broken portion is so fragile that it falls, and the detection sensor is arranged at a position through which the broken portion falls. Also good. In this case, due to the detection of the sheet metal member by the detection sensor, an alarm is issued and the launch of the ball is forcibly stopped. It is possible to minimize the profit (loss suffered by the gaming machine hall) obtained by a person who commits fraudulent acts.

In the twelfth embodiment, the case where the inclined surface 2803T is formed as an inclined surface has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, various configurations that improve frictional force may be added. For example, the frictional force may be improved by attaching a rubber sheet to the inclined surface 2803T, or by arranging a spike-shaped hard member (a member harder than the material of the slit member 810). The movement resistance may be improved by biting into the slit member 810 .

Further, for example, when the slide member 2820 is inclined with respect to the longitudinal direction of the central slit 814, the wall portions of the both side slits 815 arranged to face the inclined surface 2803T are provided with
A concave portion may be formed to the extent that the inclined surface 2803T can enter. In this case, it is possible to improve the motion resistance by inserting the inclined surface 2803T into the recessed portion.

In the sixteenth embodiment described above, by changing the shape of the recessed portion 2543 formed in each region of the light guide member 2540, the direction in which light travels can be changed to the direction in which the light is collected or the direction in which the light is spread. Although explained, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, upward concave portions 2543b and 2543e may be formed in all of the regions CCVIb to CCVIe. In this case, the direction of travel of the light emitted from both surfaces of the light guide member 2540 is the direction of each region CCVIb.
Since the direction is upwardly slanted in all of CCVIe, it is possible to make it easier for the light to travel toward the line of sight of a person walking to select a machine to play. As a result, the effect of attracting customers of the pachinko machine 8010 can be improved.

Further, for example, regions CCVIc and CCV that are regions for emitting light to the inner lens member 530
A downward concave portion 2543c may be formed in Ie, and an upward concave portion 2543b may be formed in regions CCVIb and CCVId, which are regions for emitting light to the outer lens member 550. FIG. In this case, the light that travels in the opposite direction to the player playing pachinko 8010, and the light that is emitted to the outer lens member 550 is inclined upward. While it is possible to make it easier for the light to travel toward the height of the line of sight of the person walking on the floor, the light that travels toward the player side and is emitted to the inner lens member 530 is in a downwardly inclined direction. Therefore, for example, it is possible to illuminate the ball stored in the upper plate 17 with light to make the ball look gorgeous. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the players playing the game while improving the effect of attracting customers of the pachinko machine 8010 .

In the seventeenth embodiment, the case where the protruding shaped portion 6413 and the recessed shaped portion 6414 are formed near the left-right center has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the position may be changed according to the arrangement of the operation device 10300. FIG.

Moreover, both the one formed corresponding to the arrangement of the operation device 10300 and the one formed near the left-right center may be provided. That is, the projecting shape portion 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414 for coping with the operation load of the operation device 10300 and the problem of the front frame 10014 alone (
A protruding shape portion 6413 and a recessed shape portion 6414 may be separately provided in order to cope with ease of holding, durability, etc.).

In the seventeenth embodiment, a case has been described in which the operation device 10300 configured to be operable by the player is disposed above the projecting shape portion 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414 so as to be assembled (replaceable). It is not limited to this. That is, anything can be used as long as it can be assembled (exchanged). For example, it may be a sound device such as a speaker box that outputs sound, a vibrating device that is configured to be unoperable by the player and performs vibration effects, an illumination board that performs light emission effects, or a board box. It may be something that is not directly intended to be visually recognized by the player.

In the seventeenth embodiment, the case where the protruding shape portion 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414 are formed in a groove shape extending in the front-rear direction has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, triangular or circular recesses and protrusions may be formed when viewed from above. In this case, a plurality of concave portions and convex portions may be formed, and the size of each concave portion and convex portion is designed based on the amount of the operation load applied to the operation device 10300 and the frequency with which the load is applied. can be

Moreover, even if it has the same groove shape, a plurality of grooves may be formed. In this case, by forming a large number of grooves while narrowing the width of the grooves, the effect of reducing the contact area with the operation device 10300 is the same as in the case where one wide groove is formed. can be done. When forming a plurality of grooves, each groove does not necessarily have to extend in the front-rear direction.
It may be formed radially when viewed from above.

In the seventeenth embodiment, the projecting portion 6413 projects below the outer shape of the front frame 10014 so that it can be used as a finger hook when carrying the front frame 10014. However, this is not necessarily the case. It is not something that can be done. For example, the gap between the lower surface of the plate-like support portion 6426 and the recessed shape portion 6414 may be formed vertically longer than the finger of the operator who carries the front frame 10014 . In this case, the lower surface of the plate-like support portion 6426 and the concave shape portion 64 .
14 (can be used as a finger hook), the front frame 10014 can be easily carried.

In the seventeenth embodiment described above, the case where the resin member 6427 is arranged below the operation device 10300 to soften the transmission of the load of the operation device 10300 has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be a member (coil spring, torsion spring, etc.) that produces an elastic biasing force, or a device for damping vibration, such as a damper.

In the seventeenth embodiment, the case where the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are fastened and fixed to the upper tray 17 and the lower tray unit 6400 has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 may be connected to the upper tray 17 and the lower tray unit 6400 via a floating mechanism. In this case, even if the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 lack softness and flexibility, it is possible to suppress transmission of the load generated in the operation device 10300 to the upper tray 17 and the lower tray unit 6400 .

In the seventeenth embodiment, the case where the lever member 10340 is rotationally driven around the lever support shaft 10331d1 by the drive motor has been described, but various modes of the drive motor are exemplified. For example, the load may be transmitted from the rotary gear rotated by the drive motor to the lever member 10340 by load transmission of a simple gear mechanism, or a mechanism that does not rely on the gear mechanism (for example, a rotating cam) may be interposed in the transmission path. The load may be transmitted to the lever member 10340, or the load may be transmitted to the lever member 10340 via the movable clutch 343c and the transmission gear 343b.
By transmitting the load to 0340, it may be configured to be idling when an overload occurs.

In the seventeenth embodiment, the case where the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are fastened and fixed in a direction perpendicular to the plane on which the load is applied during operation of the operation device 10300 has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, if there is an operation part that does not operate on the plane (for example, if there is an operation part that pushes in the left and right diagonal directions), the balance (average) of the operation direction of each operation part is The detected direction (for example, an intermediate angle direction) may be set as the fastening direction, or the fastening direction may be set for the operation portion where the operation instruction is frequently given (ignoring the operation portion where the operation instruction is rare). You can set the direction. As a result, it is possible to suppress the loosening of the fastening due to the load during operation.

In the seventeenth embodiment described above, the case where the front left cover 10321 and the front right cover 10322 are joined by fastening has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, it may be combined with an adhesive material, or may be combined by fitting by conforming shapes.

In the seventeenth embodiment, the case where the direction of high rigidity of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 (vertical direction) is aligned with the vibration direction of the vibration device 10366 has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. . For example, the vibrating direction of the vibrating device 10366 may be the horizontal direction. In this case, the shape of the front left cover 10321 and the front right cover 10322 can be easily changed due to the vibration of the vibrating device 10366. Therefore, it is possible to dynamically change the design around the operation device 10300 when the vibration is generated. can. Moreover, the mode of the vibrating device 10366 is not limited at all. For example, it may be a direct acting type represented by a voice coil motor or the like, a rotary type represented by a vibrator or the like, or a combination thereof.

Further, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 may be made of transparent resin material instead of opaque resin. In this case, by irradiating the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 with light emitted from a predetermined irradiation device, the left front cover 1
0321 and the shape of the right front cover 10322 are changed, the appearance of the light seen through the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be changed.

In the seventeenth embodiment, the case where the right and left muscle portions D24a are formed with different inclinations to easily suppress bending regardless of the arrangement of the swing operation member 10310 has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, by setting the inclination angles of the left and right muscle portions D24a to be the same regardless of the position, there is a difference in the degree of rigidity between the direction in which the rigidity is improved by the left and right muscle portions D24a and the direction in which the rigidity is weakened. can make a big difference.

In this case, for example, by setting the formation direction of the left and right muscle portions D24a along the direction Y17a, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10321 and right front cover 10321 and right front cover 10321 and right front cover 10321 and right front cover 10321 and right front cover 10321 and right front cover 10321 and right front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10321 and the front right cover 10321 and 10321 and 10321 and 10321 and 10321 and 10321 and 10321 and 10321 and 10321 and the front right cover 100, and 10321 and 103210. While suppressing the deflection of the cover 10322, the deflection of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 due to the vibration generated by the vibration device 10366 when the swing operation member 10310 is arranged in the downward position is increased. be able to. That is, by changing the arrangement of the swing operation member 10310, the front left cover 10321 and the front right cover 10321 and the front right cover 10321 caused by the vibration of the vibrating device 10366
The degree of flexing of 0322 can be different.

Conversely, the formation direction of the left and right muscle portions D24a may be the direction along the direction Y17b.
In this case, when the swing operation member 10310 is arranged in the downward position, the vibration device 1036
While suppressing the deflection of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 due to the vibration generated by 6, the left front cover 10366 suppresses the deflection due to the vibration generated by the vibration device 10366 when the swing operation member 10310 is arranged in the upward position. Cover 10321 and right front cover 103
The deflection of 22 can be increased. That is, by changing the arrangement of the swing operation member 10310, the degree of bending of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 caused by the vibration of the vibration device 10366 can be varied.

In the seventeenth embodiment, the case where the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324 can be removed from the inner case member 10330 and the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be easily attached has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. It is not something that can be done. For example, left cover member 10323 and right cover member 10324 are integrally formed with inner case member 10330, and left front cover 10321 and right front cover 1 are mounted thereon.
0322 may be assembled. In this case, when assembled to the inner case member 10330, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be easily assembled by bending, and after the subsequent assembly to the front frame 10014, the bending of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 is suppressed. By doing so, the displacement suppressing effect due to the interference between the projecting interference portion 6805a and the inner edge portion Rm1 can be effective.

In the seventeenth embodiment, the case where the plate-like projecting portion 6453R of the V-shaped design member 6450 abuts on the plate-like support portion 6426 above and below has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a fastening portion into which a fastening screw is screwed in the front-rear direction is formed at the position of the plate-like projecting portion 6453R, and the fastening screw is a plate extending above the plate-like support portion 6426 corresponding to the fastening portion. You may comprise so that it may be inserted in the insertion hole formed in a part. In this case, the plate-like support portion 642
Not only during the upward displacement of 6, but also during the downward displacement, the V-shaped design member 645
0, and the load can be distributed.

In the seventeenth embodiment, the V-shaped design member 6450 has a gap between the main body portion 6451 and the upper facing portions 6455b and 6456b so that the covers 10321 and 103 into which the covers 10321 and 103 are inserted.
22, the case where it is formed with a thickness that allows fitting (a dimensional relationship with almost no gap) has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the thickness dimension of the covers 10321 and 10322 to be inserted may be smaller than the dimension of the gap (they may be configured so that the gap between the members is formed during assembly). In this case, when the displacement of the covers 10321 and 10322 (the displacement of the operation device 10300) is smaller than the gap between the members, the covers 10321 and 10322 and the V-shaped design member 6450 are prevented from coming into contact (collision). Therefore, generation of powder (dust) can be suppressed.

In the seventeenth embodiment, the case where the flange portion 6582 is formed in the shape of a flat plate has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the opposing plate portion 6 of the partition member 6560 is formed with a hook-shaped cross-sectional shape projecting downward from the front side edge of the flange portion 6582 .
561 may be formed in a shape that mates with that shape so that they fit together during assembly. In this case, with the partition member 6560 positioned at the assembled position, the partition member 65
60 can be prevented from separating from the back supporting member 6580 to the front side.

In the seventeenth embodiment, the opposite side surfaces of the enlarged hole 6562a are inclined with respect to the front-rear direction in a cross-sectional view. It is not something that can be done. For example, only one of the side surfaces may be inclined, or both side surfaces may be curved.

In the seventeenth embodiment, the transparent covering member 654 made of colorless and transparent resin material
By making it possible for a player who visually recognizes the lower edge plate-shaped portion 6548a of No. 8 to visually recognize the color of the milky white member 6541 and the partition member 6560 arranged behind it, the lower edge plate-shaped portion 6548a and the box-shaped portion are made visible. Although the case where the lower edge of the light receiving portion 6546 is configured to be easily visible as a series of regions has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by forming the transparent covering member 6548 by two-color molding, the lower edge plate-like portion 6548a may be formed milky white in advance.

In the seventeenth embodiment described above, the plate guide unit 6550 is fastened with a fastening screw whose fastening direction is inclined downward toward the front side, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be fastened with a fastening screw whose fastening direction is inclined downward toward the rear side. This fastening direction can be arbitrarily set according to the arrangement space required by the parts arranged near the fastening position and the selection of the side on which displacement is desired to be suppressed.

In the seventeenth embodiment described above, a configuration in which a compressive force is generated between the partition member 6560 and the back support member 6580 due to deformation of the upper lid member 6510 has been described, but the configuration is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the partition member 6560 may be configured to be driven such that its front-to-rear width can be changed so that the degree of compressive force that can be generated as the upper lid member 6510 deforms can be changed.

That is, if the partition member 6560 is driven to shorten the front-to-rear width by displacing the back side edge of the partition member 6560 toward the front side, the partition member 6560 and the back support member 6580 can be aligned even if the upper lid member 6510 is deformed. A gap can still occur between them, and compressive forces can be less likely to occur. Since the compressive force is less likely to be generated, the extent to which the electrical board 6570 is held can be reduced, so that the degree of displacement of the electrical board 6570 can be changed in a situation where the upper cover member 6510 is similarly deformed.

In other words, by controlling the front-to-rear width of the partition member 6560, the behavior of the decorative substrate 6570 can be changed in a situation where the upper lid member 6510 may be deformed. It is possible to change the appearance of the emitted light.

Note that the front-to-rear width of the partition member 6560 is normally shortened (a space is left between the partition member 6560 and the rear surface support member 6580), and the front-to-rear width is widened by drive control so that the partition member 6560 and the rear surface support It may be configured to change the situation in which a compressive force can be generated between the member 6580 and the member 6580 .

In the seventeenth embodiment, the case where the partition member 6560 and the back support member 6580 that sandwich and support the electrical board 6570 are stacked on the front side of the front frame 10014 has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. do not have. For example, the electrical board 6570 is attached to the back support member 6
580, or the electric board 6570 is the partition member 6560 (acoustic device 6
610), or the electrical board 6570 may be fixed to the partition member 6
It may be inserted (fixed) in the light-receiving projecting portion 6521b of the transparent cylindrical member 6521 inserted in the 560 . In either case, transmission of vibration from the acoustic device 6610 to the electrical board 6570 can be suppressed.

Further, the rear support member 6580 (and the acoustic device 6610) is fixed to the outer frame 11 or the inner frame 12 arranged on the rear side of the front frame 10014, while the partition member 6560 is fixed to the front frame 1
0014 may be fixed. In this case, by opening the front frame 10014, the rear support member 6580 and the partition member 6560 can be separated from each other.
In the closed state of 014, the electrical board 6570 sandwiched between the back supporting member 6580 and the partitioning member 6560 can be easily replaced or misaligned.

In the seventeenth embodiment, the plate portion of the acoustic device 6610 is arranged opposite to the head of the fastening screw, and when the fastening screw is loosened, vibration is transmitted and abnormal noise is generated. Although the case where it is possible to grasp is described, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when light travels near the head of a fastening screw and the fastening screw loosens, the shadow of the fastening screw may be visible from the front side. In this case, by checking the presence or absence of shadows, it is possible to grasp the occurrence of loosening of the fastening screw. can be made easier.

In the seventeenth embodiment described above, the case where the fastening direction of the fastening screw is inclined vertically with respect to the front-rear direction has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the direction may be tilted left and right with respect to the front-rear direction, or there may be portions tilted vertically or horizontally.

In the seventeenth embodiment, the long ribs 6734 and the fins 6735 have been described as extending linearly when viewed from the front, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be formed in a curved shape, or may be formed in a mesh shape or a lattice shape.

In the seventeenth embodiment, the case where the side surfaces of the long rib 6734 are made smooth to suppress the diffusion of light from the side surfaces has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, light leakage from the side surface may be prevented by attaching a light shielding tape to the side surface of the long rib 6734 . In this case, it is possible to easily suppress the decrease in the energy of light traveling to the fins 6735 . Also, a light shielding tape may be attached to the side surface of the fin 6735 . In this case, if the entire side surface is covered, the light at the edge of the front side can be emphasized, and if part of the side surface is covered (for example, by using light-shielding tape with polka-dot holes), Since the light can be visually recognized by the player as light conforming to the shape of the light shielding tape, it is possible to improve the presentation effect of the light traveling through the side surfaces of the fins 6735 .

In the seventeenth embodiment, the case where the long rib 6734 does not extend to the back side of the horizontal effect device 6700 on the left side of the pachinko machine 10010 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the long rib 6734 extends toward the back side, but the left and right ends may be formed so as not to be connected to the inner extending portion 6732 . In this case also, the intensity of light near the glass unit 16 can be suppressed.

In the seventeenth embodiment, the case where the light traveling along the longitudinal direction of the long rib 6734 is emitted from the front-side end portion of the fin 6735 to improve the effect of the light in the front view of the fin 6735 Although explained, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a shape (notch (cut) or the like) for emitting at least part of the light traveling through the fin 6735 from the side surface of the fin 6735 in the middle of the front-rear width of the fin 6735 may be formed.

For example, as shown in this embodiment, the fins 6735 are tilted so that the thickness of the fins 6735 gradually decreases toward the front side, so that the light reaches the front ends of the fins 6735. The fin 6735 may be configured so that the light can be easily emitted from the side surface of the fin 6735 by making it easy to repeatedly reach the side surface.

In the seventeenth embodiment, the case where the number of fastening positions of the curved plate member 6750 to the base member 6710 is reduced has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this.
For example, it may be fixed by fitting or meshing of claws based on the shape relationship. In this case, since the fastening screw can be eliminated, it is possible to prevent the shadow of the fastening screw from degrading the lighting effect.

In the eighteenth embodiment, the case where the electrical board 18830 slides under the influence of the vibration of the operation device 10300 has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a speaker box similar to the acoustic device 6610 may be arranged close to the back side of the connecting base member 18810, and the electrical board 18830 may be slid even by the vibration of this speaker box. In this case, since the vibration direction of the operation device 10300 (the direction along the direction Y17a) is different from the vibration direction of the speaker box (generally the front-rear direction), the displacement mode of the electrical board 18830 can be complicated.

In addition, by generating sound with a frequency outside the audible sound range from the speaker, a silent effect is executed in which the illumination board 18830 can be slid while maintaining a state in which the player cannot hear the sound. can do. At this time, the vibration of the electrical board 18830 is transmitted to the operation device 10300, so that the operation device 103
A player who touches 00 can grasp the vibration derived from the sound output from the speaker. As a result, for example, by controlling the silent effect to be executed when a change in circumstances that is advantageous to the player occurs, it is possible to increase the player's interest in touching the operation device 10300 .

In the eighteenth embodiment, the case where the electrical board 18830 is floatably (slidably) supported near the operation device 10300 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the electric decoration board 6570 of the presentation device 6500 may be supported so as to be floating. In this case, it may be fixed to the front frame 10014 and floatably supported by a rod member extending from the gap between the pair of left and right acoustic devices 6610 to the front side, or a rod member fixed to the wall of the acoustic device 6610. may be floatably supported. Moreover, the sliding direction is not limited to the vertical direction, and may be horizontal or oblique.

In the nineteenth embodiment, the case where the reference line X19 is along the vibration direction Y17a has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when a plurality of vibration directions Y17a are set, the reference line X19 may be arranged along any one of the vibration directions Y17a, or between the plurality of vibration directions Y17a (for example, an intermediate line). angle)) may be configured so that the reference line X19 is along the direction.

Considering the frequency of vibration and the frequency of operation of the lens member 10317, the reference line X1
Nine directions may be set. For example, when a plurality of vibration directions Y17a and operation directions are set in the first direction and other directions, the frequency of occurrence of vibration and operation in the first direction is extremely high, and vibration in the other directions is extremely high. or when the frequency of occurrence of the operation is low, the reference line X
By setting 19, it is possible to suppress loosening of the fastening screw that fastens and fixes the insertion hole 19321a and the fastening portion 19322a.

In the twenty-first embodiment, a case has been described in which the vibration of the vibrating device 21500 is difficult to be transmitted to the operation device 10300 side, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, to the operation device 10300 as well, the body portion 6411 of the covering base member 21410
It may be configured so that the vibration is transmitted to the same extent as the vibration transmission to the. In this case, the vibration device 2
Multiple objects can be vibrated by 1500 .

In the twenty-first embodiment, a case has been described in which the front portion of the projecting portion De3 against which the ridge portion 21522 is pressed due to the vibration of the vibrating device 21500 is formed in a plane perpendicular to the front-rear direction, but this is not necessarily the case. not a thing For example, the front portion of the protruding portion De3 may be formed as a flat surface that is vertically inclined with respect to the front-rear direction. In this case, the direction of the load applied from the overhang De3 to the vibrating device 21500 (normal direction of the front surface of the overhanging portion De3) is inclined with respect to the front-rear direction. A component in a direction intersecting the front-rear direction (vertical direction) can be added to the displacement of time (especially the displacement toward the front side). As a result, the vibration motor 21510 of the vibration device 21500 can be displaced in the vertical direction. 21534 (non-guiding direction intersecting with the guiding direction of 21534) can be configured, and the vibration mode can be complicated.

In the twenty-first embodiment, the protrusion 21534 of the covering cover member 21530 is formed along the longitudinal direction, which is the direction in which the vibration motor 21510 vibrates (the direction perpendicular to the rotation axis of the eccentric weight 21512). Although explained, it is not necessarily limited to this.
For example, the ridge 21534 may be formed along a direction that is inclined with respect to the front-rear direction, along a curved line, or along a line of arbitrary shape. . Thus, the direction in which the vibration motor 21510 and the covering member 21520 are guided by the protrusion 21534 when the vibrating device 21500 vibrates can be arbitrarily set.

In the twenty-first embodiment, the fastening portion 21457 of the V-shaped design member 21450 is fastened together through the support hole 21428 of the lower plate forming member 21420, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the length of the fastening portion 21457 is slightly increased, and the support hole 214 is
It may be configured so that the fastening force is not applied to 28 . This makes it difficult for the vibration of the vibrating device 21500 to be transmitted to the lower plate forming member 21420 through the plate portion having the support hole 21428, and the balls stored in the lower plate 50 vibrate as the vibrating device 21500 vibrates. Therefore, it is possible to execute the vibration presentation by the vibration device 21500 without making the player feel uncomfortable.

In the twenty-second embodiment, the case where the formation of the support plate portion A313 is omitted on the side of the rear case A310 on which the notch portion A312a is formed, and the end face is arranged opposite to the base plate A60 has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. It is not limited. For example, the formation of the support plate portion A313 may be maintained on the side where the notch portion A312a is formed. In this case, while maintaining the rigidity in the assembled state of the base plate A60 and the rear case A310, it is possible to maintain the effect that the boundary of the light seen through the base plate A60 of the game board A13 can be obscured. can.

In the twenty-second embodiment, the rear case A310 is formed in a box shape with an opening on the front side, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, rear case A3
10 may be composed of a plurality of members (as an assembly of divided members), or configured so that the outer edge is composed of a columnar portion extending from the bottom on the back side to the front side (no wall portion is formed). You can In this case, rigidity can be ensured by fastening and fixing the back case A310 to the third pattern display device 81 and other movable units (the first operation unit A400 and the second operation unit A700).

In the 22nd embodiment, the case where the portion adjacent to the game board A13 on the right side is formed not as a surface but as a line has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the linear portion may be formed on the left side. Further, when the linear portions are formed on both the left and right sides, the formation ratio (ratio) of one of the left and right may be made lower than that of the other.

In the twenty-second embodiment, the case where the metal plate member 75 is arranged on the outer peripheral side of the game board A13 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the metal plate is the outer edge member A7
3 may be arranged on the inner side (game area side). In this case, by forming the metal plate along the curved shape on the inner side of the outer edge member A73, the function of improving the rigidity of the game board A13 and the operation unit A300 with respect to the metal plate and the game area are increased. A function to guide the falling ball can be given. Alternatively, a gap may be provided inside the outer edge member A73, and a metal member may be arranged in the gap.

In the twenty-second embodiment, the case where the front protrusion A86f that can contact the game ball is projected from the back side of the game area toward the front side has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. . For example, a flange portion extending from the front end portion of the right flow path forming wall portion A86d of the center frame A86 to the game area side may be provided, and a ridge portion may protrude from the rear surface of the flange portion toward the rear surface side. In this case, even when the game ball flows down the position near the front side of the game area, the protrusion can be brought into contact with the game ball, so that the game ball can be efficiently decelerated.

In the twenty-second embodiment, the case where the front surface of the electrical board A416 and the protruding piece A417i do not abut against each other when the electrical board A416 is assembled to the board fixing plate A417 is explained. It is not necessarily limited to this. For example, decorative board A416
and the projecting piece A417i may be in contact with each other, or another member (for example, a flexible rubber-like member) may be interposed between the front surface of the electrical board A416 and the projecting piece A417i. The projecting piece A417i may be configured to transmit the load to the electrical board A416. As a result, the electrical board A416 can be stably supported.

In the twenty-second embodiment, the second area AC2 of the area of the diffusion plate A415 of the first operation unit A400 is arranged closer to the third pattern display device 81, and the plurality of first operation units A4
Although the case where the third pattern display device 81 is surrounded from above by the second area AC2 of 00 has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the second area AC2 may be configured to be scattered around the third pattern display device 81, or may be configured to be displaceable so that the second area AC2 reaches the front and rear of the third pattern display device 81. may be arranged, and may be configured in an arbitrary arrangement.

In the twenty-second embodiment, the case where the electrical board A445 is included in the first displacement member A440 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, an illumination board and a diffusion plate on which light-emitting means such as LEDs that irradiate light to the front side are arranged may be arranged in the guide plate portion A430 and the support plate portion A420. Thus, the arrangement of the first displacement member A440 can be configured to hide the light emitting means from the player.

Also, the first displacement member A440 may be configured to move on the front side of the electrical board A416 and the diffusion plate A415. Even with such a configuration, similar effects can be obtained. In this case, the first displacement member A440 may be configured so that the electrical board A445 is not provided. For example, one or more through-holes may be formed in the thickness direction of the first displacement member A440 so that light can pass through the through-holes. According to this, since the position of the through-hole changes due to the different arrangement of the first displacement member A440, it is possible to change the position where the light irradiated to the rear side of the first displacement member A440 leaks.

In the twenty-second embodiment, the first displacement member A440 is the electrical board A416 or the diffusion plate A41.
5 is displaced (does not cut through the electrical board A416 when viewed from the front), but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be displaced so as to pass through (cut through) the illumination board A416 or the diffusion plate A415 in a front view. Further, it is not necessary for the entire first displacement member A440 to enter the rear side of the diffuser plate A415 when viewed from the front, and a part of the first displacement member A440 is configured so as not to reach the rear side of the diffuser plate A415 when viewed from the front. can be

In the twenty-second embodiment, the case where the electrical board A445 is included in the first displacement member A440 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the first displacement member A4
40 may not be provided with the electrical board A445. In this case, by arranging the electrical board on the back side of the first displacement member A440 and irradiating light on the front side, the ventilation opening A443c of the rear lid portion A443 and the opening A442c of the interlocking plate portion A442 The light passing through can be configured to be visible to the player.

In the twenty-second embodiment, even after the transmission protrusion A463 of the pin-equipped gear A462 is separated from the deformed slide member A455, the displacement of the deformed slide member A455 is restricted by the arc wall portion A464 of the pin-equipped gear A462. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the arc wall portion A464 is not formed, the transmission protrusion A463
is located away from the deformed slide member A455, the arc wall portion A464
A shutter member configured as a separate member from the gear A462 with a pin protrudes to the position where was supposed to be arranged, and the displacement of the deformed slide member A455 is restricted by coming into contact with the shutter member. good.

In the twenty-second embodiment, a case has been described in which the plurality of guided protruding portions A455c arranged on the odd-shaped slide member A455 are displaced in the direction (right and left) crossing the direction A416x, but this is not necessarily the case. It is not limited. For example, a plurality of guided protrusions A45
5c may be arranged on the same straight line parallel to the direction A416x, or the direction A4
16x may be shifted in a direction that intersects with 16x. In either case, the posture of the deformed slide member A455 can be stabilized.

In the twenty-second embodiment, the case where the first displacement member A440 and the second displacement member A490 are displaced at different timings has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the length of the arcuate wall portion A464 of the gear with pin A462 from the transmission protrusion A463 is shortened (at the same time, the projecting plate portion A456a is lengthened so as not to interfere with contact with the arcuate wall portion A464).
By reducing the angular width of the deformed slide member A455 restricted by the arcuate wall portion A464, the first displacement member A440 is moved in synchronism with the displacement of the second displacement member A490 from the retracted position toward the extended position. It can be displaced from the extended position to the retracted position. At this time, by adjusting the length of the arc wall portion A464 so that the displacement of the first displacement member A440 is contained in the section where the posture of the first displacement member A440 is maintained, the first displacement member A440 and the second displacement member Interference with A490 can be avoided.

Also, in this case, after the first displacement member A440 is displaced to the retracted position, does it abut on the transmission projection A463, or does it abut on the end of the circular arc wall portion A464 opposite to the transmission projection A463? depends on the operating mode of the pinned gear A462, that is, the driving mode of the drive motor AMT1. That is, by controlling the driving speed of the drive motor AMT1 (either constant speed or variable speed) and the stop timing to be different, the stop position after the first displacement member A440 is displaced to the retracted position side can be changed to The deformed slide member A455 (deformed transmitted portion A456) can be different depending on whether the deformed slide member A455 abuts on the arcuate wall portion A464 or the transmitting protrusion A463.

In addition, here, the deformed slide member A455 (
It is assumed that the deformed transmitted portion A456) abuts on at least one of the arcuate wall portion A464 and the transmission protrusion A463, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, arc wall A
464 and the transmission projection A 463 are in a predetermined arrangement, the direction A
A fixed wall portion projecting toward the deformed slide member A455 (deformed transmitted portion A456) may be formed along 416x. In this case, the deformed slide member A455 (deformed transmitted portion A456) moves the arc wall portion A46 to the stop position after the first displacement member A440 is displaced to the retracted position side.
4, the case of contacting the transmission protrusion A463, and the case of contacting the fixed wall can be made different.

In the twenty-second embodiment, the wiring HC is arranged on the outer side of the rotating shaft of the second displacement member A490, but the arrangement is not necessarily limited to this. For example, reinforcement arm A518
may be formed in a cylindrical shape, and the wiring HC may pass through the cylindrical interior to reach the board-side connector A493c. In this case, the displacement of the second displacement member A490 can prevent the portion of the wiring HC arranged on the opposite side of the second displacement member A490 from being displaced (pulled) via the tube.

In the twenty-second embodiment, the wiring HC is wound around the fixed fastening portion A475, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a flexible member having the same shape as the fastening portion A475 and made of a flexible material may be fixed to the front side of the rear plate portion A480, and the wiring HC may be wound around the flexible member. Also, the number of flexible members need not be one, and may be plural. In this case, even if the wiring HC is excessively pulled and comes into contact with the flexible member, the deformation of the flexible member can alleviate the load on the wiring HC.

Further, the wire HC may be supported by a mere columnar portion (portion not used for fastening) instead of the fastening portion A475. In this case, there may be a gap (a gap narrower than the width of the wiring HC) between the columnar portion and the rear plate portion A480. In addition, the body box portion A471, the rear plate portion A480
Alternatively, a binding band that is loosely wound around a fixing portion separately formed on the wire guide member A6560 or the like may be used. In this case, the displacement of the wire HC can be absorbed by the displacement allowed for the binding band, so the load applied to the wire HC can be reduced.

Further, the fastening portion A475 may not be fixed, but may be configured to be displaceable along the displacement direction of the wiring HC. In this case, the direction of displacement is not limited to
Various aspects are illustrated.

Further, the displacement of the fastening portion A475 may occur in synchronization with the displacement of the first displacement member A440 and the second displacement member A490. For example, by displacing the second displacement member A490 in the opposite direction as it approaches the overhang position, it is possible to prevent the wiring HC from coming into the eyes of the player.

As for the method of displacing the fastening portion A475, the fastening portion A475 may be displaceably supported by the long hole, or the fastening portion A475 may be configured to tilt with the main body box portion A471 side as a fulcrum. In this case, it is preferable that the rear plate portion A480 is formed with a guide groove, a notch, or an interlocking portion so as to allow the displacement of the fastening portion A475 while maintaining the coupled state with the fastening portion A475.

Also, although the fastening portion A475 has been described as a portion around which the wiring HC is wound, the fastening portion A475 is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be configured as a pair of wall-like support walls formed on both upper and lower sides of the wiring HC to restrict passage of the wiring HC. In this case, the width of the range in which the wiring HC can be displaced can be defined by the support wall.

In the twenty-second embodiment, one end of the wiring HC is connected to the board-side connector A493c of the second displacement member A490 from the rear side, and the other end is arranged on the front side of the board-side connector A493c. Although the case where it is connected from the back side to the third connector A416e3, which is connected to the connector A416e3, is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the board to which the other end is connected may be arranged on the side surface of the rear case A310 so as to face inward. In this case, since the wiring HC can be connected to the substrate by extending it to the side surface of the back case A310, the length required to route the wiring HC to the front side can be omitted.

Further, for example, the substrate to which the other end is connected may be arranged on the rear plate portion A480 arranged on the back side of the substrate-side connector A493c. In this case, the length required to route the wiring HC to the front side can be omitted.

In the twenty-second embodiment, the drive motor AMT1 is driven (excited) in one direction to displace the second displacement member A490 from the retracted position to the extended position. However, this is not necessarily the case. do not have. For example, from the end surface of the plate portion A455e to be detected which abuts on the transmission protrusion A463, it is recessed toward the opposite arrangement portion A456b side, and the pin gear A462
may be configured so that the rotation angle of is allowed to exceed the sixth angle. In this case, since the in-phase member A465 can rotate from the fourth angle d14 beyond the allowable angle dd1, by driving (exciting) the drive motor AMT1 in one direction, the second displacement member A490 is moved from the retracted position. It can be displaced to the extended position and further displaced back to the retracted position. As a result, by switching the length for driving (exciting) the drive motor AMT1, the displacement mode of the second displacement member A490 can be changed from the mode in which the displaced state is maintained from the retracted position to the extended position, and the extended mode from the retracted position. After being displaced to the extended position, it is possible to switch between a mode in which the displacement is returned to the retracted position side.

In the twenty-second embodiment, the upper transmission path UL1 and the lower transmission path DL1 are described as paths through which driving force is transmitted by gears, but they are not necessarily limited to this. For example, a cam, a gear belt, or a direct-acting slider may be used.

In the twenty-second embodiment, a case has been described in which the electrical board A715 that irradiates the rotating body A720 with light is formed of a flat member, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. for example,
It may be configured as a sheet-like substrate that is formed in a sheet-like shape from a flexible material. in this case,
A substrate having a light emitting means for irradiating the rotating body A720 with light can be easily arranged on the circumference surrounding the rotating body A720.

In the twenty-second embodiment, the case where the rotating body A720 is arranged at a position always visible to the player has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, rotating body A7
20 may be configured to be movable to an invisible position where the player is invisible. In this case, the first rotating member A721 is moved to the second rotating member A7 while the rotating body A720 is arranged at the invisible position.
28 on the vertical axis (the second rotating member A728 is stopped), start synchronous rotation in that state, and move it to a position visible to the player while continuing to rotate. Attention can be drawn to the relative relationship between the rotating first rotating member A721 and the second rotating member A728. As a result, during the continuation of the rotation of the rotating body A720 when executing an effect that associates the relative relationship between the first rotating member A721 and the second rotating member A728 at the time of stop with information beneficial to the player (for example, the degree of expectation for a big win). attention to the rotating body A720 can be improved.

In the twenty-second embodiment, the case where the first operation unit A400 and the second operation unit A700 operate independently has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the effect unit A710 of the second action unit A700 can be tilted forward from the lower end,
When the second displacement member A490 of the first motion unit A400 is in the extended position, the effect unit A71
0 may be moved up and down to come into contact with each other and receive a load, so that the production unit A710 may change to an inclined posture. In this case, the arrangement of the second displacement member A490 makes it possible to execute an effect of changing the posture of the effect unit A710. In addition, the configuration in which the effect unit A710 can be tilted is not limited at all. For example, the production unit A710 and the lifting section may be connected by a flexible member, or may be configured to be pivotally supported by the lifting section.

In the twenty-second embodiment, the shell A722 is made of an impermeable material, and the first rotary member A
Although the case of shielding the light directed toward the central rotary member A724 in the initial state or the fourth state of 721 has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, shell A72
2 may be configured to have a light transmissive portion. As a result, the first rotating member A721
and the amount of light reaching the central rotating member A724 can be finely adjusted.

In the twenty-second embodiment, the case where the rotation axis of the annular gear member A723 meshing with the fixed gear SG intersects with the axis of the fixed gear SG has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the annular gear member A723 may have a rack shape extending linearly (corresponding to an infinite radius of curvature), or the rotating shaft of the meshed gear member may be arranged parallel to the fixed gear SG. . a first effect member in which the rotation axis of the meshed gear member intersects the axis of the fixed gear SG;
Complicated effects can be executed by combining the second effect member in which the rotating shaft of the meshed gear member is parallel to the axis of the fixed gear SG.

In the twenty-second embodiment, the case where the first area AC1 of the diffusion plate A415 is formed on the outer side of the operation unit A300 has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this.
For example, by forming the illumination board A416 in a C shape that is recessed from the outside toward the inside when viewed from the front, the first area AC1 is formed closer to the inner side of the operation unit A300, and the second area AC2 is formed into the operation unit. It may be formed at a position closer to the outer side of A300. In this case, the player's line of sight can be easily guided to a position closer to the outside of the action unit A300.

In the twenty-second embodiment, the case where the second rotating member A728 is irradiated with light from the left, right, and above has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, rotating body A72
0, and the light emitted from the light-emitting means such as an LED disposed on the electrical board is conducted to the second supporting portion A735 and supported by the second supporting portion A735. After reaching the second rotating member A728 and conducting the second rotating member A728, it may be visually recognized by the player. In this case, unlike the second supporting portion A735, the first rotating member A721
Since the first supporting portion A731 that supports the is hard to transmit light, it is possible to perform an effect of lighting the second rotating member A728 without lighting the first rotating member A721.

This assumes an effect that is difficult to achieve with the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a. That is, the optical axis KJ of the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a is directed toward the first rotating member A721, and the second rotating member A7 can be arranged between the first rotating member A721 and the light emitting means A715a.
28 transmits light, so that the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a passes through the second rotating member A728.
It is difficult to control so that it reaches only the first rotating member A721 and does not reach the first rotating member A721. Therefore, by conducting the second support portion A735 and allowing the light to reach the second rotating member A728, it is possible to perform an effect that is difficult to achieve with the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a.

In the twenty-second embodiment, the first rotating member A721 supported by the first supporting portion A731 arranged inside the rotating shaft is the second rotating member supported by the second supporting portion A735 arranged outside the rotating shaft. Although the case where it is arranged inside the rotation axis of A728 has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the first rotating member A721 has the side opposite to the side supported by the first supporting portion A731 extending outside the rotating shaft, and rotates from the extended end side so as to cover the second rotating member A728 from the outside of the rotating shaft. An extension may be formed in a direction parallel to the axis. In this case, the first rotating member A721 supported on the inner side of the rotating shaft can be configured to rotate on the outer side of the rotating shaft of the second rotating member A728, and an unexpected performance can be executed.

In the twenty-second embodiment, the rotation of the central rotating member A724 causes the light emitting means A7 to rotate.
Although the case where the area of the central rotary member A724 changes when viewed in the optical axis direction of 15a has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the central rotating member A724 expands without changing its posture, or when the moving body protrudes from the inside, the light emitting means A715
It may be configured such that the area of the central rotating member A724 in the optical axis direction view of a is changed.

In the twenty-second embodiment, the case where the shell portion A722 intervening between the central rotating member A724 and the light emitting means A715a is rotationally displaced has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a predetermined member may be configured to advance and retreat between the central rotating member A724 and the light emitting means A715a by linear movement (sliding movement). Alternatively, the light emitting means A715a may be arranged on the predetermined member.

In the twenty-second embodiment, the case where the optical axis of the light emitting means A715a is always directed toward the central rotary member A724 has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, light emitting means A
The optical axis of 715a may be configured to oscillate around the central rotating member A724, and may be configured to face the central rotating member A724 at a predetermined timing.

In the twenty-second embodiment, the case where the central rotating member A724 and the shell A722 are driven by the same drive source has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, separate driving may be used, or the timing of driving by the same driving source and the timing of separate driving may be switched.

In the twenty-second embodiment, the second rotating member A728 is configured so as not to overlap all the optical axes of the light emitting means A715a arranged on the left and right sides of the central rotating member A724. It is not something that can be done. For example, the second rotating member A728 may be composed of a plate-shaped member formed so as to cover a plane passing through the rotating shaft when viewed in the direction of the rotating shaft, and may be configured to overlap the entire optical axis at a timing. In this case, when light is emitted from the light emitting means A715a arranged on the left and right sides of the central rotating member A724, the influence of the attitude of the second rotating member A728 on the central rotating member A724 can be increased.

In the twenty-second embodiment, when the shell portion A722 of the first rotating member A721 changes its posture by 180 degrees, the shape in a front view is different, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the posture is changed by 180 degrees, the shape in the front view may be the same. This makes it impossible to recognize the second state and the sixth state of the first rotating member A721 from the difference in shape of the shell portion A722.

In the twenty-second embodiment, the case where the light emitting means A715a is arranged with the optical axis KJ on the virtual plane VS has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, a plurality of planes on which the optical axis KJ is arranged may be set. In this case, the plane through which the optical axis KJ passes does not have to pass through the rotation axis of the rotating body A720.

In the twenty-third embodiment, the case where the slide member A2729 is displaced in the front-rear direction has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the first rotating member A2721 may be configured to be displaceable in the front-rear direction, or the light emitting means A715 may be configured to be displaceable, and the displacement of the light emitting means A715 (not limited to the front-rear direction, but mixed displacement in the front, back, left, right, up and down directions) may be used) to change the virtual plane VS. In any case, the appearance of the first rotating member A2721 when the light emitting means A715 is lit is changed while suppressing the change in the outer shape (shape) of the first rotating member A2721 and the sliding member A2729 in the front view. be able to.

In the twenty-fourth embodiment, the pin-equipped gear A3462 for the odd-shaped slide member A455
Although a case has been described in which a plurality of contact positions are arranged in the circumferential direction, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by forming the projecting tip of the transmission projection A463 to have a large diameter, the transmission projection A463 contacts the deformed slide member A455, and the external projection A3464 contacts the deformed slide member A455. may be shifted in the front-rear direction.

In the twenty-fourth embodiment, the pin-equipped gear A3462 is used for the odd-shaped slide member A455.
A case has been described in which the plurality of outer diameter protrusions A3464 abut at the same position, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the longitudinal direction of the projecting plate portion A456a (direction A416x in rear view).
direction perpendicular to the direction) inner side (opposite side of the plate portion A455e to be detected) further extends along the longitudinal direction, and the wall portion perpendicular to the side surface of the extended portion in rear view is a gear with a pin A346
It may be configured to extend to two sides.

In this case, the orthogonal wall portion is not in contact with the arcuate wall portion A464, and the outer diameter protrusion A
3464, the deformed slide member A455 is prevented from being displaced in a direction intersecting the direction A416x when the orthogonal wall portion and the outer diameter protrusion A3464 come into contact with each other. A load in the direction of rotation (load in the braking direction) can be generated in the attached gear A3462.

Furthermore, by deforming the second guide hole A422b so as to extend in the lateral direction (into an L shape) at the longitudinal end portion, the deformed slide member A455 can be displaced in a direction intersecting the direction A416x. You may comprise so that 1st displacement member A440 may be interlocked and displaced. That is, the deformed slide member A455 pushed by the outer diameter protrusion A3464 is pushed into the second guide hole A
By entering the portion extending in the lateral direction of 422b, the transmission projecting portion A455b moves in the direction A41.
6x, and the displacement may be transmitted to the first displacement member A440 via the long link A451.

In this case, when the odd-shaped slide member A455 enters the portion extending in the lateral direction of the second guide hole A422b, the second guide hole A422b and the guided projecting portion A455c move in the direction A416x.
, it is possible to restrict the displacement of the deformed slide member A455 along the direction A416x. Thus, even after the contact between the projecting plate portion A456a and the arcuate wall portion A464 is released, displacement of the odd-shaped slide member A455 along the direction A416x can be restricted.

There is no limitation to the displacement that occurs in the first displacement member A440 when the deformed slide member A455 enters the portion extending in the lateral direction of the second guide hole A422b. For example, it may be configured to generate displacement along the direction A416x, or may be configured to generate displacement in a direction crossing the direction A416x.

In the twenty-fourth embodiment, the outer diameter protrusion A3464 has been described as having a semicircular shape, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may have a rectangular shape, a triangular shape, a semi-elliptical shape, or an arbitrary shape. On the other hand, in consideration of durability, the shape of the outer diameter protrusion A3464 is preferably configured so as to taper (the width does not increase) toward the radially outward direction.

Note that this is the same when forming a recess instead of the outer diameter protrusion A3464. That is, while the shape may be any shape, it tapers toward the radially inner side (the width does not increase).
It is preferably configured as follows.

The shape of the outer diameter protrusion A3464 may be symmetrical or asymmetrical with respect to a straight line passing through the rotation axis. In this case, if configured in an asymmetrical shape, the displacement speed of the first displacement member A440 can be changed for each direction.

For example, in the rear view of the external projection A3464, the side surface of the arcuate wall A464 on the extension distal end side (the side opposite to the transmission projection A463 along the circumference of the arcuate wall A464) is the extension base end side. (along the circumference of the arc wall A464 on the side of the transmission projection A463), the arc wall A46
4 may be configured so that the angle with respect to the outer peripheral surface is small.

In this case, the displacement of the first displacement member A440 caused by contact with the outer diameter protrusion A3464 under the condition that the gear with pin A3462 is rotated at constant speed is It is possible to increase the speed when displacing toward the retracted position side compared to the speed when displacing toward the overhanging side. That is, the displacement speed of the first displacement member A440 can be changed for each displacement direction.

As for the case where the first displacement member A440 is displaced toward the side opposite to the retracted position, if the outer diameter protrusion A3464 is of a projecting shape, it may be displaced beyond the extended position to the opposite side of the retracted position. As shown in the example, when a concave portion is formed instead of the external protrusion A3464, the deformed slide member A455 slides by the size of the concave portion, and the first displacement member A440
is displaced to the retracted position, the deformed slide member A455 is pushed out to the outer surface of the arcuate wall portion A464 and slides, thereby displacing the first displacement member A440 to the extended position.

Further, when the first displacement member A440 is displaced toward the retracted position, the outer diameter protrusion A
If 3464 is a projecting shape, after the first displacement member A440 is displaced to the opposite side of the retracted position as the deformed slide member A455 slides by the projecting dimension, the outer diameter projection A3
464 is released from contact with the deformed slide member A455, the deformed slide member A45
5 slides, the first displacement member A440 is displaced to the extended position (retracted position side). As the deformed slide member A455 is displaced by the dimension of the provided portion, the first displacement member
A case where 40 is displaced from the extended position to the retracted position is exemplified.

In the twenty-seventh embodiment, the case where the main body plate portion A6561 is arranged closer to the rear plate portion A480 has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, main body plate A6561
may be disposed at a position away from the rear plate portion A480 (a position closer to the support box portion A6470), and the protruding portion A6562 may protrude toward the rear plate portion A480 side. In addition, the main body plate portion A65
61 may be configured to be thin (for example, sheet-like). In this case, it is possible to ensure a wide area in which the wiring HC is displaced.

Moreover, although the case where the main-body board part A6561 was formed in an elongated shape was demonstrated, it is not necessarily restricted to this. For example, the body plate portion A6561 may have a wide plate shape. In this case, members can be arranged between the rear plate portion A480 and the wiring HC in a wide range, so that the wiring HC and the main body plate portion A6561 are synchronously displaced, thereby increasing the possibility of suppressing friction. can do.

In the twenty-seventh embodiment, the projecting portion A6562 is fixedly arranged on the main body plate portion A6561, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the protruding portion A6562 is held so as to be displaceable in the longitudinal direction of the main body plate portion A6561, and the protruding portion A is displaced by the load received from the wiring HC.
The body plate portion A6561A may be configured to rotate according to the displacement of the 6562. That is, for example, a long hole (groove) through which the projecting portion A6562 is inserted is formed in the main body box portion A471, and the long hole (groove) displaces the projecting portion A6562 in the longitudinal direction of the main body plate portion A6561. Accordingly, the main body plate portion A6561 may be formed in a shape that causes rotational displacement. In this case, the arrangement of the wiring guide members A6560 can be appropriately changed according to the magnitude of the load applied from the wiring HC to the wiring guide members A6560. can be moderately reduced.

Moreover, although the case where the main body plate portion A6561 is rotatably supported has been described, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be one that slides, or one that moves along a path combining rotation and sliding.

Although the case where the second displacement member A490 is reciprocally rotationally displaced has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the second displacement member A490 may be slidably displaced, or the second rotating member A490 may be rotationally displaced by one or more rotations.

In the twenty-seventh embodiment, the case where the wiring guide member A6560 is disposed on the back side of the support box portion A6470 has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, main body plate part A
6561 is arranged on the front side of the support box portion A6470, and a long through-hole (a long hole along an arc centered on the rotation axis of the main body plate portion A6561) that guides the projecting portion A6562 to the support box portion A6470. may be provided, and the protruding portion A6562 may protrude to the rear side of the support box portion A6470 through the elongated through hole. In this case, the support box portion A6470 and the rear plate portion A480
A space corresponding to the volume of the main body plate portion A6561 can be provided as compared with the case where the main body plate portion A6561 is arranged between the . As a result, it is possible to easily secure a space in which the wiring HC is displaced, and it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in designing the main body plate portion A6561 (for example, the gap between the support box portion A6470 and the rear plate portion A480 can also be configured as a thick member).

<First control example>
Next, various control examples applicable to the pachinko machines of the above embodiments will be described. First, with reference to FIGS. 389 to 478, a first control example in the pachinko machines of the above embodiments will be described. In addition, in the configuration used in the first control example, there are some configurations that are the same as those in the above-described embodiments and are given different reference numerals. Since the specific contents of the configuration are the same as those corresponding to the above-described embodiments, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, an overview (specifications) of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example will be described. The pachinko machine 10 in the first control example has a first area (V area) in which a game ball can enter and a variable winning device 65 in which a ball can enter when a special symbol lottery results in a big win. , a second area (non-V area) different from the first area, and a distribution device (V Roles) are provided. During one big win, at least one game ball enters (passes through) the first area, so that after the end of the big win, a variable probability state of the special symbol is imparted, while the second during one big win. When not even one game ball enters one area, a time-saving state of normal patterns is imparted until the lottery of special patterns is executed 100 times at maximum after the end of the big win. Therefore, when a jackpot game is executed, the game can be played in anticipation that the game balls will be distributed to the first region (V region) by the distribution device (V role).

The distribution device (V role) is basically maintained in an arrangement that allows game balls to be distributed to the second area (an arrangement that cannot be distributed to the first area), and a predetermined round (for example, 5 Round), only during a specific period (for example, 5 seconds after the start of the 5th round to 10 seconds after the start of the 5th round), change the arrangement so that the game balls can be distributed to the first area. . By entering the game ball into the specific winning hole 65a during this specific period, the game ball can be entered into the first area, and the game state after the big win is finished is changed with an advantageous special pattern. state can be transferred.

In addition, in this first control example, the opening and closing pattern in which the game ball can reach the distribution device during the specific period in the 5th round (for example, 5 seconds after the start of the 5th round to 9.5 seconds The opening and closing pattern in which the specific winning opening 65a is opened for 4.5 seconds at the time of elapse). A specific winning opening with an opening and closing pattern that makes it impossible to reach the device (for example, an opening and closing pattern in which the specific winning opening 65a is opened for 4.5 seconds from the start of the 5th round to the time when 4.5 seconds have elapsed) At least a jackpot type (normal jackpot) in which the (large opening) 65a is opened and closed is provided. In the former jackpot type (probable variable jackpot), game balls are easily sent to the first area by the sorting device simply by continuing to shoot the game balls aiming at the specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a in the fifth round of the jackpot. can be distributed, so after the end of the big hit, it will be in a probability variable state of special symbols. On the other hand, in the latter jackpot type (normal jackpot), even if game balls continue to be shot aiming at the specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a in the fifth round of the jackpot, all game balls that reach the sorting device Since it is distributed to the second area, a variable probability state is not given (a time saving state is given).

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example, when shifting to the probability variable state of the special symbols, it is determined whether or not to fall to the low probability state of the special symbols each time the lottery condition of the special symbols is satisfied. It is configured to execute a lottery. More specifically, when the special symbol lottery condition is established in the special symbol probability variable state, first, a lottery (fall probability 1/500) is executed to determine whether or not to fall to the special symbol low probability state. When a corresponding lottery result is obtained, a large winning lottery is executed with a lottery probability (1/250) in a special pattern low probability state, while a special pattern high probability state is not obtained when the lottery result does not correspond to falling. It is configured to execute a jackpot lottery with a lottery probability (1/125). On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example, regardless of whether it is a probability variable jackpot or a normal jackpot, after the jackpot is finished, until the lottery of the special pattern is finished 100 times, the time saving state of the normal pattern. It is configured to be maintained at That is, when the variable probability state of the special symbol is set after the end of the jackpot, it depends on whether the lottery result corresponding to the fall is obtained before the lottery of the special symbol is executed 100 times. However, the normal state of normal symbols continues until the lottery condition for the 100th special symbol is established after the end of the big win. Therefore, after the end of the big win, until the lottery of the special symbols is executed 100 times, the operation other than the probability of the big win is almost the same. can be made imperceptible to the player. Therefore, if the previous big win is a normal big win and the probability of special symbols is low after the big win is over, or if the previous big win was a variable big win, the lottery of special symbols will be executed 100 times. Even if the player falls to a low probability state in the meantime, the player continues to have expectations for the variable probability state of the special symbols until the lottery of the special symbols is executed 100 times. You can continue to let it go. Therefore, it is possible to maintain the player's motivation for the game.

In addition, as described above with reference to FIG. It is provided at a position where a ball can be entered (a position where a game ball that has flowed down the flow path provided on the left side in front view cannot be entered (difficult)). That is, the electric accessory 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640 is easily opened (that is, the game ball is easy to enter the second ball entrance 640). In the time-saving state, by shooting a game ball toward the flow path on the right side in front view, the game ball enters the second ball entrance 640 at a high rate (for example, a rate of 1 ball out of 3 balls). Therefore, the game can be played efficiently. On the other hand, in the normal state in which the normal state of the normal symbol is set, the electric accessory 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640 is difficult to open (that is, the game ball enters the second ball entrance 640). difficult), the position where the game ball that has flowed down the flow path provided on the left side of the front view with respect to the third symbol display device 81 can enter (the game flowed down the flow path provided on the right side of the front view A game is played by a game method in which a game ball is aimed at a first ball entrance (first prize winning opening) 64 provided at a position where a ball cannot (is difficult to) enter. Hereinafter, for simplification of explanation, shooting a game ball toward the flow path on the left side of the third symbol display device 81 when viewed from the front is referred to as "left-handed hitting". Shooting a game ball is called "right hitting". Also, the lottery for the special symbol executed based on the entry of the game ball into the first ball entrance (first winning slot) 64 is referred to as the lottery for the first special symbol (lottery for special symbol 1). A lottery for a special symbol that is executed based on the entry of a game ball into the second entrance (second prize entrance) 640 is referred to as a second special symbol lottery (special figure 2 lottery). ).

Next, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. Figure 389 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in the first control example, Figure 389 (b) is the third 8 is a schematic diagram schematically showing display contents of a pattern display device 81. FIG. The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 404) to display, for example, three patterns of left, middle and right. A row of symbols is displayed.

The third symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are composed of nine types of main symbols numbered from "1" to "9". Each main design consists of a back design made of a wooden box with a number from "1" to "9". , Large numbers are added to almost the entire front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main designs with even numbers (2, 4, 6, 8) have accessory designs imitating characters such as shields, swords, cloaks, etc. that fill the front of the wooden box. An even number is attached to the lower right side of , in green, small, and displayed in front of the attached symbols.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the result of the special symbol lottery performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 404) to be described later is a big hit (jackets A to E), the same main symbol Matching variable display is performed, and after the variable display is finished, a big win is generated. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss, a variable display in which the same main symbols are not aligned is performed.

Furthermore, if the type of the winning jackpot is a normal jackpot, a variable display is performed in which the same main symbols with even numbers are always displayed, while if the variable jackpot is a variable jackpot, the same main symbols with even numbers are displayed. Either the matching variation display or the variation display including the same main symbols with odd numbers is executed. In other words, by executing the variable display in which the same main symbols with odd numbers are aligned, not only the big win but also the definite variable state after the big win is finalized. In addition, in the first control example, the rate at which the variable display in which the same main symbols with odd numbers are aligned is set to an extremely low probability (for example, the rate of 1%) in the event of a variable probability jackpot. there is As a result, it is possible to make rare the case where it is possible to grasp that it is a probability variable jackpot from the type of symbols that are collected when the jackpot is won. As described above, until the lottery of 100 special symbols is executed after the end of the jackpot, the time-saving state of the normal symbols is maintained (whether or not the variable probability state is determined from the operation mode of the electric accessory 640a). Therefore, by making it difficult to grasp whether or not it is a probability variable jackpot from the types of the main patterns arranged at the time of jackpot winning, from the end of the jackpot to the end of the lottery of special patterns 100 times. During the period, it is possible to more frequently generate a situation in which it is not known whether it is a variable probability state or a time saving state. Therefore, even if the probability variable jackpot is won or when the normal jackpot is won, the player is in a variable probability state from the end of the jackpot to the end of the lottery of 100 times of special symbols. You can keep your hopes up.

As shown in FIG. 389(a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is a main display for displaying the third symbol when the third symbol is variably displayed or when the third symbol is stopped and displayed. A region Dm, a small region Ds1 for displaying the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol, a small region Ds2 for displaying the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol, and a predetermined effect (for example, an interrupt described later and a small area Ds3 for reducing and displaying the variable effect of the third symbol while executing the continuous hitting effect).

The main display area Dm is divided into three left, middle and right display areas Dm1 to Dm3, and three pattern rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. The above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending numerical order in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is periodically scrolled from top to bottom for variable display. In particular, the left symbol row Z1 is arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in descending order, and the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3 are arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in ascending order.

Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbols are displayed in three stages of upper, middle and lower stages for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The middle part of the main display area Dm is set as the activated line L1, and the third symbols stop on the activated line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1→right symbol row Z3→middle symbol row Z2 in each game. Is displayed. When the third symbol stops, if a combination of big winning symbols (in this embodiment, a combination of the same main symbols) is aligned on the activated line L1, a big winning moving image is displayed as a big winning.

On the other hand, the small area Ds1 is an area for displaying the number of balls (holding balls) for which variation has not been executed (the number of holding balls of the first special symbol) among the balls that have entered the first ball entrance 64. The small area Ds2 is an area for displaying the number of balls (holding balls) for which variation has not been executed (the number of holding balls of the second special symbol) among the balls that have entered the second ball entrance 640, and is a small area. Ds3 is an area in which the variable effect is reduced and displayed when, for example, a display effect different from the variable effect is executed in the main display area. By shrinking and displaying the variable effect, it is possible to prevent the display effect different from the variable effect from being hidden by the third pattern and becoming difficult to see.

On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 389(b), a total of three main patterns of the third pattern are displayed in the main display area Dm, and in the background of the third pattern, a display indicating the degree of expectation for the big win is displayed. Performances and the like are executed.

When the game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 while the variable display is being performed in the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display devices 37A, 37B), the number of times of the ball entrance is up to 4 times. The number of reserved balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37A and is also displayed in the small area Ds1. Similarly, when a game ball enters the second ball entrance 640, the number of times the ball enters is held up to four times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37B, and in the small area Ds2. Also shown in In the small area Ds1, one reserved ball number pattern is displayed per one reserved ball number of the first special pattern, and in the small area Ds2, one reserved ball number pattern is displayed per one reserved ball number of the second special pattern. is displayed. That is, when one reserved ball number pattern is displayed in the small area Ds1 or small area Ds2, it indicates that the number of reserved ball numbers is one ball, and when four reserved ball number patterns are displayed, It indicates that the number of retained balls is 4 balls. Further, when the reserved ball number symbol is not displayed, it indicates that the reserved ball number of the first special symbol is 0 ball, that is, the reserved ball does not exist. FIG. 389(b) illustrates a case where the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is four and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is zero.

In this first control example, each ball entering the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 is suspended up to four times, but the maximum number of suspended balls is four. , and may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls in the small areas Ds1 and Ds2, the number of reserved balls may be displayed as a number on part of the third pattern display device 81, or the area divided into four may be displayed as many as the number of reserved balls. It may be displayed in a different mode (for example, color or lighting pattern). Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the third symbol display device 81 may not display the number of reserved balls. Further, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls, which is the maximum holding number, and the number of holding balls may be displayed according to the number of holding lamps in the lighting state.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 390 to 403, various entertainment effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example will be described. First, referring to FIGS. 390 to 393, in the first control example, the third symbol display device 81 is executed during the game state (time saving state or probability variable state) in which the time saving state of normal symbols is set. The following describes the display effect. As described above, in the first control example, after the end of the big hit, until the lottery of special symbols is executed 100 times, it is difficult for the player to distinguish whether it is a time saving state or a variable probability state. Configure. That is, even when the game state after the end of the big win is set to the time-saving state or the variable probability state, the lottery of the special symbols is executed 100 times after the last big win is finished unless the big win is made. Until then, it is configured to be maintained in a time-saving state of normal patterns. This time-saving state of the normal pattern is maintained even when the probability variation state of the special pattern falls to the low probability state of the special pattern before it is executed 100 times, so the game set at the end of the jackpot. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to identify not only the state but also the timing of falling from the probability variable state of the special symbol to the low probability state.

However, if the state of the special symbols of the pachinko machine 10 (whether the special symbols are in the variable probability state or the low probability state) is configured to be completely unidentifiable, the game state in which the time-saving state of the normal symbols is set. The game becomes monotonous while is continuing, and there is a possibility that the player's interest in the game cannot be sufficiently improved. Therefore, in the first control example, the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 allows the player to predict the possibility of the variable probability state to some extent. More specifically, every time the variable display of the special symbols is executed, one back mode is selected from among three types of back modes that suggest the degree of expectation of the probability variable state, taking into consideration the game state etc. at the time of execution. It is configured to be set. As a result, it is possible to realize the playability of predicting the state of the special symbol from the aspect of the backside mode, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

First, with reference to FIG. 390(a), the display mode (rear view mode) with a relatively low degree of expectation that the current state is the variable probability state will be described. As shown in FIG. 390(a), when the back mode (cave exploration mode), which is a variable state with a relatively low degree of expectation, is set, a character 801 imitating an adventurer holds a sword and a torch. A display mode for searching the inside of the cave is displayed. In addition, on the lower right side of the front view on the display screen of the third design display device 81, the number of lotteries of the remaining special symbols until the number of lotteries that the time saving state of the normal design may end (time saving state of the normal design guaranteed number of times) is displayed. The example of FIG. 390(a) illustrates a case where 90 times is displayed as the guaranteed number of times. That is, it illustrates the state after the lottery for the special symbol is executed 10 times after the big win is finished. Further, a display area 803 having a horizontally elongated substantially rectangular shape is displayed in the lower part of the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 when viewed from the front. Inside the display area 803, horizontally elongated substantially elliptical right-handed images displaying the characters "Right-handed" are displayed on the left and right, and between these right-handed images, a "cave search mode" is displayed. is displayed. According to these display modes, the time-saving state of normal symbols continues until the lottery of special symbols is executed at least 90 times (the time-saving state may end when the lottery of 90 times ends), And the player can easily understand that the game should be played by hitting to the right. In addition, compared to the temple search mode (see FIG. 390 (b)) and the super temple search mode (see FIG. 391), which will be described later, the display contents are plain, so that the player can intuitively It can be made to understand that the possibility of the condition continuing is relatively low.

FIG. 390(b) is a diagram showing a display mode when the back mode (temple search mode), which has a higher expectation that the current state is a variable probability state, is set compared to the cave search mode. When the temple search mode is set, a display mode in which a character 801 imitating an adventurer searches the temple is displayed, and the characters between the right-handed images in the display area 803 are displayed as "temple search mode". is changed to The contents displayed in the temple search mode are brighter in appearance than in the cave search mode, and the display mode is such that the player can easily have a flashy impression. can be intuitively understood.

FIG. 391 is a diagram showing a display mode when the back mode (super temple search mode) indicating that the degree of expectation of the probability change state is higher than the temple search mode is set. When this super temple search mode is set, the characters "CHANCE" are displayed on the pillars of the temple, and torches are set on the pillars of the temple. Furthermore, a substantially circular display area 804 displaying the characters "super" is displayed on the upper left side of the characters "temple search mode" in the display area 803. FIG. These display modes can give the player a more flashy impression than the temple search mode (see FIG. 390(b)), so that the expectation of the variable probability state can be further improved. It should be noted that this super temple search mode is a back mode that may be set (shifted) only when the game state is a variable probability state and the lottery result of falling is not included in the hold. In other words, at the time of transitioning to the super temple search mode, not only is the variable state confirmed, but at least it is confirmed that the variable state continues until the pending ball at the time of transition is digested, so the transition to the super temple search mode By doing so, it is possible to please the player.

Thus, in the first control example, during the gaming state in which the time saving state of the normal symbol is set, the cave search mode with a relatively low expectation of the probability change state, the temple search mode with a relatively high expectation of the probability change state , and 3 of the super temple search mode that confirms that the definite variable state is confirmed and that the lottery result corresponding to the fall is not included in the hold (at least the definite variable state continues until the hold is digested) It is configured to set one of the types of back modes at the time of execution of the variable display performance based on the lottery result of the special symbol. By constructing in this way, while the time-saving state of normal symbols is set, the player can be given the pleasure of predicting the current game state from the back mode, so that the player's interest in the game can be enhanced. can be improved. In addition, by setting the super temple search mode, it is confirmed that the game state is a variable state. You can make them feel joy that their predictions were correct. On the other hand, if the state of the special symbol is predicted to be low probability, but the state is shifted to the super temple mode, the player will be delighted that the game state is set to be more advantageous than expected. can let Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved. Furthermore, by setting the super temple mode, it is confirmed that the lottery result corresponding to the fall is not included in the hold (at least the lottery for the number of pending balls can be executed with a jackpot probability in a variable state. possible), the game can be played with a stronger expectation of a big win during the hold.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 392 and 393, in the first control example, a lottery of special symbols for a predetermined number of times (for example, 96 times) is performed without winning the jackpot in a state where the time saving state of normal symbols is set. A description will be given of the probability variation continuation suggestion effect that is executed when is executed. FIG. 392 is a diagram showing a display mode at the start of this variable probability continuation suggestion effect. This variable probability continuation suggesting performance is a performance for suggesting whether or not the game state is the variable probability state, and is executed from the 96th variable display performance to the 99th variable display performance after the end of the big win. That is, it is an effect that is executed until immediately before the 100th special symbol lottery, which is the guaranteed number of times of the time saving state, is executed. In addition, in this first control example, in the time saving state, it is configured to subtract the number of remaining time saving times when the special symbols start to fluctuate. That is, in the time saving state, after the jackpot ends, the number of time saving times becomes 0 at the start of the 100th variable display, so during the execution of the 100th variable display, the time saving state has already ended (shift to normal state completed state). Therefore, whether or not it is in the probability variable state or in the time-saving state is notified by the 99th variable display performance in which the time-saving state of the normal pattern is surely maintained. By configuring in this way, it becomes difficult to identify whether the probability variation state continues until the result of the probability variation continuation suggestion effect is confirmed (that is, it is a time saving state from the operation of the electric accessory 640a It becomes difficult to see whether it is in a probability variable state or not), so the player can be made to pay attention to the game by the probability variable continuation suggestive effect.

As shown in FIG. 392, when the variable probability continuation suggestion effect is started, an effect is executed in which a door 806 appears in front of a character 801 imitating an adventurer. Moreover, above the door 806, a display area 805 is displayed in which the characters "Door breaking mode start!" Further, the characters displayed between the right-handed images in the display area 803 are changed to "door breaking mode". With these display contents, the player can easily understand that if the character 801 can break through the door, it means that the variable probability state continues. In this probability variable continuation suggestion effect (door breakthrough mode), the effect of adding an attack to the door 806 is executed each time the variable display is executed, and if the door 806 can be finally destroyed (breakthrough), the probability variable state An effect in which the continuation of is notified is executed.

FIG. 393(a) is a diagram showing an effect mode suggesting that the degree of expectation that the probability change state continues is relatively low in the probability change continuation suggestion production (door breakthrough mode). When this low-expectation production mode is executed, as shown in FIG. 393(a), a character 801 imitating an adventurer attacks the door 806 by slashing it with a sword, thereby destroying (breaking through) the door 806. ) is executed. On the other hand, FIG. 393(b) is a diagram showing an effect mode suggesting that the degree of expectation that the probability change state continues is relatively high in the probability change continuation suggestion production (door breakthrough mode). 393(b), a character 801 imitating an adventurer strikes the door 806 with a giant hammer. An effect of trying to destroy (break through) is executed.

Since it is intuitively obvious to many players that hitting with a hammer is more effective than cutting with a sword in order to break the door 806, the effect of hitting with a hammer is more effective. , the player can easily understand that the expectation of breaking through the door 806 is high. Therefore, during the execution of the variable probability continuation suggestive effect, the game can be played in anticipation that the effect of hitting the door 806 with a hammer will be executed more times. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in the first control example, at the start of the probability variable continuation suggestion effect, the lottery result of the 96th to 99th times, which is the execution range of the probability variable continuation suggestion effect, is read in advance, and the probability variable state until the 99th special symbol lottery. It is determined whether or not is continuing, and if the variable probability state continues until the 99th special symbol lottery, the selection rate of the production scenario that is likely to generate high-expectation attack patterns is high. . On the other hand, if the time-saving state has fallen before the 99th special symbol lottery is executed (or the time-saving state was after the end of the previous jackpot), a low-expectation attack pattern occurs. It is configured to increase the selection rate of production scenarios that are easy to play. In this way, by setting the effect mode based on the game state at the end of the effect, it is possible to more accurately notify the game state after the end of the effect.

Here, if it is configured to execute the variable probability continuation suggestion effect only based on the game state at the start of the effect, it falls to a low probability state during the execution of the variable probability continuation suggestion effect, and the continuation of the variable probability state is notified. In spite of this, there is a possibility that the time saving state will be ended with the start of the 100th special symbol lottery. In this case, there is a possibility that the player will have a sense of distrust toward the pachinko machine 10 and the hall due to the contradiction between the content of the performance and the actual action. Also, as a countermeasure, there is a method of configuring the variable probability continuation suggestion production by a production that is completed with one fluctuation, but in this method, it is difficult to ensure a sufficient production period, so there are various production modes. becomes difficult to convert.

On the other hand, in the first control example, it is configured to execute the probability variable continuation suggestion effect over the last four fluctuation displays that guarantee the time saving state of the normal symbol, and the notification content of the probability variable continuation suggestion effect is changed. , It is determined based on the game state at the time when the last special symbol lottery in the execution range of the variable probability continuous effect is executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to diversify the mode of presentation while making it possible to accurately notify the game state at the end of the presentation. In addition, when the probability is variable at the start of the production, and the ball is not held until the end of the production, the production is selected so that an attack pattern with a relatively high degree of expectation is likely to occur. ing. This is because the probability of a lottery result corresponding to the fall is lower than the probability of a big hit, and it is extremely rare to fall into a low probability state of special symbols during the production period (relatively high probability of a variable state) This is because the performance ends immediately).

Next, with reference to FIG. 394, the transition of various states after the end of the variable probability jackpot in the first control example will be described. First, referring to FIG. 394(a), the transition of the state in the case of falling to the low probability state within 100 times after the end of the variable probability jackpot will be described. As shown in FIG. 394 (a), when falling within 100 times, although it shifts to the low probability state of the special design at the time of falling, the lottery of the special design is executed 100 times in the time saving state of the normal design. continue until Then, in the 96th to 99th variable probability continuation suggestion effects executed in the 96th to 99th variable display effects, the effect of failing to break through the door 806 is executed, and the transition to the normal state is notified.

On the other hand, FIG. 394(b) is a diagram showing the transition of the state in the case of falling to the low probability state of the special symbol in the lottery of the special symbol 100 times or later after the end of the probability variable jackpot. As shown in FIG. 394(b), when falling after 100 times after the end of the jackpot, the time-saving state of normal symbols and the variable probability state of special symbols are maintained until falling. Therefore, in the variable probability continuation suggestion performance executed over the execution period of the 96th to 99th variable display, the performance of successfully breaking through the door 806 is executed to inform the continuation of the variable probability state.

In addition, in this first control example, as in the case of falling in the special symbol lottery after 100 times, even if the special symbol lottery hits a jackpot during the time saving state of the normal symbol, normal at the start of the fluctuation It is configured to end the time saving state of the pattern. Therefore, when the time saving state is terminated within 100 times of lottery number of special symbols (that is, within the guaranteed number of times of the time saving state), winning of the jackpot is confirmed at that time. On the other hand, when the time saving state is ended after 100 times (that is, after the guaranteed number of times of the time saving state has elapsed), it means that it is either a big hit or a fall. And since the probability of winning the jackpot (1/125) is higher than the probability of falling (1/500), even if the time saving state ends at the start of the fluctuation after 100 times, it will be a jackpot. can be expected. Therefore, since it is possible to play a game while paying attention to whether the time saving state continues, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 395, the press stop effect in the first control example will be described. This pressing stop effect is a effect in which each symbol row is stopped and displayed each time the lens member (PUSH button) 10317 provided on the swing operation member 10310 is pressed. In other words, it is an effect that the player can set the stop timing of each symbol row to any timing according to the player's operation timing of the PUSH button 10317 .

FIG. 395(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 during execution of the press stop effect. 395(a), button images imitating the PUSH button 10317 (left button image 807aL, center button image 807aC, right button image 807aR) is displayed. Also, below each button image, effective period gauges (left effective period gauge 807bL, central effective period gauge 807bC, right effective period gauge 807bR) are displayed to indicate the remaining period during which the stop operation for each symbol row is valid. . With these display contents, the player can easily understand that each symbol row is stopped and displayed each time the PUSH button 10317 is pressed.

FIG. 395(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when the player performs the first operation (pressing) on the PUSH button 10317 during execution of the press stop effect. As shown in FIG. 395(b), when the first operation (pressing) is executed, the left symbol row is stopped and displayed. When the second operation is performed within the operation valid period, the right symbol row is stopped and displayed, and when the third operation is performed, the center symbol row is stopped and displayed. In this way, by allowing the player to arbitrarily determine the timing of symbol stoppage, the player's interest in the game can be enhanced.

In the case where each symbol row is stopped and displayed according to the operation timing of the player, if the player operates too early, there may be too much time left after all the symbol rows are stopped. As a countermeasure against this, in the first control example, when the stop operation is performed three times early (for example, within one second after the start of the effective period), the central symbol row is not immediately stopped and displayed. 2, the stop display of the center symbol row is executed after a specific effect is performed, thereby suppressing the period after the stop display from becoming too long. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 396(a), a plurality of ( 3) symbols move up and down in the central symbol row (i.e. after suggesting that any of the three symbols may be displayed as the stopping symbol in the central symbol row). It is configured to execute an effect (chance charge fan effect) in which symbols other than (chance charge symbol) are stopped and displayed. In this way, depending on the length of the remaining operation effective period at the time of performing the stop operation of the center symbol row (the third depression of the PUSH button 10317), the center symbol row is immediately stopped and displayed, or the chance charge is performed. By adopting a configuration in which it is switched whether to fill up the time by the fanning effect, it is possible to prevent the state in which all the symbol rows are stopped and displayed from becoming unnaturally long. Therefore, a more natural presentation mode can be realized.

In addition, in the first control example, there is also an effect of a pattern in which the chance charge symbol is stopped and displayed in the center symbol row in the press stop effect. In this case, regardless of the timing at which the stop operation is performed on the center symbol row, the chance charge symbols are stopped and displayed through the chance charge effect (see FIG. 396(a)). When the stop display of this chance charge symbol occurs, it develops into a chance charge effect (see FIG. 396(b)), which will be described later. By setting an effect pattern in which the chance charge symbol is actually stopped and displayed, even if the operation stop effect is selected as a simple effect of losing the chance charge, even if the chance charge fan effect occurs, there is a possibility that it will develop into a chance charge effect. The player can be made to think that there is Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 396(b) and FIG. 397, an effect mode of the chance charge effect will be described. FIG. 396(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 when the chance charge effect is started. When the chance charge effect is started, a character 801 imitating an adventurer is displayed in the center of the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, and the surroundings are set to emit light (aura). be done. In addition, on the right side of the character 801, a vertically long substantially rectangular spirit gauge KG is displayed. This fighting spirit gauge KG is for displaying the degree of fighting spirit of the character 801 in a meter format, and can be displayed in one to six levels. In addition, in a display area 805 displayed above the character 801, characters such as "The more you get fired up, the more chances you will have" are displayed. Furthermore, the characters “Chance Charge, remaining 5 times” are displayed in the display area 803 . In the chance charge effect 1, the character 801 tries to build up his fighting spirit five times. is signaled by a metered amount of With these display contents, the player can easily understand that there are things that are better the more motivated you are.

FIG. 397(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode at the end of the chance charge effect. As shown in FIG. 397(a), in addition to the size of the light around the character 801 (amount of aura enveloping it) and the meter amount of the kiai gauge KG, characters displayed in the display area 805 also determine how much kiai is accumulated. is reported. In the example of FIG. 397(a), a state in which the spirit is accumulated up to the 5th stage out of 6 stages is illustrated, and the display area 805 displays characters "Charge Level 5!!". These display contents make it possible for the player to easily understand the amount of finally accumulated fighting spirit.

The spirit gauge accumulated in the chance charge effect is consumed to generate some chance-up effect at each timing until the held balls are consumed at the start of the chance charge effect. The chance-up effect is a effect that increases the expectation of a big win, such as a change in the display mode of the number of pending balls, the occurrence of a so-called pseudo-run, the occurrence of a cut-in effect, and the red-letter dialogue. occurrence, and the like. It should be noted that the spirit gauge is always consumed until it reaches zero. That is, it is configured so as not to be discarded without being consumed. With this configuration, the player can easily grasp the remaining number of chance-up effects, so that the player can play the game looking forward to what kind of chance-up effect will occur next. . Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Note that, in the first control example, the gauge amount of the spirit gauge KG accumulated in the chance charge effect is mainly determined based on the number of held balls at the start of the chance charge effect. After completion of the chance charge effect, the pace at which the chance-up effect is executed (that is, the spirit gauge is consumed) is variable in consideration of the lottery result of each reserved ball. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce the processing load (the processing load when determining the number of gauges) at the start of the chance charge effect.

FIG. 397(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when the spirit gauge is consumed. FIG. 397(b) exemplifies a case where one gauge of the spirit gauge is consumed and a so-called holding change effect is executed as a chance-up effect. That is, as shown in FIG. 397(b), the gauge amount of the spirit gauge KG is reduced by one gauge (consumed), and at the same time, the display mode of the third reserved ball number symbol Hz3 in the small area Ds1 changes from white to blue. A production that changes to (increases the degree of expectation) is executed. In this way, by adopting a configuration in which some kind of effect (chance-up effect) is executed to increase the expectation of winning as the gauge amount of the spirit gauge KG decreases, while the gauge amount of the spirit gauge KG remains, the game can be played at any time. , the game can be played looking forward to what kind of chance-up effect will occur next. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 398, the change over time of the display mode (effect mode) in the variable display effect in which the pressing stop effect is set will be described. First, referring to FIG. 398(a), in the pressing stop effect that does not develop into a chance charge effect, when the third stop operation (stop operation on the middle symbol row) is executed after 1 second from the start of the valid period. A description will be given of the change over time of the effect mode of . As shown in FIG. 398(a), when the variable display is executed in which only the press stop effect is set (that is, the chance charge effect is not executed), the normal A variable display (simply a variable display in which each symbol row fluctuates in the vertical direction at high speed) is executed, and when 6 seconds have passed, the press stop effect (see FIG. 395(a)) is started. Then, when the third stop operation is executed after 1 second from the start of the effective period of the pressing stop effect (when 2 seconds have passed in the example of FIG. 398(a)), the already stopped left symbol row , and in addition to the right symbol row, the central symbol row is pseudo-stopped. It should be noted that the pseudo stop display means that display is performed in a manner that is difficult to distinguish from the final stop display (for example, a manner in which vibration is performed with extremely small amplitude). This pseudo-stop continues until the stop display timing of the original variable display (the timing of receiving the stop command from the main controller 110), and each symbol row is completely stopped and displayed at the stop display timing.

Next, referring to FIG. 398(b), in the pressing stop effect that does not develop into a chance charge effect, the third stop operation (stop operation for the middle symbol row) is executed within 1 second or less from the start of the valid period. A description will be given of the change over time of the effect mode when the player is shown. As shown in FIG. 398(b), when the variable display in which only the press stop effect is set (that is, the chance charge effect is not executed) is executed, the normal The variable display is executed, and when 6 seconds have elapsed, the pressing stop effect (see FIG. 395(a)) is started. Then, when the third stop operation is performed within a range of 1 second or less (0.5 seconds after the example in FIG. 398(b)) from the start of the effective period of the press stop effect, the chance charge effect is performed. After (see FIG. 396(a)) is executed, an effect is executed in which the combination of winning symbols is stop-displayed at the stop display timing. As a result, even if the stop operation is executed three times at a relatively early stage after the start of the valid period, the period until the stop display can be connected (filled) by the chance charge fanning effect, so that the missing symbol. It is possible to show the transition of the performance mode up to the stop display of , in a natural form. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with an effect mode that causes less discomfort.

Next, with reference to FIG. 398(c), the change over time of the presentation mode when developing into the chance charge presentation will be described. As shown in FIG. 398(c), even when the chance charge effect develops, the transition of the effect mode is the same as when the chance charge effect is not executed until the press stop effect is executed. Then, in the variable display in which the chance charge effect is set, when the stop operation is executed three times in the press stop effect, the chance charge boost effect (Fig. 396(a)) is performed regardless of the timing of the third stop operation. ) is generated, and after that, when 10 seconds have passed since the start of the fluctuation, it develops into a chance charge effect.

As described above, in the first control example, even in the variable display in which only the press stop effect is set, the chance charge effect can be executed depending on the end timing of the stop operation, so the chance charge effect is executed. It is possible to hold the expectation for more times. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 399 to FIG. 401, an interruption continuous hit effect, which is a type of entertainment effect in the first control example, will be described. This interrupting continuous hit effect is a display mode effect as if a different mode of effect from the display effect that had been displayed until then suddenly interrupted during normal variable display or reach fluctuation. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 399(a), the image of the normal variable display effect is displayed by executing the continuous interrupt effect during execution of the normal variable display effect (see FIG. 389(b)). (on the front layer), a cut-in area CR is formed (displayed) in which the face of the monster is displayed in close-up. That is, as shown in FIG. 399(a), a display area (cut-in area CR) formed in a belt shape extending downward from the upper left side to the lower right side on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is displayed. . As shown in FIG. 399(a), this cut-in region CR occupies about 70% of the display area of the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, and a monster is modeled in the central portion of the cut-in region CR. The displayed image is enlarged. In addition, a display area 805 displaying characters "Monster Group Assault!!" is displayed (formed) above the image simulating a monster in the cut-in area CR. From these display contents, the player can easily understand that an effect completely different from the effect executed before the cut-in area CR is displayed (interrupted) has been executed. can be made While the cut-in area CR is being formed (that is, while the interrupt repeated hitting effect is being executed), the display effect being executed immediately before is interrupted. That is, the display effect of the layer on the back side of the cut-in area CR is all temporarily stopped, and the effect mode is restarted from the state at the time of interruption when the interrupt continuous hit effect ends. Note that audio (music) can be paused (interrupted) or continued depending on the situation. In this first control example, when the interrupting repeated hit effect is executed during execution of the normal variable display, both the display mode and the sound mode are controlled to be interrupted until the interrupting repeated hit effect ends. Only the display mode is interrupted when the interruption continuous hit effect is executed after the reach occurs (while the reach is fluctuating). This is because more flashy music (BGM) is played after the occurrence of ready-to-win as compared to during execution of normal variable display. It is intended to prevent them from being caught.

After the cut-in region CR in which images imitating monsters and the like are displayed by executing the interrupt continuous hitting effect, the player is urged to continuously press the PUSH button 10317 (continuous hitting). A display mode is displayed. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 399(b), a button image BG imitating the PUSH button 10317 is displayed in the cut-in region CR, and a message indicating that the operation of the PUSH button 10317 is valid is displayed below the button image BG. A gauge image GG showing the remaining period of time in a gauge format is displayed. In addition, above the button image BG, the characters "Consecutive hits" and an image of three arrows facing the PUSH button image BG are displayed. In addition, a display area 805 displays the text "Reduce the number of monsters with repeated hits!" Is displayed. With these display contents, the player can easily understand that the number of monsters can be reduced by pressing the PUSH button 10317 within the continuous hit valid period.

In this first control example, as the types of interrupt barrage effects, a plurality of types are provided that differ in at least the number of monsters that can be reduced during the barrage effective period (the lower limit of the number of remaining monsters to be displayed). It is And basically, it is configured so that the more monsters are subjugated (the number of remaining monsters is reduced), the higher the expected jackpot is. More specifically, in the case where an interrupt continuous hit effect is set for the variable display of the jackpot, a type of effect that makes it possible to subdue all 100 monsters (reset the number of remaining monsters to 0). While the mode can be selected, it is configured so that it is impossible to reduce the number of monsters to 0 (the number of monsters can only be reduced to 3 at maximum) in the non-variable display.

In addition, in this first control example, the number of monsters subjugated (subtracted) by pressing the PUSH button 10317 once is configured to vary according to the length of the remaining effective period. More specifically, the longer the remaining valid period is, the smaller the number of kills (the number of subtractions) by pressing once. By configuring in this way, even when a player with a fast pace of repeated hits is playing a game, it is possible to prevent the number of monsters from being reduced to the lower limit early after the start of the effect.

Here, conventionally, as a kind of entertainment effect, an operation effect is known in which an operation means such as an operation button is continuously operated for a predetermined period to change the effect mode. In this operation effect, the upper limit of the number of times the effect mode is variable (the number of times of development) is generally set for each effect, and when the number of times of operation reaches a specific number, the upper limit of the development mode is variable. Things were normal. However, in the production of such specifications, when a player with a fast operation speed is playing a game, the upper limit level of the production is developed (variable) early, so the upper limit level is low. There is a problem that there is a possibility that the interest of the player may be spoiled when the stage of indicating Furthermore, when a player whose operation speed is slow is playing a game, even though the player is actively performing the operation, the operation is performed before the predetermined number of operations for developing to the upper limit development mode. There is a possibility that the valid period will expire and the interest of the player will be spoiled.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example, the number of monsters to be subdued (subtracted) by one depression is varied according to the length of the remaining valid period, and the longer the remaining valid period, the more Since it is configured so that the number of subjugated monsters is reduced, even if the button is pressed at a fast pace, it is possible to prevent the number of monsters from being subjugated at an early stage up to the minimum number of monsters. In other words, it is possible to prevent the decrease of the number of monsters based on the depression of the remaining 10 bodies or the remaining 4 bodies, which are likely to be set in the case of losing, from being stopped and the player's expectation for the big win being spoiled. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved. In addition, even when a player whose pressing pace is slow is playing a game, pressing in the latter half of the continuous hitting effective period makes it easier to select a relatively large number of subjugations, so that the lower limit number of monsters can be reached. can make it more likely. Therefore, even a player whose pressing pace is slow can be entertained with the continuous interrupt effect, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, referring to FIG. 400(a), in an effect in which continuous operation of the PUSH button 10317 is effective, such as an interrupting repeated hit effect, an operation (pressing) of the PUSH button 10317 is performed within the continuous hit effective period of the effect. A description will be given of the output mode of the sound that is output each time it is detected. As shown in FIG. 400(a), each time a push (operation) on the PUSH button 10317 is detected during the repeated hitting valid period, the voice output device 226 (see FIG. 423), which will be described later, is activated to reproduce voice data. Audio data corresponding to pressing is reproduced for either CN2 or CN3 among the plurality of provided channels. More specifically, when the pressing is detected for the first time in the repeated hitting valid period, the first voice data (first repeated hitting sound) is reproduced for CN2. As shown in FIG. 400(a), the sound data corresponding to the first repeated hitting sound is composed of sound data that outputs a sound of "busy" when reproduced. Further, when the second depression is detected in the repeated hitting valid period, the second voice data (second repeated hitting sound) is reproduced for CN3. The sound data corresponding to this second repeated hitting sound is composed of sound data that outputs a sound of "bushi-ooh" when reproduced, as shown in FIG. 400(a). Thereafter, every time a depression is detected, the control for reproducing the audio data corresponding to the first repeated tapping sound for CN2 and the control for reproducing the audio data corresponding to the second repeated tapping sound for CN3 are alternately performed. is repeated to In this way, by outputting audio data corresponding to a different sound each time a depression is detected, it is possible to diversify the audio mode during continuous hitting. In other words, since it is possible to prevent the voice mode from becoming monotonous, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game during the repeated hitting valid period. Also, in the case of a configuration in which the first repeated sound and the second repeated sound are simply played alternately on a single channel (that is, control is performed to stop the output of one sound during reproduction and output the other sound). ), it is possible to output one sound while maintaining the output state of the other sound (the first repeated sound and the second repeated sound are output in duplicate). Therefore, it is possible to make the voice mode more lively during execution of repeated hits. More specifically, in a configuration in which the first repeated hit sound and the second repeated hit sound are alternately reproduced in a single channel, when a player who has a short interval between repeated hits performs the repeated hit operation, the leading portion of each sound data This results in a monotonous voice mode in which only the voices are alternately repeated. On the other hand, if a plurality of audio data are sequentially reproduced on a plurality of channels, the output of one audio data reproduced on one channel is not interrupted, and other audio data is reproduced on other channels. can be played. That is, it is possible to synthesize and output a sound based on one sound data and a sound based on another sound data. Therefore, since it is possible to easily output sounds other than the beginning part of each sound, it is possible to further diversify the sound modes. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in this first control example, each time the push button 10317 is pressed, two types of audio data are alternately reproduced on two channels, thereby diversifying the audio mode. The configuration is not limited to this, and three or more types of audio data may be alternately reproduced in order on CN1 and CN2. This makes it possible to further diversify voice modes. In this case, the number of channels for reproducing the audio data is not limited to two, and the audio data may be sequentially reproduced for three or more channels. By configuring in this way, after one audio data is reproduced for one channel, until the next audio data is reproduced for the same channel (the audio data being reproduced is terminated). can be made longer, it is possible to further diversify the voice modes. Furthermore, the type of the audio data to be output may be changed according to the interval of successive hits. Specifically, for example, when a player is playing a game with a relatively short interval between consecutive hits (for example, 0.5 seconds or less), three types of sound modes are reproduced in order on three channels. On the other hand, when a player is playing a game with a relatively long interval between consecutive hits (for example, an interval longer than 0.5 seconds), two types of audio data are sent to two channels in order. It may be configured to reproduce (alternately). By configuring in this way, it is possible to vary the output mode of the sound according to the interval of successive hits, so that it is possible to realize the playability of adjusting the interval of repeated hits. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.

In the first control example, it is configured to output one of the repeated hitting sounds in conjunction with the repeated hitting operation. . More specifically, for example, if the last repeated hit sound output during the effective period of the repeated hit operation is the first repeated hit sound, the second repeated hit sound may be output after the end of the repeated hit sound. With this configuration, although the first repeated hitting sound and the second repeated hitting sound are output as a set according to the repeated hitting operation, the last output sound is the first repeated hitting sound. (That is, the paired second repeated hitting sound is not output), and it is possible to prevent the voice mode from becoming incomplete. Therefore, the voice mode can be set more preferably. In this case, if the last repeated hitting sound is the first repeated hitting sound, the control to output the second repeated hitting sound after the end is changed to a variation display ( For example, it may be configured to be set only during the execution of the jackpot variation). By constructing in this way, for the player who desires to know whether or not it is a predetermined variation type, the last continuous hitting sound to be output during the interrupt continuous hitting effect is dared to be the first repeated hitting sound. It is possible to realize the playability. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the first control example, the first repeated hit sound and the second repeated hit sound are alternately output regardless of the interval between repeated hits by the player, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured such that the first repeated hitting sound is always output when the repeated hitting operation is detected while no sound is being reproduced. That is, if the interval between repeated hits is too long and the next repeated hit operation is executed after the reproduction of the first repeated hit sound is completed, only the first repeated hit sound will continue to be output. may be configured. By constructing in this way, a player who desires to diversify the voice modes can be made to perform the continuous hitting operation at a faster pace, so that the player's willingness to participate in the interruption continuous hitting performance can be improved. be able to.

Next, with reference to FIG. 400(b), the correspondence relationship between the press timing in the continuous hitting valid period of the interrupt continuous hitting effect and the subtraction number of the monster will be described. In the example of FIG. 400, a description will be given by taking as an example the correspondence relationship in the type of interrupt continuous hitting effect that enables subjugation of up to 100 monsters. FIG. 400(b) is a graph showing the correspondence relationship between the elapsed time (horizontal axis) at the time when the depression of the PUSH button 10317 is detected and the number of monsters defeated (vertical axis). As shown in FIG. 400(b), the later the pressing timing is, the more monsters are subtracted (killed). As a result, even if the player presses the PUSH button 10317 at a fast pace, it is possible to prevent the number of monsters from being quickly defeated to the minimum number. In other words, it is possible to prevent the decrease of the number of monsters based on the depression of the remaining 10 bodies or the remaining 4 bodies, which are likely to be set in the case of losing, from being stopped and the player's expectation for the big win being spoiled. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved. In addition, even when a player whose pressing pace is slow is playing a game, pressing in the latter half of the continuous hitting effective period makes it easier to select a relatively large number of subjugations, so that the lower limit number of monsters can be reached. can make it more likely. Therefore, even a player whose pressing pace is slow can be entertained with the continuous interrupt effect, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Note that the correspondence relationship between the pressing timing and the subtraction number of the monster is not limited to that shown in FIG. 400(b), and can be determined arbitrarily. Specifically, for example, by reducing the inclination (for example, halving) of the corresponding relationship shown in FIG. You can make it more difficult to subtract monsters until Therefore, since it is possible to make the player perform the repeated hits more seriously, it is possible to further increase the player's willingness to participate in the interrupt repeated hits effect. On the other hand, if the slope is increased, it is relatively easy to reduce the number of monsters until the number of monsters reaches the minimum number by repeated hits. It becomes possible to easily confirm. Therefore, even a player who is not good at repeated hits can be made to actively participate in the interrupt repeated hit effect. In addition, in the first control example, the correspondence relationship between the pressing timing and the subtraction number of the monster was configured to be a proportional relationship (linear function). An arbitrary correspondence relation such as a correspondence relation or an exponential correspondence relation can be set by the designer. Further, the correspondence relationship may be configured to be different according to the effect type of the continuous interrupt effect. By configuring in this way, it is possible to realize a game property in which the player can predict the degree of expectation for a big win even from the transition of the subtraction number in repeated hits, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 401, a description will be given of changes over time in the effect mode during the execution of the variable display effect in which the continuous interrupt effect is set. First, with reference to FIG. 401(a), the change over time of the effect mode during execution of the variable display effect in which the repeated interrupt effect is not executed will be described. As shown in FIG. 401(a), when the variable effect in which the interrupt continuous hit effect is not set is executed, the normal variable display is executed for 10 seconds. Then, while the normal variable display is being executed, the variable display BGM (music 1) corresponding to the normal variable display is loop-reproduced. This song 1 has three melody parts, A part, B part, and C part. is configured to

Then, as shown in FIG. 401(a), normal reach occurs after 10 seconds have passed, and the display mode changes to the variable display mode of normal reach. When this normal reach occurs, as shown in FIG. 401(a), the sound is switched to BGM (music 2) corresponding to normal reach variation. As with the music 1, the music 2 is also loop-reproduced so that the reproduction time is set so as to end in time with the normal reach performance.

On the other hand, in the variable display effect in which the interrupt continuous hit effect occurs before the normal reach effect occurs, as shown in FIG. , The normal variable display effect is interrupted, and the interrupt continuous hit effect is started (interrupted). When the interrupt continuous hit effect is executed, not only the display mode (normal variable display effect) but also the sound (normal variable display BGM) is interrupted. Then, when 9 seconds have passed since the start of the fluctuation (when 7 seconds have passed since the start of the interrupt repeated hitting effect), the interrupt repeated hitting effect is ended, and the normal changing display effect and the changing display BGM are resumed from the interruption point. After that, at the timing when 17 seconds have passed since the start of the fluctuation, the normal fluctuation display ends and the normal reach occurs. That is, normal reach occurs after the normal variable display is performed for a total of 10 seconds. After progressing to normal reach, the transition of the display mode is the same as that in the variable display in which the interrupt continuous hit effect is not set (see FIG. 401(a)), so the description thereof will be omitted here.

In addition, in the variable display effect in which the interrupt continuous hit effect occurs after the normal ready-to-win effect occurs, as shown in FIG. Up to this point, it is the same as the transition of the display mode of the variable display effect in which the interrupt continuous hit effect is not set (see FIG. 401(a)). Then, when 5 seconds have passed since the development to the normal ready-to-win effect, the normal ready-to-win effect is interrupted, and the interruption repeated hitting effect is executed for 7 seconds. Then, when the continuous hitting effect for 7 seconds ends, the interrupted normal ready-to-win effect is resumed. It should be noted that, when the interruption continuous hit effect is executed after the occurrence of the reach, only the display mode is interrupted, and the voice output mode is maintained as it is. In other words, while maintaining the reproduction of the BGM for the ready-to-win effect, the BGM for the repeated interrupt effect is reproduced in other channels (eg, CN2 to CN4). By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the relatively lively BGM for the ready-to-win effect from being suddenly interrupted and making the player feel uncomfortable.

In addition, in this first control example, as the types of fluctuations in which normal reach occurs, normal reach with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds (missing normal reach A, hit normal reach A) and normal reach with a fluctuation time of 37 seconds (missing normal reach B, hit normal reach B ) are provided. That is, different variation types with different variation times are set for 7 seconds, which is the effect time of the interrupt continuous hit effect. Then, the execution of the continuous interrupt effect is determined by lottery only in the case of a variation type with a variation time of 37 seconds. By configuring in this way, by combining a production mode (a production mode for 30 seconds) that can be set for a variation pattern of 30 seconds and a production mode of continuous interrupting production, a variation time of exactly 37 seconds can be obtained. can be filled. That is, since it is no longer necessary to provide a dedicated effect mode when the interrupt continuous hit effect is set, it is possible to reduce display data and sound data. Therefore, the storage capacity of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced. Similarly, for the variation type that does not generate reach and the variation type that develops to super reach, multiple types with different variation times of 7 seconds are set. It is configured so that it can be set only for As a result, the storage capacity of the pachinko machine 10 can be increased because the variation time that is longer by 7 seconds can be filled just by combining the performance mode that can be selected in the variation type that is shorter by 7 seconds and the performance mode of the continuous interrupting performance. It is possible to suitably execute the production without

Here, although the details will be described later, in this first control example, along with the execution of the special symbol lottery, the fluctuation time of the first symbol for indicating the special symbol lottery result is determined by lottery in the main controller 110. Then, the determined variation time is notified to the sound lamp control device 113 by a variation pattern command. Then, the voice lamp control device 113 selects the variable display effect of the effect period that matches the variable time notified by the variable pattern command, synchronizes with the variable display of the first pattern, and the variable display effect of the third pattern. is configured to execute The variation pattern command output from the main controller 110 is composed of a basic time command indicating a basic variation time and an additional time command indicating an additional variation time. Whether or not is notified by an additional time command. More specifically, when a variation pattern of a variation time of 30 seconds is determined, a command corresponding to 30 seconds is notified as a basic time command, and a command corresponding to 0 seconds is issued as an additional variation time. be notified. On the other hand, when a variation pattern with a variation time of 37 seconds is determined, a command corresponding to 30 seconds is notified as the basic time command, and a command corresponding to 7 seconds is notified as the additional variation time. . In other words, it is configured to be able to identify whether or not it is a variation type longer by 7 seconds depending on the notification content of the additional time command. As a result, it is possible to determine whether or not the change type is a lottery target for whether or not to execute the interrupt continuous hitting effect, simply by confirming the content of the additional time command. Further, when it is decided to execute the interrupt continuous hit effect, the variable time can be filled by setting the effect mode corresponding to the variable time notified by the basic time command (the variable time shorter by 7 seconds). can. Therefore, it is possible to easily match the end timing of the performance mode with the end timing of the variable display performance without preparing a performance mode dedicated to the interrupt continuous hitting performance, so that a suitable performance mode can be provided.

Next, with reference to FIG. 402 to FIG. 403, the pending batch change effect, which is a type of interest effect in the first control example, will be described. This pending collective change effect is an effect that may be executed when there are a plurality of pending balls. It is an effect that changes to a highly anticipated display mode based on the operation of . In FIGS. 402 to 403, there are four reserved balls, and the second reserved ball number pattern Hz2 is changed to a blue display mode, and the third reserved ball number pattern Hz3 is changed to a green display mode. , the case where the pending collective change effect is executed will be described as an example. It should be noted that the display mode of the number of pending ball symbols is configured so that the expectation of a big win increases in the order of white, blue, green, and red. The display mode of the number of pending balls is basically, when the start winning (entering the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640) is detected, various types acquired based on the starting winning It is determined based on a random value (counter value). In more detail, from the various random values obtained at the time of the start winning, predict in advance (read ahead) whether the special symbol lottery will be executed and the type of fluctuation, and according to the prediction result (read ahead result) At the selected lottery probability, a lottery is made to determine which display mode the reserved ball number pattern is to be set. In this lottery, control is performed such that the higher the prospective result corresponding to the lottery result with the higher degree of expectation, the higher the percentage of the number of pending balls symbols set in the form of the higher degree of expectation. It should be noted that the timing of the start winning is variable according to the game situation of the player (pace of game ball launch, etc.), so the pending collective change effect is executed independently of the variable display effect. . In other words, it is an effect that may be executed over a plurality of variable display effect fluctuation periods (possibly within one fluctuation period).

FIG. 402(a) is a diagram showing a display mode when the pending batch change effect is executed. This pending collective change effect may be executed when a plurality of pending balls are present at the time when a new start winning prize is detected. When the pending collective change effect is executed, first, a pending change character HC suggesting the start of the pending collective change effect is framed in from the top of the display screen. As shown in FIG. 402(a), this hold change character HC is displayed in a manner that imitates the PUSH button 10317 in the part corresponding to the face. This display mode of the pending change character HC can suggest to the player in advance that the effect of pressing the PUSH button 10371 will be executed.

After the pending change character HC appears (into the frame), as shown in FIG. 402(b), all of the pending ball symbols Hz1 to Hz4 are changed to a rock-like display mode. That is, the degree of expectation indicated by the number of pending balls pattern (the display color of the number of pending balls pattern) is temporarily changed to a hidden state. Moreover, a balloon image FG imitating a balloon is displayed above the hold change character HC, and inside the balloon image FG, a character saying "Press button PUSH to increase hold rank!?" is displayed. With this display mode, the player can easily understand that the degree of expectation (display color) of one of the reserved ball number symbols is improved by pressing the PUSH button 10317. can.

FIG. 403(a) is a diagram showing a display mode when the player presses the PUSH button 10317 during execution of the pending collective change effect. As shown in FIG. 403( a ), when the player presses the PUSH button 10317 , the rocks around all the reserved ball numbers symbols that have been changed to a rock-like display mode pop off, and normal reserved balls are displayed. An effect of returning to the display mode of several symbols is executed. In addition, at this time, the degree of expectation indicated by at least a part of the reserved number of balls symbols increases compared to before the occurrence of the reserved collective change effect. In the example of FIG. 403(a), the second reserved ball number pattern Hz2, which had been set to a blue display mode before execution of the pending collective change effect, was changed to a red display mode through the pending collective change effect. indicates the case.

By executing this pending batch change effect, it is confirmed that the degree of expectation indicated by at least one pending ball number symbol is increased, so that the player's sense of expectation for the big win can be improved. In addition, since it is not known until the PUSH button 10317 is pressed, which pattern of the number of pending balls will change (increase in the degree of expectation), the operation on the PUSH button 10317 is fun to see which pattern of the number of pending balls will change. can be done. Furthermore, since the degree of expectation is notified by pressing the PUSH button 10317, the notification timing can be adjusted to the player's favorite timing. Therefore, convenience for the player can be improved.

FIG. 403(b) shows a state in which the suspension change character HC (mini character) fades out of the screen during the effective period of the suspension collective change effect. When the pending change character HC fades out to the outside of the screen, even if the operation valid period in the pending collective change performance remains, the valid period is interrupted. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 403(b), even if the player presses the PUSH button 10317, an effect (see FIG. 403(a)) in which the degree of expectation of each reserved ball number symbol changes is executed. no. This effect in which the mini character is absent is executed, for example, when another operation effect involving the operation of the PUSH button 10317 conflicts with the pending collective change effect. The absence of the pending change character HC corresponding to the pending collective change effect makes it possible for the player to easily understand that the valid operation period is temporarily interrupted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling dissatisfied with the fact that the operation of the PUSH button 10317 is misunderstood as effective in the pending batch change effect and the effect does not develop. Therefore, it is possible to realize a more suitable presentation mode.

<Electrical Configuration in First Control Example>
Next, referring to FIG. 404, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 404 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are incorporated. In addition, various commands are transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub-controller by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the operation of the sub-controller such as the payout controller 111 and the sound lamp controller 113. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

The main controller 110 executes major processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as a jackpot lottery, setting of display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of the display result in the second symbol display device 83. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer (see FIG. 405) that stores various counters for controlling these processes.

Here, with reference to FIG. 405, counters and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described. These counters and the like are used by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 in order to set the jackpot lottery, the display settings of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the lottery of the display results of the second symbol display device 83, and the like. used in

For setting the jackpot lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third pattern display device 81, a special winning random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery, a special winning type counter C2 used for selecting the jackpot symbol, A stop type counter C3 used for selecting a stop type, a falling lottery counter C4 used for a falling lottery from a probability variable state of special symbols, a variation type counter CS1 used for selecting a variation pattern, and a special winning random number counter. An initial value random number counter CINI1 used to set the initial value of C1 is used. Also, a normal winning random number counter C5 is used for lottery of normal symbols (second symbol display device 83), and a normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the normal winning random number counter C5. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 425), and some counters are updated irregularly during the main processing (see FIG. 434). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 . The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a consisting of four reserved areas (first to fourth reserved areas). Each value of the special winning random number counter C1, the special winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the falling lottery counter C4, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in accordance with the timing. In addition, the RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b consisting of four reserved areas (first to fourth reserved areas). Each value of the special winning random number counter C1, the special winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the drop lottery counter C4, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in accordance with the timing of entering the ball. In addition, the RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol reserved ball execution area, and a special winning random number counter C1, a special winning type counter C2, a stop type selection counter C3, a falling lottery counter C4, and a variable Each value of the type counter CS1 is stored. Further, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c consisting of one execution area and four reserved areas (first to fourth reserved areas). The value of the normal winning random number counter C5 is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through the normal entrance (through gate) 67. - 特許庁

Each counter will be described in detail. The special hit random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 999), and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 999 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 999). It is configured to return. In particular, when the special winning random number counter C1 makes one cycle, the value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the special winning random number counter C1.

The initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the special winning random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the special winning random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0-999, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter that ranges from 0-999. This initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 425) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 434).

The value of the special hit random number counter C1 is, for example, periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), and when the game ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the value It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM203. On the other hand, when the game ball enters the second ball entrance 640, the value is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b.

The value of the random number for the special symbol jackpot is set by the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 407(a)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the value of the special winning random number counter C1 is If it matches the value of the random number set by the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a, it is determined as a special symbol jackpot. In addition, this special symbol jackpot random number table 202a is for when the probability of special symbols is low (a period in which the probability of special symbols is low), and when the probability of winning a special symbol is high (special 407(a)). In this way, by varying the number of random numbers that result in a big win, the probability of a big win is changed between when the probability of special symbols is low and when the probability of special symbols is high.

The special winning type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol jackpot is won, and is incremented one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). , and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take values from 0 to 99). The value of the special hit type counter C2, for example, is periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), and when the game ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the value is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 (special symbol reserved ball execution area when the special symbol lottery is not being executed). On the other hand, when the game ball enters the second ball entrance 640, the value is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 (if the special symbol lottery is not being executed, the special symbol reserved ball execution area ).

Here, if the value of the special winning random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol reserved ball execution area is not a random number that will result in a special symbol jackpot, that is, if it is a random number that will result in an omission of the special symbol, display the first symbol. The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the device 37 is the one when the special symbol is out.

On the other hand, if the value of the special winning random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol reserved ball execution area is a random number for a special symbol jackpot, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37. will be the one at the time of the special pattern jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the special winning type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Become.

The special winning random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter ranging from 0 to 999. FIG. In this special winning random number counter C1, there are four random numbers that become a special symbol jackpot when the probability of special symbols is low, and the random numbers "0 to 3" are the special symbol jackpot random number table for when the probability is low. (see FIG. 407(a)). In this way, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that will be a big hit is 4 among the total number of random numbers of 1000, so the probability that the special symbol will be a big hit is "1/250". It should be noted that the random number value (counter value) to be a big hit is common to the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol.

On the other hand, when the probability of special symbols is high, there are 8 random numbers that will be the special symbol jackpot, and the values "4 to 11" are stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability ( Figure 407(a)). In this way, when the probability of the special symbol is high, the total number of random numbers that become a big hit is 8 among the total number of random numbers of 1000, so the probability of a big win of the special symbol is "1/125".

Further, the value of the special winning type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a loop counter within the range of 0-99. Then, as shown in FIG. 408(b), when the lottery of the first special symbol results in a big hit and the value of the special winning type counter C2 is "0 to 9", the jackpot type is "jackpot A" (15 Round probability variation jackpot). In addition, when the value is "10 to 49", the jackpot type is "jackpot B" (5 round probability variable jackpot), and when the value is "50 to 99", the jackpot type is "jackpot C". (5 rounds normal jackpot).

On the other hand, when the second special symbol lottery results in a big hit and the value of the special winning type counter C2 is "0 to 79", the jackpot type is "jackpot D" (15 round probability variable jackpot). Also, when the value is "80 to 99", the jackpot type is "jackpot E" (15-round normal jackpot).

In this way, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment selects one jackpot type out of five jackpot types (jackpots A to E) depending on the type of special symbol and the value of the random number indicated by the special hit type counter C2. configured to be determined.

The stop type selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by one within a range of 0 to 250, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 250). In this embodiment, the stop type of the stop symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is selected by the stop type selection counter C3. As the stop type, for example, after the occurrence of the reach, the final stop symbol is shifted to the front or back of the reach symbol by one and stops, "front and back reach", or after the occurrence of the reach, the final stop symbol is before or after the reach symbol. "Reach other than front and rear out" that stops at other than, "Complete out" that does not occur reach, etc. are selected. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is, for example, periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), and when a game ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the value is stored in the RAM 203. is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a (special symbol reserved ball execution area when special symbol lottery is not being executed). Also, when the game ball enters the second ball entrance 640, the value is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 (special symbol reserved ball execution area when the special symbol lottery is not being executed). Stored.

The fluctuation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). Rough display modes such as so-called normal reach and super reach are determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1. Determination of the display mode is, specifically, determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the variation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the reach type of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the detailed symbol variation mode are determined by the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. be. The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the main process (see FIG. 434), which will be described later, is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process. It should be noted that the variation pattern table 202b (see FIG. 409(a)) storing a random number value for determining one variation time of symbol variation from the value (random number value) of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. is provided in

Next, with reference to FIGS. 409 and 410, the variation pattern selection table 202b used when main controller 110 selects a variation pattern will be described. FIG. 409(a) is a diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern selection table 202b. As shown in FIG. 409(a), the variation pattern selection table 202b in the first control example is a symbol variation for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol when the lottery of the special symbol is executed in the normal state. Normal table 202b1 referred to for determining the variation time and the game state (probability variation state and time reduction state) in which the normal symbol time reduction state is set When the special symbol lottery is executed, the symbol variation It is configured at least with a table 202b2 for probability variation/time reduction that is referred to for determining the variation time.

First, the normal table 202b1 will be described with reference to FIG. 409(b). FIG. 409(b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of this normal table 202b1. In this normal table 202b1, various variation patterns are defined corresponding to the lottery results of special symbols, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 and the variation type counter CS1 and values are assigned. Also, if the result of the determination is a hit, the variation pattern corresponding to the determined jackpot type (jackpot type determined from the jackpot type selection table 202d by the value of the acquired special hit type counter C2) is set. Specifically, the special symbol type (symbol type) is the first special symbol (special symbol 1), the success/failure determination result is a jackpot, and the value of the acquired stop type selection counter C3 is "0 to 50". When the obtained value of the variation type selection counter CS1 is "0 to 180", normal reach A is defined as a variation pattern with a variation time of 30 seconds. When the hit normal reach A is determined, a combination command indicating a basic time of 30 seconds and an additional time of 0 seconds is output as a variation pattern command. Since the additional time is 0 seconds, when the hit normal reach A is notified to the sound lamp control device 113, as described above, the interrupt continuous hit effect (see FIG. 399) is not executed. Also, when the value of the acquired stop type selection counter C3 is "0 to 50" and the value of the acquired variation type selection counter CS1 is "181 to 198", the variation pattern is 37 seconds per normal reach B is stipulated. When the hit normal reach B is determined, a combination command indicating a basic time of 30 seconds and an additional time of 7 seconds is output as a variation pattern command. Since the additional time is 7 seconds, when the hit normal reach B is notified to the sound lamp control device 113, as described above, a lottery is drawn as to whether or not the interrupt continuous hit effect (see FIG. 399) can be executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 409(b), the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is "51 to 250", and the value of the variation type selection counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 150". , a super reach A per variation time of 60 seconds is defined, and a super reach B per variation time of 67 seconds is defined in the range of the value of the variation type selection counter CS1 from "151 to 198". In winning super reach A, since the additional time is 0 seconds, there is no possibility that an interrupting continuous hit effect will be executed, while in winning super reach B, an additional time command indicating that the additional time is 7 seconds is voiced. Since the notification is sent to the lamp control device 113, a lottery is drawn as to whether or not the interrupt continuous hit effect can be executed.

Similarly, when the symbol type is special figure 1 and the success/failure determination result is out, as shown in FIG. A variation pattern is defined in which a variation time of 8 seconds to 67 seconds is set. Even in the case of deviation, in the variation pattern in which the additional time command corresponding to the additional time of 7 seconds is specified, the execution of the interrupt continuous hit effect is randomly selected in the voice lamp control device 113, while the additional time of 0 seconds is selected. In the variation pattern in which the additional time command corresponding to is stipulated, the interrupt repeated hit effect is not executed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 409 (b), if the symbol type is special figure 2, the result of the hit/fail determination is hit (jackpot D, jackpot E), the value of the stop type selection counter C3, and the variation type selection counter Regardless of the value of CS1, long fluctuation A with a fluctuation time of 150 seconds is defined as a fluctuation pattern, and if the result of the judgment is wrong, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 and the value of the fluctuation type selection counter CS1 An off-long variation with a variation time of 150 seconds is specified, regardless of the value. This is because, in the normal state, the distribution of the jackpot is advantageous (that is, the ratio of the probability variable jackpot is high), and when the player hits to the right to execute the lottery for the second special symbol, the game efficiency is deteriorated. This is intended to suppress an irregular game method in which the player hits to the right normally.

Next, with reference to FIG. 410, the defined contents of the table 202b2 for variable probability/reduction of working hours will be described. Also in the probability variation / time saving table 202b2, as shown in FIG. 410, various variation patterns are set in correspondence with the lottery result of the special symbol, and for each of the variation patterns, the stop type selection counter C3 and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 are allocated. In addition, in the probability variation / time saving table 202b2, relative to the normal table 202b1, it is easy to set a relatively short variation time, and the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery Common variation time Since the only difference is that it is configured to select , a detailed description thereof will be omitted here. By structuring such that a short variable time can be easily set, during the probability variable state in which the time saving state of normal patterns is set and the time saving state, the lottery of special patterns can be executed more efficiently than other game states. can do.

Returning to FIG. 405, the description continues. The normal hit random number counter C5 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by 1 in sequence within the range of 0 to 239, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the normal winning random number counter C5 completes one cycle, the value of the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the normal winning random number counter C5. In the present embodiment, the value of the normal random number counter C5 is updated, for example, periodically for each timer interrupt process, and is acquired when it is detected that the game ball has passed through the through gate 67, and the normal symbol is reserved in the RAM 203. It is stored in the ball storage area 203d.

Then, the value of the random number that becomes the normal winning pattern is defined in the normal winning random number table 202c (see FIG. 407(b)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the normal winning random number counter C5 is If the value of the random number that becomes a win defined in the normal winning random number table 202c is matched, it is determined as a normal symbol win. In addition, this normal random number table is for normal patterns when the probability is low (the period when the normal pattern is normal) and when the probability of winning the normal pattern is higher than the low probability (normal pattern time reduction). 407(b)). In this way, by making the number of random numbers to be winning different, the probability of winning is changed between when the probability of normal symbols is low and when the probability of normal symbols is high.

As shown in FIG. 407(b), when the probability of the normal symbol is low, there are two random numbers that are normal symbols, and the values are "5, 6". In this way, when the probability of normal symbols is low, the total number of random numbers that will be a big hit is 2 among the total number of random numbers of 240, so the probability of a big win of special symbols is "1/120".

When the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal pattern low probability mode, when the game ball passes through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, the value of the normal winning random number counter C5 is acquired, and the second pattern display device 83 is obtained. In , the variable display of normal symbols is executed for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired normal winning random number counter C5 is within the range of "5, 6", it is determined to be winning, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol ), and the electric accessory 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640 is opened only for "0.2 seconds x 1 time". In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of normal symbols, the electric accessory 640a is opened only for "0.2 seconds x 1 time" when the normal symbols are won. The time and number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "0.5 sec x 2 times".

On the other hand, there are 200 random numbers for the normal symbol jackpot when the probability of the normal symbol is high, and the range is "5 to 204". These random numbers are stored in a normal winning random number table for high probability. In this way, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that will be a big hit is 200 out of the total number of random numbers of 240, so the probability of a big win of the special symbol is "1/1.2".

When the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal pattern high probability state, when the game ball passes through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, the value of the normal winning random number counter C5 is obtained, and the second pattern display device 83. At , the variable display of normal symbols is executed for 3 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired normal winning random number counter C5 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that the normal design winning. In this case, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol "○" is illuminated and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol), and the electric accessory 640a is opened "1 second x 2 times". be done. In this way, when the probability of the normal symbols is high, the variable display time is very short, from 30 seconds to 3 seconds, compared to when the probability of the normal symbols is low. Since it becomes very long as “0.2 seconds×1 time→1 second×2 times”, the game ball easily enters the second ball entrance 640 . In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of normal symbols, the electric accessory 64a is opened only "1 second x 2 times" when the normal symbols are won. The number of times can be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "3 seconds x 2 times".

The normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the normal random number counter C5 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once per timer interrupt processing (see Fig. 425). , is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 434).

In this way, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 controls the big winning lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the values of the counters and the like. Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result in the second pattern display device 83 can be executed.

Returning to FIG. 404, the description continues. The RAM 203 includes a counter buffer shown in FIG. 405, a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags and counters, and an I/O memory. and a work area (work area) in which values such as are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When the power supply is cut off due to a power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of the power interruption (including the time of power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was turned off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 30) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by the start-up process (see FIG. 433) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. , NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 432) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

Next, specific contents of the ROM 202 will be described with reference to FIG. 406(a). FIG. 406(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110 in this embodiment. In the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, as part of the fixed value data described above, a special symbol jackpot random number table 202a, a variation pattern selection table 202b, a normal hit random number table 202c, a jackpot type selection table 202d, a drop lottery table 202e, and an open At least a pattern selection table 202f is stored.

The special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 407(a)) is a data table that defines the correspondence between the value of the first winning random number counter C1 and the lottery result. Specifically, in the low probability state of the special design, "0 to 3" is defined as the range of the determination value that is determined to be a big hit, and in the high probability state of the special design (variable state), the judgment that it is determined to be a big hit "4 to 11" is defined as the value range (see FIG. 407(a)). When the value of the first winning random number counter C1 acquired based on the starting winning matches with one of the judgment values corresponding to the big winning defined in this special symbol big winning random number table 202a (see FIG. 407(a)) , is determined to be a special symbol jackpot.

The jackpot type selection table 202b (see FIG. 408(a)) is a data table in which the determination value for determining the jackpot type is stored for each type of special symbol, and the determination value of the special hit type counter C2 is It is defined in association with each jackpot type. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined to be a special symbol jackpot, the value of the special hit type counter C2 acquired based on the start winning is compared with the jackpot type selection table 202b, and the special hit type counter A jackpot type corresponding to the value of C2 is selected.

As shown in FIG. 408(a), the jackpot type selection table 202b is a special figure that is referred to for determining the jackpot type when the first special symbol lottery (lottery of the special figure 1) results in a jackpot. 1 jackpot table 202d1 and a special figure 2 jackpot table 202d2 that is referenced to determine the jackpot type when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol (lottery of the special figure 2). ing. First, with reference to FIG. 408(a), the details of the special figure 1 jackpot table 202d1 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 408(b), the value of the special hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "0 to 9" in association with "jackpot A" (see FIG. 408(b)). This "jackpot A" has 15 rounds, and after the jackpot ends, a variable probability state is given (the opening and closing pattern that allows the ball to enter the specific winning hole 65a during the period allocated to the V area is set. ) is a big hit. Of the 100 possible counter values of the special winning type counter C2, 10 counter values become ``jackpot A'', so when the first special symbol lottery results in a jackpot, ``jackpot A'' is determined. The proportion is 10% (10/100). This "jackpot A" has the largest number of rounds among the jackpots of the first special symbol, and is given an advantageous variable state after the jackpot is completed, so it is the most advantageous jackpot among the jackpots of the first special symbol. It is a type.

In addition, the value of the special hit type counter C2 is defined in association with the "jackpot B" in the range of "10 to 49" (see FIG. 408(b)). This "jackpot B" has 5 rounds, and after the jackpot ends, a variable probability state is given (the opening and closing pattern that allows the ball to enter the specific winning hole 65a during the period allocated to the V area is set. ) is a big hit. Of the 100 possible counter values of the special winning type counter C2, 40 counter values become ``jackpot B'', so when the first special symbol lottery results in a jackpot, ``jackpot B'' is determined. The proportion is 40% (40/100). This "jackpot B" has a smaller number of rounds than the "jackpot A", but is a relatively advantageous jackpot type because an advantageous variable probability state is provided after the jackpot ends.

In addition, the value of the special hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "50 to 99" in association with "jackpot C" (see FIG. 408(b)). This "jackpot C" has 5 rounds, and after the jackpot ends, a time-saving state is given (the opening and closing pattern that makes it impossible to enter the specific winning port 65a during the period allocated to the V area is set. It is a big hit. Of the 100 possible counter values of the special winning type counter C2, 50 counter values are the ``jackpot C'', so the ``jackpot C'' is determined when the first special symbol lottery results in a jackpot. The proportion is 50% (50/100). This "jackpot C" is the most disadvantageous jackpot type among the first special pattern jackpots because it has the smallest number of rounds and the game state after the jackpot ends is set to a comparatively disadvantageous time-saving state. . It is configured to be a probability change at a lower rate than.

Next, with reference to FIG. 408(c), the details of the special figure 2 jackpot table 202d2 will be described. As shown in FIG. 408(c), the value of the special hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "0 to 79" in association with "jackpot D" (see FIG. 408(b)). This "jackpot D" has 15 rounds, and after the jackpot ends, a variable probability state is given (the opening and closing pattern that allows the ball to enter the specific winning hole 65a during the period allocated to the V area is set. ) is a big hit. Of the 100 possible counter values of the special winning type counter C2, 80 counter values are "jackpot D", so when the second special symbol lottery results in a big win, "jackpot D" is determined. The proportion is 80% (80/100). This "jackpot D" is the most advantageous jackpot type because it has the largest number of rounds among the jackpots and is given an advantageous variable probability state after the jackpot ends.

Further, as shown in FIG. 408(c), the value of the special hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "80 to 99" in association with "jackpot E" (see FIG. 408(b) ). This "jackpot E" has 15 rounds, and after the jackpot ends, a time-saving state is given (the opening and closing pattern that makes it impossible to enter the specific winning hole 65a during the period allocated to the V area is set. It is a big hit. Among the 100 possible counter values of the special winning type counter C2, 20 counter values become ``jackpot E'', so when the second special symbol lottery results in a jackpot, ``jackpot E'' is determined. The proportion is 20% (20/100). This "jackpot E" has the largest number of rounds among the jackpots, but is a jackpot type that is disadvantageous in terms of the game state after the jackpot is finished because a disadvantageous time-saving state is given after the jackpot is finished.

Thus, in this first control example, when the first special symbol lottery results in a big win, the probability variable big wins (jackpots A and B) are determined at a rate of 50%, while the second When a special pattern lottery results in a big win, a variable probability big win (jackpot D) is determined at a rate of 80%. Therefore, when the lottery for the second special symbol results in a big hit, the player can be made to expect the variable probability state more strongly. As described above, in the first control example, the case where the jackpot type is clearly indicated to the player is extremely rare (1% of the probability variable jackpot). After the end of the jackpot, the time-saving state of the normal symbols is maintained until the lottery of the special symbols is executed 100 times. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp whether the variable probability state or the time saving state is set during the period from the end of the big win until the lottery of the special symbols is executed 100 times. Even if a disadvantageous time saving state is set, a game can be played in anticipation of a variable probability state until the lottery of special symbols is executed 100 times. Also, if you hit a jackpot within 100 times, even if it was a jackpot in a time-saving state, you can make it seem like you hit a jackpot during the variable state, so you can enter the variable state more than it should. It can make you feel like you have a high rate and retention rate. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The normal hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 407(b)) is a data table that defines (stores) the hit determination value of the normal symbol. Specifically, in the normal state of the normal design, "5, 6" is defined as the determination value for winning the normal design (see FIG. 407(b)). In addition, in the high-probability state of the normal design, "5 to 204" is defined as the judgment value for winning the normal design (see FIG. 407(b)). In the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example, the value of the normal winning random number counter C4 acquired based on the game ball passing through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 and the normal winning random number table 202c are referred to. Then, it is determined whether or not it is a normal pattern hit.

The variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 409(a)) is a data table in which the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 for determining the display mode of the variation pattern is defined for each display mode. The details of the variation pattern selection table 202d are as described above in the description of the variation type counter CS1, so detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

The falling lottery table 202e is a data table that defines the determination value of the falling lottery counter C4 that is determined to be a fall. The value of the fall lottery counter C4 acquired when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 in the probability variable state of the special symbol (at the time of starting winning) is the fall lottery table 202e. If it matches any of the determination values defined in, it is set to shift to a special symbol low probability state (to fall down).

More specifically, two determination values of "0, 1" are defined as determination values determined to fall in the variable probability state of the special symbol. Here, the drop lottery counter C4 is a loop counter whose value is updated within the range of "0 to 999". Of the 1000 possible values of the falling lottery counter C4, there are two determination values for falling, so the probability of falling (moving to a low probability state of special symbols) in the variable probability state of special symbols. is 1/500 (2/1000).

It should be noted that, in the fall lottery table 202e in the present embodiment, only the determination value (determination value for the probability variation state of the special symbol) for determining whether or not to fall in the probability variation state of the special symbol is defined, and the special symbol Criteria for low-probability conditions are not specified. This is because it is useless to determine whether or not to shift to the special symbol low probability state when the special symbol low probability state has already been reached.

In the present embodiment, the drop lottery table 202e and the drop lottery counter C4 that is periodically updated are compared to determine whether or not to shift (fall) from the probability variable state of the special symbols to the low probability state of the special symbols. is determined. That is, the timing of shifting from the variable probability state to the time saving state can be made random. Therefore, when the state is shifted to the variable probability state, the player can play the game while having a sense of tension for not knowing when the variable probability state will end, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in the first control mode, it is determined whether or not to shift (fall) from the variable probability state of the special symbol to the low probability state of the special symbol (judgment), but it is possible to move to another state. A lottery (judgment) may be configured. For example, it may be determined by a lottery executed for each variation whether or not to shift from the time-saving state of normal symbols to the normal state of normal symbols. As a result, the number of continuation times of the time-saving state of the normal symbols can be randomized, so that in this case also, the game can be played with a sense of tension. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The opening pattern selection table 202f is a data table that defines data for setting a pattern according to the jackpot type as the opening pattern (opening/closing pattern of the specific winning opening 65a) in the fifth round of the jackpot. Although not shown, in the fifth round of the variable probability jackpot (jackpots A, B, D), the distribution device (V role) is arranged in a state of distributing the game balls to the first region (V region). During the period (5 seconds after the start of the 5th round to 10 seconds after the start of the 5th round), the release period (5 seconds after the start of the 5th round to 9.5 seconds) during which the game ball can reach the sorting device. Data for setting the open period until 5 seconds have passed is read out. On the other hand, in the 5th round of the normal jackpots (jackets C, E), the period during which the distribution device (V role) distributes the game balls to the second area (non-V area) (5 rounds start Set the open period (4.5 seconds from immediately after the start of the 5th round to 4.5 seconds after the start of the 5th round) during which the game ball can reach the sorting device during the period from immediately after the start to the time when 5 seconds have passed. data is read out.

Next, details of the RAM 203 will be described with reference to FIG. 406(b). FIG. 406(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main controller 110. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 403(b), the RAM 203 includes a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d, and a special symbol. 2 reserved ball number counter 203e, normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, time saving medium counter 203g, probability variable flag 203h, jackpot start flag 203i, jackpot medium flag 203j, probability variable setting flag 203k, probability variable passing counter 203m, winning number counter 203n, remaining It has at least a ball timer flag 203p, a remaining ball timer 203q, a variable probability effective flag 203r, a variable probability effective timer 203s, a discharge number counter 203t, and a memory area 203z.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a has four reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area), and each of these areas has a first hit random number counter C1 and a first hit type counter. Each value of C2 and stop type selection counter C3 is stored.

More specifically, at the timing when the game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (start winning), each value of each counter C1-C4, CS1 is acquired, the acquired data is stored in four holding areas Among the vacant areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), the area numbers (first to fourth) are stored in ascending order. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest winning is stored, and the first reserved area stores the data corresponding to the oldest winning. Note that if data is stored in all of the four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, in the main controller 110, when a special symbol lottery is performed, the values of the respective counters C1 to C4 and CS1 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a are the special symbols. It is shifted (moved) to the reserved ball special symbol reserved ball execution area (see FIG. 405), and based on the values of the counters C1 to C4 and CS1 stored in the execution area, determination of special symbol lottery etc. is done.

In addition, when the data is shifted from the first reserved area to the special symbol reserved ball execution area, the first reserved area becomes empty. Therefore, there is a shift process that packs the winning data stored in other reservation areas (second reservation area to fourth reservation area) to reservation areas (first reservation area to third reservation area) with an area number smaller by 1. done. In the first control example, in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, data shift is performed only for the reserved areas (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) in which winning data is stored.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b has four reserved areas like the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. Each counter value obtained based on the start winning to the second ball entrance 640 is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Since the counter value storage method and the like are the same as those of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c has one execution area and four reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area). Each of these areas stores a normal random number counter C5. More specifically, at the timing when the game ball passes through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, the value of the counter C5 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first area to holding 4th area) are stored in ascending order of area numbers (first to fourth). That is, like the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, the data corresponding to the winning are stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, in the main controller 110, when the normal symbol winning lottery is performed, the value of the counter C5 stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( ), and based on the value of the counter C5 stored in the execution area, a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed.

In addition, when the data is shifted from the first reserved area to the execution area, the first reserved area becomes empty. A shift process is performed to move winning data stored in other reserved areas to a reserved area with an area number smaller by one. Also, the data shift is performed only for the reserved areas in which the winning data are stored.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is a variable display (third symbol It is a counter that counts the number of held balls (waiting number of times) of the variable display performed on the display device 81 up to four times. The initial value of this special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and the maximum value is 4 each time a game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the number of reserved balls displayed in variable display increases. is incremented by 1 (see S404 in FIG. 428). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time a special symbol variable display is newly executed (see S210 in FIG. 426).

The value of this special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (number of times N1 of holding variable display in the first special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command (S211 in FIG. 426, S405 in FIG. 428 reference). The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113 every time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203e is changed.

The voice lamp control device 113 suspends the variable display suspended in the main controller 110 by the suspended ball number command sent from the main controller 110 every time the value of the special symbol 1 suspended ball number counter 203d is changed. You can get the value of the number of balls itself. As a result, the number of holding balls of variable display managed by the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223a of the sound lamp control device 113 is changed to the actual holding ball of variable display that was held by the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it deviates from the number, the deviation can be corrected by the next pending ball number command received.

In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of pending balls based on the number of pending balls command, and every time the number of pending balls changes, the display control device 114 is notified of the number of pending balls. Send a pitch command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number pattern on the third pattern display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is a variable display (third symbol It is a counter that counts the number of held balls (number of times of standby) of variable display performed on the display device 81 up to a maximum of 4 times. The initial value of this special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is set to zero, and the maximum value is 4 each time a game ball enters the second ball entrance 640 and the number of reserved balls displayed in a variable display increases. is incremented by 1 (see S410 in FIG. 428). On the other hand, the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 each time a special symbol variable display is newly executed (see S205 in FIG. 426). The value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is also notified to the sound lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command, similarly to the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d.

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is the normal symbol (second symbol) variable display held ball number ( This is a counter that counts the number of standby times up to four times. The initial value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is set to zero. (See S704 in FIG. 431). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S605 in FIG. 430).

When the game ball passes through the through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (the number M of holding fluctuation display in normal symbols) is less than 4, the value of the normal per random number counter C4 is obtained. , the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (S705 in FIG. 431). On the other hand, when the game ball passes through the through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (S703 in FIG. 431: No).

The time-saving medium counter 203g is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state with normal patterns, and if the value of the time-saving medium counter 203g is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state with normal patterns. If the value of the time saving medium counter 203g is 0 and the variable probability flag 203h is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of normal symbols. The initial value of the time-saving counter 203g is set to zero, and a lottery for special symbols is performed in the main control device 110, and 100 is set at the end of the big win every time the big win is made (see FIG. 437). (see S1303). In addition, regardless of the type of big win, when a special symbol lottery results in a big win, the value is set to 0 at the start of the variable display indicating the big win (see S310 in FIG. 427). By configuring the value to be set to 0 at the start of the variable display indicating a big hit, there is a possibility that the time-saving state has ended, such as the normal design being missed during the variable display executed in the time-saving state of the normal design. If a certain behavior occurs, it is possible to improve the expectation for the big win. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

When the lottery for the normal pattern is performed, the value of the time saving medium counter 203g and the state of the probability variation flag 203h are referred to, and the value of the time saving medium counter 203g is 1 or more, or the probability variation flag 203h is on. If it is normal, it is determined that it is during the time saving of the pattern. In this case, a lottery for normal symbols is performed based on the normal winning random number table for high probability (see S609 in FIG. 430). On the other hand, if the value of the time saving counter 203g is 0 and the probability variation flag 203h is off, it is determined that the normal state of the design is normal, and based on the normal per random number table for low probability, the normal design of A lottery is held (see S610 in FIG. 430).

The variable probability flag 203h is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the variable probability state of the special symbols. If the flag 203h is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol low probability state. In addition, as described above, during the probability variation state of the special symbol, it becomes the time saving state of the normal symbol. Therefore, if the variable probability flag 203h is ON, it indicates that the variable probability state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the normal symbol.

The variable probability flag 203h has an initial value set to OFF, and when the game ball enters the first region (V region) in the variable winning device 65 in the fifth round of the jackpot, at the end of the jackpot It is set to ON (see S1302 in FIG. 437). In addition, the variable probability flag 203h is reset to OFF when the lottery result corresponding to falling in the variable probability state (see S305 in FIG. 427) and when the variation display of the jackpot starts (see S310 in FIG. 427) be done.

This probability variation flag 203h is referred to in order to determine whether or not the game state is the probability variation state in the special symbol variation start process (see S302 in FIG. 427). Specifically, when the special symbol variation start process (FIG. 427, S208) is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed. In the special symbol variation start process (FIG. 427, S208), the probability variation flag 203h is referred to, and if it is ON, first, the falling lottery is executed, and if it is not falling, the first per random number table 202a for high probability. Based on (see FIG. 407(a)), a special symbol lottery is performed. On the other hand, if the probability variation flag 203h is off or the probability variation flag 203h is on and it is determined to fall by the falling lottery, the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a for low probability (see FIG. 407 (a) ), a lottery for special symbols is carried out.

In addition, the probability variation flag 203h is also referred to in order to determine whether or not the gaming state is the time saving state in the normal symbol variation processing (S608, S614, S620 in FIG. 430). Specifically, the probability variation flag 203h and the above-described time saving counter 203g are referred to in the normal symbol variation process, and if the probability variation flag 203h is on or the value of the time saving counter 203g is 1 or more, It is determined that the time saving state of normal symbols is in progress, and lottery for normal symbols is performed based on the normal winning random number table 202c for high probability (see FIG. 407(b)) (see S609 in FIG. 430). On the other hand, if the probability variation flag 203h is off and the value of the time saving counter 203g is 0, it is determined that the normal state of the symbol is normal, and the second random number table 202c for low probability (Fig. 407 ( (See S610 in FIG. 430). In addition, in the normal symbol variation process, the probability variation flag 203h is also referred to when determining the variation time of the normal symbol and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a in the case of winning the normal symbol (S614 in FIG. 430, S620).

The jackpot start flag 203i is a flag indicating whether or not to start a jackpot. If the big win start flag 203i is ON, it means that it is time to start a big win, and if it is OFF, it means that it is not time to start a big win. This jackpot start flag 203i is set to ON when the end timing of the variation display indicating the jackpot has come (see S217 in FIG. 426). Also, the jackpot start flag 203i is set to OFF when the jackpot start is set (see S1103 in FIG. 435).

The jackpot flag 203j is a flag indicating whether or not the jackpot (special game state) is in progress. If this jackpot flag 203j is ON, it means that a jackpot is in progress, and if it is OFF, it means that a jackpot is not in progress. The jackpot middle flag 203j is set to ON at the same time as a jackpot (special game state) is started (see S1103 in FIG. 435) when a jackpot is won by a lottery of special symbols. In addition, it is set to OFF at the end of the jackpot (special game state) (see S1305 in FIG. 437). In the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 426), this big-hit flag 203j is referenced to determine whether or not the big-hit is in progress (see S201 in FIG. 426).

The variable probability setting flag 203k is a flag indicating whether or not to shift the gaming state to the variable probability state after the jackpot game. In the pachinko machine 10, whether or not the game state is set to the variable probability state is determined by whether or not the game ball enters the first region (V region) during the jackpot game. Here, when it is detected that the gaming ball has entered the first area (passing of the variable probability switch provided in the first area), the variable probability setting flag 203k is set to ON (S1415 in FIG. 438). . On the other hand, this variable probability setting flag 203k is set to OFF at the end of the jackpot (see S1305 in FIG. 437). The variable probability setting flag 203k is backed up when the power is turned off, and is set to the state immediately before the power was turned off when the power is restored (when the power is turned on). Moreover, it is set to OFF when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized.

In addition, when the probability variation setting flag 203k is set to ON when the power is turned on, it is determined whether the probability variation switch has passed before the power is turned off. may be configured to formally set to ON and return. In this case, whether or not the variable probability switch is passed before the power is turned off can be determined by determining whether the variable probability passage counter 203m, which will be described later, is greater than zero. By configuring in this way, in a state where the power is turned off, it is possible to reduce the damage on the side of the amusement arcade by determining fraud such as rewriting the probability variable setting flag 203k to ON and turning on the power again. can.

The variable probability passage counter 203m is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed through the variable probability switch (entered the V area) in one round (one round of the jackpot in this embodiment) during the jackpot game. . It is possible to determine whether or not all the game balls that have entered the specific winning hole 65a of the variable winning device 65 have been discharged from the sum of the probability variable passage counter 203m and the ejection number counter 203u, which will be described later. This variable probability passing counter 203m is updated by being incremented by one when passing through the variable probability switch (detecting the ball entering the V area) (S1414 in FIG. 438). In addition, after executing the determination processing of whether or not the number of game balls that have won the variable winning device 65 and the number of ejected matches, the initial value is reset to "0" (S1511 in FIG. 439). It should be noted that the probability variable passage counter 203m is backed up when the power is turned off. It is set to 0 in the initialized state.

The prize number counter 203p is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have entered the specific prize winning opening 65a of the variable prize winning device 65 in one round in the jackpot game. is incremented by 1 and updated (S1403 in FIG. 438). On the other hand, when one round ends, the number of winnings of variable winning device 65 (value of winning number counter 203p) and the number of ejected items (total value of ejection number counter 203u and probability variable passage counter 203m) are the same. After it is determined whether they match, the initial value is reset to "0" (see S1511 in FIG. 439). The value of the winning number counter 203p is backed up when the power is turned off. It is set to 0 in the initialized state.

The remaining ball timer flag 203q is a flag indicating whether or not it is a ball sweeping period after one round is finished and the specific winning hole 65a is closed. When the remaining ball timer flag 203q is set to ON, it means that it is the ball sweeping period. While the remaining ball timer flag 203q is set to ON, the remaining ball timer 203r, which will be described later, is incremented by one and updated (see S1505 in FIG. 439). The remaining ball timer 203r is a counter for determining the time after the specific winning hole 65a is closed, and determines whether the time required for the game balls in the variable winning device 65 to be discharged has passed. is a counter for

The remaining ball timer 203r is required for discharging game balls that have won the variable prize winning device 65 when one preset round is completed and the specific prize winning port 65a of the variable prize winning device 65 is closed. A counter for determining whether time has passed. In this embodiment, the time required for the winning game ball 65 to be discharged is 0.5 seconds. 203r is set as the upper limit. When the remaining ball timer 203r reaches the upper limit value (0.8 seconds in this embodiment), it is determined whether or not the number of winning prizes to the variable prize winning device 65 and the number of discharged prizes match. (S1507 in FIG. 439). If they do not match, an error command is set to notify you. Therefore, it is possible to notify early that game balls are clogged in the variable prize winning device 65.例文帳に追加In addition, the balls are illegally left in the variable winning device 65, and the game balls are distributed to the distribution device (V role) at the timing when 5 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fifth round of the big win C or big win E. It is possible to suppress fraud that flows down.

In addition, if the winning number and the discharge number do not match, a dedicated flag is set to ON, and if the flag is ON, the probability variation setting flag 203k is turned on even if the game ball passes through the probability variation switch may be configured not to be set to . By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the variable probability state from being improperly imparted.

Probability variation effective flag 203s, after the V role is switched to an arrangement that cannot be distributed to the first region (V region), when the game ball passes through the probability variation switch (enters the V region), the passage ( It is a flag for determining whether or not to validate the ball entry). When this variable probability effective flag 203s is set to ON, it indicates that it is a normal period for the game ball to pass through the variable probability switch.

The variable probability effective timer 203t is a counter for counting the time after the variable probability effective flag 203s is set to ON. After the V role is switched to the non-V side arrangement by this variable probability valid timer 203t, it is possible to determine the period required to normally pass the variable probability switch. In this embodiment, it takes 0.3 seconds for the game ball that has reached the V accessory to pass through the variable probability switch. The upper limit value of the variable probability valid timer 203t is set to a counter value corresponding to 0.5 seconds, and even if the variable probability switch is passed after that, it is determined as illegal and not determined as passing.

As a result, the game ball is illegally entered into the V area and passed through the variable probability switch, the game ball is pushed up with a piano wire or the like from below the variable probability switch and passed, or the magnetic sensor is erroneously detected by radio waves etc. It is possible to suppress damage caused by fraud such as

The discharged number counter 203u is a counter for counting the number of game balls discharged from the variable winning device 65 in one round. This discharge number counter 203u is reset to 0, which is an initial value, after it is determined that the number of winning balls in the variable winning device 65 matches the discharge number (S1511 in FIG. 439).

The other memory area 203z is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 .

Thus, the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 is provided with various counters and flags.

Next, referring to FIG. 411, the state transition method of the pachinko machine 10 realized by performing control based on various tables defined in the ROM 202 and various flags and counters provided in the RAM 203 will be described. explain. FIG. 411 is a diagram showing a state transition method of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example.

As shown in FIG. 411, the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example is roughly divided into three game states. That is, the normal state shown in the upper part of FIG. 411, the variable probability state shown in the middle part of FIG. 411, and the time saving state shown in the lower part of FIG. 411 are provided.

As described above, the normal state indicates a low probability state of special symbols and a normal state of normal symbols, the probability of becoming a big hit is low, and it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entrance 640. (The electric accessary 640a is difficult to be released), which is the most disadvantageous game state for the player. In addition, as described above, the probability variation state indicates that the probability variation state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the normal symbol, the probability of the big hit is high, and by hitting the right hand to the second entrance 640 Since the game balls enter the ball frequently, the game state becomes the most advantageous for the player. In addition, the time-saving state indicates a low-probability state of special symbols and a time-saving state of normal symbols. Since the ball is hit frequently, the game state becomes relatively advantageous for the player.

As shown in the upper part of FIG. 411, there is a possibility of transitioning from the normal state to another state only in the event of a big win. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 411, the first special symbol is a jackpot, and when either jackpot A or B is selected as the jackpot type, the game ball moves to the V area in the fifth round of the jackpot. On the condition that the ball was entered, it will shift to a variable state after the jackpot ends. In the big hits A and B, the game ball can enter almost the V area simply by hitting right in 5 rounds. In addition, if the game ball does not enter the V area in the 5th round due to the player not hitting the game ball in the 5th round, the game state after the jackpot ends will be in a time saving state. set. On the other hand, as shown in the upper part of FIG. 411, when the jackpot C is selected as the jackpot type of the first special symbol, it is impossible (difficult ), so it shifts to a time saving state after the end of the jackpot.

In addition, as shown in the interruption of FIG. 411, there is a possibility of shifting from the variable probability state to another state when the player falls down in the drop lottery as well as when the game hits a jackpot. Specifically, when a jackpot is achieved in the variable probability state and a jackpot E determined at a rate of 20% is reached, the game state after the jackpot is completed is set to the time saving state. In addition, when the lottery result corresponding to the fall is obtained in the fall lottery before the lottery for the special symbol is executed 100 times after setting the variable probability state, the state is shifted to the time saving state. Further, when the lottery result corresponding to the fall is obtained in the fall lottery after the lottery of the special symbols is executed 100 times or more after setting to the variable probability state, the state is shifted to the normal state. On the other hand, when a big win is achieved in the variable probability state and a big win D determined at a rate of 80% is reached, the game state after the end of the big win is again set to the variable probability state (the most advantageous variable probability state is looped). Therefore, in the variable probability state, the game can be played with the expectation that the player will get a big win and a big win D before falling down.

In addition, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 411, when the time saving state is changed to another game state, in addition to the case where the jackpot is won, after the jackpot is finished, when the lottery of the special symbols of the specified number of times is executed, other move to state. More specifically, when the time-saving state results in a jackpot and a jackpot D determined at a rate of 80% is reached, the game state after the jackpot ends is set to the most advantageous variable probability state. In addition, when the lottery for the special symbol is executed 100 times after the last big win is completed, the state shifts to the most disadvantageous normal state. On the other hand, when the jackpot of the second special symbol is a jackpot E determined at a rate of 20%, the game state after the jackpot is again set to the time saving state (time saving state ). In the short time state, the probability of winning the jackpot is 1/250, which is the same as in the normal state, so the possibility of winning the jackpot again within 100 times is not so high (about 33% of the time). . Therefore, when it becomes a time-saving state, possibility that it will transfer to a normal state will become high. In addition, as described above, it is difficult to accurately distinguish between the time saving state and the variable probability state (operations other than the jackpot probability, such as the operation mode of the electric accessory 640a, are the same), so the time saving state of the normal symbol is set, the player can continue to have expectations for the variable probability state. That is, even if the time-saving state, which is disadvantageous compared to the variable probability state (that is, it is easy to shift to the normal state), it can be made to feel as if the game is being played in the variable probability state, so the player's Motivation for games can be maintained at a high level. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

As described above, in the first control example, it is possible to provide a novel game property in which three types of game states are traversed, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Returning to FIG. 404, the description continues. An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, a sound lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a large opening solenoid for closing or opening the specific winning opening 65a, and an electric function. A solenoid 209 for driving an object is connected, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these through the input/output port 205 .

The input/output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown) and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115. The MPU 201 receives signals output from the various switches 208. Also, various processes are executed based on the RAM erasing signal SG2 output from the RAM erasing switch circuit 253. FIG.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 storing control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 432) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main controller 110, the dispensing motor 216, the launch controller 112, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout controller 111 but not to the main controller 110 .

The shooting control device 112 controls the ball shooting unit 112a so that the shooting strength of the game ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to shoot the game ball. be. The ball shooting unit 112a has a shooting solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the game ball is turned off (not operated). A shooting solenoid is energized corresponding to the amount of rotation of the handle 51, and a game ball is shot with strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle 51. - 特許庁

The audio lamp control device 113 performs display control such as audio output in the audio output device 226, output of lighting and extinguishing in the lamp display device (illumination parts 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and variable display effect (variable display). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed by the device 114, and the like. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 222 that stores control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory and the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, the PUSH button 10317, and the like.

In addition, the sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or super reach. It controls the voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 and instructs the display control device 114 so as to change the performance contents of the hour. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the stage after the change is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the stage after the change on the third pattern display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third design, which is the main image to be displayed on the third design display device 81 .

The audio lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the audio lamp control device 113, and displays and controls the error command including the error type. Send to device 114 . The display control device 114 controls the third pattern display device 81 to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

Next, the details of the electrical configuration of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 412(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. FIG. The ROM 222 includes a variation pattern selection table 222a, a back mode lottery table 222b, a pending change lottery table 222c, a change point calculation table 222d, a batch change lottery table 222e, a chance charge lottery table 222f, and a continuation suggestion effect selection table. 222g, and an interrupt consecutive hitting lottery table 222h.

The variation pattern selection table 222a is based on the variation pattern command output from the main controller 110 by the sound ramp control device 113. ) to determine more detailed variations. This makes it possible to determine a wider variety of variation modes. Here, one variation mode out of a plurality of types is determined by lottery for the rough variation contents instructed by the main controller 110 .

The back mode lottery table 222b is, in the gaming state (probability variable state, time saving state) in which the time saving state of the normal symbol is set, the data for lottery change of the back mode for showing the degree of expectation that the probability variable state is set. is a data table in which Details of the back mode lottery table 222b will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 413 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the rear mode selection table 222b.

As shown in FIG. 413, in the back mode lottery table 222b, the current game state is the variable probability state, and the back mode lottery table 222b is confirmed that the holding does not include the lottery result corresponding to the fall. In order to draw a lottery for changing the back mode in the state where the variable probability continuation table referred to in order to draw a lottery for the change and the lottery result corresponding to the fall are included in the hold even though the current game state is the variable probability state. and a table for having fallen, which is referred to for lottery for changing the rear mode in the state of having already fallen to the time-saving state.

As shown in FIG. 413, the background mode lottery table 222b defines the value range of the effect lottery counter 223y for each combination of the current background mode type and the transition destination (after change) background mode. It is Here, the effect lottery counter 223y is composed of a random number counter whose value is periodically updated, and is updated to any value within the range of "0 to 99" each time the update timing comes. Using the value of the effect lottery counter 223y, the effect modes of various effects are selected. The effect lottery counter 223y is provided with an independent random number counter for each type of effect for executing the lottery. In other words, the effect lottery counter 223y is a general term for random number counters used for lotteries for various effects.

As shown in FIG. 413, in the probability variable continuation table, the current back mode is the cave search mode, and the destination back mode is the temple search mode (mode transition from cave search mode to temple search mode). A value range "0 to 19" of the effect lottery counter 223y is defined in correspondence. Of the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the effect lottery counter 223y, the number of random numbers associated with the mode transition from the cave search mode to the temple search mode is 20, so the current game state is In the probability variable state and in the state where the lottery result of falling is not included in the hold, the ratio of shifting (changed) from the cave search mode to the temple search mode is 20% (20/100). In addition, as shown in FIG. 413, values "20, 21" of the effect lottery counter 223y are defined in association with mode transition from the cave search mode to the super-temple search mode. Of the 100 possible random numbers of the effect lottery counter 223y, the number of random numbers associated with the mode transition from the cave search mode to the temple search mode is 2, so the current game state is a probability variable state, In addition, in a state where the lottery result of falling is not included in the hold, the rate of transition (change) from the cave exploration mode to the super temple exploration mode is 2% (2/100). If the value range of the effect lottery counter 223y is other than the above (that is, the range of "22 to 99"), mode transition is not performed. That is, the cave search mode is maintained.

Thus, in the state where the cave search mode is set, if the probability variation continuation table is referred to (probability variation state, and if the lottery result of falling in the hold is not included), the fluctuation display is Every time it is executed, it shifts from the cave exploration mode to another mode at a rate of 22%. That is, the number of continuations of the cave exploration mode is reduced to about 5 times on average. In other words, even if it is set to cave exploration mode, it shifts to another mode with higher expectations in a relatively short period of time, so the period set in cave exploration mode tends to be shortened (high expectation mode stay rate will tend to increase). Therefore, the longer the period of staying in the high-expectation mode, the more the player's expectation for the continuation of the variable probability state can be improved, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. can.

Further, as shown in FIG. 413, in the variable probability continuation table, the mode transition from the temple search mode to the cave search mode is defined in association with the value range "0" of the effect lottery counter 223y. Of the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the production lottery counter 223y, the number of random numbers associated with the mode transition from the temple search mode to the cave search mode is one. In the probability variable state and in the state where the lottery result of falling is not included in the hold, the rate of shifting (changed) from the temple search mode to the cave search mode is 1% (1/100). Further, as shown in FIG. 413, the mode transition from the temple search mode to the super temple search mode is defined in association with the value range "1 to 10" of the effect lottery counter 223y. Of the 100 possible random numbers of the production lottery counter 223y, the number of random numbers associated with the mode transition from the temple search mode to the super temple search mode is 10, so the current game state is a variable state. In addition, in a state in which the lottery result of falling is not included in the hold, the rate of transition (change) from the temple search mode to the super temple search mode is 10% (10/100). If the range of the value of the effect lottery counter 223y is other than the above (that is, the range of "11 to 99"), mode transition is not performed. That is, the temple search mode is maintained.

In this way, in the state where the temple search mode is set, if the probability variation continuation table is referred to (the probability variation state and the lottery result of falling in the hold is not included), the fluctuation display Every time it is executed, it shifts to the cave exploration mode at a rate of 1%, and at a rate of 10%, the probability change state is confirmed, and the lottery result of the fall is not included in the hold. switch to mode. That is, the configuration is such that it is difficult to shift to the cave exploration mode with low expectations, and it is easy to shift to the super temple mode with high expectations.

Further, as shown in FIG. 413, in the variable probability continuation table, the mode transition from the super temple search mode to the cave search mode is not associated with the value of the effect lottery counter 223y. In addition, the mode transition from the super-temple search mode to the temple search mode is defined in association with the value range "0 to 4" of the effect lottery counter 223y. Of the 100 possible random numbers of the production lottery counter 223y, the number of random numbers associated with the mode transition from the super temple search mode to the temple search mode is 5, so the current game state is a variable state. In addition, in a state where the lottery result of falling is not included in the hold, the rate of transition (change) from the super temple search mode to the temple search mode is 5% (5/100). If the value range of the effect lottery counter 223y is other than the above (that is, the range of "5 to 99"), mode transition is not performed. That is, the super temple search mode is maintained.

In this way, in the state where the super temple search mode is set, only 5% of the time it shifts to another mode, and even if the mode is shifted, temple searches with relatively high expectations Since the mode is shifted to the mode, even if the super-temple mode with the highest degree of expectation is shifted to another back mode, the player's expectation for the variable state can be maintained.

Further, as shown in FIG. 413, in the non-falling table, mode transition from the cave search mode to the temple search mode is defined in association with the value range "0 to 4" of the effect lottery counter 223y. . Of the 100 possible random numbers of the effect lottery counter 223y, the number of random numbers associated with the mode transition from the cave search mode to the temple search mode is 5, so the current game state is a probability variable state, In addition, in a state in which the lottery result of falling is included in the hold, the rate of transition (change) from the cave exploration mode to the temple exploration mode is 5% (5/100). On the other hand, the mode transition from the cave search mode to the super temple search mode is not associated with the value of the effect lottery counter 223y. If the value range of the effect lottery counter 223y is other than the above (that is, the range of "5 to 99"), mode transition is not performed. That is, the cave search mode is maintained.

Further, as shown in FIG. 413, in the non-falling table, the mode transition from the temple search mode to the cave search mode is defined in association with the value range "0 to 9" of the effect lottery counter 223y. . Of the 100 possible random numbers of the effect lottery counter 223y, the number of random numbers associated with the mode transition from the temple search mode to the cave search mode is 10, so the current game state is a probability variable state, In addition, in a state in which the lottery result of falling is included in the hold, the rate of transition (change) from the temple search mode to the cave search mode is 10% (10/100). On the other hand, the mode transition from the temple search mode to the super temple search mode is not associated with the value of the effect lottery counter 223y. If the range of the value of the effect lottery counter 223y is other than the above (that is, the range of "10 to 99"), mode transition is not performed. That is, the temple search mode is maintained.

Further, as shown in FIG. 413, in the non-falling table, the mode transition from the super temple search mode to the cave search mode is not associated with the value of the effect lottery counter 223y. On the other hand, the mode transition from the super-temple search mode to the temple search mode is defined in association with the value range "0 to 99" of the effect lottery counter 223y. That is, in a state in which the super-temple search mode is set, when the non-falling table is referred to, the transition (fall) to the temple search mode is made without fail. When the non-falling table is referenced in the super temple search mode, at the start of the previous change, the result of the falling lottery was not included in the hold, and the new hold until the start of the change display this time Only when the ball on hold is the lottery result of falling. Therefore, in order to prevent the super temple mode from being maintained even though the lottery result of the fall is included, in this case it is always configured to switch to the temple search mode.

In this way, when the back mode transition lottery is executed with reference to the non-fall table (that is, the lottery result corresponding to the fall is included in the hold), the probability variable continuation table is referenced. The mode transition rate from cave search mode to temple search mode is lower than when it is done, and even if it shifts to temple search mode, the rate of falling to cave search mode is higher. That is, the rate of staying in the cave exploration mode with a low degree of expectation increases. Therefore, it is possible to realize the playability of predicting whether or not the current game state is the variable probability state by using the staying ratio of the cave search mode as a clue, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIG. 413, in the fallen table, the mode transition from the cave search mode to the temple search mode is defined in association with the value range "0, 1" of the effect lottery counter 223y. . Of the 100 possible random numbers of the production lottery counter 223y, the number of random numbers associated with the mode shift from the cave search mode to the temple search mode is 2, so the current game state is the time saving state. In this case, the rate of transition (changed) from the cave search mode to the temple search mode is 2% (2/100). On the other hand, the mode transition from the cave search mode to the super temple search mode is not associated with the value of the effect lottery counter 223y. If the range of the value of the effect lottery counter 223y is other than the above (that is, the range of "2 to 99"), mode transition is not performed. That is, the cave exploration mode is maintained.

Further, as shown in FIG. 413, in the fallen table, the mode transition from the temple search mode to the cave search mode is defined in association with the value range "0 to 29" of the effect lottery counter 223y. . Of the 100 possible random numbers of the effect lottery counter 223y, the number of random numbers associated with the mode transition from the temple search mode to the cave search mode is 30, so the current game state is a probability variable state, In addition, in a state in which the lottery result of falling is included in the hold, the rate of transition (change) from the temple search mode to the cave search mode is 30% (30/100). On the other hand, the mode transition from the temple search mode to the super temple search mode is not associated with the value of the effect lottery counter 223y. If the value range of the effect lottery counter 223y is other than the above (that is, the range of "30 to 99"), the mode transition is not performed. That is, the temple search mode is maintained.

Further, as shown in FIG. 413, in the fallen table, the mode transition from the super temple search mode to the cave search mode is not associated with the value of the effect lottery counter 223y. On the other hand, the mode transition from the super-temple search mode to the temple search mode is defined in association with the value range "0 to 99" of the effect lottery counter 223y. That is, in the state where the super temple search mode is set, when the fallen table is referred to, the transition (fall) to the temple search mode is made without fail in the same manner as when the non-falled table is referred to. In the super-temple search mode, the fallen table is referred to only when it is in the variable probability state at the start of the previous fluctuation, and the lottery result of the special symbol lottery of this time is fallen. Therefore, in order to prevent the super temple mode from being maintained even though the lottery result of the fall is included, in this case it is always configured to shift to the temple search mode.

In this way, when the back mode transition lottery is executed with reference to the table for fallen (that is, in the time saving state), the temple from the cave search mode is further removed from the cave search mode than when the table for not fallen is referenced. Mode transition rate to search mode is low, and even if you shift to temple search mode, the rate of falling to cave search mode is greatly increased. That is, the rate of staying in the cave exploration mode with a low degree of expectation increases. Therefore, it is possible to realize the game property of predicting whether or not the current game state is the variable probability state by using the staying ratio of the cave search mode as a clue, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Returning to FIG. 412(a), the description continues. The pending change lottery table 222c refers to the look-ahead result executed based on the detection of the start winning for the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640, and the number of pending balls symbols corresponding to the start winning. It is a data table referred to when executing a lottery in the display mode of . The details of this hold change lottery table 222c will be described with reference to FIG. 414(a). FIG. 414(a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the hold change lottery table 222c.

As shown in FIG. 414(a), in the pending change lottery table 222c, each pending pattern mode (white, blue, green, red) is selected for each look-ahead result (variation type) value of the effect lottery counter 223y is defined in association with the range of More specifically, as shown in FIG. 414(a), when the variation type is "long out", the value of the effect lottery counter 223y is in the range of "0 to 98", and the white reserved symbol Modes are defined in association with each other, and blue reserved symbol modes are defined in association with the value "99" of the effect lottery counter 223y. On the other hand, the value of the effect lottery counter 223y is not associated with the green and red reserved symbol modes. Therefore, when the look-ahead result becomes a long-out variation type (the long-out look-ahead result is notified from the main controller 110 by the winning information command), 99% as the reserved ball number pattern corresponding to the start winning A white reserved design mode is set at a rate of (99/100), and a blue reserved design mode is set at a rate of 1% (1/100). That is, in the case of the long out, almost, the white reserved design mode is set, and it is extremely rare that the reserved change (the reserved design mode other than white) is set.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 414 (a), for the variation type "normal reach out", the value of the effect lottery counter 223y is in the range of "0 to 94", the white pending symbol mode is associated. , and the value of the effect lottery counter 223y is defined in a range of "95 to 99" in association with a blue reserved symbol mode. On the other hand, the value of the effect lottery counter 223y is not associated with the green and red reserved symbol modes. Therefore, if the look-ahead result is off and the variation type is normal reach, the white pending pattern mode is set at a rate of 95% (95/100) as the pending ball number pattern corresponding to the start winning prize, and 5% ( 5/100), a blue reserved design mode is set. That is, even in the case of the lost normal reach, the white pending symbol mode is set at a relatively high rate, and the rate at which the pending change (non-white pending symbol mode) is set is low.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 414(a), for the variation type "outgoing super reach", the value of the effect lottery counter 223y is in the range of "0 to 74", and the white reserved symbol mode corresponds. is defined with, the range of "75 to 89" is defined in association with the blue reserved design mode, and the range of "90 to 97" is defined in association with the green reserved design mode. , "98, 99" are defined in association with red reserved symbol modes. That is, in the case of the variation type of super-reach, in which the variation time is long and a relatively flashy (lively) production mode is executed, the ratio of the white pending symbol mode is 75% (75/100) and others. It is lower than the variation type of the deviation, and the percentage of the blue reserved design mode is as high as 10% (10/100). Furthermore, it can also be set to a green or red reserved design mode. That is, the ratio of green reserved design mode is 8% (8/100), and the ratio of red reserved design mode is 2% (2/100). Therefore, in the case of a green or red reserved pattern mode, at least the variation type below the normal reach out (variation type with low expectation) is denied, so that the player's expectation for the big hit is improved. be able to.

Further, as shown in FIG. 414(a), when the variation type is "win normal reach", the value of the effect lottery counter 223y is in the range of "0 to 74", and the white pending symbol mode is associated. , and the range of "75 to 84" is defined in association with the blue reserved design mode, and the range of "85 to 94" is defined in association with the green reserved design mode, A red pending symbol mode is defined in association with the range of "95 to 99". That is, the rate of being set to the green or red reserved symbol mode is higher than in the case of the lost super reach.

Further, as shown in FIG. 414(a), when the variation type is "win super reach", the value of the effect lottery counter 223y is in the range of "0 to 49", and the white reserved symbol mode corresponds. is defined with, the range of "50 to 59" is defined in association with the blue reserved design mode, and the range of "60 to 84" is defined in association with the green reserved design mode. , and the range of "85 to 99" are defined in association with red reserved symbol modes. That is, the rate of occurrence of pending change itself is improved, and the percentage of green and red pending symbol modes selected is also high, compared to the variation type of loss super reach and hit normal reach. Therefore, when the reserved symbol mode of green or red is set, the feeling of expectation for the big win can be further improved.

Returning to FIG. 412, the description continues. The change point calculation table 222d is a data table that is referred to when calculating a change point that serves as a criterion for determining whether or not the pending collective change effect (see FIGS. 402 and 403) can be executed. Details will be described later, but at the time of the lottery of the pending batch change effect, this change point is a divergence between the variation type of each held ball and the jackpot expectation shown from the reserved design mode (notification of low expectation The number of points is set to be large as the number of points is set too high. It is configured such that the more a reserved pattern mode with a relatively low degree of expectation is set by the reserved change performance, the more easily the performance for improving the degree of expectation is executed by the reserved collective change performance. Thereby, the degree of expectation can be notified more appropriately by the reserved symbol mode. Details of the change point calculation table 222d will be described with reference to FIG. 414(b).

As shown in FIG. 414(b), in the change point lottery table 222d, change points are associated with each change type (forecasting result) of the hold ball and each hold design mode set for the hold ball. are stipulated. In the first control example, when a plurality of reserved balls are reserved at the time of detecting the start winning, the change point of each reserved ball is calculated by the change point lottery table 222d, and the total value of the change points is calculated. Based on this, it is configured to draw a lottery as to whether or not the pending batch change effect can be executed. That is, the larger the total value of change points, the higher the execution ratio of the pending batch change effect. As a result, even if a lower expectation level is once reported in the pending change performance, an opportunity to improve the expectation level can be given by the pending collective change performance, so that the expectation level can be more appropriately reported by the pending pattern mode. can be done.

As shown in FIG. 414(b), "0" is defined as a change point in association with the variation types of short and long deviations regardless of the reserved symbol mode. In addition, with respect to the variation type of the lost normal reach, "1" is defined as a change point in association with the reserved design mode of white reservation, and "0" is defined as the change point with respect to the other reserved design modes. are defined in association with each other. In addition, for the variation type of super reach out, "2" is defined as a change point in association with the reserved design mode of white reservation, and "2" is defined as the change point for the reserved design mode of blue reservation. 1" is defined in association with the other reserved design modes, and '0' is defined in association with the other reserved symbol modes as a change point. In addition, for the variation type of hit normal reach and hit super reach, 3 is defined as a change point in association with the reserved design mode of white reservation, and as a change point for the reserved design mode of blue reservation 2 is defined in correspondence, 1 is defined in correspondence with the reserved design mode of green reservation, and 0 is defined in correspondence with the reserved design mode of red reservation as a change point.

In this way, in the first control example, the more the reserved symbol mode with a lower degree of expectation is set for the reserved ball of the variation type with a higher degree of expectation, the more change points there are. That is, the larger the room for improving the expectation level of the reserved symbol mode, the more the change points are, so that the execution of the reserved batch change effect is more likely to be permitted. By configuring in this way, it is possible to notify a more appropriate degree of expectation by the reserved symbol mode.

Returning to FIG. 412(a), the description continues. The collective change lottery table 222e is a data table that is referred to when performing a lottery as to whether or not the pending collective change effect can be executed. Details of the collective change lottery table 222e will be described with reference to FIG. 415(a). FIG. 415(a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the collective change lottery table 222e. As shown in FIG. 415(a), in the collective change lottery table 222e, the value range of the effect lottery counter 223y for determining the execution of the pending collective change effect is defined in association with each total change point value. ing. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 415(a), the value of the effect lottery counter 223y is not associated with the total change point value of 0. In addition, when the total value of change points is 1, the value "0 to 9" of the effect lottery counter 223y is defined in correspondence, and when the total value of change points is 2, the value of the effect lottery counter 223y is defined. "0 to 24" are defined in correspondence, and the value "0 to 49" of the effect lottery counter 223y is defined in association with the total value of change points of 3 or more. That is, if the change point is 1, the pending collective change effect is selected at a rate of 10%, and if the change point is 2, the pending collective change effect is selected at a rate of 25%, and the change point is 3. If so, the pending collective change effect is selected at a rate of 50%.

Thus, in the first control example, as the total number of change points increases (holding pattern mode with low expectation is set for the holding ball of high expectation fluctuation type), the holding collective change production are configured to have a high percentage of decisions to execute. As a result, the larger the room for improving the degree of expectation of the reserved symbol mode, the more the change points, so that the execution of the reserved collective change effect is more likely to be permitted. By configuring in this way, it is possible to notify a more appropriate degree of expectation according to the reserved symbol mode.

Returning to FIG. 412(a), the description continues. The chance charge lottery table 222f is a data table referred to in order to determine whether or not the chance charge effect can be executed. Details of the chance charge lottery table 222f will be described with reference to FIG. 415(b). FIG. 415(b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the chance charge lottery table 222f. As shown in FIG. 415(b), in the chance charge lottery table 222f, the number of held balls and the value range of the effect lottery counter 223y determined to execute the chance charge effect are associated with each variation type. stipulated.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 415(b), in the variation patterns of lost normal reach and lost super reach, the value range of the effect lottery counter 223y is "0 to 4” are defined in association with each other. In addition, when the number of reserved balls is 2, the value range of the effect lottery counter 223y is defined in correspondence with "0 to 14", and when the number of reserved balls is 3 or more, the value of the effect lottery counter 223y is defined. A range "0 to 24" is associated and defined. That is, if the number of pending balls is 0 or 1, execution of the chance charge effect is determined at a rate of 5%, and if the number of pending balls is 2, execution of the chance charge effect is determined at a rate of 15%. If the number of pending balls is 3 or more, execution of the chance charge effect is determined at a rate of 25%.

Further, as shown in FIG. 415(b), in the normal reach variation pattern, the number of retained balls of 0 and 1 is defined in association with the range of the value of the effect lottery counter 223y "0 to 34". On the other hand, the value of the effect lottery counter 223y is not associated with the number of pending balls of 2 or more. That is, if the number of pending balls is 0 or 1, execution of the chance charge effect is determined at a rate of 35%, while if the number of pending balls is 2 or more, execution of the chance charge effect is determined. do not have. That is, when the number of held balls is 1 or less, the decision rate of the chance charge effect is higher than in the case of the variation pattern of loss. The reason why the chance charge effect is not executed when the number of pending balls is 2 or more is to suppress the problem that the spirit gauge is accumulated too much and a big win is started before it is completely consumed. That is, in the case of winning normal reach, the fluctuation time is relatively short (there are few chances to execute the chance-up effect), so there is a high possibility that the spirit gauge will be accumulated beyond the timing at which the chance-up is possible. Then, the number of spirit gauges accumulated in the chance charge effect is determined only according to the number of held balls. That is, the higher the number of held balls, the higher the possibility that a larger number of spirit gauges will be set. Therefore, in this control example, when the number of pending balls is large under the situation where the change is a hit, the execution of the chance charge effect is avoided. As a result, it is possible to suppress the problem that the big win is started before the number of the spirit gauge is completely consumed.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 415(b), in the variation pattern of winning super reach, the value range "0 to 49" of the effect lottery counter 223y is defined in association with the number of held balls of 0 to 2. The value range "0 to 9" of the effect lottery counter 223y is defined in association with the number of reserved balls of 3. On the other hand, the value of the effect lottery counter 223y is not associated with the number of reserved balls of 4. That is, if the number of pending balls is 0 to 2, execution of the chance charge effect is determined at a rate of 50%, and if the number of pending balls is 3, execution of the chance charge effect is determined at a rate of 10%. On the other hand, if the number of reserved balls is 4, execution of the chance charge effect is not determined. That is, when the number of pending balls is 2 or less, the determination ratio of the chance charge effect is higher than in the fluctuation pattern of loss and the fluctuation pattern of hit normal reach. When the number of reserved balls is 3, the execution ratio of the chance charge effect is low, and when the number of reserved balls is 4, the chance charge effect is not executed. This is for the purpose of suppressing the problem that the big win starts before the spirit gauge is completely consumed, as in the normal reach for the win.

Returning to FIG. 412(a), the description continues. The continuous suggestive effect selection table 222g is used when selecting the effect scenario of the continuous suggestive effect executed over the 96th to 99th variable display effects after the end of the jackpot (that is, after the start of the time saving state of the normal symbols). A referenced data table. Details of the continuation suggestion effect selection table 222g will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 416 is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of the continuation suggestion effect selection table 222g. As shown in FIG. 416, the continuation suggestion effect selection table 222g is a continuation determination table that is referred to when the continuation of the variable probability state is determined until the end of the continuation suggestion effect, and the continuation suggestion effect until the end of the continuation suggestion effect. It is confirmed that the continuous rich table referred to when the suspended ball is not suspended, but it is confirmed that the probability variable state is maintained within the suspension, and the time-saving state at the end of the continuous suggestion production. and a non-continuation table. In each table, a plurality of combinations (scenarios) of presentation modes to be executed in the 96th to 99th variable displays are defined.

As shown in FIG. 416, in the continuation decision table, seven scenarios "01H" to "07H" are defined in association with the range of values of the effect lottery counter 223y. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 416, in the 96th to 98th fluctuation displays, a weak attack with a low expectation (see FIG. 393(a)) is executed, and in the 99th fluctuation display, a high-expectation attack is executed. Values "0 to 9" of the effect lottery counter 223y are defined in association with the effect scenario "01H" in which a strong attack (see FIG. 393(b)) is executed and the door 806 is broken through. Also, a weak attack (see FIG. 393(a)) is executed in the 96th and 97th variable displays, and a strong attack (see FIG. 393(b)) is executed in the 98th and 99th variable displays to break through the door 806. A value of "10 to 19" of the effect lottery counter 223y is defined in association with the effect scenario "02H" of the aspect to be performed, and a weak attack (see FIG. 393(a)) is executed in the 96th variable display, In the 97th to 99th fluctuation display, the effect lottery counter 223y has a value of "20 to 59" for the production scenario "03H" in which a strong attack (see FIG. 393(b)) is executed to break through the door 806. Effect lottery counter 223y for effect scenario "04H" defined in association with and in which a strong attack (see FIG. 393(b)) is executed in all of the 96th to 99th fluctuation displays to break through the door 806. values "60 to 89" are defined in association with each other. In other words, the selection rate of production scenarios with a small number of strong attacks is low, and the selection rate of production scenarios with a large number of strong attacks is high.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 416, the continuation decision table is provided with a special effect scenario in which the door 806 is broken through with less than 99 variations. That is, the effect scenario "05H" (range of values "90, 91" of the effect lottery counter 223y) in which the light attack is performed in the 96th variable effect and the door 806 is broken through as it is, and the light attack, 97 at the 96th time. A production scenario "06H" (a value of the production lottery counter 223y in the range of "92 to 94") in which a strong attack is made on the first time to break through the door 806; A production scenario "07H" (a value of the production lottery counter 223y ranging from "95 to 99") is set in which a strong attack is made to break through the door 806. These special aspects scenarios may only be set when the table for continuation determination is referenced. That is, until the end of the 99th variable display, there is a possibility that it will be executed only in a state where it is confirmed that the probability variable state continues. Therefore, by executing a special scenario, It is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 416, the continuous rich table defines four scenarios "08H" to "0BH". Since the production flow of the production scenarios "08H" to "0BH" is exactly the same as the production scenarios "01H" to "04H" described above, the details thereof will be omitted here. As shown in FIG. 416, the production scenario "08H" is defined in association with the values "0 to 14" of the production lottery counter 223y, and the production scenario "09H" is defined by the values "15 to 15" of the production lottery counter 223y. 29” is defined in association with the effect scenario “0AH”, the value “30 to 69” of the effect lottery counter 223y is defined in association with the effect scenario “0BH”, and the value “ 70 to 99” are defined in association with each other. That is, similar to the continuation confirmation table, the selection rate of production scenarios with a small number of strong attacks is low, and the selection rate of production scenarios with a large number of strong attacks is high. In addition, if the lottery result corresponding to the fall occurs during the progress of the scenario specified in the continuous rich table, the effect specified in the non-continuing table will be displayed from the fluctuation display that resulted in the lottery result of that fall. It is switched to the production scenario "0CH", which is one of the scenarios. As a result, even if the reserved balls up to the 99th variation display are not reserved at the start of the continuation suggestion effect, the game state at the end of the 99th variation can be accurately reproduced by switching the scenario on the way. can be notified.

Further, as shown in FIG. 416, the discontinuation table defines four scenarios "0CH" to "0FH". The production flow of the production scenarios "0CH" to "0FH" is exactly the same as the production scenarios "01H" to "04H" described above, except that the breakthrough of the door 806 is ultimately failed. Details are omitted. As shown in FIG. 416, the production scenario "0CH" is defined in association with the value "0 to 39" of the production lottery counter 223y, and the production scenario "0DH" is defined by the value "40 to 40" of the production lottery counter 223y. 79” is defined in association with the effect scenario “0EH”, the value “80 to 94” of the effect lottery counter 223y is defined in association with the effect scenario “0FH”, and the value “ 95 to 99” are defined in association with each other. That is, in contrast to the continuation determination table and the continuation rich table, the selection rate of production scenarios with a small number of strong attacks is high, and the selection rate of production scenarios with a large number of strong attacks is low. there is Therefore, the greater the number of strong attacks, the lower the possibility that the non-continuation table was referred to and the production scenario was determined. can be done. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Returning to FIG. 412(a), the description continues. The interrupt repeated hit lottery table 222h is a data table referred to for lottery of whether the interrupt repeated hit effect (see FIG. 399) can be executed and effect type. The details of the interrupt repeated hit lottery table 222h will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 417 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the interrupt consecutive hit lottery table 222h. As shown in FIG. 417, the interruption repeated hit lottery table 222h defines, for each variation type, the effect type and the value range of the effect lottery counter 223y in association with each other.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 417, in the long fluctuation pattern, it is executed during the normal fluctuation production period, and for the production type of the production mode that can reduce the monsters to the minimum of 10 remaining monsters , the values "0 to 4" of the effect lottery counter 223y are defined in association with each other. For this reason, in the case of long-out, the interrupt continuous hit effect is executed at a rate of 5% (5/100).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 417, in the change pattern of the lost normal reach, the effect lottery is executed during the normal change effect period, and the effect type of the effect mode that can reduce the remaining monsters to the minimum of 5 The value "0 to 9" of the counter 223y is defined in association with the value of the effect lottery counter 223y for the effect type of the effect mode that is executed during reach fluctuation and can reduce the number of monsters to the minimum of 4 remaining monsters. "10 to 14" are associated and defined. Therefore, in the fluctuation pattern of the lost normal reach, the execution of the 15% rate interrupt continuous hit effect in total is determined. That is, the execution of the interrupt repeated hit effect is determined at a higher rate than in the case of the long out.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 417, in the variation pattern of Lost Super Reach, as an interrupting barrage effect executed during the normal variation effect period, the effect mode can be reduced to a minimum of 5 remaining monsters. A value "0 to 4" of the effect lottery counter 223y is defined in association with the type, and the value of the effect lottery counter 223y is defined for the effect type of the effect mode in which the number of monsters can be reduced to a minimum of four remaining monsters. "5 to 9" are defined in association with each other. In addition, as an interrupt barrage effect executed during reach fluctuation, the value "10 to 14" of the effect lottery counter 223y is associated with the effect type of the effect mode in which the number of monsters can be reduced to a minimum of four. Values "15 to 19" of the effect lottery counter 223y are defined in association with the effect type of the effect mode in which the number of monsters can be reduced to three at the minimum. That is, the execution ratio of the total interrupting continuous hit effect is higher than that of the losing normal reach, and the number of monsters can be reduced to a smaller number, so that the player's expectation for the big win can be improved.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 417, in the variation pattern of hit normal reach, as an interrupt continuous hitting effect executed during the normal variation effect period, the effect type of effect mode that can reduce the number of monsters to the minimum of 5 remaining monsters. , the value "0 to 3" of the effect lottery counter 223y is defined in correspondence, and the value "4" of the effect lottery counter 223y is defined for the effect type of the effect mode that can reduce the number of monsters to 0. are defined in association with each other. In addition, as an interrupting barrage effect executed during reach fluctuation, the value "5 to 24" of the effect lottery counter 223y is associated with the effect type of the effect mode in which the number of monsters can be reduced to a minimum of four. A value "25" of the effect lottery counter 223y is defined in association with the effect type of the effect mode that is defined and can reduce the number of monsters to zero. That is, the execution ratio of the total interruption continuous hit effect is higher than in the case of losing, and there is a possibility that all the monsters will be defeated, so that the player's expectation for the big win can be improved.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 417, in the hit super reach variation pattern, as an interrupting repeated hit effect executed during the normal variation effect period, the effect mode can be reduced to a minimum of 4 remaining monsters. The value "0, 1" of the effect lottery counter 223y is defined in association with the type, and the value "2" of the effect lottery counter 223y is defined for the effect type of the effect mode in which the number of monsters can be reduced to 0. are defined in association with each other. In addition, as an interrupt barrage effect executed during reach fluctuation, the value "3 to 19" of the effect lottery counter 223y is associated with the effect type of the effect mode in which the number of monsters can be reduced to a minimum of four. A value "20 to 39" of the effect lottery counter 223y is defined in association with the effect type of the specified effect mode in which the number of monsters can be reduced to 3, and the effect mode in which the number of monsters can be reduced to 0. The value "40, 41" of the effect lottery counter 223y is defined in association with the effect type. That is, compared to the case of losing or winning normal reach, the execution ratio of the total interrupt continuous hitting performance is higher and the possibility of defeating all the monsters is higher, so that the player's expectation for the big win is improved. can be done.

In this way, in the first control example, the execution timing of the interrupt continuous hit effect and the number of monsters that can be subjugated are configured to be different for each variation type, and only in the case of a big win, the effect of subjugating all the monsters is provided. It is configured so that it can be selected. By configuring in this way, it is possible to actively perform the repeated hitting operation during the execution of the interrupting repeated hitting effect, so that the player's willingness to participate in the interrupting repeated hitting effect can be improved.

Next, the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 412(b). FIG. 412(b) is a block diagram showing the contents of the RAM 223. As shown in FIG. The RAM 223 contains a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b, a normal reserved ball number counter 223c, a fluctuation start flag 223d, a stop type selection flag 223e, and a game state storage area 223f. , a guaranteed time counter 223g, a continuous scenario storage area 223h, a winning flag 223i during right hitting, a repeated hitting type storage area 223j, a chance charge waiting flag 223k, a charge number counter 223m, and a charge state number counter 223n. , batch change flag 223p, change point storage area 223q, reserved symbol state storage area 223r, variable time timer 223s, operation effective period timer 223t, stop operation number counter 223u, continuous hit effective period timer 223v, collectively At least a change period timer 223x, an effect lottery counter 223y, and another memory area 223z are provided.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a is a counter that counts up to 4 times the number of reserved balls (standby number) corresponding to the lottery of the first special symbol reserved in the main control device 110, and special symbol 2 reserved. The number-of-balls counter 223b is a counter that counts up to four times the number of reserved balls corresponding to the second special symbol lottery.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 directly accesses the main control device 110, and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 cannot get the value of Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the number of reserved balls command transmitted from the main controller 110, and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b Then, the number of reserved balls is managed for each type of special symbol.

Specifically, in the main controller 110, when the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 is added to the number of pending balls in the variable display, or when the main controller 110 When the variable display is executed and the number of reserved balls is subtracted, the number of reserved balls indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d after addition or subtraction, or the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e Send the command to the audio ramp controller 113 .

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 or the special symbol 2 reserved ball from the reserved ball number command The value of the number counter 203e is acquired and stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b (see S3910 in FIG. 451). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b in accordance with the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110. While synchronizing with the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110, the values can be updated.

The values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223 a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223 b are used to display the reserved ball number symbols on the third symbol display device 81 . That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b in response to the reception of the reserved ball number command. , In order to notify the display control device 114 of the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b after storage, a display reserved ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114. .

When the display control device 114 receives this display pending ball number command, the value of the pending ball number indicated by the command, that is, the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 223a of the sound lamp control device 113 and the special symbol 2 pending ball number counter 223a The drawing of the image is controlled so that the number of reserved ball symbols corresponding to the value of the ball counter 223b is displayed in the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81. FIG. As described above, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b are synchronized with the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110. while its value is changed. Therefore, the number of reserved ball number symbols displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 is also synchronized with the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110. It can be changed while Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of held balls whose variable display is held.

The normal reserved ball number counter 223c has the same content as the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b described above, but differs in that the target is changed from the special symbol to the normal symbol. Since the technical control concept is the same, detailed description is omitted.

The fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on when the first special symbol fluctuation pattern command or the second special symbol fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S3904 in FIG. 451), and the third symbol It is turned off when the variable display is set on the display device 81 (see S4202 in FIG. 455). When the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on, a fluctuation pattern command for display is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is executed by the MPU 221 in the command output processing (S3102) of the main processing (see FIG. 441), It is transmitted toward the display control device 114 . In the display control device 114, by receiving this display variation pattern command, the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is used to perform the variation display of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81. Display control of the variable effect is started.

The stop type selection flag 223e is turned on when receiving a special symbol stop type command transmitted from the main controller 110 (see S3907 in FIG. 451), and the stop type in the third symbol display device 81 is set. is turned off (see S4208 in FIG. 455). When the stop type selection flag 223e is turned on, the stop type is determined based on the stop type (jackpot type in the case of a jackpot) extracted from the received stop type command.

The game state storage area 223f is a storage area for storing data corresponding to the game state of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. This game state storage area 223f is updated every time a state command output every time the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed is received from the main controller 110 (see S3902 in FIG. 451). The game state storage area 223f is composed of, for example, a 1-byte storage area, and is configured so that the game state can be specified by the state of the lower 2 bits. More specifically, for example, the least significant bit indicates whether or not it is the time saving state of normal symbols, and the bit of the second lower order bit indicates whether or not it is the probability variable state of special symbols. Therefore, in the "low-probability state of special symbols" and "normal state of normal symbols", the lower 2 bits are "00B", and in the "low-probability state of special symbols" and "time-saving state of normal symbols", the lower The 2 bits are "01B", and in the "probability variable state of special symbols" and "time saving state of normal symbols", the lower 2 bits are "11B". The MPU 221 of the voice ramp control device 113 can grasp the game state of the pachinko machine 10 on the side of the voice ramp control device 113 based on the data stored in the game state storage area 223f.

Shortening of working hours guarantee counter 223f is a counter for counting the number of remaining fluctuations in which the time saving state is guaranteed. The initial value of the guaranteed time counter 223f is set to 0, and the value is set to 100 at the end of the jackpot (see S4107 in FIG. 454). In addition, the value is decremented by 1 every time the execution of a new variable display is set (see S4304 in FIG. 456). As described above, in the first control example, after the end of the jackpot, the time-saving state of the normal symbols is maintained until the lottery of the special symbols is executed 100 times. By counting the number of time saving guarantees by the time saving guarantee number counter 223f, the sound lamp control device 113 side can also accurately grasp the guaranteed number of times.

The continuation scenario storage area 223h is a storage area for storing data indicating the type of effect scenario determined from the continuation suggestion effect selection table 222g (see FIG. 416) at the start of the variable probability continuation suggestion effect. The initial value of this continuation scenario storage area 223h is set to 00H, and when the production scenario is determined by lottery using the continuation suggestion production selection table 222g (see FIG. 416) at the start timing of the probability variable continuation suggestion production, Data indicating the effect scenario is stored (see S4409 in FIG. 457). During execution of the variable probability continuation suggestion effect, the variable display mode at the start of each variable display is determined based on the data in the continuous scenario storage area 223h (see S4415 in FIG. 457).

The winning flag 223i during right hitting is a flag indicating whether or not the jackpot in execution is a jackpot won during the right hitting gaming state (ordinary symbol time saving state). If this right-handed winning flag 223i is on, it indicates that it is a jackpot won during the right-handed gaming state, and if it is off, it is a jackpot won during the left-handed gaming state (that is, the first hit). indicates that At the end of the jackpot, the back mode is set according to the state of the winning flag 223i during hitting to the right. That is, if it is on, the temple search mode is set, and if it is off, the cave search mode is set (see S4109 and S4110 in FIG. 454). As described above, when the jackpot is hit in the left-handed game state (that is, the jackpot is hit in the lottery of the first special symbol), only at a rate of 50% it shifts to the variable state, while the jackpot is hit in the right-handed game state. When it becomes (that is, it becomes a big hit in the lottery of the second special symbol), it shifts to the variable probability state at a rate of 80%. This difference in ratio is configured to be notified by the degree of expectation indicated by the rear mode.

The repeated hitting type storage area 223j is a storage area for storing data indicating the type of interrupting repeated hitting effect (the execution timing of the effect and the lower limit value of the number of monster subtractions). Depending on the data in the repeated hit type storage area 223j, the start timing of the interrupt repeated hit effect, the subtraction number of the monster with respect to the depression of the PUSH button 10317, and the like are set.

The chance charge standby flag 223k is a flag indicating whether or not it is a period (chance charge standby period) from when the execution of the chance charge effect is determined to when the chance charge effect is actually started. If so, it indicates that it is the chance charge waiting period. The chance charge standby flag 223k has an initial value set to OFF, and is set to ON when execution of the chance charge effect is determined (see S4564 in FIG. 459), and execution of the chance charge effect is started. is set to off (see S3313 in FIG. 443). When a new start prize is detected while the chance charge standby flag 223k is on, the number of gauges is added to the number of gauges determined in advance as the number of spirit gauges accumulated in the chance charge performance to be executed thereafter. It is determined whether or not

The charge number counter 223m is a counter indicating the gauge number of the spirit gauge notified in the chance charge effect. This charge number counter 223m has an initial value set to 0, and when execution of the chance charge effect is decided, a value obtained by adding 1 to the number of pending balls at the time of the decision is set (see FIG. 459). (see S4563). Also, by executing the chance-up effect, every time the spirit gauge is consumed, the value is decremented by 1 and updated (see S3559 and S3561 in FIG. 446).

The charge state number counter 223n is a counter that indicates the number of remaining fluctuations until consumption of the energy gauge accumulated by the chance charge effect is completed. This charge state number counter 223n is set to a value corresponding to the current number of pending balls at the start of the chance charge effect (see S3314 in FIG. 443), and each time a new variable display effect is set to be executed, the value increases. It is decremented by 1 (see S4302 in FIG. 456). While the value of the charge state counter 223n is 1 or more, it is determined whether or not to execute the chance-up effect by consuming the spirit gauge each time the chance-up effect can be executed.

The collective change flag 223p is a flag indicating whether or not the pending collective change effect is being executed. If it is ON, it means that the pending collective change effect is being executed, and if it is OFF, the pending collective change is being executed. Indicates that the performance is not in progress. The batch change flag 223p has an initial value set to OFF, and is set to ON when execution of the pending batch change effect is set (see S4059 in FIG. 453).

The change point storage area 223q is a storage area for storing the change points specified by referring to the change point calculation table 222d. The change point storage area 223q is configured to be able to store the change points of each reserved ball separately.

The reserved symbol state storage area 223r is a storage area for storing data indicating the reserved symbol mode of each reserved ball number symbol. With the data stored in the reserved pattern state storage area 223r, the reserved pattern mode of each reserved ball number pattern can be accurately grasped.

The variable time timer 223s is a timer for measuring variable time. The progress of the variable display presentation can be accurately determined based on the timer value of the variable time timer 223s.

The operation effective period timer 223t is a timer for measuring the period during which the PUSH button 10317 is effective in the press stop effect (see FIG. 395). It is determined by this operation effective period timer 223t whether or not the operation of the PUSH button 10317 in the pressing stop effect is treated as valid. In the press stop effect, separate button images and validity period gauges are displayed on the display screen for each symbol row, but in reality, the operation of the PUSH button 10317 is validated by a single operation validity period. It is determined whether or not By configuring in this way, it is possible to simplify the judgment as to whether or not the stop operation of each symbol row is valid, so that the processing load of the sound lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

The stop operation number counter 223u is a counter that indicates the number of remaining stop operations that can be executed in the press stop effect (see FIG. 395). When the stop operation counter 223u has a value of 3 and a stop operation is detected during the valid operation period, the left symbol column is stopped, and the value is 2 and the operation is stopped during the valid operation period. When the operation is detected, the right symbol row is stopped and displayed, and when the value is 1 and the stop operation is detected during the operation effective period, the center symbol row is stopped and displayed.

The continuous hitting effective period timer 223s is a timer for measuring the period during which the continuous hitting operation for the PUSH button 10317 is valid in the interrupt continuous hitting effect (see FIG. 399). It is determined whether or not the operation of the PUSH button 10317 in the interrupt continuous hitting effect is treated as valid by the continuous hitting effective period timer 223s.

The collective change period timer 223x is a timer for measuring the period during which the PUSH button 10317 is valid in the pending collective change effect (see FIGS. 403 and 404). By this collective change period timer 223x, it is determined whether or not the operation on the PUSH button 10317 in the pending collective change effect is treated as valid.

The effect lottery counter 223y is a random number counter for executing the lottery for the effect mode, as described above.

The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. FIG. The other memory area 223z includes, for example, a winning information storage area for storing winning information based on winning information commands received from the main controller 110, and the like. The winning information storage area has a memory area consisting of four areas (first area to fourth area) for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In addition, it has one execution area. Winning information is stored in each area. In the pachinko machine 10, when the start winning is detected in the main controller 110, each of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 obtained according to the starting winning Based on the value, various information (win/fail, stop type, variation pattern) obtained when a special symbol lottery corresponding to the starting prize is performed is predicted (estimated) in the main controller 110, and the predicted various information. is notified from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp controller 113 by means of the winning information command.

When the winning information command is received, the audio lamp control device 113 extracts the various information (win/fail, stop type, variation pattern) notified by the winning information command as winning information. It is stored in the storage area 223a. More specifically, the extracted winning information is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (1st to 4th) among the four open areas (1st to 4th areas). be done. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest winning is stored, and the first area stores the data corresponding to the oldest winning.

The RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores commands received from the main controller 110 until processing corresponding to the commands is performed, and a timer that counts the performance time. are doing. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination processing (see FIG. 36) of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed, the first stored command among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read, and the command determination processing The command is parsed and processing is performed according to the command.

The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third pattern display device 81 performs variable display (variation production) and continuous announcement production are controlled. Details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

The power supply unit 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, etc., and a RAM deletion switch circuit 253 provided with a RAM deletion switch 122. have. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts supplied from the outside, various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, a voltage of 12 volts for driving a motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and backup voltages are supplied to the controllers 110 to 114 and the like as necessary voltages.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 at the time of power failure due to power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of stable DC 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power shutdown, power shutdown) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. Then, a power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. Even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 432).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input, and controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. Send to device 111 .

Next, referring to FIG. 418, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 418 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device 114. As shown in FIG. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the sound lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238 , and the MPU 231 , work RAM 233 , character ROM 234 and image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via the bus line 240 . . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237 , and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241 . A third pattern display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239 .

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model with a different lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot or a different number of prize balls paid out for one special symbol jackpot, the symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are different. Since there are models with exactly the same specifications, the display control device 114 is made a common component to reduce costs.

The MPU 231, character ROM 234, image controller 237, resident video RAM 235, and normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described below.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the audio ramp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110 . The MPU 231 incorporates an instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is designed to be reset by the power supply 115 immediately after the power is turned on (including power recovery from a power failure; the same shall apply hereinafter). is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231 . Each time an instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer indicated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although the details will be described later, in this embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are stored in a dedicated program ROM as in conventional game machines. The data of the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data.

Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. As a result, not only image data but also control programs and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the control program and the like are stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the read speed becomes slow especially when performing random access. For example, when reading data continuously arranged in a plurality of pages, the data of the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed. It takes a long time before the data is output. Also, when reading discontinuous data, a long time is required each time the data is read. As described above, since the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions that make up the control program. However, even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may deteriorate.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. store. The MPU 231 then executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233 . The work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), as will be described later, and reads and writes data at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores control programs executed by the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third pattern display device 81 , and is connected to the MPU 231 via a bus line 240 . The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234 to a resident video RAM 235, which is connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236 .

The character ROM 234 is constructed by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

The NAND type flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storage and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

Here, the NAND type flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in this pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. can. Therefore, the images displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated in order to increase the interest of the player.

In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store control programs and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 while storing a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2. In this way, the control program and fixed value data are provided to store the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without providing and storing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. Since the characters can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data is retrieved from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 .

Here, the NAND type flash memory 234a, due to its nature, generates a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data is written) when writing data, and generates defective data blocks into which data cannot be written. or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b applies known error correction to the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and avoids bad data blocks when reading and writing data to the NAND flash memory 234a. data address translation.

The ROM controller 234b corrects errors in the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a that contains error bits. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

In addition, the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data blocks of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids access to the defective data blocks. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b reads one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data corresponding to the designated address. is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. do. Then, the ROM controller 234 b outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 after performing known error correction processing.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and one page of data in the NAND flash memory 234a can be set in each bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b, for example, outputs the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside using the other bank while data is set in one bank, or outputs the data specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or image controller 237 is transferred to the other bank. The processing of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234 can be improved.

The NOR-type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub-storage unit in the character ROM 234, and is intended to complement the NAND-type flash memory 234a. ). Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the NOR-type ROM 234d stores programs that are not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND-type flash memory 234a. At least a first program storage area 234d1 is provided for storing a portion of the boot program to be executed.

The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third pattern display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after releasing the system reset. As a result, the display control device 114 can be put into a state in which various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 stores the boot program within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a), which should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, instructions for 1024 words (1 word=2 bytes)) are stored. The number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware and instructs the bus line 240 to specify the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified on the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d is transferred to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. , and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231 .

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and transfers the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. to specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234, while the address specified by the bus line 240 is the address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d, selects the program previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d. , the instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234 c and output to the MPU 231 .

Here, in this embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing in is as follows. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time to read out the data of the first page after the address is specified until the data is output. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code that the MPU 231 should execute first after the system reset is released. If so, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read out and set the data in the buffer RAM 234c. You spend a lot of time waiting to receive your code. Therefore, the time taken to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory from which data can be read at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. Thus, when the address "0000H" is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d into the buffer RAM 234c. , and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 . Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", and the MPU 231 can be activated in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

The boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program other than the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. , fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control program are stored in the program storage area of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). 233a and the data table storage area 233b. The MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. While using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c that is stored, a predetermined amount is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to this, the boot program is set only in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c is transferred to the program storage area 233a. The transfer process can be performed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in storage area 234d1. Therefore, after the transfer process, there is no need to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 again in the buffer RAM 234c, so the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the command pointer 231a to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to be set to a first predetermined address. As a result, when the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a after the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined number in the program storage area 233a. Set to a street address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processing can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but rather reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. and execute various processes. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch instructions at high speed and process the instructions.

Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount from the second program storage area 234a1. The instruction pointer 231a is programmed so as to include the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as a first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Execute the rest of the boot program contained in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, the remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control programs are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. Also, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, the initialization process (see S8002 in FIG. 460) executed after the boot process (see S8001 in FIG. 460) by the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address. Set the start address of the program corresponding to .

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, when the boot program is executed by the MPU 231 to the end, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can read the control program from the work RAM configured by the DRAM with a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

Further, as described above, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time simply by adding the NOR type ROM 234d with a very small capacity. can be done.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third pattern display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 423) transmitted from the MPU 231 to be described later, and draws one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c to be described later. The image drawn in the buffer is developed, and the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer is output to the third pattern display device 81 to display the image on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加. The image controller 237 performs the one-frame image drawing process and the one-frame image display process within the one-frame image display time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) on the third pattern display device 81 . parallel processing in

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing processing for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, the MPU 231 executes V interrupt processing (see FIG. 462(b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of causing the third pattern display device 81 to display the image developed by the previous drawing.

In this manner, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and issues a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs image drawing processing and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in accordance with a new drawing instruction in a frame buffer storing image information being displayed.

The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236 based on transfer instructions from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

Image drawing is performed using image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236 . That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 based on instructions from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, the NAND type flash memory makes it easy to increase the capacity of the ROM, but its read speed is slower than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. is configured to As will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image is drawn by the image controller 237 while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. can be processed. Therefore, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, when drawing the image. , the time required for reading the image can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

In particular, image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images to be displayed immediately after display is determined by main controller 110 or display controller 114 are permanently resident in resident video RAM 235. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

Further, when the display control device 114 draws an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, before the drawing is performed, the display controller 114 stores necessary data for drawing from the character ROM 234 in the normal video RAM 236. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal-use video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for image drawing. Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of , and the time required for reading the data can be saved, the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. can.

Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236 as well, there is no need to keep all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so there is no need to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. FIG. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of an SRAM of 132 kilobytes, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction given to the image controller 237 by the MPU 231 based on the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the head address (storage source head address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and top of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Contains an address. Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

The image controller 237 reads one block of data from a predetermined address in the character ROM 234 according to various information of this transfer instruction, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and stores it in the buffer RAM 237a when the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 is not in use. , is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 . Then, the processing is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source start address to the storage source end address indicated by the transfer instruction are transferred.

As a result, the image data read out from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 in a short time. can be done. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by transferring the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of image data, these video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for image drawing processing. , it is possible to prevent the display on the third pattern display device 81 from being too late.

In addition, since image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are used for image drawing processing and third symbol display. It is possible to easily determine the period during which the display processing on the device 81 is not used, and to simplify the processing.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 can be retained while the power is turned on without being overwritten. 235e and an error message image area 235f are provided, and at least a power-on variation image area 235b and a third pattern area 235d are provided.

The power-on main image area 235a is the power-on main image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 after power is turned on until all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is an area for storing corresponding data. In the power-on variation image area 235b, the game is started by the player while the main image at power-on is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the entry of a ball into the first start hole 64a is detected. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a power-on varying image for displaying the results of the lottery performed by the main controller 110 in a varying effect.

The MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on varying image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a when power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started. A transfer instruction is sent to the controller 237 (see FIG. 460).

Here, the power-on variation image will be described. Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on varying image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on varying image area 235b. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 displays the power-on main image (see FIG. 419) using the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a. It is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

At this time, when receiving a display variation pattern command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a variation pattern command from the main controller 110, which is an instruction command to start variation, the display control device 114 displays the main image when the power is turned on. On the display screen of , a variation image at the time of power-on with an "○" symbol at the lower right position of the screen, and a variation image at the time of power-on with an "X" symbol at the same position as the "○" symbol are displayed during the variation period. Medium, alternately displayed repeatedly. Then, based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main controller 110, the lottery performed by the main controller 110 is selected from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113. The result is determined, and if it is a ``jackpot with a special pattern'', an image showing it is displayed for a certain period after stopping the variable performance, and if it is a ``missing special pattern'', the image showing it is stopped from the variable performance. Display for a certain period of time.

The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to use the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the rest of the image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person involved in the hall can confirm the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. Also, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the remaining image to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is displayed. To wait until the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying whether the operation is stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235.例文帳に追加can be done.

Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like during manufacturing, since the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the operation of the third pattern display device 81 is started without any problem when the power is turned on. Furthermore, by using the NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress deterioration in the efficiency of the operation check.

Further, when the player starts the game while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the entry of the first entrance ball 64 is detected, the power-on fluctuation image area is displayed. The power-on variation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image resident in 235b, and the images showing "O" and "X" are alternately displayed on the third pattern display device 81. The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 as follows. As a result, a simple variation effect can be performed using the power-on variation image. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation performance.

Further, at the stage when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation effect image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. When the entry of the first entrance ball 64 is detected while the main image is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the corresponding variation effect can be immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加can.

Returning to FIG. 418, the description continues. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. The third symbol area 235d is an area for permanently storing the third symbol used in the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. That is, in the third pattern area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned nine types of main patterns with numbers "1" to "9" as the third patterns are resident. As a result, when the third pattern display device 81 performs a variable effect, it is not necessary to read the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. It is possible to quickly start a variable production. Therefore, after the ball enters the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b, the third symbol display device 81 fluctuates even though the first symbol display device 37 starts the variation effect. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the performance is not started immediately.

The character design area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character designs used in various effects displayed on the third design display device 81. FIG. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "Boy" are displayed according to various effects, and data corresponding to these characters are resident in the character design area 235e to control the display. When the device 114 changes the character design based on the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, instead of newly reading out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, the image data is stored in the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. By reading the image data resident in advance, the image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so even if the character ROM 234 uses the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the character design can be changed immediately.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when vibration is detected by the sound ramp control device 113 from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the sound ramp control device 113 detects the occurrence of a vibration error. Notify the display controller 114 with an error command. Also, when the audio lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of another error, the audio lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the error occurrence together with the error type by an error command. The display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81 when an error command is received.

Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the standpoint of preventing fraud by the player and protecting the player against errors. In the pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages are pre-resident in the error message image area 235f. By reading the image data pre-resident in the image area 235f, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. This eliminates the need to sequentially read image data corresponding to error messages from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND type flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is read after receiving an error command. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data can be overwritten and updated as needed, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b and a second frame buffer 236c.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, among the image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data to be stored in each sub-area is predetermined.

The MPU 231 extracts image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 in the subarea provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , instructs the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area for storing. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a specified sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including the transfer data information in the later-described drawing list in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image. As a result, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. The image controller 237 writes the one-frame image drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 to either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby rendering the one-frame image to the frame buffer. While the image is developed and the image is developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame previously developed is read out from the other frame buffer, and sent to the third pattern display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information with the third pattern display device 81, a process for displaying the image for one frame is executed.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 can expand the one-frame image drawn in one of the frame buffers and simultaneously , the image for one frame developed earlier can be read out from the other frame buffer, and the read image for one frame can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

A frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame for displaying an image on the third pattern display device 81 are used for drawing processing of an image for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds of completion, the MPU 231 alternately designates either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. be.

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. be. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternating designations, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing drawing processing for an image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and for temporarily storing work data and flags used when various control programs are executed by the MPU 231. Configured. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, a storage image data discrimination It has at least a flag 233i, a drawing target buffer flag 233j, a background mode storage area 233k, and an interruption data storage area 233m.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing control programs executed by the MPU 231 . When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. After storing all the control programs in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

The data table storage area 233b includes a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main controller 110, and a display data table. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in one effect displayed by the table and a transfer data table defining transfer timing.

These data tables are normally stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 434 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. , these data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. After all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data tables stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used to easily implement diversified and complicated effects.

Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared one by one for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a variable effect, a round effect, etc. , an ending effect, and a display data table corresponding to the demo effect are prepared.

The variation effect is an effect that is started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command from the sound lamp control device 113 is received. In addition, when the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variable performance is started, if the stop type of the variable performance is off, the stop symbol indicating the failure is finally stopped and displayed, and the stop type of the variable performance is the jackpot A or the jackpot B. If it is either, the stop symbol indicating each jackpot is finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbols in this variable effect, and can easily determine the game value to be given according to the jackpot type.

In addition, since the first ball entrance 64 is a prize winning opening in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters, a jackpot of normal symbols is produced, and the electric accessory is released, and the ball enters the second ball. If it becomes easier to enter the ball opening 640, the number of prize balls increases. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 is in a state in which it is difficult to reduce the number of balls in hand or in a state in which the number of balls in hand does not decrease even if a game is played, so that the player is in a state in which the number of balls in hand is difficult to decrease or the number of balls in hand does not decrease. You can get a sense of the period that you can get a special symbol jackpot without it. Therefore, since the player's desire to participate in the game can be enhanced, the player can continue to have the desire to participate in the game.

In addition, as described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the start winning does not start even after a predetermined time has passed since one variable effect stopped. The third pattern composed of the main patterns with no numerals '0' to '9' is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player and the persons involved in the hall can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is not playing a game.

The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table each corresponding to the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect. Further, if there are 32 variable performance patterns to be set, the variable display data table, which is a display data table for the variable performance, is prepared with one table for one variable performance pattern, and a total of 32 tables.

Details of the display data table will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 421 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at that time in association with an address that represents the time (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) during which an image for one frame is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as one unit. It defines in detail the content (drawing content) of an image for one frame.

The drawing contents specify the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and translucency according to the type of sprite. Rendering information for causing the third pattern display device 81 to render sprites, such as values, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The sprite type is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third pattern display device 81 where the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating an enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement ratio. If the magnification is greater than 100%, the sprite will be displayed larger than the standard size, and if the magnification is less than 100%, the sprite will be displayed smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when rotating and displaying the sprite. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed behind the sprite can be seen through. The α-blending information is information for specifying known α-blending coefficients used when performing superimposition processing with other sprites. Color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when rendering the designated sprite.

In the variable display data table, the drawing contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address are one rear image, nine third patterns (design 1, design 2, . Rendering information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of a character, a character used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is defined for each address. One or a plurality of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81, and the magnification, rotation angle, translucency, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information are changed over time. Since it is fixed, the variable display data table defines only the back face type, which is information for specifying the back face image type.

The MPU 231 selects one of the backgrounds corresponding to the background mode (sea, beach, preparation period background, time production background) according to the background type. A rear image corresponding to the specified stage is specified as a drawing target, and the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame is specified according to the lapse of time.

In the present embodiment, a description will be given of a case in which only the back surface type is specified as the drawing content of the back surface image in the display data table. may be defined as position information indicating whether the should be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 identifies the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame based on the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information was displayed.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on this display data table (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) is started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started.

Furthermore, the position information is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed, and the image drawing based on the display data table (or the third pattern display device 81) according to the back surface type. display) may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display, or along with the back surface type and position information, the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position It is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started. information indicating whether or not the background image is drawn) may be defined as the drawing content of the back image. Alternatively, the position information may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored, instead of information indicating the elapsed time.

The third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2, . . . ) describe symbol type offset information as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to the respective third symbols. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variable effect is the stop symbol of the variable effect performed one before and the variable effect performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop pattern, and in the pattern offset information from the start of the variation until the predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop pattern of the previous variation performance is described. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop pattern set according to the stop type command (stop type command for display) received from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113 Include information. As a result, the variable effect can be stopped with a stop pattern corresponding to the stop type specified by the main controller 110. - 特許庁

In addition, since each third symbol is assigned a unique number, the variable symbol in the previous variable effect or the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main controller 110 can be selected as the third symbol. , and the offset information is represented by the difference between the numbers attached to each third pattern, the third pattern to be displayed can be easily specified from the offset information.

In addition, in the pattern offset information, the third pattern fluctuates at high speed during the predetermined time when the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance performed this time. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third pattern is being variably displayed at high speed, the third pattern is invisible to the player. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third pattern is interrupted, the player is not made to recognize the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described at "0000H", which is the top address of the display data table, and the last address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 36) is the data table. "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing contents corresponding to the presentation mode to be defined in the display data table are displayed. is described.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and displays the selected display data table. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the next A drawing list (see FIG. 423), which will be described later, is created by specifying the image contents to be drawn. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, as the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table, so the image specified in the display data table is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

Thus, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. .

Here, as in a conventional pachinko machine, if a program to be executed by the MPU 231 is started each time the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, the effect image becomes more diverse. Therefore, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a risk that the diversification of controllable effect images will be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, various modes of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81. - 特許庁

In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. The reason why it can be created is that the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance in the pachinko machine 10 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the starting prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the mode of presentation. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the presentation mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. This configuration can be realized only when the pachinko machine 10 is configured to determine the presentation mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the starting prize.

Next, with reference to FIG. 422, details of the transfer data table will be described. FIG. 422 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect. Transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and its transfer timing are defined.

If all the image data of the sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is prepared. As a result, an increase in capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

The transfer data table contains transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") to be transferred at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table in correspondence with the address. (corresponding to addresses "0001H" and "0097H" in FIG. 422). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in association with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transferring at the time indicated by the address defined in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transferring corresponding to that address. (corresponding to address “0002H” in FIG. 422).

The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). is included.

It should be noted that, similarly to the display data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H", which is the top address of the transfer data table, and the end address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 422, "02F0H") describes "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table is described.

When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table exists, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233, which will be described later. Then, every time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f are identified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 423) to be described later is created. At the same time, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer is to be started at that time is acquired, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 422, when the pointer 233f is "0001H" or "0097H", the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified for the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. The drawing list is added, and the drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 237 . On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", Null data is defined at the address "0002H" of the transfer data table. The drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 without adding transfer data information to the drawing list.

When transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. process.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 required for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and displays the display data. When the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. It is possible to reliably transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

The transfer data table defines transfer data information so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load on transfer.

The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and is associated with an address defined in the display data table. Since the data information is defined, the image data is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of the predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the timing of starting transfer can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, various effects images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) shown in FIG. This simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and power-on varying image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or power-on varying image area 235b of the resident video RAM. , is set to ON in the main process (see FIG. 460) executed by the MPU 231 (see S8005 in FIG. 460). Then, when all the resident object image data are stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer processing of the image transfer processing, in order to display an image other than the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, It is set to OFF (see S9705 in FIG. 471(b)).

The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S8301 in FIG. 462(b)). When the image display flag 233c is on, the simple command determination processing (see S8308 in FIG. 462(b)) and the simple display setting processing (see S8308 in FIG. 462(b) S8309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to commands transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 463 to 468) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 469 and 470) are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S9601 in FIG. 471(a)), and when the simple image display flag 233c is on. Since there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235, resident image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 471(b)) is executed to transfer the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 472) is executed to transfer the image data required for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. FIG.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to commands and the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on commands and the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for The MPU 231 determines the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, and stores the display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. It selects and stores the selected display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by 1, and based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 423) in which the content of the image drawing instruction for is described is generated. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

While incrementing the pointer 233f by 1, the MPU 231 draws an image to the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list (see FIG. 423), which will be described later, is generated in which the content of the drawing instruction is described. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 .

The transfer data table buffer 233e transfers a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. is a buffer for storing When the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b, and transfers the selected transfer data table. Store in the data table buffer 233e. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents of the transfer data table buffer 233e by writing Null data indicating that there is no transfer target image data.

While incrementing the pointer 233f by one, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is added to a later-described rendering list (see FIG. 423) describing the image rendering instruction contents for the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

As a result, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data necessary for drawing the sprite can be obtained. Image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The pointer 233f is an address at which transfer data information of corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data should be obtained from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. is for specifying The MPU 231 once initializes the pointer 233f to 0 when the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, display setting processing for V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the rendering processing of one frame of image is completed (FIG. 462(b)). ), the pointer update process (see S9305 in FIG. 470(b)) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

Every time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 identifies the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and stores the drawing content in the drawing list, which will be described later. (see FIG. 423), acquires the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer is to be started at that time from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and obtains the transfer data Add information to the created drawing list.

As a result, an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. Therefore, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various effects can be displayed.

In addition, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is displayed based on the transfer data table before the corresponding display data table starts drawing a predetermined sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The drawing list area 233g is used by the image controller to draw an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list that instructs H.237.

Details of the drawing list will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 423 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. Design 2, ...), Effect (Effect 1, Effect 2, ...), Character (Character 1, Character 2, ..., Retained ball pattern 1, Retained ball number pattern 2, ..., Error (symbol) describes detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite for each sprite. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 .

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the type of RAM (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and its type. The image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is scaled according to the enlargement ratio, rotated according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the translucency value. alpha blending information, compositing with other sprites, color tone correction according to color information, and filtering according to filter specification information. After that, an image obtained by performing various processes at the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is developed by the image controller 237 in either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 stores the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, the pending number of balls to be displayed). Image, warning image that notifies the occurrence of an error, etc.), generates detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw the image for one frame, and provides the detailed information for each sprite. Create a draw list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the RAM type and address for storing the data of the sprite (display object) are the sprite type defined in the display data table and the sprite type specified from other image contents. generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 can store the image data according to the sprite type. , the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

In addition, the MPU 231 sets other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite as defined in the display data table. copy the information as is.

Further, in generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged in the order of the sprites to be arranged in the front side from the sprites to be arranged in the rearmost side in the image for one frame, and provides detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, the detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, followed by the third pattern (pattern 1, pattern 2, . . . ), effect (effect 1, effect 2, . . . ). , character (character 1, character 2, . . . , reserved ball pattern 1, reserved ball pattern 2, .

The image controller 237 executes drawing processing for each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and develops the drawn sprites in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the one-frame image generated by the drawing list, the first-drawn sprite can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the last-drawn sprite can be arranged on the frontmost side.

In the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, if the transfer data information is written at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the MPU 231 stores the transfer data information (character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source end address in the ROM 234, and the storage destination start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a where the image data to be transferred is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 draws an image from a predetermined area of the character ROM 234 (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source end address) based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236 .

The clock counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. When one display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect to be displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the performance time by the image display time for one frame on the third pattern display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment).

Then, the MPU 231 executes V interrupt processing (see (b )) is executed, the clock counter 233h is decremented by one (see S9307 in FIG. 469). As a result, when the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 judges that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the effect in accordance with the end of the effect. perform various operations to

The storage image data determination flag 233i is set to indicate whether image data corresponding to all sprites whose corresponding image data are not resident in the resident video RAM 235 are stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is.

This stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by initial setting processing (see S8002 in FIG. 460) executed by the MPU 231 in the main processing when the power is turned on. The storage image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to "OFF" indicating that the storage status for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated when an instruction to transfer image data to be transferred corresponding to one sprite is set during normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 472) executed by the MPU 231. will be In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "on" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Also, image data of other sprites to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236a as that one sprite will always be in a non-stored state when the image data of one sprite is stored. Therefore, set the containment state corresponding to the other sprites to "off".

Also, when transferring the image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i and determines the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S9813 in FIG. 472). Then, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "OFF" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, an instruction to transfer the image data is set (see S9814 in FIG. 472). , causes the image controller 237 to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer processing of that image data is stopped. As a result, unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233i is a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as a "drawing target buffer") that develops an image drawn by the image controller 237 from among the two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c). ), and when the drawing buffer flag 233j is 0, it designates the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing buffer, and when it is 1, it designates the second frame buffer 236c. The information of the specified drawing target buffer is sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S9902 in FIG. 473).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of developing the image drawn based on the drawing list on the specified drawing target buffer. In parallel with the drawing process, the image controller 237 reads the drawn image information previously developed from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer, and transmits the image to the third pattern display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, display processing for displaying an image on the third pattern display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated as the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is done by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". done by As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Also, the transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of the image for one frame are completed. This is performed each time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 462(b)) is executed (see S9902 in FIG. 473).

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. be.

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. be. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately specifying the parameters, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing for the image for one frame.

The background mode storage area 233k is a storage area for storing data corresponding to the currently set background mode. Further, the interruption data storage area 233m is a storage area for temporarily holding information indicating the display mode at the time of interruption during the interruption period when the interruption of the display mode is instructed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 424, the audio output device 226 in this first control example will be described. FIG. 424 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the audio output device 226. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 424, the audio output device 226 is equipped with an MPU 301 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic device. The MPU 301 includes a ROM 302 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 301, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 302. A RAM 303 is built in.

The MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 is electrically connected to the input/output port 305 and the audio synthesizing section 306 . When a command specifying audio data is received from the audio lamp control device 113 to the audio output device 226 , the command is input to the MPU 301 via the input/output port 305 . Also, the audio data specified by the audio lamp control device 113 is read from the ROM 302 and output to the channel corresponding to the audio type of the audio synthesizing section 306 .

The voice synthesizing unit 306 is composed of a known voice synthesizing LSI that synthesizes voice data input to each channel and outputs the synthesized voice data to the amplifier unit 307 . Synthesized speech data is amplified by amplifier section 307 and input to speaker section 308 . As a result, various sounds designated by the sound lamp control device 113 can be output from the speaker unit 308 .

Next, referring to FIG. 424, the configuration of the ROM 302 provided in the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 in this first control example will be described. As shown in FIG. 424, the ROM 302 is provided with at least a voice file storage area 302a.

The audio file storage area 302a is a storage area in which audio files (audio data) used for outputting music, sound effects, etc. in various effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 are stored. When the execution of various effects is notified by the audio lamp control device 113, the audio file corresponding to the effects is read out from the audio file storage area 302a and output to the corresponding channel of the audio synthesizing section 306.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 303 provided in the audio output device 226 will be described. As shown in FIG. 424, the RAM 303 is provided with at least a repeated hitting sound output flag 303a, a reproduction position storage area 303b, and a music output flag 303c.

The repeated-hit sound output flag 303a is a flag indicating the type of repeated-hit sound (whether it is the first repeated-hit sound or the second repeated-hit sound) that was output most recently during the execution of the interrupt repeated-hit effect. If the repeated hitting sound output flag 303a is 01H, it indicates that the latest repeated hitting sound is the first repeated hitting sound, and if it is "02H", it indicates that it is the second repeating sound. By using the repeated hitting sound output flag 303a, it is possible to grasp the type of the repeated hitting sound output most recently, so that each time a repeated hitting operation is detected, different types of repeated hitting sounds can be alternately reproduced for different channels. can. Therefore, since it is possible to diversify the voice mode during the execution of the continuous hitting operation, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

The reproduction position storage area 303b is a storage area for storing data indicating the reproduction position at the time of interruption of music reproduction when an instruction to interrupt reproduction of music is given. When resuming the reproduction of music, the reproduction can be restarted accurately from the interrupted reproduction position based on the data stored in the reproduction position storage area 303b.

The music output flag 303c is a flag indicating whether or not a variable display effect or the like is being executed and music based on an audio file is being output. If the music output flag 303c is ON, it means that music is being output, and if it is OFF, it means that music is not being output.

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the first control example>
Next, each control process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to flowcharts of FIGS. 425 to 439. FIG. The processing of the MPU 201 can be broadly classified into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and a timer that is started periodically (at intervals of 2 milliseconds in this control example). There are interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing that is activated by input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. and main processing.

425 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. FIG. Timer interrupt processing is periodic processing that is executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, various prize-winning switches are read (S101). That is, it reads the states of various switches connected to the main controller 110, determines the states of the switches, and saves detection information (winning detection information).

Next, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (999 in this control example). Then, the updated value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM203. Similarly, the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this control example), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is stored in the RAM 203. stored in the corresponding buffer area.

Further, the special winning random number counter C1, the special winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the falling lottery counter C4, the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the normal winning random number counter C5 are updated (S103). Specifically, the special winning random number counter C1, the special winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the falling lottery counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values (in this control example, 999, 99, 250, 999, 198, 239) are cleared to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C5 and CS1 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203. FIG.

Next, a special symbol variation process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104), and then, A starting winning process associated with winning (starting winning) to the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation processing and the start winning processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 426-429.

After executing the start winning process, the normal symbol variation process, which is the process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and the through gate passage process associated with the passage of the ball at the normal entrance is executed. Execute (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation processing and the through gate passage processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 430 and 431. FIG. After executing the through gate passing process, the firing control process is executed (S108), and then other winning processes are executed (S109). Furthermore, other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S110), and the timer interrupt process ends. In the shooting control process, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the ball is shot on condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping shooting is not operated. This is a process of determining on/off of the . Main controller 110 gives a ball launch instruction to launch controller 112 when ball launch is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 426, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 426 is a flow chart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 425), and the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device This is a process for controlling the variable display of the third pattern performed in 81.

In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is in the middle of a jackpot at the moment (S201). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and during the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S201: Yes), this processing is finished as it is.

If the special symbol jackpot is not being won (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (S202: No), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times of holding the fluctuation display in the special symbol N1) and the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (the fluctuation display in the special number of times N2) is obtained (S203). Next, it is determined whether the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is greater than 0 (S204), and if the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is not 0 ( S204: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (S205), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e changed by calculation is set. (S206). The pending ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 434), which will be described later. , is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 . When receiving the reserved ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. store in

After setting the reserved ball number command by the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the reservation first area to the reservation fourth area of the special symbol 2 reservation ball storage area 203b are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the first holding area → execution area, the second holding area → the first holding area, the third holding area → the second holding area, the fourth holding area → the third holding area, etc. Shift data. After the process of S207 is executed, the process proceeds to S208.

On the other hand, in the process of S204, when it is determined that the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S204: No), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d obtained in the process of S203 It is determined whether the value (N1) is 0 (S209). When it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S209: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S209, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S209: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is set to 1. Subtract (S210), and set a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation (S211). The pending ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 434), which will be described later. , is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223a of the RAM 223. store in

After setting the reserved ball number command by the process of S211, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S212). In the process of S212, the data stored in the reservation first area to the reservation fourth area of the special symbol 1 reservation ball storage area 203a are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the first holding area → execution area, the second holding area → the first holding area, the third holding area → the second holding area, the fourth holding area → the third holding area, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, a special symbol variation start process for setting the start of variation of the special symbol (first symbol) is executed (S208), and this process is terminated. The special symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the processing of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variation display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S213). The variation time of the variation display executed in the first pattern display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this variation time has not elapsed (S213: No), the display of the first symbol display device is updated (S214), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S213, if the variation time of the variable display being executed has passed (S213: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S215). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by special symbol variation start processing (S208), which will be described later with reference to FIG. When this special symbol variation start process (S208) is executed, the values of various counters stored in the execution area provided in common to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. A lottery for special symbols will be held based on. More specifically, it is determined whether or not there is a special symbol jackpot according to the value of the special winning random number counter C1, and if it is a special symbol jackpot, the jackpot is determined according to the value of the special winning type counter C2. A type is determined.

In this control example, when the jackpot A is the stop pattern of the first pattern (special pattern), the first pattern display device 37 turns on the blue LED, and when the jackpot B is the red LED. When the jackpot C is reached, the green LED is turned on. When the jackpot D is reached, the blue and red LEDs are turned on. When the jackpot E is reached, the red LED is turned on. and turn on the green LED. In addition, when it is out, it is set to turn on the blue LED and the green LED. The display of each LED is turned off when the next variable display is started, but it may be turned on only for several seconds after the variable display is stopped.

After the process of S215 is completed, when the variation display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 is started, the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the special symbol variation start process (S208) (this lottery result ) is a special symbol jackpot (S216). If the lottery result of this time is a special symbol jackpot (S216: Yes), the jackpot start flag 203i is set to ON (S217). Then, a stop command is set (S218), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S216, when it is determined that the current lottery result is not a big hit (S216: No), the processing of S217 is skipped, and after the processing of S218 is executed, this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 427, the special symbol variation start process (S208) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 427 is a flow chart showing the special symbol variation start process (S208). This special symbol variation start process (S208) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 426) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 425). Based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a lottery (win/fail determination) of "special symbol jackpot" or "special symbol omission" is performed, and the first symbol display device 37 and the third pattern display device 81 to determine the effect pattern of the variable effect (variable effect pattern).

In the special symbol variation start process (S208), first, a special winning random number counter C1, a special winning type counter C2, a stop type counter C3, a falling lottery counter C4, and a variation type counter CS1 stored in the special symbol reserved ball execution area are counted. Each value is acquired (S301). Next, it is determined whether or not the game state is currently changing probability (high probability state of special symbols) (S302). It should be noted that the determination as to whether or not the probability is changing is executed by determining whether the value of the probability changing flag 203h is 1 or more. Here, the variable probability flag 203h is set to a predetermined value based on the end of the jackpot game. On the other hand, the value is set to 0 based on the start of the jackpot game.

In the process of S302, if it is determined that the probability is changing (S302: Yes), the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability changing (high probability state of special symbols), so the fall lottery counter C4 acquired in the process of S301 By comparing the value and the falling lottery table 202e (see FIG. 407(c)), a lottery (falling lottery) is performed to determine whether to fall from the probability variable state of the special design to the low probability state of the special design ( S303). Specifically, the value of the falling lottery counter C4 is compared one by one with two random numbers stored in the falling lottery table 202e. As described above, two random numbers "0, 1" corresponding to falling to a low probability state are set during probability variation (high probability state of special symbols), and the value of the falling lottery counter C4 and , and the random numbers corresponding to these falls, it is determined that the player falls to the low probability state. When the lottery result of the fall lottery is obtained in the process of S303, the process proceeds to S304.

In the process of S304, it is determined whether or not the lottery result corresponds to the fall to the low probability state of the special symbol (S304), and when it is determined that the lottery result corresponds to the fall (S304: Yes), The variable probability flag 203h is set to OFF (S305), a state command indicating a fall to a low probability state is set (S306), and the process proceeds to S307.

On the other hand, in the process of S302, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is not in the variable probability state (high probability state of special symbols), that is, it is in the low probability state of special symbols (S302: No), S303 to S306 Skip the process and move to the process of S307.

In the process of S307, based on the value of the special winning random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 and the special symbol big winning random number table 202a for low probability (see FIG. 407(a)), whether or not the special symbol is a big winning. One lottery result is acquired (S307). Specifically, the value of the special winning random number counter C1 is compared one by one with four random numbers stored in the special symbol big winning random number table 202a. Four random numbers of "0 to 3" are set as the random numbers that become the special symbol jackpot in the special symbol low probability state, and the value of the special winning random number counter C1 and the random numbers that become these winnings are set. If they match, it is determined to be a special symbol jackpot. When the lottery result of the special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to S309.

On the other hand, in the process of S304, when it is determined that the lottery result does not correspond to falling (S304: No), the process proceeds to S308. In the process of S308, based on the value of the special winning random number counter C1 obtained in the process of S301 and the special symbol big winning random number table 202a for high probability (see FIG. 407(a)), whether or not the special symbol is a big winning. One lottery result is acquired (S308). Specifically, the value of the special winning random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the eight random numbers stored in the special symbol big winning random number table 202a. Eight numbers of "4 to 11" are set as the random numbers that become the special symbol jackpot in the special symbol high probability state, and the value of the special winning random number counter C1 and the random numbers that become these winnings are set. If they match, it is determined to be a special symbol jackpot. When the lottery result of the special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to S309.

In the processing of S309, whether the special symbol lottery result acquired by the processing of S307 or S308 is a special symbol jackpot (that is, the value of the special winning random number counter C1 that has been acquired and the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a match the set judgment value) is determined (S309), and when it is determined that it is a special symbol jackpot (S309: Yes), the value of the time saving counter 203g and the probability variation flag are set to the initial values Reset (S310), based on the value of the special hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301, to set the display mode at the time of the big hit (S311). More specifically, the value of the special hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the jackpot type selection table 202d, and the jackpot types (jackets A to Among the jackpots E), it is determined which jackpot type this time is. As described above, in the first special pattern jackpot, if the value of the special hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 9", it is determined to be a jackpot A (15R probability variable jackpot), and "10 to 49" If it is in the range of , it is determined to be a jackpot B (5R probability variable jackpot), and if it is in the range of "50 to 99", it is determined to be a jackpot C (5R normal jackpot) (see FIG. 408 (b)) . In addition, in the second special pattern jackpot, if the value of the special hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 79", it is determined to be a jackpot D (15R probability variable jackpot), and in the range of "80 to 99" If there is, it is determined as a jackpot E (15R normal jackpot) (see FIG. 408(c)).

In the process of S311, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 (the lighting state of the LEDs 37A and 37B) is set according to the determined jackpot types (jackpots A to E). In addition, the jackpot types (jackpots A to E) are set as the stop types so that the stop symbols corresponding to the jackpot types are stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 . The display mode of the stop symbol set in the process of S311 is stopped and displayed by the process of S215 of the above-described special symbol variation process (see FIG. 426).

Next, with reference to the variation pattern selection table 202b (see FIGS. 409(a) and 410), a variation pattern at the time of winning the jackpot is selected. Here, in this control example, as described above with reference to FIGS. 409(b) and 410, the set game The variable time of the special symbol is set by referring to different data tables depending on the state. Specifically, when the gaming state is the normal state, the variation pattern is determined by referring to the normal table 222b1 (see FIG. 409(a)) of the variation pattern selection table 222b, while the gaming state is In the case of the probability variable state or the time saving state, the variation pattern is determined by referring to the probability variation/time saving table 222b2 (see FIG. 410) of the variation pattern selection table 202b (S312). After the process of S312 ends, the process proceeds to S318. When the variation pattern is set in the process of S312, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 until it stops with the jackpot symbol. A pattern variation time is determined. At this time, based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the special symbol holding ball execution area of the RAM 203 and the value of the stop type selection counter C3, the variation time of the symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined. .

On the other hand, in the process of S309, if it is determined that the special symbol lottery result is out (S309: No), then it is determined whether the value of the counter 203g during time saving is a value greater than 0. (S313). In the process of S313, when it is determined that the value of the counter 203g during time saving is greater than 0 (that is, the value is 1 or more) (S313: Yes), the value of the counter 203g during time saving is subtracted by 1 (S314), A state command indicating the value of the time saving medium counter 203g after subtraction is set (S315), and the process proceeds to S316. On the other hand, in the process of S313, when it is determined that the value of the counter 203g during time saving is 0 (S313: No), the processes of S314 and S315 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S316.

In the process of S316, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the off symbol, and the stop type selection stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol reserved ball execution area is selected. Based on the values of the counter C3 and the variation type counter CS1, the variation pattern (variation time) at the time of deviation is determined (S317). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the lost symbol is determined. At this time, similar to the process of S312, the variation time of symbol variation such as normal reach, super reach, etc. is determined based on the values of the stop type selection counter C3 and the variation type counter CS1 stored in the special symbol holding ball execution area. .

In the process of S312 or the process of S318 that is executed after the process of S317 is completed, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in the process of S312 or S317 is set. (S318). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the processing of S312 or S317 is set (S319). When the processing of S319 ends, the process returns to the special symbol variation processing (S104).

Next, referring to FIG. 428, the starting winning process (S105) executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 428 is a flow chart showing this starting winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 425) to determine whether or not there is a win to the first ball entrance 64 (start winning), and if there is a start winning , Reservation processing of values indicated by various random number counters, and processing for executing prefetching of lottery results in special symbols from values indicated by the reserved various random number counters.

When the starting winning process (S105) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning) (S401). Here, the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected over three times of timer interrupt processing. Then, when it is determined that the game ball has entered the first ball entrance 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (number of times N1 of holding variable display in the special symbol) is acquired (S402). . Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit (4 in this control example) (S403).

Then, in the process of S401, if it is determined that there is no winning to the first ball entrance 64 (S401: No), the process proceeds to S408, and even if there is a winning to the first ball entrance 64 ( S401: Yes), in the process of S403, if it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is not less than 4 (that is, 4, which is the upper limit) (S403: No), the process of S407 Move to On the other hand, in the processing of S401, it is determined that there is a winning to the first ball entrance 64 (S401: Yes), and in the processing of S403, the value (N) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d When it is determined that the number is less than 4 (S403: Yes), 1 is added to the value (N) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (S404). Then, a first special symbol reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S405).

The pending ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 434), which will be described later. , is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the pending ball number command by the process of S405, the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the fall lottery counter C4, and the variation type updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above. Each value of the counter CS1 is stored in the first area among the vacant reservation areas (reservation first area to reservation fourth area) of the special symbol 1 reservation ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 (S406). In the process of S406, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the first reserved area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area. After completing the process of S406, next, prefetching is executed (S407), and the process proceeds to S408. Details of this look-ahead processing (S407) will be described later with reference to FIG. Based on this, a process of pre-determining (reading ahead) each lottery result to be executed at the start of fluctuation is executed.

It should be noted that the processes of S408 to S413 are only performed by changing the above-described processes of S401 to S407 based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 to the processes based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 640. , S401 to S406 are executed, detailed description thereof will be omitted. After executing the process of S413, the prefetching process is executed (S414 (S407)), and then the process ends.

In this control example, the value of each counter is acquired based on the ball entering, but may be acquired at the start of fluctuation. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the use of the storage area of the RAM 203 without requiring a storage area for storing the values of each counter until the start of fluctuation. Further, among the counters, some counters (for example, only the fluctuation type counter CS1) may be configured to be acquired at the start of fluctuation. By configuring in this way, the counter related to the winning/failure determination can be acquired at the time of entering the ball, and the counter not related to the winning/failure determination can be acquired later, and the amount of data to be stored can be reduced while maintaining the fairness of the game. can be suppressed.

Next, referring to FIG. 429, the look-ahead process (S407 (S414)), which is one process in the starting winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 429 is a flow chart showing this prefetching process (S407 (S414)).

In the look-ahead process, first, it is determined whether or not there is a new winning (S501). In the process of S501, when the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is added, it is determined that a new prize has been won. . In the process of S501, if it is determined that there is no new winning (S501: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is a new winning prize (S501: Yes), next, it is determined whether or not the current winning prize is a special symbol 1 (first special symbol) (S502). When it is determined (S502: Yes), the lottery result for each counter value acquired this time is acquired in advance based on the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a and the special symbol jackpot table 202d1 (S503), and the process proceeds to S504. Transition. In the processing of S504, as the lottery result obtained in advance, a prize information command including the jackpot determination result and jackpot type is set (S504), and the processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S502, if it is determined that the winning this time is not the special symbol 1 (special figure 1), that is, the special symbol 2 (special figure 2) (S502: No), each counter acquired this time The lottery result for the value is acquired in advance based on the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a and the special figure 2 jackpot table 202d2 (S505), and the prize information command including the jackpot determination result and the jackpot type as the previously obtained lottery result. is set (S504), and the process ends.

In this way, before the start of the variation, the result of the winning/failure determination in advance is output to the voice ramp control device 113 as a prize winning information command each time the ball is held, so the voice ramp control device 113 , it is possible to recognize in advance the result of the judgment of success or failure and the type of success. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113, based on the prize winning information command, foreseeing the result of the judgment result of the reserved ball to the player in advance (for example, changing the color of the reserved symbol to a color that suggests the result of the judgment result) Or, an effect such as outputting a notification sound for notifying the success/failure determination result in the held ball) can be executed. As for the winning information command, one winning information command is output for each pending ball, so that the sound lamp control device 113 can also recognize the establishment of the pending ball. can. In addition, in the prefetching process (see S407 in FIG. 429) in this control example, when it is determined that there is no new winning in the process of S501 (S501: No), this process is terminated as it is. However, without being limited to this, for example, the winning information command is set again for each counter value already stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Also good. By configuring in this way, even if it is determined not to execute the notice effect in response to the prize winning information command received by the audio lamp control device 113 side, the notice effect is executed again for the same reserved pattern. It is possible to determine whether or not to Further, in this control example, the lottery result based on each counter value acquired by the main controller 110 side is determined in advance, and the information for indicating the result of the preliminary determination is set as the winning information command. However, without being limited to this, information for indicating each acquired counter value is set as a winning information command, and the result of the lottery is determined in advance based on the winning information command received by the sound lamp control device 113 side. may be configured. In addition, when information for indicating each acquired counter value is set as a winning information command, it may be encrypted so that the counter value acquired this time cannot be specified by a player who illegally acquires the winning information command. It is preferable to configure such that the winning information command is output at a plurality of timings.

Next, referring to FIG. 430, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 430 is a flow chart showing this normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation processing (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 425), and is associated with the variation display of the second symbol performed in the second symbol display device 83 and the second entrance 640. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory 640a.

In this normal symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently hitting (S601). During the winning of the normal symbol (second symbol), the second symbol display device 83 is displaying the winning, and the opening and closing control of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is performed. including while As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is in the process of winning (S601: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S601: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is fluctuating (S602), and the second symbol display device is determined. If the display mode of 83 is not fluctuating (S602: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of times of suspension M of variable display in normal symbols) is acquired (S603). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is greater than 0 (S604), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 0 (S604: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203f is not 0 (S604: Yes), the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203f is subtracted by 1 (S605).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted (S606). In the process of S606, the data stored in the first reservation area to the fourth reservation area of the normal symbol reservation ball storage area 203c are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the first holding area → execution area, the second holding area → the first holding area, the third holding area → the second holding area, the fourth holding area → the third holding area, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the normal winning random number counter C5 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is obtained (S607), and the process proceeds to S608.

In the process of S608, it is determined whether or not it is during time saving (high probability state of normal symbols) (S608). In the process of S608, the value of the time saving medium counter 203g and the state of the probability variation flag 203h are checked, and if the value of the time saving medium counter 203g is 1 or more or the probability variation flag 203h is on, during the time saving If the value of the time saving counter 203g is 0 and the probability variation flag 203h is off, it is determined that the time saving is not in progress. In the process of S608, when it is determined that it is during time saving (high probability state of normal symbol) (value of counter 203g during time saving is 1 or more, or probability variation flag 203h is ON) (S608: Yes) , Since the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of normal symbols, the value of the normal winning random number counter C5 acquired in the process of S603 and the normal winning random number table 202c for high probability (see FIG. 407 (b)) Based on this, the lottery result as to whether or not the normal symbol wins is acquired (S609), and the process proceeds to S611. Specifically, in the process of S609, the value of the normal winning random number counter C5 is compared with the random value stored in the normal winning random number table 202c for high probability (see FIG. 407(b)). As described above, if the value of the normal hit random number counter C5 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined to be a hit in the normal design, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4,205 to 239", it is normal It is determined that the pattern is out of line (see FIG. 407(b)).

On the other hand, in the process of S608, when it is determined that it is not during time saving (high probability state of normal symbol) (value of counter 203g during time saving is 0, and probability variation flag 203h is off) (S608: No) , Since the pachinko machine 10 is in the low probability state (normal state, latent probability state) of normal symbols, the value of the normal winning random number counter C5 acquired in the process of S603 and the normal winning random number table 202c for low probability (Fig. 407(b)), the lottery result as to whether or not the normal symbol wins is acquired (S610). Specifically, the value of the normal winning random number counter C5 is compared with the random value stored in the normal winning random number table 202c for low probability (see FIG. 407(b)). As described above, if the value of the normal hit random number counter C5 is in the range of "5, 6", it is determined that it is a normal pattern hit. It is determined that the pattern is out of line (see FIG. 407(b)).

In this control example, during the special symbol jackpot, the normal symbol lottery is less likely to win. This is because during the special symbol jackpot (that is, during the special game state), the player hits the ball to win the specific winning hole 65a, so the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entry hole 640 is opened. This is to suppress as much as possible the game ball which is to be entered into the specific winning hole 65a by entering the second ball entering hole 640.例文帳に追加

After executing the process of S609 or S610, the process proceeds to S611. In the process of S611, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the normal symbol obtained by the process of S609 or S610 is a hit of the normal symbol (S611). Yes), the display mode at the time of winning is set (S612), and the process proceeds to S614. In the process of S612, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol "O" is set to be illuminated as the stop symbol (second symbol).

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S611 that it is out of the normal symbol (S611: No), the display mode at the time of out is set (S613), and the process proceeds to S614. In the process of S613, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol "x" is lit as the stop symbol (second symbol).

In the process of S614, it is determined whether or not the current time is during time saving (whether or not the high probability state of normal symbols) is determined (S614), and if it is during time saving (high probability state of normal symbols) (S614: Yes) , the variable time of the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is set to 3 seconds (S615), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S614, it is not during time saving (high probability state of normal symbols), that is, if it is a low probability state of normal symbols (S614: No), the variation time of the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is 30 Seconds are set (S616), and the process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S602, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602: Yes), whether or not the variation time of the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed is determined (S617). It should be noted that the variable time here is the time set in advance by the processing of S615 or S616 before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device 83 .

In the process of S617, if the variable time has not elapsed (S617: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S617, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has passed (S617: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S618). In the process of S618, if the normal symbol lottery is won and the display mode is set by the process of S612, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted up) on the second symbol display device 83. displayed). On the other hand, if the lottery for the normal symbol is lost and the display mode is set by the processing of S613, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped (lighted up) on the second symbol display device 83. is set to When the stop display is set by the process of S618, when the second symbol display update process (see S1009) of the main process (see FIG. 434) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is changed. After the game ends, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped (lighted up) on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the process of S612 or S613.

Next, when the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 is started, whether the normal symbol lottery result (current lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process is a normal symbol hit. is determined (S619). If the result of the lottery this time is not a hit of the normal symbol (S619: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the result of the lottery this time is a win in the normal design (S619: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the present time is during the time saving (S620). If it is determined that the time is being shortened (S620: Yes), the opening time and number of times of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 are set to 1 second x 2 times (S622), and the process proceeds to S623. Transition.

On the other hand, in the process of S620, if it is determined that the time is not being shortened (S620: No), the opening time and number of times of the first electric accessory 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640 is set to 0.2 seconds x 1 time. (S622), and the process proceeds to S623.

In the process of S623 executed after the process of S6212 or S622, the start of opening/closing control of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640 is set (S623), and this process ends. When the opening/closing control start of the electric accessory 640a is set by the process of S623, when the electric accessory opening/closing process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 434) is executed next, the electric accessory 640a The opening/closing control is started, and the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 640a is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S621 or S622 of FIG. 430 are completed.

In this way, except during the special symbol jackpot, in the normal symbol high-probability state, compared to the normal symbol low-probability state, the variable display time is very short from "30 seconds to 3 seconds", and furthermore. , the release period of the second ball entrance 640 becomes very long as “0.2 seconds×1 time→1 second×2 times”, so that the ball can easily enter the second ball entrance 640 .

In this control example, the opening time and the number of times of opening per long time are the same operation in the normal state and the latent state, but it is not limited to this, and it is configured to set different opening time and number of times of opening. good too. In addition, in this control example, the contents of the opening operation of the first electric accessory 640a are set based on the game state set at the start of fluctuation of the normal symbols (during the lottery). Without limitation, for example, at the time of start of variation of normal symbols (at the time of lottery), the determination of whether or not the normal symbols are set is executed based on the game state, and the game at the time when the variation time of the normal symbols that have been elected has passed. The content of the opening operation of the first electric accessory 640a may be set based on the state. That is, in this control example, since the game state is configured to be variably set based on the lottery of the special symbols, the game state may be variably set while the normal symbols are fluctuating. In such a case, if the contents of the opening operation of the first electric accessory 640a are set based on the game state set at the start of the variation of the symbols (at the time of the lottery), for example, during the jackpot game or normal There is a problem that the first electric accessory 640a is open for a long time during the high probability state of the pattern. On the other hand, by configuring so as to set the contents of the opening operation of the first electric role product 640a based on the game state at the time when the fluctuation time of the winning normal symbol has passed, the first electric role product 640a is set. can be executed with contents suitable for the set game state.

Next, the through gate passage processing (S107) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 431 is a flow chart showing this through gate passage processing (S107). This through gate passage processing (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 425) to determine whether or not a ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67. This is a process for obtaining and holding the value indicated by the normal random number counter C5 in this case.

In the through gate passing process, first, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 (S701). Here, passage of the ball through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 (S701: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of times of suspension of variable display in normal symbols M) is obtained. (S702). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit value (4 in this control example) (S703).

Whether the game ball has not passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 (S701: No), or even if the game ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, the normal symbol holding ball number counter If the value (M) of 203f is not less than 4 (S703: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the game ball passes through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 (S701: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S703: Yes), normal The value (M) of the symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is incremented by 1 (S704). Then, the value of the normal hit random number counter C5 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above is set to the first of the free reservation areas (reservation first area to reservation fourth area) of the normal symbol reservation ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. The data is stored in the area (S705), and then the process ends. In the process of S705, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the first reserved area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

Next, referring to FIG. 432, NMI interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. 432 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. FIG. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 . That is, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 . Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power interruption occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power interruption occurrence information (S801), and ends the NMI interruption processing. do.

The above NMI interrupt processing is also executed in the payout launch control device 111 in the same manner, and information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 213 by such NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, NMI interrupt processing is started.

Next, referring to FIG. 433, startup processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 when main controller 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 433 is a flow chart showing this startup process. This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S901). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, in order to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable, wait processing (in this control example, wait time of 1 second setting process) is executed (S902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S904), and if it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process proceeds to S913. On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is determined whether or not power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905), and if not stored (S905: No). , there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown did not end normally.

If power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906). If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved at the time of power shutdown, the backed-up data is destroyed. As will be described later in the processing of S1016 in FIG. 434, the RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value in the work area address of the RAM 203. FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the processing of S913, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 serving as a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S913). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets the initial value, and becomes ready to start the game ball payout control. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes the initialization process of RAM 203 (S914, S915).

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, such as when the hall starts operating. Therefore, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S914, S915) is executed. Also, if power failure occurrence information is not set, or if a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.), the RAM 203 initialization process (S914, S915) is executed in the same way. . In the RAM initialization process (S914, S915), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S914), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S915). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S911.

On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), power failure occurrence information is stored (S905: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( S907: Yes), a state command indicating the value of the time saving counter 203g and the state of the probability variation flag 203h (that is, the game state at the time of start-up) is transmitted (S908). Next, while retaining the data backed up in the RAM 203, the power failure occurrence information is cleared (S909). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the game state at the time of drive power shutdown is transmitted (S910), and the process proceeds to S911. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the game ball payout control can be started while retaining the data stored in the RAM 213 .

In the processing of S911, an effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the execution of various effects is permitted to the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. FIG. Next, the interrupt is permitted (S912), and the main processing described later is performed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 434, main processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 after the start-up processing described above will be described. FIG. 434 is a flow chart showing this main process. Main processing of the game is executed in this main processing. As an overview, each process of S1001 to S1007 is executed as a periodical process with a period of 4 ms, and the counter update process of S1010 and S1011 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main process, first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 425), output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is transmitted to each sub-side control device (peripheral (S1001). Specifically, it determines whether or not there is winning detection information detected in the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 425). Send a prize ball command to In addition, it transmits to the sound lamp control device 113 the reserved ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 426) and the start winning process (see FIG. 428). In addition, it transmits to the sound lamp control device 113 the winning command set in the starting winning process (see FIG. 428) or the look-ahead process (see FIG. 429). Furthermore, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, etc. necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 .

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this control example). Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM203.

When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is finished, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003), and then, in the case of the special symbol jackpot state, the execution of the jackpot production and the variable A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S1004). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning port 65a is opened according to the content of the jackpot game to be executed (jackpot type), and the maximum opening time of the specific winning port 65a has passed, or the specified number of balls is in the specific winning port 65a. Determine if you have won a prize. Then, when any one of these conditions is satisfied, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a are repeated for a predetermined number of rounds. The details of this jackpot control process (S1004) will be described later with reference to FIGS. In this control example, the jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process, but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process. In addition, in this control example, the jackpot game contents corresponding to the jackpot type (type of entrance to be opened, opening time, number of openings (number of rounds), opening period, interval period, ending period) are used as a jackpot scenario. A jackpot scenario stored in advance corresponding to the jackpot type set when the jackpot is won is read, and a jackpot game is executed based on the read jackpot scenario.

Next, an electric accessary product opening/closing process for controlling opening/closing of the electric accessary product 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is executed (S1005). In the electric accessary product opening/closing process, when the opening/closing control start of the electric accessary product 640a is set by the processing of S623 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 430), the opening/closing control of the electric accessary product 640a is started. The opening/closing control of the first electric accessory 640a is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S621 or S622 of FIG. 430 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

Next, a first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is executed (S1006). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the process of S312 or the process of S317 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 427), the variation display corresponding to the variation pattern is displayed as the first symbol display. Starting at devices 37A and 37B. In this control example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off and the green LED is turned on, and the green LED is turned on. If the LED is on, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on, and if the blue LED is on, the blue LED is turned off and the red LED is turned on.

Note that the main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the lighting color of the LED is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED change the lighting color of That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

Also, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S312 or the process of S317 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 427) ends, the first symbol display device 37 ends the variation display being executed, and in the display mode set by the processing of S311 or the processing of S316 of the special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 427), the stop symbol (first symbol) is displayed on the first symbol display device. 37 is stopped (lighted up).

Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1007). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S615 or the process of S616 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 430), the variation display is started on the second symbol display device 83. do. As a result, the second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display in which the second symbol "O" symbol and the "X" symbol are alternately lit. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the process of S618 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 430), the second symbol display device 83 is executed. After finishing the variable display, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the process of S612 or S613 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 430) ( display).

After that, it is determined whether power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008). SG1 is not output and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has come, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in this control example) has elapsed since the start of the main processing this time (S1009). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1009: Yes), the process proceeds to S1001, and the above-described processes after S1001 are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet passed since the start of the main processing this time (S1009: No), the next main processing is executed until the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing. The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1010, S1011).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1010). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter values reach the maximum values (999, 239 in this control example), they are cleared to 0. . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the change type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the processing of S1002 (S1011).

Here, since the execution time of each process of S1001 to S1007 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , the initial value of the special winning random number counter C1, the initial value of the normal winning random number counter C5) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can also be randomly updated.

In addition, in the process of S1008, if information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, the NMI interrupt processing in FIG. 432 has been executed, so the processing at power-off from S1012 onward is executed. First, to prohibit the occurrence of each interrupt processing (S1012), to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113) a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off and transmit (S1013). Then, a RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S1014), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1015), and the infinite loop continues until the power supply is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203 .

It should be noted that the process of S1008 is performed at the end of a series of processes corresponding to the game state change performed in S1001 to S1007, or at the time of the end of one cycle of the processes of S1010 and S1011 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, information on the occurrence of power failure is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. It can start from the processing of S1001. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1001, as in the case of initialization in the start-up process. Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved in the processing when the power is turned off, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value ( initial value), the process can be started from S1001. Therefore, the control load on the main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main controller 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the jackpot control process (S1004) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 435 is a flow chart showing this jackpot control process (S1004). This jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 434), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in a jackpot state with special symbols, execution of various effects according to the jackpot, specific winning opening ( This is a process for opening or closing the large opening 65a.

In the jackpot control process (S1004), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot start flag 203i is ON (S1101). When it is determined that the jackpot start flag 203i is ON (S1101: Yes), the jackpot opening command is set (S1102), the jackpot start flag 203i is set to OFF, and the jackpot middle flag 203j is set to ON (S1103). , the process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1101, if it is determined that the jackpot start flag 203i is off (S1101: No), then whether the special symbol jackpot is currently on (that is, the jackpot flag 203j is on) ) or not (S1104). In the process of S1104, when it is determined that the current jackpot is not in progress (the jackpot flag 203j is off) (S1104: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S1104, if it is determined that the current jackpot is in progress (the jackpot flag 203j is ON) (S1104: Yes), then it is determined whether or not it is time to start a new round ( S1105).

In the process of S1105, if it is determined that it is time to start a new round (S1105: Yes), a jackpot operation setting process for setting the opening/closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a according to the number of rounds is executed (S1106 ), the process ends. The details of this jackpot action setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1105 that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1105: No), then it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending period of the round currently being executed (S1107). . Here, in this control example, when the final round of the jackpot ends, it is determined that it is time to start the ending period. If it is determined that it is time to start the ending period (S1107: Yes), an ending command is set (S1108), and this process ends. The ending command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 434). It is sent towards device 113 . Upon receiving the ending command, the audio lamp control device 113 transmits a display ending command to the display control device 114 . When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 starts an ending effect indicating the end of the big win.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1107, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the currently executed ending period (S1107: No), then it is determined whether it is the end timing of the jackpot (S1109). Here, the end timing of the jackpot indicates a case where the execution period of the ending effect has passed. In the process of S1109, when it is determined that it is time to end the big win (S1109: Yes), a big win end process for setting the game state after the big win ends is executed (S1110), and this process ends. The details of this jackpot ending process will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, in the process of S1109, if it is determined that it is not the timing of the end of the jackpot (S1109: No), the winning process for performing control according to the winning to the specific winning opening 65a is executed (S1111), Abnormality processing is executed to determine whether the ball entered into the prize winning opening 65a has been discharged normally (S1112), and then this processing is terminated. Details of the winning process and the abnormality process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 438 and 439. FIG.

Next, details of the jackpot operation setting process (S1106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 436 is a flow chart showing this jackpot operation setting process (S1106). This jackpot action setting process (S1106) is executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 435), and as described above, is a process for setting the opening/closing action of the specific winning hole 65a according to the number of rounds.

When this jackpot operation setting process (see FIG. 436) is started, first, it is determined whether it is time to start the 5th round (that is, the round in which the V role is activated) (S1201). In the processing of S1201, when it is determined that it is time to start the fifth round (S1201: Yes), the start of the action scenario of the V role is set (S1202), and the opening pattern of the specific winning opening 65a corresponding to the jackpot type. is set (S1203), and the process proceeds to S1205.

As described above, in the first control example, a common action scenario is set for the V role regardless of the jackpot type (regardless of the type). Specifically, an operation scenario is set in which the arrangement is changed so that the game balls can be distributed to the V area from the time when 5 seconds have passed since the start of the 5th round to the time when 10 seconds have passed. On the other hand, as described above, different opening patterns are set for the opening pattern of the specific winning opening 65a depending on whether the probability variable jackpot or the normal jackpot is selected. Specifically, in the case of a variable probability jackpot, the opening and closing pattern that allows the game ball to reach the V role while the V role is changing to the arrangement that distributes the game ball to the V area (5th round For 4.5 seconds after 5 seconds to 9.5 seconds after the start, the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is opened and closed in the opening and closing pattern in which the specific winning opening 65a is opened, while normal In the case of a big hit, the opening and closing pattern that makes it impossible to reach the V role while changing the arrangement of the V role to distribute the game balls to the V area (4.5 seconds after the start of the 5th round During the 4.5 seconds until time, the specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a is opened and closed in an opening/closing pattern in which the specific winning opening 65a is opened.

On the other hand, in the process of S1201, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the fifth round (S1201: No), the opening of the specific winning opening 65a is set (S1204), and the process proceeds to S1205. In the process of S1205 executed after the process of S1203 or S1204, a round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set (S1205), and this process ends.

The round number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 434) executed by the MPU 201, the sound lamp It is transmitted toward the control device 113 . Upon receiving the round number command, the sound lamp control device 113 sets a display round number command for displaying the newly started round number on the third symbol display device 81 . Thereby, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 can be updated in accordance with the number of rounds of the big win.

By executing this jackpot operation setting process (see FIG. 436), it is possible to open the specific winning hole 65a in each round of jackpot, and to set the state in which a ball can enter the V area in the fifth round. can be done. As a result, in the jackpots A, B, and D, the game ball almost certainly enters the V region and passes through the probability switch just by hitting the player right in the fifth round, so that after the jackpot ends. It is possible to shift to a definite variable state (a definite variable state of special symbols and a time saving state of normal symbols). In the case of the big hits C and E, it is difficult to enter the game ball into the V area even if the player hits to the right. As a result, the lottery of the first special symbol, in which the jackpot C is determined at a relatively high rate (50%) in the event of a big win, is set as a lottery unfavorable to the player, so that the lottery of the first special symbol is disadvantageous to the player. The lottery for the second special symbol in which the jackpot E is determined at a low rate (20% rate) can be an advantageous lottery for the player.

Next, details of the jackpot ending process (S1110) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 437 is a flow chart showing this jackpot ending process (S1110). This jackpot end process (S1110) is executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 435), and as described above, is a process for setting the gaming state after the jackpot ends.

In this jackpot end processing (S1110), first, it is determined whether the probability variation setting flag 203k is ON (S1301). In the process of S1301, if it is determined that the variable probability setting flag 203k is on (S1301: Yes), it means that the game ball has passed through the variable probability switch during the big hit, so the variable probability flag 203h is set to ON. The state after the jackpot is set to the variable probability state (S1302), and the process proceeds to S1303. On the other hand, in the processing of S1301, if the variable probability setting flag 203k is off (S1301: No), it means that the game ball has not passed through the variable probability switch during the big hit, so by skipping the processing of S1302 , After the end of the jackpot is set to the low probability state of the special symbol, and the process proceeds to S1303.

In the process of S1303, the value of the counter 203g during time saving is set to 100 (S1303), and based on the state of the probability variation flag 203h and the counter 203g during time saving, a state command (jackpot end command ) is set (S1304). The state command (jackpot end command) set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 434). , and is transmitted to the audio lamp controller 113 . Upon receiving the state command, the sound lamp control device 113 updates the game state storage area 223f according to the game state notified by the state command. Thereby, the game state of the pachinko machine 10 can be accurately grasped in the sound lamp control device 113 . Next, both the big hit medium flag 203j and the variable probability setting flag 203k are set to OFF (S1305), and the process is terminated.

By executing this jackpot end processing (see FIG. 437), it is possible to accurately set the game state after the jackpot ends depending on whether or not the game ball passes through the variable probability switch during the jackpot.

Next, the details of the winning process (S1111) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 438 is a flow chart showing this winning process (S1111). This winning process (S1111) is executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 435), and as described above, is a process for performing control according to winning to the specific winning opening 65a.

In the winning process (S1111), first, it is determined whether the current round valid period is reached (S1401). Here, the round valid period is the period during which the round game is set, that is, the period from the open state of the specific winning opening 65a to the end of the interval period. In the process of S1401, if it is not the round effective period (S1401: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1401, when it is determined that the current round valid period (S1401: Yes), then it is determined whether winning to the specific winning opening 65a is detected (S1402), If winning has been detected (S1402: Yes), the value of the winning number counter 203p is updated by adding 1 (S1403), and a winning command indicating that a winning to the specific winning opening 65a has been detected is set. (S1404), the process proceeds to S1405. On the other hand, in the process of S1402, if winning to the specific winning hole 65a is not detected (S1402: No), the processes of S1403 and S1404 are skipped and the process proceeds to S1405.

In the processing of S1405, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning number counter 203p is 10 or more (S1405). On the other hand, in the processing of S1405, if it is determined that the value of the winning number counter is 9 or less (S1405: No), it is determined whether the round time has elapsed (S1406), and if the round time has elapsed ( S1406: Yes), the process proceeds to S1407. In the process of S1406, it is determined that the round time has elapsed when 30 seconds have elapsed since the start of the round.

In the process of S1407, closing of the specific winning opening 65a is set (S1407), and a closing command indicating that closing of the specific winning opening 65a is set is set (S1408). Next, it is determined whether the closing of the specific winning opening 65a this time is based on the end of one round (S1409). By setting off the flow path solenoid for varying , the state of the V role is set to an arrangement in which the game balls are distributed to the non-V area (S1410), and the process proceeds to S1411. On the other hand, in the process of S1409, when it is determined that the closing of the specific winning opening 65a is due to the completion of rounds other than 5 rounds (S1409: No), the channel solenoid is set to ON. Since there is no possibility, the process of S1410 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1411.

In the process of S1411, the remaining ball timer flag 203q, the variable probability effective flag 203s, and the round end flag are set to ON (S1411), and the process proceeds to S1412. Further, when it is determined in the process of S1405 that the value of the winning prize number counter 203p is 9 or less (S1405: No), and when it is determined in the process of S1406 that the round time has not elapsed (S1406: No), The process of S1407 to S1411 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1412.

In the process of S1412, it is determined whether the round end flag is ON (S1412), and if the round end flag is OFF (S1412: No), the process proceeds to S1413. On the other hand, when it is determined that the round end flag is on in the process of S1412 (S1412: Yes), then it is determined whether the probability variable effective flag 203s is on (S1416). In the processing of S1416, if the variable probability effective flag 203s is off (S1416: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the probability variable effective flag 203s is on (S1416: Yes), add 1 to the value of the probability variable effective timer 203t (S1417), then determine whether the value of the probability variable effective timer 203t is the upper limit value ( S1418). Then, if the value of the variable probability valid timer 203t is not the upper limit value (S1418: No), the process proceeds to S1413, and the variable probability switch is monitored to update the variable probability setting flag 203k. Thereby, if the variable probability effective timer 203t is not the upper limit value, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the variable probability switch, so the variable probability state can be set in consideration of the time for hitting the ball. In addition, since there is an upper limit to the time that is determined to be valid, it is possible to prevent the variable probability switch from being illegally passed through the game ball and the variable probability state being imparted.

On the other hand, if the value of the probability variable effective timer 203t is the upper limit value (S1418: Yes), the probability variable effective flag 203s and the round end flag are set to OFF (S1419), and the value of the probability variable effective timer 203t is reset (S1420) , the process ends.

In addition, in the processing of S1413, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the variable probability switch (S1413), and if the game ball has not passed through the variable probability switch (S1413: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if the game ball has passed through the variable probability switch (S1413: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the variable probability passage counter 203m (S1414), the variable probability setting flag 203k is set to ON (S1415), and this processing exit.

Next, the abnormality processing (S1112) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 439 is a flow chart showing this abnormality processing (S1112). This abnormality process (S1112) is a process executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 435), and as described above, it is determined whether or not the ball that entered the specific winning hole 65a was discharged normally. This process is for

In the abnormality process (S1112), first, it is determined whether the current round valid period is reached (S1501). On the other hand, if it is determined that the round is valid (S1501: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the ball discharge port switch (whether or not the game ball discharged from the variable winning device 65 has been detected). It is determined (S1502).

In the processing of S1502, when it is determined that the game ball has passed the ball discharge port switch (the game ball has been discharged from the variable winning device 65) (S1502: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the discharge number counter 203u. (S1503), the process proceeds to S1504. On the other hand, in the process of S1502, if the game ball has not passed the ball outlet switch (S1502: No), the process of S1503 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1504.

In the process of S1504, it is determined whether the remaining ball timer flag 203q is ON (S1504). If it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203q is off (S1504: No), this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the remaining ball timer flag 203q is ON (S1504: Yes), it means that the ball is being swept, so the value of the remaining ball timer 203r is updated by adding 1 (S1505). Next, it is determined whether the value of the remaining ball timer 203r is the upper limit (S1506). On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the remaining ball timer 203r is the upper limit value (S1506: Yes), then the number of discharges (the sum of the value of the probability variable passage counter 203m and the value of the discharge number counter 203u) wins. It is determined whether the number (the value of the winning number counter 203p) matches (S1507).

In the processing of S1507, when it is determined that the number of discharged coins and the number of winning prizes do not match (S1507: No), an error command is set (S1508), and the process proceeds to S1509. When the error command is received by the audio lamp control device 113, an error is displayed (for example, characters indicating a winning number mismatch error are displayed), and an error signal is output to the hall computer. Therefore, during the period when the V area is closed, it is possible to suppress the fraudulent act of illegally entering the game ball into the V area and passing through the variable probability switch.

On the other hand, in the process of S1507, when it is determined that the number of discharged coins and the number of winning prizes match (S1507: Yes), the process of S1508 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S1509. In the process of S1509, the remaining ball timer flag 203q is set to OFF (S1509), and then the value of the remaining ball timer 203r is reset (S1510). After that, the values of the winning prize number counter 203p, the discharge number counter 203u, and the variable probability passage counter 203m are reset (S1511), and the process ends.

By executing this abnormal processing (see FIG. 439), the occurrence of a problem that the balls entering the specific winning opening 65a are not normally discharged due to clogging of the balls inside the variable winning device 65 is prevented. Early detection and notification are possible.

<Regarding control processing of the audio ramp control device in the first control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 440 to 458, each control process executed by the MPU 221 within the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 can be broadly classified into startup processing that is started upon power-on and main processing that is executed after the startup processing.

First, referring to FIG. 440, start-up processing executed by MPU 221 in audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 440 is a flow chart showing this startup process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S3001). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is ON, the power-off processing in S3119 (see FIG. 441) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (instantaneous power failure, so-called "instantaneous power failure"). ) is started in the middle of execution (S3002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 441, when the audio lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main controller 110 (see S3116 in FIG. 441), it executes power-off processing in S3119. Before the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag is turned on, and after the power-off processing is completed, the power-off processing flag is turned off. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing of S3119 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off processing in-progress flag.

If the power-off processing flag is off (S3002: No), the startup process this time was started after the power was completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurred and the power was shut off in S3119. Either it was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started when only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise (without receiving a power off command from the main controller 110). be. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S3003).

Destruction of data in the RAM 223 is confirmed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of "55AAh" is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S3006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if it is not "55AAh", it can be confirmed that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed. If data destruction of RAM223 is confirmed (S3003: Yes), it will transfer to S3004 and will start initialization of RAM223. On the other hand, if destruction of data in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S3003: No), the process proceeds to S3008.

It should be noted that if the startup process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power cut). ), it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S3003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S3004. On the other hand, whether the current start-up processing was started after a momentary power failure occurred and after the execution of the power-off processing in S3119 was completed, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like. If the process is started after the above, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S3003: No), and the process proceeds to S3008.

If the power-off processing flag is on (S3002: Yes), the startup process this time is after a momentary power failure has occurred, and during execution of the power-off process in S3119. It is started by resetting the MPU 221 of . In such a case, the memory state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct because the power-off process is in progress. Therefore, since control cannot be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S3004 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the processing of S3004, the storage area of the entire range of RAM 223 is checked (S3004). As a checking method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, read for each byte to check whether it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined as normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". All storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to 0 by this read/write check of the RAM 223 .

If the read/write check is normal for all storage areas of the RAM 223 (S3005: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set RAM destruction check data (S3006). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data destruction. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read/write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S3005: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S3007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. An abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34 . In addition, it is possible to output a sound by the sound output device 226 to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or to transmit an error command to the display control device 114 and display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. can be

In the process of S3008, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S3008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S3119 is executed (see S3118 in FIG. 441). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off processing of S3119 is executed, the process of S3008 is reached with the power-off flag turned on because the startup processing this time is instantaneous. This is the case where the process is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S3119 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S3008: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S3009), and after setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S3010), an interrupt Permission is set (S3011). The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110 . When the process of S3011 is finished, next, it is determined whether or not a status command has been received from the main controller 110 (S3012). This status command is a command set in the process of S908 of the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 433). In the process of S3012, if it is determined that a status command has been received (S3012: Yes), information indicating the received status command is set in the status setting area (S3013), and the process proceeds to the main process (see FIG. 441). and migrate. On the other hand, in the process of S3012, if it is determined that the status command has not been received (S3012: No), the process of S3013 is skipped and the process proceeds to the main process (see FIG. 441).

On the other hand, the process of S3008 is reached with the power-off flag turned off because the current start-up process was started after the power supply was completely shut off, for example. This is the case where the processing has been reached, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 has been reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S3008: No), S3009, which is the processing for clearing the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, the processing shifts to S3010, the above-described processing of S3010 to S3013 is executed, and the main processing (Fig. 441).

In this way, when the power is turned on, the main control unit 110 outputs a command that can determine whether or not the normal symbol is in the long-term hit state, so that the sound lamp control unit 113 side can also determine the state. can be done.

The reason why the clearing process of S3009 is skipped is that when the process of S3008 is reached from S3004 through the process of S3006, all storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S3004, When only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and start-up processing is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the audio lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, referring to FIG. 441, main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after startup processing of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 441 is a flow chart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 ms or more has passed since the main process was started or after the current process of S3101 was executed (S3101). If not (S3101: No), the process proceeds to S3114 without performing the processes of S3102 to S3113. In the process of S3101, it is determined whether or not 1 msec has elapsed because S3102 to S3113 are mainly processes related to display (effect), and there is no need to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). , the command determination processing in S3114, the variable display setting processing in S3115, and the processing for updating various counter values (not shown) are preferably executed in short cycles. That is, by executing the process of S3114 in a short period, it is possible to prevent the command transmitted from the main controller 110 from being missed in reception, and by executing the process of S3115 in a short period, the command can be received by the command determination process. Based on the command, it is possible to make settings related to variable effects without delay.

If 1 millisecond or more has elapsed in the processing of S3101 (S3101: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of S3103 to S3115 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S3102 ). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S3108 described later (S3103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S3104). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, it is notified that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). will be Also, a command may be sent to the display control device 114 to notify that power is supplied on the screen of the third pattern display device 81 . Note that if the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S3105 without notifying by the power-on notification process.

In the process of S3105, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the pending number display update process is executed (S3106). In the customer waiting effect process, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by a player for a predetermined period of time, a setting such as switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to a title screen is performed, and the setting is used as a command for display control. It is sent to device 114 . In the pending number display update process, a process of lighting a pending lamp (not shown) according to the value of the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 223a, the value of the special symbol 2 pending ball number counter 223b, or the value of the normal pending ball number counter 223c. is done.

After that, frame button input monitoring/effect processing is executed (S3107). In this frame button input monitoring and effect processing, input as to whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed is monitored in order to enhance the effect of the effect, and the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed is dealt with. This is a process of setting to perform production.

When the frame button input monitoring/effect processing is completed, the lamp editing processing is executed (S3108), and then the sound editing/output processing is executed (S3109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination parts 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81 . In the sound editing/output process, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the process of S3109, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S3110), and the process proceeds to S3111. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110, the time required for the variation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 and the time synchronized therewith are set. Lamp edit processing of S3108 is executed based on the time set in this liquid crystal effect execution monitoring processing. The sound editing/output processing of S3109 is also executed at the time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

After the processing of S3110 is finished, next, an effect update process for updating the effect mode of various effects executed during execution of the variable display effect is executed (S3111). This rendering update process (S3111) will be described later with reference to FIGS. After the performance update process (S3111) is executed, the operation status (whether pressed or not) of the PUSH button 10317 is then monitored, and when the pressed is detected, control is executed according to the pressed status. Press detection processing is executed (S3112). The details of this press detection process (S3112) will be described later with reference to FIGS.

After the process of S3112 is finished, the counter update process is executed (S3113). In this counter update process (S3113), a process for updating the value of a counter (for example, the effect lottery counter 223y for lottery of the effect mode) required when executing various effects is executed.

After the processing of S3113 is finished, next, command determination processing for executing control according to various commands received from main controller 110 is executed (S3114). Details of this command determination process (S3114) will be described later with reference to FIGS. After executing the command determination process (S3114), the variable display setting process is executed (S3115). In the variable display setting process, a variable pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variable pattern command received from the main controller 110 in order to execute the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81 . As a result, the command is sent to display controller 114 . Details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

When the process of S3115 is completed, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S3116). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110 . If power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of S3116 (S3116: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S3118), and the power-off processing is executed (S3119). After the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag is turned off (S3120), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power-off processing, interrupt processing is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. In addition, the memory of information on occurrence of power failure is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S3116 (S3116: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S3117), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S3117: No), the process returns to S3101, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S3117: Yes), the process is looped infinitely to stop execution of subsequent processes. Here, since the main processing is not executed when it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change after that. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, the player can call the pachinko hall clerk or the like and ask them to repair the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the RAM destruction may be notified by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 .

Next, with reference to FIG. 442, the rendering update process (S3111) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 442 is a flow chart showing this effect update process (S3111). This effect update process (S3111) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 441) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and as described above, various effects are executed during execution of the variable display effect. It is a process for updating the effect mode of.

In the effect update process (S3111), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the variable time timer 223s is greater than 0 (S3201). means that the variable display is not being executed, meaning that there is no possibility that the effect to be updated is being executed, so the process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the variable time timer 223s is greater than 0 (that is, the value is 1 or more) (S3201: Yes), the value of the variable time timer is subtracted (S3202), and then A press stop effect process for updating the effect mode during execution of the press stop effect (see FIG. 395) is executed (S3203). The details of this press stop effect processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the processing of S3203 is finished, next, an interrupt continuous hit effect process for updating the effect mode during execution of the interrupt continuous hit effect (see FIG. 399) is executed (S3204). The details of this interrupt continuous hit effect processing (S3204) will be described later with reference to FIG. Further, when the processing of S3204 ends, next, batch change effect processing for updating the effect mode during execution of the pending collective change effect (see FIGS. 402 and 403) is executed (S3205). Details of this batch change effect processing (S3205) will be described later with reference to FIG. When the processing of S3205 ends, charge consumption processing for setting the consumption of the charged spirit gauge in the chance charge effect (see FIG. 397) is executed (S3206), and this processing ends. Details of this charge consumption processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 443, the press stop rendering process (S3203) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 443 is a flow chart showing this press stop effect process (S3203). This press stop effect process (S3203) is executed in the effect update process (see FIG. 442) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and as described above, the press stop effect (see FIG. 395) is executed. This is a process for updating the effect mode in the middle.

In this press stop effect processing (see FIG. 443), first, it is determined whether or not it is time to start the press stop effect (see FIG. 395) (S3301). In the process of S3301, if it is determined that it is time to start the press stop effect (see FIG. 395) (S3301: Yes), the start of the press stop effect is set (S3302), and the value of the operation effective period timer 223t is set to 3. A timer value corresponding to seconds is set (S3303). Next, the value of the stop operation number counter 223u is set to 3 (S3304), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3301 that it is not the time to start the press stop effect (S3301: No), then it is determined whether or not the value of the operation effective period timer 223t is greater than 0 (S3305). In the process of S3305, if it is determined that the value of the operation valid period timer 223t is greater than 0 (S3305: Yes), the value of the operation valid period timer 223t is updated (S3306), and then the updated operation valid period timer It is determined whether or not the value of 223t is 0 (S3307). In the process of S3307, if it is determined that the value of the operation effective period timer 223t after updating is not 0 (S3307: No), this process ends. If it is determined that the value of the operation effective period timer 223t after updating is 0 (S3307: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the chance charge standby flag 223k is ON (S3308). In the process of S3308, when it is determined that the chance charge standby flag 223k is ON (S3308: Yes), the stop display of the chance charge symbol is set (S3309), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S3308, if it is determined that the chance charge standby flag 223k is off (S3308: No), only the press stop effect (see FIG. 395) is set for the current variable display effect. In this state (the execution of the chance charge effect was not set), it means that the operation valid period (3 seconds) has passed without the player performing the stop operation, so the stop display of the missing symbol is set. (S3310), and the process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3305 that the value of the operation effective period timer 223t is 0 (S3305: No), then it is determined whether or not the stop display period of the chance charge symbols has elapsed (S3311). If it is determined that the stop display period of the chance charge symbols has not passed (S3311: No), this processing is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S3311, if it is determined that the stop display period of the chance charge symbol has passed (S3311: Yes), the start of the chance charge effect corresponding to the value of the charge number counter 223m is set (S3312), and the chance The charge standby flag 223k is set to off (S3313). Next, a value corresponding to the current number of reserved balls is set to the value of the charge state number counter 223n (S3314), and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 444, the interrupt continuous hitting effect processing (S3204) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 444 is a flow chart showing this interrupt continuous hit effect processing (S3204). This interrupt continuous hit effect processing (S3204) is executed in the effect update process (see FIG. 442) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and is performed during execution of the interrupt continuous hit effect (see FIG. 399). This is processing for updating the mode.

When this interrupt continuous hitting effect process (see FIG. 444) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not it is time to start the interrupt continuous hitting effect (S3401). In the process of S3401, if it is determined that it is time to start the interrupt continuous hit effect (S3401: Yes), then, from the value of the variable time timer 223s, whether or not the current variable time is the time before reach is determined (S3402). In the processing of S3402, if it is determined that it is a variable time indicating before reach (S3402: Yes), after setting the pause of both the display and the sound, set the pause flag to "01H" ( S3404), the process proceeds to S3405. Specifically, in the process of S3404, a display interruption command indicating the start of stopping (suspending) the display mode is set to be output to the display control device 114, and the stopping (suspending) of the BGM output is started. is set to be output to the audio output device 226.

On the other hand, in the process of S3402, if it is determined that the value of the variable time timer 223s is not the timer value indicating the pre-reach (S3402: No), a temporary stop (interruption) is set only for the display mode, and a temporary stop flag is set. is set to "02H" (S3403), and the process proceeds to S3405. In the process of S3405, which is executed after the process of S3403 or S3404 is finished, the start of the interrupt continuous hit effect (see FIG. 399) is set (S3405), and this process is finished.

On the other hand, in the process of S3401, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the interrupt continuous hit effect (S3401: No), then it is determined whether or not it is time to start the continuous hit period (S3406). In the process of S3406, if it is determined that it is time to start the repeated hitting period (S3406: Yes), the timer value corresponding to 5 seconds is set as the value of the repeated hitting effective period timer 223v (S3407), and this process ends. .

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3406 that it is not the time to start the repeated hitting period (S3406: No), then it is determined whether or not the value of the repeated hitting effective period timer 223v is greater than 0 (S3408). If it is determined that the value of the continuous-hit effective period timer 223v is greater than 0 (S3408: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value of the continuous-hit effective period timer 223v (S3409), and then the value of the repeated-hit effective period timer 223v after the subtraction. is 0 (S3410). If it is determined that the value of the repeated hitting effective period timer 223v after the subtraction is 0 (S3410: Yes), this processing is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S3410, if it is determined that the value of the repeated hitting effective period timer 223v after the subtraction is not 0 (S3410: No), display of the end image of the interruption repeated hitting effect is set (S3411), and then, End this process.

On the other hand, in the process of S3408, if it is determined that the value of the repeated hit effective period timer 223v is 0 (S3408: No), then it is determined whether or not it is time to end the interrupt repeated hit effect (S3412). . In the process of S3412, if it is determined that it is time to end the interrupt continuous hit effect (S3412: Yes), it is determined whether or not the value of the pause flag is "01H" (S3413). If it is determined that the value of the temporary stop flag is "01H" (S3413: Yes), it means that both the display and the sound were stopped (interrupted) at the start of the interrupt continuous hit effect. Both the aspect and the audio aspect are set to resume from the paused position (S3414). That is, the display control device 114 is set to output a display interruption command indicating the end of interruption of the display mode, and the audio output device 226 is set to output an audio interruption command indicating the end of interruption of the audio mode. Set output. When the processing of S3414 ends, the processing moves to S3415.

On the other hand, in the process of S3413, if it is determined that the value of the pause flag is not "01H" (S3413: No), it means that the value of the pause flag is "02H", and only the display mode is temporarily displayed. Since it means that it is stopped (interrupted), it is set to resume the display mode from the pause position (that is, to the display control device 114, to output a display suspension command indicating the end of the suspension of the display mode). setting) (S3416), and the process proceeds to S3415. In the process of S3415 that is executed after the process of S3414 or S3416, neither the sound nor the display is paused (interrupted) by setting the pause flag to the initial value "00H" (S3415). is displayed, and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S3412, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the interrupt continuous hit effect (S3412: No), this process is ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 445, collective change effect processing (S3205) executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 445 is a flow chart showing this collective change effect processing (S3205). This collective change effect processing (S3205) is executed in the effect update processing (see FIG. 442) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and execution of the pending collective change effect (see FIGS. 402 and 403). This is a process for updating the effect mode in the middle.

In the batch change effect processing (see FIG. 445), first, it is determined whether or not the batch change flag 223p is on (S3501). S3501: No) This means that the pending batch change effect (see FIGS. 402 and 403) is not being executed, and there is no possibility of setting the pending batch change effect. When it is determined that the collective change flag 223p is ON (S3501: Yes), next, in the pending collective change effect, the timing at which the effective period of the operation for the PUSH button 10317 for collectively changing the pending symbol mode is started. (S3502). In the process of S3502, if it is determined that it is time to start the effective period of the operation on the PUSH button 10317 (S3502: Yes), the timer value corresponding to 3 seconds is set to the batch change period timer 223x ( S3503), the validity period of the operation on the PUSH button 10317 is set to 3 seconds, and this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of 3502 that it is not the start timing of the effective period (S3502: No), then the value of the collective change period timer 223x is greater than 0 (that is, whether the operation of the PUSH button 10317 is effective). It is determined whether it is within the period or not (S3504). In the process of S3504, if it is determined that the value of the batch change period timer 223x is greater than 0 (S3504: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value of the batch change period timer 223x (S3505), and the batch change period timer 223x after subtraction is is 0 (S3506). In the process of S3506, if it is determined that the value of the collective change period timer 223x after subtraction is not 0 (S3506: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S3506, if it is determined that the value of the collective change period timer 223x after the subtraction is 0 (S3506: Yes), each number of pending balls in the pending design mode indicated by the data in the pending design mode storage area 223r The setting is made so that the pattern is changed and displayed (S3507), the values of the batch change flag 223p, the change point storage area 223q, and the batch change period timer 223x are all reset (S3508), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S3504, if it is determined that the value of the batch change period timer 223x is 0 (S3504: No), this process ends.

Next, the charge consumption processing (S3206) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 446 is a flowchart showing this charge consumption processing (S3206). This charge consumption process (S3206) is executed in the effect update process (see FIG. 442) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and as described above, the chance charge effect (see FIG. 397) is charged. This is the processing for setting the consumption of the Kiai gauge.

In the charge consumption process (S3206), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the charge number counter 223m is greater than 0 (S3551), and if it is determined that the value of the charge number counter 223m is 0 (S3551: No) , it means that there is no room for consuming the spirit gauge to generate the chance-up effect, so this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3551 that the value of the charge number counter 223m is greater than 0 (S3551: Yes), then it is determined whether or not it is time to execute the charge consumption effect (S3552). In the process of S3552, if it is determined that it is not the timing at which the charge consumption effect can be executed (S3552: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3552 that it is time to execute the charge consumption effect (S3552: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the value of the charge state number counter 223n is 0 ( S3553). If it is determined that the value of the charge state number counter 223n is 0 (S3553: Yes), it means that this is the last fluctuation display that allows the consumption of the spirit gauge. is consumed, processing for consuming the spirit gauge and setting the chance-up effect (each processing of S3560 and S3561) is executed.

On the other hand, in the processing of S3553, if it is determined that the value of the charge state number counter 223n is not 0 (S3553: No), then the currently executed variation display (the variation) indicates the degree of expectation of super reach or higher. It is determined whether or not the displayed effect mode is the set variable display (S3554). If it is determined that the change is not the expected degree of super reach or higher (it is equal to or lower than the normal reach effect) (S3354: No), next, whether or not the charge state range includes a hold of super reach or higher. is determined (S3555). If it is determined that the range of the charge state includes a hold of super reach or higher (S3555: Yes), then the value of the charge number counter 223m is a value obtained by adding 2 to the number of balls held within the charge range. It is determined whether or not it is larger (S3556). If it is determined that the value of the charge number counter 223m is greater than the value obtained by adding 2 to the number of balls held within the charge range (S3556: Yes), the ball held above the super ready-to-win effect with many chances to execute the chance-up effect. Even if it is included, it means that the number of gauges (charges) of the spirit gauge remains large compared to the number of balls held, so in order to reduce the spirit gauge in the change, Processing (each processing of S3558, S3559) for consuming the gauge and setting the chance-up effect is executed.

On the other hand, in the processing of S3556, if it is determined that the value of the charge number counter 223m is equal to or less than the value obtained by adding 2 to the number of held balls within the charge range (S3556: No), variable display with super reach effect set. means that it is possible to fully consume the spirit gauge within the range of the value of the charge state number counter 223n by consuming the spirit gauge at the execution timing of the chance-up effect a plurality of times in . This processing ends without setting the consumption of the spirit gauge in .

In addition, in the process of S3555, if it is determined that the range of the charge state includes a hold of super reach or more (S3555: No), then the value of the charge number counter 223m is a hold ball within the charge range It is determined whether or not it is greater than the number (S3557). When it is determined that the value of the charge number counter 223m is equal to or less than the number of held balls within the charge range (S3557: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the processing of S3557, if it is determined that the value of the charge number counter 223m is greater than the number of held balls within the charge range (S3557: Yes), the gauge number (charge number) of the spirit gauge with respect to the number of held balls is increased. Since it means that there are many remaining, in order to decrease the spirit gauge in the change, the processing (each processing of S3558, S3559) for setting the chance up effect by consuming the spirit gauge is executed.

In the process of S3558, the charge consumption effect of the effect mode corresponding to the execution timing is set (S3558), the value of the charge number counter 223m is subtracted by 1 (S3559), and then the process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S3554, if it is determined that the fluctuation is greater than or equal to super reach (S3354: Yes), the charge consumption effect of the effect mode corresponding to the execution timing is set (S3560), and the value of the charge number counter 223m is set. is decremented by 1 (S3561), and then the process ends.

Next, the press detection process (S3112) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 447 is a flow chart showing this press detection process (S3112). This press detection process (S3112) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 441) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and monitors the operation status of the PUSH button 10317 (whether or not it is pressed). This is a process for executing control according to the state of the depression when the depression is detected.

In the press detection process (S3112), first, it is determined whether or not the push on the PUSH button 10317 has been detected (S3601). End this process. On the other hand, if it is determined that pressing of the PUSH button 10317 has been detected (S3601: Yes), next it is determined whether or not the value of the operation effective period timer 223t is greater than 0 (S3602). If it is determined that the value of the operation valid period timer 223t is greater than 0 (S3602: Yes), it means that the PUSH button 10317 was pressed (operated) during the valid period of the press stop effect (see FIG. 395). Therefore, stop operation detection processing for performing control corresponding to the stop operation during execution of the press stop effect is executed (S3603), and this processing ends. The details of this stop operation detection process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the processing of S3602, if it is determined that the value of the operation effective period timer 223t is 0 (S3602: No), then the value of the continuous hit effective period timer 223v is greater than 0 (S3604). If it is determined that the value of the repeated hitting valid period timer 223v is greater than 0 (S3604: Yes), repeated hitting operation detection processing for executing control corresponding to the repeated hitting operation during execution of the interrupt repeated hitting effect is executed (S3605). , and then terminate this process. The details of this repeated hit operation detection process will be described later with reference to FIG. 449 .

In the process of S3604, if it is determined that the value of the repeated hit effective period timer 223v is 0 (S3604: No), then whether the value of the batch change period timer 223x is greater than 0 (that is, in the pending batch change effect It is determined whether or not the PUSH button 10317 is valid (S3606). When it is determined that the value of the collective change period timer 223x is greater than 0 (S3606: Yes), change operation detection processing for performing control for setting collective change is executed during execution of the pending collective change effect. (S3607), and then the process ends. Details of this change operation detection process will be described later with reference to FIG. 450 . On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3606 that the value of the collective change period timer 223x is 0 (S3606: No), this process ends.

Next, the stop operation detection process (S3603) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 448 is a flow chart showing this stop operation detection process (S3603). This stop operation detection process (S3603) is executed in the press detection process (see FIG. 447) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. This is processing for performing corresponding control.

In the stop operation detection process (S3603), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the stop operation number counter 223u is greater than 1 (S3701). : Yes), stop display of the symbol row corresponding to the value of the stop operation number counter 223u is set (S3702), and the process proceeds to S3709. In the process of S3702, if the value of the stop operation number counter 223u is 3, the stop operation of the left symbol row is set, and if the value of the stop operation number counter 223u is 2, the right symbol row is stopped. set.

On the other hand, in the processing of S3701, when it is determined that the value of the stop operation number counter 223u is 1 or less (S3701: No), it is determined whether or not the chance charge waiting flag 223k is ON (S3703). In the process of S3703, if it is determined that the chance charge standby flag 223k is ON (S3703: Yes), it means that the variable display for which execution of the chance charge effect is set is being executed, and therefore the remaining period By setting the stop display effect of the chance charge symbol in , the start of the chance charge effect is notified (S3707), and the process proceeds to S3708.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3703 that the chance charge standby flag 223k is off (S3703: No), then it is determined whether or not the operation valid period remains for two seconds or more (S3704). If it is determined that the operation valid period remains for 2 seconds or more (S3704: Yes), the execution of the chance charge effect (see FIG. 396(a)) is set (S3705), and the process proceeds to S3708. do. By executing the processing of S3705, in the variable display in which only the press stop effect is set, if three presses are completed early in the effective period (within 1 second after the start), the It is possible to execute a chance charge fanning performance with a longer performance period than stopping the symbol. Therefore, the effect period can be varied according to the speed of the player's operation (pressing), so that a more suitable effect mode can be realized.

In the processing of S3704, if it is determined that the operation effective period does not remain for two seconds or more (less than two seconds) (S3704: No), the stop display of the middle symbol row is set so as to combine the winning symbols. (S3706), the process proceeds to S3708.

In the process of S3708 executed after any one of the processes of S3705 to S3707 is executed, the value of the operation effective period timer 223t is reset to 0 (S3708), and the process proceeds to S3709. In the process of S3709 executed after the process of S3702 or S3708 is executed, the value of the stop operation number counter 223u is decremented by 1 and updated (S3709), and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 449, repeated hitting operation detection processing (S3605) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 449 is a flow chart showing this repeated hit operation detection process (S3605). This repeated hitting operation detection processing (S3605) is executed in the press detection processing (see FIG. 447) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. This is processing for executing corresponding control.

In the repeated hit operation detection process (S3605), first, the remaining effective period (T) is specified from the value of the repeated hit effective period timer 223v (S3751), and then the number of monsters corresponding to the effect type of the current interrupt repeated effect is determined. A lower limit value (D) is calculated (S3752). It should be noted that the lower limit of the number of monsters is defined in advance for each effect type in the interruption repeated hit lottery table 222h (see FIG. 417) as described above. When the processing of S3752 is completed, next, "T/5 seconds x (100 bodies - D)" is calculated (S3753), and the value obtained by subtracting the calculated value from the current remaining number of monsters is calculated (S3754). ). In addition, in the process of S3754, the value after the decimal point is rounded off. When the process of S3754 is finished, next, it is determined whether or not the calculated number of monsters is less than the lower limit value of the effect type of the current interruption continuous hit effect (S3755).

In the process of S3755, if it is determined that the number of monsters below the lower limit has been calculated (S3755: Yes), the display of the remaining number of monsters is updated to the lower limit (S3756), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S3755, if it is determined that the calculated number of monsters is equal to or higher than the lower limit (S3755: No), the number of remaining monsters displayed is updated by subtracting the specified subtraction number (S3757), and then , the process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 450, the change operation detection process (S3607) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 450 is a flow chart showing this changing operation detection process (S3607). This change operation detection process (S3607) is executed in the press detection process (see FIG. 447) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. This is a process for performing control for setting changes.

In the change operation detection process (S3607), first, the change point corresponding to each ball on hold is specified from the data in the change point storage area 223q (S3801), and the state of the ball on hold with a change point of 1 or more is uniformly increased by one step. The data in the reserved design mode storage area 223r is updated as follows (S3802). Next, the change type of hold 1 is specified (S3803), and the hold design mode is specified according to the specified change type, the hold change lottery table 222c, and the effect lottery counter (S3804). Then, it is determined whether or not the identified reserved design mode has a higher degree of expectation than the data in the reserved design mode storage area 223r (S3805). When it is determined that the specified reserved design mode has a higher degree of expectation than the data in the reserved design mode storage area 223r (S3805: Yes), the data in the reserved design mode storage area 223r is replaced with data indicating the specified reserved design mode. (S3806), and the process proceeds to S3807.

On the other hand, in the processing of S3805, when it is determined that the specified reserved design mode is not higher expected than the data in the reserved design mode storage area 223r (S3805: No), the processing of S38006 is skipped, and the processing of S3807 is performed. Transition.

In the processing of S3807, it is determined whether or not the rank-up lottery of the reserved design mode by the processing of S3804 to S3806 has been completed for all the reserved balls (S3807), and the lottery for all the reserved balls has not been completed. If so (S3807: No), the variation type of the held ball whose start winning time is detected newer than the held ball targeted for this lottery is specified (S3808), and the process returns to S3804.

In the processing of S3807, when it is determined that the rank-up lottery for all the reserved balls has been completed (S3807: Yes), the display of the reserved design mode indicated by the data of the reserved design mode storage area 223r is set (S3809), and collectively The values of the change flag 223p, the change point storage area 223q, and the collective change period timer 223x are all reset (S3810), and this process is terminated.

Next, the command determination processing (S3114) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 451 is a flow chart showing this command determination process (S3114). This command determination process (S3114) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 441) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp controller 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main controller 110. .

In the command determination process (S3114), first, an unprocessed command received from main controller 110 is read from the command storage area provided in RAM 223, analyzed, and the unprocessed command received from main controller 110 is analyzed. It is determined whether or not a status command is included in the command (S3901). In the processing of S3901, if it is determined that the state command is included in the unprocessed command received from the main control device 110 (S3901: Yes), the game is played according to the game state notified by the received command. The data in the status storage area 223f is updated (S3902), and then this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S3901, if it is determined that the state command has not been received (S3901: No), then the variation pattern command has been received from the main controller 110 (variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands). pattern command is included) (S3903). In the process of S3903, if it is determined that the variation pattern command has been received (S3903: Yes), the variation start flag 223d is set to ON (S3904), and the variation pattern is extracted from the received variation pattern command (S3905) , and then terminate this process.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3903 that the variation pattern command has not been received (S3903: No), then it is determined whether or not the stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S3906). In the processing of S3906, if it is determined that the stop type command has been received (S3906: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S3907), and the stop type is extracted from the received command. (S3908), and the process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S3909, if it is determined that the stop type command has not been received (S3906: No), then it is determined whether or not the pending ball number command has been received (S3909). In the processing of S3909, if it is determined that the number of reserved balls command has been received (S3909: Yes), the number of reserved balls is extracted from the received command, and the corresponding special symbol reserved ball number counter (special symbol 1 reserved ball number The values of the counter 223a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b) are updated (S3910), and this process is terminated. Here, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the first special symbol is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a, and the number of reserved balls corresponding to the second special symbol is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b. Stored. Further, when receiving a reserved ball number command indicating the number of reserved balls of normal symbols, information for indicating the number of reserved balls is stored in the normal reserved ball number counter 223c. In this control example, since information indicating the current number of reserved balls is included in the number of reserved balls command sent from the main controller 110, for example, due to a power failure, etc. Even if the value is erased, the value of each pending ball number counter can be restored to an appropriate value by receiving the pending ball number command to be transmitted next. In this case, in the process of transmitting the state command (see S908 in FIG. 433) of the start-up process of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 433), it is preferable to transmit each pending pitch command.

On the other hand, in the process of S3909, if the command for the number of reserved balls has not been received (S3909: No), then it is determined whether or not the winning information command has been received from the main controller 110 (S3911). In the process of S3911, if it is determined that the winning information command has been received (S3911: Yes), various effects (prefetching effects) are set according to the type of winning information notified by the winning information command. (S3912), and the process ends. The details of this winning information command process (S3912) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 452 and 453. FIG.

In the process of S3911, if it is determined that the winning information command has not been received (S3911: No), then various commands related to winning (opening command, round number command, jackpot end command, and ending command) (either) is received (S3913), and if it is determined that a hit-related command is received (S3913: Yes), control is executed according to the type of command related to hit A hit-related command process is executed to make a win (S3914), and the process ends. The hit-related command processing (S3914) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, in the process of S3913, if it is determined that the winning-related command has not been received from the main controller 110 (S3913: No), then this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 452, the details of the winning information command process (S3912), which is one process in the command determination process (S3114), will be described. FIG. 452 is a flow chart showing this winning information command process (S3912). In the winning information command process (S3912), first, the data indicating the lottery result notified by the command is stored in an empty area of the winning information storage area (S4001), and the process proceeds to S4002. In the process of S4001, the data indicating the winning information notified by the command is stored in the empty area with the smallest number among the first to fourth areas of the winning information storage area.

In the processing of S4002, it is determined whether or not the chance charge standby flag 223k is ON (S4002). If it is determined that the chance charge standby flag 223k is ON (S4002: No), it means that the variable display effect set for the chance charge effect is being executed and the chance charge effect has not yet started. Therefore, according to the contents of the newly detected starting prize, the gauge number (charge number) of the spirit gauge charged in the chance charge effect is added to the value predetermined at the start of the fluctuation. Execute the process. More specifically, first, it is determined whether or not the current winning information command is a winning information command indicating winning (S4003). ), the value of the charge number counter 223m is updated by adding 2 (S4004), and the process proceeds to S4006. On the other hand, in the processing of S4003, if it is determined that the current winning information command is not a winning information command indicating winning (is a winning information command indicating loss) (S4003: No), the value of the charge number counter 223m 1 is added and updated (S4005), and the process proceeds to S4006.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4002, if it is determined that the chance charge standby flag 223k is off (S4002: No), since there is no possibility of adding the number of gauges (the number of charges) of the spirit gauge, each of S4003 to S4006 Skip the process and move to the process of S4006. In the process of S4006, it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery corresponding to falling has been notified (S4006). In the process of S4006, if it is determined that the lottery result corresponding to the fall has been notified (S4006: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the production mode corresponding to the continuous rich scenario in the variable probability continuous suggestion production is being executed. It is determined (S4007). In the process of S4007, if the data in the continuous scenario storage area 223h is any one of "08H" to "0BH" corresponding to the continuous rich scenario, the effect mode corresponding to the continuous rich scenario is being executed. determine that there is

In the processing of S4007, if it is determined that the continuation suggestion effect of the continuous thick scenario is being executed (S4007: Yes), next, the winning information notified by the winning information command this time is the probability variable continuation suggestion effect It is determined whether or not the winning information is consumed during execution (S4008). That is, according to the new prize information, during the execution of the probability variation continuation suggestion production, it is determined whether it is confirmed that the special symbol falls from the probability variation state to the low probability state, and it is digested during the execution of the continuation suggestion production (S4008: Yes), refer to the discontinuation table of the continuation suggestion effect selection table 222g (see FIG. 416). Then, a continuation suggestive effect scenario is determined (S4009), the continuation scenario storage area 223h is overwritten with data indicating the selected scenario (S4010), and the process proceeds to S4011. In the processes of S4009 and S4010, the effect scenario of "0CH" in the discontinued table is stored in the continuous scenario storage area 223h.

In addition, in the first control example, when the new start winning prize is the lottery result corresponding to the number of times of variation within the execution range of the variable probability continuation suggestion effect, the production scenario of "0CH" is always set. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and one scenario may be determined by lottery from among the four production scenarios (one of "0CH" to "0FH") specified in the discontinuation table. By configuring in this way, it is possible to further diversify the mode of presentation at the time of falling.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4006, if it is determined that the lottery result corresponding to the fall has not been notified (S4006: No), if it is determined that the probability variable continuation suggestion effect of the continuous rich scenario is not being executed (S4007: No ), and if it is determined that the new winning information notified by the winning information command this time is not the winning information digested during the execution of the variable probability continuation suggestion effect (S4008: No), the effect in the probability variable continuation suggestion effect Since there is no need to rewrite the scenario to the scenario of the table for discontinuation, the process proceeds directly to S4011.

By executing each process of S4006 to S4010, the probability variable state at the start of the probability variable continuation suggestion production is in a probability variable state, and the probability variable continuation suggestion production ends. When the continuation suggestion performance is executed, and after that the start winning corresponding to the fall occurs, by switching to the non-continuation performance scenario (“0CH” performance scenario), the result of the probability variable continuation suggestion performance is that the player has fallen. It can be notified that it is. That is, since it is possible to prevent the effect from being continued even though the player has already fallen, it is possible to realize a more suitable effect.

In addition, in the process of S4011, based on the winning information notified by the winning information command, a pending advance notice lottery process is executed to determine whether the pending change effect and the pending batch change effect can be executed (S4011), and this process exit. The details of this pending advance notice lottery process will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 453 is a flow chart showing this pending notice lottery process (S4011). In this pending notice lottery process (S4011), first, data indicating a pending design mode of white pending is stored in an empty area of the pending design mode storage area 223r (S4051). More specifically, data indicating the reserved design mode of white reservation is stored in the area with the smallest number among the empty areas of the reserved design mode storage area 223r. When the process of S4051 ends, it is then determined whether or not the batch change flag 223p is on (S4052). The symbol mode is set so as to be displayed as a reserved symbol corresponding to the new winning information (S4053), and this process is terminated. By executing the processing of S4053, the pending ball number pattern changed to a rock-like mode by the pending batch change effect and the pending ball number pattern based on the start prize newly detected after the start of the pending batch change effect. Since the reserved pattern mode can be changed between and, the player can easily understand the range of the reserved number of ball patterns to be subjected to the reserved batch change effect. Therefore, it is possible to realize an effect mode that is easier for the player to understand.

In addition, in the first control example, the number of pending ball symbols based on the start winning prize detected after the start of the pending collective change effect is uniformly set to the pending symbol mode of white pending, but it is limited to this. isn't it. For example, for a new number of reserved ball symbols, it may be configured to execute a lottery in a reserved design mode using the reserved change lottery table 222c (see FIG. 414(a)). As a result, not only the reserved number of balls pattern which is the object of the reserved collective change performance but also the reserved number of balls pattern based on the new start prize can be given a feeling of big hit. Further, for example, a new starting winning prize detected after the start of the pending batch change effect may be added to the target of the pending batch change effect. In this case, the number of pending ball patterns based on the new start winning may be configured to always be added to the target of the pending batch change effect, or may be added to the target of the pending batch change effect only under a predetermined condition. good too. As a predetermined condition, for example, when the winning information corresponding to the new start winning indicates the degree of expectation of the jackpot more than the super reach out, it may be included in the execution target of the pending collective change effect. , For example, only when winning information corresponding to a variation type with a higher degree of expectation than the pending ball in the range where the pending batch change effect is set is newly notified, as a configuration to be included in the execution target of the pending batch change effect good too. By constructing in this way, when the reserved number of balls pattern based on the new start prize is added to the execution target of the reserved collective change performance, the player's expectation for the big win can be further improved.

In the process of S4052, if it is determined that the collective change flag 223p is off (S4052: No), then it is determined whether or not the number of pending balls is greater than 1 (S4054), and the number of pending balls is 1 or less. If it is determined to be (S4054: No), there is no possibility of executing the pending collective change effect, so the processing of S4060 for drawing the pending symbol mode of the pending ball number symbol corresponding to the new winning information Transition. On the other hand, in the process of S4054, if it is determined that the number of pending balls is greater than 1 (2 or more) (S4054: Yes), the data in the winning information storage area and the data in the pending symbol mode storage area 223r , and the change point calculation table 222d (S4055), and whether or not to execute the pending batch change effect is determined according to the calculated change points, the values of the batch change lottery table 222e, and the effect lottery counter. (S4056). Next, it is determined whether or not the determination result by the processing of S4056 is the determination result corresponding to the execution of the pending batch change effect (S4057), and it is determined that it is not the determination result corresponding to the execution of the pending batch change effect. In that case (S4057: No), the process moves to S4060 for drawing a lottery for the reserved design mode of the reserved ball number design corresponding to the new prize information. On the other hand, in the processing of S4057, if it is determined that the determination result corresponds to the execution of the pending batch change effect (S4057: Yes), the execution of the pending batch change effect is set (S4058), and the batch change flag 223p is turned on. (S4059), and the process ends.

In the process of S4060, the hold change lottery table 222c (see FIG. 414(a)) is read (S4060), and the read hold change lottery table 222c, the winning information notified by the command, and the value of the effect lottery counter to determine the reserved design mode (S4061). Next, according to the reserved design mode determined in the process of S4061, the data corresponding to the latest winning information in the reserved design mode storage area 223r is updated (S4062), and the reserved design mode indicated by the updated data is updated. The display is set (S4063), and this processing ends.

By executing this reservation advance notice lottery process (see FIG. 453), it is possible to suitably set various production modes using the number of reserved ball symbols.

Next, with reference to FIG. 454, the content of the hit-related command process (S3914) described above will be described. FIG. 454 is a flow chart showing the details of the win-related command process (S3914). This win-related command process (S3914) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 451) of the sound lamp control device 113, and when a win-related command is received from the main controller 110, This is processing for performing control according to the type of the received command.

In the hit-related command process (see FIG. 454), first, it is determined whether or not the command received this time is an opening command (S4101). If it is determined that the command received this time is an opening command (S4101: Yes), a display opening command corresponding to the received opening command is set (S4102), and then this processing ends.

In the process of S4101, if it is determined that the command received this time is not the opening command (S4101: No), then it is determined whether the command received this time is the number of rounds command (S4103). If it is determined that there is (S4103: Yes), the display round number command is set based on the round number indicated by the round number information included in the received round number command (S4104), and this process ends.

In the process of S4103, if it is determined that the command received this time is not a round number command (S4103: No), it is determined whether the command received this time is a jackpot end command (S4105), and if it is a jackpot end command When it is determined (S4105: Yes), the data in the game state storage area 223f is updated according to the information indicating the game state after the end of the jackpot included in the received jackpot end command (S4106), and then the right hit It is determined whether or not the medium winning flag 223i is on (S4107). When it is determined that the winning flag 223i during right hitting is on (S4107: Yes), the hit is a big hit during the probability variable state or the time saving state in which the game is played by right hitting (that is, so-called consecutive house has occurred) This means that it means that the second special symbol lottery with a high probability variable jackpot ratio has hit the jackpot, so the back mode for high expectations (see FIG. 390 (b)) is set (S4109), End this process. Uniformly setting the back mode for high expectations is to make it difficult to understand whether the time saving state is set or the variable probability state is set, so that the player can predict the current game state. It is for realization.

On the other hand, in the process of S4107, when it is determined that the winning flag 223i during right-handed hitting is off (S4107: No), a jackpot is won in the normal state in which the game is played with left-handed hitting (so-called first winning). This means that the ratio of the probability variable jackpot is low in the lottery of the first special symbol, so the back mode for low expectations (see FIG. 390 (a)) is set (S4108), After that, this process is terminated. Uniformly setting the back mode for low expectations is to make it difficult to understand whether the time saving state is set or the variable probability state is set, so that the player can predict the current game state. It is for realization.

Also, if it is determined that the jackpot end command is not received in the process of S4105 (S4105: No), then it is determined whether the command received this time is the ending command (S4110), and if it is the ending command If so (S4110: Yes), a display ending command is set (S4111), and this process ends. If it is determined in the process of S4110 that the ending command has not been received (S4110: No), then this process ends.

Next, the variable display setting process (S3115) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 455 is a flow chart showing this variable display setting process (S3115). This variable display setting process (S3115) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 441) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. In order to execute the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81, This is a process for generating and setting display variation pattern commands based on the variation pattern commands received from main controller 110 .

In the variable display setting process (S3115), first, it is determined whether or not the variable start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is ON (S4201). If it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is not ON (that is, it is OFF) (S4201: No), the fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110, so the process of S4207 Move to On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is on (S4201: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned off (S4202), and the fluctuation pattern type in the fluctuation effect extracted from the display fluctuation pattern command is stored in the RAM 223. (S4203).

Next, a variable effect setting process for setting the effect mode to be executed with the extracted variable pattern (variable time) is executed (S4204). The contents of this variable effect setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. When the processing of S4204 ends, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the effect mode determined in the processing of S4204 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 ( S4205). In the display control device 114, by receiving this display variation pattern command, the variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command is used to perform the variation display of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81. Display control of the variable effect is started.

Next, the data stored in the winning information storage area is shifted (S4206). In this process, the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the winning information storage area are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of 1st area→execution area, 2nd area→1st area, 3rd area→2nd area, 4th area→3rd area. After shifting the data, the process proceeds to S4207.

In the processing of S4207, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is ON (S4207). Then, if it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is not ON (that is, it is OFF) (S4207: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is on (S4207: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e is turned off (S4208), and the stop type in the variable effect extracted from the stop type command is stored in the RAM 223. (S4209). Next, the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main controller 110 is set as it is as the stop type of the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81 (S4210), and the process proceeds to S4211.

In the processing of S4211, based on the set stop type, a display stop type command for notification to the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set for transmission to the display control device 114 (S4211). . In the display control device 114, by receiving this stop type command for display, the stop pattern corresponding to the stop type indicated by this stop type command for display is stopped and displayed on the third pattern display device 81. The stop display of the variable production is controlled. After the process of S4211 is executed, this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 456, the content of the variable effect setting process (S4204), which is one process in the variable display setting process (see FIG. 455) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, will be described. . FIG. 456 is a flow chart showing the contents of the variable effect setting process (S4204). In this variable effect setting process (S4204), a process for setting a detailed effect mode (announcement content) of the variable effect of the third symbol corresponding to the variation of the special symbol is executed.

In the variable effect setting process (S4204), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the charge state number counter 223n is greater than 0 (S4301). : Yes), the value of the charge state number counter 223n is decremented by 1 (S4302), and the process proceeds to S4303. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4301 that the value of the charge state number counter 223n is 0 (S4301: No), the process of S4302 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S4303.

In the processing of S4303, it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving guarantee counter 223g is greater than 0 (S4303). When it is determined that the value of the time saving guarantee counter 223g is 0 (S4303: No), the process proceeds to S4311. On the other hand, in the process of S4303, if it is determined that the value of the time saving guarantee number counter 223g is greater than 0 (S4303: Yes), the value of the time saving guarantee number counter 223g is subtracted by 1 (S4304), then after the subtraction It is determined whether or not the value of the time saving guarantee counter 223g is greater than 0 (S4305). In the process of S4305, when it is determined that the value of the reduced working hours guarantee counter 223g is 0 (S4305: No), the process proceeds to S4311. On the other hand, in the process of S4305, if it is determined that the value of the time saving guarantee number counter 223g after subtraction is greater than 0 (S4305: Yes), then whether the value of the time saving guarantee number counter 223g after subtraction is greater than 4 It is determined whether or not (S4306). In the process of S4306, when it is determined that the value of the reduced working hours guarantee counter 223g is greater than 4 (S4306: Yes), the process proceeds to S4312.

In the processing of S4311, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is a variable probability state (S4311). Here, based on the data stored in the game state storage area 223f, it is determined whether the current game state is the variable probability state. In the processing of S4311, when it is determined that the current state is the variable probability state (S4311: Yes), it means that the variable probability state continues beyond 100 times after the end of the big hit, so the back mode lottery is performed. Therefore, the process proceeds to S4312. On the other hand, in the processing of S4311, if it is determined that the current state is not the variable probability state (S4311: No), the processing of S4312 is skipped and the processing of S4313 is performed.

In the process of S4312, in the gaming state (time saving state, probability variable state) in which the game is played with the right hand, one back mode is drawn by lottery from among a plurality of back modes indicating the expectation of the probability variable state with a lottery probability according to the gaming state. Back mode lottery processing is executed (S4312), and the process proceeds to S4313. The details of this back mode lottery process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of S4313, an effect mode selection process for selecting an effect mode in the variable display effect is executed (S4313), and then this process is terminated. The details of this rendering mode selection process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In addition, in the variable effect setting process in the first control example, in the process of S4306, if it is determined that the value of the time reduction guaranteed number counter 223g after subtraction is 4 or less (S4306: No), the probability variable continuation suggestion effect Since it means that it is the execution period (the fluctuation period of the 96th to 99th fluctuation display after the end of the big win), next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is the big win (S4307). In the process of S4307, when it is determined that the lottery result is a big win (S4307: Yes), the big win performance mode dedicated to the execution period of the continuation suggestion performance is set as the current variable display mode (S4308), and during right hand hitting. The winning flag is set to ON (S4309), and this processing is terminated. Note that, as a jackpot effect mode dedicated to the execution period of the continuation suggestion effect, for example, the effect of breaking through the door 806 causes the adventurer who breaks through the door 806 to discover a treasure on the other side of the door 806. , an effect or the like in which a jackpot is announced is executed.

On the other hand, in the process of S4307, if it is determined that the special symbol lottery result is not a special symbol jackpot (S4307: No), the continuous suggestion effect setting for setting the effect mode in the execution period of the probability variable continuous suggestive effect The process is executed (S4310) and the process ends. Details of the continuation suggestion effect setting process (S4310) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, referring to FIG. 457, description will be given of the contents of the continuous suggestive effect setting process (S4310) which is one process in the variable effect setting process (see FIG. 456) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. do. FIG. 457 is a flow chart showing the content of the continuation suggestion effect setting process (S4310).

When the continuation suggestion effect setting process (S4310) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the time reduction guarantee number counter 223g is 4 (S4401), and the value of the time reduction guarantee number counter 223g is not 4 (3 or less) (S4401: No), the data in the continuous scenario storage area 223h is read (S4411), and it is determined whether or not the read scenario is a continuous rich scenario (S4412). In the processing of S4412, if it is determined that the read scenario is not the scenario for continuous enrichment (S4412: No), the processing proceeds to S4415. On the other hand, in the process of S4412, if it is determined that the read scenario is a scenario for continuous concentration (S4412: Yes), it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol this time is the lottery result of falling ( S4413), if it is determined that the lottery result is not falling (S4413: No), the process proceeds to S4415. On the other hand, in the process of S4413, when it is determined that the lottery result is falling (S4413: Yes), the production scenario is switched to "0CH" (S4414), and the process proceeds to S4415.

In the process of S4415, from the scenario read out from the continuous scenario storage area 223h, the effect mode of the number of fluctuations corresponding to the value of the guaranteed time counter 223g is read (S4415), and the read effect mode is used as the display mode of the current variation pattern. Set (S4416). Next, it is determined whether or not the final effect mode of the scenario has been set (S4417). If it is determined that the final effect mode of the scenario has been set (S4417: Yes), the data in the continuous scenario storage area 223h is determined. is reset to "00H" (S4418), and the process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S4417, if it is determined that the final rendering mode of the scenario is not set (S4417: No), the process of S4418 is skipped and the process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S4401, if it is determined that the value of the time saving guarantee counter 223g is 4 (S4401: Yes), it means that it is the start timing of the probability variation continuation suggestion production (see FIG. 392), so the probability variation A process for determining a production scenario for continuous suggestive production is executed. Specifically, first, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is a variable probability state (S4402). In the process of S4402, if it is determined that the current gaming state is a variable probability state (S4402: Yes), the data in the winning information storage area is read (S4403), and the winning information includes the lottery result of falling. It is determined whether or not there is (S4404). In the process of S4404, if it is determined that the lottery result of falling is not included in the winning information (S4404: No), then four winning information is stored (that is, the probability variation continuation suggestion effect It is determined whether or not the ball held until the end has already been held (S4405).

In the processing of S4405, if it is determined that four pieces of winning information are stored (S4405: Yes), the table for continuation confirmation in the continuation suggestion effect selection table 222g (see FIG. 416) is referred to, and the continuation suggestion effect scenario is determined. is determined (S4406), and the process proceeds to S4409. On the other hand, in the processing of S4405, if it is determined that the four pieces of winning information are not stored (S4405: No), the continuation rich table in the continuation suggestion effect selection table 222g (see FIG. 416) is referred to, and the continuation suggestion A production scenario is determined (S4407), and the process proceeds to S4409.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4402, if it is determined that the current gaming state is not a variable probability state (S4402: No), and in the processing of S4404, the lottery result of falling is included in the prize information If so (S4404: Yes), the discontinuation table in the continuation suggestion effect selection table 222g (see FIG. 416) is referred to determine the effect scenario (S4408), and the process proceeds to S4409.

In the process of S4409 executed after any one of the processes of S4406 to S4408 is executed, data indicating the selected production scenario is stored in the continuous scenario storage area 223h (S4409), and the first variation in the determined scenario is executed. is set as the effect mode of the current variation pattern (S4410), and the process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 458, the contents of the back mode lottery process (S4312), which is one process in the variation effect setting process (see FIG. 456) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, will be described. . FIG. 458 is a flow chart showing the contents of the back mode lottery process (S4312).

When the back mode lottery process (S4312) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the current variation pattern is a big hit variation pattern (S4501). When it is determined that the current variation pattern is a variation pattern for a big win (S4501: Yes), the variation display mode for a big win is selected as the variation display mode (S4502), and the winning flag 223i during right hitting is set to ON. (S4503), and the process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S4501, when it is determined that the current variation pattern is not a big hit variation pattern (S4501: No), next, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is a variable probability state (S4504). . If it is determined that the current game state is not the variable probability state (S4504: No), the back mode lottery table 222b (see FIG. 413) is referred to for fallen table and the value of the effect lottery counter 223y. is selected (S4505), and the process proceeds to S4510.

On the other hand, in the process of S4504, if it is determined that the current gaming state is a variable probability state (S4504: Yes), the data in the winning information storage area is read (S4506), and then the lottery result of falling in the winning information is included (S4507). In the process of S4507, if it is determined that the prize winning information includes the lottery result of falling (S4507: Yes), the non-fall table in the back mode lottery table 222b (see FIG. 413) and the effect lottery counter 223y , and the back mode is selected by lottery (S4508), and the process proceeds to S4510.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4507, if it is determined that the lottery result of falling is not included in the winning information (S4507: No), the probability variation continuation table in the back mode lottery table 222b (see FIG. 413) and the effect lottery The back mode is selected by referring to the value of the counter 223y (S4509), and the process proceeds to S4510.

In the process of S4510 executed after any one of the processes of S4505, S4508, and S4509 is executed, the lottery result of each process is the lottery result indicating the change to the rear mode different from the current rear mode. (S4510). In the process of S4510, if it is determined that the result of the lottery corresponds to the change of the rear face mode (S4510: Yes), a rear face change command for display indicating the changed rear face mode is set (S4511), and this processing ends. do. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4510 that the back mode is not to be changed (S4510: No), the process of S4511 is skipped and the process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 459, the content of the effect mode selection process (S4313), which is one process in the variation effect setting process (see FIG. 456) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, will be described. . FIG. 459 is a flow chart showing the contents of the effect mode selection process (S4313).

When the effect mode selection process (S4313) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not a variation pattern command including an additional time command (including an additional time command indicating an additional time of 7 seconds) has been received (S4551). If it is determined that the variation pattern command including the additional time command has not been received (S4551: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S4551, if it is determined that the variation pattern command including the additional time command is received (S4551: Yes), the interrupt repeated hit lottery table 222h (see FIG. 417) is read (S4552), and the effect lottery counter Whether or not the continuous hit effect can be executed and the type are determined according to the value of 223y (S4553), and then it is determined whether or not the lottery result corresponds to the execution of the repeated interrupt effect (S4554). In the process of S4554, if it is determined that the lottery result corresponds to the execution of the interrupt continuous hit effect (S4554: Yes), the data corresponding to the type of the interrupt continuous hit effect to be executed is stored in the repeated hit type storage area 223j (S4555 ), and then, it is determined whether or not the type of interrupt continuous hit effect is the type to be executed before reach (S4556). In the processing of S4556, if it is determined that the type of interrupt repeated hit effect to be executed before reaching reach (S4556: Yes), the voice mode corresponding to the variable time indicated by the basic time command is determined (S4558), and the sound mode of S4559 is determined. Go to processing.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4556, when it is determined that the type of the determined interrupt continuous hit effect is not the type to be executed before reach (S4556: No), the variable time indicated by the basic time command and the additional time command The voice mode corresponding to the sum of the indicated fluctuation time is determined (S4557), and the process proceeds to S4559.

In the process of S4559, the display mode corresponding to the variable time indicated by the basic time command is determined (S4559), and this process ends. Thus, in the first control example, it is configured to be easily identifiable whether or not it is a variation type long by 7 seconds depending on the presence or absence of the additional time saving command. As a result, it is possible to determine whether or not the change type is a lottery target for whether or not to execute the interrupt continuous hitting effect, simply by confirming the content of the additional time command. Further, when it is decided to execute the interrupt continuous hit effect, the variable time can be filled by setting the effect mode corresponding to the variable time notified by the basic time command (the variable time shorter by 7 seconds). can. Therefore, it is possible to easily match the end timing of the performance mode with the end timing of the variable display performance without preparing a performance mode dedicated to the interrupt continuous hitting performance, so that a suitable performance mode can be provided.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4554, if it is determined that the interrupt continuous hit effect is not executed (S4554: No), the chance charge lottery table 222f (see FIG. 415(b)) is read out (S4560), and the current variation type Then, whether or not the chance charge effect (see FIGS. 396(b) and 397(a)) can be executed is determined (S4561) according to the number of pending balls and the value of the effect lottery counter 223y, and then the processing of S4561. It is determined whether or not execution of the chance charge effect has been determined by determination (lottery) (S4562). In the process of S4562, if it is determined that the execution of the chance charge effect has not been determined (S4562: No), the effect mode corresponding to the variation type indicated by the variation pattern command is determined (S4566), and this process ends. .

On the other hand, in the processing of S4562, if it is determined that the execution of the chance charge effect has been determined (S4562: Yes), the value of the charge number counter 223m is set to the number of pending balls plus 1 (S4563), and the chance The charge standby flag 223k is set to ON (S4564), the effect mode including the chance charge effect is determined as the variable display mode of this time (S4565), and this process is terminated. As described above, in the first control example, when execution of the chance charge effect is determined, the gauge amount of the spirit gauge KG accumulated by the chance charge effect (charge number counter 223 m) is based on the number of held balls at the time of the determination. value). After completion of the chance charge effect, the pace at which the chance up effect is executed (that is, the spirit gauge is consumed) is variable in consideration of the lottery result of each reserved ball. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce the processing load (the processing load when determining the number of gauges) at the start of the chance charge effect.

<Regarding control processing of the display control device in the first control example>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 460 to 473. FIG. The processing of the MPU 231 can be broadly classified into main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, and processing for one frame from the image controller 237. There is V interrupt processing that is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal that is transmitted every 20 milliseconds when image drawing processing is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command reception processing is preferentially executed. As a result, it is possible to quickly reflect the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113 and execute the V interrupt process.

First, with reference to FIG. 460, main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 460 is a flow chart showing this main process. The main processing is to execute initialization processing when the power is turned on.

Activation of this main process is specifically performed according to the following flow. When power is turned on from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" and , the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is specified for the bus line 240. FIG. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address designated on the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231 . Then, the MPU 231 fetches the received instruction code from the character ROM 234, and starts the main process by starting the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction.

Here, if all the boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address designated to the bus line 240 is "0000H". When detected, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND type flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read out and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, the time taken to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in the present control example, the NOR ROM 234d stores a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program that should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is canceled, thereby speeding up the NOR ROM. Since it is a memory from which data can be read, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234 c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 . Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S8001), and the display control device 114 is set so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. to start.

Here, referring to FIG. 461, the boot processing (S8001) will be described. 461 is a flowchart showing boot processing (S8001) executed in the main processing in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. FIG.

As described above, in this control example, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81 instead of being stored in a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. The character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed is stored. The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND-type flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed, especially when performing random access. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may deteriorate. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by DRAM and the data table. A process of transferring and storing in the storage area 233b is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the hardware operations of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234 described above, the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR-type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c after the system reset is canceled is executed. Of the control programs stored in the 2-program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S8101). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the head address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S8102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the rest of the boot program included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S8101.

By setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S8102, the MPU 231 can execute various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but rather reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. and execute various processing. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the process for the instruction.

After the command pointer 231a is set by the process of S8102, the remaining boot program whose execution is started by the set command pointer 231a is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a. Of the control programs stored, the remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a are transferred by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b (S8103). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) of the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

After executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S8104), the instruction pointer 231a is moved to the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the boot process (see S8001 in FIG. 460) is completed. By setting the top address of the program corresponding to the initializing process (see S8002 in FIG. 460) (S8105), the execution of the boot program is finished, and the boot process ends.

By executing the boot process (S8001) in this way, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the work RAM 233, which is composed entirely of DRAM. It is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. At the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processing is executed using

Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a whose read speed is slow, the control program and fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the fixed value data after the system reset is released. By transferring to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read the control program and fixed value data from the work RAM configured by the DRAM with a high read speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect part.

On the other hand, without storing the entire boot program in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the rest of the boot program is stored in the NAND type flash memory 234a. , the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time simply by adding the NOR type ROM 234d with a very small capacity. can be done.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 461, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S8101 includes all remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. may be part of As for the boot program transferred here, a predetermined amount of the control program including all remaining boot programs is transferred to the program storage area 233a. 231a may be executed. Then, the processes of S8103 to S8105 may be executed by all remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

In addition, the boot program transferred by the process of S8101 transfers a part of the remaining boot program by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and then the beginning of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. A process of setting an address to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. In addition, part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing is further transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount of part of the remaining boot program, and subsequently stored in the program storage area 233a. A process of setting the start address of the stored boot program to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a predetermined amount of a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a, and then the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set in the instruction pointer 231a in step S8101. and the processing of S8102 may be repeated a plurality of times, and then the processing of S8103 to S8105 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the rest of the boot program not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at once, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. Using the boot program, a predetermined amount can be transferred to the program storage area 233a.

Further, in this control example, the first program storage area 234d1 stores a part of the boot program that is first executed by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released. It may be stored in the 1-program storage area 234d1. In this case, the MPU 231 may perform the processes of S8103 to S8105 without performing the processes of S8101 and S8102 after starting the boot process. This eliminates the need to transfer the boot program to the program storage area 233a, reducing the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the boot processing time. Therefore, it is possible to start the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231, which becomes possible after the boot process, more quickly.

Returning now to the description of FIG. After the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S8002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings are made for the registers in the MPU 231 and the I/O device. In addition, processing for clearing the memory of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set to the respective flags. As the initial value of each flag, "off" or "0" is set unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after the image controller 237 is initialized, the image controller 237 is instructed to draw an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81. and instruct execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81 . Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be a different color according to the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacture, immediately after turning on the power, it is inspected whether or not the image of the color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the pachinko machine 10 It is possible to easily and immediately judge whether or not the activation can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S8003). This transfer instruction contains the leading and trailing addresses of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the main image when the power is turned on, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The image controller 237 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

Then, when the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating transfer end to the MPU 231 . By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. When the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 stores transfer end information indicating transfer end in a register provided inside the image controller 237 or in a partial area of the built-in memory. It may be written. The MPU 231 reads information from this register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby ascertaining that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. You may do so.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S8003, the power-on variation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to . This transfer instruction contains the head address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image, the data size of the image data, and information on the transfer destination (here, the resident video RAM 235). , and the head address of the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, which is the transfer destination. It is transferred to the change image area 235b when the power is turned on. The image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S8004, then the simple image display flag 233c is set. is turned on (S8005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 471(a)), which will be described later. Resident image transfer setting processing for instructing the image controller 237 to transfer is executed (see S9602 in FIG. 471(a)).

Further, the simple image display flag 233c indicates that all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. Remains on until terminated. As a result, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 462(b)), the power-on images (power-on main image and power-on variation image) shown in FIGS. 462(b), the simple command determination process (see S8308 in FIG. 462(b)) and the simple display setting process (see S8309 in FIG. 462(b)) are executed.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234. Due to its slow read speed, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is It takes a long time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Therefore, as in this main processing, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on varying image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image at power-on is transferred to the third image. By displaying it on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player and the people involved in the hall can see the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. On the other hand, while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed, so that the rest of the resident video RAM 235 can be resident. It is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying whether the operation is stopped while the image data to be processed is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 .

Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like during manufacturing, since the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the operation of the third pattern display device 81 is started without any problem when the power is turned on. Therefore, it is possible to prevent deterioration of the operation check efficiency by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234. FIG.

In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so that the power-on main image is the third symbol. When the player starts the game while the display is displayed on the display device 81, a ball enters the first start hole 64 (start winning), and an instruction to start the variable effect is issued from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device. 113, that is, when a display variation pattern command is received, a power-on variation image (not shown) is immediately displayed during the variation presentation period, and a simple variation presentation can be performed. can. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation performance.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the third symbol display device 81 continues to display the main image when the power is turned on. is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, it takes a long time to transfer the data. However, in this pachinko machine 10, since it is possible to perform a simple variation effect using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, after the power is restored, Immediately after the power is turned on, even while the main image is being displayed, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the processing of S8005, interrupt permission is set (S8006), and thereafter, the main processing executes infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Accordingly, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S8006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 462(a). FIG. 462(a) is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes command interrupt processing.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S8201), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt processing are read out by command determination processing or simple command determination processing of V interrupt processing to be described later, and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 462(b). FIG. 462(b) is a flow chart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and after specifying the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 423) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

As described above, this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the image controller 237 and sent to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing processing for one frame is completed. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in accordance with a new drawing instruction in a frame buffer storing image information being displayed.

Here, first, an outline of the flow of V interrupt processing will be described, and then details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 462(b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S8301). If it is off (S8301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. In order to display on the display device 81, command determination processing (S8302) is executed, and then display setting processing (S8303) is executed.

In the command determination process (S8302), the content of the command from the sound lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process is analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the demonstration display data table or the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and processed. This is because command determination processing is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when V interrupt processing is executed, and there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during those 20 milliseconds. be. In particular, when main controller 110 decides to start a variable effect, there is a high possibility that a display variation pattern command, a display stop type command, and the like are stored in the command buffer area at the same time. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands all at once, it is possible to quickly comprehend the mode and stop type of the variable performance selected by the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113, and generate a performance image corresponding to the mode. Drawing of an image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . Details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

In the display setting process (S8303), based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S8302), etc., the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81 is displayed. specifically identify the content of In addition, depending on the status of processing, etc., the effect mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is determined, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. Details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

After the display setting process is executed, task processing is executed (S8304). In this task processing, the image is configured based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 specified by the display setting processing (S8303) or the simple display setting processing (S8309). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be displayed, various parameters required for drawing such as the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, transfer setting processing is executed (S8305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 is caused to transfer image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. While the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. When a transfer instruction to transfer to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 is set, and a continuous notice command (not shown) is received from the sound lamp control device 113, the continuous notice is sent to the image controller 237. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview images used in the effect and the image data of the rear image after change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. FIG. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 471 and 472. FIG.

Next, drawing processing is executed (S8306). In this drawing process, based on the types of sprites that make up one frame determined in the task process (S8304) and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S8305), 423, and transmits the drawing list to the image controller 237 together with the buffer information to be drawn. As a result, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list. Details of the rendering process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S8307). Then, the V interrupt process ends. As a counter updated by the process of S8307, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and is updated each time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, in the command determination process, when reception of the stop type command for display is detected, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type indicated by the stop type command for display is compared with the stop type counter, and the third symbol display device A stop symbol after the variable effect displayed at 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S8301 that the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S8301: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. In order to display the power-on image (not shown) on the third pattern display device 81, a simple command determination process (S8308) is executed, then a simple display setting process (S8309) is executed, and the process proceeds to S8304. do.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 463 to 468, the details of the command determination process (S8302), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 463 is a flow chart showing this command determination processing.

In this command determination process (FIG. 463, S8302), as shown in FIG. 463, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S8401). (S8401: No), the command determination process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S8401: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S8303) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S8402). All unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area are analyzed for their command types (S8403).

Then, among the unprocessed commands, first, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command (S8404), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S8404: Yes), the variation pattern command process is executed. (S8405) and returns to the processing of S8401.

Details of the variation pattern command process (S8405) will now be described with reference to FIG. 464(a). FIG. 464(a) is a flowchart showing variation pattern command processing. In this variation pattern command processing, processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the sound lamp control device 114 is executed.

In the variation pattern command process, first, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data table. It is set in the buffer 233d (S8501).

Here, since the main controller 110 always determines the start of variation at a time interval of several seconds or more, it does not receive two or more display variation pattern commands within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command is mistakenly used for display. There is a possibility that it will be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S8501, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a variation display data table corresponding to a variation pattern with a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the main control device will actually produce a variation effect with a shorter variation time than the set display data table. 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation performance according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may make the player feel uncomfortable.

On the other hand, as in this control example, by setting the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time in the display data table buffer 233d, the variation longer than the set display data table can be actually obtained. Even if the variable effect with time is instructed by main controller 110, after the variable effect according to display data table buffer 233d is completed, main controller 110 will send the next display for display, as will be described later. Since the display of the third pattern display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player can feel the third pattern display on the third pattern display device 81 without any discomfort. 3 You can continue to see the variation of the pattern.

Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S8501 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S8502). Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each variation display data table corresponding to each variation pattern, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the variation display data table set by the processing of S8501 is turned on, and other variation The data table discrimination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to off (S8503). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table determination flag set by the process of S8503, it is possible to easily determine which variation pattern the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. can judge.

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S8501, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S8504), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S8505). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S8506), the variation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this variation pattern command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S8505, the variable display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S8501 , extracts the drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, and specifies the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81. At the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e The transfer data information specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set to 1, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is stored in advance from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. image storage area 236a.

Also, in the display setting process, the time counter 233h to which the time data is set by the process of S8504 is used to measure the time of the variable presentation specified in the variable display data table, and when the variable presentation in the variable display data table ends. When it is determined, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop pattern corresponding to the stop type command for display from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

Now, return to the description of FIG. 463 . In the processing of S8404, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S8404: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command in the unprocessed commands (S8406). If there is a stop type command (S8406: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (S8407), and the process returns to S8401.

Details of the stop type command process (S8407) will now be described with reference to FIG. 464(b). FIG. 464(b) is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the sound lamp control device 114 .

In the stop class command processing, first, the stop class table corresponding to the stop class information indicated by the stop class command for display is determined (S8601), and the stop class table and V interrupt processing (see FIG. 462(b)). is compared with the value of the stop type counter which is updated each time is executed, and finally the stop symbol after the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set (S8602).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S8602 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the other stop symbols is turned on. (S8603). After that, the processing returns to S8401 in FIG.

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has passed since the variation based on the data table is started. , offset information (design offset information) from the stop design set by the processing of S8602. In the above-described task processing (S8304), after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variation, the stop design set by the processing of S8602 is specified from the stop design determination flag set by S8603, and the specified stop By adding the design offset information acquired by the display setting process to the design, the third design to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address where the image data corresponding to the specified third pattern is stored is specified. Image data corresponding to the third design is stored in the third design area 235d of the resident video RAM 235, as described above.

Returning to FIG. 463, the description is continued. If it is determined in the process of S8406 that there is no display stop type command (S8406: No), then it is determined whether there is a display interruption command among the unprocessed commands (S8408). If it is determined that the display suspend command has been received (S8408: Yes), suspend command processing is executed (S8409). Details of the suspend command process (S8409) will be described with reference to FIG.

Here, with reference to FIG. 465, the suspension command processing (S8409) will be described. FIG. 465 is a flow chart showing this interruption command process (S8409).

In the suspension command process (FIG. 465, S8409), first, it is determined whether or not the received command is a command indicating the start of suspension (S8701). In the process of S8701, if it is determined that the received command is a command indicating the start of suspension (S8701: Yes), the data indicating the type of the current display data table, the value of the pointer, and the value of the timer counter are stored as suspension data. Store in the storage area 233m (S8702), and set the interrupt repeated hit effect display data table in the display data table buffer 233d (S8703). Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the interrupt continuous hitting effect display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S8704), and the time data is set in the clock counter 233h based on the interrupt continuous hitting effect display data table (S8705). , and the pointer 233f are initialized (S8706), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S8701, if it is determined that the received command is not the command indicating the start of interruption (that is, the command indicating the end of interruption) (S8701: No), the command is stored in the interruption data storage area 233m. The type of the display data table, the value of the pointer 233f, and the value of the clock counter 233h are specified based on the data stored in the display data table (S8707). (S8708), and the process ends.

By executing this interruption command process, the progress of the display effect paused (suspended) at the start of the interrupt continuous hit effect is held in the interrupt data storage area 233m, and at the end of the interrupt continuous effect effect, the interrupt data storage area is stored. The display mode can be resumed from the display mode at the time of interruption held at 233m.

Returning to FIG. 463, the description continues. In the processing of S8408, if it is determined that there is no display interruption command (S8408: No), it is determined whether or not there is a display opening command among the unprocessed commands (S8410), and the display opening command is determined. If there is a command (S8410: Yes), the opening command process is executed (S8411), and the process returns to S8401.

Details of the opening command process (S8411) will now be described with reference to FIG. 466(a). FIG. 466(a) is a flowchart showing opening command processing. This opening command process is for executing a process corresponding to the display opening command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the opening command process, first, the opening display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S8801). Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in the process of S8801 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S8802).

Then, based on the opening display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S8801, time data representing the performance time is set in the timer counter 233h (S8803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S8804). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S8805), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this opening command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S8804, from the opening display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S8801, At the same time as extracting the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and specifying the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81, the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored by the processing of S8802. From the set transfer data table, the transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted. The image controller 237 is controlled so that the image is transferred to the image storage area 236a.

Returning to FIG. 463, the description is continued. In the process of S8410, if it is determined that there is no display opening command (S8410: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command in the unprocessed commands (S8412), and the If there is a round number command for use (S8412: Yes), the round number command process is executed (S8413), and the process returns to S8401.

Here, with reference to FIG. 466(b), the details of the round number command process (S8413) will be described. FIG. 466(b) is a flowchart showing round number command processing. The number-of-rounds command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the number-of-rounds command for display received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the round number command processing, first, the round number display data table corresponding to the number of rounds indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data. It is set in the table buffer 233d (S8901). Next, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents are cleared (S8902).

Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S8901, time data representing the performance time is set in the clock counter 233h (S8903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S8904). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S8905), the round number command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Now, return to the description of FIG. 463 . In the processing of S8412, if it is determined that there is no command for the number of rounds for display (S8412: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an ending command for display among the unprocessed commands (S8414). If there is an ending command (S8414: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S8415), and the process returns to S8401.

Details of the ending command process (S8415) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 467 is a flowchart showing ending command processing. This ending command process is to execute the process corresponding to the display ending command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the ending command process, first, the ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the ending command for display is determined, the determined ending display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed. It is set in the buffer 233d (S9001). Next, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents are cleared (S9002).

Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S9001, time data representing the performance time is set in the clock counter 233h (S9003), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S9004). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to off (S9005), the ending command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Now, return to the description of FIG. 463 . In the processing of S8414, if it is determined that there is no display ending command (S8414: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a back image change command among the unprocessed commands (S8416), and the back image is displayed. If there is a change command (S8416: Yes), the back image change command process is executed (S8417), and the process returns to S8401.

Here, with reference to FIG. 468(a), the details of the back image change command process (S8417) will be described. FIG. 468(a) is a flowchart showing back image change command processing. The back image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the back image change command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the back image change command processing, first, the back image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting processing (S9603) of the change in the back image accompanying the reception of the back image change command in the ON state is set to ON (S9101). . Then, among the back image determination flags provided for each back image type), the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is turned on, and the back image determination flag corresponding to the other back image type is turned on. The image determination flag is set to OFF (S9102), the back image change command processing is terminated, and the command determination processing is returned to.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag set by the process of S9101 is turned on, the back image type after change is specified from the back image discrimination flag set by the process of S9102. . Then, when the identified back image type is back B or C, part of the image data corresponding to those back images is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, as described above. Therefore, a transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the rear image in a predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. FIG.

Further, in the task processing, if it is specified to display one of a plurality of back surface types according to the back surface type of the back surface image specified in the display data table, the back image discrimination flag set by the processing in S9102 is used. , specifying the back image type to be displayed at that time, further specifying the range of the back image to be displayed according to the passage of time, and the RAM type in which the image data corresponding to the range of the back image is stored. (Resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of that RAM are specified.

Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 for 20 milliseconds or less, two or more background image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, so the command determination process is executed. In this case, there should be no cases where two or more background image change commands are stored in the command buffer area. It could be interpreted as a command. In the process of S9102, if it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the previously received back image command is turned on. Alternatively, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, any one back image change command may be extracted and the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the back image does not directly affect the game value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set it according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

Now, return to the description of FIG. 463 . In the process of S8416, if it is determined that there is no back image change command (S8416: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S8418). Otherwise (S8418: Yes), the error command process is executed (S8419), and the process returns to S8401.

Details of the error command processing (S8419) will now be described with reference to FIG. 468(b). FIG. 468(b) is a flowchart showing error command processing. In this error command processing, processing corresponding to the error command received from the sound lamp control device 113 is executed.

In the error command process, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S9201). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to off (S9202). End the processing and return to the command determination processing.

In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S9201, the type of error that has occurred is determined from the error determination flag set by the process of S9202, and the error type is handled. A process is executed to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display a warning image to be displayed.

Note that if it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in the process of S9202, the error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to ON. As a result, the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player and the people involved in the hall can correctly grasp the occurrence of the error.

Now, return to the description of FIG. 463 . If it is determined in the process of S8418 that there is no error command (S8418: No), then the process corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S8420), and the process returns to S8401.

In the process of S8401, which is executed again after each command has been processed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S8401: Yes ), and the processing of S8402 to S8420 is executed again. Then, the processing of S8401 to S8420 is repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area. finish.

The simple command determination process (S8308) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 462(b)) is also performed in the same manner as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, commands necessary for displaying the power-on image shown in FIG. Extract only the type command, and execute the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 464 (a)) and the stop type command process (see FIG. 464 (b)), which are the processes corresponding to each command, and other A command is discarded without executing the process corresponding to the command.

Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 464(a)) executed in this case, in the processing of S8501, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on varying image that are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main moving image area 235a and the power-on varying moving image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S8502, the process of writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e and clearing the contents thereof is performed.

Next, details of the display setting process (S8303), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 469 is a flow chart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 469, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S9301). It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination processing to be executed first, the processing of S9302 to S9304 is skipped, and the processing proceeds to S9305. On the other hand, if the new flag is ON (S9301: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the previously executed command determination processing, and after setting the new command flag to OFF (S9302), S9303-S9304 , the process corresponding to the new command is executed.

In the processing of S9303, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is ON (S9303). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S9303: Yes), warning image setting processing is executed (S9304).

Details of the warning image setting process will now be described with reference to FIG. 470(a). FIG. 470(a) is a flowchart showing warning image setting processing. This process is a process for developing image data for displaying a warning image corresponding to an error that has occurred on the third pattern display device 81. First, the error determination flag is referred to, and all error determination flags set to ON are displayed. Warning image data for displaying an error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third pattern display device 81 is developed (S9401).

In task processing, based on this expanded warning image data, the types of sprites (display objects) that make up the warning image are identified, and for each sprite, the display coordinate position, magnification ratio, and rotation angle are determined. Determine the various parameters required.

Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S9401, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S9402), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Now, return to the description of FIG. 469 . After the warning image setting process (S9304), or when it is determined in the process of S9303 that the error occurrence flag is not ON, that is, it is OFF (S9303: No), the process proceeds to S9305.

In S9305, pointer update processing is executed (S9305). Here, the details of the pointer update processing will be described with reference to FIG. 470(b). FIG. 470(b) is a flowchart showing pointer update processing. This pointer updating process acquires the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the respective buffers of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is the process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the address to which it should be applied.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S9501). That is, the pointer 233f is basically updated so that it is incremented by 1 each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is specified after the address "0001H". When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with the storage in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the processing of S9501, it is then checked whether the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is End information. is determined (S9502). As a result, if it is End information (S9502: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the substance data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S9503). The time data corresponding to the performance time of the display data table for demonstration set in the table buffer 233d is set in the clock counter 233h (S9504), the pointer 233f is initialized by setting it to 1 (S9505), and this processing ends. and return to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed sequentially from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demonstration effects.

On the other hand, in the process of S9503, if it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demonstration display data table (S9503: No), the value of the pointer 233f is decremented by 1 ( S9506), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demonstration display data table, for example, a variable display data table, is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which the End information is described is displayed. is always expanded, the third pattern display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S9502, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not the End information (S9502: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, return to FIG. 469 to continue the description. After the pointer update process, the drawing contents of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process are acquired from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S9306). In the task processing, based on the drawing contents developed in the processing of S9306 together with the previously developed warning image, etc., the types of sprites (display objects) that make up the image are specified, and the display coordinates are determined for each sprite. Determine various parameters required for drawing such as position, magnification, and rotation angle.

Next, the value of the clock counter 233h is decremented by 1 (S9307), and it is determined whether or not the value of the clock counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S9308). Then, if the value of the clock counter 233h is 1 or more (S9308: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if the value of the clock counter 233h is 0 or less (S9308: Yes), it means that the effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is time to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is checked whether the fixed display flag is on. (S9309).

As a result, if the confirmed display flag is off (S9309: No), the confirmed display effect has not yet been performed, and it is time to perform the confirmed display effect. The transfer data table buffer 233e is set (S9310), and then the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S9311). Then, the time data corresponding to the performance time of the fixed display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S9312), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S9313). Then, after setting the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state to ON (S9314), the content of the stop symbol discrimination flag is copied as it is to the previous stop symbol discrimination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S9315), returning to V interrupt processing.

Thus, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, etc., the fixed display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. You can set the drawing contents like this. In addition, only by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to the fixed display data table, the effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can be easily changed to the fixed display effect. In addition, compared to the conventional case of changing the display contents by activating another program, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore the MPU 231 is not overloaded. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various modes of effect images can be displayed on the third pattern display 81. - 特許庁

Incidentally, the last stop symbol determination flag set by the processing of S9315 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variable effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before, and in the variable display data table, the variation based on the data table Until a predetermined time elapses after the start, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variable effect performed one before is described. In the task processing (S8304), until a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variation, from the last stop design determination flag set by S9315, the stop design of the fluctuation production performed one before is specified, and the The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, in the process of S9309, if the fixed display flag is ON instead of OFF (S9309: Yes), it is determined whether or not the demonstration display flag is ON (S9316). If the demonstration display flag is off (S9316: No), it means that the value of the clock counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the fixed display effect, so the demonstration display data table is changed to the display data table. The transfer data table buffer 233d is set in the buffer 233d (S9317), and then the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S9318). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S9319). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S9320), the demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S9321), the processing ends, and the processing returns to the V interrupt processing.

In the process of S9316, if the demonstration display flag is ON (S9316: Yes), it means that the demonstration effect is performed after the fixed display effect is completed, and the demonstration effect is completed, so the display setting process is terminated as it is. and return to V interrupt processing. In this case, various settings are made so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer updating process executed in the next V interrupt process. The demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

The simple display setting process (S8309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 462(b)) also performs the same process as the display setting process. However, in the simple display setting process, one of the power-on variable images corresponding to the stop pattern set based on the stop type command for display is displayed for a predetermined time after the effect time of the power-on variable image ends. 419(b) and (c)) is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 471 and 472, the details of the transfer setting process (S8305), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 471(a) is a flow chart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S9601). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S9601: Yes), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting is made. The process is executed (S9602), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 471(b).

On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not turned on as a result of the processing of S9601, that is, if it is turned off (S9601: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video data. It has been transferred to the RAM 235 . In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S9603), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 . Details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S9602), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S8305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 471(b). FIG. 471(b) is a flow chart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S9602).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not a transfer instruction for untransferred image data has been issued to the image controller 237 (S9701). ), and further determines whether or not the image data transfer processing performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has ended (S9702). In the process of S9702, after instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image data, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined by the process of S9702 that the transfer process has not ended (S9702: No), the resident image transfer setting process ends because the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process. do. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S9702: Yes), the process proceeds to S9703. Also, as a result of the process of S9701, even if the transfer instruction for the image data that has not been transferred has not been transmitted to the image controller 237 (S9701: No), the process proceeds to S9703.

In the process of S9703, it is determined whether or not all resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 have been transferred (S9703). A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so as to transfer the resident image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S9704), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated.

As a result, the transfer data information about the untransferred resident target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer data described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236 . The transfer data information includes the head address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident target image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (where the data is transferred). The first address of the area provided in the resident video RAM 235 where the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then stores it in the buffer RAM 237a while the resident video RAM 236 is not in use. , it is transferred to the specified address of the resident video RAM 236 . Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231 .

As a result of the process of S9703, if all the resident target image data have been transferred (S9703: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S9705), and the resident image transfer setting process ends. As a result, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 462(b)), the command Since determination processing (see FIGS. 463 to 282) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 469 to 470 (a) and (b)) are executed, normal image drawing is set. A normal image is displayed on the 3-symbol display device 81 . Further, subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 472) (see S9601: No in FIG. 471(a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 transfers all resident images to be resident in the resident video RAM 235, excluding the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Then, the MPU 231 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 to be held without overwriting while the power is turned on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process will be resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the image controller 237 , the image drawing process can be performed. As a result, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a whose read speed is slow when drawing the image. Therefore, the time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images such as rear images, third designs, character designs, and error messages, as well as main controller 110, sound lamp controller 113, and display controller 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is immediately resident after the display is determined by such as, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND type flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at any timing can be prevented. , high responsiveness can be maintained until the third pattern display device 81 displays some kind of image.

Next, with reference to FIG. 472, the normal image transfer setting process (S9603), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S8305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 472 is a flow chart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S9603).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S9305) of the previously executed display setting process (S8303) is used. Information described in the indicated address is acquired (S9801). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S9802). , and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S9803), furthermore, a transfer start flag, which is provided in the work RAM 233 and indicates that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state, is set to ON (S9804), and the process proceeds to S9805.

Also, in the processing of S9802, if the acquired information is not the transfer data information but Null data (S9802: No), the processing of S9803 and S9804 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S9805. In the processing of S9805, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (S9805), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S9805: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has ended (S9806).

In the process of S9806, after setting an image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined by the process of S9806 that the transfer process has not ended (S9806: No), the image transfer process continues in the image controller 237, so this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S9806: Yes), the process proceeds to S9807. Also, as a result of the process of S9805, even if the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer process is completed (S9805: No), the process proceeds to S9807.

In the processing of S9807, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S9807). is turned off (S9808), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the processing of S9803 is set as the image data to be transferred, and then the processing proceeds to S9813. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S9807: No), then it is determined whether or not the back image change flag is on (S9809). Then, if the back image change flag is not on but off (S9809: No), there is no image data to start transferring, so the normal image transfer setting process ends.

On the other hand, if the back image change flag is on (S9809: Yes), it means that the back image has been changed. Of the discrimination flags, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is specified, and the image data is set as the image data to be transferred (S9811). Furthermore, the head address (storage source head address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is stored, and the transfer destination (usually (S9812), and the process proceeds to S9813.

When the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is for back A, all the corresponding image data are resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, so the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 Data does not exist. Therefore, in the processing of S9812, if the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is for the back A, the normal image transfer processing ends.

In the process of S9813, it is determined whether or not the image data to be transferred has already been stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S9813). The determination in the process of S9813 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is read from the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the sprite to be transferred is normal video If it is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236 and the storage state is "OFF", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236. FIG.

As a result of the process of S9813, if the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S9813: Yes), there is no need to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , the normal image transfer setting process ends. As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240. can be planned.

On the other hand, if the image data to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the process of S9813 (S9813: No), a transfer instruction for the image data to be transferred is set (S9814). As a result, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 receives the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 . The transfer data information includes the head address and the end address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the image to be transferred, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (here, the transfer destination). The start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is to be stored. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, and specifies the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). forward to the specified address. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231 .

After the processing of S9814, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated (S9815), and this normal transfer setting processing is terminated. The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated by, as described above, setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the image data to be transferred to "ON", and by substituting the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites that are to be stored in the area to "off".

By executing the normal image transfer processing in this way, the processing corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the previously executed command determination processing. When the displayed stop type information is determined to be a jackpot stop type, the image data used in the opening effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Further, when the back image is changed based on the reception of the back image change command in the previously executed command determination processing, the image data used for the back image is stored in the back image of the resident video RAM 235 . Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

In addition, in this embodiment, the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. , a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. By executing the normal image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 sends data to the image controller 237 in accordance with the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the image data to be transferred is set, the sprite image data used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. can be done.

Here, in the transfer data table, the image data to be transferred is stored in the image storage area 236a so that the image data corresponding to the given sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the given sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table, thereby obtaining the predetermined address according to the display data table. When the sprite is drawn, the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 required for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The transfer data table defines transfer data information so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load on transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 473, details of the drawing process (S8306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 473 is a flow chart showing this rendering process.

In the drawing process, the types of various sprites that make up one frame determined in task processing (S8304) and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information 423 is generated (S9901) from the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S8305). That is, in the processing of S9901, from the types of various sprites forming one frame determined in the task processing (S8304), for each sprite, the storage RAM type and address where the sprite image data is stored are specified. Then, parameters necessary for the sprite determined by task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, each sprite is rearranged in order from the sprite that should be placed on the backmost side to the sprite that should be placed on the front side in the image for one frame. As drawing information (detailed information), a drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type and address in which sprite image data is stored and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. Further, when a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S8305), the top address (storage source top address) of the character ROM 234 where the transfer target image data is stored as the transfer data information is displayed at the end of the drawing list. , the final address (storage source final address), and the top address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 , according to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S9902). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j includes information instructing to expand the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information. includes information instructing to develop the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws the image in order from the sprite described at the head of the drawing list, and develops it by overwriting in the frame buffer indicated by the drawing object buffer information. As a result, in the one-frame image generated by the drawing list, the first-drawn sprite can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the last-drawn sprite can be arranged on the frontmost side.

When transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the transfer data information is used to determine the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. ), and the head address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236), and the image data stored from the head address of the storage source to the end address of the storage source are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a are sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236, when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state. The image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 after that, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer designated by the drawing object buffer information, and sends the image information along with the drive signal to the third pattern display device 81. Send to As a result, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . In addition, while developing the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image developed from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third pattern display 81, and the drawing process and the display process can be processed simultaneously in parallel. can be done.

In the rendering process, after the process of S9902, the rendering target buffer flag 233j is updated (S9903). Then, the drawing process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The rendering target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of one frame of image are completed. This is performed each time the drawing process of the load process (see FIG. 462(b)) is performed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. is executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing processing for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information for the first half is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By specifying these alternately, it is possible to perform display processing of an image for one frame continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing processing for an image for one frame is being performed.

<Regarding control processing of the audio output device in the first control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 in the first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 474 to 478. FIG. First, the main processing executed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 will be described with reference to FIG. 474(a). FIG. 474(a) is a flow chart showing the contents of this main process.

When the main processing of the audio output device 226 is executed, first, command determination processing for performing control according to various commands received from the audio lamp control device 113 is executed (20001). Details of this command determination process (S20001) will be described later with reference to FIG. After the processing of S20001, an audio setting process for reproducing audio data (audio file) corresponding to the effect is executed (S20001). Details of this audio setting process (S20001) will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the processing of S20001 is completed, it is determined whether or not the work RAM 303 stores power failure occurrence information (S20003). If power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of S20003 (S20003: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S20005), and the power-off processing is executed (S20006). After the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag is turned off (S20007), and then the processing is looped infinitely.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S20003 (S20003: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 303 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 303 (S20004), and the RAM 303 is destroyed. If not (S20004: No), the process returns to S20001, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 303 is destroyed (S20004: Yes), the process is looped infinitely to stop execution of subsequent processes.

Next, command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 will be described with reference to FIG. 474(b). FIG. 474(b) is a flow chart showing the contents of this command interrupt processing. This command interrupt process (see FIG. 474(b)) is a process executed each time a command is received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the RAM 303 (S20101), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt processing are read out by command determination processing, which will be described later, and processing corresponding to the commands is performed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 475, the command determination process (S20001), which is one process in the main process (see FIG. 474(a)) executed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226, will be described. FIG. 475 is a flow chart showing the contents of this command determination process (S20001).

In the command determination process (S20001), first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S20201). If there is no unprocessed new command (S20201: No), the command determination process ends. and return to main processing. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S20201: Yes), the new command flag indicating that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S20202). For all commands of processing, the types of the commands are analyzed (S20203).

Then, it is first determined whether or not there is an audio variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S20204). This audio variation pattern command is used when outputting the display variation pattern command (see S4205 in FIG. 455) in the variation display setting process of the audio lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 455). It is set to notify the type of sound to be reproduced and the output timing corresponding to the mode.

In the process of S20204, if it is determined that there is a variation pattern command for voice among the unprocessed commands (S20204: Yes), music and sound effects used during execution of the notified variation pattern command are specified (S20205 ), set the specified song, the output channel and the output timing of the sound effect (S20206), and return to the processing of S20201.

On the other hand, in the process of S20204, if it is determined that there is no voice variation pattern command (S20204: No), then it is determined whether or not the unprocessed command includes a voice repeated command ( S20207), if an audio repeated hit command is included (S20207: Yes), it means that the player has performed a repeated hit operation. is executed (S20208), and the process returns to S20201. The details of this repeated hitting sound command process (S20208) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the processing of S20207, if it is determined that the unprocessed command does not include the repeated sound command for voice (S20207: No), then it is determined whether or not the interruption command for voice is included. (S20209), and if it is determined that the unprocessed command includes a repeated sound command for voice (S20209: Yes), the interruption command processing for setting the interruption and restart of the BGM being played is executed. Execute (S20210) and return to the process of S20201. Details of this suspend command processing will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, in the process of S20209, if there is no voice interruption command among the unprocessed commands (S20209: No), the process corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S20211), and the process returns to S20201.

Next, with reference to FIG. 476, details of the repeated hitting sound command process (S20208) will be described. FIG. 476 is a flow chart showing repeated hit sound command processing (S20208). This repeated hitting sound command processing (S20208) is executed in the command determination processing (FIG. 475) in the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226, and as described above, is processing for setting the reproduction (output) of the repeated hitting sound.

In this repeated hitting sound command process (S20208), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the repeated hitting sound output flag 303a is set to "00H" (S20301). In the process of S20301, if it is determined that the value of the repeated hitting sound output flag 303a is set to "00H" (S20301: Yes), a repeated hitting sound command for the first repeated hitting operation in the interrupt repeated hitting effect (see FIG. 399) is issued. Since it means that it has been received, the process proceeds to S20305 in order to reproduce the first repeated hitting sound.

On the other hand, if it is determined that "00H" is not set to the value of the repeated hitting sound output flag 303a (S20301: No), then it is determined whether "01H" is set to the value of the repeated hitting sound output flag 303a. is determined (S20302). In the process of S20302, if it is determined that the value of the repeated hitting sound output flag 303a is not set to "01H" (that is, the value of the repeated hitting sound output flag 303a is "02H") (S20302: No), 1 This means that the repeated hitting sound output last time in the interrupt repeated hitting effect is the second repeated hitting sound. Therefore, in this case also, the process proceeds to S20305 in order to reproduce the first repeated hitting sound.

In the process of S20305, CN2 of the voice synthesizing unit 306 (see FIG. 424) is set to reproduce the audio file corresponding to the first repeated hitting sound (S20305), and the repeated hitting sound output flag 303a is set to correspond to the first repeated hitting sound. It is updated (set) to "01H" (S20306), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S20302 that the value of the repeated hitting sound output flag 303a is set to "01H" (that is, the repeated hitting sound output last time is the first repeated hitting sound) (S20302: Yes). , CN3 of the voice synthesizing unit 306 (see FIG. 424) is set to play back the sound file corresponding to the second repeated hitting sound (S20303), and the repeated hitting sound output flag 303a is set to "02H" corresponding to the second repeated hitting sound. is updated (set) to (S20304), and the process ends.

By executing this repeated hitting sound command processing, it is possible to alternately reproduce two types of audio data on two channels each time a repeated hitting operation is executed, so that it is possible to diversify the audio mode. . Also, in the case of a configuration in which the first repeated sound and the second repeated sound are simply played alternately on a single channel (that is, control is performed to stop the output of one sound during reproduction and output the other sound). ), it is possible to output one sound while maintaining the output state of the other sound (the first repeated sound and the second repeated sound are output in duplicate). Therefore, it is possible to make the voice mode more lively during execution of repeated hits. More specifically, in a configuration in which the first repeated hit sound and the second repeated hit sound are alternately reproduced in a single channel, when a player who has a short interval between repeated hits performs the repeated hit operation, the leading portion of each sound data This results in a monotonous voice mode in which only the voices are alternately repeated. On the other hand, if a plurality of audio data are sequentially reproduced on a plurality of channels, the output of one audio data reproduced on one channel is not interrupted, and other audio data is reproduced on other channels. can be played. That is, it is possible to synthesize and output a sound based on one sound data and a sound based on another sound data. Therefore, since it is possible to easily output sounds other than the beginning part of each sound, it is possible to further diversify the sound modes. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the first control example, two types of sound data (sounds of repeated hits) are alternately output to two channels each time a repeated hit operation is detected, but this is not restrictive. A configuration may be adopted in which three or more types of audio data are alternately reproduced in order on CN1 and CN2. This makes it possible to further diversify voice modes. In this case, the number of channels for reproducing the audio data is not limited to two, and the audio data may be sequentially reproduced for three or more channels. By configuring in this way, after one audio data is reproduced for one channel, until the next audio data is reproduced for the same channel (the audio data being reproduced is terminated). can be made longer, it is possible to further diversify the voice modes. Furthermore, the type of the audio data to be output may be changed according to the interval of successive hits. Specifically, for example, when a player is playing a game with a relatively short interval between consecutive hits (for example, 0.5 seconds or less), three types of sound modes are reproduced in order on three channels. On the other hand, when a player is playing a game with a relatively long interval between consecutive hits (for example, an interval longer than 0.5 seconds), two types of audio data are sent to two channels in order. It may be configured to reproduce (alternately). By configuring in this way, it is possible to vary the output mode of the sound according to the interval of successive hits, so that it is possible to realize the playability of adjusting the interval of repeated hits. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.

In the first control example, it is configured to output one of the repeated hitting sounds in conjunction with the repeated hitting operation. . More specifically, for example, if the last repeated hitting sound output during the effective period of the repeated hitting operation is the first repeated hitting sound, the second repeated hitting sound may be output after the end of the repeated hitting sound. With this configuration, although the first repeated hitting sound and the second repeated hitting sound were output as a set in accordance with the repeated hitting operation, the last output sound would be the first repeated hitting sound. (That is, the paired second repeated hitting sound is not output), and it is possible to prevent the sound mode from becoming incomplete. Therefore, the voice mode can be set more preferably. In this case, if the last repeated hitting sound is the first repeated hitting sound, the control to output the second repeated hitting sound after the end is changed to a variation display ( For example, it may be configured to be set only during the execution of the jackpot variation). By constructing in this way, for a player who desires to know whether or not it is a predetermined variation type, the last repeated hitting sound to be output during the interruption repeated hitting effect is dared to be the first repeated hitting sound. It is possible to realize the playability. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the first control example, the first repeated hit sound and the second repeated hit sound are alternately output regardless of the interval between repeated hits by the player, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured such that the first repeated hitting sound is always output when the repeated hitting operation is detected while no sound is being reproduced. That is, if the interval between repeated hits is too long and the next repeated hit operation is executed after the reproduction of the first repeated hit sound is completed, only the first repeated hit sound will continue to be output. may be configured. By constructing in this way, a player who desires to diversify the voice modes can be made to perform the continuous hitting operation at a faster pace, so that the player's willingness to participate in the interruption continuous hitting performance can be improved. be able to.

Next, with reference to FIG. 477, the suspension command process (S20210) will be described. FIG. 477 is a flow chart showing this interruption command process (S20210). The interruption command process (S20210) is executed during the command determination process (FIG. 475) in the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226, and is a process for setting interruption and resumption of the BGM being reproduced.

In the suspension command process (S20210), first, it is determined whether or not the received command is a command indicating the start of suspension (S20401). If it is determined that the received command indicates the start of interruption (S20401: Yes), data indicating the playback position of the variation BGM being played is stored in the playback position storage area 303b (S20402). Playback of BGM for interrupt continuous hit effect is set (S20403), and then this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S20401, if it is determined that the received command is not the command indicating the start of interruption (that is, the command indicating the end of interruption) (S20401: No), the BGM for the interrupt repeated hit effect is played. Playback is terminated (S20404), data in the playback position storage area 303b is read (S20405), playback of the variation BGM from the read playback position is resumed in CN1 (S20406), and then this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 478, the details of the audio setting process (S20002) will be described. FIG. 478 is a flow chart showing the audio setting process (S20002). This audio setting process (S20002) is executed in the main process (FIG. 474) in the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226. FIG.

In this audio setting process (S20002), first, it is determined whether or not it is time to output music (S20501). If it is determined that the present time is not the output timing of the music (S20501: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S20501, if it is determined that the current time is the output timing of the music (S20501: Yes), the audio file corresponding to the current music is read (S20502), and the read audio file is played on the corresponding channel. (S20503), the music output flag 303c is set to ON (S20504), and this process is terminated.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example, when the jackpot is won, regardless of the jackpot type, after the jackpot ends, the special symbol lottery is executed 100 times. The configuration was such that the state continued. That is, the variable probability jackpot and the normal jackpot are configured so that the operation (operation mode of the electric accessory 640a) until the lottery of special symbols is executed 100 times after the jackpot ends is common. Only when the game state is the probability variable state at the time when the lottery of the special symbols is completed 100 times after the end of the jackpot, the time saving state of the normal symbols is continued after the 100th time. That is, when the time-saving state is set as the game state after the end of the big hit, and the variable probability state is set as the game state after the end of the big hit, and the state is shifted to the low probability state of the special symbol within 100 times. In this case, at the timing when the lottery for the 100th special symbol is executed, the time-saving state of the normal symbol is ended, and the state is shifted to the normal state. By configuring in this way, if a relatively disadvantageous time-saving state is set after the end of the jackpot, or if the variable probability state is set, it falls to a low probability state within 100 times. Also, until the special symbol lottery is executed 100 times, it becomes difficult for the player to distinguish between the time saving state and the variable probability state, so the special symbol lottery is executed at least 100 times. Until then, the player can continue to have an expectation that the game state is a variable probability state.

In addition, in the first control example, if the time-saving state of the normal pattern at the time of winning the jackpot, the game state is set to the normal state (time-saving state of the normal pattern) at the start of the variable display for showing the big win. end). By configuring in this way, the case where the time saving state of the normal pattern ends within 100 times after the end of the big win can be limited to the case where the variation pattern of the big win is started, so after the end of the big win, 100 Behavior that is likely to end the time saving state of normal symbols during the execution of the variable display effect within the times (for example, if the variable time of normal symbols exceeds 3 seconds, or if the lottery of normal symbols is lost or when a pattern of 0.2 seconds x 1 time is executed as the opening pattern of the electric accessory 640a), the player can be pleased. Therefore, after the end of the big win, until the special symbol lottery is executed 100 times, the game can be played while paying attention to the normal symbol lottery result, the operation mode of the electric accessory 640a, and the like.

In addition, in the first control example, the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 allows the player to predict the possibility of the variable probability state to some extent. More specifically, during the game state in which the time-saving state of the normal pattern is set, the cave search mode with a relatively low expectation of the probability change state, the temple search mode with a relatively high expectation of the probability change state, and the probability change state It is confirmed that there is a lottery result corresponding to the fall in the hold (at least the variable state continues until the hold is digested). Either one is configured to be set at the time of executing the variable display effect based on the lottery result of the special symbol. By constructing in this way, while the time-saving state of normal symbols is set, the player can be given the pleasure of predicting the current game state from the back mode, so that the player's interest in the game can be enhanced. can be improved. In addition, by setting the super temple search mode, it is confirmed that the game state is a variable state. You can make them feel joy that their predictions were correct. On the other hand, if the state of the special symbol is predicted to be low probability, but the state is shifted to the super temple mode, the player will be delighted that the game state is set to be more advantageous than expected. can let Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved. Furthermore, by setting the super temple mode, it is confirmed that the lottery result corresponding to the fall is not included in the hold (at least the lottery for the number of pending balls can be executed with a jackpot probability in a variable state. possible), the game can be played with a stronger expectation of a big win during the hold.

In addition, in the first control example, regardless of the game state, the variable display of a specific range that is executed before the end of the lottery of 100 special symbols that guarantees the time saving state of normal symbols ( That is, just before the lottery of 100 times of special symbols ends, over the 96th to 99th fluctuation display after the end of the big hit), the probability variation continuation suggestion production for informing whether the probability variation state continues or not It is configured to run. When starting this definite variable continuation suggestion production, the lottery results from the 96th to 99th times, which is the execution range of the definite variable continuation suggestion production, are read in advance, and whether the definite variable state continues until the 99th special symbol lottery. When the variable probability state continues until the 99th special symbol lottery, the selection rate of the performance scenario in which the highly expected attack pattern is likely to occur is increased. On the other hand, if the time-saving state has fallen before the 99th special symbol lottery is executed (or the time-saving state was after the end of the previous jackpot), a low-expectation attack pattern occurs. It is configured to increase the selection rate of production scenarios that are easy to play. In this way, by setting the effect mode based on the game state at the end of the effect, it is possible to more accurately notify the game state after the end of the effect. Here, if it is configured to execute the variable probability continuation suggestion effect only based on the game state at the start of the effect, it falls to a low probability state during the execution of the variable probability continuation suggestion effect, and the continuation of the variable probability state is notified. In spite of this, there is a risk that the time saving state will be terminated with the start of the 100th special symbol lottery. In this case, there is a possibility that the content of the performance and the actual action contradict each other, causing the player to distrust the pachinko machine 10 and the hall. In addition, as a countermeasure, there is a method of configuring the probability variable continuation suggestive production by a production that is completed with one fluctuation, but in this method, it is difficult to ensure a sufficient production period, so there are various production modes. becomes difficult to convert. On the other hand, in the first control example, it is configured to execute the probability variable continuation suggestion effect over the last four fluctuation displays that guarantee the time saving state of the normal symbol, and the notification content of the probability variable continuation suggestion effect is changed. , It is determined based on the game state at the time when the last special symbol lottery in the execution range of the variable probability continuous effect is executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to diversify the mode of presentation while making it possible to accurately notify the game state at the end of the presentation. In addition, when the probability is variable at the start of the production, and the ball is not held until the end of the production, the production is selected so that an attack pattern with a relatively high degree of expectation is likely to occur. ing. This is because the probability of a lottery result corresponding to the fall is lower than the probability of a big hit, and it is extremely rare to fall into a low probability state of special symbols during the production period (relatively high probability of a variable state) This is because the performance ends immediately).

In addition, in the first control example, as a kind of entertainment effect, it is possible to execute a press stop effect in which a stop operation of each symbol row is executed according to the operation timing of the PUSH button 10317 of the player. This press stop effect is basically an effect suggesting that there is a possibility of developing into a chance charge effect. In this pressing stop effect, if it does not develop into a chance charge effect, each symbol row is stopped and displayed as a simple combination of failures according to the timing of pressing by the player, while if it develops into a chance charge effect, a chance The charging pattern is (pseudo) stop-displayed, and the development to the chance charge effect is notified. In this way, by changing the stop timing of each symbol row according to the player's pressing timing, the timing of notifying whether or not the chance charge effect will develop can be set to the player's favorite timing. can be adjusted. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved. In addition, in the press stop effect which does not develop into the chance charge effect, at least the mode of the stop display of the central symbol row is changed according to the timing at which the stop operation is performed for all the symbol rows. More specifically, when the stop operation is completed a specified number of times (three times) within a predetermined period of time (one second) (that is, at a relatively early stage) after the start of the effective period of the stop operation, a comparative effect is obtained. While the stop display of the central pattern row is performed by the long chance charge fan effect, when the stop operation of the specified number of times is completed after the predetermined period (1 second) has passed, the central pattern row is immediately removed. An effect (that is, a relatively short effect) that is stopped and displayed with a symbol is executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the period after the stop display from becoming too long or conversely shortening depending on the completion timing of the stop operation by the player, and to prevent the period from becoming too short depending on the completion timing of the stop operation by the player. It is possible to show the transition of the performance mode up to the stop display of the missing pattern in a natural form. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with an effect mode that causes less discomfort. In addition, in the pressing stop effect in the first control example, separate button images and valid period gauges are displayed for each symbol row on the display screen. It is determined whether or not the operation of is valid. Then, according to the number of times the stop operation (pressing the PUSH button 10317) is executed in one operation valid period, the symbol row for which the stop display is set is varied (it is determined whether the stop operation has been executed for all symbol rows). ) configuration. As a result, it is possible to simplify the judgment as to whether or not the stop operation of each symbol row is valid, so that the processing load of the sound lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

Further, in the first control example, a chance charge effect can be executed as a type of entertainment effect. This chance charge production is the number of times (minimum guaranteed number of times) that a specific production mode (chance up production) is performed within a predetermined number of fluctuations (until all the balls held on hold at the start of the production are consumed). This is an effect in which the player is suggested (notified) in advance. The guaranteed number of chance-up effects notified in this chance-charge effect (the number of accumulated spirit gauge gauges) generates some kind of chance-up effect at each timing until the held balls are consumed at the start of the chance-charge effect. consumed for Here, the chance-up effect is a effect that increases the expectation of a big win. , and the like. It should be noted that the spirit gauge is always consumed until it reaches zero. That is, it is configured so as not to be discarded without being consumed. With this configuration, the player can easily grasp the remaining number of chance-up effects, so that the player can play the game looking forward to what kind of chance-up effect will occur next. . Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved. In addition, in the first control example, the gauge amount of the spirit gauge accumulated in the chance charge effect is mainly determined based on the number of held balls at the start of the chance charge effect. After completion of the chance charge effect, the pace at which the chance-up effect is executed (that is, the spirit gauge is consumed) is variable in consideration of the lottery result of each reserved ball. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce the processing load (the processing load when determining the number of gauges) at the start of the chance charge effect.

In addition, in the first control example, as one type of entertainment effect, it is configured to be able to execute interrupt repeated hit effect. This interrupting continuous hit effect is a display mode effect as if a different mode effect from the display effect that had been displayed until then suddenly interrupted during the normal variable display or the reach fluctuation. On the other hand, the PUSH button 10317 is composed of an effect mode of prompting to operate the PUSH button 10317 in a specific operation mode (continuous hit operation mode). In this interrupt continuous hit effect, the more the stage of the effect mode develops (the number of displayed monsters is reduced) according to the player's continuous hit operation, the higher the expectation of a big win. be. As a result, the player can be made to actively perform the continuous hitting operation, so that the player's willingness to participate in the interruption continuous hitting effect can be improved. This interrupt continuous hit effect is performed when it is determined that the additional time command is not a command indicating 0 seconds (is a command indicating 7 seconds) of the basic time command and the additional time command that constitute the variation pattern command. It is a production that may be executed. Here, the variable time is set by the sum of the basic time notified by the basic time command and the additional time notified by the additional time command. Then, when it is decided to execute the repeated interrupt effect, the repeated repeated effect is executed for the same length of time as the additional time notified by the additional time command, and the normal variable display effect (execution of the repeated repeated interrupt effect) is performed. Regarding the mode of presentation for a period other than the period), the configuration is such that the mode of presentation for a period of the same length as the basic time notified by the basic time command is set. By constructing in this way, even if the variable display performance in which the interrupt continuous hitting performance is set is executed, the performance mode corresponding to the basic time command can be reused, thereby reducing the memory capacity of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加can do.

In addition, in the interrupt continuous hit effect in the first control example, a plurality of types of audio data (audio data corresponding to the first repeated hit sound, audio data corresponding to the second repeated hit sound, and ), one audio data is reproduced. More specifically, when an odd-numbered repeated hit operation is detected during the effective period of the repeated hit operation in one interrupt repeated hit effect, the audio data corresponding to the first repeated hit sound is played back to CN2 in the voice synthesizing unit 306. On the other hand, when an even-numbered repeated tapping operation is detected, the voice data corresponding to the second repeated tapping sound is played back to CN3 in the voice synthesizing section 306 . In this way, each time a repeated hit operation is performed, one of a plurality of different sound data is output to one of a plurality of different channels (the first repeated hit sound and the second repeated hit sound are output to CN1 and CN2). output alternately), it is possible to diversify the voice modes during the continuous hitting operation. In other words, since it is possible to prevent the voice mode from becoming monotonous, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game during the repeated hitting valid period. Also, in the case of a configuration in which the first repeated sound and the second repeated sound are simply played alternately on a single channel (that is, control is performed to stop the output of one sound during reproduction and output the other sound). ), it is possible to output one sound while maintaining the output state of the other sound (the first repeated sound and the second repeated sound are output in duplicate). Therefore, it is possible to make the voice mode more lively during execution of repeated hits. More specifically, in a configuration in which the first repeated hit sound and the second repeated hit sound are alternately reproduced in a single channel, when a player who has a short interval between repeated hits performs the repeated hit operation, the leading portion of each sound data This results in a monotonous voice mode in which only the voices are alternately repeated. On the other hand, if a plurality of audio data are sequentially reproduced on a plurality of channels, the output of one audio data reproduced on one channel is not interrupted, and other audio data is reproduced on other channels. can be played. That is, it is possible to synthesize and output a sound based on one sound data and a sound based on another sound data. Therefore, since it is possible to easily output sounds other than the beginning part of each sound, it is possible to further diversify the sound modes. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in the interrupt continuous hit effect in the first control example, the later the timing of pressing (the remaining time of the effective period becomes shorter) in the effective period in which the continuous hitting operation is valid, the more the subtraction number of the monster increases (the more It is configured to make it easier to set the production mode at the stage of high expectation. As a result, even if the player presses the PUSH button 10317 at a fast pace, it is possible to prevent the number of monsters from being quickly defeated to the minimum number. That is, it is possible to prevent the decrease in the number of monsters based on the depression of the remaining 10 or the remaining 4, which are likely to be set in the case of a failure, from being lost, thereby spoiling the player's expectation for a big win. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved. Also, even when a player whose pressing pace is slow is playing a game, pressing in the second half of the continuous hitting effective period makes it easier to select a relatively large number of subjugations. can make it more likely. Therefore, even a player whose pressing pace is slow can be entertained with the continuous interrupt effect, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in the first control example, as a kind of entertainment effect, a plurality of reserved ball number symbols that are reserved are changed to a specific mode (display mode that looks like a rock) different from the normal reserved pattern mode. It is configured to be able to execute the pending batch change effect. In this pending collective change effect, after a plurality of pending ball number symbols are changed to a specific mode, the player performs a specific operation (pressing operation on the PUSH button 10317) to obtain at least one pending ball number symbol. is changed to a mode with a higher degree of expectation than the reserved symbol mode before being changed to the specific mode. By executing this pending batch change effect, it is confirmed that the degree of expectation indicated by at least one pending ball number symbol is increased, so that the player's sense of expectation for the big win can be improved. In addition, since it is not known until the PUSH button 10317 is pressed, which pattern of the number of pending balls will change (increase in the degree of expectation), the operation on the PUSH button 10317 is fun to see which pattern of the number of pending balls will change. can be done. Furthermore, since the degree of expectation is notified by pressing the PUSH button 10317, the notification timing can be adjusted to the player's favorite timing. Therefore, convenience for the player can be improved.

In addition, in the first control example, during execution of the interrupt continuous hit effect, every time the push of the PUSH button 10317 is detected, two types of sound data are alternately reproduced on two channels, thereby changing the sound mode. Although the configuration is diversified, the configuration is not limited to this, and three or more types of audio data may be alternately reproduced in order by CN1 and CN2. This makes it possible to further diversify voice modes. In this case, the number of channels for reproducing the audio data is not limited to two, and the audio data may be sequentially reproduced for three or more channels. By configuring in this way, after one audio data is reproduced for one channel, until the next audio data is reproduced for the same channel (the audio data being reproduced is terminated). can be made longer, it is possible to further diversify the voice modes. Further, the type of the voice data to be output may be changed according to the intervals of successive hits. Specifically, for example, when a player is playing a game with a relatively short interval between successive hits (for example, 0.5 seconds or less), three types of sound modes are reproduced in order on three channels. On the other hand, when a player is playing with a relatively long interval between consecutive hits (for example, an interval longer than 0.5 seconds), two types of audio data are sent to two channels in order. (Alternately) may be reproduced. By configuring in this way, it is possible to change the output mode of the sound according to the interval between successive hits, so that it is possible to realize the game property of adjusting the interval between successive hits. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.

In the first control example, during execution of the interrupt continuous hit effect, one of the repeated hit sounds is output in conjunction with the repeated hit operation. It may be configured to enable output. More specifically, for example, if the last repeated hitting sound output during the effective period of the repeated hitting operation is the first repeated hitting sound, the second repeated hitting sound may be output after the end of the repeated hitting sound. With this configuration, although the first repeated hitting sound and the second repeated hitting sound were output as a set in accordance with the repeated hitting operation, the last output sound would be the first repeated hitting sound. (That is, the paired second repeated hitting sound is not output), and it is possible to prevent the sound mode from becoming incomplete. Therefore, the voice mode can be set more appropriately. In this case, if the last repeated hitting sound is the first repeated hitting sound, the control to output the second repeated hitting sound after the end is changed to a variation display ( For example, it may be configured to be set only during the execution of the jackpot variation). By constructing in this way, for a player who desires to know whether or not it is a predetermined variation type, the last repeated hitting sound to be output during the interruption repeated hitting effect is dared to be the first repeated hitting sound. It is possible to realize the playability. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the first control example, the first repeated hit sound and the second repeated hit sound are alternately output during execution of the interrupt repeated hit effect regardless of the intervals between repeated hits by the player. isn't it. For example, it may be configured such that the first repeated hitting sound is always output when the repeated hitting operation is detected while no sound is being reproduced. That is, if the interval between repeated hits is too long and the next repeated hit operation is executed after the reproduction of the first repeated hit sound is completed, only the first repeated hit sound will continue to be output. may be configured. By constructing in this way, a player who desires to diversify the voice modes can be made to perform the continuous hitting operation at a faster pace, so that the player's willingness to participate in the interruption continuous hitting performance can be improved. be able to.

In this first control example, every time a continuous tapping operation is detected, the audio data (audio file) corresponding to the first continuous tapping sound and the audio data (audio file) corresponding to the second continuous tapping sound are alternately transferred to different channels. However, the configuration may be such that the method of reproducing the audio data is changed (or the audio data is processed in a predetermined manner) under predetermined conditions. More specifically, for example, the reproduction speed may be varied (or the sound data may be processed) so that the output period of each repeated hitting sound varies according to the interval between repeated hitting operations by the player. . That is, if the interval between repeated hits by the player is longer than a predetermined interval (for example, 1 second interval), the output period may be longer (for example, 1.5 seconds or longer). With this configuration, even when a player is playing a game with a long interval between repeated hits, it is relatively easy to output one repeated hit sound while the other repeated hit sound is being output. Voice mode can be diversified. In this first control example, the first repeated hitting sound and the second repeated hitting sound are alternately output (reproduced) to different channels based on the execution of the repeated hitting operation. is not limited to the case based on the continuous hitting operation. The same control may be executed when outputting a starting winning sound based on a starting winning or when outputting a winning sound based on detection of winning to the specific winning opening 65a. By configuring in this way, the sound can be output more preferably, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved. Also, this control can be employed when simply outputting a sound effect whose output period is set in advance as part of the variable display effect. With this configuration, when sound effects are continuously output in a relatively short period of time, the sound can be output more preferably, so that the player's interest in the game can be further enhanced. can.

In the first control example, if the execution timing of the interrupting repeated hits effect is before the ready-to-win effect, both the display mode and the sound mode are interrupted to execute the interrupting repeated hits effect, while the interrupting repeated hits effect execution timing is during the reach effect. If so, the configuration is such that only the display mode is interrupted and the interrupt continuous hit effect is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the continuous hit effect that is executed before reaching the reach, only the display mode is interrupted. good. Since the sound output before the reach is relatively plain, it is difficult to interfere with the sound of the continuous hit effect even if the output is not interrupted. On the other hand, since a flashy sound is likely to be output after the reach, interrupting the sound mode can prevent the sound of the interruption repeated hit effect from becoming difficult to hear. Therefore, it is possible to more preferably set the sound mode of the interruption repeated hit effect. Further, for example, both the display mode and the sound mode may be interrupted regardless of the execution timing of the interrupt barrage effect, or conversely, only the display mode may be interrupted regardless of the execution timing. . In addition, the control is not limited to switching the object to be interrupted (at least one of the audio mode and the display mode) according to the execution timing of the interrupt continuous hit effect, and control may be performed to switch according to other conditions. . More specifically, for example, it may be configured such that it is determined by lottery at the start of the interrupt continuous hit effect whether both the sound and the display are to be interrupted or only one of them is to be interrupted. In this case, the probability of determining that both are interrupted may be made different depending on whether it is a big win or a loss. With this configuration, it is possible to play the game by paying attention to whether both the sound and the display are interrupted, or whether only one of them is interrupted. can improve interest in In addition, in the first control example, only an effect with an effect time of 7 seconds is provided as the interrupt continuous hit effect, but a plurality of interrupt repeated effect effects with different effect times may be provided. In this case, by providing a command indicating an additional time different from 0 seconds and 7 seconds as the additional time command, the interrupt continuous hit effect is executed for the effect time corresponding to the additional time notified by the additional time command. can be configured to As a result, it is possible to further diversify the presentation mode, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. Also, instead of or in addition to increasing the variation of the additional time that can be notified by the additional time command, the total notified by the variation pattern command (that is, the basic time notified by the basic time command and the additional time command A configuration that determines the effect time of the continuous interrupt effect so that the difference between the fluctuation time of the variable time of the sum of the additional time notified by and the effect time of the continuous interrupt effect is the basic time that can be notified by the basic time command. may be More specifically, for example, when the variation pattern of the lost super reach B with a variation time of 67 seconds is notified, the effect time of the interrupt repeated hit effect is 37 seconds so that 30 seconds, which is the basic time of the lost normal reach, remains. may be set. By constructing in this way, the variable display performance can be ended just at the end of the variable time together with the performance time of the continuous interrupt performance only by setting the performance mode for 30 seconds which is the basic time. Therefore, it is possible to preferably set the effect mode of the variable display effect in which the continuous interrupt effect is set without providing a variable display effect exclusively for the continuous interrupt effect. In addition, when this control (control for determining the effect time of the interrupt continuous hit effect so that the fluctuation time for the basic time is left) is adopted, even if the additional time is 0 seconds, the interrupt continuous effect can be executed. can. That is, it can also be applied to a pachinko machine 10 with specifications that do not have an additional time command in the first place. Therefore, it is possible to increase the chances of executing the continuous interrupt effect, thereby further enhancing the player's interest in the game.

In this first control example, after the end of the big hit, if the number of times of lottery of special symbols exceeds 100 times and the variable probability state continues, based on the lottery result corresponding to falling, the special symbol is low. While falling to the probability state, it was configured to end the time-saving state of normal symbols, but it is not limited to this. Even after the number of lotteries of the special symbols exceeds 100 times, the condition for ending the time saving state of the normal symbols may be different from the condition of falling to the low probability state of the special symbols. Specifically, for example, a lottery as to whether or not to fall from the time-saving state of the normal pattern to the normal state of the normal pattern may be configured to be executed at the start of the fluctuation, separately from the falling lottery from the variable probability state. good. Further, for example, when a specific lottery result is obtained in a special symbol lottery, only the time saving state may be terminated. By constructing in this way, even if the time saving state of the normal design is ended, it can be configured so that the probability variable state of the special design may continue, so immediately after the time saving state of the normal design is finished. To prevent a player from quitting the game and to continue the game in anticipation of the continuation of the variable probability state of the special symbols. Therefore, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

In the first control example, the number of pending ball symbols based on the start winning prize detected after the start of the pending collective change effect is uniformly set to the pending symbol mode of white pending, but it is not limited to this. . For example, for a new number of reserved ball symbols, it may be configured to execute a lottery in a reserved design mode using the reserved change lottery table 222c (see FIG. 414(a)). As a result, not only the reserved number of balls pattern which is the object of the reserved collective change performance but also the reserved number of balls pattern based on the new start prize can be given a feeling of big hit. Further, for example, a new starting winning prize detected after the start of the pending batch change effect may be added to the target of the pending batch change effect. In this case, the number of pending ball patterns based on the new start winning may be configured to always be added to the target of the pending batch change effect, or may be added to the target of the pending batch change effect only under a predetermined condition. good too. As a predetermined condition, for example, when the winning information corresponding to the new start winning indicates the degree of expectation of the jackpot more than the super reach out, it may be included in the execution target of the pending collective change effect. , For example, only when winning information corresponding to a variation type with a higher degree of expectation than the pending ball in the range where the pending batch change effect is set is newly notified, as a configuration to be included in the execution target of the pending batch change effect good too. By constructing in this way, when the reserved number of balls pattern based on the new start prize is added to the execution target of the reserved collective change performance, the player's expectation for the big win can be further improved.

<Second control example>
Next, a second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 479 to 516. FIG. In the first control example described above, as described above with reference to FIG. 411, the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), variable state (high probability state of special symbols, normal High probability state of the pattern), time saving state (low probability state of special pattern, high probability state of normal pattern) can be set, special pattern lottery (special lottery) jackpot winning, falling lottery falling lottery, special Based on the figure fluctuation frequency (special figure lottery frequency), the game state is configured to be variably set.

On the other hand, in this second control example, in addition to the normal state, the probability variable state, and the time saving state, the latent probability state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) can be set as the game state. Configure. In addition, it is configured to win a small win in a part of cases where a big win is not won in the special lottery. Here, a small hit that can be won in the special drawing lottery will be explained.

When a small win is won in a special lottery, a small win game different from the big win game executed when a big win is won is executed. In this control example, the amount of privilege (the number of prize balls) given to the player is smaller in the small winning game than in the big winning game. Specifically, the variable winning device 65 is used in the big winning game. Five rounds or more of the round game for opening the game are executed, while only one round of the round game for opening the variable winning device 65 is executed in the small winning game. Further, after the jackpot game ends, a game state is set according to the type of jackpot won. That is, the game state at the time of winning the big win and the game state set after the end of the big win game can be varied, whereas when winning the small win, the game state is changed to the small one. A game state at the time of winning a prize and a game state set after the end of a small prize game are configured so as not to be variable.

Furthermore, in this control example, in the state where the high probability state of the normal design is set (probability variable state, time saving state), the high probability state of the normal design is low probability based on winning a small hit in the special drawing lottery It is configured to transition to a state. In other words, as a condition (time saving end condition) for shifting the high probability state of the normal pattern to the low probability state, the first time saving end condition (special figure fluctuation number 100 times) also provided in the above-described first control example In addition to reaching), the second time-saving end condition (small hit winning) is provided. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the timing of shifting the high probability state of the normal symbol to the low probability state.

In this control example, if a plurality of small hit types (small hit A, small hit B) are provided when a small hit is won, and the set small hit type is a specific small hit type (small hit A) In addition, it is configured so that the above-described second time-saving end condition is satisfied. By configuring in this way, the high probability state of the normal pattern shifts to the low probability state only when a specific small winning type is won, so the high probability state of the normal design ends based on the small winning. It is possible to set the case where it is executed and the case where it is not ended. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the timing of shifting the high probability state of the normal symbol to the low probability state.

In addition, in this control example, as in the first control example described above, it is configured to shift the high probability state of the normal symbol to the low probability state at the start timing of the special figure fluctuation, and based on the small winning Even when the high-probability state of the normal design is shifted to the low-probability state, the high-probability state of the normal design is shifted to the low-probability state at the start timing of the special pattern variation. In this way, by making the timing of ending the high probability state of the normal symbols the same regardless of the occasion for ending the high probability state of the normal symbols, the high probability state of the normal symbols is ended for the player. It can be difficult to understand what the trigger is.

Furthermore, in this control example, when a predetermined number of times (twice) is won in a specific small hit type (small hit A), the above-described second time saving end condition is established. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the timing of shifting the high probability state of the normal symbol to the low probability state.

In the above description, the game state (time-saving state, variable probability state) in which it is easy to open the electric accessory 640a is generally regarded as a high-probability state of normal symbols. The easy game state (the game state in which the high probability state of the normal figure is set) is simply called the time saving state.

In addition, in this control example, when a small hit is won in a special lottery, it is possible to set a plurality of small hit types, but even if any small hit type is set, the same small hit game configured to run. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the small winning type set this time based on the game mode of the small winning game (opening operation mode of the variable winning device 65). Therefore, every time a small hit game is executed, by predicting whether or not a specific small hit type (small hit A) is set, time saving end conditions for ending the time saving state (second time saving end conditions ) can be enjoyed.

In addition, in this control example, as a time saving end condition for ending the time saving state, the number of special figure fluctuations in the period when the time saving state is set, or a specific small hit (small hit A) It is set based on the winning number of times. However, without being limited to this, for example, as the number of special figure fluctuations, the number of fluctuations of a specific special figure type (for example, the second special symbol (special figure 2)) The number of specific special figure fluctuations that accumulate only (the number of lotteries), the number of times that the result of the special figure lottery is lost (lottery results other than jackpot winnings and small winnings), and the number of times the ball has passed through a specific area A time-saving end condition that is established when a predetermined number of times is reached may be provided.

In the first control example described above, when the probability variable state or the time saving state is set after the jackpot game ends, the time saving state (high probability state of normal symbols) is guaranteed until the number of special figure fluctuations reaches 100 times. In contrast, in this second control example, before the number of special figure fluctuations reaches 100 times, the second time saving end condition is configured to be satisfied. And, if the second time saving end condition is satisfied before the number of special figure fluctuations reaches 100 times, the time saving state (normal pattern high probability state) based on the fact that the second time saving end condition is satisfied configured to terminate.

In the second control example configured in this way, the rear mode effect (high probability state of special symbols based on the lottery result of the fall lottery) explained with reference to FIGS. 390 and 391 of the first control example It is configured to notify that the time saving state has ended in the production for suggesting to the player whether it has ended or not. As a result, it is possible to execute the back mode effect according to the game state variably set according to the lottery result of the falling lottery and whether or not the time saving end condition is satisfied. The detailed content of this rear mode effect will be described later.

<Regarding the contents of the performance in the pachinko machine of the second control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 479 to 487, description will be given of the effect contents executed in the pachinko machine 10 of the second control example.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 479 to 481, the contents of the background mode effect will be described. Figure 479 (a) shows an example of the effect executed when the winning information (winning information indicating small hit A winning) indicating that the second time saving end condition is satisfied in the temple search mode is stored. FIG. 479(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the effect executed when starting the special figure 2 fluctuation that is elected to the small hit A during the temple search mode. Among the display elements shown in each figure, the display elements that are the same as those in the first control example described above are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Figure 479 (a) shows the display screen during the special figure 2 fluctuation, which is the 77th special figure fluctuation number after the end of the jackpot game, and the display area 802 shows the special figure fluctuation number "23 times" is displayed as the remaining period display mode indicating the remaining period (remaining fluctuation period) until reaching 100 times. And as shown in FIG. 479 (a), if there is a special figure 2 reservation (displayed with "small" in the figure) having winning information indicating that the small hit A is won, the temple Along with the production of the pillars shaking, the characters "pinch" are displayed on the pillars of the temple. Then, in a display area 812 where comments suggesting the game situation are displayed, a comment "What, what!?" is displayed.

By setting such a display mode, it is possible to make the player think that the time saving state is established before the number of special figure fluctuations reaches 100 times, so the time saving state as in the first control example It is possible to suppress the game from becoming monotonous compared to the case where the guaranteed number of times is set.

In addition, in this control example, when the above-described second time-saving end condition is satisfied, or when a jackpot is won in a special drawing lottery, the number of special drawing fluctuations reaches 100 times after the jackpot game ends. It is configured so that the time-saving state will end by then. Therefore, by executing the end suggestion production that suggests that the time saving state shown in FIG. Any can be suggested to be set. As a result, the player can be made to pay attention to the effect result of the end-suggesting effect, and it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game early.

In addition, in this control example, when winning information that satisfies the conditions for ending the time saving state is included in the special figure suspension that is stored and stored, the end suggesting effect (see FIG. 479(a)) is executed. However, without being limited to this, for example, as in this control example, a small hit type set at the time of winning a small hit, and a small hit number of times a specific small hit type is set In the pachinko machine 10 configured to establish the second time-saving end condition based on the above, the end suggesting performance is executed based on the winning of the small win, or the end suggesting performance is executed based on the type of the set small win type. You can run it. In addition, in this case, winning a small win type that can trigger the establishment of the second time reduction end condition is configured to make it easier to execute the end suggesting performance than winning a small win type that cannot trigger the establishment, Furthermore, it is preferable to configure such that the end suggesting effect is more likely to be executed as the number of winnings of the small win type that can be the establishment opportunity approaches the number of winnings that satisfies the second time saving end condition.

By configuring in this way, it is possible for the player to predict whether or not the time-saving end condition is likely to be satisfied according to the execution frequency of the end suggestive effect, so how often the end suggestive effect is performed. The player can be made to watch as it is being executed. Therefore, the production effect can be enhanced. In addition, the execution frequency of the end suggestion production may be varied based on whether or not the high probability state (variable probability state) of the special symbol is set, for example, when the variable probability state is set, the time saving state is set so that the end-suggesting effect is more likely to be executed.

In other words, in the state where the variable state is set, the probability of winning the jackpot in the special lottery is higher than when the time saving state is set, so after the end suggestion production is executed, the time saving Even if the state ends, it is possible to increase the ratio of ending the time saving state with the winning of the jackpot as an opportunity. Therefore, when the probability variable state is set, the end suggesting performance is more likely to be executed than when the time saving state is set, so that the player can have expectations for the end suggesting performance. .

In addition, without being limited to this, when the variable probability state is set, it may be configured so that the end suggesting effect is less likely to be executed than when the time saving state is set, or after the jackpot game ends. If the time-saving state is set from the start, and if the variable probability state is set after the jackpot game ends, and then the time-saving state is shifted to based on winning the falling lottery, the execution frequency of the end suggestion effect will be different. It may be configured to allow In addition, the execution frequency of the end suggestion effect will be different based on the period (number of special fluctuations) required from the time the variable state is set to the falling election, and the elapsed period after the falling election (number of special fluctuations). It may be configured to allow

And when time passes from the state shown in FIG. 479(a) and the special figure variation in which the second time saving end condition is established is started, the display screen shown in FIG. 479(b) is displayed. In this control example, when the time saving state (normal pattern high probability state) is ended at the start timing of the special figure fluctuation where the second time saving end condition is satisfied, and the lottery result of the special figure lottery is a jackpot winning Also, since it is configured to terminate the time saving state (high probability state of normal symbols) at the start timing of the special figure fluctuation, in any case, the display screen shown in FIG. 479 (b) is displayed be done.

FIG. 479(b) shows a scene of the effect in which the main character 801 falls into a pitfall 820, and the display area 806 displays "Temple The characters "Search end" are displayed, and the characters "Left shot" are displayed as a guidance notification mode 821 for guiding the player to the game method after the time saving state is finished. Then, as a display mode 812 for informing the player of the content of the effect being executed, a comment "It's a trap!!" is displayed. In addition, in the display area 802, "? times" is displayed as a remaining period display mode indicating the remaining period (remaining fluctuation period) until the number of special figure fluctuations reaches 100 times.

Next, the continuation of the effect shown in FIG. 479(b) will be described with reference to FIGS. 480 and 481. FIG. FIG. 480(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the effect contents displayed when the effect result of the pitfall effect is a big hit, and FIG. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the content of the production|presentation displayed when it is the completion|finish of a time saving state. 480(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the production contents displayed during the fluctuation production corresponding to the 99th special figure fluctuation after the end of the jackpot game, and FIG. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display screen showing the effect result of the variation effect corresponding to the special figure variation of the 99th rotation after the end of the jackpot game.

When the pitfall effect shown in FIG. 479(b) described above is executed based on the winning of the special lottery jackpot, the display mode in which the character 801 discovers the treasure box 807 as shown in FIG. is displayed, and a display mode of "333" indicating a big win is displayed in the display area Ds3 showing the lottery result of the special symbol. In the display areas 821 and 823, "Right shot" is displayed as a guidance display mode for indicating the game method during the jackpot game, and in the display area 806, " Treasure found!" is displayed.

On the other hand, when the pitfall effect shown in FIG. 479(b) described above is executed based on the establishment of the second time saving end condition, as shown in FIG. A wandering background mode (lost child mode) is set. This lost child mode is a latent state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability of normal symbols) due to the establishment of the second time-saving end condition during the variable state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) state) is set, and the second time-saving end condition is established during the time-saving state (low-probability state of special symbols, high-probability state of normal symbols) Normal state (low-probability state of special symbols, normal design is set when the low-probability state of

As described above, when the lost child mode is set, since it is a normal pattern with a low probability state, "Left shot" is displayed in the display areas 821 and 823 as a guidance display mode for showing the game method to the player. In the display area 806, the words "enter lost child mode" are displayed to indicate that the "lost child mode" has been set as the background mode. In addition, a display mode of "341" indicating a small win (small win A win) is displayed in the display area Ds3 showing the lottery result of the special symbol.

This "lost child mode" is configured to be continuously set until the number of special figure variations executed after the end of the big win game reaches 99 times, and the 99th special figure after the end of the big win. When the variation is executed, as shown in FIG. 481(a), an effect is executed in which the character 801 stands at the fork and chooses the direction of travel. Then, when the character 801 walks in the selected advancing direction, a game state notification mode 821 for indicating the current game state is displayed as shown in FIG. 481(b).

According to the example shown in FIG. 481(b), the game state notification mode 821 indicating that the current game state is the normal state is displayed, and the display area 806 indicates that the normal state is "Unfortunately, normal "To mode" is displayed, and the background mode production ends. On the other hand, although not shown, when the 99th special figure variation is executed after the end of the jackpot, and the current game state is the latent state, the character "continue" is displayed as the game state notification mode 821. It is displayed, and the lost child mode continues until the game state shifts from the latent certainty state to the normal state by the falling lottery.

That is, in this control example, if the lost child mode is set even after the 99th special figure variation is executed after the end of the jackpot, it is configured to determine that the latent definite state is set. . Thus, during a predetermined period (for 99 special figure fluctuations) after the end of the jackpot game, even if the time saving state ends, the current game state is the normal state or the latent state. It is difficult for players to understand, and after the lapse of a predetermined period (99 special figure fluctuations), a performance is executed so that the current game state is easy for the player to understand, so that the predetermined period after the end of the jackpot game. Since it is possible to make it difficult for the player to stop the game until (99 special figure fluctuations) elapses, it is possible to improve the operation of the game. In addition, after a predetermined period (99 special figure fluctuations) has passed, the current game state is notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner, thereby suppressing the player from playing an excessively disadvantageous game. can do.

In addition, in this control example, the timing of informing the player of the current game state is fixed to the timing when the special figure fluctuation is executed 99 times after the jackpot game ends, but it is not limited to this, For example, a plurality of timings (for example, the timing when the number of special figure fluctuations after the end of the jackpot game becomes 10, 30, 70, 90) are set as the gaming state notification possible timing, and when the timing is reached, the time is reduced. It is determined whether the state has ended (whether the second time saving end condition is satisfied), and if it is determined that the time saving state has ended, an effect (Fig. 481(b)). In addition, a measurement means for measuring the number of special figure fluctuations after the second time saving end condition is established (after the lost child mode is set) is provided, and the measurement result of the measurement means is a predetermined number (for example, 20, 30, 40), a lottery is conducted to determine whether or not to execute an effect (see FIG. 481(b)) for notifying the current game state at the timing of 40), and the current game state is notified based on the result of the lottery. (See FIG. 481(b)).

By configuring in this way, the second time-saving end condition is established immediately after the time-saving state (high probability state of normal symbols) is set, and when the time-saving state (high probability state of normal symbols) ends, useless It is possible to prevent the game from being played in the lost child mode for a long period of time.

In addition, in this control example, even if the jackpot is won while the lost child mode is set, the effects shown in FIGS. It is configured to be displayed in characters of "big hit". As a result, even when the effect (see FIG. 481(b)) for notifying the current gaming state is started, the user can wait for the result of the effect while expecting the winning of the jackpot. can increase

Also, although detailed description is omitted, as in the first control example described above, based on the look-ahead result of the special figure reservation, the game state at the execution timing of the special figure fluctuation to be executed in the future is predicted, and the prediction result Based on this, the game state notification mode 821 may be displayed in advance.

As described above, in this control example, when the time saving state (high probability state of normal symbols) is set after the jackpot game ends, the time saving state (high probability state of normal symbols) ends at various timings. Since the transition process of the game state is different depending on the timing when the second time saving end condition is satisfied and the timing when the fall lottery is won by the fall lottery, the player can play in various game states. can be performed, and the interest in the game can be improved. In addition, as the background mode effect, it is configured to set the background mode corresponding to each game state, and when the time saving state (normal pattern high probability state) ends, the latent state is set. Since the background mode (lost child mode) is set to make it difficult for the player to understand whether the normal state is set or not, the player can continue playing the game.

Also, if the jackpot is won during the background mode production (during the right-handed game), the "left hit" is notified during the special figure fluctuation period that indicates the jackpot winning, and after the special figure fluctuation is stopped (confirmed display) " By configuring to notify "Right hit", the effect mode (see FIG. 479 (b)) when the time saving state ends during the background mode production (during the left hitting game) is the opportunity to end the time saving state can be unified regardless of In addition, in this control example, when the time-saving state ends, it is configured to unify and notify (display) "left-handed", but not limited to this, a special figure that ends the time-saving state A configuration may be adopted in which “right-handed hitting” is uniformly notified (displayed) during the period until the fluctuation is stopped and displayed (confirmed display).

In addition, in this control example, an example of the effect for making it difficult for the player to understand the trigger for ending the time saving state has been described, but it is not limited to this, and the effect mode of a part of the effect to be executed can be changed. may be configured to suggest to the player the opportunity to end the time-saving state established this time, for example, in the end suggestion production shown in FIG. By changing the type of characters that are displayed, it may be configured to suggest to the player the opportunity to end the time saving state that is established this time, and in the pitfall production shown in FIG. By changing the color and the display mode of the display area 812, it may be configured to suggest to the player the timing for ending the time saving state established this time.

In this control example, when the time saving state (high probability state of normal design) is set after the end of the jackpot game, the first time saving state (high probability state of normal design) is terminated based on the number of special figure fluctuations. The end condition (100 special fluctuations) is set, and the second time-saving end condition is established when a specific small hit is won a predetermined number of times by a special drawing lottery before the first time-saving end condition is established. or when a big hit is won, the time-saving state (high-probability state of normal symbols) is terminated at that time.

Furthermore, in the present control example, in order to terminate the time saving state described above, it is configured to end the time saving state at the start timing of the special figure variation where various conditions are established. In other words, when setting the number of times of special figure fluctuations as the first time saving end condition 100 times, the time saving state ends at the start timing of the special figure fluctuation that is the 100th time in the state where the time saving state is set, and the second time saving When setting to win a specific small win (small win A) twice as an end condition, the start timing of the special figure variation where the second small win A wins (does) while the time saving state is set. It is configured to end the time-saving state at the start timing of the special figure variation that has won (to be) a jackpot while the time-saving state is set.

By configuring in this way, when the time saving state ends while the first time saving end condition is not satisfied, the special figure fluctuation being executed displays the lottery result indicating the big hit or the lottery result indicating the small hit Since it is possible to inform the player that the stop display is performed in the mode, until the special figure variation that is being executed when the time saving state is finished is stopped and displayed, the player is interested and the special figure is displayed. It is possible to make the player pay attention to the variation performance that is executed corresponding to the variation.

In addition, in this control example, since the condition is established when winning a small hit multiple times as the second time saving end condition, for example, pay attention to the special drawing lottery result executed during the time saving state , By determining whether or not there is a small hit, when the time saving state ends in a state where the first time saving end condition is not satisfied and the small win has never been won, the running It becomes possible to grasp that the lottery result of the special figure fluctuation is a big hit. In this way, only the end timing of the time saving state makes it difficult to identify the time saving end condition established this time, and the game content (special drawing lottery result) during the time saving state (high probability state of normal symbols) and the end timing of the time saving state By making it possible to specify the time saving end condition established this time based on, the player can be interested in the game content (special drawing lottery result) during the time saving state, which is advantageous to the player It is possible to suppress the game from becoming monotonous during the time-saving state, which is a simple game state.

In addition, in this control example, the game contents of the jackpot game executed when the jackpot is won in the special figure fluctuation (for example, round game, 15 round game), and the small hit game executed when the small hit is won Since the game content (1 round game) is different, it is possible to determine the lottery result of the special drawing lottery after the fact based on the contents of the winning game that is executed. Not limited to, for example, as a game type of a jackpot game that is executed based on winning a jackpot in a special lottery, the same as a small hit game (a concept that includes a difference that makes it difficult for players to identify) Hit The game type in which the game is executed may be configured so as to be settable.

By configuring in this way, a part of the big win game executed based on winning the big win in the special lottery and a small winning game executed based on winning the small win in the special lottery. Since the game content of the winning game (the content of the opening operation for the variable winning device 65) can be unified, the winning game executed this time is a big winning game or a small winning game based on the game content of the winning game to be executed. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to identify whether it is a game.

Also, in this case, when a jackpot game in which the same winning game content as the small winning game is set is executed, after the jackpot game is completed, a latent state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) should be configurable. By configuring in this way, the game (left-handed game) after the end of the small-hit game based on the small-hit winning in which the second time-saving end condition is established, the game (left-handed game) after the end of the big winning game, can be made the same. Therefore, when the time saving state ends while the first time saving end condition is not established, the game content (opening operation content for the variable winning device 65) of the winning game (jackpot game, small winning game) to be executed, and hit It is possible to make it difficult for a player to understand what the time-saving end condition established this time is based on the game contents (left-handed game) executed after the end of the game (big win game, small win game).

Furthermore, in this control example, the probability state of the special design and the probability state of the normal design can be variably set based on the winning of the jackpot. It is configured only to be variable from the state to the low-probability state. That is, the jackpot winning is a trigger that can variably set the game state within a range of 1, and the small winning is a trigger that can variably set the game state within a range of 2 narrower than the range of 1. there is Thus, by varying the range of game states that can be variably set based on the lottery result of the special figure lottery, the game state to be set in the future is predicted to the player when the lottery result of the special figure lottery is grasped. can be made easier.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 482 and 483, the contents of the effect in the dialogue zone executed by the pachinko machine 10 of this control example will be described. In this control example, it is configured such that the dialogue zone can be set based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 . When this serif zone is set, the character of the left third design LZ (see FIG. 482(a)) that is first stop-displayed among the third designs that are stop-displayed on the display screen of the third design display device 81. An effect is executed in which each third symbol emits a line corresponding to the .

Here, in the case of executing an effect in which each third symbol emits a line corresponding to the display mode (for example, character) of the left third symbol LZ (see FIG. 482 (a)) that is first stopped and displayed, If the same display mode (for example, a character) of the left third symbol LZ (see FIG. 482(a)) stopped and displayed on the screen continues, the same dialogue production will be executed, resulting in a production effect There was a problem that the

On the other hand, in the second control example, it is possible to store information (past information) indicating the character of the left third symbol LZ (see FIG. 482(a)) that was stop-displayed in the past and the set lines. , and based on the stored past information, it is configured to set the performance mode (character, dialogue) of the dialogue performance to be newly executed. As a result, a variety of presentation modes can be set as the presentation mode of the speech presentation, and the presentation effect can be enhanced.

Furthermore, in the second control example, when setting the effect mode of the new dialogue effect, the effect mode is set based on the result of the special symbol lottery (special figure lottery). As a result, for example, when the result of the special lottery is a big win, it is possible to intentionally set a production mode that gives the player a feeling of discomfort (for example, a production mode in which the same character is set continuously). Become. Therefore, since it is possible to predict the lottery result of the special drawing lottery based on the performance mode of the dialogue performance, the player can be made to pay attention to the performance, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in this second control example, a plurality of characters that can be stopped and displayed in the left third symbol LZ (see FIG. 482(a)) are in a plurality of groups (in this control example, a land creature group and a sea creature group ), and when the third symbols corresponding to the characters in the same group are stopped and displayed, and when the third symbols corresponding to the characters in different groups are stopped and displayed It is structured so that the contents are different. As a result, it is possible to predict the lines to be displayed by grasping the third symbols to be stopped and displayed before the timing at which the lines are displayed (the timing at which each third symbol is stopped and displayed). Become. Therefore, it is possible to entertain whether or not the contents of the predicted lines match the contents of the lines actually displayed.

495 to 497 for the method of selecting the character used for the dialogue production and the specific contents of the dialogue will be described later. Description will be made with reference to FIG. FIG. 482(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display screen when the left third symbol LZ is stopped and displayed in dialogue production, and FIG. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display screen when 3 symbols RZ are stopped and displayed. And FIG. 483(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display screen when the ready-to-win state occurs due to the dialogue effect, and FIG. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display screen when a character is stopped and displayed;

As shown in FIG. 482(a), when the dialogue zone is set, the display area 806 displays the characters "serif zone" as an effect notification mode for informing the player that the dialogue zone is set. be done. Then, in the center of the display screen, the left third pattern LZ, the middle third pattern CZ, and the right third pattern RZ are variably displayed. A line corresponding to the character that has been displayed is displayed. In a state in which the serif zone is set, the third pattern is a fusion third pattern in which the number mode as identification information for indicating the lottery result of the special pattern and the character mode corresponding to the number mode are fused. In the figure shown in FIG. 482(a), as the left third symbol LZ, the fusion third symbol in which the character mode of "elephant" and the number mode of "1" are combined is stopped and displayed. , and the characters "Hello" are displayed as the lines LZ1.

In this control example, a different character mode is associated with each of the nine types of number modes. A detailed description of the display mode of each fusion third pattern will be given later with reference to FIG. 495(a).

Further, in this control example, the dialogue displayed in the dialogue effect is output by the audio output device 226 as sound. As a result, it is possible to audibly identify the effect to be executed, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced. In addition, since it is possible for nearby players who have difficulty in visually recognizing the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 to recognize the production mode (sound mode) of the dialogue production, for example, winning a jackpot is possible. It is possible to obtain a sense of superiority when a line effect with a high degree of expectation is executed.

FIG. 482(b) shows a state in which the effect progresses from the state of FIG. 482(a) described above, and the right third symbol RZ is stopped and displayed. In FIG. 482(b), as the right third pattern RZ, the fusion third pattern in which the character mode of "Lion" and the number mode of "2" are fused is stopped and displayed, and the words "Long time no see" are displayed as the dialogue RZ1. is displayed. Here, in FIG. 482(b), both the left third symbol LZ and the right third symbol RZ are stop-displayed as the fusion third symbol having characters belonging to the same group (land creature group). A line production that establishes a conversation is being executed.

The variable display displayed in FIG. 482(b) is that in FIG. 483(a), the left third symbol LZ and the right third symbol RZ both have the character mode of "elephant" and the number "1". The fused third symbol fused with the aspect is stopped and displayed, and the ready-to-win state is displayed in which the left third symbol LZ and the right third symbol RZ are stopped and displayed with the same fused third symbol. Then, the text "weather is good" is displayed as the dialogue LZ1, and the text "hot weather" is displayed as the dialogue RZ1.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 484 and 485, the variable operation effect will be described. In this second control example, it is possible to execute a variable operation presentation in which the player operates a lever member 10340 that is movable between a first position (origin position) and a second position (operating position). . This variable operation effect includes a preparation effect executed during an effect preparation processing period (2 seconds) for moving the lever member 10340 normally positioned at the first position to the second position, and a lever member 10340 positioned at the second position. An operation instruction effect executed during an operation instruction period (3 seconds) for causing the player to operate the member 10340, an operation corresponding effect indicating that the player has operated the lever member 10340 during the operation instruction period, A result effect executed during a result display period (two seconds) showing the effect result of the variable operation effect is executed.

Also, a variable operation effective period for validly determining the player's operation of the operation means (lever member 10340) is set corresponding to the period in which the operation instruction period (3 seconds) is set. When the player operates the lever member 10340 during the operation instruction period and the operation is determined to be valid, the operation corresponding effect is executed without waiting for the operation instruction period to elapse, and then the result effect is displayed. configured to be displayed. As a result, the effect can be displayed in response to the operation performed by the player on the operation means, so that the player can be motivated to operate the operation means. In addition, without being limited to this, the player operates the lever member 10340 during the operation instruction period, and when the operation is determined to be valid, only the operation corresponding effect is executed, and after the operation instruction period has elapsed, the result It may be configured to execute production.

Here, the contents of various effects executed during the variable operation effect will be briefly described. First, during the preparation effect, an effect is executed to suggest to the player that the effect of operating the lever member 10340 will soon be executed. Specifically, an image simulating the lever member 10340 is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 to notify the player that the lever member 10340 is moving from the first position to the second position. The preparation effect is executed in the effect mode for the purpose.

In this control example, since the operation means is operated from the second position toward the first position during the variable operation presentation, the lever member 10340 moves from the first position to the second position. By informing the player of the preparation effect indicating that the lever member 10340 is moving, it becomes possible for the player to easily grasp the direction in which the lever member 10340 is operated by the current variable operation effect. It should be noted that, after the operating means has moved from the first position to the second position, in the case of executing a variable operation presentation in which the player operates the second position to a third position different from the first position, preparations are required. The game notifies the player that the operation means moves to the first position, the second position and the third position during the performance, and informs the player that the operation means is positioned at the second position when the performance preparation processing is completed. It is preferable to configure so as to set an effect mode for informing the person. In other words, it is preferable to use the preparatory effect to inform the operating means of the contents of the operation to be performed by the player for the operating means.

Then, after the preparation effect is completed, an operation instruction effect is executed for causing the player to operate the operation means (lever member 10340). Here, with reference to FIG. 484(a), the contents of the operation instruction rendering will be described. FIG. 484(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of an effect screen displayed during the operation instruction effect. As shown in FIG. 484(a), when the operation instruction effect is executed, an image simulating the lever member 10340 is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the lever member 10340 is moved downward (first position). direction) and a comment "press the lever" are displayed.

Although not shown in FIG. 484(a), a period gauge for indicating the elapsed period and the remaining period of the operation instruction period (3 seconds) is also displayed. Although illustration is omitted, when the player presses down the lever member 10340 during the operation instruction period, an operation corresponding effect (for example, display of a comment indicating operation completion) indicating that the operation means has been operated during the operation valid period is performed. ) is displayed, and then the effect result is displayed. The effect result is the same as the effect result of various effects using the operation means used in the first control example, and therefore detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Thus, in this control example, as a variable operation effect, the operating means (lever member 10340) located at the first position (origin position) is moved to the second position (operating position), and then the player is configured to be executable to perform an operation of moving the operation means from the second position to the first position. As a result, as in the first control example described above, compared to the case where the operation effect is executed by simply pressing the PUSH button 10317, the player's operational feeling can be improved, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced. can be done.

However, when the above-described variable operation effect is executed, if the player does not operate the operation means (lever member 10340) during the effective operation period, the lever member 10340 will continue to move to the second position even after the variable operation effect ends. There is a problem that the structure of the operation device 10300 having the lever member 10340 becomes unstable. Further, the operation device 10300 used in this control example is provided with operation means (PUSH button 10317) in addition to the lever member 10340, and if the lever member 10340 remains positioned at the second position, another operation can be performed. There is a problem that it becomes difficult to press the means (PUSH button 10317).

To solve such a problem, the position of the lever member 10340 is determined at the end timing of the variable operation effect, and if the lever member 10340 is not located at the first position, the lever member It is conceivable to execute operation control (return operation control) for forcibly returning the lever member 10340 to the first position. In spite of the movement, the movement is made from the second position to the first position without intervention of the player's operation.

On the other hand, in this control example, the position of the lever member 10340 is determined at the end timing of the variable operation effect, and if the lever member 10340 is not located at the first position, the next variable operation effect It is designed to be easy to execute. By configuring in this way, the lever member 10340 once moved to the second position can be easily moved to the first position by the player's operation. 10340 can be moved to the first position (origin position).

Furthermore, in this control example, an upper limit is set for the period during which the next variable operation effect is likely to be executed, and if the lever member 10340 is positioned at the second position even after the period has elapsed, the driving means ( A drive motor) is used to execute return operation control for moving the lever member 10340 to the first position. As a result, it is possible to prevent the variable operation effect from being excessively executed for the player.

Here, when executing the return operation control, the player applies a force in a direction that resists the force generated when the lever member 10340 positioned at the second position moves toward the first position. In other words, if the player pushes up the lever member 10340 so that the lever member 10340 does not move to the first position, there arises a problem that the lever member 10340 cannot be moved to the first position by the return operation control. .

Therefore, if the player executes the return operation control so as to move the lever member 10340 to the first position with a force stronger than the force that can be applied by the player, the player may be injured. If return operation control is continuously executed until 10340 is moved to the first position, there is a problem that an excessive load is applied to the drive motor that drives lever member 10340, causing failure.

On the other hand, in the second control example, when the lever member 10340 is positioned at the second position after completing the return operation control for the predetermined period (5 seconds), the initial position of the lever member 10340 is configured to execute a process of switching from the first position to the second position, and an effect is executed in which the second position is the initial position.

When the variable operation effect is executed in a state where the second position is the initial position, the lever member 10340 during the effect preparation period in which the effect preparation process is executed moves from the second position to the first position, and the operation instruction is performed. As an effect, an effect (see FIG. 484(b)) of operating the lever member 10340 from the first position to the second position is executed. In this way, by varying the effect mode of the variable operation effect, it is possible to make the player interested in the variable operation effect and enhance the effect of the effect.

Further, when it is determined that the position of the lever member 10340 is neither the first position nor the second position after the end of the variable operation presentation, that is, both the origin detection flag 223ae and the operation position detection flag 223af, which will be described later, are set to ON. If not, the player may be holding the lever member 10340 at an intermediate position between the first position and the second position. In order to make it possible, an effect mode using a touch sensor having a detection area formed at a position overlapping the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is set.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 485, an image 891 imitating a hand is displayed corresponding to the detection area 890 of the touch sensor displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, and the detection area 890 is touched. , the characters "touch" are displayed in the display area 892, and the comment "touch the liquid crystal" is displayed in the display area 806 to indicate the operation content of the current operation presentation. By executing the effect of touching the liquid crystal (touch effect) in this way, the player can release the lever member 10340 and touch the liquid crystal. Then, in this control example, the return operation control of the lever member 10340 is executed in accordance with the execution period of the touch effect. Thereby, the lever member 10340 can be reliably moved to the first position.

In the second control example, the touch sensor is configured to be operable with one hand. In this case, the touch sensor can be operated while holding the lever member 10340 by releasing the operating handle. Therefore, in addition to the touch effect for operating the touch sensor, it is preferable to execute a shooting effect for prompting the player to shoot the ball by operating the operation handle. As a result, the player's hand can be more easily released from the lever member 10340 .

In addition, only the shooting effect described above may be executed, or a touch effect using both hands may be performed. A plurality of touch sensors may be provided so as to be formed, and a touch effect may be executed in which the plurality of touch sensors are operated at the same time.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 486 to 488, the content of the holding effect in the second control example will be described. In this control example, as in the above-described first control example, the special figure variation effect that can be executed in response to the special figure variation for showing the lottery result of the special symbol, and the special figure based on the start winning of the special symbol and a holding effect that can be executed when the holding is obtained, and in any of the effects, an operation effect can be set for the player to operate the operation means.

As mentioned above, the special figure fluctuation production is executed based on the special figure fluctuation, the suspension production is executed based on the acquisition of the special figure reservation, and the suspension production is performed even during the special figure fluctuation production Since it is configured to be executable, it was possible to execute the operation production at various timings, which improved the interest of the game, but the operation production derived from the special figure fluctuation production and the operation derived from the pending production , and are executed at the same time, making it difficult for the player to understand which operation effect is to be changed based on the operation result of the operation means executed by the player.

On the other hand, in this control example, when the execution condition of one operation effect is satisfied, the execution status of the other operation effect is determined, and the execution start timing of the one operation effect is determined based on the determination result. It is configured to be variable. As a result, it is possible to prevent a plurality of operation effects from being executed at the same time, and to provide an easy-to-understand operation effect to the player. Further, a suggestive effect suggesting that the execution of the operation effect is in a waiting state can be executed by using the period from when the execution condition of the operation effect is satisfied until the operation effect is actually executed. are doing. As a result, it is possible to suggest that a new operation performance will be executed after the operation performance currently being executed is finished, so that the player can play the game while anticipating the performance to be executed in the future.

Here, with reference to FIG. 486, the content of the standby effect executed when the operation effects overlap will be described. Figure 486 (a) is a model of an example of the standby effect displayed on the display screen when the conditions for executing the operation effect as a pending effect are established while the operation effect is being executed in the special figure fluctuation effect. FIG. 486(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of display contents displayed on the display screen after the end of the standby effect. In addition, since it is the same as that of the 1st control example mentioned above about the operation production|presentation derived from the special figure fluctuation production|presentation performed in this control example, the detailed description about the content of the production|presentation and an execution opportunity is abbreviate|omitted.

Figure 486 (a) shows the display area on the upper left side of the display screen (see Figure 389) of the third symbol display device 81, specifically, the number of pending balls of the first special symbol (special figure 1). It is a schematic diagram in which the vicinity of the display area Ds1 in which the display mode (reserved ball pattern) is displayed is enlarged. As described above, the standby effect shown in FIG. 486 (a) is executed when the operation effect derived from the special figure fluctuation effect is executed, so the illustration is omitted in FIG. 486 (a) However, in the substantially central portion of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the operation effect derived from the special figure variation effect is executed.

In FIG. 486(a), the fourth reserved ball design Hz4 is displayed on the display screen while the first reserved ball design Hz1 to the fourth reserved ball design Hz4 are displayed as the reserved designs of the special figure 1. Based on (based on the fact that the voice lamp control device 113 receives the winning information command indicating the winning information to be the fourth reserved ball of the special figure 1), it shows the state in which the standby effect is being executed.

That is, based on the reception of the winning information command indicating the winning information as the fourth reserved ball of the special figure 1, when the operation effect (suspended operation effect) for causing the player to operate the operation means as the pending effect is executed If it is determined (the execution condition of the pending operation effect is established), and furthermore, it is determined that the operation effect (special figure operation effect) is being executed as a special figure fluctuation effect at that time (the standby condition of the pending operation effect is established ), a standby effect is executed that suggests that the pending operation effect is executed.

In this standby effect, an effect is executed in which the suggestive character HC1 appears (into the frame) in the display screen while rotating the display part (the head in FIG. 486(a)) having a plurality of display surfaces. This suggestive character HC1 has three display surfaces, on which characters "PUSH", "red", and "chance" are displayed. Then, after the display parts are rotated during the standby effect, the specific display part is stopped and displayed at a position more easily visible than the other display parts as the effect result of the standby effect.

For example, when a pending operation effect is executed after a standby effect, a specific display portion where the characters “PUSH” are displayed as a result of the standby effect is stopped and displayed at a position that is easier to see than other display portions. , the pending operation effect is executed.

In this way, when the standby effect is being executed, the effect of rotating the display part of the suggestion character HC1 framed in the display screen is executed. By displaying the display mode (“PUSH”) for operating the operation means, it is possible to suggest to the player that the pending operation effect is in the standby state. In addition, by rotating the display mode ("PUSH") for allowing the player to operate the operation means, the player can be notified that the operation effective period of the pending operation effect is not set at the present time (during the standby effect). It can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner.

In this control example, the suggestive character HC1 is framed in the display screen while the standby effect is being executed. may be configured to be framed in. In addition, as a waiting effect, a rotating effect is executed with predetermined display modes (“PUSH”, “red”, “chance”) displayed on a plurality of display surfaces serving as display portions of the suggestive character HC1. However, without being limited to this, the display mode displayed on the plurality of display surfaces that serve as the display parts of the suggestive character HC1 may be changed during the standby effect, or the display mode may not be displayed. It may be configured to execute an effect of rotating the display part.

Further, in the effect of rotating the display part of the suggestion character HC1 executed during the standby effect, the rotation speed of the display part may be varied according to the progress of the standby effect. It may be configured to reduce the rotational speed. By configuring in this way, it is difficult to understand what the suggestion character HC1 is suggesting immediately after the standby effect is executed, and as time elapses, it becomes easier for the player to comprehend the suggestion content of the suggestion character HC1. can do. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the effect contents of the standby effect.

Further, the rotation speed of the display part of the suggestion character HC1 may be varied based on the operation contents of the operation means in the special figure operation presentation being executed. It is preferable to configure so that the rotation speed is increased based on the operation of the operating means. By configuring in this way, in a state in which the operating means is being actively operated during the special figure operation presentation, the display portion of the suggestive character HC1 rotates at high speed, and is displayed at the display portion of the suggestive character HC1. It is possible to make it difficult to identify the characters of "PUSH" that are displayed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player concentrate on the special figure operation effect and play the game.

In addition, the relationship between the operation mode of the player's operation means for the special figure operation effect and the effect mode displayed during the standby effect is not limited to this, and the player operates the operation means during the special figure operation effect. The display mode displayed on each display surface of the display portion of the suggestion character HC1 may be changed based on the operation.

In this control example, when the standby effect shown in FIG. The character "PUSH" is stopped and displayed so that it can be identified, but if it is determined that the pending operation effect cannot be executed after the standby effect is completed, the display portion of the suggestion character HC1 is changed to "red" or "chance". It is configured to stop display so that the characters are identifiable.

Then, as shown in FIG. 486(b), when the display portion of the suggestion character HC1 is stopped so that the characters "red" can be identified, the hold ball pattern is displayed without executing the operation effect. (In FIG. 486(a), the second reserved ball pattern, which was in the blue display mode, is changed to the red display mode).

In this way, when the execution condition of the pending operation effect is satisfied and the pending operation effect cannot be executed immediately, the standby effect is executed, and whether the pending operation effect can be executed at the end timing of the standby effect. It is possible to simplify the determination of the execution condition of the standby effect by determining again and varying the effect result of the standby effect based on the result of the determination.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 487 and 488, the flow of setting the operation effect in the second control example will be described. In this second control example, the production mode of the fluctuation production corresponding to the special figure fluctuation is set at different timings in the first half period (first period) and the second half period (second period) of the special figure fluctuation period. It consists of Specifically, the production mode of the special figure fluctuation production corresponding to the first half period (first period) of the special figure fluctuation period is set at the start timing of the special figure fluctuation (timing of receiving the fluctuation pattern command), and the special figure The production mode of the special figure fluctuation production corresponding to the second half period (second period) of the fluctuation period is configured to be set after the passage of a predetermined period after the special figure fluctuation has passed.

Furthermore, in this control example, the information (first information) used to set the production mode (first production mode) of the variation production corresponding to the first period of the special figure fluctuation period, and the second special figure fluctuation period The information (second information) used for setting the effect mode (second effect mode) of the variable effect corresponding to the period is different. The effect mode is set based on the variation pattern command output from, and the second effect mode is the effect information stored when the first effect mode is set (information stored in the effect information storage area 223ak), Information indicating whether the pending effect (holding operation effect) is on standby (setting status of the standby flag 223ah) is configured to be set based on this.

Here, with reference to Figure 487 and Figure 488, the setting method of special figure fluctuation production and reservation production is explained. Figure 487 is a diagram showing a setting method of various effects in the case where the execution condition of the holding operation effect is established as a holding effect during the first period of the special figure fluctuation period, and Figure 488 shows the setting method of the special figure fluctuation period It is the figure which showed the setting method of various production|presentations when the execution conditions of the pending|holding operation production|presentation are satisfied during the 2nd period as a holding|holding production|presentation.

As shown in FIG. 487, the variation pattern command is output from the main controller 110 to the audio ramp controller 113 at the timing when the special figure variation is executed. Then, on the voice lamp control device 11 side, based on the information indicating the special figure fluctuation time included in the received variation pattern command, the information indicating the lottery result of the special figure lottery, and the information indicating the stop type of the special figure, the variation pattern With reference to the table 223a, the variable effect of the first period is set. Specifically, the variable effect mode of the first period and the effect information indicating the length of the second period are set and stored in the effect information storage area 223ak.

Here, when the operation effect (special figure operation effect) is set as the variable effect mode of the set first period, the special figure operation effect is executed in accordance with the execution timing of the special figure operation effect, and the game Set an operation validity period that effectively determines the operation that the user performs on the operation means. Then, during the period during which the variable effect of the first period is being executed, a start winning of a special symbol (a ball entering the first winning opening 64) occurs, and the main controller 110 gives the prefetch result corresponding to the starting win. When the winning information command including , when it is determined that the holding effect has been executed, a process of setting the effect mode of the holding effect is executed.

A performance mode other than the operation performance (suspension operation performance) as the performance mode of the suspension performance (for example, display of any one of the special figure suspension ball patterns Hz1 to Hz4 based on the elapsed time without using the operation of the operation means by the player When the performance mode of changing the mode) is set, the pending performance is executed without discriminating the performance mode of the special figure variation performance being executed. On the other hand, when the operation effect (holding operation effect) is set as the effect mode of the holding effect, in order to determine whether the current situation is such that the holding operation effect can be executed, the special figure fluctuation effect being executed (first Analyze the content of the special figure fluctuation performance during the period) and determine whether the operation performance does not overlap. Parse the content.

By this analysis, if it is determined that the operation effect overlaps, that is, the current time is within the period in which the special figure operation effect is being executed, or if the pending operation effect is executed, special during the pending operation effect When it is determined that the figure operation effect will be executed, the holding operation effect is not executed within the first period of the special figure fluctuation period, and the standby effect is executed (see FIG. 486(a)).

Then, the second period of the special figure fluctuation period (the period of 30 seconds to 60 seconds of the special figure fluctuation period) is set at the timing (28 seconds after the start of the special figure fluctuation), the first period Production mode during the second period based on production results of various productions (for example, production results for operation production) in the second period, production information stored in the production information storage area 223ak, and standby status of pending operation production. set. Although a detailed explanation is omitted, the information to be referred to when setting the effect mode during the second period is given a priority order, and information that overlaps when setting the effect mode is It is configured such that the mode of presentation is set based on information for which a high priority is set. Specifically, if the lottery result of the special figure fluctuation being executed is a big hit, the various information for indicating the lottery result of the fluctuation is set higher than the standby information of the pending operation effect. When the lottery result of the special figure variation under execution is out, the standby information of the holding operation performance should be configured to have a higher priority than the lottery result of the special figure variation under execution. By configuring in this way, the effect executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 can be executed in accordance with the interest of the player.

Next, with reference to FIG. 488, an effect setting method for a case where a new special figure winning occurs during the second period of the special figure fluctuation period will be described. As shown in FIG. 488, when the timing determined to receive the winning information command and execute the pending operation effect is during the second period of the special figure fluctuation effect, at that time, whether the pending operation effect can be executed It is determined whether or not, and when it is determined to be executable, the pending operation performance is executed as it is, and when it is determined to be impracticable (difficult), the pending performance which does not execute the pending operation performance is executed as the current pending performance. .

As described above, in this control example, at the execution start timing of the special symbol variation effect (special figure variation effect), the length of the first period and the first period based on the variation time information included in the received variation pattern command The length of two periods is set, and the presentation mode is set according to the length of the set period. The execution period of the set effect mode may be set as the first period, and the remaining period may be set as the second period. By configuring in this way, the performance mode of the variable performance to be executed in the first half period can be set without worrying about the performance period, so that the types of performances to be executed can be easily increased.

In addition, in this control example, the pending operation effect that has entered the standby state during the first period is configured to be executable during the second period. (Production content, production period) and the production mode of the pending operation production executed after the second period (executed after waiting) may be configured to be different. It is preferable that the effect mode of the pending operation effect to be executed has a shorter effect period than the effect mode of the pending operation effect to be executed during the second period.

By configuring in this way, when the standby effect is executed and then the pending operation effect is executed, the pending operation effect using a longer period is executed, so that the effect of the pending operation effect can be easily enhanced. can do. Therefore, when the waiting effect is executed, the game can be played while expecting that the holding operation effect will be executed.

Furthermore, during the waiting period in which the pending operation effect is waiting, if a new special figure pending is acquired, the pending operation effect that also reflects the look-ahead result corresponding to the newly acquired special figure pending is executed. should be configured to By configuring in this way, it is possible to motivate the player to play the game even while the standby effect is being executed. In addition, in the pending operation effect executed after the standby effect, it is possible to execute the effect capable of changing the display mode of a plurality of special figure pending, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Next, referring to FIG. 489, the state transition method of the pachinko machine 10 realized by performing control based on various tables defined in the ROM 202 and various flags and counters provided in the RAM 203. explain. FIG. 489 is a transition diagram showing the state transition flow of the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example. As shown in FIG. 489, in the second control example, the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is the potential state (high probability state of special symbols, low Probability state) can be set, and when a jackpot is won in a special lottery, a normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) can be set after the jackpot game ends. And, it is greatly different in that a state transition is provided to terminate the time saving state (high probability state of normal symbols) based on having won a small hit in the special drawing lottery.

That is, in the first control example described above, since only the normal state can be set as the game state in which the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, when the jackpot game is not executed after the time saving state ends , the player can easily determine that the currently set game state is the normal state. To make it difficult for a player to easily discriminate a set game state when a jackpot game is not executed after a time-saving state is finished, because a normal state and a latent state can be set. can be done.

In addition, among the game states in which the low probability state of the normal design is set, the latent state is set to the high probability state of the special design, and the normal state is set to the low probability state of the special design. The latent state is also configured to be a game state in which it is easy to win a big hit in a special symbol lottery, that is, a game state advantageous to the player. Therefore, even after the time saving state ends, the player can play while expecting that the currently set game state is the latent state, so that the time saving state It is possible to make it difficult to stop the game with the end of .

Here, with reference to FIG. 489, the flow of game state transition of the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example will be specifically described. Note that the detailed description of the same flow as that of the first control example described above will be omitted. First, when the normal state (low probability state of the special design, low probability state of the normal design) is set, the normal design is a low probability state, and the second special design (special design 2) is started. Since the game state is such that it is difficult for the ball to enter the second winning hole 640, the ball enters the first winning hole 64 that triggers the start of the first special symbol (special figure 1) in the same manner as the first control example described above. A special figure 1 game (left-handed game) is executed.

When a jackpot is won (jackpot probability 1/250) by special figure 1 lottery, a different game state is set after the jackpot ends according to the type of jackpot won. Specifically, when the type of the winning jackpot is "jackpot A, B" (50% of the total jackpot), the variable state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) after the end of the jackpot game is set, and if it is "jackpot C" (30% of the total jackpot), a time-saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is set after the end of the jackpot game, and "jackpot F" In some cases (20% of all jackpots), the normal state is set again after the jackpot game ends.

Next, when the time saving state is set, the normal symbol is a high probability state, and since it is a game state that makes it easy to win the ball to the second winning port 640 that is the trigger for starting the special figure 2, as described above As in the first control example, a special figure 2 game (right-handed game) is executed in which the ball is entered into the second winning opening 640 that triggers the start of the special figure 2.

Then, when a jackpot is won in the special figure 2 lottery (jackpot probability 1/250), a different game state is set after the jackpot ends according to the type of jackpot won. Specifically, if the type of the winning jackpot is "jackpot D" (80% of the total jackpot), the variable probability state is set after the jackpot game ends, and if it is "jackpot E, G" (the total jackpot 20%) is configured so that the time saving state is set again after the jackpot game ends. In other words, when a big win is won in the special figure 2 lottery during the variable probability state, the high probability state of the normal pattern is always set after the big win game ends.

In addition, in this control example, as in the above-described first control example, every time the special symbol lottery condition is established, a lottery (so-called drop lottery) is performed to determine whether or not to fall to a special symbol low probability state. It is configured to run. Furthermore, it has a plurality of conditions for shifting the time saving state (high probability state of normal symbols) to the low probability state of normal symbols, and after the time saving state set in the first control example is set. In addition to the first time-saving end condition that is established when the number of special figure fluctuations reaches a predetermined number of times (e.g., 100 times), as a result of the special figure lottery during the time-saving state, a specific lottery result other than the jackpot winning (e.g., Set the second time-saving end condition that is satisfied when the number of times that the small hit A winning) is won reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 2 times), and if any of the time-saving end conditions are satisfied, the time-saving state (normal high probability state of the design) to the low probability state of the normal design.

Thus, in this control example, when the variable probability state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is set after the end of the jackpot game, during the variable state, aim at the jackpot by special drawing lottery. A game (falling lottery) for shifting a high probability state of a special pattern to a low probability state while executing a game, and a game (a special drawing lottery) for shifting a high probability state of a normal pattern to a low probability state. will run in parallel. In addition, the timing of shifting the probability state of the special pattern based on the drop lottery and the timing of shifting the probability state of the normal pattern based on the special pattern lottery are not related, and which timing is faster. Since it is configured so that it is determined based on the result of a predetermined lottery whether it will arrive, the game state transition can be set intricately for the player.

Returning to FIG. 489, the description continues. If you win a small hit (1/100) in a variable state, if the small hit type is other than a specific small hit type (small hit B) (50% of the total small hit), or the first specific small If it is a hit type (small hit A), without shifting the game state, if it is the second specific small hit type (small hit A), the high probability state of the normal pattern is changed to a low probability state. configured to migrate. Furthermore, the fall lottery is executed in the same manner as the first control example described above, and the fall lottery is won at the timing when the number of special drawing lots after the variable probability state is set is less than 100 times (fall probability 1/500). In the case, it shifts to a time-saving state, and if the number of special lotteries after the variable state is set is 100 times or more, the fall lottery will be won (fall probability 1/500). It is configured as follows.

In addition, in this control example, without falling during the probability variable state, and when the time saving end condition is not satisfied, the probability variable state is configured to continue until the jackpot is won in the special lottery. , Without being limited to this, when the number of special figure fluctuations (the number of special figure lotteries) reaches a predetermined number (for example, 150 times), a configuration is provided to shift the high probability state of the special symbol to the low probability state. Also good. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult to set a game state (probability variable state) advantageous to the player for a long period of time, and to prevent the player from being provided with an excessively advantageous game state. can. Also, in this case, when the high probability state of the normal design is set at the timing of shifting the high probability state of the special design to the low probability state, the high probability state of the normal design also goes to the low probability state. It may be configured to shift to .

Finally, when the latent certainty state is set, the normal symbol is a low probability state, and since it is a game state where it is difficult to win the ball to the second winning hole 640 which is the trigger for starting the special figure 2, the normal state Similarly, a special figure 1 game (left-handed game) for winning the ball to the first winning opening 64 that triggers the start of special figure 1 is executed.

Then, when a jackpot is won in the special figure 1 lottery (jackpot probability 1/125), a different game state is set after the jackpot ends according to the type of jackpot won. Specifically, when the type of the winning jackpot is “jackpot A, B” (50% of the total jackpot), the variable probability state is set after the jackpot game ends, and when it is “jackpot C, F” (jackpot 50% of the total) is configured so that the time saving state is set after the jackpot game ends.

In other words, when the jackpot is won in the latent state, it is easier to set a game state advantageous to the player after the jackpot game than when the jackpot is won in the normal state. . By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the game state more advantageous to the player in the latent state than in the normal state, so even after the time saving state is over, the current setting is performed for the player. Since it is possible to play the game while expecting that the current game state is the latent state, it is possible to make it difficult to stop the game when the time saving state ends. Also, during the latent state, the low probability state of the normal pattern is set, so if you win the fall lottery and shift the high probability state of the special pattern to the low probability state, the number of special drawing lots Regardless, it will return to normal.

As described above, in the second control example, after the end of the jackpot game, the high probability state of the normal symbol (probability variable state or time saving state) is set, and after that, before the special figure fluctuation reaches 100 times (the first If the high-probability state of the normal pattern ends before the time-saving end condition is established), a special lottery wins a jackpot, or a time-saving end condition (second time-saving end condition) is set based on a small win. That's what it means. Therefore, when the high-probability state of the normal pattern ends before the first time-shortening end condition is established, the game can be played while expecting whether or not a big win is won in the special drawing.

Furthermore, in this control example, as in the first control described above, even if the drop lottery is won during the period until the special figure fluctuation reaches 100 times, the player is not notified of the drop win. there is Then, when the high probability state of the normal pattern ends in the period until the special figure fluctuation reaches 100 times, the same back mode (lost mode) regardless of the game state (normal state or latent state) ) is configured to be set. By configuring in this way, when the high probability state of the normal pattern is set after the end of the jackpot, the current probability state (high probability state of special patterns, high probability state of normal patterns) or time saving state (special It is difficult to understand whether it is a low probability state of the pattern, a high probability state of the normal pattern, and even after the high probability state of the normal pattern is over, the current is a latent state (high probability state of the special pattern, normal pattern) It is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand whether it is a low probability state) or a normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols).

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from easily determining that the currently set game state is a disadvantageous game state (for example, a normal state) and stopping the game early.

<Electrical Configuration in Second Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 490 to 498, the electrical configuration in this second control example will be described. In this control example, the configuration of various counters possessed by the main controller 110, the configuration of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the configuration of the RAM 203, and the sound lamp are different from the electrical configuration of the first control example described above. The difference is that new elements are added to the configuration of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the control device 113 and the configuration of the RAM 223 . Elements that are the same as those in the first control example are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 490, configurations of various counters in the second control example will be described. FIG. 490 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the counter configuration in the second control example. In contrast to the first control example described above, this second control example is configured so that a small win can be won in a special symbol lottery. Based on the value of the special hit random number counter C1, it is configured to determine whether or not there is a small hit using the small hit random number 2 table 202ab (see FIG. 493(a)). Then, when a small hit is won in the special lottery, the small hit type selection 2 table 202ac is used based on the acquired value of the small hit type counter C6 in order to select the small hit type of the won small hit. The small hit type is configured to be selectable. In addition, the detailed contents of the small hit type that can be selected in this control example will be described later.

In this second control example configured in this way, the above-described small hit type counter C6 is added to the various counters of the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10, and the value of the acquired small hit type counter C6 and a small hit type counter storage area in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. The difference is that they are provided. Although not shown in FIG. 490, the special symbol reserved ball execution area also stores the counters provided in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. It is different from the first control example in that an area is provided and a small hit type counter storage area is also provided.

Although the details will be described later, in this second control example, the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1 lottery) does not win a small hit, and only the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2 lottery) It is configured so that a small prize can be won. In this way, by providing a small hit type storage area for the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a corresponding to the special symbol (special symbol 1) that cannot be won with a small hit, the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area is provided. 203a and the configuration of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b can be unified. In addition, it is possible to unify the contents of the processing (information acquisition processing) that is executed when the acquisition conditions for acquiring the values of various counters are met. That is, by daringly providing a process for acquiring the value of the small hit type counter C6 that is unnecessary because there is no winning in the small hit in the special figure 1 lottery, and a configuration for storing the acquired value of the small hit type counter C6. , When the acquisition condition of special figure 1 is satisfied (when the ball wins in the first winning opening 64), and when the acquisition condition of special figure 2 is satisfied (when the ball wins in the second winning opening 640) , and the processing load on the main controller 110 can be reduced.

Furthermore, in the case of changing the game property so as to win a small prize even in the special figure 1 lottery, the change processing can be easily executed, so that the game property can be easily diversified. It should be noted that, as in this control example, without using a configuration that simplifies the entire process by providing an unnecessary process, when the acquisition conditions of the special figure 1 is satisfied, the value of the small hit type counter C6 may be configured not to acquire As a result, the acquisition of information (the value of the small win type counter C6) that is not actually used in the game is eliminated, so that it is possible to reliably prevent the act of analyzing the game content based on the information acquired unnecessarily. can.

As described above, in the second control example, the special winning random number counter C1 is used for the small winning lottery that draws the presence or absence of the small winning winning among the special symbol lottery (special drawing lottery), and the small winning type is selected. When doing so, a small hit type counter C6 is used. An initial value random number counter CINI1 and a variation type counter CS1 used for selecting a variation pattern of special symbols are used to set the initial value of the small winning type counter C6. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 425), and some counters are updated irregularly during the main processing (see FIG. 434). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 . The RAM 203 includes a first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a corresponding to winning in the first winning opening 64 consisting of four reserved areas (first to fourth reserved areas), and four reserved areas (first reserved area). to the fourth area), and a second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b corresponding to the winning to the second winning opening 640 is provided. In accordance with the winning timing to the winning opening 64 (according to the establishment of the acquisition condition), a special winning random number counter C1, a special winning type counter C2, a stop type selection counter C3, a fluctuation type counter CS1, a falling lottery counter C4, and a small winning. Each value of the type counter C6 is stored.

Then, when the starting condition (fluctuation condition) of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is established, the various values stored in the first reserved area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a are changed to the first special symbol. It shifts to the execution area, and special symbol variation based on various values stored is started. In addition, in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, in accordance with the winning timing to the second winning opening 640 (according to the establishment of the acquisition condition), a special winning random number counter C1, a special winning type counter C2, a stop type Each value of the selection counter C3, the variation type counter CS1, the falling lottery counter C4, and the small hit type counter C6 is stored.

Then, when the starting condition (fluctuation condition) of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is established, the various values stored in the first reserved area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a are changed to the first special symbol. It shifts to the execution area, and special symbol variation based on various values stored is started.

In addition, in this control example, the value of the special winning random number counter C1 is used when the lottery for the presence or absence of the small winning winning is made. In other words, in order not to win both a big hit and a small hit in one special lottery, it is first determined whether the big hit has been won in the special lottery, and it is determined that the jackpot has not been won. Since it is configured to determine whether or not a small win is won in the case of winning, a common counter (special win random number counter C1) is used to determine whether the big win or the small win is won. are doing. Without being limited to this, it may be configured to provide a dedicated counter (for example, a small hit random number counter) for determining the presence or absence of a small hit winning.

In addition, in this control example, when the acquisition condition is satisfied based on the ball winning in the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 640 (for example, the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second When there is a new winning while the storage area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is empty), the value of each main counter described above is acquired, and the acquired value is stored in the corresponding reserved ball storage area. Although it is configured to store, it is not limited to this, for example, a new new in a state where there is space in the storage area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b. When a prize is won, only the right to acquire the values of various counters is stored in each corresponding reserved ball storage area, and the values of various counters are acquired based on the establishment of the variable condition of the special symbol. Alternatively, only a specific counter value is obtained based on the ball winning in the first prize winning port 64 or the second prize winning port 640, and the remaining counter value is obtained when the fluctuation condition is satisfied. It may be configured to acquire.

As described above, in this control example, in contrast to the above-described first control example, it is configured to be able to win a small hit in a special symbol lottery (special lottery), and the acquired small hit type It is configured to execute various controls based on the value of the counter C6. Although illustration is omitted, the value of the obtained small hit type counter C is configured to be used for various processes like other counters, and S406 in the start winning process (see FIG. 428), and In the process of S413, a process of storing the value of the small hit type counter C6 acquired in the same manner as other counters in the corresponding reserved ball storage area is executed. In addition, in the processing of S503 and S505 in the look-ahead processing (see FIG. 429), the result of the small winning lottery corresponding to the new winning is acquired, and as the winning information command set in the processing of S504, whether or not the small winning is won And, a winning information command containing information indicating the set small hit type is set.

Furthermore, although the detailed explanation is omitted, if you win a small hit in the special lottery, after the special figure fluctuation for showing the lottery result of the special lottery is displayed (confirmed display), the small hit is won. The flag (small hit start flag) shown is set to ON, and the main processing of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 434) is performed every 4 milliseconds by the small hit control processing, so that the small hit game based on the small hit winning is executed.

When this small hit control process is executed, first, it is determined whether the flag indicating the small hit winning (small hit start flag) is set to ON, and if it is determined that it is set to ON, it is set A process of setting an opening operation for executing a small winning game according to the small winning type, setting a small winning middle flag to ON, and setting a small winning start flag to OFF is executed. In this control example, when the small winning game is executed, the variable winning device 65 is configured to be opened. Specifically, the opening period of the small winning game (closing period of the variable winning device 65 ( 0.2 seconds)), round game period (opening period of variable winning device 65 (0.2 seconds)), ending period (closing period of variable winning device 65 (0.2 seconds)) small winning game is set.

In addition, in this control example, even when any of the plurality of small hit types is set, the opening operation described above is configured to be set. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from easily identifying the small win type set for the small win won this time based on the game contents of the small win game (contents of opening operation of the variable winning device 65). can.

The game content of the small hit game is not limited to this, for example, different game content may be set according to the small hit type. The game contents of the small winning game to be executed may be different from the small winning type. Further, as described above, in this control example, the period in which the variable winning device 65 that is opened during the small winning game is in the open state is configured to be shorter than in the big winning game, and is more specific than the big winning game. A winning game in which it is difficult for the ball to enter the winning opening 65 is executed. It should be noted that, regarding the specific contents of the small winning game in this control example, only the period in which the variable winning device 65 is in the open state and the period in which the variable prize winning device 65 is in the closed state are different. It is the same as the jackpot game described above.

Therefore, the various processing contents executed during the small winning game are the same as the processing related to the big winning control of the first control example (see FIGS. 434 to 436), so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 491(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the second control example. As shown in FIG. 491 (a), in this second control example, a jackpot type selection 2 table 202aa is provided instead of the jackpot type selection table 202c (see FIG. 408) for the first control example described above. And, a small hit random number 2 table 202ab referred to when determining the presence or absence of a small hit winning, a small hit type selection table 202ac referred to when selecting a small hit type set when a small hit is won, The difference is that a time saving end condition selection table 202ad in which a time saving end condition for ending the time saving state (high probability state of normal symbols) is defined is added. Other elements are the same, and detailed descriptions of the same elements are omitted.

The jackpot type selection 2 table 202aa is used to select the jackpot type that is set when the jackpot is won. It is different in that the jackpot type that has been added is added. Specifically, when a jackpot is won in the special drawing 1, "jackpot F" can be selected as the jackpot type, and when a jackpot is won in the special drawing 2, "jackpot G" is selected as the jackpot type. It is different in that it is configured to obtain In addition, it is different in that the game state set after the end of the jackpot game is set based on the set jackpot type and the game state when the jackpot is won.

Here, with reference to FIG. 492, the contents of the jackpot type selection 2 table 202aa will be described. FIG. 492(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot type selection 2 table 202aa. As shown in FIG. 492 (a), the jackpot type selection 2 table 202aa is the special drawing 1 jackpot 2 table 202aa1 that is referred to when the jackpot is won in the special drawing 1 lottery, and the jackpot is won in the special drawing 2 drawing. It has a special figure 2 jackpot 2 table 202aa2 that is referred to when the game is played.

Next, the contents of the special figure 1 jackpot 2 table 202aa1 will be described with reference to FIG. 492(b). FIG. 492(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special figure 1 jackpot 2 table 202aa1. This special figure 1 jackpot 2 table 202aa1 is a data table used when a jackpot is won in the special figure 1 lottery like the special figure 1 jackpot table 202d1 described above. As shown in FIG. 492 (b), in this control example, when the jackpot is won in the special figure 1 lottery, the jackpot types are "jackpot A", "jackpot B", "jackpot C", and "jackpot F". It is configured so that four types can be set. And, the content of the jackpot game (the number of round games) is defined in correspondence with the set jackpot type. Furthermore, a game state to be set after the end of the big win game is defined for each big win type in correspondence with the game state when the big win is won.

Specifically, the value of the acquired special hit type counter C is in the range of "0 to 9", "jackpot A", in the range of "10 to 49", "jackpot B", "50 to 79" "jackpot C" is defined in the range of , and "jackpot F" is defined in the range of "80 to 99". When "jackpot A" is set as the jackpot type, "15 rounds (R) round game" is executed as the jackpot game. Then, regardless of the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, the "probability variable state" is set after the jackpot game ends.

When "jackpot B" is set as the jackpot type, "five rounds (R) round game" is executed as the jackpot game. Then, regardless of the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, the "probability variable state" is set after the jackpot game ends.

Further, when "jackpot C" is set as the jackpot type, "five rounds (R) round game" is executed as the jackpot game. Then, when the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is the normal state, the "time saving state" is set after the end of the jackpot game, and the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is other than the normal state (latency state, probability variable state, time saving state). In the case of , "time saving state" is set after the jackpot game ends.

Finally, when "jackpot F" is set as the jackpot type, "five rounds (R) round game" is executed as the jackpot game. Then, when the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is the normal state, the "normal state" is set after the end of the jackpot game, and the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is other than the normal state (latency state, probability variable state, time saving state). In the case of , "time saving state" is set after the jackpot game ends.

In this control example, the game (left-handed game) in which the special figure 1 lottery is executed is configured to be executed in the normal state and the latent state, and on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 In the effect mode of the effect (background mode effect) to be executed, the same effect mode (lost child mode) is set when the normal state is set and when the latent state is set. Configure.

And, as described above, the game state (normal state) is configured to be difficult to set. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the game state more advantageous to the player in the latent state than in the normal state. A game can be played while expecting that the latent certainty state is set. In addition, as described above, the latent state, which is a high probability state of special symbols, is configured to have a higher probability of winning a jackpot in a special lottery than the normal state, which is a low probability state of special symbols. Therefore, it is possible to make the game state more advantageous to the player in the potential state than in the normal state.

In addition, as a pattern in which the special figure 1 lottery is executed during the variable state in which the game (right-handed game) in which the special figure 2 lottery is performed (right-handed game) is performed, the pattern in which the special figure 1 lottery is performed during the time saving state There is a pattern in which the special figure 1 lottery based on the special figure 1 reservation is executed during the variable probability state or the time saving state set after the end of the jackpot game. In this control example, when the big hit is won in the special figure 1 lottery in such a pattern, the game state is set with the same contents as when the big hit is won in the special figure 1 lottery during the latent state. Configure.

By configuring in this way, immediately after the game state (probability variable state, time-saving state) that makes the player play the right-handed game is set, the jackpot is won in the special figure 1 lottery based on the special figure 1 reservation, and the It is possible to suppress the setting of a game state (normal state) in which a left-handed game is performed after the jackpot game ends. Therefore, although the right-handed game advantageous to the player is once set, the left-handed game is set without executing the special figure 2 lottery by the right-handed game, and the player's willingness to play is reduced. It is possible to suppress the situation where

Next, with reference to FIG. 492(c), the contents of the special figure 2 jackpot 2 table 222aa2 that the jackpot type selection 2 table 202aa has will be described. FIG. 492(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special figure 2 jackpot 2 table 222aa2. This special figure 2 jackpot 2 table 222aa2 is a data table referred to when selecting a jackpot type when winning a jackpot in a special figure 2 lottery.

As shown in FIG. 492(c), in this control example, when the jackpot is won in the special figure 2 lottery, three types of "jackpot D", "jackpot E", and "jackpot G" can be set as the jackpot types. It consists of And, the content of the jackpot game (the number of round games) is defined in correspondence with the set jackpot type. Furthermore, a game state to be set after the end of the big win game is defined for each big win type in correspondence with the game state when the big win is won.

Specifically, the value of the acquired special hit type counter C is in the range of "0 to 79", "jackpot D", in the range of "80 to 89", "jackpot E", "90 to 99" "jackpot G" is defined in the range of . In this control example, when the jackpot is won in the special figure 2 lottery, regardless of the set jackpot type, the "15 round (R) round game" is executed as the jackpot game. And, according to the big win type which is set, it is constituted so that the game state which is set after the big win game ends is made different.

Specifically, when the "jackpot D" is set, regardless of the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, the "probability variable state" is set after the jackpot game ends, and when the "jackpot E" is set. , Regardless of the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, the "time saving state" is set after the jackpot game ends. Then, when the "jackpot G" is set, if the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is the "probability variable state", the "normal state" is set after the jackpot game ends, and other than the probability variable state (normal state, Latency state, time saving state) is set, "time saving state" is set after the jackpot game ends.

The small winning random number 2 table 202ab is a data table for determining whether or not the small winning is won in the special lottery, and is referred to when the big winning is not won in the special lottery (when the winning is lost). It is. This small hit random number 2 table 202ab determines whether the lottery result is a small hit in the deviation process (see S351 in FIG. 500) executed in the special symbol variation start process 2 (see S258 in FIG. 499). It is referenced when

Here, the contents of the small hit random number 2 table 202ab will be described with reference to FIG. 493(a). Figure 493 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the small winning random number 2 table 202ab. As shown in FIG. 493(a), the small hit random number 2 table 202ab defines the value of the special hit random number counter C1 that becomes the small hit winning for each symbol type (special symbol type), and each special symbol type. When the lottery is executed, the result of the special lottery is a small winning by comparing the value of the acquired special winning random number counter C1 and the determination value defined in the small winning random number 2 table 202ab. It is determined whether or not

Specifically, the value of the special winning random number counter C1 that becomes a small winning win is not defined for the symbol type "Special Figure 1", and the special winning random number counter C1 for the symbol type "Special Figure 2" becomes a small winning. "0 to 4" are defined as the value of the winning random number counter C1. That is, in this control example, it is specified that the small hit is elected only in the special figure 2 lottery, and the small hit probability in the special figure 2 lottery is 1/100. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the lottery result different between the special figure 1 lottery and the special figure 2 lottery, so that the diversification of the game can be realized and the interest of the game can be improved. can.

In addition, although the details will be described later, in this control example, when a specific small hit (small hit A) is elected a predetermined number of times (twice) during the time saving state (normal symbol high probability state), the time saving end condition (second time saving It is configured so that the end condition) is established and the time saving state ends. As described above, this control example does not win a small hit by the special figure 1 lottery, so the special figure 1 lottery based on the special figure 1 reservation is executed immediately after the time saving state is set. The second time-saving end condition is never satisfied based on the lottery.

Therefore, when the jackpot is won in the special figure 1 lottery executed in the normal state, and the time saving state is set after the jackpot game ends, that is, the time saving state is set in the state where the special figure 2 hold is not acquired. It is possible to suppress the end of the time saving state by the special figure 1 lottery executed in the case. In addition, this control example, like the first control example described above, because it is configured so that the time saving state ends at the start timing of the special figure fluctuation, for example, the time saving state is executed immediately after being set When the time saving end condition is satisfied based on the special drawing lottery (the first special drawing drawing after the time saving state is set), the game during the time saving state (time saving game), that is, the electric accessory 640a is opened. There is a problem that the time-saving state ends without performing a game in which the ball is entered into the second prize winning port 640.例文帳に追加

On the other hand, in this control example, since it is configured so that the second time saving end condition is not satisfied by the special figure 1 lottery, the jackpot is won in the special figure 1 lottery executed in the normal state, When the time saving state is set after the jackpot game ends, that is, when the time saving state is set in a state where the special figure 2 reservation is not acquired, the time saving state ends without performing the time saving game. can be suppressed. In addition, in this control example, since the number of winnings of the small hit that satisfies the second time saving end condition is set to "2 times", it is configured so that the time saving state is not ended by one special lottery during the time saving state. there is Therefore, although the time saving state is set, it is possible to suppress the end of the time saving state without performing the time saving game.

Here, when a small win is won in a special lottery (special figure 2 lottery), a winning game different from when a big win is won is executed. A winning game in which the device 65 is opened for a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.2 seconds), that is, a winning game capable of giving the player a privilege smaller than that of the big winning game is executed.

In addition, in this control example, the same winning hole (specific winning hole 65a) in the case of winning a small prize and in the case of winning a big win changes from the first state (closed state) in which it is difficult to win a ball to the first state in which a ball is likely to win. Although it is configured to execute a winning game that opens the variable winning device 65 so as to be variable to two states (open state), it is not limited to this, and different variables are used for the big winning game and the small winning game. The prize winning device may be configured to be opened.

In this case, the privilege (the number of prize balls to be paid out when the ball wins) given when the ball wins the prize opening of the variable prize winning device that is opened during the small win game is opened during the big win game. It may be configured so that the number of balls won in the winning opening of the variable winning device is smaller than that in the case of winning the ball, or the winning opening of the variable winning device to be opened during the big winning game is opened during the small winning game. The winning opening of the operated variable winning device may be configured to make it more difficult for the ball to win.

In this control example, in the special drawing lottery, a data table (special symbol jackpot random number table 202a) for determining whether the jackpot was won and a data table (small hit random number 2) for determining whether the small hit was won Although the table 203ab) is used separately, it is not limited to this, and it is configured to use one data table to determine whether the special drawing lottery this time is a big win or a small win. can be In this case, for example, the value of the special winning random number counter C1 corresponding to the small winning winning may be defined in the big winning random number table 202a without duplication with the value of the special winning random number counter C1 corresponding to the winning big winning. By configuring in this way, the number of data tables that the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 has can be reduced.

The small hit type selection 2 table 202ac is a data table that is referred to when selecting the small hit type that is set when the small hit is won, and is referred to when the small hit is won in the special lottery. be. The small hit type selection 2 table 202ac of this control example is configured to be able to select the small hit A and the small hit B as the small hit type, and is executed in the special symbol variation start process 2 (see S258 in FIG. 499) When it is determined that the special figure lottery result of this time is a small hit (see S371 of FIG. 500), it is referred to determine the small hit type ( (See S374 in FIG. 500).

Here, with reference to FIG. 493(b), the contents of the small hit type selection 2 table 202ac will be described. Figure 493 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the small hit type selection 2 table 202ac. In this small hit type selection 2 table 202ac, different small hit types are defined corresponding to the value of the acquired small hit type counter C6. Specifically, the value of the obtained small hit type counter C6 is defined as "small hit A" in the range of "0 to 64", and "small hit B" in the range of "65 to 99". Although detailed description will be described later, in this control example, a predetermined small hit (for example, a small hit A) in the state (time saving state, probability variable state) in which the time saving state (high probability state of normal symbols) is set When the number of times (for example, twice) is won, it is configured to end the time-saving state (high-probability state of normal symbols). In other words, as a condition (time saving end condition) for shifting the time saving state (high probability state of normal pattern) to a low probability state of normal pattern, time saving end condition (second time saving end condition) based on small winning is set It is configured so that

Here, in the state where the time saving state (low probability state of special design, high probability of normal design) is set, when the time saving end condition is satisfied, normal state (low probability state of special design, low probability of normal design) is set. This control example, like the first control example described above, is configured so that the time saving state is more advantageous to the player than the normal state. The game is played while expecting that is set.

On the other hand, in this control example, as described above, the time saving end condition is established based on the small winning, so the player can understand at what timing the time saving state ends. can be made difficult. Therefore, the player who is playing the game in the time saving state can be made to play the game with a sense of tension.

In addition, in this control example, as the same time saving end condition as the first control example described above, the number of lotteries (number of fluctuations) of special symbols executed in a state where the high probability state of normal symbols is set is a predetermined number of times ( For example, it is configured to set a time saving end condition that is satisfied when reaching 100 times. As a result, it is possible to set an upper limit to the period in which the game state that is advantageous to the player is set (the period in which the time saving state is set), so it is possible to suppress the excessive awarding of benefits to the player. can do.

Similarly, in a state in which the variable state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability of normal symbols) is set, when the time-saving end condition is satisfied, the latent state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability of normal symbols ) is set. Also in this case, the variable definite state becomes a game state more advantageous to the player than the latent definite state. In this control example, similarly to the above-described first control example, when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set after the jackpot game ends, a predetermined period after the jackpot game ends (the number of special symbol fluctuations is 100 times During the period until reaching ), a special mode effect is executed, and if the normal state or latent state is set during the mode effect, the same mode (lost child mode) is set, and a mode effect corresponding to the lost child mode is executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81.例文帳に追加

By configuring in this way, it is difficult for the player to understand whether the current state is the normal state or the latent state during execution of the mode effect. Here, the difference between the normal state and the latent certain state will be explained. The normal state and the latent probability state are both set to a normal pattern low probability state, and the electric accessory 640a is opened based on the normal pattern hit, and the ball is difficult to win in the second winning hole 640. Therefore, it becomes a game state in which a left-handed game (special figure 1 game) is executed to win the ball in the first winning hole 64, but the normal state is a low probability state of special symbols, while the latent Since the definite state is a high probability state of special symbols, the probability of winning the jackpot in the special symbol lottery (special lottery) is higher than the normal state (jackpot winning probability 1/250), the latent state (jackpot winning probability 1 /125) is higher.

Furthermore, when a jackpot is won, the game state set after the end of the jackpot game based on the jackpot win is made different between when the jackpot is won during the normal state and when the jackpot is won during the latent state. It is constructed in such a manner that a game state advantageous to a player is set more easily when a big win is won during a latent state than when a big win is won during a normal state. Specifically, when the jackpot is won in the normal state, the ratio of the game state set after the end of the jackpot game is set to 50% variable probability state, 30% time-saving state, and 20% normal state. On the other hand, the ratio of the game state set after the end of the jackpot game when winning the jackpot in the latent probability state is configured to be 50% of the variable probability state and 50% of the time saving state. Therefore, the latent state is a game state more advantageous to the player than the normal state.

As described above, in this control example, when the normal state is set during the mode effect executed during the predetermined period after the end of the jackpot game (the period until the number of special figure fluctuations reaches 100 times) , the same mode (lost child mode) is set as when the latent state is set, and the mode effect is executed in the same effect mode. By configuring in this way, while the mode production corresponding to the lost child mode (normal state or mode for indicating the latent state) is being executed, the current state is the normal state or the latent state. can be made not easily identifiable by the player. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from immediately stopping the game when the time saving state or the variable probability state ends.

Furthermore, in this control example, at the timing when the mode effect ends (timing when the number of special figure fluctuations executed after the jackpot game ends reaches 100 times), the player is told that the current game state is the normal state. It is configured to be able to execute a notification effect that can identify whether it is in a latent state. As a result, a game that is disadvantageous to the player by executing an effect that makes it difficult to understand whether the current state is the normal state or the latent state for a long time (for example, the latent state is set even though the normal state is set). It is possible to suppress the situation where a game that makes you think that a certain state is set) is executed.

The time saving end condition selection table 202ad is a data table for setting a condition (time saving end condition) for ending the time saving state (high probability state of normal symbols) set after the end of the jackpot game, and is a data table for setting the time saving state. It is referred to at the set timing (end timing of the jackpot game).

Here, the contents of the time saving termination condition selection table 202ad will be described with reference to FIG. 493(c). FIG.493(c) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content prescribed|regulated by the time saving end condition selection table 202ad. As shown in FIG. 493 (c), the time saving end condition selection table 202ad is defined so that different time saving end conditions are set according to the set jackpot type. After the end of the jackpot game in which the jackpots A, E, F, G" are set, the value of the time saving medium counter 203j is set to "100", and the time saving end condition is set in which no value is set to the small hit counter 203aa. be.

Although the details will be described later, the time saving counter 203j is a counter whose value is subtracted by 1 each time the special figure variation is executed during the time saving state, and when the value of the counter becomes "0", It is determined that the conditions for terminating the time saving state (first time saving end condition) are met. In addition, the value of the small hit counter 203aa is subtracted by 1 each time a specific small hit (small hit A) is won during the time saving state (every time a special figure variation that wins a specific small hit is executed) When the value of the counter becomes "0", it is determined that the condition for terminating the time saving state (second time saving end condition) has been established.

That is, after the end of the jackpot game in which the "jackets A, E, F, G" are set, a time saving state is set in which the second time saving end condition (time saving end condition established based on the winning of the small win) is not set. .

On the other hand, after the end of the jackpot game in which "jackets B, C, D" are set as the jackpot types, the value of the time-saving medium counter 203j is set to "100" and the value of the small hit counter 203aa is set to "2". A time-saving end condition is set. That is, after the end of the big win game in which "big wins B, C, D" are set, when the small win A is won twice as the second time-saving end condition (time-saving end condition established based on the small win winning). A time saving state is set in which the time saving end condition to be established is set.

In this control example, as described above, the game state in which the time saving state (high probability state of normal symbols) is set is more advantageous to the player than the game state in which the low probability state of normal symbols is set. Therefore, by providing a time saving state in which the second time saving end condition is set and a time saving state in which the second time saving end condition is not set, the game state advantageous to the player can be easily continued. It is possible to set a state and a time saving state that is difficult to continue.

In addition, in this control example, even if the time saving state is set based on which jackpot type, the number of times of special symbol fluctuation (number of special figure fluctuations) "100 times" is set as the first time saving end condition However, without being limited to this, a different first time-saving end condition may be set according to the jackpot type, or a jackpot type in which the first time-saving end condition is not set may be provided. Furthermore, a jackpot type for which the second time-saving end condition is set and a jackpot type for which the second time-saving end condition is not set are provided, but different end conditions may be set as the second time-saving end condition according to the jackpot type. Furthermore, in this control example, the first time saving end condition, or the second time saving end condition is configured to end the time saving state when either is satisfied, but not limited to this, the first time saving You may comprise so that a time saving state may be ended when end conditions and 2nd time saving end conditions are satisfied.

In addition, in the present control example, even if any of the time saving end conditions are established, it is configured to end the time saving state at the start timing of the special figure fluctuation, but not limited to this, established Depending on the type of time saving end condition, the time saving state may be ended at different timings, for example, when the first time saving end condition is met, the timing at which the established special figure fluctuation is stopped and displayed, and the stop display ends The time saving state may be ended at the timing (the timing when the symbol confirmation display period has passed), and if the second time saving end condition is satisfied, the second time saving end condition is satisfied. The timing when the figure fluctuation is stopped and displayed, the timing when the stop display ends (the timing when the symbol fixed display period has passed), or the timing when the small winning game based on the small winning winning in which the second time saving end condition is satisfied , the time saving state may be terminated at the timing when the small winning game is terminated. By configuring in this way, by grasping the timing when the time saving state ends, it becomes possible for the player to predict the time saving end condition established this time.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 491(b). The RAM 203 of the second control example differs from the configuration of the RAM 203 of the first control example described above in that a small hit medium flag 203aa and a small hit counter 203ab are added, and the rest is the same. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

The small hit medium flag 203aa is a flag used for determining whether or not the small hit game is currently in progress, and is set to ON when the small hit game is being executed. A detailed description of the specific processing contents is omitted, but in this control example, it is determined that the variation time has elapsed in the special figure variation processing (see S104 in FIG. 426) of the first control example described above (see FIG. S213 of 426: Yes), when it is determined that the current lottery result is not a big win (S216 of FIG. 426; No), a process for determining whether the current lottery result is a small win is added, and the process is performed. When it is determined that the lottery result of this time is a small hit, a control process for starting a small hit game is executed, and a flag indicating that the small hit game is executable (for example, Small hit start flag) is set to ON. Then, in the main processing (see FIG. 434) of the main controller 110 of the first control example described above, a flag (for example, a small winning start flag) indicating that the small winning game is executable is set to ON. To determine periodically (every 4 milliseconds) whether or not it is set, and to execute a small winning game according to a predetermined opening operation rule when it is determined that it is set to ON. While executing the control process of , the flag 203aa during the small hit is set to ON. Then, when the small winning game executed by the control processing for executing the small winning game ends, the small winning medium flag 203aa is set to OFF.

In this control example, the variable winning device 65 is configured to be opened during the small winning game. The distribution device (V role) is configured to be maintained in a distributable arrangement (arrangement that cannot be distributed to the first area), and the ball wins the variable prize winning device 65 during the small winning game. However, it is configured so as not to pass through the first region (V region). As a result, even though the ball passes through the first area (V area) during the period when the variable winning device 65 is open, a situation occurs in which the variable probability state (high probability state of the special symbol) is not awarded. It is restrained.

In addition, in this control example, the winning device opened by the small winning game and the winning device opened by the big winning game are made the same, thereby reducing the number of devices arranged on the game board 13 and reducing the cost. Although reduction is attempted, a winning device dedicated to a small winning game may be provided separately from the variable winning device 65 without being limited to this. In this case, it is better to provide a winning device dedicated to the small winning game (small winning winning device) at a position away from the second winning opening 640 which is the starting condition for the special figure 2 lottery that can win the small winning, for example, If the pachinko machine 10 uses the configuration of the game board 13 that allows the ball to enter the second winning hole 640 by the right-handed game, the ball launched by the left-handed game can flow down (right-handed game It is preferable to arrange a prize winning device for a small hit in an area where it is difficult (impossible) for the ball shot by to flow down. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player who is executing the right-handed game to execute the special figure 2 lottery to notice that the small winning game has been executed. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the trigger that the above-described second time saving end condition is satisfied. Also, in this case, in a part of the case where the result of the special figure 2 lottery is out, it is preferable to configure so that the period (fixed display period) during which the result of the special figure lottery is stopped and displayed is longer. As a result, the period from when the result of the special figure lottery is stopped to when the next special figure lottery is executed can be lengthened. The player determines whether a predetermined period is required until the lottery is executed, or whether a predetermined period is required until the next special figure lottery is executed because the fixed display period is long and the stop display is displayed. can be difficult to grasp.

The small win counter 203ab is a counter for measuring the number of times the small win is won in the special figure 2 lottery and the small win A is set as the small win type, and after the big win game ends, the time reduction end condition selection table 202ad is changed. A value that is referred to as the second time saving end condition is set. Then, when the small hit A is set during the time saving state, the value is subtracted by 1. Then, the value of the small hit counter 203ab after the subtraction is referred to when determining whether or not to end the time saving state, and when the value after the subtraction becomes 0, the control for ending the time saving state is executed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 494 to 498, the electrical configuration of the audio ramp control device 113 in this control example will be described. This control example differs from the above-described first control example in that configurations are added to the ROM 222 and RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 . First, referring to FIG. 494(a), the configuration of the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described. FIG. 494(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the audio ramp control device 113 in this control example. The ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 in this control example is different from the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the above-described first control example in that a dialogue mode related table 222aa and an operation effect switching table 222ab are added. different, otherwise identical. In FIG. 494(a), description of some of the same elements as in the first control example is omitted, but since they have the same elements, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The dialogue mode related table 222aa is a data table for setting the effect mode of the dialogue effect executed when the dialogue mode is set. Here, the dialogue mode set in this control example will be briefly described. The dialogue mode is one of the presentation modes set based on the variation pattern command output from the main controller 110. When the dialogue mode is set, the dialogue mode described above with reference to FIGS. Zone" is displayed, and an effect is executed in which words corresponding to the stop display mode of the third symbol are displayed (output from the audio output device 226).

Next, the detailed contents of the dialogue mode related table 222aa will be described with reference to FIG. First, with reference to FIG. 495(a), the display mode of each symbol that is variably displayed as the third symbol (fused third symbol) when the serif mode is set will be described. FIG. 495(a) is a diagram showing the correspondence between the symbols. As shown in FIG. 495(a), the fusion third pattern is formed in a display mode in which the number mode, which is identification information for indicating the lottery result of the special lottery, and the character mode indicating the character that emits the lines are fused. , and a number mode is attached corresponding to each character mode. The image data of the third fusion pattern is stored in the character ROM of the display control device 114, and the voice lamp control device 113 outputs a display command indicating that the dialog mode is set to the display control device 114. When it does, it is used as the image data indicating the identification information for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol.

In this control example, different character modes are associated with the number modes 1 to 9, and further, the character modes corresponding to the number modes "1 to 4" and "5 to 9" are associated. A fusion third pattern is formed so that the other is separated. Specifically, in the third fusion pattern corresponding to the number mode "1 to 4", the character mode included in the land creature group is set, and in the third fusion pattern corresponding to "5 to 9" , and the character modes included in the sea creature group are set.

Next, referring to FIG. 495(b), the contents of the dialogue mode related table 222aa will be described. FIG. 495(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the dialog mode related table 222aa. As shown in FIG. 495(b), the dialogue mode related table 222aa includes a dialogue state setting table 222aa1 for setting the current degree of progression of dialogue, a character selection table 222aa2 for selecting a character who will give a dialogue, and an actual Each table is referenced to select a fusion third symbol to be stopped and displayed during dialogue mode, and further, each fusion third symbol is It is configured so as to select the type of spoken lines.

First, the contents of the dialogue state setting table 222aa1 will be described with reference to FIG. 495(c). FIG. 495(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the dialogue state setting table 222aa1. This dialog state setting table 222aa1 is based on the history information stored in the stop symbol information storage area 223ac in which the history information of the third merged symbol that is stop-displayed in the state where the dialog mode is set is stored. It is a data table referred to when setting the state, and as shown in FIG. 495(c), each line state is defined based on the information stored in the stop symbol information storage area 223ac. Based on the speech state selected here, the type of the fusion third symbol to be stopped and displayed next and the contents of speech (speech mode) to be displayed (output) during the speech mode are selected.

Next, referring to FIG. 496, the contents of the character selection table 222aa2 will be described. FIG. 496 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the character selection table 222aa2. This character selection table 222aa2 is different characters ( It is configured so that the first stopped left fusion third symbol) is selected.

Next, referring to FIG. 497, the contents of the dialogue selection table 222aa3 will be described. FIG. 497 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the dialogue selection table 222aa3. This dialogue selection table 222aa3 is based on the dialogue state set using the dialogue state setting table 222aa1 and the character selected by the character selection table 222aa2, the types of right fusion third symbol, middle fusion third symbol, And, it is a data table for selecting the contents of the lines (line mode) of each fusion third pattern.

The operation effect switching table 222ab is a data table for switching the effect mode of the variable operation effect to be executed when the variable operation effect is set based on the variation pattern output from the main controller 110 . In this control example, when the variable operation effect is set, after the lever member 10340 (hereinafter referred to as lever member 10340) of the operation device 10300 is moved from the origin position to the operating position (up position), As shown in 484(a), it is configured such that a variable operation effect is executed for causing the player to operate (depress) the lever member 10340 .

However, in a state in which the presentation period (operation valid period) of the variable operation presentation has passed, if the pressing operation is not performed on the lever member 10340, even if the presentation period (operation valid period) of the variable operation presentation has passed. In spite of this, the lever member 10340 remains in the operating position (up position). In this case, a drive means (motor or the like) for variably operating the lever member 10340 is used to move the lever member 10340 from the operating position (up position) to the origin position, and the lever member 10340 is moved to the initial state (origin position). It is possible to return the lever member 10340 to the state before the start of the variable operation effect by executing the return process for positioning the lever member 10340, but if this configuration is used, the effect will be enhanced. Although the lever member 10340 is moved to the operating position for the purpose, the lever member 10340 returns to the initial position without allowing the player to operate the lever member 10340 located at the operating position, so the production effect is reduced. There was a problem that it could not be increased.

On the other hand, in the second control example, when the lever member 10340 is positioned at the operating position after the effect period of the variable operation effect has passed, the normal state (the lever member 10340 is positioned at the initial position It is configured to make it easier to execute a push-down operation rendering for executing a push-down operation on the lever member 10340 than in the state where the lever member 10340 is pressed. That is, in order to execute one variable operation effect, an effect preparation process is executed to move the operating means (lever member 10340) from the first position (origin position) to the second position (operating position). is completed, a variable operation performance for moving the operation means from the second position to the first position is executed for the player, and the player operates the operation means during the variable operation performance. If the operating means (lever member 10340) does not move to the first position (continues to be positioned at the second position), the operating means (lever member 10340) remains at the second position even after the variable operation effect ends. (operating position) (the state in which the effect preparation process is completed) is maintained, and in the state in which the effect preparation process is completed, the above-described push-down operation effect is easily executed. ing.

By configuring in this way, in order to execute one push-down operation effect, it is possible to cause the operation means (lever member 10340) for which the effect preparation process has been executed to execute the push-down operation effect a plurality of times. Therefore, the operation means can be easily moved to the initial position by the player's operation.

Further, in this control example, in the state where the effect preparation process is completed (the state where the operation means is positioned at the operating position), the operation means is located at the second position (operating position), the operating means (lever member 10340) is moved to the first position (origin position) using a driving means (such as a motor) for variably operating the operating means. It is configured to move (execute return processing). By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the pressing operation effect is persistently executed. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the frequency of execution of effects that give dissatisfaction to players who do not want to operate the operating means. Further, in this case, a storage means capable of storing the execution of the return processing is provided, and when the return processing is executed, that is, the state in which the production preparation processing is completed (the state in which the operating means is positioned at the operating position) , when it is stored that a state in which the operation means is positioned at the second position (operating position) appears despite the execution of the predetermined number of times (twice) of the depression operation effects. , the variable operation presentation may be configured to be difficult to execute. As a result, it is possible to provide an effect corresponding to the taste of the player.

Here, with reference to FIG. 498, the contents of the operation effect switching table 222ab will be described. FIG. 498 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the operation effect switching table 222ab. The operation effect switching table 222ab is referred to when switching the effect mode of the variable operation effect to be executed according to the setting conditions of the initial position change flag 223ag, the origin detection flag 223ae, and the operating position detection flag 223af. be.

Specifically, when the initial position switching flag 223ag is off, the origin detection flag 223ae is off, and the operating position detection flag 223af is off, the touch effect (see FIG. 485) is set as the effect mode of the variable operation effect. When the actuation position detection flag 223af is ON, the lever push-up effect (see FIG. 484(b)) is set. When the initial position switching flag 223ag is off and the origin detection flag 223ae is on, the lever depression effect (see FIG. 484(a)) is set regardless of the setting status of the operating position detection flag 223af.

Further, when the initial position switching flag 223ag is on, the origin detection flag 223ae is off, and the operating position detection flag 223af is off, a touch effect is set, and when the operating position detection flag 223af is on, the lever is pushed up. Performance is set. Finally, when the initial position switching flag 223ag is on and the origin detection flag 223ae is on, the lever depression effect is set regardless of the setting status of the operating position detection flag 223af.

Next, with reference to FIG. 494(b), the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the second control example will be described. FIG. 494(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the second control example. As shown in FIG. 494(b), the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the second control example has a special figure fluctuation counter 223aa, Effect mode storage area 223ab, stop pattern information storage area 223ac, character selection counter 223ad, origin detection flag 223ae, operating position detection flag 223af, initial position change flag 223ag, return operation timer 223ah, operation effect in progress flag 223ai, effect standby The difference is that a flag 223aj, an effect information storage area 223ak, a variable operation effective period timer 223am, a second variable time timer 223an, a pressing effect prohibition flag 223ao, and a variable effect priority flag 223ap are added, and the others are the same. As shown in FIG. 494(b), for convenience of explanation, some of the elements of the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 of the first control example are omitted. The RAM 223 of the device 113 has all the elements of the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 of the first control example described above, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The special figure fluctuation number counter 223aa is a counter for measuring the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (special figure), and when the time saving state (normal high probability state of the symbol) is set after the end of the jackpot game, the jackpot game It is for measuring the period until the number of special figure fluctuations to be executed after the end reaches 100 times. In addition, in this control example, when the second time saving end condition is satisfied, the time saving state (high probability state of normal symbol) is before the number of special figure fluctuations to be executed after the end of the jackpot game reaches 100 times. Since it may end, the name and configuration are divided, but the specific contents of the special figure fluctuation number counter 223aa are the same as the time saving guarantee number counter 223g in the first control example described above.

The production mode storage area 223ab is a storage area for storing the production mode set by the background mode production. It is something to remember.

The stop symbol information storage area 223ac is a storage area for storing stop symbol information (type of left symbol, set words) when the dialogue mode is set.

The character selection counter 223ad is a loop counter that is a kind of effect counter, and its value is referred to when setting a character with reference to the character selection table 2222aa2.

The origin detection flag 223ae and the operating position detection flag 223af are flags for indicating the position of the lever member 10340. An origin detection sensor (not shown) detects that the lever member 10340 is positioned at the initial position (origin position). ) is detected, the origin detection flag 223ae is set to ON, and the operating position detection flag 223af is turned ON when an operating position detection sensor (not shown) detects that the lever member 10340 is positioned at the operating position. is set to

When both the origin detection flag 223ae and the operating position detection flag 223af are set to OFF, it is determined that the lever member 10340 is positioned between the initial position and the operating position, and the origin detection flag 223ae , and the operating position detection flag 223af are both set to ON, the detection means (origin detection sensor, operating position detection sensor) for detecting the position of the lever member 10340 malfunctions, or the lever member 10340 malfunctions. Therefore, it is determined to be in an abnormal state.

Although the detailed explanation is omitted, when it is determined that the lever member 10340 is in an abnormal state, the operation performance is produced using the abnormal selection table in which the variable operation production using the lever member 10340 is not selected. The mode is set, and an error command indicating that the lever member 10340 is in an abnormal state is output to the outside.

The initial position change flag 223ag is a flag for changing the initial position of the lever member 10340, and is set to OFF during the normal state in which the initial position of the lever member 10340 is the origin position. Set to ON when the position is the origin position. Depending on the setting state of the initial position change flag 223ag, the effect mode of the variable operation effect is set.

This eliminates the need to repeatedly execute the return process which is executed after the execution period of the operation presentation has elapsed. In addition, it is possible to prevent the operation device 10300 from breaking down by executing the return processing against the force that maintains the operating position.

The return operation timer 223ah is a timer for measuring the elapsed time during the return process for driving the lever member 10340 toward the initial position, and is set to a predetermined value (for example, 5 seconds) when the return process is executed. seconds) is set. The value of the return operation timer 223ah is decremented by the counter updating process (see S3113 in FIG. 502) of the main process 2 (see FIG. 502) of the sound lamp control device 113 which is periodically executed, and the value becomes 0. It is configured so that the return process is executed until Note that the value (time) set in the return operation timer 223af is set to be longer than the time required for one return process, and once the return process is executed, the lever member 10340 is configured to execute recovery processing a plurality of times.

The flag 223ai during operation presentation is a flag for determining whether or not the operation presentation is currently being performed, and is set to ON when the operation presentation is executed, and is set to OFF when the operation presentation is finished. . This control example is configured to be able to set (execute) the operation production at different opportunities, specifically, when setting the production (variation production) corresponding to the special figure fluctuation, In the case of setting an effect (holding effect) based on the winning of a ball in the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 640), the operation effect can be executed.

The effect waiting flag 223aj is a flag for indicating that the operation effect is in an execution standby state, and is set to ON when the execution of the operation effect is to be put on standby. This effect standby flag 223aj is set when the timing at which it is determined that the operation effect can be executed as the pending effect is during the first period of the variable effect and the timing when the operation effect is being executed as the variable effect. set to on.

Then, at the timing of setting the effect mode for the second period of the variable effect, the effect mode is set based on the setting state of the flag.

The performance information storage area 223ak is a storage area for temporarily storing information regarding each performance. Various effects are set using the information stored in the effect information storage area 223ak.

The variable operation effective period timer 223am measures the variable operation effective period for validly determining the operation of the operation means (lever member 10340) executed by the player when the variable operation effect is set as the operation effect. is a timer, when executing a variable operation effect, a value corresponding to the variable operation effect to be executed is set, and the main processing 2 (see FIG. 502) of the audio lamp control device 113 that is periodically executed It is decremented by the counter update process (see S3113 in FIG. 502). Then, the period until it is determined that the value of the variable operation valid period timer 223am becomes 0 is set as the variable operation valid period.

The second variable time timer 223an is a timer for measuring the elapsed period of the variable performance executed corresponding to the special figure variation, and is the timing for setting the performance mode of the second period of the performance period of the variable performance. It is referred to when determining whether or not the point has been reached. In the second variable time timer 223an, the value calculated as the timing for setting the effect mode of the second period in the normal effect setting process (see S4351 in FIG. 513) is set (see S5215 in FIG. 513), It is decremented by the counter updating process (see S3113 in FIG. 502) of the main process 2 (see FIG. 502) of the sound lamp control device 113 which is periodically executed. Then, in the effect update process 2 (see S3151 in FIG. 503), when it is determined that the value is 0 (S3255 in FIG. 503: Yes), the second A period setting process is executed (see S3256 in FIG. 505).

The pressing effect prohibition flag 223ao is a flag for indicating a period for prohibiting the selection of the pressing effect for operating the PUSH button 10317 as a variation effect corresponding to the special figure variation, and the pressing effect is selected. is set to ON during the period of prohibition of

In this control example, as described above with reference to FIGS. 207 to 211, one operation device 10300 has the PUSH button 10317 and the lever member 10340, and by moving the lever member 10340, the PUSH button 10317 is also configured to move together. Therefore, in this control example, during the period in which the return process for moving the lever member 10340 to the initial position is being executed, the pressing effect for causing the player to operate the PUSH button 10317 is not executed.

With this configuration, the PUSH button 10317 moves smoothly in conjunction with the movement of the lever member 10340 when the player is about to press the PUSH button 10317 based on the execution of the pressing effect. It is possible to suppress the problem that the PUSH button 10317 cannot be pressed immediately.

In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from paying attention to the operating device 10300 during the returning process and giving the player a sense of incongruity with the effect due to the pressing effect being executed while the returning process of the lever member 10340 is being executed. can do. In this control example, a configuration is used in which the pressing effect prohibition flag 223ao is set so that the pressing effect is not executed during the return processing of the lever member 10340. It is also possible to configure so that the return processing of the lever member 10340 is not executed while the lever member 10340 is being held.

The variable effect priority flag 223ap gives priority to the variable operation when setting the operation effect (variable operation effect, pressing effect, etc.) for the player to operate the operation means (for example, the lever member 10340, the PUSH button 10317). A flag for indicating a period in which the effect is set, and is set to ON during a period in which the variable operation effect is preferentially set.

This variable effect priority flag 223ap is set to ON when the variable operation effect is completed with the lever member 10340 positioned at the second position (operating position). As a result, when the lever member 10340 is at the second position (operating position), the variable operation performance can be set more easily than when the lever member 10340 is at the initial position (original position). can be done. Further, it is possible to make it difficult to execute other operation effects (for example, pressing effect) while the lever member 10340 is positioned at the second position (operating position).

As described above, in this control example, the operation device 10300 uses the configuration having the PUSH button 10317 and the lever member 10340, and when the lever member 10340 is at the operating position, it is at the initial position. The lever member 10340 is separated from the base of the operation device 10300 more than the case. Since the PUSH button 10317 is provided on the tip side of the lever member 10340 (on the opposite side to the base of the operation device 10300), the PUSH button 10317 is pressed when the lever member 10340 is at the operating position. When the push operation is performed on the PUSH button 10317 while the lever member 10340 is at the initial position, various structures of the operation device 10300 (for example, the lever member 10340 ), which may lead to a failure of the operation device 10300 . On the other hand, in this control example, when the lever member 10340 is in the operating position, the variable operation effect is preferentially selected as the operation effect. The lever member 10340 can be easily moved to the initial position by the player's operation, and failure of the operation device 10300 can be suppressed.

In this control example, when an operation effect is set in a state where the lever member 10340 is positioned at the operating position, the variable operation effect is selected with priority over other operation effects. However, without being limited to this, for example, even if a variable performance is set without setting an operation performance, it may be configured to set a variable operation performance instead of the performance mode of the variable performance. It is sufficient that the variable operation effect is more easily selected when the lever member 10340 is at the operating position than when it is at the initial position. In addition, in addition to the variation performance that is executed in response to the special figure variation, for example, the normal pattern variation performance that is performed in response to the normal pattern variation (normal pattern variation), the big hit game, and the small hit game. In the winning game effect, the variable operation effect may be more easily selected when the lever member 10340 is positioned at the operating position than when it is positioned at the initial position.

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the second control example>
Next, each control process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 in the second control example will be described with reference to flowcharts in FIGS. 499 to 501. FIG. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are assigned to the same control processes as those of the first control example, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 499, the details of the special symbol variation start process 2 (S258) in the second control example will be described. This special symbol variation start process 2 (S258) is a process executed in place of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 427) in the first control example.

Of the special symbol variation start processing 2 (S258) in the second control example, in each processing of S301 to S309, S310 to 313, S315, S318 and S319, the special symbol variation start processing in the first control example (Fig. 427 See), the same processes as the processes of S301 to S309, S310 to S313, S315, S318 and S319 are executed.

In the process of S309, when it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is determined (S309: Yes), the jackpot type is determined based on the jackpot type selection 2 table 202aa (S352), and the process proceeds to S310.

Further, in the process of S313, after the process of S313 is executed, the process of S314 is not executed, and the process of S315 is executed. After executing the process of S315, the processes of S316 and S317 are not executed, but the deviation process is executed (S351), and the process proceeds to S318. Note that the details of the deviation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 500 .

Next, with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 500, the details of the deviation process (S351) in the second control example will be described. This loss time variation process (S351) is a process executed in the special symbol variation start process 2 (see FIG. 499) in the second control example, and the result of the special figure lottery is other than a big hit (off or small hit).

When the change process at the time of loss (S351) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current lottery result is a small win (S371). (S371: No), the display mode at the time of loss is set (S372), the variation pattern at the time of loss is determined (S373), and the process proceeds to S381. Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the lost symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S307, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is compared with the variation pattern table 202d, and the variation pattern (variation pattern) corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 time).

In the processing of S371, when it is determined that the current lottery result is a small hit (S371: Yes), the small hit type is determined based on the small hit type selection 2 table 202ac (S374).

Here, the value of the small hit type counter C6 obtained in the process of S301, compared with the random value stored in the small hit type selection 2 table 202ac (see FIG. 493 (b)), the small hit type set. Specifically, if the value of the small hit type counter C6 is in the range of "0 to 64", the small hit A is set, and if it is in the range of "65 to 99", the small hit B is set.

After finishing the processing of S374, it is next determined whether or not the determined small hit type is the small hit A (S375). If it is determined that the small hit type is not the small hit A (it is the small hit B) (S375: No), the process proceeds to S381. On the other hand, when it is determined that the small hit type is the small hit A (S375: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the small hit counter 203ab (S376), and then the value of the small hit counter 203ab after the addition is 2 (S377).

When it is determined that the value of the small hit counter 203ab after the addition is not 2 (S377: No), the process proceeds to S380. If it is determined that the value of the small hit counter 203ab after addition is 2 (S377: Yes), that is, if it is determined that the second time saving end condition is satisfied by this small hit winning, the time saving state (normal symbol In order to shift the high probability state) to the low probability state, reset the value of the time saving counter 203g to the initial value (S378), set the state command indicating the time saving end (S379), and move to the process of S380 do.

In the processing of S380, a variation pattern (small winning variation pattern) corresponding to the small winning winning this time is determined. Although detailed description is omitted, when a small win is won in the special drawing lottery, the same variation pattern as when a big win is won in the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example described above is set. That is, the variation pattern to be referred to when a big hit is won in the special drawing lottery is determined from the variation pattern selection table 202b. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the variation pattern determined based on the small win winning and the variation pattern determined based on the big win winning the same. Therefore, since the performance mode of the special figure variation performance to be executed based on the determined variation pattern can be made the same, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand whether he or she has won a big win or a small win.

In the processing of S381, a variation pattern command is set for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 of the variation pattern determined in the processing of S373 and S380 (S381). Then, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type is set (S382). These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the process of S1001 of the main process (see FIG. 434) in the first control example, the sound lamp control device 113 sent. When the processing of S382 ends, the process returns to the special symbol variation processing.

Next, details of the jackpot ending process 2 (S1160) in the second control example will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This jackpot end process 2 (S1160) is a process executed instead of the jackpot end process (see FIG. 437) in the first control example.

Of the jackpot end processing 2 (S1160) in the second control example, in each of S1301 to S1302 and S1305, in the jackpot end processing 2 (see FIG. 437) in the first control example S1301 to S1302 and S1305 The same processing as each processing is executed.

After executing the processing of S1301 and S1302, the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is read (S1351), and the presence or absence of time saving state setting is determined based on the read game state and the jackpot type (S1352). Here, in this second control example, as the other memory area 203z of the RAM 203 of the main controller 110, the current game state, the game state at the time of winning (at the time of winning determination by the special drawing lottery), and the winning It has storage means (game state storage means) capable of temporarily storing the game state at the start of the game. Then, in the process of S1351 described above, the process of reading the game state at the time of winning the jackpot from the game state storage means of the other memory area 203z is executed. With this configuration, it is possible to set a new game state based on not only the currently set game state but also the past game state (the game state at the time when the setting condition of the game state is satisfied). Therefore, it is possible to provide a variety of games.

Next, it is determined whether or not there is a time saving state setting (S1353). When it is determined that there is a time saving state setting (S1353: Yes), based on the contents defined in the time saving end condition selection table 202ad, values are set to various counters (S1354), and the game state after the end of the jackpot is set (S1355), and the process proceeds to S1305.

On the other hand, in the process of S1353, when it is determined that there is no time saving state setting (S1353: No), the process of S1354 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1355.

<Regarding control processing of the sound ramp control device in the second control example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 502 to 516. FIG. In the second control example, a process for executing a variable operation effect for operating the lever member 10340, which is a variable operation member, is added to the above-described first control example. and change the processing content for setting the production mode of the variable production to be set when the variation pattern command is received, and can be set when the winning information command is received. In order to change the processing content for setting a pending effect (holding notice effect), and to select the lost child mode to be executed when the latent state or normal state is set in the process of selecting the back mode The difference is that the processing of is added, and the rest is the same. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are assigned to the same control processes as those of the first control example, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, main processing 2 executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 502 is a flow chart showing this main process 2. FIG. This main process 2 is a process executed instead of the main process (see FIG. 441) in the first control example.

Of the main process 2 in the second control example, the processes of S3102 to S3110 and S3116 to S3120 are the same as the processes of S3102 to S3110 and S3116 to S3120 of the main process (see FIG. 441) in the first control example. process is executed.

After executing the process of S3110, the effect update process 2 is executed (S3151). Details of the effect execution process 2 will be described later with reference to FIGS. After executing the process of S3151, the press detection process 2 is executed (S3152). The details of this press detection process 2 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 506 and 507. FIG. After executing the process of S3152, an operation effect management process is executed (S3153). The details of this operation effect management process will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the process of S3153, the variable operating means management process is executed (S3154). The details of this variable operating means management process will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the processing of S3154, command determination processing 2 is executed (S3155). After executing the process of S3155, the variable display setting process 2 is executed (S3156), and the process proceeds to S3116.

Next, the effect update process 2 (S3151) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 503 is a flow chart showing the effect update process 2 (S3151). This effect update process 2 (S3151) is a process that is executed in place of the effect update process (see FIG. 442) in the first control example, sets a value corresponding to the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation, and periodically While determining the progress of the variable production (variable display production) based on the value of the variable time timer 223s that measures the variable time (variable elapsed time, variable remaining period) of the special figure fluctuation by updating the value, variable The process for updating the effect contents of the operation effect and executing the variable effect corresponding to the second period (the second half period of the special figure change being executed) is the effect update process ( 442) is executed.

In addition, the second variable time timer 223an, which measures the period from the start timing of the special figure variation to the setting of the effect mode of the variable effect corresponding to the second period, is updated in the same manner as the above-described variable time timer 223s. is executed, and when the value becomes 0 (when it is determined that it is time to set the effect mode of the second period), the process for setting the effect mode of the second period is executed. are doing.

Of the effect update process 2 (S3151) in the second control example, the processes of S3201 to S3206 are the same as the processes of S3201 to S3206 of the effect update process (see FIG. 442) in the first control example. executed.

In the processing of S3201, when it is determined that the value of the variable time timer 223s is 0, that is, when it is determined that the present is not during the special figure variation (S3201), the process proceeds to S3255.

On the other hand, after executing the process of S3206, the variable operation presentation process is executed (S3251), and the process proceeds to S3252. Details of this variable operation effect processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the processing of S3252, it is determined whether the value of the variable time timer 223s indicates the start timing of the second period (S3252). When it is determined that the value of the variable time timer 223s indicates the second period start timing (S3252: Yes), the information indicating the variable display mode of the second period stored in the effect information storage area 223ak is read. (S3253), based on the read information, set the display variation pattern command (S3254), and proceed to the process of S3255.

Although a detailed description will be given later, in this control example, when a variation pattern command is received, instead of setting the presentation mode of the variation display presentation for the entire period of the variation time included in the variation pattern command, the first half period It is configured to set the effect mode only (first period). Specifically, as described above with reference to FIG. 487, if the received variation pattern command includes information indicating a variation time of 60 seconds (set a variation effect corresponding to the variation time of 60 seconds case), when the variation pattern command is received, the effect period information indicating that the current variation time is 60 seconds, and the effect period is set to the first period (30 seconds) and the second period (30 seconds) Each period information divided into two and the first period effect mode information indicating the effect mode set for the first period are stored in the effect information storage area 223ak. Then, a value corresponding to the second variable time timer 223an is set in order to measure the second period effect mode setting timing (28 seconds after the start of variation) indicating the timing of setting the effect mode corresponding to the second period.

By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to execute the processing for setting the effect mode of the second period effect 28 seconds after the start of the special figure fluctuation. The exercise information storage area 223ak is also configured to store the effect result of the effect executed during the first period (for example, the effect result of the operation effect executed during the first period). The effect mode of the second period effect is set based on various information stored in the effect information storage area 223ak.

As a result, even at a timing different from the timing at which the variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110, it is possible to set the presentation mode of the variation presentation corresponding to the remaining period (second period) of the special figure variation period. . Furthermore, since it is possible to set the second period production based on the information indicating the production result of the production that has already been executed (the production that is executed during the first period), the special figure fluctuation start timing It is possible to make it easier to set a variety of presentation modes than in the case of setting the presentation mode of the variable presentation for the entire period of the figure fluctuation period.

In addition, in this control example, an example is shown in which the special figure fluctuation period is divided into two periods, the first period (first half period) and the second period (second half period). It may be configured such that the game is divided into variable periods, and an effect mode corresponding to each variable period is set before reaching each variable period. Also, in this control example, the arrival timing of the second period (in the example shown in FIG. 487, the timing after 30 seconds have passed since the start of the special figure fluctuation), but the timing before the arrival timing of the second period (in FIG. 487 In the example shown, at the timing of 28 seconds from the start of the special figure fluctuation), the production mode during the second period is set, and once stored in the production information storage area 223ak, at the arrival timing of the second period, By configuring so as to execute a variable effect in the effect mode stored in the effect information storage area 223ak, it is configured to be able to simplify the processing executed at the arrival timing of the second period. Without being limited to , the process for setting the effect mode during the second period may be executed at the arrival timing of the second period. By configuring in this way, the number of processes to be executed at the arrival timing of the second period is increased. Since it can be executed as it is, it is possible to simplify the storage area for storing the information indicating the effect mode of the variable effect.

In the process of S3252, if it is determined that the value of the fluctuation time timer 223s does not indicate the start timing of the second period (in the example of FIG. 487, the timing of 30 seconds from the start of the special figure fluctuation) (S3252: No ), the process of S3253 and S3254 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S3255.

In the process of S3255, it is determined whether the value of the second variable time timer 223an is 0 (S3255). If it is determined that the value of the second variable time timer 223an is not 0 (S3255: No), this process is terminated. When it is determined that the value of the second variable time timer 223an is 0 (S3255: Yes), that is, when it is determined that it is time to set the effect mode of the second period, the second period setting process is executed. (S3256), after which this process is terminated. Details of the second period setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the variable operation presentation process (S3251) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 504 is a flow chart showing this variable operation rendering process (S3251). This variable operation effect process (S3251) is a process executed within the effect update process 2 (FIG. 503) in the second control example.

In this variable operation effect processing (S3251), a process for setting the effect mode of the variable operation effect and a process for ending the variable operation effect are executed. As described with reference to FIGS. 485 and 486, in this control example, the variable operation effects include a push-down operation effect of pushing down the lever member 10340, a push-up effect of pushing up the lever member 10340, and a push-up effect of pushing up the lever member 10340. Alternatively, a touch effect of touching the detection range of the touch sensor can be set. are doing.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress a situation in which a contradiction occurs between the effect mode of the variable operation effect to be executed and the positional state of the lever member 10340 . Specifically, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the pressing operation effect is executed in a state in which the lever member 10340 is already lowered.

In addition, in this control example, for convenience of explanation, a touch effect for not allowing the player to operate the lever member 10340 will be described as part of the variable operation effect. As described above, this touch effect is an operation effect using the touch sensor, and is an operation effect that does not use the lever member 10340 which is a variable operation member. However, since it is an operation effect for creating a state in which the player's hand is away from the lever member 10340 by executing the effect for touching the detection range of the touch sensor, for example, the lever member For the player who continues to hold the 10340, an effect is made to let go of the lever member 10340, which is a variable operating member. Therefore, in a broader sense, it is part of the variable operation effect. That is, in this control example, as the variable operation effect, the variable operation member (lever member 10340) positioned at the second position (operating position) is moved toward the first position (origin position) (Fig. 484(a)) and a push-up operation performance (FIG. 484(b)) that moves the variable operating member (lever member 10340) located at the first position (origin position) toward the second position (origin position). ) and a touch effect (see FIG. 485) for letting go of the variable operation member (lever member 10340).

When the variable operation effect process (S3251) is started, first, it is determined whether or not it is time to start the variable operation effect (S4601). Here, determination is made based on the effect mode information stored in the effect information storage area 223ak and the value of the variable time counter 223s.

In the processing of S4601, if it is determined that the current time is the start timing of the variable operation effect (S4601: Yes), the operation effect switching table 222ab is referred to and the effect mode of the current variable operation effect is set (S4602). A value corresponding to the operation effect period is set to the variable operation effective period timer 223am corresponding to the set effect mode (S4603), the operation effect in progress flag 223ai is set to ON (S4604), and the process proceeds to S4608.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4601, if it is determined that the present timing is not the start timing of the variable operation effect (S4601: No), then it is determined whether the value of the variable operation effective period timer 223am is 0 (S4605). . When it is determined that the value of the variable operation effective period timer 223am is 0 (S4605: Yes), the effect mode indicating the end of the variable operation effect is set (S4606), and the operation effect in progress flag 223ai is set to OFF ( S4607), and shifts to the processing of S4608. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the variable operation effective period timer 223am is not 0 (S4605: No), the processes of S4606 and S4607 are skipped and the process proceeds to S4608.

In the process of S4608, a display command indicating the effect mode set this time is set (S4608), and then this process is terminated. As a result, it is possible to execute an effect corresponding to the start timing and the end timing of the variable operation effect.

Next, the second period setting process (S3256) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in this second control example will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 505 is a flow chart showing this second period setting process (S3256).

This second period setting process (S3256) is a process executed within the effect update process 2 (FIG. 503) in the second control example. In this second period setting process (S3256), a process for setting the effect mode corresponding to the second period (second half period) of the effect period of the variable effect corresponding to the special figure fluctuation being executed is executed. . In addition, when the pending operation effect is on standby (the effect standby flag 223ah is set to ON), processing for setting the effect mode for executing the pending operation effect during the second period is executed. .

When the second period setting process (S3256) is started, first, from the effect information storage area 223ak, information on the special figure fluctuation being executed (information corresponding to various information contained in the corresponding fluctuation pattern command), Information on the effect result of the first period and information on the second period (information indicating the length of the second period) are read out (S4701), and then it is determined whether the effect standby flag 223ah is on (S4702). . If it is determined that the effect standby flag 223ah is not ON (is OFF) (S4702: No), then it is determined whether or not there is additional effect information during the first effect period (S4703). The additional effect information determined in the process of S4703 is the effect executed during the first period (first effect period) when the player presses the operation means (for example, PUSH button 10317, lever member 10340). Like information for indicating the effect result of the effect (for example, special operation effect) in which the effect result is variable based on the executed operation content, the variable effect executed during the first period (first effect period) As the effect mode, the effect that is actually selected (set This indicates information for indicating the presentation mode. This additional effect information is stored in the effect information storage area 223ak as additional effect information when a effect mode is selected based on a selection condition established from among a plurality of effect modes. Stored.

Based on the information stored in the effect information storage area 223ak, when it is determined that there is additional effect information during the first effect period (S4703: Yes), the variable display mode corresponding to the additional effect information is set ( S4705), the process proceeds to S4710. When it is determined that there is no additional effect information during the first effect period (S4703: No), the variable display mode is set based on the information regarding the second period stored in the effect information storage area 223ak (S4704), The process proceeds to S4710.

Thus, in this control example, based on the content of the additional effect information acquired during the first period (first effect period) (stored in the effect information storage area 223ak), the second period (second effect period) Since it is configured so that the production mode can be set, the production mode of the variable production executed in correspondence with the fluctuation time of one special figure fluctuation is divided into a plurality of production periods and set at different timings. , it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel a sense of incongruity when the performance modes set in each performance period are combined. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the production effect in the entire variable production.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4702, if it is determined that the effect standby flag 223ah is ON (S4702: Yes), it is determined whether or not the pending collective change effect is possible during the second effect period (S4706). When it is determined that the pending collective change effect is possible during the second effect period (S4706: Yes), the variable display mode corresponding to the pending collective change effect is set (S4707), and the process proceeds to S4709. If it is determined that the pending collective change effect is not possible during the second effect period (S4706: No), the variable display mode is set based on the information about the second period stored in the effect information storage area 223ak ( S4708), the process proceeds to S4709.

Here, when specifically explaining the processing contents executed in S4706, in this control example, if the special figure fluctuation of this time is the special figure fluctuation that won the jackpot, or the lottery result of the special figure lottery is not out. However, if the variation pattern is a variation pattern with a high expectation of winning a jackpot (for example, a variation pattern in which a long variation time is set), the second half of the special figure variation production (corresponding to the second period) , it is configured to facilitate the execution of a special figure variation performance (for example, super ready-to-win performance) for suggesting to the player that there is a high possibility that the current special figure variation is a big win.

In such a case, that is, when an effect is being executed to make the player interested in the lottery result of the special figure fluctuation being executed, the newly acquired winning information (special figure reservation) By executing the pending production for suggesting the contents in the second half period (second period) of the special figure fluctuation production, the interest in the special figure fluctuation production is weakened, and the production effect is reduced. there were. Therefore, in this control example, it is configured to determine whether or not the pending operation effect is executed based on the information for setting the effect mode of the second period (various information stored in the effect information storage area 223ak). are doing. As a result, it is possible to make it easier to understand the effects (special figure fluctuation effects, pending effects) that the player should pay attention to during the second period. In addition, without being limited to this, it is simply determined whether the length of the second period is longer than the execution period of the pending operation effect (holding batch change effect), and the period during which the pending operation effect can be executed during the second period. can be secured, and as the effect result of the effect executed during the first period, the effect result indicating that the pending operation effect is not to be executed during the second period is displayed (executed ), and the determination may be made based on the determination result.

In addition, despite the processing of S4708 described above, that is, the effect standby flag 223ah is set to ON during the first period, the pending operation effect (holding collective change effect) during the second period cannot be executed. 486(b), the display part of the suggestive character HC1 is stopped in a display mode (a display mode other than "PUSH") that does not cause the operation means to be operated, and the display is stopped. An effect that is changed to an effect mode corresponding to the displayed display mode is executed.

In this control example, as shown in FIG. 486(a), when execution of the pending operation effect is in a standby state, the suggesting character HC1 is displayed, and the effect of rotating the display part of the suggesting character HC1 is executed. It is configured as follows. By rotating and displaying the display part in this way, it is possible to execute an effect that suggests the possibility that the pending operation effect will be executed later, and even if a situation occurs in which the pending operation effect is not executed as described above. , the game can be continued without giving the player a feeling of dissatisfaction.

In the process of S4709, the effect standby flag 223ah is set to OFF (S4709), and the process proceeds to S4710. In the process of S4710, each information set this time is stored in the effect information storage area 223ak (S4710), and then this process is terminated.

Next, the press detection process 2 (S3152) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 506 is a flow chart showing this press detection process 2 (S3152). This press detection process 2 (S3152) is executed in place of the press detection process (see FIG. 447) in the first control example, and is referred to when the PUSH button 10317 is pressed. and the variable operation detection process executed when the lever member 10340 is variably operated.

Of the press detection process 2 (S3152) in the second control example, the processes of S3601 to S3607 are the same as the processes of S3601 to S3607 of the press detection process (see FIG. 447) in the first control example. executed.

If it is determined in the process of S3601 that the push button has not been pressed (S3601: No), the process proceeds to S3653. If it is determined in the process of S3606 that the value of the collective change period timer 223x is 0 (S3606: No), then it is determined whether the value of the other pressing effective period timer is greater than 0 ( S3651). In addition, when it is determined that the value of the pressing effective period timer is greater than 0 (S3651: Yes), an effect mode corresponding to the effect being executed is set (S3652), and then the process proceeds to S3653. Further, when it is determined that the value of the other pressing valid period timer is 0 (S3651: No), the process proceeds to S3653.

In the processing of S3653, it is determined whether or not an operation to the operation means (lever member 10340, touch sensor) used for the variable operation effect is detected (S3653). When it is determined that an operation to the operation means used for the variable operation presentation is detected (S3653: Yes), variable operation detection processing is executed (S3654). Details of this variable operation detection processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

Here, the processing contents of S3653 will be described. As described above, in this control example, the lever member 10340 is configured to be variably operable between the first position (origin position) and the second position (operating position). When a detection sensor (not shown) for detecting that the lever member 10340 is positioned at the first position detects the lever member 10340, the origin detection flag 223ae is set to ON, and the lever A detection sensor (not shown) for detecting that the member 10340 is positioned at the second position is configured so that the operating position detection flag 223af is set to ON when the lever member 10340 is detected. are doing.

Then, after the origin detection flag 223ae, which was on, is turned off, the operating position detection flag 223af, which was on, is turned on, or when the operating position detection flag 223af, which was on, is turned off. , and then the origin detection flag 223ae, which was in the off state, is set to on, it is determined in the process of S3653 that an operation on the lever member 10340 has been detected.

Note that the method of determining that the operation of the lever member 10340 has been detected is not limited to the method of this control example. off state) has been switched, it may be determined that an operation to the lever member 10340 has been detected. When it is determined that the setting state (on state, off state) has been switched, it is determined that the first operation has been performed, and the setting state (on state) of both detection flags (origin detection flag 223ae, operating position detection flag 223af) is determined. , off state) has been switched (when it is determined that an operation has been detected according to the operation detection content in this control example), it is determined that the second operation has been performed, and when the first operation is established , the detection result may differ depending on whether or not the second operation is established. Furthermore, when the above-described second operation is established, the period from when the setting state of one detection flag is switched to when the setting state of the other is switched, that is, the lever member 10340 located at the origin position is moved to the operating position. Alternatively, a different detection result may be obtained based on the period required for moving the lever member 10340 from the operating position to the origin position.

In the process of S3653, if it is determined that the operation for the operation means used for the variable operation presentation is not detected (S3653: No), this process is terminated.

Next, variable operation detection processing (S3654) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 507 is a flow chart showing this variable operation detection process (S3654). This variable operation detection process (S3654) is a process executed within the press detection process 2 (FIG. 506) in the second control example.

When the variable operation detection process (S3654) is started, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the variable operation effective period timer 223am is greater than 0 (S4801). That is, it is determined whether or not the variable operation presentation is currently being executed. If it is determined in the process of S4801 that the value of the variable operation effective period timer 223am is greater than 0 (S4801: Yes), the operating means (lever member 10340, touch sensor) is operated, the effect mode corresponding to the effect being executed is set (S4802), the value of the variable operation effective period timer 223am is reset to 0 (S4803), and then this process is terminated. do.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the variable operation effective period timer 223am is not greater than 0 (it is 0) (S4801: No), then it is determined whether or not the origin detection flag 223ae is on ( S4804). If it is determined that the origin detection flag 223ae is on (S4804: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the initial position change flag 223ag is on (S4805). If it is determined that the initial position change flag 223ag is ON (S4805: Yes), the initial position change flag 223ag is set to OFF (S4806), and the process proceeds to S4807. If it is determined that the initial position change flag 223ag is off (S4805: No), the process of S4806 is skipped and the process proceeds to S4807. In the process of S4807, a lock process is set to fix the variable operating means at the origin position (S4807), and then the process ends.

By executing the above-described processing, when the lever member 10340 that is not at the origin position is moved to the origin position during the period in which the variable operation effective period is not set, the lever member 10340 is moved to the origin position. will be locked with Therefore, even if the lever member 10340 is left in a position other than the origin position while the variable operation effect is being executed, the lever member 10340 is simply moved to the origin position. can be securely locked.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4804 that the origin detection flag 223ae is off (S4804: No), then it is determined whether or not the operating position detection flag 223af is on (S4808). If it is determined that the actuation position detection flag 223af is off (S4808: No), this processing ends. If it is determined that the operating position detection flag 223af is on (S4808: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the initial position change flag 223ag is on (S4809). If it is determined that the initial position change flag 223ag is ON (S4809: Yes), the initial position change flag 223ag is set to OFF (S4810), and then this processing is terminated. If it is determined that the initial position change flag 223ag is off (S4809: No), the process of S4810 is skipped and this process ends.

Next, the operation effect management process (S3153) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 508 is a flow chart showing this operation effect management process (S3153). This operation effect management process (S3153) is a process executed within the main process 2 (FIG. 502) in the second control example, and updates the value of the variable operation effective period timer 223am during the variable operation effect period. process is executed.

When the operation effect management process (S3153) is started, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the variable operation effective period timer 223am is greater than 0 (S4901). If it is determined that the value of the variable operation effective period timer 223am is 0 (S4901: No), this process is terminated. When it is determined that the value of the variable operation effective period timer 223am is greater than 0 (S4901: Yes), the value of the variable operation effective period timer 223am is updated (S4902), and then the updated variable operation effective period timer 223am is set. It is determined whether the value is 0 (S4903). If it is determined that the value of the updated variable operation effective period timer 223am is not 0 (S4903: No), this process is terminated. If it is determined that the value of the updated variable operation effective period timer 223am is 0 (S4903: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the initial position change flag 223ag is ON (S4904). If it is determined that the initial position change flag 223ag is ON (S4904: Yes), the initial return operation scenario is set (S4905), and the return operation timer 223ah is set to a value corresponding to 5 seconds (S4906). ), the pressing effect prohibition flag 223ao is set to ON (S4907), and then this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4904 that the initial position change flag 223ag is off (S4904: No), then it is determined whether or not the origin detection flag 223ae is on (S4908). If it is determined that the origin detection flag 223ae is on (S4908: Yes), this processing is terminated. When it is determined that the origin detection flag 223ae is off (S4908: No), the variable effect priority flag 223ap is set to on (S4909), and then this process is terminated.

Next, the variable operating means management process (S3154) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in this second control example will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 509 is a flowchart showing this variable operating means management processing (S3154). This variable operating means management process (S3154) is a process executed within the main process 2 (FIG. 502) in the second control example.

When the variable operating means management process (S3154) is started, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the return action timer 223ah is greater than 0 (S5001). If it is determined that the value of the return operation timer 223ah is 0 (S5001: No), this process is terminated. If it is determined that the value of the return action timer 223ah is greater than 0 (S5001: Yes), the value of the return action timer 223ah is updated (S5002), and whether the updated value of the return action timer 223ah is 0 It is determined whether or not (S5003). If it is determined that the updated value of the return action timer 223ah is not 0 (S5003: No), the return action corresponding to the value of the return action timer 223ah is set (S5004), and then this process is terminated. .

In the process of S5003, when it is determined that the value of the updated return action timer 223ah is 0 (S5003: Yes), the pressing effect inhibition flag 223ao is set to OFF (S5005), and then the origin detection flag 223ae. is on (S5006). If it is determined that the origin detection flag 223ae is on (S5006: Yes), information indicating that the variable operating means is in the normal position is stored in the effect information storage area 223ak (S5007), and then this process is terminated. do.

If it is determined in the process of S5006 that the origin detection flag 223ae is off (S5006: No), then it is determined whether or not the operating position detection flag 223af is on (S5008). When it is determined that the operating position detection flag 223af is on (S5008: Yes), the initial position change flag 223ag is set on (S5009), and information indicating that the variable operating means is in the opposite position is stored in the performance information. It is stored in the area 223ak (S5010), and then this processing is terminated.

In the process of S5008, if it is determined that the operating position detection flag 223af is off (S5008: No), information indicating that the variable operating means is at an unknown position is stored in the effect information storage area 223ak (S5011), After that, this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to the flow chart of FIG. 510, the holding notice lottery process 2 (S4031) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described. FIG. 510 is a flow chart showing this pending notice lottery process 2 (S4031). This pending advance notice lottery process 2 (S4031) is a process that is executed in place of the pending advance notice lottery process (see FIG. 453) in the first control example.

In the processes of S4051 to S4057 and S4060 to S4063 of the holding notice lottery process 2 (S4031) in the second control example, S4051 to S4057 and S4060 of the holding notice lottery process (see FIG. 453) in the first control example The same processing as each processing of S4063 is executed.

In the process of S4057, when it is determined that the pending batch change effect has been executed (S4057: Yes), the execution timing setting process is executed (S4081), and then this process ends. The details of this execution timing setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the execution timing setting process (S4081) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 511 is a flow chart showing this execution timing setting process (S4081). This execution timing setting process (S4081) is a process executed within the pending advance notice lottery process 2 (FIG. 510) in the second control example.

When the execution timing setting process (S4081) is started, first, information stored in the effect information storage area 223ak is read out (S5101), and then it is determined whether or not the operation effecting flag 223ai is ON. (S5102). If it is determined that the operation effect in progress flag 223ai is off (S5102: No), then it is determined whether or not it is possible to secure the execution period of the pending batch change effect (S5103). If it is determined that the execution period can be secured (S5103: Yes), the execution of the pending batch change effect is set (S5104), the batch change flag 223p is set to ON (S5105), and then this process ends. do. Also, in the processing of S5103, if it is determined that the execution period of the pending collective change effect cannot be secured (S5103: No), the processing of S5104 and S5105 is skipped, and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S5102, if it is determined that the operation effect in progress flag 223ai is ON (S5102: Yes), then it is determined whether the current variable effect is during the effect of the first period ( S5106). If it is determined that the current variable production is in the production of the first period (S5106: Yes), the production standby flag 223aj is set to ON (S5107), and the display of the pending design mode indicating waiting is set ( S5108), and then the process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S5106, if it is determined that the current variable effect is not in the effect of the first period (S5106: No), then whether or not the current variable effect is in the effect of the second period is determined (S5109), and if it is determined that the current variable effect is not during the effect of the second period (S5109: No), this process is terminated as it is. When it is determined that the current variable effect is during the second period effect (S5109: Yes), the display of the pending symbol mode corresponding to the latest winning information is set (S5110), and then this process is terminated. .

Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 512, the variation effect setting process 2 (S4252) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described. FIG. 512 is a flow chart showing this variable effect setting process 2 (S4252). This variable effect setting process 2 (S4252) is a process executed instead of the variable effect setting process (see FIG. 456) in the first control example.

Of the variable effect setting process 2 (S4252) in the second control example, in each process of S4301 to S4311 and S4313, each of S4301 to S4311 and S4313 of the variable effect setting process (see FIG. 456) in the first control example The same processing as the processing is executed.

In the process of S4311, when it is determined that the current state is the variable probability state (S4311: Yes), the back mode lottery process 2 is executed (S4352), and the process proceeds to S4312. The details of the rear mode lottery process 2 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 515 and 516. FIG.

On the other hand, in the process of S4311, when it is determined that the current state is not the variable probability state (S4311: No), the normal effect setting process is executed (S4351), and the process proceeds to S4313. The details of this normal effect setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 513 and 514. FIG.

Next, the normal effect setting process (S4351) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 513 is a flow chart showing the normal effect setting process (S4351). This normal effect setting process (S4351) is a process executed within the variable effect setting process 2 (FIG. 512) in the second control example.

When the normal effect setting process (S4351) is started, first, it is determined whether or not the current state is the normal state (S5201). If it is determined that the current state is not normal (S5201: No), the process proceeds to S5214. If it is determined that the current state is the normal state (S5201: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the current mode is the dialogue mode (S5202). If it is determined that the dialogue mode is currently on (S5202: Yes), the dialogue mode setting process is executed (S5203), and the process proceeds to S5204. Details of the dialog mode setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of S5202, if it is determined that the dialog mode is not currently in effect (S5202: No), the process of S5203 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S5204.

In the processing of S5204, it is determined whether or not the variation time is 30 seconds or more (S5204). If it is determined that the fluctuation time is not longer than 30 seconds (S5204: No), the fluctuation display mode corresponding to the received fluctuation pattern is set (S5205), and then the process proceeds to S5214. In the process of S5204, if it is determined that the fluctuation time is 30 seconds or more (S5204: Yes), the first period (first half) corresponding to the received fluctuation pattern is extracted (S5206), and then the operation effect is being performed. It is determined whether the flag 223ai is on (S5207). If it is determined that the operation effect flag 223ai is on (S5207: Yes), the variable display mode is set from the effect mode group that does not use the operation effect as the effect mode for the first period (S5208), and then , S5214.

On the other hand, in the processing of S5207, if it is determined that the operation effect in progress flag 223ai is off (S5207: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an operation effect in the set effect mode (S5210). If it is determined that there is an operation effect in the set effect mode (S5210: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the variable effect priority flag 223ap is ON (S5211). When it is determined that the variable effect priority flag 223ap is ON (S5211: Yes), the variable operation effect is set as the operation effect (S5212), the variable effect priority flag 223ap is set to OFF (S5213), and the processing of S5214 Move to

Also, in the process of S5210, if it is determined that there is no operation effect in the set effect mode (S5210: No), and if it is determined in the process of S5211 that the variable effect priority flag 223ap is off (S5211: No ), the process proceeds to S5214.

In the processing of S5214, a value obtained by subtracting 2 seconds from the number of seconds corresponding to the first period is calculated (S5214), and the data value corresponding to the calculated value is set in the second variable time timer 223an (S5215). Each of the set information is stored in the effect information storage area 223ak (S5216), and then this process is terminated.

Next, the dialogue mode setting process (S5203) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 514 is a flow chart showing the dialogue mode setting process (S5203). This dialogue mode setting process (S5203) is a process executed within the normal effect setting process (FIG. 513) in the second control example.

When the dialog mode setting process (S5203) is started, first, the information stored in the stop symbol information storage area 223ac is read (S5301), and it is determined whether or not the second stop symbol information is stored ( S5302). If it is determined that there is no memory for the second stop pattern information (S5302: No), the stop character and lines corresponding to the lottery result are randomly selected, and the effect mode of the line effect is set (S5303), followed by S5306. Go to processing.

In the process of S5302, if it is determined that the second stop symbol information is stored (S5302: Yes), the dialogue state is set based on the dialogue state setting table 222aa1 (S5304), and the set dialogue state and Based on the determination result, the character selection table 222aa2 is referred to select a stop character (S5305), and the process proceeds to S5306.

In the process of S5306, the dialogue selection table 222aa3 is referenced to set the effect mode of the current dialogue effect (S5306), the information stored in the stop symbol information storage area 223ac is shifted by one (S5307), The set effect mode is stored in the previous memory area (S5308), and then this process is terminated.

Next, the back mode lottery process 2 (S4362) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 515 is a flow chart showing the rear mode lottery process 2 (S4362). This background mode lottery process 2 (S4362) is a process executed instead of the background mode lottery process (see FIG. 458) in the first control example.

In the processes of S4501 to S4504 and S4506 to S4511 of the rear face mode lottery process 2 (S4362) in the second control example, S4501 to S4504 and S4506 of the rear face mode lottery process (see FIG. 458) in the first control example, respectively. The same processing as each processing of S4511 is executed.

In the process of S4504, when it is determined that the current game state is not the variable probability state (S4504: No), the back mode setting process is executed after the time saving ends (S4551), and the process proceeds to S4510. The details of the rear face mode setting process after the end of the time saving will be described later with reference to FIG. 516 .

Next, with reference to the flow chart of Drawing 516, back mode setting processing (S4551) after the end of time saving performed by MPU221 in sound lamp control device 113 in this 2nd example of control is explained. FIG. 516 is a flow chart showing the back mode setting process (S4551) after the end of the time saving. The rear mode setting process after the time saving (S4551) is a process executed in the rear mode lottery process 2 (FIG. 515) in the second control example.

When the back mode setting process (S4551) is started after the end of time saving, first, it is determined whether the current game state is the normal state or the latent state (S4561). When it is determined that the current game state is the normal state or the latent state (S4561: Yes), the back mode corresponding to the lost child mode is determined (S4562), and then this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4561, if it is determined that the current game state is not the normal state or the latent state (S4561: No), the table for falling and the value of the effect lottery counter are referred to, and the back mode is selected (S4563), and then the process ends.

<Regarding the first modification of the second control example>
Next, a first modification of the second control example will be described. In the second control example described above, while the operation effect (special figure operation effect) for operating the operation means in the special figure fluctuation effect is being executed, the operation effect for operating the operation means as a pending effect When an execution condition for executing (suspended operation effect) is satisfied, the execution timing of each operation effect is configured so as not to overlap. On the other hand, in the first modification, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with game environment adjusting means capable of adjusting the volume level output from the audio output device 226, the brightness of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, etc. and the display of the third pattern display device 81, and the operation means for adjustment by the player (for example, the first button (for example, a button composed of an up arrow button and a down arrow button) that allows the player to select the operation content By operating a second button (for example, a button with menu/decision displayed on the pressing surface of the button) that is operated when displaying a menu screen on the screen or determining the selection content, the player can It is configured so that the game environment can be set according to the preferences of the player.

Here, to briefly explain the method of adjusting the game environment, when the above-described second button is pressed while the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, a portion of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 displays, A menu screen for adjusting the game environment is displayed. The menu screen includes a volume adjustment display mode for adjusting the volume level, a light amount adjustment display mode for adjusting the brightness, a game information display mode for checking the game information of the pachinko machine 10, and a menu screen. is displayed, and an arbitrary display mode is selected by operating the above-described first button, and when the second button is pressed, the corresponding screen is displayed.

When the first button is operated to select the volume adjustment display mode and the second button is pressed, the volume adjustment screen is displayed. A volume indicator indicating the volume of the pachinko machine 10 in stages is displayed on the volume adjustment screen, and the volume level of the pachinko machine 10 can be variably operated by operating the first button to vary the volume indicator. It is configured. In this case, each time the first button is operated to change the volume indicator, the demonstration voice (for example, the words of the character 801) is output at a volume corresponding to the selected volume level. As a result, the player can easily grasp how much the sound volume corresponds to the currently selected sound volume level. Then, by operating the second button while the volume adjustment screen is displayed, the currently selected volume level is determined, and the volume adjustment is completed.

When the second button is pressed with the light amount display mode selected, the light amount adjustment screen is displayed. On this light amount adjustment screen, a light amount indicator showing stepwise the brightness (light amount) of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 is displayed. It is configured so that the amount of light can be adjusted based on the operation content of the button. Based on the amount of light determined here, the brightness of the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 (specifically, the brightness of the backlight for illuminating the display surface of the liquid crystal display constituting the third pattern display device 81 ) can be adjusted.

Furthermore, when the second button is pressed with the game state display mode selected, the game characteristics of the pachinko machine 10 and the past game history are displayed.

In the state where the second button is operated in this way and the menu screen is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the special symbol reserve obtained based on the special symbol variation effect and the special symbol start winning prize is displayed. The pending effect based on is in a state where it is difficult to see. Furthermore, since it is necessary to provide a plurality of operation means in the limited space of the pachinko machine 10, the operation means (lever member 10340, PUSH button 10317) used in each control example described above and the game environment are adjusted. Therefore, it is necessary to arrange the adjustment operation means (first button, second button) in the vicinity.

Therefore, during the adjustment of the game environment (during the operation of the first button and the second button), a special figure operation effect is executed as a special symbol variation effect, or a pending operation effect is executed as a pending effect. If so, there is a problem that the operation means is erroneously operated instead of the adjustment operation means when adjusting the game environment, and an unintended effect is executed.

On the other hand, in the first modified example, as in the second control example described above, the execution condition for executing the operation effect (special figure operation effect, pending operation effect) for operating the operation means is established. If so, determine whether it is during the period during which the adjustment operation means is operated (the period during which the menu screen is displayed), and if it is determined that it is the period during which the adjustment operation means is operated, wait for the execution of the operation effect. It is configured as follows.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which different operation means are operated at the same time, so that it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand. Furthermore, in a state in which the standby effect is executed and the suggestion character HC1 (see FIG. 486(a)) is displayed to suggest that the execution of the operation effect is on standby, the player can adjust the game environment. When the first button is operated, the speed of rotation of the display portion of the suggestive character HC1 increases, and the display is rotated at high speed.

As a result, when the standby effect is being executed while the game environment is being adjusted, when the adjusting operation means is operated to adjust the game environment, the display content suggested by the effect mode of the standby effect is displayed. can be obfuscated. Specifically, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the character "PUSH" that prompts the player to operate the operation means displayed on the display portion of the suggestion character HC1. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player who recognizes the character "PUSH" rotated and displayed by the suggestive character HC1 from erroneously operating the operation means or the adjustment operation means.

On the other hand, when the operation effect using the operation means is being executed, the effective period during which the operation to the second button can be effectively determined is not set. Even if the second button is operated by mistake, the menu screen is not displayed. Thus, by arranging the adjusting operation means in the vicinity of the operation means, when the second button is erroneously operated during the operation performance, the menu screen is displayed to suppress the situation that the performance effect is remarkably lowered. can be done.

It should be noted that, without being limited to the configuration of the first modified example, even when the first button or the second button is operated during the period during which the operation effect is being executed, the operating means (lever member 10340, PUSH button 10317) may be configured to execute the same effect as when the button 10317) is operated. A configuration may be used in which a physical restriction is provided so that the player cannot press the 2 button.

<Regarding the second modification of the second control example>
Next, a second modification of the second control example will be described. In the second control example described above, while the operation effect (special figure operation effect) for operating the operation means in the special figure fluctuation effect is being executed, the operation effect for operating the operation means as a pending effect When the execution condition for executing (suspended operation effect) is satisfied, by configuring so that the execution timing of each operation effect does not overlap, a game that is difficult for the player to understand, that is, one operation effect (for example, In spite of operating the operation means for the special operation performance), the performance mode of the other operation performance (for example, the pending operation performance) is changed based on the operation of the operation means. was configured to On the other hand, in this second modification, the operation effect (special figure operation effect) for operating the operating means in the special figure fluctuation effect (special figure operation effect) and the operation effect (suspended operation ) and are executed (operation valid periods set for each operation effect overlap), by setting a special operation effect mode, an operation effect that is easy for the player to understand is provided. configured to be executable. Specifically, it is configured so as to be able to execute a fusion operation effect in which the special figure operation effect and the pending operation effect are fused.

This fusion operation effect is an operation in which the effect mode for indicating the effect result of the special operation effect or the effect result of the pending operation effect is set as the effect mode of the effect executed based on the operation of the operation means. It is an effect, specifically, for example, a special figure operation effect in which an operation valid period that can effectively determine the operation for the operation means is set in 10 seconds from 5 seconds to 15 seconds after the start of the special figure fluctuation , in a state in which an operation effect (so-called continuous hit effect) is set to vary the effect mode based on the number of times the player operates the operation means, the effect mode ( When the execution condition of the holding operation effect that changes the display mode of the holding pattern is established, the fusion operation effect set to 10 seconds, which is the operation effective period of the special figure operation effect, is executed.

And while the fusion operation effect is being executed, the final effect result (the effect result of the special operation effect and the effect result of the pending operation effect) is configured to be displayed at the timing when the operation effective period has elapsed. Each time the player operates the operation means during the valid operation period, an effect is executed to gradually change the effect mode of the special figure operation effect and the effect mode of the pending operation effect.

In other words, unlike the pending operation effect described above, the effect result is displayed by combining the operation effect, which is set so that the effect result is displayed based on a single operation. The content of the operation to the operation means required until is made different, and the effect result is notified with the lapse of a specific effect period (operation effective period).

In this way, when the execution timings of a plurality of operation effects with different display conditions (operation conditions) for displaying the effect results of the operation effects overlap, the display conditions (operation conditions) of the overlapping operation effects are specified. By executing the fusion operation effect corrected so that when the operation effect is executed redundantly, the operation effect on the unintended side displays the effect result first, and the effect is difficult for the player to understand. It is possible to suppress the provision of

Further, in the above example, when the execution timings of a plurality of operation effects with different display conditions (operation conditions) for displaying the effect results of the operation effects overlap, the specific conditions are set so that the display conditions are difficult to be established. configured to set. As a result, the period during which the fusion operation performance is executed can be made longer than the period during which the single operation performance is executed, so that the player can easily recognize that the fusion operation performance is being executed. can.

Furthermore, in the above-described example, the operation valid period set for the combined operation effect is configured to be the same as the operation valid period set for any one of the overlapping operation effects. As a result, it is possible to execute the fusion operation effect without newly setting the operation valid period exclusively for the fusion operation effect, so that the processing load of the sound lamp control device 113 can be reduced. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to this, and may be configured to set an operation effective period dedicated to the combined operation presentation.

A detailed description will be given of the effect contents of the fusion operation effect described above. In other words, the effect in which the special figure operation effect and the pending operation effect are respectively executed is executed. Then, an operation suggestion mode that suggests the operation contents of the operation means for each operation effect, and an effect mode that is set when an operation is performed on the operation means, are compared with the case where each operation effect is executed alone. are configured differently.

Specifically, when the fusion operation effect is executed, the third symbol display device 81 displays a comment "set operation start" as a display mode indicating that the fusion operation effect is executed for the player. Along with being displayed on the screen, one display mode for operating the operation means (for example, PUSH button 10317) is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81.

Then, when the player operates (presses) the operation means (PUSH button 10317) during the operation valid period of the fusion operation effect, the operation content of this time is determined by the operation determination means, and which effect mode is selected from the fusion operation effect. to be variable. Then, the effect mode of the operation effect that is the object of the effect mode to be varied is varied. In this case, for example, like the pending operation effect described above, when it is executed alone, a display mode showing the effect result of the pending operation effect by one operation (for example, the color of the pending symbol is changed from blue to red and variable display mode) is displayed, the currently displayed display mode (blue An effect is executed in which the reserved pattern) is changed to a display mode (for example, a blue cracked reserved pattern) different from the display mode (red reserved pattern) indicating the effect result of the pending operation effect.

As a result, it is possible to inform the player that the holding operation performance is being executed as part of the integrated operation performance, and to delay the period until the presentation result of the holding operation performance is displayed. Therefore, it is possible for the player to operate the operation means willingly until the fusion operation effect is completed. In this case, if the effect of the operation effect to be executed is a effect that changes a specific display mode step by step, the display mode showing the current stage, the display mode of the stage indicated by the effect result, It is preferable that the display mode of the stage positioned between is displayed during the fusion operation presentation. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting the effect result of the fusion operation effect.

In addition, while the fusion operation effect is being executed, a notification means (for example, a third symbol It is preferable to provide notification by bringing the position of the operating means displayed on the display screen of the display device 81 closer to any of the effect positions of the plurality of operation effects being executed. As a result, it is possible to provide an effect that is easy for the player to understand. In addition, in this modification, when the fusion operation effect is executed, only one operation means is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, but this is not the only option. The number of operation means corresponding to the number of operation effects may be displayed, and the corresponding operation means may be alternately displayed as the notification means described above.

Furthermore, in the second modified example described above, an example in which two operation effects are merged as a fusion operation effect has been described. good. Also, by using the configuration of the second control example and the configuration of the second modified example described above, a waiting period after the condition for executing the operation effect is satisfied is set for one or both of them. However, after adjusting the execution period so that a plurality of operation effects are executed at the same time, the combined operation effect may be executed.

<Regarding the third modification of the second control example>
Next, a third modified example of the above-described second control example will be described. In the second control example described above, a lever member 10340 that can move between a first position (origin position) and a second position (operating position) is provided as the variable operation means, and the lever member 10340 is used when executing the variable operation effect. 10340 so as to vary the presentation mode of the variable operation presentation in accordance with the positional state of the lever member 10340, so that there is no difference between the presentation contents of the variable operation presentation and the operation contents that can actually be executed with respect to the lever member 10340. It consisted of Then, regardless of the operation of the player, the lever member 10340, which is not located at the first position (origin position), is returned to the first position (origin position) by using the drive motor as return control. I used a moving configuration. In addition, in order to prevent the player from operating the lever member 10340 positioned at the first position (origin position) (operation to move it toward the second position direction) except for the period during which the variable operation effect is being executed. By using the locking configuration of (1), the lever member 10340 positioned at the first position (original position) is prevented from being unnecessarily moved.

However, in the configuration of the second control example described above, the lever member 10340 positioned at a position other than the first position (for example, the second position or an intermediate position between the first position and the second position) is always operated by the player. Therefore, there remains a possibility that the lever member 10340 is moved unnecessarily.

On the other hand, in the present third modification, an urging means (e.g., a spring member) that always applies an urging force in the direction of the first position is provided to the lever member 10340, The positioned lever member 10340 is configured to always move toward the first position. Further, it has a second locking structure for maintaining the position when the lever member 10340 is positioned at the second position.

In the third modification configured in this manner, the lever member 10340 can be maintained at either the first position or the second position, and can be held at an intermediate position between the first position and the second position. Since the lever member 10340 positioned at the position is moved to the first position by the biasing means, it is possible to prevent the lever member 10340 from being positioned at the intermediate position without being held by the player. .

In the third modified example configured as described above, when the player grips the lever member 10340 and determines that the lever member 10340 is positioned at the intermediate position (that is, the origin detection flag 223ae and the operating position detection flag 223af are When it is determined that both are set to OFF), an effect (touch effect) for letting the player release the lever member 10340 is executed. Then, when the player releases the lever member 10340 based on the touch effect, the lever member 10340 is moved to the first position (original position) by the action of the biasing means.

As described above, in the third modification, when the player grips the lever member 10340 to move the lever member 10340 located at the intermediate position to the first position, the player's hand is It is only necessary to execute an effect (for example, a touch effect) for making it easier to move away from the lever member 10340, and unlike the second control example described above, there is no need to execute return operation control in accordance with the touch effect. The configuration for moving the member 10340 to the first position can be simplified.

In addition, in the third modified example, as means for moving the lever member 10340 toward the first position, first moving means using driving means (driving motor) and second moving means using biasing means are used. means, and the moving speed for moving the lever member 10340 is made different between the first moving means and the second moving means. Specifically, the first moving means is configured to move faster than the second moving means.

As a result, for example, when the timing for executing the variable operation effect using the lever member 10340 is already set and the lever member 10340 must be moved to the first position within a predetermined period of time, the touch effect is executed. Along with the execution, if the lever member 10340 is configured to move to the first position using the first moving means, and the timing for executing the variable operation effect using the lever member 10340 is not set, i.e. If there is no limitation on the period until the lever member 10340 is moved to the first position, the second moving means can be used to move the lever member 10340 to the first position. . By varying the speed at which the lever member 10340 is moved according to the situation, it is possible to prevent the lever member 10340 from being loaded more than necessary.

Note that, as in the second control example and the third modification described above, the first position is controlled by using the variable operation means configured to be movable between the first position and the second position based on the player's operation. A first variable operation effect of moving the variable operation means from the second position toward the second position, and a second variable operation effect of moving the variable operation means from the second position toward the first position. Further, in a pachinko machine 10 configured to be able to execute movement control for moving the variable operation means to the first position or the second position without being based on the player's operation, a second variable operation effect is executed, While the player is performing the operation of moving the variable operating means toward the first position, the variable operating means is moved toward the first position using the first moving means, the second moving means, or the like. A case and a case in which the first moving means, the second moving means, etc. are not used may be provided.

With this configuration, when the player operates the variable operating means, it is possible to vary the force (pushing force) applied by the player to the variable operating means. Therefore, the performance effect can be enhanced by making the player's operational feeling different when the variable operation means is moved in the same direction as the variable operation performance. In this case, it is preferable to vary the force (pressing force) applied by the player to the variable operation means according to the effect result of the variable operation effect. In addition, when executing the above-described first variable operation effect, the force applied by the player to the variable operation means ( It may be configured such that the push-up force) is variable.

As described above, in the second control example, in the state where the high probability state of the normal design is set (probability variable state, time saving state), the normal design based on winning a small hit in the special drawing lottery is configured to shift from the high-probability state to the low-probability state. In other words, as a condition (time saving end condition) for shifting the high probability state of the normal pattern to the low probability state, the first time saving end condition (special figure fluctuation number 100 times) also provided in the above-described first control example In addition to reaching), the second time-saving end condition (small hit winning) is provided. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the timing of shifting the high probability state of the normal symbol to the low probability state.

In this control example, if a plurality of small hit types (small hit A, small hit B) are provided when a small hit is won, and the set small hit type is a specific small hit type (small hit A) In addition, it is configured so that the above-described second time-saving end condition is satisfied. By configuring in this way, the high probability state of the normal pattern shifts to the low probability state only when a specific small winning type is won, so the high probability state of the normal design ends based on the small winning. It is possible to set the case where it is executed and the case where it is not ended. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the timing of shifting the high probability state of the normal symbol to the low probability state.

Furthermore, this control example, like the first control example described above, is configured to shift the high probability state of the normal symbol to the low probability state at the start timing of the special figure fluctuation, based on the small winning Even when the high-probability state of the normal design is shifted to the low-probability state, the high-probability state of the normal design is shifted to the low-probability state at the start timing of the special pattern variation. In this way, by making the timing of ending the high probability state of the normal symbols the same regardless of the occasion for ending the high probability state of the normal symbols, the high probability state of the normal symbols is ended for the player. It can be difficult to understand what the trigger is.

Furthermore, in this control example, when a predetermined number of times (twice) is won in a specific small hit type (small hit A), the above-described second time saving end condition is established. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the timing of shifting the high probability state of the normal symbol to the low probability state.

In addition, in this control example, when the above-described first time saving end condition or second time saving end condition is established, the high probability state of the normal symbol is configured to shift to the low probability state, Without being limited to this, for example, when both the first time saving end condition and the second time saving end condition are satisfied, the high probability state of the normal symbol may be shifted to the low probability state. Also, the order of establishment of the first time saving end condition and the second time saving end condition may be defined, for example, after the first time saving end condition is met, when the second time saving end condition is met, the normal symbol The high probability state may be changed to the low probability state.

In addition, in this control example, when the second time-saving end condition is established based on winning a small hit in the special drawing lottery, it is configured to shift the high probability state of the normal pattern to the low probability state. However, without being limited to this, for example, it may be configured to shift the high probability state of the special symbol to the low probability state based on winning a small hit in the special symbol lottery. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the timing at which the high probability state of the special symbols shifts to the low probability state.

In the above-described second control example, it is configured so that the second time-saving end condition is established when a specific small hit (small hit A) is elected a predetermined number of times (twice), but the high probability state of normal symbols is set, a suggestive performance suggesting that a specific small win (small win A) in which the second time-saving end condition can be established may be configured to be executable, and the suggestive performance to be executed. If the number of times you win a specific small hit (small hit A) where the second time saving end condition can be satisfied is less than the number of winning times when the second time saving end condition is satisfied It should be configured so that it can be changed.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to predict the period until the second time saving end condition is satisfied in the state where the high probability state of the normal symbol is set. In addition, the above-mentioned suggestive effect may be executed during the variable display of special symbols to indicate that a specific small win (small win A) has been won, or a specific small win (small win A) has been won. It may be executed at the timing when the special symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) in a display mode indicating that it has been done, or it may be executed during a small winning game corresponding to a specific small winning (small winning A), It may be executed during the variation of the special symbols after the small winning game corresponding to the specific small winning (small winning A) is finished.

In addition, a variable time that cannot be set in other lottery results is provided as a variable time of special symbols that can be set when a specific small win (small win A) is won, and the game is played according to the length of the variable time of the special symbols. It may be configured to suggest to the player that he or she has won a specific small win (small win A). Further, as the fluctuation time of the next special pattern that wins a specific small win (small prize A), a fluctuation time that cannot be set in other lottery results is provided, and the length of the special pattern fluctuation time is specified by the player. It may be configured to suggest that a small win (small win A) has been won.

In the above-described second control example, a variable operating means (lever member 10340) capable of moving between a first position (origin position) and a second position (operating position) is provided, and a variable operating means using the variable operating means is provided. It is configured to be able to execute the operation presentation. Then, after executing control (performance preparation control) to move the variable operation means from the first position to the second position using an electric drive means (driving motor, etc.), the variable operation means is applied to the player. It is configured to be able to execute a variable operation effect of moving in the direction of the first position.

By using the variable operation effect in this way, it is possible to execute an effect that greatly displaces the operating means for the player, so that a powerful effect can be provided to the player. Further, since the variable operation means can be moved in the direction of the first position by the operation of the player, the processing for returning the variable operation means to the first position (origin position) after execution of the variable operation effect is omitted. can be made easier.

A position determining means for determining the position of the variable operating means at the timing when the execution period of the variable operation effect has passed is provided, and the determination result of the position determining means determines that the variable operating means is not positioned at the first position. In this case, it is configured to facilitate the execution of the variable operation effect.

As a result, the variable operation means can be easily returned to the first position by the player's operation on the variable operation means. Note that if it is determined that the variable operation means is not positioned at the first position even though the variable operation effect has been executed a predetermined number of times during the period in which the state that facilitates execution of the variable operation effect is set. , an electric drive source (driving motor) is used to execute a return process for returning the variable operating means to the first position.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent a player who does not want to operate the variable operation means from being reduced in motivation to play due to excessive execution of the variable operation effect. Furthermore, in the second control example, in order to make it easier for the player to execute the above-described return processing while releasing the variable operation means, a control for operating the operation means (touch sensor) other than the variable operation means is performed. It is configured to execute a touch effect.

As a result, the return processing can be executed while the player is operating the touch sensor, so that it is difficult for the player to understand that the return processing has been executed. In addition, it is possible to prevent the return processing from being performed while the player is holding the variable operation means, and the variable operation means being subjected to an excessive load and being damaged.

In addition, in the above-described second control example, the lever member 10340 that can move between the first position and the second position is used as the variable operating means, but the configuration of the variable operating means is not limited to this. It may be configured to be movable between the first position, the second position, and a further different third position, or it may be moved to the third position only after being moved from the first position to the second position. configuration. Further, a configuration in which the pressing operation and the moving operation are combined may be employed. For example, a configuration may be employed in which pressing of a predetermined pressing portion enables movement between the first position and the second position.

In addition, as a drive control of the electric drive source (drive motor) for the variable operation means, the variable operation means is It may be possible to execute a return-to-origin process to move the variable operation means to the origin position, or when a specific effect is being executed, an electric drive source (driving motor) is used to lock the variable operation means so that it does not move. It may be controlled and executed. Further, as lock control for restricting the movement of the variable operating means, a stopper (for example, a pin that is protruded by driving a solenoid) may be provided in the movement path of the variable operating means.

In each of the above control examples, each time the value (N) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d in the main controller 110 is updated (that is, each time it increases or decreases), the reserved ball number command is issued. Although the case of transmitting from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp controller 113 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, only when the value (N) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d in the main controller 110 increases, the main controller 110 transmits the reserved number command to the sound lamp controller 113 . In addition, in the voice lamp control device 113, when receiving the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110, it is configured to decrease the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b by one. As a result, the number of times master controller 110 transmits a hold number command to audible lamp controller 113 and the number of times audible lamp controller 113 receives a hold number command can be reduced. The control load of the audio ramp control device 113 can be reduced.

In each of the above control examples, winning into the first ball entrance 64 and passing through the through gate 67 are each suspended up to four times, but the maximum number of suspended balls is limited to four. Instead, it may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, the number of pending balls in the variable display based on the winning to the first ball entrance 64 is displayed numerically in a part of the third pattern display device 81, or the area divided into four is displayed by the number of pending balls. It may be displayed in a different manner (for example, color or lighting pattern), and a light-emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first pattern display device 37, and the number of reserved balls is notified by the light-emitting member. can be configured to

Further, as shown in each of the above control examples, the variable display, which is a type of dynamic display, is not limited to vertically scrolling the pattern as identification information on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81. The pattern may be moved and displayed in the vertical direction or along a predetermined path such as an L-shape. Further, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the variable display of the pattern. It also includes the production display etc. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

In each control example described above, the third symbol display for showing the lottery result of each symbol to the player is executed by one display means (third symbol display device 81), but other configurations are used. For example, among the third symbols, different display means may be provided for displaying the main symbol to be displayed in an emphasized manner to the player and for displaying the sub-symbols. Also, as the configuration of the display means, a configuration other than the liquid crystal display may be used.

In each control example described above, a right-handed game aiming at the right side area of the game board 13 is executed in the case of the game state (time saving state) that is advantageous to the player, and in the case of the normal game state, the left side area of the game board 13 However, it suffices if the target area of the game board 13 is changed according to the game state, and the left-handed game is executed during the time-saving state, and during the normal state. may be caused to execute a right-handed game. Also, it may be possible to execute games in different game states while aiming at the same area.

In each of the control examples described above, the frame button 22 is used as the operation means that can be operated by the player. may be used, an operation means configured in a lever shape that can determine that the player has operated it by tilting it left or right or back and forth, or that can determine that it has been operated by the player touching or approaching It is also possible to use a touch sensor type operation means that can be used, or a wireless operation means that can determine that an operation has been performed by transmitting a predetermined radio wave. In addition, each of the movable valve 750, storage device (first storage device 770, second storage device 771), second frame button (release button) 22b (1022b, 1122b), and third frame button (release button) 22c A part or all of the operation control may be performed by the sound lamp control device 113 instead of the main control device 110 .

In each control example described above, the sound lamp control device 113 performs processing for setting the display mode in the effect executed using the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the game (lottery) itself is the sound lamp Although it is configured to be executed by the main control device 110 different from the control device 113, the processing for executing the game (lottery) and the result of the game (lottery) are displayed as effects without being limited to this. It may be configured such that the processing for and the processing are executed by the same control device. By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to execute a plurality of different processes with one control device.

The present invention may be applied to a different type of pachinko machine or the like from the above embodiments. For example, once the jackpot hits, the expected value of the jackpot is increased until the jackpot state occurs multiple times (for example, 2 times, 3 times) including the pachinko machine (commonly known as 2 times rights product, 3 times rights product) may be implemented as Further, after the big winning pattern is displayed, the pachinko machine may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the ball enters a predetermined area. Also, a pachinko machine having a prize winning device having a special area such as a V-zone and entering a special game state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area may be implemented. In addition, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine in which a plurality of combinations of probabilities (commonly referred to as settings) relating to the jackpot lottery are provided, and the settings can be changed on the gaming parlor side. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, various game machines such as arepachi, mammoth, slot machines, and so-called game machines in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are combined may be implemented.

In addition, as a pachinko machine with multiple stages of settings, the combination of jackpot probability (a combination of the jackpot probability in the low probability state and the jackpot probability in the variable probability state) can be set in multiple stages (for example, 6 stages) can be set as a representative example, but is not limited to this. In place of or in addition to combinations of jackpot probabilities, for example, a pachinko machine capable of varying the ratio of each jackpot pattern (each jackpot type) determined in the event of a jackpot according to settings. may That is, depending on the setting, the rate at which a jackpot type advantageous to the player is determined may be varied, or the rate at which a jackpot type disadvantageous to the player is determined may be varied. More specifically, for example, the ratio of determining the jackpot with a large number of rounds (eg, 16 rounds) is varied according to the setting, or the jackpot with a small number of rounds (eg, 2 rounds) is determined. A configuration may be adopted in which the degree of advantage for each setting can be varied by varying the ratio of each setting according to the setting. In addition, for example, the ratio of determining the jackpot with a large number of times of time reduction (for example, 100 times) after the end of the jackpot is varied according to the setting, or the jackpot with a small number of times of time reduction (for example, 0 times) may be varied according to the setting. Furthermore, after the end of the jackpot, the rate at which the jackpot that transitions to (or easily transitions to) an advantageous game state (eg, variable probability state) is determined can be varied according to settings, or a disadvantageous game state (eg, normal state) ) (or easily shifted) may be changed according to the setting. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which provides a big-hit classification in which the ratio determined only by specific setting increases significantly (almost never determined by other settings). Specifically, for example, six settings from 1 to 6 can be set, and setting 6 is the most advantageous setting. In setting 6, a 6-round jackpot is determined at a rate of 2% when a jackpot is achieved, whereas in other settings, a 6-round jackpot is determined only at a rate of 0.01%. may be configured. By constructing in this way, when the jackpot ends in 6 rounds, the possibility that the setting is the most advantageous setting 6 is extremely high, so the player is made to play the game paying attention to the number of rounds of the jackpot. be able to. Alternatively or in addition, for example, in setting 6, the ratio of the jackpot type in which 66 times of time saving is given after the jackpot ends may be higher than other settings. By configuring in this way, it is possible to play a game while paying attention to the number of times the time saving state ends. Alternatively, or in addition to these, for example, a jackpot type in which the jackpot (or accessories inside the jackpot, etc.) operates in an operation pattern different from other jackpot types during execution of the jackpot game. It may be configured such that the jackpot type is easily determined by a specific setting (the rate of determination is increased). In addition, in the case of varying the combination of the probability of the big win according to the setting, in the low probability state, the setting is more advantageous to the player, the higher the probability of the big win, while in the variable probability state, the setting is disadvantageous to the player. It is good also as a structure which makes a jackpot probability high as it is. In particular, in the variable probability state, the more the number of special symbol lotteries increases, the easier it is to increase the number of possession balls (the number of prize balls paid out tends to be greater than the number of game balls fired). Effective in game machines. More specifically, for example, it is a configuration that continues until the next big hit is won in the variable probability state, and by applying it to a game machine of the type that becomes a small hit with a high probability in the variable probability state, the high setting advantage You can increase your sexuality. That is, if the probability of winning a big win in the variable probability state is low, the number of lottery times until the next big win tends to increase, so the chances of getting a small win and winning balls also increase. Therefore, when the probability variable state occurs, it becomes easier for the player to win more prize balls until the next big win, which is advantageous for the player.

Furthermore, in each of the above embodiments, two types of special symbols, the first special symbol and the second special symbol, are used as a plurality of special symbol types. may be used, or only one special symbol type may be used. Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, a game property in which a lottery (fluctuation) is performed according to a rule in which a plurality of special symbols are determined in advance, and a game property in which a lottery (fluctuation) is performed independently of each other are explained. However, each of the game features described in each embodiment may be replaced or combined.

In the slot machine, for example, the pattern is changed by operating the control lever in a state where the pattern effective line is determined by inserting a coin, and the pattern is stopped and fixed by operating the stop button. It is. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is "provided with a display device that confirms and displays identification information after variably displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stopping (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed, and the stop is displayed. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value under the condition that the combination of time identification information is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Examples include:

Further, as a specific example of a game machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, it is equipped with a display device for displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then confirming and displaying the symbols, and is equipped with a ball launching handle. There are things that are not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the pattern starts to change due to the operation of the control lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or a predetermined As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game is generated in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the determined symbols at the time of the stop are so-called jackpot symbols, and the player is given a special game. A lot of balls are paid out to the tray at the bottom. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the balls can be treated as game value in the game hall. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment due to the separate handling of the medals and the balls and the restrictions on the installation location of the game machine.

All or part of the above-described embodiments and control examples may be combined.

In the following, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are shown.

<Points where the player pushes in the direction from the back to the front>
In an operation device having operation means that a player pushes in, the operation device is arranged in a first state in a normal state and a position in which the operation means protrudes from the first state with respect to the player. and a biasing means for biasing the operating means from the first state to the second state, wherein the pushing direction of the operating means in the second state is from the depth side to the front side for the player. A gaming machine A1 characterized in that it is directed to the side.

Among game machines such as pachinko machines, there is a game machine configured in such a manner that an operation means that can be operated by a player advances and retreats between a first position and a second position (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-14421
8). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, since the performance is performed in a manner that heightens the player's expectation of a big win at the advance position, the player can easily operate the operation means at the advance position with a large acceleration. , it was necessary to design the operating means with high strength. In this case, there is a problem that the operation means becomes heavy as a whole and the driving means for driving the operation means becomes large.

On the other hand, according to the game machine A1, when the pushing operation is performed in the second state, the pushing direction of the operation means is the direction from the back side to the front side for the player, so that a straightforward up and down linear motion is performed. By causing the slippage between the player's hand and the operating means, the momentum of pushing can be released.

Also, considering the game posture of the player, when the operation means is pushed around the shoulder or elbow,
Since it becomes difficult to apply force in the forward direction, the player can naturally weaken the force applied to the operating means.

In the gaming machine A1, the operation device is rotatable about an axial rod arranged on the far side for the player, tilts up and down about the axial rod, and has the operation means. The gaming machine A2 is characterized by comprising a tilting means, wherein the tilting means is arranged so that the operating means faces the opposite direction of the player in the second state.

According to the gaming machine A2, the tilting means having the operation means is configured in a manner to rotate, and in the second state, the operation means is arranged in the direction opposite to the player, so that the game can be played in the second state. It is possible to prevent a person from performing an operation of hitting the operating means.

In addition, by placing the hand near the shaft and tilting the hand around that position as a fulcrum, the operation means can be easily pushed in, so that a new pushing operation method that is less likely to be accelerated can be provided. , it is possible to prevent the operation device from being damaged by the pushing operation of the player.

The new push operation method is, for example, placing the outer side of the little finger of the left hand near the shaft, placing the hand near the operation means with the palm up and down, and then turning the thumb side toward the operation means. A method in which the tip of the middle finger is placed near the shaft and the palm is placed facing the operation means, and then a method in which the palm is dropped toward the operation means is exemplified. be done.

A gaming machine A3 characterized in that, in the gaming machine A1 or A2, in the first state, the direction of the pushing operation of the operating means is vertical.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A1 or A2, the direction of the pushing operation of the operation means in the first state is the vertical direction. It is possible to prevent breakage due to the pushing operation in the state.

In the game machine A3, the operation device is configured so that the operation means can be automatically operated, and includes a driving means for generating a driving force for the automatic operation. A gaming machine A4 characterized in that it acts in the direction of one side and does not act in the opposite direction.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A3, the driving force of the driving means for automatically operating the operation device acts only in the pushing operation direction, so that the driving force is directed in the direction opposite to the operation direction of the player. can be prevented from working. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the driving means from being damaged by the player's operation.

For example, by configuring the button so that it can only be pushed, it is possible to prevent the driving means from being pulled in the opposite direction by the player when the button is retracted and receiving a high load.

In the game machine A4, a maintenance state that maintains the operation device in the first state or the second state can be formed, and the maintenance means is operated by the driving means. a rotating means for transmitting a driving force to the operating means, wherein the rotating means is capable of phase change between a first phase and a second phase different from the first phase while the maintaining means is maintained; In the first phase and the second phase, the range in which the operating means can move when the maintaining state is canceled is changed, and in both the first phase and the second phase,
A gaming machine A5 configured to be able to release the maintained state by the same rotation.

According to the game machine A5, in addition to the effects of the game machine A4, the phase of the driving means can be changed while the maintaining means is kept in the maintained state, and in the phase after the change, the movement to release the maintained state is rotated. The movement width of the operation device can be changed by the biasing means. Therefore, it is possible to configure a plurality of operation modes by the biasing means.

In the gaming machine A5, the maintaining means is movable in the urging direction of the urging means in the maintaining state, and the moving speed of the maintaining means increases or decreases in accordance with the rotational speed of the rotating means. , a game machine A6 configured such that the operating means moves following the movement of the maintaining means.

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A5, the movement of the urging means in the direction of the urging force is caused only by the urging force, so the mode of movement is limited to one way. Since it is possible to add a moving mode of moving following the maintaining means to the operating means, it is possible to increase the types of moving modes of the operating means. Thereby, the degree of attention of the operation device can be improved.

In any one of the game machines A1 to A6, light-emitting means disposed inside the operation device and emitting light toward the player is provided, and the second state is more favorable than the first state. However, from a player's point of view, the game machine A7 is characterized in that the area of the operating means is reduced and the irradiation range of the light emitted by the light emitting means is expanded.

According to the game machine A7, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines A1 to A6, the light emitting means is provided, and the second state is more illuminated by the light emitting means from the player's point of view than the first state. Since the irradiation range of the emitted light is expanded and the area of the operation means is reduced, the player can be made to pay attention to the light and the performance effect can be improved, and at the same time, it is difficult to press the operation means unless aiming. By adopting this mode, it is possible to reduce the power of the player at the time of operation.

In the gaming machine A7, the operating means is made of a non-transmissive material, and the area of the exposed portion of the light emitting means is changed by moving the operating means toward and away from the display means. Characterized game machine A8.

According to the game machine A8, in addition to the effects of the game machine A7, the operation means is made of a non-transmissive material, and the operation means moves toward and away from the display means to emit light from the display means. Since the area of the exposed portion changes, it is possible to prevent the emitted light from reflecting on the display means and making it difficult to see the image on the display means.

<The point of making the repulsive force at normal times small while making it possible to respond to repeated hits>
In an operation device having an operation means that allows a player to perform an operation up to an end position, a first state and a second state in which the range of motion of the operation up to the end position is wider than that of the first state.
a first driving means for generating a driving force for moving from the second state to the first state; and biasing means for generating a biasing force for moving from the first state to the second state. A game machine B1 characterized by comprising a second driving means for generating a driving force for moving the operation means from the first state to the second state in accordance with the player's operation.

Among game machines such as pachinko machines, there is a game machine configured in such a manner that an operation means that can be operated by a player advances and retreats between a first position and a second position (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-14421
8). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, the force for returning the operation means to the initial position is generated by the spring, and the automatic operation of the operation means is performed by the drive motor. However, in that case, the return of the operating means is delayed, and if the player's operation is fast, the operating means does not follow the player's operation, making it difficult for the player to repeat the operation. There was a problem.

According to the gaming machine B1, by setting the biasing force to be weak, the driving force of the motor can be reduced when the operating means is moved by the first driving means. 2
By pushing back the operation means with the drive means, the return can be made faster, so that the player can enjoy the continuous hitting operation.

The game machine B1 is provided with repeated hitting determination means for determining whether or not a repeated hitting operation is being performed based on a sensor detection value of the stroke operation means within a predetermined time, and the second driving means is operated based on the detection value of the repeated hitting determination means. A gaming machine B2 characterized by determining whether or not to drive.

According to the gaming machine B2, whether or not to drive the second drive means is determined based on the detection value of the repeated hitting determination means, so the player does not perform repeated hitting operations (for example, single pressing operation, long pressing, and so on). It is possible to prevent the second driving means from operating even when the player is performing an operation, etc., and the player feels the load of pushing back the hand.

In the gaming machine B2, terminal detecting means for detecting the position of the operating means and whether or not the operating means is arranged at the terminal position, and detecting whether or not the operating means is arranged at a position shifted by a predetermined amount from the terminal position. position difference detection means for detecting; and movement direction determination means for determining the direction of movement of the operation means from the time relationship between the detection value of the terminal end detection means and the detection value of the position difference detection means; a game machine B3 characterized in that the second drive means is driven when the direction of movement determined by is the direction from the end of the push-in to return to the first state.

According to the game machine B3, in addition to the effects of the game machine B2, when the direction of movement determined by the movement direction determination means is the direction from the end of the push to return to the first state, that is, when the player's hand moves away from the button. Since the second driving means is driven at the timing of moving in the direction of separation, it is possible to generate a load that pushes back the operating means in synchronization with the movement of the player.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the second driving device from operating in a direction opposite to the moving direction of the player's hand, and placing a high load on the player's hand.

In any one of game machines B1 to B3, the second drive means is composed of a voice coil motor that vibrates and displaces along a direction connecting the first state and the second state of the operation means. Game machine B4 to play.

According to the game machine B4, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines B1 to B3, the vibration displacement of the voice coil motor can be effectively used to generate the driving force for moving the operating means.

In any one of game machines B1 to B3, a support frame for supporting the operation means is provided, and the second drive means includes a drive motor for rotating an eccentric weight and elastically supports the drive motor on the support frame. a supporting means, wherein the driving force for moving the operating means from the position of the first state toward the position of the second state increases as the operating means approaches the terminal position. The game machine B5 is characterized in that the eccentric weight abuts against the support frame in a state in which the operating means is arranged at the terminal position, thereby generating a driving force.

According to the game machine B5, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines B1 to B3, the driving force by the second driving means is generated by the driving force generated by the supporting means and the contact between the eccentric weight and the supporting frame. By generating it separately from the driving force, it is possible to adjust the driving force applied to the operating means while maintaining the rotation of the driving motor. At this time, it is unnecessary to perform control to start or stop the rotation of the drive motor, and the rotation of the drive motor can be maintained.

In the gaming machine B5, the eccentric weight moves closer to the support frame in the moving direction of the operation means and comes into contact with the support frame based on the arrangement of the operation means at the end position. A game machine B6 characterized by.

According to the game machine B6, in addition to the effects of the game machine B5, the eccentric weight moves closer to the support frame in the movement direction of the operation means and comes into contact with the support frame. By doing so, the drive motor can be moved away from the support frame in the moving direction of the operating means. As a result, the support means for supporting the drive motor moves in the direction away from the support frame (the direction toward the operation means), so that the driving force for pushing back the operation means can be further increased.

<Points of using VCM as a braking device and vibration effect device>
A detection sensor for detecting a position near the end position of the operation means, the detection sensor is composed of a plurality of sensors, measuring means for measuring the speed of the operation means from the detection interval of the detection sensors, and the measurement means threshold determination means for determining whether or not the measured value measured by is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold; The driving force generated by the repulsion means increases when the measured threshold value is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold value, compared to when the threshold value measured by the threshold determination means is equal to or less than the predetermined threshold value. Characteristic gaming machine C1.

Among game machines such as pachinko machines, there is a game machine configured in such a manner that an operation means that can be operated by a player advances and retreats between a first position and a second position (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-14421
8). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, if the player's light operation is emphasized, the operation resistance will be low, and there is a risk that the operation means will be damaged by the player's operation. Although the speed can be reduced and the possibility of damage to the operating means can be reduced, there is a problem that the force required for the player's operation increases, and the operation of the operating means becomes a burden for weak players. .

On the other hand, according to the game machine C1, the threshold determination means determines whether the speed of the operating means is equal to or higher than the threshold, and if it is equal to or higher than the threshold, the drive force generated by the repulsion means is increased. Therefore, the operation resistance can be reduced when the speed of the operation means is equal to or less than the threshold, and the operation means can be decelerated only when necessary. Therefore, it is possible to improve operability and prevent destruction by the repulsion means.

In the game machine C1, the repulsive means includes a voice coil motor that generates a driving force in a direction opposite to the pushing direction of the operating means, and when the threshold measured by the threshold determination means is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold, , before the control for pushing out the voice coil motor to the extended position is executed and the operating means is arranged at a position capable of coming into contact with the voice coil motor,
A gaming machine C2 characterized by driving the voice coil motor in advance.

According to the game machine C2, in addition to the effects of the game machine C1, the voice coil motor can be driven and controlled to decelerate the operating means, and the operating means can be arranged at a position where it can come into contact with the voice coil motor. By driving the voice coil motor before moving, it is possible to suppress the impact generated between the operating means and the voice coil motor.

In the gaming machine C1 or C2, the gaming machine C3 is characterized in that, after the operating means and the voice coil motor come into contact with each other, control is performed to increase the current flowing through the voice coil motor.

According to the game machine C3, in addition to the effects of the game machine C1 or C2, after the operation means and the voice coil motor come into contact with each other, the operation means is controlled to increase the current flowing through the voice coil motor. While suppressing the occurrence of a large load at the moment of contact with the voice coil motor, the degree of braking the operation means can be gradually improved, and the sense of discomfort felt by the player during operation can be reduced.

In the game machine C1, the repulsion means is disposed so as to be able to come into contact with the operation means, and generates a driving force corresponding to the amount of deformation caused by the movement of the operation means by means of spring elasticity. .

According to the game machine C4, in addition to the effects of the game machine C1, the repulsion means generates a driving force corresponding to the amount of deformation by means of spring elasticity. can be generated.

In the gaming machine C4, the repulsion means compares the value measured by the threshold value determining means when the value measured by the threshold value determination means is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold value to the case where the value measured by the threshold value determination means is equal to or less than the predetermined threshold value. A gaming machine C5 is characterized in that a movable area of an end portion of said repulsion means opposite to a side contacting said operation means is narrowed.

According to the game machine C5, in addition to the effects of the game machine C4, the movable area of the end of the repulsion means, which is the end opposite to the side that contacts the operation means, is narrowed, thereby making it possible to operate the operation means. A higher velocity can increase the elastic force generated by the repulsive means.

<Damage of the driving means is prevented by interrupting the transmission of the driving force with the clutch>
An operation device having operation means operated by a player, wherein the operation device includes drive means for generating a driving force for operating the operation means, transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the drive means to the operation means, a releasing means for releasing the transmission of the driving force, the releasing means releasing the driving force when the load generated between the driving means and the operating means through the transmitting means exceeds a predetermined amount. A gaming machine D1 characterized by canceling transmission.

Among game machines such as pachinko machines, there is a game machine configured in such a manner that an operation means that can be operated by a player advances and retreats between a first position and a second position (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-14421
8). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, when the operation means is automatically operated for the effect, if the operation means is operated during the automatic operation, there is a risk that a large load will be applied to the drive system. There was a problem.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, the canceling means cancels the transmission of the driving force when the load generated between the driving means and the operating means via the transmitting means exceeds a predetermined amount. Therefore, even if the player operates the operation means while the operation means is automatically operating, the transmission of the load to the drive system is canceled (disconnected), and the load applied to the drive system can be suppressed. can.

In the game machine D1, the driving means is capable of driving in a first direction and driving in a second direction opposite to the first direction, and during driving in the first direction, The gaming machine D2 is characterized in that the release by the release means functions regardless of whether the game machine is being driven in the second direction.

Here, when whether or not the transmission of the driving force can be canceled depends on the operating direction of the driving means,
If the operating means is operated by the player while driving the driving means in an operation direction in which transmission of the driving force cannot be released, there is a risk that a large load will be applied to the driving means. Therefore, the degree of freedom of performance is reduced when the operating means is operated to effect performance.

When the button is driven between the first position and the second position, the lock member that locks the button is moved in the unlocking direction or in the unlocking direction depending on whether the driving means rotates forward or backward. Toggles whether to move in the opposite direction. In this case, two modes of button operation can be created (a release pattern and a non-release pattern), but the driving force must be interrupted in both cases.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D1, the transmission of the driving force can be canceled (disconnected) in both driving directions regardless of the driving direction of the driving means. , it is possible to improve the degree of freedom of action in the effect of automatically operating the operating means.

It should be noted that, as a method of releasing the transmission, the clutch is moved in a direction intersecting with the operating direction of the driving means. The intersecting direction is intended to exclude, for example, the circumferential direction when the drive means rotates, and the clutch may move in the rotation axis direction or in the radial direction.

The gaming machine D1 or D2 includes biasing means for biasing the driving means and the transmission means to a state in which the driving force can be transmitted, and the release means is a contact portion between the driving means and the transmission means. and engaging teeth for transmitting a driving force when they are engaged with each other. A game machine D3, characterized in that the game machine D3 has a shape that tapers away from the contact surface and is inclined with respect to the contact surface.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D1 or D2, the urging means presses the driving means and the transmission means, and the release means applies the driving force in the engaged state on the contact surfaces of the pressing means. On the other hand, since both surfaces facing the direction of movement of the driving means are provided with engaging teeth that are tapered away from the abutment surfaces, the engagement between the engaging teeth causes the transmission means to move from the driving means. They can be separated, thereby canceling the transmission of the driving force.

Further, a biasing force is constantly applied by the biasing means between the driving means and the transmitting means, and when the transmitting means is separated from the driving means, the biasing force acts in the direction of movement of the driving means via the engagement teeth. load is applied. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a sudden change in the load applied to the driving means between the state in which the driving force is transmitted and the state in which the transmission is cancelled.

The size of the engaging portion of the engaging tooth decreases in the circumferential direction of the transmitting means as the transmitting means moves away from the driving means. Therefore, when the phase difference between the transmission means and the drive means increases, it is possible to prevent the load generated in the circumferential direction of the transmission means from becoming excessive.

In addition, in the released state, the resistance is periodically reinstated, rather than completely de-resistance away. As a result, when the player releases the button, the button can be started to operate within a short period of time.

That is, if the player is holding the button when the button is driven "as an effect",
It goes through one phase of the button action. In addition, if the player releases his hand in the middle of the game, if the player moves from the end of the first phase, the period during which the button is stopped becomes longer, and "
The player's feeling of "starting to move because the load on the player is relieved" is reduced.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D3, the operation means can be started within a short period of time after the player releases the hand and the load is released. As a result, it is possible to produce a feeling that the player starts to move because the load on the player is relieved.

In any one of the game machines D1 to D3, the engagement surface between the transmission means and the release means is:
A gaming machine D4 characterized in that it is formed from sawtooth shapes that engage with each other.

According to the game machine D4, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines D1 to D3, when the load from the player is released, the release means can be easily returned to the engagement position with the transmission means at an early stage.
That is, when the tip of the engaging surface has a plane parallel to the direction in which the transmission means and the release means move toward and away from each other, the transmission means and the release means collide with each other at this plane, and the release means is disengaged. It is possible to suppress the movement along the direction of approaching and separating from the means to be stopped. Therefore, after the load from the player is released, the operation means can be started to operate early.

In any one of the game machines D1 to D4, the operation mode of the operating means differs between when the driving means is continuously operated in the forward direction and when the driving means is continuously operated in the reverse direction. A gaming machine D5 characterized by:

According to the game machine D5, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines D1 to D4, while preparing a plurality of operation modes of the operating means, the driving force transmission can be canceled without being limited to any one operation mode. It can be carried out.

In the game machine D5, the operating mode of the operating means is the following for a predetermined period from the start of the operation of the driving means when there is a difference between whether the driving means operates in the forward direction or in the reverse direction. A gaming machine D6 is similar in that the operation after the predetermined period of time has elapsed is different.

According to the game machine D6, in addition to the effects of the game machine D5, when there is a difference in the operation direction of the drive means in the operation mode of the operation means, the operation mode for a predetermined period from the start of the operation of the drive means is the same. Since the action after the predetermined period of time has elapsed is different, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the operating means.

Here, by combining the difference in the operating mode of the operating means with information that is beneficial to the player, such as the degree of expectation for a big win, the player is instructed to operate the operating means for a predetermined period of time until the operating mode of the operating means changes. can be supervised.

In addition, since the difference in operation mode is caused by the difference in the operation direction of the drive means, if the operation direction of the drive means can be confirmed in advance, the player can grasp the difference in the degree of expectation for the big win without watching the operation of the operation means. can be done. However, the drive means is usually hidden from the player, and the difference in the direction of action cannot be recognized from the vibration sound. can be made to watch over the operation of the operating means.

<Change the position of the protrusion of the cam based on the rotation of the cam>
An operation device having operation means operated by a player, wherein the operation device includes drive means for generating a driving force for operating the operation means, transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the drive means to the operation means, first means configured to operate the operating means between a first position and a second position different from the first position, and suppressing a change in the position of the operating means from the first position; biasing means for biasing the operating means in a direction from the first position to the second position; and operating means for moving from the first position to the second position by the biasing force of the biasing means. terminating means for variably forming the movement terminating end of the first means, wherein the first means suppresses a change in the position of the operating means by engaging with the operating means; 1 means includes releasing load means for applying a load to the first means for releasing the engagement with the operating means, and releasing the engagement by the releasing load means and terminating the movement of the operating means in the terminating means. A game machine E characterized in that the change is performed by a single driving means.
1.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a cam-operated and movable operating means is fixed at a first position, and the fixing is released by a release load means, whereby the urging force of the urging means expands and operates. , There is a game machine that can change the amount of displacement of the overhanging operation by the termination means (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-144218). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, since the amount of displacement of the overhanging operation of the operation means is changed according to the phase of the cam when the fixation is released, the phase of the cam when the fixation is released varies in various ways. The cam for moving the means and the release load means for releasing the fixation are driven by separate driving forces. Therefore, there is a problem that a plurality of driving means are required and the space for arranging the driving means becomes large.

On the other hand, in the game machine E1, the releasing load means for releasing the fixation of the operating means is driven by the driving means for driving the operating means. As a result, the driving means for changing the terminal position of the operating means by the terminal means and the driving means for moving the release load means can be used together, so the number of driving means can be reduced.

A game machine E2 characterized in that, in the game machine E1, the change in the position of the release load means is performed based on the operation of the transmission means.

According to the game machine E2, in addition to the effects of the game machine E1, the position of the release load means can be changed based on the operation of the transmission means. The state of the load means can be determined. As a result, the number of detecting means such as position sensors for detecting the state of the load release means can be reduced, and the number of parts can be reduced.

As a method for switching the state of the load release means, when the transmission means is composed of a cam and the load release means is composed of a projection that rotates coaxially with the cam, there is a method of shifting the rotational cycle of the cam and the projection. , a method of desynchronizing the rotation of the cam and the rotation of the projection when the cam is arranged in a predetermined phase, and synchronizing the rotation of the cam and the rotation of the projection in other phases, etc.
exemplified.

In the gaming machine E2, the release load means, by the load given from the first means,
A gaming machine E3 is arranged operably with respect to the transmitting means, and is characterized in that whether or not the releasing load means and the transmitting means are synchronously operated is switched by the operation of the load releasing means.

According to the game machine E3, in addition to the effects of the game machine E2, the release load means is arranged to be operable with respect to the transmission means by the load from the first means, and the release load means is operated by the operation of the release load means. Since it is switched whether or not to operate synchronously with the transmission means, the synchronous state between the release load means and the transmission means can be changed without adding a member.

In the game machine E2, the transmission means includes a rotating first rotating member, the operating means is supported eccentrically with respect to the rotating shaft of the first rotating member, and the release load means includes a rotating second rotating member. A gaming machine E4 comprising members, wherein the rotation periods of the first rotating member and the second rotating member are different.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E2, the first rotating member and the second rotating member are operated by a single drive means, but the rotation cycles are different, so that the second rotating means can be operated at a predetermined speed. A plurality of phases of the first rotary member can be prepared when the first means is released by coming into contact with the first means in phase.

According to this configuration, it is possible to prepare a plurality of types of end positions when the operating means is held at the first position and then released and moved toward the second position. ,
You can expand your production range. For example, an effect of gradually moving the end position away from the first position or an effect of gradually approaching the first position can be realized with the same configuration.

<Vibration device supported by soft case>
In an operation device having operation means operated by a player, the operation device has a first position for the operation means and a second position reached by the operation means when the player performs an operation from the first position. A game machine comprising vibrating means having a vibrating portion configured to be movable between and vibrating; and receiving means disposed so as to be in contact with the vibrating portion, wherein the operating means is disposed at the first position Then, the vibrating portion is in a separated state in which it cannot abut against the receiving means. A gaming machine F1 characterized by being in a contact state.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines that are provided with operating means that can be operated by the player and vibration means that transmits vibrations to the player via the operating means or the frame of the gaming machine (for example,
See JP-A-2014-144218). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, regardless of whether the operation means is operated or not, when the vibration means vibrates, the vibration is transmitted to the operation means or the frame of the game machine. Alternatively, since it is transmitted to the player who touches the frame of the game machine, when performing an effect of transmitting vibration immediately after operating the operation means,
It is necessary to operate the vibrating means after detecting the operation of the operating means. Therefore, after the player operates the operation means, it is necessary to operate the vibration means before releasing the operation means. mode), there is a problem that the vibration may not start in time before releasing the hand, and the player may not notice the vibration.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F1, whether or not the vibrating portion contacts the receiving means is determined depending on whether the operating means is placed at the first position or is placed at the second position by being operated by the player. Since it changes, even when the vibrating portion is continuously vibrated, the player can feel the vibration only when the player operates the operating means. In addition, since the vibration of the vibrating portion occurs before the player performs the pressing operation, the vibrating portion can be vibrated before the player releases the hand regardless of the mode of operation by the player. Vibration can be transmitted to a person.

In the gaming machine F1, the vibration means is arranged to protrude in the occupation area occupied when the operation means is arranged at the second position in the separated state, and the operation means moves to the second position. The game machine F2 changes to the abutting state by moving the vibrating means out of the occupied area.

According to the game machine F2, in addition to the effects of the game machine F1, the vibration means moves based on the movement of the operation means, thereby changing from the separated state to the contact state. The contact strength between the operating means or the receiving means and the vibrating portion can be changed,
The intensity of transmitted vibrations can also be varied. Therefore, the effect of changing the strength of the transmitted vibration with respect to the player's operation strength can be performed by similarly vibrating the vibrating means without any particular change in the driving mode.

A game machine F3 characterized in that, in the game machines F1 or F2, the vibration means is supported by the receiving means via support means having spring elasticity.

According to the game machine F3, in addition to the effects of the game machine F1 or F2, the support means can perform positioning with respect to the receiving means while suppressing the vibration of the vibrating means from being transmitted to the receiving means. As a result, it is possible to separate the receiving means and the vibrating means, prevent transmission of vibration, and suppress displacement occurring in the vibrating means during vibration.

A game machine F4 characterized in that, in the game machine F3, in the contact state, the support means expands and contracts based on the vibration of the vibrating portion.

According to the game machine F4, in addition to the effects of the game machine F3, the elasticity of the support means can be used to increase the load generated when the vibrating portion and the receiving means come into contact with each other. That is, the extension and contraction of the supporting means can give momentum when the vibrating part moves in the direction of approaching the receiving means.

In the game machine F3, the support means has deformation resistance along the operating direction of the operation means,
A gaming machine F5 characterized in that the deformation resistance in a direction perpendicular to the operating direction of the operating means is made lower than that.

According to the game machine F5, in addition to the effects of the game machine F3, the direction in which the support means deforms can be finely set when the operation means is operated and interferes with the support means due to the difference in deformation resistance of the support means. can.

Thus, even if the amount of movement of the operating means is slightly different, the amount of expansion and contraction of the supporting means can be made different, and the load generated between the vibrating portion and the receiving means can be made different. .

As a method for differentiating the deformation resistance, in the case where the support means is composed of a rubber member surrounding the vibrating means, a method of extending rubber legs along the movement direction of the operating means, or a method in which the support means surrounds the vibrating means. A method of manufacturing a rubber member by two-color molding to change the deformation resistance for each direction when it is composed of a rubber member; , and a coil spring that biases the vibrating means along the operating direction of the operating means.

A game machine F6 characterized in that, in the game machine F3, the portion with which the vibrating portion abuts is the receiving means, and the receiving means is configured as a separate means from the operating means.

According to the game machine F6, in addition to the effects of the game machine F3, the vibration is not transmitted to the player through the operation means, but the vibration is transmitted to the player through the receiving means which is separate from the operation means. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the vibration of the vibrating means from being transmitted to the driving means via the operating means and the transmitting means, thereby suppressing a state in which a load is applied to the driving means. Thereby, the durability of the driving means can be improved.

In addition, since it is possible to suppress the vibration from being transmitted to the hand of the player who operates the operation means, it is possible to prevent the player who is surprised by the vibration from stopping the operation during the operation.

As the receiving means, for example, among the frame parts of the game machine, the part near the upper tray to which the game balls are supplied, the edge part of the glass frame, etc. Examples include a portion that may be touched by hands, a housing portion that partially encloses the operation means, and the like.

<One-touch attachment between cam and shaft. Shape deformation (elastic deformation) is possible at the mounting part>
In an operation device having operation means operated by a player, the operation device is configured such that the operation means is movable between a first position and a second position different from the first position, and the operation means is operated by a player. and a transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the operation means, wherein the transmission means comprises a deformation portion that elastically deforms due to an overload. Gaming machine G1 to play.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, an operating means that can be operated by a player, a driving means that generates driving force for driving the operating means, and a transmission means that transmits the driving force from the driving means to the operating means. There is a game machine provided (for example, see JP 2014-144218)
. However, in the above-described conventional game machine, when the player holds and fixes the operation means, when the drive means generates a driving force for driving the operation means, the connecting portion between the transmission means and the operation means,
There is a problem that a load is accumulated in the connecting portion between the transmission means and the driving means, and these connecting portions may be damaged.

On the other hand, according to the game machine G1, when the operation device is overloaded, the deformable portion of the transmission means is elastically deformed, so that the connecting portion between the operation means and the transmission means, the drive means and the transmission means It is possible to relax the load applied to the connection part with.

In the gaming machine G1, the transmission means includes a cam member that is rotatably supported, the deforming portion constitutes a connection portion of the cam member with the rotating shaft, and the elasticity of the deforming portion causes the cam member to move toward the rotating shaft. A game machine G2 characterized in that a fixing force of is generated.

According to the game machine G2, the deforming portion plays a role of a portion responsible for elastic deformation of the cam member with respect to the rotating shaft of the transmission means, a role of a portion generating a supporting force of the cam member with respect to the rotating shaft,
Prepare. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the configuration of the transmission member by sharing the functions. For example, separate securing members such as e-rings can be omitted.

In the gaming machine G2, the cam member has a projecting portion projecting in parallel with the rotation shaft, the projecting portion and the operating means are connected, and the elastic deformation of the deformation portion causes the cam member to On the other hand, a gaming machine G3 is characterized in that the rotating shaft is tilted.

Here, the elastic deformation of the transmission means can also be performed, for example, by displacing the projecting portion along the circumferential direction of the cam member. However, in this case, it becomes difficult to construct the cam member and the projecting portion as one member, and the number of members may increase.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G2, the elastic deformation of the deformation portion is such that the rotating shaft tilts with respect to the cam member. Compared to the case where the cam member is slid relative to the cam member, the cam member can be easily constructed from a single member, and the members can be simplified.

In the gaming machine G3, the elastic deformation resistance of the deforming portion is greater than that of the rotating shaft in comparison with the first rotating direction in which the cam member is rotated about a straight line connecting the rotating shaft and the projecting portion. A gaming machine characterized in that deformation resistance is greater in a second rotation direction in which rotation is performed around a straight line perpendicular to both a straight line connecting the projecting portion and an extending direction of the rotation shaft. G4.

According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G3, by making the deformation resistance of the deformation portion different for each direction, the state after the deformation portion is elastically deformed when viewed from the rotation axis direction is more Compared to the state before elastic deformation, the projecting tip of the projecting portion can be displaced in the circumferential direction of the cam member. As a result, the projecting portion of the cam member can be displaced along the direction in which the projecting portion is to move, so that the elastic deformation of the deformation portion relieves the load generated between the projecting portion and the operating means. can do.

The game machine G3 or G4 includes a friction member arranged at a predetermined distance along a direction parallel to the rotation axis of the cam member, wherein the deformation portion elastically deforms to change the posture of the cam member, The game machine G5 is characterized in that the cam member and the friction member are in contact with each other.

According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G3 or G4, when an overload is applied to the operation means, the deformable portion elastically deforms, thereby changing the attitude of the cam member, and the cam member and the friction member are brought into contact with each other. contact, the movement resistance of the cam member itself can be increased, thereby reducing the load applied to the connecting portion between the cam member and the operating means.

A gaming machine G6 is characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines G3 to G5, the gaming machine G6 comprises detection means for detecting that at least part of the cam member is tilted with respect to an axis.

Here, in a situation where the operating device is overloaded and the driving means is operating but the operating means is not, for example, the displacement expected by driving the driving means and the actual displacement of the operating means When it is detected that an overload has occurred on the basis of a deviation from , it is necessary to drive the driving means for a predetermined period of time before the occurrence of the overload is detected. This period can be shortened as the arrangement interval of the detection means for detecting displacement deviation becomes smaller, but the smaller the arrangement interval of the detection means, the more complicated the structure of the detection means and the higher the cost. Therefore, there is a problem that it is difficult to provide a configuration that can detect the occurrence of an overload at a low cost and at an early stage.

On the other hand, according to the game machine G6, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines G3 to G5, the detection means detects whether or not at least a part of the cam member is tilted with respect to the axis. Therefore, it is possible to determine that an overload has occurred at the same time when the detecting means detects at least a part of the cam member, without the need to drive the driving means for a predetermined period while suppressing the number of additional detecting means. This makes it possible to reduce the load applied to the driving means when an overload occurs.

<Structure to prevent balls with threads. Game machine H>
In a game machine provided with a foul ball passage through which foul balls flowing back toward a launching device, among game balls shot into a game area, can pass, the foul ball passage permits passage of the falling game balls. The game machine H1 is characterized by comprising a one-way obstruction means for obstructing the movement of objects flowing backward.

A game machine such as a pachinko machine, where a thread cutting blade is arranged inside the guide path that guides the game ball from the upper tray to the launcher, and the game ball with the thread connected is driven into the game area. There is a game machine with a function to prevent (cut the thread) (for example, JP 2015-02
4179). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, the thread is pressed against the thread cutting teeth when the ball is shot, and the thread is cut by the tension generated at that time. It may be returned to the player side as a foul ball.
For this reason, for example, a cheating tool is prepared in which game balls are connected to both ends of a string, and one of the game balls connected to one end of the string is shot with a weak firing strength to flow into the foul ball passage and be returned to the player. By hitting the other game ball connected to the other end of the string into the game area while gripping one of the game balls that have been drawn, the string can be removed from the guide path and passed through the foul ball passage to the other side. Since it is possible to create a state in which one game ball and the other game ball are connected by a string, a load is applied from the outside to the string connected to the other game ball, and the other game ball placed in the game area There is a problem that there is a possibility that it may be possible to obtain illicit profits by manipulating the

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine H1, even if a fraudulent act of applying a load to the other game ball using the string guided to the game area through the foul ball passage is performed, the one-way obstruction means However, by interfering with the movement of the string in the reverse direction of the game ball, it is possible to make it difficult to generate illicit profits.

A game machine H2 characterized in that the foul ball path in the game machine H1 has a bent portion for bending a downflow path of the game ball.

According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H1, the string guided along the path of the game ball can be rubbed against the bent portion, so that the string can be quickly cut.

In the gaming machine H2, the bending portion is provided with a load means which does not apply a load to the game balls flowing down, but applies a load to the objects flowing backward, on the inner corner side of the bending.
.

According to the game machine H3, in addition to the effects of the game machine H2, it is possible to apply a load to the backflowing object (for example, a thread-like member) by the load means.

In the game machine H3, the game machine H4 is characterized in that the load means is arranged in a concave portion having a width smaller than the diameter of the game ball.

According to the game machine H4, in addition to the effect of the game machine H3, by preventing the game ball from entering the recess of the recessed part, collision between the load means and the game ball is avoided, and the load means is damaged. can be prevented.

A gaming machine H5 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine H3 or H4, the gaming machine H5 comprises regulation means for regulating the movement of the load means to the outside of the foul ball passage.

According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H3 or H4, the restricting means restricts the outward movement of the load means in the foul ball passage. When a load is applied, it is possible to prevent the load applied to the on-line member from weakening due to the deformation of the load means to the outside of the foul ball passage.

In any one of the game machines H1 to H5, a receiving tray is provided as a tray on the front side of the front door for the foul balls to reach first, and the receiving tray is a portion for discharging the game balls paid out from the payout device. The game machine H6 is characterized in that the ball discharge part is arranged above the discharge side exit of the foul ball passage.

According to the game machine H6, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines H1 to H5, the game balls paid out from the payout device pass in front of the discharge side exit of the foul ball passage. To reduce the durability of the string by intentionally hitting the put out game ball to apply the load when the string guided to the game area is used to apply the load to the other game ball. be able to.

In any one of the game machines H1 to H6, the lower end of the put-out ball discharge part that discharges the game balls put out from the pay-out device to the receiving tray, which is the tray where the foul balls reach first on the front side of the front door. , a game machine H7 characterized by being positioned below the lower end of the discharge-side exit of the foul ball passage.

According to the game machine H7, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines H1 to H6, a cheating act was performed in which a string guided to the game area through the foul ball passage was used to apply a load to the other game ball. In this case, the thread can be easily damaged by the game balls that are paid out.

<Structure of board holding down. Game machine I>
A game means used during a game, and a receiving means which is open on one side facing the game means and capable of receiving the game means from the one side, the receiving means receives the game means. A state changing means is provided for changing the gaming means from the unusable state to the usable state, wherein the state changing means changes the gaming means to the usable state. A gaming machine I1 characterized by comprising an approach means for approaching the game means from the one side when setting the above.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, the state changes between a fixed state in which the game board is rotatable in a rotational direction parallel to the front surface of the game board and the game board is fixed to the inner frame, and a released state in which the game board can be removed from the inner frame. There is a game machine provided with a fixing means for holding (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2005-230420). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, the fixing means is configured to be able to change its state only after the game board is pushed into the position of the use state. Therefore, there is a problem that the work efficiency may be lowered.

On the other hand, according to the game machine I1, since the state changing means has a means for approaching the game means from the receiving side (one side) when the game means is put into use, the pushing of the game board is prevented. Even if it is halfway, the proximity means contacts the game board and adds a pushing force,
The effect is that the game board can be pushed to the position of the use state.

In the game machine I1, the state changing means displaces the game means to the one side as the game means is changed to an unusable state. .

According to the game machine I2, in addition to the effects of the game machine I1, the game means is displaced to the receiving side (one side) as the game means is changed to the unusable state, so that the game means can be removed. It is effective in improving the working efficiency of the work.

In the game machine I1 or I2, the state changing means makes the game means unusable and the proximity means retreats to the outside of the game means. Gaming machine I3.

According to the game machine I3, in addition to the effects of the game machine I1 or I2, the proximity means retracts to the outside of the game means, so that it is possible to improve the working efficiency of the work of removing the game means. Since this is performed along with disabling the means, the working efficiency can be further improved.

In any one of the game machines I1 to I3, the game machine I4 is provided with contact means for receiving a load from the game means when the state changing means is changed to the usable state.

According to the game machine I4, since the contact means receives a load from the game means to change the state of the state changing means to the usable state, the operation of pressing the game means against the state changing means causes the usable state as a series of flows. can change state to

In the game machine I4, the game means is supported by a shaft on one side of the receiving means and is received by the receiving means by approaching the other side, and the state changing means is the receiving means. A gaming machine I5 characterized in that it is arranged on the other side of the.

According to the game machine I5, in addition to the effects of the game machine I4, the width dimension of the game means is used to
A load can be efficiently applied to the abutment means via the game means.

In any one of the game machines I1 to I5, there is provided blocking means for blocking the opening on the one side of the receiving means, the blocking means being unusable by the state changing means making the game means unusable. The gaming machine I6 is characterized by comprising a closing regulation part that prevents the opening on one side of the gaming means from being closed when the state is maintained.

According to the gaming machine I6, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines I1 to I5, the state changing means puts the gaming means into a usable state depending on whether or not the closing means can close the opening on one side of the gaming means. You can decide whether to As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the closing means closes the opening on one side of the game means even though the game means is maintained in an unusable state.

<The reverse cup and harness band prevent the piano wire from getting stuck. Game machine J>
A game means used during a game, and a receiving means which is open on one side facing the game means and capable of receiving the game means from the one side, the receiving means being connected to the game means. A game machine J1, characterized in that it comprises an arranging means arranged on a path that communicates with the outside, wherein the arranging means is constructed so as to be capable of suppressing entry of an object from the outside at a plurality of points.

In game machines such as pachinko machines, there is a game machine equipped with a fraud prevention unit for preventing fraudulent acts of inserting a piano wire from the rotating shaft side of the front frame (for example, JP-A-2016-
26573). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, there is only one anti-fraud section, and there is a problem that the anti-fraud effect is not sufficient.

On the other hand, in the game machine J1, the arranging means is arranged in the path where the piano wire is likely to be inserted, and the arranging means is configured to be capable of suppressing the entry of the piano wire at a plurality of points, thereby preventing fraud. can improve the effect of

In the gaming machine J1, the arrangement means includes first means for suppressing entry of members from the outside at a first location, and second means for suppressing entry of members from the outside at a second location,
A game machine J2 characterized by suppressing entry of members from the outside by a different method.

According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J1, the arrangement means differs in the method of suppressing the entry of members from the outside between the first location and the second location. Entry of members from the outside can be further suppressed as compared with the case where the number of is increased.

In addition, the method of suppressing the intrusion from the outside is not limited at all. For example, a method of restricting entry by blocking a route, or a method of suppressing fraudulent activity by detecting heat and sounding an alarm may be used.

In the game machine J1 or J2, the game machine J3 is characterized in that the arrangement means comprises an intrusion control portion formed in a cup shape that opens outward of the receiving means.

According to the game machine J3, in addition to the effects of the game machine J1 or J2, the intrusion control portion is formed in the shape of a cup, so that the intruding member can be prevented from further intrusion.

In the game machine J3, the arrangement means includes support means for supporting electric wiring, and the support means is arranged downstream of the entry control section in a route from the outside to the game means. Characterized game machine J4.

According to the game machine J4, in addition to the effects of the game machine J3, when a fraudulent act of penetrating the entry control portion with high heat occurs, changes in the wiring caused by the high heat (disconnection due to heat, etc.) are detected. It is possible to easily produce the effect of suppressing the entry of the member.

In any one of the game machines J1 to J4, the arrangement means arranges the members entered from the outside,
The gaming machine J5 is characterized by comprising elimination means for guiding to an elimination area far from the gaming means.

According to the game machine J5, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines J1 to J4, the member entering from the outside is guided to the resolution area far from the game means by the arranging means. Even if the degree becomes stronger, it is possible to prevent the members entering from the outside from reaching the game means.

<Structure of five decorative plates. Including fraud prevention. Game machine K>
a first means and a second means arranged oppositely along a first direction and connected by at least one side; A gaming machine comprising a third means for connecting the first means and the second means, wherein the connection direction of the connecting part is set in a second direction that intersects the first direction A gaming machine K1 characterized by:

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, first means and second means arranged to face each other and connected on at least one side, and disposed between the first means and second means along the first direction There is a gaming machine comprising a third means that
However, in the above-described conventional game machine, each member is connected by an existing method such as adhesion or screwing, and when the first means and the second means are connected, the load along the first direction is the first. There is a problem that the third means may be damaged by being hung up on the third means.

On the other hand, according to the game machine K1, since the connecting direction of the connecting portion connecting the first means and the second means is set to the second direction intersecting the first direction, the third means It is possible to reduce the load applied from Thereby, it is possible to prevent the third means from being damaged.

A game machine K2 characterized in that, in the game machine K1, the connecting portion is arranged apart from the third means.

According to the game machine K2, in addition to the effects of the game machine K1, it is possible to prevent the load from being applied to the third means from the connecting portion.

The gaming machine K1 or K2 comprises connected means connected and fixed to other sides of the first means and the second means, wherein the one side of the first means and the second means is connected to the connected means A gaming machine K3 characterized by being connected by displacing the second means with respect to the first means in a third direction of approaching and fitting them to each other.

According to the game machine K3, in addition to the effects of the game machine K1 or K2, it is provided with a connected means connected to the other sides of the first means and the second means, and one side of the first means and the second means are connected and fixed by fitting caused by displacing the second means with respect to the first means in the third direction close to the connected means, so that the first means and The resistance to decomposition of the second means can be improved.

A gaming machine K4 characterized in that, in the gaming machine K3, the one side of the first means and the second means are arranged to be exposed to the outside.

According to the game machine K4, in addition to the effects of the game machine K3, one side of the first means and the second means are arranged to be exposed to the outside, so that the state of the fitting portion can be easily confirmed. be able to.
Thereby, even if a fraudulent act of breaking the fitting portion and disassembling the first means and the second means occurs, the fraudulent act can be detected early.

In the game machine K3 or K4, the first means and the second means are fastened and fixed to the connected means, and the fastening and fixing direction is the same as the third direction. .

According to the gaming machine K5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine K3 or K4, the fastening direction between the first means and the second means and the connected means is set in the same direction as the third direction. The tightening strength can reinforce the fitting strength.

In any one of game machines K3 to K5, light irradiation means for irradiating light toward said first means or second means side and fixed to said connected means, and one of said first means or second means a light guiding means fixed to a member of the light emitting means and capable of introducing the light emitted by the light emitting means.

According to the game machine K6, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines K3 to K5, it is possible to prevent positional deviation between the first and second means and the light guide means.

A game machine K7 characterized in that a game machine K7 is characterized by comprising contact means for surface contact in a region facing the other member of the first means or the second means and the light guide means.

According to the game machine K7, in addition to the effects of the game machine K6, a space corresponding to the size of the abutting means is maintained in the opposing region between the other member of the first means or the second means and the light guide means. can be done.
This prevents the gap between the other member of the first means or the second means and the light guide means from changing when the first means or the second means receives a load in the opposite direction and is displaced. can be done.

This prevents the positional relationship between the first means, the second means, and the light guide means from changing even if the first means or the second means receives a load in the opposing direction when an illegal attempt is made to disassemble the first means or the second means. can do.

<Point L for utilizing curved light guiding means. As a point, unachieved>
A light guide means formed in a curved wave shape when viewed in an irradiation direction of light passing through the interior, and a projecting means arranged opposite to the light guide means and onto which the light that has passed through the light guide means is projected, The game machine L1 is characterized in that the projected means comprises a concave facing portion arranged to face the concave surface portion of the light guide means, and a convex facing portion arranged to face the convex surface portion of the light guiding means.

2. Description of the Related Art Among game machines such as pachinko machines, there is a game machine equipped with a light guide plate that uniformly emits light from an end surface (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-26573). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, since the light guide plate is formed in the shape of a flat plate, it is necessary to change the intensity of the incident light in order to partially change the intensity of the surface-emitting light. There was a problem.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine L1, since the projected means has the concave surface facing portion and the convex surface facing portion, even if the intensity of the light incident on the light guide means is constant, the concave surface facing portion and the convex surface facing portion Department and
It is possible to change the emission intensity of the projection target means.

In the game machine L1, the projection target means is characterized in that the concave surface facing portion is made of a light-transmitting material, and the convex surface facing portion is made of a material that is less likely to transmit light than the concave surface facing portion. Gaming machine L2.

According to the gaming machine L2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine L1, by intentionally weakening the intensity of the light transmitted through the convex facing portion, the light emitted from the light guiding means is condensed at the concave facing portion. The production effect of the production by the light can be improved.

In the gaming machine L2, a reverse projection means is provided on the opposite side of the projection target means with the light guide means therebetween, and the light passing through the light guide means is projected. A gaming machine L3, wherein a portion of the light means facing the concave surface and a portion of the light guiding means facing the convex surface are made of a material having substantially the same light transmittance.

According to the game machine L3, in addition to the effects of the game machine L2, the part of the counterprojection means arranged to face the concave surface of the light guide means and the part arranged to face the convex surface of the light guide means emit light. Since they are made of a material with substantially the same transmittance, by making the same light incident on the light guiding means, the rendering mode of the light visually recognized through the means to be projected and the rendering mode of the light visually recognized through the opposite projection means can be achieved. can be different from

<Arrangement structure of the bass reflex speaker. Game machine M>
first means and second means arranged opposite to each other and fixed to form an internal space in the fixed state; acoustic means disposed so as to enter at least a portion of the internal space; A gaming machine M1, characterized by comprising bending means for constructing a bending path in an internal space.

In game machines such as pachinko machines, there are game machines in which speakers are arranged at the left and right ends of the front frame, and effects are performed by the sound output from the speakers (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2016-1
6088). In such a gaming machine, the vibration wave traveling toward the rear side of the speaker body is advanced to the left-right central position of the gaming machine and sent out of the gaming machine,
There is a problem that the path length of the vibration wave is regulated by the left-right width of the game machine, where the effect of making the bass sound is likely to be performed.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine M1, since the bending means constitutes a curved path in the internal space of the first means and the second means, by configuring a path longer than the length of one piece, the By removing the restriction on the left-right width, it is possible to make the vibration wave travel an arbitrary distance.

In the gaming machine M1, the first means and the second means are fastened and fixed in such a manner that loads are applied in opposite directions, and the bending means is a rib-like member extending from at least one of the first means and the second means to the other. A gaming machine M2, characterized in that it has a protruding part protruding from the second means, and a protruding tip of the protruding part abuts on the other of the first means and the second means.

According to the gaming machine M2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine M1, the projecting tip of the projecting portion and the other of the first means or the second means are connected in the direction in which the fastening force is applied to the first means and the second means. It is possible to prevent a gap from being generated between the projecting portion and the other of the first means and the second means due to the fastening and fixing. Therefore, it is possible to prevent fluid such as vibration waves from passing through the gap in the curved path.

In the game machine M1 or M2, an opening connecting the internal space and the outside is provided, and the opening is passed through the opening to the internal space and the outside and is connected to the sound means. A gaming machine M3 characterized in that it is closed by

According to the game machine M3, in addition to the effects of the game machine M1 or M2, the opening is closed by the passing member connected to the sound means, so it is not necessary to prepare an additional closing member. The walls forming the internal space can be closed appropriately in a state where the passage member passes from the internal space to the outside.

The gaming machine M4, wherein the opening is arranged closer to the sound means than the protruding portion in the gaming machine M3.

According to the game machine M4, in addition to the effects of the game machine M3, when the wiring of the sound means is passed from the internal space to the outside through the opening, the wiring of the sound means is prevented from being caught by the projecting portion and broken. be able to.

In any one of game machines M1 to M4, support fastening means to which at least one of the first means and second means is fastened and fixed, and presentation means arranged below the support fastening means for performing presentation accompanying a game. and wherein the effect means supports the support fastening means from below.

According to the game machine M5, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines M1 to M4, the supporting and fastening means is supported by the effect means from below, so that the supporting and fastening means does not have to press the space used for the effect. things can be adopted.

<Movable unit, reverse rotating flower. Petals that stop on the way. Game machine N>
a base member, a first displacement means displaceably supported by the base member, a driving means for applying a driving force to the first displacement means, a following state in which the first displacement means is displaced in a displacement direction; A second displacing state switchable between a non-following state displaced in a direction different from the displacing direction of the first displacing means
and a displacement means, wherein at least when the second displacement means is in the following state, the third displacement means is displaced in a direction opposite to the displacement direction of the second displacement means by the driving force of the drive means. A gaming machine N1 characterized by comprising:

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, as the first displacement means expands and contracts, the second displacement means displaces in the direction of the expansion and contraction of the first displacement means, while the first displacement means operates in the vicinity of the extension end. When doing so, there is a game machine in which the second displacement means is displaced in a direction different from the expansion and contraction direction of the first displacement means (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-229580). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, since the directions of displacement of the first displacement means and the second displacement means are the same when the first displacement means expands and contracts, the performance becomes slow and the performance effect is not sufficient. there was a point

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine N1, at least in the following state of the second displacement means, the third
Since the displacement means is displaced in the direction opposite to the displacement direction of the second displacement means, the displacement speed of the second displacement means can be visually recognized as a speed based on the third displacement means. Therefore, compared with the speed at which the second displacement means is actually driven, the speed of the second displacement means that the player feels can be increased.

The gaming machine N1 is characterized by comprising resistance means for generating resistance against the displacement of the second displacement means, and the resistance means is configured to be able to change a switching point between the following state and the non-following state. Game machine N2 to play.

According to the gaming machine N2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine N1, the following state in which the second displacement means follows the first displacement means by the action of the resistance means, and the non-following state in which the second displacement means deviates from the following state. Since the switching point can be changed, it is possible to increase the types of modes of displacement of the second displacement means with respect to the first displacement means. Thereby, the production effect can be improved.

In the gaming machine N2, the resistance means is configured to be able to change the state of the second displacement means by using a driving force when operating the second displacement means in the non-following state. Game machine N3.

According to the gaming machine N3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine N2, the driving force for switching the state of the second displacement means can be generated by the driving means for driving the first displacement means. be able to.

A game machine N4 characterized in that, in the game machine N2 or N3, the resistance means is arranged so as to be visible from the front.

According to the game machine N4, in addition to the effects of the game machine N2 or N3, by configuring the resistance means to be visible, the resistance means has a function of changing the state of the first displacement means and is visually recognized by the player. It can also serve as a performance device.

The gaming machine N4 is characterized by comprising a rod-shaped shaft means fixed to the base member, the shaft means coaxially and rotatably supporting the first displacement means, the second displacement means and the resistance means. Gaming machine N5.

According to the gaming machine N5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine N4, since the shaft means functioning as the rotating shaft of the first displacement means, the second displacement means, and the resistance means is fixed to the base member, the first displacement means, To prevent the displacement resistance from increasing excessively because the attitude of any one of the second displacement means and the resistance means changes, and the attitudes of the other members or means follow and change. can be done.

<Utilization of shell buttons and holes. As a point, unachieved>
In a game machine comprising first means and housing means capable of housing the first means, the housing means is an opening for receiving the first means when housing the first means. A gaming machine O1 comprising: a first opening; and a second opening having a width equal to or larger than a width of a gap between the first opening and the first means.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines that are provided with operation means that can be operated by a player and an upper plate that covers the operation means from below, and that the operation means moves up and down with respect to the upper plate. See JP-A-2012-048970). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, when a foreign object is inserted into the gap between the upper tray and the operating means, there is a problem that the foreign object remains inside and may induce a malfunction. .

On the other hand, the gaming machine O1 is provided with the second opening formed with a width equal to or greater than the width of the gap between the first opening of the accommodating means and the first means. It can be easily removed to the outside of the means. As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation in which foreign matter remains inside.

In the gaming machine O1, the housing means includes a support portion that supports the first means, and the second opening is arranged on the opposite side of the support portion with the first means interposed therebetween. game machine O2.

According to the game machine O2, in addition to the effects of the game machine O1, the second opening can be formed while maintaining the support strength of the support part.

A gaming machine O3, in the gaming machine O1 or O2, wherein the accommodating means includes a low water resistant portion having low water resistance, and the second opening is disposed around the low water resistant portion.

According to the game machine O3, in addition to the effects of the game machine O1 or O2, the water can be discharged outward along the second opening before the water reaches the low water resistance portion. That is, the second opening can be used both for the purpose of allowing a predetermined solid object to pass through and for the purpose of discharging a liquid such as water.

In any one of the game machines O1 to O3, a plurality of the second openings are formed, and the plurality of the second openings are configured from a shape based on a shape of the solid object projected in a different direction. A game machine O4 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine O4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines O1 to O3, a plurality of second
The solid object can be easily removed through the second opening because the opening is configured with a shape based on the shape of the solid object in the opposite direction.

A gaming machine O5 characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines O1 to O4, the second opening is arranged closer to the player than the first means.

According to the game machine O5, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines O1 to O4, the shadow of the solid object can be visually recognized by the player when the second opening is partially blocked by the solid object. can be made As a result, it is possible to make the player aware that the solid object is inserted between the first means and the containing means, thereby reducing the possibility that the solid object will continue to remain. .

<Points related to devising the shape of the bottom of the glass frame (front frame)>
A gaming machine comprising a first means and a first supporting means for supporting the first means, wherein the first supporting means comprises a projection-shaped portion projecting from a lower surface. P1.

Here, in game machines such as pachinko machines, there is a game machine in which a glass frame (front frame) in which an operation handle is arranged is configured to be removable from an outer frame in which a game board is arranged (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2015-159837). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, since the bottom surface of the glass frame is formed in a flat shape, there is a risk that it may slip when the bottom surface is covered with a finger. There was a problem.

On the other hand, according to the game machine P1, the protruding shape part protruding from the bottom surface of the first support means functions as a part on which a finger is hooked, thereby suppressing the occurrence of a situation where the first support means slips down from the hand. Therefore, it can be improved from the viewpoint of ease of handling.

It should be noted that the arrangement of the protruding shaped portion is not limited at all, and it is sufficient if the protruding portion protrudes outward from the first support means. For example, it may protrude in the vertical direction, or it may protrude in the front side.

In the game machine P1, the second support means for detachably supporting the first support means is provided, and the protruding shaped portion is separated from the support position where the first support means is supported by the second support means. A game machine P2 characterized in that it is arranged in a row.

According to the gaming machine P2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine P1, the projecting shaped portion is provided downwardly from the lower bottom surface at a position away from the position where the weight of the first supporting means is centrally applied as the supporting position. Therefore, it is possible to make the first support means easier to hold. This facilitates attachment and detachment of the first support means to and from the second support means.

In addition, the position away from the supporting position is not limited at all. For example, the first
It may be positioned closer to the front when the support means is supported on the front side of the second support means, or closer to the other end when the first support means is pivotally supported by the second support means at one end. It may be a position or a position on the opposite side of the pivotal support position with reference to the plate for storing the game balls.

In the game machine P1 or P2, the first support means includes a recessed shape portion that is recessed from the inside to the outside, and the first means leaves a gap between the recessed shape portion and the A game machine P3 characterized in that it is arranged opposite to the recessed shape portion.

According to the game machine P3, in addition to the effects of the game machine P1 or P2, the first means can Powder that may be generated when the first means and the first support means rub against each other due to positional deviation (shaving powder, dust)
can be reduced. In other words, it is possible to suppress the accumulation of powder and clogging of the movable portion, which causes malfunction, and the accumulation of powder in the detection portion of the detection device, resulting in erroneous detection.

In this way, the recessed shape part can be used not only during non-operation (for example, when the glass frame is opened to cancel an error, during maintenance, or when replacing the glass frame), but also during operation (for example, when playing games). It is effective even in the middle or in the game waiting state (demonstration screen display state, etc.).

The game machine P4 is characterized in that, in the game machine P3, the recessed shape portion is arranged inside the range where the projecting shape portion protrudes.

According to the game machine P4, in addition to the effects of the game machine P3, the portion where the recessed shape portion is formed can be prevented from becoming extremely thin compared to other portions and falling into insufficient strength. can. In addition, since the recessed portion is formed behind the projecting portion, the projecting portion can be flexed and deformed in the inward and outward directions. Cracking of the shaped portion can be suppressed.

In addition, the load applied to the projecting shaped portion includes, for example, the weight of the first support means that may be applied during transportation or temporary placement, the load applied when moving the first support means, and the load applied when the first support means is moved.
An example is a load applied by a collision of objects (such as a thousand-ryo box) moved by a player or a store clerk near the support means.

In the gaming machine P4, the first means is a portion of the first support means outside the recessed shape portion and is supported in a manner of contacting the overlapping portion that overlaps the projecting shape portion in the inward and outward directions. A game machine P5, characterized by comprising a contact means, and an operating portion positioned on the contact means and configured to be operable by a player.

According to the game machine P5, in addition to the effects of the game machine P4, while maintaining the effect of the recessed shape portion, it is possible to sufficiently secure the support thickness of the overlapping position that supports the abutting means. It is possible to suppress deformation of the first support means during operation.

In the gaming machine P5, the abutting means includes impact damping means that is continuously formed between the operation part and is capable of attenuating impact, and the impact damping means is located in the recessed shape part. A gaming machine P6 characterized in that it is formed with a width that is shorter than the width.

According to the gaming machine P6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine P5, the impact transmitted from the operating portion to the contact means can be attenuated by the impact attenuation means, and in addition, the distance between the impact attenuation means and the overlapping portion is increased. Therefore, the impact can be attenuated also by the deformation (deflection) of the contact means.

Various aspects are exemplified as the impact attenuation means. For example, it may be a mass member formed of a flexible material, an elastic member such as a coil spring, a device such as a damper, or a damping device.

In any one of the game machines P3 to P6, the concave shape portion has a first portion facing the first means and a second portion extending from the first portion, wherein the first portion The gaming machine P7 is characterized in that the second portion is formed to have a greater degree of depression than the second portion.

According to the game machine P7, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines P3 to P6, a sufficient space is provided in the first part, which is expected to be given a large load, and compared with the first part. By forming the space of the second portion, which is expected to receive a small load from the bottom, to be small, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in designing the concave portion while maintaining high durability.

The degree of recess includes, for example, the depth of recess (the greater the degree of recess, the deeper) and the width of the recess (the greater the degree of recess, the wider).

In addition, when the structure of the first means is complicated and the load applied to the portion facing the first means is smaller than that of the other portions, a concave shape corresponding to the other portions may be used. The recessed degree of the portion may be formed to be large.

Moreover, the recess shape portion may be designed based on, for example, the magnitude of the frequency of occurrence of the load, without being limited to the magnitude of the load. In this case, the frequency of occurrence of the load may be based on the magnitude of the frequency of occurrence during the entire business hours of the game parlor, or the frequency of occurrence in a predetermined state of the gaming machine (a predetermined effect state, a game state such as a specific game state). may be used as a reference.

In any one of the game machines P1 to P7, the protruding portion is formed along the front-rear direction below the bottom portion of the first support means, and the formation range becomes wider toward the front. Gaming machine P8.

According to the game machine P8, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines P1 to P7, the load resistance of the front part where the load concentrates when the first support means stands alone can be improved. The first supporting means can be stored for a long period of time without the first supporting means falling down even in a storage method in which the single supporting means is placed on the floor.

It should be noted that what is considered when designing the projecting shape is not limited to the weight of the first support means. For example, the shape of the protruding shape portion may be designed by considering the magnitude of the load generated when the first means is operated and the frequency of occurrence of the load.

The game machine P9 is characterized in that, in any one of the game machines P1 to P8, the lower surface of the first support means is formed as an inclined surface that is inclined upward in a direction away from the second support means.

According to the game machine P9, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines P1 to P8, the first support means can be easily self-sustained by itself, and the contact portion with the floor is limited to the projecting shape portion. Therefore, it is possible to avoid contamination of portions other than the projecting shape portion.

<Points related to the deformation mode based on the support structure and shape of the scarf>
A gaming machine comprising operating means operable by a player, first supporting means for supporting the operating means, and second supporting means for supporting at least one of the first supporting means and the operating means, The game machine Q1 is characterized in that the first support means is deformable in a direction to narrow the gap between the operation means and the second support means.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines in which operating means such as effect buttons are supported by a glass frame (see, for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2016-106830). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, countermeasures against positional deviation occurring in the area around the operating means due to the load during operation of the operating means are insufficient. There is a problem that there is room for improvement from the point of view.

For example, when the player's weight is applied to the operation means and the operation means descends, the second support means also descends at the same time. At this time, the lowering distance of the front side portion of the second support means tends to be longer than the lowering distance of the operating means. At this time, due to the difference in the descent distance, in the front side part,
A gap may occur between the operating means and the second support means.

On the other hand, according to the game machine Q1, even if the second support means descends excessively, the deformation of the first support means suppresses the formation of a gap between the operating means and the second support means. can do. That is, since the operating means can be allowed to descend excessively (sinking),
It is possible to simplify the manner in which the operating means is supported.

Note that the operation direction is not limited at all. For example, it may be in a descending direction, an ascending direction, a pushing direction along the longitudinal direction, a rotating (turning) direction, or a combination thereof.

In addition, as a form of contact from the operation direction, various forms are exemplified other than the case where the normal line extending from the contact surface coincides with the operation direction. For example, the contact surface may be formed as a surface that spreads in a mortar shape (V-shaped cross section) in the operation direction. In this case, the operation direction can be moved toward the center of the bottom of the mortar (V-shaped) formed by the contact surface, and in addition, since the reaction force increases toward the center of the bottom, the operation means can be effectively supported. can be done systematically.

Also, a common support means for commonly supporting the first support means and the second support means may be provided. In this case, the first support means and the second support means may be connected (coupled, fitted) at a position opposite to the support position supported by the common support means.

In the game machine Q1, the first support means is made of a flexible material, and includes a support portion that supports the operation means, and a game ball that can be held. A game machine Q2 characterized by comprising a game ball holding portion connected to the game machine Q2.

According to the gaming machine Q2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Q1, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a gap between the operation means and the game ball holding portion.

In addition, when the first support means is composed of a flexible member, or when it is connected to the operation means or the game ball holding portion in a floating structure, the vibration generated when the operation means is operated can directly affect the holding of the game ball. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball held in the game ball holding part from being displaced every time the operation means is operated, thereby preventing abnormal noise from being generated.

Various modes are exemplified as the structure for preventing (suppressing) vibration transmission. For example, the first
Vibration transmission may be prevented in the (1) direction, while vibration transmission may be maintained in the second direction. In this case, by generating the vibration in the second direction, it is possible to deliberately generate an abnormal sound, and to execute a sound effect.

In the gaming machine Q2, the operation means includes an operation unit configured to be operable by the player,
The first support means, the farther the connection position with the game ball holding portion is from the operation portion,
A gaming machine Q3 characterized by being arranged on the front side.

In the game machine Q3, in addition to the effects of the game machine Q2, in the vicinity of the operation unit, which is a position that is likely to be displaced due to operation, the connection position is moved to the back side to reduce the absolute amount of displacement. While suppressing the occurrence of a gap between the ball holding part and the first support means, the connection position is arranged on the front side (closer to the player) in the remote part of the operation part, which is a position that is difficult to shift due to the operation. , the design can be improved.

In any one of the game machines Q1 to Q3, the operation means includes an operation portion configured to be operable by the player, a body portion supported by the first support means, and the operation portion and the body portion. and a connecting portion for connecting, wherein the operation portion is formed wider than the connecting portion, and the first support means is formed of a plurality of divided bodies, and is detachable in a direction sandwiching the connecting portion. A gaming machine Q4 characterized in that it is configured in a manner that even the connecting portion is surrounded.

According to the gaming machine Q4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines Q1 to Q3, it is possible to facilitate the assembly of the first support means while sufficiently ensuring the size of the operating portion.

Various modes are exemplified for the method of fixing the first support means formed from the divided body.
For example, a plurality of divided bodies may be connected to the operating means, or one divided body among the plurality of divided bodies may be connected to the operating means and another divided body may be connected to the divided body. You can let me.

Moreover, various aspects are exemplified for the fixing position and fixing manner of the divided body. For example, fitting may be used, or fastening may be used.

In the case of fastening, by fixing the divided body at a plurality of positions along the operation direction of the operation part, the impact generated when the operation part is operated can be distributed and received at the plurality of fixed positions. Since the durability of fixing the divided body can be improved, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of displacement of the first support means.

Furthermore, by setting the tightening direction to a direction that intersects (for example, is perpendicular to) the operating direction of the operating portion, the direction of the load due to the operation of the operating portion can be made different from the tightening direction of the fastening screw. It is possible to suppress loosening of the fastening screw due to impact during operation.

A game machine Q5 characterized in that, in the game machine Q4, a fastening direction of a fastening means for fastening the divided body intersects with an operation direction of the operation portion.

According to the game machine Q5, in addition to the effects of the game machine Q4, it is possible to suppress the load applied in the fastening direction when the operation unit is operated, so that the fastening by the fastening means is loosened during the operation.
It is possible to prevent the separation of the divided body from being released.

Various modes are exemplified as the direction that intersects with the operation direction. For example, if the operation direction is a rotation direction along a circle centered on a predetermined rotation axis, the direction that intersects the operation direction is a direction that intersects a plane perpendicular to the predetermined rotation axis (for example, a predetermined rotation axis). direction along the axis of rotation) is exemplified.

Further, for example, when the operation direction is a direction along a predetermined straight line (push operation or pull-out operation), the direction intersecting the operation direction is along a plane intersecting the predetermined straight line. direction is exemplified.

In this case, when a plurality of predetermined straight lines (straight lines along the operation direction with a high proportion (frequency) of operations) are assumed during the game, at least The fastening direction may be set in a direction along one plane, or in a direction that intersects a plurality of planes, that is, a direction that intersects any of a plurality of predetermined straight lines.

In the gaming machine Q4 or Q5, the divided body has a plurality of fastening points, and a first plane including one fastening point and a second plane including other fastening points are configured as different planes. A gaming machine Q6 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine Q6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Q4 or Q5, even if a large load is applied to one fastening point (including the first plane), the other fastening points are simultaneously subjected to a large load. Therefore, it is possible to prevent simultaneous displacement of the split bodies and loosening of the fastening at both fastening points.

Note that the fastening portion of the divided body may be arranged at a portion where a load concentrates when the operating portion is operated. In this case as well, separate fastening points are arranged on a plane different from the plane on which the load is concentrated, so that it is possible to prevent the position of the divided body from being displaced or the fastening to be loosened due to the load during operation. can be prevented.

In any one of game machines Q4 to Q6, the operation means includes detection means configured to be capable of detecting a predetermined operation of the operation section, and the detection means is arranged at a position away from the division position of the divided body. A gaming machine Q7, characterized in that it is provided with:

According to the game machine Q7, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines Q4 to Q6, the holding force tends to be insufficient at the split position, and when the operation part is moved along with the operation of the operation part at the split position, the operation part and the divided body may rub against each other and powder (such as dust) may be generated. can do. As a result, occurrence of erroneous detection can be suppressed.

In any one of the game machines Q4 to Q7, the operating means is an interference means for interfering with the divided body on the side of the divided body that separates in the dividing direction (approaching and separating direction) when the game is possible. A gaming machine Q8 characterized by comprising:

According to the game machine Q8, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines Q4 to Q7, the interference means can suppress the displacement of the operating means with respect to the divided body in the dividing direction.

The interfering means may interfere with the operating means in the assembled state, but may be formed so as not to interfere with the operating means before entering the assembled state, for example, during assembly work. For example, if the split body is made of a flexible material, the split body can be bent during assembly work, so that interference with the interfering means can be easily avoided, and ease of assembly can be maintained. can do.

Further, for example, even if the divided body is made of a hard material, it may be constructed so as not to interfere with the interfering means in the process of assembling. That is, they may be formed in a shape that does not interfere with each other in the assembly direction (for example, in the direction in which the divided bodies are brought closer together for assembly) before fastening. In this case, it is possible to suppress the positional deviation of the divided body when the game is possible while securing the ease of assembly.

A gaming machine Q9 in any one of the gaming machines Q1 to Q8, wherein the second supporting means comprises a recessed receiving portion that is recessed to receive the first supporting means.

According to the game machine Q9, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines Q1 to Q8, the first support means is received in the receiving concave portion, so that the first support means is displaced under the influence of the positional deviation of the operation means. Even if they are displaced, the operating means and the first supporting means can be quickly returned to their original positions by the repulsive force from the receiving recessed portion.

A game machine according to any one of game machines Q1 to Q9, wherein the first support means is formed in a curved shape along a circle having a center of curvature radius arranged on the operation portion side of the operation means. Q10.

According to the gaming machine Q10, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines Q1 to Q9, it is possible to secure a large area in which the operating section can be arranged, and in addition, when the player grips the operating section, it feels cramped. can prevent you from feeling As a result, it is possible to improve the design of the operating section and improve the operability of the operating section.

In any one of the game machines Q1 to Q10, the first support means includes streak-like portions processed into streaks for reinforcement, and the extending direction of the streak-like portions is formed in different directions for each region. A gaming machine Q11 characterized in that:

According to the game machine Q11, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines Q1 to Q10, the extending direction of the streaky portion is different for each region, so that the first support means having an anisotropic rigidity is provided. can be configured.

In addition, the design standard of the extending direction of the streak is not limited at all. For example, the shape of the first support means may be designed as an extending direction with a good yield, or if the load generated during operation of the operation means acts in different manners for each region, it is the best way to deal with the load. As the direction, the extending direction of the streak may be designed.

<Points regarding the support structure between the speaker and the substrate>
vibrating means; light emitting means arranged at a position to which the vibration is transmitted and capable of emitting light;
, wherein the light emitting means has a displaceable width with respect to the vibrating means.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines in which speakers and light-emitting elements are arranged side by side (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2016-16088). However, the above-described conventional game machine has a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of light emission effects.

More specifically, in the above-described conventional game machine, light-emitting elements (LEDs, fluorescent lamps, discharge tubes, etc.) are arranged behind the speakers in order to prevent the board from receiving the vibrations of the speakers. In the place where it is, it becomes dark because the light emission effect cannot be performed. in this case,
In the front area where the game machine is likely to be visually recognized, the area that can be gorgeously produced is narrowed. In the first place, the size of game machines represented by pachinko machines is generally determined by standards, so
Securing a light emission production area is recognized as an important issue.

On the other hand, according to the game machine R1, since the light emitting means has a displaceable width with respect to the vibrating means, the light emitting means can receive the vibration of the vibrating device. can be brought closer to As a result, the front area can be visually recognized brightly regardless of the vibrating portion of the vibrating means.

In addition, the mode of the vibration means is not limited at all. For example, it may be an acoustic device capable of outputting sound, or an operation device having a built-in vibration device. Further, the means is not limited to the means capable of actively vibrating, and means configured to be able to vibrate (passively vibrate) against the load of an external force may be used.

Various modes are exemplified as the acoustic means. For example, the diaphragm that the speaker has,
For example, an exhaust port for discharging the back pressure of vibration of the speaker seen in a bass reflex type speaker, and a path connected from the vibrating portion to the exhaust port are exemplified.

The vibrating device may be a rotationally driven vibrating device (for example, a vibrator),
A vibrating device (for example, a voice coil motor) that generates vibration by linear driving may be used.

In addition, the form of close arrangement is not limited at all, as long as the player can visually recognize the light of the light emitting means. For example, the vibrating means may be laminated with the light emitting means,
In this case, the stacking direction may be the front-rear direction, may be a direction inclined upward or downward with respect to the front-rear direction, or may be a direction inclined leftward and rightward inward from the left and right ends.

A game machine R2 comprising a plurality of said vibrating means, a light emitting substrate on which said light emitting means are arranged, and said light emitting substrate being stacked on said plurality of said vibrating means in said gaming machine R1. .

According to the game machine R2, in addition to the effects of the game machine R1, the light-emitting substrate tends to be displaced (vibration, displacement, etc.) due to the vibration generated when the vibrating means outputs sound. Since it is possible to change the presentation mode of the light emitting means, the displacement mode of the light emitting substrate can be varied by changing the vibrating means for outputting the sound. ) can be increased.

In addition, the number of light-emitting substrates may be one, or plural. When there are a plurality of substrates, at least one substrate for light emission should be laminated on a plurality of vibrating means. In this case, a combination of a light emitting substrate that is displaced by vibration generated by the vibrating means and a light emitting substrate that is not displaced can be provided.

In the game machine R2, holding means for holding the vibrating means is provided, the light-emitting substrate is not fixed to the holding means in the stacking direction, and the holding means moves the light-emitting device along the stacking direction. A gaming machine R3 characterized in that it is constructed so as to generate a load in a direction that suppresses the displacement of the game board.

According to the game machine R3, in addition to the effects of the game machine R2, it is possible to suppress the displacement of the light-emitting substrate and the holding means.

Note that the non-fixed mode is not limited to the case where the light-emitting substrate and the holding means are not mechanically connected. For example, even if the light-emitting substrate and the holding means are connected with screws, if the fastening force does not act (for example, simply preventing them from coming off), it can be said that they are not fixed.

Moreover, the expression "unfixed" does not assume that a large displacement is allowed. For example, by fixing two plate members that define the front and rear positions of the light emitting substrate to the holding means, the front and rear positions of the light emitting substrate are defined (the front and rear positions are stabilized and small vibrations are allowed), and the shape of the light emitting substrate determines the position of the light emitting substrate. By enclosing the direction orthogonal to the front and rear directions with a slightly larger frame-shaped frame member, it is possible to suppress displacement in directions (up, down, left, and right) different from the front and rear directions.

As a result, compared to the case where the light emitting substrate is fixed to the holding means like the vibrating means, the influence of the vibration generated by the vibrating means on the light emitting substrate can be reduced. can increase

In the gaming machine R2 or R3, a first member and a second member arranged on both sides of the light-emitting substrate in the stacking direction, fixing means for fixing the first member and the second member to the holding means, a regulating means for regulating moving directions of the first member and the second member in the stacking direction, wherein the fixing means advances toward the holding means along a direction inclined with respect to the stacking direction. A game machine R4 characterized by.

According to the game machine R4, in addition to the effects of the game machine R2 or R3, the direction in which the first member and the second member are stacked does not match the direction in which the fixing means advances, and the first member and the second member Since the movement of the fixing means in the direction of movement is restricted, even if the fixing by the fixing means is loosened (even if some of the fixing means are loosened), the displacement of the fixing means is relatively small. can reduce the displacement of the first member and the second member.

This makes it easier to maintain the positional relationship between the first member and the second member. In other words, it is possible to prevent the first member and the second member from separating or coming closer than expected.

In addition, various aspects are illustrated as an aspect to progress. For example, a rod-like member may be inserted through the through hole, or a fastening screw may be fastened to the screw hole.

In any one of the game machines R2 to R4, the light-emitting substrate has a first displacement area configured to be displaceable and a second displacement area whose displacement is suppressed compared to the first displacement area. A gaming machine R5 characterized by:

According to the game machine R5, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines R2 to R4, the change in the light emission mode when the light emission substrate is displaced due to the vibration of the vibration means is changed for each region of the light emission substrate. can be made

Thus, by designing the mode of the light emitting effect in the first displacement area and the mode of the light emitting effect in the second displacement area in a different manner, an excellent effect can be achieved. For example, as the first refracting means for receiving and refracting the light emitted from the first displacement area, a surface emitting means for performing uniform light emission effect by surface emission is arranged, while receiving and refracting the light emitted from the second displacement area. As the second refracting means, an edge light emitting means is arranged to show the player a high-intensity light by totally reflecting the light incident from one edge and emitting it from the other edge. With this, it is possible to perform a novel light-emitting effect in which the light-emitting mode (for example, luminance) differs for each region.

In addition, the aspect of suppressing displacement is not limited at all. For example, the suppression mode may be defined by the positional relationship between the light-emitting substrate and the plurality of vibrating means, or the mode may be defined by the holding mode of the light-emitting substrate.

For example, regarding the positional relationship between a plurality of vibrating means and the light-emitting substrate, in an area that is equidistant from each vibrating means, the influence of one vibrating means is offset by the influence of the other vibrating means. , the displacement may be suppressed.

In any one of the game machines R1 to R5, a fastening screw for fastening and fixing and a facing portion arranged opposite to the head of the fastening screw are provided, and when the fastening screw is loosened, the head of the fastening screw is provided. A gaming machine R6 characterized in that the portion and the facing portion are arranged so as to be able to abut against each other.

According to the game machine R6, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines R1 to R5, by regulating the progress of the fastening screw by the opposing portion, when the fastening screw is loosened, the fastening relationship is further deteriorated. can be prevented.

Various aspects are exemplified as to how to deal with loosening of the fastening screw. For example, when a fastening screw is loosened, it may be configured so that the looseness can be detected electrically. It may be configured so that when it is vibrated, an abnormal noise is generated and the looseness can be noticed, or the looseness can be repaired by regular maintenance without providing a special notification.

In any one of the game machines R1 to R6, comprising a first member and a second member arranged on both sides of the light emitting substrate, and connecting means fastened and fixed to the first member and the second member,
The connecting means is configured in such a manner that deformation in a direction intersecting the connecting direction occurs more easily than deformation in the connecting direction connecting the first member and the second member. Characterized game machine R7.

Here, if the connecting means is constructed in a manner that allows deformation in the connecting direction to occur easily, the interval between the connecting positions will change in both directions, such as extending and contracting, and the advantageous and disadvantageous effects will occur in cycles. This is undesirable.

On the other hand, according to the game machine R7, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines R1 to R6, the connecting means is deformed in the direction intersecting the connecting direction, so that the interval between the connecting positions is changed only to the side that shrinks. It is possible to preferentially generate a load in a direction in which the first member and the second member are pressed against each other.

As a result, the load in the direction in which the first member and the second member are pressed against each other can be increased only when the connecting means is deformed (for example, when a load is applied to the connecting means). While the load in the facing direction of the member and the second member is set low, the load in the direction in which the first member and the second member are pressed against each other can be increased only when the light-emitting substrate is easily shaken by the vibration of the vibrating means. Suppression of shaking of the substrate can be achieved.

It should be noted that the manner in which deformation occurs easily in a predetermined direction is not limited at all. For example, the shape of the connecting means may be formed so that the thickness differs in each direction, or the size of the load applied to the connecting means may change in each direction.

Moreover, the mode of switching the load in the pressing direction is not limited at all. For example, a drive device may be provided to displace either the first member or the second member. According to this, the load in the direction of pressing the first member and the second member against each other can be changed at any timing by controlling the driving device.

In any one of game machines R1 to R7, the vibrating means is configured to change the direction of vibration between a first direction along the displaceable width and a second direction crossing the first direction. Characterized game machine R8.

According to the game machine R8, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines R1 to R7, it is possible to configure a plurality of types of effects of the vibration of the vibration means on the light emitting means.

<Technical concept of side light emitting means. Edge light travels to the side and back of the member>
Light emitting means configured to be capable of emitting light, and light guiding means capable of guiding light, wherein the light guiding means guides the light emitted from the light emitting means in a first mode. A gaming machine S1 comprising light guiding means and second light guiding means for guiding the light emitted from the light emitting means in a mode different from the first mode.

Here, in game machines such as pachinko machines, there is a game machine configured so that LED light is incident from the end of a plate-shaped member and emitted from the surface of the plate-shaped member (for example, JP-A-2015-
159875). However, the conventional game machine described above has a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of the effect of the lighting effect.

More specifically, as in the above-described conventional game machine, when the LED board formed from a flat plate is used to perform the lighting effect, the board can be made cheaper, which helps to reduce the cost. It was difficult to achieve both

That is, a difference in light emission mode (brightness, intensity, luminance, etc.) occurs between a position closer to the LED and a position farther from the LED, which tends to reduce the performance effect. It is possible to increase the number of LEDs in areas that tend to be (dark), but in that case, the number of LED elements required for the effect will increase with respect to the area of the LED substrate, resulting in hindrance to cost reduction. It will be. Therefore, it was unavoidable to choose between improvement in performance effect and cost reduction.

On the other hand, according to the game machine S1, since the light guide means is configured to be able to guide the light from the light emitting means in different modes, even if the distance with respect to the light emitting means is different, the presentation effect is lowered. (change) can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to improve from the viewpoint of the production effect of the lighting production while reducing the cost.

Various modes are exemplified as modes of the light guiding means. For example, it may be a light-transmitting member made of a colorless or colored transparent member, a member that emits light in a nearly uniform manner like frosted glass, or a member formed by hardening a milky-white resin or the like. It may be a white member that is transparent, a member that allows light to pass through a gap similar to a screen door or a shoji, a member that projects (projects) a display on the member itself similar to a transmissive liquid crystal, or others. The member of the mode may be used.

A gaming machine S2 in the gaming machine S1, characterized in that the light guide means is constructed so that the way of lighting changes step by step according to the difference in the distance from the light emitting means.

According to the game machine S2, in addition to the effects of the game machine S1, even when the substrate on which the light guide means is arranged is formed of a flat plate, the light guide means is configured in a plate shape forming a curved surface. when
It is possible to execute an effect in which the curved surface is uniformly (uniformly) illuminated.

The game machine S1 or S2 includes housing means for housing the light emitting means, and a light emitting substrate on which the light emitting means is disposed, the housing means supporting the light emitting substrate and the light guiding means. is fixed at least at a first position; and shielding means configured to be able to shield between the light guide means and the player, and the first position is outside the outer shape of the shielding means. A game machine S3 characterized in that it is arranged in the direction of the game machine S3.

In the gaming machine S3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine S1 or S2, the fixing at the first position can be loosened while the shielding means is still assembled, so the position of the light guiding means relative to the supporting means can be easily adjusted. can be adjusted. Therefore, it becomes easy to repair the misalignment between the light emitting means and the light guiding means, and the maintainability can be improved.

The mode of shielding by the shielding means is not limited at all. For example, while shielding the light guide means so that the player cannot touch it, it may be configured so that it can be seen, or it may be configured so that the player cannot touch or see the light guide means. You can

In addition, when the first positions are formed at a plurality of positions, all the first positions may be arranged outside the outline of the shielding means, or at least one of the plurality of first positions may It may be arranged outside the outline of the shielding means.

In the gaming machine S3, the light-emitting substrate is not fixed to the support means and the light guide means, the light guide means has a long plate shape, and the first position is the light guide means. A gaming machine S4 characterized by being arranged at an end in the longitudinal direction.

According to the game machine S4, in addition to the effects of the game machine S3, the light guide means is formed into a long plate shape,
Since the first position is arranged at the end in the longitudinal direction, it is possible to easily correct misalignment of the light guide means by loosening the fixation of the first position and applying a load in the lateral direction of the light guide means. .

Specifically, the correction of the positional deviation of the light guide means is supplemented by deformation of the light guide means in the lateral direction,
By compensating for slippage by applying a strong load, the position of the light guide means can be adjusted even if only one end in the longitudinal direction is loosened and the other end is kept fixed. Misalignment can be easily repaired.

In addition, in the case of the support mode in which the light guide means presses the light emitting substrate against the support means, the degree of support of the light emitting substrate by the support means can be weakened as the light guide means bends and deforms.
Therefore, even if the light guide means is not removed from the support means, by loosening the fixing at the first position and bending and deforming the light guide means, the degree of support of the light emitting substrate can be weakened, and the light emitting substrate is loaded in this state. By providing , it is possible to correct the positional deviation of the light-emitting substrate.

In addition, the adjustment width of the position adjustment is not limited at all. For example, it is based on a design that is mechanically regulated so that the portion to be irradiated by the light guide means does not completely deviate from the outer shape of the light emitting means arranged on the light emitting substrate when viewed from the irradiation direction. The adjustment width may be enough to correct the positional deviation in (small adjustment width). The position of the light guiding means may be adjustable to a position where it is completely removed by sight (large adjustment range).

In this case, it is possible to change the aspect of the luminous effect visually recognized during the same effect while the light emitting means and the light guiding means have the same structure. In this case, for example, when a game machine with the same configuration is prepared so that it can be played with a different game feature (for example, when configuring a game machine with different specifications),
It is possible to change the mode of light emitting performance by adjusting the position of the light guide means without greatly changing the mechanical structure of each part, so that the burden (for example, cost) associated with the manufacture of the game machine can be reduced.

In addition, the non-fixing mode is not limited at all. For example, a mode other than the case of being fixed by a fixture such as a fastening screw may generally be expressed as non-fixed. Also, the term "edge" is used to express the intention of avoiding being limited to the edge. In other words, the first position may be arranged at a position including the periphery of the ends in the longitudinal direction.

In the gaming machine S3 or S4, the shielding means is fixed to the supporting means, and the light guide means and the shielding means are configured to reduce relative positional deviation as the distance between them is shortened. A game machine S5, characterized in that it comprises a portion, and the positional deviation prevention portion comprises a fixing portion with respect to the support means.

Here, since it is necessary to connect electrical wiring to the light-emitting substrate, misalignment or chipping of the wiring directly affects malfunction of the light-emitting means. It is preferable that the substrate and the supporting means are configured so as not to be easily misaligned.

Considering the presentation effect, it is preferable that the position of the light guide means should be easy to align with the light emitting substrate, on the premise that it is not easily misaligned with the light emitting substrate. , it is also considered to be better to hold on the side of the support means. On the other hand, if there is a positional deviation between the light guiding means and the shielding means, the light guiding means and the shielding means may collide with each other, resulting in a poor appearance.

Since the shielding means is a portion that can be touched by the player, it is preferable to fix it to the supporting means as a base in consideration of strength. In this way, there were various forms of support expected for each means.

According to the gaming machine S5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine S3 or S4, the positional deviation preventing portion facilitates the mutual positioning of the light guiding means and the shielding means during assembly without directly fixing them. In addition, it is possible to easily maintain the positional relationship between the light guiding means and the shielding means during the game.

In addition, the mode of the positional deviation prevention portion is not limited at all. For example, it may be concavo-convex that has the same shape and can be fitted, or the concavo-convex that can be fitted may be one whose shape along the assembly direction does not change, or a convex that tapers closer to the mating member. It may be composed of a shape and an expanding concave shape.

In any one of the game machines S1 to S5, the light guide means corresponds to a main body, a separate extension part extending from the main body to the side away from the light emitting means, and an outer shape of the extension part. and a facing extending portion extending toward the light emitting means with a cross-sectional shape of the A game machine S6 characterized by comprising a part.

According to the game machine S6, since it is possible to suppress the light emitted from the total reflection light-emitting portion from entering the portions other than the opposing extending portion, the separating extending portion and the opposing extending portion and the other portion can be suppressed. The boundary between the two can be clarified, and an effect of changing the mode of light (separating the light) can be executed at the boundary of a short width.

Note that the mode of total reflection is not limited at all. For example, the positional relationship between the light guiding means and the light emitting means, the direction of the irradiated light, the width of the irradiated light, the material and shape of the light guiding means,
and a combination thereof.

In the gaming machine S6, the light guide means includes a covering portion that covers the light-emitting substrate and an outer shape of the covering portion, and is formed in a frame shape similar to the outer shape of the light-emitting substrate. A gaming machine S7, characterized in that it comprises a frame portion that is connected to the frame portion, wherein the facing extending portion extends from the covering portion and is coupled to the frame portion.

According to the gaming machine S7, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine S6, light can be incident on the frame from the connecting portion, so that the effect of the light emission presentation of the frame can be improved, and the opposing extension portion can be By functioning as reinforcing ribs, the strength of the light guiding means can be improved.

According to this, if the frame portion extends to the back of the light emitting means along the direction of the light emitted from the light emitting means, it is possible to perform an effect in which the side opposite to the emission direction is illuminated.

In the game machine S7, the opposing extension part is formed in an elongated shape along the covering part, is connected to the frame part at one end in the longitudinal direction, and extends from the frame part at the other end. A game machine S8 characterized by separating.

According to the game machine S8, in addition to the effects of the game machine S7, based on the design of the facing extension part,
Since it is possible to form an end portion that allows light to enter the frame portion in the longitudinal direction and an end portion that restricts the incidence of light, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in designing light emission effects using the frame portion.

In any one of the game machines S6 to S8, the light emitting means is arranged at the projected position of the facing extension portion and the separated extension portion, and the tip shape of the separated extension portion has an inclination angle with respect to the light irradiation direction. The game machine S9 is characterized in that the smaller the size, the closer to the ends of the cross-sectional shapes of the opposed extension portion and the separated extension portion.

According to the game machine S9, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines S6 to S8, even if the tip shape of the separating extension part is inclined with respect to the plane of the light emitting substrate, the light emission intensity of the light emitting means is increased. is kept uniform, the light emitting performance can be performed without giving the player a feeling of discomfort. That is, the entire cross-sectional shape of the separated extending portion can be illuminated to the same extent.

<Technical concept of top lighting means. Points for changing the lighting method according to the distance from the light source>
a light-emitting means capable of emitting light, and a light-receiving means capable of receiving light, wherein the light-receiving means receives the light emitted from the light-emitting means in a first mode; A gaming machine T1 comprising a second light-receiving means for receiving the light emitted from the light-emitting means in a manner different from the first manner.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, LED light is made to enter from the edge of a planar member,
There is a game machine configured to emit light from the surface of the planar member (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2015
-159875). However, the conventional game machine described above has a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of the effect of the lighting effect.

More specifically, as in the above-described conventional game machine, when the LED board formed from a flat plate is used to perform the lighting effect, the board can be made cheaper, which helps to reduce the cost. It was difficult to achieve both

That is, a difference in light emission mode (brightness, intensity, luminance, etc.) occurs between a position closer to the LED and a position farther from the LED, which tends to reduce the performance effect. It is possible to increase the number of LEDs in areas that tend to be (dark), but in that case, the number of LED elements required for the effect will increase with respect to the area of the LED substrate, resulting in hindrance to cost reduction. It will be. Therefore, it was unavoidable to choose between improvement in performance effect and cost reduction.

On the other hand, according to the game machine T1, the light receiving means is configured to be able to receive the light from the light emitting means in different modes, so even if the distance with respect to the light emitting means is different, the production effect is reduced (change ) can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to improve from the viewpoint of the production effect of the lighting production while reducing the cost.

Various modes are exemplified as modes of the light receiving means. For example, it may be a light-transmitting member made of a colorless or colored transparent member, a member that emits light in a nearly uniform manner like frosted glass, or a member formed by hardening a milky-white resin or the like. It may be a white member that is transparent, a member that allows light to pass through a gap similar to a screen door or a shoji, a member that projects (projects) a display on the member itself similar to a transmissive liquid crystal, or others. The member of the mode may be used.

In game machine T1, game machine T2 is characterized in that the light-receiving means is constructed so that the way of lighting changes in stages according to the difference in the distance from the light-emitting means.

According to the game machine T2, in addition to the effects of the game machine T1, even when the board on which the light receiving means is arranged is formed of a flat plate, the light receiving means is configured in a plate shape forming a curved surface. to the
It is possible to execute an effect in which the curved surface is uniformly (uniformly) illuminated.

The game machine T1 or T2 includes housing means for housing the light emitting means, and a light emitting substrate on which the light emitting means is disposed, and the housing means is arranged to face one surface of the light emitting substrate. A game machine T3, further comprising partitioning means for partitioning an area defined by the partitioning means, wherein the light-receiving means is configured to change the lighting method for each area partitioned by the partitioning means.

According to the game machine T3, in addition to the effects of the game machine T1 or T2, the frame of the dividing means is arranged at the boundary where the lighting of the light receiving means changes, so that the lighting of the light receiving means can be changed rapidly. It is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity given to the player when the player is allowed to do so. As a result, even when the number of light-emitting substrates is small, it is possible to improve the performance effect of the light-emitting performance using the light-emitting substrates.

In the game machine T3, the game machine T4 is characterized in that the light-emitting substrate is supported by the partitioning means in a direction opposed to the biasing force applied to the light-emitting substrate so that the light-emitting substrate is aligned.

According to the game machine T4, in addition to the effects of the game machine T3, it is possible to facilitate the assembly work by facilitating the alignment of the light emitting substrate and the partitioning means. and the partitioning means can be suppressed from being misaligned.

In the game machine T3 or T4, the partitioning means has a through hole formed corresponding to the shape of the light emitting portion disposed on the light emitting substrate, and the light receiving means is an insertion through the through hole. A gaming machine T5 characterized by comprising a part.

According to the gaming machine T5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine T3 or T4, the distance between the light-emitting portion and the light-receiving means can be narrowed without being affected by the size of the dividing means, and the light incident on the inside of the insertion portion can be reduced. Total reflection is facilitated, and reduction in the intensity of light emitted from the light emitting means can be prevented.

In the gaming machine T5, the partitioning means is provided with a non-insertion through-hole that is bored corresponding to the shape of the light-emitting portion arranged on the light-emitting substrate and does not receive the insertion portion, and the non-insertion through-hole is ,
A gaming machine T6 characterized in that the opening is formed in such a manner that it expands as it separates from the light emitting substrate, and is brought into contact with the light receiving means from the opposite side of the light emitting substrate.

According to the game machine T6, in addition to the effects of the game machine T5, the through hole through which the insertion portion is not inserted can be configured as means for emitting light emitted from the light emitting portion at a wide angle, and in addition, the light receiving means Light leakage can be suppressed by narrowing the gap between the .

In any one of game machines T1 to T6, a game machine characterized in that the light receiving means has a larger cross-sectional outline on a side farther from the light emitting means than on a side closer to the light emitting means. T7.

According to the game machine T7, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines T1 to T6, the area where the player visually recognizes the light through the light receiving means can be made larger than the area where the light emitting means is formed. can be done.

In the gaming machine T7, the light-receiving means includes a light-conducting portion extending from the light-emitting means side, and a cut-out boundary surface portion intersecting with the light-conducting portion. The gaming machine T8 is characterized in that it is arranged at a position where the front-rear direction surface portion in the extending direction is shorter than the inclined surface portion.

According to the gaming machine T8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine T7, even when the light receiving means is formed in a manner in which the outer shape of the cross-sectional shape increases toward the front, it is possible to form the punched boundary surface portion. Even so, the thickness of the light-conducting portion can be easily made uniform. This makes it possible to easily maintain total reflection over the extending direction of the light-conducting portion.

In the gaming machine T7 or T8, the light receiving means has a light conducting portion extending from the light emitting means side, and the light conducting portion is formed in a line shape including the base end portion of the insertion portion. Characterized game machine T9.

According to the game machine T9, in addition to the effects of the game machine T7 or T8, the light emitted from the LED of the light emitting means can be easily visually recognized as linear light (light in which light from a point light source is mixed). Therefore, the feeling of a point light source can be reduced without increasing the number of LEDs arranged.

<Point composed of two directions in which the fastening direction is inclined>
A gaming machine comprising first means and second means fixed to the first means by fixing means, wherein the fixing means includes first fixing means for generating a fixing force in a first direction; and second fixing means for generating a fixing force in a second direction that is inclined with respect to the direction.

Here, in game machines such as pachinko machines, there is a game machine in which a front frame is configured by combining a plurality of structures with fastening screws that are inserted in the front-rear direction (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-41185). . However, in the above-described conventional game machine, the shape of the structure is regulated by the arrangement of the fixing means, and there is a problem that the degree of freedom in designing the structure is reduced.

For example, when a fastening screw that is inserted in the front-rear direction is inserted through the fixing means, a light-emitting member such as an LED cannot be arranged at a position where the fastening screw is inserted in a cross section that interferes with the fastening screw when viewed from the front. That is, since the area where the fixing means can be arranged practically coincides with the limit position of the outer shape of the light emitting member, the size of the structure is limited to the position where the fixing means can be arranged.

In other words, the shape of the supporting plate that supports the light-emitting substrate from the back side must be larger than the light-emitting substrate by the size of the fixing means. This limits the size of the light-emitting substrate.

On the other hand, according to the game machine U1, since the insertion direction of the fastening screw for fixing the fixing means is composed of the first direction and the second direction that are inclined to each other, all the fixing means are aligned along the front-rear direction. As compared with the case where it is inserted, it is possible to ensure a wider performance area on the side that the player visually recognizes.

In the gaming machine U1, the fixing means is characterized in that the external surface is provided with a first surface formed along the first direction and a second surface formed along the second direction. Game machine U2
.

According to the game machine U2, in addition to the effects of the game machine 1, since the outer surface is formed along the direction of the fixing force applied to the fixing means, even if the outer surface is likely to be deformed by an external force, sufficient resistance is provided. A force can be generated, and deformation of the outer surface can be suppressed.

A gaming machine U3, wherein at least one of the fixing locations of the fixing means is provided with suppressing means for suppressing a decrease in fixing force in the gaming machine U1 or U2.

Here, assuming that the first means and the second means are composed of a resin molded product, and that the resin mold for manufacturing is pulled out in one direction, the first direction or the second direction and the pulled-out direction are inclined to each other. Since it is inclined, there is a possibility that the fixing force of the first or second fixing means corresponding to the inclined side may be weakened.

On the other hand, according to the game machine U3, in addition to the effects of the game machine U1 or U2, the reduction of the fixing force can be suppressed by the suppressing means, so that the fastening screw used for fastening the fixing means can be used as a common part. can do.

In addition, the structure of the said suppression means is not limited at all. For example, it may be loosening preventing means for preventing loosening of fixation, or loosening restricting means for restricting further loosening when fixation loosening occurs.

In the game machine U3, the game machine U4 is characterized in that the suppressing means is provided with an informing means capable of informing of the fixation failure of the fixing means.

According to the game machine U4, in addition to the effects of the game machine U3, the notifying means notifies the fixing failure of the fixing means.

Note that the configuration of the notification means is not limited at all. For example, it may be a means for electrically notifying such as a detecting means such as a sensor, or a structural means for causing a change in appearance.
Structural means include, for example, transmission change means for changing the transmission strength of vibrations generated inside the game machine to the outside of the game machine, light effect change means for blocking light emitted from the inside and generating shadows that can be seen from the outside, Vibration notification means for making the player aware of it by contacting the vibrating portion of the vibrating device to generate an abnormal sound or strengthen the vibration is exemplified.

In any one of the game machines U2 to U4, a third means disposed between the first means and the second means is provided, and the third means is a player between the first surface and the second surface. A gaming machine U5 characterized in that it is disposed between.

According to the game machine U5, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines U2 to U4, the first means and the second means set the direction in which the resistance force can be generated as the component direction of the fixing force of the fixing means to a plurality of directions. Therefore, it is possible to easily hold the third means safely.

Note that the configuration of the third means is not limited at all. For example, the third means may be configured to allow the player to visually recognize the first means but not to visually recognize the second means. In this case, by setting the widening side between the first surface and the second surface to the first means side and the narrowing side to the second means side, a wide area to be visually recognized by the player is secured while the side not to be visually recognized is secured. The area occupied by the configuration can be narrowed.

The gaming machine U5 is characterized by comprising a fourth means disposed on the opposite side of the third means with the first surface interposed therebetween, wherein the first surface is formed to be inclined with respect to the front-rear direction. game machine U
6.

According to the gaming machine U6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine U5, interference between the area occupied by the third means and the area occupied by the fourth means in a front view can be achieved. , a large area can be secured for placement.

A game machine U7 characterized in that, in any one of the game machines U1 to U6, the first fixing means and the second fixing means are arranged in pairs with a predetermined space therebetween.

According to the game machine U7, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines U1 to U6, the first fixing means and the second fixing means are arranged in a set with a predetermined space therebetween. It is possible to avoid deformation along the direction in which the fixing force is generated from occurring in the other fixing means. That is, it is possible to suppress the deformation in the direction intersecting with the direction in which the fixing force is generated, so it is possible to avoid loosening of the fixing means.

<The rigidity of the game board assists the decrease in rigidity due to the notch (through hole) on the side of the back case>
In a game machine comprising a game board and facing means having edges facing the game board, the facing means has adjacent parts arranged close to the game board on the left and right edges of the game board. , and a gaming machine ZA1 characterized in that the forming aspect of the adjacent portion is left-right asymmetrical.

2. Description of the Related Art Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine that includes a game board that forms a game area and a back case in which movable units and the like are arranged (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-77627). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, the internal space of the back case is eroded by the space occupied by the connection position between the game board and the back case, so it is difficult to secure a sufficient space for arranging the movable units and the like. There was a problem of difficulty.

In particular, in a right-handed machine that performs a right-handed game in a variable probability state (high probability state) or a jackpot game (special game state), the player's line of sight is often concentrated on the right side of the game area. It has been required to secure an internal space of the back case on the back side of the channel (the channel on the right side of the liquid crystal device) through which the hit game ball flows down.

On the other hand, according to the game machine ZA1, by making the form of the proximity part left-right asymmetrical,
Since the arrangement of the left and right edges of the facing means with respect to the game board can be left-right asymmetrical, instead of sacrificing the internal area of one of the left and right facing means, the internal area of the other of the left and right facing means is secured. can be made easier. As a result, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in arranging the facing means with respect to the game board, to ensure sufficient space for arranging the movable units, etc., and to improve the degree of freedom in performance that is visually recognized by the player through the game board. be able to. For example, the vicinity of the edge of the game board (for example, the right-handed channel) can be illuminated by the light-emitting means of the moving accessory, or by the light emitted from the liquid crystal display device.

In addition, the form of formation of the proximity part is not limited at all. For example, it may be in contact with the game board, may be arranged away from the game board, or may be a combination thereof.

In addition, the formation mode of the proximity part is not limited at all. For example, it is possible to secure a wide area in which the connection portion (contact portion) used for connection with the game board is not formed,
The connection portion (contact portion) may be arranged after suppressing the area occupied by the connection portion (contact portion).

Moreover, the aspect of left-right asymmetry is not limited at all. For example, the area in which the proximal portion is formed may be asymmetrical, the direction of formation of the proximal portion may be left-right asymmetrical, and the functional portion provided in the proximal portion (the female screw to which the fastening screw is fastened and fixed may be The formation position, the formation direction (for example, the direction in which the insertion direction of the fastening screw is set in the front-rear direction, the left-right direction, or another direction) or the number of formations of the fastening portion to be formed, etc., may be left-right asymmetric.

In the game machine ZA1, the facing means includes an arrangement section in which the proximity section is formed at the end on the game board side and arranged to face each other in the left-right direction, and the proximity section is formed in the left-right direction with respect to the arrangement section. A gaming machine ZA2 characterized by being asymmetrically configured.

According to the game machine ZA2, in addition to the effects of the game machine ZA1, the area between the arrangement portions can be configured asymmetrically with respect to the game board. In addition, the form in which the formation direction is left-right asymmetrical is not limited at all. For example, the forming direction may be opposite to the left-right symmetrical direction (same direction for both left and right), or the forming direction may be a direction intersecting left and right (for example, a direction perpendicular to each other).

Examples of the direction of formation include the direction in which the plate-shaped portion extends (the direction in which it is provided), the direction in which the recessed portion is recessed as a notch (the direction in which it is cut), and the like.

In the gaming machine ZA1 or ZA2, the proximity portion includes a facing surface that faces the game board and a facing side that faces the game board, and is compared to the left side of the game board. The game machine ZA3 is characterized in that the portion of the game board facing the right side has a larger proportion of the facing side than the facing surface.

According to the game machine ZA3, in addition to the effects of the game machine ZA1 or ZA2, the lateral width occupied by the proximity portion can be narrowed on the right side of the game board compared to the left side of the game board.

A game machine ZA4 characterized in that, in any one of the game machines ZA1 to ZA3, the game machine ZA4 is characterized by comprising suppressing means for suppressing displacement of the game board or the opposing means in the opposing direction.

According to the game machine ZA4, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines ZA1 to ZA3, the rigidity of the opposing means can be reinforced by the suppressing means. In addition, arrangement|positioning of a suppressing means is not limited at all. For example, it may be disposed at a position away from the game board (including a position in contact with the facing means) or at a position away from the facing means (including a position in contact with the game board). However, it may be arranged at a position between the game board and the opposing means (including a position in contact with at least one of the game board or the opposing means).

A gaming machine ZA5 characterized in that, in the gaming machine ZA4, the suppressing means is arranged on the gaming board side.

According to the game machine ZA5, in addition to the effects of the game machine ZA4, it is possible to maintain the strength (ensure the rigidity) of the game unit as a whole without providing a special member for the opposing means.

A gaming machine ZA6 in the gaming machine ZA4 or ZA5, wherein the suppressing means includes an overlapping portion that overlaps the outermost side surface of the opposing means in a front view.

According to the game machine ZA6, in addition to the effects of the game machine ZA4 or ZA5, it is possible to prevent sacrificing the degree of freedom in the design of the inside of the game board. It is possible to maintain the strength (ensure the rigidity) of the game unit as a whole.

In any one of the game machines ZA1 to ZA6, the facing means includes a non-contact portion that does not contact the game board at the edge of the outermost side in the predetermined direction on the game board side. Characteristic game machine ZA7.

According to the game machine ZA7, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines ZA1 to ZA6, the gap between the game board and the non-contact part can be used as a location for the driving device of the variable winning opening, and the driving device It can be effectively used as a path for wires connected to a winning sensor or a light-emitting device, or as a location for arranging a light-emitting device.

In any one of game machines ZA1 to ZA7, the game board is made of a resin material,
A game machine characterized in that the facing means includes effect means disposed between the game board and a front end of the effect means arranged forward of the front end of the facing means. ZA8
.

According to the game machine ZA8, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines ZA1 to ZA7, the arrangement space of the effect means can be extended to the front side.

<Various lighting modes for movable accessories>
light emitting means for irradiating a predetermined light emitting region with light; displacement means configured such that a first position at least partially overlapping the light emitting region when viewed from a predetermined direction is included in at least a portion of a displacement section;
, wherein the light-emitting area includes a possible area configured to be visible in a plurality of types of light-emitting modes corresponding to the arrangement of the displacement means.

2. Description of the Related Art Among game machines such as pachinko machines, there is a game machine configured such that a light emitting means and a displacement means overlap when viewed from the front (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-159178). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, there is a problem that the light emitting means and the displacing means are visually recognized individually, and the presentation effect using the overlap is insufficient. That is, the displacement means is arranged in front of the light emitting means so that the light emitting means is hidden by the displacement means,
There was a problem that the production effect was insufficient.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine ZB1, since the light emitting means is configured to be visually recognizable in different light emitting modes depending on the mode of the displacement means, it is possible to diversify the presentation mode.

The mode of the displacement means includes, for example, an arrangement mode of the displacement means, a displacement mode of the displacement means, an orientation (posture) mode of the displacement means, a light emission mode of the light emitting means provided in the displacement means, and the like. exemplified. Examples of the mode of arrangement of the displacement means include a case where the displacement means partially overlaps the light emitting means, a case where the displacement means entirely overlaps the light emitting means, and the like. As the displacement mode of the displacement means,
Examples include a case where the displacement means is displaced toward the light emitting means and a case where the displacement means is displaced away from the light emitting means. The orientation (orientation) of the displacing means includes a case where the front surface of the displacement means faces the light emitting means side, a case where the back surface of the displacement means faces the light emitting means side, a case where the surface between them faces the light emitting means side, and the like. exemplified.

The light emission mode of the light emitting means includes a mode in which the light emitting means that emits light toward the displacement means lights, blinks, or goes out, and a mode that the light emitting means that emits light toward the side away from the displacement means lights, blinks, or goes out. are exemplified.

In the game machine ZB1, the possible area is a first state in which the displacement means is arranged at the first position and a second state in which the displacement means is arranged at a second position different from the first position, The game machine ZB2 is characterized in that it is possible to configure a case where the light emission modes viewed from the predetermined direction are different.

According to the game machine ZB2, in addition to the effects of the game machine ZB1, the light emission mode can be changed by changing the position of the displacement means. can change suddenly.

In the gaming machine ZB1 or ZB2, the light emitting means includes a substrate on which a light emitting portion is arranged, and a refracting means arranged to refract the light emitted from the light emitting portion, and the substrate A game machine ZB3, wherein the refraction means includes a first refraction section which is arranged outside the possible area when viewed in a direction, and which overlaps the possible area when viewed in the predetermined direction.

According to the game machine ZB3, in addition to the effects of the game machine ZB1 or ZB2, the mode of the light visually recognized through the first refraction unit is changed by combining the light emitted from the light emitting unit and the color and brightness based on the displacement means. can be expressed by

Further, by narrowing the formation range of the substrate, it is possible to secure a region for arranging other components such as a driving device for generating the driving force of the displacement means and a space for displacing the displacement means.

In game machine ZB3, game machine ZB4 is characterized in that the displacement means has a larger displacement at a position overlapping with the possible area when viewed from the predetermined direction than displacement at other positions.

According to the game machine ZB4, in addition to the effects of the game machine ZB3, the displacement of the displacement means is suppressed at the position where the light emitting means occupies a large space, and the displacement of the displacement means is increased at the position where the space occupied by the light emitting means is small. Therefore, the degree of freedom of displacement of the displacement means can be maximized while reducing the space occupied by the light emitting means and the displacement means.

It should be noted that the magnitude of the displacement is not limited at all. For example, the absolute value of the displacement of the displacement means may be compared, the positive and negative values may be set in opposite directions for comparison, the displacement in a predetermined direction (component) of the displacement means may be compared, The comparison may include the number of members configured in the displacement means to be displaced.

In any one of game machines ZB1 to ZB4, the displacement means includes second light emitting means for emitting light in a manner visible from the predetermined direction, and transmitting means for transmitting light emitted from the second light emitting means. The gaming machine ZB5 is characterized in that the transmission means has a shape in which a width in a direction intersecting the direction of displacement of the displacement means changes along the displacement direction of the displacement means.

According to the game machine ZB5, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the game machines ZB1 to ZB4, the width of the light of the second light emitting means visually recognized through the possible area is determined by the position of the displacement section where the displacement means is arranged. can be changed by

A gaming machine ZB6 characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines ZB1 to ZB5, the possible area is arranged on the center side of a window that opens so that the liquid crystal display area can be visually recognized.

According to the game machine ZB6, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines ZB1 to ZB5, the change in the lighting mode of the possible area can be used to guide the player's line of sight toward the liquid crystal display area.

Note that the manner of arranging the possible regions is not limited at all, and various manners are exemplified.
For example, it may be scattered around the window (including the case where the possible area is one place),
A circular (arc) shape surrounding the window may also be used.

In any one of game machines ZB1 to ZB6, comprising a substrate on which the light emitting means is arranged,
The game machine ZB7 is characterized in that the board has no fastening means for fastening at the end on the possible area side.

According to the gaming machine ZB7, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines ZB1 to ZB6, it is possible to secure a space for arranging the light emitting means on the side of the possible area, and to prevent the shadow of the fastening means from occurring in the possible area. can be avoided.

A gaming machine ZB8, wherein the gaming machine ZB7 is characterized by comprising a covering means covering a space between the possible area and the board when viewed from the predetermined direction.

According to the game machine ZB8, in addition to the effects of the game machine ZB7, the covering means hides the boundary position between the possible area and the board, so that the visibility of light is not deteriorated near the edge of the board. Even if there is, it is possible to avoid showing it to the player.

A gaming machine ZB7 or ZB8 comprising board holding means for holding the board, the board holding means comprising a gap forming portion for forming a gap for facilitating assembly of the board,
The game machine ZB9 is characterized in that the gap forming portion is closed in the assembled state.

According to the game machine ZB9, in addition to the effect of the game machine ZB7 or ZB8, the gap forming part can facilitate the assembly of the board, while avoiding problems such as light leakage from the gap forming part. . Also, this gap forming portion may be used for engagement with another member and utilized for positioning of the other member.

In any one of game machines ZB7 to ZB9, the board is provided with a connector section to which wiring is connected, and the connector section is arranged at a position away from the end on the possible area side. Game machine ZB10.

According to the game machine ZB10, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines ZB7 to ZB9, by applying a load to the wiring connected to the connector part, a moment originating from the end on the possible area side can be generated. Therefore, even if the substrate cannot be taken out directly, the substrate can be easily taken out.

<Transmission of driving force to multiple members, switching between transmission and interruption>
Displacing means configured to be displaceable, driving means for generating a driving force for displacing the displacing means, and driving force generated by the driving means is configured to be able to be transmitted to the displacement means in a predetermined state. and transmission means, wherein the transmission means comprises a transmission part for transmitting a driving force to a predetermined transmitted part of the displacement means, and in a driving state of the driving means, the transmission part A gaming machine ZC1 characterized in that the displacement of the displacement means can be suppressed when it is not in contact with the part.

In game machines such as pachinko machines, there is a game machine in which a cylindrical portion used for driving force transmission is guided by a concave portion of a displacement member, and the arrangement of the cylindrical portion corresponds to the posture of the displacement member (for example, See JP-A-2010-234152). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine,
Since the posture of the displacement member is maintained by the support by the columnar portion, there is a problem that it is difficult to perform other effects using the columnar portion while the posture of the displacement member is maintained.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine ZC1, since the displacement of the displacement means can be suppressed even when the transmission part is in the non-contact state, the transmission part can be changed to another effect while the posture of the displacement means is maintained. can be used.

In addition, the aspect of a transmission means is not limited at all. For example, a single gear or a plurality of gears arranged between the displacement means and the driving means may be used, or a mechanism such as a slider crank or a cam in which a plurality of members interact with each other may be used.

It should be noted that the manner in which displacement can be suppressed is not limited at all. For example, it may be biased by gravity or an elastic force based on a spring member, it may be locked (engaged) by a claw-like member, or it may be restrained by coming into contact with a member functioning as a stopper. A mode in which the In addition, as suppressable, a mode of reducing the displacement of the displacement means, a mode of preventing (restricting) the displacement of the displacement means, and the like are exemplified.

In the gaming machine ZC1, the transmission means includes a formation portion formed along the movement locus of the transmission portion, and the formation portion is such that the transmission portion is non-uniform with respect to the displacement means in the movement direction of the displacement means. The game machine ZC2 is configured to be able to abut against the displacement means in a state of abutment.

According to the game machine ZC2, in addition to the effects of the game machine ZC1, the displacement of the displacement means can be suppressed by the contact between the forming portion and the displacement means, so that the stability of the arrangement of the displacement means against external force is improved. be able to.

In the gaming machine ZC2, the forming portion extends from the transmission portion along the displacement direction of the transmission means, and the distance between the displacement means is longer than the distance between the transmission portion and the displacement means. A game machine ZC3 characterized by being configured as follows.

According to the game machine ZC3, in addition to the effects of the game machine ZC2, in the direction in which the displacement means and the transmission means face each other, the part where the load is generated when the driving force is transmitted and the part where the load is generated when the displacement is suppressed are divided. can be shifted.

In the gaming machine ZC3, the displacement means includes a one-side functional part formed on one side of the transmitted part in the moving direction of the displacement means, and a moving direction other side of the displacement means on the transmitted part. The one-side functional part is formed on the same plane as the movement locus of the forming part, and the other-side functional part is arranged outwardly of the movement locus of the forming part. A gaming machine ZC4 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine ZC4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine ZC3, the moving direction in which the movement is suppressed by the formation unit can be set to one side direction.

In any one of game machines ZC1 to ZC4, the displacement means comprises first displacement means and second displacement means different from the first displacement means, and the transmission means comprises the first displacement means and the second displacement means. A gaming machine ZC5 characterized in that the transmission mode to the displacement means is configured to be changeable for each operation section.

Note that the method of switching the transmission mode is not limited at all. For example, when the driving force is transmitted to one of the first displacement means and the second displacement means, the transmission of the driving force to the other may be interrupted. It is also possible to change the ratio of the applied driving force.

According to the game machine ZC5, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines ZC1 to ZC4, one transmission means can displace a plurality of displacement means in different displacement modes.

In the game machine ZC5, the first displacement means is arranged on one side of the transmission means, and the second displacement means is arranged on the other side of the transmission means.

According to the game machine ZC6, in addition to the effects of the game machine ZC5, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in setting the combinations of the displacement modes of the first displacement means and the second displacement means.

In addition, the combination of the displacement modes of the first displacement means and the second displacement means is not limited at all. For example, it may include the timing at which the first displacement means and the second displacement means are synchronously displaced. It may be one that does not displace.

Moreover, in the case where the timing of synchronous displacement is included, the displacement mode may be changed by changing the relative speed of the first displacement means and the second displacement means.

A gaming machine ZC7, wherein in the gaming machine ZC5 or ZC6, the displacement direction of the first displacement means and the displacement direction of the second displacement means are set in opposite directions.

According to the game machine ZC7, in addition to the effects of the game machine ZC5 or ZC6, the first displacement means and the second displacement means can be mutually recognized in the common area, so that the first displacement means and the second displacement means can be mutually recognized. Effective performance can be executed even when the performance area displaced by the means is narrow.

In addition, the aspect of a 1st displacement means and a 2nd displacement means is not limited at all. for example,
A plurality of displacement means that are stacked in front and behind may be projected into a common area at different timings, or the initial arrangement may be configured such that while stacking front and back, they pass through a common range during movement of a plurality of movable members. can be

<Displacement of the stop position is prevented by the load generating part catching up and making contact>
In a gaming machine comprising first displacement means configured to be displaceable and second displacement means configured to be displaceable by displacing the first displacement means in a predetermined direction, the second displacement means comprises:
a load generating section that applies a load along the predetermined direction to displace the first displacement means; the first displacement means includes a loaded section that receives the load from the load generating section; The portion is separated from the loaded portion during displacement along the predetermined direction, and is configured to contact a predetermined portion different from the loaded portion of the first displacement means. ZD1
.

In game machines such as pachinko machines, there is a game machine in which a cylindrical portion used for driving force transmission is guided by a concave portion of a displacement member, and the arrangement of the cylindrical portion corresponds to the posture of the displacement member (for example, See JP-A-2010-234152). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine,
If the cylindrical portion moves excessively due to a problem with the drive transmission, the position of the displacement member is displaced from the end of the movement, which may give the player a sense of discomfort.

On the other hand, according to the game machine ZD1, the load generating portion separates from the load receiving portion during displacement and is brought into contact with a predetermined portion different from the load receiving portion, thereby causing excessive displacement of the second displacement means. However, it is possible to prevent the first displacement means from being placed in an unintended position.

In the gaming machine ZD1, the load generating section applies a load directed from the other side in the predetermined direction to the one side in a state in which the first displacement means is arranged at one end of the displaceable section. A game machine ZD2 characterized in that it is configured to be able to grant to.

According to the game machine ZD2, in addition to the effects of the game machine ZD1, when the first displacement means is arranged at one end in the predetermined direction, the load generating section moves the first displacement means in the predetermined direction. Since a load is applied in a direction from the other side to the one side, the first displacement means can be pressed against the end portion on the one side in the predetermined direction.

In the game machine ZD1 or ZD2, a drive means configured to drive the second displacement means is provided, and the load generating part is arranged on the other side of the load receiving part in the predetermined direction to move the first position.
A gaming machine ZD3 characterized by coming into contact with displacement means.

According to the game machine ZD3, in addition to the effects of the game machine ZD1 or ZD2, the second displacement means can be mechanically stopped by the contact between the load generating part and the first displacement means, so that the driving force can be stopped. Even if the accuracy of the timing is low, the end positions of the first displacement means and the second displacement means can be easily kept constant. As a result, it is possible to suppress displacement of the first displacement means and the second displacement means from the terminal positions while abruptly setting the stops of the first displacement means and the second displacement means.

In addition, the part that takes measures against the rarely occurring phenomenon that the second displacement means moves excessively is
By providing it at a location different from the loaded portion that receives the load in each driving force transmission, even if the loaded portion is deformed, the fail-safe function can be exhibited without any problem.

A game machine ZD4 characterized in that in any one of the game machines ZD1 to ZD3, the game machine ZD4 is characterized by comprising a restricting means capable of restricting the first displacement means at one end in the predetermined direction.

According to the game machine ZD4, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines ZD1 to ZD3, while the first displacement means is regulated at one end in the predetermined direction by the regulating means, the second displacement means is the second displacement means. It can be displaced independently with respect to one displacing means.

In addition, the aspect of a control means is not limited at all. For example, it may be a claw-shaped member that moves in and out in a direction that intersects the displacement direction of the first displacement means and engages, or may be restricted by the biasing force of gravity or an elastic member, or part of the second displacement means. It may be configured by

In any one of game machines ZD1 to ZD4, a detection means configured to detect that the first displacement means is arranged at one end in the predetermined direction, wherein the first displacement means
The game machine ZD5 is characterized in that the detecting means comprises a detected part whose position is detected, and the load generating part is in contact with the detected part.

According to the game machine ZD5, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines ZD1 to ZD4, it is possible to limit the portion damaged by the load at the time of contact to the detected portion.

By linking the life that can be calculated from the number of displacements (the number of times of driving) of the second displacement means and the durability of the detection piece, it is possible to determine detection failures due to breakage of the detection piece. It is possible to grasp the replacement timing (maintenance timing) of the displacement means.

In any one of game machines ZD1 to ZD5, the direction of the load applied from the load generation section to the predetermined section intersects the direction of the load applied from the load generation section to the load receiving section. A gaming machine ZD6 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine ZD6, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines ZD1 to ZD5, the first
A plurality of directions of movement of the displacement means can be provided.

A gaming machine ZD7 in any one of the gaming machines ZD1 to ZD6, wherein the load-bearing portion and the predetermined portion are disposed apart from each other by a predetermined distance in a direction orthogonal to the predetermined direction.
.

According to the game machine ZD7, in any one of the game machines ZD1 to ZD6, the loaded portion and the predetermined portion are arranged at the same position when viewed from a direction perpendicular to the predetermined direction.
The area required for arranging the load receiving portion and the predetermined portion can be narrowed.

<Technical concept of holding by using flexibility of follow-up means>
In a game machine comprising displacement means configured to be capable of displacing a predetermined area and follow-up means for following the displacement of the displacement means, prevention of preventing a predetermined part of the follow-up means from entering the predetermined area side A game machine ZE1 characterized by comprising means.

Among game machines such as pachinko machines, there is a game machine configured such that flexible wiring is routed along the direction of displacement of the displacement means (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-157474).
. However, in the above-described conventional game machine, by setting the length of the wire in comparison with the displacement means, there is an advantage that the wire is less likely to bend when the displacement means is displaced. In order to prevent this, it is necessary to form a temporary fixing portion for temporarily fixing the wiring so that the wiring is not relatively displaced at various places on the displacement means. It is normal to take a long time to assemble because it is assembled by hand.
As a result, there is a problem that the degree of freedom in design and assembly efficiency may be lowered.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine ZE1, the following means such as wiring is prevented from being displaced to the predetermined area side by the preventing means, so that the following means is prevented from rubbing against the displacement means and being damaged. can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to eliminate the need to form a plurality of temporary fixing portions on the displacement means, thereby improving the degree of freedom in designing the displacement means and improving the assembly efficiency.

In the gaming machine ZE1, the preventing means supports the following means so as to be relatively displaceable in a predetermined direction in which a distance from the displacing means changes with displacement of the displacing means.

According to the game machine ZE2, in addition to the effects of the game machine ZE1, the prevention means supports the following means in a manner displaceable in the direction in which the distance between the prevention means and the displacement means changes as the displacement means is displaced. , the load applied to the following means can be reduced as compared with the case where the position of the following means is fixed by a fixing member such as a binding band.

In addition, the aspect of a prevention means is not limited at all. For example, it may be a columnar portion around which the following means may be wound, or may be a claw-like portion capable of sandwiching the following means. Further, when the prevention means is formed as a columnar portion, for example, the columnar portion may be formed as a fastening portion used for fastening and fixing members together, or may be used for alignment when assembling members together. It may be formed as a positioning portion.

Also, the form of the follower means is not limited at all. For example, it may be an electric wiring that supplies electricity to the displacement means, or a belt-shaped member that is displaced based on the displacement of the displacement means, and a figure or pattern is drawn on the surface, and the figure or pattern is visually recognized by the player. It may be a band-like effect member that assists the effect, or an elastic means such as a coil spring that generates an urging force that assists the displacement of the displacement means.

A gaming machine ZE3 in the gaming machine ZE1 or ZE2, characterized in that the following means is configured to be capable of supplying electricity to the displacement means.

According to the gaming machine ZE3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine ZE1 or ZE2, it is possible to favorably supply electricity to the displacement means.

In any one of game machines ZE1 to ZE3, the predetermined direction is a direction intersecting the direction in which the displacement means is displaced, and the following means is configured to surround the prevention means. A gaming machine ZE4.

According to the game machine ZE4, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines ZE1 to ZE3, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the following means protrudes greatly to one side. That is, since the range in which the following means can be displaced can be arranged on both sides of the preventing means, the area where it is necessary to avoid interference between the following means and other members can be limited to the range around the preventing means. .

Further, it is possible to eliminate the need to construct a relief portion for allowing the following means to enter from the displacement end of the displacement means to the outside in the displacement direction. Thereby, the displacement means can be arranged in a space-saving manner.

In any one of the game machines ZE1 to ZE4, it comprises a shielding means for shielding at least part of the displacement means, and the following means is connected to the displacement means at a position inside the shielding means. Gaming machine ZE5.

According to the game machine ZE5, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines ZE1 to ZE4, the shielding means can prevent the connecting portion between the following means and the displacement means from being visually recognized by the player. The term "inward" as used herein means an inward direction when the outer shape is an edge portion in a front view.

In the game machine ZE5, the displacement means is configured to be rotatable about a first axis, and the first axis is arranged at the outer edge of the shield means.

According to the gaming machine ZE6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine ZE5, while keeping the following means out of the player's field of vision, the amount of protrusion of the displacement means from the outer shape (outer edge) of the shielding means is secured. be able to.

In the game machine ZE5 or ZE6, the prevention means is arranged on a straight line that equally divides the rotatable angle of the displacement means about the first axis and that passes through the first axis. A game machine ZE7 characterized by.

According to the game machine ZE7, in addition to the effects of the game machine ZE5 or ZE6, the absolute value of the displacement amount of the following means can be suppressed.

The game machine ZE8 is characterized in that, in any one of the game machines ZE1 to ZE7, the displacement means comprises a guide part for guiding the follow-up means in a direction away from the displacement trajectory.

According to the game machine ZE8, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines ZE1 to ZE7, it is possible to prevent rubbing against the displacement means and improve the durability of the following means.

A gaming machine ZE9 in the gaming machine ZE8, wherein the guide portion extends in a direction orthogonal to the outer shape of the predetermined area.

According to the game machine ZE9, in addition to the effects of the game machine ZE8, the area occupied by the follower means can be narrowed in the vicinity of the displacement means, and the gap area through which the follower means can pass can be narrowed. The rigidity of the external means for holding the displacement means can be improved compared to when the gap is large.

In any one of the gaming machines ZE1 to ZE9, the follower means is formed in a string-like or belt-like shape, one end of which is connected to the displacement means, the other end of which is connected to the game machine, and is directed to both ends. A game machine ZE10 characterized in that the game machine ZE10 is guided from one side of the predetermined area.

According to the game machine ZE10, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines ZE1 to ZE9, a load in a pulling direction can be applied from one side of the predetermined area at both ends of the follow-up means. As a result, the follower means as a whole can be balanced with the load applied from the guide section.

In any one of the gaming machines ZE1 to ZE10, the following means is configured to be wound around the preventing means in a loosening direction when the displacement means is displaced from the pre-displacement position to the post-displacement position. Machine ZE11.

According to the game machine ZE11, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines ZE1 to ZE10,
By absorbing the displacement of the displacement means by the slackness of the follower means, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of an excessive load on the follower means.

In any one of the game machines ZE1 to ZE11, an arranging means for arranging the follower means between the displacement means and a positioning unit for aligning the arranging means is provided, and the aligning unit comprises the above-mentioned A gaming machine Z characterized in that it is arranged outside the movement trajectory of the following means
E12.

According to the game machine ZE12, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines ZE1 to ZE11,
Since it is possible to avoid the aligning portion from encroaching on the displacement space of the follower means, the load applied to the follower means due to the displacement of the displacer means can be minimized.

In the gaming machine ZE12, the following means is configured to be wound around the preventing means, and the following means has a first displacement portion (weak displacement portion) and a larger displacement than the first displacement portion. and a second displacement portion (strong displacement portion), wherein the first displacement portion is arranged between the second displacement portion and the arrangement means.

According to the gaming machine ZE13, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine ZE12, it is possible to limit the locations where the following means are likely to be damaged by coming into contact with the arranging means. As a result, it is possible to limit the locations where reinforcement is required, so that durability can be improved at low cost.

In addition, the aspect of comparison of the magnitude of the displacement of the first displacement portion and the second displacement portion is not limited at all. For example, the linear distance between positions before and after the displacement may be compared, or when the displacement occurs in a plurality of directions, the comparison may be limited to the displacement in a predetermined direction (or on a predetermined plane).

In the game machine ZE12 or ZE13, the game machine ZE14 is characterized in that the prevention means comprises a protruding part protruding from the arrangement means, and the following means is wound around the protruding part.

According to the gaming machine ZE14, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine ZE12 or ZE13, the fixing means can be assembled to the arranging means from above while supporting the following means that hangs down by its own weight with the arranging means. and the fixing means can be assembled easily.

<Technical concept that changes the displacement mode (transmission mode) in forward and reverse rotation>
A game machine comprising: driving means; displacement means configured to be displaceable by the driving force of the driving means; and transmission means configured to transmit the driving force generated by the driving means to the displacement means, The driving means includes a first driving mode for generating a driving force in a first direction;
and a second driving mode for generating a driving force in a second direction different from the driving direction, and the displacement means is driven in the first driving mode in the first driving mode and in the second driving mode. A gaming machine ZF1 characterized by being configured to be displaceable in a driven second displacement mode.

A game machine such as a pachinko machine is provided with a first displacement means and a second displacement means that are displaced by the driving force of a common driving device, and the direction of displacement is reversed by reversing the driving direction of the driving device. There is a game machine configured as
. However, in the above-described conventional game machine, the first
Only the displacement modes of the displacement means and the second displacement means change, and even if the driving direction of the driving device is reversed, both the first displacement means and the second displacement means are displaced. For this reason, there is a problem that the degree of improvement in performance effect due to the adoption of a device that can be driven in forward and reverse directions as the drive device is insufficient.

On the other hand, according to the game machine ZF1, by changing the direction in which the driving force is generated, the displacement mode of the displacement means can be changed. The production effect used can be sufficiently improved.

The gaming machine ZF1 is characterized by comprising light emitting means for emitting light toward the displacement means, wherein the displacement means is configured to be displaceable so as to pass through the optical axis of the light emitted from the light emitting means. A game machine ZF2.

According to the game machine ZF2, in addition to the effects of the game machine ZF1, the position at which the light emitted from the light emitting means intersects the displacement means can be changed during the displacement of the displacement means. can perform a gorgeous production that changes with the passage of time.

In game machine ZF1 or ZF2, displacement suppression means for suppressing displacement of at least a part of said transmission means is provided, and said transmission means, in at least one of said first drive mode and said second drive mode, A game machine ZF3, comprising a suppression area in which transmission of driving force is suppressed, wherein the displacement suppression means is configured to be capable of suppressing a predetermined displacement in the suppression area.

According to the game machine ZF3, in addition to the effects of the game machine ZF1 or ZF2, the displacement suppression means unintentionally displaces the transmission means when the transmission of the driving force is suppressed, thereby displacing in an unintended displacement mode. Displacement of the means can be prevented.

Further, compared to the case where the displacement means is stopped by directly contacting the displacement means with another member, the visibility of the displacement means can be maintained at a high level. Therefore, it is possible to configure the displacement means of an appropriate displacement mode so that it is easy for the player to see.

Note that the mode of the displacement suppressing means is not limited at all. For example, it may be an engagement device that produces viscous resistance represented by a damper device, or a resistance device that produces resistance due to its own weight. If the direction is along the horizontal direction), the idling motion cannot be suppressed by the force of gravity.

In the game machine ZF3, detection means configured to be capable of detecting displacement of the displacement suppression means is provided, and the displacement suppression means generates resistance when the operating speed of the transmission means in the suppression area is lower than a predetermined speed. the resistance is suppressed when the operating speed of the transmission means in the suppression region is equal to or higher than a predetermined speed, and the detection means detects the portion to be detected of the displacement suppression means at a position where the displacement suppression means generates the resistance. A gaming machine ZF4 characterized in that it is arranged so as to be able to detect the .

According to the gaming machine ZF4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine ZF3, whether the detection means functions well to detect the stop position of the displacement suppression means and to suppress the displacement in the suppression area of the transmission means in the displacement suppression means. It can be used both for the detection of

In any one of game machines ZF1 to ZF4, the displacement means comprises first displacement means for rotationally displacing around a first axis and second displacement means for rotationally displacing the outside of the first displacement means around the first axis. A gaming machine ZF5 comprising displacement means, wherein displacement of the second displacement means can be suppressed in the first drive mode or the second drive mode.

According to the gaming machine ZF5, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines ZF1 to ZF4, the first
In the drive mode or the second drive mode, the displacement of the second displacement means can be suppressed. Therefore, in this suppressed state, the second displacement means is arranged between the player and the first displacement means and the field of view is increased. and the case where the second displacement means is arranged outside between the player and the first displacement means and does not block the field of view.In addition, the second displacement means Since displacement is possible even in a drive mode in which the displacement of is not suppressed, an effect by the displacement means can be configured in a total of three different displacement modes.

Game machine ZF6 according to any one of game machines ZF1 to ZF5, characterized in that said transmission means comprises light transmitting means formed of a light transmitting material on the side of a connection position with said displacement means.
.

According to the game machine ZF6, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines ZF1 to ZF5, the effect of facilitating the assembly of the displacement means by the light transmitting means and the light emitting performance by conducting light toward the displacement means. It is possible to achieve the effect of enabling

In any one of game machines ZF1 to ZF6, the displacement means includes first displacement means for rotationally displacing about a first axis, and transmission means for the first displacement means for rotationally displacing about the first axis. and a second displacement means connected to the transmission means outside the connection position of the second displacement means, wherein the second displacement means overlaps the first displacement means when viewed in the first axial direction. Characterized game machine ZF7.

According to the gaming machine ZF7, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines ZF1 to ZF6, the second
The displacement means can be retained by the first displacement means. This eliminates the need to dispose a separate retaining member.

<Vibration device next to the device (P9 Policy 1)>
A first operating means configured to be operable by the player, a second operating means arranged at a position different from the first operating means and configured to be operable by the player, and the first operating means. and said second
A game machine ZG1, further comprising a load generating means disposed on the operating means side and capable of generating a load toward the first operating means and the second operating means.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine that includes a plurality of operating devices and a driving device for producing an effect of driving the operating devices (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-159).
178). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, each operating device is provided with a vibrating device, so the space required for arranging each operating device increases, and the number of arrangable operating devices tends to be limited. In addition, there is a problem that the cost becomes high due to an increase in the number of driving devices.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine ZG1, since the load generation means is arranged on the second operation means side with respect to the first operation means, the load generation means is arranged on the first operation means and the second operation means (that is, , a plurality of operating means). This makes it possible to reduce the space required for arranging the first operation means and the second operation means, and raise the upper limit of the number of operation means that can be arranged. In addition, since the number of load generating means can also be reduced, the cost for constructing the game machine can be suppressed.

Note that the form of the load generating means is not limited at all. For example, it may be means configured to vibrate (high-speed repeated displacement), means such as a pump that generates a load at a predetermined cycle, or means composed of an arm member that changes its posture by displacement of a cam. good. Moreover, the mode of load is not limited at all. For example, it may be a load that is mechanically transmitted in a contact state, or a load that is transmitted in a non-contact state (wind pressure, sound pressure, high pressure, etc.).

In the game machine ZG1, the load generation means is arranged between the first operation means and the second operation means.

According to the game machine ZG2, in addition to the effects of the game machine ZG1, the load can be transmitted to both the first operation means and the second operation means to the same extent.

In the game machine ZG1 or ZG2, the first operation means is operated to shoot game balls toward the game area, and the load generation means is a cover that at least partially covers the first operation means from a predetermined direction. A game machine ZG3, characterized in that it is arranged in the installation means.

According to the game machine ZG3, in addition to the effects of the game machine ZG1 or ZG2, the load generating means is arranged at a position where the fingers of the player operating the first operation means are sandwiched between the first operation means and the first operation means. Therefore, the load generated by the load generating means can be easily transmitted to the fingers of the player.

For example, the covering means is arranged at a position where the player's fingers can easily pass through in the process of moving the player's fingers by bringing the fingers close to the first operating means and then removing the fingers from the first operating means after completing the operation. By arranging the covering means so as to cover it from the direction where it is likely to interfere with the fingers, it is possible to make it possible to easily transmit the load of the load generating means to the player, especially while the fingers are moving.

In addition, for example, by arranging the covering means at a position where the finger touches with a high probability when the player operates the first operating means, the load of the load generating means is reduced during the operation of the first operating means. It is possible to configure a state that is easy to convey to the player.

This idea is different from the idea of arranging the load generating means in the first operating means.
That is, since the load generating means is arranged on the side of the second operating means with respect to the first operating means, the load generating means is arranged at a position different from that of the first operating means.

In the gaming machine ZG3, intervening means interposed between the load generating means and the first operating means and the second operating means, and configured to transmit a load to the first operating means and the second operating means and the intervening means is configured so that the strength of vibration transmission to the first operation means is higher than the strength of vibration transmission to the second operation means.
4.

According to the gaming machine ZG4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine ZG3, the load transmission can be concentrated on the side of the first operating means.

In game machine ZG4, game machine ZG5 is characterized in that the intervening means is configured to change the intensity of load transmission by displacing the load generating means as the load generating means is driven.

According to the gaming machine ZG5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine ZG4, the intensity of the load transmitted through the intervening means is improved when the load generating means is driven compared to when the load generating means is not driven. Therefore, while suppressing the degree of interlocking operation (vibration) between the first operating means and the second operating means due to the load or the like applied to the pachinko machine by the player, the first
It is possible to execute an effect of strongly operating (vibrating) the operating means and the second operating means.

A game machine ZG6 characterized in that, in any one of game machines ZG1 to ZG5, holding means for holding the load generating means displaceably is provided, and the holding means is provided with a guide portion for guiding the displacement of the load generating means. .

According to the gaming machine ZG6, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines ZG1 to ZG5, the safety of the player can be ensured by defining the displacement direction of the load generating means. That is, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of problems such as the unintentional collision of the displaced member displaced by the vibration of the load generating means with the player.

In addition, regardless of the structure of the load generating means itself, if it is guided in the desired direction, the load generating means can be displaced in the desired direction. The degree of freedom of means can be improved.

In the game machine ZG6, the holding means is configured to allow displacement of the load generating means in a direction that intersects the direction guided by the guide portion.
G7.

According to the gaming machine ZG7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine ZG6, the load generating means can be configured to be displaced in the crossing direction when switching between the non-driving state and the driving state. , the load generating means can be displaced in different manners. As a result, it is possible to improve the performance effect of the load generating means.

Various modes are exemplified as modes for allowing the displacement. For example, a second holding means for guiding the holding means may be provided, and the guiding direction of the second holding means may intersect the guiding direction of the guide portion. It may be configured to interpose a flexible member, and the displacement may be caused by deformation of the flexible member.

<Vibration means for covering means (P9 policy 2)>
frame means configured in a frame shape; covering means for covering at least a part of the frame means from the front side; means is
A gaming machine ZH1 comprising an allowance portion for allowing displacement, and configured to be able to transmit the vibration of the vibrating means via the allowance portion.

2. Description of the Related Art Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine that includes a front frame and vibration means arranged in front of the front frame (see, for example, JP-A-2015-159837). but,
In the above-mentioned conventional game machine, it is necessary to suppress the vibration of the vibration means to the extent that the vibration of a predetermined strength or more is not transmitted to the front frame side (internal mechanism side), and there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of vibration performance. was there.

On the other hand, according to the game machine ZH1, the vibrating means is arranged in the covering means, and the displacement of the covering means is allowed, so that the vibration can be transmitted to the player through the covering means. On the other hand, by absorbing the vibration by displacing the covering means, it is possible to suppress the transmission of the vibration to the side of the frame means.
As a result, the allowable degree of vibration strength of the vibrating means can be increased.

In addition, the mode of the allowance part is not limited at all. For example, it may be configured in a connection mode assuming displacement of slides, rings, gears, etc., and displacement may occur when the slides, links, gears, etc. operate. It may be configured flexibly, and displacement may occur when an overload is applied.

In the game machine ZH1, the covering means is configured so that the allowable amount of displacement in the vertical direction is smaller than the allowable amount of displacement in the horizontal direction.
.

According to the gaming machine ZH2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine ZH1, while maintaining the effect of the allowable portion in the horizontal displacement, the player can move the covering means in the direction of gravity, such as by placing his/her hand on the covering means. When a load is applied, it is possible to prevent the covering means from being displaced excessively and disturbing the posture of the player. That is, by reducing the permissible amount of displacement in the vertical direction, the structural stability of the product can be achieved.

In game machine ZH1 or ZH2, game machine ZH3 is characterized in that said covering means is configured in the shape of a bag with said frame means side opened.

According to the game machine ZH3, in addition to the effects of the game machine ZH1 or ZH2, since the side of the frame means is configured in the form of a bag that is open, the edges of the bag and the frame means are arranged to face each other.
It is possible to reduce the contact area between the covering means and the frame means which are in contact with each other to transmit vibration. As a result, transmission of vibration to the frame means side can be suppressed, so that transmission of vibration to main substrates, ball passages, and main electrical components disposed on the frame means side can be avoided.

In any one of the game machines ZH1 to ZH3, the vibrating means includes an arrangement portion arranged on the side of the frame means, the frame means comprises a support portion for supporting the arrangement portion, and the arrangement Department is
A game machine ZH4 characterized in that the deformation resistance is lower than that of the supporting portion.

According to the game machine ZH4, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines ZH1 to ZH3, the displacement range of the vibration means is limited while suppressing the transmission of vibration to the frame means side, and furthermore, the arrangement portion is Compared to the case of a rigid structure, it is possible to generate biting by utilizing the fact that deformation resistance is low, and it is possible to ensure a large absolute value of the amount of displacement of the vibrating means toward the frame means. Thereby, it is possible to easily displace the covering means in which the vibrating means is disposed.

In any one of game machines ZH1 to ZH4, the covering means includes a first covering section and a second covering section having a lower deformation resistance than the first covering section, and the vibrating means includes , and a contact portion connected to the first covering portion and the second covering portion and capable of locally contacting the first covering portion.

According to the game machine ZH5, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines ZH1 to ZH4, by locally contacting the first covering portion with high deformation resistance and the contact portion, the contact position can be changed. can be used as a fixed point (reference point) of vibration. That is, it is possible to increase the absolute value of the displacement of the vibrating means and the second covering portion with respect to the contact position.

In any one of game machines ZH1 to ZH5, a ball shooting operation means operated to shoot game balls toward a game area is provided, and the covering means has at least a space between the ball shooting operation means and the ball shooting operation means. A gaming machine ZH6 characterized by interposing a predetermined member.

According to the game machine ZH6, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines ZH1 to ZH5, it is possible to suppress the vibration transmission to the ball shooting operation means.

<The point that is characterized by blocking the light itself by the displacement of the character>
In a gaming machine comprising a light emitting means and an illuminated means to which the light emitted from the light emitting means is emitted, changing the appearance of the illuminated means while leaving the outer shape of the illuminated means when viewed from a predetermined direction. Characterized game machine ZI1.

Among game machines such as pachinko machines, there is a game machine equipped with a light-emitting means configured to be mounted on a movable accessory and capable of executing a light-emitting effect (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-208360).
. However, in the above-described conventional game machine, there is no displaceable member disposed so as to interfere with the optical axis of the light emitting means, and it is necessary to control the light emitting means in order to change the mode of the light emitting effect. However, there is a problem that there is room for improvement in terms of the method of realizing the lighting effect because the data capacity is compressed and the board becomes large due to the control.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine ZI1, for example, the displacement means is configured to be displaceable between the first position and the second position. By configuring so as to be able to do so, it is possible to switch the mode of the light emitting effect by displacing the displacing means. Therefore, it is possible to change the mode of the lighting performance without controlling the light emitting means, and it is possible to reduce the size of the substrate by eliminating the need for data for control and the circuit for control. can. As a result, it is possible to improve the technique for realizing the lighting effect.

In addition, the mode of displacement is not limited at all, and various modes are exemplified. For example, it may be a rotation, a linear slide, or a displacement along a predetermined curve. When the displacement mode of the displacement means is a linear slide, the displacement means is more effective when the direction of the slide coincides with the predetermined direction than when the direction of the slide intersects the predetermined direction. Maintaining the outer shape can be facilitated.

In addition, the aspect of the irradiated means is not limited at all. For example, it may be configured to rotate on a rotation axis that intersects the optical axis, and the projected area may change depending on the difference in posture, or even if there is no change in posture, the member may be configured to protrude from the inside and be scaled. The displacement may change the relative projected area.

The aspect of the displacement means is not limited at all. For example, it may be constructed so as to be rotationally displaced around the irradiated means, or may slide on a plane to enter the side of the irradiated means (between the light emitting means).

In addition, the mode in which the outer shape of the displacement means is left is not limited at all.
For example, the displacement means may be visually recognized as if it is stopped, or the absolute value of the displacement amount may be smaller than that of the irradiated means, so that the displacement of the displacement means is not recognized by the player. Any form is fine.

Also, the displacement means may be displaced in relation to the light emitting means. The light emitting means may be configured to face the irradiated means at any timing of the displacement.

The aspect of the light emitting means is not limited at all. For example, the position may be fixed, or may be displaceable. In the displaceable state, the light emitting means may be arranged in the displacement means, or the light emitting means and the displacement means may be displaced separately (independently). Also, the irradiation direction may be fixed, or the irradiation direction may be variable.

As for the mode of displacement of the light emitting means, the light emitting means may be slid in such a manner that the optical axis is directed toward the means to be irradiated and move toward and away from the means to be irradiated, or the means to be irradiated may be moved around the means to be irradiated while the optical axis is directed to the means to be irradiated. It may be something that rotates.

The light emitting mode of the light emitting means is not limited at all. For example, it may be one that always maintains a lighting state, or one that can be switched between lighting and lighting.

In game machine ZI1, game machine ZI2 is characterized in that the difference in appearance of said means to be illuminated is caused by said means to be illuminated reflecting light emitted from said light emitting means.

According to the gaming machine ZI2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine ZI1, it is possible to immediately recognize the difference in the means to be irradiated when the light emitting means emits light, so it is possible to improve attention to the timing of light irradiation. . According to this, even if the means to be irradiated is displaceable,
A non-displaceable means may be used.

A gaming machine ZI3 characterized in that, in the gaming machine ZI1 or ZI2, the degree of difference in appearance of said means to be irradiated changes based on the displacement of said means to be irradiated.

According to the game machine ZI3, in addition to the effects of the game machine ZI1 or ZI2, it is possible to improve the attention to the means to be irradiated.

Note that the mode of displacement that is the basis for the difference in appearance of the means to be irradiated is not limited at all. For example, constant (periodic) displacement continuing at a constant speed or irregular displacement may be used. Also, the displacement may be instantaneous, or may be slow (so slow that it is difficult for the player to grasp the displacement, for example, a displacement of 1 [mm/min]).

A gaming machine ZI4 characterized in that in any one of the gaming machines ZI1 to ZI3, the illuminated means can be configured to change the direction in which the light from the light emitting means is reflected.

According to the game machine ZI4, in any one of the game machines ZI1 to ZI3, while maintaining the outer shape of the irradiated means, the light reflected through the irradiated means can illuminate and make the area stand out.

In any one of game machines ZI1 to ZI3, game machine ZI5 is characterized in that the direction of light reflected by said means to be irradiated is the same, but at least one of light quantity and color of light is different. .

According to the game machine ZI5, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines ZI1 to ZI3, it is possible to improve the attention to the light emitting mode of the means to be irradiated.

In any one of the game machines ZI1 to ZI5, the optical axis is configured to be able to irradiate the means to be irradiated with light in an irradiation mode in which the optical axis does not interfere with the movement trajectory of the displacement means arranged around the means to be irradiated. A gaming machine ZI6 characterized by comprising shielding light emitting means.

According to the game machine ZI6, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines ZI1 to ZI5, by irradiating the light from the non-shielding light emitting means, the light can be applied to the irradiated means regardless of the arrangement of the displacement means. , it is possible to prevent the irradiated means from being seen darker than necessary.

In any one of game machines ZI1 to ZI6, the irradiated means includes first irradiated means;
a second irradiation means configured to be arranged at a shielding position capable of shielding the light emitted from the light emitting means toward the first irradiation means, wherein the first irradiation means is the light emitting means; is smaller when the second irradiated means is placed at the shielding position than when the second irradiated means is not placed at the shielding position. A gaming machine ZI7 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine ZI7, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines ZI1 to ZI6, the first
It is possible to make it difficult for light to reach the means to be irradiated. That is, the effect of shielding light can be improved. It should be noted that the change in the area of the first irradiated means may occur only when the light is emitted from the light emitting means.

In any one of game machines ZI1 to ZI7, the light emitting means is configured to irradiate the means to be irradiated with light from a plurality of optical axes, and the means to be irradiated can intersect the plurality of optical axes at a predetermined position. A gaming machine ZI8 characterized by:

According to the game machine ZI8, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines ZI1 to ZI7, the amount of light received by the means to be irradiated is increased by increasing the optical axis of the light emitting means (for example, by increasing the number of LEDs). can be made

In any one of game machines ZI1 to ZI8, drive means configured to be capable of synchronously driving the irradiated means and displacement means disposed around the irradiated means, the irradiated means being displaced A gaming machine ZI9 is characterized in that a predetermined first surface faces the same side, and the displacement means is configured to cyclically displace the first position and the second position.
.

According to the game machine ZI9, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines ZI1 to ZI8, while suppressing a large change in the visibility of the irradiated means, the light emitting mode ( For example, the timing of switching between light and dark can be changed by changing the speed of the displacement means.

In addition, the displacement mode of the irradiated means is not limited at all. For example, sliding displacement or rotational displacement may be used. The rotational displacement may be, for example, rotational displacement occurring along a rotational axis along the display surface of the display device, or rotational displacement occurring along a rotational axis orthogonal to the display surface of the display area.

In any one of the game machines ZI1 to ZI9, at least one of the displacement means arranged around the irradiated means and the irradiated means has a surface on the light emitting means side, and the displacement means is arranged at the second position. A game machine ZI10 is characterized in that the traveling direction of the light emitted from the light emitting means can be changed to the side of the player accordingly.

According to the game machine ZI10, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines ZI1 to ZI9, the light emitted from the light emitting means is emitted depending on whether the displacement means is arranged at the first position or the second position. It is possible to increase the difference in the extent to which the light traveling toward the player side.

<Characteristic AA group> (Lever UP control)
An operation means that can be operated by a player at least in a first direction from a predetermined first position, and an effect execution means that can execute an effect corresponding to the operation based on the operation of the operation means. and a notification means capable of notifying an operation suggestion mode suggesting that the operation means is operated in the first direction; a specific effect setting means capable of setting a specific effect when the operating means is not positioned at a specific position.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a case where a privilege game was executed. Before the result of the lottery is notified, an operation effect for causing the player to operate the operation means is made executable as a suggestion effect for suggesting the result of the lottery, and the period until the result of the lottery is notified is set. There was something for the players to enjoy. Further, in the above-described game machine, there is a game machine that allows the player to operate the operating means in a state in which it is moved from the initial position in order to further enhance the performance effect (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-090780). In such a game machine, when the player does not operate the operating means even though the operating means is moved from the initial position, the operating means in the movable state is initialized regardless of the player's operation. There is a problem that it is necessary to execute the control to return to the position, and the performance effect is lowered and the interest of the game is lowered. It is an object of the above game machine to provide a game with improved interest in the game.

According to the gaming machine AA1, when the operation means is not positioned at the specific position in the state where the cancellation condition is established, the specific effect is set by the specific effect setting means, so the operation means is not positioned at the specific position. It is possible to provide the player with an effect that would otherwise be possible. Therefore, even if the operation means is not operated after the operation means is moved, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the presentation effect, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

In the game machine AA1, it is possible to have biasing means for always biasing the operating means toward the specific position, and to move the operating means from the specific position to the first position different from the specific position. and the operation means is positioned at the specific position by being operated in the first direction from the first position.

According to the gaming machine AA2, the player can move the operating means to the specific position by operating the operating means positioned at the first position. , and the act of moving the operation means to a specific position can be executed simultaneously. Therefore, there is an effect that the operation presentation can be performed smoothly, and the presentation effect can be enhanced.

The game machine AA2 has a second operating means operable by the player different from the operating means, and the specific effect includes at least a suggestion mode suggesting that the second operating means is operated. A gaming machine AA3 characterized by:

According to the game machine AA3, in addition to the effects of the game machine AA2, a specific effect including a suggestive mode suggesting the operation of the second operating means is executed, so that the second operating means can be easily operated. becomes possible. Therefore, the player can release the operation means and can easily move the operation means to the specific position by the biasing means, so that the operation means can be easily positioned at the predetermined position, and the operation presentation can be performed. There is an effect that the execution can be facilitated.

A gaming machine AA4 characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines AA1 to AA3, the gaming machine AA4 has a fixing means for fixing the operating means at the specific position so as to make it difficult to operate.

According to the game machine AA4, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines A1 to A3, when the operation means is positioned at a specific position, the movement of the operation means is restricted by the fixing means. It is possible to suppress that the operation means is operated regardless. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress unnecessary operation of the operating means, which may cause a failure.

Any one of the game machines AA1 to AA4 has a shooting means capable of shooting game balls based on the player's operation, and the specific effect includes a mode for prompting the player to shoot the game balls. A gaming machine AA5, characterized in that

According to the gaming machine AA5, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines AA1 to AA4, a mode for prompting the player to shoot the game ball is included as the specific effect, so when the specific effect is executed, A player can be actively encouraged to shoot a game ball. As a result, it is possible to execute an effect that makes it easier for the player to release the operating means, so that the operating means can be easily moved to a specific position, so that the operating means can be easily positioned at a predetermined position. This has the effect of making it easier to execute the operation effect.

<Characteristics AB group> (Combined control of pending PUSH and PUSH notice)
Acquisition means capable of acquiring information, storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, determination means capable of performing determination based on the information stored in the storage means, and determination means display means for displaying identification information for indicating the determination result; dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means; and identification patterns corresponding to the information stored in the storage means. In a gaming machine having an identification pattern display means for displaying on the display means, an operation means operable by a player, and an operation capable of executing an operation performance in which a performance mode is changed by operating the operation means. an effect execution means; an identification symbol effect execution means capable of executing an identification symbol effect that can change the mode of the displayed identification symbol by operating the operation means; a regulating means for regulating execution of the identification symbol performance in a period overlapping with the identification symbol performance.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a case where a privilege game was executed. Before the result of the lottery is notified, an operation effect for causing the player to operate the operation means is made executable as a suggestion effect for suggesting the result of the lottery, and the period until the result of the lottery is notified is set. There was something for the players to enjoy. (For example, JP-A-2013-090780). In addition, in the gaming machine having the above-described configuration, there is a game machine in which a plurality of conditions for executing operation effects are provided in order to further enhance the effects of the effects. In this case, there is a problem that a plurality of operation presentations are executed in duplicate, resulting in presentations that are difficult for the player to understand, thereby reducing the interest in the game. It is an object of the above game machine to provide a game with improved interest in the game.

According to the game machine AB1, since it is possible to regulate the execution of the operation performance and the identification symbol performance in the overlapping period by the regulating means, it is possible to prevent a plurality of operation performances from being executed redundantly. becomes possible. Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine AB1, the regulating means is configured to set a period during which the identification information is dynamically displayed for regulating the execution of the operation presentation mode, and to execute the identification symbol presentation within that period. The game machine AB2 is characterized by:

According to the gaming machine AB2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AB1, during the period during which the identification information is dynamically displayed, the regulation means sets a period for regulating the execution of the operation presentation mode, and identification is performed within that period. Since the symbol effect is executed, it is possible to smoothly execute a plurality of operation effects. Therefore, there is an effect that a plurality of operation presentations can be executed in an easy-to-understand manner for the player, and the presentation effect can be enhanced.

In the game machine AB1 or AB2, during the period in which the operation performance is executed, the mode variable performance in which the mode of the identification pattern is changed and displayed without the operation means being operated can be executed. A gaming machine AB3 characterized by:

According to the game machine AB3, in addition to the effects of the game machine AB1 or AB2, since the variable mode effect can be executed during the period in which the operation effect is executed, it is identified whether the variable mode effect is executed. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand whether the symbol presentation is to be executed, and there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

<Characteristic AC group> (Electric support end control by falling)
A variable that can be changed between a ball entry means into which a game ball can enter, a first state in which a game ball can enter the ball entry means, and a second state in which the ball entry is more difficult than in the first state. a member, an acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on the entry of a game ball into the ball entry means, a determination means capable of performing determination based on the information acquired by the acquisition means, and the determination means display means for displaying identification information for indicating the determination result by means of display means, dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information displayed on the display means, and for indicating the specific determination result of the display means When the identification information is displayed, a privilege giving means capable of giving a privilege advantageous to the player, a first probability as a probability of being determined as the specific determination result, and a second probability higher than the first probability a probability setting means capable of setting a probability, a determination means capable of executing a determination when the second probability is set by the probability setting means, and a specific determination result determined by the determination means. probability control means for setting the first probability based on; setting means capable of setting a specific game state in which the variable member is more likely to be varied from the second state to the first state than in a normal game state; and end condition determination means for determining whether an end condition for setting the normal game state is established when the special game state is set by the setting means, wherein the setting means determines that the second probability is It is configured to be able to set the special game state when it is set, and the end condition determination means determines the second probability in a state where a predetermined period has elapsed after the special game state is set. to the first probability, the game machine AC1 determines that the termination condition is established.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a case where a privilege game was executed. In order to make it possible to set a high-probability state in which it is easy to win and a low-probability state in which it is difficult to win as a game state, and to shift the game state to a low-probability state when the high-probability state is set. There was a lottery (so-called drop lottery). Furthermore, in the gaming machine described above, there is a configuration in which it is possible to set a specific game state in which the lottery of the game is likely to be executed and a normal game state in which it is difficult to execute the game. (For example, JP-A-2010-269007). However, in the above game machine, there is no relationship between the timing of transition from the high probability state to the low probability state and the timing of transition from the specific game state to the normal game state, and the player can understand the transition state of each game state. There is a problem that it becomes difficult and the interest in the game is reduced. It is an object of the above game machine to provide a game with improved interest in the game.

According to the gaming machine AC1, when the probability control means sets the first probability, the normal game state is set. can. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand the transition state of the game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the game machine AC1, the determination means executes the determination when a determination condition for the determination means to perform the determination is satisfied.

According to the game machine AC2, since it is possible to cause the determination means to perform determination when the determination condition is satisfied, it is possible to suppress excessive determination by the determination means when the second probability is set. be able to. Therefore, there is an effect that a proper game can be provided to the player.

In the gaming machine AC2, the determination means executes determination before dynamic display of the identification information is started based on the information acquired by the acquisition means. Machine AC3.

According to the game machine AC3, in addition to the effects of the game machine AC2, since the determination by the determination means is executed before the dynamic display of the identification information is started, the determination is executed based on the establishment of the determination condition. Dynamic display of the identification information for indicating the result of the determination made can be executed based on the determination result of the determining means. Thus, when the determination means determines that the determination result is a specific determination result, determination by the determination means, which is executed based on the establishment of the determination condition that triggered the determination, can be performed with the first probability. Therefore, there is an effect that a proper game can be provided to the player.

In any one of the game machines AC1 to AC3, the probability control means sets the first probability before starting the dynamic display of the identification information when the determination means determines that the specific determination result is obtained. A game machine AC4 characterized in that it is set.

According to the game machine AC4, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines AC1 to AC3, when the determination result of the determination means is a specific determination result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started by the probability control means. A first probability is set before . Therefore, it is possible to prevent the dynamic display of the identification information based on the second probability from being executed after a specific determination result is determined, so that a proper game can be provided to the player. effective.

In any one of the game machines AC1 to AC4, the setting means sets the normal game state based on the fact that the special game state is set and the specific determination result is determined. A gaming machine AC5 characterized by:

According to the game machine AC5, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines AC1 to AC4, even when the determination result of the determination means is a specific determination result, the normal game state is set by the setting means. When the normal game state is set by the means, it is difficult for the player to understand whether the determination result of the determination means is a specific determination result or whether the determination result of the determination means is a specific determination result. It can provide predictable fun. Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

<Characteristic AD group> (Burst interruption effect)
In a game machine having a performance executing means capable of executing a performance and a performance period determining means for determining the execution period of the performance executed by the performance executing means, the period during which the performance is executed by the performance executing means. a specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect by suspending at least a part of the effect being executed by the effect executing means, and the effect being executed by the effect executing means when the specific effect is executed A game machine AD1, characterized in that it has a setting means capable of changing and setting the effect to be interrupted corresponding to the state of the effect.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a case where a privilege game was executed. Then, before the lottery result is reported, a suggestive effect for suggesting the lottery result can be executed, and the player can enjoy the period until the lottery result is reported. Furthermore, there is a game machine that further enhances the effect of suggestive effects by executing various effects as suggestive effects at various timings (for example, JP-A-2014-209952). In such a gaming machine, even when one suggestive effect is being executed, another suggestive effect can be executed, so the effect is that the types of effects to be executed can be increased and the effect of the effect can be enhanced. be. However, the above-described gaming machine is configured to execute another suggestive effect regardless of the effect situation of the one suggestive effect being executed. There is a problem that the player's motivation to play is lowered. Furthermore, when the suggestive effect being executed indicates a predetermined process change (for example, story development), switching the suggestive effect causes the predetermined process change mode to end in the middle. Therefore, there is a problem that the player is more confused. It is an object of the above-described gaming machine to provide a game that enhances the interest of the game by executing various suggestive effects without confusing the player.

According to the game machine AD1, since the setting means can change the aspect of the performance interrupted by the execution of the specific performance, it is possible to prevent the player from being puzzled by the performance being interrupted during execution. can be suppressed. Therefore, in a gaming machine capable of overlapping and executing a plurality of effects, it is possible to provide an effect that is easy for the player to understand.

In the game machine AD1, the effect executed by the effect execution means includes a sound effect, and the setting means interrupts the sound effect depending on the state of the effect, The game machine AD2 is characterized in that it sets a case where the presentation by sound is not interrupted.

According to the game machine AD2, in addition to the effects of the game machine AD1, when the effect is interrupted, it is possible to set whether only the sound is continued or the sound is also interrupted. It is possible to change the mode of interrupting the performance according to the contents of the performance. Therefore, it is possible to make the player's degree of interest in the interrupted presentation different, and to enhance the presentation effect.

In this case, it may be determined whether or not to interrupt the output of the sound based on the effect mode of the specific effect and the effect mode of the interrupted effect, and the sound set as the effect mode of the specific effect When the type and the sound type set as the effect mode of the effect to be interrupted are the same sound type, the output of the sound may be interrupted. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the situation where the sound of the interrupted performance is output and confused with the sound set as the performance mode of the specific performance, resulting in the provision of an incomprehensible performance.

Further, it may be configured such that it is determined whether or not to interrupt the output of the sound according to the interruption timing of the presentation. In this case, if the remaining period of the effect to be interrupted is a predetermined period or less (for example, one second or less), even if the effect is interrupted, only the sound can be output to the end. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand that the performance has been interrupted.

In the game machine AD1 or AD2, a display means for dynamically displaying a plurality of identification symbols as one of the effects executed by the effect execution means, and a case where the identification symbols are displayed in a specific combination on the display means. and a privilege granting means for imparting a privilege that is advantageous to the player, wherein the setting means dynamically displays one of the plurality of identification symbols while the other identification symbols are displayed. The game machine AD3 is characterized in that the effect to be interrupted is changed and set depending on whether or not the ready-to-win display mode displayed in the combination that can be the specific combination is displayed. .

According to the game machine AD3, in addition to the effects of the game machine AD1 or AD2, the effect can be changed depending on whether the effect to be interrupted is before or after the ready-to-win display. That is, it is possible to change the aspect of the effect set by the setting means based on the timing of interrupting the effect executed by the effect executing means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from being puzzled by the interruption of the performance.

In the game machine AD3, the setting means interrupts the effect by the voice when the effect executed by the effect matter means is interrupted before the ready-to-win display mode is displayed, and the ready-to-win display mode is displayed. The game machine AD4 is characterized in that the presentation is set so as not to interrupt the presentation by the voice when the presentation is interrupted after is displayed.

According to the game machine AD4, in addition to the effects of the game machine AD3, if the production is interrupted before the ready-to-win display mode is displayed, the sound is interrupted, and if the production is interrupted after the ready-to-win display mode is displayed, It is possible to prevent audio from being interrupted. Therefore, even if the effect is interrupted after the ready-to-win display mode is displayed, the voice can be output continuously, so that the player is puzzled that the ready-to-win display mode has been canceled in the middle. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress that it will be lost.

<Characteristic AE group> (Button repeated hitting sound control)
In a gaming machine having an operation means operable by a player and an effect execution means for changing an effect based on the operation of the operation means, a first operation is performed each time the operation means is operated. A gaming machine AE1 is characterized by having voice control means capable of alternately outputting a sound and a second operation sound different from the first operation sound.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a case where a privilege game was executed. Before the result of the lottery is notified, an operation effect for causing the player to operate the operation means is made executable as a suggestion effect for suggesting the result of the lottery, and the period until the result of the lottery is notified is set. There is something that entertains players (for example, JP-A-2013-090780). Further, in the game machine described above, when the player operates the operating means, there are some that output an operation sound in order to notify that the operation has been correctly accepted. In such a game machine, it was possible to easily determine whether or not the player could operate the operation means by the output operation sound. When the next operation is performed during the period, that is, when the continuous hitting operation is performed, there is a problem that it becomes difficult for the player to hear the operation sound output corresponding to each operation. In addition, there is a problem that the game becomes monotonous if only one operation sound is output. It is an object of the above game machine to provide a game that enhances interest in the game by making it easier for the player to hear the output operation sound and by outputting the operation sound rich in variations.

According to the gaming machine AE1, when the player operates the operation means a plurality of times, the first operation sound and the second operation sound are alternately output. There is an effect that it is possible to output operation sounds that are rich in variations. In addition, since different operation sounds are output alternately, even when the operation means are operated at short intervals (intervals shorter than the output period of one operation sound), the player cannot operate the operation means. can be easily discriminated by the operation sound. Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the game machine AE1, the sound control means causes the first operation sound to be output during the first period, and before the first period elapses, an operation to output the first operation sound is performed. In this case, the gaming machine AE2 is characterized in that the first operation sound being output is stopped and the output of the first operation sound is newly started.

According to the gaming machine AE2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AE1, when the next first operation sound is output within the first period in which the first operation sound is output, the first operation sound being output is is stopped and a new first operation sound is output, there is an effect that the execution of a new operation can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

In the game machine AE1 or AE2, the sound control means causes the second operation sound to be output during the second period, and before the second period elapses, an operation to output the second operation sound is performed. The game machine E3 is characterized in that, when the second operation sound is output, the second operation sound being output is stopped and the output of the second operation sound is newly started.

According to the gaming machine AE3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AE1 or AE2, when the next second operation sound is output within the second period in which the second operation sound is output, the second operation sound being output is Since the operation sound is stopped and a new second operation sound is output, there is an effect that the execution of the new operation can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

In any one of the game machines AE1 to AE3, the effect executing means is configured to be capable of executing a continuous operation effect in which the mode of effect is varied in response to successively operating the operation means a plurality of times. A gaming machine AE4 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine AE4, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines AE1 to AE3, the continuous operation presentation is executed in response to the continuous operation of the operating means a plurality of times, thereby changing the presentation state. The player can be notified that the operating means has been operated by . This makes it possible to determine from the operation sound and the effect that the operation to the operating means has been accepted. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

<Characteristic AF group> (Holding notice)
Acquisition means capable of acquiring information, storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, determination means capable of performing determination based on the information stored in the storage means, and determination means display means for displaying identification information for indicating the determination result; dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means; and identification patterns corresponding to the information stored in the storage means. In a gaming machine having an identification pattern display means for displaying on the display means, an operation means operable by a player, and an operation capable of executing an operation performance in which a performance mode is changed by operating the operation means. a performance executing means; and an identification pattern performance execution means capable of executing an identification pattern performance capable of varying a mode of the displayed identification pattern by operating the operation means, The identification symbol effect execution means executes the identification symbol effect for two or more identification symbols when a plurality of identification symbols are displayed on the display means. .

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is a game machine such as a pachinko machine that variably displays symbols based on the winning of a game ball into a starting winning slot, and informs a player of the result of a lottery after the variative display is completed. Further, the lottery executed based on the winning of the game ball into the start prize winning slot can be held and stored a plurality of times, the held patterns corresponding to the number of reserved memories are displayed, and the displayed reserved patterns are displayed. There is one that is configured to be able to execute a pending notice effect that can notify information about the corresponding lottery in advance by using it (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-297071). In the above-described gaming machine, by changing the color and shape of the reserved symbols, by suggesting the degree of expectation that the variable display corresponding to the reserved symbols will be a big hit, the game can be played before the variable display is started. It made it possible to raise people's expectations. However, there is a problem that when the suspension notice performance is generated, it becomes difficult for the player to have expectations for the suspension symbols that are not subject to the suspension notice, and the player's desire to play is lowered. An object of the present invention is to solve the problems exemplified above.

According to the game machine AF1, as one identification symbol effect, the identification symbol effect is executed for two or more identification symbols. It is possible to reduce the number of identification patterns that are not targeted for design performance. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player's desire to play from declining, and to improve the interest in the game.

In the gaming machine AF1, there is pre-determination means capable of executing the determination before the information stored in the storage means is determined by the determination means, and the identification symbol effect execution means The gaming machine AF2 is characterized in that the aspect of the identification pattern is varied based on the result of discrimination by a pre-discrimination means.

According to the gaming machine AF2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AF1, the aspect of the identification symbol can be changed based on the determination result of the preliminary determination means, so that the player is interested in the performance result of the identification symbol performance. can have Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine AF1 or AF2, the identification symbol effect executing means changes the mode of the two or more identification symbols based on the establishment of a predetermined condition by operating the operating means. Characteristic game machine AF3.

According to the game machine AF3, in addition to the effects of the game machine AF1 or AF2, the aspect of two or more identification symbols can be changed based on the operation of the operation means, so the effect executed for the player There is an effect that it can increase the willingness to participate in

In any one of the game machines AF1 to AF3, the identification symbol effect executing means executes the identification symbol effect over a period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed a plurality of times, and the identification symbol effect is executed, the game machine AF4 has regulation period setting means for setting a regulation period during which the operation of the operating means is not valid.

According to the game machine AF4, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the game machines AF1 to AF3, the identification symbol effect is executed over the period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed a plurality of times, and furthermore, the identification symbol effect is executed. A restriction period is provided during the execution period during which the operation to the operating means is not determined to be valid. As a result, it is possible to entertain the player at which timing to operate the operating means, and there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

A gaming machine AF5 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine AF4, a specific performance is executed during a period other than the regulation period in a period during which the identification symbol performance is executed.

According to the gaming machine AF5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AF4, by executing the specific performance, during the identification symbol performance, the game can be determined whether or not it is currently in the regulation period in which the operation of the operation means is not valid. Since it is possible for the player to easily discriminate, there is an effect that an effect that is easy for the player to understand can be executed.

<Characteristic AG group> (Probable fall with small winning)
A variable that can be changed between a ball entry means into which a game ball can enter, a first state in which a game ball can enter the ball entry means, and a second state in which the ball entry is more difficult than in the first state. a member, an acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on the entry of a game ball into the ball entry means, a determination means capable of performing determination based on the information acquired by the acquisition means, and the determination means display means for displaying identification information for indicating the determination result by means of display means, dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information displayed on the display means, and for indicating the specific determination result of the display means When the identification information is displayed, a privilege giving means capable of giving an advantageous privilege to the player, a first probability as a discrimination probability of being discriminated from the specific discrimination result, and a second probability higher than the first probability a probability setting means capable of setting 2 probabilities, a normal game state as game states, and a specific game state in which the variable member is more likely to be varied from the second state to the first state than in the normal game state. and setting means capable of setting, wherein the probability setting means sets the first probability when a first transition condition is established in a state where the second probability is set. The setting means sets the normal game state when the second transition condition is established in the state where the specific game state is set, and the first transition condition and the second transition condition. and an effect execution means capable of executing an effect based on the effect mode set by the effect mode setting means. A gaming machine AG1 characterized by:

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a case where a privilege game was executed. In order to make it possible to set a high-probability state in which it is easy to win and a low-probability state in which it is difficult to win as a game state, and to shift the game state to a low-probability state when the high-probability state is set. There was a lottery (so-called drop lottery). Furthermore, in the gaming machine described above, there is a configuration in which it is possible to set a specific game state in which the lottery of the game is likely to be executed and a normal game state in which it is difficult to execute the game. (For example, JP-A-2010-269007). However, in the above game machine, there is no relationship between the timing of transition from the high probability state to the low probability state and the timing of transition from the specific game state to the normal game state, and the player can understand the transition state of each game state. There is a problem that it becomes difficult and the interest in the game is reduced. It is an object of the above game machine to provide a game with improved interest in the game.

According to the game machine AG1, since the performance is executed in different performance modes based on the order in which the first transition condition and the second transition condition are established, the current game situation is predicted based on the details of the performance to be executed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In the gaming machine AG1, the determination means can determine the special determination result different from the specific determination result, and the second transition condition is that the determination result of the determination means is the special determination result. The game machine AG2 is characterized by being established based on the following.

According to the game machine AG2, in addition to the effects of the game machine AG1, the second transition condition is satisfied based on the determination result of the determination means. , and cases in which the judgment results are disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be interested in the determination result of the determination means, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

The game machine AG2 has counting means capable of counting the number of times the determination result of the determination means becomes the special determination result in the state where the specific game state is set, and the second transition condition is the counting The gaming machine AG3 is characterized in that the second transition condition is established when the result of the counting by means is a predetermined counting result.

According to the gaming machine AG3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AG2, the second transition condition is established when the number of times the discrimination result of the discrimination means becomes the special discrimination result reaches a predetermined number of times. By discriminating that the result is a special discrimination result, it is possible to provide the enjoyment of predicting the period until the second transition condition is established, and to improve the amusement of the game.

In any one of the game machines AG1 to AG3, the effect mode setting means sets the effect mode based on the discrimination probability set by the probability setting means and the game state set by the setting means. A gaming machine AG4 characterized in that it sets the .

According to the game machine AG4, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the game machines AG1 to AG3, the effect mode is set based on the set discrimination probability and the game state. It is possible to provide the enjoyment of predicting the current game situation, and there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the game machine AG4, the effect mode setting means sets the first probability by the probability setting means, the first game state in which the normal game state is set by the setting means, and the normal game state by the probability setting means. The game machine AG5 is characterized in that the second probability is set, and the same effect mode is set in the second game state in which the normal game state is set by the setting means.

According to the game machine AG5, in addition to the effects of the game machine AG4, the first probability is set and the normal game state is set, and the second probability is set and the normal game state is set. Since the same effect mode is set in the second game state, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to distinguish between the first game state and the second game state. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting the current game situation, and to improve the interest in the game.

The gaming machine AG5 has a determination means capable of executing a determination when the second probability is set by the probability setting means, and the determination means is a determination means for the determination means to perform the determination. The game machine AC6 is characterized in that the determination is executed when the condition is satisfied, and the first transition condition is satisfied when the determination result of the determination means is a specific determination result. .

According to the gaming machine AC6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AG5, the determination by the determination means can be executed when the determination condition is satisfied. It is possible to suppress execution of determination. Therefore, there is an effect that a proper game can be provided to the player.

In the gaming machine AG5 or AG6, the performance mode setting means suggests the discrimination probability set by the probability setting means when a predetermined period of time has passed after the privilege is given by the privilege giving means. The game machine AC7 is characterized in that it sets a suggestive effect mode for the game.

According to the gaming machine AC7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AG5 or AG6, after the privilege is granted by the privilege granting means, the suggestive effect mode is set when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, so that the first game state is set. Alternatively, when the second game state is set, the player can be made aware of the current game state based on the contents of the suggestive effect mode. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to continue the game until the predetermined period elapses, and there is an effect that the operation of the game can be improved.

<Characteristic AH group> (Composite control development of pending PUSH and PUSH notice)
Acquisition means capable of acquiring information, storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, determination means capable of performing determination based on the information stored in the storage means, and determination means display means for displaying identification information for indicating the determination result; dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means; and identification patterns corresponding to the information stored in the storage means. In a game machine having identification pattern display means for displaying on said display means, an operation means operable by a player and an operation capable of executing an operation effect in which the effect mode is changed by operating the operation means. an effect execution means; an identification symbol effect execution means capable of executing an identification symbol effect that can change the mode of the displayed identification symbol by operating the operation means; a specific effect execution means capable of executing a specific effect based on the operation of the operation means during the overlapping period when the identification pattern effect is executed in the overlapping period. A gaming machine AH1 characterized by:

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a case where a privilege game was executed. Before the result of the lottery is notified, an operation effect for causing the player to operate the operation means is made executable as a suggestion effect for suggesting the result of the lottery, and the period until the result of the lottery is notified is set. There was something for the players to enjoy. (For example, JP-A-2013-090780). In addition, in the gaming machine having the above-described configuration, there is a game machine in which a plurality of conditions for executing operation effects are provided in order to further enhance the effects of the effects. In this case, there is a problem that a plurality of operation presentations are executed in duplicate, resulting in presentations that are difficult for the player to understand, thereby reducing the interest in the game. It is an object of the above game machine to provide a game with improved interest in the game.

According to the gaming machine AH1, when the operation effect and the identification symbol effect are executed in a period in which the operation effect and the identification symbol effect overlap, the specific effect is executed. It is possible to execute an easy-to-understand production. Therefore, there is an effect that the production effect can be enhanced and the amusement of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine AH1 has setting means for setting the operation effect or the identification symbol effect to be varied when the operation means is operated in the overlapping period, and the specific effect includes the operation AH2 is characterized in that it includes a suggestion mode indicating the operation effect or the identification pattern effect that is to be changed by operating means.

According to the gaming machine AH2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine AH1, it is possible to suggest to the player the production to be changed when the operation means is operated by the effect specific production produced by the gaming machine AH. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of executing an effect that is easy for the player to understand.

In the gaming machine AH1 or AH2, in the overlapping period, the number of operations for varying the operation performance or the identification symbol performance is set differently based on the operation of the operation means. A game machine AH3 characterized by

According to the gaming machine AH3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AA1 or AA2, the number of operations to be varied differs depending on whether the operation presentation or the variable operation presentation is executed alone or overlapped. It becomes possible to Therefore, there is an effect that the production effect of the specific production can be enhanced.

In any of the game machines AH1 to AH3, when the operation performance and the identification symbol performance are executed in overlapping periods, at least one of them is changed by operating the operation means a plurality of times. A gaming machine AH4 characterized in that it has a switching setting means for setting as follows.

According to the game machine AH4, in addition to the effects of the game machines AH1 to AH3, when the operation performance and the identification symbol performance are executed in overlapping periods, at least the number of operations corresponding to either one of the operation performances. can be increased, it is possible to easily comprehend that the specific effect is being executed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the specific effect from ending in a short period of time and the execution of an effect that is difficult for the player to understand.

In the game machine AH4, the game machine AH5 is characterized in that the specific effect includes one in which an execution period of the operation effect mode after being varied is set longer than a normal time.

According to the game machine AH5, in addition to the effects of the game machine AH4, during the specific effect, the execution period of the operation effect mode is set longer than during the normal time, so the specific effect is executed for the player. Since the fact can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner, there is an effect that the performance effect can be enhanced.

<Characteristic AI group> (Pending notice development)
Acquisition means capable of acquiring information, storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, determination means capable of performing determination based on the information stored in the storage means, and determination means display means for displaying identification information for indicating the determination result; dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means; and identification patterns corresponding to the information stored in the storage means. In a gaming machine having an identification pattern display means for displaying on the display means, an operation means operable by a player, and an operation capable of executing an operation performance in which a performance mode is changed by operating the operation means. a performance execution means, an identification pattern performance execution means capable of executing an identification pattern performance capable of varying the mode of the identification pattern being displayed by operating the operation means, and executing the identification pattern performance. an effect mode changing means for varying the effect mode of the identification symbol effect being executed based on the establishment of a predetermined change condition during the period in which the identification symbol effect is being executed. A gaming machine AI1 characterized by:

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is a game machine such as a pachinko machine that variably displays symbols based on the winning of a game ball into a starting winning slot, and informs a player of the result of a lottery after the variative display is completed. Further, the lottery executed based on the winning of the game ball into the start prize winning slot can be held and stored a plurality of times, the held patterns corresponding to the number of reserved memories are displayed, and the displayed reserved patterns are displayed. There is one that is configured to be able to execute a pending notice effect that can notify information about the corresponding lottery in advance by using it (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-297071). In the above-described gaming machine, by changing the color and shape of the reserved symbols, by suggesting the degree of expectation that the variable display corresponding to the reserved symbols will be a big hit, the game can be played before the variable display is started. It made it possible to raise people's expectations. However, since the content of the pending notice effect cannot be made to correspond to the change in the game situation after the pending notice effect has occurred, the player may have expectations for the content of the pending notice effect. There is a problem that it becomes difficult and lowers the desire to play. An object of the present invention is to solve the problems exemplified above.

According to the game machine AI1, when the change condition is established during execution of the identification symbol performance, the performance mode of the identification symbol performance being executed can be changed, so that the performance effect of the identification symbol performance can be enhanced. can. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the decrease in desire to play and improve the interest in the game.

In the game machine AI1, the change condition is established based on the fact that the new information is stored in the storage means during the period in which the identification symbol performance is executed. AI2.

According to the game machine AI2, in addition to the effects of the game machine A1, the production mode of the identification symbol production can be varied based on the fact that new information is stored in the storage means. Also in the above, there is an effect that the player can play the game with motivation to store new information in the storage means, and the operation of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine AI2, there is pre-determination means capable of executing the determination before the information stored in the storage means is determined by the determination means, and the identification symbol effect execution means The game machine AI3 is characterized in that the mode of the identification pattern is varied based on the result of discrimination by a pre-discrimination means.

According to the game machine AI3, in addition to the effects of the game machine AI2, the mode of the identification pattern is varied based on the determination result of the preliminary determination means, so that the identification pattern performance to be executed is made interesting. There is an effect that it is possible to enhance the production effect.

In the game machine AI3, the effect mode varying means varies the effect mode based on the determination result of the prior determination means for the information that triggers the establishment of the change condition. Machine AI4.

According to the game machine AI4, in addition to the effects of the game machine AI3, it is possible to vary the production mode of the identification symbol production based on the result of pre-determination of the newly stored information. Identification patterns in a wider range than the range of identification patterns indicated by the identification pattern presentation in . Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to easily make the player feel a sense of expectation for the identification symbol performance, and to improve the interest of the game.

In any one of the gaming machines AI1 to AI4, the identification symbol effect executing means executes the identification symbol effect over a period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed a plurality of times, and the identification symbol effect A game machine AI5, characterized in that it has regulation period setting means for setting a regulation period in which the operation of the operation means is not valid during a period in which is being executed.

According to the gaming machine AI5, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines AI1 to AI4, the identification symbol performance is executed over the period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed a plurality of times, and furthermore, the identification symbol performance is executed. A restriction period is provided during the execution period during which the operation to the operating means is not determined to be valid. As a result, it is possible to entertain the player at which timing to operate the operating means, and there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

A game machine AI6 characterized in that, in the game machine AI5, a specific effect is executed in a period other than the regulation period in a period during which the identification symbol effect is executed.

According to the game machine AI 6, in addition to the effects of the game machine AI 5, by executing the specific effect, during the identification pattern effect, the game can be determined whether it is currently in the regulation period in which the operation of the operation means is not valid. Since it is possible for the player to easily discriminate, there is an effect that an effect that is easy for the player to understand can be executed.

<Characteristic AJ group> (Button repeated tapping sound control)
In a game machine having an operation means operable by a player and an effect execution means for changing an effect based on the operation of the operation means, an operation sound is generated each time the operation means is operated. a sound control means capable of outputting at least a first operation sound and a second operation sound different from the first operation sound; and a type of the operation sound output by the sound control means can be set. a sound setting means; and a sound discrimination means capable of discriminating the type of the operation sound output by the sound control means, wherein the sound setting means determines the The gaming machine AJ1 is characterized in that it sets the type of operation sound.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a case where a privilege game was executed. Before the result of the lottery is notified, an operation effect for causing the player to operate the operation means is made executable as a suggestion effect for suggesting the result of the lottery, and the period until the result of the lottery is notified is set. There is something that entertains players (for example, JP-A-2013-090780). Further, in the game machine described above, when the player operates the operating means, there are some that output an operation sound in order to notify that the operation has been correctly accepted. In such a game machine, it was possible to easily determine whether or not the player could operate the operation means by the output operation sound. When the next operation is performed during the period, that is, when the continuous hitting operation is performed, there is a problem that it becomes difficult for the player to hear the operation sound output corresponding to each operation. In addition, there is a problem that the game becomes monotonous if only one operation sound is output. It is an object of the above game machine to provide a game that enhances interest in the game by making it easier for the player to hear the output operation sound and by outputting the operation sound rich in variations.

According to the gaming machine AJ1, it is possible to set a new type of operation sound based on the type of operation sound that is actually output. There is an effect that interest can be improved.

The game machine AJ2 in the game machine AJ1 is characterized in that the sound setting means sets a type of the operation sound different from the type of the operation sound determined by the sound determination means.

According to the game machine AJ2, in addition to the effects of the game machine AJ1, it is possible to set an operation sound of a type different from the type of operation sound that is actually output, so various operation sounds are output. By doing so, it is possible to execute a production rich in variations, and there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the game machine AJ1 or AJ2, the sound setting means sets the first operation sound when the sound determination means determines that the operation sound is not output. Machine AJ3.

According to the game machine AJ3, in addition to the effects of the game machine AJ1 or AJ2, the first operation sound is set by the sound setting means when the operation sound is not output. Therefore, it is possible to output an operation sound with a predetermined regularity to the operation of the operation means, and to enhance the presentation effect.

Any one of the gaming machines AJ1 to AJ3 has an operation status determination means capable of determining an interval between the operations performed on the operation means, and the voice setting means determines whether the determination result of the operation status determination means is The game machine AJ4 is characterized in that it is possible to set a third operation sound different from the first operation sound and the second operation sound when a specific situation determination result is obtained.

According to the game machine AJ4, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the game machines AJ1 to AJ3, the third operation sound can be set based on the determination result of the operation status determination means. The fun of operating the means can be provided. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine AJ4, the operation status determination means determines the specific status determination result when an interval between the operations performed on the operation means is shorter than a predetermined period. Amusement machine AJ5.

According to the game machine AJ5, in addition to the effects of the game machine AJ4, when the interval between the operations performed on the operation means is shorter than the predetermined period, the third operation sound is output. There is an effect that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be enhanced.

In any one of the game machines AJ1 to AJ5, the effect executing means executes the effect during a predetermined effect period, based on the determination result of the sound determining means when the effect period has elapsed. and a pseudo-sound setting means capable of setting a pseudo-sound after the performance period elapses, and the sound control means being capable of outputting the pseudo-sound set by the pseudo-sound setting means. A game machine AJ6 characterized by

According to the gaming machine AJ6, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines AJ1 to AJ5, a pseudo sound can be output based on the type of operation sound output when the presentation period elapses, so that the presentation period ends. There is an effect that the output control of the sound can be terminated without making the player feel uncomfortable regardless of the type of the operation sound being output at the time.

In the game machine AJ6, the pseudo-sound setting means sets a pseudo-sound corresponding to the second operation sound when the sound discrimination means determines a type of the operation sound different from the second operation sound. A gaming machine AJ7 characterized by:

According to the game machine AJ7, in addition to the effects of the game machine AJ6, when the type of the operation sound output when the presentation period elapses is other than the second operation sound, the second operation sound is responded to by a pseudo sound. Since the sound is output, the end sound of the sound output by the sound control means can be standardized. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide an effect that does not make the player feel uncomfortable.

In the gaming machine AJ7, a determination means capable of performing determination when a determination condition is satisfied, a display means for displaying identification information for indicating a determination result by the determination means, and a predetermined identification information on the display means. dynamic display means for dynamic display for a period of time, and the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means is stopped and displayed in a specific display mode indicating that the determination result of the determination means is a specific determination result. and a privilege granting means for granting a privilege based on the fact that the performance period is set during a dynamic display period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display, The pseudo-sound setting means, when the identification information dynamically displayed while the effect is being executed is statically displayed in the specific display mode, is more sensitive than when it is not statically displayed in the specific display mode. , a game machine AJ8 characterized in that it facilitates the setting of the pseudo voice.

According to the game machine AJ8, in addition to the effects of the game machine AJ7, a pseudo sound is produced during the dynamic display period of the identification information indicating that the determination result of the determination means is a specific determination result. Since it is made easy to output, there is an effect that the player can be interested in the end content of the voice output by the voice control means.

A gaming machine Z1 characterized in that the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine in any one of the gaming machines described above. Above all, the basic structure of a pachinko game machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, balls are shot into a predetermined game area, and the balls are ejected into actuating openings arranged at predetermined positions in the game area. For example, the identification information dynamically displayed on the display device is determined and stopped after a predetermined period of time, with the requirement of winning a prize (or passing through an activation opening). In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable prize winning device (specific prize winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow the balls to win prizes, and a value corresponding to the number of prizes won Values (including not only prize balls but also data written to magnetic cards, etc.) can be given.

A gaming machine Z2 characterized in that the gaming machine is a slot machine in any one of the gaming machines described above. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with variable display means for displaying the identification information in a fixed manner after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed, and the stop time and a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the definite identification information of is the specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

A gaming machine Z3 characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines described above, the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the integrated game machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, and an operation means for starting (such as an operation lever) The identification information starts to change due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed. a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information; the ball is used as a game medium; A gaming machine configured to require a predetermined number of balls at the start of dynamic display, and to pay out a large number of balls at the occurrence of a special game state.
<Others>
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is a game machine such as a pachinko machine that variably displays symbols based on the winning of a game ball into a starting winning slot, and informs a player of the result of a lottery after the variative display is completed. Further, the lottery executed based on the winning of the game ball into the start prize winning slot can be held and stored a plurality of times, the held patterns corresponding to the number of reserved memories are displayed, and the displayed reserved patterns are displayed. There has been proposed a configuration capable of executing a holding notice effect that can notify information about a corresponding lottery in advance using a drawing (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-297071).
However, there is a problem that the interest in the game is reduced.
The present technical idea has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and aims to provide a game that enhances the enjoyment of the game.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of Technical Thought 1 comprises acquisition means capable of acquiring information, storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, and information stored in the storage means. determining means capable of performing determination based on; display means for displaying identification information for indicating determination results by the determining means; and dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means; an identification pattern display means for displaying an identification pattern corresponding to the information stored in the storage means on the display means, an operation means operable by a player, and the operation means being operated. A period during which the identification symbol effect is executed by the identification symbol effect execution means capable of executing the identification symbol effect that can change the mode of the identification symbol being displayed, and the identification symbol effect execution means. and an effect mode variable means for varying the effect mode of the identification symbol effect being executed based on the establishment of a predetermined change condition.
In the gaming machine according to technical idea 2, in the gaming machine according to technical idea 1, the change is performed based on the fact that the new information is stored in the storage means during the period in which the identification symbol effect is being executed. Conditions are met.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 3 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 2, further comprising pre-determining means capable of executing the determination before the information stored in the storage means is determined by the determining means. and the identification symbol effect execution means varies the mode of the identification symbol based on the result of determination by the preliminary determination means.
<effect>
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 1, an acquisition means capable of acquiring information, a storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, and a determination based on the information stored in the storage means display means for displaying identification information for indicating the result of determination by the determination means; dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means; identification pattern display means for causing the display means to display an identification pattern corresponding to the stored information, an operation means operable by a player, and displayed by operating the operation means. During the period during which the identification pattern effect is being executed, a predetermined and an effect mode changing means for varying the effect mode of the identification symbol effect being executed based on establishment of a change condition.
Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in technical idea 1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the change condition is established based on the fact that the new information is stored in the storage means during the period in which the identification symbol effect is being executed.
Therefore, since new information is stored, the mode of presentation is changed, so that there is an effect that it is possible to raise expectations for the storage of new information.
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in technical idea 2, the following effects are achieved. That is, it has a preliminary determination means capable of executing the determination before the information stored in the storage means is determined by the determination means, and the identification symbol effect executing means is the preliminary determination means. The mode of the identification pattern is varied based on the result of discrimination by the .
Therefore, it is possible to recognize the result of determination in advance by the aspect of the identification pattern that is changed, and there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
114 display controller (part of dynamic display means)
81 Third pattern display device (display means)
203 RAM (storage means)
S208 Determination means S406, S413 Acquisition means
S1304 state setting means
Part of S3115 production execution means
S4312 selection means
Part of S4511 group switching means

Claims (3)

Acquisition means capable of acquiring information;
a storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means;
a determination means capable of performing determination based on the information stored in the storage means;
display means for displaying identification information for indicating the result of discrimination by the discrimination means;
dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means;
and identification pattern display means for causing the display means to display an identification pattern corresponding to the information stored in the storage means,
an operation means that can be operated by a player;
an identification symbol effect executing means capable of executing an identification symbol effect that can change the mode of the displayed identification symbol by operating the operation means;
effect mode variable means for varying the effect mode of the identification symbol effect being executed based on the fact that a predetermined change condition is established during the period in which the identification symbol effect is being executed by the identification symbol effect execution means; A game machine characterized by having: 2. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein said change condition is established based on the fact that said new information is stored in said storage means during the period in which said identification symbol effect is being executed. . a preliminary determination means capable of executing the determination before the information stored in the storage means is determined by the determination means;
3. A gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein said identification symbol effect executing means changes the mode of said identification symbol based on the determination result of said preliminary determination means.

Images